From 89341c9e5ed3ecdf8ec7c5a10b887a10e4025cb1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Daniel Messer Date: Tue, 28 Jul 2026 08:24:55 -0400 Subject: [PATCH] Staff Client Help v7.0 --- .../FrontMatter/LegalNotices.htm | 80 + .../Acquisitions/Acquisitions Topics.htm | 168 + .../Acquisitions_Shortcut_Keys.htm | 272 ++ ...ine_item_segment_credits_and_discounts.htm | 87 + ...scount_unit_price_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm | 88 + ...m_segment_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm | 93 + .../PAadjust/Adjusting_Prepaid_Invoices.htm | 83 + .../Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_a_subfund.htm | 83 + .../Add_donor_information_to_a_fund.htm | 99 + .../Adjust_fund_balances_manually.htm | 89 + ...gn_the_beginning_allocation_for_a_fund.htm | 89 + .../Acquisitions/PAbudget/Create_a_fund.htm | 99 + ...multiple_funds_in_Polaris_Acquisitions.htm | 99 + .../Acquisitions/PAbudget/Managing_Funds.htm | 152 + ...et_fund_encumbrance_expenditure_limits.htm | 94 + .../PAbudget/Setting_Up_Fiscal_Years.htm | 91 + .../Setting_Up_the_Acquisitions_Budget.htm | 87 + .../PAbudget/Transfer_money_between_funds.htm | 92 + .../PAbudget/View_fund_transactions.htm | 88 + ...iew_the_fiscal_year_and_fund_hierarchy.htm | 82 + .../PAbudget/View_the_fund_structure.htm | 83 + .../PAcancel/Cancel_a_line_item_segment.htm | 85 + ...single_line_item_from_the_PO_Line_Item.htm | 87 + .../PAcancel/Cancel_a_whole_order.htm | 95 + .../Cancel_one_or_more_whole_line_items.htm | 124 + .../PAcancel/Canceling_Orders.htm | 95 + ...nes_segments_to_another_purchase_order.htm | 96 + .../Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order.htm | 82 + ...te_a_canceled_purchase_order_line_item.htm | 83 + .../PAcancel/Print_cancellation_notices.htm | 93 + ...ncel_a_title_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm | 88 + ..._segment_of_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm | 85 + ...e_line_from_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm | 81 + .../Claim_all_items_on_a_purchase_order.htm | 78 + .../Claim_items_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm | 86 + ...Claim_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm | 83 + .../Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claiming.htm | 104 + .../PAclaim/Print_claim_notices.htm | 97 + .../Acquisitions/PAclaim/Stop_a_claim.htm | 79 + ...w_and_enter_an_items_claim_information.htm | 80 + .../PAclose/Close_a_purchase_order.htm | 82 + ...ms_on_a_standing_or_subscription_order.htm | 82 + .../Acquisitions/PAclose/Closing_Orders.htm | 85 + .../PAcredit/Credit_a_single_line_item.htm | 89 + .../PAcredit/Credit_an_entire_invoice.htm | 82 + .../Credit_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm | 96 + .../Credit_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm | 94 + .../PAcredit/Crediting_Invoices.htm | 86 + ...istribute_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm | 107 + .../Distribute_charges_on_an_open_invoice.htm | 109 + ...credits_discounts_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm | 98 + ...e_credits_discounts_on_an_open_invoice.htm | 92 + ...ting_Adjusting_Invoice_Charges_Credits.htm | 80 + .../PAdistribute/Distributing_Charges.htm | 82 + .../Distributing_Credits_Discounts.htm | 82 + .../Make_manual_adjustments_to_charges.htm | 79 + ...l_adjustments_to_credits_and_discounts.htm | 81 + .../Add_a_tax_dollar_amount_on_an_invoice.htm | 85 + ...e_line_linked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm | 89 + ..._invoice_line_linked_to_a_subscription.htm | 96 + ...line_unlinked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm | 101 + .../Add_general_information_to_an_invoice.htm | 84 + .../Add_invoice_lines_using_Rapid_Receipt.htm | 84 + ...nge_invoice_header_charges_and_credits.htm | 94 + ...egment_information_for_an_invoice_line.htm | 89 + .../PAinv/Adding_Invoice_Line_Items.htm | 88 + ...tem_or_specific_segments_to_an_invoice.htm | 95 + .../PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_line_item.htm | 81 + ...opy_an_invoice_to_create_a_new_invoice.htm | 84 + ...Copy_multiple_line_items_to_an_invoice.htm | 93 + .../PAinv/Create_a_miscellaneous_invoice.htm | 105 + ...te_an_invoice_without_a_purchase_order.htm | 97 + .../Acquisitions/PAinv/Creating_Invoices.htm | 107 + .../Acquisitions/PAinv/Invoicing.htm | 107 + .../Link_an_invoice_to_another_invoice.htm | 99 + ..._a_purchase_order_to_create_an_invoice.htm | 90 + .../Acquisitions/PAinv/Linking_Invoices.htm | 83 + ...ess_EDI_invoices_for_partial_shipments.htm | 152 + .../PAinv/Review_automatic_EDI_invoices.htm | 116 + .../PAinv/Unlink_a_linked_invoice.htm | 80 + .../PAinv/View_a_linked_invoice.htm | 80 + .../PAinv/View_all_funds_for_the_invoice.htm | 84 + .../Add_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm | 138 + ...for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm | 84 + ...ange_claiming_information_for_an_order.htm | 86 + ...nge_general_purchase_order_information.htm | 100 + ...lier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order.htm | 81 + .../Add_purchase_order_line_item_segments.htm | 93 + ...uctions_for_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm | 90 + .../Adding_PO_Line_Distribution_Grid.htm | 91 + .../Adding_Titles_to_a_Purchase_Order.htm | 86 + .../PAorder/Adjust_fund_limits.htm | 82 + .../Bulk_Update_Purchase_Order_Notes.htm | 107 + ...nation_Collection_PO_Line_Item_Segment.htm | 97 + ...Header_Fund_Material_Type_PO_Line_Item.htm | 112 + .../PAorder/Checking_for_Duplicate_Copies.htm | 98 + .../Copy_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm | 85 + ..._line_item_segments_within_a_line_item.htm | 84 + ...a_purchase_order_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm | 104 + ...hase_order_by_copying_a_purchase_order.htm | 86 + ...hase_order_with_a_template_or_workform.htm | 116 + .../PAorder/Creating_Purchase_Orders.htm | 169 + .../Importing_and_Ordering_Processes.htm | 151 + .../Modifying_PO_Line_Item_Statuses.htm | 87 + .../Acquisitions/PAorder/Ordering.htm | 152 + .../Placing_Holds_from_Purchase_Orders.htm | 82 + ...Print_multiple_purchase_orders_at_once.htm | 81 + ...rint_or_e-mail_a_single_purchase_order.htm | 86 + .../PAorder/Release_a_purchase_order.htm | 176 + ...asing_and_Transmitting_Purchase_Orders.htm | 125 + ...for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm | 91 + ...ansmit_a_purchase_order_electronically.htm | 96 + .../PAorder/Using_Polaris_Titles_to_Go.htm | 112 + .../View_all_funds_for_the_purchase_order.htm | 85 + ...for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm | 78 + .../PApay/Modify_the_payment_history.htm | 86 + .../PApay/Pay_an_entire_invoice.htm | 128 + .../Pay_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm | 88 + ...ay_one_or_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm | 104 + .../Acquisitions/PApay/Paying_Invoices.htm | 96 + .../PApay/Print_one_or_multiple_vouchers.htm | 80 + ...il_a_voucher_from_the_Invoice_workform.htm | 81 + .../PApay/Undo_the_invoice_payment.htm | 85 + .../PApay/View_the_invoice_charges.htm | 80 + .../View_the_invoice_payment_history.htm | 80 + ...orkslips_for_purchase_order_line_items.htm | 84 + ...rchase_order_invoice_line_item_segment.htm | 90 + ...purchase_order_line_from_the_Find_Tool.htm | 78 + .../PAreceive/Receive_a_whole_order.htm | 81 + ...he_purchase_order_or_invoice_line_item.htm | 82 + ...ceive_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm | 93 + .../Receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm | 89 + ...using_the_Advanced_Shipping_Notice_ASN.htm | 158 + .../PAreceive/Receiving_Orders.htm | 136 + ..._of_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm | 81 + ...pt_of_a_line_item_or_line_item_segment.htm | 83 + ..._to_receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm | 115 + ...ction_list_line_by_copying_a_line_item.htm | 89 + ...tles_to_a_selection_list_one_at_a_time.htm | 128 + ...ove_multiple_selection_list_line_items.htm | 94 + ...d_titles_to_an_existing_selection_list.htm | 93 + ...list_for_duplicates_and_print_a_report.htm | 81 + .../Close_or_reopen_a_selection_list.htm | 81 + ...y_a_single_selection_list_line_to_a_PO.htm | 139 + ...on_list_line_to_another_selection_list.htm | 89 + ...lection_list_lines_to_a_purchase_order.htm | 140 + ...n_list_lines_to_another_selection_list.htm | 89 + .../Copying_Selection_List_Lines.htm | 84 + ...ction_list_by_copying_a_selection_list.htm | 84 + ...ion_list_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 93 + ...a_selection_list_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm | 121 + .../PAselections/Creating_Selection_Lists.htm | 142 + .../PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list.htm | 82 + .../Delete_a_selection_list_line_item.htm | 90 + ...election_Lists_or_Selection_List_Lines.htm | 86 + ...ange_selection_list_line_item_segments.htm | 105 + .../PAselections/Merge_selection_lists.htm | 92 + ..._decision_on_selection_list_line_items.htm | 90 + .../PAselections/Rename_a_selection_list.htm | 82 + ...Selection_List_Fund_Allocations_Report.htm | 94 + .../Setting_Up_Selection_Lists.htm | 96 + .../PAstart/Acquisitions_Record_Levels.htm | 94 + .../PAstart/Acquisitions_Setup_Checklist.htm | 85 + .../PAstart/Acquisitions_Workflows.htm | 163 + .../Create_a_new_Acquisitions_record.htm | 102 + .../PAstart/Find_acquisitions_records.htm | 109 + .../PAstart/Link_to_other_records.htm | 83 + .../PAstart/Starting_an_Acquisitions_Task.htm | 82 + .../PAsuppliers/Add_supplier_address.htm | 99 + ...d_the_claiming_criteria_for_a_supplier.htm | 99 + .../PAsuppliers/Copy_a_supplier_record.htm | 88 + .../PAsuppliers/Copy_supplier_address.htm | 89 + .../Create_a_new_supplier_record.htm | 103 + ..._Copying_and_Deleting_Supplier_Records.htm | 94 + .../PAsuppliers/Delete_a_supplier_record.htm | 81 + .../Enter_supplier_EDI_ordering_data.htm | 112 + ...a_supplier_record_for_a_foreign_vendor.htm | 88 + .../Setting_Up_Supplier_Records.htm | 79 + ...y_exchange_rate_for_a_foreign_currency.htm | 90 + .../Copy_a_purchase_order_template.htm | 82 + .../Create_a_new_on-order_item_template.htm | 220 ++ .../Create_a_purchase_order_template.htm | 94 + ...ating_On-Order_Bibliographic_Templates.htm | 137 + .../Creating_On-Order_Item_Templates.htm | 219 ++ .../Creating_Purchase_Order_Templates.htm | 147 + .../Rename_a_purchase_order_template.htm | 89 + .../Setting_Up_Templates_for_Acquisitions.htm | 90 + .../Acquisitions_Administration_Reference.htm | 82 + .../Acquisitions_Permissions_Reference.htm | 203 ++ .../Acquisitions_Workflow_Permissions.htm | 1918 ++++++++++ .../Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqparamref.htm | 226 ++ .../Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqprofref.htm | 211 ++ .../Acquisitions_Administration.htm | 103 + .../Add_links_to_supplier_databases.htm | 90 + .../Add_or_enable_a_foreign_currency.htm | 100 + .../Administering_Foreign_Currencies.htm | 93 + .../Administering_Funds_Fiscal_Years.htm | 85 + .../Administering_Purchase_Orders.htm | 126 + .../PDKacquire/AutoCosePO.htm | 84 + .../PDKacquire/Define_claiming_reasons.htm | 92 + ...Enable_Titles_to_Go_for_your_suppliers.htm | 97 + ...nable_automatic_purchase_order_numbers.htm | 85 + ...Enable_brief_bib_record_display_in_PAC.htm | 79 + ...able_copy_segment_data_to_next_segment.htm | 80 + .../PDKacquire/Enable_the_Close_Purchas.htm | 84 + ...e_warning_if_no_Display_in_PAC_setting.htm | 79 + ...ination_branch_lists_by_parent_library.htm | 83 + .../Filtering_Branches_in_Line_Items.htm | 97 + .../Managing_Fiscal_Year_Rollovers.htm | 100 + .../PDKacquire/Managing_Receiving.htm | 134 + .../PDKacquire/Managing_Selection_Lists.htm | 101 + .../PDKacquire/Managing_Supplier_Records.htm | 110 + ..._as_processed_after_bulk_adding_titles.htm | 82 + .../Purge_invoices_and_purchase_orders.htm | 97 + .../Purging_Purchase_Orders_Invoices.htm | 221 ++ ...r_and_invoice_header_Other_charge_type.htm | 85 + .../PDKacquire/Replicatefiscalyear.htm | 86 + ...ain_material_type_in_copied_line_items.htm | 79 + .../PDKacquire/Runfiscalyearutilchecklist.htm | 102 + .../Select_systems_base_currency.htm | 89 + ...bulk_adding_titles_with_multiple_ISBNs.htm | 80 + ...int_workslips_option_for_ASN_receiving.htm | 85 + ...to_use_default_data_in_purchase_orders.htm | 83 + ...to_use_default_data_in_selection_lists.htm | 81 + ...Set_claim_cancellation_notice_defaults.htm | 118 + .../Set_the_currency_exchange_rate.htm | 102 + ...ult_payment_option_to_check_or_voucher.htm | 86 + .../Set_up_EDI_invoice_defaults.htm | 138 + .../Set_up_donation_fund_categories.htm | 92 + ...g_when_receiving_line_items_with_holds.htm | 81 + .../PDKacquire/Setting_Up_EDI_Ordering.htm | 316 ++ .../PDKacquire/Setting_Up_Titles_to_Go.htm | 119 + ...Acquisitions_Serials_Default_Directory.htm | 80 + ...defaults_for_selection_list_line_items.htm | 92 + ...ow_funds_are_displayed_in_Acquisitions.htm | 128 + ...ify_the_Acquisitions_default_directory.htm | 80 + .../Specify_the_EDI_FTP_transmission_mode.htm | 85 + ...der_item_data_prints_on_POLI_workslips.htm | 83 + .../Use_the_Fiscal_Year_Rollover_Utility.htm | 387 ++ .../PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/AdminLeap.htm | 97 + .../AdminLeap/LeapParamRef.htm | 119 + .../AdminLeap/Leap_Perm_Ref.htm | 115 + .../Find_Tool_Permissions_Reference.htm | 111 + ...e_locale_and_time_consistency_checking.htm | 103 + .../Ensuring_Locale_and_Time_Consistency.htm | 74 + .../Record_Ownership_Fields_Reference.htm | 258 ++ .../Polaris_SQL_Jobs_Reference.htm | 913 +++++ .../Staff_Client_Profiles_Reference.htm | 974 +++++ .../Administration_Tables_Reference.htm | 92 + .../Administration/PDTablesRef/DataTabRef.htm | 318 ++ .../PDTablesRef/NoticeTabRef.htm | 117 + .../PDTablesRef/PolicyTabRef.htm | 632 ++++ .../PDWebDef/Setting_a_Default_Web_Page.htm | 82 + ...efault_Web_page_for_Web_Browser_option.htm | 83 + .../PDabout/Administration_Topics.htm | 140 + .../Polaris_General_Permissions_Reference.htm | 81 + .../PDattribut/Add_a_table_entry.htm | 87 + .../Automatic_Staff_Client_Log-On.htm | 88 + .../PDattribut/Change_a_table_entry.htm | 85 + .../PDattribut/Delete_a_table_entry.htm | 85 + ...Editing_Parameters_Profiles_and_Tables.htm | 89 + .../PDattribut/Inherit_a_setting.htm | 89 + .../PDattribut/Reorder_table_entries.htm | 84 + .../Restore_an_inherited_setting.htm | 88 + ...arameters_and_profiles_from_a_workform.htm | 115 + ...rameters_or_profiles_from_the_Explorer.htm | 102 + .../Setting_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm | 132 + .../Setting_Staff_Client_Profiles.htm | 102 + .../Transmit_a_parameter_or_profile.htm | 93 + ...al_Cues_for_Staff_Client_Log-On_Server.htm | 121 + ...icy_tables_on_an_organization_workform.htm | 101 + ...ables_from_the_Administration_Explorer.htm | 91 + .../PDattribut/Working_with_Tables.htm | 137 + .../PDbarcodes/Barcode_Formats.htm | 130 + .../Define_a_patron_barcode_format.htm | 94 + .../Define_an_item_barcode_format.htm | 98 + .../PDbarcodes/Defining_Barcode_Formats.htm | 91 + .../PDbarcodes/Delete_a_barcode_format.htm | 86 + .../Saving_Records_with_Invalid_Barcodes.htm | 98 + ...significant_digits_for_patron_barcodes.htm | 98 + .../Add_a_new_collection_record.htm | 98 + .../PDcollections/Delete_a_collection.htm | 105 + .../List_collections_in_the_Explorer.htm | 98 + ...t_the_collections_assigned_to_a_branch.htm | 87 + ...Review_and_edit_collection_information.htm | 122 + .../Working_with_Collections.htm | 92 + .../PDdocs/Defining_Online_Documentation.htm | 78 + ...ecify_the_location_of_online_documents.htm | 93 + .../Choose_the_transactions_to_log.htm | 97 + .../Collecting_Transaction_Statistics.htm | 83 + .../PDlogging/Logging_Transactions.htm | 80 + .../Polaris_Transactions_Database.htm | 129 + ...culation_Statistics_to_Library_Journal.htm | 85 + .../PDlogging/Statistical_Summary_Report.htm | 135 + .../Add_a_contact_person_entry.htm | 103 + .../PDorgnizatn/Add_a_date_closed.htm | 93 + .../PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code.htm | 120 + .../PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code_format.htm | 104 + .../Add_an_organization_address_entry.htm | 100 + .../PDorgnizatn/Change_the_system_record.htm | 119 + .../Changing_System_Information.htm | 88 + .../PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Dates_Closed.htm | 95 + .../Identifying_Organization_Contacts.htm | 79 + .../PDorgnizatn/Register_a_branch.htm | 158 + .../Register_a_library_in_Polaris.htm | 107 + .../Setting_Organization_Addresses.htm | 83 + .../Setting_System_Postal_Codes.htm | 92 + ...etting_Up_Organization_Resource_Groups.htm | 109 + .../PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organizations.htm | 94 + .../View_system_information_and_licenses.htm | 89 + .../Viewing_Organization_Licenses.htm | 79 + .../PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Branches.htm | 83 + .../PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Libraries.htm | 86 + ...missions_to_staff_workstation_or_group.htm | 119 + .../PDpermiss/Copy_a_permission_group.htm | 100 + ...y_acquire_permission_group_memberships.htm | 85 + .../Copy_acquire_permission_settings.htm | 98 + .../Create_a_new_permission_group.htm | 111 + .../Grant_administration_permissions.htm | 2142 +++++++++++ .../PDpermiss/Granting_Permissions.htm | 97 + .../Manage_members_in_a_permission_group.htm | 112 + .../Manage_organization_security_settings.htm | 139 + .../Manage_permission_group_membership.htm | 92 + .../Managing_Organization_Security.htm | 88 + ...missions_for_Staff_Workstations_Groups.htm | 172 + ...ing_Permissions_with_Permission_Groups.htm | 127 + .../PDpermiss/Permission_Strategies.htm | 133 + .../Remove_directly-assigned_permissions.htm | 84 + ...ve_selected_group-assigned_permissions.htm | 109 + .../Setting_Administration_Permissions.htm | 95 + .../Administration_Shortcut_Keys.htm | 153 + .../PDrepserv/Security_for_Reports.htm | 88 + ..._a_proxy_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm | 84 + ...pecify_a_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm | 116 + .../PDrepserv/Specifying_Report_Servers.htm | 84 + .../PDresourc/Add_a_staff_member_record.htm | 136 + ...ify_IP_addresses_of_in-house_computers.htm | 98 + .../Identifying_In-House_Computers.htm | 89 + .../List_staff_members_in_the_Explorer.htm | 109 + .../List_workstations_in_the_Explorer.htm | 106 + .../PDresourc/Multi-Domain_System_Support.htm | 118 + .../PDresourc/Register_a_new_workstation.htm | 132 + ...eria_for_determining_in-house_location.htm | 108 + .../PDresourc/Setting_Up_Staff_Records.htm | 85 + ...p_Workstation_and_Staff_Member_Records.htm | 85 + .../PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstations.htm | 81 + .../Staff_and_Workstation_Reports.htm | 112 + .../PDsearch/Add_a_language_display_entry.htm | 98 + .../PDsearch/Add_an_initial_article_entry.htm | 97 + .../PDsearch/Defining_Leading_Articles.htm | 99 + .../PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_defaults.htm | 107 + .../Set_Find_Tool_filtering_by_permission.htm | 89 + ...nd_Tool_SQL_permission_blocks_override.htm | 96 + .../PDsearch/Setting_Find_Tool_Profiles.htm | 82 + .../PDsearch/Setting_Language_Display.htm | 76 + .../Setting_Search_Tool_Characteristics.htm | 84 + .../Viewing_Title_and_Author_Elements.htm | 79 + ...b-1_Use_Attributes_in_Polaris_Searches.htm | 848 +++++ .../Configuring_Usage_Settings_for_EDS.htm | 93 + ...ng_Database_Access_in_the_Staff_Client.htm | 79 + ...ine_a_Polaris_search_server_connection.htm | 107 + .../Define_a_Web_server_connection.htm | 90 + .../Define_a_telephony_server_connection.htm | 91 + .../Define_an_SQL_server_connection.htm | 107 + .../Enabling_EDS_Searching_in_PowerPAC.htm | 85 + ...abases_to_the_MuseGlobal_search_server.htm | 94 + ...subfields_for PAC_ODC_and_BR_databases.htm | 243 ++ ...he_Polaris_Database_as_a_Remote_Target.htm | 94 + ...s_PowerPAC_MuseGlobal_Federated_Search.htm | 114 + .../PDserver/PowerPAC_and_EDS.htm | 80 + .../Register_a_Polaris_server_in_Polaris.htm | 102 + .../PDserver/Registering_Polaris_Servers.htm | 106 + .../Registering_Remote_Resource_Servers.htm | 87 + ...eview_and_change_Web_server_parameters.htm | 112 + ...abase_availability_in_the_staff_client.htm | 102 + ...the_entire_PowerPAC_site_to_https_only.htm | 96 + .../PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_Service.htm | 131 + ...Global_and_Federated_Search_in_Polaris.htm | 80 + ...rd_for_a_Z39_50_or_other_search_server.htm | 123 + .../PDserver/Setting_Up_Server_Records.htm | 97 + .../Setting_Web_Server_Parameters.htm | 91 + .../Specify_Polaris_server_databases.htm | 94 + .../Accessing_Administration_Records.htm | 82 + .../PDstart/Find_an_administration_record.htm | 115 + .../PDstart/Managing_Record_Locks.htm | 90 + ...is_Administration_Records_and_Settings.htm | 84 + .../Use_the_Administration_Explorer.htm | 115 + ...iographic_Record_workform_opening_view.htm | 92 + ..._the_Item_Record_workform_opening_view.htm | 92 + ...he_Patron_Status_workform_opening_view.htm | 98 + .../Setting_Preferred_Workform_Views.htm | 84 + ...Groups_-_Default_Permissions_Reference.htm | 875 +++++ .../Cataloging_Bound-With_Materials.htm | 210 ++ .../Cataloging/Create_a_bound-with_group.htm | 93 + .../Cataloging/Finding_Cataloging_Records.htm | 201 ++ .../Getting_Started_in_Cataloging.htm | 84 + .../Configuring_Existing_Label_Types.htm | 132 + .../PDKlabels/Creating_Custom_Labels.htm | 153 + .../PDKlabels/Define_the_label_content.htm | 92 + .../PDKlabels/Set_up_existing_label_types.htm | 143 + .../PDKlabels/Setting_Label_Profiles.htm | 145 + .../PDKlabels/Setting_Up_Labels.htm | 89 + .../Setting_the_Default_Label_Printers.htm | 92 + .../PKCaroTool/Carousel_Toolkit.htm | 156 + .../PKTOMs/Type_of_Material_Codes_TOMs.htm | 1951 ++++++++++ .../Cataloging/PKabout/Cataloging_Topics.htm | 119 + .../PKchecking/Change_invalid_fields.htm | 89 + .../Check_MARC_format_from_a_workform.htm | 86 + ..._of_the_new_or_updated_authority_links.htm | 85 + .../Checking_Authority_Headings.htm | 118 + .../Checking_Cataloging_Records.htm | 83 + .../PKchecking/Checking_MARC_Format.htm | 84 + .../Checking_for_Duplicate_Records.htm | 91 + ...rom_authority_records_to_other_records.htm | 83 + .../Detect_duplicate_authority_records.htm | 94 + ...icate_or_replace_bibliographic_records.htm | 118 + ...rity_records_and_update_linked_records.htm | 89 + .../List_and_resolve_unlinked_headings.htm | 92 + .../PKcreate/Add_006_and_007_fixed_fields.htm | 98 + .../PKcreate/Add_a_MARC_tag_to_a_record.htm | 84 + .../Cataloging/PKcreate/Apply_a_macro.htm | 91 + .../PKcreate/Browse_Headings_Display.htm | 92 + .../Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_a_macro.htm | 91 + .../PKcreate/Change_the_MARC_Leader.htm | 102 + ...ose_characters_diacritics_from_a_chart.htm | 95 + .../PKcreate/Copying_MARC_Records.htm | 191 + .../Create_a_new_authority_record.htm | 121 + .../Create_a_new_bibliographic_record.htm | 148 + ...ating_Copying_and_Editing_MARC_Records.htm | 93 + .../PKcreate/Creating_MARC_Records.htm | 85 + .../Cataloging/PKcreate/Delete_a_macro.htm | 88 + .../Edit_the_008_field_in_a_MARC_record.htm | 96 + .../PKcreate/Editing_MARC_Records.htm | 122 + ...itics_characters_using_an_IME_keyboard.htm | 104 + ...ert_a_character_diacritic_using_a_code.htm | 90 + .../Insert_a_subfield_in_a_MARC_record.htm | 87 + .../PKcreate/Move_a_block_of_text.htm | 91 + .../Cataloging/PKcreate/Record_a_macro.htm | 127 + .../Automatic_Processes_During_Import.htm | 1914 ++++++++++ ...opy_a_Polaris_read-only_import_profile.htm | 109 + .../PKimport/Create_a_new_import_profile.htm | 101 + ..._import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm | 85 + .../PKimport/Delete_an_import_profile.htm | 87 + .../Cataloging/PKimport/Importing_Records.htm | 83 + .../PKimport/Modify_an_import_profile.htm | 97 + .../PKimport/Print_an_import_profile.htm | 86 + ...ort_reports_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm | 99 + ...t_import_options_for_authority_records.htm | 99 + ...port_options_for_bibliographic_records.htm | 176 + .../Set_import_options_for_item_records.htm | 129 + .../Set_import_options_for_record_sets.htm | 90 + .../PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles.htm | 126 + ..._Import_Profiles_and_Importing_Records.htm | 101 + ..._import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm | 90 + .../Use_Express_Import_to_import_records.htm | 110 + .../Use_Full_Import_to_import_records.htm | 120 + .../PKimport/Using_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm | 98 + .../View_import_jobs_in_the_queue.htm | 94 + ...existing_item_record_from_the_workform.htm | 80 + ...hange_existing_item_records_linked_bib.htm | 94 + .../Change_label_options_from_Cataloging.htm | 92 + .../PKitems/Changing_Item_Records.htm | 89 + ...eate_a_single_new_item_record_manually.htm | 86 + ...Create_a_subordinate_child_item_record.htm | 87 + .../Create_multiple_copies_of_a_label.htm | 89 + ...ltiple_item_records_for_a_single_title.htm | 188 + .../PKitems/Creating_Item_Records.htm | 108 + ...t_item_information_for_course_reserves.htm | 124 + .../Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_labels.htm | 100 + ...sitions_information_for_an_item_record.htm | 89 + ...r_basic_information_for_an_item_record.htm | 101 + ...ulation_information_for_an_item_record.htm | 104 + ...er_notes_and_blocks_for_an_item_record.htm | 102 + ...ics_or_special_characters_into_a_label.htm | 83 + ...subordinate_items_to_different_records.htm | 94 + .../PKitems/Maintaining_Item_Records.htm | 88 + ...om_Find_Tool_record_sets_or_list_boxes.htm | 83 + ..._and_pocket_labels_from_an_item_record.htm | 94 + .../PKitems/Printing_Cataloging_Labels.htm | 108 + .../Cataloging/PKitems/Save_a_label_file.htm | 86 + ...ms_circ_history_and_edit_float_setting.htm | 256 ++ ...er_item_records_linked_to_the_same_bib.htm | 82 + ...iew_the_linked_bib_from_an_item_record.htm | 81 + .../PKmanaging/Cleaning_Up_the_Catalog.htm | 91 + .../Configure_the_export_process.htm | 93 + ...reate_a_record_set_of_unlinked_records.htm | 99 + .../PKmanaging/Delete_authority_records.htm | 126 + .../Delete_bibliographic_or_item_records.htm | 207 ++ .../PKmanaging/Export_cataloging_records.htm | 129 + .../Exporting_Cataloging_Records.htm | 85 + .../PKmanaging/Maintaining_Your_Catalog.htm | 85 + .../PKmanaging/Purge_cataloging_records.htm | 114 + ...e_undelete_a_deleted_cataloging_record.htm | 90 + ...promotion_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 105 + ...new_record_from_the_Promotion_workform.htm | 97 + ...Creating_and_Editing_Promotion_Records.htm | 95 + ...r_demographic_targeting_for_promotions.htm | 91 + ..._or_edit_general_promotion_information.htm | 96 + ...erms_to_trigger_the_featured_resources.htm | 178 + .../Enter_the_resource_s_to_feature.htm | 82 + .../Find_an_existing_promotion_record.htm | 90 + .../PKpromo/Managing_Promotions.htm | 80 + .../PKquickref/Cataloging_Shortcut_Keys.htm | 427 +++ ...e_data_fields_in_bibliographic_records.htm | 111 + ...non-MARC_data_in_bibliographic_records.htm | 102 + ...e_the_006_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm | 99 + ...e_the_007_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm | 98 + ...e_the_008_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm | 104 + ...ge_the_Leader_in_bibliographic_records.htm | 104 + ...hanging_Multiple_Bibliographic_Records.htm | 109 + .../Changing_Multiple_Item_Records.htm | 295 ++ ...e_bulk_change_queue_and_run_the_report.htm | 87 + ..._a_URL_link_to_a_record_set_in_the_PAC.htm | 86 + ...ecord_set_from_an_authority_record_set.htm | 85 + ...bib_record_set_from_an_item_record_set.htm | 83 + ...ority_record_set_from_a_bib_record_set.htm | 85 + ...an_item_record_set_from_bib_record_set.htm | 83 + ..._titles_in_Community_content_carousels.htm | 79 + ...rd_set_titles_in_PAC_content_carousels.htm | 82 + .../Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Templates.htm | 126 + ...Open_an_existing_cataloging_record_set.htm | 88 + ...f_cataloging_records_from_a_record_set.htm | 93 + .../Retrieve_records_using_a_record_set.htm | 96 + .../Using_Cataloging_Record_Sets.htm | 102 + .../Working_With_Multiple_Records.htm | 86 + ...Cataloging_Options_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 102 + .../Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Records.htm | 198 ++ ...cataloging_records_in_library_database.htm | 104 + .../Methods_for_Adding_New_Records.htm | 105 + ...bliographic_records_from_the_Find_Tool.htm | 91 + ...reate_a_template_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 85 + .../Save_an_existing_record_as_a_template.htm | 84 + .../Using_Cataloging_Templates.htm | 91 + .../Add_or_change_a_MARC_validation_rule.htm | 122 + ...inistering_MARC_Validation_and_Display.htm | 109 + ...phic records with linked hold requests.htm | 78 + ...ion_of_items_with_linked_hold_requests.htm | 82 + .../Automatic Display in PAC Processing .htm | 88 + .../PDKcatalog/Cataloging_Administration.htm | 110 + ...phic_or_authority_deduplication_tables.htm | 396 +++ .../Change_the_sort_order_of_MARC_tags.htm | 86 + ...iographic_call_numbers_to_item_records.htm | 82 + ..._bibliographic_records_to_item_records.htm | 80 + .../PDKcatalog/Copying_Bib_Data_to_Items.htm | 105 + .../Define_a_conditional_validation_rule.htm | 95 + .../Deleting_MARC_Tags_from_Incoming_Bibs.htm | 134 + .../Displaying_Cataloging_Records.htm | 81 + ...ng_Warning_Messages_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm | 85 + ...eletion_for_bibs_from_remote_databases.htm | 86 + ...ble_headings_check_when_replacing_bibs.htm | 87 + ..._or_disable_automatic_MARC_re-indexing.htm | 88 + ...le_or_disable_the_Auto-suggest_feature.htm | 85 + ...ble_remote_automatic_authority_control.htm | 89 + .../Enable_the_Do_not_overlay_feature.htm | 86 + ...ation_when_duplicate_bibs_are_replaced.htm | 85 + ...g_Language_Display_Entry_in_Cataloging.htm | 78 + .../PDKcatalog/Managing_Authority_Control.htm | 86 + .../Managing_Auto-Search_Suggestions.htm | 90 + .../Managing_Duplicate_MARC_Records.htm | 89 + .../PDKcatalog/Managing_Importing.htm | 88 + .../PDKcatalog/Managing_MARC_Re-indexing.htm | 92 + .../PDKcatalog/Managing_Record_Deletion.htm | 84 + ...rk_embedded_holdings_data_as_processed.htm | 80 + ...tem_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy_table.htm | 107 + ..._the_Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy_table.htm | 101 + .../PDKcatalog/Retain_deleted_records.htm | 86 + .../PDKcatalog/Set_Cataloging_security.htm | 100 + ...ge_for_bibs_that_do_not_display_in_PAC.htm | 86 + ...ation_history_display_for_item_records.htm | 86 + ...number_of_files_in_a_single_import_job.htm | 81 + ...r_of_bibs_that_can_be_replaced_at_once.htm | 90 + ...of_copied_item_templates_to_in-process.htm | 88 + ...e_status_of_copied_items_to_in-process.htm | 82 + .../PDKcatalog/Set_up_automatic_Display.htm | 105 + .../Set_up_the_Subfield_9_cleanup_utility.htm | 97 + .../Set_warnings_for_changed_item_records.htm | 84 + .../Setting_Item_Copy_Save_Options.htm | 89 + ...Delete_Bib_Tags_Marked_with_Subfield_9.htm | 102 + .../Setting_the_Cataloging_Directory.htm | 82 + ...s_with_duplicate_barcodes_can_be_saved.htm | 83 + .../Specify_import_blackout_times.htm | 91 + ...taloging_sources_for_authority_records.htm | 111 + ..._delete_from_new_bibliographic_records.htm | 115 + ...retain_from_overlaid_authority_records.htm | 113 + ...cify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_bibs.htm | 128 + ...default_directory_for_Cataloging_files.htm | 85 + ...lving_scheme_for_item_holdings_records.htm | 84 + ...Specify_the_display_name_for_MARC_tags.htm | 93 + .../Turn_MARC_tag_name_display_on_or_off.htm | 95 + ...n_automatic_MARC_tag_sorting_on_or_off.htm | 81 + ...rn_automatic_MARC_validation_on_or_off.htm | 86 + ...w_the_Authority_Control_database_table.htm | 81 + .../Cataloging Workflow Permissions.htm | 1128 ++++++ .../Cataloging_Administration_Reference.htm | 82 + .../Cataloging_Permissions_Reference.htm | 77 + .../PDKcatref/catparamref.htm | 262 ++ .../Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catpermref.htm | 693 ++++ .../Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catprofref.htm | 632 ++++ ...ccess_the_event_import_profile_manager.htm | 81 + .../Appendix_A_Evanced_Mapping_to_Polaris.htm | 727 ++++ ...ocket_-_EventKeeper_mapping_to_Polaris.htm | 410 +++ .../Create_a_new_events_import_profile.htm | 134 + .../Delete_an_events_import_profile.htm | 86 + ...imported_events_for_a_modified_profile.htm | 82 + .../Edit_an_events_import_profile.htm | 88 + ...mporting_Events_for_Community_Profiles.htm | 94 + ...ents_Import_Profile_Manager_properties.htm | 106 + ...ccess_Points_for_Community_Information.htm | 253 ++ .../CommProfCampaigns/Campaign_Records.htm | 107 + .../Campaigns_for_Community_Promotions.htm | 86 + .../Create_a_campaign_record.htm | 115 + .../Delete_a_campaign_record.htm | 89 + .../Find_a_campaign_record.htm | 95 + .../Modify_a_campaign_record.htm | 81 + ...tion_for_Campaign-generated_promotions.htm | 83 + .../Access_ContentXChange.htm | 96 + .../Create_a_personalized_page.htm | 128 + ...Embed_a_content_carousel_in_a_Web_page.htm | 108 + .../Embed_a_search_box_in_a_Web_page.htm | 95 + ...ocial_connections_drawer_in_a_Web_page.htm | 98 + ..._an_ask-a-librarian_link_in_a_Web_page.htm | 95 + ...Embed_an_events_calendar_in_a_Web_page.htm | 93 + .../Using_ContentXChange.htm | 99 + .../Administering_ContentXChange.htm | 83 + ...rch_Results_Facets_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 94 + .../Community_Setup_for_PAC_Display.htm | 89 + ...ring_the_PAC_Community_Results_Display.htm | 93 + ...ommunity_information_entity_definition.htm | 3140 +++++++++++++++++ ...it_community_information_display_order.htm | 87 + ...Multilingual_Supp_for_Dashboard_Titles.htm | 91 + ..._community_elements_for_display_in_PAC.htm | 174 + ...C_community_information_search_options.htm | 147 + ...Set_Up_the_Narrow_Your_Search_Web_Part.htm | 109 + .../Set_Up_the_Related_Searches_Web_Part.htm | 112 + ...he_default_display_of_Community_Events.htm | 80 + ...up_Ask_Us_without_a_log_in_requirement.htm | 78 + ...t_up_the_Web_Server_for_ContentXChange.htm | 81 + ...tting_Community_Search_Options_for_PAC.htm | 90 + ...nity_information_display_configuration.htm | 90 + ...ecify_Community_Keyword_search_filters.htm | 250 ++ .../Specify_an_optional_marketing_message.htm | 83 + ...te_Labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_Parts.htm | 111 + .../CommProfPAC/setcommeventdays.htm | 80 + .../Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm | 99 + .../Community_Reports_Notice.htm | 87 + ...w_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm | 83 + ...a_Community_Record_in_the_Staff_Client.htm | 100 + .../Designate_a_community_representative.htm | 103 + ...community services in the staff client.htm | 88 + ..._a_community_event_in_the_staff_client.htm | 138 + ...munity_information_in_the_staff_client.htm | 105 + ...unity_social_links_in_the_staff_client.htm | 123 + ...community_subjects_in_the_staff_client.htm | 106 + ...munity_information_in_the_staff_client.htm | 91 + .../Generate_a_Community_report.htm | 97 + ...erate_a_Stale_Community_Records_notice.htm | 93 + ...community_record_from_the_staff_client.htm | 85 + ...t_a_community_record_from_the_workform.htm | 109 + ...mmunity_records_from_Find_Tool_results.htm | 93 + ..._Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm | 80 + ...a_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm | 95 + ..._record_statistics_in_the_staff_client.htm | 76 + .../CommProfStaffClient/campaignkeyw.htm | 471 +++ .../Access_your_organization_record.htm | 84 + .../Editing_Community_Records_in_PAC.htm | 110 + ...er_additional_organization_information.htm | 94 + .../Enter_info_about_your_orgs_services.htm | 89 + ..._subjects_related_to_your_organization.htm | 92 + .../CommRep/Enter_your_org_basic_info.htm | 134 + .../CommRep/Enter_your_org_events.htm | 99 + .../Enter_your_organizations_social_info.htm | 105 + .../Community Profile Topics.htm | 108 + .../Community_Profiles_Reference.htm | 204 ++ .../EContent_Circ_Holds_Transactions.htm | 147 + .../EContent_Item_Records.htm | 129 + .../EContent_in_the_Polaris_Staff_Client.htm | 79 + ...ded_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm | 86 + ..._an_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm | 93 + ...eactivate_an_Integrated_Vendor_Account.htm | 74 + .../EContentAxis360/Axis30MobPAC.htm | 81 + .../EContentAxis360/Axis360PowPAC.htm | 85 + .../Axis_360_Added_Expired_Copies.htm | 81 + .../Axis_360_EContent_Integration.htm | 106 + .../EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Import_Jobs.htm | 75 + .../Axis_360_MARC_Tags_-_Reference.htm | 93 + ..._an_Axis_360_integrated_vendor_account.htm | 109 + ...the_Axis_360_eContent_import_profile_s.htm | 85 + ...et_of_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent.htm | 82 + ..._360_eContent_bibs_downloaded_from_TS3.htm | 122 + ..._360_records_to_enable_the_integration.htm | 106 + ...ataloged_bibs_to_overlay_Axis_360_bibs.htm | 123 + ...Integrating_Existing_Axis_360_EContent.htm | 84 + ...ntegrating_New_Axis_360_Bibs_Pre-Order.htm | 87 + .../Overlaying_Axis_360_EContent_Bibs.htm | 76 + .../Patron_Access_to_Axis_360_EContent.htm | 89 + ...egrated_Axis_360_eContent_records_in_a.htm | 78 + ...the_Baker_Taylor_TS3_MARC_Profile_List.htm | 93 + ...e_eContent_item_templates_for_Axis_360.htm | 88 + ...ng_Up_Polaris_for_Axis_360_Integration.htm | 84 + ..._or_print_reports_for_Axis_360_imports.htm | 89 + ...isting_non-integrated_Axis_360_records.htm | 79 + .../3M_Added_Expired_Copies.htm | 82 + .../3M_EContent_Integration.htm | 138 + .../EContentCloudLib/3M_Import_Jobs.htm | 74 + .../EContentCloudLib/CloudLink730.htm | 88 + .../Create_3M_eContent_import_profile_s.htm | 76 + .../Create_a_3M_integrated_vendor_account.htm | 123 + .../Delete_the_3M_non-integrated_bibs.htm | 77 + ...ully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_3M_bibs.htm | 120 + .../Integrating_Existing_3M_EContent.htm | 74 + .../Integrating_New_3M_EContent.htm | 99 + .../MARC_Tags_in_3M_Bibs_-_Reference.htm | 118 + .../Overlaying_3M_eContent_Bibs.htm | 78 + .../Patron_Access_to_3M_EContent.htm | 94 + ...non-integrated_3M_bibs_in_a_record_set.htm | 81 + .../SetUpPrefVendAcctCloudLink.htm | 92 + ..._up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_3M.htm | 92 + .../Setting_Up_Polaris_for_3M_Integration.htm | 82 + .../EContentCloudLib/SharedCloudLinkinPAC.htm | 81 + ...e_jobs_or_print_reports_for_3M_imports.htm | 85 + ...Export_3M_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm | 81 + ...us_of_the_Polaris_API_consumer_service.htm | 81 + .../Polaris_API_Consumer_Service.htm | 82 + .../EContentExp/Expired_EContent.htm | 112 + .../Bulk-create_resource_entities.htm | 97 + ...non-integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm | 122 + ...from_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform.htm | 86 + .../Non-Integrated_EContent_in_Polaris.htm | 96 + ...te_OverDrive_eContent_import_profile_s.htm | 83 + ...an_OverDrive_integrated_vendor_account.htm | 143 + ...exported_OverDrive_non-integrated_bibs.htm | 78 + ...OverDrive_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm | 84 + ...taloged_bibs_to_overlay_OverDrive_bibs.htm | 114 + ...ntegrating_Existing_OverDrive_EContent.htm | 84 + .../Integrating_New_OverDrive_EContent.htm | 85 + .../EContentOverDr/OverDrMobPAC.htm | 94 + .../EContentOverDr/OverDrPPAC.htm | 88 + .../OverDrive_Added_Expired_Copies.htm | 84 + .../OverDrive_EContent_Integration.htm | 117 + .../EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Import_Jobs.htm | 74 + .../Overlaying_OverDrive_EContent_Bibs.htm | 75 + .../Patron_Access_to_OverDrive_EContent.htm | 100 + ...tegrated_OverDrive_bibs_in_record_sets.htm | 82 + ...sting_non-integrated_OverDrive_records.htm | 129 + ..._eContent_item_templates_for_OverDrive.htm | 101 + ...g_Up_Polaris_for_OverDrive_Integration.htm | 82 + ...or_print_reports_for_OverDrive_imports.htm | 85 + ...e_enriched_content_drawer_for_PowerPAC.htm | 84 + ...EContent_Availability_and_Holds_Counts.htm | 76 + ...ontent_Product_Page_Display_in_the_PAC.htm | 86 + .../EContent_in_PAC_Search_Results.htm | 78 + .../EContent_in_the_PAC_Patron_Account.htm | 87 + ...ched_content_for_Axis_360_or_OverDrive.htm | 82 + ...cess_to_eContent_using_resource_groups.htm | 103 + .../Managing_EContent_in_the_PAC.htm | 93 + ...nitiated_EContent_Circulation_from_PAC.htm | 97 + .../EContentPAC/Reqformatecont.htm | 79 + ...aning_branch_for_eContent_circulations.htm | 84 + .../Setting_up_a_digital-branch.htm | 75 + .../EContentPAC/preventOverDrivedwnlds.htm | 79 + .../EContentRecBooks/IntegNewRBdigECont.htm | 72 + .../IntegratingExistRBdigital.htm | 73 + .../EContentRecBooks/ManualImport.htm | 92 + .../PatronAccessRBdigital.htm | 166 + .../RecordedBooksEContent-934.htm | 96 + .../EContentRecBooks/SetUpVendRec.htm | 121 + .../SettingUpPolRBDigital.htm | 95 + ...onvert_a_resource_entity_to_an_856_tag.htm | 83 + ...ographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm | 73 + ...ographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm | 85 + .../Delete_a_resource_entity.htm | 81 + .../EContentResEnt/Resource_Entities.htm | 102 + .../Implementing_EContent_Integration.htm | 142 + .../OverDrive_and_Changed_Patron_Barcodes.htm | 84 + .../PolarisStaffHelp/Glossary.htm | 427 +++ .../INN-Reach Reports/INN-Reach Reports.htm | 124 + .../INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics.htm | 137 + .../INN-Reach Admin Log Files.htm | 75 + .../INN-Reach Admin Status Config.htm | 146 + .../INN-Reach Admin Tool.htm | 102 + .../INN-ReachPatServ.htm | 80 + .../AdditionalforBorrowing.htm | 119 + .../INNBorrowingLib/CheckIN.htm | 87 + .../INNBorrowingLib/ILLHoldCreated.htm | 125 + .../INN-ReachItemCircReturn.htm | 84 + .../INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemTemplate.htm | 106 + .../INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachVerPatron.htm | 171 + .../INNBorrowingLib/PolarisBorrowing.htm | 92 + .../INNBorrowingLib/ReceiveINNReachItem.htm | 102 + .../INNBorrowingLib/ReturnILLItem.htm | 89 + .../ContDataMapSpreadsheet.htm | 182 + .../INNDataMapProfile/INNDataProfile.htm | 130 + .../INNLendingLib/AdditionalforLending.htm | 98 + .../INNLendingLib/Patron_places_hold.htm | 107 + .../INNLendingLib/PolarisLending.htm | 92 + .../INNLendingLib/itemouttoremotepat.htm | 80 + .../INNLendingLib/itemreturnedbyrempat.htm | 92 + .../INNLendingLib/lendinglibprocitemhold.htm | 118 + .../INNOverview/GrantPermission.htm | 84 + .../INNOverview/INN-ReachParams.htm | 111 + .../INNOverview/PolarisINNOverview.htm | 109 + .../INNOverview/set_up_patron_template.htm | 87 + .../PolarisINN_P2P_Overview.htm | 74 + .../Adding_Menu_and_Submenu_Options.htm | 81 + .../Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Links.htm | 94 + .../Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Pages.htm | 86 + .../Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Themes.htm | 113 + .../Creating_Custom_Theme_for_PowerPAC.htm | 97 + .../Creating_custom_theme_for_Children.htm | 103 + .../PACCustom/Customizing_Layouts.htm | 375 ++ .../PACCustom/Customizing_Mobile_PAC.htm | 93 + .../PACCustom/Customizing_PAC_Themes.htm | 96 + .../PACCustom/Customizing_Pages.htm | 100 + .../Customizing_PowerPAC_Help_Links.htm | 95 + .../Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By.htm | 86 + ...stomizing_Search_By_Sort_By_Mobile_PAC.htm | 87 + .../External_Logon_PAC_Patron_Account.htm | 85 + .../PACCustom/Linking_to_INNReach_Central.htm | 174 + .../PACCustom/PAC_Customization.htm | 244 ++ .../PowerPAC_Directory_Structure.htm | 270 ++ .../Protecting_Mobile_PAC_Changes.htm | 77 + .../PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period.htm | 124 + .../PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period_code.htm | 102 + .../PDPloans/Calculating_Due_Dates.htm | 101 + .../PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Codes.htm | 79 + .../Defining_Loan_Period_Durations.htm | 80 + .../PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Periods.htm | 88 + .../PDPloans/Set_an_end-of-term_due_date.htm | 124 + .../Setting_End-of-Term_Due_Dates.htm | 83 + .../PDPpatacct/Block_and_Allow_Settings.htm | 120 + .../Charging_for_Patron_Registration.htm | 116 + .../Date_Sources_in_Patron_Records.htm | 111 + ...Define_patron_custom_data_fields_PCDFs.htm | 110 + .../Defining_Patron_Account_Features.htm | 111 + .../PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Codes.htm | 85 + .../Display_or_suppress_payment_methods.htm | 98 + .../PDPpatacct/Enable_reading_histories.htm | 98 + ...atron_codes_for_specific_organizations.htm | 91 + .../Filter_patron_custom_data_fields.htm | 92 + .../PDPpatacct/Modify_or_delete_a_PCDF.htm | 95 + ..._ID_Information_from_Transaction_Files.htm | 434 +++ .../PDPpatacct/Replace_the_default_photo.htm | 88 + ...to_waive_fines_at_check-out_or_renewal.htm | 88 + .../Set_blocks_for_patron_record_deletion.htm | 96 + .../Set_defaults_pat_associations.htm | 87 + ..._user-defined_fields_for_organizations.htm | 98 + ...ion_default_values_and_required_fields.htm | 151 + ...onal_patron_duplicate_detection_fields.htm | 83 + ...et_options_for_deleting_patron_records.htm | 108 + .../Set_patron_accounting_options.htm | 104 + .../Set_patron_registration_fees.htm | 86 + .../Set_up_patron_identification_purging.htm | 100 + ...ron_messages_in_Polaris_Administration.htm | 145 + ...Registration_Defaults_and_Requirements.htm | 77 + ...ng_Options_for_Deleting_Patron_Records.htm | 106 + .../Setting_Patron_Accounting_Options.htm | 96 + .../Setting_Patron_Duplicate_Detection.htm | 89 + .../Setting_Patron_Registration_Lists.htm | 99 + ...istration_Required_Fields_and_Defaults.htm | 201 ++ .../Setting_Payment_Method_Options.htm | 95 + .../Setting_Reading_History_Options.htm | 78 + ..._User_Defined_Fields_For_Alternate_IDs.htm | 82 + .../Setting_Up_Patron_Custom_Data_Fields.htm | 78 + .../PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Messages.htm | 93 + .../PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Photos.htm | 99 + .../Setting_Up_User-Defined_Fields.htm | 123 + ...Specify Options for Associated Patrons.htm | 86 + ...user-defined_fields_for_patron_records.htm | 141 + .../PPBorrowBM/Borrow_By_Mail_Circulation.htm | 88 + .../PPBorrowBM/Borrow_by_Mail_Reports.htm | 79 + .../Bulk-Processing_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm | 123 + .../Place_a_Borrow_by_Mail_request.htm | 118 + .../Placing_Borrow_by_Mail_Requests.htm | 93 + ...rocess_individual_Borrow_by_Mail_items.htm | 118 + ...essing_Individual_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm | 74 + .../PPabout/Patron Services topics.htm | 113 + .../PPblocks/Add_a_patron_block.htm | 84 + .../PPblocks/Delete_a_patron_block.htm | 83 + .../Manage_item_blocks_at_circulation.htm | 89 + .../Manage_patron_blocks_at_circulation.htm | 100 + .../Resolve_a_Verify_Patron_block.htm | 95 + .../PPblocks/Working_with_Blocks_Stops.htm | 98 + .../PPboundwith/Bound-With_Holds.htm | 140 + ..._Notices,_Slips,_Receipts_and_Displays.htm | 77 + .../Circulating_Bound-With_Materials.htm | 93 + ...tion_at_Shelf-Ready_Materials_check-in.htm | 88 + ...tem_information_or_barcode_at_check-in.htm | 103 + .../Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-In.htm | 86 + .../Check-in items with missing parts.htm | 92 + ...held_item_with_changed_pickup_location.htm | 86 + .../PPckin/Check_in_new_shelf-ready_items.htm | 105 + .../PPckin/Checking_In_Shelf-Ready_Items.htm | 84 + ...al_check-in_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm | 121 + .../PPckin/Doing_Bulk_Item_Check-Ins.htm | 118 + .../PPckin/Doing_Normal_Item_Check-Ins.htm | 118 + .../PPckin/Resolve_a_fine_at_check-in.htm | 152 + .../PPckin/Tracking_In-House_Item_Use.htm | 94 + .../PPckout/Assign_a_special_loan_period.htm | 114 + .../PPckout/Check-Out_and_Renewal.htm | 85 + .../PPckout/Check_out_an_item.htm | 181 + .../PPckout/Checking_Out_Items_to_Patrons.htm | 87 + .../Checking_Out_Uncataloged_Items.htm | 82 + .../Create_an_on-the-fly_item_at_checkout.htm | 99 + .../Create_on-the-fly_item_templates.htm | 98 + ...ess-register_a_new_patron_at_check-out.htm | 89 + ..._items_from_the_Patron_Status_workform.htm | 101 + .../PPckout/Renewing_Items.htm | 88 + .../Reset_due_dates_of_checked-out_items.htm | 86 + .../PPckout/Resolve_a_fine_at_renewal.htm | 107 + .../Resolve_fines_and_renewal_charge.htm | 82 + .../PPckout/Viewing_Item_Records.htm | 89 + .../PPckout/check_out_blocks_msgs.htm | 127 + ...e_Patron_Status_workform_-_Claims_view.htm | 89 + .../Patron_Services/PPclaims/Make_a_claim.htm | 91 + .../Manage items with missing parts.htm | 85 + .../Reset_patrons_total_claims_count.htm | 83 + .../PPclaims/Working_with_Claims.htm | 88 + ...instructors_to_a_course_reserve_record.htm | 110 + .../Circulating_Reserved_Items.htm | 99 + .../Create_a_new_course_reserve_record.htm | 122 + .../Create_a_reserve_item_template.htm | 90 + ...eate_and_use_a_course_reserve_template.htm | 100 + .../PPcourseres/Deactivate_a_reserve_item.htm | 88 + .../PPcourseres/Managing_Course_Reserves.htm | 94 + ...d_items_on_reserve_from_an_item_record.htm | 106 + ...n_reserve_from_a_course_reserve_record.htm | 116 + ...ged_items_on_reserve_from_a_record_set.htm | 90 + .../Place_uncataloged_material_on_reserve.htm | 120 + .../PPcourseres/Placing_Items_on_Reserve.htm | 114 + .../Remove_an_item_from_reserve.htm | 89 + .../Reports_for_Course_Reserves.htm | 82 + .../Send_course_reserve_notices.htm | 95 + .../Sending_Course_Reserve_Notices.htm | 113 + .../Setting_Up_Course_Reserve_Records.htm | 101 + .../PPcourseres/Taking_Items_Off_Reserve.htm | 77 + ...r_a_reserve_item_to_a_different_course.htm | 84 + ...course_reserve_statistics_from_the_PAC.htm | 76 + .../PPholds/Cancel_hold_requests.htm | 99 + .../PPholds/Daily_Request_Processing.htm | 88 + .../PPholds/Delete_hold_requests.htm | 108 + .../Deny_items_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm | 95 + ...lay_hold_requests_by_selected_criteria.htm | 104 + .../PPholds/Display_patron_hold_requests.htm | 97 + ...nked_to_a_bibliographic_or_item_record.htm | 113 + .../PPholds/Displaying_Hold_Requests.htm | 99 + .../PPholds/Edit_hold_request_data.htm | 116 + .../PPholds/Editing_Hold_Requests.htm | 81 + .../Fill_a_hold_request_at_circulation.htm | 109 + .../Fill_a_hold_request_with_Fill_Now.htm | 101 + ...ill_hold_requests_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm | 114 + .../PPholds/Filling_Holds_at_Circulation.htm | 83 + .../PPholds/Find_hold_requests.htm | 100 + .../PPholds/Group_patron_hold_requests.htm | 91 + .../PPholds/Grouping_Patron_Hold_Requests.htm | 81 + .../Hold_Request_Messages_and_Blocks.htm | 110 + .../PPholds/Holds_Processing_Reports.htm | 79 + .../Manage_Cancelled_hold_requests.htm | 83 + .../Manage_Not-supplied_hold_requests.htm | 88 + .../Manage_Unclaimed_hold_requests.htm | 89 + ...pending_hold_requests_Requests-to-Fill.htm | 92 + .../PPholds/Managing_the_Holds_Queue.htm | 118 + ..._requests_-_multiple_patrons_one_title.htm | 119 + ..._requests_-_multiple_titles_one_patron.htm | 112 + ...ce_single_or_consecutive_hold_requests.htm | 138 + .../PPholds/Placing_Hold_Requests.htm | 88 + .../PPholds/Reactivate_hold_requests.htm | 88 + .../Set a hold request to Ask me later.htm | 91 + ...ctivate_Holds_in_Bulk_from_Patron_Acct.htm | 78 + .../PPholds/Transfer_a_hold_request.htm | 100 + .../PPholds/Ungroup_patron_hold_requests.htm | 81 + .../PPholds/Working_with_Hold_Requests.htm | 97 + .../Cancel_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm | 85 + .../Convert_hold_requests_to_ILL_requests.htm | 95 + .../PPill/Create_ILL_item_templates.htm | 113 + .../Creating_Interlibrary_Loan_Requests.htm | 83 + .../Delete_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm | 88 + ...y_ILL_requests_in_the_Requests_Manager.htm | 102 + .../PPill/Edit_an_ILL_request.htm | 88 + .../PPill/Exporting_ILL_Requests_to_OCLC.htm | 85 + .../PPill/Find_ILL_requests.htm | 98 + .../PPill/Interlibrary_Loan_Reports.htm | 82 + .../PPill/Receive_an_ILL_item.htm | 117 + .../PPill/Receiving_Interlibrary_Loans.htm | 83 + .../PPill/Returning_Interlibrary_Loans.htm | 90 + .../PPill/Working_with_Interlibrary_Loans.htm | 102 + .../PPinventory/Taking_an_Item_Inventory.htm | 95 + .../PPlost/Declare_an_item_lost.htm | 136 + .../Manage_a_billed_item_that_is_not_Lost.htm | 79 + .../PPlost/Managing_Lost_Items.htm | 97 + ...ve_a_lost-and-paid_item_at_circulation.htm | 102 + ..._a_lost-and-unpaid_item_at_circulation.htm | 106 + .../Check_out_items_from_the_pick_list.htm | 97 + .../Creating_Outreach_Patron_Profiles.htm | 85 + ...ic_record_to_outreach_services_patrons.htm | 94 + .../Outreach_Services_Processing.htm | 89 + .../PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Reports.htm | 83 + ...Process_items_for_an_individual_patron.htm | 163 + .../Process_items_for_multiple_patrons.htm | 198 ++ .../Processing_Outreach_Services_Items.htm | 87 + .../Set_the_outreach_patrons_del_options.htm | 89 + .../Set_the_outreach_patrons_prefs.htm | 110 + .../Set_up_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm | 109 + ...ctivate_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm | 88 + .../Working_with_Reader_Ratings.htm | 105 + .../Bulk-Changing_Patron_Records.htm | 138 + .../Bulk_change_patron_records.htm | 117 + .../View_the_Bulk_Change_Report.htm | 78 + .../Checking_In_Quick-Circ_Items.htm | 77 + .../Checking_Out_Quick-Circ_Items.htm | 122 + .../Circulating_Ephemeral_Items.htm | 84 + .../PPquickcirc/Create_a_quick-circ_item.htm | 102 + .../PPquickcirc/Creating_Quick-Circ_Items.htm | 76 + ...View_modify_or_delete_quick-circ_items.htm | 90 + ...ron_Services_Circulation_Shortcut_Keys.htm | 503 +++ ...to_terminal_server_environment_and_RDP.htm | 97 + .../Add_a_new_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm | 104 + .../Add_an_address_to_a_patron_record.htm | 96 + .../Add_general_data_to_a_patron_record.htm | 112 + ...d_notification_data_to_a_patron_record.htm | 105 + .../PPregstr/Create_a_patron_record.htm | 108 + .../Create_and_edit_patron_associations.htm | 112 + .../Create_or_edit_a_patron_status_note.htm | 97 + .../Creating_Patron_Mailing_Labels.htm | 108 + .../Creating_and_Editing_Patron_Records.htm | 150 + .../Delete_a_patron_record_manually.htm | 99 + .../PPregstr/Deleting_Patron_Records.htm | 85 + .../PPregstr/Merge_patron_records.htm | 92 + .../PPregstr/Merging_Patron_Records.htm | 131 + .../PPregstr/Patron_Associations.htm | 90 + .../PPregstr/Patron_Registration.htm | 97 + .../PPregstr/Patron_Registration_Reports.htm | 78 + .../PPregstr/Posting_Patron_Messages.htm | 107 + ...ove_items_from_patrons_reading_history.htm | 93 + ...Scan_drivers_license_enter_patron_info.htm | 103 + .../Search_for_patron_records_by_PCDF.htm | 84 + .../PPregstr/Set_the_address_update_term.htm | 91 + .../Start_patrons_reading_history.htm | 84 + .../Stop_clear_patrons_reading_history.htm | 88 + .../Updating_Address_and_Expiration_Term.htm | 92 + ...d_an_existing_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm | 90 + ...Fs_in_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm | 81 + .../PPregstr/View_patron_reading_history.htm | 82 + .../PPregstr/Working_with_Patron_Photos.htm | 86 + .../Working_with_Reading_Histories.htm | 90 + ...nd_patron_services_and_related_records.htm | 99 + .../PPstart/Finding_Patron_Records.htm | 257 ++ .../Getting_Started_in_Patron_Services.htm | 82 + .../PPstart/Patron_Services_Records.htm | 88 + .../Patron_Services_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 96 + ...s_the_account_data_for_a_patron_record.htm | 83 + .../PPuseacct/BillChargeManu.htm | 84 + .../Create_a_charge_from_the_Account_view.htm | 105 + .../PPuseacct/Create_a_credit_manually.htm | 95 + ...splay_a_collection_summary_and_history.htm | 85 + .../Display_and_print_notice_histories.htm | 92 + .../Display_and_print_the_Items_Out_list.htm | 115 + ...Display_completed_account_transactions.htm | 88 + .../PPuseacct/Display_transaction_history.htm | 91 + .../PPuseacct/Displaying_All_Items_Out.htm | 75 + ...e_fines_on_currently_checked_out_items.htm | 93 + .../PPuseacct/Generate_an_item_record_set.htm | 92 + .../Make_deposit_in_patrons_acct.htm | 89 + .../PPuseacct/Managing_Credit_Card_Orders.htm | 84 + .../Patron_Status_and_Accounting.htm | 97 + .../PPuseacct/Patrons_in_Collection.htm | 90 + .../Pay_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm | 110 + .../Processing_Charges_and_Payments.htm | 93 + .../PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_amount.htm | 100 + ...ment_from_Patron_Status_-_Account_view.htm | 102 + ..._credit_completed_payment_transactions.htm | 103 + ...emove_a_patron_account_from_collection.htm | 89 + .../Return_forfeit_or_credit_deposits.htm | 109 + ...ond_Level_Collection_Agency_Management.htm | 82 + .../PPuseacct/Secure_a_patron_record.htm | 104 + ...ts_for_fines_and_fees_-_PayPal_Payflow.htm | 145 + ...for_fines_and_fees_-_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm | 102 + .../PPuseacct/Taking_Credit_Card_Payments.htm | 84 + .../View_credit_card_transactions.htm | 87 + ...orders_and_refund_credit_card_payments.htm | 112 + .../Viewing_Patron_Financial_Accounts.htm | 94 + .../Waive_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm | 115 + .../PPuseacct/Working_with_Deposits.htm | 82 + .../PPuseacct/collagenwkflw.htm | 84 + .../release_a_secured_patron_record.htm | 85 + .../PPuseacct/seclistviews.htm | 83 + .../Patron_Services/PPuseacct/secpatrecs.htm | 78 + .../PPuseacct/securepatrecover.htm | 98 + .../take_credit_card_pay-EnvisionWare.htm | 117 + ...rkstations_Receipts_Sounds_Smart_Cards.htm | 83 + ...auto-cut_problem_for_hold_pickup_slips.htm | 87 + .../Set_receipt_printer_message_text.htm | 87 + ...orkstation_to_print_receipts_and_slips.htm | 141 + .../Setting_Circulation_Audio_Signals.htm | 114 + ...ing_Up_Receipt_Printing_from_Workforms.htm | 85 + ...ing_the_Workstation_for_Smart_Card_Use.htm | 83 + .../PPworkstn/circ_receipts.htm | 98 + .../Set_up_Borrow_by_Mail_circulation.htm | 142 + .../Setting_Up_Borrow_by_Mail_Circulation.htm | 79 + .../E-Commerce_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm | 142 + .../PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_EnvisionWare.htm | 140 + .../E-Commerce_PayPal_Payflow_Pro.htm | 85 + .../E-Commerce_with_PayPal_Payflow_Link.htm | 118 + ...e_with_Payments_Gateway_Secure_Web_Pay.htm | 111 + ...ass_Point_of_Sale_credit_card_payments.htm | 106 + ...Y_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm | 90 + ...e_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm | 140 + .../PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Google_reCAPTCHA.htm | 99 + ...ayPal_Payflow_Pro_credit_card_payments.htm | 519 +++ ...k_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm | 137 + ...y_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm | 152 + ...he_PayPal_Payflow_Link_gateway_account.htm | 116 + ...et_up_the_Payments_Gateway_SWP_account.htm | 122 + .../PDPCreditCard/Setting_Up_E-Commerce.htm | 117 + ...Using_Class_Point_of_Sale_with_Polaris.htm | 89 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpayExpress.htm | 89 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpayPACs.htm | 98 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpaydonat.htm | 87 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpayexclinhou.htm | 74 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpaymanager.htm | 73 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpaypartial.htm | 72 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpayprivandref.htm | 80 + .../PDPCreditCard/creditpaystaff.htm | 93 + .../PDPCreditCard/e-commerce-with-jetpay.htm | 82 + .../PDPCreditCard/handling-refunds-jetpay.htm | 89 + .../PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-account.htm | 78 + .../set-up-jetpay-processing.htm | 90 + ...edit_Card_Payment_Parameters_Reference.htm | 82 + .../Add_a_hold_note_to_incoming_requests.htm | 92 + ...porary_records_when_item_is_checked_in.htm | 87 + ...IP_medium_types_to_item_material_types.htm | 232 ++ ...ser_privileges_to_Polaris_patron_codes.htm | 86 + .../Mapping_NCIP_Data_to_Polaris_Data.htm | 82 + ...y_the_NCIP_fiscal_action_types_mapping.htm | 101 + .../Modify_the_NCIP_payment_types_mapping.htm | 104 + .../Modify_the_SIP_payment_types_mapping.htm | 109 + .../PDPNCIP/NCIP_Administration.htm | 82 + ...on_of_holds_in_response_to_ILL_message.htm | 84 + .../Select_an_institutional_patron.htm | 94 + ...lized or decentralized NCIP processing.htm | 97 + .../PDPNCIP/Setting_NCIP_Parameters.htm | 86 + .../Specify_the_NCIP_user_privilege_type.htm | 90 + .../Patron_Services_Parameters_Reference.htm | 1303 +++++++ .../Circulation_Permissions_List.htm | 1067 ++++++ ...d_Patron_Services_Workflow_Permissions.htm | 1126 ++++++ .../Patron_Services_Profiles_Reference.htm | 299 ++ .../Request_Parameters_Reference.htm | 158 + ...tron_Services_Administration_Reference.htm | 90 + .../Patron_Services_Administration_Topics.htm | 158 + .../Add_an_item_block_description.htm | 94 + ..._select_and_order_patron_block_entries.htm | 118 + ...d_Blocking_for_Estimated_Accrued_Fines.htm | 247 ++ ...Defining_Circ_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm | 93 + .../PDPblocks/Defining_Item_Blocks.htm | 78 + ...Defining_Loan_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm | 122 + .../Defining_Material_Type_Group_Limits.htm | 78 + ...ng_Patron-Initiated_Circulation_Blocks.htm | 82 + .../Defining_Patron_Block_Descriptions.htm | 86 + ..._modify_loan_and_request_limit_entries.htm | 111 + ...ated_circulation_and_ebook_circulation.htm | 132 + .../PDPblocks/Set_up_blocks_for_claims.htm | 84 + ...eck-out_limits_by_material_type_groups.htm | 121 + ...accrued_fine_calculations_and_blocking.htm | 109 + ...t_view_fields_for_patron_and_item_data.htm | 92 + ...data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm | 91 + ...data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm | 92 + .../Setting_Up_Circulation_Workforms.htm | 82 + .../Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Workform.htm | 78 + .../Setting_Up_the_Check_Out_Workform.htm | 83 + .../Collection_Processing_Reports.htm | 88 + ..._the_Collection_Agency_Synchronization.htm | 85 + .../Managing_Collection_Agency_Services.htm | 83 + .../PDPcollect/Using_a_Collection_Agency.htm | 138 + ...hedule_information_for_course_reserves.htm | 125 + .../Add_courses_for_course_reserves.htm | 116 + .../Add_departments_for_course_reserves.htm | 99 + ..._schools_divisions_for_course_reserves.htm | 100 + .../Set_default_values_for_reserve_items.htm | 129 + .../Setting_Course_Reserve_Options.htm | 78 + .../Setting_Course_Reserve_Tables.htm | 84 + .../PDPcourse/Setting_Up_Course_Reserves.htm | 86 + .../PDPfines/Add_a_fee_description_entry.htm | 98 + .../PDPfines/Add_a_fine_amount.htm | 110 + .../PDPfines/Add_a_fine_code.htm | 89 + .../PDPfines/Calculating_Overdue_Fines.htm | 110 + .../Charging_for_Checkout_and_Renewal.htm | 215 ++ .../PDPfines/Defining_Fee_Descriptions.htm | 87 + .../PDPfines/Defining_Fines_and_Fees.htm | 99 + .../PDPfines/Overdue_Fines_on_Lost_Items.htm | 103 + .../Set_a_maximum_overdue_fine_balance.htm | 90 + ..._descriptions_for_branch-level_display.htm | 97 + .../PDPfines/Set_lost_item_charge_options.htm | 108 + ...the_lost_item_recovery_default_actions.htm | 126 + .../Set_the_replacement_charge_defaults.htm | 93 + ...et_up_charges_for_checkout_and_renewal.htm | 115 + .../PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Amounts.htm | 79 + .../PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Codes.htm | 77 + .../Setting_Lost_Item_Recovery_Defaults.htm | 82 + .../Setting_Replacement_Fee_Defaults.htm | 76 + ...gnate_collections_as_eligible_to_float.htm | 118 + .../Designating_Floating_Collections.htm | 75 + ...oating_Collections_Processing_Overview.htm | 127 + .../Floating_Collections_Reports.htm | 78 + .../Floating_Collections_Setup_Examples.htm | 80 + .../Floating_Collections_Troubleshooting.htm | 84 + ...or_the_same_title_a_branch_can_receive.htm | 102 + .../PDPfloating/Limit_the_number_of_floa.htm | 96 + ..._and_profiles_for_floating_collections.htm | 118 + ...the_branches_to_receive_floating_items.htm | 90 + ...t_the_material_types_that_cannot_float.htm | 90 + .../PDPfloating/Setting_Branch_Parameters.htm | 81 + ...ing_Home_and_Receiving_Branch_Policies.htm | 80 + .../Setting_Up_Floating_Collections.htm | 94 + ...c_Process_Lost_Missing_Withdrawn_Items.htm | 85 + .../PDPitems/Defining_Material_Types.htm | 84 + .../Displaying_Items_Last_Borrower.htm | 87 + .../Enable the auto-renew process.htm | 78 + .../Item_Record_Circulation_Settings.htm | 87 + ...tem transition to missing or withdrawn.htm | 104 + ...p missing item transition to withdrawn.htm | 89 + .../PDPitems/Set_shelving_status_options.htm | 104 + .../PDPitems/Setting_Shelving_Status.htm | 97 + .../Understanding_shelving_status_period.htm | 109 + ...ion_status_names_and_edit_descriptions.htm | 111 + .../PDPitems/Viewing_Circulation_Statuses.htm | 108 + .../PDPmedia/Enable_the_media_dispenser.htm | 117 + ...Dispenser_-_Errors_and_Troubleshooting.htm | 92 + .../PDPmedia/Media_Dispenser_ Circulation.htm | 111 + .../Notification_Parameters_Reference.htm | 165 + .../Delivering_Notices_By_E-mail.htm | 87 + .../Delivering_Notices_by_Text_Message.htm | 107 + .../PDPnotices/Fine_Notices.htm | 76 + .../PDPnotices/Managing_Notification.htm | 188 + ...due_Notices_Bills_and_Combined_Notices.htm | 120 + ...t_overdue_bill_fine_or_request_notices.htm | 142 + .../Print_patron_billing_statements.htm | 119 + .../PDPnotices/Printing_Notices.htm | 75 + .../PDPnotices/Reminder_Notices.htm | 85 + ...cond_Pick-Up_Cancelled_Request_Notices.htm | 118 + .../Send_e-mail_special_announcements.htm | 87 + ...t_up_e-mail_notification_prerequisites.htm | 81 + .../Set_up_e-mail_reminder_notices.htm | 132 + .../PDPnotices/Set_up_fine_notices.htm | 127 + ...ods_e-mail_options_and_export_location.htm | 117 + ...due_notices_bills_and_combined_notices.htm | 155 + ...cond_pick-up_cancelled_request_notices.htm | 132 + ...e_carriers_for_phone_and_text_messages.htm | 105 + .../PDPoffline/CopyMDBFilesAuto.htm | 86 + .../PDPoffline/Copy_files__server_manu.htm | 97 + .../Managing_Offline_Circulation.htm | 91 + .../Manually_update_the_offline_files.htm | 80 + .../PDPoffline/Set_up_auto_offline.htm | 89 + .../PDPoffline/Set_up_man_upload.htm | 100 + ...w_and_upload_offline_transaction_files.htm | 126 + .../PDPoffline/Working_Offline.htm | 78 + .../PDPoffline/enable_the_sql_job.htm | 81 + .../PDPoffline/log_file.htm | 81 + .../PDPoffline/set_up_auto_offline_param.htm | 93 + .../PDPoffline/upload_rep_warn.htm | 149 + ..._next_service_date_at_normal_check_out.htm | 85 + ...to_include_in_outreach_selection_lists.htm | 98 + ..._statuses_for_outreach_selection_lists.htm | 90 + .../Set_outreach_delivery_mode_options.htm | 99 + ..._outreach_patron_disability_selections.htm | 99 + ...t_outreach_patron_equipment_selections.htm | 99 + .../Set_pick_list_column_heads.htm | 90 + ...ng_history_limits_for_outreach_patrons.htm | 101 + .../Set_up_outreach_delivery_routes.htm | 134 + .../PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_reader_ratings.htm | 86 + ...st_content_and_print_method_for_reader.htm | 95 + .../Setting_Delivery_Options.htm | 78 + .../Setting_Outreach_Items_Options.htm | 80 + .../Setting_Outreach_Patrons_Options.htm | 80 + .../Setting_Up_Outreach_Services.htm | 96 + .../Setting_Up_Reader_Ratings.htm | 88 + .../PDPreceipts/Enable_hold_call_slips.htm | 88 + ...ReStick_Printers_Hold_In-Transit_Slips.htm | 119 + .../Set_Items_Out_receipt_options.htm | 92 + .../Set_check-in_receipt_options.htm | 89 + .../Set_check-out_receipt_options.htm | 106 + .../PDPreceipts/Set_fine_receipt_options.htm | 96 + .../PDPreceipts/Set_hold_slip_options.htm | 101 + .../Set_in-transit_slip_options.htm | 95 + ...ash_drawer_only_for_cash_fine_receipts.htm | 90 + .../Set_receipt_printer_control_codes.htm | 125 + .../Set_up_You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm | 89 + .../PDPreceipts/Set_up_eReceipts.htm | 102 + .../PDPreceipts/Set_up_hold_pickup_slips.htm | 146 + .../Setting_Up_Circulation_Receipts.htm | 82 + .../Setting_Up_Printed_Receipts.htm | 89 + .../PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_eReceipts.htm | 239 ++ .../You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm | 107 + .../Add_a_not-supplied_reasons_entry.htm | 98 + .../Change_pickup_location_from_ PAC.htm | 84 + ...e_hold_pickup_location_from_Mobile_PAC.htm | 97 + ...Statuses_and_Hold_Not_Supplied_Reasons.htm | 82 + .../Edit_hold_request_status_descriptions.htm | 105 + .../PDPrequests/HoldsroutingSeq.htm | 98 + .../PDPrequests/Managing_Hold_Requests.htm | 94 + .../Restrict_holds_on_specific_items.htm | 101 + .../Set_Holds_options_Alerts_and_blocks.htm | 144 + ...Holds_options_Charge_for_hold_requests.htm | 89 + .../Set_Holds_options_Define_Terms.htm | 104 + ...et_Holds_options_Enable_patrons_pickup.htm | 99 + ...nabling_Item_Status_Restrictions_First.htm | 137 + ..._Holds_options_Exclude_Pickup_branches.htm | 102 + .../PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_ILL.htm | 620 ++++ ...s_options_Preferred_borrowers_branches.htm | 86 + ...options_Queue_and_Trapping_preferences.htm | 137 + .../Set_Holds_options_RTF_processing.htm | 128 + ...ng_Up_Holds_and_ILL_Request_Processing.htm | 102 + .../PDPrequests/Setting_Up_ILL_Requests.htm | 105 + .../PDPrequests/allowrenewitemholds.htm | 88 + .../PDPrequests/definepickupbranch.htm | 91 + .../PDPrequests/first_avail_copy_serials.htm | 82 + .../PDPrequests/first_avail_multipart.htm | 84 + .../holds_onorder_multivolsets.htm | 81 + .../PDPrequests/holdsrouttable.htm | 120 + .../Add_a_self-check_material_type_entry.htm | 113 + .../Set_SIP_self-check_parameters.htm | 207 ++ ...ment_types_and_Polaris_payment_methods.htm | 88 + .../Setting_Up_SIP_Self-Check_Circulation.htm | 83 + .../Self-Check_Parameters_Reference.htm | 908 +++++ ...atron_Services_parameters_and_profiles.htm | 100 + .../PDPstart/Set_circulation_security.htm | 103 + .../Setting_Circulation_Permissions.htm | 88 + ...Circulation_Policy_and_Database_Tables.htm | 79 + ...atron_Services_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm | 77 + .../PDPstart/overrideblks.htm | 73 + .../Add_a_patron_statistical_code.htm | 92 + .../PDPstats/Add_an_item_statistical_code.htm | 96 + .../Defining_Item_Statistical_Codes.htm | 79 + .../Defining_Patron_Statistical_Codes.htm | 79 + .../Setting_Statistical_Codes_for_Reports.htm | 81 + .../Enter_a_Computype_printer_command.htm | 93 + .../Find_Computype_printer_commands.htm | 90 + .../Setting_Up_Computype_Label_Printers.htm | 96 + .../Polaris_Basics/Basic_Shortcut_Keys.htm | 421 +++ ...Create_a_linked_record_from_a_workform.htm | 81 + .../Create_a_new_record_from_a_workform.htm | 90 + ...record_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm | 94 + ...ate_a_new_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 89 + .../Creating_New_Records_in_Polaris.htm | 85 + .../Creating_and_Deleting_Records.htm | 82 + .../PIcreatrec/Delete_a_record.htm | 86 + .../PIcreatrec/Delete_multiple_records.htm | 110 + .../PIcreatrec/Deleting_Records.htm | 82 + .../Browse_by_author_series_or_subject.htm | 105 + .../Browse_by_call_number_or_title.htm | 86 + .../Customize_the_Find_Tool_by_user.htm | 109 + .../PIfindrec/Do_a_SQL_search.htm | 87 + .../PIfindrec/Do_a_power_search.htm | 85 + .../PIfindrec/Doing_Power_Searches.htm | 377 ++ .../PIfindrec/Doing_a_Basic_Search.htm | 86 + .../PIfindrec/Doing_a_Browse_Search.htm | 82 + .../PIfindrec/Doing_a_Keyword_Search.htm | 129 + .../PIfindrec/Doing_a_Phrase_Search.htm | 91 + .../PIfindrec/Finding_Polaris_Records.htm | 103 + ...unt_of_records_without_displaying_them.htm | 87 + ...ecords_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm | 90 + .../PIfindrec/Polaris_Find_Tool_Overview.htm | 95 + .../Resolving_Find_Tool_Search_Issues.htm | 91 + .../Scoping_Searches_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm | 127 + .../PIfindrec/Search_by_keyword.htm | 90 + .../PIfindrec/Search_for_a_record.htm | 164 + .../Search_using_a_saved_SQL_search.htm | 92 + .../PIfindrec/Searching_Branches.htm | 107 + .../PIfindrec/Searching_Collections.htm | 105 + .../PIfindrec/Searching_Remote_Databases.htm | 117 + .../Send_search_results_to_a_record_set.htm | 92 + .../Set_Find_Tool_results_limits.htm | 102 + .../PIfindrec/Setting_Up_A_Search.htm | 184 + .../PIfindrec/Setting_Up_SQL_Searches.htm | 104 + ...ext_menu_in_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm | 120 + .../Using_Find_Tool_Results_Lists.htm | 86 + .../PIgetstart/Access_Polaris_licenses.htm | 84 + ...indows_within_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm | 87 + .../Encountering_Permission_Blocks.htm | 90 + .../Exit_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm | 83 + .../PIgetstart/Getting_Started_in_Polaris.htm | 100 + .../PIgetstart/Linking_to_Other_Records.htm | 79 + .../PIgetstart/Polaris Display Settings.htm | 88 + .../Print_a_record_from_a_workform.htm | 97 + ...rint_search_results_from_the_Find_Tool.htm | 101 + ...lected_entries_in_a_workform_list_view.htm | 94 + .../PIgetstart/Printing_Records.htm | 84 + ...and_log_on_to_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm | 114 + .../PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Menus.htm | 93 + .../PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Workforms.htm | 147 + .../Using_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 79 + .../PIgetstart/Viewing_Record_Props.htm | 86 + .../Get_quick_help_with_a_workform.htm | 82 + ...e_topic-level_Help_in_the_staff_client.htm | 137 + .../PIpoldoc/Using_Online_Help.htm | 83 + .../PIrecsets/Add_records_to_a_record_set.htm | 107 + ...ord_set_from_all_the_Find_Tool_results.htm | 98 + ...rd_set_from_specific_Find_Tool_results.htm | 96 + ..._from_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm | 86 + ...cord_set_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 91 + .../Creating_and_Using_Record_Sets.htm | 100 + ...ecord_set_from_the_Record_Set_workform.htm | 88 + ...elete_member_records_from_the_database.htm | 99 + .../Delete_record_sets_from_the_Find_Tool.htm | 85 + .../Remove_records_from_a_record_set.htm | 93 + .../Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Acq_Reports.htm | 125 + .../PIreports/Borrow_By_Mail_Reports.htm | 76 + .../Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Cat_Reports.htm | 125 + .../Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Circ_Reports.htm | 166 + .../PIreports/Customize_a_report.htm | 153 + .../Customize_an_internal_report.htm | 142 + ...ve_or_print_a_report_using_the_toolbar.htm | 88 + .../PIreports/Generate_a_report.htm | 111 + .../PIreports/Holds_Reports.htm | 112 + .../Polaris_Basics/PIreports/ILL_Reports.htm | 89 + .../PIreports/Inventory_Reports.htm | 76 + .../PIreports/Outreach_Reports.htm | 98 + .../Polaris_Basics/PIreports/PAC_Reports.htm | 88 + .../PIreports/Public_Services_Reports.htm | 135 + .../PIreports/Serials_Reports.htm | 85 + .../PIreports/Staff_and_Wkstn_Reports.htm | 84 + .../PIreports/System_Reports.htm | 76 + .../PIreports/Telephony_Reports.htm | 77 + .../Using_Polaris_Standard_Reports.htm | 116 + .../Polaris_Basics/Polaris_Basics.htm | 104 + .../Deep_Links_to_Polaris_PAC.htm | 254 ++ .../PDOEnrich/Baker_Taylor_Enriched_Data.htm | 112 + .../PDOEnrich/ChiliFresh_Enriched_Data.htm | 117 + .../EBSCO_NoveList_Enriched_Data.htm | 112 + .../PDOEnrich/Enabling_Enriched_Data.htm | 229 ++ .../PDOEnrich/LibraryThing_Enriched_Data.htm | 98 + .../PDOEnrich/Syndetics_Enriched_Data.htm | 125 + .../Edit_PowerPAC_messages_and_labels.htm | 105 + .../Editing_Messages_and_Labels.htm | 82 + .../PAC_Messages_and_Labels_Reference.htm | 350 ++ ...nfiguring_the_Mobile_PAC_Title_Display.htm | 987 ++++++ .../Credit_Card_Payments_from_Mobile_PAC.htm | 80 + ...switching_and_set_branch_display_order.htm | 93 + .../PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Basics.htm | 129 + .../Mobile_PAC_Results_Settings.htm | 180 + .../Mobile_PAC_Search_Settings.htm | 122 + .../New_Popular_Titles_in_Mobile_PAC.htm | 96 + ...atron_Account_My_Account_in_Mobile_PAC.htm | 111 + .../Patron_Log-In_Settings_for_Mobile_PAC.htm | 91 + .../Patron_Registration_in_Mobile_PAC.htm | 79 + .../PDOMobilePAC/Polaris_Fusion_Results.htm | 80 + ...ed_Searches_Search_Agent_in_Mobile_PAC.htm | 86 + .../PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_Full_Site_link.htm | 75 + .../PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_connection_URL.htm | 109 + ...t_up_the_Mobile_PAC_title_product_page.htm | 95 + .../Setting_Up_Ask_Us_in_Mobile_PAC.htm | 105 + .../PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC.htm | 107 + .../Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Connections.htm | 83 + ...ting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Library_Information.htm | 112 + .../Title_Lists_in_Mobile_PAC.htm | 115 + .../Mobile_PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm | 361 ++ .../PAC_Administration_Reference_Lists.htm | 82 + .../PDOPacProfs/PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm | 683 ++++ ...ris_PowerPAC_Childrens_Pages_Reference.htm | 114 + .../Polaris_PowerPAC_Pages_Reference.htm | 345 ++ .../Standard_PAC_Pages_Reference.htm | 84 + ...ontrolling_Patron_Account_Login_Access.htm | 98 + ...re_PCDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm | 92 + ...ire_UDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm | 93 + ...nable_patron_account_access_-_PowerPAC.htm | 135 + .../PDOPatAcc/Limit_log-in_attempts.htm | 84 + .../Set_Up_PAC_Active_Directory_Log_On.htm | 118 + ...vity_timeout_for_in-house_workstations.htm | 123 + ...Set_patron_associations_display_in_PAC.htm | 102 + ..._patron_password_and_user_name_options.htm | 100 + ...rivacy_statement_link_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 82 + .../PDOPatAcc/Set_up_and_start_Ask_Us.htm | 118 + .../Set_up_online_patron_account_updates.htm | 106 + ...Set_up_online_patron_self-registration.htm | 200 ++ .../Setting_Patron_Account_Options.htm | 102 + .../Setting_Up_Patron_Account_Access.htm | 84 + .../PDOPatAcc/claimlostSA.htm | 79 + .../PDOPatAcc/navMobPAC.htm | 85 + .../PDOPatAcc/navPowPAC.htm | 85 + .../Polaris_PowerPAC_Profiles_Reference.htm | 1307 +++++++ .../Auto-Search_Suggestions_-_PowerPAC.htm | 87 + .../Customizing_Search-by_Labels.htm | 373 ++ .../PAC_Search_Agent_Saved_Searches.htm | 125 + .../PDOSearching/RelatedWords.htm | 143 + ...Searching_Record_Sets_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 267 ++ .../Searching_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 99 + .../Set_PAC_search_setting_defaults.htm | 118 + ...up_availability_search_filters_for_PAC.htm | 104 + ...material_custom_search_filters_for_PAC.htm | 143 + .../Setting_Available_Search_Types.htm | 123 + .../Setting_Up_Did_You_Mean_Term_Checking.htm | 133 + .../Setting_Up_Search_Filters_Limit_By.htm | 97 + ...f_relevance_applied_to_popularity_sort.htm | 88 + .../Specifying_Default_Search_Settings.htm | 87 + ...ris_Social_with_ChiliFresh_Connections.htm | 247 ++ .../Public_Access_Administration_Topics.htm | 129 + .../PDOccl/PAC_CQL_Commands_Access_Points.htm | 1180 +++++++ .../PDOchild/Add_a_new_category.htm | 134 + .../Add_a_new_search_target_to_a_category.htm | 172 + .../Add_text_to_children_Events_page.htm | 96 + .../Administering_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm | 91 + .../PDOchild/Assign_themes.htm | 87 + .../PDOchild/Construct_a_theme.htm | 111 + .../PDOchild/Copy_a_category_or_target.htm | 87 + ...ize_children_item_availability_display.htm | 103 + .../Customizing_Children_Results_Display.htm | 89 + .../PDOchild/Filter_children_searches.htm | 95 + .../PDOchild/Managing_Children_Dashboards.htm | 83 + .../PDOchild/Managing_Search_Categories.htm | 98 + .../PDOchild/Managing_Themes.htm | 87 + .../PDOchild/Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm | 94 + .../PDOchild/Set_children_search_buttons.htm | 94 + .../Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm | 114 + .../Setting_Children_Search_Limits.htm | 86 + .../Translate_a_category_or_target.htm | 114 + .../Translate_all_categories_and_targets.htm | 103 + .../Childrens_PAC_Profiles_Ref.htm | 362 ++ .../PDOeSources/E-Source_Reports.htm | 108 + .../Example_ESourceTargetGetTransfer .htm | 134 + .../Example_ESourceTargetPostTransfer.htm | 138 + .../PDOeSources/Managing_E-Sources.htm | 86 + .../Organizing_E-Source_Targets.htm | 107 + ...e_links_to_e-sources_on_external_sites.htm | 90 + .../PDOeSources/Set_up_an_e-source_target.htm | 190 + .../Setting_Up_E-Source_Targets.htm | 87 + .../PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Events_page.htm | 95 + .../Add_text_to_the_Policies_page.htm | 93 + .../Administering_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 166 + .../Assign_Web_parts_to_public_pages.htm | 116 + ..._Carousels_on_the_PowerPAC_Portal_Page.htm | 152 + .../PDOpower/Create_a_custom_Web_part.htm | 160 + .../PDOpower/Customize_the_page_header.htm | 137 + .../PDOpower/Customizing_Language_Strings.htm | 80 + .../Customizing_Portal_Page_Features.htm | 98 + .../Defining_Web_Parts_for_Dashboards.htm | 128 + ...items_in_Polaris_and_third-party_lists.htm | 92 + .../PDOpower/Polaris_PowerPAC_Help.htm | 585 +++ ...aris_PowerPAC_features_on_the_menu_bar.htm | 126 + .../PDOpower/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 156 + .../Set_up_custom_portal_page_content.htm | 87 + ...uick_search_with_search_option_buttons.htm | 94 + .../PDOpower/Set_up_rotating_book_jackets.htm | 88 + .../Setting_Polaris_PowerPAC_Themes.htm | 90 + ...ing_Up_Live_Virtual_Reference_Services.htm | 128 + .../PDOpower/Setting_Up_RSS_Feeds.htm | 86 + .../PDOpower/Type of Material Filters.htm | 819 +++++ .../PDOpower/configuring_cookie_policy.htm | 144 + .../PDOpower/customizing_cookie_policy.htm | 77 + .../enabling_cookie_policy_message.htm | 83 + .../PDOpower/powerpac_cookie_acceptance.htm | 88 + .../Enabling_Online_Book_Purchases.htm | 86 + .../Setting_Up_Polaris_Bookstore.htm | 104 + .../PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Purchase_Links.htm | 101 + ...ulk_Hold_Requests_PowerPAC_Title_Lists.htm | 263 ++ .../Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Product_Page.htm | 104 + ...Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Title_Display.htm | 111 + ...rence_Display_in_Browse_Search_Results.htm | 95 + .../PDOresults/Define_custom_entities.htm | 96 + ...laying_Bound-With_Materials_in_the_PAC.htm | 110 + .../Displaying_PAC_Search_Results.htm | 112 + ...Edit_a_bibliographic_entity_definition.htm | 213 ++ ...ibliographic_information_display_order.htm | 98 + .../PDOresults/Enabling_PAC_Title_Lists.htm | 166 + .../PDOresults/Feature_It_Promotions.htm | 132 + ...le_Preview_for_PowerPAC_Search_Results.htm | 87 + ...hting_Titles_with_Local_Items_PowerPAC.htm | 80 + .../PDOresults/Map_It_Google_Maps_in_PAC.htm | 117 + .../PDOresults/Naming_Shelf_Locations.htm | 107 + .../PDOresults/One_Click_Hold_Requests.htm | 231 ++ ...c_entities_for_display_and_edit_labels.htm | 169 + .../Sending_Call_Numbers_by_Text_Message.htm | 94 + ..._Map_It_for_PowerPAC_and_or_Mobile_PAC.htm | 118 + ...et_up_the_Narrow_your_search_Web_part1.htm | 121 + .../Set_up_the_Related_searches_Web_part1.htm | 117 + ...PowerPAC_Narrow_Related_Search_Options.htm | 176 + ...tting_Up_Local_and_System_Availability.htm | 169 + .../Setting_Up_Recently_Viewed_Titles.htm | 93 + ...phic_information_display_configuration.htm | 87 + ...Bookmarking_for_Search_Results_AddThis.htm | 102 + .../Suppress_entities_from_small_screen.htm | 90 + .../Suppressing_Items_from_Search_Results.htm | 85 + ...ssing_Request_and_Availability_Options.htm | 124 + .../PDOresults/TitleDispRef.htm | 2226 ++++++++++++ ...row_Related_Web_parts_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 101 + .../PDOresults/econtentmobPAC.htm | 75 + .../PDOresults/econtentmobPowPAC.htm | 72 + .../PDOresults/suppressPACavail.htm | 97 + .../PDOstart/Public_Access_Administration.htm | 90 + ..._public_access_profiles_and_parameters.htm | 107 + ...nfigure_remote_database_usage_settings.htm | 190 + ...lop_the_remote_targets_display_for_PAC.htm | 122 + .../Managing_Federated_Search_Targets.htm | 92 + ...er_of_Databases_Searchable_at_One_Time.htm | 75 + .../Merged_Results_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm | 99 + ..._Target_Databases_for_PowerPAC_Display.htm | 103 + ...e_Database_Usage_Settings_for_PowerPAC.htm | 96 + ...im_from_the_Serial_Issue_Part_workform.htm | 89 + ...issues_parts_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm | 92 + .../PSclaim/Claiming_Issues_or_Parts.htm | 84 + .../Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_in_Serials.htm | 89 + ...criteria_in_the_serial_holdings_record.htm | 108 + ...g_information_in_the_Supplier_workform.htm | 98 + .../Entering_Serials_Claiming_Information.htm | 97 + .../Serials/PSclaim/Print_a_claim_notice.htm | 93 + ...rial_item_from_the_Issue_Part_workform.htm | 87 + .../Add_a_special_issue_part_at_check_in.htm | 96 + ...egular_serial_issues_parts_at_check-in.htm | 109 + .../Change_an_issue_or_part_status.htm | 87 + .../PSrecev/Change_serial_label_defaults.htm | 88 + ..._in_from_the_Issue_Standing_Order_Part.htm | 113 + ...Check_in_issues_from_a_linked_list_box.htm | 91 + ...ssues_parts_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm | 128 + ..._or_multiple_issues_from_the_Find_Tool.htm | 92 + .../Serials/PSrecev/Checking_In_Serials.htm | 137 + .../Serials/PSrecev/Combine_issues.htm | 92 + .../Delete_a_serial_holdings_record.htm | 82 + ...single_or_multiple_serial_issues_parts.htm | 95 + ...int_a_label_for_a_serial_issue_or_part.htm | 93 + ...heck_in_issues_or_standing_order_parts.htm | 88 + ...ngs_record_or_an_issue_to_a_route_list.htm | 89 + .../PSrouting/Add_members_to_a_route_list.htm | 95 + .../Serials/PSrouting/Copy_a_route_list.htm | 111 + .../Serials/PSrouting/Create_a_route_list.htm | 110 + .../PSrouting/Creating_Route_Lists.htm | 94 + .../Serials/PSrouting/Print_a_route_slip.htm | 92 + .../PSrouting/Printing_Route_Slips.htm | 86 + .../PSrouting/Return_a_routed_issue.htm | 79 + .../PSrouting/Routing_Serial_Issues.htm | 97 + ...Changing_Serial_Holdings_Records_Title.htm | 117 + .../Changing_a_Publication_Pattern.htm | 91 + .../PSsetup/Close_a_publication_pattern.htm | 91 + .../Copy_a_publication_pattern_template.htm | 89 + .../PSsetup/Copy_a_serial_holdings_record.htm | 93 + .../Create_a_publication_pattern_template.htm | 101 + .../Create_a_serial_holdings_record.htm | 152 + ...Creating_Publication_Pattern_Templates.htm | 87 + .../Creating_Serial_Item_Templates.htm | 118 + .../Creating_a_Publication_Pattern.htm | 87 + ...ng_and_Copying_Serial_Holdings_Records.htm | 88 + .../Displaying_Serial_Titles_in_the_PAC.htm | 144 + .../Edit_a_publication_pattern_template.htm | 87 + ...rder_data_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm | 139 + ...lic_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm | 84 + ...aff_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm | 87 + .../Establish_chronology_and_enumeration.htm | 137 + .../PSsetup/Modify_a_publication_pattern.htm | 93 + .../Modify_publication_pattern_options.htm | 83 + ...dict_issues_parts_from_serial_holdings.htm | 87 + ...ict_issues_parts_with_different_titles.htm | 95 + .../PSsetup/Publication_Pattern_Examples.htm | 158 + .../Rename_a_publication_pattern_template.htm | 88 + .../PSsetup/Reopen_a_publication_pattern.htm | 81 + ...Review_publication_patterns_prediction.htm | 90 + ..._serial_publication_pattern_regularity.htm | 127 + .../PSsetup/Setting_Up_Serials_Records.htm | 114 + ...publication_pattern_for_a_serial_title.htm | 113 + ...mplate_to_create_a_publication_pattern.htm | 136 + .../Serials/PSstart/Find_serial_records.htm | 110 + .../Serials/PSstart/Serials_Record_Types.htm | 187 + .../PSstart/Serials_Workflow_Overview.htm | 87 + .../PSstart/Starting_a_Serials_Task.htm | 85 + ...ldings_record_to_a_subscription_record.htm | 91 + .../PSsubscriptions/Cancel_a_subscription.htm | 97 + .../Copy_a_subscription_record.htm | 84 + .../Create_a_subscription_record.htm | 111 + .../Managing_Subscriptions.htm | 111 + ...scription_from_the_subscription_record.htm | 82 + ...w_subscriptions_from_Subscription_List.htm | 89 + .../PSsubscriptions/Reopen_a_subscription.htm | 88 + .../Serials/Serials_Shortcut_Keys.htm | 363 ++ .../Serials/Serials_Topics.htm | 101 + .../Serials/View_the_Subscription_List.htm | 99 + .../PDKseref/Serials_Admin_Ref.htm | 82 + .../Serials_Permissions_Referencet.htm | 139 + .../PDKseref/Serials_Workflow_Permissions.htm | 874 +++++ .../Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serialsprofref.htm | 79 + .../Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serparamref.htm | 113 + .../PDKserial/Serials_Administration.htm | 99 + .../PDKserial/Serials_Permissions.htm | 83 + ..._of_linked_issues_parts_when_items_are.htm | 83 + .../PDKserial/Set_serials_security.htm | 93 + .../Set_the_prompt_for_price_at_check-in.htm | 84 + .../Set_up_claiming_notification.htm | 106 + .../PDKserial/Set_up_routing_notices.htm | 102 + .../Set_up_serials_route_list_defaults.htm | 97 + .../PDKserial/Set_up_subscriptions.htm | 85 + ...Setting_Delete_of_Issue_Part_with_Item.htm | 75 + .../PDKserial/Setting_Up_Routing.htm | 82 + .../PDKserial/Setting_Up_Serials_Claiming.htm | 75 + .../PDKserial/Setting_Up_Subscriptions.htm | 77 + .../Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Prompt.htm | 80 + .../Setting_the_Check_In_Display.htm | 81 + ...lay_of_issues_on_the_Check_In_workform.htm | 90 + .../Configure_disconnect_hang-up_criteria.htm | 100 + .../Configure_hardware_communications.htm | 98 + .../Configuring_the_Phone_Attendant.htm | 87 + .../PTInboundTel/Phone_Attendant_Overview.htm | 98 + ...e_Attendant_options_for_specific_lines.htm | 148 + .../Setting_Up_Inbound_Telephony.htm | 73 + ..._language_voice_speech_rate_and_volume.htm | 112 + .../PTOutboundTel/Add_a_no-call_date.htm | 102 + ...ng_Notices_by_Phone_Outbound_Telephony.htm | 92 + ...Telephony_Reports_and_Trouble-Shooting.htm | 299 ++ ...oice_parameters_for_outbound_telephony.htm | 128 + .../PTOutboundTel/Set_dialing_hours.htm | 103 + ...eral_telephone_notification_parameters.htm | 169 + .../Setting_Outbound_Telephony_Parameters.htm | 83 + .../Voices_for_Outbound_Telephony.htm | 92 + .../Adjusting_Pronunciation.htm | 77 + .../Customizing_Telephony_Messages.htm | 81 + ...e_message_with_Polaris_Language_Editor.htm | 135 + .../Editing_Messages_and_Prompts.htm | 130 + ...Install_and_Use_the_TTS_Lexicon_Editor.htm | 185 + .../Telephony_Parameters_Reference.htm | 251 ++ .../Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Topics.htm | 84 + .../PRComm/Community_Record_Workform.htm | 100 + .../UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Workforms.htm | 75 + ...our_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box.htm | 109 + .../PRComm/Event_Import_Profile_Window.htm | 79 + .../UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Record_Workform.htm | 134 + .../PRComm/Events_Import_Profile_Manager.htm | 97 + .../Search_Setting_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 100 + ...dit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Orders_View.htm | 80 + ...rd_Payment_Manager_-_Transactions_View.htm | 88 + .../Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_Workform.htm | 92 + .../PRFixedFielddx/006_Books_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + ...r_Files_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../006_Continuing_Resources_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../PRFixedFielddx/006_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../006_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../PRFixedFielddx/006_Music_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../006_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../007_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + .../PRFixedFielddx/007_Globe_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../PRFixedFielddx/007_Kit_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../PRFixedFielddx/007_Map_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../007_Microform_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + .../007_Motion_Picture_Dialog_Box.htm | 94 + .../007_Nonprojected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../007_Notated_Music_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../007_Projected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../007_Remote_Image_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../007_Sound_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + .../007_Tactile_Material_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../PRFixedFielddx/007_Text_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../007_Unspecified_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../007_Video_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + .../PRFixedFielddx/008_Books_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + .../008_Computer_Files_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + .../008_Continuing_Resources_Dialog.htm | 98 + .../008_Fixed_Field_for_Authority_Record.htm | 100 + .../PRFixedFielddx/008_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm | 91 + .../008_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../PRFixedFielddx/008_Music_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + .../008_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm | 92 + .../PRFixedFielddx/Fixed_Fields_Reference.htm | 100 + .../Mailing_Label_Manager_Workform.htm | 104 + ...treach_Services_Manager_-_Patrons_View.htm | 86 + ...each_Services_Manager_-_Pick_List_View.htm | 99 + .../Outreach_Services_Manager_Workform.htm | 98 + ...reach_Services_Selection_List_Workform.htm | 92 + ...lection_List_Workform_-_Pick_List_View.htm | 89 + ...on_List_Workform_-_Selection_List_View.htm | 94 + .../PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform.htm | 96 + .../Store_Order_Workform_-_Details_View.htm | 78 + ...ore_Order_Workform_-_Transactions_View.htm | 76 + .../PRacquir/Acquisitions_Workforms.htm | 77 + ..._or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + ..._Amount_Credited_Discounted_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRacquir/Adjust_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../Adjust_Fund_Balances_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../PRacquir/Adjust_Line_Item_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../Approve_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Assign_Template_Name_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + ...Line_Item_Line_Item_Segment_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + ...heck_In_Shelf-Ready_Materials_Workform.htm | 94 + .../PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Check_Voucher_Selection_List_Box.htm | 77 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Alert_List.htm | 75 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Workform.htm | 93 + .../PRacquir/Copy_Lines_to_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../Copy_To_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Copy_To_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Distribute_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Distribute_Credits_Discounts_Dialog.htm | 82 + ...se_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + .../PRacquir/Duplicates_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../EDI_File_Sent_Warning_Message_Box.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Explorer.htm | 96 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Workform.htm | 85 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Explorer.htm | 96 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Workform.htm | 124 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Funds_Linked_List_Box.htm | 76 + .../PRacquir/Invoice_Line_Item_Workform.htm | 100 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Workform.htm | 132 + ...Line_Item_Segment_Receiving_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../PRacquir/Link_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../PRacquir/Linked_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Merge_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../PRacquir/Modify_Check_Voucher_Number.htm | 81 + .../PRacquir/Modify_Decision_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../PRacquir/New_Invoice_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + .../New_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Overencumbrance_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../Overexpenditure_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../PRacquir/Payment_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../Process_EDI_Invoices_Workform.htm | 89 + .../Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Workform.htm | 151 + .../PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Workform.htm | 146 + ...urchase_Orders_and_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRacquir/Rapid_Receipt_Dialog_Box.htm | 96 + .../Receive_ASN_Shipments_Workform.htm | 95 + .../Record_Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../Rename_a_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Segment_Payment_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../Selection_List_Line_Item_Workform.htm | 100 + .../PRacquir/Selection_List_Workform.htm | 87 + .../PRacquir/Split_Funds_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../UI_Ref/PRacquir/Supplier_Workform.htm | 119 + .../PRacquir/Transfer_Money_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Update_Currency_Exchange_Rates.htm | 83 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Addresses_Policy.htm | 82 + .../Branch_Removal_Conflicts_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Workform.htm | 116 + ..._Visual_Alert_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm | 93 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Collection_Workform.htm | 106 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/ContactPersPolTab.htm | 82 + .../PRadmin/Currencies_Policy_Table.htm | 82 + .../PRadmin/Default_Directory_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../General_Administration_Workforms.htm | 121 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Library_Workform.htm | 121 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Network_Domains.htm | 79 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Object_Locks_Database.htm | 73 + .../PRadmin/Permission_Group_Workform.htm | 81 + .../Polaris_Administration_Explorer.htm | 81 + .../PRadmin/Postal Codes Database Table.htm | 82 + .../Postal_Codes_Tables_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../PRadmin/Proxy_Server_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + .../Report_Server_Set_Up_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + ...port_of_Unavailable_Targets_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../PRadmin/Resource_Group_Workform.htm | 82 + .../Search_Server_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm | 96 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Server_Workform.htm | 91 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Staff_Member_Workform.htm | 83 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/System_Workform.htm | 108 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Transaction_Logging.htm | 75 + .../PRadmin/Vendor_Account_Workform.htm | 85 + .../UI_Ref/PRadmin/Workstation_Workform.htm | 87 + ...tions_Serials_Administration_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Branch_Fund_Filter.htm | 82 + .../PRadminAcq/Claim_Reasons_Policy_Table.htm | 87 + ...iming_Cancellation_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 91 + .../Display_of_Issues_on_Check_In.htm | 80 + .../EDI_Invoice_Default_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + .../Fund Categories Policy Table.htm | 78 + .../Fund_Drop-down_List_Box_Display.htm | 91 + ...ink to Supplier Databases Policy Table.htm | 75 + .../Route_List_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + ...ion_List_Line_Item_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + .../PRadminAcq/Titles_to_Go_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Control.htm | 75 + .../PRadminCat/Authority_Deduplication.htm | 77 + .../Authority_Overlay_Retention.htm | 93 + ...ord_Import_Preferred_Cataloging_Source.htm | 92 + .../Bibliographic_Deduplication.htm | 77 + .../Bibliographic_Tags_to_Retain_Delete.htm | 89 + ...Campaigns_Truncation_Option_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Cataloging_Administration_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../Computype_Label_Printer_Commands.htm | 78 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Countries.htm | 81 + .../Cross_Reference_Display_Constants.htm | 85 + .../PRadminCat/Did_You_Mean_Overrides.htm | 77 + .../PRadminCat/EContent_Vendor_Record.htm | 76 + .../PRadminCat/Geographic_Coordinates.htm | 76 + .../Import_Blackout_Times_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Initial_Articles.htm | 91 + .../Item_Availability_Display_Order.htm | 91 + .../Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy.htm | 80 + .../Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy.htm | 78 + .../MARC_Language_Scoping_Display.htm | 93 + .../PRadminCat/MARC_Validation_Editor.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Material_Types.htm | 77 + .../New_Vendor_Account_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../PAC_Community_Limit_By_Display.htm | 76 + .../PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Author.htm | 76 + .../PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Title.htm | 76 + ..._Authority_Control_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Search_Databases.htm | 77 + .../_9_Cleanup_Utility_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + .../Accrued_Fine_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Address_Verification_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../Associated_Patron_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRadminPat/Borrow_by_Mail_Dialog_Box.htm | 122 + .../Branch_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CLASS_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box.htm | 79 + .../Check-In_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + .../Check-In_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + .../Check-Out Item Options Dialog Box.htm | 79 + ...rge_Options_Dialog_Box_Patron_Services.htm | 86 + ...arge_Options_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm | 88 + .../Check-Out_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../Check-Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Circulation Statuses Database Table.htm | 83 + .../Collection_Agency_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm | 186 + .../Comprise_MSP_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm | 99 + .../Consortium_Circulation_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + ...rse Reserves Course Names Policy Table.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResDeptPolTab.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/CourseResSchoolDivPolTab.htm | 83 + .../PRadminPat/CourseResTermsPolTab.htm | 82 + .../Course_Reserve_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 144 + .../PRadminPat/Dates_Closed_Policy_Table.htm | 82 + ...Duplicate_Detection_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + .../EReceipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + ...nd_of_Term_Due_Date_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 115 + ...Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 98 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fee_Descriptions.htm | 84 + .../Fine_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + ...ne_and_Loan_Period_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + .../PRadminPat/Fines_Codes_Policy_Table.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Policy_Table.htm | 82 + ...nished_Transaction_Deletion_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + ...Floating Collection Limit Policy Table.htm | 86 + .../PRadminPat/Floating Material Type.htm | 82 + .../Floating Options Dialog Box.htm | 87 + .../PRadminPat/FloatingToBranchPolTab.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/Floating_Material_Limits.htm | 84 + .../Hold Request Statuses Database Table.htm | 84 + .../PRadminPat/Hold_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 94 + .../Hold_Pickup_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 153 + .../Hold_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 77 + .../Holds Routing Sequences Primary.htm | 84 + .../Holds_Item_Pickup_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + ...lds_Routing_Sequences_Secondary_Policy.htm | 84 + .../Hours_of_Operation_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../ILL_Institutional_Patron_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../PRadminPat/ILL_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 99 + .../In-House IP Addresses Database Table.htm | 80 + .../In-Transit_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 93 + ...vailability Display Order Policy Table.htm | 82 + ...Item Block Descriptions Database Table.htm | 80 + .../Item Statistical Class Codes.htm | 82 + .../Item_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm | 93 + .../Items_Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + ...age_Strings_Dialog_Box_Patron_Messages.htm | 83 + .../Licensed_Languages_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../Loan Period Codes Policy Table.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/Loan Periods Policy Table.htm | 82 + .../Lost Item Transition Dialog Box.htm | 84 + .../Lost_Item_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 98 + .../Lost_Item_Recovery_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 101 + .../Material_Type_Groups_Dialog_Box.htm | 92 + .../PRadminPat/Material_Types_Policy.htm | 82 + .../Media_Dispenser_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm | 98 + .../Missing Item Transition Dialog Box.htm | 78 + .../PRadminPat/Mobile_Carriers_Database.htm | 84 + .../NCIP_Fiscal_Action_Types_Policy.htm | 80 + ...olds_Add_Staff_Display_Note_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../NCIP_Medium_Types_In_Policy.htm | 81 + .../NCIP_Medium_Types_Out_Policy.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Payment_Policy.htm | 81 + .../PRadminPat/NCIP_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../PRadminPat/NCIP_User_Priv_Types.htm | 80 + .../PRadminPat/No_Fine_Days_Dialog_Box.htm | 77 + .../Notification_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 212 ++ .../ORS_Packing_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 77 + .../ORS_Reading_History_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Online_Payment_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm | 104 + .../Optional_Patron_Data_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../Outreach_Delivery_Mode_Policy.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Policy.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/Outreach_Disability_Policy.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/Outreach_Equipment_Policy.htm | 82 + .../Outreach_Excluded_Circ_Stat_Policy.htm | 82 + .../Outreach_Included_Branches_Policy.htm | 82 + .../PRadminPat/Outreach_Pick_List_Head.htm | 82 + .../Outreach_Title_Rating_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Overnight_Loan_Period_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRadminPat/PatAddressTypesdatatab.htm | 80 + .../PRadminPat/PatNameTitlesDataTable.htm | 80 + .../Patron_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm | 94 + ...atron_Blocks_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm | 97 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Codes_Policy.htm | 82 + ...tron_Custom_Data_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + .../Patron_Custom_Data_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../Patron_Delete_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 99 + ...ulation_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + ..._Material_Type_Loan_Limit_Policy_Table.htm | 82 + .../Patron_Message_Text_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + ...tration_Filter_Patron_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + ...Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 96 + ...tron_Services_Administration_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../PRadminPat/Patron_Stat_Codes_Policy1.htm | 82 + .../PayPal_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm | 96 + .../Payflow_Link_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm | 97 + .../Payment Methods Policy Table.htm | 82 + ...Payments_Gateway_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + ...ssCheck_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + ...olaris_ExpressCheck_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 146 + .../Reading_History_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + ...ceipt_Printer_Control_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + .../Registration_Fee_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + ...n_ID_from_Circ_Transactions_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../Replacement_Fee_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../PRadminPat/SAPI_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm | 99 + .../SelfCheck Material Types Policy Table.htm | 80 + .../Shelf Locations Database Table.htm | 82 + .../Shelving_Status_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + ...Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table.htm | 80 + .../User_Def_Due_Date_Mod-Reas_Policy.htm | 82 + ...User_Defined_Fields_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 100 + .../You_Saved_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/envisionconnect.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_charges.htm | 73 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pickup.htm | 79 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pref.htm | 73 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_req.htm | 90 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_RTF.htm | 91 + .../UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_pac.htm | 99 + .../PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_queue.htm | 81 + .../PRadminPub/Change_Labels_Dialog_Box.htm | 109 + ...ildrens_PAC_Category_Config_Dialog_Box.htm | 150 + ...s_PAC_Default_Search_Limits_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../PRadminPub/Code_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm | 97 + .../Configure_DataBase_Dialog_Box.htm | 126 + ...opy_Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + ...earch_Related_searches_-_Modify_Search.htm | 96 + ...ur_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box1.htm | 109 + ...ource_Target_Categorization_Dialog_Box.htm | 92 + ...E-Sources_Add_Modify_Target_Dialog_Box.htm | 111 + .../PRadminPub/Enriched_Data_Dialog_Box.htm | 109 + .../Entity_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm | 100 + ...y_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_Advanced_Tab.htm | 103 + ...ty_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_General_Tab.htm | 94 + ...e_It_Screen_Display_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 115 + .../PRadminPub/Google_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm | 91 + ...In-House_Access_Definitions_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../Language_Strings_Dialog_Box.htm | 135 + ...nguage_Strings_Dialog_Box_Children_PAC.htm | 83 + .../Most_Popular_Sort_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm | 77 + .../New_and_Popular_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm | 93 + .../PRadminPub/PAC_Limit_By_Display.htm | 76 + .../PAC_Login_Retries_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + .../Page_Header_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../Patron_Access_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 222 ++ .../Patron_Access_Renewal_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../Patron_Inactivity_Timeout_Dialog_Box.htm | 119 + .../Patron_eReceipts_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + ...rtal_Page_Content_Carousels_Dialog_Box.htm | 98 + ...werPAC_Mobile_PAC_Analytics_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + ...gories_Configure_Dialog_Box_Mobile_PAC.htm | 95 + ...tegories_Configure_Dialog_Box_PowerPAC.htm | 102 + ...Public_Access_Administration_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../Purchase_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 92 + ...Search_Button_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm | 125 + .../Recently_Viewed_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + .../Related_Words_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + ...ization_of_Target_Databases_Dialog_Box.htm | 101 + ...te_Databases_Usage_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + ...ups_Search_Results_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm | 99 + .../Search_Agent_Parameters_Dialog_Box.htm | 100 + .../Search_Settings_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm | 151 + ...s_Availability_and_Requests_Dialog_Box.htm | 90 + .../Suppress_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../Suppress_Item_Display_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + .../PRadminPub/Tag_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm | 97 + ...me_Assignment_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm | 87 + ..._Construction_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm | 93 + .../Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm | 110 + ...Virtual_Reference_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm | 105 + ..._Page_-_Web_Part_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../PRadminPub/Web_Part_Editor_Dialog_Box.htm | 99 + .../Add_to_Course_Reserve_Dialog_Box.htm | 95 + ...or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box1.htm | 84 + ..._or_Existing_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + ...uthority_Create_Links_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../Authority_Record_Deletion_Options.htm | 82 + .../PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Workform.htm | 101 + .../PRcatUI/Authority_Template_Workform.htm | 74 + .../PRcatUI/Authority_Update_Links_Queue.htm | 88 + ...aphic_Bulk_Change_Job_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + ...d_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_006_Tag_Tab.htm | 80 + ...Change_Dialog_Box_-_007_1_or_007_2_Tab.htm | 80 + ...ecord_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_008_Tab.htm | 81 + ...lk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Data_Fields_Tab.htm | 84 + ...rd_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Leader_Tab.htm | 78 + ..._Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Non-MARC_Tab.htm | 81 + .../PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Workform.htm | 123 + ...c_Display_in_PAC_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../Bibliographic_Template_Workform.htm | 74 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Campaigns_Workform.htm | 82 + .../PRcatUI/Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Cataloging_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../PRcatUI/Character_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Check_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../Check_Headings_Details_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + ...heck_MARC_21_Format_Results_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../Check_for_Linked_Records_Results.htm | 96 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Copy_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../PRcatUI/Create_Import_Profile_Window.htm | 113 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Resource_Entity.htm | 75 + .../PRcatUI/Customize_Label_Dialog_Box.htm | 97 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Edit_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm | 92 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Jobs_Queue.htm | 113 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Profile_Manager.htm | 92 + .../PRcatUI/Item_Barcode_Range_Dialog_Box.htm | 91 + ...lk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Call_Number_Tab.htm | 101 + ...lk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Circulation_Tab.htm | 101 + ..._Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Location_Tab.htm | 83 + ...cord_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Misc_Tab.htm | 84 + ...k_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Notes_Blocks_Tab.htm | 80 + ...nge_Dialog_Box_-_Report_Record_Set_Tab.htm | 79 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Workform.htm | 301 ++ .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Template_Workform.htm | 74 + .../Label_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm | 112 + .../PRcatUI/Last_Copy_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../Link_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Linked_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm | 102 + ...inked_Bibliographic_Records_Dialog_Box.htm | 94 + ...nked_Cataloging_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../Linked_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm | 94 + ...Linked_Reserve_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm | 94 + .../PRcatUI/Macro_Selection_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Bibs.htm | 146 + .../Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Items.htm | 158 + .../New_Item_Record_Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 104 + .../PRcatUI/New_Record_Set_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Page_Label_Details_Dialog_Boxes.htm | 85 + ...rt_Setup_Window-_Authority_Records_Tab.htm | 84 + ...etup_Window-_Bibliographic_Records_Tab.htm | 146 + ...Import_Setup_Window_-_Item_Records_Tab.htm | 146 + ..._Import_Setup_Window_-_Record_Sets_Tab.htm | 79 + ...Import_Setup_window_-Profile_Setup_Tab.htm | 113 + .../PRcatUI/Preview_MARC_Data_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Promotion_Workform.htm | 172 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Properties_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Criteria_List.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Record_Workform.htm | 92 + .../Quick-circ_Item_Record_Workform.htm | 80 + ...uick-circ_Item_Records_List_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../PRcatUI/Record_Links_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../PRcatUI/Record_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../PRcatUI/Record_Set_Found_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../PRcatUI/Record_Set_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Sets_Workform.htm | 94 + ...eplace_Check_for_Duplicates_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../Reserve_Item_Template_Workform.htm | 74 + .../PRcatUI/Scan_Barcode_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../Select_Headings_Results_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../Set_Default_Printers_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + .../PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box1.htm | 87 + ...Generated_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../PRcatUI/Template_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../Associated_Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Bookmobile_Workform.htm | 83 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntry.htm | 95 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryCourse.htm | 84 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryOTF.htm | 83 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/ChargeMisParts.htm | 78 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_In_Workform.htm | 106 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_Out_Workform.htm | 92 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Circulation_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../PRcirc/Declare_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../Fill_Hold_Renew_Item_Dialog_Box.htm | 89 + .../PRcirc/Floating_Limit_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Hold_Request_Workform.htm | 116 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Holds_Queue_Workform.htm | 89 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/ILL_Request_Dialog_Box.htm | 83 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Item_Record_Set_Setup.htm | 83 + .../PRcirc/Linked_Hold_Requests_List_Box.htm | 92 + .../Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Patrons.htm | 111 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Options_Dialog_Box.htm | 115 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Overdue_Fine_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRcirc/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../Patron_Checkout_Charge_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Patron_Registration_Fee_Dialog_Box.htm | 84 + .../PRcirc/Reactivate_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm | 75 + .../PRcirc/Request_Manager_Workform.htm | 132 + .../PRcirc/Reset_Due_Date_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../PRcirc/Resolve_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + ...Serial_Holds_Serial_Multi_Volume_Holds.htm | 75 + .../PRcirc/Set_Free_Days_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + .../UI_Ref/PRcirc/Special_Loan_Dialog_Box.htm | 100 + .../PRcirc/Transfer_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../General_User_Interface_Reference.htm | 74 + .../UI_Ref/PRintro/Label_Manager.htm | 96 + .../PRintro/Link_to_Supplier_Databas.htm | 72 + .../PRintro/Linked_Records_Dialog_Bo.htm | 73 + .../UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Polaris User Interface Reference.htm | 107 + .../UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Find_Tool.htm | 146 + .../UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm | 95 + .../UI_Ref/PRintro/Save_SQL_Dialog_Box.htm | 72 + ...Add_Edit_Associated_Patrons_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../Associated_Patron_Records_Dialog_Box.htm | 87 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Charge_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../Course_Reserve_Template_Workform.htm | 75 + .../PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Workform.htm | 161 + .../PRpatron/Create_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm | 85 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Credit_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Deposit_Dialog_Box.htm | 79 + .../PRpatron/Estimated_Fines_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Forfeit_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../Linked_Course_Reserves_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Linked_Patron_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm | 80 + .../Notification_History_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Address_Tab.htm | 84 + .../Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Blocks_Notes_Tab.htm | 93 + .../Patron_Bulk_Change_-_General_Tab.htm | 85 + .../Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Registration_Tab.htm | 81 + ...n_Bulk_Change_-_Reports_Record_Set_Tab.htm | 79 + .../Patron_Bulk_Change_-_UDFs_Tab.htm | 83 + .../PRpatron/Patron_Merge_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRpatron/Patron_Record_Set_Workform.htm | 84 + .../PRpatron/Patron_Registration_Workform.htm | 150 + .../PRpatron/Patron_Services_Workforms.htm | 75 + .../PRpatron/Patron_Status_Workform.htm | 260 ++ .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Pay_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../PRpatron/Refund_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/RenewChrgItem.htm | 74 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Return_Dialog_Box.htm | 82 + .../Special Item Check-in Dialog Box.htm | 79 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/Waive_Dialog_Box.htm | 88 + .../UI_Ref/PRpatron/addfromfile.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRserials/Check_In_Workform1.htm | 88 + ...rd_from_Standing_Order_Part_Dialog_Box.htm | 86 + ...ation_Pattern_-_Pattern_Options_Window.htm | 133 + ...iture_Prediction_Percentage_Dialog_Box.htm | 76 + .../New_Route_List_Member_Dialog_Box.htm | 78 + .../PRserials/Print_Route_Slip_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../Publication_Pattern_Template_Manager.htm | 88 + ...se_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm | 74 + .../Reopen_Subscription_Dialog_Box.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRserials/Route_List_Workform.htm | 95 + .../Serial_Holdings_Record_Workform.htm | 222 ++ .../PRserials/Serial_Issue_Workform.htm | 104 + .../PRserials/Serial_Issues_List_Box.htm | 81 + .../UI_Ref/PRserials/Serials_Workforms.htm | 74 + .../Standing_Order_Part_List_Box.htm | 81 + .../Standing_Order_Part_Workform.htm | 91 + .../PRserials/Subscription_List_Workform.htm | 82 + .../Subscription_Record_Workform.htm | 104 + .../PolarisStaffHelp/Welcome_page.htm | 135 + 2245 files changed, 258471 insertions(+) create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/FrontMatter/LegalNotices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions_Shortcut_Keys.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_invoice_line_item_segment_credits_and_discounts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_discount_unit_price_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_segment_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjusting_Prepaid_Invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_a_subfund.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_donor_information_to_a_fund.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Adjust_fund_balances_manually.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Assign_the_beginning_allocation_for_a_fund.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Create_a_fund.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Edit_multiple_funds_in_Polaris_Acquisitions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Managing_Funds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Set_fund_encumbrance_expenditure_limits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_Fiscal_Years.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_the_Acquisitions_Budget.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Transfer_money_between_funds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_fund_transactions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fiscal_year_and_fund_hierarchy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fund_structure.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_single_line_item_from_the_PO_Line_Item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_whole_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_one_or_more_whole_line_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Canceling_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Copy_lines_segments_to_another_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Print_cancellation_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Cancel_a_title_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_segment_of_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_single_line_from_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_all_items_on_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_items_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claiming.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Print_claim_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Stop_a_claim.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/View_and_enter_an_items_claim_information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_line_items_on_a_standing_or_subscription_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Closing_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_a_single_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_entire_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Crediting_Invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_an_open_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_an_open_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Adjusting_Invoice_Charges_Credits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Charges.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Credits_Discounts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_charges.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_credits_and_discounts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_a_tax_dollar_amount_on_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_subscription.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_unlinked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_general_information_to_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_invoice_lines_using_Rapid_Receipt.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_or_change_invoice_header_charges_and_credits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_segment_information_for_an_invoice_line.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Adding_Invoice_Line_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_a_single_line_item_or_specific_segments_to_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_to_create_a_new_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_multiple_line_items_to_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_a_miscellaneous_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_an_invoice_without_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Creating_Invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Invoicing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_an_invoice_to_another_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_from_a_purchase_order_to_create_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Linking_Invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Process_EDI_invoices_for_partial_shipments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Review_automatic_EDI_invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Unlink_a_linked_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_a_linked_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_all_funds_for_the_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_charges_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_claiming_information_for_an_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_general_purchase_order_information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_purchase_order_line_item_segments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_PO_Line_Distribution_Grid.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_Titles_to_a_Purchase_Order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adjust_fund_limits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Bulk_Update_Purchase_Order_Notes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Fund_Destination_Collection_PO_Line_Item_Segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Header_Fund_Material_Type_PO_Line_Item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Checking_for_Duplicate_Copies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_line_item_segments_within_a_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_copying_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_with_a_template_or_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Creating_Purchase_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Importing_and_Ordering_Processes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Modifying_PO_Line_Item_Statuses.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Ordering.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Placing_Holds_from_Purchase_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_multiple_purchase_orders_at_once.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_or_e-mail_a_single_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Release_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Releasing_and_Transmitting_Purchase_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Split_funds_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Transmit_a_purchase_order_electronically.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Using_Polaris_Titles_to_Go.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_all_funds_for_the_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_totals_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Modify_the_payment_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_entire_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_one_or_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Paying_Invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_one_or_multiple_vouchers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_or_e-mail_a_voucher_from_the_Invoice_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Undo_the_invoice_payment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_charges.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_payment_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Print_workslips_for_purchase_order_line_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_invoice_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_line_from_the_Find_Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_whole_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_from_the_purchase_order_or_invoice_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_using_the_Advanced_Shipping_Notice_ASN.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receiving_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Split_receipt_of_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Undo_receipt_of_a_line_item_or_line_item_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Use_Rapid_Receipt_to_receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_a_new_selection_list_line_by_copying_a_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_titles_to_a_selection_list_one_at_a_time.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Approve_multiple_selection_list_line_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Bulk_add_titles_to_an_existing_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Check_a_selection_list_for_duplicates_and_print_a_report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Close_or_reopen_a_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_a_PO.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_another_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_a_purchase_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_another_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copying_Selection_List_Lines.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_by_copying_a_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_selection_list_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Creating_Selection_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list_line_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Deleting_Selection_Lists_or_Selection_List_Lines.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Enter_or_change_selection_list_line_item_segments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Merge_selection_lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Modify_the_decision_on_selection_list_line_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Rename_a_selection_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Selection_List_Fund_Allocations_Report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Setting_Up_Selection_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Record_Levels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Setup_Checklist.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Workflows.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Create_a_new_Acquisitions_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Find_acquisitions_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Link_to_other_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Starting_an_Acquisitions_Task.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_supplier_address.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_the_claiming_criteria_for_a_supplier.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_a_supplier_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_supplier_address.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Create_a_new_supplier_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Creating_Copying_and_Deleting_Supplier_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Delete_a_supplier_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Enter_supplier_EDI_ordering_data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Set_up_a_supplier_record_for_a_foreign_vendor.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Setting_Up_Supplier_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Update_the_currency_exchange_rate_for_a_foreign_currency.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Copy_a_purchase_order_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_new_on-order_item_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_purchase_order_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Bibliographic_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Item_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_Purchase_Order_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Rename_a_purchase_order_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Setting_Up_Templates_for_Acquisitions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Administration_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Permissions_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Workflow_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqparamref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqprofref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Acquisitions_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_links_to_supplier_databases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_or_enable_a_foreign_currency.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Foreign_Currencies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Funds_Fiscal_Years.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Purchase_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/AutoCosePO.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Define_claiming_reasons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_Titles_to_Go_for_your_suppliers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_automatic_purchase_order_numbers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_brief_bib_record_display_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_copy_segment_data_to_next_segment.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_the_Close_Purchas.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_warning_if_no_Display_in_PAC_setting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filter_destination_branch_lists_by_parent_library.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filtering_Branches_in_Line_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Fiscal_Year_Rollovers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Receiving.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Selection_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Supplier_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Mark_970_data_as_processed_after_bulk_adding_titles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purge_invoices_and_purchase_orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purging_Purchase_Orders_Invoices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Rename_the_purchase_order_and_invoice_header_Other_charge_type.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Replicatefiscalyear.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Retain_material_type_in_copied_line_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Runfiscalyearutilchecklist.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Select_systems_base_currency.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_alert_indicator_for_bulk_adding_titles_with_multiple_ISBNs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_batch_print_workslips_option_for_ASN_receiving.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_purchase_orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_selection_lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_claim_cancellation_notice_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_currency_exchange_rate.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_default_payment_option_to_check_or_voucher.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_EDI_invoice_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_donation_fund_categories.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_warning_when_receiving_line_items_with_holds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_EDI_Ordering.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_Titles_to_Go.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_the_Acquisitions_Serials_Default_Directory.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_defaults_for_selection_list_line_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_how_funds_are_displayed_in_Acquisitions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_Acquisitions_default_directory.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_EDI_FTP_transmission_mode.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_whether_on-order_item_data_prints_on_POLI_workslips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Use_the_Fiscal_Year_Rollover_Utility.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/AdminLeap.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/LeapParamRef.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/Leap_Perm_Ref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDFTPermRef/Find_Tool_Permissions_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Enable_locale_and_time_consistency_checking.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Ensuring_Locale_and_Time_Consistency.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDOwnershipRef/Record_Ownership_Fields_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDSQLJobsRef/Polaris_SQL_Jobs_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDStaffClProfRef/Staff_Client_Profiles_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/Administration_Tables_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/DataTabRef.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/NoticeTabRef.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/PolicyTabRef.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Setting_a_Default_Web_Page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Specify_a_default_Web_page_for_Web_Browser_option.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Administration_Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Polaris_General_Permissions_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Add_a_table_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Automatic_Staff_Client_Log-On.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Change_a_table_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Delete_a_table_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Editing_Parameters_Profiles_and_Tables.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Inherit_a_setting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Reorder_table_entries.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Restore_an_inherited_setting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_and_profiles_from_a_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_or_profiles_from_the_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Staff_Client_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Transmit_a_parameter_or_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Visual_Cues_for_Staff_Client_Log-On_Server.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_policy_tables_on_an_organization_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_tables_from_the_Administration_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Working_with_Tables.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Barcode_Formats.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_a_patron_barcode_format.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_an_item_barcode_format.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Defining_Barcode_Formats.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Delete_a_barcode_format.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Saving_Records_with_Invalid_Barcodes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Set_up_significant_digits_for_patron_barcodes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Add_a_new_collection_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Delete_a_collection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_collections_in_the_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_the_collections_assigned_to_a_branch.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Review_and_edit_collection_information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Working_with_Collections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Defining_Online_Documentation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Specify_the_location_of_online_documents.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Choose_the_transactions_to_log.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Collecting_Transaction_Statistics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Logging_Transactions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Polaris_Transactions_Database.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Sending_Circulation_Statistics_to_Library_Journal.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Statistical_Summary_Report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_contact_person_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_date_closed.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code_format.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_an_organization_address_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Change_the_system_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Changing_System_Information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Dates_Closed.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Organization_Contacts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_branch.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_library_in_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Organization_Addresses.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_System_Postal_Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organization_Resource_Groups.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organizations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/View_system_information_and_licenses.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Viewing_Organization_Licenses.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Branches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Libraries.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Assign_permissions_to_staff_workstation_or_group.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_a_permission_group.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_group_memberships.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Create_a_new_permission_group.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Grant_administration_permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Granting_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_members_in_a_permission_group.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_organization_security_settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_permission_group_membership.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Organization_Security.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_for_Staff_Workstations_Groups.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_with_Permission_Groups.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Permission_Strategies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_directly-assigned_permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_selected_group-assigned_permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Setting_Administration_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDquickref/Administration_Shortcut_Keys.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Security_for_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_proxy_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specifying_Report_Servers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Add_a_staff_member_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identify_IP_addresses_of_in-house_computers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identifying_In-House_Computers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_staff_members_in_the_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_workstations_in_the_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Multi-Domain_System_Support.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Register_a_new_workstation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Set_criteria_for_determining_in-house_location.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Staff_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstation_and_Staff_Member_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Staff_and_Workstation_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_a_language_display_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_an_initial_article_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Defining_Leading_Articles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_filtering_by_permission.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_the_Find_Tool_SQL_permission_blocks_override.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Find_Tool_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Language_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Search_Tool_Characteristics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Viewing_Title_and_Author_Elements.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Bib-1_Use_Attributes_in_Polaris_Searches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Configuring_Usage_Settings_for_EDS.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Controlling_Database_Access_in_the_Staff_Client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Polaris_search_server_connection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Web_server_connection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_telephony_server_connection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_an_SQL_server_connection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Enabling_EDS_Searching_in_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Import_databases_to_the_MuseGlobal_search_server.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/MARC_852_tag_subfields_for PAC_ODC_and_BR_databases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Offering_the_Polaris_Database_as_a_Remote_Target.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Polaris_PowerPAC_MuseGlobal_Federated_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/PowerPAC_and_EDS.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Register_a_Polaris_server_in_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Polaris_Servers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Remote_Resource_Servers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Review_and_change_Web_server_parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_database_availability_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_the_entire_PowerPAC_site_to_https_only.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_Service.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_and_Federated_Search_in_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_a_server_record_for_a_Z39_50_or_other_search_server.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Up_Server_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Web_Server_Parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Specify_Polaris_server_databases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Accessing_Administration_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Find_an_administration_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Managing_Record_Locks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Polaris_Administration_Records_and_Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Use_the_Administration_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform_opening_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Item_Record_workform_opening_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Patron_Status_workform_opening_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Setting_Preferred_Workform_Views.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/Polaris_Permission_Groups_-_Default_Permissions_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Cataloging_Bound-With_Materials.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Create_a_bound-with_group.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Finding_Cataloging_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Getting_Started_in_Cataloging.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Configuring_Existing_Label_Types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Creating_Custom_Labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Define_the_label_content.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Set_up_existing_label_types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Label_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Up_Labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_the_Default_Label_Printers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKCaroTool/Carousel_Toolkit.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKTOMs/Type_of_Material_Codes_TOMs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKabout/Cataloging_Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Change_invalid_fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_MARC_format_from_a_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_the_logs_of_the_new_or_updated_authority_links.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Authority_Headings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Cataloging_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_MARC_Format.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_for_Duplicate_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Create_links_from_authority_records_to_other_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_authority_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_or_replace_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Edit_authority_records_and_update_linked_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/List_and_resolve_unlinked_headings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_006_and_007_fixed_fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_a_MARC_tag_to_a_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Apply_a_macro.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Browse_Headings_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_a_macro.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_the_MARC_Leader.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Choose_characters_diacritics_from_a_chart.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Copying_MARC_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_authority_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_bibliographic_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_Copying_and_Editing_MARC_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_MARC_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Delete_a_macro.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Edit_the_008_field_in_a_MARC_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Editing_MARC_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Enter_diacritics_characters_using_an_IME_keyboard.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_character_diacritic_using_a_code.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_subfield_in_a_MARC_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Move_a_block_of_text.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Record_a_macro.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Automatic_Processes_During_Import.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Copy_a_Polaris_read-only_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Create_a_new_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Importing_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Modify_an_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_an_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_import_reports_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_authority_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_item_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_record_sets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles_and_Importing_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Stop_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Express_Import_to_import_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Full_Import_to_import_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Using_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/View_import_jobs_in_the_queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_an_existing_item_record_from_the_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_existing_item_records_linked_bib.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_label_options_from_Cataloging.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Changing_Item_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_single_new_item_record_manually.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_subordinate_child_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_copies_of_a_label.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_item_records_for_a_single_title.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Creating_Item_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_item_information_for_course_reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_acquisitions_information_for_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_basic_information_for_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_circulation_information_for_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_notes_and_blocks_for_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Insert_diacritics_or_special_characters_into_a_label.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Link_subordinate_items_to_different_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Maintaining_Item_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_labels_from_Find_Tool_record_sets_or_list_boxes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_spine_and_pocket_labels_from_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Printing_Cataloging_Labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Save_a_label_file.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_items_circ_history_and_edit_float_setting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_other_item_records_linked_to_the_same_bib.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_the_linked_bib_from_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Cleaning_Up_the_Catalog.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Configure_the_export_process.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Create_a_record_set_of_unlinked_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_authority_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_bibliographic_or_item_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Export_cataloging_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Exporting_Cataloging_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Maintaining_Your_Catalog.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Purge_cataloging_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Restore_undelete_a_deleted_cataloging_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_promotion_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Promotion_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Creating_and_Editing_Promotion_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_demographic_targeting_for_promotions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_or_edit_general_promotion_information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_search_terms_to_trigger_the_featured_resources.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_the_resource_s_to_feature.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Find_an_existing_promotion_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Managing_Promotions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKquickref/Cataloging_Shortcut_Keys.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_data_fields_in_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_non-MARC_data_in_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_006_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_007_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_008_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_Leader_in_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Bibliographic_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Item_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Check_the_bulk_change_queue_and_run_the_report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_URL_link_to_a_record_set_in_the_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_authority_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_item_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_authority_record_set_from_a_bib_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_item_record_set_from_bib_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_Community_content_carousels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_PAC_content_carousels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Open_an_existing_cataloging_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Print_a_list_of_cataloging_records_from_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Retrieve_records_using_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Using_Cataloging_Record_Sets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Working_With_Multiple_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Options_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Find_cataloging_records_in_library_database.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Methods_for_Adding_New_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Preview_bibliographic_records_from_the_Find_Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Create_a_template_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Save_an_existing_record_as_a_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Using_Cataloging_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Add_or_change_a_MARC_validation_rule.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Administering_MARC_Validation_and_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow or prevent deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow_or_prevent_deletion_of_items_with_linked_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Automatic Display in PAC Processing .htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Cataloging_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_bibliographic_or_authority_deduplication_tables.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_the_sort_order_of_MARC_tags.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_bibliographic_call_numbers_to_item_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_the_price_from_bibliographic_records_to_item_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copying_Bib_Data_to_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Define_a_conditional_validation_rule.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Deleting_MARC_Tags_from_Incoming_Bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Cataloging_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Warning_Messages_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_automatic_tag_deletion_for_bibs_from_remote_databases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_headings_check_when_replacing_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_automatic_MARC_re-indexing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_the_Auto-suggest_feature.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_remote_automatic_authority_control.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_the_Do_not_overlay_feature.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_validation_when_duplicate_bibs_are_replaced.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enabling_Language_Display_Entry_in_Cataloging.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Authority_Control.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Auto-Search_Suggestions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Duplicate_MARC_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Importing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_MARC_Re-indexing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Record_Deletion.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Mark_embedded_holdings_data_as_processed.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy_table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy_table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Retain_deleted_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_Cataloging_security.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_message_for_bibs_that_do_not_display_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_circulation_history_display_for_item_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_limit_on_the_number_of_files_in_a_single_import_job.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_number_of_bibs_that_can_be_replaced_at_once.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_item_templates_to_in-process.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_items_to_in-process.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_automatic_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_the_Subfield_9_cleanup_utility.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_warnings_for_changed_item_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Item_Copy_Save_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Utility_to_Delete_Bib_Tags_Marked_with_Subfield_9.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_the_Cataloging_Directory.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_if_items_with_duplicate_barcodes_can_be_saved.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_import_blackout_times.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_preferred_cataloging_sources_for_authority_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_delete_from_new_bibliographic_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_authority_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_directory_for_Cataloging_files.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_shelving_scheme_for_item_holdings_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_display_name_for_MARC_tags.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_MARC_tag_name_display_on_or_off.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_tag_sorting_on_or_off.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_validation_on_or_off.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/View_the_Authority_Control_database_table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging Workflow Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Administration_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Permissions_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catparamref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catpermref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catprofref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Access_the_event_import_profile_manager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_A_Evanced_Mapping_to_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_B_Plymouth_Rocket_-_EventKeeper_mapping_to_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Create_a_new_events_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_an_events_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_previously_imported_events_for_a_modified_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Edit_an_events_import_profile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Importing_Events_for_Community_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/View_the_Events_Import_Profile_Manager_properties.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCQL/CQL_Access_Points_for_Community_Information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaign_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaigns_for_Community_Promotions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Create_a_campaign_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Delete_a_campaign_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Find_a_campaign_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Modify_a_campaign_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Set_truncation_for_Campaign-generated_promotions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Access_ContentXChange.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Create_a_personalized_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_content_carousel_in_a_Web_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_search_box_in_a_Web_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_social_connections_drawer_in_a_Web_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_ask-a-librarian_link_in_a_Web_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_events_calendar_in_a_Web_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Using_ContentXChange.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Administering_ContentXChange.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Search_Results_Facets_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Setup_for_PAC_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Configuring_the_PAC_Community_Results_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_a_community_information_entity_definition.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_community_information_display_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Multilingual_Supp_for_Dashboard_Titles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Select_community_elements_for_display_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_PAC_community_information_search_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Narrow_Your_Search_Web_Part.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Related_Searches_Web_Part.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_the_default_display_of_Community_Events.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_Ask_Us_without_a_log_in_requirement.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_the_Web_Server_for_ContentXChange.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Setting_Community_Search_Options_for_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Share_a_community_information_display_configuration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_Community_Keyword_search_filters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_an_optional_marketing_message.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Translate_Labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_Parts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/setcommeventdays.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Reports_Notice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Create_a_new_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Creating_or_Editing_a_Community_Record_in_the_Staff_Client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Designate_a_community_representative.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter community services in the staff client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_a_community_event_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_basic_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_social_links_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_subjects_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_more_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Community_report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Stale_Community_Records_notice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Preview_the_community_record_from_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_a_community_record_from_the_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_community_records_from_Find_Tool_results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Printing_Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Search_for_a_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/View_community_record_statistics_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/campaignkeyw.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Access_your_organization_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Editing_Community_Records_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_additional_organization_information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_info_about_your_orgs_services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_subjects_related_to_your_organization.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_basic_info.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_events.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_organizations_social_info.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community Profile Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community_Profiles_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Circ_Holds_Transactions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Item_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_in_the_Polaris_Staff_Client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Reactivate_a_suspended_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_an_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_and_Reactivate_an_Integrated_Vendor_Account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis30MobPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis360PowPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Added_Expired_Copies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_EContent_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Import_Jobs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_MARC_Tags_-_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_an_Axis_360_integrated_vendor_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_the_Axis_360_eContent_import_profile_s.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Export_the_record_set_of_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_Axis_360_eContent_bibs_downloaded_from_TS3.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_existing_Axis_360_records_to_enable_the_integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_Axis_360_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_Existing_Axis_360_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_New_Axis_360_Bibs_Pre-Order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Overlaying_Axis_360_EContent_Bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Patron_Access_to_Axis_360_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Put_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent_records_in_a.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_Baker_Taylor_TS3_MARC_Profile_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_Axis_360.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_Axis_360_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_Axis_360_imports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/_Optional_Delete_the_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Added_Expired_Copies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_EContent_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Import_Jobs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/CloudLink730.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_3M_eContent_import_profile_s.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_a_3M_integrated_vendor_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Delete_the_3M_non-integrated_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_3M_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_Existing_3M_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_New_3M_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/MARC_Tags_in_3M_Bibs_-_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Overlaying_3M_eContent_Bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Patron_Access_to_3M_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Put_existing_non-integrated_3M_bibs_in_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SetUpPrefVendAcctCloudLink.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_3M.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_3M_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SharedCloudLinkinPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_3M_imports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/_Optional_Export_3M_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Check_the_status_of_the_Polaris_API_consumer_service.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Polaris_API_Consumer_Service.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentExp/Expired_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Bulk-create_resource_entities.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_non-integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_resource_entity_from_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Non-Integrated_EContent_in_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_OverDrive_eContent_import_profile_s.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_an_OverDrive_integrated_vendor_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Delete_the_exported_OverDrive_non-integrated_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Export_OverDrive_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_OverDrive_bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_Existing_OverDrive_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_New_OverDrive_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrMobPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrPPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Added_Expired_Copies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_EContent_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Import_Jobs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Overlaying_OverDrive_EContent_Bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Patron_Access_to_OverDrive_EContent.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Put_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_bibs_in_record_sets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Re-import_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_OverDrive.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_OverDrive_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_OverDrive_imports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Configure_the_enriched_content_drawer_for_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Availability_and_Holds_Counts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Product_Page_Display_in_the_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_PAC_Search_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_the_PAC_Patron_Account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Enable_enriched_content_for_Axis_360_or_OverDrive.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Manage_patron_access_to_eContent_using_resource_groups.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Managing_EContent_in_the_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Patron-Initiated_EContent_Circulation_from_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Reqformatecont.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Set_the_loaning_branch_for_eContent_circulations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Setting_up_a_digital-branch.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/preventOverDrivedwnlds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegNewRBdigECont.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegratingExistRBdigital.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/ManualImport.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/PatronAccessRBdigital.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/RecordedBooksEContent-934.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SetUpVendRec.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SettingUpPolRBDigital.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Convert_a_resource_entity_to_an_856_tag.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Copy_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_resource_entity.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Resource_Entities.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/Implementing_EContent_Integration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/OverDrive_and_Changed_Patron_Barcodes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Glossary.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-Reach Reports/INN-Reach Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Log Files.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Status Config.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachPatServ.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/AdditionalforBorrowing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/CheckIN.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ILLHoldCreated.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemCircReturn.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemTemplate.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachVerPatron.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/PolarisBorrowing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReceiveINNReachItem.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReturnILLItem.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/ContDataMapSpreadsheet.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/INNDataProfile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/AdditionalforLending.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/Patron_places_hold.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/PolarisLending.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemouttoremotepat.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemreturnedbyrempat.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/lendinglibprocitemhold.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/GrantPermission.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/INN-ReachParams.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/PolarisINNOverview.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/set_up_patron_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/PolarisINN_P2P_Overview.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Adding_Menu_and_Submenu_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Links.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Pages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Themes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Theme_for_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_custom_theme_for_Children.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Layouts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PAC_Themes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Pages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PowerPAC_Help_Links.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/External_Logon_PAC_Patron_Account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Linking_to_INNReach_Central.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PAC_Customization.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PowerPAC_Directory_Structure.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Protecting_Mobile_PAC_Changes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period_code.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Calculating_Due_Dates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Durations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Periods.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Set_an_end-of-term_due_date.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Setting_End-of-Term_Due_Dates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Block_and_Allow_Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Charging_for_Patron_Registration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Date_Sources_in_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Define_patron_custom_data_fields_PCDFs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Account_Features.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Display_or_suppress_payment_methods.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Enable_reading_histories.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_codes_for_specific_organizations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_custom_data_fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Modify_or_delete_a_PCDF.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Removing_Patron_ID_Information_from_Transaction_Files.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Replace_the_default_photo.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_Polaris_to_waive_fines_at_check-out_or_renewal.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_blocks_for_patron_record_deletion.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_defaults_pat_associations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_drop-menu_user-defined_fields_for_organizations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_express_registration_default_values_and_required_fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_optional_patron_duplicate_detection_fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_options_for_deleting_patron_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_accounting_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_registration_fees.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_identification_purging.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_messages_in_Polaris_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Express_Registration_Defaults_and_Requirements.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Options_for_Deleting_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Accounting_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Duplicate_Detection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Required_Fields_and_Defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Payment_Method_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Reading_History_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Free_Text_User_Defined_Fields_For_Alternate_IDs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Custom_Data_Fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Photos.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_User-Defined_Fields.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Specify Options for Associated Patrons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/View_and_convert_user-defined_fields_for_patron_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_By_Mail_Circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_by_Mail_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Bulk-Processing_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Place_a_Borrow_by_Mail_request.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Placing_Borrow_by_Mail_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Process_individual_Borrow_by_Mail_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Processing_Individual_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPabout/Patron Services topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Add_a_patron_block.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Delete_a_patron_block.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_item_blocks_at_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_patron_blocks_at_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Resolve_a_Verify_Patron_block.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Working_with_Blocks_Stops.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Holds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Notices,_Slips,_Receipts_and_Displays.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Circulating_Bound-With_Materials.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_at_Shelf-Ready_Materials_check-in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_or_barcode_at_check-in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-In.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-in items with missing parts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_a_held_item_with_changed_pickup_location.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_new_shelf-ready_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Checking_In_Shelf-Ready_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Do_a_normal_check-in_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Bulk_Item_Check-Ins.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Normal_Item_Check-Ins.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Resolve_a_fine_at_check-in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Tracking_In-House_Item_Use.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Assign_a_special_loan_period.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check-Out_and_Renewal.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check_out_an_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Items_to_Patrons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Uncataloged_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_an_on-the-fly_item_at_checkout.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_on-the-fly_item_templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Express-register_a_new_patron_at_check-out.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renew_items_from_the_Patron_Status_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renewing_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Reset_due_dates_of_checked-out_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_a_fine_at_renewal.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_fines_and_renewal_charge.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Viewing_Item_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/check_out_blocks_msgs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Estimate_fines_from_the_Patron_Status_workform_-_Claims_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Make_a_claim.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Manage items with missing parts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Reset_patrons_total_claims_count.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Working_with_Claims.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Add_instructors_to_a_course_reserve_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Circulating_Reserved_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_new_course_reserve_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_reserve_item_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_and_use_a_course_reserve_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Deactivate_a_reserve_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Managing_Course_Reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_an_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_items_on_reserve_from_a_course_reserve_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_multiple_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_uncataloged_material_on_reserve.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Placing_Items_on_Reserve.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Remove_an_item_from_reserve.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Reports_for_Course_Reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Send_course_reserve_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Sending_Course_Reserve_Notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Setting_Up_Course_Reserve_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Taking_Items_Off_Reserve.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Transfer_a_reserve_item_to_a_different_course.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Viewing_course_reserve_statistics_from_the_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Cancel_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Daily_Request_Processing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Delete_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Deny_items_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_hold_requests_by_selected_criteria.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_patron_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_requests_linked_to_a_bibliographic_or_item_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Displaying_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Edit_hold_request_data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Editing_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_at_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_with_Fill_Now.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_hold_requests_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Filling_Holds_at_Circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Find_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Group_patron_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Grouping_Patron_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Hold_Request_Messages_and_Blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Holds_Processing_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Cancelled_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Not-supplied_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Unclaimed_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_pending_hold_requests_Requests-to-Fill.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Managing_the_Holds_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_patrons_one_title.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_titles_one_patron.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_single_or_consecutive_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Placing_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Reactivate_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Set a hold request to Ask me later.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Suspend_Reactivate_Holds_in_Bulk_from_Patron_Acct.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Transfer_a_hold_request.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Ungroup_patron_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Working_with_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Cancel_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Convert_hold_requests_to_ILL_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Create_ILL_item_templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Creating_Interlibrary_Loan_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Delete_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Display_ILL_requests_in_the_Requests_Manager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Edit_an_ILL_request.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Exporting_ILL_Requests_to_OCLC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Find_ILL_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Interlibrary_Loan_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receive_an_ILL_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receiving_Interlibrary_Loans.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Returning_Interlibrary_Loans.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Working_with_Interlibrary_Loans.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPinventory/Taking_an_Item_Inventory.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Declare_an_item_lost.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Manage_a_billed_item_that_is_not_Lost.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Managing_Lost_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-paid_item_at_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-unpaid_item_at_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Check_out_items_from_the_pick_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Creating_Outreach_Patron_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Link_from_a_bibliographic_record_to_outreach_services_patrons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Processing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_an_individual_patron.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_multiple_patrons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Processing_Outreach_Services_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_del_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_prefs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_up_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Suspend_and_reactivate_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Working_with_Reader_Ratings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk-Changing_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk_change_patron_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/View_the_Bulk_Change_Report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_In_Quick-Circ_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_Out_Quick-Circ_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Circulating_Ephemeral_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Create_a_quick-circ_item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Creating_Quick-Circ_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/View_modify_or_delete_quick-circ_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickref/Patron_Services_Circulation_Shortcut_Keys.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_terminal_server_environment_and_RDP.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_an_address_to_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_general_data_to_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_notification_data_to_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_and_edit_patron_associations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_or_edit_a_patron_status_note.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_Patron_Mailing_Labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_and_Editing_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Delete_a_patron_record_manually.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Deleting_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merge_patron_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merging_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Associations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Posting_Patron_Messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Remove_items_from_patrons_reading_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Scan_drivers_license_enter_patron_info.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Search_for_patron_records_by_PCDF.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Set_the_address_update_term.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Start_patrons_reading_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Stop_clear_patrons_reading_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Updating_Address_and_Expiration_Term.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Upload_an_existing_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Use_PCDFs_in_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/View_patron_reading_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Patron_Photos.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Reading_Histories.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Find_patron_services_and_related_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Finding_Patron_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Getting_Started_in_Patron_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Access_the_account_data_for_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/BillChargeManu.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_charge_from_the_Account_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_credit_manually.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_a_collection_summary_and_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_notice_histories.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_the_Items_Out_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_completed_account_transactions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_transaction_history.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Displaying_All_Items_Out.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Estimate_fines_on_currently_checked_out_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Generate_an_item_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Make_deposit_in_patrons_acct.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Managing_Credit_Card_Orders.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patron_Status_and_Accounting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patrons_in_Collection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Pay_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Processing_Charges_and_Payments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_amount.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_card_payment_from_Patron_Status_-_Account_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_or_credit_completed_payment_transactions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Remove_a_patron_account_from_collection.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Return_forfeit_or_credit_deposits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Second_Level_Collection_Agency_Management.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Secure_a_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_credit_card_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_PayPal_Payflow.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Taking_Credit_Card_Payments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_credit_card_transactions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_orders_and_refund_credit_card_payments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Viewing_Patron_Financial_Accounts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Waive_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Working_with_Deposits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/collagenwkflw.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/release_a_secured_patron_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/seclistviews.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/secpatrecs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/securepatrecover.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/take_credit_card_pay-EnvisionWare.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Circulation_Workstations_Receipts_Sounds_Smart_Cards.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Correct_an_auto-cut_problem_for_hold_pickup_slips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_receipt_printer_message_text.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_the_workstation_to_print_receipts_and_slips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Circulation_Audio_Signals.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Up_Receipt_Printing_from_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_the_Workstation_for_Smart_Card_Use.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/circ_receipts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Set_up_Borrow_by_Mail_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Setting_Up_Borrow_by_Mail_Circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_EnvisionWare.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_PayPal_Payflow_Pro.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_PayPal_Payflow_Link.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_Payments_Gateway_Secure_Web_Pay.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Class_Point_of_Sale_credit_card_payments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Comprise_SmartPAY_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_EnvisionWare_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Google_reCAPTCHA.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_PayPal_Payflow_Pro_credit_card_payments.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payflow_Link_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payments_Gateway_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_PayPal_Payflow_Link_gateway_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_Payments_Gateway_SWP_account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Setting_Up_E-Commerce.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Using_Class_Point_of_Sale_with_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayExpress.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayPACs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaydonat.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayexclinhou.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaymanager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaypartial.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayprivandref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaystaff.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/e-commerce-with-jetpay.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/handling-refunds-jetpay.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-account.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-processing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditParams/Credit_Card_Payment_Parameters_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Add_a_hold_note_to_incoming_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Delete_temporary_records_when_item_is_checked_in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_medium_types_to_item_material_types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_user_privileges_to_Polaris_patron_codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Mapping_NCIP_Data_to_Polaris_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_fiscal_action_types_mapping.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_payment_types_mapping.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_SIP_payment_types_mapping.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/NCIP_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Prevent_creation_of_holds_in_response_to_ILL_message.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Select_an_institutional_patron.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Set up centralized or decentralized NCIP processing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Setting_NCIP_Parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Specify_the_NCIP_user_privilege_type.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPParamsRef/Patron_Services_Parameters_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_Permissions_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_and_Patron_Services_Workflow_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPProfRef/Patron_Services_Profiles_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPRequestParams/Request_Parameters_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_an_item_block_description.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_select_and_order_patron_block_entries.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Calculating_and_Blocking_for_Estimated_Accrued_Fines.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Circ_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Item_Blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Loan_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Material_Type_Group_Limits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron-Initiated_Circulation_Blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron_Block_Descriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/List_and_modify_loan_and_request_limit_entries.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_blocks_on_patron-initiated_circulation_and_ebook_circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_blocks_for_claims.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_check-out_limits_by_material_type_groups.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_estimate_accrued_fine_calculations_and_blocking.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_Check_In_list_view_fields_for_patron_and_item_data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_item_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_patron_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_Circulation_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_Out_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Collection_Processing_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Generate_the_Collection_Agency_Synchronization.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Managing_Collection_Agency_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Using_a_Collection_Agency.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_course_schedule_information_for_course_reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_courses_for_course_reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_departments_for_course_reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_schools_divisions_for_course_reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Set_default_values_for_reserve_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Tables.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Up_Course_Reserves.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fee_description_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_amount.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_code.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Calculating_Overdue_Fines.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Charging_for_Checkout_and_Renewal.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fee_Descriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fines_and_Fees.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Overdue_Fines_on_Lost_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_a_maximum_overdue_fine_balance.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_fee_descriptions_for_branch-level_display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_lost_item_charge_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_lost_item_recovery_default_actions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_replacement_charge_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_up_charges_for_checkout_and_renewal.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Amounts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Lost_Item_Recovery_Defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Replacement_Fee_Defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designate_collections_as_eligible_to_float.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designating_Floating_Collections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Processing_Overview.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Setup_Examples.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Troubleshooting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_floating_items_for_the_same_title_a_branch_can_receive.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_number_of_floa.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_parameters_and_profiles_for_floating_collections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_branches_to_receive_floating_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_material_types_that_cannot_float.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Branch_Parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Home_and_Receiving_Branch_Policies.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Up_Floating_Collections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Automatic_Process_Lost_Missing_Withdrawn_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Defining_Material_Types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Displaying_Items_Last_Borrower.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Enable the auto-renew process.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Item_Record_Circulation_Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up missing item transition to withdrawn.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set_shelving_status_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Setting_Shelving_Status.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Understanding_shelving_status_period.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/View_circulation_status_names_and_edit_descriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Viewing_Circulation_Statuses.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Enable_the_media_dispenser.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media Dispenser_-_Errors_and_Troubleshooting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media_Dispenser_ Circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnoticeParams/Notification_Parameters_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_By_E-mail.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_by_Text_Message.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Fine_Notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Managing_Notification.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Overdue_Notices_Bills_and_Combined_Notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_overdue_bill_fine_or_request_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_patron_billing_statements.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Printing_Notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Reminder_Notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Request_Pick-Up_Second_Pick-Up_Cancelled_Request_Notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Send_e-mail_special_announcements.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_notification_prerequisites.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_reminder_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_fine_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_notification_methods_e-mail_options_and_export_location.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_overdue_notices_bills_and_combined_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_request_pick-up_second_pick-up_cancelled_request_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Specify_available_carriers_for_phone_and_text_messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/CopyMDBFilesAuto.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Copy_files__server_manu.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Managing_Offline_Circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Manually_update_the_offline_files.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_auto_offline.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_man_upload.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/View_and_upload_offline_transaction_files.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Working_Offline.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/enable_the_sql_job.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/log_file.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/set_up_auto_offline_param.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/upload_rep_warn.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Prompt_-_update_next_service_date_at_normal_check_out.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_branch_items_to_include_in_outreach_selection_lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_circulation_statuses_for_outreach_selection_lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_delivery_mode_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_disability_selections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_equipment_selections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_pick_list_column_heads.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_reading_history_limits_for_outreach_patrons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_outreach_delivery_routes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_reader_ratings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_the_packing_list_content_and_print_method_for_reader.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Delivery_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Items_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Patrons_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Outreach_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Reader_Ratings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Enable_hold_call_slips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Epson_ReStick_Printers_Hold_In-Transit_Slips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_Items_Out_receipt_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-in_receipt_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-out_receipt_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_fine_receipt_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_hold_slip_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_in-transit_slip_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_option_to_open_the_cash_drawer_only_for_cash_fine_receipts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_receipt_printer_control_codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_eReceipts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_hold_pickup_slips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Circulation_Receipts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Printed_Receipts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_eReceipts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Add_a_not-supplied_reasons_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_pickup_location_from_ PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_the_hold_pickup_location_from_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Defining_Hold_Statuses_and_Hold_Not_Supplied_Reasons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Edit_hold_request_status_descriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/HoldsroutingSeq.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Managing_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Restrict_holds_on_specific_items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Alerts_and_blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Charge_for_hold_requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Define_Terms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enable_patrons_pickup.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enabling_Item_Status_Restrictions_First.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Exclude_Pickup_branches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_ILL.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Preferred_borrowers_branches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Queue_and_Trapping_preferences.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_RTF_processing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_Holds_and_ILL_Request_Processing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_ILL_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/allowrenewitemholds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/definepickupbranch.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_copy_serials.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_multipart.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holds_onorder_multivolsets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holdsrouttable.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Add_a_self-check_material_type_entry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Set_SIP_self-check_parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_SIP_payment_types_and_Polaris_payment_methods.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_Up_SIP_Self-Check_Circulation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheckParams/Self-Check_Parameters_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Review_and_set_Patron_Services_parameters_and_profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Set_circulation_security.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Policy_and_Database_Tables.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Patron_Services_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/overrideblks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_a_patron_statistical_code.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_an_item_statistical_code.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Item_Statistical_Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Patron_Statistical_Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Setting_Statistical_Codes_for_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Enter_a_Computype_printer_command.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Find_Computype_printer_commands.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Setting_Up_Computype_Label_Printers.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Basic_Shortcut_Keys.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_linked_record_from_a_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_a_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_New_Records_in_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_and_Deleting_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_a_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_multiple_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Deleting_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_author_series_or_subject.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_call_number_or_title.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Customize_the_Find_Tool_by_user.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_SQL_search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_power_search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_Power_Searches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Basic_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Browse_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Keyword_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Phrase_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Finding_Polaris_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Get_a_count_of_records_without_displaying_them.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Link_to_other_records_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Polaris_Find_Tool_Overview.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Resolving_Find_Tool_Search_Issues.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Scoping_Searches_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_by_keyword.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_for_a_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_using_a_saved_SQL_search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Branches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Collections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Remote_Databases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Send_search_results_to_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Set_Find_Tool_results_limits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_A_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_SQL_Searches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Use_the_context_menu_in_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Using_Find_Tool_Results_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Access_Polaris_licenses.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Close_all_windows_within_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Encountering_Permission_Blocks.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Exit_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Getting_Started_in_Polaris.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Linking_to_Other_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Polaris Display Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_a_record_from_a_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_search_results_from_the_Find_Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_selected_entries_in_a_workform_list_view.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Printing_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Start_and_log_on_to_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Menus.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Viewing_Record_Props.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Get_quick_help_with_a_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Use_topic-level_Help_in_the_staff_client.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Using_Online_Help.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Add_records_to_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_all_the_Find_Tool_results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_specific_Find_Tool_results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Creating_and_Using_Record_Sets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_a_record_set_from_the_Record_Set_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_member_records_from_the_database.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_record_sets_from_the_Find_Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Remove_records_from_a_record_set.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Acq_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Borrow_By_Mail_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Cat_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Circ_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_a_report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_an_internal_report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/E-mail_save_or_print_a_report_using_the_toolbar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Generate_a_report.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Holds_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/ILL_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Inventory_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Outreach_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/PAC_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Public_Services_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Serials_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Staff_and_Wkstn_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/System_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Telephony_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Using_Polaris_Standard_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Polaris_Basics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDODeepLinks/Deep_Links_to_Polaris_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Baker_Taylor_Enriched_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/ChiliFresh_Enriched_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/EBSCO_NoveList_Enriched_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Enabling_Enriched_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/LibraryThing_Enriched_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Syndetics_Enriched_Data.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Edit_PowerPAC_messages_and_labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Editing_Messages_and_Labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/PAC_Messages_and_Labels_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Configuring_the_Mobile_PAC_Title_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Credit_Card_Payments_from_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Enable_branch_switching_and_set_branch_display_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Basics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Results_Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Search_Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/New_Popular_Titles_in_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Account_My_Account_in_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Log-In_Settings_for_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Registration_in_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Polaris_Fusion_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Saved_Searches_Search_Agent_in_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_Full_Site_link.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_connection_URL.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_up_the_Mobile_PAC_title_product_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Ask_Us_in_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Connections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Library_Information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Title_Lists_in_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobileProfs/Mobile_PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Administration_Reference_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Childrens_Pages_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Pages_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Standard_PAC_Pages_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Controlling_Patron_Account_Login_Access.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_PCDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_UDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Enable_patron_account_access_-_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Limit_log-in_attempts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_Up_PAC_Active_Directory_Log_On.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_an_inactivity_timeout_for_in-house_workstations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_associations_display_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_password_and_user_name_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_a_privacy_statement_link_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_and_start_Ask_Us.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_account_updates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_self-registration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Patron_Account_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Up_Patron_Account_Access.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/claimlostSA.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navMobPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navPowPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPowerProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Profiles_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Auto-Search_Suggestions_-_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Customizing_Search-by_Labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/PAC_Search_Agent_Saved_Searches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/RelatedWords.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_Record_Sets_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_PAC_search_setting_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_availability_search_filters_for_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_type_of_material_custom_search_filters_for_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Available_Search_Types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Did_You_Mean_Term_Checking.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Search_Filters_Limit_By.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specify_level_of_relevance_applied_to_popularity_sort.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specifying_Default_Search_Settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSocial/Polaris_Social_with_ChiliFresh_Connections.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOabout/Public_Access_Administration_Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOccl/PAC_CQL_Commands_Access_Points.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_category.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_search_target_to_a_category.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_text_to_children_Events_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Administering_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Assign_themes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Construct_a_theme.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Copy_a_category_or_target.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customize_children_item_availability_display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customizing_Children_Results_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Filter_children_searches.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Children_Dashboards.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Search_Categories.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Themes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_children_search_buttons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Setting_Children_Search_Limits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_a_category_or_target.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_all_categories_and_targets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchildProfs/Childrens_PAC_Profiles_Ref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/E-Source_Reports.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetGetTransfer .htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetPostTransfer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Managing_E-Sources.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Organizing_E-Source_Targets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Provide_links_to_e-sources_on_external_sites.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Set_up_an_e-source_target.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Setting_Up_E-Source_Targets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Events_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Policies_page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Administering_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Assign_Web_parts_to_public_pages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Content_Carousels_on_the_PowerPAC_Portal_Page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Create_a_custom_Web_part.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customize_the_page_header.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Language_Strings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Portal_Page_Features.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Defining_Web_Parts_for_Dashboards.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Limit_items_in_Polaris_and_third-party_lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Polaris_PowerPAC_Help.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_Polaris_PowerPAC_features_on_the_menu_bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_custom_portal_page_content.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_quick_search_with_search_option_buttons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_rotating_book_jackets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Polaris_PowerPAC_Themes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_Live_Virtual_Reference_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_RSS_Feeds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Type of Material Filters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/configuring_cookie_policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/customizing_cookie_policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/enabling_cookie_policy_message.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/powerpac_cookie_acceptance.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Enabling_Online_Book_Purchases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Polaris_Bookstore.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Purchase_Links.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Bulk_Hold_Requests_PowerPAC_Title_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Product_Page.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Title_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Cross-Reference_Display_in_Browse_Search_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Define_custom_entities.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_Bound-With_Materials_in_the_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_PAC_Search_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_a_bibliographic_entity_definition.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_bibliographic_information_display_order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Enabling_PAC_Title_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Feature_It_Promotions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Google_Preview_for_PowerPAC_Search_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Highlighting_Titles_with_Local_Items_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Map_It_Google_Maps_in_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Naming_Shelf_Locations.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/One_Click_Hold_Requests.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Select_bibliographic_entities_for_display_and_edit_labels.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Sending_Call_Numbers_by_Text_Message.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_Map_It_for_PowerPAC_and_or_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Narrow_your_search_Web_part1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Related_searches_Web_part1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_PowerPAC_Narrow_Related_Search_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Local_and_System_Availability.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Recently_Viewed_Titles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Share_a_bibliographic_information_display_configuration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Social_Bookmarking_for_Search_Results_AddThis.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppress_entities_from_small_screen.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Items_from_Search_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Request_and_Availability_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/TitleDispRef.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Translate_labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_parts_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPowPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/suppressPACavail.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Public_Access_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Review_and_set_public_access_profiles_and_parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Configure_remote_database_usage_settings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Develop_the_remote_targets_display_for_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Managing_Federated_Search_Targets.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Maximum_Number_of_Databases_Searchable_at_One_Time.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Merged_Results_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Organizing_Target_Databases_for_PowerPAC_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Remote_Database_Usage_Settings_for_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_from_the_Serial_Issue_Part_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_issues_parts_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_Issues_or_Parts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_in_Serials.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_claiming_criteria_in_the_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_serials_claiming_information_in_the_Supplier_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Entering_Serials_Claiming_Information.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Print_a_claim_notice.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_serial_item_from_the_Issue_Part_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_special_issue_part_at_check_in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_irregular_serial_issues_parts_at_check-in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_an_issue_or_part_status.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_serial_label_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_from_the_Issue_Standing_Order_Part.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_from_a_linked_list_box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_parts_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_single_or_multiple_issues_from_the_Find_Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Checking_In_Serials.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Combine_issues.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_a_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_single_or_multiple_serial_issues_parts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Print_a_label_for_a_serial_issue_or_part.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Uncheck_in_issues_or_standing_order_parts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_or_an_issue_to_a_route_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_members_to_a_route_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Copy_a_route_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Create_a_route_list.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Creating_Route_Lists.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Print_a_route_slip.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Printing_Route_Slips.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Return_a_routed_issue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Routing_Serial_Issues.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_Serial_Holdings_Records_Title.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_a_Publication_Pattern.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Close_a_publication_pattern.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_publication_pattern_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_publication_pattern_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Publication_Pattern_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Serial_Item_Templates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_a_Publication_Pattern.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_and_Copying_Serial_Holdings_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Displaying_Serial_Titles_in_the_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Edit_a_publication_pattern_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_order_data_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_public_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_staff_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Establish_chronology_and_enumeration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_a_publication_pattern.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_publication_pattern_options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_from_serial_holdings.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_with_different_titles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Publication_Pattern_Examples.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Rename_a_publication_pattern_template.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Reopen_a_publication_pattern.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Review_publication_patterns_prediction.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Set_up_the_serial_publication_pattern_regularity.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Setting_Up_Serials_Records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Specify_the_publication_pattern_for_a_serial_title.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Use_a_template_to_create_a_publication_pattern.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Find_serial_records.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Record_Types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Workflow_Overview.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Starting_a_Serials_Task.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_to_a_subscription_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Cancel_a_subscription.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Copy_a_subscription_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Create_a_subscription_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Managing_Subscriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_a_subscription_from_the_subscription_record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_subscriptions_from_Subscription_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Reopen_a_subscription.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Shortcut_Keys.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/View_the_Subscription_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Admin_Ref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Permissions_Referencet.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Workflow_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serialsprofref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serparamref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Administration.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Permissions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_automatic_deletion_of_linked_issues_parts_when_items_are.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_serials_security.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_the_prompt_for_price_at_check-in.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_claiming_notification.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_routing_notices.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_serials_route_list_defaults.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_subscriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Delete_of_Issue_Part_with_Item.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Routing.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Serials_Claiming.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Subscriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Prompt.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_the_Check_In_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Specify_the_display_of_issues_on_the_Check_In_workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_disconnect_hang-up_criteria.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_hardware_communications.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configuring_the_Phone_Attendant.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Phone_Attendant_Overview.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Set_Phone_Attendant_options_for_specific_lines.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Setting_Up_Inbound_Telephony.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Specify_language_voice_speech_rate_and_volume.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Add_a_no-call_date.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Delivering_Notices_by_Phone_Outbound_Telephony.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Outbound_Telephony_Reports_and_Trouble-Shooting.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_SAPI_voice_parameters_for_outbound_telephony.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_dialing_hours.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_general_telephone_notification_parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Setting_Outbound_Telephony_Parameters.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Voices_for_Outbound_Telephony.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Adjusting_Pronunciation.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Customizing_Telephony_Messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Edit_a_SAPI_voice_message_with_Polaris_Language_Editor.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Editing_Messages_and_Prompts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Install_and_Use_the_TTS_Lexicon_Editor.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Parameters_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Topics.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Import_Profile_Window.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Events_Import_Profile_Manager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Search_Setting_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Orders_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Transactions_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Books_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Computer_Files_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Continuing_Resources_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Music_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Globe_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Kit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Map_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Microform_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Motion_Picture_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Nonprojected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Notated_Music_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Projected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Remote_Image_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Sound_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Tactile_Material_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Text_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Unspecified_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Video_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Books_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Computer_Files_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Continuing_Resources_Dialog.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Fixed_Field_for_Authority_Record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Music_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/Fixed_Fields_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRMailingLabel/Mailing_Label_Manager_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Patrons_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Pick_List_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Pick_List_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Selection_List_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Details_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Transactions_View.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Acquisitions_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Amount_Credited_Discounted_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Fund_Balances_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Line_Item_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Approve_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Assign_Template_Name_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Change_PO_Line_Item_Line_Item_Segment_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_In_Shelf-Ready_Materials_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Selection_List_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Alert_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_Lines_to_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Credits_Discounts_Dialog.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicate_Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicates_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/EDI_File_Sent_Warning_Message_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Funds_Linked_List_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Line_Item_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Line_Item_Segment_Receiving_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Link_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Linked_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Merge_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Check_Voucher_Number.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Decision_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Invoice_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overencumbrance_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overexpenditure_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Payment_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Process_EDI_Invoices_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purge_Purchase_Orders_and_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rapid_Receipt_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Receive_ASN_Shipments_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Record_Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rename_a_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Segment_Payment_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Line_Item_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Split_Funds_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Supplier_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Transfer_Money_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Update_Currency_Exchange_Rates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Addresses_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Removal_Conflicts_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Client_Visual_Alert_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Collection_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/ContactPersPolTab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Currencies_Policy_Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Default_Directory_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/General_Administration_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Library_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Network_Domains.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Object_Locks_Database.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Permission_Group_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Polaris_Administration_Explorer.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal Codes Database Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal_Codes_Tables_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Proxy_Server_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_Server_Set_Up_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_of_Unavailable_Targets_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Resource_Group_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Search_Server_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Server_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Staff_Member_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/System_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Transaction_Logging.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Vendor_Account_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Workstation_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Acquisitions_Serials_Administration_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Branch_Fund_Filter.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claim_Reasons_Policy_Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claiming_Cancellation_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Display_of_Issues_on_Check_In.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/EDI_Invoice_Default_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund Categories Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund_Drop-down_List_Box_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Link to Supplier Databases Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Route_List_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Selection_List_Line_Item_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Titles_to_Go_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Control.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Deduplication.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Overlay_Retention.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Record_Import_Preferred_Cataloging_Source.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Deduplication.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Tags_to_Retain_Delete.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Campaigns_Truncation_Option_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cataloging_Administration_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Computype_Label_Printer_Commands.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Countries.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cross_Reference_Display_Constants.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Did_You_Mean_Overrides.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/EContent_Vendor_Record.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Geographic_Coordinates.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Import_Blackout_Times_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Initial_Articles.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Availability_Display_Order.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Language_Scoping_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Validation_Editor.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Material_Types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/New_Vendor_Account_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/PAC_Community_Limit_By_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Author.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Title.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Remote_Automatic_Authority_Control_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Search_Databases.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/_9_Cleanup_Utility_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Accrued_Fine_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Address_Verification_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Associated_Patron_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Borrow_by_Mail_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Branch_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CLASS_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out Item Options Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_Patron_Services.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Circulation Statuses Database Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Collection_Agency_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Comprise_MSP_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Consortium_Circulation_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course Reserves Course Names Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResDeptPolTab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResSchoolDivPolTab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResTermsPolTab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course_Reserve_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Dates_Closed_Policy_Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Duplicate_Detection_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/EReceipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/End_of_Term_Due_Date_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Express_Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fee_Descriptions.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_and_Loan_Period_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Codes_Policy_Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Policy_Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Finished_Transaction_Deletion_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Collection Limit Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Material Type.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Options Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/FloatingToBranchPolTab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating_Material_Limits.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold Request Statuses Database Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Pickup_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds Routing Sequences Primary.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Item_Pickup_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Routing_Sequences_Secondary_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hours_of_Operation_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Institutional_Patron_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-House IP Addresses Database Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-Transit_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Availability Display Order Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Block Descriptions Database Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Statistical Class Codes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Items_Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Patron_Messages.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Licensed_Languages_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Period Codes Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Periods Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost Item Transition Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Recovery_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Type_Groups_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Types_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Media_Dispenser_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Missing Item Transition Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Mobile_Carriers_Database.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Fiscal_Action_Types_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_ILL_Holds_Add_Staff_Display_Note_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_In_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_Out_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Payment_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_User_Priv_Types.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/No_Fine_Days_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Notification_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Packing_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Reading_History_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Online_Payment_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Optional_Patron_Data_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Mode_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Disability_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Equipment_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Excluded_Circ_Stat_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Included_Branches_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Pick_List_Head.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Title_Rating_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Overnight_Loan_Period_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatAddressTypesdatatab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatNameTitlesDataTable.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Codes_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Delete_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Initiated_Circulation_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Material_Type_Loan_Limit_Policy_Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Message_Text_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Filter_Patron_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Services_Administration_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Stat_Codes_Policy1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PayPal_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payflow_Link_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payment Methods Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payments_Gateway_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Reading_History_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Receipt_Printer_Control_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Registration_Fee_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Remove_Patron_ID_from_Circ_Transactions_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Replacement_Fee_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SAPI_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SelfCheck Material Types Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelf Locations Database Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelving_Status_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Def_Due_Date_Mod-Reas_Policy.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Defined_Fields_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/You_Saved_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/envisionconnect.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_charges.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pickup.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pref.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_req.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_RTF.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_pac.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Change_Labels_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Category_Config_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Default_Search_Limits_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Code_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Configure_DataBase_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Copy_Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_search_Related_searches_-_Modify_Search.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Source_Target_Categorization_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Sources_Add_Modify_Target_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Enriched_Data_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_Advanced_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_General_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Feature_It_Screen_Display_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Google_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/In-House_Access_Definitions_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Children_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Most_Popular_Sort_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/New_and_Popular_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Limit_By_Display.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Login_Retries_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Page_Header_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Renewal_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Inactivity_Timeout_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_eReceipts_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Portal_Page_Content_Carousels_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PowerPAC_Mobile_PAC_Analytics_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_Mobile_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_PowerPAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Public_Access_Administration_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Purchase_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Quick_Search_Button_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Recently_Viewed_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Related_Words_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Categorization_of_Target_Databases_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Usage_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Resource_Groups_Search_Results_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Agent_Parameters_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Settings_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Availability_and_Requests_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Item_Display_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Tag_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Assignment_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Construction_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Virtual_Reference_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Page_-_Web_Part_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Part_Editor_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_Course_Reserve_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Create_Links_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Deletion_Options.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Template_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Update_Links_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Bulk_Change_Job_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_006_Tag_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_007_1_or_007_2_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_008_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Data_Fields_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Leader_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Non-MARC_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Records_Automatic_Display_in_PAC_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Template_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Campaigns_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Cataloging_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Character_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Details_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_MARC_21_Format_Results_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_for_Linked_Records_Results.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Copy_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Import_Profile_Window.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Resource_Entity.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Customize_Label_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Edit_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Jobs_Queue.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Profile_Manager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Barcode_Range_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Call_Number_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Circulation_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Location_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Misc_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Notes_Blocks_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Report_Record_Set_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Template_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Label_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Last_Copy_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Link_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Bibliographic_Records_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Cataloging_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Reserve_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Macro_Selection_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Bibs.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Items.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Item_Record_Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Record_Set_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Page_Label_Details_Dialog_Boxes.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Authority_Records_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Bibliographic_Records_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Item_Records_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Record_Sets_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_window_-Profile_Setup_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Preview_MARC_Data_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Promotion_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Properties_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Criteria_List.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Records_List_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Links_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Found_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Sets_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Replace_Check_for_Duplicates_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Reserve_Item_Template_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Scan_Barcode_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Select_Headings_Results_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Set_Default_Printers_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/System_Generated_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Template_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Associated_Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Bookmobile_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntry.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryCourse.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryOTF.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ChargeMisParts.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_In_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_Out_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Circulation_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Declare_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Fill_Hold_Renew_Item_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Floating_Limit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Hold_Request_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Holds_Queue_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ILL_Request_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Item_Record_Set_Setup.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Linked_Hold_Requests_List_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Patrons.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Options_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Overdue_Fine_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Checkout_Charge_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Registration_Fee_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reactivate_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Request_Manager_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reset_Due_Date_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Resolve_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Serial_Holds_Serial_Multi_Volume_Holds.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Set_Free_Days_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Special_Loan_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Transfer_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/General_User_Interface_Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Label_Manager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Link_to_Supplier_Databas.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Linked_Records_Dialog_Bo.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris User Interface Reference.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Find_Tool.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Save_SQL_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Add_Edit_Associated_Patrons_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Associated_Patron_Records_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Charge_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Template_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Create_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Credit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Deposit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Estimated_Fines_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Forfeit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Course_Reserves_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Patron_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Notification_History_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Address_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Blocks_Notes_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_General_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Registration_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Reports_Record_Set_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_UDFs_Tab.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Merge_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Record_Set_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Registration_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Services_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Status_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Pay_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Refund_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/RenewChrgItem.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Return_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Special Item Check-in Dialog Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Waive_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/addfromfile.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Check_In_Workform1.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Bibliographic_Record_from_Standing_Order_Part_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Publication_Pattern_-_Pattern_Options_Window.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Expenditure_Prediction_Percentage_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/New_Route_List_Member_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Print_Route_Slip_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Publication_Pattern_Template_Manager.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Reopen_Subscription_Dialog_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Route_List_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Holdings_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issue_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issues_List_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serials_Workforms.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_List_Box.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_List_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_Record_Workform.htm create mode 100644 Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Welcome_page.htm diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/FrontMatter/LegalNotices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/FrontMatter/LegalNotices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff4fe842 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/FrontMatter/LegalNotices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Legal Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Legal Notices

+

© Innovative Interfaces Incorporated and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. All trademarks shown are the property of their respective owners. + +

+

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find any errors, please report them to us in writing. + +

+

The software and related documentation are provided under an agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your agreement or allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit, perform, publish, or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation of the software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited. + +

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf5ded72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris Acquisitions Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Polaris Acquisitions Overview

+

With Polaris Acquisitions, you can automate and streamline the following common acquisitions processes:

+
    +
  • +

    Managing the acquisitions budget - Using fund records linked to a fiscal year record, you can track encumbrances and expenditures for materials and services. You can also set up donor funds to track the items that were purchased using these funds. Once your acquisitions budget is set up in Polaris, the funds are available to link to selection lists, purchase orders, and invoices. When the purchase order is released or the invoice is paid, the linked funds are automatically encumbered or expended.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Maintaining supplier records - You set up supplier records that contain all the information you need for sending paper or electronic orders to your suppliers.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Selecting the materials - You can use selection lists to compile lists of materials to order. These materials can be approved, automatically checked for duplicates, and then copied to a purchase order.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Ordering items - You can create purchase orders using several different methods, depending on the level of automation you want and your library’s workflow. Each purchase order has information for the order as a whole at the header level, bibliographic information for each title at the line item level, and distribution information (destination, collection, and fund) for the copies at the line item segment level.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Receiving shipments - You can receive a whole order, all the items in an order, all copies of specific titles in an order, or certain copies of a title. You can also use Rapid Receipt to receive multiple purchase order line items from the Invoice workform. If your library sends EDI orders to a vendor that provides an Advanced Shipping Notice, you can receive an entire carton at a time. If your library sends Enriched EDI orders, your circulation staff can check in and receive shelf-ready materials at the same time.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Claiming items - You can set up claiming criteria in Polaris, so that if you order items and do not receive them within a specified period of time, an automatic claim alert is generated and appears on the Claim Alert List.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Canceling items - When you need to cancel items, you can cancel the entire order or specific lines of the purchase order. If you need to order from a different supplier, you can copy the purchase order or lines within the purchase order to a new purchase order with a different supplier.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Closing purchase orders - When your library is no longer receiving a subscription or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher., the purchase order can be closed. You can also close partly received purchase orders when the vendor cannot supply the materials.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Creating invoices - Invoices are created automatically for prepaid and EDI orders. If your library prevents partial shipment EDI invoices from being created automatically, you can generate these EDI invoices separately. You can also copy purchase orders to an invoice or create an invoice without a purchase order. Or, you can simultaneously receive purchase order line items and add the corresponding invoice line items using Rapid Receipt.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Distributing charges, credits, and discounts - You can distribute charges, credits, and discounts across multiple line items and segments within an invoice.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Paying invoices - You can pay an entire invoice, individual line items on an invoice, or segments within an invoice line item. You can also view all charges for an invoice and the payment history. After paying the invoice in Polaris, you can print a voucher.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Adjusting prepaid invoices - On prepaid invoices, you can adjust the discount or unit price for line items and the credits for line item segments. Header charges can be adjusted using a miscellaneous invoice linked to the prepaid invoice.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Crediting invoices - After an invoice has been paid or prepaid, you can credit the entire invoice, multiple lines within an invoice, a single line item, or segments within a line item.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Linking invoices - You can link multiple invoices together so that you can see debit and credit activities posted against the original invoice.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Creating reports - Many standard Acquisitions reports are available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. If your library has Polaris SimplyReports, you can generate order and invoice reports using a variety of output columns and filters.

    +
  • +
+

For more information on the features and functions in Polaris Acquisitions, see the following topics:

+

Acquisitions Setup Checklist +

+

Steps for setting up Polaris Acquisitions

+

Acquisitions Workflows, Record Types and Automatic Processes +

+

Descriptions of the acquisitions workflows your library can use; the Polaris Acquisitions record types; and automatic processes that can streamline acquisitions.

+

Setting Up the Acquisitions Budget

+

How to establish and maintain your acquisitions budget and track fund usage.

+

Setting Up Supplier Records

+

Recording and maintaining information about your library’s suppliers; entering the EDI data for the supplier; reporting on suppliers’ efficiency in filling orders.

+

Setting Up Templates for Acquisitions

+

Using templates to speed up your acquisitions processes.

+

Setting Up Selection Lists

+

Creating selection lists and automatically copying titles to purchase orders.

+

Ordering

+

Creating, releasing, and sending purchase orders; EDI ordering; Polaris Titles to Go.

+

Receiving Orders

+

Receiving orders using various methods; printing workslips; and methods for processing new items.

+

Claiming

+

Claiming items that have not been received within a specified time period.

+

Canceling Orders

+

Canceling items and printing cancellation notices.

+

Closing Orders

+

Closing partially received purchase orders.

+

Invoicing +

+

Creating, paying, crediting, adjusting, and linking invoices; EDI invoices.

+

Distributing/Adjusting Invoice Charges/Credits +

+

Distributing charges, credits, and discounts across multiple line items and segments within an invoice.

+

Paying Invoices +

+

Pay an entire invoice, individual line items on an invoice, or segments within an invoice line item; printing vouchers.

+

Adjusting Prepaid Invoices +

+

Adjusting invoice charges for the invoice for specific line item segments on an invoice; adjusting the discount or unit price on a line item or the credits for line item segments.

+

Crediting Invoices +

+

Crediting invoices when library has received a refund or credit.

+

Acquisitions Shortcut Keys

+

List of shortcut keys.

+

Acquisitions Administration Overview +

+

Setting up Acquisitions in Polaris Administration

+

Acquisitions Administration Reference +

+

Reference lists for Acquisitions permissions, parameters and profiles.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions_Shortcut_Keys.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions_Shortcut_Keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48044458 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/Acquisitions_Shortcut_Keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Shortcut Keys + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Acquisitions Shortcut Keys

+

These charts list keyboard shortcuts you can use with Polaris Acquisitions workflows.

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

General

+
FUNCTIONKEYS
Workform helpF1
New dialog boxCTRL+N
Close workformALT+F4
Save recordCTRL+S
Print current viewCTRL+P
Print current list viewCTRL+SHIFT+P
+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Purchase Order Workform

+
FUNCTIONKEYS
Add Line ItemCTRL+I
Claim Line ItemCTRL+M
Cancel Line itemCTRL+N
Receive Line ItemCTRL+R
Copy Line ItemCTRL+T
Refresh list viewCTRL+E
+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Purchase Order Line Item Workform

+
FUNCTIONKEYS
Receive SegmentCTRL+R
Copy SegmentCTRL+Y
Modify SegmentCTRL+M
+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Invoice Workform

+
FUNCTIONKEYS
Add Line ItemCTRL+I
Receive Line ItemCTRL+R
Credit Line ItemCTRL+E
Pay Line ItemCTRL+Y
Refresh list viewCTRL+E
+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Selection List Workform

+
FUNCTIONKEYS
Add Line ItemCTRL+I
Delete Line ItemCTRL+D
Refresh list viewCTRL+E
Copy segment dataCTRL+N
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_invoice_line_item_segment_credits_and_discounts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_invoice_line_item_segment_credits_and_discounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54f81da4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_invoice_line_item_segment_credits_and_discounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Adjust invoice line item segment credits and discounts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adjust Invoice Line Item Segment Credits and Discounts

+

To adjust invoice credits and discounts for prepaid invoice line item segments.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform for the prepaid line.
  2. +
  3. Right-click the segment for which you want to adjust credits or discounts, and select Adjust Credits from the context menu.
  4. +

    Tip:
    Click after selecting the segment.

    +

    The Adjust Amount Credited/Discounted dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select one of the following options:
  6. +
      +
    • Overwrite existing value to change the amount credited/discounted to the amount you specify.
    • +
    • Adjust existing value to change the amount you specify to the amount credited/discounted.
    • +
    +
  7. To include a note, type it in the Note box.
  8. +
  9. Type the amount to credit or discount in the Amount box.
  10. +
  11. Click OK to submit your settings.
  12. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_discount_unit_price_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_discount_unit_price_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29bd6893 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_discount_unit_price_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Adjust line item discount/unit price on a prepaid invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adjust Line Item Discount/Unit Price on a Prepaid Invoice

+

For prepaid invoices, you can adjust the unit price or discount at the line item level, and charges at the line item segment level.

+

To adjust the discount or unit price for a prepaid invoice line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform for the prepaid line.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Adjust from the menu. + +

    The Adjust Line Item dialog box appears.

    Note:
    Each time the Adjust Line Item dialog box is used for a prepaid invoice, it affects the invoice, its line item segments, and all linked funds. A fund transaction is posted for the amount of the adjustment in every fund linked to the invoice line item segments.

  4. +
  5. Choose one of the following Type options:
    • To adjust the discount, select Discount (%).
    • To adjust the unit price, select Unit Price.
  6. +
  7. To add a note, type it in the Note field. This note appears on the Payment History view of the Invoice workform.
  8. +
  9. In the Amount box, type the percentage if you are adjusting the discount, or a dollar amount if you are adjusting the unit price.
  10. +
  11. Click OK to submit your settings. + +

    If you are adjusting the unit price, the Record Check/Voucher Data dialog box appears with the adjustment amount.

  12. +
  13. If the Record Check/Voucher Data dialog box appears, enter the check or voucher number if you are sending or receiving a check for the adjustment, and click OK to complete the adjustment. +

    The adjustment is made to the unit price or discount, the transaction is posted on the Fund workform, and on the Invoice workform-Payment History view.

  14. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_segment_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_segment_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a36d070 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjust_line_item_segment_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Adjust line item segment charges on a prepaid invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adjust Line Item Segment Charges on a Prepaid Invoice

+

To adjust charges on a prepaid invoice line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform for the prepaid line item.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click after selecting the segment.

    +
  3. Right-click the segment for which you want to adjust charges, and select Adjust Charges from the context menu.
  4. +

    The Adjust Charges dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select one of the following Type options:
    • Shipping charges for charges for shipping the copies in the segment.
    • Cataloging services for charges associated with cataloging services for the segment.
    • Special handling for any special handling charges associated with the line item segment.
    • Service for any additional charge associated with the purchase of the items in this segment.
    • Binding format for any charge associated with binding that applies to the line item segment.
    • Other for any miscellaneous charges included in this segment.
  6. +
  7. Select an Action option:
    • Overwrite existing charge if the charge replaces any previous charge.
    • Add to existing charge if the charge is added to the previous charges.
  8. +
  9. If necessary, type a note in the Note box. The note appears on the Payment History view of the Invoice workform.
  10. +
  11. Type the amount you would like to adjust in the Amount box.
  12. +
  13. Click OK to submit your settings.
  14. +

    The Record Check/Voucher Data dialog box appears.

    +
  15. Click Check or Voucher to indicate the payment method.
  16. +
  17. If needed, type a check or voucher number in the Number box.
  18. +
  19. To enter a different date, type a date in the Date box or select it from the calendar.
  20. +

    Note:
    If the number in the Amount box is not what you expected, you can cancel the operation and change the adjustment.

    +
  21. Click OK to submit your settings.
  22. +

    A message asks you to confirm the transaction.

    +
  23. Click OK to confirm the amount.
  24. +

    When the adjustment is completed, the message Charges adjusted successfully appears in the status bar of the Invoice Line Item workform.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjusting_Prepaid_Invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjusting_Prepaid_Invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28303c04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAadjust/Adjusting_Prepaid_Invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Adjusting Prepaid Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adjusting Prepaid Invoices

+

You can adjust invoice charges for the invoice for specific line item segments on an invoice. In addition, you can adjust the discount or unit price on a line item or the credits for line item segments on a prepaid invoice.

+

Important:
If the prepaid invoice has charges at the header level, you must link another invoice to it to adjust the charges or post credits. See Link an invoice to another invoice.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_a_subfund.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_a_subfund.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7a20b43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_a_subfund.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a subfund + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add a Subfund

+

You can create an unlimited number of funds and subfunds. When you create a subfund from the main (parent) fund, a new Fund workform opens with the name of the parent fund in the Parent fund box, and the fiscal year to which the fund is associated in the Fiscal year box. Then you complete the Fund workform for the subfund.

+

All subfunds created from a parent fund have the same fund type as the parent fund. If the subfund has a fund type of Deposit Account, you cannot change it to Regular or Donation. If the subfund has a fund type of Regular or Donation, you cannot change it to Deposit Account.

+

To add a subfund to an existing fund:

+

Note:
Be sure to set up your fund structure before allocating money to the funds. You can view the fund hierarchy with the Fund Explorer. See View the fund structure.

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Create Subfund. + +

    A new Fund workform opens with the Status, Transfers, Fiscal year, Fund type, Parent fund, and Owner boxes already filled in.

    Subfund.gif 

  4. +
  5. Follow the instructions for adding the fund information in Create a fund.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_donor_information_to_a_fund.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_donor_information_to_a_fund.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b4dbe0b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Add_donor_information_to_a_fund.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Add donor information to a fund + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add Donor Information to a Fund

+

You can set up a donor fund to track purchases using donated funds. To add donor information to a fund:

+

Note:
When you release a purchase order that uses a donor fund and create on-order items, the donor information is copied to the Source and Acquisition view of the Item Record workform. When you pay for the order, the donor funds and the items that were purchased using the donor funds are listed in the Items by Donor Fund Report. See Acquisitions Reports.

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform - Donor view. + +

    Tip: funddonbut.gif
    Click to display the Fund Balances view.

    FundwkfmDonorvwNew.gif 

  2. +
  3. Select Donation in the Fund type box if the fund type is Donation.
  4. +
  5. Select the type of donation in the Fund category box. + +

    Note:
    Fund categories are defined in Polaris Administration.

  6. +
  7. Select the date when the fund is renewed in the Renewal date box. See Using Date Pickers.

    Tip:
    You can search for a donor fund by first name, last name, or organization name. You can search for purchase order line items and invoice line items by donor name, if they are linked to a donor fund.

  8. +
  9. If the donor is an individual, type the person’s name in the First name, Middle (initial), and Last name boxes.
  10. +
  11. If the donor is an organization, type the organization’s name in the Donor organization box.
  12. +
  13. Type the donor’s address in the Address 1 box. If you need more room for the address, continue typing in the Address 2 box.
  14. +
  15. Type the postal code in the Postal Code box. + +

    Note:
    If you enter a valid postal code, the City, State, and County boxes are automatically filled in.

  16. +
  17. If you did not enter a valid postal code, type the donor’s city, state, and county in the City, State, and County boxes.
  18. +
  19. Select the donor’s country in the Country box.
  20. +
  21. Type the contact information for the donor in the Phone, Fax, and Email boxes.
  22. +
  23. Select File > Save to save the record.
  24. +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Changing fund types - If you change a Donation fund type to a Regular fund type after entering the donor information, a message tells you that the donor information will be deleted.
  • +
  • Item records - If you generate item records, the donor information is automatically transferred to the item record. See Enter acquisitions information for an item record.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Adjust_fund_balances_manually.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Adjust_fund_balances_manually.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..960355ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Adjust_fund_balances_manually.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Adjust fund balances manually + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adjust Fund Balances Manually

+

You can manually adjust fund balances through the Adjust Fund Balances dialog box, which you access from the Fund workform. You can add a supplementary allocation, reduce the allocation, manually adjust the total currently encumbered, and manually adjust the total expended.

+

Important: +
If you manually adjust the amounts encumbered or expended, and the fund is linked to a purchase order or invoice, there may be inconsistencies in the fund history display and in fund reports. For information on fund reports, see Acquisitions Reports.

+

To adjust the balances in a fund

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Adjust Fund Balances on the Fund workform menu. + +

    The Adjust Fund Balances dialog box appears.

  4. +
  5. Choose one of the following values to adjust: + +

    Note:
    You can assign the beginning allocation only if there is no allocation amount already entered in the fund. See Assign the beginning allocation for a fund.

    • To add more money to the fund, click Supplementary allocation.
    • To reduce the budgeted amount, click Reduction in allocation.
    • To change the amount encumbered, click Manually adjust “Total currently encumbered.

    Note:
    This option is unavailable for deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. funds.

    • To change the amount expended, click Manually adjust “Total expended.”
  6. +
  7. Type a positive or negative number in the Amount box.
  8. +
  9. Type a reason for the change in the Note box.
  10. +
  11. Click OK to submit the changes. +

    A new line appears in the Transaction list on the Fund workform, and the free balance for the fund is adjusted accordingly.

  12. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Assign_the_beginning_allocation_for_a_fund.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Assign_the_beginning_allocation_for_a_fund.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d45408eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Assign_the_beginning_allocation_for_a_fund.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Assign the beginning allocation for a fund + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Assign the Beginning Allocation for a Fund

+

When you create a new fund, you specify the initial amount in this fund (beginning allocation). To assign the beginning allocation for a fund:

+

Important:
Be sure your funds and subfunds are set up properly before any transactions are performed. You cannot delete a fund after money has been allocated, encumbered, or expended. If monetary transactions are associated with the fund, it cannot be deleted until the next fiscal year rollover. You can view the fiscal year and its fund hierarchy in the Fiscal Year Explorer. See View the fiscal year and fund hierarchy.

+

Tip:
You can also transfer an amount from another fund, and specify this amount as the beginning allocation for the destination fund. See Transfer money between funds.

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Adjust Fund Balances on the Fund workform menu. + +

    The Adjust Fund Balances dialog box appears with Assign Beginning allocation selected.

  4. +
  5. Type the beginning allocation amount in the Amount box.
  6. +
  7. (Optional) Type a note in the Note box.
  8. +
  9. Click OK to enter the allocation amount. + +

    The Fund workform opens with the beginning allocation amount.

  10. +
  11. Select File > Save to save the record.
  12. +
+

Related Information

+

If the fund limits are set to $0.00, they are updated with the beginning allocation, but you can change the amounts. See Set fund encumbrance/expenditure limits.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Create_a_fund.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Create_a_fund.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7d41c92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Create_a_fund.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a fund + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Create a Fund

+

To create a new fund from the New dialog box:

+

Tip:
You can also create a fund directly from the Fiscal Year workform by selecting Tools > CreateFund.

+
    +
  1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. +

    The New dialog box opens.

  2. +
  3. Select Fund in the Objects box, and click OK. +

    The Fund workform opens.

    FundwkfmNew.gif 

    Tips:
    You can name your funds to include a group name, and then name subcategories under the group, for example General Fund - Adult, General Fund - Children’s.

    The alternate name can be a short form of the working name, an abbreviation, popular name, or the former name of the fund.

    Fund names also appear on vouchers. See Print one or multiple vouchers.

  4. +
  5. Type a working name for the fund in the Name box and a unique alternate name in the Alternative name box. +

    Note:
    By default, both the fund name and alternate name display for each fund in the Fund list box on various Acquisitions workforms. To shorten this list by displaying one or the other, use the Acq Fund Droplist setup profile in Polaris Administration. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions.

  6. +
  7. To allow transfers of money from this fund to other funds, select the Transfers check box.
  8. +
  9. Select the fund type in the Fund type box. +

    Note:
    If you choose a fund type of Donation, you must enter the individual donor’s last name and first name, or the name of the donating organization, on the Donation view of the Fund workform. See Add donor information to a fund.

  10. +
  11. Select the fiscal year to which you want to link this fund in the Fiscal year box.
  12. +
  13. Select the library that owns or controls the fund in the Owner box.
  14. +
  15. Type the name of the fund in the External name box. This is the name by which the organization (shown in the Source box) refers to this fund.
  16. +
  17. Type the name of the organization that supplies the money for this fund in the Source box. +

    Tip:
    If you are creating a parent fund with subfunds under it, you may want to prevent the parent fund from being selected for purchases by clearing the Display check box.

  18. +
  19.  If you do not want the fund to display in the list of funds in selection list line items, purchase order line items, or invoice line items, clear the Display check box.
  20. +
  21. Assign the beginning allocation for the fund. See Assign the beginning allocation for a fund.
  22. +
  23. To set limits on fund encumbrances/expenditures, see Set fund encumbrance/expenditure limits.
  24. +
  25. Select File > Save to save the fund.
  26. +
+

Note: +
A message informs you if Polaris detects a duplicate fund name for the same fiscal period. Click OK, and rename the fund.

+

Related Information

+

Add a subfund +

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Edit_multiple_funds_in_Polaris_Acquisitions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Edit_multiple_funds_in_Polaris_Acquisitions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1999cde --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Edit_multiple_funds_in_Polaris_Acquisitions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Edit multiple funds in Polaris Acquisitions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Edit Multiple Funds

+

You can enter the beginning allocation and fund limits for multiple funds from a single window. +To modify multiple funds, you must have the following permissions:

+
    +
  • Fiscal Years (Access), available at the System, Library, Branch levels
  • +
  • Funds (Modify), available at the System, Library, Branch levels
  • +
+

Important: 
Correct permissions allow you to process funds correctly. If you have insufficient or incorrect permissions, you may encounter unexpected results. Check permissions first if you experience any issues with funds processing. See Acquisitions Administration Reference.

+

To edit multiple funds:

+
    +
  1. From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Funds > Multi-fund Editor. + +

    The Multi-Fund Editor window opens.

    multifundeditor.gif 

    Note:
    If a user does not have the appropriate Fiscal Years (Access) permissions, an error message will display to alert them of this, and the user is unable to continue the operation.

  2. +
  3. Select the fiscal year from the Fiscal Year drop-down list. The Fiscal Year list displays the fiscal years with a status of Open or All encumbrances closed to which the user has access. + +

    The Funds column displays the regular, donation, or deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. funds with a status of Open or Encumbrances closed for which you have access and modify permissions.

    Note:
    No funds are displayed if you do not have the appropriate permissions, or if any of the funds are in use by other staff members. If a message informs you that other staff members have one or more of these funds open, contact the staff members, and ask them to close the Fund workform for these funds. Then, reopen the Multi-Fund Editor.

  4. +
  5. To modify the funds displayed in the Multi-Fund Editor, enter dollar amounts in the same row as the fund you are editing in the following columns: + +

    Note:
    Only numbers, dollar signs, and decimals are allowed.

    • Beginning Allocation (If the fund already has a beginning allocation, you cannot replace it. You must open the individual fund and apply a supplemental allocation.)
    • Encumbrance Limits Cannot Exceed: Line Item, Order, Fund
    • Expenditure Limits Cannot Exceed: Line Item, Invoice, Fund, Free

    Note:
    If the fund type is deposit account, the encumbrance and exceed free balance limits are read-only in the fund workform.

  6. +
  7. To save all the changes in all funds, click Save, or to cancel the charges, click Close.
  8. +
+

Transactions posted in the Fund workform

+

If you edited funds and saved the changes in the Multi-Fund Editor, the following transactions are posted in the Fund workform:

+
    +
  • Beginning Allocation - The transaction indicates the beginning allocation was entered using the multi-fund editor. For a regular or donation fund, the transaction type is beginning allocation. For a deposit account, the transaction type is a credit. The following updates are made the amounts in the Fund workform: +
    • The Beginning allocation field contains the amount entered in the Multi-Fund Editor.
    • The new beginning allocation is added to the Total allocated field.
    • The new beginning allocation is added to the Free balance field.
  • +
  • Limits Replaced - Only the limits are replaced; the fund totals remain the same if you replaced any fund limits.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Managing_Funds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Managing_Funds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d08d634 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Managing_Funds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Funds + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Managing Funds

+

Fund records track the finances for the purchase of library materials and services for the linked fiscal year. You can set up funds for sources of money that are based on fiscal budgets, gifts, grants, donations, and endowments. In addition, you can set up deposit funds to track accounts where you have deposited a certain amount of money with a supplier.

+

To break funds down into subcategories, you can create subfunds that are linked to the “parent” fund. You can leave the parent fund at zero dollars and allocate money at the subfund level. Or, you can start with a bulk amount in the parent fund and transfer money down to the subfunds. You can clear the Display check box on the Fund workform for parent funds so they do not display in fund lists and are not used to purchase materials.

+

If your library has standing orders or other predictable expenses, you can expend the funds up front so you know your library has the money to cover these costs. You can restrict the use of funds to a specific purpose, and prevent money from being transferred to other funds.

+

The name of the linked fund (or its alternative name) is displayed on invoice and purchase order workforms, and on selection list line item, purchase order line item, and invoice line item workforms.

+

You can use options in the Acq Fund Droplist setup profile in Polaris Administration to affect the fund list display as follows:

+
    +
  • Display the full fund name, the alternative name, or both names.
  • +
  • Filter the funds lists so that only the destination branch’s funds are displayed for purchase orders and invoices.
  • +
  • Display all funds for all branches under the parent library in purchase orders and invoices.
  • +
  • Select specific funds across branches to display in selection lists.
  • +
+

For more information on this profile, see Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions.

+

Important:
Be sure your funds and subfunds are set up properly before any transactions are performed. You cannot delete a fund after money has been allocated, encumbered, or expended. If there are monetary transactions using the fund, it cannot be deleted until the next fiscal year rollover. You can view the fiscal year and its fund hierarchy in the Fiscal Year Explorer. See View the fiscal year and fund hierarchy.

+

See also:

+ +

Fund Transactions

+

In Polaris Acquisitions, the following types of transactions are posted against funds:

+

Note:
The transactions that occur as a result of the fiscal year rollover process are not covered here. See Managing Fiscal Year Rollovers for information on this automatic process.

+
    +
  • Encumbrance transactions are posted against funds when you: + +
    • Release a purchase order and select Pay on receipt of invoice on the Payment Options dialog box.
    • Manually adjust a fund and select the option Adjust Fund Balances > Manually adjust 'Total currently encumbered.'
    • Undo payment of an invoice - the amount expended is reversed and the amount is re-encumbered.
  • +
  • Expenditures/Debit transactions are posted against funds when you: + +
    • Release a purchase order and select Prepay on the Payment Options dialog box. + +

      Note:
      When you prepay, no encumbrances are posted against funds, just expenditures.

    • Release a purchase order with a fund type of Deposit Account (debit transactions).
    • Manually adjust a fund and select the option Adjust Fund Balances > Manually adjust 'Total expended.'
    • Pay an invoice line item segment, line item, or the entire invoice. + +

      Note:
      If a purchase order is linked to the invoice, a disencumbrance transaction is also posted.

  • +
  • Disencumbrance transactions are posted against funds when you: +
    • Pay a regular invoice. (If there is a linked purchase order line, then the original purchase order line amount is disencumbered, and the invoice line item amount is expended.)
    • Cancel a purchase order line item segment, a purchase order line item, or an entire purchase order.
  • +
  • Unexpenditure transactions are posted against funds when you: + +
    • Credit a paid invoice line item segment, invoice line, or the entire invoice.
    • Cancel a prepaid purchase order line item segment, purchase order line item, or the entire purchase order.
    • Undo payment of an invoice.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Set_fund_encumbrance_expenditure_limits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Set_fund_encumbrance_expenditure_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81f9a267 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Set_fund_encumbrance_expenditure_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Set fund encumbrance/expenditure limits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Set Fund Encumbrance/Expenditure Limits

+

You can set limits on encumbrances for line items, orders, and funds as a whole. You can also set limits on expenditures for line items, invoices, funds, and overexpenditures.

+

Note: +
When the fund limits are at $0.00, and you add the beginning allocation or transfer an amount into the fund, the limits are updated with the allocated amount. You can change the fund limits after the beginning allocation. If you update the fund limits manually before you enter the beginning allocation, the fund limit amounts remain as you set them.

+

To set the encumbrance and expenditure limits for the fund:

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform. +

    Tip: fundbalbut.gif
    Click to display the Fund Balances view.

  2. +
  3. Select View > Fund Balances on the Fund workform. + +

    The Fund Balances view appears.

    FundBalancesvw.gif

  4. +
  5. Type the dollar amounts for the encumbrance limits in the following boxes: +
    • Line item cannot exceed
    • Orders cannot exceed
    • Fund cannot exceed

    Note:
    If the fund is a deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles., you cannot set encumbrance limits.

  6. +
  7. Type the dollar amounts for the expenditure limits in the following boxes: +
    • Line item cannot exceed
    • Invoices cannot exceed
    • Fund cannot exceed
    • Overexpenditure allowance

    Note:
    If the fund is a deposit account, you cannot set an overexpenditure allowance.

  8. +
  9. To enter a note regarding the fund balances, type it in the General box.
  10. +
  11. Select File > Save to save the record.
  12. +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Fiscal Year Rollover - When you do a fiscal year rollover, the fund limits are copied to the new funds. See Managing Fiscal Year Rollovers.
  • +
  • Overexpending funds - To overexpend funds, a staff member must have the permission Overexpend funds.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_Fiscal_Years.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_Fiscal_Years.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2244b958 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_Fiscal_Years.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Fiscal Years + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Setting Up Fiscal Years

+

A fiscal year is the period of time for which an organization budgets the money it has for acquiring materials. In Polaris Acquisitions, you create fiscal year records to manage and track multiple fund records linked to the fiscal year record.

+

When you set up a fiscal year record, you specify the fiscal year’s start and end dates. Multiple fiscal years of varying lengths may overlap and be active at the same time. For example, a fiscal year beginning July 1, 2016 and ending June 30, 2017 can overlap a fiscal year starting January 1, 2016 and ending December 31, 2016. You can track and report on separate statistics for each fiscal year.

+

Note:
At the end of a fiscal year, you can roll over funds to the next fiscal year, keep expending from the previous year’s funds while encumbering in the new fiscal year’s funds, or close the previous fiscal year and start with a new fund structure. See Managing Fiscal Year Rollovers.

+

To create a new fiscal year record:

+
    +
  1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. + +

    The New dialog box appears.

  2. +
  3. Select Fiscal Year in the Objects box, and click OK. + +

    The Fiscal Year workform opens.

  4. +
  5. Type the name for the fiscal year in the Name box. + +

    Tip:
    See Using Date Pickers.

  6. +
  7. Enter the dates for the fiscal year in the Start date and End date boxes.
  8. +
  9. Select the library that uses the fiscal year in the Owner box.
  10. +
  11. (Optional) Type a description of the fiscal year in the Note box.
  12. +
  13. Select File | Save to save the Fiscal Year record.
  14. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_the_Acquisitions_Budget.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_the_Acquisitions_Budget.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e78511f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Setting_Up_the_Acquisitions_Budget.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up the Acquisitions Budget + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Setting Up the Acquisitions Budget

+

When you set up the acquisitions budget in Polaris, you create fiscal years, funds, and subfunds, and then manage the money in these funds. Once you set up the fund structure and allocate money, Polaris automatically tracks all encumbrances and expenditures in the Fund Record.

+

First, you create a fiscal year record to represent your organization’s total budget for the financial year. You can set up multiple fiscal years that can be more or less than a calendar year, and the time periods can overlap. Next, you set up fund records linked to the fiscal year to represent the money allocated for specific collections or types of materials. You can also set up fund records to track items purchased with donated funds.

+

After setting up your funds at the first (parent) level under the fiscal year, you can create additional subfunds that are linked to the first level. Then, under the second level subfund, you can set a third level of subfunds and so on.

+
Tip: To quickly view the fund structure, use the Fund Explorer. See View the fund structure.
+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Transfer_money_between_funds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Transfer_money_between_funds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f339a721 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/Transfer_money_between_funds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Transfer money between funds + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Transfer Money Between Funds

+

You can move money from one fund to another in the same fiscal year if transfers are allowed from both funds. The transfer amount must be less than the free balance of the fund from which you are transferring money.

+

Tip:
You can transfer money between funds with fund types of donation or regular, and you can transfer money from donation or regular funds to a deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. fund. Funds in deposit accounts can be transferred only to other deposit account funds.

+

To transfer money from one fund to another:

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform. + +

    Note:
    You cannot transfer money to or from a fund if the Transfers check box is not selected.

  2. +
  3. Select Tools> Transfer Money on the Fund workform menu. + +

    The Transfer Money dialog box appears.

  4. +
  5. Select the fund to which you want to transfer the money in the To box. + +

    Note: 
    Only the funds that are in the same fiscal year appear in this list. If you are transferring from a deposit account fund, only funds with a fund type of deposit account appear. If the fiscal year has only one fund, a message tells you that money cannot be transferred.

  6. +
  7. Type the amount of money to transfer in the Amount box.
  8. +
  9. (Optional) Type a reason for the transfer in the Note box.
  10. +
  11. Click OK to transfer the money.
  12. +
  13. If the destination fund has no beginning allocation, a dialog box appears. Choose one of the following options: + +
    • To designate the amount transferred as the beginning allocation for the destination fund, click Yes.

    • To transfer the amount without making it the beginning allocation, click No.

    • To cancel the transaction, click Cancel.

    A new line appears in the Transaction list on the Fund workform for each fund. An Outgoing Transfer transaction appears in the source fund, and an Incoming Transfer or Beginning Allocation transaction appears in the destination fund.

  14. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_fund_transactions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_fund_transactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed6825f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_fund_transactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + View fund transactions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View Fund Transactions

+

When you release or cancel a purchase order, pay an invoice, transfer money, undo payment for an invoice, or enter a credit, the transaction is automatically recorded in the fund record. For an order using a regular fund, an encumbrance is posted when the purchase order is released, and an expenditure is posted when the invoice is paid. If the fund type is Deposit Account, an expenditure transaction is posted when the purchase order is released.

+

If you cancel purchase orders, purchase order line items, or segments, the transactions are posted as disencumbrances (if the purchase order is not paid) or unexpend transactions (if the order was paid). When you cancel a paid purchase order, purchase order line item, or segment that uses a deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles., the transaction is posted as a credit.

+

Tip:
Press CTRL+SHIFT+A on the Fund workform to load all the fund transactions into the record. Scroll to see more transactions.

+

To view fund transactions:

+
    +
  1. Open the Fund workform. + +

    The Fund workform - General view displays the transactions.

  2. +
  3. Click a column header to sort the list of the transactions. +

    The transactions are sorted according to the column heading you selected.

  4. +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Fund results list - The Fund results list in the Find Tool displays columns for the Total Allocated, Encumbered, and Expended. Linked list boxes that display funds also include these columns.
  • +
  • Multi-fund editing - You can enter the beginning allocation and fund limits for multiple funds from a single window. See Edit Multiple Funds.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fiscal_year_and_fund_hierarchy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fiscal_year_and_fund_hierarchy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..249ea903 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fiscal_year_and_fund_hierarchy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + View the fiscal year and fund hierarchy + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View the Fiscal Year and Fund Hierarchy

+

After you set up a fiscal year and its associated funds and subfunds, you can view the entire fund structure and the fund balances in the Fiscal Year Fund Explorer window.

+

Tip:
You can also see an individual fund and its associated subfunds in the Fund Explorer window. See View the fund structure.

+

To view the fiscal year and all the funds associated with it.

+
    +
  1. Use one of the following methods to access the Fiscal Year Fund Explorer: + +
    • From the Fiscal Year workform, select Links > Fund Explorer.
    • From a fiscal year listed in the Find Tool results, right-click the fiscal year, and select Explore from the context menu. +

      The Fiscal Year Fund Explorer appears.

      FundExplorer.gif 

  2. +
  3. Select a fund to see the fund totals and the subfunds associated with the fund. The fund information appears on the right side of the explorer.
  4. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fund_structure.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fund_structure.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..273efafd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAbudget/View_the_fund_structure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + View the fund structure + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View the Fund Structure

+

With the Fund Explorer, you can view the fund balances and the balances for all subfunds that are linked to a parent fund.

+

Tip:
To see all the funds associated with a fiscal year, see View the fiscal year and fund hierarchy.

+

To view the fund structure for a particular fund.

+
    +
  1. Use one of the following methods to access the Fund Explorer: + +
    • From the Fund workform, select Links > Fund Explorer.
    • From a fund listed in the Find Tool results, right-click and select Explore from the context menu. +

      The Fund Explorer appears.

  2. +
  3. Select the fund or subfund for which you want to view the balance information. +

    The information for that fund or subfund appears on the right side of the Fund Explorer.

  4. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7720552 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Cancel a line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Cancel a Line Item Segment

+

To cancel part of a purchase order line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Right-click the segment to cancel, and select Cancel from the context menu.
  4. +

    A message asks if you are sure you want to cancel the segment.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to cancel the segment.
  6. +

    The Line Item Segment Canceling dialog box appears.

    +
  7. To cancel less than the quantity ordered, type a number in the Quantity to cancel box that is less than the number in the Quantity ordered box.
  8. +
  9. Click OK to cancel the segment.
  10. +

    If you did not change the number in the Quantity to cancel box, the entire segment is canceled.

    +

    If you typed a number less than the number in the Quantity ordered box, the segment is split into two segments, one with a status of canceled and one with the original status.

    +

    The linked funds are disencumbered for the items canceled.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_single_line_item_from_the_PO_Line_Item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_single_line_item_from_the_PO_Line_Item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a91284f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_single_line_item_from_the_PO_Line_Item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Cancel a single line item from the PO Line Item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Cancel a Single Line Item from the PO Line Item

+

To cancel a line item on the Purchase Order Line Item workform:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click to cancel the line item.

    +
  3. Select Tools > Cancel.
  4. +

    A confirmation message appears.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to cancel the line item.
  6. +

    If the purchase order line item has hold requests associated with it that cannot be satisfied by any other item, a message asks if you want to cancel the linked hold requests.

    +
  7. If the cancel linked hold requests message appears, do one of the following steps:
  8. +
      +
    • To cancel the line item and its associated hold requests, click Yes.
    • +
    • To cancel the line item but retain the hold requests, click No.
    • +
    • To stop the cancellation of the line item and retain the hold requests, click Cancel.
    • +
    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_whole_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_whole_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04292644 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_a_whole_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Cancel a whole order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Cancel a Whole Order

+

To cancel an entire purchase order when none of the titles were supplied:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform for the purchase order with a status of released, continuing, or prepaid.
  2. +

    Tip:
    If a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. or subscription with a status of Continuing has never been received, it can be canceled. However, if any part or issue has already been checked in via Serials, the Cancel option is not available.

    +
  3. Select Tools > Cancel from the menu bar.
  4. +

    A message asks if you are sure you want to cancel the purchase order.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to cancel the purchase order.
  6. +

    If there is a bibliographic-level hold placed on any purchase order line item and the linked item is the only one that can satisfy the hold request, a message appears.

    +
  7. If the cancel linked hold requests message appears, do one of the following steps:
  8. +
      +
    • To cancel the line item and its associated hold requests, click Yes.
    • +
    • To cancel the line item but retain the hold requests, click No.
    • +
    • To stop the cancellation of the line item and retain the hold requests, click Cancel.
    • +
    +

    When the purchase order is canceled, Purchase Order Canceled Successfully appears in the status bar, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • Funds are disencumbered.
    • +
    • The status of the purchase order, line items, and segments is changed to canceled.
    • +
    • The linked on-order item records are deleted.
    • +
    • The Display in PAC check box in the linked bibliographic record is cleared (if there are no other linked records).
    • +
    +
+

Note:
If the canceled order was prepaid, a credited status appears in the linked invoice line items, an unexpend transaction occurs in any linked funds, on-order items are deleted, and if checked, the Display in PAC check box is cleared (if there are no other linked records).

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_one_or_more_whole_line_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_one_or_more_whole_line_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d432f637 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Cancel_one_or_more_whole_line_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + Cancel one or more whole line items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Cancel One or More Whole Line Items

+

You can cancel a single line item or multiple line items on a purchase order without canceling the entire order. Purchase order line items can be canceled if they have one of the following statuses:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
On OrderReturn Requested
BackorderedReturned
Never publishedClaimed
Out of printPending Claim
+

To cancel a specific line or multiple lines from the Purchase Order workform:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform - Line Items view.
  2. +

    Tip:
    To keep your place in the list and retain your sort order, select Edit > Lock List View or click . When you update line items with the list view locked, the changes do not appear in the list view until you clear the Lock List View option or refresh the list. List view locked is displayed in the status bar when this option is on.
    Click to refresh the list. After you refresh the list, your updates to the line items appear, and the list view is resorted.

    +
  3. Select the line item or items to cancel.
  4. +
  5. Right-click, and select Cancel or click in the toolbar.
  6. +

    A dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Click Yes to confirm that you want to cancel the selected lines.
  8. +

    If there is a bibliographic-level hold placed on any purchase order line item and the linked item is the only one that can satisfy the hold request, a message appears.

    +
  9. If the cancel linked hold requests message appears, do one of the following:
  10. +
      +
    • To cancel the line item and its associated hold requests, click Yes.
    • +
    • To cancel the line item but retain the hold requests, click No.
    • +
    • To stop the cancellation of the line item and retain the hold requests, click Cancel.
    • +
    +

    When the line items are canceled, Purchase Order Lines Canceled Successfully appears in the status bar, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • Funds are disencumbered.
    • +
    • The status of the line item and segments is changed to canceled.
    • +
    • The linked on-order item records are deleted.
    • +
    • Any hold requests are canceled or retained, depending on your response to linked hold request message.
    • +
    • The patrons’ records are updated with the canceled holds, if applicable.
    • +
    • The Display in PAC check box in the linked bibliographic record is cleared (if there are no other linked records).
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the canceled order was prepaid, a credited status appears in the linked invoice line items, an unexpend transaction occurs in any linked funds, on-order items are deleted, and if checked, the Display in PAC check box is cleared (if there are no other linked records).

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Canceling_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Canceling_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64c6bc34 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Canceling_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Canceling Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Canceling Orders

+

You can cancel a purchase order and all the line items contained within it, multiple line items, a single line item, or selected line item segments. If you are canceling an item that has been claimed, you can cancel the item from the Claim Alert List.

+

You can also set up Polaris to automatically cancel items after all claims have been generated. An overnight process identifies items that have been claimed and should be automatically canceled based on the claim/cancellation criteria on the individual purchase order line item. If all claims have been generated and the Auto Cancel box is checked on the purchase order line item, all segments with a status of Backordered, Exceptional Condition, Never Published, Out of Print, Returned, Return Requested, and Claimed will be changed to Canceled. The Claim workform is updated with the date the item was canceled, the time, the user ID, and the quantity for all segments changed to Canceled.

+

If you are canceling a line item that has one or more hold requests associated with it (and no other items can fill the hold requests), a warning message appears with the option to retain the holds or cancel them. You can retain the holds if you intend to reorder the item from a different supplier, or you can cancel the holds because you have decided not to reorder. When you cancel a hold along with the line item, you can automatically notify the patron that the hold request was canceled. See Request Pick-Up, Second Pick-Up, & Cancelled Request Notices.

+

After an order is canceled, you can delete the whole order, or you can delete specific line items. If there are titles you still want to order, you can copy them to another purchase order. Any hold requests still linked to purchase order line items are retained when they are copied.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Copy_lines_segments_to_another_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Copy_lines_segments_to_another_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..690860c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Copy_lines_segments_to_another_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy lines/segments to another purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy Lines/Segments to Another Purchase Order

+

To copy purchase order line items or line item segments to another purchase order:

+

Note:
When you cancel a purchase order line item, you have the option of canceling the holds or retaining them. If you choose to cancel the holds, the linked bibliographic record’s Display in PAC setting is cleared (if no other item records are linked to the bibliographic record). If you choose to retain the holds, the Display in PAC setting remains.

+
    +
  1. Select the purchase order line items or line item segments to copy to another purchase order by one of the following methods:
  2. +

    Note:
    You cannot copy lines if the purchase order has a payment method of depository agreement.

    +
      +
    • To copy all the lines, open the Purchase Order workform, and select Tools > Copy Lines To.
    • +
    • To copy selected lines, open the Purchase Order workform - Line Items view, select the lines, right-click and select Copy To from the context menu.
    • +
    • To copy a single line, open the Purchase Order Line Item workform, and select Tools > Copy To from the menu bar.
    • +
    • To copy a segment, open the Purchase Order Line Item workform, right-click a segment, and select Copy To from the context menu.
    • +
    +

    The Copy Lines To dialog box appears.

    +
  3. Click Purchase Order.
  4. +
  5. Do one of the following:
  6. +
      +
    • To copy the lines to a new purchase order:
      1. Select the New check box.
      2. Type a number for the new purchase order in the Destination box. The New Purchase Order dialog box appears.
      3. Click OK.
    • +
    +

    The lines are copied to the new purchase order.

    +

    Note:
    An error message appears if you attempt to copy a line or lines that are not linked to a bibliographic record because the bibliographic record was deleted.

    +
      +
    • To copy the lines to an existing purchase order:
      1. Type the purchase order number in the Destination box, or click Find and use the Find Tool to search for and select the purchase order. If Polaris detects that the purchase order number you entered matches more than one purchase order, a dialog box appears asking you to choose one of the purchase orders matching the number.
      2. If the Choose Purchase Order dialog box appears, select the appropriate purchase order.
      3. Click OK to submit your settings.
    • +
    +

    The lines are copied to the purchase order you selected.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..713349a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a canceled purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Delete a Canceled Purchase Order

+

To delete a canceled purchase order:

+

Note:
When you delete a canceled purchase order, all line items are deleted, but the linked bibliographic records remain in the database.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform for the canceled order:
  2. +
  3. Select File > Delete.
  4. +

    A message asks if you are sure you want to delete the purchase order.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the purchase order.
  6. +

    The purchase order is deleted and links to the supplier record, invoices, claim records, funds, and selection lists are broken.

    +

    Note:
    To delete a purchase order from the Find Tool, right-click the canceled purchase order, and select Delete from the context menu.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe03c068 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Delete_a_canceled_purchase_order_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a canceled purchase order line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Delete a Canceled Purchase Order Line Item

+

To delete a canceled purchase order line item:

+

Note:
When you delete canceled purchase order line items, the linked bibliographic records remain in the database.

+

Tip:
You can also delete a purchase order line item from the Line Items view of the Purchase Order workform. Select the line item, and click delebtncool.gif.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform for the canceled line item.
  2. +
  3. Select File > Delete.
  4. +

    A message asks if you are sure you want to delete the purchase order line item.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the purchase order line item.
  6. +

    The purchase order line item is deleted and links to the supplier record, invoices, claim records, funds, selection lists, and bibliographic records are broken.

    +

    Note:
    To delete a purchase order line item from the Find Tool, right-click the canceled purchase order line item, and select Delete from the context menu.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Print_cancellation_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Print_cancellation_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f758ca6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcancel/Print_cancellation_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Print cancellation notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print Cancellation Notices

+

You can print cancellation notices for the titles that your library is canceling from suppliers. Polaris generates a notice for each supplier with one or more canceled titles.

+

Note:
The Cancel notice check box must be selected on the Supplier Record workform - Claims view for that supplier. See Set claim/cancellation notice defaults.

+

To generate the cancellation notices for the titles your library is canceling from suppliers:

+
    +
  1. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The Polaris Reports dialog box appears.

    +
  3. Select Notices > Acquisitions.
  4. +
  5. Double-click Cancellation Notices.
  6. +

    The Report Wizard dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Select the organization(s) that sent the notices.
  8. +
  9. Select Branch, Library, or System in the Return Address box to indicate which organization’s address to use in the return address.
  10. +
  11. Select dates in the Start Date and End Date boxes to indicate the date range for the cancellation notices.
  12. +
  13. Click Submit.
  14. +

    The Cancellation Notice pdf appears in Adobe Reader.

    +

    + +

    +
  15. Click Print on the Adobe Reader toolbar to print the cancellation notice.
  16. +
+

Related Information

+

Setting up the cancellation message and contact information - See Set claim/cancellation notice defaults.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Cancel_a_title_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Cancel_a_title_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3312098 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Cancel_a_title_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Cancel a title from the Claim Alert List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Cancel a Title from the Claim Alert List

+

You can cancel titles that appear on the Claim Alert List, or you can select the Auto cancel option on the linked purchase order line item to cancel the title automatically after the claiming cycle is over.

+

To cancel a title from the Claim Alert List:

+

Tip:
You can also cancel from the purchase order, the purchase order line item, or the purchase order line item segment.

+
    +
  1. Select Acquisitions > Claim Alert List from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The Claim Alert List appears.

    +
  3. Use one of the following options to cancel titles from the Claim Alert List:
  4. +
      +
    • To cancel all the titles, select Tools > Cancel from the menu bar.
    • +
    • To cancel multiple titles, select the title, right-click, and select Cancel from the context menu.
    • +
    • To cancel one title, right-click a specific title, and select Cancel from the context menu.
    • +
    +

    A message asks if you want to cancel the selected titles.

    +
  5. Click Yes to cancel the titles.
  6. +
+

Note:
For more information, see Canceling Orders.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_segment_of_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_segment_of_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5545441c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_segment_of_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Claim a segment of a purchase order line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Claim a Segment of a Purchase Order Line Item

+

If you order multiple copies of a title but you receive fewer than you ordered, you can claim the copies that you did not receive. To claim a segment of a purchase order line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Select the segment, and click on the list toolbar.

    +
  3. Right-click the line item segment for which you received less than the total quantity, and select Receive.
  4. +

    The Line Item Segment Receiving dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Type the number of copies received in the Quantity received box.
  6. +
  7. Click OK to confirm that you want to receive the selected line item segment. If you receive less than the total quantity of copies for the segment, the segment is split. One segment shows the quantity received and the other shows the quantity still on order.
  8. +
  9. Select Tools > Claim.
  10. +

    A message asks if you are sure you want to claim the items.

    +
  11. Click Yes.
  12. +

    The copies that were not received are claimed, and the Claim workform appears.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_single_line_from_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_single_line_from_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d97df098 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_a_single_line_from_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Claim a single line from a purchase order line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Claim a Single Line from a Purchase Order Line Item

+

To claim a single purchase order line item:

+

Note:
When you are claiming a line item, any segments with a status of closed, canceled, or received cannot be claimed.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Claim from the menu bar.
  4. +

    A message asks if you want to claim the item.

    +
  5. Click Yes.
  6. +

    The Claim workform appears. You can use the Claim workform to view an item’s claim history, enter a response from the supplier, or specify why an item was claimed.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_all_items_on_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_all_items_on_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aad00487 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_all_items_on_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Claim all items on a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Claim All Items on a Purchase Order

+

To claim all items on a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. In the Purchase Order workform, select Tools > Claim.
  2. +

    A message asks if you want to claim all items in the purchase order.

    +
  3. Select Yes to generate the Claim records.
  4. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_items_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_items_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa365a3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_items_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Claim items from the Claim Alert List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Claim Items from the Claim Alert List

+

Important:
Items that already had a status of Backordered or Returned before claiming was set up will not appear on the Claim Alert List, since those items do not have a claim alert date.

+

To claim items that appear on the Claim Alert List:

+

Tips:
Use the Organizations and Status boxes to filter the Claim Alert List. To expand the Claim Alert List window, drag the lower right-hand corner. To expand a column, drag the border of a column header.

+
    +
  1. Select Acquisitions > Claim Alert List from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The Claim Alert List appears.

    +

    Note:
    The Claim Alert List shows purchase order line items that are eligible to be claimed. If you start from the Serials menu, you will see the serials issues or parts that are eligible to be claimed. You can also see the serials information if you change the record type in the Claim Alert List.

    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    Click on the menu bar to claim all items, or click this icon in the list bar to claim selected line items.

    +
  3. Right-click the item or items for which you want to send a claim to the supplier, and select Claim from the context menu. Or, select Tools > Claim from the menu bar to claim all the items in the list. When you claim a purchase order line item, segments that have a status of closed, canceled, or received are not claimed.
  4. +

    A claim record is created for each item you selected.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..676088de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claim_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Claim line items from a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Claim Line Items from a Purchase Order

+

You can claim one or multiple line items from the Purchase Order workform, Line Items view. You can also claim a single line item from the Purchase Order Line Item workform.

+

Tip:
To keep your place in the list and retain your sort order, select Edit > Lock List View or click locklisticon.gif.When you update line items with the list view locked, the changes do not appear in the list view until you uncheck the Lock List View option or refresh the list. List view locked is displayed in the status bar when this option is on.
Click refreslstvwbtn.gif to refresh the list. After you refresh the list, your updates to the line items appear, and the list view is resorted.

+

To claim one or more items in a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform - Line Items view.
  2. +
  3. Select the line or lines to claim.
  4. +
  5. Right-click, and select Claim from the context menu.
  6. +

    A message asks if you want to claim the items you selected.

    +
  7. Click Yes to continue claiming the item or items you selected.
  8. +

    Claim records are generated for the items claimed.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claiming.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claiming.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a783913 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Claiming.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + Claiming + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Claiming

+

Claiming is the process of notifying the supplier that items were ordered but not received as expected. For example, you might claim an item in the following situations:

+
    +
  • The library was billed for an item it ordered but did not receive.
  • +
  • The library did not receive an ordered item within a specified period of time, and no notice arrived from the supplier warning that the item would be late.
  • +
  • The item was received damaged.
  • +
+

Tip:
You can also claim serial issues or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts that were not received as expected. For information on claiming serials issues or parts, see Claim issues/parts from the Claim Alert List.

+

To claim an item, you set up the claiming information in the supplier record. See Add the claiming criteria for a supplier. This information is copied to purchase orders using this supplier. You can add more claiming intervals or change the claiming information on the Purchase Order workform. See Add or change claiming information for an order.

+

If an item has not been received in the specified amount of time after being ordered, it appears on the Claim Alert List. An automatic nightly process identifies purchase order line items that are eligible to be claimed.

+

Important:
You must set up claiming criteria in the Supplier record before items will appear on the Claim Alert List. Items that already had a status of Backordered or Returned before claiming was set up will not appear on the Claim Alert List, since those items do not have a claim alert date.

+

When you claim an item for the first time from the Claim Alert List, it is removed from the list, and a claim record is generated. The same item appears on the Claim Alert List again if it still has not been received in the specified time after the first claim was generated. This process continues until the maximum number of claims have been generated. When you claim an item, a claim notice is generated and you can send the notice to the supplier. You must set up the claiming notices with the message and contact information in Polaris Administration. See Set claim/cancellation notice defaults.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Print_claim_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Print_claim_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e45e454 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Print_claim_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Print claim notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print Claim Notices

+

You can print claim notices for the titles your library is claiming. Polaris generates a notice for each supplier with one or more claimed titles. There are two types of notices: the Initial claim notice that includes all the titles being claimed for the first time, and the Claim notice that includes all the titles already claimed.

+

To generate claim notices for the titles your library is claiming from suppliers:

+

Note:
To include claimed items for a particular supplier, the Claim notice check box must be selected on the Supplier Record workform - Claims view.

+
    +
  1. Select Utilities > Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The Polaris Reports dialog box appears.

    +
  3. Select Notices > Acquisitions > Claim Notices.
  4. +

    The Report Wizard dialog box appears.

    +

    + +

    +
  5. Select the organization(s) that sent the claim notices.
  6. +

    Select Branch > Library > or System in the Return Address box to specify the address to use for the claim notice.

    +
  7. Select dates in the Start Date and End Date boxes to specify the date range for the claims.
  8. +
  9. Click Submit.
  10. +

    The Claim Notice pdf appears in Adobe Reader.

    +

    +  

    +
  11. Click Print on the Adobe Reader toolbar to print the claim notice.
  12. +
+

Related Information

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Stop_a_claim.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Stop_a_claim.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65f7c56a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/Stop_a_claim.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Stop a claim + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Stop a claim

+

If you have claimed an item and decide not to initiate another claim for that item, you can stop the claim process from the Purchase Order Line Item workform. (You cannot stop a claim from the Claim Alert List or from the Claim workform.) When you stop a claim, the transaction is posted in the History view of the Claim workform.

+

To stop a claim:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Stop Claim.
  4. +

    The claiming process is stopped.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/View_and_enter_an_items_claim_information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/View_and_enter_an_items_claim_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba52dd68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclaim/View_and_enter_an_items_claim_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + View and enter an item’s claim information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View and Enter an Item’s Claim Information

+

When an item has been claimed, a claim record is created. You can use the claim record to view an item’s claim history, to enter a response from the supplier, or to specify why the item was claimed. You can also enter notes regarding the claim, print a claim notice, and include a reminder flag on the claim alert list.

+

To view an item’s claim history, and enter claim information on the Claim workform:

+
    +
  1. Display the claim record in the Claim workform.
  2. +

    The Claim workform appears with the Claim History view displayed.

    +
  3. You can do the following tasks using the Claim workform:
    • If you want a claim notice to be printed, select the Print on notice check box. When this box is checked, a claim notice is automatically generated for the item, and you can print the notice. See Print claim notices.
    • If you want a reminder flag to appear next to this item on the Claim Alert List, select the Reminder check box. The flag indicates that the item was claimed.
    • If the supplier has responded to the claim, type the response from the supplier in the Response box.
    • Select the reason this item was claimed in the Reason box.
    • If you want a claim notice to be printed, select the Print on notice check box. When this box is checked, a claim notice is automatically generated for the item, and you can print the notice. See Print claim notices.
    • If you want a reminder flag to appear next to this item on the Claim Alert List, select the Reminder check box. The flag indicates that the item was claimed.
    • If the supplier has responded to the claim, type the response from the supplier in the Response box.
    • Select the reason this item was claimed in the Reason box.
  4. +
  5. Select File > Save.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..230da424 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Close a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Close a Purchase Order

+

To close a purchase order:

+

Important:
If the purchase order is cancelled and you want to delete it later, do not close it. Only Cancelled orders can be deleted.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Close from the menu bar on the Purchase Order workform.
  4. +

    Tip:
    Click on the toolbar.

    +

    A message asks if you want to close the order.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to close the purchase order.
  6. +

    Purchase order closed successfully appears in the status bar.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_line_items_on_a_standing_or_subscription_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_line_items_on_a_standing_or_subscription_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d7d230e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Close_line_items_on_a_standing_or_subscription_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Close line items on a standing or subscription order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Close Line Items on a Standing or Subscription Order

+

To close all line items or specific line items on a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. or subscription purchase order:

+

Tip:
When searching for a purchase order, you can limit by Order Type and select Standing Order or Subscription.

+
    +
  1. Display a subscription order or standing order in the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select the line items you want to close, and click .
  4. +

    A message asks if you want to close the line items.

    +
  5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to close the line items.
  6. +
  7. If the Update Serial Holdings Record Statuses dialog box appears, select a status to apply to the linked serial holdings records, or select No status change to leave the serial holdings record as it is, and click OK.
  8. +

    The serial holdings record is updated with the status you chose.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Closing_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Closing_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc0894fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAclose/Closing_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Closing Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Closing Orders

+

You can close a Firm, Donation or Gift purchase order that has a status of Cancelled, Received or PartRec (partially received). When you close a purchase order with header charges and/or purchase order line items that are received but not yet paid, you will receive a warning message, and the amounts are NOT disencumbered. You can also close specific purchase order line items for serial subscriptions or serial standing orders.

+

Libraries can set a parameter in Acquisitions Administration to close purchase orders automatically. See Automatically Close Purchase Orders.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_a_single_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_a_single_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1271954b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_a_single_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Credit a single line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Credit a Single Line Item

+

To credit a single paid invoice line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform for the paid invoice line item.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click the credit icon on the main toolbar.

    +
  3. Select Tools > Credit from the menu.
  4. +

    The Invoice Payment/Credit dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Click Check or Voucher to specify the method of credit.
  6. +
  7. If needed, type the supplier’s check or voucher number in the Number box.
  8. +
  9. Click OK to credit the line item.
  10. +

    The message Invoice line was credited successfully appears in the status bar of the Invoice workform, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • The status of the line changes from paid or prepaid to credited.
    • +
    • Unexpend transactions are posted to the funds linked to the invoice line item segments.
    • +
    • The status of the invoice changes to part paid if there are still paid line items on the invoice.
    • +
    • The invoice payment history is updated.
    • +
    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_entire_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_entire_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..806c1399 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_entire_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Credit an entire invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Credit an Entire Invoice

+

To credit an entire invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform for the paid or prepaid invoice.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Credit from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Check/Voucher dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Click Check or Voucher to specify the method of payment.
  6. +
  7. If necessary, type the supplier’s check or voucher number in the Number box.
  8. +
  9. Click OK.
  10. +

    When the credit process is completed, the message The invoice was credited successfully appears in the status bar.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94630d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Credit an invoice line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Credit an Invoice Line Item Segment

+

To credit a paid invoice line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform for the paid, partpaid or prepaid invoice line item.
  2. +
  3. Right-click the segment to credit, and select Credit from the context menu.
  4. +

    The Segment Payment/Credit dialog box appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Click the Credit icon on the toolbar to credit the line item segment.

    +
  5. Select one of the following options:
  6. +
      +
    • To credit the total number of copies received, click OK.
    • +
    • To credit less than the total number of copies paid or prepaid, type a number less than the quantity received in the Enter quantity to credit box, and click OK.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you credit less than the quantity received, the invoice line item segment is split, with one segment remaining Paid or Part Paid and the other Credited.

    +

    The Check/Voucher dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Click Check or Voucher to specify the method of credit.
  8. +
  9. If needed, type the supplier’s check or voucher number in the Number box.
  10. +
  11. To change the date, type a different date or select a date from the calendar.
  12. +
  13. Click OK to submit your settings.
  14. +

    When credit processing is complete, The invoice line segment was credited (or partially credited) successfully appears in the status bar of the Invoice workform, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • The status of the segment changes from paid or prepaid to credited.
    • +
    • An unexpend transaction is posted to the fund linked to the invoice line item segment.
    • +
    • The invoice payment history is updated.
    • +
    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..125c016b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Credit_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Credit multiple lines on an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Credit Multiple Lines on an Invoice

+

To credit multiple lines on a paid, partially paid or prepaid invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform for the paid, part-paid, or prepaid invoice that contains the line items you want to credit.
  2. +

    Tip: + +
    Click on the Invoice Line Items icon on the menu bar to see the line items in the invoice.

    +
  3. Select View > Line Items.
  4. +

    The Line Items view of the Invoice workform appears.

    +
  5. Select the line items to credit by holding down the CTRL key while selecting the lines. The lines must have a status of paid or prepaid.
  6. +

    Tip:
    Click after selecting the line items.

    +
  7. Right-click the selected lines, and select Credit from the context menu.
  8. +

    The Invoice Payment/Credit dialog box appears.

    +
  9. Select Check or Voucher to specify the method of credit.
  10. +
  11. If needed, type the check or voucher number in the Number box.
  12. +
  13. Click OK to submit the settings.
  14. +

    The invoice lines were credited successfully appears in the status bar of the Invoice workform, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • The statuses of the lines change from paid or prepaid to credited.
    • +
    • Unexpend transactions are posted to the funds linked to the invoice line item segments.
    • +
    • The invoice payment history is updated.
    • +
    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Crediting_Invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Crediting_Invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebda040c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAcredit/Crediting_Invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Crediting Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Crediting Invoices

+

After an invoice has been paid or prepaid, it may need to be credited fully or partially because your library has received a refund or credit. You can credit an entire invoice, multiple lines within an invoice, a single line item, or segments within a line item. To post a credit to a fund record that is unlinked to any purchase order line item, you can credit a miscellaneous invoice that has not been paid.

+

When you credit an entire invoice, the status of the invoice changes from paid to credited, the transaction appears in the Payment History view of the Invoice workform, and an unexpend transaction appears in the funds linked to each line item segment and the funds linked to any invoice header charges.

+

You can credit individual line items while leaving the rest of the invoice paid or partially paid. Or, you can credit segments of a line item, leaving the other segments paid. When crediting a single segment of a line, you can credit less than the number ordered and received. This causes a split in the invoice line item segment. One segment remains paid or prepaid, while the other segment is credited.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d7ce7d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Distribute charges on a prepaid invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distribute Charges on a Prepaid Invoice

+

To distribute charges among line item segments on a prepaid invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform for the prepaid invoice.
  2. +
  3. Choose Tools > Distribute Charges from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Distribute Charges dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select a charge type.
  6. +
  7. Choose one of the following Action options:
  8. +
      +
    • Select Add to an existing charge to add the charge to the charges already entered.
    • +
    • Select Overwrite existing charge to replace any previous charge already entered in the line item, or if no charge was entered.
    • +
    +
  9. Choose one of the following Distribute options:
  10. +
      +
    • Select Evenly across line segments to distribute the charge amount equally among all the line segments for the invoice.
    • +
    • Select Based on total quantity received to apply the charges based on the quantity received.
    • +
    +
  11. If needed, type a note in the Note box.
  12. +
  13. Type the amount to distribute in the Amount box, and click OK.
  14. +

    The Record Check/Voucher Data dialog box appears.

    +
  15. Select Check or Voucher.
  16. +
  17. To record the check or voucher number, type it in the Number box.
  18. +
  19. To change the due date, type it the Date box or select it in the calendar.
  20. +
  21. Click OK to submit your settings.
  22. +

    A message informs you that the action cannot be undone.

    +
  23. Click OK to confirm that you want to distribute the charges.
  24. +

    The following events occur:

    +
      +
    • Charges distributed successfully appears in the status bar.
    • +
    • Any linked funds are updated.
    • +
    • The Charges view of the Invoice workform shows the subtotals for all line item charges and credits in the Charges and Credits box.
    • +
    • The Charges tabbed page in each invoice line item segment shows the amount of the charge that was distributed to the individual segment.
    • +
    +
+

Related Information

+

If you need to make slight adjustments to the charges, see Make manual adjustments to charges.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_an_open_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_an_open_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e080e08b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_charges_on_an_open_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Distribute charges on an open invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distribute Charges on an Open Invoice

+

Note:
Charges must be distributed one type at a time.

+

To distribute charges on an open invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Distribute > Charges from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Distribute Charges dialog box appears.

    +

    Note:
    For all the options on the Distribute Charges dialog box to be active, all the lines on the invoice must have been received.

    +
  5. Indicate the charge type by selecting one of the following options:
  6. +
      +
    • Cataloging services
    • +
    • Special handling
    • +
    • Service
    • +
    • Shipping
    • +
    • Binding format
    • +
    • Other
    • +
    +
  7. Select one of the following Action options:
  8. +
      +
    • Overwrite existing charge to replace the charge already entered in the line item, or if no charge was previously entered.
    • +
    • Add to existing charge to add the charge to the charges already entered.
    • +
    +
  9. Choose one of the following Distribute options:
  10. +
      +
    • Select Evenly across line item segments to distribute the same charge amount to all the line segments for the invoice.
    • +
    • Select Based on total quantity received to apply the charges based on the quantity received in each segment.
    • +
    +
  11. Type the amount to distribute in the Amount box, and click OK.
  12. +

    A message asks you to confirm that you want to distribute the charges.

    +
  13. Click OK to confirm that you want to distribute the charges.
  14. +
+

The following events occur:

+
    +
  • Charges distributed successfully appears in the status bar.
  • +
  • Any linked funds are updated.
  • +
  • The Charges view of the Invoice workform shows the subtotals for all line item charges and credits in the Charges and Credits box.
  • +
  • The Charges tabbed page in each invoice line item segment shows the amount of the charge that was distributed to the individual segment.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1455182 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_a_prepaid_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Distribute credits/discounts on a prepaid invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distribute Credits/Discounts on a Prepaid Invoice

+

To distribute credits or discounts among line item segments on a prepaid invoice.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform for the prepaid invoice.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Distribute Credits/Discounts from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Distribute Credits/Discounts dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select one of the following credit/discount types:
    • Credit/Discounts($) to distribute a credit or discount dollar amount, and go to step 4.
    • Discount (%) to distribute a discount rate across all segments equally, and go to step 6.
  6. +

    Note:
    If you choose to distribute a discount percentage, the options under Action and Distribute are unavailable. Simply type any notes you want to include, type the percentage amount, and click OK.

    +
  7. If you selected Credit/Discounts($) in the previous step, select one of the following Action options:
    • Overwrite existing value to replace the existing credit or discount.
    • Adjust existing value to add the amount to the existing credit or discount.
  8. +
  9. Select one of the following Distribute options:
    • Evenly across line item segments to distribute the credit or discount evenly across all line item segments.
    • Based on total quantity received to apply the credits or discounts based on the total quantity in the segments.
  10. +
  11. Type any applicable notes in the Notes box.
  12. +
  13. Type the credit/discount dollar amount or the discount percentage that you want to distribute in the Amount box, and click OK.
  14. +

    The Record Check/Voucher Data dialog appears.

    +
  15. Select Check or Voucher.
  16. +
  17. If needed, type the check or voucher number in the Number box.
  18. +
  19. To change the date, type it in the Date box or select it from the calendar.
  20. +
  21. Click OK to submit your settings.
  22. +

    A message informs you that the action cannot be undone.

    +
  23. Click OK to confirm that you want to distribute the credit or discount.
  24. +

    The following events occur:

    +
      +
    • Credits distributed successfully appears in the status bar.
    • +
    • The Charges view of the Invoice workform shows the subtotals for all line item charges and credits in the Charges and Credits box.
    • +
    • The Totals tabbed page in each invoice line item segment shows the amount credited or discounted for each segment in the Credits & Discounts column.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    In some cases, the amount cannot be distributed evenly among the segments, so you may need to adjust the credits or discounts for an individual segment. For example, the credit is $10.00 and there are 3 segments. The credit that appears in each segment is $3.33, for a total of $9.99. You need to adjust one segment’s credits to $3.34. If you need to adjust the amount of credits or discounts for a segment on a prepaid invoice, you can right-click the segment, and select Adjust Credits. See Adjust invoice line item segment credits and discounts.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_an_open_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_an_open_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc954416 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distribute_credits_discounts_on_an_open_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Distribute credits/discounts on an open invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distribute Credits/Discounts on an Open Invoice

+

To distribute credits or discounts among the line item segments on an open invoice:

+

Note:
Credits and discounts must be distributed one at a time.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Distribute Credits/Discounts from the menu bar.

    The Distribute Credits/Discounts dialog box appears.

  4. +
  5. Select one of the following credit/discount types:
    • Credit/Discount($) to distribute a credit or discount dollar amount, and go to step 4.
    • Discount (%) to distribute a discount rate across all line item segments equally. Then, go to step 7.

    Note:
    If you choose to distribute a discount percentage, the options under Action and Distribute are disabled. Simply type the percentage amount, and click OK.

  6. +
  7. If you selected Credit/Discount($) in the previous step, select one of the following Action options:
    • Overwrite existing value to replace the existing credit or discount.
    • Adjust existing value to add the amount to the existing credit or discount.
  8. +
  9. Select one of the following Distribute options:
    • Evenly across line item segments to distribute the credit or discount evenly across all line item segments.
    • Based on total quantity received to apply the credits or discounts based on the total quantity in the segments.
  10. +
  11. Type any applicable notes in the Note box.
  12. +
  13. Type the credit/discount dollar amount or the discount percentage to distribute in the Amount box, and click OK.
  14. +
  15. A message informs you that the action cannot be undone.
  16. +
  17. Click OK to confirm that you want to distribute the credits and discounts.
  18. +
+

The following events occur when you distribute the credit or discount:

+
    +
  • Credits distributed successfully appears in the status bar.
  • +
  • Any linked funds are updated.
  • +
  • The Charges view of the Invoice workform shows the subtotals for all line item charges and credits in the Charges and Credits box.
  • +
  • The Totals tabbed page in each invoice line item segment shows the amount of the credits and discounts that was distributed to the individual segment.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Adjusting_Invoice_Charges_Credits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Adjusting_Invoice_Charges_Credits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81168cb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Adjusting_Invoice_Charges_Credits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Distributing/Adjusting Invoice Charges/Credits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distributing/Adjusting Invoice Charges/Credits

+

You can distribute charges, credits, and discounts across multiple line items and segments within an invoice. Distributing charges is useful for libraries that do not use a centralized fund to pay for the charges on the invoice. For example, the supplier charges a certain amount for shipping the entire order, but each branch has its own fund from which it pays shipping charges. You can distribute the shipping charges equally among all the line items’ segments within the invoice. Similarly, a discount or credit can be applied to all the invoice lines.

+

You may find that your paper invoice from the supplier does not match the invoice in Polaris. In this case, you can adjust the amount of a charge or credit on an individual segment of the open Polaris invoice by typing the amount in the appropriate box on the Charges tabbed page of the invoice line item segment.

+

When distributing charges or credits, Polaris treats prepaid and open invoices differently. Since prepaid invoices have transactions already posted to linked funds, distributing charges or credits across a prepaid invoice causes fund adjustments. With open invoices, the funds have not been expended, so no funds are adjusted.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Charges.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Charges.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40c2d53a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Charges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Distributing Charges + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distributing Charges

+

You can distribute charges equally among the line item segments in the invoice. If the invoice is open, the funds are not affected. If the invoice is prepaid, adjustments are made to the funds in the invoice line item segments.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Credits_Discounts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Credits_Discounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..85f02a5e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Distributing_Credits_Discounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Distributing Credits & Discounts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Distributing Credits & Discounts

+

You can distribute credit or discount dollar amounts among invoice line item segments, or you can distribute discount rates (percentages) among invoice line items. If you enter a credit or discount dollar amount, you can specify whether you want it equally distributed across all segments or according to the quantity received. If you enter a discount rate, this percentage is applied to all line items equally.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_charges.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_charges.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..868d13ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_charges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Make manual adjustments to charges + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Make Manual Adjustments to Charges

+

When you distribute charges automatically following the instructions in Distribute charges on an open invoice, the amount may not be distributed evenly among the segments, and you may need to make slight adjustments. For example, the shipping charge is $10.00 and there are 3 segments. The shipping charge that appears in each segment is $3.33, for a total of $9.99. You need to adjust one segment’s shipping charge to $3.34.

+

To make manual adjustments to charges on an invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform
  2. +
  3. Select the Charges tab, and select the charge you want to adjust.
  4. +
  5. Type the adjusted charge, and save the invoice line item.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_credits_and_discounts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_credits_and_discounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fc52b1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAdistribute/Make_manual_adjustments_to_credits_and_discounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Make manual adjustments to credits and discounts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Make Manual Adjustments to Credits and Discounts

+

When you distribute credits/discounts automatically by following the instructions in Distribute credits/discounts on an open invoice, the amount may not be evenly distributed among the segments. For example, the credit/discount is $10.00 and there are 3 segments with the amount of $3.33 in each segment. You need to adjust one segment’s credit/discount to $3.34 to get the total $10.00.

+

To make manual adjustments to credits or discounts.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select the Totals tab of the segment you want to adjust.
  4. +
  5. Select the credit and discounts box.
  6. +

    The amount is highlighted.

    +
  7. Type the adjusted credit/discount, and save the line item.
  8. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_a_tax_dollar_amount_on_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_a_tax_dollar_amount_on_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d83ff7a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_a_tax_dollar_amount_on_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a tax dollar amount on an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add a Tax Dollar Amount on an Invoice

+

To enter a dollar amount for the tax on the invoice:

+

Important:
All segments on the invoice must be received before you can enter a tax dollar amount for the invoice. Also, any charges, credits, or discounts must be distributed before the tax.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Receive any items that have not already been received.
  4. +
  5. Click on the Invoice toolbar.
  6. +

    The distribute tax dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Enter the dollar amount to add to the invoice.
  8. +

    The dollar amount is converted to a rate (percentage), any other tax rate or amount is overwritten, and the rate is applied to all the items.

    +
  9. If there is a discrepancy between the amount you entered when you distributed the tax and the amount in the sales tax total, adjust the tax on a line item segment to modify the total tax.
  10. +

    The total tax on the Invoice workform - Charges view will match the amount you distributed.

    +
  11. Select File > Save.
  12. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9bd856f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Add an invoice line linked to a purchase order line + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add an Invoice Line Linked to a Purchase Order Line

+

To add an invoice line that is linked to a purchase order line:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select View > Line Items.
  4. +

    The Line Items view appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Press CTRL+I to add a new line item.

    +
  5. Click above the list of line items.
  6. +

    The Invoice Line Item workform appears.

    +
  7. Select View, Additional Information.
  8. +

    The Additional Information view appears.

    +
  9. Click Find in the Purchase Order section, and use the Find Tool to search for the existing purchase order line item.
  10. +

    The Find Tool Results list appears.

    +
  11. Select the on-order, received, part received or currently received purchase order line item to which you want to link this new invoice line item.
  12. +

    The information from the linked purchase order line item (including all segments) is copied to the new invoice line item. You can copy a purchase order line to an invoice line only once, except in the case of standing orders or subscriptions, which can be linked to multiple invoices.

    +
+

Related Information

+

Standing Orders - If you want the invoice line item to accurately reflect payment for a distinct standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part, link to the purchase order line item and click Find in the Description section of the Invoice Line Item workform. Then search for and select the bibliographic record for the Standing Order part. For more information, see Enter order data for a serial holdings record.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_subscription.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_subscription.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebca9cee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_linked_to_a_subscription.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Add an invoice line linked to a subscription + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add an Invoice Line Linked to a Subscription

+

To add an invoice line when you want to pay for a subscription for which there is no purchase order:

+

Note:
If the invoice line item is not already linked to an active purchase order line item, you can link one or more subscriptions that are not linked to a purchase order. A separate invoice line item segment is created for each serial holdings record with a unique combination of destination and collection. If the serial holdings record is linked to a subscription record, the unit price and the fund in the subscription record are copied to the invoice line item.

+
    +
  1. Select File > New > Invoice.
  2. +

    The Invoice workform appears.

    +
  3. Type a number for the invoice in the Invoice number box.
  4. +
  5. Click Find next to the Supplier Name box, and select a supplier.
  6. +
  7. Save the invoice.
  8. +
  9. Select View > Line Items.
  10. +

    The Line Items view appears.

    +
  11. Click above the line items list.
  12. +

    The Invoice Line Item workform appears.

    +
  13. Select View > Additional Information to display the Additional Information view.
  14. +
  15. Click Find in the Subscription frame.
  16. +

    +

    +

    The Find Tool appears with Serial Holdings in the Object box.

    +

    Tip:
    To multi-select serial holdings records, right-click, and choose Select from the context menu. All selected serial holdings records must be linked to the same bibliographic record.

    +
  17. Search for and select the serial holdings records you want to link to the invoice line item.
  18. +

    The invoice line item is created with a separate segment for each serial holdings record you selected.

    +

    +  

    +
  19. Save the invoice line item.
  20. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_unlinked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_unlinked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90d36a9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_an_invoice_line_unlinked_to_a_purchase_order_line.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + Add an invoice line unlinked to a purchase order line + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add an Invoice Line Unlinked to a Purchase Order Line

+

To add an invoice line that is not linked to a purchase order line:

+

Note:
See Creating Invoices for instructions to create and display a new invoice if the invoice does not exist in Polaris.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select View > Line Items.
  4. +

    The Line Items view appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Press CTRL+I to add a new line item.

    +
  5. Click on the items toolbar.
  6. +

    The Invoice Line Item workform appears.

    +
  7. Enter the bibliographic information for the invoice line item, using one of the following methods:
  8. +

    Tip:
    You can preview a bibliographic record in the Find Tool results list by right-clicking the record and selecting Preview. To preview subsequent records in the results list, keep the Preview window open, select the first record, and press the down arrow key on your keyboard.

    +
      +
    • Select an existing bibliographic record from the database - If you know the ISBN of the bibliographic record, you can type it in the ISBN box and press ENTER. The bibliographic information is automatically filled in if one exact match to the ISBN is found in the database. If you do not know the ISBN, click Find, and use the Find Tool to search for and select an existing bibliographic record. When you select the record in the Find Tool results, the information is automatically filled in.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you do not find the title in your Polaris database, you can search external databases using Z39.50. For more information, see Searching Remote Databases.

    +
      +
    • Create a new bibliographic record from Acquisitions - Type the bibliographic information in the appropriate fields in the Description frame of the workform. If you are ordering non-print materials, you can select a template in the Template box. Upon saving the new bibliographic record, the leader, 006, and 007 are automatically placed in the record. This allows you to create brief non-print bibliographic records, instead of automatically generating a “book” bibliographic record, and then manually updating each non-print title to be ordered. If you do not select a template, the brief bibliographic record that is created will be for a book.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    You must create a bibliographic template in Cataloging with a name that begins with on-order for the template to display in the Invoice Line Item workform. See Creating On-Order Bibliographic Templates.

    +
  9. Add the invoice line item segment information. See Add segment information for an invoice line.
  10. +
  11. Select View > Additional Information.
  12. +

    The Additional Information view appears.

    +
  13. Type additional instructions, if applicable, in the following boxes:
    • Shipped date
    • Alert Note
  14. +

    Tip:
    If an invoice line item has an alert note, an exclamation point appears next to the line item in the Find Tool results list and in the Invoice workform, Line Items view.

    +
  15. Select File > Save to save the invoice line item to the invoice record.
  16. +

    Note:
    If you add a line item to an invoice with an invoice type of Approval or Blanket, the system checks for duplicate line items in invoices and purchase orders. If a duplicate is found with the same bibliographic ID, collection, destination, and fund, a message appears.

    +
+

Related Information

+

If you are not using Rapid Receipt, and an invoice line item is not linked to a purchase order, you must receive the line item at the segment level - See Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_general_information_to_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_general_information_to_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..288f70a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_general_information_to_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Add general information to an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add General Information to an Invoice

+

To enter general information on an invoice other than one generated via EDI:

+

Note:
The invoice already includes some information if you created it by copying or linking from a purchase order or from another invoice.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Define the optional shipment information as follows:
    • Specify how the invoice was transmitted in the Transmission method box.
    • To specify a closing alert date, select the Closing Alert Date check box and select a date.
    • If you track the date your library expects the shipment to arrive, click Due date and type a date to specify the due date.
    • In the Shipped date box, type the date that the shipment was shipped by the supplier.
    • In the Receipt date box, type the date that the shipment or supplier’s invoice was received at the library.
    • Type any comments or special conditions about the shipment or invoice in the General note box.
  4. +
  5. To enter or change header charges and funds for the invoice as a whole, such as shipping charges, follow the instructions in Add or change invoice header charges and credits.
  6. +

    Note:
    If shipping and other charges are paid by various branches, assign funds at the line item segment level and distribute the charges. See Distribute charges on an open invoice.

    +
  7. Select File > Save.
  8. +
  9. If applicable, add or change the charges and discount rates on the Charges view of the Invoice workform by following the instructions in Add or change invoice header charges and credits.
  10. +
  11. Add the invoice line items by following the instructions in Adding Invoice Line Items.
  12. +
+

Note:
Most fields in the invoice become read-only once the invoice reaches the following statuses: Paid, PartPaid, or Credited. Fields in prepaid invoices are also restricted.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_invoice_lines_using_Rapid_Receipt.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_invoice_lines_using_Rapid_Receipt.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e80e69e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_invoice_lines_using_Rapid_Receipt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Add invoice lines using Rapid Receipt + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add Invoice Lines Using Rapid Receipt

+

Important:
The printed purchase order contains the purchase order line item ID number that uniquely identifies each line item. If you want to use the Rapid Receipt function, ask your supplier to include this number for each line item on the packing slip/ invoice that comes with the shipment. You can also enter the ISBN or title for each line item, but the matching may not be as exact.

+

You can create a new blank invoice, and use Rapid Receipt to find the purchase order line item that matches the number on your supplier’s packing slip. When you pull in the information from the purchase order line item, each invoice line item is created automatically, and the line item is also received.

+

To receive purchase order line items from an invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform - Line Items view.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Rapid Receipt or click on the Invoice workform.
  4. +
  5. Type the purchase order line item ID number in the PO line ID box, type the ISBN or ISSN in the ISBN/ISSN box, or type the title in the Title box.
  6. +
  7. Press ENTER or click Find.

    If there is an exact match, the title details appear under Confirm PO Line.

  8. +
  9. Click Save/Next.

    The invoice line item is added and the purchase order line item is updated to Received in one step.

  10. +
  11. Enter the next PO line ID on the Rapid Receipt dialog box.

    The invoice line item is added and the purchase order line item is updated to Received in one step. For more information, see Use Rapid Receipt to receive line items from an invoice.

  12. +

    The Rapid Receipt dialog box appears.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_or_change_invoice_header_charges_and_credits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_or_change_invoice_header_charges_and_credits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a37f7d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_or_change_invoice_header_charges_and_credits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Add or change invoice header charges and credits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add or Change Invoice Header Charges and Credits

+

Header charges are the charges from the supplier that are not associated with any specific line item, such as shipping or cataloging charges for the whole order. They are posted against distinct funds and are not distributed across line item segments. You can enter header charges in the Purchase Order workform, but the exact amount is often not known until the invoice is received.

+

To enter or change header charges (or credits) that are associated with the entire invoice:

+

Note:
If the invoice is prepaid, you must create a linked invoice to adjust header charges. See Link an invoice to another invoice.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Only one charge entry with one amount and one fund can be added for each charge type. For example, if you added a charge for Cataloging, the charge type of Cataloging no longer appears in the Charge Type list. If you need to split a charge so that two funds are used to pay for a charge, use the Other charge type.

    +
  3. To add each header charge, or a header credit, do the following in the Header Charges section on the Invoice workform - General view:
    1. Select a charge type in the Charge Type box. To enter a credit, select the charge type Credit.
  4. +

    Note:
    To change the charge type of Other to a more specific name, you can rename it using the Acq/Serials parameter Other charge type description. See Rename the purchase order and invoice header Other charge type.

    +
  5. Type a dollar amount for the charge or credit in the Amount box.
  6. +
  7. Select a fund to use for the header charge or credit in the Fund box. If the fund does not appear in the Fund list box, click Find to search for and select it using the Polaris Find Tool.
  8. +
  9. Click Add to add the charge type, amount, and fund to the list box.
  10. +

    Note:
    If you need to remove or change a charge type, select it in the list box and click Remove.

    +
  11. Select File > Save to save the record.
  12. +

    Note:
    Complete the invoice by following the steps in Adding Invoice Line Items.

    +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Charges view of the Invoice workform - When you enter header charges and credits on the General view of the Invoice workform, they are displayed in the Charges view, but they cannot be changed there.
  • +
+
    +
  • Linked Funds - Select Link > Funds to open the list of funds linked to the invoice. When the invoice is paid, the header charges and credits are posted in the funds selected for the header charges on the General view of the Invoice workform.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_segment_information_for_an_invoice_line.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_segment_information_for_an_invoice_line.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d63efc0d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Add_segment_information_for_an_invoice_line.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Add segment information for an invoice line + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add Segment Information for an Invoice Line

+

To add a segment that is not linked to a purchase order line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. To change the default destination, select a branch in the Destination box.
  4. +
  5. Select a fund in the Fund box, or click Find to search for and select a fund. To pay for the segment with more than one fund, click , and follow the instructions in Split funds for a purchase order line item segment.
  6. +
  7. If there are any charges associated with the individual segment, click the Charges tab, and type the dollar amount in the appropriate charges box.
  8. +
  9. If there are any credits or discounts associated with the individual segment, click the Totals tab, and type the dollar amount in the Credits & Discounts box.
  10. +

    Tip:
    You can distribute charges and credits/discounts among invoice line item segments, and then make slight adjustments to individual segments. See Distribute charges on an open invoice and Distribute credits/discounts on an open invoice.

    +
  11. Continue adding segments for the invoice line item by repeating steps 1-5.
  12. +
  13. Select File > Save to save the invoice.
  14. +
+

Related Information

+

The following Acquisitions/Serials profiles in Polaris Administration control the display of data in segments:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Adding_Invoice_Line_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Adding_Invoice_Line_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bba72f0d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Adding_Invoice_Line_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Adding Invoice Line Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adding Invoice Line Items

+

Invoice lines can be added to an invoice whether or not they are linked to a purchase order. If a line item is linked to a purchase order, all the applicable information within the order is automatically copied to the invoice. You can change this information or enter new data on the Invoice Line Item workform. If a line item is not linked to a purchase order, you enter all the line item information following the procedures in this section. You can create invoice line items from the Invoice Line Item workform or by using Rapid Receipt on the Invoice workform. When you use Rapid Receipt from the Invoice workform, the invoice line items are added and the linked purchase order line items are received in one step.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_a_single_line_item_or_specific_segments_to_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_a_single_line_item_or_specific_segments_to_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64d0dfdd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_a_single_line_item_or_specific_segments_to_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a single line item or specific segments to an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy a Single Line Item or Specific Segments to an Invoice

+

To create a new invoice by copying a purchase order line item or line item segments:

+

Tip:
You can copy purchase order line items from different purchase orders to the same invoice.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Copy To from the menu to copy the line item, or select the segments, right-click and select Copy To.
  4. +

    Important:
    If you are selecting multiple segments, you must put the cursor in the Segment Number column.

    +

    The Copy Lines To dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select Invoice > New check box, and click OK.
  6. +

    The New Invoice dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Do the following steps to complete the New Invoice dialog box:
  8. +
      +
    1. Type the number of the invoice in the Invoice No. box. It can be up to 30 characters.
    2. +

      Tip:
      You can search for invoices by invoice number suffix.

      +
    3. If your library uses a suffix to identify invoices, type a suffix in the Suffix box. It can be up to 8 characters.
    4. +
    5. To select a different library, change the library in the Owner box.
    6. +
    7. To select a different supplier, click Find and search for a different supplier.
    8. +
    +
  9. Click OK to submit your settings.
  10. +

    Copy Completed Successfully appears in the status bar.

    +

    Note:
    If the lines have already been copied to an invoice, you are alerted and the operation fails. Exception: Standing order and subscription lines can be copied to multiple invoices.

    +
  11. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the invoice.
  12. +

    The invoice you created appears in the Invoice workform and contains the line item or segments copied from the purchase order.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3e7b7df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy an invoice line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy an Invoice Line Item

+

To copy an invoice line item in the same invoice:

+

Tip:
Press CTRL+N or click on the toolbar to copy an invoice line item.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select File > New.
  4. +
  5. Select one of the following options to copy an invoice line item:
    • Clear Workform - None of the information from the invoice line item is copied. A new, blank Invoice Line Item workform appears.
    • Copy Existing Workform - All the bibliographic information, the material type, and the segments are copied to the new invoice line item.
  6. +

    Important:
    When you select Copy Existing Workform, and click Find on the new line item to search for another bibliographic record, the search is based on the ISBN currently in the ISBN box on the new line item. To search for a new bibliographic record, select (highlight) the existing ISBN and type a new ISBN in the box before clicking Find.

    +
  7. Change the bibliographic or segment data and save the copied line item.
  8. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_to_create_a_new_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_to_create_a_new_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c9afc83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_an_invoice_to_create_a_new_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy an invoice to create a new invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy an Invoice to Create a New Invoice

+

To create a new invoice by copying an existing invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select File > New.
  4. +

    The New Invoice dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select one of the following options:
    • Copy Existing Workform to copy the information to a new invoice workform.
    • Clear Workform to clear the contents of the workform and reset any default data.
  6. +
  7. Click OK to continue the process.
  8. +

    The Invoice workform appears with the same number as the invoice you copied.

    +

    Note:
    All invoice workform information is copied except for invoice line items, payment history, check and/or voucher date and number, invoice status (the new status is Open), and invoice status date (the new status date is today’s date).

    +
  9. Type a different number for the invoice in the Invoice no box.
  10. +
  11. Select File > Save to save the new invoice.
  12. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_multiple_line_items_to_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_multiple_line_items_to_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e25e23f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Copy_multiple_line_items_to_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy multiple line items to an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy Multiple Line Items to an Invoice

+

You can copy all the purchase order lines from any view of the Purchase Order workform, or you can select specific line items to copy from the Line Items view. The purchase order must be released in order to copy lines to an invoice.

+

To create an invoice by copying purchase order lines from the Purchase Order workform:

+

Note:
You can also copy purchase order lines to an existing invoice.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Choose one of the following options:
    • To copy all the line items, select Tools > Copy Lines To from the menu bar.
    • To copy only selected line items, right-click the line items on the Line Items view, and select Copy To from the context menu.
  4. +
  5. The Copy Lines To dialog box appears.
  6. +
  7. Select Invoice > select the New check box, and click OK.

    The New Invoice dialog box appears.

  8. +
  9. Do the following steps to complete the New Invoice dialog box:
  10. +
      +
    1. Type the number of the invoice in the Invoice No. box. It can be up to 30 characters.

      Tip:
      You can search for invoices by invoice number suffix.

    2. +
    3. If your library uses a suffix to identify invoices, type a suffix in the Suffix box. It can be up to 8 characters.
    4. +
    5. If you want a different date than the present date to appear on the invoice, type the date in the Invoice Date box or click the calendar icon and select the date. See Using Date Pickers.
    6. +
    7. To select a different library, change the library in the Owner box. The default library that appears in this box is the library in the purchase order source record.
    8. +
    9. To select a different supplier, click Find. Search for and select the supplier of your choice from the results list.
    10. +
    11. Click OK to submit your settings.

      Copy Completed Successfully appears in the status bar.

      Note:
      If the lines have already been copied to an invoice, you are alerted and the operation fails. Exception: Standing order or subscription lines can be copied to multiple invoices.

    12. +
    +
  11. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the invoice.
  12. +
+

The invoice you created appears in the Invoice workform and contains all the line items copied from the purchase order.

+

Important:
The charges, sales tax, and discount rate are not copied to the new invoice when you copy the line items.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_a_miscellaneous_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_a_miscellaneous_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e78d220d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_a_miscellaneous_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a miscellaneous invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Create a Miscellaneous Invoice

+

Note:
If you need to distribute charges, use another type of order such as an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. order. You cannot distribute charges on a miscellaneous invoice.

+

You can use miscellaneous invoices to track library expenditures or credits that are not directly linked to specific bibliographic records. When you enter an invoice line item in a miscellaneous invoice, you do not search for and select a bibliographic record. Instead, you type a description of the charge or credit in the Title box, but no brief bibliographic record is created.

+

Miscellaneous invoices do not require a link to a supplier record either. You can create a miscellaneous invoice that has charges or credits at the header level but no line items.

+

Tip:
You can search for miscellaneous invoices in the Find Tool by selecting Type in the Limit by box and Miscellaneous in the Value box.

+

To create a miscellaneous invoice:

+
    +
  1. Select File > New from the Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
  3. Select Invoice in the Objects list, and click OK.
  4. +

    The Invoice workform appears.

    +
  5. Type the number for the invoice in the Invoice number box.
  6. +
  7. Select Miscellaneous in the Type box. +

    Note:
    You do not need to link to a supplier record when the invoice type is Miscellaneous, but you will receive a message when you save the invoice without a supplier.

  8. +
  9. (Optional) To link to a supplier record, click Find next to the Supplier box and search for a supplier.
  10. +
  11. To enter header charges for a miscellaneous invoice, do the following steps:

    Tip:
    If you enter a charge incorrectly, select it in the list and click Remove, then re-enter it and click Add.

    1. On the Invoice workform-General view (view 1), in the Header Charges section, select the charge type in the Charge type box.
    2. Type an amount in the Amount box.
    3. Select a fund in the Fund box, or if the fund is not in the list, click Find and search for and select the fund using the Find Tool.
    1. Click Add to add the charge type, amount, and fund to the list of charges.
  12. +
  13. To add line items to a miscellaneous invoice, do the following steps:
    1. Select View > Line Items or click .

    The Line Items view appears.

    Tip:
    Press CTRL+I to add a new line item.

    1. Click on the items toolbar.

    The Invoice Line Item workform appears.

    1. In the Title box, type a description for the service or materials being purchased.

      Note:
      When the invoice type is Miscellaneous, the Find Tool is unavailable because a miscellaneous invoice line item is not linked to a bibliographic record. When you enter title information in the miscellaneous invoice line item, no brief bibliographic record is created.

    1. Type a price for the service or materials in the Unit price box.
    2. Type a quantity for the segment in the Quantity box. Unlike regular invoices, you do not need to receive the quantity to pay or credit it.
    3. Select the library that is receiving the service or materials in the Destination box.

    Tip:
    The display of the funds is controlled by the settings in the Acquisitions/Serials profile Acq fund droplist setup. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions.

    1. Select a fund in the Fund box, or click to search for the fund.

    Note:
    To pay for or credit the segment using more than one fund, click , and follow the instructions in Split funds for a purchase order line item segment.

  14. +
  15. Add more line item segments, if necessary.
  16. +
  17. Select File > Save to save the invoice line item to the invoice record.
  18. +
  19. Select File > Save to save the invoice.
  20. +

    If you have not selected a supplier, a message box appears.

    +
  21. Click Yes to save the miscellaneous invoice without a supplier or click No and use the Find Tool to select a supplier.
  22. +
  23. Then, save the miscellaneous invoice.

    Tip:
    To credit a credit memo, create a Misc Invoice and select Tools- Credit.

  24. +
  25. Select Pay or Credit to post the expenditure or unexpenditure transaction in the linked fund or funds.
  26. +
+

Related Information

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_an_invoice_without_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_an_invoice_without_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b245b65 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Create_an_invoice_without_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Create an invoice without a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Create an Invoice Without a Purchase Order

+

You can create an invoice without a purchase order for blanket orders, approval plans, or miscellaneous invoices.

+

To create a new invoice from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

+

Tip:
You can also create an invoice containing line items from multiple purchase orders. See Add invoice lines using Rapid Receipt.

+
    +
  1. Select File > New from the Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
  3. Select Invoice in the Objects list, and click OK.
  4. +

    The Invoice workform appears with the following default information:

    +
      +
    • Date - today’s date
    • +
    • Type - Regular
    • +
    • Payment method - Purchase +
    • +
    • Invoice status - Open +
    • +
    • Paid by (Library) - library where user logged in
    • +
    +
  5. Type a number (up to 30 characters) in the Number box.
  6. +
  7. To add a number suffix, type it in the box to the right of the Number box. The suffix can be up to 8 characters.
  8. +

    Tip:
    You can change the invoice number and number suffix until the invoice is paid.

    +
  9. Click Find next to the Supplier box, and search for and select the supplier using the Find Tool.
  10. +
  11. Select File > Save to save the invoice.
  12. +
  13. Complete the Invoice workform. See Add or change invoice header charges and credits.
  14. +
  15. Add the invoice line items (titles). See Add an invoice line unlinked to a purchase order line.
  16. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Creating_Invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Creating_Invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d9df066 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Creating_Invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Creating Invoices

+

With orders that are paid upon receipt, use one of the following methods to create invoices:

+
    +
  • Copy all line items or selected line items from the Purchase Order workform to an invoice.
  • +
  • Link a purchase order to an invoice.
  • +
  • Copy lines or segments of lines from the Purchase Order Line Item workform to an invoice.
  • +
  • Copy an existing invoice from the Invoice workform.
  • +
  • Create a new invoice from the Shortcut Bar without a purchase order.
  • +
  • Create a new invoice using Rapid Receipt.
  • +
  • Set up an EDI invoice profile and create an EDI invoice automatically.
  • +
+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Invoicing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Invoicing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39834588 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Invoicing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Invoicing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Invoicing

+

An invoice in Polaris is an itemized list of the materials shipped to the library, including any services provided by the supplier. It includes titles, quantities, funds, prices, and other applicable charges. There are various options for invoicing in Polaris, though most orders are processed electronically, and a library may find EDI to be a beneficial option. Additionally, Polaris does offer other manual methods for specific types of processing. Options for processing invoices in Polaris include:

+

Regular (paid upon receipt) - Purchase order line items are copied to create invoice line items. Encumbrance transactions are posted in each linked fund until the invoice is paid and the expenditures are posted. The payment method can be Depository Agreement, Free, or Purchase.

+

Prepaid - If you select prepay when the purchase order is released, Polaris automatically creates a prepaid invoice, and the funds are immediately expended.

+

Prepaid with a deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. fund - An invoice is also created automatically when you release a purchase order with a deposit account fund. The linked funds are debited, and no encumbrances are transacted.

+

Approval plan and Blanket order -Under an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. or blanket order, the supplier sends specific types of material, but the individual titles are not known until they are received. For example, your supplier sends your library the latest releases from the most popular adult fiction authors. There is no difference in Polaris between Blanket orders and Approval plans. However, some libraries may wish to use the Blanket order type for items that cannot be returned to the supplier.

+

Select either of these order types on the Invoice workform to track the automatic shipment of titles under a specific program the supplier offers. You can enter the plan information in the Plan box on the Supplier workform.

+

When the shipment arrives, you add the line items for the titles and segments for the number of copies. The titles are checked for duplicates on existing firm orders, allowing you to decide whether to keep copies of titles that were already ordered. Then you receive the copies at the segment level where you add the number of copies that arrived for each title in the shipment. For more information, see Add an invoice line unlinked to a purchase order line and Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment.

+

With blanket orders and approval plans, funds are not encumbered, since there is no purchase order, and they are expended when the invoice is paid. You can track the expenditures for items paid for using these order types with the Items by Approval Plan and Items by Blanket Plan reports. See Acquisitions Reports.

+

Miscellaneous - This invoice type can be used to account for charges other than for materials; to link to other invoices to make adjustments after the invoice is paid; or to indicate a lump payment to a serial supplier for all your subscription renewals. Line items on miscellaneous invoices are not linked to bibliographic records or purchase order line items. The payment method for miscellaneous invoices is always Purchase.

+

Rapid Receipt - You can start with a new invoice, pull in multiple line items from various purchase orders, and receive them in one step. See Use Rapid Receipt to receive line items from an invoice.

+

Invoices for serials - You can create an invoice without a purchase order to pay for subscriptions. See Add an invoice line linked to a subscription.

+

Linked invoices - You can link an invoice to one or more invoices to account for debits or credits to invoices that have been paid and keep a clear audit trail. See Linking Invoices.

+

EDI Invoices- If you send orders using electronic data interchange (EDI), the electronic invoice file is created automatically when the order is filled. The EDI invoice reflects the contents of the actual shipment and may contain line items (titles) that were ordered via various EDI purchase order transactions.

+

EDI invoice line items linked to purchase order line items - The EDI Invoice Defaults profile updates the linked purchase order line item to received as soon as the invoice is saved in the Polaris database, or it can be set to not to automatically receive the purchase order line item, and receive later when the shipment arrives. SeeSet up EDI invoice defaults.

+
    +
  • No matching purchase order line item - If no matching bibliographic record is found, the invoice line item is created using all the information in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.
  • +
  • Matching purchase order line item has an incorrect status - If a matching purchase order line item is found, but it has an incorrect status, such as cancelled, it cannot be linked to the purchase order line item. The information from the purchase order line item is used to create the invoice line item, and an error is listed on the log. For more information on the EDI invoice e-mail log, see The EDI Invoice E-mail Log.
  • +
  • EDI invoice line items where quantity sent is not equal to quantity ordered - Select the Hold partial shipment option in the Polaris Administration profile EDI Invoice Defaults to prevent EDI invoices from being generated automatically if the quantity sent on any of the line items in the invoice does not match the quantity ordered. See Set up EDI invoice defaults and Process EDI invoices for partial shipments.
  • +
+

Note:
For information on standard invoice reports, see Acquisitions Reports.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_an_invoice_to_another_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_an_invoice_to_another_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9cb265df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_an_invoice_to_another_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Link an invoice to another invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Link an Invoice to Another Invoice

+

To link an invoice to another invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Link Invoice from the menu or click .
  4. +

    The Link Invoices dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Link to a new or existing invoice as follows:
  6. +
      +
    • To link the invoice to a new invoice, click New.
    • +

      The New Linked Invoice dialog box appears.

      +
    • Type the number and number suffix in the Invoice no and Suffix boxes.
    • +
    • The Invoice date defaults to the present date, but you can click on the calendar icon and change the date. See Using Date Pickers.
    • +
    • Select the library branch in the Owner box.
    • +
    • Select the invoice type in the Invoice type box.
    • +
    • Select the payment method in the Payment box.
    • +
    • The supplier for the new linked invoice is the same as the supplier in the invoice you are linking from. To select a different supplier, click Find and search for the supplier using the Find Tool.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To link to a miscellaneous invoice that does not have a supplier, you must first create the miscellaneous invoice and then link to it.

    +
  7. Click OK to complete the link.
  8. +
      +
    • To link to an existing invoice, click Find. The Find Tool appears.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you know the number of the invoice you want to link to, type the number in the Invoice box and press ENTER.

    +
  9. Search for the existing invoice, and select it. The Linked Invoices dialog box appears with the invoice you selected in the Destination box.
  10. +
  11. Click OK to complete the link.
  12. +

    The Invoice workform for the original invoice appears with the message Link completed successfully in the status bar. The Linked invoices note remains in the status bar for any invoice that is linked to other invoices.

    +
  13. To go to the new or existing invoice to which you linked the original invoice, click Links > Invoices.
  14. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_from_a_purchase_order_to_create_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_from_a_purchase_order_to_create_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..515dc03d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Link_from_a_purchase_order_to_create_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Link from a purchase order to create an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Link from a purchase order to create an invoice

+

To create an invoice for items received as part of an order:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Create Invoice.
  4. +

    The Invoice workform appears with the following information from the purchase order:

    +
      +
    • +

      The General view contains the same library, supplier, and fund information as the General view of the Purchase Order workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If there are header charges in the Purchase Order workform, they display on the General view and the Charges view of the Invoice workform.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you link a purchase order to an invoice, the line items are not automatically copied to the new invoice.

    +
  5. Type the number for the invoice in the Invoice number box.
  6. +
  7. Select File > Save to save the new invoice.
  8. +

    The invoice is saved and linked to the purchase order.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Linking_Invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Linking_Invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b7008d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Linking_Invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Linking Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Linking Invoices

+

When you need to make changes to an invoice, you can link another invoice to the original invoice to account for debits or credits. You can link an unlimited number of invoices together regardless of their status or type. If an invoice is linked to another invoice, a message appears in the status bar on the Invoice workform. You can link an invoice to an existing invoice or you can create a new linked invoice. When you create a new linked invoice, the default type is Miscellaneous, but you can change the invoice type. To post credits to the header charges for a prepaid invoice, you must use a miscellaneous invoice.

+

Note:
Linking invoices is a method for tracking additional transactions to the original invoice. If you make modifications to one invoice, or print the invoice voucher, the changes do not affect the other invoices linked to it.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Process_EDI_invoices_for_partial_shipments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Process_EDI_invoices_for_partial_shipments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1f3ca24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Process_EDI_invoices_for_partial_shipments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + Process EDI invoices for partial shipments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Process EDI invoices for partial shipments

+

Use the Process EDI Invoices workform if your library has selected the Hold partial shipment invoices option in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile in Polaris Administration. When the option to hold partial shipments is selected, the raw EDI invoice data from the supplier does not automatically create EDI invoice records in Polaris if the quantity sent and the quantity ordered do not match for at least one title on the invoice. If all quantities sent match all quantities ordered for all titles, the supplier’s EDI invoice data is saved automatically as an EDI invoice record in Polaris.

+

Note:
You must have the permission Process EDI Invoices: Allow set at the system level to select EDI invoices to process.

+

To generate an EDI invoice where the quantities sent do not equal the quantities ordered:

+

Tip:
You can wait to process partial shipment invoices if the supplier indicates the remainder of the order will be shipped eventually. When the supplier is able to complete the order and sends the EDI invoice file, the completed EDI invoice is created automatically in Polaris.

+
    +
  1. Select Acquisitions > EDI Services > Process EDI Invoices from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, click , or press ALT+A+E.
  2. +

    The Process EDI Invoices workform appears.

    +

    + +

    +
  3. Enter the search criteria for the invoice as follows:
  4. +
      +
    • +

      Enter the invoice number (maximum of 30 characters).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter the supplier’s SAN (maximum of 7 characters).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter an invoice date range by selecting dates in the From and To boxes.

      +
    • +
    +
  5. To filter the invoices by branch, select a branch in the Organization box. Select All to see all partially received EDI invoices in your library system.
  6. +
  7. Click Go.
  8. +

    The ungenerated invoice or invoices that meet your search criteria are listed.

    +
  9. To see the purchase order line items linked to this invoice, right-click an invoice in the list, and select Purchase Order Line Items from the context menu.
  10. +

    A box lists the linked purchase order line items. At least one of the purchase order line items listed has a number of copies sent less than the number of copies ordered. You can open a purchase order line item in its workform by double-clicking on it.

    +

    Note:
    If the invoice is linked to only one purchase order line item, the Purchase Order Line Item workform appears.

    +
  11. Select the invoice or invoices in the list, right-click and select Generate selected invoices.
  12. +

    The invoices you selected are generated, and they no longer appear in the list. If the Update linked PO line items check box is checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile in Polaris Administration, the linked purchase order line items are updated to Received, and any segments that could not be received are set to On-Order. The linked item records are either updated to in-process or remain on-order, depending on the setting in the profile. If the Update linked PO line items check box is not checked, the purchase order line items remain unreceived. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.

    +
  13. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the generated EDI invoice.
  14. +

    If the line items are not received automatically, you can receive them from the invoice or purchase order. See Receiving Orders.

    +

    Partial Shipments

    +

    If you hold EDI invoices for partial shipments, you can set up your distribution profiles at your supplier’s site so the 970 tags are created first for the branches where you need the full number of copies ordered. Then you can receive the full number of copies for the busiest branches and split receipt for branches that can wait for the full number of copies to arrive. For more information, see Creating Purchase Orders.

    +

    The EDI Invoice Email Log

    +

    Tip:
    The EDIAgent and EDIFTP logs are created automatically, but are not sent to library staff members. These logs provide information regarding the FTP transfer and can be used in troubleshooting connection failures. For more information, see EDIAgent and EDIFTP Logs.

    +

    When Polaris attempts to create EDI invoices from data retrieved from suppliers, a separate log file is created for each supplier’s invoice data. For each invoice, the log file indicates whether the invoice was created and lists details regarding any line items that had errors. These log files are saved in the same directory as the EDINew and EDIDone folders with the following name:
    EDIInvoiceResults_(Supplier name).(Org abbreviation).log.

    +

    Examples:
    EDIInvoiceResults_Baker_And_Taylor.STI.log
    EDIInvoiceResults_Ingram.STI.log
    .

    +

    These logs are emailed to the addresses in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile with the subject line EDIInvoiceResults and organization abbreviation. The email log lists invoice line items that were generated, line items with errors, and line items with bibliographic-level holds placed on the titles.

    +
+

The following types of messages may appear in the email log that is sent to the addresses in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile with the subject line EDIInvoiceResults:

+
    +
  • +
  • This message indicates the invoices were created successfully and some line items have linked bibliographic hold requests:
  • + +
+

Tip:
The holds information in the log can help you prioritize the processing of materials that have holds if you have enabled the Update linked PO lines to Received setting in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. (When the purchase order line items are received automatically, users do not see the message that appears when manually receiving line items with holds.)

+

Begin processing EDI 810 file: testsal3644d.txt +
+
Invoice # BTSAL3644e Suffix = EDI, was created. +
+
INLI #2 on Inv #BTSAL3644e Suffix = EDI, has 1 linked holds. +
+
Invoice # BTSAL3644b Suffix = EDI, was created. +
+
INLI #4 on Inv #BTSAL3644b Suffix = EDI, has 2 linked holds. +
+
Invoice # BTSAL3644d Suffix = EDI, was created. +
+
Invoice # BTSAL3644a Suffix = EDI, was created. +
+
End processing EDI 810 file: testsal3644d.txt +
+

+
    +
  • +
  • These messages indicate problems with the invoices:
  • +
      +
    • Invoice #3014384848 may not have been created. Contact your Polaris support representative for assistance. +
    • +
    • Inv#3014384848 has invalid IT101(s). Could not match an IT101/IT111 with a PO# in the system. Inv#3014384848 suffix=EDI was created. - The invoice was created, but there were problems with some of the invoice line items that did not match up with a purchase order.
    • +
    • The SA Profile defaults were used to create INLI# 5 on Inv #3014384848. - An unlinked invoice line item was created using default data in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile because no matching purchase order line item was found. If a bibliographic record with a matching ISBN and title is found in the Polaris database, it is used for the title of the invoice line item. If no matching ISBN or title is found, the title is the default title in the profile, for example, No matching PO line item was found.
    • +
    • The POLI# 5 on PO#BetterBooksPO1 is not linked to INLI# 4 on Inv# 3014384848 Suffix = EDI because it has the wrong status. An unlinked INLI was created. - An invoice line item is created using information from the matching purchase order line item, but the invoice line item cannot be linked to the purchase order line item because the purchase order line item has a status that prevents it from being linked.
    • +
    • Invoice#3014384848 Suffix = EDI was created. - The invoice was created, but check the messages for individual invoice line items that may have problems.
    • +
    • The POLI# 5 on PO#BetterBooksPO1 is not linked to INLI# 6 on INV# 3014384848 Suffix = EDI because the quantity sent did not equal what was ordered. An unlinked INLI was created. - This message appears when the Hold partial shipment option is not selected in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. When an invoice line item indicates that the quantity sent does not equal the quantity ordered, the invoice line item is created using information from the matching purchase order line item, but it cannot be linked to the purchase order line item because the quantities do not match.
    • +
    • EDI Inv# X Suffix= EDI has not been generated because Invoice line item quantity sent does not equal the PO line item total quantity ordered and EDI invoicing is set to hold partial shipment invoices. These PO lines are partials: [POLI ID X, POLI ID Y] - This message appears when the Hold partial shipment invoices option is selected on the EDI Invoice Defaults profile, and the EDI invoice indicates that for at least one line item, the quantity shipped does not equal the quantity ordered.
    • +
    + +
+

Note:
To see the linked purchase order line item, use the Find Tool to search for it by the purchase order line item ID.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Review_automatic_EDI_invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Review_automatic_EDI_invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e91960d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Review_automatic_EDI_invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + Review automatic EDI invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Review automatic EDI invoices

+

EDI invoices are created automatically in Polaris using data retrieved from the supplier’s FTP server, and an email message notifies you that the invoice is available. You can search for EDI invoices by the invoice number suffix EDI.

+

When an EDI invoice is generated in Polaris, a log of the invoice creation is posted to an EDI invoice log. The log lists the invoice numbers, and includes whether one or more titles have holds. The log also lists any errors.

+

For more information about the invoice log contents, see The EDI Invoice E-mail Log.

+

Important:
To deal separately with EDI invoices where the quantity sent does not equal the quantity ordered, select the Hold partial shipment invoices option on the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. See Set up EDI invoice defaults. Then you can generate them using the Process EDI Invoices workform. See Process EDI invoices for partial shipments.

+

To open and review automatic EDI invoices:

+
    +
  1. Select Acquisitions > Invoices from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The Find Tool appears with Invoices selected in the Object box.

    +
  3. Select Invoice number suffix in the Search by box, and type EDI in the For box.
  4. +

    Note:
    You can also limit by the invoice number suffix, EDI. For example, you can search by invoice date range and limit by the EDI suffix. You can select a sort by option to sort the results list before it appears. For example, you could search by the number suffix EDI, limit by supplier, type Baker*, and sort by owner to list the Baker & Taylor EDI invoices sorted by the owning branch.

    +

    The automatically-created EDI invoices appear in the results.

    +

    + +

    +
  5. Double-click to open the invoice in the Invoice workform.
  6. +

    The EDI filename and the date the order was shipped are displayed in the workform (if the supplier includes this information).

    +

    + +

    +
  7. Select View > Line Items to see the line items in the invoice.
  8. +

    Note:
    If there are invoice line items with errors that prevented them from linking to purchase order line items, a red exclamation point icon appears next to the invoice line items. The icon also appears in the Find Tool results list for EDI invoice line items that have errors.

    +

    + +

    +
  9. Check your e-mail for messages regarding EDI invoice transmissions. The email message is a detailed log of the invoices that the EDIAgent picked up from the supplier’s site. The log lists any bibliographic-level holds placed on the items, and any errors in the invoice. See The EDI Invoice Email Log.
  10. +

    Important:
    Correct any errors before paying the invoice.

    +
  11. If an invoice line item is listed with a red exclamation point because it was not linked to a purchase order line item, you can manually link to the purchase order line item by doing the following steps:
  12. +
      +
    1. On the Invoice Line Item workform, select View > Additional Information.
    2. +

      The Additional Information view appears.

      +
    3. Click Find.
    4. +

      The Find Tool appears with Purchase Order Line Item selected.

      +
    5. Search for and select the appropriate purchase order line item.
    6. +

      Any information in the Invoice Line Item workform is overwritten with the information from the purchase order line item you selected.

      +
    +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Setting up EDI ordering - To communicate with a supplier via EDI, you must first contact the supplier and get specific information to enter in Polaris. See Prepare for EDI Ordering.
  • +
  • Entering EDI information in the Supplier record - Set up the supplier record with the information you gathered from the supplier. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data.
  • +
  • Polaris EDIAgent - The Polaris EDIAgent is an SQL job that scans the library’s directory on the supplier’s FTP server. When it finds files, they are retrieved and used to create the purchase order acknowledgment and EDI invoice. If the supplier provides an Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN), it is also retrieved by the EDIAgent. For more information, see About the Polaris EDIAgent Job.
  • +
  • Electronic Purchase Order Acknowledgment - After the supplier receives the EDI purchase order, an electronic purchase order acknowledgment is placed on the supplier’s FTP server. The Polaris EDIAgent retrieves the file and saves it in a local directory. You can generate the Electronic Purchase Order Acknowledgment from the Utilities menu. See Acquisitions Reports.
  • +
  • Processing partial shipment EDI invoices - If your library has selected the Hold partial shipment invoices option in the EDI Invoice defaults profile, you can generate EDI invoices with invoice line items where the quantity sent does not match the quantity ordered. See Process EDI invoices for partial shipments.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Unlink_a_linked_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Unlink_a_linked_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..197cc144 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/Unlink_a_linked_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Unlink a linked invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Unlink a Linked Invoice

+

To unlink an invoice that is linked to another invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +

    Tips:
    Invoices that are linked to other invoices have Linked invoices in the status bar.

    You can search for linked invoices using the Limit by option Linked invoices, and selecting Yes as the value.

    +
  3. Click or select Tools > Unlink Invoice.
    • If there is only one invoice linked to the invoice you have open, Unlink completed successful appears in the bottom status bar of the Invoice workform.
    • If there are multiple invoices linked to the invoice, a dialog box appears that lists the linked invoices.
  4. +
  5. Select the invoice or invoices to unlink from the invoice you have open, and click OK.
  6. +

    The message Unlink completed successfully appears in the bottom status bar of the Invoice workform.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_a_linked_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_a_linked_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e6a67ac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_a_linked_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + View a linked invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View a Linked Invoice

+

To see linked invoices:

+

Tip:
You can search for linked invoices using the Limit by option Linked invoices, and selecting Yes as the value.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +

    Note:
    Invoices that are linked to other invoices have Linked invoices in the status bar.

    +
  3. Select Links > Invoices.
  4. +

    If only one invoice is linked, it appears in the Invoice workform. If there are multiple linked invoices, they are listed in the Linked Invoices dialog box.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_all_funds_for_the_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_all_funds_for_the_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b506a302 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAinv/View_all_funds_for_the_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + View all funds for the invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View All Funds for the Invoice

+

You can link from the Invoice workform to see all the funds used in the invoice. Each distinct fund is listed only once even if it was used in multiple invoice line item segments.

+

To view a list of all the funds used in an invoice:

+

Tip: +
You can search for an invoice and link to the funds from the Find Tool results list without opening the invoice. Select the invoice in the results list, right-click and select Links > Funds. You can also link from any linked list box that displays invoices.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Links > Funds.
  4. +

    If the invoice is linked to only one fund, the Fund workform appears. If the invoice is linked to multiple funds, a linked list box displays the funds used in the invoice. This list includes the funds used to pay for charges at the invoice header level, such as shipping for the whole order, and funds used to pay for the materials at the invoice line item segment level. Each linked fund is listed only once.

    +
  5. To open a fund displayed in the Linked Funds box, double-click it or right-click and select Open.
  6. +

    The Fund workform appears.

    +

    Note:
    You can also see the fund hierarchy by right-clicking and selecting Explore.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1f1d6f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a purchase order line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add a Purchase Order Line Item

+

To add a purchase order line item to an existing purchase order:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click to display the line items view.

    +
  3. Select View > Line Items from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Line Items view appears.

    +

    Note:
    If the purchase order was created with a template that has a default line item, the order has one line item containing a distribution grid (segments), but no bibliographic information. See Create a purchase order with a template or workform.

    +

    +

    +
  5. Do one of the following steps to create or complete the first line item.
  6. +
      +
    • If the purchase order was created from a template and has a default line item, double-click the line item to open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
    • +
    • If the purchase order was created in a blank Purchase Order workform or from a template without a line item, click Newbn.gif on the line item toolbar or press CTRL+I.
    • +
    +

    The Purchase Order Line Item workform appears.

    +

    +

    +
  7. Enter the bibliographic information for the item, using one of the following methods:
  8. +

    Tip:
    To preview a bibliographic record and the usage statistics for its linked item records, right-click the record in the Find Tool results list and select Preview. See Creating Selection Lists.

    +
      +
    • Select an existing bibliographic record from the database -
    • +
    +

    - If you know the ISBN for the bibliographic record, you can type it in the ISBN box, and press ENTER. The bibliographic information is automatically filled in if one exact match to the ISBN is found in the database.

    +

    Important:
    The search is based on the ISBN currently in the ISBN box. To search for a new bibliographic record, select (highlight) the existing ISBN and type a new ISBN in the box before clicking Find.

    +

    - If you do not know the ISBN, click Find, and use the Find Tool to search for and select an existing bibliographic record. When you select the record in the Find Tool results, the information is automatically filled in. You can enter or search for a 10-digit or 13-digit ISBN. The ISBN comes from the 020 tag or 024 tag with a first indicator of 3. The Other no (other number) field contains the UPC number or other stock number that comes from the 024, 028, or 037 tags in the bibliographic record.

    +

    Note:
    If you add a bibliographic record to a purchase order line item by searching by anything other than ISBN or UPC, and the bibliographic record has multiple ISBNs or UPCs, the most-recently added number will be used. However, if you search by a specific ISBN or UPC, that number will be used in the purchase order line item, whether or not it is the most recently added number. This ensures that the correct format of the title is ordered. (The import profile must be set to retain the ISBN or UPC from the most recent record so that it appears in the top of the list. See Acquisitions Bibs Import Profile.)

    +
      +
    • Search an external database using Z39.50 - If the title is not found in your local Polaris database, click Find, enter the title information on the General tab of the Find Tool, and select the remote databases on the Databases tab. When you select a bibliographic record in the search results, it is saved in the database, so you must have the Acquisitions permission Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials and the Cataloging permission Bibliographic records: Create. For more information, see Searching Remote Databases.
    • +
    • Search for a record using Polaris Titles to Go - See Using Polaris Titles to Go.
    • +
    • Create a new bibliographic record from Acquisitions - Type the bibliographic information in the appropriate fields in the Description frame. If the title begins with an article (the, a, an), type the title without the initial article.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you do not select a template, the brief bibliographic record that is created will be coded as a book.

    +

    To use a bibliographic template that already has MARC tags defined, select a template in the Template box. This is especially useful for creating bibliographic records for non-print material. The bibliographic record that is created when you use a template has the information from the template, such as the 008, 245 $h, and the 006/007 tags, as well as the information you entered in the purchase order line item. It also has an encoding level of 5 (partial or preliminary). You can identify all the preliminary bibliographic records created in Acquisitions using the Preliminary Bibliographic Records report. See Acquisitions Reports.

    +

    Note: +
    See Example - Bib Record Created from a PO Line Item.

    +

    Important:
    You must create a bibliographic template in Cataloging with a name that begins with on-order for the template to display in the Purchase Order Line Item and Invoice Line Item workforms. See Creating On-Order Bibliographic Templates.

    +

    Tip:
    Brief bibliographic records created from Acquisitions automatically display in the PAC if the Acquisitions profile Display in PAC: Brief bibliographic records created in Acquisitions is set to Yes in Polaris Administration.

    +
  9. To display the on-order item in the public access catalog, select Display in PAC.
  10. +
  11. Select the Alert check box if the materials need to be processed quickly or require special processing.
  12. +

    Note:
    When the Alert box is checked, an alert icon alerticon.gif appears next to the line item in the Line Items view of the Purchase Order, and in the Find Tool results list.

    +
  13. Select the material type in the Material type box if it is not already there.
  14. +

    Note:
    The material type is copied to the line item if the purchase order was created using a template with a default line item that contains a material type.

    +
  15. Type a unit price in the Unit price box if a price is not already there.
  16. +
  17. If the discount information is not already entered from the purchase order header, enter it using the rate or the discount price:
  18. +

    Tip:
    You can enter digits up to four places beyond the decimal point for the discount rate. For example, 33.3333.

    +
      +
    • To calculate the discount price automatically, type the rate in the Discount rate % box if it is not already there. The rate is applied to the unit price and the discounted price appears in the Discount price box.
    • +
    • To enter a specific discount price, type it in the Discount price box. The discount rate (percentage) is calculated and appears in the Discount rate % box.
    • +
    +
  19. If the distribution grid does not contain data, add all the segments for this title according to the instructions in Add purchase order line item segments.
  20. +
  21. To add supplier instructions for the line item, follow the steps in Add supplier instructions for a purchase order line item.
  22. +
  23. Select File > Save .
  24. +

    Note:
    If there are duplicate line items with the same ISBN (or bibliographic ID if no ISBN is present), destination, and collection on other purchase orders, a message appears with a list of the purchase orders that contain the duplicates. Select Yes to continue or No to return to the Purchase Order Line Item workform.

    +
  25. Add more line items using one of the methods below, depending on the information you want to copy from the existing purchase order line item.
  26. +
+
    +
  • Copy the segments, but not the bibliographic data - Press CTRL+N or click on the Purchase Order Line Item workform. The material type is also copied to the new line item if the profile Retain Material type when copying line item segment data is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. See Retain material type in copied line items.
  • +
  • Copy the segments and the bibliographic data - Select File > New or click the down arrow next to the new icon, and select Copy workform.
  • +
  • Create a new blank purchase order line item - Select File > New or click the down arrow next to the new button, and select Clear workform.
  • +
+

Tip:
If you have used a template to create the purchase order, the segment data from the template (not from the previous line item) is used to create the next line item if you select Clear workform.

+
    +
  • +

    Create a new purchase order line item using all the default data from the template - Close the Purchase Order Line Item workform and go to view 2 of the Purchase Order workform. Press CTRL+I or click New above the line items list. All the default line item data from the purchase order template is used to create the new purchase order line item. You can continue to add default line items from the template as long as the Purchase Order workform is open. If you close the purchase order and reopen it, the data from the template is not used.

    +
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_charges_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_charges_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e963c214 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_charges_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Add charges for a purchase order line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add Charges for a Purchase Order Line Item Segment

+

To add the charges for a purchase order line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Add a purchase order line item segment. See Add purchase order line item segments.
  4. +
  5. Click the Charges tab on the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  6. +
+

The Charges tabbed page appears.

+
    +
  1. Add or change cataloging, special handling, service, shipping, binding format, and other charges in the appropriate boxes for the segment.
  2. +
  3. Select File > Save.
  4. +
+

The charges are saved.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_claiming_information_for_an_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_claiming_information_for_an_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8444106d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_claiming_information_for_an_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Add or change claiming information for an order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add or Change Claiming Information for an Order

+

To add or change claiming information for a purchase order:

+

Note:
When you create a purchase order using a template, the claiming data is automatically filled in based the purchase order template. If you did not use a template, the claiming data from the supplier record is copied to the purchase order and all the line items when you select the supplier. You can add, modify, or delete claiming information on the purchase order, but you must first select a supplier.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Type the number (1-5) in the Maximum claims box to indicate the number of claims to go to the supplier before canceling an ordered item.
  4. +
  5. In the Days after release/expected arrival box, type the number of days between the time a purchase order line item is released and the time the first claim is generated.
  6. +
  7. +

    Open the Purchase Order workform.

    +
  8. +
  9. Enter the claim cycle information as follows:
    1. Select the Cancel notice check box to generate a cancellation notice.
    2. Select the Claim notice check box to generate a claim notice.
    3. Select the Auto cancel check box to automatically cancel the items after the claim cycle is over.
    4. Type a number in the Cancel wait period box to indicate the number of days to wait after the last claim is sent out before canceling items ordered from this supplier.
  10. +
+

Related Information

+

Claiming +

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_general_purchase_order_information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_general_purchase_order_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a444139 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_general_purchase_order_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + Add or change general purchase order information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add or Change General Purchase Order Information

+

If you created a new purchase order from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, the Purchase Order workform opens with blank fields. However, if you used a template to create the purchase order, some information may already be copied from the template.

+

To add or change the information on the General view of the Purchase Order workform:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    You can change the purchase order number and purchase order suffix before and after the purchase order is released. When you change the original purchase order number and/or suffix, the Properties sheet displays the original numbers for tracking purposes.

    +
  3. If your library does not use system-generated purchase order numbers, type the purchase order number in the Number box. The purchase order number can be up to 30 characters long.
  4. +

    Note:
    You can type over the system-generated purchase order number to change it, if necessary. System-generated purchase order numbers are set in Polaris Administration. For more information, see Enable automatic purchase order numbers.

    +
  5. Type the suffix in the box to the right of the Number box. A suffix is not required, but you can search for purchase orders by their suffix. You can enter a suffix for either system-generated or manually-entered purchase order numbers. The purchase order number suffix can be up to 8 characters long.
  6. +

    Important:
    When EDI orders are sent, only the purchase order number is transmitted to the supplier. The suffix is not transmitted with the number. If the supplier has a limit on the number of characters in a purchase order number, an error message appears when you attempt to release the order.

    +
  7. Select the type of order in the Order type box.
  8. +

    Tip:
    See Order Types, Payment Methods, and Fund Types.

    +
  9. Select the payment from the Payment method box.
  10. +
  11. If applicable, enter the following optional information:
    • name of the person authorizing the purchase in the Authorization box
    • name of the plan in the Plan name box
    • date when rental items need to be returned in the Rental return box.
  12. +
  13. Click Find next to the Supplier Name box.
  14. +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
  15. Search for and select the supplier to which you will send the purchase order.
  16. +

    The name of the supplier appears in the Supplier Name box.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to use a foreign supplier, you can limit the search by currency code. When the purchase order is linked to a supplier that uses a different currency from your base currency, the amounts will be displayed in the foreign currency with the currency code next to the total on the Charges view of the Purchase Order workform. Set up a supplier record for a foreign vendor.

    +

    Note: +
    To enter another identifier for the purchase order, type it in the External ID box. You can search for purchase orders in the Polaris Find Tool by the External ID number.

    +
  17. Select File > Save.
  18. +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Claiming data in the purchase order - Any claiming or cancellation data in the supplier record are copied to the purchase order when you select the supplier. You can change the claim data on the purchase order, but you must first select a supplier. Changing the claiming and cancellation data on the purchase order does not change the supplier record. For instructions on adding or changing the claiming data, see Add or change claiming information for an order.
  • +
  • Entering purchase order header charges - You can add header charges for the purchase order as a whole, such as shipping charges, in the Header Charges section of the Purchase Order workform. But, since the exact amounts for these charges are not known until the invoice is received, it may be preferable to enter these charges in the Invoice workform. See Add or change invoice header charges and credits.
  • +
  • Funds at the purchase order line item segment level - Each purchase order line item segment must have a fund associated with it. For information on allocating funds for a purchase order line item segment, see Add purchase order line item segments.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..055555d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_or_change_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Add or change supplier instructions for a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add or Change Supplier Instructions for a Purchase Order

+

To specify instructions to the supplier on the Instructions To Supplier view of the Purchase Order workform:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click to display the Instructions to Supplier view.

    +
  3. Select View > Instructions to Supplier from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Instructions to Supplier view appears.

    +
  5. Provide any specific instructions to the supplier concerning this order as a whole by completing the appropriate boxes.
  6. +
  7. Select File > Save to save the record.
  8. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_purchase_order_line_item_segments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_purchase_order_line_item_segments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4dfea1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_purchase_order_line_item_segments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Add purchase order line item segments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add Purchase Order Line Item Segments

+

To add purchase order line item segments:

+

Note:
For information on Polaris Administration profiles and parameters that affect purchase order line item segments, see Administration Settings That Affect Line Item Segments.

+

Tip:
If you used a purchase order template with a default line item, some segments may already appear.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform. See Add a purchase order line item.
  2. +
  3. Type the quantity of items to order in the Quantity box.
  4. +
  5. Select a destination branch in the Destination box.
  6. +
  7. Select a collection for the item in the Collection box.
  8. +
  9. Select a fund from the list, or click and use the Find Tool to search for and select a fund. To use multiple funds to pay for a segment, click to split the funds. For information on using more than one fund to pay for a line item segment, see Split funds for a purchase order line item segment.
  10. +

    The funds are allocated for this line item segment.

    +
  11. Type any charges associated with the segment. See Add charges for a purchase order line item segment.
  12. +
  13. Click in the next segment line to add the next segment, and add or change the segment information.
  14. +
  15. Select File > Save to save the segments.
  16. +
+

Administration Settings That Affect Line Item Segments

+

The following Polaris Administration settings affect line item segments:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70ce71cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Add_supplier_instructions_for_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Add supplier instructions for a purchase order line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add Supplier Instructions for a Purchase Order Line Item

+

To add any applicable supplier instructions or notes for a purchase order line item:

+

Note:
The supplier instructions are not required for a purchase order line item, but if any specific instructions apply to the title being ordered, you can enter them on the Purchase Order Line Item workform - Instructions to Supplier view. The claiming information is copied from the Purchase Order workform, but you can change it on the Purchase Order Line Item workform.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform - Instructions to Supplier view.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click to display the Instructions to Supplier view.

    +
  3. Select the cataloging services in the Cataloging services box.
  4. +
  5. Select the backorder instructions in the Backorder box, and type the number of copies in the Quantity box.
  6. +

    Tip:
    The Membership check box is selected if there is a linked serial holdings record with membership indicated.

    +
  7. Type the confirmation date in the Confirm date box.
  8. +
  9. Type a note that contains additional instructions in the Note box.
  10. +
  11. Select the binding format in the Format box and the second choice for binding in the Substitution box.
  12. +
  13. If the material is a rental, type a return date in the Rental return date box.
  14. +
  15. Change the claim data if necessary. See Add the claiming criteria for a supplier.
  16. +

    Tip:
    The public and non-public notes are copied to on-order line items, if on-order items are created.

    +
  17. Type a public note in the Public note box.
  18. +
  19. Type a note in the Non-public note box.
  20. +
  21. Select File > Save to save the line item.
  22. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_PO_Line_Distribution_Grid.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_PO_Line_Distribution_Grid.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b42bd6f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_PO_Line_Distribution_Grid.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Adding PO Line Distribution Grid + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adding PO Line Distribution Grid

+

For each title you order on the Purchase Order Line Item workform, you must enter at least one line item segment that specifies the number of copies, destination, collection, and fund. If the purchase order was created with a template that has a default line item, the segment information is already filled in for the first line item on the purchase order. The segment specifies the destination, collection, and fund allocation for the individual copies of the title. The destination and the fund allocation are required to add a segment, but the collection is optional.

+

The default branch selected in the Destination box and the list of available branches in the drop-down list are controlled by the Polaris Administration profile Filter branches in line item segments. If the profile is set to Yes, the default Destination is the same as the Ordered at branch on the Purchase Order workform, and the available branches in the Destination list have the same parent library as the Ordered at branch. If the profile is set to No, the default Destination is the same as the user’s login branch, and the drop-down list box displays all branches in the system. See Filter destination branch lists by parent library.

+

When you choose a fund for the line item segment, you can select the fund from a list of available funds. The display of the funds is controlled by the settings in the Acquisitions/Serials profile Acq fund droplist setup. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions. In addition, the available funds depend on the order type and payment method. See Order Types, Payment Methods, and Fund Types.

+

Use the Orders and Charges tabbed pages on the bottom of the Purchase Order Line Item workform to specify the order information and additional charges related to the copies ordered in the segment. The Totals tabbed page displays the totals for the segment.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_Titles_to_a_Purchase_Order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_Titles_to_a_Purchase_Order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7555344 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adding_Titles_to_a_Purchase_Order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Adding Titles to a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adding Titles to a Purchase Order

+

The line items on the purchase order contain information about the titles you are ordering. The existing claiming and discount information is copied from the linked purchase order to the line item, but you can change this information on the Purchase Order Line Item workform. For more information on the claiming data, see Add or change claiming information for an order.

+

Within each line item is at least one segment that specifies the distribution (destination and collection) and the quantity ordered. The segments also specify the fund or funds allocated for the copy or copies of the title.

+

If you used a template to create the purchase order, it contains one default line item without bibliographic data but with distribution information. You add the bibliographic record information by finding an existing record or by typing the information. When you add more line items, the template data will be used for as long as your logged-in session is open.

+

You can edit the segment data and then copy it to the next purchase order line item without copying the bibliographic information. Copying all the distribution information saves you from selecting the destination, collection, and fund for each segment in the copied line item.

+

If you are using Polaris Titles to Go, you can check a title’s availability at your supplier’s site while remaining in the Purchase Order Line Item workform. If the title is not found in your local database, Titles to Go uses Web Services to bring back bibliographic and availability information from the supplier. See Using Polaris Titles to Go.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adjust_fund_limits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adjust_fund_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a94bf120 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Adjust_fund_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Adjust fund limits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Adjust Fund Limits

+

If you attempt to release a purchase order and there is an insufficient amount of money in the fund, or encumbrance limits will be exceeded, a dialog box appears. If you have the appropriate permissions set in Polaris Administration, you can continue releasing the purchase order and overencumber. Or, if you have permission to modify funds, you can adjust the fund to allow the purchase order to be released.

+

To release a purchase order that will result in fund overencumbrance:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Release the purchase order. See Release a purchase order.
  4. +
  5. If the negative free balance warning message appears, click OK to continue anyway.
  6. +
  7. If the Overencumbrance List dialog box appears, choose one of the following options:
    • To continue even though it will exceed the encumbrance limits, click Continue. The purchase order is released.
    • To adjust the fund encumbrance limits or increase the fund balance, click the Adjust Funds button, right-click the fund you want to adjust, and select Open. The Fund workform appears. Change the encumbrance limits or adjust the fund balance.
  8. +

    Note:
    For information on changing encumbrance limits, see Set fund encumbrance/expenditure limits. For information on adjusting fund balances, see Adjust fund balances manually.

    +
  9. After adjusting the fund balance, release the purchase order again.
  10. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Bulk_Update_Purchase_Order_Notes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Bulk_Update_Purchase_Order_Notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6bf14f49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Bulk_Update_Purchase_Order_Notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + Bulk Update Purchase Order Notes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Bulk Update Purchase Order Notes

+

You can update purchase order line item notes in bulk from the Line Item view in the Purchase Order workform.

+

The Update Note option is in the right-click menu for purchase order line items. You can select one or more notes to update with this option.

+

+ + +

+

Note: +
+
This menu option is not enabled if any of the selected purchase order line items have a status of Closed.

+

Selecting this option will open the Update Notes dialog with two note types:

+
    +
  • Public Note +
  • +
  • Non-Public Note +
  • +

    Both note types have the following options:

    +
      +
    • Replace - replaces the existing note.
    • +
    • Prepend - inserts the new note and a blank line before the existing note.
    • +
    • Append - inserts a blank line and the new note after the existing note.
    • + + +
    +
+

If Replace is selected and text is not entered in the note field, the existing note will be deleted.

+

Notes longer than 255 characters will be truncated to 255.

+

If prepending or appending causes a note to be larger than 255 characters, you will see the following message:

+

+ + +

+
    +
  • Yes - updates the note(s).
  • +
  • No - returns you to the Purchase order updating only the line items where the data would not be truncated. The above message will appear for each line item that may be truncated.
  • +
  • Cancel - returns the user to the purchase order with the line item(s) still highlighted.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Fund_Destination_Collection_PO_Line_Item_Segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Fund_Destination_Collection_PO_Line_Item_Segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee6032ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Fund_Destination_Collection_PO_Line_Item_Segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Changing the Fund, Destination Branch, or Collection for a PO Line Item Segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Changing the Fund, Destination Branch, or Collection for a PO Line Item Segment

+

You can change the fund, destination branch, and/or collection for a purchase order line item segment on a released purchase order. This option is available for Purchase Order Line Item Segments with a status of On Order, Received, Backordered, Exceptional Condition, Never Published, Not Yet Published, Out of Print, Return Requested, or Returned; the payment status must be Open, and only one fund can be linked to the segment.

+

Note:
You need the branch-level permission Purchase Orders: Change fund, destination, collection to do this procedure.

+

Note: +
You can use SimplyReports to report on the "modify PO line item" action. Item List and Count reports include a History action drop-down list in the item general filters. Select Modified via PO Line Change Fund processing in the History action drop-down list. For more information, see SimplyReports online help.

+

To change the fund, destination, and/or collection of a line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Right-click the line item segment in the PO Line Item workform.
  4. +
  5. Select Change Fund, Destination, Collection from the context menu. The Change PO Line Item Segment dialog box opens. The From section of the dialog box shows the current destination, fund, and collection for the line item segment.
  6. +

    + +

    +
  7. To change the destination, select the new destination in the To section of the dialog box.
  8. +
  9. To change the fund, select the new fund in the To section of the dialog box.
  10. +
  11. To change the collection, select the new collection in the To section of the dialog box.
  12. +
  13. Click OK. A confirmation message appears.
  14. +
  15. Click OK to confirm the change.
  16. +
+
    +
  • If the destination is changed, any linked on-order items are updated with the new Assigned Branch.
  • +
  • If the collection is changed, any linked on-order items are updated with the new Assigned Collection.
  • +
  • The item record history is updated for assigned branch and collection changes.
  • +
  • The invoice line item/segment is updated with the new assigned branch and/or collection.
  • +
  • If the segment fund is changed. a disencumber transaction is posted in the old fund, an encumbrance transaction is posted in the new fund, and the Funding Source field on the Item Record workform-Source and Acquisition view is updated for any linked on-order item records. The open invoice line item/segment fund is also updated with the new fund.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Header_Fund_Material_Type_PO_Line_Item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Header_Fund_Material_Type_PO_Line_Item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a72e444 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Changing_Header_Fund_Material_Type_PO_Line_Item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Changing the Header Fund or Material Type for a PO Line Item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Changing the Header Fund or Material Type for a PO Line Item

+

You can change the header fund for a purchase order line item to use the new fund for all line item segments, and/or change the material type of the line item. This option is available for Purchase Order Line Items with a status of On Order, Partly Rec, Received, Backordered, Exceptional Condition, Never Published, Not Yet Published, Out of Print, Return Requested, or Returned. Your changes are also reflected in any linked items and open invoices.

+

Note:
You need the branch-level permission Purchase Orders: Change fund, destination, collection to do these procedures.

+

See:

+ +

Note: +
You can use SimplyReports to report on the "modify PO line item" action. Item List and Count reports include a History action drop-down list in the item general filters. Select Modified via PO Line Change Fund processing in the History action drop-down list. For more information, see SimplyReports online help.

+

Changing the Header Fund for a PO Line Item

+

When a fund change is successful, the system replaces the old fund with the new one in all affected PO line item segments. For each segment, the system records a disencumber transaction in the old fund and an encumbrance transaction in the new fund. The funding source is also updated in linked on-order items, and the funds are changed in the linked open invoice line item segments.

+

Tip: +
You cannot use this method to change PO lines directly after the PO has been paid. However, you can unpay the PO, use this method to make your changes, and then repay. See Paying Invoices.

+

To change a PO line item header fund:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Change Fund > Material Type from the menu bar. The Change PO Line Item dialog box opens.
  4. +

    + +

    +
  5. In the From section, select the current fund from the drop-down list. The list consists of all funds linked to all the PO line item segments in the line item. (The Fund Owner field is empty until you have selected a fund.)
  6. +

    Note:
    If a segment is linked to two or more funds, the funds do not appear in the list unless they are also used in another segment. You cannot change the fund for segments linked to two or more funds with this method.

    +
  7. In the To section, select the new fund from the drop-down list. The list displays funds based on the settings for the Acquisitions/Serials profile Acq fund droplist setup for the logged-on user. See Specify How Funds are Displayed in Acquisitions.
  8. +
  9. (Optional) In the To section, select a Fund Owner from the drop-down list to filter the Fund list. The list displays organizations based on the settings for the Acquisitions/Serials profile Filter branches in line item segments for the organization listed in the purchase order's Ordered At section. See Filtering Branches in Line Items.
  10. +
  11. Click OK. A confirmation message appears if the change can be made.
  12. +

    Note: +
    If the change cannot be made, the system displays a message: One or more segment statuses are ineligible, are split across funds, or they are linked to paid invoice lines. Click OK to return to the Change PO Line Item dialog box and edit your changes, or click Cancel and make your changes by editing a PO line item segment directly.

    +
  13. Click OK to confirm the change.
  14. +
+

Changing the Material Type for a PO Line Item

+

To change the material type for a PO line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Change Fund > Material Type from the menu bar. The Change PO Line Item dialog box opens.
  4. +
  5. In the To section of the dialog box, select the new Material Type from the drop-down list.
  6. +
  7. Click OK. A confirmation message appears if the change can be made.
  8. +
  9. Click OK to confirm the change.
  10. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Checking_for_Duplicate_Copies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Checking_for_Duplicate_Copies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e9329c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Checking_for_Duplicate_Copies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Checking for Duplicate Copies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Checking for Duplicate Copies

+

To prevent ordering unintentional duplicate copies of a title, you can check purchase orders to see if there are duplicates of the same title with the same ISBN (or bibliographic control number if no ISBN is present), destination, and collection already on a purchase order. When you add new purchase order line items manually, they are automatically checked for duplicates when you save them. Checking for duplicates in purchase orders also prevents unnecessary encumbrances if the title is already ordered.

+

When you import records in Cataloging, you can use the Acquisitions Bibs import profile, which is set up to reject any duplicate incoming bibliographic records while retaining 970 order data. The 970 tags from the rejected incoming duplicate are copied to the resident record, and the resident record is added to the bibliographic record set specified in the profile. See Acquisitions Bibs Import Profile. After the import is complete, the bibliographic records in the record set are bulk-added to a purchase order.

+

Tip:
You can set a Cataloging profile to delete tags that are marked as processed. See Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9.

+

To prevent the creation of duplicate line item segments, you can set the Acquisitions parameter Bulk Add to PO: Mark 970 data as processed to Yes in Polaris Administration. When this parameter is set to Yes, 970 tags are marked with a $9 when the bibliographic record is added to a purchase order. If the record is used again in a subsequent bulk-add process, the 970 tags marked with a $9 are not used to create line item segments.

+

Important:
Make sure records are bulk added to a purchase order soon after they are imported so that other users do not add 970 tags to the same bibliographic record before the existing tags are updated with the $9.

+

To check a purchase order to see if there are duplicate copies of the same title for the same ISBN (or Bib Control number if there is no ISBN), destination, and collection on other purchase orders, regardless of their status:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click to check for duplicate line item segments.

    +
  3. Select Tools > Check Duplicates.
  4. +

    Note: +
    The PO originating the search must have a status of Pending. The Check Duplicates option is not available for the other PO statuses.

    +

    If duplicates are detected, a dialog box lists them.

    +

    +

    +
  5. Do one of the following actions:
  6. +
      +
    • Click Print to preview and print the report. The report shows the purchase order line item segments that are duplicates and the purchase orders on which they are found. It lists the destination, collection, and fund for each duplicate purchase order line item segment.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you delete purchase order line item segments from the Duplicate Purchase Order Line Item Segments dialog box, the purchase order line item segments with the same title, destination, and collection are deleted from the purchase order you are checking; the segments from other purchase orders that are listed in the dialog box are not deleted.

    +
      +
    • Click Delete to delete all the duplicate purchase order line item segments. This deletes all the duplicate segments on the purchase order you are checking; it does not affect the segments listed in the dialog box.
    • +
    • Select specific duplicate segments, and select Delete from the context menu. The duplicate segments are deleted from the open purchase order you are checking.
    • +
    +
  7. Click Close to close the dialog box and continue ordering.
  8. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2c6bdf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_a_purchase_order_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a purchase order line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy a Purchase Order Line Item

+

When you copy a purchase order line item to create a new purchase order line item on the same purchase order, you can copy all the data including the bibliographic information and the distribution information (segments). Or, you can copy all the segment data only and enter new bibliographic information. You can also clear the purchase order line item workform and create a new blank line item.

+

To copy a purchase order line item in the same purchase order:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform - Line Items view.
  2. +
  3. Double-click a line item to open it in the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  4. +
  5. Select File > New or click the down arrow next to New.
  6. +

    A menu appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Press CTRL+N or click to copy the segment data.

    +
  7. Select one of the following options to copy a purchase order line item:
    • Copy Segment Data - All the segments are copied to the next purchase order line item, but none of the bibliographic data is copied except the material type. The material type is copied along with the segment data if the profile Retain material type when copying segments is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. See Retain material type in copied line items.
    • Clear Workform - None of the information from the purchase order line item is copied. A new, blank Purchase Order Line Item workform appears.
    • Copy Workform - All the bibliographic information, the material type, and the segments are copied to the next purchase order line item.
  8. +

    Important:
    When you select Copy Workform, and click Find to search for a bibliographic record, the search is based on the ISBN currently in the ISBN box. To search for a new bibliographic record, select (highlight) the existing ISBN and type a new ISBN in the box before clicking Find.

    +
  9. Change the bibliographic and segment data as needed.
  10. +
  11. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click Save to save the line item.
  12. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_line_item_segments_within_a_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_line_item_segments_within_a_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..446e0de9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Copy_line_item_segments_within_a_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy line item segments within a line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy Line Item Segments Within a Line Item

+

To copy pending purchase order line item segments:

+

Note:
Both the purchase order line item and its segment must be pending in order to copy a segment.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Add a purchase order line item segment. See Add purchase order line item segments.
  4. +
  5. Select the line item segment to copy.
  6. +
  7. Click as many times as you want to copy the segment.
  8. +

    Tip:
    If the Acquisitions parameter Copy last segment data to next segment is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, the data from the previous segment is automatically copied to the next segment.

    +
  9. Change the quantity, destination, collection, fund, and charges as necessary for each copied segment. The purchase order cannot be saved if multiple segments have the same destination, collection, and fund.
  10. +
  11. Select File > Save.
  12. +

    The purchase order is saved with the copied segments.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e1d9e5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a purchase order by bulk adding titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Create a Purchase Order by Bulk Adding Titles

+

To bulk-add titles from a record set to a purchase order, the bibliographic records must include 970 tags. For more information, see The Bulk Add Process.

+

Important:
When you import bibliographic records with 970 tags, bulk add them to a purchase order as soon as possible because another user could add 970 tags to the same bibliographic record before your 970 tags are updated with $9, indicating they are processed. See Mark 970 data as processed after bulk adding titles.

+

To create a purchase order and add multiple titles at once:

+

Tip:
To focus the search for the record set, select Type in the Limit by box and Bibliographic in the Value box. If you know you want to add all the records in the record set to the purchase order, select the record set in the Find Tool results list, right-click and select Add to purchase order > New.

+
    +
  1. Select Cataloging > Record Sets from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
  2. +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
  3. Search for and select the bibliographic record set.
  4. +

    Note:
    Provisional records cannot be used in the bulk add process.

    +

    The bibliographic record set workform appears.

    +
  5. Select Add all records to New Purchase Order or highlight specific records in the list, and choose Add selected records to New Purchase Order.
  6. +

    The Add to New Purchase Order dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Choose one of the following options:
    • To use a template, click Find next to the Template box, and use the Find Tool to locate and select a purchase order template. The supplier, branch, order type, and payment method are defined in the template. However, if the purchase order template has a default line item with distribution data in segments, the segments in the template are not used in the bulk add process. Only the data in the 970 tags or the bulk add defaults (if the parameter is set to use this information) create the distribution information in the segments.
    • To create the order without a template, select an option in the Ordered at, Type and Method boxes, and click Find next to the Supplier box to search for and select a supplier.
  8. +

    Important:
    If you want the bulk add report to list records that did not get bulk added because they lacked the correct location, collection, material type, or fund data in the 970 tags, set the Polaris Administration Acquisitions parameter Bulk Add to PO: Replace Invalid Fields with Default data to No. In this case, the defaults will not be used, so you do not need to specify defaults for the material type, destination, collection, or fund.

    +
  9. (Optional) Select the default values in the Material type, Destination, and Collection boxes.
  10. +
  11. (Optional) Click Find next to the Fund box, and use the Find Tool to search for and select the default fund.
  12. +
  13. Type the defaults values in the Quantity, List price, and Discount (%) boxes.
  14. +
  15. Type a path and name for the error report file in the File name box, or click Browse, browse to the path, and enter a name for the file.
  16. +
  17. Click OK to start the bulk add process.
  18. +

    A message box shows the progress of the bulk add process. When the processing is complete, a dialog box appears.

    +
  19. Click OK to acknowledge the message.
  20. +

    Tip:
    Print the error report each time you bulk add records to a purchase order, and refer to it while editing the purchase order.

    +
  21. Open the error report to see where substitutions were made.
  22. +
  23. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the purchase order that you created using bulk add.
  24. +

    The purchase order is displayed in the Purchase Order workform.

    +
  25. Edit the purchase order as necessary, and select File > Save.
  26. +
+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_copying_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_copying_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d19239f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_by_copying_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a purchase order by copying a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Create a Purchase Order by Copying a Purchase Order

+

To copy an existing purchase order to create a new one:

+

Notes:
You cannot copy a purchase order that has a payment method of depository agreement to a new or existing purchase order.
If you are copying a purchase order with an order type of Gift to a new purchase order, the payment method is set to Free in the new purchase order.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select File > New from the workform menu bar.
  4. +

    The New Purchase Order dialog box appears.

    +
  5. Select Copy Existing Workform, and click OK.
  6. +

    The purchase order workform is copied. If automatic purchase order numbering is enabled, the purchase order number is incremented by one. See Enable automatic purchase order numbers.

    +
  7. Add or change information on the purchase order workform.
  8. +
  9. Select File > Save.
  10. +
+

Important:
If the purchase order you are copying contains lines that are no longer linked to a bibliographic record because the bibliographic record was deleted, you cannot copy the purchase order. An error message appears listing the unlinked purchase order line items.

+

Related Information

+

Copying purchase order line items or segments - You can copy individual lines or segments from an existing purchase order to create a new one. This is useful when part of the order is canceled. For more information, see Copy lines/segments to another purchase order.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_with_a_template_or_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_with_a_template_or_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60cce0da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Create_a_purchase_order_with_a_template_or_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a purchase order with a template or workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Create a Purchase Order with a Template or Workform

+

You can create a purchase order using a purchase order template that already contains default data, including a default line item with a distribution grid (segments). Or, you can open a blank purchase order workform and enter all the information.

+

To create a purchase order:

+

Note:
For information on saving purchase orders as templates, see Creating Purchase Order Templates.

+

Tip:
You can search for the purchase order template in the Find Tool, right-click the template in the results list, and select Create > Purchase Order from the context menu.

+
    +
  1. Select File > New.
  2. +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
  3. Select Purchase Order from the list.
  4. +

    The existing purchase order templates are listed in the bottom frame of the New dialog box.

    +
  5. Do one of the following steps on the New dialog box:
  6. +

    Tip:
    If you are creating multiple purchase orders using the same template, you can select the template, and select the Make session default box. When you create the next purchase order, the template is automatically selected.

    +
      +
    • If you want to use a template, select Existing template, and select a template from the list.
    • +
    +
      +
    • If you do not want to use a template, select No template.
    • +
    +
  7. Click OK.
  8. +

    If you selected a template, the Purchase Order workform appears with the information copied from the template. See Creating Purchase Order Templates for a list of the information that is copied when a template is used to create a new purchase order. If the template contains a default line item, it is copied to the new purchase order along with the default segment information.

    +
  9. Select View > Line Items.
  10. +

    The Line Items view of the Purchase Order workform appears.

    +

    If you created the purchase order with a template that contains a default line item, one line item appears without bibliographic data.

    +

    + +

    +
  11. Do one of the following steps to add the line items to the purchase order:
  12. +
      +
    • If an existing default line item is listed, double-click the line item.
    • +
    • If there is no default line item, click newbt.gif in the line items toolbar.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If the purchase order was created using a template and you add line items from this view, the line items are created using the information from the template for as long as you have the purchase order open. You can save the purchase order and keep adding more lines using the default data from the purchase order template. However, when you close the purchase order, reopen it and add line items, the information is not retained from the template.

    +

    The Purchase Order Line Item workform appears.

    +
  13. Add the line items following the steps in the section Add a purchase order line item.
  14. +
  15. Add or edit the information on the other views of the Purchase Order workform, and save the purchase order.
  16. +
+

Related Information

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Creating_Purchase_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Creating_Purchase_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18b33fea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Creating_Purchase_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Creating Purchase Orders

+

The purchase order record contains instructions, cumulative totals, and notes that pertain to the order as a whole, as well as line items for the titles being ordered. Each line item is a distinct record that contains unique information about a title. Within each line item, the segments contain distribution and fund information for copies of the title. You can create purchase orders using various methods in Polaris.

+

See also:

+ +

Order Types

+

Depending on the funding source, the supplier’s arrangement with your library, and the materials being ordered, you can select from the following order types in Polaris:

+
    +
  • Firm ordersare used for ordering specific titles that are not published serially. When the order is released, the funds are encumbered. When the items come in, they are received and the line items are copied to the invoice. When the invoice is paid, the funds are expended.
  • +
+

Tip:
For most orders, you select the type in the Order type box in the Purchase Order workform. However, for blanket orders or approval plans, no order is used, and you select the type in the Type box on the Invoice workform.

+ +

Order Types, Payment Methods, and Fund Types

+

The following table shows the combinations of order types, payment methods, and fund types that can be used in Polaris.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Order TypePayment MethodAvailable Fund Types
+

Firm

+

Subscription

+

Standing Order

+
Purchase +

Regular

+

Donation

+
+

Firm

+

Subscription

+

Standing Order

+
Depository AgreementDeposit Account
GiftFreeNone
DonationPurchaseDonation
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Importing_and_Ordering_Processes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Importing_and_Ordering_Processes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32e05963 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Importing_and_Ordering_Processes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + + Importing and Ordering Processes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Importing and Ordering Processes

+

Automatic processing during importing and ordering work together in Polaris to create purchase orders or selections lists, and update on-order items so they can circulate.

+

See also:

+ +

The Bulk Add Process

+

When you import a supplier’s brief bibliographic records using the Acquisition Bibs import profile (or a copy of this profile), the records are gathered in the bibliographic record set specified in the profile. Then, you open the record set and bulk-add the records to create a purchase order or a selection list. Specific tags and subfields must be in the imported bibliographic records for Polaris to create the line items and segments.

+

Important:
The import profile must be set up to retain 970 tags as well as 020 (ISBN) and 024 (UPC) tags. See Acquisitions Bibs Import Profile.

+

The following information in the 970 tag of the bibliographic record is used to create each segment of the purchase order or selection list automatically:

+

Note:
The collection information, material type, and non-public note are not required to create a segment. If the supplier includes copy-level information in $h, it is used in the creation of on-order items.

+

Tip:
The subfields can be in any order in the 970 tag.

+
    +
  • $l = location (must match the branch abbreviation in Polaris)
  • +
  • $q = quantity
  • +
  • $f = fund (must match the fund name or fund alternative name for an open fund in Polaris)
  • +
  • $c = collection (must match the collection abbreviation in Polaris)
  • +
  • $p = price
  • +
  • $m = material type (must match the material type code in Polaris)
  • +
  • $n = non-public note (cannot exceed 255 characters; if there is a non-public note, it appears on the Instructions to Supplier view of the Purchase Order Line Item workform)
  • +
  • $h = item template code. It can contain alpha and/or numeric characters, or up to 10 characters. See Matching With Item Template Codes.
  • +
+

The illustration shows how the 970 tags in the bulk added bibliographic record are used to create purchase order line item segments.

+

+ bibtopoli.gif

+

If a bulk-added bibliographic record contains more than one ISBN or UPC, the purchase order line item displays the most-recently added ISBN (020$a) at the top of the ISBN list (and its associated price from the 020$c in the Price box), or the most-recently added UPC in the Other number box.

+

Note:
If the Polaris Administration Acquisitions parameter Bulk add to PO: Add Alert to PO line item for multiple ISBNs is set to Yes, purchase order line items with multiple ISBNs are listed with an exclamation mark in the Find Tool results list and the Purchase Order workform, Line Items view. The Alert box is also checked in the Purchase Order Line Item workform if the linked bibliographic record contains multiple ISBNs.

+

If a price is not in the MARC record’s 970 $p, the system checks for the price in the following tags:

+
    +
  • 020 - If an ISBN is present in 020 $a, the corresponding 020 $c is checked for a price. If both are found, the ISBN is copied to the purchase order line item’s ISBN field, and the price is copied to the purchase order line item’s Unit price field.
  • +
  • 024 - If no price is found in the 020 $c, the system checks for a 024 $a with a first indicator of 3, and if present, the corresponding 024 $c is checked for a price (OCLC records place the 13-digit ISBN and the accompanying price in the 024 tag, if the first indicator is a 3). If both are found, the number in the 024 $a is copied to the purchase order line item’s ISBN field, and the price is copied to the purchase order line item’s Unit price field.
  • +
+

Note:
If the first indicator in the 024 $a is 1 or any number other than 3, the number is copied to the purchase order line item’s Other number field. In this case, the unit price is copied from the default value in the Bulk Add to Purchase Order dialog.

+

If the price is not in the record, and the Acquisitions parameter Bulk Add to PO: Replace Invalid Fields with Default Data is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, the default price is used.

+

Any missing or invalid information is noted in the bulk add error report, and you can edit the purchase order or selection list as needed.

+

Administration Settings That Affect Bulk-Add Processing

+

The following parameters and profiles in Polaris Administration control bulk-add processing:

+ +

Enriched EDI Orders and Shelf-Ready Items

+

If your library uses a supplier’s cataloging services so that materials arrive shelf-ready, you can send enriched EDI orders so that the supplier can return bibliographic records with embedded holdings data. When the bibliographic records are imported using the Enriched EDI Order import profile, the embedded holdings data is used to update on-order items to shelf-ready items. Another method for creating shelf-ready items is to allow the supplier to search the Polaris database and retrieve holdings information. See Shelf-Ready Items Using Z39.50.

+

Enriched EDI Orders

+

An Enriched EDI order includes the following information for each purchase order line item segment in the transmission:

+
    +
  • Title
  • +
  • ISBN
  • +
  • Bibliographic record control number (from Polaris)
  • +
  • Purchase Order Line Item ID - Unique ID for the purchase order line item, not the number that appears in the Purchase Order workform
  • +
  • Purchase Order Line Item Segment Number - Segment number as it is displayed in the Purchase Order Line Item
  • +
  • Quantity - Number of copies ordered for that location (collection and branch)
  • +
  • Branch Code - The branch’s abbreviation exactly as defined in Polaris
  • +
  • Collection Code - The collection abbreviation exactly as defined in Polaris
  • +
  • Call Number - Call number in the linked on-order item record. Your supplier may or may not use call numbers.
  • +
+

When the supplier processes the Enriched EDI order, a file containing full bibliographic records with embedded holdings data is produced. These bibliographic records with embedded holdings data in the 949 tag (or another tag you and your supplier have agreed upon) are imported into Polaris. If the holdings data is in the 949 tag, you can use the Enriched EDI Order profile (or a copy of the profile with the same settings, but named according to the supplier) to import these records. This profile is set up so that the existing item records are updated with the data in the 949 tag. See Polaris Read-Only Import Profiles.

+

If the option Update linked PO line item to received is checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile, the linked purchase order line items are received, and the linked items either remain on-order, or they are updated to in-process as soon as the EDI invoice is created in Polaris (depending on the item record option selected in the profile). See Set up EDI invoice defaults.

+

You can wait until the shipment arrives to update the purchase order line items. When the shipment arrives, use the Check In Shelf-Ready Materials workform to check in the shelf-ready item records and update the linked purchase order line item segments in the same step. See Check in new shelf-ready items.

+

Shelf-Ready Items Using Z39.50

+

If your library allows suppliers to search the Polaris database using Z39.50, the supplier can provide shelf-ready item data in their bibliographic records. When the supplier searches the Polaris database, the bibliographic records are displayed with an 852 tag for every item record, whether it was manually created or imported. If the item is linked to a purchase order line item, the holdings data displays the linked purchase order line item ID followed by the purchase order line item segment number in subfield e ($e). For information on setting up Polaris as a remote database for suppliers to search, see Offering the Polaris Database as a Remote Target.

+

+

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Modifying_PO_Line_Item_Statuses.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Modifying_PO_Line_Item_Statuses.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..823f8091 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Modifying_PO_Line_Item_Statuses.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Modifying PO Line Items’ Statuses + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Modifying PO Line Items’ Statuses

+

After a purchase order has been released and sent to the supplier, you may get a response from the supplier indicating that some titles are not available. You can enter the supplier responses for particular line items and change the line items’ statuses.

+

If you sent the order via mail, email, or fax, the response regarding your order is sent back to your library. However, if your order was sent via EDI, the supplier’s system automatically generates an acknowledgment file and stores it in a specific directory on their server. The Polaris EDIAgent job checks this directory periodically, captures any order acknowledgments and invoices for the purchase orders your library sent, and stores this data in the EDI table on the library’s server. You can generate the Electronic PO Acknowledgment Report, which gathers data from the EDI table, and record the responses from the report. See Acquisitions Reports.

+

To modify a purchase order line item's status:

+

Tip:
If the order was sent via EDI, the order acknowledgment is downloaded and processed in the C:\Polaris Reports\EDIDone directory.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools, Modify Status from the menu bar.
  4. +

    A menu of options appears. For a list of the possible status changes, see Releasing and Transmitting Purchase Orders.

    +

    Note:
    You cannot modify a status of Pending, Currently Received, Closed or Canceled from the Tools menu.

    +
  5. Select one of the options from the list.
  6. +

    The status of the line item is changed.

    +

    Note:
    Most fields on the Purchase Order Line Item workform become read-only once the purchase order line item reaches the following statuses: Backordered, Exceptional Condition, Never Published, On Order, Out of Print, Return Requested, or Returned.

    +
  7. To record more information regarding the status change, select View > Instructions to Supplier and type a note in the Non-Public Note box.
  8. +
+

Note:
If there is a claim record associated with the line item, the change in status also appears on the Claim workform.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Ordering.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Ordering.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3aa0c08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Ordering.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + Ordering + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Ordering

+

You have several options for ordering items, depending on your library’s acquisitions workflow and whether orders are emailed, faxed, or transmitted via electronic data interchange (EDI). The basic steps involved in ordering are outlined below.

+
    +
  1. Select titles and save the bibliographic records in Polaris using one of these methods:
    • Select titles on the supplier’s website - Select the titles on the supplier’s website using the distribution grid set up with your library’s location, collection, and fund information. If your Polaris administrator has added the links, you can go to your suppliers’ websites by selecting Utilities > Link to Supplier Databases.

    • Download the brief MARC records for the selected titles - Save the records to your desktop or another file location.

    • Import the brief MARC records into Polaris - Select Utilities > Importing > Express Import or Full Import and select the Acquisitions Bibs profile, or an import profile named for the supplier. In the import setup, you specify the record set where all the bibliographic records are gathered. For more information, see Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

  2. +
  3. Create a purchase order in Polaris using one of the following methods: +
  4. +

    Tip:
    For information about the types of orders you can create in Polaris, see Creating Purchase Orders.

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      Bulk add titles to the purchase order - Download bibliographic records from your supplier, import them into record sets, and bulk add titles to the purchase order. The distribution segments are created automatically from 970 tags in the bibliographic records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a new blank purchase order - Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and select a template, or create a new, blank purchase order. Add purchase order lines and segments manually. Line items contain information about the titles you are ordering. Each line item contains at least one segment with the distribution and fund information for the copies of that title.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy an existing purchase order - Save the new purchase order with a different number.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also bulk add titles to a selection list and then copy them to a purchase order.

    +
      +
    • +

      Copy selection list lines to a new or existing purchase order +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Use Polaris Titles to Go - Query a supplier’s site and bring back title information to create purchase order line items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Renew a subscription in Serials - Purchase orders are created automatically when subscriptions are renewed if the parameter Create Purchase Order at subscription renewal is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. See Renew a subscription from the subscription record.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
  5. Release the purchase order, and specify the payment method.
  6. +
  7. Send the purchase order to the supplier using one of these methods:
  8. +
      +
    • Fax
    • +
    • Email
    • +
    • Electronic data interchange (EDI)-The supplier produces an electronic order acknowledgment that is retrieved by the Polaris EDIAgent. You can generate the Electronic PO Acknowledgment report from the EDI acknowledgment files. See Acquisitions Reports..
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Your library may have collection development programs where suppliers send many titles of a specific type or genre, but the titles are not known until you receive the order. In these cases, you can create an invoice without a purchase order and give it an order type of Approval Plan or Blanket Order. Your library may refer to these types of orders as standing orders. However, in Polaris, the order type Standing Order is used only with serials. See Creating Purchase Orders.

    +
+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Placing_Holds_from_Purchase_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Placing_Holds_from_Purchase_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c1f77be --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Placing_Holds_from_Purchase_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Placing Holds from Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Placing Holds from Purchase Orders

+

If you have the Circulation permission to place a hold request, you can place a bibliographic-level hold request from the Line Items view (view 2) of the Purchase Order workform, the Purchase Order Line Item workform, or a purchase order line item in the Find Tool results list. If you are placing holds on bibliographic records without linked item records, a message appears if the Hold option If no items are attached: Alert in Staff Client is checked in Polaris Administration. See Set Holds options: Enabling, Item Status Restrictions, First Available Copy.

+

To place a hold from a purchase order line item:

+

Tip:
Click to place a bibliographic-level hold from a purchase order line item.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform that contains the line item, or open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Do one of the following steps: +
    • From the Line Items view of the Purchase Order workform, right-click the line item and select Place Hold from the context menu.
    • From the Purchase Order Line Item workform, select Tools > Place Hold from the menu.
  4. +

    The Hold Request workform appears.

    +
  5. Follow the steps in Place single or consecutive hold requests.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_multiple_purchase_orders_at_once.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_multiple_purchase_orders_at_once.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b8f40365 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_multiple_purchase_orders_at_once.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Print multiple purchase orders at once + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print Multiple Purchase Orders at Once

+

To print one or multiple purchase orders from the Find Tool results list or from a list view box that displays the orders:

+
    +
  1. Select one or multiple purchase orders in the list
  2. +
  3. Right-click, and select Print > Purchase Order > Sort By and choose a sort option.
  4. +

    +

    +

    The purchase orders appear in Adobe Reader.

    +
  5. Click Print in the Adobe Reader to print the purchase orders.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_or_e-mail_a_single_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_or_e-mail_a_single_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a9bcdcc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Print_or_e-mail_a_single_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Print or e-mail a single purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print or email a single purchase order

+

To print or email a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select File > Print.
  4. +

    The menu selection expands.

    +
  5. Select Purchase Order, and select a Sort By option.
  6. +

    +

    +

    The report appears in Adobe Reader.

    +

    +

    +
  7. Print or email the purchase order from Adobe Reader as follows: +
    • To print the purchase order, click and mail or fax the purchase order to the supplier.
    • To email the purchase order, click and select Attach to email, and follow the instructions.
  8. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Release_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Release_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f48bc358 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Release_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + + + Release a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Release a purchase order

+

To release a purchase order:

+

Important:
If you attempt to release a purchase order that has a purchase order number exceeding the supplier’s limit, you will be unable to release the order.

+

Open the Purchase Order workform.

+

Select Tools > Release from the menu bar or click .

+

If no issues were found with the purchase order, a message box appears with the prompt to generate on-order items. For information about additional messages that may appear when you release a purchase order, see Additional Messages and Alerts.

+ +

Important: +
If the bibliographic records linked to the on-order items have call numbers, and the Polaris Administration Cataloging profile Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes, the call number information is copied to the linked on-order item records according to settings in the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table.

+

Note: +
When the purchase order is released and on-order items are generated, the Unit price (list price) displayed in each of the purchase order line items is copied to the on-order items, not the discount price.

+

+

Important:
If you are releasing an enriched EDI order so that you receive shelf-ready items from the supplier, you should generate on-order items so that the items retain the link to the purchase order line item segment when they are updated to shelf-ready items. If you do not create on-order items, you can still import bibliographic records with embedded holdings data to create shelf-ready items, but they will not be linked to a purchase order line item segment. Only shelf-ready items that are linked to a purchase order line item segment can be checked in and received using the Check In Shelf-Ready Materials workform.

+

+

When the Payment Options dialog box appears, select Pay on receipt of invoice or Prepay on the Payment Options dialog box.

+

If you chose Prepay, the Payment Options dialog box expands to display the Payment Methods frame. You can select Check or Voucher, type the check or voucher number, and select the date, but this information is not required to prepay the order.

+

Click OK on the Payment Options dialog box.

+

When the purchase order is released successfully, the following events occur:

+
    +
  • +

    The status of the order in the order status box changes from Pending to Released (or Continuing if the order type is standing order or subscription).

    +
  • +
  • The purchase order is saved with the original purchase order number and purchase order number suffix, but these can be changed after the order is released. If the purchase order number and/or suffix is changed, the Properties sheet displays the original purchase order and suffix. The purchase order number/suffix is updated for any linked on-order item records.
  • +
  • The date of the release appears.
  • +
+

Tip:
If the purchase order is linked to a foreign supplier, the amounts encumbered or expended are converted to the base currency according to the current exchange rate, and the amounts are posted in the linked funds in the base currency.

+

+

    +
  • If you selected the Pay on receipt of invoice check box, the appropriate funds are encumbered.
  • +
+

+

+

    +
  • If you selected Prepaid, the appropriate funds are expended, and an invoice is automatically created.
  • +
+

+

+

    +
  • If the purchase order has a payment method of depository agreement, the appropriate funds are debited, and an invoice is automatically created.
  • +
+

+

+

    +
  • If you chose to create item records upon release, the item records are created with a circulation status of on-order. The List price in the purchase order line items (not the discount price) is copied to the on-order items.
  • +
+

+

+

    +
  • The status bar indicates that the order was released successfully.
  • +
+

+

Additional Messages and Alerts +

+

+

+

+

The following messages and alerts may appear when you release a purchase order:

  • Purchase order release alert - There are linked bibliographic records without an ISBN, or with the Display in PAC box unchecked. Click Display in PAC to check the box in the bibliographic record and click Continue to release the purchase order, or click Cancel and edit the line items before releasing the purchase order.

+

+

Tip:
To change the Display in PAC setting in the linked bibliographic records, you must have the permission Modify a bib record from acquisitions and serials. See Administering Purchase Orders.

+

+

Important:
If you order using EDI, a line item may be rejected and automatically cancelled by the supplier if it is missing an ISBN/ISSN. Check your supplier’s requirements.

+
    +
  • This supplier accepts EDI orders - If the supplier linked to the purchase order accepts EDI orders, a message reminds you to send the order. Click OK to close the message box.
  • +
+

Tip:
Releasing the order does not automatically send it via EDI; select File > Send from the Purchase Order workform. See Transmit a purchase order electronically.

+
    +
  • This supplier cannot accept orders where the PO number exceeds [X] characters. - If the supplier linked to the purchase order has a limit on the length of the purchase order number allowed for EDI orders, a message tells you to change the purchase order number to be less than or equal to the supplier’s EDI purchase order number maximum length.
  • +
+

Tip:
Polaris attempts to match each released line item segment with an existing item template. See Creating On-Order Item Templates.

+
    +
  • The following item templates are missing required fields. - If the system cannot find an item template to match the branch, collection, and material type, the Item Record Creation error message box appears. It lists the missing required fields and alerts you that no item records will be created if a template cannot be found.
    • Click No to cancel the release operation. Create an on order item template if none exists, or correct an existing one in the Cataloging subsystem. See Creating On-Order Item Templates.
    • Click Yes to release the purchase order without creating item records. An error condition will result. Even in the event an item template code match is done, no item template will be found. You can create the item records when the items are received, although if you are outsourcing your cataloging through enriched EDI, correcting the error is encouraged.
  • +
+

+

+

    +
  • Foreign currencies - If the linked supplier uses a currency other than your base currency, the currency code appears next to Amount; for example, Amount (USD) if your base currency is Canadian Dollars, and the linked supplier uses U.S. dollars. If you need to change the exchange rate, click Cancel and select Utilities > Update Currency Exchange Rate. You must have the Polaris Acquisitions permission Adjust currency exchange rate: Allow. See Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency.
  • +
+

+
+

+

    +
  • Exceeding or adjusting encumbrance limits - If you selected Pay on receipt of invoice, a dialog box appears if there is insufficient money in the fund.
  • +
+
    +
  • Click OK to continue. The Overencumbrance List dialog box appears.
  • +
  • Click Continue to overencumber the funds and exceed the negative free balance. You must have the permission Release order exceeding fund encumbrance limits.
  • +
  • Click Adjust Funds to adjust the fund limits in the fund record. See Adjust fund limits. Then, you can release the purchase order.
  • +
+

+
+

+

    +
  • Exceeding or adjusting expenditure limits - If you selected Prepay, and there is insufficient money in the fund or if the fund expenditure limits will be exceeded, the Overexpenditure List dialog box appears.
  • +
+

+
+

+

    +
  • Click Continue and release the order. You must have the permission Release order exceeding fund expenditure limits.
  • +
  • Select a fund and click Adjust Funds to make changes in the fund. See Adjust fund limits.
  • +
+

+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Releasing_and_Transmitting_Purchase_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Releasing_and_Transmitting_Purchase_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e646de15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Releasing_and_Transmitting_Purchase_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + Releasing and Transmitting Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Releasing and Transmitting Purchase Orders

+

After your library has verified all purchase order information (including charges, destination, collection, fund allocations, and totals), the purchase order is ready to be released. When you release a purchase order, Polaris automatically does the following actions:

+

Note:
If the purchase order status is continuing, received, part received, canceled, or closed, you cannot release the purchase order.

+
    +
  • +

    Changes the status of the purchase order from pending to released for a firm order.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Changes the status from pending to continuing for a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. or subscription.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Saves the purchase order number and suffix.

    +

    Note: +
    The purchase order number and/or purchase order number suffix can be changed after the order is released. The Properties sheet displays the original purchase order number.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Expends funds if the purchase order is prepaid or the payment method is depository agreement.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Creates an invoice with the same number as the purchase order if the method is prepaid or depository agreement.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Encumbers funds if the payment method is purchase. If the purchase order is linked to a foreign supplier, the amount encumbered in the linked fund is converted to the base currency using the current exchange rate.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Creates item records for the titles in the purchase order if the purchase order type is firm, donation, or gift, and you have chosen this option.

    +
  • +
  • +

    Calculates the claim alert date for each purchase order line item if you have opted to include claim information.

    +
  • +
+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Split_funds_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Split_funds_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf0a6528 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Split_funds_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Split funds for a purchase order line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Split Funds for a Purchase Order Line Item Segment

+

To allocate more than one fund for a purchase order line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Add a purchase order line item segment. See Add purchase order line item segments.
  4. +
  5. Select the Fund box on the line item segment for which you want to allocate more than one fund.
  6. +
  7. Click on the list toolbar.
  8. +

    The Split Funds dialog box appears.

    +
  9. Select a fund using one of the following methods:
    • Select the fund in the Funds box.
    • Click Find to use the Find Tool to search for and select the fund.
  10. +

    The fund appears in the Funds box.

    +

    Note:
    When you select more than one fund to pay for a line item segment, the funds must be the same type. For example, you cannot select a deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. fund and a regular fund for the same line item segment.

    +
  11. Type the percentage of the line item price that is to be paid by this fund in the Percent allocation box.
  12. +
  13. Click Add.
  14. +

    The fund, fiscal year amount, and percentage for the fund you allocated appear in the fund display.

    +
  15. Continue allocating funds by repeating steps 3-6 until the total percentage is equal to 100.
  16. +

    Note:
    To remove a fund from the Split Funds list, select the fund and click Remove.

    +
  17. Click OK on the Split Fund dialog box.
  18. +

    The funds you selected are allocated for the line item segment.

    +
  19. Select File > Save.
  20. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Transmit_a_purchase_order_electronically.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Transmit_a_purchase_order_electronically.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..616f8b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Transmit_a_purchase_order_electronically.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Transmit a purchase order electronically + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Transmit a Purchase Order Electronically

+

After a purchase order is released, you can send it electronically if the supplier accepts purchase orders via Electronic Data Interchange (EDI).

+

Important:
To communicate with a supplier via EDI, you must first contact your Polaris Site Manager or Implementation Manager to obtain a license, then contact your supplier and get specific information to set up EDI ordering in Polaris. See Prepare for EDI Ordering. Then, set up the supplier record with the information you gathered. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data.

+

To send a purchase order to a supplier via Electronic Data Interchange (EDI):

+

Important:
Check with your supplier to find out if ISBNs are required in purchase order line items.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select File > Send.
  4. +

    The purchase order is sent electronically via EDI.

    +
  5. To see details about the file transmission, select View > Charges. The Charges view displays the EDI file name, Date created, and Time created boxes filled in.
  6. +
+

Related Information

+
    +
  • Retransmitting a purchase order - If you get the EDI File Sent Warning message that the purchase order was transmitted to the supplier, click Continue to retransmit the purchase order, or click Cancel if you do not want to retransmit the order.
  • +
+

Note: +
You may want to check with your supplier before retransmitting the order, to avoid filling the order twice.

+
    +
  • Enriched EDI Ordering overview - See Enriched EDI Orders and Shelf-Ready Items.
  • +
  • Setting up EDI ordering - To communicate with a supplier via EDI, you must first contact your Polaris Site Manager or Implementation Manager to obtain a license. Then contact the supplier and get specific information to enter in Polaris. See Prepare for EDI Ordering.
  • +
  • Entering EDI information in the Supplier record - Set up the supplier record with the information you gathered from the supplier. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data.
  • +
  • Polaris EDIAgent - The Polaris EDIAgent is a SQL job that scans the supplier’s file transfer protocol (FTP) server for files in the library’s directory, retrieves the files, and saves them in the Polaris database. For more information, see About the Polaris EDIAgent Job..
  • +
  • Electronic Purchase Order Acknowledgment - After the supplier receives the EDI purchase order, if the supplier uses EDI confirmations instead of email, an electronic purchase order acknowledgment is placed on the supplier’s FTP server. The Polaris EDIAgent retrieves the file and saves it in a directory on the library’s server. You can generate the Electronic Purchase Order Acknowledgment from the Utilities menu. See Acquisitions Reports.
  • +
  • Receiving the EDI invoice - After the purchase order is received, the supplier puts an invoice on their FTP server. The Polaris EDIAgent picks up the file and uses the data in the invoice file to create one or more invoice records in Polaris. For more information, see Review automatic EDI invoices.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Using_Polaris_Titles_to_Go.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Using_Polaris_Titles_to_Go.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd33c15e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/Using_Polaris_Titles_to_Go.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Using Polaris Titles to Go + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Using Polaris Titles to Go

+

Polaris Titles to Go is a separately-licensed feature that uses Web Services (XML-based technology capable of bridging any operating system, hardware platform, or programming language) to link to a supplier’s database and check a title’s availability. Polaris Titles to Go uses UTF-8 encoding to be consistent with the supplier’s XML data.

+

When the link is made between Polaris and the supplier’s database, the bibliographic information, availability, price, discount, edition, and binding format are transferred from the supplier to the purchase order line item record in Polaris. The availability (Available, Out-of-print, etc.) and binding format (Large Print, Hardcover, etc.) information appears in red at the bottom of the Purchase Order Line Item workform. For information on setting up Titles to Go with your suppliers, see Enable Titles to Go for your suppliers.

+

To use Titles to Go, the purchase order must be linked to a supplier that accepts Titles to Go queries, and the supplier’s SAN must match the SAN in the Titles to Go profile in Polaris Administration. See Enable Titles to Go for your suppliers.

+

To check availability and add line items using Polaris Titles to Go:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Add a new purchase order line item.
  4. +
+

Tip:
You must enter the entire ISBN because the supplier cannot search using a truncated number or wildcards. The supplier may return an error message if you do not enter the complete ISBN.

+
    +
  1. Type the entire ISBN in the ISBN box on the Purchase Order Line Item workform, and press ENTER.
  2. +
+

The system checks to see if the item is already owned by the library. If the library owns a copy, the system returns the bibliographic data and the control number. If the ISBN is not found at the library, and Titles to Go is enabled for the supplier, the system does the following:

+
+
    +
  • Compares the SAN in the supplier record (linked to the purchase order) against the SAN in the Titles to Go profile.
  • +
  • Launches the Titles to Go query if the SAN is correct and the supplier is enabled in the profile.
  • +
+
+
+

Tip:
If a discount already exists in the purchase order line item, it will be used instead of the one sent by the supplier.

+
+
+
    +
  • Matches the ISBN you entered to the ISBN in the supplier’s database (if the title is located) and brings in the bibliographic data (title, author, publisher, edition, etc.), price, discount, binding (large print, hardcover), and availability (available, out-of-print, etc.). The availability and binding information appear in red in the status bar on the Purchase Order Line Item workform. If no match is found, an error message appears.
  • +
+
+
+

Note:
If a title is available from Ingram, the format of the item displays in red along with the word Available, for example Paperback: Available. If the title is not available from Ingram, the format of the item displays in red, but the availability status is blank, for example, Paperback:.
In addition, the price in the Unit price box is set to $0.00 in the Purchase Order Line Item workform if the title is unavailable from Ingram.

+
+
+

+

+
+

Tip:
You can use an on-order bibliographic template with Titles to Go.

+
    +
  1. Enter the quantity, destination, collection, and fund information for the copies of the title.
  2. +
  3. Save the purchase order line item.
  4. +
+

A brief bibliographic record is created and saved to the database.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_all_funds_for_the_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_all_funds_for_the_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ee564e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_all_funds_for_the_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + View all funds for the purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View all Funds for the Purchase Order

+

You can link to funds from the Purchase Order workform to see all the funds used in the purchase order. Each distinct fund is listed only once even if it was used in multiple purchase order line item segments.

+

Tip:
You can search for a purchase order and link to the funds from the Find Tool results list without opening the purchase order. Select the purchase order in the results list, right-click and select Links, Funds. You can also link to the fund from any linked list box that displays purchase orders.

+

To view a list of all the funds used in a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Links > Funds from the Purchase Order menu.
  4. +

    If the purchase order is linked to only one fund, the Fund workform appears. If the purchase order is linked to multiple funds, a linked list box displays the funds used in the purchase order. This list includes the funds used to pay for charges at the purchase order header level, such as shipping for the whole order, and funds used to pay for the materials at the purchase order line item segment level. Each linked fund is listed only once.

    +

    +

    +

    Tip:
    You can also see the fund hierarchy by right-clicking and selecting Explore.

    +
  5. To open a fund displayed in the Linked Funds box, double-click it or right-click and select Open.
  6. +

    The Fund workform appears.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_totals_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_totals_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5028184 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAorder/View_totals_for_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + View totals for a purchase order line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View Totals for a Purchase Order Line Item Segment

+

To view the totals for a purchase order line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Click the Totals tab at the bottom of the workform.
  4. +

    The Totals tabbed page displays the line item and segment totals.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Modify_the_payment_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Modify_the_payment_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..097a10c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Modify_the_payment_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Modify the payment history + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Modify the Payment History

+

To add or change the check number, voucher number, or date on the invoice payment history.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select View > Payment History.
  4. +

    The Payment History view appears.

    +
  5. Right-click the line for which you want to modify the check/voucher number, and select Modify Payment History.
  6. +

    The Modify Check/Voucher Number dialog box appears.

    +
  7. Select Check or Voucher if it is not already selected.
  8. +

    Note:
    The default method of payment is set by the Acquisitions parameter Default payment option when paying/ crediting invoices.

    +
  9. Type the check or voucher number in the Number box.
  10. +
  11. If the voucher or check date is different than today’s date, select a date in the Date box.
  12. +
  13. Click OK.
  14. +

    The payment information is updated.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_entire_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_entire_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d56e5aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_entire_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + Pay an entire invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Pay an entire invoice

+

To pay an entire invoice that has a status of open and a payment method of purchase.

+

Note:
Miscellaneous invoices can be paid if there are no line items and the charges are only at the header level. They can also be paid if there are unreceived line items. For all other types of invoices, all the line items must be received before the Pay option is available.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click to pay the entire invoice.

    +
  3. Select Tools > Pay from the menu bar.
  4. +

    The Check/Voucher dialog box appears.

    +

    The selection in the Check/Voucher dialog box is determined by the setting in the Default payment option when paying/crediting invoices parameter in Polaris Administration. See Set the default payment option to check or voucher.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    If the linked supplier uses a currency other than your base currency, the currency code appears next to Amount; for example, Amount (CAD) if your base currency is U.S. dollars, but the supplier uses Canadian dollars. If you need to change the exchange rate, click Cancel and select Utilities, Update Currency Exchange Rate. You must have the Polaris Acquisitions permission Adjust currency exchange rate: Allow. See Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency.

    +

    + +

    +
  5. If necessary, type the voucher or check number in the Number box. You can enter up to 30 characters to identify the check or voucher.
  6. +
  7. To enter a different date, type the date in the Date box, or select it from the calendar.
  8. +
  9. Click OK.
  10. +

    If the invoice can be paid without exceeding the fund limits, the message The invoice was paid successfully appears in the status bar, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • + The status of the invoice changes from Open to Paid. The lines also have a status of Paid. +
    • +
    • + The invoice number and number suffix become read-only and cannot be edited. +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If the invoice is linked to a foreign supplier, the amounts disencumbered and expended are converted to the base currency (according to the current exchange rate), and the amounts are posted in the linked funds in the base currency.

    +
      +
    • + All linked funds are disencumbered and expended if there is a linked purchase order. If there is no purchase order, the linked funds are expended. +
    • +
    • + The check or voucher information appears in the Check or Voucher fields on the Charges view. +
    • +
    • + The payment appears on the Payment History view. See View the invoice payment history. +
    • +
    +

    If the fund’s free balance or expenditure limits will be exceeded, the Overexpenditures List dialog box appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    If the Overexpenditures List dialog box appears, do one of the following:

    +
      +
    • + Click Adjust Funds - Then select the Fund, right-click and select Open from the context menu. The Fund workform opens and you can modify the fund if you have the permission Modify fund. +
    • +
    • + Click Continue - Continue paying the invoice and override the expenditure limits. You must have the permission Invoice: Pay invoice exceeding fund expenditure limits. This permission allows you to exceed the fund expenditure limits and the free balance. +
    • +
    +
+

Related Information

+

Print one or multiple vouchers +

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed9899b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_an_invoice_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Pay an invoice line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Pay an Invoice Line Item Segment

+

If you received less than the total number of copies of a line item on an invoice, you can pay for just the portion you received by paying the line item segment. To pay for an invoice line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice Line Item workform.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Select the segment and click  on the items list toolbar.

    +
  3. Right-click the segment and select Pay.
  4. +

    The Segment Payment/Credit dialog box appears.

    +
  5. If the quantity you are paying for is less than the total quantity ordered, type the quantity in the Enter the quantity to pay box.
  6. +

    Tip:
    You can use the Acquisitions parameter Default payment option when paying/ crediting invoices to specify whether Check or Voucher is selected by default when staff members prepay, pay or credit an invoice.

    +
  7. Click OK.
  8. +

    The Check/Voucher dialog box appears. The selection in the Check/Voucher dialog box is determined by the setting in the Default payment option when paying/crediting invoices parameter in Polaris Administration. See Set the default payment option to check or voucher.

    +

    Note:
    If the linked supplier uses a currency other than your base currency, the currency code appears next to Amount; for example, Amount (CAD) if your base currency is US Dollars, and the supplier’s currency is in Canadian dollars. If you need to change the exchange rate, click Cancel and select Utilities, Update Currency Exchange Rate. You must have the Polaris Acquisitions permission Adjust currency exchange rate: Allow. See Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency.

    +
  9. Type the voucher or check number in the Number box.
  10. +
  11. To enter a different pay date, type or select a date in the Date box.
  12. +
  13. Click OK.
  14. +

    The total segment is paid if you paid the total quantity. If you paid an amount less than the total quantity, the segment is split, and the unpaid portion appears in a separate segment in the line.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_one_or_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_one_or_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d02c630 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Pay_one_or_multiple_lines_on_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + Pay one or multiple lines on an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Pay One or Multiple Lines on an Invoice

+

If you do not want to pay the entire invoice with one check or voucher, you can split up the invoice and select only the lines that you want to pay with a single check or voucher. When you pay for a line item, you pay for the total quantity received for the line item. To pay for less than the total received for the line item, you can pay for segments of the line item on the Invoice Line Item workform. See Pay an invoice line item segment.

+

To pay one or multiple line items on an invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +

    Note:
    You can also pay for single line items from the Invoice Line Item workform.

    +

    Tip: + +
    Click to see the line items on the invoice.

    +
  3. Select View > Line Items.
  4. +

    The Line Items view appears.

    +
  5. Select a line item, or select multiple line items by pressing the CTRL key while selecting the lines.
  6. +

    Tip: + +
    Click to pay the lines you selected.

    +
  7. Select Tools > Pay to pay the selected items.
  8. +

    The Check/Voucher dialog box appears.

    +

    The selection in the Check/Voucher dialog box is determined by the setting in the Default payment option when paying/crediting invoices parameter in Polaris Administration. See Set the default payment option to check or voucher.

    +

    Note:
    If the linked supplier uses a currency other than your base currency, the currency code appears next to Amount; for example, Amount (CAD) if your base currency is US Dollars, and the supplier’s currency is in Canadian dollars. If you need to change the exchange rate, click Cancel and select Utilities, Update Currency Exchange Rate. You must have the Polaris Acquisitions permission Adjust currency exchange rate: Allow. See Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency.

    +
  9. If necessary, type the voucher or check number in the Number box.
  10. +
  11. To enter a different date from today’s date, type it in the Datebox, or select it from the calendar.
  12. +
  13. Click OK.
  14. +

    The invoice lines were paid successfully appears in the status bar, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • The status of the whole invoice changes from open to part paid.
    • +
    • The payment statuses of the selected lines change from open to paid.
    • +
    • The invoice status changes from open to paid if the line being paid is the last open line on the invoice.
    • +
    • The linked funds are expended.
    • +
    +
+

Related Information

+

Print one or multiple vouchers +

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Paying_Invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Paying_Invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..acab6c98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Paying_Invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Paying Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Paying Invoices

+

After invoice line items have been added, charges have been distributed with any taxes applied, and open invoices with a payment method of purchase are ready to be paid in Polaris. You can pay an entire invoice, individual line items on an invoice, or segments within an invoice line item.

+

You can print vouchers in Polaris and send them to your financial department so that the appropriate funds can be expended. The voucher shows the supplier and the total of each fund used on the invoice. When you print vouchers, you can select a summary voucher or a full voucher. Both the summary and full vouchers show the totals for each fund used in the invoice and the grand total for all funds used in the invoice, but the full voucher also shows details for each invoice line item. You can print multiple vouchers at once or print (or e-mail) a single voucher.

+

If you paid an invoice in error, you can undo the payment, which reverses the expenditures in any linked funds, re-encumbers the amounts in the linked funds (if the invoice line item segment is linked to a purchase order line item segment) and resets the invoice to an “open” status. You can undo payments for a whole invoice with a payment method of purchase and an invoice type of regular, approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile., blanket order or miscellaneous. You cannot undo payments for individual line items or line item segments.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_one_or_multiple_vouchers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_one_or_multiple_vouchers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44360255 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_one_or_multiple_vouchers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Print one or multiple vouchers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print One or Multiple Vouchers

+

To print one or multiple vouchers from the Polaris Find Tool:

+

Tip:
You can print vouchers to be sent to your financial department whether the payment method is Check or Voucher.

+
    +
  1. Right-click and select Print Invoice Voucher (Summary) or Invoice Voucher (Full).
  2. +

    Note:
    If any of the selected invoices have more than one voucher, or if any have a status of Open, you will be blocked from printing them in batch. To print more than one voucher for a single invoice, select only that invoice.

    +

    The vouchers appear in the Adobe Reader window where you can print them all at once.

    +
  3. From the Find Tool results list, or from a list view box that displays invoices, select one or multiple paid, prepaid, credited, or partially paid invoices.
  4. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_or_e-mail_a_voucher_from_the_Invoice_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_or_e-mail_a_voucher_from_the_Invoice_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22206321 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Print_or_e-mail_a_voucher_from_the_Invoice_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Print or e-mail a voucher from the Invoice workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print or E-mail a Voucher from the Invoice Workform

+

To print a voucher from the Invoice workform.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform for the paid invoice.
  2. +
  3. Select File > Print > Invoice Voucher (Summary), or Invoice Voucher (Full).
  4. +

    Note:
    If more than one voucher is associated with the invoice, the vouchers display in a list box. Be sure to select the voucher that appears at the top of the list because the voucher(s) below it could be for payments that were later reversed.

    +

    The invoice voucher pdf appears in Adobe Reader. If you selected Invoice Voucher (Summary), the voucher displays only the fund totals and the grand totals. If you selected Invoice Voucher (Full), each line item is displayed.

    +

    Note:
    If the supplier uses a currency other than the base currency, the currency code appears on the invoice voucher; for example, CAD if Canadian Dollars is not your library’s base currency.

    +
  5. Click to print the voucher or click to e-mail the report.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Undo_the_invoice_payment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Undo_the_invoice_payment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b57a7b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/Undo_the_invoice_payment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Undo the invoice payment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Undo the Invoice Payment

+

If you paid an invoice in error, you can undo the payment, which reverses the expenditures in any linked funds, and re-encumbers the amounts (if the invoice line item segment is linked to a purchase order line item segment. You can repay the invoice after making corrections, and generate a new voucher for the correct payment.

+

To undo an invoice payment.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform for the paid invoice.
  2. +
  3. Select Undo Payment, click , or press the shortcut key combination Alt+T+N.
  4. +

    Tip:
    If a fund for any of the invoice line item segments or a header fund is closed, a message tells you that transactions cannot be posted against closed funds. If another user has the fund record or any line items open, a message tells you that the action will be canceled.

    +

    The following message appears: You have chosen to undo payment against this invoice. All linked fund transactions will be reversed and the invoice re-opened. Continue? If you click Yes to continue, the undo payment process begins.

    +

    For every invoice line item segment in the invoice and any header charges, the following transactions are posted in the linked fund:

    +
      +
    • Unexpend - The transaction type is unexpend, and the note identifies the line item and segment payment that was reversed: Line [x], Seg [y] payment was reversed. For unexpend transactions for header charges, the note indicates the type of header charge: Invoice header charges: [type of charge]
    • +
    • Encumbrance - If there is a linked purchase order line item segment, the fund amount is re-encumbered.
    • +
    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_charges.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_charges.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f278a05 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_charges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + View the invoice charges + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View the Invoice Charges

+

You can view all the charges included in an invoice on the Charges view of the Invoice workform. The Charges view includes information on payments, discounts, checks, and vouchers.

+

To view the charges on an invoice:

+

Note:
If the invoice is linked to a foreign supplier, the currency code is displayed next to the amount; for example, Grand total (USD) for a Canadian library ordering from a United States supplier.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select View > Charges.
  4. +

    The Charges view of the Invoice workform displays the charges for materials and services. It also displays the total sales tax amount; the total amount of the payments made; total pending payments; total credits; discount and sales tax rates; the check number and date; and the voucher number and date.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_payment_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_payment_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d7a8fdc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PApay/View_the_invoice_payment_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + View the invoice payment history + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

View the invoice payment history

+

You can view the payment history for an invoice on the Payment History view of the Invoice workform. It shows the payment date, amount, check or voucher number, the user’s name, payment status, and any notes.

+

To view the payment history for an invoice.

+

Note:
You can change the check/voucher number and the date. See Modify the payment history.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select View > Payment History.
  4. +

    The Payment History view of the Invoice workform appears.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Print_workslips_for_purchase_order_line_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Print_workslips_for_purchase_order_line_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a55c4f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Print_workslips_for_purchase_order_line_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Print workslips for purchase order line items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Print workslips for purchase order line items

+

Printed workslips, which are optional, can facillitate your library's processing workflows as the physical items are received. The Polaris Administration parameter PO line item workslips: Print on-order item data parameters specifies whether item data or segment data is printed on the workslip. See Specify whether on-order item data prints on POLI workslips.

+

If the parameter is set to print item data, and there are item records linked to the purchase order line item, the item number, call number, material type, destination, and fund are printed on the bottom of the workslip for each line item segment that has item data. The workslip includes a blank line for any segments that do not have item data. If the purchase order line item has no linked items, the segment information (quantity, destination, collection, material type, location, and fund) is printed instead. However, if the parameter is set to not print item data on workslips, only segment data is printed even when on-order items are linked to the purchase order line item.

+

The workslip also includes any notes entered for the purchase order line item. The Rush/Alert check box is checked if the box is checked on the Purchase Order Line Item workform. The Holds box is checked if there are holds placed on the linked bibliographic record.

+

To print a workslip:

+
    +

    Note:
    For orders where the supplier provides an ASN, workslips can also be printed from the Receive ASN Shipments workform. See Receive using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).

    +
  1. From the Line Items view of the Purchase Order or Invoice workform, select one or more line items.
  2. +

    Note:
    You can also print a single workslip from the Purchase Order Line Item workform or from the Find Tool results list.

    +
  3. Right-click and select Print > PO Line ItemWorkslip, or click the printer icon.
  4. +

    The Workslip pdf opens in Adobe Reader.

    +
  5. Click Print on the Adobe Reader toolbar to print the workslip, and click  to close Adobe Reader.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_invoice_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_invoice_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a76f300 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_invoice_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment

+

You can receive line items at the segment level when some of the copies of a title are not included in the order, or when you are receiving from an invoice that does not have a linked purchase order. For example, if the invoice is for an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. or blanket order, the quantity received is entered at the invoice line item segment level.

+

Note:
You can receive fewer than the number of copies ordered for a purchase order line item segment if the purchase order is not yet linked to an invoice. See Split receipt of a purchase order line item segment.

+

To receive a segment of a line item:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item or Invoice Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Right-click the segment and select Receive.
  4. +

    The Line Item Segment Receiving dialog box appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    If you are receiving an invoice line item that is not linked to a purchase order, the quantity ordered is 0 and you can enter an amount. If there is a linked purchase order, you cannot change the quantity ordered.

    +

    + +

    +
  5. Click OK to confirm that you want to receive the selected line item segment. The segment’s status changes from on-order to received.
  6. +
+

Related Information

+

If the invoice line item was added without a purchase order for an approval plan or blanket order invoice, you can create item records from the invoice line item after all segments in a line item are received. Receive all the segments on the invoice line item, then select Tools > Create Item Record on the Invoice Line Item workform.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_line_from_the_Find_Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_line_from_the_Find_Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89eb9c88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_purchase_order_line_from_the_Find_Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive a purchase order line from the Find Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive a Purchase Order Line from the Find Tool

+

To receive a purchase line order line item from the Find Tool:

+
    +
  1. Use the Find Tool to search for the purchase order line item you want to receive.
  2. +

    The purchase order line items that match the search criteria appear in the Find Tool results list.

    +
  3. Select the purchase order line item, right-click and select Receive from the context menu.
  4. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_whole_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_whole_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c46f0cd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_a_whole_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive a whole order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive a Whole Order

+

To receive an entire purchase order when the correct quantity for each ordered title has arrived:

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform for the delivered shipment.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Receive.
  4. +

    A message asks if you want to receive the entire order.

    +
  5. Click OK to confirm that you want to receive all copies of all line items listed in the purchase order.
  6. +

    Order was received successfully appears in the status bar.

    +

    If there are hold requests for any title in the purchase order, and the Acquisitions profile Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, a message informs you that there are holds on a title or titles.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_from_the_purchase_order_or_invoice_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_from_the_purchase_order_or_invoice_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d513002 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_from_the_purchase_order_or_invoice_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive from the purchase order or invoice line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive from the purchase order or invoice line item

+

To receive a line item (all segments) from the Purchase Order Line Item or Invoice Line Item workform:

+

Note:
You cannot receive an invoice line item on a Miscellaneous invoice using this method. Type the quantity in the Quantity field on the segment to receive an invoice line item for a miscellaneous invoice.

+

Tip:
If you want to create on-order item records and none were generated when the purchase order was released, select Tools > Create, Item Records.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item or Invoice Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Receive from the menu bar.
  4. +

    A dialog box appears that asks if you want to receive the selected line item.

    +
  5. Click OK to receive the line item.
  6. +

    The line item was received successfully appears in the status bar, and the statuses of the linked on-order items are updated automatically to in-process.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0707f54 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive line items from a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive line items from a purchase order

+

To receive one or more whole line items from the Purchase Order workform:

+

Note:
You can receive line items from the Invoice workform if there are linked purchase order line items. See Receive line items from an invoice . If the invoice line items are not linked to a purchase order, you must receive them at the segment level. See Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment.

+

Tip:
To keep your place in the list and retain your sort order, select Edit, Lock List View or click . When you update line
items with the list view locked, the changes do not appear in the list view until you clear the Lock List View option or refresh the list. List view locked is displayed in the status bar when this option is on.
Click refreslstvwbtn.gif to refresh the list. After you refresh the list, your updates to the line items appear, and the list view is resorted.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order workform - Line Items view.
  2. +
  3. Select the line items you want to receive, right-click, and select Receive from the context menu, or click .
  4. + +

    A dialog box asks if you want to receive the selected lines.

    +
  5. Click OK to receive the selected items.
  6. +

    If any items were claimed, the Line Items Receive Error(s) dialog box appears.

    +
  7. If the Line Items Receive Error(s) dialog box appears, do one of the following:
  8. +
      +
    • + Click Continue to continue receiving the line items you selected, including those that were previously claimed. +
    • +
    • + Click Cancel to cancel receiving. +
    • +
    +
+

Note:
If you receive a line item in error, you can unreceive it. See Undo receipt of a line item or line item segment.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a54022c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive line items from an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive line items from an invoice

+

You can receive invoice line items from the Invoice workform for EDI and non-EDI orders. If you do not want purchase order line items to be updated to Received automatically when an EDI invoice is loaded into Polaris, make sure the Update linked PO line item to Received check box in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile is left unchecked. Then you can receive the line items in the invoice when the actual shipment is received. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.

+

To receive one or more whole line items from the Invoice workform:

+

Tip:
To keep your place in the list and retain your sort order, select Edit > Lock List View or click . When you update line items with the list view locked, the changes do not appear in the list view until you uncheck the Lock List View option or refresh the list. List view locked is displayed in the status bar when this option is on.
Click to refresh the list. After you refresh the list, your updates to the line items appear, and the list view is resorted.

+

Note:
You can receive line items from the Invoice workform if there are linked purchase order line items. If the invoice is not linked to a purchase order, you must receive at the invoice line item segment level. See Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment.

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform-Line Items view.
  2. +
  3. Select the line items you want to receive, right-click, and select Receive from the context menu, or click .
  4. +

    + +

    +
  5. A message asks if you want to receive the selected lines.
  6. +
  7. Click OK to receive the selected items.
  8. +

    Note: +
    If you are receiving invoice lines, and no item records were generated when the purchase order was released, right-click the invoice line and select Create > Item Records from the context menu. If no errors are detected, the on-order item records are created.

    +

    The status of any linked purchase order line items is updated to Received and the circulation status of any linked on-order items is updated to In Process.

    +

    If there are hold requests for any title in the invoice, and the Acquisitions profile Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, a message informs you that there are holds on a title or titles.

    +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_using_the_Advanced_Shipping_Notice_ASN.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_using_the_Advanced_Shipping_Notice_ASN.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..62f86df4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receive_using_the_Advanced_Shipping_Notice_ASN.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + Receive using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receive Using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN)

+

To receive shipments for which an ASN has been received:

+

Note:
For more information on the ASN, see Receiving Orders.

+
    +
  1. Select Acquisitions > EDI Services > Receive ASN Shipments.
  2. +

    The Receive ASN Shipments workform opens.

    +
  3. To change the branch location selected in the Filter By Organization box, select a different branch or select All.
  4. +
  5. Search for the ASN using one of the following methods:
    • Select ASN tracking barcode, and scan the barcode located on the label attached to the outside of the carton. Or, type the number that displays under the barcode.
    • Select Supplier SAN, and type the supplier’s SAN.
    • Select ASN date range, and select a from and to date.
  6. +
  7. Click Go.
  8. +

    + +

    +

    The top section of the workform displays the shipment information in the following columns:

    +
      +
    • Tracking barcode +
    • +
    • Shipped date +
    • +
    • Supplier +
    • +
    • Carrier +
    • +
    +
  9. Select a tracking barcode in the top section of the workform.
  10. +

    The line item information for the selected shipment appears in the bottom section of the workform in the following columns:

    +
      +
    • Tracking barcode +
    • +
    • Title +
    • +
    • Author +
    • +
    • ISBN/UPC +
    • +
    • Ordered (the quantity ordered) +
    • +
    • Shipped (the quantity shipped from the ASN) +
    • +
    • Received/ASN Received (the quantity received)
    • +
    • PO Line ID +
    • +
    • Line Status +
    • +
    • PO Number +
    • +
    • PO Release (date) +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    To link to the purchase order or purchase order line item, select a line item in the bottom portion of the workform, right-click and select Links.

    +
  11. Click Receive Carton.
  12. +

    The line items are received. The corresponding number of copies are received in the linked purchase order line item. If the Polaris Administration Acquisitions profile Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests is set to Yes, a message displays for titles that have hold requests.

    +
+

Printing Workslips When Receiving ASN Shipments

+

Note:
The Polaris Administration Acquisitions parameter Batch print workslips during ASN receiving must be set to Yes to allow the printing of workslips from the Receive ASN Shipments workform.

+

After receiving on the Receive ASN Shipments workform, you can print purchase order line item workslips. If multiple copies of the same title are received in separate cartons, only one workslip is printed for the title. To print purchase order line item workslips from the Receive ASN Shipments workform, select File > Print > PO Line Item Workslips, or select the down arrow next to the printer icon, and select PO Line Item Workslips.

+

+ +

+

ASN and EDI Invoices

+

If the ASN Shipments option is selectedin the supplier record, the following invoice processing occurs:

+
    +
  • If the order was received via the Receive ASN Shipments workform, the EDI invoice is created automatically in Polaris from the supplier’s EDI invoice file (810).
  • +
  • If the order has not yet been received from the Receive ASN Shipments workform, the following occurs:
  • +
  • An e-mail is sent with the following message: ASN processing must be done before EDI Invoice #xxxxxxxx can be created.
  • +
  • The ungenerated EDI invoice file is held in the Process EDI Invoices workform regardless of the Hold partial shipments setting in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile.
  • +
  • Once the order is received via the ASN, the invoice is created automatically when the EDIAgent runs again. Or, you generate the invoice from the Process EDI Invoices workform as long as the order has been received via the ASN.
  • +
  • If Hold partial shipments is selected in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile, and the quantity ordered does not equal the quantity shipped, the invoice will remain in the Process EDI Invoices workform until the remainder of the order is received. Then, the invoice will be created automatically. Or, you can generate the invoice from the Process EDI Invoice workform.
  • +
+

ASN Reports

+

The following standard reports are available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar under Utilities > Reports and Notices > Acquisitions:

+
    +
  • Advanced Shipment Notification Log - The Advanced Shipment Notification log displays all titles received via ASN for a supplier and line item status date range. To generate the report, enter the Supplier SAN (with or without the hyphen), the Line item status start date, the Line item status end date, and click Submit. The line item status date is the date the line item’s status was updated to Received (all segments were received via ASN), or Partly Received (some segments were received via ASN).
  • +
  • The report lists purchase order line items that have segments received via ASN within the time period (including the start and end dates) for the specified supplier. It includes the following columns of information sorted by purchase order number, then title, then carton tracking number: PO # / Suffix; Title / Author / ISBN (UPC); Tracking Barcode; POLI ID; Ord - Total quantity ordered from the purchase order line items; Sent - Total quantity shipped by the supplier; Rec - Total quantity of all received purchase order line item segments; ASN Rec - Total quantity of purchase order line item segments received using the Receive ASN Shipments workform; Note - If the shipped quantity was adjusted, a note appears in this column. The report is printed in landscape page orientation.
  • +
  • Advanced Shipment Container Content Report - Lists all items found in a specific package or container for which the supplier has sent an EDI ASN file. Type or scan the 18-digit SSCC tracking barcode in the Report Wizard window. The report is sorted by title, and it includes the following information: title; author; ISBN or UPC; purchase order number and suffix; purchase order line item ID; and the total quantity sent.
  • +
  • Advanced Shipments Not Yet Received - Lists all items found in a package/container for which the supplier has produced an ASN, but which has not yet been received through the ASN workform. To generate the report, enter the supplier’s SAN (with or without hyphens) in the Report Wizard dialog box. The report is sorted by tracking barcode, then PO number, then title. It lists the tracking barcode, PO#/Suffix, Title/Author/ISBN (UPC), PO Line ID, Qty Sent, and the Date Shipped.
  • +
+

+ For more information, see Acquisitions Reports. +

+

Update on-order item records

+

When you release a purchase order, you can opt to create on-order item records. These item records can be updated in the following ways:

+
    +
  • Update items using Item Bulk Change - If your library does not use enriched orders, you can use the Item Bulk Change dialog box to assign barcodes and call numbers to the linked on-order items. From the purchase order, select Links > Item Records to open the linked list box. Then, select the items, right-click and select Ad hoc Bulk Change from the context menu to access the Item Bulk Change dialog box. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.
  • +
  • Update items manually - Select Links > Item Records to open the linked list box. Open the first item record in the linked list box, scan the barcode and make other edits. Then, press CTRL+S to save the first record, and press CTRL+E to go to the next record in the linked list box without leaving the Item Record workform.
  • +
  • Automatically receive EDI purchase order line items - When you send orders via EDI, an EDI invoice file is retrieved from the supplier’s site, and invoice records are created automatically in the Polaris database. You can select Update linked purchase order line items on the EDI Invoice Defaults profile, and opt to update the linked on-order items or leave them on-order. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.
  • +
  • Receiving shelf-ready items - If your library sends “enriched” EDI orders, the supplier provides bibliographic records with embedded holdings data. When the bibliographic records are imported, the embedded holdings data update the on-order item records with barcodes and other cataloging and circulation information, making them shelf-ready. For more information, see Enriched EDI Orders and Shelf-Ready Items. If you receive shelf-ready items as a result of Enriched EDI, you can use the Check In Shelf-Ready Materials workform to check in the on-order items and receive the linked purchase order line item segments. See Check in new shelf-ready items.
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receiving_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receiving_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2422917 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Receiving_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + + Receiving Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Receiving Orders

+

To accommodate various ordering and receiving workflows, Polaris offers the following methods for receiving:

+

Receive a complete order - The shipment arrives at the library, and it matches the order exactly. All copies of all the titles ordered are included in the shipment.

+

Receive an incomplete order - The shipment arrives at the library, but the number of copies in the shipment does not match the number of copies in the order. You can receive an incomplete order as follows:

+
    +
  • Receive all copies of a title ordered for a specific destination and collection.
  • +
  • Receive copies that arrived for a destination or collection, and leave the other copies on-order. You can split receipt of a purchase order line item segment as long as the purchase order is not linked to an invoice, but you cannot split receipt from an invoice line item segment.
  • +
+

Receive line items from the invoice via Rapid Receipt - The shipment arrives at the library, and it contains materials that may have been ordered on various purchase orders. Start from a blank Invoice workform and pull in the matching purchase order line items, which simultaneously adds the line items to the invoice and receives the linked purchase order line items. Rapid Receipt may be used to receive purchase order line items. If the purchase order line items have not already been copied to an invoice, it can be pulled into the Rapid Receipt dialog. Additionally, the purchase order line item must have one of the following statuses: Backordered, Exceptional condition, Return requested, On order, Out of print, Received, Not yet published, Claimed, Never published, Pending Claim, or Returned.

+

Note:
If the purchase order line has already been received, the system will not update again the purchase order line status to Received. The status remains Received, and the status date is set to the date of the first time the line was Received.

+

Receive from an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. or blanket order invoice - The shipment arrives at the library for a blanket order or approval plan invoice that has no linked purchase order. You can receive an approval plan or blanket order invoice at the invoice line item segment level where you can enter the quantity ordered and the quantity received.

+

Receive an EDI order automatically - To use this method, the Update linked purchase order line items to received box must be selected on the EDI Invoice Defaults profile in Polaris Administration. As soon as the Polaris EDI invoice is automatically created from the supplier’s invoice file, the linked purchase order line items are updated to a Received status. The EDI Invoice Defaults profile can also be set to update the circulation status of the linked on-order items. If you do not want partial shipment invoices to be created automatically, you can select the Hold partial shipments option. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.

+

Receive an EDI order from the invoice - If your library policy requires the shipment of materials to be at the library before the order is received, leave the Update linked PO line item to received box unchecked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. See Set up EDI invoice defaults. The EDI invoice is still created automatically, but the linked purchase order line items are not received automatically. See Receive line items from an invoice.

+

Receive an EDI order from the Receive ASN Shipments workform - If the supplier can provide an ASN (X12 transaction set 856) with shipment information, you can receive materials by scanning the tracking barcode on the outside of the carton. You create and transmit an order to a supplier that produces ASN files the same way you create and send any EDI order. The linked supplier record contains the ASN setting. After the EDI order is received and processed, the supplier outputs the ASN file to the library’s directory on the supplier’s FTP server. The Polaris EDIAgent utility scans this directory, retrieves the ASN file, and loads the data into Polaris.

+

Receive an Enriched EDI order from the Check In Shelf-Ready materials workform - If your library sends enriched EDI orders, circulation staff can receive shipments of shelf-ready items, which updates the circulation status of the items so they can circulate and receives the linked purchase order line item segments at the same time. See Checking In Shelf-Ready Items.

+

Tip:
Serials subscriptions or standing orders are received in the Serials subsystem. See Checking In Serials.

+

See also:

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Split_receipt_of_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Split_receipt_of_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..545af825 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Split_receipt_of_a_purchase_order_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Split receipt of a purchase order line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Split Receipt of a Purchase Order Line Item Segment

+

If you are receiving from a purchase order that is not yet linked to an invoice, and the number of copies in the shipment is less than the total ordered for that segment, you can split the segment so that some copies are received but others remain on-order. You cannot split receipt of purchase order line item segment on a purchase order that is linked to an invoice.

+
    +
  1. Open the Purchase Order Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Right-click the segment and select Receive.
  4. +

    The Line Item Segment Receiving dialog box appears.

    +

    Note:
    If the purchase order line item is not linked to an invoice line item, you can enter a quantity received less than the quantity ordered.

    +
  5. Enter the quantity received.
  6. +
+

If you receive less than the total quantity of copies for the segment, the segment is split. One segment shows the quantity received and the other shows the quantity still on-order.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Undo_receipt_of_a_line_item_or_line_item_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Undo_receipt_of_a_line_item_or_line_item_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76bd8210 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Undo_receipt_of_a_line_item_or_line_item_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Undo receipt of a line item or line item segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Undo Receipt of a Line Item or Line Item Segment

+

Use Undo Receipt when you accidentally receive the title in Polaris, but you expect to receive it eventually. Undo receipt simply undoes the receipt action and leaves the line item or segment with the status it had before receiving. Any linked item records revert to a status of on-order and any holds remain.

+

You can undo receipt of line items or segments on purchase orders with any payment method, but the unreceive action has no effect on fund expenditures in prepaid purchase orders or those paid using a depository account fund because the amount is already expended. If you undo receipt of prepaid items, you must manually adjust the amount in the linked funds.

+

If you decide not to order the items, use the cancel process. When you cancel a line item or segment, the funds are disencumbered, on-order items deleted, and, if you will not be reordering with another supplier, hold requests will be cancelled. See Canceling Orders.

+

Tip:
For subscriptions or standing orders, you must undo check in from Serials. See Uncheck in issues or standing order parts.

+

To undo receipt of a purchase order line item or line item segment:

+
    +
  1. Select a received purchase order line item or line item segment from one of the following locations:
    • Find Tool results list - Select a line item.
    • List box - Select a line item.
    • Purchase Order workform, Line Items view - Select a line item.
    • Purchase Order Line Items workform - Select a segment.
  2. +

    Tip:
    Click on the Purchase Order Line Item workform’s main toolbar to unreceive a line item. Or click this button on the segment toolbar to unreceive a selected segment.

    +
  3. Right-click and select Undo Receipt from the context menu.
  4. +
+

The status of the line item or line item segment reverts to what it was before it was received. If it was claimed previously, the claiming process resumes after you undo receipt. Any holds on the items remain.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Use_Rapid_Receipt_to_receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Use_Rapid_Receipt_to_receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6812ef5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAreceive/Use_Rapid_Receipt_to_receive_line_items_from_an_invoice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + Use Rapid Receipt to receive line items from an invoice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Use Rapid Receipt to receive line items from an invoice

+

Important:
The purchase order contains the purchase order line item ID number that uniquely identifies each line item. If you want to use the Rapid Receipt function, ask your supplier to include this number for each line item on the packing slip that comes with the shipment. You can also enter the ISBN or title for each line item, but the matching may not be as exact. If the number of copies on the packing slip does not match the invoice line item, you can enter an alert for the invoice line item.

+

To receive purchase order line items from an invoice:

+
    +
  1. Open the Invoice workform.
  2. +
  3. Select Tools > Rapid Receipt or click on the Invoice workform.
  4. +
  5. The Rapid Receipt dialog box appears.
  6. +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    The purchase order line item ID is the number that is sent to the supplier on the printed purchase order. If your supplier prints this number on the packing slip or printed invoice that comes with the order, you can match up the purchase order line items exactly. Using the ISBN or the title may not identify the correct purchase order line item if the item was also ordered on another purchase order.

    +
  7. Type the purchase order line item ID number in the PO line ID box, type the ISBN or ISSN in the ISBN/ISSN box, or type the title in the Title box.
  8. +
  9. Press ENTER or click Find.
  10. +
      +
    • + If no single purchase order line item matches exactly, the Find Tool opens displaying the possible matching purchase order line items. Select a single line item. +
    • +
    • + If the purchase order line item cannot be invoiced because it was already copied to another invoice, or it has a status that prevents it from being received, a message appears. Open the purchase order line item and check the status or enter the number for the next purchase order line item. +
    • +
    +
  11. When a matching purchase order line item is found or selected, the invoice line item is added and the purchase order line item is updated to Received in one step. If there are hold requests for the title, and the Acquisitions profile Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, a message informs you that there are holds.
  12. +

    +

    +

    Tip:
    This is the discounted unit price, not the total price of the line item. The total price of the line item will appear when the invoice line item is created. You can make adjustments, if necessary, in the invoice line item.

    +
  13. When you have finished adding the line items, check the invoice line items, and make any adjustments to the amounts so that they match the amounts on your printed invoice. See Make manual adjustments to credits and discounts.
  14. +
  15. If you want to print workslips, see Print workslips for purchase order line items.
  16. +
+

Tips for resolving problems you may encounter:

+
    +
  • + Number of copies do not match - If a matching purchase order line item appears in the Rapid Receipt dialog box, but the number of copies does not match the number of copies on the printed invoice, you have the following choices: +
    • + Select the Alert check box, and enter an alert note on the Rapid Receipt dialog box. Then save the invoice line item. The alert icon will appear next to the invoice line item to indicate that there is a discrepancy that needs to be fixed. +
    • + Click Clear to clear the Rapid Receipt dialog box, open the purchase order line item, and receive the segments. See Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment. +
  • +
  • + Undoing receipt - If you have received an invoice line item in error using Rapid Receipt, you must link to the purchase order line item from the invoice line item, and undo receipt before deleting the invoice line item. If you delete the line item in the invoice, the purchase order line item remains received, but there will be no link back to it. See Undo receipt of a line item or line item segment. +
  • +
  • + Adjust amounts on the invoice - After you have added and received all the lines using Rapid Receipt, check the invoice to make sure that all amounts match the printed invoice from the supplier. See the following: +
  • +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_a_new_selection_list_line_by_copying_a_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_a_new_selection_list_line_by_copying_a_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9dd4a832 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_a_new_selection_list_line_by_copying_a_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a new selection list line by copying a line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add a New Selection List Line by Copying a Line Item

+

After you have added the first selection list line item, you can copy the data to create a new selection list line item. To create a new selection list line item by copying an existing one:

+

Tip:
Press CTRL+N to copy the segment data.

+
    +
  1. Open the Selection List Line Item workform.
  2. +
  3. Select File > New, or click the down arrow next to the file icon newicon.gif, and select one of the following options:
  4. +
+
    +
  • Copy Segment Data - Copies the distribution information (destination, collection, and fund), but not the bibliographic information. If the Retain material type when copying line item segment data profile is set to Yes, the material type is also copied to the new selection list line item. See Retain material type in copied line items.
  • +
  • Clear Workform - Creates a new blank selection list line item with no bibliographic information. If defaults are set in the Selection list line item defaults profile in Polaris Administration, the default supplier appears in the Supplier field. In addition, one selection list line item segment is created automatically with the default destination, collection, and fund. If defaults are not set in the profile, these fields are blank. See Specify defaults for selection list line items.
  • +
  • Copy Workform - Copies all the bibliographic and distribution information, including all segments, to the new selection list line item. If there is a linked bibliographic record, the link is also copied to the new selection list line item.
  • +
+

Important:
When you select Copy Workform and click Find to search for another bibliographic record, the search is based on the ISBN currently in the ISBN box on the new line item. To search for a new bibliographic record, select (highlight) the existing ISBN and type a new ISBN in the box before clicking Find.

+
    +
  1. Enter additional information to complete the new selection list line item. See Add titles to a selection list one at a time.
  2. +
  3. Select File > Save.
  4. +
+

The selection list line item is copied to the existing selection list, the decision is set to Consider, and the status date is set to the current date.

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_titles_to_a_selection_list_one_at_a_time.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_titles_to_a_selection_list_one_at_a_time.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..603a95b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Add_titles_to_a_selection_list_one_at_a_time.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + Add titles to a selection list one at a time + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Add titles to a selection list one at a time

+

You can add a title to a selection list whether or not the bibliographic record is in the Polaris database. If the bibliographic record is in the database, you link to it in the Selection List Line Item workform. If the bibliographic record is not in the Polaris database, you can search a remote database for the title or enter the title information manually.

+

To add titles to a selection list:

+

Note:
In the Polaris Administration profile Selection List Line Item Defaults, you can set up defaults for the supplier, destination, collection, and fund so they fill in automatically when you create a new selection list line item. See Specify defaults for selection list line items.

+

Tip:
You can also add titles in bulk from a record set to a selection list (see Bulk add titles to an existing selection list).

+
    +
  1. Create the selection list following the instructions in Creating Selection Lists, or open an existing selection list.
  2. +
  3. Click New on the Selection List workform line items toolbar, or press Ctrl+I.
  4. +

    The Selection List Line Item workform appears.

    +

    +

    +
  5. Do one of the following actions to enter the title information:
  6. +
      +
    1. Link to a bibliographic record in the Polaris database:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • If you know the ISBN for the title, type it in the ISBN/ISSN box, and press ENTER. If only one exact match for the ISBN is found in the Polaris database, the bibliographic information for that title is automatically filled in. The Find Tool opens if an exact match is not found, or if multiple records have the same ISBN.
    • +
    • +

      If you do not know the ISBN for the title, click Find and use the Find Tool to search for and select the title. If the bibliographic record contains multiple ISBNs in the 020 tag or 024 tag indicator 3, they appear in a drop list in the ISBN box. Select the appropriate ISBN from the list.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Other number box is used for the UPC or other identifier for non-print materials. The Other number box is filled in if the linked bibliographic record has a number in the 024$a, 028$a, or 037$a.

    +
      +
    1. Enter bibliographic information for a title not in the Polaris database:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    When you enter bibliographic information for a title that is not in the Polaris database, the bibliographic record is not saved in the database until the selection list line item is copied to a purchase order.

    +
      +
    • +

      Type the title, ISBN, and other bibliographic information on the Selection List Line Item workform - General view. If the title is for non-print material, type the UPC (or other identifier) in the Other number box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select View > Additional Description and enter the author, publisher, edition, publication date, LCCN, series title and number (if applicable), reviews or summaries, and notes on the Additional Description view. Type a number in the Miscellaneous identifier box to identify the library that requested the title, or to add another identifier.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    To do a Z39.50 search for a title from the Selection List Line Item workform, you must have the Acquisitions permission Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow and the Cataloging permission Bibliographic records: Create.

    +
      +
    1. Do a Z39.50 search of remote databases for a title not in the Polaris database, and copy it to the local database:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Click Find, and type the title, ISBN, author, subject or other information for the remote search in the Find Tool General tab.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click the Databases tab, and select the remote databases to search.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click Search, and select the bibliographic record in the search results. The title information appears in the Selection List Line Item workform, and a provisional bibliographic record is saved in the Polaris database.

      +
    • +
    +
  7. Select the material type in the Material type box.
  8. +
  9. If the unit price is not automatically filled in, type the price in the Unit price box.
  10. +
  11. To alert staff to this selection list line item, select the Alert box. When the selection list line item is copied to a purchase order, the Alert box is checked automatically on the Purchase Order Line Item workform if it is checked on the Selection List Line Item workform.
  12. +
  13. (Optional) To select a supplier for the selection list line item, click Find next to the Supplier box, and use the Find Tool to search for and select the supplier.
  14. +
  15. (Optional) To enter notes for a selection list line item, select View > Additional Description and type notes in the fields on the Additional Description view.
  16. +

    Note:
    If you enter a note for a selection list line item, the note appears in the Non-public note field in the Purchase Order Line Item workform when you copy the selection list line item to a purchase order. The note is also copied to the purchase order line item workslip. If item records are created when the purchase order is released, the notes are copied to the Non-public note box in the Item Record workform. When you do an exact search for a selection list line item using notes, type an asterisk (*) before the search term to indicate that something may come before it.

    +
  17. Enter the distribution data for the selection list line item. See Enter or change selection list line item segments.
  18. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Approve_multiple_selection_list_line_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Approve_multiple_selection_list_line_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d67b4a2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Approve_multiple_selection_list_line_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Approve multiple selection list line items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Approve Multiple Selection List Line Items

+

When you add a line item (title) to a selection list, the decision (status) that appears in the Decision column is Consider. If you have the Acquisitions permission Selection Lists: Approve/Reject, you can approve multiple selection list line items at once, or change the decision on individual selection list line items. Once selection list line items are approved, they can be copied to a purchase order.

+

To approve multiple selection list lines at once:

+
    +
  1. Open the Selection List workform.
  2. +
+

Tip: SelListApprbn.gif
Click to approve multiple lines.

+
    +
  1. Select Tools > Approve.
  2. +
+

The Approve Selection List dialog box appears.

+
    +
  1. Select the decision check box for each decision status to change to Approved.
  2. +
+

Example:
If you choose Consider, the Decision changes to Approved for all lines that previously had Consider in the Decision column.

+
    +
  1. Click OK to submit your settings.
  2. +
+

The decision is changed to Approved for all selection list lines that previously had a decision matching the one you chose.

+

Note:
To change the decision status for individual lines (titles), see Modify the decision on selection list line items.

+

Related Information

+

Copy selection list lines to a purchase order +

+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Bulk_add_titles_to_an_existing_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Bulk_add_titles_to_an_existing_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1786d1bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Bulk_add_titles_to_an_existing_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Bulk add titles to an existing selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Bulk add titles to an existing selection list

+

To add multiple titles at once to an existing selection list:

+

Note:
Provisional records cannot be bulk added to purchase orders or selection lists. If you import bibliographic records to use in Acquisitions, select Save as final. See Importing Records.

+

Tip:
Select Type in the Limit by box and Bibliographic in the Value box to search for bibliographic record sets.

+
    +
  1. Select Cataloging > Record Sets from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and use the Find Tool to search for and select the bibliographic record set.
  2. +

    The Bibliographic Record set workform opens.

    +
  3. Select Tools > Add all records to Existing Selection List, or select specific records in the list, and select Tools > Add selected records to Existing Selection List.
  4. +
  5. Tip:
    You can also search for the record set, select it in the Find Tool results, right-click and select Add to Selection List > Existing from the context menu.
  6. +
  7. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the existing selection list.
  8. +

    The Add to Existing Selection List dialog box appears.

    +
  9. Important:
    If the Polaris Administration Acquisitions profile Filter branches in line item segments profile is set to Yes, and the 970 has a subfield $l (branch abbreviation) with the same parent library as the Library on the selection list, the 970 tag is used to create a segment on the selection list line item. If the profile is set to Yes and the branch abbreviation in a 970 tag does not have the same parent library as the Library on the selection list, it will not be used to create a segment on the selection list.
  10. +

    + +

    +
  11. If the Line Default Data fields are not complete, enter the information. See Create a selection list by bulk adding titles.
  12. +
+

Related Information

+ +
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Check_a_selection_list_for_duplicates_and_print_a_report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Check_a_selection_list_for_duplicates_and_print_a_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac3a6998 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Check_a_selection_list_for_duplicates_and_print_a_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Check a selection list for duplicates and print a report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Check a Selection List for Duplicates and Print a Report

+

You can check the entire selection list for duplicate line items or segments, or you can check an individual line item for duplicate segments. After checking for duplicates, you can print the Selection List Duplicates from the Selection List workform. To check for duplicate selection list line items or segments and print the report:

+
    +
  1. Open the Selection List workform.
  2. +
  3. Do one of the following steps:
    • To check all selection list line items for duplicates, select Tools > Check Duplicates, click on the top toolbar, or press Ctrl+U.
    • To check a single selection list line item for duplicates, select the line item in the list, right-click and select Check Duplicates on the context menu, or click on the toolbar directly above the list of selection list line items.
  4. +

    A message lists any duplicates that were found.

    +
  5. If the duplicates message appears, click OK to print the report or click Cancel to close the message box without printing the report.
  6. +

    If you click OK, the Selection List Duplicates report appears in Adobe Reader. The report lists duplicate segments (the same title for the same destination, and collection) within a selection list or on another selection list. It also shows duplicate line items (titles) and segments on pending purchase orders, and duplicate bibliographic records.

    +
  7. To print the Selection List Duplicates report, select File > Print on the Adobe Reader toolbar.
  8. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Close_or_reopen_a_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Close_or_reopen_a_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d894f99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Close_or_reopen_a_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Close or reopen a selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Close or Reopen a Selection List

+

If you have the permission to modify selection lists, you can change the selection list’s status from Open to Closed or Closed to Open. When you close a selection list, no selection list line items can be added or modified, the selection list cannot be merged with another selection list, and it cannot be copied to a purchase order.

+

You might want to close a selection list when you are finished adding all the titles to it, and you do not want other selectors to add to the selection list. Then, when you are ready to copy the titles to a purchase order, you could change the status back to Open.

+

Tip:
To find selection lists with a certain status, select Status in the Limit by box on the Find Tool and then select Open or Closed in the Value box.

+

To change a selection list’s status:

+
    +
  1. Open the Selection List workform.
  2. +
  3. On the Selection List workform, select Closed or Open in the Status box.
  4. +
  5. Save the selection list.
  6. +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + +
Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + + + + + + +
 Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_a_PO.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_a_PO.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..75e4b7a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_a_PO.htm @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a single selection list line to a PO + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+
+

Copy a single selection list line to a PO

+

You can copy a single selection list line item from the Selection List Line Item workform or from the Find Tool.

+

To copy a selection list line to a purchase order.

+

Important:
The selection list line must contain a unit price and fund data before it can be copied to a purchase order. See Add titles to a selection list one at a time.

+
  • Use the Find Tool to search for a selection list line item for the title to copy to the purchase order.
  • +

    The selection list line item appears in the Find Tool results list.

    +

    Do one of the following steps:

    +
      +
    • + Right-click the selection list line item in the Find Tool results list, and select Copy To from the context menu. +
    • +
    • + Double-click the selection list line item in the Find Tool results list to open the selection list line item in the Selection List Line Item workform, and select Tools > Copy to Purchase Order from the menu. +
    • +
    +

    The Copy Lines To dialog box appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    Choose one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • + To copy the line to a new purchase order, select the New check box.
    • +
    • + To copy the line to an existing purchase order, click Find to search for and select the purchase order, or type the purchase order’s number or name in the Destination box. +
    • +
    +
  • Click OK on the Copy Lines To dialog box.
  • +
      +
    • + If you are copying to an existing purchase order, skip the next step. +
    • +
    • + If you are copying to a new purchase order, the New Purchase Order dialog box appears. Go to the next step. +
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
  • To copy the selection list line to a new purchase order, type a number and suffix for the purchase order in the PO number and Suffix boxes. You can also select a different owner, order type, payment type, and supplier. Then, click OK.
  • +

    A message asks you to confirm that you want to copy the selection list line.

    +
  • Click OK to confirm that you want to copy the selection list line.
  • +

    Polaris performs duplicate detection against other selection lists and other purchase orders.

    +
      +
    • + If there are no duplicates, the selection list line is copied to the purchase order you specified. +
    • +
    • + If there are duplicate lines in another selection list or purchase order, a message asks if you want to print the duplicates report. +
    • +
    +
  • If a message informs you that a duplicate was found, and you want to print the report, click Yes.
  • +

    The Selection List Duplicates report appears in Adobe Reader. For more information on the Selection List Duplicates Report, see Check a selection list for duplicates and print a report.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Copying a manually-entered selection list line item - If the selection list line item was created manually by typing the information in the General and Additional Description views of the Selection List Line Item workform, it is not linked to a bibliographic record. However, when you copy the selection list line item to a purchase order, a brief bibliographic record is created. A message asks if you want to display the title in the PAC. Click Yes to allow the bibliographic record to display in the PAC, or No if you do not want the record to display.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can select No and later opt to display the records in the PAC when you release the purchase order.

    +
      +
    • +

      Copying a selection list line item with a title from a Z39.50 search - If you added a line item’s bibliographic information by searching a remote database for the title, the linked bibliographic record has a status of Provisional. When the selection list line item is copied to a purchase order, the status of the linked bibliographic record changes to Final.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Notes in the selection list line item - If there are notes in the Note box on the Additional Description view of the Selection List Line Item workform, they are copied to the Non-public notes box on the Purchase Order Line Item workform.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_another_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_another_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c2e3e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_a_single_selection_list_line_to_another_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a single selection list line to another selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Single Selection List Line to Another Selection List

    +

    You can copy a single selection list line to another selection list from the Find Tool or from the Selection List Line Item workform. To copy a single selection list line item to an existing selection list:

    +
      +
    1. Find the selection list line item you want to copy to another selection list:
    2. +
    +

    The selection list line item appears in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the selection list line item displayed in the Find Tool results list by one of these methods:
      • Right-click the selection list line item, and select Copy To > Selection List from the context menu.
      • Double-click the selection list line item to open the Selection List Line Item workform, and select Tools > Copy to Selection List, or click .
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for the selection list to which you want to copy the selection list line item.
    2. +
    +

    The selection list appears in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the selection list in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    +

    The selection list line item is copied to the selection list you chose.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_a_purchase_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_a_purchase_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2a0f859 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_a_purchase_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy selection list lines to a purchase order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy selection list lines to a purchase order

    +

    You can select specific line items to copy or you can select line items by their decision status. Even if a selection list line item was previously copied to a purchase order and has the status Processed, it can still be copied to another purchase order. The processed date is updated each time a selection list line item is copied to a purchase order.

    +

    To copy one or more selection list lines to a purchase order:

    +

    Important:
    The selection list line must contain a unit price, location, and fund data before it can be copied to a purchase order.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List workform.
    2. +

      + +

      +
    3. Use one of the following methods to copy the selection list line items:
    4. +

      Tip:
      To keep your place in the list and retain your sort order, select Edit > Lock List View or click . Click to refresh the list.

      +
        +
      • +

        To copy all lines or all lines with a specific decision status (for example, all approved selection list lines), select Tools > Copy to Purchase Order from the Selection List menu bar, click on the top toolbar, or press Ctrl+Y.

        +
      • +
      +

      The Copy To Purchase Order dialog box appears.

      +

      +

      +
    5. Click OK to copy all the selection list line items. To exclude selection list line items that have a certain decision status, uncheck the decision box.
    6. +
        +
      • +

        To copy specific lines, select the lines listed in the Selection List workform, right-click, and select Copy to Purchase Order from the context menu, or click above the line items list.

        +
      • +
      +

      The Copy Lines To dialog box appears.

      + +

      Note:
      Selection list line items with a status of Rejected are not copied to a purchase order. To copy rejected selection list line items, you can first change their decision status. See Modify the decision on selection list line items.

      +
    7. Choose one of the following options:
    8. +
        +
      • +

        To copy the lines to a new purchase order, select the New check box.

        +
      • +
      • +

        To copy the lines to an existing purchase order, click Find to search for and select the purchase order, or type the purchase order’s number or name in the Destination box.

        +
      • +
      +
    9. Click OK on the Copy Lines To dialog box.
    10. +
        +
      • +

        If you are copying the selection list lines to an existing purchase order, a confirmation message appears. Click OK, and the lines are copied to the purchase order you selected. You can skip the next step.

        +
      • +
      • +

        If you are copying to a new purchase order, the New Purchase Order dialog box appears.

        +
      • +
      + +

      Tip:
      If the Alert box is checked on a selection list line item, the Alert box is checked on the corresponding purchase order line item. If there are notes in a selection list line item, they are copied to the Non-public note field in the purchase order line item.

      +
    11. If the New Purchase Order dialog box appears, type the purchase order number and suffix, and click Find to search for and select the supplier. You can also select a different owner, order type and payment method. Then, click OK on the New Purchase Order dialog box.
    12. +
    13. The line items are copied to the purchase order unless the line item has a status of Rejected. All the information in each selection list line item is copied to the corresponding purchase order line item.
    14. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Copying a manually-entered selection list line item - If you created the selection list line item by typing the information in the Selection List Line Item workform, it is not linked to a bibliographic record. When you copy the selection list line item to a purchase order, a brief bibliographic record is created and a message asks if you want any records created during the copy process to display in the PAC. Click Yes to allow the brief bibliographic record to display in the PAC, or No if you do not want the record to display. You can select No and later opt to display the records in the PAC when you release the purchase order.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copying a selection list line item with a title from a Z39.50 search - If you added a line item’s bibliographic information by searching a remote database for the title, the linked bibliographic record has a status of Provisional. When the selection list line item is copied to a purchase order, the status of the linked bibliographic record changes to Final.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Duplicate selection list line items - Duplicate detection runs automatically when you copy selection list lines to a purchase order. If a duplicate message appears, and you want to print the duplicate report, click Yes. See Check a selection list for duplicates and print a report.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Notes in the selection list line item - If there are notes in the Note box on the Additional Description view of the Selection List Line Item workform, they are copied to the Non-public notes box on the Purchase Order Line Item workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Selection list line item segment funds and purchase order payment method - If the selection list line item segments funds have a fund type of Deposit Account, the payment method on the purchase order is Depository Agreement. If the selection list line item segments have a fund type of Regular or Donation, the payment method on the purchase order is Purchase. If the selection list line segments have a mixture of Deposit Account, and Regular or Donation fund types, an error message appears.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_another_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_another_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5f464cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copy_selection_list_lines_to_another_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy selection list lines to another selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy Selection List Lines to Another Selection List

    +

    You can copy one or more selection list lines with any status to another existing selection list. When a selection list line item is copied to another selection list, the status changes back to Consider. To copy one or more selection list lines to another selection list:

    +

    Tip:
    You can also search for a specific selection list line item from the Find Tool, and copy it to another selection list.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List workform containing the title or titles that you want to copy to another selection list.
    2. +
    3. Do one of the following tasks:
      • To copy all the selection list line items, select Tools > Copy to Selection List from the workform menu, click on the top toolbar, or press Ctrl+L.
    4. +
    +

    The Copy To Selection List dialog box appears with all the decision statuses selected. Click OK to copy all the selection list line items. To exclude selection list line items that have a certain decision status, uncheck the appropriate decision box.

    +
    +
      +
    • To copy specific selection list line items, highlight them in the list, right-click, and select Copy lines to selection list from the context menu, or click on the toolbar directly above the list.
    • +
    +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with Selection List in the Object box, Status in the Limit by box, and a status of Open. The results are limited by a status of open because you can copy selection list line items to an open selection list.

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the destination selection list.
    2. +
    +

    The lines are copied to the selection list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copying_Selection_List_Lines.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copying_Selection_List_Lines.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7efa9fb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Copying_Selection_List_Lines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Copying Selection List Lines + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copying Selection List Lines

    +

    You can copy selection list lines to another selection list or to a purchase order from the Selection List workform, the Selection List Line Item workform, or the Find Tool results list.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_by_copying_a_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_by_copying_a_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d874409c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_by_copying_a_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new selection list by copying a selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Selection List by Copying a Selection List

    +

    To create a new selection list by copying an existing selection list:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New on the Selection List workform menu.
    4. +
    +

    The New Selection List dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options on the New Selection List dialog box.
      • Copy workform - This option copies the workform header information, the selection list name, the creator, and the library. The selection list line items are not copied to the new selection list.
      • Clear workform - All the fields are cleared in the workform, and a new blank Selection List workform appears.
    2. +
    3. Type a name for the new selection list.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Rename a selection list - You can rename an existing selection list and keep all the selection list line items. See Rename a selection list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8fd1d696 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_new_selection_list_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new selection list from the Polaris Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Selection List from the Polaris Shortcut Bar

    +

    To create a new selection list from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris Shortcut Bar select File > New.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. In the Objects box select Selection List.
    2. +
    +

    The Selection List workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the selection list in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) To enter a description for the selection list, type it in the Description box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can search for the selection list by description. When you are searching for words in the description, use a wildcard character * both before and after the search term.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the new selection list.
    2. +
    +

    The selection list is saved with the name you typed in the Name box. You can use this name to search for the selection list.

    +
      +
    1. Add titles to the selection list using one of the following methods:
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_selection_list_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_selection_list_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bed4848 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Create_a_selection_list_by_bulk_adding_titles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a selection list by bulk adding titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Selection List by Bulk-Adding Titles

    +

    To bulk-add titles from a record set to a selection list, the bibliographic records must include 970 tags. For more information, see The Bulk Add Process.

    +

    To create a selection list from a bibliographic record set:

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris Shortcut Bar select Cataloging > Record Sets.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +

    Tip:
    To focus the search, select Type in the Limit by box and Bibliographic in the Value box.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the bibliographic record set that contains the titles to bulk add.
    2. +
    +

    The bibliographic record set appears in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Add the records in the record set to the new selection list using one of the following methods:
      • Select the record set in the Find Tool results, right-click and select Add to Selection List > New from the context menu.
      • Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform, and select Tools > Add all records to New Selection List. Or, select records in the list, and choose Tools > Add selected records to New Selection List.
    2. +
    +

    The Add to New Selection List dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the selection list in the List name box.
    2. +
    3. Select a library in the Library box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    If the Polaris Administration Acquisitions profile Filter branches in line item segments profile is set to Yes, and the 970 has a subfield $l (branch abbreviation) with the same parent library as the Library on the selection list, the 970 tag is used to create a segment on the selection list line item. If the profile is set to Yes and the branch abbreviation in a 970 tag does not have the same parent library as the Library on the selection list, it will not be used to create a segment on the selection list.

    +

    Tip:
    For information on defaults for selection lists, see Set bulk add to use default data in selection lists. For more information about the bulk add process, see The Bulk Add Process.

    +
      +
    1. Change or set the following default values:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Quantity
    • +
    • Material type
    • +
    • Destination
    • +
    • Collection
    • +
    • Fund
    • +
    • Supplier
    • +

      Click Find to use the Find Tool to search for and select the supplier.

      +
    +
      +
    1. To change the error report name, type a new file path and name in the File name box, or click Browse and select the location. The report name has a date/time stamp.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The default directory for the file is set in Polaris Administration. See Setting the Acquisitions/Serials Default Directory.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to start the bulk add process.
    2. +
    +

    When the processing is complete a dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to acknowledge the message that the processing completed successfully.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    The message also shows the location of the error report. Check the error report each time you bulk add records to a selection list. You can print the error report and refer to it while editing the selection list.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for the selection list created using bulk add, and double-click the selection list in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    +

    The selection list appears in the Selection List workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Creating_Selection_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Creating_Selection_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..82cb8d7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Creating_Selection_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Selection Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Selection Lists

    +

    You can create a new selection list by typing information in the Selection List workform and then adding titles individually, or by bulk adding titles from bibliographic record sets. You can also copy lines from an existing selection list to create a new selection list.

    +

    To help determine if additional copies of a title are needed for certain branches, you can review the title’s usage statistics using one of the following methods:

    +
      +
    • Search for the bibliographic record with the Find Tool, select it in the results list, right-click and select Preview from the context menu.
    • +
    • Open the bibliographic record set that contains the record, right-click, and select Preview from the context menu.
    • +
    • Open the bibliographic record in the Bibliographic Record workform, and select Tools > Show Usage Statistics.
    • +
    +

    The window displays brief bibliographic information about the selected record, circulation statistics, popularity ranking, and linked item records by branch and collection. To see more of any part of the window, drag the panel edges.

    +

    The popularity ranking is determined by the linked item records’ circulation and holds activity within the last four months:

    +
      +
    • If no linked item records were circulated or held in the last four months, the popularity is Low.
    • +
    • If at least one linked item was circulated or held within the last four months, the popularity ranking is Medium.
    • +
    • If one or more linked item records were circulated and one or more linked item records were held, the popularity ranking is High.
    • +
    +

    You can also generate circulation reports to help analyze where your library should focus its collection development. For example, the Turnover reports show how heavily a collection is used in relation to its size. See Circulation Reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a525b2df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Selection List

    +

    To delete a selection list:

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Delete or click Delete on the Selection List workform menu.
    2. +
    3. Open the selection list you want to delete.
    4. +

      A message tells you that this deletes the selection list and all line items.

      +
    5. Click Yes to continue.
    6. +

      Messages may appear if the selection list is linked to any purchase orders, or if any of the line items have a status of Approved.

      +
    7. If either message appears, click OK to continue deleting the selection list.
    8. +

      The selection list and all selection list line items are deleted.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list_line_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list_line_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8d23aa15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Delete_a_selection_list_line_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a selection list line item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Selection List Line Item

    +

    You can delete selection list line items from the Find Tool, the Selection List Line Item workform, or the Selection List workform. To delete selection list line items:

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following:
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    When you search for selection lists, you can limit the search by status. For example, you could search for all selection list line items with a status of Rejected.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • From the Find Tool, search for the selection list line items, select them in the list, right-click, and select Delete from the context menu.
    • +
    • From the Selection List workform, select the line items, right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
    • +
    • From the Selection List Line Item workform, select File > Delete to delete the selection list line item.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. If a message tells you a line item is linked to a purchase order line item, click Yes to continue.
    2. +
    +

    The selection list line item or items are deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Deleting_Selection_Lists_or_Selection_List_Lines.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Deleting_Selection_Lists_or_Selection_List_Lines.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c813ed72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Deleting_Selection_Lists_or_Selection_List_Lines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Deleting Selection Lists or Selection List Lines + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting Selection Lists or Selection List Lines

    +

    When you no longer need a selection list, and you have the library-level permission Selection lists: Delete, you can delete an entire selection list or specific line items. If you do not have this library-level permission, you cannot delete selection lists or selection list line items.

    +

    A separate permission Selection list line item segments: Create, modify, delete is granted at the branch level and controls which branches’ selection list line item segments you can create, modify, or delete. If you have the Selection list line item segments: Create, modify, delete permission for the same branch as the branch in the Destination box on the selection list line item segment, you can delete the segment.

    +

    For more information on these permissions, see Select Material Permissions.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Enter_or_change_selection_list_line_item_segments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Enter_or_change_selection_list_line_item_segments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7bb43d12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Enter_or_change_selection_list_line_item_segments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter or change selection list line item segments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter or change selection list line item segments

    +

    Note:
    You must have permission to add or modify the selection list line item segment data for the destination branch. See Select Material Permissions for the permissions required to use selection lists and selection list line item segments.

    +

    To enter or change selection list line item segments:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List Line Item workform.
    2. +
    3. Click in the first blank selection list line item segment.
    4. +

      Note:
      If defaults are set in the Polaris Administration profile Selection List Line Item Defaults, distribution information appears as soon as you add a selection list line item.

      +
    5. Type the number of copies of the title for the destination and collection in the Quantity box.
    6. +
    7. Select the branch in the Destination box.
    8. +
    9. Select the collection in the Collection box.
    10. +
    11. Select the fund in the Fund box.
    12. +

      Tip:
      Multiple staff members can simultaneously enter or change segment data in the same selection list line item segment. The changes are saved in the order in which they are made.

      +
    13. Click in the next segment line to add the next segment’s data.
    14. +
    15. Select File > Save to save the record.
    16. +
    +

    Administration Settings That Affect Selection List Lines

    +

    The following Polaris Administration Acquisitions/Serials profiles control the display of data in selection list line items:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Merge_selection_lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Merge_selection_lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea49a7d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Merge_selection_lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Merge selection lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Merge Selection Lists

    +

    When you merge selection lists, you copy all the titles from one selection list to another, and then delete the original selection list. The two selection lists must belong to the same library to be merged into one.

    +

    To merge one selection list into another and delete the original selection list:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Merge from the menu bar.
    4. +
    +

    The Merge Selection Lists dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find and use the Find Tool to search for and select the destination selection list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The selection lists must belong to the same library. If you choose a selection list that belongs to a different library, an error message appears.

    +

    The selection list you searched for appears in the Destination box.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to accept the destination selection list.
    2. +
    +

    A confirmation message appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to confirm that you want to merge the selection lists.
    2. +
    +

    All information is retained in the selection list line items, and they are moved to the destination selection list. The selection list you merged is deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Modify_the_decision_on_selection_list_line_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Modify_the_decision_on_selection_list_line_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d01831f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Modify_the_decision_on_selection_list_line_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Modify the decision on selection list line items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify the decision on selection list line items

    +

    To change the decision for individual or multiple lines on a selection list:

    +

    Note:
    You can also change a single selection list line item’s decision status from the Selection List Line Item workform by selecting Tools > Modify decision.

    +

    Tip:
    To keep your place in the list and retain your sort order, select Edit > Lock List View or click locklisticon.gif. When you update line items with the list view locked, the changes do not appear in the list view until you uncheck the Lock List View option or refresh the list. List view locked is displayed in the status bar when this option is on.
    Click refreslstvwbtn.gif to refresh the list. After you refresh, your updates to the line items appear, and the list view is resorted.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the line items for which you want to modify the decision.
    4. +
    5. Right-click and select Modify Decision from the context menu, or click on the item toolbar above the line item list.
    6. +

      A message asks if you want to modify the decision.

      +
    7. Click OK to confirm that you want to modify the decision.
    8. +

      The Modify Decision dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    9. Select the new decision for the selection list line items, and click OK.
    10. +

      Note:
      You cannot change the decision status of a Processed selection list line item, but you can copy it to another existing selection list, which automatically changes its status back to Consider.

      +
    11. The decision is changed for the line item or items you selected.
    12. +
    +

    Note
    You can also approve multiple selection list line items at once. See Approve Multiple Selection List Line Items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Rename_a_selection_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Rename_a_selection_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0bc5abe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Rename_a_selection_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Rename a selection list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Rename a Selection List

    +

    If you have the permission to modify selection lists, you can change the name of an existing selection list.

    +

    To rename a selection list:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for the selection list you want to rename.
    2. +

      The selection list appears in the Find Tool results.

      +
    3. Right-click the selection list in the Find Tool results list, and select Rename on the context menu.
    4. +

      The Rename a selection list dialog box appears.

      +
    5. Type a new name for the selection list in the Name box, and click OK.
    6. +

      The selection list is saved with the new name.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Selection_List_Fund_Allocations_Report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Selection_List_Fund_Allocations_Report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7c377e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Selection_List_Fund_Allocations_Report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Selection List Fund Allocations Report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Selection List Fund Allocations Report

    +

    You can use the Selection List Fund Allocations Report, available from the Selection List workform, to see the funds that are allocated to pay for the selected titles. The Selection List Fund Allocations Report is divided into two sections:

    +
      +
    • +

      Summary Fund Allocations - The top summary section lists the fund name, alternative name, and fiscal year for each fund allocated on the selection list. It also lists the total amount for all line items on this selection list that use this fund, and a total for all the funds. If one or more selection list line item segments are not linked to a fund, the total for these segments appears under None for the fund.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Detailed Fund Allocations - This section groups all line items under the fund name that is allocated to pay for them. The list is sorted alphabetically by title under each fund and displays the title, ISBN, author, material type, miscellaneous identifier, quantity, and amount for each line item. If more than one fund is associated with a selection list line item, the title appears in the details section under each of the funds with the specific amount allocated for that fund.

      +
    • +
    +

    To print the Selection List Fund Allocations report:

    +

    Tip:
    You can also right-click a selection list in the Find Tool results list, and select Print > Selection List Fund Allocations from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Selection List workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Print or click Print on the Selection List workform menu, and select Selection List Fund Allocations.
    4. +
    +

    The Selection List Fund Allocations Report appears in Adobe Reader.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print in Adobe Reader to print the report.
    2. +
    +

    See also:

    +

    Print the Selection List Fund Allocations Report +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Setting_Up_Selection_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Setting_Up_Selection_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4146fda9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAselections/Setting_Up_Selection_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Selection Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Selection Lists

    +

    Selection lists in Polaris Acquisitions are used to assemble a list of titles that the library may purchase at a later date. Titles can be added to a selection list one at a time, or they can be bulk added from a bibliographic record set. After the appropriate selector reviews the titles, the selection list line items can be given a status of Approved, Consider, Desiderata, or Rejected.

    +

    You can use selection lists to approve or reject individual titles (lines), check duplicates, merge one selection list into another, and copy selection list lines to a purchase order or another selection list. You can rename an open selection list, change a selection list’s status to open or closed, and print the selection list fund allocations.

    +

    Your Polaris Administrator assigns selection list permissions according to your library’s workflow. For example, some selectors may require full control over selection lists. These selectors would need the following permissions: Selection Lists: Access, Approve, Create, Delete, Modify. Other selectors may have the permission to see the selection lists, but change only the selection list line item segments for certain destination branches. In this case, the selectors would need the permission Selection List Line Item Segments: Create, modify, delete for each branch for which they select materials. For more information, see Acquisitions Workflow Permissions.

    +

    In addition to setting up permissions for selection lists, your Polaris administrator can use the following Acquisitions/Serials profiles and parameters to set up defaults for selection list line items and limit the display of funds in selection list line item segments:

    +
      +
    • Selection list line item defaults - This profile specifies a default destination, collection, fund, and supplier for selection list line items. When you add a line item, the default information will be used unless you change it. See Specify defaults for selection list line items.
    • +
    • Acq fund droplist display - This profile can be set to display only the branch’s funds, all funds associated with the parent library, or specific branches’ funds in selection list line item segments. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions.
    • +
    • Filter branches in line item segments - If this profile is set to Yes, it limits the destination branches that display in line item segments for selection lists and the 970 location (branch) tags that are used to create selection lists during the bulk add process. See Filter destination branch lists by parent library.
    • +
    • Bulk add to SL: Replace invalid fields with default data - This parameter specifies defaults to use when bulk adding records to selection lists. See Set bulk add to use default data in selection lists. +
    • +
    • Bulk add to PO/SL: Mark 970 data as processed parameter - This parameter marks processed tags in bibliographic records so they are not used again. See Mark 970 data as processed after bulk adding titles.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Record_Levels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Record_Levels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83b1ec52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Record_Levels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Record Levels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Record Levels

    +

    Selection List, Purchase Order, and Invoice workforms contain information at the following levels: Header, Line Item and Segment.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Header Information

    +

    The General view of the Selection List, Purchase Order, and Invoice workforms contain header information that relates to the record as a whole and applies to all line items in the record. For example, the supplier’s name on a purchase order is at the header level because it is the same supplier for all the line items on the purchase order. You can specify charges at the purchase order or invoice header level that apply to the whole order, such as shipping charges.

    +

    Line Items List

    +

    The General view of the Selection List workform and the Line Items view of the Purchase Order and Invoice workforms have a list view where you can see and work with all the line items or titles in that record. Bibliographic information is at the line item level because it applies to all copies of the title.

    +

    Individual Line Items and Segments

    +

    When you select an individual line item on the Selection List, Purchase Order, or Invoice workform, the Line Item workform opens. This workform is composed of segments that contain the destination, collection, quantity, and fund for specific copies of the title.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Setup_Checklist.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Setup_Checklist.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e556d2b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Setup_Checklist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Setup Checklist + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Setup Checklist

    +

    Before you order materials using Polaris Acquisitions, do the following setup tasks:

    +
      +
    • Make sure staff have the required permissions to do tasks in Acquisitions, including the permission to modify funds if they over-expend or over-encumber funds. They may also need Cataloging permissions to do certain tasks. See Acquisitions Workflow Permissions.
    • +
    • Set up Acquisitions profiles and parameters in Polaris Administration. See Acquisitions Administration Overview.
    • +
    • Set up supplier records in Acquisitions. See Setting Up Supplier Records.
    • +
    • Set up fiscal years and funds in Acquisitions. See Setting Up the Acquisitions Budget.
    • +
    • (Optional) Set up the purchase order templates in Acquisitions and on-order bibliographic and item templates in Cataloging. See Setting Up Templates for Acquisitions.
    • +
    • (Optional) Set up profiles with your suppliers to use their Web-based selection tools.
    • +
    • (Optional) Set up importing profiles in Cataloging to import bibliographic records from your suppliers and create record sets. Polaris includes read-only import profiles specifically designed for acquisitions. These profiles cannot be changed, but they can be copied and renamed. The Acq Bibs import profile is designed to retain 970 tags when the incoming records are rejected as duplicates, and the Enriched EDI Orders import profile is designed to update on-order items to shelf-ready items. See Polaris Read-Only Import Profiles.
    • +
    • (Optional) If you do EDI ordering, set up EDI ordering with your suppliers. See Setting Up EDI Ordering.
    • +
    • (Optional) If you use Polaris Titles to Go, set up Titles to Go. See Setting Up Titles to Go.
    • +
    • (Optional) If you order from suppliers who use a currency other than US dollars, establish the foreign currency in Polaris. See Administering Foreign Currencies.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Workflows.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Workflows.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f517119 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Acquisitions_Workflows.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Workflows + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Workflows, Record Types and Automatic Processes

    +

    This section provides an overview of the workflows, record types, and automatic processes used in Polaris Acquisitions.

    +

    Acquisitions Workflows

    +

    Your library can choose from a variety of ordering, receiving, and invoicing workflows to accomplish tasks in Acquisitions.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Acquisitions Record Types

    +

    In Polaris Acquisitions, various records store information about a library’s budgeting, ordering, and invoicing activities. Some Acquisitions records are also linked to Cataloging or Serials records. Acquisitions records, like other Polaris records, are displayed in workforms.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Fiscal Year Records

    +

    Fiscal year records track and manage funds for a specific period of time. You can create an unlimited number of fiscal year records, and they can have overlapping durations. Each fiscal year record can link to an unlimited number of fund records.

    +

    When you set up the acquisitions budget, you start with a fiscal year record. You name the record, give it a start and end date, select the owner of the record, and include any notes. Then create the fund records that are linked to the fiscal year record. See Setting Up Fiscal Years.

    +

    +

    +

    Fund Records

    +

    Fund records track the purchase of library materials and services. You can set up funds for budget allocations, gifts, grants, donations, deposit accounts, and endowments. From the fund workform or from a fund record displayed in the Find Tool results list, you can go directly to purchase orders or invoices that are linked to this fund, whether the fund is used to pay for header charges or to pay for copies of the title. See Managing Funds.

    +

    +

    +

    Supplier Records

    +

    Supplier records contain information about suppliers’ accounts with your library, including the supplier’s name, alternative name, contact person, account information, Standard Address Number (SAN), currency code, telephone numbers, addresses, instructions, electronic ordering information, claiming information, and notes. If the supplier accepts orders via Electronic Data Interchange (EDI), and your library wants to send orders electronically, the EDI ordering information is set up in the Supplier record. Each purchase order and invoice is linked to a supplier record, except Miscellaneous invoices, which do not require a linked supplier record. See Setting Up Supplier Records.

    +

    Selection List Records

    +

    Selection lists contain titles that a staff member (requestor) assembles as suggested purchases. The titles are then reviewed and approved or rejected by the appropriate individual (selector). Selection list line items can be copied from one selection list to another. Once approved, the titles can be copied to a purchase order. See Setting Up Selection Lists.

    +

    Selection List Line Item Records

    +

    Selection list line item records include bibliographic and distribution information for each title on a selection list. The distribution information is listed in individual line item segments that show the quantity, destination, collection, and fund for the copies of the title.

    +

    Purchase Order Records

    +

    Purchase order records contain instructions, cumulative totals, header charges, and notes as well as line items for each title ordered. When you create a purchase order, you can select a template that includes the order type, payment method, claim information, discount, library name, supplier, and distribution information. See Ordering.

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item Records

    +

    Purchase order line item records contain bibliographic, claiming, and distribution information for the title being ordered. The distribution information is in segments that specify the quantity, destination, collection, and fund for the title. The segment data can be copied to a new line. Line items can be copied to invoices and to other purchase orders.

    +

    Invoice Records

    +

    Invoice records contain itemized lists of the materials shipped to the library. An invoice may also include header charges for services provided by the supplier, such as cataloging and shipping, as well as any credits from the supplier. The EDI file name appears if the invoice was sent electronically. See Creating Invoices.

    +

    Invoice Line Item Records

    +

    Invoice line item records contain information about specific titles. Within each invoice line item are segments that specify the quantity, destination, collection, fund, fiscal year, payment status, and charges related to the copies of the title.

    +

    Claim Records

    +

    When an item is not received as expected, you can claim the item and a claim record is created automatically. You can use the Claim workform to specify why the item was claimed, to enter a response from the supplier, or to view an item’s claim history. See Claiming.

    +

    Automatic Processing of Polaris Records

    +

    The Polaris Acquisitions menu also includes options for automatic processing of records:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Create_a_new_Acquisitions_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Create_a_new_Acquisitions_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..879b7165 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Create_a_new_Acquisitions_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new Acquisitions record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Acquisitions Record

    +

    To create a new Polaris Acquisitions record:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Select Acquisitions Objects to limit the list by Acquisitions record types.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following Acquisitions record types:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Fiscal Year +
    • +
    • Fund +
    • +
    • Invoice +
    • +
    • Purchase Order +
    • +
    • Selection List +
    • +
    • Supplier Record +
    • +
    +

    If there are existing templates that can be used for the record type, the templates are displayed in the New dialog box. For Acquisitions records, only purchase orders have templates.

    +
      +
    1. To use a template to create the new record, if appropriate, select Existing Template, and select a template from the list.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are creating multiple purchase orders using the same template, select the template, and select the Make session default box. When you create the next purchase order, the template is automatically selected.

    +

    The appropriate workform appears for the record you want to create.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Find_acquisitions_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Find_acquisitions_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f89db893 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Find_acquisitions_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Find acquisitions records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Acquisitions Records

    +

    To find an existing Acquisitions record:

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris Shortcut bar select Acquisitions.
    2. +
    +

    The Acquisitions menu appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the record type in the menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with the record type selected in the Object box.

    +

    Note:
    The Find Tool does not appear when you select Claim Alert List, or any EDI Services option (Check In Shelf-Ready Materials, Process EDI Invoices, Receive ASN Shipments) because they are tools for processing records.

    +
      +
    1. Select what you want to search by from the list in the Searchby box.
    2. +
    3. To focus your search, select an option in the Limit by box and select or type a value in the Value box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can save your searching preferences (Searchby, Limit by, Sort by) by selecting Options > Save as User Default.

    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following search types in the Type box:
      • Exact match (implicitly truncated)
      • Exact match (explicitly truncated)
      • Keyword search
      • Phrase search
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Keyword and phrase searching are available only when you are searching for a record that is linked to a bibliographic or item record, and there is an indexed field in the By box. For example, you can search for a Purchase Order Line Item by Title because the purchase order line item is linked to a bibliographic record and Title is an indexed field. The search is actually looking for the bibliographic record with that title, and it returns the linked purchase order line items that are linked to the bibliographic records. You may also see automatic suggestions for phrase or keyword searching if your library has enabled this option in Polaris Administration.

    +
      +
    1. To display the results in a specific sort order, select a sort option in the Sort by box.
    2. +
    3. Type the search characters in the For box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    When you select Exact match (implicitly truncated), the search will find terms after the term you entered, as if there were a wildcard character after the term. Add an asterisk before the term to get results where the search term is not at the beginning.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to start the record search.
    2. +
    +

    The results list appears at the bottom of the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the record you want to open.
    2. +
    +

    The record appears in the appropriate workform.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Searching with the Find Tool - See Finding Polaris Records.
    • +
    • Printing from the Find Tool - You can print the results list to create an instant report. For example, you could search for purchase orders that were released within a certain date range, limit the results to show only the received purchase orders, and click the Total column header to sort the results by dollar amount. Right-click, and select Print > List View to print the list.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Link_to_other_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Link_to_other_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..293029ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Link_to_other_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Link to other records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link to Other Records

    +

    You can access records by linking to them from the Find Tool results list or from a record’s workform. You can also create a new linked record from a workform. Use one of the following methods to link to another record.

    +
      +
    • From the workform’s menu bar - Select Links and select the type of record to see existing links.
    • +
    • From the workform’s menu bar - Select Tools > Create record type. This creates a new linked record.
    • +
    • From the workform’s Line Items view - Right-click the line item, and select Links from the context menu.
    • +
    • From the Find Tool results list - Right-click the record, and select Links from the context menu.
    • +
    +

    The following example shows linking from the Find Tool.

    +

    + LinkFTool.gif +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Starting_an_Acquisitions_Task.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Starting_an_Acquisitions_Task.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a024b987 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAstart/Starting_an_Acquisitions_Task.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Starting an Acquisitions Task + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Starting an Acquisitions Task

    +

    You start a task in Polaris Acquisitions by finding or linking to an existing record, or by creating a new record.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_supplier_address.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_supplier_address.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcf5bfc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_supplier_address.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Add the supplier’s address + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add the Supplier’s Address

    +

    You can add the supplier’s address information for sending orders, payments, or claims on the Orders, Payments, or Claims view of the Supplier workform. You can enter different addresses if the supplier has separate addresses for orders, payments, and claims. If the address is the same, you can enter it once and copy it to the other views.

    +

    To add the supplier’s address information for sending orders, payments, and claims:

    +

    Tip: PAsuppliers00262.gif
    Click to display the Orders view.

    +
      +
    1. Create the supplier record (see Create a new supplier record).
    2. +
    3. Select View > Orders to display the Orders view.
    4. +
    5. Type the supplier’s name and street address in the Send orders to box.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can copy the address information from one view to another. See Copy the supplier’s address.

    +
      +
    1. Select the country in the Country box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The city, county, and state fields are filled in automatically from the postal code. If you have permission to modify the postal address (Modify postal address fields) you can enter the city, county, and state as well as the postal code.

    +
      +
    1. Type the postal code in the Postal Code box.
    2. +
    3. Type the contact person’s name in the Contact box.
    4. +
    5. Type the supplier’s e-mail address in the Email address box.
    6. +
    7. Type the supplier’s phone number in the Phone no. box.
    8. +
    9. Type the supplier’s fax number in the Fax no. box.
    10. +
    11. Type the discount percentage that the supplier offers your library in the Discount applied box.
    12. +
    +

    Note:
    This discount percentage is applied to all purchase orders using this supplier, but it can be changed in the purchase order. If you change the discount percentage in the supplier record and save the record, a message lists any linked purchase order templates and asks if you want to update the discount percentage in these templates. Click Yes to update all the linked templates.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the supplier’s address information for sending payments and claims on the Payments view and the Claims view using one of the following methods:
      • If the address is the same as the order address, click Copy to, and copy the order address to the payment or claims address. See Copy the supplier’s address.
      • If the address is different from the order address, enter the new address.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) If Polaris Acquisitions is integrated with a financial system, enter an identifying number of up to 30 characters in the External ID field.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save to save the record.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_the_claiming_criteria_for_a_supplier.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_the_claiming_criteria_for_a_supplier.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a51f1953 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Add_the_claiming_criteria_for_a_supplier.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Add the claiming criteria for a supplier + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add the Claiming Criteria for a Supplier

    +

    Important:
    You must set up the claiming criteria in the supplier record before any items can be claimed.

    +

    The claiming criteria in the supplier record are copied to the purchase order templates, purchase orders, and purchase order line items that use this supplier. You can change the claiming criteria in the purchase order template, purchase order, or purchase order line item. You can also set up suppliers for serials, and specify serials claiming options.

    +

    To add the claiming criteria for the supplier.

    +

    Note:
    For more information on claiming, see Claiming.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Supplier workform - Claims view.
    2. +
    3. Type the number (1-5) in the Maximum claims box to indicate the number of claims the library will submit to the supplier before canceling an ordered item.
    4. +
    5. In the days after release/expected arrival box, type the number of days between the time a purchase order line item is released to the time the first claim is generated.
    6. +
    +

    If you are entering serials claiming criteria, enter the number of days between the time the serial issue is expected and the time the first claim is generated.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the claim cycle information as follows:
      1. Type a number in the 1st claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the first claim is generated before the second claim is generated.
      2. Type a number in the 2nd claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the second claim is generated before the third claim is generated.
      3. Type a number in the 3rd claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the third claim is generated before the fourth claim is generated.
      4. Type a number in the 4th claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the fourth claim is generated before the fifth claim is generated.
    2. +
    3. Select the Cancel notice box to generate a cancellation notice.
    4. +
    5. Select the Claim notice box to generate a claim notice.
    6. +
    7. Select the method by which to send notices in the Notice Method box. This notice method is used if you specify Supplier Preference in the notices options in Polaris Administration. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    The cancellation information is not applicable for serials issues. You would cancel or not renew the entire subscription, not a specific issue. You can enter additional claiming information in the Serial Holdings Record. See Claiming in Serials.

    +
      +
    1. Select Auto cancel to cancel purchase order line items automatically after the claim cycle is over.
    2. +
    3. Type a number in the Cancel wait period box to indicate the number of days to wait after the last claim is sent out before canceling items ordered from this supplier.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save to save the record.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_a_supplier_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_a_supplier_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f67c574a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_a_supplier_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a supplier record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Supplier Record

    +

    You can speed up the process of creating supplier records by copying information from one supplier record into another. Copying a supplier record saves steps when most of the supplier information is the same for the new supplier.

    +

    To copy one supplier record to a new supplier record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Supplier workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New from the Supplier workform menu bar.
    4. +
    +

    The New Supplier Record dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Copy Existing Workform to copy the information to a new supplier record.
    2. +
    +

    A new Supplier workform opens with the copied information.

    +
      +
    1. Edit the new supplier record as needed.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the new supplier record.
    4. +
    +

    The record was saved successfully appears in the status bar.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_supplier_address.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_supplier_address.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40967f79 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Copy_supplier_address.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy the supplier’s address + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy the Supplier’s Address

    +

    When you enter the supplier’s address in one view on the Supplier workform, you do not need to enter the information again. Instead, you can copy the supplier’s address from one view (Orders, Payments, or Claims) to another.

    +

    To copy the supplier’s address from one view of the supplier record to another:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Supplier workform.
    2. +
    3. Select View > and select Orders> Payments or Claims on the Supplier workform.
    4. +
    +

    The Orders, Payments, or Claims view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Copy to.
    2. +
    +

    The Copy to context menu appears, listing the other views to which you can copy the address information.

    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options:
      • To copy the address to the Payments view, select Payment Address.
      • To copy the address to the Claims view, select Claiming Address.
      • To copy the address to the Orders view, select Ordering Address.
      • To copy the address to both of the other views, select Both.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Create_a_new_supplier_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Create_a_new_supplier_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e102e2b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Create_a_new_supplier_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new supplier record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Supplier Record

    +

    To create a new supplier record:

    +

    Note:
    If you are creating a new supplier record for a vendor that uses a different currency from your base currency, see Set up a supplier record for a foreign vendor.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also create a new supplier record by copying an existing record. See Copy a supplier record.

    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Supplier Record in the Objects box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Supplier workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type the supplier’s name in the Supplier name box.
    2. +
    3. Type an alternate supplier name in the Alternative name box.
    4. +
    5. Type the seven-digit standard address number of the supplier in the SAN box.
    6. +
    +

    Important:
    The SAN is required for EDI orders. If you select Accepts EDI orders, you cannot save the supplier record without the seven-digit SAN.
    If your library uses Polaris Titles to Go, the SAN number in the Supplier Record workform must match the profile set up in Polaris Administration. See Setting Up Titles to Go.

    +

    Tip:
    The SAN’s hyphen is for display only; it is not transmitted electronically.

    +
      +
    1. Type the library’s account number (or SAN suffix) in the Account no. box.
    2. +
    3. Select the library that owns the account in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can enter a dollar amount for the supplier, order, and line item encumbrance and expenditure limits in the appropriate boxes. This information is for reference only.

    +
      +
    1. If the supplier accepts EDI orders, enter the communications information. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data.
    2. +
    3. Type notes for this supplier in the General box. You can enter up to 400 characters in this field.
    4. +
    5. Type plan information in the Plan note box if your library has an approval or blanket purchasing arrangement with this supplier. You can enter up to 400 characters in this field.
    6. +
    7. Add the supplier’s address information (see Add the supplier’s address).
    8. +
    9. Add the claiming criteria for this supplier (see Add the claiming criteria for a supplier).
    10. +
    11. Select File > Save to save the record.
    12. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Creating_Copying_and_Deleting_Supplier_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Creating_Copying_and_Deleting_Supplier_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0f24028 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Creating_Copying_and_Deleting_Supplier_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating, Copying, and Deleting Supplier Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating, Copying, and Deleting Supplier Records

    +

    You can create new supplier records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar or by copying an existing supplier record displayed in the Supplier workform. Supplier records can be deleted only if they are not linked to any purchase orders or invoices.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Delete_a_supplier_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Delete_a_supplier_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5501a101 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Delete_a_supplier_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a supplier record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Supplier Record

    +

    If a supplier record is not linked to any purchase orders or invoices, the record can be deleted. To delete a supplier record:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for the supplier record.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool search results lists the supplier record(s).

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following tasks:
      • Select the record in the Find Tool results list, right-click, and select Delete.
      • Double-click the record to open it, and select File > Delete on the Supplier Record workform menu.
    2. +
    +

    If the record is not linked to any purchase orders or invoices, it is deleted. If the record is linked to any purchase orders or invoices, a message appears and you are prevented from deleting the supplier record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Enter_supplier_EDI_ordering_data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Enter_supplier_EDI_ordering_data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd400c97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Enter_supplier_EDI_ordering_data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data

    +

    If the supplier accepts purchase orders via Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) and your library wants to send orders electronically to this supplier, the supplier record must contain the correct EDI ordering information. See Prepare for EDI Ordering for a list of the information you need to get from the supplier.

    +

    Important:
    If you are implementing ASN processing with a supplier to whom you have previously sent EDI orders, before you select the ASN Shipments check box in the Supplier record, make sure the Hold partial shipment invoices are created for the day ASN processing will begin by following these steps:

    - Ask the supplier the exact date when they will start producing ASN files.

    - In the morning of the day the ASN processing will begin, wait until the Polaris EDIAgent has run and all remaining EDI invoices for that supplier have been created automatically. If your library does not process partial EDI invoices separately (the Hold partial shipments box is unchecked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile) go to Step 4 of the procedure below.

    - If the Hold partial shipment box is checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile for your library organization, go to the Process EDI Invoice workform as soon as the EDIAgent runs, and create the invoices for this supplier. See Process EDI invoices for partial shipments.

    +

    To enter information for a supplier that accepts EDI orders:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Supplier workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the EDI orders check box.
    4. +
    5. The other selections in the Communications frame are active when you select the EDI orders check box, and the required fields are in bold type.
    6. +

      + +

      +

      Important:
      If you select EDI orders, you cannot save the Supplier record without the supplier’s seven-digit standard address number (SAN) in the SAN box. See Create a new supplier record.

      +
    7. Select one of the following options, if applicable:
    8. +
        +
      • If your library and the supplier have an agreement whereby the supplier provides shelf-ready cataloging services, select the Enriched EDI orders check box.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      Enriched EDI includes cataloging services offered by the vendor, such as branch stickers on books and other materials, fully-cataloged MARC records, and 852 or 949 tags in the bibliographic records that automatically create item records. The type of services and the costs vary according to vendor. For more information, see Enriched EDI Orders and Shelf-Ready Items.

      +
        +
      • If the supplier provides an advanced shipping notice, select ASN Shipments.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      If the ASN Shipments box is checked, EDI invoices are not created automatically. See Receive using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).

      +
    9. Select Account # or SAN/SAN Suffix to indicate the address or profile ID. Your Polaris Site Manager will confirm this information.
    10. +
    11. Type the FTP address in the FTP Address box.
    12. +
    13. Type the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) username in the Username box.
    14. +
    15. Type the FTP password in the Password box.
    16. +

      Note:
      The password does not appear when you type it.

      +
    17. Type the directory for the purchase order acknowledgment and invoice in the POA/INV directory box.
    18. +
    19. Type the directory for the purchase order in the PO directory box.
    20. +
    21. Type the file extension for the purchase order in the PO file extension box.
    22. +
    23. Select File > Save.
    24. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Set_up_a_supplier_record_for_a_foreign_vendor.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Set_up_a_supplier_record_for_a_foreign_vendor.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0607a14b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Set_up_a_supplier_record_for_a_foreign_vendor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up a supplier record for a foreign vendor + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up a supplier record for a foreign vendor

    +

    If you order materials from a vendor that uses a different currency from your country’s base (default) currency, you can select the currency in the Supplier record.

    +

    Note:
    The currency must be enabled in the Currencies policy table in Polaris Administration. See Add or enable a foreign currency.

    +

    To set up a supplier record for a foreign vendor.

    +

    Tip:
    You can search for suppliers, purchase orders, and invoices by currency code. Select Currency Code in the Limit by box in the Find Tool and select the code.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New > Supplier Record and enter the foreign vendor’s information in the Supplier workform. See Create a new supplier record.
    2. +
    3. Select the foreign currency in the Currency box.
    4. +

      + +

      +
    5. Save the Supplier record.
    6. +

      When a foreign supplier is used, the amounts in the Purchase Order, Invoice, Purchase Order Line Item, and Invoice Line Item workforms are displayed in the foreign vendor’s currency, along with the currency code. For example, on the Orders view of the Purchase Order workform, the order total displays Order (CAD) for orders placed with a Canadian supplier, if this is not your base currency.

      +

      +  

      +
    7. However, when transactions are posted to the fund, the amount is converted to your base currency based on the currency exchange rate. See Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency. For more information about transactions, see Fund Transactions.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Setting_Up_Supplier_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Setting_Up_Supplier_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8731be87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Setting_Up_Supplier_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Supplier Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Supplier Records

    +

    Supplier records store information about each supplier’s account with your library. Your library can add, change, and delete supplier records as needed. If your library is part of a consortium using the same Polaris installation, and multiple libraries contract with the same supplier, each library creates a supplier record with a separate account number for the same supplier.

    +

    A supplier record contains the supplier name, alternate name, contact person, account information, Standard Address Number (SAN), telephone numbers, mailing addresses, instructions, electronic access information, currency (either base or foreign), and notes. Any Polaris record that specifies a supplier, such as a purchase order, uses information from the supplier record.

    +

    Your library can analyze the performance of suppliers and see the amounts encumbered and expended by supplier using standard Polaris Acquisitions reports, available under Utilities > Reports > Acquisitions. See Acquisitions Reports.

    +

    Note: Supplier records can be accessed from Serials or Acquisitions on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. In Polaris Administration, permissions for supplier records are under Serials.

    +

    See also:

    +

    Creating, Copying, and Deleting Supplier Records +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Update_the_currency_exchange_rate_for_a_foreign_currency.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Update_the_currency_exchange_rate_for_a_foreign_currency.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c1f59ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAsuppliers/Update_the_currency_exchange_rate_for_a_foreign_currency.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Update the currency exchange rate for a foreign currency

    +

    You can change the exchange rate for currencies other than the default currency if you have the permission Adjust currency exchange rates: Allow.

    +

    Note:
    The currency must be enabled in the Currencies policy table in Polaris Administration before you can update the exchange rate. See Add or enable a foreign currency.

    +

    To change the exchange rate for a foreign currency:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Acquisitions Processing > Update Currency Exchange Rates.
    2. +

      The Update Currency Exchange Rates dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    3. Select the organization for which you want to update the currency exchange rate in the Organization box.
    4. +
    5. Select the currency to update in the Currency box.
    6. +
    7. Type the exchange rate in the Rate box.
    8. +
    9. The Last modified date and By box display the date and time the currency rate was updated and your user name. These fields cannot be modified.
    10. +
    11. Click Save.
    12. +

      The exchange rate is saved. When transactions are posted to the fund, the system uses the new exchange rate to convert the amount to your base currency.

      +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    The Currency Exchange Rates report lists updates to any foreign currency’s exchange rate. For more information, see Acquisitions Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Copy_a_purchase_order_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Copy_a_purchase_order_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..403f33fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Copy_a_purchase_order_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a purchase order template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Purchase Order Template

    +

    To create a new purchase order template that is similar to an existing one, you can copy the purchase order template and save it with a new name. To copy a purchase order template:

    +
      +
    1. Select Acquisitions, Templates, Purchase Order and search for the existing template.
    2. +
    3. Select the template, right-click and select Create Purchase Order from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Purchase Order workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select Save as template and name the template.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also open the purchase order template, select File > New, Use existing template and select the template with the same name. Then select File > Save as template and type a new name for the template in the Assign Template Name dialog box. If you select File > New > Copy Workform, the header data will be copied, but not the default line item.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_new_on-order_item_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_new_on-order_item_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..abc04f0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_new_on-order_item_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new on-order item template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New On-Order Item Template

    +

    To create a new template for automatically generating on-order item records:

    +

    Tip:
    You can also create an on-order item template by saving an existing item record as a template, and then entering the information required for matching. See Matching Using Branch, Collection, and/or Material Type. Or, you can copy an on-order item template, change the information, and then save it with another name to create a new on-order template.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Item Template in the Objects box, and click OK. The Item Template workform opens.
    2. +
    3. Type a name that begins with On-order in the Name box.
    4. +
    5. If your library uses a supplier’s copy-level code to create on-order items, type the code in the Name field after On-order. See Matching With Item Template Codes.
    6. +
    7. Select the library that owns the template in the Template owner box.
    8. +
    9. Complete the following required fields:
      • Owner (the library that owns the item record)
      • Assigned (assigned branch)
      • Material type
      • Loan period
      • Fine code
      • Renewal limit
      • Stat code
      • Scheme (shelving scheme)
    10. +
    +

    Important:
    If required data is missing in the template, you will be unable to save it.

    +
      +
    1. Select the collection for the item in the Collection box.
    2. +
    3. Complete the other boxes on the on-order Item Template workform, and select File > Save. For more information on these fields, see Create a single new item record manually.
    4. +
    +

    Data Copied from Purchase Order Line to On-Order Item

    +

    This table shows the fields on the Purchase Order Line Item workform from which the data is copied and where this data appears on the on-order item. If you create on-order items from an invoice, the invoice line item fields are copied to the items.

    +

    Tip:
    If the on-order item template also has information in any of these fields, the purchase order line item values are used.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Purchase Order Line Item FieldsOn-Order Item Template Fields
    +

    Destination (branch)

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    +

    Assigned (branch)

    +

    Item Record workform - header (all views)

    +
    +

    Collection +

    +

    (Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    Collection +

    Item Record workform - header (all views)

    +
    +

    Material Type +

    +

    (Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    Material Type +

    Item Record workform - Cataloging view

    +
    +

    Unit Price +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    +

    Price +

    +

    Item Record workform - header (all views)

    +
    +

    Fund +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform (segment)

    +
    +

    Source +

    +

    Item Record workform - Source and Acquisition view

    +
    +

    Line status date +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    +

    Ordered +

    +

    Item Record workform - Source and Acquisition view

    +
    +

    Order number +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    +

    PO +

    +

    Item Record workform - Source and Acquisition view

    +
    +

    Invoice number +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform

    +
    +

    Invoice +

    +

    Item Record workform - Source and Acquisition view

    +
    +

    Public note +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform - Instructions to Supplier view

    +
    +

    Public note +

    +

    Item Record workform - Notes and Notices view

    +
    +

    Non-public note +

    +

    Purchase Order Line Item workform - Instructions to Supplier view

    +
    +

    Non-public note +

    +

    Item Record workform - Notes and Notices view

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_purchase_order_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_purchase_order_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8697926 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Create_a_purchase_order_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a purchase order template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Purchase Order Template

    +

    You always start from the Purchase Order workform to create a new purchase order template, whether you create a new purchase order or use an existing one. If the purchase order contains line items, only the first line item on the Purchase Order workform will be saved in the template, but it can have an unlimited number of segments that are all retained. You can also save a purchase order as a template with only header information and no line item data.

    +

    To create a purchase order template:

    +
      +
    1. Create a new purchase order or search for and select an existing record.
    2. +
    +

    The Purchase Order workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. To create a template that includes a default purchase order line item with distribution data (segments), do one of the following steps:
      • If you are starting with a new purchase order, add a new line item with all the distribution information (segments). See Add purchase order line item segments.
      • If you are using an existing purchase order, open the first purchase order line item, and verify that the distribution information is set up correctly. The bibliographic information is not saved in the template.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save as Template from the Purchase Order workform menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Assign Template Name dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the template, and click OK. You can enter a maximum of 50 characters.
    2. +
    +

    The purchase order template is saved with the name you gave it. If you set up the template with line item segments, one default line item with no title information is saved in the purchase order template.

    +

    Tip:
    You cannot type a purchase order number in the Number box when you create a template because the number is assigned when the purchase order is created. However, if you enter a suffix it will be retained in the template. When you search for a purchase order created with this template, you can include the suffix in the search criteria.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type a purchase order suffix in the box to the right of the Number box. You can use the suffix box to indicate a type of order or a supplier.
    2. +
    3. Enter information or edit existing information for the new purchase order template.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Entering information on the Purchase Order workform - See Creating Purchase Orders.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Bibliographic_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Bibliographic_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d1cf61e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Bibliographic_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating On-Order Bibliographic Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating On-Order Bibliographic Templates

    +

    When you manually add a bibliographic record on the Purchase Order Line Item or Invoice Line Item workform, or use Titles to Go, you can select a bibliographic template from a drop-down list of templates. Any tags saved in the on-order bibliographic template, such as the 008 tag, the 245$h tag, and all 006/007 tags, will automatically appear in the new bibliographic record. All the other bibliographic information entered in the purchase order line item, such as the LCCN, ISBN, UPC, author, publisher, publication date, and edition, is used to create the bibliographic record.

    +

    You can create on-order bibliographic templates for non-print materials, such as DVDs, so that they display correctly in the PAC. If you do not select a template when you are manually entering title information on a purchase order or invoice line item, the brief bibliographic record will be coded for a book. For more information, see Type of Material Codes (TOMs).

    +

    To create an on-order bibliographic template:

    +

    Tip:
    You could also open an existing template and copy it to create a new on-order bibliographic template.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Bibliographic Template.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Template workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. In the Name box, type a name that begins with On-order, such as On-order DVD.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Begin the bibliographic template name with On-order or On order (with or without the hyphen).

    +
      +
    1. Select the owner of the template in the Template Owner box.
    2. +
    3. In the Owner box, select the owner of the bibliographic records that are created using this template.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You do not need to set the Display in PAC check box in the bibliographic template. The new bibliographic record will use the setting for the purchase order line item.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click LDR.
    2. +
    +

    The Leader dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you are creating a bibliographic template for non-print materials, select the appropriate value in the LDR/06 box.
    2. +
    3. Make any other changes in the Leader.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to save your changes and close the Leader dialog box.
    6. +
    7. Double-click 008.
    8. +
    +

    The 008 dialog box appears. The type of 008 dialog box depends on the value you selected in the LDR/06 box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate options in the 008 dialog box, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. In the Bibliographic Template workform, type 006 (additional material characteristics) or 007 (physical description) to indicate the type of material, and type the appropriate subfield code, for example, 007 $v.
    4. +
    5. Double-click 006 or 007.
    6. +
    +

    The 006 or 007 dialog box appears. The dialog box depends on the subfield code you entered.

    +
      +
    1. Select the other character positions to save in the 006 or 007 tag, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The 006 or 007 dialog box closes and the Bibliographic Template workform is updated with the information you selected.

    +
      +
    1. Add any other tags to include in the template.
    2. +
    3. Save the bibliographic template.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Item_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Item_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a566fac4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_On-Order_Item_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,219 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating On-Order Item Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating On-Order Item Templates

    +

    Tip:
    If your library sends Enriched EDI orders to receive shelf-ready materials from the vendor, you can update the on-order items by importing records with embedded holdings data. See Enriched EDI Orders and Shelf-Ready Items.

    +

    You can set up on-order item templates so that on-order items are created automatically when you release a purchase order that is not for a subscription or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher.. If you choose to create on-order items when you release a purchase order, Polaris attempts to match the values in the fields on the purchase order line item and the values for the corresponding fields in an on-order item template. The matching of item templates against purchase order line item data can occur in two ways:

    +
      +
    • +

      Matching branch, collection, and/or material type. On-order templates that do not have a template code are matched to the purchase order line item based on branch, collection, and material type.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      Matching the item template code in the template name.

      +
    • +
    +

    If the supplier supports exporting copy-level codes in 970 $h, you can name on-order templates with this code and use it in the matching process.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Matching Using Branch, Collection, and/or Material Type

    +

    On-order templates that do not have a template code can be matched to the purchase order line item based on branch, collection, and material type. If no on-order template is found that matches all three fields, the system looks for an on-order item template with a matching branch and collection. If no item template is found, the system looks for an on-order item template with at least a matching branch. If no on-order item template matches the branch in the purchase order line item, no item record is created.

    +

    If multiple templates satisfy the matching criteria, the system uses the first template found to create an item record. Once Polaris finds an item template that has matching values in at least the branch field, the on-order item is created using information from the on-order item template and from the purchase order. If both the on-order item template and the purchase order line item have information in the same fields, the information in the purchase order line item is used. See Data Copied from Purchase Order Line to On-Order Item.

    +

    In addition, the fund, release date, price, and purchase order number are copied from the purchase order line item to the Source and Acquisition view of the Item Record workform. If the item template already had a price or other order information, it is overlaid by the information from the purchase order line item. See Data Copied from Purchase Order Line to On-Order Item.

    +

    Note:
    The invoice number appears automatically on the Source and Acquisition view if the purchase order is prepaid, or it appears later when the line items are copied to an invoice. When you create item records from an invoice without a linked purchase order (for example, you receive items as part of a blanket or approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile.), the invoice number appears in the item record, but there is no purchase order number.

    +

    When a purchase order is released and the user opts to create on-order item records, the automatic matching process looks for an on-order item template with values in certain fields that match the values in the corresponding fields in the purchase order line item.

    +

    Important:
    The item template must be named On-order or On order (with or without the hyphen).

    +

    The matching process attempts to match an on-order item template to the purchase order line item as follows:

    +

    Note:
    The branch field is labeled Destination in the Purchase Order Line Item workform and Assigned in the Item Template workform.

    +

    + matchingprocess.gif 

    +

    Match on values in 3 fields: branch, collection, material type

    +

    Match on values in 2 fields: branch, collection

    +

    Match on values in 1 field: branch

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Purchase Order Line Item FieldsOn-Order Item Template Fields
    +

    Destination (branch)

    +

    (Purchase Order Line Item workform - segment)

    +
    Assigned (branch)
    +

    Collection +

    +

    (Purchase Order Line Item workform - segment)

    +
    Collection +
    +

    Material Type +

    +

    (Purchase Order Line Item workform - line item)

    +
    Material Type +
    +

    Matching With Item Template Codes

    +

    Some libraries add holdings or copy-level codes to the supplier’s database, in addition to the library’s distribution and fund codes. When a staff member selects titles and creates the shopping cart on the supplier’s site, they also select the appropriate copy-level codes, distribution codes, and fund data. When the brief MARC records are exported from the supplier’s site, the records contain the order data and the copy-level code in one or more 970 tags.

    +

    The library then imports the brief bibliographic records in Polaris, and bulk-adds them to a purchase order. The 970 order data creates the purchase order line items and segments. The copy-level codes are saved in the database to be used in on-order item creation.

    +

    Note:
    The copy-level codes bulk-added from the 970 $h are stored in the purchase order line item segment table. While they are not visible in the purchase order line item, they are displayed in the PO line item segment property sheet.

    +

    To create on-order items, the library creates item templates with the copy-level code in the template name. When the purchase order is released, the copy-level codes in the purchase order line item segments are matched to the template codes and create the on-order items. To make the match, the stored value from the 970$h must match the code in the item template name.

    +

    Important:
    The item template must be named On-order or On order (with or without the hyphen). If your library uses a copy-level code supplied by the vendor in 970 tag $h, the item template name must also include this code.

    +

    Follow these general steps to use copy-level item template codes in the creation of on-order items:

    +

    Tip:
    For detailed instructions for creating on-order item templates, see Create a new on-order item template.

    +
      +
    1. Define copy-level codes on the supplier’s materials selection Web site. The codes can contain at least one alpha or numeric character, not to exceed 10 characters.
    2. +
    3. For each copy-level code, create an on-order item template with the code in the template name, following On-Order. For example, On-order MAV4WKBCD Main AV 4 Week.
    4. +
    5. Select titles on the supplier’s Web site, select the appropriate code for each copy, and other order data, including branch, quantity, fund and price.
    6. +
    7. Download the brief acquisitions bibliographic records containing the 970 tags with the copy-level code in subfield h.
    8. +
    9. Import the bibliographic records into a record set, and bulk-add them to a purchase order.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    The 970 subfields l (location), f (fund), q (quantity), and p (price) are used to create the distribution and fund data in the purchase order line item segments. For more information, see The Bulk Add Process.

    The collection code ($c) and material type ($m) are not necessary if the item template code is included in the $h. If the 970 tag contains a $h, but not a $c, and a matching template is found, the Assigned Collection from the template is copied to the Collection field in the purchase order line item segment.

    +
      +
    1. Release the purchase order and select the option to create on-order item records.
    2. +
    +

    To automatically create the item records using the tags in the 970 $h, the system looks for a matching item template that has all these characteristics:

    +
      +
    • +

      the template’s name begins with On-order (with or without the hyphen);

      +
    • +
    • +

      the item template code in the template’s name matches the copy-level code stored in the purchase order line item segment table;

      +
    • +
    • +

      the item template code contains at least one alpha or numeric character, not to exceed 10 characters;

      +
    • +
    • +

      the item template code is preceded and followed by one space, though it may be in any position in the Item Template name field;

      +
    • +
    • +

      the item template code does not contain any diacritic characters within the code;

      +
    • +
    • +

      and the branch in the Assigned field in the on-order item template matches the branch in the Destination field in the purchase order line item segment.

      +
    • +
    +

    If the template has all these characteristics, on-order items are created. If no on-order item template has all these characteristics, an error message appears and no on-order item records are created.

    +

    The following table displays examples of correct and incorrect item template codes:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Correct Item Template Code in Template Name FieldIncorrect ItemTemplate Code
    On Order ABIO Adult BiographyOn Order ABI_O Biography
    +

    On Order ABIOAdult Biography

    +
    +

    On-Order AFIC Adult Fiction

    +
    +

    On-Order A@FIC Adult Fiction

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_Purchase_Order_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_Purchase_Order_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad87d2dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Creating_Purchase_Order_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Purchase Order Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Purchase Order Templates

    +

    When you use templates to create purchase orders, you reduce the amount of data you need to enter for each purchase order you create. You can create a purchase order template from an existing or a new purchase order. If you use a template that has information in the following fields, the information is retained when you create a purchase order from the template:

    +
      +
    • +

      Order number suffix

      +
    • +
    • +

      Ordered at library name and SAN

      +
    • +
    • +

      Order type

      +
    • +
    • +

      Header charge types

      +
    • +
    • +

      Authorization

      +
    • +
    • +

      Payment method

      +
    • +
    • +

      Plan name

      +
    • +
    • +

      Claim setup

      +
    • +
    • +

      Supplier

      +
    • +
    • +

      Discount applied

      +
    • +
    • +

      Sales tax

      +
    • +
    • +

      Order note

      +
    • +
    • +

      Material type (from line item)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Public and Non-public notes (from line item)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Instructions to supplier - all information except Order canceled date

      +
    • +
    • +

      Quantity (from segments)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Destination (from segments)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Collections (from segments)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Funds (from segments)

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Rename_a_purchase_order_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Rename_a_purchase_order_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3e649d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Rename_a_purchase_order_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Rename a purchase order template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Rename a Purchase Order Template

    +

    To use all the information in a purchase order template, but give it a new name:

    +
      +
    1. Select Acquisitions, Templates, Purchase Order from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the template you want to rename.
    2. +
    +

    A list of templates appears in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the template name, and select Rename from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Rename a Purchase Order Template dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a new name for the template. You can enter a maximum of 50 characters.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to save the purchase order template using the new name.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Setting_Up_Templates_for_Acquisitions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Setting_Up_Templates_for_Acquisitions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33db0e69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PAtemplates/Setting_Up_Templates_for_Acquisitions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Templates for Acquisitions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Templates for Acquisitions

    +

    You can set up purchase order, on-order item, and bibliographic templates to speed up acquisitions processing. Purchase order templates contain default data for the types of purchase orders your library most frequently uses. When you create a purchase order from a template that includes a line item, the default distribution information (quantity, branch, collection, and fund) is already filled in.

    +

    You can also set up on-order bibliographic templates for creating brief bibliographic records for materials other than books. Then, when you create a purchase order line item, you can select an on-order bibliographic template that already contains the appropriate bibliographic information for the type of material.

    +

    To create on-order items automatically when purchase orders are released, you must set up on-order item templates. Creating on-order items helps speed up processing of materials when they are received. You can specify whether to display on-order items in the public access catalog where patrons can place hold requests on them, or to display the items after their status changes from On-order to In.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Administration_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Administration_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74ca6170 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Administration_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Acquisitions Administration Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Administration Reference

    +

    The following tables include the permissions required to do specific Acquisitions tasks, and reference lists for Acquisitions permissions, parameters and profiles.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Permissions_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Permissions_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9cff629d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Permissions_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,203 @@ + + + + + + + Acquisitions Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Permissions Reference

    +

    Note:
    To do an acquisitions task, both the staff member and the workstation on which they are doing the task must have the permission. For more information on the set of permissions required to do specific Acquisitions tasks, see Acquisitions Workflow Permissions.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Control RecordOrg LevelsPermissionsDescription
    Access acquisitionsSystemAllowOpen Acquisitions workforms.
    Adjust currency exchange rateSystem, LibraryAllowUpdate the currency exchange rates for enabled currencies.
    Check in shelf ready materialsSystemAllowUse the Check In Shelf Ready Materials workform to receive shelf-ready items.
    Claim alert listSystemAccessProcess and manage Acquisitions claims.
    Claim recordBranchAccess, Create, Modify, DeleteManage claiming.
    Create a bib record from acquisitions and serialsSystemAllowCreate bibliographic records as part of acquisitions and serials processing.
    Create and delete item record from acquisitions and serialsSystemAllowCreate and delete item records while performing acquisitions and serials tasks. This permission is required to automatically delete item record when deleting serials issues.
    Export acquisitions dataSystemAccessAccess the application to export acquisitions data from the Polaris ILS.
    Fiscal YearsBranchAccess, Create, Modify, DeleteWork with fiscal year records
    FundsBranchAccess, Create, Modify, Delete, Transfer money between funds.Maintain the budget accounts owned by the branch.
    InvoicesBranchAccess, Create, Modify, Delete, Pay invoices exceeding fund expenditure limits, Pay, Undo payment, Credit, Print vouchersMaintain invoices owned by the branch.
    Modify a bibliographic record from acquisitions and serials + SystemAllowModify bibliographic records as part of acquisitions and serials processing. With this permission, you can change the Display in PAC setting for bibliographic records linked to the line items when you release or cancel a purchase order. This permission alone does not allow you to open bibliographic records and modify the MARC data. To do this, you also need the Cataloging permission Bibliographic records: Modify.
    Process EDI invoices + SystemAllowUse the Process EDI Invoices workform to display and process EDI invoices for partial shipments.
    Purchase ordersBranch Access; Change fund, destination, collection; Create; Delete; Delete cancelled orders; Modify; Print purchase orders; Print workslips; Release order exceeding fund encumbrance limits; Release order resulting in negative fund free balance; Release, receive, cancel, close PO; Send electronic purchase orders; Undo Receipt; Change fund, destination, collectionWork with purchase orders at the branch at which the permissions were assigned.
    Purge purchase orders and invoicesSystemAllowUse the purge process to remove old purchase orders and invoices from the database.
    Receive ASN ShipmentsSystemAllowUse the Receive ASN Shipment workform to receive shipments.
    Run fiscal year utilitySystemAllowUse the fiscal year utility to roll over fiscal years.
    Selection List Line Item SegmentsBranchAccess; Create; Modify; DeleteWork with selection list line item segments for the branches at which the permission is granted.
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Workflow_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Workflow_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ec1c9bb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/Acquisitions_Workflow_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1918 @@ + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Workflow Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Workflow Permissions

    +

    Acquisitions permissions define who can create, access, and work with acquisitions records and functions. Some tasks require additional permissions, such as Cataloging permissions to work with bibliographic records. Each organization can specify which groups, workstations, or staff are allowed to work with records and control processes. For general information about setting permissions in Polaris, see the Polaris Administration Guide, "Granting Permissions."

    +

    The following table lists acquisitions tasks, the Polaris permissions required to do the tasks, the administrative levels at which they can be set, and the subsystems where the permissions are located.

    +

    Note:
    The following permissions are required to modify Polaris Administration profiles and parameters:
    Access administration: Allow
    Modify parameters: Allow
    Modify profiles: Allow
    For more information, see Administration Workflow Permissions.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Manage the Acquisitions Budget Permissions
    WorkflowRequired PermissionsAdministration Explorer Security Location
    +

    Define fund categories

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Access Administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Modify donation fund category table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Add a fiscal year to Polaris

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Fiscal years: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Change a fiscal year

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Fiscal years: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Fiscal years: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Delete fiscal year records

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Fiscal years: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Fiscal years: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Add a fund record

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Fiscal years: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Delete fund records

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Maintain fund account information

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Transfer money between funds

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Transfer money between funds

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Select Material Permissions
    WorkflowRequired PermissionsAdministration Explorer Security Location
    +

    Select Material Permissions

    +
    +

    Create and manage selection lists for the organization, including titles added by other selectors, and copy the selection lists to purchase orders.

    +

    Add a title that is not in the Polaris database. From the Selection List Line Item workform, search for the title in external databases using Z39.50, and create a provisional bibliographic record.

    +
    +

    Funds: Modify

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Transfer money between funds

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Create

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Approve/Reject

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Delete

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Create
    Create a bib record from Acquisitions and Serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging
    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Create and modify selection lists, selection list line items, and segments. Do Z39.50 searches from a selection list line item, and create provisional records.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +

    Selection lists: Access

    +

    Selection lists: Create

    +

    Selection lists: Modify

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access
    Bibliographic records: Create

    +

    Create a bib record from Acquisitions and Serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +

     

    +
    +

    Merge selection lists

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection lists: Delete

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Rename selection lists

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Delete selection lists

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Delete

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Modify a selection list line item’s status

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Approve or reject selection list line items

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Approve/Reject

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Work with selection list line item segments.

    +

    (This set of permissions allows the user to add, modify, and delete selection list line item segments for the branches at which this permission was granted.)

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection List Line Item Segments: Create, modify, delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bulk add titles to selection lists from record sets

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging records sets: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Copy selection list line items to a selection list

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Copy selection list line items to a new or existing purchase order

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Modify

    +
    +

    Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Manage Supplier Records Permissions

    +

    (Supplier records are available from the Serials and Acquisitions menus on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, but the permissions for Suppliers are available under Serials in the Polaris Administration Explorer Security folder.)

    +
    +

    Add a supplier record to Polaris

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Create

    +
    +

    Library - Serials

    +
    +

    Delete supplier records

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Maintain the information in existing supplier records

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Modify postal address fields

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Maintain Link to Supplier Databases Table Permissions

    +
    +

    Add and remove suppliers from the Link to Supplier Databases table

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Modify links to supplier databases table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Order Materials Permissions

    +
    +

    Create new purchase orders and add titles to existing purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Create

    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Add line items to a purchase order. Add a title without a bib in the database by doing a Z39.50 search.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Modify a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Selection Lists: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bulk add titles to purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Access Cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch- Cataloging

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Express importing: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Remove unused purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Release purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Release, receive, cancel, close PO

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Release order exceeding fund encumbrance limits

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Release order resulting in negative fund free balance

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Modify a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow

    +

    (This permission allows user to change only the Display in PAC setting in bibliographic records.)

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Create item records when material is ordered

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Create and delete item records from acquisitions and serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Print purchase orders to mail or fax to supplier

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Print purchase orders: Allow

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Send purchase orders electronically via EDI

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Send electronic purchase orders

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Receive Materials Permissions

    +
    +

    Receive purchase orders and create invoices.
    Receive from an invoice.

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

    Check in shelf-ready items and receive purchase order line items using the Check In Shelf-Ready Materials workform.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Print workslips

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Release, receive, cancel, close PO

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Undo receipt

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Check in shelf-ready materials: Allow

    +

    (Only this permission and Access acquisitions: Allow are required to use the Check In Shelf-ready Materials workform.)

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Receive cartons of materials by scanning (or entering) the barcode on the outside of the box.

    +
    +

    Receive ASN Shipments: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim Ordered Items Permissions

    +
    +

    Claim items when shipments are processed and materials did not arrive as expected

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim from the Claim Alert List

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim alert list: Access

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Maintain claim records

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Print from Claim Alert List

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim alert list: Access

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Cancel Ordered Items Permissions

    +
    +

    Cancel purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Release, receive, cancel, close PO

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim record: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Claim alert list: Access

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Delete canceled purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Delete cancelled purchase orders: Allow

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Remove unused purchase orders

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Purchase orders: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoice Materials Permissions

    +
    +

    Create invoices

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Pay, undo payment, credit, or adjust invoices

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Adjust

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Pay, credit

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Print vouchers

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Pay invoice exceeding fund expenditure limits (allows user to exceed the expenditure limits and the fund free balance)

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Delete invoices

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Link invoices

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Invoices: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Generate EDI invoices for partial shipments

    +
    +

    Process EDI Invoices: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Manage Foreign Currencies Permissions

    +
    +

    Add or modify a currency in the Currencies policy table

    +
    +

    Modify currencies table: Allow (Administration permission)

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow (Administration permission)

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Adjust the currency exchange rate

    +
    +

    Adjust currency exchange rates: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • +

      Permissions for administering acquisitions - Administration permissions are required to modify the donation fund database table and create links to supplier databases. See Acquisitions Administration Permissions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Acquisitions permissions list - See Acquisitions Permissions for an alphabetical reference list.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqparamref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqparamref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..789a60f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqparamref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ + + + + + + + Acquisitions Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available under Parameters > Acquisitions/Serials in System Administration.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    ParameterOrg LevelsDescriptionDefault Setting
    Bulk Add to PO: Add Alert to PO line item for multiple ISBNsSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies whether the Alert check box is automatically checked for purchase order line items created from bulk added bibliographic records with more than one ISBN. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    Bulk Add to PO/SL: Mark 970 data as processed +

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies whether 970 tags in bibliographic records are marked as processed when used to create line item segments in a purchase order or selection list. This eliminates duplicate line item segments in a purchase order, which would prevent it from being released. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    Bulk Add to PO: Replace invalid fields with default data

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies whether invalid data is replaced with default data when adding line items to a purchase order from a bibliographic record set.The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    Bulk Add to SL: Replace invalid fields with default data

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specifies whether invalid data is replaced with default data when adding line items to a selection list from a bibliographic record set.

    +
    The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    Copy last segment data to next segment

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies whether information from the previous purchase order or invoice line item segment automatically populates fields in the new segment. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    Default payment option when paying/crediting invoices

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies the default payment option selected in the Check/Voucher dialog box when staff members pay, prepay, or credit an invoice. The default is Voucher.
    +

    Generate purchase order Number

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies whether Polaris automatically provides a purchase order number or the staff member enters the purchase order number when a purchase order is created. Be sure to specify the increment, prefix, and starting number for the Polaris-generated number The default is No; to enable, set to Yes.
    +

    Last used purchase order Number

    +
    System, Library, BranchDisplays the number of the last purchase order produced by the selected organization. The number could be automatically generated or entered by a user. +

    This parameter is for information only; you cannot change the value.

    +
    +

    Other charge description.

    +
    System, Library, BranchUse this parameter to rename the Other header charge type to be used in purchase orders and invoices to specify a charge for the purchase order or invoice as a whole (at the header, rather than line item level). When the Other charge type is renamed, the new name appears in the list of charge types on the Purchase Order and Invoice workforms on view 1. The default is Other
    +

    PO line item workslips: Batch print during ASN receiving .

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies whether purchase order line items can be printed in batch from the Receive ASN Shipments workform.The default is No; to enable, set to Yes
    +

    PO line item workslips: Print on-order item data

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies whether item data is printed on purchase order line item workslips.The default is Yes; to disable, set to No
    +

    Prefix for system generated purchase order number

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies the prefix for the Polaris-generated purchase order number. Each branch organization can specify a different prefix to uniquely identify the purchase order. This parameter is not required for Polaris to generate purchase order numbers. +

    No default value is assigned.

    +
     System, Library, Branch  
    +

    Purchase order starting number

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies the number for the first generated purchase order number. +

    The default is 1.

    +
    Purchase order number incrementSystem, Library, Branch +

    Specifies the numerical interval Polaris automatically assigns between sequential purchase order numbers. For example, if the increment is set to 10 and one PO number is 10080, the next number to be generated is 10090. Polaris begins incrementing from the number specified in the Purchase Order Starting Number parameter, or from the value specified in the Last Used Purchase Order Number parameter, whichever is greater.

    +
    The default is 1.
    +

    Transmit EDI files in passive mode FTP

    +
    System Specifies whether the transmission of EDI files is in active or passive mode. If this profile is set to Yes, all EDI orders, purchase order acknowledgments and invoices for all EDI suppliers will be transmitted in passive mode. If this profile is set to No, they will be transmitted in active mode. The default is Yes - for new Polaris installations. If the EDIAgent has been run before at your site, the default setting is No.
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqprofref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqprofref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a29c771d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions/PDKacqref/acqprofref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + + Acquisitions and Serials Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions and Serials Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available when you select Profiles, Acquisitions/Serials at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Profile Org LevelsDescriptionDefault Setting
    +

    Acq claim/cancellation defaults

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Sets the default values for creating claim or cancellation notices.

    +
     
    +

    Acq fund droplist setup

    +
    System, Library, Branch, Staff +

    Specifies whether fund drop-down lists in Acquisitions workforms display the fund name, the fund alternative name, or both. It also specifies whether only the branch’s funds, or the all funds for all branches linked to the parent library are displayed in purchase orders, invoices, and selection lists. For selection lists, you can also specify the exact destinations and funds that display in selection list line item segments.

    +
     
    +

    Default directory

    +
    System, Library, Branch, WorkstationSpecifies where Acquisitions logs and files are stored. The default is C:\Polaris Report.
    Display in PAC: Brief bibliographic records created from Acquisitions recordsSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies whether bibliographic records created from Acquisitions appear in the PAC. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    Display in PAC: Warn if unchecked at POLI/INLI saveSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies whether a warning appears when a purchase order line item or invoice line item is saved, and the title will not display in the PAC because the Display in PAC check box is not checked. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    EDI invoice defaults

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies the default values to use for EDI invoices when no matching purchase order line item is found. Includes settings for the following: holding invoices for partial shipments so they are not created automatically; updating linked purchase order line items to received automatically when the EDI invoice is created; loading the supplier’s header charges; updating on-order item records’ circulation status. Also specifies the e-mail address for the invoice log. 
    +

    Filter branches in line item segments

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies how branches are displayed in selection list, purchase order, and invoice line item segments. If set to Yes, the default Destination is the same as the branch selected in the workform header (the Created at library in the Selection List workform, the Ordered at library in the Purchase Order workform, or the Paid by library in the Invoice workform). The drop-down list displays branches with the same parent library as the branch selected in the workform header. If set to No, the default branch selected is the user’s login branch, and all branches from all organizations in the system display in the Destination drop-down list.The default is No; to enable, set to Yes
    Override Acquisitions BlocksStaff +

    Specifies whether the selected staff member can override permission blocks in Acquisitions functions. Staff members with this profile set to Yes must also have permissions to do the restricted functions. +

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, set to Yes.

    +
    +

    Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests +

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specifies whether a warning message appears when users receive a line item for which there is a hold request. +

    +
    +

    The default is Yes; to disable, set to No. +

    +
    +

    Retain material type when copying line item segment data +

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specifies whether to copy the material type when line item segment data is copied in a selection list or purchase order. +

    +
    The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.
    +

    Selection list line item defaults +

    +
    System, Library, Branch, Staff +

    Sets the default distribution and supplier information for selection lists. +

    +
     
    +

    Titles to Go +

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Enables the Titles to Go service with the suppliers you select. +

    +
     
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Acquisitions_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Acquisitions_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..996a0a19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Acquisitions_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Administration Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Administration Overview

    +

    Polaris Administration settings control how Polaris data is categorized, used, and stored, and what functions are available to staff and patrons. You can make most administration settings by two methods: through the Administration Explorer, and through the appropriate workform for a specific record. You can configure Polaris Acquisitions to accommodate a centralized system where one organization handles all acquisitions tasks, or a decentralized system where individual branches handle acquisitions tasks. Or, you can set up Polaris Acquisitions so that certain acquisitions tasks, such as ordering material and handling the budget, are done at a central location while individual libraries select materials.

    +

    To enable your staff to perform certain acquisitions tasks, you need to set up the required permissions (security) to access, create, modify, or delete records. Then, you need to set up the appropriate defaults, lists, tables, and automated settings to streamline and standardize your acquisitions processes.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_links_to_supplier_databases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_links_to_supplier_databases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e78a1963 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_links_to_supplier_databases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Add links to supplier databases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Links to Supplier Databases

    +

    To add a link to a supplier’s database:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the Links to Supplier Databases table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify links to supplier databases: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder for the organization.
    4. +
    5. Select Link to Supplier Databases.
    6. +
    +

    The Link to Supplier Databases table appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click addentrybn.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert: Link to Supplier Database dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the supplier’s name and the URL for their database in the Supplier Name and Supplier URL boxes, and click OK to close the dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Modify or delete an entry - Select an entry and click chgentrybtn00330.gif to change it or click delentrybut00331.gif to delete it.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_or_enable_a_foreign_currency.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_or_enable_a_foreign_currency.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09dc13aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Add_or_enable_a_foreign_currency.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + Add or enable a foreign currency + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add or Enable a Foreign Currency

    +

    To add or enable a foreign currency:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Currencies to open the Currencies policy table.
    6. +
    7. Do one of the following steps:
    8. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can select a currency and click modcurrenicon.gif to modify it. Or, click inserticoncurtabl.gif to add a new currency.

    +
    +
      +
    • To enable a currency that is already listed, select the currency and press Enter, or right-click and select Modify. In the Enabled box, select Yes.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To add a new currency, press the Insert key, or right-click and select Insert. Then, type the currency in the Currency box, type the currency code in the Code box, and select Yes in the Enabled box.
    • +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    Polaris does not check the ISO currency standard.

    +
    +
      +
    • Click OK.
    • +
    +
    +

    The currency is enabled and will be available in the drop-down list in the Supplier workform.

    +
      +
    1. Set the default currency in the System workform. See Select your system’s base currency.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Foreign_Currencies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Foreign_Currencies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cd39a93c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Foreign_Currencies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Administering Foreign Currencies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administering Foreign Currencies

    +

    If you have any suppliers that require payment in a currency other than your country’s default (base) currency, the foreign currency must be enabled in the Currencies policy table in Polaris Administration. Next, if your default currency is other than United States dollars, you need to update the default currency in the System workform in Polaris Administration. Then, the exchange rate for the foreign currency must be set in the Update Exchange Rate dialog box.

    +

    After you establish the foreign currencies, you need to select the currency code in the Supplier record for each foreign supplier. When you order from a foreign supplier, all purchase orders and invoices that are linked to the foreign supplier record will reflect the foreign currency. During fund transactions, the amounts will be converted to the base currency before posting against the funds.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Funds_Fiscal_Years.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Funds_Fiscal_Years.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a09d3acd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Funds_Fiscal_Years.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Administering Funds/Fiscal Years + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administering Funds/Fiscal Years

    +

    Do the following tasks in Polaris Administration before setting up your organization’s fund structure in Polaris Acquisitions:

    +
      +
    • Allow the appropriate staff members to manage fiscal years and funds, transfer money between funds, and modify fund categories.
    • +
    • Create and maintain the Fund Categories table, which lists the fund categories an organization can use to designate donation funds. The fund categories are the same for all branches and libraries in the system.
    • +
    • Specify which funds display in invoices, purchase orders, and selection lists—all funds for all branches linked to the same parent library as the branch selected in the workform, or only the selected branch’s funds. For selection lists, an additional option lets you select specific branches and funds to display in selection list line item segments for specific selectors.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Purchase_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Purchase_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17c331a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Administering_Purchase_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + Administering Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administering Purchase Orders

    +

    Your staff can use several different methods to create purchase orders in Polaris. They can import records into Cataloging record sets and bulk add them to a purchase order, or they can copy titles from selection lists. They can also add titles one at a time. You can set up ordering to fit your organization’s workflow.

    +

    Do the following tasks to set up ordering for your organization:

    +
      +
    • Set permissions for staff members (and their workstations) that allow them to access, create, modify and delete purchase orders.
    • +
    • Enable or disable automatic numbering for purchase orders.
    • +
    • Set up the display of branches in purchase orders to display all branches or a limited list of branches.
    • +
    • Set up the display of funds in purchase orders to display a limited list of funds. You can also reduce the funds list by displaying only the fund name or fund alternative name.
    • +
    • Specify whether segment data will be copied when a subsequent purchase order line item segment is added.
    • +
    • Specify whether the material type will be retained when users select File | New | Copy Segment Data from an existing purchase order line item.
    • +
    • Specify if an alert should appear automatically on a purchase order line item if a bulk-added bibliographic record contains multiple ISBNs.
    • +
    • Specify whether defaults will be used for missing data when titles are bulk-added to purchase orders.
    • +
    • Mark 970 data as processed after bibliographic records are bulk-added to purchase orders.
    • +
    • Specify whether brief bibliographic records will display in the PAC. These are the brief records that are created when the purchase order line item is saved.
    • +
    • Specify whether a warning should appear when a purchase order line item or invoice line item is saved and the Display in PAC option is not selected in the linked bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Specify another header charge type to be used for purchase orders and invoices.
    • +
    • If you want to use Titles to Go, contact your Polaris Implementation Manager or Polaris Site Manager to activate your access to the Polaris Administration profile for enabling Titles to Go. Then, contact your supplier and tell them of your plan to use Titles to Go (Baker & Taylor does not require you to contact them before using Titles to Go). The supplier will give you the necessary authentication information.
    • +
    • Specify whether on-order item data is printed on purchase order line item workslips.
    • +
    • Specify whether purchase orders will be closed automatically via an SQL job.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Set up import profiles specifically for Acquisitions tasks.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/AutoCosePO.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/AutoCosePO.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5081bfd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/AutoCosePO.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Automatically Close Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Automatically Close Purchase Orders

    +

    The Close Purchase Orders SQL job will close purchase orders automatically if the Polaris Administration Acquisitions parameter, Automatically close purchase orders, is set to Yes. This parameter is available at the System, Library, and Branch organization levels, and it is set to No by default. See Enable the Close Purchase Order job.

    +

    When the job runs, purchase orders are closed if: the Automatically close purchase orders parameter is set to Yes for the purchase order’s Ordered at organization; the purchase order has a type of Firm, Gift or Donation; all line items have a status of Received, Canceled or Partly Received; and all segments have a status of Canceled or Received. See

    +

    Note:
    The Close Purchase Orders job does not affect standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. or subscription purchase orders or purchase order lines that have a status of On Order, Backordered, Exceptional Condition, Never Published, Out of Print, Return Requested, Returned, Pending Claim or Claimed.

    +

    Users can continue to manually close purchase orders when the lines are received but not yet paid (still encumbered). When a user manually closes a line item, a message informs the user that one or more lines have been received, but not yet paid and provides the option for the user to select Yes to continue to close the purchase order or No to cancel the closure. With the SQL job, any eligible purchase order will be closed automatically.

    +

    Purchase Order Transactions and Transaction Subtypes

    +

    The following information is recorded and available in the transaction database for a Purchase order closed transaction:

    +

    Supplier ID of the closed PO (SUPPLIER_ID)

    +

    Purchase Order number (without suffix) (PO_NUMBER)

    +

    Order type (ORDER_TYPE)

    +

    Payment method (PAYMENT_METHOD)

    +

    Purchase Order ID that was deleted (PURCHASE_ORDER_ID)

    +

    Purchase order’s Ordered At Org (Branch)

    +

    User ID for the user who closed the purchase order or PolarisExec if the purchase order was closed automatically

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Define_claiming_reasons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Define_claiming_reasons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc68f9cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Define_claiming_reasons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Define claiming reasons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define claiming reasons

    +

    To define the standard claim reasons that can be selected in the Reason box on the Claim workform:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Table folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Claim Reasons.
    6. +
    +

    The Claim Reasons table appears.

    +

    + claimreas.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click to open the Insert: Claim Reasons dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + insclaimreas.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the claim reason you want to add, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +

    Modify or Delete a Claim Reason

    +

    To modify a claim reason, select an entry in the Claim Reasons policy table, and click chgentrybtn00346.gif. To delete a claim reason, select an entry in the Claim Reasons policy table, and click delentrybut00347.gif.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_Titles_to_Go_for_your_suppliers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_Titles_to_Go_for_your_suppliers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67c99af6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_Titles_to_Go_for_your_suppliers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable Titles to Go for your suppliers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Titles to Go for your suppliers

    +

    To enable Titles to Go at your suppliers’ sites:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    + acqprof00350.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Titles to Go to open the Titles to Go dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + titlestogo.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the supplier in the list, and select Enable.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Make sure the SAN in the Supplier Record workform matches the one in the SAN box in this profile. See Create a new supplier record.

    +

    Tip:
    if you change a supplier’s configuration details and make an error, select Revert to go back to the original configuration details.

    +
      +
    1. Type the authentication information in the Username > Password and Account boxes. The required authentication information varies by supplier.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Baker & Taylor (B&T) uses the account number in the linked Supplier record in addition to the account number you enter in the Titles to Go profile.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Titles to Go is enabled for the supplier you specified.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_automatic_purchase_order_numbers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_automatic_purchase_order_numbers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45ac25cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_automatic_purchase_order_numbers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable automatic purchase order numbers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Automatic Purchase Order Numbers

    +

    To set up automatic purchase order numbering:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Generate purchase order number, and select Yes.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    The Last used purchase order number parameter is for display only.

    +
      +
    1. If your library policy requires a prefix for purchase order numbers, double-click Prefix for system generated purchase order number, and type the prefix text.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the Purchase order number increment, and type or select the increment to use between consecutive purchase orders.
    4. +
    5. Double-click the Purchase order starting number, and type or select the first number to use.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_brief_bib_record_display_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_brief_bib_record_display_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5cca0ce7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_brief_bib_record_display_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable brief bib record display in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Brief Bib Record Display in PAC

    +

    To display brief bibliographic records created in Acquisitions in the PAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double click Display in PAC: Brief bibliographic records created from Acquisitions, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_copy_segment_data_to_next_segment.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_copy_segment_data_to_next_segment.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29d1f5bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_copy_segment_data_to_next_segment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable copy segment data to next segment + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Copy Segment Data to Next Segment

    +

    When you enable the parameter Copy last segment data to next segment, the system automatically copies the data from the previous purchase order line item segment to the next segment. Fewer keystrokes are required when adding titles to a purchase order.

    +

    To enable the system to copy the information from a purchase order line item segment to the next segment automatically:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Copy last segment data to next segment, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_the_Close_Purchas.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_the_Close_Purchas.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a61c7bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_the_Close_Purchas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Enable the Close Purchase Order job + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable the Close Purchase Order job

    +

    If the Automatically close purchase orders parameter is set to Yes for the organization, the Close Purchase Orders SQL job runs on a default schedule of 6:59 a.m. each morning and closes the eligible purchase orders. The job must be run prior to the DBCC nightly job.

    +

    To enable the job that automatically closes purchase orders:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration| Explorer, and select the system, library, or branch organization for which you want to enable the Close Purchase Orders job.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters, and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Automatically close purchase orders parameter, and select Yes.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the parameter setting.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_warning_if_no_Display_in_PAC_setting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_warning_if_no_Display_in_PAC_setting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..958bb2eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Enable_warning_if_no_Display_in_PAC_setting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable warning if no Display in PAC setting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Warning if No Display in PAC Setting

    +

    To enable a warning message if the Display in PAC setting is not selected when saving a purchase order line item or invoice line item:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Display in PAC: Warn if unchecked at POLI/INLI save, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filter_destination_branch_lists_by_parent_library.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filter_destination_branch_lists_by_parent_library.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5a2d4cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filter_destination_branch_lists_by_parent_library.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Filter destination branch lists by parent library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Filter Destination Branch Lists by Parent Library

    +

    To specify whether you want Destination branch lists in selection lists, purchase orders, and invoices to be filtered by the parent library:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Filter branches in line item segments and select Yes or No.
    6. +

      If this filter is set to Yes, it also filters branches in the bulk add process. For more information on the implications of setting this filter, see Filtering Branches in Line Items.

      +
    +

    Note:

    This profile also affects which 970 tags are used in the bulk add process. See Filtering Branches in Line Items.

    +

    Tip:
    If you want the profile to affect selection lists, you must set the profile at the system or library level. The profile can be set at the branch level for purchase order line items or invoice line items.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    The Filter branches in line item segments profile does not affect selection list line items when it is set at the branch level, but you can use the Acq fund droplist setup profile at the staff member level to specify exactly which branches’ funds appear in the selection list line item segments for that selector. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filtering_Branches_in_Line_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filtering_Branches_in_Line_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9bbec7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Filtering_Branches_in_Line_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Filtering Branches in Line Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Filtering Branches in Line Items

    +

    You can set the Filter branches in line item segments profile to limit the destination branches that display in line item segments for selection lists, purchase orders, and invoices. You can also set this profile to limit the 970 tags that are used to create selection list or purchase order line item segments during the bulk add process.

    +

    If the profile is set to Yes, the branches are limited by the parent library as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      Purchase order line item segments - The branches in the Destination drop-down list box have the same parent library as the branch selected in the Ordered at Name box on the General view of the Purchase Order workform. The default branch selected in the segment is the same as the one selected in the Ordered at Name box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Invoice line item segments - The branches in the Destination drop-down list box have the same parent library as the branch selected in the Paid by Name box on the General view of the Invoice workform. The default branch selected in the segment is the same as the one selected in the Paid by Name box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Selection list line item segments - The branches in the Destination drop-down list box in the selection list line item segment have the same parent library as the one selected in the Created at Library on the Selection List Line Item workform.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note: Selection list line items use the setting at the system or library level. Purchase order and invoice line items use the setting at the branch level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Bulk add to selection list and Bulk add to purchase order - If the 970 tag has a subfield $l (branch abbreviation) with the same parent library as the Ordered At branch on the purchase order or the Library on the selection list, the 970 tag is used to create a segment on the purchase order or selection list. If the profile is set to Yes, and the branch abbreviation in a 970 tag does not have the same parent library as the Ordered At branch on the purchase order or the Library on the selection list, it will not be used in the purchase order line item. If the profile is set to No, the default branch selected in the Destination box is the user’s login branch, and the Destination list includes all branches in the library system. All 970 tags will be bulk-added to a purchase order or selection list if this profile is set to No.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important: If selectors add selection list line item segments for branches with different parent libraries, the Filter branches in line item segments profile should be set to No. Then, use the Acq fund droplist setup profile at the staff member level to specify exactly which branches’ funds appear in the segments for that selector. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions. The user must also have the permission Selection list line item segment: Create, modify, delete for the branch selected in the Destination box for the selection list line item segment.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Fiscal_Year_Rollovers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Fiscal_Year_Rollovers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f34b3a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Fiscal_Year_Rollovers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Fiscal Year Rollovers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Fiscal Year Rollovers

    +

    Polaris provides a utility with the following options for handling fiscal year rollovers:

    +
      +
    • Run fiscal year utility - Create a new fiscal year record that replaces the old fiscal year and re-links the old fiscal year’s funds to the new fiscal year, replicating the fund structure. Any amount left in the funds can be carried over into the next fiscal year, or the amount can be zeroed out.
    • +
    • Replicate fiscal year hierarchy - Replicate the fund structure in the new fiscal year, but keep the old fiscal year open for a time until all money in the linked funds is expended. With this option, funds can be expended in the old fiscal year’s funds, but not encumbered. The library can continue to receive, cancel, and invoice in the current fiscal year using the old funds, while ordering, receiving, and invoicing in the new fiscal year using the new funds.
    • +
    • Close fiscal year -This closes the current fiscal year and all linked funds.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you are changing your fund structure significantly and want to create a new fund hierarchy, first check to make sure no pending purchase orders are linked to these funds, and select Replicate fiscal year hierarchy. Once the hierarchy has been replicated, delete the newly-generated (Open) fiscal year hierarchy and close the old (Encumbrances closed) hierarchy. When you delete the new fiscal year before closing the old fiscal year, you can deal with any open invoices that are still linked to the closed fund. If you need assistance with the fiscal year rollover workflow, contact your Polaris site manager.

    +

    Users who have the permission for at least one Organization linked to at least one Fiscal Year record with a status other than Closed can access the Fiscal Year utility dialog. Additionally, users meeting these requirements can see one or more branch Organizations displayed in the Owner drop-down list box on the Fiscal Year Utility dialog.

    +

    Note:
    The utility is governed by the Acquisitions permission, Run Fiscal Year
    Utility: Allow available at the Branch level only and unassigned by default.

    +

    Users without the permission for at least one Organization will be blocked when trying to open the Run Fiscal Year Utility dialog. If a user does not have the permission, no supervisor override is allowed.

    +

    Note:
    If your library uses foreign currencies, the amounts disencumbered and re-encumbered in the new fiscal year will use the exchange rate recorded at the time the purchase order was released.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Receiving.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Receiving.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea5aade7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Receiving.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Receiving

    +

    When materials shipments arrive, your staff updates the purchase order line items to received, claimed (when items are missing, damaged, or incorrect), or canceled. Then, the received items are invoiced and paid for, and canceled items are credited. You can delete purchase orders or purchase order line items that were canceled.

    +

    Do the following tasks to set up receiving for your organization:

    +
      +
    • +

      Grant permissions to receive orders; claim missing or damaged items and cancel orders; pay, credit and adjust invoices.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify whether you want warnings to appear when you receive items that have holds placed on them.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set claim and cancellation notice defaults.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Define claiming reasons.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you receive EDI orders via the ASN, set the option to batch print purchase order line item workslips from the Receive ASN Shipments workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the default payment option to Check or Voucher.

      +
    • +
    +

    You can use the Acquisitions parameter Default payment option when paying/crediting invoices to specify whether Check or Voucher is selected by default when staff members prepay, pay or credit an invoice. The parameter can be set at the System, Library, or Branch level.

    +

    See also.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Selection_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Selection_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3aa15e5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Selection_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Selection Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Selection Lists

    +

    Selection lists in Polaris Acquisitions are lists of bibliographic titles (selection list line items) that can have a status of Approved, Consider, Desiderata, Rejected or Processed. Selection list line items can be copied to purchase orders or other selection lists. Do the following tasks to set up selecting in Polaris for your organization:

    +
      +
    • Allow the appropriate staff members to access, create, modify, merge, copy, approve, reject or delete selection lists. You can set up permissions so that some selectors have complete control over selection lists, while other selectors can only add or change the distribution (segment) information for a title (line item).
    • +
    • Set selection list line item defaults for the destination, collection, fund, and supplier. When authorized staff members create selection lists, the line items automatically contain this default information unless the staff member changes it.
    • +
    • Set up the display of Destination branches so that line item segments display all branches in the system or only branches linked to the parent library.
    • +
    • Set up the display of funds in selection list line item segments so that all funds linked to all branches with the same parent library as the Destination branch are displayed, only funds linked to the Destination branch are displayed, or only selected branches and funds are displayed.
    • +
    • Specify whether the material type is copied to a new selection list line item when users add new selection list line items by copying existing line items.
    • +
    • Specify whether defaults will substitute for missing data when bibliographic titles are bulk-added to selection lists.
    • +
    • Specify if 970 tags will be marked as processed when you bulk add titles to purchase orders or selection lists. This prevents 970 tags from creating duplicate line item segments.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Supplier_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Supplier_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b94a5032 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Managing_Supplier_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Supplier Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Supplier Records

    +

    Supplier records in Polaris contain information about the suppliers from which your library acquires materials. These records are used in both acquisitions and serials processing. In addition, you can add links to supplier databases to the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +

    Note:
    The permissions for working with supplier records are located under the Serials folder in the Administration Explorer, Security view. To access supplier records, you must also have permission to access Serials.

    +

    Do the following administration tasks to work with suppliers:

    +
      +
    • +

      Allow the appropriate staff members to access, create, modify or delete supplier records. Manage Supplier Records Permissions

      +
    • +
    • +

      Allow the appropriate staff members to modify the Link to Supplier Databases policy table.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add suppliers’ Web addresses to the Link to Supplier Database policy table. The Web addresses in the policy table appear in the dialog box when users select Utilities, Acquisitions Processing, Link to supplier databases from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you order materials using electronic data interchange (EDI), specific data needs to be entered in the supplier record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you want to use Titles to Go, contact your Polaris Site Manager and your suppliers (except Baker & Taylor, who does not need to be contacted before using Titles to Go).

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you use any foreign suppliers that use a currency other than your country’s base currency, establish the currency in the Currencies table, set your base currency in the System workform, and set an exchange rate in the Update Currency Exchange Rates dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Mark_970_data_as_processed_after_bulk_adding_titles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Mark_970_data_as_processed_after_bulk_adding_titles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..71c0a85e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Mark_970_data_as_processed_after_bulk_adding_titles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Mark 970 data as processed after bulk adding titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mark 970 Data as Processed After Bulk Adding Titles

    +

    If you import bibliographic records that contain 970 tags, the distribution information in the tags is used to create line item segments in purchase orders or selection lists when you bulk add the titles. You can set the Bulk add to PO/SL: Mark 970 data as processed parameter to Yes, so that if you import the same title again with new 970 tags and bulk add the title, the old 970 tags are not used.

    +

    To mark 970 tags as processed:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Bulk add to PO/SL: Mark 970 data as processed, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Delete the processed 970 tags - You can set up a Polaris Administration Cataloging profile to run a utility that periodically deletes processed 970 tags. See Set up the Subfield 9 cleanup utility .

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purge_invoices_and_purchase_orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purge_invoices_and_purchase_orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a962068 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purge_invoices_and_purchase_orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices

    +

    To purge purchase orders and invoices:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Acquisitions Processing, Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    + acqsubmenu.gif 

    +

    The Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box appears.

    +

    + purgePOinv00351.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    Only the organizations for which the user has the Purge purchase orders and invoices: Allow permission appear in the list.

    +
      +
    1. In the Organization box, select the system or library organization for which the job purge job is scheduled. +
    2. +
    3. Select a date in the Purge purchase orders and invoices before box. Invoices and purchase orders with a status date before the specified date will be deleted, provided they have a status that permits their deletion.
    4. +
    5. Schedule the job to run by selecting a date in the Scheduled field. This option must be selected for the job to run. The time of day that the job runs is set in Polaris Administration.
    6. +
    7. Click Save.
    8. +
    +

    If the selected dates could result in the deletion of purchase orders and invoices that are less than two years old, a warning message appears.

    +

    + purgeless2msg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes if you want to continue, or No to go back and select different Purge purchase orders and invoices before and Schedule dates.
    2. +
    3. Close the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The job is scheduled to run. When the purge job is complete, the check box in the Scheduled date field is cleared, and the Last run and By fields are updated. To run the job again, re-check the scheduled box and enter a new date.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purging_Purchase_Orders_Invoices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purging_Purchase_Orders_Invoices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e069a8ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Purging_Purchase_Orders_Invoices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ + + + + + + + + Purging Purchase Orders & Invoices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purging Purchase Orders & Invoices

    +

    You can set up purge criteria and schedule the Purge Acquisitions Records SQL job to automatically delete purchase orders and invoices for a library organization (or organizations) based on the age of the records. When the job is run, the Acquisitions records that meet the specified criteria are removed from the database permanently, and the data cannot be recovered. Data from the deleted records no longer displays in other records, such as item records, and it is not available for reports or other functions.

    +

    To specify the job criteria and schedule the job, you must have the Purge purchase orders and invoices: Allow permission for at least one library organization. This permission can be set at the System and Library levels in Polaris Administration. For instructions, see Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices.

    +

    Note:
    The permission to purge purchase orders and invoices must be granted for each organization separately because granting the permission at the System level does not filter down to the Library levels.

    +

    Purge Acquisitions Records Job

    +

    When the Purge Acquisitions job runs, it purges the selected organizations’ invoices of any type with an invoice status date of paid, prepaid, or credited, and a status date less than the date in the Purge purchase orders and invoices before field. Invoices are deleted before their linked purchase orders.

    +

    Invoices that meet the criteria for deletion, based on the specified organization and date in the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box, will be skipped in the purge process if:

    +
      +
    • The invoice has a status of Open or PartPaid
    • +
    • The invoice is linked to a purchase order with a status that prevents deletion.
    • +
    • The invoice is linked to a purchase order with a status that allows deletion, but the purchase order is also linked to another invoice (or invoices) with a status that prevents deletion.
    • +
    +

    It also purges the selected organizations’ purchase orders of any type with an order status of Canceled, Closed, or Received, and a status date less than the date in the Purge purchase orders and invoices before field.

    +

    Purchase orders that meet the criteria for deletion, based on the specified organization and date criteria in the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box, will be skipped in the purge process if:

    +
      +
    • + The purchase order has any line items with a payment status of Open. +
    • +
    • + The purchase order has a status of Pending, Released, Partly Received, or Continuing. +
    • +
    +

    When a purchase order or invoice is deleted, any links to other records are also deleted. The links that may be deleted are listed below.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Invoice Deleted

    +
    +

    Purchase Order Deleted

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    Funds (header and line item segment funds)

    +
    +

    Claims

    +
    +

    Fiscal years

    +
    +

    Funds (header and line item segment funds)

    +
    +

    (Other linked) Invoices

    +
    +

    Fiscal Years

    +
    +

    Item records

    +
    +

    Invoice lines, Invoice line segments

    +
    +

    PO lines, PO line segments

    +
    +

    Invoices

    +
    +

    Purchase Orders

    +
    +

    Item records

    +
    +

    Serial Holdings Records

    +
    +

    Selection Lists

    +
    +

    Standing Order parts

    +
    +

    Selection List Lines, SL line segments

    +
    +

    Subscription records

    +
    +

    Serial Holdings Records

    +
    +

    Suppliers

    +
    +

    Subscription records

    +
    +

    +
    +

    Suppliers

    +
    +

    Transactions Logging

    +

    When an invoice is purged, an Invoice Deleted transaction is logged. When a purchase order is purged, a Purchase Order Deleted transaction is logged.

    +

    Acquisitions Data in SimplyReports

    +

    Since all data in purged invoices and purchase orders is deleted, you may find unexpected results in reports that contain data from records linked to the purged records. For example, a fund report may show money encumbered and expended, but the data from the linked purchase order or invoice cannot be retrieved in a purchase order or invoice report.

    +

    Selecting the Organization Level for the Purge

    +

    Before specifying the purge criteria and scheduling the job, ensure that the settings reflect how your library system orders and invoices materials:

    +
      +
    • If your library uses centralized processing, grant the Purge purchase orders and invoices: Allow permission to staff members at the System level in Polaris Administration. When an authorized staff member sets up the purge criteria in the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box, only the System organization will be available to select, so the purge criteria will apply to all organizations in the library system.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Although invoices and purchase orders are “owned” at the Branch level, purging is done at the Library level.

    +
      +
    • If your library uses de-centralized processing or a combination of centralized and de-centralized processing, grant the Purge purchase orders and invoices: Allow permission to staff members at the Library level in Polaris Administration. When an authorized staff member sets up the purge criteria in the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box, only the Library organization will be available to select, so the purge criteria will apply to the Library organization and all its associated branches.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The job looks at any saved entry at the Library level, with object locks honored. If, for some reason, the SQL job fails to purge an invoice or PO, the deletion of that record is reversed, the transaction is rolled back and the job continues. If one or more purchase orders cannot be deleted, the invoice deletion fails.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Rename_the_purchase_order_and_invoice_header_Other_charge_type.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Rename_the_purchase_order_and_invoice_header_Other_charge_type.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bda62379 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Rename_the_purchase_order_and_invoice_header_Other_charge_type.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Rename the purchase order and invoice header Other charge type + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Rename the Purchase Order and Invoice Header Other Charge Type

    +

    If you want a more specific name for a purchase order or invoice header charge (charges that apply to the purchase order or invoice as a whole), you can rename the charge type of Other. The renamed charge type will appear in the Charge Type list on the General view of the Purchase Order and Invoice workform.

    +

    To rename the Other header charge:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Other charge description.
    6. +
    7. Type a new name to give the Other charge.
    8. +
    +

    The name can have up to 19 alphanumeric characters.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    The charge type is saved and is available to select for purchase order or invoice header charges.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Replicatefiscalyear.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Replicatefiscalyear.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26d8c74e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Replicatefiscalyear.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Replicate fiscal year - checklist + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Replicate fiscal year - checklist

    +

    Replicate fiscal year checklist

    +

    The following is an overview of the steps to replicate the fiscal year’s fund hierarchy:

    +
      +
    • Perform a database backup prior to running the rollover process. It is also recommended that the rollover be performed at a time the library is not operational so that the library can restore from the backup if necessary, make changes to the fiscal year rollover settings, and re-run the rollover.
    • +
    • Run the Fiscal Year/Fund Balances Report - Select Run pre-processing reports from the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility. It shows the current state of the fund balances to be rolled over.
    • +
    +

    Tip: +
    For more information on these reports, see Fiscal Year Rollover Reports

    +
      +
    • Run the Fiscal Year Rollover utility.
    • +
    • Review the newly created Fiscal Year(s) and Fund records in the Fiscal Year and Fund explorers. See if fund names need to be changed to reflect the new fiscal year.
    • +
    • Rename the new fiscal year to distinguish it from the old fiscal year.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If your library does EDI ordering and has a default fund selected in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile, the fund is not replaced by the new fund because the library can still expend from the old fund. The new fund can be selected at any time after the replication.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Retain_material_type_in_copied_line_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Retain_material_type_in_copied_line_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5072dea6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Retain_material_type_in_copied_line_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Retain material type in copied line items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Retain Material Type in Copied Line Items

    +

    You can set an Acquisitions profile to retain the material type or leave the material type blank when users copy a selection list or purchase order line item to create a new one.

    +

    To set the option to retain the material type or leave it blank when copying a selection list or purchase order line item:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Set the Retain Material type when copying line item segment data profile as follows:
      • Select Yes to retain the material type when users create a new selection list or purchase order line item by selecting File | New | Copy Segment Data or CTRL+N from an existing selection list or purchase order line item.
      • Select No if you want the material type to be blank when users create a new selection list or purchase order line item by selecting File | New | Copy Segment Data or CTRL+N from an existing selection list or purchase order line item.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Runfiscalyearutilchecklist.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Runfiscalyearutilchecklist.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb9f2536 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Runfiscalyearutilchecklist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Run fiscal year utility - checklist + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Run fiscal year utility - checklist

    +

    The following is an overview of the steps to accomplish the fiscal year rollover in Polaris:

    +

    Note: +
    For more details, see Use the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility

    +
      +
    • Perform a database backup prior to running the rollover process. It is also recommended that the rollover be performed at a time the library is not operational so that the library can restore from the backup if necessary, make changes to the fiscal year rollover settings, and re-run the rollover.
    • +
    • If you are using EDI, turn off the EDIAgent job a day or two before the rollover.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Decide which of the following options your organization will use for closing out a fiscal year that has a surplus of money remaining in its linked funds:
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • +

      Keep all unexpended funds and roll them into the next fiscal year.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Zero out all the unexpended funds. Keep only the funds that are encumbered.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • If you are using Polaris Serials, and you want to increase the percentage encumbered in funds used to pay for standing orders and subscriptions, make a note of the percentage increase.
    • +
    •  Run the Outstanding Orders report, which lists the purchase orders to be rolled over.
    • +
    • Run the Fiscal Year/Fund Balances Report - Select Run pre-processing reports from the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility. This report shows the current state of the fund balances to be rolled over.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Run the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility against each fiscal year.
    • +
    • In the Polaris Staff Client, search for open Fiscal Year records. Rename the open fiscal year(s) to show the current year because the name of the new fiscal year will be the same as the old fiscal year.
    • +
    • Review the newly created Fiscal Year(s) and Fund records in the Fiscal Year and Fund explorers. See if fund names need to be changed to reflect the new fiscal year. You can also run the fiscal year rollover reports. If you have any questions about the results, contact your Polaris Site Manager.
    • +
    • If you use EDI ordering, the default segment and header funds are updated automatically in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. Check the profile to confirm that the default header and segment funds are set correctly. See Set up EDI invoice defaults. Then, re-enable your Polaris EDIAgent job.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Select_systems_base_currency.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Select_systems_base_currency.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3692a7f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Select_systems_base_currency.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Select your system’s base currency + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Select your system’s base currency

    +

    To set your system’s base currency.

    +

    Note:
    The default currency is United States dollars. If your library system is in the United States, you do not need to change the setting.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also select Administration > System and search for your system record using the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Right-click, and select Edit.
    4. +
    +

    + explorersyst.gif 

    +

    The System workform appears.

    +

    + systemwkfm.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select your library system’s base currency in the Default Currency box.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the workform.
    4. +
    +

    All Supplier records will display this currency unless you change it.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_alert_indicator_for_bulk_adding_titles_with_multiple_ISBNs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_alert_indicator_for_bulk_adding_titles_with_multiple_ISBNs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d6a7256 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_alert_indicator_for_bulk_adding_titles_with_multiple_ISBNs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Set alert indicator for bulk adding titles with multiple ISBNs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Alert Indicator for Bulk Adding Titles with Multiple ISBNs

    +

    If this indicator is set to Yes, the Alert box on the Purchase Order Line Item workform will be checked automatically when a bulk-added bibliographic record has multiple ISBNs. A red exclamation point also appears next to the purchase order line item in the Find Tool results list in the Purchase Order workform, Line Items view.

    +

    To set the automatic alert:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Bulk add to PO: Add Alert to PO line item for multiple ISBNs, and select Yes or No.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_batch_print_workslips_option_for_ASN_receiving.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_batch_print_workslips_option_for_ASN_receiving.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7fc718d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_batch_print_workslips_option_for_ASN_receiving.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Set batch print workslips option for ASN receiving + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set batch print workslips option for ASN receiving

    +

    Note:
    Set this parameter only if your library receives shipments using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).

    +

    To allow or prevent batch printing of purchase order line item workslips from the Receive ASN Shipments workform.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters > Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    + acqserparamSystem00348.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click PO line item workslips: Batch print during ASN receiving.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes to allow purchase order line item workslips to be printed in batch from the Receive ASN Shipments workform.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_purchase_orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_purchase_orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7ae7eb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_purchase_orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Set bulk add to use default data in purchase orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Bulk Add to Use Default Data in Purchase Orders

    +

    When you set the Bulk add to PO: Replace invalid fields with default data parameter to Yes, you can enter default data on the Add to New Purchase Order dialog box, and this data is used to create the line items on the purchase order. If there are no 970 tags in the bibliographic records, or the tags are missing data, the line items are created using the data entered in the following fields on the Add to New Purchase Order dialog box: Material type, Destination, Collection, Fund, Quantity, List Price, and Discount.

    +

    To allow default information to be substituted for missing or invalid data when titles in record sets are bulk-added to purchase orders:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Bulk add to PO: Replace invalid Fields with default data, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Create a purchase order by bulk adding titles +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_selection_lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_selection_lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..599969a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_bulk_add_to_use_default_data_in_selection_lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Set bulk add to use default data in selection lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Bulk Add to Use Default Data in Selection Lists

    +

    To specify whether the default quantity, material type, destination, collection, fund, and supplier information should substitute for missing or invalid information when bulk-adding titles to selection lists.

    +

    Note:
    The default information is set up when the staff member is bulk-adding titles to selection lists from a record set, using the Bulk Add to Selection List dialog box. See Create a selection list by bulk adding titles.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Bulk Add to SL: Replace invalid fields with default data.
    6. +
    7. Select Yes if you want default data to fill in missing data on selection list line items, or select No if you do not want default data on selection list line items.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_claim_cancellation_notice_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_claim_cancellation_notice_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7529ed5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_claim_cancellation_notice_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + Set claim/cancellation notice defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set claim/cancellation notice defaults

    +

    To define the claim and cancellation notice information that appears on all new acquisitions claims created for an organization.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    + acqprof00344.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Acq claim/cancellation defaults.
    2. +
    +

    The Claiming/Cancellation Defaults dialog box appears.

    +

    + ClaimingCancelDef.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the following information for the contact at the library:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Contact name +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Department name +

      +
    • +
    • +

      E-mail address +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Phone number +

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. In the Initial/Reclaim Claim Notice Message-Req box, type the message to print on every claim (initial and reclaim) notice.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    The following items were not received. Please deliver items or respond to the contact listed below. +

    +
      +
    1. Type a message in the Initial Claim Notice Message-Opt box that is only printed on initial claim notices.
    2. +
    3. Type a message in the Reclaim Claim Notice Message-Opt box that is only printed on claim reminder notices.
    4. +
    5. In the Cancellation Notice Message1-Opt and Cancellation Notice Message2-Opt boxes, type the message that you want to appear on cancel order notices.
    6. +
    7. Specify whether claim reasons are printed on the claim notices by selecting or clearing the Print Claim Reason check box.
    8. +
    9. Click OK .
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_currency_exchange_rate.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_currency_exchange_rate.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b77110b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_currency_exchange_rate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Set the currency exchange rate + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the currency exchange rate

    +

    You can change the exchange rate without System Administration permissions. You do need the Acquisitions permission: Allow Adjust currency exchange rates.

    +

    Note:
    The currency must be enabled in the Currencies policy table in Polaris Administration before you can update it. See Add or enable a foreign currency.

    +

    To change the exchange rate for a foreign currency.

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Acquisitions Processing > Update Currency Exchange Rates.
    2. +
    +

    The Update Currency Exchange Rates dialog box appears.

    +

    + updateexchrate.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization for which you want to update the currency exchange rate in the Organization box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If your library does centralized ordering, set up the currency exchange rate at the system level All Libraries (sys), and make any changes to the exchange rate at the system level. If you set the initial exchange rate at the system level and always update the exchange rate at the system level, the rate is the same for all libraries and branches below the system level. However, if you update the currency exchange rate at the library level, the system’s exchange rate no longer applies, and all subsequent changes to the rate must be made at the library level.

    +
      +
    1. Select the currency to update in the Currency box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Only foreign currencies are displayed in the list. The default currency is not listed.

    +
      +
    1. Type the exchange rate in the Rate box and click Save to save the exchange rate.
    2. +
    +

    The Last modified date displays the date and time the exchange rate was updated, and the By box displays the user name of the staff member who updated the exchange rate. These fields cannot be modified.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Supplier records for foreign suppliers - When you have finished enabling the foreign currency or currencies and updating the exchange rates, you can select the appropriate currency in the supplier records for all foreign suppliers. See Set up a supplier record for a foreign vendor.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Currency Exchange Rates report - The Currency Exchange Rates report shows the currency exchange rates for the foreign currencies your library uses, the date and time of the latest update to the exchange rate, and the user who changed the exchange rate. For more information, see Acquisitions Reports.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_default_payment_option_to_check_or_voucher.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_default_payment_option_to_check_or_voucher.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bfcf7740 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_the_default_payment_option_to_check_or_voucher.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Set the default payment option to check or voucher + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the default payment option to check or voucher

    +

    When a payment is made, the Check/Voucher dialog box is set to Check or Voucher according to the parameter setting at the System, Library or Branch of the Paid by branch selected in the Invoice. When prepaying, the payment dialog is set to Check or Voucher according to the parameter setting for the Ordered at branch selected in the Purchase Order.

    +

    To set the default payment option selected in the Check/Voucher dialog box when staff members prepay, pay, or credit an invoice.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters > Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    The organization’s Acquisitions/Serials parameters are displayed.

    +

    + acqserparam00349.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Default payment option when paying/crediting invoices.
    2. +
    3. Select Check or Voucher to set the default payment option that appears in the Check/Voucher dialog box when staff members prepay, pay, or credit an invoice.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save or press Ctrl + S.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_EDI_invoice_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_EDI_invoice_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db029fd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_EDI_invoice_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + Set up EDI invoice defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up EDI invoice defaults

    +

    When the EDI invoice is created, the invoice line items are automatically linked to purchase order lines, if there is a matching purchase order line item. Additionally, you can set up invoice defaults that create an invoice line item if no matching purchase order line item is found. The EDI Invoice Defaults profile can be set to update the linked purchase order line item to received as soon as the invoice is saved in the Polaris database, or you can choose not to automatically receive the purchase order line item, and receive later when the shipment arrives.

    +

    If no matching bibliographic record is found, the invoice line item is created using all the information in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. Polaris searches for a matching ISBN in the database, and if one is found, the invoice line item is created from the title information in the bibliographic record and the information in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. If the default information is used to create an invoice line item, it appears on the error log, so you can update the invoice line item with accurate information.

    +

    Note:
    When the defaults are used to create an invoice line item, an exclamation point appears next to the line item in the Find Tool results list and the line items view of the Invoice workform.

    +

    The dialog box for the EDI Invoice defaults profile also includes options for automatically updating the linked purchase order line item, loading header funds, updating the item records linked to the purchase order, and preventing the automatic creation of EDI invoices when any of the line items has a quantity sent less than the quantity ordered. See Receiving Orders.

    +

    Tip: +
    If no matching purchase order line item can be found, or if the matching purchase order line item has an incorrect status, a red exclamation point icon appears next to the invoice line item in results list and in the Line Items view of the Invoice workform. Check the e-mail log if you see this icon.

    +

    To set up the defaults for EDI invoices:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. +

      Double-click EDI Invoice defaults.

      +

      The EDI Invoice Defaults dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    6. +
    7. +

      Type the default title in the Title box.

      +

      Example:
      Enter No PO line found in the Title box to indicate that the invoice line item was created using default information.

      +
    8. +
    9. +

      Select the default destination in the Destination box.

      +

      Tip:
      If you have specified default funds for segments and header charges, the funds will be updated to the new funds automatically during the fiscal year rollover process. See Managing Fiscal Year Rollovers.

      +
    10. +
    11. +

      Select the default fund for the segment in the Segment fund box.

      +

      If you want an alert note to appear in the Additional Information view of the Invoice Line Item workform when defaults are used to create an invoice line item, type a note in the Alert note box.

      +

      Note:
      When defaults are used to create an invoice line item, an exclamation mark automatically appears next to an invoice line item in Find Tool search results and in the Line Items view of the Invoice workform. You can use the alert note box to include a description for this alert, such as “This invoice line item was created using default information.” You can limit invoice line item search results by alert note.

      +
    12. +
    13. +

      Specify if you want header charges loaded automatically when EDI invoices are created:

      +
        +
      • To load the header charges from the supplier, select the Load supplier header charges check box, and select the fund in the Header fund box.
      • +
      • To keep the header charges from loading automatically, uncheck the Load supplier header charges box.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      If you do not load the header charges automatically, you can add them and select specific funds to use for each charge type on the Invoice workform when the EDI invoice is created.

      +
    14. +
    15. To update any matched purchase order line items to Received automatically as soon as the EDI invoice is created, select Update linked PO line item to received.
    16. +
    17. +

      If you selected Update linked PO line item to received, specify if you want to update the linked on-order item records:

      +
        +
      • To change the linked on-order item records to in-process automatically, select the Update on-order item circulation status.
      • +
      • To leave the linked on-order item records with a status of on-order until the physical item is received, uncheck the Update on-order item circulation status.
      • +
      +

      Important: +
      If the Update on-order item circulation status check box is not selected, staff members will never see on-order items with an in-process status; they are updated to a status of In when they are checked in through circulation.

      +
    18. +
    19. +

      To prevent EDI invoices from being created automatically when the quantity sent does not equal the quantity ordered for any of the line items on the invoice, select Hold partial shipment invoices.

      +

      When this option is selected, EDI invoices are created automatically only if the quantity sent matches the quantity ordered on all line items. If the quantities do not match, the invoice is not generated automatically. The EDI invoice reflects the contents of the actual shipment and may contain line items (titles) that were ordered via various EDI purchase order transactions. You can use the Process EDI Invoices workform to generate the partial shipment invoices separately. See Process EDI invoices for partial shipments.

      +
    20. +
    21. +

      In the Email addresses box, type the e-mail addresses of staff members to whom you want invoice details sent. Use semicolons to separate multiple e-mail addresses, but do not leave a semicolon at the end of an e-mail address. You must enter at least one valid e-mail address.

      +

      Important:
      If an e-mail address ends with a semicolon, the e-mail program expects another e-mail address to follow and it fails on the blank address. The invoices are created but no e-mails are sent.

      +
    22. +
    23. Select Save to save the EDI invoice defaults.
    24. +
    25. Select Administration, Profiles, PAC and confirm that the profile Email Notification: Server running SMTP service displays your library’s e-mail server name.
    26. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      EDI Invoice log E-mail - The e-mail message is a log of the generated invoice files that the EDIAgent picked up from the supplier’s site. If there are errors in the invoice, such as a line item was already canceled, the e-mail log shows the reason for the error. If there are holds on any of the titles, they will be listed in the e-mail. For more information on the EDI e-mail log, see The EDI Invoice E-mail Log.

      +

      The e-mail messages are created by Innovative Interfaces. However, the sender of the e-mail is not polariscommunications@polarislibrary.com because this address causes some libraries’ SPAM filters to reject e-mails. The sender in the From field is whatever address is entered in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.

      +
    • +
    • Generating partial shipment invoices - If you select the option Hold partial shipment invoices, you can generate the invoices later using the Process EDI Invoices workform. The invoices generated using the Process EDI Invoices workform use the same EDI Invoice Defaults settings as automatically-created invoices.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_donation_fund_categories.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_donation_fund_categories.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa06eb18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_up_donation_fund_categories.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up donation fund categories + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Donation Fund Categories

    +

    To set up the donation fund categories for your library system:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the donation fund categories: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify donation fund category table: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder for which you want to set the donation fund categories.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Fund Categories.
    6. +
    +

    The Fund Categories table appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert: Donation Fund Categories dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To modify a fund category, select an entry and click chgentrybtn.gif. To delete a fund category, select an entry and click delentrybut.gif.

    +
      +
    1. Type the fund category you want to add.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The new entry appears in the Fund Categories table, and it will appear in the Fund Category box on the Donor view of the Fund workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_warning_when_receiving_line_items_with_holds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_warning_when_receiving_line_items_with_holds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1becaa3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Set_warning_when_receiving_line_items_with_holds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Set warning when receiving line items with holds + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set warning when receiving line items with holds

    +

    To turn the holds warning message off or on.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +

      + acqprof00343.gif 

      +
    5. Double-click Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests, and select Yes or No.
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_EDI_Ordering.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_EDI_Ordering.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80a0bfba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_EDI_Ordering.htm @@ -0,0 +1,316 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up EDI Ordering + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up EDI Ordering

    +

    Innovative Interfaces offers a separately-licensed set of services for setting up, implementing, and supporting Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) ordering and invoicing. EDI services include support for Enriched EDI orders, shelf-ready items, and Advanced Shipping Notices (ASN). If you are interested in implementing EDI ordering through Polaris Acquisitions, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    Once you have implemented EDI with a supplier, your library can send electronic purchase orders and receive acknowledgments and invoices electronically (and advanced shipping notices, if the supplier produces them) using electronic data interchange (EDI) and Polaris Acquisitions.

    +

    After the supplier receives the EDI order, an electronic order acknowledgment is put into the library’s account folder on the supplier’s FTP server. If the supplier can produce Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN) files, an ASN is also put into this folder when the order is prepared for shipment.

    +

    Then, when the order is filled, the electronic invoice is put into this folder. The SQL job PolarisEDIAgent retrieves the files from the supplier’s FTP server and loads them into a directory in Polaris,creating an invoice with the suffix EDI. The purchase order acknowledgment file (POA) is used to create the Electronic Purchase Order Acknowledgment report, the ASN file is used to receive shipments in bulk, and the invoice file is used to create the EDI invoice record in Polaris.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    About the Polaris EDIAgent Job

    +

    Tip:
    You can change the EDIAgent schedule through SQL Server Enterprise Manager. For more information on the EDIAgent and SQL jobs, see the Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +

    The SQL job, Polaris EDIAgent, runs on a default schedule of 8:00 a.m. every morning and scans the supplier’s FTP server looking for files in the library’s directory. The EDIAgent identifies the supplier’s FTP server by the address in the FTP Address field and the library’s directory by the Username and Password fields in the Supplier record.

    +

    The first time the EDIAgent is run, it creates the EDINew directory (C:ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\datalink\EDIAgent\EDINew) and the EDIDone directory (C:ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\datalink\EDIAgent\EDIDone). (The datalink portion of the file path depends on how your library server is set up.)

    +

    When the EDIAgent finds electronic purchase order acknowledgment, invoice, or advanced shipping notice files in the library’s account directory on the supplier’s FTP server, it retrieves them and loads them into the EDINew directory (or any other directory specified in the Polaris Administration Acquisitions profile Default directory). Once the files are loaded into the SQL database, they are moved to the EDIDone directory. If any of these steps fail, the errors are logged in the event viewer.

    +

    If available, the files retrieved by the EDIAgent are used as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      Purchase Order Acknowledgments - The purchase order acknowledgment data is used to generate the PO Acknowledgment Report, a standard report available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. See Acquisitions Reports.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • EDI Invoices - The invoice data automatically creates EDI invoices in Polaris, and you can search for these invoices by the suffix EDI. You can select the Hold partial shipment invoices in the EDI Defaults profile in Polaris Administration to prevent EDI invoices from being created automatically if the number of copies received does not equal the number of copies ordered on any of the line items in the invoice. You can generate these partially received invoices using the Process EDI Invoices workform. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Advanced Shipping Notices (ASN) - The ASN (X12 transaction set 856) is composed of data related to the shipment, orders, packages or cartons, and the items inside the cartons. When the shipment arrives, the user opens the Receive ASN Shipments workform and receives the purchase order line items by scanning the UCC-128 barcode on the outside of the carton. See Receive using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).
    • +
    +

    EDIAgent and EDIFTP Logs

    +

    The EDIAgent and EDIFTP log files are saved in the following location: C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\SQLJobs.

    +

    When the EDIAgent runs, one file for each EDI-enabled Polaris supplier record will be created (or overwritten if already created for the supplier) and saved in the EDIFTP folder. If the EDIAgent log reports a connection failure, a Polaris representative or authorized library staff member can use the supplier ID to find the file in the EDIFTP folder.

    +

    EDIAgent Log and FTP Message Examples

    +

    If the FTP transmission is successful and files are retrieved, the EDIAgent log provides information regarding the date and time the EDIAgent ran, the information retrieved for each supplier, and the EDI Invoice e-mail sent to the library staff member. If the FTP transmission is successful, but no files were available for retrieval, the EDIAgent log indicates that the transmission was successful, but no files were retrieved. If the FTP transmission is unsuccessful, the EDIAgent shows the error, and the EDIFTP file for the supplier contains more details regarding the problem.

    +
      +
    • EDIAgent Log - FTP transmission successful and files retrieved
    • +
    +

    Began Executing 2017-04-30 10:35:13

    +

    Start EDI expired data cleanup [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    Errno     0

    +

    finished EDI expired data cleanup [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    Run the EDIAgent executable [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    output

    +

    Accessing FTP Server ftp.polarislibrary.com for Supplier ID: 77

    +

    InternetConnect - File Transfer on FTP Server ftp.polarislibrary.com successful.

    +

    Accessing FTP Server ftp.polarislibrary.com for Supplier ID: 234

    +

    InternetConnect - File Transfer on FTP Server ftp.polarislibrary.com successful.

    +

    Accessing FTP Server ftp.polarislibrary.com for Supplier ID: 296

    +

    InternetConnect - File Transfer on FTP Server ftp.polarislibrary.com successful.

    +

    Processing files AudioBookR2.txt

    +

    Copying file AudioBookR2.txt to Done directory

    +

    Processing files AudioGoR2.txt

    +

    Copying file AudioGoR2.txt to Done directory

    +

    Processing files BrodartR2.txt

    +

    Copying file BrodartR2.txt to Done directory

    +

    Processing files BTR2.txt

    +

    Copying file BTR2.txt to Done directory

    +

    Processing files FindAwayR2.txt

    +

    Copying file FindAwayR2.txt to Done directory

    +

    exiting EDIAgent

    +

    There were no errors in the EDIAgent process, invoice creation starting [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    Emailing file at location: "C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\EDIAgent\EDIInvoiceResults_FindawayWorld_SAL.log" To = staffone@polarislibrary.com; stafftwo@polarislibrary.com From = yourlibrary@polarislibrary.com [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    Apr 30 2017 10:35AM ""C:\Program Files (x86)\Polaris\[version]\Bin\PolarisEmailer.exe" Newman-R2 "staffone@polarislibrary.com;stafftwo@polarislibrary.com" "yourlibrary@polarislibrary.com" EDIInvoiceResults_FindawayWorld_SAL.log "C:\ProgramData\Polaris\4.1R2\EDIAgent\EDIInvoiceResults_FindawayWorld_SAL.log"" [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    output

    +

    (null)

    +

    Apr 30 2017 10:35AM Edi Agent Invoice Creation Successful [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +

    Apr 30 2017 10:35AM Edi Agent completed with no errors. [SQLSTATE 01000]

    +
      +
    • EDIAgent Log - FTP successful, but no files retrieved +
    • +
    +

    Starting EDIFTP - 4/17/2017 9:24:56 AM

    +

    Number of files retrieved: 0

    +

    Finishing EDIFTP - 4/17/2017 9:24:57 AM

    +
      +
    • FTP message - FTP successful, but no files created in Polaris +
    • +
    +
      +
    • EDIAgent Log - FTP unsuccessful
    • +
    +

    Starting EDIFTP - 4/17/2017 9:30:21 AM

    +

    This EDI Agent FTP experienced the following error.

    +

    Exception Message: The remote server returned an error: (530) Not logged in.

    +

    Response Status: 530 Not logged in.

    +

    If error code = 530, check username and password.

    +

    Number of files retrieved: 0

    +

    Finishing EDIFTP - 4/17/2017 9:30:22 AM

    +
      +
    • +

      FTP message - FTP unsuccessful 

      +
    • +
    +

    Prepare for EDI Ordering

    +

    To enable EDI ordering with Polaris, your IT staff verifies that orders can be sent via FTP; your administrator grants permissions, sets EDI invoice defaults and verifies the library SAN is in the Branch workform; and your library staff member contacts the suppliers that accept EDI orders, contacts your Polaris representative, and sets up supplier records.

    +

    Prepare for EDI Ordering - IT Staff

    +
      +
    • Verify that your library can send and receive files via FTP - Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) orders are sent via File Transfer Protocol (FTP), and purchase order acknowledgments and invoices are received via FTP. Therefore, your library must be able to send outbound files and receive inbound files via FTP, and staff members who send EDI orders must have the appropriate administrative settings to send an order via FTP from their workstations.
    • +
    •  Determine if EDI files should be transmitted in active or passive mode - When you transmit or receive files via FTP in active mode, both the server and client are required to open up ports to check for incoming traffic. This can cause problems when you are working behind a firewall. However, when you transmit or receive files via FTP in passive mode, only the server is required to open up ports for incoming traffic. If you are working behind a firewall, transmitting and receiving via FTP in passive mode gives you a better chance of being able to connect to an FTP server. 
    • +
    +

    Prepare for EDI Ordering - Polaris Administrator

    +
      +
    • Set the transmission mode to active or passive in Polaris Administration - Your IT staff determines whether the transmission mode should be set to active or passive. Then, the Polaris Administrator sets the Acquisitions/Serials parameter Transmit EDI files in passive mode FTP to Yes for passive mode or No for active mode. The parameter’s default setting for all new installations of Polaris is Yes (passive mode). See Specify the EDI FTP transmission mode.
    • +
    • Grant permissions to staff who send EDI orders - Any staff member who sends EDI orders requires the permission Send electronic purchase orders. Additional permissions are required for importing, receiving shelf-ready materials, processing EDI invoices and receiving via the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).
    • +
    • Enter the library SAN in the Branch workform - The library SAN must be entered in the Branch workform for each branch that sends EDI orders.
    • +
    • Set up EDI invoice defaults - Select the EDI Invoice Defaults Acquisitions profile in Polaris Administration. See Set up EDI invoice defaults.
    • +
    • Verify call number setup - If you will be generating on-order items with call numbers pulled from the linked bibliographic records, verify that the Polaris Administration Cataloging profile Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes. If this profile is set to Yes, call number information is copied from the linked bibliographic record to the on-order items according to the settings in the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table. The system checks the On-order Item template's shelving scheme and assigned branch to determine the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table settings to use. The call number information in the bibliographic record supersedes any call number information that may be in the On-order Item template. However, if the item template contains call number subfields that are not in the linked bibliographic record, the data in the template is used. For example, if the bibliographic record has a class and cutter number but no prefix or suffix, and template does contain a prefix and suffix, the resulting on-order item will contain the class and cutter number from the bib and the prefix and suffix from the template. See the Cataloging Administration PDF Guide, Copying Bib Data to Items.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Add links to supplier databases - (Optional) You can add a link from Polaris to your suppliers’ Web databases so you can access them directly from Polaris. After setting up the links, you can go to Utilities, Acquisitions Processing, Link to supplier databases and select the supplier. You will still need to log in with a username and password on the supplier’s site. See the Acquistions Administration PDF Guide, Add links to supplier databases.
    • +
    • (Optional) If your library receives shipments via ASN, set option to print workslips. To allow purchase order line item workslips to be printed in batch from the Receive ASN Shipments workform, set the PO line item workslips: Batch print during ASN receiving Acquisitions parameter to Yes in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    +

    Prepare for EDI Ordering - Library Staff

    +
      +
    • Contact your suppliers that accept Polaris EDI orders - Tell the supplier your library will be sending EDI orders (X12 format) via the Polaris Integrated Library System. If you are a new Polaris customer who previously sent EDI orders using a different ILS, tell the supplier your library now uses Polaris. Then get the following information from the supplier, and record it so that you can enter it in the Supplier record in Polaris.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You may also want to check the supplier’s limit for the number of characters in an EDI purchase order number. Polaris automatically checks the purchase order length and blocks the release of the order if it exceeds the supplier’s limit.

    +

    Note:
    Some suppliers use the account number in the EDI transmission, while others use a SAN as the account number.

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      Supplier’s Standard Address Number (SAN)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Library’s Account number

      +
    • +
    • +

      Username

      +
    • +
    • +

      Password

      +
    • +
    • +

      Supplier’s FTP address

      +
    • +
    • +

      Supplier’s purchase order directory for incoming EDI orders

      +
    • +
    • +

      Supplier’s POA/ INV directory for outgoing purchase order acknowledgments and invoices

      +
    • +
    • +

      Supplier’s purchase order file extension

      +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • (Optional for libraries interested in shelf-ready materials) Verify that the supplier accepts Enriched EDI Orders - If your library is interested in getting “shelf-ready” materials from the supplier, verify that the supplier accepts Enriched EDI Orders. Enriched EDI orders include additional branch-specific information so the supplier can provide embedded holdings data in the full MARC records it returns. When the MARC records are imported into Polaris, the brief bibliographic records are overlaid, and the on-order item records are updated so that the materials are ready for circulation with minimal processing. The cataloging services offered and the costs differ among suppliers. See Enriched EDI Orders and Shelf-Ready Items.
    • +
    • (Optional for libraries interested in receiving via the Advanced Shipping Notice) Ask if the supplier can send an Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN) - If the supplier can produce an ASN, you can receive cartons of materials by scanning a barcode on the outside of the carton. See Receive using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you are implementing ASN processing with a supplier to whom you have already sent EDI orders, before you enable ASN in the supplier record, make sure the Hold partial shipment invoices are created for the day when ASN processing will begin by following these steps:

    +
    +
      +
    • Ask the supplier the exact date when they will start producing ASN files.
    • +
    • In the morning of the day the ASN processing will begin, wait until the Polaris EDIAgent has run and all remaining EDI invoices for that supplier have been created automatically. If your library does not process partial EDI invoices separately (the Hold partial shipments box is unchecked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile), skip the next step.
    • +
    • If the Hold partial shipment box is checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile for your library organization, go to the Process EDI Invoice workform as soon as the EDIAgent runs, and create the invoices for this supplier.
    • +
    • After the invoices are created automatically via the EDIAgent, or manually via the Process EDI Invoices workform, enable ASN processing by checking the ASN box in the Supplier Record workform. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • Contact your Polaris Implementation or Site Manager - After getting the information from the suppliers to whom you are sending EDI orders, contact your Polaris Implementation Manager or Polaris Site Manager and tell them the names of the suppliers to which you plan to send EDI orders; whether you plan to send enriched EDI orders and receive shelf-ready materials; and whether you plan to use the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN) for any of the suppliers that offer this functionality. Then request a license from Polaris to enable EDI ordering.
    • +
    • Set up supplier records for EDI ordering - With the help of your Polaris Implementation or Site Manger, enter the supplier’s account information in the Supplier record in Polaris Acquisitions. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data.
    • +
    +

    Setting Up Importing and Bulk Adding

    +

    Importing bibliographic records with 970 subfield data and then bulk adding them to a purchase order is the most efficient way to create purchase orders in Polaris, whether or not the orders are sent via EDI. When bibliographic records are bulk added to a purchase order, the bibliographic title-level information creates each purchase order line item, and the following subfield data in the 970 tags creates the distribution grid, or segments, for each line item:

    +

    Note:
    The collection information, material type, and non-public note are not required to create a segment.

    +

    Tip:
    The subfields can be in any order in the 970 tag.

    +
      +
    • +

      $l - location (Polaris branch abbreviation)

      +
    • +
    • +

      $q - quantity

      +
    • +
    • +

      $f - fund (Polaris fund name or fund alternative name)

      +
    • +
    • +

      $c - collection (Polaris collection abbreviation)

      +
    • +
    • +

      $p - price

      +
    • +
    • +

      $m - material type (Polaris material type name or code)

      +
    • +
    • +

      $n - non-public note (appears on the Instructions to Supplier view of the Purchase Order Line Item workform)

      +
    • +
    • +

      $h - item template code. If the supplier supports copy-level information in subfield h, it is used in the creation of on-order items. The library creates item templates with the copy-level code in the template name. When the purchase order is released, the item template codes in the purchase order line item segments are matched to the template code and create the on-order items. For more information, see Matching With Item Template Codes.

      +
    • +
    +

    If a price is not in the MARC record’s 970 $p, the system checks for the price in the following tags:

    +
      +
    • +

      020 - If an ISBN is present in 020 $a, the corresponding 020 $c is checked for a price. If both are found, the ISBN is copied to the purchase order line item’s ISBN field, and the price is copied to the purchase order line item’s Unit price field.

      +
    • +
    • +

      024 - If no price is found in the 020 $c, the system checks for a 024 $a with a first indicator of 3, and if present, the corresponding 024 $c is checked for a price (in OCLC records, the 13-digit ISBN and the accompanying price are in the 024 tag, if the first indicator is a 3). If both are found, the number in the 024 $a is copied to the purchase order line item’s ISBN field, and the price is copied to the purchase order line item’s Unit price field.

      +
    • +
    +

    To set up importing and bulk adding in Polaris, the Polaris Administrator grants permissions for importing and bulk adding, and sets up Administration profiles and parameters. Library staff members set up the distribution grids at suppliers’ web sites and set up import profiles for acquisitions.

    +

    Set Up Importing & Bulk Adding - Polaris Administrator

    +
      +
    • Grant permissions to staff who manage import jobs - The Cataloging permission Manage import jobs for this organization: Allow should be granted to senior-level cataloging staff to allow them to stop import jobs and specify blackout times for the system or branch organization.
    • +
    • Grant permissions to staff who manage import profiles - The Cataloging permissions Import profiles: Access, Create, Modify, and Delete should be granted to senior-level cataloging staff. It is important to limit the permissions to modify import profiles because the correct settings are essential for successful creation of the purchase order line item segments. To copy an existing profile, a user must have the permissions: Import profiles: Access, Create, and Modify.
    • +
    • Grant permissions to staff who import records - Staff members who import records can be granted either of the following permissions:
      • Import bibliographic, item and authority records: Allow - Staff members can make changes to settings on any tab in the Polaris Import Setup window. They can access the Polaris Import Setup window by selecting Utilities, Importing, Full Import.   

      • Express importing: Allow - Staff members can make changes to settings on the Profile setup and the Record set tabs in the Polaris Import Setup window, but they cannot make changes on any other tab. They can access the Polaris Import Setup window by selecting Utilities, Importing, Express Import. This permission allows staff members to import records without full cataloging permissions.

    • +
    +
      +
    • Grant permissions to staff members who bulk add records from record sets and create purchase orders. For information on the permissions required to order materials, see Order Materials Permissions.
    • +
    +

    Set Up Importing & Bulk Adding - Library Staff

    +
      +
    • Copy the Polaris read-only profile Acquisitions bibs - Select Utilities, Importing, Profile Manager to open the Profiles Manager. The Acquisitions Bibs profile is already set up to: ignore MARC validation (because the incoming records are brief); check duplicates and if duplicates are found, retain the 970 tags from the brief records while keeping the full bibliographic records. Select the Acquisitions bibs profile, right-click, and select Copy. Then, for each of your suppliers, type the supplier’s name or abbreviation in the Name box and a description for the profile in the Description box. For more information, see Setting Up Import Profiles.
    • +
    +
      +
    • (Optional) Copy the Enriched EDI Orders profile - If you are importing records from a supplier that provides shelf-ready cataloging, select the Enriched EDI Orders read-only import profile, right-click, and select Copy. Then, name it with the supplier’s name. The Enriched EDI Orders profile is set up to import full bibliographic records containing embedded holdings data. The holdings data automatically updates on-order items to fully-cataloged items.
    • +
    •  Set Up Bulk Add in Polaris - Use the following Polaris Administration parameters:
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can clean up 970 tags that are marked as processed using the Polaris Administration profile $9 Cleanup Utility. See Set up the Subfield 9 cleanup utility.

    +
    +
      +
    • Bulk Add to PO: Replace Invalid Fields with Default Data - This parameter specifies default information that is used to create segments if data is missing in the imported records’ 970 tags. If you are using a Web-based selection tool at your supplier’s site, you can set this parameter to No so missing or inaccurate information appears in the import log, rather than creating default segments in your purchase orders.
    • +
    • Bulk add to PO/SL: Mark 970 data as processed - Set this parameter to Yes so that each 970 tag is updated with a subfield 9 ($9) indicating the date and time the tag was used to create a line item segment. If the title is ordered again using the same bibliographic record, the previous 970 tags will not be used again and new 970 tags will be used to create the purchase order line item segments. it is recommended that you leave this set to Yes (the default setting).
    • +
    • Bulk Add to PO: Add Alert to PO line item for multiple ISBNs +
      This parameter specifies whether the Alert check box is automatically checked for purchase order line items created from bulk-added bibliographic records with more than one ISBN. We recommend that you leave it set to Yes (the default).
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_Titles_to_Go.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_Titles_to_Go.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f7046ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_Up_Titles_to_Go.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Titles to Go + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Titles to Go

    +

    With the Polaris Titles to Go service, you can quickly check a title’s availability at your supplier’s site and bring back bibliographic, pricing, inventory, and binding data directly into the purchase order line item in Polaris. Currently, Titles to Go operates with the following book suppliers: Ingram Books, Inc. (Ingram), Baker & Taylor (B&T), Brodart, and United Library Services (ULS).

    +

    Before you can enable Titles to Go in Polaris, do the following:

    +
      +
    • +

      Contact your Innovative Interfaces Site Manager and explain that you want to use Titles to Go.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Record the following authentication data for querying your suppliers:

      +
        +
      • +

        Baker & Taylor (B&T) - You do not need to contact B&T before using Titles to Go. The username will always be GIS (case sensitive), and the password will always be Polaris (case sensitive).

        +
      • +
      • +

        Brodart - Contact Brodart to get a username and password to use Titles to Go.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Ingram - Contact Ingram to get a username to use Titles to Go. Ingram provides a form on their EDI ordering page for customers who want to use Titles to Go.

        +
      • +
      • +

        United Library Services (ULS) - Contact ULS to get a username and password to use Titles to Go. (ULS is a Canadian supplier).

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Ensure that the Supplier records in Polaris have the correct supplier SAN:

      +
        +
      • +

        Baker & Taylor (B&T) - SAN is 1556150

        +
      • +
      • +

        Brodart - SAN is 1697684

        +
      • +
      • +

        Ingram - SAN is 1697978

        +
      • +
      • +

        United Library Services (ULS) - SAN is 1699342

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_the_Acquisitions_Serials_Default_Directory.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_the_Acquisitions_Serials_Default_Directory.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1dfbe12d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Setting_the_Acquisitions_Serials_Default_Directory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting the Acquisitions/Serials Default Directory + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting the Acquisitions/Serials default directory

    +

    The Acquisitions/Serials default directory profile specifies the location where Acquisitions logs and files are saved. For example, this is the default location where import and the bulk add reports are generated.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_defaults_for_selection_list_line_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_defaults_for_selection_list_line_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5030d2b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_defaults_for_selection_list_line_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify defaults for selection list line items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Defaults for Selection List Line Items

    +

    To specify defaults for the supplier, destination, collection, and fund when line items are added to selection lists:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization or staff member.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Selection list line item defaults.
    6. +
    +

    The Selection List Line Item Defaults dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the default destination in the Destination box.
    2. +
    3. Select the default collection in the Collection box.
    4. +
    5. Select the default fund in the Fund box.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also specify which funds display in the Funds list in the selection list line item segment. See Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find to search for and select the supplier using the Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    The supplier information appears in the Name, Account, and Owner boxes. The owner is the library that has the account with the supplier.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save your settings and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_how_funds_are_displayed_in_Acquisitions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_how_funds_are_displayed_in_Acquisitions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90298a9f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_how_funds_are_displayed_in_Acquisitions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify how funds are displayed in Acquisitions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify How Funds are Displayed in Acquisitions

    +

    To specify how you want funds to display in fund lists in selection lists, purchase orders, and invoices:

    +

    Important:
    The Acq fund droplist setup profile can be set at the system, library, branch, or staff level. If a staff member has a different setting from the organization, the fund list is displayed according to the staff member’s setting. If selectors add selection list line item segments for branches with different parent libraries, the Filter branches in line item segments profile should be set to No. See Filter destination branch lists by parent library. Then, open the Acq fund droplist setup profile at the staff member level, select Display only these branches’ funds (branch/fund filter) and specify exactly which branches’ funds appear in the segments for that selector. See step 6 below.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization or staff member.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Acquisitions/Serials profiles appear.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Acq fund droplist setup.
    2. +
    +

    The Fund Drop-down List Box Display dialog box appears.

    +

    + FundDisplay.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Under Type, select the appropriate option to display the fund names only, alternative names only, or both.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you select Fund names only or Fund alternative names only, the number of entries in the fund list is reduced by half. If you select Fund names and alternative names, each fund is listed twice, first by the fund name and then by the alternative name.

    +

    Tip:
    Header funds are used to pay for charges not associated with a specific line item, such as shipping charges. They appear on the General view of the Purchase Order and Invoice workforms.

    +
      +
    1. Under Filter (Purchase Order/Invoice), select one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Display all funds linked to the destination’s parent library (no filter) - With this option selected, Fund lists are displayed as follows:

      +
        +
      • Header Funds - Purchase Order workform - All funds linked to all branches that have the same parent library as the selected Ordered at branch.
      • +
      • Invoice workform - All funds linked to all branches that have the same parent library as the selected Paid By branch.
      • +
      • Line Item Segment Funds - Purchase Order Line Item and Invoice Line Item workforms - All funds linked to all branches that have the same parent library as the selected Destination branch.
      • +
      • Default Funds in Bulk Add to Purchase Order dialog - All funds linked to all branches that have the same parent library as the selected Destination branch.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      Display only the destination branch’s funds (branch filter) - With this option selected, Fund lists are displayed as follows:

      +
        +
      • Header Funds - Purchase Order workform - Only funds linked to the Ordered at branch.
      • +
      • Invoice workform - Only funds linked to the Paid by branch.
      • +
      • Line Item Segment Funds - Purchase Order Line Item and Invoice Line Item workforms - Only those funds linked to the Destination branch.
      • +
      • Default Funds in Bulk Add to Purchase Order dialog box - Only those funds linked to the Destination branch.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Under Selection List Filter, select one of the following options to display fund lists in selection list line item segments:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    These settings also apply to the funds list in the Bulk Add to Selection List dialog box.

    +
      +
    • Display all funds linked to the destination’s parent library (no filter) - Displays all the funds linked to all branches with the same parent library as the selected Destination branch.
    • +
    • Display only the destination branch’s funds (branch filter) - Displays only the funds linked to the selected Destination branch.
    • +
    • Display only these branches’ funds (branch/fund filter) - To select specific funds to display in selection list line item segments for Destination branches:
      • Click selfundsbut.gif to open a tree view of the branches and their associated open funds.
      • Expand the branches, and select the funds to display.
      • Click OK to close the Branch/Fund Filter dialog box.

      Tip:
      All funds are unselected by default. You can click Select All to select all branches and all funds, or Unselect All to start over. To select most funds, but not all, you can click Select All and then click the check box for certain funds so that they are not selected.

      If you select specific funds to display for a branch, only those funds display in the Funds list when that branch is selected in the Destination box in the selection list line item segment.

    • +
    +

    Important:
    If selectors add selection list line item segments for branches with different parent libraries, the Filter branches in line item segments profile should be set to No. See Filter destination branch lists by parent library.

    Be sure that the selectors also have the permission Selection List Line Item Segment: Create, Modify, Delete for the selected branches.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Fund Drop-down List Box Display dialog box to save the fund list display settings.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_Acquisitions_default_directory.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_Acquisitions_default_directory.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f891cde --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_Acquisitions_default_directory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify the Acquisitions default directory + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the Acquisitions default directory

    +

    To set up the Acquisitions default directory.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Default directory to display the Default Directory Setup for Logs and Files - Acquisitions dialog box.
    6. +
    7. Type the new path, or click Browse and select another location, then click OK to update the directory.
    8. +
    +

    If the value in the Default directory profile displays the location where you want to save your organization’s Acquisitions/Serials logs and files, no changes are needed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_EDI_FTP_transmission_mode.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_EDI_FTP_transmission_mode.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36a46109 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_the_EDI_FTP_transmission_mode.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify the EDI FTP transmission mode + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the EDI FTP transmission mode

    +

    You can specify whether EDI files are transmitted and received in passive or active mode using an Polaris Administration Acquisitions/Serials parameter that is set at the system level. The mode applies to all EDI orders and purchase order acknowledgments for all EDI suppliers.

    +

    Note:
    For more information on active and passive FTP modes, see Setting Up EDI Ordering.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    +

    + acqserparamSystem.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Transmit EDI files in passive mode FTP.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes to transmit EDI files in passive mode, or No to transmit files in active mode.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_whether_on-order_item_data_prints_on_POLI_workslips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_whether_on-order_item_data_prints_on_POLI_workslips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be588d72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Specify_whether_on-order_item_data_prints_on_POLI_workslips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify whether on-order item data prints on POLI workslips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify whether on-order item data prints on POLI workslips

    +

    To specify whether on-order item data prints on purchase order line item workslips.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Select PO line item workslips: Print on-order item data parameters, and select one of the following options:
    6. +
        +
      • Yes (default) - If the purchase order line item has any linked on-order items, the data from the linked on-order items is printed on the workslip. A blank line appears if a segment does not have linked items. The segment data is printed only if no on-order items are linked to the purchase order line item.
      • +
      • No - Purchase order line item segment data will be printed on the purchase order line item workslip, regardless of the presence of on-order items.
      • +
      +
    7. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Use_the_Fiscal_Year_Rollover_Utility.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Use_the_Fiscal_Year_Rollover_Utility.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebf4cb0e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Acquisitions_Admin/PDKacquire/Use_the_Fiscal_Year_Rollover_Utility.htm @@ -0,0 +1,387 @@ + + + + + + + + Use the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Use the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility

    +

    The utility is governed by the Acquisitions permission, Run Fiscal Year Utility: Allow. This permission is available at the Branch level only and is unassigned by default. The permission is assigned by Administration Group and workstations, and may not be assigned to individual staff members.

    +

    Users who have the permission for at least one Organization linked to at least one Fiscal Year record whose status is not Closed, will be able to access the Fiscal Year utility dialog. Additionally, users meeting these requirements will be able to see one or more branch Organizations displayed in the Owner droplist box on the Fiscal Year Utility dialog.

    +

    Users without the permission for at least one Organization (with linked FY) will be blocked when trying to open the Run Fiscal Year Utility dialog. If insufficient permission, no supervisor override is allowed. A standard message, with only the cancel option enabled, will display.

    +

    To use the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility

    +
      +
    1. From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Acquisitions Processing > Run Fiscal Year Utility.
    2. +
    +

    The Fiscal Year Rollover Utility window is displayed.

    +

    + fyrolloverutility.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the fiscal year branch in the Owner box.
    2. +
    3. Select the fiscal year to be rolled over in the Fiscal year box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Fiscal year records with a status of Open or Encumbrances Closed appear in the list. You can roll over or replicate a fiscal year with a status of Open, or close a fiscal year with a status of Encumbrances closed.

    +
      +
    1. If you want new start and end dates for the fiscal year, select the dates in the New start date and the New end date boxes.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The current start and end dates are based on the selected fiscal year, and the new start and end dates are a year later.

    +
      +
    1. Select Run pre-processing reports.
    2. +
    3. Select one of the following options:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Run fiscal year rollover utility - If you select this option, select Rollover free balance or Zero-out free balance. If you are using Polaris Serials and you want to increase the amount encumbered in funds linked to standing orders or subscriptions, type the percentage increase in the Standing Orders and Subscriptions boxes. See Run fiscal year rollover utility results.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Replicate fiscal year hierarchy - If you select this option, the current fiscal year’s fund structure is replicated. See Replicate fiscal year hierarchy results.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to run the utility (or the report if you have chosen to run the report). To close the utility, click Cancel.
    2. +
    +

    While the utility is running Working is displayed in the lower left corner. When the job is complete, Fiscal year rollover completed successfully is displayed.

    +

    Run fiscal year rollover utility results

    +

    When the Run fiscal year rollover utility option is selected, the utility does the following:

    +
      +
    • Creates a new fiscal year by replicating the current fiscal year record and its fund structure. A copy of each fund is created with all parent/child links in the new fund structure remaining as in the previous fiscal year.
    • +
    • +

      +

      +

      Copies the following information from the old funds to the new funds from these views of the Fund workform:

      +

      General view of the Fund Record workform -

      +

      Name

      +

      Alternative name

      +

      Transfers (checked = allowed, unchecked = disallowed)

      +

      Fiscal year

      +

      Fund type

      +

      Parent fund

      +

      External name

      +

      Owner

      +

      Source

      +

      Display

      +

      Renewal date

      +

      +

      +
    • +
    +

    Fund Balances view of the Fund Record -workform

    +

    Note (General)

    +

    Encumbrance Limits (fund, order, line)

    +

    Expenditure/Debit Limits (fund, invoice, line)

    +

    Donor view of the Fund Record (if money in the fund was donated) -

    +

    Donor name (first)

    +

    Donor name (last)

    +

    Corporate name

    +

    Address 1

    +

    Address 2

    +

    County

    +

    City

    +

    State

    +

    Postal code

    +

    Country

    +

    Phone

    +

    Fax

    +

    Email

    +

    Note (in memory of)

    +

    Description

    +

    Restriction

    +
      +
    • If you chose Rollover the free balance, the following fields are set to $0.00:
    • +
    +

    Beginning Allocation

    +

    Expended

    +

    Percent Expended

    +
      +
    • +

      If you chose Zero out free balance the following fields are set to $0.00:

      +
    • +
    +

    Beginning Allocation

    +

    Carryover Allocation

    +

    Total Allocation

    +

    Expended

    +

    Percent Expended

    +
      +
    • +

      Unlinks the old funds and relinks the corresponding new funds from the following records:

      +
        +
      • +

        Pending purchase orders with header funds

        +
      • +
      • +

        Purchase order line item segments on pending purchase orders

        +
      • +
      • +

        Open invoices with header funds

        +
      • +
      • +

        Invoice line item segments with a status of Prepaid and the linked Purchase Order Line Item segment has a status of On-order, Backordered, Exceptional condition, Never published, Out of print, Return requested, Returned, Pending claim or Claimed.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Selection list line item segments on open selection lists

        +
      • +
      • +

        Purchase order templates

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Disencumbers any amounts that are encumbered in the funds linked to the existing fiscal year. These encumbrances are from purchase orders and purchase order line item segments that have not yet been paid. The encumbrances may be for charges such as shipping at the purchase order header level, or for purchase order line item segment charges for materials ordered but not yet received, or received but not yet paid for. In addition, the encumbrances may be for standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. or subscription purchase orders that are still open.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Encumbers the amounts in the new funds in one transaction. The transaction includes all amounts for all purchase orders and purchase order line item segments that had amounts encumbered in the old funds linked to the old fiscal year. If you use Polaris Serials and you have chosen to increase subscriptions or standing orders by a percentage, the amount encumbered is increased by this percentage for all Subscription and/or Standing Order purchase orders that had amounts encumbered in the old fund.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the old funds were selected in the following Polaris Administration profiles, they are replaced by the corresponding new funds:

      +
    • +
    +

    Acq fund droplist setup +

    +

    +

    Selection list line item defaults +

    +

    +

    +

    EDI Invoice Defaults +

    +

    +

    +

      +
    • Closes the old funds. A status of Closed displays for the fund record.
    • +
    +

    +

    Rollover Free Balance Option

    +

    If you have chosen to carry over the money from funds linked to the old fiscal year, and the free balance in the old fund is not equal to $0.00, the utility keeps the unexpended and encumbered funds and rolls them into the next fiscal year. The transactions in the old and the new fund records are posted in the General view of the Fund workform with the date and time of the transaction, a User ID of 1, the amount, the transaction type, the source of the transaction, and a note that describes the transaction.

    +

    Old Fund (donation or regular) - The following transactions are posted:

    +
      +
    • +

      Disencumber - The amount equals the sum of all linked encumbered purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges, the transaction type is Disencumber, the source is Fiscal Year Close, and the note is Amount currently encumbered in linked orders.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Expenditure - The amount equals the free balance of the fund plus the sum of all the linked encumbered purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges, the transaction type is Expenditure, the source is Fiscal Year Close, and the note is Free balance was rolled over to [name of new fund].

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. funds with a free balance not equal to 0, the money is always rolled over to the next fiscal year; deposit funds are never zeroed out. A Debit transaction is posted in the old fund and a Credit-Carryover transaction is posted in the new fund.

    +

    New Fund - The following transactions are posted:

    +
      +
    • +

      Carryover allocation - The amount is the amount expended from the old fund, the transaction type is Carryover Allocation, the source is the old fiscal year and fund, and the note is Carried over from End of year processing.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Encumbrance - The amount equals the sum of all purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges previously encumbered in the old fund, the transaction type is Encumbrance, the source is the old fiscal year and fund, and the note is Amount Currently Encumbered from End of Year processing. If the encumbrance is for Subscription purchase orders, the note is Subscription Encumbrance from Fiscal Year Rollover. If the encumbrance is for Standing Order purchase orders, the note is Standing Order encumbrance from Fiscal Year Rollover.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you chose to increase the percentage for subscriptions or standing orders, the amount encumbered for subscription or standing order purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges is increased by this percentage, then posted in one encumbrance amount.

    +

    Zero-Out Free Balance Option

    +

    If you chose Zero-out free balance in the utility, the free balance in the fund is set to $0.00. Only encumbered funds are carried over into the next fiscal year. The transactions in the old and the new fund records are posted in the General view of the Fund workform with the date and time of the transaction, a User ID of 1, the amount, the transaction type, the source of the transaction, and a note that describes the transaction.

    +

    Note:
    Donation funds and Deposit account funds are always rolled over into the new fiscal year if the balance is not equal to 0; they are never zeroed out even if you chose this option in the Fiscal Year Rollover utility.

    +

    Old Fund - If the old fund’s free balance is not equal to $0.00, the following transactions are posted:

    +
      +
    • +

      Disencumber (positive or negative) - The amount is the sum of all the encumbrances for linked purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges, the transaction type is Disencumber, the source is Fiscal Year Close, and the note is Amount currently encumbered in linked orders.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Expenditure (positive or negative) - The amount is equal to the free balance plus the sum of all the encumbrances for linked purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges, the transaction type is Expenditure, the source is Fiscal Year Close, and the note is Free balance was not rolled over.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Balance - The Free Balance in the old fund is updated to $0.00, and the amount expended is updated to 100% on the Fund Balance view of the Fund workform.

      +
    • +
    +

    New Fund - The following transaction is posted in the new fund:

    +

    Tip:
    If you chose to increase the percentage for subscriptions or standing orders, the amount encumbered for subscription or standing order purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges is increased by this percentage, then posted in one encumbrance amount

    +
      +
    • +

      Encumbrance - The amount is the sum of all the linked purchase order line item segments and purchase order header charges (previously encumbered in the old fund), the transaction type is Encumbrance, the source is Fiscal Year Close, and the note is Amount currently encumbered in linked orders. If the encumbrance is for Subscription purchase orders, the note is Subscription encumbrance from Fiscal Year Rollover. If the encumbrance is for Standing Order purchase orders, the note is Standing Order encumbrance from Fiscal Year Rollover.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Free Balance - The Free Balance in the new fund is the total allocated amount minus the amount encumbered. Since there is no balance carried over from the old fund, the balance in the new fund is a negative amount (shown in parentheses) if there is an encumbrance carried over.

      +
    • +
    +

    Replicate fiscal year hierarchy results

    +

    When the Replicate fiscal year hierarchy option is selected, the utility does the following:

    +
      +
    • +

      Creates a new fiscal year by replicating the current fiscal year record and its fund structure. A copy of each fund is created with all parent/child links in the new fund structure remaining as in the previous fiscal year.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Updates status of old fiscal year from Open to Encumbrances closed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Updates status of linked funds from Open to Encumbrances closed.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can still expend from funds with a status of Encumbrances closed. If the money is already encumbered, it can be expended. Or, remaining balances can be expended by paying an invoice without a purchase order. However, funds with a status of Encumbrances closed cannot be bulk added to selection list or purchase order line items, even if the fund’s name is in the 970$f.

    +
      +
    • +

      New funds - The funds are updated in:

      +
        +
      • +

        (Open) Selection List Line Item Segments, Fund drop list

        +
      • +
      • +

        (Pending) PO Header, Fund drop list

        +
      • +
      • +

        (Pending) PO Line Item Segments

        +
      • +
      • +

        PO Template, Header, Fund drop list

        +
      • +
      • +

        PO Template, PO Line Item Segment, Fund drop list

        +
      • +
      • +

        (Open) Subscription Records, view 1

        +
      • +
      • +

        SA profile - Acq Fund Drop-down List box (Selection List Funds)

        +
      • +
      • +

        SA profile - Selection List (Line Item) Defaults

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Close fiscal year

    +

    When you replicate a fiscal year, the status of the old fiscal year changes to Encumbrances closed, and you can then close the old fiscal year. Unlike rolling over amounts, replicating and then closing a fiscal year does not roll over purchase order line items to the new fiscal year, carry over fund balances, zero-out fund balances, or post transactions in the closed funds. The old funds linked to the old fiscal year can be closed even if a balance remains. Therefore, your organization needs to carefully review the old fiscal year to see if any amounts remain and adjust the new fiscal year and funds accordingly. When the Close fiscal year option is selected, the utility does the following:

    +

    Tip:
    Closed funds do not display in funds lists in selection lists, purchase orders, invoices, or Polaris Administration profiles/parameters.They cannot be bulk added to selection list or purchase order line items, even if the fund’s name is in the 970$f.

    +

    Important:
    Be sure you have verified that all orders/invoices have been properly reconciled before closing the fiscal year because undoing these changes would be difficult, if not impossible.

    +
      +
    • +

      Updates the fiscal year’s Encumbrance closed status to Closed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Updates the fiscal year’s status date to the current date.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Updates the linked funds’ statuses to Closed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Updates the EDI Invoice Defaults profile fund IDs to the current open fund ID.

      +
    • +
    +

    Fiscal Year Rollover Reports

    +

    You can run the following reports before and after you run the Fiscal Year Rollover utility.

    +

    Fiscal Year/Fund Balance

    +

    Select Run pre-processing reports from the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility. See Use the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility. The Fiscal Year/Fund Balance report displays the various balances in the funds. After the utility is finished, you can run the report again to make sure that all the funds and the new fiscal year are balanced.

    +

    The report lists the following information:

    +
      +
    • Owner - Name of the owner for the fund structure.
    • +
    • Date - Date the report was created.
    • +
    • Fiscal Year Name - Name of the fiscal year.
    • +
    • Dates - The fiscal year start and end dates.
    • +
    • Fund Name - Name of the fund.
    • +
    • Fund Alternative Name - Abbreviation for the fund.
    • +
    • Total Allocated - Total amount allocated for the fund.
    • +
    • Currently Encumbered - Total dollar amount that is encumbered for the fund.
    • +
    • Amount Expended - Total dollar amount that is expended for the fund.
    • +
    • Free Balance - Amount of money that is available in the fund.
    • +
    • Totals - Total dollar amount for the specific fund in the fiscal year.
    • +
    • Totals for Fiscal Year - Grand total for all the monies in the entire fiscal year. Lists the total allocated, currently encumbered, expended, and free balance.
    • +
    +

    Outstanding Orders Report

    +

    From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Reports and Notices > Outstanding Orders. Then select the organization and time period for which you want to see the status of orders that have not been paid or deleted. Run the Outstanding Orders report again after the Fiscal Year Rollover utility is finished to verify that all titles have been successfully linked to the funds in the new fiscal year.

    +

    The reports lists the following information:

    +

    Report Date

    +

    Date the report was created.

    +

    Fiscal Year

    +

    Fiscal year for which the titles are being rolled over.

    +

    Fiscal Year Start and End Dates

    +

    Fiscal year start and end dates.

    +

    Order Type

    +

    Type of purchase order.

    +

    PO Number and Suffix

    +

    Numeric identification for the purchase order and its suffix.

    +

    Header level Fiscal Year

    +

    Fiscal year linked to the fund at the purchase order header level.

    +

    Header level Fund

    +

    Fund linked to the purchase order as a whole, not to particular line item segments.

    +

    Total

    +

    Total for the header fund.

    +

    Destination

    +

    Destination library for the line item.

    +

    Title

    +

    Title of the line item.

    +

    ISBN/ISSN

    +

    ISBN/ISSN for the line item.

    +

    Line Number

    +

    Number for the line item.

    +

    Segment Number

    +

    Number of the purchase order line item segment.

    +

    POLI Segment Status

    +

    Status of the purchase order line item segment.

    +

    Payment Status

    +

    Payment status for the line item segment.

    +

    Linked Subscription record status

    +

    The status of the linked subscription record. This is only for purchase orders with an order type of Subscription.

    +

    Date Ordered

    +

    Date the line item was ordered.

    +

    Date Received

    +

    Date the line item was received.

    +

    Total for this fund

    +

    Total amount of line item segment charges allocated to a specific fund (repeated for each fund).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/AdminLeap.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/AdminLeap.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..572deb29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/AdminLeap.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris Leap Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Leap Administration

    +

    In general, user permissions that control Polaris staff client record access and functions also apply to similar records and functions in Leap. In addition, many Polaris Administration parameters, profiles, and tables used in administering cataloging, circulation/patron services, and hold requests apply to similar functions in Leap.

    +

    Other settings apply only to the staff client and not to Leap, such as the Acquisitions and Serials parameters and profiles. Some settings, such as the Staff Client | Web App profiles and the Leap workstation-level parameters, apply only to Leap and not to the staff client.

    +

    To run the Leap application on a library workstation, a corresponding Leap-enabled Workstation record must be added in Polaris Administration. If your library uses Leap within a terminal services session, you can identify the terminal server by selecting the Terminal Server check box on the Workstation workform.

    +

    See these topics for additional information:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/LeapParamRef.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/LeapParamRef.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91092fb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/LeapParamRef.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + Leap Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Leap Parameters Reference

    +

    These Leap parameters are available from the Workstation workform and apply only to the workstation at which they are set. Other System Administration parameters and profiles apply to both the staff client and Leap. The WebApp staff client profiles apply to Leap only.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Parameter

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    Default
    Media dispenser: Use local security managerWorkstation +

    If a media dispenser unit will be used with Leap without installing the Polaris staff client on the workstation, set the parameter to Yes.

    +
    No
    RFID: Auto-poll RFID tagsWorkstation +

    If auto-polling of RFID tags will be used with Leap, set the parameter to Yes.

    +
    No
    RFID: Use local security managerWorkstation +
  • If RFID will be used with Leap without installing the Polaris staff client on the workstation, set the parameter to Yes.
  • +
    No
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/Leap_Perm_Ref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/Leap_Perm_Ref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e423a354 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/AdminLeap/Leap_Perm_Ref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + Leap Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Leap Permissions Reference

    +

    These permissions are available under Security, Leap on the Administration Explorer. They control the ability to access Leap and Leap Offline.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Control RecordOrg LevelsPermissionDescription
    +

    Access Leap

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Access the Leap Web App

    +
    Access Leap remotelySystemAllowAccess the Leap Web App remotely
    Setup offlineSystemAllowAllow setup of Leap Offline app
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDFTPermRef/Find_Tool_Permissions_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDFTPermRef/Find_Tool_Permissions_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..020dd928 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDFTPermRef/Find_Tool_Permissions_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + Find Tool Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Tool Permissions Reference

    +

    These permissions are available under Security, Find Tool on the Administration Explorer, at the system level only. Staff members who use the Polaris Find Tool to do SQL searches require one or more of these permissions.

    +

    Note:
    For general information about setting permissions in Polaris, see Granting Permissions. For information on permission block overrides, see Set the Find Tool SQL permission blocks override.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Control RecordPermission Description
    Find Tool: Access SQL modeAllow +

    The SQL option is available for selection on the Polaris Find Tool, and the staff member can search in SQL mode.

    +
    Find Tool: Create or modify named SQL searchesAllow +

    The Save and Save As options are available when the Find Tool is in SQL search mode. If the staff member does not have this permission and selects Save or Save As, a permission block message appears. You can allow specific staff members to override the block.

    +
    Find Tool: Delete named SQL searchesAllowThe Delete option is available when the Find Tool is in SQL search mode. If the staff member does not have this permission and selects Delete, a permission block message appears. You can allow specific staff members to override the block.
    +

    +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Enable_locale_and_time_consistency_checking.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Enable_locale_and_time_consistency_checking.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34cf9e90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Enable_locale_and_time_consistency_checking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable locale and time consistency checking + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable locale and time consistency checking

    +

    To enable automatic checking for locale and time consistency between client and server.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open Profiles for the organization or workstation, and select the Staff Client tab.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    See List workstations in the Explorer.

    +

    + locale.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To enforce consistency in date and currency formats, double-click Locale settings between the client and server must match and set the profile to Yes (default value).
    2. +
    +

    If this profile is set to Yes and the client and server settings do not match, the staff client log-in fails and a message regarding the locale settings is displayed.

    +

    Note:
    This setting does not apply to offline clients.

    +
      +
    1. To enforce consistency in time stamps, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Client/server date/time discrepancy check: Enable and set the profile to Yes (default value) to activate the check. (This check takes place after the locale setting check described in step 2, if you have enabled that option.)
    2. +
    3. The system allows a five-minute discrepancy between client and server time settings. If you want to add more time to the allowable five minutes, double-click Client/server date/time discrepancy beyond built-in 5 minute window (minutes) and specify the number of additional minutes (0-999, default 0).
    4. +
    +

    If you enable the discrepancy check, a message is displayed at staff client log-in when the discrepancy between client and server time settings exceeds the system’s five-minute margin but is less than any additional minutes you have set. When the discrepancy between client and server time settings exceeds the system’s five-minute margin plus any additional minutes you have set, a different message is displayed and the log-in fails.

    +
      +
    1. To customize the warning and failure messages for discrepancy checking, set either or both of these profiles:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    These profiles are available at the organization level only (not at the workstation level).

    +
      +
    • Warning message - Double-click Client/server date/time discrepancy warning message and type your custom text. The default message is Warning: Client time setting is more than 5 minutes different from server setting.
    • +
    • Failure message - Double-click Client/server date/time discrepancy violation message  and type your custom text. The default message text is Log-in failure! Client time setting discrepancy with the server setting is beyond the configured threshold!
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Ensuring_Locale_and_Time_Consistency.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Ensuring_Locale_and_Time_Consistency.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce562284 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDLocaleTime/Ensuring_Locale_and_Time_Consistency.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + Ensuring Locale and Time Consistency + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Ensuring Locale and Time Consistency

    +

    Transaction time stamps are derived from both the server and the staff client. If the time setting is different on these computers, you may notice discrepancies in logs and transactions. Using Staff Client profiles, you can enforce matching locale settings for a logged-in user and the application server, and enable automatic checking for consistency in date and currency formats, as well as the time recorded for logs and transactions.

    +

    See: Enable locale and time consistency checking

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDOwnershipRef/Record_Ownership_Fields_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDOwnershipRef/Record_Ownership_Fields_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8bb0fdb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDOwnershipRef/Record_Ownership_Fields_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ + + + + + + + + Record Ownership Fields Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Ownership Fields Reference

    +

    This section lists the fields that identify record ownership in Polaris records and the organizations that can own them. Many Polaris permissions are based on record ownership. See Permission Strategies.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Record Type

    +
    +

    Owning Organization

    +
    +

    Ownership Field on Workform

    +
    +

    Acquisitions +

    +
    +

    Claim record

    +

    Fiscal Year

    +

    Fund

    +

    Invoice

    +

    Purchase Order

    +

    Selection List

    +
    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Library

    +
    +

    Ordered at (Name) in linked PO

    +

    Owner

    +

    Owner

    +

    Paid by (Name)

    +

    Ordered at (Name)

    +

    Created at (Library)

    +
    +

    Cataloging +

    +
    +

    Authority

    +

    Authority template

    +

    Bibliographic

    +

    Bibliographic template

    +

    Course reserve

    +

    Course reserve template

    +

    Item

    +

    Item template

    +

    Reserve item template

    +
    +

    System

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    (No field - always owned by system)

    +

    Template owner

    +

    Owner

    +

    Template owner

    +

    Owner

    +

    Template owner

    +

    Owner

    +

    Template owner

    +

    Template owner

    +
    +

    Circulation/Patron Services +

    +
    +

    Hold request

    +

    ILL request

    +

    Patron registration

    +

    Patron status

    +
    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Pickup branch

    +

    Pickup branch

    +

    Registered at

    +

    Registered at

    +
    +

    Community

    +
    +

    Community

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Owner

    +
    +

    Serials +

    +
    +

    Route list

    +

    Serial holdings

    +

    Serial issues/Standing order parts

    +

    Subscription

    +

    Suppliers

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    Branch

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Owner

    +

    Destination

    +

    Destination

    +

    Owner

    +

    Owner

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDSQLJobsRef/Polaris_SQL_Jobs_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDSQLJobsRef/Polaris_SQL_Jobs_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7988c085 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDSQLJobsRef/Polaris_SQL_Jobs_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,913 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris SQL Jobs Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris SQL Jobs Reference

    +

    This table is a summary of the SQL jobs that handle Polaris automatic processing operations. If you have the appropriate network privileges, you can view status and scheduling information for these jobs in the SQL Job Activity Monitor.

    +

    Note:
    By default, error logs for SQL jobs are located in C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\SQLJobs (if there is a data link, C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[DataLinkName]\Logs\SQLJobs).

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    SQL JobFunctionEnabled by DefaultDefault Schedule
    +

    3M Novelist Select Export

    +
    +

    Supports enriched content in 3M self-check machines. When the job is run, all holdings in the database are exported in tab-delimited format with the following information: isbn, itemid, bibrecordcallno, bibrecordid, title.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    Acquisitions Overnight Claiming Cancellation

    +
    +

    Identifies Purchase Order Line Item segments eligible for claiming or cancellation; changes statuses to Pending Claim or Cancelled; updates linked Purchase Orders and Purchase Order Line Items accordingly. All cancelled objects will have linked fund transactions reversed.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:10 AM

    +
    +

    Automatic Offline Circulation Upload Processing

    +
    Finds TRN files stored on offline workstations in the directory specified in the Patron Services parameter, Offline (Automated): Directory where offline TRN files are stored. It then pulls these files from the workstations to the server, uploads the transactions to the Polaris database, renames the TRN files with a DON extension, and logs the results of the upload. See Setting Up Automated Offline Processing.NoN/A
    BNC LibrarySDAFor Canadian libraries that use BookNet Canada's SalesData Analysis (SDA) program. This job populates the database table used for generating lending and branch circulation data reports for BookNet Canada. A job step added in 6.4 compiles the reports and transmits them to BNC using FTP.No +

    Weekly

    +

    Sunday 11:59 PM

    +
    +

    BookSense Import

    +
    +

    Checks Polaris for new IndieBound (formerly Book Sense) best-seller list distribution and populates local database for display in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard. See Best-Seller Lists from IndieBound (Book Sense, Inc.).

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    6:11 AM

    +
    +

    Build up Compressed Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    Generates the compressed holdings statement for serials that is displayed in PAC search results. The statement is built from retained Issue/Part records at the system and each location level. It begins with the earliest issue retained and ends with the latest, but it does not reflect gaps in the holdings. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    11:00 PM

    +
    +

    Cash Drawer Daily Delete Rows

    +
    +

    For libraries that use CLASS POS. Purges completed transactions from the table used by both applications for communication. Does not affect patron account tables.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    11:00 PM

    +
    +

    Cataloging Background Tasks

    +
    +

    Background process that manages the execution of all MARC data related background tasks, including Authority change distribution to bibs, Authority link management and Bib Bulk Change processing.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Every 5 minutes

    +

    7:00 AM to
    8:00 PM

    +
    +

    Cataloging Import Job (1, 2, 3)

    +
    +

    Importing cataloging records. The three jobs run 1 minute apart from each other. No user can have more than one job running at a time. The three jobs allow multiple users to import records more efficiently.

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    Every 3 minutes

    +
    +

    Cataloging Purge Processing

    +
    +

    Executes stored procedure Cat_PurgeDeletedRecords that performs the following:

    +
      +
    • Checks CatPurgeCriterias table for ScheduledDate <= current day
    • +
    • Purges Authority, Bibliographic or Item records that have been marked for deletion
    • +
    • Purges Record Sets that have been marked for deletion
    • +
    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:10 AM

    +
    +

    Circulation Background Processing

    +
    +

    Processes a time-out for located requests if SA allows this to happen. It also processes patron account charges that are suspected to be duplicates

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Every 5 minutes between 6:02 AM and 10:02 PM

    +
    CJ Chained Job LauncherLaunches the Chained Jobs (CJ) sequence and inserts a link at the end of each job to run the next job in the CJ sequence. Yes 
    +

    CJ PAC Availability

    +
    +

    Recalculates availability counts in the event that the Polaris Administration setting for item status suppression changed.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:45 AM

    +
    +

    CJ Automatic Display in PAC

    +
    Updates bibliographic records to turn off (uncheck) or turn on (check) the Display in PAC setting.  
    +

    CJ Keyword Processing

    +
    +

    Maintains keyword weighting accuracy for relevancy ranking in PAC search results without reindexing. Repopulates the SearchSuggestions table for Did You Mean suggestions. See Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC. Updates the auto-suggest index with changes to bib, authority and patron records for use in the auto-suggest search terms list in the Find Tool and PAC. See Managing Auto-Search Suggestions. Applies processing rules and a Synonyms table to keywords in the BibliographicKeywords table. The job output goes to the BibliographicKeywordRelations table, which the search engine uses to find records containing words that are related to the PowerPAC user's search terms.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    3:00 AM

    +
    +

    CJ DBCC Nightly

    +
    +

    Data consistency check and optimization. Performs defragmentation and index optimization on all Polaris application databases. Should be run during minimal load time.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    4:30 AM

    +
    +

    Classification Index Maintenance

    +
    +

    Maintains the PIM_ClassificationIndex used by the Polaris Inventory Manager (available by separate purchase); indexes any modified or created items since the last time the job ran. This is a local call number index that does not include the Call Number Prefix. Used for shelf list sorting.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:27 AM

    +
    +

    Clean Notification Queue

    +
    +

    Removes items from the Results Notification Queue table that are no longer overdue or held. It also removes entries from the notification queue where the delivery option is fax.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Hourly between 8:03 AM and 9:04 PM

    +
    +

    Community Campaigns Processing

    +
    +

    If the library has the required licenses for Community Profiles and Campaigns, the job creates automatic promotions based on settings in the Campaign records. The SQL job for campaigns runs every night before the nightly promotions indexing job, so that new promotions are indexed. Successive runs of the SQL job for campaigns delete all existing campaign-generated promotions created by and linked to the campaign, and create new promotions according to any settings saved to the Campaign workform.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    2:00 AM

    +
    Close Purchase OrdersIf the Automatically close purchase orders parameter is set to Yes for the organization, the Close purchase orders SQL job runs and closes eligible purchase orders. No +

    Daily

    +

    6:59 AM

    +
    +

    Copy Offline Files

    +
    +

    Allows administrators to have the SQL Agent automatically update the offline files on designated workstations. This job must be run under an account that has rights to copy the files to the local workstations on the network. See Enable automatic copying of .mdb files from the server to offline clients.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    Dashboard Most Circulated

    +
    +

    Populates Most Circulated Web part elements (Titles, Subjects, Authors) for display in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard. When completed it resets the dashboard monthly circ counters. See Automatic Web Parts.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Monthly

    +

    Day 1 - 5:00 AM

    +
    +

    Dashboard New Titles

    +
    +

    Creates the New Titles Web part elements (new books, new sound recordings, new video, new large print) for display in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard. See Automatic Web Parts.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    4:50 AM

    +
    +

    Custom 3M EContent Bib Cleanup

    +
    +

    Once enabled by customer support, this job identifies cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) eContent bibs (those with resource entities), and looks within these bibs to determine if there are 856 tags with a 2nd indicator value of '2' and also a $3 with either of the following data strings: Cover Image or 3M Cloud Icon to be flipped.

    +

    If an 856 tag like this is found, it is changed to a 956 tag in the MARC record and re-indexed.

    +

    The job runs a single stored procedure called Custom_3M_EContentBibURLTagCleanup, which does all of the work.

    +
    No5:45 AM
    Database Sync Restore +

    Dual-purpose job that handles database backup in the production environment and table backups in the training environment.

    +

    On the production server, the job creates database backups of the Polaris ILS databases. The production job should be scheduled to start after the close of business, but should finish before the training side job starts.

    +

    On the training server the job will back up the existing configurations, restore the production database backups, and then restore the training configurations back on top of the production data.

    +

    After the job runs, the training environment will get an updated copy of the production data (patron, bib, item, and workstation information) but remain a functioning, separate training environment.

    +
    No. Requires license; contact your Customer Support representative.N/A
    +

    Data Validation

    +
    +

    Performs application level data validation checks.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:15 AM

    +
    +

    EDI Agent

    +
    +

    For libraries that send electronic purchase orders and receive acknowledgments and invoices electronically using electronic data interchange (EDI). Checks Polaris Supplier records for EDI orders check box set to Yes; connects to the FTP servers specified in the Supplier records; calls the Acquisitions parameter for active or passive FTP transmission; scans the supplier’s FTP server for order acknowledgments and invoices; downloads and parses the appropriate files. It will also check for and retrieve Advanced Shipment Notice (ASN) files if the supplier record indicates the supplier can produce them. See Setting Up EDI Ordering.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    8:00 AM

    +
    +

    Expire Community Events

    +
    +

    For libraries that use Polaris Community Profiles. Automatically finds any event where the expiration date is less than the date the job runs, marks it not to display in PAC, and indexes the record accordingly.

    +

    See Enter a community event in the staff client.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    1:00 AM

    +
    +

    Hold Notice Processing

    +
    +

    Processes Hold Notices for email and SMS (text messages) only; sends out email notices by calling PolEmailManager.exe.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily every 4 hours between 9:00 AM and 7:59 PM

    +
    +

    Holds Request Cleanup Nightly

    +
    +

    Processes unclaimed and expired hold requests per Polaris Administration settings. It then auto-deletes Expired, Not-Supplied, and Canceled holds which have been in their current status and "alive" for greater than the number of days specified in Polaris Administration. See Set Holds options: Define terms and limits. Cleans up the delayed holds check box and days past first available fields if the parent check box is unchecked during bulk change. Finally, it clears data no longer needed from the BulkHolds and BulkHoldsBibs tables. See Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    4:40 AM

    +
    +

    Hold Request Process Inactive Requests Nightly

    +
    +

    Processes all inactive requests before the RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. Routing Job.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    4:25 AM

    +
    +

    Hold Request RTF Routing Nightly

    +
    +

    Responsible for RTF routing on a nightly basis.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:00 AM

    +
    +

    ISBN List

    +
    +

    Generates a CSV file in {Server - Active Node}/ProgramData/Polaris/[version]/Logs/SQLJobs that lists the ISBNs for bibliographic records in your catalog where the ISBN is valid, the record status is final, and the record is set to display in PAC. The file is used to update the library’s holdings with NoveList Select. See Updating the Library’s Holdings for NoveList Select.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Weekly

    +

    Monday 1:10 AM

    +
    +

    Item Shelving Status

    +
    +

    Maintains the optional Item record ShelvingBit flag that indicates a recently checked in item is being shelved. These items are displayed with the optional Shelving status in the PAC. See Setting Shelving Status.

    +

    Note: +
    The stored procedure checks the shortest shelving duration set in the Shelving Status Options dialog box, divides it by 2, and determines if that many minutes have passed since the last run of the job. If not, the job does not run. For example, if the shortest duration set is 8 hours, the job runs only after 4 hours have passed since it was last run.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Every 9 minutes

    +

    7:30 AM to
    9:00 PM

    +
    Lost Missing Withdrawn ProcessingWhen the Lost item transition and/or Missing item transition parameters have been enabled, the job identifies the items that meet the criteria specified in the parameter and updates the items according to the applicable parameter's settings. No 
    +

    Manage Item Record History

    +
    +

    Deletes item record histories based on the system-level Polaris Administration setting for the Cataloging parameter Item record history time threshold. See Displaying Cataloging Records.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:20 AM

    +
    +

    Most Popular List

    +
    +

    Generates the most popular list (circulation and hold request statistics) to be extracted for contribution to the “Best Sellers: Books Most Borrowed” feature in Library Journal. See Sending Circulation Statistics to Library Journal.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Twice monthly 1st and 15th at 6:00 AM

    +
    +

    Notices Processing

    +
    +

    Daily notices processing: Fine Notices; Overdue and Bill Notices; Reminders (almost overdue, expiration and inactive). Sends email notices by calling PolEmailManager.exe. Processes Hold Notices for mail if exporting hold notices is enabled; exports Overdue, Bill, Hold and Fine notices by calling ExportNotices.exe if exporting notices is enabled. See Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    6:00 AM

    +
    +

    Offline Extract

    +
    +

    Extracts data to the Polaris offline Access databases for offline Polaris circulation services. See Managing Offline Circulation.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:51 AM

    +
    +

    PAC Popularity

    +
    +

    Updates the popularity value associated with each bibliographic record, used in the PAC Most Popular sort feature. See Specifying Default Search Settings.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    4:45 AM

    +
    +

    PAPI Processing

    +
    +

    Deletes expired authentication tokens provided to library staff members for protected methods. The job calls the PAPI_DeleteExpiredAuthTokens database stored procedure which checks the PAPIStaffAuthentication table's AuthenticationExpDate column to determine which tokens are expired.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:30 AM

    +
    +

    Patron Address Check

    +
    +

    Places a stop (block) on a patron whose address check date has been exceeded. This job requires a stop in the patronstopdescriptions table like this: “Address Check Required”.
    Removes block when address check date is no longer in the past.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    6:00 AM

    +
    +

    Patron Delete

    +
    +

    Using the SA parameters set for patron deletion and based on the SA settings, this job does one of the following:

    +
      +
    • Deletes the patron records that fit the deletion criteria. Patron records that fit the exception criteria are put into the exception record set.
    • +
    • Puts the patron records that qualify for deletion into the patron record set selected in SA.
    • +
    +

    + See Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records. +

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    Patron Processing

    +
    +

    Performs overnight tasks specific to patrons:

    +
      +
    • Maintains the patron reading history table and deletes rows which exceed SA limits
    • +
    • Updates recurring EOT dates and those that are less than the current date
    • +
    • Removes completed patron account transactions
    • +
    • Removes unused patron addresses
    • +
    • +

      Removes reset password links once the specified active period has elapsed

      +
    • +
    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    6:45 AM

    +
    +

    Polaris Collection Agency

    +
    +

    For libraries that use Polaris collection agency processing; enabled as part of setup when you subscribe to Collection Agency. Identifies patrons who have been flagged for collection since the last Submission report was generated and sends the Submission report by email to the collection agency and/or copies it to a designated directory. Also generates the Update report, which includes all patrons who are in collection and have had any activity (new charge, payment, or waive) at the reporting organization since the last report (Submission or Update) was generated.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    Polaris Collection Synchronization

    +
    +

    For libraries that use Polaris collection agency processing; enabled as part of setup when you subscribe to Collection Agency. Identifies patrons currently reported to the collection agency, including each patron’s barcode, name, and the amount due.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily, every 7 minutes between 9:00 AM and 6:00 PM

    +
    +

    Polaris Scheduling Executive

    +
    +

    For libraries that use Polaris SimplyReports. Runs scheduled tasks for SimplyReports.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Every 30 minutes between 12:00 AM and 11:59 PM

    +
    +

    Purge Acquisitions Records

    +
    +

    Removes purchase orders and invoices from the Polaris database using settings in the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box. See Purging Purchase Orders & Invoices.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily 12:01 AM

    +
    +

    Purge PatronID from Circ Transactions

    +
    +

    Purges patron identification information from transactions according to settings in the Patron Services parameter Remove patron ID from circ transactions. See Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    2:45 AM

    +
    +

    RSS Populate New Titles

    +
    +

    Creates RSS feed entries from Polaris PowerPAC for new titles (new books, new sound recordings, new video, new large print). See Setting Up RSS Feeds.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Hourly

    +

    5:03 AM to
    11:05 PM

    +
    +

    SDI Daily

    +
    +

    Uses the SDIAgent executable to run searches saved by patrons in the PAC (search agent feature). On any given run, both the weekly and monthly searches scheduled to run on that date are processed. Any errors in the job are reported in an error log, which is placed in the same folder as the job report. See Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:11 AM

    +
    +

    Serial Claiming Process

    +
    +
      +
    • For organizations that do automatic claiming, updates issue/part status to Claimed and creates related claiming data according to the serial holdings record claiming criteria. Generates claim notices according to SA settings.
    • +
    • For organizations that do mediated claiming, updates issue/part status to Pending claim and creates related claiming data according to the serial holdings record claiming criteria.
    • +
    +

    See Claiming in Serials and Setting Up Serials Claiming.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    8:00 AM

    +
    +

    Stop Expired Patrons

    +
    +

    Places a stop (block) on all patrons whose expiration date is less than the current date.
    Removes block when expiration date is no longer in the past.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:33 AM

    +
    +

    Subfield Nine Utility

    +
    +

    Deletes bib tags that have been marked with a $9. These tags may include: pre-existing holdings tags; 852 tags inserted automatically to create eContent items; embedded holdings tags that are used to create item records; and 970 tags used to create purchase order line items. See Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    1:45 AM

    +
    +

    Transaction Processing

    +
    +

    Generates daily transaction aggregates and patron reading history entries.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Daily

    +

    5:33 AM

    +
    +

    Year End Circ Count Rollover

    +
    +

    Run once annually to roll over item, bib, and patron circulation counters to previous year tables and zero out the current year-to-date counters.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Annual

    +

    (when enabled)

    +
    +

    ZMARC Authority Updates

    +
    +

    Available by subscription. Retrieves Authority record updates from ZMARC. This job invokes the program MARCRecordServiceConsumer.exe.

    +

    See Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Weekly

    +

    (when enabled)

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDStaffClProfRef/Staff_Client_Profiles_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDStaffClProfRef/Staff_Client_Profiles_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8372b95 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDStaffClProfRef/Staff_Client_Profiles_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,974 @@ + + + + + + + + Staff Client Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Staff Client Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available under Profiles >Staff Client on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Automatic logon

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Automatically log on the Windows-authenticated workstation user to the staff client. See Automatic Staff Client Log-On.

    +
    +

    No +

    +
    +

    Allow Windows authentication when Automatic logon is not enabled

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Provides integrated security without automatic logon. See Automatic Staff Client Log-On.

    +
    +

    No +

    +
    +

    Barcodes: Item format definition

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the format used to test item barcodes scanned during various operations.

    +
    +

    +

    *,* +

    +

    Format: length, prefix

    +

    +

    +

    Valid Input: [0-9] any number

    +

    +
    +

    Barcodes: Patron format definition

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the format used to test patron barcodes scanned during various operations

    +
    +

    +

    *,* +

    +

    +

    +

    Format: length, prefix

    +

    +

    +

    Valid Input: [0-9]

    +

    +
    +

    Client and server version must match

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Enforces a check to be sure the Polaris database and staff client version numbers match. When this profile is set to Yes and the version numbers do not match, the user receives a message when attempting to log in to the staff client, and the log in is prevented. The message includes the specific version numbers of both the application server and the client for troubleshooting purposes. Leave this profile set to Yes except in the rare support situation where you are installing a new Polaris client version without upgrading your application server.

    +
    +

    + Yes (enabled)

    +
    +

    Client visual alert configuration

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Sets an alert message at staff client sign in and/or custom title bars for a particular server; for example, a training server. See Visual Cues for Staff Client Log-On Server.

    +
    +

    No message, no custom colors

    +
    +

    Client/server locale settings must match

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Enforces consistency in date and currency formats. The system checks that the server and client workstation are set to the same locale. If this profile is set to Yes, and the client and server settings do not match, the staff client sign in fails and a message regarding the local settings appears. (The setting does not apply to offline clients).

    +
    Yes
    +

    Client/server time discrepancy check: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Enables an automatic time discrepancy check between server and client workstation to ensure consistency in transaction records.

    +
    +

    Default: Yes (enabled)

    +
    +

    Client/server time discrepancy beyond built-in 5-minute window (minutes)

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    If you enable the time discrepancy check, the system allows a 5-minute discrepancy between client and server time settings. If you want to add more time to the allowable 5 minutes, specify the number of additional minutes (0-999).

    +
    +

    0 +

    +
    +

    Client/server time discrepancy warning message

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    If you enable the time discrepancy check, this message is displayed at staff client sign in when the discrepancy between client and server time settings exceeds the system’s 5-minute margin but is less than any additional minutes you have set. Use this profile to specify the message text.

    +
    +

    Warning: Client time setting is more than 5 minutes different from server setting +

    +
    +

    Client/server time discrepancy violation message

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    If you enable the time discrepancy check, this message is displayed at staff client sign in when the discrepancy between client and server time settings exceeds the system’s 5-minute margin plus any additional minutes you have set. The sign in fails. Use this profile to specify the message text.

    +
    +

    +
    Log-in failure! Client time setting discrepancy with the server setting is beyond the configured threshold! +

    +
    +

    Default view selected when bibliographic record opened

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the Bibliographic Record workform view that appears when a bibliographic record is opened, regardless of how the record is opened. See Set the Bibliographic Record workform opening view.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Default view selected when item record opened

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the Item Record workform view that appears when an item record is opened, regardless of how the record is opened. See Set the Item Record workform opening view.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Default view selected when patron status opened

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the Patron Status workform view that appears when the workform is opened, regardless of how it is opened. See Set the Patron Status workform opening view.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Display state in address: Patron

    +
    +

    System only

    +
    +

    Determines whether the state is displayed in the Find Tool and table views for patron addresses. Applies to Staff Client and Leap.

    +

    If this profile is set to Yes, and the patron's record includes a state, it appears in the patron's address. If the profile is set to No, the state field is not displayed.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Find Tool: Default number of records to return in a result set

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the value that appears in the Number of records to return box when you open a new Polaris Find Tool. This setting limits the results returned by a Polaris Find Tool search. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +
    +

    1,000

    +
    +

    Find Tool: Filter search results by permission

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether search results are automatically filtered according to the permissions assigned to the staff member and workstation. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +
    +

    Yes - Search results are filtered; If set to No, search results display all records that meet the search criteria, regardless of permission settings.

    +
    +

    Find Tool: Override SQL search blocks

    +
    +

    Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the staff member can override permission blocks on saving an SQL search, modifying a saved SQL search, or deleting a saved SQL search. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +
    +

    +

    No

    +

    +
    +

    Find tool/record-set-to-record-set creation: Record set size warning threshold

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the number of records that will trigger a warning message when the user has specified automatic record set creation from the Find Tool results list or from another Cataloging record set - item to bib, bib to item, authority to bib, or bib to authority. If the results set reaches or exceeds this number, the warning message gives the user the opportunity to cancel the record set. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +
    +

    1,000 

    +
    +

    Find Tool: Use initial article table

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the default setting for the Use Initial Article Table check box on the Polaris Find Tool. This setting defines whether words listed in the Initial Article table are ignored if used in the Search For box. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +
    +

    Yes  – The Use Initial Articles box is selected (checked) for each new Find Tool.

    +
    +

    Find Tool: Use language scoping display

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the languages that display in the Find Tool Value box when you limit by Language on the General tabbed page or in the Qualifier box on the Scoping tabbed page. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +
    +

    Yes – The languages are limited to the entries specified in the MARC Language Scoping Display policy table for the organization.

    +
    +

    Generate security history

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether changes to permission assignments are logged. To see the history, right-click the permission in the Object list (Administration Explorer, Security) and select Properties. This profile affects all permissions at every administration level. See Granting Permissions.

    +
    +

    Yes – Permission changes are recorded in logs.

    +
    +

    Label Manager open using

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Label Manager displays the label setup for cataloging labels or serial labels when it is first opened.

    +
    +

    Cataloging Options – The Label Manager opens with the label setup for cataloging labels.

    +
    +

    Labels: Automatically generate label for each item record created

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies if labels are automatically generated when an item record is saved.

    +
    +

    Yes – Spine and pocket labels are automatically generated when a new item record is saved as final.

    +
    +

    Labels: Automatically generate label for each SO and SUBS check-in

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies if labels are automatically generated when a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part or subscription issue is checked in.

    +
    +

    Yes  – Serial labels are automatically generated when a part or issue is checked in.

    +
    +

    Labels: Cataloging label type

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the label type (stock) for cataloging labels.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Labels: Cataloging print method

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the default printing method for cataloging labels.

    +
    +

    On Demand  – Labels are printed as they are generated. Best for continuous-feed label stock.

    +

    If set to Batch, generated labels are appended to a label file until the staff member chooses to print the labels. Best for sheet label stock.

    +
    +

    Labels: Options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Displays the Label Configuration dialog box where you specify the dimensions, font, alignment, and content of spine, pocket, and serial labels. At the workstation level, only the Settings tab is available; the Content tab is available at the other levels

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Labels: Serial label type

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the label type (stock) for serial labels.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Labels: Serial print method

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the default printing method for serial labels.

    +
    +

    On Demand - Labels are printed as they are generated. Best for continuous-feed label stock.

    +

    If set to Batch - Generated labels are appended to a label file until the staff member chooses to print the labels. Best for sheet label stock.

    +
    +

    Library documentation - staff client +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Specifies the path and file or URL to display when Library Documentation is selected from the Help menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Each workstation can display a different file or web location. The file type you use must be supported by the software on the staff computer. You can use any valid path and file on the computer or a network resource; if you use a URL, begin with http://.

    +
    +

     

    +
    Patron phone number format definitionSystemAdd and select phone number format for a defined list of countries 
    Patron phone number format validation: Phone CallSystemEnforce selected country phone number format for phone calls +
    Patron phone number format validation: Txt MessageSystemEnforce selected country phone number format for text messages +
    +

    Permissions: Use Polaris-defined new permission defaults

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Accept or override any Polaris default settings that grant new permissions at upgrade. See Permission Assignments at Upgrade.

    +
    +

    Yes (accept any default settings that grant new permissions)

    +
    +

    Proxy Server

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the proxy server that SQL Server Reporting Services should use if the web server is outside the firewall.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Receipt printer control codes

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies the features (expanded, bold, red, auto-cut, cash drawer) available for specific receipt printers, and allows you to add printers.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Receipts: Cash drawer opens for cash payments only

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    If the receipt printer is set up to open the cash drawer, this profile can be set to Yes to open the cash drawer only when the receipt is printed and the payment is in cash.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Receipts: Support Epson ILS

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Enables hold pickup and in-transit slip data to be exported to Epson ReStick printers.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Report Server

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the server and services URL where SQL Server Reporting Services, the Report Manager, and Report Designer (if you use it) are located. Also controls what organizations are displayed for report parameters and, at the system level, how the maximum number of entries displayed in report parameter lists.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Spine Labels (Dewey): Carriage return after decimal

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Indicates if a new line should be started after the decimal on spine labels, if the library is using the Dewey shelving scheme.

    +
    +

    No – Does not start a new line after the Dewey Decimal number. Prime marks may create new lines, if allowed.

    +
    +

    Spine Labels (Dewey): Prime mark to generate carriage return

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies the prime mark in Dewey Decimal numbers used to indicate where a new line should start on spine labels. The prime marks must be inserted with the contents in the call number boxes on the Item Record workform.

    +
    +

    None – New lines are not generated for prime marks.

    +

    If Apostrophe - A new line is started on spine labels when an apostrophe is encountered in the Dewey Decimal number.

    +

    If Forward Slash / - A new line is started on spine labels when a forward slash is encountered in the Dewey Decimal number.

    +
    +

    Spine Labels (non-Dewey): Carriage return after space

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Indicates if a new line should be started after a space in the call number on spine labels if the library is using a non-Dewey shelving scheme.

    +
    +

    Yes – A new line is started after the number.

    +
    +

    Utilities: Web Browser default URL

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Specifies the URL (255 character maximum) for the default web page that opens from the Utilities, Web Browser option on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. If the value is blank, the menu option is disabled. See Setting Up Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    http://polarislibrary.com

    +
    Staff Client - Web App Profiles +
    Web App: Analytics EnabledSystem +

    Specifies if Innovative can see anonymous analytics data generated in the Polaris web application, Leap.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    Yes
    Web App: Default view selected when item record openedSystem, Library, Branch, Staff, Workstation +

    Specifies the opening view of the Item Record workform in the Polaris web application, Leap.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    Circulation
    Web App: Display reason and note fields during Reset Due dateSystem, Library, Branch +

    If set to Yes, the Reason drop-down list (as defined in the User Defined Due Date Modification Reasons policy table) and Notes field appear when a Leap user resets an item's due date. To require that a reason is specified when the due date is modified in Leap, set the Patron Services profile, Due date modification: Reason required to Yes.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Item Create Workform default item templateStaffSpecifies the default item template selected for the Leap user. When the user creates a new item record, the default template is used.None
    Web App: Recent records to retain: BibliographicSystem, Library, Branch, Workstation, StaffSpecifies how many recently opened bibliographic records display in the Polaris Leap Workform Tracker.2
    Web App: Recent records to retain: ItemSystem, Library, Branch, Workstation, StaffSpecifies how many recently opened item records display in the Polaris Leap Workform Tracker.2
    Web App: Recent records to retain: PatronSystem, Library, Branch, Workstation, StaffSpecifies how many recently opened item records display in the Polaris Leap Workform Tracker. 2
    Web App: Request Manager Default Hold request status filterSystem, Library, Branch, Workstation, StaffSpecifies the status filter applied to hold requests displayed in the Leap Request Manager.Active
    Web App: Request Manager Default ILL request status filterSystem, Library, Branch, Workstation, StaffSpecifies the status filter applied to ILL requests displayed in the Leap Request Manager.Inactive
    +

    Web App: Request Manager Default INN-Reach requests status filter

    +

    Note: + This view will be implemented with Polaris 6.1. +

    +
    System, Library, Branch, Workstation, StaffSpecifies the status filter applied to the INN-Reach requests displayed in the Leap Request Manager. Active
    Web App: Suppress Field: Additional TXT MessageSystem +

    Indicates whether the Additional TXT Message field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: CountySystem +

    Indicates whether the County field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: CountrySystem +

    Indicates whether the Country field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: FaxSystem +

    Indicates whether the Fax field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: Former BarcodeSystem +

    Indicates whether the Former Barcode field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: Phone 3System +

    Indicates whether the Additional TXT Message fields is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: Statistical ClassSystem +

    Indicates whether the Statistical Class field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: Text Messaging PhoneSystem +

    Indicates whether the Text Messaging Phone field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: TitleSystem +

    Indicates whether the Title field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: UDF1System +

    Indicates whether the UDF1 field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: UDF2System +

    Indicates whether the UDF2 field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: UDF3System +

    Indicates whether the UDF3 field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: UDF4System +

    Indicates whether the UDF4 field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: UDF5System +

    Indicates whether the UDF5 field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress Field: Zip + 4System +

    Indicates whether the Zip + 4 field is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress View: AssociationsSystem, Library, Branch +

    Indicates whether the Associations view is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress View: MessagesSystem, Library, Branch +

    Indicates whether the Messages view is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Suppress View: NotesSystem, Library, Branch +

    Indicates whether the Notes view is suppressed from display in the Leap Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Applies to Leap only.

    +
    No
    Web App: Use Local Item Availability Display Order on Local Items ViewSystem, Library, Branch +

    Determines the use of the Item Availability Display Order table to control the presence and order of local items on the Local Items view.

    +
    No
    +

    +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/Administration_Tables_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/Administration_Tables_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c0164c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/Administration_Tables_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Administration Tables Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administration Tables Reference

    +

    This section describes database, policy, and notification tables as they are displayed on the Administration Explorer at the listed organizational levels.

    +

    For general instructions on working with Polaris Administration tables, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables.

    +

    For information about querying the transaction database, see Polaris Transactions Database.

    +

    In addition, the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com) offers a complete release-specific description of Polaris database tables. Select Polaris Releases> Polaris [version]> Database Help.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/DataTabRef.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/DataTabRef.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7612fead --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/DataTabRef.htm @@ -0,0 +1,318 @@ + + + + + + + Database Tables Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Database Tables Reference

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Database Table NameDescriptionOrganization Levels
    +

    Authority Control

    +
    +

    Read-only. Specifies which bibliographic tags are subject to authority control, as well as which authority tags are used for each bib tag in the table.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Authority Deduplication

    +

    +

    +
    Rules in this table determine if imported or saved authority records are duplicates of existing records. +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Bibliographic Deduplication

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Rules in this table determine if imported or saved bibliographic records are duplicates of existing records.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Circulation Statuses

    +
    +

    Identifies the standard names for item circulation statuses. You can change the descriptive names but the actual statuses are read-only.

    +

    Applies to Leap.

    +

    The Description column applies to both the staff client and Leap. The Banner Text column applies to Leap only. If a circulation status is entered in the Banner Text column, it appears on the banner at the bottom of the book jacket image on the Item Record workform in Leap.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Computype Label Printer Commands

    +
    +

    Lists Computype printer commands. See also: Find Computype printer commands and Enter a Computype printer command.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Did You Mean Overrides

    +

    +

    +
    +

    For PAC, specifies your own 'Did You Mean' suggestions for specific search terms to be displayed instead of the program’s suggestions.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    GendersManages Gender options for all users. Entries can be added/modified/deleted.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Geographic Coordinates

    +

    +

    +
    For Polaris PowerPAC, holds the latitude and longitude values for organizations that might be displayed with the Map It (Google Maps™) feature in PowerPAC search results. +

    System

    +
    +

    Hold Request Statuses

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies the hold request status descriptions displayed in the staff client and PAC patron account. +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    In-House IP Addresses

    +

    +

    +
    Identifies specific IP addresses to be considered local (in-house) workstations, even though they are not registered as workstations in Polaris. See Identifying In-House Computers. +

    System

    +
    +

    Item Block Descriptions

    +

    +

    +
    Defines the library-assigned item blocks that can stop circulation, listed as options in the Library assigned box on the Notes and Notices view of the Item Record workform. +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Item Create Call Number Hierarchy

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Specifies the tags in the bibliographic record to use for the call number in the linked item record and the precedence in which the tags are checked for the call number.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Item Create Price Hierarchy

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies the order of bibliographic record fields to check for price when creating a linked item.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Mobile Phone Carriers

    +

    +

    +
    Identifies the mobile phone service carriers that will appear as options for selection in the Patron Registration workform and when patrons register or update their account information from the PAC.System
    +

    Network Domains

    +

    +

    +
    +

    For multi-domain networks, specifies the NetBIOS Name and DNSName for each domain in your network. See Multi-Domain System Support.

    +
    System
    +

    Object Locks

    +

    +

    +
    +

    When a Polaris record is open, an entry is automatically made in the Object Locks table so that no one else can change the record. When the record is closed, the entry is automatically removed from the Object Locks table. You can manually remove an object lock from the table. See Managing Record Locks.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    Patron Address TypesDefines the address types that appear when adding or changing a patron's address in the Polaris staff client or Leap. See Maintaining Patron Registration Address Types.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Postal Codes

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Initially contains the entire list of valid U.S. Zip codes; works with the Countries policy table. When you enter an address in Polaris, you select a country (U.S. or Canada) and type a valid postal code. The City and State boxes are automatically filled in. Use the Postal Codes table to keep the entries current. See Setting System Postal Codes.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    PowerPAC themesContains the entire list of valid PowerPAC themes for PowerPAC customization. Also lists custom themes that are added after installation.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Primary Display Author

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies the author tags and subfields and their order of precedence used to construct the display of an author in search results. See Viewing Title and Author Elements.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Primary Display Title

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Specifies the title tags and subfields and their order of precedence used to construct the display of a title in search results. See Viewing Title and Author Elements.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Shelf Locations

    +

    +

    +
    Determines the branch’s shelf location options in an item record. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Transaction Logging

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies which Polaris transactions are logged for statistical and reporting purposes. See Logging Transactions.System, Library, Branch
    +

    +

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/NoticeTabRef.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/NoticeTabRef.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f321c6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/NoticeTabRef.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + Notices Tables Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Notices Tables Reference

    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Notification Table NameDescriptionOrganization Levels
    Notification Dates Not to CallSets the dates that the phone notification server does not call patrons. System
    +

    Notification Local Area Codes

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Licensed feature. With the Notification Local Prefixes table, defines the area codes and telephone number prefixes that determine if a telephone call is local (toll-free) to the telephone server.

    +
    System
    +

    Notification Local Prefixes

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Licensed feature. With the Notification Local Area Codes table, defines the area codes and telephone number prefixes that determine if a telephone call is local (toll-free) to the telephone server.

    +
    System
    +

    +

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/PolicyTabRef.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/PolicyTabRef.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55391514 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDTablesRef/PolicyTabRef.htm @@ -0,0 +1,632 @@ + + + + + + + Policy Tables Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Policy Tables Reference

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Policy Table NameDescriptionOrganization Levels
    Addresses +

    Provides a standard set of addresses for use in all the organization records that include street addresses. See Setting Organization Addresses.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Authority Overlay Retention

    +
    +

    Specifies tags to retain when an existing authority record is overlaid with a new one.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source

    +
    +

    Lists the codes for cataloging sources the organization considers to be valid sources for authority records. If this table is empty, any imported authority record with any code in tag 040 $a is considered to come from a preferred cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries..

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete

    +
    +

    Specifies tags to retain when an existing bibliographic record is overlaid with a new one. It is also used to specify tags to delete from incoming new bibliographic records whether or not the incoming records are duplicates of existing records.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Claim Reasons

    +
    +

    Defines the standard claim reasons that can be selected in the Reason box on the Claim workform.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Contact Persons

    +
    +

    Provides a standard list of contact people for use in all the organization records that require contact information. The table entries are displayed as options in the Primary and Alternate contact boxes on the organization workforms. See Identifying Organization Contacts.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Countries

    +
    +

    Defines the postal code lengths and styles for the countries in which the library sends mail. Defines the default list of available countries in the self-registration portion of PAC. See Setting System Postal Codes.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Course Names

    +
    +

    Licensed feature. Associates the organizations (branches) with the course numbers, section numbers, course names, and course abbreviations for which the branches handle course reserves.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Course Terms

    +
    +

    Licensed feature. Associates the organizations (branches) with the course terms, course start dates, and course end dates for which the branches handle course reserves.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Departments

    +
    +

    Licensed feature. Associates the organizations (branches) with the academic departments for which the branches handle course reserves.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Course Reserves: School/Divisions

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Associates the organizations (branches) with the academic schools or divisions for which the branches handle course reserves.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Cross Reference Display Constants

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Specifies the labels that identify cross-references in PAC browse search results.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Currencies

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Specifies foreign currencies used in Acquisitions processing. All organizations use the settings in this table.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Dates Closed

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Lists dates that an organization is closed when it otherwise would be open for business (for example, holidays). See Identifying Dates Closed.

    +

    Note:

    You specify the days of the week when a branch is ordinarily closed, such as Sunday, with the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Fee Descriptions

    +

    +

    +
    Defines and standardizes fee descriptions. Entries in this table display as selections on views and dialog boxes where you transact charges for patrons. At the branch level, the table offers options to select or suppress descriptions in the list of fee reasons displayed to branch staff members, and to set the display order of the list. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Fine Codes

    +

    +

    +
    Defines fine codes, which represent the various fine policies used in combination with patron codes to determine fine amounts. Fine codes are displayed as selections in the Fines policy table and in the Fine code box on the Item Record workform. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Fines

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies fine amounts, based on the patron code of the person being charged and the fine code assigned to the item. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Floating: Collection Limits

    +
    +

    Limits the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection. See Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Floating: To Branch

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Specifies what branches may receive items from the home branch.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Floating: Material Types

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies what material types may not float from the home branch, even if some items are part of a floating collection. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Floating: Material Type Limits

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies how many items of the same title (attached to the same bibliographic record) and of a specific material types the receiving branch is willing to accept. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Fund Categories

    +

    +

    +
    Defines donation fund categories for the acquisitions budget. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Holds Routing Sequences Primary

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Determines whose items can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation to fill a request, and specifies the RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. routing sequences of hold requests from the requester branch to other branches.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    Holds Routing Sequences Secondary

    +

    +

    +
    Optional. You can set up a secondary RTF routing sequence with this table, to be used after a request has gone through the primary routing sequence. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Initial Articles

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies words that can be stripped from the beginning of Find Tool exact match search strings. See Defining Leading Articles.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Item Availability Display Order

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies the branches listed as Local and System and the order in which they are listed in the PAC item availability display. System, Library, Branch
    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    Item Statistical Class Codes

    +

    +

     

    +

    +
    Defines item statistical codes, useful for creating specific circulation reports an organization may require. Find Tool searches for item records can be limited by statistical code, and they are displayed for selection in the Statistical code box on the Item Record workform.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Link to Supplier Databases

    +

    +
    +

    Defines suppliers’ names and URLs to list when users select Utilities, Link to supplier databases from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Loan Period Codes

    +

    +

    +
    Defines loan period codes, which are the names assigned to the various loan periods established by each organization. They are used in combination with patron codes to calculate due dates and fine amounts. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Loan Periods

    +

    +

    +
    Defines loan periods, which specify how long an item can be checked out based on the loan period code assigned to the item and the patron code of the person checking out the item. System, Library, Branch
    +

    MARC Language Scoping Display

    +

    +

    +
    Identifies the languages that display as options for limiting staff client and/or PAC searches to material published in specific languages. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Material Types

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Names the various material types held by the library. Material types are used in determining loan periods and lending limit blocks, and in generating statistics.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    NCIP Medium Types: Incoming

    +

    +
    Maps NCIP Medium to Polaris item material types for incoming requests, and is used for requests where the Polaris library is the borrower. This table allows the library to create ILL items with different material types.System
    +

    NCIP Medium Types: Outgoing

    +

    +

    +
    Maps the library’s Polaris item material types to NCIP medium types and is used for requests where the Polaris library is the lender. System
    +

    NCIP User Privilege Types

    +

    +

    +
    Maps Polaris patron codes to NCIP standard public and/or academic user privilege types. System
    +

    NCIP Fiscal Action Types

    +
    +

    Maps NCIP fiscal action types to patron account transaction types in Polaris.

    +
    System
    +

    NCIP Payment Types

    +
    Maps NCIP payment types to Polaris payment methods. System
    +

    Outreach: Delivery Mode

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Sets the possible methods by which your organization delivers items to outreach services patrons. Each method you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Delivery Options dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view). The method will also appear as an option for filtering the patron list in the Outreach Services Manager when outreach services processing is done for multiple patrons. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Outreach: Delivery Route/Stops

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Defines delivery routes and specifies stops along the routes. Each route you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Delivery Options dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view). The route will also appear as an option for filtering the patron list in the Outreach Services Manager when outreach services processing is done for multiple patrons.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Outreach: Disability

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Optional. Defines the options staff can select to note an outreach patron’s disability in the patron’s record. Each disability description you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Preferences dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view). System, Library, Branch
    +

    Outreach: Equipment

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Optional. Defines the options staff can select to specify a special equipment need for an outreach patron. Each equipment description you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Preferences dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view).System, Library, Branch
    +

    Outreach: Excluded Circ Statuses

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Sets the item circulation statuses that should be excluded from outreach selection list processing. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Outreach: Included Branches

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Sets the branch items that should be included in outreach selection list processing. Works with the Patron Services parameter ORS: Include other library items in selection list processing. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Outreach: Pick List Headers

    +

    +

    +
    Licensed feature. Specifies the column heads for outreach services pick lists, and the order in which they appear on the workform. System, Library, Branch
    +

    PAC Community Limit By Display

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies which filters, if any, are displayed for selection in the Limit by list for PAC community keyword searches. You also use this table to define and edit your own filters, and to specify which selection is at the top of the PAC community keyword Limit by list. System, Library, Branch
    +

    PAC Limit By Display

    +

    +

    +
    Specifies which formats/types of material, if any, are displayed for selection in the Limit by list in Polaris PowerPAC and in Mobile PAC’s advanced search. You also use this table to define and edit your own filters, and to specify which selection is at the top of the PAC Limit by list.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks

    +

    +

    +
    Defines loan and request limit blocks based on combinations of patron codes and material types. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Patron Block Descriptions

    +

    +

    +
    Defines the standard patron blocks available as selections in the Library assigned box on the New Block dialog box (Patron Status workform). At the branch level, you can also designate which of these triggers a line of text in the PAC patron account summary. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Patron Codes

    +

    +

    +
    Defines patron codes that are typically assigned to patrons when they register. Patron codes define available services, loan periods, fines, and limits for specific classes of patrons. They are also used for reports.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Patron Statistical Class Codes

    +

    +
    Defines patron statistical codes that are useful for demographic or other reports. You can limit Find Tool searches for patron records by statistical class (code), and they are displayed for selection in the Statistical class box on the Patron Registration workform.System, Library, Branch
    +

    Payment Methods

    +

    +

    +
    Sets the payment method options available in the staff client for accepting payments on patron accounts. System, Library, Branch
    +

    Search Databases

    +

    +

    +
    Lists the databases available for Find Tool searches in the staff client for each organization. At the branch level, you can open the table for a specific branch and delete any database you do not want to display in the Find Tool for that branch. See Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client.System, Library, Branch
    +

    SelfCheck Material Types

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Associates Polaris material types with self-check media types for SIP self-check units.

    +
    System, Library, Branch
    +

    SIP Payment Types

    +
    +

    This table is pre-filled with SIP payment types that cannot be modified. You can select the Polaris payment method to map to the SIP payment type. See Modify the SIP payment types mapping.

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons

    +

    +

    +
    Defines the possible reasons that staff members can select when denying a hold request. System, Library, Branch
    User Defined Due Date Modification ReasonsDefines the possible reasons staff members can select when changing an item's due date in the Polaris Leap application. System, Library, Branch
    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Setting_a_Default_Web_Page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Setting_a_Default_Web_Page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..674c7425 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Setting_a_Default_Web_Page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting a Default Web Page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting a Default Web Page

    +

    The Utilities menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar includes the option Web Browser.

    +

    + StaffClientWebBrowser.gif 

    +

    By default, the Innovative Interfaces Web page appears when a staff member selects Web Browser. However, you can specify a different default Web page, or make the option unavailable by specifying no default page.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Specify_a_default_Web_page_for_Web_Browser_option.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Specify_a_default_Web_page_for_Web_Browser_option.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c4029be --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDWebDef/Specify_a_default_Web_page_for_Web_Browser_option.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify a default Web page for Web Browser option + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify a default Web page for Web Browser option

    +

    To specify the Web page that appears when a staff member selects Utilities > Web Browser on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +

    Note:
    You can specify the default Web page on the system, library, or branch level. The system uses the setting in effect for the user’s logged-in branch.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open Profiles for the organization, and select the Staff Client tab.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Utilities: Web browser default URL.
    4. +
    5. Type the Web address for the default Web page (maximum 255 characters).
    6. +

      The Web address must begin with http://.

      +

      If no address is specified in the profile, the Web Browser option is unavailable (gray) on the Utilities menu of the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

      +
    7. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Administration_Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Administration_Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fdc937da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Administration_Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + Administration Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Administration Overview

    +

    Polaris Administration settings determine how data is categorized, used, and stored, and what functions are available in the staff client software and the PAC.

    +

    Note:
    Certain Polaris features are available by specific contract to your library. If your Polaris installation does not include a specific feature, the Polaris Administration controls for the feature may not be available.

    +

    For more information on the features and functions you can use to administer Polaris for your library organization, see the following topics:

    +

    Polaris Administration Records and Settings +

    +

    Description of the Polaris Administration records.

    +

    Accessing Administration Records +

    +

    Methods for finding and opening Administration records.

    +

    Managing Record Locks +

    +

    Instructions for finding and releasing records locked by staff.

    +

    Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables +

    +

    Basic procedures for working with parameters, profiles, policy tables, and database tables in Polaris Administration; setting staff client profiles. Setting visual cues for staff client log-in server; automatic staff client log-in.

    +

    Setting Up Organizations +

    +

    Creating and editing system, library, and branch records; setting up resource groups for remote resource access; setting up addresses, postal codes, contacts, and dates closed; viewing licenses.

    +

    Working with Collections +

    +

    Setting up and editing collection records; associating collections with branches; deleting collections; collections report.

    +

    Setting Up Workstation and Staff Member Records +

    +

    Setting up and editing workstation and staff member records; identifying in-house computers; staff and workstation reports.

    +

    Granting Permissions +

    +

    Setting up Polaris security and permissions; using permission groups to manage permissions; setting permissions specifically related to Polaris Administration.

    +

    Setting Up Server Records +

    +

    Registering local and remote servers in Polaris; setting server parameters; telephony servers; Polaris and MuseGlobal federated searching; making databases available as staff client search targets; offering the Polaris database as a search target.

    +

    Specifying Report Servers +

    +

    Server and URL settings for SQL Server Reporting Services; Windows authentication for reports access.

    +

    Ensuring Locale and Time Consistency +

    +

    Enabling automatic checking for consistency in date and currency formats, as well as the time recorded for logs and transactions.

    +

    Setting Find Tool Characteristics +

    +

    Settings that affect the general behavior of the Polaris Find Tool and public catalog search functions, including search databases, leading articles for browse searches, languages for scoping, Find Tool filtering and defaults.

    +

    Setting Preferred Workform Views +

    +

    Setting opening views for the Bibliographic, Item, and Patron Status workforms.

    +

    Collecting Transaction Statistics +

    +

    Selecting which Polaris actions to include in the log file; Polaris transactions database queries; Statistical Summary report; Library Journal circulation statistics.

    +

    Defining Barcode Formats +

    +

    Setting barcode formats for item and patron records; significant digits in patron barcodes; saving records with invalid barcodes.

    +

    Setting a Default Web Page +

    +

    Enabling the Web Browser option on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and specifying the default Web page that opens when the option is selected.

    +

    Polaris General Permissions Reference +

    +

    Permissions required to create and use SQL searches; default permissions for groups; fields that identify record ownership and the organizations that can own them.

    +

    Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters +

    +

    List of System Administration permissions with summary descriptions; list of System Administration permissions by workflow.

    +

    Staff Client Profiles Reference +

    +

    Profiles that affect the overall Polaris staff client.

    +

    Administration Tables Reference +

    +

    Policy, database, and notification tables reference.

    +

    Polaris SQL Jobs Reference +

    +

    Summary list of SQL jobs with their functions and schedules.

    +

    Administration Shortcut Keys +

    +

    Shortcut keys for navigation and select actions in Polaris.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Polaris_General_Permissions_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Polaris_General_Permissions_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f465be6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDabout/Polaris_General_Permissions_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris General Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris General Permissions Reference

    +

    This section includes tables showing: the permissions required to create and use SQL searches in the Find Tool; the default permissions for Polaris permission groups; and the fields that identify record ownership in Polaris records and the organizations that can own them.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Add_a_table_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Add_a_table_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9072660 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Add_a_table_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a table entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a Table Entry

    +

    To add a new entry to a table:

    +

    Note:
    Some tables cannot be modified in Polaris Administration. Notification tables are available at the system level only.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, display the table at or above the organization level for the organization that needs the new entry.
    2. +
    3. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert dialog box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. If the entry is specifically assigned to a branch, select the branch name in the Organization list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name appears in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type information in the other boxes as needed.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Insert dialog box closes and the new entry is listed in the policy table for the selected organization. Modification Pending appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Automatic_Staff_Client_Log-On.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Automatic_Staff_Client_Log-On.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e635bd40 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Automatic_Staff_Client_Log-On.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Automatic Staff Client Log-On + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Automatic Staff Client Log-On

    +

    You can set a staff client workstation for automatic log-on to the Polaris staff client using Windows Active Directory integrated security. The workstation can be set to log in to the workstation’s parent branch, or it can be set so that the user can select a branch.

    +

    When the Automatic logon Staff Client profile is set to Yes for the workstation, the Windows-authenticated user is logged directly into the staff client on that workstation. If the branch-level Logon branch: Access permission is not set for the workstation, the user is automatically logged on to the workstation’s parent branch. If the branch-level Logon branch: Access permission is set for the workstation, the user can select a log-on branch.

    +

    The Polaris Log On dialog box is not displayed. If it is necessary to work offline, the staff member selects File, Log Off from the Shortcut Bar. The staff member then selects File, Log On to display the Log On dialog box, where the staff member can supply Polaris log-on credentials and select the Work offline check box.

    +

    The Work offline option is also automatically offered when a connection cannot be made to the application server.

    +

    Note:
    When Automatic logon is enabled, any user in the Polaris staff client application can select File, Logoff on the Shortcut Bar (or press CTRL+L). They can then select File, Logon (or press CTRL+L) to display the Polaris Log On dialog box, and log in as another user.

    +

    Windows Authentication Without Automatic Logon

    +

    The Staff Client profile Allow Windows authentication when Automatic logon is not enabled provides integrated security without automatic logon. This setting displays the Polaris Log On dialog box to users who want to log on more quickly but may sometimes need to log on with different credentials. The profile is available at the system, library, branch, and workstation levels. When the profile is set to Yes, the user can check Use Windows Authentication on the Log On dialog box. The Name, Password, and Domain fields are then grayed out, and clicking OK logs the user on with Windows credentials.

    +

    + IntegratedSecurityOp.gif 

    +

    Important:
    If the Automatic Logon profile is set to Yes for a workstation, no one else can log on to that workstation using their own credentials because the log-on dialog box does not appear.

    +

    Or, the user may choose to leave Use Windows Authentication unchecked, and log on with their own or other Polaris credentials.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Logon branch access permission - See Special Permissions for Rotating Staff.
    • +
    • Automatic logon and PCI compliance - The library may be required to meet PCI compliance for credit card processing. If so, you must require unique domain user IDs in single-domain networks and follow secure authentication best practices to log on to the workstation, since the automatic log-on feature restricts staff client use to the Windows-authenticated user on the workstation. A generic Windows log-on such as Circ1 would be out of compliance because it would not be possible to trace the transaction back to the staff member who performed it. Library policy also determines PCI compliance. When automatic logon is enabled and another staff user needs to work in the staff client on the same workstation, the library must require that the original user log off the workstation; the new user must log on with their own Windows credentials.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Change_a_table_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Change_a_table_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..957c9079 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Change_a_table_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Change a table entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change a Table Entry

    +

    To change an entry in a table:

    +

    Note:
    Some tables cannot be modified in Polaris Administration. For others, you can modify only some of the table fields. Notification tables are available at the system level only.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, display the appropriate table at or above the organization level for the organization that needs the entry changed.
    2. +
    3. Select (highlight) the entry you want to change.
    4. +
    5. Click btnUpdate.gif to display the Modify dialog box. The dialog box title bar identifies the table. Table elements that cannot be changed are unavailable.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    To return to the table without changing the entry, click Cancel on the Modify dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Change the available settings as needed.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Modify dialog box closes. The modified information is displayed in the table. Modification pending appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Delete_a_table_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Delete_a_table_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f08675cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Delete_a_table_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Delete a table entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Table Entry

    +

    You can delete a table entry only if no other Polaris record uses the entry.

    +

    To remove an entry from a table:

    +

    Note:
    Some tables cannot be modified in Polaris Administration. Notification tables are available at the system level only.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, display the appropriate table at or above the organization level for the organization that needs the entry deleted.
    2. +
    3. Select (highlight) the table entry you want to delete.
    4. +
    5. Click the delete button. The Deletion cannot be reversed, are you sure? message box appears.
    6. +
    7. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the entry. The entry is removed from the table entries.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Editing_Parameters_Profiles_and_Tables.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Editing_Parameters_Profiles_and_Tables.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72861c20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Editing_Parameters_Profiles_and_Tables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables

    +

    Polaris parameter and profile settings, as well as policy and database tables, control how Polaris functions. Most settings are established during Polaris implementation and installation. You can modify most of them as needed through Polaris Administration workforms and the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Some organization levels have specific settings not shared with any other level, while other settings are shared. For example, a branch may have its own unique settings for many functions, but inherit other settings from the library and system levels. Polaris uses settings from the lowest organizational level in which they are defined. If a setting is not defined at the lowest organization level (branch), Polaris looks for it at the next highest level (library). If a setting is not found at the library level, the setting defined at the system level is used. Certain parameters and profiles can be set only at a specific organizational level. Some settings can be made at the workstation or staff member level, and these apply only to the workstation or staff member.

    +

    For some settings, especially those dealing with cataloging policies, the libraries and branches in your system need to agree on the policies to be implemented because they apply to all organizations. Others must be set individually for every organization in Polaris.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris Administration settings also control organization security and permissions. See Granting Permissions.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Inherit_a_setting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Inherit_a_setting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebe045e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Inherit_a_setting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Inherit a setting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Inherit a Setting

    +

    To have a record take a setting from the next higher organization level:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot inherit a setting from the organization, staff member, or workstation workform.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization, workstation, or staff member that should inherit the setting.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) Parameters or Profiles in the list under the expanded folder. The Parameters or Profiles tabs are displayed in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Click the tab for the category that contains the setting you want the record to inherit. The tabbed page for the category is displayed.
    4. +
    5. Select the parameter or profile you want the record to inherit from the higher level setting.
    6. +
    7. Click dInheritIcn.gif on the list tool bar, or press CTRL+I.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    Certain settings cannot be inherited. The arrow button is unavailable when these settings are selected.

    +

    The setting changes to that of the next higher organization.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Reorder_table_entries.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Reorder_table_entries.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc294318 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Reorder_table_entries.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Reorder table entries + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reorder Table Entries

    +

    For certain tables, the order in which entries appear in the table affects the operations controlled by the table. For example, the position of entries in the Holds Routing Sequences table determines the order in which hold requests are sent from one branch to the next.

    +

    To reorder the entries in these tables:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, display the appropriate table for the organization that needs the entry reordered.
    2. +
    3. Select (highlight) the entry you want to reposition.
    4. +
    5. Change the position of the entry using the following table toolbar buttons:
      • To move an entry up in the list, click btnUpArrow.gif.
      • To move an entry down in the list, click btnDownArrow.gif.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If the buttons are unavailable, you cannot change the order of the entries in the table.

    +

    The order number value changes for the entry as you position the entry. Modification pending appears in the status bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Restore_an_inherited_setting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Restore_an_inherited_setting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d81a002c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Restore_an_inherited_setting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Restore an inherited setting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Restore an Inherited Setting

    +

    To reset a parameter or profile to settings inherited from a higher organizational level:

    +

    Note:
    This function is available only for certain parameters and profiles.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization, workstation, or staff member.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) Parameters or Profiles in the list under the expanded folder. The Parameters or Profiles tabs are displayed in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Click the tab for the category that contains the setting you want to reset. The tabbed page for the category is displayed.
    4. +
    5. Select the parameter or profile you want to reset.
    6. +
    7. Click dResetIcn.gif on the list tool bar, or press CTRL+R.
    8. +
    +

    The original setting is restored.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_and_profiles_from_a_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_and_profiles_from_a_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39eced8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_and_profiles_from_a_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + Set parameters and profiles from a workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set parameters and profiles from a workform

    +

    To set parameters and profiles from an administration record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following methods to open the Polaris Find Tool:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select Administration, Record Type on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. For example, to search for a branch record, select Administration, Branch.
    • +
    • If the Administration Explorer is open, select File > Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type to find.
    • +
    +

    The Polaris Find Tool opens.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the administration record.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The appropriate workform appears.
    4. +
    5. To display parameters, select View > Parameters, and select a category. The parameters for the selected category display in the Parameters view of the workform.
    6. +
    +

    Tip: 
    You can also click the Parameters icon ParametersIcon.gif to display the Parameters list in the workform. Then click SelectCategory.gif above the list, and select a parameters category.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To display profiles, select View > Profiles and select a category.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: 
    You can click CTRL+G to cycle through the workform views, or click the Profiles icon ProfilesIcon.gif to display the Profiles list in the workform. Then click  above the list, and select a profiles category.

    +

    The Profiles view of the workform displays the category’s profiles.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the setting you want to change. The field or a dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Change the setting by typing new values or selecting options.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    To reset the field to the last saved value, press ESC.

    +
      +
    1. To close a field, do one of the following actions:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select another parameter or profile.
    • +
    • Press ENTER.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To close a dialog box, click OK.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the changes. Record(s) saved appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your changes in the staff client application, exit the staff client application and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_or_profiles_from_the_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_or_profiles_from_the_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e0b040a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Set_parameters_or_profiles_from_the_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Set parameters or profiles from the Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set parameters or profiles from the Explorer

    +

    To set parameters or profiles using the Administration Explorer:

    +

    Note:
    To set parameters and profiles, you need the permissions Modify parameters: Allow and Modify profiles: Allow. See Granting Permissions.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the organization, workstation, or staff member folder.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) Parameters or Profiles in the list under the expanded folder. The Parameters or Profiles tabs are displayed in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Select the tab for the category that contains the setting you want to change. The tabbed page for the category is displayed.
    4. +
    5. Double-click the setting you want to change. The field or a dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Change the setting by typing new values or selecting options.
    8. +
    +

    Tip:
    To reset the field to the last saved value, press ESC.

    +
      +
    1. To close a field, do one of the following actions:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select another parameter or profile in the tree view of the Explorer.
    • +
    • Press ENTER.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To close a dialog box, select OK.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save your changes. Record(s) saved appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Some changes require you to exit Polaris and log back in to see the effects of your changes in the staff client application.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3b35151 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Parameters and Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Parameters and Profiles

    +

    Parameter and profile settings customize the Polaris staff and public access applications for the specific organizations, workstations, and staff members in your system. You can set parameters and profiles by any of the following methods:

    +
      +
    • Going to the organizational level and entering a setting
    • +
    • Giving (transmitting) a setting to multiple lower organizations, workstations, and staff members
    • +
    • Taking (inheriting) the setting from the next level above
    • +
    +

    You can identify the level at which a parameter or profile has been set by a small icon in the Administration Explorer or on a workform:

    +
      +
    • + dIcnPolrs.gif – Setting has not been changed since Polaris was installed.
    • +
    • + dIcnSystem.gif – Setting belongs to the system organization level. All organizations use the setting unless it is changed at a lower level. If the icon is displayed for settings opened at the library and branch level, then the setting is shared by all other organizations in the Polaris installation. If the setting is changed at the library or branch level, the change applies to the whole system.
    • +
    • + dIcnServer.gif - Setting belongs to the server level. All organizations use the setting.
    • +
    • + dIcnLibrary.gif - Setting belongs to the library organization level. If the icon is displayed for settings opened at the branch level, then the setting is shared by all branches in the library.
    • +
    • + dIcnBranch.gif - Setting belongs to the branch organization level. Each branch in the Polaris installation can have its own setting, different from other branches.
    • +
    • + dIcnWorkStatn.gif - Setting belongs to the workstation. Each workstation can have its own setting, different from other workstations at the same branch.
    • +
    • + dIcnStaf.gif - Setting belongs to the staff member. Each staff member record can have its own setting, different from other staff members at the same branch.
    • +
    +

    Parameters are guidelines for the way Polaris operates. They are set at the system, library and branch levels. Some parameters can be set at more than one level. They are organized in the following categories:

    +
      +
    • Acquisitions/Serials
    • +
    • Patron Services
    • +
    • Cataloging
    • +
    • PAC
    • +
    • Notification (mail, e-mail, and telephone notification)
    • +
    • SelfCheck Unit (SIP units and Polaris ExpressCheck)
    • +
    • Request (holds and ILL)
    • +
    • Credit Card Payment
    • +
    • NCIP
    • +
    +

    Profiles represent library policies in the operation of Polaris, and define what is displayed in the staff client and PAC user interfaces. They apply to system, library, branch, workstation, and staff levels. Some profiles can be set at more than one level. They are organized in the following categories:

    +
      +
    • Acquisitions/Serials
    • +
    • Patron Services
    • +
    • Cataloging
    • +
    • PAC (Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris Mobile PAC)
    • +
    • PowerPAC (Polaris PowerPAC; certain settings affect Mobile PAC)
    • +
    • Children's PAC (Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition)
    • +
    • Staff Client (Polaris staff client, Polaris Web App [Leap])
    • +
    • Mobile PAC (Polaris Mobile PAC)
    • +
    • Community (Polaris Community Profiles)
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Staff_Client_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Staff_Client_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3f85f18 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Setting_Staff_Client_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Staff Client Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Staff Client Profiles

    +

    In general, you can set staff client profiles at the system, library, branch, workstation, and staff member levels, although certain staff client profiles are not available at all levels. Settings for organization levels define the default profile settings for subordinate organizations, workstations, and staff members. Each level can have a different setting. If a staff client profile is not set at a particular level, the setting from the level above it is used. You can set staff client profiles from the Administration Explorer or from an administration workform.

    +

    The staff client profiles control the following functions in the Polaris staff client:

    + +

    For a list of staff client profiles, see Staff Client Profiles Reference.

    +

    To set staff client profiles:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the organization, workstation, or staff member, and select Profiles.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select and edit the profile you want to change. For general editing methods, see Setting Parameters and Profiles. For information about specific staff client profiles, see Staff Client Profiles Reference.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save your changes. Record(s) saved appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of some changes in the staff client application, you may need to exit the staff client application and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Transmit_a_parameter_or_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Transmit_a_parameter_or_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3763771 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Transmit_a_parameter_or_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Transmit a parameter or profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Transmit a parameter or profile

    +

    You can transmit a setting from a higher organization level to a lower one, for example from the library level to all the library’s associated branches.

    +

    To give selected parameter or profile settings to lower organization levels:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot transmit a setting from the organization workform.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization from which you want to transmit the setting.
    2. +
    3. Select (highlight) Parameters or Profiles in the list under the expanded organization. The Parameters or Profiles tabs are displayed in the details view of the Explorer.
    4. +
    5. Click the tab for the category that contains the setting you want to transmit. The tabbed page for the category is displayed.
    6. +
    7. Select the parameter or profile you want to transmit to subordinate levels.
    8. +
    9. Click dTransmitIcn.gif on the list tool bar, or press CTRL+T.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    Certain settings cannot be transmitted. The arrow button is unavailable when these settings are selected.

    +

    + dTransFromList.gif 

    +

    The Transmit to Lower Levels dialog box appears.

    +

    + dTransmitDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the selection (left) list, select the organizations, workstations, and staff members to which you want to transmit the setting.
    2. +
    3. Click Add to move the selections to the copy (right) list, and click OK. The dialog box closes.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Visual_Cues_for_Staff_Client_Log-On_Server.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Visual_Cues_for_Staff_Client_Log-On_Server.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..776166b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Visual_Cues_for_Staff_Client_Log-On_Server.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + Visual Cues for Staff Client Log-On Server + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Visual Cues for Staff Client Log-On Server

    +

    You can set a message to alert the user that he or she is attempting to log on to the staff client on the training server, and once the user has logged on, to indicate the log-on server through custom colors on the title bars of staff client workforms. The user can do such tasks as comparing data from a production and a training environment, easily identifying the data from each client. For example, the user may wish to display parallel workforms from both servers, so that Polaris Administration settings and data can be copied from one to the other.

    +

    Note:
    These features were developed for use on training or non-production servers, but they are not limited to that situation. You can set the options described in this section on any Polaris application server.

    +

    You can set an alert message, custom colors, or both features. Your settings override the workstation’s Windows display settings because the purpose is to alert the user that he or she is logged into a “special use” server.

    +

    When you set custom colors, they appear on the Polaris Shortcut bar and workforms, all dialog boxes, the Report Manager, and the Label Manager. The custom colors override any Windows themes such as color and transparency. The illustration shows some examples of Polaris workforms using the default custom color.

    +

    + ClientColorExample.gif 

    +

    To set a log-on alert message, custom title bar colors, or both features:

    +
      +
    1. On the training server or other non-production server (or any Polaris application server where you want to use these features), in the Administration Explorer tree view, select Profiles for the system, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Client visual alert configuration. The Client Visual Alert Configuration dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + ClietnVisAlertConfig.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. To specify an alert message, check Logon alert message and type the message (255 character maximum) in the field just below the alert message option.
    2. +
    +

    + ClientLogonAlertMsg.gif +  

    +

    Note:

    To clear a previous set message, clear the Logon alert message check box.

    +
      +
    1. To use custom colors for the Polaris workform title bars, check Enable custom title bar colors.
    2. +
    +

    You can use the default violet and plum for the active and inactive windows, or specify custom colors. To specify your own custom colors, follow these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Select the drop-down arrow for the Active window or Inactive window to access the color picker.
    2. +
    +

    + ClientColor.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. Click a color, or click Other to open the color tool.
    2. +
    +

    + ClientColorStd.gif +  

    +
      +
    • To select a color on the Standard tab of the color tool, click Select and click a color or gray-scale value.
    • +
    • Or click the Custom tab to select a color from a continuous palette. Alternatively, you can type standard RGB values.
    • +
    +

    + ClientColorCust.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close the color tool.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to close the Client Visual Alert Configuration dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    After you have set an alert message and/or custom colors, you must log off the Polaris staff client and log on again for the changes to take effect.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_policy_tables_on_an_organization_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_policy_tables_on_an_organization_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ff75f45 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_policy_tables_on_an_organization_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + Work with policy tables on an organization workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Work with policy tables on an organization workform

    +

    To access policy tables from an administration record workform:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot access Database or Notification tables from a workform. Use the Administration Explorer to work with these tables. See Work with Tables from the Administration Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following methods to open the Polaris Find Tool:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select Administration > Record Type on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. For example, to search for a branch record, select Administration > Branch.
    • +
    • If the Administration Explorer is open, select File > Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type to find.
    • +
    +

    The Polaris Find Tool opens.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the administration record.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The appropriate workform appears.
    4. +
    +

    Tip: 
    Click TablesIcon.gif to display the Tables list in the workform. Then click btnCategory.gif above the list, and select a table.

    +
      +
    1. Select View > Tables to display the Tables menu.
    2. +
    +

    + dPolicyMenu.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a table from the Tables menu. The entries in the selected table display in the Table view of the workform.
    2. +
    +

    + dPolicyVu.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Change the table as needed, and select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    All editing options may not be available for a specific table.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_tables_from_the_Administration_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_tables_from_the_Administration_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fdfef1b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Work_with_tables_from_the_Administration_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Work with tables from the Administration Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Work with Tables from the Administration Explorer

    +

    To work with tables from the Administration Explorer:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Notification tables are available only at the system level.

    +
      +
    1. Expand Policy Tables, Database Tables, or Notification Tables.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) the table you want to modify. The table appears in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. To sort the table, click the appropriate column heading. Click the same heading a second time to reverse the sort order.
    4. +
    5. Change the table as needed:
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    All editing options may not be available for a specific table, and some tables cannot be modified in Polaris Administration.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    It may be necessary to exit the Polaris staff client application and log back in to see the effects of some table changes.

    +

    See also: Administration Tables Reference.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Working_with_Tables.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Working_with_Tables.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08db5dd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDattribut/Working_with_Tables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + Working with Tables + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Tables

    +

    Policy tables, database tables, and notification tables control specific operating polices, database characteristics, and certain telephone notification settings. Table settings cannot be transmitted or inherited. For some tables, the settings apply system-wide, while other table settings must be defined specifically for each organization.

    +

    Administration Tables Displayed at the System Level

    +

    If a Polaris Administration table has too many rows to display at the system level (more than 5000), a message shows the number of rows and indicates if entries can be added at the system level. For the tables that allow bulk entries at the system level (where the same description is used across multiple branches), you can access the table at the system level and add entries even if the rows exceed the limit. For tables that do not allow bulk entries, you cannot access the table or add entries at the system level if the number of rows exceeds the limit.

    +

    The following message appears when you open the Item Statistical Class Codes policy table, the Patron Statistical Class Codes policy table, or the Shelf Locations database table at the system level and the table has more than 5000 rows:This table is too large to display at the System level (16241rows). You can insert new rows here. They will be saved and display at the Library and Branch level.

    +

    You can add entries to these tables for duplicate descriptions across multiple organizations. You can also modify entries for all three tables and delete entries from the Shelf Locations database table at the system level.

    +

    When you add or modify entries at the system level, duplicate detection is performed, and a message shows the number of duplicates and the number of successful entries/modifications:

    +
    xx duplicate were found +
    +
    xx rows were inserted/modified successfully. +
    +
    The duplicates have been removed/replaced +
    +

    If the table has 50 rows or more or many branches, you may notice a delay while duplicate detection processing takes place. Tables that may be susceptible to this delay include:

    +
      +
    • Shelf Location
    • +
    • Patron Statistical Codes
    • +
    • Fine Codes
    • +
    • Dates Closed
    • +
    • School/Divisions
    • +
    • Course Terms
    • +
    • Course Names
    • +
    +

    If you attempt to access one of the following tables that do not allow bulk entries at the system level, and that table exceeds 5000 rows, the message displays only the first sentence, This table is too large to display at the System level (21400 rows).

    +
      +
    • Fines policy table
    • +
    • Loan Periods policy table
    • +
    • Holds Routing Sequences Primary policy table
    • +
    • Holds Routing Sequences Secondary policy table
    • +
    • Floating: To Branch policy table
    • +
    • Floating: Material Types policy table
    • +
    • Floating: Material Type Limits policy table
    • +
    • Outreach: Included Branches policy table
    • +
    +

    Policy Tables

    +

    Policy tables specify the operating policies of organizations in the system. Some policy tables work together to form organization-specific policies.

    +

    Example:
    The Patron Codes policy table at the system level defines patron classifications, such as Adult or Staff. The Fine Codes table defines various fine descriptions for an organization, such as Standard Fine Rate and Music CDs, without specifying actual rates. The Fines table establishes the actual organization-specific fine rates based on combinations of Patron Codes and Fine Codes.

    +

    Some policy tables can be opened from the Administration Explorer or from an organization workform. Other policy tables are available only from the Administration Explorer or only on an organization workform.

    +

    All tables can be opened at the system level. As a general rule, if a table contains no organization ID or name, then the table is used by all organizations. These tables display the same entries at the system, library, and branch levels. If the table contains an organization ID or name, the library or branch can have its own unique entries.

    +

    You must have the permission Access tables: Allow for your organization level to change a specific policy table. Only one person at a time can open a policy table.

    +

    See also: Policy Tables Reference

    +

    Database Tables

    +

    Database tables help define how certain aspects of the Polaris catalog database work, such as authority control and bibliographic indexing, as well as what settings are available in certain fields and drop-down boxes in the Polaris staff client. Some tables are set at implementation and cannot be altered. Other tables can be edited.

    +

    Database tables are available from the Administration Explorer at the system, library, and branch levels. Changes to these tables at any level apply to all organizations. To modify a database table, you must have specific permission for the table.

    +

    If you need to change a table that cannot be modified from Polaris Administration, either contact Polaris Customer Support or use the SQL Analyzer to directly change the database table. Tables that cannot be modified from Polaris Administration require a complete reindex of the entire database if they are changed.

    +

    Important:
    Innovative Interfaces is not responsible for your use of the SQL Analyzer to change Polaris database tables.

    +

    See also: Database Tables Reference

    +

    Notification Table

    +

    Entries in the Dates Not to Call notification table define the specific dates the phone notification server does not call patrons, such as Christmas and New Year’s Day, for systems that use Polaris telephone notification. It is available from the Administration Explorer at the system level only, and the settings apply to the whole system. To modify this table, you must have specific permission for the table.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Barcode_Formats.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Barcode_Formats.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1be59de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Barcode_Formats.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + + Barcode Formats + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Barcode Formats

    +

    A barcode format definition sets the total number of characters in the barcode, including the initial (prefix) characters. The maximum is 20 characters. The prefix characters can be any character or characters— numbers, letters, or special characters, except the asterisk. The asterisk (*) indicates that any character or length is accepted in the definition. For example, if the barcode prefix is more than one character, the asterisk serves as a wildcard character. This is especially useful if the barcode format includes a check digit or start digit at the beginning of the barcode. For example, a prefix of *3 means the barcode prefix can start with any character, but the second position of the barcode must be a 3 to be valid.

    +

    If you specify just an asterisk for both the prefix and the total length, this means that a barcode may be any length and any prefix. This definition essentially turns off barcode verification for that usage, so any barcode is accepted for the operation. The undefined format is the default setting for both patron and item barcodes.

    +

    Important:
    If you define barcode formats instead of accepting the default (undefined) setting, Polaris displays more consistent messages when you define both item and patron barcode formats.

    +

    Barcode types can be defined at system, library, and branch levels. Each branch may specify different barcode types for items and patrons. You can define multiple valid formats for both items and patrons, and add and remove definitions as necessary.

    +
      +
    • If the same barcode types are used by all organizations in the Polaris installation, then you need only define barcode types at the system level.
    • +
    • If different barcode types are used in each organization, define all the types for each library and branch to accommodate cross-borrowing.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Interlibrary loan items may have barcodes that are invalid in your system. You can choose to use the existing barcode or attach a slip with a valid barcode.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Significant Digits in Patron Barcodes

    +

    If all your patron barcodes begin with the same prefix, and only the final portion of the barcode is unique to each patron, you can set Polaris to treat the final portion as significant digits. You set the prefix and total length as the default patron barcode format in Polaris Administration. Then, staff can enter just the significant digits in a patron barcode field, and patrons can enter just the significant digits to log on at the PAC. The system automatically supplies the prefix whenever the user enters significant digits. Also, staff and patrons can omit leading zeros when they enter the significant digits.

    +

    Example:
    The default barcode format specifies a prefix of 32214, and a length of 14 digits. A patron’s barcode is 32214000006871. There are nine significant digits (000006871), but you can enter 6871 because the system adds the leading zeros.

    +

    When the significant digits are entered in a patron barcode field, a record is considered a match in these circumstances:

    +
      +
    • The significant digits added to your defined prefix match the complete barcode in a patron record.
    • +
    • If fewer than the defined number of significant digits are entered, the system adds leading zeros to the defined number of significant digits, and the complete barcode matches the barcode in a patron record.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If your database includes existing patron barcodes with fewer digits than the significant digits defined by the default patron barcode format, you may encounter some problems. Because the leading zeros and prefix are automatically appended, patrons with the “short” barcodes cannot log on in PAC, and staff client workforms such as the Check Out workform do not find them. However, for trouble-shooting purposes, you can search for and open these records from the Patron Record Find Tool (Name or Barcode, Exact match). From the Patron Registration workform, you can change the barcode, or perform operations such as check out.

    +
      +
    • If more than the defined number of significant digits are entered, and the digits match an entire patron barcode of the same length, the record is considered a match. This is the situation when you scan a complete barcode.
    • +
    +

    When you set a default patron barcode format in Polaris Administration, the following functions are affected:

    +
      +
    • Patron Find Tool (search by Barcode) - The Find Tool includes Significant Digits as a search Type option. When you select this search type, you can search for just the significant digits. Leading zeros are added as necessary, and the complete barcode appears in the For field. (If you select Significant Digits as the search type but enter more than the default number of digits, the search is not likely to yield any results.)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When a patron registers online in the PAC, the system assigns a temporary barcode that begins with PACREG, and creates a new patron record with a Verify Patron block. Significant digits do not affect this functionality. In the staff client, you can search for the new record by the entire exact barcode beginning with PACREG, or use the wildcard PACREG*. You cannot search for a PACREG barcode using significant digits.

    +
      +
    • Check Out workform - Leading zeros are added as necessary. When a match is found, the complete barcode is displayed.
    • +
    • Offline Check Out workform - Leading zeros are added as necessary. The complete barcode is displayed and stored. When the offline file is uploaded, the system finds a matching patron record based on the complete barcode.
    • +
    • Patron Registration workform - Significant digits can be entered into the patron record when the record is created or edited. The system supplies the complete barcode, including any leading zeros, and the complete barcode displays in the patron record. If you enter more than the defined number of significant digits, the system attempts to save the record with the digits you entered as the complete barcode.
    • +
    • Offline patron registration - The complete barcode is displayed and saved when the offline file is uploaded.
    • +
    • Hold Request workform (placing a new request) - Leading zeros are added as necessary. When a match is found, the complete barcode is displayed.
    • +
    • Patron Record Set (add by scanning) - To add a patron record to a record set, enter significant digits in the Barcode text box of the Scan Barcode dialog box. The system supplies leading zeros, if necessary, and the matching process is the same as in other functions.
    • +
    • PAC log-on - The patron can enter significant digits to log on. The system supplies leading zeros, if necessary, and the matching process is the same as in the staff client. If a matching record is found, the patron log-on continues. If more than the significant digits are entered, and the digits match a complete barcode, the patron log-on continues. After a successful log-on, the log-on page and the patron account page display the complete barcode.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When a patron registers online in the PAC, the system assigns a temporary barcode that begins with PACREG, and creates a new patron record with a Verify Patron block. Significant digits do not affect this functionality. The patron must enter the entire PACREG barcode until the permanent barcode is assigned.

    +
      +
    • Inbound telephony - The caller can enter the significant digits when prompted to enter the barcode. The system supplies leading zeros, if necessary, and the matching process is the same as in other functions. However, if a duplicate is found, the system responds with a message to contact the library for assistance, and the process stops.
    • +
    +

    The following functions are not affected by the default patron barcode setting:

    +
      +
    • Polaris ExpressCheck - Significant digit functionality does not affect Polaris ExpressCheck functions because barcodes are always entered by scanning.
    • +
    • Third-party authentication, SIP, NCIP - The entire barcode is communicated in these functions.
    • +
    +

    For instructions, see Set up significant digits for patron barcodes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_a_patron_barcode_format.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_a_patron_barcode_format.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c4b815d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_a_patron_barcode_format.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Define a patron barcode format + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define a patron barcode format

    +

    To define a patron barcode format.

    +

    Note:
    To produce more consistent barcode messages in Polaris, define both item and patron barcodes.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Barcodes: Patron format definition.
    4. +

      + PatronBarcodeFormats.gif 

      +
    5. In the Length box, specify the total number of characters required in the barcode, including the prefix:
    6. +
        +
      • To require a specific number of characters, type a number from 1 to 20.
      • +
      • Type * if the barcode can be any length.
      • +
      +
    7. Type, in the Prefix box, the characters that can begin a valid barcode:
    8. +
        +
      • Type any character or sequence of characters that uniquely identifies the barcode type.
      • +
      • Type * to accept any character as the prefix.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      At the system level, you can define a prefix and length combination to set as the default format. See Set up significant digits for patron barcodes.

      +
    9. Click Add to put the definition in the Current Formats list.
    10. +
    11. Repeat steps 3-5 for every barcode format used for the type.
    12. +
    13. Click OK. The Patron Barcode Formats dialog box closes.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_an_item_barcode_format.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_an_item_barcode_format.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e95749ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Define_an_item_barcode_format.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Define an item barcode format + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define an item barcode format

    +

    To define an item barcode.

    +

    Note:
    To produce more consistent barcode messages in Polaris, define both item and patron barcodes.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Barcodes: Item format definition.
    4. +

      + dBarcodeFormatDx.gif 

      +
    5. In the Length box, specify the total number of characters required in the barcode, including the prefix:
    6. +
        +
      • To require a specific number of characters, type a number from 1 to 20.
      • +
      • Type * if the barcode can be any length.
      • +
      +
    7. Type, in the Prefix box, the characters that can begin a valid barcode:
    8. +
        +
      • Type any character or sequence of characters that uniquely identifies the barcode type.
      • +
      • Type * to accept any character as the prefix.
      • +
      +
    9. Click Add to put the definition in the Current Formats list.
    10. +
    11. Repeat steps 3-5 for every barcode format used for items.
    12. +
    13. Click OK. The Item Barcode Formats dialog box closes.
    14. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Defining patron barcode formats - See Define a patron barcode format.
    • +
    • Significant digits in patron barcodes - You can specify a default patron barcode format to use in defining significant digits. Staff and patrons can enter just the significant digits in a barcode field, and the system supplies the prefix. See Significant Digits in Patron Barcodes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Defining_Barcode_Formats.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Defining_Barcode_Formats.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57eb5322 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Defining_Barcode_Formats.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Barcode Formats + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Barcode Formats

    +

    You can set Polaris to distinguish between patron and item barcodes, so that if you scan or type a barcode that is the incorrect type for a barcode field, Polaris displays a warning message. Permission is required to continue to save a record with an invalid barcode. You can define several barcode types for each usage, and specify a default format for patron barcodes.

    +

    Example:
    Based on your settings, if a barcode designated for patrons is entered in the Barcode box on the Item Record workform, or if an item barcode was scanned in the Patron box on the Check Out workform, the staff client displays a warning message.

    +

    Polaris checks the barcode value for prefix numbers and barcode length to identify its type and usage. However, Polaris does not check for incomplete scans or check digits. Barcode validity checks are usually done by the scanner software and equipment.

    +

    Note:
    If a record exists that uses the entered barcode value, the barcode is accepted, even though the barcode may not use a valid definition. It is not always practical to fix a barcode problem during operations where the patron is being served.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Delete_a_barcode_format.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Delete_a_barcode_format.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aee2117f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Delete_a_barcode_format.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a barcode format + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a barcode format

    +

    To remove a patron or item barcode format definition.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Display the appropriate Barcode Formats dialog box using one of the following methods:
    4. +
        +
      • Double-click Barcodes: Patron format definition.
      • +
      • Double-click Barcodes: Item format definition.
      • +
      +
    5. Click (highlight) the definition to delete in the Current Formats list.
    6. +
    7. Click Remove to delete the selected definition. The Delete this barcode format message box appears.
    8. +
    9. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the selected definition. The Barcode Formats dialog box appears.
    10. +
    11. Click OK on the Barcode Formats dialog box.
    12. +
    +

    Important:
    For patron barcodes, Default On/Off is available only at the system level because the setting applies to all organizations. Even if the default format is removed from the Patron Barcode Formats dialog box at the branch level, the default format defined at the system level is still in effect.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Saving_Records_with_Invalid_Barcodes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Saving_Records_with_Invalid_Barcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1215e278 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Saving_Records_with_Invalid_Barcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Saving Records with Invalid Barcodes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Saving Records with Invalid Barcodes

    +

    When a staff member attempts to save an item or patron record with an invalid barcode, the staff member receives an invalid barcode message. Barcode validity is also checked for serial item records generated when serials are checked in or created from the issue record. Examples of invalid barcode messages for item records are illustrated below:

    +

    + BadBarcodeOne.gif 

    +

    + BadBarcodeTwo.gif 

    +

    Staff members with the following permissions can continue to save the record:

    +
      +
    • Override invalid item barcode message: Allow (system-level Cataloging permission)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This permission also controls the ability to generate or create a serial item record with an invalid item barcode.

    +
      +
    • Override invalid patron barcode message: Allow (system-level Circulation permission)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    These permissions are not checked for the following records and operations:

    +

    -- Saving ILL items
    -- Saving course reserve items
    -- System-created “PACREG” temporary patron barcodes (created when a patron registers from PAC)
    -- Generating on-order or in-process items

    +

    When the appropriate permission is set to No and the staff member clicks Yes on the invalid barcode message to continue to the save the record, a permission block message is displayed.

    +

    + BadBarcodeOverride.gif 

    +

    An authorized staff member must supply a valid username, password, and domain, then click Override to allow the record to be saved with the invalid barcode.

    +

    At upgrade to Polaris 4.1R2 the permissions are set to Yes by default. If you prefer to assign the permissions only to selected staff members, set the system level Staff Client profile Permissions: Use Polaris-defined new permission defaults to No before upgrading to Polaris 4.1R2.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Set_up_significant_digits_for_patron_barcodes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Set_up_significant_digits_for_patron_barcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a07a5266 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDbarcodes/Set_up_significant_digits_for_patron_barcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up significant digits for patron barcodes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up significant digits for patron barcodes

    +

    A single patron barcode format can be selected at the system level for significant digit use. You specify the prefix and the length, then designate this format as the default. Your settings apply to all organizations in the system. For details about how this setting affects the staff client and the PAC, see Significant Digits in Patron Barcodes. To set a default patron barcode for significant digit use.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Barcodes: Patron format definition. The Patron Barcode Formats dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    +  

    +
      +
    1. In the Length box, type the total number of characters (1-20) required in the barcode, including the prefix.
    2. +
    +

    You cannot leave this field undefined (*) for a barcode that will be specified as the default. You must type a number.

    +
      +
    1. In the Prefix box, type the characters that begin the barcode.
    2. +
    +

    You cannot leave this field undefined (*) for a barcode that will be specified as the default. You must type a character or sequence of characters. When significant digits are entered for a patron barcode, the system appends this prefix to form the complete barcode.

    +
      +
    1. Click Add to put the definition in the Current length and prefix formats list.
    2. +
    3. Select the new definition in the Current length and prefix formats list, and click Default On/Off.
    4. +
    +

    The Default column displays asterisks (***) to indicate that this barcode is used as the default, for significant digit purposes. (To remove the default designation, select the default barcode and click Default On/Off.)

    +

    Note:
    Default On/Off is available only at the system level because the setting applies to all organizations. Even if the default format is removed from the Patron Barcode Formats dialog box at the branch level, the default format is still in effect because it is defined at the system level.

    +

    When you change the default, a warning message appears. If your database includes existing patron barcodes with fewer digits than the significant digits defined by the default patron barcode format, you may encounter some problems. Because the leading zeros and prefix are automatically appended, patrons with the “short” barcodes cannot log on in PAC, and staff client workforms such as the Check Out workform do not find them. However, for trouble-shooting purposes, you can search for and open these records from the Patron Record Find Tool (Name or Barcode, Exact match) and change the barcode, or perform operations such as check out from the Patron Registration workform.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the message box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to save your settings.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Add_a_new_collection_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Add_a_new_collection_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d244ffc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Add_a_new_collection_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a new collection record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a New Collection Record

    +

    To add a collection name to Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: +
    You can also create a new collection record by copying an existing collection record. Select File > Newfrom the Collection workform menu bar and copy or clear the information in the workform. Then you can edit the collection record. See Review and edit collection information.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New > Collection on the Administration Explorer menu bar. The Collection workform appears.
    2. +
    +

    + NewCollection.gif +

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the collection in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type an abbreviation for the collection in the Abbreviation box.
    4. +
    +

    In Polaris Find Tool power searches and PAC Boolean searches, you can search for items in the collection using the access point COL and the collection abbreviation.

    +

    Example: +
    An Adult Fiction collection is assigned the abbreviation AF. You can power search for items in this collection by typing COL=AF.

    +

    Important: +
    If you use enriched EDI ordering and shelf-ready cataloging with Baker & Taylor, the collection abbreviation is limited to 10 characters or fewer to comply with this vendor’s data requirements.

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch or branches to which this collection belongs, or click Select All if you want to add the collection to all branches. If a branch is already using a collection with the same name, a Duplicate Detection message appears. A branch cannot have duplicate collections.
    2. +
    3. If your system uses floating collections, and you want items in this collection to be potentially eligible to “float” from branch to branch, select View > Floating branches or click FloatViewIcon.gif. Then follow the instructions in Designate collections as eligible to float.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Delete_a_collection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Delete_a_collection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..424214ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Delete_a_collection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a collection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a collection

    +

    If a collection is not being used, it is automatically deleted when you remove it from the last branch with which it is associated. You can also manually delete a collection. Certain links prevent the deletion, and you must resolve the conflicts before the collection is deleted. For other types of links, you can choose to break the links and delete the collection, or cancel the operation. To manually delete a collection record.

    +
      +
    1. List the collection in the Administration Explorer tree view. See List workstations in the Explorer.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Right-click the collection and select Delete from the context menu to delete the collection without opening the collection record.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the collection in the Administration Explorer, and select Edit from the context menu. The Collection workform opens.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of these delete methods:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Select File, Delete.
    • +
    • Click the Delete icon  DeleteIcon.gif on the toolbar.
    • +
    • Press CTRL+D.
    • +
    • Press ALT+F+D.
    • +
    +

    The system checks for linked objects that use the Collection. These links prevent the collection from being deleted, and you must resolve the conflicts before deleting the collection. The message lists the number of linked objects:

    +
      +
    • Item Records
    • +
    • Reserve Item Records
    • +
    • Item Templates
    • +
    • Reserve Item Templates
    • +
    • Serial Holdings Records
    • +
    • Quick-circ Item records
    • +
    • Standing Order Part Records
    • +
    +

    The system also displays a warning message and the count of linked objects if any of these features use the collection:

    +
      +
    • Children’s PAC Search Limit
    • +
    • Selection List Line Item Segments
    • +
    • PO Line Item Segments
    • +
    • Invoice Line Item Segments
    • +
    +

    For these links, you can click No (the collection is not deleted) or Yes (the collection is deleted). If you click Yes, the deleted collection is replaced by [None] in the linked objects.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_collections_in_the_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_collections_in_the_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ed0f886 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_collections_in_the_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + List collections in the Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    List collections in the Explorer

    +

    Collections are not automatically listed in the Administration Explorer because there may be many of them in the system. However, if you plan to work with several collections, it may be convenient to list them in the Administration Explorer so you do not have to search for each one.

    +

    To list several or all the collections in the system in the Administration Explorer tree view:

    +

    Tip:
    If you want to work with a specific collection, you can use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and open the collection record. Select Administration, Collection on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. If you want to work with multiple collections, use the Administration Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Click Collection in the Administration Explorer tree view. A search button appears in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    +

    + dCollSearch.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to display the Polaris Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Select Collection Name/Abbreviation in the Search By box.
    4. +
    5. Type an asterisk * (for all) in the For box.
    6. +
    7. Click Search on the Find Tool. The results list includes all the collections defined in Polaris.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    If there are too many collections to display at once, the status bar indicates how many have been loaded. You can press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load the entire list.

    +

    + ColResultsList.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the results list, select the collections to be displayed in the Administration Explorer. You can use the CTRL or SHIFT key to select multiple collections.
    2. +
    3. Right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    + ColSelect.gif 

    +

    All the selected collections are listed under Collection in the Administration Explorer tree view. When you select a collection, the right pane shows the collection information, including all branches that use the collection. To edit a collection, see Review and edit collection information.

    +

    + CollectList.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_the_collections_assigned_to_a_branch.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_the_collections_assigned_to_a_branch.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc5b96d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/List_the_collections_assigned_to_a_branch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + List the collections assigned to a branch + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    List the collections assigned to a branch

    +

    To see a list of collections assigned to a specific branch:

    +

    Note:
    You can run a report to see the collections assigned to all branches. See Collections Report.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Collection. The search button appears in the right pane of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Click Search to display the Polaris Find Tool for collections.
    4. +
    5. Select Branch Name/Abbreviation in the Search By box.
    6. +
    +

    + CollectFindTool.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the name of the branch in the For box, and click Search on the Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    The collections associated with the branch are displayed in the results list. If there are too many collections to display at once, you can press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load the entire list.

    +

    Collections Report

    +

    The Hierarchy of Library, Branches, & Collections report lists all the collections assigned to each branch in the system, organized by system, library, and branch. You can filter the report by organization. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Review_and_edit_collection_information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Review_and_edit_collection_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56984dcd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Review_and_edit_collection_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + Review and edit collection information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Review and Edit Collection Information

    +

    From the collection record, you can see a list of branches using the collection, add or remove branches using the collection, and change the name of the collection. To open a collection record.

    +
      +
    1. List the collection in the Administration Explorer tree view. See List workstations in the Explorer.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Right-click the collection and select Properties from the context menu to see information about the collection without opening the collection record.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the collection in the Administration Explorer, and select Edit from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Collection workform opens.

    +

    Branches that use the collection are checked.

    +
      +
    1. To change the collection name, type the new name in the Name box. The name is changed in every record that uses this collection.
    2. +
    3. To change the abbreviation, type the new abbreviation in the Abbreviation box. The abbreviation is changed in every record that uses this collection.
    4. +
    5. To assign this collection to a branch, select (check) the box next to the branch name.
    6. +
    +

    If adding this collection to the branch would result in a duplicate collection at the branch, a Duplicate Detection message appears when you save the collection. A branch cannot have duplicate collections.

    +
      +
    1. To remove this collection from a branch, clear the check box next to the branch name.
    2. +
    3. If your system uses floating collections, and you want items in this collection to be potentially eligible to “float” from branch to branch, select View, Floating branches or click . Then follow the instructions in .
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to record your changes.
    6. +
    +

    The Branch Removal Conflicts dialog box appears if there are items assigned to a collection that you removed from a branch.

    +
      +
    1. If the Branch Removal Conflicts dialog box appears, do the following actions:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Only the collections available for the associated branch are listed in the Resolve Conflict dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Select a branch name in the Branch Conflicts list.
    2. +
    3. In the Conflict Details frame, review the types and numbers of records that are affected by the change.
    4. +
    5. Do one of the following actions to resolve the assigned branch and collection conflict in the listed records:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • To remove assignment of the collection from the records listed in the Conflict Details frame, select (None) in the Alternative Collections list, and click Resolve.
    • +
    • To assign another collection to the records listed in the Conflict Details frame, select the collection name to assign in the Alternative Collections list, and click Resolve.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Branch Removal Conflicts dialog box. The dialog box closes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Delete a collection - See Delete a collection
    • +
    • +

      Removing a branch from a shared collection - If you want to remove a branch from a shared collection, then link associated records to a collection with the same name just for the branch, do the following actions:

      +
        +
      1. Create a collection with a slightly different name, and assign the branch to it.
      2. +
      3. Remove the branch from the shared collection, and assign the linked records to the new collection.
      4. +
      5. Rename the new collection to the name of the original shared collection.
      6. +
      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Working_with_Collections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Working_with_Collections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4eaa83d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDcollections/Working_with_Collections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Working with Collections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Collections

    +

    A collection record names a collection, tracks which branches use the collection, and designates which branches (if any) are potentially eligible to receive items from the collection if it is allowed to float from branch to branch. After you set up collection records in Polaris Administration, they are available for selection in item records, selection lists, serial holdings records, purchase orders, and invoices. In addition, you can sort and filter searches for item records by collection in the Polaris Find Tool. Collection abbreviations are also used in designation fields of bibliographic records when these are imported for bulk-adding to purchase orders or selection lists, and for shelf-ready cataloging.

    +

    Each branch may have its own set of collections, and collections can have the same names used by other branches. In addition, a collection can belong to more than one branch for rotating collections or for shared collections, and you can designate collections as potentially eligible to float from branch to branch. Certain circulation reports also list items by collections.

    +

    Special considerations:

    +
      +
    • Children’s items - If you offer Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition to your patrons, consider setting up collections specifically for children’s items, such as children’s periodicals, if you do not already have them. You can then filter Children’s PAC searches to target these collections.
    • +
    • Floating collections - If your system uses floating collections, allowing items from certain collections to float from branch to branch at check-in, consider setting up these collections so that all branches that participate in the floating arrangement use the collections.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Defining_Online_Documentation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Defining_Online_Documentation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffbe49fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Defining_Online_Documentation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Library Documentation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Library Documentation

    +

    The Help menu includes the option Library Documentation. You can set a path and filename or URL for this option to display your own documentation.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Specify_the_location_of_online_documents.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Specify_the_location_of_online_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cee6e6f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDdocs/Specify_the_location_of_online_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify the location of online documents + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the location of library documents

    +

    To specify the documentation accessible from the Polaris staff client:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open Profiles for the organization or workstation, and select the Staff Client tab.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    See List workstations in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. To supply custom information for the Library Documentation option on the Help menu, double-click Library documentation - staff client. The Default Setup for Library Documentation dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + LibDocSetup.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Specify the location of the information you want to make accessible by one of the following methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Click Browse to select the location of the file.
    • +
    • In the Default Directory box, type a URL, beginning with http://.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Choose_the_transactions_to_log.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Choose_the_transactions_to_log.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..913a2600 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Choose_the_transactions_to_log.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Choose the transactions to log + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Choose the transactions to log

    +

     To set which Polaris transactions are logged:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the system, and select Transaction Logging. The Transaction Logging table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + dTransLogTbl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the action you want to set. The Modify Transaction Logging dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + dTransLogDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Log Transaction box, select Yes to log every occurrence of the selected action, or select No if you do not want to log any occurrence of the selected action.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Transaction Logging entries are displayed. The new logging setting is shown in the selected entry.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    Important:
    If you change any transaction logging setting, you must restart the Message Queue service on the application server for the change to take effect.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Reports - Polaris provides a variety of reports that help you track and summarize transactions. Custom reports are also available from Innovative Interfaces for a fee. Additional reports by Polaris customers are available for download from the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com). In addition, Polaris SimplyReports software is available by separate purchase. With the Web-based SimplyReports, you can create thousands of custom reports by selecting different combinations of data elements, filters, and sorting options.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Statistical reports in Polaris SimplyReports use the Polaris Transactions database. You must log the transactions on which you want to report (see Choose the transactions to log); otherwise, your statistical reports will be blank or inaccurate. The reports use data generated from the time you chose to begin logging the transactions.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Collecting_Transaction_Statistics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Collecting_Transaction_Statistics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd2b2937 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Collecting_Transaction_Statistics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Collecting Transaction Statistics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Collecting Transaction Statistics

    +

    See:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Logging_Transactions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Logging_Transactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f0836b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Logging_Transactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Logging Transactions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Logging Transactions

    +

    The Polaris transaction log records when an action occurs, the identification number of the user who did the action, and the records that the action affected. You can use the log to track operational statistics, troubleshoot problems, and generate reports. You determine what kinds of actions are logged, out of the thousands of Polaris transactions that can occur every day. The same transactions are recorded for all organizations in your Polaris installation.

    +

    Entries in the Transaction Logging database table determine which transactions are logged. The Transaction Logging table is available only from the Administration Explorer. You must have the Modify transaction logging table: Allow permission to work with this table.

    +

    Note:
    To log Polaris PowerPAC transactions, set the PowerPAC profile Enable logging of transactions (system level) to Yes.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Polaris_Transactions_Database.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Polaris_Transactions_Database.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..942136f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Polaris_Transactions_Database.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Transactions Database + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Transactions Database

    +

    The tables in the Polaris Transactions Database provide the information necessary to track and report transactions in Polaris.

    +

    If you have basic knowledge of writing SQL queries, you can query the Polaris Transactions Database directly to find more information about transaction types and specific transactions. Using Polaris SimplyReports, you can also construct detailed transaction reports without writing SQL queries. Custom queries and reports are also available from Innovative Interfaces for a fee, and you may find additional queries and reports created by Polaris customers that you can download from the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com).

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Querying Transaction Database Tables

    +

    You can run an SQL query to find the same kind of information that you select to include in the Polaris transaction log, using the Transaction Logging database table in Polaris Administration (see Logging Transactions). Run the following query:

    +

    Select * From Polaristransactions..TransactionTypes +

    +

    The important columns in this table are:

    +
      +
    • TransactionTypeID - Type of transaction
    • +
    • TransactionTypeDescription - Brief description of the TransactionTypeID
    • +
    • IsImplemented - Defines whether Innovative Interfaces has implemented counting this transaction (1=yes, 2=no)
    • +
    +

    When you search the TransactionTypes table, you may want to order by a particular column.  For example, add Order by TransactionTypeID to group transactions loosely by subsystem. Or add Order by IsImplemented to group all of the transactions that are currently selected to be logged.

    +

    The TransactionSubTypes table provides additional details about the transaction type. Run the following query:

    +

    Select * From Polaristransactions..TransactionSubTypes +

    +

    The important columns in this table are:

    +
      +
    • TransactionSubTypeID - Primary key of the table
    • +
    • TransactionSubTypeDescription - Brief description of the SubTypeID
    • +
    +

    Each TransactionType has multiple TransactionSubTypes.

    +

    ViewTransactions pulls together the information from the TransactionTypes and TransactionSubTypes tables, allowing you to see each type of transaction and the kind of data that Polaris retains. Run the following query:

    +

    Select * From Polaristransactions..ViewTransactions +

    +

    Viewing Specific Transactions

    +

    Two tables contain information about specific transactions—TransactionHeaders and TransactionDetails. You will also need to refer to subsequent tables, such as TransactionTypes, TransactionSubTypes, ViewTransactions, and TransactionDetailStrings.

    +

    The TransactionHeaders table contains the following basic information about specific transactions:

    +
      +
    • TransactionID - Unique identifier of the transaction
    • +
    • OrganizationID - Branch ID where the transaction occurred
    • +
    • WorkstationID -  Computer ID where the transaction occurred
    • +
    • PolarisUserID - Staff member ID who created the transaction
    • +
    • TransactionDate - Date/time when the transaction is saved to the database
    • +
    • TransactionTypeID - Type of transaction. See the TransactionTypes table.
    • +
    • TranClientDate - Date/time when the transaction was created on the workstation
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The TransactionDate and TranClientDate are usually within milliseconds of each other, but on some occasions they can be different. The TranClientDate is usually more accurate regarding when the transaction was created, unless the date/time is incorrect on the workstation. Make sure that the date/time are correct on your workstations. You can ensure consistency in server and client time settings. See Ensuring Locale and Time Consistency.

    +

    The TransactionDetails table contains more details about the specific transaction. The following information is in the TransactionDetails table:

    +
      +
    • TransactionID - Unique identifier of the transaction
    • +
    • TransactionSubTypeID - Subtype (detail) that goes with the transaction
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    For certain transactionsubtypes, the value in the NumValue field does not point to a specific record ID. Instead, it points to a value in the TransactionDetailStrings table. The transactiondetailstrings are used especially for PAC search transactions, when the author or title of a book or a branch name is recorded in the transactions database.

    +
      +
    • NumValue - Corresponds to the TransactionSubType. For example, if the transactionsubtypeid is 38 (itemrecordid), the NumValue displays the specific item record ID. If the transactionsubtypeid is 6 (patronID), the corresponding NumValue displays the specific patron ID.
    • +
    • DateValue - Date/time that a transaction occurred; currently used only for the subtypes 185 and 186 (CheckIn date and CheckOut date)
    • +
    +

    To get a full picture of an actual transaction, link the TransactionHeaders and TransactionDetails table using the TransactionID.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Sending_Circulation_Statistics_to_Library_Journal.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Sending_Circulation_Statistics_to_Library_Journal.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8100e56 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Sending_Circulation_Statistics_to_Library_Journal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Sending Circulation Statistics to Library Journal + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Sending Circulation Statistics to Library Journal

    +

    Library Journal collects and compiles statistics about fiction and non-fiction titles borrowed and requested from libraries throughout the United States. The top titles are ranked and listed twice a month in Library Journal’s “Best Sellers: Books Most Borrowed” feature, available at www.libraryjournal.com. A number of Polaris customer libraries contribute to these statistics.

    +

    In participating Polaris libraries, circulation and hold request statistics for the library system are sent automatically to Innovative Interfaces on the 1st and 15th of each month. Innovative Interfaces combines the lists from all participating Polaris libraries, totals the number of circulation transactions and holds for the 60 days prior to the list date, sorts the titles by popularity and exports them in a spreadsheet to Library Journal. Library Journal does not receive, save, or publish statistics associated with each specific library that supplies statistics to Innovative Interfaces.

    +

    You can control whether your system participates in the Library Journal feature through a Polaris Administration setting. At the system level, double-click the Patron Services profile Contribute to LJ Books Most Borrowed and select an option:

    +
      +
    • No - Opt out - Select this option if you do not want to participate.
    • +
    • Yes - Via Web Service - Default. Select this option to participate. The job gathers the statistics and transmits them automatically to Innovative Interfaces.
    • +
    • Yes - Via FTP - Future functionality. Do not use.
    • +
    +

    If Yes is selected, your statistics are automatically sent to Innovative Interfaces for processing on the 15th and 30th of each month. You do not need to do anything else to participate.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Statistical_Summary_Report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Statistical_Summary_Report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a70b2d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDlogging/Statistical_Summary_Report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + + Statistical Summary Report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Statistical Summary Report

    +

    The Statistical Summary report provides detailed snapshots of the system, including database record counts, records added and deleted within a specified time period, and system activity within a specified time period.  To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +

    Note: +
    For information on specifying the transactions that should be logged for reports, see Collecting Transaction Statistics.

    +

    You can filter the report by date and by organization. The report includes the following categories and details, as well as the totals in each category and the grand total in each category for all selected branches (the sum of individual branches):

    +

    Note:
    To produce a report that includes all total counts but does not detail individual branch counts, select (check) Summary only on the Report Setup dialog box.

    +

    Record Counts

    +

    These are total counts, not restricted by date range.

    +
      +
    • Bib records with items - Bibliographic records with at least one item attached, where the record owner is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Bib records without items - Bibliographic records with no item records attached, where the record owner is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Authority records - All authority records with a status of Final.  Provisional and deleted records are not counted.
    • +
    • Item records - All item records where the assigned branch is the reporting branch. Does not include provisional or deleted records, or items with a circulation status of Withdrawn.
    • +
    • Patrons - All patron records where the registered branch is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Staff - All staff member records where the staff member organization is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Workstation - All workstations where the workstation organization is the reporting branch.
    • +
    +

    Circulation Statistics

    +

    These are reported within a specified date range.

    +
      +
    • Check-outs - All check-out transactions within the specified date range at all workstations where the workstation logon branch for the transaction is the reporting branch. Includes staff client renewals; PAC renewals; inbound telephony renewals; offline check-out; Polaris ExpressCheck check-out and renewals; Quick-circ check-out; SIP, NCIP or remote, third party check-out.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Renewals from PAC are counted as coming from the loaning branch.

    +
      +
    • Borrowers - Counts all unique patron IDs in check-out transactions within the specified date range at all workstations where the workstation logon branch for the transaction is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Check-in - All check-in transactions within the specified date range at all workstations where the workstation logon branch for the transaction is the reporting branch. Includes normal mode check-in; bulk mode check-in; offline check-in; in-house circulation; Quick-circ check-in; SIP or remote, third party check-in. Automatic-check-ins (those that occur during check-out or when holds are filled), and inventory check-ins (or Polaris Inventory Manager check-ins) are not counted.
    • +
    • Overdue items checked in - All transactions within the specified date range at all workstations where the workstation logon branch in the transaction is the reporting branch and the transaction indicates the item was overdue. The number of overdue items checked in is included in the count of total check-ins.
    • +
    • Holds placed - Hold statistics are based on the holds transactions. Includes all hold requests where the workstation branch is the reporting branch and the requests have an activation date within the date range. Also includes re-activated requests, requests that have been suspended and re-activated, and requests placed from the PAC. (You can also see a separate count of PAC requests. See PAC Statistics.)
    • +
    • Holds satisfied - All hold requests where the workstation branch is the reporting branch, and the requests have had a status of Held or Transferred with a status date within the date range.
    • +
    • Holds cancelled - All hold requests where the workstation branch is the reporting branch, and that have a request status of Cancelled with a status date within the date range. Includes requests cancelled from the PAC. (You can also see a separate count of PAC cancelled requests. See PAC Statistics.)
    • +
    +

    Records Added And Deleted

    +

    These counts are based on transaction file data within the specified time period.

    +
      +
    • Bib records added - All bibliographic records created within the date range where Organization ID is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Authority records added - All authority records created within the date range where Organization ID is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Item records added - All item records created within the date range where the assigned branch in the item creation transaction is the reporting branch. Includes records with a status of Active or Provisional, but not those with a status of  Deleted.
    • +
    • Patron records added - All patron records created within the date range where the Organization ID is the reporting branch. The Organization ID is the patron’s registered branch. The report counts all patrons registered for the selected branch, regardless of where the registration occurred, and includes PAC self-registrations. (You can also get a separate count of PAC registrations. See PAC Statistics.)
    • +
    • Bib records deleted - All bibliographic records deleted within the date range where the Organization ID is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Authority records deleted - All authority records deleted within the date range where the transaction Organization ID is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Item records deleted - All item records deleted within the date range where the assigned branch is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Item records withdrawn - This count is not based on transactions, but on the item status and status dates. Includes all item records where the assigned branch of the item is the reporting branch; the item circulation status is Withdrawn; and the circulation status date falls within the selected date range.
    • +
    • Patron records deleted - All patron records deleted within the date range where the patron’s registered branch is the reporting branch.
    • +
    +

    Financial Amounts

    +

    These figures summarize monetary transactions within the specified time period.

    +
      +
    • New charges - All charges created within the date range where the parent branch of the workstation that created the charge is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Money collected - All amounts paid within the date range where the parent branch of the workstation that took the payment is the reporting branch. Includes full and partial payments, credit card payments, and payments made from PAC and Polaris ExpressCheck. If the workstation branch cannot be determined, the report credits the amount to the organization responsible for the charge.
    • +
    • Refunds - All amounts refunded (refund transactions) within the date range, where the workstation branch of the transaction is the reporting branch. Includes credit card refunds.
    • +
    • Net - Money Collected minus Refunds.
    • +
    • Amounts waived - The sum of all waived amounts within the date range, where the workstation branch is the reporting branch.
    • +
    • Outstanding fines - The total of all charges where the organization identified in the charge (Patron Status workform - Account view) is the reporting branch. This is not all money owed by all patrons registered at the branch, but all money owed to the branch, regardless of who owes it.
    • +
    +

    PAC Statistics

    +

    Note:
    When the Statistical Summary report is run for All organizations, PAC statistics are based on PAC server activity. If the report is filtered by a specific branch, the report counts only in-library use, based on the PAC workstation login branch.

    +
      +
    • Patron logins - All logins from PAC within the date range where the patron’s registered branch is the reporting branch. The count includes any login; for example, to view the patron account or to place a request.
    • +
    • Patron self-registration - A count of PAC registrations within the date range where the patron’s registered branch is the reporting branch. This number is also included in the total number of registrations reported (see Records Added And Deleted).
    • +
    • Holds placed from PAC - All hold requests placed within the date range where the pickup branch is the reporting branch. The total is also included in the Holds Placed count in the Circulation Statistics section.
    • +
    • Holds cancelled from PAC - All hold requests cancelled within the date range where the pickup branch is the reporting branch. The total is also included in the Holds Cancelled count in the Circulation Statistics section.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Renewals from PAC are included in the Circulation section. They are counted as coming from the loaning branch.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_contact_person_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_contact_person_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c860f33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_contact_person_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a contact person entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a contact person entry

    +

    All contacts added to the table are available for use in any Polaris organization record.

    +
      +
    1. To add a new entry to the contact person list:
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Contact Persons.
    4. +
    +

    The Organization Contact Persons table appears in the details view. Personal information has been removed from the illustration.

    +

    + dOrgContakTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00376.gif to display the Insert Organization Contact Persons dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dOrgContakInDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type, in the Name box, the name of the contact person as you want it to display in other records.
    2. +
    3. Type the e-mail address for the contact person in the Email Address box.
    4. +
    5. Type the primary telephone number for the contact person in the Phone #1 box.
    6. +
    7. If the person can be contacted at an alternate number, such as a cell phone, type the alternate telephone number in the Phone #2 box.
    8. +
    9. If the person has a fax number, type the telephone number in the Fax Number box.
    10. +
    11. Click OK in the dialog box.
    12. +
    +

    The new entry appears in the Contact Persons policy table.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate00377.gif. You can change all the information in the entry. For example, if a director retires and a new director is hired, you can change the name and e-mail address entries in the entry for the director, and the change is applied immediately everywhere the entry is used.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete00378.gif. If the contact person entry is used in any record, you cannot delete it. You must change the records to use a new contact person before you can delete the entry.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_date_closed.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_date_closed.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8ffc3f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_date_closed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a date closed + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Dates Closed

    +

    To define the dates when an organization is closed +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables at or above the organization level, and select Dates Closed. +

      Example:
      If you are setting the dates closed for all member branches of a library, open the table at the library level. You can add the dates at the library level. All member branches inherit the same dates. In addition, at the library level, you can add or delete dates for specific member branches.

      Tip:
      Click the column heads in the Dates Closed table to sort the entries by organization or by date.

      The Dates Closed table appears in the details view.

      dDatsClosdVu.gif

    2. +
    3. Select btnInsert00379.gif to display the Insert Dates Closed dialog box. +

      dInsertDx.gif

    4. +
    5. Select the organization for the closed date in the Organization list. +

      If you open the Dates Closed policy table at the branch level, only the branch name appears in the Organization list, and the dates closed apply only to that branch.

      Tip:
      You can type the date in the Date Closed box (day of week, month, day of month, year, or MM/DD/YYYY). If you type the wrong day of the week for the date, the day is automatically corrected.

    6. +
    7. Enter a date closed or a range of dates closed:
      1. To enter one date closed:
        1. Click the calendar icon on the Date Closed field or the Until field. +

          The calendar appears.

        2. Select the month arrows until the month for the closed date appears.
        3. Select same date in the Date Closed field and the Until field. +
      2. To enter a range of dates closed:
        1. Enter the first date of the range in the Date Closed field. Use the previous steps.
        2. Enter the last date of the range in the Until field.
    8. +
    9. Select OK. +

      Polaris adds the single date, or every individual date in the range to the Dates Closed table. Polaris automatically saves dates added to the Dates Closed table to the database.

    10. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate00380.gif. The date in a displayed date closed entry is the only element you can change. You can  change only the entries that display for the organization level at which the policy table is opened. If you need to change the entry for another organization, delete the entire incorrect entry and insert a new one.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete00381.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a650708 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a postal code + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a postal code

    +

    To add a postal code in Polaris:

    +

    Note:
    Staff members with the appropriate permissions can also add entries to this table from certain Polaris records. See Additions to the Postal Codes Table from Polaris Records.

    +
      +
    1. Verify that the country associated with the new postal code is listed in the Countries policy table. See Add a postal code format.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the Database folder for an organization, and select Postal Codes. The Postal Codes Table Filter dialog box opens. The country filter is already selected based on the Default Country setting in the system record.
    4. +
    +

    + PostalCodesFilterDx.gif 

    +

    Important:
    Unfiltered, the Postal Codes table takes some time to load because at implementation it may contain all the U.S. Postal Service Zip codes and/or Canadian postal codes—over 850,000 entries.
    +

    +
      +
    1. Set the filters you want to apply to the Postal Codes table:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Country - Select the country’s check box to include the country’s postal codes, or clear the check box to exclude them. At least one country must be selected.
    • +
    • States/Provinces - States or provinces are listed depending on the selected country. Select All to include the entire list, or select individual states or provinces.
    • +
    • County, city, postal code - These free-text fields are case-insensitive. You can use the asterisk wild-card character * at the beginning or end of the text string. You can also use the pound sign #, which stands for one character only, at any point in the text string.
    • +
    +

    Counts at the top of the filter dialog box show how many postal codes will be loaded with the filters you have set. When you change the filter criteria, you can click the refresh button  PostalDXRefresh.gif to see the new counts.

    +
      +
    1. When you are ready to load the Postal Codes table, click Apply Filter. The filtered Postal Codes table appears in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    +

    + dPostalCodTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00371.gif to display the Insert Postal Codes dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dPostalCodDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the City box, type the name of the town or city associated with the postal code.
    2. +
    3. In the State box, type the name of the state or province where the city is located.
    4. +
    5. If required by library policy, type the county where the city is located in the County box.
    6. +
    7. Select the country in the Country box associated with this postal code.
    8. +
    9. Type the complete postal code for the city in the Postal Code box, and click OK.
    10. +
    +

    Tip:
    From the Postal Codes table, you can open the Postal Codes Table Filter dialog box by clicking the funnel icon FilterIcon.gif.

    +

    The Insert Postal Codes dialog box closes, and the new entry appears in the Postal Codes table. Modification pending appears in the status bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate00372.gif. You can change all the information in the entry. Changes are applied immediately everywhere the entry is used.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif. If the postal code is used in any record, a dialog box appears. You can choose to continue deleting the entry, and Polaris prompts you for the postal code to replace the entry you are deleting. The dialog box includes all the codes available in the filtered table.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code_format.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code_format.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f1cf83e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_a_postal_code_format.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a postal code format + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a postal code format

    +

    To define a new postal code format in Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the Policy Tables folder for an organization, and select Countries. The Countries policy table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + dCountriesTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Countries dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dCountryInDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the name in the Country box as you want the name to display for all Country boxes in Polaris workforms.
    2. +
    3. Define the postal code format in the Postal Code Format box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    • To identify a number position, type 9.
    • +
    • To identify a letter position, type an uppercase Z.
    • +
    • To identify a number or letter (alphanumeric) position, type an uppercase A.
    • +
    • Place dashes (-) and spaces as required.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    The postal code (ZIP) format for the United States is:99999-9999. The postal code format for Canada is: Z9Z 9Z9.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the maximum format length in the Postal Code Length box.
    2. +
    3. In theMin Zip Code Length box, enter one of the following:
      • 5: For the US, enter 5 to indicate the number of characters before the dash in the nine-digit postal code.
      • 0: For all countries other than the US.
    4. +
    5. Click OK. The Insert Countries dialog box closes and the Administration Explorer appears. The new entry appears in the Countries table. Modification Pending appears in the status bar.
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save. Record saved appears in the status bar.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate.gif. All elements in the postal code format entry can be changed.

    +

    Important:
    When you change a Countries table entry, all occurrences of the country name or postal format are changed in all Polaris records. You cannot delete an entry from this table. Postal code formats must be maintained as long as addresses in patron, supplier, and organization records use the postal code format.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_an_organization_address_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_an_organization_address_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9688edf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Add_an_organization_address_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add an organization address entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add an organization address entry

    +

    To add a new organization address to Polaris:

    +

    Note:
    The postal code format and country for a new address must be defined in the Countries policy table before you can add an organization address. For more information, see Add a postal code format.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for an organization, and select Addresses.
    2. +
    +

    The Addresses policy table appears in the details view.

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00373.gif to display the Insert Organization Addresses dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Type the first line of the street address in the Street One box.
    4. +
    5. If the street address for an organization requires a second line, type the additional part in the Street Two box.
    6. +
    7. Select the country for the organization in the Country box.
    8. +
    9. Type the postal code for the organization in the Postal Code box.
    10. +
    +

    The City, State, and County boxes display information appropriate to the postal code.

    +

    Note:
    If the City, State, and County boxes do not display any information after entering the postal code, type the appropriate information in these boxes.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert Organization Addresses dialog box closes, and the new address entry appears in the Addresses policy table.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate00374.gif. You can change all information in the address entry. Changes are immediately reflected in all records and workforms using the address entry.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete00375.gif. If the address entry is used in any organization record, you must change the record to a different address before you can delete the address entry. Deleting an address entry removes the address from display on all workforms that use the address.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Change_the_system_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Change_the_system_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6893b28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Change_the_system_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change the system record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change the system record

    +

    To change the system record.

    +

    Note:
    Address and contact information must be defined in the appropriate tables before you can specify them in the system record. See Setting Organization Addresses and Identifying Organization Contacts.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    3. Right-click System in the tree view of the Administration Explorer, and select Edit from the context menu. The System workform appears.
    4. +
    +

    + OrgID.gif +

    +
      +
    1. Change the system registration information as needed by typing in the text boxes or making selections in the list boxes.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The name you specify in the Display Name box identifies the organization in the workform title bar and in Mobile PAC. On the Polaris Shortcut bar, the display name of the logged-in workstation’s parent organization appears in the title bar and in the About Polaris window (Help menu).

    +

    Important: +
    These characters cannot be used in the Name or Display Name fields:; (semi-colon)
    ? (question mark)
    : (colon)
    @ ('at' sign)
    & (ampersand)
    = (equals sign)
    + (plus sign)
    $ (dollar sign)
    , (comma)
    \ (back slash)
    * (asterisk)
    < (less than sign)
    > (greater than sign)
    | (vertical pipe)
    " (double quote)
    / (forward slash)

    +
      +
    1. To set up error reporting, in the Error Reporting Email field, type the e-mail address of the administrator who should receive the report of a system error. You can use error reporting to identify workstations that have stopped functioning due to unhandled exceptions. If you use Polaris ExpressCheck and credit card processing, an error report is sent if a credit card refund is not successful when a lost or billed item charge needs to be resolved. Your error reporting settings at the system level are inherited by libraries and branches unless you change the settings at those levels.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    4. +
    5. Edit system-level permissions, profiles, parameters, and tables as needed.
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    The system property sheet shows summary information about the system, including the number of libraries, branches, accessible remote servers, accessible remote databases available to the branch in the staff client and in PAC, collections, workstations, staff members, and registered patrons. To open the property sheet, right-click the system name in the Administration Explorer and select Properties, or click the Properties icon PropertiesIcon.gif on the System workform.

    +

    +

    +

    For more information about setting up and administering Polaris, see:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Changing_System_Information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Changing_System_Information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8c9ae8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Changing_System_Information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing System Information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Changing System Information

    +

    Information about your Polaris system is stored in the system record, which is created upon initial Polaris installation. The system record is the top level of the Polaris administration hierarchy. It  may represent an organization or consortium with up to 1,000 branches, all sharing the same Polaris installation, or it may represent a single library.

    +

    You can change many system settings from either the System workform or the Administration Explorer, although most database tables are set using the Administration Explorer. The system record cannot be deleted.

    +

    The system record specifies the following information in the Polaris system:

    +
      +
    • Control number - The unique record identification number assigned to the organization record and displayed in the workform title bar. This number is used in Polaris code and for special purposes. For example, if you run reports from Reporting Services, you specify an organization filter by control number. The system organization control number is always 1.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Name of the library system - The full name, abbreviation, and the display name of the library, cooperative, or consortium that owns and administers the system for all organizations using this installation of Polaris.
    • +
    • Address and contact information - The postal address of the central office, and contact information for the system director or Polaris administrator. These are initially defined in the organization address and contact tables. See Setting System Postal Codes, Setting Organization Addresses, and Identifying Organization Contacts.
    • +
    • Default Country and Default Currency - The default country and the main currency that is used throughout the library system. The default is U. S. dollars. You can specify other currencies to use when ordering materials from foreign vendors.
    • +
    • Default Language - The default language used throughout the library system. (Currently, this setting is English and cannot be changed.)
    • +
    • Permissions - In general, Polaris permissions set at the system level apply only to records that belong to the system organization. Organizations at lower levels must define their own permissions settings. However, the Allow permissions set with the Security view at the system level are applied to all workstations and staff members in Polaris. See Granting Permissions.
    • +
    • Parameters, profiles, policies, and database tables - If set at the system level, the settings are inherited by or used as the basis for settings at subordinate organizations. Some settings are available only at the system level.
    • +
    +

    See also: Change the system record

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Dates_Closed.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Dates_Closed.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..585b6703 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Dates_Closed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Identifying Dates Closed + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Identifying Dates Closed

    +

    You specify Dates Closed to indicate dates that an organization is closed when it otherwise would be open for business. For example, a branch is normally open on Tuesday, but in 2013, Christmas falls on a Wednesday. In this case, 12/25/2013 is listed as a date closed. The Dates Closed policy table contains the dates when libraries or branches in the system are closed. Closed dates can be set from the system, library, and branch levels. You can specify different closed dates for each organization in Polaris.

    +

    You can open the Dates Closed policy table from an organization workform or the Administration Explorer. The organization level at which the table is opened determines the entries you see in the list and the organizations for which you can specify a closed date:

    +
      +
    • +

      System level - Displays all libraries and branches with all dates closed for each organization. You can set the most common dates at the system level, so that these dates are also closed dates for all the libraries and branches. You can also set closed dates for specific libraries and branches.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Library level - Displays all branches associated with the selected library, and all dates the branches are closed. You can set closed dates for a library, so that these dates are applied to its member branches. You can also set closed dates for specific branches, and remove closed dates for specific branches if they are not applicable to the branch.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Branch level - Displays the closed dates for the selected branch. You can add or delete closed dates for the branch only.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Modify dates closed table: Allow permission is required to change this table.

    +

    You specify the days of the week when an organization is ordinarily closed, such as Sunday, with the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation. Set this parameter at the system, library, or branch level. See Setting Parameters and Profiles. Settings in both the Dates Closed policy table and the Hours of Operation parameter are used to determine circulation due dates.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Organization_Contacts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Organization_Contacts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e71e01c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Identifying_Organization_Contacts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Identifying Organization Contacts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Identifying Organization Contacts

    +

    A standard list of contact people is available for use in all the organization records that require contact information. You define the list of contacts in the Contact Persons policy table. Then the entries in the policy table are listed as options for the Primary and Alternate contact boxes on the organization workforms.

    +

    You can open the Contact Persons policy table from an organization workform or the Administration Explorer. You can display and work with contact entries from any organization level. The same list of contacts appears at all organization levels, and any changes to the Contact Persons policy table are applied to all organization records.

    +

    Note:
    The Modify contact persons table: Allow permission is required to change this table.

    +

    See also:

    +

    Add a contact person entry +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_branch.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_branch.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14d6dbba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_branch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + + Register a branch + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Registering a Branch

    +

    To add a branch to Polaris:

    +

    Note:
    Address and contact information must be defined in the appropriate tables before you can specify them in the branch record. See Setting Organization Addresses and Identifying Organization Contacts.

    +

    Important:
    If you have deleted a branch and are setting up a new one, you may have difficulty matching settings such as item statistical codes. In this situation, contact your Polaris Site Manager for assistance. Fees may apply.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    3. Select File, New, Branch on the Administration Explorer menu bar. The Branch workform appears.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Type the formal name of the branch in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Select the library organization to which the branch belongs in the Parent box. A branch that has the same name as a library administration record should have that library as the parent.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    In Administration boxes where the options are marked with an organization icon, such as the Parent box, you can type the first letter of an organization name and that organization is chosen. If multiple selections begin with the same letter, keep typing the letter to cycle through the choices.

    +
      +
    1. Type the abbreviation of the branch name in the Abbr box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you use enriched EDI ordering and shelf-ready cataloging with Baker & Taylor, the branch abbreviation is limited to 5 characters or fewer to comply with this vendor’s data requirements.

    +
      +
    1. In the Display Name box, type the name you want to appear in the workform title bar and on the Polaris Shortcut bar, where the name appears as the parent organization of the logged-in workstation. This name is also used in Mobile PAC and text message hold notices.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    These characters cannot be used in the Name or Display Name fields:

    +

    ; (semi-colon)
    ? (question mark)
    : (colon)
    @ ('at' sign)
    & (ampersand)
    = (equals sign)
    + (plus sign)
    $ (dollar sign)
    , (comma)
    \ (back slash)
    * (asterisk)
    < (less than sign)
    > (greater than sign)
    | (vertical pipe)
    " (double quote)
    / (forward slash)

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate addresses for the branch in the following boxes:
      • Addresses Primary - Select the main mailing address for the branch.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    In Administration boxes where the options are not marked with an organization icon, such as the Addresses boxes, you can type the first letter or number of an option and that option is chosen. If multiple options begin with the same character, type the first two or three characters.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Billing - Select the address where invoices and other billing information should be mailed. This address is used on purchase orders created in Polaris.
    • +
    • Shipping - Select the address where packages and other bulk shipments for the branch should be sent, typically the address for a receiving department at the library or branch. This address is used on purchase orders created in Polaris.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the email and URL addresses in the Email and WWW boxes.
    2. +
    3. Select the branch staff to contact in the Primary and Alternate boxes.
    4. +
    5. Type the library office phone and fax numbers in the Phone Numbers boxes.
    6. +
    7. Define the normal hours of operation for the branch by following these steps:
    8. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Define Hours of Operation. The Hours of Operation dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Clear the Closed check box for each day of the week that the branch is open. The opening and closing time boxes become available for each open day.
    2. +
    3. Set the appropriate opening and closing times. Select the hours, minutes, seconds, and AM/PM fields, and type the appropriate entry or use the up and down arrows to set the field. Then click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Once the branch is set up, you can edit the normal hours of operation using this method, or with the Patron Services parameter Hours of Operation for the branch. To set specific dates closed, such as January 1, 2012, see Identifying Dates Closed.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Complete the following optional information according to your library policies:
      • Standard Address Number - If the branch has a registered SAN, type the number.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Important:
    If you use EDI for acquisitions, the SAN number is essential for the correct processing.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Tax Exempt # - If the branch does not have to pay sales taxes, type the registered exemption number.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To set up error reporting, in the Error Reporting Email field, type the email address of the administrator who should receive the report of a system error. You can use error reporting to identify workstations that have stopped functioning due to unhandled exceptions. If you use Polaris ExpressCheck and credit card processing, an error report is sent if a credit card refund is not successful when a lost or billed item charge needs to be resolved. Your error reporting settings at the system and library level are inherited by branches unless you change the settings at this level.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save the branch record. Record saved appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    5. Edit branch-level permissions, profiles, parameters, and tables as needed. See the “Related Information” section.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • General information about how to edit administration records - See Setting Parameters and Profiles and Working with Tables.
    • +
    • Setting permissions - Permissions must be set explicitly for the branch. See Managing Organization Security.
    • +
    • Setting specific dates closed - See Identifying Dates Closed.
    • +
    • Collections - If this branch uses collections, see Setting Statistical Codes for Reports.
    • +
    • Acquisitions settings - See Acquisitions Administration.
    • +
    • Cataloging settings - Certain settings, such as tags to retain for overlaid bibliographic and authority records and preferred cataloging sources, are made at the branch level. See Cataloging Administration.
    • +
    • Circulation and patron services settings - Many settings, such as fines and fees, loan periods, item blocks, and holds routing, are made at the branch level. See Patron Services Administration.
    • +
    • Statistical reporting - If the branch does statistical reporting, specify the item and patron statistical categories.
    • +
    • Search databases in the staff client and public catalog - See Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client.
    • +
    • Display characteristics in the public catalog - Many settings, such as the bibliographic information displayed in search results, the item holdings display, cross-reference terms, and shelf locations, are made at the branch level.
    • +
    • Suppressing a branch from display in PAC - Use the system-level PAC profile Suppress branches to select branches to suppress from list displays in PAC. This is useful if you have a branch set up strictly for administrative purposes. For Polaris PowerPAC, the selected branches are suppressed from the connection branch list (Switch to another branch), the list of branches on the Search Options scoping page, and the list of branches on the donations page. For Mobile PAC, this profile suppresses selected branches from the drop list of organizations on the Library Hours page and the Mobile PAC Preferences page.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Use the Request parameter Holds options (Pickup tabbed page) to include or suppress the branches available as pick-up library choices for hold requests placed through PAC.

    +
      +
    • Branch properties - The branch property sheet shows summary information about the branch, including the number of accessible remote databases available to the branch in the staff client and in PAC , collections, workstations, staff members, and registered patrons. To open the property sheet, right-click the branch name in the Administration Explorer and select Properties, or click the Properties icon PropertiesIcon00369.gif on the Branch workform.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_library_in_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_library_in_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..82efa47d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Register_a_library_in_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Register a library in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Register a library in Polaris

    +

    To add the library record to Polaris.

    +

    Note:
    Address and contact information must be defined in the appropriate tables before you can specify them in the library record. See Setting Organization Addresses and Identifying Organization Contacts.

    +

    Important:
    If you have deleted a library and are setting up a new one, you may have difficulty matching settings such as item statistical codes. In this situation, contact your Polaris Site Manager for assistance. Fees may apply.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New > Library from the Administration Explorer menu bar. The Library workform appears.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also right-click an existing library listed in the Administration Explorer tree view, and select New from the context menu.

    +

    + NewLibrary.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the library name in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type the abbreviation for the library name in the Abbr box.
    4. +
    5. In the Display Name box, type the name you want to be displayed for this organization. This name identifies the organization in the workform title bar and in Mobile PAC. On the Polaris Shortcut bar, the display name of the logged-in workstation’s parent organization appears in the title bar and in the About Polaris window (Help menu).
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    These characters cannot be used in the Name or Display Name fields:

    ; (semi-colon)
    ? (question mark)
    : (colon)
    @ ('at' sign)
    & (ampersand)
    = (equals sign)
    + (plus sign)
    $ (dollar sign)
    , (comma)
    \ (back slash)
    * (asterisk)
    < (less than sign)
    > (greater than sign)
    | (vertical pipe)
    " (double quote)
    / (forward slash)

    +
      +
    1. Select the parent system organization in the Parent box, if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    3. Select the street address in the Library box, and type the e-mail and URL addresses in the Email and WWW boxes.
    4. +
    5. Select the library staff to contact in the Primary and Alternate boxes.
    6. +
    7. Type the library office phone and fax numbers in the Phone Numbers boxes.
    8. +
    9. Select the type in the Type of Library box.
    10. +
    11. To set up error reporting, in the Error Reporting Email field, type the e-mail address of the administrator who should receive the report of a system error. You can use error reporting to identify workstations that have stopped functioning due to unhandled exceptions. If you use Polaris ExpressCheck and credit card processing, an error report is sent if a credit card refund is not successful when a lost or billed item charge needs to be resolved. Your error reporting settings at the system level are inherited by libraries unless you change the settings at this level.
    12. +
    13. Select File > Save.
    14. +
    15. Edit library-level permissions, profiles, parameters, and tables as needed. See Related Information.
    16. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Register a branch for the library - See Working with Branches.
    • +
    • Editing administration settings (general procedures) - See Setting Parameters and Profiles and Working with Tables.
    • +
    • Setting permissions - See Managing Organization Security.
    • +
    • Setting schedule information - See Identifying Dates Closed.
    • +
    • Library organization properties - The library property sheet shows summary information about the library, including the number of branches, accessible remote servers, accessible remote databases available to the branch in the staff client and in PAC, collections, workstations, staff members, and registered patrons. To open the property sheet, right-click the library name in the Administration Explorer and select Properties, or click the Properties icon PropertiesIcon00368.gif on the Library workform.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Organization_Addresses.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Organization_Addresses.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8866215f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Organization_Addresses.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Organization Addresses + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Organization Addresses

    +

    A standard set of addresses is available for use in all the organization records that include street addresses. You define the standard addresses in the Addresses policy table. Then the address entries in the policy table display as options for Addresses boxes on the organization workforms.

    +

    You can open the Addresses policy table from an organization workform or the Administration Explorer. You can display, add, delete, and change address entries from any organization level. The same list of addresses appears at all organization levels, and any changes to the Addresses policy table are applied to all organization records.

    +

    Note:
    The Modify address table: Allow permission is required to work with this table.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_System_Postal_Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_System_Postal_Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..267d750a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_System_Postal_Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting System Postal Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting System Postal Codes

    +

    In organization workforms and throughout Polaris, whenever you need to enter an address, you simply select a country (US or Canada) and type a valid postal code. The City and State/Province boxes are filled in automatically. The postal codes are defined and maintained with two tables that you can access from the Administration Explorer:

    +

    Note:
    You can work with these tables at the system, library, or branch levels. Changes made at any level are applied to all organizations in Polaris.

    +
      +
    • Countries policy table - Defines the postal code length and styles for the countries in which the library sends mail.
    • +
    • Postal Codes database table - When Polaris is installed, the Postal Codes database table contains the current ZIP Codes defined by the United States Postal Service. Canadian postal codes are installed at implementation for Canadian customers.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If your library is in the US but you need Canadian postal codes, contact your Site Manager. You must be using Polaris version 3.5 or later.

    +

    Additions to the Postal Codes Table from Polaris Records

    +

    Staff members who have the Circulation permission Patron registration: Modify postal address fields can also enter a new city/country postal code combination for a US or Canadian address when creating or editing patron records in the staff client, and the new combination is added to the Postal Codes database table when the record is saved. Staff members without this permission can edit street addresses or select a different (but existing) postal code/city/state/country combination in a patron record.

    +

    Note:
    The permission is not checked during offline patron registration. If a patron address in an offline file has an unknown postal code, or if the city does not match an existing postal code, an error appears in the offline upload report and the address is not accepted. If the postal code and city match an existing combination, but the county does not match, the county in the patron address is changed to match the existing postal code-city-county combination.

    +

    The Serials permission Suppliers: Modify postal address fields controls the ability to enter a new city/country postal code combination for a U.S. or Canadian address when creating or editing a supplier record, and in the Donor view of a fund record. Staff members without this permission can edit street addresses or select a different (but existing) postal code/city/state/country combination in a supplier or fund record.

    +

    Note:
    The Modify countries table: Allow and Modify postal codes table: Allow permissions are required to change these tables in Polaris Administration.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organization_Resource_Groups.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organization_Resource_Groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edcf552f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organization_Resource_Groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Organization Resource Groups + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Organization Resource Groups

    +

    You can associate selected organizations as Resource Groups, and make remote and federated databases and other resources available to PAC users based on the organization resource group. For example, resource groups can be used to expose or suppress specific databases from federated database searches, and to filter the display of ebook bibliographic records. If there is no resource group associated with a resource such as a database, access to that resource is not restricted.

    +

    Note:
    Organizations that share one vendor contract for eContent may wish to set up a digital branch for the content and assign that branch to a resource group. For more information, see Setting Up a Digital Branch for Integrated EContent.

    +

    Use the Resource Group workform to create Resource Groups and assign organizations to them. One organization can belong to multiple Resource Groups. You need the following system-level System Administration permissions to work with Resource Groups:

    +
      +
    • Resource Group: Access +
    • +
    • Resource Group: Create +
    • +
    • Resource Group: Modify +
    • +
    • Resource Group: Delete +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Make sure to do both a PowerPAC and Mobile PAC (if your library uses Mobile PAC) reload each time you: add or change a resource group; add or change a vendor account; or change the Resource Groups: Search results settings profile in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To create a new Resource Group:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and select Resource Group from the New dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Resource Group workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name and description for this resource group. The name must be unique. Consider a naming convention that distinguishes Resource Groups by purpose; for example, Resource Groups for federated databases and Resource Groups for e-Content.
    2. +
    3. Specify the organizations that should belong to this Resource Group as follows:
      • Select System Level Access to give PAC users access to the resources associated with this Resource Group when the PAC connection organization is the system.
      • Select All Branches to automatically check all branches. Resources with which this Resource Group is associated are available when the PAC connection organization is any library-level organization or any branch-level organization. Typically, it is not necessary to select all branches; if access is not restricted, a resource group is not necessary. However, you can use this option to select all branches and then de-select specific branches in the list. The All Branches check box is gray when some but not all organizations are selected.
      • Select a library organization check box to select the branches associated with the library. PAC users connected to any of the selected library’s branches have access to the resources (databases) associated with the resource group.
      • Expand the library organization, and select individual branches. PAC users connected at any of the selected branches have access to the resources (databases) associated with the resource group.
    4. +
    +

    If the PAC connection organization is a member of this Resource Group, the resources associated with the group are accessible in Polaris PowerPAC, subject to your PAC display and usage condition settings. For information about associating resources with resource groups, see Registering Remote Resource Servers.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    Be sure to reload both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC (if your library uses Mobile PAC) each time you: add or change a resource group; add or change a vendor account; or change the Resource Groups: Search results settings profile in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • To find a resource group, select Administration | Resource Group. You can search by Name or Description and limit the search by organization.
    • +
    • To create a new Resource Group from an existing Resource Group, select File | New from the open Resource Group workform, and select Clear Work Form or Copy Existing Work Form.
    • +
    • To delete a resource group, right-click the Resource Group in the Find Tool results list and select Delete from the context menu, or open the Resource Group workform and select File | Delete. A Resource Group cannot be deleted if it is associated with a server record.
    • +
    • To remove an organization from a Resource Group, clear the check box for the organization in the Resource Group workform. If the resource group is associated with one or more databases, users connected to that organization will not be able to access the database(s), and the Report of Unavailable Targets dialog box appears. The dialog box lists the database display name defined for PAC (the organization-level name or system-level name, if none is defined for the organization), the server display name, and the organizations affected. If you continue to save the record, the database is removed from PAC display (if it has been selected for display) for every organization indicated in the report where there is no inheritance. The database may still be available for a parent organization.
    • +
    • To see the number of remote databases available to the branch in the staff client and PAC, right-click the branch name in the Administration Explorer and select Properties.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organizations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organizations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..776d254c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Setting_Up_Organizations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Organizations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Organizations

    +

    This unit contains information about setting up basic information for the system, libraries, and branches in Polaris Administration.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/View_system_information_and_licenses.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/View_system_information_and_licenses.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cdb0aa94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/View_system_information_and_licenses.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + View system information and licenses + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View System Information and Licenses

    +

    To see system information and active licenses:

    +
      +
    1. Select Help, About Polaris on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The About Polaris dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Application Server link.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Properties dialog box opens. The General tabbed page shows information about the system.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Licenses tab to see the separately licensed functions that are active at the system level.
    2. +
    3. Select an organization from the Organizations list to see the active licenses for a particular organization (library or branch).
    4. +
    +

    Contact your Polaris Site Manager if you are interested in activating a license.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Viewing_Organization_Licenses.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Viewing_Organization_Licenses.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4dba0ec0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Viewing_Organization_Licenses.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Viewing Organization Licenses + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing Organization Licenses

    +

    Certain Polaris functions, such as Course Reserves and Polaris ExpressCheck, are available under separate licenses. You can quickly view system information and determine the active Polaris licenses for your system or any organization within the system.

    +

    See also:

    +

    +

    View system information and licenses +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Branches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Branches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba345a58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Branches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Branches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Branches

    +

    Branch records are at the third level of the Polaris Administration hierarchy. They represent the physical repositories where patrons check in and check out books and other material. Each branch record must be associated with a parent library record.

    +

    You add a branch or change branch information using the Branch workform. You can also edit profiles, parameters, permissions, and tables for the branch directly from the Administration Explorer tree view, by expanding the appropriate folders beneath the branch name. Address or contact changes are effective immediately. Other changes to a branch record are not effective until the record is saved.

    +

    Important:
    If you change the parent library for the branch, be sure to review the permission, parameter, and profile settings for the branch and new parent library. Some settings are inherited from parent organizations and may change the way functions have worked previously for the branch. A branch that has the same name as a library administration record should always have that library as the parent.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Libraries.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Libraries.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83f13fd8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDorgnizatn/Working_with_Libraries.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Libraries + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Libraries

    +

    The library record is the second level in the Polaris Administration hierarchy. It may represent an institution that directs one or more branches, and it may or may not have a physical location. All branches, collections, workstations, and staff members that belong to a library are directly or indirectly linked to the “parent” library record.

    +

    Examples: +
    1. A Polaris system with one physical location has two Administration records (one Library record and one Branch record) because circulation and patron registration activities are associated with Branch records and every branch must have a parent Library record.
    2. A Polaris system consisting of four physical locations (one main library and three branches) has five Administration records, one Library record and four Branch records (one for each physical location).

    +
    +

    You add a library record or edit library information using the Library workform, and you can delete a library record. You can also edit profiles, parameters, permissions, and tables associated with a library record directly from the Administration Explorer tree view, by expanding the appropriate folders beneath the library name. Address or contact changes are immediately effective. Other changes to a library record are not effective until the record is saved.

    +

    Polaris policy, parameter, and profile settings at the library level are inherited from the settings made at the system level. Each library in the Polaris system may change the settings to match its local requirements. Changes made at the library level are inherited by the branch levels that belong to the library. However, permissions for a library apply only to the library. Permissions must also be set for each branch record associated with the library.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Assign_permissions_to_staff_workstation_or_group.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Assign_permissions_to_staff_workstation_or_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2cf7338 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Assign_permissions_to_staff_workstation_or_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group

    +

    To add permissions to a staff member, workstation, or group:

    +

    Note:
    If you are setting permissions for the first time, set the Staff Client profile Generate security history to No. After security implementation is complete, set the profile to Yes so you can track changes to permission assignments. See Setting Staff Client Profiles. To see the security history for a permission, right-click the permission in the Control Record list (Administration Explorer, Security) and select Properties from the context menu.

    +

    Tip:
    In the Administration Explorer tree view, you can expand a listed workstation or staff member and select Permissions to display the Permissions view. To work with a group record, you must find and open the Permission Group workform.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Administration Explorer, and select File, Open from the Explorer menu bar.
    2. +

      + +

      +
    3. Select the record type (Permission Group, Staff Member, or Workstation). The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    4. +
    5. Search for the administration record.
    6. +
    7. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The workform appears.
    8. +
    9. Select View, Permissions or click PermissionsIcon.gif to display the permission list for the record.
    10. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can sort the list by clicking a column head. Sorting can take some time because there may be thousands of permissions. Wait until the sorting operation is complete before you proceed.

    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    The left side of the workform lists the currently assigned permissions (control records). When you select a permission that is organization-specific, the organizations are loaded on the right side of the workform. When you select a permission that is not organization-specific (task control record), the Organization list on the right side displays a Not Applicable message.

    +
      +
    1. Click Add button above the Is Permitted To list. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
    2. +
    3. Set the search criteria that identify the permissions you want to add, and click Search. See Finding Permissions.
    4. +
    5. From the results list, select the permissions you want to assign. Use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple items. Click a column heading to sort the list.
    6. +
    7. Right-click a highlighted permission, and choose Select from the context menu. The workform is displayed, and the selected permissions are listed in the Is Permitted To list.
    8. +
    9. Select File > Save to record your changes.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your permission changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Reference information about specific permissions

    +

    Managing permissions +

    + +

    Permission reports - Two permission reports are available from the reports menu under Utilities > Reports and Notices > System:

    +
      +
    • The Staff Member Permissions report lists the type of record or task for which the staff member has permissions; the permission (modify, access, create, delete, allow, etc.); the subsystem; the library organization; and the organization name (system, library, branch).
    • +
    +

    +  

    +
      +
    • The Staff Member Permission Comparison report displays permissions that two staff members do not share. Any permissions that the staff members have in common do not appear in the report.
    • +
    +

    + permcomp.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_a_permission_group.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_a_permission_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa7db41f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_a_permission_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy a permission group + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Permission Group

    +

    You can copy a permission group, including a default group, rename it, and add or remove members and permissions. To copy any permission group:

    +

    Important:
    You can edit the membership and permissions for the Polaris default permission groups directly. See Manage members in a permission group and Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group. However, if you want to keep the default permission group record intact, copy the group, then edit the copy. Rename your copy so that it is not overwritten during a Polaris upgrade.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Administration Explorer, and select File, Open, Permission Group from the Explorer menu bar. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The names of Polaris default permission groups begin with Polaris. To list all the default groups in the results list, search for Polaris*.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the permission group you want to copy.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the permission group in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The Permission Group workform appears.
    4. +
    5. From the workform menu bar, select File | New | Permission Group.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The New Permission Group dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Copy Existing Work Form, and click OK. The open permission group workform, including its existing members, is copied to the new permission group.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Permissions are not copied. You must specifically assign them to the new group.

    +
      +
    1. Type a new name for the group in the Group name box. See Create a new permission group.
    2. +
    3. Edit the group description, membership, and permissions as required. See also:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File, Save to save the new permission group.
    2. +
    +

    For a list of the default groups and the permissions assigned to them, see Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_group_memberships.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_group_memberships.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..126d2da7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_group_memberships.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy (acquire) permission group memberships + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy (acquire) permission group memberships

    +

    To assign permission group memberships to a workstation or staff member by copying them from another workstation or staff member:

    +

    Tip:
    You can list the workstation or staff member in the Administration Explorer. See List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer. Then select Permissions for the workstation or staff member in the tree view of the Explorer. The Permissions view is displayed in the right side of the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type (Staff Member or Workstation) to find. The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for the administration record.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The appropriate workform appears.
    6. +
    7. Select View, Permissions to display the Is Permitted To list and the Membership list. The Membership list shows the permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs.
    8. +

      Note:
      When you open the Permissions view of the workform, the Membership list shows all groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs. If you select a permission from the permissions list, and the workstation or staff member has that permission due to permission group membership, the Membership list shows that group. Once a permission is selected, the Membership list no longer displays all the permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs. If the workstation or staff member was granted the permission directly, and did not receive the permission as a member of a group, nothing shows in the Membership list when that permission is selected. Click (Show my group membership) above the Membership list to re-list all the permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs.

      +
    9. Click  (Acquire group memberships) above the Membership list. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
    10. +
    11. Search for the workstation or staff member whose permission group memberships you want to copy.
    12. +
    13. In the results list, right-click the workstation or staff member, and choose Select from the context menu. The Permissions view is displayed. The permission groups to which the source workstation or staff member belongs are listed in the Membership list.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8d20b56 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Copy_acquire_permission_settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy (acquire) permission settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy (acquire) permission settings

    +

    Only directly-assigned permissions can be acquired from one permission group, workstation, or staff member to another. Permissions that were assigned through group membership cannot be acquired.

    +

    To assign permissions to a target record by acquiring a set of directly-assigned permissions from another record:

    +

    Tip:
    You can list a workstation or staff member in the Administration Explorer (see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer), then select Permissions for the workstation or staff member in the tree view of the Explorer. The Permissions view is displayed in the right side of the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type (Permission Group, Staff Member, or Workstation). The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for the target record.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The workform appears.
    6. +
    7. Select View, Permissions or click btnPermissionsView.gif to display the Is Permitted To list for the group, staff member, or workstation.
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click btnAcquire.gif (Acquire) above the list. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
    2. +
    3. Search for the group, workstation, or staff member record from which you want to acquire permissions. The Find Tool results list is displayed.
    4. +
    5. In the results list, right-click the record from which you want to acquire permissions, and choose Select from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    The Find Tool closes, and the permissions from the selected record are added to the Is Permitted To list for the target record. The existing permissions remain. Any duplicate permissions from the source record are not copied.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your permission changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Copy (acquire) permission group memberships +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Create_a_new_permission_group.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Create_a_new_permission_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2253a7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Create_a_new_permission_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new permission group + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a new permission group

    +

    To add a new permission group to Polaris Administration:

    +

    Note:
    You can also create a permission group by copying an existing group and then editing its members and permissions. See Copy a permission group.

    +

    Tip:
    If you are setting permissions for the first time, set the Staff Client profile Generate security history to No. After security implementation is complete, set the profile to Yes so you can track changes to permission assignments. See Setting Staff Client Profiles. To see the security history for a permission, right-click the permission in the Control Record list (Administration Explorer, Security) and select Properties from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Administration Explorer, and select File > New > Permission Group from the Explorer menu bar.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The New Permission Group workform appears.

    +

    + GroupNewWF.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    If you are creating standard permission groups for multiple libraries and branches, start the name with the organization’s abbreviation, followed by a brief title. The description can specify a standard purpose. This allows you to sort permission groups by their organization (Name column) or by function (Description
     column) in the Polaris Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Type a unique name for this permission group in the Group name box.
    2. +
    3. Specify the purpose of the group in the Description box.
    4. +
    5. Identify the staff members, workstations, and organizations that are members of this permission group. For details, see Manage members in a permission group.
    6. +
    +
      +
    • To add the system organization, click btnSystem.gif.
    • +
    • To add a library, click btnLibrary.gif.
    • +
    • To add a branch, click btnBranch.gif.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Adding an organization (system, library, branch) to a permission group means that every staff member and workstation directly assigned to the organization has the permissions granted to the group. The Organization box on the Staff workform and the Parent Branch box on the Workstation workform define where the staff member or workstation is directly assigned.

    +
      +
    • To add a workstation, click btnWrkStatn.gif.
    • +
    • To add a staff member, click btnStaff.gif.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select View, Permissions and click Add button above the Is Permitted To list to add permissions to the group. For details, see Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The left side of the Permissions view displays the currently-assigned permissions (if any). When you select a permission that is organization-specific, the organizations are loaded on the right side.

    +

    + PermsGroupAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to add the new permission group.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your permission changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Grant_administration_permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Grant_administration_permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..351554d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Grant_administration_permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,2142 @@ + + + + + + + + + Grant administration permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Grant Administration Permissions

    +

    To assign the permissions that control access to Polaris administration:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, select Security for the System level. The Security view is displayed.
    2. +
    3. Select (highlight) System Administration in the Control Record list, and press ALT+* (on the numeric key pad). The System Administration permission tree expands to display all the System Administration permissions.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Identify who can set permissions. See the Patron Services Administration PDF Guide, Permissions to Set Permissions. Permissions to Set Permissions.
    2. +
    3. Identify who can maintain organizational information. Manage organization security settings.
    4. +
    5. Identify who can maintain group, workstation, and staff member records. See Permission Group, Workstation, Staff Member Record Permissions.
    6. +
    7. Identify who can work with specific permissions as assigned to groups (such as cataloging or circulation administration tables, public access search and display tables, and acquisitions tables. See Manage Permission Group Membership.
    8. +
    9. Identify who can work with circulation administration tables. See Circulation Administration Permissions.
    10. +
    11. Identify who can work with public access search and display tables. See Public Access Administration Permissions.
    12. +
    13. Identify who can work with acquisitions tables. See Acquisitions Administration Permissions.
    14. +
    15. Select File > Save.
    16. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +

    Administration Workflow Permissions

    +

    This section lists the combinations of permissions needed for specific administration workflows.

    +

    Note:
    For an alphabetical list of all System Administration permissions, see Find Tool Permissions Reference. For more information about setting permissions in Polaris, see Permission Strategies.

    +

    Permissions to Set Permissions

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Authorize others to set permissions

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Object/task control record: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Object/task control record: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Access

    +
    +

    System, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain security for a library. These permissions are required to allow individuals to set local permissions.

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Object/task control record: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Object/task control record: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Libraries: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Branches: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Groups: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain permissions for groups, staff members, and workstations

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Object/task control record: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Object/task control record: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Permission Groups: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Organization Maintenance Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Create new organizations

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Branches: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Branches: Create

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Libraries: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Libraries: Create

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain resource groups

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +

    Resource Group: Access

    +

    Resource Group: Create

    +

    Resource Group: Delete

    +

    Resource Group: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +

    System - System Admin

    +

    System - System Admin

    +

    System - System Admin

    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain system organizational information

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer system-wide address and contact information (add these permissions to the system maintenance permissions). These permissions can be added to library-level and branch-level administration permissions, but any changes apply to the entire system.

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify address table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify contact persons table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify countries table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify dates closed table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify postal codes table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer record operations and transactions (add these permissions to the system maintenance permissions). These permissions can be added to library-level and branch-level administration permissions.

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify object locks table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify transaction logging table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain and change organizational information

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Branches: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Branches: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Libraries: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Libraries: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain organizational parameters and profiles

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Branches: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Libraries: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer collections

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Collections: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Collections: Create

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Collections: Delete

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Collections: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer servers

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify search databases table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Servers: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Servers: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Servers: Create

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Servers: Delete

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Permission Group, Workstation, Staff Member Record Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Administer staff members

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch -System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch -System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Delete

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch -System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer permission groups. Access to Libraries and Branches can be added to administer permission groups.

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Permission Groups: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Permission Groups: Create

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Permission Groups: Modify

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Permission Groups: Delete

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Staff members: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer workstations

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +
    +

    Workstations: Delete

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - System Admin

    +

     

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Cataloging Administration Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Set automatic bib and authority re-indexing during next server upgrade

    +
    +

    Access MARC Re-index during next server upgrade: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set MARC validation rules and policies

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access MARC Validation: Authority: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access MARC Validation: Bibliographic: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Authority - insert row: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Authority - modify row: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Authority - delete row: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Bibliographic - insert row: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Bibliographic - modify row: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Bibliographic - delete row: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set duplicate catalog record detection criteria

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify bibliographic deduplication table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify bibliographic tags to retain/delete tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify authority overlay retention table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify authority record import: preferred cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries.: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set miscellaneous catalog record policies

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify call number hierarchy table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify item price hierarchy table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify item block descriptions table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify initial articles table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify import blackout times

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set label configuration profiles

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    You may limit access to a subset of these levels:

    +

    Branches: Access

    +

    Libraries: Access

    +

    System: Access

    +

    Workstations: Access

    +

    Staff members: Access

    +
    +

    Various levels - System Admin

    +

     

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Circulation Administration Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Set up circulation codes and labels (add these permissions to the system maintenance permissions). These permissions can be added to library and branch level administration permissions, but any changes apply to the entire system.

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify circulation status table

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify claim reason table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify fee descriptions table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify fine codes table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify hold status table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify item block descriptions table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify patron codes table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify patron stop descriptions table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify material types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify loan period codes table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify patron statistical class codes table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify NCIP User Privilege Types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain circulation limits, rates, and schedules (add these permissions to the system maintenance permissions). These permissions can be added to library and branch level administration permissions.

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify fines table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify loan periods table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify patron/materials type loan limit blocks table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify payment methods table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set policies for floating collections

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify floating material type limits table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify floating material types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify floating to branch table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain self-check attributes

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify self check material types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain notice settings

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access reports and notices: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify notification dates not to call table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify notification local area codes table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify notification local prefix table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain hold request routing schedule

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify holds routing sequence table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Edit hold request status descriptions

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify hold status table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set up and maintain course reserve functions

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify course reserve tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Specify mobile phone service carriers for selection in the Patron Registration workform and when patrons register or update their account information from the PAC

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify mobile phone carriers: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set up and maintain outreach service functions

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify outreach services tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Administer NCIP - Map data to Polaris data and set parameters

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify NCIP medium types incoming table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify NCIP medium types outgoing table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify NCIP user privilege types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify NCIP Payment Types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify NCIP Fiscal Action Types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify SIP Payment Types table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Public Access Administration Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Maintain catalog results settings

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify shelf locations table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify cross reference display constants table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify item availability display order table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Maintain catalog search settings

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify search databases table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set up and modify override phrases for Did You Mean search suggestions in the PAC

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify did you mean overrides table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Set up PAC displays for bibliographic and community information searches and search results

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify bibliographic record title displays: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify community record title displays: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify and create display entities: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify product page categories: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify PAC limit by display table: allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify PAC community limit by display table: allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Enter or edit geographic coordinates for organizations that might be displayed with the Map It (Google Maps) feature in Polaris PowerPAC

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify geographic coordinates table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Acquisitions Administration Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Maintain acquisitions settings

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Access tables: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify links to supplier databases: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify donation fund category table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify currencies table: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +

     

    +

     

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    Serials Administration Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Set parameters and profiles related to Serials

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    System: Access

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +

    +

    +

     

    +

    +

    WebAdmin Permissions

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Use Polaris Language Editor (Web Admin) to customize language strings for Polaris products

    +
    +

    WebAdmin access: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Admin

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Granting_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Granting_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14f8e260 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Granting_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Granting Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Granting Permissions

    +

    Polaris permissions control who can access, create, modify, or delete specific record types and who can perform specific tasks in Polaris. Most permissions that control access to and modification of record types are set for the organization that owns the specific record. Permissions that control the ability to do specific tasks are typically set at the system level.

    +

    You can set up permissions based on the needs of the organizations in your system, and the tasks that staff members are expected to do. To allow administrators to control all records and functions in Polaris, you can set up certain staff members as “Superusers” or add these staff members to the Administrator permission group.

    +

    Using the fine level of control available in Polaris permissions, your library can effectively manage the specific tasks your staff members can perform in Polaris. The flexibility of Polaris permissions provides libraries options to accommodate various staff responsibilities, such as:

    +
      +
    • Check-out clerks cannot override circulation blocks, but the supervisor does have permission to override these blocks.
    • +
    • Staff members at a large library system rotate among different branches. The staff members have a set of permissions that are the same for all but one branch. The one branch is more restrictive with the permissions granted to rotating staff.
    • +
    • Senior catalogers have permissions to maintain authority records used by the entire library system. All other catalogers have permission to access the headings used in bibliographic records, but they cannot add any headings or change existing ones.
    • +
    • The library system has a central acquisitions department, but individual branches maintain their own selection lists. The central acquisitions department can access each branch's selection lists, but only specific staff members at the branch can modify the lists.
    • +
    • Each member library in a consortium prefers to keep its fund structure private. Libraries cannot view (access) each other’s fund records.
    • +
    +

    When a staff member does not have the appropriate permission to do a patron services or circulation task, a permission block message appears. You can allow specific staff members (typically supervisors) to override certain permission blocks so the blocked staff member can continue the task. Set the following profiles for staff members as appropriate: Override acquisitions blocks; Override serials blocks; Override cataloging blocks; Override patron services blocks; and Find Tool: Override SQL search blocks.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_members_in_a_permission_group.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_members_in_a_permission_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb2c9a20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_members_in_a_permission_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Manage members in a permission group + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage members in a permission group

    +

    To add and remove group members:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Open > Permission Group on the Administration Explorer menu bar to display the Polaris Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Search for the group for which you want to change membership.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the group in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The Permission Group workform appears.
    6. +
    7. On the General view, select the type of member to add:
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    You can right-click in the Group Members list, and select the member type from the context menu.

    +
      +
    • To add the system organization, click .
    • +
    • To add a library, click .
    • +
    • To add a branch, click .
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Adding an organization (system, library, branch) to a group means that every staff member and workstation directly assigned to the organization has the permissions granted to the group. The Organization box on the Staff workform and the Parent Branch box on the Workstation workform define where the staff member or workstation is directly assigned.

    +
      +
    • To add a workstation, click .
    • +
    • To add a staff member, click .
    • +
    +

    The Polaris Find Tool appears. The record type you selected is displayed in the Object box.

    +
      +
    1. In the For box, type the name of the staff member, workstation, or organization that you want to add as a member of the group, and click Search. The results list is displayed.
    2. +
    3. From the results list, select the staff members, workstations, or organizations you want to add to the group. Use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple items.
    4. +
    5. Right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu. The Permission Group workform is displayed, and the selected staff members, workstations, or organizations are listed in the Group Members list.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    When you add a staff member or workstation to a permission group, Polaris compares permissions directly assigned to the staff member or workstation with the permissions of the group. If a duplicate permission is found, the permission from the group automatically replaces the directly-assigned permission. However, when you add an entire organization to a group, the duplicate permission check is not done on staff members or workstations assigned to the organization.

    +
      +
    1. To remove a member from the permission group, select the names you want to remove, and click  above the Group Members list.
    2. +
    +

    When staff members and workstations are removed from a permission group, they lose the permissions they gained from the group. If duplicate directly-assigned permissions were removed when the staff members or workstations were added to the group, the permissions are not restored when the staff members or workstations are removed from the group.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save your changes to the Group Members list.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_organization_security_settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_organization_security_settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa18fbab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_organization_security_settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage organization security settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage organization security settings

    +

    To see the staff members, workstations, and permission groups that have permissions to do specific tasks for an organization, and to add or remove permissions assignments.

    +

    Tip:
    If you are setting permissions for the first time, set the Staff Client profile Generate security history to No. After security implementation is complete, set the profile to Yes so you can track changes to permission assignments. See Setting Staff Client Profiles. To see the security history for a permission, right-click the permission in the Control Record list and select Properties from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization for which you want to review permission assignments.
    2. +
    3. Select Security under the organization name. The Security view appears in the details pane.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. In the Control Record list, select the permission for which you want to review assignments by doing the following actions:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To display all the permissions for a subsystem, select the subsystem name in the Control Record list, and press SHIFT+ALT+* (use the * key on the numeric keypad). You can use the up and down arrow keys to review the assignments for the expanded subsystem permissions.

    +
      +
    1. Expand the appropriate folder. The list of permission categories (control records) for the selected subsystem is displayed under the subsystem name.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Expand the permission category for the permission you want to review. The list of permissions for the selected permission category is displayed under the category.
    2. +
    3. Select the permission. The permission groups, workstations, and staff members that have the selected permission for the organization are displayed in the Individuals With Permissions list.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To view additional information about the permission or the assigned “individuals,” do any of the following actions:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Display the properties of the selected permission - Right-click a permission, and select Properties.
    • +
    • Display a permission group, workstation, or staff member record - Select the record you want to view, and click btnOpen.gif in the Individuals With Permissions list tool bar. The record opens.
    • +
    • Display the properties of a permission group, workstation, or staff member record without opening the record - Select the record, and click btnProperty.gif in the Individuals With Permissions list tool bar.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To assign a selected permission, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Assign to display the Assign menu.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select Permission Group, Workstation, or Staff Member. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
    2. +
    3. Specify the search criteria, and click Search.
    4. +
    5. From the results list, select the permission group, workstation, or staff member to which you want to give the permission, and choose Select from the context menu. To select multiple items from the results list, press CTRL while you select the items.
    6. +
    +

    The selections are displayed in the Individuals With Permission list.

    +
      +
    1. To remove assignments for a selected permission, do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. From the Individuals with Permission list, select the permission groups, staff members, and workstations you want to remove. To select multiple items, press CTRL while you select the items.
    2. +
    3. Click Remove in the Individuals with Permission tool bar. The selections are removed from the list, and no longer have the permission assignment.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. If you changed the permission assignments, select File | Save to record the changes.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of any permission changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_permission_group_membership.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_permission_group_membership.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f08d9401 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Manage_permission_group_membership.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Manage permission group membership + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage permission group membership

    +

    To add or remove permission group memberships for an organization, workstation or staff member:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type (Library, Branch, Staff Member, or Workstation) to find. The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for the record.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The workform appears.
    6. +
    7. Select View > Permissions to display the Is Permitted To list and the Membership list. The Membership list shows the groups to which the organization, workstation, or staff member belongs.
    8. +

      Note:
      When you open the Permissions view of the workform, the Membership list shows all permission groups to which the organization, workstation, or staff member belongs. But if you select a permission from the permissions list, and the organization, workstation, or staff member has that permission due to group membership, the Membership list shows that permission group. Once a permission is selected, the Membership list no longer displays all the permission groups to which the organization, workstation, or staff member belongs. If the permission was granted to the organization, workstation, or staff member directly, and not received as a member of a group, nothing shows in the Membership list when that permission is selected.
      Click (Show my group membership) above the Membership list to re-list all the groups to which the organization, workstation, or staff member belongs.

      +
    +

    To add the organization, workstation, or staff member to a permission group:

    +
      +
    1. Click Add button above the Membership list.
    2. +   +

      The Polaris Find Tool appears.

    3. Search for the group to which you want to add the record.
    4. Tip:
      You can sort the results list by clicking a column heading.

    5. In the results list, right-click the group, and choose Select from the context menu. Use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple permission groups.
    6. The Permissions view is displayed, and the selected permission group is listed in the Membership list.

    7. To remove the record from a permission group, select the group from which you want to remove the record, and click  above the Membership list. The selected permission group is removed from the Membership list, and the organization, workstation, or staff member loses all the permissions that were assigned by membership in that permission group.
    8. Select File > Save.
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Organization_Security.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Organization_Security.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26a900d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Organization_Security.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Organization Security + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Organization Security

    +

    Using the Security view on the Administration Explorer, you can list all the permissions available at each organizational level in Polaris. You can grant permissions at the system level for administration and centralized functions, and each library and branch can identify who is allowed to use the organization’s records. In one step, you can add or remove multiple staff members, workstations, or permission groups for a selected permission at a particular organization.

    +

    In the Security view, the Control Record list displays all the permissions available for that level, organized in subsystem folders. The Individuals with Permission list displays all the staff members, workstations, and permission groups that have a selected permission.

    +

    + +

    +

    Icons identify the following permission holders:

    +
      +
    • + dIcnStaf.gif - Staff member
    • +
    • + dIcnWorkStatn.gif - Workstation
    • +
    • + dIcnGrp.gif - Permission Group
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Entire organizations may have permissions based on permission group membership. The Permissions view for an organization lists the permissions that are granted to the specific organization due to its membership in a permission group. See Managing Permissions with Permission Groups.

    +

    See also: Manage organization security settings

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_for_Staff_Workstations_Groups.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_for_Staff_Workstations_Groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8279163 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_for_Staff_Workstations_Groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Permissions for Staff, Workstations, Groups + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Permissions for Staff, Workstations, Groups

    +

    The Permissions view for a specific group, staff member, or workstation lists all the permissions that have been assigned to the record. You can add or remove multiple permissions that apply to several organizations in a single operation. You can also see which permissions are directly assigned and which permissions are assigned through group membership. The Permissions view also lists the groups in which a staff member or workstation is a member. You can change the group membership by adding memberships, copying group memberships from another record, or removing group memberships.

    +

    You can display the Permissions view by selecting Permissions under a workstation or staff member in the Administration Explorer tree view, or by selecting View, Permissions in a workform. To work with a permission group record, you must open the Permission Group workform.

    +

    Note:
    To work with workstation, staff, and Permission Group permissions, you must have Access and Modify permissions for the appropriate record type (including Permission Groups) and for Object/task control record.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Finding Permissions

    +

    To find permissions, first open the Staff, Workstation, or Permission Group workform, go to the Permissions view, and click Add button. See Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group. You can use the Find Tool options to do precise searches and sort the permissions.

    +

    Example:
    Find all permissions related to Community Library’s bibliographic records:
    Object = Permissions
    By
     = Control Record Name
    Type
     = Exact match (implicitly truncated)
    For = *bib
    Limit by: Organization, Community Library

    +

    + +

    +

    You can search for permissions using the following access points and values. These same access points are also available as Limit by filters in the Find Tool.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Search By

    +

    (mnemonic)

    +
    +

    Purpose

    +
    +

    Values

    +
    +

    Control Record Name

    +

    (CRN)

    +
    +

    Finds permissions by their control record name (the category name listed in the Security view of the Administration Explorer). This search finds both object and task permissions.

    +
    +

    Type the name of any permission control record in the For box. Examples: Bibliographic records, Item records, Renew items, Modify free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation..

    +
    +

    Organization

    +

    (ORG)

    +
    +

    Finds permissions that can be set by an organization.

    +
    +

    Type an organization name in the For box.

    +
    +

    Permission Name

    +

    (PNAME)

    +
    +

    Finds permissions by their action type.

    +
    +

    Any text in the For box is valid.

    +

    Common actions: Access, Allow, Create, Delete, Modify.

    +

    Less common actions: Adjust, Approve, Cancel, Change, Check-in, Convert, Credit, Deny, Display, Override, Pay, Print, Renew, Release, Send, Transfer, Uncheck-in.

    +
    +

    Subsystem

    +

    (SUBSYS)

    +
    +

    Finds permissions by their associated subsystem.

    +
    +

    Type any of the following names in the For box:

    +

    Acquisitions, Cataloging, Circulation, Public Access Catalog, System Administration, Serials, Find Tool, Polaris Fusion

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_with_Permission_Groups.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_with_Permission_Groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff79ab4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Managing_Permissions_with_Permission_Groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Permissions with Permission Groups + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Permissions with Permission Groups

    +

    You can set up groups of staff members and workstations that are involved in the same types of tasks in the library, and assign the permissions to the group. For example, you can set up a Circulation Clerk permission group with the required permissions for circulating items. Then, you simply add the staff members and workstations to the Circulation Clerk permission group.

    +

    Permission group records are managed using the Permission Group workform. You can find and open a permission group record from the Polaris Shortcut Bar (select Administration > Permission Group), or the Administration Explorer menu bar (select File > Open > Permission Group).

    +

    Note:
    To set up and manage groups, you need the Permission Group permissions (Access, Create, Delete, Modify), and permission to access any associated staff member, workstation, or organization records.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Group Permissions for Organizations

    +

    You can assign entire organizations (system, library, branch) to permission groups. Every staff member and workstation that is assigned to the organization gains the permissions of the group. Organization membership in a permission group is best used for library systems that use centralized cataloging, acquisitions, and serials processing. You can create a permission group that has access-only permissions for bibliographic, item, authority, serial control records, then make the entire system the member of the permission group. Every staff member and workstation for every organization in the Polaris installation automatically has access to the records. However, they cannot modify, create, or delete the records, and you probably would not assign these types of permissions through organization group membership.

    +

    Note:
    If a library is a member of a permission group, the staff members and workstations assigned to the library and its branches receive the group permissions. If a branch is a member of a permission group, only the staff members and workstations assigned to the branch receive the group permissions.

    +

    Default Permission Groups

    +

    Polaris is installed with default permission groups that already have many of the permissions needed to do common library workflows at all organizations. All you need to do is identify the staff and workstations that are members of the permission group. You can add or remove permissions from a default group to suit an organization’s staff departmental structure and workflows. If you want stricter security, you can copy the default permission group, remove the permissions that do not apply to the new group, and give the permission group a different name.

    +

    Example:
    In a system where each library needs to control access to patrons’ personal information, you can copy the Polaris Circulation Clerk permission group and give it a name that identifies it for a circulation desk at a specific library. Remove the permissions that do not apply to the specific library. Include the circulation staff at the library as members of the new group. Repeat the process for each library that requires strict control of privacy information.

    +

    The names of the Polaris default permission groups begin with Polaris. To list the default permission groups in the Find Tool results list, search by name for Polaris*.

    +

    For a list of the default permission groups and the permissions associated with them, see Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +

    Using Groups to Set Initial Permissions

    +

    If you are setting up Polaris permissions for the first time, you may find this method useful:

    +
      +
    1. Make lists of the following information:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • All organizations (system, libraries, and branches)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    A library must also have a branch of the same name. See Setting Statistical Codes for Reports.

    +
      +
    • Departments for each organization
    • +
    • Staff members in each department
    • +
    • Supervisors or managers of each department
    • +
    • Workstation names and where they are used
    • +
    +

    These lists help identify how many permission groups you may need to set up, and the possible members of the groups. Every department for each organization may be a group. You may want a supervisor group for each department, or combine all supervisors into a single group at each organization. You probably need a Circulation clerk group at every branch.

    +
      +
    1. Review areas of organizational responsibilities, and compile a list of functional areas in each department.
    2. +
    +

    Work such as administration, cataloging, serials processing, or acquisitions in large library systems or consortia may be centralized. In this case, you may need a single permission group for catalogers. If each library is responsible for its own technical services, you may need multiple cataloging groups, one for every library that maintains its own cataloging records.

    +

    Certain departments may have several functional areas, so they may need a finer division of group responsibilities. For example, a Technical Services department may need a permission group for catalogers and a separate permission group for the people doing acquisitions and serials processing. The list may be based on work area or job descriptions.

    +
      +
    1. Compile a list of permission groups based on the information you have gathered, and the decisions you have made.
    2. +
    3. Create the permission groups in Polaris Administration, or adapt the Polaris default groups. See Managing Permissions with Permission Groups.
    4. +
    5. Set the Staff Client profile Generate security history to No until you have completed initial permissions setup. See Setting Staff Client Profiles.
    6. +
    7. Give each group the permissions needed to do the tasks for the purpose of the group. See Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group.
    8. +
    9. Assign the members to each permission group. See Manage members in a permission group.
    10. +
    11. Ask a member from each permission group to test the setup by doing their normal tasks.
    12. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Permission_Strategies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Permission_Strategies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56b443df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Permission_Strategies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + + Permission Strategies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Permission Strategies

    +

    You can manage permissions in Polaris using any of the following methods, according to your needs:

    +
      +
    • Set security for an organization’s records - Identify who is allowed to view and use an organization’s records. Expand the Security folder for the organization in the Administration Explorer, select a permission, then find and select the staff members, workstations, and permission groups that should have the permission. All the permissions that can be set at an organization level are listed under Security for the organization in the Administration Explorer. See Managing Organization Security.
    • +

      Tip:
      If you are implementing Polaris permissions for the first time, the group method is a convenient strategy. See Using Groups to Set Initial Permissions.

      +
    • Set up permission groups - Set up permission groups with multiple permissions and add multiple staff members, workstations, and/or organizations to the group. You can add permissions to the group to give them to all group members, and add group members. For example, a Cataloging permission group might have most cataloging permissions except deleting records. If a new cataloger is joining the library, you can add her to the group to give her all the appropriate permissions in one step. See Managing Permissions with Permission Groups.
    • +
    • Set permissions for an individual staff member or workstation - For example, a staff member who works in acquisitions needs permission to import brief bibliographic records using the Express Import option. See Managing Permissions for Staff, Workstations, Groups.
    • +

      Important:
      The PolarisSuperuser “staff member” and the Administrator permission groups have all permissions. The Superuser ensures there is always at least one person able to work in Polaris administration. Only one or two individuals should have access to this logon. The Administrator group simplifies giving Polaris administration permissions to backup administrators. Permissions cannot be taken away from the Superuser or Administrator permission groups, and these two records cannot be deleted.

      +

      See also:

      +
    • Permission Availability and Record Ownership +
    • +
    • Permissions for Tasks +
    • +
    • Assigning Permissions to Workstations +
    • +
    • Permission Assignments at Upgrade +
    • +
    • Special Permissions for Rotating Staff +
    • +
    • Special Permissions for SQL Searches in the Find Tool +
    • +
    +

    Permission Availability and Record Ownership

    +

    A specific set of permissions is available at the system, library, and branch level. While many permissions are set at the branch level, some permissions are available at all levels, and some are available only at the system level, only at the library level, or only at the branch level.

    +

    The permissions that control access and modifications to Polaris records can only be set at the organization level to which the record belongs. Some types of records can be owned at multiple organization administration levels. Other records can only be owned at a specific level. For example, item records can be owned at the system, library, and branch levels, but patron records can only be owned by a branch. Permissions to use item records are available and set independently at each level and for each organization. You set permissions for every organization that uses the associated records. Permissions to use patron records are available only at the branch level.

    +

    Important:
    Bibliographic and item records can be maintained at the system, library, or branch level. Cataloging record permissions must be set for at least one organization. Typically, if the catalog is maintained by a central cataloging department for all organizations, the system level permissions are used. If each branch maintains its own cataloging records, assign the catalog record permissions for each branch.

    +

    Note:
    See Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference for a list of the record fields that indicate ownership for each type of Polaris record.

    +

    Several levels of permissions control access to and operations on an organization’s records. For example, you need the appropriate Access permission to view an organization’s bibliographic records, or even see those records in lists such as Find Tool results. Separate Create, Modify, and Delete permissions control the ability to do these operations on the organization’s bibliographic records.

    +

    Important:
    If you have the permission Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets: Allow, you can create record sets that no other users can access, including your system administrator. When you create a new cataloging record set, your user name is in the Owner box by default if you have this permission. To allow other users to access the record set, first select a different owner before saving the record set.

    +

    Some permissions are not organization-specific. These permissions are set at the system level and define access to options on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, access to specific tables in Polaris administration, or the ability to do certain tasks regardless of record ownership.

    +

    Permissions for Tasks

    +

    Most workflows in the Polaris staff client require multiple task permissions. You do not need to set all permissions for all organizations. If an organization does not do particular tasks, the permissions for that workflow do not need to be set for the organization. For example, if a branch does not use Polaris Acquisitions because selection, ordering, receiving, and invoicing are done at the main library, then the branch does not need acquisitions permissions.

    +

    Assigning Permissions to Workstations

    +

    The ability to do a task in Polaris depends on the permissions set for both the staff member and the workstation. For security, libraries may want to restrict the tasks that can be done on a particular computer, even if the person logged on has permission to do the tasks.

    +

    Example:
    A computer monitor at a reference desk is visible to the public in that area. The library is concerned about patron privacy, and wants to prevent patron account information from appearing on that computer, so that workstation does not have permission to view the library's patron records.

    +

    You can set permissions for individual workstations, or you can use the following options:

    +
      +
    • Create permission groups specifically for workstations and assign permissions based on the security or privacy requirements of the workstations in the group.
    • +

      Note:
      Do not put restricted workstations in permission groups with access to system security or patron information. To view a workstation’s permissions, go the Permissions view of the Workstation workform. See Managing Permissions for Staff, Workstations, Groups.

      +
    • To give workstations and staff members the same permissions, make the workstations members of the same permissions groups to which the staff members belong. This method ensures a staff member can always do their tasks. However, do not use this method for computers where privacy and system security are issues.
    • +
    • To give all workstations in an organization the permissions of a group, make the organization a member of the permission group.
    • +

      Important:
      The Polaris Superuser logon overrides any permission restrictions of a workstation. The Polaris Superuser can do any task on any workstation except access record sets owned by an individual staff member.

      +
    +

    Permission Assignments at Upgrade

    +

    When you upgrade to a new version of Polaris, new permissions may or may not be granted to existing staff members by default. (New permissions are always granted to members of the Administrator permission group.) If you prefer not to accept any Polaris default settings that grant new permissions to existing staff members, set the system-level Staff Client profile Permissions: Use Polaris-defined new permission defaults to No. This setting causes all new permissions to be set to No (not granted) at upgrade, but does not affect existing permission assignments or the Administrator permission group. The default setting is Yes.

    +

    Important:
    If you want to set the Staff Client profile Permissions: Use Polaris-defined new permission defaults to No, you must set the profile before you upgrade to the new version of Polaris.

    +

    Special Permissions for Rotating Staff

    +

    If the library rotates staff among branches, you can allow the rotating staff members to select a session branch at log-on. When a branch is selected, settings for that branch are in effect for the session (not the branch with which the staff member’s user name is associated). For example, when a circulation staff member logs on to the current branch instead of the staff member’s “home” branch, the system can route an item that fills a hold request correctly. The item is not routed to the staff member’s “home” branch when it should be picked up at the current branch.

    +

    To enable staff members to select a branch at log-on, give both the staff member and the workstation these permissions:

    +
      +
    • Access logon branch: Allow - Specifies who can log on to branches other than their own. The staff member can select a branch from a dialog box when logging on. This permission is set at the System level.
    • +
    • Logon branch: Access - Specifies who can log on to a specific branch even though the staff member is not registered with the branch. The staff member can select a specific branch when logging in. This permission is set at the branch level.
    • +

      The workstation’s parent branch is the default selection in the Polaris Log On Branch dialog box. If the staff member does not have the Logon branch: Access permission for the workstation’s branch, the default selection is the staff member’s home branch. (If the staff member does not have the Logon branch: Access permission for the home branch, the first branch in the list of permissioned branches is the default selection.)

      +

      Note:
      The user and logged-on branch for a Polaris staff client session are displayed at the top of the Polaris Shortcut bar and on the About Polaris dialog box (select Help, About Polaris on the Polaris Shortcut bar).

      +

      Special Permissions for SQL Searches in the Find Tool

      +

      Three system-level permissions control the ability to use the Polaris Find Tool to do SQL searches. These permissions affect only the ability to do SQL queries in the Find Tool. No modifications to the database are possible from the Polaris Find Tool.

      +
    • Find Tool: Access SQL mode - Allow - The SQL option is available for selection on the Polaris Find Tool. The staff member can search in SQL mode.
    • +
    • Find Tool: Create or modify named SQL searches - Allow - The Save and Save As options are available when the Find Tool is in SQL search mode. The staff member can save an SQL search and edit a saved search and save it.
    • +

      Note:
      If the staff member does not have this permission and selects Save or Save As, a permission block message appears. You can allow specific staff members to override the block. See Set the Find Tool SQL permission blocks override.

      +
    • Find Tool: Delete named SQL searches - Allow - The Delete option is available when the Find Tool is in SQL search mode. The staff member can delete a saved SQL search.
    • +

      Note:
      If the staff member does not have this permission and selects Delete, a permission block message appears. You can allow specific staff members to override the block. See Set the Find Tool SQL permission blocks override.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_directly-assigned_permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_directly-assigned_permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a292eaf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_directly-assigned_permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Remove directly-assigned permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove directly-assigned permissions

    +

    To remove directly-assigned permissions from a permission group, workstation, or staff member:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot use this procedure to remove an individual permission from a record if the permission was assigned by virtue of a group membership. To remove these permissions, see Remove selected group-assigned permissions.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type (Permission Group, Staff Member, or Workstation). The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for the administration record.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The workform appears.
    6. +
    7. Select View, Permissions to display the Is Permitted To list.
    8. +

      You can sort the list by clicking a column heading. Use SHIFT or CTRL to select multiple permissions.

      +
    9. Select the permissions you want to remove, and click  above the Is Permitted To list. To remove all permissions, click .
    10. +
    11. Select File | Save.
    12. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your permission changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_selected_group-assigned_permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_selected_group-assigned_permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d17e5950 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Remove_selected_group-assigned_permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Remove selected group-assigned permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove Selected Group-Assigned Permissions

    +

    To remove group-assigned permissions for a specific staff member without affecting the permissions for all group members, copy the Permission Group workform, acquire only the permissions you want to give the staff member, and then remove the staff member from the original permission group.

    +

    To remove group-assigned permissions:

    +

    Note:
    To remove all the permissions assigned by group membership, see Manage permission group membership.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar, and specify the record type (Staff Member or Workstation) to find. The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for the record from which you want to remove the permission.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the record in the results list, and select Open from the context menu. The appropriate workform appears.
    6. +
    7. Select View, Permissions to display the Is Permitted To list and the Membership list. The Membership list shows the permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs.
    8. +

      Note:
      When you open the Permissions view of the workform, the Membership list shows all permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs. If you select a permission from the permissions list, and the workstation or staff member has that permission due to permission group membership, the Membership list shows that permission group. Once a permission is selected, the Membership list no longer displays all the permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs. If the workstation or staff member was granted the permission directly, and did not receive the permission as a member of a permission group, nothing shows in the Membership list when that permission is selected.
      Click (Show my group membership) above the Membership list to re-list all the permission groups to which the workstation or staff member belongs.

      +
    9. In the Membership list, select the group that includes the permission(s) you want to remove, and click .
    10. +

      The Permission Group workform opens.

      +
    11. From the workform menu bar, select File > New > Permission Group. The New Permission Group dialog box appears.
    12. +
    13. Select Copy Existing Work Form, and click OK. The new Permission Group workform is displayed with Untitled in the title bar, and the same members as the original permission group listed under Group Members.
    14. +
    15. Type a new name for the group in the Group name box.
    16. +
    17. Select File | Save.
    18. +
    19. Select View, Permissions or click .
    20. +
    21. Acquire the original group’s permissions by following these steps: +
      1. Click (Acquire) above the Permission List. The Polaris Find Tool appears with Permission Groups selected in the Object box.
      2. Search for the original permission group.
      3. In the results list, right-click the original permission group record, and choose Select from the context menu. The permissions from the original group are added to the Permissions list.
    22. +
    23. Select the permission(s) you want to remove as follows:
      • If the permission is organization-specific, the organizations for which it is set appear on the right side of the window. You can select the permission for multiple organizations at once.
    24. +
    +

    + deletepermOrg.gif 

    +
      +
    • If the permission is not organization-specific, select it in the left side of the window.
    • +
    +

    +  

    +
      +
    1. Click  above the Permissions list.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    5. Select View, General, or click GenViewIcon.gif.
    6. +
    7. In the Group Members list, select the members that should not belong to this new group, and click  above the Group Members list. Be sure to retain the workstation or staff member that needs the altered permission list.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save.
    10. +
    11. Return to the workstation or staff member record.
    12. +
    13. Select the old permission group in the Membership list, and click  to remove the workstation or staff member record from the old group.
    14. +
    15. Select File | Save.
    16. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Setting_Administration_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Setting_Administration_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..448d5fb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDpermiss/Setting_Administration_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Administration Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Administration Permissions

    +

    Administration permissions control access to the various workforms, tables, and controls needed to administer Polaris. Typically, Polaris administrators need the administration permissions. However, other staff members may require access to certain administration tables and controls to set up specific processes. For example, senior catalogers may require administration permissions related to MARC validation. To assign administration permissions, you must have the following permissions:

    +
      +
    • Access administration: Allow +
    • +
    • System: Access +
    • +
    • Object/task control record: Access +
    • +
    • Object/task control record: Modify +
    • +
    +

    Most administration permissions are set at the system level. You can use the Security view at the system level on the Administration Explorer, or set the permissions from individual group, workstation, and staff member workforms.

    +

    Even with specific System Administration permissions set at the system level, you also need access permissions to an administration level (System: Access; Library: Access; Branch: Access) to change any parameters or profiles for those levels. However, granting access to any level allows administration access to all organizations at that level, so be cautious in assigning administrative permissions. For large installations, you may need to distribute the work load, but you should limit access to system-level administration to only a few people. Other administrators can do most administration functions with access limited to the Library or Branch administration levels.

    +

    Note:
    You may want to add the primary Polaris administrators to the Administrators group, in case the Polaris SuperUser logon is unavailable. The Administrators group has all permissions.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDquickref/Administration_Shortcut_Keys.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDquickref/Administration_Shortcut_Keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86bc25c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDquickref/Administration_Shortcut_Keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Administration Shortcut Keys + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administration Shortcut Keys

    +

    This appendix contains charts with the shortcuts you can use with Polaris administration workflows.

    + + + + + + +
    +

    Navigation Actions +

    +

    Previous attribute or folder
        UP ARROW

    +

    Next attribute or folder
       DOWN ARROW

    +

    Previous tabbed page
       LEFT ARROW

    +

    Next tabbed page   RIGHT ARROW

    +

    Shift views    TAB

    +

    Move cursor to previous word
        CTRL+LEFT ARROW

    +

    Move cursor to next word
        CTRL+RIGHT ARROW

    +

    Scroll tree view down
        CTRL+DOWN ARROW

    +

    Scroll tree view up
        CTRL+UP ARROW

    +

    Jump to top of tree view
        CTRL+HOME

    +

    Jump to bottom of tree view
        CTRL+END

    +

    Expand a folder in tree view
       ALT+* (on number pad)

    +

    Beginning of line    HOME

    +

    End of line    END

    +

    Previous screen    PAGE UP

    +

    Next screen    PAGE DOWN

    +

    Edit Actions (Keyboard)

    +

    Delete highlighted text    DELETE

    +

    Delete character on left
       BACKSPACE

    +

    Delete character on right
       DELETE

    +

    Delete the word on left
        CTRL+BACKSPACE

    +

    Delete the word on right
       CTRL+DELETE

    +

    Cut highlighted text   CTRL+X

    +

    Copy highlighted text   CTRL+C

    +

    Paste text    CTRL+V

    +

    Toggle overwrite and insert mode
       INSERT

    +

    Undo last action    CTRL+Z

    +

    Redo last action    CTRL+Y

    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Select Actions (Keyboard) +

    +

    Select to end of word
       CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW 

    +

    Select to beginning of word
       CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW

    +

    Select to end of line
       SHIFT+END

    +

    Select to beginning of line
       SHIFT+HOME

    +

    Select entire tag
       CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN ARROW

    +

    Select multiple lines
       SHIFT+DOWN ARROW

    +

    Select or extend a block of text
       SHIFT+ARROW KEYS

    +

     

    +

    Table Actions

    +

    Modify an entry
       ENTER

    +

    Delete an entry
       DELETE

    +

    Insert an entry
       INSERT

    +

    Cancel
       ESC

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +
    +

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Security_for_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Security_for_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ced9530a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Security_for_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Security for Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Security for Reports

    +

    You can employ two different strategies for managing Reporting Services security, relying on either the user’s logon credential or Windows authentication for a user account you set up for that specific purpose.

    +

    By default, the report server uses the user’s current logon credential to authenticate the user. If you need to limit users to certain reports, you can manage their rights with Reporting Services security, granting different levels of access and use as necessary. You can create groups such as Circulation Reports and Acquisitions Reports, grant the group the appropriate rights, and place the user in the appropriate groups, or you can manage the rights on an individual basis, user by user. Note that rights are inherited in Reporting Services. For example, if you grant Browse rights to a group on the Polaris level, the rights also apply to the subordinate folders such as System and Circulation, and to the reports within them. You can delete the inherited rights for a subordinate folder or individual reports as necessary. If a user has no rights to a report, the report is not displayed in the Polaris Reports window in the staff client.

    +

    Note:
    You can also specify which organizations are displayed for selection as report parameters.

    +

    If there is a custom folder at the location /Polaris/Custom in the report root folder, users can right-click a system report in the Polaris Reports window in the staff client, and select Customize from the context menu. The custom report is placed in the Custom folder in the Report Manager, ready for editing. If there is no custom folder at /Polaris/Custom, the Customize menu option and the Custom folder are not displayed in the Polaris Reports window. For more information about customizing reports, see Generating, Sending & Customizing Reports.

    +

    Important:
    The Polaris staff client uses reports in the Internal folder for many common workflows. All staff client users need Browse rights to the Internal folder.

    +

    Alternatively, you can use Windows authentication for accounts you set up for the purpose, instead of the individual staff login credential. Set up appropriate Windows user accounts such as ReportUser and NoticesUser and grant these users the appropriate rights in Reporting Services. In Polaris Administration, set up the Report Server at the system level without Windows authentication, then specify Windows authentication at the branch or staff member level, using the special-purpose user accounts you set up. This is a convenient way to assign the appropriate Reporting Services rights if you do not need to assign rights for specific reports and notices on a person-by-person basis.

    +

    Also, the Windows Authentication option allows you to restrict access to reports from the Reporting Services browser, but allow staff with the Polaris Access reports and notices permission to see reports in the Polaris Reports window in the staff client.

    +

    Example:
    You set Report Services rights for an account called PolarisReports so that the account has browse rights to all reports. Then, in Polaris Administration, you set the Report Server to use Windows authentication, and specify the authentication account as PolarisReports. Since no staff member is PolarisReports, reports are not visible to staff in the Report Services browser, but they are displayed in the Polaris Reports window in the staff client.

    +

    Regardless of your security strategy for Reporting Services, staff members (and the workstations they use) need the Polaris permission Access reports and notices to open the Polaris Reports window from the Polaris Shortcut bar in the staff client. For more information about managing Polaris permissions, see Granting Permissions.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_proxy_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_proxy_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..280e8b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_proxy_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify a proxy server for Reporting Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify a proxy server for Reporting Services

    +

    SQL Server Reporting Services requires access to the Web server. If you use a proxy server, specify the proxy server to provide access to the Web server.

    +

    To specify the proxy server:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open Profiles for the organization, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Proxy Server. The Proxy Server Setup dialog box appears.
    4. +

      + ProxyServSetup.gif 

      +
    5. Select (check) the Use proxy server check box. The log-in information boxes become available for use.
    6. +
    7. Type the log-in name, password, and domain name for the proxy server in the appropriate boxes.
    8. +
    9. Click OK on the dialog box.
    10. +
    11. Select File > Save.
    12. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43be7441 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specify_a_server_for_Reporting_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify a server for Reporting Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify a server for Reporting Services

    +

    To specify the server where SQL Server Reporting Services is installed, set up Windows authentication to the server (optional), and specify what organizations are available for selection in report parameters.

    +

    Note: +
    If your Web server is outside the firewall, you can also specify a proxy server to provide access to the Web server for SQL Server Reporting Services. See Specify a proxy server for Reporting Services.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization or staff member, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +

      Note: +
      For more information about listing staff members in the Explorer, see List staff members in the Explorer.

      +
    3. Double-click Report Server. The Report Server Setup dialog box appears.
    4. +

      Note:
      +
      The Maximum # of entries to display in report wizard option is available at the system level only.

      +

      + ReportServSetup.gif +

      +
    5. Type the URL for the report server in the Report Server URL box. The URL may begin with http:// or https://
    6. +
    7. Type the URL for Report Services (Report Manager and Report Designer, if you use it) in the Report service URL box.
    8. +

      Important: +
      Keep the Report Services URL confidential. Limiting access to the Report Manager helps to prevent missing reports and missing printing services.

      +
    9. Specify the appropriate report root folder in the Report Root box. The default is /Polaris.
    10. +

      Note: +
      A consortium may set up a unique root folder for each member library system. Specify the appropriate root folder for the organization you are setting up.

      +

      These characters cannot be used in the Report Root field:

      +

      ; (semi-colon)
      ? (question mark)
      : (colon)
      @ ('at' sign)
      & (ampersand)
      = (equals sign)
      + (plus sign)
      $ (dollar sign)
      , (comma)
      \ (back slash)
      * (asterisk)
      < (less than sign)
      > (greater than sign)
      | (vertical pipe)
      " (double quote)

      +
    11. Specify the number of pages that trigger a message when the report is run.
    12. +

      A dialog box will appear when the PDF would exceed the specified number of pages, so that staff members do not have to wait a long time for a report to generate. When the dialog box appears, the staff member can choose to generate all the pages, or a limited number of pages.

      +
    13. (System level only) Set the maximum number of entries that should appear in list boxes and other controls in the report wizard, where users select report parameters from a list. The default setting is 2500. The maximum value is 9999.
    14. +
    15. If you want to use authentication for a special Windows account instead of the staff user’s logon credential, follow these steps:
    16. +
    17. Select (check) Override default Report Server authentication. The log-in information boxes become available for use.
    18. +
    19. Type the log-in name, password, and domain name in the appropriate boxes.
    20. +

      For more information about this setting, see Security for Reports.

      +
    21. To set the organizations that appear as parameter options when the staff member sets up a report to run, select one of the following options in the Available organizations when running reports box:
    22. +
        +
      • Unrestricted - Any or all organizations in the system are available for selection in the Organizations report parameter list.
      • +
      +

      Note: +
      Certain reports are available only at the branch level. For these reports, the Organizations list is in alphabetical order. For reports available at the system, library, or branch level, the organizations are listed in hierarchical order (system, library A, library A’s branches, library B, library B’s branches, and so forth).

      +
        +
      • Restrict Organization to Branch Only - Only the staff member’s logged-on branch appears in the Organizations list.
      • +
      • Restrict Organization to Library Only - The Organizations list includes the staff member’s logged-on branch and the other branches associated with the parent library of the logged-on branch.
      • +
      +
    23. Click OK on the dialog box.
    24. +
    25. Select File | Save.
    26. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Running reports from the staff client - Using Polaris Standard Reports

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specifying_Report_Servers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specifying_Report_Servers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1558085 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDrepserv/Specifying_Report_Servers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Specifying Report Servers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specifying Report Servers

    +

    Polaris uses SQL Server Reporting Services for reports, notices, and most printing tasks in the staff client. Microsoft Report Manager and Report Web Service are installed on your Web “server,” which may be located on your Polaris Web server, a stand-alone report Web server, or another server you specify. Because report definitions, folders, and resources are published and managed as a Web service, SQL Server Reporting Services requires access to the Web server. You specify the URL for the report server and Reporting Services in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Report access and management are controlled with Reporting Services security. A Polaris Administration setting provides the option of using Windows authentication to streamline report security assignments. If you use a proxy server, you also specify the proxy server for use with reporting services in Polaris Administration.

    +

    You identify report and proxy servers with Staff Client profiles, available at the system, library, branch, and staff levels. If your Polaris system is used in a consortium, different servers can be specified for different organizations as appropriate.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Add_a_staff_member_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Add_a_staff_member_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2465c12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Add_a_staff_member_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a Staff Member Record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a Staff Member Record

    +

    To add a new staff member record to Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click btnNew00383.gif and select Staff Member. The Administration Explorer opens.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: +
    You can also create a new staff member record from an open Workstation workform. Select File | New on the workform. You can copy the open record’s information to the new record or start with a clear record.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New, Staff Member on the Administration Explorer menu bar. The Staff Member workform appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Complete the text fields on the form.
      • Name - Type the staff member user name. The name must be unique in a single domain system. For more information, see Multi-Domain System Support.
      • Organization - Select a library name from the list.
      • Affiliated Branch - If the parent organization is not a branch, select the branch name to which the staff is assigned from the drop-down list.
      • Email Address (optional) - Type the full email address.
      • Domain - If your Polaris installation is in a multi-domain system, select the staff member’s network domain from the Domain list. See Multi-Domain System Support.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Set permissions and profiles for the staff member as appropriate.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The new staff member record contains no permissions, and you must explicitly add permissions to the record. If you try to save a new staff record without adding permissions, a confirmation message appears. You can choose to save the record with no permissions, or cancel the save and add the permissions. For information about setting permissions, see Granting Permissions. For a staff member to do a task on a particular workstation, both the staff member and the workstation must have the appropriate permission for the task.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Permissions - See Managing Permissions for Staff, Workstations, Groups.

    +

    +

      +
    • Setting up groups to manage permissions - You can set up groups with specific sets of permission, then add workstations and staff members to the group. When workstations and staff members are added to the group, they get the group’s permissions. See Managing Permissions with Permission Groups.
    • +
    +

    +

    +

      +
    • Setting permissions for individual staff members and workstations - You can grant permissions individually to specific staff members and workstations. See Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group. Permissions for staff workstations and staff members are set separately.
    • +
    +

    +

    +

    Editing staff member or workstation settings - You can edit profiles and parameters for a staff member or workstation from the Administration Explorer or from the workform.

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

      +
    • Staff client settings - Certain settings, such as Polaris Find Tool functions, labels defaults, the organizations available when running reports, and preferred workform views, can be made at the staff member level. For more information, see Setting Staff Client Profiles.
    • +
    +

    +

    +

    Acquisitions/Serials settings - The ability to override acquisitions and serials permissions blocks, route list defaults, fund list filters, and selection list defaults can be set at the staff member level. For more information, see Acquisitions Administration Overview.

    +

    +

    +

    Cataloging settings - Automated MARC validation, how classification and cutter numbers are handled in bibliographic and item records, field descriptions in the MARC editor, and the ability to override cataloging permissions blocks can be set at the staff member level. For more information, see Cataloging Administration Overview.

    +

    +

    +

    Patron Services settings - The ability to override patron service (circulation) permissions blocks can be set at the staff member level. For more information, see Patron Services Administration Overview.

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identify_IP_addresses_of_in-house_computers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identify_IP_addresses_of_in-house_computers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7be3e1ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identify_IP_addresses_of_in-house_computers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Identify IP addresses of in-house computers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Identify IP addresses of in-house computers

    +

    To identify computers that Polaris should consider as local access, even though they are not registered as Polaris workstations:

    +

    Note:
    Ordinarily you do not do this procedure for networked computers that have Polaris staff client software installed. Register these computers as workstations in Polaris. See Register a new workstation. However, you may want to add registered workstations to this table if you experience performance issues when the system determines whether a workstation is in-house for the purposes of PAC patron inactivity timeout or access to e-sources. See Set criteria for determining in-house location.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization, open Database Tables for the organization, and select In-House IP Addresses. The In-House IP Addresses table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + dInHouseTable.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert In-House IP Addresses dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dIpAdresDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the smaller boundary network identification number in the Starting IP Address box, for the subnet range that has in-house computers.
    2. +
    +

    The IP address range can fall in subnet boundaries. For example, if you are using the 10.0.0.0 private network ID for your intranet, a range that falls in subnet boundaries is 10.0.1.168 to 10.0.1.175.

    +
      +
    1. Type the larger boundary network identification number in the Ending IP Address box, for the subnet range that has in-house computers.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The In-house IP Addresses dialog box closes, and the new IP address entry is displayed in the table. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identifying_In-House_Computers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identifying_In-House_Computers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b27f166c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Identifying_In-House_Computers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Identifying In-House Computers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Identifying In-House Computers

    +

    Computers that are networked and registered in Polaris Administration as workstations are always considered to be in-house, but you may also want to consider other, non-networked computers as in-house. The following situations are some examples:

    +
      +
    • Public access computers in the library use Polaris PowerPAC, which is Web-based. You may want to set a patron inactivity timeout on these computers, so that patrons are automatically logged off after a specified period of time.
    • +
    • You want to limit certain library services, such as patron access to specific third-party databases (e-sources), so that they are available only to Polaris PowerPAC computers located in the library.
    • +
    • Some locations may use different Internet service providers, or different network domains. You may not be able to register these computers in Polaris as workstations because of network security settings.
    • +
    • Wireless networks or public network connections allow patrons to connect to the catalog with their own laptop computers, but the library wants to include these computers in statistical reports on in-house library usage.
    • +
    +

    To identify a non-networked computer as in-house, you add its specific IP address to the In-House IP Addresses table. You can open the In-House IP Addresses table from the organization workform or the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note:
    If a workstation record was set up in Polaris Administration, the workstation is automatically considered an in-house location. Do not list it in the In-House IP Addresses table. A computer is considered remote if neither the registered workstation nor the IP address is found in the Polaris system.

    +

    You can then determine whether the system checks the In-House IP Addresses table alone or both the In-House IP Addresses table and the workstations registered in Polaris to determine whether a workstation is in-house. You can set separate criteria for patron inactivity timeout and e-source access.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_staff_members_in_the_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_staff_members_in_the_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..154ed2dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_staff_members_in_the_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + List staff members in the Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    List staff members in the Explorer

    +

    At the system level, staff members are not listed in the Administration Explorer because there may be many of them in the system. However, if you plan to work with several staff member records, it may be convenient to list them in the Administration Explorer so you do not have to search for each one.

    +

    To list several or all the staff member records in the Administration Explorer tree view:

    +

    Note:
    If you want to list the staff members for a specific branch, open the Administration Explorer at the branch level. Click + by the branch in the tree view, and click + by Staff Member under the branch. The staff members for the branch are listed. You can also run a report that lists all staff members in the system, organized by branch. See Staff and Workstation Reports.

    +

    Tip:
    To work with a specific staff member record, select Administration, Staff Member on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and open the record. To work with multiple records, use the Administration Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Click Staff Member in the tree view of the Administration Explorer. A search button appears in the right pane of the Explorer.
    4. +
    +

    + SearchStaff.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to display the Polaris Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Select Staff Member Name or Staff Member ID in the Search By box.
    4. +
    5. Type an asterisk * (for all) in the For box.
    6. +
    +

    + StaffFind.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Search on the Find Tool. The staff member records are displayed in the results list.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If there are too many staff member records to display at once, the status bar indicates how many have been loaded. You can press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load the entire list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the staff member records to list in the Explorer. You can use the CTRL or SHIFT key to select multiple staff member records.
    2. +
    3. Right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    + StaffSelect.gif 

    +

    All the selected staff member records are listed under Staff Member in the Administration Explorer tree view.

    +

    + StaffListed.gif 

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • New staff members - See Add a staff member record.
    • +
    • Editing staff member settings - You can edit staff member permissions and profiles directly from the Explorer. Expand the staff member folder in the tree view, and select Profiles or Permissions. The details view of the Explorer displays the profile or permission information. You can also open the Staff Member workform. Right-click the staff member name in the Explorer tree view, and select Edit from the context menu.
    • +
    • Suspending a staff member - Click Suspend on the Staff Member workform. When this option is selected, the staff member cannot access Polaris, although the staff member record remains in the database.  To allow access to Polaris, select Active.
    • +
    • Deleting a staff member - Right-click the staff member name in the Explorer tree view, and select Delete from the context menu.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_workstations_in_the_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_workstations_in_the_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5db3fe9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/List_workstations_in_the_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + List workstations in the Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    List workstations in the Explorer

    +

    At the system level, workstations are not listed in the Administration Explorer because there may be many of them in the system. However, if you plan to work with several workstations, it may be convenient to list them in the Administration Explorer so you do not have to search for each one.

    +

    To list several or all the workstations in the system in the Administration Explorer tree view:

    +

    Tips:
    To work with a specific workstation, select Administration, Workstation and search for it using the Polaris Find Tool. To work with multiple workstations, use the Administration Explorer. To list the workstations for a specific branch, click + by the branch in the tree view, and click + by Workstation under the branch.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Click Workstation in the tree view of the Administration Explorer. A search button appears in the right pane of the Explorer.
    4. +
    +

    + dWorkSearch.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to display the Polaris Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    Workstation network name/Display name is selected in the Search by box.

    +
      +
    1. Type an asterisk * (for all) in the For box.
    2. +
    3. Click Search on the Find Tool. The workstations are displayed in the results list.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If there are too many workstations to display at once, the status bar indicates how many have been loaded. You can press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load the entire list.

    +
      +
    1. Select workstations to list in the Explorer. You can use the CTRL or SHIFT key to select multiple workstations.
    2. +
    3. Right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    + WorkstationsSelect.gif 

    +

    All the selected workstations are listed under Workstations in the Administration Explorer tree view.

    +

    + WorkstationsListed.gif 

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • New workstations - See Register a new workstation.
    • +
    • Editing workstation settings - Expand the workstation folder in the tree view, and select Parameters, Profiles or Permissions. The right pane of the Explorer displays the information. To edit the workstation from its workform, right-click the workstation name in the Explorer tree view, and select Edit from the context menu to open the Workstation workform.
    • +
    • Deleting a workstation - To delete workstation records from the Polaris database, right-click the workstation name in the Explorer tree view, and select Delete from the context menu.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Avoid deleting workstations during active business hours, because the action has complex effects in the Polaris database and may impact other operations.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Multi-Domain_System_Support.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Multi-Domain_System_Support.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..855b5741 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Multi-Domain_System_Support.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Multi-Domain System Support + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Multi-Domain System Support

    +

    Polaris user (staff member) and workstation names in a single Polaris system do not have to be unique across a multi-domain environment. In the multi-domain environment, the workstation and staff member are associated with a domain in Polaris, and while the domain\workstation or domain\user combination must be unique, the workstation and user names themselves may be repeated as long as they are in different domains. You can choose to associate users with domains, workstations with domains, both, or neither. However, in a single domain environment, user and workstation names must be unique.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, use the system-level Database table Network Domains to specify the NetBIOS Name and DNSName for each domain in your network. For general information about adding and modifying table rows, see Working with Tables. The System Administration permission Modify network domains table: Allow is required to work with this table. If you leave this table empty, users and workstations must be unique.

    +

    + NetworkDomainTable.gif 

    +

    The entries in this table appear as selections in Domain drop-down lists in the Staff Member and Workstation workforms, where the domain is selected from the drop-down list to associate the user or workstation with the domain. If no domains have been entered in the Network Domains table, the field is not available for selection.

    +

    + StaffWorkform.gif 

    +

    Your settings also apply to staff client and ExpressCheck client log-on with a Terminal Server connection.

    +
      +
    • Staff client Log On dialog box - The domain is displayed on the Polaris Log On dialog box. You can also enter a domain in the Name field; for example, Lib\Reid or reid@thelibrary.org.
    • +
    +

    + LogonDx.gif 

    +
      +
    • About Polaris dialog box - When you select Help, About Polaris on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, the About Polaris dialog box includes the user domain in the Polaris User field, and the workstation domain in the Polaris Workstation field.
    • +
    • Web-based application log-ons - Polaris Fusion, Polaris Leap, Polaris Simply Reports, and Polaris WebAdmin log-ons require the domain in the user name field in the format username@domain or domain\username; for example, reid@thelibrary.org or Lib\Reid.
    • +
    +

    Network/Domain Requirements and Restrictions

    +

    +

    Polaris recommends that the domain computer and user accounts are configured in Active Directory.

    +

    +

    All Polaris Servers should be members of the same domain, or members of domains that include, minimally, a one-way trust. One-way trusts require that the application server be in the trustee domain. (For example, if domain A trusts domain B, the application server must reside in domain A, if domain A users are expected to use Polaris.)

    +

    +

    An external domain controller can be used to authenticate users if the domain controller is trusted by the domain(s) in which the Polaris Servers are members.

    +

    +

    +

    If an application server is running in workgroup mode:

    • When configuring a user account that is a member of the workgroup, leave the Domain field set to None in the Staff Member record.
    • When configuring a computer account that is a member of the workgroup, leave the Domain field set to None in the Workstation record.

    +

    +

    +

    When configuring a workstation that has a NetBIOS name different from the DNS hostname, leave the Domain field set to None in the Workstation record.

    +

    +

    When configuring a workstation that is also a Polaris server, leave the Domain field set to None in the Workstation record. The NetBIOS name of a computer running Polaris server-side software must be unique among all trusted domains.

    +

    +

      +
    • Each network domain configured in the Polaris Network Domains table must have a unique NetBIOS domain name.
    • +
    • Each network domain configured in the Polaris Network Domains table must have a unique DNS domain name.
    • +
    +

    +

    +

    Remote desktop:

    +

    +
      +
    • If the staff client is run on a Windows terminal server via a remote desktop connection from a workstation that is a member of a trusted domain, then the remote desktop client workstation can be domain-specific.
    • +
    • If the staff client is run on a Windows terminal server via a remote desktop connection from a workstation that is not a member of a trusted domain, then the remote desktop client workstation cannot be domain-specific.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Register_a_new_workstation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Register_a_new_workstation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9232def --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Register_a_new_workstation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + + Register a new workstation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Register a New Workstation

    +

    To add a staff client, Leap, or Polaris ExpressCheck workstation to Polaris:

    +

    Notes: +
    If the workstation is used for Polaris ExpressCheck self-check circulation, continue with Polaris ExpressCheck set-up. If patrons can submit credit card payments from ExpressCheck, make sure a card reader is attached to the ExpressCheck workstation. For more information, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

    The Anonymous OPAC Workstation is used by Polaris PowerPAC code and is installed with Polaris. It cannot be altered.

    + +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New > Workstation from the Administration Explorer menu bar, or click btnNew.gifand select Workstation.
    4. +

      Tip: +
      You can also create a new workstation record from an open Workstation workform. Select File > New on the workform. You can copy the open record’s information to the new record or start with a clear record.

      +

      The Workstation workform opens. For details, see Workstation workform.

      +
    5. In the Network Name box, enter the network name of the workstation, using one of the following methods:
      • Type the workstation network name.
      • Click Browse, and use the Network Browser dialog box to locate and select the workstation. The workstation name appears in the Network Name box.
    6. +

      If you accidentally type leading or trailing spaces in the workstation name, Polaris removes the spaces to prevent authentication errors.

      +
    7. In the Display Name box, type an identifying name for the workstation. + +

      This name identifies the workstation in Polaris, for example in permission lists, in Polaris Find Tool results lists, and in the tree view of the Administration Explorer. The name must be unique in a single domain system. For more information, see Multi-Domain System Support.

    8. +
    9. In the Parent Branch box, select the branch to which the workstation is assigned. If Leap is enabled for the branch, the Leap check box appears when you select the parent branch. + +

      Note:
      The workstation’s parent branch is the default selection in the Polaris Log On Branch dialog box. If the staff member does not have the Logon branch: Access permission for the workstation’s branch, the default selection is the staff member’s home branch. If the staff member does not have the Logon branch: Access permission for the home branch, the first branch in the list of permitted branches is the default selection. The parent branch is also used for determining the offline checkout defaults.

    10. +
    11. If your Polaris installation is in a multi-domain system, select the workstation’s domain from the Domain list. See Multi-Domain System Support.
    12. +
    13. If this workstation will be used for staff client operations, confirm that the Enabled box is checked (the default setting) to allow this workstation to log in to the staff client. + +

      Important:
      Be sure to select the Enabled check box for workstations that require access to the staff client.

    14. +
    15. If Polaris Leap will be used on the workstation, select the Leap check box to enable Leap. + +

      Note:
      If this check box does not appear, select a branch for which Leap is enabled.

    16. +
    17. To identify a workstation as a terminal server used for running Leap within a terminal services session, select the Terminal Server check box. + +

      When this box is checked, a staff member logging into Leap from a terminal server session can select the login workstation from a list of Leap-enabled workstations for the branch. This enables transactions to be attributed to the appropriate workstation.

    18. +
    19. If RFID will be used with Leap without installing the Polaris staff client on the workstation, select View, Parameters, Leap and set the Leap parameter RFID: Use local security manager to Yes.
    20. +
    21. If auto-polling of RFID tags will be used with Leap, select View, Parameters, Leap and set the Leap parameter RFID: Auto-poll RFID tags to Yes.
    22. +
    23. If a media dispenser unit will be used with Leap without installing the Polaris staff client on the workstation, select View, Parameters, Leap and set the Media dispenser: Use local security manager to Yes.
    24. +
    25. Set permissions for the workstation. See Assign permissions to staff, workstation, or group.
    26. +
    27. Set profiles, and parameters for the workstation. See Set parameters and profiles from a workform. + +

      Note:
      For a staff member to do a task on a particular workstation, both the staff member and the workstation must have the appropriate permission for the task.

    28. +
    29. Select File > Save.
    30. +
    + +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Set_criteria_for_determining_in-house_location.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Set_criteria_for_determining_in-house_location.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f39e5694 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Set_criteria_for_determining_in-house_location.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + Set criteria for determining in-house location + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set criteria for determining in-house location

    +

    Use the PowerPAC profile In-house access definitions: Setup to control how a workstation’s in-house status is determined for patron actions such as patron inactivity timeout and recently viewed titles, and e-source access. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the system uses the setting of the Polaris PowerPAC connection organization. You can set separate criteria for patron actions and access to e-source targets. If you select In-House IP Addresses Table only, a workstation’s IP address must be included in that table to be considered in-house. If you select In-House IP Addresses Table AND registered workstations, a workstation’s IP address can either be included in the In-House IP Addresses table or the workstation can be registered in Polaris to be considered in-house. This is the default setting for both patron actions and e-source target access.

    +

    Note:
    Look-ups to determine whether a workstation is registered in Polaris can impact performance on slow or complicated networks. If you experience these problems, you can change the setting for  patron actions, e-source access, or both, to In-House IP Addresses Table only. If you do not experience performance problems, the default settings are probably satisfactory.

    +

    To set the criteria for determining in-house location:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click In-house access definitions: Setup. The In-house access definitions dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + InHouseAccess.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • In-House IP Addresses Table only - A workstation’s IP address must be included in that table to be considered in-house.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    With this setting, If a staff member’s workstation is listed in the In-House IP Addresses table, the staff member has logged in to his own patron account in PAC, and you have enabled a patron inactivity timeout, the staff member’s session will be eligible to time out.

    +
      +
    • In-House IP Addresses Table AND registered workstations - Default setting. A workstation’s IP address can either be included in the In-House IP Addresses table or the workstation can be registered in Polaris to be considered in-house.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select an option for determining whether a workstation is in-house for the purposes of e-source access:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • In-House IP Addresses Table only - A workstation’s IP address must be included in that table to be considered in-house.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a staff member’s workstation is not listed in the In-House IP Addresses table and you have limited access to an e-source target to in-house workstations only, the staff member will not be able to access the e-source target in the PAC. If this situation is an issue, you must include the workstation IP address in the In-House IP Addresses table.

    +
      +
    • In-House IP Addresses Table AND registered workstations - Default setting. A workstation’s IP address can either be included in the In-House IP Addresses table or the workstation can be registered in Polaris to be considered in-house.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Staff_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Staff_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d57d90a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Staff_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Staff Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Staff Records

    +

    Staff member records store information such as user name, permissions, and profiles for each staff member. Each staff member record is associated with a parent branch. You can add a staff member record, change the information, or delete a record from the Staff Member workform or Administration Explorer.

    +

    Important:
    The values for staff permissions and profiles default from the parent branch values. If a permission is not assigned at the branch level, you cannot give the staff member the permission.

    +

    User names for staff members must be unique, and can be up to 35 characters long.

    +

    The Windows network security file controls access to Polaris. You should establish a Windows network account with a password for every staff member with a Polaris staff member record. Staff passwords should not contain forward slash / or backslash \ characters.

    +

    Important:
    Your library may be required to follow PCI compliance practices for credit card processing. If so, you must require unique domain user IDs and follow secure authentication best practices for workstation log-on. A generic Windows log-on such as Circ1 would be out of compliance because it would not be possible to trace the transaction back to the staff member who performed it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstation_and_Staff_Member_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstation_and_Staff_Member_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3173809 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstation_and_Staff_Member_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Workstation and Staff Member Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Workstation and Staff Member Records

    +

    Workstation records store information about the staff and public computers that are directly networked to Polaris. You can also identify non-network workstations as “in-house” for authentication purposes. Staff records store profile and permission settings for each staff member.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b767049c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Setting_Up_Workstations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Workstations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Workstations

    +

    A Polaris workstation is a directly-networked computer that runs the Polaris staff client, Polaris Leap, or Polaris® ExpressCheck™ software. Workstation records store information such as permissions, printing defaults, and barcode recognition defaults.

    +

    Workstation records are set up and maintained in Polaris Administration with the Workstation workform. Each workstation record is associated with a parent organization. You can use the Workstation workform or the Administration Explorer to view workstation information, change permissions, parameters, or profiles, or remove the workstation from the Polaris system. For details, see Workstation workform.

    +

    Note:
    You may want to set certain computer IP addresses as “in-house” for authentication purposes, even though they are not registered as networked Polaris workstations. For more information, see Identifying In-House Computers.

    +

    You can also set up a workstation to be designated as a terminal server for the Leap web application.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Staff_and_Workstation_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Staff_and_Workstation_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2ef96e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDresourc/Staff_and_Workstation_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Staff and Workstation Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Staff and Workstation Reports

    +

    You can generate reports that show the workstations and staff members registered in Polaris and the library organizations to which they are associated, and the transactions logged for these staff members and workstations.

    +

    Polaris Tool Bar Reports

    +

    The following reports identify staff members and workstations registered in Polaris. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box. For more information, see Using Polaris Standard Reports.

    +
      +
    • Affiliated Branches of Staff Members
    • +
    • Hierarchy of Libraries, Branches & Workstations
    • +
    +

    Staff Client Log-On and Log-Off Transactions

    +

    Polaris includes transaction logging for staff client log-on and log-off transactions. You can track currently logged-on users when performing upgrades, and generate reports of historical usage of the software by user and/or workstation to assess staff client use. For more information about reporting from the Transactions database, see Polaris Transactions Database.

    +

    The Polaris Workstations table records whether a workstation is logged on to the Polaris staff client, and includes the server date and time of the log-on. The following transactions are posted in the Transactions database and available for reporting:

    +

    Log-On (status = 1) +

    +
      +
    • Transaction TypeID = TR_SYS_LOGON (7200)
    • +
    • OrganizationID - User’s log-on branch
    • +
    • Workstation ID
    • +
    • User ID
    • +
    • Transaction Client Date/Time
    • +
    • Transaction SubtypeID = SUBSYSTEM_TYPE (235)
    • +
    • Transaction SubtypeCode = Staff Client (33)
    • +
    +

    Log-Off (status = 0) +

    +
      +
    • Transaction TypeID = TR_SYS_LOGOFF (7201)
    • +
    • OrganizationID - User’s log-on branch
    • +
    • Workstation ID
    • +
    • User ID
    • +
    • Transaction Client Date/Time
    • +
    • Transaction SubtypeID = SUBSYSTEM_TYPE (235)
    • +
    • Transaction SubtypeCode = Staff Client (33)
    • +
    +

    Log-off transactions include any way in which the user exits from the client, including but not limited to:

    +
      +
    • Shortcut Bar - Click X
    • +
    • Shortcut Bar - Select File, Exit
    • +
    • Shortcut Bar - Select File, Logoff
    • +
    • Shortcut Bar - Press ALT+F4
    • +
    • Workform- Select File, Exit
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_a_language_display_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_a_language_display_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..097f9afb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_a_language_display_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Add a language display entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a language display entry

    +

    To add a MARC language entry to Polaris search tools. Entries added at any level are used by all organizations.

    +

    Note:
    This table does not affect the languages available for patron records. To add a language selection for patron records, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select MARC Language Scoping Display. The MARC Language Scoping Display table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can sort the language entries in the table by clicking the column headers. Sorting the entries does not affect how they display on the search tools. To change the display order, use the arrows on the table tool bar.

    +

    + dLanguagTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00411.gif to display the MARC Language Scoping Display dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dLanguagDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Language box, select the language you want to display in the search tools.
    2. +
    3. In the Display in PAC box, indicate whether the language should be listed as an option for scoping PowerPAC searches.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You must also set the PowerPAC profile Scoping: Use MARC language scoping display table to Yes to display the specified languages as scoping options in the PowerPAC Search Options display.

    +
      +
    1. In the Display in Tech Services box, indicate whether the language should be listed for scoping Polaris Find Tool searches in the staff client.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You must also set the Staff Client profile Find Tool: Use Language Scoping Display to Yes to display the specified languages as scoping options in the Polaris Find Tool. See Set the Find Tool SQL permission blocks override.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Insert MARC Language Scoping Display dialog box closes and the new entry is displayed in the policy table. Modifications Pending appears in the status bar.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_an_initial_article_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_an_initial_article_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..008a4aa5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Add_an_initial_article_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Add an initial article entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add an initial article entry

    +

    Entries added at any level are assigned to the system. To define a new word as an initial article in Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open Policy Tables for an organization, and select Initial Articles. The Initial Articles table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + dLeadArticlTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Initial Articles dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dLeadArticlDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the word that you want Polaris to ignore in the beginning of Find Tool exact match searches for certain records, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    If the Use Initial Articles Table option is checked on the Find Tool Settings tab, the word you specify is stripped from the beginning of the search string in exact match searching.

    +

    The Insert Initial Articles dialog box closes, and the new initial article is displayed in the table. Modification Pending appears in the status bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate.gif. Changing an initial article entry changes the entry for all organizations in Polaris.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif. Deleting an initial article removes the word for all organizations in Polaris.
    • +
    • Setting the Find Tool default for initial articles - See Setting Find Tool Profiles.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Defining_Leading_Articles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Defining_Leading_Articles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2ea695e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Defining_Leading_Articles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Leading Articles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Leading Articles

    +

    The Initial Articles policy table specifies words that can be stripped from the beginning of Find Tool exact match search strings for the following types of records:

    +
      +
    • Authority Records (Heading, Tracing/Reference)
    • +
    • Bibliographic Records (Title and Series)
    • +
    • Check In Records (Title)
    • +
    • Claims (Title) (both for Acquisitions and Serial versions)
    • +
    • Course Reserve Records (Title)
    • +
    • Hold Requests (Title)
    • +
    • ILL Requests (Title)
    • +
    • Invoice Line Items (Title)
    • +
    • Issue Records (Title)
    • +
    • Item Records (Title and Series)
    • +
    • Part Records (Title)
    • +
    • Purchase Order Line Items (Title)
    • +
    • Reserve Item Records (Title)
    • +
    • Route Lists (Title)
    • +
    • Selection List Line Items (Title)
    • +
    • Serial Holdings Records (Title)
    • +
    • Subscription Records (Title)
    • +
    +

    If the Use Initial Articles Table option is checked on the Find Tool Settings tab, the words specified in the table are stripped from the beginning of the search string. (You can specify a default setting for this Find Tool option. See Setting Find Tool Profiles.)

    +

    Initial articles can be identified from the system, library, and branch levels, but the entries are shared by all organizations because searching applies to the entire Polaris catalog. Use the Administration Explorer to access the Initial Articles policy table. You cannot display the table from an organization workform. The Modify initial articles table: Allow permission is required to work with this table.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0dd3cd71 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Set Find Tool defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Find Tool defaults

    +

    You can set the defaults at the organization, workstation, or staff member level. Staff member settings take precedence over workstation settings.

    +

    To set default characteristics for Polaris Find Tool searches and results displays:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Profiles for the organization, workstation, or staff member, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. To set the default number of records to return as search results, double-click Find Tool: Default number of records to return in a result set, and type a number. The limit does not apply to count-only search results. Users can temporarily change the number of records to return with the Find Tool Retrieval Limit setting.
    2. +
    +

    Higher values may require longer search times. Lower values may impact the quality of search results.

    +

    Example:
    If the limit is set at 1,000 titles (typical), but a search yields 1,500 titles, only the first 1,000 titles to satisfy the search terms display in the results list.

    +
      +
    1. To set the number of records that will trigger a warning message when a user has opted to add all the results to a record set, double-click Find tool/record-set-to-record-set creation: Record set size warning threshold and type a number.
    2. +
    +

    If the results set reaches or exceeds this number, and the user has chosen to create a record set from the results, the warning message gives the user the opportunity to cancel the record set. This message is useful for count-only search result sets, which may be very large because the result set limit is not applied to them. This setting also triggers the warning message when you create a record set from another Cataloging record set - item to bib, bib to item, authority to bib, or bib to authority.

    +
      +
    1. To specify the default setting for the Use Initial Article Table check box on the Polaris Find Tool, double-click Find Tool: Use Initial Article Table, and select one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Yes - The Use Initial Articles Table box (Settings tab) is selected (checked) as the default setting when the Find Tool opens. This means that the search uses the Initial Articles table that specifies words to be stripped from the beginning of exact match searches for bibliographic title, bibliographic series, and item title search strings. See Defining Leading Articles. Using the table (that is, stripping initial articles) can significantly improve search response times. The check box can be cleared when the Find Tool is opened.
    • +
    • No - The Use Initial Articles Table box is cleared as the default setting when the Find Tool opens. This means that the Initial Articles table is not checked, so no words are stripped out. Catalogers may not want to use the initial article table in their searches to identify non-filing indicator problems. The check box can be selected (checked) when the Find Tool is opened.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To specify the set of languages available for scoping searches, double-click Find Tool: Use Language Scoping Display, and select Yes or No:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Yes - The languages listed in the Value box when you limit a search by language, and in the Value box on the Scoping tabbed page, are limited to the entries specified in the MARC Language Scoping Display policy table for the organization. See Setting Language Display.
    • +
    • No - All languages defined by the MARC 21 format are displayed in the Value boxes.
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Staff Client profiles reference list - See Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.
    • +
    • PAC search limits - In the PAC, you may experience decreased performance for searches with large results sets if your server capacity is limited. To improve performance, you can adjust the maximum number of records to return. The profile Result set: Maximum number of records to return, available at the system, library, and branch levels, controls this limit. The profile is available on the PowerPAC and Children’s PAC tabbed pages. You set it separately for each PAC.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you lower the maximum number of records to return, relevancy ranking may be less effective.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_filtering_by_permission.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_filtering_by_permission.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84caa6a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_Find_Tool_filtering_by_permission.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Find Tool filtering by permission + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Find Tool filtering by permission

    +

    To set the Polaris Find Tool to filter search results according to the permissions of the staff member and workstation:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    3. In the Explorer tree view, select Profiles under the System folder, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Find Tool: Filter search results by permission, and select an option:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Yes - Search results are filtered so that only records for which the user has access permission are returned in the search results list.
    • +
    • No - Search results are not filtered by permission. Records for which the user does not have access permission are also returned (except those owned by other staff members). The appropriate permission is still required to open a record from the results list.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_the_Find_Tool_SQL_permission_blocks_override.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_the_Find_Tool_SQL_permission_blocks_override.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..430c1e2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Set_the_Find_Tool_SQL_permission_blocks_override.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Set the Find Tool SQL permission blocks override + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Find Tool SQL permission blocks override

    +

    A staff member’s ability to use the Find Tool SQL mode is controlled by three permissions:

    +
      +
    • Find Tool: Access SQL search mode - User can enter and search with a one-time SQL search, or use a saved SQL search, but cannot save an SQL search.
    • +
    • Find Tool: Create or modify named SQL searches - User can enter a one-time SQL search, create and save an SQL search, and modify an existing saved search.
    • +
    • Find Tool: Delete named SQL searches - User can delete a saved SQL search.
    • +
    +

    A staff member who has only access permission to the SQL search mode receives a permission block message when attempting save, modify, or delete an SQL search. You can allow a supervisory staff member to override the permission block. To allow a staff member to override the SQL permission block. You must set this profile for individual staff members.

    +
      +
    1. Display the staff member record in the Administration Explorer. See List staff members in the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. In the Explorer tree view, select Profiles under the staff member folder, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Find Tool: Override SQL search blocks, and select an option:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Yes  - This staff member can override the block message for saving a SQL search, modifying a saved SQL search, or deleting a saved SQL search.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When this profile is set to Yes for a staff member, that staff member must also have the permissions they are overriding.

    +
      +
    • No - This staff member cannot override the permission block.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see the effects of your changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +

    See also: Granting Permissions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Find_Tool_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Find_Tool_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..999ca18b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Find_Tool_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Find Tool Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Find Tool Profiles

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool is the basic tool for finding and working with records and other objects in the staff client and generating ad hoc reports. You can set default values for the Find Tool that specify result limits, the use of initial articles, and the languages available for scoping. Find Tool settings are available on the Staff Client tabbed page for profiles. In general, these profiles can be set for each organization, workstation, and staff member. However, the Find Tool: Filter search results by permission can be set only at the system level. When this profile is set to Yes, only records for which the user has access permission are returned in the search results list. When the profile is set to No, records for which the user does not have access permission are also returned (except those owned by other individual staff members).

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Language_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Language_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a467585a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Language_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Language Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Language Display

    +

    The MARC Language Scoping Display policy table identifies the languages that display as options for limiting (scoping) searches to material published in specific languages. You can set a language to be displayed as a scoping option in the Polaris Find Tool (staff client), in Polaris Power PAC, or both, and set the order in which the languages are displayed. The languages can be identified at the system, library, and branch levels, but the entries are shared by all organizations.

    +

    Innovative Interfaces periodically updates the languages available to add to the policy table, after the MARC 21 changes are posted. The MARC language codes are stored in a table that cannot be accessed from the Polaris user interface. SQL scripts are used to update the language codes in the database. Once the database is updated, you can add any MARC language to the table to use in scoping searches. Over 4,000 languages are currently available.

    +

    Use the Administration Explorer to display the MARC Language Scoping Display policy table. You cannot display the table from an organization workform. The Modify MARC language scoping display table: Allow permission is required to work with this table.

    +

    See also: Add a language display entry

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Search_Tool_Characteristics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Search_Tool_Characteristics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c66ad13f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Setting_Search_Tool_Characteristics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Find Tool Characteristics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Find Tool Characteristics

    +

    Certain Polaris Administration settings affect the options available for searching in the staff client and the PAC, and identify the words that are ignored or included in searches.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Viewing_Title_and_Author_Elements.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Viewing_Title_and_Author_Elements.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ca3e646 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDsearch/Viewing_Title_and_Author_Elements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Viewing Title and Author Elements + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing Title and Author Elements

    +

    Database tables specify the tags displayed for titles and authors in Polaris search results. The Primary Display Title table controls the title display. By default, a record’s displayed title is pulled from the 245 tag. If the bibliographic record does not contain a 245 tag, the primary title is pulled from the Uniform Title (130 tag). You can view the default title tags, subfields, and their order of precedence in the Primary Display Title table. If a subfield is included in the table, it is also used in sorting search results by title.

    +

    The Primary Display Author table controls the author display. By default, a record’s displayed author is pulled from the 100 tag, then from the 110 tag, then from the 111 tag. You can view the default author tags, subfields, and their order of precedence in the Primary Display Author table. If a subfield is included in the table, it is also used in sorting search results by author.

    +

    You can view these read-only tables in Polaris Administration under Database Tables for any organization. If you want to change the Primary Title Display or Primary Author Display table, contact your Polaris Site Manager. These tables are used by all organizations in the system.

    +

    Note:
    These tables do not affect what is indexed for keyword or browse searches, only what is displayed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Bib-1_Use_Attributes_in_Polaris_Searches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Bib-1_Use_Attributes_in_Polaris_Searches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edce7428 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Bib-1_Use_Attributes_in_Polaris_Searches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,848 @@ + + + + + + + + Bib-1 Use Attributes in Polaris Searches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bib-1 Use Attributes in Polaris Searches

    +

    Polaris assigns standard Bib-1 use attributes to search access points wherever possible, and proprietary Bib-1 use attributes where necessary.

    +

    The Polaris Type of Material (TOM) qualifier is based on the Bib-1 use attribute 1031. With respect to MuseGlobal, the TOM access point maps to a DCMI/TYPE value:

    +

    Note:
    If a TOM code used as a search limiter cannot be mapped to a DCMI/TYPE value, an error message appears.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    TOM

    +
    +

    DCMI

    +
    +

    bks

    +
    +

    book

    +
    +

    per

    +
    +

    article

    +
    +

    rec

    +
    +

    audio

    +
    +

    mss

    +
    +

    manuscript

    +
    +

    map

    +
    +

    map

    +
    +

    kit

    +
    +

    object

    +
    +

    ser

    +
    +

    journal

    +
    +

    ebk

    +
    +

    eBook

    +
    +

    Note:
    For a complete list of standard Bib-1 use attributes, see
    http://www.loc.gov/z3950/agency/defns/bib1.html

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Bib-1 Use Attributes

    +
    +

    Mnemonic

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Standard

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    TI

    +
    +

    Title

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    SE

    +
    +

    Series

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    ISBN

    +
    +

    ISBN

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    ISSN

    +
    +

    ISSN

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    LCCN

    +
    +

    LCCN

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    CN

    +
    +

    Control number

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    DD

    +
    +

    Dewey classification

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    UDC

    +
    +

    UDC classification

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    LC

    +
    +

    LC classification

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    NLM

    +
    +

    NLM classification

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    NAL

    +
    +

    NAL classification

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    CALL

    +
    +

    Call number

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    SU

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    PD

    +
    +

    Publication date

    +
    +

    50

    +
    +

    GOV

    +
    +

    Gov Doc classification

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    PN

    +
    +

    Publisher’s number

    +
    +

    54

    +
    +

    LA

    +
    +

    Language

    +
    +

    60

    +
    +

    CODEN

    +
    +

    CODEN

    +
    +

    63

    +
    +

    NOTE

    +
    +

    General notes

    +
    +

    1003

    +
    +

    AU

    +
    +

    Author

    +
    +

    1007

    +
    +

    OCN

    +
    +

    Other system number

    +
    +

    1016

    +
    +

    KW

    +
    +

    All keyword fields

    +
    +

    1017

    +
    +

    SC

    +
    +

    Keyword

    +
    +

    1018

    +
    +

    PUB

    +
    +

    Publisher

    +
    +

    1027

    +
    +

    STRN

    +
    +

    STRN

    +
    +

    1031

    +
    +

    TOM

    +
    +

    Type of material

    +
    +

    1211

    +
    +

    OCLC

    +
    +

    OCLC number

    +

     

    +
    +

    Proprietary (Range: 5000-10000)

    +
    +

    5000

    +
    +

    AB

    +
    +

    Assigned Branch

    +
    +

    5001

    +
    +

    BC

    +
    +

    Barcode

    +
    +

    5006

    +
    +

    COL

    +
    +

    Collection

    +
    +

    5015

    +
    +

    Genre

    +
    +

    Genre

    +
    +

    5026

    +
    +

    MAT

    +
    +

    Material type

    +
    +

    5027

    +
    +

    NLC

    +
    +

    NLC classification

    +
    +

    5028

    +
    +

    OWN

    +
    +

    Record owner

    +
    +

    5039

    +
    +

    STATB

    +
    +

    Record status

    +
    +

    5045

    +
    +

    TA

    +
    +

    Target audience

    +
    +

    5053

    +
    +

    MSH

    +
    +

    Main Subject Heading

    +
    +

    5054

    +
    +

    MAH

    +
    +

    Main Author Heading

    +
    +

    5055

    +
    +

    MSE

    +
    +

    Main Series Entry

    +
    +

    5148

    +
    +

    OWNER

    +
    +

    Ownership Filter

    +
    +

    5159

    +
    +

    LF

    +
    +

    Literary Form

    +
    +

    5160

    +
    +

    CPST

    +
    +

    Children's PAC Search Target

    +
    +

    5178

    +
    +

    CRSSTAT

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Status

    +
    +

    5194

    +
    +

    OSI

    +
    +

    OSI number

    +
    +

    5195

    +
    +

    SOA

    +
    +

    SOA number

    +
    +

    5196

    +
    +

    UPC

    +
    +

    UPC number

    +
    +

    5206

    +
    +

    DIP

    +
    +

    Display in PAC

    +
    +

    5207

    +
    +

    ILL

    +
    +

    ILL

    +
    +

    5244

    +
    +

    MTE

    +
    +

    Main Title Entry

    +
    +

    5245

    +
    +

    MCE

    +
    +

    Main Call Number Entry

    +
    +

    5249

    +
    +

    SCN

    +
    +

    Standard identifier number

    +
    +

    5253

    +
    +

    ACL

    +
    +

    Access Control List (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5254

    +
    +

    CPRT

    +
    +

    Copyright (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5255

    +
    +

    DLD

    +
    +

    Data Link Description (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5256

    +
    +

    FNAME

    +
    +

    File Name (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5257

    +
    +

    MIME

    +
    +

    MIME Type (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5258

    +
    +

    RRC

    +
    +

    Resource Record Collection (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5259

    +
    +

    RRO

    +
    +

    Resource Record Organization (MRMS)

    +
    +

    5260

    +
    +

    FAD

    +
    +

    First available date

    +
    +

    9997

    +
    +

    TIMEOUT

    +
    +

    TIMEOUT

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Configuring_Usage_Settings_for_EDS.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Configuring_Usage_Settings_for_EDS.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55edf92e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Configuring_Usage_Settings_for_EDS.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Configuring Remote Database Usage Settings for EDS + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring Remote Database Usage Settings for EDS

    +

    The Remote Databases: Usage Settings profile in Polaris Administration contains two settings that only appear when the server Search Provider for the remote database is set to "EDS" on the Provider tab of the Search Server Properties dialog box. Your library can use these settings to specify the initial load size and time limit that apply when merging EDS and PowerPAC search results.

    +

    Note: Your library may also wish to configure other usage settings for the EDS remote database. For more information, see Configure remote database usage settings.

    +

    To configure the initial load size and time limit for merging EDS and PowerPAC search results:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, select Profiles > PowerPAC > Remote databases: Usage settings > Setup.
    2. +

      The Remote Databases: Usage Settings dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    3. Select EDS from the list of available databases.
    4. +
    5. Select Configure Database.
    6. +

      The Configure: EDS dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    7. In the Display name box, enter the name that you want to be displayed for this server in the Polaris user interface.
    8. +

      Note: The Display name you specify appears in the list of facets in Polaris PowerPAC and also appears on the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box. For more information, see Remote databases: Categorization of target databases.

      +
    9. In the Initial maximum number of records to return box, enter a number or use the arrow buttons to select a number between 1 and 99,999. This setting specifies the maximum number of records that the system returns when a patron performs an initial search of the EDS database in the PowerPAC. (The default value for this setting is 100.)
    10. +

      Note: EBSCO may impose a limit on the initial maximum number of records returned that is lower than the limit you specify here.

      +
    11. In the Initial maximum search time (seconds) box, enter a number or use the arrow buttons to select a number between 1 and 300. This setting specifies the maximum number of seconds for which the system attempts to perform an EDS search before timing out. (The default value for this setting is 10 seconds.)
    12. +
    13. Select Save to save your usage settings.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Controlling_Database_Access_in_the_Staff_Client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Controlling_Database_Access_in_the_Staff_Client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08bfc4a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Controlling_Database_Access_in_the_Staff_Client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client

    +

    After you have registered a Polaris catalog or remote server, and you have defined connections and databases for the server, you specify at the system level which branches have the option to use the databases in the staff client.

    +

    Note:
    Registered databases are available as potential search targets in PAC. To display these databases for PAC searching, see Editing Messages and Labels.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Polaris_search_server_connection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Polaris_search_server_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cff4de7c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Polaris_search_server_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Define a Polaris search server connection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define a Polaris search server connection

    +

    To add the search server connection to the server record:

    +

    Note:
    For information about setting up records for remote search servers, see Registering Remote Resource Servers.

    +
      +
    1. Expand Server in the Administration Explorer tree view.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the server name, and select Edit from the context menu. The Server workform opens.
    4. +
    5. Click ServConnect00406.gif to display the Connections view.
    6. +
    7. Click btnInsert00407.gif to display the Define Connection dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Select Search Server in the Connection Type box.
    10. +
    11. Type the search server name in the Connection Name box.
    12. +
    13. Set the server properties by doing the following actions:
    14. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Configure to display the Search Server Properties dialog box, Provider tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    + SearchServerProps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Z39.50 and click Next.
    2. +
    3. On the Connection tabbed page, enter the following information for your Polaris search server:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Host name
    • +
    • Port
    • +
    • User name
    • +
    • Password
    • +
    +

    + SearchServerConnTab.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Search Server Properties dialog box. The Search Server Properties dialog box closes and the Define Connection dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Define Connection dialog box. The Define Connection dialog box closes, and the new connection entry appears in the Connection list on the Server workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Web_server_connection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Web_server_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d31ed220 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_Web_server_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Define a Web server connection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define a Web server connection

    +

    To add the Web server connection to the server record:

    +
      +
    1. Expand Server in the Administration Explorer tree view.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the server name, and select Edit from the context menu. The Server workform opens.
    4. +
    5. Click ServConnect00402.gif to display the Connections view.
    6. +
    7. Click btnInsert00403.gif to display the Define Connection dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Select WWW Server in the Connection Type box.
    10. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type a name that describes this connection in the Connection Name box.
    2. +
    3. Click Configure to select the Web server computer on the network. The Network Browser dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the server from the Network Browser, and click OK. The Network Browser dialog box closes, and the Define Connection dialog box appears.
    6. +
    7. Click OK. The Define Connection dialog box closes, and the new connection entry appears in the Connection list on the Server workform.
    8. +
    9. Set up Web server parameters for the server. See Review and change Web server parameters.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_telephony_server_connection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_telephony_server_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7454d447 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_a_telephony_server_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Define a telephony server connection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define a telephony server connection

    +

    To add the telephony server connection to the server record:

    +
      +
    1. Expand Server in the Administration Explorer tree view.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the server name, and select Edit from the context menu. The Server workform opens.
    4. +
    5. Click ServConnect00404.gif to display the Connections view.
    6. +
    7. Click btnInsert00405.gif to display the Define Connection dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Select Telephony in the Connection Type box.
    10. +
    +

    + DefConnTel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name that describes this connection in the Connection Name box.
    2. +
    3. Click Configure to select the telephony server computer on the network. The Network Browser dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the server from the Network Browser, and click OK. The Network Browser dialog box closes, and the Define Connection dialog box appears.
    6. +
    7. Click OK. The Define Connection dialog box closes, and the new connection entry appears in the Connection list on the Server workform.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save.
    10. +
    11. Set up telephony parameters for the server. See Setting Outbound Telephony Parameters and Setting Up Inbound Telephony.
    12. +
    +

    Note:
    If your system includes multiple telephony servers, set up the server record, telephony connection, and parameters for each telephony server.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_an_SQL_server_connection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_an_SQL_server_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23aa8c82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Define_an_SQL_server_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Define an SQL server connection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define an SQL server connection

    +

    To add the SQL server connection to the server record:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot delete the SQL Server connection from the Polaris database server.

    +
      +
    1. Expand Server in the Administration Explorer tree view.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the server name, and select Edit from the context menu. The Server workform opens.
    4. +
    5. Click ServConnect.gif to display the Connections view.
    6. +
    7. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Define Connection dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Select SQL Server in the Connection Type box.
    10. +
    +

    + dDefinConectnDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name that describes this connection in the Connection Name box.
    2. +
    3. Set the data link properties by doing the following actions:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Configure to display the Data Link Properties dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dDataLinkSqlPropDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the Polaris SQL server name in the Select or enter a server name box.
    2. +
    3.  Specify the server log-on information in the User name and Password boxes.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    The server password cannot exceed 50 characters.

    +
      +
    1. Choose Select a database on the server, and select Polaris in the box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the Data Link Properties dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The Data Link Properties dialog box closes, and the Define Connection dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The Define Connection dialog box closes, and the new connection entry appears in the Connection list on the Server workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Enabling_EDS_Searching_in_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Enabling_EDS_Searching_in_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3baa17ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Enabling_EDS_Searching_in_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Enabling EDS Searching in Polaris PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enabling EDS Searching in Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    If your library subscribes to EDS, you can integrate EDS with Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Note: To complete this workflow, you must know the unique profile name associated with your library's EDS subscription.

    +

    To enable EDS searching in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. Register a remote resource server for EDS.
    2. +
    3. Define a search server connection for the EDS server record. When defining the EDS search server connection, be sure to do the following:
      1. On the Provider tab of the Search Server Properties dialog box, select the EDS search provider.
      2. On the All tab of the Search Server Properties dialog box, enter your library's unique EDS profile name in the Profile field.
      3. Select OK to save the server connection.
    4. +
    5. Add the EDS server as a remote search target on the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box. For more information, see Add the EDS server as a remote search target.
    6. +
    +

    After enabling EDS searching, your library may also want to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Import_databases_to_the_MuseGlobal_search_server.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Import_databases_to_the_MuseGlobal_search_server.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..318c39c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Import_databases_to_the_MuseGlobal_search_server.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Import databases to the MuseGlobal search server + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Import databases to the MuseGlobal search server

    +

    Note:
    The import function is available only for setting up MuseGlobal search servers.

    +

    To import databases to the MuseGlobal search server:

    +
      +
    1. Set up the MuseGlobal search server. See Registering Remote Resource Servers.
    2. +
    3. On the Server workform, click brndatabasevw.gif to go to the Databases view.
    4. +
    +

    + serverdatbvw.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the import button btnimp.gif to open the Import Databases window.
    2. +
    +

     importdatab.gif

    +
      +
    1. Select the Insert check box next to the databases you want to import to the MuseGlobal search server, and click OK. The selected databases are listed in the Server workform.
    2. +
    +

    + servedatabas.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the search server settings.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    When remote databases are added, the default setting is Unavailable. You enable the remote databases and make other settings when you configure the remote databases. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/MARC_852_tag_subfields_for PAC_ODC_and_BR_databases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/MARC_852_tag_subfields_for PAC_ODC_and_BR_databases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8135e62 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/MARC_852_tag_subfields_for PAC_ODC_and_BR_databases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,243 @@ + + + + + + + MARC 852 Tag Subfields for PAC, ODC, and BR Databases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    MARC 852 Tag Subfields for PAC, ODC, and BR Databases

    +

    When a third-party searches the PAC, ODC, or BR databases, the following MARC 852 tag subfields are included for each item record/issue:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    852 Subfield

    +
    +

    Item Field

    +
    +

    $a

    +
    +

    Assigned branch name

    +
    +

    $b

    +
    +

    Collection name

    +
    +

    $d

    +
    +

    Shelf location

    +
    +

    $e

    +
    +

    Purchase order line item segment number

    +
    +

    $h

    +
    +

    Classification number

    +
    +

    $i

    +
    +

    Cutter number

    +
    +

    $k

    +
    +

    Call number prefix

    +
    +

    $m

    +
    +

    Call number suffix

    +
    +

    $o

    +
    +

    Assigned branch identifier

    +
    +

    $p

    +
    +

    Barcode

    +
    +

    $r

    +
    +

    Item/issue status

    +
    +

    $u

    +
    +

    Due date

    +
    +

    $v

    +
    +

    Volume number

    +
    +

    $w

    +
    +

    Material type

    +
    +

    $x

    +
    +

    Public note

    +
    +

    $y

    +
    +

    Item type (monograph =1; serial=2)

    +
    +

    $1

    +
    +

    Last circulation date

    +
    +

    $4

    +
    +

    Chronology date

    +
    +

    $9

    +
    +

    Number of course reserve links

    +
    +

    $7 (PAC and ODC databases)

    +
    +

    Loanable outside system (true = Yes; false = No)

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Offering_the_Polaris_Database_as_a_Remote_Target.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Offering_the_Polaris_Database_as_a_Remote_Target.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7070116 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Offering_the_Polaris_Database_as_a_Remote_Target.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Offering the Polaris Database as a Remote Target + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Offering the Polaris Database as a Remote Target

    +

    In addition to setting up other sites as remote targets for Polaris to query, you can offer your Polaris database as a remote target to other sites to search via Z39.50. This feature allows material vendors, for example, to search your database for bibliographic records when creating your shelf-ready items. Give the remote sites the IP address and logon information for your database. For a list of the Bib-1 use attributes assigned to search access points, see Bib-1 Use Attributes in Polaris Searches.

    +

    Important:
    [DatabaseName.] is required if the target Microsoft SQL Server database is installed as an instance. This is always the case, for example, for Polaris Hosted customers. Set [DatabaseName] to the Microsoft SQL Server instance name, followed by a period.

    +

    You can offer the following Polaris targets:

    +

    Note about characters sets:
    Remote sites should use the naming conventions shown below to retrieve UTF-8-encoded results. To retrieve the results in MARC_8 encoding, append “MARC_8” (using an underscore character, not a hyphen) to the end of the database name, for example, [DatabaseName.]PACMARC_8

    +
      +
    • [DatabaseName.]PAC - Returns bibliographic records in the results list; embedded holdings tags are generated for all linked item records that are set to display in PAC. Any holdings tags (949s, 852s, and so forth) that already exist in the bib record are excluded. If a linked item record is suppressed from display in PAC, it will not appear as an embedded 852 tag in the returned record. If a bibliographic record is suppressed from display in PAC, it will not appear in the results list.

      If an item is linked to a Purchase Order (PO) line item, Polaris fabricates a subfield $e for the 852 tag that contains the PO line item ID and PO line item segment number, separated by a hyphen. This feature accommodates vendors who cannot use enriched EDI to obtain this information, which they need to provide full MARC records with embedded holdings for shelf-ready cataloging.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Polaris fabricates 99x tags in the bibliographic record for internal use in PAC. Because 99X tags in Polaris records are fabricated and proprietary, they are suppressed from the PAC results set.

    +
      +
    • [DatabaseName.]ODC - Similar to [DatabaseName.]PAC, but disregards the items’ Display in PAC settings and returns all linked item records that have an item status of final and a non-suppressed item circ status for the assigned branch. This target supports opening day collections for new branches or branches that are replacing large portions of their collections, perhaps due to fire or flood. On-order items are included but can be suppressed from PAC until branch renovations are complete, the items are shipped, and they can be circulated.
    • +
    • [DatabaseName.]BR - Returns bibliographic records in the results set, including any holdings tags (949s, 852s, and so forth) that appear in the bib record. Embedded holdings tags for linked item records are not generated.
    • +
    • [DatabaseName.]BT - Suppresses all holdings, both embedded holdings tags and linked item records, regardless of their status, from the bibliographic records in the results set. This is useful, for example, for vendors who are supplying full MARC records with holdings (949s, 852s, and so forth) that should not conflict with existing holdings information in your bibliographic records.
    • +
    • [DatabaseName.]AR. - Returns authority records.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Polaris_PowerPAC_MuseGlobal_Federated_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Polaris_PowerPAC_MuseGlobal_Federated_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0afc7981 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Polaris_PowerPAC_MuseGlobal_Federated_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC and MuseGlobal Federated Search - Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC and MuseGlobal Federated Search - Overview

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC provides federated searching, which enables users to simultaneously search multiple diverse and distributed target resources and retrieve merged search results. Polaris provides federated searching of Z39.50 databases at no additional cost. Or, libraries can purchase a subscription for the MuseGlobal service, which provides access to external databases that use many different kinds of search protocols (Z39.50 and many others). While MuseGlobal provides search access, connectors and URLs that conform to OpenURL, all searching is conducted using the PowerPAC search interface.

    +

    Note:
    Although staff members can search multiple databases in the Polaris staff client, the results are not merged. If a link resolver is required, the library must purchase it from a third party.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Search Protocols

    +

    Federated searching in Polaris, combined with the MuseGlobal service, can use the following types of search protocols:

    +

    Tip:
    Since the Polaris PowerPAC can search remote Z39.50 database targets without MuseGlobal, your library may decide to use MuseGlobal only when the source cannot be searched using Z39.50.

    +
      +
    • Z39.50 (v1, v2, v3) - Search hosts that support all three versions of the Z39.50 protocol.
    • +
    • HTTP - Search the major web search engines.
    • +
    • Free text searches - Use common free text search engines through their native API (Application Program Interface).
    • +
    • SQL or ODBC databases (with known characteristics) - Search databases using these two protocols where enough is known about the database to correctly structure the search statement.
    • +
    • Proprietary protocol - These sources (library catalogs, publishers databases, etc.) have a rich store of information, but do not have standard search interfaces. This requires a specific protocol translator for each piece of software.
    • +
    • XML gateway (SOAP, REST)
    • +
    • SQL
    • +
    • SRU / SRW
    • +
    +

    Search Targets and Search Results

    +

    With federated searching in Polaris using the MuseGlobal service, the following types of targets can typically be searched (providing the MuseGlobal service has established a connector for the database):

    +
      +
    • Library catalogs (MARC)
    • +
    • Supplementary and locally-created non-MARC databases such as archives records, community resources, newspaper indexes, and metadata imports from vendors such as EBSCO    
    • +
    • Non-MARC sources that are internal to the library
    • +
    • Commercial full text research databases (API support)
    • +
    • Electronic journals
    • +
    • Abstract/indexing databases
    • +
    • News feeds
    • +
    • Websites
    • +
    • Subscription databases
    • +
    • Digital content including images (photos, maps), multimedia, full-text, and metadata
    • +
    • Consortia member websites
    • +
    • Unstructured data, such as: theses, white papers, and reports
    • +
    +

    When search results are returned from the remote federated databases, duplicate detection is not performed. The results are sorted by relevancy, and PowerPAC users can select facets to narrow the search.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/PowerPAC_and_EDS.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/PowerPAC_and_EDS.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a82b0e68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/PowerPAC_and_EDS.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC and EBSCO Discovery Service (EDS) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC and EBSCO Discovery Service (EDS)

    +

    Library administrators can integrate the EBSCO Discovery Service (EDS) database with Polaris to provide a unified search results set in Polaris PowerPAC. EDS integration allows patrons to search and access EBSCO's extensive collection of content by initiating a search in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Before enabling this feature, your library must subscribe to EDS. You can purchase a subscription to EDS from Innovative Interfaces or by contacting EBSCO directly. Contact your Innovative Interfaces representative for more information.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Register_a_Polaris_server_in_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Register_a_Polaris_server_in_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0b39354 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Register_a_Polaris_server_in_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Register a Polaris server in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Register a Polaris server

    +

    To do this procedure, Polaris server software must already be installed on the server computer, and the server must be available on the network.

    +

    To register a new Polaris server:

    +

    Note:
    To set up a server record for a remote search target, see Set up a server record for a Z39.50 or other search server.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New > Server on the Administration Explorer menu bar. The Server workform appears.
    4. +
    5. Select Browse to select the server on the network.
    6. +
    +

    + NewServerBrowse.gif +

    +
      +
    1. Select the server computer, and click OK. The system name for the server computer is displayed in the Network Name box.
    2. +
    3. In the Display Name box, type the name that you want to display in the Polaris user interface for this server.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Leave the Resource Group option set to None. If you select a resource group, only those organizations associated with that resource group will be able to access the Polaris server. For more information about resource groups, see Setting Up Organization Resource Groups.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to record this server. The new server is added to Polaris and assigned a server identification number.
    2. +
    3. Define any of the following connection types for the servers installed on this computer:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Define the Polaris databases available on the server with the Databases view. See Specify Polaris server databases.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the server record.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a database or connection entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate.gif. You can change database names, connection names, and the data link properties for connections. You cannot change existing connection types. See Change a table entry.
    • +
    • Delete a database or connection entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif. Removing an entry removes the database from the search tools. See Delete a table entry. You cannot delete the Polaris database server.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Polaris_Servers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Polaris_Servers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5858bb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Polaris_Servers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Registering Polaris Servers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Registering Polaris Servers

    +

    Polaris server software applications may reside on one or more physical computers. For example, the Polaris application server/SQL server and Z39.50 server applications may be on one computer, with the Web server on a separate computer. Each physical computer is registered in a Polaris server record. You then define the appropriate connections in the server record, depending on the server configuration. For example, if three Polaris server applications reside on one computer, the server record for the computer defines three connections: SQL Server, Web Server, and Search Server. If there is a separate Web server computer, the server record for that computer includes only the Web Server connection. If you use Polaris telephony, you may have one separate telephony server, or multiple servers for a large consortium. The server record also defines the databases accessible to the server.

    +

    Server records are displayed in the Server workform. Icons in the Connections list indicate server connection types as follows:

    +
      +
    • SQL server - btnSQLServ.gif
    • +
    • Web server - btnWebServ.gif
    • +
    • Search server - btnZ3950Serv.gif
    • +
    • Telephony server - PhoneSvrIcon.gif
    • +
    +

    The illustration shows a server workform for a system where three Polaris server applications (SQL server, Web server, Search server) reside on a single physical computer.

    +

    + +

    +

    After a server record is saved, it is listed under the Server folder in the Administration Explorer tree view.

    +

    + ServerTree.gif 

    +

    Note:
    In the Administration Explorer tree view, a question mark beside a server name indicates that the server is not fully configured. That is, the record has been set up but connections or databases have not been added to the record.

    +

    You can open the server workform from the Explorer or the Polaris Find Tool. You can add, change, and  delete connection and database entries in the server record.

    +

    Note:
    The Servers: Access and Servers: Modify permissions are required to change the server record.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Remote_Resource_Servers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Remote_Resource_Servers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f41250e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Registering_Remote_Resource_Servers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Registering Remote Resource Servers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Registering Remote Resource Servers

    +

    To provide remote resources as search targets, you set up server records for the remote resources. Polaris uses the Z39.50 version 3 protocol to access remote target databases. Using the Polaris Find Tool, you can search for and retrieve MARC 21 records and holdings information from these Z39.50 target sites. You can also make Z39.50 target databases available for searching in the PAC. An unfiltered remote Z39.50 database search returns all types of materials in PowerPAC search results, regardless of whether patrons can actually request the materials via interlibrary loan. You can set up a Contextual Query Language (CQL) filter for a particular Z39.50 connection that filters the results to show only those materials that patrons can actually request.

    +

    To enable the connection to a remote Z39.50 target, you set up a server record for the target in Polaris Administration and add a Z39.50 connection entry to the record. The organization that owns the remote database provides the IP address and logon information.

    +

    Z39.50 searching depends on standard Bib-1 Use attributes for search access points. If a standard Bib-1 Use attribute has not been defined for a search access point, Polaris relies on proprietary Bib-1 Use attributes. (Bib-1 Use attributes between 5,000 and 10,000 are reserved for these proprietary attributes). These non-standard search access points may not work with Z39.50 target sites. For example, the UPC barcode does not have a standard Bib-1 Use attribute. If you search bibliographic records at a Z39.50 target site for the UPC barcode number, setting the Search by field to UPC number in the Polaris Find Tool, the search will likely fail. However, if you search for the UPC barcode number by Other system number (a standard access point), you will likely find the title.

    +

    Note: +
    Polaris ZMARC provides access to over 11 million bibliographic records, over seven million name authority records, and close to three million subject authority records cataloged by the Library of Congress, as well as over 250,000 AV records provided by Baker & Taylor. If your library subscribes to Polaris ZMARC databases, Polaris Customer Support sets up the remote search targets for the ZMARC databases. For more information about Polaris ZMARC, contact your Site Manager.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Review_and_change_Web_server_parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Review_and_change_Web_server_parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79098278 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Review_and_change_Web_server_parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Review and change Web server parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Review and change Web server parameters

    +

    To set parameters for the Polaris Web server:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Server folder and expand the server for which you want to set Web parameters.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters under the server. The PAC parameters tabbed page is displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    +

    + ServerParams.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Specify the location of the Polaris Application server by setting each of the following parameters:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Network name of Application Server (MTS) - Name of the computer on which the Polaris Application Server software is installed. The server name cannot contain any spaces.
    • +
    • NT Domain that Application Server resides in - Microsoft Windows NT domain where the Polaris Application server is located. The domain name cannot contain any spaces.
    • +
    • Server IP of Application Server (MTS) - Internet protocol address of the Polaris Application server.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Specify the network account used by the PAC software to access Polaris by setting each of the following parameters:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • NT Password used with SVRAPPLICATIONNTACCOUNT - Password used by the public access computers to access Polaris.
    • +
    • NT User account for access to MTS - User name used by the public access computers to access Polaris.
    • +
    • PAC Default Organization for session - Organization to which all public access computers connect if an organization is not otherwise specified.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To encrypt patron log-on data (use https:) for Polaris PowerPAC, double-click SSL: Enable: PowerPAC, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Notes:
    If you are using SSL, the value for the Server parameter URL of the PowerPAC’s root should be entered in lower case.
    You can also use https for the entire PowerPAC site. See Set the entire PowerPAC site to https only.

    +
      +
    1. To encrypt the Mobile PAC site, double-click SSL: Enable: Mobile PAC, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Some older mobile phones do not support SSL.

    +
      +
    1. If your system includes Polaris ContentXChange or Carousel Toolkit, double-click URL of the ContentXChange/Carousel Toolkit root and specify the URL of the server where ContentXChange or the Carousel Toolkit is installed: http://<servername>/ContentXChange/
    2. +
    +

    The location is typically your PAC server, and if so, you can simply copy the servername portion of the URL from the parameter URL of the PowerPAC’s root.

    +

    Note:
    ContentXChange, a separately licensed feature for libraries that use Polaris Community Profiles, is an optional Web component of Polaris server software and must be selected when Polaris Web server software is installed.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_database_availability_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_database_availability_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ce2cd51 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_database_availability_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set database availability in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set database availability in the staff client

    +

    To define which databases are available to a particular organization in the staff client.

    +
      +
    1. Expand the Server folder in the Administration Explorer tree view, and expand the server folder with the database you want to control.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The icon DatabaseIcon.gif signifies a database.

    +
      +
    1. Select the database. The Database Availability for Staff Client table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + SearchDBStaff.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    You can set the All Branches check box based on how the majority of the branches should be set. Then, you can change the setting for the few branches that are different from the majority.

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To make the database available to all branches, select the All Branches check box.
    • +
    • To make the database unavailable for all branches, clear the All Branches check box. If the All Branches check box is shaded, some branches have a different setting for database availability.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Polaris database always appears in the Databases tab of the Find Tool even if it has not been made available to the workstation’s log-on branch. (Remote databases do not appear in the list if they are not available for the branch.) If the staff client user receives the message You do not have access to the Polaris database, be sure the branch is checked in the Database Availability table for the Polaris database.

    +
      +
    • To set database availability for an individual branch, select the check box for the branch name.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    The database is added to the Search Databases policy table for each branch that was selected, and is available for Find Tool searches in the staff client.

    +

    Note:
    At the branch level, you can open the Search Databases policy table for a specific branch and delete any database you do not want to display in the Find Tool for that branch.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Remote search target access in PowerPAC - See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_the_entire_PowerPAC_site_to_https_only.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_the_entire_PowerPAC_site_to_https_only.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1c0ae8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_the_entire_PowerPAC_site_to_https_only.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the entire PowerPAC site to https only + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the entire PowerPAC site to https only

    +

    You can use SSL to secure the entire PowerPAC site, not just patron information (see Secure Socket Layer (SSL)). However, if you use content from third-party vendors, be aware that your patrons may receive messages about allowing unsecured content. If you think the messages will be a problem, contact your vendors to see if they can use https. (If so, you will need to change their Enriched Data URL settings from http to https. See Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.)

    +

    To set up the entire PowerPAC site to use https:

    +

    Note:
    If you have set a patron inactivity timeout for PAC workstations in the library, and SSL is enabled for the entire site, the 60-second countdown timer appears in the status bar only if you add the site to the trusted sites list in Internet Explorer. For more information about the inactivity timeout, see Patron Inactivity Timer.

    +
      +
    1. Install an SSL Certificate on the Web server.
    2. +
    3. In Polaris Administration, set the Web server PAC parameter SSL: Enable to Yes.
    4. +
    5. In Polaris Administration, change the Web server PAC parameter URL of the PowerPAC’s root to begin with https instead of http.
    6. +
    7. Using the IIS Manager on the Web server, change the SSL Settings at the root of the Polaris Web application to Require SSL.
    8. +
    +

    + SSL1.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Using the IIS Manager, set up a custom error page for a status code of 403.4 that will redirect the browser to the secure version of the PAC.
    2. +
    +

    + ErrorPage1.gif 

    +

    + ErrorPage2.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Using the IIS Manager, edit the Feature Settings to use either Custom error pages or Detailed errors for local requests and custom error pages for remote requests.
    2. +
    +

    + EditErrorPages1.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_Service.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_Service.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff132082 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_Service.htm @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + + Set up the MuseGlobal Service + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the MuseGlobal Service

    +

    A MuseGlobal application is a named group of databases to which a library or group of libraries has purchased access. (The access rights are purchased from the database provider, not from MuseGlobal.)

    +

    In Polaris, the MuseGlobal application is defined as a server record with one or more associated databases. Libraries work with Polaris staff members to configure the optimal arrangement of MuseGlobal applications and Polaris server records.

    +

    Setting up the MuseGlobal service involves the following general steps:

    +

    Tip:
    Databases that use the Z39.50 search protocol do not require the MuseGlobal service; Polaris federates searches of Z39.50 targets without the MuseGlobal service.

    +
      +
    1. The library lists their search targets, based on their current subscriptions and agreements with database providers. The library generates the E-Sources report that lists the subscription databases set up for searching from the PAC e-sources page. The report is available by selecting Utilities, Reports and Notices, PAC. It can be generated for a specific branch or all branches.
    2. +
    +

    For each e-source, the following information is included on the report:

    +
    +
      +
    • Database name and description
    • +
    • Connection URL
    • +
    • Message
    • +
    • Categories/subcategories
    • +
    • Restriction data
    • +
    • Connection data.
    • +
    +
    +

    + e-sourcerep.gif 

    +
      +
    1. The library determines which search targets are appropriate for federated search. Certain databases to which the library currently subscribes may be so specific that federating them does not make sense. For example, if the library subscribes to Chilton’s Automotive Database, a patron searching this database would most likely not want results merged with other databases. These databases can remain as e-sources that are searched separately.
    2. +
    3. The library records the following information for each target database to include in federated searching:
    4. +
    +
    +
      +
    • Source database name
    • +
    • Source database provider (vendor)
    • +
    • Source database target URL
    • +
    • Restrictions (contract or technical limit)
    • +
    • Login username & password, if required for authentication
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. The Polaris representative accesses the MuseGlobal administration console and creates the MuseGlobal account:
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    • If the connector to the database already exists, the Polaris representative adds the connectors.
    • +
    • If the connector does not already exist, the Polaris representative asks MuseGlobal for a quote to add the connector.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For EBSCO or Gale databases, additional information is necessary. EBSCO requires an EBSCO EIT account, and Gale requires a Gale group or library username (sometimes called the Location ID). The Polaris representative or library staff member contacts the vendor to request this information.

    +
    +
      +
    • Once the Polaris representative has created the MuseGlobal account, the library is given a new IP address that must be reported to each database provider that accepts IP recognition.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This IP address is added to the library’s current list of authenticated IP addresses.

    +
      +
    1. Before setting up the MuseGlobal search servers (applications) in Polaris, the library should consider the following:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Are some databases available only to patrons of certain branches?
    • +
    • Are there separate groups or types of patrons that may need special access to a set of otherwise restricted databases?
    • +
    • Will patrons using in-house library computers need to authenticate through the PAC to access federated searching?
    • +
    • Will patrons using a remote computer need to authenticate through the PAC to access federated searching?
    • +
    • What topical categories would the library like to present on the database selection list?
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The library can use the E-Sources report to see the current categories and subcategories, but the library may want to change these.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_and_Federated_Search_in_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_and_Federated_Search_in_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da6a5d3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_MuseGlobal_and_Federated_Search_in_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Set up MuseGlobal and Federated Search in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up MuseGlobal and Federated Search in Polaris

    +

    After the Innovative Interfaces representative configures the service via the MuseGlobal console, the representative helps the library set up federated search with MuseGlobal in Polaris Administration following this workflow:

    +
      +
    • Define Resource Groups - If you have databases that are restricted to patrons of certain branches, set up resource groups for the branches whose registered patrons will have access to the remote databases, and grant resource group permissions to the appropriate staff members. After the resource groups are defined, the resource group list is displayed in the Server workform. The library selects a resource group that has access to the server database(s). See Setting Up Organization Resource Groups.
    • +
    • Set up the MuseGlobal search server - Each server represents a MuseGlobal application, which is a named group of databases to which a library or group of libraries has purchased access. (The access rights are purchased from the database provider, not from MuseGlobal.) Libraries, especially those in consortial arrangements, may have more than one MuseGlobal application. In Polaris Administration, the MuseGlobal application is defined as a system-level server record with one or more associated databases. The configuration information for the individual databases is imported from MuseGlobal and applied to Polaris. A single MuseGlobal application can be shared among libraries that are on different service contracts with the database providers. Libraries work with Polaris staff members to configure the optimal arrangement of MuseGlobal applications and Polaris server records. Select the resource groups that will have access to the database(s), and enter the information to connect to the MuseGlobal application. See Registering Remote Resource Servers.
    • +
    • Import databases to the MuseGlobal server - After the search server connection is set up, import the databases to the search server. See Import databases to the MuseGlobal search server.
    • +
    • Define the search database selection limit at the system level - Use system-level PowerPAC profile, Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at once to specify the number of databases. This should be set to a default of 10, with a maximum of 25 databases that library users can select at a time. When you set up categories using MuseGlobal databases, each category should not exceed 25 databases because of this limit. Maximum Number of Databases Searchable at One Time.
    • +
    • Categorize the remote databases - Organize the remote databases available to the organization into categories. See Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display.
    • +
    • Configure the remote databases - After the databases are imported into the MuseGlobal search server, use the Remote databases: Usage settings PowerPAC profile to: specify whether the remote database is a follow-on search database; the maximum search time and number of records to return; the authentication requirements for in-house and remote access; restrict access by patron code or IP address; and the search access points available while searching the database. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_a_server_record_for_a_Z39_50_or_other_search_server.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_a_server_record_for_a_Z39_50_or_other_search_server.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4af43203 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Set_up_a_server_record_for_a_Z39_50_or_other_search_server.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up a server record for a Z39.50 or other search server + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up a Server Record for a Z39.50 or Other Search Server

    +

    Before you can do this setup, you need to obtain the IP address and logon information for the remote target server, and create the resource group. See Setting Up Organization Resource Groups.

    +

    To set up a new server record for a remote search target, and specify the resource group that can use the target:

    +

    Important: +
    If more than one resource group should be able to use the target, set up a separate server record for each group.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New > Server on the Administration Explorer menu bar. The New Server workform opens.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Specify a network name for this database. The network name can be the same as the display name (see step 4).
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    The network name for a remote Z39.50 server cannot contain the single quote character (apostrophe), which causes connection problems in PAC searches. For example, use Bowkers Books in Print instead of Bowker’s Books in Print.

    +

    Note: +
    The Browse button is used to locate servers on your own network. It does not apply to a server record for a remote resource.

    +
      +
    1. In the Display Name box, type the name that you want to display in the Polaris user interface for this server.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    5. From the Resource Group list, select the resource group that should have access to this database or resource.
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    Select None if you want every organization to have access (no resource group restriction).

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type a non-public note (255 characters maximum) describing this database or resource.
    2. +
    3. Save the record.
    4. +
    5. Define the connection type for this server record:
      1. Click ServeConnect.gif to display the Connections view if it is not already displayed.
      2. Click btnInsert00409.gif to display the Define Connection dialog box.
      3. Select Search Server in the Connection Type box.
      1. Type the connection name in the Connection Name box.
      2. Click Configure to display the Search Server Properties dialog box.
      3. On the Provider tabbed page, select Z39.50 or the search server provider, and click Next to go to the Connection tabbed page.
      1. On the Connection tabbed page, enter the following information:
      • Host name
      • Port
      • User name
      • Password
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    For Z39.50 targets that do not require log-in, select Anonymous Login instead of supplying your library’s user name and password for the resource.

    +
      +
    1. Select Test Connection. A message indicates if the connection was successful.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    To review all settings, select the All tab.

    +
      +
    1. Select OK to save your settings and close the Search Server Properties dialog box. The Server workform displays the connection.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    When a new database is added, both in-house and remote access are disabled by default. To set access to the database, see Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Make the remote target available for searching in the PAC - New search server targets are not automatically added to the PAC display. You must explicitly make them available for search selection. See Managing Federated Search Targets. To allow interlibrary loan requests from PAC, see Setting Up ILL Requests and Configure remote database usage settings.
    • +
    • Remove the resource group from the server record - From the Resource Group list, select None, or select a different group. This change prevents organizations associated with the original resource group from accessing the resource.
    • +
    • Resource group changes - When a new resource group is selected on the server workform and you save the server record, the Report of Unavailable Targets dialog box appears. The dialog box lists the database display name defined for PAC (the organization-level name or system-level name, if none is defined for the organization), the server display name, and the databases affected. If you continue to save the record, the database is removed from PAC display (if it has been selected for display) for every organization indicated in the report where there is no inheritance. The database may still be available for a parent organization. For more information about setting up the target display for PAC, Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display.
    • +
    • Set usage conditions for a resource +
    • +
    • Integrating Vital digital assets in PAC searches - See Searching Vital Digital Resources in PowerPAC - Overview .
    • +
    • Make the remote target available for searching in the staff client - See Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client.
    • +
    • Remote databases accessible to a specific branch - The Branch property sheet shows the number of accessible remote databases available to the branch in the staff client and in PAC. To open the property sheet, right-click the branch name in the Administration Explorer and select Properties, or click the Properties icon PropertiesIcon.gif on the Branch workform.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Up_Server_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Up_Server_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d89a07ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Up_Server_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Server Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Server Records

    +

    After the network servers are established on the network and Polaris software has been installed, you register the following network servers in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    • Polaris Application server/SQL Server (catalog database)
    • +
    • Search server (Polaris search engine)
    • +
    • Web Server (Polaris PowerPAC applications, report server, Language Editor)
    • +
    • Telephone (outbound and inbound telephony)
    • +
    +

    You also register remote resources as search targets for staff and patrons by registering the target servers in Polaris. The process is similar to registering your own servers. The remote resources can be searched and results displayed using the same tools and user interface as for the local catalog.

    +

    Note:
    Innovative Interfaces sets up and registers your servers at installation and implementation. However, you can use the procedures in this unit if your server configuration changes, or if you add remote search targets.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Web_Server_Parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Web_Server_Parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b43c8931 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Setting_Web_Server_Parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Web Server Parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Web Server Parameters

    +

    The Polaris Web server typically hosts Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), stores settings for the Polaris Phone Attendant (inbound telephony), and may also include the report server and/or Polaris Mobile PAC. After you register a Polaris server with a Web server connection, you set parameters that indicate where the components are located for the Web interface to Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) software must be installed on the Web server and configured before you set Web server parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

    +

    You can encrypt the personal data of your patrons (use https:) when they use Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. The encryption protects their logon and library account information when they log on to use the Ask Us feature, request holds, renew items, or review their accounts. Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC work without using SSL protocols, but personal data sent over the Internet is exposed to potential interception. To enable data encryption for patron account information in Polaris PowerPAC, set the SSL: Enable: PowerPAC parameter for the Web server to Yes. Patrons must have SSL protocol enabled for their Web browser and must accept the Microsoft certificate the first time they log on from outside the library. Data encryption is automatically used when a patron logs on. Catalog searches and functions that do not require log-on can use encryption, but connection performance may be slower. To enable data encryption for Mobile PAC, set the SSL: Enable: Mobile PAC parameter for the Web server to Yes. This parameter sets the entire Mobile PAC site (not just patron account information) to https. You can also secure the entire PowerPAC site. See Set the entire PowerPAC site to https only.

    +

    For e-commerce, Secure Socket Layer (SSL) provides a secure environment for Web-based credit card transactions that follows industry standards. All communications use https:// by an SSL connection. Payments from PAC cannot be made unless you have installed an SSL server certificate and an SSL connection has been established. A binding is made between port 443 and the PowerPAC Web site certificate, and SSL encrypts the data transferred from the patron’s Web browser to the library’s PowerPAC Web site (IIS) server.

    +

    To enable SSL in IIS, you must first obtain a certificate that is used to encrypt and decrypt the information that is transferred over the network. The certificate must support 128-bit encryption.

    +

    IIS includes its own certificate request tool that you can use to send a certificate request to a certification authority. This tool simplifies the process of obtaining a certificate. For instructions on enabling SSL in IIS, go to:

    +

    http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb727098.aspx +

    +

    Important:
    If you plan to accept credit card payments and donations from PAC, you must install the appropriate certificates and enable SSL. For more information about setting up credit card processing with Polaris. See Setting Up E-Commerce.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Specify_Polaris_server_databases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Specify_Polaris_server_databases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9af72d22 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDserver/Specify_Polaris_server_databases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify Polaris server databases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Polaris server databases

    +

    To add a Polaris catalog database to a server record:

    +

    Note:
    See Set up a Server Record for a Z39.50 or Other Search Server to set up a connection to a non-Polaris database.

    +
      +
    1. Expand Server in the Administration Explorer tree view.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the server name in the Explorer tree view, and select Edit from the context menu. The Server workform opens.
    4. +
    +

    Tip: dSvrDbIcon.gif
    Click to display the Databases view.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Databases to display the Databases view.
    2. +
    3. Click btnInsert00408.gif to display the New Databases dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + dNuDbDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the ODBC name of the database in the Database Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type a display name for the database in the Display Name box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box. The New Database dialog box closes, and the new database entry appears in the Databases list on the Server workform.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Make a database available in the staff client - See Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Accessing_Administration_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Accessing_Administration_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2d1d62d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Accessing_Administration_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Accessing Administration Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Accessing Administration Records

    +

    You can work with most administration records by using either of the following methods: by accessing the record in the Administration Explorer, or by opening the appropriate workform for a specific record.

    +

    Note:
    Procedures covered in Polaris Administration topics use the Administration Explorer method, unless you must specifically open the record workform.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Find_an_administration_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Find_an_administration_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8b0abe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Find_an_administration_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find an administration record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find an administration record

    +

    You can use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and open an administration record. The record opens in a workform specific to the record type. You can open multiple workforms at the same time and navigate among them. Most of the settings available for a record in the Administration Explorer are also available from the workform.

    +

    To use the Polaris Find Tool to find and open an administration record in a workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Polaris Find Tool using one of these methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Administration to display the Administration menu. The Administration menu displays administration record options.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      If the Administration Explorer is open, select File, Open on the Administration Explorer menu bar. The Open submenu displays administration record options.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the administration record type you want to find. The Polaris Find Tool appears. The selected administration record type is displayed in the Object box.
    2. +
    +

    + FindLib.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the For box, type the partial or complete search text that describes the records you want to view.
    2. +
    3. If you want to focus the search, select a limiter in the Limit by box, and set a value for the limiter in the Value box.
    4. +
    5. If you want your search results to be sorted, select the Sort Results check box.
    6. +
    7. Click Search to begin the search, or press ENTER. Your results appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find Tool window. To load all the results in a large list, press CTRL+SHIFT+A.
    8. +
    9. Do one of the following actions to work with an item in the results list:
    10. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Double-click a line item to open the record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Right-click an item in the results list to see the record’s properties, add the record to a group, or do other tasks without opening the record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Related Information +

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Managing_Record_Locks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Managing_Record_Locks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fbd2d46b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Managing_Record_Locks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Record Locks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Record Locks

    +

    When a Polaris record is open, an entry is automatically made in the Object Locks table so that no one else can change the record. When the record is closed, the entry is automatically removed from the Object Locks table. Occasionally a record remains locked when it does not close correctly, as may happen when there has been a computer problem. In this case, you can unlock the record and make it available for use by deleting the appropriate entry from the Object Locks table.

    +

    Object locks are automatically removed in certain situations:

    +
      +
    • If the staff client has closed unexpectedly and the user logs back in, that user can resume working with the objects that he or she had opened when the staff client closed unexpectedly. The object locks are automatically cleared from the Object Locks table.
    • +
    • A system process automatically clears any object locks remaining in the Object Locks table when MS SQL Server has stopped and is restarted. When clients reconnect to the restarted server, all object locks are cleared.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Polaris blocks staff members with the same login from accessing the same record at the same time. The record is locked when the first user opens it.

    +

    To remove a lock on a record that did not close correctly:

    +

    Important:
    Do not use this procedure for records that are actually in use.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand an organization (system, library, or branch), and expand Database Tables under the organization.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Objects Locks table is available only in the Administration Explorer (not from an organization workform). Changes affect all organizations.

    +
      +
    1. Select Object Locks under Database Tables. A list of record lock entries appears in the details view. The entries are sorted by record type. (Click the Staff Member column heading to sort the entries by user name.)
    2. +
    3. Select the entry to unlock, and click btnDelete.gif to remove the record lock entry. The record lock entry is removed from the Object Locks table.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Polaris_Administration_Records_and_Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Polaris_Administration_Records_and_Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53ca5b7c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Polaris_Administration_Records_and_Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris Administration Records and Settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Administration Records and Settings

    +

    In Polaris Administration, these organizational levels create the basic structure (hierarchy) of your system:

    +
      +
    • System - The system level is at the top of the Polaris hierarchy. It represents a single library or group of libraries that use one Polaris system. Only one system-level administration record is defined for each Polaris installation.
    • +
    • Library - In Polaris, organizations at the library level can represent any of the following entities:
      • A single, functional repository (branch) in the system

      Important:

      If you create a library level consisting of a single functional repository, you also need to create a branch level for that facility.

      • Multiple branches, with the library itself being a functional branch in the system
      • Multiple branches, but the library organization itself is not a functional repository (branch) in the system.
      • Each organization at the library level is represented by its own record.

    • +
    +
      +
    • Branch - A branch is part of a library, usually in a separate physical location or repository, consisting of one or more collections. Each branch you identify must be associated with a parent at the library level. Each branch is represented by its own record.
    • +
    • Staff member and workstation records are associated with specific organizations in your Polaris system. They take many settings from the organization with which they are associated. By setting permissions, you control what each staff member is allowed to do, and what tasks can be done on a staff or public workstation. You can place staff members, workstations, and even entire organizations into permission groups, and then give all the members of the group a set of permissions.
    • +
    +

    In addition, server records contain information about the computers that control Polaris, store the catalog database, and handle Internet traffic.

    +

    See also: Accessing Administration Records.

    +

    Polaris Administration Settings

    +

    Some Administration settings are shared by all organizations in Polaris, while other settings can be independent. For example, you can make most settings that control functions available in the PAC at the branch level, without affecting the PAC functions are offered at other branches. With certain exceptions, each organization at a level in the Polaris system administration hierarchy can set its controls without affecting the settings for the higher levels. (Certain settings are available only at a specific level.) See also: Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Use_the_Administration_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Use_the_Administration_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fffcbcf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDstart/Use_the_Administration_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Use the Administration Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Use the Administration Explorer

    +

    The Administration Explorer is a hierarchical list of administration records available from the Administration menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. You use the Explorer to navigate among organizations, staff members, and workstations and select a record to modify.

    +

    The Administration Explorer is divided into two views. The left part of the Explorer displays a list of administration levels and tables in a tree view. Plus signs (+) on the tree indicate that the administration level has linked or associated data. You can click a plus sign to display the subfolders for the administration level. The right part of the Administration Explorer displays the values and settings related to a selection in the tree view. For example, if you select the system organization in the tree view at the left, general information about the system organization is displayed on the right.

    +

    To display the Administration Explorer:

    +
      +
    1. Log on to the Polaris staff client.
    2. +
    3. Select Administration from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the Administration menu.
    4. +
    +

    Tip: 
    On the toolbar, click AquaOrb.gif then click dSysExIcon.gif to display the Administration Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Select Explorer from the Administration menu. The Explorer submenu appears.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of record to display in the tree view of the Administration Explorer:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you open the Explorer at the System level, you use the Polaris Find Tool to select and add records to display in the tree view for staff members, workstations, and collections. For an example of this procedure, see List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    • System - Shows all Polaris administration levels in the tree view.
    • +
    • Library - Shows the library organizations in the tree view, along with the branches associated with each library.
    • +
    • Branch - Shows the branch organizations in the tree view. Click + next to a branch, and then click + next to Collection, Workstation, or Staff Member to list the records associated with the branch.
    • +
    • Staff Member - Click Search to find and list staff members.
    • +
    • Workstation - Click Search to find and list workstations.
    • +
    • Collection - Click Search to find and list collections.
    • +
    • Server - Shows the servers registered in Polaris.
    • +
    • Database Table - Shows the System, Library, and Branch levels. Click + next to a level to display the types of tables available at that level.
    • +
    • Vendor - Vendor records and vendor accounts are accessed through the Polaris Administration Explorer; they cannot be accessed from the Find Tool. Polaris Administration ownership and inheritance do not apply to vendor records or vendor accounts.
    • +
    +

    The Administration Explorer appears. The title bar of the Explorer displays the level you selected.

    +

    Tip:
    You can view organization ID values in Polaris Administration. In the Administration Explorer, right-click an organization and select Properties from the context menu. Select the About tab on the Properties dialog box. Polaris system ID number identifies the organization ID.

    +
      +
    1. Work with administration records using any of these methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Click the plus sign (+) by an object in the tree view, or double-click the object, to expand the object and display associated items. When you select an item, the details view of the Explorer displays information about the selected item.
    • +
    • Right-click an organization, collection, workstation, or staff member, and select Edit from the context menu to display an administration record in a workform.
    • +
    • Use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and display an administration record in a workform. See Find an administration record.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To quit working with the Explorer, click File, Close on the Explorer menu bar.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform_opening_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform_opening_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..29148288 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform_opening_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Bibliographic Record workform opening view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Bibliographic Record workform opening view

    +

    You can set this option at the organization, workstation, or staff member level. Staff member settings take precedence over workstation settings.

    +

    To set a preferred view to be displayed when the Bibliographic Record workform is opened:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Profiles for the organization, workstation, or staff member, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Default view selected when bibliographic record opened.
    2. +
    3. Select a workform view from the drop-down list.
    4. +
    +

    + PreferViewBib.gif 

    +
      +
    • If Default is selected, the Bibliographic Record workform opens to different views depending on the circumstances. For example, when you are creating a new bibliographic record, the workform opens to the MARC21 view.
    • +
    • If a specific view is selected, the Bibliographic Record workform always opens to the selected view, regardless of how it is opened.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Item_Record_workform_opening_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Item_Record_workform_opening_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd5e6fae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Item_Record_workform_opening_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Item Record workform opening view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Item Record workform opening view

    +

    You can set this option at the organization, workstation, or staff member level. Staff member settings take precedence over workstation settings.

    +

    To set a preferred view to be displayed when the Item Record workform is opened:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Profiles for the  organization, workstation, or staff member, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Default view selected when item record opened.
    2. +
    3. Select a workform view from the drop-down list.
    4. +
    +

    + PreferViewItem.gif 

    +
      +
    • If Default is selected, the workform opens to the Cataloging view when creating a new item, the Source and Acquisition view when opening an item record from a purchase order or invoice line item, and the Circulation view in all other cases.
    • +
    • If a specific view is selected, the Item Record workform always opens to the selected view, regardless of how it is opened.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Patron_Status_workform_opening_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Patron_Status_workform_opening_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a884e809 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Set_the_Patron_Status_workform_opening_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Patron Status workform opening view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Patron Status workform opening view

    +

    You can set this option at the organization, workstation, or staff member level. Staff member settings take precedence over workstation settings.

    +

    To set a preferred view to be displayed when the Patron Status workform is opened:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Profiles for the organization, workstation, or staff member, and select the Staff Client tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about listing workstations and staff members in the Explorer, see List workstations in the Explorer and List staff members in the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Default view selected when patron status opened.
    2. +
    3. Select a workform view from the drop-down list.
    4. +
    +

    + PreferViewPatron.gif 

    +
      +
    • If Default is selected, the Patron Status workform opens to the Items Out view.
    • +
    • If a specific view is selected, the Patron Status workform always opens to the selected view.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Certain situations take precedence over the default setting or your selection. For example, when the Patron Blocks dialog box appears at circulation and the staff member selects an option to resolve a block, the Patron Status workform opens to the appropriate view regardless of the profile setting. For example, if the block is Patron owes money, the Patron Status workform - Account view opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Setting_Preferred_Workform_Views.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Setting_Preferred_Workform_Views.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d49f0569 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/PDworkforms/Setting_Preferred_Workform_Views.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Preferred Workform Views + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Preferred Workform Views

    +

    You can set the Bibliographic Record workform, Item Record workform and Patron Status workform to open to specific views, using Staff Client profiles available at the system, library, branch, workstation, and staff member levels. Setting them at the staff member level can accommodate the workflows of specific staff members. For example, a cataloger may want the Item Record workform to open to the cataloging view every time she opens the workform, regardless of whether the workform is opened to create a new record or an existing item record is opened from a Find Tool results list.

    +

    To set preferences for Leap workforms, use the Web App staff client profiles. See Staff Client - Web App Profiles.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/Polaris_Permission_Groups_-_Default_Permissions_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/Polaris_Permission_Groups_-_Default_Permissions_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84300978 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Administration/Polaris_Permission_Groups_-_Default_Permissions_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,875 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference

    +

    The following table lists the permissions initially assigned to the default permission groups. The permissions are granted for all organizations in your Polaris installation. You can change any of the permissions for the default groups. For more information about working with permissions and groups, see Granting Permissions.

    +

    Note: +
    The default permission groups are offered as a convenient way to manage permissions, but they do not include all possible permissions, and they are not updated with new permissions when you install new releases of Polaris. If you use the Polaris default groups, be sure to add the appropriate permissions to the groups.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Permission Group NamePermission TypeInitial Permissions
    +

    Administrator
    Cannot be deleted. Membership in this group should be limited to Polaris administrators.

    +
    +

    (All)

    +
    +

    (All permissions at all organizations)

    +
    +

    Polaris Circulation Clerk -
    Basic front desk tasks.

    +
    +

    Access circulation control

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Access patron services

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Access hold request manager

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Access reports and notices

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Fines: waive fines at circ

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Modify due date and time

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Modify hold queues

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Patron Registration

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Override blocks to delete

    +
    +

    Patron Status

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Access notice history

    +

    • Access patron account

    +

    • Access patron account: transaction summary

    +

    • Create/delete patron blocks

    +

    • Display associations

    +

    • Display claimed items

    +

    • Display hold request list

    +

    • Display items checked-out

    +

    • Display notes

    +

    • Display patron blocks

    +

    • Display reader services

    +

    • Modify patron account

    +
    +

    Renew items

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Polaris Serials Clerk -
    Receive and process serials.

    +
    +

    Access serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Check-in

    +

    • Uncheck-in

    +
    +

    Create a bib record from Acquisitions and Serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Polaris Serials Manager -
    Set up serials and subscriptions, as well as do all tasks of the Polaris Serials Clerk.

    +
    +

    Access serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Check-in

    +

    • Uncheck-in

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Supplier

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Create a bib record from Acquisitions and Serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Polaris Ordering Staff -
    Create purchase orders.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Create a bib from Acquisitions and Serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Fiscal Years

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Funds

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Purchase Orders

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Print purchase orders

    +

    • Print workslips

    +
    +

    Selection Lists

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Suppliers

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Polaris Invoicing Staff -
    Receive shipments from vendors.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Create a bib from Acquisitions and Serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Fiscal Years

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Funds

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Invoices

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Pay, Undo payment, Credit

    +

    • Print vouchers

    +
    +

    Purchase Orders

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Modify

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Part

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Modify

    +
    +

    Suppliers

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Polaris Acquisitions Collection Development -
    Request the purchase of material using selection lists.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Selection Lists

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Selection list line item segments

    +
    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Funds

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Polaris Acquisitions Manager -
    Authorize purchase order release and payment of invoices, and do maintenance on all acquisitions records.

    +
    +

    Access acquisitions

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Create a bib from Acquisitions and Serials

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Fiscal Years

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Funds

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Transfer money between funds

    +
    +

    Invoices

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Adjust

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Print vouchers

    +

    • Pay, Undo payment, Credit

    +
    +

    Purchase Orders

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Print purchase orders

    +

    • Print workslips

    +

    • Release, receive, cancel, close PO

    +

    • Release order exceeding fund encumbrance limits

    +

    • Release order resulting in negative free balance

    +

    • Send electronic purchase orders

    +
    +

    Selection list line item segments

    +
    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Selection Lists

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +

    • Approve/Reject

    +
    +

    Suppliers

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Polaris Bib Full Cataloger -
    Original cataloging.

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Access item record bulk change

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Authority records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +
    +

    Authority templates

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +
    +

    Bibliographic templates

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Create a bib record from the item or item template

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Import bibliographic, item, and authority records

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Item records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +

    • Modify header

    +

    • Modify cataloging view

    +

    • Modify source and acquisitions view

    +

    • Modify reserves view

    +
    +

    Item templates

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ authority templates

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ bibliographic templates

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ item templates

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Polaris Bib Copy Cataloger

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +
    +

    Bibliographic templates

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Item records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +

    • Modify cataloging view

    +

    • Modify header

    +

    • Modify history view

    +

    • Modify reserves view

    +

    • Modify source and acquisition view

    +
    +

    Polaris Item Cataloger -
    Process new items.

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Item records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Bulk change

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +

    • Modify cataloging view

    +

    • Modify header

    +

    • Modify history view

    +

    • Modify reserves view

    +

    • Modify source and acquisition view

    +
    +

    Item templates

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Polaris Authority Control Cataloger-
    Maintain authority control for the catalog database.

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem

    +
    +

    • Allow

    +
    +

    Authority records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +

    • Create

    +

    • Modify

    +

    • Delete/Undelete

    +
    +

    Authority templates

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    • Access

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Cataloging_Bound-With_Materials.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Cataloging_Bound-With_Materials.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22fd9965 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Cataloging_Bound-With_Materials.htm @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + + + Cataloging Bound-With Materials + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Bound-With Materials

    +

    When cataloging pamphlets or other materials that have individual titles and individual bibliographic records, but are bound together in physical volumes, libraries can group bibliographic records together by creating special linking entry fields. Although these linking entry fields are not stored in MARC tags in the host and constituent bibliographic records, they are used to link the records, they are searchable and browsable, and they are exported as 773/774 tags.

    +

    The bound-with feature is designed and optimized for research materials where:

    +
      +
    • the holding library owns a single copy of each title in the bound-with volume;
    • +
    • each title in the bound-with volume has a separate bibliographic record;
    • +
    • and the bound-with volume is unique within the collection and can be represented by one and only one item record.
    • +
    +

    Bound-with groups are not intended to be used for non-unique materials that are circulated together but are likely to require multiple item records (for example, circulating multiple ebook tablets, each with multiple non-unique titles loaded onto them) or for materials that are circulated together but do not have separate bibliographic records for each of the parts (for example, kits or book club sets).

    +

    The bound-with group functionality is available to all Polaris customers and does not require a Polaris license.

    +

    In Polaris, a “bound with” group is not a separate object like a record set; rather, it represents a conceptual relationship among groups of bibliographic records that are defined by their role in the group. In a bound-with group, a single bibliographic record acts as the “host” record representing the title of the bound volume, and one or more bibliographic records act as “constituent” records representing the titles bound together in the volume. A single bar-coded item record represents the physical bound volume; the constituent records do not have linked item records.

    +

    Users create bound-with groups with existing final bibliographic records, and the linking between these existing records establishes the role each linked record plays in the bound-with group: host or constituent. When the user starts with a bibliographic record and creates a constituent link, the starting record becomes the single host in the bound-with group.

    +

    Conversely, when the user starts with a bibliographic record and creates a host link, the starting record becomes one of the constituent records in the bound-with group. Establishing the links also inserts the appropriate linking entries into the bibliographic records.

    +

    Any 773/774 or 787 tags already in the existing bibs are not used to establish the new linking entry fields.

    +

    See also

    + +

    Host Bibliographic Records

    +

    Each bound-with group has a single host bibliographic record with the following characteristics:

    +
      +
    • A MARC record for the overall title representing the bound volume. If a bibliographic record already exists for the bound volume, the user identifies it as the host record. If the bound volume does not have an existing bibliographic record, one must be created. Alternatively, the record for one of the constituent titles can be used; however, this record may be too specific for use as a host record.
    • +
    • A host bibliographic record cannot be a constituent record of another host.
    • +
    • After the bound-with group is created, the Host record check box is checked in the Bibliographic Record workform. This is a read-only field.
    • +
    • In the PAC displays, the host title appears as a link in the display of the constituent records.
    • +
    • The host bibliographic record is linked to a single item record that represents the physical bound volume and is displayed in the Item Record workform with a barcode and call number.
    • +
    • The circulation status of the host carries down to the constituent units.
    • +
    • The Bound With view of the Bibliographic Record workform displays the links to the constituent records.
    • +
    +

    Host Bibliographic Record’s Bound-With View

    +

    To go to the Bound-with Group view of the Bibliographic Record workform, select View > Bound-with or select boundwithicon.gif. The host bibliographic record displays links to the constituent records. The constituent links are displayed in the order in which the constituent links were added.

    +

    If you add constituent records from a record set, they are added in bibliographic record control number order. If you select the bibliographic records from a list, such as the Find Tool results, they are added in the order in which they appear in the list. You can select a sorting option in the Find Tool, or click on a column header to sort the list.

    +

    For each constituent link listed in the Bound-With view, the following fields are displayed:

    +
      +
    • Author - The PrimaryDisplayAuthor with all tags and subfields that were selected for inclusion
    • +
    • Title - The PrimaryDisplayTitle with all tags and subfields that were selected for inclusion
    • +
    • Published - The publication date from the 008/07-10 positions
    • +
    +

    + biblinkview.gif 

    +

    Constituent Bibliographic Records

    +

    The constituent bibliographic records in a bound-with group have the following characteristics:

    +
      +
    • A MARC record for the individual title representing the constituent part.
    • +
    • No item record is linked to the individual title; the host item record is used. Constituent bibliographic records cannot be linked to final item records. However, constituent call numbers that appear in MARC tags can be searched and displayed in the PAC.
    • +
    • A constituent bibliographic record cannot be a constituent of more than one host.
    • +
    • After the bound-with group is created, the Constituent record check box is checked in the Bibliographic Record workform. This is a read-only field.
    • +
    • In the PAC displays, the constituent title appears as a link in the display of the host record.
    • +
    • The circulation status of the host carries down to the constituent units.
    • +
    • The Bound-With Group view of the Bibliographic Record workform displays the link to the host record.
    • +
    +

    Constituent Bibliographic Record’s Bound-With View

    +

    A single host link is generated from the following fields in the linked host record:

    +
      +
    • Author - The PrimaryDisplayAuthor with all tags and subfields that were selected for inclusion.
    • +
    • Title - The PrimaryDisplayTitle with all tags and subfields that were selected for inclusion.
    • +
    • Published - The publication date from the 008/07-10 positions.
    • +
    +

    Users can browse and search the host and constituent links according to the library’s indexing rules for the 773/774 tags.

    +

    + bibhostlink.gif 

    +

    Finding Bound-With Bibliographic Records in the Staff Client

    +

    Use the Limit by Bound-with host/constituent option in the Polaris Find Tool to find bibliographic records that are part of a bound-with group. When the Bound-with host/constituent option is selected, you can select All to find all bibliographic records that are part of a bound-with group; Host to find bibliographic records that act as the host record in a bound-with group; or Constituent to find bibliographic records that act as constituent records in a bound-with group.

    +

    From the right-click menu, select Links > Host record or Links > Constituent records to see the host record or the constituent records.

    +

    Preventing Multiple Host Item Records

    +

    A host bibliographic record may have no more than one linked final item record, which contains the call number for the physical volume. For host bibliographic records, the following functions prevent multiple items from being created:

    +
      +
    • The New Item Record Options dialog box does not allow a quantity greater than 1. If the user enters a quantity greater than 1, the following message appears: Host records can have no more than 1 linked item record with a record status of Final.
    • +
    • The import process does not replace an existing host bibliographic record with an incoming record if the resulting record would have more than one item attached.
    • +
    • The bibliographic control number field on an existing final item record cannot be changed to that of a host bib if that host already has a linked item.
    • +
    • The Item Bulk Change process does not change the bib control number to that of a host bib if that host already has a linked item. If the host bib has no items attached to it, the first item in the bulk change list is changed, but the remainder of the items are not changed.
    • +
    +

    Displaying Constituent Call Numbers

    +

    Since constituent records represent titles that cannot be circulated outside of the volume in which they are bound, they cannot be linked to final item records. However, if call numbers for the constituent items already appear in MARC tags in the constituent bibliographic records, your library can work with your Polaris Site Manager to enable constituent call numbers to be displayed in PAC search results and availability displays. The Polaris Site Manager enters the tag and subfields containing the constituent call numbers and into two tables that are not visible in the Polaris staff client.

    +

    One table, BibIndexParams, associates the constituent call number tag with a new bib index key. Another table, BrowseSubfields, specifies the subfields to use in building the constituent call number display. If multiple tags have been designated to carry the constituent call numbers, the BibIndexParams table specifies the order of precedence in which the tags will be checked for the call number.

    +

    Note:
    To avoid re-indexing, your library and site manager should work together to set up entries in these tables before you create any bound-with groups.

    +

    Modifying, Deleting, Importing, and Exporting Bound-With Bibs

    +

    Note:
    Transactions are recorded when host and constituent records are created and deleted.

    +
      +
    • Modifying a constituent record - If you change a constituent record while the host record is open, the changes are not displayed on the host record’s bibliographic record workform until the host record is closed and reopened.
    • +
    • Changing the order of constituent links - To change the order of constituent links displayed on the host record, you must delete the links and add them again in the order you want them to appear.
    • +
    • Copying a host or constituent record - If you copy a bibliographic record that is part of a bound-with group, none of the bound-with links are copied.
    • +
    • Changing the author, title, and publication date fields - Any changes to the linking entry bibliographic data in a host or constituent record are reflected in the records within the bound-with group. For example, a change to the 245$a in a host record automatically updates the host entries for all constituent records.
    • +
    • Replacing a bibliographic record - During online save and importing, any host or constituent links on the replaced record are copied to the replacing record. However, certain restrictions may prevent bibliographic records from replacing existing host or constituent bibliographic records. (For example, a record with linked items cannot replace a constituent record, because constituent records cannot have items attached.) When restrictions are encountered, the replacement does not occur. Instead, a message appears, or in the case of an import, the incoming record is saved provisionally and a message appears in the import report.
    • +
    • Deleting bound-with links - When you delete a host link from a constituent bibliographic record, the link to the host record is deleted from the constituent record, and the reciprocal constituent link is deleted from the host record. If the constituent record from which you deleted the host link is the last constituent link on the host record, the Host check box is unchecked on the host bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Deleting a bibliographic record from a bound-with group - When a bibliographic record is deleted, and it belongs to a bound-with group, the following occurs:
      • If the deleted bibliographic record is a host record, the bound-with group no longer exists; constituent links on the host record are removed and host links are removed from constituent records.
      • If the deleted bibliographic record is a constituent record, it is removed from the bound-with group; the host link is removed from the deleted record, and the constituent link is removed from the host bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Exporting records in a bound-with group - Bibliographic records that are part of a bound-with group are exported as follows:
      • The host and constituent links are converted to traditional MARC 773/774 tags (first indicator = 0, second indicator=blank).
      • All subfields specified in the library’s PrimaryDisplayAuthor and PrimaryDisplayTitle tables are included.
      • Author subfields are concatenated into a single $a subfield with the internal punctuation retained.
      • Title subfields are concatenated into a single $t subfield with the internal punctuation retained. The non-filing indicators (if any) in the title tag of the reciprocal record are honored; the appropriate number of characters are stripped from the $t subfield in the exported tag.
      • The publication information from the 260 or 264 tag is in subfield $d in the exported tag.
      • The system control number of the related record is carried in the $w of the exported tag, preceded by the MARC code (the system-level cataloging profile Control number identifier string (003), enclosed in parentheses), for the agency to which the control number applies. If there is no value entered in the cataloging profile, the organization abbreviation for organizationID=1 is used. (The MARC code is not included in records exported via the API.)
      • In Export Express, if you are exporting host records and select the option to include embedded holdings tags (e.g. 852), embedded holdings tags are built from the host item records, according to the usual profile settings in Export Express. For constituent records, the call number is taken from the designated constituent call number tag and all other holdings fields are taken from the host record. If the constituent bibliographic record does not contain a constituent call number tag, the call number fields are taken from the host record.
      • In the Polaris Database Export Utility (Utilities, Exporting), if you are exporting host records and check Include current item holdings information, the embedded holdings tags are built from the host item records, according to the usual export utility settings. For constituent records, the call number is taken from the designated constituent call number tag and all other holdings fields are taken from the host item record.
      • When records are exported via the Polaris API (PAPI) or a Z39.50 remote search, the holding information is included for both host and constituent records.
    • +
    • +

      Changing the item record’s call number - If you change the call number for the host item record, the following message appears: Attention: This item record is linked to a host bibliographic record. You may also need to change the call numbers (if any) on linked constituent bib records. The message also appears on the Bulk Change report if you change the call number for a host item during bib bulk change.
      If you attempt to create an item record from a constituent bibliographic record, or change an existing item record’s bibliographic control number to that of a constituent bib, a message informs you that constituent bibliographic records cannot have final item records linked to them.

      +
    • +
    • Saving item templates with a bound-with record’s control number - If you attempt to save an item template with a bibliographic record control number for a record that is a either a host or constituent record in a bound-with group, the template will not be saved, and the following message appears: Bibliographic record <control number> is in a bound-with group; it cannot be added to an item template. If the item template already exists with a bibliographic control number, and you subsequently designate the bib as a member of a bound-with group, the bib ID is removed from the item template, and a warning message informs you of the bib ID removal.
    • +
    +

    Indexing for Bound-With Groups

    +

    Linking entries are indexed according to the rules for 773/774 tags. If the library chooses not to index traditional 773/774 MARC tags, the bound-with host and constituent links are not indexed. If the linking entries are indexed, the link to the reciprocal record is followed and the primary author/title tags in the reciprocal record are indexed, following the indexing rules for these tags.

    +

    Bibliographic Records With No Linked Items Report

    +

    The Bibliographic Records With No Linked Items report indicates if the bibliographic record has no linked items because it is a constituent of a bound-with group. If a title listed on the Bibliographic Records With No Linked Items report is a constituent record, the following note appears next to the Bibliographic Record ID: This record is a constituent in a Bound-With Group.

    +

    Multiple Copies of the Same Constituent Title

    +

    If the library has multiple copies of a title with some copies bound in volumes with other titles and others bound separately, Innovative Interfaces recommends that the library create separate bibliographic records for each instance.

    +

    Bibs That Cannot Be Members of a Bound-With Group

    +

    The following types of bibliographic records cannot be part of a bound-with group:

    + +

    Bound-With Workflow

    +

    Follow this general workflow to implement bound-with cataloging in Polaris:

    +

    See also: Create a bound-with group.

    +
      +
    • Identify the bibliographic records for the bound-with volume. Bibliographic records cannot be host or constituent records if they are provisional, deleted, an ILL bib, are linked to a Polaris Acquisitions or Serials, or contain resource entities for an integrated ebook vendor.
    • +
    • Identify the bibliographic record that will serve as the host record.
      • If a bibliographic record already represents the physical volume, that record should be the host record.
      • If no bibliographic record represents the physical volume, create the bibliographic record for the volume.
      • If a bibliographic record already represents a title within the physical volume, such as the first title in the bound volume, you can designate this record as the host record. However, since this title is within the bound volume, it may be too specific for a host record.
    • +
    • Add a single item record to the record that will be the host record. If a single item record is already linked to the bibliographic record, no action is necessary. If multiple item records are linked, all but one must be deleted because a host record can only have one linked item record representing the physical bound volume.
    • +
    • Identify the bibliographic records that will become the constituent records, and (optionally) place them in a record set.
      • Delete any linked items from bibliographic records that will become the constituent records because constituent bibliographic records cannot have item records linked to them. However, if call numbers for the constituent items already appear in MARC tags in the constituent bibliographic records, your Polaris Site Manager can enable the display of these call numbers in availability displays and call number browsing.
    • +
    • Open the bibliographic record identified as the host record, select Tools, Create Constituent Links and select the constituent records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Create_a_bound-with_group.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Create_a_bound-with_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1bfd30d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Create_a_bound-with_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a bound-with group + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Bound-With Group

    +

    To create a bound-with group:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record workform for a bibliographic record that will be identified as the host or constituent record.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools and select one of the following options:
      • If the open record represents the bound volume, select Create constituent link.
      • If the open record represents a constituent title in the bound volume, select Create host link.
    4. +
    +

    The Find Tool opens with Bibliographic Records selected in the Object box. If you are creating constituent links, you can also select Record sets in the Object box.

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the bibliographic record that will be the host or constituent record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you selected Create constituent link, you can select multiple bibliographic records or a record set. If you select a record set, constituent links are created for all the records in the record set. If you selected Create host link, you can select only a single bibliographic record.

    +

    Note:
    A bound-with group can have a maximum of 100 constituent records. If you select more constituent records than can be added to the group, a message informs you that the limit will be exceeded.

    +

    If you select a record that cannot be linked, a message informs you why it cannot be part of the bound-with group.

    +

    Example:
    Bibliographic record <control number> cannot be selected as a constituent record because it has an <item record/acquisitions record> linked to it.  +

    +

    When the linking is successful, the following occurs:

    +
      +
    • A confirmation message displays: Links created. Click the Bound-with view of the bibliographic record to see the linking entries.
    • +
    • If you selected Create constituent link in the open bibliographic record, the open record is designated as the host of the bound-with group, the linked record is designated as a constituent of the bound-with group, and the appropriate linking entries are inserted into the host bibliographic record.
    • +
    • If you selected Create host link in the open bibliographic record, the open bibliographic record is designated as a constituent record of the bound-with group, the linked record is designated as the host of the bound-with group, and the appropriate linking entries are inserted into the host bibliographic record.
    • +
    +

    You can go to the linked records by selecting Links > Host record or Constituent records on the Bibliographic Record workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Finding_Cataloging_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Finding_Cataloging_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17e11485 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Finding_Cataloging_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,201 @@ + + + + + + + + Finding Cataloging Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Finding Cataloging Records

    +

    You can use the Polaris Find Tool to search your library’s catalog, catalogs of other libraries using Polaris, catalogs of remote libraries that do not use Polaris, and other remote databases. When you search for bibliographic records in languages other than English, you can enter diacritics and special characters. If you have a subscription to ZMARC, you can also search the ZMARC records directly from Polaris. MARC records from these outside sources can be previewed and then saved to the Polaris database.

    +

    Important:
    Before you can search remote databases from the Polaris Find Tool, your Polaris administrator must set up the remote databases as targets.

    +

    When you do a search, the records are displayed in the results list, or if you selected Count Only, a count of the matching records is displayed. You can select a Sort by option to sort the records so that they display in a specified order. From the results list, you can open the record in the appropriate workform, or you can right-click the record and perform other actions from the context menu. The results list can be sorted and printed to create a quick report. You can also send the records to a record set from the Find Tool, with or without displaying them in the results list. For basic information about using the Find Tool, see Finding Polaris Records.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Searching Tips

    +

    You can reduce typing by using an implicitly truncated search. For example, a title search for “bulletin” could be done using the following string: bulle. You have the option to use the wild card character * at the beginning and end of a search string. For example, an author search for Isaac Asimov could be done by inputting: Asimov*. The results would contain all instances of Asimov as an author in the catalog.

    +

    Note:
    When you do a phrase or keyword search for a title that includes an ampersand (&), the search treats the ampersand the same as the word “and”. The ampersand and the word “and” are not interchangeable for exact match or browse searches.

    +

    Ignore Initial Articles in Titles

    +

    If the Use Initial Articles check box is checked, the initial article in a title is ignored or “stripped out” if that article is defined in the Initial Articles table in Polaris Administration. You can clear the Use Initial Articles Table check box to help find records where the non-filing indicators are set improperly.

    +

    The Use Initial Articles check box is active only when the search type is Exact match (either implicitly or explicitly truncated), and you are searching for the following records:

    +
      +
    • +

      Authority Records (Heading, Tracing/Reference) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Bibliographic Records (Title and Series) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Serials Check In Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Claims (Title) (both for Acquisitions and Serial versions) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Course Reserve Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hold Requests (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      ILL Requests (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Invoice Line Items (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Issue Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item Records (Title and Series) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Part Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Purchase Order Line Items (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Reserve Item Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Route Lists (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Selection List Line Items (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Serial Holdings Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Subscription Records (Title) +

      +
    • +
    +

    Shortcut Keys to Find Bibliographic and Item Records

    +

    From anywhere in the Polaris application, you can use the following shortcut keys to bring up the Find Tool to search for cataloging records.

    +
      +
    • +

      Bibliographic Records - F12

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item Records - Ctrl+Alt+F9 

      +
    • +
    +

    For a list of other shortcut keys, see Cataloging Shortcut Keys.

    +

    Viewing Serial Item Records in the Polaris Find Tool

    +

    When you search for serial item records, you may need to expand the Title column in the Polaris Find Tool results list to see the serial item’s designation because it is appended to the title. You can drag the bottom right corner of the window, then drag the Title column border right to expand it. The serial item’s designation is displayed at the end of the title.

    +

    + seritems.gif 

    +

    Access Points for Cataloging Records

    +

    Tip:
    Searching a remote database for bibliographic records requires the access point to have a standard Bib-1 Use Attribute, which are not defined for some access points, such as UPC. If you are searching a remote database for bibliographic records by UPC, select the access point Standard system number, and enter the UPC barcode number.

    +

    The Search by box on the Find Tool contains index criteria specific to the type of record you want to find. The available search types depend on what is selected in the By box. You can narrow your search using a Limit By option and entering a limit by value.

    +

    You can customize the Find Tool with your preference for searching by setting up your search for a specific type of record, and then selecting Options > Save as User Default. See Customize the Find Tool by user.

    +

    Searching for Items or Bib Records by RFID Tag

    +

    The option to search by RFID tag is located under the Tools menu. When RFID Read Tag is selected, the Search by selection is set to Barcode automatically. You can also search for the linked bibliographic record by scanning the RFID tag. Select Tools, RFID Read Tag and scan the tag using the RFID reader. The item record is displayed in the Find Tool results.

    +

    Sorting the Results List

    +

    You can select a Sort by option to sort the results before they are displayed. The Sort by options depend on the type of record selected. For example, you could search for bibliographic records by subject and sort by Title, then Author, then Type of Material. Sorting options can also be saved as a user default.

    +

    Automatic Suggestions for Keyword & Phrase Searches

    +

    As you type a keyword or phrase for a bibliographic, item, or authority record, suggested titles or headings appear if the Auto-suggest feature enabled Cataloging parameter is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. Select one of the suggestions to see the matching records. You can turn off automatic suggestions by clicking on Hide Suggestions. To show suggestions when they are hidden, click resumesug.gif on the right side of the text entry box.

    +

    Linking Between Records

    +

    Certain types of cataloging records are linked in Polaris. For example, item records are always linked to a bibliographic record. You can easily navigate from a record to its linked records by selecting Links from a workform menu, or from the right-click menu in a list of records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Getting_Started_in_Cataloging.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Getting_Started_in_Cataloging.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbb47e4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/Getting_Started_in_Cataloging.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Getting Started in Cataloging + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Getting Started in Cataloging

    +

    Polaris Cataloging provides options for adding, modifying, deleting, and managing cataloging records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Configuring_Existing_Label_Types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Configuring_Existing_Label_Types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5eb9934f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Configuring_Existing_Label_Types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + Configuring Existing Label Types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring Existing Label Types

    +

    Use the Label Manager to configure existing label types for spine, pocket, and serial labels, and to specify the content that you want to appear on them. You can also set up your own custom labels in Label Manager. See Creating Custom Labels. After labels are set up and enabled in the Label Manager, they are available to be printed from the following areas in Polaris:

    +
      +
    • Item Record
    • +
    • New Item Record Options
    • +
    • Serial Issue
    • +
    • Standing Order Part
    • +
    • Subscription Check In
    • +
    • Standing Order Part Check In
    • +
    +

    Labels can be printed as you catalog each item, or you can catalog multiple items and print labels in batch. If the profile Labels: Automatically generate label for each item created is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, a label is generated automatically when you create and save a new item record.

    +

    To print labels, set up your printing preferences on the computer where you are doing the cataloging or serials processing. The label printer must be set up in Microsoft Windows, and it must be connected to the workstation or the same local area network as the workstation.

    +

    By default, Polaris uses the Andale Mono font, which is available at no cost from the Microsoft Web site. The default size is 12 points. On an SL4 label sheet, this font allows eight characters and spaces per line (total of eight lines) on the spine label and 28 characters per line on the pocket labels (total of four lines). The label stock size and label size can be changed but you cannot change the number of labels per page or per label group for the system-defined label types (Spine, SL4, SL6, SLB and Serials). See Standard Label Types.

    +

    After you generate your labels, you can preview them in the Label Manager and use the right-click context menu to edit this particular page of labels. You can copy, paste, delete, insert text, change the font, or select diacritics to insert into the labels.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Standard Label Types

    +

    All the standard label types have three sections of content. Label sets contain different label styles. You can configure existing label types, see Set up existing label types.

    +

    Spine sheets - Spine label sheets contain 50 labels per sheet. Each label is 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) wide and 1 inch (2.54 cm) high. They can have five text lines of 11 characters each.

    +

    SLB sheets - SLB label sheets contain 12 label sets per sheet. Each label set has a spine label and a pocket label. Polaris SLB spine labels have nine text lines of eight characters each. Polaris SLB pocket labels have nine text lines of 28 characters each.

    +

    + PDKlabels00239.jpg 

    +

    Serial sheets - Serial label sheets contain 20 labels per sheet. Serial labels are 4 inches (10 cm) wide and 1 inch (2.54 cm) high. They have five text lines of 34 characters each.

    +

    SL4 sheets - SL4 label sheets contain 12 label sets per sheet. Polaris creates SL4 spine labels with nine text lines of eight characters each. The pocket labels have four text lines of 28 characters each.

    +

    + PDKlabels00242.jpg 

    +

    SL6 sheets - SL6 label sheets contain eight label sets per sheet. Polaris SL6 spine labels have nine text lines of seven characters each. The other labels in the set have six text lines of 28 characters each.

    +

    + PDKlabels00245.jpg 

    +

    Computype Spine Labels

    +

    The following types of labels are offered by Computype and supported by the Polaris Label Manager. You cannot change Computype labels in Label Manager.

    +
      +
    • Single Label - 1 inch wide and 1.5 inches high
    • +
    • Single Label - 1.125 inches wide and 1.25 inches high
    • +
    • 2 Label Set
    • +
    • Label 1 - 0.875 inches wide and 1.375 inches high
    • +
    • Label 2 - 2.875 inches wide and 1.375 inches high
    • +
    • 3 Label Set
    • +
    • Label 1 - 0.9 inches wide and 1.5625 inches high
    • +
    • Label 2 - 2.9 inches wide and .8125 inches high
    • +
    • Label 3 - 2.9 inched wide and .8125 inches high
    • +
    +

    Label Content

    +

    The label may include information from the item record, the serial issue/part record, or the linked bibliographic record. See Define the label content.

    +
      +
    • Call Number - If Library of Congress is selected in the shelving scheme on the Item Record workform, each part of the call number will be printed on a separate line on the label. If Dewey Decimal is the shelving scheme, all parts of the call number are printed on different lines based on the Carriage return after Dewey decimal and Prime mark to generate carriage return. For all other shelving schemes, a new line is printed for each part of the call number.
    • +
    • Author - The author information comes from the 1xx tag and subfields in the bibliographic record linked to the item record. If there is no 1xx field, the space remains blank on the label. The information is printed in the same order as the subfields in the MARC 21 record. The text wraps within this section, but there is a break before the bottom section.
    • +
    • Title - The title information comes from the 245 tag and subfields in the bibliographic record linked to the item record. The information is printed in the same order as the subfields in the MARC21 record.
    • +
    • Collection - The label content can include the collection or the collection abbreviation from the item record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Creating_Custom_Labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Creating_Custom_Labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e39bc0f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Creating_Custom_Labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Custom Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Custom Labels

    +

    If the available label types do not meet your library’s needs, you can set up customized labels in Label Manager. Once the custom labels are defined, they are available in the drop-down list from the Label Manager and from the other areas where labels can be printed. Custom labels can be configured in the Label Configuration dialog box. When you close and reopen Label Manager, the custom label is retained, but the label displayed in the Label Manager window is the default label defined in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To define a custom label type:

    +
      +
    1. From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Label Manager.
    2. +
    +

    The Label Manager window appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Design Custom Label.
    2. +
    +

    The Customize Label dialog box appears.

    +

    Tip:
    The limit for the label type name is 80 characters. The name should identify the library and the label stock, for example: OCPL Pocket.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the label in the Label Type box.
    2. +
    3. Select the organization that owns the label in the Owner box.
    4. +
    5. Set the page dimensions, margins, and text alignment as follows:
    6. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    The page size must be larger than the label size.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Open button in the Page Size row, or tab to the Open button and press Enter.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Page Details dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Set the page dimensions by typing numeric values in the Width and Height boxes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The measurements are in .Net units (1 unit = 1/100 inch).

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Set the page margins by typing numeric values in the Top Margin and Left Margin boxes.
    2. +
    3. Select the text alignment in the Text Alignment box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to close the Page Details dialog box.
    6. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Set the label’s dimensions, spacing, and content as follows:
      1. Click the Open button in the Label Size & Content row, or tab to the Open button and press Enter.
    2. +
    +

    The Label Details dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Set the label’s dimensions by typing numeric values in the Width and Height boxes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    The measurements are in .Net units (1 unit = 1/100 inch).

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Set the amount of spacing between labels by typing numeric values in the Vertical Spacing and Horizontal Spacing boxes.
    2. +
    3. Set the indent from the left edge of the label by typing numeric values in the Indent box.
    4. +
    5. Select the content type for the labels in the Content box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The content types are set in the Label Configuration dialog box. See Define the label content.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close the Page Details dialog box and return to the Customize Label dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Set the font for the custom labels as follows:
      1. Click the Open button in the Label Font row, or tab to the Open button and press Enter.
    2. +
    +

    The Font dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Choose the font, font style, point size, and any other characteristics, and click OK to return to the Customize Label dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the custom label you created.
    2. +
    +

    The custom label appears in the Label menu in Label Manager and in the list of enabled label types in the Label Configuration dialog box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Define_the_label_content.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Define_the_label_content.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fff88e8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Define_the_label_content.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Define the label content + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define the Label Content

    +

    To set up label content types:

    +

    Note:
    To access the Label Configuration dialog box, select Profiles, Staff Client, Labels: Options.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Content tab on the Label Configuration dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Content tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of label for which you want to define the content in the Content type box.
    2. +
    3. To add a new label content type, click newlabeltypeicon.gif and type a name for the new content type in the Add new content type box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot create a new label content type at the workstation level in Polaris Administration, but you can assign existing content to the label type.

    +

    Tip:
    To remove fields from the label, select the fields in the Top Section, Middle Section, or Bottom Section box, and click leftarrowbtn.gif.

    +
      +
    1. Select the fields to include in the label from the Options list, and click rightarrowbtn.gif next to the Top Section, Middle Section, or Bottom Section box. The available selections depend on the content type you selected.
    2. +
    +

    The text wraps within the label section, and breaks separate the sections. To change the position of fields within the sections on the label, select the field, and click the Up or Down button that corresponds to the section. To delete a content type, select it and click deletebtn.gif. You cannot delete the default label content types (Spine, Pocket, or Serial) or content types that are used in a label type.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the label.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Set_up_existing_label_types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Set_up_existing_label_types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9177ffdb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Set_up_existing_label_types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up existing label types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Existing Label Types

    +

    You can set up label types in Polaris Administration or from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. To configure spine, pocket, serial, or custom label types:

    +

    Important:
    If your library uses Computype® printers, you can use only the Computype label types listed in Settings & Content, and none of the settings can be changed for Computype labels. These label types are not enabled at Polaris installation, so your library will need to enable them. Also, be sure to indicate a Computype label type as the default Cataloging label. For the measurements of Computype labels, see Computype Spine Labels.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization or workstation.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Staff Client tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Labels: Options.
    6. +
    +

    The Label Configuration window appears with the Settings tabbed page displayed.

    +

    Tip:
    Navigate between cells using the arrow keys or Tab (to go forward) and Alt+Tab to go back. Expand the dialog box by dragging the bottom right corner. To see more of a column’s content, select the column’s left or right rule in the heading, and drag to expand the column.

    +
      +
    1. On the Settings tab, select the check box in the Enabled column next to the label types you want to make available.
    2. +
    +

    When the label types are enabled, they appear in the Label menu in the Label Manager.

    +

    Tip:
    The page size must be larger than the label size.

    +
      +
    1. Change the page size, margins, or text alignment on the page of labels as follows:
      1. Right-click in the Page Size cell associated with the label type and select Open, or tab to the cell and press Enter.
    2. +
    +

    The Page Details dialog box appears.

    +
    +

    Tip:
    The measurements are in .Net units (1 unit = 1/100 inch).

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Type numeric values in the Width and Height boxes to specify the dimensions of the labels page.
    2. +
    3. Type numeric values in the Top Margin and Left Margin boxes to determine the placement of the first label on the page.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If you prefer using the keyboard, you can tab to the Text Alignment box and type L for left, C for center, or R for right text alignment.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Center, Left, or Right in the Text Alignment box to align the text on the label page.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Label Configuration window.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    The label size must be smaller than the page size.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Change the label size, adjust the spacing, modify the text alignment on the label, or specify the label content as follows:
      1. Right-click in the Label Size and Content cell associated with the label type and select Open, or tab to the cell and press Enter.
    2. +
    +

    The Label Details dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Type numbers for the label’s dimensions in the Width and Height boxes.
    2. +
    3. Type numbers in the Vertical Spacing, Horizontal Spacing, and Indent boxes to specify the white space between the label borders and the text in the label.
    4. +
    5. Select the content type in the Content box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The content type is determined by the selections on the Content tab. For information on specifying content for the label types, see Define the label content.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save the label details.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Modify the font as follows:
      1. Right-click in the Font cell for the label and select Open, or tab to the column, and press Enter in the label row.
    2. +
    +

    The Font dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Font, Font Style, Size, Effects and Script for the text on the label.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your changes and return to the Label Configuration dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Label_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Label_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0cfcfd00 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Label_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Label Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Label Profiles

    +

    Polaris Administration profiles on the Staff Client tab control various default settings for labels, such as whether labels are printed automatically when item records are created. Use the Labels: Options profile to configure existing label types and specify the label content.

    +

    To set profiles for spine, pocket, and serial labels:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Staff Client tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Label Manager open using and select Cataloging Options or Serial Options to specify which type of label appears when you open Label Manager from the Utilities menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    6. +
    +
    +
      +
    • If you select Cataloging Options, the cataloging label displays according to the setting in the Labels: Cataloging label type profile.
    • +
    • If you select Serial Options, the serial label is displayed according to the setting in the Labels: Serial label type profile.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Labels: Automatically generate labels for each item record created. Select Yes to generate labels automatically when items are created, or No if you do not want labels to be generated automatically.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Labels: Automatically generate labels for each SO and SUBS check-in. Select Yes to set labels to be generated automatically when issues or parts are checked in, or No if you do not want labels to be generated automatically.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Labels: Cataloging label type, and select the default label type to be generated when cataloging items.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    The label types must be enabled for them to appear in this list. See Set up existing label types.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Labels: Cataloging print method, and select On Demand > Batch, or Quick Print as the default printing method for cataloging labels.
      • If On Demand is selected, the Label Manager appears when the user requests a label and the user can view the label before printing it.
      • If Batch is selected, the label is generated when the user requests a label, but it is not printed until the user opens Label Manager and selects Print. The Batch option works well for creating sheets of labels for multiple items.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Batch printing is limited to 500 labels at a time.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If Quick Print is selected, the label is printed at the designated printer without opening the Label Manager.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also select Utilities from the Polaris Shortcut Bar and select Label Manager > Tools > Label Settings and Content to open the Label Configuration dialog box.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Setup in the Labels: Options profile to modify existing labels, specify the label content, and create custom labels. The Label Configuration dialog box appears. See Set up existing label types.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This profile is available at the workstation level, but only the Settings tab appears. Both the Settings and Content tabs are available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Labels: Serial label type, and select the default label type for serials issues.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Labels: Serial print method, and select On Demand > Batch, or Quick Print to specify how you want serial labels to print.
      • If On Demand is selected, the Label Manager appears when the user requests a label and the user can view the label before printing it.
      • If Batch is selected, the label is generated when the user requests a label, but it is not printed until the user opens Label Manager and selects Print. The Batch option works well for creating sheets of labels for multiple issues or parts.
    4. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Batch printing is limited to 500 labels at a time.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If Quick Print is selected, the label is printed at the designated printer without opening the Label Manager.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To specify a carriage return in the classification number, do the following:
    2. +
    +

    For Dewey shelving scheme -

    +
    +
      +
    • To force a new line after a decimal in the classification number on spine labels, double-click Spine Labels (Dewey): Carriage return after decimal, and select Yes.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    The prime marks must be inserted with the contents in the Class box on the Item Record workform.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To specify a character that forces a new line in the classification number, double-click Spine Labels (Dewey): Prime mark to generate carriage return, and select one of the following options from the list:
      • Select None to ignore any prime marks.
      • Select Forward Slash / to start a new line wherever this prime mark is placed in the classification number.
      • Select Apostrophe ' to start a new line wherever this prime mark is placed in the classification number.
    • +
    +
    +

    For Library of Congress or other non-Dewey shelving scheme-

    +
    +
      +
    • To force a new line after a space in the classification number, set the Spine Labels (non-Dewey): Carriage return after space profile to Yes.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Up_Labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Up_Labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fff0290 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_Up_Labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Labels

    +

    You set label profiles for Cataloging and Serials labels on the Staff Client tab in Polaris Administration, and you configure, customize, and edit labels using the Label Manager. The Label Manager is available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar under Utilities and from Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    The permissions Label Manager Configuration: Create, Modify, and Delete apply to label type and label content. For example, if you have the Create permission, you can create both label types and label content.

    +

    Recommendations for Label Types and Content

    +

    The available label types are associated with the branch where you are logged on. Make sure the content types and label types are available at the workstation from which you are printing the labels. If your library system does centralized processing, set the label types and content at the system level, and make sure all your branches are using the same label types and content. If your branch does its own processing, make sure the content type and the label type you need are both available at the workstation from which you print the labels.

    +

    When you set up custom labels, use the default label types for guidelines on the label and page sizes. Although you can change the page and label size to any value greater than 0, deviating too far from the standard sizes may produce labels with incomplete text. Use Print Preview to check your custom labels.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_the_Default_Label_Printers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_the_Default_Label_Printers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea5c0c59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PDKlabels/Setting_the_Default_Label_Printers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting the Default Label Printers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting the Default Label Printers

    +

    For each enabled label type, you can set a default label printer in Label Manager. To set a default label printer:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities on the Polaris Shortcut Bar and select Label Manager.
    2. +
    +

    The Label Manager appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Set Default Printers.
    2. +
    +

    The Set Default Printers dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. For each label type that is enabled and appears in the Label Type column, select the default printer in the Printer Name column.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The choices depend on what printers have been installed on the workstation.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the printer selections.
    2. +
    +

    See also:

    +

    Set a default label printer +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKCaroTool/Carousel_Toolkit.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKCaroTool/Carousel_Toolkit.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e07211f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKCaroTool/Carousel_Toolkit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + + Carousel Toolkit + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Carousel Toolkit

    +

    With the Carousel Toolkit, libraries can copy a code "snippet" for a content carousel from the Polaris ILS and paste the code into an external web site to display the content carousel. When users visit the web site and click the content carousel, the search results page displays in PowerPAC (via a deep link). Each branch can have a content carousel that points to its own PAC configuration. Users can click on a title in the carousel to go to the search results page at the branch (or system) connection specified in the Carousel Toolkit dialog box.

    +

    The Carousel Toolkit provides the code for content carousels from a bibliographic record set or from one of the following system-supplied automatic web parts (dashboard elements):

    +
      +
    • Book Sense best seller lists
    • +
    • New Books
    • +
    • New Large Print
    • +
    • New Sound Recordings
    • +
    • New Videos
    • +
    • Most Circulated Titles
    • +
    • On Order Titles
    • +
    +

    The Carousel Toolkit is licensed at the system level; branches that do not want to use the feature can manage access to the feature through permissions. To use the Carousel Toolkit, staff members must be assigned the Access Carousel Toolkit: Allow permission.

    +

    To display cover images in content carousels, enriched data must be set up in Polaris Administration. See Enabling Enriched Data. If cover images are not enabled in Administration, the carousels display the format icons and bibliographic information, but no cover images.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Generating and Copying Content Carousel Code

    +

    To generate and copy the content carousel code for a record set or dashboard element:

    +

    Select Utilities > Carousel Toolkit.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Carousel Toolkit dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    If the record set is modified after it is selected in the carousel toolkit, it can still be selected for the carousel.

    +

    Select one of the following options to create the content carousel:

    +

    Create from record set - Click Find. The Find Tool opens with bibliographic record set selected. Search for and select the record set.

    +

    + +

    +

    Create from Dashboard element - Select a single dashboard element from the list.

    +

    + +

    +

    If you want to change the PAC connection branch where users will go when they click the title in the carousel, select a different branch in the PAC context drop-down list.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    The PAC context box displays the branch for your user login, but you can select another branch or the system. The drop-down list contains the system PAC connection and all branches that are not suppressed in the system-level PAC profile setting Suppress branches.

    +

    After selecting the record set or dashboard element, select one of these options:

    +
    +

    Get iframe code - The iframe code is displayed in the Code box.

    +
    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +
    +

    Get source code - The source code is displayed in the Code box.

    +
    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    To see how the content carousel will look in the web page, click Preview.

    +

    To see the preview, a browser must be installed and accessible on the workstation.

    +

    When the source code or iframe code is displayed in the Code box, click Copy to clipboard.

    +

    Paste the code snippet into the code for a web page.

    +

    The content carousel is displayed in the web page.

    +

    + +

    +

    When a user selects a title in the content carousel, the title is displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC for the branch (or the system) selected in the PAC context box.

    +

    + +

    +

    Placing Multiple Carousels on a Page

    +

    To place multiple carousels on a page:

    +
      +
    1. Generate and copy carousel source code into the HTML document for each carousel that you wish to place on the page.
    2. +
    3. Remove extra <DOC>, <HTML>, <HEAD>, and <BODY> tags. These should only appear in the HTML document once.
    4. +
    5. Rename additional DIV tags and references for each additional carousel after the first. For example, each carousel has a section of code similar to that shown below. For additional carousels 2 and 3, change the highlighted areas to div2 and div3.
    6. +
    +

    + +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKTOMs/Type_of_Material_Codes_TOMs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKTOMs/Type_of_Material_Codes_TOMs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ae282d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKTOMs/Type_of_Material_Codes_TOMs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1951 @@ + + + + + + + + Type of Material Codes (TOMs) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Type of Material Codes (TOMs)

    +

    When you import, copy, or manually create new bibliographic records, Polaris checks the LDR/06, LDR/07, the 006 tag, the 007 tag, and other combinations of codes to determine the record’s primary Type of Material code or TOM. This generates the material type icon in Polaris PowerPAC and enables searching for bibliographic records using the TOM in the staff client, Leap, PowerPAC, and Mobile PAC.

    +

    Tip:
    From the Bibliographic Record workform, select View > PAC or click PACviewbut.gif to see the icon that displays in the PAC.

    +

    If a single bibliographic record contains values indicating more than one material type, only one TOM icon is displayed in Polaris PowerPAC. For example, a single record could contain codes indicating it is both a video recording and a DVD. The primary type of material code (and icon) for that record would be DVD. However, the record could be retrieved in the staff client and Polaris PowerPAC by searching for either of its TOM codes. See Multiple TOMs - Order of Precedence.

    +
    Note: +
    +

    If the bibliographic record’s primary TOM is elr (electronic resource), and it has at least one 856 tag, and there are no item records linked to it, hold requests cannot be placed for that title in the PAC.

    You can opt to suppress request and availability options for all records with a specific primary TOM, or only those with specific primary TOMs that have at least one 856 in the bib record. By default, Electronic resources (elr) and Digital collection (dmc) are selected for suppressing request and availability options. The option Records with an 856 is selected by default except dmc, where All records is selected. You can run the Bibliographic Records With No Format report to identify any bibliographic records in your catalog that do not have a TOM code assigned.
    +

    TOMs and MARC Coding

    +

    Note:
    The (Polaris) note under the format indicates it is a Polaris TOM. Between the columns, Or is implied, except in the case where AND appears. For example, a music CD can be coded with j in LDR/06 OR j in 006/00.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Type of Material TOM

    +
    +

    Icon Displayed in PAC / PAC Preview and Leap

    +

    Note:
    In the Leap UI, TOM icons appear in gray.

    +
    +

    TOM Code

    +
    +

    LDR/06

    +
    +

    LDR/07

    +
    +

    006

    +
    +

    007

    +
    +

    008

    +
    +

    Abstract

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
     formatid39.gif +

    abs

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

    AND

    +

     i

    +
       +

    AND

    +

    /21=d

    +

    AND 

    +

    /24=a

    +

    AND 

    +

    /25=a

    +
    +

    Archival/Mixed Materials

    +
      formatid07.gif   +

    mix

    +
    +

    p

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=p

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Atlas - 3 ways to determine
    (Polaris)

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    atl

    +
    +

    e OR f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /25=e

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    in the same 006 tag:

    +

    /00=e OR f

    +

    /08=e

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    in the same 007 tag:

    +

    /00=a

    +

    AND

    +

    /01=d

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Audio Book

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    + formatid37.gif  +

    abk

    +
    +

    i

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=s

    +
     
    +

    Audio Book on Cassette
    (Polaris)

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    abt

    +
    +

    i

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    in the same 007 tag:

    +

    AND /00=s

    +

    AND /01=s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Audio Book on CD
    (Polaris)

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    abc

    +
    +

    i

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    in the same 007 tag:

    +

    AND /00=s

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /03=f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Blu-ray Disc

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    +    +

    brd

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=v

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /04=s

    +

    AND /05=a

    +

    AND /06=i

    +

    AND /07=z

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /33=v

    +
    +

    Blu-ray+DVD
    (Polaris)

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    bdv

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +

    Two 007s needed.

    +

    One 007 for Blu-ray:

    +

    AND /00=v

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /04=s

    +

    -------------------------

    +

    One for DVD:

    +

    AND /00=v

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /04=v

    +
    +

    AND /33=v

    +
    +

    Book

    +
    + PKTOMs00157.gif  +

    bks

    +
    +

    a OR t

    +
    +

    AND NOT b OR s OR i

    +
    +

    /00= a OR t

    +
    +

    /00=t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Book+Cassette

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    + formatid43.gif  +

    bcs

    +
    +

    i OR a

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=a

    +
    +

    AND /00=s

    +

    AND /01=s

    +

    AND /13=e

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Book+CD

    +

    (Polaris)

    +

    2 ways to determine

    +
    + formatid42.gif  +

    bcd

    +
    +

    i OR j

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=a

    +
    +

    AND in the same 007 tag:

    +

    /00=s

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /03=f

    +
    +

     

    +
    a +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=i OR j

    +
    +

    AND in the same 007 tag:

    +

    /00=s

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /03=f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Book+DVD

    +

    2 ways to determine

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    bkv

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=g

    +
    +

    in the same 007 tag:

    +

    AND /00=v

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /04 = v

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /00=a

    +
    +

    in the same 007 tag:

    +

    AND /00=v

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /04 =v

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Braille - 3 ways to determine

    +
     formatid28.gif +

    brl

    +
    +

    a, c, d, p OR t

    +
      +

    /00=a, c, d, p OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND 

    +

    /23=f

    +
      +

    b OR s

    +
    +

    /00=s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /23=f

    +
    +

    e, f, g, k, OR r

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=e, f, g, k, OR r

    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /29=f

    +
    +

    Cartographic

    +

    Material

    +
    + formatid03.gif  +

    cmt

    +
    +

    e OR f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=e OR f

    +
    +

     

    +
     
    +

    Digital Collection

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    + formatid38.gif  +

    dmc

    +
    +

    m

    +
    +

    AND c

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    DVD

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    + formatid33.gif  +

    dvd

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND in the same 007 tag:

    +

    /00=v

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /04=v

    +
    AND /33=v
    EAudioBook(Polaris) + formatid41.gif  +

    aeb

    +
    +

    i

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /00=m

    +

    /09=h

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    Two 007s needed

    +

    1st 007:

    +

    /00=s

    +

    AND /12=e

    +

    AND /13=d
    ____________

    +

    2nd 007:

    +

    /00=c

    +

    AND /01=r

    +

    AND /05=a

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /23=s Or o

    +

     

    +
    Ebooks + formatid36.gif  +

    ebk

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=m

    +
    +

    /00=c

    +

    AND

    +

    /01=r

    +
    +

    AND /23=o

    +
    +

    Electronic Resources

    +
    + formatid06.gif  +

    elr

    +
    +

    m

    +
    +

    a, d, OR m

    +
    +

    /00=m

    +
    +

    /00=c

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Emagazine

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    emg

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND /21=p

    +

    AND /23=o

    +
    +

    Globe

    +
    + formatid14.gif  +

    glb

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=d

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Kit

    +
    + formatid23.gif  +

    kit

    +
    +

    o

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=o

    +
    +

    /00=o

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Large Print - 3 ways to determine

    +
    + formatid27.gif 

     

    +

    lpt

    +
    +

    a, c, d, p, OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=a, c, d, p, OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /23=d

    +
    +

    lpt

    +
    +

    e, f, g, k OR r

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=e, f, g, k OR r

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND 

    +

    /29=d

    +
    +

    lpt

    +
      +

    b OR s

    +
    +

    /00=s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND 

    +

    /23=d

    +
    +

    Manuscript Cartographic Material

    +
    + formatid12.gif  +

    mcm

    +
    +

    f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Map

    +
    + formatid13.gif  +

    map

    +
      +

     

    +
      +

    /00=a

    +
     
    +

    Manuscript Material

    +
    + formatid15.gif  +

    mss

    +
    +

    d, f, OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=d, f, OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Manuscript Music

    +
    + formatid10.gif  +

    mmu

    +
    +

    d

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=d

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Microform - 4 ways to determine

    +
    + formatid26.gif  +

    mic

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=h

    +
     
      +

    b OR s

    +
    +

    /00=s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND 

    +

    /23=a, b, or c

    +
    +

    a, c, d, p OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=a, c, d, p OR t

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND 

    +

    /23=a, b, OR c

    +
    +

    e, f, g, k OR r

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=e, f, g, k OR r

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /29=a, b, OR c

    +
    Motion Picture + formatid17.gif  +

    mot

    +
      +

     

    +
      +

    /00=m

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Music CD

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    + formatid35.gif  +

    mcd

    +
    +

    j

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    OR

    +

    /00=j

    +
    +

    AND in the same 007 tag:

    +

    /00=s

    +

    AND /01=d

    +

    AND /03=f

    +
    +

     

    +
    Musical Sound Recording + formatid21.gif  +

    msr

    +
    +

    j

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=j

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    Nonmusical Sound Recording + formatid22.gif  +

    nsr

    +
    +

    i

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=i

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    Newspaper + formatid25.gif  +

    new

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

    b OR s

    +
    +

    and /00=s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND

    +

    /21=n

    +
    +

    Periodical

    +
    + formatid24.gif  +

    per

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

    b OR s

    +
    +

    and /00=s

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND 

    +

    /21=p

    +
    +

    Printed or Manuscript Music

    +
    + PKTOMs00165.gif + +

    mus

    +
    +

    c OR d

    +
    +

    +

    +
    +

    /00=c OR d

    +
    +

    /00=q

    +
     
    +

    Printed Music

    +
    +

    Music CD

    +

    (Polaris)

    + formatid09.gif +

     

    +
    +

    pmu

    +
    +

    c

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=c

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Printed Cartographic Material

    +
    + formatid11.gif  +

    pcm

    +
    +

    e

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=e

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Projected Medium

    +
    + formatid16.gif  +

    pgr

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=g

    +
    +

    /00=g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Sound Recording

    +
    + formatid05.gif   +

    rec

    +
    +

    i OR j

    +
    +

    +

    +
    +

    /00=i OR j

    +
    +

    /00=s

    +
    +

    +

    +
    +

    Serial

    +
    + formatid08.gif   +

    ser

    +
      +

    b OR s

    +
    +

    /00=s

    +
      +

     

    +
    +

    Streaming Music

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    stm

    +
    +

    j

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /23=o OR /23=s

    +
    +

    Streaming Video

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    stv

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /29=o OR /29=s

    +
    +

    Two Dimensional Non-projected Graphic

    +
    + formatid19.gif   +

    ngr

    +
    +

    k

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=k

    +
    +

    /00=k

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Three Dimensional Object (Artifact)

    +
    + formatid20.gif   +

    art

    +
    +

    r

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=r

    +
      +

     

    +
    Video Game - Two ways to determine

     

    + +

     

    +
    vgm

     

    m   +

     

    +
    AND/26=g
    +

     

    +
    +

    in the same 006 tag:

    +

    /00=m AND /09=g

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    Videorecording + formatid18.gif   +

    vid

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=v

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Videotape

    +

    (Polaris)

    +
    + formatid34.gif   +

    vcr

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    /00=v AND

    +

    /01=c OR f

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Vinyl
    (Polaris)

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    vyl

    +
    +

    i OR j

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    AND in the same 007 tag:

    +

    /00=s AND

    +

    /01=d AND

    +

    /03= a, b, c, d, OR e

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Visual Material

    +
    + formatid04.gif   +

    vis

    +
    +

    g, k OR r

    +
      +

    /00=g, k OR r

    +
    +

    /00=f OR g,

    +

    OR k, OR m

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Multiple TOMs - Order of Precedence

    +

    For records with more than one TOM, the following order of precedence determines which TOM and icon are displayed. To see which icon will appear in Polaris PowerPAC, select View > PAC from the Bibliographic Record workform.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Order of Precedence +

    +
    +

    Format/Type of Material +

    +
    +

    Code +

    +
    1Blu-Ray+DVDbdv
    2Blu-ray Discbrd
    3Eaudiobookaeb
    4Book+CDbcd
    5Book+Cassettebcs
    6Abstractabs
    7Digital Collectiondmc
    8Video Gamevgm
    9Book+DVDbkv
    10DVDdvd
    11Videotapevcr
    12Streaming Videostv
    13Videorecordingvid
    14Motion Picturemot
    15Projected Mediumpgr
    16Two Dimensional Nonprojected Graphicngr
    17Three Dimensional Object (Artifact)art
    18Visual Materialsvis
    19Music CD mcd
    20Streaming Musicstm
    21Audio Book on CDabc
    22Vinylvyl
    23Audio Book on Cassetteabt
    24Audio Booksabk
    25Musical Sound Recordingmsr
    26Nonmusical Sound Recordingnsr
    27Sound Recordingrec
    28Printed Musicpmu
    29Manuscript Musicmmu
    30Atlasatl
    31Printed or Manuscript Musicmus
    32Mapmap
    33Globeglb
    34Printed Cartographic Materialpcm
    35Manuscript Cartographic Materialmcm
    36Cartographic Materialcmt
    37Emagazineemg
    38Ebookebk
    39Kitkit
    40 +

    Archival/Mixed Materials

    +
    +

    mix

    +

     

    +
    +

    41

    +
    +

    Newspaper

    +
    +

    new

    +
    +

    42

    +
    +

    Periodical

    +
    +

    per

    +
    +

    43

    +
    +

    Serial

    +
    +

    ser

    +
    +

    44

    +
    +

    Electronic Resources

    +
    +

    elr

    +
    +

    45

    +
    +

    Large Print

    +
    +

    lpt

    +
    +

    46

    +
    +

    Braille

    +
    +

    brl

    +
    +

    47

    +
    +

    Manuscript Material

    +
    +

    mss

    +
    +

    48

    +
    +

    Microform

    +
    +

    mic

    +
    +

    49

    +
    +

    Book

    +
    +

    bks

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKabout/Cataloging_Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKabout/Cataloging_Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6112cfd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKabout/Cataloging_Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + Cataloging Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Cataloging Overview

    +

    Polaris Cataloging records provide the core data upon which all other functions in Polaris depend. Bibliographic and item records are used throughout the Polaris staff client, and they determine the PAC display. Authority records provide standardized access points to indexes and headings in the public catalog. Community records provide information about community organizations. Promotion records enable the library to promote titles, Web sites, community organizations, and events in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    To streamline your cataloging tasks, Polaris provides tools such as: import profiles for efficiently importing records; bulk creation of item records; bulk change for bibliographic and item records; remote database searching for easy copy cataloging; automatic remote authority control; bibliographic record replacement; and templates to ensure record consistency. Quick navigation between linked records also enhances efficiency.

    +

    When you need to create original MARC records, you select from dialog boxes that present the appropriate values based on previous selections. And, you can immediately preview how the title will appear in the PAC.

    +

    Your Polaris Administrator can use a variety of options to manage cataloging records and specify how titles are displayed in the PAC. See Cataloging Administration.

    +

    For more information on the features and functions available in Polaris Cataloging, see these topics:

    +

    Getting Started in Cataloging +

    +

    Overview of Polaris cataloging records; methods for creating new records; how to search for and display bibliographic, authority, and item records.

    +

    Creating, Copying, and Editing MARC Records +

    +

    Creating original MARC records; copying MARC records from remote sources; editing MARC records.

    +

    Using Cataloging Templates +

    +

    Using templates to streamline your cataloging processes.

    +

    Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records +

    +

    Setting up import profiles; importing records into your Polaris catalog.

    +

    Checking Cataloging Records +

    +

    Checking records for headings, MARC format, and duplicates.

    +

    Maintaining Item Records +

    +

    Creating item records and preparing items for circulation; printing labels.

    +

    Working with Multiple Cataloging Records +

    +

    Grouping related cataloging records in record sets for bulk processing.

    +

    Maintaining Your Catalog +

    +

    Maintaining your catalog; exporting records; identifying unlinked records; deleting records; and using reports to identify problems.

    +

    Managing Promotions +

    +

    Creating and editing promotion records to feature resources in PAC.

    +

    Cataloging Bound-With Materials +

    +

    When cataloging pamphlets or other materials that have individual titles and individual bibliographic records, but are bound together in physical volumes, libraries can group bibliographic records together.

    +

    Setting Up Labels +

    +

    Setting up labels; customizing labels; defining label content; specifying label printers.

    +

    Generating and Copying Content Carousel Code +

    +

    Using the Carousel Toolkit (available by separate license) to copy code snippets for content carousels from the Polaris ILS to external web sites.

    +

    Type of Material Codes (TOMs) +

    +

    Lists the Type of Material Codes (TOMs); the MARC codes required to produce specific TOMs; order of precedence to determine primary TOM.

    +

    Cataloging Shortcut Keys +

    +

    List of Cataloging shortcut keys.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Change_invalid_fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Change_invalid_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2604f0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Change_invalid_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change invalid fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change Invalid Fields

    +

    To change invalid content designators Tags, indicators, and subfield codes in a MARC record. in the record:

    +
      +
    1. Click Edit Record on the Check MARC21 Format Results dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The focus changes to the record workform.

    +
      +
    1. Make the appropriate changes to the invalid tags.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: validate_button00131.gif
    Click to check the format.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools >Check MARC21 Format to restart the MARC 21 check.
    2. +
    +

    If all content designators are valid, No MARC21 formatting problems were found appears, or if the record still contains invalid fields, the Check USMARC Format Results dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions:
      • If No MARC21 formatting problems were found is displayed, click OK to return to the workform.
      • If the Check MARC21 Format Results dialog box is displayed, repeat steps 2-3 of this procedure until all MARC 21 formatting problems are resolved.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_MARC_format_from_a_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_MARC_format_from_a_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b115c7f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_MARC_format_from_a_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check MARC format from a workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check MARC Format from a Workform

    +

    To verify that the catalog record displayed in the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform meets the MARC 21 format guidelines:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: validate_button.gif
    Click to check the format.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Check MARC21 Format from the workform menu bar.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the content designators Tags, indicators, and subfield codes in a MARC record. are valid, a No MARC21 formatting problems were found message box appears. Click OK to acknowledge the message and skip the rest of this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. The Check MARC21 Format Results dialog box appears if there are formatting problems in the MARC record.
    2. +
    3. If the Check MARC21 Format Results dialog box appears, choose one of the following actions to resolve format issues:
      • To correct the invalid tags, do Change invalid fields.
      • To cancel the Check Tag procedure, click Cancel.
      • To continue saving the record without changing invalid tags, click Continue Saving. This option is available only when invalid tags are found while saving the record.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_the_logs_of_the_new_or_updated_authority_links.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_the_logs_of_the_new_or_updated_authority_links.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..52fa9102 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Check_the_logs_of_the_new_or_updated_authority_links.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check the logs of the new or updated authority links + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View and Print Logs for New or Updated Authority Links

    +

    An authority create links job is added to the queue automatically if remote automatic authority control is enabled and other unlinked bibliographic or See Also headings in the database can be authorized by the new automatically-created authority record. To check the queue:

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Cataloging Processing > Authority Create Links Queue or Authority Update Links Queue.
    2. +
    +

    A window lists the new or updated links.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the links job, or click logbut.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The log appears in the report preview window.

    +
      +
    1. To print the log, select File > Print from the Adobe Acrobat menu.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Authority_Headings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Authority_Headings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6588c9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Authority_Headings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking Authority Headings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking Authority Headings

    +

    Checking authority headings in bibliographic and authority records ensures consistency in indexing, so retrieval is reliable. Headings are checked when you save the record as final or when you select Tools > Check Headings on the Bibliographic Record workform, or Tools > Check See Also From on the Authority Record workform.

    +

    Note:
    The headings check is not done automatically when you save the record as provisional.

    +

    If no invalid headings are found, the Check Complete message appears or the record is saved. If any unlinked headings are found, the Check Headings Assistant dialog box lists the problem headings. You can correct the problem heading in the record, create a new authority record to match the problem heading, or disregard the problem and leave the heading unlinked. You must have permission set in Polaris Administration to create authority records. See Cataloging Workflow Permissions.

    +

    You can also create links automatically from an open authority record to new bibliographic or authority records whose headings match, or are very close to, the heading in the open record. When you make new links to authority records or update links, you can see the changes by selecting Utilities > Cataloging Processing > Authority Create Links Queue or the Authority Update Links Queue.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Authority Control for Local Headings

    +

    Note:
    If you do not want authority control performed on these local headings, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    Polaris performs authority control for some local subject headings. Local subject headings must be in 690 and 691 fields, the second indicator must be 7, and the subfields must be similar to those specified in the MARC format for bibliographic 600, 650, and 651 fields. If your data does not meet these requirements, additional data analysis and processing fees may apply during data conversion.

    +

    When authority control for local headings is performed, the system attempts to match the local headings in bibliographic records with authority records as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      690 Subject Heading - Local Topical Subject field with a second indicator value of ‘7’ (source specified in subfield 2) is matched against authority records containing a 190 tag and a 008/11 value of ‘z’ (other). (The value in subfield 2 is not taken into account.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      691 Subject Heading - Local Geographic Name field with a second indicator value of '7' (source specified in subfield 2) is matched against authority records containing a 191 tag and an 008/11 value of 'z' (other). (The value in subfield 2 is not taken into account.)

      +
    • +
    +

    If a match is found and all other existing conditions for authority linking on non-local headings are met, a link is established between the bibliographic heading and the matching authority record.

    +

    In addition, links are automatically established between authority records as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      590 See Also From Tracing - Local Topical Term is matched against an authority record’s 190 tag.

      +
    • +
    • +

      591 See Also From Tracing - Local Geographic Name is matched against an authority record’s 191 tag.

      +
    • +
    +

    ZMARC Remote Authority Control

    +

    If your library subscribes to Polaris ZMARC, the remote ZMARC or OCLC authority database is checked for matching authority records when no match is found in the Polaris database. When you save MARC records, import them, or check their headings, and no matching authority record is found in the local database, the remote database is checked automatically. If an exact match is found in the remote authority database, it is saved to the local database and a link is made to the existing or imported record.

    +

    An authority create links job is added to the queue automatically if other unlinked bibliographic or See Also headings in the database can be authorized by the new automatically-created authority record.

    +

    You enable remote automatic authority control through the Remote automatic authority control Cataloging profile in Polaris Administration. See Managing Authority Control.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Cataloging_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Cataloging_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6b9b37cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_Cataloging_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Checking Cataloging Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking Cataloging Records

    +

    Several checking functions in Polaris Cataloging help you maintain accurate and complete records. When you save or import records, Polaris checks for matching authority headings, validates the MARC format, and checks to see if there are duplicate records already in the database. You can also use these tools to check records at any time.

    +

    If you change a heading in an authority record, a dialog box lists the linked records that are affected by the change. You can automatically change the headings in the linked records to match the change in the authority record.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_MARC_Format.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_MARC_Format.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3749d5f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_MARC_Format.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking MARC Format + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking MARC Format

    +

    MARC format checking ensures the consistency and the quality of your MARC records. Polaris automatically checks MARC 21 tags when you save a record as final, but you can also check the MARC format before you save a record. When invalid tags and headings are detected, a list of the formatting problems appears.

    +

    Polaris MARC validation uses the rules set in the MARC Validation Bibliographic and MARC Validation Authority profiles. See Administering MARC Validation and Display for information about changing the validation tables. These system tables are based on rules outlined by the Library of Congress in the MARC 21 Standard Format For Bibliographic/Authority Data (ISBN 0-8444-0809-3). Refer to the appropriate Library of Congress document if you have any questions about MARC 21 format concepts and standards.

    +

    Depending on the MARC validation options set by your organization in Polaris Administration, you may or may not see validation messages for required, obsolete, or conditional content designators Tags, indicators, and subfield codes in a MARC record.. You may choose not to correct invalid tags due to time constraints or local library policy.

    +

    Note:
    The Leader and 008 tag are required when saving or importing bibliographic records, even if MARC validation is turned off.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_for_Duplicate_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_for_Duplicate_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04ec0d40 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Checking_for_Duplicate_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking for Duplicate Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking for Duplicate Records

    +

    Polaris duplicate detection helps you avoid adding duplicate bibliographic or authority records to your database. Duplicate detection is automatically run when you save a bibliographic or authority record. You can also select Tools > Replace/Check for duplicates from the Bibliographic Record workform, or Tools > Check for Duplicates on the Authority Record workform. The following Polaris Administration settings control duplicate detection and how records are overlaid in Polaris Cataloging:

    +
      +
    • Bibliographic and authority deduplication database tables
      The criteria for detecting duplicates are set in the Bibliographic Deduplication and the Authority Deduplication database tables at the system, library or branch levels in Polaris Administration. See Change bibliographic or authority deduplication tables.
    • +
    • Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table
      When a record is overlaid, the 035 tag of the replaced record is saved in the new record as well as any tags specified for retention in the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table. See Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs.
    • +
    • Authority Overlay Retention policy table +
      When an authority record is overlaid, the 035 tag of the replaced record is saved in the new record as well as any tags specified for retention in the Authority Overlay Retention policy table. See Specify tags to retain from overlaid authority records.
    • +
    • MARC validation immediately after bib overlay cataloging profile Some of the tags retained from the overlaid records may be non-repeatable tags. You may want to set MARC validation immediately after bib overlay to Yes so that MARC validation is performed on the new record after the duplicates are overlaid. See Enable validation when duplicate bibs are replaced.
    • +
    • Check headings immediately after bib overlay cataloging profile - If this profile is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, the headings are checked in the retained record after it overlays another bibliographic record or records. See Enable headings check when replacing bibs.
    • +
    • Bibliographic record replace: maximum allowed in one operation Cataloging parameter - This system-level parameter limits the number of records that can be replaced at once. See Set the number of bibs that can be replaced at once.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For information on the duplicate detection process during import, see Set import options for bibliographic records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Create_links_from_authority_records_to_other_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Create_links_from_authority_records_to_other_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c20b9c19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Create_links_from_authority_records_to_other_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create links from authority records to other records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Links from Authority Records to Other Records

    +

    You can authorize headings by creating links to bibliographic or authority records from the Authority Record workform. If you have several records with the same headings that are not authorized, you can open the authority record in the Authority Record workform and create the links to the records.

    +

    To create links from an authority record to a bibliographic record or another authority record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create Links to Bibliographic Records or Tools > Create Links to Authority Records. + +

      The Link Bibliographic Headings Assistant or Link Authority Headings Assistant dialog box appears with a list of authority headings that can link or are close. If the headings can be linked, they are listed in the top of the dialog box.

    4. +
    5. Do one of the following actions:
      • If the headings can be linked, select the headings and click Link Selected.
      • If the headings are close, double-click the close headings to open the records, and modify the heading to match the authorized heading. Then select Tools > Create Links again, select the fixed headings, and click Link Selected.

      The linking process begins.

    6. +
    7. To check the linking job, or to generate a report that lists the new and updated links, see View and Print Logs for New or Updated Authority Links.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_authority_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_authority_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b58481c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_authority_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Detect duplicate authority records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Detect Duplicate Authority Records

    +

    You can check for duplicate authority records and replace them with a new record. If any tags in the overlaid records are set to be retained, they are copied to the new record.

    +

    To check for existing authority records in the Polaris database that may be duplicates of the record displayed in the Authority Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Do one of the following steps:
      • Click dupdetcbutton00132.gif or select Tools > Check for Duplicates.
      • Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click the Save button to save the record.
    4. +
    +

    Any suspected duplicates are listed in the Check For Duplicate Results dialog box. The reasons the record was identified as a duplicate are displayed in the Reason column. They refer to the applicable rule groups as defined in the Authority Deduplication database table.

    +
      +
    1. If the Check For Duplicates Results dialog box appears, do one of the following:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    All options are available on the Check for Duplicates dialog box if you saved the record. However, if you selected Tools > Check for Duplicates without first saving the record, the only options available are Open and Cancel.

    +
    +
      +
    • To save the record displayed in the Authority Record workform even though it may be a duplicate of the record or records listed in the dialog box, click Continue Saving.
    • +
    • To open a suspected duplicate, select the record, and click Open.
    • +
    • To replace a suspected duplicate with the record displayed in the Authority Record workform, select the record, and click Replace. Then, click OK to confirm that you want to replace the record or records.
    • +
    • Click Cancel to cancel and return to the workform.
    • +
    +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Setting deduplication rules - The rules that detect duplicates are applied using rules groups in the Authority Deduplication database table. For more information, see Change bibliographic or authority deduplication tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_or_replace_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_or_replace_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8d71b253 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Detect_duplicate_or_replace_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Detect duplicate or replace bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Detect Duplicate or Replace Bibliographic Records

    +

    You can check for duplicate bibliographic records and replace them with a new or existing record. You can also replace records even if they were not determined to be duplicates. When you save a bibliographic record, it is automatically checked for duplicates, and if one or more duplicate records are found, the Replace/Check for duplicates dialog box appears with the duplicate records listed. If no duplicates are found when you save a record, the dialog box does not appear and the bibliographic record is saved.

    +

    If you attempt to replace a protected bibliographic record (the Do not overlay box is checked), the protected record that cannot be replaced appears in red in the Records to replace list. If you want to continue replacing the record, you can open it in the Bibliographic Record workform and uncheck the Do not overlay box, and save the record. Then, refresh the Replace/Check for Duplicates (Bibliographic Records) dialog box. The record is displayed in black text.

    +

    To check for duplicate bibliographic records and replace them, or replace records that are not determined to be duplicates:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Do one of the following steps:
      • Select File > Save, click the Save button, or press CTRL+S. If you save the record and no duplicates are detected, the record is saved, and no additional message appears. If you save the record and duplicates are detected, the Replace/Check For Duplicates dialog box appears with the duplicates listed.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
    +
      +
    • Select Tools > Replace/Check for duplicates, click dupdetcbutton.gif, or press Ctrl+I. If duplicates are detected, the Replace/Check For Duplicates lists them, including the reason they were determined to be duplicates. If no duplicates are detected, the Replace/Check For Duplicates dialog box appears with the message: No duplicates were found. You can select records to replace with the add button above.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. If the Replace/Check for Duplicates dialog box appears, do one of the following:
      • Close the dialog box if no duplicates were detected - Click Cancel.
      • Close the dialog box if duplicates were detected - Click Continue Saving to save the duplicate record.
      • Open a record in the Records to replace list - Select the record or records, and click Open.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If a bibliographic record has a status of Deleted, it cannot be added to the list of records to replace.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Add records to the Records to replace list - Click addbtn.gif to open the Polaris Find Tool. Search for and select single or multiple bibliographic records or bibliographic record sets, right-click and choose Select. To see the records in a record set, right-click and select Open. When you select a record set, all the member records are added to the list.
    • +
    • Remove records from the Records to replace list - Select the records to remove, and click removebut.gif.
    • +
    • Replace the records displayed in the Records to replace list - Click Replace All. Or select specific records to replace using the Maintain control number column to select which of the Records to replace will have its control number retained, and click Replace Selected. Click Yes to confirm that you want to replace the record or records.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Records with a status of provisional are not eligible for this feature.

    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This feature applies only when new records are being saved, not when two existing records in your database are suspected of being duplicates. In that situation, you must perform the duplicate detection and replace operation from the record whose control number you wish to retain.

    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If the overlaid records include tags listed in the Bibliographic Overlay Retention Tags policy table, these tags are copied to the new bibliographic record. See Related Information for more information on what gets saved in the retained record.

    +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Records that cannot be added to the Records to Replace list:
      • Records with a Deleted status
      • Records linked to digital media in Polaris Fusion
    • +
    • +

      Setting deduplication rules - The rules that detect duplicates are applied using rules groups in the Bibliographic Deduplication database table or the Authority Deduplication table.

      +
    • +
    • Results of replacing records - When you choose to replace a record or records in the Records to replace list with the record displayed in the Bibliographic Record workform, the saved record has the following characteristics:
      • The selected or single control number of the existing record(s) are retained.
      • Specific tags from overlaid records are retained - All 035 tags in the replaced records are copied to the new record, as well as any tags listed in the Bibliographic Overlay Retention policy table.
      • Links from overlaid records are transferred to the newly saved record - If the duplicate records had links to other records, they are maintained in the new record, including links to:
      • Non-MARC settings are specified in the newly saved record - The Display in PAC setting and other non-MARC settings are not copied from the replaced records.

      • First available date is earliest in any of the records - The new bibliographic record’s first available date is the earliest first available date of any of the records, including those that were overlaid. This means that in some situations the creation date of the retained record is after the first available date.

      • Circulation counts increase - The Lifetime circulation count and Lifetime in-house circulation count are increased by the counts in the replaced records.

      • If the MARC validation immediately after bib overlay Cataloging profile is set to Yes, MARC coding is checked after records are overlaid. This setting also ensures that non-repeatable tags from the overlaid records do not accumulate in the new bibliographic record.

      • If the Check headings immediately after bib overlay Cataloging profile is set to Yes, headings are checked in the retained record. If any problems are detected with the headings, the Check headings assistant dialog box appears.

    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Edit_authority_records_and_update_linked_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Edit_authority_records_and_update_linked_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72d60c73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/Edit_authority_records_and_update_linked_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit authority records and update linked records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Authority Records and Update Linked Records

    +

    When you modify and save an authority record, Polaris checks to see if there are bibliographic records with a heading linked to the authority record or cross-referenced headings in other authority records. You can also use the Check For Linked Records option on the Tools menu to check for linked records before saving the record. If there are linked records, and the heading or usage has changed, you can resolve the discrepancies automatically when you save the record.

    +

    To edit authority records and update linked records:

    +

    Tip:
    To see a list of the bibliographic records linked to an authority record, select Links > Bibliographic Records or click biblinkedicon.gif.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Edit the heading.
    4. +
    5. Save the authority record.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    The options for automatically modifying the linked records appear only when you save the authority record.

    +

    If there are affected headings, the Check for Linked Records Results dialog box appears. The dialog box displays the number of bibliographic records and the number of See also references that will be affected by this change. It also displays reasons why the headings and/or references will become unlinked.

    +
      +
    1. If there are linked bibliographic or authority records that will be affected by the change in the authority record, select one of the following options:
      • To leave the heading links as they are, do not select any option and click Cancel.
      • To modify the heading in the bibliographic or authority records to match the new heading in the edited authority record, click Modify the headings (or references) to match the new authority heading.
      • To delete the heading and tag in the bibliographic or authority records to which the edited authority record is linked, click Delete the headings (or references).
      • To remove links to any bibliographic headings linked to the edited authority record, click Unlink the headings (or references). The heading remains in the bibliographic or authority record as an unauthorized heading.
    2. +
    3. Click Continue Saving to update the linked headings automatically.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Check headings before saving changes to the authority record - To see the linked headings that would be affected by your changes, select Tools > Check For Linked Records or click LinkedRecordsButton.gif from the Authority Record workform. The Check for Linked Records Results dialog box appears if there are linked records that would be affected by the change. If no linked headings or no heading problems were found, a No records were affected message appears. You can click Show Linked Bibliographic Headings or Show Linked See Also References to see a list of the linked records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/List_and_resolve_unlinked_headings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/List_and_resolve_unlinked_headings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21726f10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKchecking/List_and_resolve_unlinked_headings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + List and resolve unlinked headings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    List and Resolve Unlinked Headings

    +

    To check for unlinked headings in a bibliographic or authority record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +

      Tips:
      Click verify_button.gifto check headings in the bibliographic record.

      Click PKchecking00130.gifto check see also references in the authority record.

      +
    3. Select Tools > Check Heading(s) on the Bibliographic Record workform, or select Tools > Check See Also From References on the Authority Record workform.
    4. +

      Note:
      If the headings are linked, the following message appears: No heading problems were found. Click OK to acknowledge the message and skip the rest of these steps.

      +

      If you use remote automatic authority control and there are headings with no matching authority record, a message indicates that the system is searching for a matching authority record in the external database. If an exact match is found, the authority record is saved to the database and the link is automatically made.

      +

      If there are unauthorized headings, the Check Headings Assistant dialog box appears.

      +
    5. Select a single heading or multiple headings to edit:
      • If there are multiple headings and you want to create new headings or leave the bibliographic headings unlinked for all the headings listed, select all the headings and click Details. The Check Headings Details dialog box appears with the headings listed.
      • Select Create new authority record or Leave unlinked, and click OK.
      • To see more options, select a single heading, and click Details on the Check Headings Assistant or Check See Also From References Assistant dialog box. The Check Heading(s) Details dialog box appears with the other options.
    6. +
    7. Use one of the following options to resolve the unauthorized heading:
      • Change the heading to match an existing authority record - If a heading is listed under Possible Authority Records, select it. Or, click Find and use the Authority Records - Heading Find Tool to search for and select a valid authority record. The For option in the Find Tool is automatically populated when you are working with unlinked headings if that administrative setting has been enabled.

        Then, select Adjust on the Check Headings Details dialog box, and select one of the following options:
        • bibliographic heading to match authority record or authority see also reference to match heading - Changes the heading in the record to match the authority heading you selected.
        • usage in authority record - Changes the usage of the authority record selected in the Possible Authority Records list to authorize the heading.
        • both - Changes both the usage and the heading.
      • Create a new authority record to match the heading - If no matching authority record is found, a new authority record can be created based on the heading in the bibliographic record. Select Create new authority record.

      • Leave the heading or reference unlinked to an authority record - Click Leave unlinked.

      • Manually change the heading - Click Edit bibliographic heading or Edit authority heading, and make changes to the heading in the box.

    8. +
    9. Click OK to close the Check Heading(s) Details dialog box.
    10. +

      The Check Headings Assistant dialog box displays the solution.

      +

      Tips:
      To see how the authority heading appears in the record, click Preview. The Preview window appears.
      If you created a new authority record, it is listed in a dialog box, and you can double-click to open it in the Authority Record workform.

      +
    11. Click OK on the Preview window if it is open, and click Continue Saving on the Check Headings Assistant dialog box, or just click OK on the Check Headings Assistant dialog box.
    12. +

      The Bibliographic Record workform or the Authority Record workform appears.

      +
    13. Select File > Save to save the record.
    14. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Authority Reports - You can run a report to identify authority records where a See reference (4xx field) in one record matches a heading (1xx field) in another record in the database.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_006_and_007_fixed_fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_006_and_007_fixed_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fef9534 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_006_and_007_fixed_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add 006 and 007 fixed fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add 006 and 007 Fixed Fields 

    +

    To add more information regarding the physical characteristics of the material, use the 006 and 007 fixed fields. To add the 006 and 007 fixed fields in a bibliographic record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Position the cursor after the Leader or at the end of any line.
    4. +
    5. Press Enter to insert a new line.
    6. +
    7. In the Tag column, type one of the following codes:
    8. +
    +
      +
    • Type 007 for a physical description fixed field.
    • +
    • Type 006 for an additional material characteristics field.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click the 006 or 007 tag, or position the cursor on the tag and press CTRL+E.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Fixed Field Selection dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select a form or category of material, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    A dialog box appears where you can enter more specifics regarding the material. The dialog box that appears depends on the entry you choose in the Bibliographic Fixed Field Selection dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Select from the list boxes to further define the material, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The MARC 21 view displays the completed 006 or 007 tag.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_a_MARC_tag_to_a_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_a_MARC_tag_to_a_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a86e03d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Add_a_MARC_tag_to_a_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add a MARC tag to a record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a MARC Tag to a Record

    +

    To add a tag to a MARC record:

    +

    Tip:
    The description of the field displays at the bottom edge of the workform. If the workform is positioned too far down on the screen, you may not be able to see the description. Move the workform toward the top of the screen, if necessary.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Place the cursor at the end of a line.
    4. +
    5. Press Enter to insert a new line.
    6. +
    7. Enter the tag number in the Tag column of the new line.
    8. +
    9. Enter indicators, subfields, and data as required for the tag.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Apply_a_macro.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Apply_a_macro.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09a8fd4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Apply_a_macro.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Apply a macro + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Apply a Macro to Edit a MARC Record

    +

    To use a macro to edit a MARC record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Place the cursor in the MARC record where you want the macro playback to occur.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you know the keyboard shortcut, you can quickly apply the macro.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Macros to display the Macros tool bar.
    2. +
    +

    If you have created macros, they appear in the list box.

    +
      +
    1. To see all the macros, click Show All.
    2. +
    +

    The Macro Selection dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the macro in the Macro box and click kRunMacroBtn.gif (Run) on the Macros tool bar, or use its associated keyboard shortcut.
    2. +
    +

    The character sequence stored in the macro is entered in the Editor view of the record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Browse_Headings_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Browse_Headings_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..11d2a52e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Browse_Headings_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Browse Headings Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Browse Headings Display

    +

    The browse headings that display in browse search results for author, title, subject, or series are based on the first occurrence of the heading that was entered in the Polaris database. For example, a brief bibliographic record is created, and the heading displays in all uppercase letters because it is the first instance of that heading. Another example is an author browse heading that is missing accents. You can select which browse heading to display (when the count is greater than 1 and it is not a See or See Also heading). The selected heading is displayed for browse searching in the Find Tool and in the PAC.

    +

    To update a browse display heading:

    +
      +
    1. Browse search in the Find Tool for a bibliographic record by title, author, subject, or series.
    2. +
    +

    The browse search results appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select the heading you want to update, right-click and choose Select display heading from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Select Heading Results dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the heading you want to display, and click the Update Browse Display button.
    2. +
    +

    The heading display is updated both in the Find Tool and PAC browse search results.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) To update the bibliographic records that are linked to the unwanted heading, do the following:
      1. Select the heading that you do not want to display.
      2. Click Show Bib Records. A list box displays the bibliographic records that have this heading.
      3. Double-click on the bibliographic records to open them, change the records to match the preferred heading, and save them.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_a_macro.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_a_macro.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b4fe7b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_a_macro.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Change a macro + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change a Macro

    +

    To change the name, description, or shortcut key of an existing macro in your macro list:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot change the recorded contents of the macro.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Press ALT+F8 to display the Macros tool bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Macros to display the Macros tool bar.
    2. +
    3. Select the name of the macro you want to change, and click Edit.
    4. +
    +

    The Edit Macro dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Change the information in the Name, Description, and Press new shortcut key boxes.
    2. +
    3. Click Save.
    4. +
    +

    The macro is changed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_the_MARC_Leader.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_the_MARC_Leader.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08e93b4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Change_the_MARC_Leader.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change the MARC Leader + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change the MARC Leader

    +

    To change the values for the Leader positions in a bibliographic or authority record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    When you open a new bibliographic or authority record, the following information appears in the Leader data column:

    +
    +
      +
    • For a new bibliographic record, the default data in the Leader is NAM. This indicates that the record status is new, the type of record is language material, and the bibliographic level is monograph/item.
    • +
    • For a new authority record, the default data in the Leader is nz  22    n  4500. This indicates that the record status is new, the type of record is authority dateless, the record is in MARC format, and the encoding level is complete authority record.
    • +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If the record does not have a leader tag, press CTRL+L to insert the LDR tag.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click LDR in the Tag column.
    2. +
    +

    + ldr00119.gif 

    +

    The Leader - Bibliographic Data or the Leader - Authority Data dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter or change the values in the Leader positions as required.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The Type of Record (LDR/06) and Bibliographic Level (LDR/07) values determine which dialog boxes are available to set the 008 fixed data.

    +
      +
    1. Select from the lists to change the information in the leader.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The selections you chose appear in the LDR data column.

    +

    Coding the MARC Leader for Digital Collections

    +

    If you are creating the MARC record to be used in Polaris Fusion, select m Computer File in LDR 06 and c Collection in LDR 07. For more information, see Polaris Fusion online Help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Choose_characters_diacritics_from_a_chart.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Choose_characters_diacritics_from_a_chart.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89c27e12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Choose_characters_diacritics_from_a_chart.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Choose characters/diacritics from a chart + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Choose Characters/Diacritics a Dialog Box

    +

    To insert an international character into a MARC record by selecting the character or diacritic mark from the Character Picker dialog box:

    +

    Tip:
    If you frequently enter diacritics, you can add Input Method Editor (IME) keyboards and switch back and forth from the English keyboard to the international keyboards. See Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +

    Important:
    When you enter a combining diacritic mark next to a subfield designator, insert the base character before the combining mark.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Position the text cursor where you want to insert the character.
    4. +
    5. Select Tools, Diacritics or right-click anywhere in the workform, and select Diacritics from the context menu. Or, press ALT+D. The Character Picker dialog box opens with the (MARC-8)Basic Latin code chart displayed and a space selected.
    6. +
    +

    + charpick.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the graphic set in the Graphic set box.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The Graphic set drop-down list contains the traditional MARC 8 code ranges and most Unicode code charts. When you select a graphic set, the characters belonging to the selected graphic set appear.

    +

    + charpickmenu.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Position the cursor where you want to insert the character.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the character, or select the character and click Insert.
    4. +
    +

    The selected character is displayed in the MARC 21 view. If a particular character cannot be displayed using the fonts that are available to the workstation, a missing glyph box displays where the character would normally appear. When the missing glyph box is displayed, the correct Unicode character is stored in the record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Copying_MARC_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Copying_MARC_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13074363 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Copying_MARC_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + + + + + Copying MARC Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copying MARC Records

    +

    You can locate bibliographic or authority records in remote databases (such as the Polaris ZMARC database) and copy them into the Polaris database. To search a remote database, it must be configured in Polaris Administration and identified for your organization in the Search Database policy table. See Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client. To subscribe to the Polaris ZMARC database, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    If you want to remove specific MARC tags from remote records when they are saved to your library’s local database, the tags must be defined in the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table, and the Delete MARC tags when saving Z39.50 records to local database profile must be set to Yes. See Deleting MARC Tags from Incoming Bibs.

    +

    To copy bibliographic or authority control records from a remote database:

    +

    Important:

    When you are copying records, you should always check for potential duplicates that may exist in your database, and you should check the format and headings.

    +
      +
    1. From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Cataloging and select Bibliographic Records or Authority Records
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Find Tool appears.

    +
      +
    1. In the Search by box, select the access point by which to find the record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    You can search for a 10-digit or 13-digit ISBN. The search process checks for a matching ISBN in the 020 tag and in the 024 tag with a 3 in the first indicator.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of search in the Type box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The target database may not allow some of the Find Tool search types. Many remote catalogs support only keyword searches. Also, sorting search results may not work with remote databases. See Results Returned from Remote Databases.

    +
      +
    1. Type the description of the item in the For box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    Implicit truncation is not supported when searching remote databases. End the search for text with the wild card symbol (*) if you are unsure of an exact match. For example, type Asimov, Isaac*.

    +
      +
    1. Select Databases to display the remote databases.
    2. +
    3. Select the check box next to the remote database or databases you want to search.
    4. +
    5. Click Search to start the catalog search.
    6. +
    +

    A dialog box appears with a list of the bibliographic records in the selected database that match your query.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the record, or right-click and select Open from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The selected record appears in the Bibliographic Record or the Authority Record workform. The Record status and Control Number boxes are blank because this record does not yet belong to your Polaris catalog.

    +
      +
    1. Do the following checks as needed:
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    These checks are automatically done when you save the record as final. You do not necessarily need to do these checks as part of your workflow.

    +
      +
    • To check for duplicate records, select Tools > Check For Duplicates (see Checking for Duplicate Records).
    • +
    • To check authority headings, select Tools > Check Headings on the Bibliographic Record workform or Tools > Check See Also From References on the Authority Record workform. See Checking Authority Headings for detailed instructions on checking headings.
    • +
    • To check MARC format, select Tools > Check MARC21 Format. See Checking MARC Format for detailed instructions on using this tool.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Make changes to the record as needed.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click savebut.gif to save your record.
    2. +
    +

    Polaris checks the MARC 21 format and headings, and checks for any duplicate records. If no errors are found, Record was saved successfully appears in the status bar. If any problems are listed, correct the problems as directed by your library cataloging policy to finish saving the record. When the record is saved, a control number and record status are assigned automatically.

    +

    Results Returned from Remote Databases

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Most Likely to Return ResultsMay Not Be Indexed in Target Catalog
    (Less Likely to Return results)
    +

    All indexed fields (both searches)

    +
    CODEN
    Author (bibliographic search)Dewey Classification
    Heading (authority search)General Notes
    ISBN (bibliographic search)Genre
    ISSN (bibliographic search)Gov Doc Classification
    LCCN (both searches)LC Classification
    Series (bibliographic search)NAL Classification
    Subject (bibliographic search)NLC Classification
    Title (bibliographic search)NLM Classification
    Tracing/Reference (authority)Other system control number
    Publisher
    Publisher's Number
    STRN
    UDC Classification
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Set up a remote database target - See Set up a server record for a Z39.50 or other search server.
    • +
    • Polaris ZMARC - Innovative Interfaces offers a subscription to the Polaris ZMARC database that gives you access to over 11 million bibliographic records and 7 million authority records cataloged by the Library of Congress. Innovative Interfaces sets up ZMARC as a Z39.50 target in Polaris Administration. You can select the ZMARC databases from the list of established targets on the Database tabbed page of the Polaris Find Tool. After ZMARC is established as a remote database that you can search, you can set it up for a source of authority records for automatic authority control. See Checking Authority Headings.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_authority_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_authority_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f23c38d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_authority_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new authority record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a new authority record

    +

    To create an original authority record in Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New, press CTRL+N, or click New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the New dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Authority Record from the Objects list.
    2. +
    3. To use a template to create the new authority record, do the following steps:
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information on creating templates, see Using Cataloging Templates.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Existing Template, and select an authority record template from the list.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you are creating multiple records using the same template, you can select the Make session default box. When you create the next authority record in the same session, the template you chose will be selected automatically as the default.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    The Authority Record workform appears with the information from the template filled in. If you chose No Template, a blank Authority Record workform appears.

    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    You can set Authority Leader positions 05, 06, and 17. The remaining positions are supplied automatically.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Use the MARC Editor commands to add tags and subfields as needed. See Editing MARC Records.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    When you save an authority record, it is automatically checked for MARC format, duplicates, and authority headings. However, you can resolve any problems before saving the record by performing these checks first (see Checking Cataloging Records).

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the authority record.
    2. +
    +

    The record was saved successfully appears if no errors were found.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_bibliographic_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_bibliographic_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97f4e7a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Create_a_new_bibliographic_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new bibliographic record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Bibliographic Record

    +

    To manually create a new bibliographic record in the Polaris database:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click on the Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Bibliographic Record from the Objects list.
    2. +
    3. To use a template to create the new bibliographic record, do the following steps:
    4. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For more information on creating templates, see Using Cataloging Templates.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Existing Template, and select a bibliographic template from the list.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you are creating multiple records using the same template, you can select the Make default box. When you create the next bibliographic record in the same session, the template you chose will be selected automatically as the default.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record workform appears with the information from the template. Depending on the data already in the template, you may or may not need to do all the steps in this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. Indicate whether you want the record to display in the public catalog by selecting the Display in PAC check box to display the title in the PAC, or by clearing the check box to limit the title to staff display only.
    2. +
    3. Select the owner of the bibliographic record in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The record owner is the organization that can determine the permissions for the record.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click LDR in the Tag column.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If LDR does not appear, place the cursor in the first position (far left) of the Tag column, and press CTRL+L.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the values for Leader positions 05, 06, 07, 08, 17, 18, and 19. See Change the MARC Leader.
    2. +
    3. Edit the values for the 006, 007, or 008 fixed fields, as needed. See Edit the 008 field in a MARC record or Add 006 and 007 fixed fields.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    To insert subfield delimiters, press CTRL+Q.

    +
      +
    1. Type additional tags, subfields, and enter data.
    2. +
    3. When you finish adding the bibliographic tags, save the record by choosing one of the following options:
      • If the record is ready for use in Polaris, select File > Save, press CTRL+S or click the Save button.
    4. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    Non-provisional records are saved with a status of final if no errors are found in the headings and tags. If there are errors in the record, an error dialog box appears.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To save the bibliographic record provisionally, select File > Save Provisionally. To edit the record later, save it provisionally.
    • +
    +
    +

    If the Cataloging profile Bibliographic records: Warning for records saved with display in PAC unchecked is set to Yes, a warning message appears if the Display in PAC check box is unchecked. You can check the Display in PAC check box on the Bibliographic Record workform, or you can continue to save the record. For more information on the Cataloging profile, see Set message for bibs that do not display in PAC.

    +
      +
    1. To see how the title will display in the PAC, select View, PAC.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_Copying_and_Editing_MARC_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_Copying_and_Editing_MARC_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a729d2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_Copying_and_Editing_MARC_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating, Copying, and Editing MARC Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating, Copying, and Editing MARC Records

    +

    You can create an original bibliographic or authority record in the Bibliographic or Authority Record workform using various editing features. You can also search a remote database and copy a MARC record to create a new one in Polaris.

    +

    For information on creating item records, see Maintaining Item Records.

    +

    Note:
    You can also add MARC records to your catalog by importing or copying them. See Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records

    +

    See also:

    + +

    For more information on MARC 21 Format for Bibliographic records, see the Library of Congress web site at:

    +

    http://www.loc.gov/marc/bibliographic/ecbdhome.html +

    +

    For more information on MARC 21 Format for Authority records, see the Library of Congress web site at:

    +

    http://www.loc.gov/marc/authority/ecadhome.html +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_MARC_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_MARC_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86115a28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Creating_MARC_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating MARC Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating MARC Records

    +

    When you create an original bibliographic record, you can save it with a status of provisional or final. Provisional records are not displayed in the public catalog, they are not indexed, and they cannot be linked to final item records. Final records are fully indexed for searching and you can choose to display them in the PAC.

    +

    The contents of Polaris bibliographic records are displayed in the MARC Editor view of the Bibliographic Record workform. This view shows the MARC Leader, tag number, indicator, subfield, and data format. You can also preview how the record displays in the public access catalog. To change the record, you can edit it in the MARC Editor view.

    +

    Note:
    Using Polaris Administration settings, your Polaris Administrator specifies whether call number and price fields are copied from bibliographic records to their linked item records. If the options are set to copy the call number and price data, your Polaris Administrator also defines the order in which specific bib tags are checked for the call number and price data. See Copying Bib Data to Items.

    +

    Authority records provide uniformity in the forms of names and some types of titles and subject headings. They also provide a system of cross-references to “instead of” headings (See references), and references to other related “like” headings (See Also references).

    +

    Note:
    When you save a bibliographic record and there are no matching authority records for a heading, you can automatically create an authority record to match the heading. See List and resolve unlinked headings.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Delete_a_macro.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Delete_a_macro.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46f46818 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Delete_a_macro.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Delete a macro + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Macro

    +

    To delete a macro:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Press ALT+F8 to display the Macros tool bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Macros to display the Macros tool bar.
    2. +
    3. Select the name of the macro to change, and click Edit.
    4. +
    +

    The Edit Macro dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Delete.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Edit_the_008_field_in_a_MARC_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Edit_the_008_field_in_a_MARC_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f429017b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Edit_the_008_field_in_a_MARC_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Edit the 008 field in a MARC record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit the 008 Field in a MARC Record

    +

    When you create a new bibliographic or authority record, the Leader and the 008 fixed field automatically appear. The data in the 008 fixed field is the current date. You can add data to the field by typing in the Data column or by using the dialog box.

    +

    To edit the values in the 008 fixed field:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Click the Help button in any of these dialog boxes to get help with the MARC codes.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the 008 tag.
    2. +
    +

    A dialog box appears.

    +

    Note:
    The dialog box that appears depends on what type of record you specified in the Leader.

    +
      +
    1. Choose the appropriate options in the dialog box to change the data in the 008 fixed field.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The 008 field Fixed-length Data Elements - General Information +This field contains 40 character positions (00-39) that provide coded information about the record as a whole and about special bibliographic aspects of the item being cataloged. These coded data elements are potentially useful for retrieval and data management purposes. +  +The data elements are positionally defined. Character positions that are not defined contain a blank (#). All defined character positions must contain a defined code; for some field 008 positions, this may be the fill character (|). The fill character may be used (in certain character positions) when a cataloging organization makes no attempt to code the character position. The fill character is not allowed in field 008 positions 00-05 (Date entered on file). Its use is discouraged in positions 07-10 (Date 1), 15-17 (Place of publication, production, or execution), and the 008 position defined for Form of item (either position 23 or 29 depending upon the 008 configuration). +  +Character positions 00-17 and 35-39 are defined the same across all types of material, with special consideration for position 06. The definition of character positions 18-34 was done independently for each type of material, although certain data elements are defined the same in the specifications for more than one type of material. When similar data elements are defined for inclusion in field 008 for different types of material, they occupy the same field 008 character positions. is updated.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Editing_MARC_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Editing_MARC_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60979ed6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Editing_MARC_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing MARC Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Editing MARC Records

    +

    The MARC 21 views of the Bibliographic Record workform and the Authority Record workform display the MARC coding. The MARC 21 view includes the following features that help improve efficiency and accuracy when you enter MARC data:

    +

    Tip:
    To see how the title will appear in Polaris PowerPAC, select View > PAC on the Bibliographic Record workform. The type of material icon that displays in Polaris PowerPAC is determined by the primary type of material. For more information, see Type of Material Codes (TOMs).

    + +

    Tip:
    If you enter MARC data using an international keyboard, the keyboard shortcuts may not work correctly. Change the keyboard back to English to use keyboard shortcuts.

    + +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Enter_diacritics_characters_using_an_IME_keyboard.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Enter_diacritics_characters_using_an_IME_keyboard.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a9009c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Enter_diacritics_characters_using_an_IME_keyboard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Diacritics/Characters Using an IME Keyboard

    +

    Note:
    For optimal display of all characters, be sure Arial Unicode MS font is installed on the workstation.

    +

    If you frequently enter diacritics or vernacular script using non-Roman characters, add Input Method Editor (IME) keyboards so you can switch back and forth between English and other languages using the keyboard. To enter single characters or diacritics, you can select characters from a dialog box. See Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

    +

    To enter diacritics or non-Roman characters using an Input Method Editor (IME) keyboard:

    +

    Tip:
    The steps for using IME keyboards differ slightly depending on which version of Windows is installed. For more information, see Microsoft’s web site at www.microsoft.com.

    +
      +
    1. Go to Settings on the PC.
    2. +
    3. Select Time & Language.
    4. +
    5. Select Region & language
    6. +
    7. Select Add a language.
    8. +
    9. On the Add a language dialog box, start typing the language to add.
    10. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The language appears.

    +
      +
    1. If the language has variants by region, select the appropriate regional language.
    2. +
    3. In the Region & language window, select the added language, and select Options.
    4. +
    5. Select Add a keyboard and select the keyboard to add.
    6. +
    7. In the taskbar, select the keyboard (ENG US), and all keyboards appear.
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the added keyboard from the list.
    2. +
    3. Start typing in the MARC Editor.
    4. +
    5. When you are finished with the added keyboard, press the Windows key and then the spacebar.
    6. +
    +

    The keyboard changes.

    +

    Important:
    Set up all your cataloging templates with the English keyboard selected because keyboard combinations, such as CTRL+Q for inserting a delimiter A separate character used in conjunction with a subfield code and introduces each subfield in a variable field., may not work if you have an international keyboard selected.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_character_diacritic_using_a_code.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_character_diacritic_using_a_code.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..350eeff8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_character_diacritic_using_a_code.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Insert a character/diacritic using a code + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Insert a Character/Diacritic Using a Code

    +

    To insert an international character into a MARC record by typing the character code on the numeric keypad:

    +

    Tip:
    To see the Unicode value of a character already in the MARC record, select the character in the MARC 21 view, and press Alt+Shift+X. Press Alt+X to re-display the character.

    +

    Important:
    When you enter a combining diacritic mark next to a subfield designator, insert the base character before the combining mark.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Position the text cursor where you want to insert the international character.
    4. +
    5. If you are combining characters, type the base character.
    6. +
    7. Press and hold ALT while you type the decimal character code on the numeric keypad.
    8. +
    +

    The numeric codes are displayed on the Character Picker dialog box.

    +

    Example:
    To insert a Latin capital letter O with a tilde diacritic (Õ), type o. Then hold down the ALT key while typing the numbers 0771 using the numeric keypad. (Do not use the number keys above the letter keys on the keyboard.) When you release the ALT key, the tilde appears over the O.

    +
      +
    1. Release the ALT key after you finish typing the character code numbers.
    2. +
    +

    The international character is displayed in the MARC 21 view.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_subfield_in_a_MARC_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_subfield_in_a_MARC_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab7707df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Insert_a_subfield_in_a_MARC_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Insert a subfield in a MARC record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Insert a Subfield in a MARC Record

    +

    To insert a subfield into a tag in a MARC record:

    +

    Important:
    The keyboard shortcut to insert the subfield delimiter A separate character used in conjunction with a subfield code and introduces each subfield in a variable field. is CTRL+Q. Do not use CTRL+D because this key combination deletes the displayed record.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Position the text cursor in the field where you want to insert the subfield.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    At the beginning of a field, it is not necessary to insert the delimiter. Type the subfield code and the delimiter is inserted automatically.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Insert Delimiter, or press CTRL+Q to insert the subfield delimiter.
    2. +
    3. Type the subfield code.
    4. +
    5. Type the subfield information.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Move_a_block_of_text.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Move_a_block_of_text.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce7ef58f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Move_a_block_of_text.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Move a block of text + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Move a Block of Text in a MARC Record

    +

    To select and move a line or multiple lines of text in a MARC record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select (highlight) the text you want to move.
    4. +
    5. Position the cursor over the selected text.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    Alternatively, you can Press CTRL+X to cut the highlighted text. Position the cursor where you want to move the text, and press CTRL+V to paste it.

    +
      +
    1. Press and hold the command (left) button on the mouse.
    2. +
    3. Move the cursor to the location where you want to move the text.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    Be sure you do not move the text into the middle of a tag line or subfield.

    +
      +
    1. Release the command button.
    2. +
    +

    The highlighted text appears in the new location.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Record_a_macro.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Record_a_macro.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83e016a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKcreate/Record_a_macro.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + + + Record a macro + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record a Macro

    +

    If you frequently use the same text in your MARC records, you can record the keystrokes and save them in a macro that you can use again. Your macros are available when you log on.

    +

    To record the keyboard actions to include in a macro:

    +

    Note:
    Plan the tags and fields you want in the macro before recording it.

    +

    Tip:
    Press ALT+F8 to display the Macros tool bar.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools | Macros to display the Macros tool bar.
    4. +
    +

    + kMacroToolbar.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Place the cursor in the MARC record where you want to begin the keyboard actions that you want to record.
    2. +
    3. Click kRecordBtn.gif (Record button) to open the Record Macro dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can stop recording the macro at any time by clicking Cancel on the Record Macro dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the macro in the Name box.
    2. +
    +

    The macro name must be different from the other names in your macro list. The name you define is displayed in the Macros box on the Macros tool bar after you record the macro. You can use up to 50 alphabetic characters, numbers, and spaces to name the macro.

    +
      +
    1. Type text describing the macro in the Description box.
    2. +
    +

    Your description should be a short explanation of the purpose of the macro. You can use up to 255 alphabetic characters, numbers, spaces, and punctuation in your description.

    +
      +
    1. In the Press new shortcut key box, press the keys for the keyboard shortcut.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    You could use SHIFT+CTRL+B as the shortcut to start the macro that enters data for a bindery.

    +

    Important:
    You cannot use key sequences CTRL+A through CTRL+Z or function keys in macros because they are reserved for Microsoft Windows or Polaris functions.

    +
      +
    1. Click Start Recording.
    2. +
    +

    The Record Macro dialog box closes.

    +
      +
    1. Type the tags, fields, and subfields exactly as you want them to be stored in the macro.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Test your macro on a disposable MARC record before you use the macro in your regular workflow.

    +
      +
    1. After you have completed all of the actions you want recorded, click kStopBtn.gif (Stop button).
    2. +
    +

    The macro is listed in the Macros box on the Macros tool bar.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Automatic_Processes_During_Import.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Automatic_Processes_During_Import.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ccf32fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Automatic_Processes_During_Import.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1914 @@ + + + + + + + + Automatic Processes During Import + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Automatic Processes During Import

    +

    When records are imported, they are processed according to settings in the import profile and in Polaris Administration. Some processing takes place before any records are created or updated, and other processing occurs when the data in the imported records are used to create or update records. This section covers the automatic processing you can choose to initiate in the import profile settings.

    +

    This topic contains the following sections:

    + +

    MARC Records Validated

    +

    If validation is selected in the import profile, the records are validated according to the following Polaris Administration Cataloging profiles: MARC validation: Bibliographic and MARC validation: Authority. However, if the incoming records contain indicators or subfields with data that cannot be validated, the data is replaced with the following defaults: Indicators default to ' ' and subfields default to '?'. For more information, see Administering MARC Validation and Display.

    +

    Authority Control Performed

    +

    If the options to Perform authority control and Automatically create new authority record; save bibliographic record as final are selected in the Bibliographic Records tab of the import profile, the system searches for an existing authority record for the heading. If no matching authority record is found in the local database, an authority record is created automatically and saved to the database. If your library has a subscription to a remote database of authority records, the remote database is automatically searched when no matching authority record is found. The new authority record is saved in the database and linked to the new bibliographic records. See Set import options for authority records.

    +

    Records Checked for Duplicates

    +

    If duplicate detection is selected in the profile, duplicates are identified according to the rules in the following Polaris Administration database tables: Bibliographic Deduplicaton or Authority Deduplication. For more information, see Change bibliographic or authority deduplication tables. You can also select the option Use profile defined duplicate detection rules in the import profile and select the rules to apply.

    +

    Specific MARC Tags Removed from Incoming Bibs

    +

    If the import profile is set up to automatically remove tags from incoming bibliographic records, the tags are removed from the records before they are saved in the Polaris database. See Set import options for bibliographic records.

    +

    Incoming Bibs Protected from Being Overlaid

    +

    If the import profile is set up to check the Do not overlay box on the incoming records, they are saved as protected records that cannot be overlaid. See Set import options for bibliographic records.

    +

    Bib Tags Marked to Prevent Creation/Updates of Items

    +

    If you are using an import profile that is set to create item records from embedded holdings tags, an automatic process first checks the bibliographic records for the presence of pre-existing holdings tags with the same tag number specified in the import profile. If pre-existing tags are found that match the retained tags under Keep MARC tags in the import profile, and these tags do not already have a $9 subfield, then a system-supplied $9 with the text Tag retained from duplicate overlay is inserted into the tag. Pre-existing embedded holdings tags that do not already have a $9 subfield are marked automatically without a Polaris Administration parameter.

    +

    When embedded holdings tags are used to create new items or to update on-order items to shelf-ready items, a $9 with the text Item generated is inserted into the tag if the Polaris Administration Cataloging parameter MARC embedded holdings tags as processed is set to Yes. During the import process, item records are not created or updated if the embedded holdings tags are marked as follows:

    +
      +
    • $9 Tag retained from duplicate overlaymmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM] +
    • +
    +

    Or

    +
      +
    • $9 Item generated mmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM]  +
    • +
    +

    Your Polaris Administrator can use a utility to automatically scan for specific tags marked with $9 and remove them. See Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9.

    +

    Authority Records Deleted

    +

    If the incoming authority record status (Leader/05) is d, s, or x, the following deletion processing occurs during import:

    +
      +
    • If the incoming authority record status is d (deleted), the following processing occurs:
    • +
    • All bibliographic record links to and from the existing authority record are disconnected.
    • +
    • If any authority record has the existing authority record 1xx field as a 4xx field, the cross-reference is logged in the import report.
    • +
    • All authority record links to the existing authority record are disconnected.
    • +
    • The existing authority record is replaced by the incoming record.
    • +
    • The deleted record is logged in the import report.
    • +
    • If the incoming authority record status (Leader/05) is s (deleted; heading split into two or more headings), the following processing occurs:
    • +
    • All bibliographic and authority record links to and from the existing authority record are disconnected.
    • +
    • All disconnected links are logged in the import report.
    • +
    • The existing authority record is replaced by the incoming record.
    • +
    • The deleted record is logged in the import report.
    • +
    • If the incoming authority record status (Leader/05) is x (deleted; heading replaced by another heading), the following processing occurs:
    • +
    • All bibliographic and authority record links to and from the existing authority record are disconnected.
    • +
    • The existing authority record is replaced by the incoming record.
    • +
    • The deleted record is logged in the import report.
    • +
    +

    Item Records Created from Embedded Holdings Tags

    +

    When you import bibliographic records using an import profile that is set to build item records from embedded holdings tags, the items are created automatically based on the holdings tag number and MARC subfield mapping specified on the Item Records tab. This table shows the default settings, requirements, and data entry conventions for item record creation from data in the 852 tag in the Polaris default (with item creation) profile. The data entry conventions apply to all profiles.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Item Record FieldSubfieldRequiredData Entry Conventions
    +

    Assigned (branch)

    +
    +

    $a

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Must match a branch ID or abbreviation. 15 characters max.

    +
    +

    Collection

    +
    +

    $b

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Must match a collection ID or abbreviation. 15 characters max.

    +
    +

    Barcode

    +
    +

    $p

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    20 characters max.

    +
    +

    Call Number Prefix

    +
    +

    $k

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    60 characters max.

    +
    +

    Call Number Suffix

    +
    +

    $m

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    60 characters max.

    +
    +

    Circ Status

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    ID or description. 80 characters max. Certain circ statuses are not allowed in new item records, for example Lost. If the ID or description in the circ status is not allowed, the circ status is taken from the template or from system defaults for item records.

    +
    +

    Classification Number

    +
    +

    $h

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    60 characters max.

    +
    +

    Copy Number

    +
    +

    $t

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    60 characters max.

    +
    +

    Cutter Number

    +
    +

    $i

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    60 characters max.

    +
    +

    Display in PAC

    +
    +

    $4

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    0 = No, 1 = Yes

    +
    +

    Fine code

    +
    +

    $r

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    FineCodeID (ID or description). 80 characters max.

    +
    +

    Free Text Block

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    255 characters max.

    +
    +

    Funding Source

    +
    +

    $1

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    50 characters max.

    +
    +

    Holdable

    +
    +

    $5

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    0 = No, 1 = Yes

    +
    +

    Library Assigned Block

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    ID or description. 80 characters max.

    +
    +

    Loan Period Code

    +
    +

    $u

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    LoanPeriodCodeID, ID, or description. 80 characters max.

    +
    +

    Loanable Outside System

    +
    +

    $7

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    0 = No, 1 = Yes

    +
    +

    Material Type

    +
    +

    $w

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    MaterialTypeID, ID, or description. 80 characters max.

    +
    +

    Name of Piece

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    255 characters max.

    +
    +

    Non Circulating

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    0=No, 1=Yes

    +
    +

    Non-Public Note

    +
    +

    $x

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    255 characters max.

    +
    +

    Owner (branch)

    +
    +

    $o

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Must match a branch ID or abbreviation. 15 characters max.

    +
    +

    Physical Condition

    +
    +

    $q

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    255 characters max.

    +
    +

    POLI-Segment ID

    +
    +

    N/A

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Number

    +
    +

    Price

    +
    +

    $0

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Monetary value (Format: ##.## No '$' should be in the subfield. Include a decimal where appropriate.)

    +
    +

    Public Note

    +
    +

    $z

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    255 characters max.

    +
    +

    Renewal Limit

    +
    +

    $y

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    0-99

    +
    +

    Shelf Location

    +
    +

    $c

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Must match shelf location ID or description. 80 characters max.

    +
    +

    Shelving Scheme

    +
    +

    $j

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    0=No information,

    +

    2=Library of Congress

    +

    3=Dewey Decimal

    +

    4=National Library of Medicine

    +

    5=Superintendent of Documents

    +

    6=Shelving Control Number

    +

    7=Title

    +

    8=Shelved Separately

    +

    9=Other

    +
    +

    Statistical Code

    +
    +

    $d

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

     ID or description. 80 characters max

    +
    +

    Temporary Shelf Location

    +
    +

    $l

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    25 characters

    +
    +

    Vol (volume)

    +
    +

    $v

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    60 characters max.

    +
    +

    Duplicate Records Overlaid

    +

    If the import profile is set to perform duplicate detection, it can also specify how duplicate records are handled. For information regarding the process that compares the encoding level of duplicate bibliographic records, see Bibliographic Overlay Based on Encoding Level. For information regarding the process that compares the cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of duplicate authority records, see Authority Record Overlay Based on Cataloging Source.

    +

    Tags Retained from Duplicate Records

    +

    The Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table is used to identify tags in bibliographic records to retain from duplicate records that are overlaid. The Authority Overlay Retention policy table is used to identify tags in authority records to retain from duplicate records that are overlaid.

    +

    Note:
    The Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table can also be used to identify tags to delete from incoming records whether they are duplicates or not.

    +

    For more information on these tables, see Specify Tags to Retain from Overlaid Bibs and Specify Tags to Retain from Overlaid Authority Records.

    +

    For bibliographic records, you can also select the option Profile-defined overlay retention tags in the import profile and select additional bibliographic tags to retain. See Set import options for bibliographic records.

    +

    Bibliographic Overlay Based on Encoding Level

    +

    If the import profile is set to compare the encoding levels of duplicate records, the value in Leader position 17 is checked.

    +

    Note: +
    Double-click on the Leader in the MARC21 view of the Bibliographic Record workform to see the encoding levels in Leader position 17:

    space - Full level
    1 - Full level, material not examined
    2 - Less than full level, material not examined
    3 - Abbreviated level
    4 - Core level
    5 - Partial (preliminary) level
    7 - Minimal level
    8 - Prepublication level
    E - System-identified MARC error in batchloaded record
    I - Full-level input by OCLC participants
    J - Deleted record
    K - Less-than-full input by OCLC participants
    L - Full-level input added from a batch process
    M - Less-than-full added from a batch process
    u - Unknown
    z - Not applicable

    +

    The following table shows the values in the incoming record in Leader position 17 and the values in the existing record that allow or disallow an overlay. If the encoding levels are equal, the records are processed according to the setting in the import profile.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    space +

    space

    +
    J
    +

    1

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    1 +

    1

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    2 +

    2

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    z

    +
     
    +

    E

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    3 +

    3

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    4 + +

    3

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    5 +

    5

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    7 + +

    2

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    8

    +
     
    +

    u

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    8 +

    5

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    4

    +
      +

    7

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
       
    u + +

    u

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    2

    +
      +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    zu +

    u

    +
    z +

    space

    +
    E +

    1

    +
      +

    2

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    EE +

    u

    +
      +

    z

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    I +

    space

    +
    J
    +

    1

    +
     
    +

    2

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    J  +

    space

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    K +

    2

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    z

    +
     
    +

    E

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    L +

    space

    +
    J
    +

    1

    +
     
    +

    2

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    z

    +
    +

    E

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    M

    +
    Incoming LDR/17 ValueCan OverlayCannot Overlay
    M +

    2

    +
    +

    space

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    I

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    J

    +
    +

    u

    +
    +

    L

    +
    +

    z

    +
     
    +

    E

    +
    +

    K

    +
    +

    M

    +
    +

    Authority Record Overlay Based on Cataloging Source

    +

    If the option Merge duplicate records is selected when importing authority records, the 040 $a of the incoming record is checked against the entries in the following Administration policy table: Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source. If the (040 $a) code in the incoming record matches an entry in the table, the preference order of the code is checked. The incoming record overlays the database record if it has a higher level of preference than the code in the database record.

    +

    Note:
    For information on setting up this policy table, see Specify preferred cataloging sources for authority records.

    +
      +
    1. The original cataloging agency of the incoming record (tag 040 $a) is matched to entries in the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source policy table in Polaris Administration. +
      Preferred Cataloging Source Table Entries for Importing LibraryIncoming Record Tag 040 $aImport Processing Status

      Has entries

      Matches a table entry

      Valid for import processing

      Has entries

      Does not match a table entry

      Invalid record is logged in the import report, but is not added to the catalog

      Has entries

      No tag 040

      Invalid record is logged in the import report, but is not added to the catalog

      No entries

      No tag 040

      Incoming record is added to catalog as provisional. Logged in import report. Added to provisional record set if specified. Existing record is not changed.

      No entries

      Has original cataloging source information

      Valid for import processing

    2. +
    3. If the imported authority record is from a preferred cataloging agency, the ranking of the agency is compared with the agency ranking of the existing record. +
      The ranking of preferred cataloging agencies is determined by the agency’s entry position in the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source policy table in Polaris Administration.
      Incoming Record Original Cataloging Agency PreferenceProcessing Done for Incoming Record

      Higher than the agency for the existing record

      Processed according to value in record status (Leader/05)

      Equal to the agency for the existing record

      Processed according to value in record status (Leader/05)

      Existing record does not have a cataloging agency specified

      Processed according to value in record status (Leader/05)

      Lower than the agency for the existing record

      Entry logged in import report. Incoming record is not added to catalog.

    4. +
    5. If the imported record has a higher or equal source preference than the existing record, the duplicate records are processed based on the record status (Leader/05) of the incoming record. +
      • If the incoming record has a record status of n (new), c (corrected or revised), or a (increase in encoding level), Polaris does new or update processing.
      • If the incoming record has a record status of d (deleted), s (deleted with heading split), or x (deleted with heading replaced), Polaris does deletion processing.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Copy_a_Polaris_read-only_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Copy_a_Polaris_read-only_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74d8ab78 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Copy_a_Polaris_read-only_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy a Polaris read-only import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Polaris Read-Only Import Profile

    +

    You can start with an existing Polaris read-only import profile and copy it. See Polaris Read-Only Import Profiles for a list of the Polaris import profiles and their intended purpose. The advantage to starting with one of these existing profiles is that they are already set up to handle duplicate detection, overlay, and other processing. You can rename the profile to make it more descriptive and make slight changes without affecting the overall efficiency of the automatic processing. For information on the permissions required for creating and modifying import profiles, see Set Cataloging security.

    +

    Tip:
    You can print an import profile and review all the settings. See Print an import profile.

    +

    To create a new import profile from an existing Polaris read-only profile:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Profile Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    + Utilitiesmenu.gif 

    +

    The Import Profile Manager appears.

    +
      +
    1. In the Creator box, select PolarisExec to limit the view to only the Polaris read-only profiles.
    2. +
    +

    + ImpProf.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the read-only Polaris import profile you want to copy, right-click, and select Copy.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Import profile window appears with the name of the profile you copied.

    +

    + CreatImpProfSetup.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the profile in the Name box, and an optional description in the Description box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Name the profile so it is easy for users to identify, for example, LSSIAuthority or OCLCBibliographic. If you are copying the Acquisitions Bibs or Enriched EDI Orders profile, name the profile with the vendor’s name, for example Baker & Taylor.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Click Browse and go to a specific file if you want to save the file name in the profile, or go to a directory if you want to save the directory location in the profile. If the file name is saved in the profile, the file will be selected automatically (if it exists) when a cataloger imports records using this profile. If a directory is saved in the profile, the directory location automatically displays when a cataloger clicks the Add button to add the files to be imported.
    2. +
    +

    The file name or directory location appear in the Source file name box.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    +

    The profile is saved. The Create Import Profile window remains open.

    +
      +
    1. If you need to make changes to the import profile, click the following tabs and set the import options:
    2. +
    3. When you have finished setting up the relevant import options, click Save, and click Close to close the saved profile.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Create_a_new_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Create_a_new_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1736e76b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Create_a_new_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Import Profile

    +

    Although it is preferable to start with an existing Polaris read-only import profile and copy it, you can create your own import profiles and set all the options on each tab of the Import Profile window.

    +

    To create a new import profile:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Profile Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Profile Manager appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click the New button.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Import Profile window appears.

    +

    + CreateImpProf.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the profile in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type a description for the profile in the Description box.
    4. +
    5. (Optional) If you want to include a default source file name or directory in the import profile, click Browse and locate the source file or directory location.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If the MARC or MARCXML files for this import profile are always saved in the same desktop or network location, you can save the file or directory location in the profile. If a file name is saved in the profile, the file will be selected automatically (if it exists) when a user imports records using this profile. If a directory is saved in the profile, the directory location will automatically display when a user clicks the Add button.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the new import profile.
    2. +
    +

    When you save the import profile, the title of the dialog box changes to Modify Import Profile.

    +

    Note:
    The Vendor account is used only when you are setting up an import profile for an ebook vendor.

    +
      +
    1. Select the following tabs and set the import options:
    2. +
    3. After setting up the relevant options on each tab, click Save to save the new import profile.
    4. +
    5. Click Close to close the saved profile.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8be72cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Delete an import job from the Import Jobs Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete an Import Job from the Import Jobs Queue

    +

    Import jobs remain in the Import Jobs Queue until they are manually deleted by an authorized user when there is no further use for them or the report.

    +

    To delete a completed import job:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Jobs Queue dialog box displays the details for each import job.

    +
      +
    1. Select the completed import job that you want to delete.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and selected Delete from the context menu.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d774b4d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Delete_an_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete an import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete an Import Profile

    +

    To delete an import profile:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Profile Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Profile Manager appears.

    +

    + ImpProf00127.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the profile you want to delete, and select Delete from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    A confirmation message appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to delete the profile.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Importing_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Importing_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72952ac2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Importing_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Importing Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Importing Records

    +

    When you select Utilities > Importing from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, there are two options for importing: Express Import and Full Import. If you select Express Import, you can change settings on the Profile Setup and Record Set tabs, but you cannot change the settings for bibliographic, authority, or item records. If you select Full Import, you can change settings on all the tabs in the Polaris Import Setup window if you have the appropriate permissions.

    +
    Notes:
    • Separate permissions control express and full importing. For more information, see Set Cataloging security.

    • When importing MARC records, the system assumes the staff member conducting the import has access to any record sets defined in the import profile. The system creates or modifies record sets according to the profile configuration and not based on the staff member's permissions.

    +

    Before you can import MARC or MARCXML records, they must be downloaded from the cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. or materials vendor and saved in a file on your computer’s desktop or in another location where you can easily find them. To select the file or files to be imported, you click Add in the Polaris Import Setup window, and locate the file(s). If the profile was saved with a specific import file name, the file is selected automatically (if it exists). If the profile was saved with a directory location for the source files, the window opens to that directory.

    +

    Note:
    Importing large quantities of records may slow response times for other processes in Polaris. Therefore, you may want to start the import process when the library is closed and when it will not interfere with scheduled system backups.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Modify_an_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Modify_an_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b326d5e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Modify_an_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify an import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify an Import Profile

    +

    If you have the required permissions, you can modify import profiles except for those created by Polaris. These read-only profiles have the creator name PolarisExec. You can copy and rename PolarisExec import profiles. See Copy a Polaris read-only import profile.

    +

    To modify an import profile other than a PolarisExec profile:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Profile Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Profile Manager appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select a username other than PolarisExec in the Creator box.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the profile you want to modify, or right-click and select Open from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Modify Import Profile window appears.

    +

    + ModImpProf.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To change the name of the profile, type the new name in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. To change the description of the profile, type the new description in the Description box.
    4. +
    5. To change the default directory or source file, click Browse to browse to the new location.
    6. +
    7. Click the tab containing the options you want to modify, and see the following sections for instructions on modifying these import options:
    8. +
    9. Click Save to save the profile when you have finished making modifications.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    You can check your settings by printing the profile. See Print an import profile.

    +
      +
    1. Click Close to close the profile after you have saved it.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_an_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_an_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ae88615 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_an_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print an import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print an Import Profile

    +

    To print an import profile.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Profile Manager to open the Import Profile Manager.
    2. +
    3. Select the profile, right-click and select Print> Profile or click the down arrow next to the printer icon in the toolbar and select Profile.
    4. +
    +

    + printprofile.gif 

    +

    The Import Profile document appears in the report preview window.

    +

    + importprofilepdf.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print from the menu in the report preview window.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_import_reports_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_import_reports_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1326e85e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Print_import_reports_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print import reports from the Import Jobs Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Import Reports from the Import Jobs Queue

    +

    If you want details regarding a specific import job, you can print an import report in pdf format from the Import Jobs Queue. The Import Jobs Queue lists import jobs for both bibliographic and authority records.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also print the New Titles Imported report from the Cataloging Reports menu. The New Titles Imported report shows the titles that were imported for an organization or organizations within a specific time period. For more information, see Cataloging Reports.

    +

    To print details of an import job from the Import Jobs Queue:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Jobs Queue dialog box displays the details for each import job.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the import job you want to print. Or, select the import job and click the Report button, or right-click and select Print Report.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Print from the menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Import Report pdf appears in the preview window.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print to print the report displayed in the preview window.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Import reports are not saved to the local computer. To save a copy of the report, open the report from the Import Jobs Queue, select File > Save As, and type a file name and path.

    +

    Import Report

    +

    The first section of the report lists the selected import options and the user ID of the staff member who imported the files.

    +

    + importrepintrogif.gif 

    +

    Following the import options, the report provides details for records that were imported, such as: MARC validation issues; duplicate detection and overlay; item records created; tags deleted from incoming records; tags retained from duplicate records; conflicts when the same tag is selected for deletion and retention; and resource entities created (for ebooks).

    +

    + importrepdetails.gif 

    +

    The last section lists the import statistics.

    +

    + importreportstats.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_authority_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_authority_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58e88608 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_authority_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Set import options for authority records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Import Options for Authority Records

    +

    To set the import profile options for authority records:

    +
      +
    1. Click the Authority Records tab in the Create Import Profile window.
    2. +
    +

    The Authority Records tabbed page appears.

    +

    + CreatImpProfAuth.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    You can choose not to save any authority records if you are importing a mixed file with bibliographic and authority records, and you only want to save the bibliographic records. You can also run an import without saving records to see the types of errors encountered.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following save options:
      • Save all records as final
      • Save all records as provisional
      • Do not save any records
    2. +
    3. If you chose to save the incoming authority records as final, and you want to check the MARC format, select the Perform MARC 21 Validation check box, and choose one of the following options:
      • Select Save record as provisional to save the record provisionally if errors in MARC format are detected.
      • Select Ignore errors; save record as final to save authority records as final when they have errors in MARC format.
    4. +
    5. To check for duplicate authority records that already exist in the Polaris database, select Perform Duplicate Detection, and choose one of the following options:
      • Select Use system duplicate detection rules to use the standard duplicate detection rules.
      • Select Use custom duplicate detection rules to specify what tags will be used to match the incoming records with existing records to identify duplicates.
    6. +
    7. If you selected Use custom duplication detection rules, do the following steps:
      1. Select the duplication detection rules from the Rules to select list.
      2. Click rtarrowbut00125.gif to add the rule to the Rules to apply (as unique groups) list.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. If you selected Perform Duplicate Detection, indicate how you want Polaris to handle duplicate records by selecting one of the following options:
      • Select Save incoming as provisional to save the incoming duplicate records as provisional.
      • Select Save incoming as final; do not replace existing to save the incoming duplicate records as final but not replace the existing records.
      • Select Merge duplicate records to merge incoming authority records with duplicate authority records already in your database.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Merge duplicate records, select the branch whose preferred cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. you want to use in the Preferred cataloging source for box.
    4. +
    5. To perform See Also From reference linking when no match exists in the database, select the Perform See Also From Reference Linking check box, and select one of the following options:
      • Select Automatically create new see also reference; save authority record as final to create a new “see also” reference and save the record as final.
      • Select Do not create see also reference; save authority record as final if you do not want to create a “see also” reference, and you want to save the record as final.
      • Select Do not create see also reference; save authority record as provisional if you do not want to create a “see also” reference, and you want to save the record as provisional.
    6. +
    7. Click Save to save the profile, and click another tab or close the profile.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9268d58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set import options for bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Import Options for Bibliographic Records

    +

    To set the import profile options for bibliographic records:

    +
      +
    1. +

      Select the Bibliographic Records tab in the Modify Import Profile window.

      +

      The Bibliographic Records tabbed page appears.

      +

      Note:
      To create item records from embedded holdings when importing bibliographic records, see Set Import Options for Item Records.

      +

      + CreatImpProfBib.gif 

      +
    2. +
    3. +

      Select the organization that will own the records in the Record owner box.

      +

      Note:
      The record owner is the organization that can determine the permissions related to the record.

      +
    4. +
    5. Select one of the following options under Bibliographic Save Options:
      • Save all records as final to save all the incoming records as final.
      • Save all records as provisional to save the incoming records as provisional.
      • Do not save any records to reject all incoming bibliographic records.

        Note:
        You could select this option when importing a mixed file with bibliographic and authority records, and you only want to save the authority records.

    6. +
    7. If you do not want the imported records to display in the PAC, clear the Display in PAC check box. The Display in PAC box is checked by default.
    8. +
    9. To protect all incoming records that are saved to the database so that they cannot be overlaid in future processing, select the Do not overlay box. All other import processing defined in the import profile is performed first, and only records that are saved to the database are flagged with the Do not overlay check box that prevents the records from being overlaid.
    10. +
    11. To delete specific MARC tags from incoming records as they are saved to the database, select the Delete MARC Tags on incoming records check box, and select one of the following options:
      • System defined deletion tags - Deletes the tags that are defined in the Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table in Polaris Administration. See Specify Tags to Retain from Overlaid Bibs.
      • Profile defined deletion tags - Deletes tags that are defined in the import profile.
    12. +
    13. If you select Profile defined deletion tags, do the following steps to specify the tags you want to delete:
      1. Select RetTagbtn.gif to add a deletion tag.

        The Delete Tags dialog box appears.

      2. In the Tag box, type the tag you want to delete from the incoming record.

      3. If you want all indicator values included, leave all the values in the Indicator 1 and Indicator 2 boxes highlighted.

        Note:
        Select a highlighted indicator value to remove it.

      4. Select OK to add the tag and indicator values to the list of tags to be deleted.

        Tip:
        If you are importing brief bibliographic records to be used to create purchase orders, select Ignore errors; save record as final.

    14. +
    15. To check the MARC format of records you are saving as final, select Perform MARC 21 Validation, and choose one of the following options:
      • Save record as provisional - Records with MARC format errors are saved as provisional.
      • Ignore errors; save record as final - Records are saved as final even when they have MARC format errors.

        Note:
        Bibliographic records must have a Leader and 008 tag to be imported and saved in the Polaris database even if MARC validation is not performed.

        Records in MARC XML format are validated using the MARC validation: Bibliographic profile in Polaris Administration. In addition, the XML structure of the file is checked to ensure it conforms to the MARC XML standard. If the file does not conform to the standard, the records are not imported, and an error appears in the import report.

        Tip:
        If your library has a subscription to a remote database of authority records, the remote database is automatically searched when no matching authority record is found. The new authority record is saved in the database and linked to the new bibliographic records.

    16. +
    17. If you select Perform Authority Control, select one of the following options:
      • Automatically create new authority record; save bibliographic record as final - A new authority record is created, and the bibliographic record is saved as final.
      • Do not create authority record; save bibliographic record as final - No authority record is created, and the bibliographic record is saved as final.
      • Do not create authority record; save bibliographic record as provisional - No authority record is created, and the bibliographic record is saved as provisional.
    18. +
    19. To check for duplicate bibliographic records that already exist in the Polaris database, select Perform Duplicate Detection, and choose one of the following options:
      • Use system defined duplicate detection rules - Use the standard duplicate detection rules that are set in Polaris Administration. See Managing Duplicate MARC Records.
      • Use profile defined duplicate detection rules - Use the duplicate detection rules that are set up in the profile. If you select this option, you must define the duplicate detection rules.
    20. +
    21. +

      If you selected Use profile defined duplicate detection rules, do the following steps:

      +

      Note:
      Skip this step if you selected Use system defined duplicate detection rules.

      +
        +
      1. +

        Select the duplicate detection rules from the Rules to select list.

        +
      2. +
      3. +

        Select rtarrowbut.gif to add the rule to the Rules to apply (as unique groups) list.

        +

        Note:
        You can select more than one rule, but these rules are applied as separate groups, so only one of the rules needs to be met for a record to be considered a duplicate. See Change Bibliographic or Authority Deduplication Tables.

        +
      4. +
      +
    22. +
    23. +

      If you selected Perform Duplicate Detection, indicate how you want Polaris to handle duplicate records by selecting one of the following options under If a suspected duplicate is found:

      +
        +
      • +

        Save incoming record as provisional - The incoming duplicate record is saved as provisional. Only the resident record with a status of final is indexed.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Save incoming record as final; do not replace database record - The incoming duplicate record is saved as final but does not replace the database record. Two similar or identical bibliographic records are saved to the database and both are indexed and searchable.

        +

        Tip:
        The import report indicates if any database records that would have been replaced are protected from being overlaid because they are flagged with a Do not overlay check box.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Save incoming record as final; replace database record - The existing record is overlayed by the new incoming record but its control number is retained. You can also select Keep MARC tags and select System defined overlay retention tags or Profile defined overlay retention tags.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Save record with highest encoding level. If encoding levels match: +

        +
          +
        • +

          Save incoming record as final; replace database record - This option is selected by default. You can also choose to reject the incoming record or save the incoming record as provisional. The control number is retained only when saving the record as final. You can also select Keep MARC tags (either system- or profile-defined) to retain specific tags from the replaced database record.

          +

          Tip:
          For information on how records get overlaid based on encoding levels, see Bibliographic Overlay Based on Encoding Level.

          +
        • +
        • +

          Reject incoming record - If this option is selected, you can also select Keep MARC tags (either system- or profile-defined) to retain tags from the incoming record that was rejected.

          +
        • +
        • +

          Save incoming record as provisional (Ignore ‘Keep MARC tags’) - If this option is selected, the incoming record is saved provisionally, and the database record remains. Even if the Keep MARC tags box is checked, the import ignores the setting.

          +

          Tip:
          When an existing bibliographic record is overlaid with a new bibliographic record, the links to the item records are maintained and the circulation counts remain. In addition, any holds attached to the old record are transferred to the new record. These requests maintain their position in the holds queue. See Working with Hold Requests.

          +
        • +
        • +

          Reject incoming record; add MARC retention tags to database record - The incoming duplicate record is deleted, but any system-defined or profile-defined MARC tags are retained from the incoming record and appended to the database record. When you select this option, Keep MARC tags is selected automatically. You can select System defined overlay retention tags or Profile defined overlay retention tags.

          +
        • +
        +
      • +
      +
    24. +
    25. +

      If not already selected, select Keep MARC tags to retain specific tags from records that are overlaid or rejected, and select one of the following options:

      +

      Important:
      When the profile is set to reject incoming duplicate records but retain certain MARC tags, these tags are retained in the database record, and the database record is added to the record set. See Set import options for record sets.

      +
        +
      • System defined overlay retention tags - Retains the tags that are defined in the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table in Polaris Administration policy tables. For more information about how retentions and deletions are processed, see Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs.
      • +
      • +

        Profile defined overlay retention tags - Retains tags that are defined in the profile.

        +

        Note:
        If you are using a profile that is set to overlay or reject the incoming records and retain 970 tags (such as the Acquisitions Bibs profile), you may want to specify additional tags to retain such as the 020 (ISBN) or 024 (UPC). When these tags are retained from an incoming record that is a duplicate of an existing record, and the existing record has multiple ISBNs or UPCs, the most-recently added ISBN or UPC is at the top of the list in a purchase order line item.

        +
      • +
      +
    26. +
    27. If you select Profile defined overlay retention tags, do the following steps to specify the tags you want to retain:
      1. Select RetTagbtn00124.gif to add a retention tag.

        The Retain Tags dialog box appears.

      2. In the Tag box, type the tag you want to retain from the existing record.

      3. If you want all indicator values included, leave all the values in the Indicator 1 and Indicator 2 boxes highlighted.

        Note:
        Select a highlighted indicator value to remove it.

      4. Select OK to add the tag and indicator values to the list of tags to be retained.

    28. +
    29. Select Save to save the profile.
    30. +
    31. Select Close to close the profile or select another tab to make other settings.
    32. +
    +

    Setting Profile-Defined Duplicate Detection Rules

    +

    Only one rule needs to be met to identify the records as duplicates.

    +

    Duplicate Detection on the 024 (Other standard identifier)

    +

    If you are importing bibliographic records with an 024, Other Standard Identifier, select the Profile defined duplicate detection rules option in the import profile, and select the rules as follows:   

    +
      +
    • If the first indicator is 1 - Universal Product Code, select the incoming UPC = existing UPC rule.
    • +
    +

    + UPCrule.gif 

    +
      +
    • If the first indicator is 3 - International Article Number, select the incoming ISBN = existing ISBN rule.
    • +
    +

    + ISBNRule.gif 

    +
      +
    • If the first indicator is anything other than 1 or 3, select the incoming 024$a = existing 024$a rule.
    • +
    +

    + 024Rule.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_item_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_item_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..673baff2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_item_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set import options for item records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Import Options for Item Records

    +

    To set the import profile options for item records:

    +

    Tip:
    You can select the system import profile Polaris default with item creation to create item records using default settings. To make changes to this profile, you can copy it and save it with a different name. If you are copying an import profile, and your vendor does not use a subfield, make sure you remove the subfield mapping from the profile on the Item Records tab. See Copy a Polaris read-only import profile.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Item Records tab in the Create Import Profile window.
    2. +
    +

    The Item Records tabbed page appears.

    +

    + CreatImpProfItem.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To create item records when you import bibliographic records, select the Build item records check box.
    2. +
    +

    The other options for building item records become active when you select Build item records.

    +
      +
    1. If you selected Build item records, select one of the following options for creating item records:
      • Using embedded holdings fields only - Items are created from the embedded holdings data in the 852, 949 or other tag in the bibliographic record.
      • Using template/system default values only - Items are created from the information in the template and any system defaults for item records. No embedded holdings tags are used to create the item records.
      • Using all available holdings/item fields - Items are created from holdings information, if it is available. If the holdings tag does not contain the information but the template does, the field on the item record is filled in from the template.
    2. +
    3. Under If a duplicate item record (barcode) is found, select one of the following options to indicate how you want duplicate item record barcodes to be handled:
      • Save duplicate item record as provisional to save duplicates as provisional records.
      • Do not save duplicate item record if you do not want duplicate item records to be saved.
    4. +
    5. Under If no item record barcode is found, select one of the following options to indicate how you want item records without barcodes to be saved.
      • Save item record as final - Saves the new item records as final records, even if they do not have barcodes.
      • Save item record as provisional - Saves the new items as provisional records if they do not have a barcode.
      • Do not save item record - If there is no barcode, the item record is not saved.
    6. +
    7. If you do not want the item records to display in the PAC, clear the Display in PAC (when not explicitly found) check box. This option is checked as the default.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    If you use a template, the setting for Display in PAC in the item template overrides any setting made here.

    +
      +
    1. To use a template to fill in information not specified in the holdings data, select Item template (for fields that are missing) and select the item template from the list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Update items (enriched EDI) option is used only if you are importing full MARC records and creating shelf-ready items. The Enriched EDI Order import profile is already set up to update these items. See Enriched EDI Orders Import Profile.

    +
      +
    1. Under Embedded holdings field/MARC subfield mapping, type the tag number where the holdings data is located in the Holdings tag number box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The data in the circ status subfield of the embedded holdings field is used except if the circ status code would result in a circulation status that is not allowed for new item records. If the circ status in the embedded holdings is a status such as Lost or Held, the template value is used (if a template is specified) or the item circ status gets the default value of In.

    +
      +
    1. In each item record field box, type the subfield letter or number for the bibliographic subfield in the embedded holdings tag that contains this information.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    To create item records from embedded holdings in imported bibliographic records, the data in certain required fields must match the data in Polaris. For example, if your profile has defined 852 tag subfield a for the Assigned Branch, the data in $a must match an ID or abbreviation for a branch in your system, and it must not exceed 15 characters. For information on the data conventions in embedded holdings data, see Item Records Created from Embedded Holdings Tags.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the import profile.
    2. +
    3. Click Close to close the profile or click another tab to make other settings.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Embedded holdings data details and data entry conventions - See Item Records Created from Embedded Holdings Tags.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Holdings tags retained during overlay marked with $9 - If the import profile is set to retain embedded holdings tags (such as the 852 or 949) from overlaid records, the specified tags are retained in the bibliographic record before item records are created. If the bibliographic record also has existing embedded holdings tags, they are marked with a $9 and the text Tag retained from duplicate overlay. Item records are not created from embedded holdings tags marked with a subfield $9. See Bib Tags Marked to Prevent Creation/Updates of Items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Mark embedded holdings tags as processed - If this Polaris Administration parameter is set to Yes, when item records are created successfully from embedded holdings tags, a $9 is inserted into the embedded holdings tags in the bibliographic records with the following automatic processing information: Item generated mmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM]. See Mark embedded holdings data as processed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Clean up embedded holdings tags marked with $9 - A utility can be set up to delete embedded holdings tags and other tags (970s) marked with a subfield 9 and specific system-generated text. See Set up the Subfield 9 cleanup utility.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris read-only import profiles - Polaris has read-only import profiles set up to do certain types of processing. You can use these import profiles or rename them while keeping all the settings. See Polaris Read-Only Import Profiles.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Shelving scheme - The shelving scheme comes from the subfield in the Embedded holdings field/MARC subfield mapping. If no subfield is specified there, the shelving scheme comes from the template selected in the Item template (for fields that are missing) box. If no template is selected, or if the template does not include a shelving scheme, and the embedded holdings are in the 852 tag, the shelving scheme comes from the first indicator of the 852 tag. If the first indicator of the 852 tag has an invalid value, or the embedded holdings are contained in a different tag, use the default shelving scheme defined in the Polaris Administration Cataloging profile Default shelving scheme for new item records. See Setting Item Copy and Save Options.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_record_sets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_record_sets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..706c2cb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Set_import_options_for_record_sets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set import options for record sets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Import Options for Record Sets

    +

    When you are importing records, you can specify that certain types of records are to be grouped in record sets to facilitate record retrieval or bulk processing. If you are importing multiple files in a single import job, each file of MARC records has its own record set. You can set up record sets for grouping the following types of cataloging records: final bibliographic records, provisional bibliographic records, bibliographic records with a deleted status, final authority records, provisional authority records, authority records with a deleted status, final item records, and provisional item records.

    +

    To set the profile options for record sets:

    +

    Note:
    If you specify a bibliographic record set, the imported records are added to it. However, if the profile is set to reject incoming duplicate bibliographic records but retain specific tags from the rejected records, the resident bibliographic record with the retained tags is added to the record set. For example, if you import brief bibliographic records with 970 tags for creating purchase orders, the profile is set to reject incoming duplicate records, but retain the 970 tags. The 970 tags are saved in the resident record, and it is added to the record set. When the record set is bulk-added to a purchase order, the 970 tags automatically create the purchase order line item distribution grid.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Record Sets tab in the Create Import Profile window.
    2. +
    +

    The Record Sets tabbed page appears.

    +

    + CreateImpProfRec.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    Name record sets so your staff can easily identify them when searching for records. If you are setting up a profile for importing records to bulk add to purchase orders, name the record set to identify the vendor. You can use the profile each time you import records from that vendor. Also, you may want to set the branch as the record set’s owner because if the owner is a staff member, only that staff member can modify the record set.

    +
      +
    1. For each cataloging record type, choose one of the following options:
      • Select Save to new record set, type the name of the record set in the Name box, and select the owner in the Owner box.
      • Select Save to existing record set, click Find to locate the record set, and select Append or Replace.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you have specified a record set for records with a status of Deleted, imported records with a status of Deleted are put in a record set. In addition, existing records that are overlaid by duplicate incoming records are put in the Deleted record set.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the profile, and click Close to close it or click another tab to make other settings.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f29b85c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Import Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Import Profiles

    +

    You can set up import profiles and then use them whenever you are importing records into the Polaris database. For best results, start with a Polaris read-only profile that is designed for a specific type of import, copy the profile and rename it. For example, if you are importing bibliographic records with embedded holdings data, you can select the Polaris default (with item creation) profile, copy it, and save it with a different name.

    +

    Tip:
    To review all the settings in an import profile, you can print a report from the Import Profile Manager. See Print an import profile.

    +

    The following permissions, set at the System level, control who can work with import profiles: Import profiles: Access, Create, Delete, and Modify.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Polaris Read-Only Import Profiles

    +

    To see the Polaris read-only import profiles defined for specific types of import processing, select Utilities, Importing, Profile Manager.

    +

    + profileman.gif 

    +

    The Import Profile window opens.

    +

    Select PolarisExec in the Creator box to limit the list to only the Polaris read-only import profiles.

    +

    Polaris includes the following read-only import profiles that are designed for specific types of import processing: Acquisitions Bibs Import Profile, Authority Update Import, Enriched EDI Orders, Integrated ebook Bibs, Polaris default, and Polaris default (with item creation). The Integrated ebook Bibs import profile is used exclusively for importing eContent bibliographic records.

    +

    Acquisitions Bibs Import Profile

    +

    When you import bibliographic records using an online collection development tool, you can use the Acquisitions Bibs profile. The profile is set to ignore MARC validation errors because the incoming records are brief and do not require validation. When a duplicate is found, the incoming record is rejected, and the 970 tags from both records are retained in the full bibliographic record.

    +

    Copy the Acquisitions Bibs profile for each vendor you use to import records, name each copy of the Acquisitions Bibs profile with the name of the vendor, and make any changes to the settings.

    +

    Important: +
    To ensure that the most-recently entered ISBN or UPC is retained, you must add the 020 (ISBN) and 024 (UPC) tags to the profile-defined retention tags. When these tags are retained from an incoming record that is a duplicate of an existing record, and the existing record has multiple ISBNs or UPCs, the most-recently added ISBN or UPC is at the top of the list in a purchase order line item.

    +

    Authority Update Import Profile

    +

    If you use the Authorities Weekly service to keep your authority records current, use the import profile Authority Update Import to import the updated authority records. Innovative Interfaces sets up this profile specifically for importing updated authority records. This import profile is set to perform duplicate detection using system-defined duplicate detection rules, and if duplicates are found, merge the duplicate records based on which record has a higher ranking in the Authority Record Import Preferred Cataloging Source policy table at the System level.

    +

    Important:
    The Authority Update Import profile is set to check the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source policy table at the system level. To ensure that the updated records from ZMARC files always overlay existing records, delete all entries in the table at the system level. Then, enter the preferred sources in the Preferred Cataloging Source policy table at the branch level so that the branch determines the preferred cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. for non-ZMARC imports. For more information, see Specify preferred cataloging sources for authority records.

    +

    Enriched EDI Orders Import Profile

    +

    The Enriched EDI Orders profile is set up specifically to import full bibliographic records from your book vendor and create “shelf-ready” item records, including location and collection information (and the call number fields, if your supplier can process this data). It is set to perform MARC validation, authority control, and duplicate detection. If a duplicate is found, the record with the highest encoding level is saved and 949 tags are retained. If you send enriched EDI orders to vendors through Acquisitions, copy this profile to reflect the vendor’s name, but leave most of the settings as they are.

    +

    The Item Records tab of the Enriched EDI Orders import profile is set to build item records from the data in the 949 tag. If your library and supplier decide to embed the holdings data in a tag other than the 949 tag, you can change the profile to indicate the correct tag.

    +

    Tip:
    When Update items (enriched EDI) is selected, you cannot enter a value in the Circ Status box in the Embedded holdings field/MARC subfield mapping list.

    +

    The system matches the content of the 949$e in the incoming bibliographic record to the purchase order line item segment, and the linked on-order item is updated with the full item data from the imported bibliographic record. The updated item is ready to circulate once it is checked in.  

    +

    However, if there are 949 tags with a purchase order line item segment ID in tag 949 $e and a volume designation in 949 $v, a final item record will be created even if no matching on-order item is found. The new final item record is linked to the purchase order line item segment in $e. This allows holds that were placed at the bibliographic level for an on-order set to go to the first volume of the set.

    +

    Polaris Default Import Profile

    +

    This is a general profile for importing bibliographic records. It is set up to perform MARC validation and duplicate detection, and to save records as provisional if any MARC formatting errors or duplicate records are found.

    +

    Polaris Default (with item creation) Import Profile +

    +

    The Polaris Default (with item creation) import profile has the same settings on the Bibliographic Records tab as the Polaris Default import profile, but the Item Records tab is set to create item records from embedded holdings data in 852 tags.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles_and_Importing_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles_and_Importing_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5d31bfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Setting_Up_Import_Profiles_and_Importing_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records

    +

    Innovative Interfaces provides read-only import profiles (identified by the owner PolarisExec) designed for specific purposes, such as importing brief records for purchase orders or importing updated authority records. Although you cannot change the settings in a PolarisExec import profile, you can copy the profile, rename it, and then modify the settings. See Polaris Read-Only Import Profiles for a list of the PolarisExec import profiles and their uses.

    +

    Tip:
    For information on implementing the Authorities Weekly service, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    Staff members with the appropriate permissions can set the following automatic processing options, among others, in the Import Setup window:

    +
      +
    • Perform MARC validation
    • +
    • Save records as provisional or final
    • +
    • Check duplicates based on system- or profile-defined rules
    • +
    • Specify tags to retain from overlaid records using system- or profile-defined tags
    • +
    • Specify tags to delete using system- or profile-defined tags
    • +
    • Check the preferred cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. when merging duplicate authority records
    • +
    • Create or update item records from embedded holdings data in the bibliographic records
    • +
    • Protect the incoming records from being overlaid in the future
    • +
    • Group the imported records in record sets for easy retrieval and bulk processing.
    • +
    +

    Before you can import bibliographic or authority records, the MARC or MARCXML record files must be downloaded from the cataloging source or materials vendor to your computer’s desktop or another accessible network location. Then, select the import profile and specify the location of the files to import.

    +

    All import processing takes place on the server, so once an import is launched, the Polaris Staff Client can be used for other tasks. Users with the required permissions can manage import jobs and specify blackout times when importing jobs cannot be run. For more information, see Specify import blackout times.

    +

    When you import bibliographic records with a LDR/05 of d (deleted), a bibliographic record with a status of deleted is created and saved if the Polaris Administration profile Retain deleted bibliographic records is set to Yes. If the incoming bibliographic record is a duplicate of an existing record, the incoming record overlays the existing record (unless it has unbreakable links to other records). Both the incoming record with a status of deleted and the existing record with a status of deleted are put into a record set, if one is specified. You can then permanently delete all the records in that record set, or you can use the purge process to remove records with a deleted status from the database. See Purge cataloging records. If the Polaris Administration profile Retain deleted bibliographic records is set to No, imported records with a deleted status overlay existing duplicate records, and both the incoming and existing record are removed from the database.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Stop_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Stop_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c0a60b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Stop_an_import_job_from_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Stop an import job from the Import Jobs Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Stop an Import Job from the Import Jobs Queue

    +

    If you stop a pending import job, no import processing occurs. If you stop a running import job, any records that may have already been processed are not affected. This may mean that some records have been processed, and others have not, resulting in an incomplete record set and report. You cannot “roll back” records already imported, and stopped jobs cannot be restarted. If you stop a blacked out import job, only those records that have not been imported are affected; any records already imported before the blackout time are not affected.

    +

    To stop an import job from the Import Jobs Queue:

    +

    Important:
    If you have permission to do importing (either Import bibliographic, item and authority records: Allow or Express importing: Allow), you can stop or delete your own import jobs from the Import Jobs Queue. However, to stop or delete import jobs initiated by other staff members, you need the permission Manage import jobs for this organization: Allow for the system or branch organization where the job was initiated. Staff members who require control over importing for multiple (or all) branches must be granted the Manage import jobs for this organization: Allow permission at the system level.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Jobs Queue dialog box displays the details for each import job.

    +
      +
    1. Before stopping an import job, refresh the Import Jobs Queue to make sure you are seeing the most recent status of the files.
    2. +
    3. Select the import job, and click the Stop button in the toolbar, or right-click, and select Stop from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    A message informs you that the stopped import job cannot be restarted and asks you to confirm that you want to stop the import job.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to stop the import.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Express_Import_to_import_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Express_Import_to_import_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebda0ad3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Express_Import_to_import_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + Use Express Import to import records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Use Express Import to Import Records

    +

    The Express Import option allows staff members to import records using an existing profile that specifies the appropriate importing options. The only settings that can be changed for an express import are the source file name, the report name, and the options on the Record Sets tabbed page. To import records using the Express Import option:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Express Import from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Import Setup window appears.

    +

    + ExpressImp.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    If you are importing authority records from Polaris ZMARC automatic authority updates, select the profile Authority Update Import.

    +
      +
    1. Select the profile from the list.
    2. +
    3. Click the Add button to browse to the import file(s) on the computer desktop or network.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the profile was saved with a specific import file name, the file is selected automatically (if it exists). If the profile was saved with a directory location for the source files, when you click Add, the window opens to that directory.

    +

    + addmultimport.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the MARC or MARCXML file or files, and click Open.
    2. +
    +

    The files are listed in the Import Setup window.

    +
      +
    1. To change the defaults for record sets, click the Record Sets tab, and follow the steps in Set import options for record sets.
    2. +
    3. Click Import to import the records.
    4. +
    +

    An initializing dialog box displays for a few seconds. If necessary, you can cancel the import by clicking Cancel on the message box. Canceled jobs do not appear in the Import Jobs Queue.

    +

    + cancelimpjob.gif 

    +

    When initializing has completed, another message box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to see the Import Jobs Queue and the status of your import files.
    2. +
    +

    Your files may be in a pending status for a few minutes before import processing begins.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Full_Import_to_import_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Full_Import_to_import_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c309a395 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Use_Full_Import_to_import_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + Use Full Import to import records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Use Full Import to Import Records +

    +

    When you use the Full Import option, you can use a profile and accept all the settings, change the settings, or manually set all options on all tabs of the Polaris Import Setup window. To import records using the Full Import option:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Importing, Full Import from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Import Setup - Full window appears.

    +

    + FullImp.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To manually set the import options, see:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can start with a profile that is not read-only, and change an option before starting the import.

    +
      +
    1. To use a profile, select it from the list.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the profile from the list.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you are importing authority records from Polaris ZMARC automatic authority updates, select the profile Authority Update Import.

    +
      +
    1. Click Add to browse to the import file(s) on the computer desktop or network.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the profile was saved with a specific import file name, the file is selected automatically (if it exists). If the profile was saved with a directory location for the source files, when you click Add, the window opens to that directory.

    +

    + addmultimport00128.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the MARC or MARCXML file or files, and click Open.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can import MARC and MARCXML files in the same import job.

    +

    The file or files are listed in the Import Setup window.

    +
      +
    1. Click Import to import the records.
    2. +
    +

    An initializing dialog box displays for a few seconds. If necessary, you can cancel the import by clicking Cancel on the message box. Canceled jobs do not appear in the Import Jobs Queue.

    +

    + cancelimpjob00129.gif 

    +

    When initializing has completed, another message box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to see the Import Jobs Queue and the status of your import files.
    2. +
    +

    Your files may be in a pending status for a few minutes before import processing begins.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Using_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Using_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8724356e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/Using_the_Import_Jobs_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using the Import Jobs Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using the Import Jobs Queue

    +

    The Import Jobs Queue shows import jobs that are currently running, all pending jobs that have not yet run, and jobs that have completed. All import jobs for all clients that use the same server go to a single job queue in the order in which they were added to the queue, with the most recently-added jobs at the end of the queue. You can use the Import Jobs Queue to view jobs, stop jobs, print reports, and delete jobs.

    +

    The Import Jobs Queue contains the following columns:

    +
      +
    • Path - The complete path for the import file
    • +
    • File - The name of the import file
    • +
    • Organization - The organization for which the user is logged in
    • +
    • User - The user who launched the import job
    • +
    • Workstation - The workstation from which the import job was launched
    • +
    • Type - The type of records in the import
    • +
    • Status - The status of the import job (Initializing, Running, Pending, Completed, Stopped, Blacked out)
    • +
    • Records Read - The number of records in the import file
    • +
    • Records Created - The number of records created in the Polaris database
    • +
    • Posted - The date and time the import job was launched
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/View_import_jobs_in_the_queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/View_import_jobs_in_the_queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1702ea8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKimport/View_import_jobs_in_the_queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + View import jobs in the queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View Import Jobs in the Queue

    +

    To view import jobs in the Import Jobs Queue:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue to open the Import Jobs Queue window.
    2. +
    +

    By default, the jobs are sorted by the date and time posted. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them. Automatic imports for eContent are also listed.

    +
      +
    1. Click any column heading to sort the list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Pending import jobs have been successfully initialized, but the import processing has not yet begun. Blacked out import jobs have been successfully initialized, or may have started running, but import processing is not currently allowed because a system- or user-defined blackout time is in effect. When the blackout time has ended, processing automatically begins or resumes.

    +

    + importjobsqueue.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the Refresh button or press F5 periodically to refresh the queue and see the most recent import jobs.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_an_existing_item_record_from_the_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_an_existing_item_record_from_the_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa09677a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_an_existing_item_record_from_the_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change an existing item record from the workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change an Existing Item Record from the Workform

    +

    To change an existing item record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Edit the fields in the Item Record workform.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save, press Ctrl+S or click.
    6. +
    +

    If no message box appears, The record was saved successfully appears in the status bar of the Item Record workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_existing_item_records_linked_bib.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_existing_item_records_linked_bib.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74fd99f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_existing_item_records_linked_bib.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change an existing item record’s linked bib + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change an existing item record’s linked bib

    +

    To link an existing item record to a different bibliographic record:

    +

    Tip:
    If you need to change the linked bibliographic record for multiple items, put the item records in a record set and change the control number using bulk change. See Changing Multiple Item Records.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Open the bibliographic record you want to link to the item record.
    4. +
    5.  Select the control number on the Bibliographic Record workform, right-click, and select Copy from the context menu.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Paste the new control number in the Bib control box on the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Save the item record.
    4. +
    +

    The item record will be linked to the bibliographic record you selected.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      If you change the bibliographic record linked to a serial holdings record, and there are item records linked to retained serial issues for that serial holdings record, the item records are linked to the new bibliographic record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Any holds that were placed on item records linked to the old bibliographic record are updated with the new bibliographic information.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_label_options_from_Cataloging.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_label_options_from_Cataloging.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34d274b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Change_label_options_from_Cataloging.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Change label options from Cataloging + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change Label Options from Cataloging

    +

    You can change the print method and the default label type at the staff level without setting profiles in Polaris Administration. However, once you change the settings, your staff member login no longer inherits the settings made at the system, library, or branch level in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To change label options from Cataloging:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Cataloging Options dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the label type from the Label Type box.
    2. +
    +

    To always use this label type, select Open Label Manager using this default.

    +
      +
    1.  Select the printing method for Cataloging labels in the Print Method box.
      • On Demand - Users must request a label for each item.
      • Quick Print - Labels are printed without opening Label Manager.
      • Batch - Multiple labels are generated when the user requests them, but they are not printed until the user opens Label Manager and prints them.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Cataloging labels settings are changed for your staff member login. When you log in to Polaris, labels will be generated and printed according to the settings you made.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Changing_Item_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Changing_Item_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ddb3d03a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Changing_Item_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Changing Item Records

    +

    You can change an existing item record by opening it in the Item Record workform. To make the same change in multiple item records, you can use the Bulk Change process; see Changing Multiple Item Records.

    +

    When you change an item record and save it, a warning message may appear, depending on the information you changed and the following profiles in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    • Item records: Warning if changing assigned or home branch - If this profile is set to Yes for your organization, and you change the assigned or home branch, a warning message appears.
    • +
    • Item records: Warning for items saved with modified barcode - If this profile is set to Yes for your organization, and you change the item’s existing barcode, a warning message appears.
    • +
    • Item records: Warning for items saved with Display in PAC unchecked - If this profile is set to Yes for your organization, and you save the item record with the Display in PAC check box unchecked, a warning message appears.
    • +
    • Item records: Warning for items saved without barcodes - If this profile is set to Yes for your organization, and you save the item record without a barcode, a warning message appears.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For information on setting these Cataloging profiles, see Displaying Warning Messages for Bibs and Items.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_single_new_item_record_manually.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_single_new_item_record_manually.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68e89811 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_single_new_item_record_manually.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a single new item record manually + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Single New Item Record Manually

    +

    To create a new item record manually:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click the New button.
    4. +
    +

    The New Item record dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options:
      • Clear Work Form - Create a new item record without any information filled in.
      • Copy Existing Work Form - Create a new item record with the same information as the item record you have open.
      • Use Existing Template - Create a new item record with information from a template. When you select Use Existing Template, select the template from the list.
    2. +
    +

    The new Item Record workform, Cataloging view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter information for the item record by following the steps in Enter basic information for an item record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_subordinate_child_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_subordinate_child_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8e1e8a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_a_subordinate_child_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a subordinate (child) item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Subordinate (child) Item record

    +

    Use this procedure for creating subordinate items in a multiple-part holding. This procedure links all item records in the multiple-part holding to the same bibliographic record. To link the items to different bibliographic records, see Link subordinate items to different records.

    +

    Example:
    A library has a Learn Russian In Seven Days language kit containing an audio recording, a textbook, and an English-Russian dictionary. The kit container is assigned an item record and a barcode. If the library chooses to also create and assign individual item records and barcodes to the recording, textbook, and dictionary, the three item records can be linked as children to the kit container’s parent-item record.

    +

    Tip:
    Select Create > Child Item Record on the context menu for the primary item record, and go to step 3 of this procedure.

    +

    To create a subordinate (child) item record automatically linked to a primary (parent) item record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform for the primary item of the multiple-part holding.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create > Child Item Records on the Item Record workform.
    4. +
    +

    The New Item Record Options dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter information for the subordinate item (see Create multiple item records for a single title).
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    When your circulation staff is checking out a multi-part holding, such as a kit, checking out the primary item does not automatically check out the subordinate items. All items in the kit must be checked out.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_copies_of_a_label.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_copies_of_a_label.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..52355656 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_copies_of_a_label.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create multiple copies of a label + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Multiple Copies of a Label

    +

    You can create multiple labels from a single basic label when you have several volumes in a set (such as an encyclopedia) that have the same call number.

    +

    To create multiple copies of a label:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Label Request > Multi-Label or click multilabel00145.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Insert Multiple Labels dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a number in the Number of labels to insert box and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Label Manager appears.

    +
      +
    1. To preview the layout of the labels, select File > Print Preview.
    2. +
    3. To edit the labels, see Edit labels.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Print or click the Print button to print the labels.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_item_records_for_a_single_title.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_item_records_for_a_single_title.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43e5dcf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Create_multiple_item_records_for_a_single_title.htm @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create multiple item records for a single title + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create multiple item records for a single title

    +

    To create one or more item records linked to the same bibliographic record:

    +

    Note:
    Item records can be created automatically when importing bibliographic records with embedded holdings data. See Set import options for item records.

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you are creating all items using the same template, you can select it on the New dialog box. If you are creating items using different templates, do not select a template on the New dialog box. Click OK without selecting a template and go to the New Item Record Options dialog box where you can select a different template for each item.

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      From the Polaris Shortcut bar, select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click the New button and select Item Record from the New dialog box. Then, select a template or click OK.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Press F12 to open the Bibliographic Record Find Tool, search for the bibliographic record and open it in the Bibliographic Record workform. Then, select Tools > Create Item Record, or click bibicontocreateitem.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      From the Item Record workform, select Tools > Create Item Record.

      +
    • +
    +
    +

    The New Item Record Options dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find and select a bibliographic record if you started from the new dialog box or you want to change the bibliographic information.
    2. +
    +

    The title, author, and bib control number boxes are copied from the bibliographic record to the New Item Record Options dialog box. If the bibliographic record contains call number information, it is also copied from the bibliographic record to the New Item Record Options dialog box if the Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. The price is copied from the bibliographic record to the New Item Record Options dialog box if the profile Bring price from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes in Polaris Administration.

    +

    The Item Create Call Number Hierarchy and the Item Price Hierarchy database tables specify the order in which the tags in bibliographic records are checked for the call number and price.

    +

    Tip:
    If you know the bibliographic control number, you can type it in the bib control number box, and press Tab. If you press Enter, the dialog box closes.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to use item templates, click in the Template column on the first row of the distribution grid, and select a template from the list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When a template is selected, the information from the template pre-fills the distribution information in the grid row. The Use template values instead of these (if available) check box is selected automatically. If this check box remains checked, the values from the template will be used in the new item records instead of the values in the New Item Record Options dialog box. If the template is missing information in any of these fields, the values in the New Item Record Options dialog box will be used.

    However, the classification and cutter numbers are pulled from the template if at least one is found. If the template does not contain a classification or cutter number, and the shelving schemes are the same in the template and the dialog box, the classification and cutter numbers are pulled from the dialog box. If the shelving schemes are different, and the template does not have a classification or cutter number, the shelving scheme from the template is used and the classification and cutter numbers are pulled from the bibliographic record.

    +
      +
    1. If you are creating multiple items for the same destination branch and collection, type the number of items in the Items column in the distribution grid.
    2. +
    3. Continue selecting templates in each row of the distribution grid.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    Each call number field can contain up to 60 characters.

    +
      +
    1. If you are not using templates or you want to include information that may be missing in the item template or templates, do the following steps:
    2. +
    +

    Notes:
    If an item template is not selected, or the template does not have call number information, the call number information is copied from the dialog box. If both the selected template and the dialog box have call number information, the information is copied from the template if the Use template values instead of these (if available) check box is selected.

    +

    The classification and cutter numbers are always copied as a group from either the bibliographic record or the item template. The other elements of the call number (prefix, suffix, volume, and copy) are copied independently. For example, the classification and cutter numbers can be copied from the bibliographic record and the prefix can be copied from the item template.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the shelving scheme for the new item in the Scheme box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    You can set the Default shelving scheme for new item records Cataloging profile in Polaris Administration to set the default shelving scheme in the New Item Record Options dialog box. See Specify the default shelving scheme for item/holdings records.

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the prefix for the call number in the Prefix box.
    2. +
    3. Type the class number in the Class box.
    4. +
    5. Type the cutter number in the Cutter box.
    6. +
    7. Type the suffix for the call number in the Suffix box.
    8. +
    9. Type the volume number in the Vol box if you are creating an item record for a volume in a multi-part monographic set.
    10. +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Important:
    If you enter a volume number, be sure to format it according to your library’s standard. A consistent format ensures that volume numbers are sorted correctly in the Find Tool. In addition, if your library allows first available copy holds for parts of multi-part titles, the items attached to the multi-part title must have consistently-formatted volume numbers. This is because first available copy hold requests for multi-part titles depend on a character-for-character match on the volume number.

    Internal spaces and all punctuation affect a match:
    Vol 1 and Vol1 do not match.
    Vol.1 and Vol1 do not match.
    Case does not matter. 
    Vol.1 and vol.1 match.

    Beginning and trailing spaces are ignored.
    [space] v.1 and [no space] v.1 match
    v.1 [space] and v.1 [no space] match

    For more information, see First Available Copy Requests and Multi-Part Titles.

    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the copy number in the Copy box if you are creating an item record with copy information.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) If the price is not filled in, type the dollar amount in the Price field. If the bibliographic record contains a price, it is filled in automatically.
    2. +
    3. If you are not using templates, or the templates are missing information that you want in the item records, fill in the fields above the distribution grid.
      • Select the circulation status in the Circ status box.
      • Select the renewal limit in the Renewal Limit box.
      • To display the item records in the PAC, check the Display in PAC box.
      • If the item should not circulate, select Non-circulating.
      • To allow the items to be loaned outside of your library system, select Loanable outside system.
      • To allow holds to be placed on this item, select Holdable.
    4. +
    5. If you did not use templates, enter the item distribution information in the grid under Distribution as follows:
      • Type the number of copies for the branch and location in the Items box.
      • Type the number of items in the Items box, select the Branch, Collection, Shelf location, Material Type, Loan Period, Fine Code, Statistical Code, and Owner.
    6. +
    7. Click AddRowbtn.gif to add the next blank row.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. To enter barcodes for the item records, do one of the following steps:
      • Move the cursor into the Item Barcode(s) field, and scan the item barcodes. The Barcode total displays the number of barcodes, and the Item total displays the total number of items that will be created.

    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can create items without barcodes.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Select Use system assigned barcodes.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to create the new item records.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Use system assigned barcodes, enter the following information on the Item barcode range dialog box:
      1. Select the type of barcode in the Type of barcode box.
      2. Type the beginning barcode number in the Start of range box.
      3. Type the ending barcode number in the End of range box.
      4. Use the up or down arrows to specify the next barcode number to be assigned after the starting number in the Next to be assigned box.
      5. Click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +

    The new item records are listed in the Bulk Created Item Records dialog box.

    +
    +
      +
    1. To print labels for the item records, select the item records in the dialog box, right-click, and select Print, Labels.
    2. +
    +

    The Label Manager appears. For information about Label Manager, see Printing Cataloging Labels.

    +
      +
    1. To open an item record in the list, double-click the item or right-click and select Open from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can right-click an item in the list, add it to a record set, place a hold, or link to other records from the context menu.

    +

    The item record opens in the Item Record workform.

    +

    Tip:
    To edit several item records, press CTRL+S to save the current record and CTRL+E to move to the next record in the list without closing the Item Record workform.

    +
      +
    1. Edit the item record, if necessary, and save it.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Next Record from the Item Record workform to open the next record in the Item Record workform.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    If the system detects an invalid item barcode, a message appears. You can continue saving the item record if you have the system-level Cataloging permission Override invalid item barcode message: Allow.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Creating_Item_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Creating_Item_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bede652a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Creating_Item_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Item Records

    +

    Before you can create an item record, a bibliographic record for the title must exist in the database. In addition to the methods covered in this section, you can also create item records automatically in the following ways:

    +
      +
    • Import bibliographic records and automatically generate item records based on the holdings data in the 852 tag or in a locally-defined tag. See Set import options for item records.
    • +
    • Release a purchase order and create on-order items. See Release a purchase order.
    • +
    • Create an on-the-fly item at checkout - The on-the-fly (OTF) function creates a minimal-level item record so items can be checked out before they are fully cataloged. See Create an on-the-fly item at checkout.
    • +
    • Import bibliographic records for eContent titles and automatically create eContent items - See EContent Item Records.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can specify the default shelving scheme to use for all new item records for your organization. See Setting Item Copy and Save Options.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_item_information_for_course_reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_item_information_for_course_reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c7ff8c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_item_information_for_course_reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit item information for course reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Item Information for Course Reserves

    +

    To edit information for items that are reserved for academic courses:

    +

    Note:
    Course reserve functions are available by specific contract.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Reserves or click reservIcon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Reserves view appears.

    +

    Note:
    The course reserves information appears only if you have course reserve functionality and the item is on reserve.

    +
      +
    1. To change the reserve circulation information, select from the options in the following fields:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    These settings can be different from the normal settings in the Circulation view of the item record.

    +
    +
      +
    • Assigned +
    • +
    • Collection +
    • +
    • Shelf location +
    • +
    • Loan period +
    • +
    • Fine code +
    • +
    • Renewal limit +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Holdable to allow holds on the item while it is reserved.
    2. +
    3. Select Purchase if the library needs to purchase additional copies of this title.
    4. +
    5. Select Library use only if the item should not leave the library.
    6. +
    7. Select Requires full cataloging if the item and bibliographic record have not been fully cataloged.
    8. +
    9. For photocopies, indicate the copyright information as follows:
      • Select Fee required if there is a fee associated with the item.
      • Select Fee paid and type the amount in the Fee box if the fee was paid.
      • Select None if the reserve item is not a photocopy.
      • Select CCL if the photocopies comply with copyright law.
      • Select CCG if the photocopies comply with copyright guidelines.
    10. +
    +
      +
    1. Indicate what to do with the item when the reserve is over:
      • Select Discard to discard the item after the item is taken off reserve.
      • Select Return to collection to return the item to its normal collection.
      • Select Return to owner if the item is owned by an instructor, and you want it returned to the instructor.
      • Select Auto-delete to delete the item record and associated bibliographic record when the item is taken off reserve. This option is often used for temporary items such as photocopies and items that belong to instructors.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Indicate the copy owner as follows:
      • Select Instructor if the instructor owns the copy.
      • Select Library if the library owns the copy.
    2. +
    3. To enter information regarding this item’s course reserve, type the note in the Note box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    At the bottom of the Reserves view, you can see information on the courses to which the item is linked, including the course, the reserve status, the dates of the reserve, and the count of circulations (check-outs and renewals) of the item while on reserve for that course. You can double-click the course to open the Course Reserve workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save press CTRL+S, or click the Save button to save the changes to the course reserve information.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..85f40e69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Edit_labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Labels

    +

    To edit an existing label:

    +

    Note:
    If the profile Labels: Cataloging Print Method is set to Quick Print, the label is printed without opening Label Manager.

    +

    Tip:
    To modify a label type so that it has the same characteristics each time you use it, select Tools > Label Settings and Content and change the label configuration. See Configuring Existing Label Types.

    +
      +
    1. Access the Label Manager:
      • From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Label Manager.
      • In Cataloging, from the Item Record workform, select File > Label Request > Single, or click singlelabel00142.gif. The Label Manager appears if you have the profile Labels: Cataloging Print Method set to On Demand in Polaris Administration.
      • In Serials, from the Issue, Part, or Check In workform, select File > Label Request > Single, or click singlelabel00143.gif.The Label Manager appears if you have the profile Labels: Serials Print Method set to On Demand.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are requesting labels from a serial or item record, and the print method is set to Batch, go to Utilities > Label Manager to see the labels you created.

    +

    The Label Manager opens with the most recently generated label request displayed.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also type text directly into the label.

    +
      +
    1. Select the label you want to modify and right-click.
    2. +
    +

    The context menu appears.

    +

    + editlabels.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select from the following options on the context menu:
      • Copy - Select the text that you want to copy. The selected text is copied to the clipboard, and you can paste it into another label.
      • Paste - If you have copied text to the clipboard, you can paste it into the label.
      • Delete - Select the text and select Delete.
      • Insert Before - To insert labels before the label you selected, type the number of labels in the Insert Blank Label box.
      • Insert After - To insert labels after the label you selected, type the number of labels in the Insert Blank Label box.
      • Font - The Font dialog box appears. You can change the font size, font family, and font characteristics. This changes the font for the label where the cursor is located.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To change the font for all the labels, go to the Tools > Label Settings and Content to open the Label Configuration dialog box. Then locate the type of label, change the font for the type of label you are using and save. Then click refreshbtn.gif to refresh the labels. Different fonts can be used on individual labels within a label set.

    +
    + +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click the Save button to save your changes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_acquisitions_information_for_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_acquisitions_information_for_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13876780 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_acquisitions_information_for_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter acquisitions information for an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Acquisitions Information for an Item Record

    +

    Note:
    The fund, order date, price, and purchase order number are automatically filled in on the Source and Acquisition view of the Item Record workform if on-order item records were created when the purchase order was released. If the item was purchased with a donor fund, the donor information also appears. You can track the items that were paid for with donor funds in Acquisitions using the Items Ordered by Donor Fund report. See Acquisitions Reports. The invoice number appears on this view when the invoice is paid.

    +

    To enter source and acquisition information for an item record if the information was not copied from the purchase order and fund records in Acquisitions:

    +

    Note:
    This view also displays circulation statistics for the item.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Source and Acquisition or click sourceacqIcon.gif.
    4. +
    5. If the information is not carried over from a purchase order that uses a donation fund, specify the acquisitions information for the item as follows:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Type the name for the fund used to purchase the item in the Funding box.
    • +
    • If the item was purchased using donated funds, type the donor’s name in the Donor first name, Middle, and Last name boxes. Or, if it was an organization that donated the funds, type the name in the Donor organization box.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the item was created automatically from the embedded holdings information in an imported bibliographic record, the Import date, Bib record, and Source boxes are filled in.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click savebut00135.gif.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_basic_information_for_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_basic_information_for_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4182e4df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_basic_information_for_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter basic information for an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Basic Information for an Item Record

    +

    The basic or header information on the Item Record workform remains the same on every view of the Item Record workform. The header information includes title information from the bibliographic record and identification information for the item.

    +

    To enter the item record’s bibliographic and identifying information:

    +

    Tip:
    You may not need to enter information in these fields if you created the item record by copying or using a template, but you can change the copied information.

    +
      +
    1. Create a new item record by following the steps in Create a single new item record manually.
    2. +
    3. Scan the barcode or enter the item’s barcode in the Barcode box.
    4. +
    5. Select the Display in PAC check box to display the item in the public catalog, or clear the Display in PAC check box to display the item for staff only.
    6. +
    7. If you do not want the item to circulate, select the Non-circulating box.
    8. +
    9. Click Find to search for and select the bibliographic record to which you want to link this item record.
    10. +
    +

    The Title and Author boxes are filled in.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type the price for the item in the Price box if it is not filled in automatically from the link to the bibliographic record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The price is pulled from the bibliographic record to an item record if the staff member’s Cataloging profile Bring price from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes. The Item Price Hierarchy database table in Polaris Administration specifies which bibliographic tags are checked for the price and in what order. For more information, see Modify the Item Create Price Hierarchy table.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the item’s location and identifying information as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The owning branch controls permissions based on ownership of the record. The assigned branch governs the circulation policies applied to transactions involving this item and its display in the PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select the item’s owner in the Owner box.
    2. +
    3. Select the item’s assigned branch in the Assigned box.
    4. +
    5. Select the collection to which the item will be assigned in the Collection box.
    6. +
    7. Select the location for the item in the Shelf location box.
    8. +
    9. To indicate a temporary location, type the location in the Temporary location box.
    10. +
    11. Select the circulation status for the item in the Circ status box.
    12. +
    13. Enter the item’s circulation information. See Enter circulation information for an item record.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_circulation_information_for_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_circulation_information_for_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c0ba178f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_circulation_information_for_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter circulation information for an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Circulation Information for an Item Record

    +

    To enter the item record’s circulation parameters, call number, and hold request information for an item record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Cataloging or click caticon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Cataloging view of the Item Record workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the circulation parameters for the item as follows:
      • Select the item material type in the Material type box.
      • Assign a loan period for the item in the Loan period code box.
      • Assign a fine code for the item in the Fine code box.
      • Specify the number of times this item may be renewed in the Renewal limit box.
      • Assign a statistical code for the item in the Stat code box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Scheme box displays the default shelving scheme for your organization. See Specify the default shelving scheme for item/holdings records.

    +
      +
    1. If the call number is not filled in, enter the information in the following fields:
      • Prefix
      • Class
      • Cutter
      • Suffix
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The call number fields are automatically copied from the linked bibliographic record if the staff member’s Cataloging profile Bring call number fields from bib to item records when link is made is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. The Call Number Hierarchy database table defines which bibliographic tags are checked for the call number information and the order in which they are checked. The Call Number Hierarchy table may also define the subfields for the volume and copy numbers. See Modify the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table. If the item record was created using a template, and the template has call number fields that are not in the bibliographic record, the template values are used.

    +
      +
    1. Type the volume and copy numbers in the Vol and Copy boxes.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you enter a volume number, be sure to format it according to your library’s standard. A consistent format ensures that volume numbers are sorted correctly in the Find Tool. In addition, if your library allows first available copy holds for parts of multipart titles, the items attached to the multipart title must have consistently-formatted volume numbers. This is because first available copy hold requests for multipart titles depend on a character-for-character match on the volume number.

    Internal spaces and all punctuation affect a match:
    Vol 1 and Vol1 do not match.
    Vol.1 and Vol1 do not match.

    Case does not matter
    Vol.1 and vol.1 match.

    Beginning and trailing spaces are ignored:
    [space] v.1 and [no space] v.1 match
    v.1 [space] and v.1 [no space] match

    To enable first available copy hold requests for multipart titles, go to Polaris Administration, Parameters, Requests, Holds Options. See Set Holds options: Enabling, Item Status Restrictions, First Available Copy.

    +
      +
    1. Specify how the item is to be held by selecting or clearing the check boxes under Request:
      • Loanable outside system - If checked, the item can be loaned outside your library system. If unchecked, the item cannot be loaned outside your library system.

        Note:
        Selecting the Loanable outside system checkbox contributes the item record to INN-Reach, but does not impact standard ILL.

      • Do not mail to patron - If checked, the item cannot be mailed to a patron using Borrow By Mail circulation. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
      • Holdable - If checked, hold requests can be placed on the item. If unchecked, no hold requests can be placed on the item. To indicate limits on the holds, use the check boxes under Limit to:
        • Pickup at - Limits the item to filling hold requests only at a selected branch, not just the item’s assigned branch. From this list, only one branch can be selected. When you select this option, you can also select Patrons from this library and branches or Patrons from this branch only.
        • Patrons from this library and branches - Limits the item to filling hold requests from patrons registered at the item’s assigned branch and other branches associated with the same parent library. When you select this option, you can also select number of days past first available.
        • Number of days past first available - Sets the number of days a new item is available only to the assigned library's patrons. During the specified number of days, patrons from all other libraries can still find the new item and place a hold. After the specified number of days, holds on the new item placed by patrons from other libraries can be filled.
        • Patrons from this branch only - Limits the item to filling hold requests only from patrons registered at the item’s assigned branch. When you select this option, you can also select Pickup at this branch.
        • Preferred borrowers - Limits the item to filling hold requests only where the patron’s pick-up library is on the Preferred borrowers list in the Holds options dialog box in Polaris Administration. When you select this option, you cannot select any other Limit to options.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following save options for this item:
      • If the item record is complete and the item is ready for circulation, select File > Save, and respond per library policy to any detected duplicate messages.
      • If more work is needed to prepare the record or item for circulation, select File > Save Provisionally. Item records that are saved provisionally are not checked for duplicates, nor do they display in the public catalog.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The option to save an item provisionally is disabled if the item has a duplicate barcode, and the Item records: Records with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally profile is set to No. See Specify if items with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    When you save an item record, the following types of messages may appear:

    +
      +
    • Warning messages - These depend on the profiles that are set in Polaris Administration. See Displaying Warning Messages for Bibs and Items.
    • +
    • Invalid barcode message - If the system detects an invalid item barcode, a message appears. You can continue saving the item record if you have the system-level Cataloging permission Override invalid item barcode message: Allow.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_notes_and_blocks_for_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_notes_and_blocks_for_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..61c2dba5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Enter_notes_and_blocks_for_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter notes and blocks for an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Notes and Blocks for an Item Record

    +

    To enter notes according to your library’s policy; notes are optional:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Notes and Notices or click notesicon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Notes and Notices view of the Item Record workform is displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Type notes in the following fields, if applicable:
    2. +
    +

    Tip: 
    If you add notes to the item record, the icon changes to yellow. If you add blocks, the Notes view icon turns red.

    +
    +
      +
    • Public note box - The notes will be displayed in the PAC for this item.
    • +
    • Non-public note box - The notes are intended for library staff only.
    • +
    • Physical condition box - The notes describe the physical condition of the item.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To place a block on the item record, specify the type of block as follows:
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    • To place a library-defined circulation block on the item, select the block in the Library-assigned box. Library-assigned blocks are set in Polaris Administration. See Defining Item Blocks.
    • +
    • To place a block on the item for any reason not covered by a library-assigned block, type up to 255 characters as the explanation for a block in the Free text box.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click the Save button to save the item record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Insert_diacritics_or_special_characters_into_a_label.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Insert_diacritics_or_special_characters_into_a_label.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5116de59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Insert_diacritics_or_special_characters_into_a_label.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Insert diacritics or special characters into a label + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Insert Diacritics or Special Characters into a Label

    +

    If diacritics or special characters are included in the MARC record in fields that are printed on the label, for example in the Title or Author fields, they appear in the label. It is not necessary to add the characters in the label unless they are not part of the MARC record.

    +

    Tip:
    For information on using an international keyboard to enter diacritics or special characters, see Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +

    To insert diacritics or special characters into a label in the Label Manager:

    +
      +
    1. Right-click in a label in the Label Manager, and select Character Map from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Character Picker dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Follow the steps in Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Link_subordinate_items_to_different_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Link_subordinate_items_to_different_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43669791 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Link_subordinate_items_to_different_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Link subordinate items to different records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link Subordinate Items to Different Records

    +

    This procedure can also be used to create an item record where you manually link the new item to a bibliographic record. You may need to link items to different bibliographic records when the items are in a different medium. To do this, you need to know the item control number of the primary item record.

    +

    Note:
    See Create a subordinate (child) item record to link the primary and subordinate item records to the same bibliographic record.

    +

    To link a primary (parent) item and related subordinate (child) item records to different bibliographic records:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform for the item to which you want to link the subordinate item.
    2. +
    3. Note the item control number of the primary item record.
    4. +
    5. Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click the New button from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    6. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Item Record in the Objects list.
    2. +
    +

    The New Item Record Options dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the information for the subordinate item in the New Item Record Options dialog box, and click OK. See Create multiple item records for a single title.
    2. +
    +

    The Item Record workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. In the Parent item box, enter the item control number of the primary item record to which you are linking the subordinate item record.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click to save the record.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Maintaining_Item_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Maintaining_Item_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0794673 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Maintaining_Item_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Maintaining Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Maintaining Item Records

    +

    Item records track the physical items in your library collection and show the availability of items in the public catalog. They store the title information, call number, location, copy number, status, circulation parameters, circulation history, holds information, blocks, statistics, and other information for each piece in a library’s collection.

    +

    By default, the Item Record workform opens to the view that corresponds to the active subsystem. For example, when you are creating a new item record, the workform opens to the Cataloging view. However, you can set a profile in Polaris Administration so that the Item Record workform always opens to a specific view, regardless of how the item record is accessed. See Set the Item Record workform opening view.

    +

    Each item record is linked to a single bibliographic record, but multiple item records can be linked to the same bibliographic record. For example, your library may have several copies of War and Peace, each with its own item record, and all linked to the same bibliographic record. You can also associate item records with other item records, so you can track multi-part items, such as kits.

    +

    You can save item records as final or provisional records. When you save an item record as final, it is checked for duplicates in the database, and it appears in the public catalog if you have selected the option. Provisional item records are not checked for duplicates, and they do not appear in the public catalog. For information on deleting item records, see Delete bibliographic or item records.

    +

    If your Polaris system includes course reserve functionality, you can reserve items for courses. Information related to course reserves is stored in the Reserves view of the Item Record. When you reserve an item, you can assign circulation settings that are different from the normal settings on the Circulation view of the Item Record. See Edit item information for course reserves.

    +

    Note:
    To specify how hold requests operate in your library, see Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_labels_from_Find_Tool_record_sets_or_list_boxes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_labels_from_Find_Tool_record_sets_or_list_boxes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce3038e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_labels_from_Find_Tool_record_sets_or_list_boxes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print labels from Find Tool, record sets, or list boxes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Labels from Find Tool, Record Sets, or List Boxes

    +

    To print labels from the Find Tool, an item record set, or an item record list box:

    +
      +
    1. Select the item or items in the Find Tool results list, an item record list box, or an item record set.
    2. +
    3. Right-click, and select Print > Labels.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can select Quick Print as the print method in the Cataloging Options dialog box to print all the labels without opening the Label Manager. See Change label options from Cataloging.

    +

    The Label Manager appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print from the Polaris Label Manager menu.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_spine_and_pocket_labels_from_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_spine_and_pocket_labels_from_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..82312646 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Print_spine_and_pocket_labels_from_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print spine and pocket labels from an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Spine and Pocket Labels from an Item Record

    +

    To print a spine or pocket label:

    +

    Tip:
    If you are printing labels for multiple items using label sheets, set the profile Labels: Cataloging print method to Batch. See Change label options from Cataloging.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Complete the item record information required for your labels.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Label Request, and select one of the following options:
      • Single Label or click singlelabel.gif - Print a single label (typical).
      • Multi-Label or click multilabel.gif - Print multiple labels (this option is used when cataloging item sets such as encyclopedias). See Create multiple copies of a label.
    6. +
    +

    If the printing method for cataloging labels is set to On Demand, the Label Manager appears with the labels you requested.

    +

    If the printing method is set to Batch, the Label Manager does not automatically appear. Continue cataloging items, and select Utilities > Label Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar when you want to print all the labels.

    +

    Note:
    You cannot generate more than 500 labels at a time in Label Manager.

    +
      +
    1. To make changes to the label, see Edit labels.
    2. +
    3. If Label Manager is open, select File > Exit to close it.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Printing_Cataloging_Labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Printing_Cataloging_Labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..73b4f5aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Printing_Cataloging_Labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Cataloging Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Printing Cataloging Labels

    +

    The default cataloging label type and the settings for printing labels are defined at the system, library, and branch levels using the following Staff Client profiles in Polaris Administration:

    +

    Note:
    See Setting Label Profiles.

    +
      +
    • +

      Labels: Automatically generate labels for each item record created - If this profile is set to Yes, labels are generated automatically whenever a new item record is created.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Labels: Cataloging label type - Specifies the default label type for cataloging (item) labels.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Labels: Cataloging print method - Select On Demand, Batch, or Quick Print as the default printing method for cataloging labels. If On Demand is selected, the Label Manager appears when the user requests a label. If Quick Print is selected, the label is printed without opening Label Manager. If Batch is selected, the label is generated when the user requests a label, but it is not printed until the user opens Label Manager and selects Print. The Batch option works well for creating sheets of labels for multiple items.

      +
    • +
    +

    To change the default label type and print method without using Polaris Administration profiles, select Cataloging > Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and make the changes on the Cataloging Options dialog box. See Change label options from Cataloging.

    +

    Other settings, such as the font, dimensions, and content of the labels, are defined in the Label Configuration dialog box that you can access from the Label Manager. See Configuring Existing Label Types. If your library system or consortium processes materials centrally, all libraries and branches should agree on the same label stock, content, and configuration.

    +

    To use the label file again, you can save the labels in a .dat file format with a name and location you specify. When you want to access this label file, you can locate it and open it in Label Manager.

    +

    Some label stock contains sets of labels intended for a single item. For example, a label set may contain a spine label and two pocket labels. All three labels are attached to a single item, and they can be printed together.

    +

    To print labels you must set up your printing preferences on the computer where you are doing the cataloging or serials processing. The label printer must be set up in Microsoft Windows, and it must be connected to the workstation or the same local area network as the workstation.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Save_a_label_file.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Save_a_label_file.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3875ef64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/Save_a_label_file.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Save a label file + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Save a Label File

    +

    You can save a label file in a .dat file format, and reopen the file at another time. To save a label file:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Label Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and set up labels.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save As.
    4. +
    +

    The Save As dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the location for the label file, and type the label file name in the File name box.
    2. +
    +

    The label file is saved, and you can open it to use it again.

    +

    Note:
    To open the saved label file, open Label Manager, select File > Open from the Label Manager menu, locate the label file with the .dat extension, and double-click it. The labels appear in Label Manager.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_items_circ_history_and_edit_float_setting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_items_circ_history_and_edit_float_setting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6cce8c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_items_circ_history_and_edit_float_setting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,256 @@ + + + + + + + + + View item’s circulation history and edit float setting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View item’s circulation history and edit float setting

    +

    The Circulation view of the Item Record workform displays the status changes for an item record. In addition, you can change the item’s home branch, and allow or prevent floating to another library’s collection.

    +

    Note: +
    For more information about floating collections, see Setting Up Floating Collections.

    +

    To view an item’s circulation history and change the home branch and floating option:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select View > History, or click histvwicon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Circulation History view appears.

    +
      +
    1. To change the item’s home branch, select another branch in the Home branch box. The home branch determines the branches to which the item can float (if the Do not float box is unchecked).
    2. +
    +
      +
    1.  If you have the permission Item records: Modify History view, change the Do not float option by selecting the check box to prevent the item from floating to another branch, or uncheck the box to enable the item to float.
    2. +
    +

    Item Circulation History

    +

    The following transactions, with their associated transaction date, are displayed in the Item Record’s Circulation History:

    +
      +
    • Created via Acquisitions PO Line Item processing +
    • +
    • Created via Acquisitions Invoice processing +
    • +
    • Modified via PO Line Item Receive processing +
    • +
    • Modified via PO Line Item Segment Undo Receipt processing +
    • +
    • Created via ILL processing +
    • +
    • Created via Cataloging +
    • +
    • Created via NCIP create processing +
    • +
    • Modified via Item Bulk Change +
    • +
    • Modified via Cataloging +
    • +
    • Modified via NCIP accept item processing +
    • +
    • Checked in +
    • +
    • Checked in (item was lost) +
    • +
    • Checked out +
    • +
    • Declared lost +
    • +
    • Claim was deleted +
    • +
    • Claim was made (returned or never had) +
    • +
    • Circulation status modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Shelf location modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Returned via ILL processing +
    • +
    • Sent in transit via Removing from Course Reserve +
    • +
    • Modified via PO Line Item Segment Receive processing +
    • +
    • Automatic status change from Check In +
    • +
    • Modified by automatic billed to lost processing +
    • +
    • Circulation status modified because item was held and request pickup      branch was modified +
    • +
    • Circulation status modified to Routed by creation of linked route list piece +
    • +
    • Circulation status modified by modification of linked route list piece +
    • +
    • Modified via Floating Collections processing +
    • +
    • Renewal +
    • +
    • Transferred due to hold request +
    • +
    • Transferred due to ILL request +
    • +
    • Created via Acquisitions +
    • +
    • Created via Circulation +
    • +
    • Created via Serials +
    • +
    • Marked for deletion +
    • +
    • Undeleted +
    • +
    • Checked in via In House +
    • +
    • Inventory date was updated +
    • +
    • Barcode replaced via Check In +
    • +
    • Non public note modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Free text block modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Library assigned block modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Assigned collection modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Material type modified via Manage Item dialog from Check In +
    • +
    • Bulk checked out via Outreach Services +
    • +
    • Bulk checked out via Borrow by Mail +
    • +
    • Modified via Receive Shipment +
    • +
    • Linked to new bib +
    • +
    • Linked to new bib via Serials +
    • +
    • First overdue notice: Mail +
    • +
    • First overdue notice: Email +
    • +
    • First overdue notice: Phone +
    • +
    • First overdue notice: Text Message +
    • +
    • Second overdue notice: Mail +
    • +
    • Second overdue notice: Email +
    • +
    • Second overdue notice: Phone +
    • +
    • Second overdue notice: Text Message +
    • +
    • Third overdue notice: Mail +
    • +
    • Third overdue notice: Email +
    • +
    • Third overdue notice: Phone +
    • +
    • Third overdue notice: Text Message +
    • +
    • Bill notice: Mail +
    • +
    • Bill notice: Email +
    • +
    • Bill notice: Phone +
    • +
    • Bill notice: Text Message +
    • +
    • Due date reset +
    • +
    • Held for hold request +
    • +
    • Held for ILL request +
    • +
    • Inventory date was updated - Offline +
    • +
    • Renewal - PAC +
    • +
    • Renewal - Phone +
    • +
    • Checked out - Self Check +
    • +
    • Renewal - Self Check +
    • +
    • Checked out - Offline +
    • +
    • Checked out - PAC +
    • +
    • Checked out - Mobile PAC +
    • +
    • Renewal - Mobile PAC +
    • +
    • Checked out - Third party software +
    • +
    • Renewal - Third party software +
    • +
    • Added copy created by API consumer service. +
    • +
    • Item was unlinked from a bibliographic resource entity. +
    • +
    • Item was transferred to a different bibliographic resource entity. +
    • +
    • Modified by API consumer service +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_other_item_records_linked_to_the_same_bib.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_other_item_records_linked_to_the_same_bib.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..850e1a41 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_other_item_records_linked_to_the_same_bib.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + View other item records linked to the same bib + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View Other Item Records Linked to the Same Bib

    +

    To see a list of all the other item records linked to the same bibliographic record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Links > All Item Records or click linksicon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Linked Item Records dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click any item in the list to open the item record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_the_linked_bib_from_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_the_linked_bib_from_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef0241a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKitems/View_the_linked_bib_from_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + View the linked bib from an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View the Linked Bib from an Item Record

    +

    To see the linked bibliographic record from an item record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Links > Bibliographic Record, press CTRL+G, or click PKitems00140.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record workform appears.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    You can also view the linked bibliographic record from an item record displayed in the Find Tool results list or in a linked list box. Right-click the item record in the list, and select Links > Bibliographic Record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Cleaning_Up_the_Catalog.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Cleaning_Up_the_Catalog.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3600f901 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Cleaning_Up_the_Catalog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cleaning Up the Catalog + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cleaning Up the Catalog

    +

    Various automated processes identify records that are no longer linked to other records, delete records, retain records after deleting them, and purge deleted records from the database. To identify records that may need to be deleted, you can search for records that meet certain criteria and gather them in a record set automatically. For example, you could search for item records for materials that have not circulated in several years, gather them in a record set, and delete them after removing the materials from the shelves.

    +

    If you are looking for records that are not linked to any other records, you can create record sets of unlinked bibliographic or authority records automatically. See Create a record set of unlinked records. Then, you can delete the records right from the record set if they are no longer needed. You can also use cataloging and circulation reports to identify records that may need to be deleted.

    +

    The Polaris Administration Cataloging profiles Retain deleted bibliographic records, Retain item records, and Retain authority records control whether records are immediately removed from the database or marked with a status of deleted and retained until they are permanently removed from the database using a batch purge. See Retain deleted records. To permanently delete the retained records, you must set up purge criteria in a Purge record. See Purge cataloging records.

    +

    Note:
    If the item record is linked to a serial issue record, and the Polaris Serials/Acquisitions parameter Delete linked issue/part when serial item is deleted is set to Yes, the issue or part is deleted when you delete the item.

    +

    In addition to cleaning up unused records, you can remove tags from bibliographic records after they are marked as processed. These processing tags include 970 tags for building purchase orders, and 852, 949 or other tags used in building item records from embedded holdings tags. See Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Configure_the_export_process.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Configure_the_export_process.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db7d05fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Configure_the_export_process.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configure the export process + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configure the Export Process

    +

    Note:
    If you have Polaris SimplyReports and Export Express, you can set up specific export jobs and export records in several output formats. See SimplyReports Help for information.

    +

     To configure the export:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Exporting from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Export Configuration dialog box appears.

    +

    + exptconfig.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the name of the server in the Polaris Application Server box.
    2. +
    3. Click Verify Connection to check the connection to the Polaris Application server.
    4. +
    5. Click Browse, and select the destination for the exported data.
    6. +
    7. To create a subdirectory for the exported data file for branches, select the Create subdirectory for each branch when branch specified box.
    8. +
    9. Click Browse, and select the location for the export report.
    10. +
    +

    When you select the location for the export report, it appears in the Default Directory/Filename for Reports box.

    +
      +
    1. To create a subdirectory for the branch reports, select the Create subdirectory for each branch when branch specified box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Polaris Database Export Utility workform appears. See Export cataloging records.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Create_a_record_set_of_unlinked_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Create_a_record_set_of_unlinked_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a85988a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Create_a_record_set_of_unlinked_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a record set of unlinked records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Record Set of Unlinked Records

    +

    To create a record set of unlinked bibliographic or authority records:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Cataloging Processing > Create Unlinked Bibliographic Record Set, or Create Unlinked Authority Record Set.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Authority records are considered unlinked when there are no bibliographic or see also links; they could have see also from links.

    +

    The Record Set Setup dialog box appears.

    +

    + recsetsetup.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the record set, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The new record set appears.

    +

    Note:
    Unlinked authority records appear with an unlinked icon unlinked.gif.

    +

    + unlkdbibsrecset.gif 

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_authority_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_authority_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32746d52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_authority_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete authority records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete Authority Records

    +

    To delete authority records.

    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following methods to delete authority records:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      To delete a single authority record displayed in a workform, select File > Delete on the Authority Record workform, or click deleteicon00155.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To delete a single authority record directly from the Find Tool results list, select the record, right-click, and select Delete from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    After you have deleted all the records within the record set, you can delete the record set.

    +
      +
    • +

      To delete authority records displayed in a record set, open the record set, choose Edit, Select All, and click deleteicon00156.gif to delete all the records. Or, select specific authority records, right-click, and select Delete from the context menu. You can automatically gather unlinked authority or bibliographic records in a record set.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To delete authority records from a linked list box, select the record or records, right-click and select Delete.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the record already has a Deleted status, and you delete it again, it will be removed from the database, even if the Retain deleted records profile is set to Yes.

    +

    If the authority record is linked to other bibliographic or authority records, the Authority Record Heading Deletion Options dialog box appears. The options for handling linked authority records are active only when other authority records are linked to the one you are deleting.

    +

    + authdelete_headings.gif 

    +
      +
    1.  If the Authority Record Heading Deletion Options dialog box appears, select from the following options:
    2. +
    +

       For linked bibliographic records -

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      To delete the heading and tag in the linked bibliographic records - Select Delete linked headings (bibliographic)

      +
    • +
    • +

       To break links to any bibliographic headings linked to the authority record - Select Unlink headings (bibliographic). The heading remains in the bibliographic record as an unauthorized heading.

      +
    • +
    +
    +

    For linked authority records -

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      To delete the linked authority headings - Select Delete linked headings (authority).

      +
    • +
    • +

      To break links to any authority records linked to this authority record - Select Unlink headings (authority).

      +
    • +
    • +

      To convert the 5XX tag in linked authority records to a 4XX tag - Select Flip the linked authority headings. This converts the 5XX tag (See Also From reference) in the linked records to a 4XX (See reference).

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_bibliographic_or_item_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_bibliographic_or_item_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e5bf53c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Delete_bibliographic_or_item_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete bibliographic or item records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete Bibliographic or Item Records

    +

    To delete bibliographic or item records:

    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following methods to delete cataloging records:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      To delete a record displayed in a workform, select File, Delete on the workform, or click deleteicon.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To delete a record directly from the Find Tool results list, right-click the record, and select Delete from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    After you have deleted all the records within the record set, you can delete the record set.

    +
      +
    • +

      To delete cataloging records in a record set, open the record set, choose Edit, Select All, and click deleteicon00154.gif to delete all the records. Or, select specific records, right-click, and select Delete from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If the record already has a Deleted status, and you delete it again, it will be removed from the database, even if the Retain deleted records profile is set to Yes.

    +

    If you are deleting multiple bibliographic or item records, the Multiple Deletion dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to delete the records without stopping for warning messages, you can suppress these messages by clearing one or both of the following boxes:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You must have the required permissions to prevent the warning messages from appearing. See Related Information.

    +
      +
    • +

      breakable links - The records with breakable links will be deleted without any warning messages.

      +
    • +
    • +

      unbreakable links and other stopping conditions - The records with unbreakable links are skipped over and not deleted, but no warning messages appear.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to delete the selected records.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1.  If the Last Copy Options dialog box appears, select one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Click Delete to delete the record if it does not have unbreakable links or other conditions that prevent deletion.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click Suppress From PAC to retain the record but prevent it from appearing in the PAC

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click Retain to retain the record without changes.

      +
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    +

    Permissions for suppressing warning messages: 

    +
      +
    • +

      Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple item records: Allow +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple item records: Allow +

      +
    • +
    +

    +

    Tip:
    The default setting for both parameters is No (prevent deletion of bibs or items that have linked hold requests).

    +

    +

    System-level Cataloging parameters that allow or prevent deletion if the records have linked hold requests:

    +
      +
    • +

      Bibliographic record delete: Allow if there are holds +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item record delete: Allow if there are holds +

      +
    • +
    +

    +

    +

    Unbreakable links or conditions that prevent item deletion:

    +
      +
    • +

      Item is a parent item with child records linked to it

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item is checked out

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item has been shipped to fill a hold request

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item is linked to a routed serial issue

      +
    • +
    +

    +

    Unbreakable links or conditions that prevent bib deletion:

    +

    +
      +
    • +

      The bib is final and it is linked to final/provisional items

      +
    • +
    • +

      The bib is deleted and the linked items are deleted

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to serial holdings records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to purchase order lines with a status of Pending

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to invoice lines with a status of Open

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to issue records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to subscription records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to resource records (digital media)

      +
    • +
    +

    +

    +

    Deletion of ILL requests - When Ill requests are deleted, the bibliographic and item records are deleted unless both the Cataloging profiles Retain deleted bibliographic records and Retain deleted item records are set to Yes.

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Export_cataloging_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Export_cataloging_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7508be76 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Export_cataloging_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Export cataloging records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Export Cataloging Records

    +

    Note:
    If you are exporting records for the first time, you first need to configure the export. See Configure the export process.

    +

    To export cataloging records:

    +

    Tip:
    You can export records only in MARC format using this utility. If you have Polaris SimplyReports and Export Express, you can export records in Dublin Core or LibraryThing formats as well as create custom profiles for exporting MARC records.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Exporting from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Database Export Utility dialog box appears.

    +

    + exprtcriteria.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the library with the data to be exported in the Library to Retrieve Data For box.
    2. +
    3. Select the branch with the data to be exported in the Branch to Retrieve Data For box.
    4. +
    5. Select the type of records to include in the export in the Select Record Type box and select from the following options:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • +

      To include holdings information in the export, select Include current item holdings information. For more information on embedded holdings data, see Item Records Created from Embedded Holdings Tags.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To include records with a deleted status, select Include Deleted Records

      +
    • +
    • +

      To include interlibrary loan records, select Include ILL Records.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the one of the following character encoding options in the Character Encoding box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      MARC-8 - When MARC-8 is selected, the LDR/09 is set to blank in the exported record, and the LDR/09 in the database record remains as it is.

      +
    • +
    • +

      UTF-8 - When UTF-8 is selected, the LDR/09 in the exported record is set to a, and the LDR/09 in the database record remains as it is.

      +
    • +
    • +

      LDR/09 for each record - When LDR/09 for each record is selected, the records are exported depending on the value in the LDR/09 in each record: if the value is blank, the record is exported in MARC-8 format; if the value is a, the record is exported in UTF-8 format.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the export options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To include all final MARC 21 records, select Extract All Final MARC 21 Records.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Exporting all your final MARC 21 records may take a long time. Specifying other criteria, such as a date range or a bibliographic ID number range, reduces the amount of time for the export.

    +
      +
    • To export MARC 21 records within a range of bibliographic record identification numbers, type the beginning number in the Extract Only MARC 21 Records From Bibliographic Record ID box, and type the ending number in the To box.
    • +
    • To extract MARC 21 records that were added or changed within a certain date range, enter the beginning date in the Extract Only MARC 21 Records Added/Changed From Date box, and enter the end date in the To box.
    • +
    • To extract only provisional records, select Extract Only Provisional Records.
    • +
    • To extract only deleted records, select Extract Only Deleted Records.
    • +
    • To extract only records deleted within a specific time period, select the Include Only Records Deleted From Date box, and enter the from and to dates.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Export to export the records.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Exporting_Cataloging_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Exporting_Cataloging_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff248cf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Exporting_Cataloging_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Exporting Cataloging Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Exporting Cataloging Records

    +

    You can export records to report your library’s holdings to a union database (such as OCLC) or to a consortium. You configure the export once when you export records for the first time.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Maintaining_Your_Catalog.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Maintaining_Your_Catalog.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1058dae3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Maintaining_Your_Catalog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Maintaining Your Catalog + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Maintaining Your Catalog

    +

    Various features in Polaris help you maintain your catalog and ensure that the records in your database are accurate and current. An export utility lets you export records to report your library’s holdings to OCLC or to a consortium. You can easily identify records without links by automatically creating a record set. Records that are no longer used can be deleted immediately, or marked for deletion and removed from the database in batch at a later date. To maintain your authority records, you can subscribe to a weekly update service that checks your existing authority records, matches them to updated records from the Library of Congress, and provides the records to be imported. For more information, see Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Purge_cataloging_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Purge_cataloging_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d737858f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Purge_cataloging_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + Purge cataloging records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purge cataloging records

    +

    If your library retains deleted cataloging records, you must set up a Purge record that specifies the criteria by which these retained records are automatically removed from the database. To create a Purge record:

    +

    Tip:
    For information on the Polaris Administration profiles for retaining deleted records, see Retain deleted records.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Cataloging Processing > Purge Cataloging Records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Purge Criteria List appears if there are purge records already set up.

    +

    + purgecrit.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    You can also right-click an existing purge record in the list, and select New from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click the New button to create a new purge record.
    2. +
    +

    The Purge Record workform appears.

    +

    + purgerec.gif e

    +
      +
    1. Type a name to identify the purge record in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Select the purge record’s owner in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Enter a date to purge the records in the Scheduled box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the cataloging record types (Authority, Bibliographic, Item, Record Set) that you want to purge in the Record types boxes.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Record Sets, click Find to search for and select the record set you want to purge.
    4. +
    +

    The record set’s name appears in the Name box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization for which you want to purge the records in the Organization box.
    2. +
    3. Select a date in the Begin and End boxes to purge records that were deleted within this date range.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save, press CTRL+S, or click the Save button to save the purge record.
    6. +
    +

    The records will be purged from the Polaris database on the date you specified.

    +
      +
    1. To print a log of the purge processing job after it is completed, select a job in the Purge Criteria list, and click Report.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    A log is available until the Purge Record is deleted.

    +

    The preview window displays the Purge Processing Log. The log shows details about the titles that were deleted, the date and time the purge job was run, the number of titles purged, and other information.

    +
      +
    1. Click Print to print the log.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also generate standard cataloging reports that identify records with problems, list records that do not display in the PAC, and gather other information.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Restore_undelete_a_deleted_cataloging_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Restore_undelete_a_deleted_cataloging_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf843406 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKmanaging/Restore_undelete_a_deleted_cataloging_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Restore (undelete) a deleted cataloging record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Restore (undelete) a Deleted Cataloging Record

    +

    If you have the Polaris Administration profile Retain deleted record type records for the type of record you want to restore set to Yes, you can restore or undelete records with a deleted status.

    +
      +
    1. To undelete a cataloging record with a status of deleted.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: undeleteicon.gif
    Click to undelete the record.

    +
      +
    1. Open the deleted item record, bibliographic record, or authority record.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can search for item records by a record status of Deleted. Then, multi-select the records in the Find Tool results list, and select Undelete.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Undelete from the menu.
    2. +
    +

    A message tells you the record’s status will be changed to Final, and if there were links to other records, they need to be reestablished.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close the message box.
    2. +
    +

    The record’s status changes to Final.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_promotion_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_promotion_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7caed59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_promotion_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a New Promotion Record from the Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Promotion Record from the Shortcut Bar

    +

    To create a new promotion record from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +

    Tip:
    Press CTRL+N to display the New dialog box. Type the first letter of the record type to go to all records that begin with that letter. For example, type p to go to Promotion.To limit the record types in the Objects list, select Cataloging in the View box.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Promotion in the Objects list.
    2. +
    +

    + newpromo.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Promotion workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Enter information in the workform. See also:
    2. +
    + +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the record.
    2. +
    +

    A message in the status bar indicates the record was saved.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Promotion_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Promotion_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c3b5d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Promotion_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new record from the Promotion workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Record from the Promotion Workform

    +

    To create a new promotion record from the Promotion workform:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Polaris Find Tool to locate and display an existing promotion record.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New, or press CTRL+N from the workform menu bar.
    4. +
    +

    The New Promotion dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    • Clear Work Form - The data is cleared from the workform, and a new, blank workform appears.
    • +
    • Copy Existing Work Form - The original workform closes, and a copy of the workform appears.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The new record appears in the Promotion workform.

    +
      +
    1. Enter or modify the information in the Promotion workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save or press CTRL+S to save the record.
    4. +
    +

    A message in the status bar indicates the record was saved.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Creating_and_Editing_Promotion_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Creating_and_Editing_Promotion_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13f5c64a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Creating_and_Editing_Promotion_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating and Editing Promotion Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating and Editing Promotion Records

    +

    Promotion records in Polaris Cataloging are used to feature bibliographic materials, web sites, or community resources and events (if your library has a license for Community Profiles in addition to Feature It). Multiple resources can be featured in the same promotion record, but they must be of the same type. For example, if the promotion record features a title in your library’s catalog, you can add other bibliographic records to feature, but not URLs or community organizations/events. The following Cataloging permissions, set at the system, library or branch level, control who can work with these records: Promotion records: Access, Create, Modify, and Delete. The following example shows community resources returned with a bibliographic keyword search.

    +

    + +

    +

    To feature multiple resources of different types, you can create several promotion records linked to different types of resources, then enter the same set of search terms that will trigger the featured resources. For example, you could feature bibliographic records and a community organization/event by creating two promotion records, each with the same search triggers.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_demographic_targeting_for_promotions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_demographic_targeting_for_promotions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc0881d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_demographic_targeting_for_promotions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enter demographic targeting for promotions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Demographic Targeting for Promotions

    +

    To enter languages or branches to target for promotions:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Promotion workform, and go to the Demographic Targeting view.
    2. +
    3. Select one or both of the following options to display the lists.
      • Target only these languages
      • Target only these branches
    4. +
    5. Select the check boxes next to the language(s) or branch(es) you want to target.
    6. +
    +

     Note:
    The list of languages contains only those languages for which the library has a license from Polaris.

    +
    +
      +
    • If a languages or languages are selected, the featured resources appear only when the PAC user has switched the PowerPAC interface to a targeted language (from the Languages tab at the top of the PowerPAC window).
    • +
    • If a branch or branches are selected, the featured resources appear only when the PAC user is connected to one of the targeted branches in PowerPAC.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_or_edit_general_promotion_information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_or_edit_general_promotion_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8434a460 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_or_edit_general_promotion_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter or edit general promotion information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter or Edit General Promotion Information

    +

    To add general promotion information +

    +
      +
    1. Open the Promotion workform, and go to the General view.
    2. +
    +

    + promogeneral.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter the promotion record’s name (required).
    2. +
    3. Select the promotion record’s owner (required).
    4. +
    5. Select the promotion’s activation date and expiration date (required).
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    When the expiration date passes in the promotion record, the promotion record remains in the database, but it is deactivated and the featured resources do not display in PowerPAC. If you want the featured resources to display in PowerPAC for an indefinite amount of time, you can set the expiration date many years into the future.

    +
      +
    1. Type the promotion record’s headline, midline, and footline. The headline is required; the midline and footline are not required. The maximum length for each is 255 characters.
    2. +
    +

    The headline, midline, and footline text describe the featured resource in PowerPAC. For example:

    +

    + headmidfoot.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_search_terms_to_trigger_the_featured_resources.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_search_terms_to_trigger_the_featured_resources.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b772fdc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_search_terms_to_trigger_the_featured_resources.htm @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter search terms to trigger the featured resources + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Search Terms to Trigger the Featured Resources

    +

    The featured resources appear only if the keywords contained in the PAC user's search term match those defined as a positive trigger for the featured resource. You can also specify words or phrases as negative triggers that will prevent the display of the featured resource. For more information, see Promotion Triggers and PAC Searches.

    +

    To enter promotion triggers:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Promotions workform, and go to the Triggers view.
    2. +
    +

    Tips:
    Wild card characters, such as an asterisk, are not supported for triggers.

    The trigger words should not match words already in the record being featured so that the same record does not appear in search results and as a featured resource.

    It may be useful to think of a Boolean OR between triggers, a Boolean AND for multiple words within a single unquoted trigger, and a Boolean AND with a proximity value of '1' (ordered) for multiple words within a quoted trigger.

    +
      +
    1. In the Freetext column, type the text that triggers the display of the featured resource as follows:
      • Enter a single keyword per line. The PAC user must enter any or all of the keywords for the resource to be featured.
      • Enter a phrase on a line. The PAC user must enter the entire phrase for the resource to be featured. If the phrase has double quotes around it, the PAC user must enter the entire phrase in the same order without any other words. If the phrase is not in quotes, the PAC user must enter all the words, but they can be in any order.
    2. +
    3. In the Type column, select the box to open the list of search types.
    4. +
    +

    If your library has a license for Community Profiles, the following types appear in the list:

    +
    +
      +
    • Author or Organization
    • +
    • General Notes
    • +
    • Genre
    • +
    • Publisher
    • +
    • Series
    • +
    • Subject or Services
    • +
    • Title or Event Name
    • +
    +
    +

    If your library does not have a license for Community Profiles, the following types appear in the list:

    +
    +
      +
    • Author
    • +
    • General Notes
    • +
    • Genre
    • +
    • Publisher
    • +
    • Series
    • +
    • Subject
    • +
    • Title
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the type(s) of searches to which the search terms apply.
    2. +
    3.  If the search terms entered should prevent the resource from being featured, select the Negative box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The promotion record must have at least one positive trigger in order for a negative trigger to operate. For more information, see Promotion Triggers and PAC Searches.

    +
      +
    1. Type in the next available line to enter more search terms.
    2. +
    3. To move a trigger up or down in the list, select it and click the up or down arrow.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The order of the triggers on the workform does not affect processing or relevancy ranking.

    +
      +
    1. To normalize (remove un-indexable characters) from a search term, select it and click normzbtn.gif. When search terms are normalized, you can see the actual keywords.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +

    Promotion Triggers and PAC Searches

    +

    How Polaris matches promotion triggers to PAC searches: +

    +
      +
    • When a PAC user enters a search query, all search terms are extracted and normalized. Keyword, phrase and exact match search queries are all treated the same way.
    • +
    • An ordered keyword list is created that contains up to 16 normalized keywords.
    • +
    • If the ordered keyword list matches one or more positive promotion triggers (and zero negative triggers), the search query matches the promotion.
    • +
    +

    Positive and Negative Triggers +

    +

    When looking for matching promotions, Polaris first looks for a matching trigger (keyword, quoted phrase, unquoted phrase) and then considers whether the trigger is positive or negative. At least one positive trigger must be entered for a negative trigger to operate.

    +

    If a trigger type is checked and the library patron searches by that access point or by the “any field” access point (KW) for either bibliographic or community records, then Polaris attempts to find matching promotions.

    +

    Example:
    Promotion has 6 positive triggers and 1 negative trigger. The triggers are:
    Quilting - (all) - positive
    Knitting - (all) - positive
    Crochet - (all) - positive
    Sewing - Title/Event Name - negative
    Crocheting - (all) - positive
    Quilters - (all) - positive
    Needlework - (all) - positive

    The PAC user does a keyword Subject search for Knitting Sewing. The promotion should be returned because of the positive filter Knitting (all). Sewing is a negative filter but just for Title/Event Name and since the search was a subject search, Sewing was not a matching trigger.

    If a trigger is restricted to a subset of trigger types, then it applies when the access point is KW (regardless of whether the trigger is positive or negative). In other words, if SEWING is a negative trigger restricted to the Title/Event Name, then it applies when the access point is TI or KW.

    +

    Normalizing Triggers +

    +

    When you click the Normalize icon un-indexable characters are removed from the display of the trigger so the user can see how the string will be indexed in the database.

    +

    Example: +
    +
    "***race*** [Car] Driver" would normalize to "race car driver".

    "**$%#" would normalize to "". In this case the trigger would be ignored and/or removed automatically.

    +

    The normalization rules used here are the same as those used for keyword normalization in bibliographic records.   

    +

    These are some of the characters that are retained:

    +
      +
    • +

      Double quotes

      +
    • +
    • +

      Diacritics and most Unicode characters

      +
    • +
    • +

      Apostrophes

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hyphens

      +
    • +
    +

    These are some of the characters that are removed and replaced with a space:

    +
      +
    • +

      Asterisk

      +
    • +
    • +

      Dollar sign

      +
    • +
    • +

      Percent sign

      +
    • +
    • +

      Pound sign

      +
    • +
    • +

      Opening and closing square brackets

      +
    • +
    +

    Additional indexing rules may apply to some forms of punctuation:

    +

    Example:
    The normalized form of dog’s bone retains the apostrophe, but the user can search on either dog’s bone or dogs bone and get a match.

    +

    For words that contain characters that are stripped out by the normalization rules, enter two triggers: one with the original spelling, and one with the equivalent characters:

    +

    Example:
    For the search term Kei$ha, enter two triggers: keisha and kei$ha. This way, a match will occur when the user searches for either version of the name.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_the_resource_s_to_feature.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_the_resource_s_to_feature.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72574495 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Enter_the_resource_s_to_feature.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enter the resource(s) to feature + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter the Resource(s) to Feature

    +

    To feature bibliographic records, community organizations and/or events, or URLs:

    +

    Note:
    The same promotion record can contain multiple bibliographic, community, or web resources to feature, but it cannot contain resources of different types. For example, you cannot add both community and bibliographic records to the same promotion workform. Promotion records are linked to the bibliographic or community records they feature.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Promotions workform, and select the Featured Resources view.
    2. +
    3. To feature bibliographic or community records, do the following steps:
      1. Select Feature these local object(s) and select Bibliographic or Community in the Objects box.
      2. Click the Add button, and search for the bibliographic or community resource in the Find Tool. The option to select other databases is disabled on the Remote databases tab of the Find Tool.
      3. Select the bibliographic or community record to add. You can add more than one community or bibliographic record, but not a mixture of record types.
      4. To feature a web site or a library resource (bibliographic record or record set) via a URL, select Open this page, and type the URL in the box.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Find_an_existing_promotion_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Find_an_existing_promotion_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39756ced --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Find_an_existing_promotion_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find an existing promotion record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find an Existing Promotion Record

    +

    To search for an existing promotion record:

    +
      +
    1.  Select Cataloging, Promotions from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool opens with Promotions selected in the Object box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the search criteria, and enter the search term in the For box.
    2. +
    3. Click the Search button.
    4. +
    +

    The promotion records meeting your search criteria appear in the list.

    +

    The Linkage Type column displays the type of featured resource.

    +

    + FindToolPromoLinkType.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the promotion record, or select the record, right-click and select Open.
    2. +
    +

    The selected record opens in the Promotion workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Managing_Promotions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Managing_Promotions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d5870d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKpromo/Managing_Promotions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Promotions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Promotions

    +

    With Feature It, a separately-licensed product, the library can display featured resources in a dashboard on the PowerPAC search results screen when specific search queries are entered. These featured resources may be library materials, web sites, or community organizations/events. Your library must also have a license for Community Profiles to feature community organizations or events. Promotion records are linked to the featured community or bibliographic record.

    +

    To feature these resources in the PAC, you create Promotion records in the Polaris staff client that specify the resources to feature and the conditions under which the resources will display. If your library has Community Profiles and a Campaigns license, promotion records can be generated automatically for community organizations and events.  

    +

    Polaris Administration settings determine the location and display of these featured resources in PowerPAC. See Managing Feature It Promotions.

    +

    Note:
    Feature It is not available in Polaris Mobile PAC or Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.

    +

    See also:

    +

    Creating and Editing Promotion Records +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKquickref/Cataloging_Shortcut_Keys.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKquickref/Cataloging_Shortcut_Keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1d8d0ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKquickref/Cataloging_Shortcut_Keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,427 @@ + + + + + + + + Cataloging Shortcut Keys + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Shortcut Keys

    +

    These charts list the keyboard shortcuts you can use with Polaris cataloging workflows.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Record Operations Shortcut Keys
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Workform helpF1
    Print current viewCTRL+P
    Save recordCTRL+S
    Check for duplicatesCTRL+I
    Check headingsCTRL+J
    Display MARC descriptionCTRL+L
    Check MARC formatCTRL_M
    Display Macros tool barALT+F8
    Display Find Tool with Item Records selectedCTRL+ALT+F9
    Display Find Tool with Bibliographic Records selectedF12
    Check Authority headingsALT+S
    Check for linked recordsALT+C
    Bulk change recordsCTRL+B
    Add records to record setCTRL+E
    Remove records from a record setCTRL+R
    Create record set of linked items from the Bibliographic Record Set workformCTRL+T
    Create record set of linked items from the Item Record Set workformCTRL+T
    Print single labels from the Item Record workformCTRL+ALT+L
    Print multiple labels from the Item Record workformCTRL+ALT+M
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Navigation Actions Shortcut Keys
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Move cursor upup arrow
    Move cursor downdown arrow
    Move cursor leftleft arrow
    Move cursor right right arrow
    Go to beginning of wordCTRL+left arrow
    Go to end of wordCTRL+right arrow
    Previous subfieldSHIFT+TAB
    Next subfieldTAB
    Next tagCTRL+down arrow
    Previous tagCTRL+up arrow
    Beginning of recordCTRL+HOME
    End of recordCTRL+END
    Beginning of lineHOME
    End of lineEND
    Previous screenPAGE UP
    Next screenPAGE DOWN
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    MARCEditor Shortcut Keys
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Insert blank lineENTER
    Insert subfield delimiter A separate character used in conjunction with a subfield code and introduces each subfield in a variable field.CTRL+Q
    Insert fill characterSHIFT+I
    Insert blank characterSpace
    Sort fieldsCTRL+N
    Delete highlighted textDELETE
    Delete character leftBACKSPACE
    Delete character rightDELETE
    Delete word leftCTRL+BACKSPACE
    Delete word rightCTRL+DELETE
    Cut highlighted textCTRL+X
    Copy highlighted textCTRL+C
    Paste textCTRL+_V
    Insert modeINSERT
    Undo last actionCTRL+Z
    Redo last actionCTRL+Y
    Unicode to characterALT+X
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Select Actions (Keyboard) Shortcut Keys
    +

    FUNCTION

    +
    KEYS
    Select all linesCTRL+A
    Select to end of wordSHIFT+CTRL+right arrow
    Select to beginning of wordCTRL+SHIFT+left arrow
    Select to end of lineSHIFT+END
    Select to beginning of lineSHIFT+HOME
    Select entire tagSHIFT+CTRL+down arrow
    Select multiple linesSHIFT+down arrow
    Select or extend a block of textSHIFT+arrow keys
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Select Actions (Pointer) Shortcut Keys
    + + + + + + + + + +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    +
    Select the entire wordDouble-click the word
    Select the entire tag fieldDouble-click the tag number
    Select the entire lineTriple-click the tag number
    Select multiple linesDrag the cursor along the left margin
    Select a block of textDrag the cursor over the text to highlight
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_data_fields_in_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_data_fields_in_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78ff2f85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_data_fields_in_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk change data fields in bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change Data Fields in Bibliographic Records

    +

    You can make the following types of bulk changes to data fields in bibliographic records:

    +

    Note:
    The following tags/subfields cannot be modified or deleted because they are used in duplicate detection: 10$a, 20$a, 22$a, 24$a, 28$a, 35$a, and 37$a.

    +
      +
    • Insert a new tag
    • +
    • Insert a subfield in a tag in any location within that tag, or insert a subfield before or after a specific subfield
    • +
    • +

      Delete the first instance of a tag, the last instance of a tag, or all instances of a tag

      +
    • +
    • Delete a subfield with any data, with specific data, or delete the last instance of the subfield
    • +
    • Change a specific tag’s subfield code without changing the data in the subfield
    • +
    • Replace a tag’s subfield data with specific data
    • +
    • Change a tag’s indicator only
    • +
    • Correct non-filing indicators
    • +
    +

    To bulk change data fields in multiple bibliographic records:

    +

    Note:
    To bulk change bibliographic records, they must be in a record set, and you must have the necessary permissions to modify each bibliographic record in the record set.

    +
      +
    1. Open the record set that contains the bibliographic records you want to change.
    2. +

      Tip: + bulkchicon00148.gif +
      Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL+B.

      +
    3. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    4. +
    5. Select the Data Fields tab.
    6. +

      The Data Fields tabbed page appears.

      +
    7. In the Operation box, select the operation you want the bulk change to perform on the data fields you specify.
    8. +

      Note:
      The options available depend on the operation you selected. If you selected Correct non-filing indicator values (initial articles ‘a’, ‘an’, or ‘the’), skip to step 10.

      +
    9. In the Tag number box, select the number of the tag to insert, delete, replace, or identify.
    10. +
    11. Select the first and/or second indicators in the Indicator fields, One and Two boxes.
    12. +
    13. Type a subfield code in the Subfield $ box, and type a value for the subfield in the larger box to the right of the code.
    14. +

      Note:
      You must specify at least one subfield when you are inserting a tag.

      +
    15. Enter or select other criteria depending on the option you chose. For example, if you selected Replace a tag’s subfield (with specific data), enter the data you want to change to in the Change to box.
    16. +

      Tip:
      You can use diacritics in subfields. For example, the author’s name includes diacritics, but some of your bibliographic records do not have the correct name. You can select Replace a tag’s subfield (with specific data), type the existing author’s name in the Subfield box and insert diacritics in the author’s name in the Change to box by clicking on the Diacritics button. Select the character in the Character Picker box.

      +
    17. When you are finished specifying the changes, click Add Change to Queue.
    18. +

      The changes appear under Bulk change queue for data fields. You can move the changes up or down in the queue by selecting the change, and clicking the Up or Down buttons. To remove a change, select it, and click Remove.

      +
    19. Click OK to initiate the bulk change process, or click another tab to make other changes to the records.
    20. +

      If you click OK, the Summary of Changes dialog box appears.

      +
    21. Click Continue on the Summary of Changes dialog box to continue with the bulk change. See Check the bulk change queue and run the report.
    22. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_non-MARC_data_in_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_non-MARC_data_in_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53045698 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_non-MARC_data_in_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Bulk change non-MARC data in bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change Non-MARC Data in Bibliographic Records

    +

    Tip:
    The records you want to bulk change must be in a record set.

    +

    To change non-MARC data in multiple bibliographic records:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: bulkchicon.gif
    Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL+B.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box appears with the non-MARC tabbed page displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Choose from the following options:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the Cataloging parameter Bibliographic record Do not overlay feature enabled parameter is set to No, the Do not overlay check box does not appear on the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box. See Enable the Do not overlay feature.

    +
    +
      +
    • To display (or not display) the records in the PAC, select Display in PAC, and select On or Off.
    • +
    • To change the setting that specifies whether the bibliographic records can be overlaid, select Do not overlay, and select On or Off.
    • +
    • To change the owner of the records, select Record owner, select the current owner in the From box, and select the new owner in the To box.
    • +
    • To change provisional bibliographic records to final records, select Save provisional records as final.
    • +
    • To create resource entities to manage electronic resources, select Create resource entities, and select the vendor account.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to initiate the bulk change process, or click another tab to make other changes to the records.
    2. +
    +

    If you click OK, the Summary of Changes dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue on the Summary of Changes dialog box to continue with the bulk change. See Check the bulk change queue and run the report.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_006_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_006_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a848ed55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_006_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk change the 006 tag in bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change the 006 Tag in Bibliographic Records

    +

    To bulk change the 006 tag in multiple bibliographic records:

    +

    Note:
    You can insert or delete 006 tags, but you cannot replace an existing 006 tag. The code you specify in the Form of material position (006/00) determines the data elements you can define for subsequent character positions.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: bulkchicon00150.gif
    Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL + B.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the 006 Tag tab.
    2. +
    +

    The 006 Tag tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. To insert or replace an entire 006 tag, select Insert or Replace, and do the following steps:
      1. Select the form of material code in the (00) box.
      2. Click Define. The appropriate dialog box appears, depending on the form of material.
      3. Define the subsequent positions in the 006 tag by selecting the appropriate codes from the lists in the dialog box.
      4. Click OK when you have finished defining the character positions. The results of your selections appear to the right of the Define button.
      5. If you are inserting a new 006 tag, select As first if you want the tag to be the first 006 tag, or select As last if you want the tag to be the last 006 tag. If you are replacing a specific 006 tag, select First or Last.
    2. +
    3. To delete a specific 006 tag, select Delete and do the following steps:
      1. In the (00) box, select the value that matches the 006 tag you want to delete.
      2. Select First instance to delete only the first 006 tag that contains that value, Last instance to delete the last occurrence of the tag, or All instances to delete all 006 tags with this value.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To change a specific value in the Form of material (00) code in the 006 tag, do the following steps:
      1. Select the check box that corresponds to the form of material you want to change, for example Books.
      2. In the From box, select the value to change. 
      3. In the To box, select the value to put in this position
    2. +
    3. Click OK to initiate the bulk change process, or click another tab to make other changes to the records.
    4. +
    +

    If you click OK, the Summary of Changes dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue on the Summary of Changes dialog box to continue with the bulk change. See Check the bulk change queue and run the report.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_007_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_007_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..739fd079 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_007_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk change the 007 tag in bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change the 007 Tag in Bibliographic Records

    +

    To bulk change the 007 tag in multiple bibliographic records:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: + bulkchicon00151.gif +
    Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL+B.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    2. +
    3. Select the 007 (1) or 007 (2) tab.
    4. +
    +

    The 007 Tag (1) or 007 Tag (2) tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. To insert or replace an entire 007 tag, select Insert or Replace, and do the following steps:
      1. Select the category of material code in the (00) box.
      2. Click Define. The appropriate dialog box appears, depending on the category of material.
      3. Define the subsequent positions in the 007 tag by selecting the appropriate codes from the lists in the dialog box.
      4. Click OK when you are finished defining the character positions. The Insert/Replace dialog box closes, and the results of your selections appear to the right of the Define button on the Bulk Change dialog box.
      5. If you are inserting a new 007 tag, select As first if you want the tag to be the first 007 tag, or select As last if you want the tag to be the last 007 tag. If you are replacing a specific 007 tag, select First or Last.
    2. +
    3. To delete a specific 007 tag, select Delete on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, and do the following steps:
      1. In the (00) box, select the value that matches the 007 tag you want to delete.
      2. Select First instance to delete only the first 007 tag that contains that value, Last instance to delete the last occurrence of the tag, or All instances to delete all 007 tags with this value.
    4. +
    5. To change a specific value in the Category of material (00) code in the 007 tag, select the 007 Tag 1 or 007 Tag 2 tab on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, and do the following steps:
      1. Select the check box that corresponds to the category of material you want to change, for example Video recording (007 Tag 2 tab).
      2. Click the From button. A dialog box appears with the values for that category of material.
      3. Select the value you want to change, and click Ok. The Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box displays the value you selected in the From box.
      4. Click the To button. A dialog box appears.
      5. Select the value to put in this position, and click OK.
    6. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box displays the from and to selections.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to initiate the bulk change process, or click another tab to make other changes to the records.
    2. +
    +

    If you click OK, the Summary of Changes dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue on the Summary of Changes dialog box to continue with the bulk change. See Check the bulk change queue and run the report.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_008_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_008_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a5308a83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_008_tag_in_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk change the 008 tag in bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change the 008 Tag in Bibliographic Records

    +

    To bulk change the 008 tag in multiple bibliographic records:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: + bulkchicon00152.gif +
    Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL+B.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    2. +
    3. Select the 008 Tag tab.
    4. +
    +

    The 008 Tag tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check box that corresponds to the 008 tag you want to change.
    2. +
    3. Click From.
    4. +
    +

    The Bulk Change 008 — (From) box appears based on the check box you selected.

    +
      +
    1. Select the positions you want to change in the 008 tag of all records in the record set.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to return to the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Click To.
    6. +
    +

    The Bulk Change 008 -- To dialog box appears based on selections you made in the Bulk Change 008 -- From dialog box. For example, if you specified a change to the Language (35-37), you can select only the Language in the Bulk Change 008 --From dialog box. If there were multiple selections in the From box, you can select multiple values for the To box.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to return to the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to initiate the bulk change process, or click another tab to make other changes to the records.
    4. +
    +

    If you click OK, the Summary of Changes dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue on the Summary of Changes dialog box to continue with the bulk change. A message tells you the change was added to the bulk change queue. See Check the bulk change queue and run the report.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_Leader_in_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_Leader_in_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06ce2bc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Bulk_change_the_Leader_in_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk change the Leader in bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change the Leader in Bibliographic Records

    +

    To bulk change the Leader in multiple bibliographic records:

    +

    Note:
    The records you want to bulk change must be in a record set.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: + bulkchicon00149.gif +
    Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL+B.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    2. +
    3. Select the Leader tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Leader tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the position you want to change.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When you select the LDR/06, a message reminds you to make the appropriate changes to the 008.

    +

    The From and To boxes become active when you select the position.

    +
      +
    1. In the From box, select the value to change.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you are correcting invalid values, you can type an invalid value for the position in the From box, or you can select All invalid values from the list. The bulk change process will replace the invalid values with the selection in the To box.

    +
      +
    1. In the To box, select the value to put in the selected position.
    2. +
    3. Select any other positions you want to change in the 008 tag, and specify the From and To values.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to initiate the bulk change process, or click another tab to make other changes to the records.
    6. +
    +

    If you click OK, the Summary of Changes dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue on the Summary of Changes dialog box to continue with the bulk change. See Check the bulk change queue and run the report.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Bibliographic_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Bibliographic_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..274724c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Bibliographic_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + Changing Multiple Bibliographic Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk-Changing Bibliographic Records

    +

    You can gather multiple bibliographic records in a record set and simultaneously change specific data in all the bibliographic records in the record set using the Bulk Change process. The changes to the records are made via a Bulk Change job, and you can check the status of the job in the Bulk Change Job Queue. When the job is completed, you can run a report that displays the start and end time of the bulk change job, the number of records that were changed, and any exceptions where records could not be changed.

    +

    Use the bulk change process to change the following information in multiple bibliographic records at once:

    +

    Tip:

    You must have the permission Access bibliographic bulk change: Allow to do any bulk changes of bibliographic records. To bulk change values in the LDR, 006, 007, 008 (control fields), you must have the additional permission Access bibliographic fixed fields bulk change: Allow.

    +
      +
    • Non-MARC data - Change the indicator in the bibliographic records so that all the records display (or do not display) in the PAC. You can also change the owner of the records from one owner to another or change provisional records to final. The option to create resource entities is used only for linking ebook bibs to vendor accounts.
    • +
    • Data Fields - Insert or delete tags, subfields, and indicators. You can change, insert or delete specific values in tags, subfields, and indicators. You can also check and correct non-filing indicator values.
    • +
    • Leader - Change values in the Leader for all the records in the record set. If the Leader/06 is changed, a message warns the user to make appropriate changes to the 008 tag.
    • +
    • 006 Tag - Change the 006 tag (material characteristics). The code in the 006/00 (form of material) determines the data elements you can define for subsequent character positions. In addition, the codes in field 006/00 correspond to those in Leader 06 (type of record). You can change, insert, and delete values in the 006 tag.
    • +
    • 007 Tag (1) and 007 Tag (2) - Change the 007 tag (the physical description). The codes in the 007 tag are defined by position, and the number of character positions depends on the code contained in 007/00. You can insert, delete, and create tags and change the category of material. You can also change a value to another value.
    • +
    • 008 Tag - Change the 008 tag that provides coded information about the record as a whole as well as special bibliographic aspects of the item, such as the target audience.
    • +
    +

    Records are skipped when they do not contain the criteria specified for the bulk change. Records that contain the criteria specified for the bulk change, but cannot be changed for other reasons, are added to a cleanup record set. To bulk change the selected bibliographic records, you must have access and modify permissions for each of the bibliographic records in addition to the permission to perform the bulk change process.

    +

    You cannot use bulk change to modify values in the following fields:

    +
      +
    • Polaris record status
    • +
    • Bibliographic control number (001)
    • +
    • Standard numbers used in deduplication routines (010$a, 020$a, 022$a, 024$a, 028$a, 035$a, 037$a).
    • +
    • LDR values in positions other than 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 17, 18, 19 (the values in these positions can be changed). You cannot change the Leader/05 to a value of “d”.
    • +
    • 008, positions 008/7-10 (beginning date of publication) because it is used in deduplication routines.
    • +
    +

    When you change a field that is under authority control and the change invalidates the existing link, the link to that authority record is broken, and a background process attempts to re-link and re-index the record. If the change is made to a field subject to authority control, but the change does not invalidate the link, the link is not broken. The most efficient way to make changes for subfields in fields under authority control is to change the authority record. Then the changes filter down to the linked bibliographic records. See Edit authority records and update linked records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Item_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Item_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b072ab2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Changing_Multiple_Item_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,295 @@ + + + + + + + Bulk Changing Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk-Changing Item Records

    +

    To make bulk changes to multiple item records at once, you can either gather the records in a record set and select Tools > Bulk Change, or you can select multiple items from anywhere in Polaris where items are displayed in a list, right-click and select the Ad hoc Bulk Change option. For example, you can select multiple items in the Find Tool results list, right-click and select Ad hoc Bulk Change to open the Item Record Bulk Change box.

    +

    You can also save and reuse item record bulk change settings as Item Record Bulk Change Templates. This option requires the appropriate permissions. See Item Record Bulk Change Templates.

    +

    Note:
    For more information on using cataloging record sets, see Using Cataloging Record Sets.

    +

    With these methods, you can change the location, circulation information, bibliographic information, notes, and other information for multiple item records using the check boxes and free-text fields in the Bulk Change Item Record dialog box. When you are changing notes or other free-text fields, you can replace the text, add to the end of the text, or add to the beginning of the text.

    +

    Certain circulation statuses cannot be modified using bulk change because of the effects these changes might have in other records and processes. For example, you cannot use bulk change to change the circulation status of Out to In because some of the items might fill a hold request or be overdue. If an item with holds changed from Out to In, the patron record and the hold request record would need to be updated and notification sent. Any fines would need to be resolved and the item might need to go in-transit. In addition, in-transit slips, hold slips and fine receipts might need to be generated. The following table lists the circulation statuses that can be changed using bulk change.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    From Circulation StatusTo Circulation Status
    BinderyIn
    In Repair
    Missing
    Unavailable
    Withdrawn
    InBindery
    In Repair
    Missing
    Unavailable
    Withdrawn
    In-ProcessBindery
    In
    In Repair
    Missing
    Unavailable
    Withdrawn
    In RepairBindery
    In
    Missing
    Unavailable
    Withdrawn
    MissingBindery
    In
    Unavailable
    Withdrawn
    UnavailableBindery
    In
    In Repair
    Missing
    Withdrawn
    +

    +

    +

    To bulk change item records:

    +

    Note:
    To bulk change item records, you need the Access item record bulk change: Allow permission set at the System level, and the Item record: Bulk change permission for each item’s owning branch.

    +
      +
    1. Select the item records to change, and open the Bulk Change dialog box using one of the following methods:
      • If the items are in a list, such as the Find Tool results list, a linked list box, or the Bibliographic Record Preview window, select the records, right-click and select Ad hoc bulk change.
      • If the items are in a record set, open the record set, and select Tools, Bulk Change, press CTRL+B, or click bulkchangicon.gif to select all the item records in the record set, or select multiple records, right-click and select Ad hoc bulk change from the right-click menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following tabs to change fields for all the item records in the record set or for all the items selected in the linked list box:
      • Location - Use this tab to change the item records’ location information.
        • To change the items’ location information, select the Owner, Assigned branch, Assigned collection, Shelf location, or Home branch box, and select a corresponding value from the list.
        • To enter a temporary location for the items, select Temporary location, and type the location. If you leave the text field blank, the Temporary location will be blank in all the item records in the record set.
      • Circulation - Use this tab to change the item records’ circulation information.
        • To change basic circulation information, select the Circulation status, Material type, Loan period code, Fine code, Statistical code, or Renewal limit box and select a corresponding value from the list.
        • To allow or disallow holds on the items, select the Holdable box. Then, select the check box to allow holds on the items, or leave the check box blank to prevent holds on the items.
        • To change hold limits, select the Holdable box and select the check box to allow holds. Then, select one of the hold limit settings, and select the check box to the right of the setting to limit the holds, or leave the right check box empty to deselect the limit.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Example:
    To allow all items in the record set to be held and then picked up at any library, select the Holdable check box, select Pickup at this branch, but leave the check box to the right empty. This will clear the Pickup at this branch setting for all items in the record set that have this limit setting selected.

    +
      +
    • To change the Non circulating setting for all item records, select the Non circulating box, and either select the check box to the right or leave it blank. If you select the check box, all the items in the record set will not circulate. If you leave the check box blank, all the items will have the Non circulating check box unchecked, allowing them to circulate.
    • +
    • To change the Do not float setting for all item records, select the Do not float box, and either select the check box to the right or leave it blank. If you select the check box, all the items in the record set will not float to other branches’ collections. If you leave the check box blank, the items are eligible to float to other branches’ collections.
    • +
    • To change the Do not mail to patrons setting for all item records, select the Do not mail to patrons box, and either select the check box to the right or leave it blank. If you select the check box, all items in the record set will not be mailed to patrons. If you leave the check box blank, the items can be mailed to patrons.
    • +
    • To change the Loanable outside the system setting for all items in the record set, select the Loanable outside the system box, and either select the check box to the right, or leave it blank. If you select the check box, the items can be loaned outside the system. If you leave the check box blank, the items cannot be loaned outside the system.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Call Number - Use this tab to change the item records’ call number information, or to assign call numbers to the item records.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you select Use call number fields from bib record and also enter a new bib control number on the Misc tab, the call number is taken from the new bibliographic record.

    +
    +
      +
    • To assign or change call numbers by taking the call number from each item’s linked bibliographic record, select Use call number fields from bib record. To use this option, the Polaris Administration profile Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made must be set to Yes. If it is set to No, the check box is disabled.
      • If the Use call number fields from bib record box is selected, the call number fields are copied subfield-by-subfield. If the bibliographic record has the subfield, it is copied to the item record. If the bibliographic record does not have the call number subfield, the field does not change in the linked item record.
      • If the shelving scheme is left blank in the dialog box, the shelving scheme from the item record is used to determine the tags and subfields to copy from the bibliographic record. This allows the bulk change process to copy the call number information from linked bibliographic records even when the items have different shelving schemes.
    • +
    +
      +
    • To change the shelving scheme for all the items in the record set, select Shelving scheme, and select a value from the list.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you enter a shelving scheme and the Use call number fields from bib record box is also selected, the shelving scheme is copied to the item records unless there are no tags in the item’s linked bibliographic record that are consistent with the shelving scheme in the dialog box. In this case, neither the call number nor the shelving scheme are changed, and the following error message appears on the report: No call number for the selected shelving scheme was found in bib record.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • +

      To change the call number information for all the items in the record set (without copying from the linked bibliographic record), select Call number prefix, Classification number, Cutter number, or Call number suffix, and type a value in the corresponding box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If the Use call number fields from bibliographic record box is selected, you cannot select the check boxes for any of the six call number fields (prefix, class, cutter, suffix, volume, copy).

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • +

      To change the volume or copy number for all the items in the record set, select Volume number or Copy number, and type a value in the corresponding box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • Notes/Blocks - Use this tab to change the item records’ notes and blocks.
      • To change the notes information for all item records in the record set, select Public note, Non-public note, or Physical condition, and type the text in the box to the right of the note you selected. Then, select Replace to replace any existing notes with the note you typed, Prepend to add the notes to the beginning of any existing notes, or Append to add the notes to the end of any existing notes.
      • To change a library-assigned block, select the Library assigned check box, and select a value from the list box to the right.
      • To change a free-text block, select the Free text block check box, and type the text for the free-text block you want to add. Then, select Replace to replace the text for any free-text blocks, Prepend to add the text to the beginning of any existing free-text blocks, or Append to add the text to the end of any existing free-text blocks.
    • +
    • Misc - Use this tab to change miscellaneous information on the item records, or to assign barcodes to items that do not have a barcode.
      • To change the bibliographic control number for all item records, select Bib control no. Then, if you know the bibliographic control number, enter it in the box and press Tab, or click Find, and search for the bibliographic record. All item records in the record set will be linked to this bibliographic record.
      • To change the Display in PAC setting for all item records in the record set, select the Display in PAC box, and select the check box to the right, or leave it blank. If you select the check box, all the item records will have the Display in PAC setting checked, which means they will all display in the PAC. If you leave the check box blank, all the item records will have the Display in PAC setting unchecked, which means none of the items will display in the PAC.
      • To change the parent item for all the records in the record set, select Parent item, and type a value in the box to the right. If you leave the text field blank, the Parent item field will be blank in all the item records in the record set.
      • To change the funding source for all the item records in the record set, select Funding source, and type a value. If you leave the text field blank, the Funding source field will be blank in all items in the record set.
      • To change the price of all the items, select Price and type the price. If you leave the text field blank, the Price field will be blank in all the items in the record set.
      • To assign barcodes to all the items that do not have barcodes, enter the barcode range by selecting the Use system assigned barcodes box, or by scanning (or typing) the barcodes into the Item barcode(s) box. The number of barcodes is displayed in the Barcode total box.
    • +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If an item already has a barcode, it is not changed.

    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you selected Use system assigned barcodes, enter the following information on the Item barcode range dialog box: select the barcode type, type the beginning and ending barcodes, and specify the next barcode to be assigned.

    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Barcodes are automatically assigned to the item records in the order in which they are sorted in the linked item list box, or in the order in which they appear in the record set. If all the records have not been loaded into the record set at the time the bulk change is launched, the items are processed in item record control number order.
    • +
    • If a duplicate barcode is encountered, the process skips that barcode and goes to the next one. If there are not enough barcodes, a message appears on the error report: No barcode was assigned because not enough barcodes were specified in the range.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can skip the next step if you do not want to create a record set of the items that did not get changed or rename the report. If you do not enter a report name, a default report name is used: ItemBulkChange__ with a 16-character representation of the current date/time.

    +
      +
    1. Click Report/Record Set tab to specify the bulk change report and error record set as follows:
      • If you want to change the default report name, type the location and file name, or click Browse to locate the file. The report also shows errors for items that could not be bulk changed either due to their status or lack of permissions. See Bulk Change Report Details.
      • To create a record set of the items for which the changes could not be made, select the box under Error Record Set, type a name for the record set in the Name box and select an owner in the Owner box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    An error record set is not required. However, specifying an error record set makes it easier to locate the item records that have errors. If no errors are found, no error record set is created.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK or press Enter to start the bulk change process.
    2. +
    +

    The Summary of Changes message box displays the following details:

    +
    +
      +
    • The number of item records to be changed
    • +
    • The name and owner of the record set that contains the item records being changed
    • +
    • The error record set name and owner, if the error record set is requested
    • +
    • The path and file name specified for the bulk change report
    • +
    • A summary of all the fields to be changed and their new values
    • +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    To return to the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change any of your settings, click Cancel.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue.
    2. +
    +

    The bulk change process applies the changes to the item records.

    +

    A message informs you when the bulk change process is finished and indicates if there were errors.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close the message box.
    2. +
    +

    After the bulk change process, the list display is updated as follows, depending on whether changed the items from a record set or from a list:

    +
    +
      +
    • Record set - The record set workform is refreshed and sorted by the default sort order. You can re-sort the list in barcode order.
    • +
    • Item list using Ad hoc Bulk Change - The list view is refreshed immediately after the Ad hoc Bulk Change and any changes to fields that display in the list view are you can see the results of the bulk change to fields that display in the list view. If the bib control number was changed, the new title displays in the list view.
    • +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change Report Details

    +

    The default name of the bulk change report is ItemBulkChange__ with a 16-character representation of the current date and time. It shows the total number of records in the record set, the number of records that were changed, and the number of records that were not changed. Below the statistics are details about the records that could not be changed and the reason they were not changed. It also shows warning messages for item records when the assigned and home branches are different, and item records that will not display in the PAC.

    +

    If you have attempted to assign barcodes in the Item Bulk Change dialog, and barcodes could not be assigned for any or all of the items, the summary information displays the number of items for which barcodes could not be created and the reason:

    +

    Example: (Barcodes not assigned
    Number of barcodes not assigned because of detected duplicates:
    Number of barcodes not assigned because of incorrect format:
    Number of items not assigned a barcode because not enough barcodes specified:

    +
    Number of items not assigned a barcode because item already had a barcode:

    The detailed section lists each item for which barcodes could not be assigned and the reason.

    The following are examples of errors where items could not be changed because the circulation status prevented the change, or the user lacked permissions:

    Example: (Lack of permissions)

    BULK CHANGE REPORT
    5/9/2011 1:56:17 PM
    Filename: C:\Documents and Settings\User 1\Desktop\BulkChangePer.txt
    GENERAL INFORMATION
    User name: User 1
    Processed record set name: bulk change permission testing
    Processed record set owner: User 1
    Error record set name: BulkChangePermissionTestOne
    Error record set owner: User 1
    SUMMARY OF CHANGES:
    Display in PAC: No
    STATISTICS:
    Processing time: 00 hours 00 minutes 02 seconds
    Number of items in record set: 40
    Number of items changed: 38
    Number of errors: 2
    Number of items unchanged due to 'lack of permission' error: 2

    *************************************************************
    ERROR DETAILS:
    *************************************************************
    Item Record: 1895964
    Barcode number: 0003500045236
    Title: A new guide to better fishing: over 200 fishing techniques that will help you catch more fish, more often
    Reason(s) for error: User does not have permission to bulk change item records owned by 'Cambridge Public Library'

    Item Record: 1982897
    Barcode number: 0004100044306
    Title: Magic and the night river
    Reason(s) for error: User does not have permission to bulk change item records owned by 'Green Library'

    Example: (Item’s status prevents the change)

    BULK CHANGE REPORT
    5/10/2011 11:29:33 AM
    Filename: C:\Users\Peer\Desktop\POLARIS 4.x PROJECT LIST\ItemBulkChangeReport_20090710112504.txt
    GENERAL INFORMATION:
    User name: peer
    Processed record set name: Bulk change
    Processed record set owner: peer
    Error record set name:
    Error record set owner:
    *************************************************************
    SUMMARY OF CHANGES:
    Circulation status: In
    *************************************************************
    STATISTICS:
    Processing time: 00 hours 00 minutes 01 seconds
    Number of items in record set: 27
    Number of items changed: 24
    Number of errors: 3
    *************************************************************
    ERROR DETAILS:
    ************************************************************
    Item Record: 1641186
    Barcode number: 0001900246677
    Title: 1 2 3
    Reason(s) for error: Circulation status change violation: Status was 'Lost'

    Item Record: 1622822
    Barcode number: 0001900024157
    Title: 10 lb. penalty
    Reason(s) for error: Circulation status change violation: Status was 'Out'

    Item Record: 1621873
    Barcode number: 0001900011196
    Title: 1 Ragged Ridge Road
    Reason(s) for error: Circulation status change violation: Status was 'Withdrawn'

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Check_the_bulk_change_queue_and_run_the_report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Check_the_bulk_change_queue_and_run_the_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..285788de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Check_the_bulk_change_queue_and_run_the_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Check the bulk change queue and run the report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check the Bulk Change Queue and Run the Report

    +

    After you submit the bulk change, you can confirm that it was processed, and you can run a report. To open the bibliographic bulk change queue and run the report:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Cataloging Processing > Bibliographic Bulk Change Queue.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Bulk Change Job Queue dialog box appears.

    +

    Tip:
    To delete a pending or completed bulk change job, select it and click Delete. When a job is running, you cannot cancel or delete it. If you delete a pending job, the bulk changes are not processed. After a job is deleted, you cannot run reports on that bulk change job.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > View, or click Report to run the report.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Bulk Change Report appears in the preview window.

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_URL_link_to_a_record_set_in_the_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_URL_link_to_a_record_set_in_the_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e652a0ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_URL_link_to_a_record_set_in_the_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a URL link to a record set in the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a URL Link to a Record Set in the PAC

    +

    You can create record sets and then make the titles readily accessible in Polaris PowerPAC using several methods. One method is to create a URL link to the record set and publish it as a Web part in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Tip:
    To find a record set that appears in Polaris PowerPAC, select it to display the URL in the top of the PAC browser window. Then select and copy the bibliographic record set ID that appears after the equal (=) sign. For example, select 13221 in this URL: http://qa-orion/view.aspx?brs=13221.
    Then, search for the record set in the staff client Find Tool: select Record set ID in the Search by box, and paste the record set ID in the For box.

    +

    To create a URL link to a record set in the PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Create the record set containing the titles you want to make available in Polaris PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. Define a URL link to the record set that references the record set(s) by control number or by name.
    4. +
    +

    Examples: +
    (single record set by number) http://{PowerPACURL}/view.aspx?brs=1234
    (multiple record sets by number) http://{PowerPACURL}/view.aspx?brs=1234,12345,123456
    (single record set by name) http://{PowerPACURL}/view.aspx?brsn='bibrecordsetname'
    (multiple record sets by name) http://{PowerPACURL}/view.aspx?brs='TotSummer','TeenSummer','AdultSummer'

    +
      +
    1. Create a custom web part for the record set URL.
    2. +
    3. Assign the custom web part to a specific page. See Defining Web Parts for Dashboards - Overview.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_authority_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_authority_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..895ce515 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_authority_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Create a bib record set from an authority record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Bib Record Set from an Authority Record Set

    +

    To create a record set of the linked bibliographic records from an authority record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Authority Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create Bibliographic Record Set.
    4. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record Set Setup dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the bibliographic record set in the Name box, select a different record set owner in the Owner box if you want to change the owner, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record Set workform appears with the name and creation date/time in the Name box, and the name of the authority record set from which it was created in the Note box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_item_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_item_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6486fdbe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_a_bib_record_set_from_an_item_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a bib record set from an item record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a bib record set from an item record set

    +

    To create a record set of the linked bibs from an item record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create Bibliographic Record Set, click createbibrecsetbtn.gif, or press Ctrl+T.
    4. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record Set Setup dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the bibliographic record set in the Name box, select a different record set owner in the Owner box to change it, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Record Set workform appears with the name and creation date/time in the Name box, and the name of the item record set from which it was created in the Note box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_authority_record_set_from_a_bib_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_authority_record_set_from_a_bib_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4079228 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_authority_record_set_from_a_bib_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Create an authority record set from a bib record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create an Authority Record Set from a Bib Record Set

    +

    To create a record set of the linked authority records from a bibliographic record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create Authority Record Set.
    4. +
    +

    The Authority Record Set Setup dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the authority record set in the Name box, select a different record set owner in the Owner box if you want to change the owner, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Authority Record Set workform appears with the name and creation date/time in the Name box, and the name of the bibliographic record set from which it was created in the Note box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_item_record_set_from_bib_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_item_record_set_from_bib_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06c368c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Create_an_item_record_set_from_bib_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create an item record set from bib record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create an Item Record Set from Bib Record Set

    +

    To create a record set of the linked item records from a bibliographic record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create Item Record Set, click createitemrecseticon.gif, or press Ctrl+T.
    4. +
    +

    The Item Record Set Setup dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the item record set in the Name box, select a different record set owner in the Owner box to change it, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Item Record Set workform appears with the name and creation date/time in the Name box, and the name of the bibliographic record set from which it was created in the Note box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_Community_content_carousels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_Community_content_carousels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a5dea70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_Community_content_carousels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Display record set titles in Community content carousels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display Record Set Titles in Community Content Carousels

    +

    To display record set titles in Community profile content carousels:

    +
      +
    1. Create the record set containing the titles you want to include in the community record’s content carousel.
    2. +

      Note:
      For content carousels to include cover images, enriched data options for cover images must be set in Polaris Administration. See Enabling Enriched Data.

      +
    3. Create or open a community record in the Polaris staff client. Community Records in the Staff Client.
    4. +
    5. Search for and select the record set on the Social tab of the Community Record workform.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_PAC_content_carousels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_PAC_content_carousels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19a1f465 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Display_record_set_titles_in_PAC_content_carousels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display record set titles in PAC content carousels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display Record Set Titles in PAC Content Carousels

    +

    You can publish content in Polaris PowerPAC using visual representations of titles or “content carousels” on the portal page. And, if your library has Polaris Community Profiles, you can display content carousels in community records in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    To display record set titles in PAC content carousels:

    +
      +
    1. Create the record set containing the titles you want to include in the content carousel.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For content carousels to include cover images, enriched data options for cover images must be set in Polaris Administration. See Enabling Enriched Data.

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the record set in the Portal page content carousels PowerPAC profile in Polaris Administration. See Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4561498f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Templates

    +

    You can save and reuse item record bulk change settings as Item Record Bulk Change Templates. This option requires the appropriate permissions.

    +

    Create an Item Record Bulk Change Template

    +

    You can use an entire record set or a selection of items to create a template.

    +
      +
    1. Open an existing record set or create a new one.
    2. +
    3. Use the entire record set or select items from it.
    4. +
    5. Select Tools > Bulk Change.

    6. +
    7. The Item Record Bulk Change dialog opens. Change the relevant criteria > Save As.

    8. +
    9. Enter a name for the template > OK.

    10. +
    +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
      +
    • The template was created successfully.
    • +
    • The template could not be created because a duplicate name was used.
    • +
    • The template was created but with errors and an option to access an error report.
    • +
    +

    Use a Template to Make Item Record Bulk Changes

    +
  • You can use a template to make bulk changes to an entire record set or a selection of items from it.
  • +
      +
    1. Open an existing record set or create a new one.
    2. +
    3. Use the entire record set or select items from it.
    4. +
    5. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    6. +
    7. Select a template from the drop down list of templates that you have access to > OK.

    8. +
    9. Review the Summary of Changes > Continue.

    10. +
    +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
      +
    • The changes were made successfully.
    • +
    • Changes were made but with errors and an option to access an error report.
    • +
    +

    Modify a Template

    +
      +
    1. Open a record set.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    4. +
    5. Select a template.
    6. +
    7. Change the relevant template criteria > Save.

    8. +
    9. Select OK.
    10. +
    +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
      +
    • The changes were made successfully.
    • +
    • Changes were made but with errors and an option to download an error report.
    • +
    +

    Delete a Template

    +
      +
    1. Open a record set.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Bulk Change.
    4. +
    5. Select a template > Delete.

    6. +
    7. Select Yes.

    8. +
    +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
      +
    • The template was successfully deleted.
    • +
    • An error message that template was not deleted with an option to download an error report.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Open_an_existing_cataloging_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Open_an_existing_cataloging_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a4b1385 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Open_an_existing_cataloging_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Open an existing cataloging record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Open an existing cataloging record set

    +

    Do one of the following actions to open an existing cataloging record set:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select Cataloging > Record Sets from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and open an existing record set. You can limit the search by Name, Owner, or Type.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Right-click a cataloging record in the Find Tool’s results list, and select Links > Record sets from the context menu (the record must be in a record set).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select Links > Existing > Record Sets from a cataloging record workform. If the record belongs to a record set, the record set opens. If the record belongs to more than one record set, a list of the record sets appears. Select a record set in the list.

      +
    • +
    +

    The record set workform appears for the record set you selected.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Print_a_list_of_cataloging_records_from_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Print_a_list_of_cataloging_records_from_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34d40d49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Print_a_list_of_cataloging_records_from_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Print a list of cataloging records from a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print a List of Cataloging Records from a Record Set

    +

    Tips:
    You can also select a single record, right-click and print it. If you select an item record that has child records, or is a child record linked to a parent record, you can print its associated records. You can also print item labels from an item record set. If the item is linked to a serial issue on a route list, you can print the routing slip from the record set.

    +

    To print a list of records from a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the item, bibliographic, or authority record set.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can sort the records by clicking on the record set column headings. The record set will be printed in the order in which it was sorted.

    +
      +
    1. To print a list of all the records in the record set, do one of the following steps:
      • Select File > Print > Record Set from the record set workform menu.
      • Select File > Print > List view from the record set workform menu.
      • Right-click in the list of records, and select Print > List view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Record Set, the record set appears in a Adobe pdf preview window, and you select File > Print to print the pdf. You can select specific pages to print. If you select List view, the Print dialog box appears without the preview window.

    +
      +
    1. To print from a bibliographic record set, do the following:
      1. Select Edit > Select All or press Ctrl+A to select all the records in the list, or select specific records. The records you selected are highlighted.
      2. Right-click in the list of highlighted records, and select one of the following options:
      • Bibliographic Full
      • Bibliographic Brief
      • Chicago Manual of Style
      • American Psychological Assoc. 
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    When you format the list in a bibliographic style, check the formatting requirements of the school, college or journal for which you are creating the bibliography.

    +

    An Adobe pdf viewer window appears with the records in the format you selected.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print from the Adobe pdf viewer to print the record list.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Retrieve_records_using_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Retrieve_records_using_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56f56ef1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Retrieve_records_using_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Retrieve records using a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Retrieve Records Using a Record Set

    +

    When you group records in a record set, you can easily retrieve the records for further review. You might want to create a record set of provisional records when importing and then make the necessary changes to each record. For more information on creating records sets while importing, see Set import options for record sets.

    +

    To retrieve records from a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Record Sets from the Polaris Shortcut bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Find Tool appears with Record Sets selected in the Objects box.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also search for a record set by owner.

    +
      +
    1. Select an option in the Search by box.
    2. +
    3. To sort the results, select a Sort by option.
    4. +
    5. To limit the results, select a Limit by option and enter a value.
    6. +
    7. Type the search term in the For box.
    8. +
    9. Click Search.
    10. +
    +

    The record sets that meet your search criteria appear in the results list.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the record set you want to open.
    2. +
    +

    The record set appears in the Record Set workform.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click any record listed in the Record Set workform.
    2. +
    +

    The record appears in the appropriate workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Using_Cataloging_Record_Sets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Using_Cataloging_Record_Sets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42e1d8c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Using_Cataloging_Record_Sets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Using Cataloging Record Sets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Cataloging Record Sets

    +

    You can create item, bibliographic or authority record sets using various methods, such as: adding cataloging records from Find Tool results; creating record sets of linked records from another cataloging record set; sending imported records directly to a record set; and creating record sets of unlinked records. See Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +

    Note:
    If you are using Polaris Inventory Manager (PIM), you can automatically create record sets of items for weeding or other processing. If you are using SimplyReports, you can automatically create record sets of bibliographic, item, or authority records.

    +

    Tip:
    The icon unlinked.gif next to an authority record listed in a record set indicates that the authority record is not linked to any other record.

    +

    After cataloging record sets are created, you can use them to maintain and update cataloging records by bulk changing item or bibliographic records; deleting unlinked records; processing imported records; and grouping records for retrieval and review.

    +

    Cataloging record sets can also be used to make certain titles readily accessible in Polaris PowerPAC by publishing a URL link to the record set that patrons click to see the titles, or displaying a “content carousel” of titles. See Create a URL link to a record set in the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Working_With_Multiple_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Working_With_Multiple_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95deff85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKrecordset/Working_With_Multiple_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Working With Multiple Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Multiple Cataloging Records

    +

    Record sets group related cataloging records together for a particular purpose, but they do not actually contain the records. Since a record set merely points to the records within it, removing a record from a record set does not delete the record itself.

    +

    You can create record sets for bibliographic, authority, or item records, but you cannot mix record types in the same record set. Grouping cataloging records in record sets makes it easier to retrieve records, apply changes to multiple records (bulk change), or add multiple titles to a purchase order.

    +

    Record sets can also help you maintain your catalog. For example, you can gather all unlinked bibliographic or authority records into a record set, and then delete them or do other processing.

    +

    In addition, you can create record sets to group titles together and make them readily accessible in the PAC. One method is to publish the URL to the record set on the Polaris PowerPAC portal page, a page dashboard, or a Web site page. Another method is to use record sets to create visual representations of titles in a “content carousel” that displays on the PowerPAC portal page or a Community Profile page (if your library has Polaris Community Profiles). See Create a URL link to a record set in the PAC.

    +

    If you want to make changes to multiple bibliographic or item records at once, you can gather the records into a record set and then change them using the Bulk Change dialog box. You can also make bulk changes to multiple item records by selecting the item records in lists, such as Find Tool results or linked list boxes and selecting the Ad hoc Bulk Change option from the right-click menu.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Options_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Options_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a15ecf4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Options_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cataloging Options on the Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Options on the Shortcut Bar

    +

    From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, you can create new cataloging records, find existing records, import or export records, and initiate automatic processing of cataloging records. Specific permissions are required for creating, modifying, deleting, and processing cataloging records. Course Reserves, Community Records, Promotions, Campaigns, and Carousel Toolkit are available if your library has licenses for these products. For information on the permissions required to do cataloging tasks, see Cataloging Permissions.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also click the blue orb to expand the Cataloging toolbar. Then, click the icons to open the Find Tool and search for existing Cataloging records. For example, click bibicon.gif to search for an existing bibliographic record.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    +

    +

    Creating New Cataloging Records

    +

    Tip:
    In the New dialog box, select Cataloging Objects in the View box to list only Cataloging records.

    +

    To create a new Cataloging record, select File > New, press CTRL+N or click new_doc_icon.gif. The New dialog box appears. If the record type has templates defined, you can select Existing Template and choose a template to create a new record. If you are creating several records of the same type using the same template, you can select an existing template, and then click Make session default. When you create the next record of the same type, the template you selected will be used. If the record type does not have templates defined, or you want to create a new record without a template, click OK. See Methods for Adding New Records.

    +

    +

    +

    Accessing Existing Cataloging Records

    +

    Select Cataloging and select a menu option. The Find Tool opens for the selected record type. See Finding Cataloging Records.

    +

    +

    +

    Start Cataloging Records Processing

    +

    Select Utilities > Cataloging Processing. The Cataloging Processing submenu displays the processing utilities, such as purging cataloging records and managing the bulk change queue. See Cleaning Up the Catalog

    +

    + +

    +

    Accessing the Carousel Toolkit

    +

    If your library has a license for this product, the Carousel Toolkit is available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. For more information, see Carousel Toolkit.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af9835c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Cataloging_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + + + + + + Cataloging Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Records

    +

    Polaris Cataloging uses bibliographic records, authority records, item records, and templates. Bibliographic records can be linked to multiple item records and multiple authority records. Authority records can be linked to multiple bibliographic records and multiple authority records, but they are not linked to item records. An item record is linked to a single bibliographic record, and multiple item records can be linked to the same bibliographic record. Item records can also be linked to other item records.

    +

    Depending on your library’s Polaris licenses, other selections may be available on the Cataloging menu. If your library has a license for Polaris Feature It, you can use Promotion records to feature titles, events, or community records in Polaris PowerPAC. If your library has a license for Polaris Community Profiles, you can create community records in Cataloging and then designate the organization representative who can update the record from the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Bibliographic Records

    +

    Every title in the library’s catalog is represented by a bibliographic record saved in the Polaris database in MARC 21 Format for Bibliographic Data. Each bibliographic record is identified by a unique control number recorded in the 001 tag. You can add bibliographic records for new titles by importing records, copy cataloging, or original cataloging. See Methods for Adding New Records. A bibliographic record must have a Leader and an 008 tag to be saved in the Polaris database.

    +

    When you save a bibliographic record, it is checked for the correct MARC format and for possible duplicate records already in the catalog. When duplicate bibliographic records are found, you can automatically replace them. You can also replace records that were not identified as duplicates. In addition, headings are checked against authority records to maintain consistent authority control. See Checking Authority Headings. You can create linked item records from the Tools menu on the Bibliographic Record workform. See Creating Item Records.

    +

    +  

    +

    Viewing Circulation Statistics and Linked Item Records

    +

    Bibliographic records may be linked to multiple item records, each representing a distinct physical item. The total number of linked items is displayed in the Bibliographic Record workform header. To view the circulation statistics for all items linked to the bibliographic record, select Tools > Show Usage Statistics or press CTRL+R from the Bibliographic Record workform. You can also select a bibliographic record in the Find Tool results list, right-click and select Preview. The preview window’s top pane displays the brief bibliographic view, the middle pane displays the usage statistics for linked items, and the bottom pane displays the list of linked items.

    +

    The usage statistics in the middle pane include the total number of items and circulations for all branches, and a list of the items and circulations by branch. The popularity of the title is displayed as High, Medium, or Low, based on the number of circulations and holds. The titles with a popularity of High have circulated and had holds placed on the linked items within the last 120 days. The titles with a popularity of Medium have linked items that either circulated or had holds placed on them within the last 120 days. The titles that have a popularity ranking of Low have not had any linked items circulated or held within the last 120 days.

    +

    All the individual items linked to this bibliographic record are displayed in a list in the bottom pane of the window. You can do the following in the list of items:

    +
      +
    • +

      To sort the list, click on a column header.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To open an item in the Item Record workform, double-click.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To perform actions on a single item record, right-click and select an option from the menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To perform actions on multiple item records, multi-select the items, right-click, and select an option from the menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    Select the linked item records in the list, right-click, and select Ad hoc Bulk Change. The Item Bulk Change dialog box opens. See Changing Multiple Item Records.

    +

    +  

    +

    Preview the Title Display in the PAC

    +

    Tips:
    Click KbtnFullPAC.gif to display the PAC view. A Polaris Administration profile can be set to always open the Bibliographic Record workform to the PAC view.

    +

    Select View > PAC to preview the title’s bibliographic data display in Polaris PowerPAC. The view of the PAC from the Bibliographic Record is the same as it appears for your patrons, including all the customization you have set up for your PAC. Some actions that are possible from the PAC may not be possible from this view, such as searching for other records or actions that require the PAC user to log in. Links to external sites open in a new browser window. Web links are active from the PAC view if the record has an 856 tag. For more information on how Web links are displayed in the PAC, see Web Links Display in the PAC.

    +

    If you have not resized the bibliographic record workform from its default size, the PAC view appears as it would on a tablet device. If you make the workform larger, the display may change to the way it would appear on a desktop computer. That is, action buttons such as Availability and Full Display may move from below the title metadata to the right side of the data. The example shows the display at the default workform size.

    +

    Note:
    The title information that is displayed in the PAC can be customized in Polaris Administration. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    + +

    +

    Web Links Display in the PAC

    +

    The clickable Web link text that displays in the PAC full and brief displays for a title is determined by the subfields in the 856 tag as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      856$u - URL - If the bibliographic record has an 856$u without a $y, $3, or $z, the default text Web Link is displayed in PowerPAC instead of the URL.

      +
    • +
    +

    + 856$u.gif 

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • +

      856$y - Link Text - If the bibliographic record has an 856$y, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the Web link display instead of the URL in the 856$u.

      +
    • +
    +

    + 856$y.gif 

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • +

      856$3 - Material Specified - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856$y, but it does have an 856$3, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the Web link display instead of the URL in the 856$u.

      +
    • +
    +

    + 856$3.gif 

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • +

      856$z - Public Note - If the bibliographic record has an 856$u with an 856$z, the default text Web Link is the clickable link, and the text in subfield z appears after the link.

      +
    • +
    +

    + 856subz.gif 

    +

    + +

    +

    Item Records

    +

    An item record represents a unique physical or electronic copy of the bibliographic record title to which it is linked. Although information from the linked bibliographic record appears in the Item Record workform’s header, item records do not contain MARC 21 data. Several item records, each representing a separate item, may be linked to the same bibliographic record. Item records are not necessary for ebook titles if the ebook vendor does not integrate with Polaris Circulation.

    +

    Note:
    If you select File | New, Item Record from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, the New Item Record Options dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to create multiple items linked to the same bibliographic record. See Creating Item Records. If you are creating one record, you can click OK to go to the Item Record workform.

    +

    Tip:
    On the Bibliographic Record workform, select Links, Item Records, press CTRL+T or click linkeditemsbtn.gif to see all the other item records that are linked to the same bibliographic record.

    +

    By default, the initial view of the Item Record workform depends on how you open the record. When you are creating a new item record, the workform opens to the Cataloging view. When you open an item record from a purchase order line item or invoice line item, the workform opens to the Source and Acquisition view. In all other cases, the workform opens to the Circulation view. However, you can set a Polaris Administration profile so that the Item Record workform always opens to a particular view.

    +

    + NewItem.gif 

    +

     Authority Records

    +

    Polaris uses the MARC 21 Format for Authority Data for authority records, which are linked to bibliographic records or other authority records. When you change an authority record, the change is applied to all linked records. Authority records are identified by a unique control number recorded in the 001 tag of the authority record. Like bibliographic records, authority records are subject to MARC 21 validation (tag checking) to help you maintain correct and consistent records. For more information, see Create a new authority record.

    +

    + authorityrecod.gif 

    +

    Automatic Authority Control Using a Remote Database

    +

    If you have a subscription to Polaris ZMARC, you can find and save a new authority record from ZMARC when you save a bibliographic record and no matching authority record is found in the local database. The new authority record is saved and the bibliographic record is linked. See ZMARC Remote Authority Control.

    +

    Authorities Weekly Update Service

    +

    If you have a subscription to Polaris Authorities Weekly, Innovative Interfaces installs a job at your site that tracks your authority records. When updates are issued by the Library of Congress, the system checks the records to see if any match the authority records your library has. If matches are found, and there are updates, an e-mail message informs your administrator and provides the location of the file containing the updated authorities. You can then import the authority records and overlay your existing ones using the import profile Authority Update Import. See Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

    +

    Cataloging Templates

    +

    Cataloging templates help your library maintain consistent records and reduce the number of keystrokes required to create new cataloging records. You can create bibliographic, authority, and item templates by manually entering data or by saving existing records as templates, and then editing the data. See Using Cataloging Templates for more information.

    +

    Record Sets

    +

    Tip:
    You can bulk change item records from lists, such as the Find Tool search results or linked list boxes, without putting the items in a record set. See Changing Multiple Item Records.

    +

    Record sets group related records together so you can retrieve them in one step. Bibliographic and item records in a record set can be changed or processed in one step. For example, you can gather bibliographic records in a record set, and then use the bulk change process to make the same changes to all the records in one step. You can create record sets of bibliographic, item, or authority records, but you cannot have different types of records in one record set. See Working With Multiple Records.

    +

    When you import bibliographic or authority records, you can specify a destination record set to group them. This allows for more efficient retrieval and manipulation of the imported records. See Set import options for record sets.

    +

    +  

    +

    Promotion Records

    +

    If your library has a license for Polaris Feature It, Promotion records are used to feature titles, events, or community records in Polaris PowerPAC. Staff members select the featured resources and specify the conditions under which the resources are featured. The library can specify the materials in the library’s collection, Web sites, community organizations, events, and services. For more information, see Creating and Editing Promotion Records.

    +

    + promoexample.gif 

    +

    Community Records

    +

    If your library has purchased Polaris Community Profiles, a separately licensed product, a staff member with the appropriate permissions can create or edit a community record using the Community Record workform. After the community record is created, a staff member can designate a patron as a community representative who can update and modify the record from Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    + commrecexamp.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Find_cataloging_records_in_library_database.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Find_cataloging_records_in_library_database.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ae59d49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Find_cataloging_records_in_library_database.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + Find cataloging records in your library’s database + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Cataloging Records in Your Library’s Database

    +

    To find and list bibliographic records, item records, authority records, templates, or record sets in your local database:

    +

    Note:
    The available tabs in the Find Tool depend on the type of record selected.

    +

    Tip:
    To search for bibliographic records from anywhere in the Polaris application, press F12. To search for item records, press Ctrl+Alt+F9.

    +
      +
    1. From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Cataloging, or press ALT+C to display the Cataloging menu.
    2. +
    3. Select a record type from the Cataloging menu.
    4. +

      The Polaris Find Tool appears.

      +

      Tip:
      You can tab from field to field in the Find Tool.

      +

      You can change the type of record in the Object box.

      +
    5. Select the search access point in the Search By box.
    6. +

      Tip:
      If you are searching for a bibliographic record, you can search for a 10-digit or 13-digit ISBN. You can also search by the Other Standard Identifier (which can be a UPC code or stock number). The Other Standard Identifier may be used when searching for non-print items that do not have an ISBN.

      +
    7. Select the search type in the Type box:
      • To find anything that begins with the contents of the For box, select Exact match (implicitly truncated).
      • To find anything that has exactly the contents of the For box, select Exact match (explicitly truncated).
      • To open an index that begins with the contents of the For box, select Browse.
      • To find any occurrence of the contents in the For box, select Keyword search.
      • To find the entries in the For box adjacent to each other in the data, and in order, select Phrase search.
    8. +
    9. To sort the search results, select an option in the Sort by box. Sort is not available in Browse searches.
    10. +

      Tip:
      If you are doing a keyword or phrase search for a bibliographic or authority record, you may see automatic suggestions as you type.

      +
    11. Type your search text in the For box.
    12. +
    13. To limit your search results, select an option in the Limit by box, and either select a value or type it in the Value box. Some Limit by options have pre-set selections in the Value box. For example, if you select Language, a list of languages appears in the Value box. If you select Author, you type the author’s name in the Value box.
    14. +
    15. If you would typically search for this type of record using the same search criteria, select Options > User Default to save your search options. To set the option back to the system default, select Options > Revert to System Default.
    16. +

      Note:
      Limit by values selected from a drop-down list are saved in the user default, but free-text values are not saved. For example, if the Limit by selection is Subject and you enter history in the Values box, the value is not saved.

      +

      Tip:
      If you just want a count of the records without seeing them in a list, click Count Only.

      +
    17. Click Search, or press Enter or ALT+S.
    18. +

      A list of records matching your search criteria appears at the bottom of the Find Tool (unless you selected Count Only). You can use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of results, or use the up and down arrows on your keyboard.

      +
    19. Double-click the record to open the record in its workform, or right-click and choose an option from the context menu. Depending on the record type, you can perform various actions on the record without opening it in the workform.
    20. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Methods_for_Adding_New_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Methods_for_Adding_New_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19a27421 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Methods_for_Adding_New_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Methods for Adding New Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Methods for Adding New Records

    +

    You can add bibliographic and authority records to the Polaris catalog database by manually entering original records using the MARC Editor, importing records from other sources, and copying records from remote databases. In most libraries, original cataloging is done infrequently. Instead, catalog records are usually converted from other library automation systems, produced by library vendors and conversion services, imported, or copied from other sources.

    +

    Polaris also provides multiple methods for creating item records. You can quickly create multiple items for copies of the same title by entering information common to all the items, and then entering the branch and collection for each copy. If you are creating a single item record, you can enter the information on the Item Record workform. In either case, whether you are creating a single or multiple item records, you can use an item record template. In addition, item records can be created automatically by importing bibliographic records with embedded holdings.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Original Cataloging

    +

    Polaris has several tools to make original cataloging faster and easier. With the MARC Editor, you can select data from lists, check the MARC format, enter international characters, and use macros to automatically enter standard information. In addition, you can use templates that have default cataloging data already filled in. For more information, see Creating MARC Records.

    +

    Importing Records

    +

    Importing is the process of moving multiple MARC 21-formatted records into the Polaris database from an outside source. You can import bibliographic and authority records, and item records can be created from embedded holdings data in 852 tags (or other locally-defined tags, such as the 949 tag) in the imported bibliographic records. For more information, see Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

    +

    Copying MARC Records from Other Sources

    +

    You can modify an existing record in Polaris, or you can display and copy bibliographic and authority records from other sources. Such sources may be other libraries, suppliers, or cataloging services that make their catalog records available at no cost or for a fee. If you subscribe to ZMARC, you can search for and save bibliographic or authority records from the ZMARC database. See Copying MARC records.

    +

    Creating Preliminary Bib Records in Acquisitions

    +

    You can create brief bibliographic records by typing the bibliographic information in a purchase order line item, or by pulling in title information from a supplier’s database using Titles to Go. See Ordering.

    +

    Creating Multiple Items for a Single Title

    +

    You can create multiple item records linked to the same bibliographic record using the New Item Record Options dialog box where you specify the distribution information for each item. See Create multiple item records for a single title.

    +

    Automatic Remote Authority Control

    +

    If your library has a subscription to a remote database of authority records, the remote database is automatically searched when no matching authority record is found. The new authority record is saved in the database and linked to the new bibliographic records. For more information, see Managing Authority Control.

    +

    Creating Digital-Collection Bibliographic Records in Polaris Fusion

    +

    Records created in Polaris Fusion are automatically saved as bibliographic records in the Polaris database with a type of material of digital collection. For more information, see Polaris Fusion online Help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Preview_bibliographic_records_from_the_Find_Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Preview_bibliographic_records_from_the_Find_Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43eb895c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKstart/Preview_bibliographic_records_from_the_Find_Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Preview bibliographic records from the Find Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Preview Bibliographic Records from the Find Tool

    +

    To preview bibliographic records from the Find Tool results list without opening the records:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Bibliographic Records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or press F12.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +

    Tip:
    You can preview bibliographic records from remote databases, but the circulation statistics do not appear.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the bibliographic record or records. See Find cataloging records in your library’s database.
    2. +
    +

    The records that match the search criteria appear in the results list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the bibliographic record that you want to preview, right-click, and select Preview.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To see more of any part of the window, drag the panel edges.

    +

    The Preview window opens. For more information, see Viewing Circulation Statistics and Linked Item Records.

    +
      +
    1. To preview other bibliographic records in the list, leave the Preview window open, click in the Find Tool results list, and press the down arrow key.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Create_a_template_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Create_a_template_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d2030e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Create_a_template_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a template from the Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Template from the Shortcut Bar

    +

    To create a bibliographic, authority, or item record template from the Shortcut Bar:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the New dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select one of the following template types from the Objects list, and click OK:
      • Bibliographic Template
      • Authority Template
      • Item Template 
    4. +

      The appropriate template workform appears.

      +
    5. Specify a name and owner for the template using the appropriate method:
    6. +
        +
      • If you are creating an item template, specify the name and owner in the fields at the top of the workform.
      • +
      • If you are creating an authority or bibliographic template, select File > Template setup and specify the name and owner on the Template Setup dialog box.
      • +
      +
    7. Select File > Save to save the template.
    8. +

      The template is saved in the database and added to the list of available templates.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Save_an_existing_record_as_a_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Save_an_existing_record_as_a_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63226e60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Save_an_existing_record_as_a_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Save an existing record as a template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Save an Existing Record as a Template

    +

    To create a new template based on an existing bibliographic, authority, or item record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Item Record, Bibliographic Record, or Authority Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save As Template to save the record as a template.
    4. +

      The Template Setup dialog box appears.

      +
    5. Type the name of the template in the Name box.
    6. +
    7. Select the template’s owner in the Owner box.
    8. +
    9. Click OK to submit your settings.
      • If the template’s name and owner combination are being used, a message appears, and you cannot save the template until you change the name, owner or both.
      • If the template’s name and owner combination is unique in your system, the message The record was saved as a template successfully appears in the workform status bar.
    10. +

      The new template is displayed in the appropriate cataloging workform.

      +
    11. Change the template to remove information specific to the original record and make any other changes.
    12. +
    13. Select File > Save to save the template.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Using_Cataloging_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Using_Cataloging_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17c267f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging/PKtemplates/Using_Cataloging_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Using Cataloging Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Cataloging Templates

    +

    Using templates to create bibliographic, authority, and item records greatly reduces the time it takes to do original cataloging because much of the information is already present in the template. In addition, templates ensure consistency in your records and facilitate acquisitions and serials processing workflows. You can create a template by renaming an existing template or by saving an item, bibliographic, or authority record as a template.

    +

    Note:
    If you have a contract with an eContent vendor that integrates with Polaris, eContent item records are created automatically using an ebook item template.

    +

    In addition, you can create several templates for the same type of record. For example, you can have separate bibliographic templates for books, music, videos, and other types of items. The more standard information you can enter in the template, the less you need to enter when you create a new record. To set up templates for specific material types, see Type of Material Codes (TOMs).

    +

    If you are creating new cataloging records and you want to use the same template for all the records, you can choose a template as the template default; it is used to create subsequent records of the same type for the duration of the time you are logged in.

    +

    The following types of templates are used outside of Cataloging:

    +
      +
    • On-order bibliographic templates - Available from a purchase order line item to create brief bibliographic records from title information added to a purchase order line item.  
    • +
    • On-order item templates - Automatically create on-order item records when purchase orders are released.
    • +
    • On-the-fly item templates - Used for circulating uncataloged materials.
    • +
    • Reserve item templates - Used for circulating uncataloged materials and instructor-supplied course reserve materials.
    • +
    • INN-Reach ILL item templates - Used for circulating items requested through INN-Reach if your library has a license to use INN-Reach. See Set Up INN-Reach ILL Item Templates.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Add_or_change_a_MARC_validation_rule.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Add_or_change_a_MARC_validation_rule.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b47451e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Add_or_change_a_MARC_validation_rule.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add or change a MARC validation rule + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add or change a MARC validation rule

    +

    To add or change validation rules for bibliographic or authority MARC formats.

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the MARC Validation Editor:
    Access administration: Allow
    Modify profiles: Allow
    Access MARC Validation: Authority: Allow
    Access MARC Validation: Bibliographic: Allow
    MARC Validation: Authority - insert row: Allow
    MARC Validation: Authority - modify row: Allow
    MARC Validation: Authority - delete row: Allow
    MARC Validation: Bibliographic - insert row: Allow
    MARC Validation: Bibliographic - modify row: Allow
    MARC Validation: Bibliographic - delete row: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click MARC validation: Bibliographic or MARC validation: Authority.
    6. +
    +

    The MARC Validation Editor appears for the selected MARC format.

    +

    Tip:
    To add a new row at the end of the validation rules, click btnInsertatEnd.gif

    +
      +
    1. To add a new validation rule, do the following steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can add only local tags (9xx, x9x, or xx9 tags).

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the row just below where you want to put the new row, and click btnInsertValRow.gif (Insert row) to open a new row.
    2. +
    3. Type the tag, indicator, or subfield for which you are defining the validation rule.
    4. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To change an existing validation rule, select the row where the tag, indicator, or subfield is listed.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To add or view indicator and subfield rows, click the + (plus sign) next to the tag.

    +
      +
    1. Set the rules for tag, indicator, or subfield as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    A LDR and an 008 tag are the minimum required tags for a bibliographic record in Polaris.

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      To specify that the selected tag, indicator, or subfield is required in order to save a bibliographic or authority record as final, select the Required column, and click the check box to indicate Yes. Clear the check box if you do not want the tag, indicator, or subfield to be required. If a subfield is required, it must be present when the associated tag is used.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To specify that the selected tag, indicator, or subfield must be validated, select the Validate column, and click the check box to indicate Yes. Clear the check box if you do not want the tag, indicator, or subfield to be validated, and it will be ignored when records are validated.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To allow the tag, indicator, or subfield to appear in the MARC record more than once, select the Repeat column, and select the check box to indicate Yes. Clear the check box to disallow the tag, indicator, or subfield to be in records of this type more than once. When you do not specify that a tag, indicator, or subfield can be repeated, an error message appears if there is more than one occurrence of the tag.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To specify that the tag, indicator, or subfield is no longer valid, select the Obsolete column, and select the check box to indicate Yes. If Yes is in this column, and this tag, indicator, or subfield is in a MARC record, a message tells the user it is obsolete. Clear the check box if you do not want the message to appear.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To specify tags or subfields that are required or prohibited when certain tags are used, see Define a conditional validation rule. Each tag and subfield designator can have a list of these conditional rules. Conditional rules cannot be applied to the Leader, control fields, fixed fields (fields less than 010), or indicators.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save, click the save icon, or press Ctrl+S.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Administering_MARC_Validation_and_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Administering_MARC_Validation_and_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f65ed5bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Administering_MARC_Validation_and_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Administering MARC Validation and Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administering MARC Validation and Display

    +

    Displaying diacritics in MARC records requires certain fonts to be installed. For more information, see Enabling Language Display/Entry in Cataloging.

    +

    In Polaris, MARC records are validated according to rules defined in the system-level profiles: MARC Validation Bibliographic and MARC Validation Authority. These rules are applied when new records are created, and when existing records are saved or checked for MARC format. They are also applied to imported records when the option to perform MARC validation is selected in the import profile.

    +

    The MARC validation profiles also specify the sort order and the display names for MARC tags in the MARC21 view of the Bibliographic Record and Authority Record workforms. You can edit validation rules and change the display names and sort order of MARC tags using these profiles, but all changes are applied to every organization in your library system. However, you can use separate profiles at the library or branch level to turn off MARC validation, tag display names, or automatic sorting.

    +

    See the following topics for information on setting up MARC validation and MARC display to apply to records in your library system:

    + +

    See the following topics for information on turning off MARC validation, MARC tag display, and MARC tag sorting for a specific library or branch:

    + +

    Important:
    You can also specify whether to perform automatic MARC re-indexing when the server is upgraded by selecting Yes or No for the system-level cataloging parameter MARC re-index during next system upgrade. See Managing MARC Re-indexing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow or prevent deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow or prevent deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f39291f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow or prevent deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Allow or prevent deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Allow or Prevent Deletion of Bibliographic Records with Linked Hold Requests

    +

    To allow or prevent deletion of bibliographic records that have linked hold requests:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters,and select the Cataloging tab to display the parameters list.
    4. +
    5. Set the Bibliographic record delete: Allow if there are holds parameter to Yes to allow the deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests, or set the parameter to No to prevent the deletion of bibliographic records with linked hold requests.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow_or_prevent_deletion_of_items_with_linked_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow_or_prevent_deletion_of_items_with_linked_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8efd3280 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Allow_or_prevent_deletion_of_items_with_linked_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Allow or prevent deletion of items with linked hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Allow or prevent deletion of items with linked hold requests

    +

    To allow or prevent deletion of items with linked hold requests:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Cataloging tab to display the parameters list.
    4. +
    5. Set the Item record delete: Allow if there are holds parameter to Yes to allow the deletion of item records with linked hold requests, or set the parameter to No to prevent the deletion of item records with linked hold requests.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Automatic Display in PAC Processing .htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Automatic Display in PAC Processing .htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cae87fba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Automatic Display in PAC Processing .htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Automatic Display in PAC Processing for Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Automatic Display in PAC Processing for Bibs

    +

    Your library can use the Cataloging profile in Polaris Administration to specify criteria by which the Automatic display in PAC processing job will set the Display in PAC check box to suppress (or enable) the title’s display in PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. With this automatic processing enabled, staff members do not need to manually check or un-check the Display in PAC box on the Bibliographic Record workform or bulk-change records to change the check box setting.

    +

    This job will run as part of the Overnight Processing job that runs a series of overnight jobs consecutively. The jobs included in this series are run in the following order:

    +
      +
    1. PAC Availability
    2. +
    3. Automatic Display in PAC Processing
    4. +
    5. Keyword Processing
    6. +
    7. DBCC Nightly
    8. +
    +

    Once this profile is set, the job updates bibliographic records to turn off (uncheck) or turn on (check) the Display in PAC setting with the exception of the following types of bibliographic records, which are excluded from automatic Display in PAC processing:

    +
      +
    • bib records with resource entities for integrated eContent vendors regardless of whether the vendor account is active or not
    • +
    • bib records with linked serial holdings records
    • +
    • bib records that are constituent records in a bound-with group
    • +
    +

    In addition, the state of linked item records is considered only for item records with a status of final; provisional or deleted items are never considered during automatic Display-in-PAC processing.

    +

    If a bibliographic record meets the criteria for automatic change, a manual change to the bibliographic record are overwritten by the overnight job if the underlying conditions do not change. For example, if a bibliographic record meets the criteria for automatically turning off display in PAC because all final linked item records are set to not display, and you manually check the Display in PAC box in the bibliographic record, the overnight job will clear the Display in PAC box so that the record does not display in the PAC. This is because the underlying conditions did not change, and all linked final items do not display in the PAC.

    +

    See Set up Automatic Display in PAC Processing for Bibliographic Records

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Cataloging_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Cataloging_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f445da6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Cataloging_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + Cataloging Administration Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Administration Overview

    +

    To set up Cataloging in Polaris, you grant the appropriate permissions to your cataloging staff, set profiles and parameters that control automated processes, and define/modify entries in database and policy tables.

    +

    Polaris Administration settings control how Polaris data is categorized, used, and stored, and what functions are available to staff and patrons. You can make most administration settings by two methods: through the Administration Explorer, and through the appropriate workform for a specific record. You use profiles and parameters to control automated processes, set defaults, indicate the default directory for reports, and specify whether deleted records are retained in the database. In addition, you can set staff members’ profiles to allow them to override blocks in Cataloging.

    +

    When you set up Cataloging, you use policy and database tables to customize duplicate detection, define tags to retain when records are overlaid, define the order in which fields are checked for the call number and price, and make other settings.

    +

    See these topics:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_bibliographic_or_authority_deduplication_tables.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_bibliographic_or_authority_deduplication_tables.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44b567de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_bibliographic_or_authority_deduplication_tables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,396 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change bibliographic or authority deduplication tables + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    +

    Change Bibliographic or Authority Deduplication Tables

    +

    The Bibliographic Deduplication and the Authority Deduplication database tables contain the rules that determine if a bibliographic or authority record is a duplicate of an existing record. The rules are applied in groups to more efficiently determine a duplicate. Two records must meet all the rules in at least one group to be potential duplicates.

    +

    When records are checked for duplicates, the rules group name displays in the duplicate detection dialog as the duplicate reason. You can rename the group so that the reason for the duplicate is clear. For example, if the rules group name is 245 $a matches 245 $a you could rename it Matching Title.

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the rules groupings in the deduplication tables: Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify bibliographic deduplication table: Allow; Modify authority deduplication table: Allow

    +

    For details on the rules and how they are applied, see Bibliographic Duplicate Detection Rules Reference or Authority Duplicate Detection Rules Reference.

    +

    To create a new rules group or modify an existing one +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Database Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. +

      Select the Bibliographic Deduplication or Authority Deduplication table to display the appropriate table in the details view.

      +

      Note:
      When you first implement Polaris, a default set of rules groups appears. You can add or remove rules from a group, change the rules group name, add new rules groups, or delete a group.

      +

      + bibdedup.gif 

      +
    6. +
    7. +

      Do one of the following:

      +
        +
      • To create a new rules group, select adrlegrpbtn.gif.
      • +
      • To modify an existing group, select the group, and select btnModify.gif.
      • +
      +

      The Create or Modify Deduplication Rules dialog appears.

      +
    8. +
    9. +

      Do one of the following:

      +
        +
      • +

        To add a rule to the group, select the rules from the Available Rules list, and select Select.

        +

        Tip:
        If you made changes to the group and you want to return the group to its state when you opened the dialog, select Reset.

        +
      • +
      • To remove a rule from the group, select the rule in the Selections for Rule Group list, and select Remove.
      • +
      • To name or rename the rules group, type the name in the Rules Group box.
      • +
      +
    10. +
    11. When you finish changing the current group, select OK.
    12. +
    13. Select File > Save.
    14. +
    +

    Bibliographic Duplicate Detection Rules Reference

    +

    Two bibliographic records are identified as potential duplicates based on the rules groups in the Bibliographic Deduplication table. Each rules group contains one or more rules. Two bibliographic records must meet all the rules in at least one group to be potential duplicates.

    +

    +

    +

    Note:
    When you select custom duplicate detection rules in an import profile, each rule is applied as a group, so only one rule needs to be met to identify the records as duplicates. Set import options for bibliographic records.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Rule

    +
    +

    Comment

    +
    The 001 of the imported record matches the 010 $a of an existing record. 
    +

    The 001 tag of the imported record matches the 035 $a of an existing record.

    +
    +

    Applies only to imported records. The 001 tag must match the numeric portion of the 035 tag (normalized). The parenthetical information in the 035 tag is ignored.

    +
    +

    The 001/003 tags of the imported record matches any 035 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    Applies only to imported records. The 001 tag must match the numeric portion of the 035 tag (normalized). If the incoming record contains a 003 tag, the 003 data must match the parenthetical information in the 035 tag. If the incoming record lacks an 003 tag, the parenthetical information in the 035 tag is ignored.

    +
    +

    The 010 $a subfield of the incoming record matches the 010 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    For LCCNs, the prefix, year, and serial number (the first 12 characters) must match. Suffixes and revision dates are ignored.

    +
    +

    The ISBN in the incoming record matches any ISBN in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The alphanumeric ISBN must match. Parenthetical and other information is ignored. This rule is applied to any 020 tag and also to any 024 tag where the first indicator = 3.

    +
    +

    Any 022 $a subfield in the incoming record matches any 022 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The 8-digit alphanumeric ISSN must match. Parenthetical and other information is ignored.

    +
    +

    The LDR/06 value in the incoming record matches the LDR/06 in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The value in the Record Type position of the Leader must match exactly.

    +
    +

    The LDR/07 value in the incoming record matches the LDR/07 in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The value in the Bibliographic Level position of the Leader must match exactly.

    +
    +

    The 1xx $a subfield in the incoming record matches the 1xx $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The entire text of $a subfield of both records must match. Punctuation is ignored. Tag and indicator values need not match.

    +
    +

    The 245 $a subfield in the incoming record matches the 245 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The entire text of $a subfield must match. Punctuation is ignored. Indicator values need not match.

    +
    +

    The 245 $a subfield in the incoming record matches any 246 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The entire text of $a subfield must match. Punctuation is ignored. Indicator values need not match.

    +
    +

    Any 246 $a subfield in the incoming record matches the 245 $a subfield of the existing record.

    +
    +

    The entire text of $a subfield must match. Punctuation is ignored. Indicator values need not match.

    +
    +

    Any 247 $a subfield in the incoming record matches the 245 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The entire text of $a subfield must match. Punctuation is ignored. Indicator values need not match.

    +
    +

    The 008/07-10 values in the incoming record match the 008/07-10 in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The date in the Beginning Date of Publication must match exactly in both records.

    +
    +

    The last 260 $c subfield in the incoming record matches the last 260 $c subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    The entire text of the $c subfield must match in both records. Punctuation is ignored.

    +
    +

    The 035a of the incoming record matches the 035 $a of an existing record.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Any 035 $a subfield in the incoming record matches the 001 tag in the existing record.

    +
    +

    This rule should be enabled only when a library is importing records that have been previously exported from the same Polaris database, when the intent is to have the incoming record replace the existing record.

    +
    +

    The Bib record owner value in the incoming record matches the value in the existing record.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    The UPC of the incoming record matches the UPC of the existing record.

    +
    +

    This rule is applied to any 024 tag where the first indicator value =1.

    +
    +

    The 024 $a (excluding ISBN and UPC) of the incoming record matches the 024 $a (excluding ISBN and UPC) of an existing record.

    +
    +

    This rule is applied to any 024 tag where the first indicator value is other than 1 or 3.

    +
    +

    The 028 $a of the incoming record matches the 028 $a of an existing record.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    The 037 $a of the incoming record matches the 037 $a of an existing record.

    +
    +

     

    +
    The 001 of the imported record matches the 001 of an existing record.Applies only to imported records.
    +

    Authority Duplicate Detection Rules Reference

    +

    Two authority records are identified as potential duplicates based on the rules groups in the Authority Deduplication table.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Rule

    +
    +

    Comment

    +
    +

    The 001 tag of the imported record matches the 010 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    Applies only to imported records. For LCCNs, the prefix, year, and serial number (the first 12 characters) must match; suffixes and revision dates are ignored.

    +
    +

    The 001/003 tags of the imported record matches any 035 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    Applies only to imported records. The 001 tag matches the numeric portion of the 035 tag (normalized). If the incoming record contains a 003 tag, the 003 data matches the parenthetical information in the 035 tag; if no 003 tag, the information in the 035 tag is ignored.

    +
    +

    The 035 $a subfield of the incoming record matches any 035 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    The 010 $a subfield of the incoming record matches the 010 $a subfield in the existing record.

    +
    +

    For LCCNs, the prefix, year, and serial number (the first 12 characters) must match. Suffixes and revision dates are ignored.

    +
    +

    Any 035 $a subfield of the incoming record matches the 001 tag in the existing record.

    +
    +

    Library is importing records that have been previously exported from the same Polaris database, when the intent is to have the incoming record replace the existing record.

    +
    +

    The 008/11 tag of the incoming record matches the 008/11 of the existing record.

    +
    +

    Matches 008 subject heading system code of both records.

    +
    +

    The 1xx tag of the incoming record matches the 1xx of the existing record.

    +
    +

    Matches entire text of the 1xx tag (concatenation of all data fields).

    +
    +

    The 010 $z of the incoming record matches the 010 $a of the existing record.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    +

    You can specify duplicate detection rules to use when importing records. See Setting Up Import Profiles.

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_the_sort_order_of_MARC_tags.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_the_sort_order_of_MARC_tags.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f7f24cb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Change_the_sort_order_of_MARC_tags.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change the sort order of MARC tags + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change the Sort Order of MARC Tags

    +

    To change the MARC tag sort order:

    +

    Tip:
    When new versions of Polaris contain updates to the validation editor, your changes are not overwritten.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select MARC validation: Bibliographic or MARC Validation: Authority to display the MARC Validation Editor for the selected MARC format.
    6. +
    +

    + marcvalidation.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click moveupbn.gif to move a row up, movedwnbn.gif to move a row down, or movetopbn.gif to move a row to the top.
    2. +
    3.  Select File | Save, click the save button, or press Ctrl+S.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_bibliographic_call_numbers_to_item_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_bibliographic_call_numbers_to_item_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d384208 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_bibliographic_call_numbers_to_item_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy bibliographic call numbers to item records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy Bibliographic Call Numbers to Item Records

    +

    To automatically copy call number fields from linked bibliographic records (according to the settings in the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table):

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization, staff member or workstation.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made and set the profile to Yes or No.
      • Yes - When an item record is created for the organization, if there are call numbers in the linked bibliographic record, the numbers are copied to the item record. The system checks for the call number information in fields in the bibliographic record according to the hierarchy set in the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table. See Modify the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table.
      • No - When an item record is created for the organization, the classification and cutter numbers in the linked bibliographic record are not copied to the item record.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_the_price_from_bibliographic_records_to_item_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_the_price_from_bibliographic_records_to_item_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6900ea85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copy_the_price_from_bibliographic_records_to_item_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy the price from bibliographic records to item records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy the price from bibliographic records to item records

    +

    To set up item records so that price information is automatically copied from linked bibliographic records.

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and modify the Item Create Price Hierarchy table:Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify item create price hierarchy table: Allow.

    +

    In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization, staff member or workstation.

    +

    Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.

    +

    The Cataloging profiles are listed.

    +

    + +

     

    Select Bring price from bib to item record when link is made and set the profiles to Yes or No to specify if the price is copied to item records:

    • Yes - When an item record is created for the organization, the price is copied from the linked bib to the item record, according to the hierarchy established in the Item Create Price Hierarchy table; see Modify the Item Create Price Hierarchy table.

    • No - When an item record is created for the organization, the price in the linked bibliographic record is not copied to the item record.

    Select File, Save.

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copying_Bib_Data_to_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copying_Bib_Data_to_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5a83093 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Copying_Bib_Data_to_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copying Bib Data to Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

     Copying Bib Data to Items

    +

    You can set Polaris Administration Cataloging profiles to copy the call number and price from bibliographic records to their linked items. Then you use database tables to specify the order in which the bibliographic fields are checked for the call number and price.

    +

    If the Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made profile (available at all organization levels and the staff member level) is set to Yes , call number information in bibliographic records is copied to the linked item records according to settings in the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table. When a new item record is created and linked to a bibliographic record, the bibliographic record’s call number tags are checked based on the item's shelving scheme and assigned branch. The system uses the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table settings for the assigned branch and shelving scheme to copy the call number fields and subfields from the bibliographic record.

    +

    For information on creating on-order items with call numbers when releasing purchase orders, see Setting Up EDI Ordering.

    +

    The fields are copied to item records as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      If the bibliographic record has a classification and cutter number, they are copied as a group to the item record. However, if the item template has values in the Class and Cutter fields and the New Item Record Options dialog box has the Use template values instead of these (if available) check box checked, the classification and cutter numbers are copied from the item template to the new item records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the bibliographic record has any of the other call number fields (prefix, suffix, volume, copy number), these fields are copied to the item record independently of the other call number fields. If the bibliographic record has some of these fields defined, and the item template has others, the resulting item records can have a mixture, with some fields from the bibliographic record and some from the item template.

      +
    • +
    +

    If the profile, Bring price from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes, the price in bibliographic records is copied to the linked item records according to the settings in the Item Create Price Hierarchy database table. When a new item record is created and linked to a bibliographic record, the bibliographic record’s tags and subfields are checked for a price in the order specified in the Item Create Price Hierarchy database table.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Define_a_conditional_validation_rule.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Define_a_conditional_validation_rule.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d9db3a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Define_a_conditional_validation_rule.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Define a conditional validation rule + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define a Conditional Validation Rule

    +

    You can define a conditional rule to identify the tags and subfields that must be present or prohibited if a particular tag, indicator, or subfield is present. To define a conditional validation rule:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select MARC validation: Bibliographic or MARC validation: Authority.
    6. +
    +

    The MARC Validation Editor appears for the selected MARC format.

    +
      +
    1. Select the tag in the MARC Fields list for which you want to create a conditional validation rule.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You cannot set conditional rules for the Leader, control fields, fixed fields (fields less than 010) or indicators.

    +
      +
    1. In the Rules list, click btnInsertValRow00192.gif to open a conditional rule row.
    2. +
    +

    The selected tag number is displayed in the first column of the first available row in the Rules list.

    +

    Tip:
    To delete the rule, select it under Tag Level Rules, and click the delete button.

    +
      +
    1. Type the indicator or subfield in the appropriate column, select the box in the Condition column in the same row, and specify the condition:
      • Select must have if the tag or subfield is required. For example, a 490 tag must have an 830 tag.
      • Select must not have if the tag or subfield is prohibited when the tag is used. For example, a 100 tag must not have a 110, 111, or 130 tag.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Deleting_MARC_Tags_from_Incoming_Bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Deleting_MARC_Tags_from_Incoming_Bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a42d9d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Deleting_MARC_Tags_from_Incoming_Bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deleting MARC Tags from Incoming Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting MARC Tags from Incoming Bibs

    +

    Use the following Cataloging Administration settings to delete specific MARC tags from bibliographic records that are being saved to the database:

    +
      +
    • Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete - Use this policy table to specify tags to be deleted automatically if the user selects the following options in an import profile: Delete MARC Tags on incoming record and Profile-defined deletion tags. The tags specified for deletion in the policy table are also deleted from records when they are found via a Z39.50 search of a remote database and saved to the Polaris database if the Delete MARC tags when saving Z39.50 records to local database profile is set to Yes.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Import profiles can be set to delete the system-defined tags or to delete tags defined in the profile.

    +
      +
    • Delete MARC tags when saving Z39.50 records to local database - When this profile is set to Yes for the system, library, or branch level, the tags specified for deletion in the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table are deleted automatically when records found via a Z39.50 search of a remote database are saved to the Polaris database.
    • +
    +

    The following tags cannot be selected for deletion in either the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table or in the import profile:

    +
      +
    • LDR +
    • +
    • 001 +
    • +
    • 003 +
    • +
    • 005 +
    • +
    • 008 +
    • +
    +

    In addition, the following tags are used in duplicate detection and should not be deleted.

    +
      +
    • 010$a +
    • +
    • 020$a +
    • +
    • 022$a +
    • +
    • 024$a +
    • +
    • 028$a +
    • +
    • 035$a +
    • +
    • 037$a +
    • +
    • 1xx$a +
    • +
    • 245$a +
    • +
    • 246$a +
    • +
    • 247$a +
    • +
    • 260$c +
    • +
    +

    Tags are never automatically deleted from bibliographic records when:

    +
      +
    • the new bibliographic record is created manually by entering tags in the MARC 21 view of the Bibliographic Record workform;
    • +
    • a new bibliographic record found during a Z39.50 search is saved as a Bibliographic Record template;
    • +
    • or, a new bibliographic record is overlaid by the database record during importing.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Cataloging_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Cataloging_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08c96e64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Cataloging_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying Cataloging Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying Cataloging Records

    +

    You can use Staff Client profiles in Polaris Administration to specify the opening view of the Item Record or Bibliographic Record workform. These profiles can be set at the system, library, branch, staff, and workstation levels. For example, you could set the profile Default view selected when item record opened to Circulation for a staff member working at the circulation desk, and set it to Cataloging for a cataloger. In addition, you can set system-level Cataloging parameters to specify how many days circulation transactions are displayed in the Item Record workform - Circulation History view, and whether the patron ID or assigned branch are displayed.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Warning_Messages_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Warning_Messages_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f8bc28a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Displaying_Warning_Messages_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying Warning Messages for Bibs and Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying Warning Messages for Bibs and Items

    +

    You can set up warning messages to appear when certain information is missing or changed in a bibliographic or item record, or when the record will not display in the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_automatic_tag_deletion_for_bibs_from_remote_databases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_automatic_tag_deletion_for_bibs_from_remote_databases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0bf5250d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_automatic_tag_deletion_for_bibs_from_remote_databases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable automatic tag deletion for bibs from remote databases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Automatic Tag Deletion for Bibs from Remote Databases

    +

    To enable tag deletion when saving bibliographic records found via a Z39.50 search of a remote database:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Administration Explorer, and select the organization, (System, Library, or Branch) for which you are setting the profile.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles > Cataloging.
    4. +
    5. Select Delete MARC tags when saving Z39.50 records to local database and select Yes or No.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    The default setting is No.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the changes to the profile.
    2. +
    +

    If this profile is set to Yes, a staff member who retrieves a record via a Z39.50 search will see a brief message in the status bar of the Bibliographic Record workform before saving the retrieved record to the local database. This message informs the user that MARC tag deletion is enabled and that the tags selected for deletion in the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table will be removed when the record is saved. When the user saves the record in Polaris, the tags will be removed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_headings_check_when_replacing_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_headings_check_when_replacing_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cda62f0d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_headings_check_when_replacing_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable headings check when replacing bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Headings Check When Replacing Bibs

    +

    You can set the Check headings immediately after bib replace profile to Yes if you want to check the headings for bibliographic records immediately after they replace other records.

    +
      +
    1. To set the Check headings immediately after bib replace Cataloging profile:
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization or staff member.
    4. +
    5. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    6. +
    +

    The cataloging profiles appear.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Check headings immediately after bib replace profile.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes to enable the validation check, or select No to disable the validation check.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_automatic_MARC_re-indexing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_automatic_MARC_re-indexing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce9037e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_automatic_MARC_re-indexing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable or disable automatic MARC re-indexing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable or Disable Automatic MARC Re-Indexing

    +

    To allow or disallow automatic re-indexing of MARC records when the server is upgraded:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, and select the System organization.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters, and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    +

    The system-level cataloging parameters are displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Select the MARC Re-index during next server upgrade parameter and set it to Yes to allow automatic re-indexing of MARC records when the server is upgraded, or No to not allow automatic re-indexing.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When the parameter is changed from No to Yes, the following warning message appears: Setting the MARC Re-index during next server upgrade parameter to 'Yes' may substantially increase processing time during your next upgrade. If you have questions about this, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_the_Auto-suggest_feature.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_the_Auto-suggest_feature.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7497f40 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_or_disable_the_Auto-suggest_feature.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable or disable the Auto-suggest feature + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable or Disable the Auto-Suggest Feature

    +

    To enable or disable automatic suggestions that appear for certain phrase and keyword searches in the Find Tool, and for quick, keyword, phrase, and advanced searches in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Cataloging parameters appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select Auto-suggest feature enabled, and select Yes to enable this feature or No to disable this feature.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save, click the save icon or press Ctrl+S.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_remote_automatic_authority_control.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_remote_automatic_authority_control.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a769fd84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_remote_automatic_authority_control.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable remote automatic authority control + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Remote Automatic Authority Control

    +

    To enable remote automatic authority control:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Remote automatic authority control. 
    6. +
    +

    The Remote Automatic Authority Control Defaults dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Enable remote automatic authority control.
    2. +
    3. Select the server in the Server box.
    4. +
    5. Select the database in the Database box.
    6. +
    7. Type the amount of time in seconds before the search for a matching authority record times out in the Search timeout (seconds) box.
    8. +
    9. Click OK to save the remote automatic authority control defaults.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_the_Do_not_overlay_feature.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_the_Do_not_overlay_feature.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e842f8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_the_Do_not_overlay_feature.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable the Do not overlay feature + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable the Do Not Overlay Feature

    +

    To enable the Do not overlay feature for protecting bibliographic records from being overlaid:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, System, Parameters, and select the Cataloging tab.
    2. +
    +

    The system-level Cataloging parameters are displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Bibliographic record Do not overlay feature enabled parameter, and select Yes.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +

    When the parameter is set to Yes, the Do not overlay check box appears, unchecked by default, on the Bibliographic Record workform, the Bibliographic Record Template workform, the Import Profile, and the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box. When the parameter is set to No, the Do not overlay check box does not appear on any workforms or dialog boxes.

    +

    If the parameter is enabled and is subsequently disabled, the state of the Do not overlay bit in the records, templates, and import profiles (checked or unchecked) is saved, but it is ignored in any subsequent processing. However, if the library subsequently re-enables the parameter, and any bib records, bib templates or import profiles have the Do not overlay bit selected, a message informs the user that the Do not overlay setting will be restored for ## records, ## bibliographic templates, and xx import profiles. 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_validation_when_duplicate_bibs_are_replaced.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_validation_when_duplicate_bibs_are_replaced.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fff64d04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enable_validation_when_duplicate_bibs_are_replaced.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enable validation when duplicate bibs are replaced + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Validation When Duplicate Bibs are Replaced

    +

    You can set the MARC validation immediately after bib replace profile to Yes if you want bibliographic records to be checked for the correct MARC format immediately after they replace other records. For information on replacing bibliographic recordsDetect duplicate or replace bibliographic records.

    +

    To set the MARC validation immediately after bib replace Cataloging profile:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization or staff member.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    +

    The cataloging profiles appear. See Cataloging Profiles at the Branch Level.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the MARC validation immediately after bib replace profile.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes to enable the validation check, or select No to disable the validation check.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enabling_Language_Display_Entry_in_Cataloging.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enabling_Language_Display_Entry_in_Cataloging.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b46fc90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Enabling_Language_Display_Entry_in_Cataloging.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enabling Language Display/Entry in Cataloging + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enabling Language Display/Entry in Cataloging

    +

    If you have the required Cataloging permissions, you can use the MARC Editor to enter text, including international characters and diacritics, on the MARC21 view of the Bibliographic and Authority workforms. These characters are defined in the MARC 21 Specifications for Record Structure, Character Sets, and Exchange Media (2007). The Unicode international characters are stored in UTF-16 and displayed in the Polaris user interface.

    +

    +

    +

    The MARC Editor uses the Segoe font by default. If a character does not exist in Segoe, a different font that supports that Unicode character will be used to display the character, provided that font has been installed on the workstation. The fonts are included in the language service packs from Microsoft. If Segoe and the other fonts used to display the characters are not installed, the MARC Editor will use Arial Unicode.

    +

    Note:
    If the cataloging workstation is being used to catalog primarily in a specific language, you may want to change the keyboard input setting. Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Authority_Control.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Authority_Control.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..070c587e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Authority_Control.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Authority Control + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Authority Control

    +

    The Authority Control read-only database table displays bibliographic tags and the authority tags to which they are matched during authority control processing. This processing occurs automatically when records are imported or saved.

    +

    If you have access to the Polaris ZMARC Z39.50 authority record database (or another remote authority record database), you can set the Remote automatic authority control Cataloging profile to enable remote automatic authority control and specify the server and database to search. When a user saves a bibliographic record, and no matching authority record is found in the local database, the system automatically searches the remote database you specified. If a matching authority record is found in the remote database, the new authority record is saved in the Polaris database and the bibliographic record is linked to it. Before setting up remote automatic authority control using the ZMARC database, you must set up the ZMARC server connection. Contact your Polaris Site Manager for more information about setting up and using Polaris ZMARC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Auto-Search_Suggestions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Auto-Search_Suggestions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5ed44e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Auto-Search_Suggestions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Auto-Search Suggestions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Auto-Search Suggestions

    +

    If the system-level Cataloging parameter Auto-suggest feature enabled is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, automatic suggestions appear for the following types of searches in the Polaris Staff Client and the PAC:

    +

    Important:
    For the Auto-suggest feature to work in the staff client, staff client workstations must allow port 80 traffic to the Polaris application server. To open port 80, select Control Panel on the workstation, select Windows Firewall, Advanced Settings, Inbound Rules, New Rule, Protocol and Ports and type 80 in the Specific local ports box.

    +
      +
    • +

      Find Tool - Automatic suggestions appear when staff members do a keyword or phrase search in the Find Tool for any record and access point that is keyword-indexed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      PAC - Automatic suggestions appear when patrons do quick, keyword, phrase, or advanced searches in Polaris PowerPAC.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Duplicate_MARC_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Duplicate_MARC_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e489c5f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Duplicate_MARC_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Duplicate MARC Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Duplicate MARC Records

    +

    Bibliographic and authority records are checked for duplicates automatically when new records are saved or when existing records are checked for duplicates. When you import records, the options for handling potential duplicates can be set in the import profile.Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

    +

    The following Cataloging Administration settings are used to manage duplicate detection and overlay:

    + +

    Note:
    You can modify the rule groups in the deduplication tables to include or exclude rules, and you can create rule groups, but you cannot add or modify the rules themselves. The deduplication tables are set up by Innovative Interfaces during Polaris implementation, and the table entries apply to all organizations.

    +
      +
    • Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete - This policy table is used in duplicate detection to specify tags to retain from overlaid duplicate records. See Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs.
    • +
    • Authority Overlay Retention - This policy table identifies tags to transfer to a new authority record from the duplicate record that is being overlaid. If the authority record contains a tag that is listed in the retention table, the data in the tag is copied into the new record. See Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs.
    • +
    • Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source - This policy table identifies the preferred cataloging sources for imported authority records. If the imported record is a duplicate of an existing record, and the incoming record’s cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. is preferred over the existing record’s source, the existing record is overlaid with the new record. See Specify preferred cataloging sources for authority records.
    • +
    • Bibliographic records replace: Maximum allowed in one operation -This system-level parameter limits the number of records that can be replaced at once. See Set the number of bibs that can be replaced at once.
    • +
    • MARC validation immediately after bib replace - If this profile is set to Yes, a MARC validation check is performed immediately after bibliographic records are replaced. This prevents situations such as non-repeatable tags accumulating in the record that overlays the duplicate records. See Enable validation when duplicate bibs are replaced.
    • +
    • Check headings immediately after bib replace - If this profile is set to Yes, the headings are checked as soon as a bibliographic record replaces one or more bibliographic records. See Enable headings check when replacing bibs.
    • +
    • Bibliographic Record Do Not Overlay feature enabled - If this system-level parameter is set to Yes, staff members with the appropriate permissions can protect certain bibliographic records from being overlaid by selecting the Do not overlay check box in the Bibliographic Record workform, the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, the Bibliographic Record template workform, and the Bibliographic Records tab of the Import Setup window. If the parameter is set to No, the Do not overlay check box does not appear on these workforms or dialog boxes. See Enable the Do not overlay feature.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Importing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Importing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9fb5d9b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Importing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Importing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Importing

    +

    The following Cataloging profiles are used to manage import processing as a whole:

    +
      +
    • Maximum number of files to import - This profile specifies the limit on the number of files that can be included in a single import job. See Set the limit on the number of files in a single import job.
    • +
    • Import blackout times - This profile specifies the times during the day that imports are not allowed to be run. Up to three daily time periods can be specified as well as a single one-time date/time range. See Specify import blackout times.
    • +
    +

    Automatic processing for individual import jobs depends on the options selected in the import profile. See the following topics for information on automatic processing that can be selected in the import profile:

    + +

    Setting Up Import Profiles.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_MARC_Re-indexing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_MARC_Re-indexing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f1df99e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_MARC_Re-indexing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing MARC Re-indexing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing MARC Re-indexing

    +

    When the system-level Cataloging parameter MARC Re-index during next server upgrade is set to Yes, an automatic re-indexing of MARC records will take place when your library installs the next Polaris upgrade. If your library wants automatic re-indexing to take place, the parameter must be set to Yes before you upgrade to the next release. After the re-indexing process is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to No (the default setting).

    +

    Important:
    Re-indexing can add a significant amount of time to the upgrade process and should be avoided if it is not necessary. However, if you must re-index, performing the process at upgrade may be both cost-effective and time-effective, since there is a fee associated with retroactive re-indexing and the server will be offline during the upgrade in any case.

    +

    When the parameter is set to Yes, the system sets a flag so that the server installation database update (DBUpdate) process performs a re-index comprised of the following general steps:

    +
      +
    • +

      Alerts the Polaris support engineer that a re-index will take place during the DBUpdate process

      +
    • +
    • +

      Rebuilds indices and re-links bibs to authorities

      +
    • +
    • +

      Defragments database tables

      +
    • +
    • +

      Updates database statistics

      +
    • +
    +

    When the re-indexing has successfully completed, an alert is logged in the DBUpdate report. To set the parameter before the next upgrade, you need the System Administration permission Access MARC Re-index during next server upgrade: Allow.

    +

    See Enable or Disable Automatic MARC Re-Indexing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Record_Deletion.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Record_Deletion.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dfd67c5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Managing_Record_Deletion.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Record Deletion + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Record Deletion

    +

    You can set Cataloging profiles to retain deleted records and then purge them from the database in a separate process. Bibliographic and item record deletion for ILL requests also honor these settings. The purge process automatically removes records marked for deletion based on criteria in a Purge record. Purge cataloging records.

    +

    In addition, you can set Cataloging parameters to prevent or allow the deletion of bibliographic or item records with linked hold requests. These parameters are available at the System level only, and the default is No, which prevents deletion of bibs or items with linked hold requests. If the parameters are set to Yes, the records with linked hold requests can be deleted if the hold requests have a status of Active, Pending, or Inactive.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Mark_embedded_holdings_data_as_processed.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Mark_embedded_holdings_data_as_processed.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dfa353a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Mark_embedded_holdings_data_as_processed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Mark embedded holdings data as processed + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mark embedded holdings data as processed

    +

    To insert a subfield 9 in embedded holdings tags in bibliographic records after these tags have been used to create item records:

    +

    Set import options for item records.

    +

    In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.

    +

    Select Parameters and select the Cataloging tab.

    +

    Select Mark embedded holdings tags as processed and select Yes.

    +

    When bibliographic records with embedded holdings data are imported into Polaris, and item records are created automatically from this data, a $9 is inserted into the embedded holdings tag with the following automatic processing information: Item generated mmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM]

    +

    Note:
    The holdings tag is specified in the import profile used to import the records. If the bibliographic records were imported using the Polaris default (with item creation) profile, item records are created using the data in the 852 tags in the imported bibliographic records. You can set up different import profiles where you specify that item records are created from data in other embedded holdings tags, such as the 949 tag. Whatever tag is used to create the item records is the one that will be marked with the $9.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy_table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy_table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c609090 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy_table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table

    +

    The Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table is set up during Polaris implementation, but you can add and change entries. Each library can specify different tags to use for the call number.

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and modify the Item Create Call Number Hierarchy database table: Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify call number hierarchy table: Allow.

    +

    To add or change call number entries:

    +

    Note:
    The call number fields in bibliographic records are copied to their linked item records if the Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made profile is set to Yes. See Copy bibliographic call numbers to item records.

    +

    In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.

    +

    Expand the Database Tables folder.

    +

    Select Item Create Call Number Hierarchy.

    +

    The Item Create Call Number Hierarchy table appears.

    +

    + itemcallnumhierdatatable.gif 

    +

    Do one of the following actions:

    +
      +
    • +

      To add an entry, click insertentry.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify an entry, double-click the entry, or select the entry and click editentry.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    The Insert or Modify dialog box appears, depending on your selection.

    +

    + modifycallnum.gif 

    +

    In the Organization box, select the branch for which the call number is used, if it is not already selected.

    +

    If you are adding a new entry, select the shelving scheme in the Shelving Scheme box. You cannot change the shelving scheme for existing entries.

    +

    In the Bibliographic Tag Number box, type the bibliographic record tag that contains the call number information.

    +

    In the Prefix box, type the tag subfield that contains the prefix information.

    +

    In the Classification box, type the tag subfield that contains the classification information.

    +

    In the Cutter box, type the tag subfield that contains the cutter number.

    +

    Note:
    Do not enter the subfield delimiters.

    +

    In the Suffix box, type the tag subfield that contains the call number suffix.

    +

    In the Volume box, type the tag subfield that contains the volume number.

    +

    In the Copy box, type the tag subfield that contains the copy number.

    +

    Click OK on the dialog box.

    +

    Select File > Save.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy_table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy_table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..822405ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Modify_the_Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy_table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify the Item Create Price Hierarchy table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify the Item Create Price Hierarchy table

    +

    You use the Item Create Price Hierarchy database table to specify the order in which fields in bibliographic records are checked for the price. The Item Create Price Hierarchy table is set up during Polaris implementation, but you can add and change entries. Each library can specify different tags to use for the price.

    +

    To add or change the tags checked for price:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and modify the Item Create Price Hierarchy table: Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify item create price hierarchy table: Allow

    +

    In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.

    +

    Expand the Database Tables folder.

    +

    Select Item Create Price Hierarchy.

    +

    The Item Create Price Hierarchy table appears.

    +

    + itempricehierdatable.gif 

    +

    Do one of the following actions:

    +
      +
    • +

      To add an entry, click insertentry00219.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify an entry, double-click the entry, or select the entry and click editentry00220.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    The Insert or Modify dialog box appears depending on your selection.

    +

    + itempriceentry.gif 

    +

    Select the branch for which the price hierarchy is used in the Organization box.

    +

    The Precedence field is filled in automatically.

    +

    In the Bib Tag Number box, type the bibliographic record tag that contains the price information (for example, 020 or 970).

    +

    In the Bib Subfields box, type the tag subfield that contains the price information. (for example, $c or $p).

    +

    Click OK to close the dialog box.

    +

    To change the order in which a tag is checked, select it in the table, and click moveupbn00221.gif to move the entry up or movedwnbn00222.gif to move the entry down.

    +

    Select File > Save.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Retain_deleted_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Retain_deleted_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff38df88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Retain_deleted_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Retain deleted records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Retain deleted records

    +

    To retain cataloging records that are marked for deletion:

    +

    Note: +
    Options to retain deleted records are available at the System level only in Polaris Administration.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles > Cataloging to display the profiles list.
    4. +
    5. To retain cataloging records, set the following profiles to Yes:
      • Retain deleted authority records
      • Retain deleted bibliographic records
      • Retain deleted item records   
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Purge cataloging records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_Cataloging_security.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_Cataloging_security.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18b576b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_Cataloging_security.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Cataloging security + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Cataloging security

    +

    To review and set Cataloging permissions:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the Security folder for the organization for which you want to set permissions.
    2. +
    +

    The Security view is displayed in the details pane.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Cataloging folder in the Control Record list.
    2. +
    +

    The records and tasks are displayed in folders.

    +
      +
    1. Expand the folder, and select the permission.
    2. +
    +

    The permission groups, staff members, and workstations with that permission appear in the right pane of the Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Click Assign, and select Permission Group, Workstation or Staff Member.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the staff member, permission group, or workstation to which you want to grant the selected permission.
    2. +
    +

    The staff member, workstation, or permission group appears in the list of those that have the selected permission.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save any changes.
    2. +
    +

    For a list of Cataloging workflows and the permissions required to do the tasks, see Cataloging Workflow Permissions.

    +

    For a list of Cataloging permissions, see Cataloging Permissions Reference.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_message_for_bibs_that_do_not_display_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_message_for_bibs_that_do_not_display_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d26c824a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_message_for_bibs_that_do_not_display_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set message for bibs that do not display in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Message for Bibs That Do Not Display in PAC

    +

    To turn the message on or off when bibliographic records are saved and the Display in PAC check box on the Bibliographic Record workform is unchecked:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Cataloging profiles appear.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Bibliographic records: Warning for records saved with display in PAC unchecked.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes to display a warning message when users save a bibliographic record with the Display in PAC check box unchecked, or select No to save or change the records without displaying the message.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_circulation_history_display_for_item_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_circulation_history_display_for_item_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e0c1c20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_circulation_history_display_for_item_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set the circulation history display for item records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Circulation History Display for Item Records

    +

    To set the cataloging parameters for the Item Record workform - Circulation History view:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Cataloging tab to access the system-level Cataloging parameters.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To change the Item Record - Circulation History view, do the following:
      • Select Yes or No in the Item record history display assigned branch value to turn on or off the display of the assigned branch.
      • Select Yes or No in the Item record history display patron ID value to turn on or off the display of the patron ID.
      • Type a different number in the Item record history time threshold value to change the number of days a circulation transaction or status change is displayed.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_limit_on_the_number_of_files_in_a_single_import_job.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_limit_on_the_number_of_files_in_a_single_import_job.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a833481 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_limit_on_the_number_of_files_in_a_single_import_job.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set the limit on the number of files in a single import job + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Limit on the Number of Files in a Single Import Job

    +

    To specify the limit on the number of files that can be included in a single import job:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab to see the cataloging profiles set at the system level.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Maximum number of files to import, and change the number by typing a different number or by selecting the up or down arrows in the number box. The default is 100 and the maximum setting is 1,000.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_number_of_bibs_that_can_be_replaced_at_once.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_number_of_bibs_that_can_be_replaced_at_once.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63e74133 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_number_of_bibs_that_can_be_replaced_at_once.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the number of bibs that can be replaced at once + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Number of Bibs That Can Be Replaced at Once

    +

    +

    +

    Note: +
    For information on replacing bibliographic records, see + Detect duplicate or replace bibliographic records.

    +

    To set the maximum number of bibliographic records that can be replaced in one operation:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    +

    The system-level Cataloging parameters appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select Bibliographic record replace: Maximum allowed in one operation.
    2. +
    3. Type a number less than 999.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +

    The new limit is saved and applies to all branches in your library system.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_item_templates_to_in-process.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_item_templates_to_in-process.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9eb06e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_item_templates_to_in-process.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the status of copied item templates to in-process + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Status of Copied Item Templates to In-Process

    +

    You can specify the status of copied item record templates so that they retain the circulation status of the item record template from which they were copied, or they are set to a status of In-Process.

    +

    To set the status of copied item record templates:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Copied item templates default to In-process.
    6. +
    7. Choose one of the following options:
    8. +
    +
      +
    • To set the profile so that new item record templates created by copying an existing template will always have a status of In-Process, select Yes.
    • +
    • To set the profile so that new item record templates created by copying an existing item record template will retain the status of the existing item record template, select No.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save, click saveicon00228.gifor press Ctrl+S.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_items_to_in-process.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_items_to_in-process.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee7dcc35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_the_status_of_copied_items_to_in-process.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the status of copied items to in-process + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Status of Copied Items to In-Process

    +

    You can set the status of copied item records so that they retain the circulation status of the item record template from which they were copied, or they get set to a status of In-Process.

    +

    To set the status of copied items:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Copied item records default to In-process.
    6. +
    7. Choose one of the following options:
      • To set the profile so that new item records created by copying an existing record will always have a status of In-Process, select Yes.
      • To set the profile so that new item records created by copying an existing record will retain the status of the existing item record, select No.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save, click saveicon00226.gifor press Ctrl+S.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_automatic_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_automatic_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef92b1b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_automatic_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + Set up Automatic Display in PAC Processing for Bibliographic Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Automatic Display in PAC Processing for Bibliographic Records

    +

    To set up automatic Display in PAC processing:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Profiles and selectthe Cataloging tab.
    2. +
    +

    The cataloging profiles appear.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Bibliographic records: Automatic Display in PAC processing profile.
    2. +
    +

    The profile dialog box opens. By default, no check boxes are selected.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To suppress the display of bibliographic records based on the state of their linked item records, select the Turn OFF the bibliographic ‘Display in PAC’ check box and select from the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • if there are no final linked item records - When this option is selected, the job looks for bibliographic records that have the Display in PAC box checked but have no linked item records with a status of Final. If it finds such bibliographic records, it clears (un-checks) the Display in PAC check box, and those titles will not display in the PAC.
    • +
    • if there ARE final linked item records and: +
        +
      • Display in PAC is off on all final linked item records -When this option is selected, the job looks for bibliographic records that have the Display in PAC box checked but all the final linked item records have the Display in PAC box unchecked. If it finds such bibliographic records, it clears (un-checks) the Display in PAC check box in the bibliographic records, and those titles will not display in the PAC.
      • +
      • the circulation status is suppressed on all final linked item records - When this option is selected, the job looks for bibliographic records that have the Display in PAC box checked but all final linked item records have circulation statuses that prevent the items from displaying in PAC. If it finds such bibliographic records, it clears (un-checks) the Display in PAC check box in the bibliographic records, and those titles will not display in the PAC.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option uses the Suppress item display PAC profile table for the item's assigned branch.

    +
      +
    1. To ensure that bibliographic records display in PAC if the linked item records are in a state where they can be circulated, select Turn ON the bibliographic 'Display in PAC' if the conditions above are NOT met.When this option is selected, the job looks for any bibliographic records that do not already have the Display in PAC box checked, and whose linked items do not collectively meet the criteria selected under the Turn OFF Display in PAC setting. If it finds such bibliographic records, it checks the Display in PAC check box, and those titles will display in the PAC.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If your library has non-integrated eContent titles that you want to display in PAC even though they do not have linked item records, do not select the following options: Turn OFF the bibliographic ‘Display in PAC’ and if there are no final linked item records.

    +

    Tip:
    To identify bibliographic records that were modified by the job, you can search for bibliographic records that were modified during the overnight window when the job ran.

    +

    When a bibliographic record is updated by the Automatic display in PAC processing job, the transaction is logged and the modifier and date last modified fields reflect these changes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_the_Subfield_9_cleanup_utility.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_the_Subfield_9_cleanup_utility.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55089a4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_up_the_Subfield_9_cleanup_utility.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the Subfield 9 cleanup utility + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up the Subfield 9 Cleanup Utility

    +

    Important:
    To use the Subfield 9 cleanup utility, a subfield 9 must have been inserted into the tags in order to delete them. See Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9 for the conditions under which the $9 is inserted.

    +

    To set the Subfield 9 cleanup utility profile:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Subfield 9 cleanup utility profile is available only at the system level.

    +
      +
    1. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab. See Cataloging Profiles at the System Level.
    2. +
    3. Select Subfield 9 cleanup utility.
    4. +
    +

    The $9 Cleanup Utility dialog box appears.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to add another tag to this profile, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check box next to Subfield 9 created more than ______ before the job run date, select a number and select days, months or years to indicate the time period (relative to the date the job was run) for which you want the system to check for the presence of the $9.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When the tags are marked with a $9, a date is included. This is the date that will be checked when the utility is run.

    +
      +
    1. Select the tags to delete if a $9 is found with a date within the date range you specified.
    2. +
    +

    When you have set up this profile, a nightly SQL job will run unless it is disabled in the SQL server agent. It will check the tags you specified for the presence of a $9, and if it finds this subfield in the tag, it will check the date to determine if it is within the date range you specified.

    +

    For example, if you select Subfield 9 created more than 2 months before the job run date, and select 970, the nightly utility will check the 970 tags. If it finds a bibliographic record that has a 970 tag with a $9 and a processed date more than two months before the utility is run, it automatically deletes the 970 tag and all its contents, un-indexes the tag, and adjusts the tag sequence in the bibliographic records. The bibliographic record’s modification date is updated and the transaction is logged.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_warnings_for_changed_item_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_warnings_for_changed_item_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d86728f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Set_warnings_for_changed_item_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set warnings for changed item records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Warnings for Changed Item Records

    +

    To display warning messages when item records are saved, changed, or bulk-changed:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Set the following profiles to Yes to display warning messages, or set them to No to save or change the records without displaying a message:
      • Item bulk change: Warning if changing assigned or home branch - If this profile is set to Yes, a warning message appears within the Item Record Bulk Change Tool when a user selects both the Home Branch and the Item's Assigned Branch to be changed at the same time. The warning informs the user that the selected locations within the Item Record Bulk Change Tool are mismatched.

        Note:
        The warning message for the Item Record Bulk Change Tool does not display if only the Item's Assigned Branch or the Home Branch are selected for change, even if that change will result in a mismatch within the item records.

      • Item records: Warning for items saved with modified barcode - If this profile is set to Yes, a warning message appears when a user changes the barcode on a final item record and saves the record.
      • Item records: Warning for items saved with Display in PAC unchecked - If this profile is set to Yes, a warning message appears when a user saves an item record that does not have the Display in PAC box checked.
      • Item records: Warning for items saved without barcodes - If this profile is set to Yes, a warning message appears when a user saves an item record that does not have a barcode.
      • Item records: Warning if changing assigned or home branch - If this profile is set to Yes, a warning message appears when a user changes the assigned branch or home branch for an item record.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Item_Copy_Save_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Item_Copy_Save_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fef4f0a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Item_Copy_Save_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Item Copy & Save Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Item Copy and Save Options

    +

    Several Cataloging profiles affect the creation and modification of item records and item record templates. They specify defaults for copied item records and templates, defaults for the shelving scheme, and whether item records can be saved provisionally if they have duplicate barcodes.

    +

    Note:
    For information on the profiles that copy the call number and price from bibliographic records, see Copying Bib Data to Items. For information on setting the warning message profiles for item records, see Displaying Warning Messages for Bibs and Items.

    +

    The Cataloging profile Default shelving scheme for new item and holdings records specifies the scheme that appears by default in new item and serial holdings records. This profile can be set at the system, library, branch, or staff member level in Polaris Administration. The default shelving scheme appears when users create new item records from the New Item Record Options dialog box or the Item Record workform (when File | New | Clear workform is selected).

    +

    Two other Cataloging profiles determine the default status of copied item records and copied item templates. Copied item records and item templates can be assigned a default status of In-process, or they can retain the status of the record from which they were copied. The Copied item records default to In-process profile determines the status of copied item records, and the Copied item templates default to In-process determines the status of copied item templates.

    +

    The Item records: Records with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally profile specifies whether an item record can be saved provisionally if its barcode is determined to be a duplicate of existing item record’s barcode. If this profile is set to Yes, item records with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally. If it is set to No, the option to save item records with duplicate barcodes provisionally is disabled.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Utility_to_Delete_Bib_Tags_Marked_with_Subfield_9.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Utility_to_Delete_Bib_Tags_Marked_with_Subfield_9.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b4f37aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_Utility_to_Delete_Bib_Tags_Marked_with_Subfield_9.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Utility to Delete Bib Tags Marked with Subfield 9

    +

    You can use the system-level Cataloging profile Subfield 9 cleanup utility to clean up specific MARC tags marked with a system-supplied subfield 9 and text. The profile specifies the tags to scan for the presence of the $9 and the date range. When the utility runs, the specified tags are checked for a $9, and if the subfield was inserted in the time period specified, the whole tag is deleted.

    +

    Note:
    This utility is used to delete bibliographic tags from existing records after the processing is complete. You can also specify unwanted tags to delete from new bibliographic records when they are imported or saved. See Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs.

    +

    These system-supplied subfields are inserted under the following conditions to prevent bibliographic tags from being used more than once:

    +
      +
    • +

      Before item records are created from embedded holdings data in imported bibliographic records, the system first checks for the presence of existing embedded holdings tags. If embedded holdings tags are found and they are not already marked with a $9 subfield, the tags are marked with the subfield 9 and the text Tag retained from duplicate overlaymmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM]. The marked tags are not used to create item records. Bib Tags Marked to Prevent Creation/Updates of Items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      After item records are created from embedded holdings tags in imported bibliographic records, a subfield 9 and the text Item generated mmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM] is inserted only if the Cataloging parameter MARC embedded holdings tags as processed is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. The marked tags are not used again.

      +
    • +
    • +

      After eContent items are created automatically by inserting 852 tags in the bibliographic records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      After bibliographic records are bulk-added to a purchase order or selection list, a subfield 9 and the text Processed mmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM] is inserted into the 970 tags if the Acquisitions parameter Bulk add to PO/SL: Mark 970 data as processed is set to Yes. The marked tags are not used again during bulk add.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    970 tags are also marked during migration from another system with $9 Migrated 970: mmm dd yyyy hh:mm[AM/PM].

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_the_Cataloging_Directory.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_the_Cataloging_Directory.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6e250ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Setting_the_Cataloging_Directory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting the Cataloging Directory + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting the Cataloging Directory

    +

    You can set up a default directory cataloging so that bulk change and other catalog processing reports are automatically saved to a specific folder.

    +

    Note:
    Import processing reports are not saved in this directory; they can be accessed from the Import Jobs Queue.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_if_items_with_duplicate_barcodes_can_be_saved.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_if_items_with_duplicate_barcodes_can_be_saved.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d18fdb1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_if_items_with_duplicate_barcodes_can_be_saved.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify if items with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify If Items with Duplicate Barcodes Can Be Saved Provisionally

    +

    Tip:
    This profile setting does not affect bulk item creation, bulk change, or item creation during importing. When barcodes are assigned during bulk creation or bulk change, duplicate barcodes are never assigned. In the import profile, users with the appropriate permissions can still select the import option to create provisional item records when duplicate barcodes are encountered.

    +

    This profile is checked when users create or save an item, and its barcode is a duplicate of a barcode for an existing item.

    +

    To set the profile to allow or prevent the creation of provisional items with duplicate barcodes:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select the Item records: Records with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally profile.
    6. +
    7. Set the profile to Yes to allow users to save an item record provisionally if a duplicate barcode is found. Set the profile to No to prevent users from saving an item record provisionally if a duplicate barcode is found.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save, click saveicon00230.gifor press Ctrl+S.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_import_blackout_times.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_import_blackout_times.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17bf1dc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_import_blackout_times.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Specify import blackout times + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Import Blackout Times

    +

    To specify the times when import processing cannot be done:

    +

    Note:
    You must have the System Administration permission Modify import blackout times: Allow to set or modify import blackout times.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab to see the cataloging profiles set at the system level.
    4. +
    5. Double-click the Import blackout times profile.
    6. +
    +

    The Import blackout times dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Set the blackout times as follows:
      • To set up to three daily blackout times, select Enable under Daily blackout time 1, 2, or 3, and select a Start time and an End time.
      • To set a one-time blackout time, select Enable under One-time blackout, select a Start date and time, and select an End date and time.
    2. +
    3. Select OK.
    4. +
    +

    The import blackout times are set for the system.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_preferred_cataloging_sources_for_authority_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_preferred_cataloging_sources_for_authority_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19152486 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_preferred_cataloging_sources_for_authority_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify preferred cataloging sources for authority records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Preferred Cataloging Sources for Authority Records

    +

    The Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source policy table determines whether imported authority records overlay existing authority records when duplicates are found. When an authority record is imported, and a duplicate record exists in the database, the code in the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. tag (040 $a) is checked against the entries in the table. If the code matches an entry in the table, the preference order of the code is checked. The existing record is overlaid with the new record if the code has a higher level of preference than the code in the existing record. For more information about the checking during importingAuthority Record Overlay Based on Cataloging Source.

    +

    Important:
    If your library uses the Authorities Weekly service, and you want to ensure that the incoming updated records always overlay the database records, remove all entries from the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging policy table at the System level.

    +

    To add a cataloging source to the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source table:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the preferred cataloging source table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify Authority authority record import: preferred cataloging source: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source.
    6. +
    +

    The Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source table appears.

    +

    + authrecimport.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00209.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert: Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source dialog box appears.

    +

    + dPrefCatSourcDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Organization box, select the organization to which this entry applies.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the dialog box was opened for a branch, the branch name is the only one listed in the Organization box.

    +
      +
    1. Type the MARC code of the cataloging agency in the Code box.
    2. +
    +

    Enter the value your cataloging agency uses in tag 040 $a of the records you receive from the agency. You can also get the MARC code from the MARC Code List for Organizations that is maintained by the Library of Congress.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select an entry, and click chgentrybtn00210.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select an entry, and click delentrybut00211.gif.
    • +
    • Change the source preference order - Select an entry, and click moveupbn00212.gif to move the entry up (higher preference), or click movedwnbn00213.gif to move the entry down (lower preference).
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_delete_from_new_bibliographic_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_delete_from_new_bibliographic_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe58e8a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_delete_from_new_bibliographic_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify tags to delete from new bibliographic records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Tags to Delete from New Bibliographic Records

    +

    The Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table is used to specify tags to retain from duplicate records that are overlaid.

    +

    Tip:
    This policy table is also used to specify tags to retain from bibliographic records when they are overlaid during duplicate detection. For information on this process, see Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs.

    +

    To specify the tags to automatically delete from incoming bibliographic records:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow and Modify Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete.
    6. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table appears.

    +

    + bibtagsretdel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert: Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete dialog box opens.

    +

    + insertbibretdel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Organization box, select the organization to which this entry applies.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Insert dialog box was opened for a branch, the branch name is the only one listed in the Organization box.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the tag number in the Tag number box tag.
    2. +
    3. If you want all indicator values included, leave them highlighted in the Indictor 1 and Indicator 2 boxes. Click an indicator to un-highlight it if you do not want it included.
    4. +
    5. Select Retain from deleted or rejected record (occurs only when duplicate is deleted).
    6. +
    7. Click OK to insert the tag.
    8. +
    +
      +
    • If the tag/indicator combination is already in the table, a message appears: Warning: This table already contains a retain/delete row for this tag.
    • +
    +
      +
    • If the tag indicator/combination has already been specified as a tag to be retained, and you attempt to define it as a tag to be deleted, the following message appears: Warning: The same tag/indicator combination cannot be selected for both retention and deletion.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select an entry and click chgentrybtn.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select an entry and click delentrybut.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_authority_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_authority_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68c85aa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_authority_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify tags to retain from overlaid authority records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    +

    Specify Tags to Retain from Overlaid Authority Records

    +

    The Authority Overlay Retention policy table is used to retain specific tags from duplicate records that are deleted or rejected. When a duplicate authority record is overlaid, the links from the overlaid record are transferred to the new record, and specific tags from the overlaid record are retained in the new record.

    +

    To specify which fields to transfer automatically when an authority record is overlaid:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the Authority Overlay Retention policy table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify Authority Overlay Retention: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Authority Overlay Retention.
    6. +
    +

    The Authority Overlay Retention Table appears.

    +

    + biboverret.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00206.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert: Authority Overlay Retention dialog box appears.

    +

    + dOverlaRetentnDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Organization box, select the organization to which this entry applies.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Insert dialog box was opened for a branch, the branch name is the only one listed in the Organization box.

    +
      +
    1. In the Tag Number box, type the tag that you want retained in the new records.
    2. +
    3. To retain the tag only if certain indicators are present, highlight the indicator values in the Indicator 1 and Indicator 2 boxes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If the tag is in the retention table without indicator values, the tag is always retained. If indicator values are defined along with the tag, the data in the tag is copied only if the indicator values also match.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Overlay Retention table is displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select an entry and click chgentrybtn00207.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select an entry and click delentrybut00208.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9bf9ecc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_tags_to_retain_from_overlaid_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify tags to retain from overlaid bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Tags to Retain from Overlaid Bibs

    +

    The Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table is used to specify tags to retain from duplicate records that are overlaid.

    +

    Note:
    This policy table is also used to specify tags to delete from incoming records that are saved to the database, even if the incoming records are not duplicates of existing bibliographic records in the database. For information on this process, see Deleting MARC Tags from Incoming Bibs.

    +

    To specify which fields to transfer automatically to the replacement record when a bibliographic record is overlaid:

    +

    Note:
    These permissions are required to view and change the Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow and Modify Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete: Allow

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Policy Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. +

      Select Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete.

      +

      The Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete policy table appears.

      +

      + bibtagsretdel00201.gif 

      +
    6. +
    7. +

      Select btnInsert00202.gif.

      +

      The Insert: Bibliographic Tags Retain/Delete dialog box opens.

      +

      + insertbibretdel00203.gif 

      +
    8. +
    9. +

      In the Organization box, select the organization to which this entry applies.

      +

      Note:
      If the Insert dialog box was opened for a branch, the branch name is the only one listed in the Organization box.

      +
    10. +
    11. +

      Enter the tag number in the Tag number box tag.

      +
    12. +
    13. +

      If you want all indicator values included, leave them highlighted in the Indicator 1 and Indicator 2 boxes. Select an indicator to clear it if you do not want it included.

      +
    14. +
    15. +

      Select Retain from deleted or rejected record (occurs only when duplicate is deleted).

      +
    16. +
    17. +

      Select OK to insert the tag.

      +
      Notes: +
        +
      • +

        If the tag/indicator combination is already in the table, a message appears: Warning: This table already contains a retain/delete row for this tag.

        +
      • +
      • +

        If the tag/indicator combination is already in the table, a message appears: Warning: This table already contains a retain/delete row for this tag.

        +
      • +
      • +

        If a tag/indicator combination is selected to be both retained and deleted, and the tag/indicator combination exists in both records, only the retention is processed.

        +
      • +
      +
      +
    18. +
    19. Select File > Save.
    20. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select an entry and select chgentrybtn00204.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select an entry and select delentrybut00205.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_directory_for_Cataloging_files.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_directory_for_Cataloging_files.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aaa3475e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_directory_for_Cataloging_files.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Specify the default directory for Cataloging files + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the Default Directory for Cataloging files

    +

    To specify where catalog processing reports are saved:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization, staff member, or workstation.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Default directory.
    6. +
    +

    The Default Directory Setup for Logs and Files dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the cataloging default directory location, or click Browse and select the location, and select OK to update the cataloging default directory.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_shelving_scheme_for_item_holdings_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_shelving_scheme_for_item_holdings_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3233942 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_default_shelving_scheme_for_item_holdings_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify the default shelving scheme for item/holdings records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the Default Shelving Scheme for Item/Holdings Records

    +

    To specify the default shelving scheme for new item and serial holdings records:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization or staff member.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Cataloging profiles appear.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Default shelving scheme for new item and holdings records.
    2. +
    3. Select the shelving scheme.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save, click saveicon00224.gifor press Ctrl+S.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_display_name_for_MARC_tags.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_display_name_for_MARC_tags.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d3dba96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Specify_the_display_name_for_MARC_tags.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify the display name for MARC tags + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the Display Name for MARC tags

    +

    To specify the display name of MARC tags:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select MARC validation: Bibliographic or MARC validation: Authority to display the MARC Validation Editor for the selected MARC format.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select a tag, indicator, or subfield.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Expand a tag to see the indicators and subfields.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name in the Display Name box. This is the descriptive phrase/name that will be displayed in the MARC21 view when a user selects the tag, indicator, or subfield in the Bibliographic Record or Authority Record workform. The maximum length is 255 characters. When this box is empty, the MARC name is used for the popup field description in the MARC21 view of the workform.
    2. +
    3. If you want to describe the tag, type additional text in the Description box. The text in the Description box does not display in the Bibliographic or Authority Record workforms.
    4. +
    5. Click the save button to save the validation rules.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

     Turn MARC tag name display on or off

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_MARC_tag_name_display_on_or_off.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_MARC_tag_name_display_on_or_off.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c9f39190 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_MARC_tag_name_display_on_or_off.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Turn MARC tag name display on or off + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Turn MARC Tag Name Display On or Off

    +

    You can enable or disable the display of descriptive MARC tag names that appear in the following locations:

    +
      +
    • +

      MARC21 view of the Bibliographic workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      MARC21 view of the Authority workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      MARC view of the Bibliographic Record workform in Leap

      +
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Label text for the descriptive tag names is configured in the Automated MARC Validation Bibliographic and MARC Validation Authority profiles at the system level (see Specify the display name for MARC tags). You cannot change these descriptive names at the library or branch level, but you can turn the display of the tag names on or off.

    +

    To configure the display of descriptive MARC tag names in staff client and Leap workforms +

    +
      +
    1. Go to the Administration Explorer tree view and expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Display MARC field description.
    6. +
    7. Select Yes to display descriptive MARC tag names, or selectNo if you do not want to display the descriptions.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_tag_sorting_on_or_off.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_tag_sorting_on_or_off.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1023bcf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_tag_sorting_on_or_off.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Turn automatic MARC tag sorting on or off + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Turn Automatic MARC Tag Sorting On or Off

    +

    The sorting order for MARC tags in the MARC21 view of the Bibliographic Record and Authority Record workforms is defined in the MARC Validation profiles at the system level (see Change the sort order of MARC tags). You cannot change the sorting order at the library or branch level, but you can turn automatic sorting on or off.

    +

    To turn automatic sorting of MARC tags on or off:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Automatically sort MARC bibliographic tags or Automatically sort MARC authority tags.
    6. +
    7. Select Yes to sort the MARC tags in the MARC21 view of the workform. Users can enter the tags in any order and they will be sorted in the order specified in the MARC validation profiles. Select No to turn off automatic sorting of MARC tags.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_validation_on_or_off.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_validation_on_or_off.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a4507444 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/Turn_automatic_MARC_validation_on_or_off.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Turn automatic MARC validation on or off + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Turn automatic MARC validation on or off

    +

    MARC validation rules are set at the system level only, but you can turn the validation on or off at the system, library, or branch level. To enable or disable automatic MARC validation:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and select the Cataloging tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Automated MARC Validation: Bibliographic or Automated MARC Validation: Authority.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes or No.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/View_the_Authority_Control_database_table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/View_the_Authority_Control_database_table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3618d521 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatalog/View_the_Authority_Control_database_table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + View the Authority Control database table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View the Authority Control Database Table

    +

    To view the Authority Control database table:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Database Tables folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Authority Control to view the table entries in the details view.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging Workflow Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging Workflow Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8219b8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging Workflow Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1128 @@ + + + + + + + Cataloging Workflow Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Workflow Permissions

    +

    The following table lists cataloging tasks, the Polaris permissions required to do the tasks, the administrative levels at which they can be set, and the subsystems where the permissions are located. For a list of all cataloging permissions and the level at which they can be set, see Cataloging Permissions Reference.

    +

    Note: +
    To modify Polaris Administration profiles and parameters, you must have the following permissions: +

    • Access administration: Allow
    • Modify parameters: Allow
    • Modify profiles: Allow

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    WorkflowRequired PermissionsAdministration Explorer Security Location
    +

    Maintain the Authority Catalog +

    +
    +

    Maintain authority control headings

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    Additional permission for enabling or disabling automatic re-indexing during the next server upgrade.

    +

    +

    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Authority records: Access

    +

    Authority records: Create

    +

    Authority records: Delete/Undelete

    +

    Authority records: Modify

    +

    Authority templates: Access

    +

    Authority create links to authority records

    +

    Authority create links to bibliographic records

    +

    +

    Access MARC Re-index during next server upgrade: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain the standard authority control templates for the organization

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Authority records: Access

    +

    Authority templates: Access

    +

    Authority templates: Create

    +

    Authority templates: Delete

    +

    Authority templates: Modify

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Use and edit the authority record templates the staff member created. (Add this permission to other authority control permissions to give staff members the ability to use their own templates without affecting the organization’s templates.)

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ authority templates: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain the Bibliographic Catalog +

    +
    +

    Add bibliographic entries to the catalog (original and copy cataloging)

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +

    Bibliographic records: Create

    +

    Bibliographic records: Modify

    +

    Bibliographic templates: Access

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch -- Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Create authority records from heading tags in a bibliographic record

    +
    +

    Authority records: Create

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain existing bibliographic records, including replacing and protecting records.

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +

    Bibliographic records: Delete/Undelete

    +

    Bibliographic records: Modify

    +

    Modify Do not Overlay setting in Bib records: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    +

    Prevent warning messages from appearing when deleting multiple bibliographic records

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow +

    +

    +

    Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow

    +

    +

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    +

    Additional permission for enabling or disabling automatic re-indexing during the next server upgrade.

    +

    +

    +

    Access MARC Re-index during next server upgrade: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Bulk change bibliographic records

    +

    +

    +

    Access cataloging subsystem

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access (for all records)

    +

    Bibliographic records: Modify (for all records)

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Create

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Delete/Undelete

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Modify

    +

    Access bibliographic bulk change: Allow

    +

    Access bibliographic fixed fields bulk change: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch- Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain bibliographic record templates used by the entire organization

    +

    +

    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Bibliographic templates: Create

    +

    Bibliographic template: Access

    +

    Bibliographic templates: Delete

    +

    Bibliographic templates: Modify

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch- Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Use and edit the bibliographic record templates the staff member created. (Add to other bibliographic record permissions so staff members can use their own templates without affecting the organization’s templates.)

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ bibliographic templates: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Protect bibliographic records from overlay.

    +
    +

    Modify do not overlay setting in bib records: Allow

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +

    Bibliographic records: Modify

    +

    +

    (To change the setting in the Bib Bulk Change dialog or Import Setup window, the user must also have the required permissions for these functions.)

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    (Note: The Cataloging parameter, Bibliographic record do not overlay feature, must be set to Yes to display the Do not overlay check box in the Bibliographic Record workform, the Bib Bulk Change dialog box, and the Import Setup window.)

    +
    +

    Maintain Item Records +

    +
    +

    Add item records to the catalog

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Item records: Create

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +

    Item records: Access

    +

    Item records: Modify cataloging view

    +

    Item templates: Access

    +

    Override invalid item barcode message: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System

    +
    +

    Maintain existing item records

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Item records: Access

    +

    Item records: Modify cataloging view

    +

    Item records: Modify header

    +

    Item records: Modify history view

    +

    Item records: Modify notes and notices view

    +

    Item records: Modify reserves view

    +

    Item records: Modify source and acquisition view

    +

    Item records: Delete/Undelete

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +

    Note - Item records: Create is necessary to change the owner on the item record.

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Prevent warning messages from appearing when deleting multiple item records

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple item records: Allow +

    +

    +

    Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple item records: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    +

    Override and continue when invalid barcode message appears

    +
    +

    Override invalid item barcode message: Allow

    +

    +

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain item records for ephemeral items so that they can be circulated

    +
    +

    Quick-circ item records: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Quick-circ item records: Create

    +
    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Quick-circ item records: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Quick-circ item records: Delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Create bibliographic records from item records or item templates

    +
    +

    Create a bib record from the item or item template: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Bulk change item records

    +

    +

    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item records: Bulk change

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item records: Modify header

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Access item record bulk change: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    Bulk change item records using templatesItem bulk change templates: Access +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    Item bulk change templates: Create +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    Item bulk change templates: Delete +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    Item bulk change templates: Modify +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain item templates used by the organization

    +

    +

    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item templates: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item templates: Delete

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item templates: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item templates: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Item records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Use and edit the item templates the staff member created. (Add this permission to other workflow permissions to allow the staff member access to templates they created.)

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ item templates: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    Use 'own' item bulk change templatesSystem - Cataloging
    +

    Maintain Labels for the Organization +

    +
    +

    Create, modify, and delete label configurations

    +
    +

    Label Manager Configuration: Create

    +

    Label Manager Configuration: Delete

    +

    Label Manager Configuration: Modify

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain Import Profiles in Import Profile Manager +

    +
    +

    Create, modify, and delete import profiles

    +
    +

    Import profiles: Access

    +

    Import profiles: Create

    +

    Import profiles: Delete

    +

    Import profiles: Modify

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Import Records +

    +
    +

    Import bibliographic, authority, and item records using Express Import

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Create

    +

    Bibliographic records: Modify

    +

    Authority records: Create

    +

    Authority records: Modify

    +

    Express import: Allow

    +

    Item records: Create

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Create

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Import bibliographic, authority, and item records using Full Import

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Create

    +

    Bibliographic records: Modify

    +

    Authority records: Create

    +

    Authority records: Modify

    +

    Import bibliographic, item and authority records: Allow

    +

    Item records: Create

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Create

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Manage your own import jobs from the import jobs queue

    +
    +

    Import bibliographic, item and authority records: Allow or Express import: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Manage import jobs for a branch or for the system

    +
    +

    Manage import jobs for this organization: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Specify blackout times when importing cannot be run.

    +
    +

    Modify import blackout times: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

    Export Records +

    +
    +

    Export bibliographic, authority, and item records from the Polaris catalog

    +
    +

    Export bibliographic, item and authority records: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Export Cataloging record sets from Leap to Excel

    +

    Note: You can only export record sets owned at the System, Library, or Branch level. Record sets owned by individuals cannot be exported.

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets: Export

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain Cataloging Record Sets +

    +
    +

    Maintain authority, bibliographic, and item record sets used by the entire organization

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Access

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Modify

    +

    Cataloging record sets: Delete/Undelete

    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +

    Authority records: Access

    +

    Item records: Access

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Use and edit the authority, bibliographic, and item record sets the staff member created

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Purge Cataloging Records Marked as Deleted +

    +
    +

    Maintain purge criteria that are used to purge cataloging records from the database when they are marked for deletion but retained in the database

    +
    +

    Purge criteria: Access

    +

    Purge criteria: Delete

    +

    Purge criteria: Create

    +

    Purge criteria: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain Course Reserves +

    +
    +

    Maintain course reserve records

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Course reserve records: Access

    +

    Course reserve records: Delete

    +

    Course reserve records: Create

    +

    Course reserve records: Modify

    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Patron registration: Modify

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Maintain reserve items

    +
    +

    Item records: Access

    +

    Item records: Modify reserves view

    +

    Auto delete processing of reserve item records: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain reserve item templates used by the organization

    +
    +

    Reserve item templates: Access

    +

    Reserve item templates: Create

    +

    Reserve item templates: Modify

    +

    Reserve item templates: Delete

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Use and edit the reserve item templates the staff member created

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ reserve item templates: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain course reserve templates for the organization

    +
    +

    Course reserve templates: Access

    +

    Course reserve templates: Delete

    +

    Course reserve templates: Create

    +

    Course reserve templates: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Update URL Links +

    +
    +

    Use the Polaris URL Detective, which is available from the Utilities menu if your library has purchased this product.

    +
    +

    Use URL Detective: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain Community records +

    +
    +

    Maintain Community records (if your library has purchased Community Profiles)

    +
    +

    Community records: Access

    +

    Community records: Create

    +

    Community records: Modify

    +

    Community records: Delete

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff, Workstation - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Managing Event imports

    +
    +

    Event import profiles: Access

    +

    Event import profiles: Create

    +

    Event import profiles: Modify

    +

    Event import profiles: Delete

    +
    +

    System- Cataloging

    +
    +

    Maintain Promotion records +

    +
    +

    Work with Promotion records (if your library has purchased Feature It)

    +
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem: Allow

    +

    Promotion records: Access

    +

    Promotion records: Create

    +

    Promotion records: Modify

    +

    Promotion records: Delete

    +
    +

    System

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Feature bibliographic records +

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    +

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Administration_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Administration_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ec593d89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Administration_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Cataloging Administration Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Administration Reference

    +

    The following tables include the permissions required to do specific Cataloging tasks, and reference lists for Cataloging permissions, parameters, and profiles:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Permissions_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Permissions_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1219d81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/Cataloging_Permissions_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Cataloging Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Permissions

    +

    To use the Cataloging tasks in Polaris, staff members require specific permissions:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catparamref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catparamref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..62b6739c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catparamref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,262 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cataloging Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Parameters Reference

    +

    These are the parameters you set to administer and maintain the Cataloging subsystem.

    +

    +

    +

    These parameters are available when you select Parameters, Cataloging for the listed organizational levels in the Administration Explorer. For more information, see Cataloging Administration.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default

    +
    +

    Auto-suggest feature enabled

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether automatic suggestions appear for a phrase or keyword search in the staff client for patron, bibliographic, item, or authority records, and a phrase, keyword, and advanced search in the Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Bibliographic record replace: Maximum allowed in one operation

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Sets the maximum number of bibliographic records that can be replaced at once.

    +
    +

    The default is 50; the limit is 999.

    +
    +

    Bibliographic record delete: Allow if there are holds

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether bibliographic records can be deleted if there are linked hold requests.

    +
    +

    No +

    +
    +

    Bibliographic record do not overlay feature enabled

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Do not overlay feature is enabled. When enabled, the Bibliographic Record workform, the Bibliographic Records tab of the Import Setup window, and Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box will have a Do not overlay check box that staff members with the appropriate permissions can select to prevent specific bibliographic records from being overlaid.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Item record delete: Allow if there are holds

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether item records can be deleted if there are linked hold requests

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Item record history display assigned branch

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Assigned branch appears in the Item record Circulation History view.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item record history display patron ID

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the patron ID appears in the Item Record workform, Circulation History view.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item record history time threshold

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies the number of days that a status change to an item record appears in the Circulation History view of the Item record workform.

    +
    +

    365

    +
    +

    MARC Re-index during next server upgrade

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Specifies whether to re-index MARC records when the server is upgraded.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Mark embedded holdings tag as processed

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a $9 with processing information is inserted in embedded holdings tags in bibliographic records when item records are created from these tags during the import process.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Normalize ambiguous LCCNs as if they are in the old format

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies how to process Library of Congress Control Numbers in MARC records that do not have a distinct format. This setting applies to all organizations and resources in the Polaris installation where bibliographic records are saved.

    +
    +

    The default is Yes, normalize LCCNs (where the format is not distinct) as if the LCCN is in the old control number format

    +
    +

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catpermref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catpermref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87423c36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catpermref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,693 @@ + + + + + + + Cataloging Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Permissions Reference

    +

    These permissions are available under Security, Cataloging at the listed organizational levels on the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note:
    To do a cataloging task, both the staff member and the workstation must have the permission. For more information on the permissions required for specific Cataloging tasks, see Cataloging Workflow Permissions.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Control RecordOrg LevelsPermissionDescription
    +

    Access cataloging subsystem

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Access the Cataloging menu and workforms

    +
    +

    Access bibliographic bulk change

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Bulk change bibliographic records

    +
    +

    Access bibliographic fixed fields bulk change

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Bulk change fixed fields in bibliographic records

    +
    +

    Access Carousel Toolkit

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Use the Carousel Toolkit on the Utilities menu

    +
    +

    Access item record bulk change

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Bulk change item records. (You must also have the Item record: Bulk change permission to change item records owned by your organization.)

    +
    +

    Authority create links to authority records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Create links from an authority record to other authority records.

    +
    +

    Authority create links to bibliographic records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Create links from an authority record to bibliographic records.

    +
    +

    Authority records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete/Undelete

    +
    +

    Maintain authority control in the catalog.

    +
    +

    Authority templates

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain templates for authority MARC records.

    +
    +

    Auto delete processing of reserve item records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Maintain course reserve item records; invoke the auto-delete process from the course reserve item record.

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete/Undelete

    +
    +

    Maintain bibliographic MARC records.

    +
    +

    Bibliographic templates

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain templates for bibliographic MARC records

    +
    +

    Campaigns +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain campaigns or automatic promotions for the organization

    +
    +

    Cataloging record sets

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Delete/Undelete; Export; Modify

    +
    +

    Maintain cataloging record sets

    +
    +

    Community records

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff, Workstation

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain community records for a library organization.

    +
    +

    Course reserve records

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain course reserve records

    +
    +

    Course reserve templates

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Use course reserve templates.

    +
    +

    Event import profiles

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Manage Community Event import profiles

    +
    +

    Export bibliographic, item and authority records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Export cataloging records

    +
    +

    Express Importing

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Users with this permission can use the Express Import option on the Utilities menu. This permission allows users to change settings on the Profile Setup and Record Set tabs on the Import Profile dialog box but not change the import settings for bibliographic, authority, or item records.

    +
    +

    Import profiles

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain import profiles

    +
    Item Bulk Change TemplatesSystemAccess: Create: Modify: DeleteMaintain Item Bulk Change Templates
    +

    Item records

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete/Undelete; Modify cataloging view; Modify header; Modify history view; Modify notes and notices view; Modify reserves view; Modify source and acquisitions view

    +
    +

    Maintain and catalog item records

    +
    +

    Item templates

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain item templates

    +
    +

    Label Manager Configuration

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain labels for the organization

    +
    +

    Manage import jobs for this organization

    +
    +

    System, Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Manage import jobs launched by users logged into the system or the branch for which the permission is granted; specify blackout times for the organization.

    +
    +

    Modify Do not overlay setting in bib records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Modify the Do not overlay setting in bibliographic records. With this permission, staff members can modify the Do not overlay check box in the Bibliographic Record workform, the Bib Bulk Change dialog box, and the Import Setup window (provided they have the other required permissions).

    +
    +

    Override invalid item barcode message

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Override invalid item barcode message when saving an item record, including serial item records.

    +
    +

    Promotions

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain promotion records used to feature resources in the PAC. The library must have a license for Feature It. +

    +
    +

    Purge criteria

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Use the purge process to purge records marked as deleted but not removed from the database.

    +
    +

    Quick-circ item records

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain ephemeral (quick-circ) items.

    +
    +

    Reserve item templates

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete

    +
    +

    Maintain reserve item templates.

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple bibliographic records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Users can stop warning messages regarding breakable links to other records when deleting multiple bibliographic records

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple item records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Allow - Users can stop warning messages regarding breakable links to other records when deleting multiple item records.

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple bibliographic records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Users can stop warning messages regarding unbreakable links and other conditions when deleting multiple bibliographic records.

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple item records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Users can stop warning messages regarding unbreakable links and other conditions when deleting multiple item records.

    +
    +

    Use 'own' authority templates

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Maintain own authority templates.

    +
    +

    Use 'own' bibliographic templates

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Maintain own bibliographic templates.

    +
    Use 'own' item bulk change templatesSystemAllowAllows staff to 'own' item record bulk change templates.
    +

    Use 'own' cataloging record sets

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    A staff member with this permission can create record sets that no other staff member or system administrator can access or modify. Grant this permission only if you want the staff member to create record sets that no one else can access.

    +
    +

    Use ‘own’ course reserve templates

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Maintain own course reserve templates.

    +
    +

    Use 'own' item templates

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Maintain own item templates.

    +
    +

    Use 'own' reserve item templates

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Maintain own reserve item templates.

    +
    +

    Use URL Detective

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Use the URL Detective utility available from the Utilities menu. A license for this utility is also required.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catprofref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catprofref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b73dc2c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Cataloging_Admin/PDKcatref/catprofref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,632 @@ + + + + + + + Cataloging Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available when you select ProfilesCataloging for the listed organizational levels in the Administration Explorer. For more information, see Cataloging Administration.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default

    +
    +

    Automated MARC validation: Authority

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the format of MARC authority records is checked automatically when the record is saved for the organization or resource.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Automated MARC validation: Bibliographic

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the format of MARC bibliographic records is checked automatically when the record is saved for the organization or resource.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    Automatically populate authority heading in Find Tool during check headingsSystemEnables or disables the automatic population of the heading in theAuthority Records - Heading Find Tool when checking for duplicate headings. Yes +
    +

    Automatically sort MARC Authority Records

    +

    +

    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the MARC tags in an authority record are sorted automatically when the record is opened or saved for the organization.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Automatically sort MARC bibliographic records

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the MARC tags in a bibliographic record are sorted automatically when the record is opened or saved for the organization.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Bibliographic records: Automatic display in PAC processing

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Opens a dialog box where the automatic display in PAC options are set for bibliographic records.

    +
    +

    +

    +

    Bibliographic records: Warning for records saved with display in PAC unchecked

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a warning message appears when users save a bibliographic record that does not have the Display in PAC check box checked. This warns the user that the saved record will not display in the PAC.

    +
    +

    No +

    +
    +

    Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff, Workstation

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the call number fields from the bibliographic record automatically complete the appropriate boxes in the item record when the staff member creates a linked item.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    Bring price from bib to item record when link is made


    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff, Workstation

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the price from the bibliographic record automatically fills the Price box in the item record when the staff member creates a linked item.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Campaigns truncation option

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Opens a dialog box where the number of characters to display in the campaign headline, midline and footer are set.

    +
    +

    +

    +

    Check headings immediately after bib replace

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether bibliographic record headings are checked immediately after they replace other bibliographic records.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Copied item records default to In-process

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether copied item records get a default status of In-process.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Copied item templates default to In-process

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether copied item templates get a default status of In-process.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Default directory

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Displays the Default Directory Setup dialog box which specifies the folder used as the default path for cataloging functions. The folder can be a shared folder on the network or a folder on the staff computer. Each workstation can have a different default directory.

    +
    +

    The default is: C:\Polaris Reports

    +
    +

    Default shelving scheme for new item and holdings records

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the default shelving scheme that appears when you create new item and serial holdings records.

    +
    +

    Dewey Decimal +

    +
    +

    Delete MARC tags when saving Z39.50 tags to local databases

    +

    +

    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether tags set up for deletion from incoming bibliographic records in the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table are also deleted from bibliographic records when the records are found via a Z39.50 search of a remote database and saved to the local database.

    +
    +

    No +

    +
    +

    Display MARC field description

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether descriptive MARC tag names are displayed in the following locations:

    +
      +
    • +

      MARC21 view of the Bibliographic workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      MARC21 view of the Authority workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      MARC view of the Bibliographic Record workform in Leap

      +
    • +
    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Import blackout times

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies the times when no importing jobs can be processed for the library system. Double-click to open the Import Blackout Times dialog box to enable and schedule the blackout times.

    +
    +

    +

    +

    Item bulk change: Warning if changing the Assigned or Home branch

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a warning appears when you are bulk changing item records and you have selected to change the Assigned or Home branch.

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Item records: Records with duplicate barcodes can be saved provisionally

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch +

    +
    +

    Specifies whether item records can be saved provisionally if they have duplicate barcodes.

    +
    +

    The default is Yes; to disable, select No.

    +
    +

    Item records: Warning if changing the Assigned or Home branch

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a warning message appears when you change the Assigned or Home branch on an Item record.

    +
    +

    The default is Yes; to disable, select No.

    +
    +

    Item records: Warning for items saved with display in PAC unchecked

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a warning appears when item records are saved and they do not have the Display in PAC box checked.

    +
    +

    The default is Yes; to disable, select No.

    +
    +

    Item records: Warning for items saved without barcodes

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a warning appears when an item record is saved without a barcode.

    +
    +

    The default is Yes; to disable, select No.

    +
    +

    Item records: Warning for items saved with modified barcode

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a warning message appears when an item record is saved with a modified barcode.

    +
    +

    The default is Yes; to disable, select No.

    +
    +

    MARC validation immediately after bib replace

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether MARC validation is performed automatically after a bibliographic record replaces other bibliographic records.

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes.

    +
    +

    MARC Validation: Authority

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Opens the MARC Validation Editor - Authority where you can specify how authority records are validated.

    +
    +

    +

    +

    MARC Validation: Bibliographic

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Opens the MARC Validation Editor - Bibliographic where you can specify how bibliographic records are validated.

    +
    +

    +

    +

    Maximum number of files to import

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the maximum number of files that can be included in a single import job.

    +
    +

    The default is 100; the limit is 1,000.

    +
    +

    Override Cataloging blocks

    +
    +

    Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the selected staff member can override permission blocks in cataloging functions. Staff members with this permission must also be allowed to do the restricted functions.

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes.

    +
    +

    Remote automatic authority control

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays the Remote Automatic Authority Control Defaults dialog box where you enable automatic authority control, specify the Z39.50 server and database to search for authority records when no matching records are found in your local database, and specify the length of time (in seconds) to search before timing out.

    +
    +

    +

    +

    Retain deleted authority records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether authority records are retained in the database when they are marked for deletion.

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes.

    +
    +

    Retain deleted bibliographic records +

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether bibliographic records are retained in the database when they are marked for deletion. +

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes

    +
    Retain deleted cataloging record setsSystemEnables the system to retain deleted cataloging record sets.Yes
    +

    Retain deleted item records -

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether item records are retained in the database when they are marked for deletion.

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes.

    +
    +

    Retain deleted record sets

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether cataloging record sets are retained in the database when they are marked for deletion.

    +
    +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes.

    +
    +

    Subfield 9 cleanup utility

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Controls the cleanup utility that deletes processed tags from bibliographic records. Specifies the tags to check for the presence of a $9 and the time period (relative to the day the utility is run) to check.

    +
    +

    No defaults are set.

    +
    Web App: Remote databases: Maximum number of records to returnSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies the maximum number of records to return in the result set for each remote database in Leap.The default is 250. The maximum is 999.
    Web App: Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at onceSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies the maximum number of local or remote databases that you can search at one time in Leap.The default is 10. The maximum is 25.
    Web App: Remote databases: Maximum search time (seconds)System, Library, BranchSpecifies the maximum number of seconds to actively search all selected databases.The default is 30. The maximum is 300.
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Access_the_event_import_profile_manager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Access_the_event_import_profile_manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6665d2e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Access_the_event_import_profile_manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Access the event import profile manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Access the Event Import Profile Manager

    +

    To access the Event Import Profile Manager, select Utilities > Importing > Event Import Profile Manager.

    +

    The Events Import Profile Manager displays the import jobs, if any, in the following columns: Community record name, Enabled, Vendor, Feed URL and Days of events. The default sort for the import jobs is by Community record name, but you can click any column heading to sort the list.

    +

    You can right-click anywhere in the Event Import Profile Manager window and select one of the following options:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_A_Evanced_Mapping_to_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_A_Evanced_Mapping_to_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea7ed63e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_A_Evanced_Mapping_to_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,727 @@ + + + + + + + + + Appendix A: Evanced Mapping to Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Evanced Mapping to Polaris

    +

    Important:
    When the contact information, (contact’s name, phone number, and/or email address) is specified in Evanced or Plymouth Rocket - Events Keeper, that contact information takes precedence over the organization contact information specified in Polaris.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Field in Evanced ClientEvanced XML TagData element in Polaris Staff
    Client
    Data element in Polaris PAC
    +

    Event Title

    +
    +

    <title>

    +
    +

    Event name

    +
    +

    Title

    +
    +

    Event Date

    +
    +

    <date>

    +
    +

    Event date as it appears in catalog

    +
    +

    Event Date / time

    +
    +

    Event Time - Start Time

    +
    +

    <time>

    +
    +

    Event start date (time only)

    +
    +

    Determines sort order when sorting by Event Date

    +
    +

    Event Date Range End (Ongoing Events Only)

    +
    +

    <enddate>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Event Description

    +
    +

    <description>

    +
    +

    Event description

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Location (Room or Space)

    +
    +

    <location>

    +
    +

    Event location (room or meeting area)

    +
    +

    Event Date/Time (appears at end of string)

    +
    +

    Branch (or Library as displayed on Patron/Public Calendar View) – Multi Branch Systems Only

    +
    +

    <library>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Does not Display in Web Interface – URL of Event Details/Registration Page

    +

    (http://...Path of Evanced Events System..../eventsignup.asp?ID=X), where X is the event’s ID

    +
    +

    <link>

    +
    +

    Event website address

    +
    +

    In brief display: link text next to Web Site icon

    +

    In full display: Connect with us drawer

    +
    +

    Does not Display in Web Interface – Event’s ID (In database and URL only)

    +
    +

    <id>

    +
    +

    Internal (use for deduping)

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Recurring Options - Recurrence: ONE TIME Event

    +
    +

    <recordtype>

    +
    +

    Event Type = Event

    +
    +

    Tickets icon,

    +

    Event type of Event in facets dashboard and limit-by selections

    +
    +

    Ongoing Event (for a range of dates)

    +
    +

    <recordtype>

    +
    +

    Event Type = Program/Service

    +
    +

    Briefcase icon,

    +

    Event type of Program or Service in facets / limit-by

    +

     

    +
    +

    Recurring Options - Recurrence: (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Additional Dates)

    +
    +

    <recordtype>

    +
    +

    Event Type = Program/Service

    +
    +

    Briefcase icon,

    +

    Event type of Program or Service in facets / limit-by

    +
    +

    Does not Display in Web Interface – Recurring Event ID (In database and URL Only)

    +
    +

    <RCID/>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Alternate Event Date format

    +
    +

    <date1/>

    +
    +

    Event start date

    +
    +

    Determines sort order when sorting by Event Date

    +
    +

    Another Alternate Event Date format

    +
    +

    <date2/>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Alternate Event Date Range End (Ongoing Events Only)

    +
    +

    <enddate1/>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Event Length (in minutes)

    +
    +

    <length/>

    +
    +

    Event end date (time only)

    +
    +

    Determines sort order when sorting by Event Date

    +
    +

    Not Used

    +
    +

    <status/>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    End Time (Displays on Patron/Public Calendar View)

    +
    +

    <endtime>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Event Type - Primary

    +
    +

    <prieventtype>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    All Three Event Types comma separated

    +
    +

    <eventtypes>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Event Type - Primary

    +
    +

    <eventtype1/>

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Event Type Option 2

    +
    +

    <eventtype2>

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Event Type Option 3

    +
    +

    <eventtype3>

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    All Three Age Groups comma separated

    +
    +

    <agegroups>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Age Group - Primary

    +
    +

    <agegroup1>

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    Age Group - Option 2

    +
    +

    <agegroup2>

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Age Group - Option 3

    +
    +

    <agegroup3>

    +
    +

    Subjects (653$a MARC field)

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Other Info (or Other Information on public/patron View)

    +
    +

    <otherinfo>

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    Feature Event

    +
    +

    <featuredevent>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Presenter

    +
    +

    <presenter>

    +
    +

    Facilitator or presenter note (More info tab)

    +
    +

    Facilitator or presenter note

    +
    +

    Registration (Values: 0= No Registration,1= Patron & Staff Registration, 2= Staff Only Registration)

    +
    +

    <signup>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Starting Registration Date and Time

    +
    +

    <signupstarts>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Ending Registration Date and Time

    +
    +

    <signupends>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Contact Name - Name

    +
    +

    <contactname>

    +
    +

    Contact person

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    Contact Name - Email

    +
    +

    <contactphone>

    +
    +

    Phone number

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    Contact Name - Phone

    +
    +

    <contactemail>

    +
    +

    E-mail address

    +
    +

    E-mail Address

    +
    +

    Link Text

    +
    +

    <linktext>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Link Address (Used to provide event supporting URL)

    +
    +

    <linkaddress>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Optional Image Display Path (Image displays on event’s page)

    +
    +

    <imagepath>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Optional Image Display Path - Alternate Text

    +
    +

    <imagetext>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Optional Image Display Path – Height

    +
    +

    <imageheight>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Optional Image Display Path -Width

    +
    +

    <imagewidth>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    Last Modified (Staff Side Only)

    +
    +

    <lastupdated>

    +
    +

    Internal use

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Not Used

    +
    +

    <extratag>

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +

    NA

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_B_Plymouth_Rocket_-_EventKeeper_mapping_to_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_B_Plymouth_Rocket_-_EventKeeper_mapping_to_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d4887a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Appendix_B_Plymouth_Rocket_-_EventKeeper_mapping_to_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,410 @@ + + + + + + + + Appendix B: Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper mapping to Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper Mapping to Polaris

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Field in Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper ClientXML TagData Element in Polaris Staff ClientData Element in Polaris PAC
    +

    Total number of events in feed (does not display)

    +
    +

    <ek_num_events>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Event Name

    +
    +

    <title>

    +
    +

    Event name

    +
    +

    Title

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    <description>

    +
    +

    Event description

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Start Date, End Date, Event Start Time

    +
    +

    <date>

    +
    +

    Event date as it appears in catalog, Start date

    +
    +

    Event Date / time

    +
    +

    Event Start Time, Event End Time

    +
    +

    <length>

    +
    +

    Event date as it appears in catalog; Event end date

    +
    +

    Event Date / time

    +
    +

    Editor info -- ID

    +
    +

    <id>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Not Available

    +
    +

    <presenter>

    +
    +

    Facilitator or presenter note (More info tab)

    +
    +

    Facilitator or presenter note (More info tab)

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    <link>

    +
    +

    Event website address

    +
    +

    In brief display: link text next to Web Site icon

    +

    In full display: Connect with us drawer

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    <ek_link_text>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Contact Name

    +
    +

    <Contactname>

    +
    +

    Contact person

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    Contact Phone

    +
    +

    <contactphone>

    +
    +

    Phone number

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    Contact Email

    +
    +

    <contactemail>

    +
    +

    E-mail address

    +
    +

    E-mail Address

    +
    +

    Location

    +
    +

    <location>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Event Link [Complete URL] (e.g. http://www.sample.com)

    +
    +

    <ek_evturl_link>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Event Link [Text]

    +
    +

    <ek_evturl_text>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Keyword 1

    +
    +

    <eventtype1>

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Keyword 2

    +
    +

    <eventtype2>

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Not Available

    +
    +

    <eventtype3>

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Not Available

    +
    +

    <agegroup1>

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Not Available

    +
    +

    <agegroup2>

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Not Available

    +
    +

    <agegroup3>

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +

    (653 $a in MARC)

    +
    +

    Modified date

    +
    +

    <lastupdated>

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +

    Does not display

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Create_a_new_events_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Create_a_new_events_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18783fe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Create_a_new_events_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new events import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    +

    Create a New Events Import Profile

    +

    To create a new events import profile for an import job:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Events Import Manager. See Access the event import profile manager.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New.
    4. +
    +

    The Event Import Profile New window opens.

    +

    Note:
    All fields are disabled until you select a Community record.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find to open the Community Record Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Type of organization is selected in the Limit by box with all types selected in the Values box. If you want to limit by a specific type of organization, click on the types you do not want to limit by so that they are not highlighted, and enter the other search criteria.

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the community record for which you want to import events.
    2. +
    +

    The organization name and contact information are copied to the Events Import Profile window.

    +

    Note:
    The Enable Import check box is selected by default.

    +
      +
    1. In the Vendor name box, select the vendor (Evanced events or Plymouth Rocket EventKeeper events).
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you selected Plymouth Rocket EventKeeper, you must get the Events Feed URL from the Admin page of the EventKeeper. You must also enter the number of days of events to import in EventKeeper.

    +
      +
    1. Get the correctly-formatted URL for the vendor:
    2. +
    +

    If you selected Evanced events in the Vendor name box, add the following string to the end of the hostname base path of your calendar URL: eventsxml.asp?dm=exml&lib=YourLibraryNumber

    +

    Tip:
    If your library was not assigned a library number, just use the same URL without the library number:
    http://host5.evanced.info/libraryname/evanced/ eventsxml.asp?dm=exml

    Example:
    http://host5.evanced.info/libraryname/evanced/ eventsxml.asp?dm=exml&lib=6

    In this example, the hostname is:http://host5.evanced.info, the base path is:/libraryname/evanced/, and the library number is: 6.

    +

    +

    If you selected Plymouth Rocket EventKeeper in the Vendor Name box:

    +
    +
      +
    • Contact Plymouth Rocket and request the XML feeds for import into Polaris. Plymouth Rocket confirms the request and creates the feeds.
    • +
    • After Plymouth Rocket creates the feeds, log in to Plymouth Rocket, and select Admin Page.
    • +
    • On the Admin Page, select Edit Flex Feeds .
    • +
    +
    +

    The Flex Feed Manager window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    • Click Select next to the feed.
    • +
    +
    +

    The Flex Feed Editor - Update window opens.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Copy the feed URL.
    • +
    • If you want to change the maximum number of future events to import, type the numbers in the Max Days and Max Events boxes.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Paste or type the correctly-formatted URL for the vendor in the Events feed URL box.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Evanced events in the Vendor name box, select the number of days of future events to import in the Import next [X-Number] days of events box in the Polaris Event Import Profile dialog box. The default value is 90, and you can enter up to 9999.
    4. +
    5. (Optional) In the Event Import Profile window, edit the contact information that was copied from the selected community record. This is the contact information that will be copied to each imported event.
    6. +
    7. Enter the text for the event registration link in Event registration link text box. This is the link text that will appear with the event in the PAC, for example, Event registration or Event calendar. This is the direct URL to the event in the Evanced or Event Keeper interface.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. If the events are located in a specific room, enter the location in the Event location (room or meeting area) box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_an_events_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_an_events_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80aa1a01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_an_events_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete an events import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete an Events Import Profile

    +

    To delete an existing events import profile:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Events Import Manager dialog box. See Access the event import profile manager.
    2. +
    3. Select an events import profile in the list.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Delete.
    6. +
    +

    A confirmation message box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the profile.
    2. +
    +

    A message box asks: Do you wish to remove all previously imported events for this organization?

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes or No.
      • If you select Yes, all events imported for the organization using this profile are deleted.
      • If you select No, the import profile is deleted, but no previously imported events are deleted.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_previously_imported_events_for_a_modified_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_previously_imported_events_for_a_modified_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44e33eda --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Delete_previously_imported_events_for_a_modified_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete previously imported events for a modified profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete previously imported events for a modified profile

    +

    If you want to delete unwanted events that were imported before you changed the events import profile, you can search for the events in the Find Tool and delete them. For example, if the profile previously specified 365 days of events to import, and you changed the profile to import only 30 days of events, you can delete the previously-imported events scheduled to be held beyond the 30 days.

    +

    To delete the unwanted events:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Community from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to open the Find Tool with Community selected in the Object box.
    2. +
    3. Select Power to open the Power Search Criteria box.
    4. +
    5. Enter the following power search string: (PN="Organization Name*") AND (TOOID={4}) AND (BD="Date-1"-"Date 2")
    6. +
    7. Click Search, and the events are listed in the Find Tool results.
    8. +
    9. Multi-select the events, right-click and select Delete.
    10. +
    +

    The selected events are deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Edit_an_events_import_profile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Edit_an_events_import_profile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f92b1c0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Edit_an_events_import_profile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit an events import profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit an Events Import Profile

    +

    To edit an existing events import profile:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Events Import Manager dialog box. See Access the event import profile manager.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the existing event import profile.
    4. +
    +

    The Events Import Profile Editor window opens.

    +
      +
    1. Edit the import profile following the instructions in Create a new events import profile.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot search for and select a different organization for the event import.

    +
      +
    1. Click one of these buttons:
      • Save - Saves the changes to the event import profile.
      • Close - A message box asks if you want to save the changes. Click Yes to save the changes, click No to close the window without saving, or click Cancel to return to the Event Import Profile window.
    2. +
    +

    If you saved the import profile, the next time the API consumer service runs, the system applies the changes to the new events imported for this profile.

    +

    Note:
    If a single event is updated in Evanced or Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper, the corresponding Polaris Event record must be deleted and re-imported, or updated manually.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Importing_Events_for_Community_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Importing_Events_for_Community_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c97b790 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/Importing_Events_for_Community_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Importing Events for Community Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Importing Events for Community Profiles

    +

    You can import library events information from Evanced Solutions or Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper to create event records in the Polaris database. The events import runs once every night as an executable from the Polaris API consumer service.

    +

    Once an event is imported into Polaris, the library can use all the features of Polaris Event records, such as: displaying a carousel of related books from the full display of an event; promoting the event using Feature It; or displaying the event in an exportable calendar widget that can be embedded on any web page or social media page.

    +

    The following system-level Cataloging permissions are assigned to the Administrator’s permission group by default: Event import profile: Access, Create, Modify

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/View_the_Events_Import_Profile_Manager_properties.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/View_the_Events_Import_Profile_Manager_properties.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91571270 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommEventImport/View_the_Events_Import_Profile_Manager_properties.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + View the Events Import Profile Manager properties + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View the Events Import Profile Manager properties

    +

    To view the Events Import Profile Manager properties:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Events Import Manager dialog box. See Access the event import profile manager.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Properties or press F8.
    4. +
    +

    The Properties window opens with the General tab displaying the following information:

    +
    +
      +
    • Profile ID +
    • +
    • Community record name +
    • +
    • Record ID +
    • +
    • Vendor Name +
    • +
    • Days of events +
    • +
    • Feed URL +
    • +
    • Number of events created +
    • +
    • Last import date +
    • +
    • Last import result +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click About to view the About tab, which displays the following information:
      • Creation date
      • Creator
      • Last modified (date)
      • Last modifier
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Close to close the Properties window.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCQL/CQL_Access_Points_for_Community_Information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCQL/CQL_Access_Points_for_Community_Information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5fc84663 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCQL/CQL_Access_Points_for_Community_Information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ + + + + + + + + CQL Access Points for Community Information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    CQL Access Points for Community Information

    +

    This section lists the CQL (Common Query Language) access points you can use to construct custom search filters for Polaris PowerPAC community information searches. For more information about this procedure, see Specify Community Keyword search filters. The CQL search command can include the following parts:

    + +

    Boolean Operators

    +

    The Boolean operators And, Or, and Not combine search terms:

    +
      +
    • And - A record must match both the term before and the term after the operator to be included in the search results.
    • +
    • Or - A record can match either the term before or the term after the operator, or both, to be included in the search results.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    KW=term1 OR KW=term2
    If you have a number of terms to combine with OR, type the command this way:
    KW={list}term1, term2, term3, term4{/list}
    You can insert as many terms as you need between {list} and {/list}

    +
      +
    • Not - A record must match the term before the operator, but not the term after the operator, to be included in the search results.
    • +
    +

    If you use multiple operators in the same search command, use parentheses to group the operations to be performed.

    +

    Search Text That Includes Operators or Special Characters

    +

    To search for text that includes an operator or special characters as part of the search text, put the entire search text in double quotation marks.

    +

    Relative Operators

    +

    Relative operators are symbols that compare search terms:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    SymbolRelative Operation
    +

    =

    +
    +

    Equal to search term

    +
    +

    <>

    +
    +

    Not equal to a single search term: ED <> date1
    For a range of dates, use NOT: NOT ED = date1-date2.

    +
    +

    >=

    +
    +

    Greater than or equal to search term

    +
    +

    >

    +
    +

    Greater than search term

    +
    +

    <=

    +
    +

    Less than or equal to search term

    +
    +

    <

    +
    +

    Less than search term

    +
    +

    Search Access Point (Field) Codes - Community Information

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Access PointDescription
    +

    ADR

    +
    +

    Address and contact person

    +
    +

    CN

    +
    +

    Control number

    +
    +

    KW

    +
    +

    All keyword fields

    +
    +

    NOTE

    +
    +

    Notes

    +
    +

    PC

    +
    +

    Postal code

    +
    +

    PN

    +
    +

    Organization name

    +
    +

    SA

    +
    +

    Services available

    +
    +

    SU

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    TI

    +
    +

    Event name

    +
    +

    TOOID

    +
    +

    Type of organization (TOOID=):

    +

    EVT - Event

    +

    PER - Individual

    +

    ORG - Organization or Club

    +

    OTH - Other

    +

    PRO - Program or service

    +

    SPO - Sponsor or donor

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaign_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaign_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65605dc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaign_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + Campaign Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Campaign Records

    +

    If your library has the required licenses, the Polaris Shortcut Bar displays the Campaigns icon when you select the blue Cataloging orb. The Cataloging menu also lists the Campaigns record type.

    +

    The following permissions are required to work with campaign records: Campaigns: Create, Access, Modify, and Delete.

    +

    The General view of the Campaign workform displays identifying information about the campaign and the period for which it is active.

    +

    In addition to the General view, the Campaign workform has a Demographic Targeting view where you can select languages or locations to target. If this view is set to target specific languages and/or branches, the promotions created by the campaign will have the same languages and/or branches selected.

    +

    Campaign-Created Promotions

    +

    Promotions created by campaigns use a combination of data from the Campaigns workform and community records to generate the required information for the promotion:

    +

    Note: +
    You can use a Cataloging profile in Polaris Administration to limit the number of characters displayed in the headline, midline, and footline fields. See Set truncation for Campaign-generated promotions.

    +
    +
      +
    • The Name field of the promotion includes the campaign type and a unique ID for the promotion.
    • +
    • The owner is inherited from the Owner field on the Campaigns workform.
    • +
    • The Headline comes from the Organization Name field in the Community Record workform or the Event Name in the Event Record workform.
    • +
    • The Midline comes from the Description field in the Community Record workform or the Event Record workform.
    • +
    • The Footline displays the default text for the promotion. If the promotion is for an event, the event type (Event or Program), is displayed. If the promotion type is for a community record, Community Profile is displayed.
    • +
    • The Campaign generated box is checked.
    • +
    +
    +

    The trigger terms displayed on the Triggers view of the Promotion workform are generated automatically based on the calculated importance of the terms in keyword-indexed fields.

    +

    Campaign-Created Promotions in Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    Once a promotion is generated by the system, it appears in the PowerPAC search results when one of the trigger terms is searched. In the example below, the community records are featured because the auto-promotions created for these community records have automatically-generated trigger terms that include homework.

    +

    +  

    +

    If the library has chosen to display promotions, the promotions (campaign-generated and manually-created) that match the search criteria appear even if the user’s search retrieved zero bibliographic or community results.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaigns_for_Community_Promotions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaigns_for_Community_Promotions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06e22a10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Campaigns_for_Community_Promotions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Campaigns for Community Promotions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Campaigns for Community Promotions

    +

    With Polaris Campaigns, libraries can automatically create promotions for existing community or event records, based on terms in the keyword indexed fields in these records. To use Polaris Campaigns, your library must have licenses for Polaris Community Profiles and Polaris Feature It, as well as the separately licensed Polaris Campaigns.

    +

    The Campaign workform is used to specify the campaign’s duration; the organization(s) whose community records will be included in the campaign; and the type of community records (organizations, events, or programs/services) promoted in the campaign. It also provides a source of data for the promotions it will create. For example, promotions created by a campaign inherit the activation/expiration date and the owner fields from the Campaign workform. When the Enabled check box is selected on the Campaign workform, a nightly SQL job creates promotions automatically using the information entered in the workform.

    +

    To create trigger terms for each promotion, the system uses a logarithmic keyword-weighting ratio (based on the total number of terms to the term frequency in the Community information database) to determine the default keyword index weight “threshold.” The threshold is a minimum weight value that a given keyword term in a community record must contain in order to be included in promotion trigger terms. Any community record keywords with a keyword index weight above the system-calculated threshold are included in the trigger terms on a given system-generated promotion for that record.

    +

    See also: Keyword Indexed Fields in Community Records.

    +

    The SQL job for campaigns runs every night before the nightly promotions indexing job, so that new promotions are indexed. Successive runs of the SQL job for campaigns delete all existing campaign-generated promotions created by and linked to the campaign, and create new promotions according to any settings saved to the Campaign workform.

    +

    Note that deleting a campaign-generated promotion does not prevent the system from recreating the promotion during the next overnight run of the SQL job. If you want to prevent a Campaign from creating (or recreating) a promotion for a given community record(s), you can create a promotion manually and include community record(s) you wish to exclude from the campaign.

    +

    Automatic promotions are not created if:

    +
      +
    • An event is expired.
    • +
    • An event or community record does not display in PAC.
    • +
    • A community or event record is already linked to a manually- created promotion record.
    • +
    +

    Libraries with Polaris Campaigns can use a Cataloging profile in Polaris Administration to specify a character limit for the headline, midline, and footline fields of Campaign-generated Promotion records. Staff members require these Cataloging permissions to work with Campaigns: Access, Create, Delete, and Modify permissions for Community Profiles, Promotions, and Campaigns.

    +

    See also: Campaign Records

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Create_a_campaign_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Create_a_campaign_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea034bbd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Create_a_campaign_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a campaign record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Campaign Record

    +

    To create a new campaign record that will automatically generate promotions for community records (organizations), community events, or community programs:

    +

    Note:
    The Campaigns: Create permission is required to create a new Campaign record.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New > Cataloging > Campaign.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also copy an existing Campaign workform. An enabled campaign record cannot be saved with the same name and owner as an existing enabled campaign.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the campaign name in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Select the owner in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The Enabled check box is checked by default, but you can clear the check box to disable the campaign.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of campaign in the Campaign type box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the date when the campaign begins in the Activation date box.
    2. +
    3. Select the date when the campaign ends in the Expiration date box.
    4. +
    5. Specify the community record owners (library organizations) for whom the promotions will be automatically created by selecting All organizations or Only these systems/libraries/branches.
    6. +
    7. If you selected Only these systems/libraries/branches, a list of organizations is displayed. Select the organization(s).
    8. +
    9. +

      If you want the campaign-created promotions to be targeted to specific languages or branches, select View Demographic Targeting or click demotarget.gif, and do the following steps:

      +

      Note:
      If you do not select an option on the Demographic Targeting view, the automatic promotion records created from this campaign will have Target all languages and Target all branches selected.

      +
    10. +
    11. +

      Select one or both of the following options to display the lists:

      +
        +
      • Target only these languages +
      • +
      • Target only these branches +
      • +
      +

      Note:
      The list of languages contains only those languages for which the library has a license from Polaris. +

      +
    12. +
    13. +

      Select the languages and/or branches that you want to target.

      +

      If languages are selected, the featured community records/events appear only when the PAC user has switched the PowerPAC interface to a targeted language (from the Languages tab at the top of the PowerPAC window).

      +

      If branches are selected, the featured resources appear only when the PAC user is connected to one of the targeted branches in PowerPAC.

      +
    14. +
    15. Save the campaign record.
    16. +
    +

    Duplicate Detection

    +

    Duplicate detection is performed only on enabled campaigns (the Enabled box is checked on the Campaigns workform). When you attempt to save the new enabled campaign record, the following error message appears if the new record’s name and organization match an existing enabled campaign record with the same name and organization: Campaign name/owner combination already used.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Delete_a_campaign_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Delete_a_campaign_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc16370f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Delete_a_campaign_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a campaign record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Campaign Record

    +

    When a campaign record is deleted, all the linked campaign-created promotions are deleted.

    +

    To delete a campaign record:

    +

    Note:
    To delete the campaign record, you must have the permission, Campaigns: Delete for the organization that owns the campaign record.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to locate and open the campaign record. See Find a Campaign Record.
    2. +
    +

    The record opens in the Campaign workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Delete.
    2. +
    +

    If the campaign is linked to promotions, a message informs you that the linked promotions will be deleted.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to delete the campaign.
    2. +
    +

    All existing linked promotions created by this campaign are deleted.

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Find_a_campaign_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Find_a_campaign_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf76bcae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Find_a_campaign_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Find a campaign record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find a Campaign Record

    +

    To find an existing Campaign record:

    +

    Note:
    The Campaigns option is displayed in the Cataloging menu only if the library has the Campaigns license enabled.

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Campaigns.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool opens with Campaigns selected.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the search criteria, and click Search.
      • You can search by all keyword fields, campaign name, type, owner or control number.
      • You can limit by all keyword indexed fields, campaign name, owner, or type. When you select Campaign type in the Limit by box, you can select from the following options in the Values box: Community: Organizations, Community: Events, or Community: Programs or services.
    2. +
    +

    The campaign records are displayed in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the campaign record in the list to open the Campaign workform.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To view the promotions linked to a campaign:
      • From the Find Tool, right-click a campaign and select Links > Promotions.
      • From the Campaign workform, select Links > Promotions.
    2. +
    +

    A list box displays the linked promotions.

    +

    + FTlinkedpromo.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click to open the campaign-generated promotion.
    2. +
    +

    If you do not like a campaign-created promotion, or want to add or remove trigger terms, copy the Promotion workform, manually create a new promotion, and delete the campaign-generated one. The next night the Campaigns job runs, it will not create a promotion for that record because the manual promotion always takes precedence.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Modify_a_campaign_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Modify_a_campaign_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..910d25c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Modify_a_campaign_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Modify a campaign record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify a Campaign Record

    +

    When a campaign record is modified, the changes are applied to the campaign-generated promotions the next time the overnight SQL job runs. Each night the Campaigns job deletes all existing campaign-created promotions and then recreates them.

    +

    To modify a campaign record:

    +

    Note:
    To modify the campaign record, you must have the permission, Campaigns: Modify for the organization that owns the campaign record.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to locate and open the campaign record. See Find a Campaign Record.
    2. +

      The record opens in the Campaign workform.

      +
    3. Modify the fields in the workform following the instructions in Create a campaign record.
    4. +
    5. Save the campaign record.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Set_truncation_for_Campaign-generated_promotions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Set_truncation_for_Campaign-generated_promotions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9b8a281 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfCampaigns/Set_truncation_for_Campaign-generated_promotions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Set truncation for Campaign-generated promotions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Truncation for Campaign-Generated Promotions

    +

    This profile limits the number of characters in the headline, midline, and footline fields in Campaigns for Community Promotions .

    +

    To set truncation for Campaign-generated promotions:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System and select the organization (system, library, or branch) in the tree view.
    2. +

      The organization folder expands.

      +
    3. Select Profiles to display the profiles for the organization in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Select the Cataloging tab to display the Cataloging profiles.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Campaigns truncation options.
    8. +

      The Campaign truncation option dialog box opens.

      +
    9. To limit the number of characters in the headline, midline, and footline fields, type a number less than 255 characters (the default and the maximum) in the appropriate box.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Access_ContentXChange.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Access_ContentXChange.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48ab757e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Access_ContentXChange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Access ContentXChange in PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Access ContentXChange in PowerPAC

    +

    To access the ContentXChange tabbed page of your organization’s community record in your library account:

    +
      +
    1. Go to your library catalog, and log into your account.
    2. +
    3. Select My account, Community, and select the community record. The selected community record opens.
    4. +
    5. Select the ContentXChange tabbed page.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Create_a_personalized_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Create_a_personalized_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87b7074d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Create_a_personalized_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a personalized page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Personalized Page

    +

    Use this feature if your organization does not have a website. You create a page from the information you have entered in your organization’s profile, and then submit the page to common search engines so that people can find information about your organization when they search the web.

    +
      +
    1. Go to the ContentXChange page of the organization’s community record. See Access ContentXChange.
    2. +
    3. On the ContentXChange tabbed page, under Personalized page options, click Set Up.
    4. +
    +

    The Set up personalized page options dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type a page name in the Personalized page name box.
    2. +
    +

    This name becomes part of the unique URL (web address) for your page.

    +
      +
    1. Type a page title in the Personalized page title dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    This title is displayed on the browser tab when a web user visits your personalized page.

    +
      +
    1. Check the features to include on your personalized page:
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This feature is available only if the library has enabled Ask Us (PowerPAC profile Navigation: Ask Us set to Yes) and does not require the user to log in (PowerPAC profile Ask us: Require login set to No).

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Web content drawer - Displays a “drawer” on your personalized page containing the web links and social media connections you set up on the Social tab of your organization’s profile. See Embed a Social Connections Drawer in a Web Page.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    To embed a content carousel in your organization’s Web page, a title list or saved search must already be associated with your library account. For information on creating a title list or a saved search associated with your patron account, see PAC online Help.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following steps to embed a content carousel in your organization’s web page:
      •  Select a title list from the Share a title list box.
      • Select a saved search from the Select a saved search box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    +

    The page URL (Web address) is displayed in the code box.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the URL for submission to the search engine or engines, such as Google, Yahoo, or Bing. See Submitting a ContentXChange page to web searches .
    2. +
    3. Click X in the upper right corner of Set up personalized page options dialog box to close it.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save on the ContentXChange tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    Submitting a ContentXChange page to web searches

    +
      +
    • Submitting your page URL to Google - Google uses “spiders” to crawl the web and automatically add sites to Google’s index, so you may not need to submit your page URL. To ask Google to crawl your page URL, go to https://www.google.com/webmasters/tools/submit-url/
    • +
    • Submitting your page URL to Yahoo - Yahoo also regularly crawls the web to update the Yahoo search index. Yahoo also offers several ways to submit web pages and content directly to the Yahoo! Search index and the Yahoo! Directory. For more information, go to
      http://www.search.yahoo.com/info/submit.html
    • +
    • Submitting your page URL to Bing - To ensure your website is included in Bing’s index, you can sign up for a free Bing Webmaster Tools account. For more information, go to
      https://ssl.bing.com/webmaster/SubmitSitePage.aspx
    • +
    +

    Deleting a ContentXChange personalized page

    +

    Click Delete on the ContentXChange page, under Personalized page options.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_content_carousel_in_a_Web_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_content_carousel_in_a_Web_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff1d4b43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_content_carousel_in_a_Web_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + Embed a content carousel in a Web page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Embed a Content Carousel in a Web Page

    +

    You can embed code for a “content carousel,” a rotating graphical representation of selected titles in the library catalog, in your organization’s web page. Before you can create a content carousel, a saved title list or search must be associated with your patron account. For more information on saved searches or title lists, see PowerPAC online Help. When a visitor to your organization’s web page clicks on a title in the content carousel, the selected title information from the librrary catalog is displayed in a separate browser window.

    +

    To add a content carousel to your organization’s web page:

    +
      +
    1. Go to the ContentXChange page of the organization’s community record. See Access ContentXChange.
    2. +
    3. On the ContentXChange tabbed page, under Content Carousel, click Get Code.
    4. +
    +

    The Create a content carousel dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. On the Create a content carousel dialog box, select one of the following options:
      • Click the Select a title list arrow and select a list from those you have saved in your library account.
      • Click Select a saved search and select a search from those you have saved in your patron account.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Get code on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The code snippet is displayed in the HTML code box.

    +

    + +

    +

    You can click Preview to see how the carousel will look.

    +

    Tip:
    You can change the size of the carousel by altering the width and height dimensions in the code.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the code and paste it in your web page.
    2. +
    3. Click X in the upper right corner to close the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Example of a Content Carousel on a Web Page

    +

    A user can click a title to go to that title in the library’s catalog.

    +

    + +

    +

    Changes to title lists and saved searches

    +
      +
    • Automatic updates to carousels - If a title is added to or deleted from a saved title list, the carousel is automatically updated. Carousels for saved searches are automatically updated when the library adds relevant materials to the catalog. The changes are made when the catalog page cache is refreshed. If the user clicks a title that has been deleted from a saved title list, but the catalog page cache has not been refreshed, the search may return 0 results.
    • +
    • Deleted title lists or saved searches - If the entire saved title list or saved search is deleted, the carousel will not appear on your page.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_search_box_in_a_Web_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_search_box_in_a_Web_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd3aa304 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_search_box_in_a_Web_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Embed a Library Catalog Search Box in a Web Page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Embed a Library Catalog Search Box in a Web Page

    +

    To embed a library catalog search box in your organization’s web page:

    +
      +
    1. Go to the ContentXChange page of the organization’s community record. See Access ContentXChange in PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. On the ContentXChange tabbed page, under Library catalog search box, click Get Code.
    4. +
    +

    The Create a library catalog search box dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click Get code on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The code snippet is displayed in the HTML code box.

    +

    + +

    +

    You can click Preview to see how the search box will look.

    +

    Note:
    You can change the size of the search box by altering the width and height dimensions in the code.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the code and paste in your Web page.
    2. +
    3. Click X in the upper right corner of the Create a library search box dialog box to close it.
    4. +
    +

    Example of a search box on a web page

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_social_connections_drawer_in_a_Web_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_social_connections_drawer_in_a_Web_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d8f3f55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_a_social_connections_drawer_in_a_Web_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Embed a social connections drawer in a Web page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Embed a Social Connections Drawer in a Web Page

    +

    To display a “drawer” on the organization’s website containing the web links and social media connections you set up on the Social tab of your organization’s profile:

    +
      +
    1. Go to the ContentXChange page of the organization’s community record. See Access ContentXChange in PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. On the ContentXChange tabbed page, under Content drawer, click Get Code.
    4. +
    +

    The Content drawer dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click Get code on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The code snippet is displayed in the HTML code box.

    +

    + +

    +

    You can click Preview to see how the drawer will look.

    +

    Note:
    You can change the size of the drawer by altering the width and height dimensions in the code.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the code and paste in your web page.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click X in the upper right corner of the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    You can set up another ContentXChange feature, or click another tab to continue to work with this organization record.

    +

    Example of a social connections drawer on a web page

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_ask-a-librarian_link_in_a_Web_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_ask-a-librarian_link_in_a_Web_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83f46db2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_ask-a-librarian_link_in_a_Web_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Embed an ask-a-librarian link in a Web page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Embed an ask-a-librarian link in a web page

    +

    If you embed an Ask-a-Librarian link in your organization’s web page, a visitor to your web page can click the link to send a reference question to the library.

    +

    Note:
    This feature is available only if the library has enabled it and does not require the user to log in to submit a question.

    +

    To place an “Ask a Librarian” link on your organization’s web page:

    +
      +
    1. Go to the ContentXChange page of the organization’s community record. See Access ContentXChange in PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. On the ContentXChange tabbed page, under Ask-a-Librarian link, click Get Code.
    4. +
    +

    The Create an ask-a-librarian link dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click Get code on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The code snippet is displayed in the HTML code box.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the code, and paste it into your web page.
    2. +
    3. Click X in the upper right corner of the Create an ask a librarian link dialog box to close it.
    4. +
    +

    Example of a link on the web page and a question box

    +

    Visitors to your organization’s web page can click the Ask-a-Librarian link.

    +

     contxchASk.gif 

    +

    The visitor can then submit a question to the librarian using the Ask Us box.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_events_calendar_in_a_Web_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_events_calendar_in_a_Web_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..009ff24f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Embed_an_events_calendar_in_a_Web_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Embed an events calendar in a Web page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Embed an Events Calendar in a Web Page

    +

    To display a calendar of events on your organization’s web page:

    +

    Note:
    For information about adding events, see Enter your organization’s events.

    +
      +
    1. Go to the ContentXChange page of the organization’s community record. See Access ContentXChange.
    2. +
    3. Under Community Calendar, click Get Code.
    4. +
    +

    The Create a community calendar dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click Get code on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The code snippet is displayed in the HTML code box.

    +

    You can click Preview to see how the calendar will look.

    +

    Tip:
    You can change the size of the calendar by altering the width and height dimensions in the code.

    +
      +
    1. Copy the code and paste in your Web page.
    2. +
    3. Click X in the upper right corner of the Create a community calendar dialog box to close it.
    4. +
    +

    Example of an events calendar on a web page

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Using_ContentXChange.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Using_ContentXChange.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..504659d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfContXChange/Using_ContentXChange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Using ContentXChange + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using ContentXChange

    +

    ContentXChange provides snippets of code that you can easily embed into your organization’s web page to provide the following:

    +
      +
    • A content carousel (a rotating graphical representation of selected titles in the library catalog) from a title list or saved search on the Social tab of your organization’s community record in the library’s catalog.
    • +
    • A calendar of events from the Events tab of your organization’s community record in the library’s catalog.
    • +
    • Web links and social media connections from the Social tab of your organization’s community record in the library’s catalog.
    • +
    • A Search box to search the library’s catalog.
    • +
    • An Ask Us link to send a question to a librarian.
    • +
    +

    If your organization does not have a web page, you can create a personalized page based on your organization’s library record so that people can find your organization information using web search engines such as Google™, Bing™, or Yahoo®.

    +

    You will be pasting code into your organization’s web page (website, Facebook page, blog, or other online tool where you can embed an iframe). In a separate browser window, log on to your library account in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Administering_ContentXChange.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Administering_ContentXChange.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..634228aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Administering_ContentXChange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Administering ContentXChange + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administering ContentXChange

    +

    With ContentXChange, a designated community organization representative can incorporate pieces of code or “widgets” into their organization’s website to enable the following: a graphical display of selected titles in the library’s catalog; a search box to search the library’s catalog; a box to submit questions to a librarian; a calendar of events for the organization; and content from the community information record.

    +

    If the community organization does not have a website, the Create a personalized page widget offers a way for the organization to establish a web presence so that information about their community organization can be found via an internet search engine. For more information on how designated community organization representatives use these widgets, see Using ContentXChange.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Search_Results_Facets_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Search_Results_Facets_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..430eb7fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Search_Results_Facets_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Community Search Results Facets in Polaris PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community Search Results Facets in Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    Using the Community profile Dashboards: Narrow your search and related searches, you can configure the facets displayed in the dashboard with community information search results. The profile is similar to the PowerPAC profile available for PowerPAC bibliographic search results (see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options), but the available elements apply specifically to community information records.

    +

    As with PowerPAC bibliographic search results, the Narrow your search web part offers links to filter the current search results; the Related searches web part offers links to launch other, related searches.

    +

    + +

    +

    The following elements are available for narrowing community information search results and for related searches:

    +
      +
    • Type of Organization (Narrow your search only)
    • +
    • Organization Name
    • +
    • Services
    • +
    • Subject
    • +
    • Event Date (Narrow your search only)
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Setup_for_PAC_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Setup_for_PAC_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b7cf91b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Community_Setup_for_PAC_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Community Setup for PAC Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community Setup for PAC Display

    +

    Polaris Administration settings control how Community information records are displayed in the Polaris PACs (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC); the default display of community events; the search options available for library users to find community information; and the search facets available for filtering community information. When a staff member creates a community record in the Polaris staff client and the record is set to Display in PAC, the community information will display in the Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC according to these administration settings. Your library can also customize PAC text and messages related to Community Profiles using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). For instructions, see the Polaris Language Editor Guide or Language Editor online Help.

    +

    After creating a Community Information record, the staff member can designate anyone with a patron account as the community representative. Then, that designated representative can log into their account in Polaris PowerPAC and edit the organization record. See Designate a Community Representative.

    +

    Then the representative edits their community organization's information from their PAC account. See Editing Community Records in PAC. Since these instructions are based on the default PAC interface, they may require modifications if your PAC interface is customized.

    +

    If your library also offers the Polaris ContentXChange feature, see Administering ContentXChange for information regarding the library setup. See Using ContentXChange for instructions the organization representative uses to incorporate ContentXChange features into their organization’s website.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Configuring_the_PAC_Community_Results_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Configuring_the_PAC_Community_Results_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8aa8672b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Configuring_the_PAC_Community_Results_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Configuring the PAC Community Results Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring the PAC Community Results Display

    +

    You can specify the information displayed for entries in community search results in the brief and full display for Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, much as you configure the title display for bibliographic searches in these applications. The community information display is configured separately for Polaris PowePAC and Mobile PAC, but the procedure is the same for both profiles.

    +

    In addition, you can specify the default display for community events in the PAC, provided the web server is set up for ContentXChange. See Using ContentXChange.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_a_community_information_entity_definition.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_a_community_information_entity_definition.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a51fc01e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_a_community_information_entity_definition.htm @@ -0,0 +1,3140 @@ + + + + + + + + Edit a community information entity definition + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit a Community Information Entity Definition

    +

    At the system level, you can edit the definitions (tags, indicators, subfields) of certain community information display entities. The following entities cannot be edited:

    +
      +
    • Primary Name (Short)
    • +
    • Snippet
    • +
    • Control Number
    • +
    • Expiration Date
    • +
    • Geographic Coordinates (sub-entities can be edited)
    • +
    • Primary Address (Long) (sub-entities can be edited)
    • +
    • Secondary Address (Long) (sub-entities can be edited)
    • +
    • Type of Organization
    • +
    +

    To edit entities for display in PAC search results:

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Modify and create display entities: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system organization, and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Community Information (PowerPAC): Configure or Community Information (Mobile PAC): Configure.
    4. +

      Important:
      Regardless of which profile you choose, your edited definition will be applied system-wide for both PAC applications.

      +

      The Community Information Display: Configure dialog box opens.

      +
    5. Right-click the entity in the Available entities list and select Properties from the context menu.
    6. +

      Note:
      To display an entity for selection, you may need to click the Browse icon TitleDisplayBrwsIcon00259.gif at the top of the Available entities list. Select the entity in the Browse Entities dialog box and click Reveal to add the entity to the Available entities list.

      +

      The Entity Properties dialog box opens.

      +
    7. On the Entity Properties dialog box, click Define Entity.
    8. +

      The Entity Definition dialog box opens.

      +

      + CommInfoDispEntDef.gif 

      +
    9. To add a new tag to the entity, click the ellipsis button in the Tags column.
    10. +

      + EntDefTags.gif +

      +

      The Tag Picker dialog box opens.

      +

      + TitleDisplayTagPckr.gif 

      +
    11. Select a tag or multiple tags:
      • To select one tag, click it in the grid, and then click Enable.
      • To select a contiguous range of tags, enter the beginning and ending tags in the Select range box, and click the + button to highlight the tags in the grid. Then click Enable.
      • To select a non-contiguous set of tags, press CTRL+click to select the tags in the grid, and then click Enable.
      • To save your changes and close the Tag Picker dialog box, click OK.
    12. +

      The Entity Definition dialog box is displayed.

      +
    13. To select indicator values, click the ellipsis button in the Ind1 or Ind2 column.
    14. +

      The Code Picker dialog box opens.

      +
    15. Select an indicator value or multiple indicator values:
      • To select an indicator value, click it in the grid, and then click Enable.
    16. +

      Tip:
      The dot character in the upper left corner of the Code Picker grid indicates a space.

      +
        +
      • To select a contiguous range of indicator values, enter the beginning and ending values in the Select range box, and click the + button to highlight the values in the grid. Then click Enable.
      • +
      • To select a non-contiguous set of values, press CTRL+click to select the values in the grid, and then click Enable.
      • +
      • To save your changes and close the Code Picker dialog box, click OK.
      • +
      +

      The Entity Definition dialog box is displayed.

      +
    17. To select subfields, click the ellipsis button in the Subfields column to display the Code Picker dialog box, and follow the same steps you used to select the indicator values. See step 8.
    18. +
    19. When all the tags, indicators and subfields are defined for the entity, click Apply to permanently save your work and keep the Entity Definition dialog open, or click OK to permanently save your work and close the dialog box.
    20. +
    21. Use the Change Labels dialog box to edit labels. See Select community elements for display in PAC.
    22. +
    +

    PowerPAC Results Displays - Community Information

    +

    You can configure community information for the brief, full, and summary displays. The brief display is the information shown in the initial search results. The user hovers the cursor over the logo image (desktop and tablet) or taps the logo image (phone) to see the summary display, and clicks or taps the name to see the full display for the entry.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    The tables show the default community information display configuration for PowerPAC search results.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    PowerPAC Brief Display - EventPowerPAC Brief Display - OrganizationPowerPAC Brief Display - Program or Service
    EntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabel
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Telephone Number (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Telephone:

    +
    +

    Primary Telephone Number (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Telephone:

    +
    +

    Primary Telephone Number (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Telephone:

    +
    +

    Primary TTY Number (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    Primary TTY Number (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    Primary TTY Number (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    Primary Email Address (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Primary Email Address (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Primary Email Address (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    PowerPAC Summary Display - EventPowerPAC Summary Display - OrganizationPowerPAC Summary Display - Program or Service
    EntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabel
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Telephone Number (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Telephone:

    +
    +

    Primary Telephone Number (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Telephone:

    +
    +

    Primary Telephone Number (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Telephone:

    +
    +

    Primary TTY Number (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    Primary TTY Number (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    Primary TTY Number (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    Primary Email Address (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Primary Email Address (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Primary Email Address (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    PowerPAC Full Display - EventPowerPAC Full Display - OrganizationPowerPAC Full Display - Program or Service
    EntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabel
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Secondary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Secondary Address:

    +
    +

    Secondary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Secondary Address:

    +
    +

    Secondary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Secondary Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    Target Group:

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    Target Group:

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    Target Group:

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note:

    +
    Facilitator or Presenter Note +

    21

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note:

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note:

    +
    +

    Programs Note

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Programs:

    +
    +

    Programs Note

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Programs:

    +
    +

    Programs Note

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Programs:

    +
    +

    Language Note

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    Languages other than English:

    +
    +

    Language Note

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    Languages other than English:

    +
    +

    Language Note

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    Languages other than English:

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    Note

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    Accommodations for Disabled:

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    Note

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    for Disabled:

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    Note

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    Accommodations for Disabled:

    +
    +

    Transportation Note

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Transportation and Directions:

    +
    +

    Transportation Note

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Transportation and Directions:

    +
    +

    Transportation Note

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Transportation and Directions:

    +
    +

    Eligibility

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    Eligibility:

    +
    +

    Eligibility

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    Eligibility:

    +
    +

    Eligibility

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    Eligibility:

    +
    +

    Fees

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Fees:

    +
    +

    Fees

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Fees:

    +
    +

    Fees

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Fees:

    +
    +

    Areas Served

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Areas Served:

    +
    +

    Areas Served

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Areas Served:

    +
    +

    Areas Served

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Areas Served:

    +
    +

    Budget

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Budget:

    +
    +

    Budget

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Budget:

    +
    +

    Budget

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Budget:

    +
    +

    Affiliations

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Affiliations:

    +
    +

    Affiliations

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Affiliations:

    +
    +

    Affiliations

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Affiliations:

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held:

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held:

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held:

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    32

    +
    +

    General Notes:

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    32

    +
    +

    General Notes:

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    32

    +
    +

    General Notes:

    +
    +

    Services Available

    +
    +

    33

    +
    +

    Services Available:

    +
    +

    Services Available

    +
    +

    33

    +
    +

    Services Available:

    +
    +

    Services Available

    +
    +

    33

    +
    +

    Services Available:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    34

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    34

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    34

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Related Organizations

    +
    +

    35

    +
    +

    Related Organizations:

    +
    +

    Related Organizations

    +
    +

    35

    +
    +

    Related Organizations:

    +
    +

    Related Organizations

    +
    +

    35

    +
    +

    Related Organizations:

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note

    +
    +

    36

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note:

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note

    +
    +

    36

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note:

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note

    +
    +

    36

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note:

    +
    +

    Publications Note

    +
    +

    37

    +
    +

    Publications Note:

    +
    +

    Publications Note

    +
    +

    37

    +
    +

    Publications Note:

    +
    +

    Publications Note

    +
    +

    37

    +
    +

    Publications Note:

    +
    +

    Mobile PAC Results Displays - Community Information

    +

    Like PowerPAC, you can configure community information for the brief, full, and summary displays in Mobile PAC. The brief display is the information shown in the initial search results. The summary view is displayed on the Mobile PAC product page for the entry, and the full view is displayed when the user clicks Details on the product page.

    +

    + MobileBrief.gif 

    +

    The tables show the default community information display configuration for Mobile PAC search results.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Mobile PAC Brief Display - EventMobile PAC Brief Display - OrganizationMobile PAC Brief Display - Program or Service
    EntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabel
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Mobile PAC Summary Display - EventMobile PAC Summary Display - OrganizationMobile PAC Summary Display - Program or Service
    EntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabel
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Mobile PAC Full Display - EventMobile PAC Full Display - OrganizationMobile PAC Full Display - Program or Service
    EntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabelEntityDisplay OrderLabel
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Primary Name (Short)

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Primary Name:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Hours

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Hours:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Primary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Primary Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Secondary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Secondary Address:

    +
    +

    Secondary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Secondary Address:

    +
    +

    Secondary Address (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Secondary Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    Street Address

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Street Address:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    City, State, Zip:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Contact

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Contact:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    Telephone Number

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Phone:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    TTY Number

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    TTY:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    FAX Number

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    FAX:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Email Address

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    E-mail:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    Target Group:

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    Target Group:

    +
    +

    Target Group

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    Target Group:

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note:

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note:

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    Facilitator or Presenter Note:

    +
    +

    Programs Note

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Programs:

    +
    +

    Programs Note

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Programs:

    +
    +

    Programs Note

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Programs:

    +
    +

    Language Note

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    Languages other than English:

    +
    +

    Language Note

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    Languages other than English:

    +
    +

    Language Note

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    Languages other than English:

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    Note

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    Accommodations for Disabled:

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    Note

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    Accommodations for Disabled:

    +
    +

    Accommodations
    Note

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    Accommodations for Disabled:

    +
    +

    Transportation Note

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Transportation and Directions:

    +
    +

    Transportation Note

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Transportation and Directions:

    +
    +

    Transportation Note

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Transportation and Directions:

    +
    +

    Eligibility

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    Eligibility:

    +
    +

    Eligibility

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    Eligibility:

    +
    +

    Eligibility

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    Eligibility:

    +
    +

    Fees

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Fees:

    +
    +

    Fees

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Fees:

    +
    +

    Fees

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Fees:

    +
    +

    Areas Served

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Areas Served:

    +
    +

    Areas Served

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Areas Served:

    +
    +

    Areas Served

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Areas Served:

    +
    +

    Budget

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Budget:

    +
    +

    Budget

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Budget:

    +
    +

    Budget

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Budget:

    +
    +

    Affiliations

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Affiliations:

    +
    +

    Affiliations

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Affiliations:

    +
    +

    Affiliations

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Affiliations:

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held:

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held:

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Licenses or Accreditations Held:

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    32

    +
    +

    General Notes:

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    32

    +
    +

    General Notes:

    +
    +

    General Notes

    +
    +

    32

    +
    +

    General Notes:

    +
    +

    Services Available

    +
    +

    33

    +
    +

    Services Available:

    +
    +

    Services Available

    +
    +

    33

    +
    +

    Services Available:

    +
    +

    Services Available

    +
    +

    33

    +
    +

    Services Available:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    34

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    34

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    34

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Related Organizations

    +
    +

    35

    +
    +

    Related Organizations:

    +
    +

    Related Organizations

    +
    +

    35

    +
    +

    Related Organizations:

    +
    +

    Related Organizations

    +
    +

    35

    +
    +

    Related Organizations:

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note

    +
    +

    36

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note:

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note

    +
    +

    36

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note:

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note

    +
    +

    36

    +
    +

    Volunteers Note:

    +
    +

    Publications Note

    +
    +

    37

    +
    +

    Publications Note:

    +
    +

    Publications Note

    +
    +

    37

    +
    +

    Publications Note:

    +
    +

    Publications Note

    +
    +

    37

    +
    +

    Publications Note:

    +
    +

    See also: Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_community_information_display_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_community_information_display_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad78883e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Edit_community_information_display_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Edit community information display order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Community Information Display Order

    +

    The data elements that have been selected for display in the current configuration view can be organized into logical visual “zones” by inserting zone separators (white space). You can also set the display order for the selected entities. Follow these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Open the appropriate Community Information Display Configure dialog box if it not already open, and select the view you want to arrange. See Select community elements for display in PAC.
    2. +
    3. To insert a zone separator:
      1. In the Display these entities list, select the entity that should appear just below the new zone separator.
      2. Right-click and select Create Zone from the context menu, or click the Create Zone icon TitleDisplayCreateZoneIcon.gif at the top of the Display these entities list.
    4. +
    5. To remove an existing zone separator, select it, right- click and select Drop Zone from the context menu, or click the Drop Zone icon TitleDisplayDrZnIcon.gif.
    6. +
    7. To change the order in which the entities and zone separators are displayed, select the entity or zone separator and click the up or down arrow buttons at the top of the Display these entities list.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. To suppress the field label (but not the data element itself) from the PAC display, select the data element in the Display these entities list, right-click, and select Show/Hide Label from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    In the Display these entities list, the label icon TitleDisplayLblIcon.gif indicates that the label is currently set to be shown.

    +
      +
    1. Save or cancel your work in the Community Information Display Configure dialog box:
      • To remove any changes that have not been applied and close the Community Information Configure dialog box, click Cancel.
      • To remove any changes that have not been applied and keep the Community Information Configure dialog box open, click Reset.
      • To permanently save changes and keep the Community Information Display Configure dialog box open, click Apply.
      • To permanently save changes and close the Community Information Configure dialog box, click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    After saving your changes, use Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to reload PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. Users may also need to clear their browser caches.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Multilingual_Supp_for_Dashboard_Titles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Multilingual_Supp_for_Dashboard_Titles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ab4d817 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Multilingual_Supp_for_Dashboard_Titles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Multilingual Support for Dashboard Titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Multilingual Support for Dashboard Titles

    +

    If your library is licensed for additional languages in the PAC, you can view dashboard labels in a language other than English, and the labels can be customized. Labels can appear in the language the user selects if the database contains the appropriate translation.

    +

    Two dashboard types can be configured: Polaris PowerPAC dashboards and customer-defined dashboards. The following sections describe how to customize each dashboard.

    +

    Customize the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard

    +

    Each of the Polaris-defined dashboards have a system-assigned mnemonic that can be used to edit the dashboard’s default title. You can view a dashboard’s mnemonic in the properties box that opens when the dashboard label is double clicked.

    +

    + +

    +

    To change a mnemonic, edit the strings associated with that mnemonic in WebAdmin.

    +

    Some dashboards are not listed. They already have mnemonics that allow them to be customized in WebAdmin.

    +

    Customize a customer-defined dashboard

    +

    You can associate a multilingual mnemonic with user-defined dashboard labels.

    +

    When creating a new user-defined dashboard, specify a mnemonic along with a default title. Mnemonics should not contain spaces.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • Mnemonics are optional. If multiple languages are not used in PowerPAC, a mnemonic does not need to be specified during dashboard creation. The dashboard title will only display what is entered in the dialog box “Title” field.
    • +
    • A mnemonic is only specified when creating a dashboard. To add a mnemonic to an existing user-defined dashboard, the old dashboard must be deleted and a new one created. When the new dashboard is created, a mnemonic can be specified.
    • +
    +

    Strings for each language are created automatically with the title specified as the default display value for the mnemonic. The title label can then be edited for each language using the mnemonic in WebAdmin.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Select_community_elements_for_display_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Select_community_elements_for_display_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..384c6a63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Select_community_elements_for_display_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + + Select community elements for display in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Select Community Elements for Display in PAC

    +

    To select elements (entities) for display and edit their labels for PowerPAC or Mobile PAC community information search results:

    +

    Note:
    You need the System Administration permission Modify community record title displays: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + comminfoconfig.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure or Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure.
    2. +
    +

    The Community Information Display: Configure dialog box opens.

    +

    + CommInfoDisplayConfig.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the view you want to configure from the Configuration view menu.
    2. +
    +

    You can configure separate displays for organizations, programs or services, and events. For descriptions of brief, summary, and full views, see PowerPAC Results Displays - Community Information  and Mobile PAC Results Displays - Community Information.

    +

    + CommInfoConfigLeft.gif 

    +

    The Available entities list on the left side of the dialog box displays the elements that can be added to a view.

    +

    Note:
    With the appropriate permission, you can edit the definition of an entity (system level only). See Edit a community information entity definition.

    +

    + CommInfoConfigAvail.gif 

    +

    The Display these entities list on the right side of the dialog box lists those elements that are currently selected for the configuration view.

    +

    + CommInfoConfigDisplay.gif 

    +

    “Short” entities are not repeatable for a single view. “Long” entities are repeatable within a single view. You can double-click the edge of a column header to expand the column and display the full text if necessary.

    +
      +
    1. To see the tags, indicators and subfields that are included in an entity, use one of these methods:
      • Hover the cursor over the entity for a quick read-only display.
      • Right-click the entity and select Properties on the context menu.
      • Select the entity and click the Properties icon PropIcon.gif above the list.
    2. +
    +

    The Entity Properties dialog box opens.

    +

    + CommInfoConfigEntPropr.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To add a data element to the view, click the data element in the Available entities list, then click Add.
    2. +
    +

    + CommInfoDisplayAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To remove a data element from the view, click the data element in the Display these entities list, then click Remove.
    2. +
    +

    + CommInfoDispRemove.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If the Available Entities or Display these entities list does not include the data element you want to display, follow these steps:
      1. Click the Browse icon TitleDisplayBrwsIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities list.
    2. +
    +

    The Browse Entities dialog box opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Browse Entities dialog box, select the element you want to add to the Available entities list.
    2. +
    +
    +

    You can hover the cursor over an entity to see its properties.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Reveal.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The element now appears in the Available entities list and can be selected for display.

    +

    Note:
    You can shorten the Available entries list to reduce scrolling. Select the entity that you want to remove, right-click and select Suppress from the context menu, or click the Suppress icon TitleDisplaySuppressIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities list. To add an entry back to the list, repeat steps a-c.

    +
      +
    1. To edit the default English label for an entity, and to enter or change the labels for other languages, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also edit the labels using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The Mnemonic field at the top of the Change Labels dialog box displays the language string ID for the entity’s label. In Polaris Language Editor, select the ERMSPortal “product” to edit entity labels. For more information about using Polaris Language Editor, see the online Help for Polaris Language Editor.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Right-click the entity in the Available entities or the Display these entities list, and select Labels from the context menu, select Edit Labels from the Entity Properties dialog box, or click the Change Labels icon TitleDisplayChangeLabelsIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities or Display these entities list.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Change Labels dialog opens for the entity you selected.

    +
    +
      +
    1. On the Change Labels dialog box, click the language you want to edit.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To customize the label, click the Customize option and then enter your text.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    To enter diacritics or non-Latin characters, press and hold ALT while typing the code on the numeric keypad.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To permanently save your changes and close the dialog box, click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Save or cancel your work in the Community Information Display Configure dialog box:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    After saving your changes, use Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to reload PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. Users may also need to clear their browser caches.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Revert to parent organization settings - After making changes to the Community Information Configure dialog box at the branch or library level, you can revert to the parent-level settings. Click Revert on the Community Information Configure dialog box. Only the currently-selected configuration view is inherited from the parent organization. If you make changes after clicking Revert, then inheritance is broken and you will no longer inherit settings from the higher organization.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you click Revert, all branch-level configuration settings are lost. The action cannot be undone.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_PAC_community_information_search_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_PAC_community_information_search_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a7170ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_PAC_community_information_search_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + + + Set PAC community information search options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set PAC community information search options

    +

    All these options are available at the system, library, or branch level. The system uses the settings of the PAC connection organization; that is, the system, library, or branch specified in the PowerPAC Switch branches list or the Mobile PAC preferences page.

    +

    To set the PAC navigation and search options for community records:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To display the Community option on the Polaris PowerPAC menu bar, set Navigation (PowerPAC): Community to Yes.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Set Community search options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To display the Community Browse search option on the Polaris PowerPAC Community menu, set Navigation (PowerPAC): Community - Browse Search to Yes.
    • +
    • To display the Community Keyword search option on the Polaris PowerPAC Community menu, set Navigation (PowerPAC): Community - Keyword Search to Yes.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • To display the Community Keyword search option in Mobile PAC, set Navigation (Mobile PAC): Community - Keyword Search to Yes.
    • +
    +

    + CommSearchMobile.gif 

    +

    This setting also displays the option on the Mobile PAC Preferences page.

    +

    + CommMobilePrefs.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you have enabled Community Keyword searches, double-click Search Settings Defaults to specify the default keyword search settings:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Your keyword search settings also apply to Mobile PAC.

    +
    +
      +
    • On the Keyword tabbed page, set the default Search by (access point) option. Users can keyword-search community information by Any Field, Organization Name, Event Name, Services, Subject, Address and contact person, Postal code, or Notes. These options look for information in the corresponding fields of community records. Your setting simply determines the default choice.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Set the default Limit by (search filter) option. Users can limit their keyword community searches by All types (no filter), Organizations or Clubs, Events, Programs or services, People, Sponsor or donor, Other.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can change the display names of Limit by options, set their display order, suppress them from display, and set your own custom filters. See Specify Community Keyword Search Filters.

    +
      +
    • Set the default Sort by option. Users can sort their keyword community search results by Relevance, Organization Name, Type of Organization, Event Name, Event Date (earliest first), or Event Date (latest first).
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. If you have enabled Community Browse searches, double-click Search Settings Defaults to specify the default browse search settings:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Browse searches are not available in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +
      +
    • On the Browse tabbed page, set the default Search by option. Users can browse-search community information indexes by Organization Name, Event Name, Services, or Subject.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Select a sort option for Primary Name (heading) results. The options are Relevance, Organization Name, Event Name, Event date (earliest first), and Event date (latest first). These options are not displayed to PAC users, so your choice applies to all community browse searches.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To allow designated patrons to access specific organization records for editing, set Navigation (PowerPAC): My Community Profile to Yes. This setting displays a Community option on the My Account menu when the authorized patron is logged in.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    +

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Number of days to display an event after end date - Use the Community profile Days to continue showing event in PAC after event end date to specify a default number of days for how long an event should continue to appear in a user’s search results after the event end date. (Your default setting can be edited in the staff client or PAC editor for a specific event.)
    • +
    • Community records in the staff client - See Creating or Editing a Community Record in the Staff Client.
    • +
    • Designating organization representatives - Designated patrons can edit information for their organizations in Polaris PowerPAC. See Designate a community representative.
    • +
    • Community record updates in PAC - See Editing Community Records in PAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Narrow_Your_Search_Web_Part.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Narrow_Your_Search_Web_Part.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9978a311 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Narrow_Your_Search_Web_Part.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Set Up the Narrow Your Search Web Part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up the Narrow Your Search Web Part

    +

    To set up the Narrow Your Search web part for community information search results:

    +

    Note:
    You save your settings separately for the Narrow your search and Related web parts, and they are inherited separately. For example, your branch may set its own elements for the Narrow part, but inherit the system settings for the Related web part. Once you change the settings at the branch level, the branch no longer inherits the system settings.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches.
    4. +
    +

    The Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches dialog box opens to the Narrow Your Search tabbed page.

    +

    Settings on this tabbed page control whether the Narrow your search web part is displayed, and what elements will be available for filtering search results. If at least one element is set to display (set to Yes), the Narrow your search web part label can be displayed in the dashboard.

    +

    Note:
    Confirm that the first element in the list, DASHBOARD, is set to Yes in the Display column. This element represents the web part itself, and if it is set to No, the entire Narrow web part is suppressed. To set the display, see step 3.

    +
      +
    1. To modify the display of a Narrow element, select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element.
    2. +
    +

    The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Narrow) dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To display the element in the Narrow your search web part, select (check) Display the element.
    2. +
    3. To display the element’s links when the search results page appears, select (check) Show initially expanded.
    4. +
    +

    By default, all elements are set to display as initially expanded.

    +

    Note:
    To minimize the need to scroll the PAC search results page, you may want to consider displaying some or all elements as initially unexpanded. The user can choose to expand any element that is unexpanded.

    +
      +
    1. To change the minimum and maximum number of links that can be displayed for the element, select or type the numbers in the Minimum to show and Maximum to show boxes.
    2. +
    +

    The default values are 5 minimum, 5 maximum. The maximum number of links that can be displayed for one element is 99.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the default English label for the element, type the text in the Label box. The maximum number of characters is 50.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Narrow) dialog box closes.

    +
      +
    1. To change the order in which elements are displayed, select each element and click the up or down arrow icon until these elements are listed in the order you want them.
    2. +
    +

    Tips:
    Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. The web part label is always displayed at the top of the list, before the individual elements.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Save icon  to save your settings on the Narrow Your Search tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    If you have set DASHBOARD (the first element in the list) to be displayed without setting any other elements to be displayed, you see an error message. At least one element within the Narrow web part must be set for display in order to display the web part itself.

    +

    Note:
    To see your changes in PowerPAC, use the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) Reload tool to reload PowerPAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Related_Searches_Web_Part.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Related_Searches_Web_Part.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..306ac2b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_Up_the_Related_Searches_Web_Part.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Set Up the Related Searches Web Part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up the Related Searches Web Part

    +

    To set up the Related Searches web part for community information search results:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches.
    4. +
    +

    The Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Related Searches tab.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Confirm that the first element in the list, DASHBOARD, is set to Yes in the Display column. This element represents the web part itself, and if it is set to No, the entire Related Searches web part is suppressed. To set the display, see step 3.

    +
      +
    1. To modify the display of a Related element, select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element.
    2. +
    +

    The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Related) dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To display the element in the Related searches web part, select (check) Display the element.
    2. +
    3. To display the element’s links when the search results page appears, select (check) Show initially expanded.
    4. +
    +

    By default, all elements are set to display as initially expanded.

    +
      +
    1. To change the minimum and maximum number of links that can be displayed for the element, select or type the numbers in the Minimum to show and Maximum to show boxes.
    2. +
    +

    The default values are 5 minimum, 5 maximum. The maximum number of links that can be displayed for one element is 99.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the default English label for the element, type the text in the Label box. The maximum number of characters is 50.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Related) dialog box closes.

    +
      +
    1. To change the order in which elements are displayed, select each element and click the up or down arrow icon until these elements are listed in the order you want them.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. The web part label is always displayed at the top of the list, before the individual elements.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Save icon  to save your settings on the Related Searches tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    If you have set DASHBOARD (the first element in the list) to be displayed without setting any other elements to be displayed, you see a message. At least one element within the Related web part must be set for display in order to display the web part itself.

    +

    Tip:
    To see your changes in PowerPAC, use the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) Reload tool to reload PowerPAC.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Translate Labels for Narrow/Related Web Parts (Community) +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_the_default_display_of_Community_Events.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_the_default_display_of_Community_Events.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eda5410a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_the_default_display_of_Community_Events.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Set the default display of Community Events + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the default display of community events

    +

    If the ContentXChange URL is defined in the Server administration parameter, URL of the ContentXChange root, you can specify the default display of Community events as a calendar or a list view. See Set up the Web Server for ContentXChange and Carousel Toolkit. If ContentXChange is not defined in the server parameter, events are displayed in a list. PAC users can change the default setting by selecting View as a list or View as a calendar.

    +

    To set the default display of community events in the PAC:

    +

    Note:
    This setting does not affect ContentXChange calendar widgets, which always display community events in a calendar view.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, library, or branch and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Select Default view of events in PowerPAC > View as a calendar or View as a list.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_Ask_Us_without_a_log_in_requirement.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_Ask_Us_without_a_log_in_requirement.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ade2b167 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_Ask_Us_without_a_log_in_requirement.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up Ask Us without a log in requirement + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Ask Us Without a Log in Requirement

    +

    If the organization includes the Ask Us feature on their website, a visitor to the website can send a question to the library. The visitor may or may not be a library patron; therefore, the Ask Us feature should be set up without requiring a patron logon. The ContentXChange Ask Us widget uses the Ask Us settings for the organization specified in the ContentXChange widgets link to: box on the Community Record workform. See Enter Basic Community Information in the Staff Client.

    +

    To set up the Ask Us feature without requiring a log in:

    +
      +
    1. After enabling the Ask Us feature, double-click Ask Us: Require Login profile on the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC tab, and set the value to No.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_the_Web_Server_for_ContentXChange.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_the_Web_Server_for_ContentXChange.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3519414 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Set_up_the_Web_Server_for_ContentXChange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up the Web Server for ContentXChange + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the Web Server for ContentXChange and Carousel Toolkit

    +

    To set up the web server for ContentXChange and the Carousel toolkit:

    +

    Note:
    The ContentXChange/Carousel Toolkit component must be selected when the Polaris web server software is installed. Polaris Support assists libraries with this process. For more information about Carousel Toolkit features and setup, see Carousel Toolkit.

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate server in Polaris Administration, and select Parameters.
    2. +
    3. In the URL of the ContentXChange/Carousel Toolkit root server parameter, enter the URL of the server where ContentXChange is installed: http://<servername>/ContentXChange/
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Setting_Community_Search_Options_for_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Setting_Community_Search_Options_for_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d826419 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Setting_Community_Search_Options_for_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Community Search Options for PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Community Search Options for PAC

    +

    You can use Polaris Administration settings to specify the search types, filters, and sort order for community information in the PAC. In addition, you can specify which community search transactions are logged for statistical purposes.

    +

    Community Keyword searches are available in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, and Community Browse searches are available in Polaris PowerPAC. Like bibliographic PAC searches, you can set up default values for Community Keyword and Community Browse search settings.

    +

    Users can also select a Limit by option to filter Community Keyword searches, similar to other types of PAC searches. In Polaris Administration, you can enable specific Community Keyword search filters, specify custom Limit by filters, and specify the display order of Limit by options.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Share_a_community_information_display_configuration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Share_a_community_information_display_configuration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12f9f1c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Share_a_community_information_display_configuration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + Share a community information display configuration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Share a Community Information Display Configuration

    +

    After you have configured community information display views, you can copy your settings to other organizations.

    +

    To copy and share a community information display configuration:

    +
      +
    1. Open the appropriate Community Information Display Configure dialog box if it not already open, and select the view you want to copy. See Select Community Elements for Display in PAC.
    2. +
    +

    If the appropriate Community Information Display Configure dialog box is already open and you have been making changes, click Apply to save your changes.

    +
      +
    1. Click Copy.
    2. +
    +

    The Copy: Community Information Display dialog box opens.

    +

    + CommInfoDispCopy.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the configuration views you want to copy.
    2. +
    3. Select the organizations that should receive your settings.
    4. +
    5. Click Copy.
    6. +
    +

    Important:
    The copy action takes place immediately. The action cannot be undone.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_Community_Keyword_search_filters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_Community_Keyword_search_filters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5875f59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_Community_Keyword_search_filters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify Community Keyword search filters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Community Keyword Search Filters

    +

    To enable system-supplied filters for the Community Keyword Limit by list in Polaris PowerPAC, set up custom filters, and order the options in the Community Keyword Limit by list:

    +

    Note:
    You need the System Administration permission Modify PAC Community limit by display table: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select PAC Community Limit by Display.
    2. +
    +

    The PAC Community Limit by Display table appears in the details view.

    +
      +
    1. To work with a standard Limit by option, follow these steps:
      1. Select the option and click .
    2. +
    +

    The Modify PAC Community Limit by Display dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. To change the name of the option as it is displayed in PAC, type the new name in the Description box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This setting affects only the names as listed in the PAC Community Keyword Limit by list. The underlying filter does not change.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To display or suppress the filter in the PAC Community Keyword Limit by list, select Yes (display) or No (suppress) in the Enabled box. Set all the table entries to No to suppress the Limit by list from display.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Modify PAC Community Limit by Display dialog box closes, and the table displays your changes.

    +
      +
    1. To set up a custom filter, follow these steps:
      1. Click btnInsert.gif in the PAC Community Limit By Display table.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert PAC Community Limit By Display dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the filter name in the Description box. This name will appear in the Limit by list in PAC.
    2. +
    3. Type the CQL search command for the filter in the CCL Filter box.
    4. +
    +
    +

    You can type any valid CQL command. For more information about constructing CQL commands and a list of Community access points, see CQL Access Points for Community Information.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Insert PAC Community Limit by Display dialog box closes, and the table displays your changes.

    +
      +
    1. To set the order of options in the Limit by list, select a filter in the table and click btnUpArrow.gif or btnDownArrow.gif. Repeat this step until the list is ordered the way you want it.
    2. +
    +

    The higher an enabled item is positioned in the table (the lower the Display Order number), the closer to the top the item appears in the Limit by list. The first enabled item in the table is the top item in the Limit by list.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Community Information Search Statistics

    +

    PowerPAC community information search statistics are available for logging and reporting. The table lists the available transaction types. For more information about logging transactions and the Polaris Transactions database, see Collecting Transaction Statistics.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Transaction Type IDTransaction Description
    +

    1201

    +
    +

    Search community browse organization name

    +
    +

    1202

    +
    +

    Search community browse event name

    +
    +

    1203

    +
    +

    Search community browse subject

    +
    +

    1204

    +
    +

    Search community browse services

    +
    +

    1205

    +
    +

    Search community keyword

    +
    +

    1206

    +
    +

    Search community keyword organization name

    +
    +

    1207

    +
    +

    Search community keyword event name

    +
    +

    1208

    +
    +

    Search community keyword subject

    +
    +

    1209

    +
    +

    Search community keyword services

    +
    +

    1210

    +
    +

    Search community keyword address

    +
    +

    1211

    +
    +

    Search community keyword postal code

    +
    +

    1212

    +
    +

    Search community keyword notes

    +
    +

    1213

    +
    +

    Search community keyword control number

    +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Setting the default Community Keyword Limit by option - See Set PAC community information search options.
    • +
    • Deleting a search filter - Select a custom filter in the PAC Community Limit by Display policy table, and click btnDelete.gif. You cannot delete the standard filters. The Protected column indicates whether a filter can be deleted. If the value is Yes, you cannot delete the filter.
    • +
    • Modifying a search filter - Select the filter in the PAC Community Limit by Display policy table, and click . You can modify the description, CQL command, and the Enabled setting for a custom filter. You can modify only the description and the Enabled setting for standard filters. The Protected column indicates whether the CQL command can be edited for a filter. If the value is Yes, you cannot edit it.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_an_optional_marketing_message.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_an_optional_marketing_message.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f982b328 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Specify_an_optional_marketing_message.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Specify an optional marketing message + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify an Optional Marketing Message

    +

    Your library may set a brief (255 character maximum) library marketing message that displays on the organization’s web page along with any features added using ContentXChange.

    +

    To add a marketing message that displays when ContentXChange widgets are used on an organization’s website:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Select the Community tab in Polaris Administration profiles.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Community Information: ContentXChange marketing message profile.
    2. +
    3. Type a marketing message in the blank box.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Translate_Labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_Parts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Translate_Labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_Parts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93cf67c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/Translate_Labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_Parts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + Translate Labels for Narrow/Related Web Parts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Translate Labels for Narrow/Related Web Parts (Community)

    +

    If your library system has purchased other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC, you can translate the labels for the Narrow your search and Related searches web parts and the labels for the elements displayed under them. To translate labels:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches.
    4. +
    +

    The Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click the appropriate tab (Narrow Your Search or Related Searches) for the labels you want to translate.
    2. +
    3. Select the appropriate data element, and click Translate Label.
    4. +
    +

    The Language Strings dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the Choose Language box.
    2. +
    +

    The options are determined by the language versions of Polaris PowerPAC licensed for your library system.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the box in the Display Text column next to the label name you want to translate, and type the translated text in the box. The maximum number of characters is 50.
    2. +
    3. To insert a diacritic character in your text, follow these steps:
      1. Click Diacritics.
    4. +
    +

    The Character Picker dialog box opens.

    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert.
    4. +
    +
    +

    The Character Picker dialog box closes.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Language Strings dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save your settings on the current page.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To see your changes in PowerPAC, use the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) Reload tool to reload PowerPAC.

    +

    See Multilingual Support for Dashboard Titles.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/setcommeventdays.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/setcommeventdays.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db6efda1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfPAC/setcommeventdays.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Set the default number of days community events remain in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the default number of days community events remain in PAC

    +

    By default, community events continue to display in PAC search results for one day after the event ends. You can change this setting in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To change the default number of days that community events appear in PAC search results:

    +

    Note: +
    The default setting can be edited in the staff client or PAC editor for a specific event.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Community tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Days to continue showing event in PAC after event end date, and select a number of days.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..840911ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Community Records in the Staff Client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community Records in the Staff Client

    +

    Note:
    The full MARC 21 Format for Community Data is available online, including a concise version and a simple field list at: www.loc.gov/marc/

    +

    Library staff members use a labeled editor in the Polaris staff client to create, edit, and delete community records. Community records are stored as MARC records in the same Polaris database as the bibliographic information, but in a separate set of tables. MARC community records are distinguished from all other types of MARC records by the presence of code q (Community information) in Leader/06, Type of record.

    +

    Tip:
    If the library already has community records in MARC format, they can be imported by Polaris Conversion Services. The ability to import community records is not included in the Polaris staff client.

    +

    If the library has a license for both Community Profiles and Feature It, staff members can use promotion records in the staff client to feature community organizations and events. When community records are featured, they appear when PAC users enter specific search terms. The promotion record specifies the library resources (bibliographic records, community records, or websites) to feature and the conditions under which the resources will display.

    +

    In the Polaris staff client, the Community Record stores and displays information about the community organization. Event records, created automatically when events are added to a Community Record, store and display information about community events, programs, or services.

    +

    Types of Community Organization Records

    +
      +
    • Individual - An individual with a particular expertise, such as a teacher, interpreter, storyteller, or civic leader.
    • +
    • Organization or Club - An organization or any group, such as an association, club, or agency.
    • +
    • Other - Any community record that does not belong to these types, such as a planetarium on a university campus.
    • +
    • Sponsor or Donor - An individual or group sponsor or donor.
    • +
    +

    Types of Community Event Records

    +
      +
    • Event - A scheduled social activity, such as a lecture, play, concert series, sporting contest, festival, annual celebration, or regularly scheduled meeting. Event records can be created manually by entering information in the Community Record workform, or they can be imported from Evanced Solutions or Plymouth Rocket. Depending on how the events are labeled, they may be a program/service or an event.
    • +
    • Program or service - An offering or activity of a group or institution which carries out the purposes of that group or institution, such as driver education, day care placement, toy collection drive, or blood bank.
    • +
    +

    The library staff member can create a “stub” community record with a minimum of three required fields: organization name, organization description, and primary address. Or, the staff member can create a fuller record. After creating and saving a community record in the Polaris staff client, the staff member designates an organization representative by selecting a registered patron. Then, that patron can edit the community record using a web-based editor in the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Reports_Notice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Reports_Notice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e7c6f61 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Community_Reports_Notice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Community Reports & Notice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community Reports and Notice

    +

    The standard Community reports are designed to track actions taken on community records from the PAC, not from the staff client. Since community organization records cannot be created in the PAC, only community event records appear on the New Community Records report.

    +

    Once community organization records have been created in the staff client, organization representatives can update both types of community records: organization records and event records. The Updated Community Records report shows updates to any type of community records from the PAC.

    +

    The following standard Polaris Cataloging reports are available for Community Records:

    +
      +
    • New Community Records - The report shows the community event records created from the PAC after a specified date for a selected branch or for all branches.
    • +
    • Updated Community Records - The report shows the community records updated after a specified date for a selected branch or for all branches.
    • +
    +

    In addition, the library can generate the Stale Community Records notice, which shows community organization records (not events) that have not been updated since a specified date. These notices can be sent to the community organizations to alert them that they should update their records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Create_a_new_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Create_a_new_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..11a3db6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Create_a_new_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a new community record in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Community Record in the Staff Client

    +

    To create a new community record in the Polaris staff client:

    +
      +
    1. Create a new community record using one of the following methods:
      • Select File > New, press CTRL+N, or click the New button from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to access the New dialog box. Then, select Cataloging Objects, and select Community Record.
      • Open an existing record in the Community Record workform, select File > New, and select Copy workform to copy all the information in the workform and give it a different name, or Clear workform to start with a blank workform.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Enter information in the Community Record workform using the instructions in the following sections:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Preview the PAC display of the community record. See Preview the community record from the staff client.
    2. +
    3. Save the community record.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Creating_or_Editing_a_Community_Record_in_the_Staff_Client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Creating_or_Editing_a_Community_Record_in_the_Staff_Client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d7aa606 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Creating_or_Editing_a_Community_Record_in_the_Staff_Client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating or Editing a Community Record in the Staff Client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating and Editing Community Records in the Staff Client

    +

    Staff members use the tabbed Community Record workform to create or edit community records in Polaris Cataloging. The workform consists of the following tabbed pages: Profile, More info, Events, Social, Services, Subjects, Organization Rep, Preview, and Statistics. When an event is associated with a community record, an event record is created that is linked to that community record.

    +

    Depending on your library’s preferences, the staff member can create a minimal community record with only three required fields (organization name, organization description, and primary address) and then designate an organization representative who can finish the record via the PAC. Or, the staff member can create a fuller community record before designating the organization representative.

    +

    Note:
    Community records are governed by the following permissions: Community records: Access, Create, Modify, Delete.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Designate_a_community_representative.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Designate_a_community_representative.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c93ea06b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Designate_a_community_representative.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + Designate a community representative + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Designate a Community Representative

    +

    The organization’s representative is a patron who can edit community records from the PAC:

    +

    Note:
    Only one patron can be designated as a representative for an organization, but a single patron may be the representative for multiple organizations.

    +

    To enter information on the Organization Rep tabbed page of the Community Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Enter at least the basic information for the community record and save it. See Enter basic community information in the staff client.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The community record must be saved before you can designate a community representative.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Organization Rep tab on the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    The Organization Representative tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. To add a new organization representative, click the Add organization rep button.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with Patron Records selected in the Object box.

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the patron who is designated as an organization representative. The organization representative is able to edit a community record through the Polaris PowerPAC.
    2. +
    +

    The organization representative’s information appears in the workform.

    +
      +
    1. Under the Role Group column heading, select the organization representative’s role.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save, click the Save button, or press Ctrl + S.
    4. +
    +

    Linking to the Patron Record from a Community Record

    +
      +
    • To open the Patron Status workform, select the representative, and click the Open button.
    • +
    • To remove the organization representative, select the representative, and click the Remove button.
    • +
    • To open the Patron Registration workform, select the organization representative, and click the Registration button.
    • +
    • To see the patron record’s properties, click the Properties button.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter community services in the staff client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter community services in the staff client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38286055 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter community services in the staff client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Enter community services in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter community services in the staff client

    +

    To enter community services in the staff client:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. +

      Select the Services tab.

      +

      The Services tabbed page appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    4. +
    5. +

      In the first available blank line, type a service the community organization offers.

      +

      Another blank line becomes available.

      +
    6. +
    7. Type additional services the community organization offers, if applicable.
    8. +
    9. Select File > Save, click the Save button, or press Ctrl + S.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_a_community_event_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_a_community_event_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f047beb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_a_community_event_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter a community event in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter a Community Event in the Staff Client

    +

    To enter or edit events for the community profile:

    +

    Note:
    An event record is a type of community record. When you create an event for a community information record, the event is saved as a separate record that appears in searches for community records. You can create a new event record from an existing event record, but you cannot select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to create a new event record. See Create an event record from the Event workform. You can also import events. See Importing Events for Community Profiles.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the Events tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Events tab appears.

    +

    + CommProfEventstab.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click New Event if you are entering an event, or select an event and click Open if you are editing an existing event.
    2. +
    +

    The Event Record workform appears.

    +

    Tip:
    The information in the Profile, More info, Services, and Subjects tabbed pages in the Community Record workform is copied to the Events Record workform, but you can change the information without changing the information in the associated Community Record workform.

    +

    + staffclientEvent.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    To enter diacritics and non-Roman characters, selectTools > Diacritics or press Alt + D. Then, select the characters from the dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. In the Event name box at the top of the workform, type a name for the event.
    2. +
    3. Select the event type in the Event type box.
    4. +
    5. Select the Display in PAC check box (if it is not already selected) to display the event in the PAC.
    6. +
    7. On the Profile tab, enter a different address and/or contact if the information for the event is different from the information on the Community Record workform. The Map it feature uses this address to create the event map.
    8. +
    9. Select the start and end dates/times in the Event start date and Event end date boxes.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    The End date is used to automatically set the Date to remove event from the library catalog date. The default setting is 7 days, but this can be changed in the Polaris Administration Community profile Days to continue showing event in PAC after event end date. See Setting Community Search Options for PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Type a description of the times/dates for the event in the Event date as it appears in library catalog box.
    2. +
    3. Enter or edit the event description in the Event description box.
    4. +
    5. If the automatic map for the event is not correct, enter the coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude boxes to override the automatic coordinates. Click the What’s this? link to get the coordinates.
    6. +
    7. Type the location information for the event in the Event location (room or meeting area) box.
    8. +
    9. If the event has an associated website, type the URL for the website in the Event website address box and a description of the website in the Website title/description box.
    10. +
    11. Edit the information on the More info, Services, and Subjects tabs following the instructions for community records:
    12. +
    + +

    Tip:
    Type of organization is selected in the Limit by box, and all organization types are selected in the Values box. To limit by an organization type, click the other types to de-select them.

    +
      +
    1. To share this event with other community organizations, click the Related organizations tab and do the following:
      1. Click the New related organization button.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with Community Records selected.

    +

    + related_orgs.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the related organization.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The organization appears in the Related organizations list in the Event workform.

    +

    + relatedorglist.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Save the record.
    2. +
    3. To see how the event appears in the PAC, select the Preview tab. See Preview the community record from the staff client.
    4. +
    5. To see statistics about the event record, select the Statistics tab.
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    +

    Create an event record from the Event workform

    +

    You can also create an event from the Event workform by selecting File > New. The New Event Record dialog box appears. Select the option to clear the workform or copy it. If you selected Clear event workform, the information for the event, such as the Event name, Event date, Event description, Event location etc. are cleared. However, you cannot change the community organization in the Hosted by box, and the information from the hosted by organization is copied to the new record. If you select Copy event workform, all the information is copied to the new event record.

    +

    Create an event record by importing

    +

    Events information from Evanced Solutions or Plymouth Rocket can be imported to create event records in the Polaris Community database. See Importing Events for Community Profiles.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_basic_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_basic_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..975d6520 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_basic_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter basic community information in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Basic Community Information in the Staff Client

    +

    To enter or edit the basic information on the Profile tabbed page of the Community Record workform:

    +

    Note:
    The Community Record workform must have information in the Organization name, Primary address, and Description fields before it can be saved.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform. See Search for a Community Record in the Staff Client or Create a new community record in the staff client.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To change the library that owns the record, select it in the Owner box.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) If your library offers ContentXChange, select the system or branch in the ContentXChange widgets link to: box. (You can select a library level organization, but the setting will default to the system level since the PAC connection is either at the system or branch level.) For more information, see Using ContentXChange.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    The ContentXChange Ask Us widget uses the selected organization's settings for Ask Us in PAC. See Set up and start Ask Us. If the library organization requires the user to log in to contact the library via Ask Us, the user on the community organization's website must be a library patron to use the widget. See Set Up Ask Us Without a Log in Requirement.

    +

    Note:
    If a branch is selected, the PAC will open to that branch when someone clicks a ContentXChange link on an organization web page. If you change the branch, existing ContentXChange widgets will continue to work at the System level. If you want the older widgets to use the branch setting, these widgets will need to be recreated on the ContentXChange tab in PAC, and the new iframe embed code should be used to replace the old code on the website where the widget is being used.

    +
      +
    1. (Required) Type the community organization’s name in the Organization name box.
    2. +
    3. To display the community record in the PAC, select Display in PAC.
    4. +
    5. On the Profile tabbed page, enter the URL for the organization’s graphic in the Logo URL box. The URL must point to an image file ending in .png, .jpg, gif etc. You cannot upload a logo from your desktop; it must be on a web page. If your organization’s logo is on a web page, select it, right-click and select Properties to see the URL. Then, copy and paste the URL into the Logo URL box.
    6. +
    +

    + 2LogoURL.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    The logo size will not exceed 100 x 100 pixels; if the logo is larger, it will be resized automatically.

    +
      +
    1. Enter a description for the logo in the Logo Description box.
    2. +
    3. On the Primary address subtab, enter the organization’s primary address in the Address, City, State/Province and Postal Code boxes. At least one address element is required.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    The Map It feature uses this address to create the map showing the location of the organization in the PAC. To see the map, you must first save and close the record. Then open it again, select the Preview tab, and expand the Map it section. If the location is not correct, you can override the automatic coordinates by typing them in the Latitude and Longitude boxes. Click the What’s this link to get the coordinates.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the primary contact information in the Phone number, Fax, Contact Person, and E-mail address boxes.
    2. +
    3. If the organization has another address, click the Alternate address subtab, and enter the alternate address and contact information.
    4. +
    5. If the map showing the organization’s location is not correct, click the What’s this link to find the coordinates by entering the address. Then, manually enter the organization’s coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude boxes.
    6. +
    7. (Required) Type a description in the Description box.
    8. +
    9. Type the organization’s hours in the Hours box. To enter more information, start typing in the next blank line.
    10. +
    11. Select File > Save.
    12. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_social_links_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_social_links_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a8292b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_social_links_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter community social links in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Community Social Links in the Staff Client

    +

    Social information, entered in either the staff client Community Record workform or the PAC community editor, appears in the PAC for the community record. 

    +

    To enter or edit social information on the Social tabbed page of the Community Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the Social tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Social tabbed page appears.

    +

    + CommProfSocialtab.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To display a record set as a graphical “content carousel” in the PAC full display of the community record, click Find to search for the bibliographic record set.
    2. +
    +

    When you select a record set from the Find Tool results list, the record set’s name and ID display.

    +

    Note:
    Up to 50 of the titles in the record set display in a graphical “content carousel” in the PAC.

    +
      +
    1. To provide links to social media sites, enter the appropriate IDs or URLs in the following boxes:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Hover over the What’s this link to see instructions on how to find the Facebook account ID.

    +
    +
      +
    • Facebook account ID +
    • +
    • Facebook page URL +
    • +
    • Twitter URL +
    • +
    • Blog URL 
    • +
    • Linked-in profile
    • +
    • My space URL
    • +
    +
    +

    The Facebook account ID is used to display the Like button, and the URLs are used for generating icons in the Connect with us content “drawer” in the PAC.

    +

    + socialicons.gif 

    +

    + connectwithus.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter additional URLs and descriptions in the Web links box.
    2. +
    +

    After entering the first URL and description, a new blank line appears where you can enter another URL.

    +

    These links are displayed in a content “drawer” in the PAC full and brief display. For more information, see Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Viewing Community Social Information in the PAC

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_subjects_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_subjects_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..259b54cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_community_subjects_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter community subjects in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Community Subjects in the Staff Client

    +

    To enter information on the Subjects tabbed page of the Community Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the Subjects tab.
    4. +
    +

    The Subjects tab appears.

    +

    + CommProfSubj.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click New Subject to add a subject, or select a subject and click the Open button to edit an existing subject.
    2. +
    +

    The Add a new subject or Edit subject dialog box appears.

    +

    + AddSubj.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    For more information about the MARC Community Information format, see:
     http://www.loc.gov/marc/community/

    +
      +
    1. Select a subject type in the Subject type box and indicators in the Indicator One and Indicator Two boxes, if applicable.
    2. +
    3. Type a heading in the Heading box.
    4. +
    5. Select the appropriate subfield codes, and type the text for the subfield.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Headings in community records (names and subjects) are not under authority control. The drop-down lists for indicator and subfield values are populated automatically depending on what tag was selected. If you select a value in the Select a subfield code box, enter text in the text entry box, but then select a different tag, the text you entered in the subfield text box remains, but the value in the drop-down may be "de-selected" if it is not valid for the new tag. If you then try to save the record, an error message tells you that a subfield code must be entered with subfield text.

    +
      +
    1. Add more subjects as needed, and click OK.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Viewing Community Subjects in the PAC

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_more_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_more_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1386fddb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Enter_more_community_information_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter more community information in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter More Community Information in the Staff Client

    +

    To enter or edit additional information on the More info tabbed page of the Community Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the More info tab.
    4. +
    +

    The More info tab appears.

    +

    + CommProfTelltab.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type additional information regarding the community organization in the following fields (as applicable): General note, Target group, Area served, Accommodations for the disabled, Directions or transportation information, Languages, Volunteers note, Who is eligible to use services, Fees Affiliations, Licenses or accreditations held, Funding source, Public information about your budget, Information about persons who administer the organization, Historical or biographical information, Programs note, Publications that you issue, and Performer note.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +

    Viewing Community Information in the PAC

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Community_report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Community_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c86a1b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Community_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Generate a Community report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Generate a Community Report

    +

    To generate a standard Community report from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities > Reports and Notices.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Reports window appears.

    +

    + PolarisReports.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Community in the Report Categories list.
    2. +
    +

    The New Community Records and Updated Community Records are listed.

    +

    Tip: +
    + For more information, see Using Polaris Standard Reports. +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click a report to generate it.
    2. +
    +

    The Report Wizard opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization(s) for which you want to see the new or updated records or select All to generate the report for all branches.
    2. +
    3. Select a date in the Changes Made Since box (for an Updated Community Records report) or the Records Created After box (for a New Community Records report).
    4. +
    5. Click Submit.
    6. +
    +

    If pdf (the default) is selected as the report output type, the report appears as a pdf in the Adobe Reader window. The new or updated community records are grouped by the organizations selected in the Report Wizard. The report shows the library branch name, record ID, type, modification date (Updated Community Records) or creation date (New Community Records), the community organization’s name and the community organization’s address.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Stale_Community_Records_notice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Stale_Community_Records_notice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b327fa66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Generate_a_Stale_Community_Records_notice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Generate a Stale Community Records notice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Generate a Stale Community Records Notice

    +

    To generate a Stale Community Records notice:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Reports and Notices > Notices > Community to see the community notice.
    2. +
    +

    The Stale Community Records notice is listed.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Stale Community Records.
    2. +
    +

    The Report Wizard dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch(es) in the Branch list, or select All to select all branches.
    2. +
    3. Select a date in the Last Modified box.
    4. +
    5. Click Submit.
    6. +
    +

    The Stale Community Records notice pdf is displayed in the Adobe Reader. For each branch selected in the Report Wizard, the notice lists the community records that were last modified before the specified date. For general information about reports, see Generating, Sending & Customizing Reports.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    You can edit the Stale Community Records notice text in Polaris WebAdmin. The language strings are as follows:

    +
      +
    • NT-COMM_M_HEADER - Default: Your organization’s information may be out of date.
    • +
    • NT_COMM_M_TEXT - Default: According to our records, your organization's information has not changed since [DATE]. Please verify that the information contained in the library's online catalog is correct and contact us if you have any questions.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Preview_the_community_record_from_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Preview_the_community_record_from_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9d2234b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Preview_the_community_record_from_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Preview the community record from the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Preview the Community Record from the Staff Client

    +

    To preview the community record display in the PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    3. If you make changes to the record, save it.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you made any changes to the community record, you must save it, close it, and reopen it before you can preview the PAC display.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Preview tab.
    2. +
    +

    The Preview page displays the community record as it appears in the Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_a_community_record_from_the_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_a_community_record_from_the_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a34f348e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_a_community_record_from_the_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Print a community record from the workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print a Community Record from the Workform

    +

    To print a community record from the Community Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also select the arrow in the printer icon to see the print options.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print from the workform menu bar.
    2. +
    +

    + commprintWfrm.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options from the list:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Current View +
    • +
    • All Views 
    • +
    • Community Full 
    • +
    • Community Brief 
    • +
    +

    The Adobe Reader window displays a preview of the record printout.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print or click the printer icon in the Adobe Reader window. You can also email the full or brief report by selecting File > Send file > Attach to email or by clicking the letter icon. See Printed Brief and Full Community Record.
    2. +
    +

    Printed Current View or All Views

    +

    When you select Current View from the Community Record workform’s print menu, the information contained in the open workform view is displayed in the preview window.

    +

    + currenviewprev.gif 

    +

    When you select All Views from the Community Record workform’s print menu, the information contained in all views of the workform is displayed in the preview window.

    +

    Printed Brief and Full Community Record

    +

    The information in the printed brief and full community record depends on the type of organization in the record. Organization information is printed for community records with a type of Individual, Organization or Club, Sponsor or Donor, or Other. Event information is printed for events, programs, or services.

    +
      +
    • Community Brief - Includes the following information from the Community Record workform’s Profile tab: Organization name, Control number, Owning library/branch, Display in PAC setting (Yes or No), record status, Primary address, type of Organization, phone number, email address, and contact person. It also includes the following information from the Community Record workform’s Organization Rep tab: Organization representative’s name, Barcode, Patron code, Role, and Branch.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Community Full - Includes information from the Profile, More info, Organizational Representative, and Event tabs in the Community Record workform.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_community_records_from_Find_Tool_results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_community_records_from_Find_Tool_results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a19d074 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Print_community_records_from_Find_Tool_results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Print community records from Find Tool results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Community Records from Find Tool Results

    +

    To print community records from Find Tool results:

    +
      +
    1. Search for community records in the Find Tool. See Search for a community record in the staff client.
    2. +
    +

    The community records are listed in the Find Tool results.

    +
      +
    1. Select the record or records you want to print.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Print > List View > Community Brief or Community Full.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you selected both organizations and events, they will be printed in the format specified for that type of record. See Printed Brief and Full Community Record.

    +

    + printFT.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you selected List View, the Print dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Community Brief or Community Full, a pdf appears in the Adobe Reader window with brief or full community information for all the records selected in the Find Tool results list (in the order in which the records are listed).
    4. +
    5. To print the community record(s), do one of the following:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • If you selected List View, click the Print button on the Print dialog box. A list of the selected community records is printed.
    • +
    • If you selected Community Full or Community Brief, select File > Print or click the printer icon in the Adobe Reader window. You can also email the full or brief report(s) by selecting File > Send file > Attach to email, or by clicking the letter icon. See Printed Brief and Full Community Record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Printing_Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Printing_Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe8d7741 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Printing_Community_Records_in_the_Staff_Client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Printing Community Records in the Staff Client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Printing Community Records in the Staff Client

    +

    In the Polaris Staff Client, you can print community information from the Find Tool results list or from the Community Record or Event workforms. From the Find Tool results list, you can list multiple records in the results list, select the records, and print the list view. You can also select one or more records in the Find Tool results list and print a formatted brief or full report of all the selected records. From the Community Record or Event workform, you can print the current workform view, all workform views, or the brief or full formatted report. You can also print standard Cataloging reports to view information about new or modified community records, see Community Reports and Notice.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Search_for_a_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Search_for_a_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..49cd816e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/Search_for_a_community_record_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Search for a community record in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search for a Community Record in the Staff Client

    +

    To find existing community records in the Polaris staff client:

    +

    Tip:
    + For more information, see Finding Polaris Records. +

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging > Community records.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with Community Records selected in the Object box.

    +

    Note:
    You can search and limit by the following criteria in the Find Tool: Address and contact person, All keyword fields, Control number, Display in PAC - Yes/No (Limit by only), Event expiration date, Event name, Event start date, Language, Notes, Organization name, Postal code, Record owner, Record status, Services available, Subject, and Type of organization.

    +
      +
    1. Select the access point in the Search by box.
    2. +
    3. Select the search type in the Type box.
    4. +
    5. To sort the search results, select an option in the Sort by box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    You can sort Community Records in the Find Tool results list by the following options: Control Number, Event Date (Earliest first), Event Date (latest first), Event Expiration Date, Event Name, Organization Name, Postal Code, Relevance, or Type of Organization.

    +
      +
    1. To filter the results list, select an option in the Limit by box, and select or type a value in the Value box.
    2. +
    3. Type a search term in the For box, and click Search.
    4. +
    +

    The community or event records appear in the results list.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the record to open it in the Community Record workform.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/View_community_record_statistics_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/View_community_record_statistics_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..533609fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/View_community_record_statistics_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + View community record statistics in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View community record statistics in the staff client

    +

    To view statistics for the community record, select the Statistics tab on the community record workform.

    +

    + CommProfstatstab.gif 

    +

    The Statistics tab displays creation and modification information, and statistics regarding linked events.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/campaignkeyw.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/campaignkeyw.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91ef83a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommProfStaffClient/campaignkeyw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,471 @@ + + + + + + + Keyword Indexed Fields in Community Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Keyword Indexed Fields in Community Records

    +

    For more information on MARC 21 Format for Community Information, go to http://www.loc.gov/marc/community/

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Primary Name Index - Keyword
    +

    100 - Primary Name - Personal

    +
    +

    a, b, c, d, e, g, j, q, u

    +
    +

    110 - Primary Name - Corporate

    +
    +

    a, b, c, d, e, g, n, u

    +
    +

    111 - Primary Name - Meeting

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, j, n, q, u
    +

    270 - Address

    +
    g, h, p, q
    +

    271 - Additional Addresses

    +
    g, h, p, q
    +

    303 - Subordinate Entities

    +
    p
    +

    311 - Meeting Rooms and Facilities Available

    +
    p
    +

    511 - Participant or Performer Note

    +
    a
    +

    570 - Personnel Note

    +
    a
    +

    572 - Affiliation and Other Relationships Note

    +
    a, b
    +

    600 - Subject Added Entry - Personal Name

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, j, q, u
    +

    610 - Subject Added Entry - Corporate Name

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, n, u
    +

    611 - Subject Added Entry - Meeting Name

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, j, n, q, u
    +

    700 - Added Entry - Personal Name

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, j, q, u
    +

    710 - Added Entry - Corporate Name

    +
    +

    a, b, c, d, e, g, n, u

    +
    +

    711 - Added Entry - Meeting Name

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, j, n, q, u
    Event or Program Index - Keyword +
    +

    245 - Title

    +
    +

    a, b, c, h, n, p

    +
    +

    246 - Varying Form of Title

    +
    a, b, f, g, h, n, p
    +

    247 - Former Title

    +
    a, b, f, g, h, n, p
    +

    303 - Subordinate Entities

    +
    a, b, c
    +

    307 - Hours Etc.

    +
    a, b
    +

    311 - Meeting Rooms and Facilities Available

    +
    +

    a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, m, p

    +
    +

    505 - Programs Note

    +
    a
    511 - Participant or Performer Note +

    +

    +

    a

    +
    Subject Index - Keyword +
    600 - Subject Added Entry - Personal Name +

    a, b, c, d, e, f, g, j, n, p, q, s, t, u, v, x, y, z

    +
    +

    610 - Subject Added Entry - Corporate Name

    +
    +

    a, b, c, d, e, f, g, j, n, p, q, s, t, u, v, x, y, z

    +
    611 - Subject Added Entry - Meeting Namea, b, c, d, e, f, g, j, n, p, q, s, t, u, v, x, y, z
    +

    630 - Subject Added Entry - Uniform Title

    +
    +

    a, f, n, p, s, v, x, y, z

    +
    +

    648 - Subject Added Entry - Chronological Term

    +
    a, v, x, y, z
    +

    650 - Subject Added Entry - Topical Term

    +
    +

    a, b, v, x, y, z

    +
    +

    651 - Subject Added Entry - Geographic Name

    +
    +

    a, v, x, y, z

    +
    +

    653 - Index Term - Uncontrolled

    +
    a
    654 - Subject Added Entry - Faceted Topical Terms +

    a, b, c, v, y, z

    +
    +

    656 - Index Term - Occupation

    +
    +

    a, v, x, y, z

    +
    +

    657 - Index Term - Function

    +
    +

    a, v, x, y, z

    +
    +

    658 - Index Term - Curriculum Objective

    +
    +

    a, b, c, d

    +
    +

    Notes Index - Keyword +

    +
    +

    500 - General Note

    +
    a
    +

    505 - Programs Note

    +
    a
    +

    520 - Description Note

    +
    a
    +

    521 - Target Group Note

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, f
    +

    531 - Eligibility, Fees, Procedures Note

    +
    a
    +

    536 - Funding Source Note

    +
    a
    545 - Biographical or Historical Notea
    546 - Language Notea
    551 - Budget Notea
    +

    573 - Credentials Note

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

    574 - Transportation and Directions Note

    +
    a
    +

    581 - Publications Note

    +
    a
    +

    587 - Other Information Available Note

    +
     
    +

    587 - Other Information Available Note

    +
     
    Address and Contact Persons - Keyword
    +

    270 - Address

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, I, j, k, l, m, n, p, q, z
    +

    271 - Additional Addresses

    +
    a, b, c, d, e, g, I, j, k, l, m, n, p, q, z
    +

    303 - Subordinate Entities

    +
    p
    +

    311 - Meeting Rooms and Facilities Available

    +
    b, p
    522 - Geographic Coverage Notea
    570 - Personnel Notea
    +

    Services Available - Keyword +

    +
    +

    576 - Services Available Note

    +
    a
    +

    521 - Target Group Note

    +
    a
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Access_your_organization_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Access_your_organization_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b44fc49b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Access_your_organization_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Access your organization’s record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Access your organization’s record

    +

    To log in to the patron account and access the information for the organizations that you represent:

    +
      +
    1. Click Log in/Register on the My Account menu. The log-in form is displayed.
    2. +
    3. Type your library account number (barcode number) in the Barcode Number box. Your library may require all or only part of the number. Your library may accept a user name instead of the barcode. To set up a user name, click Create username.
    4. +
    5. Type your account password in the Password box, and click Log in. Your library record page is displayed.
    6. +
    7. +

      Click Community on the My Account menu.

      +

      The organizations for which you are the designated community representative are listed below your account information.

      +
    8. +
    9. Click the organization to display the tabbed pages for the organization record. The information entered on these tabbed pages will be displayed to the public when users search the library catalog for community information.
    10. +
    11. Follow the steps in Enter your organization’s basic information.
    12. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Editing_Community_Records_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Editing_Community_Records_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..062bded8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Editing_Community_Records_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + Editing Community Records in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Editing Community Records in PAC

    +

    Note: +
    Libraries can print these instructions to offer to designated organization representatives.

    +

    Only library staff members can create or delete community records, and assign patrons as community representatives. However, once a staff member has created a community record and designated you as the organization representative, you can edit your organization’s community record in the PAC (Public Access Catalog).

    +

    These instructions start with a basic community organization record where the staff member has created the record with the minimum three required fields: organization name, organization description, and primary address. However, the library staff member may have entered more community information in your organization’s record before turning it over to you. In addition, your library may have customized the PAC user interface (UI), so it may be slightly different from the UI shown or described in these instructions.

    +

    If your library offers ContentXChange, you can incorporate features from the library or the organization’s library record into your organization’s own website. If your organization does not have a website, you can also create a personalized page based on your organization’s library record that allows users to find your organization information using web search engines. See Create a Personalized Page.

    +

    Note: +
    Use a desktop computer or tablet to edit a community record in the public access catalog.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_additional_organization_information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_additional_organization_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2fd5f95c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_additional_organization_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter additional organization information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Additional Organization Information

    +

    When users search for community information in the PAC, they can search by the organization’s name, address, contact persons, services, event or program title, subject, or notes.

    +

    To enter more information about your organization:

    +

    Note:
    Do not include HTML markup in any text fields.

    +
      +
    1. Open the organization’s record. See Access your organization’s record for details.
    2. +
    3. Click the More Info tab.
    4. +
    +

    The More Info tabbed page opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type information in any of the following fields:
      • General note
      • Target group
      • Area served
      • Accommodations for the disabled
      • Directions or transportation information
      • Languages
      • Volunteers note - Since all the text you type is displayed with your organization information, you can type an introductory line to head your information, such as Volunteer Opportunities.
      • Who is eligible to use the services
      • Fees
      • Affiliations
      • Licenses or accreditations held
      • Funding source (for example, Nonprofit)
      • Public information about your budget
      • Information about persons who administer the organization
      • Historical or biographical information
      • Programs note
      • Publications that you issue
      • Performer note
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    +

    Example of additional information displayed in the PAC

    +

    The additional community information entered in the More Info tab displays below the general information. Fields without information in the More Info tab do not display in the PAC.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_info_about_your_orgs_services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_info_about_your_orgs_services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df4c0da7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_info_about_your_orgs_services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter information about your organization’s services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter information about your organization’s services

    +

    When users search for community information in the PAC, they can search by the organization’s name, address, contact persons, services, event or program title, subject, or notes.

    +

    To enter your organization’s services:

    +
      +
    1. In your library record Community page, click the organization you want to update. See Access your organization’s record for details.
    2. +

      The organization editor opens to the Profile tabbed page.

      +
    3. Click the Services tab.
    4. +

      + +

      +
    5. Type the first service entry in the text box, and click Add more to add another service.
    6. +
    7. Click Save > Close, or click another tab.
    8. +
    +

    Example of services displayed in the PAC

    +

    The organization’s services entered on the Services tab are displayed in the PAC.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_subjects_related_to_your_organization.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_subjects_related_to_your_organization.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aab6e712 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_subjects_related_to_your_organization.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter subjects related to your organization + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Subjects Related to Your Organization

    +

    When users search for community information in the PAC, they can search by the organization’s name, address, contact persons, services, event or program title, subject, or notes.

    +

    To add subjects that will help users find your organization in community search results:

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization you want to update. See Access your organization’s record for details.
    2. +
    +

    The organization editor opens to the Profile tabbed page.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Subjects tab.
    2. +
    +

    The subjects that the library staff member entered, if any, are displayed. Click Add more to add another subject. You can continue to click Add more as needed.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click Save, and click Close, or click another tab.
    2. +
    +

    Example of subjects displayed in the PAC

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_basic_info.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_basic_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6514e4e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_basic_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter your organization’s basic information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Your Organization’s Basic Information

    +

    When users search for community information in the PAC, they can search by the organization’s name, address, contact persons, services, event or program title, subject, or notes.

    +

    To enter basic information about your organization and add your organization’s logo:

    +

    Note:
    Do not include HTML markup in any text fields.

    +
      +
    1. Open the organization’s record. See Access your organization’s record for details.
    2. +

      The organization editor opens to the Profile tabbed page if this is the first time you have logged in to work with this organization.

      +

      + +

      +
    3. To edit the organization name, type the new name in the Organization Name box. The organization name is required.
    4. +
    5. To add a logo image to your organization record, click Show Your Logo.
    6. +

      The Logo URL dialog box opens.

      +

      + +

      +
    7. In the Add or update a logo box, enter the URL for the organization’s graphic in the Logo URL box. The URL must point to an image file ending in .png, .jpg, .gif etc. You cannot upload a logo from your desktop; it must be on a web page. If your organization’s logo is on a web page, select it, right-click and select Properties to see the URL. Then, copy and paste the URL into the Logo URL box. If your image is not already on a website, you can upload the image to Facebook™, flickr®, or another picture-sharing service.
    8. +

      +  

      +

      Note:
      The logo size will not exceed 100 x 100 pixels; if the logo is larger, it will be resized automatically.

      +
    9. In the Logo Description box, type a very brief identifier for the image.
    10. +

      Your description text is displayed when the user places the cursor over the image in the search results.

      +
    11. Click Save on the Logo URL dialog box.
    12. +
    13. To edit primary address and contact information, simply type the new information in the appropriate boxes.
    14. +

      Note:
      Click the Alternate Address tab to enter alternate address and contact information.

      +
    15. If the MapIt location is incorrect and you want to change the coordinates, follow these steps:
    16. +

      Note: +
      The coordinates are used to provide a map (Google MapIt) to your location in a catalog user’s search results. They are automatically supplied from your Primary Address information.

      +
    17. Click what’s this? for Override automatic map coordinates.
    18. +

      An information box opens.

      +
    19. Click the link in the information box.
    20. +

      A map opens.

      +
    21. Type your address or navigate and zoom in until your location is displayed, then copy the latitude and longitude numbers below the map into the Latitude and Longitude boxes on the organization record.
    22. +

      + +

      +
    23. To add or edit the organization’s scheduled hours, type the information in the Hours box. Click Add more to add more lines as needed.
    24. +
    25. To edit the description of your organization, type the new information in the Description box. The description is required, and it will be displayed when people search for community information in the library’s catalog.
    26. +
    27. To change the type of record, select an option from the Organization type list:
    28. +
        +
      • Individual +
      • +
      • Organization or club +
      • +
      • Other +
      • +
      • Sponsor or donor +
      • +
      +
    29. Click Save.
    30. +
    31. Click Close, or click another tab to continue to edit this record.
    32. +
    +

    To enter additional organization information, select the More Info tab, enter information in the appropriate fields, and save the record.

    +

    Example of basic community information displayed in the PAC

    +

    The information and logo entered in the Profile tab displays in the PAC as shown below.

    +

    + +

    +

    Example of community map displayed in the PAC

    +

    The map information entered in the Profiles tab displays in a content drawer under the basic information.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_events.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_events.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..206c6468 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_org_events.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter your organization’s events + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter your organization’s events

    +

    When users search for community information in the PAC, they can search by the organization’s name, address, contact persons, services, event or program title, subject, or notes.

    +

    To enter your organization’s events:

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization you want to update. See Access your organization’s record for details. The organization editor opens to the Profile tabbed page.
    2. +
    3. Click the Events tab.
    4. +
    5. Click Add a new event. The Event Information window opens.
    6. +

      + +

      +
    7. Type a name for the event in the Event name box to identify the event in the user’s search results.
    8. +
    9. Edit the primary and alternate address information, if necessary. The information is taken from your organization record, but you can change it for this specific event or program without affecting the address you entered in the Profile tabbed page.
    10. +
    11. Set the dates for this event:
      • Event start date - Type the date and time for when the event starts.
      • Event end date - Type the actual date and time the event ends.
      • Event date as it appears in the library catalog - Type the date information that users should see when they find your event in the library catalog.
      • Date to remove event from library catalog - If necessary, type the date when the event should no longer appear in a user’s catalog search results. The library sets a value based on the event’s end date, but you can change the date if necessary. If the date is later then the Event end date, the event will be displayed in search results after the event has actually ended.
    12. +
    13. In the Event description box, type a description of the event or program.
    14. +

      Tip:
      Scroll the Event Information box to see these additional options.

      +
    15. Latitude and longitude - These coordinates are used to provide a map (Google MapIt) to your event in a catalog user’s search results. See Enter your organization’s basic information.
    16. +
    17. (Optional) - Type the room, meeting area, or additional location information in the Event location box.
    18. +
    19. If you offer online registration or more information about the event online, type the URL for event or program sign-up. The URL must begin with http://. Then type descriptive text for the URL in the What is it? box.
    20. +
    21. In the Event Type box, select Event or Program or service.
    22. +
    23. To display a “content carousel” of titles related to the event, see Enter your organization’s social information. You can share title lists or saved searches in a content carousel for the event or for the organization.
    24. +
    25. Edit the information on the More Info tab, if necessary.
    26. +
    27. Click Save and click Close, or click another tab to continue to edit this organization record.
    28. +
    +

    Example of events displayed in the PAC

    +

    If your library offers this option, the Events and Programs drawer in the PowerPAC full display includes an option to display the events in a calendar or a list view. If the event is displayed in a calendar, the PowerPAC user can select View as a list. If the events display in a list, the PowerPAC user can select View as a calendar.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_organizations_social_info.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_organizations_social_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87c9d38a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/CommRep/Enter_your_organizations_social_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Enter your organization’s social information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Your Organization’s Social Information

    +

    To share social media information, share a graphical “content carousel” of titles, and provide other web links:

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization you want to update. See Access your organization’s record for details.
    2. +
    +

    The organization editor opens to the Profile tabbed page.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Social tab.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To share titles from a saved title list or a saved search, and display the titles in a rotating graphical “content carousel,” do one of the following steps:
      • Click the Share a title list arrow and select a list from those you have saved in your library account. For information on creating a title list, see the PAC online Help.
      • Click the Select a saved search arrow and select a search from those you have saved in your patron account. For information on saving a search, see the PAC online Help.
    2. +
    3. To show social media buttons with your information in a patron’s search results, enter the appropriate IDs or URLs in the following boxes:
      • Facebook account ID - This entry will display a Like button, so a patron can like your organization from the library catalog. Enter your organization’s ID, not your personal ID. For more information about finding the ID, click what’s this.
      • Facebook page URL
      • Twitter URL
      • Blog URL
      • Linked-In Profile
    4. +
    +

    These entries are displayed as buttons in a Connect with us section for your organization in a patron’s search results.

    +
      +
    1. To provide a web link in the Connect with us section for your organization:
      1. Type the URL in the Website URL box. The URL must begin with http://.
      2. Type brief descriptive text for the URL in the Web site title/description box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    The first website you enter is displayed as your organization’s home website in a user’s search results.

    +

    To add more links, click Add more in the Web Links box.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save, and click Close, or click another tab to continue to edit this record.
    2. +
    +

    Examples of social information displayed in the PAC

    +

    Content carousel from a title list or saved search

    +

    + +

    +

    Social media links

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community Profile Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community Profile Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1457c34e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community Profile Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + Community Profiles Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Community Profiles Overview

    +

    With Polaris Community Profiles, libraries can link, centralize, and promote resources by making community information easily accessible from Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. When combined with ContentXChange, Community Profiles can further extend the library's services by distributing targeted relevant information from the library to community websites.

    +

    Public libraries can use Community Profiles to distribute community information, promote and share resources, and advance local economic and educational initiatives. Academic libraries can use Community Profiles to provide a network for disseminating academic expertise within the university itself–encouraging communications among faculty in diverse fields–and linking that expertise with the greater community. The academic community can also benefit from an increased awareness of the resources, programs, and organizations in the greater community.

    +

    Polaris Community Profiles and ContentXChange are licensed separately from the Polaris ILS. Only one instance of Polaris is required because community records are stored in the same database as bibliographic records. Community records are stored in MARC Community Information (CI) Record format in separate tables from MARC bibliographic records. In addition to the fields defined in the MARC CI format, Polaris uses other fields for organizations and events. For more information about the MARC CI format, see: http://www.loc.gov/marc/community/

    +

    Library staff members create community records using the Community Record workform in the Polaris Staff Client. Once a library staff member creates the community record with a minimum of three required fields, and designates an organizational representative, either the librarian or the organizational representative (or both) can take on the responsibility for modifying the record. See Creating or Editing a Community Record in the Staff Client.

    +

    Staff members or community representatives specify the type of community record (organization or club etc.), and enter information about the organization, such as the address, target group, languages spoken, programs, and events. In addition, a visual “content carousel” of titles relevant to the community organization can be displayed in the Polaris PAC. This content carousel is derived from the first 50 titles in a title list or saved search that the organization representative shares, or from a record set that the staff member selects on the Community Record workform. With Feature it, a separately licensed product, organizations can promote a set of resources relevant to a specific search.

    +

    With the optional ContentXChange feature, community organizations can incorporate features from their community record (content carousel, calendar of events, content drawers, library catalog search box, Ask-a-Librarian button, and a map) into their organization’s web page. If the organization does not have a web presence, a librarian can help the organization create a personalized web page using ContentXChange. The organization can submit the URL to Google™, Yahoo!®, and Bing™ for indexing so that it is searchable and accessible through the web.

    +

    ContentXChange Installation

    +

    ContentXChange is an optional web component of Polaris server software and must be selected when Polaris web server software is installed. After installation, select the appropriate server in Polaris Administration and, in the server’s PAC parameter URL of the ContentXChange root, specify the URL of the server where ContentXChange is installed:

    +

    http://<servername>/ContentXChange/ +

    +

    The location is typically your PAC server, and if so, you can simply copy the servername portion of the URL from the parameter URL of the PAC’s root.

    +

    For more information on the features and functions for Polaris Community Profiles, see the following topics:

    +

    Community Records in the Staff Client +

    +

    Creating and editing organization and event records in the staff client; printing community records and reports.

    +

    Importing Events for Community Profiles +

    +

    Importing library events information from Evanced Solutions or Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper to create event records in Polaris.

    +

    Campaigns for Community Promotions +

    +

    With Polaris Campaigns, libraries can automatically create promotions for existing community or event records, based on terms in the keyword indexed fields in these records.

    +

    Community Setup for PAC Display +

    +

    Setting community information search options for PAC; configuring the PAC search results display; editing organization and event records in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Editing Community Records in PAC +

    +

    Editing Community Profiles in the PAC. Designated community representatives use these instructions to edit their organizations’ Community Profiles. (These instructions may need to be revised depending on the library’s PAC customization.)

    +

    Using ContentXChange +

    +

    Incorporating features from the library or the organization’s library record into the organization’s own web page; creating a simple organization page for web searches.

    +

    CQL Access Points for Community Information +

    +

    Reference list of the CQL (Common Query Language) access points you can use to construct custom search filters for Polaris PowerPAC community information searches.

    +

    Community Profiles Reference +

    +

    Reference list of Polaris Administration profiles affecting Community Profiles.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community_Profiles_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community_Profiles_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f55814e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Community Profiles/Community_Profiles_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ + + + + + + + + Community Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles control PAC navigation and search options for community information. The profiles are available on the Profiles > Community tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecify the data elements that appear in the brief, full, and summary displays for community information in Mobile PAC search results. See Configuring the PAC Community Results Display. 
    +

    Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specify the data elements that appear in the brief, full, and summary displays for community information in PowerPAC search results. See Configuring the PAC Community Results Display.

    +
     
    +

    Community Information: ContentXChange marketing message

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specifies a brief (255 character maximum) marketing message that displays on an organization’s website with any features the organization representative has added to the site using ContentXChange: Powered by <library name> <marketing message>, where <marketing message> is the text you specify with this profile. See Specify an Optional Marketing Message. You can edit the Powered by portion of the message in WebAdmin; the string ID is CXC_POWEREDBY.

    +
    Blank (no message)
    +

    Dashboards: Narrow your search & related searches

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specifies the facets that appear for the Narrow Your Search and related Searches web parts in the dashboard for community information search results. See Community Search Results Facets in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
     
    +

    Days to continue showing event in PAC after event end date

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Sets the default number of days to display an event in a PAC user’s search results after the event end date, as specified in the staff client or PAC editor. The default setting is 7. The number of days can be manually edited in the staff client or PAC editor.

    +
     
    +

    Default view of events in PowerPAC

    +
    System, Library, BranchSets the default view of community events in the PAC: View as a list or View as a calendar. 
    +

    Navigation (Mobile PAC): Community - Keyword Search

    +
    System, Library, BranchDisplays the Community Keyword search option on the Mobile PAC Community menu. No
    +

    Navigation (PowerPAC): Community

    +
    System, Library, BranchDisplays the Community option on the Polaris PowerPAC menu bar. No
    +

    Navigation (PowerPAC): Community - Browse Search

    +
    System, Library, BranchDisplays the Community Browse search option on the Polaris PowerPAC Community menu. No
    +

    Navigation (PowerPAC): Community - Keyword Search

    (System, Library, Branch)

    +
    System, Library, BranchDisplays the Community Keyword search option on the Polaris PowerPAC Community menu. No
    +

    Navigation (PowerPAC): My Community Profile

    +
    System, Library, BranchDisplays the Community option on the Polaris PowerPAC My Record menu for logged-in patrons who have been designated as organization representatives. +

    No

    +
    +

    Search Settings Defaults

    +
    System, Library, BranchSpecifies default search settings for Community Browse and Community Keyword searches in PAC. 
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Circ_Holds_Transactions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Circ_Holds_Transactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bb1fed6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Circ_Holds_Transactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + + + EContent Circ/Holds Transactions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Circ/Holds Transactions

    +

    Circulation and hold request transactions for eContent are logged in the staff client. This includes circulation transactions initiated from the vendor’s application. Some circulation actions, such as resetting due dates, do not apply to eContent.

    +

    The following Polaris circulation activities apply to eContent:

    +

    Note:
    The default loaning branch for circulation transactions is the patron’s registered branch, but your library can set the loaning branch as the item’s assigned branch for eContent circulations. This allows patron-initiated circulations, where the patron checks out or places holds on eContent from the PAC, to be tracked separately from circulations for physical items. Patron-Initiated EContent Circulation from PAC.

    + +
      +
    • +

      Check-out and check-in transactions -

      +
        +
      • +

        Two subtype codes identify eContent: one for an electronic item; one for the vendor account. EContent circulation transactions are included in existing standard Polaris reports, and can be identified in Polaris SimplyReports.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Check-outs and check-ins done from the eContent vendor’s application are logged in Polaris after synchronization. The check-out subtype is 44 (Third party Checkout). The check-in subtype is 47 (Third party Checkin).

        +
      • +
      • +

        Checked out eContent titles are displayed in the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, and in the patron’s reading history. They can be removed from the reading history.

        +
      • +
      • +

        The due date is set at the point that the checkout occurs in Polaris, according to the rules established by the library’s account with the vendor. The due date includes the time due.

        +

        Note:
        Due dates (automatic expiration dates) for eContent are calculated from the check-out transaction date and time, not the download date and time.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • When an eContent item is checked in from PAC, the action is recorded in the Polaris item record. The due date, check-out date, original due date, current borrower and loaning branch fields are cleared, and the Last Borrower fields are populated. The check-in transaction is recorded in the item record history. +
    • +
    • + Hold request transactions - +
      • Econtent hold request created (6100)
      • Econtent hold requests satisfied (6101)
      • Econtent hold request canceled (6102)
    • +
    • These transactions include the following details: + +
      • Date/time
      • Vendor ID
      • Title
      • Bib ID
      • Patron ID and patron branch, if available
    • +
    • +

      Transaction subtypes identify the eContent type: eContent, Audio eContent, or Digital video recording.

      +
    • +
    • +

      EContent hold transaction types are not included in existing standard Polaris reports, but are available for reporting in Polaris SimplyReports, Patron History reports.

      +
    • +
    • +

      EContent requests placed from the PAC are not displayed in the Patron Status, Holds view or in other areas where holds display for physical items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item-level requests are not allowed, and eContent item records are automatically set to non-holdable.

      +
    • +
    + +

    The following circulation actions do not apply to eContent items:

    +
      +
    • +

      Fines

      +
    • +
    • +

      Renewal

      +
    • +
    • +

      Reset due date

      +
    • +
    • +

      Claim

      +
    • +
    • +

      Declare lost

      +
    • +
    • +

      Manual changes to the circulation status

      +
    • +
    • +

      Route lists

      +
    • +
    • +

      Course reserves

      +
    • +
    • +

      Shelving status

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Item_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Item_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ae1f3ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_Item_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + EContent Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Item Records

    +

    You can search for integrated eContent item records in the Polaris Find Tool by selecting Limit By > EContent (Integrated) and then selecting Yes, No or All.

    +

    + FTecontent.gif 

    +

    The EContent check box is checked automatically in the Item Record workform, which identifies the item record as an integrated eContent item record. Integrated eContent item records are assigned item barcodes with an eContent prefix.

    +

    No special permissions are necessary for working with eContent item records; the existing Item records: Create, Modify, Delete permissions also apply to eContent items.

    +

    + econtentitem.gif 

    +

    The Item Record workform is generally the same for eContent item records as for other types of item records, with the following additional features and exceptions:

    +
      +
    • Links - You can link to the vendor account and resource group. Select Links > Vendor Account or Resource Group from the Item Record workform or from the right-click menu for an item record listed in the Find Tool or another list.
    • +
    • Econtent check box - The Econtent check box is always checked for integrated eContent vendor item records; it is supplied automatically and cannot be changed.
    • +
    • File | New - You cannot create a new eContent item record from the Item Record workform if the item is from an integrated eContent vendor.
    • +
    • Assigned branch - If your library uses Resource Groups to limit access to eContent by branch, the assigned branch in the eContent item records should be in the resource group or digital branch selected in the integrated eContent vendor account. If the assigned branch is not in the resource group, the availability information in the PAC is negatively affected.
    • +
    • Additional read-only fields - These cannot be changed in the Item Record workform or via Item Bulk Change. See Read-Only Fields in Integrated EContent Items.
    • +
    • Vendor account and resource group - The vendor account and resource group are displayed on the Item Record workform’s Source and Acquisition view and the property page.
    • +
    • Added copy note - The History view displays the following note for added copies of an existing eContent title that is under the same vendor contract: Added copy created by API consumer service. 
    • +
    +

    Read-Only Fields in Integrated EContent Items

    +

    Certain fields in item records, such as the check out date, cannot be changed in item records regardless of the type of material. The following additional fields are read-only for integrated vendor eContent item records:

    +
      +
    • EContent Item Record workform header +
    • +
    • Barcode +
    • +
    • EContent (check box always checked)
    • +
    • ILL item (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Non-circulating item (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Display in PAC (check box always checked unless the copy has expired due to publisher restrictions)
    • +
    • Title (the Find button is disabled in the Item Record workform)
    • +
    • Bib control no. +
    • +
    • EContent Item Record workform Cataloging view +
    • +
    • Loan period +
    • +
    • Fine code +
    • +
    • Renewal limit +
    • +
    • Loanable outside system (check box always checked)
    • +
    • Do not mail to patron (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Holdable (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Pickup at this branch (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Patrons from this library and branches (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Patrons from this branch (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • Preferred borrowers (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • EContent Item Record workform Circulation view +
    • +
    • Renewals/limits +
    • +
    • EContent Item Record workform History view +
    • +
    • Do not float (check box always unchecked)
    • +
    • EContent Item Record workform Reserves view - The fields are always blank on the Reserves view.
    • +
    +

    EContent Item Records and Item Bulk Change

    +

    If you select an option in the Item Bulk Change dialog box, and the change cannot be made for some of the selected items because they are eContent, the changes are made in item records where the changes are possible, but not in the eContent items. The bulk change report lists the eContent item records that were not changed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_in_the_Polaris_Staff_Client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_in_the_Polaris_Staff_Client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f36b7676 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppStaff/EContent_in_the_Polaris_Staff_Client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + EContent in the Polaris Staff Client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent in the Polaris Staff Client

    +

    EContent can be circulated from the PAC only and not the Polaris staff client. If a staff member attempts to check out or renew an eContent title from the staff client, an error message displays. Staff members can search for and access eContent bibliographic and item records in the staff client. They can be placed in record sets and bulk changed.

    +

    To find eContent records for integrated eContent vendors, select the vendor in the Find Tool.

    +

    + limitbyVenacct.gif 

    +

    For more information on eContent bibliographic records and their resource entities, which enable the integration between Polaris and the vendor, see Resource Entities.

    +

    For more information on integrated eContent item records, see EContent Item Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Reactivate_a_suspended_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Reactivate_a_suspended_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e20e89da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Reactivate_a_suspended_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Reactivate a suspended integrated eContent vendor account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reactivating a Suspended Integrated eContent Vendor Account

    +

    Important:
    After activating a vendor account, or reactivating a suspended vendor account, an IIS reset is required so that the PAC shows the correct information for the vendor's resources. For example, the IIS reset enables the Check Out or Place Hold button to be displayed instead of the Temporarily Unavailable button. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +

    To reactive a suspended integrated eContent vendor account:

    +
      +
    1. Open the integrated eContent vendor account in the Vendor Account workform.
    2. +
    3. Check the Active check box.
    4. +
    5. Save the workform.
    6. +
    7. Perform an IIS reset.
    8. +
    +

    Results of Reactivating an Integrated eContent Vendor Account

    +

    When an integrated eContent vendor account is reactivated, the Active box is checked in the Vendor Account workform, all API processes resume, and the following changes occur in the PAC and Polaris staff client:

    +
      +
    • PAC - The Temporarily Unavailable changes back to the Check out or Place request button (whichever is appropriate).
    • +
    • Polaris Staff Client - The message Vendor Account Suspended no longer appears on the Resource view of the Bibliographic Record workform; automatic imports resume using the import profile specified in the vendor account; resource entities are built and used in circulation functions; and the item records are created during the import.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_an_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_an_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3d99141 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_an_integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Suspend an integrated eContent vendor account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suspending an Integrated eContent Vendor Account

    +

    To suspend an integrated eContent vendor account:

    +
      +
    1. Open the integrated eContent vendor account in the Vendor Account workform.
    2. +
    3. Clear the Active check box.
    4. +
    5. Save the workform.
    6. +
    7. Do an IIS reset.
    8. +
    +

    Note: +
    Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +

    Results of Suspending a Vendor Account

    +

    Changes will take effect after the IIS reset. When an integrated eContent vendor account is suspended, the following changes occur in the PAC and the Polaris staff client:

    +
      +
    • PAC - The Check out or Place request button changes to Temporarily Unavailable (the button text can be changed in WebAdmin).
    • +
    • Polaris Staff Client +
        +
      • Bibliographic Record - The Resource view of the Bibliographic Record workform indicates that the vendor account is suspended.
      • +
      • Import Profile - In the import profile associated with the vendor account, the vendor account’s name is listed with suspended after it. If you select a suspended vendor account and import records using the Polaris Import Setup window, resource entities are built during the import, but the entities are not accessible for circulation functions. In addition, in the absence of the API call, the import cannot determine how many items to build, so no item records are built. When the vendor account is reactivated and the synchronization process restarts, any necessary item records are generated.
      • +
      • Import Report - The import report indicates the vendor account was suspended at the time of import, so only one item record was built for each imported bibliographic record.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_and_Reactivate_an_Integrated_Vendor_Account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_and_Reactivate_an_Integrated_Vendor_Account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..897466dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAppSusVen/Suspend_and_Reactivate_an_Integrated_Vendor_Account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + Suspend and Reactivate an Integrated Vendor Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suspending and Reactivating an Integrated Vendor Account

    +

    In the event of a system disruption, you can temporarily suspend an integrated eContent vendor account. Suspending an account applies only to integrated eContent vendor accounts because it allows the library to temporarily suspend API calls. When a vendor account is suspended, most API processes stop, which temporarily disallows eContent check outs and hold requests, and stops the automatic creation of eContent item records from these API calls. Synchronization of circulation transactions continues to take place for records currently checked out; for example, automatic check in occurs when an item is due. After resolving the system problem, you can reactivate the suspended vendor account. All API calls resume.

    +

    Important:
    After activating a vendor account, or reactivating a suspended vendor account, an IIS reset is required so that the PAC shows the correct information for the vendor's resources. For example, the IIS reset enables the Check Out or Place Hold button to be displayed instead of the Temporarily Unavailable button. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis30MobPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis30MobPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8806985 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis30MobPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Check out and download Axis360 eContent from Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Out and Download Axis360 eContent from Mobile PAC

    +

    Before checking out the Axis 360 eContent in Polaris, the patron must first go to the library’s Axis 360 Magic Wall web page and create an account using their library barcode, password, and the email address in their Polaris library account.

    +

    When checking out Axis 30 integrated eContent from Mobile PAC, the user selects the title in the Mobile PAC search results and selects Check Out on the Title page to go to the Check Out page.

    +

    + +

    +

    On the Check Out page, the user selects the Check Out button.

    +

    + +

    +

    A confirmation message informs the user that the eContent has been checked out and is ready to download.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis360PowPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis360PowPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be48ca7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis360PowPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Check out and download Axis360 eContent from PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Out and Download Axis360 eContent from PowerPAC

    +

    Before checking out the Axis 360 eContent in Polaris, the patron must first go to the library’s Axis 360 Magic Wall web page and create an account using their library barcode, password, and the email address in their Polaris library account.

    +

    To check out the eContent in the PAC, the patron logs in to their account, and clicks or taps the Check Out button, which opens a light box.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron clicks or taps Check Out Now.

    +

    + +

    +

    A confirmation message box informs the user that the eContent title is checked out and ready to download.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron goes to the Axis 360 app on their device, logs into their Axis 360 account, selects My lists, Items on Loan, and downloads the eContent.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Added_Expired_Copies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Added_Expired_Copies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..478123dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Added_Expired_Copies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Axis 360 Added/Expired Copies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Axis 360 Added/Expired Copies

    +

    The API consumer service queries Axis 360 on a daily basis and synchs the number of eContent item records for each resource entity, either adding or removing eContent item records as necessary. For details on the synch process, see Integration with Polaris and eContent Vendors.

    +

    The item records are populated from the fields in the item template selected in the Axis 360 Vendor Account record. Only one Ebook automatic import item template can be selected in the vendor account, but the incoming added copies could be for either ebooks or downloadable audio ebooks. Since the library may need to modify fields, such as the item material type, collection etc., the added copy item records are automatically placed in a record set to make them easier to find and modify. Each vendor account can have only one record set for added copies, named following this pattern:
    E-added copies_VendorAccountName_ID=nnn 

    +

    If necessary, the vendor account name is truncated to fit the 50-character record set name limit, and the vendor account ID follows the name.

    +

    Example: E-added copies_Axis 360_ID=14 +

    +

    The record set owner is the same as the Ebook automatic import item template owner. If the owner is changed, a new system-generated record set with the correct owner is automatically created the next time the added copy process runs. If the record set is deleted or renamed, a new one is created automatically.

    +

    A staff member with the appropriate permissions can bulk change the item records in the record set. After making the changes, the records should be removed from the record set.

    +

    + Axisaddcopy.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_EContent_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_EContent_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd4a2d95 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_EContent_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Axis 360 EContent Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Axis 360 EContent Integration

    +

    Libraries using the Polaris ILS can catalog, display in PAC, manage access, and circulate eContent from Baker & Taylor’s Axis 360. Innovative Interfaces requires a license for each integrated eContent vendor and for the Polaris API (PAPI). Axis 360 uses Polaris API (PAPI) authentication, and Polaris requires an SSL certificate for PAPI server security.

    +

    Once the library has a subscription with Baker & Taylor’s Axis 360 and the Polaris licenses, the library creates an item template, an integrated vendor account, and an import profile in Polaris. The vendor account is in Polaris Administration, not in Acquisitions, and it is used during importing to create resource entities in the eContent bibliographic records. After the setup is complete, the library imports the eContent MARC data using special features that are required to support the integration.

    +

    As a result of this integration, patrons can search for, place holds on, and check out Axis 360 eContent directly from the PAC. All associated circulation processing and tracking for these integrated eContent occurs in Polaris.

    +

    Axis 360 and Polaris Synchronization

    +

    Availability and hold counts (total number of copies, number of available copies, and number of holds) for Axis 360 eContent titles appear in the PAC based on the status of the items in the Axis 360 repository, not on the status of the items in the Polaris database. Patrons can see the availability information whether they are logged into their library account or not.

    +

    When a library purchases a new title, Axis 360 sends a push notification that the title is available, the import process automatically imports the new titles, and the title appears in the PAC within minutes. The availability counts for existing cloudLibrary titles are automatically updated when the library purchases additional copies or when copies expire because of publisher limits.

    +

    When a patron checks out or places a hold on an Axis 360 title in Polaris, the data is immediately updated in the Polaris database and in the vendor's repository. However, when a patron uses the Axis 360 app to initiate circulation, the synchronization process takes longer because the app uses the Polaris API to push the data to Polaris, and then the API consumer service completes the process. The API consumer service also performs a periodic "pull" query of the Axis 360 database and then synchonizes the data if any circulation activity was detected.

    +

    The Polaris database and Axis 360 are synchonized according to circulation activity as follows:

    +
      +
    • Holds - Real time
    • +
    • Check-out or Check-in from the PAC - Real time
    • +
    • Check-out or Check-in from Axis 360- Every 5-15 minutes
    • +
    • Added copy for an existing title - Once daily (overnight)
    • +
    • Expired copy for an existing title - Once daily (overnight)
    • +
    • Added title - new MARC record - N/A
    • +
    +

    To ensure that the API consumer service synchronizes transactions correctly when a server is rebooted, the API consumer service attempts to connect every 35 seconds for 20 minutes. If it fails to connect, the service stops.

    +

    See Implementing EContent Integration - Overview for a checklist of the components necessary for Polaris integration with eContent vendors.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Import_Jobs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Import_Jobs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04f1353a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_Import_Jobs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + Axis 360 Import Jobs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Axis 360 Import Jobs

    +

    The Import Jobs Queue lists import jobs by the date and time posted, whether the import jobs are for eContent bibs or other types of records. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them.

    +

    You can view or print a report for completed import jobs from the Import Jobs Queue window. The import report provides details regarding the import profile that was used, the settings in the import profile, the records created, errors (if any), and other details.

    +

    See: View the Jobs or Print Reports for Axis 360 Imports

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_MARC_Tags_-_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_MARC_Tags_-_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6236a8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Axis_360_MARC_Tags_-_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Axis 360 MARC Tags - Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Axis 360 MARC Tags - Reference

    +

    When a user selects an Axis 360 vendor account in the import profile, the following MARC tags are used in the import process to create resource entities and enable integration between Axis 360 records and Polaris:

    +

    Note:
    For more information, see Resource Entities.

    +
      +
    • 037 - The 037 (source of acquisition) tag is required for creating the resource entity. Baker & Taylor provides the 037.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    037        ‡adk42g9‡bBaker & Taylor Axis 360‡nhttp://eContent.Baker & Taylor.com +

    +
      +
    • 852 - During import initialization, if the incoming Axis 360 records have 852 tags, they are removed from the records. New 852 tags are added for the correct number of copies.
    • +
    • 856 40 - During import initialization, the 856 tags with a first indicator (access method) of 4 (HTTP) and a second indicator of 2 (related resource) are updated with a second indicator of 0 (resource). The tag is then converted to a resource entity and moved to the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform. It does not display in the MARC view.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    856 40 ‡uhttp://poldev1.axis360qa.baker-taylor.com/Title?itemid=0012371026‡3Axis 360 eContent‡xPolDev3 +

    +
      +
    • 856 42 - An 856 tag for the Axis 360 cover image is inserted into the record. The tag is copied to the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform and then changed to a 956 tag, which is retained in the MARC view.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    856   42   ‡uhttp://images.btol.com/ContentCafe/Jacket.aspx?UserID=polaris-test&Password=polaris-test&Return=1&Value=9781458123299&Type=S

    +
      +
    • 856 42 $3 - During initializing, subfield 3 is populated by the Default URL link text field in the Axis 360 Vendor Account record.
    • +
    • 008 and 007 - The values required to create eContent Type of Material (TOM) codes may not be present in the Axis 360 records. You can use Bibliographic Bulk Change process to change or insert the appropriate tags and/or values.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_an_Axis_360_integrated_vendor_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_an_Axis_360_integrated_vendor_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64faa7a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_an_Axis_360_integrated_vendor_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + Create an Axis 360 integrated vendor account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating an Axis 360 Integrated Vendor Account

    +

    Vendor records and vendor accounts are accessed through the Polaris Administration Explorer; they cannot be accessed from the Find Tool. Polaris Administration ownership and inheritance do not apply to vendor records or vendor accounts.

    +

    To create an Axis 360 vendor account:

    +

    Note:
    Vendor account permissions are not organization-specific, and users in the Admin group are granted these permissions: Vendor Account: Access, Create, Modify, Delete.

    +

    Tip:
    You cannot create a new Vendor Account by selecting File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System > Vendor.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Expand the Vendors node in the left pane to display the eContent vendors.
    2. +
    3. Select the Axis 360 (integrated) vendor, right-click, and select New.
    4. +
    +

    + rghtclickNewV.gif 

    +

    The Vendor Account workform opens with Axis 360 (integrated) in the Vendor name box.

    +

    + AxisNewVenAcct.gif 

    +
      +
    1. View the system-supplied fields and enter information in the editable fields:
      • Vendor name - System-supplied; read-only
      • Integrated circulation vendor - This check box is automatically checked if the vendor’s eContent is integrated with Polaris.
      • Active - This check box is initially unchecked when you are creating a vendor account for an integrated eContent vendor. Leave the check box unchecked, and enter the account information. Innovative Interfaces activates the vendor account.
      • Vendor account name - (required) The library supplies a unique name to identify the account.
      • AccountID - The account ID is supplied by Polaris when the account is saved, and it appears in the title bar of the Vendor Account workform.
      • Vendor account description (optional) - The library can add a description for the vendor account.
      • Resource group (optional) - The library can select a resource group to limit access to the eContent by branch. For more information on resource groups, see Polaris staff client online Help.
      • Icon URL (optional) - The library can specify a URL location for the icon that represents the eContent vendor.
      • Vendor contract ID - The vendor’s contract ID is required for integrated eContent vendors. The contract ID must be unique, and it can contain up to 255 characters.
      • Vendor account access ID - The library’s access ID for the eContent vendor account.
      • Vendor account access key - The library’s access key for the eContent vendor account.
      • Vendor account base path - The URL path to the library’s resources at eContent vendor.
      • Vendor account server name - The vendor account server name.
      • Vendor account use SSL - The library selects Yes or No to indicate whether Secure Socket Layer is used.
      • Vendor account item template ID - The library creates the item template used during the API-driven processes. For Axis 360, this template is used for added copies only. The item template name must begin with Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import.
      • Content cafe cover image user name
      • Content cafe cover image password
    2. +
    +

    Tips:
    The library’s server should be set within 5 minutes of the correct time because Baker & Taylor has a 5-minute time-difference threshold on their servers. In addition, SSL must be configured correctly.

    +
      +
    • Library OAuth - Used to grant the Polaris ILS an access token, which is used to access the Axis 360 API.
    • +
    • Default URL link text - Identifies the URL link text and is also used as hover text for the vendor icon.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Save the Vendor Account workform.
    2. +
    3. Click the Test Connection button to test the API settings in the vendor account and ensure that a connection is made to the vendor’s service (Baker & Taylor Axis 360 API).
    4. +
    +

    If the test is successful, a message confirms that the connection was made. If a connection problem is encountered, one of the following messages may appear: Library account does not exist; Incorrect URL; There was a problem communicating with the Baker & Taylor Axis 360 API service; or other error messages as they become implemented by the Baker & Taylor API service.

    +
      +
    1. Ask your Polaris representative to activate the vendor account.
    2. +
    +

    This starts the API consumer service. To check the status of the service, see Polaris API Consumer Services.

    +

    Important:
    After activating a vendor account, or reactivating a suspended vendor account, an IIS reset is required so that the PAC shows the correct information for the vendor's resources. For example, the IIS reset enables the Check Out or Place Hold button to be displayed instead of the Temporarily Unavailable button. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_the_Axis_360_eContent_import_profile_s.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_the_Axis_360_eContent_import_profile_s.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45dd330d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Create_the_Axis_360_eContent_import_profile_s.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Create the Axis 360 eContent import profile(s) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating the Axis 360 eContent Import Profile(s)

    +

    Note:
    These are suggestions for setting up the import profiles for Axis 360 eContent processing; your Polaris site manager can assist you in setting up the import profiles to support your library’s specific needs.

    +

    Depending on your library’s purchasing and processing workflow for Axis 360 eContent, you may need to create multiple import profiles to support the following parts of the process:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable integration for existing Axis 360 non-integrated eContent bibs - Export and then re-import the non-integrated Axis 360 eContent titles.See Integrating Existing Axis 360 EContent.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable integration for eContent titles downloaded from TS3 - Import bibliographic records and enable integration for titles that have not yet been ordered. Then, bulk add the bibs to create the purchase order. SeeIntegrating New Axis 360 Bibs (Pre-Order) .

      +
    • +
    • +

      Overlay Axis 360 integrated eContent bibs and retain resource entities - Fully cataloged eContent bibs can be imported to overlay existing integrated eContent bibs while retaining the resource entities that enable the integration. SeeOverlaying Axis 360 EContent Bibs.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Export_the_record_set_of_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Export_the_record_set_of_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9091a2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Export_the_record_set_of_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Export the record set of non-integrated Axis 360 eContent records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Exporting the Record Set of Non-Integrated Axis 360 eContent Records

    +

    Note:
    If your library has SimplyReports and Export Express, you can select the record set to export. If your library does not have Export Express, your Polaris Site Manager can assist you with exporting the record set from the staff client.

    +

    To export the Axis 360 eContent records using Export Express:

    +
      +
    1. Log in to SimplyReports.
    2. +
    3. Select the Bib list reports tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Export Express > MARC file > No holdings.
    6. +
    +

    Expand the Bibliographic record general filters, select Bib record set, and select the record set.

    +

    + simprepAxisex.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_Axis_360_eContent_bibs_downloaded_from_TS3.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_Axis_360_eContent_bibs_downloaded_from_TS3.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af644cce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_Axis_360_eContent_bibs_downloaded_from_TS3.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + Import Axis 360 eContent bibs downloaded from TS3 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Import Axis 360 eContent Bibs Downloaded from TS3

    +

    To set up the import profile for importing the Axis 360 eContent bibs downloaded from TS3 and enable integration with Polaris:

    +

    Note:
    Once you have set up the import profile and saved it (step 1), any staff member with the appropriate Polaris permissions can select it for subsequent imports of Axis 360 records downloaded from TS3.

    +
      +
    1. Create an import profile specifically for importing Axis 360 bibs downloaded from TS3:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For general information about creating, copying, and modifying import profiles, see Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Create a new, blank import profile or start with a PolarisExec import profile and copy it.
    2. +
    3. On the Profile Setup tab, type a name for the import profile, select the Axis 360 vendor account in the Vendor account drop-down list box, and click Save to save the import profile.
    4. +
    +
    +

    + impProfilesetupAxis.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Bibliographic Records tab and select or modify the options. Work with your Polaris site manager to determine the settings appropriate for your library. See Examples of Settings for TS3 Imports
    2. +
    3. Select the Item Records tab and clear the Build item records check box.
    4. +
    +
    +

    (EContent item records will be built by the overnight sync process once the titles have been ordered.)

    +

    + impProfileItemsTS3.gif.

    +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select the Authority Records tab, and modify the settings.
    2. +
    3.  (Optional) Select the Record Set tab, and modify the settings.
    4. +
    5. Save the import profile.
    6. +
    +
    +

    The import profile is ready for any staff member with the appropriate permissions to select when importing pre-order Axis 360 eContent records from TS3.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Express Import or Full Import.
    2. +
    3. Select the import profile created for importing Axis 360 records from TS3.
    4. +
    5. Click Add and select the file of Axis 360 eContent bibliographic records downloaded from TS3.
    6. +
    7. Click Import.
    8. +
    +

    The import job is added to the import queue. See Axis 360 Import Jobs . Once the import processing is complete, the Axis 360 eContent records are integrated with Polaris.

    +

    If your library follows this workflow, the imported records can be bulk-added to create the purchase order and the order can be sent to Baker & Taylor via EDI. See Create a purchase order by bulk adding titles.

    +

    When releasing the purchase order, the Display in PAC option can be selected so that patrons can place holds on these on-order titles.

    +

    However, on-order items must not be created when the purchase order is released because the eContent item records are created by the overnight sync process when the titles have been purchased. When releasing an order for Axis 360, select No when the dialog box asks if you want to create on-order items.

    +

    + OnOrderItemsNo.gif 

    +

    Later, the library can import the full MARC records to overlay these “placeholder” bibs, while retaining the resource entities that enable the integration with Polaris. See Overlaying Axis 360 EContent Bibs.

    +

    Examples of Settings for TS3 Imports

    +


    The following are examples of settings on the import profile’s Bibliographic Record tab to support a specific workflow. Your library may choose other options for importing TS3 pre-order bibs. +
    +
    Display in PAC box is unchecked because the library opts to display these records only after the purchase order is released.

    Perform MARC Validation and Perform Authority Control boxes are unchecked because the records are not yet fully cataloged.

    Perform Duplicate Detection and Use profile defined duplicate detection rules are selected. The profile-defined rule is incoming 037$a = existing 037$a. If the incoming records include added copies, they are detected based on this rule.

    Reject incoming record; add MARC retention tags to database record is selected for processing suspected duplicate bibs. Keep MARC tags is selected automatically.

    Profile defined overlay retention tags is selected, and the 970 tag and indicators are the tags to retain. This allows the ordering data for added copies to be retained in the database record.

    +

    + impProfileBibsTS3.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_existing_Axis_360_records_to_enable_the_integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_existing_Axis_360_records_to_enable_the_integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8cadfa92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_existing_Axis_360_records_to_enable_the_integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + Import existing Axis 360 records to enable the integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Importing Existing Axis 360 Records to Enable the Integration

    +

    To set up the import profile, and then import the file of exported non-integrated Axis 360 records to enable their integration with Polaris Circulation:

    +
      +
    1. Create an import profile specifically for importing existing non-integrated Axis 360 eContent as follows:
      1. Select the Integrated ebook Bibs PolarisExec import profile in the Profile Manager, right-click, and select Copy.
      2. On the Profile Setup tab, type a new name for the import profile, and select the Axis 360 vendor account.
    2. +
    +

    + proftabAxisImpExisting.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Bibliographic Records tab and set the duplicate detection options that are appropriate for your library. Work with your Polaris site manager to determine which settings to modify.
    2. +
    3. Select the Item Records tab and select the item template created for Axis 360 eContent
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can select any item template, but if your library uses resource groups, ensure that the item template’s assigned branch is in the resource group with access to the Axis 360 vendor account.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select the Authority Records tab, and modify the settings.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) Select the Record Set tab, and modify the settings.
    4. +
    5. Save the import profile.
    6. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Express Import or Full Import.
    2. +
    3. Select the import profile created for integrating existing non-integrated Axis 360 eContent.
    4. +
    +

    + importProfilesetup.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Add and select the file to import.
    2. +
    3. Click Import.
    4. +
    +

    The Axis 360 titles are imported and integrated with Polaris circulation. After the import is complete, an overnight process synchronizes items out and hold requests in existing patron accounts.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to add call numbers from the 099 tag to the newly-created eContent item records, you can select the Use call number fields from bib record setting on the Item Bulk Change dialog box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_Axis_360_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_Axis_360_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9194024c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_Axis_360_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + Import fully-cataloged bibs to overlay Axis 360 bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Importing Fully-Cataloged Bibs to Overlay Axis 360 Bibs

    +

    To set up an import profile designed for importing fully-cataloged Axis 360 eContent bibliographic records, and then import the records using the profile.

    +

    Note:
    Once you have set up the import profile and saved it (step 1), any staff member with the appropriate Polaris permissions can select it for subsequent imports of full Axis 360 bib records.

    +
      +
    1. Create an import profile specifically for importing fully-cataloged Axis 360 from Baker & Taylor or another vendor by copying the PolarisExec Integrated ebook Bibs import profile, or create a new import profile.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For general information about creating, copying, and modifying import profiles, see Setting Up Import Profiles.

    +
      +
    1. On the Profile Setup tab, type a name for the import profile, select the Axis 360 vendor account in the Vendor account drop-down list box, and click Save to save the profile.
    2. +
    +

    + impProfFullAxis.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the Bibliographic Records tab and verify that the following options are set:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    The Bibliographic Records tab must be set up to:

    - perform duplicate detection using profile-defined rules;
    - these rules must include incoming 037$a = existing 037$a;
     - the incoming records must be retained as final;
     - 856 tags must be retained from overlaid bibs.

    Other settings may be defined according to your library’s workflow. Work with your Polaris site manager to set up this import profile specifically for overlaying Axis 360 pre-order bibs.

    +
    +
      +
    • Perform duplicate detection - The check box must be selected.
    • +
    • Use profile defined duplicate detection rules - The check box must be selected.Rules to apply (as unique groups) - The profile-defined rules must include incoming 037$a = existing 037$a
    • +
    • Save incoming record as final; replace database record - This option must be selected under If a duplicate is found.
    • +
    • Keep MARC tags - The check box must be selected.
    • +
    • Profile defined overlay retention tags - This option must be selected, and the following tags must be listed as profile-defined overlay retention tags:
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • 856 - any indicator 1 or 2 value.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    + retain856tag.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the settings for the Bibliographic Records tab.
    2. +
    3. Select the Item Records tab and verify that the options for building item records are set correctly.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Item records are created by the overnight synch process after the Axis 360 titles are ordered. If you select the option to build item records when importing full Axis 360 bibs, item records are created only under certain circumstances. Work with your Polaris site manager to determine which item record options to select.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select the Authority Records tab, and modify the settings.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) Select the Record Set tab, and name the record sets to identify the type of records being imported.
    4. +
    5. Save the import profile.
    6. +
    +

    The import profile is ready for any staff member with the appropriate permissions to select when importing fully-cataloged Axis 360 eContent records.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Express Import or Full Import.
    2. +
    3. Select the import profile created for importing fully-cataloged Axis 360 records.
    4. +
    5. Click Add and select the file of Axis 360 eContent bibliographic records downloaded from TS3.
    6. +
    7. Click Import.
    8. +
    +

    The import job is added to the import queue. See View the jobs or print reports for Axis 360 imports . Once the import processing is complete, the pre-order Axis 360 eContent records are overlaid with the fully-cataloged records, and the Axis 360 titles retain the resource entities that enable the integration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_Existing_Axis_360_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_Existing_Axis_360_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88d70557 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_Existing_Axis_360_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Integrating Existing Axis 360 EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating Existing Axis 360 EContent

    +

    If your library already has Axis 360 eContent records in its catalog, resource entities must be created for these records to enable integration with Polaris Circulation. This process involves locating all the Axis 360 eContent bibliographic records, putting the records in a record set, exporting the records to a file, optionally deleting the bibliographic records from the Polaris database, and then re-importing them using the import profile set up for integrating Axis 360 eContent records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_New_Axis_360_Bibs_Pre-Order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_New_Axis_360_Bibs_Pre-Order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb6ab275 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Integrating_New_Axis_360_Bibs_Pre-Order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Integrating New Axis 360 Bibs (Pre-Order) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating New Axis 360 Bibs (Pre-Order)

    +

    If your library creates Polaris purchase orders for Axis 360 eContent titles by downloading bibs from Baker & Taylor’s Title Source 3 (TS3), importing the downloaded bibs, and then bulk-adding them to the purchase order, you can continue to use this workflow for integrated Axis 360 eContent records. At this point in the process, the records downloaded from TS3 are “placeholder” bib records for pre-publication titles or for published titles that have not been ordered yet. These records are not fully cataloged and lack the 856 tags that link to the eContent and enable the integration with Polaris.

    +

    Therefore, if your library uses TS3 for selecting and downloading Axis 360 records, your TS3 MARC Profile List must be set up first to supply the following sub-fields in the 037 tags of the downloaded Axis 360 records:

    +

    Note:
    See Set up the Baker & Taylor TS3 MARC Profile List.

    +
      +
    • 037$a BT key string - The import process that creates resource entities for these placeholder records depends on the presence of the Baker & Taylor “BT key” in the 037$a of the imported record. This also provides a unique identifier for deduplication when the full MARC record is imported at a later date.
    • +
    • 037$nTSeContent- To allow pre-publication titles to be integrated in the PAC, so that patrons can place holds on them, Polaris relies on the presence of an 037$n tag containing the string: TSeContent (case does not matter).
    • +
    +

    When the files containing these 037 tags are imported using an import profile with Axis 360 selected in the Vendor Account field, 856 tags are constructed during import initialization using the data in these 037 tags and data from the selected Axis 360 vendor account. The constructed 856 tags follow this pattern:

    +

    856 40 ‡u{contractID}.baker-taylor.com/Title?itemID={string from 037 a subfield}‡3{Default URL link text string from vendor account}‡x{contractID}

    +

    During the import process, these constructed 856 tags are used to create the resource entities in the bibliographic records. See Resource Entities. No item records are created because the titles have not yet been ordered.

    +

    When releasing the purchase order, the user must not create on-order items because the eContent item records are created by the overnight sync process after the titles have been purchased.

    +

    See also:

    +

    Import Axis 360 eContent Bibs Downloaded from TS3 +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Overlaying_Axis_360_EContent_Bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Overlaying_Axis_360_EContent_Bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d722902a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Overlaying_Axis_360_EContent_Bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + Overlaying Axis 360 EContent Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overlaying Axis 360 EContent Bibs

    +

    When your library receives fully-cataloged Axis 360 eContent bibliographic records from Baker & Taylor or another vendor, a staff member imports these records using an import profile set up to: detect duplicates based on the 037 tag; overlay these duplicate with the full incoming records; and retain tags that create resource entities. See Import fully-cataloged bibs to overlay Axis 360 bibs.

    +

    Important:
    Inform the bibliographic record vendor that the fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records provided to overlay integrated eContent bibs must have the following requirements:

    +

      The records must be MARC or MARCXML bibliographic records.

    +

      The 037 tags must be retained because that tag contains the eContent item identifier and serves as a match point to detect duplicates during importing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Patron_Access_to_Axis_360_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Patron_Access_to_Axis_360_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5dc5d71f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Patron_Access_to_Axis_360_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Access to Axis 360 EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Access to Axis 360 EContent

    +

    For patrons who have logged into their PAC library accounts, the eContent available for checkout or hold requests depends on the Axis 360 vendor account and whether the patron’s registered branch has access to the eContent provided by that account. For more information about options for displaying, managing, and circulating eContent, see Managing EContent in the PAC.

    +

    When the Axis 360 eContent is accessible to the logged-in patron, a Check Out button is displayed in the PAC search results if the title is available. If the patron has access, but the title is not available because it is checked out, a Place Hold button is displayed. If the patron does not have access to the eContent title, a Restricted button is displayed with the hover text Sorry this title is currently not available at your registered branch. You can modify this text string in WebAdmin using the mnemonic: PACML_EBRESTRICTED_TIP.

    +

    The library can change the Check Out and Place Hold button text by modifying the following strings in WebAdmin:

    +
      +
    • PACML_AXISCHECKOUT +
    • +
    • PACML_AXISPLACEHOLD +
    • +
    +

    Before checking out the Axis 360 eContent in Polaris, the patron must first go to the library’s Axis 360 Magic Wall web page and create an account using their library barcode, password, and the email address in their Polaris library account.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Put_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent_records_in_a.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Put_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent_records_in_a.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e53ed81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Put_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_eContent_records_in_a.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Put existing non-integrated Axis 360 eContent records in a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Putting Existing Non-Integrated Axis 360 eContent Records in a Record Set

    +

    To locate the existing Axis 360 eContent records and put them in a record set:

    +

    Note:
    Work with your Polaris Site Manager to determine the best way to find these records. You may need to set up an SQL search in the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. Set up the search criteria in the Find Tool to find the existing non-integrated Axis 360 records.
    2. +
    3. Select the records in the results list, right-click, and select Add to record set.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_Baker_Taylor_TS3_MARC_Profile_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_Baker_Taylor_TS3_MARC_Profile_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a1532040 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_Baker_Taylor_TS3_MARC_Profile_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up the Baker & Taylor TS3 MARC Profile List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the Baker & Taylor TS3 MARC Profile List

    +

    The Polaris import processing and resource entity creation relies on the presence of the Baker & Taylor “BT key” in the 037$a of the imported record. To allow pre-publication titles to be integrated in the PAC, so patrons can place holds, Polaris relies on the presence of an 037$n tag containing the string TSeContent. If you use TS3 carts/downloads to order Axis 360 titles, you will need to set up your TS3 MARC Profile List to supply these two fields to the 037 tag in the bibliographic records that you download from TS3. Polaris also strongly recommends that you remove several other tags from the records before downloading from TS3.

    +

    Settings for the TS3 MARC Profile List:

    +
      +
    1. Copy the 947$c to the 037$a.
    2. +
    +

    + TS31.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Add the TSeContent string to the 037$.
    2. +
    +

    + TS32.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Remove the 024$a and the 028$a
    2. +
    +

    + TS33.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Remove all 856 tags
    2. +
    +

    If you do not use TS3 to order Axis 360 titles, the Axis 360 bibliographic records that you import into Polaris still must have the Baker & Taylor “BT key” in the 037$a.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_Axis_360.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_Axis_360.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15a379ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_Axis_360.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up the eContent item templates for Axis 360 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the eContent Item Templates for Axis 360

    +

    To enable the synch process to automatically create added copies for Axis 360 eContent titles, you must create an item template named Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import (additional text can be appended to this name, but it must begin with this string), and select this template in the Axis 360 Vendor Account workform. For more information, see Axis 360 Added/Expired Copies .

    +

    You can also create multiple other item templates, named however your library wishes, to create item records when re-importing existing Axis 360 records to enable integration with Polaris Circulation.

    +

    To set up the item templates for Axis 360:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select Item Template and click OK. 
    4. +
    +

    The Item Template workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the Axis 360 eContent item record.
      • If you are creating the item template that will be selected in the Vendor Account workform, it must be named Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import. Case does not matter, and other words can follow this string, but the name must begin with Ebook automatic import. For Axis 360, this template is used only for added copies.
      • If you are creating an item template to be selected in an Axis 360 import profile, type any name in the Name box. You can create as many of these templates as are appropriate for your library. For example, your library may already have non-integrated Axis 360 records of various types (ebook, audio ebook, etc.) in its database. When you re-import the records to enable their integration, you can select the appropriate template for the eContent.
    2. +
    3. In the Assigned box, select the branch for the eContent items that will be created using this template. If a resource group is selected in the Vendor Account, the Assigned branch selected in the item template must belong to the resource group.
    4. +
    5. In the Circulation status box, select In.
    6. +
    7. Select the Fine code and Renewal limit. These fields are required to save the item template, but they are ignored in eContent items circulation processing.
    8. +
    9. Select File > Save, click the save button, or press Ctrl+S.
    10. +
    +

    The template is saved.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_Axis_360_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_Axis_360_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eade2abc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_Axis_360_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Polaris for Axis 360 Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Polaris for Axis 360 Integration

    +

    Bibliographic records for Axis 360 titles are imported into Polaris using the import utility in the Polaris staff client. The import processing that integrates Axis 360 eContent with Polaris depends on specific settings in the item template, vendor account, and import profile. Your Polaris Site Manager can assist you with this setup.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_Axis_360_imports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_Axis_360_imports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad1e5be8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_Axis_360_imports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + View the jobs or print reports for Axis 360 imports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View the Jobs or Print Reports for Axis 360 Imports

    +

    To view import jobs in the Import Jobs Queue:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue to open the Import Jobs Queue window.
    2. +
    +

    By default, the jobs are sorted by the date and time posted. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them.

    +

    Tip: +
    If you do not need to view the report before printing it, you can select the import job in list, and click the Report button, or right-click and select Print Report.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the import job you want to view or print.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Report pdf appears in the preview window.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print to print the report displayed in the preview window.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/_Optional_Delete_the_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/_Optional_Delete_the_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b8152bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentAxis360/_Optional_Delete_the_existing_non-integrated_Axis_360_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + (Optional) Delete the existing non-integrated Axis 360 records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    (Optional) Deleting the Existing Non-Integrated Axis 360 Records

    +

    Note:
    Work with your Polaris site manager to determine if this task is right for your library. If you choose not to delete the bibliographic records, you must delete any item records that are linked to the bibliographic records. (New eContent item records will be created automatically during integration process.)

    +

    After exporting the records to a file on the desktop or another location, delete the records from the database.

    +

    To delete the non-integrated records from the Polaris database:

    +
      +
    1. Open the record set of the non-integrated records.
    2. +
    3. Delete the non-integrated Axis 360 eContent bibliographic records and their linked items from the Polaris database.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Added_Expired_Copies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Added_Expired_Copies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..854eb77d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Added_Expired_Copies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + cloudLibrary™ Added/Expired Copies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    cloudLibrary™ Added/Expired Copies

    +

    The API consumer service queries cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) daily and synchronizes the number of eContent item records for each resource entity, either adding or removing eContent item records as necessary. For details on the synch process, see EContent Vendor and Polaris Synchronization.

    +

    The item records are populated from the fields in the Ebook automatic import item template selected in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account workform. Only one Ebook automatic import item template can be selected in the vendor account, but the incoming added copies could be for either ebooks or audio ebooks. Since the library may need to modify fields, such as the item material type, collection etc., the added copy item records are placed in a record set to make them easier to find and modify.

    +

    EContent item records created during added-copy processing are automatically added to record sets. Each vendor account has only one system-supplied record set for added copies, named following this pattern:

    +

    E-added copies_VendorAccountName_ID=nnn 

    +

    If necessary, the vendor account name is truncated to fit the 50-character record set name limit, and the vendor account ID follows the name.

    +

    Example:
    E-added copies_3M_ID=10 +

    +

    The record set owner is the same as the Ebook automatic import item template owner. If the owner is changed, a new system-generated record set with the correct owner is automatically created the next time the added copy process runs. If the record set is deleted or renamed, a new one is created automatically. A staff member with the appropriate permissions can bulk change the item records in the record set. After making the changes, the records should be removed from the record set.

    +

    + Eadded3M.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_EContent_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_EContent_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36ba6cbf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_EContent_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + cloudLibrary eContent Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    cloudLibrary eContent Integration

    +

    When the library purchases eContent from Bibliotheca, the following automatic processes enable the integration with Bibliotheca's cloudLibrary eContent and Polaris:

    +
      +
    • Bibliotheca's API makes a call to the Polaris API (PAPI).   
    • +
    • The Polaris API consumer service is notified. This service allows the Polaris ILS to consume data from third-party APIs.
    • +
    • The Polaris API consumer service calls Bibliotheca's API and gets the MARCXML records and a count of the number copies for each eContent title the library purchased.
    • +
    • The Polaris API consumer service parses the MARCXML records and creates the appropriate number of holdings tags based on the holdings count.
    • +
    • The Polaris API consumer service then submits an automatic import job for processing.
    • +
    • The bibliographic records are imported automatically using the import profile selected in the Vendor Account workform. The Integrated ebook Bibs import profile is selected by default, but your library can select another import profile, provided it has the settings required for the integration.
    • +
    • Automatic import jobs appear in the Import Jobs Queue. The automatic import jobs are listed in the Import Jobs Queue in the same way as staff-initiated import jobs, and the import report provides details regarding the automatic import.
    • +
    • New bibliographic records for the integrated cloudLibrary eContent are saved in the Polaris database.
    • +
    • A Resource Entity is created for each 856 tag that contains cloudLibrary vendor account data and links to the eContent in the cloudLibrary repository. The vendor contract ID is in subfield x of the 856 tag. The Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform displays the Resource Entity. See Resource Entities.
    • +
    • Integrated eContent item records are created when the eContent bibs are automatically imported. During import initialization, the API determines how many item records need to be built, and 852 tags are inserted into the bibliographic records. When the bibliographic records are automatically imported, the appropriate number of item records are created using information in these tags as well as information in the Ebook automatic import item template selected in the 3M Vendor Account workform.
    • +
    • Auto-suggest and facets are updated the following day - PAC auto-suggest and search results facets for these newly imported eContent records are updated after the overnight jobs for these processes are run.
    • +
    +

    Then, when a patron checks out an eContent item in the Polaris PAC, the transaction is integrated between cloudLibrary and Polaris:

    +
      +
    • The PAC notifies Bibliotheca's API that an eContent checkout took place, in real time.
    • +
    • The item is checked out in the vendor’s service (cloudLibrary).
    • +
    • The item is checked out in Polaris.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Integrated eContent checkins through the PAC are handled the same way.

    +

    If the patron checks out the eContent directly from cloudLibrary, the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • Bibliotheca's API contacts PAPI to inform it that the checkout took place. These checkout calls to PAPI take place in a batch, which is sent to PAPI every 10-20 minutes.
    • +
    • The Polaris API consumer service monitors the PAPI checkout queue and processes any pending checkout transactions.
    • +
    • The item is checked out in Polaris.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Integrated eContent checkins through the vendor’s service (cloudLibrary) are handled the same way.

    +
      +
    • If your library also uses Bibliotheca's cloudLink feature to share digital collections among libraries in a cloudLink group, "external" patrons from other non-Polaris libraries in the cloudLink group can check out cloudLink titles held by Polaris libraries. For these checkouts from external patrons, Polaris assigns an item status of Econtent External Loan to the checked out item because the transaction cannot be associated with the patron. Polaris also returns those item records to In status when the external patron checks in the title in the cloudLibrary app, or when the loan period expires. See also: Implementing the cloudLink Feature.
    • +
    +

    cloudLibrary and Polaris Synchronization

    +

    Availability and hold counts (total number of copies, number of available copies, and number of holds) for cloudLibrary eContent titles appear in the PAC based on the status of the items in the cloudLibrary repository, not on the status of the items in the Polaris database. Patrons can see the availability information whether they are logged into their library account or not.

    +

    When a library purchases a new title, cloudLibrary sends a push notification that the title is available, the import process automatically imports the new titles, and the title appears in the PAC within minutes. The availability counts for existing cloudLibrary titles are automatically updated when the library purchases additional copies or when copies expire because of publisher limits.

    +

    When a patron checks out or places a hold on a cloudLibrary title in Polaris, the data is immediately updated in the Polaris database and in the vendor's repository. However, when a patron uses the cloudLibrary app to initiate circulation, the synchronization process takes longer because the app uses the Polaris API to push the data to Polaris, and then the API consumer service completes the process. The API consumer service also performs a periodic "pull" query of the cloudLibrary database and then synchonizes the data if any circulation activity was detected.

    +

    The Polaris database and cloudLibrary are synchonized according to circulation activity as follows:

    +
      +
    • Holds - Real time
    • +
    • Check-out or Check-in from the PAC - Real time
    • +
    • Check-out or Check-in from the cloudLibrary app - Every 5-15 minutes
    • +
    • Added copy for an existing title - Every 5-15 minutes
    • +
    • Expired copy for an existing title - Every 5-15 minutes
    • +
    • Added title - new MARC record - Every 5-15 minutes
    • +
    +

    To ensure that the API consumer service synchronizes transactions correctly when a server is rebooted, the API consumer service attempts to connect every 35 seconds for 20 minutes. If it fails to connect, the service stops.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Import_Jobs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Import_Jobs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1e9897a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/3M_Import_Jobs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + cloudLibrary Import Jobs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    cloudLibrary Import Jobs

    +

    The Import Jobs Queue lists import jobs by the date and time posted, whether the import jobs are for eContent bibs or other types of records. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them.

    +

    You can view or print a report for completed import jobs from the Import Jobs Queue window. The import report provides details regarding the import profile that was used, the settings in the import profile, the records created, errors (if any), and other details. See Managing Importing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/CloudLink730.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/CloudLink730.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04152dd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/CloudLink730.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Implementing the cloudLink Feature + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Implementing the cloudLink Feature

    +

    Libraries using the cloudLibrary eContent service can implement Bibliotheca's cloudLink feature whereby libraries in a cloudLink group can share digital collections across multiple cloudLibrary accounts. Bibliotheca's cloudLink groups are ILS-independent and can be used to connect existing cloudLibrary customers on different systems, usually based on geographic location. The Polaris integration can also support a "self-contained" cloud, where all libraries in the cloudLink group are on the same Polaris server.

    +

    To ensure that patron check-outs and requests appear under a single library when resources are being shared via cloudLink, use the Preferred Vendor Accounts policy table.

    +

    Note: +
    Existing cloudLibrary customers who are not using the cloudLink feature do not need to use the Preferred Vendor Accounts policy table. However, all cloudLink customers should use the policy table to provide the best patron experience.

    +

    Circulation Transactions for cloudLink Titles

    +

    When cloudLibrary titles are checked out through the PAC, Polaris uses the Item Library ID returned in the cloudLibrary API to associate the correct item record with the patron. For cloudLink libraries, one of two transaction types can be logged:

    +
      +
    • If the item belongs to a library that exists in the Polaris database, a normal check-out transaction is logged.
    • +
    • If the item does not belong to a library within the Polaris database, a new eContent check-out (6103) transaction is logged. This is different from a normal check-out transaction because there is no item record associated with the transaction. In addition, the following message appears: Your ebook has been successfully checked out. To provide faster access, this ebook was borrowed from a partner library. Please use your cloudLibrary reader to download or view this title.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_3M_eContent_import_profile_s.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_3M_eContent_import_profile_s.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7da6f7b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_3M_eContent_import_profile_s.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + Create CloudLibrary eContent Import Profile(s) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating CloudLibrary eContent Import Profile(s)

    +

    Note:
    These are suggestions for setting up the import profiles for cloudLibrary eContent processing; your Polaris site manager can assist you with setting up the import profiles to support your library’s specific needs.

    +

    The Integrated ebook Bibs import profile is a PolarisExec read-only import profile that enables eContent integration. It is selected by default in the cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) Vendor Account workform to enable automatic imports. Your library may copy and rename this import profile, and then select the renamed import profile in the Vendor Account workform, but the settings that create the resource entities must be retained. Before selecting an import profile other than the default Integrated ebook Bibs import profile in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account workform, consult with your Polaris site manager. See Automatic Import Profile Selected in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account .

    +

    Depending on your library’s processing workflow for cloudLibrary eContent, you may need to create an import profile to overlay cloudLibrary integrated eContent bibs with fully-cataloged bibs while retaining resource entities. See Overlaying cloudLibrary eContent Bibs.

    +

    If your library has existing non-integrated cloudLibrary eContent bibliographic records, delete them from the database, and delete any linked items. However, if you want to preserve cataloging work that was done for these non-integrated titles, you can export the bibs to a file, and then re-import them after the synch process has created the integrated eContent bibs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_a_3M_integrated_vendor_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_a_3M_integrated_vendor_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60bfeff4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Create_a_3M_integrated_vendor_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating a cloudLibrary Integrated Vendor Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating a cloudLibrary Integrated Vendor Account

    +

    To create a vendor account for a cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) integrated eContent vendor:

    +

    Tip:
    You cannot create a new Vendor Account by selecting File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Administration > Explorer > Vendor.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Administration Explorer - Vendor window appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the cloudLibrary vendor, right-click, and select New.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Vendor Account workform opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Modify the editable fields and test the vendor connection as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Required fields are labeled in bold.

    +
      +
    • Vendor name - cloudLibrary (Integrated). System-supplied; read-only
    • +
    • Integrated circulation vendor - This check box is automatically checked if the vendor’s eContent are integrated with Polaris.
    • +
    • Active - This check box is initially unchecked when you are creating a vendor account for an integrated eContent vendor. Leave the check box unchecked, and enter the account information. Innovative Interfaces activates the vendor account.
    • +
    • Vendor account name - (required) The library supplies a unique name to identify the account.
    • +
    • AccountID - The account ID is supplied by Polaris when the account is saved, and it appears in the title bar of the Vendor Account workform.
    • +
    • Vendor account description (optional) - The library can add a description for the vendor account.
    • +
    • Resource group (optional) - The library can select a resource group to limit access to the eContent by branch. For more information on resource groups, see Polaris staff client online Help.
    • +
    • Icon URL (optional) - The library can specify a URL location for the icon that represents the eContent vendor. The icon is always sized at 16x16 pixels so it is aligned correctly in the PAC. For an integrated eContent vendor, the icon appears next to the TOM icon in PAC displays. If a bibliographic record has multiple resource entities for different integrated vendor accounts, and more than one resource entity is eligible for display in PAC based on resource group filtering, the default icon for the PAC theme is used.
    • +
    • Vendor contract ID - The vendor’s contract ID is required for integrated eContent vendors. The contract ID must be unique, and it can contain up to 255 characters.
    • +
    • Vendor account access ID - The library’s access ID for the eContent vendor account.
    • +
    • Vendor account access key - The library’s access key for the eContent vendor account.
    • +
    • Vendor account base path - The URL path to the library’s resources at eContent vendor.
    • +
    • Vendor account server name - The vendor account server name.
    • +
    • Vendor account use SSL - The library selects Yes or No to indicate whether Secure Socket Layer is used.
    • +
    • Vendor account import profile ID - The import profile for automatic API-driven imports for the integrated eContent vendor. The PolarisExec Integrated eContent Bibs profile, or a renamed copy of this profile. See Create cloudLibrary eContent import profile(s).
    • +
    • Vendor account item template ID - The library creates the item template used during the automatic API-driven import process. The item template name must begin with eContent automatic import or eContent automatic import. See Set up the eContent item templates for cloudLibrary .
    • +
    +

    Tips:
    The library’s server should be set within 5 minutes of the correct time because 3M has a 5-minute time difference threshold on their servers. In addition, the SSL must be configured correctly.

    +
      +
    • Test connection - Save the Vendor Account workform, and click the Test Connection button to test the API settings in the vendor account and ensure that a connection is made to the vendor’s service (cloudLibraryAPI). If the test is successful, a message confirms that the connection was made. If a connection problem is encountered, one of the following messages may appear: Library account does not exist; Incorrect URL; There was a problem communicating with the cloudLibraryAPI service; or other error messages as they become implemented by the 3M API service.
    • +
    +

    The test details display the test start and end date/time, the test duration in milliseconds, and the API method used in the test, for example, Get Item circulation.

    +
      +
    1. Save the Vendor Account workform.
    2. +
    3. Ask your Polaris representative to activate the vendor account, which starts the API consumer service.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    After activating a vendor account, or reactivating a suspended vendor account, an IIS reset is required so that the PAC shows the correct information for the vendor's resources. For example, the IIS reset enables the Check Out or Place Hold button to be displayed instead of the Temporarily Unavailable button. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Delete_the_3M_non-integrated_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Delete_the_3M_non-integrated_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..713034b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Delete_the_3M_non-integrated_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + Deleting the cloudLibrary Non-Integrated Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting the cloudLibrary Non-Integrated Bibs

    +

    To delete the non-integrated bibs:

    +
      +
    1. Open the record set of non-integrated cloudLibrary eContent bibliographic records.
    2. +
    3. Delete the non-integrated eContent bibliographic records and their linked items from the Polaris database.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_3M_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_3M_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55789ca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_3M_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + Import Fully-Cataloged Bibs to Overlay cloudLibrary Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Importing Fully-Cataloged Bibs to Overlay cloudLibrary Bibs

    +

    To set up an import profile designed for importing fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records to overlay existing cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) records, and then import the records using the profile:

    +

    Note:
    Once you have set up the import profile and saved it (step 1), any staff member with the appropriate Polaris permissions can select it for subsequent imports of full bib records to overlay the cloudLibrary bibs.

    +
      +
    1. Create an import profile specifically for importing fully-cataloged bibs to overlay cloudLibrary records. You can copy the PolarisExec Integrated ebook Bibs import profile, or create a new import profile.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For general information about creating, copying, and modifying import profiles, see: Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

    +
      +
    1. On the Profile Setup tab, type a name for the import profile, select the cloudLibrary vendor account in the Vendor account drop-down list box, and click Save to save the profile.
    2. +
    +

    + 3MOverlayProf.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the Bibliographic Records tab and verify that the following options are set:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    The Bibliographic Records tab must be set up to:

    +

    • perform duplicate detection using profile-defined rules;

    +

    • these rules must include incoming 037$a = existing 037$a;

    +

    • the incoming records must be retained as final;

    +

    • 856 tags must be retained from overlaid bibs.

    +

    Other settings may be defined according to your library’s workflow. Work with your Polaris site manager to set up this import profile specifically for overlaying 3M bibs.

    +
      +
    • Perform duplicate detection - The check box must be selected.
    • +
    • Use profile defined duplicate detection rules - The check box must be selected.
    • +
    • Rules to apply (as unique groups) - The profile-defined rules must include incoming 037$a = existing 037$a
    • +
    • Save incoming record as final; replace database record - This option must be selected under If a duplicate is found.
    • +
    • Keep MARC tags - The check box must be selected.
    • +
    • Profile defined overlay retention tags - This option must be selected, and the following tags must be listed as profile-defined overlay retention tags: 856 - any indicator 1 or 2 value.
    • +
    +

    + retain856tag.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the settings for the Bibliographic Records tab.
    2. +
    3.  Select the Item Records tab and verify that the Build item records check box is not checked.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    cloudLibrary item records are created automatically via the automatic import process.

    +
      +
    1.  (Optional) Select the Authority Records tab, and modify the settings.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) Select the Record Set tab, and name the record sets to identify the type of records being imported.
    4. +
    5. Save the import profile.
    6. +
    +

    The import profile is ready for any staff member with the appropriate permissions to select when importing fully-cataloged eContent records to overlay cloudLibrary bibs.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Importing, Express Import or Full Import.
    2. +
    3. Select the import profile created for importing fully-cataloged records to overlay cloudLibrary bibs.
    4. +
    5. Click Add and select the file of fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records to replace the existing cloudLibrary records, while retaining the tags required for integration with Polaris Circulation.
    6. +
    7. Click Import.
    8. +
    +

    The import job is added to the import queue. Once the import processing is complete, the cloudLibrary bibs are overlaid with the fully-cataloged records, and they retain the resource entities that enable the integration. See cloudLibrary Import Jobs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_Existing_3M_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_Existing_3M_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4b1e391 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_Existing_3M_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + Integrating Existing cloudLibrary EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating Existing cloudLibrary EContent

    +

    If your library already has cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) eContent records in its catalog, you can locate them and delete the bibs and items. Then, the overnight synch process brings the titles into the database as integrated eContent.

    +

    To preserve cataloging work that was done for these non-integrated eContent bibs, you can export the records and then re-import them after the synch process has run. See Overlaying cloudLibrary eContent Bibs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_New_3M_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_New_3M_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2ffca5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Integrating_New_3M_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Integrating New cloudLibrary EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating New cloudLibrary EContent

    +

    The API-driven import process automatically imports the records when eContent titles are purchased from Bibliotheca's cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library). Staff members do not launch the import by selecting an import profile; the automatic import process uses the settings in the import profile selected in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account workform.

    +

    Once the library implements the components necessary to enable the integration, and the API-driven import process is up and running, the library purchases the cloudLibrary eContent, and the bibliographic records are imported automatically.

    +

    Automatic Import Profile Selected in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account

    +

    The Integrated ebook Bibs PolarisExec import profile, which is selected by default in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account workform, is set up to enable eContent integration for automatic imports. Since this is a PolarisExec read-only import profile, you cannot modify the settings, but you can copy and rename the profile. After saving the import profile with a different name, you can change the settings. If you rename the profile to use for automatic importing, the renamed import profile must be selected in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account workform.

    +

    Important:
    Since the automatic import relies on specific settings, consult with your Polaris site manager before selecting an import profile other than the Integrated ebook Bibs profile, which is selected by default in the cloudLibrary Vendor Account workform.

    +

    If you rename and modify the Integrated ebook Bibs import profile, the following settings must be retained:

    +
      +
    • On the Profile Setup tab, you can type a different name and description, but do not select a source file or a vendor account.
    • +
    +

    + IntEImpProfset.gif 

    +
      +
    • On the Bibliographic Records tab, do not change the settings.
    • +
    +

    + IntEImpBibs.gif 

    +
      +
    • On the Item Records tab, do not change the settings. Do not select a template because the item template used in automatic import processing is selected in the Vendor Account workform.
    • +
    +

    + IntEImpItems.gif 

    +
      +
    • The Authority Records tab is set to Do not save any records. Leave this setting.
    • +
    • On the Record Sets tab, you can rename the record sets without affecting the automatic import.
    • +
    +

    + IntEImpRecSet.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/MARC_Tags_in_3M_Bibs_-_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/MARC_Tags_in_3M_Bibs_-_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..62dc3733 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/MARC_Tags_in_3M_Bibs_-_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + MARC Tags in cloudLibrary Bibs - Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    MARC Tags in cloudLibrary Bibs - Reference

    +

    cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) supplies the following tags that are used for integrated eContent processing in Polaris:

    +

    Tip:
    The following fields are required for cloudLibrary integrated eContent records: 037$a and 856 40. If a cloudLibrary record is missing either of these fields, a resource entity is not created.

    +
      +
    • +

      037 tag containing cloudLibrary’s item ID - The 037, source of acquisition, tag is required for creating the resource entity.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example: +

    +

    037 ‡adk42g9‡b3M Cloud Library‡nhttp://eContent.3m.com +

    +
      +
    • +

      856 tag for the electronic resource itself - The 2nd indicator = 0 (resource). This tag is required for creating the resource entity. During importing, the contract ID in subfield x matches the resource with the vendor account, and the object ID identifies the eContent in the vendor’s repository. The tag is converted to a resource entity and moved to the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform.

      +
    • +
    +

       Example:

    +

    856 40 ‡33M Cloud Library‡uhttp://eContent.3m.com/library/polarisdemo-document_id-dk42g9$xbu8mf +

    +
      +
    • +

      856 tag for the cover image - The 2nd indicator = 2 (related resource). This tag is not required. If present, this tag is copied to the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform, then changed to a 956 and retained in the MARC view.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example: +

    +

    856 42 ‡3Cover Image‡uhttp://eContent.3m.com/delivery/img?type=DOCUMENTIMAGE&documentID=dk42g9&token=nobody +

    +
      +
    • +

      856 tag for the cloudLibrary cloud icon - The 2nd indicator = 2 (related resource). This tag is not required. If present, this tag contains a link to the cloudLibrary icon. This tag remains in the MARC view of the Bibliographic Record workform and is not copied to the Resources view.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example: +

    +

    856 42 ‡33M Cloud Icon‡uhttp://eContentdownload.3m.com/sites/prototypes/web/media/themes/mmm_patron/img/landing_page/step1.png +

    +
      +
    • +

      956 tag for the whole product - This tag is not required for the creation of the resource entity and is not copied to the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform; it remains in the MARC 21 view. It also displays the vendor’s contract ID and object identifier.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example: +

    +

    956 42 ‡3Whole product‡uhttp://cloudlibraryapi.3m.com/Library/bu8mf/Item/dk42g9 +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Overlaying_3M_eContent_Bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Overlaying_3M_eContent_Bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..914a6e13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Overlaying_3M_eContent_Bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Overlaying cloudLibrary eContent Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overlaying cloudLibrary eContent Bibs

    +

    When your library receives fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records to overlay existing cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) records, a staff member imports these records using an import profile set up to: detect duplicates based on the 037 tag; overlay these duplicate with the full incoming records; and retain tags that create resource entities. See Import fully-cataloged bibs to overlay cloudLibrary bibs.

    +

    Important:
    Inform the bibliographic record vendor that the fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records provided to overlay integrated eContent bibs must have the following requirements:

    +
      +
    • The records must be MARC or MARCXML bibliographic records.
    • +
    • The 037 tags must be retained because that tag contains the eContent item identifier and serves as a match point to detect duplicates during importing.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Patron_Access_to_3M_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Patron_Access_to_3M_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76639fbf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Patron_Access_to_3M_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Access to cloudLibrary EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Access to cloudLibrary EContent

    +

    For patrons who have logged into their library accounts, the eContent available for checkout or hold requests depends on the cloudLibrary vendor account and whether the patron’s registered branch has access to the eContent provided by that account. For more information about options for displaying, managing, and circulating eContent, see Managing EContent in the PAC.

    +

    When the cloudLibrary eContent is accessible to the logged-in patron, a Check Out button is displayed in the PAC search results if the title is available. If the patron has access, but the title is not available because it is checked out, a Place Hold button is displayed. If the hold request is satisfied by the patron's library, the patron can check out held titles from the PAC patron account once they become available for checkout. If the patron does not have access to the eContent title, a Restricted button is displayed with the hover text Sorry this title is currently not available at your registered branch. You can modify this text string in WebAdmin using the mnemonic: PACML_EBRESTRICTED_TIP. You can use resource groups to prevent titles from displaying at all if they are restricted, instead of displaying with a Restricted button.

    +

    Note: +
    Patrons can search for cloudLibrary titles, add them to lists, and view check-outs or requests under My Account in Mobile PAC, but they cannot perform any circulation actions for cloudLibrary titles using Mobile PAC.

    +

    The library can change the Check Out and Place Hold button text for cloudLibrary eContent by modifying the following strings in WebAdmin:

    +
      +
    • PACML_MMMCHECKOUT +
    • +
    • PACML_MMMPLACEHOLD +
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    To check out the eContent in the PAC, the patron clicks the Check Out button, which opens a light box.

    +

    The patron selects the format for the download (if it is available in more than one format), and clicks the Check Out Now button. A message confirms the check out if it is successful.

    +

    Important:
    Patrons can also create accounts in the cloudLibrary application by choosing their library and entering the patron barcode. The patron must sign up with the library account barcode, not the library account user name; otherwise, the patron’s transactions in the cloudLibrary application and in the PAC patron account will not be synchronized.

    +

    Tip:
    Charges for check-out do not apply to eContent.

    +

    The patron goes to the cloudLibrary app on their device, and downloads the eContent. First-time users must go to the cloudLibrary web page and download the cloudLibrary app on their device. For information on downloading the cloudLibraryapps, and the devices and formats that cloudLibrary supports, go to:

    +

     http://www.yourcloudlibrary.com/index.php/en-us/ +

    +

    Libraries using the cloudLibrary eContent service can implement Bibliotheca's cloudLink feature to share digital collections across cloudLibrary accounts. See Implementing the cloudLink Feature.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Put_existing_non-integrated_3M_bibs_in_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Put_existing_non-integrated_3M_bibs_in_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2d49b85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Put_existing_non-integrated_3M_bibs_in_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Putting Existing Non-Integrated cloudLibrary Bibs in a Record Set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Putting Existing Non-Integrated cloudLibrary Bibs in a Record Set

    +

    To locate the existing cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) eContent records and put them in a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Set up the search criteria in the Find Tool to find the existing non-integrated cloudLibrary records.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Work with your Polaris site manager to determine the best way to find these records. You may need to set up an SQL search in the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. Select the records in the results list, right-click, and select Add to record set.
    2. +
    3. Save the record set with a name that identifies the records as cloudLibrary non-integrated eContent records.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SetUpPrefVendAcctCloudLink.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SetUpPrefVendAcctCloudLink.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6c3c2c16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SetUpPrefVendAcctCloudLink.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Up the Preferred Vendor Accounts Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the Preferred Vendor Accounts Policy Table

    +

    If your library uses the cloudLink feature for sharing cloudLibrary titles among multiple libraries, use the Preferred Vendor Accounts policy table to ensure that patron check-outs and requests appear under a single library for resources that are being shared via cloudLink. Polaris libraries that use cloudLibrary without implementing the cloudLink feature do not need to use this table.

    +

    Note: +
    To add or delete entries in the table, you must have the new permission Modify preferred vendor accounts table: Allow. This permission is added by default to the Administrator permission group.

    +

    To add a Preferred Vendor Account to the table:

    +
      +
    1. Expand the System, Library, or Branch-level node in the Polaris Administration Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Select Policy Tables > Preferred Vendor Accounts.
    4. +
    +

    The Preferred Vendor Accounts policy table appears. The table contains an organization name, vendor description, and vendor account name. Only one preferred vendor account can be set for each branch. If a duplicate is found, the following message appears: An organization can only have one preferred vendor account per vendor.

    +
      +
    1. Click to open the Insert: Vendor Accounts dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the cloudLink account from the Vendor Account drop-down list, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Preferred Vendor Account is set for the organization.

    +

    Note: +
    If you delete a cloudLibrary vendor account, the corresponding entry in the Preferred Vendor Accounts policy table is automatically deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_3M.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_3M.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f464db86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_3M.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up the eContent item templates for 3M + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the eContent Item Templates for cloudLibrary

    +

    The Ebook automatic import item template is selected in the Vendor Account, and it supplies the default data used to create eContent item records during the API import process. This template can also be used for imports from the staff client import utility.

    +

    To set up the item template to associate with the vendor account:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select Item Template and click OK. 
    4. +
    +

    The Item Template workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import in the Name box. Case does not matter, and other words can follow this string, but the name must begin with Ebook automatic import.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the branch that owns the template in the Template owner box.
    2. +
    3. In the Assigned box, select the branch for the eContent items that will be created using this template. If a resource group is selected in the Vendor Account, the Assigned branch selected in the item template must belong to the resource group.
    4. +
    5. In the Circulation status box, select In.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    The Fine code and Renewal limit fields are required to save the item template, but they are ignored in eContent item circulation processing.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Fine code and Renewal limit.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the template.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_3M_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_3M_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99a354bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_3M_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Polaris for cloudLibrary Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Polaris for cloudLibrary Integration

    +

    To enable the import processing that integrates cloudLibrary eContent with Polaris, the item templates, vendor account, and import profiles must be set up correctly in Polaris. In addition, if your library uses the cloudLink feature whereby libraries in a cloudLink group can share digital collections across multiple cloudLibrary accounts, you can implement the Preferred Vendor Account policy table to prevent cloudLink titles from appearing under multiple branches. See Implementing the cloudLink Feature.Your Polaris site manager can assist your library with this setup.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SharedCloudLinkinPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SharedCloudLinkinPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45664948 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/SharedCloudLinkinPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Shared cloudLink Titles Display in the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Shared cloudLink Titles Display in the PAC

    +

    The cloudLibrary integration creates bibliographic records for titles owned by libraries within the Polaris database. These titles will display in the PAC and use the cloudLibrary API to display availability and holds. For cloudLink libraries, the availability and hold information is based on the entire cloudLink group. If the title within the cloudLink group is not owned by a library in the Polaris database, it will only be available to patrons from the cloudLibrary app.

    +

    Resource groups can be used with cloudLibrary integration to suppress eContent titles for different vendor accounts. However, cloudLink customers may want to disable the Honor Resource Groups in PAC search results setting because the real-time availability of items in a shared collection may change.

    +

    + +

    +

    Hold Requests for cloudLibrary Titles Displayed in the PAC

    +

    The real-time holds count displayed for cloudLibrary titles has been updated to consider cloudLink libraries. The previous holds count displayed the total of all requests in the holds queue. With a cloudLink system, this can give patrons an incorrect impression regarding the wait time for a title.

    +

    If the vendor account ID (connection branch or patron's branch) being used to view the holds count owns a copy of the title, the count will display onlly the holds for that library because that is the real wait time for that branch/patron.

    +

    If the vendor account ID (connection branch or patron's branch) being used to view the holds count does not own a copy of the title, the count will display the total holds for the cloudLink group.

    +

    For all cloudLibrary customers, the holds queue position will no longer display for cloudLibrary titles in PowerPAC or Mobile PAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_3M_imports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_3M_imports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cffc4512 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_3M_imports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Viewing the Jobs or Printing Reports for cloudLibrary Imports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing the Jobs or Printing Reports for cloudLibrary Imports

    +

    To view import jobs in the Import Jobs Queue:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue to open the Import Jobs Queue window.
    2. +
    +

    By default, the jobs are sorted by the date and time posted. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them.

    +

    Tip:
    If you do not need to view the report before printing it, you can select the import job in list, and click the Report button, or right-click and select Print Report.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the import job you want to view or print.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Report pdf appears in the preview window.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print to print the report displayed in the preview window.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/_Optional_Export_3M_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/_Optional_Export_3M_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c4880c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentCloudLib/_Optional_Export_3M_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + (Optional) Exporting cloudLibrary Non-Integrated eContent Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    (Optional) Exporting cloudLibrary Non-Integrated eContent Bibs

    +

    This process is necessary only if you want to preserve cataloging work. If you opt to export the cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) bibs, you will need to wait until after the synch process has created the integrated bibs for these titles and then re-import them. See Overlaying cloudLibrary eContent Bibs.

    +

    Note:
    If your library has SimplyReports and Export Express, you can select the record set to export. If your library does not have Export Express, your Polaris site manager can assist you with exporting the record set from the staff client. It is not necessary to include embedded holdings in the export

    +

    To export the cloudLibrary eContent records using Export Express:

    +
      +
    1. Log into SimplyReports.
    2. +
    3. Select the Bib list reports tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Export Express, MARC file, no holdings.
    6. +
    7. Expand the Bibliographic record general filters, select Bib record set and select the record set.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Check_the_status_of_the_Polaris_API_consumer_service.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Check_the_status_of_the_Polaris_API_consumer_service.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..312cfae6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Check_the_status_of_the_Polaris_API_consumer_service.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Check the status of the Polaris API consumer service + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking the Status of the Polaris API Consumer Service

    +

    To check the status of the Polaris API consumer service for an integrated eContent vendor:

    +
      +
    1. Go to the server where the service is running.
    2. +
    3. Select Start > Administrative Tools > Services.
    4. +
    +

    The Services window opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select Polaris API Consumer Service and scroll right to see the status of the service. The service status should be restarted.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Polaris_API_Consumer_Service.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Polaris_API_Consumer_Service.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da4f6a46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentConsServ/Polaris_API_Consumer_Service.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris API Consumer Service + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris API Consumer Services

    +

    An overnight process, PolAPIConsumerServiceOvernightProc.exe, checks for new titles (OverDrive only) and changes in item availability, such as added copies (OverDrive and Axis 360). It runs in addition to the PolAPIConsumerService.exe, which synchronizes patron circulation activity.

    +

    For OverDrive, the PolAPIConsumerServiceOvernightProc.exe runs in either full synch or delta modes, based on an appSettings.key named LastProcessTime. The first time the process runs after the service has been started, the LastProcess time is set to nothing by default, and a full synch occurs. New titles are brought in and availability is sychronized for all OverDrive eContent titles owned by the library.

    +

    After the initial run, the LastProcessTime is determined by the previous successful run, and a delta synch occurs. During a delta synch, only titles that are new or have availability changes since the LastProcessTime are synchronized.

    +

    The service should be stopped, restarted, and run in full synch mode when:

    +
      +
    • A vendor account is enabled
    • +
    • It is necessary to bring in the full set of OverDrive titles again (occasionally necessary because of changes to import settings and related processing).
    • +
    +

    If it is necessary to stop and restart the service, but a full synch is not desirable for some reason, you can force a delta synch by entering a valid datetime string into the LastProcessTime appSettings.key.

    +

    See Checking the Status of the Polaris API Consumer Service.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentExp/Expired_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentExp/Expired_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56ecc0fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentExp/Expired_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + Expired EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Expired EContent

    +

    EContent publishers may restrict eContent circulations using one of the following methods:

    +
      +
    • +

      Number of copies

      +
    • +
    • +

      Expiration date

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hybrid (expiration date or number of copies, whichever comes first)

      +
    • +
    +

    Polaris processes expired titles differently depending on the eContent vendor.

    +

    cloudLibrary Expired EContent

    +

    cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library) sends a “remove” event when a library’s access to an eContent title ends because a checked out copy has reached the maximum circulation limit, or a copy with any circ status expires because it has reached the time limit specified by the publisher.

    +

    The Polaris API consumer services detects the remove event, and Polaris reduces the number of available copies by one - either by suppressing the record from display in PAC or by changing its status to Withdrawn. If cloudLibrary sends a single remove event for a title with multiple copies, Polaris removes the oldest item with the earliest creation date. If two items have the same creation date, the item with the lower item record ID is selected.

    +

    If the expired item’s status is Checked Out, the Display in PAC setting is changed so that the item does not display. When it is checked back in, its Display in PAC setting is turned back on, and its circ status changes to Withdrawn. If the expired item’s status is In, no changes are made to the Display in PAC setting, and the status is set to Withdrawn.

    +

    When an eContent item has expired, the item record stays in the database and remains linked to the bibliographic record and the resource entity. The History view of the Item Record workform includes information about the Modified by API consumer service status changes from In to Withdrawn and Withdrawn to In, and the Modified by API consumer service changes to the Display in PAC setting.

    Important: +

    If your library does not prevent withdrawn items from displaying in PAC, these expired items will still display in PAC availability information.

    +

    If the library orders another copy of the cloudLibrary title to replace the expired copy, the eContent item with a Withdrawn status is set to a status of Checked In, and it is set to display in PAC.

    +

    You can use the standard Cataloging Bibliographic report, Integrated eContent With All Copies Expired, to see the eContent bibliographic records where all the linked item records have a status of Withdrawn. In the Report Wizard window, select the vendor account from a drop-down list of all integrated eContent vendors. The report columns display the bib ID, title, author, the number of resource entities, and the vendor account with all copies expired.

    +

    + ExpiredCopRep.gif 

    +

    OverDrive and Axis 360 Expired EContent

    +

    An overnight synchronization process identifies discrepancies between the number of eContent item records in Polaris, for a given title, and the number of copies at the eContent vendor. For a given title, if the provider reports fewer copies for the library than there are eContent item records in Polaris, then item records are deleted from Polaris. The following rules determine which item records are deleted from Polaris:

    +
      +
    • + The eContent item record with the lowest item record control number that has a circulation status of “in” is deleted. The system administration setting “Retain deleted item records” is followed. +
    • +
    • + If no eContent item records have a circulation status of “in,” then the record with the lowest control number with a circulation status of “unavailable” is deleted. (EContent item records have a circulation status of “unavailable” when they are checked out via the vendor’s app to a consortium patron who is not in the local Polaris database.) +
    • +
    • + If no eContent item records have a circulation status of either “in” or “unavailable,” then no item record is deleted. When one of the copies is subsequently checked in, then the next night’s synchronization process deletes the extra item record. In the interim period between the check in and the sync process, a “place hold” button appears in the PAC, unless there are no copies reported by the eContent vendor, in which case the button says “all copies expired.” +
    • +
    +

    All Integrated EContent Vendors

    +

    If all eContent item records for an eContent title have been deleted, or have a status of Withdrawn, the resource entity still remains on the bibliographic record, and after the patron logs in, the PAC Check Out/Place Request button is changed to All Copies Expired and disabled so it cannot be clicked. The button’s hover text is: Your library’s license for this title has expired. Please contact a librarian for more information. This text can be changed in WebAdmin.

    +

    To prevent the eContent title from displaying in the PAC if all copies are withdrawn, the library can set the title to not display in PAC. Other options are to revert or delete the resource entity, or delete the bibliographic record. If you delete the resource entity from the bibliographic record and the library purchases more copies, the API consumer service will create a new resource entity and the associated eContent item records.

    +

    Note:
    When the library replaces the expired copies, the API consumer service does not check or reset the Display in PAC setting on the bibliographic record. If the library sets the record to not display in PAC and then purchases added copies, a staff member must manually check the Display in PAC box on the Bibliographic Record workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Bulk-create_resource_entities.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Bulk-create_resource_entities.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31554cc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Bulk-create_resource_entities.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Bulk-create resource entities + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk-Creating Resource Entities

    +

    If a vendor account is set up in Polaris, and you have the Access bibliographic bulk change permission, you can bulk-create resource entities for bibliographic records that contain data matching to the vendor account. For example, you could bulk-create resource entities for a non-integrated eContent vendor to restrict access by resource group. You cannot bulk-change existing resource entities.

    +

    To use the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to bulk-create resource entities from existing 856 (or other) tags:

    +
      +
    1. Open the bibliographic record set containing the records for which you want to create resource entities.
    2. +
    +

    Tip: bulkchicon.gif
    Click to open the Bulk Change dialog box, or press CTRL+B.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Bulk Change.
    2. +
    +

    The Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box appears with the non-MARC tabbed page displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Create resource entities check box, and select the vendor account in the Vendor account box.
    2. +
    +

    + bulkresent.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    A resource entity is created for each bibliographic record that contains data required to create the resource entity. First, the system checks for data matching the vendor account. If the data in the bibliographic record matches the vendor account data, the system then checks for the data required to create the resource entity.

    +

    Bibliographic Bulk Change Report

    +

    The report displays the number of resource entities that were created. If a resource entity could not be created, an error message displays the reason the resource entity could not be created:

    +
      +
    • No resource entities were created. The data in the record does not match the vendor account you selected. - This message appears if the bibliographic record does not have data that matches to the vendor account.
    • +
    • No resource entities were created. Required data is missing from the record. - This message appears if the bibliographic record contains data matching to the vendor account, but not the data required to create the resource entity.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_non-integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_non-integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1f543d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_non-integrated_eContent_vendor_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a non-integrated eContent vendor account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating a Non-Integrated eContent Vendor Account

    +

    To create a non-integrated eContent vendor account:

    +
      +
    1. Select the Vendor node in the Administration Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Select the Overdrive (non-integrated) or Generic (non-integrated) vendor, right-click, and select New.
    4. +
    +

    The Vendor Account workform for the non-integrated eContent vendor opens.

    +

    + vendorNon.gif 

    +

    Note:
    The Vendor name field is filled in automatically with OverDrive, Inc. if you are creating a vendor account for OverDrive, or Generic Vendor if you are creating an account for another vendor.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the vendor account in the Vendor account name box and an optional description in the Vendor account description box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The following fields are required for non-integrated eContent vendor accounts: Vendor account name, Vendor account identifier value, Vendor account identifier tag number, Vendor account identifier subfield, Vendor account URL and link text tag number, Vendor account URL and link text indicator two, Vendor account URL subfield, and Vendor account link text subfield.

    +
      +
    1. To limit patron access, select the resource group from the Resource group drop-down list box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The resource group must be set up in Polaris Administration before it appears in the list. For information on setting up resource groups in Polaris, see Polaris staff client online Help.

    +
      +
    1. To display the vendor’s icon next to the URL link in the PAC, enter the URL for the vendor’s icon in the Icon URL box.
    2. +
    3. Type the contract ID in the Vendor contract ID box. The contract ID is optional for non-integrated vendors.
    4. +
    5. In the Vendor account settings, enter the following information:
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are creating a vendor account for OverDrive, some recommended account settings are pre-filled.

    +
    +
      +
    • Vendor account identifier value - (required) Identifies the vendor’s account.
    • +
    • Vendor account identifier tag number - (required) Identifies the bib tag where the vendor account ID is located.
    • +
    • Vendor account identifier subfield - (required) Identifies the bib tag subfield where the vendor account identifier is found.
    • +
    • Vendor object identifier tag number - (required) Identifies the tag where the eContent object identifier is found.
    • +
    • Vendor object identifier subfield - (required) Identifies the tag subfield where the eContent object identifier is found.
    • +
    • Vendor object identifier start value - Specifies where the string that identifies the eContent object starts.
    • +
    • Vendor object identifier end value - Specifies where the string that identifies the eContent object ends. If the object identifier appears at the end of the subfield, this field can be left blank.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If both the object identifier start and end values are left blank, the entire subfield is included.

    +
    +
      +
    • Vendor account URL and link text tag number (required) - Identifies the tag where the URL for the eContent and link text are found. These need to be in the same tag. This is the tag that becomes the resource entity for the non-integrated eContent bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Vendor account URL and link text indicator two (required) - Identifies the MARC second indicator value for the tag containing the URL and link text.
    • +
    • Vendor account URL subfield (required) - Identifies the subfield where the URL is located.
    • +
    • Vendor account link text subfield (required) - Identifies the subfield where the link text is located.
    • +
    • Vendor account public note subfield - Identifies the subfield for the public note.
    • +
    • Vendor account nonpublic note subfield - Identifies the non-public note subfield.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Save the Vendor Account workform for the non-integrated vendor account.
    2. +
    +

    Resources Entities for Non-Integrated EContent Vendors

    +

    Resource entities are used for non-integrated eContent vendors when the library wants to restrict access to eContent by the branch or branches that have a certain contract with the non-integrated eContent vendor. They must be unique for the vendor account ID/URL within one bibliographic record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_resource_entity_from_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_resource_entity_from_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6510bd71 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Create_a_resource_entity_from_the_Bibliographic_Record_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Create a resource entity from the Bibliographic Record workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating a Resource Entity from the Bibliographic Record Workform

    +

    To create a resource entity from the Bibliographic Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select a bibliographic record for the eContent.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Create Resource Entities from the Bibliographic Record workform menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Create Resource Entity dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the vendor account in the drop-down list box, and click OK to close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + createresentifrombib.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Save the bibliographic record to create the resource entity.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Non-Integrated_EContent_in_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Non-Integrated_EContent_in_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66b41885 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentNON/Non-Integrated_EContent_in_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Non-Integrated EContent in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Non-Integrated EContent in Polaris

    +

    When the library offers eContent from non-integrated vendors, the records are displayed in PAC search results, but patrons must click a link to check them out on the vendor’s site. These circulation transactions are not recorded in Polaris.

    +

    You can create vendor accounts for non-integrated eContent vendors if you want to limit patron access to the eContent based on the contract the library has with the vendor. If you do not want to limit access, you do not need a vendor account in Polaris. No license is required for setting up non-integrated vendor accounts.

    +

    A non-integrated vendor account associates a specific eContent vendor account with a resource group in order to limit patron access to eContent according to the branch or branches that use the account. You can also create a non-integrated vendor account without a resource group if you want a vendor-specific icon to appear with the 856 tags in the PAC.

    +

    The fields in the Vendor Account workform contain the following information for a non-integrated vendor:

    +
      +
    • The vendor account ID, and the MARC tag/subfield where the account ID is found.
    • +
    • The MARC tag/subfield where the object identifier is found, and where the object identifier starts and ends. This is where Polaris looks for the data that identifies the eContent or electronic resource in the vendor’s repository.
    • +
    • The tag where the URL and link text are found, and the subfields for the URL and the text.
    • +
    • The subfields where the vendor’s public note and non-public note are found.
    • +
    +

    To implement eContent processing for a non-integrated eContent vendor, the library and Innovative Interfaces do the following:

    +
      +
    • Polaris provides the non-integrated eContent vendor records. The Vendor option is available under Administration > Explorer > Vendor.
    • +
    +

    + vendorexpl.gif 

    +

    The available Vendor records are displayed under the expanded Vendors node.

    +

     Vendornodeexp.gif

    +
      +
    • The library sets up resource groups in Polaris Administration for the library organizations that allow their patrons to access the eContent from the non-integrated vendor. To set up a resource group, select File > New > Resource Group from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Select the branches that belong to this resource group. Manage patron access to eContent using resource groups.
    • +
    • The library sets up a non-integrated vendor account under the OverDrive (non-integrated) or Generic (non-integrated) vendor record. Non-integrated vendor accounts are used to limit access to eContent for a vendor that does not integrate with Polaris Circulation. See Create a non-integrated eContent vendor account.
    • +
    • The library imports the eContent from the non-integrated eContent vendor using an import profile with the non-integrated vendor’s account selected.
    • +
    • For existing eContent titles for a non-integrated vendor, the library gathers the bibliographic records in a record set and uses the Bib Bulk Change process to create resource entities that are used to limit access in the PAC. See Bulk-Creating Resource Entities. Resource entities can also be created for single records from the Bibliographic Record workform. See Creating a Resource Entity from the Bibliographic Record Workform.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_OverDrive_eContent_import_profile_s.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_OverDrive_eContent_import_profile_s.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86c86ca4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_OverDrive_eContent_import_profile_s.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Create OverDrive eContent import profile(s) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create OverDrive eContent import profile(s)

    +

    Note:
    These are suggestions for setting up the import profiles for OverDrive eContent processing; your Polaris site manager can assist you in setting up the import profiles to support your library’s specific needs.

    +

    Your library can copy and rename the PolarisExec read-only Integrated ebook Bibs import profile, and then select the renamed import profile in the Vendor Account workform. Before selecting an import profile other than the Integrated ebook Bibs import profile in the OverDrive Vendor Account workform, consult with your Polaris site manager. See Automatic Import Profile Selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account .

    +

    Depending on your library’s processing workflow for OverDrive eContent, you may need to create other import profiles used to support the following non-automatic import processes:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable integration for existing OverDrive non-integrated eContent bibs - Export and then re-import the non-integrated OverDrive eContent titles. See Integrating Existing OverDrive EContent.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Overlay OverDrive integrated eContent bibs with fully-cataloged bibs while retaining the resource entities - Fully cataloged eContent bibs can be imported to overlay existing integrated eContent bibs, while retaining the resource entities that enable the integration with Polaris circulation. See Overlaying OverDrive EContent Bibs.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_an_OverDrive_integrated_vendor_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_an_OverDrive_integrated_vendor_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b5daeff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Create_an_OverDrive_integrated_vendor_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + Create an OverDrive integrated vendor account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating an OverDrive Integrated Vendor Account

    +

    Vendor and Vendor account records are accessed through the Polaris Administration Explorer; they cannot be accessed from the Find Tool. Polaris Administration ownership and inheritance do not apply to vendor records or vendor accounts.

    +

    To create an integrated vendor account for OverDrive.

    +

    Note:
    Vendor account permissions are not organization-specific, and users in the Admin group are granted these permissions: Vendor Account: Access, Create, Modify, Delete.

    +

    Tip:
    You cannot create a new Vendor Account by selecting File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System > Vendor.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Expand the Vendors list, and select the integrated OverDrive vendor.
    2. +
    +

    The Vendor information appears in the right tab.

    +

    + ODVenInfo.gif 

    +

    The Integrated circulation vendor read-only box is checked.

    +

    The Vendor Information tab provides two options for displaying eContent availability and holds counts to PAC users who are searching the PAC at the system level and are not logged in:

    +
      +
    • Show availability and hold counts for shared copies only - When this option is selected (the default), users who are connected to the PAC at the system level, and have not logged into their patron accounts, will see availability and holds counts only for OverDrive eContent copies shared throughout the OverDrive group. Advantage titles display only after the patron has logged in to an organization that participates in the Advantage account.
    • +
    • Show availability and holds counts for a specific Advantage account - When you select this option and select the specific Advantage account from the drop-down list, both the shared eContent titles and the titles from the selected Advantage account display when users are connected at the system level and not logged in.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Right-click the Overdrive, Inc. (integrated) Vendor node, and select New.
    2. +
    +

    + VenOverD.gif 

    +

    The Vendor Account workform opens with OverDrive Inc. (integrated) in the Vendor name box.

    +

    + ODVenAcctWF.gif 

    +
      +
    1. View the system-supplied fields and enter information in the editable fields:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Required fields have bold labels.

    +
      +
    • Vendor name - OverDrive Inc. (integrated) System-supplied; read-only
    • +
    • Integrated circulation vendor - This check box is automatically checked.
    • +
    • Vendor account name - (required) The library supplies a unique name to identify the account.
    • +
    • Active - This check box is initially unchecked when you are creating a vendor account for an integrated eContent vendor. Leave the check box unchecked, and enter the account information. Innovative Interfaces activates the vendor account.
    • +
    • Vendor account description (optional) - The library can add a description for the vendor account.
    • +
    • Resource group (optional) - The library can select a resource group to limit access to the eContent by branch. Manage patron access to eContent using resource groups.
    • +
    • Icon URL (optional) - The library can specify a URL location for the icon that represents the eContent vendor.
    • +
    • OverDrive library ID - The ID identifying the library’s account with OverDrive.
    • +
    • Vendor account access ID - The library’s access ID for the eContent vendor account.
    • +
    • Vendor account access key - The library’s access key for the eContent vendor account.
    • +
    • Vendor account base path - The URL path to the library’s resources at eContent vendor.
    • +
    • Vendor account server name - The vendor account server name.
    • +
    • Vendor account use SSL - The library selects Yes or No to indicate whether Secure Socket Layer is used.
    • +
    • Vendor account import profile ID - Identifies the import profile set up to enable the automatic import and integration. The PolarisExec Integrated ebook Bibs import profile is selected by default.
    • +
    • Vendor account item template ID - The library creates the item template used during the API-driven processes. The item template name must begin with Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import.
    • +
    +

    Tips
    The library’s server should be set within 5 minutes of the correct time because OverDrive has a 5-minute time difference threshold on their servers.

    +
      +
    • Library OAuth URL - The URL is used to grant the Polaris ILS an access token to access the OverDrive API.
    • +
    • Patron OAuth URL - The URL is used to grant the Polaris ILS an access token for patron circulations.
    • +
    • Patron API URL - The URL used to perform circulation functions.
    • +
    • Library web-site ID - The web site ID used by OverDrive to identify the library’s collection for circulation purposes.
    • +
    • Default URL link text - Identifies the URL link text and is also used as hover text for the vendor icon.
    • +
    • ILS name - Identifies the ILS.
    • +
    • OverDrive Advantage Account ID - This field is required only for OverDrive Advantage accounts.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Save the Vendor Account workform.
    2. +
    3. Click the Test Connection button to test the API settings in the vendor account and ensure that a connection is made to the vendor’s service (OverDrive API).
    4. +
    +

    If the test is successful, a message confirms that the connection was made. If a connection problem is encountered, a message appears.

    +
      +
    1. Ask your Polaris representative to activate the vendor account.
    2. +
    +

    This starts the API consumer service. To check the status of the service, see Check the status of the Polaris API consumer service.

    +

    Important:
    After activating a vendor account, or reactivating a suspended vendor account, an IIS reset is required so that the PAC shows the correct information for the vendor's resources. For example, the IIS reset enables the Check Out or Place Hold button to be displayed instead of the Temporarily Unavailable button. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Delete_the_exported_OverDrive_non-integrated_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Delete_the_exported_OverDrive_non-integrated_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54bd8cf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Delete_the_exported_OverDrive_non-integrated_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete the exported OverDrive non-integrated bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting the Exported OverDrive Non-Integrated Bibs

    +

    After exporting the OverDrive non-integrated bib records to files on the desktop or another location, delete the bibs and items from the database.

    +

    To delete the non-integrated records from the Polaris database.

    +
      +
    1. Open the record set of the non-integrated records.
    2. +
    3. Delete the OverDrive non-integrated eContent bibliographic records and their linked items from the Polaris database.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Export_OverDrive_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Export_OverDrive_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea8922d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Export_OverDrive_non-integrated_eContent_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Export OverDrive non-integrated eContent bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Exporting OverDrive Non-Integrated eContent Bibs

    +

    Export the records to a file on the computer’s desktop or some other easily-accessible location. It is not necessary to include embedded holdings in the export.

    +

    Note:
    If your library has SimplyReports and Export Express, you can select the record set to export. If your library does not have Export Express, your Polaris Site Manager can assist you with exporting the record set from the staff client.

    +

    To export the OverDrive eContent records using Export Express:

    +
      +
    1. Log in to SimplyReports.
    2. +
    3. Select the Bib list reports tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Export Express > MARC file > No holdings.
    6. +
    +

    Expand the Bibliographic record general filters, select Bib record set, and select the record set.

    +

    + simprepAxisex.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_OverDrive_bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_OverDrive_bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3dc5ab77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Import_fully-cataloged_bibs_to_overlay_OverDrive_bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + Import fully-cataloged bibs to overlay OverDrive bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Import fully-Cataloged Bibs to Overlay OverDrive Bibs

    +

    To set up an import profile designed for importing fully-cataloged OverDrive eContent bibliographic records, and then import the records using the profile.

    +

    Note:
    Once you have set up the import profile and saved it (step 1), any staff member with the appropriate Polaris permissions can select it for subsequent imports of full bib records to overlay the OverDrive bibs.

    +
      +
    1. Create an import profile specifically for importing fully-cataloged bibs to overlay OverDrive records.
      1. Copy the PolarisExec Integrated ebook Bibs import profile, or create a new import profile.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For general information about creating, copying, and modifying import profiles, see Setting Up Import Profiles.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. On the Profile Setup tab, type a name for the import profile, select the OverDrive vendor account in the Vendor account drop-down list box, and click Save to save the profile.
    2. +
    3. Select the Bibliographic Records tab and verify that the following options are set:
      • Perform duplicate detection - The check box must be selected.
      • Use profile defined duplicate detection rules - The check box must be selected.
      • Rules to apply (as unique groups) - The profile-defined rules must include incoming 037$a = existing 037$a
      • Save incoming record as final; replace database record - This option must be selected under If a duplicate is found.
      • Keep MARC tags - The check box must be selected.
      • Profile defined overlay retention tags - This option must be selected, and the following tags must be listed as profile-defined overlay retention tags: 856 - any indicator 1 or 2 value.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    + retain856tag.gif 

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the settings for the Bibliographic Records tab.
    2. +
    3. Select the Item Records tab and verify that the Build item records check box is not checked.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    OverDrive item records are created automatically via the automatic import process.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select the Authority Records tab, and modify the settings.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) Select the Record Set tab, and name the record sets to identify the type of records being imported.
    4. +
    5. Save the import profile.
    6. +
    +
    +

    The import profile is ready for any staff member with the appropriate permissions to select when importing fully-cataloged OverDrive eContent records.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Express Import or Full Import.
    2. +
    3. Select the import profile created for importing fully-cataloged OverDrive records.
    4. +
    5. Click Add and select the file of fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records to replace the existing OverDrive records, while retaining the tags required for integration with Polaris Circulation.
    6. +
    7. Click Import.
    8. +
    +

    The import job is added to the import queue. Once the import processing is complete, the OverDrive bibs are overlaid with the fully-cataloged records, and they retain the resource entities that enable the integration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_Existing_OverDrive_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_Existing_OverDrive_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..449fbb86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_Existing_OverDrive_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Integrating Existing OverDrive EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating Existing OverDrive EContent

    +

    If your library already has OverDrive eContent records in its catalog, these existing non-integrated bibs must be processed to create the resource entities that enable integration with Polaris Circulation. This process involves: locating all the OverDrive eContent bibliographic records; putting the records in a record set; exporting the records to a file; deleting the non-integrated bibliographic records from the Polaris database; and then re-importing the exported bibs using an import profile set up for this purpose.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_New_OverDrive_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_New_OverDrive_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a395f19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Integrating_New_OverDrive_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Integrating New OverDrive EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating New OverDrive EContent

    +

    When the library purchases a new OverDrive title, bibliographic metadata about that title is automatically received by the Polaris API consumer service, formed into a MARC record, added to an import file, and positioned for import in the import jobs queue. Then, the bibliographic records are imported by the automatic import process, which uses settings in the OverDrive Vendor Account to create a resource entity for each record. The resource entity identifies the Polaris Vendor Account and provides the link to the electronic resource in the OverDrive repository. Beginning with the first record in the file, each bib is checked for a match between the URL syntax in the 856 tag and the information in the Polaris Vendor Account. If a match is found, a resource entity is created in the bibliographic record. See Resource Entities 

    +

    The automatic import process also creates eContent item records. During the import initialization, OverDrive is queried to find the number of copies. Based on the results of this query, 852 tags are created in the eContent bibliographic records. When the bibliographic records are imported, item records are created from the 852 tags and the fields in the template selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account. For more information, see EContent Item Records.

    +

    Once an 852 tag has been used to create an item record, a $9 subfield is added to the 852 tag so that it is not used again to create an eContent item record. When the Subfield 9 cleanup utility runs, the subfield $9 is removed.

    +

    Automatic Import Profile Selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account

    +

    The Integrated ebook Bibs PolarisExec import profile is set up to enable eContent integration for automatic imports. If you copy and rename this import profile, the renamed import profile must be selected in the Vendor Account workform.

    +

    Work with your Polaris site manager to create the import profile to select in the OverDrive Vendor Account. These are some guidelines when copying the Integrated ebook Bibs to create a new import profile for OverDrive automatic imports:

    +
      +
    • Profile Setup tab - You can type a different name and description, but do not select a source file or a vendor account.
    • +
    • Bibliographic Records tab - Work with your site manager to determine the duplicate detection options to set.
    • +
    • Item Records tab - The Build item records, Using all available holdings/item fields must be selected, and the Embedded holdings field/MARC subfield mapping options should not be changed. Do not select a template because the item template used in automatic import processing is selected in the Vendor Account workform, not in the import profile.
    • +
    • Authority Records tab - Leave the Do not save any records option selected.
    • +
    • Record Sets tab - You can rename the record sets without affecting the automatic import.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrMobPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrMobPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3eafb6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrMobPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Check out and download OverDrive eContent from Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check out and download OverDrive eContent from Mobile PAC

    +

    A patron who is logged into Mobile PAC can check out and immediately download or access OverDrive integrated eContent without going to the OverDrive app.

    +

    The patron selects Check Out from the title display in Mobile PAC.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Check Out view opens.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects the format in the Format drop-down list box and selects the Check Out button.

    +

    A message confirms that the check-out occurred, and the Get Title drop-down list contains the download formats for the eContent.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects the format for download in the Get Title drop-down list box. The OverDrive eContent is downloaded in the format the patron selected without the patron having to go to the OverDrive app.

    +

    + +

    +

    Or, the patron can navigate away from the page without getting the title, and then download or access the eContent later from the Items Out list or from the OverDrive app.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects an option in the Get title list, and the eContent is downloaded to the patron's phone or device.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrPPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrPPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad26a9aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrPPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Checking Out and Downloading OverDrive eContent from PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking Out and Downloading OverDrive eContent from PowerPAC

    +

    A patron who is logged into PowerPAC can check out and immediately download or access OverDrive integrated eContent without going to the OverDrive app.

    +

    The patron selects the Check Out button for the title.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects the format for the eContent check out and clicks or taps Check Out Now.

    +

    + +

    +

    Another light box confirms that the eContent was checked out.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron can download or access the title immediately by selecting an option in the Get It drop-down list box. See Patron Access to OverDrive EContent .

    +

    Note: +
    Safari browsers - If Safari is set to block pop-ups, nothing happens when the patron selects Get It. The patron should change the browser setting to allow pop-ups. Selecting Get It then displays the correct prompt to allow the pop-up and the patron can proceed.

    +

    Or the patron can close the light box and download or access the eContent from the Items Out page in the PowerPAC patron account or from the app.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Added_Expired_Copies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Added_Expired_Copies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9b17f9f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Added_Expired_Copies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + OverDrive Added/Expired Copies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    OverDrive Added/Expired Copies

    +

    The API consumer service queries OverDrive on a daily basis and synchronizes the number of eContent item records for each resource entity, either adding or removing eContent item records as necessary. For details on the synch process, see EContent Vendor and Polaris Synchronization.

    +

    The item records are populated from the fields in the Ebook automatic import item template selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account record. Only one Ebook automatic import item template can be selected in the vendor account, but the incoming added copies could be for either ebooks or audio ebooks. Since the library may need to modify fields, such as the item material type, collection etc., the added copy item records are placed in a record set to make them easier to find and modify.

    +

    EContent item records created during added copy processing are automatically added to record sets. Each vendor account has only one system-supplied record set for added copies, named following this pattern:

    +

    E-added copies_VendorAccountName_ID=nnn 

    +

    If necessary, the vendor account name is truncated to fit the 50-character record set name limit, and the vendor account ID follows the name.

    +

    Example:
    E-added copies_OverDrive_ID=10
    +

    +

    The record set owner is the same as the Ebook automatic import item template owner. If the owner is changed, a new system-generated record set with the correct owner is automatically created the next time the added copy process runs. If the record set is deleted or renamed, a new one is created automatically.

    +

    A staff member with the appropriate permissions can bulk change the item records in the record set. After making the changes, the records should be removed from the record set.

    +

    + Eadded.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_EContent_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_EContent_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2ec1ddb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_EContent_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + OverDrive® EContent Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    OverDrive EContent Integration

    +

    Libraries using the Polaris ILS can catalog, display in PAC, manage access, and circulate eContent from OverDrive. Innovative Interfaces requires a license for each integrated eContent vendor. Once the library has a subscription with OverDrive and the required Polaris license, the library creates an item template, an integrated vendor account, and an import profile in Polaris. The Vendor Account is in Polaris Administration, not in Acquisitions, and it is used during automatic importing to create resource entities for the bibliographic records.

    +

    As a result of this integration, patrons can search for, place holds on, and check out OverDrive eContent directly from the PAC. All associated circulation processing and tracking for these integrated eContent occurs in Polaris. Holds placed in the PAC for OverDrive eContent are recorded, but since holds activity is managed exclusively in the vendor's database, it is not reflected in the Polaris staff client.

    +

    OverDrive eContent may be in one of the following formats:

    +

    Note:
    This list is subject to change as OverDrive develops its offerings.

    +
      +
    • EPUB ebook
    • +
    • PDF ebook
    • +
    • WMA Audiobook
    • +
    • MP3 Audiobook
    • +
    • Magazine
    • +
    +

    OverDrive Advantage Accounts

    +

    Libraries participating in OverDrive Advantage accounts share eContent collections under a state, county, or consortium contract. The group of libraries sharing the collection may include libraries running an ILS other than Polaris. Patrons from these non-Polaris libraries can still check out shared titles from the OverDrive application. However, unlike the synchronization process that runs every 5-15 minutes when patrons from a Polaris library check out eContent from the OverDrive application, the process to synchronize remote patron checkouts from the app runs every 24 hours–updating the Polaris item status to unavailable (rather than checked out) and then to in when they are available.

    +

    If your library uses OverDrive Advantage, you can set up the OverDrive Vendor Account so that PAC users who are connected at the system level and not logged in do not see the Advantage titles. See: Create an OverDrive integrated vendor account.

    +

    OverDrive and Polaris Synchronization

    +

    Availability and hold counts (total number of copies, number of available copies, and number of holds) for OverDrive eContent titles appear in the PAC based on the status of the items in the OverDrive repository, not on the status of the items in the Polaris database. Patrons can see the availability information whether they are logged into their library account or not.

    +

    The Polaris API consumer service queries the OverDrive database daily to find and fetch the metadata for titles identified as those the library has purchased. After fetching the OverDrive metadata, the API consumer service identifies duplicates by matching on the object identifier or title ID. If the title is new to the catalog, the OverDrive XML metadata is converted to MARC XML, and the file is automatically added to the Polaris import queue to be imported. OverDrive imports are done once daily, around midnight.

    +

    When a patron checks out or places a hold on a OverDrive title in Polaris, the data is immediately updated in the Polaris database and in the vendor's repository. However, when a patron uses the OverDrive app to initiate circulation, the synchronization process takes longer because the app uses the Polaris API to push the data to Polaris, and then the API consumer service completes the process. The API consumer service also performs a periodic "pull" query of the OverDrive database and then synchonizes the data if any circulation activity was detected.

    +

    The Polaris database and OverDrive are synchonized as follows:

    +
      +
    • Holds - Real time
    • +
    • Check-out or Check-in from the PAC - Real time
    • +
    • Check-out or Check-in from the OverDrive or Libby app - Every 5-15 minutes
    • +
    • Added copy for an existing title - Once daily (overnight)
    • +
    • Expired copy for an existing title - Once daily (overnight)
    • +
    • Added title - new MARC record - Once daily (overnight)
    • +
    • Added title - prepublication - Once daily (overnight)
    • +
    +

    To ensure that the API consumer service synchronizes transactions correctly when a server is rebooted, the API consumer service attempts to connect every 35 seconds for 20 minutes. If it fails to connect, the service stops.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Import_Jobs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Import_Jobs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d03798f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/OverDrive_Import_Jobs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + OverDrive Import Jobs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    OverDrive Import Jobs

    +

    The Import Jobs Queue lists import jobs by the date and time posted, whether the import jobs are for eContent bibs or other types of records. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them.

    +

    You can view or print a report for completed import jobs from the Import Jobs Queue window. The import report provides details regarding the import profile that was used, the settings in the import profile, the records created, errors (if any), and other details.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Overlaying_OverDrive_EContent_Bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Overlaying_OverDrive_EContent_Bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e0bcc1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Overlaying_OverDrive_EContent_Bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + Overlaying OverDrive EContent Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overlaying OverDrive EContent Bibs

    +

    When your library receives fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records to overlay existing OverDrive records, a staff member imports these records using an import profile set up to: detect duplicates based on the 037 tag; overlay these duplicate with the full incoming records; and retain tags that create resource entities.

    +

    Important:
    Inform the bibliographic record vendor that the fully-cataloged eContent bibliographic records provided to overlay integrated eContent bibs must have the following requirements:

    The records must be MARC or MARCXML bibliographic records.

    The 037 tags must be retained because that tag contains the eContent item identifier and serves as a match point to detect duplicates during importing.

    +

    See also: Importing Fully-Cataloged Bibs to Overlay Axis 360 Bibs

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Patron_Access_to_OverDrive_EContent.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Patron_Access_to_OverDrive_EContent.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..174d0acd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Patron_Access_to_OverDrive_EContent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Access to OverDrive EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Access to OverDrive EContent

    +

    For patrons who have logged into their library accounts, the eContent available for checkout or hold requests depends on the OverDrive account with the patron’s registered branch or with the resource group to which the registered branch is a member. If the Polaris Vendor Account has been set up for an OverDrive Advantage account, users who are not logged in and are connected to the PAC at the system level will see availability and hold counts depending which OverDrive Advantage option is selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account: Show availability and hold counts for shared copies only or Show availability and hold counts for a specific Advantage account. See Create an OverDrive integrated vendor account.

    +

    For more information about options for displaying, managing, and circulating eContent, Managing EContent in the PAC.

    +

    When the OverDrive eContent is accessible to the logged in patron, a Check Out button is displayed in the PAC search results if the title is available. If the patron has access, but the title is not available, a Place Hold button is displayed. If the patron does not have access to the eContent title, a Restricted button is displayed with the hover text Sorry this title is currently not available at your registered branch. You can modify this text string in WebAdmin using the mnemonic: PACML_EBRESTRICTED_TIP.

    +

    You can prevent or allow downloads of OverDrive integrated eContent on library computers designated as in-house workstations. See Prevent or allow downloads of OverDrive eContent on in-house workstations.

    +

    The library can change the Check Out and Place Hold button text for OverDrive eContent by modifying the following strings in WebAdmin:

    +
      +
    • PACML_OVERDRIVECHECKOUT +
    • +
    • PACML_OVERDRIVEPLACEHOLD +
    • +
    +

    Patrons who are logged into their accounts in PowerPAC or Mobile PAC can check out OverDrive integrated eContent titles and access the file from the final checkout acknowledgment or from their patron accounts. If the title is available in a single format, the PAC user selects the single format shown. If the title is available in multiple formats, the user selects the Get It button, and a drop-down menu displays the available formats.

    +

    The patron experience may vary according to the device used to access the eContent; the operating system and the apps installed; and the browser settings. To access the eContent, the patron may need to allow one-time pop-ups or turn off the pop-up blocker on some devices, such as on the iPad.

    +

    The following variables are outside of the control of the Polaris software:

    +
      +
    • DRM-protected Adobe PDF and EPUB files (.acsm files) may open in the OverDrive reading application, Adobe Digital Editions, or another reading application.
    • +
    • OverDrive Read, OverDrive Listen, MediaDo, and streaming video titles open and play in a new browser tab or a new browser window.
    • +
    • Kindle titles open in a new browser tab or window with an Amazon login page. The title is sent to the user's Kindle account; the Kindle app does not open automatically.
    • +
    • Nook titles are sent to the user's Nook account; the Nook app does not open automatically. Depending on the user's device and the Barnes & Noble account, a new browser tab or window may open with a Barnes & Noble login page.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Put_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_bibs_in_record_sets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Put_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_bibs_in_record_sets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f34f30f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Put_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_bibs_in_record_sets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Put existing non-integrated OverDrive bibs in record sets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Putting Existing Non-Integrated OverDrive Bibs in Record Sets

    +

    To locate the existing OverDrive eContent records and put them in record sets

    +

    Note:
    You can put all the existing OverDrive eContent bib records in a single record set. However, separating your ebooks from audio-ebooks, and then re-importing the bibs in separate processes allows you to create item records from specific templates.

    +
      +
    1. Set up the search criteria in the Find Tool to find the existing non-integrated OverDrive records.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Work with your Polaris site manager to determine the best way to find these records. You may need to set up an SQL search in the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. Select the records in the results list, right-click, and select Add to record set.
    2. +
    3. Save the record set with a name that identifies the records.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Re-import_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Re-import_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53fcce1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Re-import_existing_non-integrated_OverDrive_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + Re-import existing non-integrated OverDrive records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Re-Importing Existing Non-Integrated OverDrive Records

    +

    The import profile must have specific settings that enable the integration with Polaris circulation. Other settings depend on your library’s decisions.

    +

    You can create multiple import profiles, each with a specific item template selected, so that the eContent item records are created for specific collections. Then, if your exported non-integrated ebooks and audio-ebooks are in different files, you can import them in separate processes.

    +

    Note:
    Newly-purchased OverDrive eContent records will be imported automatically using the default Integrated ebook bibs import profile (or a renamed copy of this profile) selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account workform. See Automatic Import Profile Selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account .

    +

    To set up the import profile and then import the existing non-integrated OverDrive bibs.

    +

    Note:
    If this profile is already set up, skip step 1.

    +
      +
    1. Create an import profile specifically for importing existing non-integrated OverDrive eContent.
    2. +
    +

    You can start with a new import profile, or select an existing profile, rename it, and modify the settings. For general information about copying and renaming import profiles, see Copy a Polaris read-only import profile.

    +
    +
      +
    1. On the Profile Setup tab, type a new name for the import profile, and select the OverDrive account in the Vendor account box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    + ODImpExisting.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Bibliographic Records tab. If you have deleted all your OverDrive records, you can turn off duplicate detection.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Work with your Polaris site manager to determine which duplicate-detection settings are appropriate for your library.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Item Records tab, and ensure that the following options are set:
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Build item records check box is checked
    • +
    • Using all available holdings/item fields is selected.
    • +
    • Item template (for fields that are missing): The correct eContent item template is selected.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can select any item template when you import existing non-integrated OverDrive eContent. However, if your library uses resource groups, ensure that the item template’s assigned branch is in the resource group that shares the OverDrive vendor account. When new OverDrive eContent is purchased by the library, the automatic process uses the specific Ebook automatic import item template selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account.

    +
    +

    + ODor3MExistItems.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select the Authority Records tab, and modify the settings.
    2. +
    3. Select the Record Set tab, and ensure that the record sets are named appropriately to identify the types of records in them.
    4. +
    5. Save the import profile.
    6. +
    +
    +

    The import profile is available to select when re-importing existing OverDrive eContent bibs to enable the integration with Polaris circulation.

    +
      +
    1. After the import profile is set up, to re-import the OverDrive bibs, select Utilities > Importing > Full Import.
    2. +
    3. Select the import profile created in step 1.
    4. +
    5. On the Profile Setup tab, click Add and select the file of exported non-integrated OverDrive bibs to import.
    6. +
    7. Click the Import button.
    8. +
    +

    The OverDrive titles are imported and integrated with Polaris circulation, and item records are created. After the import is complete, an overnight process synchronizes items out and hold requests in existing patron accounts.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to add call numbers from the 099 tag to the newly-created eContent item records, you can select the Use call number fields from bib record setting on the Item Bulk Change dialog box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_OverDrive.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_OverDrive.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66d2020c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Set_up_the_eContent_item_templates_for_OverDrive.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up the eContent item templates for OverDrive + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the eContent Item Templates for OverDrive

    +

    To enable the automatic creation of OverDrive eContent item records, you must create an item template named Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import (additional text can be appended to this name, but it must begin with this string). This template supplies the default data used to create eContent item records during the automatic import process. After you set up the Ebook automatic import item template, you select it in the Vendor Account workform. See Create an OverDrive integrated vendor account.

    +

    Note:
    The Ebook automatic import item template is used for all types of integrated eContent, including audio ebooks. After the automatic import, you can edit the OverDrive item records using the Item Bulk Change process.

    +

    You can also create multiple other item templates, named however your library wishes, to use when re-importing existing non-integrated OverDrive records. For example, if your library has existing non-integrated OverDrive ebooks and audio ebooks, you can set up one item template for ebooks and one item template for audio ebooks. Then, you can select the appropriate item template in the import profile when you are re-importing these existing records.

    +

    To set up the item templates for OverDrive:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select Item Template and click OK. 
    4. +
    +

    The Item Template workform opens.

    +

    + ODtemplates.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the OverDrive eContent item template.
    2. +
    +
      +
    • If you are creating the item template that will be selected in the OverDrive Vendor Account workform, it must be named Ebook automatic import or E-book automatic import. Case does not matter, and other words can follow this string, but the name must begin with Ebook automatic import. For information about the items created from the automatic import item template, see
    • +
    • If you are creating an item template to create eContent item records during a non-automatic import, you can type any name in the Name box. You can create as many of these templates as are appropriate for your library. For example, your library may already have non-integrated OverDrive records in various electronic formats (ebook, audio ebook, etc.) in its database. When importing these records to enable their integration with Polaris Circulation, the user can select one of these eContent templates.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the branch that owns the template in the Template owner box.
    2. +
    3. In the Assigned box, select the branch for the eContent items that will be created using this template.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If a resource group is selected in the Vendor Account, the Assigned branch selected in the item template must belong to the resource group.

    +
      +
    1. In the Circulation status box, select In.
    2. +
    3. Select the Fine code and Renewal limit. These fields are required to save the item template, but they are ignored in eContent items circulation processing.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save, select the save button, or press Ctrl+S to save the template.
    6. +
    +

    See also: EContent Item Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_OverDrive_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_OverDrive_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0feafe6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/Setting_Up_Polaris_for_OverDrive_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Polaris for OverDrive Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Polaris for OverDrive Integration

    +

    To enable the import processing that integrates OverDrive eContent with Polaris, the item templates, vendor account, and import profiles must be set up correctly in Polaris. Your Polaris Site Manager can assist your library with this setup.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_OverDrive_imports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_OverDrive_imports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c557ddcf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentOverDr/View_the_jobs_or_print_reports_for_OverDrive_imports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + View the jobs or print reports for OverDrive imports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing the Jobs or Print Reports for OverDrive Imports

    +

    To view import jobs in the Import Jobs Queue:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue to open the Import Jobs Queue window.
    2. +
    +

    By default, the jobs are sorted by the date and time posted. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them.

    +

    Tip:
    If you do not need to view the report before printing it, you can select the import job in list, and click the Report button, or right-click and select Print Report.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the import job you want to view or print.
    2. +
    +

    The Import Report pdf appears in the preview window.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Print to print the report displayed in the preview window.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Configure_the_enriched_content_drawer_for_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Configure_the_enriched_content_drawer_for_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a46318f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Configure_the_enriched_content_drawer_for_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configure the Enriched Content Drawers for PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configure the Enriched Content Drawers for PowerPAC

    +

    To configure the enriched content display for the eContent vendor in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Product page categories: Configure to open the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + ODprodpg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the check boxes next to the categories you want to be expanded upon initial display of the product page in PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Availability_and_Holds_Counts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Availability_and_Holds_Counts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..019d4834 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Availability_and_Holds_Counts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + EContent Availability and Holds Counts in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Availability and Holds Counts in PAC

    +

    The availability and holds counts for integrated eContent titles are populated in real time on the PAC search results lists. These counts are not affected by settings in the Title Display: Configure profile.

    +

    Your library may opt to suppress detailed item availability display for integrated eContent titles in PowerPAC and Mobile PAC by setting the PAC profile Suppress availability display for integrated econtent titles to Yes. When the PAC connection branch has set this profile to Yes, the Availability button and drawer do not display in PowerPAC, and the Find It link does not display in Mobile PAC. The availability counts still display. See Suppress eContent Availability Display in PAC.

    +

    For OverDrive Advantage accounts, Advantage copies for the branch display when a patron is connected to the PAC at that branch, regardless of whether the patron is logged in or not. The library uses an option in the Vendor Record to specify whether patrons see Advantage titles when connected to the PAC at the system level. See Create an OverDrive integrated vendor account.

    +

    The patron may see a Please log in for availability message that indicates Polaris cannot determine the library organization. This might happen if the patron has not yet logged in and is connected to the PAC at an organization that does not honor resource groups. If the patron does not have access to the eContent title, a Restricted button is displayed with the hover text Sorry this title is currently not available at your registered branch. You can modify this text string in WebAdmin using the mnemonic: PACML_EBRESTRICTED_TIP. See Manage patron access to eContent using resource groups.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Product_Page_Display_in_the_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Product_Page_Display_in_the_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f63b4e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_Product_Page_Display_in_the_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + EContent Product Page Display in the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Product Page Display in the PAC

    +

    The product page (full display) for eContent is similar to the full display for other bibliographic materials.

    +

    + +

    +

    The bibliographic information display for eContent is configured with the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC Title Display Configure profiles. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    The Purchase button and the Map It feature are suppressed for eContent. If your library does not want to display detailed availability information for integrated eContent titles, you can set the PAC profile Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles to Yes. See Suppress eContent Availability Display in PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_PAC_Search_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_PAC_Search_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a89d3e65 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_PAC_Search_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + EContent in PAC Search Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent in PAC Search Results

    +

    When patrons search for titles in the PAC, the integrated eContent titles display along with titles for physical material. For example, if a patron searches for a specific title, the results may include a physical DVD and a downloadable ebook or audio ebook from one or more integrated eContent vendors, such as OverDrive and cloudLibrary (formerly 3M Cloud Library).

    +

    + +

    +

    The Availability display depends on how your eContent vendor accounts are set up and whether these accounts are shared by the entire library system, shared by specific organizations, or limited to a single branch. You may also suppress detailed item availability display for integrated eContent. See EContent Availability and Holds Counts.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_the_PAC_Patron_Account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_the_PAC_Patron_Account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f05aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/EContent_in_the_PAC_Patron_Account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + EContent in the PAC Patron Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent in the PAC Patron Account

    +

    After eContent titles are checked out, they are listed on the Items Out page of the patron account. The list reflects the eContent currently checked out, regardless of whether the patron has actually downloaded content.

    +

    Note:
    EContent titles cannot be renewed from PAC, the staff client, or Polaris Phone Attendant. Check-in from the staff client is not supported. For more information, see EContent in the Polaris Staff Client.

    +

    EContent items automatically expire when the item’s expiration date and time are reached. When the expiration date of the item is reached, the item becomes available to someone else. Polaris automatically checks in the item and removes it from the patron account. Patrons can also check in cloudLibrary eContent and some OverDrive eContent formats before they expire. Check in does not apply to Axis 360 eContent.

    +

    A logged-in patron can view the status of requests for eContent on the Requests page of the patron account. Items available for checkout and download are also included in the count of items ready for pickup in the patron account summary dashboard. (This count may change if the user takes action after accessing the account.)

    +

    Requests for eContent titles cannot be suspended or reactivated, but requests with a status of Active can be canceled. The patron can click Refresh eContent on the patron account Requests page to see the changes in PAC. All actions taken on the PAC patron account Requests page result in a real-time update to the vendor account and to the information on the Requests page.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Enable_enriched_content_for_Axis_360_or_OverDrive.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Enable_enriched_content_for_Axis_360_or_OverDrive.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..568ca024 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Enable_enriched_content_for_Axis_360_or_OverDrive.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enable enriched content for Axis 360 or OverDrive + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable enriched content for Axis 360 or OverDrive

    +

    You can enable enriched content provided by Baker & Taylor for Axis 360, or for OverDrive. When your library has implemented the eContent vendor, and enabled the enriched content, patrons will see a “drawer” in the PAC, labeled Descriptions and more, from [vendor name].

    +

    To enable enriched content for an eContent vendor:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Enriched data.
    4. +
    5. Select Baker & Taylor and select the Content Cafe subtab for Axis 360, or select the OverDrive tab, and select the Enable check box. This selection enables the enriched content.
    6. +
    +

    + AxiscontCaf.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Manage_patron_access_to_eContent_using_resource_groups.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Manage_patron_access_to_eContent_using_resource_groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d15506e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Manage_patron_access_to_eContent_using_resource_groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Patron Access to eContent Using Resource Groups + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Patron Access to eContent Using Resource Groups

    +

    Your library can set up resource groups to manage patron access to eContent in the PAC and then select the resource group in the vendor account. Then you can use the PAC profile Resource Groups: Search results settings to control when the title is displayed in PAC search results. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The system uses the settings for the current PAC connection branch.

    +

    For information about additional options for displaying and circulating eContent, see: Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC.

    +

    To set restrictions on the display of integrated eContent titles based on resource groups:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New | Resource Group, and select the organizations that will belong to this resource group. Save the resource group. For more details, see Setting Up Organization Resource Groups.
    2. +
    3. Select the resource group in the eContent vendor account. For information on setting up vendor accounts, see one of the following topics:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Administration | Explorer, select the organization, select Profiles, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Resource Groups: Search results settings.
    4. +
    +

    The Resource Groups: Search results settings dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To display search results according to the resource groups when displaying search results, select (check) Honor Resource Groups in PAC search results lists.
    2. +
    +

    When you check Honor Resource Groups, the remaining options become available for selection. Select at least one option to specify the eContent that is available to patrons based on the branch’s membership in the resource group

    +

    Note:
    If you do not select Honor Resource Groups in PAC search results lists, eContent titles are displayed in the PAC regardless of the connection branch or whether the patron is logged in or not. As a result, patrons may see titles for eContent that they cannot access.
    +

    +
      +
    1. If you want to display eContent titles that are available to the branch when a patron is connected to that branch in the PAC, but not logged in, select (check) Before login show eContent available to connection branch.
    2. +
    +

    When this option is checked, patrons may see titles in search results that are not available to check out once they are logged in.

    +

    When this option is unchecked, and the patron is not logged in, the eContent titles that are not available to the patron do not display.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options under After login, show eContent for: 
      • Connection branch - If this option is checked, logged in patrons searching the PAC at a connection branch that is not their registered branch will see eContent titles that are not available to check out.
      • Registration branch - If this option is checked, logged in patrons searching the PAC at a connection branch that is their registered branch will see the eContent titles that are available to them.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Although the Before login option is independent of the After login options, if you check Before login but do not select either After login option, you receive the following warning message, because in this case no eContent will be displayed after the patron logs in: Once a patron logs in, eContent will no longer appear in the PAC display. Please correct this problem by checking the connection branch check box and/or the registration branch check box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Managing_EContent_in_the_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Managing_EContent_in_the_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..094d8b44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Managing_EContent_in_the_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC

    +

    EContent titles provided by integrated vendors can be displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and PowerPAC Children’s Edition. Patrons can search for and view eContent title information using the same features and functions that are available for searching for physical material titles. For information on setting up integrated eContent in Polaris, see Integration with Polaris and eContent Vendors.

    +

    Note: +
    RBdigital titles display in the patron's account in Polaris Mobile PAC, but patrons cannot take action on RBdigital titles from Mobile PAC.

    +

    Many Polaris Administration settings are used for both physical and eContent titles. These include settings for search types, access points, limit by options, facets, and title display configuration. Advanced search options are supported to the extent that the data is present in the eContent item and bibliographic records.

    +

    Note:
    If your library offers a Limit By filter for currently available items, the system uses the information currently in the Polaris database. Selecting this filter does not trigger real-time synchronization with the integrated eContent vendor.

    +

    Other Polaris Administration settings apply only to eContent in the PAC. These settings are used to: limit title display and access based on the resource group that shares the vendor account; manage eContent availability and hold counts; and track eContent circulations separately from physical items. The library can also customize the text for the Check Out and Place Hold buttons in WebAdmin.

    +

    Important:
    Be sure to reload both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC (if your library uses Mobile PAC) each time you: add or change a resource group; add or change a vendor account; or change the Resource Groups: Search results settings profile in Polaris Administration. See Updating Page Caches.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Patron-Initiated_EContent_Circulation_from_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Patron-Initiated_EContent_Circulation_from_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bbc86673 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Patron-Initiated_EContent_Circulation_from_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron-Initiated EContent Circulation from PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron-Initiated EContent Circulation from PAC

    +

    In Polaris, the loaning branch for circulation transactions is typically the patron’s registered branch. However, your library may want to set the loaning branch as the eContent item’s assigned branch for patron-initiated circulations, where the patron places holds or checks out eContent from the PAC. This option can be set at the System level only.

    +

    EContent titles in PAC search results display the Check Out button if the item is available to the patron or a Place Request button if no local item is available. (If the vendor account is not active, a Temporarily Unavailable button is displayed.)

    +

    If the patron does not have access to the eContent title, a Restricted button is displayed with the hover text Sorry this title is currently not available at your registered branch. You can modify this text string in WebAdmin using the mnemonic: PACML_EBRESTRICTED_TIP. Patrons can also be blocked from checking out eContent based on settings in the Patron Services Administration profile Patron initiated circulation: Blocking conditions. See Set Blocks on Patron-Initiated and eContent Circulation..

    +

    Note:
    Your library can change the labels on the Place Hold and Check Out buttons by modifying vendor-specific strings in WebAdmin.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    For information regarding patron access to a specific vendor's integrated eContent, see:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Reqformatecont.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Reqformatecont.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c60d8e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Reqformatecont.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Require format for integrated eContent check outs in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Require Format for Integrated eContent Check Outs in PAC

    +

    Your library can require patrons to select a format when they check out integrated eContent titles from the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. When the Patron Services parameter Check out: Require format selection when checking out integrated econtent is set to Yes for the library organization the patron is connected to, the format list defaults to Please select, and the patron must select a format from the list to check out the eContent.

    +

    To require patrons to select a format when checking out integrated eContent titles in PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration | Explorer and select the organization (system, library, or branch).
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters under the organization, and select the Patron Services tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Check out: Require format selection when checking out integrated econtent and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Set_the_loaning_branch_for_eContent_circulations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Set_the_loaning_branch_for_eContent_circulations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb5aa37c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Set_the_loaning_branch_for_eContent_circulations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Loaning Branch for eContent Circulations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Loaning Branch for eContent Circulations

    +

    In Polaris, the loaning branch for circulation transactions is the patron’s registered branch. However, your library might want to set the loaning branch as the item’s assigned branch for patron-initiated circulations, where the patron places holds or checks out eContent from the PAC. This profile can be set at the System level only.

    +

    To set the loaning branch for eContent circulation:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the System level, and select the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron initiated circulation: Transaction branch to open the drop-down list.
    4. +
    +

    + profTransbr.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Patron’s branch or Item’s branch. This setting applies to eContent circulations from the PAC only; the loaning branch for physical items is still the patron’s registered branch.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Setting_up_a_digital-branch.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Setting_up_a_digital-branch.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8d707383 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/Setting_up_a_digital-branch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Up a Digital Branch for Integrated EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up a Digital Branch for Integrated EContent

    +

    If multiple libraries in your system use the same Vendor Account (contract) for eContent, Polaris recommends that you set up a digital branch to represent the account. Using a digital branch will make it less likely that extensive bulk changes will be necessary after the eContent items are created. Multiple digital branches, one per multi-library vendor contract, can be created if necessary. In PAC, the materials associated with the digital branch are available according to the branch’s resource group membership.

    +

    Important:

    If you plan to use a digital branch, the branch must be set up in Polaris before you activate the vendor account and start the API Consumer Service.

    +

    Note that if only one library is involved in the contract, a digital branch is not necessary; all the eContent item records are assigned to that library.

    +

    See also: Registering a Branch

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/preventOverDrivedwnlds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/preventOverDrivedwnlds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a527aa7f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentPAC/preventOverDrivedwnlds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Prevent or allow downloads of OverDrive eContent on in-house workstations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Prevent or allow downloads of OverDrive eContent on in-house workstations

    +

    Your library can prevent patrons from downloading OverDrive eContent titles to library workstations or opening checked-out eContent in the browser on a library workstation. If the OverDrive download: Enable on in-house workstations profile is set to No (the default), patrons will not be able to download or open checked-out OverDrive eContent on workstations specified as In-house for the PAC connection library (see Identifying In-House Computers).

    +

    To allow or prevent patrons from accessing and downloading OverDrive integrated eContent on in-house library workstations:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer and select the organization (system, library, or branch).
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles under the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab.
    4. +
    5. Select the OverDrive download: Enable on in-house workstations profile and set it to Yes to allow patrons to download or open checked-out OverDrive eContent on library workstations, or set it to No (the default) to prevent patrons from downloading or opening checked-out OverDrive eContent on workstations specified as In-house (using the In-House Access Definitions table for the PAC connection library).
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegNewRBdigECont.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegNewRBdigECont.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb213403 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegNewRBdigECont.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Integrating New RBdigital eContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating New RBdigital eContent

    +

    When your library purchases new eContent from Recorded Books, the bibliographic records are imported automatically using the import profile selected in the Vendor Account workform. See Importing RBdigital Bibliographic Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegratingExistRBdigital.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegratingExistRBdigital.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51bc6ea3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/IntegratingExistRBdigital.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Integrating Existing RBdigital EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integrating Existing RBdigital EContent

    +

    When the RBdigital vendor account is activated for the first time, a call goes out to the RBdigital API, which returns all the titles the library currently owns. If the library has multiple vendor accounts, data is returned for each vendor account.

    +

    The returned data from RBdigital is transformed into a format that can be consumed by the import process. Then, the bibliographic data is imported into Polaris using the predefined import profile, Integrated eContent bibs (without items), which is specified in the Vendor Account workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/ManualImport.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/ManualImport.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c96b91b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/ManualImport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Manually Import the RBdigital Collection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manually Import the RBdigital Collection

    +

    You can manually set the import to run during the next overnight process and import any missing records. This process does not affect expired titles.

    +

    To manually import your RBdigital collection:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Vendor Account workform for Recorded Books.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Import Titles or press CTRL+ALT+T.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The Tools option appears only for RBdigital vendor accounts.

    +

    + +

    +

    The following message appears: Warning: This process will review your entire RBdigital collection during overnight processing and import any missing records. Do you want to continue? Ok / Cancel. +

    +
      +
    1. Click Ok.
    2. +
    +

    When you manually request an import, the system calls out to RBdigital for the most recent snapshot of the library's titles. The system identifies the records that are in the snapshot but not in the Polaris database, and it creates an import job for those missing records.

    +

    Then, the job is added to the import jobs queue. When the import runs, the records are imported according to the settings in the new import profile. The vendor account linked to the resource entity must match the vendor account importing titles to be considered a match. Duplicate detection is performed by matching the ISBN in the RB digital record to the ISBN in the Resource Entity in Polaris, and only those records not currently in the Polaris database are imported.

    +

    A RBdigital Import Requested transaction is logged. This includes a 300 transaction subtype for the vendor account ID.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/PatronAccessRBdigital.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/PatronAccessRBdigital.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9272bd7c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/PatronAccessRBdigital.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Access to RBdigital EContent + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Access to RBdigital EContent

    +

    Your patrons can log into the Polaris PowerPAC to search for and access RBdigital eContent titles. Recorded Books requires that all borrowers of its eContent be registered with RBdigital. The Polaris PowerPAC provides a link to the RBdigital registration form.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    RBdigital Registration

    +

    To comply with the RBdigital requirement that all borrowers of its eContent be registered, a message in Polaris PowerPAC notifies patrons who have not yet registered that they need to register. When a patron clicks a button to check out or place a request for an RBdigital title, a message appears if the patron is not yet registered with RBdigital.

    +

    Note: +
    To determine whether the patron is registered, the RBdigital API checks the barcode entered when the patron logged into PowerPAC. The registration message appears only when a patron has not registered with RBdigital.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron clicks Register Now to go to the library's RBdigital site to access the registration form.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron fills out the form and clicks REGISTER to register with RBdigital. The patron is then able to check out or request RBdigital from the Polaris PAC.

    +

    You can change the text for the Recorded Book messages displayed in the PAC.

    +

    RBdigital Titles Displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    Note: +
    RBdigital titles display in the patron's account in the Polaris Mobile PAC, but the patron cannot take any action on Recorded Books titles from Mobile PAC.

    +

    RBdigital titles appear in Polaris PowerPAC with the following buttons and banners next to the title:

    +
      +
    • CHECK OUT button - This button appears if the title is owned by the library and is available. When a patron clicks this button, the check out process begins if the patron is registered with RBdigital and has not reached the checkout limit defined by RBdigital for the type of eContent. When a checkout is successful, a new transaction 6103 is logged, indicating the eContent was checked out without an associated item record. In the patron's account, details regarding the checked out eContent for Recorded Books do not include item record fields, and Online appears as the Assigned Branch. See Checking Out RBdigital Titles
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • PLACE HOLD button - This button appears if the title is owned by the library, but it is not available. When the patron clicks this button, the request process begins if the patron is registered with RB digital and has not reached the hold request limit defined in RBdigital for the type of eContent. See Requesting RBdigital Titles
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • RESTRICTED - If a resource group has been used to restrict access to the title, but does not have Honor resource groups enabled in Polaris Administration, patrons will see RESTRICTED for titles they do not have access to.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • ALL COPIES EXPIRED - This appears when all copies owned by the library have expired, but the title has not yet been removed from the catalog. If the library orders new copies, the button is updated once those copies become available.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Checking Out RBdigital Titles

    +

    If the RBdigital title is available to the patron who is logged into the Polaris PowerPAC, the CHECK OUT button appears. When the patron clicks the CHECK OUT button, a confirmation message box appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron clicks the Check Out Now button.

    +

    A message appears indicating the check-out was successful.

    +

    + +

    +

    The RBdigital title appears in the patron's Items Out list.

    +

    + +

    +

    Requesting RBdigital Titles

    +

    If the RBdigital title is not available for check-out but the logged-in patron can place a hold request on the title, the PLACE HOLD button appears. The patron clicks the PLACE HOLD button, and a confirmation message box appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron clicks the Place Hold Now button, and a message indicates the hold request was placed.

    +

    + +

    +

    The hold request appears in the patron's Requests list.

    +

    + +

    +

    Checking in RBdigital Titles Before They Expire

    +

    From the Patron account | Items out list, the patron clicks Check In to check in a Recorded Books title before it expires.

    +

    + +

    +

    A confirmation message box appears, and the patron clicks Check in Now.

    +

    + +

    +

    A success message appears.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/RecordedBooksEContent-934.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/RecordedBooksEContent-934.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d318526e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/RecordedBooksEContent-934.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + RBdigital EContent Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    RBdigital EContent Integration

    +

    You can integrate eContent from the Recorded Books service, RBdigital, into Polaris so that patrons can search for, check out, and download these titles from the PAC.

    +

    Note: +
    The RBdigital integration does not create item records within Polaris because the RBdigital API provides availability as either True or False instead of providing copy counts.

    +

    The following are required for RBdigital eContent integration:

    +
      +
    • RBdigital license key - System-only license key with the number of seats corresponding to the number of vendor accounts Innovative needs to create.
    • +
    • Access to the RBdigital API - The library's firewall must allow access to api.rbdigital.com over port 443.
    • +
    +

    If your library is interested in implementing integrated eContent with Recorded Books, contact your library's Innovative Interfaces Site Manager.

    +

    The Recorded Books API provides nightly deltas of newly added or recently expired titles. The Polaris API Consumer Service uses these deltas to import new titles or identify expired titles during the overnight process. Library staff can periodically check for Recorded Books titles removed from the library's collection. The expired bibliographic records are gathered in a record set entitled RBExpiredTitles_[Date/time]. Your library can purge or retain the records.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SetUpVendRec.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SetUpVendRec.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2092a3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SetUpVendRec.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + Creating an RBdigital Integrated Vendor Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating an RBdigital Integrated Vendor Account

    +

    The RBdigital (integrated) Vendor node appears in the Polaris Administration Explorer only when your library has a license for RBdigital. RBdigital supports multiple accounts, such as a parent (shared) account and individual child accounts with titles and copies exclusively for patrons registered at specific branches.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    Your Site Manager will assist you in creating a RBdigital vendor account.

    +

    To create an RBdigital vendor account:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration | Explorer | Vendor.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Expand the Vendors node to display all the eContent vendors.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Right-click RBdigital (integrated), and select New.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Vendor Account workform appears.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type the name for the RBdigital account in the Vendor account name box.
    2. +
    3. Type the description for the account in the Vendor account description box.
    4. +
    5. If your library is using a resource group for this vendor account, select it in the Resource group box.
    6. +
    7. Type the URL for the RBdigital icon in the Icon URL box.
    8. +
    9. Type the contract ID in the Vendor contract ID box.
    10. +
    11. Type api.rbdigital.com in the Vendor account server name box.
    12. +
    +

    Note: +
    The firewall must allow access to api.rbdigital.com over port 443.

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes in the Vendor account use SSL box.
    2. +
    3. Select Integrated eContent bibs (without items) in the Vendor account import profile ID box.
    4. +
    5. Type the library-specific URL in the Library RBdigital URL box.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Save the Vendor Account workform.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SettingUpPolRBDigital.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SettingUpPolRBDigital.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b520bee0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentRecBooks/SettingUpPolRBDigital.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + Importing RBdigital Bibliographic Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Importing RBdigital Bibliographic Records

    +

    To enable the import processing that integrates RBdigital eContent with Polaris, the vendor account, and import profile(s) must be set up correctly in Polaris. Your Polaris Site Manager can assist your library with this setup.

    +

    Note: +
    The RBdigital integration does not create item records within Polaris; therefore no item template is necessary.

    +

    RBdigital Import Profile

    +

    The Integrated eContent bibs (without items) import profile is used to import RBdigital titles. It is listed when you filter the import profiles by Creator | PolarisExec.

    +

    + +

    +

    All options set on the Bibliographic Records and Authority Records tabs are the same as those set in the Integrated ebook Bibs import profile, except the Item Records tab, which has no item-creation options selected because no item records will be built. In addition, the record set names defined on the Record Sets tab of the Integrated eContent bibs (without items) import profile begin with eContent instead of EBook.

    +

    + +

    +

    RBdigital Import Process

    +

    When your library has implemented integrated eContent with RBdigital, the following processes occur:

    +
      +
    • The Polaris API consumer service overnight process runs and retrieves the data from RBdigital since it last ran.
    • +
    • The Polaris API consumer service then submits an automatic import job for processing.
    • +
    • The bibliographic records are imported automatically using the import profile selected in the Vendor Account workform. The Integrated eContent bibs (without items) import profile is selected by default.
    • +
    • The automatic import job appears in the Import Jobs Queue, and the import report provides details regarding the automatic import.
    • +
    • New bibliographic records are saved in the Polaris database.
    • +
    • A Resource Entity is created for each 856 tag that contains RBdigital vendor account data. The vendor contract ID is in subfield x of the 856 tag. The Resource Entity appears on the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform.
    • +
    • The import synchronization occurs once daily during an overnight process.
    • +
    • Auto-suggest and facets are updated the following day - PAC auto-suggest and search results facets for these newly imported eContent records are updated after the overnight jobs.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Convert_a_resource_entity_to_an_856_tag.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Convert_a_resource_entity_to_an_856_tag.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef220886 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Convert_a_resource_entity_to_an_856_tag.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Convert a resource entity to an 856 tag + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Converting a Resource Entity to an 856 Tag

    +

    To convert a resource entity to a traditional 856 tag.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record workform for the integrated eContent.
    2. +
    3. Go to the Resources view.
    4. +
    5. Select Revert to MARC tag.
    6. +
    +

    The integrated eContent tag is changed to an 856 tag in the bibliographic record, and item records linked to the reverted resource entity are unlinked and deleted. If the eContent item is not currently checked in, the following message appears: You cannot convert this resource entity because copies of the book are currently checked out.

    +

    Exporting Bibliographic Records with Resource Entities

    +

    When you export bibliographic records for integrated eContent from the staff-client or by using SimplyReports and Export Express, the resource entities revert to regular MARC tags in the bibliographic records. Resource entities are also converted to regular 856 MARC tags if another library copies an integrated eContent bibliographic record from your library’s catalog using a Z39.50 search.

    +

    Resource Entities Transactions

    +

    Transactions are recorded when resource entities are created, modified, reverted, or deleted. The resource entity creator/date, and the resource entity modifier/date are displayed in the Resources view of the Bibliographic Record workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Copy_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Copy_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8964232c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Copy_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy a bibliographic record with a resource entity + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copying a Bibliographic Record with a Resource Entity

    +

    When you select File > New > Copy from the Bibliographic Record workform, the resource entity is not copied to the new record. Instead, the tags are converted to traditional MARC tags in the new record. The resource entity can be created for the new record in another step.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96f9b6b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_bibliographic_record_with_a_resource_entity.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a bibliographic record with a resource entity + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting a Bibliographic Record with a Resource Entity

    +

    Before a bibliographic record that has a resource entity can be deleted, all eContent item records must be deleted.

    +

    To delete a bibliographic record with a resource entity:

    +
      +
    1. Search for the bibliographic record for the eContent title.
    2. +

      You can limit by Vendor Account in the Find Tool.

      +

      + FTbibslimitvendres.gif 

      +
    3. Right-click the eContent title listed in the Find Tool results list, and select Links > Item Records.
    4. +

      If more than one item record is linked to the eContent bib, a list box appears. If a single item record is linked to the eContent bib, the Item Record workform opens.

      +
    5. Delete the linked item record.
    6. +
    7. Right-click the bibliographic record, and select Delete from the menu.
    8. +

      When the bibliographic record is deleted, the resource entities remain in the bibliographic record. This allows the resource entity to be restored automatically if the bibliographic record is ever undeleted.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_resource_entity.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_resource_entity.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..063f67c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Delete_a_resource_entity.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Delete a resource entity + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting a Resource Entity

    +

    To delete a resource entity from the Resource view of the Bibliographic Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Bibliographic Record workform for the integrated eContent.
    2. +
    3. Go to the Resources view.
    4. +
    5. Select Delete.
    6. +

      The following message appears: This action completely removes the resource entity and the 856 tag from the record, and it removes any linked eContent item records. It cannot be restored. 

      +
    7. Select OK to remove the resource entity.
    8. +

      Any eContent items linked to the resource entity are also deleted except if the item circulation status is other than In or the Retain deleted item records profile is set to Yes. If any linked eContent item records have a circulation status other than In, the following message appears: You cannot delete this resource entity because copies of the book are currently checked out. If the Retain deleted item records profile is set to Yes, the item is marked for deletion and later purged following the same purge process as other types of item records.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Resource_Entities.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Resource_Entities.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84b45b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/EContentResEnt/Resource_Entities.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Resource Entities + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resource Entities

    +

    A resource entity on a bibliographic record is a group of fields that collectively identifies the eContent vendor, the library’s account with the vendor, and the specific electronic resource in the vendor’s repository. For eContent provided by an integrated vendor, resource entities are used to integrate eContent with Polaris circulation. They can also be used to restrict access to eContent for either integrated or non-integrated vendors. See Non-Integrated EContent in Polaris.

    +

    When an integrated eContent vendor’s bibliographic records are imported in Polaris, a resource entity is automatically created for each 856 tag containing data that identifies the vendor account and links to the electronic resource in the vendor’s repository. The 856 tag for the integrated eContent vendor must have a first indicator (access method) of 4 (HTTP) and a second indicator of 0 (resource) in order to create the resource entity. Other 856 tags with a second indicator of 2 (related resource) may be present, but are not required to create the resource entity.

    +

    If a bibliographic record has a resource entity associated with it, the Resources view of the Bibliographic workform displays the resource entity information.

    +

    + resentAxis.gif 

    +

    The Resource Entity view of the Bibliographic Records workform displays the following information:

    +
      +
    • The vendor’s name
    • +
    • Vendor Account Name - Identifies the account associated with the vendor.
    • +
    • Active (Yes/No) - Vendor account’s status
    • +
    • Resource Group - (optional) This is the name of the Resource Group, which is derived from the Vendor Account. The Resource Group cannot be modified from this view; you must change it in the Vendor Account.
    • +
    • Imported MARC data - The 856 tag for the electronic resource, which includes the object identifier and the vendor’s contract ID (if available).
    • +
    • Object Identifier - The eContent vendor’s unique ID that identifies the electronic resource in the vendor’s repository.
    • +
    • URL - The URL to the eContent in the vendor’s repository.
    • +

      Tip:
      Currently, the link text and public note do not display in Mobile PAC for an integrated eContent vendor.

      +
    • Link Text - You can change the link text. The link text and public note appear in the PAC in the tooltip associated with the vendor logo. If the link text is not defined for the resource entity, a default text string identifies the eContent vendor. 
    • +
    • Cover Image URL - The link to the cover image.
    • +
    • Public Note - You can enter a public note that appears in the tooltip next to the vendor logo. The public note displays on a separate line in the tooltip, prefixed with the label Note:.
    • +
    • Non-Public Note - You can enter a non-public note for staff members.
    • +
    • Creator - PolarisExec indicates the resource entity was created automatically.
    • +
    • Creation Date - The date and time when the resource entity was created automatically.
    • +
    +

    A submenu in the right portion of the Resources view includes the following options:

    +
      +
    • Linked Item Record - Links to electronic (eContent) items associated with this resource entity. The eContent check box is checked on the Item Record workform.
    • +
    • Open Vendor Account - Links to the Vendor Account workform for the resource entity (option available only if user has Vendor Account: Access permission)
    • +
    • Revert to MARC tag - Changes the resource entity to an 856 tag. See Convert a resource entity to an 856 tag
    • +
    • Delete Resource Entity - Deletes the resource entity from the bibliographic record.
    • +

      Note:
      A single bibliographic record cannot contain resource entities for both integrated and non-integrated eContent.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/Implementing_EContent_Integration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/Implementing_EContent_Integration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b8be504d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/Implementing_EContent_Integration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + + Integration with Polaris and eContent Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Integration with Polaris and eContent Vendors

    +

    Libraries can implement integration between Polaris and the following eContent vendor applications:

    +
      +
    • cloudLibrary from Bibliotheca
    • +
    • Axis 360 from Baker & Taylor
    • +
    • OverDrive from Rakuten OverDrive
    • +
    • RBdigital from Recorded Books.
    • +
    +

    After a library subscribes to one of these eContent applications and configures Polaris to enable the integration, patrons can search for, place holds on, and check out a vendor's eContent directly from the PAC.

    +

    For eContent integration where item records are created as part of the import process, the associated circulation processing and tracking for integrated eContent occurs in Polaris. For RBdigital integration where no item records are created in Polaris, checkouts from the PAC are logged, but not checkouts from the RBdigital application. Although Polaris logs statistics, the eContent vendor is the source of the most accurate and timely circulation data.

    +

    The eContent products cloudLibrary and Axis 360 use Polaris API (PAPI) authentication, defined in Patron initiated circulation rules. For these vendors, Polaris requires an SSL certificate for PAPI server security. OverDrive and RBdigital use SIP authentication, defined in Polaris SIP authentication rules. Since authentication takes place via SIP and not PAPI, SSL is not required.

    +

    Note: Your library can choose to configure Axis 360 to use SIP authentication instead of PAPI.

    +

    When an integrated eContent vendor’s bibliographic records are imported in Polaris, a resource entity is automatically created for each 856 tag. A resource entity is a group of fields that collectively identifies the eContent vendor, the library’s account with the vendor, and the specific electronic resource in the vendor’s repository.

    +

    The following components are required for implementing eContent integration with Polaris:

    +
      +
    • Subscription to the eContent service - The library contracts with the eContent vendor for a subscription to the eContent service.
    • +
    • Polaris Integrated eContent license - The library obtains a single integrated eContent license that covers Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris Mobile PAC, and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.
    • +
    • Polaris API (PAPI) license - (Only required for cloudLibrary) Only one Polaris API license is required for each Polaris installation, regardless of the number of vendor contracts. If the library already has a license for the Polaris API, no additional API fee is required.
    • +
    • Automatic import item template - The library sets up the item template that is used to create item records if the vendor integration creates item records. The template is selected in the Vendor Account record if the import process creates item records. The name must begin with Ebook automatic import (case does not matter, and e-book is also accepted). This template is used for any eContent items, including audio ebooks.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    The integrated vendor record is visible in Polaris Administration only if the library has a license for that vendor.

    +
      +
    • Vendor Account - The library staff, with the assistance of their Polaris site manager, sets up the integrated vendor account record under the vendor record in Polaris Administration. The vendor account is used to create resource entities for the eContent bibliographic records and eContent item records in Polaris (if item records are created). If the library is using resource groups, the vendor account is also linked to the resource group.
    • +
    • Integrated EContent Import Profiles - Polaris provides a read-only Integrated ebook Bibs import profile that can be renamed and modified. For RBdigital, the import profile is named Integrated eContent bibs (without items). Your library may want to set up multiple import profiles for different tasks. Your Polaris Site Manager can assist you with creating import profiles.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    For OverDrive and cloudLibrary, newly-purchased eContent records are imported automatically using the import profile selected in the Vendor Account workform. Newly-purchased RBdigital titles are automatically imported as part of the overnight sync processes. Your library can copy and rename the Integrated ebook Bibs profile, but the renamed profile must be selected in the Vendor Account workform.

    +

    Your library may also implement the following optional Polaris records and settings:

    +
      +
    • Polaris Digital Branch - If multiple libraries in your system use the same vendor account (contract), Polaris recommends that you set up a digital branch to represent the account. You can set up multiple digital branches, one per multi-library vendor contract, if necessary. Or, you can set up a single digital branch and associate multiple eContent vendors’ materials with this branch. During import processing, the item records are created with the digital branch as the assigned branch. In the PAC, materials associated with the digital branch are available according to the branch’s resource group membership. If only one library is involved in the contract, a digital branch is not needed. All the eContent item records are assigned to that library.
    • +
    • Resource Groups - The library can set up resource groups for library organizations that allow their patrons to access the eContent.
    • +
    • Patron Services Administration - The library can set Patron Services parameters and profiles to manage patron initiated circulation of eContent from the PAC (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC):
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • Patron initiated circulation: Transaction branch profile - You can change the transaction branch setting from Patron’s branch (the default) to Item’s branch in the Patron Services profile to track eContent circulation transactions from the PAC separately from check outs and holds for physical items. See Set the loaning branch for eContent circulations.
    • +
    • Check-out: Require format selection when checking out integrated eContent parameter - When this parameter is set to Yes for the library organization the patron is connected to in the PAC, the patron must select the format when checking out eContent titles. See Require format for integrated eContent check outs in PAC.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • PAC Administration - The library can set the Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles PAC profile to suppress detailed item availability information for integrated eContent. See Suppress EContent Availability Display in PAC.
    • +
    • OverDrive Advantage Vendor Information - If your library has OverDrive Advantage, you can control access to the Advantage eContent using a setting in the vendor record. See Create an OverDrive integrated vendor account.
    • +
    • Preferred Vendor Accounts Policy Table - This policy table is used for libraries using the cloudLibrary eContent service that also use Bibliotheca's cloudLink groups to share resources.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    By default, integrated eContent titles are not included in patron notices. Polaris administrators can change this setting on the Reminder tab of the Notification options dialog box. See Setting Up E-mail Reminder Notices.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/OverDrive_and_Changed_Patron_Barcodes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/OverDrive_and_Changed_Patron_Barcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ef485a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/EContent Integration/OverDrive_and_Changed_Patron_Barcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + OverDrive and Changed Patron Barcodes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    OverDrive and Changed Patron Barcodes

    +

    In Polaris 5.1 and later, a patron whose barcode has been replaced (for example, due to a lost library card) can now access integrated and non-integrated OverDrive content associated with the previous barcode. To support this feature, a PC field containing the PatronID is included in the 24 Patron Status and 64 Patron Information response messages consumed by OverDrive.

    +

    To implement this feature, follow these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Upgrade to Polaris 5.1 or later, if necessary.
    2. +
    3. Submit a support request to Innovative Interfaces via OverDrive Marketplace.
    4. +
    +

    OverDrive receives the request and asks for a list of current IDs/barcodes and corresponding Patron IDs, so they can be linked together. This will ensure that all users can continue to access their existing checkouts and holds.

    +
      +
    1. Generate the list and send it to OverDrive.
    2. +
    +

    Upon receiving the list, OverDrive will link each user's barcode or ID to their new Patron ID. OverDrive updates the authentication configuration to capture the Patron ID from the SIP response as the user's identification.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Glossary.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Glossary.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8d3910f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Glossary.htm @@ -0,0 +1,427 @@ + + + + + + + Glossary + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Glossary

    +

    006 field Fixed-length Data Elements - Additional Material Characteristics: +This field contains 18 character positions (00-17) that provide for coding information about special aspects of the item being cataloged that cannot be coded in field 008 (Fixed-Length Data Elements). It is used in cases when an item has multiple characteristics. It is also used to record the coded serial aspects of nontextual continuing resources. +  +The field has a tree structure, whereby the code given in 006/00 (Form of material) determines the data elements defined for subsequent character positions. Except for code s (Serial/Integrating resource), the codes in field 006/00 correspond to those in Leader/06 (Type of record). For each occurrence of field 006, the codes defined for character positions 01-17 will be the same as those defined in the corresponding field 008, character positions 18-34. Configurations of field 006 are given in the following order: books, computer files/electronic resources, maps, music, continuing resources, visual materials, and mixed materials. +

    +

    Fixed-length Data Elements -Additional Material Characteristics

    +

    This field contains 18 character positions (00-17) that provide for coding control number information about special aspects of the item being cataloged that cannot be coded in field 008 (Fixed-Length Data Elements). It is used in cases when an item has multiple characteristics. It is also used to record the coded serial aspects of nontextual continuing resources.

    +

    The field has a tree structure, whereby the code given in 006/00 (Form of material) determines the data elements defined for subsequent character positions. Except for code s (Serial/Integrating resource), the codes in field 006/00 correspond to those in Leader/06 (Type of record). For each occurrence of field 006, the codes defined for character positions 01-17 will be the same as those defined in the corresponding field 008, character positions 18-34. Configurations of field 006 are given in the following order: books, computer files/electronic resources, maps, music, continuing resources, visual materials, and mixed materials.

    +

    007 field Physical Description, Fixed Field - +This field contains special information about the physical characteristics in a coded form. The information may represent the whole item or parts of an item such as accompanying material. +  +The data elements in field 007 are positionally defined and the number of character positions in field 007 depends upon the code contained in 007/00. Character position 00 contains a code that identifies the category of material. The fill character (|) is not allowed in this position. The fill character may be used in any other character position when the cataloging agency makes no attempt to code the position. +  +The categories of material for which field 007 is applicable in bibliographic records are presented in the following order in the field description: map, electronic resource, globe, tactile material, projected graphic, microform, nonprojected graphic, motion picture, kit, notated music, remote-sensing image, sound recording, text, videorecording, and unspecified. +

    +

    Physical Description Fixed Field

    +

    This field contains special information about the physical characteristics in a coded form. The information may represent the whole item or parts of an item such as accompanying material.

    +

    The data elements in field 007 are positionally defined and the number of character positions in field 007 depends upon the code contained in 007/00. Character position 00 contains a code that identifies the category of material. The fill character (|) is not allowed in this position. The fill character may be used in any other character position when the cataloging agency makes no attempt to code the position.

    +

    The categories of material for which field 007 is applicable in bibliographic records are presented in the following order in the field description: map, electronic resource, globe, tactile material, projected graphic, microform, nonprojected graphic, motion picture, kit, notated music, remote-sensing image, sound recording, text, videorecording, and unspecified.

    +

    008 field Fixed-length Data Elements - General Information +This field contains 40 character positions (00-39) that provide coded information about the record as a whole and about special bibliographic aspects of the item being cataloged. These coded data elements are potentially useful for retrieval and data management purposes. +  +The data elements are positionally defined. Character positions that are not defined contain a blank (#). All defined character positions must contain a defined code; for some field 008 positions, this may be the fill character (|). The fill character may be used (in certain character positions) when a cataloging organization makes no attempt to code the character position. The fill character is not allowed in field 008 positions 00-05 (Date entered on file). Its use is discouraged in positions 07-10 (Date 1), 15-17 (Place of publication, production, or execution), and the 008 position defined for Form of item (either position 23 or 29 depending upon the 008 configuration). +  +Character positions 00-17 and 35-39 are defined the same across all types of material, with special consideration for position 06. The definition of character positions 18-34 was done independently for each type of material, although certain data elements are defined the same in the specifications for more than one type of material. When similar data elements are defined for inclusion in field 008 for different types of material, they occupy the same field 008 character positions. +

    +

    Fixed-length Data Elements - General Information

    +

    This field contains 40 character positions (00-39) that provide coded information about the record as a whole and about special bibliographic aspects of the item being cataloged. These coded data elements are potentially useful for retrieval and data management purposes.

    +

    The data elements are positionally defined. Character positions that are not defined contain a blank (#). All defined character positions must contain a defined code; for some field 008 positions, this may be the fill character (|). The fill character may be used (in certain character positions) when a cataloging organization makes no attempt to code the character position. The fill character is not allowed in field 008 positions 00-05 (Date entered on file). Its use is discouraged in positions 07-10 (Date 1), 15-17 (Place of publication, production, or execution), and the 008 position defined for Form of item (either position 23 or 29 depending upon the 008 configuration).

    +

    Character positions 00-17 and 35-39 are defined the same across all types of material, with special consideration for position 06. The definition of character positions 18-34 was done independently for each type of material, although certain data elements are defined the same in the specifications for more than one type of material. When similar data elements are defined for inclusion in field 008 for different types of material, they occupy the same field 008 character positions.

    +

    access point

    +

    A searchable key or index to a record or set of records.

    +

    added entry A secondary entry to the main entry in a MARC record. +

    +

    A secondary entry to the main entry in a MARC record.

    +

    ASN (Advanced Shipping Notice) An advance shipping notice or advance ship notice (ASN) is an electronic notification of pending shipments that is provided by a supplier after an EDI order is received and processed. If the supplier has the capability to produce ASNs (X12 transaction set 856), the Polaris EDIAgent utility retrieves the shipment information, and loads the data into Polaris. This enables users to receive materials in Polaris by scanning the tracking barcode on the outside of the carton. +

    +

    An advance shipping notice or advance ship notice (ASN) is an electronic notification of pending shipments that is provided by a supplier after an EDI order is received and processed. If the supplier has the capability to produce ASNs (X12 transaction set 856), the Polaris EDIAgent utility retrieves the shipment information, and loads the data into Polaris. This enables users to receive materials in Polaris by scanning the tracking barcode on the outside of the carton.

    +

    approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. +

    +

    An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile.

    +

    association

    +

    A relationship between two or more patron records so that when one record is open, all records associated with it are visible and accessible.

    +

    authority control

    +

    The consistent use and maintenance of forms of names, subjects, uniform tiles, etc. used as headings in a catalog. This process creates a link between bibliographic records and the authority file, providing the underlying structure of the catalog.

    +

    authority record

    +

    A cataloging record that refers to specific name headings, subject headings, series, and uniform title headings in bibliographic records. It lists the cross-references to be made to and from the established heading and cites the sources consulted in establishing the heading. A MARC record containing value “z” in Leader/06.

    +

    barcode

    +

    The unique identification for a patron or an item.

    +

    barcode recognition

    +

    The ability of Polaris to differentiate between patron and item barcode types. If the user inputs the wrong barcode type, an error message appears.

    +

    bibliographic record

    +

    A cataloging record, commonly referred to as a MARC or title record, which is the primary source of data used by other Polaris records. Bibliographic records can contain all or some of the following information: title, main entry, subject headings, classification and call number, and description of the item.

    +

    blanket plan A blanket plan (also called a blanket order) is most commonly used for ordering all materials or a specific subset of materials that are published by an organization. In contrast with approval plans, blanket plans do not generally allow return privileges with simple deductions from the invoice. With blanket plans, quality is less important than comprehensiveness of coverage. Blanket plans can be as narrow as a specific publisher’s series or as broad as a request to send all material of a particular type or on a particular subject. +

    +

    A blanket plan (also called a blanket order) is most commonly used for ordering all materials or a specific subset of materials that are published by an organization. In contrast with approval plans, blanket plans do not generally allow return privileges with simple deductions from the invoice. With blanket plans, quality is less important than comprehensiveness of coverage. Blanket plans can be as narrow as a specific publisher’s series or as broad as a request to send all material of a particular type or on a particular subject.

    +

    blind reference 1) An authority link (see or see also - 4xx and 5xx respectively) which points to an authority heading that does not exist in the database. 2) An authority heading (1xx) to which no bibliographic records are linked. +

    +

    1) an authority link (see or see also - 4xx and 5xx respectively) which points to an authority heading that does not exist in the database. 2) An authority heading (1xx) to which no bibliographic records are linked.

    +

    block

    +

    Polaris term for the condition you may know as “stop.” A block interrupts the check-out, renewal, or placement of a hold under certain conditions in Polaris. A block notification message appears, which library staff can override to continue with the transaction.

    +

    call number

    +

    A classification number which identifies a particular work and indicates its shelf position in relation to other works.

    +

    catalog

    +

    The bibliographic representation of the materials in library collections.

    +

    cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. +

    +

    A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries.

    +

    check-in

    +

    Polaris term for the process you may know as “discharge” or “return.”

    +

    check-out

    +

    Polaris term for the process you may know as “charge” or “loan.”

    +

    chief source of information

    +

    The source of bibliographic data to be given preference as the source from which a bibliographic description (or portion thereof) is prepared. Examples of the chief source are the title page of a book, the title screen of a video, or the title screen from a computer software product.

    +

    chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. +

    +

    The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.

    +

    claim

    +

    Occurs when Polaris shows that an item is out, but the patron claims that she returned the item (claim returned) or never had the item (claim never had). Library staff assign the appropriate claim status to the item.

    +

    client

    +

    A software application that connects to a service from a server somewhere on the network. Specifically, a workstation using Polaris software to access or maintain the database on the Polaris server. In Serials, a claim may be placed when a serial issue is not received as expected.

    +

    client/server

    +

    A computer system that includes a client workstation and a server. Working at the client, a user requests a service of the server. The server does the appropriate processes and passes the results back to the client. In these systems, the majority of processing is done on the server, often distributing the processing across multiple servers.

    +

    collection

    +

    A group of materials which share common characteristics and a location. Examples include reference and periodicals.

    +

    collective title

    +

    A title proper that is an inclusive title for an item containing several individual works.

    +

    content designators Tags, indicators, and subfield codes in a MARC record. +

    +

    Tags, indicators, and subfield codes in a MARC record.

    +

    context menu

    +

    A menu that is displayed at the location of a selected object by right-clicking the object (also referred to as a pop-up menu or shortcut menu). The menu contains commands that are contextually relevant to the selection.

    +

    control number

    +

    A unique number assigned by an agency: Library of Congress puts its control number in tag 010. National Library of Medicine puts its control number in tag 016. Records in Polaris have the control number in the 001 Current System.

    +

    corporate body

    +

    An organization or group of persons that is identified by a particular name and that acts, or may act as an entity. Typical examples of corporate bodies are associations, institutions, business firms, nonprofit enterprises, governments, government agencies, religious bodies, local churches, and conferences.

    +

    cross-reference

    +

    An alternate heading which directs the user to either the established form of a heading or to related headings.

    +

    database

    +

    An organized, searchable collection of information units containing related information. As used in Polaris documents, a database might contain bibliographic data, such as the library catalog; another bibliographic database, such as a journal citation file; or a full-text database of some kind. The database might reside in a number of places, including a hard disk on a server which is a part of the local system, a CD-ROM, or on a remote server accessible via the network or via the Internet.

    +

    delimiter A separate character used in conjunction with a subfield code and introduces each subfield in a variable field. +

    +

    A separate character used in conjunction with a subfield code and introduces each subfield in a variable field.

    +

    deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. +

    +

    A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles.

    +

    diacritical mark Any of various marks, such as a macron or cedilla, added to a letter or symbol to indicate its pronunciation or to distinguish it in some way. +

    +

    Any of various marks, such as a macron or cedilla, added to a letter or symbol to indicate its pronunciation or to distinguish it in some way.

    +

    directory (MARC record)

    +

    A series of entries that contain the tag, length, and starting location of each variable field within a record. Each entry is 12 character positions. Directory entries for variable control fields appear first, in numerical order. Entries for variable data fields follow, arranged in ascending order according to the first character of the tag.

    +

    duplicate detection

    +

    An automatic Polaris process to ensure that each patron is registered only once and that patron barcode numbers are not duplicated.

    +

    enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. +

    +

    The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole.

    +

    express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons. +

    +

    Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons.

    +

    field (MARC record)

    +

    Each bibliographic record is divided logically into fields. There is a field for the author, for the title information, and so on. These fields are subdivided into one or more subfields. The names of the fields are represented by 3-digit tags.

    +

    first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD).

    +

    Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD).

    +

    form subdivision A division of a subject heading which brings out the form of the work. For example, in the headings: +Internet (Computer network) - Periodicals +Library technicians - Bibliography +

    +

    A division of a subject heading which brings out the form of the work. For example, in the headings:

    +

    Internet (Computer network) - Periodicals

    +

    Library technicians - Bibliography

    +

    free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. +

    +

    A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation.

    +

    geographic qualifier The name of a larger geographic entity added to a local place name. +For example, in the headings: +Cambridge (Mass.) +Toledo (Spain) +

    +

    The name of a larger geographic entity added to a local place name.

    +

    For example, in the headings:

    +

    Cambridge (Mass.)

    +

    Toledo (Spain)

    +

    geographic subdivision A subdivision which limits a topical subject heading to a specific geographic location. +For example, in the headings: +Women - Peru +Libraries - New York (State) +

    +

    A subdivision which limits a topical subject heading to a specific geographic location.

    +

    For example, in the headings:

    +

    Women - Peru

    +

    Libraries - New York (State)

    +

    group (holds)

    +

    Two or more related hold requests for the same patron, with a status of active, inactive, or pending, can be grouped when a patron wants any one of several requested titles. When one request is filled, the others are deleted. The group is assigned a letter.

    +

    heading

    +

    Any of the 1xx tags in the authority record and any text subject to authority control in the bibliographic records.

    +

    heading cross-reference

    +

    A heading (either an equivalent heading, a similar heading, or an unused heading) represented in 4xx and 5xx, fields in the authority record. Polaris only links bibliographic records to authority record 1xx fields. Authority records link to other authority records in 1xx, 4xx, and 5xx fields.

    +

    higher preference Cataloging Source

    +

    A cataloging source code which represents an institution whose cataloging the library deems to be preferred over other lower preference cataloging sources.

    +

    hold

    +

    Polaris term for the process you may know as “reserve.” (In Polaris, “reserve” refers to setting items aside for specific academic courses.) A hold request is a system function by which an item is blocked from circulation and kept for a patron to pick up later.

    +

    hold request

    +

    A patron or staff member may place a request to set aside an item for the patron to pick up later, usually because the item is currently unavailable.

    +

    hold slip

    +

    A paper record printed when an item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. (held) at check-in or renewal for a patron and placed with the held material for identification purposes. Polaris offers several types of hold slips.

    +

    holds queue

    +

    A list of requests with pending or active status or a title or item. Requests are typically filled in the order they appear in the queue. You can manually change the order of requests in the queue.

    +

    index

    +

    An organized list that designates the contents or topics in a database or databases; contains entries or codes that can be used to identify and retrieve a record.

    +

    indicator

    +

    Two character positions follow each tag (with the exception of Fields 001 through 009). One or both of these character positions may be used for indicators. In some fields, only the first or second position is used; in some fields, both are used; and in some fields, like the 020 and 300 fields, neither is used. When an indicator position is not used, that indicator is referred to as “undefined” and the position is left blank. By convention, a blank or undefined indicator position is represented by the character “#”.

    +

    item-level hold

    +

    A request for a specific item when only that item satisfies the request. Example: Several items are linked to the bibliographic record, but only a specific item, a large-print copy, satisfies the request.

    +

    item

    +

    A single piece owned by a particular library or agency as a part of a particular collection. An item may be a copy of a book, serial, abstract, article, audiocassette, or microfilm.

    +

    item record

    +

    A cataloging record that identifies a particular item in the library collection. Item records are generated during standard cataloging operations, on-the-fly circulation, release of a purchase order, or serial check-in.

    +

    Leader

    +

    The first field in all MARC records, fixed in length at 24 character positions. It contains data elements that provide information for the processing of the record. The data elements contain numbers or coded values and are identified by a relative character position.

    +

    loan

    +

    See check-out.

    +

    lower preference Cataloging Source

    +

    A cataloging source code which represents an institution whose cataloging the library deems to be less preferred than those of higher preference cataloging sources.

    +

    macro

    +

    A sequence of keyboard actions that can be recorded once and replayed on demand.

    +

    MARC

    +

    Machine Readable Cataloging.

    +

    MARC Editor

    +

    This window appears when you select a bibliographic or authority record from a search results list, or when you create a new bibliographic or authority record. The Editor window is identical for both bibliographic and authority records. All bibliographic and authority record operations are done from the Editor window.

    +

    monographic series A group of monographs with a collective title in addition to their individual titles. The individual titles may or may not be numbered. The collective title is generally found on the title page or the cover of each monograph. +

    +

    A group of monographs with a collective title in addition to their individual titles. The individual items may or may not be numbered. The collective title is generally found on the title page or the cover of each monograph.

    +

    name authority file

    +

    A file containing records which show the form in which personal names, corporate bodies, uniform titles, and jurisdictional geographic headings have been established; indicate the cross-references made to those headings, and cite the sources consulted in establishing the heading.   

    +

    non-filing characters

    +

    Typically, articles at the beginning of a title, such as a, an, or the including the space that follows, are counted as non-filing characters. For example, the counts as 4 non-filing characters.

    +

    on-the-fly item record creation

    +

    Entering basic item information to create a minimal-level item and bibliographic record, according to pre-defined OTF templates. This allows an item to circulate immediately without full cataloging.

    +

    operator

    +

    A word or symbol used to specify the relationship between two entities in a search, or a characteristic of a search term. Operators include: Boolean operators, proximity operators, relative operators, and range operators.

    +

    overlaid

    +

    A record status applied to the pre-overlay version of the record for the duration of the session in which the overlay occurred. Records with the Overlaid status are deleted upon the close of the session in which they were overlaid.

    +

    overlay

    +

    To replace a record in the current database with a new record, or to combine two records into one, moving the links from the existing record to the new record during the process, and applying the existing record's control number to the 035 $a of the new record.

    +

    overlayer

    +

    A duplicate record which was saved in place of the original version.

    +

    PAC

    +

    The online public access catalog. A software application intended for patron use, allowing a user to search the library online catalog and databases.

    +

    patron

    +

    The person using the library resources.

    +

    patron code

    +

    A Polaris code used to maintain patron privileges and policies. You can set up an unlimited number of patron codes.

    +

    patron record

    +

    A patron services record that contains information about the patron, including name, address, registration location, and notification data.

    +

    Polaris

    +

    A client/server integrated library system for the Microsoft Windows operating system, produced by Innovative Interfaces.

    +

    query

    +

    A structured request for catalog or database information.

    +

    reading history

    +

    A list of items that a patron has checked out since the history was started. Renewals are not included in the list, but multiple check-outs of the same item are included.

    +

    record

    +

    A discrete information unit in a database.

    +

    record set

    +

    Records of the same type, grouped in a retrievable file, on which you can perform common tasks.

    +

    record status

    +

    1. A code in Leader/05 for bibliographic and authority records that contains the MARC record status.
    2. The Polaris record status for cataloging records applies to bibliographic, authority, and item records and determines whether the record is Provisional or Final.

    +

    relevancy ranking

    +

    The programmatic ordering of search results so that those that seem most likely to meet the users’ needs appear first in the list.

    +

    Requests-To-Fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) processing

    +

    Polaris sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.

    +

    reserve

    +

    To set aside course material (at schools and colleges) for the exclusive use of a particular group of users.

    +

    results or results set

    +

    A collection of one or more records found as a result of a search.

    +

    scoping

    +

    A complex, precise search that is conducted when you select operators, qualifiers, and values; Polaris formats this information into Common Command Language (CCL) statements.

    +

    search

    +

    n. A series of commands intended to satisfy a request for information.
    v. The process of retrieving results from a database or information resource to satisfy an information request.

    +

    session

    +

    The time spent and activities performed at a workstation by a user without interruption. A session is bound by a user or system initiated log on and a log off or start over procedure. The total set of activities and transactions that occur between the time the user logs on and the user logs off.

    +

    search string

    +

    A series of characters for which you want to search.

    +

    serial

    +

    A publication in any medium issued in successive parts bearing numeric or chronological designations and intended to be continued indefinitely. The following types of publications are examples of serials:

    +
      +
    • +

      Daily newspapers

      +
    • +
    • +

      Periodicals

      +
    • +
    • +

      Magazines

      +
    • +
    • +

      Scholarly, professional, and other journals published regularly or occasionally

      +
    • +
    • +

      Annuals (reports and yearbooks)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Proceedings of conferences and transactions of societies

      +
    • +
    • +

      Numbered monographic series (each individual item has its own unique title, the title of the series, and the number of the item within the series)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Online electronic journals

      +
    • +
    • +

      Loose-leaf material

      +
    • +
    • +

      Indexes and supplements

      +
    • +
    +

    server

    +

    Software that allows one computer to offer a service to another computer. Other computers connect to the server program by means of matching client software. Also refers to the computer on which the server software is operating. For example, the computer with the library catalog database and the software used to process search requests is a server.

    +

    SICI The colloquial name for Serial Item and Contribution Identifier. +The SICI is the SISAC bar code. The SICI incorporates the ISSN and is used on scholarly, technical, medical and other subscription based serials. +

    +

    The colloquial name for Serial Item and Contribution Identifier.

    +

    The SICI is the SISAC Serials Industry Systems Advisory Committee. This committee was instrumental in creating the supporting documentation for the NISO z39.56 standard. bar code. The SICI incorporates the ISSN and is used on scholarly, technical, medical and other subscription based serials.

    +

    SICIs are composed of three different segments. All three of these seg­ments must appear in every SICI, although values within a segment may be omitted if not applicable. The Item Segment - includes the data elements needed to describe the serial item. These elements include the ISSN, chronology, and enumeration of the piece being described. The Contribution Segment - includes data elements that describe contribution or article information within the serial item. These include the title code (determined algorithmically) and page number. Depending on the code structure (see below), the contribution segment may additionally include a PII or other assigned number. The Control segment - contains a version number, to identify the version of the standard being used to create the SICI, and a Code Structure Identifier (CSI), which designates whether the SICI refers to an item, a contribution, or some other alternate type of serial publication. Further, the control segment includes a Derivative Part Identifier

    +

    significant digits

    +

    A portion of the patron barcode defined as unique in Polaris Administration. Staff can enter just the significant digits in a patron barcode field, and patrons can enter just the significant digits to log on at the PAC.

    +

    sine loco (s.l.)

    +

    Without place (i.e., the name of the place of publication, distribution, etc. is unknown)

    +

    sine nomine (s.n.)

    +

    Without name (i.e., the name of the publisher, distributor, etc. is unknown).

    +

    SISAC

    +

    Serials Industry Systems Advisory Committee. This committee was instrumental in creating the supporting documentation for the NISO z39.56 standard.

    +

    special loan period

    +

    A manually assigned length of time that an item can be checked out, different from the regular loan period for the item.

    +

    SQL search

    +

    A complex, precise search that is set up using Standard Query Language (SQL). SQL queries typically use a SELECT operation to retrieve data from one or more tables in a database. Commonly available keywords related to SELECT include:

    +
      +
    • +

      FROM to indicate from which tables the data is to be taken.

      +
    • +
    • +

      WHERE is used to identify which rows are to be retrieved

      +
    • +
    • +

      GROUP BY is used to combine rows with related values into elements of a smaller set of rows.

      +
    • +
    • +

      HAVING is used to identify which of the combined rows are to be retrieved.

      +
    • +
    • +

      ORDER BY is used to identify which columns are used to sort the resulting data.

      +
    • +
    +

    staff client

    +

    The Polaris software used by the library staff, including the Administration, Acquisitions, Serials, Cataloging, and Patron Services subsystems.

    +

    standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. +

    +

    An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher.

    +

    subfield code

    +

    Subfield codes are one lower-case letter (occasionally a number) preceded by a delimiter. Each subfield code indicates what type of data follows it.

    +

    subfields

    +

    Most fields contain several related pieces of data. Each type of data within a field is called a subfield, and each subfield is preceded by a subfield code. Fields 001 through 009 do not have subfields.

    +

    tag

    +

    Each field is associated with a 3-digit number called a tag. A tag identifies the type of data that follows it. Tags are generally organized by hundreds as follows:

    +
      +
    • 0xx - control information, numbers and codes
    • +
    • 1xx - main entry
    • +
    • 2xx - titles, edition, imprint, publication information
    • +
    • 3xx - physical description
    • +
    • 4xx - series statements
    • +
    • 5xx - notes
    • +
    • 6xx - subject added entries
    • +
    • 7xx - added entries other than subject or series
    • +
    • 8xx - series added titles
    • +
    • 9xx - codes left for locally-defined uses
    • +
    +

    system control number

    +

    A unique number assigned by some authoritative system other than Library of Congress or National Library of Medicine. Code identifying the institution may be included in parentheses. This code is kept in tag 035 $a.

    +

    template

    +

    A record that streamlines the creation of new records of a particular type. It contains information that is consistently used in all records of the same type.

    +

    terminal server

    +

    A computer or controller used to connect multiple terminals to a network or host computer.

    +

    textual holdings

    +

    A textual description of the holdings of a basic bibliographic unit in the collections of the reporting agency. It may be used instead of or in addition to enumeration and chronology to record and/or display all or part of the holdings.

    +

    title-level hold

    +

    A request for a title when any item attached to the bibliographic record satisfies the request.

    +

    tracing

    +

    A record of the headings under which an item is represented in the catalog.

    +

    trapping

    +

    An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision.

    +

    workform

    +

    The primary window in Polaris, designed as a mini-application for entering, editing, and viewing data.

    +

    Z39.50 search targets

    +

    Remote catalogs or Web search engines that use the standard Z39.50 search protocol for MARC records. Once targets are set up in Polaris Administration, staff and patrons can search selected Z39.50 targets simultaneously with the Polaris database.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-Reach Reports/INN-Reach Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-Reach Reports/INN-Reach Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..668df9db --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-Reach Reports/INN-Reach Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Reports

    +

    Polaris libraries that use INN-Reach integration can generate reports to assist in tracking items borrowed or loaned through INN-Reach. These reports are listed under Utilities > Reports and Notices > Circulation > INN-Reach.

    +

    Libraries using INN-Reach integration can also use the ILL Report, Unclaimed ILL Items, to list the unclaimed ILL items with a HoldTillDate less than the date on which the report was generated. See: Interlibrary Loan Reports. Another method for finding unclaimed ILL items is to enter a set of SQL search criteria in the Polaris Find Tool. See: Finding Unclaimed ILL Items.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    When you select a new report for the first time, you may need to click the Refresh button before the report parameters appear.

    +

    INN-Reach Reports for the Polaris Borrowing Library

    +

    The library can use the following reports to track items borrowed from other libraries:

    +

    +

      +
    • INN-Reach Borrowing In-Transit Too Long - A Polaris borrowing library can use this report to identify INN-Reach ILL items that were shipped from the lending library a specified number of days ago, or more, but have not yet been received. You can set the following parameters:
      • Organization - The organization is the branch of the patron who requested the item. Select one or more branches or select <All>.
      • Number of days shipped - The number of days since the item was shipped from the lending library and has yet to be received at the borrowing library. For example, if you enter 5 days, the report will include ILL items that were shipped at least 5 days ago from the lending library and still have not been received at the borrowing library.
      • Group option - The default selection is Group by Patron Branch which groups the report in tables by the branch of the patron who requested the item. Select Not Grouped by Patron Branch to generate the report without the branch grouping. If Group by Patron Branch is selected, the report is grouped and sorted in tables by the patron branch. The heading Patron Branch: [branch name] appears at the top of each table, and within each table the data appears in the following columns, sorted first by the item location, then by the shipped date (ascending order):
        • Item Location - The lending library that owns the item. If the item location is not included in the API message, Not Supplied appears in this column.
        • Call Number - The lending library's item call number
        • Item Barcode - The lending library's item barcode
        • Title - The lending library's item title
        • Patron No. - The borrowing patron's ID
        • Shipped Date - The date the lending library shipped the item

        If Not Grouped by Patron Branch is selected, the same columns appear on the report as in the grouped version with an additional Patron Branch column on the right. The report is sorted first by item location, then by patron branch, and then by the shipped date (ascending).

    • +
    • INN-Reach Borrowing Received Too Long - A Polaris borrowing library can use this report to identify INN-Reach ILL items that were received a specified number of days ago or more but still remain at the library because the patrons who requested the items have not picked them up. The ILL requests linked to these Received items can have one of the following statuses: Recd-Held, Recd-Satisfied, Recd-Transferred, Recd-Used or Recd-Unused. You can set the following parameters:
      • Organization - The organization is the branch the patron selected as the pickup branch for the ILL item when the request was placed in the INN-Reach interface. Select one or more branches or select <All>.
      • Number of days received - This is the number of days since the item was received. For example, if you enter 10, the report will include the ILL items that were received at least 10 days ago and still have not been picked up and checked out.
      • Group option - The default selection is Grouped by Pickup Branch which groups the report in tables by pickup branch. Select Not Grouped by Pickup Branch to generate the report without the branch grouping. If Grouped by Pickup Branch is selected, the report is grouped and sorted in tables by the pickup branch. Each table is headed by Pickup Branch: [branch name], and within each table the data appears in the following columns, sorted by the received date (ascending):
        • Call Number - The lending library's item call number
        • Item Barcode - The lending library's item barcode.
        • Title - The lending library's item title
        • Circ Status - The item's circulation status
        • Item Location - The lending library's assigned branch name
        • Patron Branch - The branch where the borrowing patron is registered
        • Patron No - The borrowing patron's ID
        • Received Date - The date the item was received.
        +If Not Grouped by Pickup Branch is selected, Pickup Branch is the first column on the left, followed by the same columns as on the grouped report. The ungrouped report is sorted first by the pickup branch, then the received date (ascending).
    • +
    • INN-Reach Borrowing Requested Too Long - A Polaris borrowing library can use this report to identify INN-Reach ILL items that have been requested but still have not been received after a specified number of days past the request date (the date the INN-Reach ILL request became Active). You can set the following parameters:
    • +
        +
      • +

        Organization: The organization is the branch of the patron who requested the INN-Reach ILL item from the lending library. Select one or more branches or select <All>.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Number of days requested - This is the number of days since the item was requested. For example, if you enter 10, the report will include the ILL items that were requested 10 days or more before the report was run and still have not been received.

        +
      • +
      • Group option: - The default selection is Grouped by Patron Branch which groups the report in tables by the branch of the patron who requested the item. Select Not Grouped by Patron Branch to generate the report without the branch grouping. If Grouped by Patron Branch is selected, the report is grouped and sorted in tables by the branch of the patron who requested the item. Each table is headed by Patron Branch: [branch name], and within each table, the data appears in the following columns sorted first by the item agency code, then by the requested date (ascending):
        • Item Agency Code - The item agency code from the API message

        • Call Number - The lending library's item call number

        • Title - The lending library's item title

        • Patron No. - The borrowing patron's ID

        • Requested Date - The date the item was requested

      • +

        +

        If Not Grouped by Patron Branch is selected, the same columns appear as on the grouped report with an additional Patron Branch column on the right. The report is sorted first by the item agency code, then by patron branch, and then by the requested date (ascending).

        +

        +
      +
    • INN-Reach Borrowing Returned Too Long - A Polaris borrowing library can use this report to identify INN-Reach ILL items that have been returned to the lending library but have not been received/checked in. You can set the following parameters:
      • Organization: - This is the branch that returned the INN-Reach ILL item to the lending library. Select one or more branches or select <All>.
      • Number of days returned: - This is the number of days since the item was returned to the lending library. For example, if you enter 10 days, the report will include INN-Reach ILL items that were returned at least 10 days ago and still have not been received at the lending library.
      • Group option: The default selection is Grouped by Returning Branch. Select Not Grouped by Returning Branch to generate the report without the branch grouping. If Grouped by Returning Branch is selected, the report is grouped in tables by the branch that returned the item. Each table is headed by Returning Branch: [branch name], and within each table the data appears in the following columns sorted first by the item location and then by the returned date (ascending):
        • Item Location - The lending library that owns the item (item agency - item location from the API message). If the item location is not in the API message, Not supplied appears.
        • Call Number - The lending library's item call number
        • Item Barcode - The lending library's item barcode
        • Title - The lending library's item title
        • Patron Branch - The branch where the borrowing patron is registered
        • Patron No. - The borrowing patron's ID
        • Returned Date - The date the item was returned

        If Not Grouped by Returning Branch is selected, the same columns appear as on the grouped report with an additional Returning Branch column on the right. The data is sorted first by the item location and then by the returned date (ascending).

    • +
    +

    INN-Reach Reports for the Polaris Lending Library

    +

    These reports can be used to track items loaned to other libraries:

    +
      +
    • INN-Reach Lending Institutional Overdues - A Polaris library using INN-Reach integration can generate this report to see items that were loaned to another library and remain overdue for a specified number of days past their due date. You can set the following parameters:
      • Organization: - Select one or more branches or select <All> to specify the assigned branches for which you want to see overdue items that were loaned out through INN-Reach.
      • Number of days overdue: - This is the number of days past the due date or the number of days that the item has been in an overdue status. For example, if you enter 10 days, the report lists the items that have been overdue for 10 days or more.
      • Group option: - The Grouped by Item Location option is the default selection which groups the report in tables by the item's assigned branch. Select Not Grouped by Item Location if you do not want the report grouped. If Grouped by Item Location is selected, the report is grouped and sorted in tables by the name of the item's assigned branch. Each table is headed by Item Location: [branch name], and within each table the data appears in the following columns, sorted first by the patron home library then by the due date (ascending):
        • Patron Home Library - The borrowing patron's home library. If the patron's home library is not in the API message, Not Supplied appears.
        • Patron No. - The borrowing patron's ID
        • Call Number - The lending library's item call number
        • Item Barcode - The lending library's item barcode
        • Title - The lending library's title
        • Due Date - The date the item was due

        If you selected Not Grouped by Item Location, the same columns appear on the report as in the grouped version with an additional Item Location column on the right. The report is sorted first by the patron home library, then the due date (ascending). 

      Note:

      When the Polaris lending library receives the API message that the item was received at the borrowing library, the item is checked out to the virtual patron and the due date is calculated according to the lending library's circulation policy. Since the due date is based on when the item is received at the borrowing library and not when the patron actually picks up the item, the due date may be earlier than expected.

    • +
    • INN-Reach Lending In-Transit Too Long - This report identifies materials that have been returned in-transit from the borrowing library a specified number of days ago or more, but have not yet been checked back into the lending library. The report is available in the Polaris staff client on the Utilities menu (Reports and Notices > Circulation > INN-Reach). You can set the following parameters:
      • Organization - The organization is the Assigned Branch of the in-transit items. You can select one, more, or all branches.

      • Number of days in-transit - The least number of days since the item was sent in-transit from the borrowing library and has yet to be checked in at the lending system. For example, if you enter 5 days, the report will include items that were put in-transit 5 days ago or more from the borrowing library and still have not been checked in at the lending system.
    • +
    +

    Item Location headers identify the assigned branch of lending library's item in this report. The primary sort order is Item Location; the secondary sort order is in-transit date (ascending).

    +

    Report column headers include the following:

    +

    +

      +
    • Item Number - The item record ID from the INN-Reach request
    • +
    • Call Number - The lending library's item call number
    • +
    • Item Barcode - The lending library's item barcode
    • +
    • Title - The lending library's item title
    • +
    • Patron Home Library - The borrowing patron's library. The Patron Agency Code and the Patron Home Library are concatenated in this column. If no Patron Home Library is supplied in the API message, the report indicates Not Supplied, for example q5rrr-Not Supplied.
    • +
    • In-Transit Date - The date the borrowing library put the item in-transit
    • +
    +

    +

    +

    Note: +
    Items from non-local INN-reach requests only are included in this report.

    +

    +

      +
    • INN-Reach Lending Paged Too Long - A Polaris lending library can use this report to identify items that are linked to pending INN-Reach requests but have not been pulled from the shelves and shipped out to the borrowing library. You can set the following parameters:
      • Organization: - The organization is the item's assigned branch. Select one or more branches or select <All>.
      • Number of days paged: - This is the number of days since the date on which the linked hold request was "paged" or updated to Pending. For example, if you enter 10 days, the report will include items linked to INN-Reach requests that were updated to a Pending status at least 10 days ago, but the items have not been shipped out to the borrowing library.

      The data in the INN-Reach Paged Too Long report is grouped and sorted in tables by the item location. Each table is headed by Item Location: [assigned branch name], and within each table the data appears in the following columns, sorted by the paged date (ascending):

      • Item Number - The item record ID from the INN-Reach request

      • Call Number - The lending library's item call number

      • Item Barcode - The lending library's item barcode

      • Title - The lending library's item title

      • Patron Home Library - This column displays the agency code and the patron home library name. Not Supplied appears if the patron home library is not in the API message.

      • Paged Date - The date the INN-Reach hold request was updated to a Pending status.

      Finding Unclaimed ILL Items

      You can generate the Unclaimed ILL Items report, available under Utilities > Reports and Notices > Circulation > ILL to see items that have not been claimed, or you can copy and paste one of the following sets of SQL search criteria into the Find Tool SQL search box:

      To see a list of the unclaimed ILL items in the Find Tool search results:

      1. Select Cataloging > Item Records.

      The Find Tool opens with Item Records selected in the Object box.

      1. Select SQL under Search Mode.
      2. Select and copy one of the following sets of SQL search criteria depending on whether you want to see just unclaimed INN-Reach ILL items or all unclaimed ILL items:
      • SQL search criteria to find only unclaimed INN-Reach ILL items:

      select

      ill.illrequestid

      from

      polaris.illrequests ill with (nolock)

      inner join polaris.innreachrequests inr with (nolock)

      on ill.illrequestid = inr.ILLRequestID

      where

      illstatusid = 10

      and HoldTillDate < getdate()

      • SQL search criteria to find all unclaimed ILL items:

      select

      ill.illrequestid

      from

      polaris.illrequests ill with (nolock)

      where

      illstatusid = 10

      and HoldTillDate < getdate()

      1. Paste the copied text in the SQL Search Criteria box in the Find Tool.
      2. Click Search.

      The search results include the ILL items with a HoldTillDate less than the date on which the search was performed.

    • +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a154d22 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Admin Diagnostics

    +

    Links under the Message History and Diagnostics heading on the INN-Reach Admin tool home page (or on the Diagnostics menu) offer options for API message history, circulation exceptions, and contribution exceptions.

    +

    See:

    + +

    API Message Diagnostics

    +

    Click API Message Diagnostics under the Message History and Diagnostics heading to track your local server's inbound and outbound API messages for a selected time period. The example shows messages for "Today". Both inbound messages were successful and there have been no outbound messages. The bar graph shows messages by time.

    +

    + +

    +

    The following example shows a portion of the message diagnostics screen for the past 30 days.

    +

    + +

    +

    When a patron initially places an INN-Reach request, the INN-Reach central system assigns a tracking number that persists through the request cycle. You can search for related transaction messages by tracking ID. Enter the number in the Tracking ID box and click the search icon.

    +

    Note: +
    You can also click a tracking ID in the message list to search for messages with that tracking ID.

    +

    + +

    +

    The screen displays the messages associated with the tracking ID.

    +

    + +

    +

    Message Diagnostics for INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Transactions

    +

    If your library participates in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation (see INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation) and more than one Central has been defined in the InnReachCentrals table, a column displays the Central code.

    +

    + +

    +

    Tracking IDs are not unique across Central servers. The same Tracking ID may appear for two different Central servers.

    +

    + +

    +

    In that case, you can click a Tracking ID link to filter the list of API messages to messages from the Central associated with that hold request.

    +

    + +

    +

    Circulation Exceptions

    +

    If the system has recorded outgoing circulation API exceptions, the Circulation Exceptions option under the Message History and Diagnostics heading shows a summary number of exceptions.

    +

    + +

    +

    Click Circulation Exceptions to view details about the circulation API exceptions.

    +

    + +

    +

    Select the message checkbox(es) and click Requeue Selected or Delete Selected to requeue or delete the selected message(s).

    +

    Note: +
    You need the INN-Reach administration: Modify permission to requeue or delete circulation exception messages.

    +

    Contribution Exceptions

    +

    If the system has recorded outgoing record contribution API exceptions, the Contribution Exceptions option under the Message History and Diagnostics heading shows a summary number of exceptions.

    +

    + +

    +

    Click Contribution Exceptions to view details about the contribution API exceptions.

    +

    + +

    +

    Select the message checkbox(es) and click Requeue Selected or Delete Selected to requeue or delete the selected message(s).

    +

    Note: +
    You need the INN-Reach administration: Modify permission to requeue or delete contribution exception messages.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Log Files.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Log Files.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..518c0fe3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Log Files.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Admin Log Files + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Admin Log Files

    +

    Links under the Monitor Running Processes heading on the INN-Reach Admin tool home page (or on the Log Files menu) offer options for viewing these log files: inbound API listener process from the INN-Reach central server; outbound API message service to the INN-Reach central server; and the initial bulk bib and item record upload to the INN-Reach central server. In each case you can select a date to view the log for that date. The example shows the inbound process log file.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Status Config.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Status Config.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b9e911a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Status Config.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Admin Status and Configuration Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Admin Status and Configuration Options

    +

    Links under the General heading on the INN-Reach Admin tool home page (or on the Status menu) offer options for viewing status and statistics, configuration and mappings, and data synchronization.

    +

    See:

    + +

    Viewing Status and Statistics

    +
      +
    • +

      Click Status and Statistics under the General heading for the following functions:

      +
        +
      • View information about your local Polaris server status.
      • +
      • View current queue status information and suspend/resume outgoing circulation API messages.
      • +
          +
        • Suspending or resuming circulation API messages requires the INN-Reach Modify user permission. Otherwise, the Action column and the buttons do not appear.
        • +
        • When you select the Suspend button, the Resume button appears.
        • +
        +
      • View record contribution statistics for each Central server.
      • +
      +

      + +

      +
    • +
    +

    Viewing Your System Configuration and Mappings

    +
      +
    1. +

      Select Configuration and Mappings under the General heading.
      The following information appears:

      +
        +
      • General URIs, local server/agency code, and email addresses for service alerts
      • +
      • Filters
      • +
      • Central server URLs
      • +
      +

      + +

      +
    2. +
    3. +

      Select the View button in the Configuration Column.
      The following information specific to the Central Server appears:

      +
        +
      • Agencies participating in this INN-Reach consortium
      • +
      • Polaris branches participating in this INN-Reach consortium
      • +
      • Item status mappings
      • +
      • Material type mappings
      • +
      • Collection mappings
      • +
      • INN-Reach Central IType (item type) to Polaris format mappings
      • +
      • Polaris Patron Code to INN-Reach Central PType (patron type) mappings
      • +
      • INN-Reach Central PType to Polaris Patron Code mappings
      • +
      +

      The mappings are created with the help of Innovative support when your library joins a central INN-Reach consortium. See INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Profile for more information. Contact Innovative support if you need to change email alert addresses or Polaris/central mappings.

      +

      + +

      +
    4. +
    +

    Peer-to-Peer Circulation with One Central

    +

    If your library participates in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation (see INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation) and more than one Central has been defined in the InnReachCentrals table, a Peer-to-Peer display column indicates the peer-to-peer Central(s). In the example below, p2ir1 indicates the Central to which the library contributes records and circulates materials; p2ir2 with the check mark indicates the peer-to-peer Central that can circulate materials to p2ir1 patrons; however, the library does not contribute records to p2ir2.

    +

    + +

    +

    Data Upload and Synchronization

    +

    Click Data Upload and Synchronization under the General heading if your upload configuration has changed and you need to synchronize your local data with INN-Reach central data.

    +

    Note:
    You need the INN-Reach administration: Modify permission to access Data Upload and Synchronization.

    +

    + +

    +

    Click Get Counts of Changes to see how many records will be affected. If any will be affected by synchronization, the tool displays a Populate Queue option. Click Populate Queue to synchronize the local and central data.

    +

    + +

    +

    After you synchronize local and central data, errors can leave some records that still need to be manually uploaded or removed. Typically, the normal synchronization process handles bibliographic records and items modified or added to the catalog, and no manual synchronization is necessary.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50fa0a43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachAdminTool/INN-Reach Admin Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Admin Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Admin Tool

    +

    Using the web-based INN-Reach Administration tool, you can view status and configuration information and monitor INN-Reach processes on the local Polaris server.

    +

    Note: +
    You need INN-Reach administration: Access permission to access the tool and view data. You need the additional permission INN-Reach administration: Modify to change settings and access certain menu options. See Give staff permissions for INN-Reach administration functions.

    +

    The INN-Reach Administration tool is installed as part of the Polaris Web server installation. The server must be licensed for INN-Reach integration. The license is typically activated when the Polaris server software with the INN-Reach components is installed. However, some customers may have already installed Polaris and wish to implement INN-Reach integration at a later time. If the INN-Reach components were originally installed, the license can be activated at any time. If the INN-Reach components were not originally installed, the Polaris server software must be re-installed with the INN-Reach components included and the license activated. For more information about Polaris server software installation, see the Polaris Installation Guide or contact Innovative support.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Accessing the INN-Reach Admin Tool

    +
      +
    1. +

      Go to the access URL for your library. The typical access URL is http://[library’s web server]/innreach.

      +
    2. +
    3. +

      Log in with your Polaris user credentials.

      +
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The home page displays links for viewing general status, monitoring running processes, and viewing circulation messages.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachPatServ.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachPatServ.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc849df1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INN-ReachPatServ.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Using INN-Reach Integration for ILL Borrowing and Lending + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using INN-Reach Integration for ILL Borrowing and Lending

    +

    When a patron places a request on an item in the INN-Reach Central Catalog, INN-Reach first identifies and authenticates the patron placing the request. If INN-Reach verifies that the patron is registered with your library and authorized to place INN-Reach requests, INN-Reach sends a Create Patron Hold API message to your Polaris library. This message initiates the integrated borrowing process whereby a series of INN-Reach API messages and internal Polaris transactions: create the Interlibrary (ILL) hold request in Polaris; create the virtual item and bib when the item is received; display the ILL item in the patron account; notify the patron that the item is held and ready for pickup; inform the owning library when the item has been shipped back; and then delete the virtual item and bib when the item is checked in at the owing library. See: Polaris as the INN-Reach Borrowing Library

    +

    When a patron from another library places an INN-Reach request on an item owned by your Polaris library, INN-Reach sends a Create Item Hold API message to your library. This API message initiates the integrated lending process whereby a series of API messages and internal Polaris transactions: create the virtual patron record and link a hold for the requested item to that virtual patron; update the hold and item to indicate the item was shipped; confirm the shipment; check the item out to the virtual patron; update the hold request to a Held status when received at the borrowing library; notify the borrowing library that the circulation is complete; and then delete the request and virtual patron record. See: Polaris as the INN-Reach Lending Library.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/AdditionalforBorrowing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/AdditionalforBorrowing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02975301 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/AdditionalforBorrowing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + Additional INN-Reach request processing for the borrowing library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Additional INN-Reach request processing for the borrowing library

    +

    INN-Reach request processing also handles the following situations:

    +

    Polaris patron places an INN-Reach request resulting in a hold on a locally-owned Item

    +

    When a patron registered with the local Polaris library system places a hold request through INN-Reach on an item that was contributed by the same local Polaris library system to which the patron belongs, the following occurs:

    +
      +
    • INN-Reach determines that the requested item was contributed by the same Polaris library and already exists in the patron's local catalog.
    • +
    • INN-Reach generates a local item-level hold with a status of Active in the patron's Polaris system.
    • +
    • If the item is found that fulfills the hold request, the request becomes Pending.
    • +
    • The item-level hold request is displayed in the patron's account in the Polaris staff client, PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Leap.
    • +
    • The item is checked out to the local Polaris patron, and a transaction confirming the check-out is sent to the INN-Reach Central Catalog.
    • +
    +

    Staff member denies a local INN-Reach hold request in Polaris

    +

    When a patron registered with the local Polaris library system places a hold request through INN-Reach on an item that was contributed by the same local Polaris library system to which the patron belongs, and the request is denied, the following may occur:

    +
      +
    • INN-Reach Central finds another item that can satisfy the hold and a new request is generated. The new request could be either local or non-local. If it is local, a different item from within the patron’s system becomes pending on the request. If it is non-local, the request is an ILL request and the item will be filled from another library system.
    • +
    • INN-Reach Central does not find another item that can satisfy the hold, and the request is cancelled by INN-Reach. In this case the patron will receive a cancellation notice for the request.
    • +
    +

    Patron or staff member cancels the INN-Reach hold request in Polaris

    +

    If the requested item has not yet been shipped by the owning library, and the request is canceled in Polaris, either by the patron from their PAC account or by library staff from the Polaris staff client or Leap, the Active ILL Request is updated to Canceled and a Cancel Item Hold INN-Reach API message is sent to the owning library.

    +

    If an INN-Reach item is canceled by the borrowing library after the lending library has shipped the item and the hold status is Out to Patron, Polaris rejects the cancellation request. The borrowing library can cancel requests with any of the following statuses: Pending, Active, Located, Held or Not Supplied.

    +

    Owning library denies the hold and INN-Reach finds no substitute

    +

    When a patron at a Polaris borrowing library has placed an ILL hold request through INN-Reach, and the lending library denies the hold request, INN-Reach attempts to find another item that can fill the hold request. If INN-Reach determines that no other items in the Central catalog are available to fill the hold request, INN-Reach sends a Cancel Request API message to the borrowing library. This cancels the ILL hold request in Polaris, and the canceled request is displayed in the patron's account in PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, the Polaris staff client, and Leap.

    +

    Owning library denies the hold and INN-Reach finds substitute

    +

    When a patron at a Polaris borrowing library has placed an ILL hold request through INN-Reach, and the lending library denies the hold request, INN-Reach attempts to find another item that can fill the hold request. If another item is found, and the system determines that the incoming request matches a previous request, the original ILL request is deleted, a new ILL request replaces the deleted request, and the following transaction is logged: TR_CIRC_ILLREQUEST_RECREATE.

    +

    Items returned uncirculated

    +

    If the item has been shipped, but the patron who requested it no longer wants to borrow the item, the Polaris borrowing library can update the item to indicate it was returned without being circulated, which automatically sends a Return Uncirculated API message.

    +

    To update an ILL item to indicate it was returned uncirculated:

    +
      +
    • If the item has been shipped, but not yet received, check the Return Uncirculated check box on the ILL Request. When the item arrives and is received in Polaris, the Return Uncirculated API message is sent.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • If the item is already being held, locate the item on the holds shelf and check it in. When the message asks if you want to hold the item for the patron, click No.The Return Uncirculated API message is sent.
    • +
    +

    When an item requested through INN-Reach is received in Polaris at the borrowing library, a message appears if the ILL request has the Return Uncirculated box checked, which indicates the patron no longer wants the item.

    +

    + +

    +

    Borrowing library renews the item

    +

    When a patron registered with your local Polaris library system renews an INN-Reach item (from their account in PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, or Express Check), or a staff member renews the INN-Reach item for the patron (from the staff client or Leap), an INN-Reach API message informs the lending library that the item has been renewed. Any Polaris Administration settings for renewals, such as charges, are applied to the renewal.

    +

    Borrowing library receives an Owner Renew message from the lending library

    +

    When a Polaris borrowing library receives an Owner Renew INN-Reach API message, the item is renewed without regarding counts, limits, or charges your library may have set for renewals.

    +

    Patron claims item returned or never borrowed

    +

    When a Polaris borrowing library adds a claim to a patron's record for a checked-out INN-Reach item, a Patron Claims Returned INN-Reach API message is sent to the item's owning library. This API message is sent immediately upon claiming the INN-Reach item with a claim type of either Claimed returned or Claimed never had from the Polaris staff client or Leap.

    +

    Active requests set to canceled if the need by date has passed

    +

    When a borrowing library's INN-Reach ILL request with a status of Active is found, the Nightly SQL Job identifies the request's NeedBy date, and if that date has passed, the Active request is set to Canceled. A Cancel Item Hold transaction is sent to the lending library, and a transaction is written for the cancellation (using the patron’s registered branch as the transaction branch).

    +

    The job also checks the System-level Parameter, Holds Options, Terms for the setting in the Delete cancelled in [number of days] field. If the number of days since the hold was cancelled has exceeded the number of days in the parameter, the job deletes the INN-Reach ILL request.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/CheckIN.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/CheckIN.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..351ebabd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/CheckIN.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Check in the INN-Reach ILL item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check in the INN-Reach ILL item

    +

    When the patron returns the ILL item, it is checked in.

    +

    If the branch at which the item was returned can ship/receive materials requested through INN-Reach, the item "floats" in to the branch. The linked item history contains a note indicating floating processing was used to keep the item at the check-in branch, instead of sending it in-transit. If the branch also has set items to automatically return at check-in, the item status changes to In and then Returned-ILL in a single process. See Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration for details.

    +

    If the branch at which the item was returned is not the designated shipping/receiving branch for INN-Reach items, the item goes In-transit to the branch that will ship the item back to the loaning library. See Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note: +
    The patron can also check the item in through the library's sorter.

    +

    To check in the ILL item borrowed through INN-Reach:

    +
      +
    1. Scan the item barcode on the Check-In workform.
    2. +
    +

    If a blocking message is included in the INN-Reach item template, a dialog box informs you that the item was created by ILL.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to continue checking in the ILL item.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ILLHoldCreated.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ILLHoldCreated.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23798d33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ILLHoldCreated.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach ILL hold request created in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach ILL hold request created in Polaris

    +

    When a Polaris patron is authenticated and submits a request in the INN-Reach Central Catalog, INN-Reach searches for an available item in the Central Catalog. If an available item is found that does not belong to the local Polaris library system, INN-Reach sends an API message that creates the ILL request in the patron's account in Polaris.

    +

    The following fields display in the Polaris ILL Request workform:

    +

    Request Tab

    +
      +
    • Title
    • +
    • Author (if it exists)
    • +
    • Format
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    General Tab

    +

    Note: +
    The current and previous statuses change as the hold request is processed.

    +
      +
    • Current status = Active
    • +
    • Status Date = Today's date
    • +
    • Previous status = Inactive
    • +
    • Patron name = (Linked patron info) Name of Polaris patron who placed the request
    • +
    • Patron barcode = (Linked patron info) Barcode of patron who placed the request
    • +
    • Patron phone = (Linked patron info) Phone number of patron who placed the request
    • +
    • E-mail address = (Linked patron info) E-mail address of the patron who placed the request
    • +
    • (Delivery) Request date = Today's date
    • +
    • (Delivery) Need by date = If the transaction includes the Need by date, that date is the used. Otherwise, the Need by date is the current date plus 10 years.
    • +
    • Pickup branch = Location code mapped to its associated Polaris branch indicated in the INN-Reach configuration.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Notes Tab

    +

    The following data is copied into the ILL Hold Request, Notes field when the item is created:

    +
      +
    • INN-Reach Tracking ID
    • +
    • INN-Reach Item Agency Code
    • +
    • INN-Reach Item Location (if included in the Item Shipped API message from the INN-Reach lending library)
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    If the library participates in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation, and the request has been made to a participating peer-to-peer Central Catalog, the Notes tab lists the Central code for the circulating INN-Reach Central Catalog:

    +

    + +

    +

    The INN-Reach ILL request is displayed in the patron account in the Polaris staff client, Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Leap.

    +

    INN-Reach ILL Request Displayed in Patron Status

    +

    In the Polaris staff client, the INN-Reach ILL request displays in the Patron Status workform, Holds view under ILL requests.

    +

    + +

    +

    INN-Reach ILL Request Displayed in Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    The INN-Reach ILL request, along with the TOM icon (as mapped in your profile), is displayed in the patron's account in the Polaris PACs.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemCircReturn.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemCircReturn.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3af890d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemCircReturn.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Circulate the INN-Reach ILL item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulate the INN-Reach ILL item

    +

    After the Polaris patron is notified that the ILL item requested through INN-Reach is ready for pickup, the patron goes to the pickup branch at which the item is held, and the item is checked out to the patron.

    +

    Note: +
    If a Polaris borrowing library checks out an INN-Reach ILL item to an associated patron, the hold is updated with the associated patron's ID at check out so that the auto-return process matches the checked-in item to the associated patron's ID.

    +

    To circulate the ILL item requested through INN-Reach:

    +
      +
    1. Locate the item being held for the patron.
    2. +
    3. Check it out to the patron.
    4. +
    +

    The linked item record's status is Out and the ILL request's status is Received.

    +

    + +

    +

    If your library retains patron reading history, and the patron has opted to maintain their reading history, INN-Reach ILL items will be saved in the patron's reading history along with local items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemTemplate.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemTemplate.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2cd6545b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachItemTemplate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + Set Up INN-Reach ILL Item Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up INN-Reach ILL Item Templates

    +

    Before your patrons can borrow items in the INN-Reach Central catalog, your library must create at least one INN-Reach ILL item template for each INN-Reach Central IType your library has mapped in the profile. All libraries that participate in the INN-Reach Central catalog agree upon the Central ITypes. See Item Material Types for Uploading and Mapping to INN-Reach ITypes.

    +

    When a local patron, registered in your Polaris library system, places an INN-Reach hold on an item owned by a remote library, the transaction contains the Central IType of the requested item. This Central IType is used during receiving to match to the appropriate Polaris item template so that the virtual item (v_item) record is created with the correct material type, collection, and ILL item circulation settings.

    +

    Then, when the physical item arrives by courier at the borrowing library, it is received in Polaris from the Request Manager. This receive transaction automatically sets off a matching process whereby the item is matched to an INN-Reach template the library has created. For the system to automatically identify the correct INN-Reach item template, the template name must begin with INNR item, and it must have an INN-Reach Central code and INN-Reach Central IType that match the item being received. +

    +

    To find the appropriate INN-Reach item template, the system looks for a matching item template named INNR Item [CentralCode]-[Central_IType] owned by the staff member’s login branch. +If no matching INN-Reach item template is owned by that Branch, Polaris attempts find a matching template owned at the Library organization, and if none is found at the Library level, it looks for a matching template owned by the library System.

    +

    If a matching template is found, the Brief Item Entry dialog box appears with information from the template. See Receive the INN-Reach ILL hold request.

    +

    If no matching template is found, the virtual item and bib are not created in Polaris, and a message informs the user: There is no INN-Reach item template for [organization name]. Please create one.

    +

    To create INN-Reach item templates that enable automatic creation of virtual item records and bibs in Polaris: +

    +
      +
    1. Open a new Item Template workform in Polaris. +
    2. +
    3. In the Name field, enter the template name as follows: INNR Item [CentralCode]-[Central_IType] where the CentralCode matches the code for the INN-Reach central server, and the Central_IType matches an IType that has been mapped to Polaris material types/collections. The template name is case-sensitive. You can also enter an optional description that does is not used in the matching process, but can help your library identify the template. + +
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    Be sure that Display in PAC, Loanable outside system, and Holdable are unchecked.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Save the template.
    2. +
    +

    When a INN-Reach hold request is received using the Request Manager, the system looks for an item template with the following criteria:

    +
      +
    • The template name begins with INN-Reach item template [Central Code]-[Central IType]
    • +
    • The Central Code in the item template name matches the Central Code of the INN-Reach Central server.
    • +
    • The Central IType matches the IType of the item shipped from the lending library.
    • +
    • The template is owned by the same branch as the staff member's log-in branch.
    • +
    +

    If a matching template is found, the Brief Item Entry dialog box appears with information from the template. See Receive the INN-Reach ILL hold request.

    +

    If no matching template is found, an message informs the user:There is no INN-Reach item template for [organization name]. Please create one.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachVerPatron.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachVerPatron.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3a33232 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/INN-ReachVerPatron.htm @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach verifies that the Polaris patron can request the item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach verifies that the Polaris patron can request the item

    +

    When a Polaris patron submits a request for a title in the INN-Reach Central catalog, an INN-Reach API verify patron message is sent to the Polaris system to indicate whether the patron authentication as successful. If the authentication is successful, an "OK" status is sent, but the request might still fail for library-defined reasons. If the process fails, the patron sees a message that indicates the reason it failed. The table summarizes authentication and request failures.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Failure Reason

    +
    +

    Message Displayed

    +
    Authentication Failures
    +

    The supplied barcode was not in the database

    +
    +

    Invalid barcode or PIN

    +
    +

    The supplied password does not match the patron’s password.

    +
    +

    Invalid barcode or PIN

    +
    The patron record is securedPatron record is secured
    +

    The patron record is deleted or marked for deletion.

    +
    +

    Invalid barcode or PIN

    +
    Request Failures
    +

    The patron code for the record is not in the list of allowable patron codes to use INN-Reach.

    +
    +

    Patron denied access because of type of patron

    +
    +

    The patron expiration date is in the past.

    +
    +

    Patron record is expired

    +
    +

    The patron has too many checked out items.

    +
    +

    Unable to place your request. Please try again or contact your library for assistance.

    +
    +

    The patron’s overdue count is above the maximum overdue count allowed.

    +
    +

    Unable to place your request. Please try again or contact your library for assistance.

    +
    +

    The patron’s charges are above the maximum charges allowed.

    +
    +

    Unable to place your request. Please try again or contact your library for assistance.

    +
    +

    The patron’s holds count is above the maximum holds allowed.

    +
    +

    Unable to place your request. Please try again or contact your library for assistance.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/PolarisBorrowing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/PolarisBorrowing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f978f15a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/PolarisBorrowing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris as the INN-Reach Borrowing Library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris as the INN-Reach Borrowing Library

    +

    A Polaris library acts as an INN-Reach borrowing library when a local patron goes to the INN-Reach Central Catalog's web interface and places a hold request on an item that was contributed by another participating library. INN-Reach first verifies that the patron is authorized to place holds in the Central Catalog. If the patron is authorized to place requests in the INN-Reach Central Catalog, INN-Reach sends a Create Patron Hold message to the library, which automatically creates an Interlibrary (ILL) hold request in Polaris.

    +

    When the book or other physical material arrives at the Polaris library, the ILL item is received in Polaris, which automatically creates the virtual bib and item records necessary for circulating the item in Polaris. The patron's account displays the ILL request in the staff client, Leap, PowerPAC, and Mobile PAC. In addition, the patron is notified that the item is held and ready for pickup.

    +

    When the patron returns the item to their local library, it may need to be transferred to a specific branch that handles the courier shipments, depending on the INN-Reach parameter set in Polaris Administration. If another branch handles shipping and receiving, the item is sent in-transit to that library. Otherwise, the item is checked in and automatically updated to Returned, or checked in and then Returned in separate processes. A Polaris Administration parameter setting determines whether the check in and return processes are combined or separate. See Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    When the ILL request is set to Returned in Polaris, an Item in Transit API message is sent to the library that owns the item. Then, the item arrives back at the owning library where it is checked in. A Final Item Checkin API message is then sent to the Polaris library that automatically deletes the ILL hold request, the virtual item, and the virtual bib.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReceiveINNReachItem.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReceiveINNReachItem.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d16b762d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReceiveINNReachItem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Receive the INN-Reach ILL hold request + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Receive the INN-Reach ILL hold request

    +

    When the physical item arrives from the lending library, you can receive it and create the virtual item and bib that allow it to circulate in Polaris.

    +

    To receive the ILL hold request:

    +
      +
    1. On the ILL Requests view of the Request Manager, right-click the request, and select Receive from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The list can be filtered by selecting a Shipped status. It is possible that the item was shipped without being checked in at the lending library, so you can select the Active filter if the request is not found when filtered by Shipped.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    If the ILL Hold Request indicates the patron no longer wants the item requested (the Return Uncirculated box is checked), the following message appears: The INN-Reach request indicates the patron no longer wants this item. See also: Items returned uncirculated.

    +

    The system searches for a matching INN-Reach item template. For details on the matching criteria used in finding an INN-Reach item template and the error message if none is found, see Set up INN-Reach ILL item templates.

    +

    If a matching item template is found, the Brief Item Entry dialog box appears. The system populates it with information from the INN-Reach item template and the item call number and barcode from the Item Shipped INN-Reach API message.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    If the barcode attached to the borrowed material matches an item barcode already in your Polaris system, an error message appears. To resolve this issue and allow the item to circulate, you can affix a temporary barcode to the item and scan that barcode. Your library policy determines how to respond if this occurs.

    +
      +
    1. Enter an optional call number and free text block.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The following occurs:

    +
      +
    • A virtual bib and virtual item are created in Polaris. When the virtual item is created, the item call number from the API message is copied to the Class number field in the Item Record workform. If the API message does not include this number, the Class number from the INN-Reach item template is copied to the field in the item record as well as any other call number field values: Prefix, Cutter, Suffix, Volume, and Copy.
    • +
    • A message confirms that the ILL item was created and the item status is Held.
    • +
    • If the receiving branch is not the patron's pickup branch, the ILL item is created with a status of Transferred.
    • +
    • A hold notice is generated and sent to the patron according to the library's existing notification process and the patron's notification preferences.
    • +
    • The item is then circulated. See Circulate the INN-Reach ILL item.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReturnILLItem.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReturnILLItem.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc1b5142 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNBorrowingLib/ReturnILLItem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Return the INN-Reach ILL item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Return the INN-Reach ILL item

    +

    Note: +
    If the INN-Reach: Automatic return at check-in parameter is set to Yes in Polaris Administration, the Return processing in Polaris is performed automatically when the item is checked in.

    +

    When the physical item is ready to ship back to the owning library, and it is at the library responsible for shipping it back, the ILL request is set to Returned and an Item in Transit API message is sent to the lending library. Then, when the item arrives, an API message confirms that the circulation is complete, which automatically deletes the ILL hold request and the virtual item and bib.

    +

    To return the ILL item:

    +
      +
    1. On the Request Manager > ILL Requests view, filter the list by the request status Received and the item status of In.
    2. +
    3. Locate the ILL item that needs to be returned, right-click and select Return.
    4. +
    +

    + + +

    +
      +
    • The ILL request's status is set to Returned, and the virtual item's status is set to Returned-ILL.
    • +
    • An Item in Transit INN-Reach API message is sent to the lending library, and the Polaris library sends the physical item back to the lending library via courier.
    • +
    • When the lending library receives the physical item and checks it in, a Final Item Checkin INN-Reach API message is sent to the borrowing library.
    • +
    • The request is updated with the final processing date and time, the virtual item and bib are deleted, and the ILL hold request is deleted.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/ContDataMapSpreadsheet.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/ContDataMapSpreadsheet.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..11d6198a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/ContDataMapSpreadsheet.htm @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Spreadsheet + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Spreadsheet

    +

    The library and Innovative staff fill out an INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Excel spreadsheet for each Central server. This spreadsheet specifies the criteria for items to be contributed to the Central Catalog, and the patron codes for Polaris patrons who are authorized to place requests on items in the INN-Reach Central catalog.

    +

    The spreadsheets are also used for mapping item material types and patron codes in Polaris to the corresponding INN-Reach ITypes and PTypes. This mapping is used in the transmissions between the library and INN-Reach to enable automatic borrowing and lending activities.

    +

    Each Central server has its own configuration and mapping spreadsheet. There must be a single primary server. There can be one or many secondary servers. The configuration spreadsheet for the primary server starts with the LocalServer tab. All configuration spreadsheets for the secondary servers start with a Central tab. The configuration spreadsheet for the primary server must be loaded first. After that, the configuration spreadsheets for the secondary servers can be loaded in any order.

    +

    Note:
    The Central servers must be loaded in primary and secondary order for the configuration process, but the primary and secondary servers are otherwise equal.

    +

    INN-Reach Local Server Configuration

    +

    On the LocalServer tab, Innovative staff provides data for the following fields:

    +
      +
    • Local Server Code
    • +
    • Local Server Name
    • +
    • Default Agency Code
    • +
    • Cloud Service Base URI
    • +
    • Cloud Service Auth URI
    • +
    • API Authorization Public Key
    • +
    • API Authorization Private Key
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    INN-Reach Central Configuration

    +

    Innovative staff provides data for the following fields:

    +
      +
    • Central Code
    • +
    • Central Name
    • +
    • Central Discovery Layer URL
    • +
    • SkyRiver
    • +
    +

    If your library participates in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation (see INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation), Innovative staff also provides the following data for the the Peer-to-Peer Centrals:

    +
      +
    • Central Code
    • +
    • Central Name
    • +
    • Central Discovery Layer URL
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Local INN-Reach Agencies for Uploading

    +

    List only the INN-Reach Agency code(s) of your local Polaris system.

    +
    + +
    +

    Local Polaris Branches for Uploading

    +

    List all your local system's Polaris branch-level organizations that participate in this INN-Reach Central. Only items and bibliographic records from the listed branches will be uploaded to INN-Reach.

    +
      +
    • Branch Org ID - The numeric Organization ID for the branch in Polaris
    • +
    • Branch Name - Name of the branch
    • +
    • Agency Code - The INN-Reach Agency code to which the branch belongs
    • +
    • Location Code - The unique location code
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Item Material Types for Uploading and Mapping to INN-Reach ITypes

    +

    The Upload Polaris Items with These Material Types table on the left side of this tabbed page is used to list all the Polaris material types for items that will be uploaded to the Central catalog, and the INN-Reach ITypes to which these material types are mapped.

    +

    When the items are contributed (uploaded) to INN-Reach, they contain the local ITypes. These INN-Reach local ITypes are mapped to INN-Reach Central ITypes agreed upon by all libraries contributing to the INN-Reach Central catalog.

    +

    The Central IType is transmitted in the INN-Reach hold request. When the Polaris library receives items requested through INN-Reach, the Central IType in the INN-Reach hold request is matched to the appropriate Polaris item template so that the virtual item (v_item) record is created with the correct material type and collection. The Central IType in the request is also translated to the mapped Polaris format ID.

    +
      +
    • Material Description - The Polaris item material type description
    • +
    • Item Material Type ID - The Polaris item material type ID number
    • +
    • INN-Reach IType - The INN-Reach IType to which the Polaris Material Type is mapped
    • +
    +

    The Incoming Central ITypes Mappings table on the right side of the tabbed page is used to map Central ITypes to Polaris format IDs so that the correct format icon appears in the ILL request.

    +

    +

      +
    • INN-Reach Central IType - The INN-Reach item type or IType in the Central Catalog
    • +
    • Central IType Description - The description associated with the Central IType
    • +
    • Polaris Format ID - The numeric format ID that identifies the Polaris format
    • +
    +

    +

    + +

    +

    Item Collections for Uploading

    +

    Items assigned to the Polaris Collections listed in this table will be uploaded to INN-Reach.

    +
      +
    • CollectionDescription - The Polaris Collection description
    • +
    • Collection ID - The Polaris Collection ID number
    • +
    • INN-Reach Local Item Type ID - Include the INN-Reach numeric Local IType values if you want all items in that collection to use that IType. Leave the IType column blank if you prefer to use the Material Type of an item to determine the INN-Reach IType mapping.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Item Statuses for Uploading

    +

    Items with the Polaris Item Statuses listed in this table will be uploaded to INN-Reach. If you do not want to upload items with a particular status, remove the row from the table.

    +
      +
    • Polaris Status ID - The Polaris item status ID number
    • +
    • Polaris Status Description - The Polaris item status description
    • +
    • INN-Reach Status Code - The INN-Reach status code to which the Polaris status is mapped
    • +
    • INN-Reach Description - The INN-Reach status description
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Patron Codes for Uploading and Mapping to INN-Reach PTypes

    +

    During the data profiling stage, your Polaris patron codes are mapped to INN-Reach local PTypes, and INN-Reach central PTypes are mapped to Polaris patron codes. Mapping Polaris patron codes to Local PTypes enables your patrons to place INN-Reach requests to borrow items from other libraries, and mapping Central PTypes to Polaris patron codes enables the creation of virtual patron records used when your library loans items to patrons from other libraries.

    +

    When a local patron (registered in your Polaris system) places an INN-Reach hold request, INN-Reach authenticates the patron by patron code and the mapped local PType is sent to INN-Reach indicating the type of patron account.

    +

    When a remote patron outside of your Polaris library system places an INN-Reach hold request for an item your library owns, the Central PType sent in the request transaction is translated to the mapped Polaris patron code, which is then used in the creation of a virtual patron (v_patron) record linked to the INN-Reach hold request.

    +

    The table on the left side of the tabbed page is used to list all the Polaris patron codes for patrons in your system that are allowed to use INN-Reach, and maps these codes to the Local INN-Reach PTypes.

    +
      +
    • Polaris Patron Code - The Polaris Patron Code ID number
    • +
    • Polaris Description - Polaris Patron Code description
    • +
    • Local INN-Reach PType - The local INN-Reach patron type to which the Polaris patron code is mapped
    • +
    +

    The table on the right side of the Patron Codes tabbed page maps INN-Reach Central PTypes to Polaris patron codes in order to create virtual patrons in your local system.

    +
      +
    • Central PType - INN-Reach Central patron type code
    • +
    • Central PType Description - The INN-Reach Central patron type description
    • +
    • Polaris Patron Code - The Polaris patron code to which the INN-Reach Central patron type code is mapped
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/INNDataProfile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/INNDataProfile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2f54e872 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNDataMapProfile/INNDataProfile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Profile + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Profile

    +

    The library, with the help of an Innovative implementation representative, completes the INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Excel spreadsheet that specifies the criteria for contributing bibliographic and item records to the Central catalog, and determines which patrons (patron codes) can place holds on items in the Central catalog. In addition, the spreadsheet maps Polaris patron codes to INN-Reach patron types (PTypes) and Polaris item material types and collections to INN-Reach item types (ITypes). The spreadsheet is then imported into the local Polaris database using a utility.

    +

    Once the spreadsheet has been imported into the local Polaris database, the appropriate records are uploaded (contributed) to the INN-Reach Central catalog. In addition, the patron and item mappings specified in the spreadsheet are used to map Polaris patron and item codes to PTypes and ITypes used by the INN-Reach Central catalog. If necessary, the configuration spreadsheet can be modified and then reloaded multiple times.

    +

    After the profiled data has been uploaded to the INN-Reach Central catalog, INN-Reach APIs continuously update the Central catalog according to the settings in the profile and changes in your local Polaris database–automatically contributing, de-contributing, and updating records. You can monitor these processes with the web-based INN-Reach Admin tool. For details, see INN-Reach Admin Tool.

    +

    See INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Spreadsheet .

    +

    Contribution Rules for Item and Bibliographic Records

    +

    Item records from the Polaris database are contributed or de-contributed to the INN-Reach Catalog according to a set of non-configurable rules that must all be met, and additional configurable rules that the library can define to further filter the items.

    +

    The item records are checked first to see if they are eligible to be contributed, according to the requirements in the profile. If an item is eligible to be contributed, the linked bibliographic record is also checked to see if it can be contributed. If the bibliographic record meets the requirements defined in the profile, it is contributed. If it does not meet the requirements, neither the bib nor the item record are contributed.

    +

    Non-Configurable Rules for Contributed Items

    +

    All the following non-configurable rules must be met for item records to be contributed to the INN-Reach Catalog:

    +
      +
    • The status must be Final. (The Record status field must be set to Final in the Item Record workform.)
    • +
    • The Display in PAC flag must be on. (The Display in PAC check box must be selected in the Item Record workform.)
    • +
    • The item must have a barcode. (The Barcode field cannot be empty in the Item Record workform.)
    • +
    • The item must have an assigned collection. (The Collection field cannot be empty in the Item Record workform.)
    • +
    • The item must not be an ILL item. (The ILL check box must be cleared in the Item Record workform.)
    • +
    • It must not be an eContent item. (The eContent check box must be cleared in the Item Record workform.)
    • +
    +

    If the item passes all the non-configurable rules, then the system checks the rules that the contributing library can configure.

    +

    Configurable Rules for Contributed Items

    +

    The library can define configurable rules to further filter the contributed items by:

    +
      +
    • Branch - The item must belong to one of the listed branches.
    • +
    • Circulation status - The item must have one of the listed circulation statuses.
    • +
    • Material type - The item must have one of the listed material types.
    • +
    • Collection - The item must be assigned to one of the listed collections.
    • +
    +

    If the item passes all the configurable rules, the system checks the optional configurable rules, if the library has specified them.

    +

    Optional Configurable Rules for Contributed Items

    +

    The library can define additional configurable rules that check the following settings:

    +

    Note: +
    If it is your library's policy to set the Holdable, Loanable outside system, or Non-circulating check boxes on the Item Record workform, and staff consistently use these settings, you can add them to the configuration rules.

    +
      +
    • Holdable - The item must have this flag selected to be contributed.
    • +
    • Loanable outside system - The item must have this flag checked to be contributed.
    • +
    • Non-circulating - The item must have this flag un-checked to be contributed.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If the Holdable option is checked for an item and the INN-Reach profile is set to honor that setting, the item will be contributed to the INN-Reach central server without regard to any other Limit To sub-options for the item. See the example below. INN-Reach profiling considers only the three main "Honor" settings (Holdable, Loanable outside system, or Non-circulating); any other policies associated with these settings have no impact on INN-Reach contribution.

    +

    + +

    +

    Configuration Rules for Contributed Bibliographic Records

    +

    All the following non-configurable rules must be met for a bibliographic record to be contributed to INN-Reach:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/AdditionalforLending.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/AdditionalforLending.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7988ca8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/AdditionalforLending.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Additional INN-Reach Request Processing for the Polaris Lending Library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Additional INN-Reach Request Processing for the Polaris Lending Library

    +

    The INN-Reach integration also handles the following situations:

    +

    Note: +
    See also: Additional INN-Reach request processing for the borrowing library.

    +

    INN-Reach hold is canceled

    +

    When a remote patron or staff member from a participating library cancels an INN-Reach hold request before it is filled, an INN-Reach API message is sent to the Polaris library, which automatically deletes the item-level hold in Polaris.

    +

    INN-Reach hold is denied

    +

    If the lending library decides to override the INN-Reach request and let their local patron check out the item instead, the staff member denies the hold, and an Owning Site Cancels Request INN-Reach API message is sent to INN-Reach.

    +

    INN-Reach then attempts to find another item in the Central Catalog that will fill the request. If another item is found, a hold is placed on that item. If another item cannot be found, INN-Reach Central sends a Cancel Request INN-Reach API message which cancels the request at the patron's borrowing library.

    +

    Note: +
    INN-Reach will never choose an item from the same server as the original item that was previously denied. If there are items within that library that can alternately fill the request, it is expected that the staff member at the lending library would use Fill Now to fill the request with another item instead of denying it.

    +

    Deletion or status change decontributes item from the INN-Reach Central Catalog

    +

    The items your library has contributed to the INN-Reach Central Catalog are modified or decontributed to the Central Catalog based on circulation and cataloging updates to these records in the local Polaris database. When an INN-Reach hold request is placed on an item, but before the item is shipped from the Polaris library, the item is deleted or a status change in Polaris causes its de-contribution in the Central Catalog, a Deny Hold message is sent to INN-Reach Central.

    +

    Fill Now is used to substitute an item for the one requested

    +

    The library cannot find the exact item requested, so a staff member uses the Fill Now option on the Hold Request workform to replace the item with another copy. The staff member scans the replacement item's barcode. If the item is linked to the same bib (the Bibliographic Control Number is the same is the original request), belongs to the same agency as the original request, and has been contributed to the INN-Reach Central Catalog, an INN-Reach Transfer Request API message is sent to the borrowing library. The request status and replacement item status are updated to Held and the INN-Reach pickup slip is printed. The item call number is added to the Item Shipped message.

    +

    Note: +
    If the new item is not linked to the same bib as the original request or does not belong to the same agency as the original request, the Fill Now function is blocked and a message is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +

    Lending library receives an Item is Renewed message from the borrowing library

    +

    When a borrowing library's patron renews an item that belongs to your library, a Borrower Renew INN-Reach API message is sent to your Polaris library system, which automatically renews the item in Polaris. If there are renewal limits or charges set for your Polaris library, they are ignored.

    +

    Lending library renews an item

    +

    In the rare case where a Polaris lending library renews an INN-Reach item from the Polaris staff client or Leap, an Owner Renew INN-Reach API message with the updated due date and time is sent to the borrowing library.

    +

    Note: +
    The due date for an INN-Reach item is calculated when the borrowing library receives the item and has no bearing on the due date of the item once it is checked out from the borrowing library to that library's patron. Auto-renewal is disabled for the lending library's items checked out to virtual patrons.

    +

    Lending library receives a Patron Claims Returned message from the borrowing library

    +

    When a Polaris lending library receives a Patron Claims Returned INN-Reach API message from the borrowing library, a claim is created in the virtual patron's record, and the item's status is set to Claimed Returned. If the item is found and returned to the lending library, the usual INN-Reach processing commences. If the lending library receives an In-Transit or a Return Uncirculated message for an item that was previously claimed, the claim is deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/Patron_places_hold.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/Patron_places_hold.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38023206 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/Patron_places_hold.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + Other library's patron places a hold request using INN-Reach + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Other library's patron places a hold request using INN-Reach

    +

    When a patron who is not registered in the local library's Polaris database uses the INN-Reach to place a hold request for an item, and INN-Reach finds the Available item in the local Polaris database, a virtual patron (v_patron) record and an item-level hold request are created automatically.

    +

    Virtual Patron Record

    +

    The virtual patron record contains the following data and settings derived from the INN-Reach Create Hold message, the ILL institutional patron template (patron record specified in the ILL Institutional patron parameter in Polaris Administration), and hard-coded defaults:

    +

    Note: +
    An ILL Institutional patron must be selected in the NCIP, ILL institutional patron parameter in Polaris Administration to enable creation of the virtual patron record. See Enable Creation of Virtual Patron Records.

    +
      +
    • Barcode - INNREACH[patronID]
    • +
    • Registered branch - Assigned branch of the requested item
    • +
    • Last name - INNREACH
    • +
    • First name - The first 32 characters provided in the INN-Reach Create Hold message, which consists of the patron's last name and first name
    • +
    • Middle name - The next 32 characters from the INN-Reach Create Hold message.
    • +
    • Gender - As set in the institutional patron template. If the registered branch of the virtual patron is not set to display the gender in the template, the gender of the virtual patron will be set to (None). The INN-Reach gender applied to the institutional patron template should be a gender that is available at all branches.
    • +
    • Patron code - The patron code that is mapped to the Central PType in the Create Hold message. If no match is found, the patron code from the template is used.
    • +
    • User defined fields - All user-defined fields, including custom fields, are blank.
    • +
    • Email address and Alternative email address - Set in the institutional patron template
    • +
    • Exclude from notices and reminders - All options are selected, so that the virtual patron is excluded from receiving any notices or reminders.
    • +
    • Statistical class - Set from the ILL Institutional patron. The statistical class is branch-specific. If the registered branch is different from the branch in the template, the system attempts to map the Pat Stat Class based on the description. If there is a matching description in the Registered branch, it is mapped; if not the Statistical class is blank.

    • +
    +
      +
    • Non-blocking notes (Patron Status workform, Notes view) - The INN-Reach patron agency, the patron address (if included in the Create Hold transaction), and the INN-Reach pickup location.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Item-Level Hold Request

    +

    After the virtual patron record is created, a regular (non-ILL) item-level hold request with a status of Active is created in Polaris. If the item is available to fill the request, the request status is updated to Pending, and the Pickup branch is set to the item's assigned branch or the branch designated for shipping INN-Reach materials. See Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    The INN-Reach hold request is displayed in the Request Manager on the new INN-Reach Lending Request view.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Hold Request workform displays the virtual patron's barcode (preceded by INNREACH) on the General view.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Non-public note field on the Holds view displays the INN-Reach tracking ID, the patron agency code, and the pickup location. This information is used primarily for trouble-shooting. If the library participates in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation, and the request has been made to a participating peer-to-peer Central Catalog, the Non-public note field lists the Central code for the circulating INN-Reach Central Catalog.

    +

    A library staff member checks the Request Manager for INN-Reach holds to fill. See Lending library processes the INN-Reach request and ships the item.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/PolarisLending.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/PolarisLending.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d068fa44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/PolarisLending.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris as the INN-Reach Lending Library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris as the INN-Reach Lending Library

    +

    A Polaris library acts as an INN-Reach lending library when a patron at another participating library goes to the INN-Reach Central Catalog web interface and places a hold request on an item owned by the Polaris library. This sends an INN-Reach Create Item Hold API to the Polaris library and automatically creates the virtual patron record and a regular (non-ILL) item-level hold request, which is placed on the item and linked to that virtual patron.

    +

    The INN-Reach hold request appears in the Request Manager, from which a staff member can print a request-to-fill (paging list) to use in locating the requested item.

    +

    Upon check-in of the requested item, the hold's status is updated to Shipped, and item's status is updated to Held in Polaris. In addition, an INN-Reach API message confirming the item's shipment is sent to the library to which the patron belongs.

    +

    At receipt of the item at the borrowing library, an INN-Reach API acknowledgment message is sent to the Polaris lending library, which checks the item out to the virtual patron.

    +

    When the patron returns the item, the borrowing library ships the physical item back to the Polaris lending library, the item's status is updated to In-Transit, and the hold request is deleted. The item arrives at the Polaris lending library where it is checked in, which deletes the hold request and the virtual patron record. If the item belongs at the branch where it is checked in, the item's status is updated to In. If the item belongs to another branch, the item's status is updated to In-transit.

    +

    In either case, a Final Item Checkin INN-Reach API message is sent to the borrowing library indicating the ILL circulation is complete, and the virtual patron record is marked for deletion if there are no other outstanding INN-Reach requests associated with the virtual patron. A Final Item Checkin message is also sent if the item arrived back at the lending library but was not properly checked in and another patron checked it out.

    +

    Note: +
    To ensure that INN-Reach item holds are created when the Polaris library is the INN-Reach lending library, the Holds Routing Sequence Primary policy table must be set up for the shipping/receiving branch. See Edit Holds Routing Tables.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemouttoremotepat.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemouttoremotepat.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4328c3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemouttoremotepat.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Item is received at the borrowing library and checked out in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item is received at the borrowing library and checked out in Polaris

    +

    When the item is received at the borrowing library, an INN-Reach API message is sent to the Polaris library that automatically checks out the item to the virtual patron, updates the item's circulation status to Out, and updates the hold status to Out to patron.

    +

    The Hold Request workform > Notes view, Request History pane displays An item linked to this request has been checked out in theAction column.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Item Record workform > History view displays the message Item was received at an INN-Reach library when the item was received at the remote library and then Checked out when the item is checked out in Polaris.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemreturnedbyrempat.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemreturnedbyrempat.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ea74886 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/itemreturnedbyrempat.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Item is returned to the Polaris lending library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item is returned to the Polaris lending library

    +

    The patron from the borrowing library returns the item, the library ships the item back to the Polaris lending library, and INN-Reach sends an Item Shipped API message which initiates the following processes in Polaris:

    +
      +
    • The item is checked in and the item status is set to In-transit to the item's Assigned branch.
    • +
    • The item-level hold request is deleted
    • +
    • The following note is added to the Item Record workform, History view: Returning in-transit from an INN-Reach library.
    • +
    +

    The returned INN-Reach item arrives at the lending library where it is checked in, and the following events occur:

    +
      +
    • The virtual patron record is marked for deletion, and it will be deleted from the database the next time the Patron Nightly Processing SQL job runs in Polaris.
    • +
    • A Final Item Checkin INN-Reach message is sent to the borrowing library indicating the item has been returned and checked in.
    • +
    +

    In the following situations outside the normal workflow, you may see a message when you attempt to check in an item at the lending library:

    +
      +
    • The lending library sent a shipped message (API 201), but then decided not to ship the item after all.
    • +
    • The lending library sent a shipped message (API 201), and shipped the item. However, the borrowing library did not process the item and simply sent it back.
    • +
    +

    The system prompts This INN-Reach item has already been checked in and declared shipped. Do you still want to ship this item?

    +
      +
    • Select Yes to leave the request and item in a shipped status and reprint the pick-up slip.
    • +
    • Select No to check in the item with normal Polaris INN-Reach check-in processing. The system sends a Final Item Check In (API 300) message to the borrowing library.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/lendinglibprocitemhold.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/lendinglibprocitemhold.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b336f4f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNLendingLib/lendinglibprocitemhold.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + Lending library processes the INN-Reach request and ships the item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Lending library processes the INN-Reach request and ships the item

    +

    To process the INN-Reach request, a staff member at the Polaris lending library checks the Request Manager for INN-Reach holds that need to be filled; prints a Requests to Fill list to locate the item in the stacks; brings the item back to the circulation desk or ILL department; scans the item; prints a pickup slip to go with the item; and ships the item to the borrowing library or transfers the item to the branch that handles the shipments for the library. See Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    When the item is shipped to the borrowing library, the item call number is sent in the bibCallNumber field in the Item Shipped INN-Reach API message. This ensures that the call number added to the borrowing library's system matches the call number on the physical item. If no call number is found, the bibliographic call number is sent. If no bibliographic call number is found, the message is sent without the call number.

    +

    Note: +
    The INN-Reach pickup slip check box must be selected on the Check-in - Tools > Options dialog box for the Check-In workform.

    +
      +
    1. Check the Request Manager for any INN-Reach holds to fill on the INN-Reach Lending Requests view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. If there are INN-Reach hold requests waiting to be filled, select either Holds To Fill (INN-Reach) or Holds To Fill (Regular and INN-Reach), depending on whether you want INN-Reach hold requests on a separate or combined requests-to-fill list.
    2. +
    +

    .

    +

    The Hold Requests To Fill (INN-Reach) list (or the combined list) is printed.

    +

    For each INN-Reach hold request, the following information is included:

    +
      +
    • The item's call number, barcode, title, and author.
    • +
    • The virtual patron's name (prefaced by INNREACH), the patron code, the INNReach patron barcode, the patron phone number (if it exists), and the pickup library (where the courier will pick up the item to be shipped to the other library).
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Take the list of INN-Reach hold requests into the stacks, locate the item that fulfills the request, and bring the item back to the location that handles ILLs for your library.
    2. +
    3. Scan the item on the Check-In workform.
    4. +
    +

    A message indicates the item satisfies an INN-Reach hold request and asks whether to ship the item to the remote library. The message box displays the item title and barcode, the remote library's name and INN-Reach code, the name of the patron who placed the request, and the patron's phone number.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to trap the hold.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you click Cancel, no action is taken and the hold request and item status remain unchanged. If you click No, a message box indicates the hold will be denied, asks if you are sure you want to deny the hold, and provides the options Yes or No. If you click Yes, the hold is denied.

    +

    When Yes is selected, the item's status is updated to Held, and the request status is updated to Shipped. An INN-Reach API message is sent to the borrowing library indicating the item has been shipped.

    +

    The INN-Reach pickup slip is printed. The slip can be printed on a page or receipt printer.

    +

    The default text, This item is available for pickup at the designated location, can be edited using the Polaris WebAdmin tool. The string is under RECEIPT_INNREACH_PICKUP and the text specified for the transacting branch is used.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    If the pickup slip fails to print or is misplaced, the staff member can scan the item barcode to reprint the pickup slip. A message box displays: This INN-Reach item has already been checked in. When the user clicks OK, the pickup slip is reprinted.

    +
      +
    1. Put the physical item along with the pickup slip in the courier bag for courier pickup.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/GrantPermission.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/GrantPermission.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d272e00 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/GrantPermission.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Give staff permissions for INN-Reach administration functions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Give staff permissions for INN-Reach administration functions

    +

    Two System-level permissions are available for staff who will use the web-based INN-Reach Admin Tool to view status and configuration information and monitor INN-Reach processes on the local Polaris server:

    +
      +
    • INN-Reach administration: Access - When this permission is granted without the Modify permission (see below), staff can access the INN-Reach Administration page and view the data, but cannot change any settings. With Access permission only, the following options do not appear:
      • Home, Status - Data Upload and Synchronization menu
      • Home, Diagnostics, Circulation Exceptions - Requeue Selected button, Delete Selected button, and check boxes
      • Home, Diagnostics, Contribution Exceptions - Requeue Selected button, Delete Selected button, and check boxes
    • +
    • INN-Reach administration: Modify - When a staff member has both the Access and Modify permissions, all options are available.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    +
    INN-Reach administrators must have a Polaris login to access these permissions.

    +

    These permissions are granted to the Administrator group and all workstations by default but must be specifically granted to staff members.

    +

    Note:
    Staff members who had the Access INN-Reach administration: Allow permission in Polaris 5.1 are granted the INN-Reach administration: Access permission by default at upgrade. The INN-Reach administration: Modify permission, which was added in Polaris 5.2, is not granted to staff members by default and must be specifically assigned when appropriate.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/INN-ReachParams.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/INN-ReachParams.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74e765a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/INN-ReachParams.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration

    +

    Three INN-Reach parameters are available on the Request tab in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    • INN-Reach: Automatic return at check-in +
    • +
    • INN-Reach: Use my branch to ship/receive material +
    • +
    • INN-Reach: Use this branch to ship/receive material +
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    The INN-Reach: Automatic return at check-in parameter specifies whether the borrowing library checks in and then returns the INN-Reach ILL item, or checks in and returns the item in a single process. The default is set to No. If this parameter is set to Yes, and the borrowing library has also set the parameter INN-Reach - Use my branch to ship/receive material to Yes, the processes are combined; the item status changes to In and then Returned-ILL in a single process. The following item status transitions are affected by this setting:

    +
      +
    • OUT to IN - Item is checked in after circulating to patron.
    • +
    • IN-TRANSIT to IN - Item returns In-Transit from another branch.
    • +
    • HELD to IN- Item is pulled from the hold shelf and checked in without circulating.
    • +
    • Item status is IN and ILL Request status is Return Uncirculated - Item was created when Received in Request Manager, and the Return Uncirculated checkbox is set. (In this case, the receiving branch has the parameters set to Yes.)
    • +
    • LOST to IN - Item is checked in after being declared Lost.
    • +
    • CLAIM RETURN to IN - Item is checked in after being declared Claim Returned.
    • +
    • CLAIM NEVER HAD to IN - Item is checked in after being declared Claim Never Had.
    • +
    • MISSING to IN - Item is checked in after being declared Missing.
    • +
    • WITHDRAWN to IN - Item is checked in after being Withdrawn.
    • +
    • BINDERY to IN - Item is checked in after being declared (in) Bindery.
    • +
    • IN-REPAIR to IN - Item is checked in after being declared In-Repair.
    • +
    • UNAVAILABLE to IN - Item is checked in after being declared Unavailable.
    • +
    • CLAIM MISSING PARTS to IN - Item is checked in after being declared Claim Missing Parts.
    • +
    +

    The following parameters are used to specify the shipping and receiving branch for items requested through INN-Reach:

    +

    +

    INN-Reach: Use my branch to ship/receive material - Set this option to Yes if various branches in your library system handle shipping and receiving materials requested through INN-Reach. If a designated branch handles all shipping and receiving of material requested through INN-Reach, set this option to No, and select the branch in the INN-Reach: Use this branch to ship/receive material parameter.

    +
      +
    • When this option is set to Yes, and patrons from your local library system use INN-Reach to borrow material from a remote library, virtual items are created in Polaris with the receiving branch as the Assigned branch. When patrons return the items to the branch at which they were received, the items remain there until they are shipped back to the owning library. Items returned at other branches go in-transit back the branch at which they were received.
    • +
    +
      +
    • When this option is set to Yes, and patrons from participating remote libraries place requests for items found in your library's local catalog, the Pickup branch for each of these requests is set to the Assigned Branch of the item that fills the request. This ensures that the items are held at, and shipped from, the library where they reside.
    • +
    +

    +

     INN-Reach: Use this branch to ship/receive material - Select a branch as the designated location for shipping and receiving materials requested through INN-Reach. The INN-Reach: Use my branch to ship/receive material must be set to No to specify a central shipping and receiving branch.

    • When a branch is designated as the shipping and receiving branch, and patrons from your local library system borrow material from a remote library, virtual item records are created in Polaris with the designated central branch as the item's Assigned branch. Patrons can return the items at any branch location, but they are always sent to the designated assigned branch for shipment back to the owning library.
    • When a branch is designated as the shipping and receiving branch, and patrons from a participating remote library place requests for items found in your library's local catalog, the Pickup branch for each of these requests is set to this central branch. This ensures that the items are transferred to this designated pickup branch for shipment to the remote library.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/PolarisINNOverview.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/PolarisINNOverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74248866 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/PolarisINNOverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration

    +

    INN-Reach is Innovative's user-initiated direct consortial borrowing system. Libraries running the Polaris ILS can take advantage of direct interaction with INN-Reach to expand their resource-sharing and consortial-borrowing capabilities, while using established Polaris workflows to manage circulation. After INN-Reach has been implemented, your library's patrons can discover titles and place holds on items that other participating libraries (Sierra, Millennium, Polaris, or other ILS) have contributed to the INN-Reach Central Catalog. The integration also enables your library to loan items it owns to patrons from other libraries who have placed requests on these items through INN-Reach.

    +

    When a patron places an INN-Reach request on an item in the Central Catalog, the patron is identified and authorized to place the request. If the patron is registered with your library system and the request is for an item owned by another library, your Polaris library acts as the INN-Reach borrowing library. For information on processing INN-Reach requests from your library's patrons, see Polaris as the INN-Reach Borrowing Library.

    +

    When a patron registered with another library system places an INN-Reach request on an item your library owns, your Polaris library acts as the INN-Reach lending library. For information on processing INN-Reach requests from patrons outside of your library system, see Polaris as the INN-Reach Lending Library.

    +

    Once licensed for INN-Reach, your library can use the Request Manager to manage both INN-Reach requests placed by your patrons and INN-Reach requests placed on your items by patrons at other participating libraries.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    To use the Request Manager, staff must be assigned the existing Access Hold Request Manager and the Access ILL Request Manager permissions in Polaris.

    +

    INN-Reach requests from your library patrons to borrow items from other libraries are listed on the ILL Requests view in the Request Manager.

    +

    + + +

    +

    INN-Reach requests to loan items to remote patrons at other libraries are listed on the INN-Reach Lending Requests view.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    Only Polaris libraries with a license for INN-Reach integration can see this view on the Request Manager workform.

    +

    + + +

    +

    Your library may also participate in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation. With this feature, patrons from your library can borrow materials from multiple participating INN-Reach Central Catalogs. For details, see INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation.

    +

    Implementing INN-Reach Integration with Polaris

    +

    To implement INN-Reach integration with your Polaris system, your library, with the assistance of Innovative Interfaces staff, does the following tasks:

    +
      +
    • Installs the INN-Reach license key (ILS_LICENSEKEY_INNREACH) with Polaris. When the license has been installed, the INN-Reach views, menu options, and toolbar options display in the Polaris application.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Sets up the local configuration and mapping profile that:
      • Specifies the criteria that must be met for local items to be contributed to the INN-Reach Central Catalog. These criteria are also used in synchronizing your local catalog with the INN-Reach Central Catalog–automatically adding (contributing), deleting (de-contributing), or changing records in the INN-Reach Central Catalog. For example, changing an item's status, material type, or collection may automatically de-contribute the item if it no longer meets the contribution criteria specified in your profile.
      • Maps the Polaris item collections and material types to local INN-Reach ITypes and the local ITypes to central ITypes. The central ITypes are used in template (name) matching to generate the correct virtual INN-Reach items. It is also used in mapping Polaris format IDs to ITypes so that the correct TOM icon for the held item appears in the patron's account. See Item Material Types for Uploading and Mapping to INN-Reach ITypes.
      • Maps the Polaris patron codes to INN-Reach PTypes. This mapping is used to authenticate your patrons when they use the INN-Reach Central Catalog to place holds on items owned by other libraries, and to create virtual patron records when patrons from other libraries place INN-Reach requests on items owned by your library. See Patron Codes for Uploading and Mapping to INN-Reach PTypes.
    • +
    + +
      +
    • (Optionally) Sets the Request parameter to combine the check-in and return processes for INN-Reach ILL requests. If this parameter is set to Yes, the item is checked in and the ILL hold status is automatically updated to Returned. If the library leaves the parameter set to the default of No, the ILL items must be checked in and returned in two separate steps.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/set_up_patron_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/set_up_patron_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b90f0a02 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/INNOverview/set_up_patron_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Enable Creation of Virtual Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Creation of Virtual Patron Records

    +

    When a patron who is not registered in your Polaris library system places an INN-Reach request on an item owned by your Polaris library, a virtual patron record is generated automatically so that the item can circulate to that remote patron. The virtual patron record is created using a combination of data and settings from the INN-Reach Create Hold message, the ILL institutional patron saved in the Polaris Administration parameter, and hard-coded defaults. Patron records for virtual patrons are exempt from all notices. For details regarding the automatic creation of the virtual patron record, see Other library's patron places a hold request using INN-Reach.

    +

    Note: +
    If a patron record is selected in the NCIP parameter, ILL institutional patron, you do not need to set up another patron record; only one ILL institutional patron can be selected for the library system. However, if an institutional patron is not identified in the parameter, the request from the remote patron will fail.

    +

    To set up the ILL institutional patron that will be used to create virtual patron records:

    +
      +
    1. Create a new patron record that will be identified as the institutional patron record.
    2. +
    +

    The gender, statistical class, and other settings will be copied from this institutional patron to the virtual patron record.

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System.
    2. +
    3. At the System level, select Parameters.
    4. +
    5. Select the NCIP tab.
    6. +
    7. Double-click ILL institutional patron to open the ILL Institutional Patron dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Click Find Patron and select the patron record that will be used to create virtual patron records.
    10. +
    11. Click OK to save the institutional patron parameter.
    12. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/PolarisINN_P2P_Overview.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/PolarisINN_P2P_Overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8041a2a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/INN-Reach Integration/PolarisINN_P2P_Overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Circulation

    +

    INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation allows patrons from Polaris local libraries to borrow materials from multiple participating INN-Reach Central Catalogs. Each participating INN-Reach Central Catalog contains only those records contributed by libraries affiliated with that specific system. See INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Profile . However, patrons from each system can search for and request items from all participating INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer Central Catalogs.

    +

    To implement INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation, the library, with the help of an Innovative implementation representative, completes or updates the INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Excel spreadsheet (see INN-Reach Configuration and Mapping Spreadsheet ). The spreadsheet includes central codes and related elements for the Central Catalogs that will participate in INN-Reach Peer-to-Peer circulation with your library. If your library already participates in and uploads records to an INN-Reach Central Catalog, you can add peer-to-peer Central Catalogs to the spreadsheet and upload it again.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Adding_Menu_and_Submenu_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Adding_Menu_and_Submenu_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a679b4d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Adding_Menu_and_Submenu_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Adding Menu and Submenu Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Adding Menu and Submenu Options

    +

    You can add menu and submenu options (tabs) and provide links for your custom options in the file HeaderData.xml, located in Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC. See Navigation Menu Options. Each tab is identified by a unique number in the TabID field. Polaris-provided tabs are identified by single-digit numbers. Start at a higher number for custom tabs, such as 100, in case Innovative adds more default tabs in later versions.

    +

    Important: +
    Copy HeaderData.xml to the custom folder, then make your changes. This protects your changes from being overwritten at reinstallation or upgrade.

    +

    Suppressing Context

    +

    Standard query parameters are appended to most PowerPAC URLS. They identify the relevant organization and the appropriate language file. An example is shown below.

    +

    + +

    +

    For each of the nodes in the primary and secondary navigation links defined in HeaderData.xml, you can specify a SuppressCTX node for custom tabs and secondary menu options. Set SuppressCTX to Y for any custom tab or menu option in the header for which the link is going to some page other than a PowerPAC page. For example, a library adds additional custom tabs for Visual Search and Digital Catalog, applications outside Polaris PowerPAC that the library wants patrons to be able to use. By including the node <SuppressCTX>Y</SuppressCTX> in the tab definition, the ctx=9.9999.9.9.9 query parameter values will not be automatically appended to the link.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Links.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Links.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9772764b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Links.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Custom Mobile PAC Links + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Custom Mobile PAC Links

    +

    Custom links to other web pages can be added to the Mobile PAC Home, Hours & Contact, and New & Popular pages. They can be displayed below or above the Polaris-defined links. To create custom links:

    +
      +
    1. Copy /CustomFramework/Links-template.xml to /Custom/Links.xml.
    2. +
    3. Working in Links.xml, define the custom links. The template file /Custom/Links-template.xml includes detailed step-by-step instructions for setting up a /Custom/Links.xml file.
    4. +
    5. Perform a reload of the Mobile PAC Web site in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), or perform an IISRESET.
    6. +
    +

    Pages of Custom Links

    +

    Polaris also provides a template to create a custom page of links. To create a custom page of links:

    +
      +
    1. Copy and rename /CustomFramework/PageLinks-template.aspx to a file in the /Custom/Pages/ folder; for example, /Custom/Pages/BookClubs.aspx.
    2. +
    3. Edit the custom page, changing the {title} and {breadcrumb} strings to the display title for your custom page.
    4. +
    5. Follow the examples in the template for creating links in the custom section of the page. See below.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Custom Links in the Mobile PAC Footer

    +

    You can add your own links to the Mobile PAC page footer using standard html markup. However, you must re-do your edit each time you upgrade.

    +

    To add links to the footer, edit MobilePAC/Views/Shared/Site.Master in the section of code shown below:

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Pages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Pages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dab781e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Pages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Custom Mobile PAC Pages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Custom Mobile PAC Pages

    +

    A template for creating other custom Mobile PAC pages is located in the CustomFramework/Templates folder. The template can be used as a starting point for custom pages that include standard Mobile PAC headers and footers and a section for custom HTML code. To create a custom page in Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Copy /CustomFramework/Templates/Page-template.xml to the /Custom/Pages folder.
    2. +
    3. Rename the copied file to the desired file name. The file must have an .aspx file extension. Example: /Custom/Pages/CommunityLinks.aspx
    4. +

      Without making any changes, the custom page will look like the illustration:

      +

      + +

      +
    5. Edit the custom page, changing the {title} and {breadcrumb} strings to the display title for your custom page.
    6. +
    7. Add your custom HTML where noted:
    8. +

      + +

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Themes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Themes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f668a317 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Mobile_PAC_Themes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating Custom Mobile PAC Themes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Custom Mobile PAC Themes

    +

    Mobile PAC allows multiple Polaris-defined and custom themes, but includes one Polaris-defined, default theme called Classic. Polaris theme files are contained in the Content folder.

    +

    + +

    +

    Custom themes should be placed in the Custom/Content folder. Any theme folders created in the /Custom/Content/ folder will be available to Mobile PAC users. If there are multiple custom themes, a drop-down list of themes will be available to the user in the Mobile PAC Preferences page.

    +

    Each theme (Polaris-defined and custom) inherits most of its styling and images from a shared folder: Content/Shared. This structure allows most styling and images such as format icons to be shared among themes, so that any changes between versions of Polaris can be automatically inherited by all themes. For instance, if Polaris adds a new icon for a Type of Material format, because that image is shared by all themes, it is not necessary to update that image in each of the individual theme folders.

    +

    Any CSS style information included in a specific theme supplies only the values that need to be overridden for that theme, not every style defined in the common files in Content/Shared.

    +

    Since custom themes are created in the Custom folder, the following steps should only have to be done once, as subsequent upgrades of Polaris Mobile PAC will not overwrite files in the Custom folder.

    +

    Note: +
    A node in the Themes.xml file, SuppressAllIfCustomDefine, has a default value of True. If at least one custom theme is defined in the Custom folder, the standard theme cannot be viewed in Mobile PAC.

    +

    To create a custom theme for Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Place a copy of the /Content/Classic folder and its contents in the /Custom/Content folder.
    2. +
    3. Rename your copied folder to your own theme name.
    4. +
    5. Edit the Theme.xml file in your new custom theme folder.
    6. +

      + +

      +
    7. Working in your Theme.xml file, change the Name node to the name of your new custom theme.
    8. +

      Example: +
      <Name LanguageID="1033">Old English</Name>

      +

      +
      If you have a multilingual PAC, you can define multilingual names for your theme:

      +

      Example: +
      <Name LanguageID="1033">Old English</Name>
      <Name LanguageID="3082">Inglés Antiguo</Name>
      <Name LanguageID="3084">vieil anglais</Name>

      +

      For additional language labels, add additional nodes using the following LanguageID values:

      +

      1033 - English

      +

      1042 - Korean

      +

      1049 - Russian

      +

      1065 - Farsi-Persian

      +

      1066 - Vietnamese

      +

      1141 - Hawaiian

      +

      2052 - Chinese

      +

      3082 - Spanish

      +

      3084 - French

      +

      12289 - Arabic

      +

      15372 - Haitian Creole

      +
    9. If you do not need to override any of the Mobile PAC images (format icons or other images), leave the <formatIconsFolder> and <imagesFolder> nodes pointing to the shared folder; you do not have to make copies of all of those image files in your custom theme. If you do wish to change format icons or other images, create folders in your custom theme for those image files, and set the <formatIconsFolder> and <imagesFolder> nodes to point to those new folders in your custom theme.
    10. +
    11. Edit the Theme.css file in your custom folder to begin your customization of your theme. The only styles that you need to include in this file are styles you want to override from the shared theme. You can view all of the shared common styles that can be overridden in /Content/Shared/Common.css.
    12. +
    13. Perform a reload of the Mobile PAC Web site in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), or perform an IISRESET, after you initially create a new custom theme. Any subsequent changes to the Theme.css file or addition of image files do not require an application reload to see the changes.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Theme_for_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Theme_for_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2892dad6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_Custom_Theme_for_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    Polaris provides five standard themes for Polaris PowerPAC: Ocean (the default), Pomegranate, Mint, Black & Gold, and Gray. When a patron connects to Polaris PowerPAC, the connection branch’s theme is displayed. If you allow patrons to switch branches, the theme changes according to the selected branch’s theme setting. You create a custom theme by setting up a custom theme folder in Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\custom\themes\theme name, and making it available for selection in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To create a custom theme for Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. Create and name a custom theme folder in Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\custom\themes\{theme name}. The name is case-sensitive. Alternatively, your file folder can reside on any remote server. You then define a fully-qualified URL directory path in the path column of the System Administration (SA) database table PowerPAC Themes. If the path column value of the SA database table PowerPAC Themes begins with http: or https:, PowerPAC treats that as a fully-qualified domain path. Any other values are assumed to be relative paths within the root of the PowerPAC web application.
    2. +
    3. Working in your custom theme folder, create an scss sub folder and copy the file style-template.scss from the top-level custom folder into your custom theme’s scss folder. Follow the naming convention of the standard themes; that is, include the name of your theme in that file name. For example, if your theme name is Saratoga, name the file style-saratoga.scss. You can override variables such as color, font size, etc. in this file. Place any custom classes or class overrides at the bottom of the file after the import line for style.core.
    4. +

      + +

      +

      Note: +
      If you want to modify a standard theme, you may want to use the simple Gray theme as the basis for your changes.

      +

      Important: +
      If your library uses Polaris Social (licensed integrated ChiliFresh Connections features): In the Polaris themes\shared folder, ChiliFresh Connections has its own style sheet (chilifresh.css). If your PowerPAC has a custom theme and you wish to override some of the default chilifresh.css file, copy the chilifresh.css file from the themes\shared folder to the custom theme folder and edit the custom version accordingly. Unlike the main styles.css page with overrides, the custom chilifresh.css page must contain all the CSS classes from the default version.

      + +
    5. +

      PowerPAC includes a utility to compile from your custom style-<theme>.scss file the site.css file that will reside in the top level of your custom theme folder. In order to create that custom site.css file, at a command prompt, cd to c:\program files\polaris\<version>\powerpac\themes\ and run the utility specifying your custom theme name. For example, if your custom theme name is Saratoga, run from the command line prompt:

      +

      > PowerShell -File ScssCompile.ps1 -Theme Saratoga +

      +

      This will generate a site.css file in your custom theme folder.

      +

      Note:
      Hosted customers without direct access to the PowerPAC server can compile custom CSS in the Polaris Web Admin Tool. See the Web Admin Tool help for instructions.

      +
    6. + +
    7. Assign the new theme to one or more branches by following these steps:
      1. In the Polaris Administration Explorer, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
      2. Double-click Theme selection, and select the custom theme from the drop-down list.
      3. Double-click Theme dashboard position, and select Left or Right.
      4. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    9. Use the Reload feature in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) or perform an IIS reset to see your changes.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    Hosted customers should contact their Site Manager to perform an IIS reset.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_custom_theme_for_Children.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_custom_theme_for_Children.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2382af48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Creating_custom_theme_for_Children.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition

    +

    When you enable Children’s Edition themes in Polaris Administration for an organization, children can choose a theme from the options you specify. Polaris provides three standard Children’s Edition themes: Treasure, Antique, and Ocean. You can offer some or all of these as well as your custom themes. Themes are developed at the system level, but you can assign them at the system, library, or branch level, so that each branch can control which (if any) theme options are available. The default theme—the theme that is displayed when users first connect to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition—can also be set at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, the theme style sheet (.css) file and related image files are stored in each language-specific theme folder:
    Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\Children\themes\language code\theme name.
    For example, files for the default Treasure theme (English) are located in the folder
    Polaris\version\PowerPAC\children\themes\1033\treasure.
    If you are creating a custom theme, set up a unique folder for your files on the Web server, in the Polaris\version\PowerPAC\children\themes\language number folder.

    +

    Note: +
    Each language is represented by a number. English is represented by 1033, so theme folders for the English version are stored in Polaris\version\PowerPAC\children\themes\1033.

    +

    Theme folders also contain the image files specified for format icons and categories, since these images can change when a different theme is chosen. As in Polaris PowerPAC, format icons identify the medium of a title listed in search results, such as a book or a musical sound recording. “Categories” are specific to the Children’s Edition and contain predefined targets, such as searches or Web site URLs. See Managing Search Categories.

    +

    You create a custom theme for Children’s Edition by copying an existing theme, then editing the style sheet and images as appropriate. You can make the custom theme available for use directly in Polaris System Administration. To create a custom theme for the Children's Edition:

    +
      +
    1. In the] Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\children\themes\[language folder] directory, copy a theme folder and rename it for your custom theme. Keep your new custom theme folder in the Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\children\themes\[language folder] directory. File names and paths are case-sensitive.
    2. +
    3. Working in your custom theme folder, edit the .css style sheet and images as you wish. You must retain all classes in the .css file.
    4. +
    5. Make your custom theme available for organizations to use by following these steps:
      1. In the Polaris Administration Explorer, open the Profiles folder at the system level, and select the Children's PAC tab in the details view.
      2. Double-click Theme construction. The Theme Construction dialog box lists the default themes and any custom themes that have already been defined. You cannot edit the default themes.
      3. Select the theme you copied as a basis for your custom theme in step 1, and click Copy. The copy is added to the list as Copy of theme.
      4. Select the copy and click Edit. The Edit Theme dialog box opens.
      5. Type a name for the theme in the Display Name box. The display name identifies the theme in Polaris Administration profiles and on the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition interface.
    6. +

      Note: +
      The Cursor Type field is not functional.

      +
        +
      1. In the appropriate File Name boxes, if you changed any filenames in the custom theme folder, type the new filenames for the page graphic elements and for the stylesheet. The system constructs the appropriate URL. Type only the new filename (case-sensitive).
      2. +
      +
        +
      1. Type the name of the theme folder you created in step 1 in the Default Image Path box. Type only the folder name (case-sensitive). The system constructs the appropriate URL for the theme files to Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\children\themes\language folder\your folder on the server, based on the theme folder you specify.
      2. +
      3. Click OK on the dialog box. The dialog box closes, and your settings are saved.
      4. +
      +
    7. Assign the custom theme to an organization by following these steps:
      1. In the Polaris Administration Explorer, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
      2. Double-click Theme Assignment.
      3. Select the custom theme in the Unassigned Themes list, and click Assign. The theme is added to the Assigned themes list.
      4. To designate an assigned theme as the default theme, select the theme in the Assigned Themes list, and click Assign Default Theme.
      5. Click OK on the dialog box. The dialog box closes, and your settings are automatically saved.
    8. +

      Note: +
      To display the theme options in the Children’s Edition, set the Children’s PAC profiles Select theme: Enable and Dashboards: Enable to Yes for the organization.

      +
    9. +

      Use the Reload feature in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) or perform an IIS reset to see your changes.

      +
    10. +
    +

    Note: +
    Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +

    Important: +
    Back up your new theme folder to protect it from being overwritten when Polaris PowerPAC software is reinstalled or upgraded. +Move the custom theme directory back to Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\children\themes\language folder after the installation is complete.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Layouts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Layouts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..674f3c7d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Layouts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,375 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing Layouts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Layouts

    +

    Beyond the color and layout changes possible by overriding the PowerPAC CSS classes and styles, overall layout structure for the PowerPAC header, menu options, footer, and dashboards can be customized by editing the application primary master page.

    +

    PowerPAC pages share a common ASP.NET master page called site.master which resides in the root directory. With knowledge of HTML, ASP.NET, and C#, a customized version of this file can result in changes in the layout of the header, menu options, and footer that may not be possible through CSS changes.

    +

    The site.master file can be modified in place, but be sure to make a backup of the original file. Also, be aware that changes will be overwritten when PowerPAC is upgraded on your server. A better method is to create a custom theme and then create a copy of site.master in your custom theme folder. PowerPAC always looks for a site.master in the selected theme folder before defaulting to the version in the application's root directory.

    +

    Most of the dynamic data content for portions of PowerPAC pages that are rendered via the site.master file are contained in a C# object called PageData.

    +

    The following attributes of the PageData object are available for use in any customized PowerPAC master page:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    ATTRIBUTEC# DATA TYPEDESCRIPTION
    +

    IsPatronAccountEnabled

    +
    +

    bool

    +
    +

    Patron account access link. Enabled - Boolean attribute indicating whether or not patron logons are allowed.

    +
    Banner.CustomBackgroundColorstringCustom background color style for banner as specified in Polaris Administration
    Banner.CustomForegroundColorstringCustom font color style for organization name display as specified in Polaris Administration
    Banner.IsShowOrganizationNameboolWhether to display organization name as specified in Polaris Administration
    Banner.HeaderAlignmentstringHTML style attribute for horizontal alignment of header display data
    Brancheslist<>List of branch (organization) links included in drop-down list used to switch branches
    Branch.URLstring URL used to switch to a given branch
    Branch.Label string Branch (organization) display name
    ChildrensPAC.IsEnabled bool Boolean attribute indicating whether or not Children's PAC logo/link displays
    ChildrensPAC.LinkUrl string HREF link to Children's PAC main page
    ChildrensPAC.Label string Display text of Children's PAC link
    CopyrightText string Text of copyright statement
    Languages list<>List of languages that this installation of PowerPAC supports
    Language.Labelstring Label of the specific language option link
    Language.URL string URL of the specified language option link
    CurrentLanguageIDint +

    Currently selected language. Could be used to conditionally display static text in the site.master in different languages. Valid values include those licensed by the system. Possible values:

    +

    1033 - English

    +

    1042 - Korean

    +

    1045 - Polish

    +

    1049 - Russian

    +

    1065 - Farsi - Persian

    +

    1066 - Vietnamese

    +

    1081 - Hindi

    +

    1141 - Hawaiian - United States

    +

    2052 - Chinese

    +

    3082 - Spanish - Span (Modern Sort)

    +

    3084 - French - Canada

    +

    12289 - Arabic

    +

    15372 - Haitian Creole

    +
    HeaderLogo.ImageUrlstring URL for image of main header
    HeaderLogo.LinkUrl string HREF link for main header logo
    HeaderLogo.AltText string ALT text for main header logo
    OrganizationName string Name of the currently selected organization
    OrganizationIDint ID for the currently selected organization. Could be used to key off of to conditionally display static text for specific organizations.
    PageID int Web page ID for the page, typically used to determine which dashboards to display. Could also be used to key off of for any additional page-specific content.
    IsPatronLoggedOn bool Boolean attribute indicating whether or not a patron is logged on
    PatronName string Name of currently logged on patron
    PolarisFooterLogo.ImageUrl string URL of the "Powered by Polaris" image logo
    PolarisFooterLogo.AltText string ALT text for the "Powered by Polaris" image logo
    MenuOptions list<>List of main menu categories and sub-options as defined in HeaderData.xml
    MenuOption.ID int ID of main tab option
    MenuOption.IsSelected bool Boolean indicating whether this is the currently selected option
    MenuOption.Link.URL string URL for the option
    MenuOption.Link.Label string Text label for the option
    MenuOption.MenuSubOptions list<>List of sub-options for this main category. An empty list indicates there are no sub-options.
    MenuSubOption.ID int ID of sub-option
    MenuSubOption.IsSelected bool Boolean attribute indicating whether this is the currently selected sub-option
    MenuSubOption.Link.URL string URL for the sub-option
    MenuSubOption.Link.Label string ext label for the sub-option
    MobilePAC.IsShowLink bool Boolean attribute indicating whether the link to classic Mobile PAC appears in the page footer
    MobilePAC.Label string Label of classic Mobile PAC link in footer
    MobilePAC.LinkUrl string URL of classic Mobile PAC link in footer
    SkipToMainContentLabel string Label of the link to skip to main content of page. Typically invisible, but used by screen readers for ADA compliance.
    SkipToMainMenuLabel string Label of the link to skip to main menu of page. Typically invisible, but used by screen readers for ADA compliance.
    ThemePath string The web path of the images and style sheets for the currently active theme. Could be used as a prefix to any custom images contained in that directory.
    VirtualReference.IsEnabled bool Boolean attribute indicating whether or not Virtual Reference is enabled
    VirtualReference.LabelPre string Label text before the hyperlinked portion of the link
    VirtualReference.Link.Labelstring Label of hyperlinked portion of the link.
    VirtualReference.Link.URL string URL of hyperlinked position of the link
    VirtualReference.LabelPost stringLabel text before the hyperlinked portion of the link
    +

    Section- and Page-Specific Customizations

    +

    For PowerPAC pages that inherit from site.master, the BODY HTML tag contains two classes that may be used as selectors for scoping of section- and page-specific CSS customizations. The page-specific class is of the format page-{pagename} in which {pagename} is the name of the ASPX page minus the .aspx file extension. The section-specific class is of the format section-{sectionname} where {sectionname} is the directory in which the page resides.

    +

    Example:

    +

    For the page /polaris/patronaccount/itemsout.aspx, the BODY tag would include the following classes:

    +

    <BODY class=”section-patronaccount page-itemsout”>

    +

    Navigation Menu Options

    +

    Navigation menu options are defined in the file HeaderData.xml in the root of the PowerPAC folder. If a single customized HeaderData.xml file will suffice for all branches, copy the HeaderData.xml file to the /custom/ folder and customize the copied file. Polaris looks first for HeaderData.xml in the /custom/ folder; if the file is not found there, Polaris uses the HeaderData.xml file in the root of the PowerPAC folder.

    +

    If you need different custom HeaderData.xml files for various branches, you can create them in the /custom/ folder, and each can be assigned to one or more branches:

    +
      +
    • After creating the multiple HeaderData.xml files, create a file called HeaderDataIndex.xml in the /custom/ folder. This allows PowerPAC to associate specific header data files with specific branches. See the sample file in the /custom/ folder called HeaderDataIndex-template-xml; use this file as an example or starting point.
    • +
    • In the index file, each branch ID is assigned to the custom versions of HeaderData.xml. For example:
    • +

      + +

      +
    • Any branch not listed in HeaderDataIndex.xml will use the default HeaderData.xml.
    • +
    +

    Perform a PowerPAC reload or IISRESET after creating the HeaderDataIndex.xml file. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +

    Menu Classes for PAC Usage Statistics

    +

    Library administrators who analyze PAC usage statistics using a third-party analytics tool can gather data regarding usage of menus in the header. To enable the usage statistics, an individual class identifies each menu and sub-menu option in the headerdata.xml file.

    +

    Note: +
    The class is not for the following menus: More, Language, and Branches.

    +

    The class name format is as follows: menu-[menuID]-[submenuID]

    +

    Example:

    +

    + +

    +

    These classes also allow for CSS style customization of individual menu options and sub-options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a89f7d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Mobile PAC

    +

    Polaris Mobile PAC is the Web-based public access catalog that has been optimized for mobile devices, providing simplified access to most of the features available in Polaris PowerPAC. As with Polaris PowerPAC customization, you need some knowledge of HTML for some techniques; others require more advanced programming skills. Other PAC customization methods also apply to Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    • Polaris Administration settings control many aspects of Mobile PAC function and appearance. See Public Access Administration.
    • +
    • You can edit most page text and messages using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). See WebAdmin online Help for more information.
    • +
    • Innovative Interfaces offers custom services for libraries that want to customize Mobile PAC beyond Polaris Administration or Polaris Language Editor settings, but do not have the staff resources to do so. Contact a Customer Account Manager for more information.
    • +
    +

    Important: +
    To see the effects of any changes, you may need to update page caches. Restart the Internet Information Server (IIS) to clear the cache and load any pages that have been changed, or use the Reload feature in the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PAC_Themes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PAC_Themes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17d9ef87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PAC_Themes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing PAC Themes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing PAC Themes

    +

    Using page themes (skins), you can change the overall appearance of Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition quickly and easily, without extensive code editing. In Polaris Administration, you can assign themes at the system, library, or branch level. For more information about standard Polaris PowerPAC themes, see For more information about defining and assigning children’s themes,

    +

    With knowledge of HTML, you can create a custom theme, then make your custom theme available for assignment in Polaris Administration. You must place your custom themes in a special custom folder to protect them from being overwritten during a Polaris reinstallation or upgrade.

    +

    Note: +
    If you copy a theme, you must use a Polaris template for the new files to be defined properly.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Theme Structure

    +

    In general, a theme consists of a style sheet (.css) file and a collection of images. The style sheet controls aspects of general page appearance—such as fonts, links, and colors—and defines classes. The Themes\Shared folder contains the default images for all themes. Each individual theme has a single site.css file that is generated from SCSS files contained in the Themes\Shared\SCSS\ folder. When creating a custom theme, you will need to generate a site.css for your theme using the shared SCSS files (instructions below). See Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Important: +
    If your library uses Polaris Social (licensed integrated ChiliFresh Connections features): In the Polaris themes\shared folder, ChiliFresh Connections has its own style sheet (chilifresh.css). If your PowerPAC has a custom theme and you wish to override some of the default chilifresh.css file, copy the chilifresh.css file from the themes\shared folder to the custom theme folder and edit the custom version accordingly. The custom chilifresh.css page must contain all the CSS classes from the default version.

    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, the style sheet is located in each language-specific theme folder: Polaris/PowerPAC/Children/themes/language code/<theme name>.

    +

    Header Logo

    +

    For your header logo, you can use a .jpg file or a .gif file. The default header logo image is .gif file (header_logo.gif.) However, custom themes can use either header_logo.jpg or header_logo.gif. Note that header_logo.gif supports header logo images that have a transparent background.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Pages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Pages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d28140b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Pages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing Pages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Pages

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition are based on ASP.NET programming. All .aspx and .ascx files are directly editable, but you should back up your changes to preserve them from being overwritten when the application is updated and reinstalled. You should be familiar with and have coded ASP.NET in C#.

    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC, the files are located in Polaris/PowerPAC/library. See Polaris PowerPAC Pages Reference for a list of pages and how they are used.

    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, the files are located in Polaris/PowerPAC/children. See Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition Pages Reference for a list of pages and how they are used.

    +

    Important: +
    Back up your changes to preserve them from being overwritten when the application is reinstalled or upgraded.

    +

    Site Master Page

    +

    Beginning with Polaris 5.2, PowerPAC uses an ASP.NET master page called site.master which resides in the PowerPAC application root directory. All common <HEAD> elements from the individual *.ASPX PowerPAC pages are now in this shared master page. This shared master page ensures consistency in style and layout across pages, and prepares PowerPAC for future updates. You do not need to customize the <HEAD> element on individual pages.

    +

    Note: +
    You can include a custom version of site.master in the /custom directory. See Customizing Layouts.

    +

    CSS and JavaScript References

    +

    Beginning with Polaris 5.2, all references to external style sheet and static JavaScript files are located in user control files called /usercontrols/headassets.ascx and /usercontrols/footerassets.ascx. Alternate versions of these files are used by pages associated with PowerPAC Community features; they are called /usercontrols/headassetscommunity.ascx and /usercontrols/footerassetscommunity.ascxThe list of style sheets and JavaScript files can be edited in place.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Accessibility Tags

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC pages include tags to improve accessibility in the following ways:

    +
      +
    • ALT tags provide text equivalents for inline images.
    • +
    • “Skip navigation” links are included at the top of each PowerPAC page.
    • +
    • Table header <TH> tags distinguish column headers for data tables, such as those displayed on patron account pages.
    • +
    +

    Although these features are not generally visible when the pages are displayed, they improve the experience of patrons who use screen readers. If you customize PowerPAC pages, you will likely want to retain these features.

    +

    User-Defined Templates

    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC, you can use a template to construct your custom pages. Custom pages based on the template can reside in any PowerPAC folder, and the page directive (first line of the custom ASPX page) does not need to be updated whenever PowerPAC is upgraded.

    +

    To create a custom PowerPAC page from the template, copy /Custom/CustomPage-template.aspx to any file name with an *.aspx extension in any folder within PowerPAC, typically in the /Custom/ folder. Then add any custom HTML in the commented area of the page.

    +

    Note: +
    Beginning with Polaris 5.2, the CustomPage-template.aspx file uses the master page design. If you have created custom *ASPX files in previous version of Polaris, they should still work as is, but Polaris encourages you to switch to the master page design. See Customizing Layouts. When you upgrade to Polaris 5.5, update your custom pages to follow the Polaris 5.5 version of the template.

    +

    Note: +
    Certain pages in the library\userdef directory are intended for direct editing so that you can easily insert your library’s custom information. These include ud_events.ascx and ud_policies.ascx. You can add upcoming events and library policies to these pages just by inserting the appropriate text and formatting your text with basic HTML tags. Be sure your additions are responsive. Add text to the Events page Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Adding Web Parts to Custom Pages

    +

    If you create a custom page from the template, you may want to set the PageID value so that the appropriate web parts are displayed in the dashboard. For a list of PageID values, see Standard PAC Pages Reference.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PowerPAC_Help_Links.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PowerPAC_Help_Links.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8dbb90db --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_PowerPAC_Help_Links.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing PowerPAC Help Links + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing PowerPAC Help Links

    +

    In addition to the standard set of help pages supplied with PowerPAC, custom pages and links may be added and the existing list of default pages can be modified and rearranged.

    +

    Important: +
    After completing your changes, use the Reload tool in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to see your changes in PowerPAC.

    +

    The list of help page links is managed in the file HeaderData.xml, which resides in the top level of the PowerPAC web folder. Edits can be made directly to this file or a copy of the file can be placed in the PowerPAC Custom folder. If you create a copy in the custom folder, any changes you make to HeaderData.xml will not have to be reapplied whenever the Polaris system is upgraded.

    +

    Each help file link is a <SubTab> node under the <MainTab> identified as TabID 99. The illustration shows an example:

    +

    + +

    +

    Removing Help Links

    +

    To remove any Polaris-supplied help links, simply remove the <SubTab> node for that link from HeaderData.xml.

    +

    Rearranging the Order of Help Links

    +

    The <SubTab> nodes may be rearranged within the <MainTab> parent node. The values for <SubTabID> in each node do not need to be reassigned when reordering the nodes. The list of help links will display in the order that they are listed in the HeaderData.xml file.

    +

    Adding Help Links

    +

    To create additional help links, add a new <SubTab> node within the <MainTab> node (<TabID> of 99). The newly added node can be placed anywhere within the list of other <SubTab> nodes for <MainTab> 99.

    +

    The newly added node should contain the following:

    +
      +
    • ‘TabID’ of 99. (<TabID>99</TabID>)
    • +
    • A unique 'SubTabID' that is not currently being used. (<SubTabID>1000</SubTabID>)
    • +
    • 'Name' to identify the link. This will be used as the link's label if an <LS_Name> node is not defined. (<Name>Our Custom Help Link</Name>)
    • +
    • 'URL' of the link to the help file content. (<URL>custom/help/ourhelp.htm</URL>)
    • +
    • To create a multi-lingual label for the custom help link, add a custom string in Web Admin and include that string's mnemonic in an 'LS_Name' node. This is optional. (<LS_Name>CUSTOM_HELP_LINK_1</LS_Name>)
    • +
    • Include a 'SuppressCTX' node with a value of 'Y' to indicate that Polaris-specific URL data should not be included in the URL Link. (<SuppressCTX>Y</SuppressCTX>)
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc9d0baa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing Search By and Sort By Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Search By and Sort By Options

    +

    You can edit PowerPAC Search by and Sort by options as described below. If you choose to remove options, be sure to coordinate your default settings in the PAC profile Search settings defaults if appropriate. See Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    Search By Options

    +

    PowerPAC users can select a search access point in the Search by drop-down list. The values for the fields in the Search by drop-down lists are contained in a customizable XML configuration file. To edit the list of fields, copy /App_Data/SearchByOptions.xml and place your copy in /Custom/App_Data/SearchByOptions.xml.

    +

    You can delete nodes in the file, and you can change the order. Your custom file must contain at least one node. As this is a system-defined list of options, the addition of other search options is not supported.

    +

    Note: +
    Perform a PowerPAC reload or IISRESET after creating the custom version of this file.

    +

    You can edit and translate labels for Search by options using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). Search by string IDs begin with PACML_SEARCHBARS. For more information, see WebAdmin online help.

    +

    Sort By Options

    +

    When PowerPAC search results are returned, the user can select a Sort option for the results. The values for the fields in the Sort drop-down lists are contained in a customizable XML configuration file. To edit the list of fields, copy /App_Data/SortByOptions.xml and place your copy in /Custom/App_Data/SortByOptions.xml.

    +

    Since sort options are different for searches containing results from the local database only and searches that include at least one remote database, separate nodes control these options: <LocalOnly> and <Remote>.

    +

    You can delete nodes in the file, and you can change the order. Your custom file must contain at least one node. As this is a system-defined list of options, the addition of other sort options is not supported.

    +

    Note: +
    Perform a PowerPAC reload or IISRESET after creating the custom version of this file.

    +

    You can edit and translate labels for Sort options using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). Sort string IDs begin with PACML_SORT. For more information, see WebAdmin online help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58051f3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Customizing_Search_By_Sort_By_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + Customizing Mobile PAC Search By and Sort By Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Mobile PAC Search By and Sort By Options

    +

    You can edit Mobile PAC Search by and Sort by options as described below. If you choose to remove options, be sure to coordinate your default settings in the Mobile PAC profile Search settings defaults if appropriate. Specifying Mobile PAC Search Settings.

    +

    Search By Options

    +

    The list of options available in the Mobile PAC Search by drop-down list is defined in the file /App_Data/SearchByOptions.xml. To modify the list:

    +
      +
    1. Copy /App_Data/SearchByOptions.xml to /Custom/App_Data/SearchByOptions.xml.
    2. +
    3. Working in Custom/App_Data/SearchByOptions.xml, remove any of the <SearchByOption> XML nodes that you do not want to display in the drop-down list.
    4. +
    5. Perform a reload of the Mobile PAC Web site in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), or perform an IISRESET.
    6. +
    +

    Sort By Options

    +

    The list of options available in the Mobile PAC Sort by drop-down list is defined in the file /App_Data/SortByOptions.xml. To modify the list:

    +
      +
    1. Copy /App_Data/SortByOptions.xml to /Custom/App_Data/SortByOptions.xml.
    2. +
    3. Working in Custom/App_Data/SortByOptions.xml, remove any of the <SortByOption> XML nodes that you do not want to display in the drop-down list.
    4. +
    5. Perform a reload of the Mobile PAC Web site in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), or perform an IISRESET.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/External_Logon_PAC_Patron_Account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/External_Logon_PAC_Patron_Account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb614a43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/External_Logon_PAC_Patron_Account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + External Logon to PAC Patron Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    External Logon to PAC Patron Account

    +

    You can allow patrons to log on to the main patron account page in the PAC from an external page, bypassing the Polaris PowerPAC main page. The POST method requires a user name or barcode and the patron’s password. (If there is a problem with these entries, a PowerPAC error message is displayed and the patron is returned to the normal PowerPAC log-on screen.)

    +

    The external log-on uses the page logon_ext.aspx. The two form values supported are userid, which can be either the patron account barcode or user name, and password, which is the patron’s password. The following example HTML page shows how to include a logon feature on an external page:

    +

    <html>

    +

    <body>

    +

    <form method="post" action="http://mylibrary.com/polaris/logon_ext.aspx">

    +

    Barcode or Username:<br />

    +

    <input type="text" id="userid" name="userid"/><br />

    +

    Password:<br />

    +

    <input type="password" id="password" name="password"/><br />

    +

    <input type="submit" value="Log In" />

    +

    </form>

    +

    </body>

    +

    </html>

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Linking_to_INNReach_Central.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Linking_to_INNReach_Central.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e6e99a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Linking_to_INNReach_Central.htm @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + + Linking to the INN-Reach Central Catalog + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linking to the INN-Reach Central Catalog

    +

    If your library participates in an INN-Reach consortium, you can provide two types of links on PowerPAC pages to the INN-Reach central catalog:

    +

    Simple link to the INN-Reach central catalog web site - You can provide a simple link to the INN-Reach central catalog web site. For example, you may want to provide the link on the library’s PowerPAC portal page, in a PowerPAC dashboard, and/or on the “No Hits” search results page. The patron clicks the link and enters or re-enters the search term on the INN-Reach central catalog web site. See Customizing Pages.

    +

    Deep link to INN-Reach central catalog search - You can provide a custom link that allows the patron to search the INN-Reach central catalog without re-entering the search term. For example, if a patron searches for global warming in PowerPAC and doesn’t find anything suitable, the patron can click a link to search the INN-Reach catalog and go directly to the INN-Reach central catalog search results page for global warming. With this method, a JavaScript .js file extracts the search term from the URL of the patron’s brief results page and passes it in the referring URL to the INN-Reach catalog.

    +

    Note: +
    The deep link method described here works only on the PowerPAC brief search results page because the PAC URL for this page contains the search term (term=). If the patron has navigated to the full display for a title in the search results, the URL no longer contains the search term; therefore, the INN-Reach link goes to the INN-Reach catalog’s home page.

    +

    For details about this method, see:

    + +

    As with other Polaris PAC customizations, you need some knowledge of HTML and other techniques to do this procedure. You must implement the script as explained here. Polaris Support can provide basic troubleshooting if you run into problems, but cannot implement it for you. If your customizations break the code, Polaris Support can help you revert back to the original.

    +

    Create deep links to the INN-Reach central catalog

    +

    Use the C:\Program Files\Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC\custom folder for your customizations to prevent them from being overwritten at upgrade. If you have a custom theme, you can create and name a subfolder for your custom theme, and then create appropriate subfolders within that folder. For details, see PowerPAC Directory Structure.

    +

    Step 1: Add a JavaScript file to your PowerPAC server

    +
      +
    1. Create a text file and name it inn-reach-pac-link.js. The script format differs depending on the INN-Reach central catalog discovery platform:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Change the second line of the script so that it represents the URL of your INN-Reach central catalog.
    2. +
    3. Place the script file in your PowerPAC custom folder or subfolder.
    4. +
    +

    Step 2: Modify your custom PowerPAC theme

    +

    Working in your custom site-{theme}.scss file, add the following so that your INN-Reach links look and behave like traditional hyperlinks.

    +

    .irLink {

    +

    cursor:pointer;

    +

    cursor:hand;

    +

    text-decoration: none;

    +

    color: navy;

    +

    }

    +

    .irLink:hover {

    +

    text-decoration: underline;

    +

    color: red;

    +

    }

    +

    Note: +
    You must assign a unique class (irLink) and in your CSS provide some rules that make your links look and behave like hyperlinks. The example above assumes your hyperlinks work like the PowerPAC default links. If you customize the default styles for how links look and work, be sure the rules for the irLink class mimic your styles for conventionally linked items.

    +

    Step 3: Create (if necessary) and modify your custom PowerPAC site.master

    +
      +
    1. Create a custom site.master file in your custom theme folder. See Customizing Layouts.
    2. +
    3. Open the custom site.master file and locate the </body> tag near the bottom.
    4. +
    5. Open a line before the closing body tag and provide the link to your JavaScript file in this format:
    6. +
    +

    <script type="text/javascript" src="{FILE PATH}"></script> +

    +

    where FILE PATH is the path and filename of your JavaScript file; for example:

    +

    //testdriveprod.polarislibrary.com/polaris/custom/testdrive/scripts/inn-reach-pac-link.js +

    +

    The path for your site depends on how you have structured the custom subfolders and your servername, if you do not use a relative path.

    +

    Step 4: Create the links to the INN-Reach central catalog

    +

    The links will look and work like normal web hyperlinks, but the HTML is different. The JavaScript method of linking to the INN-Reach central catalog invokes the script every time the user clicks on the link. The script looks for search terms in the PowerPAC URL and if they exist, passes them on to the INN-Reach catalog. (The link is interactive and dynamic rather than static.)

    +

    For example, a conventional HTML link that says Click here to search Prospector looks like this:

    +

    <a href=”http://iii.com” target=”_blank”>Click here to search Prospector</a> +

    +

    The link using the JavaScript looks like this:

    +

    <span class=”irLink” onclick=”gotoIRCat();”>Click here to search Prospector</span> +

    +

    Step 5: Place your link on PowerPAC pages

    +

    You can place the link anywhere in PowerPAC that allows you to place HTML. For example:

    +

    Important: +
    If the PowerPAC URL contains a search term from the patron's search results page, the link will launch a search in the INN-Reach central catalog. If no search term is present in the URL, the link takes the patron to the INN-Reach central catalog home page.

    +
      +
    • On the dashboard - Select Free Text (not URL) in the PowerPAC profile Dashboards: Web part construction and enter your link. See Create a custom web part.
    • +
    • On the “No Titles Found” page - Use the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to edit the No Titles Found page to include your link. The string ID is PACML_INSTRUCTIONS_XSL_1603. See Polaris WebAdmin online help for details.
    • +
    • In the banner/menu area - Modify the custom site.master file. See Customizing Layouts.
    • +
    +

    Sample JavaScript for INN-Reach Central Catalog, Encore Discovery Platform

    +

    If you are linking to an INN-Reach central catalog with an Encore discovery platform, the following is an example of the entire contents of your inn-reach-pac-link.js file (not including the table):

    +

    function gotoIRCat() {

    +

    var irURL = '//encorecalstate.iii.com/iii/encore';

    +

    function getParameterByName(name) {

    +

    name = name.replace(/[\[\]]/g, "\\$&");

    +

    var regex = new RegExp("[?&]" + name + "(=([^&#]*)|&|#|$)"), results = regex.exec(window.location.href);

    +

    if (!results) return '';

    +

    if (!results[2]) return '';

    +

    return decodeURIComponent(results[2].replace(/\+/g, " "));

    +

    }

    +

    var searchTerm=getParameterByName("term");

    +

    if ((getParameterByName("by") != "CN") && (searchTerm != '')) {

    +

    irURL += '/search/C__S' + getParameterByName("term") + '__Orightresult';

    +

    }

    +

    window.open(irURL);

    +

    }

    +

    Sample JavaScript for INN-Reach Central Catalog, WebPAC Discovery Platform

    +

    If you are linking to an INN-Reach central catalog with a WebPAC discovery platform, the following is an example of the entire contents of your inn-reach-pac-link.js file (not including the table):

    +

    function gotoIRCat() {

    +

    var irURL = '//albert.rit.edu';

    +

    function getParameterByName(name) {

    +

    name = name.replace(/[\[\]]/g, "\\$&");

    +

    var regex = new RegExp("[?&]" + name + "(=([^&#]*)|&|#|$)"), results = regex.exec(window.location.href);

    +

    if (!results) return '';

    +

    if (!results[2]) return '';

    +

    return decodeURIComponent(results[2].replace(/\+/g, " "));

    +

    }

    +

    var searchTerm=getParameterByName("term");

    +

    if ((getParameterByName("by") != "CN") && (searchTerm != '')) {

    +

    irURL += '/search/X?SEARCH=' + getParameterByName("term") ;

    +

    }

    +

    window.open(irURL);

    +

    }

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PAC_Customization.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PAC_Customization.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a175ffe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PAC_Customization.htm @@ -0,0 +1,244 @@ + + + + + + + + PAC Customization + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Customization

    +

    You can customize Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and Mobile PAC at the program level, beyond the features offered through Polaris Administration; for example, by creating custom themes, layouts or entire pages. You need some knowledge of HTML for some techniques; others require more advanced programming skills.

    +

    Before you begin, keep in mind that you can customize many aspects of Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and Mobile PAC without any programming knowledge. Polaris Administration settings control many aspects of PAC function and appearance, and because these settings are stored in the database, they are retained at upgrade.

    +

    Also, you can edit most page text and messages using Polaris Language Editor (Web Admin Tool). See the Web Admin Tool online Help for more information.

    +

    Finally, Innovative Interfaces offers several service-level options for libraries that want to customize Polaris PowerPAC beyond Polaris Administration or Polaris Language Editor settings, but do not have the staff resources to do so. Contact a Customer Account Manager for more information.

    +
    Important: +
    +
    To see the effects of any changes, you may need to update page caches. Restart the Internet Information Server (IIS) to clear the cache and load any pages that have been changed, or use the Reload feature in the Polaris Language Editor (Web Admin Tool). This reloads Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition at the same time. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset. You may also need to close and re-open browsers.
    +

    The following table shows features available for customization, the skills necessary to perform customization, and whether your changes persist through upgrade.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    FeatureSkills/
    Knowledge Required
    5.25.5 & LaterPersists
    Through Upgrade
    Notes
    Innovative-designed standard themes (5)Polaris
    System
    Administration
    XXYes 
    Dashboard left or rightPolaris
    System
    Administration
    XXYes 
    Custom header logoPolaris
    System
    Administration
    XXYes 
    Branch name display and alignmentPolaris
    System
    Administration
    XXYes 
    Custom return link for header logoPolaris
    System
    Administration
    XXYes 
    Header background and text colorPolaris
    System
    Administration
    XXYes 
    Overall color theme, font family and sizes, spacing, etc.SCSS, CSSXXSee note.See Customizing Layouts Typically changes and overrides to the SCSS files can be set once, but it is advisable to review those changes when upgrading.
    Custom image files for format icons, etc.PowerPAC file structureXXSomeBack up custom images before upgrade to be sure.
    Custom pages from a provided custom page templateHTMLXXYesPolaris 5.5: Custom pages from the provided template must use the Polaris 5.5 template moving forward.
    Custom menu categories and optionsXMLXXYesFormat of
    HeaderData.xml for Polaris 5.5 has not changed.
    URL deep links into the catalog for searches and titlesN/AXXYesURL format and structures for PowerPAC 5.5 have not changed.
    Custom display strings defined in WebAdminPolaris
    WebAdmin (Language Editor)
    XXYes 
    XSLT template files for headers and footersXML, XSLT, HTMLX See note.Not used in 5.5. See Customizing Layouts
    Master Site Page (site.master) modifications of headers, dashboards, and footers HTML, C#, .NET XSee note.See Customizing Layouts Edits to PowerPAC's site.master page in general can be used with minor edits in future versions, but Innovative reserves the right to modify the default site.master page.
    Edit ASPX and ASCX filesHTML, C#, .NETXXSee note. See Customizing Pages Innovative reserves the right to change the content area of each PowerPAC page between versions.
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PowerPAC_Directory_Structure.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PowerPAC_Directory_Structure.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6bbfefc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/PowerPAC_Directory_Structure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,270 @@ + + + + + + + + PowerPAC Directory Structure + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PowerPAC Directory Structure

    +

    The following table summarizes the Polaris PowerPAC directory structure and contents. The default root folder on your Polaris PowerPAC server is C:\Program Files\Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC.

    +

    Note: +
    For a list of specific pages and their functions, see Standard PAC Pages Reference.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    FolderContentsCustomization Notes
    addons +Library Elf files +Do not alter
    admin +PowerPAC administration utilitiesDo not alter
    admin\imagesImages used in PowerPAC administration utilitiesDo not alter
    binDLL files for PowerPAC, business objects, and search engineDo not alter
    ChildrenRoot directory for Children's PAC files
    Children\helpChildren's PAC help filesCustomizable (HTML); back up to protect from overwriting at upgrade
    Children\themesImages and CSS style sheets for Children’s PAC themesCustomizable. See Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition
    Children\themes\10331033 is the language ID for English. Theme directories contained in this folder include the default themes antique, ocean, and treasure.Customizable. See Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition
    Children\usercontrolsSource code for components of Children’s PAC, including search results, availability, and full title display.Customizable. See Customizing Pages
    configConfiguration files for Polaris Phone Sttendant (inbound telephony) + See Setting Up Inbound Telephony +
    customRoot folder for user-developed custom pages.Custom files stored in this folder are not overwritten at upgrade.
    custom\App_DataSee Customizing Search By and Sort By Options
    custom\themesSee Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC
    dashboardsObsoleteN/A
    HeaderData.xmlIncludes definitions for section and menu options in the PowerPAC header.Customizable; back up to protect from overwriting at upgrade. See Customizing Layouts
    helpPowerPAC help filesCustomizable. See Customizing PowerPAC Help Links
    libraryPages used in the Library Info section of PowerPAC, including events and policiesCustomizable; not overwritten at upgrade.
    library\userdefTemplate pages for user-defined Library Info pagesCustomizable; custom files stored here are not overwritten at upgrade.
    patronaccountPages and web controls used in the Patron Account section of PowerPACCustomizable at your own risk; back up to protect from overwriting at upgrade.
    paymentsFields used in e-commerceDo not alter
    rssScript files for rss feedsYou can add custom files. Custom files not overwritten at upgrade.
    scriptsJavaScript filesDo not alter
    searchPages for the search section of PowerPAC
    search\componentsComponents of search results page
    search\miscE-sources and ILL pagesDo not alter
    search\usercontrolsWeb controls for search pages. Includes search tool bars, search results lists, and others.Customizable; not overwritten at upgrade.
    services Do not alter
    themesContains directories for each of the five PowerPAC themes (Ocean, Mint, Black & Gold, Gray, Pomegranate) as well as themes/shared (see below)You can create your own custom theme. See Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC
    themes\shared +

    Contains default styles and images shared by all themes:

    +

    +\communityformats - Format icons for Community Information organizations, events, etc.

    +

    +\fancybox - Images and CSS styling used in pop-up light boxes +

    +

    \formats - Bibliographic format icons (small) used on search results pages

    +

    +\largeformats - Large bibliographic format icons used in content carousels when there is no cover image available for a given title

    +

    +\maps - Icon used for pins on the Google “Map It!” feature

    +

    +\ratings - Starred ratings images used in content carousels

    +

    \scss - Shared SCSS files used to generate theme site .css files

    +

    \tabs - Images and CSS styling for the forms using in editing Community Information data in Patron Account

    +
    Override shared values in your custom theme folder. See Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC
    themes\<theme>Images and style sheets for the specific theme that differ from the styles and images specified in themes\shared (see above)See Creating a Custom Theme for Polaris PowerPAC
    usercontrolsGeneric Web controls used by most pages, including page headers, footers, and dashboards.Customizable; back up to protect from overwriting at upgrade. See Customizing Pages
    XslContains XSLT transform files
    Xsl\SyndeticsXSLT transform files for Syndetics contentDo not alter
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Protecting_Mobile_PAC_Changes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Protecting_Mobile_PAC_Changes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ee112e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PAC Customization/PACCustom/Protecting_Mobile_PAC_Changes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + Protecting Mobile PAC Changes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Protecting Mobile PAC Changes

    +

    Mobile PAC server software includes a Custom folder where you can preserve most customizations from being overwritten at upgrade. You should back up the Custom folder as a precaution, but you will not have to recreate your changes for each upgrade.

    +

    In general, the folder structure in the Custom folder mirrors the Mobile PAC folder structure. The Mobile PAC application checks for the existence of specific files in the Custom folder to be used as overrides for the default versions of those files. The illustration shows the Custom folder structure as delivered with Mobile PAC.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc48456b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add a loan period + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a loan period

    +

    To add a loan period in the Loan Periods policy table:

    +

    Note:
    You must set up the Loan Period Codes policy table (see Defining Loan Period Codes) and Patron Code policy table (see Defining Patron Codes) before you do this procedure. Default loan period values are set with the Patron Services parameter Fine and Loan period defaults, and the default value is used when you add a new loan period code until you change it.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Loan Periods. The Loan Periods table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +

    + LoanPeriodsTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click to display the Insert Loan Periods dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dLonPerodDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch for which you are assigning the loan period in the Organization list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Loan Periods policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the patron code for the loan period in the Patron Code box.
    2. +
    3. Select an entry in the Loan Period Code box to associate with the patron code shown in the Patron Code box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The options available in the Load Period Code box depend on the organization you selected. See Defining Loan Period Codes.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following loan duration units in the Time Unit box:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Days +
    • +
    • Hours +
    • +
    • Minutes +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Type the number of time units allowed for this loan period in the Units box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To set up a non-circulating loan period code, type 0 in the Units box.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK in the dialog box. The Loan Periods policy table appears with the new loan period entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon00490.gif. You can change the loan period code and duration in an entry; the assigned library and patron code cannot be changed in an existing loan period.
    • +
    • Set recurring or specific due dates by patron code only - See Setting End-of-Term Due Dates.
    • +
    • Undefined loan period - You can set a default value to use at check-out when a specific patron code/loan period code combination does not exist in the Loan Periods table. See Undefined and Standard Loan Periods.
    • +
    • Lending library schedule - Due date calculation takes into account the closed dates, closed days, and hours of operation for the lending library. See Closed Dates and Days.
    • +
    • Hourly loans - The Patron Services parameter Overnight loan period affects the date and time due for hourly loan items. See Hourly Loans.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period_code.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period_code.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4715c6ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Add_a_loan_period_code.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add a loan period code + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a loan period code

    +

    To add a loan period code to the Loan Period Codes policy table:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Loan Period Codes. The Loan Period Codes table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + LoanPeriodCodes.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Loan Period Codes dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dLonPerodCodDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the name describing the loan period in the Description box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Loan period codes can be numbers, abbreviations, or full descriptions.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Loan Period Codes policy table appears with the new loan period name. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved. The new loan period code appears in the policy table for every organization in the system.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select an entry, click ModIcon.gif, and change the description. You should limit your changes to correcting spelling or using a different choice of words for the same loan period code.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Any changes to an existing loan period code are immediately applied to all records using the original code.

    +
      +
    • Set up loan period durations - See Defining Loan Period Durations. Default loan period durations are set with the Patron Services parameter Fine and Loan period defaults.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Calculating_Due_Dates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Calculating_Due_Dates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae941179 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Calculating_Due_Dates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating Due Dates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Calculating Due Dates

    +

    When a patron checks out an item, the due date is calculated based on the patron code and item loan period relationship established by the governing library for the transaction (by default the item’s assigned branch), plus the closed dates and hours of operation of the lending library. The patron code is stored in the patron record, while the loan period code is stored in the item record. The Loan Periods policy table associates the patron code and loan period code to determine the loan period for an item assigned to a particular branch.

    +

    All daily and weekly loans are due at 11:59 P.M. on the due date. For information on items with a loan period set in hours or minutes, see Hourly Loans.

    +

    Note:
    For daily and weekly loans, overdue fine calculation does not begin until the end of the day. For hourly loans, fines are calculated according to the exact time due. See Calculating Overdue Fines.

    +

    Undefined and Standard Loan Periods

    +

    If a relationship between the patron code and loan period code cannot be found in the Loan Periods policy table, Polaris uses the setting in the Patron Services parameter Undefined loan period, which is set at the system level. The default value is 14 days. This value is also used to automatically add an entry to the table if a new branch or patron code is added.

    +

    Note:
    If a loan period cannot be found in any table or parameter, a message at check-out indicates that the loan period cannot be calculated. In this case, circulation staff can allow the system to use the undefined loan period setting, or they can set the item’s loan period manually, by opening the Special Loan dialog box from the Check Out workform.

    +

    For offline circulation, the system always uses the workstation branch’s setting for the Patron Services parameter Standard loan period to calculate the due date. This is because there is no access to the database during offline circulation. However, the Loaning Branch recorded in the transaction and in the item record is the logged-on user’s branch. This allows libraries to gather statistics for different bookmobile stops based on user log-on, while maintaining a consistent loan period for the bookmobile (the workstation branch).

    +

    Closed Dates and Days

    +

    The lending library’s closed dates and closed days are used in the due date calculation. If the due date is defined as closed in the Dates Closed policy table (for example, January 1), the due date moves to the next open date. Identifying Dates Closed If the Patron Services parameter Hours of Operation designates the day of the week as a closed day for the branch (for example, Sunday), the due date moves to the next open day.

    +

    Hourly Loans

    +

    For hourly loan due dates and times, Polaris checks these additional Patron Services parameters for the lending library: Hours of operation (for hours and closed days) and Overnight loan period. If the item is due after the lending library closes, one of the following events occurs:

    +
      +
    • If the Overnight loan period parameter is set to permit automatic overnight loans, the due date is set to the next day the library is open. The due time is set to the library’s opening time, plus any additional time specified by the library.
    • +
    • If the Overnight loan period parameter is set to not permit automatic overnight loans, one of the following events occurs:
    • +
    • If the loan period is less than 24 hours, the transaction is blocked. If you override the block, the due date is set to the next day the library is open, and the due time is set to the library’s opening time, plus any additional time specified by the library. If you do not override the block, the item is due at the lending library’s closing time on the current day.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    An item is checked out on Thursday at 4:00 P.M. for a six-hour loan period. The lending library closes at 8:00 P.M. and opens on Friday at 10:00 A.M. If automatic overnight loans are permitted plus two additional hours, the item is due on Friday at 12:00 noon. If automatic overnight loans are not permitted, the transaction is blocked. If you override the block, the item is due on Friday at 12:00 noon. If you do not override the block, the item is due when the library closes on Thursday at 8:00 P.M.

    +
      +
    • If the loan period is 24 hours or more, the transaction is not blocked because the overnight loan setting is irrelevant.
    • +
    +

    You can set the Overnight loan period parameter at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    Setting Up Non-Circulating Items

    +

    You can designate certain items as non-circulating in two ways:

    +
      +
    • To make a specific item non-circulating for all patrons, select the Non-circulating check box on the Item Record workform - Circulation view. An advantage of this method is that patrons can see that an item is non-circulating in their PAC search results. You can set a special PAC description for these items. See View circulation status names and edit descriptions.
    • +
    • To make some items non-circulating for certain patron codes only, create a non-circulating loan period code. See Add a loan period code. Then assign the loan period code to the appropriate patron codes, and specify a Units value of 0 for each restricted patron code. See Add a loan period.
    • +
    +

    When a patron attempts to check out a non-circulating item, a block appears. If the circulation staff member overrides the block, and the item itself is non-circulating, Polaris assigns a loan period according to the loan period code in the item record. If the circulation staff member overrides the block, and the item is non-circulating for specified patron codes, Polaris assigns a loan period of one time unit as defined in the Loan Periods table.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6214a89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Defining Loan Period Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Loan Period Codes

    +

    The Loan Period Codes policy table sets the loan period codes for an organization. These codes are the names assigned to the various loan periods established by each organization. They are used in combination with patron codes to calculate due dates and fine amounts. The loan period codes are displayed as selections in the Loan Periods policy table, Fines policy table, and Loan period code box on the Item Record workform.

    +

    The Loan Period Codes policy table can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. Loan period codes can be added from the system, library, and branch levels, but they are then available to all organizations. You cannot delete loan period code entries in Polaris Administration, but the system administrator can change the Loan Period Codes table using the Query Analyzer in SQL Server.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify loan period codes table: Allow.

    +

    See: Add a loan period code.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Durations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Durations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f1b4191 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Period_Durations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Defining Loan Period Durations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Loan Period Durations

    +

    A loan period specifies how long an item can be checked out, based on the loan period code assigned to the item and the patron code of the person checking out the item. You can specify a different time period for each combination of loan period code and patron code. You can have only one loan period for a specific loan period code/patron code combination in each branch.

    +

    Loan periods are defined by entries in the Loan Periods policy table, which can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. Loan periods can be set from the system, library, and branch levels. However, entries are assigned to specific branches, and you specify loan periods for each branch. Your setting for governing library determines which branch’s settings are used in calculating the loan period. The default is the item’s assigned branch.

    +

    When the table is opened at the system level, you can view, add, or change entries for any branch. At the library level, you can view, add, or change entries for the branches associated with the library. At the branch level, you can view, add, or change entries for the selected branch. You cannot delete loan period entries in Polaris Administration. The system administrator can change the Loan Periods table using the Query Analyzer in SQL Server.

    +

    Note:
    The following System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify loan periods table: Allow.

    +

    See: Add a loan period

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Periods.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Periods.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..055dd160 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Defining_Loan_Periods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Loan Periods + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Loan Periods

    +

    Due date calculation is based on settings in both the patron record and item record, as well as the policies and schedule of the lending library. Polaris Administration tables define patron codes and item loan period codes, and determine the relationships between them. At check-out, the system links the item and patron records and determines which settings to use when calculating the due date.

    +

    Patron codes and item loan period codes are shared by all libraries to facilitate lending and receiving items anywhere in the system. However, each branch in the system can establish different policies concerning loan durations for specific patron and item code combinations.

    +

    Important:
    You set which branch’s policies are used in due date calculation with the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation. See: Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    The settings used to calculate due dates are established when Polaris is first installed, but you can change them when a library or branch is added to the system, or when lending policies change. After you set up the criteria that affect due dates, you can set up fines for overdue items. See Defining Fines and Fees.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Set_an_end-of-term_due_date.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Set_an_end-of-term_due_date.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe68f698 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Set_an_end-of-term_due_date.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set an End-of-Term Due Date + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set an End-of-Term Due Date

    +

    To set an end-of-term due date:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Although you can set EOT dates at any organizational level, settings made at higher levels do not display at the branch level but may nevertheless override branch-level settings. To avoid this issue, set all EOT dates at the branch level, especially if different organizations need different dates.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the parameter End-of-term due date options to display the End-of-Term Due Date Options dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click New. The End-of-Term Due Date dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options to set the EOT date:
      • To set one numeric date, click Specific date, and select the date from the calendar in the Specific date box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Example:
    Friday, December 16, 2011

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To set the date by day of the month, click The and select a value in each of the three boxes (order, day, and month).
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Example:
    The third Friday of December

    +
    +
      +
    1. If you want the date to be a recurring date, select the Recurring date check box, and choose one of the following options:
      • To stop the EOT date from functioning after a specific number of occurrences, click End after and type the number in the occurrences box.
      • To stop the EOT date from functioning after a specific year, click End after year and type the year in the box.
      • To keep the EOT date functioning indefinitely, click Never end.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The End-of-Term Due Date Options dialog box appears. The EOT date is listed in the left panel of the dialog box.
    2. +
    3. To prevent the EOT date from applying to specific patron codes, select the EOT date and do one of the following:
      • To exclude certain patron codes from all EOT dates, in the Patron codes to exclude list, select the check box next to each patron code for which EOT dates should not apply.
      • To exclude certain patron codes from the selected EOT date only, select the Separate exclusions check box, then select the check box next to each patron code to exclude.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 3-7 for each EOT date you want to create.
    2. +
    3. Click Save.
    4. +
    +

    The Administration Explorer appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Edit an end-of-term due date - On the End-of-Term Due Date Options dialog box, select an EOT date in the list, and select one of the following options:
    • +
    • To change the date and recurrence information, click Edit. The End-of-Term Due Date dialog box appears. Make any changes, and click OK.
    • +
    • To change the patron codes excluded from the selected EOT date, select the Separate exclusions check box, and select or clear the check boxes next to the patron codes.
    • +
    • To change the patron codes excluded from all EOT dates, clear the Separate exclusions check box, and select or clear the check boxes next to the patron codes.
    • +
    • Delete an end-of-term due date - On the End-of-Term Due Date Options dialog box, select the EOT date in the list, and click Delete. The EOT date is cleared from the list.
    • +
    • Display a message at circulation - When a normal due date is shortened due to an End-of-Term date setting, you can set Polaris to display a message. Set the Patron Services parameter Due date truncated: Prompt to Yes at the system, library, or branch level.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Setting_End-of-Term_Due_Dates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Setting_End-of-Term_Due_Dates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7694bab3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPloans/Setting_End-of-Term_Due_Dates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting End-of-Term Due Dates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting End-of-Term Due Dates

    +

    To prevent items from circulating after a specific or recurring date, regardless of the item’s loan period, your library can set an end-of-term (EOT) due date. Academic libraries and public libraries that work with schools may use this feature to make sure that no items are due after the last day of a term. Libraries may also use an EOT date to gather all circulating material by a certain date for inventory or another special purpose. You can include or exempt specific patron codes from a selected EOT date.

    +

    The staff client and Leap check system administration for end-of-term due date settings.

    +

    End-of-term dates affect circulation transactions in the following ways:

    +
      +
    • If you attempt to check out or renew an item with a due date after the next EOT date, the item is assigned the EOT date. However, if a patron with an exempted patron code (such as a faculty member) is checking out the item, the due date can be after the EOT date.
    • +
    • To override an EOT date for an item, you can assign a special loan period at check-out or renewal. Assign a special loan period.
    • +
    • By default, Polaris uses the EOT date of the item’s assigned branch, not the EOT of the check-out branch. You can set a different governing library for the calculation. See Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC.
    • +
    +

    You set EOT dates with the Patron Services parameter End-of-term due date options, which is available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    See: Set an End-of-Term Due Date

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Block_and_Allow_Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Block_and_Allow_Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3c7428c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Block_and_Allow_Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + Block and Allow Settings for Associated Patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Block and Allow Settings for Associated Patrons

    +

    These settings are displayed in the Associations view of the Patron Status workform. Defaults for associated patrons are defined in Patron Services Administration. See: Set defaults for associated patron settings.

    +

    Note: +
    Your library may also set the PAC profile Patron access options so that patrons can view settings for associated patrons in their PAC accounts, see Set patron associations display in PAC.

    +

    Block Me Setting for Associated Patrons

    +

    When you create a new association for a patron (the parent or primary record), you can choose to block the parent or primary record at checkout and renewal when an associated secondary or child record is blocked at checkout.

    +
      +
    • One primary record may be linked to multiple secondary records. If any of the secondary records are blocked, the primary record is blocked.
    • +
    • One secondary record may be linked to multiple primary records. If the secondary record is blocked, all the linked primary records are blocked.
    • +
    • Two primary records (Mom and Dad) may be linked to each other. If either is blocked, the other is blocked. Furthermore, a son may be linked to both Mom and Dad. Since all records are directly linked, if one is blocked, all will be blocked.
    • +
    • Block checking is only one level deep. For example, instructor A and instructor C are both linked to student B. If B is blocked, A and C will both be blocked, because they each are one link away from B. But A will not be blocked if C is blocked because A is not directly linked to C.
    • +
    +

    Allow Me Setting for Associated Patrons

    +
      +
    • When you add an associated patron to a patron record and check the Allow me to pick up holds for these patrons check box, the primary patron whose record is displayed in the Patron Status workform can pick up held items for the associated patron. For primary patrons who are designated as allowed to pick up held items for other associated patrons, the following circulation processing occurs:
    • +
    • +

      The primary patron can use his or her own library card to check out the items held for other associated patrons.

      +
        +
      • When the primary patron checks out an item for an associated patron, the item is checked out to the current (primary) patron, not the associated patron for whom the hold was placed.
      • +
      • For offline checkouts, when the primary patron checks out an item for an associated patron, the following message is included in the offline processing report: This item satisfies a hold request for associated patron [barcode, last name, first name, middle initial].
      • +
      • When the primary patron checks out an item for an associated patron using Polaris ExpressCheck (or a self-check unit that communicates via SIP or NCIP), the item is checked out to the primary patron without an additional message.
      • +
      • The hold request is deleted from the associated patron’s account (except in the case where the request status Out to patron is enabled in Polaris Administration).
      • +
      • The item history shows that the item was checked out to the current patron who is authorized to pick up holds for the associated patron.
      • +
      • The item is added to the primary patron’s list of checked out items.
      • +
      • All renewals, notices, overdues etc. are linked to the patron who checked out the item for the associated patron.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Staff Client Check-Out and Renewal Processing

    +
      +
    • Associated patron blocking applies to check out from the Check Out workform, renewal from the Check Out workform, and renewal from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. If associated patron blocking has been enabled and at least one patron record associated with the transacting patron is blocked, a dialog box is displayed showing the linked patrons and the type of block. The same conditions that would block the associated record directly during checkout will block the primary patron record checkout. The block dialog box lists each block on a separate line. Each entry in the Associated Patrons list is a link to the associated patron’s record.
    • +
    • If one or more associated patrons are blocked for any reason that requires an override, both the permission to override the specific block and the permission Override associated patron block: Allow are required to continue check out. Transaction 9001 logs supervisor overrides for the Override associated patron block permission override
    • +
    +

    Adding and Editing Associations

    +

    +

    Staff members use the Patron Status workform - Associations view to add or remove associations. When the staff member adds an association to a patron record, the Add Association dialog box includes the option Block me if these patron records are blocked. The open patron record is the primary record. When Block me is checked, it will be blocked when the newly associated record is blocked. The Patron Status workform - Associations view displays the list of associated patrons. A column indicates a blocking relationship. The Patron Status workform also offers a Tools menu option, Check Associated Patron Blocks. Staff can select this option to display a list of the blocks on the associated patrons’ records.

    +

    +
      +
    • Merging Patron Records - The “winning” patron record retains any associated patron links it already has, but the winning record is not affected by any links in the losing record.
    • +
    • Deleting Patron Records - When a patron record with associations is deleted, the link is removed from the associated records. A warning message displays with a breakable link, but there is no additional message if the linked patrons are blocked.
    • +
    +

    Offline Checkout

    +

    If a blocked associated patron is detected when offline check-out transactions are uploaded, a message is written to the upload log file. The message includes the associated patron name and barcode, and the block text. If the patron is blocked for more than one reason, each block is listed; if more than one patron is blocked, each is listed in a separate message.

    +

    PAC and Polaris ExpressCheck Check-out and Renewal

    +
      +
    • From PAC, the primary (parent) record is stopped from renewal if an associated patron record has exceeded the 2nd level fine amount as determined by the governing library for patron blocks, or if the associated patron record has exceeded the maximum overdue item limit as determined by the governing library for patron blocks.
    • +
    • In Polaris ExpressCheck, the primary (parent) record is also stopped from checking out and renewal if an associated patron record has exceeded the 2nd level fine amount as determined by the governing library for patron blocks, or if the associated patron record has exceeded the maximum overdue item limit as determined by the governing library for patron blocks. A message is displayed, which can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). For more information, see WebAdmin online help. The WebAdmin string IDs are as follows:
      • Default header text - Polaris ExpressCheck - Associated Patron Blocks
        String ID EC_TEXT_COURTESY_ASSOCIATED_ACCTBLOCKED_TITLE
      • Default message text - One or more records linked to your library registration is blocked. Click Show Details to see more information.
        String ID EC_TEXT_COURTESY_ASSOCIATED_ACCTBLOCKED_MSG
    • +
    +

    SIP Self-Check

    +

    A setting in the SelfCheck Unit parameter Patron blocks controls whether a patron is blocked at checkout when an associated patron has exceeded the 2nd level fine amount, or has exceeded the maximum overdue item limit as determined by the governing library for patron blocks. The parameter is available at the system, library, or branch level, and is set to No (do not block) by default. The system uses the setting of the workstation’s branch. See Set SIP self-check parameters.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Charging_for_Patron_Registration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Charging_for_Patron_Registration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..813a831d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Charging_for_Patron_Registration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Charging for Patron Registration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Charging for Patron Registration

    +

    If your library wants to charge registration fees to certain types of patrons, such as temporary, seasonal, or non-resident users, you can set up registration fees by patron code. The fee is applied automatically when patrons with the specified patron code register or renew their registrations, and their patron accounts are blocked until the fee is paid. Registration fees are applied according to the settings of the registration branch.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Staff Client Workflow

    +

    If a fee has been defined for the patron code, a Registration Fee dialog box appears when a staff member selects Save in the new patron record. The dialog box displays the amount of the fee and the following options:

    +
      +
    • Pay - The staff member must have the permission Fines: Pay fines at circ to accept payment for the registration fee. The Pay dialog box opens and displays all current payment methods, including credit card payments if the organization has implemented these. Partial payments are possible. If a fee is partially paid, a block is placed on the patron account (see Patron Block for Registration Fee). If the option to print a receipt was selected, a receipt prints.
    • +
    • Waive - The staff member must have the permission Fines: Waive fines at circ. A waive transaction is written to the patron account, and a receipt prints if the receipt option was selected.
    • +
    • Charge - The charge is written to the patron account. The charge reason is listed as Registration fee.
    • +
    • Print Receipt - This option is selected by default. Receipts are printed according to the printer and driver set up for the Check Out workform printer. It is not necessary to check any specific receipt type on the Check-out options dialog box, but the printer and driver must be defined. The information printed on the receipt is that selected for fine receipts with the Patron Services parameter Fine receipt options.
    • +
    +

    Patron Block for Registration Fee

    +

    If the fee is charged to the patron account or only partially paid, a system block (Patron registration fee) is placed on the patron account. The block is cleared when the total charge amount is paid. As with other blocks, clicking on the block text from the Patron Blocks dialog box opens the Patron Account view. The permission Override circ blocks is required to override the block at check-out.

    +

    Expired Registration

    +

    If the expiration date in the patron record is reset (the registration is renewed), and the patron code requires a registration fee, the system displays the Registration fee dialog box as for a new registration. If the patron code is changed to non-chargeable at renewal, the fee dialog box is not displayed.

    +

    Note: +
    If a new patron record is saved with a chargeable patron code and then changed to a non-chargeable code, no action is taken on the patron account. If the fee was paid, the payment transaction will remain. If the fee was charged, the charge will remain on the patron account. The registration fee and block remain until staff pay or waive the charge.

    +

    Offline Workflow

    +

    If a new patron record is created offline and the patron code is a chargeable type, the fee is charged to the patron account and the Patron Registration Fee block is placed on the patron record. The offline upload file includes a note in the entry for the registration.

    +

    PAC Registration

    +

    As part of the PAC registration process, the patron selects a home branch. The home branch’s default settings are used to create the new patron registration. If the default patron code set for PAC registration is a chargeable code, the program displays a message to the patron. The default message is Your library account will be charged a [$] registration fee. Do you want to continue? The message text can be customized or translated with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).

    +

    If the patron chooses to continue, the fee is charged to the patron account and the Patron Registration Fee block is placed on the record.

    +

    Note: +
    There is no option to renew an expired patron registration from PAC.

    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck

    +

    Patrons can renew an expiring registration at the Polaris ExpressCheck workstation if the option Permit registration renewal if patron record expires is selected in the parameter Polaris ExpressCheck: Enable. If the patron code is a chargeable type according to the options set for the patron’s registered branch, the program displays the message for an expired patron record and does not offer an option to renew. The patron must renew the registration at the circulation desk.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Date_Sources_in_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Date_Sources_in_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f400ffe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Date_Sources_in_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Date Sources in Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Date Sources in Patron Records

    +

    Dates for transactions in patron records are derived from the server or client workstation when records are added or modified.

    +

    Note: +
    For more information about time and locale consistency among servers and workstations, see Ensuring Locale and Time Consistency.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Creating Patron Records Online

    +
      +
    • The registration date defaults to the server date in the Patron Registration workform. (The expiration date and address expiration date are calculated from this date.)
    • +
    • The creation date in the patron record properties sheet uses the server date.
    • +
    • The transaction date for a patron registration fee is the server date.
    • +
    • TransactionHeaders.TranClientDate uses the server date when the creation transaction is queued.
    • +
    • TransactionHeaders.TransactionDate uses the server date when the creation transaction is processed from the queue.
    • +
    • In TransactionDetails, where the TransactionSubTypeID is 187 (Patron Registration Date), the value is the client workstation date.
    • +
    +

    Creating Patron Records Offline

    +
      +
    • The registration date defaults to the offline workstation date in the Patron Registration workform. (The expiration date and address expiration date are calculated from this date.)
    • +
    • The creation date in the patron record properties sheet uses the offline workstation date.
    • +
    • The transaction date for a patron registration fee is the offline workstation date.
    • +
    • TransactionHeaders.TranClientDate uses the offline workstation date when the creation transaction is queued.
    • +
    • TransactionHeaders.TransactionDate uses the server date when the creation transaction is processed from the queue.
    • +
    • In TransactionDetails, where the TransactionSubTypeID is 187 (Patron Registration Date), the value is the offline workstation date.
    • +
    +

    Modifying a Patron Record from Patron Registration Workform (Online Only)

    +
      +
    • TransactionHeaders.TranClientDate uses the server date when the modification transaction is queued.
    • +
    +

    Deleting a Patron Record (Online Only)

    +
      +
    • TransactionHeaders.TranClientDate uses the server date when the deletion transaction is queued.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Define_patron_custom_data_fields_PCDFs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Define_patron_custom_data_fields_PCDFs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d22d8de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Define_patron_custom_data_fields_PCDFs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Define Patron Custom Data Fields (PCDFs) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define Patron Custom Data Fields (PCDFs)

    +

    Your library system can define up to 10 PCDFs at the System level in Polaris Administration. After the PCDFs are defined at the system level, the library or branch organization can select which custom fields display in the Patron Registration workform in the staff client and the Self Registration page in PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +

    Important: +
    When you add and save a new PCDF, the PCDF is not available for Find Tool searches until the ERMS daemon is recycled. See your system administrator.

    +

    To define PCDFs for the library system:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system level, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron custom data: Definition. The Patron custom data: Definition dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + pcdfDefSyst.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter a unique alpha-numeric label in the Label field. Each custom data field must have a label that cannot be the same as a label already in use for a custom field or a user-defined field.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    If the custom data field is used in any record, the type cannot be changed, but the label text can be modified.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following field types:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • String - A string type consisting of alpha-numeric and special characters, with a 255-character limit. If String is selected, you can select the Keyword Index check box if you want to include the custom data field in keyword indexing. This check box is enabled only when the String field type is enabled.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Selecting the keyword option could adversely affect searching and especially the search suggestion feature. For example, if the library uses this field for numeric or alphanumeric data, this data can populate a search suggestion with unhelpful data.

    +
      +
    • Integer - Consists of numbers only, with a 255 character limit.
    • +
    • Boolean - Consists of options to select Yes or No.
    • +
    • Date/ Time - Consists of the date and time.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click Add New Field to create a new patron custom data field.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Add New Field button is enabled when a unique label is entered in the Label field.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The system displays a message informing you that the ERMS daemon must be recycled. See your system administrator for this step.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Account_Features.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Account_Features.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59c29575 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Account_Features.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Patron Account Features + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Patron Account Features

    +

    Patron records store patron registration and account information. In Polaris Administration, you set up default values for patron records in the Polaris staff client, Leap and the PAC; criteria for detecting duplicate records; and criteria for deleting them. Additional settings affect patron accounting operations such as paying and waiving charges.

    +

    Note: +
    For information about setting up e-commerce (credit card processing) in the staff client, PAC, and Polaris ExpressCheck, see Setting Up E-Commerce.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a719186 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Defining_Patron_Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Patron Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Patron Codes

    +

    Patron codes define available services, loan periods, fines, and limits for specific classes of patrons. They are also used for reports. An appropriate patron code is typically assigned to the patron when the patron registers.

    +

    You define patron codes in the Patron Codes policy table, which can be opened from an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. All organizations have access to the same set of patron code names because the codes can be entered and changed from the system, library, and branch levels. Changes are immediately applied to all Polaris records that use the code, regardless of which organization owns the records.

    +

    Patron codes are available as selections in the Fines policy table, Loan Periods policy table, and the Patron code box on the Patron Registration workform. Each organization can filter the list of codes so that only selected codes are available for use in the Patron code box on the Patron Registration workform for that organization’s patron records. The illustration shows the Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Note: +
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify the Patron Codes policy table:Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify patron codes table: Allow.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Display_or_suppress_payment_methods.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Display_or_suppress_payment_methods.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9efd28c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Display_or_suppress_payment_methods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display or Suppress Payment Methods + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display or Suppress Payment Methods

    +

    To display or suppress payment methods, and set the order in which they are displayed for staff selection:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Payment Methods. The Payment Methods table is displayed in the details view. By default, all payment methods are set to be displayed. The default display order is alphabetical.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the branch/method combination to display or suppress.
    2. +
    3. Click ModIcon00480.gif to display the Modify Payment Methods dialog box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Selected box, select Yes to display the method as an option, or select No to suppress the method from display.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Polaris does not currently support debit card payments, and you should suppress this option for all branches. If you accept credit card payments, and your provider processes debit cards as credit cards, staff members should select Credit card or Credit card - Manual as the method for a debit card payment.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    3. To set the display order of the payment methods, select a branch/payment method and click the up arrow btnUpArrow.gif to move the option higher in the list, or click the down arrow btnDownArrow.gif to move it lower in the list.
    4. +
    +

    Your changes affect all the dialog boxes that display the payment methods for that branch.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Enable_reading_histories.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Enable_reading_histories.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76233833 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Enable_reading_histories.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enable Reading Histories + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Reading Histories

    +

    To enable and limit patron reading histories:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Reading history. The Reading History Setup dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Enable reading history to allow Polaris to save reading histories for patrons. If this option is checked and your library also uses the Polaris Web App (Leap), users can access the Reading History view from the Patron Registration workform in Leap. If the Enable reading history box is unchecked, the view is not available from the Patron Registration workform in Leap.l
    6. +
    7. Specify the length of time (from check-out date to current date) to retain an entry in the Reading History list:
      1. Type the number of months or years in the first History length box.
      2. Select the unit of time (months or years) in the second History length box.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Maximum history box, type the maximum number of items that can be retained at one time in the Reading History list.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    An entry’s creation date in the reading history is usually, but not always, the check-out date. For example, offline uploads may cause some variation. Also, Polaris does not consider the exact time of check-out. If the Maximum history value is exceeded, and several items were checked out on the same date, Polaris deletes the items from the reading history in an unspecified order.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Reading History Setup dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Reading history limits for outreach services patrons - See Set reading history limits for outreach patrons .
    • +
    • Start and stop histories for specific patrons. Working with Reading Histories.
    • +
    • Allow patrons to start and stop reading histories from the PAC - Set the Patron Services profile Patron can enable/disable reading history to Yes. This setting applies when reading histories are enabled for the organization and the patron is not an Outreach Services patron.
    • +
    • Stop all reading histories - To stop recording all reading histories, clear the Enable reading history check box on the Reading History Setup dialog box. When the check box is cleared, new reading histories cannot be created, and existing histories are not incremented. However, existing individual histories are not cleared. If a reading history is stopped from the patron record, the patron’s existing history is cleared.
    • +
    • Allow staff members to remove items from reading histories - Staff members with the Circulation permission Reading history: Remove non-ORS patron history entries: Allow can remove individual items from the reading histories of non-outreach services patrons. Staff members with the Circulation permission Reading history: Remove ORS patron history entries: Allow can remove individual items from the reading histories of outreach services patrons. Working with Reading Histories.
    • +
    • Allow patrons to remove individual items from reading histories - Set the PAC profile Patrons can remove reading history to Yes. The setting affects both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. When a patron removes an item from the reading history, the item is also removed from the reading history list in the staff client (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view).
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_codes_for_specific_organizations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_codes_for_specific_organizations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03c4f790 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_codes_for_specific_organizations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Filter Patron Codes for Specific Organizations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Filter Patron Codes for Specific Organizations

    +

    The patron codes available for use in a patron record are based on the settings for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    To filter patron codes for use by specific organizations:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron registration: Filter patron codes.
    4. +
    +

    The Patron registration: Filter patron codes dialog box opens. The list of patron codes are those defined in the Patron Codes policy table Add a patron code). When a new code is added to that table, it is added to the Filter dialog box and is selected for use by default.

    +

    + PatRegFilterDx.gif +

    +
    +

    Note: +
    The organization icons at the top of the dialog box indicate whether the settings have been inherited. Initially they are inherited from the system-level settings. Once you change settings at the branch level, they are no longer inherited from the system, even if the system settings are changed.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Check or uncheck the codes until the checked items reflect those you want to offer as patron code choices for this organization.
    2. +
    3. Click Save. If you have unchecked patron codes, they are removed from the list of patron codes available on workforms for this organization. If an unchecked code is in use, a message informs you of the number of patron records that use the code at this organization and any descendant organizations. You can continue to save or cancel the operation.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_custom_data_fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_custom_data_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e01c5487 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Filter_patron_custom_data_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Filter Patron Custom Data Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Filter Patron Custom Data Fields

    +

    To filter patron custom data fields:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system, library, or branch level and select the Patron Services tab.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron custom data: Filter. The Patron custom data filter dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + pcdfsBranchFilter.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the check box next to the PCDFs that you want to make available for your library or branch organization, and clear the check box next to the PCDFs that you do not want to be available for your branch or library organization.
    2. +
    3. To change the order in which the fields will be displayed, select the up or down arrow button. updwnarr.gif
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you are filtering the custom data fields at the library or branch level, you can select Revert to allow the current settings to be replaced by the settings from the organization above (System if at the Library level; System or Library if at the Branch level).
    If changes are made after Revert is selected, then saving the changes overwrites the settings for the current organization.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The list of PCDFs is updated for your organization.
    2. +
    +

    To require PCDFs or set defaults, see Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Modify_or_delete_a_PCDF.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Modify_or_delete_a_PCDF.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3b2a6fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Modify_or_delete_a_PCDF.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Modify or Delete a PCDF + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify or Delete a PCDF

    +

    To modify or delete an existing PCDF:

    +

    Note: +
    If a PCDF is currently in use in any patron record, it cannot be modified or deleted.

    +

    Note: +
    When you modify a PCDF, the modification is not available for Find Tool searches until the ERMS daemon is recycled. See your system administrator.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system level, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron custom data: Definition. The Patron custom data: Definition dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + pcdfDefSyst00478.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a field that is not currently used in any patron records.
    2. +
    3. Modify or delete the PCDF as follows:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • To modify the PCDF, click Modify Field and make changes.
    • +
    • To delete the PCDF, click Delete Field.
    • +
    +

    The PCDF is modified or deleted. The system displays a message informing you that the ERMS daemon must be recycled. See your system administrator for this step.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Removing_Patron_ID_Information_from_Transaction_Files.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Removing_Patron_ID_Information_from_Transaction_Files.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a72c801 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Removing_Patron_ID_Information_from_Transaction_Files.htm @@ -0,0 +1,434 @@ + + + + + + + + + Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files

    +

    Polaris records system transactions in transaction log files that are used for reporting, trouble-shooting, and system tracking purposes. Many circulation and patron accounting transactions are associated with specific patrons, and the log files that record these transactions store the specific patron IDs associated with the transactions. Using the Patron Services parameter Remove patron ID from circ transactions, you can purge this patron-specific information from your transaction records after a time period you specify. The same settings also purge patron IDs from item record histories. A nightly SQL job, PurgePatronIDFromCircTransactions, purges the patron IDs from the transactions according to your settings.

    +

    Important:
    Patron IDs are not removed from transactions generated by the system unless this feature is enabled at the system level.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Circ Transactions from Which Patron IDs Are Purged

    +

    The table lists the transactions from which patron IDs are purged if you choose to enable this feature.

    +

    Note:
    The obsolete transaction IDs listed in the table are no longer used but may still exist in your transaction records.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Transaction Type ID

    +
    +

    Transaction Description

    +
    +

    2011

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Renewal Overdue Block

    +
    +

    2012

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Renewal Overdue Block Override

    +
    +

    2090

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Add hold request

    +
    +

    2091

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Reactivate hold request

    +
    +

    2092

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Cancel hold request

    +
    +

    2093

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Satisfy hold request

    +
    +

    2094

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Ship item for hold

    +
    +

    2095

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Receive item for hold

    +
    +

    2096

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Deny item for hold

    +
    +

    2097

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Bibliographic hold

    +
    +

    2098

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Serial issue hold

    +
    +

    2099

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Item specific hold

    +
    +

    2111

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Trap item for hold

    +
    +

    2112

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Trap hold renew cancelled

    +
    +

    2150

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Patron check out or renewal block

    +
    +

    2183

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Claim block

    +
    +

    2185

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Claim cancelled

    +
    +

    2186

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Claim block

    +
    +

    2187

    +
    +

    OBSOLETE: Claim block override

    +
    +

    6001

    +
    +

    Check out

    +
    +

    6002

    +
    +

    Check in

    +
    +

    6005

    +
    +

    Hold request created

    +
    +

    6006

    +
    +

    Holds become held (item received for hold request)

    +
    +

    6007

    +
    +

    Holds become expired

    +
    +

    6008

    +
    +

    Holds become unclaimed

    +
    +

    6009

    +
    +

    Holds become denied

    +
    +

    6010

    +
    +

    Holds become pending

    +
    +

    6011

    +
    +

    Holds become not supplied

    +
    +

    6012

    +
    +

    Holds become shipped

    +
    +

    6013

    +
    +

    Holds become cancelled

    +
    +

    6026

    +
    +

    Item claimed lost

    +
    +

    6027

    +
    +

    Item claimed never had

    +
    +

    6028

    +
    +

    Item claimed returned

    +
    +

    6033

    +
    +

    ILL Request created

    +
    +

    6034

    +
    +

    ILL Request become active

    +
    +

    6035

    +
    +

    ILL Request received

    +
    +

    6036

    +
    +

    ILL Request returned

    +
    +

    6037

    +
    +

    ILL Request become cancelled

    +
    +

    6039

    +
    +

    Hold satisfied (item checked out to patron)

    +
    +

    6049

    +
    +

    Patron accounting auto waive void

    +
    +

    7000

    +
    +

    eCommerce Payment

    +
    +

    Remove Patron ID Report

    +

    When you enable patron ID purging, you can run a report to track the number of patron IDs purged during a time period you specify. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, select Circulation in the Polaris Reports dialog box, and double-click Remove Patron ID from circ transactions process log. Circulation Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Replace_the_default_photo.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Replace_the_default_photo.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..052975d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Replace_the_default_photo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Replace the Default Photo + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Replace the Default Photo

    +

    To use a custom image as the default photo instead of the Polaris logo by editing the registry:

    +
      +
    1. From the Start menu, select Run and type regedit. The Registry Editor opens.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Registry Editor, select HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE, Software, Polaris, [version], Clients.
    2. +
    3. Right-click in the Clients pane (right side of the Explorer) and select New, String Value from the context menu.
    4. +
    5. Type PatronDefaultPhoto in the string value name box and press ENTER.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click the new string value and type the complete path for your image file in the Edit String dialog box. Then click OK.
    2. +
    +

    When you open a patron registration workform, or the Check Out workform without a photo, your custom default image is displayed instead of the Polaris logo.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_Polaris_to_waive_fines_at_check-out_or_renewal.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_Polaris_to_waive_fines_at_check-out_or_renewal.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21f4a1f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_Polaris_to_waive_fines_at_check-out_or_renewal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Polaris to Waive Fines at Check-Out or Renewal + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Polaris to Waive Fines at Check-Out or Renewal

    +

    To waive fines automatically when an overdue item is recovered at check-out to another patron, or when a patron renews an overdue item:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the system, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To have Polaris automatically waive fines on items recovered at check-out, double-click Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at check-out, and select Yes.
    4. +
    +

    If this parameter is set to No, the fine remains in the account of the patron who incurred the overdue charge and the item is checked out to the new patron.

    +
      +
    1. To have Polaris automatically waive fines on items being renewed, double-click Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at renewal, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    If this parameter is set to No, the fine remains in the patron’s account when the patron renews the item.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_blocks_for_patron_record_deletion.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_blocks_for_patron_record_deletion.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea77f2ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_blocks_for_patron_record_deletion.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Blocks for Patron Record Deletion + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Blocks for Patron Record Deletion

    +

    To specify when Polaris blocks patron records from automatic or manual deletion:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron delete options to display the Patron Delete Options dialog box, Method tabbed page.
    4. +
    5. Click the Blocks tab to display the Blocks tabbed page.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Specify the situations that should prevent a record from being deleted:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Outstanding charge - Select the Block if the last outstanding charge date is greater than days check box, and type the number of days.
    • +
    • Account balance - Select the Block if the account balance due is over check box, and type the amount.
    • +
    • Credit balance - Select the Block if the account has a credit amount over check box, and type the amount.
    • +
    • Deposit balance - Select the Block if the account has a deposit amount over check box, and type the amount.
    • +
    • Notes in patron record - Select the Block if patron has notes check box. This setting applies to both non-blocking and blocking notes.
    • +
    • Last activity date - Select the Block if the patron record Last Activity Date is within the last . . . days check box, and type the number of days. This option blocks manual deletion if the last activity date is within the specified period. It does not apply to automatic deletion.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Last Activity Date field in the patron record tracks patron activity.
    It is updated in the following circumstances:
    Staff client: item check-out; renewal; quick-circ item check-out; when a claim is made on an item, when a charge is paid.
    PAC: log-in to patron account; placing and modifying hold and ILL requests; online renewal; patron information updates; payments; access to remote databases that require log-in.
    Polaris ExpressCheck, SIP self-check units: check-out and renewal; patron account access; payments.
    Time and print management applications: log-in.
    Inbound telephony: Access account information and renew items.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save on the Patron Delete Options dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_defaults_pat_associations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_defaults_pat_associations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8735345 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_defaults_pat_associations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Set Defaults for Associated Patron Settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Defaults for Associated Patron Settings

    +

    You can use the Associated patron options parameter to set the maximum number of linked records, specify whether patrons are blocked when their associated patrons are blocked, and whether patrons are allowed to pick up and check out items that are held for their associated patrons. For information on how these settings affect circulation, see Block and Allow settings for associated patrons.

    +

    To specify your library organization's default settings for associated patrons:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration, Explorer, and select the system, library, or branch organization for which you want to specify the default setting.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters, and select the Patron Services tab. The patron services parameters are listed in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click the Associated patron options parameter to open the dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select a number in the Linked record limit box to specify the maximum number of associated patrons that can be linked.
    2. +
    3. Select (or clear) the Always check "Block me" by default to block patrons if their associated patrons are blocked.
    4. +
    5. Select (or clear) the Always check ‘Allow me to pick up holds for these patrons’ by default check box.
    6. +
    +

    If this box is checked, the Allow me to pick up holds for these patrons box is checked by default on the Add Associations and Edit Associations dialog boxes. Staff members with the appropriate permissions can change the setting when adding or editing a patron association.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_drop-menu_user-defined_fields_for_organizations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_drop-menu_user-defined_fields_for_organizations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb8865ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_drop-menu_user-defined_fields_for_organizations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Drop-Menu User-Defined Fields for Organizations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Drop-Menu User-Defined Fields for Organizations

    +

    After the drop-menu user-defined fields have been set up at the system level, you can set which options will appear in each organization’s UDF drop menus and the order in which they should appear.

    +
      +
    1. To select drop-menu options for an organization:
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    4. +
    5. Select Profiles for the organization, and select the Patron Services tab.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Patron registration user defined fields. The User Defined Field Options dialog box opens.
    8. +
    9. Select the drop-menu UDF in the User Defined Field list. The drop-menu’s options are listed.
    10. +
    11. Select or de-select the check boxes to choose the options you want to appear in the organization’s version of the UDF drop menu.
    12. +
    +

    Note: +
    For new UDFs, if an option is selected and saved at the system level, it is selected at all branches. If it is saved as unselected at the system level, it is unselected for all branches.

    +

    Tip: +
    First move the de-selected options to the bottom of the list. This may make it easier to move the selected options to the order you want.

    +
      +
    1. To change the order in which the options will appear in the organization’s UDF drop menu, highlight an option and select the up arrow UDFup.gif or down arrow UDFdown.gif to move the option up or down in the list. To move an option to the top, click UDFtop.gif. To move an option to the bottom, click UDFbottom.gif.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    When you make UDF changes, you must log out and log back in to the Polaris staff client to see the effects of your changes in Polaris workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_express_registration_default_values_and_required_fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_express_registration_default_values_and_required_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b81e390 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_express_registration_default_values_and_required_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set express registration default values and required fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Express Registration Default Values and Required Fields

    +

    To set required fields and default values for express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons.:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Express patron registration options. The Express Patron Registration Options dialog box, General Defaults tabbed page appears. You can set default values for any or all fields on the Express Patron Registration Options dialog box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Enable Express Registration check box to allow staff with the appropriate permission to express-register patrons. All boxes on the dialog box become available for editing.
    2. +
    3. Select the Add block to verify patron check box to add a Verify Patron block to each record created through express registration.
    4. +
    +

    When this option is selected, an express-registered patron is blocked at the next check-out. A staff member then verifies details in the patron record and removes the block. Resolve a Verify Patron block.

    +
      +
    1. Select a code in the Patron Code box.
    2. +
    +

    The available patron codes are set in the Patron Codes policy table. See Defining Patron Codes.

    +
      +
    1. Select a library branch in the Registered at box.
    2. +
    +

    If no branch is selected, the patron registration workform defaults to the workstation branch.

    +
      +
    1. Select a class in the Statistical Class box.
    2. +
    +

    The Statistical Class box lists the defined classes for the selected branch. See Defining Patron Statistical Codes.

    +
      +
    1. Select a language in the Language box.
    2. +
    +

    This setting controls the default selection in a new patron record, but another language can be selected at registration.

    +

    Note: +
    If you have purchased Polaris licenses for additional languages, you can enable multi-lingual notices and have the notice sent in the language specified in the patron record. Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +
      +
    1. Select a method for notifying patrons in the Notification box.
    2. +
    +

    This setting controls the default selection in a new patron record, and the default notification preference for patrons who register online (patron self-registration). However, if the value is set to None, the default value for PAC registration will be Mailing Address (print). If the value is set to Fax, Telephone 2, or Telephone 3, the default value for PAC registration will be set to Telephone 1 (displayed as Telephone in the PAC).

    +

    When you set up notification, you can specify the notification method for each specific notice type, including patron preference. In this case, the notice is sent by the method specified in the patron record. Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +
      +
    1. If you plan to send e-mail notices of any kind to patrons, and want to send these as plain text by default, check E-mail notices in plain text.
    2. +
    +

    This setting controls the default selection in a new patron record. Individual patron records can set that patron’s preference for plain text or HTML e-mail notices.

    +
      +
    1. If you plan to offer eReceipts as an option to patrons who prefer these to printed receipts, and you want to set one or both of these options by default in new patron records, check E-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both.
    2. +
    +

    If you check both options, the default patron record setting for eReceipts is ALL; that is, the patron would receive both e-mail and TXT receipts. For more information about eReceipts, see Setting Up eReceipts.

    +
      +
    1. Type a telephone area code (three digits) in the Voice Phone 1 Area Code box.
    2. +
    3. Use one of the following methods to set an expiration term. This is the time that the patron’s registration expires:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Expiration termbox, and type a date in the first box using the format mm/dd/yyyy.
    • +
    • To set a date relative to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Expiration term box, and type a number in the first box.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following methods to set an address check term. This is the time that the patron’s address should be checked:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Address check term box, and type a date in the first box using the format mm/dd/yyyy.
    • +
    • To set a date relative to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Address check term box, and type a number in the first box.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select a country in the second Postal Code box, if necessary. If the state is not required as part of the address, you can leave the state empty.
    2. +
    3. Type a postal code in the first Postal Code box.
    4. +
    +

    This setting controls the default values in the Postal Code, City, State/province, and County boxes on the Add/Edit Address dialog box for patron records.

    +
      +
    1. On the UDF Defaults tabbed page, select the check box next to each UDF that should be a required field for creating patron records.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    User-defined fields are set up at Polaris implementation, using a Patron Services profile at the system level. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.

    +
      +
    1. For free-text UDFs, type text in each UDF box for which you want to specify default text.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) For drop-menu UDFs, select a default option.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you require a drop-menu UDF but do not specify a default option, the field is blank in a new record but the user must select an option.

    +
      +
    1. On the Required Fields tabbed page, select the check box next to each field (Address, Birth date, Gender, Password, Statistical class) that you want to require for creating patron records.
    2. +
    3. Click Save on the Express Patron Registration Options dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Online registration from PAC - You can allow patrons to register online from the PAC, and set requirements and default values for online registration.Set up online patron self-registration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_optional_patron_duplicate_detection_fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_optional_patron_duplicate_detection_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e5f1ab34 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_optional_patron_duplicate_detection_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Optional Patron Duplicate Detection Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Optional Patron Duplicate Detection Fields

    +

    To specify which patron record fields (in addition to the patron name, barcode, and birth date) are checked during duplicate detection:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Duplication detection options to display the Duplicate Detection Options dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Select the check boxes for the additional patron record fields that the system should check for matching criteria. You can select a maximum of two user-defined fields (UDFs). There is no selection limit in the other sections.
    6. +
    7. Click OK on the Duplicate Detection Options dialog box. The Administration Explorer appears.
    8. +
    9. Select File > Save to save your changes.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_options_for_deleting_patron_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_options_for_deleting_patron_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b64cd69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_options_for_deleting_patron_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set options for deleting patron records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Options for Deleting Patron Records

    +

    To set up automatic patron record deletion:

    +

    Important:
    If you plan to place deleted records in a record set for later review, you must set up the record set before you do this procedure. Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron delete options. The Patron Delete Options dialog box appears with the Method tabbed page displayed.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To turn off automatic deletion completely, so that patron records are not deleted automatically under any circumstances, click None and go to step 10.
    2. +
    3. If you want Polaris to delete all patron records that are not blocked from deletion, click Delete automatically. The Use exceptions record set check box is available. If you want Polaris to place blocked records in a record set, do the following steps:
      1. Select the Use exceptions record set check box. The Existing record set option is selected, indicating that blocked records are placed in an existing record set. (The New record set option is not currently functional.)
      2. Click Select to search for and select the existing record set in which records are placed.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. If you want Polaris to place all patron records (blocked and unblocked) in a record set for review and manual deletion, click Write to record set. The Existing record set option is selected, indicating that all records are placed in an existing record set. (The New record set option is not currently functional.)
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you click None, Polaris does not run automatic processing for patron record deletion.

    +
      +
    1. If you clicked Write to record set, click Select to search for and select the existing record set in which records will be placed.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Delete automatically or Write to record set, click Criteria to display the Criteria tabbed page.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    The Delete based on expiration option is not currently functional.

    +
      +
    1. In the Delete if inactive for days box, type the number of days for which a patron record must be inactive to be automatically deleted.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The Last Activity Date field in the patron record tracks patron activity. It is updated in the following circumstances. Staff client: item check-out; renewal; quick-circ item check-out; when a claim is made on an item, when a charge is paid. PAC: log-in to patron account; placing and modifying hold and ILL requests; online renewal; patron information updates; payments; access to remote databases that require log-in. Polaris ExpressCheck, SIP self-check units:check-out and renewal; patron account access; payments. Time and print management applications: log-in. Inbound telephony: Access account information and renew items. It is also updated when payments are made on the patron’s account.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save on the Patron Delete Options dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_accounting_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_accounting_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b61f33d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_accounting_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Patron Accounting Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Patron Accounting Options

    +

    To set Polaris to accept patron overpayments as credits, distribute waives, automatically waive fines at check-out or renewal, and limit the transactions listed in the patron’s transaction summary:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To allow credit for overpayment to be carried on patron accounts, double-click Credit for overpayment, and select Yes.
    4. +
    +

    If this parameter is set to No, when an overpayment is accepted, the charge is paid and a message prompts the staff member to refund the difference.

    +
      +
    1. To allow a specified amount to be waived from multiple charges, double-click Distributed waives, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    If this parameter is set to No, the Distributed waive option is not available on the Waive dialog box when a charge is being waived.

    +
      +
    1. To limit how long transactions are listed in a patron’s transaction summary, follow these steps:
      1. Double-click Account transaction deletion.The Finished Transaction deletion setup dialog box appear.
      2. Select (check) Enable finished transaction deletion.
      3. Select years or months, and type the number of years or months that transactions should be retained.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Most finished deposit or charge transactions older than the period you specify will be deleted from patron transaction summaries, including charges for lost/billed items. However, the following transactions remain in the transaction summary, regardless of your setting: payments that have been refunded or credited, including lost-and-paid transactions that were refunded or credited; deposits that have been credited; any transaction associated with a credit; any transactions that occur for patron accounts currently in collection.

    +
    +
    +

    Important:
    After the cut-off date, all completed transactions are removed from the system, including lost-and-paid transactions. Set this parameter to a minimum of one year, for example, if you reimburse patrons for lost-and-paid material when the material is found within a year.

    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This setting also determines how long some patron account data from deleted patron records is saved for certain financial reports. See Retaining Financial Information for Deleted Patron Records.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select File, Save.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Permission to create a credit manually - Staff members must have the permission Create a patron account credit: Allow to create a credit manually for a patron account. For more information, see Setting Circulation Permissions.
    • +
    • Permission to distribute a waived amount - If you allow distributed waives, staff members who set up the waived amount need the permission Fines: waive fines at circ: Allow. For more information, see Setting Circulation Permissions.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_registration_fees.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_registration_fees.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10270191 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_patron_registration_fees.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Patron Registration Fees + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Patron Registration Fees

    +

    To specify which patron codes should be charged a registration fee:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Registration fee options to display the Registration Fee Options dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The dialog box lists the patron codes that have been selected for use at this organization (see Defining Patron Codes). The default setting for each patron code is $0.00 (no charge).

    +
      +
    1. Select the patron code for which you want to set a fee.
    2. +
    3. Click the charge for the selected patron code and type the new amount in the format shown in the dialog box. You can set a separate fee for each patron code you select.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_identification_purging.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_identification_purging.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..076b9ae9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_identification_purging.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Patron Identification Purging + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Patron Identification Purging

    +

    To enable automatic purging of patron identification information from transaction logs and item record histories after a specified time period:

    +

    Note:
    These settings are available at the system, library, and branch levels. Patron identification information is removed from transactions and item record histories according to the transacting branch’s settings (not according to the settings of the patrons’ registered branches). The transacting branch is identified in the transaction header OrganizationID field. Patron IDs are not removed from transactions generated by the system unless this feature is enabled at the system level

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Remove patron ID from circ transactions. The Remove patron ID from circ transactions dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable patron ID removal. The Term options become available.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select an interval or select a date:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select months, years, or days in the Term box, and set the appropriate number. For example, if you set the term to 2 years, patron identification information is kept for two years following the date of the transaction, then purged from the transaction database and item record histories. The program identifies transactions from which to remove patron information by counting back the number of days starting from beginning of the day it runs (12:00 midnight) through the final day (12:00 midnight).
    • +
    +

    Example: 
    The term is set to 30 days. When the program runs on the night of August 30, it will count back from midnight August 30 through the full day to midnight July 31. The patron ID will be removed from all transactions prior to 12:00 July 31.

    +
      +
    • Select exact date, and type a date or select a date from the drop-down calendar. Information for that date will be purged. This option is most useful for testing or implementing the purge feature for a short period of time.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Automatic lost item recovery actions, which take action on the patron account if a lost item is recovered within a set period of time, depend on the availability of patron ID information. If your organization uses automatic lost item recovery actions, be sure to coordinate the settings so that the patron ID is available if the lost item is recovered within the time period you specify. See Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Specifying transactions to log + Logging Transactions. +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_messages_in_Polaris_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_messages_in_Polaris_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa44f988 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Set_up_patron_messages_in_Polaris_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Patron Messages in Polaris Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Patron Messages in Polaris Administration

    +

    The messages you define in Polaris Administration are available for selection in the Library assigned list when a staff member posts a message to a patron account.

    +

    To set up patron messages:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron message text: Configure. The Patron Message Text dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To add a message, follow these steps:
      1. Type up to 250 characters in the Message text box. Your message can include alpha-numeric and special characters, and URLs.
      2. Click Add. The message is added to the list with an icon that indicates the organizational level at which it was added.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note: +
    The Message list includes all the messages added at the system and parent library levels as well as the branch level. The appropriate organizational icon indicates the level at which the message was added. To add a message from a parent organization for use by your organization, click the message. The text appears in the Message text box. Then click Add. Only messages defined at your organizational level can be modified or translated.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your changes and continue to work with this dialog box, or click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To modify an existing message, follow these steps:
      1. Select the message in the Messages list. The message is displayed in the Message Text box.
      2. Edit the message in the Message Text box.
      3. Click Modify. The modified message is placed in the Messages list.
      4. Click Apply to save your changes and continue to work with this dialog box, or click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To translate an existing message, follow these steps:
    2. +
        +
      1. +

        Select the message in the Messages list and click Translate. The Language Strings dialog box opens.

        +
      2. +
      +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the Choose language list. The options are the languages licensed for Polaris PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. Type your translation in the language column next to the English equivalent.
    4. +
    5. To insert a diacritic character, click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    6. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set, select the character, and click Insert. For details on choosing diacritic characters Choose characters/diacritics from a chart . The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your changes and continue to work with the Patron Message Text dialog box, or click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To delete a message, follow these steps:
      1. Select the message in the Messages list.
      2. Click Delete.
    2. +
    +

    If the message is linked to any patron record, a warning message is displayed. You can cancel the deletion or continue to delete the message. If you delete it, it is removed from any patron accounts where it is currently posted.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your changes and continue to work with the Patron Message Text dialog box, or click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To set an expiration period for patron messages, follow these steps:
      1. Double-click the Patron Services parameter Patron message text: Expiration period for the organization.
      2. Set the number of days (0-99) that a message should remain in a patron account (unless it is manually deleted).
    2. +
    +

    After a message has been posted for the time period you set, it is automatically deleted.

    +
    +

    Note: +
    The time is counted from 11:59 on the day the message is created through 11:59 or after of the final day. (The exact time depends on when the automatic deletion job runs.) For example, if the time limit is 5 days, a message created at 2:00 p.m. on Monday will expire at or after 11:59 p.m. Saturday. The period is not affected if the message text is modified. However, if the expiration period is changed, all messages are immediately affected. For example, reducing the expiration period may cause some messages to expire immediately and shorten the life of others.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save from the Administration Explorer menu bar.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Staff procedures + Posting Patron Messages. +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Express_Registration_Defaults_and_Requirements.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Express_Registration_Defaults_and_Requirements.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21f5129f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Express_Registration_Defaults_and_Requirements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements

    +

    The Patron Services parameter Express patron registration options controls the required fields and default values for express patron registration at check-out. These requirements and defaults can be different from those used for ordinary registrations. When a staff member express-registers a patron, the Express Registration workform opens with the default values, and required fields are displayed in bold type. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    See also: Set express registration default values and required fields

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Options_for_Deleting_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Options_for_Deleting_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a919f1c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Options_for_Deleting_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records

    +

    When a patron record is deleted, it is permanently removed from the Polaris database. You can manually delete patron records (see Deleting Patron Records) or you can specify criteria whereby patron records are automatically deleted each night.

    +

    With either method, you can specify blocks that prevent certain records from being deleted.

    +

    Note: +
    Staff must have the following Circulation permissions to delete patron records and override blocks to deletion: Patron registration: Delete, and Patron registration: Override blocks to delete.

    +

    You can set Polaris to automatically delete patron records that have been inactive for a specified number of days. If you set Polaris to immediately delete unblocked records that meet this criterion, you can also choose to place any blocked records in an exceptions record set. You should regularly review this record set. If you do not want any records to be deleted immediately, set Polaris to place all the records that are candidates for deletion, both blocked and unblocked, in a record set where they can be reviewed. After review, some records may be edited and retained, while others may be manually deleted from within the record set.

    +

    Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +

    Records that are blocked from automatic deletion, whether placed in a record set or not, are deleted automatically when the circumstances that prevented deletion no longer exist. System-assigned circulation blocks prevent automatic deletion. Library-assigned or free-text circulation blocks do not prevent automatic deletion.

    +

    The Patron Services parameter Patron delete options sets the criteria that affect both manual and automatic deletion of patron records. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch level.

    +

    Note: +
    Even when a patron record is manually deleted in the Polaris staff client, it is not immediately removed from the database. Instead, the barcode is modified and the name, address, e-mail address, and user-defined fields are made blank, and the record is not returned in Find Tool search results. The altered record is then deleted as part of the nightly Patron Processing SQL job. This process optimizes staff client performance, and does not affect the settings, procedures, and conditions for automatically and/or manually deleting patron records described here.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Retaining Financial Information for Deleted Patron Records

    +

    Certain patron account data from deleted patron records is saved in separate database tables for the period specified in the Patron Services parameter Account transaction deletion. If an associated item record is also deleted, the item record ID, barcode, title, author, and material type are retained. This process ensures the accuracy of the following reports even when the transacting patron records have been deleted:

    +
      +
    • Daily Cash Balance Detail
    • +
    • Daily Cash Drawer
    • +
    • Daily Cash Drawer POS
    • +
    • Billed Patrons
    • +
    • Fines and Fees
    • +
    • Fines and Fees Summary
    • +
    • Non-POS Payments
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The Daily Cash Balance Detail, Daily Cash Drawer, and Daily Cash Drawer POS reports can use retrospective data dating back to the beginning of the calendar year during which Polaris 4.0 was installed. The other reports listed here use only data from patron records deleted after Polaris 4.0 was installed. This is because these reports include both charge and payment transactions, and the retrospective data does not include charges.

    +

    The saved data is then purged according to the parameter setting in the nightly Patron Processing job. For example, if the setting for Account transaction deletion is two years, any data older than two years is purged when the job runs. For more information about setting the Account transaction deletion parameter, see Setting Patron Accounting Options. Patron Financial Reports

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Accounting_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Accounting_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..576d292d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Accounting_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Patron Accounting Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Patron Accounting Options

    +

    Certain Patron Services parameters control what options are available for handling financial transactions in patron accounts:

    +
      +
    • Credit for overpayment - Controls whether staff members can accept an overpayment on charges and place a credit on the patron’s account. The charges are paid, and the credit can then be carried on the account or refunded to the patron.
    • +
    • Distributed waives - Controls whether a specified waived amount can be deducted from every charge on the patron’s account. If a particular charge is greater than or equal to the waived amount, the specified waived amount is deducted from the charge. If a charge is less than the specified waived amount, no action is taken.
    • +
    • Account transaction deletion - Controls how long finished transactions are listed in the patron’s transaction summary. A deposit or charge transaction is considered finished when the outstanding amount is 0. Your settings for this parameter apply to all patrons registered at the branch. This setting also determines how long some patron account data from deleted patron records is saved for certain financial reports. See Retaining Financial Information for Deleted Patron Records.
    • +
    +

    These parameters can be set at the system, library, or branch level. At the system level, you can also set Polaris to waive fines automatically at check-out or renewal. You may want to waive fines automatically at check-out for items that are overdue on one patron’s account, but “recovered” when the item is being checked out to another patron. At renewal, you can set Polaris to waive the fine on an overdue item if the same patron is renewing the item.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Waive All Option in the Patron Status Workform - Account View

    +

    By default, the Waive All icon and shortcut key are available for use in the Patron Status workform - Account view. When the permissioned staff member clicks the icon, all of the patron’s fines are waived.

    +

    You can choose to make the Waive All icon and shortcut key unavailable for use. In Polaris Administration, set the Patron Services parameter Waive All displays to No. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The system uses the setting of the workstation’s logged-on branch.

    +

    This setting makes the icon and shortcut key unavailable and prevents staff members from accidentally waiving all fines with a single click.

    +

    Note:
    The Waive All displays parameter setting affects only the Waive All icon display and shortcut key function. It does not affect a staff member’s permission to waive fines.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Duplicate_Detection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Duplicate_Detection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c8fa352 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Duplicate_Detection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Patron Duplicate Detection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Patron Duplicate Detection

    +

    When you save a patron record, Polaris automatically checks for duplicate records. Polaris always checks the patron name fields (first and last names), birth date, and barcode for matches. You can set Polaris to check the following additional patron record fields for matching criteria:

    +
      +
    • Any two user-defined fields (UDFs)
    • +
    • Name on Identification
    • +
    • Phone 1
    • +
    • E-mail address
    • +
    +

    A match on any of these optional fields triggers a duplicate detection match. For example, if Phone 1 is selected, a matching phone number triggers a duplicate detection match, even if the patron names do not match.

    +

    Note:
    The system compares field to field, for example, barcode to barcode. The system does not cross-compare fields to find duplicates. For example, the system does not compare patron name with Name on Identification.

    +

    A duplicate is a character-for-character match of the complete field. However, if the field contains only one character, the system does not detect these records as duplicates. This prevents unnecessary and false duplicate detection in cases where a library has used an asterisk or another single character to flag certain records.

    +

    The system also uses the birth date to check for duplicate patron records to distinguish records that might otherwise be considered a match. For example, if there are two patrons named John Smith, a match is only detected if the birth dates are identical as well. If no birth date is supplied, duplicate checking uses only the existing criteria.

    +

    Note: +
    When a birth date is included in PAC self-registration, the system uses the birth date to check for duplicate patron records, in addition to the first name and last name. If no birth date is supplied, duplicate checking uses only the first and last names. Use the PAC profile Patron Access options to require a birth date entry for patron registration from PAC. For more information Set up online patron self-registration.

    +

    When possible duplicate records are detected, the Duplicate Patrons dialog box displays a list of the possible duplicates. To conserve system resources, the list is limited to 500 entries per duplicate detection criterion. For example, if 1,000 patrons have the same email address and 30 have the same phone number, Polaris lists 530 possible duplicate records.

    +

    Use the Patron Services parameter Duplication detection options to select one or more of the optional duplicate-checking fields. This parameter is available at the system, library, and branch level. The system uses the registration library’s settings.

    +

    See also: Set optional patron duplicate detection fields

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7f303d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + Maintaining Patron Registration Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Maintaining Patron Registration Lists

    +

    You use database tables to maintain the patron address types and patron name titles lists that appear when registering a new patron or updating an existing patron's registration in Polaris and Leap.

    +

    Maintaining Patron Address Types

    +

    You can use the Patron Address Types database table to add, edit, reorder, or delete the entries that appear in the Address Types drop-down list in the Patron Registration workform in the Polaris staff client and Leap.

    +

    + +

    +

    In the Polaris staff client, the entries defined in the database table appear in the Add/Edit Address dialog box.

    +

    + +

    +

    In Leap, the entries appear in the Addresses dialog box.

    +

    + +

    +

    Maintaining Patron Name Titles

    +

    You can use the Patron Name Titles database table to add, edit, or delete the entries that appear in the Titles drop-down list in the Patron Registration workform in the Polaris staff client and Leap.

    +

    + +

    +

    In the Polaris staff client, the entries defined in the database table appear in the Title drop-down list on the Patron Registration workform > Addresses view.

    +

    + +

    +

    In Leap, the entries defined in the database table appear in the Title drop-down list on the Patron Registration workform > Profile view.

    +

    + +

    +

    See also: Working with Tables

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Required_Fields_and_Defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Required_Fields_and_Defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3995b57d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Patron_Registration_Required_Fields_and_Defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,201 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults

    +

    The Patron Services parameter Patron registration options is available at the System, Library, and Branch levels in Polaris Administration. It is used for setting additional required fields and default values for patron records. The parameter includes three tabs: General defaults, Data Field Defaults, and Required Fields. The Data Fields Defaults tab includes two subtabs: the UDFs subtab is used for setting required fields and defaults for user-defined fields; and the Custom Fields subtab is used for setting required fields and defaults for patron custom data fields.

    +

    When a staff member registers a new patron, the labels for required fields appear in bold text on the Patron Registration workform, and any default values are displayed.

    +

    To set required fields and default values for patron records +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron registration options. The Patron Registration Options dialog box - General Defaults tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. +

      Select a library branch in the Registered at box.

      +

      If no branch is selected, the patron registration workform defaults to the workstation branch.

      +
    6. +
    7. +

      Select a code in the Patron Code box.

      +

      Note: +
      Patron codes are used to define available services, loan periods, fines, and limits for specific classes of patrons. The available patron codes are set in the Patron Codes policy table. See Defining Patron Codes.

      +
    8. +
    9. +

      Select a class in the Statistical Class box. The Statistical Class box lists the defined classes for the selected branch.

      +

      Note: +
      Statistical class codes are used for reporting purposes. The available codes are set in the Patron Statistical Class Codes policy table. See Defining Patron Statistical Codes.

      +
    10. +
    11. +

      Select a language in the Language box.

      +

      This setting controls the default selection in a new patron record. If you have purchased Polaris licenses for additional languages, you can enable multi-lingual notices and have the notice sent in the language specified in the patron record. See Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

      +

      Note: +
      If you need additional language selections for patron records, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

      +
    12. +
    13. +

      Select a default method for notifying patrons in the Notification box.

      +

      This setting controls the default selection in a new patron record. When you set up notification, you can specify the notification method for each specific notice type, including patron preference. In this case, the notice is sent by the method specified in the patron record unless your library chooses to override the preference for certain types of notices. See Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

      +
    14. +
    15. +

      If you plan to send email notices of any kind to patrons, and want to send these as plain text by default, select E-mail notices in plain text.

      +

      This setting controls the default selection in a new patron record. Individual patron records can set that patron’s preference for plain text or HTML email notices.

      +
    16. +
    17. +

      If you plan to offer eReceipts as an option to patrons who prefer these to printed receipts, and you want to set one or both of these options by default in new patron records, select E-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both.

      +

      If you select both options, the default patron record setting for eReceipts is ALL; that is, the patron would receive both email and TXT receipts. For more information about eReceipts, see Setting Up eReceipts.

      +
    18. +
    19. Type an area code (three digits) in the Phone 1 Area Code box.
    20. +
    21. +

      Use one of the following methods to set an expiration term. This is the time that the patron’s registration expires:

      +
        +
      • +

        To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Expiration term box, and type a date in the first box using the format mm/dd/yyyy.

        +
      • +
      • +

        To set a date relative to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Expiration term box, and type a number in the first box.

        +

        Note: +
        Your library may choose to block the patron record when the expiration date is in the past. See Add, select, and order patron block descriptions. When the term is updated, the block is removed. See Updating Patron Registration Check Dates.

        +
      • +
      +
    22. +
    23. +

      Use one of the following methods to set an address term. This is the time that the patron’s address should be checked:

      +
        +
      • To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Address check term box, and type a date in the first box using the format mm/dd/yyyy.
      • +
      • +

        To set a date relative to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Address check term box, and type a number in the first box.

        +

        Note: +
        Your library may choose to block the patron record when the address check date is in the past. See Add, select, and order patron block descriptions. When the term is updated, the block is removed. See Updating Patron Registration Check Dates.

        +
      • +
      +
    24. +
    25. Select a country in the second Postal Code box, if necessary.
    26. +
    27. +

      Type a postal code in the first Postal Code box.

      +

      This setting controls the default values in the Postal Code, City, State/province, and County boxes on the Add/Edit Address dialog box for patron records. If the state is not required as part of the address, you can leave the state empty.

      +
    28. +
    29. +

      Select the Required Fields tab and do the following to specify additional fields that are required when registering patrons:

      +

      Note: +
      These fields are always required in new patron records: Barcode; Last name; First name; Registered at; Patron code; Expiration term/date; Address check term/date; Notification option and corresponding notification field (for example, Phone 1 and the telephone number).

      +
        +
      1. Select the check box next to each additional field (Address, Birth date, Gender, Password, Statistical class) that you want to require for creating patron records. When the Gender option is selected for the patron’s registration branch, the staff member must select the patron's gender from a drop down menu during patron registration. If None is selected, a message is displayed when the staff member attempts to save the record. The field label appears in bold to indicate it is required. These do not apply to offline registration and are not checked when patron records are bulk-changed or merged.
      2. +
      3. Select Save to save the additional required fields.
      4. +
      +
    30. +
    31. +

      If you want to define defaults for user-defined fields (UDFs) or patron custom data fields (PCDFs) or require any of these fields for patron registration, select the Data Field Defaults tab, and do the following:

      +

      Note: +
      User-defined fields are set up at Polaris implementation, using a Patron Services profile at the system level. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.

      +
        +
      • Select the UDFs subtab to display the UDFs that have been defined for your library organization.
      • +
      • +

        Select the check box next to each UDF that is required for creating patron records.

        +

        Note: +
        User-defined fields are set up at Polaris implementation, using a Patron Services profile at the system level. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.

        +
      • +
      • For free-text UDFs, type text in each UDF box for which you want to specify default text.
      • +
      • +

        For drop-menu UDFs, select an option in each UDF drop-menu for which you want to specify a default option.

        +

        Note: +
        If you require a drop-menu UDF but do not specify a default option, the field is blank in a new record but the user must select an option.

        +
      • +
      +
    32. +
    33. +

      If you want to define defaults for patron custom data fields or make these custom fields required for patron registration, select the Data Field Defaults tab and do the following:

      +

      Note: +
      You cannot set default values for dates, and fields with a Boolean type cannot be required.

      +
        +
      1. Select the Custom Fields subtab.
      2. +
      3. +

        Select the label text for the field.

        +

        Note: +
        When you select a field, do not select the check box unless the field is required to save the patron record.

        +
      4. +
      5. +

        To specify defaults for the string, Boolean, or integer field type, do the following:

        +
          +
        • String custom field - When you select a string field type, you can enter a default value of up to 255 characters.
        • +
        • Boolean custom field - When you select a Boolean field type, you can select a default value of Yes, No or Undefined. Boolean fields appear as check boxes in the patron registration forms. If the default is set to Yes, the check box is selected. If the default is No, the check box is not selected.
        • +
        • Integer custom field - When you select an Integer field type, you can enter a default value of up to 255 numbers in the box.
        • +
        +
      6. +
      7. After defining the default for a field, select Set Default.
      8. +
      9. To require a value in the field, select the check box.
      10. +
      11. Select Apply to apply the settings.
      12. +
      +
    34. +
    35. Select Save on the Patron Registration Options dialog box.
    36. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Payment_Method_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Payment_Method_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4df187fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Payment_Method_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Payment Method Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Payment Method Options

    +

    When a staff member accepts a payment from a patron, the staff member selects a payment method such as Cash or Check to describe the payment. Use the Payment Methods policy table to display or suppress the following payment method options for use in the staff client:

    +
      +
    • Cash
    • +
    • Check
    • +
    • Collection agency
    • +
    • Credit card
    • +
    • Credit card - Manual
    • +
    • Debit card
    • +
    • Smart card
    • +
    • Voucher
    • +
    +

    For example, if you do not use a collection agency, you can suppress this option from display. Additionally, if your library does not have an integrated solution but offers a non-integrated payment option, you can select Credit card - Manual to make this option available in the staff client when taking payments. Libraries that already have an integrated solution will leave the Credit card - Manual option unselected in the Payment Methods table. You can also set the order in which the options are displayed in the payment dialog boxes.

    +

    Note:
    The Credit card - Manual option does not make credit card payments possible from PAC or MPAC.

    +

    The payment options you select in the policy table appear in the following situations:

    +
      +
    • Pay dialog box - Paying charges from the Patron Status workform - Patron Account view (if the patron account has a credit, Pay from credit is an automatic option); paying overdue charges when renewing an item from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view; paying charges when checking in an item; paying overdue charges when renewing an item from the Check Out workform
    • +
    • Declare lost item dialog box - Paying charges when declaring an item lost from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view
    • +
    • Create credit dialog box - Creating a credit from the Patron Status workform - Patron Account view (Collection agency option does not apply to this situation)
    • +
    • Create deposit dialog box - Creating a deposit from the Patron Status workform - Patron Account view (Collection agency option does not apply to this situation)
    • +
    +

    Payment methods can be set from the system, library, and branch organization levels in the Administration Explorer. However, you specify the options for each branch. When you open the table at the system level, you can view and change entries for any branch. At the library level, you can view and change entries for the branches associated with the library. At the branch level, you can view and change entries for the selected branch.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify payment methods table: Allow.

    +

    See also: Display or suppress payment methods.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Reading_History_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Reading_History_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8be1cf58 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Reading_History_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Reading History Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Reading History Options

    +

    Your library can save a reading history for a patron’s account. In the staff client, this list is displayed on the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view. (The Circulation permission Patron Status: Display reader services is required to view a patron’s reading history on the Patron Status workform.) When reading histories are enabled for a patron’s registered branch, patrons can also view their reading histories by accessing their patron accounts through the PAC. The reading history contains basic information for each item the patron has checked out since the reading history was started.

    +

    Use the Patron Services parameter Reading history to enable reading histories, set the amount of time an entry remains in the reading history, and set the maximum number of entries that can be retained in the reading history at once. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch level. After the parameter is set, staff can start reading histories for specific patrons. If reading history is enabled in Polaris Administration, the Reading History view is available on the Patron Registration workform in the Polaris Web App (Leap). Working with Reading Histories.

    +

    Important: +
    If your system includes Polaris Outreach Services, reading histories are automatically enabled for outreach services patrons, regardless of the Reading History parameter setting. Separate settings control reading history limits for outreach services patrons. See Set reading history limits for outreach patrons . For more information about outreach services workflows, see the Patron_Services PDF Guide, Outreach Services Processing.Outreach Services Processing.

    +

    See also: Enable reading histories

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Free_Text_User_Defined_Fields_For_Alternate_IDs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Free_Text_User_Defined_Fields_For_Alternate_IDs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a74c7731 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Free_Text_User_Defined_Fields_For_Alternate_IDs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Up Free Text User-Defined Fields for Use as Alternate IDs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Free Text User-Defined Fields for Use as Alternate IDs

    +

    Use these steps to configure free text UDF fields in the patron record to be used as an alternate ID to check out items.

    +

    To configure a free text user-defined field for use as an alternate ID:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder, select Profiles, and then select the Patron Services tab.
    2. +
    3. Select Setup next to Patron registration user defined fields.

    4. +
    5. In the User Defined Field Options dialog box, select the check box Use as alternate ID for checkout to indicate that the free text field can be used as an alternate ID to check out patron items.

    6. +
    7. Select Apply to save the changes.

    8. +
    9. (Optional) Select the Only when no barcode match found check box if you want the patron search to happen only if no matching barcode is found. This check box is only enabled when the Use as alternate ID for checkout check box is checked.
    10. +
    +

    Note: +
    If the Drop-menu option is selected: the field's content will not be affected; the check boxes will be disabled; and the free text field will be converted to a drop-menu field and cannot be used as an alternate ID.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Custom_Data_Fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Custom_Data_Fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13d3cfd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Custom_Data_Fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields

    +

    You can define up to 10 patron custom data fields in addition to the 5 user defined fields (UDFs). In Polaris Administration, Patron Custom Data Fields (PCDFs) are defined at the System organization level; filtered at the library or branch level; and configured at the branch level to specify required fields or default values for the Patron Registration workform in the staff client and the PAC self-registration and Update Info pages.

    +

    To define the PCDFs for the library system, enter a unique label and define fields. See Define Patron Custom Data Fields (PCDFs). Once these PCDFs have been defined at the System level, you can filter the PCDFs at the branch level so that only the PCDFs your branch wants to use are listed. When a PCDF is selected for the branch organization, it will be available to configure for the Patron Registration workform in the staff client and for the Self Registration page in the PAC (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC). See Filter patron codes for specific organizations.

    +

    When configuring the display of PCDFs for the staff client Patron Registration workform, you can set default values for custom fields or specify that custom fields are required. See Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults.

    +

    A patron custom data field may be modified or deleted at the System level in Polaris Administration, provided the field is not used in any patron record. See Modify or delete a PCDF.

    +

    Setting Patron Account Options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f88c6d8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Patron Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Patron Messages

    +

    Staff members with the appropriate permissions can post predefined or free-text messages to specific patron accounts. The messages are posted from the Patron Registration workform or posted and managed from the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and patrons can read and delete them from the PAC patron account. In Polaris Administration, you set up the predefined messages, translate them into Polaris PowerPAC licensed languages if necessary, and set an automatic expiration period for patron messages. For instructions, see: Set up patron messages in Polaris Administration.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Patron Messages in the Staff Client and Leap

    +

    Staff members need the organizational-level Circulation permission Post patron message: Allow to post or modify messages in a patron account, and the system-level Circulation permission Delete patron message: Allow to delete messages. To post a message from the Patron Registration workform, select Tools, Post Message.To post a message from the Patron Status workform - Notes view, click Add Message in the message area of this view.

    +

    If a patron has unread messages, an alert message appears in the Patron Blocks dialog box during check-out. Staff members can continue the check-out operation or cancel it, or click the block text to open the Patron Status workform - Notes view. The alert message does not place any blocks on patron activity in the PAC.

    +

    Posting Patron Messages.

    +

    Patron Messages in PAC

    +

    The My Record page in the PAC patron account displays a Messages drawer that the user clicks or taps to expand the Messages area. The side portion of every page of the patron account also displays counts of new and read messages that are convenient links to open the Messages area of the account. When the Messages area is expanded, the patron can check messages and mark them as read or delete them.

    +

    + +

    +

    When a patron marks a message as read, the status is noted in the Patron Status workform - Notes view in the staff client. When a patron deletes a message, the message is also deleted from the Patron Status workform - Notes view. (Messages are also automatically removed according to the expiration period set in Polaris Administration.)

    +

    Note: +
    Patrons can also view their messages in the patron account on SIP self-check workstations if the SIP provider supports this feature. They may also print on the SIP checkout receipt. Messages are shortened to 250 characters if necessary, and they cannot be marked as read or deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Photos.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Photos.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c5ef87c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_Patron_Photos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Patron Photos + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Patron Photos

    +

    From the Patron Photo view in the Patron Record workform, staff members can take a photo, replace an old photo with a new one, upload an existing image file, or delete the photo from the patron record. If the workstation is set to display the photo, it also appears on the Check Out workform with the other patron information. (The patron’s photo does not appear in the PAC.)

    +

    Workstations used to process patron photos require a Windows-compatible webcam and associated software. Follow the installation instructions that accompany the webcam.

    +

    Note: +
    You cannot install webcam software on a thin client (terminal server environment) or use it via Remote Desktop, so you cannot take new patron pictures by these means. However, if the pictures are loaded from another source or captured on a conventional workstation with webcam software, they are displayed normally in terminal server and Remote Desktop environments.

    +

    For information about taking and editing patron photosWorking with Patron Photos.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    System Administration Settings

    +

    The Patron Services profile Display photo ID controls the display of patron photos in the Patron Record workform and the Check Out workform. It also controls whether patron photographs are displayed in the Patron Registration workform in the Polaris Web App (Leap). The profile is available at the system, library, branch, and workstation levels, and is set to Yes by default.

    +

    The following system-level Circulation permissions control the ability to work with patron photos in the Patron Photo view of the Patron Registration workform:

    +
      +
    • Modify photo IDs +
    • +
    • Delete photo IDs +
    • +
    +

    The permissions are not automatically granted at installation, so you must specifically assign them or supply a supervisor override. (The permissions do not affect the photo display in the Check Out workform.)

    +

    Importing Photos from an Existing Database

    +

    A set of existing patron photos can be imported into Polaris in a batch. Imported or uploaded images are limited to one megabyte (1 MG) each. Contact your Polaris Site Manager for more information.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_User-Defined_Fields.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_User-Defined_Fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1926002f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Setting_Up_User-Defined_Fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up User-Defined Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up User-Defined Fields

    +

    Your patron records can include up to five user-defined fields (UDFs). All five are searchable with the Polaris Find Tool. UDFs can be used for additional identification purposes and as criteria for detecting duplicate patron records.

    +

    Note: +
    Your library may allow users to log on to PAC using network credentials instead of the Polaris patron barcode or username and password. If so, a UDF should be defined for the patron’s network username. Set Up PAC Active Directory Log On.

    +

    The UDFs are set up when Polaris is implemented. At the system level, you can define UDFs as free-text fields where staff members type text, or as drop-menu options. If you define UDFs as drop-menu options, they appear in drop-menu list boxes everywhere UDFs can be selected.

    +

    + +

    +

    Drop-menu option text can be edited, and the options can be deleted provided they are not used in any patron records. Individual branches can specify which drop-menu UDF options to display: determine the order of display; and designate default values to be used during patron registration, express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons., and online registration from the PAC.

    +

    Note: +
    If you plan to use collection agency services, you may need a UDF to identify the guardian of a minor patron.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Scanning a Driver’s License for Patron Registration

    +

    California libraries can enter information for a new patron in the patron record by scanning the 2D (two dimensional) barcode on a California driver’s license or ID.

    +

    Normal barcode scanners will not read data from a driver’s license. The license data is stored in a 2D format using PDF417 barcode symbology. Polaris has tested and recommends the Datalogic Gryphon GD4430 USB scanner. However, most 2D PDF417 USB wedge-type scanners should work.

    +

    Note: +
    This “Driver’s License Scan Facility” feature is separately licensed in Polaris.

    +

    A free-text Polaris user-defined field must be designated for the driver’s license number. By default, Polaris uses UDF 1. If your library uses a different UDF for the driver’s license, contact your Polaris Site Manager to change the UDF.

    +

    Note: +
    The designated user-defined field must be a free text field. If it is changed to a drop-menu field in Polaris Administration, the registration data is entered appropriately when the driver’s license barcode is scanned, but the ID number is not entered in the user-defined field on the patron record.

    +

    When the driver’s license is scanned during patron registration, the following driver’s license information is entered in the appropriate patron record fields:

    +
      +
    • Name (Last, First Middle)
    • +
    • Street address (up to two lines)
    • +
    • City
    • +
    • State
    • +
    • Postal code
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The address information is entered in the Home address fields in the Patron Registration workform.

    +
      +
    • Birth date
    • +
    • License number (entered in the designated user-defined field)
    • +
    +

    For registration instructions using this method Scan driver’s license to enter patron information.

    +

    Technical Notes

    +
      +
    • Before the Gryphon scanner is first used, it must be programmed to add a suffix of $ to the driver’s license barcode.
    • +
    • To avoid problems with patron name and address formatting, you must configure the scanner to run in a mode that returns the line feed character, which indicates the end of each field in the driver's license. For the Gryphon 44XX scanner, the correct mode is USB Alternate Keyboard. The image for reconfiguring the Gryphon 44XX scanner is included in the scanner user guide.
    • +
    • The code requires the file DriversLicenseParser.js. When the Polaris staff client is installed, the folder ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Scripts is created. The file DriversLicenseParser.js must be placed in the Scripts folder.
    • +
    +

    Contact your Polaris Site Manager for technical assistance.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Specify Options for Associated Patrons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Specify Options for Associated Patrons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5456a19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/Specify Options for Associated Patrons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Options for Associated Patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Options for Associated Patrons

    +

    You can specify the following defaults for associated patrons using the Patron Services parameter, Associated patron options:

    +
      +
    • The limit on the number of records that can be associated with other patron records.
    • +
    • Whether the Block me option is selected by default.
    • +
    • Whether the Allow me option is selected by default.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Your library may also set the PAC profile, Patron access options, so that patrons can view settings for associated patrons in their PAC accounts Set patron associations display in PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/View_and_convert_user-defined_fields_for_patron_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/View_and_convert_user-defined_fields_for_patron_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2927ae2f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/PDPpatacct/View_and_convert_user-defined_fields_for_patron_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + + + View and convert user-defined fields for patron records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View and Convert User-Defined Fields for Patron Records

    +

    To view the user-defined fields (UDFs) that have been set up for your Polaris system, set up the options for drop-menu UDFs, and convert UDFs from one type to the other:

    +

    Note: +
    Initial values in drop-menu UDFs are derived from your existing data. You can edit them and add more values if necessary. See the following procedure. When existing text UDFs are converted to drop lists, the options will be available only at branches that have used the corresponding text value.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the System folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles, and select the Patron Services tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Patron registration user defined fields. The User Defined Field Options dialog box opens.
    6. +
    +

    + UDFsFreeTxtSystem.gif +

    +

    The User Defined Fielddrop-down list contains the UDFs that were set up at implementation. You can select a UDF to determine if it is defined as free-text or drop-menu on the Patron Registration workform and other appropriate system workforms. Drop-menu UDFs display the possible options defined for them. (Individual branches can select options for use and set the display order. See Set drop-menu user-defined fields for organizations.)

    +

    + UDfsDropmenuSystem.gif +

    +
      +
    1. To convert a free-text UDF to a drop-menu UDF, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the free-text UDF in the User Defined Field list.
    2. +
    3. Select Drop-menu. All the free-text values currently entered in patron records for this UDF are listed as drop-menu options; by default, all are selected as eligible for use by individual organizations.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you are converting a free-text UDF with more than 500 unique entries, a message offers you the opportunity to continue or cancel the conversion. Large numbers of values may take some time to convert.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. (You must click OKbefore you modify any of the drop-menu options.)
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    You can also convert a drop-menu UDF to free text. In this case, all patron records using the options for the drop-menu UDF retain the option text as free-text in the appropriate UDF field.

    +
      +
    1. To add an option for a drop-menu UDF, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the drop-menu UDF in the User Defined Field list.
    2. +
    3. Scroll the list of options to the bottom (blank) entry in the list.
    4. +
    +

    + UDFsDropOpNew.gif +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the blank field and type the new option in the space. You can type up to 64 alpha-numeric characters (letters and numbers).
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    A drop-menu option cannot be blank except in new records where an option has not yet been chosen or when it is cleared in bulk change. To indicate that no value is selected, set up an option with the text None.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To edit a drop-menu UDF option, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the drop-menu UDF in the User Defined Field list.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the option and type the new text over the old.
    4. +
    5. Click Apply. All patron records and defaults using the old option will be updated with the option’s new text.
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    You can also delete a drop-menu option as long as it is not currently being used in a patron record or as an organizational default setting for the UDF. Simply uncheck the option’s Selected check box.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    If you make any UDF changes, you must log out and log back in to the Polaris staff client to see the effects of your changes in Polaris workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Organizational drop-menu UDF options - See Set drop-menu user-defined fields for organizations.
    • +
    • Organizational default values for UDFs- See Set patron record required fields and default values .
    • +
    • Minor patrons and collection agency services- Collection agency processing may require a UDF that identifies the guardian of a minor patron. See Reporting Minors.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_By_Mail_Circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_By_Mail_Circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cec48b82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_By_Mail_Circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Borrow By Mail Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Borrow By Mail Circulation

    +

    With Polaris Borrow by Mail, you can request library materials for patrons and have the requested materials delivered by mail. A patron can also select the Borrow by Mail feature when placing a request from the PAC if the patron’s branch enables this option. Libraries can restrict Borrow by Mail options by patron code, establish a fee for the service, and allow exceptions to the fee for some patrons, such as homebound (Outreach Services) patrons.

    +

    Your library system may process Borrow by Mail items in a central location or during normal circulation procedures. In central processing, one or more branches are designated as Borrow by Mail processing centers in Polaris Administration. (A processing center may also be a separate workstation set up as a “branch” in Polaris Administration.) When a Borrow by Mail request is placed, the pick-up location is automatically set to the designated processing center, and the item is routed to this location by normal holds routing procedures. Alternatively, your branch may handle both normal and Borrow by Mail requests by establishing itself as a processing location. In this case, a message alerts you to a Borrow by Mail request when the item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation.

    +

    After Borrow by Mail items are trapped and checked out to the requesting patron, each item is packaged with an accompanying letter, mailing label, and return address label. They are then shipped to the patron, and a tracking number can be entered in the Hold Request workform.

    +

    The default values and available options for Borrow by Mail are set in Polaris Administration. See Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation.

    +

    Note:
    If your system does not include the Polaris Borrow by Mail license, the features described in this unit are not available.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_by_Mail_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_by_Mail_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a8ca275 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Borrow_by_Mail_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Borrow by Mail Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Borrow by Mail Reports

    +

    Borrow by Mail reports help you track Borrow by Mail requests. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Patron Services, Borrow by Mail in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Bulk-Processing_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Bulk-Processing_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21f0d273 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Bulk-Processing_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + Bulk-Processing Borrow by Mail Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk-Processing Borrow by Mail Items

    +

    If your library uses a central processing center to handle Borrow by Mail items, when an item that fills a Borrow by Mail request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation, it is shipped to the processing center, just as a trapped item that fills a traditional hold request is shipped to the pick-up library. A staff member then bulk-processes the items, prints the appropriate mailing materials, and ships them to patrons. See Process Borrow by Mail Items in Bulk.

    +

    To bulk-process Borrow by Mail items at the processing center:

    +
      +
    1. When the items arrive at the processing center, check them in (see Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform).
    2. +
    +

    As you check in each item, a message indicates that the item satisfies a hold. Indicate that you want to hold the item.

    +

    The item status changes to Held.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the processing center in the Branch name box, and select Pickup in the By box.
    2. +
    3. Select Held in the Status box.
    4. +
    +

    In the list of Held items, Borrow by Mail requests are marked by a  package icon iconBBM.gif. Item-level Borrow by Mail requests are marked by the package icon with the letter I iconItemBBM.gif.

    +
      +
    1. To print a checklist of the items to be mailed, select the Borrow by Mail items and click BBMPrintChecklist.gif above the Requests list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The checklist is available for Shipped, Held, and Out requests.

    +

    If your postal meter generates package tracking numbers, you can note them or stick them on the checklist. Later, you can enter the tracking numbers in the Tracking field on the appropriate Hold Request workforms.

    +
      +
    1. Check out the Borrow by Mail items to the requesting patrons:
      1. Select the items.
      2. Click BBMBulkIcon.gif above the Requests list, or right-click and select Bulk Check Out on the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    If an extended loan period has been set for Borrow by Mail items, the due date is calculated with the extended loan period. If a fee has been set for Borrow by Mail processing, the appropriate fee is charged to the respective patron accounts. The system uses the processing center's settings for the loan period and fee. When the items are checked out, the request status changes to Out and they can be listed in the Request Manager by the Out status.

    +

    Notes:
    Blocks for held items do not affect bulk checkout. If an item cannot be checked out during bulk checkout due to other blocks on the patron account, your library may automatically send a failure notice to the patron.
    You can also bulk check out Borrow-by-Mail items with a status of Shipped (their status when they arrive at the processing center) without changing the status to Held first. This workflow may affect later statistical reporting for holds.
    If there are multiple processing centers in your system and a Borrow by Mail request’s pick-up branch differs from your workstation branch, a message appears and the item cannot be checked out.

    +
      +
    1. To print the mailers, select the Borrow by Mail items and click BBMPrintMailer.gif above the Requests list.
    2. +
    +

    The printed mailer set for each item includes a cover letter, a mailing label, and a return label. The cover letter lists the Borrow by Mail fee, if any, the item data, and instructions for returning the item.

    +

    Note:
    Mailer printing is available for requests with the status Out from the Request Manager and from the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Package the items with their mailers and apply the postage.
    2. +
    +

    If your shipping equipment generates tracking numbers, note them on or attach them to the checklist you printed from the Request Manager.

    +
      +
    1. If your system uses tracking numbers, record them in the appropriate Hold Request workform as follows:
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Request Manager workform, set the branch to the processing center, the By field to Pickup, and the status to Out.
    2. +
    3. Right-click each Borrow by Mail request and select Open from the context menu.The Hold Request workform opens.
    4. +
    5. Enter the tracking number (up to 60 characters) in the Tracking field on the Hold Request workform.
    6. +
    7. Save the hold request.
    8. +
    +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Checking in returned items - When patrons send back Borrow by Mail items, they are checked in using normal circulation procedures. See Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform.
    • +
    • Polaris Administration settings - Libraries specify processing centers, restrict Borrow by Mail options by patron code, establish a fee for the service, and allow exceptions to the fee for some patrons, such as homebound (Outreach Services) patrons. See Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation for more information about these and other Borrow by Mail settings.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Place_a_Borrow_by_Mail_request.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Place_a_Borrow_by_Mail_request.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bacab229 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Place_a_Borrow_by_Mail_request.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place a Borrow by Mail request + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place a Borrow by Mail Request

    +

    Placing a Borrow by Mail request is similar to placing a normal hold request, but you specify that the request is specifically intended for Borrow by Mail.

    +

    To place a Borrow by Mail request for a patron:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Hold Request workform.
    2. +
    +

    You can select File | New from the Shortcut Bar, then select Hold Request from the New dialog box, and click OK. For other methods of opening the workform, see Place single or consecutive hold requests.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Borrow by mail.
    2. +
    +

    By default, the Pickup organization is automatically set to the processing location for your workstation’s log-on branch. If more than one processing center is available in your system, these are listed as pickup location choices.

    +

    Note:
    An optional tracking number can be entered in the Tracking box when Borrow by Mail items are processed for mailing. See Bulk-Processing Borrow by Mail Items.

    +
      +
    1. In the Activation box, select the date when the hold request should be activated.
    2. +
    +

    The activation date determines when items trap to fill the request.

    +
      +
    1. In the Expiration box, select the date after which the requested item is not needed.
    2. +
    3. To input or change the requesting patron, use one of the following methods:
      • Scan or type the patron’s barcode in the Barcode box.
      • Click Patron Find to do a patron record search, right-click the record in the Results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Name, Barcode, Code, and Registered at boxes are filled in.

    +
      +
    1. To select a title for the hold request, click Title Find to do a bibliographic or item record search, right-click the record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select a bibliographic-level serial title or a title with multiple parts and your library allows first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD)., an appropriate message appears. If the bibliographic record includes issue designations, you can opt to select a specific issue. If there are no issue designations, you can opt to select a specific item. If the bibliographic record is not a serial, but it has volume data, you can opt to select a specific volume.

    +

    Tip:
    To preview a bibliographic record and the items linked to it before you select it for the hold request, right-click the record in the Find Tool results list, and select Preview from the context menu.

    +

    After you choose Select, the applicable boxes in the Details frame are filled in. If the appropriate item is at hand, you can scan the item barcode directly into the Item barcode field on the workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the request.
    2. +
    +

    The Status (Active) and Request date boxes are filled in. For item requests, This item only is checked.

    +

    On the Notes view, the Request Satisfied By list displays the items that can fill the hold request. Your library may also set default Borrow by Mail display notes that appear on the Notes view when you save the request. See Display Notes for Borrow by Mail Requests for details.

    +

    Important:
    If you are placing consecutive requests, do not close the workform.

    +
      +
    1.  If you want to place another request, choose one of the following options:
      • To request the same title for a different patron, select File| New| Patron, or press CTRL+G. A new Hold Request workform appears with the same information in the Details frame boxes. The Patron frame boxes are blank.
      • To request a different title for the same patron, select File | New | Title, or press CTRL+H. The saved request closes. A new Hold Request workform appears with the same information in the Patron frame boxes. The Details frame boxes are blank.
      • To request a different title for a different patron, select File | New | Blank, or press CTRL+N.
    2. +
    +

    A new blank Hold Request workform appears.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Polaris Administration settings - Libraries specify processing centers,  restrict Borrow by Mail options by patron code, establish a fee for the service, and allow exceptions to the fee for some patrons, such as homebound (Outreach Services) patrons. See Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation for more information about these and other Borrow by Mail settings.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Processing traditional hold requests - See Working with Hold Requests.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Placing_Borrow_by_Mail_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Placing_Borrow_by_Mail_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93d540f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Placing_Borrow_by_Mail_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Placing Borrow by Mail Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Placing Borrow by Mail Requests

    +

    You place a Borrow by Mail request for a patron much like any other hold request (see Placing Hold Requests), but you indicate that a request is for Borrow by Mail by selecting the Borrow by Mail check box on the Hold Request workform. See Place a Borrow by Mail Request.

    +

    Note:
    The Borrow by Mail option is not available for interlibrary loan (ILL) requests.

    +

    + BBMHoldReqWF.gif 

    +

    Display Notes for Borrow by Mail Requests

    +

    The library may set up default notes for Borrow by Mail requests. If so, they are automatically displayed on the Hold Request workform - Notes view when you save a Borrow by Mail request. If the hold request includes a note, the Notes view icon on the Hold Request workform is yellow NotesBtnYellow.gif.

    + +

    Note:
    If you have the Circulation permission Hold requests: Modify PAC display note, you can add or modify the PAC display note on the Hold Request workform - Notes view.

    +

    Borrow by Mail Limits

    +

    Polaris Administration settings determine which patrons (by patron code) can place Borrow by Mail requests and whether they should be charged for the service. The library may also decide that certain item material types should not fill Borrow by Mail requests.

    +

    You can prevent a specific item from filling a Borrow by Mail request by checking the setting Do not mail on the Item Record workform - Cataloging view.

    +

    + BBMItem.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Process_individual_Borrow_by_Mail_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Process_individual_Borrow_by_Mail_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..497259b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Process_individual_Borrow_by_Mail_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Process individual Borrow by Mail items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Process Individual Borrow by Mail Items

    +

    To process an individual Borrow by Mail item when the item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at check in:

    +
      +
    1. During check-in, when a message informs you that the item satisfies a hold, indicate that you want to hold the item (see Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform).
    2. +
    +

    The item status changes to Held. Your library may display an additional message indicating that the item fills a Borrow by Mail Request. Click OK.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch (the processing center) in the Branch name box, and select Pickup in the By box.
    2. +
    3. Select Held in the Status box.
    4. +
    +

    In the list of Held items, Borrow by Mail requests are marked by a  package icon iconBBM00109.gif. Item-level Borrow by Mail requests are marked by the package icon with the letter I iconItemBBM00110.gif.

    +
      +
    1. To print a checklist of the items to be mailed, select the Borrow by Mail items and click BBMPrintChecklist00112.gif above the Requests list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The checklist is available for Shipped, Held, and Out requests.

    +

    If your postal meter generates package tracking numbers, you can note them or stick them on the checklist. Later, you can enter the tracking numbers in the Tracking field on the appropriate Hold Request workforms.

    +
      +
    1. Check out the Borrow by Mail item to the requesting patron as follows:
    2. +
    3. Select the item.
    4. +
    5. Click BBMBulkIcon00114.gif above the Requests list, or right-click and select Bulk Check Out on the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    If an extended loan period has been set for Borrow by Mail items, the due date is calculated with the extended loan period. If a fee has been set for Borrow by Mail processing, the appropriate fee is charged to the respective patron accounts. The system uses the processing center's settings for the loan period and fee. When the items are checked out, the request status changes to Out and they can be listed in the Request Manager by the Out status.

    +

    Important:
    If you check out a Borrow by Mail item to the requesting patron from the normal Check Out workform or the Patron Status workform, no extended loan period or fee applies.

    +

    Notes: +
    Blocks for held items do not affect bulk checkout. If an item cannot be checked out during bulk checkout due to other blocks on the patron account, your library may automatically send a failure notice to the patron.

    You can also bulk check out Borrow-by-Mail items with a status of Shipped (their status when they arrive at the processing center) without changing the status to Held first. This workflow may affect later statistical reporting for holds.

    If there are multiple processing centers in your system and a Borrow by Mail request’s pickup branch differs from your workstation branch, a message appears and the item cannot be checked out.

    +
      +
    1. To print the mailer, select the Borrow by Mail item and click BBMPrintMailer00115.gif above the Requests list.
    2. +
    +

    The printed mailer set for each item includes a cover letter, a mailing label, and a return label. The cover letter lists the Borrow by Mail fee, if any, the item data, and instructions for returning the item.

    +

    Note:
    Mailer printing is available for requests with the status Out from the Request Manager and from the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Package the item with the mailers and apply the postage.
    2. +
    +

    If your shipping equipment generates tracking numbers, note them on the checklist you printed from the Request Manager.

    +
      +
    1. If your system uses tracking numbers, record the tracking number as follows:
      1. In the Request Manager workform, set the branch to the processing center, the By field to Pickup, and the status to Out.
      2. Right-click each Borrow by Mail request and select Open from the context menu. The Hold Request workform opens.
      3. Enter the tracking number (up to 60 characters) in the Tracking field on the Hold Request workform.
      4. Save the hold request.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Checking in returned items - When patrons send back Borrow by Mail items, they are checked in using normal circulation procedures. See Taking an Item Inventory.
    • +
    • Polaris Administration settings - Libraries specify processing centers, restrict Borrow by Mail options by patron code, establish a fee for the service, and allow exceptions to the fee for some patrons, such as homebound (Outreach Services) patrons. See Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation for more information about these and other Borrow by Mail settings.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Processing_Individual_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Processing_Individual_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c92fc3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPBorrowBM/Processing_Individual_Borrow_by_Mail_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Processing Individual Borrow by Mail Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Processing Individual Borrow by Mail Items

    +

    If your library acts as its own processing center for Borrow by Mail items, when an item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for a Borrow by Mail request at check in, you can process the Borrow by Mail item on the spot, along with other requests. See Process Individual Borrow by Mail Items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPabout/Patron Services topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPabout/Patron Services topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad193918 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPabout/Patron Services topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris Patron Services Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Patron Services Overview

    +

    Patron Services in Polaris includes features and functions for staff to create and modify patron records; manage patron accounts; circulate items; put items on hold; and perform other circulation tasks. See the following topics for more information:

    +

    Getting Started in Patron Services 

    +

    Overview of patron services functions; patron records and how to find and display them.

    +

    Patron Registration +

    +

    Creating, modifying, merging, and deleting patron records; patron photos; patron reading histories; posting and managing patron messages; patron associations; deleting and merging records; generating patron mailing labels.

    +

    Bulk-Changing Patron Records 

    +

    Creating record sets to bulk-change multiple patron records.

    +

    Circulation Workstations: Receipts, Sounds, Smart Cards 

    +

    Setting up the workstation for receipt printing, sound alerts for messages and blocks, and smart card use.

    +

    Check-Out and Renewal 

    +

    Check-out blocks and messages; check-out and renewal; circulating on-the-fly uncataloged items; overview of item records.

    +

    Working with Blocks (Stops) 

    +

    Resolving patron and item blocks at circulation; adding and deleting patron blocks.

    +

    Check-In +

    +

    Checking in items; bulk check-in; managing fines at check-in; checking in new shelf-ready items; in-house usage.

    +

    Circulating Ephemeral Items 

    +

    Creating quick-circ (ephemeral) items for circulation; quick-circ check-out and check-in.

    +

    Taking an Item Inventory 

    +

    Inventorying items on the shelf; inventory reports.

    +

    Working with Claims 

    +

    Assigning a claim status to an item when a patron claims she returned the item or never had it; resetting a patron’s total claims count; estimating fines on claimed and lost items.

    +

    Managing Lost Items 

    +

    Processing items that are declared lost, and items that have been declared lost but turn up at circulation.

    +

    Patron Status and Accounting 

    +

    Displaying and printing items out for a patron; estimating fines on currently checked out items; notice histories; patron accounting, including assigning, paying, and waiving charges; refunding and crediting payments; credit card processing; making and reconciling deposits; using collection agencies.

    +

    Working with Hold Requests +

    +

    Placing, modifying, and cancelling holds; the holds queue; processing requests-to-fill; filling hold requests at circulation.

    +

    Working with Interlibrary Loans 

    +

    The interlibrary loan process, from creating and exporting an ILL request to receiving an ILL item and returning the ILL item.

    +

    Borrow By Mail Circulation 

    +

    Placing Borrow by Mail requests; processing Borrow by Mail items for shipment.

    +

    Outreach Services Processing 

    +

    Setting up outreach (homebound) patron profiles; suspending and reactivating service; creating title selection lists; processing multiple outreach services patrons; working with reader ratings.

    +

    Managing Course Reserves +

    +

    Setting up course records; placing items on reserve; circulating reserved items, including templates for instructor-owned or temporary course reserve items; notices for instructors.

    +

    Patron Services/Circulation Shortcut Keys 

    +

    List of shortcut keys formatted for convenient printing and clipping.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Add_a_patron_block.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Add_a_patron_block.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45645bab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Add_a_patron_block.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a Patron Block + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a Patron Block

    +

    You can manually add library-defined blocks to a patron record. Authorized staff can also create free-text blocks.

    +

    To add a block to a patron’s record:

    +

    Note:
    You can also add a blocking note to a patron record. Blocking notes block the patron at normal check-out and renewal. See Create or edit a patron status note.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - General view. See Find patron services and related records. The General view includes a list of current blocks. The blocks may be staff-generated or system-generated, such as those for overdues.
    2. +
    3. Click Add to display the Patron Block dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Add a library-assigned or free-text block: +
      • To add a library-assigned block, such as Address Correction Required or See Supervisor, click Library assigned and select a block in the Library assigned box.

        Note:
        The available blocks and the order in which they are listed are defined for the library in Polaris Administration. See Defining Patron Block Descriptions.

      • To add a free-text block, click Free text and type a block description in the Free text box (255 characters maximum).
    6. +
    7. Click OK on the dialog box. The General view appears, and the new block appears in the Block Description list. +

      Note:
      The Block Description list shows only one line of a free-text block. If the block text is too long to display on one line, you can place the cursor over the line. The entire block text is displayed in a tooltip.

    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Delete_a_patron_block.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Delete_a_patron_block.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8d49b16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Delete_a_patron_block.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete a Patron Block + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Patron Block

    +

    You cannot edit blocks. However, authorized library staff can manually delete staff-generated blocks. You must select and delete one block at a time. You can also delete a blocking note from the patron record.

    +

    To delete a patron block from a patron’s record:

    +

    Note:
    Polaris automatically deletes system-generated blocks when the particular blocking conditions are no longer met. For example, when an overdue item is checked in, the overdue block is deleted.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - General view. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. For staff-generated blocks, follow these steps:
      1. Select the block that you want to delete in the Block Description list. You cannot delete system-generated blocks, such as for overdues.
      2. Click Delete Block. The block is removed from the list.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To delete a blocking note, follow these steps:
      1. Select View, Notes, or click NotesBtn.gif.
      2. Select the text in the Blocking note field, and press DELETE.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_item_blocks_at_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_item_blocks_at_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6417bc64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_item_blocks_at_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage Item Blocks at Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Item Blocks at Circulation

    +

    At check-out, renewal, or check-in, the Item Blocks dialog box appears if there are any blocks on the item record. You must take action before you can enter the next item barcode.

    +

    Occasionally you may encounter an item with a status of On-Order at circulation. If an item has a status of On-Order and it is linked to a purchase order or invoice line item, a message is displayed. You cannot override the block, and you cannot manually change the status in the item record. The item must be received through Polaris Acquisitions before it can circulate.

    +

    Note:
    If an item has a status of On-Order, but it is not linked to a purchase order or invoice line item, no block message is displayed. This may occur in libraries that do not use the Polaris Acquisitions subsystem. You can check the item in, then circulate the item in the usual way. In addition, in the item record, you can change the item from On-Order to certain selected statuses. see Display item record information.

    +

    Some circulation item statuses, such as Unavailable or Withdrawn, will prevent an item check-out. In this case you receive an error message, and you must check the item in before you can continue.

    +

    To manage item blocks at circulation +

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions: +
      • To override the blocks and continue the transaction, click Yes or press ENTER. +

        Note:
        At checkout or renewal, you must have the appropriate permissions to override blocks. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

      • To stop the transaction, click No.
      • To open the item record workform, double-click the block text or click Item Record and go to step 2.
    2. +
    3. Resolve the block as necessary (or exit the workform and click No on the Item Blocks dialog box to stop the transaction):
      1. Select View, Notes and Notices on the Item Record workform to see an item’s notes and blocks.
    4. +

      Note:
      You must have the permission Item record: Modify notes and notices to open this view and delete blocks.

      +
    5. Remove Library assigned or Free text blocks if appropriate, and save the record. + +

      Item records with a record status of Deleted or Provisional will also prevent a check-out. In this case a special error message will display. The item should probably not be checked out in any case, and may require special handling. it is best to take appropriate steps to manage the item record.

    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_patron_blocks_at_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_patron_blocks_at_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..886f5b89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Manage_patron_blocks_at_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage Patron Blocks at Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Patron Blocks at Circulation

    +

    When you check out or renew items for a patron, the Patron Blocks dialog box appears if there are one or more blocks on the patron record or on associated patron records with a blocking relationship. You must take action before you check out the next patron.

    +

    To manage patron blocks at circulation:

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions:
      • To override the blocks and continue the transaction, click Yes (or press Y) on the Patron Blocks dialog box. You must have the appropriate permissions to override blocks. See Setting Circulation Permissions.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the patron account has been sent to a collection agency and you do not have permission to override the block, the block is marked by a yellow alert icon AlertIcon.gif. To override this block, you must have the specific permission Override collection agency block: Allow. (In this case, the icon is not displayed.)

    +
    +
    +

    If the only block is for a held item, you can override the block without special permission.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To stop the transaction, click No (or press N) on the Patron Blocks dialog box.
    • +
    • Select a block to manage on the Patron Blocks dialog box and go to step 2. You can use the up and down arrow keys to select a block.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    You can click Patron Status or Patron Registration on the Patron Blocks dialog box to open these workforms, regardless of which block is selected.

    +
    +
      +
    1. With the block selected, press Enter.
    2. +
    +

    The appropriate workform opens. For example, if the block is Patron owes money, the Patron Status workform - Account view opens. For Verify Patron blocks, the Patron Registration workform opens. For associated patron blocks, the Patron Status workform for the associated patron opens.

    +
      +
    1. Resolve the block as necessary (or exit the workform and click No on the Patron Blocks dialog box to stop the transaction):
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Resolve_a_Verify_Patron_block.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Resolve_a_Verify_Patron_block.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d06ecc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Resolve_a_Verify_Patron_block.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resolve a Verify Patron block + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolve a Verify Patron block

    +

    Your library may allow patrons to register online through the PAC. The patron receives a temporary barcode to use for placing requests, and a new patron record is created with a Verify Patron block. This block alerts staff that the record needs to be reviewed and a permanent barcode assigned. An automatic email message alerts designated library staff members that a patron has self-registered. A similar process occurs if your library allows patrons to update their account information through the PAC. Your library may also place a Verify Patron block on patron records created through express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons., and on registrations renewed through Polaris ExpressCheck. Patron records created offline also receive a Verify Patron block.

    +

    To review a new or updated record, modify it if necessary, and resolve the block:

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Registration workform, using one of the following methods: + +
      • Highlight the Verify patron message in the Patron Blocks dialog box, and press Enter.
      • On the Polaris Shortcut bar, select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the record. See Find patron services and related records. +

        Note:
        The temporary barcodes that are created when patrons self-register begin with PACREG.

    2. +
    3. If necessary, type or scan a valid patron barcode in the Barcode box.
    4. +
    5. If you want to change the patron code, select another code in the Patron code box.
    6. +
    7. If you want to change the statistical code, select another code in the Statistical class box.
    8. +
    9. Make any additional settings, such as Expiration Date, that your library may require.
    10. +
    11. Select File | Save to save the record. The Verify Patron block message appears.
    12. +
    13. Click Remove Block. The record is saved, and the block is removed. + +

      Note:
      You can also delete the Verify Patron block from the Patron Status workform - General view at any time. See Delete a patron block.

    14. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Working_with_Blocks_Stops.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Working_with_Blocks_Stops.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b469be6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPblocks/Working_with_Blocks_Stops.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Blocks (Stops) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Blocks (Stops)

    +

    Blocks on patron or item records may interrupt check-out or renewal. When a patron or item is blocked, a block notification message appears. Authorized library staff can override the block and continue with the transaction. System-generated blocks are applied and removed automatically by Polaris. Staff-generated blocks are applied by a staff member and must be manually removed by a staff member. Staff-generated blocks may be library-assigned or free-text blocks. You can also place a blocking note in a patron record.

    +

    Blocks may be associated with a patron record or an item record. Patron blocks indicate that a patron may not check out at all or that special conditions, such as a held item, require attention. For example, a block may indicate that a patron's address needs to be checked, the patron's registration has expired, the patron’s account is delinquent according to library policies, the patron requires special services, or that checking out an item would exceed a library-defined limit on certain materials, groups of materials, or reserve items.

    +

    Polaris automatically blocks patron records for held items, overdue and long overdue items, money owed over a library-specified amount, accounts in collection, and an excessive number of items claimed. If your library allows self-registration and account updates from the PAC, Polaris blocks patrons with a Verify Patron block, which flags the record for staff review. This block is also placed on patron records created offline. Your library may also place Verify Patron blocks on express registrations created at check-out.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Item blocks, like patron blocks, may indicate that an item should not be checked out at all, or that it requires special handling. These include blocks for non-circulating items and items that are being held for another patron, belong to another library, or have a status other than In, such as On Order, In-transit, Missing, Lost, or Withdrawn. Polaris also blocks items that have notes, are chargeable, or items that were created on-the-fly.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Holds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Holds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7415e29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Holds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bound-With Holds + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bound-With Holds

    +

    When a user attempts to place a hold request that is a constituent of a bound-with group, the settings for the host item control whether the request can be granted. For example, a user attempts to place a hold on a constituent bibliographic item or record, but is unable to do so because of the setting configuration. This is due to the settings for this item being determined by the host bibliographic item or record.

    +

    Note:
    A count of hold requests equals the number of holds placed on the host bibliographic item, and not the constituent item.

    +

    Placing a Request in the PAC and Mobile PAC

    +

    When a user places an item-level hold in the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC for a constituent title, the request is placed for the host, and the following message alerts the user that they are requesting a title that is part of a bound-with group: “This item is bound with the title [Title, Author]. Your request will be listed under that title.”

    +

    + boundwithmessage.gif 

    +

    When a user places a bibliographic-level hold in the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC for a constituent title, the request is placed for the host bib, and the following message alerts the user that they are requesting a title that is part of a bound-with group: “The requested title: [Constituent Title] is bound with the title: [Host Title].”

    +

    + boundwithmessageitemrec.jpg 

    +

    The text for these messages can be edited in Polaris WebAdmin.

    +

    Although the hold request for the constituent title is actually placed on the host record, the constituent’s title and author is printed on notices and hold slips.

    +

    When a user places either a bibliographic-level or item-level hold request for the host record, the host’s title information displays, and the request is placed as usual without any note about the constituent titles.

    +

    Placing a Request in the Staff Client

    +

    Upon placing a hold within the Polaris staff client for a constituent title, the user is notified with a message that the item is linked to a host bibliographic record and the request will be listed under that title. Because no item records are linked to a constituent record, item-level requests are not possible for constituent titles.

    +

    For both bibliographic and item-level requests from the host entry, the behavior and displays—for example blocks when placing, request routing and trapping—are no different from normal request behaviors.

    +

    Duplicate Detection for Hold Requests

    +

    To ensure a user does not place a hold on two different pamphlets within the same physical volume, additional functionality exists for duplicate detection.

    +

    If a request is placed on either a host or any constituent titles, that request is considered a duplicate if:

    +
      +
    • +

      Any of those requests are for the same patron.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Any of those matching requests have a status of Inactive, Pending, Active, Shipped, or Held.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Another request exists for the host title or for any constituent title associated with the host.

      +
    • +
    +

    Hold Request Workform Data and Display

    +

    When a request is placed for a constituent part, the Constituent title and Constituent author fields are populated in the hold request workform. Furthermore, if a request is placed for a constituent, the result set displays the constituent title. If a request is placed for a host title, the result set displays the host title. When fields within the workform do not apply to the item, they are greyed out and unavailable for data entry.

    +

    + holdrequest_.gif 

    +

    Items within the Hold Queue workform display will have bwholdqueicon.gif placed next to the item, to identify requests on constituent parts. Additionally, if a constituent title is requested within the staff client, a note is added to the Hold Request workform in the PAC display field.

    +

    + pacnote.gif 

    +

    This note displays within the PAC as well, in the designated PAC display note field.

    +

    + pacdisplaynote2.gif 

    +

    Searching Hold Requests and the Hold Request Queue

    +

    Using the hold request find tool, a title search for a constituent title will retrieve any hold requests placed for the title. It will not include requests placed directly for the host. If the host title is searched, the result list includes all requests placed for the host and any placed directly for constituents.

    +

    The hold request queue workform header displays both the host information and the constituent title and author if the workform is accessed through any of the following methods:

    +
      +
    • +

      A constituent bibliographic record

      +
    • +
    • +

      A constituent request

      +
    • +
    • +

      A request search that retrieves a constituent request for a constituent title

      +
    • +
    +

    + patronstatusholdrequest.gif 

    +

    Within the Holds queue the bound-with icon bwholdqueicon00027.gif will display to indicate the request is placed on a constituent part. The icon overrides other icons that may display, such as the Borrow by mail or item-request icon. The icon displays in the following listviews:

    +
      +
    • +

      Request manager

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron Status, requests

      +
    • +
    • +

      Request find tool

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Notices,_Slips,_Receipts_and_Displays.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Notices,_Slips,_Receipts_and_Displays.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97ce868a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Bound-With_Notices,_Slips,_Receipts_and_Displays.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Notices, Slips, Receipts and Other Data Displays + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bound-With Notices, Slips, Receipts and Displays

    +

    When a request is placed on the host record, all print, e-mail, and phone hold notices use the title and author from the host record. If the request has been placed on the constituent record, all print, e-mail, and phone and phone export notices include the constituent title, with the text “Included in [Host title]”. There is a 100 character limit for the host title, including the default text and the constituent title. As a result, the system is configured to allow 43 characters for the host title and 43 characters for the constituent title. Titles exceeding this character count will be cut off at 43 characters.

    +

    Hold slips and pickup slip formats for holds placed on the host record will use the title for the host record. The same behavior applies for constituent titles, with the hold slips and pickup slip formats using the constituent title. For both titles, there is a 25 character limit.

    +

    For items that are converted to an ILL, the request will be based upon the host record data. Constituent title data in the hold request will not be copied to the ILL request.

    +

    See also Circulating Bound-With Materials.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Circulating_Bound-With_Materials.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Circulating_Bound-With_Materials.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88026a66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPboundwith/Circulating_Bound-With_Materials.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Circulating Bound-With Materials + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulating Bound-With Materials

    +

    In a bound-with group, a single bibliographic record acts as the “host” record representing the title of the bound volume, and one or more bibliographic records act as “constituent” records representing the titles bound together in the volume. A single bar-coded item record represents the physical bound volume, and the host record’s circulation settings apply to all the constituent records, which do not have linked item records.

    +

    In addition, all processing for the following functions, as well as for remote storage and closed stacks, is determined by the host record for the item:

    + +

    For statistical purposes, any transaction involving a bound-with item, such as check-out, check-in, hold request, etc., is counted as a single item and a single circulation transaction or a single request.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_at_Shelf-Ready_Materials_check-in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_at_Shelf-Ready_Materials_check-in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02713581 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_at_Shelf-Ready_Materials_check-in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change item information at Shelf-Ready Materials check-in + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change Item Information at Shelf-Ready Materials Check-In

    +

    Your library may allow you to change an item’s collection, shelf location, material type, blocks, or non-public note from the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform. To be eligible for these changes, the item’s circulation status must be In, the item’s assigned branch must the same as your workstation’s logged-in branch, and the item must be be listed in the top part of the workform (that is, it has been checked in but you have not clicked Accept Shipment).

    +

    To make these changes:

    +
      +
    1. In the top part of the Receive Shipment workform, select the item or items you need to change.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Manage Item, click ManageItemIcn00026.gif, or press CTRL+M.
    4. +
    +

    The Manage Item Record dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check boxes for the fields you want to change, and select the new options from the lists. You can type information in the Non-public note and Free text block fields.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For the Non-public note and Free text block fields, you can select only one item at a time.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    +

    The dialog box closes, and the item record is updated with your changes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_or_barcode_at_check-in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_or_barcode_at_check-in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44ba8765 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Change_item_information_or_barcode_at_check-in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change Item Information or Barcode at Check-In + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change Item Information or Barcode at Check-In

    +

    Your library may allow you to change an item’s collection, shelf location, material type, circulation status, blocks, non-public note, or barcode from the Check In workform. To be eligible for these changes, the item’s circulation status must be In, and the item’s assigned branch must the same as your workstation’s logged-in branch.

    +

    To make these changes:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot change ILL items, course reserve items, quick circ items, or items whose records are locked (open). You can change on-the-fly (OTF) items, but the OTF block remains on the item.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also change a new shelf-ready item’s information from the Receive Shipment workform. See Checking In Shelf-Ready Items.

    +
      +
    1. In the Check In workform list view, select the item or items you need to change.
    2. +
    3. To change the circulation status, shelf location, library-assigned block, free-text block, non-public note, material type, or collection, follow these steps:
      1. Select Tools, Manage Item, click ManageItemIcn.gif, or press CTRL+M. The Manage Item Record dialog box opens.
      1. Select the check boxes for the fields you want to change, and select the new options from the lists. You can type information in the Non-public note and Free text block fields.
    4. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For the Non-public note and Free text block fields, you can select only one item at a time.

    +
    +
    +

    Example:
    You can change the circulation status to Bindery, In-repair, Unavailable, Missing, or Withdrawn. If an item is damaged and you want to put it aside for repairs, you can select In-repair.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save. The dialog box closes, and the item record is updated with your changes.
    2. +
    3. To change the barcode, follow these steps:
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can select only one item at a time to change the barcode.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Replace Barcode, click ReplaceBarcodeIcn.gif, or press CTRL+B. The Replace Barcode dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Type or scan the new barcode in the box. The new barcode cannot be blank.
    2. +
    3. Click Save. The dialog box closes, and the item record is updated with your change.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-In.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-In.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aacacdad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-In.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-In + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-In

    +

    You can check in items by various methods, depending on the situation. For example, you can do a normal check-in for a few items left at the desk, or a bulk check-in of all the items left in a book drop. You can also use the Check In workform to count the number of items that have been used in the library but not checked out.

    +

    Note:
    EContent records cannot be checked in from the staff client. EContent records are automatically checked in when they expire, or, if the vendor supports check-ins before expiration, the patron can check in from the PAC or from the vendor’s application. For more information, Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-in items with missing parts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-in items with missing parts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ef1815c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check-in items with missing parts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Check In Items With Missing Parts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In Items With Missing Parts

    +

    You can use the Special Item Check-In dialog box to check in multi-part items, such as DVD or CD sets, that are returned with missing parts, whether the missing parts are discovered before or after the item is checked in. A staff member checking in multi-part items is likely to discover the missing parts while the item still has a status of Out. But, if the library uses automated materials handling (AMH) units, a staff member may discover that parts are missing after the item has been checked in by the AMH and has a status of In.

    +

    Note: +
    The following permissions are necessary to check in items with missing parts:
    Special item check-in:Access
    Special item check-in:Select missing
    Special item check-in:Select unavailable

    +

    To check in multi-part items that are returned to the library with a part or parts missing:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Check In workform, and select Tools > Special Item Check-in. The Special Item Check-in dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Scan the item’s barcode or search for the item with the missing part.
    4. +
    5. Select one of the following options:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Missing part: block & notify - Enter a note regarding the missing part in the Special item check-in note box. This note will appear on the notice sent to the patron and on the item record. The note is optional, but if it is left blank, the notice does not specify exactly what part is missing. When you select this option and click OK, the following occurs:
    • +
    +
    +

    The item's status is updated to Claim Missing Parts and it appears on the Claims view of the Patron Status workform. From this view, you can charge the patron for the missing part if the item is salvageable, or declare the item lost if it is not salvageable. See also: Manage Items with a Claim Missing Parts Status.

    +

    The item is blocked from being circulated.

    +

    A notice is generated. If the item's status is still Out, the notice is sent to the current borrower. If the item's status is In, the notice is sent to the last borrower. (If the last borrower is not available for an In item, a message appears and the item is not added to the dialog box).

    +
    +

    Note:
    Items with system blocks for missing parts can be checked in at any branch, and the block will be removed even if the item goes In-transit, Held, or Transferred before it is updated to an In status.

    +
      +
    • Mark item Unavailable - When you select this option and click OK, the item is updated to a status of Unavailable, which prevents it from being circulated.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_a_held_item_with_changed_pickup_location.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_a_held_item_with_changed_pickup_location.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06e24e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_a_held_item_with_changed_pickup_location.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Check In a Held Item with a Changed Pickup Location + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In a Held Item with a Changed Pickup Location

    +

    If the pickup branch was changed for a held item either by a staff member or a patron (if your library allows patrons to change the pickup location), you can open the Hold Request from the Held items to transfer list at the bottom of the Request Manager workform, and check it in.

    +

    To check in a held item with a changed pickup location:

    +
      +
    1. Check in the item.
    2. +
    +

    If the item is held and the pickup location was changed, the Transfer Hold message displays the new pickup location.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes on the Polaris -Transfer Hold dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The hold request's status changes from Held to Shipped.

    +

    On the Holds view of the Patron Status workform, Rerouting from [original pickup location] to [changed pickup location]is displayed in the Pickup Branch column.

    +

    The Notes view of the Hold Request workform displays Request was shipped to the pickup branch in the Action column in the Request History.

    +

    Note: +
    If a held item is checked in or out via a Self Check unit or Polaris Express Check, the item is rerouted to the new location.

    +

    See also Working with Hold Requests.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_new_shelf-ready_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_new_shelf-ready_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1bd471a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Check_in_new_shelf-ready_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check in new shelf-ready items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check in New Shelf-Ready Items

    +

    To check in new items when a shipment of shelf-ready items arrives:

    +

    Note:
    To do this procedure, you need the Acquisitions permissions Access Acquisitions: Allow and Receive Shipment: Allow.

    +
      +
    1. Select Acquisitions, EDI Services, Check In Shelf-Ready Materials or click receiveshipicon.gif on the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. If you will print hold or in-transit slips from this workform, select Tools, Options and set up receipt printing. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.
    2. +
    +

    You need to do this step only once for this workform. If receipt printing has already been set up, skip this step.

    +
      +
    1. Scan or type the barcode of the first item in the Item barcode box and press ENTER.
    2. +
    +

    The system automatically finds the barcode of the matching on-order item record, and the item is listed in the top section of the workform.

    +

    Note:
    If the item’s barcode label is damaged, you can also click Find to search for the on-order item record, but the record must have a barcode to be checked in on this workform.

    +
      +
    1. Continue to scan items in the shipment.
    2. +
    +

    As the items are scanned and checked in, they are listed in the top section of the workform.

    +

    As the items are checked in, each item’s circulation status is updated appropriately (for example, to In, In Transit, or Held). If you have the appropriate permissions, you can change item information (collection, shelf location, material type, blocks, or non-public note) while it is displayed in the top part of the workform. See Change item information at Shelf-Ready Materials check-in.

    +

    If items that fill hold requests or items that belong at another branch are checked in, and you have set receipt printing (see step 2), the appropriate holds slips or in-transit slips are printed. Depending on your library’s settings in Polaris Administration, you may also see messages alerting you that an item has holds, or that it should go to another branch. Click OK to acknowledge the message and continue scanning items.

    +

    If you receive error messages for no matching item records or other conditions, set the problem items aside and alert the technical services staff.

    +

    Note: +
    If you have entered barcodes in error, you can select the item or items in the list and click Remove Selected Items. The items are removed from the list. At this point the items have been checked in but not received. Technical Services staff can run the Acquisitions report Shelf Ready Items Not Received in Acquisitions to identify these items and resolve their status.
    If you have scanned the same item twice, you can ignore the error. The item is checked in only once.

    +
      +
    1. After the barcodes for all the items in the shipment have been scanned or entered, click the Accept Shipment button.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Try to scan all the barcodes for all the items in a single shipment before clicking Accept Shipment. This reduces the number of purchase order line item segments that are split into two segments—one for the copies received and one for the copies still on-order—and therefore makes further processing easier.

    +

    The scanned items appear in the bottom portion of the workform and the status of the linked purchase order line item segments is changed to Received. The Note column indicates how many copies were ordered and received.

    +

    Note:
    You may notice that the ISBN/UPC number for an item differs in the top and bottom part of the workform. This is because the number in the top view comes from the linked bibliographic record, but the information in the bottom portion comes from the purchase order line item. The data in the purchase order line item reflects the material ordered from the vendor, so the ISBN or UPC number in this column should match what is on the physical item.

    +

    + receiveshipAccept.gif 

    +

    A log report is saved in the database when the shipment is received. Your library’s technical services staff reviews the report for problems.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Checking_In_Shelf-Ready_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Checking_In_Shelf-Ready_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ddfb831 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Checking_In_Shelf-Ready_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking In Shelf-Ready Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking In Shelf-Ready Items

    +

    If your library sends enriched EDI orders using Polaris Acquisitions and receives shipments of shelf-ready barcoded materials, you can scan the items when they are received at the loading dock to check them in so they can be circulated, and update the linked purchase orders at the same time. Your library system may check in and receive new items by this method at a central location, or each branch may process its own new shelf-ready items.

    +

    To check in a shelf-ready item by this method, the matching on-order item record must have a barcode, and it must be linked to a purchase order line item segment. On-order items are created when the purchase order is released and are updated with embedded holdings data when full bibliographic records are imported using the Enriched EDI Orders import profile.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Do_a_normal_check-in_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Do_a_normal_check-in_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17589869 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Do_a_normal_check-in_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform

    +

    You typically use this method when a patron returns items to the circulation desk. (For information on messages or dialog boxes that may appear during check-in, see Check-In Messages and Blocks.)

    +

    Important:
    For the first time after installation only, you need to set up Polaris to print receipts and slips from the current workform. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    To check in items from the Check In workform - Normal view:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Check In on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, click CheckInBut.gif, or press F2.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If your library includes a title column in the list of items checked in, and a checked-in item is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +

    The Check In workform - Normal view opens.

    +
      +
    1. Set the number of free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. in the Free days box or click Pick a date and select a date from the calendar, if you want to use a value different from that shown. See Free Days at Check-In.
    2. +
    +

    When you select a date from the calendar, the system automatically calculates the number of free days. The date box shows the effective date of the check in with free days applied.

    +

    Tip:
    If you are checking in a number of items, some with barcodes and some with RFID tags, group the items so that you check in all of one type, then all of the other. This method is faster than repeatedly switching between the barcode scanner and the RFID reader.

    +
      +
    1. Enter item information using one of the following methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Scan the item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER. If you use RFID tags as well as barcodes, this method does not set the security bit for RFID items.
    • +
    • Select Tools, RFID Check In (or press F9), and place up to 10 items on the antenna tray. This method sets the security bit for each item.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You must select Tools, RFID Check In or press F9 for each batch of items you place on the RFID antenna tray.

    +
      +
    • To find an item without a working barcode, click the Find button next to the Item barcode box to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the item record.
    • +
    +

    +

      +
    • Loading a file of barcodes - Select Tools, Load barcode file, or press CTRL+ALT+I. An explorer window opens, where you can browse to and select the file of barcodes.
    • +
    +

    +

    Tip:
    If your library has Polaris SimplyReports, you can use the following method to create the text file containing the barcodes:
    1. Use the Find Tool to find the item records and apply the appropriate circulation status and branch limits.
    2. Right-click on the search results and select Add to record set.
    3. In Polaris SimplyReports, create an item list report with:
    --- Barcodes selected as the single report output column
    --- Text and Tab-delimited selected as the report output format
    ----The record set you created selected in the Item Record Set filter
    4. Download the text file from SimplyReports.

    +

    The item barcode, due date, status, and comments appear in the list of items checked in. Through settings in Polaris Administration, your library may also choose to display the item’s title, material type, shelf location, call number, assigned branch, and/or the borrower’s name.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat the previous step until you have checked in all the items.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may allow you to view the item’s last or current borrower. Right-click the item, and select Links, Last borrower or Current borrower from the context menu.

    +

    The status bar displays the total number of items checked in.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to print a check-in receipt, follow these steps:
      1. Select the items that should appear on the receipt.
      2. Select File > Print, Check in Receipt.
    2. +
    +

    If items are selected from multiple patrons, the items are grouped by patrons, and three blank lines are added at the end of each group. If auto-cut receipt printing is enabled, the receipt is cut at the end of each patron’s group of items. (Items with no patron information, for example those that went from In to In at check in, are also grouped together and separated from patron items.) The information that appears on the receipt is set in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    The requesting patron’s name is not printed on the receipt when an item becomes held at check in.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Check-in from the Patron Status workform - You can check in an item from the Items Out view of the Patron Status workform. Right-click the item, and select Check In from the context menu.
    • +
    • Check-in from the Item Record workform - Select Tools > Check In, click CheckInBut00025.gif, or press CTRL+I.
    • +
    • Modifying a checked-in item - See Change item information or barcode at check-in.
    • +
    • Viewing check-in data for an item - The Item Record property sheet displays check-in data, including the transaction time, workstation, and logged-in user. Right-click the item in a list view (such as the Find Tool results list), and select Properties from the context menu. Or, on the Item Record workform, select PropBtn.gif on the toolbar.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Bulk_Item_Check-Ins.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Bulk_Item_Check-Ins.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..526997cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Bulk_Item_Check-Ins.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing Bulk Item Check-Ins + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing Bulk Item Check-Ins

    +

    Use the bulk check-in process when you want to do a fast check-in of many items, such as those left in the book drop. Items are processed more quickly because most blocks and dialog boxes do not appear. For example, overdue fines are charged automatically to patron accounts. However, your library can set Polaris to generate alert messages for hold requests, held items, and ILL items during bulk check-in. You may also see an alert message if an item does not belong to your branch.

    +

    Note:
    Offline check-in is also a bulk check-in process. Patron accounts are automatically charged for overdue fines.

    +

    To check in items in bulk mode:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Check In from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the Check In workform.
    2. +
    3. Click CheckInBulkBtn.gif, or select View, Bulk Mode.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can make the Check In workform open to this view by default. Select View, Save Current View as User Default.

    +

    The Check In workform - Bulk view appears.

    +

    Tip:
    If your library includes a title column in the list of items checked in, and a checked-in item is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +
      +
    1. Set the number of free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. in the Free days box or click Pick a date and select a date from the calendar, if you want to use a value different from that shown. See Free Days at Check-In.
    2. +
    +

    When you select a date from the calendar, the system automatically calculates the number of free days. The date box shows the effective date of the check in with free days applied.

    +

    Tip:
    If you are checking in a number of items, some with barcodes and some with RFID tags, group the items so that you check in all of one type, then all of the other. This method is faster than repeatedly switching between the barcode scanner and the RFID reader.

    +
      +
    1. Enter item information using one of the following methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Scan the item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER. If you use RFID tags as well as barcodes, this method does not set the security bit for RFID items.
    • +
    • Select Tools, RFID Check In (or press F9), and place up to 10 items on the antenna tray. This method sets the security bit for each item. You must select Tools, RFID Check In or press F9 for each batch of items you place on the RFID antenna tray.
    • +
    • To find an item without a working barcode, click the Find button next to the Item barcode box to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the item record.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    A Polaris Administration setting (Patron Services parameters - Check-in: Prompt for in-transit in bulk mode) controls whether a prompt appears when you check in an item that belongs to another branch. If the parameter setting is No, no prompt appears and the item’s status automatically changes to In-transit to the other branch. (If you set Polaris for in-transit slip printing at the Check In workform, then an in-transit slip prints. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.) If the parameter setting is Yes, you can choose to change the item’s status to In-transit or In. However, if you choose to change the item’s status to In and keep the item at your branch, the item’s assigned branch is not changed to your branch.

    +

    The item barcode, due date, status, comments, and fine charged to the borrowing patron, if applicable, appear in the list of items checked in. Your library may also choose to display the item’s title, material type, and/or the borrower’s name.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat the previous step until you have checked in all the items.
    2. +
    3. If you want to print a check-in receipt, follow these steps:
      1. Select the items that should appear on the receipt.
      2. Select File > Print > Check in Receipt.
    4. +
    +

    If items are selected from multiple patrons, the items are grouped by patrons, and three blank lines are added at the end of each group. If auto-cut receipt printing is enabled, the receipt is cut at the end of each patron’s group of items. The information that appears on the receipt is set in Polaris Administration. This option is not available for offline check-in.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    +

    +

    + +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Normal_Item_Check-Ins.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Normal_Item_Check-Ins.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae1725aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Doing_Normal_Item_Check-Ins.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing Normal Item Check-Ins + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing Normal Item Check-Ins

    +

    When a patron returns an item to the front desk, you typically check in the item in normal mode, using the Check In workform - Normal view. As you are checking in items, you can do the following if you have the required permissions:

    + +

    In certain situations, such as when an item does not have a barcode label, you do not have the item in front of you, or the item record was created with a status other than In, you can check it in from the Item Record workform. If you are working with a patron record, you can also check in an item from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. Whether you check in an item in normal mode, from the item record, or from the Patron Status workform, alerts may appear during processing. For example, an item may have a block on it, or an item may be overdue. When alerts appear, you must decide how the item should be processed.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to do a quick check-in of many items, such as a load of materials from the book drop, do a bulk check-in. This process eliminates most alerts. See Doing Bulk Item Check-Ins. If you are working with Polaris offline, you can only do a bulk check-in.

    +

    Shelving Status

    +

    If there are no special circumstances, the item’s circulation status changes immediately to In when you check it in, although it may not be returned to the shelf for several hours. This can be confusing for a patron who finds the item in PAC, notes that it is In, but cannot find it because it is still on the book truck. Your library can set a period during which the checked-in item’s In status is displayed as Shelving, or another description. For that period, the shelving status description is displayed for the item in the PAC, Find Tool search results, the PAC preview in the bibliographic record, and the list of linked items available from the bibliographic record or any linked item record. See Setting Shelving Status. You can limit Find Tool item searches by shelving status.

    +

    Free Days at Check-In

    +

    When an overdue item is checked in, free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. are days omitted from the overdue fine calculation so that patrons are not charged for overdues when the library is closed. You can set special free days for normal and bulk check-in. For example, if the library was unexpectedly closed for a day due to a storm, you might permit one or two free days. The default values for normal and bulk free days are set in Polaris Administration. See Calculating Overdue Fines. When you set a different number of free days for check-in, it applies only to your current check-in session. To set free days, you must have the Circulation permission Modify free days: Allow.

    +

    Floating Collections and Check-In

    +

    Your library system or certain branches within the system may use floating collections, where certain items remain at the branch where they were last checked in. If an item is called to another branch, for example to fill a hold request, the item will stay at that branch when it is returned. The items move among branches as they are used, not according to a rotation schedule. See Setting Up Floating Collections.

    +

    Floating collection processing takes place at check-in. The process happens automatically; if the item is not over limits set in Polaris administration, no message is displayed to the staff member when the item floats to its new assigned branch, the check-in branch. The item takes on the circulation parameters of its new assigned branch and remains there until it is checked in at (“floats” to) another branch.

    +

    Check-In Dialog Boxes, Messages, and Blocks

    +

    The following dialog boxes, messages, and blocks may appear during check-in.

    +

    Fine dialog box

    +

    The Fine dialog box may appear during check-in if there is a fine on the item. See Resolve a fine at check-in.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, the Patron Services parameter Check in: auto-charge fine from item work form and find tool context menu controls whether overdue fines are automatically charged to the patron account when overdue items are checked in from the Item workform, the Find Tool context menu, or the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. If the parameter is set to Yes, the Fine dialog box does not appear.

    +

    Item Blocks dialog box

    +

    The Item Blocks dialog box appears during check-in if there are blocks on an item. See Manage item blocks at circulation.

    +

    Holds Messages

    +

    The following messages related to holds may appear during check-in. See Working with Hold Requests:

    +
      +
    • This item satisfies a hold...Do you want to hold the item? - You can designate the item to fill the request, or override the request. See Filling Holds at Circulation. If you fill the hold, and you have set up printing for hold slips from this workform, the slip is automatically printed. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms. You can reprint a hold slip for a held item by checking in the held item a second time, keeping the Held status for the item.
    • +
    • Transfer this item to library for hold? - The item fills a hold request for a patron at another library. You can override the hold, or transfer the item. See Filling Holds at Circulation. If you transfer the item, and you have set up printing for in-transit slips from this workform, the slip is automatically printed. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.
    • +
    +

    Resolve Lost/Billed Item Dialog Box

    +

    Your library may set this dialog box to appear when an item has been declared lost, but the item is found at circulation. See Resolve a lost-and-unpaid item at circulation and Resolve a lost-and-paid item at circulation.

    +

    Circulation Messages

    +

    You may see the following messages related to item circulation:

    +
      +
    • Item does not belong to this branch - Your library may set this message to appear when an item does not belong to your branch. If you choose to put the item in-transit to the item’s assigned branch, and you have set up printing for in-transit slips from this workform, the slip is automatically printed. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms. If you choose to change the item’s status to In and keep the item at your branch, the item’s assigned branch does not change to your branch.
    • +
    • Item is over your suggested limit - If your system uses floating collections with material type limits, this message may appear when you check in a floating item from another branch that exceeds your branch’s limits for floating items of this material type associated with the same bibliographic record. You can continue to check in the item and override the limit, if that is your branch’s policy. Alternatively, you choose to put the item in-transit to its home branch, or you can cancel the check-in.
    • +
    • Collection floating limit reached - If your system uses floating collections with load-balanced collection limits, this message may appear when you check in a floating item from another branch that exceeds your branch’s limits for floating items based on load-balanced collections. You can select Yes to continue to check in the item and override the limit, if that is your branch’s policy. Alternatively, you select No to put the item in-transit, or you can cancel the check-in. If you choose to put the item in-transit, it floats to the branch with lowest ratio of the number of items to collection limit.
    • +
    • Item was withdrawn message - Displayed when the item has been withdrawn from circulation. You can continue to check in the item, or you can cancel the check-in.
    • +
    • Course reserve messages - If your library uses Polaris course reserves, and an item is on reserve for a course, a message informs you that the item is on reserve. You may also see a message if the reserve item is intended for use in the library only. Click OK and put the items in the appropriate areas for reserve items. See Managing Course Reserves.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Resolve_a_fine_at_check-in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Resolve_a_fine_at_check-in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c67303f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Resolve_a_fine_at_check-in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resolve a fine at check-in + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolve a Fine at Check-In

    +

    Fines for overdues, if any, are calculated automatically. When you attempt to check in an overdue item, a Fine dialog box indicates that a fine is being charged. The fine amount in the dialog box shows an amount related to the item you are checking in. The dialog box also warns you if the patron owes additional money not related to this item.

    +

    To pay, waive, or charge a fine to a patron’s account when you check in an overdue item:

    +

    Note:
    In Polaris Administration, the Patron Services parameter Check in: auto-charge fine from item work form and find tool context menu controls whether overdue fines are automatically charged to the patron account when overdue items are checked in from the Item workform, the Find Tool context menu, or the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. If the parameter is set to Yes, the Fine dialog box does not appear.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Change the amount of the fine, if necessary, by typing a new amount in the Fine box (maximum $2,000,000.00).
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To change the fine amount, you must have the Circulation permission Modify fine amount: Allow.

    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To check in the item and confirm that the patron owes money, but you will process the fine later, click Continue.
    • +
    +

    The fine appears in the Pending patron account transactions list. Each entry in this list displays the total amount of all fines for that patron. (If one patron has returned several overdue items, it does not list each individual fine.) Before you can close the Check In workform, you must resolve each patron’s fine by paying, waiving, or charging the patron’s account (see step 4).

    +
      +
    • To check in the item and waive the fine, click Waive.
    • +
    +

    A record of the waiver appears in the Transaction Summary box for the patron account (see Display a transaction’s history ). If you set Polaris for fine receipt printing at the Check In workform, a fine receipt prints (see Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms).

    +

    Note:
    Your library may suppress fine receipts for waive transactions.

    +
      +
    • To check in the item and charge the fine to the patron’s account, click Charge Account.
    • +
    +

    The charge is listed on the Patron Status workform - Account view, where you can pay or waive the charge later. See Processing Charges and Payments.

    +

    Tip:
    To resolve all charges on the patron account, both old and new, click Manage All Fines. See step 7.

    +
      +
    1. If you clicked Continue, and you are ready to process the fine, select the patron line item in the Pending patron account transactions list.
    2. +
    3. If you want to charge the selected line item to the patron’s account, click Charge New on the right side of the Pending patron account transactions list. The line item no longer appears in the list. The charge appears on the Patron Status workform - Account view, where you can resolve the charge later. See Pay charges from the Account view.
    4. +
    5. If you want to pay the selected line item, follow these steps:
      1. Click Pay New on the right side of the Pending patron account transactions list.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, the Class Point of Sale window opens. Follow your library’s procedures to process the payment.

    +
    +

    The Pay dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the amount to pay in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00), if you are paying an amount other than the exact amount of the line item:
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Partial payment (less than the line item amount) - If the line item represents a single charge, the payment will be recorded as a partial payment on the charge, and the Account Transaction list in the patron’s record will show a balance for the charge. If you are making a partial payment on multiple charges, the payment amount is applied to the oldest charges first. See Pay charges from the Account view.
    • +
    • Overpayment (more than the line item amount) - If your library allows overpayments to be recorded as account credits, a dialog box appears that alerts you to the overpayment and provides the choice of crediting the account or not. Click Yes to credit the patron’s account. Click No to pay the charge without recording a credit. (Click Cancel if you entered the wrong amount.) If your library does not allow overpayments to be recorded as credits, a message indicates how much change you should give the patron. Click OK on the message box.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select a payment method in the Method box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box. For more information about taking credit card payments, see Take credit card payments for fines and fees - PayPal Payflow Pro or Take payments for fines and fees - Comprise SmartPAY.

    +
    +

    The line item no longer appears in the list. However, a record of the charge and payment appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box for the patron account. If any charges were only partially paid, or if an overpayment was credited, the transactions appear in the Account Transaction list for the patron account. See Viewing Patron Financial Accounts and Processing Charges and Payments.

    +

    If you set Polaris for fine receipt printing at the Check In workform, a fine receipt prints. You can also opt to print the fine receipt only for patrons who do not receive eReceipts. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to waive the selected line item, follow these steps:
      1. Click Waive New on the right side of the Pending patron account transactions list. The Waive dialog box appears.
      2. Type the amount to waive in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00), if you are waiving an amount other than the exact amount of the line item:
      • Partial waive (less than the line item amount) - For a partial waive on a single charge, the transaction will be recorded as a partial waive on the charge, and the Account Transaction list in the patron account will show a balance for the charge. If you are making a partial waive on multiple or all charges, the waived amount will be applied to the oldest charges first. See Waive charges from the Account view.
      • Distributed waive - If you want to apply the same waived amount to each of multiple charges, select (check) the Distributed Waive check box, and type an amount to waive. If your library does not allow distributed waives, this option is not available for selection.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the distributed waive amount is identical to a charge, the charge is cleared. Charges less than the distributed waive amount are not affected.

    +
    +

    The line item no longer appears in the list. However, a record of the waiver appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box for the patron account.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    If you set Polaris for fine receipt printing at the Check In workform, a fine receipt prints. You can also opt to print the fine receipt only for patrons who do not receive eReceipts. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may suppress fine receipts for waive transactions.

    +
    +
      +
    1. To resolve other charges on this patron’s record, click Manage All Fines on the right side of the Pending patron account transactions list. The Patron Status workform - Account view opens. For information about working with patron accounts, see Patron Status and Accounting.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Fine calculation - Polaris Administration settings control how fines are calculated.
    • +
    • Fine receipt information - The information printed on fine receipts is determined by Polaris Administration settings. With the appropriate permission, you can also modify the message printed on check-out and fine receipts. See Set receipt printer message text.
    • +
    • Working with patron accounts - See Patron Status and Accounting.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Tracking_In-House_Item_Use.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Tracking_In-House_Item_Use.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b424903 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckin/Tracking_In-House_Item_Use.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Tracking In-House Item Use + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Tracking In-House Item Use

    +

    If your library tracks statistics for materials that do not circulate, but are used by patrons in the library, you check the items in after use with an in-house check-in process. (The Year-to-date and Lifetime statistics for in-house usage are updated in each item record, but the circulation statistics are not updated.)

    +

    To check in items that were used in-house:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Check In from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the Check In workform.
    2. +
    3. Click CheckInInHBtn.gif, or select View, InHouse Mode.
    4. +
    +

    The Check In workform - InHouse view appears.

    +

    Tip:

    If you are working with a number of items, some with barcodes and some with RFID tags, group the items so that you process all of one type, then all of the other. This method is faster than repeatedly switching between the barcode scanner and the RFID reader.

    +
      +
    1. Enter item information using one of the following methods:
      • Scan the item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER.
      • Select Tools, RFID Check In (or press F9), and place up to 10 items on the antenna tray. In check-in InHouse mode, security bits are not affected.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    You must select Tools, RFID Check In or press F9 for each batch of items you place on the RFID antenna tray.

    +

    Information about the checked-in item appears in the Items Checked In list.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat the previous step until you have checked in all the items.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Viewing item statistics - To view year-to-date and lifetime in-house usage statistics for an item, open the Item Record workform - Statistics view. The Item Record workform - History view also shows when the item was scanned at in-house check-in.
    • +
    • Reporting in-house use statistics - Run the In-House Use report to see year-to-date and lifetime in-house use statistics for all items, organized by material type. Search Using Polaris Standard Reports.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Assign_a_special_loan_period.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Assign_a_special_loan_period.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1cafcb52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Assign_a_special_loan_period.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Assign a Special Loan Period + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Assign a Special Loan Period

    +

    The usual loan period for an item type is specified through Polaris Administration. However, sometimes you need to change an item’s loan period at check-out or renewal. Perhaps a patron is going on vacation, or you want to override an end-of-term due date. At check-out or renewal, you can create a special loan period for items assigned to your branch if you have the appropriate permission ( Setting Up eReceipts).

    +

    To change the standard loan period before the items are checked out or renewed:

    +

    Note:
    Your library may allow you to reset due dates after items have been checked out. See Reset due dates of checked-out items.

    +
      +
    1. Display the Check Out workform and input the patron’s barcode. See Check out an item.
    2. +
    3. Click Special in the Loan Period area of the workform.
    4. +
    +

    The Special Loan dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Set the due date by one of these methods:
      • To specify the exact date, select a date on the calendar. The loan period appears in the Loan period boxes to the right of the calendar.
      • To specify the loan period, type the number of minutes, hours, or days in the Loan period value box, and select the loan interval (minutes, hours, or days) in the Loan period interval box. These boxes are located to the right of the calendar. The due date is calculated and highlighted on the calendar. The system takes closed days and dates into account when calculating the due date.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options to specify the application of the special loan period:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    The special loan period must be set before you scan the affected items.

    +
    +
      +
    • To apply the loan period to the patron’s next item only, select Apply to next item only.
    • +
    • To apply the loan period to all the items for this patron, select Apply to all items for this patron.
    • +
    • To apply the loan period to all items being checked out during the current session, select Apply to all checkouts. If you select this option, the setting remains in effect until you click Reset on the Checkout workform or close the workform.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Check Out workform appears, and the loan period or due date (depending on the selection method) appears in the Loan Period box.
    2. +
    3. Scan the item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER. The status bar indicates that the checkout was successful. The item information appears in the Items Checked Out list.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Special loan periods at renewal - You can also assign special loan periods when you are renewing items from the Patron Status workform. See Renew items from the Patron Status workform.
    • +
    • +

      Automatic shortened loan periods - Your library may choose to shorten an item’s loan period automatically under the following circumstances:

      +
        +
      • A specified number of hold requests are placed for the item.
      • +
      • The due date is past an end-of-term due date.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    You may see a message that the loan period has been shortened.

    +
      +
    • Hourly loans - Your library determines whether hourly loans of 23 hours or less are due at closing time or due on the next day the library is open. Whether your library allows automatic overnight loans or blocks overnight hourly loans, your library can also set additional time so that items do not become overdue immediately upon the library’s opening.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check-Out_and_Renewal.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check-Out_and_Renewal.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e41d96c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check-Out_and_Renewal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-Out and Renewal + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out and Renewal

    +

    Circulation transactions such as checking out an item record are recorded in both the patron record and the item record, and information from both records is readily available. You can typically link to and work with these records without leaving your basic process, so you can readily resume checking out items or other circulation activities.

    +

    If your library has set the Check Out: Charge Options Patron Services parameter to charge for check-outs and/or renewals, patrons may be charged for check-outs and renewals.

    +

    Note:
    EContent cannot be checked out or renewed from the Polaris staff client. These titles are circulated through the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check_out_an_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check_out_an_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b359113 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Check_out_an_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check Out an Item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Out an Item

    +

    This procedure describes how to check out an item. The procedure is the same when you are working offline, although the workform differs somewhat. For information on messages that may appear, see Check-Out Blocks and Messages.

    +

    To check out items:

    +

    Note:
    Your library may use Polaris Quick-Circ to circulate uncataloged items that will never be fully cataloged. You can create Quick-Circ item records directly at checkout. See Circulating Ephemeral Items.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Check Out from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, click but_chko.gif on the Shortcut Bar, or press F3. The Check Out workform opens.
    2. +
    +

    + pCheckOut.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    From a Find Tool patron records results list, you can right-click a patron record and select Check Out from the context menu. The Check Out workform opens with the patron information filled in.

    +
      +
    1. Enter patron information using one of the following methods:
      • Scan the patron barcode in the Patron barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER.
    2. +
    +

    If your library system allows you to use the last unique portion of a patron barcode, you can type this part of the barcode. If the unique part begins with one or more zeroes, these can be omitted. The system supplies the complete barcode, including any leading zeros.

    +
    +
      +
    • If your library system has configured free text user-defined fields to be used as alternate IDs, enter the alternate ID in the Patron barcode box and press ENTER. For information on enabling check-outs with alternate IDs, see Setting Up Free Text User-Defined Fields for Alternate IDs.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Click the Find button next to the Patron name box to display the Polaris Find Tool, and search for the patron’s record.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If no matching patron record is found, Polaris displays a message. You can express-register a patron at check-out. See Express-Register a New Patron at Check-Out.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If the patron is checking out more materials after completing one transaction, select the arrow by the Patron barcode box or press F4 and select the patron’s barcode from the list. The list contains up to two patron barcodes—the last two patrons. The list is cleared when you close the Check Out workform.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If your library uses 3M™ smart cards, select Tools, Read Smart Card (or press CTRL+ALT+S), and place the patron’s card in the reader.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    To use the smart card reader on this workstation for the first time, you need to enable the smart card reader for the workstation. See Set the workstation for smart card use.

    +
    +
    +

    The Patron barcode, Patron name, and other patron information are filled in. The specific patron fields on the workform are determined by Polaris Administration settings.

    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If your library uses patron photos in patron records and your workstation is set to display the photos, the patron’s photo is displayed on the Check Out workform.

    +
    +
      +
    1. If you want to assign a loan period that is different from the default duration, create a special loan period. See Assign a Special Loan Period.
    2. +
    +

    All daily and weekly loans are due at 11:59 PM on the due date.

    +

    Tip:
    If you are checking out a number of items for a patron, some with barcodes and some with RFID tags, group the items so that you check out all of one type and then all of the other. This method is faster than repeatedly switching between the barcode scanner and the RFID reader.

    +
      +
    1. Enter item information using one of the following methods:
      • Scan the item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER. If RFID tags and barcodes are used, the security bit is not cleared for RFID items.
      • Select Tools, RFID Checkout (or press F9), and place up to 10 items on the antenna tray. This method clears the security bit for each item.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Important:
    You must select Tools, RFID Checkout or press F9for all items you place on the RFID antenna tray. Verify the item record is not open before pressing F9. failure to do so could re-initialize the RFID tag.

    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    To see more information about an item, you can view an item record from the list of items checked out. Right-click an item in the list, and select Open from the context menu. Or select Links from the context menu to see choices related to circulation, holds, bibliographic, and other information.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To find an item without the barcode, click the Find button next to the Item barcode box to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the item record.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If no item record exists, you can create an interim item record at check-out, provided interim template exists. See Create an On-the-Fly Item at Checkout. Use this method for items that will be fully cataloged eventually. If you have an item with no barcode that will never be fully cataloged, see Checking Out Quick-Circ Items.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If your library includes a title column in the list of items checked out, and a checked-out item is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +
    +

    When the item information has been entered, the status bar indicates that the check-out was successful. The item information appears in the list of items checked out. The specific data columns in the list are determined by Polaris Administration settings.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat the previous step until you have checked out all the patron’s items. The total number of items checked out appears in the status bar at the bottom of the workform.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may allow you to reset the due dates of the items listed in the Check Out workform. See Reset Due Dates of Checked-Out Items.

    +
      +
    1. To complete this patron’s session, verify that the Item barcode box is blank, and press ENTER.
    2. +
    +

    Check-out receipt printing:

    +
    +
      +
    • If it is the library’s policy to always print check-out receipts, and the workform is set up to print check-out receipts, a receipt is printed automatically.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    After installation, Polaris will need to be configured to print receipts and slips. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To conserve resources, your library may opt to print a check-out receipt only when the patron requests one. If so, and you have set check-out receipt printing for the workform, instead of automatically printing a receipt, a prompt to print the receipt is displayed and you can ask the patron if he wants a printed receipt. This option applies only to online staff client operations; a checkout receipt with limited data is always printed during offline circulation. 
    • +
    • Your library may provide eReceipts (email and/or text message receipts) for patrons who prefer these instead of printed receipts. If so, and this patron receives an eReceipt, no receipt is printed and no prompt is displayed. For information about eReceipt settings in the patron record, see Add Notification and Receipt Preferences to a Patron Record.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can view and print a list of all the items a patron has currently checked out, regardless of when the items were checked out. See Displaying All Items Out.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Finding bibliographic records: If a patron wants more information about a title, you can search for bibliographic records without leaving the Check Out workform. Click FindBibBtn.gif in the toolbar or press CTRL+B. From the Find Tool results list, open the bibliographic record. This feature is also convenient for finding an item’s missing barcode. Right-click the bibliographic record in the results list, and select Links, Item Records.
    • +
    • Finding any item record: You can search for any item record without leaving the Check Out workform and without entering patron information. Click FindBibBtn00023.gif in the toolbar or press CTRL+B. and select Item Records from the Object list in the Find Tool. You can set the Find Tool so the results list is retained after you select and open an item in the results list. Select the Find Tool Options menu, and ensure the Close on Open is unchecked.
    • +
    • Opening patron workforms: On the Check Out workform, you can select the buttons above the list of items to open the Patron Registration workform and specific Patron Status views. When you move the cursor over a button, you see a tooltip that identifies the button, and an equivalent shortcut key.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Changing due dates
    • +
    • Automatic shortened loan periods: Your library may choose to shorten an item’s loan period automatically when a specified number of hold requests are placed for the item or the due date is past an end-of-term due date. In either case, you may see a message that the loan period has been shortened.
    • +
    • Renewing items with hold requests: When you attempt to renew an item with a hold request placed on it, you may see a block message. With the appropriate permission, you can continue or cancel the renewal and trap the item to fill the hold request. See Renewing Items with Hold Requests.
    • +
    • Offline checkout: For offline circulation, the system calculates the due date by using the workstation branch’s setting for the Patron Services parameter Standard loan period. This is because there is no access to the database during offline circulation. However, the Loaning Branch recorded in the transaction and in the item record is the logged-on user’s branch. This allows libraries to gather statistics for different bookmobile stops based on user log on, while maintaining a consistent loan period for the bookmobile (the workstation branch).
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Items_to_Patrons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Items_to_Patrons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef7e9450 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Items_to_Patrons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking Out Items to Patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking Out Items to Patrons

    +

    You check out items to a patron using the Check Out workform. As you work, the workform lists all the items checked out to a patron during the current session. For details, see Check Out an Item. The upper right portion to the Check Out workform summarizes the patron’s registration information, and the upper left portion of the Check Out workform shows current patron status information and displays updates to the patron’s status as changes occur during checkout.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Uncataloged_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Uncataloged_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..30a6536e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Checking_Out_Uncataloged_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking Out Uncataloged Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking Out Uncataloged Items

    +

    Using the on-the-fly (OTF) function, you create minimal-level item and bibliographic records, according to the template the library has previously defined. This allows the uncataloged items to be checked out before they are fully cataloged.

    +

    Note:
    Your library may circulate materials that are never intended for full cataloging (ephemeral items). These do not require an on-the-fly template. See Circulating Ephemeral Items.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_an_on-the-fly_item_at_checkout.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_an_on-the-fly_item_at_checkout.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04c3cba3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_an_on-the-fly_item_at_checkout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create an On-the-Fly Item at Checkout + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create an On-the-Fly Item at Checkout

    +

    To create an item record on-the-fly for uncataloged items as you check them out:

    +

    Important:
    You must have an on-the-fly item template already created to do this procedure. See Create On-the-Fly Item Templates. Also, the Polaris permission Create an on-the-fly item at checkout: Allow must be set for your user name and workstation.

    +
      +
    1. If you scan or type an item barcode at the Check Out workform and Polaris alerts you that the item is not linked to a record, confirm that you want to create a record on-the-fly by clicking Yes.
    2. +
    +

    On-the-fly item barcodes cannot begin or end with spaces.

    +

    Note: 
    If you click No, the Check Out workform appears with the Item barcode box cleared, allowing you to check out other items.

    +

    The Brief Item Entry dialog box appears with the new barcode in the Barcode box.

    +

    Tip: 
    To make items easier to search for and find, type OTF in the Title or Call number boxes or add OTF to the call number field in the template.

    +
      +
    1. Type the title in the Title box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Initial articles, such as A, An, or The, are not observed when OTF titles are indexed. It may be advisable not to enter initial articles when typing a title.

    +
      +
    1. Type a call number in the Call number box, if appropriate.
    2. +
    3. Type an author in the Author box (optional).
    4. +
    5. If you want to type a note, type the information in the Free text block.
    6. +
    7. Review the default settings in the remaining boxes and change them, if necessary.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    By default, Set OTF Block is checked. When this option is selected, and a previously uncataloged OTF item is checked in, a block message notifies you that it requires full cataloging. You can override the block to check in the item and allow it to circulate. However, the item will be blocked at circulation until it is fully cataloged, or until you save the item record and choose to stop blocking the item. When the block is cleared, the First Available Date fields for the item and linked bibliographic records are set.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to submit your settings.
    2. +
    +

    If Set OTF Block is checked, you see a message indicating that the item was created on-the-fly and requires full cataloging. Click OK to continue. The item is created with the Polaris-assigned block.

    +

    Note:
    If Set OTF Block was checked, the item will be blocked at circulation until it is fully cataloged, or until you save the item record. Upon saving the record, a prompt appears. Click No to stop blocking the item.

    +

    The Check Out workform appears with the item information in the Items Checked Out list. The status bar indicates that the checkout was successful.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_on-the-fly_item_templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_on-the-fly_item_templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c206ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Create_on-the-fly_item_templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create On-the-Fly Item Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create On-the-Fly Item Templates

    +

    If you will circulate on-the-fly items, you must first create an on-the-fly template. To create the template for uncataloged on-the-fly items:

    +

    Notes:
    Each branch that allows uncataloged items to be checked out needs an on-the-fly template as described here. You need to do this procedure only once for each branch.
    You need a separate template for ILL items. See Receiving Interlibrary Loans.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the New dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select Item Template from the Objects list, and click OK. The Item Template workform - Cataloging view appears.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Type On the fly in the Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Name the template exactly as it appears here.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch (not yourself) in the Template owner box.
    2. +
    3. In the Circ status box (Identification section of the workform), select In.
    4. +
    5. Make the following settings in the Circulation parameters section of the workform:
      1. Select the material code in the Material type box.
      2. Select the loan period code in the Loan period box.
      3. Select the fine code in the Fine code box.
      4. Set the number of times an item can be renewed in the Renewal limit box.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Make the following settings in the Call number section of the workform:
      1. Select the shelving system in the Scheme box.
      2. (Optional) To track on-the-fly records more easily, type OTF in the Class box. OTF is then automatically inserted in the item’s call number when the item record is created.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. If you want to input or change information in other boxes (such as Assigned [branch] or Collection), type or select the information.
    2. +
    3. Select a branch in the Home branch field. This field is used in floating collections processing. If your system does not use floating collections, set the Home branch to the same organization as the Assigned branch.
    4. +
    5. If your system uses floating collections, and your branch does not float OTF items, select (check) Do not float.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save to save the template.
    8. +
    +

    Once you have created the appropriate template, you can check out on-the-fly items. See Create an on-the-fly item at checkout.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Express-register_a_new_patron_at_check-out.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Express-register_a_new_patron_at_check-out.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e49f45c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Express-register_a_new_patron_at_check-out.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Express-Register a New Patron at Check-Out + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Express-Register a New Patron at Check-Out

    +

    With the appropriate Circulation permission (Patron registration: Create express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons. record), and if express registration is enabled for your branch, you can register a patron from the Check Out workform. The new patron can check out items immediately upon registering, but your library may have a block placed automatically on the new patron record so that the registration information is reviewed and the block cleared before further circulation transactions occur.

    +

    To register a patron at check-out:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Check Out to display the Check Out workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Express Registration, click pExRegIcon.gif, or press CTRL+G. The Express Registration workform appears. The Express Registration workform has the same fields as the Patron Registration workform, but your library specifies values that automatically appear on the Express Registration workform and required fields.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    Tab between boxes on the workform to speed data entry. In each drop-down box, you can type the first letter of an option, rather than selecting it from the list.

    +
      +
    1. Fill in the workform with the appropriate data (see Create a patron record).
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    These fields are always required: Barcode; Last name; First name; Registered at; Patron code; Expiration term/date; Address check term/date; Notification option and corresponding notification field (for example, Voice phone 1 and the telephone number).Your library may require additional fields. Required fields are displayed in bold type.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save or press CTRL+S to save the record. The Check Out workform appears with the Patron barcode, Name, and Registered at boxes filled in, and you can continue checking out the item.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Express registration blocks - A Polaris Administration setting controls whether a Verify Patron block is placed on a patron record created through express registration. Set Express Registration Default Values and Required Fields. For information about clearing the block, Resolve a Verify Patron block.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renew_items_from_the_Patron_Status_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renew_items_from_the_Patron_Status_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4acc48b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renew_items_from_the_Patron_Status_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Renew Items from the Patron Status Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Renew Items from the Patron Status Workform

    +

    If your library charges for checkouts and renewals, and you are renewing an overdue item, you can resolve the overdue and renewal charges at once. See Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges.

    +

    To renew items from the Patron Status workform:

    +

    Note:
    For information on messages and dialog boxes that may appear while you are renewing items, see Check-Out Blocks and Messages.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s rec ord in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If a checked-out item is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Items Out or click ItemsOutBtn.gif to display the Items Out view.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options:
      • If you are renewing one or multiple items, select the items in the Items Out list, and click pRenewIcon.gif or press CTRL+R.
      • If you are renewing all items, click pRenewAllIcon.gif or press CTRL+A.
      • If you are doing a special renewal, select the appropriate items in the Items Out list, and click pSpecRenewIcon.gif or press CTRL+E. The Special Loan dialog box appears. See Assign a special loan period. The permission of “Modify renewal period” is required to select this option.
    2. +
    +

    The new due dates are displayed.

    +

    Receipt Printing

    +
      +
    • A receipt prints automatically if it is the library’s policy to always print the check-out receipt and you have set this workform to print check-out receipts.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For the first time after installation only, you need to set up Polaris to print receipts and slips. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
      +
    • If it is your library’s policy to print a check-out receipt only when the patron requests one, select Tools, Options and uncheck the Check out receipt option. If the patron requires a printed receipt, print the Items Out list by clicking the printer icon above the list (or press CTRL+ALT+).
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The library can specify the information included on the printed Items Out list. SeeSet Items Out receipt options.

    +
      +
    • Your library may provide eReceipts (e mail and/or text message receipts) for patrons who prefer these instead of printed receipts. For information about eReceipt settings in the patron record, see Add notification data to a patron record.
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Change due dates without renewal - See Reset due dates of checked-out items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renewing_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renewing_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3c6624b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Renewing_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Renewing Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Renewing Items

    +

    When you renew an item for a patron, the new due date is calculated automatically, based on the library’s standard policies. However, you can also assign a special loan period for the renewal (see Assign a special loan period).

    +

    If your library has enabled automatic renewal, items that are checked out and eligible to be renewed are renewed automatically.

    +

    You can do a renewal from the following locations in Polaris:

    +
      +
    • Check Out workform - When you attempt to check out an item that has already been checked out to the selected patron, Polaris prompts you for renewal confirmation. See Check out an item for this method.
    • +
    • Patron Status workform - Items Out view - If you want to renew one or several items checked out to a patron, you can do the renewal from this location. This method is convenient because you can select and renew multiple items without scanning the barcodes. See Renew items from the Patron Status workform for this method.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may allow patrons to renew items from the PAC or by telephone. If so, the library may set special conditions for these patron-initiated renewals.

    +

    +

    +

    If your library has set the Check Out: Charge Options Patron Services parameter to charge for renewals and prompt the user regarding the charge, the renewal charge appears on the same dialog box as the overdue charge when renewing overdue items. See Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges.

    +

    Renewing Items with Hold Requests

    +

    If you try to renew an item with Active, Inactive, or Pending requests for that title, the renewal may be blocked and a message displayed.

    +

    Your library can control this blocking message at the System level using the Patron Services Administration parameter Renewals: Block if there are holds. When this parameter is set to Yes, the block message is always displayed when there are requests for the title. When set to No, the block message is displayed only when the item being renewed is the only item available to fill the request. If other holdable and potentially eligible items are In, no dialog box appears and the item can be renewed.

    +

    When you see the block message, with the appropriate permission you can renew the item or cancel the renewal and trap the item to fill the hold request.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Reset_due_dates_of_checked-out_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Reset_due_dates_of_checked-out_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e8c9ea09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Reset_due_dates_of_checked-out_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reset due dates of checked-out items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reset Due Dates of Checked-Out Items

    +

    Your library may allow you to change the due dates of selected items after they have been checked out. (The items must have a status of Out.) For example, a patron may realize that she will be out of town on the original due date, so you make the item due a few days later. You can reset the due dates from the list of checked-out items in the Check Out workform or the Items Out view of the Patron Status workform if you have the appropriate permissions (see Set Items Out receipt options).

    +

    To reset due dates:

    +
      +
    1. Select the item or items in the item list of the Check Out workform or the Patron Status workform: +
      • Check Out workform - Select the items in the list view, then select Tools, Reset Due Date, click ResetDateIcon.gif on the toolbar, or press CTRL+ALT+D. (You can also right-click a selected item and select Reset Due Date from the context menu.)
      • Patron Status workform - Items out View - Select the items in the list view and select the Reset Due Date icon ResetDateIcon00024.gif above the list view (or press CTRL+ALT+D). You can also right-click a selected item and select Reset Due Date from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Reset Due Date calendar control opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select the new date on the calendar, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The new date must be in the future. If the selected date is a closed date or day, the system displays a message, and you can accept the new date or cancel the operation. You may also see messages for the following item blocks: system-assigned blocks; library-assigned blocks; free text blocks; non-circulating item blocks; ILL items. See Manage item blocks at circulation.

    +

    When you click OK, the calendar closes and the new due date for the item or items is displayed in the item list view.

    +

    Note:
    When you reset due dates from the Check Out workform, the check-out receipt lists each item with the original due date, with a note at the end stating the new due date. If the date has been changed more than once, the last date chosen is noted. If different dates have been set for multiple items, the date of the last item changed is printed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_a_fine_at_renewal.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_a_fine_at_renewal.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df8f4ac7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_a_fine_at_renewal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resolve a Fine at Renewal + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolve a Fine at Renewal

    +

    If your library charges fines for overdues, Polaris automatically calculates the fine amount. When you attempt to renew an overdue item at the Check Out workform or the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, a message indicates that the patron owes a fine for the item. You need permission to renew overdue items to renew the items and resolve the charge. If your library charges for renewals and overdues, see Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges.

    +

    To pay, waive, or charge a fine when you renew an overdue item:

    +

    Important:
    If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, you cannot pay a fine from the Check Out workform or the Patron Status workform - Items out view. Instead, you must charge the fine to the patron’s account, then pay it from the Patron Status workform - Account view.

    +
      +
    1. Renew an overdue item from the Check Out workform (see Check out an item) or the Patron Status workform - Items Out view (see Renew items from the Patron Status workform). The Overdue Fine dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If your library automatically waives overdue fines at renewal, the Overdue Fine dialog box does not appear. However, an auto-waive transaction line item appears in the patron’s account in the Transaction Summary dialog box. See Display completed account transactions.

    +

    Tip:
    To cancel the renewal, click Cancel.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to pay the fine and allow the renewal, follow these steps:
      1. Click Pay. The Pay dialog box appears.
      2. Type the amount to pay in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00), if you are paying an amount other than the exact amount of the fine:
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Partial payment (less than the fine) - The payment will be recorded as a partial payment on the fine, and the Account Transaction list in the patron’s record will show a balance for the charge. See Pay charges from the Account view.
    • +
    • Overpayment (more than the fine) - If your library allows overpayments to be recorded as account credits, a dialog box appears that alerts you to the overpayment and provides the choice of crediting the account or not. Click Yes to credit the patron’s account. Click No to pay the charge without recording a credit. (Click Cancel if you entered the wrong amount.)

      If your library does not allow overpayments to be recorded as credits, a message indicates how much change you should give the patron. Click OK on the message box.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select a payment method in the Method box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box. For more information about taking credit card payments, see Take credit card payments for fines and fees - PayPal Payflow Pro or Take payments for fines and fees - Comprise SmartPAY

    +
    +

    A record of the charge and payment appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box for the patron account. If the fine was only partially paid, or if an overpayment was credited, the transactions appear in the Account Transaction list for the patron account. See Viewing Patron Financial Accounts and Processing Charges and Payments.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to waive the fine and allow the renewal, click Waive. The dialog box closes. A record of the waiver appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box for the patron account.
    2. +
    3. If you want to charge the fine to the patron’s account and allow the renewal, click Charge Account. The charge appears on the Patron Status workform - Account view. To resolve the charge later, you must pay or waive the fine from the Account view. See Pay charges from the Account view.
    4. +
    +

    If you set Polaris for fine receipt printing at this workform, a fine receipt prints (see Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms).

    +

    Note:
    Your library may suppress fine receipts for waive transactions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_fines_and_renewal_charge.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_fines_and_renewal_charge.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81e6b2ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Resolve_fines_and_renewal_charge.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges

    +

    If your library has set the Check Out: Charge Options Patron Services parameter to charge for renewals and prompt the user regarding the charge, the renewal charge appears on the same dialog box as the overdue charge when renewing overdue items.

    +

    To resolve overdue fines and renewal charges:

    +
      +
    1. Renew an overdue item from the Patron Status or Check Out workform. The Renew chargeable overdue item dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the actions for the checkout and overdue charge. If you select Pay for both the checkout and overdue amounts, the payment amount is totaled at the bottom of the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select OK to renew the item and take the selected actions for the check-out and overdue charges.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Viewing_Item_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Viewing_Item_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fcba593 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/Viewing_Item_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Viewing Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing Item Records

    +

    As you do circulation transactions, information in the affected item records is updated. This information appears on the Item Record workform. From the Item Record workform, you can link to relevant patron records, hold requests, and other information.

    +

    This section is a summary of item record features. Your Polaris administrator can set a preferred opening view for the item record workform. See Display item record information.

    +

    To display the Item Record workform +

    +

    Note:
    You need specific permission to access item records, and to modify the various Item Record workform views.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click an item in the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, the Check Out workform, or the Check In workform, and select Open from the context menu. The Item Record workform opens. + +

      Note:
      You can also open an item record by searching for it with the Find Tool. Select Cataloging, Item Records on the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

      Tip:
      You can see a summary of useful circulation and other information in the item record’s property sheet. In a Find Tool results list, right-click the item record and select Properties from the context menu. On the Item Record workform, click PropBtn.gif.

    2. +
    3. Select a view: +
      • Select View, Cataloging or click CatBtn.gif to see circulation and request settings, and call number details.
      • Select View, Circulation or click CircBtn.gif to see current and past circulation data, hold information, and details about In Transit and Transferred transactions. To open the current or last borrower’s record in the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, select Links, Borrower, or double-click the patron barcode in the Current borrower or Last borrower field. If the item is being held for a patron, you can open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Requests view. Select Links, Held For, or double-click the patron barcode in the Held for patron field. The Held at field shows the pickup branch when the request status is Held, Unclaimed, or Shipped. See Working with Hold Requests.
      • Select View, Source and Acquisition or click SourceBtn.gif to see acquisition information such as price, funding, and order details, information about the imported bibliographic record, if any, and donor information, if any. This view also shows circulation statistics, the item’s first available date, and the item’s last inventory date.
      • Select View, Notes and Notices or click NoteBtn.gif to see an item’s notice history, notes, and blocks. When an item has a note, the Notes and Notices icon changes to yellow NotesBtnYellowItem.gif. When an item has a block, the Notes and Notices icon changes to red ItemBlockIcon.gif. See Working with Blocks (Stops).
      • Select View, History or click itemrechistvw.gifto see the circulation history of an item as it circulates, including the method by which the item was checked out or renewed. This view also shows the item’s home branch and whether it is allowed to float, information that is useful if your system uses floating collections. + + + +

        Note:
        Your library may choose to remove patron ID information from the item record history after a specified period of time.

      • Select View, Reserves or click ResBtn.gifto see circulation settings that apply to the item if it is placed on reserve for a course, and a list of the linked course records. If the item is on reserve, this view opens first. See Managing Course Reserves.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/check_out_blocks_msgs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/check_out_blocks_msgs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e534c42 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPckout/check_out_blocks_msgs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + Check-Out Blocks and Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out Blocks and Messages

    +

    Messages and blocks may appear during check-out and renewal:

    +

    Note:

    Specific permissions are required to override many types of circulation blocks.

    +

    Patron and Item Blocks

    +
      +
    • Patron blocks - You may see the Patron Blocks dialog box during check-out. Patron blocks relate to patron record conditions, such as overdue fines or the need to verify patron data. The Patron Blocks dialog box may also list blocks on associated patron records. See Manage patron blocks at circulation.
    • +
    • Patron has unread messages - If a patron has unread messages, an alert message appears in the Patron Blocks dialog box. You can continue the check-out operation or cancel it, and you can also click the block text to open the Patron Status workform - Notes view. The alert message does not place any blocks on patron activity in the PAC. For more information about patron messages, see Posting Patron Messages.
    • +
    • Item blocks - During check-out, you may see the Item Blocks dialog box. An item block may indicate that an item should not be checked out, or that it requires special handling. See Manage item blocks at circulation.
    • +
    • Non-circulating items - You may see a message regarding restricted circulation. Your library may designate some items as non-circulating to all patrons, or may allow some items to circulate only to certain patrons. You can override the library policy and continue the check-out, or cancel the check-out for this item.
    • +
    +

    Overdue Fines

    +
      +
    • Overdue Fine dialog box - This dialog box appears if there is a fine on an item that has already been checked out. You can accept payment and renew, waive the fine and renew, charge the patron’s account and renew, or cancel the transaction. For details, see Resolve a fine at renewal. If the fine is on another patron’s account, the Pay option is not available.
    • +
    • Automatic fine waivers - Your library may choose to automatically waive overdue fines at check-out. For example, a patron may check out an item, and a message indicates the item is already checked out to another patron. If the item is also overdue, the library may want to simply forgive the fine. If Polaris is set to waive the fines, the Overdue Fine dialog box does not appear during check-out.
    • +
    +

    Checkout/Renewal Charge

    +
      +
    • Patron checkout charge dialog box - Opens when you scan an item at checkout or renewal, the item’s assigned branch has placed a charge on the item for checkout or renewal, and your library has set this dialog box to appear. You can accept payment and continue the transaction, waive the charge and continue the transaction, charge the patron’s account and continue the transaction, or cancel the transaction. If your library charges for renewals, and you are renewing an overdue item, the Renew chargeable overdue item dialog box opens. See Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges.
    • +
    • Renew chargeable overdue item dialog - If your library has set the Check Out: Charge Options Patron Services parameter to charge for renewals and prompt the user regarding the charge, the renewal charge appears on the same dialog box as the overdue charge when renewing overdue items. Renew Overdue Items - Resolve Fines and Renewal Charges.
    • +
    +

    Item Belongs to Another Library

    +

    You may see the following messages regarding an item’s assigned branch:

    +
      +
    • This item is assigned to library. Do you want to continue with this transaction? - The item does not belong to your branch. You can continue or cancel the check-out. If you cancel the check-out, a message asks if you want to put the item in-transit to the assigned branch. You can put the item in-transit to the item’s assigned branch, or you can keep the item at your branch.
    • +
    • This item is in transit to library. - The item’s status indicates that it has been put in-transit to its assigned branch. However, you can still continue the check-out, or cancel it.
    • +
    +

    Holds Messages

    +

    During check-out or renewal, the following messages may appear relating to holds (see Working with Hold Requests):

    +
      +
    • This item satisfies a hold...Do you want to hold the item? - The item satisfies a hold request for another patron. You can designate the item to fill the request (and stop the check-out), or override the request and continue with check-out. If you override the hold, a message asks if you want to reactivate the hold request for the patron whose hold request was overridden. This message will only display if the hold request option “Trap at check-out” is set for your branch. If your library has not set this option, the item will check out to the patron and the hold request will remain as it was for the requesting patron.
    • +
    +

    Note:

    If you trap the item to fill the request, and hold slips are printed from the Check Out workform, a hold slip prints at the end of the check-out session. For information on setting your workstation to print hold slips, see Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
      +
    • This item cannot be checked out, because it is being held - The item is being held for another patron. You can override the hold and continue with check-out, or stop the check-out process. If you override the hold, a message asks if you want to reactivate the hold request for the patron whose hold request was overridden.
    • +
    • Transfer this item to library for hold? - The item fills a hold request for a patron at another library. You can override the hold and continue with check-out, or stop the check-out process and transfer the item. If you override the hold, a message asks if you want to reactivate the hold request for the patron whose hold request was overridden. This message will only display if the hold request option “Trap at check-out” is set for your branch. If your library has not set this option, the item will check out to the patron and the hold request will remain as it was for the requesting patron.
    • +
    +

    Note:

    If you transfer the item, and in-transit slips are printed from the Check Out workform, an in-transit slip prints at the end of the check-out session. For information on setting your workstation to print in-transit slips, see Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Circulation Messages

    +

    You may see the following messages related to item circulation:

    +
      +
    • Item is over the renewal limit - Renew the item anyway, or cancel the renewal.
    • +
    • The item is already checked out to this patron - Renew the item, or cancel the renewal.
    • +
    • This item is already checked out to another patron - Check in the item and then check it out to the current patron, or cancel the check-out. For information about check-in, see Doing Normal Item Check-Ins.
    • +
    • Item has an unexpected status - Items with a status such as Withdrawn must be checked in before checking out.
    • +
    • Item is due at library closing time - Allow the item to circulate overnight, or make the item due at closing time.
    • +
    • Item is on reserve for two or more courses - Select the course for which the item is being checked out, or select no course.
    • +
    • Routed serial item - If you try to check out a routed serial item, you receive an error message. Check the item in to change its circulation status from Routed to In (see Doing Normal Item Check-Ins), and then check it out. Or, go to the Notes view on the linked Issue record and change the issue’s status to Returned or blank Change an Issue or Part’s Status). The item record’s circulation status will be changed to In.
    • +
    • Dispensing unit - If your library circulates certain items from a media dispenser, you may see an alert message (Please retrieve items from the dispensing unit or a similar message) when a dispenser item is checked out. Click OK to acknowledge the message, remind the patron to go to the dispenser unit to pick up the item, and continue.
    • +
    • Resolve lost/billed item dialog box - This dialog box appears when an item has been declared lost, but the item is found at circulation. See Resolve a lost-and-unpaid item at circulation and Resolve a lost-and-paid item at circulation.
    • +
    +

    Outreach Services Patrons

    +

    You may see the following messages related to Outreach Services patrons.

    +

    See Outreach Services Processing.

    +
      +
    • If a specific item has been checked out to an active outreach services patron in the past, a message appears. You can continue to check out the item, or cancel the check-out.
    • +
    • Your library may display a prompt to update an active Outreach Services patron’s next service date if the item is not on the patron’s pick list. If you choose to update the next service date from the prompt, the patron’s Next Service Date and Last Service Date are updated based on the Outreach Services delivery schedule set for that patron. If no prompt is displayed, or if you choose not to update the service date, the patron’s next service date is not affected.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Estimate_fines_from_the_Patron_Status_workform_-_Claims_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Estimate_fines_from_the_Patron_Status_workform_-_Claims_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc5e667e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Estimate_fines_from_the_Patron_Status_workform_-_Claims_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Estimate fines from the Patron Status workform - Claims view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Estimate Fines from the Patron Status Workform - Claims View

    +

    If your library has opted to include items in the estimated fine calculation that are declared or billed lost but the overdue fine has not yet been charged, and/or claimed items, you can estimate  for a patron on these items as well as others currently checked out. (The library may also choose to include estimated fines in the threshold calculation that determines if a patron should be blocked for overdue fines.) You can estimate  for a patron on items that are currently checked out, calculating the fines if the items were returned today or on a date you select.

    +

    To estimate fines for a patron from the Patron Status workform - Claims view:

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform (refer to Find patron services and related records).
    2. +
    3. Select View, Claims or click ClaimVuBtn00029.gif to display the Claims view.
    4. +
    5. Click the Estimated Fines icon EstFinesIcon.gif above the Claims list.
    6. +
    +

    The Estimated Fines dialog box opens. The dialog box shows the fine on each item and the total estimated fines if the items are returned today.

    +

    Note:
    The displayed amount never exceeds the maximum fine limit per material type set up in Polaris Administration, even if the calculated amount is greater. That is, the patron is never charged more that the maximum fine limit.

    +
      +
    1. To view the estimated fines if the items are returned at a future date, click the calendar icon and use the calendar control to set the date; then click Recalculate.
    2. +
    3. Click Print to print the information on the printer specified for the workstation.
    4. +
    +

    The information is formatted for a receipt printer and includes the title, author, due date, and estimated fine. Claimed (and lost items, if included in the calculation) are included in the printed information.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    You can also estimate fines from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. See Estimate fines on currently checked out items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Make_a_claim.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Make_a_claim.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a319b913 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Make_a_claim.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Make a claim + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Make a Claim

    +

    To assign a claim status to a patron’s checked-out item:

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See: Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Items Out or click Items Out button to display the Items Out view.
    4. +

      Tip:
      If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

      +
    5. Select the appropriate item or items from the Items Out list, and click above the list. To select more than one item, press CTRL and click the items.
    6. +

      The Make Claim dialog box opens.

      +
    7. Select a claim status (Claim Returned or Claim never had) in the Status box and click OK.
    8. +

      The Make Claim dialog closes and the Items Out view appears. The item or items no longer appear in the Items Out list because the item status has changed.

      +

      Note:
      To view claimed and lost items, select View > Claims ;or click to display the Patron Status workform - Claims view. You can link to an item record from the Claims view. Right-click the item in the Claims list, and select Print or Item Record.

      +
    9. If a message appears asking if you want to apply the claim status to all selected items, click OK to confirm that you want to apply the status.
    10. +

      Note:
      To resolve a claim, you must check in the item. After the claimed item is checked in, the item no longer appears in the Claims list.

      +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Claimed Items report - The Claimed Items report lists Claimed Never Had and Claim Returned items, grouped by the items’ assigned branches. Patron information is included for each item. You can filter the report by organization. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Cataloging in the Polaris Reports dialog box. Using Polaris Standard Reports.
    • +
    • Declare an item lost - See Managing Lost Items.
    • +
    • Claim Missing Parts - Items with a claim type of Claim Missing Parts may appear on the Claims view of the Patron Status workform if the patron returned an item with a missing part. You can select the item and charge the patron for the missing parts or declare the item lost if the item must be removed from circulation. See Manage Items with a Claim Missing Parts Status.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Manage items with missing parts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Manage items with missing parts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66f30d6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Manage items with missing parts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Manage Items with a Claim Missing Parts Status + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Items with a Claim Missing Parts Status

    +

    Tip: +
    You can search for items with a status of Claim Missing Part in the Find Tool by setting the Search by or Limit by option to Circulation Status > Claim Missing Parts.

    +

    When a staff member uses the Special Item Check-in dialog box to check in multi-part items for which a part or parts are missing, she can update the items to a status of Claim Missing Parts. This blocks the item from being circulated; moves the item to the Claims view of the Patron Status workform; and generates a notice to the patron. See Check In Items With Missing Parts.

    +

    If an item with a status of Claim Missing Parts is listed in the Claims view of the Patron Status workform, you can charge the patron for the missing part if the item is salvageable, or declare the item lost if it is not salvageable. You can also see the notification history regarding the item with a missing part.

    +

    To manage items with a status of Claim Missing Parts:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Patron Status workform, and go to the Claims view.
    2. +
    3. Select an item with a Claim Type of Claim Missing Parts.
    4. +
    5. To see notices sent regarding this item, click the Notification history button or press CTRL+N.
    6. +
    7. Charge the patron for the missing part or, if the item cannot be circulated, declare the item lost and charge for the total replacement cost:
      • To declare the item lost and send a bill for the replacement charge to the patron, click pLostIcon.gif or press CTRL+L to display the Declare lost item dialog box, and enter the information for the unsalvageable item. See Declare an Item Lost.
      • To charge the patron for the missing part and optionally send a bill, click the Check In/Charge button . The Charge for missing parts dialog box appears where you can enter the charge, reason, and notes. You can select the Send a bill check box and optionally add a message to be included on the bill.
    8. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the patron has already been billed for the item, a message appears instructing you to check in the item using normal check in.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Reset_patrons_total_claims_count.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Reset_patrons_total_claims_count.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e7208cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Reset_patrons_total_claims_count.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Reset a patron’s total claims count + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reset a Patron’s Total Claims Count

    +

    Staff members with the appropriate permission can reset a patron’s total (lifetime) claim count to 0. This prevents the situation where a patron record might be permanently blocked for exceeding the total claim limit even when claims have been resolved satisfactorily.

    +

    To reset a patron’s total claim count:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system-level Circulation permission Patron claims: Reset total claim count: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform (refer to Find patron services and related records).
    2. +
    3. Select View > Claims or click to display the Claims view.
    4. +
    5. Click the Reset total claims icon above the claims list or press ALT+C. The option is not available if the total claims count is 0.
    6. +

      The Reset total claims? confirmation message appears.

      +
    7. Click OK to confirm.
    8. +

      The total claims counter is set to 0. (The current claims count is not affected.)

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Working_with_Claims.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Working_with_Claims.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc8f063d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPclaims/Working_with_Claims.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Claims + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Claims

    +

    You assign a claim status to an item when Polaris shows that an item is out, but the patron claims that she returned the item (Claim Returned) or never had the item (Claim Never Had). Polaris keeps track of a patron’s current claims and the total number of claims the patron has ever had.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, the library sets limits for current and total claims. If a patron exceeds these limits, circulation is blocked for that patron. If you have the appropriate Circulation permission (Patron claims: Reset total claim count: Allow), you can reset a patron’s total claim count so that the patron record is not permanently blocked. See Reset a patron’s total claims count.

    +

    A Polaris Administration setting also controls whether fines are charged when an overdue claimed item is checked in or checked out. See Fines for Claimed Items.

    +

    If your library includes items that are declared or billed lost but the overdue fine has not yet been charged, and/or claimed items in the estimated overdue fine calculation on checked-out items, you can estimate these from the Patron Status workform - Claims view. The library may also choose to include these estimated fines in the threshold calculation that determines if a patron should be blocked for overdue fines.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Add_instructors_to_a_course_reserve_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Add_instructors_to_a_course_reserve_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0a0c9be --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Add_instructors_to_a_course_reserve_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add instructors to a course reserve record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Instructors to a Course Reserve Record

    +

    Instructors must have existing patron records in your Polaris system. Once an instructor is associated with a course, the instructor can access course reserve information from the PAC patron account.

    +

    To add one or more instructors to a course reserve record:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging (or Patron Services), Course Reserve Records on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click but_courseReserve.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool opens.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the course reserve record with the Find Tool, and open the record from the results list.
    2. +
    +

    See Finding Existing Course Reserve Records.

    +
      +
    1. Click NAddInstrIcon.gif to display the Add Instructors dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Input the patron barcode of the instructor, using one of the following methods:
      • Scan the barcode from the instructor’s library card, or type the barcode and press ENTER.
      • Click Find to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the instructor’s patron record. See Find patron services and related records.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To create more instructor links to the record, repeat the previous step until all the patron barcodes have been entered.
    2. +
    3. To designate an instructor as primary or alternate, select the instructor and select Primary or Alternate in the Designation box.
    4. +
    +

    The default setting is Primary. If you select multiple instructors, all receive the same designation.

    +
      +
    1. To input a note, select the instructor and type the text in the Note box.
    2. +
    +

    If you select multiple instructors, the same note is added for each one.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to submit your settings.
    2. +
    +

    The Instructors view lists the instructors. The status bar indicates that the link has been created. In all the patron records you added as instructors, the Instructor check box is checked to indicate the link with a course reserve record.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Designate an instructor from a patron record - From an open patron record, select Tools, Add to Course Reserve. Use the Find Tool to identify and select the course reserve record.
    • +
    • Edit Notes and Designation - In the Instructors view of the Course Reserve record, select the instructor, click NEditInstrIcon.gif and edit the information.
    • +
    • Remove an instructor - In the Instructors view of the Course Reserve record, select the instructor, and click NDeleteInstrIcon.gif to delete the link with the instructor’s patron record.
    • +
    • Instructor’s address - The instructor’s address in the Course Reserve record is taken from the Office address fields in the patron record. If no office address exists, the address is taken from the Home address fields, or from the first address available if there is no Home address. You can edit the office address in the patron record, and the changes are displayed in the course reserve records to which the instructor’s patron record is linked.
    • +
    • Open a course reserve record from patron search results - In the Find Tool results list, right-click the instructor’s patron record and select Links, Existing, Course Reserves from the context menu. The associated records open.
    • +
    • Open an instructor’s record from course reserve search results - In the Find Tool results list, right-click the course reserve record and select Links, Existing, Instructors. The associated patron records open.
    • +
    • Open a course reserve record from an instructor’s patron record - In the instructor’s patron record, select Links, Course Reserves.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Circulating_Reserved_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Circulating_Reserved_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..efc22592 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Circulating_Reserved_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Circulating Reserved Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulating Reserved Items

    +

    Reserve items may circulate like any other items, but their loan period and fine rates are generally adjusted.  For example, a book that normally circulates for two weeks might be limited to three hours or overnight when placed on reserve. The Reserve Item view of the item record shows the reserve circulation settings.

    +

    Reserve Item Check-Out

    +

    You check out reserve items following the same general procedures as for any other check-out operation (see Check-Out and Renewal). When a reserve item is checked out, the transaction is recorded in the circulation counters in the Reserve Item view of the item record, as well as the circulation counters in the primary item record.

    +

    The following special situations may apply to reserve items:

    +
      +
    • An item is on reserve for more than one course - When you check out an item that is on reserve for more than one course, a dialog box displays. Select the course for which the item is being checked out, and click OK. It is possible to choose No course. In this case, the reserve item circulation settings still govern the due date calculation, and the item counts toward the total number of reserved items a patron may check out, but the transaction is not added to the reserve item’s circulation statistics.
    • +
    • An item is limited to library use - If the reserve item is limited to in-library use only, a message warns you that the item should not leave the library.
    • +
    • Patron block on reserve items - A block message may appear if the patron has exceeded the limit on the number of reserved items that can be checked out. This limit is set in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    +

    Reserve Item Check-In

    +

    You check in reserve items following the same general procedures as for any other check-in operation. See Check-In. During check-in, if an item has a reserve status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve, a message informs you what course the item is reserved for, so that you can put it aside for proper shelving.

    +

    Offline Circulation for Reserve Items

    +

    For offline circulation, the following special situations apply to reserve items:

    +
      +
    • Circulation statistics - If a reserve item is on reserve for more than one course, the check-out is recorded with the first course to which the item is linked. A message is written to the log file during upload.
    • +
    • An item is limited to library use - When a reserve item is checked out offline, but the item is limited to in-library use only, a message is written to the log file during upload.
    • +
    • Patron block on reserve items - When a reserve item is checked out offline, but the patron has exceeded the limit on the number of reserved items that can be checked out, a message is written to the log file during upload.
    • +
    • Check-in - When a reserve item is checked in using offline mode, a message is written to the log file during upload that identifies the item as a reserve item.
    • +
    +

    Self-Check Circulation for Reserve Items

    +

    For self-check circulation, the following special situations apply to reserve items:

    +
      +
    • An item is linked to more than one course - If a reserve item is on reserve for more than one course, the check-out is blocked. A message refers the patron to the staff circulation desk for check-out.
    • +
    • An item is limited to library use - When a reserve item is limited to in-library use only, the check-out is blocked.
    • +
    • Patron block on reserve items - If the patron has exceeded the limit on the number of reserved items that can be checked out, the check-out is blocked.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_new_course_reserve_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_new_course_reserve_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc8635c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_new_course_reserve_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new course reserve record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Course Reserve Record

    +

    You can create and save course records in advance, without linking any reserve items or instructors to them. Then, as a new term or semester begins, you can place items on reserve for the courses as the instructors provide lists of items already in the library collection, or provide actual materials.

    +

    To create a new course reserve record:

    +

    Note:
    If you will use much of the same information for many course reserve records, use a course reserve record template as the basis for new records. See Create and use a course reserve template.

    +

    Tip: pbut_new.gif
    Click to display the New dialog box, or press CTRL+N.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +

    Note:
    You can also create a new record by selecting File | New from an open Course Reserve workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select Course Reserve in the Objects box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Instructors view of the Course Reserve workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. If necessary, select a record owner in the Owner box.
    2. +
    +

    The default is the branch where your workstation is located. Select another branch in the system, if appropriate.

    +
      +
    1. Specify course information with one of the following methods:
      • Select from a list of courses - Select Tools, Display All Available Courses. The Available Courses dialog box appears. The available courses depend on which branch is designated in the Owner box. Select a course, and click OK. Course information from the course you selected fills the workform.
      • Select from pre-set options - Select the options from these lists: Name (required); Number; Section. When you select a name from the list, the Abbreviation field is automatically filled if an abbreviation has been set up for the course name. Different options may be available for different branches. The available options depend on which branch is designated in the Owner box.
      • Type the course information - Select Tools, Add New Course Information. The Add New Course Information dialog box appears. Type the course information in the appropriate fields, and click OK. The Add New Course Information dialog box closes, and the information you typed is added to the Course Reserve workform.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You must have the permission Course reserve records: Create, set in Polaris Administration, to use this method.

    +
      +
    1. Select a course status in the Status box:
      • Select Active if you will be adding items for the current term or year. If the course reserve record is Active, patrons can search for it in the PAC.
      • Select Inactive if you are creating the record to use at another time. If the status is Inactive, the record is not available for PAC searches.
    2. +
    3. Select the appropriate options from the School/Division, Department, and Term/Year lists, if you want to set these options.
    4. +
    +

    If you select a Term/Year option, the Start Date and End Date boxes are automatically filled in.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Fill in the following fields:
      • Alternate Name - You can specify an alternate or common name for the course, and use the Find Tool to search for the course reserve record by this name.
      • Student count - Number of students in the course
      • Public Note - Type any free-text note in this box. This note is displayed in PAC search results for the course reserve record.
      • Non-public note - Type any free-text note in this box. This note is displayed for the course reserve record in the staff client only.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When you save the course reserve record, Polaris checks for duplicate records based on the combination of course name, course number, and section number for the owning branch. If there is a duplicate record, a message is displayed.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to designate instructors for this course at this time, click the Add Instructor icon to display the Add Instructor dialog box. See Add instructors to a course reserve record.
    2. +
    +

    + NAddInstruc.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you want to place items on reserve for this course at this time, select View, Reserve Items or click NResItemViewIcon.gif to display the Reserve Items view, and click the Add Items icon. See Place items on reserve from a course reserve record.
    2. +
    +

    + NAddItem.gif 

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Deleting course reserve records - Open the existing course record and select File, Delete, or right-click the record in a Find Tool results list and select Delete from the context menu. You cannot delete a course reserve record that has reserved items linked to the record.
    • +
    • Repeated courses - If the same course is taught every term, you can create a course reserve record for each term, and transfer the items from one course to the next at the end of the term. See Transfer a reserve item to a different course. Another method is to use a single course record, changing the Term/Year setting at the end of each term. When you change the Term/Year setting, the Start Dates and End Dates of all the reserved items for the course are automatically updated.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a course is taught frequently, but not necessarily every term, you can set the course reserve status to Inactive at the end of the term. The status of the reserved items for the course automatically changes to Not Reserved. When the course is taught again, you can reactivate the course and the reserve items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_reserve_item_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_reserve_item_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8f10cc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_a_reserve_item_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a reserve item template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Reserve Item Template

    +

    Templates can simplify the creation of new reserve item records.

    +

    Note:
    You need a special Reserve on the fly template for creating reserve item records for temporary or instructor-owned materials. See Place uncataloged material on reserve.

    +

    Tip: pbut_new00105.gif
    Click to display the New dialog box, or press CTRL+N.

    +

    To create a reserve item template:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The New dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select Reserve Item Template in the Objects list, and click OK. The template workform appears.
    4. +
    5. Fill in the workform, as necessary. See Reserve Item Records.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Start Date and End Date values are optional. You might specify values in these fields if the reserve period for items that use this template is different from the start and end dates for a course. If you leave these values blank in both the template and the reserve item record, the course start date and end date define the reserve period for the item. In any case, you can edit the dates in the reserve item record. The reserve period for an item can be different for each course to which it is linked.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the template.
    2. +
    +

    The status bar indicates that the template was saved successfully.

    +

    Note:
    You can use the Find Tool to search for and open an existing template. Select Cataloging, Templates, Reserve item.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Permanent Reserve templates - If you have many items on permanent reserve, you may find it useful to create a separate template for these items. Specify any preferred settings in the template, and set the status to Permanent Reserve.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_and_use_a_course_reserve_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_and_use_a_course_reserve_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37528e49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Create_and_use_a_course_reserve_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create and use a course reserve template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create and Use a Course Reserve Template

    +

    If you use much of the same information for many course reserve records, a template can simplify the creation of new records. To create a course reserve record template, and use the template to create new records:

    +

    Tip: pbut_new00101.gif
    Click to display the New dialog box, or press CTRL+N.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Course Reserve Template in the Objects list, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The template workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Fill in the template, as necessary. See Create a new course reserve record.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save the template.
    4. +
    +

    The status bar indicates that the template was saved successfully.

    +
      +
    1. To create new records based on the template, follow these steps:
      1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the New dialog box.
      2. Select Course Reserve Record in the Objects list. The New dialog box expands with the existing templates in the Choose Template list.
      3. Select Existing Template. The templates become available for selection.
      4. Select your template in the Choose Template list, and click OK. The template workform appears.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you are setting up many similar course reserve records, you can designate an existing template as the default course reserve template for the session. Select the template, and select (check) Make session default. For subsequent new course reserve records, select Use Default Template. To remove the session default designation, select Clear session default.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Edit the record and select File | Save to save it.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can also use the Find Tool to search for an existing template. Select Cataloging (or Patron Services), Templates, Course Reserve. Right-click the template in the results list. From the context menu, you can open the template, or select Create to create a new course reserve record based on the selected template.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Deactivate_a_reserve_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Deactivate_a_reserve_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8673cba1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Deactivate_a_reserve_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deactivate a reserve item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deactivate a reserve item

    +

    You can deactivate items that frequently go on and off reserve. When you deactivate a reserve item, the item is taken off reserve for a course, but the reserve item settings are stored so they can be readily used again. Use one of the following methods to deactivate a reserve item:

    +

    Note:
    To deactivate a reserve item, the item’s reserve status must be On Reserve, and the circulation status must be In (except ILL items, which cannot have a status of In).

    +
      +
    • +

      From the Course Reserve record, Items view: Right-click the On Reserve item in the Reserve items list, and select Deactivate from the context menu (or click pReactivateIcon00106.gif.)

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      From the item record, Reserves view: In the Linked courses list, right-click the course for which you want to deactivate the item, and select Deactivate from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    The Start Date and End Date values for the reserve item in effect for this course are removed, and the reserve status changes to Not Reserved. If the item is not on reserve for any other course, the primary circulation settings become active. If the item is not on reserve for any other course, the assigned branch for the reserved item is different from the primary assigned branch, and the item should be returned to the library collection, Polaris displays a message that the item should be returned to its primary branch. The primary circulation settings become active, and the primary circulation status changes to In Transit.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Reactivate an item - From the Course Reserve record (Items view), right-click the Not Reserved item in the Reserve items list, and select Reactivate from the context menu (or select the item and click pReactivateIcon00107.gif.) From the item record (Reserves view), in the Linked courses list, right-click the course for which you want to reactivate the item, and select Reactivate from the context menu. The course must be Active. The reserve period for the item is set to the course reserve record start and end dates.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Managing_Course_Reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Managing_Course_Reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5af4727b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Managing_Course_Reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Course Reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Course Reserves

    +

    If your Polaris system includes course reserve functions, you can place materials on reserve for use in a class during a semester or term. Materials can be taken from the regular collection and placed on reserve, or instructors may bring in personal material to be placed on reserve. The items may circulate outside the library, or within the library only.

    +

    Polaris uses special course reserve records to process course reserves. These store information about the courses for which items are placed on reserve. In addition, Polaris handles the reserved items through reserve item “records,” which are views of Polaris item records for materials placed on reserve. The reserve item record can carry its own circulation settings, which may be different from those in effect if an item is taken off reserve and returned to the regular collection. Staff and patrons can search for course records and reserve materials from the staff client and the PAC.

    +

    Note:
    3M ebooks cannot be placed on course reserve.

    +

    + Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC. +

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_an_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_an_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3f0d003 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_an_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place cataloged items on reserve from an item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Cataloged Items on Reserve from an Item Record

    +

    To place cataloged materials on reserve by working from the Item Record workform:

    +

    Tip:
    Right-click the item in the Find Tool results list, and select Add to Course Reserve from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging, Item Records to search for the item record with the Find Tool, and open the record from the results list.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Add to Course Reserve Record.
    4. +
    +

    The Add to Course Reserve dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the course reserve record for which the item is to be placed on reserve, by following these steps:
      1. On the Course & Item tabbed page, click Find Course to display the Polaris Find Tool.
      2. Search for the course reserve record.
      3. Right-click the course reserve record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool closes, and information from the selected course reserve record fills the course fields in the Add to Course Reserve dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the circulation settings for the reserve item using one of these methods:
      • On the Course & Item tabbed page, specify the circulation information in the Reserve circulation section of the dialog box. For more information about these settings, see Reserve Item Records.
      • If you want to use a reserve item template to set the circulation values in the reserve item record, click Find Template to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the template. For more information about reserve item templates, see Create a reserve item template.
    2. +
    3. Select the Disposition tab in the Add to Course Reserve dialog box, and edit the disposition settings as needed. For more information about these settings, see Reserve Item Records.
    4. +
    +

    You can use the Note field for information about specific chapters or pages required for a particular course.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to submit your settings.
    2. +
    +

    The status bar indicates that the link has been created, and the selected course is displayed in the Linked Courses list on the Reserves view of the item record.

    +
      +
    1. To edit the circulation settings for the reserve item, select View, Reserve or click pResItemVwIcon.gif on the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    For more information about reserve item settings, see Reserve Item Records.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Searching for reserve item records - Select Cataloging, Reserve Item Records to search for a reserve item record (for example, by title). You can open a reserve item record from the results list. The results list also includes the course name, course number, reserve status, and instructor. If a reserve item is linked to more than one course, the Course Name field indicates Multiple and the other course fields are blank. Right-click the reserve item in the results list, and select Links from the context menu to access the associated course reserve records.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can limit searches for reserve item records by assigned branch, in addition to other options. The assigned branch is the assigned branch for the reserve item, which may differ from the assigned branch for the item when it is not on reserve.

    +
      +
    • Editing reserve item settings for a particular course - You can edit the Start Date, End Date, and Note for an item as it relates to a particular course, after the item has been placed on reserve.  In the Reserve Items view of the course reserve record, right-click the item and select Edit Linked Information from the context menu. In the Reserve view of the item record, right-click the course and select Edit Linked Information from the context menu. A dialog box is displayed where you can edit the start date, end date, and note.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the course reserve record’s Term/Year setting is changed, the reserved item’s Start Date and End Date are automatically updated. Edit the reserve item’s dates if you need to set values different from the new course dates.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_items_on_reserve_from_a_course_reserve_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_items_on_reserve_from_a_course_reserve_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..216e4e6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_items_on_reserve_from_a_course_reserve_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place items on reserve from a course reserve record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Items on Reserve from a Course Reserve Record

    +

    If you have a stack of items already pulled from the shelves, ready to place on reserve for one course, this method may be the most efficient. To place items on reserve by linking to the item records from an open course reserve record:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging, Course Reserve Records (or Patron Services, Course Reserve Records) to search for the course reserve record with the Find Tool, and open the record from the results list.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Items or click NResItemViewIcon00102.gif to display the Reserve Items view.
    4. +
    5. Click the Add Items icon NAddItemIcon.gif above the Reserve items list.
    6. +
    +

    The Add Items dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify an item or items to add by one of the following methods:
      • Scan or type the item barcode in the Items box.
      • Click Find to open a Find Tool, and search for and select the item record.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +
    +

    The Items list displays the items you selected.

    +
      +
    1. To set circulation values for the reserve item from a template, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can set or edit circulation values after the reserve item is added to the course. See step 7.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Find in the Template area of the dialog box. The Find Tool appears.
    2. +
    3. Search for and select a reserve item template. For more information about reserve item templates, see Create a reserve item template.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +
    +

    The Add Item dialog box closes. The Reserve items list in the Course Reserve workform displays the linked item. The status bar indicates that the link has been created.

    +

    In all the item records you placed on reserve, you can see the Reserve Item settings by selecting View, Reserve. For more information about reserve item settings, see Reserve Item Records.

    +
      +
    1. To set or edit circulation values for a reserve item, follow these steps:
      1. Double-click the item in the Reserve items list on the Course Reserve workform. The Reserves view of the item record appears.
      2. Set the circulation values in the Reserve Holding Detail section of the Reserves view, and click File, Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Uncataloged material - You can place temporary or instructor-owned items on reserve by creating item and bibliographic records on-the-fly from the course reserve record. See Place uncataloged material on reserve.
    • +
    • Editing reserve item settings - You can edit the Start Date, End Date, and Notes, after the item has been placed on reserve. In the Reserve Items view of the course reserve record, right-click the item and select Edit Linked Information from the context menu (or select the item and click nEditItem.gif). In the Reserve view of the item record, right-click the course and select Edit Linked Information from the context menu.
    • +
    • Transferring items - You can transfer reserve items from one course to another. See Transfer a reserve item to a different course.
    • +
    • Inactive Courses - If the course status is Inactive, all items added to the course reserve record have a status of Not Reserved, regardless of the default or template setting for the reserve item status. If the course status changes to Active, you can edit the status of the reserved items to On Reserve. Select the item in the Reserve Items view of the course reserve record and click pReactivateIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Repeated courses - If the same course is taught every term, you can create a course reserve record for each term, and transfer the items from one course to the next at the end of the term. See Transfer a reserve item to a different course. Another method is to use a single course record, changing the Term/Year setting at the end of each term. When you change the Term/Year setting, the Start Dates and End Dates are automatically updated for all the reserved items for the course.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a course is taught frequently, but not necessarily every term, you can set the course reserve status to Inactive at the end of the term. The status of the reserved items for the course automatically changes to Not Reserved. When the course is taught again, you can reactivate the course and the reserve items.

    +
      +
    • Opening reserve item records from course reserve search results - In the Find Tool results list, right-click the course reserve record and select Links, Existing, Items. The associated records open.
    • +
    • Open course reserve records from reserve item records - In the item record, select Links, Course Reserves.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_multiple_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_multiple_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce00e883 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_multiple_cataloged_items_on_reserve_from_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place multiple cataloged items on reserve from a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Multiple Cataloged Items on Reserve from a Record Set

    +

    If all the items to be reserved have item records, you can place multiple items on reserve for a course:

    +

    Note:
    For information about creating temporary item records for instructor-owned materials, see Place uncataloged material on reserve.

    +

    Tip:
    You can place multiple cataloged items on reserve from a Find Tool results list. Right-click the items in the list and select Add to Course Reserve from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Create a record set of the item records you want to place on reserve. Creating and Using Record Sets.
    2. +
    3. In the Record Set workform, select Edit, Select All.
    4. +
    +

    All the items in the item list for the record set are highlighted.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click in the item list, and select Add to Course Reserve from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Add to Course Reserve Record dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the course reserve record to which you want to link these items, and the reserve circulation settings for the items. For details, see Place cataloged items on reserve from an item record.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to confirm your settings.
    4. +
    +

    The status bar indicates that the links have been created, and the selected course is displayed in the Linked Courses list on the Reserves view of each item record in the record set.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_uncataloged_material_on_reserve.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_uncataloged_material_on_reserve.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a66d9258 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Place_uncataloged_material_on_reserve.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place uncataloged material on reserve + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Uncataloged Material on Reserve

    +

    You may need to place an item on reserve that is not cataloged in the Polaris database, such as material supplied by an instructor. When you place an uncataloged item on reserve, you create minimal level item and bibliographic records on-the-fly, according to an on-the-fly item record template you set up in advance.

    +

    To place uncataloged material on reserve:

    +

    Important:
    You need an item record template named Reserve on the fly to create reserve items on the fly for uncataloged materials. Do step 1 of the procedure below to create the template.

    +
      +
    1. (One time only.) Create the Reserve on the fly item template by following these steps:
      1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the New dialog box.
      2. Select Item Template from the Objects list, and click OK. The Item Template workform appears.
      3. Type Reserve on the fly in the Name box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Important:
    Type the name Reserve on the fly exactly as it appears here.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select your branch (not yourself) in the Template owner box.
    2. +
    3. Set circulation, location, and request parameters as you would for a normal item.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save the template.
    6. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging (or Patron Services), Course Reserve Records to search for the course reserve record with the Find Tool, and open the record from the results list.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Reserve Items or click NResItemViewIcon00103.gif to display the Items view.
    4. +
    5. Select the Create Item icon above the Reserve items list.
    6. +
    +

    The Brief Item Entry dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the following information on the Brief Item Entry dialog box:
      • Item barcode
      • Title
      • Author (optional)
      • Call number
      • Any free text block, if appropriate
      • Circulation settings (Material Code, Fine Period, Loan Period, Collection)
      • Set OTF Block - Leave this box unchecked. Typically, when a previously uncataloged OTF item is checked in, a block message notifies you that it requires full cataloging. You can override the block to check in the item and allow it to circulate. However, you will be blocked at circulation until the item is fully cataloged, or you save the item record and choose to stop blocking the item. For reserve items, the OTF block is disabled by default (the Set OTF Block option is not checked) for your convenience.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The temporary bibliographic and item records are created, and the Add to Course Reserve dialog box is displayed.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to use a reserve item template to set values for the new reserve item, follow these steps:
      1. Click Find Template in the Reserve Circulation area of the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Search for and select a reserve item template.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about reserve item templates, see Create a reserve item template.

    +
      +
    1. Edit the reserve circulation settings for the item, if necessary.
    2. +
    3. Select the Disposition tab in the Add to Course Reserve dialog box to edit disposition settings.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +

    The Add to Course Reserve dialog box closes. The Reserve items list in the Course Reserve workform displays the linked item, and the status bar indicates that the link has been created.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Placing_Items_on_Reserve.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Placing_Items_on_Reserve.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..538482f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Placing_Items_on_Reserve.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Placing Items on Reserve + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Placing Items on Reserve

    +

    You can reserve items in the library’s collection, temporary items such as photocopies, or items provided by the course instructor. When you place an item on reserve, you can assign circulation settings to the item that are different from those that apply when the item is part of the library’s ordinary circulating (non-reserve) collection. The same item can be placed on reserve for more than one course, but the same reserve circulation settings, such as the loan period and fine rate, apply to the item regardless of the course for which it is reserved. If you take an item off reserve for all courses, the primary item settings control the item record again.

    +

    Any item to be placed on reserve needs a corresponding item record, even if that record is only temporary. Items from the library’s collection most likely already have item records, linked to corresponding bibliographic records. Some materials, such as those provided by an instructor, may not have item or bibliographic records in the library database. For more information about placing these materials on reserve, see Place uncataloged material on reserve.

    +

    Reserve Item Records

    +

    Polaris stores information about a reserve item in a reserve item “record,” which is a special view of the item record and is linked to a course reserve record.

    +

    + pItemRerserveView.gif 

    +

    You can edit reserve circulation settings in the reserve item view of the item record:

    +
      +
    • Reserve Holding Detail (Assigned branch, Assigned collection, Shelf location, Loan period code, Fine code, Renewal limit, and Holdable) - These settings can be different from those assigned in the primary item record.
    • +
    • Copy Owner - Select Library Copy or Instructor Copy to indicate who owns the item.
    • +
    • Limited to Library Use - Select this option to indicate that the item should not leave the library. At check-out, a message informs staff that the item should stay in the library.
    • +
    • Requires full cataloging - Select this option to indicate that the primary item record and bibliographic record are incomplete. You might flag the reserve item with this option if you create a reserve item on-the-fly. See Place uncataloged material on reserve.
    • +
    • Purchase - Select this option to indicate that the library needs to purchase additional copies of the item, or purchase its own copies of an instructor-owned item. This setting is informational only, and does not start any automatic processing.
    • +
    • Action when done - Select Discard, Return to collection, or Return to owner to indicate what should happen to the item when it is taken off reserve. If you select Discard or Return to owner, you can also select Autodelete to have the primary item record and associated bibliographic record automatically deleted when the item is taken off reserve. You may want to select this option when material (such as photocopies) was specifically created for the reserve, and will be discarded when it is taken off reserve. See Taking Items Off Reserve.
    • +
    • Copyright - Settings:
      • None - Select this option if the reserve item is not a photocopy.
      • CCG (Compliance with copyright guidelines) - Use this option for photocopied journal articles if the article is dated within the last five years, and your library does not own the journal title, and this is the fifth or fewer request made for this item within the current calendar year.
      • CCL (Compliance with copyright law) - Use this option for all other photocopies; for example, if the article is older than five years, or your library owns the journal title, or this is the sixth or greater request within the calendar year and your library is paying royalties to the Copyright Clearance Center or a document delivery vendor.
    • +
    • Fee information - You can select Fee Required or Fee Paid, and specify the amount of the fee.
    • +
    • Note field - You can enter notes specifically related to the reserve item.
    • +
    • Linked courses - This area shows information about the courses with which the reserved item is associated. You can right-click a course in the list to open the course reserve record or take other actions regarding the item’s status in regard to the course. For each course, an item’s reserve status can be On Reserve, Not Reserved, or Permanent:
    • +
    • On Reserve - The item is on active reserve for the course.
    • +
    • Not Reserved - The item is not currently on reserve for the course, but may be placed on reserve again in the future.
    • +
    • Permanent - Some items are placed on permanent reserve and are never taken off. Materials for a course that is taught each semester, and frequently used or valuable reference books may be treated this way.
    • +
    +

    An item may be on reserve for one course and not reserved for another.

    +

    You can place items on reserve with any circulation status other than Withdrawn or Lost. If the item’s status is In, you can select any reserve status for the item in relation to the course (On Reserve, Permanent, or Not Reserved). Items with circulation statuses other than In automatically receive a reserve status of Not Reserved. If an item is Out when you place it on reserve, you can flag the item with a library-assigned block, then activate the reserve when the item is checked in.

    +

    See also:

    + +

     

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Remove_an_item_from_reserve.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Remove_an_item_from_reserve.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c42112c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Remove_an_item_from_reserve.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remove an item from reserve + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove an item from reserve

    +

    Use this method to take an item off reserve when you do not expect that the item will be placed on reserve again. When you use this method, the reserve item settings are completely cleared and the link to the course reserve record is broken. To remove an item from reserve:

    +
      +
    • +

      From the Course Reserve record, Items view: Right-click the item in the Reserve items list, and select Remove from Course Reserve from the context menu (or select the item and click pRemoveItemIcon.gif).

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      From the Item record, Reserves view: In the Linked courses list, right-click the course from which you want to remove the item, and select Remove from Course Reserve from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    If the reserve item was linked to only one course reserve record, the primary item circulation parameters are restored, and the link between the item and course reserve records is removed. If the item was linked to more than one course reserve record, the link between the selected course and the item is removed, but the reserve item circulation parameters remain in effect for the other linked courses.

    +

    If the reserve item has either Discard or Return to Owner selected, and Auto-delete was checked, the item and bibliographic records are deleted.

    +

    Note:
    If the reserve item was linked to more than one course, or if the circulation status is other than In, the item and bibliographic records are not deleted even if the Auto-delete option was checked. Also, if more than one item is linked to the bibliographic record, the bibliographic record is not deleted.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Manually deleting item records with links to course reserves - When you try to delete an item record that is linked to at least one course reserve record, a message informs you of the link. You can break the link and continue to delete the item.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Reports_for_Course_Reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Reports_for_Course_Reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7adb99bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Reports_for_Course_Reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reports for Course Reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reports for Course Reserves

    +

    Several course reserve reports help you manage course reserves. To access the course reserve reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Circulation in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
      +
    • +

      For information on generating reports, see Generating, Sending & Customizing Reports.

      +
    • +
    • +

      For detailed descriptions of specific Course Reserves reports, see Circulation Reports.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Send_course_reserve_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Send_course_reserve_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f66e95e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Send_course_reserve_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Send course reserve notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Send Course Reserve Notices

    +

    To send course reserve notices to instructors:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Reports window opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select Notices, Course Reserves.
    2. +
    3. Select Course Reserve Notice.
    4. +
    +

    The Report Setup Wizard dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select a branch (the owner of the course reserve record).
    2. +
    +

    The Courses list displays courses where the selected branch is the owner, the Course Reserve record status is Active, at least one instructor record is linked to the Course Reserve record, and at least one reserve item record with a status of Active or Permanent Reserve is linked to the Course Reserve record.

    +
      +
    1. Select a course or courses.
    2. +
    3. Select a notice option:
      • Email & print notices - After overnight processing, email notices will be sent to instructors associated with active courses whose patron records include at least a primary email address. Print notices are produced for those instructors without email addresses.
      • Print notices - The notices are addressed to the address specified in the instructor’s patron record field Address for notices and bills.
    4. +
    5. Click Submit.
    6. +
    +

    Email notices are placed in the queue. Print notices appear as .pdf files in Adobe Reader. Click the Adobe Reader print icon to print the notices.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Sending_Course_Reserve_Notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Sending_Course_Reserve_Notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cafdeced --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Sending_Course_Reserve_Notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Sending Course Reserve Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Sending Course Reserve Notices

    +

    You can send an email or print notice to primary and alternate course instructors, summarizing circulation statistics for their course reserve materials at the end of each semester. The notice also provides a way for instructors to respond and indicate items to be removed or added.

    +

    Notice Content

    +

    The notice reports all or selected active courses for a branch. (The report content is the same as the Circulation report Reserves Statistics by Course.) Both the report and the notice deal with active courses only, and contain circulation statistics for reserve items with a reserve status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve. (They do not include reserve item records with a status of Not Reserved.) If an item is on reserve for more than one course, the statistics shown in the report are for the selected course only.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris recommends that you allow the Course Reserve status to remain Active for a time after the end of the semester to allow reporting and notification from the staff client and the instructor’s PAC patron account.  

    +

    Detailed content of the notice and report includes the following information:

    +
      +
    • List of items on reserve for each course
    • +
    • Course name (primary sort), including course number if available
    • +
    • Reserve Start and End date
    • +
    • Author (secondary sort). If there are multiple authors, only the first is included. If no author is listed, the entry is placed at the end of the report.
    • +
    • Title (tertiary sort)
    • +
    • Call number, including Volume and Copy if any
    • +
    • Barcode
    • +
    • Item material type (labeled Format in the report)
    • +
    • Owner - Instructor copy or Library copy
    • +
    • Circulation (sum of all check-outs and renewals) per title
    • +
    • Patrons - Total number of  unique patrons transacting per title
    • +
    • Total number of items on reserve per course
    • +
    • Grand total check outs for all titles per course
    • +
    +

    Email notices include the following additional elements:

    +
      +
    • Subject - Course Reserve Summary. This text can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin).
    • +
    • Reply-to address - Can be specified for each branch in the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). If none is specified, the notice uses the default reply-to address set in Polaris Administration (Notification options parameter; see Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location).
    • +
    • Footer - Text as defined in Polaris Administration (Notification options parameter; see Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location).
    • +
    • Default message - Attached are your current course reserve statistics. Please note any additions or deletions and return this notice to the library. The text can be customized in Polaris Language Editor.
    • +
    +

    Printed notices include the following additional elements:

    +
      +
    • Header - Course Reserve Summary. This text can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin).
    • +
    • Default message -  Attached are your current course reserve statistics. Please note any additions or deletions and return this notice to the library. The text can be customized in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin).
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) is available on your library’s Web server. You must have the system-level System Administration permission WebAdmin access: Allow to use this application. For more information about using the Polaris Language Editor, see online Help for the application.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Setting_Up_Course_Reserve_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Setting_Up_Course_Reserve_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b9429f82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Setting_Up_Course_Reserve_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Course Reserve Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Course Reserve Records

    +

    Course reserve records store course, term, and instructor information, and maintain links to the items that have been placed on reserve for the course. The course reserve record is also linked to a patron record that contains information about the instructor.

    +

    When you create a new course reserve record, you can select the course name, course number, and section number from options set in Polaris Administration, or you can select a course from a list of existing courses. If the appropriate course information is not available for selection, you can type the information. The new information is then added to the new course reserve record and to the Polaris Administration tables, so it is available for selection in other course reserve records for your branch. However, options for the term/year, school/division, and department must be set up in Polaris Administration. See Set fine receipt options.

    +

    Note:
    The default values and available options in the Course Reserve workform are set in Polaris Administration. See Set fine receipt options.

    +

    Finding Existing Course Reserve Records

    +

    Tip:
    Use Limit by options to focus your search, and Sort by options to sort the results list.

    +

    Select Cataloging (or Patron Services), Course Reserve Records to search for existing course reserve records with the Find Tool. You can search by the following access points:

    +
      +
    • Course Name - If the course name begins with an article (A, An, The), you must include the article or use a wildcard character. If you are not sure, use the wildcard character.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    To find a course named The Middle Ages, you can type the middle ages, *middle ages, or *middle. If you type middle ages, the search does not find the course record.

    +
      +
    • Course Name/Number
    • +
    • Course Number/Section - Type just the course number, or type the course number and section number.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    There are two History 101 sections, section 01 and section 02. If you type 101, the results list includes both sections (as well as any other courses numbered 101). If you type 101 02, the results list includes only History 101 section 02 (as well as any other courses numbered 101 section 02).

    +
      +
    • Course Abbreviation
    • +
    • Alternate Name
    • +
    • Instructor (Last, First) - Type the name Lastname, Firstname. Searches both primary and alternate instructors. The results are the course reserve records linked to the instructor’s patron record.
    • +
    • School/Division
    • +
    • Department
    • +
    • Title - Searches bibliographic record titles for records linked to a course reserve record. The results are the course reserve records linked to bibliographic records with this title.
    • +
    • Author - Searches bibliographic record authors for records linked to a course reserve record. The results are the course reserve records linked to bibliographic records with this author.
    • +
    • Course Status
    • +
    • Course Start Date
    • +
    • Course End Date
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can right-click a course reserve record in the Find Tool results list, and select Links in the context menu to access linked item and instructor records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Taking_Items_Off_Reserve.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Taking_Items_Off_Reserve.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4a12a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Taking_Items_Off_Reserve.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Taking Items Off Reserve + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Taking Items Off Reserve

    +

    You can take items off reserve in two ways. For items that frequently return to reserve, you may want to deactivate the item. When you deactivate an item from all courses, the primary item circulation settings are restored, but the reserve item record settings are stored for use when the item is placed on reserve again. The item record is still linked to the course reserve record, but the reserve status changes to Not Reserved. See Deactivate a reserve item.

    +

    Important:
    As long as the item is on reserve for at least one course, the reserve item circulation settings remain in effect.

    +

    For items that are not expected to return to reserve, you may want to remove the items from reserve. When you remove an item from reserve, the primary item circulation settings are restored (if the item belongs to the library’s collection), and the reserve item settings are completely cleared. The link between the course reserve record and the item record is broken. See Remove an item from reserve.

    +

    When items are removed from reserve for all courses, you dispose of the physical item according to the settings in the reserve item record. If the item belongs to the library, it is either returned to the library’s circulating (non-reserve) collection, or discarded. If the item belongs to an instructor, it is either returned to the instructor, or discarded. If the Auto-delete option is set in the reserve item record, item and bibliographic records are automatically deleted when an item is taken off reserve to be discarded or returned to the owner.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Transfer_a_reserve_item_to_a_different_course.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Transfer_a_reserve_item_to_a_different_course.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96fc40e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Transfer_a_reserve_item_to_a_different_course.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Transfer a reserve item to a different course + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Transfer a Reserve Item to a Different Course

    +

    The item’s circulation status must be In.To transfer an existing reserve item from one course to another:

    +
      +
    1. Select Cataloging (or Patron Services), Course Reserve Records to search for the course from which you want to transfer the item.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Items or click NResItemViewIcon00104.gif to display the Items view.
    4. +
    5. In the Reserve items list, right-click the item you want to transfer, and select Transfer to another Course Reserve from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the course reserve record to which you want to transfer the item.
    2. +
    +

    The item is removed from the original course reserve record, and the record closes. The item is displayed in the Reserve items list in the current course reserve record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Viewing_course_reserve_statistics_from_the_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Viewing_course_reserve_statistics_from_the_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..41b5c790 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPcourseres/Viewing_course_reserve_statistics_from_the_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Viewing course reserve statistics from the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing course reserve statistics from the PAC

    +

     If the patron is a primary or alternate instructor for at least one Active course, he or she can log on to the patron account in Polaris PowerPAC and click the Courses option to see course reserve statistics for the Active courses linked to the instructor’s patron record. To receive a copy of the report by email, the instructor clicks Send me this report at the bottom of the page.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Cancel_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Cancel_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03081660 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Cancel_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cancel hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cancel hold requests

    +

    When you cancel a hold request, items can no longer fill the request. However, the request remains in the Polaris database and visible on workforms. For recordkeeping purposes, you might choose to cancel rather than delete a request. Also, if a patron decides she wants a title after all, you can easily reactivate the canceled request (see Reactivate hold requests). You can manually cancel requests that are Active, Inactive, Pending, Not-supplied, or Shipped.

    +

    To cancel holds that have the status Shipped, the option must be enabled on your system. For more information, see Hold Options Dialog Box - Staff Client and PAC Tab.

    +

    To cancel one or more hold requests:

    +

    Tip:
    You can also display the hold requests in the Patron Status workform - Holds view or the Holds Queue workform. Right-click the requests in the list, and select Cancel Hold from the context menu. In the Hold Request workform, you can select Tools, Cancel or click the Cancel button. In a Bibliographic or Item Record workform, select Links, All Hold Requests, right-click the request in the Linked Hold Requests dialog box, and select Cancel from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select a library in the Branch name box and one of the following options in the By box, according to the requests you want to display:
      • Item - Displays requests for items that are owned by the selected library
      • Patron - Displays requests for patrons who are registered at the selected library
      • Pickup - Displays requests to be picked up at the selected library
    2. +
    3. Select a hold request status in the Status box.
    4. +
    +

    You can cancel requests that are active, inactive, pending, not-supplied, or shipped.

    +
      +
    1. Select the requests to cancel.
    2. +
    3. Click the Cancel button above the Requests list or press CTRL+L.
    4. +
    +

    The requests are no longer displayed because their status has changed to cancelled.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Automatic cancellation - Hold requests may be canceled automatically in certain circumstances:
    • +
    • Your library may automatically cancel an unclaimed request when the held item is checked in.
    • +
    • An item record is deleted, it is the last item attached to the bibliographic record, and an Active, Inactive, or Pending request is bound to the title. A message indicates that deleting the item record cancels the request. If you continue, Polaris cancels the request.
    • +
    • Automatic deletion - Your library may automatically delete canceled requests after a specified period.
    • +
    • Cancellation by patrons - Your library may allow patrons to view and cancel their hold requests from the PAC patron account.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Daily_Request_Processing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Daily_Request_Processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3be3f0f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Daily_Request_Processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Daily Request Processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Daily Request Processing

    +

    A recommended workflow is to review the status of hold requests once a day, using the Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view. This is important because other libraries may be requesting items from you, and activities may be taking place at other libraries that affect your patrons’ requests.

    +

    Check the following requests every day:

    +

    Note:
    Your library may set up different descriptions for these hold request statuses.

    + +

    Note:
    You can reactivate a Not-supplied request, but if the reason it was not supplied has not changed, the request becomes Not-supplied again.

    + +

    Note: +
    This list includes held items for which the pickup location was changed by a staff member or a patron (if your library allows patrons to change the pickup location from the PAC. For more information, see Set Holds options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Delete_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Delete_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8d0999c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Delete_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Delete hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete hold requests

    +

    When you delete a hold request, the request is removed permanently from the Polaris system. You can manually delete requests that are Cancelled, Expired, Inactive, or Not-supplied.

    +

    To delete one or more hold requests:

    +

    Tip:
    You can also display the hold requests in the Patron Status workform - Holds view. Right-click the requests in the list, and select Delete from the context menu. In the Hold Request workform, you can select File, Delete or click the Delete button. In a Bibliographic or Item Record workform, select Links, All Hold Requests, right-click the request in the Linked Hold Requests dialog box, and select Delete from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select a library in the Branch name box and one of the following options in the By box, according to the requests you want to display:
      • Item - Displays requests for items that are owned by the selected library

      • Patron - Displays requests for patrons who are registered at the selected library

      • Pickup - Displays requests to be picked up at the selected library

    2. +
    3. Select a hold request status in the Status box.
    4. +
    +

    You can delete requests that are Cancelled, Expired, Inactive, or Not-supplied.

    +
      +
    1. Select the requests.
    2. +
    3. Click the Delete button above the Requests list, or press CTRL+D.
    4. +
    +

    A message alerts you that deleting a hold request removes it permanently from the system.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the requests.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Automatic deletion - Hold requests may be deleted automatically in certain circumstances:

    +
      +
    • +

      Your library may automatically delete an unclaimed request when the held item is checked in.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Your library may automatically delete Expired, Cancelled, and Not-supplied requests after a specified period.

      +
    • +
    • +

      When a non-holdable item is checked out to a patron who has a title-level hold request that the item would otherwise fill, the hold request (Active or Inactive) is deleted.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Deny_items_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Deny_items_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d71194e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Deny_items_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deny items for Requests-To-Fill + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deny items for Requests-To-Fill

    +

    If you cannot or do not want to fill a hold for RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it., you deny the item from filling the request. The request itself remains Active, and after the next RTF process runs, the request is routed to the next library in the sequence. This is part of your library’s regular process of checking the Requests-To-Fill (RTF) report. Follow these steps if you cannot or do not want to fill one or more hold requests:

    +
      +
    1. From the Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view, print the Requests-To-Fill report. See Fill hold requests for Requests-To-Fill.
    2. +
    3. Display the Requests-To-Fill list on the Hold Requests view by making the following selections:
      • Your branch in the Branch name box
      • Item in the By box
      • Pending in the Status box
    4. +
    5. Select the items in the Requests list that you want to deny for hold.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If you have the same reason for denying several or all holds, deny these items at the same time. If you have different reasons, deny the items separately.

    +
      +
    1. Click pbutDenyHold.gif or press CTRL+R.
    2. +
    +

    The Deny Item for Hold Request dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the reason for not supplying the item or items.
    2. +
    3. Do one of the following actions:
      • To prevent this particular item or items from filling the request, simply click OK. In this case, if your branch has other items that could fill the request, the request may appear again on the RTF list during the next RTF cycle.
      • Select (check) Deny all available items at this branch, and click OK. In this case, the request does not appear again on the RTF list, even if your branch has other items that could fill the request.
    4. +
    +

    The Hold Requests view is displayed, but the request you denied no longer appears. After the RTF process is run, the request appears on the RTF list of the next library in the holds routing process.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Ignoring an RTF item - If you take no action on an item in the Requests list, it is automatically routed to the next branch in the sequence. After a library-specified number of days, if no other library fills the request, the system routes it back to your library.
    • +
    • Viewing a Not-supplied reason - You can view a Not-supplied reason for a patron’s hold request on the Hold Request workform - Notes view. Scroll the Request Satisfied By list to the right. The far column is Not Supplied Reason. If a request was denied, an icon appears next to the bibliographic record control number. The icon is red DenyHoldIcon.gif for a request denied by a staff member, and blue DenyHoldIconSys.gif for a request denied by the system. The system may deny a request from the PAC if a patron has exceeded the request limit for an item’s material type and all the items attached to the bibliographic record are this material type.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_hold_requests_by_selected_criteria.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_hold_requests_by_selected_criteria.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..139e29e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_hold_requests_by_selected_criteria.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display hold requests by selected criteria + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display Hold Requests by Selected Criteria

    +

    You can view hold requests by selecting criteria on the Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view. This is the method you typically use to manage holds at your branch.

    +

    To display hold requests by selecting associated criteria:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +

    Note:
    By default, when the view opens, all pending requests for your branch are listed. These are the requests you fill or deny in daily holds processing. See Daily Request Processing.

    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    You can open the Polaris Find Tool from the Request Manager workform to search for any hold request. Select File, Open on the Request Manager menu bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select a library in the Branch name box and one of the following options in the By box, according to the requests you want to display:
      • Item - Displays requests for items that are owned by the selected library
      • Patron - Displays requests for patrons who are registered at the selected library
      • Pickup - Displays requests to be picked up at the selected library
    2. +
    3. Select a hold request status in the Status box. For status descriptions, see Displaying Hold Requests.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +

    The Request Manager displays the requests matching your criteria, in the Requests list.

    +
    +
      +
    • If your library allows item-level or first-available-copy requests, these are indicated by the item-level icon ItemHoldIcon00059.gif at the beginning of the request line.
    • +
    • If your library does Borrow by Mail circulation, these requests are indicated by the Borrow by Mail icon iconBBM00060.gif at the beginning of the request line. Item-level Borrow by Mail requests include an I in the Borrow by Mail icon iconItemBBM00061.gif.
    • +
    +
    +

    Examples:
    -To display all Held hold requests where Community Library is the pickup branch, select the following criteria: Community Library (Branch name box), Pickup (By box), and Held (Status box).
    -To display all unclaimed hold requests (that is, held requests that were not picked up) where Community Library is the pickup branch, select the following criteria: Community Library (Branch name box), Pickup (By box), and Unclaimed (Status box).

    +

    Column headings for the Requests list and the available option buttons vary, depending on your selections. The workform’s status panel (lower right corner) displays the date/time of the last binding and the date/time of the last RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. (Requests-To-Fill) cycle. For more information about RTF processing, see Daily Request Processing.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_patron_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_patron_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a2eb96a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_patron_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display a patron’s hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display a Patron’s Hold Requests

    +

    To display the hold requests for a specific patron:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Patron Status to find and display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Holds or click PatronStatHoldsBtn.gif to display the Requests view.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation. Similarly, you may need to manually expand the call number column (drag the right border of the column header) to see the entire call number.

    +

    The patron’s hold requests appear in the Polaris requests list.

    +
    +
      +
    • If your library allows item-level or first-available-copy requests, these are indicated by the item-level icon ItemHoldIcon.gif at the beginning of the request line.
    • +
    • If your library does Borrow by Mail circulation, these requests are indicated by the Borrow by Mail icon iconBBM.gif at the beginning of the request line. Item-level Borrow by Mail requests include an I in the Borrow by Mail icon iconItemBBM.gif.
    • +
    • The Queue column displays the patron’s position in the holds queue for a title or item.
    • +
    +
    +

    Example:
    If a patron places a request for a title and four other requests are pending for that same title, the Queue column displays 5, indicating that the patron’s request is fifth in line.

    +

    Certain administration settings for your library may affect a request’s queue position, so that requests are not always filled in strict date and time order.

    +

    To change the patron’s queue position, you must reorder the hold requests for the title or item in the Holds Queue workform. See Rearrange hold requests in the queue.

    +

    The top left portion of the Patron Status workform summarizes the patron’s hold requests. The Items Held field reports the total number of items with a status of Held, and includes Hold requests and ILL requests with a status of Held or Unclaimed. (Unclaimed hold requests are linked to items that are still Held, so the count reflects the items actually on the pickup shelf.) The Total holds/ILL field reports all hold requests/ILL requests regardless of status, including held requests. The same information appears on the Check Out workform.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Change the unclaimed date - You can change the unclaimed date for a hold request when the request status is Held. See Edit hold request data.
    • +
    • Grouping holds - You can group a patron’s related holds so that when one request is filled, the others in the group are cancelled. See Group a patron’s hold requests. The Group column identifies group membership of a hold. You may need to scroll to the right to display the Group column.
    • +
    • Requests in the PAC patron account - Patrons can view and manage their hold requests in the PAC. The header area of PAC patron account pages displays a summary count of the patron’s requests, and patrons can view detailed information, cancel, and suspend/reactivate their requests on the requests page.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_requests_linked_to_a_bibliographic_or_item_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_requests_linked_to_a_bibliographic_or_item_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5dfc287c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Display_requests_linked_to_a_bibliographic_or_item_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display requests linked to a bibliographic or item record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display requests linked to a bibliographic or item record

    +

    You can view all the hold requests linked to a bibliographic or item record, regardless of request status, and work with those requests.

    +

    To see all the hold requests linked to a bibliographic or item record:

    +

    Note:
    If an item is linked to a different bibliographic record after an item-level hold request is placed, the hold request is updated with the new bibliographic information.

    +
      +
    1. Open the list of linked requests by one of these methods:
      • Bibliographic or Item Record workform - Select Links, All Hold Requests from the menu bar.
      • Hold Request workform - Select Links, All Hold Requests from the menu bar.
      • Holds Queue - Select Links, All Hold Requests from the menu bar.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about the Holds Queue for a title or item, see Managing the Holds Queue.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Patron Status workform - Requests view - Right-click the request, and select Links, All Hold Requests from the context menu.
    • +
    • Find Tool results - hold requests - Right-click the request, and select Links, All Hold Requests from the context menu. For more information about finding hold requests, see Find hold requests. The Linked Hold Requests dialog box opens. The dialog box lists the hold requests associated with the record. Item-level and first-available-copy requests are indicated by the item-level icon ItemHoldIcon00062.gif. Borrow by Mail requests are indicated by the Borrow by Mail icon iconBBM00063.gif. Item-level Borrow by Mail requests include an I in the Borrow by Mail icon iconItemBBM00064.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If only one request is associated with the record, the Hold Request workform opens for that request.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click any line item to open the hold request, or select one or more line items and right-click to choose options from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Displaying_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Displaying_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7f5d13c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Displaying_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + Displaying Hold Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying Hold Requests

    +

    You can display a specific patron’s hold requests, or any hold requests that meet selected criteria. The status of a hold request indicates the stage it has reached in holds processing:

    +

    Note:
    The library may specify its own names for these hold request statuses. See Defining Hold Statuses and Hold Not Supplied Reasons.

    +
      +
    • Active - When a hold request is placed in the queue, its status is automatically set to Active. All items that can fill the hold request are bound to it, and the items can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. to fill the request. The system is actively looking for items to fill the request. You can cancel an active request, or convert it to an interlibrary loan request.
    • +
    • Cancelled - Cancelled hold requests remain in the database and visible on Polaris workforms. A Cancelled request cannot be filled. However, you can reactivate or delete it.
    • +
    • Expired - If a hold request is not filled within the specified period of time, the request status automatically changes to Expired. (The current date is later than the Expiration date on the Hold Request workform.) An Expired request cannot be filled. However, you can reactivate or delete the request, or convert it to an interlibrary loan request. You can run a report that lists Expired hold requests.
    • +
    • Held - A Held request indicates that an item has been trapped to fill the request, and the item’s circulation status is also Held. The item is ready for the patron to pick up.
    • +
    • Inactive - An Inactive hold request has an activation date in the future. The request does not appear in the queue, and an item cannot be trapped to fill the request until the activation date. You can cancel or delete an Inactive request, or convert it to an interlibrary loan request.
    • +
    • Located - Used during picklist processing, a status of Located allows staff to indicate that an item has been found to fill a request. Staff can select the entry from the pending list and select Located to indicate the item has been located on the shelf. It is not necessary to scan the item barcode.
    • +
    • Not-supplied - If no items can fill the request (for example, if no items are attached to the bibliographic record), the request status is Not-supplied. You can delete the request or convert it to an interlibrary loan request. You can also reactivate a Not-supplied request, but if the reason it was not supplied has not changed, the request becomes Not-supplied again.
    • +
    • Out - An item has been linked to the hold request, and the item’s circulation status has changed to Out. This status is useful in keeping track of items requested and circulated by Borrow by Mail. See Borrow By Mail Circulation. Your library may also choose to enable it even if you do not offer Borrow by Mail.
    • +
    • Pending - When an Active request can be filled by an item with a status of In at your library, or the request has been routed to another library that has the item with a status of In, the status changes to Pending. If none of the items there have a status of In, the request keeps its Active status, and items can be trapped to fill the request.
    • +
    • Shipped - A Shipped hold request status indicates that an item was trapped at a branch other than the pickup branch, and is being shipped to the pickup branch.
    • +
    • Unclaimed - If the requesting patron does not pick up the held item within the specified period of time, the hold request status automatically changes from Held to Unclaimed. (The current date is later than the Unclaimed date on the Hold Request workform.) You can run a report that lists Unclaimed items.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The unclaimed date is determined by the Maximum days held for pickup setting for Holds options (Request parameters) in Polaris Administration; dates closed and hours of operation (days closed) are included in the calculation. The item becomes available to circulate or to trap for the next request. Your library system chooses whether to delete or cancel unclaimed requests automatically when the held item is checked in.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Edit_hold_request_data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Edit_hold_request_data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a80366d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Edit_hold_request_data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit hold request data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Hold Request Data

    +

    Some hold request data can be edited, depending on the status of the hold request. For example, you can add or edit notes for all requests, but you can change the expiration date for Active, Inactive, and Pending requests only. You can change the pickup location for holds with a status of Active, Pending, Located, Inactive, Held, and Shipped.

    +

    To edit a hold request:

    +
      +
    1. Display the hold request you want to edit from one of the following locations:
    2. +
    +

    The hold requests are displayed in a list view, such as on the Holds view of the Patron Status workform .

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the hold request in the list, and select Openfrom the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    If your library allows patrons to change the pickup location from the PAC, the pickup branch column indicates the original pickup location and the new pickup location to which the item is being routed.

    +

    The Hold Request workform appears. The specific information fields available for editing on the workform depend on the request’s status.

    +
      +
    1. Edit the information applicable to the hold request status:
      • To add or edit notes, select the Notes view and type in the notes fields.
      • To change the expiration date (Active, Inactive, or Pending), select a different date in the Expiration box.
      • To change the pickup location (Active, Pending, Located, Inactive, Held, or Shipped), select a different branch in the Pickup box. When you change the pickup location for a held item in the staff client, the item must be transferred to the new pickup location.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If the item is held at your library (the pickup branch is the same as your log-in branch), and you change the pickup branch, the hold will automatically change from Held to Shipped.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If you change the hold pickup location for an item held at another branch, a message box displays. If you select Yes, a message under the Pickup box in the Hold Request workform indicates the held item is being rerouted to the new pickup location. The held items that need to be sent to the new pickup location are listed in the Held items to transfer list in the Request Manager. See: Daily Request Processing. A staff member at the branch where the item is held can use this list to pull the item from the holds shelf and transfer it to the new location. See: Check-in a held item with a changed pickup location.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you change the pickup library, certain policies regarding the holds request may change.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To change the unclaimed date (Held), select a different date in the Unclaimed box. If the pick-up branch is closed on the new date, the unclaimed date is set to the next day the pick-up branch is open when you save the request. A message informs you of the change.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Important:
    If you change the unclaimed date for a request with the status of Held, you will need to manually change the pick-up slip. Cross out the old date on the slip and write in the new date.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Editing_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Editing_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..efba2dd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Editing_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Hold Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Editing Hold Requests

    +

    After hold requests have been placed, you can edit them in the following ways:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_at_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_at_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..934f0dfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_at_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fill a hold request at circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fill a Hold Request at Circulation

    +

    You may have received an item from another library to fill a request, or you may be alerted to the item during other circulation tasks. To fill a hold request at circulation, usually during the check-in process:

    +

    Note:
    At bulk mode check-in, your library’s Polaris Administration settings determine whether the item is automatically held or if you are prompted to hold the item. At check-out, another Polaris Administration setting determines whether an item can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. to fill a request. See Set Holds options: Define staff client and PAC alerts and blocks.

    +
      +
    1. Check in an item from one of the following locations:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This procedure also applies if you are renewing an item (refer to Renewing Items) or checking out an item (Check out an item).

    +

    A message appears. If your branch is not the pick-up library, the message asks if you want to transfer the item to the pick-up library for a hold. If your branch is the pick-up library, the message asks if you want to hold the item.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes in the message box and the following occurs, depending on the message:
      • If the item belongs to another library, the status is updated to Transferred and the request status is Shipped. It will be checked in at the other library and held.
      • If the item belongs to the same library where it is checked in, the hold is placed.
    2. +
    +

    If there is a display note in the hold request, a second message shows the note. Click OK.

    +

    The following events occur automatically:

    +
    + +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can reprint a hold slip for a held item by checking in the held item a second time, keeping the Held status for the item.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • A charge is applied to the patron’s account if that is your library’s policy.
    • +
    • Polaris produces a hold notice to notify the patron that the item is available for pickup. The delivery method for the hold notice is determined by Polaris Administration settings.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The patron has a library-defined number of days to pick up the item before its request status becomes Unclaimed. However, you can change this date by editing the hold request’s Unclaimed date box. See Edit hold request data.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    The following additional holds messages may appear at circulation:

    +
      +
    • The hold request for...needs to be either reactivated or canceled - To reactivate the request, click Yes. To cancel the request, click No.
    • +
    • This item cannot be checked out, because it is being held - To override the hold and continue with check-out, click Yes, and a message asks if you want to reactivate the hold request. To stop the check-out, click No.
    • +
    • This item is held for...Continue to hold the item? - To continue the current hold, click Yes. To continue the circulation process, click No. If the item can fill another request, a message indicates that this item satisfies a hold request.
    • +
    • Outreach services patron - This note may appear on a holds message if your library uses Polaris outreach services. It indicates that the item fills a hold request for an outreach services patron. See Outreach Services Processing.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_with_Fill_Now.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_with_Fill_Now.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c12a78d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_a_hold_request_with_Fill_Now.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fill a hold request with Fill Now + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fill a Hold Request with Fill Now

    +

    You might use the Fill Now function if the item with which you want to fill the request is not identical to what has been requested. Also, you might use it for an item that would be restricted from filling the request under normal circumstances. (The function is available for Not-supplied requests, as well as requests with other statuses.)

    +

    To use Fill Now:

    +
      +
    1. Open the hold request you want to fill in the Hold Request workform. See Edit hold request data.
    2. +
    3. Click pbutFillNow.gif, press CTRL+F, or select Tools, Fill Now from the menu bar.
    4. +
    +

    The Scan/Enter Item Barcode dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Scan the item’s barcode in the Item barcode box.
    2. +
    +

    The following events occur automatically:

    + +

    Note:
    The patron has a library-defined number of days to pick up the item before its request status becomes unclaimed. However, you can change this date by editing the hold request’s Unclaimed date box.

    +
      +
    1. If a message asks whether you want to transfer the item to the pickup library, click Yes, and ship the item to the library, where it will be checked in and held.
    2. +
    +

    If you have set up printing for in-transit slips from this workform, the slip is printed automatically. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    The following messages may appear when you fill a request with the Fill Now function. Follow the instructions:

    +
      +
    • The item is designated not-holdable - To fill the request with the item, click Yes. To stop filling the request, click No.
    • +
    • This item is held for...Continue to hold the item? - To continue the current hold, click Yes. To continue the circulation process, click No. If the item can fill another request, a message indicates that this item satisfies a hold request.
    • +
    • Transfer this item to library for hold? - To transfer the item, click Yes. If you do not want to transfer the item, click No.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_hold_requests_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_hold_requests_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..466aa28c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Fill_hold_requests_for_Requests-To-Fill.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fill hold requests for Requests-To-Fill + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fill Hold Requests for Requests-To-Fill

    +

    Pending requests are requests for items with a status of In at your library. The items must be pulled and scanned to fill the requests. To fill hold requests as part of your library’s regular process of checking the Requests-To-Fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) report:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation > Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch in the Branch name box, Item in the By box, and Pending in the Status box.
    2. +
    +

    The Request-To-Fill list appears on the workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Holds to Fill to print the Requests-To-Fill report.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also print the workform list view. Select the column header by which you wish to sort the list, then select File > Print > List View.

    +

    The report is generated and the Report Preview window opens.

    +

    + RTFReport.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the printer icon.
    2. +
    +

    The report is printed on the default printer for your workstation. It lists the items at your branch with a status of In that can fill a pending hold request. The report contains the same information as the Requests list in the Request Manager workform, as well as the requesting patron’s patron code, registration branch, barcode, and phone number. Requests for specific items (item-level hold requests) are indicated by the text This item only.

    +

    Note:
    You can also print the RTF report from the Polaris Reports dialog box. Select Utilities > Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Running the report by this method allows you to sort by specific fields, such as call number and collection.

    +
      +
    1. Pull the requested items from the shelves.
    2. +
    3. Check in each item from one of the following locations:
    4. +
    + +

    A message asks whether you want to transfer the item to the pick-up branch.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes.
    2. +
    +

    The circulation status is Transferred, and the request status is Shipped.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 6-7 for each item you are supplying.
    2. +
    3. Ship each item to its pick-up library, where the item will be checked in and held for pickup. See Fill a hold request at circulation.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Denying items - See Deny items for Requests-To-Fill.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Filling_Holds_at_Circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Filling_Holds_at_Circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2829d86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Filling_Holds_at_Circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Filling Holds at Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Filling Holds at Circulation

    +

    If an item that fills a hold request is scanned during circulation, you can choose to hold the item for the requesting patron. If you hold the item, the item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision., and the request is filled. The patron has a library-defined number of days to pick up the item before its request status becomes unclaimed.

    +

    Note:
    You can also fill a request by using the Fill Now function on the Hold Request workform. After you scan the item’s barcode, Polaris automatically holds the item. See Fill a hold request with Fill Now.

    +

    If you choose not to hold an item for a request, you can either reactivate or cancel the hold request. If you reactivate the request, items can still be trapped to fill it, including the item you just denied for the hold. If you cancel the request, items cannot be trapped to fill it. However, you can manually reactivate a cancelled request at any time (see Reactivate hold requests).

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Find_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Find_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3420e501 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Find_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Hold Requests

    +

    To find hold requests using the Polaris Find Tool:

    +

    Note:
    If an item is linked to a different bibliographic record after an item-level hold request is placed, the hold request is updated with the new bibliographic information.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Hold Requests from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click HoldIconOrb.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The General tabbed page of the Find Tool appears. Hold Requests is selected in the Object box.

    +

    Tip:
    For fast navigation, press the TAB key to move among the Object, Search by, Type, For, Limit by, and Values boxes. Type the first letter of the search option in the Object, Search by, Type, and Limit by boxes.

    +
      +
    1. Select the criterion to search by in the Search by box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you often search by the same criteria but they are not the default settings, you can save your own settings by selecting Options, Save as User Default from the Find Tool menu bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of search in the Type box.
    2. +
    3. If you want your search results to be sorted, select the Sort by check box and select a value.
    4. +
    5. Type a search string in the For box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are searching by ISSN, include a dash in your search string if the ISSN is stored with a dash. Or use a wildcard character (*) before the dash and eliminate the rest of the ISSN.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to focus the search, select a limiter in the Limit by box, and set a value for the limiter in the Value box.
    2. +
    3. Click Search to begin the search, or press ENTER.
    4. +
    +

    Your results appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find Tool window. To load all the results in a large results list, press CTRL+SHIFT+A.

    +

    Note:
    If you searched in Normal mode by Activation date, Expiration date, or Unclaimed date, the appropriate date appears in the Date column of the search results list. All other hold request searches display the request date in the Date column.

    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions to work with an item in the results list:
      • Double-click a request line item to open the hold request.
      • Right-click a request line in the results list to work with the request without opening it. The context menu displays the available options. Among other options, you can link to associated patron, bibliographic, or item records, to the holds queue for the associated title or item, or to all hold requests linked to the same title or item.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Group_patron_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Group_patron_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcc4c9a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Group_patron_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Group a patron’s hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Group a Patron’s Hold Requests

    +

    You can group hold requests with a status of Active, Inactive, or Pending. A group can contain requests with any or all these statuses, and you can add any number of hold requests to an existing group.

    +

    To group hold requests:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Requests view. See Display a patron’s hold requests.
    2. +
    +

    The patron’s hold requests are listed under Polaris requests.

    +
      +
    1. Select the requests you want to group.
    2. +
    3. Click pbut_Group.gif or press CTRL+G.
    4. +
    +

    A letter is assigned to the new group. It appears in the Group column for each of the grouped requests. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see this column.

    +

    Example:
    The letter A is assigned to the patron’s first group. If the patron already has a group A, the letter B is assigned to the new group.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to add one or more hold requests to an existing group, follow these steps:
    2. +
    3. Select any one request in the existing group.
    4. +
    5. Select the requests you want to add to the group.
    6. +
    7. Click pbut_Group00065.gif.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Grouping_Patron_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Grouping_Patron_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8307881 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Grouping_Patron_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Grouping a Patron’s Hold Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Grouping a Patron’s Hold Requests

    +

    If a patron wants any one of several requested titles, you can group the related hold requests. When one of the grouped requests is filled, Polaris automatically deletes the other requests in the group because they are no longer needed. The group is counted as a single request against the patron’s total request limit.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Hold_Request_Messages_and_Blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Hold_Request_Messages_and_Blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e925c0d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Hold_Request_Messages_and_Blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Request Messages and Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Request Messages and Blocks

    +

    Messages and blocks may appear as you create hold requests:

    +
      +
    • +

      All items attached to this title are restricted from filling requests - If you click Yes to place the request, the request is saved as Active, which means the system will keep looking for items to fill the request. You can cancel an active request, or convert it to an interlibrary loan request. Click No to stop saving the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Title: Title Name This item is restricted from filling requests -  Click Yes to place the request with a Not Supplied status. Click No to stop saving the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron has exceeded request limit for Title Name - Click Yes to place the request with an Active status. Click No to stop saving the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item Blocks dialog box - Click Yes to override the block and create the item request. Click No to stop creating the request. See Working with Blocks (Stops).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Items are not available to fill the request for the following reasons - Click Yes to place the request with an Active status. Click No to stop saving the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      No items are attached to the bibliographic record - Click Yes to place the request with an Active status. Click No to stop saving the request. A Polaris Administration setting controls whether this message appears or the request is placed automatically. See Set Holds options: Define staff client and PAC alerts and blocks.

      +
    • +
    • +

      First available copy messages - Your library may allow first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD). on specific issues of serials or specific parts of multi-part titles (such as Season One of a television series on DVD). Polaris Administration settings control these features. See the Set Holds Options: Enable Hold Requests by Patrons and Define Restrictions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      The item is in - The item is available in the library. Click Yes to place the request. Click No to stop saving the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      No matching patron record was found - Click OK, and check the patron barcode. To express-register a patron, see Express-register a new patron at check-out.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron blocks dialog box - You can override the blocks and place the request, or cancel the request. From this dialog box, you can also view the Patron Status and the Patron Registration workforms to see more details about the blocks, and perhaps resolve them. For more information about blocks, see Working with Blocks (Stops).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Duplicated Requests dialog box - Click Yes to place a duplicate request for the patron. Click No to stop saving the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Outreach services patron - This note may be displayed for the hold request if your library uses Polaris outreach services. It indicates that the hold request is for an active outreach services patron. See Outreach Services Processing.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Holds_Processing_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Holds_Processing_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..659bbcae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Holds_Processing_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Holds Processing Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds Processing Reports

    +

    Reports related to holds are part of the regular holds processing workflow. They identify a branch’s hold requests to fill, requests awaiting pickup, unclaimed requests, titles that have a high volume of holds, expired requests, and other useful information. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Circulation, Holds in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Cancelled_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Cancelled_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4453961 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Cancelled_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage Cancelled hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Cancelled Hold Requests

    +

    To delete or reactivate Cancelled hold requests:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch in the Branch name box, Patron in the By box, and Cancelled in the Status box.
    2. +
    3. Click pbutdelete00073.gif to delete the requests or click  to reactivate them. See Delete hold requests and Reactivate hold requests.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may automatically delete cancelled hold requests after a specified period of time.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Not-supplied_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Not-supplied_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72cc6bd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Not-supplied_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage Not-supplied hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Not-Supplied Hold Requests

    +

    You can also convert these requests to interlibrary loan requests. To delete or reactivate Not-supplied hold requests for your patrons:

    +

    Note:
    A Not-supplied request cannot be made Active if the conditions that made it Not-supplied have not changed. You can reactivate the request, but as soon as the system determines that it cannot be filled, the status again becomes Not-supplied.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch in the Branch name box, Patron in the By box, and Not Supplied in the Status box.
    2. +
    3. Delete, reactivate, or convert the requests:
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may automatically delete Not-supplied hold requests after a specified period of time.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Cancel a not-supplied request - You can cancel a Not-supplied request from the Hold Request workform. Click the Cancel icon in the workform toolbar.

    +

    + CancelRequest.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Unclaimed_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Unclaimed_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07a394fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_Unclaimed_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage Unclaimed hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Unclaimed Hold Requests

    +

    The item status changes from Held to Unclaimed at 11:59 p.m. on the hold request’s unclaimed date if the item is not picked up. The unclaimed date is determined by the Maximum days held for pickup setting in Polaris Administration (see Set Holds options: Define terms and limits); dates closed and hours of operation (days closed) are taken into account in the calculation.

    +

    To manage Unclaimed hold requests for items that were supposed to be picked up at your branch, but were not picked up:

    +

    Note:
    As long as an item’s status is still Held, you can manually extend the unclaimed date when a patron is unable to pick up the item by the original date. Change the Unclaimed date for the item in the Hold Request workform (see Edit hold request data).

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch in the Branch name box, Pickup in the By box, and Unclaimed in the Status box, if they are not already selected.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For a paper copy of this information, select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and print the Unclaimed Checklist report.

    +
      +
    1. Pull the unclaimed materials from the holds pickup shelf.
    2. +
    3. Check in each item. See Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform.
    4. +
    +

    All unclaimed requests are automatically deleted or cancelled when the held items are checked in, depending on your library’s policy.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_pending_hold_requests_Requests-to-Fill.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_pending_hold_requests_Requests-to-Fill.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..687d4818 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Manage_pending_hold_requests_Requests-to-Fill.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Manage pending hold requests (Requests-to-Fill) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage Pending Hold Requests (Requests-to-Fill)

    +

    Polaris processes requests-to-fill once a day, during overnight processing. You view or print the Requests-To-Fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) report daily to see what items other branches are requesting from you. For each pending request, you either check in the item to change its status and send it to the pickup branch, or deny the request in Polaris. Your library system determines how many days you have to respond to a request before it is routed to the next library in the sequence and no longer displays in your RTF list.

    +

    Note:
    An item filling a request can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at any branch in the routing sequence, at any time. RTF is simply a report to library staff that they have an item with a status of In that can fill a pending request.

    +

    To review and process pending hold requests regularly:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation | Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears. When the view opens, the pending requests for your branch are listed. If the view is already open and they are not listed, select your branch in the Branch name box, Item in theBy box, and Pending in the Status box.

    +

    Note: +
    If the pickup location was changed for any held items, the items are listed in the Held items to transfer list. These held items can be pulled from the holds shelf and sent to the new pickup location.

    +
      +
    1. Print the Requests-To-Fill report. See Fill hold requests for Requests-To-Fill.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also print the workform list view. Select the column header by which you wish to sort the list, then select File > Print > List View.

    +
      +
    1. Fill or deny items for RTF. See Fill hold requests for Requests-To-Fill, and Deny items for Requests-To-Fill.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you take no action on a pending request, the request is routed automatically to the next library in the RTF sequence after a library-defined number of days.

    +

    See also: Setting Up Holds and ILL Request Processing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Managing_the_Holds_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Managing_the_Holds_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4bb08474 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Managing_the_Holds_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing the Holds Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing the Holds Queue

    +

    The holds queue is the prioritized list of Active, Pending, Located, or Shipped hold requests for a specific title or item. By default, hold requests are arranged from the oldest request at the top to the most recently created request at the bottom. The oldest request is usually filled first. However, you can manually change the order of the requests.

    +

    Note:
    Certain administration settings for your library may also affect a request’s queue position, so that requests are not always filled in strict date and time order. See Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings. Libraries may also choose not to display the request queue position in the PAC patron account. See Enable patron account access - PowerPAC.

    +

    To change the order in which hold requests for a title are filled, by rearranging the requests in the queue:

    +

    Note:

    You need the Circulation permission Modify hold queues: Allow to do this procedure.

    +

    Open the Holds Queue by one of these methods:

    +
      +
    • Shortcut Bar - Select Circulation, Holds Queue to find the bibliographic or item record. When you double-click the record in the Find Tool results list, the Holds Queue workform for the record is displayed.
    • +
    • Patron Status workform - Requests view - Right-click the title, and select Links, Holds Queue from the context menu.
    • +
    • Hold Request workform - Select Links, Holds Queue from the menu bar.
    • +
    +

    Tip:

    To see all the requests for the title, not just the active and pending requests, select Links, All Hold Requests from the Holds Queue workform menu bar.

    +

    The Holds Queue workform opens. The workform lists the active and pending requests for the title. If your library allows item-level or first-available-copy requests, these are indicated by the item-level icon ItemHoldIcon00066.gif at the beginning of the request line. Borrow by Mail requests are indicated by the Borrow by Mail icon iconBBM00067.gif at the beginning of the request line. Item-level Borrow by Mail requests include an I in the Borrow by Mail icon iconItemBBM00068.gif.

    +

    Note:
    Other users may be creating requests for a title, or request statuses may be changing. To view the most current request data for a title, select View, Refresh, click the Refresh button, or press F5.

    +

    To see the queue for a specific volume in a multi-volume set, or a specific serial issue, select the volume or issue from the Volume or Issue filter list in the workform header area.

    +

    Select the hold request line item to be moved in the Queue list.

    +

    Choose one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • +

      To move the request up in the queue one or more positions, click pbut_MoveUpHold.gif or press CTRL+U. Repeat as needed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To move the request down in the queue one or more positions, click pbut_MoveDownHold.gif CTRL+W. Repeat as needed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To move the request to the first position in the queue, click pbut_MoveTopHold.gif or press CTRL+T.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To move the request to the last position in the queue, click pbut_MoveBotHold.gif or press CTRL+B.

      +
    • +
    +

    The hold request appears in its new position, with the other requests in the Queue list rearranged accordingly.

    +

    Select File | Save to save your changes.

    +

    The status bar indicates that the order of the holds was changed successfully.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Local preferred - Patrons may not have their hold requests filled in the exact order of the queue. A pickup library may choose to have requests for its own items filled before requests for other branches’ items. Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings

      +
    • +
    • +

      Queue position for patron-suspended or reactivated requests - If your library allows patrons to suspend and reactivate their own hold requests from the PAC, the library can specify whether these requests retain their positions in the holds queue or are placed at the end of the queue. See Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings

      +
    • +
    • +

      Loan periods for high-demand items - Your library may choose to automatically shorten an item’s loan period if a specified number of hold requests are placed for the title.  This option allows high-demand titles to circulate more quickly. See Set Holds options: Define staff client and PAC alerts and blocks.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_patrons_one_title.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_patrons_one_title.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db923a94 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_patrons_one_title.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place hold requests - multiple patrons, one title + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Hold Requests - Multiple Patrons, One Title

    +

    If your library has patrons fill out request slips that you set aside for later processing, and several patrons have requested the same title, you can request the title once for all the patrons who want it.

    +

    To place holds when multiple patrons request the same title:

    +
      +
    1. On the Hold Request workform, fill in the Pickup box, Activation box, and Expiration box. See Place single or consecutive hold requests.
    2. +
    3. If you want to use a different pickup branch, activation date, or expiration date for a particular patron, you must change the setting for that patron’s request after all the requests are created.
    4. +
    5. Select multiple patrons by doing the following steps:
      1. Click the patron Find button to search for the first patron record.
      2. Select the appropriate records in the results list.You must select more than one patron to set up the multiple request. You can delete patrons from the multi-request later (see step 3).
      3. Right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    The Multi-Request view appears with the selected patrons in the Patrons list. The Patrons list includes each patron’s name, barcode, registration library, and patron code.

    +
      +
    1. To edit the patron list, choose one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    • To add a patron to the list, click pbut_Add.gif or press CTRL+R to do a patron record search. Right-click the patron in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    • +
    • To remove one or more patrons, select the patrons in the Patrons list, and click pbut_Remove.gif or press CTRL+E.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To select a title, do the following steps:
      1. Click pbut_Add00052.gif or press CTRL+T to do a bibliographic (or item) record search.
      2. Right-click the record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Multi-Request view appears with the selected title in the Titles list. For a bibliographic record, the title and author are included. For an item record, the title, author, material type, assigned branch, call number, and barcode are included.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to select a different title, select the title in the Titles list, click the minus button or press CTRL+M to delete it, and click the plus sign to do a bibliographic record search.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to input notes, fill in the appropriate boxes on the Notes view.
    2. +
    +

    If you want a different note for a specific request, you must change that request’s note after all the requests are created.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the requests.
    2. +
    +

    The requests are saved as several individual requests. The Status (multi-request) and Request date boxes are filled in. For item requests, the This item only check box is selected.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to edit a request, close the Hold Request workform and open the request. See Edit hold request data.
    2. +
    +

    You must edit the requests individually. You cannot edit all the requests at the same time.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_titles_one_patron.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_titles_one_patron.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb2941e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_hold_requests_-_multiple_titles_one_patron.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place hold requests - multiple titles, one patron + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Hold Requests - Multiple Titles, One Patron

    +

    You can request multiple titles for one patron at once. For example, a patron may request several volumes in a series or several books by the same author.

    +

    To request multiple titles for one patron:

    +
      +
    1. On the Hold Request workform, fill in the Pickup, Activation, and Expiration boxes.
    2. +
    +

    If you want to use a different pickup branch, activation date, or expiration date for a request, you must change the setting for the request after all the requests are created.

    +
      +
    1. To specify or change the requesting patron, choose one of the following options:
      • Scan the patron’s barcode in the Barcode box.
      • Click Patron Find to do a patron record search, right-click the record in the Results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Name, Barcode, Code, and Registered at boxes are filled in.

    +
      +
    1. Select multiple titles by doing the following steps:
      1.  Click Find and search for the bibliographic records. Or, if you are placing item-specific holds, you can change the object in the Find Tool and search for the item records.
      2. Select the appropriate records in the Results list. You can remove titles from the multi-request later.
      3. Right-click in the Results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Multi-Request view shows the selected patron in the Patrons list and the selected titles in the Titles list. For bibliographic records, the title and author are included. For item records, the title, author, material type, assigned branch, call number, and barcode are included.

    +
      +
    1. To modify the Titles list, choose one of the following options:
      • To add one or more titles, click the plus sign button pbut_Add00055.gif or press CTRL+T to do a bibliographic record search. Select the appropriate titles in the results list, right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.

      • To remove one or more titles, select the titles in the Titles list, and click the minus sign button pbut_Remove00056.gif or press CTRL+R.

    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you want to select a different patron, select the patron in the Patrons list, click pbut_Remove00057.gif to delete the entry, and click pbut_Add00058.gif to do a patron record search.

    +
    +
      +
    1. To add notes, type them in the appropriate boxes on the Notes view. See Place single or consecutive hold requests.
    2. +
    +

    If you want a different note for a specific request, you must change that request’s note after all the requests are created.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the requests.
    2. +
    +

    The requests are saved as several individual requests. The Status (multi-request) and Request date boxes are filled in. For item requests, the This item only check box is selected.

    +
      +
    1. To edit a request, close the Hold Request workform and open the request. See Edit hold request data.
    2. +
    +

    You cannot edit all the requests at the same time.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_single_or_consecutive_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_single_or_consecutive_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f48b5f20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Place_single_or_consecutive_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + + Place single or consecutive hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Place Single or Consecutive Hold Requests

    +

    After you have saved a hold request, you can place another request for the same patron or title using much of the information from the saved request. For information on messages that may appear, see Hold Request Messages and Blocks.

    +

    To place a single hold request or multiple hold requests consecutively:

    +

    Tip:
    Click but_hold.gif to display the Hold Request workform. This button appears on any workform where you can also select Tools, Place Hold. On the Check Out, Check In, and Patron Status workforms, you can press CTRL+H.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Hold Request workform from one of the following locations:
      • Bibliographic record - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
      • Check In workform - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
      • Check Out workform - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
      • Find Tool Results list (patron, bibliographic or item records) - Right-click a record, and select Place Hold from the context menu.
      • Holds Queue - Click pbut_Hold.gif. For information about working with the Holds Queue, see Managing the Holds Queue.
      • Item Record - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
      • Patron Registration workform - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
      • Patron Status workform - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
      • Polaris Shortcut Bar - Select File | New from the Shortcut Bar. Then select Hold Request from the New dialog box, and click OK.
      • Request Manager (Hold Requests view) - Click pbut_Hold00051.gif. For information about working with the Request Manager, see Daily Request Processing.
      • Purchase Order workform, Line Items view - Right-click a line item and select Place Hold from the context menu.
      • Purchase Order Line Item workform - Select Tools, Place Hold from the menu bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Hold Request workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. In the Pickup box, select the branch where the patron wants to pick up the item.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Borrow by mail and Tracking number fields are used by libraries that check out and send requested materials to patrons. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.

    +
      +
    1. In the Activation box, select the date when the hold request should be activated.
    2. +
    +

    The activation date determines when items can trap to fill the request.

    +
      +
    1. In the Expiration box, select the date after which the requested item is not needed.
    2. +
    3. To input or change the requesting patron, use one of the following methods:
      • Scan or type the patron’s barcode in the Barcode box.
      • Click Patron Find to do a patron record search, right-click the record in the Results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    4. +
    +
    +

    The Name, Barcode, Code, and Registered at boxes are filled in.

    +
    +

    Tip:
    To preview a bibliographic record and the items linked to it before you select it for the hold request, right-click the record in the Find Tool results list, and select Preview from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. To select a title for the hold request, click Title Find to do a bibliographic or item record search, right-click the record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select a bibliographic-level serial title or a title with multiple parts and your library allows first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD)., a message appears. If the bibliographic record includes issue designations, you can select a specific issue. If there are no issue designations, you can select a specific item. If the bibliographic record is not a serial, but it has volume data, you can select a specific volume.

    +

    The applicable boxes in the Details frame are filled in.

    +

    Note:
    You can also specify the title by typing its information. However, you must unlock the hold request. This is risky, since the request may not be filled if the information does not match the database. Also, you cannot lock a request after unlocking it. To use this method, select Tools, Unlock Request. A message indicates that the request may not be filled. Click Yes to continue. All the boxes in the Details frame, except Item barcode, are available for editing. Type the title’s information in the appropriate boxes.

    +

    For serial issues with linked item records, you can make item-level requests as you would for a monographic item. Use the Unlock Request function for serial issues without linked item records, you can select Tools, Unlock Request to make the Copy and Issue fields available for data entry. Data in the Copy and Issue fields is informational only and is not used to match an item to the hold request. However, if you convert the hold request to an ILL request, information in these fields is placed in the appropriate fields of the ILL request. See Creating Interlibrary Loan Requests.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to enter notes for the hold request, select View, Notes or click HoldReqNotesBtn.gif to display the Notes view, and type the note as follows:
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The library may set default text for this note for Borrow by Mail Requests. See Placing Borrow by Mail Requests.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If you want a note to be viewed online by staff only, but not appear on the hold slip, type the information in the Non-public box.
    • +
    • If you have the Circulation permission Modify PAC display note: Allow, you can add or modify the PAC display note on the Hold Request workform - Notes view. This note is available to patrons in the PAC patron account - Requests page.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The library may set default text for this note for Borrow by Mail Requests. See Placing Borrow by Mail Requests.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the request.
    2. +
    +

    The Status (Active) and Request date boxes are filled in. For item requests, the This item only check box is selected.

    +

    If the hold request includes a note, the Notes view icon is yellow NotesBtnYellow.gif.

    +

    On the Notes view, the Request Satisfied By list displays the items that can fill the hold request.

    +

    Important:
    If you are placing more requests for the same patron or title, do not close the workform. Go to step 9.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to place another request, choose one of the following options:
      • Same title, different patron - Select File | New | Patron, or press CTRL+G. A new Hold Request workform appears with the same information in the Details frame boxes. The Patron frame boxes are blank.
      • Different title, same patron - Select File | New | Title, or press CTRL+H. The saved request closes. A new Hold Request workform appears with the same information in the Patron frame boxes. The Details frame boxes are blank.
      • Different title, different patron - Select File| New | Blank, or press CTRL+N.
    2. +
    +

    A new blank Hold Request workform appears.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Item holdability - Holdability is an item’s eligibility to be trapped for a hold request. A specific item may be holdable without restrictions, with specified restrictions, or not holdable under any conditions. The Item Record workform - Circulation view indicates an item’s holdability status. In addition, your library may prevent items with selected circulation statuses from being held.
    • +
    • Items relinked to a new bibliographic record - If an item is linked to a different bibliographic record after an item-level hold request is placed, the hold request is updated with the new bibliographic information.
    • +
    • Request history - You can see the request’s status as it passes from branch to branch in the request-to-fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) cycle. Each time the request passes to a different branch, the status is displayed as Pending. On the Hold Request workform, select View, Notes. Request history information is located at the bottom of the Notes view. For Pending requests, the Branch column lists the current branch in the RTF cycle that has an item eligible to fill the request. For example, if the status is Pending and Library A is the listed branch, the request appears on Library A’s requests-to-fill report. For more information about RTF processing, see Daily Request Processing.
    • +
    • Multiple hold requests - You can request one title for multiple patrons, or multiple titles for one patron, at the same time. See Place hold requests - multiple patrons, one title and Place hold requests - multiple titles, one patron.
    • +
    • Grouping holds - You can group a patron’s related holds so that when one request is filled, the others in the group are cancelled. See Group a patron’s hold requests.
    • +
    • Patron-initiated hold requests - Your library may allow patrons to place hold requests from the PAC. See PAC online Help.
    • +
    • Borrow By Mail - On the Hold Request workform, the Borrow by mail and Tracking number fields are used by libraries that check out and send requested materials to patrons. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Placing_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Placing_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43260902 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Placing_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Placing Hold Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Placing Hold Requests

    +

    You can request one or multiple titles for a patron, or the same title for multiple patrons. You can also request specific items and your library may also allow first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD). on a specific issue of a serial or a specific part of a multipart set. A hold request can be placed on any bibliographic or item record, unless the record is provisional (incomplete) or an item is restricted from holds in some way.

    +

    Note:
    EContent cannot be requested from the Polaris staff client. Patrons place holds on eContent using the PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Reactivate_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Reactivate_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8378cb06 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Reactivate_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reactivate hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reactivate Hold Requests

    +

    You can reactivate Canceled, Expired, and Not-supplied hold requests to permit items to fill them. When you reactivate a hold request, the request immediately becomes active with a new expiration date, and items can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for it. The reactivated request’s position in the holds queue is determined by a Polaris Administration setting. See Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings. You might reactivate a cancelled request if a patron decides she wants a title after all. You might choose to reactivate Expired and Not-supplied requests to provide another opportunity to trap items for the request.

    +

    To reactivate one or more hold requests:

    +

    Note:
    A Not-supplied request cannot be made Active if the conditions that made it not supplied have not changed. You can reactivate the request, but as soon as the system determines that it cannot be filled, the status again becomes Not-supplied.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also display the hold requests on the Patron Status workform - Holds view. Right-click the requests in the list, and select Reactivate from the context menu. In the Hold Request workform, select Tools, Reactivate or click pbutReactivate.gif. In a Bibliographic or Item Record workform, select Links, All Hold Requests, right-click the request in the Linked Hold Requests dialog box, and select Reactivate from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +

      The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

      +
    3. Select a library in the Branch name box and one of the following options in the By box, according to the requests you want to display:
      • Item - Displays requests for items that are owned by the selected library
      • Patron - Displays requests for patrons who are registered at the selected library
      • Pickup - Displays requests to be picked up at the selected library
    4. +
    5. Select a hold request status in the Status box.
    6. +

      You can reactivate requests that are Cancelled, Expired, or Not-supplied.

      +
    7. Select the requests.
    8. +
    9. Click  above the Requests list, or press CTRL+A.
    10. +

      The list shows requests with the status Canceled, Expired, or Not-supplied, so the requests you reactivated are no longer displayed. Their status has changed to Active.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Patron control of hold requests - Your library may allow patrons to suspend Active or Pending hold requests and place hold requests with activation dates in the future from the PAC. A Polaris Administration setting controls the queue position of these requests when they are re-activated or the activation date is reached. See Set Holds options: Define staff client and PAC alerts and blocks.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Set a hold request to Ask me later.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Set a hold request to Ask me later.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1937e041 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Set a hold request to Ask me later.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Set a hold request to Ask me later + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set a hold request to Ask me later

    +

    You can mark a hold with Ask me later when your branch has an item on the RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. list that staff cannot immediately locate. When this option is selected, the system removes the item from display in the library’s pending list and moves the request to the next step in RTF, allowing the request to go to the next branch as soon as possible. When enabled, the Ask Me Later icon appears next to the item in the Items list. Unlike Deny, which removes the item from eligibility to fill the request, Ask Me Later leaves the item eligible to fill the request, giving the library another chance to fill the request.

    +

    The following are exceptions and additional functions for Ask Me Later:

    +

    If there are no In items - If other branches have items, but none are In, the request cannot be routed. In this case, set the request to Active, wait for the “Days at Branch” defined for this branch to pass, re-submit to RTF.

    +

    There are no eligible items, as in the following conditions:

    +
      +
    •  If this is the only item that can fill the request because all other items are restricted or set Not-holdable.
    • +
    •  If the request is an item-level request.
    • +
    • If no other branch has any holdable items, but this branch has more than one holdable item.
    • +
    +

    In each of these cases, a message displays indicating that the request cannot be routed, and the request remains Pending at the branch until some other action is taken.

    +

    Ask Me Later will not work in the following conditions:

    +
      +
    • +

      Only one routing cycle - If there are no items in the secondary cycle and only one cycle is allowed in the primary, if Ask Me Later is selected, the request will not go back to the primary and ask again. In this case there would be no further RTF activity, the request would remain Active.

      +
    • +
    • +

      One day left in number of days defined for the primary cycle - The request will not be routed back to the library.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Suspend_Reactivate_Holds_in_Bulk_from_Patron_Acct.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Suspend_Reactivate_Holds_in_Bulk_from_Patron_Acct.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ced717b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Suspend_Reactivate_Holds_in_Bulk_from_Patron_Acct.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Suspend/Reactivate Holds in Bulk from Patron Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suspend/Reactivate Holds in Bulk from Patron Account

    +

    You can update the activation dates for multiple requests from the patron record. This option is enabled when all selected holds are in a status of Active, Inactive, or Pending/Located.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click one or more holds from the Patron Holds View, and select Suspend/Reactivate.

    2. +
    3. Select an activation date from the Activation Date dialog box, and select OK. Only the current and future dates are enabled.

      The activation dates for the selected holds are updated. Holds that are now inactive or may now be pending/located will display those statuses.

    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Limit checks are performed when a hold is placed, not when the activation date is updated. There is no message when a hold is re-activated, but the limits are still respected during the RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. processing, which will leave a request active (or not supplied based on SA) until the patron is under their limits.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Transfer_a_hold_request.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Transfer_a_hold_request.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96c0839a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Transfer_a_hold_request.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Transfer a hold request + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Transfer a Hold Request to Another Bib or Item

    +

    You can transfer Active or Inactive hold requests from one bibliographic or item record to another. For example, you may want to transfer a hold request from a bibliographic record with many hold requests to a record with fewer requests or more copies. A transferred request is a new request. The pick-up branch, activation date, expiration date, and patron data are transferred from the original request, but the original request’s history is lost. When the transferred request is saved, the original is deleted, and the transferred request is placed at the end of the holds queue for the title, like any other new request.

    +

    To transfer a hold request from one bibliographic or item record to another one:

    +

    Note:
    To transfer requests, you need the permissions Hold requests: Create and Hold requests: Delete (refer to Set fine receipt options).

    +
      +
    1. Open the hold request you want to transfer in the Hold Request workform. See Edit hold request data.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Transfer from the menu bar.
    4. +
    +

    + pHoldReqTransfer.gif 

    +

    A message indicates that the request history will be lost.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes in the message box to continue with the transfer.
    2. +
    +

    A new Hold Request workform is displayed with the pick-up branch, activation date, expiration date, and patron data from the original request. The Details frame boxes are empty.

    +

    Note:
    You can also specify the title by typing its information. However, you must unlock the hold request. This is risky, because the request may not be filled if the information does not match the database. Also, you cannot lock a request after unlocking it. To use this method, select Tools, Unlock Request. A message indicates that the request may not be filled. Click Yes to continue. All the boxes in the Details frame, except Item barcode, are available for editing. Type the title’s information in the appropriate boxes.

    +
      +
    1. To select a title/item, click Title Find to do a bibliographic or item record search, right-click the record in the Results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    After you choose Select, the applicable boxes in the Details frame are filled in.

    +

    For serial issues with linked item records, you can make item-level requests as you would for a monographic item. For serial issues without linked item records, you can select Tools, Unlock Request to make the Copy and Issue fields available for data entry. Data in these fields is informational only and is not used to match an item to the hold request. However, if you convert the hold request to an ILL request, information in these fields is placed in the appropriate fields of the ILL request. See Creating Interlibrary Loan Requests.

    +
      +
    1. Add or edit information, as needed.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save the transferred request.
    4. +
    +

    The transferred request is placed at the end of the holds queue for the title. The original request is deleted.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    When a new bibliographic record replaces an existing record, any holds attached to the old record are transferred to the new record. These requests maintain their position in the queue.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Ungroup_patron_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Ungroup_patron_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcc5cb16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Ungroup_patron_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Ungroup a patron’s hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Ungroup a Patron’s Hold Requests

    +

    A group is automatically deleted if all but one request is ungrouped. This procedure does not delete the requests; it simply removes them from their groups.

    +

    To remove one, multiple, or all requests from a group:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Requests view. See Display a patron’s hold requests.
    2. +
    3. Select the requests you want to remove from the group in the Polaris requests list.
    4. +
    5. Click pbut_Ungroup.gif or press CTRL+R.
    6. +
    +

    The group letter no longer appears in the Group column for the requests you selected. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see this column.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Working_with_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Working_with_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..afa8703f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPholds/Working_with_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Hold Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Hold Requests

    +

    When a patron wants a title that is not available at your library, but is owned by your library system, you or the patron can place a request for the title (title-level hold) or a specific copy of the title (item-level hold). Your library may also allow first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD). on a specific issue of a serial or a specific part of a multi-part set.

    +

    The request is then sent to designated libraries in a specified order through Requests-To-Fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) processing. A library can choose to fill or deny a request. To fill a request, the library checks in the item and sends it to the pickup library. Then, the item is checked in at the pickup library and held for the patron.

    +

    The RTF process is one way that hold requests are filled. In addition, whenever an item that fills a hold request is scanned at circulation, you see an alert message with appropriate instructions. If an item is scanned at the request’s pickup library, you typically hold the item. If an item is scanned at any other library, you typically ship the item to the pickup library.

    +

    Your library sets holds processing options in Polaris Administration. Specific permissions are required to create and work with hold requests. See Set fine receipt options.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Cancel_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Cancel_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e78067b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Cancel_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cancel interlibrary loan requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cancel interlibrary loan requests

    +

    You can cancel Active and Inactive interlibrary loan requests. For example, if a patron decides that she no longer wants an item, you might cancel the Active request. If you cancel the request instead of deleting it, the request remains in your database, and is still displayed on the Request Manager workform and the Patron Status workform - Requests view. (If the cancelled request is not needed, simply delete it. See Delete interlibrary loan requests.)

    +

    To cancel one or more interlibrary loan requests:

    +

    Important:
    If you cancel a request after it goes to OCLC but before it is filled by a lending library, you must notify OCLC that you no longer want the item.

    +
      +
    1. Display the ILL requests you want to cancel on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. See Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Select the ILL request line items to be canceled.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Cancel from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The ILL requests have a Canceled status and remain in the database.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Convert_hold_requests_to_ILL_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Convert_hold_requests_to_ILL_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10cee878 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Convert_hold_requests_to_ILL_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Convert hold requests to ILL requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Convert hold requests to ILL requests

    +

    To convert a hold request to an ILL request, the hold request must have one of the following statuses: Active, Expired, Inactive, or Not-supplied. To convert hold requests to interlibrary loan requests:

    +
      +
    1. If the hold requests do not exist, create them. See Placing Hold Requests.
    2. +
    3. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    Other methods: From the Hold Request workform, select Tools, Convert to ILL Request.You can also select hold requests for a specific patron in the Polaris Requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view. Then right-click and select Convert to ILL Request from the context menu.

    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate options in the Branch name, By, and Status boxes. See Display hold requests by selected criteria.
    2. +
    3. Select the line items in the Requests list, and click pbutConvILL.gif above the list or press CTRL+I.
    4. +
    +

    The selected hold requests are deleted. A new ILL request replaces each hold request. The ILL requests may have an Active or an Inactive status, depending on your library’s policy.

    +

    Note:
    Borrow by Mail hold requests can be converted to ILL requests, but Borrow by Mail functionality does not apply to the new ILL request. For more information about Borrow by Mail, see Borrow By Mail Circulation.

    +

    If the patron has exceeded the limit for ILL requests, the following message appears: Patron is limited to number ILL requests. Click Yes to continue creating the ILL request. Click No to stop the process.

    +
      +
    1. To check the status of the ILL requests, see Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager.
    2. +
    3. If the ILL requests are inactive, do these steps:
      1. Review each request and make any changes. See Edit an ILL request.
      2. Export the appropriate requests to OCLC. see Export ILL requests to OCLC.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can use Export to change the request status to Active even if you do not use OCLC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Create_ILL_item_templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Create_ILL_item_templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3cc3bd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Create_ILL_item_templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create ILL item templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create ILL Item Templates

    +

    To create the template for interlibrary loan items:

    +

    Important:
    Each branch that receives ILL items needs an ILL item template as described here. You need to do this procedure only once for each branch.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the New dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select Item Template from the Objects list, and click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The Item Template workform - Cataloging view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type ILL Item in the Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Name the template ILL Item, exactly as it appears here.

    +
      +
    1. Select your branch (not yourself) in the Template owner box.
    2. +
    3. In the Circ status box (Identification section of the workform), select In.
    4. +
    5. Make the following settings in the Circulation parameters section of the workform:
      1. Select the material code in the Material type box.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    The interlibrary loan material type is recommended.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the loan period code in the Loan period box.
    2. +
    3. Select the fine code in the Fine code box.
    4. +
    5. Set the number of times an item can be renewed in the Renewal limit box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    A renewal limit of 0 (item cannot be renewed) is recommended.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Make the following settings in the Call number section of the workform:
      1. Select the shelving system in the Scheme box.
      2. (Optional) To track ILL records more easily, type ILL in the Class box. ILL is automatically inserted in the item’s call number when the item record is created.
    2. +
    3. If you want to input or change information in other boxes (such as Assigned [branch] or Collection), type or select the information.
    4. +
    5. Set the branch in the Home branch field to the same organization as the Assigned Branch.
    6. +
    7. Select (check) Do not float.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    ILL items never float, and any item created from an ILL template will have this indicator checked automatically.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the template.
    2. +
    +

    Once you have created the template, you can receive ILL items. See Receive an ILL item .

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Creating_Interlibrary_Loan_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Creating_Interlibrary_Loan_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24d9133b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Creating_Interlibrary_Loan_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Interlibrary Loan Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Interlibrary Loan Requests

    +

    You create an interlibrary loan request for a patron by converting a hold request to an ILL request. You may convert multiple hold requests at the same time. See Convert hold requests to ILL requests.

    +

    After an ILL request is created, it has a status of Active or Inactive, according to your library’s settings in Polaris Administration. If your library uses OCLC and the request has an Active status, it has been exported to OCLC and is in the queue. If the request has an Inactive status, you must review it and manually export it to OCLC before it becomes Active. See Exporting ILL Requests to OCLC.

    +

    The status of an ILL request indicates the stage it has reached in processing:

    +
      +
    • Active - The request has been exported to OCLC and placed in the queue. If a requesting library chooses not to mediate (review) ILL requests, the requests are automatically Active when they are created. The PAC patron account displays the date when the request became Active.
    • +
    • Cancelled - A Cancelled ILL request remains in the database and visible on Polaris workforms. The PAC patron account displays the date on which the request was cancelled. Cancelled requests can be deleted manually, at any time.
    • +
    • Inactive - An Inactive ILL request has not been placed in the queue. First, the request must be reviewed and manually exported to OCLC by staff at the requesting library. If a requesting library chooses to mediate (review) ILL requests, the requests are Inactive when they are created. The PAC patron account displays Inactive since [date].
    • +
    • Received - The ILL item arrived at the requesting library, and staff applied the Polaris receive function to the ILL request. When the request becomes Received, and temporary bibliographic and item records have been created, the item can be checked out to the patron. The request retains a Received status before and after the item is checked out. In the staff client, an ILL item with a Received status also displays the item’s circulation status; for example, Received-Transferred or Received-Held. In the PAC patron account, only the ILL status (Received) is displayed.
    • +
    • Returned - The ILL item was returned by the patron and checked in. Staff applied the Polaris return function to the ILL request. When the request becomes Returned, the item can be shipped back to the lending library. The request retains a Returned status before and after the item is shipped. The temporary bibliographic and item records are deleted when the request is deleted from Polaris. The Returned status is not displayed in the PAC patron account.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Delete_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Delete_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1bd57160 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Delete_interlibrary_loan_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete interlibrary loan requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete interlibrary loan requests

    +

    You can delete Inactive, Cancelled, or Returned ILL requests at any time, as long as the item status is In. When a request is deleted, the request, as well as the attached temporary ILL bibliographic record and item record (for returned requests), is removed from the database.

    +

    To delete one or more interlibrary loan requests:

    +

    Important:
    If you delete a request after it goes to OCLC but before it is filled by a lending library, you must notify OCLC that you no longer want the item.

    +
      +
    1. Display the ILL requests you want to delete on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. See Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Select the ILL request line items to be deleted.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The ILL requests and any associated temporary bibliographic and item records are deleted from the database.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris Administration settings control whether the bibliographic and item records are immediately purged from the database.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    ILL bibliographic and item records - See Receiving Interlibrary Loans.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Display_ILL_requests_in_the_Requests_Manager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Display_ILL_requests_in_the_Requests_Manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9da539f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Display_ILL_requests_in_the_Requests_Manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager

    +

    You view all the interlibrary loan requests in your Polaris system by selecting criteria on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. The library in the Branch name box is associated with the selection (item, patron, or pickup library) in the By box. In addition, you must select a request status.

    +

    Example:
    To display all cancelled ILL requests where West Side Library is the patron’s registered branch, select the following criteria: West Side Library (Branch name box), Patron (By box), and Cancelled (Status box).

    +

    To display the interlibrary loan requests in the system:

    +

    Note:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Request Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Request Manager workform - Hold Requests view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, ILL Requests, or click pbutILLView.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The ILL Requests view appears.

    +

    Tip:
    You can open the Polaris Find Tool from the Request Manager workform to search for any ILL request. Select File, Open on the Request Manager menu bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select a library in the Branch name box and one of the following options in the By box, according to the requests you want to display:
      • Item - Displays requests for items that are owned by the selected library (available only for Received and Returned requests)
      • Patron - Displays requests for patrons who are registered at the selected library
      • Pickup - Displays requests to be picked up at the selected library
    2. +
    3. Select an ILL request status in the Status box. For status descriptions, see Creating Interlibrary Loan Requests.
    4. +
    +

    The line items that appear in the Requests list depend on your selections in the Branch name, By, and Status boxes.

    +
      +
    1. To open the request, right-click the line item, and select Edit… from the context menu. See Edit an ILL request.
    2. +
    3. To print the request, follow these steps:
      1. Right-click the line item, and select Print, Request from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The print file is generated and the Report Preview window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click the printer icon.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The request is printed on the default printer for your workstation.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Edit_an_ILL_request.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Edit_an_ILL_request.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54d0cee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Edit_an_ILL_request.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit an ILL request + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit an ILL request

    +

    You may want to make changes to an interlibrary loan request. For example, a patron may ask to pick up the requested item at another branch, or you may want to add a note to the request. The status of the request determines which fields can be edited.

    +

    To edit an interlibrary loan request:

    +
      +
    1. Display the ILL request from one of the following locations:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the ILL request, and select Edit from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The ILL Request dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click one or more of the following tabs to display the information you want to change:
      • Click the General tab to display request status, patron, and delivery information.
      • Click the Request tab to display bibliographic information.
      • Click the Notes tab to display staff notes.
    2. +
    3. Edit the information, and click OK to submit your changes.
    4. +
    +

    The ILL Requests view appears.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Exporting_ILL_Requests_to_OCLC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Exporting_ILL_Requests_to_OCLC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed4e0f98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Exporting_ILL_Requests_to_OCLC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Exporting ILL Requests to OCLC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Exporting ILL Requests to OCLC

    +

    If your library uses OCLC’s ILL Direct Request Service, the library can choose whether to have Polaris export interlibrary loan requests automatically upon their creation. If your library has chosen to mediate ILL requests instead, you must review each inactive ILL request, make any necessary changes to it, and manually export it to OCLC. You can export multiple requests at the same time. Once exported, the requests become Active.

    +

    To export interlibrary loan requests to OCLC:

    +

    Note:
    Use Export to change the request status to Active even if you do not use OCLC.

    +
      +
    1. Display the inactive ILL requests you want to export on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view (see Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager).
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Holds view.

    +
      +
    1. Select the ILL request line items to be exported.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Export from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The exported ILL requests become Active requests, and they are forwarded to OCLC if your library uses the OCLC ILL service.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Find_ILL_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Find_ILL_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94f67273 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Find_ILL_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find ILL requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find ILL Requests

    +

    To find any ILL requests in your Polaris system using the Polaris Find Tool:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, ILL Requests from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click ILLShortcut.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The General tabbed page of the Find Tool appears. ILL Requests is selected in the Object box.

    +

    Tip:
    For fast navigation, press the TAB key to move among the Object, Search by, Type, For, Limit by, and Values boxes. Type the first letter of the search option in the Object, Search by, Type, and Limit by boxes.

    +
      +
    1. Select the criterion to search by in the Search by box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you often search by the same criteria but they are not the default settings, you can save your own settings by selecting Options, Save as User Default from the Find Tool menu bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of search in the Type box.
    2. +
    3. If you want your search results to be sorted, select the Sort by check box and select a value.
    4. +
    5. Type a search string in the For box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are searching by ISSN, include a dash in your search string if the ISSN is stored with a dash. Or use a wildcard character (*) before the dash and eliminate the rest of the ISSN. If you limit the search by ILL request status (Received or All), the results list includes a column that displays the related item status, such as In, Held, or Shipped.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to focus the search, select a limiter in the Limit by box, and set a value for the limiter in the Value box.
    2. +
    3. Click Search to begin the search, or press ENTER.
    4. +
    +

    Your results appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find Tool window. To load all the results in a large results list, press CTRL+SHIFT+A.

    +

    Note:
    If you searched in Normal mode by Need-by date, this date appears in the Date column of the search results list. All other ILL request searches display the request date in the Date column.

    +
      +
    1. To work with an item in the results list, do one of the following actions:
      • Double-click a line item to open the ILL request.
      • Right-click an item in the results list to work with the request without opening it. The context menu displays the available options. Among other options, you can link to associated patron, bibliographic, or item records.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Interlibrary_Loan_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Interlibrary_Loan_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97f6f0c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Interlibrary_Loan_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Interlibrary Loan Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Interlibrary Loan Reports

    +

    Interlibrary loan reports help you notify patrons when their ILL items have arrived, and track ILL statistics. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Circulation in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receive_an_ILL_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receive_an_ILL_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5384c492 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receive_an_ILL_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Receive an ILL item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Receive an ILL Item

    +

    When you receive an interlibrary loan item, you create temporary catalog records. Then you can check out the item to the requesting patron.

    +

    To receive an interlibrary loan item and create temporary bibliographic and item records:

    +

    Important:
    Before you use the interlibrary loan function for the first time, create the ILL Item template. See Create ILL item templates.

    +

    Note:
    ILL item records cannot be changed via bulk change.

    +
      +
    1. Display the Active ILL request you want to receive on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. See Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the ILL request to be received, and select Receive from the context menu. You must receive each ILL item individually.
    2. +
    +

    + pReqMgrIllRec.gif 

    +

    The Brief Item Entry dialog box appears.

    +

    + pILLBriefItem.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Complete these steps to fill in the Brief Item Entry dialog box:
    2. +
    3. Type or scan an item barcode in the Barcode box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    To facilitate searching, you may want to place identifying information such as ILL in the Call number box.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to add a blocking note to the item, type the note in the Free text block box.
    2. +
    3. Review the default settings in the remaining boxes and change them, if necessary.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to submit your settings.
    6. +
    +

    Temporary bibliographic and item records are created. A message indicates that the item was created, and the item status is Held.

    +

    Important:
    If your branch is not the pick-up branch, the item status is In-transit. You must ship the item to the pick-up branch.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to acknowledge the message.
    2. +
    +

    The following events occur automatically:

    +
    +
      +
    • The ILL request status changes to Received.
    • +
    • A hold notice is generated for the patron.
    • +
    • An ILL slip is printed.
    • +
    • An in-transit slip is printed if your branch is not the pick-up branch.
    • +
    +
    +

    Important:
    When you first install Polaris, you need to set up Polaris to print receipts and slips. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
      +
    1. When the patron arrives to pick up the item, check out the item. See Check out an item.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receiving_Interlibrary_Loans.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receiving_Interlibrary_Loans.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37069f8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Receiving_Interlibrary_Loans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Receiving Interlibrary Loans + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Receiving Interlibrary Loans

    +

    When an item that fills an Active interlibrary loan request arrives at your library, you receive the item in Polaris using a special ILL item template. When you receive the item, you create temporary bibliographic and item records from the template to track the item in Polaris.  Later, these temporary records are automatically deleted when you delete the ILL request.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris Administration settings control whether the deleted bibliographic and item records are immediately purged from the database or retained until a purge process is run. See Retain deleted records.

    +

    After the request status is received and the bibliographic and item records have been created, you can check out the item to the patron. Your library controls circulation as it would for any item, such as by adjusting the loan limit and fines. If the item becomes overdue, it is processed like any other overdue item, and the patron is notified.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Returning_Interlibrary_Loans.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Returning_Interlibrary_Loans.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..943d671a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Returning_Interlibrary_Loans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Returning Interlibrary Loans + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Returning Interlibrary Loans

    +

    When a patron returns an interlibrary loan item to your library, you check in the item, change the ILL request status to Returned, and ship the item back to the lending library. See Return ILL items

    +

    To check in and return interlibrary loan items to their lending libraries:

    +
      +
    1. Check in the interlibrary loan items. See Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform. The item status changes to In.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also view ILL requests for a specific patron in the ILL requests list on the Patron Status workform - Requests view.

    +
      +
    1. Display the received ILL requests for items to be returned on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. See Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager.
    2. +
    3. Select the ILL request line items for the items to be returned.
    4. +
    5. Right-click and select Return from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    The ILL requests have a Returned status.

    +
      +
    1. Ship the ILL items to the lending libraries.
    2. +
    3. Delete the request from Polaris when you know that the item has been received by the lending library. See Delete interlibrary loan requests. When you delete the returned request, the temporary bibliographic and item records are also deleted.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Polaris Administration settings control whether the bibliographic and item records are immediately purged from the database.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Working_with_Interlibrary_Loans.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Working_with_Interlibrary_Loans.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc102baf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPill/Working_with_Interlibrary_Loans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Interlibrary Loans + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Interlibrary Loans

    +

    Unlike a hold request, which is placed for a local title or item and filled by your library system, an interlibrary loan (ILL) request is filled by routing it to potential lenders outside your system. Depending on your library’s policy, interlibrary loan requests may come through the staff client and PAC.

    +

    Your library may process ILL requests manually or automatically. Polaris supports automatic interlibrary loan processing through Online Computer Library Center (OCLC), which acts as an interlibrary loan broker to route ILL requests to potential lenders.

    +

    If your library has a license for INN-Reach integration with Polaris, Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration

    +

    ILL Processing Overview

    +
      +
    • Patron places an ILL request or a staff member converts a hold request to an ILL request
    • +
    • Depending on your library's policy:
      • The ILL request status is Active and the ILL request is exported directly to OCLC.
      • The ILL request is Inactive until a staff member reviews the request and exports it to OCLC.
    • +
    • OCLC processes the request and sends it to the lending library.
    • +
    • The lending library ships the item to your library.
    • +
    • A staff member receives the item in Polaris.
      • Temporary bib and item records are created to enable circulation.
      • The ILL request status is set to Received.
      • A notice is sent to the patron that the item is available for pickup.
    • +
    • The item is checked out to the patron.
    • +
    • The patron returns the item to the library.
    • +
    • The item is returned to the lending library.
    • +
    • A staff member deletes the ILL request, which automatically deletes the temporary bib and item record.
    • +
    +

    Before you can use the interlibrary loan function, your library must set the appropriate parameters in Polaris Administration. See Setting Up ILL Requests. You also need a template for the temporary item records created when the interlibrary loan items arrive. See Create ILL Item Templates.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPinventory/Taking_an_Item_Inventory.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPinventory/Taking_an_Item_Inventory.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..398ff6e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPinventory/Taking_an_Item_Inventory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + Taking an Item Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Taking an Item Inventory

    +

    When you want to take an inventory of items on the shelf, use the Check In workform - Update InventoryDate view. You can inventory items by scanning item barcodes, reading RFID tags, or loading a file of item barcodes generated by another device. After you take the inventory, you can print a shelf list of the inventoried items.

    +

    Items are not checked in through the Update InventoryDate view. If an item has any status other than In, the workform indicates the problem. You must check in the item through the Check In Normal or Bulk view.

    +

    When you scan items during an inventory, the Last inventory date field in the item record (Statistics view) is updated.

    +

    To take an inventory:

    +

    Note:
    You can also take an inventory while working offline. The offline Update InventoryDate view differs slightly from the online workform view.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation > Check In from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the Check In workform.
    2. +
    3. Click InventBtn.gif, or select View > Update Inventory Date to display the Update Inventory Date view.
    4. +

      Tip:
      To open the Check In workform to this view by default. Select View > Save Current View as User Default.

      +

      Tip:
      If you are working with a number of items, some with barcodes and some with RFID tags, group the items so that you process all of one type, then all of the other. This method is faster than repeatedly switching between the barcode scanner and the RFID reader.

      +
    5. Enter item information using one of the following methods:
      • Scanning barcodes - Scan the item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER.
      • Reading RFID tags - Select Tools > RFID Check In (or press F9), and place up to 10 items on the antenna tray. In check-in Inventory mode, security bits are not affected. You must select Tools > RFID Check In or press F9 for each batch of items you place on the RFID antenna tray.
      • Loading a file of barcodes - Select Tools > Load barcode file, or press CTRL+ALT+I. An explorer window opens, where you can browse to and select the file of barcodes.
    6. +

      Tip:
      If your library has Polaris SimplyReports, you can use the following method to create the text file containing the barcodes:
      1. Use the Find Tool to find the item records and apply the appropriate circulation status and branch limits.
      2. Right-click on the search results and select Add to record set.
      3. In Polaris SimplyReports, create an item list report with:
      --- Barcodes selected as the single report output column
      --- Text and Tab-delimited selected as the report output format
      ----The record set you created selected in the Item Record Set filter
      4. Download the text file from SimplyReports.

      +

      If the item has a status of In, the item barcode, status, title and comments appear in the Update Inventory Date list. If the item has a status other than In, a message appears. When you click OK, the Comment column displays the status. You can check in the item through the Normal or Bulk view, or right-click the item in the list and open the item record.

      +
    7. Repeat step 3 until you have completed your inventory of items.
    8. +
    9. Run the following reports immediately after the inventory:
      • Inventory Exception Incorrect Status - Lists items that had a status other than In during inventory. You specify a call number range and a cut-off date. Set the cut-off date to the day before the inventory date. You can filter the report by organization.
      • Inventory Exception Misshelved - Lists items with a status of In that should have been in the inventory sequence but were not. You specify a call number range and a cut-off date. Set the cut-off date to the date you started the inventory. You can filter the report by organization.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    To access these reports, select Utilities > Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. In the Report Manager, select Cataloging > Item, and double-click the appropriate report. Using Polaris Standard Reports.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Inventory Shelf List report - After you take inventory, you can run this report to list items inventoried. You specify a call number range and an inventory date range. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    • Last inventory date - To view the last inventory date for an item, open the Item Record workform - Statistics view. Display item record information. You can also see when the item was scanned for inventory on the Item Record workform - History view.
    • +
    • Polaris Inventory Manager - You can also take an inventory quickly and conveniently with Polaris Inventory Manager, using a wireless tablet PC and working at the shelves. For more information, contact your Polaris Customer Account Manager.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Declare_an_item_lost.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Declare_an_item_lost.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cefdd66b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Declare_an_item_lost.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + + Declare an item lost + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Declare an Item Lost

    +

    When you declare an item lost, you can manage any charges for the lost item and (optionally) bill the patron for the charges.

    +

    To assign a Lost status to a patron’s checked-out item and (optionally) bill the patron:

    +

    Important:
    For billed items, if your library system does not automatically declare them lost, use the following procedure to declare the billed item lost and handle the charge at the same time. Although you can pay a billed item from the Patron Status workform -Account view, it is preferable to use the Declare lost item dialog box as described in this procedure, so that you are handling the charge and the item. If you simply pay the billed item from the Patron Status workform -Account view, then the item is not removed from the Items Out list, and the item status is not changed to Lost.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Items Out or click ItemsOutBtn.gif to display the Items Out view.
    4. +
    5. Select the appropriate line item in the Items Out list.
    6. +
    7. Click pLostIcon.gif or press CTRL+L.
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Declare lost item dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +

    If the patron has already received a bill for the item, the Billed check box is selected. If the item is not overdue, or your library does not charge for overdues, all the Overdue boxes are unavailable.

    +
      +
    1. Manage the replacement charge by following these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, you cannot pay the charge from this dialog box. Instead, you must charge the patron’s account, then pay the charge from the Patron Status workform - Account view.

    +
    +
      +
    • To change the replacement amount, type the new amount in the Replacement Amount box. This allows you to process a partial payment. It does not change the amount of the charge.
    • +
    • Select Charge, Pay, or Waive in the Replacement Actions box. (Charge places the charge on the patron’s account.) If you selected Pay, then select a payment type in the Payment method box. If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For a billed item, the options are Leave as is, Pay or Waive. The charge has already been posted to the patron’s account.

    +
      +
    1. Manage the processing fee, if any, by following these steps:
      • If you want to change the amount, type the new amount in the Processing Amount box. This allows you to process a partial payment. It does not change the amount of the charge.
      • Select Charge, Pay, or Waive in the Processing Actions box. (Charge places the charge on the patron’s account.) If you selected Pay, then select a payment type in the Payment method box. If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1.  If there is an overdue charge, manage the charge by following these steps:
      • If you want to change the overdue amount, type the new amount in the Overdue Amount box. This allows you to process a partial payment. It does not change the amount of the charge.
      • Select Charge, Pay, or Waive in the Overdue Actions box. (Charge places the charge on the patron’s account. This option may be unavailable if your library charges the overdue fine only when a lost item is recovered.) If you selected Pay, then select a payment type in the Payment method box. If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To bill any charges where Charge is selected in the Actions row for any column (Replacement, Processing, or Overdue), select the Send a bill check box. If this check box is selected, the area below the check box expands to display the added message. You can edit the added message.
    2. +
    +

    +  

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Items Out view appears, but the item declared lost no longer appears in the Items Out list. If you paid or waived an amount and you set Polaris to print fine receipts from the Patron Status workform, a receipt prints. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    After an item is declared lost, patron and item records are automatically updated:

    +

    Tip:
    You can open the item record for a lost item from the Patron Status workform - Claims view. Right-click the item in the Claims list, and select Links, Item Record.

    +
    +
      +
    • The item is removed from the patron’s Items Out view and moves to the Claims view. 
    • +
    • The transaction is displayed on the Patron Status workform - Account view or the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    • +
    • If the patron’s account was charged a replacement cost, and the cost was not paid or waived, the Lost item counter is incremented on the Patron Status workform - General view and the Patron Status workform - Claims view. You may need to refresh the view (press F5) to see the change.
    • +
    • The patron barcode is moved to the Previous borrower box on the Item Record workform - Circulation view, if the Patron Services parameter Last use patron display is set to Yes in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    • The item circulation status changes to Lost.
    • +
    • Any hold request status for the item changes to Not-supplied.
    • +
    • If you selected Send a bill, the patron is billed for the charge.
    • +
    +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Reconciling charges - If you charged an amount for the lost item, you pay or waive the charge from the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Pay charges from the Account view.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If an item is found at circulation after it has been declared lost, the item status and patron account need to be resolved. Your library may set certain automatic actions that are taken in this situation, or you may manually manage the item and patron record through the Resolve lost item dialog box. If you manage recovered items manually, see Resolve a lost-and-unpaid item at circulation and Resolve a lost-and-paid item at circulation.

    +
      +
    • Lost item counter - The count in the Lost item counter on the Patron Status workform - General view and the Patron Status workform - Claims view increases when a replacement cost for an item is charged to the patron’s account. When the charges related to the item are paid, waived, or otherwise resolved, the count decreases.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Manage_a_billed_item_that_is_not_Lost.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Manage_a_billed_item_that_is_not_Lost.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da6450cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Manage_a_billed_item_that_is_not_Lost.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Manage a billed item that is not Lost + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manage a Billed Item That is Not Lost

    +

    If an item’s status is not Lost, but the patron’s account has been charged, resolve the charge and the item:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Pay or waive the charges for the billed item.
    4. +
    5. Check in the item:
    6. +

      The item’s status changes to In. If your library does not include overdue charges on bills, the overdue fine may be calculated and charged to the patron’s account at this point.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Managing_Lost_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Managing_Lost_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2e227ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Managing_Lost_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Lost Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Lost Items

    +

    You can declare an item lost in the following situations:

    +
      +
    • +

      A patron notifies the library that a checked-out item is lost. A bill has not been sent, and the account has not been charged.

      +
    • +
    • +

      A patron has received a bill for an overdue item, and the patron notifies the library that the item is lost. The patron’s account has already been charged, but the charges have not been resolved (paid or waived).

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Your library system may automatically declare billed items lost through a Polaris Administration setting. See Overdue Fines on Lost Items.

    +

    Charges for lost items may include the replacement charge, a processing fee, and overdue charge, if any. Your library may or may not place overdue charges on lost items, according to Polaris Administration settings.

    +

    If an item was declared lost, but is later found at check-in, check-out, or renewal, you may resolve any charges connected with the item, or your library may set up automatic processing to manage the charges. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.

    +

    Note:
    Lost item reports provide useful statistics about lost items. Using Polaris Standard Reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-paid_item_at_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-paid_item_at_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a0dd07c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-paid_item_at_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Resolve a lost-and-paid item at circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolve a Lost-and-Paid Item at Circulation

    +

    To resolve an item that has been declared lost, paid for, and found at circulation:

    +

    Note:
    If an item has been declared lost and billed, follow this procedure to refund or credit the patron account.

    +

    Note:
    Your library may set automatic processing options to resolve lost items that are recovered at circulation. See the Public Access Administration PDF Guide: Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters. If these are in effect, the Resolve lost item dialog box does not appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options in the Replacement Actions box:
      • Credit - Select this to credit the patron’s account. The credit can be applied to current or future charges. Use this option if the patron is not present when the item is found, and then notify the patron.
    2. +

      Note:
      Credit and Refund are not available options if the payment was made by credit card. However, depending on your library’s e-commerce provider, you may be able to issue a refund to the patron’s credit card account. See Managing Credit Card Orders.

      +
        +
      • Refund - Select this to refund the patron’s money.
      • +
      • Leave as is - Select this to do nothing with the patron’s account. The circulation process (check-in, check-out, or renewal) is completed.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      For billed items, the options are Credit and Refund.

      +
    3. Select one of the following options in the Processing Actions box:
      • Credit - Select this to credit the patron’s account. The credit can be applied to current or future charges. Use this option if the patron is not present when the item is found, and then notify the patron.
      • Refund - Select this to refund the patron’s money.
    4. +

      Note:
      Credit and Refund are not available options if the payment was made by credit card. However, depending on your library’s e-commerce provider, you may be able to issue a refund to the patron’s credit card account. See Managing Credit Card Orders.

      +
        +
      • Leave as is - Select this to do nothing with the patron’s account. The circulation process (check-in, check-out, or renewal) is completed.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      For billed items, the options are Credit and Refund.

      +
    5. If there is an overdue charge, select a payment action in the Overdue Actions box:
      • Pay - Select this to pay or partially pay the overdue amount. You must select a payment method in the Payment Method box. If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box.
    6. +

      Important:
      If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, you cannot pay a fine from the Resolve Lost Item dialog box. Select Waive or Leave as is instead. If you choose to leave the charge on the patron’s account, you can pay it from the Patron Status workform - Account view using Class Point of Sale.

      +
        +
      • Waive - Select this to waive or partially waive the overdue amount.
      • +
      • Leave as is - Select this to do nothing with the patron’s account. The circulation process (check in, check out, or renewal) is completed.
      • +
      +
    7. Click OK on the dialog box.
    8. +

      Note:
      If you click Cancel, the circulation process stops and the Resolve lost/billed item dialog box closes. The next time you attempt to check in, check out, or renew the item, the Resolve lost item dialog box appears.

      +
        +
      • The item circulation status changes from Lost to In.
      • +
      • On the Patron Status workform, paid, waived, and credited amounts appear in the Transaction Summary dialog box (Account view).
      • +
      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-unpaid_item_at_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-unpaid_item_at_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d432ae3d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPlost/Resolve_a_lost-and-unpaid_item_at_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + Resolve a lost-and-unpaid item at circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolve a Lost-and-Unpaid Item at Circulation

    +

    During check-in, check-out, or renewal, the Resolve lost item dialog box may appear if the item has been declared lost, the item has been charged (but not paid for or waived), and the item is found at circulation.

    +

    To resolve a lost item that has been charged:

    +

    Note:
    Your library may set automatic processing options to resolve lost items that are recovered at circulation. If these are in effect, the Resolve lost item dialog box does not appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select a payment action in the Replacement Actions box:
    2. +
        +
      • +

        Waive - Select this to waive or partially waive the replacement amount.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Leave as is - Select this to do nothing with the patron’s account.

        +
      • +
      +
    3. If there is a processing fee, select a payment action in the Processing Actions box:
      • Waive - Select this to waive or partially waive the processing amount.
      • Leave as is - Select this to do nothing with the patron’s account.
    4. +
    5. If there is an overdue charge, select a payment action in the Overdue Actions box:
      • Pay - Select this to pay or partially pay the overdue amount. You must select a payment method in the Payment Method box. If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box.
    6. +

      Important:
      If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, you cannot pay a fine from the Resolve Lost Item dialog box. Select Waive or Leave as is instead. If you choose to leave the charge on the patron’s account, you can pay it from the Patron Status workform - Account view using Class Point of Sale.

      +
        +
      • Waive - Select this to waive or partially waive the overdue amount.
      • +
      • Leave as is - Select this to do nothing with the patron’s account. The circulation process (check in, check out, or renewal) is completed.
      • +
      +
    7. Click OK on the dialog box.
    8. +

      Note:
      If you click Cancel, the circulation process stops and the Resolve lost/billed item dialog box closes. The next time you attempt to check in, check out, or renew the item, the Resolve lost item dialog box appears.

      +
        +
      • +

        The item circulation status changes from Lost to In.

        +
      • +
      • +

        On the Patron Status workform, paid and waived amounts appear in the Transaction Summary dialog box (Account view), and the lost item counter decrements (General view and Claims view). The item is removed from the claimed items list (Claims view).

        +
      • +
      • +

        If you set Polaris for fine receipt printing at the current workform, then a receipt prints. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

        +
      • +
      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Check_out_items_from_the_pick_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Check_out_items_from_the_pick_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22815297 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Check_out_items_from_the_pick_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Check out items from the pick list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Out Items from the Patron's Pick List

    +

    To check out items from a patron’s pick list:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Reader Services view of the patron’s Patron Status workform, if it is not already open. See Set up outreach services for a patron.
    2. +
    3. Click the Selection List icon ORSelect00084.gif.
    4. +

      The ORS Selection List workform appears.

      +
    5. Select View, Pick List, or click the Pick List icon PickListIcon00085.gif at the left side of the workform.
    6. +
    7. From the pick list, select the item or items to check out.
    8. +

      Tip: +
      Use the SHIFTor CTRL keys to multi-select items.

      +
    9. If your library collects reader ratings, and if your library has set the packing list to print automatically when the items are checked out, the packing list prints instead of the check-out receipt.
    10. +

      The packing list with a rating line for each item is printed, ready to ship with the items. When the packing list is returned with the items, you enter the ratings in the patron’s reading history. See Working with Reader Ratings.

      +

      Note: +
      After the items have been checked out, you can also print the packing list from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view.

      +
    11. Click but_chko.gif above the pick list (or right-click in the pick list, and select Checkout from the context menu). + +

      The Check Out workform appears, with the patron’s account information filled in.

      • If there are any blocks on the patron’s account, the Patron Blocks dialog box appears. Resolve the blocks (see Manage patron blocks at circulation), or cancel the check-out.
      • A message asks if you would like to assign a special loan period. If you click Yes, the Special Loan dialog box appears. Set the special loan and click OK. For details, see Assign a special loan period.
      • If specific items have been checked out to the patron in the past, a message appears. You can continue to check out the item, or cancel the check-out. +

      The items are checked out. If you have set Polaris to print check-out receipts from the Patron Status workform, the receipt prints. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

      Note:
      If your library collects reader ratings for outreach services patrons (see step 5), the packing list for reader ratings may print automatically in addition to the check-out receipt.

      You can package the items for delivery according to library procedures, or notify the patron’s designated representative that they are ready to pick up.

      Note:
      When an item on the patron’s pick list is checked out to the patron, whether from the pick list or during normal circulation, the Last Service Date for outreach services is updated on the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view, and the patron’s reading history is updated after overnight processing.

    12. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Mailing labels - For outreach services patrons who receive their materials by mail, you can print patron mailing labels or export the patron addresses to use in another application. See Creating Patron Mailing Labels.
    • +
    • Borrow by Mail - Your library may use Borrow by Mail processing for outreach services and other patrons, where a patron can request a title and have the title checked out and mailed. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
    • +
    • Reading histories for outreach services patrons - Your library may set limits on reading histories for outreach services patrons that are different from those for other patrons. Your library may also allow you to remove individual items from patrons’ reading histories. See Remove items from a patron’s reading history.
    • +
    • Outreach services patrons at normal check-out - Your library may display a prompt during normal check-out to update an active Outreach Services patron’s next service date if the item is not on the patron’s pick list. If you choose to update the next service date from the prompt, the patron’s Next Service Date and Last Service Date are updated based on the Outreach Services delivery schedule set for that patron. If no prompt is displayed, or if you choose not to update the service date, the patron’s next service date is not affected.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Creating_Outreach_Patron_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Creating_Outreach_Patron_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48310340 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Creating_Outreach_Patron_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Outreach Patron Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Outreach Patron Profiles

    +

    Polaris selects potential titles for outreach patrons based on settings in the patron record, including reading preferences and whether items checked out in the past should be re-sent after a specified period of time. You can note any disability or special equipment needs the patron may have, the number of items a patron should receive, and whether the patron chooses items from a system-generated list, or accepts any items the system has identified. Settings in the patron record also control delivery options for the patron. You can suspend outreach services for a particular patron, and reactivate them later as needed.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Link_from_a_bibliographic_record_to_outreach_services_patrons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Link_from_a_bibliographic_record_to_outreach_services_patrons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e64cf086 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Link_from_a_bibliographic_record_to_outreach_services_patrons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Link from a bibliographic record to outreach services patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link from a Bibliographic Record to Outreach Services Patrons

    +

    You can link from a bibliographic record to the patron records of outreach services patrons with linked items in their reading histories. If you are searching for items for an outreach services patron, you can use this method to see if the patron has already read the title, without opening the patron record and sorting though the patron’s reading history.

    +

    Note:
    This feature is available if Outreach Services is licensed for your log-on branch. You need the system-level Circulation permission ORS: Link from bibliographic record: Allow to use this feature.

    +

    To link to an Outreach Services patron record from a bibliographic record:

    +
      +
    1. Select Links | Outreach Patrons from the Bibliographic Record workform, or right-click a bibliographic record in the Find Tool search results list and select Links | Outreach Patrons from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The list of linked outreach services patron records appears if one or more items are included in a patron reading history and the patron’s outreach services status is Active. (If you select Links, Outreach Patrons and no qualified patron records are linked to the bibliographic record, a message is displayed instead. If only one patron record qualifies for display, the record is opened in the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view.) The list includes patron names, registered branches, ratings if available, and last check-out date.

    +

    Note:
    The patron’s outreach services status must be Active to appear in the list.

    +
    +
      +
    • If the patron has checked out an item more than once, the entry appears multiple times.
    • +
    • If the title is removed from the patron’s reading history, the link is not displayed in the list.
    • +
    • If the item record status is Deleted, the entry remains in the patron reading history and the link from the bibliographic record is still displayed in the list. When the item record is purged, the link is no longer displayed in the list.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To work with a patron record, right-click a patron listing to open a context menu of circulation and patron status options.
    2. +
    +

    For example, if you select Status from the context menu, the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view opens.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Processing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36b8576d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Processing

    +

    If your Polaris system includes outreach services functions, you can automatically select titles that interest your homebound patrons based on each patron’s preferences, and have the materials delivered to the patrons. When you designate a patron for outreach services, you create a profile of reading preferences and other characteristics. Based on this profile, Polaris generates a selection list of titles from which you select available items for a pick list, pull the items on the list, and check them out. If the outreach services patron has designated an individual to pick up the items, you contact the individual, and the items circulate in the normal way. Or, after pulling the items on the pick list, you may process them for delivery. You can set the packed items aside for the delivery drivers, or if the delivery method is by mail, you can print mailing labels or export patron address information to another application. You can also manage outreach services for multiple patrons, based on the next scheduled delivery date or delivery method and route.

    +

    Your library may also collect title ratings from outreach services patrons. You send a packing list to the patron along with the items checked out, and the patron returns the packing list with title ratings when the items are returned. You then enter the ratings in the patron’s reading history.

    +

    An outreach services “patron” does not have to be an individual. If your library circulates items to institutions such as long-term care facilities, you can set up a patron record for the institution and designate the institution as an outreach services patron. With this method, you can track and control the items that circulate to the institution.

    +

    The default values and available options for outreach services are set in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    If your system does not include Polaris Outreach Services, the features described in this unit are not available.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22493a8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Outreach_Services_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Reports

    +

    Outreach Services reports can help you organize and track outreach services processing. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Outreach Services in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_an_individual_patron.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_an_individual_patron.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6eed763c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_an_individual_patron.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + + + Process items for an individual patron + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Process items for an individual patron

    +

    To create a pick list and check items out for a single patron:

    +

    Important:
    You must set preferences for the patron before you build a list and process items for the patron. See Set the outreach patron’s preferences. Selection lists for Outreach Services patrons are generated by searches constructed from your patron preference entries (Subject, Author, Genre, Target Audience, Language, Material Type, Publication Date). All patron preference entries are used when the system constructs the search. If the record includes 50 or more preference entries, the selection list fails and a server error results. Enter fewer patron preferences to prevent the problem.

    +

    Open the Reader Services view of the patron’s Patron Status workform, if it is not already open. See Set up outreach services for a patron.

    +

    Note:
    You need the Circulation permission Patron status: Modify reader services to do the next steps in this procedure.

    +

    Click the Selection List icon ORSelect.gif.

    +

    + ORPatStatSel.gif 

    +

    The ORS Selection List workform appears.

    +

    + SelListBlank.gif 

    +

    To set the branches whose items can be candidates for the selection list, select one of the following options in the Branch Name box:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select Default Branches to restrict the items to a group of branches determined by your library. The default branches are set in Polaris Administration.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      Select a specific branch to restrict the items to those belonging to the selected branch. Your library may allow only items from your logged-in branch, typically the branch where you are working, as selection list candidates. If this is the policy, only the logged-in branch is available in the list.

      +
    • +
    +

    Click Build List.

    +

    The Titles list displays titles (bibliographic records) with attached items that fill the requirements set by the patron’s preferences and your branch selection. Titles are ranked by relevancy, but you can click a column head to sort by the list by title, author, or publication date. The physical items associated with these bibliographic titles are potential selections for the patron’s pick list.

    +
      +
    • +

      To find any title, regardless of the patron preference and settings, and add it to the selection list, click PickListFind.gif. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the title, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Find Tool searches all branches, not just the branches selected in step 3. If a title is manually added by this method, all items attached to the bibliographic record are returned as candidates to add to the pick list (not just those assigned to included branches). See step 6.

    +
      +
    • +

      You can double-click a title to open the bibliographic record, or right-click the title in the selection list and select Preview to see more information about the title without opening the record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    From a bibliographic record, you can display a list of outreach services patrons whose reading histories include items linked to the bibliographic record; that is, they have checked out the items in the past. See Link from a bibliographic record to outreach services patrons.

    +
      +
    • +

      To place a bibliographic-level hold request on the title for the patron, right-click the title in the selection list and select Place hold from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Select a title in the Titles list.

    +

    The Items list displays the items associated with the selected title.

    +

    Note:
    Using Polaris Administration settings, you can restrict the items that display by status; for example, you can suppress items that are Withdrawn or Lost. If all the items attached to a bibliographic record are restricted, the title is not displayed. Set circulation statuses for outreach selection lists.

    +

    + SelListFull.gif 

    +

    To add an item to the pick list, select the title in the Titles list and click PickListPlus.gif above the Items list.

    +

    A check icon ORSCheckIcon.gif appears beside the title and its associated item to indicate that the item has been placed on the pick list.

    +

    Note:
    To place an item-level hold request on an item for the patron, right-click the item and select Place hold from the context menu.

    +

    Repeat steps 5 and 6 to continue to add items to the pick list.

    +

    Select View, Pick List, or click the Pick List view icon PickListIcon.gif at the left side of the workform.

    +

    The items you chose from the selection list appear in the pick list. The specific columns in the Pick List view depend on Polaris Administration settings.

    +

    + ORPickList.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +
      +
    • +

      To remove an item from the pick list, select the item and click PickListMinus.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To find an item and add it to the pick list, click PickListFind00082.gif. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the item, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To add a patron’s held items to the pick list, click ORSAddHeldIcon.gif. If no items are being held for the patron, you see a message. If there are held items, they are added to the pick list. A Held for Patron icon HeldForPatron.gif marks the held items in the pick list.

      +
    • +
    +

    Click the Save button to save the pick list.

    +

    Process the pick list, choosing the appropriate method:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select File > Print > Pick List, or click ORPrint.gif and select Pick List. Take the printed list to the shelves and pull the items to be checked out.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If this patron selects items from the pick list, mail the printed list to the patron. When you receive the list back from the patron, remove the unwanted items from the list.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If the patron is scheduled on a regular delivery route, you may want to suppress the hold notice that is normally generated when the request is available for pickup. Select (check) the Exclude from hold notice box on the Patron Registration workform - General view. See Add general data to a patron record.

    +
      +
    • +

      Place hold requests on items as necessary. Select the item or items, and click but_hold.gif. See Placing Hold Requests. If the outreach services patron has a hold request for a title in the selection list and or an item in the pick list, an icon ORSHoldIcon.gif is displayed for the title or item.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When an item that fills an outreach patron’s hold request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation, the note Outreach Services Patron appears on holds dialog boxes. See Fill a hold request at circulation.

    + +

    Related Information

    +

    Process items for multiple patrons +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_multiple_patrons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_multiple_patrons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e15b3a70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Process_items_for_multiple_patrons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + + + + + + + Process items for multiple patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Process items for multiple patrons

    +

    Based on the patrons’ registered branch, next service date, and other options you specify, you can create a combined pick list for multiple patrons. To create a combined pick list, and process the items on the list:

    +

    Note:
    You need the Circulation permission Outreach Services Manager: Access to do this procedure.

    +

    Select Patron Services, Outreach Services from the Polaris Shortcut bar, or click OutRchBtn.gif.

    +

    The Outreach Services Manager opens.

    +

    + ORManPatron.gif 

    +

    Select the patrons’ registered branch in the Branch box.

    +

    Note:
    The logged-in branch (typically the branch where you are working) is selected by default.

    +

    Select the status of the patrons you want to process in the Status box:

    +
      +
    • +

      Active - Process patrons currently due for service.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Inactive - Set up a selection list for inactive patrons. (You can select them when the Patrons list is generated, and change their status to Active.)

      +
    • +
    +

    (Optional) To filter the list by the next scheduled delivery date, select (check) Date of Next Delivery, and type or select a start date and end date.

    +

    This option sets the list to patrons due for service within the date range you specify. If you do not select this option, patrons due for service on today’s date only are eligible for the list.

    +

    (Optional) To filter the patron list by delivery method, select a method in the Delivery Modes box.

    +

    Example:
    To create a pick list for all patrons due for service and who receive their materials by driver, select Driver in the Delivery Modes box. Polaris Administration settings determine the actual available options.

    +

    (Optional) If the delivery mode you selected has delivery routes, and you want to filter the list by route, select the route in the Delivery Routes box.

    +

    Click Find Patrons.

    +

    The Patrons list displays the outreach patrons matching your search criteria.

    +

    Notes:
    To find any patron, regardless of the filters you set, and add the patron to the list, click PickListFind00086.gif. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the patron record, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu. However, this operation clears any combined pick list that already exists in the Outreach Services Manager.
    You can double-click a patron line to open the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view for the patron.

    +

    Check for individual patron pick lists, and create them if necessary, by following these steps:

    +

    a)  Select each patron in turn from the list. The patron’s pick list appears in the Patron Pick List portion of the workform.

    +

    b)  If a patron does not have a pick list, right-click the patron’s name and choose Selection List from the context menu.

    +

    The ORS Selection List workform for the patron appears. Create a pick list for the patron, then save the list. See Process items for an individual patron for details.

    +

    Important:
    Selection lists for Outreach Services patrons are generated by searches constructed from your patron preference entries (Subject, Author, Genre, Target Audience, Language, Material Type, Publication Date). All patron preference entries are used when the system constructs the search. If the record includes 50 or more preference entries, the selection list fails and a server error results. Enter fewer patron preferences to prevent the problem.

    +

    A message asks whether you want to refresh the Outreach Services Manager combined pick list. Select Yes to update the information in the Outreach Services Manager with the patron’s new pick list.

    +

    + ORManPatronList.gif 

    +

    To add patrons or items in the Combined Pick List to a record set, follow these steps:

    +

    Important:
    Record sets are useful if you want to preserve information for later processing. When the Outreach Services Manager workform is closed and re-opened, the old information is gone and the workform is ready for a new round of processing.

    +

    a)  Select the line items in the Combined Pick List.

    +

    b)  Right-click in the list, and select Add to Patron Record Set or Add to Item Record Set from the context menu.

    +

    c)   Select New or Existing.

    +

    + ORRecord_Set.gif 

    +

    d)  If you selected New, the new record set opens and the patrons or items are added to the set. Name the new record set and click the Save button on the Record Set workform.

    +

    e)  If you selected Existing, the Polaris Find Tool appears. Search for the record set to which you want to add the patrons or items. Right-click the record set in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu. The record set opens, and the patrons or items are added to the set. Click the Save button on the Record Set workform.

    +

    Select View, Pick List, or click the Pick List icon PickListIcon00089.gif at the left side of the workform.

    +

    The items from each patron’s pick list appear in the Combined Pick List, organized by patron.

    +

    + ORManPickList.gif +

    +

    To edit the Combined Pick List, choose one of these options:

    +
      +
    • +

      To remove an item from the pick list, select the item in the Combined Pick List and click PickListMinus00090.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To find an item and add it to the pick list, click PickListFind00091.gif. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the item, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    A dialog box prompts you to select the patron for whom you are adding the item. Select the patron, and click OK.

    +

    + ORSSelPatron.gif 

    +
      +
    • +

      To add a patron’s held items to the pick list, select the patron and click ORSAddHeldIcon00092.gif. If no items are being held for the patron, you see a message. If there are held items, they are added to the pick list. A Held for Patron icon HeldForPatron00093.gif marks the held items in the pick list.

      +
    • +
    +

    To place hold requests for items, follow these steps:

    +

    a)  Select the appropriate items in the Combined Pick List, and click but_hold00094.gif.

    +

    Use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items.

    +

    The Bulk Hold Requests dialog box appears.

    +

    + BulkHolds.gif 

    +

    b)  Specify the pickup branch, activation date, and expiration date for the hold requests, and click Process Requests.

    +

    As each patron’s request is processed, the information appears in the Processing Status boxes.

    +

    c)   If there are any blocks on a patron’s account, the Patron Blocks dialog box appears. Resolve the blocks (see Manage patron blocks at circulation), or cancel the hold request for that patron.

    +

    d)  Click X to close the Bulk Hold Requests dialog box.

    +

    For more information about hold requests, see Placing Hold Requests.

    +

    If you place a hold request for outreach services patrons who are scheduled on a regular delivery route, you may want to suppress the hold notice that is normally generated when the request is available for pickup. Select (check) the Exclude from hold notice box on the Patron Registration workform - General view (see Add general data to a patron record) for these patrons.

    +

    Process the Combined Pick List, choosing the appropriate method:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select File > Print > Pick List, or click ORPrint00095.gif and select Pick List. Take the printed list to the shelves and pull the items to be checked out.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Check out the items directly from the pick list. See step 15.

      +
    • +
    +

     If your library collects reader ratings, click the packing list icon PackingListIcon00096.gif above the pick list. If your library has set the packing list to print automatically when the items are checked out, you can skip this step.

    +

    A separate packing list for each patron, with a rating line for each item, is printed, ready to ship with the items. When the packing list is returned with the items, you enter the ratings in the patrons’ reading histories. See Working with Reader Ratings.

    +

    Note:
    After the items have been checked out, you can also print the packing list from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view.

    +

    To check out items on the Combined Pick List:

    +

    a)  Select the appropriate items in the Combined Pick List, and click but_chko00097.gif.

    +

    Use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items.

    +

    The Bulk Check Out dialog box appears.

    +

    + ORSBlkCheckOut.gif 

    +

    b)  If you want to set a special loan period for all the items processed in this checkout, select (check) Special Loan and type or select the due date.

    +

    c)   Click Process Checkouts.

    +

    As each checkout transaction is processed, the information appears in the Processing Status boxes.

    +
      +
    • +

      If there are any blocks on a patron’s account, the Patron Blocks dialog box appears. Resolve the blocks (see Manage patron blocks at circulation), or cancel the check-out for that patron.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If specific items have been checked out to the patron in the past, a message appears. You can continue to check out the item, or cancel the check-out.

      +
    • +
    +

    d)  Click X to close the Bulk Check Out dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The bulk check-out receipt is a useful check list as you prepare the items for delivery. If your library collects reader ratings for outreach services patrons (see step 12), the packing list for reader ratings may print automatically in addition to the check-out receipt.

    +

    The items are checked out. If you have set Polaris to print check-out receipts from the Outreach Services Manager workform, the bulk check-out receipt prints. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Note:
    Select File > Print > Pick List Report, or click ORPrint00098.gif and select Pick List Report, to print a report that indicates whether patrons have read or placed hold requests on their items. You can sort the information on the report by call number, collection, title, patron name, date of service, route, and/or delivery mode.

    +

    To update the last service date for all the patrons in the combined pick list manually, without checking out items from the pick list, follow these steps:

    +

    a)  Select View > Patrons on the Outreach Services Manager workform, or click ORSManPatrons.gif.

    +

    b)  Click ORUpdateIcon00099.gif above the Patrons list.

    +

    The last service date is updated.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Mailing labels - For outreach services patrons who receive their materials by mail, you can print patron mailing labels or export the patron addresses to use in another application. See Creating Patron Mailing Labels.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Borrow by Mail - Your library may use Borrow by Mail processing for outreach services and other patrons, where a patron can request a title and have the title checked out and mailed. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Reading histories for outreach services patrons - Your library may set limits on reading histories for outreach services patrons that are different from those for other patrons.  Your library may also allow you to remove individual items from patrons’ reading histories. See Remove items from a patron’s reading history.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Processing_Outreach_Services_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Processing_Outreach_Services_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b036a72d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Processing_Outreach_Services_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Processing Outreach Services Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Processing Outreach Services Items

    +

    When patrons are due for outreach services, as determined by the frequency setting in the patron record and the last date of service, you can generate selection lists of potential titles based on patron preferences and other outreach services settings in the patron record. From the selection list, you determine what specific items are available, and select the items for the pick list. You can check items out directly from the pick list, or place holds on individual items as necessary. When an item is checked out to an outreach services patron, the item is removed from the patron’s pick list. The last service date is automatically updated, and the next service date is calculated based on the schedule you set for the patron. See Set the outreach patron’s delivery options.

    +

    You can also set the next service date manually, overriding the system calculation. Select Next Service in the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view, and type or choose another date. You can update the last service date to today’s date. Click the update icon ORUpdateIcon.gif in the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view.

    +

    You can select and process items for an individual patron, through the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view, or you can process outreach services items for a group of patrons with the Outreach Services Manager. From a bibliographic record, you can also quickly display a list of outreach services patrons whose reading histories include items linked to the bibliographic record.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_del_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_del_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7554b7d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_del_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the outreach patron’s delivery options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Outreach Patron’s Delivery Options

    +

    To set the patron’s delivery options:

    +

    Note:
    The options available for selection are determined by Polaris Administration settings. See Setting Outreach Delivery Options.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Reader Services view of the patron’s Patron Status workform, if it is not already open. See Set up outreach services for a patron.
    2. +
    3. Click the Delivery Options icon DelivIcon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Patron Delivery Options dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select a delivery method from the Mode list.
    2. +
    3. Select a delivery route, if applicable, from the Route list.
    4. +
    5. Select a stop on the route, if applicable, from the Stop list.
    6. +
    7. Specify a frequency for this patron’s selection list processing and deliveries in the Schedule box.
      • If you select a regular frequency, such as weekly or monthly, the system calculates the patron’s next service date based on your setting, after the selection list is processed and items are checked out to the patron.
      • If you select Daily, specify the number of days between deliveries in the Every . . . day(s) box.
      • If you select Exact date, type a date in the format mm/dd/year, or click DownArrow.gif by the date and select a date from the calendar. This option sets the patron’s next service date to the date you specify.
    8. +
    9. If you selected Pickup in the Mode box, type the name of the patron’s designated representative in the Pickup Person box.
    10. +
    11. (Optional) Type any notes about the delivery in the Note box.
    12. +
    13. Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_prefs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_prefs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2cb7107 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_the_outreach_patrons_prefs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the outreach patron’s preferences + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Outreach Patron’s Preferences

    +

    The outreach patron’s preferences determine what titles are included or excluded as possible selections. A title is selected based on subject, author, and genre preferences. You can also include or exclude titles based on target audience, material type, language, and publication date.

    +

    To set the patron’s preferences:

    +

    Note:
    The options available for selection are determined by Polaris Administration settings. See Setting Outreach Patrons Options.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Reader Services view of the patron’s Patron Status workform, if it is not already open. See Set up outreach services for a patron.
    2. +
    3. Click the Preferences icon PrefIcon.gif.
    4. +
    +

    The Patron Preferences dialog box (General tabbed page) opens.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select any physical conditions or special equipment needs that apply to this patron in the Disability and Equipment lists.
    2. +
    +

    Your selections are informational only, in case your library delivers special equipment along with the materials. They do not affect what titles are selected for the patron. The options available for selection, if any, are determined by Polaris Administration settings.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Subject tab, and set the patron’s subject preferences:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Selection lists for Outreach Services patrons are generated by searches constructed from your patron preference entries (Subject, Author, Genre, Target Audience, Language, Material Type, Publication Date). All patron preference entries are used when the system constructs the search. If the record includes 50 or more preference entries, the selection list fails and a server error results. Enter fewer patron preferences to prevent the problem.

    +
    +
      +
    • To specify a subject that the patron prefers, click PrefPlus.gif above the Subjects to Include list. An edit box appears in the list. Type the subject in the edit box. A broad subject will retrieve more results; a more exact subject will retrieve fewer, more exact results. Multiple-word subjects are treated as explicitly truncated phrase searches (similar to the Find Tool). If you specify multiple subjects, the system searches for them with the equivalent of the search command or.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    To remove a subject from the list, select the subject and clickPrefMinus.gif above the Subjects to Include list. To move a subject higher or lower to indicate the patron’s preferences, select the subject and click the arrow buttons. The order in the list does not affect the search results, but may help you indicate which subjects the patron more strongly prefers.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To specify a subject to exclude from selection for the patron, click PrefPlus00078.gif above the Subjects to Exclude list. An edit box appears in the list. Type the subject in the edit box. (This is equivalent to the search command and not.)
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    To remove a subject from the list, select the subject and click PrefMinus00079.gif above the Subjects to Exclude list.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Author and Genre tabs to set author and genre preferences. The selection process is the same as specifying subjects (see step 4). Multiple-word authors are treated as explicitly truncated phrase searches (similar to the Find Tool). Genre is a keyword search.
    2. +
    3. Click the Other tab, and set any target audience, language, material type, and date preferences.
      • To specify preferred options, select (check) the items in each list. You can select multiple items.
      • To exclude options from selection, select the appropriate items in a list and select (check) Exclude beneath the list.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_up_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_up_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..103fd473 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Set_up_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up outreach services for a patron + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Outreach Services for a Patron

    +

    To set up and start outreach services for a patron:

    +

    Important:
    Since title selections for an outreach services patron can depend on what the patron has checked out in the past, reading histories are automatically activated for outreach services patrons even if your branch does not normally keep patron reading histories. See Working with Reading Histories.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform, using one of these methods:
      • From the Patron Registration workform, press F9.
      • From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Circulation, Patron Status (or press F6). Use the Find Tool to find and open the patron’s status record. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    The Patron Status workform opens to the Items Out view.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Reader Services or click ReaderServBtn.gif to display the Reader Services view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You need the Circulation permission Patron status: Modify reader services to do the next steps in this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Outreach Services to designate this patron as a participant.
    2. +
    3. Type or select the number of items the patron should receive in the Number of Items to Send box.
    4. +
    +

    This setting is for information only and does not affect any automatic processing.

    +
      +
    1. To indicate that the patron should review the list of items before delivery, select (check) Patron Selections Only.
    2. +
    +

    For more information about this workflow, see Process items for an individual patron .

    +
      +
    1. Indicate whether items already in the patron’s reading history can be sent again:
      • To allow the same items to be re-sent to the patron, select (check) Allow previous items to be re-sent, and specify the number of months that must elapse before an item is eligible to be re-sent. You can enter up to 120 months. Checking this option may be useful if the “patron” is an institution. You may want items to be re-sent so that more people at the institution can use them.
      • When this option is unchecked (cleared), items appearing in the patron’s reading history will not be included in the patron’s selection list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If an item or bibliographic record is deleted, the entry remains in the reading history.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type a note regarding this patron’s services in the Note box. You can enter a maximum of 255 characters.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save the settings, and continue with the set-up.
    4. +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Suspend_and_reactivate_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Suspend_and_reactivate_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7049be4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Suspend_and_reactivate_outreach_services_for_a_patron.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Suspend and reactivate outreach services for a patron + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suspend and Reactivate Outreach Services for a Patron

    +

    When you suspend outreach services for a patron, the patron is not included in automatic selection list processing.

    +

    To temporarily suspend outreach services for a patron:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Reader Services view of the patron’s Patron Status workform, if it is not already open. See Set up outreach services for a patron.
    2. +
    3. Select Inactive in the Outreach Services Status box.
    4. +
    5. Specify the date to reactivate outreach services in the Reactivate box. You can type a date in the format mm/dd/year, or click DownArrow00080.gif and select a date from the calendar.
    6. +
    +

    When the date is reached, the patron’s outreach service is automatically reactivated. The status is Active.

    +

    Note:
    To reactivate a patron’s outreach service manually, select Active in the Status box and specify today’s date.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the settings.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    To permanently remove a patron from outreach services, clear the Outreach Services check box on the Reader Services view of the patron’s Patron Status workform.

    +

    Note:
    If your branch uses Outreach Services but has not enabled reading histories for non-outreach services patrons, when you remove a patron from Outreach Services by clearing the Outreach Services check box, the patron’s reading history will not be cleared. The history remains unless items are manually removed. See Remove items from a patron’s reading history.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Working_with_Reader_Ratings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Working_with_Reader_Ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8adcc076 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPoutreach/Working_with_Reader_Ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Reader Ratings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Reader Ratings

    +

    If your library collects reader ratings from outreach services patrons, a packing list with a rating line for each item is delivered to the patron with the checked-out items. (See Check out items from the pick list and Process items for multiple patrons.) The ratings are returned with the items, and you enter the ratings and notes, if necessary, in the reading history for the patron account. Several ratings reports are available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. See Outreach Services Reports.

    +

    To add or modify reader ratings in the patron account:

    +

    Note:
    You must have the Circulation permission Modify ORS patron ratings: Allow for the patron’s registered branch to do this procedure.

    +

    Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform, using one of these methods:

    +
      +
    • +

      From the Patron Registration workform, press F9.

      +
    • +
    • +

      From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Circulation, Patron Status (or press F6). Use the Find Tool to find and open the patron’s status record. See Find patron services and related records.

      +
    • +
    +

    The Patron Status workform opens to the Items Out view.

    +

    Select View, Reader Services or click ReaderServBtn00100.gif to display the Reader Services view.

    +

    The items that the patron has checked out appear in the Reading History list. The list is loaded in groups of 100 items as you scroll through it. To load the entire list at once, press CTRL+ALT+A.

    +

    The reading history may include duplicate titles if the patron has checked out the title multiple times. If the patron has rated the same title differently on different occasions, you can add the different ratings to the appropriate instances of the title.

    +

     In the Reading History list, right-click the title to be rated and select Add/modify rating from the context menu.

    +

    + ORSAddRating.gif 

    +

    Note:
    Bibliographic records with the status of Provisional, Final, or Deleted can be rated. When bibliographic records are purged, any ratings associated with them are lost.

    +

    The Title Rating dialog box opens.

    +

    + TitleRatingDx.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    If you just want to enter the number, type the number and press ENTER. The rating is saved and the dialog box closes.

    +

    Select a rating number from the list, and add a note if desired.

    +

    The value Not rated (0) indicates that the list was returned but the title was not rated.

    +

    Click Save.

    +

    The Reading History list displays the rating number and the associated note, if any.

    +

    + RatingNote.gif 

    +

    To modify an existing rating, right-click the title with the rating and repeat steps 4-5.

    +

    Select File | Save.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk-Changing_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk-Changing_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..224ba745 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk-Changing_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + Bulk-Changing Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk-Changing Patron Records

    +

    You can group patron records that need a common task or have a common condition into record sets. See: Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +

    With bulk change, you can make the same changes to all the patron records in a record set in one step, in real time (not as part of overnight processing).

    +

    Example: +
    Your library decides to place a longer expiration term on the accounts of volunteers. You can search for patron records by the Volunteer patron code, place all the records in the results list in a record set, and change the expiration term on all the records at once with bulk change.

    +

    You can make bulk changes to most fields on the Patron Registration workform, as well as the free-text and library-assigned blocks and notes fields on the Patron Status workform. More than one field may be changed in a single bulk change operation. You specify what changes to make to the selected fields, and the same changes are applied to the selected fields in all the records in the record set. For more information about patron record fields, see Creating and Editing Patron Records.

    +

    For general information about the changes that can be made to patron records using bulk change, see:

    + +

    For instructions on bulk changing patron records and viewing the report, see:

    + +

    Bulk Changes to User-Defined Fields

    +

    Your library specifies the user-defined fields (UDFs) for patron records in Polaris Administration. These information fields are displayed on the Patron Registration workform - General view. They may be free-text fields or menus of predefined options.

    +

    When you apply bulk changes to free-text UDFs, the text is treated as a single unit. The whole text string can be deleted, replaced, or added, but you cannot replace parts of a text string. Bulk change affects only a free-text UDF’s text string, not a UDF’s definition. You can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Add - Input text in blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Overwrite - Replaces the existing text in UDFs with new text, and adds the new text to any blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Replace - Replace the existing text in UDFs with new text. The new text is not added to any blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete the text in UDFs. You can only delete an entire text string, and you must specify this entire text string.
    • +
    • Clear - Delete the text in all UDFs, no matter what the text is.
    • +
    +

    For drop-menu UDFs, you can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Add - Add the value only to blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Overwrite - Replaces the existing value in UDFs with the new value, and adds the new value to any blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete the selected value from UDFs.
    • +
    • Clear - Delete all values from the selected UDF, no matter what the value is.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Because drop-menu options are branch-specific, if you select a value that is not valid for a selected Assigned Branch, the value is not changed and an error message is stored in the bulk change log file. See View the Bulk Change Report.

    +

    Bulk Changes to Blocks

    +

    The text of each library-assigned block is set in Polaris Administration; the text of each free-text block is manually entered when you create the block. Although records may have multiple blocks, you can change only one library-assigned block and one free-text block per bulk-change process. You can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Add - Add a block to each record.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete a block from each record. For free-text blocks, you must type the entire text string in the Text to delete box.
    • +
    • Replace - For free-text blocks only, replace the existing text of the block with new text. You must type the entire existing text string in the Find box.
    • +
    +

    For library-assigned blocks, you must first choose a registration branch, because these blocks are branch-specific. If a patron has a library-assigned block that is not valid for the new branch, the block is removed from the patron record.

    +

    Note: +
    Blocks are displayed on the Patron Status workform - General view. See Patron Services Records. For information about working with individual patron record blocks, see Working with Blocks (Stops).

    +

    Bulk Changes to eReceipt Options

    +

    You can set eReceipt options in bulk for a patron record set. The Bulk Change dialog box - General tabbed page includes a setting for eReceipt option. You can select None (default), E-mail, TXT, or All. The system changes a record in the record set if that change would be allowed for a single record. For example, if a branch has not enabled eReceipts, the bulk change does not affect records from that branch and an error is written to the bulk change report. If a branch has enabled one type of eReceipt but not both, no change is made for the receipt type that is not enabled. But in this case, if All is selected for bulk change, the system does set a record in the supported eReceipt type. For more information about setting eReceipt options for patrons, see Add notification data to a patron record.

    +

    Bulk Changes to Notes

    +

    The Patron Status workform - Notes view includes two notes fields, one for non-blocking notes and one for blocking notes (those that block circulation). Each can contain one or more text strings, but each is a single field. You cannot bulk-change specific text within the field. When you bulk-change either note field, you can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Append - Add text to the end of an existing note in each record.
    • +
    • Prepend - Add text to the beginning of an existing note in each record.
    • +
    • Clear - Delete the entire note.
    • +
    +

    Bulk Change Reporting

    +

    When you bulk change records, the Bulk Change Report is automatically generated. It contains information about the number of records processed and the errors, if any, that occurred during the process. See View the Bulk Change Report.

    +

    You can also choose to have the bulk change process create an error record set containing the records that were not changed for some reason during processing. For example, if a record is locked by another user, it cannot be changed. The bulk change process makes a second attempt to change the item after completing the changes to the remaining records in the record set. If the second attempt to change the record fails, no further attempts are made. The record is added to the error record set and an error message is added to the Bulk Change Report log.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk_change_patron_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk_change_patron_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..929c18cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/Bulk_change_patron_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk Change Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Change Patron Records

    +

    To edit all the patron records in a record set through bulk change:

    +

    Important: +
    You need the system-level permission Access patron record bulk change and the branch-level permission Patron registration: Modify to do this procedure. If the patron records in the record set have various Registered at branches and you do not have permission to modify the records for a specific branch, these records will not be changed and an appropriate error message will be written in the Bulk Change Report. After the records are changed, they cannot be changed back to their original settings automatically.

    +
      +
    1. Display a patron record set in the Record Set workform by one of the following methods:
      • Create a new record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets.
      • Select Patron Services, Record Sets. Use the Find Tool to search for an existing record set, and open it from the results list.
      • Select Links, Existing, Records Sets from an open patron record workform when the record is a member of the record set.
    2. +
    +

    The Record Set workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Bulk Change or click iBulkChIcon.gif to display the Bulk Change dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Report/Record Set to display the Report/Record Set tabbed page.
    2. +
    3. If you want to change the default destination for the bulk change report, type the folder and file name in the Save to file box, or click Browse... to locate a destination.
    4. +
    5. If you want to create an error record set, do these steps:
      1. Select the Error Record Set check box.
      2. Type a name for the error record set in the Name box.
      3. Type your user name or the library name as the owner of the error record set in the Owner box.
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    The error record set lists records that were not changed during processing due to errors. See Bulk Change Reporting.

    +
      +
    1. Click the tab for the page that contains the field you want to change. The tabbed pages correspond to areas on the Patron Registration and Patron Status workforms:
      • Registration - Account information such as registered branch, expiration term and date, patron code, and statistical class
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    Statistical class codes are branch-specific. If you change the registered branch and a patron’s statistical class code does not exist for the new branch, the statistical class code is changed to null.

    +
    +
      +
    • Address - Address and notification options.
    • +
    • General - General information fields such as original registration date; eReceipt options; language; reading history; exclusion from overdue notices, almost overdue and auto-renew reminder notices; exclusion from collection agency reporting; additional text messaging; and do not delete patron record. Staff members with the permission to secure patron records can select the Secure the patron record check box to prevent any library activity for the patrons in the record set. For more information, see Secure a patron record.
    • +
    • UDFs - User-defined fields, as set up in Polaris Administration; see Bulk Changes to User-Defined Fields.
    • +
    • Blocks/Notes - Library-defined and free text blocks; patron record blocking and non-blocking notes. See Bulk Changes to Blocks and Bulk Changes to Notes.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note: +
    If you are changing library-assigned blocks, you must first choose a registration branch on the Registration tabbed page, because library-assigned blocks are branch-specific. If a patron has a library-assigned block that is not valid for the new branch, the block is removed from the patron record.

    +

    The appropriate tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check box for the field you want to change. The companion box becomes available.
    2. +
    3. Select or type the new values for the fields in their corresponding box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to start the bulk change process. The Summary of Changes message box lists the settings you made for the bulk change.
    6. +
    7. Click Continue to confirm your bulk change settings. The bulk change process applies all your changes to the records wherever the changes can be made. Some records may have a status that prevents certain changes from being performed.
    8. +
    +

    You can do other tasks in Polaris while the bulk changes are being made. A message box appears when the bulk change process is finished.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the message box. The Record Set workform appears.
    2. +
    +

    When the bulk change process is complete, review the Bulk Change Report for any errors in the process. See View the Bulk Change Report.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/View_the_Bulk_Change_Report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/View_the_Bulk_Change_Report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a6278b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPpatrecbulk/View_the_Bulk_Change_Report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + View the Bulk Change Report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View the Bulk Change Report

    +

    When the bulk change process finishes, Polaris creates a Bulk Change Report. The Error Details section of the report contains basic record information and the reason for each error, if any. If this section of the report is blank, there were no errors. To display the Bulk Change report in a text editor or word processor:

    +
      +
    1. Wait for the bulk change process to complete.
    2. +
    3. Start your text editor or word processor application.
    4. +
    5. Navigate to the report file and folder you specified on the Bulk Change dialog box, and open the Bulk Change Report file that you want to view. You can print the report from your text editor or word processor application.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_In_Quick-Circ_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_In_Quick-Circ_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..775722d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_In_Quick-Circ_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking In Quick-Circ Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking In Quick-Circ Items

    +

    It is not necessary to check in quick-circ items. However, if you want to track quick-circ item check-ins for reporting purposes, you can check them in through normal and bulk check-in, just like conventional items. When a quick-circ item is checked in, the Comments column on the Normal or Bulk Check In workform notes that the item is a quick-circ item. For more information about check-in procedures, see Doing Normal Item Check-Ins or Doing Bulk Item Check-Ins.

    +

    Note:
    The status of quick-circ items belonging to other branches does not change to In-Transit at check-in.

    +

    Quick-circ items can also be checked in offline. They are logged in the normal offline check-in process. The transaction is recognized as a single quick-circ item check-in during the offline file upload, and the offline upload report records the transaction.

    +

    Quick-circ items are not recognized during in-house or inventory check-in. If a quick-circ item barcode is scanned during these operations, the system displays a message that the item record cannot be found.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_Out_Quick-Circ_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_Out_Quick-Circ_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81e13492 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Checking_Out_Quick-Circ_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking Out Quick-Circ Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking Out Quick-Circ Items

    +

    When a quick-circ item barcode is scanned during normal check-out, offline check-out, or check-out from Polaris ExpressCheck, the transaction is recorded as a quick-circ transaction. The system does not check the patron total item limit or item limit by material type, and the patron record is not updated in any way to reflect the transaction. The items do not display in the patron’s Items Out list on the Patron Status workform, in the patron’s account as viewed in PAC, or in the patron’s reading history. However, if the quick-circ items are the only items scanned for check-out, the patron’s Last activity date is updated to the date of the transaction.

    +

    Quick-circ items cannot be checked out from an Outreach Services pick list. Also, quick-circ items cannot be renewed from the staff client, PAC, Polaris ExpressCheck, or by telephone, because they are not displayed or recorded on the patron’s Items Out view.

    +

    To check out quick-circ items during normal check-out:

    +

    Note:

    You can create quick-circ items directly from the Check Out workform. See Creating Quick-Circ Items.

    +

    Select Circulation, Check Out from the Polaris Shortcut Bar to display the Check Out workform.

    +

    The Check Out workform is displayed.

    +

    Enter patron information using one of the following methods:

    +
      +
    • +

      Scan the patron barcode in the Patron barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click the Find button next to the Patron name box to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the patron’s record.

      +
    • +
    +

    The Patron barcode, Patron name, and other patron information are filled in.

    +

    Scan a quick-circ item barcode in the Item barcode box, or type the barcode and press ENTER.

    +

    The Quick-Circ Item Checkout dialog box appears.

    +

    + QuickCircCOdx.gif +  

    +

    Type or select the number of quick-circ items to check out.

    +

    The default value is 1. You can scan each quick-circ barcode individually, or type a greater number to allow one barcode to represent multiple items for statistical purposes.

    +

    Click OK, press ALT+O, or tab to the OK box and then press ENTER.

    +

    Note:

    To cancel, click Cancel, press ALT+C, or tab to the Cancel box and then press ENTER.

    +

    The status bar indicates that the check-out was successful. The quick-circ item information appears in the list of items checked out. Each quick-circ item barcode is a separate line item. For each quick-circ line item, the Action column displays the number of items you specified to associate with the quick-circ item barcode.

    +

    Repeat the previous steps until you have checked out all the patron’s items.

    +

    The total number of items checked out appears in the status bar at the bottom of the workform.

    +

     If you want to print a check-out receipt, follow these steps:

    +

    a)  Verify that the Item barcode box is blank.

    +

    b)  Do one of the following actions:

    +
      +
    • +

      To print a receipt for all the items the patron has checked out in this session, press ENTER.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To print a receipt for selected items, select the item or items in the list of items checked out and select File > Print Receipt > Print Selection.

      +
    • +
    +

    For quick-circ items, one line is printed for each quick-circ barcode scanned. The line text is X uncataloged items, where X is the number of items you specified to associate with the quick-circ item barcode.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Offline check-out - During offline check-out, a barcode must be scanned for each physical quick-circ item. Quick-circ items are logged in the normal offline check-out process. When the offline file is uploaded, each transaction is entered as a quick-circ item check-out, and the offline upload report records the transaction.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris ExpressCheck check-out - When a patron checks out a quick-circ item, the screen displays the item material type and Uncataloged material in the line item display, with no due date or additional information. The receipt prints one line for each quick-circ item barcode scanned. The library can edit the display text Uncataloged material. For more information about customizing Polaris ExpressCheck, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Circulating_Ephemeral_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Circulating_Ephemeral_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03ac169a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Circulating_Ephemeral_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Circulating Ephemeral Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulating Ephemeral Items

    +

    Using Polaris Quick-Circ, you can circulate items that are not intended for full cataloging and generate circulation statistics for these items. For example, items suitable for quick-circ circulation might include old mass-market paperbacks or pamphlets.

    +

    Quick-circ items differ from regular items in that they have no conventional Polaris item records. They circulate with no due dates, no fines, and no overdue processing. They cannot fill hold requests. They do not count against any patron borrowing limits, and they are not displayed in the patron’s items out list or in a patron’s reading history. A quick-circ item is identified only by a barcode, assigned branch and collection, and material type. The primary advantage of Polaris Quick-Circ is in tracking and reporting circulation of these kinds of items. Quick-circ item circulation is included in many Polaris circulation reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Create_a_quick-circ_item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Create_a_quick-circ_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d350c9b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Create_a_quick-circ_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a quick-circ item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Quick-Circ item

    +

    To create a quick-circ item for circulation:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Quick Circ Item workform using one of the following methods:
      • From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select File | New, and select Quick-circ Item Record from the list of objects.
      • From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities, Quick-circ Item Records, and select File | New from the Quick-circ Item Record List.
      • From the Check Out workform, select Tools, Quick-circ Item Record or press CTRL+Q.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    From an existing Quick-circ Item workform, selectFile | New. You can copy the existing record exactly, or open a new record with a blank barcode. +

    +

    The Quick Circ Item workform opens.

    +
      +
    1. Scan or type the barcode in the Item barcode box.
    2. +
    +

    For quick-circ items, the system does not check the item barcode format definitions set in Polaris Administration (Profiles, Staff client). However, you cannot use a barcode that is already assigned to another quick-circ item or to a conventional item.

    +
      +
    1. Select the item’s assigned branch.
    2. +
    +

    The default value is the workstation log-on branch. The available options are the same as those available in the conventional item record. They depend on your branch’s settings and your permissions.

    +
      +
    1. If your library uses collections, select a collection from the Assigned collection list.
    2. +
    +

    Your library may use specific collections for quick-circ items.

    +
      +
    1. Select a material type.
    2. +
    +

    The default value is set in Polaris Administration. Your policy may be to use any available and appropriate material type for quick-circ items, or you may use one material type for all quick-circ items. You can set up a material type specifically for this use.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Checking Out Quick-Circ Items +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Creating_Quick-Circ_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Creating_Quick-Circ_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ae63a9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/Creating_Quick-Circ_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Quick-Circ Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Quick-Circ Items

    +

    You can create quick-circ item records from several locations, including the Polaris Shortcut Bar (File | New or Utilities, Quick-circ Item Records), the Check Out workform, or an existing quick-circ item record, depending on your workflow. Although quick-circ item records use several of the same data fields as conventional Polaris item records, there are important differences. If a quick-circ item barcode is scanned or entered into the item Find Tool, the search produces no results. The system responds as it does when no matching barcode is found. You cannot bulk-change quick-circ item records, although you can modify individual records.

    +

    Note:
    If a quick-circ item barcode is scanned into the barcode field of a conventional item record, the system displays a message that the barcode is assigned to quick-circ items and cannot be used.

    +

    A convenient workflow is to reserve a sheet of barcodes or several barcode labels and create quick-circ item records for the barcodes in advance. Then you can apply the barcodes as needed at check-out. Each physical item needs a unique barcode. However, during staff check-out, you need to scan only one of the barcodes, and specify how many quick circ items are being checked out. (If your patrons use Polaris ExpressCheck, each item needs to be scanned at the Polaris ExpressCheck station.) See: Checking Out Quick-Circ Items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/View_modify_or_delete_quick-circ_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/View_modify_or_delete_quick-circ_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc78256c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickcirc/View_modify_or_delete_quick-circ_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + View, modify, or delete quick-circ items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View, Modify, or Delete Quick-Circ Items

    +

    You cannot search for quick-circ item records with the Polaris Find Tool. However, you can view a list of all the existing quick-circ items and select them from the list to modify or delete them.

    +

    To work with the list of quick-circ items:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities | Quick-circ Item Records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can sort the list by branch. Click the Branch column head.

    +

    The Quick-circ Item Records List opens. The list displays all the quick-circ items in the system.

    +
      +
    1. To print the list of items, click the Printer button on the workform toolbar.
    2. +
    3. To modify an item, double-click the item in the list.
    4. +
    +

    The Quick-circ Item Record workform opens. You can edit the barcode, assigned branch, assigned collection, and material type of the item. Select File | Save when you have made the changes.

    +
      +
    1. To delete an item, right-click the item in the list, and select Delete from the context menu.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickref/Patron_Services_Circulation_Shortcut_Keys.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickref/Patron_Services_Circulation_Shortcut_Keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e21d4ca4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPquickref/Patron_Services_Circulation_Shortcut_Keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,503 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Services/Circulation Shortcut Keys + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services/Circulation Shortcut Keys

    +

    These charts list the keyboard shortcuts you can use with Polaris patron services and circulation workflows.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    General Shortcuts

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Workform helpF1
    Find Tool - Find patron records (Patron Status)F6
    Find Tool - Find patron records (Patron Registration)F7
    Workform - open Find ToolCTRL+O
    New workformCTRL+N
    Close workformALT-F4
    Save recordCTRL+S
    Delete recordCTRL+D
    Cycle among workform viewsCTRL+TAB
    Open Tools Options dialog boxCTRL+T
    Switch between Patron Status/Patron RegistrationF9
    PropertiesF8
    Print current viewCTRL+P
    Print current list viewCTRL+SHIFT+P
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Record Sets

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    New record setCTRL+N
    Workform - open Find ToolCTRL+O
    Load all records in Find Tool results setCTRL+SHIFT+A
    Add member by searchingCTRL+E
    Add member by scanningCTRL+K
    Bulk changeCTRL+B
    Save record setCTRL+S
    Close workformALT-F4
    Delete record setCTRL+D
    PropertiesF8
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Check Out

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Open Check Out workformF3
    Find patronCTRL+R
    Previous patron barcodeF4
    Find itemCTRL+I
    Find bibCTRL+B
    Create quick-circ itemCTRL+Q
    Place holdCTRL+H
    Special loanALT+S
    Reset due dateCTRL+ALT+D
    Patron Registration workformCTRL+F9
    Patron Status General viewALT+G
    Patron Status Items Out viewALT+O
    Patron Status Account viewALT+A
    Patron Status Claims viewALT+C
    Patron Status Holds ViewALT+H
    Patron Status Reader Services viewALT+D
    Patron Status Associations ViewALT+W
    Patron Status Notes viewALT+N
    Express-register patronCTRL+G
    RFID check-outF9
    Smart card check-outCTRL+ALT+S
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Check In

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Open Check In workformF2
    Find patronCTRL+R
    Place holdCTRL+H
    RFID check-inF9
    Change item's circ status or shelf locationCTRL+M
    Change item's barcodeCTRL+B
    Inventory - Load barcode fileCTRL+ALT+I
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Holds Queue Workform

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    SaveCTRL+S
    RefreshF5
    New RequestCTRL+H
    Move UpCTRL+U
    Move DownCTRL+W
    Move TopCTRL+T
      
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Course Reserves - Instructors

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Add instructorCTRL+A
    Edit instructorCTRL+E
    Remove instructorCTRL+R
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Course Reserves - Reserve Items

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Add itemCTRL+A
    Edit itemCTRL+E
    Remove itemCTRL+R
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Receive Shipment

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Open workformALT+A+S
    Open Manage Item Record dialog boxCTRL+M
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_terminal_server_environment_and_RDP.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_terminal_server_environment_and_RDP.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b9fabed1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_terminal_server_environment_and_RDP.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a New Photo (terminal server environment and RDP) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a New Photo (terminal server environment and RDP)

    +

    Because you cannot install webcam software on a thin client (terminal server environment) or use it via Remote Desktop (RDP), you cannot take new patron pictures by these means.  However, you can take photos at a conventional workstation dedicated to this purpose and add them to patron records via terminal server or RDP.

    +

    To add a new photo to a patron record in a terminal server environment or RDP:

    +
      +
    1. (First time only) Working at the computer with the webcam, create a folder on the hard drive for patron photos.
    2. +
    3. If you are connected to Polaris via an RDP connection, minimize the connection.
    4. +
    5. Start the manufacturer’s photo software for your camera, and take the patron’s picture.
    6. +
    7. When you and the patron are satisfied with the photo, maximize the RDP connection for your terminal server and Polaris.
    8. +
    9. Check to be sure your local drive is shared out and that your workstation is identified with C.
    10. +
    11. If your workstation name is not identified with C:, follow these steps:
      1. Log off Polaris if you are logged in.
      2. Log off your RDP connection.
      3. Open the RDP connection for Polaris and click Options>>.
      4. Select the Local Resources tab and click More.
    12. +
    +

    + RDPShare.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Drives to make the workstation drive available during your RDP session, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Select the General tab, and click Save.
    4. +
    5. Click Connect.
    6. +
    7. Confirm that your local drives are in your RDP connection by selecting Start, My Computer.
    8. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Log in to Polaris and open the appropriate patron record.
    2. +
    3. To add the photo to the patron record, follow the steps in Upload an existing photo to a patron record.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6de78c2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_a_new_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a new photo to a patron record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a new photo to a patron record

    +

    To add a new photo to a patron record:

    +
      +
    1. If the patron record is not already open, select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record in the Patron Registration workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are registering a new patron, enter the required information and save the record. See Create a patron record. Then go to step 2.

    +
      +
    1. On the Patron Registration workform, select View, Photo, or click PhotoIcon.gif. The Patron Registration workform - Patron Photo view opens.
    2. +
    +

    + PatronPhotoVu.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Launch Picture Edit. The Patron Photo dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + PatronPhotoDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Start Camera. The real-time image from the webcam appears in the left panel of the Patron Photo dialog box.
    2. +
    3. When the image is satisfactory, click Take Picture. The still photo appears in the right panel.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    Follow these same steps to replace an existing photo with a new one. The new photo overlays the old one.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save Picture to save the picture in the patron record.
    2. +
    +

    You can see the date the patron photo was added to the patron record on the Properties sheet, About tabbed page. To open the Properties sheet from the Patron Registration or Patron Status toolbar, press F8, select File, Properties, or click the Properties icon PropBtn.gif.

    +

    Note:
    Patron photos are saved directly in the Polaris database, not as a separate collection of image files.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Deleting a photo - To delete a photo from the patron record, simply click Delete on the right side of the Patron Photo dialog box.
    • +
    • Using an existing photo - See Upload an existing photo to a patron record.
    • +
    • Replacing the default photo - Polaris displays a default image (the Polaris logo) in the patron record and on the Check Out workform when the patron record does not include a photo. To use your own default image, See Replace the default photo.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_an_address_to_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_an_address_to_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebf19aad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_an_address_to_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add an Address to a Patron Record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add an Address to a Patron Record

    +

    You can specify multiple addresses for a patron, such as home and office addresses.

    +

    To add an address to a patron record:

    +

    Note:
    For more information on setting up patron records, see Create a patron record.

    +
      +
    1. If the patron record is not already open, select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record. See Find patron services and related records. The Patron Registration workform - Addresses view appears. If you are working with a new patron record that is already open, you may need to select View, Addresses or click PatRecAddrBut.gif to display this view.
    2. +
    3. Click the Add button under the Addresses, Phone Numbers list area. The Add/Edit Address dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the type of address, such as Home or Work, in the Type box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If your library uses course reserve functions, and this patron is an instructor for a course, specify Office for the address that should appear in the course reserve record. Instructors’ office addresses offer two lines (Office 1 and Office 2). They do not include Zip code or other mailing address information. If you do not specify an office address, the Home address is used for the course reserve record.

    +

    Tip:
    In the Country box, you can type the first letter of the country to select the country.

    +
      +
    1. Select the country in the Country box.
    2. +
    3. Type the U.S. Zip code (or another country postal code, if appropriate) in the Postal Code box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you backspace or press the DELETE key in the middle of typing a Canadian postal code, the control appears not to work. Select USA to clear the box, then select Canada again and type the postal code in the correct format, for example H3Z 1X4. Do not type a hyphen between the two groups of characters.

    +

    For U.S. Zip codes and Canadian postal codes, Polaris automatically fills in the City, State/province, and County boxes, or displays a pop-up dialog box. If the pop-up box appears, double-click the correct city-state-county combination. The City, State/province, and County boxes are filled in.

    +

    Note:
    You must have the permission Patron registration: Modify postal address fields to enter an entirely new city/state/country/postal code combination. Otherwise, you can only select an existing combination. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

    +
      +
    1. If you entered a postal code for a country other than the U.S. or Canada, type the city in the City box, type the state or province in the State/province box, and type the county in the County box. If the state, province, or county is not required as part of the address, you can leave the State/province box and County box empty.
    2. +
    3. Type the street address or post office box number in the Street One box. You can use the Street Two box for additional information, such as the apartment or suite number, or leave it blank. You must enter information in at least one Street box in order to save the address.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to submit the address information. The Addresses view appears with the address information in the Addresses, Phone Numbers list.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save to save the record.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_general_data_to_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_general_data_to_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a658b96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_general_data_to_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add General Data to a Patron Record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add General Data to a Patron Record

    +

    The patron record contains general data that may be used for statistical purposes and any user-defined fields that are determined by the library at installation. This section of the patron record also allows you to exempt a patron from overdue notices, hold request notices, or collection agency processing. You also set the patron’s password and language preference in this section.

    +

    Note:
    For more information on setting up patron records, see Create a Patron Record.

    +

    To add general data to a patron record:

    +
      +
    1. Select Patron Services > Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record. See Find Patron Services and Related Records.
    2. +

      Tip:
      You can press CTRL+TAB to change views.

      +
    3. Select View > General or click PRGenViewBtn.gif to display the General view.
    4. +
    5. Select Gender from the drop down menu. All drop down menus start with a (None) option followed by a list of genders specified for the specific organization. The (None) option is selected by default unless a patron has already selected a gender. Selecting (None) sets the patron's gender to "null" in the database as if they have opted out of a gender selection. Use N/A to register a group or an organization as a patron. Your library may require you to choose Gender. If so, the word Gender appears in bold type. Your library many choose to not track Gender by suppressing that choice.
    6. +
    7. Select the appropriate statistical code in the Statistical class box. These codes are defined by your library for statistical or reporting purposes.
    8. +

      Note:
      If you change the patron’s registration branch and the statistical class is valid at the new branch, the statistical class remains in the edited record. Otherwise, the statistical class is set to None.

      +
    9. Type the patron’s password in the Password box.
    10. +

      The patron uses this password, together with the patron barcode or user name, to access the account or place holds in the PAC. The password must be a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters. Passwords are case-sensitive. Do not include spaces or special characters such as %, @, and $. Polaris displays the password as a series of asterisks (*) for security purposes. For additional information, see Patron Passwords and User Names.

      +

      Note:
      Your library may limit the number of times a patron can try to sign in to the PAC without success. At the first attempt, the system starts timing the sign in attempts. When the limit has been reached and five minutes have passed from the first unsuccessful attempt, a message appears and the patron must wait five minutes before trying to sign in again. If you reset the patron’s password from the staff client after at least one sign in attempt, the patron may have to wait five minutes before attempting to sign in with the new password.

      +
    11. Select the patron’s primary language in the Language box.
    12. +

      Note:
      If your library has purchased the Polaris multilingual option, and the language you select is supported for notices, the patron can receive notices in this language. For more information, see Managing Notification.

      +
    13. If appropriate, scan the patron’s previous ID (the barcode found on the patron’s old library card) in the Former barcode box or type the barcode and press Enter.
    14. +
    15. Enter the patron’s birth date in the Birth date box using one of these methods:
    16. +

      Note:
      You can enter a birth year in the patron record that is earlier than 1900. For example, if you do not ask patrons their birth year at registration, you can enter 1776 as a placeholder. You can save dates as early as 1753.

      +

      Tip:
      You can select the check box with the space bar. This is convenient if you prefer to use the keyboard instead of the mouse.

      +
        +
      • Type a specific date - Select the box in the Birth date field, then type the birth date in the format shown. Use the right arrow key to move from one segment of the date to the next.
      • +

        Note:
        If you clear the check box, the date may be gray or it may not be visible. It reappears when you select the check box again. The date is not saved with the patron record unless the check box is selected.

        +
      • Select a date from a calendar - Click the down arrow in the Birth date field and select the birth date from the calendar.
      • +
      +
    17. Verify the date of registration in the Date of original registration box.
    18. +

      Note:
      If you clear the check box, the date may be gray or it not be visible. It reappears when you select the check box again. The date is not saved with the patron record unless the check box is selected.

      +
    19. If you want Polaris to track a reading history for the patron, select the Maintain permanent reading list check box. See Working with Reading Histories.
    20. +
    21. If the patron will receive email notices or reminders from the library, and prefers plain text email, select Email notices in plain text. If a patron is experiencing problems with the display of HTML email notices or reminders, setting the email format to plain text may improve the display of information.
    22. +

      Plain text email notices have the following limitations: +

      • Detail content is displayed in separate lines instead of in one line or one group.
      • Claimed items are included even if Include claimed items is not selected for overdue notices (Notification Options dialog box > Overdue tab).
      • Combined notices may include some fields that are correctly suppressed in HTML notices.

      +
    23. To prevent this patron record from being deleted, select the Do not delete patron record check box.
    24. +
    25. To prevent this patron from being reported to the collection agency, select the Exclude from collection agency check box.
    26. +
    27. To prevent this patron from receiving certain notices and reminders, select the appropriate check boxes below Exclude from notices and reminders.
    28. +

      Tip:
      If your library uses Polaris outreach services processing, you may want to select the Hold option. This prevents an outreach services patron from receiving a hold notice when a selection list item becomes held for delivery to the patron. See Outreach Services Processing.

      +

      Note:
      To prevent the patron from receiving any notices at all, set the notification option to None on the Addresses view. See Add Notification Data to a Patron Record.

      +
    29. If your library requires additional patron information, type or select the appropriate data in the User defined fields boxes.
    30. +

      Your library may use free text user defined fields, drop-menu fields with specific options, or both. The user defined fields are indexed for searching. Your library may choose not to use all five available user defined fields.

      +
    31. Select File > Save to save the record.
    32. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_notification_data_to_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_notification_data_to_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4639ade --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Add_notification_data_to_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add notification data to a patron record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Notification and Receipt Preferences to a Patron Record

    +

    Notification data specifies how the patron wants to receive notices, such as for held and overdue items. To add notification data to a patron record:

    +

    Note:
    For more information on setting up patron records, see Create a patron record.

    +
      +
    1. If the patron record is not already open, select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record. See Find patron services and related records. The Patron Registration workform - Addresses view appears. If you are working with a new patron record that is already open, you may need to select View, Addresses or click PatRecAddrBut00013.gif to display this view.
    2. +
    3. Enter the patron’s address data if you have not already done so. See Add an address to a patron record. +

      Tip:
      The default setting in the Address boxes is the first address in the Addresses, Phone Numbers list.

    4. +
    5. Select the address for receiving notifications in the Notices address box.
    6. +
    7. Select the Notification option.
    8. +
    9. (Optional) Type the patron’s email address in the Email address box. +

      This address can be used for sending overdue, billing, request, email reminder, and routing notices, as well as email receipts. To deliver notices to a patron via email, the Notification option box must be set to Email Address.

      Your library determines whether email notices are sent in HTML format or plain text format by default. On the Patron Registration workform - General view, you can set the format if the patron prefers a format different from the default format. See Add general data to a patron record. (Email receipts are always sent in plain text format.)

      Note:
      You can send reminder notices and special announcements to any patron with an email address in the patron record, regardless of the setting in the Notification option box. See Set up e-mail reminder notices.

    10. +
    11. Select (check) Additional TXT notice if the patron’s mobile phone accepts text messages and your library sends text messages in addition to other types of notices such as email or print (see step 13). A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record and one Phone field is a mobile phone with a selected carrier. Also, the TXT option must be selected for that phone number. A phone number designated for text messages must follow the designated format. +

      Note:
      Some mobile phone service carriers charge their customers for text messages received, so these patrons may not want to receive additional text messages.

    12. +
    13. If your library has enabled eReceipts (e-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both) and this patron prefers to receive check-out, renewal, and fine receipts by email or TXT message, select the appropriate option from the eReceipt option list. +
      • At check out and renewal, the patron will receive an eReceipt when both the patron’s branch and the workstation’s log-on branch (transacting branch) have enabled eReceipts.
      • To receive e-mail receipts, the patron record must include an e-mail address. If the record includes both primary and alternate e-mail addresses, the receipt is sent to both addresses. To receive TXT receipts, one Phone field must be a mobile phone with a selected carrier, and the TXT option must be selected for that phone number. A separate TXT receipt is sent for each item checked out or renewed. For information about eReceipt settings in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up eReceipts.
    14. +
    15. (Optional) Type an alternative email address in the Alt Email address box. +

      Tip:
      The Phone 1, Phone 2, and Phone 3 numbers are used for phone notification, voice mail messages, and if any are mobile phones, for text message notices and receipts.

    16. +
    17. Type the patron’s phone number in the Phone 1 box (include 1+area code for long distance numbers).
    18. +
    19. If you want to use additional phone numbers, type the phone numbers in the Phone 2 and Phone 3 boxes (include 1+area code for long distance numbers). You can enter up to three phone numbers.
    20. +
    21. If any of the Phone numbers are mobile phones, select a carrier for the number or numbers from the drop-down list next to the phone number field. The available carriers are set in Polaris Administration. See Delivering Notices by Text Message.
    22. +
    23. To designate a mobile phone number for text message notices and/or receipts, check the TXT box next to the phone number. +

      Any one Phone number can be designated as TXT, allowing for text notification or text message receipts to that number. You must specify a carrier for the phone number if the TXT option is selected for that number.

      A phone number designated for text messages must follow the designated format.

    24. +
    25. (Optional) Type the fax number in the FAX number box (include 1+area code for long distance numbers).
    26. +
    27. Select the method by which the patron prefers to receive notices in the Notification option box. +

      Note:
      When your library sets up notification, the library can specify patron preference as the notification method for a specific notice type. In this case, the notice is sent by the method specified in the patron record. However, the library may choose to deliver certain notices by a specific method regardless of patron preference. See Managing Notification.

      • You can use the Phone options only if the library has telephony software for automatic telephone notification. You can select Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3 for the phone notification, but be sure the corresponding phone number has been supplied when selecting a phone notification option.
      • If you select the E-mail Address option for notification, the patron record must include an e-mail address. On the Patron Registration workform - General view, you can specify plain-text e-mail format if that is the patron’s preference.
      • If you select the TXT Messaging option for notification, one Phone field must be a mobile phone with a selected carrier, and the TXT option must be selected for that phone number. +

        Note:
        Some mobile phone service carriers charge their customers for text messages received, so these patrons may prefer a different notification method.

      • You can exclude the patron from receiving certain notices, and make this patron exempt from collection agency processing. See Add general data to a patron record. To prevent the patron from receiving any notices at all, select None in the Notification option box.
      • Selecting None in the Notification option menu will suppress all notices to the patron.
    28. +
    29. Select File | Save to save the record.
    30. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Setting up notification - See Managing Notification.
    • +
    • Notification language - If your library has purchased the Polaris multilingual option, the patron may be able to receive notices in the language specified in the patron record. See Add general data to a patron record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8e4d903 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a patron record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Patron Record

    +

    To create a patron record from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +
    Tips:
    Other methods for creating a new patron record:
    • From the Find Tool results list, right-click a patron record and select Create Patron from the context menu. See Finding Patron Records. The new patron registration workform opens. Go to step 3 below.

    • On the Patron Registration workform for an existing record, select File | New, then clear or copy the current workform. Gender is not copied during the patron copy process. Go to step 3 below. See Create a New Record from a Workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, click the New button, or press CTRL+N. The New dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select Patron Record in the Objects box, and click OK. The Addresses view of the Patron Registration workform appears. +

      Note:
      If you are using Polaris offline, select Patron Services > Patron Records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or select F7, to display the Offline Registration workform.

      Tip:
      To replace a lost library card, open the patron’s record and scan the barcode from the new card in place of the old barcode. The barcode is updated while the other registration information remains unchanged.

    4. +
    5. Scan the patron’s barcode (from the new library card) in the Barcode box, or type the barcode and select ENTER. +

      If your library system allows you to use just the significant digits (the last unique portion) of a patron barcode, you can type just this part of the barcode. If the unique part of the barcode begins with one or more zeroes, you do not need to type these. The system supplies the complete barcode, including any leading zeros, and the complete barcode displays in the patron record. If you enter more than the defined number of significant digits, the system attempts to save the record with the digits you entered as the complete barcode. For more information about setting Polaris to use significant digits, see Significant Digits in Patron Barcodes.

      Tip:
      Select TAB to go from one field to the next in the Patron Registration workform. Press the space bar to select check boxes.

    6. +
    7. Enter the patron’s name in the Last name and First name fields. +
      Important:
      If a patron has a preferred name that's different from the patron's legal name, enter the preferred name here, and enter the patron's legal name in the Name on Identification section.

      Do not use spaces when typing compound last names. For example, type MacDonald (instead of Mac Donald).

    8. +
    9. Select the patron’s registration location in the Registered at box.
    10. +
    11. Select the patron’s code in the Patron code box.
    12. +
    13. Use one of the following methods to set the registration term: +
      • Set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today) - Type a number in the first Expiration Term box, and select months or years in the second Term box. The exact date is automatically calculated and appears in the Expiration Date box.
      • Type a specific date - Type the expiration date in the format shown. You can use the right arrow key to go from segment to segment of the date.
      • Select a date from a calendar - Click the down arrow by the Expiration Date box and select the expiration date from the calendar. You can scroll through months and years with the arrows at the top of the calendar. For detailed information,see Using Date Pickers.

      For information about setting a new expiration date in an existing patron record, see Updating Patron Registration Check Dates.

    14. +
    15. (Optional) If you entered a preferred name for the patron, enter the patron's legal name in the Name on Identification section.
    16. +

      If you provide both preferred and legal names, Polaris uses the Name on Identification section for collection agency reporting.

      +

      Don't use the fields in the Name on Identification section to record anything other than the patron's legal name.

      +
    17. If the patron wants to use their legal name on print and phone notices, select Use for print / phone notices.
    18. +
    19. Complete the patron record by doing these procedures: +
    20. +
    21. Select File > Save to save the record. + +
      • The Duplicate Patrons dialog box may appear. It lists the potential duplicate patron records, if any are found. To view more information about a listed record, right-click it and select Open from the context menu. The selected record appears in the Patron Registration workform. If you find a duplicate, click Cancel on the dialog box to stop saving the new record. Otherwise, click Continue to continue saving the record. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.

      Note:
      Certain menu options and toolbar buttons may be unavailable until you save the record. You do not need to close the record and re-open it. Select File > Save or click the Save button.

      • The Patron Registration Fee dialog box may appear if the patron code requires a registration fee (see Registration Fees). You have the following options for handling the fee: +
        • Pay - You must have the permission Fines: Pay fines at circ to use this option. If you have the required permission, the Pay dialog box opens. Payment methods can include credit card payments if your branch has implemented these. The patron can make partial payments. If a patron partially pays a fee, Polaris places a block on the patron account (see Working with Blocks (Stops)). If you selected the option to print a receipt, a receipt prints. +

          Note:
          The Print Receipt option is selected by default. Receipts are printed using the printer and driver set up for the Check Out workform printer. You are not required to check any specific receipt type on the Check-out options dialog box, butyou must define the printer and driver. See Set the workstation to print receipts and slips. The specific information printed is that selected for fine receipts in Polaris Administration with the Patron Services parameter Fine receipt options. See Set fine receipt options.

        • Waive - You must have the permission Fines: Waive fines at circ to use this option. Polaris records a waive transaction for the patron, and a receipt prints, if you selected the receipt option.

        • Charge - Polaris writes the charge to the patron account. The charge reason is listed as Registration fee and Polaris places a block on the patron account (see Working with Blocks (Stops)). For more information about resolving charges on the patron account, see Processing Charges and Payments.

    22. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Barcode formats - Polaris can be set to distinguish between patron and item barcodes. If you input a barcode that is the incorrect type or format for the field, Polaris displays a warning message. You need permission to continue to save the record with an invalid barcode. For information on defining barcodes, setting Polaris to use significant digits in patron barcodes, and permission to save records with invalid barcodes, see See Defining Barcode Formats.
    • +
    • Scan driver’s license - California libraries with the appropriate Polaris license can scan a new patron’s driver’s license to enter basic information in a new patron record. See Scan driver’s license to enter patron information.
    • +
    • Patron photos - If your library includes photos in patron records, see Working with Patron Photos.
    • +
    • Course instructors - If your library uses course reserve functions, and the new patron is an instructor for a course, you can link the patron record to the course. See Add instructors to a course reserve record. When the patron is linked to a course record, the Instructor box is automatically checked on the Patron Registration workform.
    • +
    • Express registration - You can register a new patron quickly from the Check Out workform. See Express-register a new patron at check-out.
    • +
    • Registration reminder messages - Your library can send e-mail notices to prompt patrons to renew their registrations or verify their registration information See Reminder Notices.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_and_edit_patron_associations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_and_edit_patron_associations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87e99293 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_and_edit_patron_associations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create, Edit, and Delete Patron Associations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create, Edit, and Delete Patron Associations

    +

    To create and edit an association between patron records:

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Associations or click AssocBtn.gif to display the Associations view.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click pAddAssocIcon.gif or press CTRL+A to display the Add Associations dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + pAddAssocDlg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter the barcode of the patron with whom you want to create an association, using one of these methods:
      • Scan the barcode from the patron’s library card, or type the barcode in the Associated Patron(s) box, and press ENTER.
      • If you do not have the patron’s library card, click Find to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the patron’s record. Right-click the record in the results list and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The patron’s barcode appears in the Associated Patron(s) box.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to add more associations to the record, repeat the previous step until all the patron barcodes have been entered.
    2. +
    3. If you want to enter a note, type the text in the Note box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    Make sure that your note is clear, because the same text appears on both records. For example, “Mother” is an ambiguous note because it appears on both the parent’s record and the child’s record. “Jane Patron is the mother” is a clearer note. If you are creating multiple associations at the same time, the same note is added to all the associations.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Block me if these patron records are blocked if you want to block this record at checkout or renewal when any of the associated records are blocked. The “me” in “Block me” refers to the record you have open and are adding the associations to.
    2. +
    3. Note:
      If you want the block to work both ways - that is, Patron A is blocked when Patron B is blocked, and Patron B is blocked when Patron A is blocked - set up the association with Patron B from Patron A’s record and check Block me as described here. Then open Patron B’s record, select Patron A in the Associations list, and click AssocEditicon.gif to edit the association with Patron A, checking Block me.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Allow me to pick up holds for these patrons if you want the primary patron to be able to pick up and check out items with holds placed by the associated patron.
    6. +
    7. Click OK to save your settings.
    8. +
    +

    The Associations view appears with the additional patrons in the Associations list. The association with this record appears in the Associations view of all the patron records you added as associations. When a patron record has associated records, the Associations view icon on the Patron Status workform changes from a gray background to yellow. If the patron has a blocking relationship with any of the associated patron records, this is noted in the Block Me column. If the patron is allowed to pick up held items for the associated patron, a Yes is displayed in the Allow Me column.

    +
      +
    1. To edit a patron association, select the associated patron in the list, and click pEditAssocIcon.gif (or press CTRL+E) to display the Edit Association dialog box. You can edit any text in the Note box, and/or change the Block me or Allow me setting. If you edit the note, your changes appears in the Associations view of both the primary and associated patron records.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To check an associated patron’s blocks from the Patron Status workform, select Tools, Check Associated Patron Blocks.
    2. +
    +

    A dialog box displays a list of blocks on the associated patron records. You can double-click any block to open the appropriate Patron Status workform view for the associated patron record.

    +
      +
    1. To delete an association, select the patron association or associations that you want to delete in the Associations list, and click pDelAssocIcon.gif (or press CTRL+D). The association no longer appears in the Associations list. When you delete an association, you are deleting the relationship between the two records, not the records themselves.
    2. +
    +

    +

    Note:
    The standard Polaris report Associated Patron Groups lists all patron records that are linked in associations. In the Polaris Reports Manager, select Public Services, Patron Services to access the report. See Using Polaris Standard Reports.

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_or_edit_a_patron_status_note.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_or_edit_a_patron_status_note.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78fc685b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Create_or_edit_a_patron_status_note.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create or Edit a Patron Status Note + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create or Edit a Patron Status Note

    +

    You can create, edit, and delete notes for a patron’s account through the Patron Status workform - Notes view. You can create non-blocking or blocking notes. Non-blocking notes do not block circulation or hold requests. Blocking notes block a patron at normal check-out or renewal. The text of the note does not appear in the PAC.

    +

    To create or edit a note on a patron record:

    +

    Note:
    Blocking notes do not affect offline circulation, Polaris ExpressCheck circulation, SIP/NCIP circulation, or renewal from PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform using one of these methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • If the Patron Registration workform is open, select Links, Patron Status or press F9.
    • +
    • From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Circulation, Patron Status to find the record. See Find patron services and related records.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select View, Notes or click NotesBtn.gif to display the Notes view.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type and edit text in the Non-blocking or Blocking Notes box. (To start a new line, press Enter.)
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save or click the Save button. The status bar indicates that the note has been saved.
    4. +
    +

    When a patron record has a blocking note, the Patron Status workform - General view lists Patron has notes in the Block Description list, and the Notes view icon is red. (If the patron has only non-blocking notes or messages, the icon is yellow; if there are no notes, it is blue.)

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Deleting notes - To delete patron status notes, display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Notes view, select the text and press the DELETE or BACKSPACE key.
    • +
    • Posting patron messages - The Patron Status workform - Notes view also provides options for posting messages to the patron account. The patron can read the messages in the PAC patron account. See Posting Patron Messages.
    • +
    • Blocks at circulation - See Working with Blocks (Stops).
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_Patron_Mailing_Labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_Patron_Mailing_Labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54ac4021 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_Patron_Mailing_Labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Patron Mailing Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Patron Mailing Labels

    +

    With the Polaris Mailing Label Manager you can print patron mailing labels on Avery® 5161, Avery 5163, or Avery 5262 sheet labels, or export the addresses to another application, such as a word-processing application with mail merge or a shipping label application. The Mailing Label Manager collects the addresses as a set that you can save and export as a .csv file, the comma-delimited format accepted by most mail-merge and label programs.

    +

    The Mailing Label Manager uses dynamic font sizing to print Avery sheet labels. By default, labels are printed in 14 point Arial. If a label contains a line with more than 28 characters, the font size is automatically changed to 10 points, which allows approximately 40 characters per line.

    +

    When the 10-point font is used and a line still exceeds about 40 characters, the following rules are applied:

    +
      +
    • The city/state/Zip code line is never truncated.
    • +
    • Avery 5161 (4” x 1”) - Street 1 may use two lines. Other lines may be truncated.
    • +
    • Avery 5262 (4” x 1.33”) - Street 1 and Name may use two lines. Other lines may be truncated.
    • +
    • Avery 5163 (4” x 2”) - All fields may use 2 lines.
    • +
    +

    To create a set of patron addresses, then print or export the set for mailing labels:

    +
      +
    1. Add patron addresses to the address set using one of these methods: + +
      • On the Patron Registration workform - Addresses View, select the address and click Mailing Label(or right-click the address and select Mailing Label from the context menu).
      • On the Patron Status workform, select Tools, Add to Mailing Labels.
      • In a Find Tool results list of patron records, right-click the patron line item and select Add to Mailing Labels from the context menu.
      • In the Patron Record Set workform, right-click the patron line item and select Add to Mailing Labels from the context menu. To add all the patrons in the record set, select Edit, Select All or press CTRL+A. Then right-click in the list of patron records and select Add to Mailing Labels from the context menu. For more information about record sets, see Creating and Using Record Sets.

      If a patron record contains multiple addresses, the Patron Addresses dialog box appears. Select the address in the list and click OK.

      Note:
      You can also add addresses to the set from the Mailing Label Manager workform. See step 3.

      If the patron and address are already entered in the Mailing Label Manager, a message asks if you would like to produce more than one label for this patron and address. If you click Yes, the Change Mailing Label Count dialog box opens and you can set the number of labels to produce.

      The status bar displays the message Patron address added to mailing label manager.

    2. +
    3. On the Polaris Shortcut bar, select Utilities, Mailing Label Manager. + +

      The Mailing Label Manager workform opens. Existing entries are sorted by last name. New entries are placed at the bottom of the list, but the list is resorted when you close and re-open the workform.

    4. To add an address to the address set, follow these steps: +
      1. Click pMailFind.gif on the toolbar, and use the Find Tool to search for the patron record.
      2. Right-click the record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.
    5. If the record contains only one address, the address is added to the set. If the record contains multiple addresses, the Patron Addresses dialog box appears. Select the address in the list and click OK.

      If the patron and address are already entered in the Mailing Label Manager, a message asks if you would like to produce more than one label for this patron and address. If you click Yes, the Change Mailing Label Count dialog box opens and you can set the number of labels to produce.

      +
    6. To remove an address from the address set, select the address in the list and click pMailDel.gif on the toolbar.
    7. +
    8. To change the number of labels to produce for a patron and address, follow these steps: + +
      1. Right-click the patron address and select Change number of labels.

      The Change Mailing Label Count dialog box opens.

      1. Set the number of labels and click OK. The No. of Labels column is updated, and the indicated number of labels will be produced for this patron and address after you save your changes.
    9. +
    10. To print the address set on labels, follow these steps: + +

      Important:
      If you updated the number of labels to produce for a patron, you must click the Save icon SaveBtn00020.gif before printing the labels.

      1. Load the appropriate label stock in your default workstation printer.
      2. Select File > Print from the Mailing Label Manager menu bar, or click the print icon PrintButn.gif on the toolbar. The Print Mailing Labels dialog box opens.
      3. Select the label type in the Mailing Label Template box: + + +
        • Avery 5161 labels are 4 inches x 1 inch.
        • Avery 5262 labels are 4 inches x 1.33 inches.
        • Avery 5163 labels are 4 inches x 2 inches.
      4. If necessary, type or select the number of labels to skip. (Use this option to print on a partially used sheet of labels.)
      5. Click OK. The labels are displayed as an Adobe .pdf file.
      6. Click the Adobe print icon. The Print dialog box opens.
      7. Set Page Scaling to None and select (check) Auto-Rotate and Center.
      8. Click OK. The labels are printed.
    11. +
    12. To export the address set for use by another application, follow these steps: + +
      1. Click pMailExport.gif on the toolbar. The Export Mailing Labels dialog box appears. +
      2. Browse to the location where you want to save the exported file. Choose a location that is available to your mailing label program.
      3. Type a filename for the file, leaving the Save as type box set to CSV files. +
      4. Click Save. The file is saved, and the Export Mailing Labels dialog box closes.
    13. +
    14. If you want to save the set in the Mailing Label Manager so that it is displayed the next time you open the workform, click the Save icon on the toolbar.
    15. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_and_Editing_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_and_Editing_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a6a3709 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Creating_and_Editing_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating and Editing Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating and Editing Patron Records

    +

    At a minimum, you must fill in the following Patron Record workform fields to create and save a patron record:

    +
      +
    • Barcode
    • +
    • Last name
    • +
    • First name
    • +
    +

    Additionally, the following fields will be filled in automatically if the appropriate defaults are determined within the System Administration settings:

    +
      +
    • Registered at
    • +
    • Patron code
    • +
    • Expiration term/date
    • +
    • Address check term/date
    • +
    +

    Your library may require additional fields, and may set certain default values that allow you to create patron records more quickly (see Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults). Required fields are displayed in bold type on the Patron Record workform.

    +

    In addition, before you begin registering patrons, it is useful to decide upon some conventions. Do you use initial capitals, or all capitals? Do you abbreviate words, such as road and street, or spell them out? Do you enter phone numbers by separating the area code with parentheses or with a hyphen? While your conventions do not affect the way Polaris processes patron information, they do affect the appearance of your indexes and reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Patron Codes

    +

    Patron codes help to define patron privileges and policies. One list of patron codes is used throughout the entire system. The Polaris administrator generates the list and sets the codes that are appropriate for your site. For more information on setting up codes, see Defining Patron Codes.

    +

    Registration Fees

    +

    Your library may charge a registration fee for specific patron codes. The fee is applied automatically at the time of registration or renewal, and the patron account is blocked until the charge is paid. If a fee has been defined for the patron code, the program displays a Registration Fee dialog box when the you select Save in a new patron record. The dialog box displays the amount of the fee and options to pay, waive, or charge the fee, as well as the option to print a receipt. For information about setting up registration fees, see Charging for Patron Registration.

    +

    Patron Passwords and User Names

    +

    To allow account access and requests through the PAC, a password must be specified on the Patron Registration workform. If a patron forgets the password, you replace the old password with a new one. (Keep in mind that passwords are case-sensitive.) You cannot see the password; only a series of asterisks appears in the Password box. For more information about setting a patron password and password format, see Add general data to a patron record.

    +

    The library may allow patrons to change their passwords online through the PAC or receive an e-mail message for forgotten passwords. To enable these features, see Set patron password and user name options. Using the same Administration control, the library can also specify an override password that staff members can use when patrons forget their account passwords.

    +

    Note:
    A step in the nightly Patron Processing SQL job can assign the last four digits of the patron’s primary telephone number (Phone 1) to the password field of the patron record if a password does not exist. This default password step is disabled at installation; if your library is interested in activating this feature, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    Your library may also allow patrons to enter user names instead of a barcode when logging in to use PAC functions such as viewing the patron account or placing a hold request (see Setting Patron Account Options). However, patron user names are not available to staff. Staff cannot assign them during patron registration, they are not searchable or available for reports, and they are not displayed in the patron record. Only patrons can create or change user names.

    +

    Note:
    Your library may allow users to log on to PAC using network credentials instead of the Polaris patron barcode or user name and password. For details, see Active Directory Log On in PAC.

    +

    User-Defined Fields in Patron Records

    +

    The patron record includes user-defined fields that are determined when Polaris is installed for your library system. (See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.) These fields can contain whatever additional data the library needs, such as the driver’s license number or parent/guardian name. Some or all may be required. All user-defined fields can be searched from the Polaris Find Tool. See Add general data to a patron record.

    +

    Patron Custom Data Fields in Patron Records

    +

    The patron record can include patron custom data fields (PCDFs) that are defined for your library system and then filtered at the library or branch level. Patron custom fields can be set up with default values or as required fields. See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

    +

    Duplicate Detection

    +

    Duplicate detection ensures that patron barcode numbers are unique and that each patron is registered only once. When you attempt to save the patron record, it is automatically checked for duplicate barcodes. If the barcode is a duplicate, you have the option of either entering a new barcode or cancelling the registration.

    +

    After checking the barcode, the patron’s full name (first, middle, and last) and birth date (if present) are checked for duplicates. Your library may specify additional fields for patron duplicate detection. See Setting Patron Duplicate Detection. If any possible duplicate records exist, they are displayed in the Duplicate Patrons dialog box. To view more information about a record, right-click it and select Open from the context menu. The patron’s record appears in the Patron Registration workform. You can continue with the registration or cancel it.

    +

    Note:
    To conserve system resources, the Duplicate Patrons list is limited to 500 entries per duplicate detection criterion. For example, if 1,000 patrons have the same e-mail address and 30 have the same phone number, 530 possible duplicate records are listed.

    +

    Patron Registration from the PAC

    +

    Your library may allow patrons to self-register or update their account information through the PAC. For a new account, the patron provides basic information online, and receives a temporary barcode to use for placing requests. A new patron record is created with a Verify Patron block, and designated library staff members receive an e-mail message that the patron has self-registered. The same process applies to account updates from the PAC.

    +

    As part of the PAC registration process, the patron selects a home branch. The system uses the default settings for that branch to create the new patron registration. If the default patron code set for PAC registration is a chargeable code, the program displays a message to the patron. The default message is Your library account will be charged a [$] registration fee. Do you want to continue? If the patron chooses to continue, the fee is charged to the patron account and the Patron Registration Fee block is placed on the record. See Registration Fees.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Delete_a_patron_record_manually.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Delete_a_patron_record_manually.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a80bbb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Delete_a_patron_record_manually.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete a Patron Record Manually + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Patron Record Manually

    +

    To remove a patron record from the Polaris database permanently:

    +

    Note:
    You need appropriate permissions for the patron’s registered branch to delete a patron record, because patron records are owned by the registered branch. For the list of permissions needed, Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Registration workform or Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    You can delete a patron record from the Find Tool results list. Right-click the record, and select Delete from the context menu. You can also delete a patron record from the Record Set workform. Select the record, then select Tools, Delete.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Delete. A message asks if you are sure you want to permanently delete the patron record.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    Doing the next step erases the barcode, password, name, address, e-mail address, and user-defined fields from the patron record, and the record does not appear in Find Tool search results; then it is permanently deleted during nightly processing. The record cannot be recovered.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the record. The workform closes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Deleting multiple patron records - If you have selected multiple patron records for deletion (for example, from a Find Tool results list), the confirmation message includes options for suppressing multiple warning messages regarding breakable and unbreakable links and other stopping conditions.
      If you have the permission Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple patron records, you can clear the Warn me about breakable links checkbox.
      If you have the permission Suppress warnings for unbreakable links, and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple patron records, you can clear the Warn me about unbreakable links and other stopping conditions checkbox. If you select this option, all the records with unbreakable links are skipped and are not deleted, but you do not receive a warning.
    • +
    +

    + MultiObjectDelete.gif +

    +
      +
    • Links - The Patron Record Links dialog box may appear during the deletion process if you are deleting a single record or if you do not suppress warning messages for multiple records. Click Continue Deleting to continue deleting the patron record, despite the links. Click Cancel Deletion to stop deleting the patron record. If the dialog box lists certain links as “unbreakable,” you cannot override them, and you must cancel the deletion. See Blocks to Deleting Records.
    • +
    • Polaris Fusion - Some information related to patron purchases of digital material is retained if your library has Polaris Fusion and you accept credit card payments through PayPal Payflow Pro. If the patron record is deleted for a patron who has been granted access and has a Fusion shopping cart, the information related to Polaris Fusion is still available for reporting purposes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Deleting_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Deleting_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aaff8318 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Deleting_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deleting Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting Patron Records

    +

    When you delete a patron record, you permanently remove the record from the Polaris database. (A deleted record cannot be recovered.) Patron records can be deleted manually or automatically, as well as individually or as a group. Automatic deletion occurs overnight, when the system finds and deletes patron records that have been inactive for a period of time as specified by your library in Polaris Administration. See Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records. Manual deletions require the appropriate permissions for the patron’s registered branch. See Circulation and Patron Services Workflow Permissions.

    +

    Important: +
    If you do not want a patron record to be deleted under any circumstances, select the Do not delete patron record check box on the Patron Registration workform - General view.

    +

    Blocks to Deleting Records

    +

    A patron record may be blocked from deletion under certain conditions. Some blocks occur because a condition defined in Polaris Administration is met. Set blocks for patron record deletion. Other blocks are due to circulation processes, linked records, and system-assigned blocks. When you attempt to delete a patron record, detailed messages inform you if there are blocks to deletion.

    +

    You can override these types of blocks if you have the permission Patron registration: Override blocks to delete for the patron’s registered branch:

    +
      +
    • Patron record - Library assigned block, free text block, patron note, associated patron records, link to a routing list, verify patron data block
    • +
    • Patron account - Recent charge, amount due, credit, deposit
    • +
    +

    Some types of blocks prevent record deletion until the blocking condition is corrected. For example, if you attempt to delete a patron record that is associated with another patron record, a message is displayed, but you can continue to delete the record. However, if you attempt to delete a patron record that is linked to a hold request with a Held or Shipped status or an interlibrary loan request with a Received status, you must cancel the record deletion.

    +

    See also: Delete a Patron Record Manually.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merge_patron_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merge_patron_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74b2e44e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merge_patron_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Merge Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Merge Patron Records

    +

    To merge two patron records:

    +

    Note: +
    You need the system-level Circulation permission Merge patrons: Allow to do this procedure, as well as permission to modify patron records for the patron’s registered branch in the primary record.

    +
      +
    1. Display the primary patron record (the record you want to keep) in the Patron Registration workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. On the Patron Registration workform, select Tools, Merge with Patron. The Patron Merge dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Click Select patron to delete. The Polaris Find Tool opens.
    6. +
    7. Search for the secondary patron record. This is the record that contains the information you want to transfer to the primary record. When the merge is complete, the secondary record will be deleted.
    8. +
    9. In the Find Tool results list, right-click the secondary patron record and choose Select from the context menu.
    10. +
    +

    Note: +
    If the selected record cannot be merged, a message appears. See Blocks to Merging Records for details.

    +

    Tip: +
    When the secondary record information is displayed in the Patron Merge dialog box, you can click Open to view the record.

    +

    If there are no blocks to merging the records, the Find Tool closes. Information from the record you selected is listed in the secondary patron record section of the Patron Merge dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Click Merge to merge the records. The secondary patron record is deleted, and information is transferred to the primary record. See Effects on Patron Record Information for details.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save or click the Save button to save the primary record.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merging_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merging_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d9ce317 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Merging_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + + + + Merging Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Merging Patron Records

    +

    Two records may exist for the same patron. For example, a patron may have a record under a new name but still have a record under a former name. You can merge the patron records to resolve the issue.

    +

    Note: +
    You need the system-level Circulation permission Merge patrons: Allow to merge patron records, a job typically handled by a supervisor, as well as permission to modify patron records for the patron’s registered branch in the primary record.

    +

    To merge the records, you find and open the primary record (the record that will retain the data) and the secondary record to be merged with the primary record. For instructions, see Merge Patron Records.

    +

    The records can belong to different registration branches. The program combines information from both records. Patron registration information (patron code, registered branch, address, notification options, stat class, UDF values, and so forth) from the primary record is retained. Patron transaction summary information (such as items out, fines, holds, associations) is copied from the secondary record to the primary record. For details, see Effects on Patron Record Information. When the records are merged, the secondary record is deleted. The date of the merge and the barcode from the deleted record appear on the About tabbed page of the primary record’s property sheet.

    +

    Blocks to Merging Records

    +

    Certain conditions block the merge:

    +
      +
    • The Do not delete option is checked in the secondary record.
    • +
    • The primary or secondary record has a collection agency block.
    • +
    • The secondary record has Held or Shipped hold requests. The message indicates that the holds must be cleared before merging.
    • +
    • The secondary record has ILL requests of any status. The message indicates that the requests must be cleared before merging.
    • +
    • The secondary record is linked to a course reserve record. The message indicates that the patron record must be removed from all linked courses.
    • +
    +

    Effects on Patron Record Information

    +

    When the merge is successful, the records are affected as follows:

    +
      +
    • Registration Data - The primary record’s registration data (address, photo, and UDF values) remain. The secondary record’s exemptions, preferences, photo, and UDF values are not copied to the merged record.
    • +
    • Barcode - The patron barcode in the primary record does not change. The secondary record barcode appears in the Former barcode field of the primary record.
    • +
    • Patron Code - The patron code in the primary record does not change.
    • +
    • Last Activity Date - The most recent Last Activity Date, regardless of record, is used in the merged record. The Last Activity Date is updated by the following activities:
      • Payments made within the staff client - All methods of payment (cash, check, or credit card) update the last activity date.
      • Credit card payments made via third party software - When a payment is taken, including payments made via CIP, the last activity date is updated on the patron record. If the payment process fails or the payment is not accepted, the date will not be updated.
      • Waives - If a charge was waived on the patron account, the date will be updated.
    • +
    • Payments made from ExpressCheck, PAC, and Mobile PAC - When the patron logs in to ExpressCheck, PAC, or Mobile PAC and makes a payment, the last activity date is updated.
    • +
    • Date of Original Registration - The earliest Date of Original Registration, regardless of record, is used in the merged record.
    • +
    • YTD and Lifetime Use - The YTD use and lifetime use counts of the secondary record are added to the counts for the primary record.
    • +
    • Blocks-
      • If the secondary record has a Verify Patron Data block, it is ignored. If the primary record has a Verify Patron Data block, the block is retained. The block displays when the merged record is saved.
      • Free text blocks - All free text blocks are copied from the secondary record to the primary record.
      • Library-assigned blocks are copied from the secondary record to the primary record. If there are duplicates, the blocks in the primary record are retained.
    • +
    • +

      Items Out - Copied to the primary record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    In the linked item records, the Current borrower field is updated to the primary record, and the Last borrower field is updated to the secondary record. All other item data remains unchanged.

    +
      +
    • Notice history - The secondary notice history is added to the primary record.
    • +
    • Claimed items - The secondary claimed item information is added to the primary record, and the current claim and/or lifetime claim count is updated in the primary record.
    • +
    • Lost items - The secondary lost item information is added to the primary record, and the current lost item count is updated.
    • +
    • Patron account - The secondary record’s current charges, payments, and credit transactions are copied to the primary record, and the total charge, payment, and credit amounts are updated. All account summary transactions are also copied.
    • +
    • Hold requests - If the secondary record has any attached hold requests with a status of Active, Inactive, Pending, Cancelled, or Not-supplied, the hold request is updated with the primary patron information, and the requests are added to the Holds view of the primary patron record. The requests maintain their queue positions, but the patron record is linked to the request changes to the primary record.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If there are duplicate Inactive, Active, or Pending hold requests, the older one is retained and the other is cancelled. A note is added to the cancelled request.

    +
      +
    • Associations - The primary record retains any associations it already has, but is not affected by any associations in the secondary record.
    • +
    • Patron messages - Messages attached to the secondary record are not copied to the primary record.
    • +
    • Reading history - The secondary reading history and any ratings (from Outreach Services patrons) are copied to the primary record, and the items are sorted by check-out date. Duplicate titles are not deleted.
    • +
    • Outreach services (ORS) - ORS information from the secondary record (profile, delivery options, saved selection or pick lists, notes) is not copied to the primary record. If the Outreach Services option is checked in the secondary record, a message advises that the ORS profile of the secondary record will be lost. You can continue or cancel the merge.
    • +
    • Notes - Secondary blocking and non-blocking notes are copied to the primary record. A blank line separates the copied notes and any existing notes in the primary record. The system adds the following note to the top of the primary record’s Non-blocking note field: Patron record was merged with [barcode], on [date]. The secondary record has been deleted.
    • +
    • Notices - Overdue notices initiated for the secondary record will be sent to the primary record in sequence. For example, if the secondary record received a first overdue notice before the merge, the primary record will receive the second overdue notice after the merge. If the secondary record exceeded the fine notice or collection agency threshold before the merge, the primary record will receive the notice after the merge.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If a hold request was associated with the secondary record and trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for the secondary record, the notice will go to the secondary record because the records cannot be merged in this case. See Blocks to Merging Records.

    +
      +
    • Mailing labels - If the secondary name and address are stored in the Mailing Label Manager, they are removed after the merge.
    • +
    • Record sets - If the secondary record is a member of a record set, the record is removed from the record set after the merge. The primary record does not become a member of the record set.
    • +
    • Route lists - Secondary membership is copied to the primary record.
    • +
    • Polaris Fusionaccess and shopping carts - If your library offers Polaris Fusion e-commerce (the ability to purchase digital materials from the PAC with a credit card) and the secondary patron record has been granted access and has a shopping cart, the access permission and shopping cart are copied to the primary patron record.
    • +
    +

    Effects on the Transactions Database

    +

    When records are merged, a Modify Patron record transaction is created for the primary record. Older transactions involving the secondary record are not modified, so they are still available for reporting.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Associations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Associations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9161e326 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Associations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Associations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Associations

    +

    You can create associations between two or more patron records so that when one record is open, all records associated with it are conveniently accessible. For example, you might associate all members of a family, so when checking out items to parents, you can quickly renew items or pay fines for their children.

    +

    If record A is associated with records B and C, then records B and C are automatically associated with record A, but records B and C are not automatically associated with each other. However, you can manually associate records B and C. Associated patron records remain individual records. If a notice is generated for a single patron record, notices are not generated for associated records. For hold requests, items trap for the patron who made the request. You can block a patron from checkout or renewal if an associated patron record is blocked. You can also allow patrons to pick up items held for their associated patrons. Defaults for these settings are defined in Polaris Administration. Setting Options for Associated Patrons.

    +

    From a patron record, you can access associated records in the following ways:

    +
      +
    • Patron Registration workform - Select Links, Associations. If there is one associated record, the record opens. If there are more than one, a list opens. You can work with the associated records directly from the list.
    • +
    • Patron Status workform - Associations view - Right-click an associated patron record. From the context menu, you can open the record or do circulation functions and other activities for the associated patron.
    • +
    • Find Tool results list - Right-click a patron in the results list and select Links, Associations from the context menu. If there is one associated record, the record opens. If there are more than one, a list opens. You can work with the associated records directly from the list.
    • +
    +

    Associated Patron Groups Report

    +

    The toolbar report Associated Patron Groups lists all patron records that are linked in associations (whether or not these are blocking relationships). In the Polaris Reports Manager, select Public Services, Patron Services to access the report. For details, see Using Polaris Standard Reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8f8984c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration

    +

    You can register patrons at any library location that has access to Polaris Patron Services. You can also register patrons offline, save the records, and upload the records to the online system or a system file. When you register a patron, you create a patron record that you can edit to reflect any changes to the account.

    +

    Note:
    To register a patron quickly at check-out, you can do an express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons.. See Express-register a new patron at check-out.

    +

    Your library may also allow patrons to set up new accounts through the PAC. In this case, you verify the new patron accounts before patrons can check out materials. See Resolve a Verify Patron block.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1005d75f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Patron_Registration_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration Reports

    +

    Patron Services reports can help you gather statistics about the patrons registered in your system and at specific branches. For example, you can report how many patrons registered during a specific time period at a specific branch. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Patron Services in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Posting_Patron_Messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Posting_Patron_Messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3b62165 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Posting_Patron_Messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Posting Patron Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Posting Patron Messages

    +

    With the appropriate permissions, you can post messages to specific patron accounts and later modify or delete the messages. (Your library may also set an automatic expiration period for them.) You can post messages from the Patron Registration workform (select Tools, Post Message), and you can post and manage them from the Patron Status workform - Notes view.

    +

    Patrons can read and delete their messages online from the PAC patron account. When a patron marks a message as read, the status of the message is also updated in the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and when a patron deletes a message, the message is also deleted from the Patron Status workform - Notes view.

    +

    Note:
    Patrons can also view their messages in the patron account on SIP self-check workstations if the SIP provider supports this feature. However, the messages cannot be marked as read or deleted.

    +

    If a patron has unread messages, an alert message appears in the Patron Blocks dialog box during check-out. You can continue the check-out operation or cancel it, and you can also click the block text to open the Patron Status workform - Notes view. The alert message does not place any blocks on patron activity in the PAC.

    +

    Your library sets up predefined messages in Polaris Administration, translates them into Polaris PowerPAC licensed languages if necessary, and sets an automatic expiration period for them. For more information, Setting Up Patron Messages.

    +

    To post and manage messages in patron records:

    +

    Note: +
    You need the system-level Circulation permission Post patron message: Allow to post and modify messages in a patron account. You need the permission Delete patron message: Allow to delete messages.

    +
      +
    1. Find and open the patron record in the Patron Registration workform or Patron Status workform - Notes view. See Finding Patron Records.
    2. +
    3. To open the message dialog box, use one of these methods:
      • To post a message from the Patron Registration workform, select Tools, Post Message.
      • To post a message from the Patron Status workform - Notes view, click Add Message in the message area of this view.
    4. +
    +

    The Patron Message dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. To post a message, use one of these methods:
      • Select a Library-assigned message from the drop-down list. The message choices are those set in Polaris Administration for your log-on branch.
      • Select Free text and type a message in the free text box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The dialog box closes and the message is added to the Message Text column. The Patron Has Read column indicates whether the patron has marked the message as read in the PAC patron account.

    +

    When the patron account has a message, the Notes icon on the Patron Status workform view bar is yellow (as for non-blocking notes). If the patron has both blocking notes and messages, the color is red. The blocking note color takes precedence.

    +
      +
    1. To modify a message, select the message in the messages list and click Modify Message. The Patron Message dialog box opens.
      • If you selected a library-assigned message, you can select a different message from the drop-down list. Then click OK.
      • If you selected a free-text message, you can edit the text. Then click OK.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To delete a message or multiple messages, select them in the messages list and click Delete Message. A confirmation message appears. Click Yes to delete the message or No to keep it.
    2. +
    3.  Select File | Save to save your changes to the patron record.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • View message properties - Right-click the message in the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialog box lists the creator’s user name, workstation, branch, and the creation date and time. If the message has been modified, the modifier and modification date and time are listed.
    • +
    • Patrons with Messages Report - This report provides a snapshot of read and unread messages currently in patron accounts. See Patron Registration Reports.
    • +
    • Merging patron records - If patron records are merged, messages attached to the secondary (losing) patron record are not copied to the primary record. See Merging Patron Records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Remove_items_from_patrons_reading_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Remove_items_from_patrons_reading_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47d6fe9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Remove_items_from_patrons_reading_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remove Items from a Patron’s Reading History + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove Items from a Patron’s Reading History

    +

    These separate Circulation permissions are necessary to remove individual items from the reading histories of non-outreach services patrons and outreach services patrons respectively:

    +
      +
    • Reading history: Remove non-ORS patron history entries: Allow +
    • +
    • Reading history: Remove ORS patron history entries: Allow +
    • +
    +

    You also need the permission Patron Status: Modify reader services.

    +

    To remove individual items from a patron’s reading history:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Patron Status to find and open the patron’s record. See Find patron services and related records. The Patron Status workform - General view appears.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Reader Services or click ReaderServBtn00018.gif to display the Reader Services view. The items that the patron has checked out appear in the Reading History list.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the title or titles in the Reading History list, and select Remove from reading history from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    When an item is removed from the reading history of an outreach services patron, the title will be eligible to reappear on the patron’s selection list. At checkout, the message that warns you when the outreach services patron has already had the title does not appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save. The items are no longer displayed in the Patron Status workform or the PAC patron account.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Reading histories in the PAC patron account - Your library may also allow patrons to view their reading histories from the PAC and start and stop the recording their histories. In Polaris Administration, the Patron Service profile Patron can enable/disable reading history controls this feature. A separate PAC profile, Patron can remove reading history, allows patrons to remove individual items from their histories.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Scan_drivers_license_enter_patron_info.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Scan_drivers_license_enter_patron_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dfa55f2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Scan_drivers_license_enter_patron_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Scan Driver’s License to Enter Patron Information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Scan Driver’s License to Enter Patron Information

    +

    California libraries with the appropriate Polaris license can scan a new patron’s driver’s license to enter basic information in a new patron record. This feature requires a free-text user-defined field (UDF) in the patron record designated for the driver’s license number. For details, Scanning a Driver’s License for Patron Registration.

    +

    Note: +
    To avoid problems with patron name and address formatting, you must configure the scanner to run in a mode that returns the line feed character which indicates the end of each field in the driver's license. For the Gryphon 44XX scanner, the correct mode is USB Alternate Keyboard. The image for reconfiguring the Gryphon 44XX scanner is included in the scanner user guide. If you need assistance, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    To scan a California driver’s license for new patron registration:

    +

    Note:
    You can also find and open an existing patron record. When the driver’s license is scanned, existing data is overwritten by the driver’s license data. Driver’s license address information overwrites the Home address in the patron record.

    +
    Tips:
    Other methods of creating a new patron record:
    • From the Find Tool results list, right-click a patron record and select Create Patron from the context menu. See Finding Patron Records. The new patron registration workform opens. Go to step 3 below.

    • On the Patron Registration workform for an existing record, select File > New, then clear or copy the current workform. Then go to step 3 below. Create a New Record from a Workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, click the New button, or press CTRL+N. The New dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Patron Record in the Objects box, and click OK. The Addresses view of the Patron Registration workform opens.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The menu option, icon, and shortcut key combination are not available if the Drivers License Scan Facility license is not active.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Scan Driver’s License, click DriverIcon.gif on the toolbar, or press CTRL+L. The License Scan message box opens.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Scan the 2D barcode on the driver’s license with the message box open, then close the message box. The following driver’s license data is entered in the patron record:
      • Name (Last, First Middle)
      • Street address (up to two lines)
      • City
      • State
      • Postal code
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The address information is entered in the Home address fields in the Patron Registration workform.

    +
    +
      +
    • Birth date
    • +
    • License number (entered in the designated user-defined field)
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the data cannot be scanned properly (for example, the barcode image is worn), a message is displayed and no data is entered in the patron record. You can continue to register the patron by filling in the required information manually.

    +
      +
    1. Enter any additional data as needed, and save the record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Search_for_patron_records_by_PCDF.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Search_for_patron_records_by_PCDF.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c51bd2a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Search_for_patron_records_by_PCDF.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Search for Patron Records by PCDF + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search for Patron Records by PCDF

    +

    To search for patron records by PCDF:

    +
      +
    1. Select Patron Services, Patron Records. The Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Select the PCDF in the Search by or Limit by box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    PCDFs are available in the Search by and Limit by lists, with the exception of PCDFs that have been defined as Boolean (with Yes or No choices). These PCDFs appear only in the Limit by list.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the value if you are searching for a record with a specific value or enter an asterisk to find all patrons with a value in this PCDF. The patron records meeting your search criteria are listed in the search results.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Set_the_address_update_term.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Set_the_address_update_term.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09a7949c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Set_the_address_update_term.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Address Update Term + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Address Update Term

    +

    Use one of the following methods to set the address update term:

    +
      +
    • Set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today) - Type a number in the first Address Check Term box, and select months or years in the second Term box. The exact date is automatically calculated and appears in the Address Check Date box.
    • +
    • Type a specific date - Type the address check date in the format shown in the Date box. You can use the right arrow key to go from segment to segment of the date.
    • +
    • Select a date from a calendar - Click the down arrow by the Date box and select the expiration date from the calendar.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    +
      +
    • Updating the address check term - For information about setting a new address check term, see Updating Patron Registration Check Dates.
    • +
    • Editing an address - To edit an address, for example when a patron moves, you use the same Add/Edit Address dialog box that you use to create addresses. Select the address in the Patron Registration workform - Addresses view, and click Edit...., or right-click the address and select Edit from the context menu.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You must have the permission Patron registration: Modify postal address fields to enter an entirely new city/state/country/postal code combination. Without this permission, you can only select an existing combination. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

    +
      +
    • Deleting an address - To remove an address, such as when a patron no longer uses a business address, select the address in the Patron Registration workform - Addresses view, and click Remove. Or right-click the address and select Remove from the context menu.
    • +
    • Patron updates from PAC - Your library may allow patrons to change their own addresses, as well as other information in their records, through Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.  In this case, a staff member reviews the changes. See Resolve a Verify Patron block.
    • +
    • Mailing labels - You can print patron mailing labels or export patron addresses to use in another application. See Creating Patron Mailing Labels.
    • +
    • Scan driver’s license - California libraries with the appropriate Polaris license can scan a new patron’s driver’s license to enter basic information in a new patron record. See Scan driver’s license to enter patron information.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Start_patrons_reading_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Start_patrons_reading_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..387a3566 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Start_patrons_reading_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Start a Patron’s Reading History + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Start a Patron’s Reading History

    +

    A new reading history begins with the next item checked out; it does not include items checked out in the past or items currently checked out. Also, items are not added to the reading history immediately upon check-out. The reading history is updated during overnight processing. To start a reading history for a patron.

    +

    Note:
    Your library must make the appropriate Polaris Administration settings for maintaining reading histories. See Working with Reading Histories.

    +
      +
    1. Select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record. See Find patron services and related records. The Patron Registration workform - Addresses view appears.
    2. +
    3. Select View, General to display the General view.
    4. +
    5. Select the Maintain reading list check box.
      • If the patron’s “registered at” branch has not enabled reading histories in Polaris Administration, this option is not available.
      • If the patron is an outreach services patron, this option is automatically selected. See Outreach Services Processing.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the record.
    2. +
    +

    The next item checked out is displayed on the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view, after overnight processing is run. See View a patron’s reading history.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Stop_clear_patrons_reading_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Stop_clear_patrons_reading_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff516718 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Stop_clear_patrons_reading_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Stop and Clear a Patron’s Reading History + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Stop and Clear a Patron’s Reading History

    +

    If you stop recording a patron’s reading history, the patron’s current reading history is cleared as well. You cannot archive a reading history. To stop recording a patron’s reading history and permanently clear the current history:

    +

    Note:
    The history is also cleared if the patron stops it from PAC.

    +

    Tip:
    From the Patron Status workform, press F9 to open the Patron Registration workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record. See Find patron services and related records. The Patron Registration workform - Addresses view appears.
    2. +
    3. Select View, General to display the General view.
    4. +
    5. Clear the Maintain reading list check box.
    6. +
    +

    Important:
    When you save the record, the patron’s reading history is deleted and cannot be recovered.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the record. The Reading History list is cleared from the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Reading histories are automatically kept for Outreach Services patrons. If your branch uses Outreach Services but has not enabled reading histories for non-Outreach Services patrons, when you remove a patron from outreach services by clearing the Outreach Services check box on the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view, the patron’s reading history will not be cleared. The history remains unless items are manually removed. See Remove items from a patron’s reading history.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Stop all reading histories (non-outreach services patrons) - See Setting Reading History Options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Updating_Address_and_Expiration_Term.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Updating_Address_and_Expiration_Term.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ede91c66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Updating_Address_and_Expiration_Term.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Updating Patron Registration Check Dates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Updating Patron Registration Check Dates

    +

    You can update the Address Check and Expiration dates for a patron record simultaneously from the Patron Registration workform. On the workform toolbar, select Tools, Update Check Dates, or press CTRL+U.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    The Update Check Dates option is not available on a Secured patron record.

    +

    A message box appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    When you click OK on the message box, the new dates are displayed in the appropriate fields on the Patron Registration workform. Save the record to confirm the updates. The new dates are based on the Patron Services parameter settings for the patron’s branch (Patron Registration OptionsGeneral Defaults tabbed page). See Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults.

    +

    You can also set new Address Check and Expiration dates separately in the Patron Registration workform. See the following topics:

    + +

    Your library may place a block on patron records where the address check term or expiration term has expired (see Add, select, and order patron block descriptions). When you update the address check date and/or expiration date and save the patron record, the address check and/or expiration date blocks are removed immediately.

    +

    Note: +
    The system process that removes the block looks for the exact block text specified in Polaris Administration (see Defining Patron Block Descriptions). If the Address Check or Expiration block text is missing from the Polaris Administration policy table or has changed since the block was placed on the patron record, the patron record will be blocked when one of these dates is in the past, but the block will never be removed by system processing and will need to be manually removed. See Delete a Patron Block.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Upload_an_existing_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Upload_an_existing_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..467cfcec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Upload_an_existing_photo_to_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Upload an Existing Photo to a Patron Record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Upload an Existing Photo to a Patron Record

    +

    You can use an existing .jpg or .bmp image file in the patron record instead of taking a new photo. The default location for existing image files is C:/Program Files/Polaris/[version]/Bin, but you can upload files from any location to which you have network access. The image file cannot be larger than one megabyte (MB).

    +

    To use an existing image:

    +
      +
    1. If the patron record is not already open, select Patron Services, Patron Records to find and open the patron’s record in the Patron Registration workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are registering a new patron, enter the required information and save the record. See Create a patron record. Then proceed to step 2.

    +
      +
    1. On the Patron Registration workform, select View, Photo, or click PhotoIcon00017.gif. The Patron Registration workform - Patron Photo view opens.
    2. +
    3. Click Launch Picture Edit. The Patron Photo dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Click Load Picture on the right side of the Patron Photo dialog box. A Windows Explorer dialog box opens.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Navigate to the image file location.
    2. +
    3. Select JPG or BMP in the Files of type box.
    4. +
    5. Select the file and click Open. The Windows Explorer dialog box closes, and the selected image appears on the right side of the Patron Photo dialog box.
    6. +
    7. Click Save Picture to save the picture in the patron record.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Use_PCDFs_in_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Use_PCDFs_in_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f32ddbba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Use_PCDFs_in_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Use PCDFs in the Patron Registration Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Use PCDFs in the Patron Registration Workform

    +

    To use patron custom data fields (PCDFs) in the Patron Registration workform:

    +

    Note: +
    PCDFs are defined in Polaris Administration. See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

    +
      +
    1. Select Patron Services > Patron Records and search for the patron record, or select File > New to add a new patron. The Patron Registration workform opens.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Custom Data or click notesicon.gif. The Patron Custom Data view opens. If patron data fields have been defined for the patron’s registered branch, the fields appear below the header information.
    4. +
    5. Enter information in the patron custom data fields as follows:
      • For “string” or text fields, enter up to 255 alphanumeric characters.
      • For check box or Boolean fields, check the box if the PCDF applies to the patron.
      • For a date field, select a date from the calendar.
    6. +
    7. Save the record.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/View_patron_reading_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/View_patron_reading_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..afc3166f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/View_patron_reading_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + View a Patron’s Reading History + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View a Patron’s Reading History

    +

    To view all the items in a patron’s reading history:

    +

    Note:
    Patrons may view their own reading histories by accessing their patron accounts in the PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Patron Status to find and open the patron’s record. See Find patron services and related records. The Patron Status workform - General view appears.
    2. +
    3. Select View, Reader Services or click ReaderServBtn.gif to display the Reader Services view.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +

    The items that the patron has checked out appear in the Reading History list, which can be quite long. The list is loaded in groups of 100 items as you scroll through it. To load the entire list at once, press CTRL+ALT+A.

    +

    Note:
    Outreach services options are available on this workform view only if your library’s Polaris system specifically includes outreach services. SeeOutreach Services Processing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Patron_Photos.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Patron_Photos.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2f7ffcef --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Patron_Photos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Patron Photos + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Patron Photos

    +

    Your library may include the patron’s photo in the patron record. Working in the Patron Photo view of the Patron Registration workform, you can take a photo, replace an old photo with a new one, upload an existing photo, or delete the photo from the patron record. If the workstation is set to display the photo, it also appears on the Check Out workform with the other patron information. Patron photos do not appear in the PAC.

    +

    You may find it convenient to have a computer workstation and work area dedicated to taking photos. You can mark a spot on the floor for patrons to stand so that you do not have to refocus the webcam for each photo.

    +

    You need certain permissions to work with patron photos, your workstation must be equipped with a webcam, and the workstation must be set up in Polaris Administration to display photos. See Setting Up Patron Photos.

    +

    Note:
    You cannot install webcam software on a thin client (terminal server environment) or use it via Remote Desktop, so you cannot take new patron pictures by these means. However, if the pictures are loaded from another source or captured on a conventional workstation with webcam software, they are displayed normally in terminal server and Remote Desktop environments. See Add a new photo (terminal server environment and RDP) for a suggested workflow.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Reading_Histories.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Reading_Histories.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95ea2a51 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPregstr/Working_with_Reading_Histories.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Reading Histories + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Reading Histories

    +

    Your library can save a reading history in a patron’s record to keep track of what the patron has read and what the patron might like to read again. The reading history lists information about each item the patron has checked out since the history was started. Renewals are not included in the list, but multiple check-outs of the same item are included. Even if an item or bibliographic record is deleted, the entry remains in the reading history.

    +

    Polaris Administration settings determine how long reading histories are kept and how many items can be in the list. When these limits are exceeded, entries are automatically deleted, starting with the oldest. See Setting Reading History Options. For example, your library might decide that reading histories can list items checked out over the past two years, with a maximum of 500 entries. When two years have passed since an item was checked out, it is automatically removed from the list. Also, if the history contains 500 entries and a new item is checked out, the earliest entry in the list is automatically removed, according to the entry’s creation date.

    +

    Note:
    An entry’s creation date is usually, but not always, the check-out date. For example, offline uploads may cause some variation. Also, the exact time of check-out is not considered. If several items were checked out on the same date, the items are deleted in an unspecified order.

    +

    If your system includes outreach services, Polaris uses the patron’s reading history to create selection lists for patrons. Reading histories are automatically activated for outreach services patrons, even if your branch does not normally keep reading histories, and outreach services patrons can rate titles in their reading histories. See Outreach Services Processing. Separate settings in Polaris Administration control how long reading histories are kept and how many items can be in the list for outreach services patrons.

    +

    With the appropriate permissions, you can remove individual items from a patron’s reading history. Your library may also allow patrons to view their reading histories from the PAC, start and stop the recording their histories, and remove individual items from their histories.

    +

    Note:
    Quick-circ (ephemeral) item check-outs are not included in reading histories. See Circulating Ephemeral Items.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Find_patron_services_and_related_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Find_patron_services_and_related_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5912108 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Find_patron_services_and_related_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find Patron and Related Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Patron and Related Records

    +

    To find a record using the Polaris Find Tool:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool from the Polaris Shortcut Bar using one of the following methods:
      • To search for patron records to be displayed in the Patron Registration workform, select Patron Services, Patron Records, press F7or click PatronIcon00012.gif.
      • To search for patron records to be displayed in the Patron Status workform, select Circulation, Patron Status, press F6, or click PatStatButton.gif.
      • To search for bibliographic records or item records, select Cataloging, Bibliographic Records, Cataloging, Item Records, or Cataloging, Reserve Item Records.
      • To search for course reserve records, select Patron Services, Course Reserve Records, or click CourseResIcon.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The General tabbed page of the Find Tool appears.

    +

    Tip:
    For fast navigation, press the TAB key to move among the Object, Search by, Type, Sort by, For, Limit by, and Values boxes. Type the first letter of the search option in the Object, Search by, Type, and Limit by boxes.

    +
      +
    1. Select the record type to search for in the Object box.
    2. +
    3. Select what to search by in the Search by box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you often search by the same criteria but they are not the default settings, you can save your own settings by selecting Options, Save as User Default from the Find Tool menu bar.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of search in the Type box.
    2. +
    3. Select a sort order in the Sort by box and select a value.
    4. +
    5. Type a search string in the For box.
    6. +
    7. If you want to focus the search, select a limiter in the Limit by box, and set a value for the limiter in the Value box.
    8. +
    +

    If you type text in the Value box, you must type the exact text or use a wildcard character.

    +

    Examples:
    To limit a patron record search by the free-text block check phone, you can type check* or check phone in the Value box, but not check.
    If you are searching for item records by title, and you limit by current borrower, type the patron’s name in the Value box in one of these formats: last name* or last name, first name* or last name, first name middle name. You must include the comma and the wildcard character as shown. The last name alone will not work in the Value box.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to begin the search, or press ENTER.
    2. +
    +

    Your results appear in the results list at the bottom of the Find Tool window. To list all the results in a large results set, press CTRL+SHIFT+A.

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions to work with a record in the results list:
      • Double-click a line item to open the record.
      • Right-click a line item in the results list to work with the record without opening it. The context menu displays the options available for the record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Finding_Patron_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Finding_Patron_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65a6d658 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Finding_Patron_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ + + + + + + + + + Finding Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Finding Patron Records

    +

    You begin many patron services tasks by finding existing patron records and record sets with the Polaris Find Tool. From the results list in the Find Tool, you can open a record, or you can right-click a line item and use the context menu to work with the record without opening it.

    +

    Example:
    From a patron record line item in the results list, you can choose to check out an item or place a hold request for the patron, among other options.

    +

    You can also use the Find Tool to locate bibliographic and item records when you are doing tasks such as creating hold requests.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Patron Record Searching - Tips

    +

    You can search for patron records using any of the access points listed in the Search by box on the Find Tool. The following searching tips are arranged by search access points.

    +

    Searching by Patron Name

    +
      +
    • Searches are not case-sensitive. You can type names in uppercase, lowercase, or both.
    • +
    • When doing a search by Name (Last, First Middle), you must place a space between the comma and the first name.
    • +
    • When typing a compound last name, do not use any spaces. For example, type MacDonald (instead of Mac Donald).
    • +
    +

    The table lists some common ways to search by patron name.

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Search by

    +

    (Search Access Point)

    +
    +

    Type

    +

    (Type of Truncation)

    +
    +

    For

    +

    (Text to Search for)

    +
    Results
    +

    Last, First Middle

    +
    +

    Implicit

    +
    +

    Barry
    (without a comma)

    +
    +

    All Barry surnames and variations beginning with Barry, such as Barryman 

    +
    +

    Last, First Middle

    +

     

    +
    +

    Implicit

    +
    +

    Barry,
    (with a comma)

    +
    +

    All Barry and no variations

    +
    +

    Last, First Middle

    +

     

    +
    +

    Implicit

    +
    +

    Barry, John +

    +
    +

    The extreme right term (John) is truncated. Results could include:

    +

    Barry, John

    +

    Barry, John Adam

    +

    Barry, Johnnathan

    +

    But not Barryman, John

    +
    +

    Last, First Middle

    +
    +

    Explicit

    +
    +

    Barry, John* +

    +
    +

    Same results as implicit for Barry, John

    +
    +

    First Middle Last

    +
    +

    Explicit

    +
    +

    John* Barry +

    +
    +

    Results could include:

    +

    Barry, John

    +

    Barry, John Adam

    +

    Barry, Johnnathan

    +
    +

    +

    You can use Limit by options to focus your search. See More Precise Searches.

    +

    Searching by Barcode

    +

    When you search by barcode, you can scan or type the barcode in the For box.

    +

    If your library system allows you to enter just the significant digits (the last unique portion) of a patron barcode, select Barcode in the Search by box and Significant Digits in the Type box. When you select this search type, you can enter just the significant digits. Leading zeroes are added as necessary, and the complete barcode appears in the For field. (If you select Significant Digits as the search type but enter more than the default number of digits, the search is not likely to yield any results.) If your library system does not use significant digits, the option is not available in the Type box.

    +

    Searching by Date

    +

    When you search by date, such as an expiration date or registration date, the Find Tool displays From and To boxes. You specify a date range by typing in the date boxes, or you can click the down arrows by the date boxes and select the dates from calendars.

    +

    Searching by Free-Text Access Points

    +

    Some fields in a patron record, such as free text blocks and notes, are free-text fields. You can use the wild card asterisk * to search these fields effectively. For example, if you are searching for records with the free-text block Check phone, you can type these search terms:

    +
      +
    • check phone (case does not matter)
    • +
    • check (implicit truncation search type - same as check*)
    • +
    • *phone* +
    • +
    +

    However, if you enter phone (no asterisks), you find only text that begins with phone.

    +

    Searching by Phone Number

    +

    You can search by Phone or limit your search by this field. This is a free-text field (see Searching by Free-Text Access Points) that searches all three Phone fields in the patron record.

    +

    Automatic Search Term Suggestions

    +

    When you select Keyword search or Phrase search in the Type box and search for patron records by any of the following access points, search term suggestions may be displayed as you type your search term in the Find Tool For box .

    +
      +
    • Name (First Middle Last)
    • +
    • Name (Last, First Middle)
    • +
    • Address +
    • +
    • Email address +
    • +
    +

    You can click a suggestion to launch the search for the suggested term, or ignore the suggestions and continue to type your term. Click Hide Suggestions if you do not want to see suggestions during your search session.

    +

    Note:
    The search suggestions feature is controlled by the system-level Polaris Administration Cataloging parameter Auto-suggest feature enabled. See Managing Auto-Search Suggestions.

    +

    More Precise Searches

    +

    You can focus your searches to find what you need more easily:

    +
      +
    • Limit the search - Select a search access point in the Search by box, select a limiter in the Limit by box, and select or type a value in the Value box. The values depend on the selected limiter.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    To find the records of patrons whose registrations expire within a certain date range and who also have library-assigned blocks, set Search by to Expiration date and set the date range. Then select Library-assigned block in the Limit by list, and select All or a specific block in the Values list. (Library-assigned blocks are branch-specific, and the available choices depend on the settings for your logged-in branch.) Then click Search.

    +
      +
    • Do a power search - You conduct complex, precise searches by writing Common Command Language (CCL) queries. See Doing Power Searches.
    • +
    • Do an SQL search - If you have the appropriate permissions, you can search by typing an SQL query, and save the search. These searches produce convenient, quick reports. See Setting Up SQL Searches.
    • +
    +

    Faster Searches

    +

    You can set a limit on the number of records that can be returned in a single search. Specify the maximum number of records in the Retrieval Limit box on the Find Tool’s Settings tabbed page.

    +

    Count-Only Searches

    +

    If you just need a quick count of the number of patron records with certain characteristics, select your search criteria and select (check) Count only.

    +

    Sending Search Results to a Record Set

    +

    If you want to add specific patron records to a record set, select them in the results list, right-click the selected records, and select Add to Record Set from the context menu. For more information about working with patron record sets, see Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Getting_Started_in_Patron_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Getting_Started_in_Patron_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab0057eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Getting_Started_in_Patron_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Getting Started in Patron Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Getting Started in Patron Services

    +

    At the circulation desk, you use Polaris Patron Services to do activities such as registering patrons and updating patron records, checking in and checking out materials, placing requests, and processing patron fines and fees.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d4ab80ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Services Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services Records

    +

    Patron records contain information about the patron and the patron’s library activities. Information about circulation and request transactions is stored in patron records, as well as in the bibliographic and item records for the material. Patron information is displayed in two workforms:

    +
      +
    • The Patron Registration workform displays patron registration data, including general, address, and notification information. If your system includes patron photo identification, the Patron Registration workform also includes a photo view.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    Press F9 to switch between the Patron Registration and Patron Status workforms for a patron record.

    +
      +
    • The Patron Status workform displays data that changes, either manually or automatically, as the patron uses library services. It includes information about blocks, notices, checked-out items, monetary transactions, claims, requests, reading history, outreach services profiles, associations, notes, and patron messages.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    Your Polaris administrator can set a preferred opening view for the Patron Status workform.

    +

    You can see a summary of useful information about the patron record in the patron properties sheet. Click PropertiesIcon.gif or press F8 in the Patron Registration or Patron Status workform to open the properties sheet. (You can also view a patron’s property sheet directly from a Find Tool results list, without opening the record. See Finding Patron Records.)

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbb4b76b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPstart/Patron_Services_on_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Services on the Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services on the Shortcut Bar

    +

    To get started in patron services, log on to Polaris. After you log on, the Polaris Shortcut Bar menu options are available.

    +

    To create a new patron record, select File > New. See Creating and Editing Patron Records.

    +

    Tip:
    Click RedOrb.gif to expand the Patron Services toolbar. You can click the icons to open the Find Tool and search for existing patron records, record sets, and other records. For example, click PatronIcon.gif to search for an existing patron record.

    +

    To start a patron services task, select Patron Services. The Patron Services menu offers the following options:

    +
      +
    • Patron Records - Opens the Polaris Find Tool to search for a patron record and display it in the Patron Registration workform. See Finding Patron Records.
    • +
    • Record Sets - Opens the Polaris Find Tool to search for a patron record set and display it in the Record Set workform. Record sets are a convenient way to manage multiple patron records. See Bulk-Changing Patron Records.
    • +
    • Course Reserve Records - Opens the Polaris Find Tool to search for a course reserve record and display it in the Course Reserve workform. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
    • +
    • Templates - Opens a submenu with the option Course Reserve. Select this option to open the Polaris Find Tool and search for a course reserve record template. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
    • +
    • Outreach Services - Opens the Outreach Services Manager, where you can process multiple patrons who are due for outreach service deliveries. See Outreach Services Processing.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Click BrownOrb.gif to expand the Circulation toolbar. You can click the icons to do circulation tasks. For example, click but_chko.gif to open the Check Out workform.

    +

    To start a circulation task, select Circulation. The following options appear on the Circulation menu:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Access_the_account_data_for_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Access_the_account_data_for_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..003ca825 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Access_the_account_data_for_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Access the account data for a patron record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Access the account data for a patron record

    +

    To display the Account view of a patron’s record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:but_PatStatWf.gif
    Click this button on the Shortcut Bar to display the patron records Find Tool, or press F6. You can set the Search by box in the Find Tool to Barcode, and scan the patron’s barcode into the For box.

    +

    The Patron Status workform opens to the Items Out view.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Account or click Account View button to display the Account view.
    2. +
    3. See the following topics to do account transactions:
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/BillChargeManu.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/BillChargeManu.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99dc315a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/BillChargeManu.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Bill a charge manually to a patron account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bill a Charge Manually to a Patron Account

    +

    You can manually bill patrons for charges related to lost items, missing parts, or other fees. When you add a new charge or select an existing unbilled charge and select the Send a bill option, the charge appears in a separate section on the patron's billing notice. Charges previously billed to the patron cannot be manually billed. To bill a charge when you declare an item lost, see Declare an Item Lost.

    +

    To bill a charge manually:

    +

    Note: +
    You require the permission Bill a charge manually (available at the Branch level), in addition to the existing permissions, Access patron account and Modify patron account.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Patron Status workform and go to the Account view.
    2. +
    3. Do one of the following depending on whether you are adding a new charge and billing for it or billing for an existing unbilled charge:
    4. +
    5. Select the Send a bill check box on the Charge dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    When the Send a bill check box is selected, the dialog box expands displaying the default Added message: Your library account has been billed for this charge. This default message can be edited in WebAdmin. Or, you can edit the existing message by typing a new message in the Added message box. If you add a note from the Special Item Check-in dialog box when checking in a Claim Missing Part item, the edited text appears instead of the default text.

    +

    The Patron Status workform, Account view is updated with Pending in the Billed column

    +

    Manually billed charges are included in existing billing notices on all bill types (print, email, and text message) in a new section with a separate header. The billed charges are processed during overnight notices processing, and the notices are sent out according to the library's notification settings in Polaris Administration and the patron's preferences.

    +

    When notice processing has run, the Billed column on the patron record is updated from Pending to Billed, and the notice history is updated showing the charge was billed. If the charge is associated with a title, the title and material type displays. If the charge is not associated with a title, the reason for the charge (postage, printing, etc.) is listed instead of the title and the material type is blank.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_charge_from_the_Account_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_charge_from_the_Account_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3630d8f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_charge_from_the_Account_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a charge from the Account view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Charge from the Patron Account View

    +

    A charge is associated typically with a predefined reason such as item damage or a special service. The library sets the reasons in Polaris Administration. See Defining Fee Descriptions.

    +

    To manually create a charge on a patron’s record:

    +

    Note:
    As you work with the patron record, you can refresh the header information in the workform by selecting View > Refresh.

    +
      +
    1. Display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform Account view (see Access the account data for a patron record).
    2. +
    3. + Click pChargeIcon.gif above the Account list view, or press CTRL+C. + +The Charge dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. + Type the charge amount in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00). +
    6. +

      Note:
      If the amount exceeds the charge alert threshold value, the system displays a warning message and prompts you to confirm the amount before continuing. For information about configuring the Patron Account: Charge Alert Threshold settingseePatron Services Parameters Reference.

      +
    7. + Select a reason for the charge in the Reason box. +
    8. +
    9. +

      If the charge is associated with an item, scan the item barcode in the Associated item box.

      +
    10. +

      Note:
      You can click Find to search for an item record.

      +
    11. + If you want to add a note, type it in the Notes box. +
    12. +
    13. + To send a bill to the patron, select the Send a bill check box, and follow the instructions for Bill a Charge Manually to a Patron Account. +
    14. +
    15. + Click OK on the dialog box. +The Patron Status workform - Account view appears.
    16. +

      + A charge appears in the Account Transaction list, and the total account charge appears in the Charges box at the bottom of the view. If the charge is a replacement charge for a lost item, the count in the Lost item counter (General view and Claims view) increases.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_credit_manually.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_credit_manually.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b3d8873 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Create_a_credit_manually.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a credit manually + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a credit manually

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, you can create a credit that is unrelated to any specific charge or overpayment.

    +

    To create a credit manually:

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Create a patron account credit: Allow to do this procedure. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

    +

    Tip:
    As you work with the record, you can refresh the header information in the workform. Press F5, select View, Refresh, or click Refresh button on the toolbar.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Select CreateCreditBtn.gif above the Account Transaction list, or press CTRL+B.
    4. +
    +

    The Create Credit dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the credit amount in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00).
    2. +
    3. Select a payment method for the credit in the Method box.
    4. +
    5. If you want to add a note, type the information in the Note box.
    6. +
    7. Click OK on the dialog box.
    8. +
    +

    The credit is added to the Account Transaction list, and the amount is added to the total in the Credits box.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_a_collection_summary_and_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_a_collection_summary_and_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9f25123 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_a_collection_summary_and_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display a collection summary and history + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display a Collection Summary and History

    +

    To view the total amount submitted to collection for a patron by each reporting library, and to view specifics about each reporting library’s collection submission:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Click pCollAgIcon.gif or press CTRL+A to display the Collection Summary dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The patron’s collection summary appears. The line item for each library includes the patron’s collection status, amount due, balance, and date submitted to collection.

    +
      +
    1. To view details about a transaction, right-click the transaction, and select History from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Transaction History dialog box appears.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Collection agency set-up and processing - See Managing Collection Agency Services.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_notice_histories.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_notice_histories.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0db66ef3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_notice_histories.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display and print notice histories + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display and Print Notice Histories

    +

    The notice history is a list of the notices that have been sent to a patron regarding a specific item. The list includes the notification method, the date, notification organization, and the amount of any related charges. If the notice was delivered by email, text message, or telephone, the notice history also indicates whether the delivery was successful. When the item has been checked in and all charges have been resolved, the notice history for that item is no longer available.

    +

    Note:
    Additional text message notices, which are sent in addition to another method, do not appear in the patron’s notification history. For example, if both a printed notice and an additional text message notice are sent for an item, only the printed notice appears in the notification history.

    +

    Your library sets separate retention periods for hold notices (pick-up and cancelled hold notices) and item and account notices (overdue, fine, bill, and reminder notices). See The Notification History. An entry is kept in the notification history if it falls within the specified period of time, the related item is still checked out, claimed or lost by the current patron, and current charges are not resolved. The entry is kept under these circumstances even if the related item is purged or deleted from the database; in this case, the title is prefixed by [DELETED].

    +

    To display and print the notice history:

    +

    Note:
    To display the notice history, you need the Circulation permission Patron status: Access notice history. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

    +

    Tip:
    From the Check Out workform, select Links, Existing, Patron Status.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - General view or Patron Registration workform - Status View. See Find patron services and related records. The illustration shows an example.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    A maximum of 250 entries is initially displayed. You can scroll the list to load another 250 entries at a time, or press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load all the entries. Each entry represents the latest notice for an item. Go to step 2 to see the entire notification history for an item.

    +
      +
    1. To open a notice history, double-click an item in the Notices list, or right-click the item and select Open from  the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Notification History opens. From here, you can click Print if you want to print the notification history for this item.

    +

    Note:
    You can also open the Notification History from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, Claims view, or Account view. Select the item in the list of items out, and click NoticeHistIcon.gif (or press ALT+N).

    +
      +
    1. To print multiple notice histories, select the items in the patron’s Notice list and right-click. Then select Print from the context menu.
    2. +
    3. To open a related item record, right-click an item in the list and select Item Record from the context menu.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_the_Items_Out_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_the_Items_Out_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d3ef81a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_and_print_the_Items_Out_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display and print the Items Out list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display and Print the Items Out List

    +

    Printing the Items Out list provides the patron with a verification of all the items he or she has currently checked out, or a receipt for renewal if printed receipts are not set to print automatically for the Patron Status workform.

    +

    To display and print the Items Out list from the Patron Status workform:

    +

    Tip:
    From the Patron Registration workform, press F9 to open the Patron Status workform.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    From the Check Out workform, select Links, Existing, Patron Status.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Items Out or click ItemsOutBtn.gif to display the Items Out view.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If a checked-out item is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +

    Overdue items are marked with a yellow Alert icon AlertIcon.gif. Billed items are marked with a red Alert icon RedAlert.gif. You can see more information about any item in the Items Out list. Right-click the item and select Open from the context menu to open the item record. Or select Links from the context menu to see choices related to circulation, holds, bibliographic, and other information.

    +
      +
    1. To set up printing from the Patron Status workform, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Steps a-c only have to be done the first time after installation or whenever you want to change the default printer.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Options.... to display the Patron status: Tools Options dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Set the receipt/slip options for your printer and the types of receipts and slips you print from the Patron Status workform. See Set the workstation to print receipts and slips.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note: 
    Receipt printer options are set in Polaris Administration. See Set receipt printer control codes.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Items Out view appears.

    +
      +
    1. To print the Items Out list, click the printer icon above the Items Out list (not the icon at the top of the workform), or press CTRL+ALT+P.
    2. +
    +

    If the workform printer is set to Receipt, the list is printed. If the printer is set to Page, the Report Preview window opens. Click the printer icon on the Report Preview window to print the list.

    +

    Note: +
    Your library specifies the information that is included on the receipt. Set Items Out receipt options.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Print a packing list for reader ratings - If your library collects reader ratings from outreach services patrons, you can print a packing list for gathering ratings from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. Select the items to be rated and click PackingListIcon.gif above the Items Out list. For more information, see Working with Reader Ratings.
    • +
    • You Saved message - You can add a “you saved” message to the printed Items Out list. The message helps to remind patrons of the value of library service by displaying how much it would cost to purchase the items. Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_completed_account_transactions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_completed_account_transactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf94d800 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_completed_account_transactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display completed account transactions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display Completed Account Transactions

    +

    Polaris automatically moves all completed transactions from the Account Transaction list to the Transaction Summary dialog box, where they are archived for a period set in Polaris Administration. See Setting Patron Accounting Options.

    +

    Note:
    The following transactions remain in the transaction summary, regardless of the Administration setting for deleting transactions: payments that have been refunded or credited; deposits that have been credited; any transaction associated with a credit; any transactions that occur for patrons currently in collection.

    +

    You can view the Transaction Summary if you have the permission Access patron account: transaction summary for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    To view the archive of a patron’s completed monetary transactions:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Account or click to display the Account view.
    4. +
    5. Click pTransSumIcon.gif above the Account list view, or press CTRL+T.
    6. +
    +

    The Transaction Summary dialog box appears. All reconciled transactions are listed in the dialog box for the period set in Polaris Administration.

    +
      +
    1. To sort the line items, click the appropriate column header.
    2. +
    +

    You may find it helpful to sort the Transaction Summary by title or barcode to group the charges, payments, and waivers for a particular item.

    +

    You can open a linked item record from the Transaction Summary. Right-click the line item in the Transaction Summary dialog box, select Links from the context menu, and select Item Record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_transaction_history.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_transaction_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af32411c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Display_transaction_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display a transaction’s history + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display a Transaction’s History

    +

    You can view the account activity for any selected line item in the Account Transaction list or the Transaction Summary dialog box.

    +

    To view the account activity for a particular transaction:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. If the transaction has been reconciled, click pTransSumIcon00034.gif or press CTRL+T to display the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the transaction line item, and select History from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    You can view additional information about each transaction, including an item’s check-out date and due date if applicable. Right-click a line item in the Account Transaction list or the Transaction Summary dialog box, and select Properties from the context menu.

    +

    The Transaction History dialog box appears.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Overdue items processing - Polaris manages overdue items through fines, blocks, and notices. Settings in Polaris Administration determine whether and how these functions are used in your library. Patron Services Administration Overview.
    • +
    • Your library may issue up to three overdue notices and a bill for an overdue item. For the procedures to issue overdue notices and the applicable settings, see Overdue Notices, Bills, and Combined Notices.
    • +
    • Your library may choose to have Polaris automatically change an item’s status to lost when the item is billed for overdue fines. See Set lost item charge options.
    • +
    • Patron blocks - Patrons are automatically blocked at check-out and renewal under the following circumstances:
      • They have more than a library-specified number of items overdue.
      • They owe more than a library-specified amount of money.
      • They have one or more items long overdue.
      • See Working with Blocks (Stops).
    • +
    • Managing overdue fines at circulation - See Resolve a fine at check-in.
    • +
    • Deleted items - For most items, the item record identification (title and barcode) is still available after the item has been deleted, so charge and pay or waive transactions remain related to the item. This feature does not apply to ILL item records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Displaying_All_Items_Out.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Displaying_All_Items_Out.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..39b76738 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Displaying_All_Items_Out.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying All Items Out + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying All Items Out

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, you can view and print all the items that a patron currently has checked out. The Items Out list displays each item’s basic information and includes the due date and time, call number, material type, and assigned branch. By default, the list is sorted and prints by due date (oldest to most recent). You can sort the list on other fields by clicking the column headers. See Display and print the Items Out list.

    +

    You can also estimate fines on currently overdue items from this view. See Estimate fines on currently checked out items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Estimate_fines_on_currently_checked_out_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Estimate_fines_on_currently_checked_out_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4c47aa3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Estimate_fines_on_currently_checked_out_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Estimate fines on currently checked out items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Estimate fines on currently checked out items

    +

    You can estimate accrued fines for a patron on items that are currently checked out, calculating the fines if the items were returned today or on a date you select. Your library may opt to include items in the estimated fine calculation that are declared or billed lost but the overdue fine has not yet been charged, and/or may include claimed items in the calculation. The library may also choose to include estimated fines in the threshold calculation that determines if a patron should be blocked for overdue fines.

    +

    To estimate fines for a patron from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view:

    +

    Tip:
    From the Patron Registration workform, press F9 to open the Patron Status workform.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform. See Find patron services and related records.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    From the Check Out workform, select Links, Existing, Patron Status.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Items Out or click ItemsOutBtn00030.gif to display the Items Out view.
    2. +
    3. Click the Estimated Fines icon EstFinesIcon.gif above the Items Out list.
    4. +
    +

    The Estimated Fines dialog box opens. The dialog box shows the fine on each item and the total estimated fines if the items are returned today.

    +

    Note:
    The displayed amount never exceeds the maximum fine limit per material type set up in Polaris Administration, even if the calculated amount is greater. That is, the patron is never charged more than the maximum fine limit.

    +
      +
    1. To view the estimated fines if the items are returned at a future date, click the calendar icon and use the calendar control to set the date; then click Recalculate.
    2. +
    3. Click Print to print the information on the printer specified for the workstation.
    4. +
    +

    The information is formatted for a receipt printer and includes the title, author, due date, and estimated fine. If your library includes claimed and/or lost items in the calculation, these are included in the printed information.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    If your library has opted to include lost/and or claimed items in the estimated fines calculation, you can also estimate fines from the Claims view. See Estimate Fines from the Patron Status Workform - Claims View.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Generate_an_item_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Generate_an_item_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9aa66d95 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Generate_an_item_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + Generate an item record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create an Item Record Set from a Patron Record Set

    +

    Use this procedure to identify items that are still associated with a patron account. These items must be removed from the patron account before the patron record can be secured.

    +

    You generate an item record set of the items associated with the patron records using options to specify which types of items to include in the item record set. For example, you can select Bulk Change from the item record set and delete lost items. (This step is necessary because patron records cannot be secured if there are any items still associated with the patron account. Charges can still remain on the account, but all items must be removed before the record can be secured.) Alternatively, if the items are already in Lost status, they will go automatically to Missing or Withdrawn according to settings in the organization’s Lost Item Transition settings in Polaris Administration.

    +
    +

    Note: +
    The permissions Patron record sets: Access and Cataloging record sets: Create are required to create an item record set from a patron record set. The Use 'own' cataloging record sets: Allow is optional.

    +
    +

    To create an item record set from a patron record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open a patron record set.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools |Create Item record set, press Ctrl+T, or click .
    4. +
    +

    The Item Record Set Setup dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type the name for the record set in the Name box and select the organization that owns the record set in the Owner box. Or, if you have the permission Use own cataloging record sets: Allow, you can select your username from the list.
    2. +
    3. Optionally, to filter the record set by the item circulation status, select one or more check boxes under Circ status.
    4. +
    5. Optionally, to filter the record set by the patron code, select one or more check boxes under Patron code. (A check box appears for each patron code that is used by at least one patron record in the record set)
    6. +
    7. Optionally, to include item records that have a status of deleted, but have not been purged from the database, select the Include items with a record status of "deleted" check box.
    8. +
    9. Select OK.
    10. +
    +

    An item record set is created containing any item records with a status other than IN where a patron in the record set is the current borrower (or the last borrower if there is no current borrower.) If any filters were selected, the records must also meet all the selected filter criteria.

    +

    The Item Record Set workform displays an automatically-supplied date/time stamp appended to the record set name and a Created from patron record set "record set name" note.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Make_deposit_in_patrons_acct.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Make_deposit_in_patrons_acct.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55a8bb63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Make_deposit_in_patrons_acct.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Make a deposit in a patron’s account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Make a Deposit in a Patron’s Account

    +

    You can accept payment for a deposit, or transfer a credit balance to the deposit. To record a deposit in a patron’s account:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. If you are transferring funds from the credit balance to use for the deposit, select one or more credits in the Account Transaction list.
    4. +
    5. Click pDepositIcon.gif above the Account Transaction list, or press CTRL+I. The Deposit dialog box appears.
    6. +
    7. Type the amount to deposit in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00).
    8. +
    +

    If you selected a credit or credits in the Account Transaction list, you can change the Amount box to any amount less than the credit amount.

    +
      +
    1. Select a payment method for the deposit in the Method box. If you are making a deposit from a credit, the method Deposit from Credit is already selected.
    2. +
    3. If you want to add a note to the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box. The workform appears with the deposit in the Account Transaction list, and the total amount of account deposits in the Deposits box.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Return, forfeit, or credit deposits +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Managing_Credit_Card_Orders.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Managing_Credit_Card_Orders.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..992fece0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Managing_Credit_Card_Orders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Credit Card Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Credit Card Orders

    +

    Your library may accept credit card payments (orders) from the PAC, Polaris ExpressCheck, or the staff client for fines, donations to the library, and purchases. If your library processes credit card orders through the PayPal (VeriSign®) Payflow Pro service or the Comprise SmartPAY gateway, you can view transaction details and refund e-commerce payments using the Credit Card Payments Manager in the staff client. You can also refund credit card payments from registered patrons through the Patron Status workform - Account view. However, you cannot refund credit card payments as cash. The refund transaction always becomes a refund in the patron’s credit card account.

    +

    The Credit Card Payment Manager shows only those orders and transactions where your workstation’s log-on branch and the transacting branch use the same payment gateway (Payflow Pro or Comprise SmartPAY). If your library uses a different e-commerce gateway, refunds must be made through the gateway application and manually from the Patron Status workform - Account view.

    +

    Note:
    For details about Polaris Administration settings for credit card processing, see Setting Up E-Commerce.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patron_Status_and_Accounting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patron_Status_and_Accounting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e1098f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patron_Status_and_Accounting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Status and Accounting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Status and Accounting

    +

    The Patron Status workform is the first place to look when patrons have questions about their accounts. You can view and print the patron’s current items out, estimate fines, and confirm the notices a patron has received regarding an item. This workform is also the central point for patron accounting. It tracks the patron’s financial transactions with the library, including charges, payments, deposits, and credits. You can also view a history of the patron’s account activity.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patrons_in_Collection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patrons_in_Collection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..49cb36e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Patrons_in_Collection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patrons in Collection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Patrons Accounts in Collection

    +

    Your library may use a collection agency to encourage patrons to pay their fines or return borrowed items. Some collection agencies, such as Unique Management Services (UMS), manage all collection communications with patrons who have delinquent accounts. However, patrons in collection with UMS make all payments on their accounts directly to the library. For other collection agencies, the library may send a fine notice to the patron warning that the account will be turned over to collection in a specified period if the account is not cleared. Patrons may make payments on their accounts to the collection agency as well as the library.

    +

    When a patron owes an amount of money over a library-defined limit, and money has been owed longer than a library-defined period of time, the patron account goes into collection. This triggers the following events in Polaris:

    +
      +
    • +

      Polaris generates two reports in overnight batch processing and transmits them to the collection agency. The Submission report submits the delinquent patron information to the collection agency. The Update report contains the patron records already in collection which have had any activity (payment, waiver, or new charge) at the reporting organization since the last Submission or Update report was run.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris adds a collection fee, if specified, and a collection block to the patron record. The block appears at check-out and renewal in the staff client, the PAC, Polaris ExpressCheck, and SIP self-check. Polaris removes the block when the patron pays all the money that is owed to reporting organizations.

      +
    • +
    +

    Patron accounts are reported to the collection agency for the amounts owed at reporting libraries only, not at libraries that do not use the collection agency function. The accounts remain in collection until the patrons have paid off the amount at each reporting library. Amounts due may include charges of all types, replacement costs, processing fees, and collection fees.

    +

    Excluding or Including Patrons

    +

    You can prevent a particular patron from being reported to the collection agency. Select the Exclude from collection agency check box on the Patron Registration workform - General view. See Add general data to a patron record. Through Polaris Administration, a particular patron who would not otherwise be reported can be included in collection. SeeSet up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Getting Patron Accounts Out of Collection

    +

    A patron’s account is out of collection when the patron no longer owes money, including fines incurred after the reporting, to any reporting libraries. The patron may still owe money to libraries that do not use the collection agency function. If the patron’s account is paid down to $0.00, but the patron incurs a new fine before the collection agency Update report is run, the patron’s account is still in collection. For more information about collection agency reporting, see Collection Processing Reports. In addition, you can manually remove a patron account from collection. See Remove a patron account from collection.

    +

    Sending Patron Accounts to a Second Collection Agency

    +

    If your library uses a second level of collections to send patron accounts to another agency when patrons do not settle with the first collection agency, see Second Level Collection Agency Management

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Pay_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Pay_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef768864 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Pay_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Pay charges from the Account view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Pay Charges from the Account View

    +

    You can pay a single charge, selected charges, or all charges in a single transaction. You can also do a partial payment, or accept an overpayment. To pay charges on a patron’s account:

    +

    Note:
    As you work with the record, you can refresh the header information in the workform. Press F5, elect View, Refresh, or click Refresh button on the toolbar.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options:
      • To pay one or multiple charges, select the charge or charges in the Account Transaction list, and click pPayIcon.gif or press CTRL+Y.
      • To pay all charges, click pPayAllIcon.gif or press CTRL+L.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, the Class Point of Sale window opens. Follow your library’s procedures from this point to process the payment. The remaining steps in this procedure apply to payments in Polaris only.

    +

    The Pay dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to partially pay the selected charge or charges, type the new amount in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00).
    2. +
    +

    If you are making a partial payment on a single charge, the payment will be recorded as a partial payment on the charge, and the Account Transaction list will show a balance for the charge. If you are making a partial payment on multiple or all charges, the payment amount is applied to the oldest charges first. Each paid transaction is removed from the Account Transaction list, and recorded in the Transaction History. Any remaining amount is applied to the next most recent charge as a partial payment.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to accept an overpayment, type the new amount in the Amount box.
      • If your library allows overpayments to be recorded as account credits, a dialog box appears that alerts you to the overpayment and provides the choice of crediting the account or not. Click Yes to credit the patron’s account. Click No to pay the charge without recording a credit. (Click Cancel if you entered the wrong amount.)

      • If your library does not allow overpayments to be recorded as credits, a message indicates how much change you should give the patron. Click OK on the message box.

    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select a payment method in the Method box.
    2. +
    3. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Pay dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    The Patron Status workform - Account view appears, and the amount in the Charges box decreases. The following situations may occur:

    +
    +
      +
    • If a charge was only partially paid, the charge still appears in the Account Transaction list with the balance in the Balance column. The payment appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    • +
    • If charges were paid in full, they no longer appear in the Account Transaction list. Instead, they appear in the Transaction Summary dialog box, along with payments.
    • +
    +
    +

    If you paid multiple charges, each charge line item has a corresponding pay line item.

    +

    If you have set Polaris to print fine receipts from the Patron Status workform, a receipt is printed.

    +

    Important:
    For the first time after installation only, you need to set up Polaris to print receipts and slips. You can also opt to print the fine receipt only if the patron does not receive eReceipts. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Viewing transactions made from a credit - You can see the transactions made from a credit in the patron account. Right-click the credit in the Account Transaction list, and select History from the context menu. The Transaction History dialog box opens, listing the transactions made from the credit. To print a transaction in the list, right-click it and select print from the context menu.
    • +
    • Refunding a credit - See Refund a credit amount.
    • +
    • Managing overdue fines at circulation - See Resolve a fine at check-in.
    • +
    • Setting Polaris to allow credits from overpayments  See Setting Patron Accounting Options.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Processing_Charges_and_Payments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Processing_Charges_and_Payments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c3d59a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Processing_Charges_and_Payments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Processing Charges and Payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Processing Charges and Payments

    +

    Charges include overdue fines, replacement costs, and any other fees that a library chooses to implement. Some charges are automatically assigned to patron accounts. For example, the system may automatically calculate and assign charges when an item is manually declared lost, an overdue item is billed, and when any overdue item is recovered at check-in, check-out, or renewal. These charges are determined by Polaris Administration settings for your library. In addition, you can manually assign a charge at any time, such as for a damaged item. See Create a charge from the Account view .

    +

    With the appropriate permissions, you can reconcile current charges in a patron account by paying them or waiving them, you can issue refunds or credits on completed transactions, and you can manually create a credit in a patron’s account.

    +

    Note:
    The Last activity date will be updated on the patron record when a payment is made on the patron account.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_amount.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_amount.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..11dae43c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_amount.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Refund a credit amount + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Refund a Credit Amount

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, you can partially or fully refund credit transactions. To refund credits:

    +

    Tip:
    As you work with the record, you can refresh the header information in the workform. Press F5, select View, Refresh, or click Refresh button on the toolbar.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Select one or more credit transactions to refund in the Account Transactions list.
    4. +
    5. Select RefundCreditBtn.gif above the Account Transaction list, or press CTRL+G.
    6. +
    +

    The Refund Credit dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the amount to refund in the Amount box.
    2. +
    +

    If you selected multiple credit transactions, and you specify an amount less than the amount shown in the Balance box, the refund is applied to the oldest transactions first. Each fully-refunded credit transaction will be removed from the Account Transaction list, and recorded in the Transaction History. Any remaining amount is applied to the next oldest credit in the Account Transaction list as a partial refund.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to add a note to the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The refund is added to the Account Transaction list, and the amount is subtracted from the total in the Credits box.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_card_payment_from_Patron_Status_-_Account_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_card_payment_from_Patron_Status_-_Account_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a05f7160 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_a_credit_card_payment_from_Patron_Status_-_Account_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Refund a credit card payment from Patron Status - Account view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Refund a Credit Card Payment from Patron Status - Account View

    +

    This refund method is convenient when you are working with a patron’s account. To refund credit card payments from the Patron Status workform - Account view:

    +

    Note:
    You need the Polaris permission Fines: Allow refunds to issue a refund on a credit card account, and credit card payments must be licensed for the Polaris staff client to refund a credit card payment by this method. If you need to refund a credit card payment made through PAC, and your library does not have a staff client license for credit card processing, you can refund the payment using the Credit Card Payments Manager. See View orders and refund credit card payments.
    To refund credit card payments made through Comprise SmartPAY, both the branch that took the payment and the branch issuing the refund must use SmartPAY. A SmartTerminal must be connected to your workstation.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Click pTransSumIcon00049.gif or press CTRL+T to display the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    All reconciled transactions appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate payment or payments in the list. If you select more than one payment, all payments must be from the same order.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Refund from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Credit Refund dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the amount to refund in the Amount box.
    2. +
    +

    You cannot make a partial refund if you selected more than one payment. You must refund the entire amount.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type a note describing the reason for the refund.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    A confirmation message appears. Click Yes to proceed with the refund.

    +

    Note:
    If the amount of the refund exceeds the net sale, a message is displayed. You can credit the maximum amount, or close the message box to cancel the transaction.

    +

    If your payment gateway is Comprise SmartPAY, swipe the patron’s card in the SmartTerminal reader.

    +

    The credit receives a transaction reference number, and will be subtracted from the patron’s credit card account balance.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_or_credit_completed_payment_transactions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_or_credit_completed_payment_transactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3161ecfd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Refund_or_credit_completed_payment_transactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Refund or credit completed payment transactions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Refund or Credit Completed Payment Transactions

    +

    Completed transactions are moved to the Transaction History, but you can refund or credit payments even after they are complete. You can refund or credit a single payment, multiple payments, or all payments in a single transaction. You can also do a partial refund or credit.

    +

    To refund or credit payments for completed transactions on a patron’s account:

    +

    Note:
    For instructions on refunding payments made by credit card, see Managing Credit Card Orders, and Refund a credit card payment from Patron Status - Account view.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Click pTransSumIcon00039.gif or press CTRL+T to display the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    All reconciled transactions appear.

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate payment or payments in the list.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options:
      • To refund a payment or payments, right-click and select Refund from the context menu. The Refund dialog box appears.
      • To credit a payment or payments, right-click and select Credit from the context menu. The Credit dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. If you want to partially refund or credit the amount, type the new amount in the Amount box.
    6. +
    +

    Important:
    If you chose to refund or credit multiple payments, you cannot change the number in the Amount box. You must refund or credit the entire amount.

    +
      +
    1. If you want add a note to the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The Transaction Summary appears. A refund line item appears in the Transaction Summary list, but a credit line item appears in the Account view’s Account Transaction list. Any credit amount is added to the total in the Credits box at the bottom of the Account view.

    +

    If you refunded or credited multiple payments, each payment line item has a corresponding refund or credit line item.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Remove_a_patron_account_from_collection.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Remove_a_patron_account_from_collection.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ca72d08f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Remove_a_patron_account_from_collection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remove a patron account from collection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove a Patron Account from Collection

    +

    Under special circumstances, you may want to remove a patron’s account  from collection even though there has been no account activity. To remove an account from collection manually:

    +

    Important:
    You need the Circulation permission Remove collection agency block: Allow to do this procedure. See Setting Circulation Permissions. If you manually remove a patron’s account from collection, you must inform the collection agency. The removal is not recorded in any automatic reporting functions for collections.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Click pCollAgIcon00050.gif to display the Collection Summary dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The patron’s collection summary appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the line item or items for which the patron should be removed from collection.
    2. +
    3. Click Remove From Collection.
    4. +
    5. Click Close.
    6. +
    +

    The dialog box closes.

    +
      +
    1. Inform the collection agency that the patron’s account has been taken out of collection.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Return_forfeit_or_credit_deposits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Return_forfeit_or_credit_deposits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7eabd3ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Return_forfeit_or_credit_deposits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Return, forfeit, or credit deposits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Return, Forfeit, or Credit Deposits

    +

    You reconcile deposits by return, forfeit, or credit transactions on one or more deposit line items. You can also do a partial return, forfeit, or credit.

    +

    To return, forfeit, or credit deposits on a patron’s account:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot pay a charge on a patron account directly from a deposit. However, you can credit the deposit, and then use the credit balance to pay the charge.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Select the deposit or deposits in the Account Transaction list.
    4. +
    5. Choose one of the following options:
      • To return one or multiple deposits, click pReturnIcon.gif above the Account Transaction list, or press CTRL+R.
    6. +
    +

    The Return dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    • To forfeit one or multiple deposits, click pForfeitIcon.gif above the Account Transaction list, or press CTRL+F.
    • +
    +
    +

    The Forfeit dialog box appears.

    +
    +
      +
    • To credit one or multiple deposits, click pCreditIcon.gif above the Account Transaction list, or press CTRL+E.
    • +
    +
    +

    The Credit dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To partially return, forfeit, or credit the deposit, type the new amount in the Amount box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you chose to return, forfeit, or credit multiple deposits, you cannot change the number in the Amount box. You must return, forfeit, or credit the entire amount.

    +
      +
    1. To add a note to the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    The Patron Status workform - Account view appears.

    +
    +
      +
    • If a deposit was only partially returned, forfeited, or credited, the deposit still appears in the Account Transaction list with the new balance in the Balance column. The return, forfeit, or credit appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    • +
    • If a deposit or deposits were returned, forfeited, or credited in full, the deposit or deposits no longer appear in the Account Transaction list. Instead, they appear in the Transaction Summary dialog box, along with the returns, forfeits, or credits.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Second_Level_Collection_Agency_Management.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Second_Level_Collection_Agency_Management.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b39bedd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Second_Level_Collection_Agency_Management.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Second Level Collection Agency Management + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    + Second Level Collection Agency Management

    +

    Libraries can use a two-step process for managing accounts that have been sent to collections. The first step involves sending patron accounts to collections using collection agency processes in Polaris. When the first collection agency reports patron accounts that remain unsettled, the library can implement the second step, which involves securing these patron records to prevent library activity; reporting the accounts to the second collection agency; and releasing patron records when the second collection agency reports back to the library that the accounts have been settled. For details, see Second Collection Agency Workflow.

    +

    The following features can be used to manage patron accounts that were not settled by the first collection agency:

    +
      +
    • Populate a patron record set by reading patron IDs from a column in an Excel spreadsheet. See Add records to a record set.
    • +
    • Create an item record set from a patron record set. See Second Collection Agency Workflow.
    • +
    • Secure patron records, preventing all circulation and payment activity and most other changes. You can secure an individual patron record using a Tools menu option on the Patron Status workform. Or, you can secure multiple patron records using patron bulk change. Patrons whose records are secured can search the Polaris PACs (PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Children's PAC). They can also log in and view their library accounts in the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, but they cannot place holds, check out eContent, make payments, or change the address or phone 1 field in their patron accounts. See also:
    • +
    • When the patron accounts have been resolved, release a secured patron record, allowing circulation activity and other changes. See Release a secured patron record.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Multiple patron records can be secured using bulk change, but secured records cannot be released using bulk change.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Secure_a_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Secure_a_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c3eb68c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Secure_a_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Secure a patron record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Secure a patron record

    +

    Note: +
    The permission, Patron record: Secure, is required to secure a patron record.

    +

    Your library can use this process to prevent patrons from using library services when their accounts are in collections, or for any other purpose. Patrons whose records are secured can search the Polaris PACs (PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Children's PAC). They can also log in and view their library accounts in the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, but they cannot place holds, check out eContent, make payments, or change the address or phone 1 field in their patron accounts. If your library uses a second collection agency to attempt to collect money from patrons who have not settled with the first collection agency, you can secure these patron records to prevent any library activity in the PAC and the staff client. See Second Level Collection Agency Management .

    +

    A patron record cannot be secured if any items are associated with the patron (out, lost, claimed) or if hold requests (held, shipped, located, inactive, active, or pending) or ILL requests (active, inactive, or received) are on the patron account. The patron record also cannot be secured if the patron is on the "Patrons to include" list in the Collection Agency Setup dialog for the patron's registered branch.

    +

    If you have the required permissions, you can use the patron bulk change process to secure multiple patron records in a record set. See Bulk Change Patron Records.

    +

    To secure a patron record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron record in the Patron Status workform.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Secure Patron Record.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    Charges on the patron account do not prevent it from being secured.

    +
      +
    • If the patron record cannot be secured, the following message appears.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • If the patron record can be secured, a message confirms that the record is secured, and a Patron record secured transaction is recorded.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_credit_card_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_PayPal_Payflow.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_credit_card_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_PayPal_Payflow.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3217ede1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_credit_card_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_PayPal_Payflow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + + + Take credit card payments for fines and fees - PayPal Payflow Pro + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Take Credit Card Payments for Fines and Fees - PayPal Payflow Pro

    +

    To take a credit card payment from the Patron Status workform - Account view:

    +

    Note:
    You can also accept credit card payments when the payment dialog box appears during circulation workflows; for example, when the patron pays a fine at check-in. Start at step 3 of this procedure and follow the remaining steps.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options:
      • To pay one or multiple charges, select the charge or charges in the Account Transaction list, and click pPayIcon00040.gif or press CTRL+Y.
      • To pay all charges, click pPayAllIcon00041.gif or press CTRL+L.
    4. +
    +

    The Pay dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To change the payment amount, type the new amount in the Amount box.
    2. +
    +

    Overpayment is not allowed for credit card payments. For details about partial payments, see Pay charges from the Account view.

    +
      +
    1. Select Credit card in the Method box.
    2. +
    3. To add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Pay dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    The Credit Card Payment dialog box appears.

    +

    + CreditCardPayment.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To enter credit card information with a credit card reader, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To enter information manually, go to step 8.

    +
      +
    1. Pass the patron’s credit card through the reader.
    2. +
    +

    The credit card account and billing information is filled in. All but the last four digits of the credit card number are masked.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type a note regarding the transaction.
    2. +
    +

    This note appears on the Properties dialog box for the transaction in the Credit Card Payments manager. See Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
      +
    1. Click Submit.
    2. +
    +

    The Credit Card Payment dialog box closes and the workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. To enter credit card information manually, follow these steps:
      1. On the Credit Card Payment dialog box, select (check) Manual credit card entry.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This option is available only if it has been enabled in Polaris Administration. See Set up PayPal Payflow Pro credit card payments.

    +
    +

    The account and billing information fields become available.

    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Credit Card section of the dialog box, type the account information.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Your library’s Payflow Pro setup may require a card security code. This code is typically located on the back of the card near the signature area.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Billing Name and Address section of the dialog box, type the billing name and address information for the credit card.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type a note regarding the transaction.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    This note appears on the Properties dialog box for the transaction in the Credit Card Payments Manager. See Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Submit.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Credit Card Payment dialog box closes and the workform appears.

    +

    For details about how the payment is recorded in the Patron Status workform - Account view, see Pay charges from the Account view. If you have set Polaris to print fine receipts from the current workform, a receipt is printed. The receipt includes a credit card transaction summary. If your library has enabled email credit card receipts in Polaris Administration, and there is a valid email address in the patron’s record, the patron receives an email receipt for the transaction.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    View credit card transactions and issue refunds - See Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbc04680 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Take_payments_for_fines_and_fees_-_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Take payments for fines and fees - Comprise SmartPAY + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Take Credit Card Payments for Fines and Fees - Comprise SmartPAY

    +

    If your library’s e-commerce gateway is Comprise SmartPAY, a Comprise SmartTerminal (the SmartPAY card reader device) must be connected to your workstation. To take a credit or debit card payment from the Patron Status workform - Account view:

    +

    Note:
    You can also accept credit card payments when the payment dialog box appears during circulation workflows; for example, when the patron pays a fine at check-in. Start at step 3 of this procedure and follow the remaining steps.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options:
      • To pay one or multiple charges, select the charge or charges in the Account Transaction list, and click pPayIcon00043.gif or press CTRL+Y.
      • To pay all charges, click pPayAllIcon00044.gif or press CTRL+L.
    4. +
    +

    The Pay dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To change the payment amount, type the new amount in the Amount box.
    2. +
    +

    Overpayment is not allowed for credit card payments. For details about partial payments, see Pay charges from the Account view.

    +
      +
    1. Select Credit card in the Method box.
    2. +
    3.  If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Pay dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    The system checks whether the payment is an overpayment, which is not allowed, or under the minimal amount set for credit card transactions, and displays appropriate messages to stop the transaction in these cases. Otherwise, the Credit Card Payment dialog box opens.

    +

    Note:
    You can add a note to the transaction. Entries in the Note field on this dialog box appear on the Polaris Store Order. For information about viewing credit card transactions and “orders,” seeManaging Credit Card Orders.

    +
      +
    1. Click Submit.
    2. +
    +

    The system creates Store Order, Store Transaction, and Store Details entries with Pending status, sends the request to SmartPAY, and sends a query result request to SmartPAY every 5 seconds.

    +
      +
    1. Pass the patron’s credit or debit card through the SmartTerminal reader.
    2. +
    +

    When the card is authorized, the system notifies SmartPAY that the transaction is finished, the ILS Store Order is updated to Complete status and the ILS Store Transaction to Success status, and the patron account is updated.

    +

    A confirmation message is displayed after a few seconds, and a receipt is generated according to the receipt setup for your workstation. For details about how the payment is recorded in the Patron Status workform - Account view, see Pay charges from the Account view. If your library has enabled email credit card receipts in Polaris Administration, and there is a valid e-mail address in the patron’s record, the patron receives an email receipt for the transaction.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    View credit card transactions and issue refunds - See Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Taking_Credit_Card_Payments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Taking_Credit_Card_Payments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78a5bb49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Taking_Credit_Card_Payments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Taking Credit Card Payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Taking Credit Card Payments

    +

    If your library provides credit card processing at the staff workstation through EnvisionWare, Comprise™ SmartPAY™, or PayPal (VeriSign®) Payflow Pro, you can accept a patron’s credit card payment at any point in your workflow where you accept payment for charges on the patron’s account. For example, you can select charges to pay in the Patron Status workform - Account view and you can accept a credit card payment for fines when you renew an overdue item.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris Administration settings determine the minimum amount you can accept as a credit card payment, and other details specific to your library. See Setting Up E-Commerce - Overview and Requirements. You also need the Polaris permission Fines: Allow credit card payments.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_credit_card_transactions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_credit_card_transactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..264cbe88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_credit_card_transactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + View credit card transactions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View Credit Card Transactions

    +

    A credit card order may include payments (sales) and credits. To view any credit card transaction from the Credit Card Payments Manager:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system Circulation permission Access Credit Card Payments Manager: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Credit Card Payments Manager from the Polaris Shortcut bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Credit Card Payments Manager - Orders view opens.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Transactions icon StoreOrderTransBtn00046.gif in the sidebar of the Credit Card Payments Manager workform.
    2. +
    3. List transactions using one of these methods:
      • Set the Start Date and End Date of the period for which you want to display credit card transactions. You can type the dates or click the down arrows and select the dates from the calendar, and then click Search.
      • If you know the reference identification number of the transaction, click . The Find Using Reference ID dialog box appears. Enter the transaction reference number and click Search.
    4. +
    +

    The workform lists the transaction search results.

    +
      +
    1. To open the store order related to the transaction, right-click the transaction and select Links > Store Order from the context menu.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_orders_and_refund_credit_card_payments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_orders_and_refund_credit_card_payments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9065ed01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/View_orders_and_refund_credit_card_payments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + View orders and refund credit card payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View Orders and Refund Credit Card Payments

    +

    To view credit card orders and refund credit card payments from the Credit Card Payments Manager:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system Circulation permission Access Credit Card Payments Manager: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Credit Card Payments Manager from the Polaris Shortcut bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Credit Card Payments Manager - Orders view opens.

    +
      +
    1. List credit card orders using one of these methods:
      • Set the Start Date and End Date of the period for which you want to display credit card payments (orders). You can type the dates or click the down arrows and select the dates from the calendar. Then click Search.
      • If you know the reference identification number of the payment—for example, the patron has brought in a credit card bill that lists the payment—click CreditRefFind.gif. The Find Using Reference ID dialog box appears. Enter the payment reference number and click Search.
    2. +
    +

    The workform lists the order search results.

    +

    Tip: +
    You can see detailed information about an order without opening it. Right-click the order line item and select Properties from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. To open an order, right-click the order line item and select Open from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Store Order workform - Details view opens. This view shows the details about a single credit card order. For example, if the patron paid two fines in a single order, and credits were later issued on these fines, the Store Order workform lists both the fines and the credits.

    +

    Note:
    The patron address is not displayed in the Store Order workform - Details view for payments made via Comprise SmartPAY.

    +
      +
    1. To issue a refund on the credit card, select one of these options:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You need the Polaris permission Fines: Allow refunds to issue a refund on a credit card account. If the payment gateway is Comprise SmartPAY, a SmartTerminal must be connected to the workstation. The same card that made the payment must be used.

    +
    +
      +
    • Refund one payment - Select the payment (product) and click RefundOne.gif in the workform toolbar. Or right-click the selected payment, and select Credit Refund from the context menu.
    • +
    • Refund all payments - Click RefundAll.gif in the workform toolbar.
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If a transaction was voided, you see VOID in the Net Sale box, and you cannot select refund options. A transaction may be voided automatically if the credit card address information could not be verified.

    +

    If the payment gateway is Comprise SmartPAY, swipe the patron’s card. Each refund requires a card swipe. If you are refunding three separate payments, you must swipe the card three times.

    +

    The credit receives a transaction reference number, and will be subtracted from the payer’s credit card account balance. If the payment (product) was made by a library patron on a library-related charge such as an overdue fine, the credit transaction appears in the patron’s Transaction Summary (Patron Status workform - Account view).

    +

    Note:
    To see details about each transaction related to the order, click the Transactions view icon StoreOrderTransBtn.gif in the sidebar of the Store Order workform.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Viewing_Patron_Financial_Accounts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Viewing_Patron_Financial_Accounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..336349b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Viewing_Patron_Financial_Accounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Viewing Patron Financial Accounts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing Patron Financial Accounts

    +

    Patron accounting includes charging fines and fees to patrons and reconciling these charges. The library can charge patrons for overdue, lost, and damaged items, and for special services. Your library may also require deposits for library services, and later return or forfeit the deposits.

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, you can view a patron’s outstanding charges, deposits, and credits and take appropriate action.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    Several Circulation permissions control the ability to access and work with patron accounts. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +

    The bottom portion of the workform displays the account transaction list. Each line item in the list includes the transaction’s date, type, reason for the charge, title, barcode, amount balance, whether the charge was billed or not, the library organization, and notes. Separate line items are displayed for overdue and replacement charges for the same item.

    +

    By clicking the appropriate button above the Account Transaction list, you can do financial transactions and access a summary of completed transactions. Place your cursor over any button to see a tooltip that identifies the button’s function.

    +

    You can see a list of notices that have been sent for an item. Select the item in the Account Transaction list and click NoticeHistIcon00032.gif (or press ALT+N). The Notice History dialog box opens. You can print the notice history; for details, See Reviewing Notice Histories.

    +

    At the bottom of the Account view, the Charges, Deposits, and Credits boxes track total amounts on the patron’s account, and increase or decrease according to the account transactions. For information on doing these transactions, see Processing Charges and Payments. The amount of the balance is the total of all charges minus the total of any credits. If the patron’s charges exceed any credits, the amount is displayed as a positive number. If the total credit amount is greater than the total charges, the amount is displayed in parentheses.

    +

    Note:
    Deposits are not included in the balance calculation.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Waive_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Waive_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91885759 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Waive_charges_from_the_Account_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Waive charges from the Account view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Waive Charges from the Account View

    +

    From the Account view, you can waive a single charge, selected charges, or all charges in a single transaction if you have the appropriate permissions. You can also waive part of a charge, or apply one waive amount to each of several charges. To waive charges on a patron’s account:

    +

    Note:
    As you work with the record, you can refresh the header information in the workform. Press F5, select View, Refresh, or click Refresh button on the toolbar.

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can right-click a line item and select History from the context menu to see more information about the transaction.

    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options:
      • To waive one or multiple charges, select the charge or charges in the Account Transaction list, and click pWaiveIcon.gif or press CTRL+W.
      • To waive all charges, click pWaiveAllIcon.gif or press CTRL+V.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Your library may make this feature unavailable for use.

    +

    The Waive dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To partially waive the selected charge or charges, type the new amount in the Amount box (maximum $2,000,000.00).
    2. +
    +

    If you are making a partial waive on a single charge, the transaction will be recorded as a partial waive on the charge, and the Account Transaction list will show a balance for the charge. If you are making a partial waive on multiple or all charges, the waived amount will be applied to the oldest charges first. Each waived transaction is removed from the Account Transaction list, and recorded in the Transaction History. Any remaining amount is applied to the next oldest charge as a partial waive.

    +
      +
    1. To apply the same waived amount to each of multiple charges, select (check) the Distributed Waive check box, and type an amount to waive. (If the library does not allow distributed waives, this check box is not available for selection.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If a specific individual charge is equal to the waive amount, that charge is completely waived. Charges less than the distributed waive amount are not affected.

    +
      +
    1. To add a note to the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    2. +
    +

    For distributed waives, the note will appear with each transaction.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Waive dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Patron Status workform - Account view appears, and the amount in the Charges box decreases. The following situations may occur:

    +
    +
      +
    • If a charge was only partially waived, then the charge still appears in the Account Transaction list with the balance due in the Balance column. The waiver appears in the Transaction Summary dialog box.
    • +
    • If charges were waived in full, then they no longer appear in the Account Transaction list. Instead, they appear in the Transaction Summary dialog box, along with the waivers.
    • +
    +
    +

    If you waived multiple charges, each charge line item has a corresponding waive line item.

    +

    If you have set Polaris to print fine receipts from the Patron Status workform, and your library has set Polaris to print fine receipts for waive transactions, a receipt prints.

    +

    Important:
    For the first time after installation only, you need to set up Polaris to print receipts and slips. You can also opt to print the fine receipt only if the patron does not receive eReceipts. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Working_with_Deposits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Working_with_Deposits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bdeaf640 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/Working_with_Deposits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working with Deposits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working with Deposits

    +

    Your library may require a deposit when a patron uses a valuable item, rents a room, or uses another library service. When the patron is finished with the service or item, you return all or part of the deposit. Deposits are tracked separately from the standard charge and pay transactions.

    +

    Note:
    You need the Circulation permission Create, return or forfeit a patron account deposit to work with deposits.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/collagenwkflw.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/collagenwkflw.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3d96156 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/collagenwkflw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Second Collection Agency Workflow + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Second Collection Agency Workflow

    +

    You can use the following workflow to manage patron accounts that have been returned from the first collection agency and are now submitted to a second collection agency.

    +
      +
    1. The first collection agency (often UMS) sends an Excel file to the library that identifies patron accounts that still have an outstanding debt to the library.
    2. +
    3. A Polaris user adds the patron records to a patron record set using the Add from file option. No data is imported from the Excel file; the file is used to match on the PatronID and pull the appropriate patron records, as they currently exist in the Polaris database, into the record set.
    4. +
    5. The user reviews the record set and removes any patron records that should not be referred to the second collection agency. The user may also select Bulk Change from the patron record set and make any necessary changes to the patron records before sending them to the second collection agency.
    6. +
    7. The user generates an item record set of the items associated with the patron records using options to specify which types of items to include in the item record set.
    8. +
    9. The user can select Bulk Change from the item record set and delete lost items. (This step is necessary because patron records cannot be secured if there are any items still associated with the patron account. Charges can still remain on the account, but all items must be removed before the record can be secured.) Alternatively, if the items are already in Lost status, they will go automatically to Missing or Withdrawn according to settings in the organization’s Lost Item Transition settings in Polaris Administration.
    10. +
    11. The user secures the patron records individually or using the Bulk Change process.
    12. +
    13. The second collection agency attempts to collect the money owed to the library.
    14. +
    15. The second collection agency sends a report to the library listing the patron accounts that are cleared.
    16. +
    17. The library releases the patron records one at a time.
    18. +
    19. On the released patron record, the library waives remaining fines or pays them using “collection agency” payment.
    20. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/release_a_secured_patron_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/release_a_secured_patron_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b52e20cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/release_a_secured_patron_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Release a secured patron record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Release a secured patron record

    +

    You cannot use the patron Bulk Change process to release secured patrons; they must be released individually.

    +

    Note: +
    The permission Patron record: Release, set for the patron's registered branch, is required to release a patron record.

    +

    To release a secured patron record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Patron Status workform for a secured patron.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Release Patron Record.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save. The patron record is released and a confirmation message appears. In addition, a Patron record released transaction is recorded.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/seclistviews.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/seclistviews.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d7eef74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/seclistviews.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Secured patron indicator in listviews + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Secured patron indicator in listviews

    +

    A red exclamation point is displayed in the Find Tool results list and in patron record list views when a patron record is secured.

    +

    + +

    +

    When you open a secured patron record, a message is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +

    A red exclamation point displays in a patron record set if the patron's record is secured .

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/secpatrecs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/secpatrecs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28924651 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/secpatrecs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Secured patron indicator in patron workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Secured patron indicator in patron workforms

    +

    When a patron record is secured, the title bar of the Patron Status and Patron Registration workforms displays: [Record is secured]. Many of the menu options and screen elements are dimmed to indicate they are unavailable.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/securepatrecover.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/securepatrecover.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ebdfac8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/securepatrecover.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Secure and Release Patron Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Secure and Release Patron Records

    +

    You can secure an individual patron record from the Patron Status workform using a Tools option, or secure multiple patron records from the Patron Record Set workform using Bulk Change. See Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    When you secure a patron record, all circulation and payment activity, and most other patron record updates are prevented, in both the staff client and the PACs (PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Children's PAC).

    +

    The following activities are also prevented if a patron is secured:

    +
      +
    • Sending Fines notices. Patrons with secured records do not receive Polaris Fines notices, since the assumption is they are now obligated to deal directly with the collection agency regarding their debts. The library can still produce Patron Billing Statements.
    • +
    • Checking out items or logging into the patron's account from a self-check unit
    • +
    • Deleting the patron record
    • +
    • Designating the patron as a community representative
    • +
    • Using Outreach Services for a patron
    • +
    • Editing a community profile from the PAC (if the patron is already a community representative)
    • +
    • Checking out in offline mode
    • +
    +

    In addition, secured patron records are never included in collection agency Submission, Update, or Synchronization reports because these records cannot have any changes made to them (including adding collection agency fees or taking payments).

    +

    Note: +
    If your library uses the secure patron feature and offline circulation, be sure to secure patron records when there is no offline activity and use the most recent offline file.

    +

    See also:

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/take_credit_card_pay-EnvisionWare.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/take_credit_card_pay-EnvisionWare.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bab8207 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPuseacct/take_credit_card_pay-EnvisionWare.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + Take credit card payments for fines and fees - EnvisionWare + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Take Credit Card Payments for Fines and fees - EnvisionWare

    +

    If your library’s e-commerce gateway is EnvisionWare, and the workstation has a card reader attached, you can accept credit card payments in Polaris. When EnvisionWare is set up as the payment gateway in Polaris Administration, your library can specify whether to use EnvisionWare's Staff Register application to make these payments or to use the Polaris interface. In either case, EnvisionWare handles the financial transactions and PCI compliance.

    +

    To take a credit or debit card payment from the Patron Status workform - Account view using EnvisionWare as the payment gateway:

    +

    Note:
    You can also accept credit card payments from:
    Patron Status > Items out view > Declare lost or Renew
    Patron Registration > Pay registration fee
    Item Record > Check in > Pay overdue fine
    Check In > Resolve billed or lost item, or Renew chargeable overdue item

    +
      +
    1. Open the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Access the account data for a patron record.
    2. +
    3. Select Pay or press CTRL+Y,or selectPay all or press CTRL+L.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Pay dialog box appears.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the payment amount, type the new amount in the Amount box.
    2. +
    +

    Over-payments are not allowed for credit card payments. For details about partial payments, see Pay charges from the Account view.

    +
      +
    1. Select Credit card in the Method box.
    2. +
    3. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Pay dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    The system checks whether the payment is an overpayment, which is not allowed, or under the minimal amount set for credit card transactions, and displays appropriate messages to stop the transaction in these cases.

    +

    Otherwise, the Credit Card Payment dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    You can add a note to the transaction. Entries in the Note field on this dialog box appear on the Polaris Store Order. For information about viewing credit card transactions and “orders,” see Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
      +
    1. Click Submit.
    2. +
    +

    A message instructs you to swipe the credit card.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Slide the patron's credit card through the card reader, and select Submit.
    2. +
    +

    When the card is authorized, a confirmation message is displayed.

    +

    The system notifies EnvisionWare that the transaction is finished, the ILS Store Order is updated to Complete status, the ILS Store Transaction is updated to Success status, and the patron account is updated.

    +

    + +

    +

    For details about how the payment is recorded in the Patron Status workform - Account view, see Pay charges from the Account view. If your library has enabled email credit card receipts in Polaris Administration, and there is a valid e-mail address in the patron’s record, the patron receives an email receipt for the transaction.

    +

    See also: Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Circulation_Workstations_Receipts_Sounds_Smart_Cards.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Circulation_Workstations_Receipts_Sounds_Smart_Cards.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..61560697 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Circulation_Workstations_Receipts_Sounds_Smart_Cards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Circulation Workstations: Receipts, Sounds, Smart Cards + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulation Workstations: Receipts, Sounds, Smart Cards

    +

    To get ready for circulation, set each circulation workstation for receipt printing, audio alerts, and 3M™ smart card use if appropriate. Typically, you will need to do these procedures only once for each workstation.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Correct_an_auto-cut_problem_for_hold_pickup_slips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Correct_an_auto-cut_problem_for_hold_pickup_slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17b4a8e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Correct_an_auto-cut_problem_for_hold_pickup_slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Correct an Auto-Cut Problem for Hold Pickup Slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Correct an Auto-Cut Problem for Hold Pickup Slips

    +

    To correct an issue with hold pick-up slips on certain EPSON® and other line printers, where the paper is not cut properly at the end of the slip:

    +
      +
    1. Open your EPSON Printer Preferences - Document Settings, and set Paper Source to no automatic feed and no automatic cut.
    2. +
    3. Select Circulation, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click pbutCircOpt00021.gif. The Circulation Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the Receipt Printer Options tab. The Receipt Printer Options tabbed page appears.
    6. +
    7. Select (check) Auto-cut at the end.
    8. +
    +

    Important: +
    For line printers such as the Star® TSP series that cut the paper correctly, leave the Auto-cut at the end option unchecked.

    +

    Note: +
    This setting is also available in Polaris Administration (Patron Services parameters - Hold slip pickup options). See Set up hold pickup slips.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_receipt_printer_message_text.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_receipt_printer_message_text.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae94ccf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_receipt_printer_message_text.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Receipt Printer Message Text + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Receipt Printer Message Text

    +

    This procedure only needs to be done once unless you want to change your settings.

    +

    Note: +
    To customize message text, you must have the Circulation permission Modify receipt message text: Allow. See Setting Circulation Permissions.

    +

    To set a standard message that appears on check-out and fine receipts generated from the Polaris staff client and check-out receipts from Polaris ExpressCheck:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click pbutCircOpt.gif. The Circulation Options dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select the Receipt Printer Options tab. The Receipt Printer Options tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Type your custom message in the Message text area. The custom message will be used by all workstations registered to your current log-on branch in Polaris Administration.
    2. +
    3. Click OK in the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Important: +
    You may need to reboot ExpressCheck workstations to see your changes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_the_workstation_to_print_receipts_and_slips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_the_workstation_to_print_receipts_and_slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d906b58e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Set_the_workstation_to_print_receipts_and_slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Workstation to Print Receipts and Slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Workstation to Print Receipts and Slips

    +

    This procedure needs to be done only once for each workform from which you want to print, unless you want to change your settings. Follow these steps on each workstation to set Polaris to print receipts and slips from one or more workforms:

    +
      +
    1. Open the appropriate workform from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:
      • Check Out workform - Select Circulation, Check Out.
      • Check In workform - Select Circulation, Check In.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note: +
    Check-in receipts that list the items checked in for a patron or group of patrons do not print automatically, but are available for manual printing from the workform. See Do a normal check-in from the Check In workform.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Request Manager workform - Select Circulation, Request Manager.
    • +
    • Hold Request workform - Select Circulation, Hold Requests. Find and open the hold request (see Find hold requests).
    • +
    • Patron Status workform - Select Circulation, Patron Status. Find and open any patron record (see Find patron services and related records).
    • +
    • Item Record workform - Select Cataloging, Item Records. Find and open any item record ( see Find cataloging records in your library’s database).
    • +
    • Outreach Services Manager workform - Select Patron Services, Outreach Services.
    • +
    • Receive Shipment workform - Select Acquisitions, Receive Shipment.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. On the workform, select Tools, Options... to display the Tools Options dialog box. The Receipt/Slip tabbed page appears.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    Complete the Tools Options dialog box from each workform where you want to print receipts or slips. For example, if you want to print fine receipts when you are checking in items and when you are renewing items at the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, do this step for both the Check In workform and the Patron Status workform.

    +
      +
    1. Select one or more of the following receipt/slip check boxes:
      • Check out receipt
      • Fine receipt - Select Fine receipt to print fine receipts from this workform. If you check only if no eReceipt, fine receipts are printed only when the patron does not receive eReceipts. If only if no eReceipt is not checked, printed receipts are produced in addition to eReceipts for patrons who receive eReceipts. For more information about setting up eReceipts in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up eReceipts.
      • In-transit slip
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    Select In-transit slip if you want to print the slip when an item’s status changes to Transferred (because it will fill a hold and needs to be sent to the pick-up library) or In Transit (because it belongs to another library). If you want to print the slip only when an item’s status changes to Transferred, select (check) Holds only. If your library has enabled the combined In-transit and pickup slip, if the item is going in transit to fill a hold, the combined slip, which includes the holds pickup slip, prints at this point and the pickup slip will not print when the item is received at the destination branch.

    +
    +
      +
    • Hold slip
    • +
    • Hold call slip (available if this option is enabled for your library)
    • +
    • Hold pickup slip (available if this option is enabled for your library)
    • +
    • Print ILL slip (Request Manager workform - ILL view only)
    • +
    • Print ILL pickup slip (Request Manager workform - ILL view only; available if the hold pickup slip is enabled for your library)
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following printer Style options:
      • To use a receipt printer, click Receipt.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note: +
    If you are using a receipt printer, you may be able to set automatic cutting and printing options. See Set receipt printer control codes. You can also customize the message text that appears on all receipts. See Set receipt printer message text. If you have experienced a problem with hold pickup slips, where the paper is not cut properly, see Correct an auto-cut problem for hold pickup slips.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • To use a page printer, click Page.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate network printer in the Printer box.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you are working offline in a terminal server environment, you may need to set up receipt printing again if you switch terminal servers. Check the printer setting to be sure the appropriate printer is selected.

    +
      +
    1. If you use a receipt printer, select the appropriate printer driver in the Drivers box. These options are set in Polaris Administration. See Set receipt printer control codes.
    2. +
    3. Click OK in the dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Repeat this procedure for each workform from which you want to print receipts or slips.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Optional check-out receipts - To conserve resources, your library may opt to print a check-out receipt only when the patron requests one. If the library has set this option in Polaris Administration and you have set check-out receipt printing for the workform, instead of automatically printing a receipt at the end of the check out or renewal process, a prompt to print the receipt is displayed and you can ask the patron if he wants a printed receipt. For information about setting this option in Polaris Administration, see Set check-out receipt options.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The receipt prompt is not displayed for renewals from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. You can optionally print a “receipt” from this view by suppressing check-out receipt printing from the workform Tools options, and then printing receipts on demand. To print receipts on demand, print the Items Out list by selecting the printer icon on the listview or pressing CTRL+ALT+P. The library can specify the information included in the printed version of the Items Out list. See Set Items Out receipt options.

    +
      +
    • eReceipts - Your library may enable eReceipts (email and/or text message receipts) for patrons who prefer these instead of printed receipts. Enabling eReceipts for a patron does not automatically disable printed receipts, as the patron may want both on some occasions. The prompt for a check-out receipt, if enabled, will still appear for patrons who have opted for eReceipts. For information about enabling eReceipts in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up eReceipts. For information about eReceipt settings in the patron record, see Add notification data to a patron record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Circulation_Audio_Signals.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Circulation_Audio_Signals.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9baf2b80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Circulation_Audio_Signals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Circulation Audio Signals + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Circulation Audio Signals

    +

    Audio signals at circulation alert you to processing events, messages, blocks, and other conditions. They are available during check-in and check-out transactions, and whenever circulation blocks appear. If your computer has a sound card and external speakers, you can specify different sounds to distinguish among the various circulation events. If you do not want to specify different sounds for audio alerts, each alert has the same low “beep” sound.

    +

    To set sounds for the various audio alerts at circulation:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click pbutCircOpt00022.gif. The Circulation: Options dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options:
      • If you want to specify sound types other than the default low beep, click Use Windows Sounds. Your computer must have a sound card and external speakers for this option.
      • If you do not want to specify sound types, click Use Default Beep.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    3.  If you clicked Use Windows Sounds in step 2, set up the sound for each message type:
      1. Select Sound from the Windows Control Panel. The Sound dialog box appears.
      2. Click the Sounds tab. The Sounds tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Program Eventslist, under Windows, select the event type to which you want to assign a sound. Polaris uses the following sound events (their Polaris message icons are in parentheses):
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Asterisk (i) - Polaris informational messages that do not require action, such as “Item was created on the fly”
    • +
    • Critical Stop (X) - Polaris program errors, such as incorrect barcode or illegal operation
    • +
    • Default beep (no associated icon) - The Special Loan dialog box, calendar controls, and scanning barcodes
    • +
    • Exclamation (!) - Dialog boxes that are similar to errors or warnings, such as blocks and fines
    • +
    • Question (?) - Error messages that present the user with options, such as renewal limits or holds
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Sounds list, choose a sound for the selected event.
    2. +
    3. Repeat to assign a sound to each of the five Polaris event types.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box.
    6. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Exit from the staff client and log back in to see the effects of your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Barcode scan signals - A Polaris Administration setting controls an audio alert for correctly reading patron and item barcode labels at check-in and check-out. The default setting is off because most barcode readers are programmed to beep for correct scans. To change the setting in Polaris if your scanner is not programmed for sound see Audio feedback for barcode scan (Workstation).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Up_Receipt_Printing_from_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Up_Receipt_Printing_from_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b6aa5f81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_Up_Receipt_Printing_from_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms

    +

    For each circulation workstation, you specify which receipts and slips should print from specific workforms, whether to use a page or receipt printer, and which printer should be used.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_the_Workstation_for_Smart_Card_Use.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_the_Workstation_for_Smart_Card_Use.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3218c00c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/Setting_the_Workstation_for_Smart_Card_Use.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting the Workstation for Smart Card Use + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting the Workstation for Smart Card Use

    +

    If your workstation uses a 3M™ smart card reader to read patron smart cards, you need to set the workstation to use the reader. This procedure needs to be done only once. To set the workstation for smart card use:

    +
      +
    1. Select Circulation, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Circulation Options dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select the Smart Card Readers tab. The Smart Card Reader tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Smart card reader installed.
    6. +
    7. Click OK on the dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Exit from the staff client and log back in to see the effects of your changes.
    10. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Using the smart card reader at check-out - See Check out an item.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/circ_receipts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/circ_receipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc7af344 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services/PPworkstn/circ_receipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Circulation Receipts and Slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulation Receipts and Slips

    +
      +
    • Check-out/renewal receipts list the items checked out or renewed for a patron. Check-out receipts can be printed from the Check Out workform; renewal receipts can be printed from the Check Out workform and the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. You can print check-out receipts automatically or optionally (with a prompt for staff to print the receipt). Receipts for renewal will be printed automatically if enabled for the work form. If you want renewal receipts to be optional, disable the check-out receipt option for the workform and print the items out list if a receipt is desired. See Renew items from the Patron Status workform. For additional information on printing receipts from the Check Out workform, refer to Check out an item. You can also set bulk check-out receipts to print from the Outreach Services Manager workform, if your library uses Polaris Outreach Services. Polaris Administration settings control the specific information that appears on the receipt, and your library may set an option to print a receipt only when the patron asks for one. See Set check-out receipt options.
    • +
    • Check-in receipts can be manually printed from the Check In workform, Normal and Bulk views. When a patron’s items have been checked in, you select one or more items in the list and select File, Check in Receipt. If items are selected from multiple patrons, the items are grouped by patrons, and three blank lines are added at the end of each group. If auto-cut receipt printing is enabled, the receipt is cut at the end of each patron’s group of items. (Items with no patron information, for example those that went from In to In at check in, are also grouped together and separated from patron items.) Polaris Administration settings control the specific information that appears on the receipt. See Set check-in receipt options.
    • +
    +

    +

      +
    • Fine receipts list the fines paid or waived for overdue items, replacement items, and other fees for a patron. Fine receipts are printed automatically from the following locations:
      • Check In workform - Normal view (Check In - Fine dialog box)
      • Patron Status workform - Items Out view (Overdue Fine dialog box)
      • Patron Status workform - Account view (Pay and Waive dialog boxes)
      • Declare lost item dialog box
    • +
    +

    +

    Polaris Administration settings control the specific information that appears on the receipt, and whether the receipt is printed for waive transactions. Your library can also set Polaris to print duplicate fine receipts if accounting practices require them. See Set fine receipt options.

    +
      +
    • Hold slips/hold call slips are printed automatically when an item’s status becomes Held at the Check In workform, Check Out workform, Item Record workform, Patron Status workform - Items Out view, Hold Request workform, or Receive Shipment workform. Polaris Administration settings control the specific information that appears on the hold slip, and which hold slips are available. Polaris provides four types of hold slips:
    • +
    • Default hold slip - Prints automatically when an item’s status becomes Held at a circulation transaction. Libraries typically place the hold slip with the held material for identification purposes. See Set hold slip options.
    • +
    • Hold call slip - For libraries that call their patrons for held items. It includes extended information and is laid out so that the title information is exposed when placed in a book. See Enable hold call slips.
    • +
    • Hold/ILL pick-up slip - For libraries where patrons can pick up their own held items. The hold pick-up slip is inserted in the book so that the patron’s name, partial name, and/or barcode and the pick-up date are visible on the shelf. This slip is printed horizontally or vertically on the receipt paper, and requires a line mode receipt printer such as a Star® TSP600, Star TSP700, or Dell™ T200. See Set up hold pickup slips.
    • +
    • Combined in-transit/hold slip - If configured in Polaris Administration, a combined in-transit/hold slip will print when the item is sent in-transit. Then, instead of the pickup library printing a hold slip when the item arrives, the same slip can be used as a wrapper for the held item. See Set in-transit slip options.
    • +
    • In-transit slips are printed automatically when an item’s status changes to Transferred (because the item will fill a hold and needs to be sent to the pick-up library) or In Transit (because the item belongs to another branch), and when you transfer an item for a hold from the Hold Request workform. You can place the in-transit slip with the item to be sent to the other branch. You can also choose to print an in-transit slip only when the item status changes to Transferred because it will fill a hold. Polaris Administration settings control the information included on the slip. See Set in-transit slip options.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    +
    When an item’s status changes to Transferred to fill a request, the in-transit slip includes the text FOR HOLD. The text does not appear on in-transit slips printed when an item is checked in and just needs to be shipped back to its assigned branch.

    +
      +
    • ILL slips are printed automatically when an interlibrary loan item is received on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. Libraries typically place the ILL slip with the material for identification purposes. The information that appears on the ILL slip is controlled by the same Polaris Administration settings that control hold slips. Set hold slip options.
    • +
    • Offline receipts record the items checked out or renewed for a patron offline. The offline Check In workform list view can also be printed on a receipt or page printer.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Polaris supports hold pickup and in-transit slip printing on Epson® ReStick™ printers. For information about enabling this feature, see Epson® ReStick Printers - Hold and In-Transit Slips.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Set_up_Borrow_by_Mail_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Set_up_Borrow_by_Mail_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26f5002a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Set_up_Borrow_by_Mail_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + + Define Borrow by Mail parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define Borrow by Mail parameters

    +

    To set up Borrow by Mail, you first designate processing centers at the system level. Other Borrow by Mail settings are available at the library, system, or branch level.

    +

    To set up Borrow by Mail circulation in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the system, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Borrow by mail. The Borrow by Mail dialog box - Processing Centers tabbed page appears. (This page appears only when the dialog box is opened at the system level.)
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select all the organizations that might serve as processing centers for the branches that will enable Borrow by Mail.
    2. +
    +

    To enable Borrow by Mail features for any individual organization, at least one organization must be designated as a processing center on this tabbed page.

    +
      +
    • If you have one central processing center for the whole system, designate only one processing center.
    • +
    • If various processing centers will serve various branches, or if branches will serve as their own processing centers, select all the possible processing centers.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Processing centers may be actual branches or virtual organizations set up for this specific purpose. For more information about creating new organizations, see Setting Statistical Codes for Reports.

    +
      +
    1. If you will set up all Borrow by Mail options at the system level (that is, all organizations will participate in Borrow by Mail and use the same settings), go directly to the next step. Otherwise, click OK to close the dialog box at this point, and re-open it for each organization that will use Borrow by Mail circulation.
    2. +
    3. On the Options tabbed page, select (check) Enable Borrow by Mail and select a processing center for this organization.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Telephone notices include Borrow by Mail messages if Borrow by Mail is enabled at the system level. If you use both telephone notification and Borrow by Mail, enable Borrow by Mail at the system level, then disable it for any branch that is not using Borrow by Mail.

    +

    The available options depend on your settings on the system-level Processing Centers tabbed page.

    +

    Note:
    An item that fills a Borrow by Mail request created in the staff client is shipped to the processing center designated for the log-in branch of the workstation that created the hold request. An item that fills a Borrow by Mail request from the PAC is shipped to the processing center designated for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    Important:
    Be sure the processing center is listed in the holds routing sequence table for the branch that originated the hold request. See Setting Up Holds Routing.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select (check) Display confirmation message in PAC to display a special confirmation message when the patron places a Borrow by Mail request.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can display the patron’s contact information on the PAC request confirmation page so that the patron can quickly verify the address to which the Borrow by Mail item will be shipped. See Set Holds options: Alerts and blocks.

    +

    Note:
    If the processing center charges a delivery fee (see step 11), this confirmation message states the charge and offers the option to continue or cancel the request.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select (check) Staff display note and edit the text of the note if you wish (maximum 250 characters). If individual branches process their own Borrow by Mail items along with regular circulations, you should check this option to alert staff members to Borrow by Mail items. This note is automatically added to the Hold Request workform - Notes view when the request is saved. It then appears when an item that fills the Borrow by Mail request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation, and alerts the staff member that the item requires Borrow by Mail processing. The system uses the processing center’s setting.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) Select (check) PAC display note and edit the text of the note if you wish (maximum 250 characters). This note is automatically added to the Hold Request workform - Notes view when the request is saved. The note is displayed to patrons in the information view for individual items listed on the PAC patron account Requests page. The system uses the processing center’s setting.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Staff members with the branch-level Circulation permission Hold requests: Modify PAC display note can edit the note for individual hold requests on the Hold Request workform - Notes view.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Suppress charge for Outreach Services patrons if you ordinarily charge a delivery fee for Borrow by Mail requests, but you do not want to charge a fee to homebound (Outreach Services) patrons.
    2. +
    3. If you want to change the loan period to accommodate shipping time, select the number of days to extend the calculated loan period for an item. This setting is available only if the organization is designated as a processing center. The system uses the processing center’s setting at bulk checkout. Bulk-Processing Borrow by Mail Items.
    4. +
    5. Click the Limits tab to set Borrow by Mail limits:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Check the patron codes for the patrons permitted to place Borrow by Mail requests. The system uses the settings for the patron’s registered branch in both the staff client and PAC.
    • +
    • (Settings available for the system or library level only, or for the processing center defined for a branch organization.) If you want to charge a Borrow by Mail delivery fee, select the appropriate patron code, set the charge amount, and click Apply. You can set separate charges for different patron codes. To specify the same charge for multiple patron codes, select the codes, then set the charge amount and click Apply. The system uses the processing center’s settings for charges. A processing center should set charges for all the patron codes it intends to charge, regardless of whether those codes are used for the processing center’s own patrons.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Requests placed from the PAC use the settings of the processing center for the patron’s registered branch, while requests placed from the staff client use the settings of the processing center for the workstation’s branch. It is therefore possible that the fee may differ depending on where the request is placed.

    +
      +
    • Deselect (uncheck) the item material types that should not be eligible to fill Borrow by Mail requests. For PAC requests, the system uses the setting for the patron’s registered library. For staff client requests, the system uses the setting for the workstation branch. Be sure to uncheck any item material types used for eContent such as ebooks.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can prevent a specific item from filling a Borrow by Mail request by checking Do not mail on the Item Record workform - Cataloging view.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Print & Notices tab and make the following settings:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Specify a return address for the item mailer. You can select Processing Branch (default) or Item’s Branch (item’s assigned branch).
    • +
    • Select (check) Enable failure notice to send an automatic notice to the patron when an item cannot be checked out during Borrow by Mail bulk checkout due to blocks on the patron account.
    • +
    • If you checked Enable failure notice, select a notification method.
    • +
    +

    The available method options are determined by your settings for notification methods on the Notification options parameter - General tabbed page. For more information about these settings, see Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +

    Note:
    Telephone notices include Borrow by Mail messages if Borrow by Mail is enabled at the system level. If you use both telephone notification and Borrow by Mail, enable Borrow by Mail at the system level, then disable it for any branch that is not using Borrow by Mail.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Borrow by Mail workflows - See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
    • +
    • Request status of Out - When a held item is checked out, the request status changes to Out until the item is returned. The request is then deleted. The status is automatically enabled for organizations using Borrow by Mail and is displayed in the staff client and the PAC patron account (where it appears as Sent). Organizations that do not use Borrow by Mail can choose to display or suppress the display of requests with the status of Out. On the Holds options dialog box - Staff & PAC tabbed page (Request parameters), select (check) the option Display request status “Out”. The setting for the workstation’s logon branch controls the display in the staff client, while the setting for the patron’s registered branch controls the display in the PAC patron account.
    • +
    • Modify Borrow by Mail item mailer or failure notice text - You can edit and translate the default text with Polaris Language Editor. See the Polaris Language Editor Guide or Language Editor online Help. Foreign language text for the mailer must include the fee as text because the system does not automatically insert the amount in the foreign language translation.
    • +
    • Placing Borrow by Mail requests in PAC - See the PowerPAC online Help.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Setting_Up_Borrow_by_Mail_Circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Setting_Up_Borrow_by_Mail_Circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8aae7291 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPBorrowBMsa/Setting_Up_Borrow_by_Mail_Circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation

    +

    With Polaris Borrow by Mail options, staff members and patrons can request library materials and have the requested materials delivered by mail. Libraries can restrict Borrow by Mail options by patron code, establish a fee for the service, and allow exceptions to the fee for some patrons, such as homebound patrons.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris Borrow by Mail is available by license. There is no additional cost, but Borrow by Mail features are available only if the license is activated.

    +

    Within a library system or consortium, one or more branches can be designated as Borrow by Mail processing centers in Polaris Administration. Processing centers may be actual branches or virtual organizations set up for this specific purpose. When a Borrow by Mail request is placed, the pickup location defaults to a designated processing center, and the item is routed to this location by normal holds routing procedures. You can designate multiple processing centers. Or a branch may handle both normal and Borrow by Mail requests by establishing itself as a processing location. In this case, an optional message alerts staff to a Borrow by Mail request when the item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation.

    +

    At the processing center, Borrow by Mail items are placed in packets (one item per package), with an accompanying letter, mailing label, and return address label. They are checked out to the patron and then shipped. A tracking number can then be entered into the request workform. After check-out and until the item is returned, the request status is Out.

    +

    To set up Borrow by Mail, you first designate processing centers at the system level. Other Borrow by Mail settings are available at the library, system, or branch level. See Define Borrow by Mail parameters.

    +

    For more information about using Borrow by Mail functions in the staff client, see Borrow By Mail Circulation.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c920868 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_Comprise_SmartPAY.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + E-Commerce with Comprise SmartPAY + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with Comprise SmartPAY

    +

    Polaris supports e-commerce with Comprise SmartPAY Merchant Service Program (MSP) from Comprise Technologies, Inc., a PCI-compliant hosted payment solution suitable for both Polaris Virtual Private Cloud (Hosted) and Polaris ILS turnkey customers in the United States and Canada. Comprise SmartPAY, which handles authorization requirements, is responsible for PCI compliance. Polaris stores only the last four digits of the credit card number and the store order when payment is made through Comprise SmartPAY. For more information about the Comprise SmartPAY solution, see: http://www.comprisetechnologies.com/?page_id=32

    +

    With Comprise SmartPAY MSP, the library can accept credit card and debit card payments made from the Polaris staff client, Leap, Polaris ExpressCheck, Polaris PowerPAC, and Mobile PAC. Comprise SmartPAY uses a single SmartServer linked with your library’s Polaris database, and the library will have a single Comprise account for all payment portals. Each staff client and ExpressCheck workstation that will accept credit card payments must have a Comprise SmartTerminal (the SmartPAY card reader device) connected to it.

    +

    Refunds must be performed at a staff client workstation with a SmartPAY SmartTerminal device attached. Both the branch that took the payment and the branch issuing the refund must use SmartPAY. The refund transaction is initiated in Polaris, for example from the Patron Account. The user is prompted to swipe the card in the SmartTerminal device. The same card that made the payment must be used. Each refund requires a card swipe. If the user is refunding 3 separate payments, the card must be swiped 3 times.

    +

    SmartPAY refunds are issued “per payment,” not per charge. For example:

    +
      +
    • If 3 charges were paid with a single payment transaction, the total of all 3 can be refunded with a single refund transaction/card swipe.
    • +
    • If 3 charges were paid with 3 separate payment transactions, then each must be refunded with separate refund transactions—3 card swipes.
    • +
    • Partial refunds are supported when refunding any payment. If 3 charges were paid with a single transaction, a partial refund of each payment is supported.
    • +
    • Automatic refunds related to lost item recovery are not supported. Polaris recommends that you disable any Refund option for lost-and-paid recovery when using SmartPAY. If automatic refund is enabled with SmartPay, the payment will be left as is in the patron account. No refund is created.
    • +
    • Refunds made from the SmartPAY web interface (not using the API from within the Polaris staff client) are not reflected in the patron account and cannot be duplicated in Polaris.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Credit card payments for Polaris Fusion digital materials through SmartPAY are not available at this time.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Staff Client Payments - Comprise SmartPAY

    +

    The staff member can pay a patron’s charges via Comprise SmartPAY when Comprise SmartPAY is the selected payment gateway for the staff member’s log-on branch (see Set up Comprise SmartPAY processing in Polaris Administration ), and a SmartTerminal is connected to the workstation. The system checks whether the payment is an overpayment, which is not allowed, or under the minimal amount set for credit card transactions, and displays appropriate messages to stop the transaction in these cases. Otherwise, the Credit Card Payment dialog box opens.

    +

    + CreditCardPaymentDX.gif 

    +

    Note:
    Entries in the Note field on this dialog box appear on the Polaris Store Order. For information about viewing credit card transactions and “orders,” Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +

    When the staff member clicks Submit, the system creates Store Order, Store Transaction, and Store Details entries with Pending status, sends the request to SmartPAY, and sends a query result request to SmartPAY every 5 seconds. When the credit card is swiped at the SmartTerminal device and authorized, the system notifies SmartPAY that the transaction is finished, the ILS Store Order is updated to Complete status and the ILS Store Transaction to Success status, and the patron account is updated. A confirmation message is displayed after a few seconds, and a receipt is generated as with any other payment method.

    +

    ExpressCheck Payments - Comprise SmartPAY

    +

    The ExpressCheck workstation must be equipped with a SmartTerminal card reader. The logged-on ExpressCheck user selects the charges to pay on the patron account Fines & fees page, and selects Pay. The confirmation screen is displayed.

    +

    + XpressConfirm.gif 

    +

    When the user selects Accept, the screen instructs the user to swipe the credit card at the SmartTerminal device.

    +

    + XpressSwipe.gif 

    +

    The Polaris system creates Store Order, Store Transaction, and Store Details entries with Pending status, sends the request to SmartPAY, and sends a query result request to SmartPAY every 5 seconds. When the credit card is swiped at the SmartTerminal device and authorized, a success message is displayed and the user selects Finish.

    +

    + XpressFinish.gif 

    +

    The Polaris system then notifies SmartPAY the transaction is finished, the ILS Store Order is updated to Complete status and the ILS Store Transaction to Success status, and the patron account is updated. A print or e-mail receipt is generated according to the receipt option the user selected.

    +

    PAC Payments - Comprise SmartPAY

    +

    Payments from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC are Web-based, and patrons enter their credit card information by typing it in an on-screen form.

    +

    Note:
    You can prevent Web-based credit card payments from within the library by setting the system-level Credit Card Payments parameter Exclude local workstations from web based payments to Yes. See Excluding In-House Workstations from Web-Based Payments .

    +

    The logged-on PAC user selects the charges to pay on the patron account Fines & Fees page, and clicks Pay Fines Now. If the library has specified a processing fee, a message is displayed.

    +

    + PACProcFee.gif 

    +

    When the user clicks Accept, the Fines & Fee summary page is displayed. This page totals the selected charges and processing fee, if any, and informs the user that they will be redirected to SmartPAY.

    +

    + PACFinesFeesSummary.gif 

    +

    When the user clicks Continue, the SmartPAY checkout page opens.

    +

    Note:
    The “time remaining” value on this page is configured by Comprise SmartPAY. The default value is 90 seconds.

    +

    + SmartPAYPmntForm.gif 

    +

    The user enters credit card payment information and an e-mail address. SmartPAY will send an e-mail receipt for the payment to the e-mail address specified on this page. When the user clicks FINISH, the SmartPAY payment confirmation page is displayed. The ID number on this page is the Polaris patron record ID, and the invoice number is the Polaris Store Order ID.

    +

    + SmartPAYConfirm.gif 

    +

    When the user clicks Finish, a printable receipt page is displayed. The library information shown on the e-mail receipt and on this page is specified by Comprise as part of your setup process. The Invoice number is the Polaris Store Order ID, and the Track number is the Comprise transaction ID. The user can click Print to print the receipt, or click Finish to return to the Polaris PAC page specified in Polaris Administration (see Set up Comprise SmartPAY processing in Polaris Administration ). Similar processing is available for donations.

    +

    + SmartPAYReceipt.gif 

    +

    SmartPAY Staff User Interface

    +

    SmartPAY also provides a SmartPAY API Staff User Interface at
    https://dev.comprisetechnologies.com/SMARTPAYAPI/WEBSMARTPAY.dll?Adminlogin

    +

    You can use this interface to get a transaction report, and credit or void transactions.

    +

    + CompriseStaffinterface.gif 

    +

    Supply the username and password provided by SmartPAY, and log in. From the Activity tab, you can list all transactions made from SmartPAY terminals or online for the specified time period.

    +

    + SmartPAYReport.gif 

    +

    Credits can be made for any transactions that were made before today and have a remaining payment balance. Voids can be made for payment transactions that were made today. However, Credits and Voids made from the SmartPay API Staff User Interface do not update the patron account in Polaris. The staff member must manually reconcile these transactions within Polaris.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_EnvisionWare.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_EnvisionWare.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b7793ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_EnvisionWare.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + + E-Commerce with EnvisionWare + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with EnvisionWare®

    +

    Libraries licensed to use EnvisionWare as the payments gateway for submitting credit card payments can select from the following options in the Credit Card Payment > Online payments configure parameter in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    • Enable credit card payments from the PAC (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC) - When this option is selected, patrons can use the EnvisionWare eCommerce Services Self Service application to submit credit card payments from the PAC. The Polaris API is required.
    • +
    • Enable credit card payments from the staff client or Leap without using EnvisionWare's point of sale (POS) Staff Register software - When this option is selected, staff members can submit credit card payments from the Polaris staff client.
    • +
    • Enable credit card payments from the staff client using EnvisionWare's Staff Register application - When this option is selected, staff members use the EnvisionWare Staff Register application to submit credit card payments from the Polaris staff client. SIP is required.
    • +
    • Enable credit card payments from ExpressCheck.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Partial payments can be accepted in the staff client, but not in ExpressCheck. Refunds for credit card payments cannot be processed through EnvisionWare.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Staff Client Credit Card Payments - EnvisionWare

    +

    In Polaris Administration, your library can set up credit card payments from the staff client using EnvisionWare's Staff Register interface or the Polaris interface. If Enable ExpressCheck/Staff Client (without POS) is selected for the library organization, the Polaris credit card payment interface is used. If Enable Staff Client with POS is selected for the library organization, the EnvisionWare Staff Register interface is used.

    +

    Staff client credit card payments without EnvisionWare's Staff Register interface

    +

    The staff member can pay a patron’s charges via EnvisionWare when it is the selected payment gateway for the staff member’s log-on branch (see Set up EnvisionWare processing in Polaris Administration ). The system checks whether the payment is an overpayment, which is not allowed, or under the minimal amount set for credit card transactions, and displays appropriate messages to stop the transaction in these cases. Otherwise, the Credit Card Payment dialog box opens.

    +

    + CreditCardPaymentDX.gif 

    +

    Note:
    Entries in the Note field on this dialog box appear on the Polaris Store Order. For information about viewing credit card transactions and “orders,” see Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +

    Staff client credit card payments using EnvisionWare's Staff Register interface

    +

    When the option Enable Staff Client with POS is selected, the Staff Register application is used to submit payments initiated from the Polaris staff client. Credit card payments can be made from the Patron Status workform, Patron Account view or the Check In workform.

    +

    The user selects Pay, and the EnvisionWare Staff Register application opens where the user selects the fines or fees the patron is paying.

    +

    ExpressCheck Credit Card Payments - EnvisionWare

    +

    The logged-on ExpressCheck user selects the charges to pay on the patron account Fines & fees page, and selects Pay. The confirmation screen is displayed.

    +

    + XpressConfirm.gif 

    +

    When the user selects Accept, the screen instructs the user to swipe the credit card.

    +

    + XpressSwipe.gif 

    +

    The Polaris system creates Store Order, Store Transaction, and Store Details entries with Pending status, sends the request to EnvisionWare, and sends a query result request to EnvisionWare every 5 seconds. When the credit card is swiped and authorized, a success message is displayed and the user selects Finish.

    +

    + XpressFinish.gif 

    +

    The Polaris system then notifies EnvisionWare the transaction is finished, the ILS Store Order is updated to Complete status, the ILS Store Transaction is updated to Success status, and the patron account is updated. A print or e-mail receipt is generated according to the receipt option the user selected.

    +

    PAC Payments - EnvisionWare

    +

    Payments from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC are Web-based, and patrons enter their credit card information by typing it in an online form.

    +

    The logged-on patron selects the charges to pay on the patron account Fines & Fees page, and clicks Pay Fines Now!. If the library has specified a processing fee, a message is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +

    The EnvisionWare Self Service application opens displaying the amount owed in the Transaction Options window.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects Pay Fines/Fees.

    +

    The Itemized Fines window displays each charge.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects the check box next to each charge to pay, and selects Submit.

    +

    The Payment Options window opens.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects Pay From Credit Card.

    +

    The Credit Card window opens.

    +

    The patron enters the credit card information, and selects Submit.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron selects the Submit button to submit the payment to EnvisionWare for processing. If the payment is successful, a confirmation is displayed. The patron account is updated in Polaris.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_PayPal_Payflow_Pro.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_PayPal_Payflow_Pro.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab25bdf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_PayPal_Payflow_Pro.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + E-Commerce with PayPal® Payflow Pro® + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with PayPal® Payflow Pro®

    +

    Polaris supports integrated credit card payment processing using the credit card processing service PayPal® Payflow Pro®. You can accept credit card payments from the staff client, Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, and Polaris ExpressCheck for charges on the patron account and donations to the library (PAC only). A separate license is required for each application. You can set up credit card processing at the system, library, or branch level; you can make separate settings for the staff client, PAC, and Polaris ExpressCheck.

    +

    To accept credit card payments with PayPal, your library establishes an account with PayPal directly, or with an e-commerce provider such as a bank that offers PayPal Payflow Pro payment processing.

    +

    To set up Polaris for PayPal Payflow Pro credit card processing, you will need the following information regarding the library’s Payflow Pro account:

    +
      +
    • Vendor (library) name, user name and password
    • +
    • Partner code (PayPal or your e-commerce provider)
    • +
    • PayPal’s server name
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_PayPal_Payflow_Link.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_PayPal_Payflow_Link.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..568a05c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_PayPal_Payflow_Link.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + E-Commerce with PayPal Payflow Link + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with PayPal Payflow Link

    +

    Polaris supports PayPal’s Payflow Link payment gateway for credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. The Payflow Link gateway is a “redirect and postback” method of providing credit card payments from Polaris PAC applications. An advantage of this method is that much of the responsibility of PCI compliance falls to the gateway, which handles authorization requirements, rather than the library. No credit card information is stored in the Polaris database when payment is made through the Payflow Link hosted payments site. For more information about the Payflow Link gateway, see
    https://merchant.paypal.com/cgi-bin/marketingweb?cmd=_render-content&content_ID=merchant/payment_gateway

    +

    Important: +
    PayPal supports TLS 1.0. If Payflow link is attempting to post back to the Polaris PAC site, it will fail if the server has been configured to allow TLS 1.1 and TLS 1.2 connections (TLS 1.0 has been disabled)

    +

    The logged-on PAC user selects the charges to pay and clicks Pay Fines Now. When the user clicks Pay Fines Now, the Payflow Link checkout page opens. After the credit card payment transaction has been set up and finalized, the user clicks a link to return to the Fines & Fees page in the Polaris patron account. Payflow Link sends an e-mail receipt for the payment to the user’s e-mail address specified on the Hosted Checkout page. Similar processing is available for donations.

    +

    The Polaris e-commerce licenses for Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC (if your system includes Mobile PAC) are required to use this feature. For fine payments, both the PAC connection branch and the patron’s registered branch must support credit card processing. The patron’s registered branch settings determine the specific credit card processor and parameters. For donations, the selected recipient branch’s settings determine the specific credit card processor and parameters.

    +

    Payments from the staff client or from Polaris ExpressCheck are not supported.

    +

    Note:
    When the payment processing gateway for the staff client log-in branch is Payflow Link, the Credit Card Payments Manager is not available from the Utilities menu. At branches where the Credit Card Payments Manager is accessible, store orders and store transactions do not appear for Payflow Link transactions.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Refunds

    +

    With the Payflow Link hosted gateway solution, refund transactions are not integrated in Polaris. Credit card refunds must be handled separately, both through Payflow Link and manually from the Polaris patron account in the Polaris staff client. For example, if a replacement charge has been paid via credit card, the refund must be issued manually from the Polaris patron account transaction summary and then again from Payflow Link. Work with Payflow Link to establish the appropriate staff accounts for handling refunds, then establish the refunds workflow with your staff. Do not allow staff to issue refunds to credit card payments from the Polaris patron account as cash or credit; instead, they must select Refund.

    +

    + RefundTrans.gif 

    +

    Note:
    If a patron successfully pays by credit card using the Payflow Link web page and the transaction is voided because Polaris was unable to update the database, then no record of a payment is made in Polaris and the patron’s credit card payment will be voided by Payflow Link. If a staff member attempts to manually void a transaction using the PayPal manager, the void transaction is not reflected in Polaris.

    +

    Polaris also supports integrated credit card processing, such as PayPal’s Payflow Pro (see E-Commerce with PayPal® Payflow Pro®), which does offer credit card refunds from within Polaris. In systems where some sites use an integrated solution and others use a gateway solution such as Payflow Link, refunds can only be made in these circumstances:

    +
      +
    • The staff client log-on branch supports integrated payments and the Online Payments: Configure option in Polaris Administration (Credit Card parameters) is set to allow payments from the staff client for the integrated solution.
    • +
    • The original payment was made using the integrated solution and the Online Payments: Configure option is set to allow payments from the staff client for the integrated solution.
    • +
    +

    Otherwise, when an attempt is made to refund a credit card payment in Polaris, a message displays indicating that no refund transaction can be created. The credit card is not refunded and the patron account is left as is. This situation might occur if a consortium has implemented both integrated and hosted credit card payment solutions, or a library or consortium has changed from one solution to another and the refund is attempted after the change.

    +

    Lost Item Recovery

    +

    If a lost-and-paid item is recovered at check-in and the payment was made via credit card, and the library has set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to automatically credit the patron’s account, a “dummy” refund is created instead of a credit. The refund will appear as a refund in the Polaris patron account and a refund transaction created. This transaction is available for reporting in the Refunds to Credit Card Payments report. You can use the report to cross-check transactions logged in Payflow Link. (Note that the refund must also be made from Payflow Link.)

    +

    Instead of automatically crediting the patron’s account, you may want to set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to Leave as is. With this setting, the payments remain in the Polaris patron account and the refund or credit can be done from Payflow Link. Or your library may choose to disable all automatic recovery actions, requiring staff to create manual refunds when a lost-and-paid item is recovered. For more information about setting lost item recovery options, see Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults.

    +

    Payflow Link Reports

    +

    Payflow Link offers transaction reports; for example:

    +
      +
    • Transaction Summary Report +
    • +
    +

    + PayflowLinkTransSummRpt.gif 

    +
      +
    • Daily Activity Transaction Report - The transaction IDs match those stored in the ILSStoreTransactions.OrgID Polaris database table. Comment1 is the payment reason and transacting organization; Commnet2 is the Polaris store order ID and the patron barcode, if any.
    • +
    +

    + PayflowLinkDailyRpt.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_Payments_Gateway_Secure_Web_Pay.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_Payments_Gateway_Secure_Web_Pay.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..524754e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/E-Commerce_with_Payments_Gateway_Secure_Web_Pay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + E-Commerce with Payments Gateway Secure Web Pay + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with Payments Gateway Secure Web Pay

    +

    Polaris supports Payments Gateway Secure Web Pay (SWP) for credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. Payments Gateway SWP is a hosted “redirect and postback” method of providing credit card payments from Polaris PAC applications. An advantage of this method is that much of the responsibility of PCI compliance falls to Payments Gateway, which handles authorization requirements, rather than the library. No credit card information is stored in the Polaris database when payment is made through the Payments Gateway hosted payments site. For more information about Payments Gateway, see:
    http://www.paymentsgateway.com/home.aspx

    +

    Payments from the staff client or from Polaris ExpressCheck are not supported.

    +

    Note:
    When the payment processing gateway for the staff client log-in branch is Payments Gateway, the Credit Card Payments Manager is not available from the Utilities menu. At branches where the Credit Card Payments Manager is accessible, store orders and store transactions do not appear for Payments Gateway transactions.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Refunds

    +

    With the Payments Gateway hosted solution, refund and void transactions are not integrated in Polaris. Credit card refunds must be handled separately, both through Payment Gateway’s Virtual Terminal management interface and manually from the Polaris patron account in the Polaris staff client. For example, if a replacement charge has been paid via credit card, the refund must be issued manually from the Polaris patron account transaction summary and then again from the Virtual Terminal. Work with Payments Gateway to establish the appropriate staff accounts for handling refunds, then establish the refunds workflow with your staff. Do not allow staff to issue refunds to credit card payments from the Polaris patron account as cash or credit; instead, they must select Refund.

    +

    + RefundTrans00482.gif 

    +

    Note:
    Voided payments, as when the connection fails, are not recognized in Polaris, and the voided transaction will appear in Polaris as a completed transaction.

    +

    Polaris also supports integrated credit card processing, such as PayPal’s Payflow Pro (see E-Commerce with PayPal® Payflow Pro®), which does offer credit card refunds from within Polaris. In systems where some sites use an integrated solution and others use a gateway solution such as Payments Gateway, refunds can only be made in these circumstances:

    +
      +
    • The staff client log-on branch supports integrated payments and the Online Payments: Configure option in Polaris Administration (Credit Card parameters) is set to allow payments from the staff client for the integrated solution.
    • +
    +

     AllowOnlinePayments00483.gif

    +
      +
    • The original payment was made using the integrated solution and the Online Payments: Configure option is set to allow payments from the staff client for the integrated solution.
    • +
    +

    Otherwise, when an attempt is made to refund a credit card payment in Polaris, a message displays indicating that no refund transaction can be created. The credit card is not refunded and the patron account is left as is. This situation might occur if a consortium has implemented both integrated and hosted credit card payment solutions, or a library or consortium has changed from one solution to another and the refund is attempted after the change.

    +

    Lost Item Recovery

    +

    If a lost-and-paid item is recovered at check-in and the payment was made via credit card, and the library has set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to automatically credit the patron’s account, a “dummy” refund is created instead of a credit. The refund will appear as a refund in the Polaris patron account and a refund transaction created. This transaction is available for reporting in the Refunds to Credit Card Payments report. You can use the report to cross-check transactions logged in the Virtual Terminal. (Note that the refund must also be made from the Virtual Terminal.)

    +

    Instead of automatically crediting the patron’s account, you may want to set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to Leave as is. With this setting, the payments remain in the Polaris patron account and the refund or credit can be done from Payments Gateway. Or your library may choose to disable all automatic recovery actions, requiring staff to create manual refunds when a lost-and-paid item is recovered. For more information about setting lost item recovery options, see Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults.

    +

    Payments Gateway Reports

    +

    Payments Gateway offers extensive reporting capabilities. After your account is established (see Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account), you can log in and select Transactions to search for specific transactions.

    +

    + PaymentsGatewayTrnsReport.gif 

    +

    Select Reporting, Origination to see detailed organization-level reports.

    +

    + PaymentsGatewayOrgReport.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Class_Point_of_Sale_credit_card_payments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Class_Point_of_Sale_credit_card_payments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70fc1125 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Class_Point_of_Sale_credit_card_payments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Class Point of Sale credit card payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Class Point of Sale credit card payments

    +

    To set up credit card payments from the PAC if your library uses Class Point of Sale.

    +

    Note:
    Credit card processing from Polaris ExpressCheck is not supported through Class Point of Sale. If you are working in the staff client, you may be able to take credit card payments in Class Point of Sale but processing takes place entirely within Class Point of Sale.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Online Payments: Configure. The Online Payments Settings dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select Active Network (CLASS) in the Payment processing gateway list.
    4. +
    +

    + CreditPOSPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Properties. The Class properties dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + CreditPOSProps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter the following settings, and click OK:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • POS Web URL - The URL to the Class online payment page for your site.
    • +
    • POS Item ID (Library Fines) - The Class POS database identifier for online library fine payments.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Obtain these settings from your Class POS representative.

    +
      +
    1. Click the PowerPAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Allow online payments.
    4. +
    5. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in the PAC.
    6. +
    7. Click OK to save your settings.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Comprise_SmartPAY_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Comprise_SmartPAY_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5df053cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Comprise_SmartPAY_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Up Comprise SmartPAY Processing in Polaris Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Comprise SmartPAY Processing in Polaris Administration

    +

    Only one payment gateway can be selected for a branch or library organization. However, within a consortium that uses the Polaris turnkey ILS, branch and library organizations may implement different gateways; some may use Comprise SmartPAY, while others may choose other gateways.

    +

    If your library has multiple Comprise accounts, you can set the following fields at the Branch level: Payment page/service URL, Customer Name, and Customer ID.

    +

    To set up Polaris for Comprise SmartPAY credit card processing in Polaris Administration for the appropriate organizations:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Online Payments: Configure.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Online Payments Settings dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select Comprise MSP in the Payment processing gateway list.
    2. +
    +

    +  

     
    1. Click Properties. The Comprise MSP properties dialog box opens.

    1. Enter the following settings on the Connection tabbed page, then click OK:
      • Payment page/service URL (SmartPay API Address) - Set at the System level for a single Comprise account or at the Branch level if you have multiple Comprise accounts. Provided by Comprise. This is the SmartPAY payment page.
      • Customer Name- Set at the System level for a single Comprise account or at the Branch level if you have multiple Comprise accounts. Provided by Comprise, passed to SmartPay during the payment transaction.
      • Customer ID- Set at the System level for a single Comprise account or at the Branch level if you have multiple Comprise accounts. Provided by Comprise, passed to SmartPay during the payment transaction.
      • User name - Provided by Comprise. Each branch has its own user name.
      • Password - Provided by Comprise. Each branch has its own password.
      • Location ID - Provided by Comprise. Apply to PAC only. Pass to SmartPay WEB API. One per branch.
      • PAC Return URL - PowerPAC page to which the user is returned after fines payment, typically the patron account page. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
      • MPAC Return URL - Mobile PAC page to which the user is returned after fines payment, typically the patron account page. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.

    Note:
    When a patron cancels a payment from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, the appropriate Return URL page is displayed.

    • Donations PAC Return URL - PowerPAC page to which the user is returned after a donation payment. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
    • Donations MPAC Return URL - Mobile PAC page to which the user is returned after a donation payment. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
    • Postback URL - The location on the library Web site used to update the Polaris database. This location applies to both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, and is not branch-specific. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
      Format:https://servername:port/payments/PostbackSmartpay.aspx
      For example:https://mylibrary.com/polaris/payments/PostbackSmartpay.aspx
    • Inactivity timeout - Specifies how long Polaris waits for the credit transaction to be processed before canceling it. This setting applies to ExpressCheck and the staff client only (not to PowerPAC or Mobile PAC).

    Note:
    You can also set an Inactivity timeout value set for ExpressCheck transactions (SelfCheck Unit parameters, Polaris ExpressCheck: Options). The default value for both settings is 60 seconds. Polaris ExpressCheck times out after the total of both settings to ensure that the ExpressCheck application never times out before the credit card transaction processing time.

    1. To set up credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC, be sure Comprise MSP is still selected in the Online Payments Settings dialog box, and follow these steps:
      1. Click the PowerPAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, if it is not already selected.
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.

    Note:
    The link for paying fines is on the Fines and Fees page of the patron account. Be sure the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Fines & fees is set to Yes for the organization.Enable patron account access - PowerPAC.

    1. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment.The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in the PAC.
    2. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.

    Note:
    The e-mail receipt option is not applicable, because SmartPAY sends the receipt to the e-mail address the patron specifies on the SmartPAY payment page.

    1. To display a privacy policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    2. To display a refund policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    3. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    4. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    5. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    1. To set up credit card payments from Mobile PAC, follow these steps:
      1. Click the Mobile PAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
      1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
      2. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in Mobile PAC.
      3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.

    Note:
    The e-mail receipt option is not applicable, because SmartPAY sends the receipt to the e-mail address the patron specifies on the SmartPAY payment page.

    1. To display a privacy policy link in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    2. To display a refund policy link in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display refund policy.See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    3. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    4. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    5. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    1. To set up credit card payments from the staff client, follow these steps:

    Note:
    To accept credit card payments, the staff client workstation must be equipped with a Comprise SmartTerminal credit card reader, and you must specify the SmartTerminal ID for each workstation. See step 11.

    1. Click the Staff Client tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    2. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment.
    3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    4. To provide an automatic e-mail payment receipt to patrons, select (check) Send email receipt. The e-mail receipt is sent to the e-mail address in the patron record. If the patron record does not include an e-mail address, no e-mail receipt is sent. The staff member cannot specify an e-mail address during the payment process.

    Note:
    The manual data entry option is not applicable. Staff client workstations must use the Comprise SmartTerminal to swipe the patron’s credit card.

    1. To set up credit card payments from Polaris ExpressCheck, follow these steps:

    Note:
    To accept credit card payments, the Polaris ExpressCheck workstation must be equipped with a Comprise SmartTerminal credit card reader, and you must specify the SmartTerminal ID for each workstation. See step 11.

    1. Click the ExpressCheck tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    2. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment.
    3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    4. To provide an automatic e-mail payment receipt to patrons, select (check) Send email receipt. The e-mail receipt is sent to the e-mail address in the patron record. If the patron record does not include an e-mail address, no e-mail receipt is sent. The patron cannot specify an e-mail address during the payment process.
    5. To display a privacy policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris ExpressCheck, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    6. To display a refund policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris ExpressCheck, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    7. Click OK to save your settings.
    1. For each staff client and ExpressCheck workstation with a SmartTerminal, specify the payment terminal ID by following these steps:

    Note:
    Comprise supplies the terminal ID values for your workstations.

    1. From the workstation listed in Administration Explorer or the workstation workform, select Parameters, Credit Card Payment.

    1. Double-click Payment Terminal ID and enter the workstation SmartTerminal ID.
    2. Select File | Save, or click SaveIcon.gif.
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_EnvisionWare_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_EnvisionWare_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fca74177 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_EnvisionWare_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up EnvisionWare Payment Processing in Polaris Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up EnvisionWare Payment Processing in Polaris Administration

    +

    To set up Polaris and Leap for EnvisionWare eCommerce payment processing in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Online Payments: Configure.
    2. +
    +

    The Online Payments Settings dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select EnvisionWare in the Payment processing gateway list.
    2. +
    3. Click Properties.
    4. +
    +

    The EnvisionWare properties dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To allow patrons to make credit card payments from the PAC, select Enable PAC Payments and enter the following connection information:
      • Payment page URL - Payment page URL - System level only. Provided by EnvisionWare.
      • PAC Return URL - Typically the Polaris PowerPAC patron account Fine & Fees page, displayed when the user clicks the return link on the EnvisionWare final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): 
        https://www.mylibrary.org/polaris/patronaccount/finesfees.aspx, where
        www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
      • MPAC Return URL - Typically the Polaris Mobile PAC patron account Fine & Fees page, displayed when the user clicks the return link on the EnvisionWare final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): 
        https://www.mylibrary.org/mobile/FinesAndFees/UpdateAccount, where
        www.mylibrary.org/mobile is your Mobile PAC web site. This field is required. If you do not use Mobile PAC, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    2. +
    3. To allow credit card payments from Polaris ExpressCheck units, the Polaris staff client (without using EnvisionWare's Staff Register software), or Leap, select Enable ExpressCheck/Staff Client (without POS) / Leap and enter the following connection information:
      • Payment service URI
      • Port number
      • Inactivity timeout _____ seconds
    4. +
    5. To allow credit card payments from the Polaris staff client using EnvisionWare's Staff Register software, select Enable Staff Client with POS and enter the following connection information:
      • Server URL
      • Port number
      • Timeout ____ minutes
    6. +
    7. Click OK to save the settings, close the properties dialog box, and return to the Online Payment Settings dialog box.
    8. +
    9. Click the PowerPAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, and select Allow online payments.
    10. +
    +

    Note: +
    The option Allow online payments is available only if you selected Enable PAC payments on the EnvisionWare properties dialog box. The other information on this tab is controlled by EnvisionWare's Self Service web application and cannot be edited in Polaris.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click the Staff Client / Leap tab and select Allow online payments.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The option Allow online payments is available on the Staff Client tab only if you selected Enable ExpressCheck/Staff Client (without POS) or Enable Staff Client with POS.The other information can be edited only if you selected Enable ExpressCheck/Staff Client (without POS). If Enable Staff Client with POS is selected, EnvisonWare's Staff Register application controls these settings.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. If Enable ExpressCheck/Staff Client (without POS) is selected in the EnvisionWare properties dialog box, set the payment and receipt options:
      • Enter the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment in the Minimum fine box. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01.
      • To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box. The maximum value is $20.00.
      • To send an email receipt for fine payments, select Send email receipt.
      • To allow staff members to enter credit card numbers manually, select Allow manual credit card data entry if card reader is attached.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the ExpressCheck tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, and select Allow online payments.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The option Allow online payments is available only if you selected Enable ExpressCheck/Staff Client (without POS) on the EnvisionWare properties dialog box.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Set the payment, receipt, and policy display options for ExpressCheck as follows:
      • Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01.
      • To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
      • To send an email receipt to the patron, select Send email receipt.
      • To display a privacy policy link in ExpressCheck, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
      • To display a refund policy link in ExpressCheck, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Mobile PAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, and select Allow online payments.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The option Allow online payments is available only if you selected Enable PAC payments on the EnvisionWare properties dialog box. The other information on this tab is controlled by EnvisionWare's Self Service web application and cannot be edited in Polaris.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your settings.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Google_reCAPTCHA.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Google_reCAPTCHA.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..352be174 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Google_reCAPTCHA.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Google's reCAPTCHA on the PAC Donations page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Google's reCAPTCHA on the PAC Donations page

    +

    For libraries that use PayPal Payflow Pro for credit card payments through Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, Google's free reCAPTCHA feature adds human verification to the process of submitting a donation to the library. This minimizes the possibility of a robotic "user" making many small fake donations to the library to verify stolen credit card information. Genuine donors identify a picture or select I'm not a robot to continue with the donation process. For more information about reCAPTCHA, see https://www.google.com/recaptcha/intro/index.html.

    +

    When reCAPTCHA is enabled, users cannot proceed past the first donations page in PowerPAC or Mobile PAC until they pass the reCAPTCHA test.

    +

    To implement reCAPTCHA, you will need a Google account. Using your Google account credentials, obtain your domain-specific site key and secret key from Google:

    +
      +
    1. Go to: www.google.com/recaptcha
    2. +
    3. Select the Get reCAPTCHA button in the upper right corner.
    4. +
    5. Log in with your Google account email and password and follow the instructions.
    6. +
    7. Record your reCAPTCHA site key and secret key.
    8. +
    +

    Next, set up reCAPTCHA in Polaris system administration. The reCAPTCHA settings are available at system, library, and branch levels:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Online Payments: Configure. The Online Payments Settings dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select PayPal’s Payflow Pro in the Payment processing gateway list.
    6. +
    7. Click Properties. The PayPal Properties dialog box opens.
    8. +
    9. Select the reCAPTCHA tab.
    10. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select (check ) Enable reCAPTCHA for donations.
    2. +
    3. Type your site key in the Google site key field.
    4. +
    5. Type your secret key in the Google secret key field.
    6. +
    7. Click OK.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_PayPal_Payflow_Pro_credit_card_payments.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_PayPal_Payflow_Pro_credit_card_payments.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42c5a422 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_PayPal_Payflow_Pro_credit_card_payments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,519 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up PayPal Payflow Pro Credit Card Payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up PayPal Payflow Pro Credit Card Payments

    +

    To set up credit card payment processing with the PayPal Payflow Pro service:

    +

    See also: Test Values for Payflow Pro Processing and Credit Card Error Logs

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Online Payments: Configure. The Online Payments Settings dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select PayPal’s Payflow Pro in the Payment processing gateway list.
    6. +
    7. Click Properties. The PayPal Properties dialog box opens to the Connection tabbed page.
    8. +
    9. Enter the following settings on the Connection tabbed page:
    10. +
    +
      +
    • Vendor - Your library’s main account name. Obtain this setting from PayPal or your e-commerce partner.
    • +
    • Username and Password - Obtain these settings from PayPal or your e-commerce partner. Once you have a username and password, you can set up others for the same account if you need to track manual transactions.
    • +
    • Partner - Enter your partner’s code here (PayPal or your e-commerce provider).
    • +
    • Timeout - Set the number of seconds that should elapse with no action before the payment connection times out. The default is 30 seconds.
    • +
    • Server - Type payflowpro.paypal.com for live transactions, or
      pilot-payflowpro.paypal.com for testing purposes. See Test Values for Payflow Pro Processing for credit card values you can use for testing.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The payflowpro.paypal.com setting is typical, but may be different depending your bank.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Settings tab, and enter the following information on the Settings tabbed page:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Cancel SALE method - This setting determines the appropriate automatic action (VOID or CREDIT) to cancel a SALE transaction. A sale may be canceled when it has been approved but fails AVS (Address Verification) and/or CVV2 (Card Verification Value 2) verification, or when a Polaris database error occurs. If a processor batch-processes sales transactions at the end of the day, a VOID transaction may be used to prevent the canceled SALE from settling. The library is charged only one transaction fee. However, some processors are host-based and do not use the batch method; in this case, all SALE transactions are settled immediately and a CREDIT transaction must be used to cancel the SALE. For these processors, the library is charged two transaction fees (one for the SALE and one for the CREDIT).
    • +
    +

    Important:
    You must contact your processor or PayPal e-commerce account provider to determine if the processor uses the batch method or if they are host-based. If the processor uses the batch method, you must also verify that SALE transactions can be voided. If so, you can select VOID for the Cancel SALE method and avoid paying two transaction fees. Most processors use the batch method. However, if the processor uses the host method, you must select CREDIT as the cancel sale method, and you will be charged two transaction fees when a sale is canceled. (Examples of host-based processors include PayPal and Global Payments Central.)

    +

    Tip:
    Log files record errors, warnings, and information about credit card transactions.

    +
      +
    • E-Mail credit card processing errors to - This option is highly recommended. Specify a staff e-mail address to receive automatic e-mail messages when a credit card transaction fails and staff intervention is required. The message includes details about the failure, so the staff member can then take action on the failed transaction, either contacting the patron or adjusting the Polaris patron record manually.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    A patron's credit card is charged, but due to some type of error or processing rule, the transaction needs to be canceled or a partial credit needs to be applied. (This could be due to AVS or CVV2 failures or a database update error.) If the cancel or credit transaction fails, the patron credit card account is charged, but the transaction is not reflected in the Polaris patron record. A staff member needs to adjust the patron account.

    +
      +
    • AVS - Address verification, a security measure that may be provided as part of your contract with your e-commerce partner. AVS matches the street address and Zip code on the Polaris payment form with the street address and Zip code in a credit card database that PayPal accesses. Select (check) this option to use AVS. Then select a level of verification. For the following options, Y indicates the value matches, N indicates the value does not match, and X indicates that the cardholder’s bank does not support the check:
      —Full indicates that the street address must be Y and the Zip code must be Y (YY) or the transaction is declined. There can be no N values and no X values. Earlier versions of Polaris automatically used this level.
      —Medium indicates that there can be no N values (YY, XY, YX, XX allowed).
      —Light declines transactions only when both values equal N. All other combinations are accepted.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Occasionally AVS is faulty and a billing address, though correct, fails to be matched. In this case the user receives a message and the transaction is voided. If you find this is a problem, you may want to set the checking level to Light or clear (uncheck) the AVS option. Also note that the billing address that is displayed when the payment form opens is taken from the address information in the Polaris patron record, and may be different from the patron’s credit card billing address. The billing address can be changed on the payment form. Once it is changed, it is not checked against the patron’s record again during the transaction.

    +
      +
    • CVV2 - Card Validation Value 2, a security measure that may be provided as part of your PayPal contract with your e-commerce partner. This option requires the user to enter a code usually located on the back of the credit card. Select (check) this option to use CVV2.
    • +
    • Pre-authorize SALE - Available only when you select AVS and/or CVV2 verification. Select this option to AUTHORIZE a transaction before submitting the SALE transaction. An AUTHORIZE transaction returns an approval/decline without actually charging the cardholder’s account for the full “sale.” Set the amount to a small dollar amount such as $1 (the default) to process the AVS and CVV2 information. If AVS or CVV2 fails, the cardholder is warned, and the actual charge is not placed on the credit card account. This eliminates the need for VOID/CREDIT processing of a SALE based on failed AVS or CVV2. If the AUTHORIZE transaction is approved and AVS/CVV2 passes all tests, then a SALE transaction is issued for the full amount. If a SALE is declined for the full amount, the new VOID or CREDIT option would be used to cancel the SALE transaction.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    An AUTHORIZE transaction will still place a small hold (for example, $1) on the credit cardholder’s funds. Depending on the cardholder's bank, the hold may remain for 24 hours to a week. While this style of processing credit card payments can help reduce SALE issues based on AVS and CVV2 processing, it requires an additional transaction fee for every credit card payment.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Supported Credit Cards tab.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) the types of credit cards your provider supports, and click OK. The PayPal properties dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can set the credit card types at the system, library, or branch level. The Supported Credit Cards tabbed page indicates the organization from which the settings have been inherited. If you make a change at the branch level, the branch name is displayed on the tabbed page. To revert to the settings of a higher level organization, clear all the check boxes and click OK. Then open the tabbed page again. The settings of the higher level organization are displayed, and the name of the organization is displayed on the tabbed page.

    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the PowerPAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can use this setting to prevent payments so small that they are offset by your e-commerce provider’s transaction fees.

    +
      +
    1. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in the PAC.
    2. +
    3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    4. +
    5. If you want patrons to receive an automatic payment receipt, select (check) Send email receipt.
    6. +
    7. The e-mail receipt lists each fine covered by the transaction. The patron can specify an e-mail address on the payment form. The sender’s address is that specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    The link for paying fines is on the Fines and Fees page of the patron account. Be sure the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Fines & fees is set to Yes for the organization. Enable patron account access - PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. To display a privacy policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    2. +
    3. To display a refund policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    4. +
    5. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    6. +
    7. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    8. +
    9. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    10. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from the staff client, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Staff Client tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Allow online payments.
    4. +
    5. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment.
    6. +
    7. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    8. +
    9. To provide an automatic e-mail payment receipt to patrons, select (check) Send email receipt. The e-mail receipt is sent to the e-mail address in the patron record. If the patron record does not include an e-mail address, no e-mail receipt is sent. The staff member cannot specify an e-mail address during the payment process.
    10. +
    11. If staff workstations have credit card readers but you also want to allow manual data entry, select (check) Allow manual credit card data entry if card reader is attached.
    12. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Polaris ExpressCheck, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the ExpressCheck tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    4. +
    5. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment.
    6. +
    7. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    8. +
    9. To provide an automatic e-mail payment receipt to patrons, select (check) Send email receipt. The e-mail receipt is sent to the e-mail address in the patron record. If the patron record does not include an e-mail address, no e-mail receipt is sent. The patron cannot specify an e-mail address during the payment process.
    10. +
    11. To display a privacy policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris ExpressCheck, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    12. +
    13. To display a refund policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris ExpressCheck, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    14. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Mobile PAC, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Mobile PAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Credit card payments for fines and fees are allowed from Mobile PAC if both the patron’s registered branch and the Mobile PAC connection organization allow credit card payments.

    +

    Tip:
    You can use this setting to prevent payments so small that they are offset by your e-commerce provider’s transaction fees.

    +
      +
    1. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in Mobile PAC.
    2. +
    3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    4. +
    5. If you want patrons to receive an automatic payment receipt, select (check) Send email receipt. For fine receipts, the system uses the setting of the patron’s branch. For donations (see step h below), the system uses the setting of the donation’s receiving branch. The e-mail receipt lists each fine covered by the transaction. The patron can specify an e-mail address on the payment form. The sender’s address is that specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender.
    6. +
    7. To display a privacy policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    8. +
    9. To display a refund policy link on the processing fee, payment, and payment verification pages in Polaris Mobile PAC, select (check) Display refund policy.See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    10. +
    11. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    12. +
    13. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    14. +
    15. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    16. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your settings.
    2. +
    +

    Test Values for Payflow Pro Processing

    +

    Use the values in the following tables to test Payflow Pro credit card transactions.

    +

    Credit Card Numbers

    +

    Use the following credit card numbers for testing. Any other card number produces a general failure.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Credit Card Type

    +
    +

    Account Number

    +
    +

    American Express

    +
    +

    378282246310005

    +
    +

    American Express

    +
    +

    371449635398431

    +
    +

    Amex Corporate

    +
    +

    378734493671000

    +
    +

    Australian BankCard

    +
    +

    5610591081018250

    +
    +

    Diners Club

    +
    +

    30569309025904

    +
    +

    Diners Club

    +
    +

    38520000023237

    +
    +

    Discover

    +
    +

    6011111111111117

    +
    +

    Discover

    +
    +

    6011000990139424

    +
    +

    JCB

    +
    +

    3530111333300000

    +
    +

    JCB

    +
    +

    3566002020360505

    +
    +

    MasterCard

    +
    +

    5555555555554444

    +
    +

    MasterCard

    +
    +

    5105105105105100

    +
    +

    Visa

    +
    +

    4111111111111111

    +
    +

    Visa

    +
    +

    4012888888881881

    +
    +

    Visa

    +
    +

    4222222222222

    +
    +

    Result Codes Resulting From Amount Submitted

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Amount

    +
    +

    Result (RESPMSG)

    +
    +

    $0 - $1000

    +
    +

    0 (Approved)

    +
    +

    $1001 - $2000

    +
    +

    Certain amounts in this range return specific result codes. These can be generated by adding $1,000 to that result code. For example, for result 13 (Referral), submit the amount $1013. If the amount is in this range but does not correspond to a result code supported by this testing mechanism, result 12 (Declined) is returned.

    +
    +

    $2001+

    +
    +

    12 (Declined)

    +
    +

    Testing AVS - Address (AVSADDR)

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Submitted Value for STREET

    +
    +

    Example STREET Value

    +
    +

    AVSADDR Result

    +
    +

    000-333

    +
    +

    24285 Elm

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    334-666

    +
    +

    49354 Main

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    667 or higher or begins with a non-numeric character

    +
    +

    79232 Maple

    +
    +

    X

    +
    +

    Testing AVS - Zip (AVSZIP)

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Submitted Value for ZIP +

    Example ZIP Value

    +
    +

    AVSZIP Result

    +
    +

    00000-50000

    +
    +

    00382

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    5001-99999

    +
    +

    94303

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Any value (if street address is 667 or higher or begins with a non-numeric character)

    +
    +

    STREET=79232 Maple,
    ZIP=20304

    +
    +

    X

    +
    +

    Testing CVV2MATCH

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    CVV2 Value

    +
    +

    CVV2MATCH Value

    +
    +

    000-300

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    301-600

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    601 or higher

    +
    +

    X

    +
    +

    Credit Card Error Logs

    +

    Credit card log files track errors, warnings, and information about credit card transactions made with Payflow Pro. These are located in the following folders:

    +

    Staff client transactions -
    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\Polaris_Errors_[machine]_[date].log

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC transactions -
    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\POWERPAC\
    PowerPAC_Errors_[machine]_[date].log

    +

    Mobile PAC transactions -
    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\MOBILEPAC\
    MobilePAC_Errors_[machine]_[date].log

    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck transactions -
    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\ExpressCheck_Errors_[machine]_[date].log

    +

    If you set up automatic e-mail for errors that require staff intervention (see Set up PayPal Payflow Pro credit card payments), note that these are also included in the log files. Check the log files regularly to be sure that credit card processing is working properly.

    +

    Note:
    The e-mail receipts sent to patrons for fine and Polaris Fusion payments also include a message if an error occurred that requires the patron to contact the library. Four language strings support this feature:
    PACML_PAYMENT_EMAIL_FINESRECEIPT_1063
    PACML_PAYMENT_EMAIL_FINESRECEIPT_1064
    PACML_PAYMENT_EMAIL_FUSIONRECEIPT_CONTACT
    PACML_PAYMENT_EMAIL_FUSIONRECEIPT_SUCCESS
    You can view and edit the text in these language strings with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). See the WebAdmin help file for more information.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payflow_Link_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payflow_Link_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35fc013e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payflow_Link_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Payflow Link processing in Polaris Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Payflow Link processing in Polaris Administration

    +

    To set up Polaris for Payflow Link credit card processing in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Online Payments: Configure. The Online Payments Settings dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select Payflow Link in the Payment processing gateway list.
    6. +
    +

    + PayFlowLinkDropDown.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Properties. The Payflow Link Properties dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + PayFlowLinkConnection.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter the following settings on the Connection tabbed page, then click OK:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • PAC Hosted checkout page URL - From PowerPAC, the redirect page link to the Payflow Link hosted checkout page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). Obtain this setting from Payflow Link. Example: https://payflowlink.paypal.com
    • +
    • MPAC Hosted checkout page URL - From  Mobile PAC, the redirect page link to the Payflow Link hosted checkout page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). Obtain this setting from Payflow Link.
    • +
    • Request secure token URL - The PayFlow API URL:
      https://payflowpro.paypal.com for live operation, or
      https://pilot-payflowpro.paypal.com for test.
    • +
    • Vendor - Optional. Your library’s main account name. Obtain this setting from Payflow Link.
    • +
    • Login ID - Your Payflow Link login ID.
    • +
    • Password - Your Payflow Link password.
    • +
    • Partner - Typically PayPal. However, if you set up an account through a partner such as bank, type the partner’s code. Obtain this setting from your partner; for example, WFB for Wells Fargo bank.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC, be sure PayFlow Link is still selected in the Online Payments Settings dialog box, and follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the PowerPAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    +

    + PayFlowLinkPPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    2. +
    3. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in the PAC.
    4. +
    5. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    6. +
    7. To display a privacy policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See: Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    8. +
    9. To display a refund policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display refund policy. See: Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    10. +
    11. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    12. +
    13. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    14. +
    15. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    16. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Mobile PAC, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Mobile PAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + PayFlowLinkMPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    2. +
    3. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in Mobile PAC.
    4. +
    5. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    6. +
    7. To display a privacy policy link in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. SeePrivacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    8. +
    9. To display a refund policy link in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options
    10. +
    11. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    12. +
    13. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    14. +
    15. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    16. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your settings.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payments_Gateway_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payments_Gateway_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..418b747a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_Payments_Gateway_processing_in_Polaris_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Payments Gateway processing in Polaris Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Payments Gateway processing in Polaris Administration

    +

    To set up Polaris for Payments Gateway SWP credit card processing in Polaris Administration:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Credit Card Payment tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Online Payments: Configure. The Online Payments Settings dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Select Payments Gateway in the Payment processing gateway list.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click Properties. The Payments Gateway Properties dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayConnection.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter the following settings on the Connection tabbed page and click OK:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Hosted checkout page URL - The redirect page link to the Payments Gateway Hosted Checkout page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). Obtain this setting from Payments Gateway.
      Example:
      https://sandbox.paymentsgateway.net/swp/co/default.aspx
    • +
    • Login ID - The API Log In ID generated on your Payments Gateway VT page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). See Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account.
    • +
    • Secure Transaction Key - The Secure Transaction Key generated on your Payments Gateway VT page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). See Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account.
    • +
    • Current Version - Payments Gateway Secure Web Pay API current version number (maximum 10 characters, alphanumeric). The current version is 1.0.
    • +
    • Post-back URL - The Payments Gateway term for this is Return Page 1. Enter the post-back URL for your site (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): https://www.mylibrary.org/polaris/Payments/PostbackPaymentsGateway.aspx, where
       www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
    • +
    • Important:
      Payments Gateway does not accept hyphens in the post-back URL (Return Page 1).
    • +
    • PAC Return URL - Typically the Polaris PowerPAC patron account Fine & Fees page, displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): 
      https://
      www.mylibrary.org/polaris/patronaccount/finesfees.aspx, where
      www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
    • +
    • MPAC Return URL - Typically the Polaris Mobile PAC patron account Fine & Fees page, displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): 
      https://
      www.mylibrary.org/mobile/FinesAndFees/UpdateAccount, where
      www.mylibrary.org/mobile is your Mobile PAC web site. This field is required. If you do not use Mobile PAC, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    • +
    • Donation PAC Return URL - If you plan to accept donations, enter the URL of the Polaris PowerPAC page that should be displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). This URL is typically your Polaris PowerPAC home page. This field is required. If you do not plan to accept donations, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    • +
    • Donation MPAC Return URL - If you plan to accept donations, enter the URL of the Polaris Mobile PAC page that should be displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). This URL is typically your Polaris Mobile PAC home page. If you do not plan to accept donations, or do not use Mobile PAC, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC, be sure Payments Gateway is still selected in the Online Payments Settings dialog box, and follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the PowerPAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box, if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayPPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The link for paying fines is on the Fines and Fees page of the patron account. Be sure the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Fines & fees is set to Yes for the organization.Enable patron account access - PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in the PAC.
    2. +
    3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    4. +
    5. To display a privacy policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    6. +
    7. To display a refund policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    8. +
    9. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    10. +
    11. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    12. +
    13. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the PAC donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    14. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up credit card payments from Mobile PAC, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Mobile PAC tab on the Online Payments Settings dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayMPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Allow online payments. The payment options become available.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The link for paying fines is on the Fines and Fees page of the patron account. Be sure the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Fines & fees is set to Yes for the organization. Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Set the minimum fine amount you want to accept by credit card payment. The default value is the lowest possible value, $0.01. If the amount the patron owes falls below your setting, the Pay fines link is not displayed in Mobile PAC.
    2. +
    3. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for online payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    4. +
    5. To display a privacy policy link in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display privacy policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    6. +
    7. To display a refund policy link in Mobile PAC, select (check) Display refund policy. See Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
    8. +
    9. To accept credit card payments for donations, select (check) Allow donations.
    10. +
    11. To charge a processing fee for donations, specify the amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00.
    12. +
    13. To allow donors to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area, select (check) Allow patron to designate title purchase. This option places an appropriate control on the donations page, where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    14. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your settings.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_PayPal_Payflow_Link_gateway_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_PayPal_Payflow_Link_gateway_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90be6393 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_PayPal_Payflow_Link_gateway_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the PayPal Payflow Link gateway account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the PayPal Payflow Link gateway account

    +

    Your library can establish a merchant account with Payflow Link directly. To set up the account:

    +
      +
    1. Sign up for your Payflow Link gateway account.
    2. +
    3. Log on to PayPal Manager.
    4. +
    5. Go to Service Settings and select Setup.
    6. +
    +

    + PayPalSetUpPage.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Under Choose your settings, set Transaction Process Mode to Live when you are ready to go live with credit card payments. (For set-up purposes, set this option to Test.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Settings under Display options on payment page are optional.

    +
      +
    1. Under PayPal Express Checkout, set Enable PayPal Express Checkout to Yes.
    2. +
    +

    + PayflowLinkExpressCheckout.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Under Billing Information, specify the required and editable fields for the billing information the user must supply.
    2. +
    3. Under Payment Confirmation, Show confirmation page, select On a PayPal hosted page.
    4. +
    5. Enter text for your return URL. This text labels the link that returns the patron to the Polaris PowerPAC patron account Fines & Fees page, or the equivalent page in Mobile PAC if a mobile device is detected.
    6. +
    7. In the Enter Return URL box, type the URL for the interim page that redirects the user to Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, if a mobile device is detected: 
      https://
      www.mylibrary.org/polaris/payments/payflowlinkreturn.aspx, where
      www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
    8. +
    9. Set Return URL Method to Link.
    10. +
    +

    + PayflowLinkReturnURL.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Under Silent Post for Data Transfer, set Use Silent Post to Yes.
    2. +
    3. In the Enter Silent Post URL field, enter the post-back URL for your site:  https://www.mylibrary.org/polaris/Payments/PostbackPayflowLink.aspx, where
       www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Void transaction when my server fails to receive data sent by the silent post.
    6. +
    +

    + PayflowLinkSilentPost.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Under Email Confirmation, set Do you want us to confirm payment by email to Yes.
    2. +
    +

    + PayflowLinkEMailConfirm.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Under Configure Security Options, set Enable Secure Token to Yes.
    2. +
    +

    + PayflowLinkSecurityOps.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_Payments_Gateway_SWP_account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_Payments_Gateway_SWP_account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3bb17e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Set_up_the_Payments_Gateway_SWP_account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account

    +

    Your library establishes a merchant account with Payments Gateway directly. You can set up one Payments Gateway SWP account for each branch that will offer credit card processing, or set up one account for your entire system, associated with a specific library administrator. To set up a Payments Gateway SWP account.

    +
      +
    1. Go to http://www.paymentsgateway.com/home.aspx
      and follow the instructions to set up a SWP merchant account.
    2. +
    3. Log in to Payments Gateway Virtual Terminal (VT) with your SWP Merchant ID, username, and password at
      https://www.paymentsgateway.net/vt3/login.aspx
    4. +
    5. On the Payments Gateway VT page, select Gateway Settings, Gateway Key.
    6. +
    7. Generate the API Login ID and the Secure Transaction Key.
    8. +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayKey.gif 

    +

    Record these values for use in Polaris Administration. See Set up Payments Gateway processing in Polaris Administration.

    +
      +
    1. Click Update.
    2. +
    3. Select Gateway Settings, Secure Web Pay.
    4. +
    5. Click the Main tab if it is not already selected.
    6. +
    7. In the Return Page 1 field, enter the post-back URL for your site:
      https://www.mylibrary.org/polaris/Payments/PostbackPaymentsGateway.aspx, where
       www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site. (Both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC use the same post-back URL.)
    8. +
    +

    Important:
    Payments Gateway does not accept hyphens in the post-back URL (Return Page 1).

    +

    You will enter the same URL in Polaris Administration. See Set up Payments Gateway processing in Polaris Administration.

    +

    + PaymentsGatewayReturnPage1.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Set Accept Unsigned Transactions to No.
    2. +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayUnsigned.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Set Accept eCheck to No, and set Accept Credit Card Transactions to Yes.
    2. +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayMethods.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Contact Info section, supply the information that should appear on the Hosted Checkout page.
    2. +
    +

    + UpdateContactInfo2.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Update.
    2. +
    3. Click the Field Settings tab and make the following settings:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Bill To Information settings are recommended.
    • +
    • Ship To Information - We recommend that you set these fields to Hidden.
    • +
    • Merchant Defined Fields - Consumer order ID - Displays the order ID on Payments Gateway reports, necessary for identifying transactions (set to Required). When this option is set to required, the order ID is also displayed on the Hosted Checkout page. You can type a description that will make sense to the patron; for example, Polaris Payment ID. Set the other Merchant Defined Fields to Hidden.
    • +
    +

    + PaymentsGatewayMerchantDefs.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Update.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Setting_Up_E-Commerce.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Setting_Up_E-Commerce.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0d7e024 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Setting_Up_E-Commerce.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up E-Commerce - Overview and Requirements + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up E-Commerce - Overview and Requirements

    +

    To submit credit card payments from the Polaris staff client, PowerPAC, ExpressCheck, or Leap, you must establish a connection to a payments gateway and then configure the gateway in Polaris Administration. A license is required for each payments gateway provider.

    +

    To accept credit card payments from a staff client, Leap, or ExpressCheck workstation, a credit card reader must be attached to the workstation. When you install Polaris on a workstation where staff will accept credit card payments, the credit card reader option must be selected. You can set up credit card payment processing for the selected e-commerce payment gateway in Polaris Administration at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    To accept PowerPAC or Mobile PAC online payments, you must enable secure socket layer (SSL) for the Web server in Polaris Administration. For PowerPAC, set the SSL: Enable PowerPAC parameter for the Web server to Yes. For Mobile PAC, set the SSL: Enable Mobile PAC parameter for the Web server to Yes. Setting Web Server Parameters. Patrons must have SSL protocol enabled for their Web browsers and must accept the certificate the first time they log on from outside the library.

    +

    The link for paying fines in PowerPAC and Mobile PAC is on the Fines and Fees page in the patron account. If your library is set up to allow online credit card payments from PowerPAC, be sure the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC profiles, Navigation: Fines & fees, are set to Yes for your organization in Polaris Administration.

    +

    E-Commerce transactions appear on Polaris financial reports. E-Commerce Credit Card Reports.

    +

    For general information regarding e-commerce and Polaris, see these topics:

    + +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that can process credit card payments from the Polaris staff client or Leap, ExpressCheck, PowerPAC, and MobilePAC, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    +

    Note: +
    EnvisionWare and Comprise are the only payments gateways that handle credit card payments made from Leap.

    + +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that processes web payments from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC only, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Using_Class_Point_of_Sale_with_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Using_Class_Point_of_Sale_with_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33ae8281 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/Using_Class_Point_of_Sale_with_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Class Point of Sale with Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with Class Point of Sale

    +

    Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) manages cash, check, and credit card payments for the library and other agencies in the network. When a payment is made through Class POS (from the Polaris staff client or by credit card from PAC), the transaction is recorded in the patron’s account in Polaris.

    +

    Note:
    If you are working in the Polaris staff client, you may be able to take credit card payments in Class Point of Sale, but processing takes place entirely within Class Point of Sale.

    +

    All system-defined Polaris fee reason codes (that is, codes equal to or less than 0) must be entered in the Class POS application as the “Third Party ID” for the corresponding Class POS item. Your Polaris Site Manager assists you in setting up these entries. This ensures that when a staff member selects an overdue item charge to pay in Polaris, for example, the Class POS software also identifies the reason for payment as overdue item.

    +

    Class POS software must be installed with the Polaris staff client on the workstation, but staff members do not need to start Class POS. You are prompted to log on to Class POS only once, at the first payment action in the Polaris staff client session.

    +

    You can take payments for overdue charges from the Patron Status workform - Account view or from the Check In workform. The Class POS interface automatically opens, and you can make the payment according to the library’s policies. Payments for billed and lost items must be made from the Patron Status workform - Account view.

    +

    Note:
    When you pay from the Check In workform, but cancel the transaction in Class POS, the charge remains on the patron’s account but does not appear again on the Check In workform. At this point, you must pay the charge from the Patron Status workform - Account view.

    +

    Payment transactions at check-out and at check-in from the item record workform are not integrated with Class POS, so you may want to set the system-level Circulation permission Fines: pay fines at circ so that staff are not allowed to pay fines through Polaris in these situations. Instead, the staff member creates a charge during the transaction, and then pays the charge from the Patron Status workform - Account view. For example, if the Overdue Fine dialog box appears at renewal, and the patron wants to pay the fine, the staff member selects Charge Account in the Overdue Fine dialog box, then pays the charge from the Patron Status workform - Account view. If the Patron Status workform - Account view is already open, you can refresh the workform (F5) to see and pay the charge. You can also refund a credit through Class POS from the Patron Status workform - Account view. When the Refund function is selected, the Class POS application is launched to process the refund and the transaction is recorded in both Class POS and Polaris. For more information about refunding a credit Refund a credit amount.

    +

    Class POS does not handle payments from patron account credits or deposits. If your library relies on Class POS software and POS reports to reconcile the cash drawer with patron account transactions, you may want to prohibit deposit transactions in Polaris.

    +

    Important:
    The effective interaction between Polaris and Class POS rests on charges, payments, and credit refunds being initiated in Polaris. It is possible to configure the Class POS interface independently of Polaris, and add options that might initiate a payment, charge, or refund from Class POS. However, Polaris interacts with Class POS as a payment manager only. For example, charges initiated and paid in Class POS can result in a credit transaction in the Polaris patron record that has no history in the Polaris database.

    +

    Polaris waive transactions are unaffected by the use of Class POS, and they are not registered or reported in Class POS.

    +

    You can accept credit card payments from the PAC through Class POS. To set up Polaris for Class POS credit card processing, you will need the following information from your Class POS representative: the URL to the Class online payment page for your site and the Class POS database identifier (Item ID) for online library fine payments.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayExpress.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayExpress.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dce19139 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayExpress.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Credit Card Payments from Polaris ExpressCheck + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payments from Polaris ExpressCheck

    +

    Credit card payments for fines and fees are allowed from Polaris ExpressCheck if both the patron's registered branch allows credit card payments, and the ExpressCheck workstation's branch allows credit card payments. If credit card payments are enabled for ExpressCheck, patrons can log in and submit payments for fines and fees from ExpressCheck workstations that are equipped with a credit card reader. The patron selects the charges to pay on the Fines and Fees page, and selects Pay fines now. The patron swipes the credit card through the card reader. When the transaction is complete, the patron may receive an e-mail receipt that lists the charges paid, provided and email address is in the patron record. The Patron Status workform, Account view displays a note that the payment was made through ExpressCheck.

    +

    Possible error messages:

    +
      +
    • Timeout message - The transaction timed out and is canceled.
    • +
    • Payment did not go through as entered - Transaction is not authorized or is canceled by the gateway.
    • +
    • Update patron account failed - The patron’s credit card was charged, but the patron account was not updated.
    • +
    +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that can process credit card payments from the Polaris staff client, ExpressCheck, PowerPAC, and MobilePAC, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayPACs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayPACs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a0e6cfb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayPACs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Credit Card Payments from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payments from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC

    +

    If both the patron's registered branch and the PAC connection branch are set up with an e-commerce provider to allow credit card payments from PACs, patrons can pay charges from the Fines & Fees view in their library accounts. The patron selects the charges to pay and clicks or taps Pay fines now. The example below shows the Fines & Fees view in PowerPAC.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the transaction is complete, the patron may receive an email receipt, depending on the patron account settings. When a payment is made in the PAC, a note in the Patron Status workform, Account view indicates the payment was made.

    +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that can process credit card payments from the Polaris staff client, ExpressCheck, PowerPAC, and MobilePAC, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    + +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that processes web payments from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC only, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaydonat.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaydonat.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8672eb02 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaydonat.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Credit Card Donations from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Donations from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC

    +

    When you enable credit card donations from PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC, the list of receiving organizations is limited to those with credit card processing enabled. When a patron makes a donation, the receiving organization's credit card settings are applied. If the connection organization is a branch, and that branch has enabled credit card processing and donations, the donation can be made to that branch only. However, if the PAC connection organization is the library system, and donations are not enabled at the system level, a donation can still be made to any library or branch that accepts donations.

    +
      +
    • Enabling donations - Use the Credit Card Payment parameter Online Payments: Configure for your organization. Select your e-commerce provider in the Payment processing gateway list, and select the PowerPAC tab in the Online Payment Settings dialog box. Select (check) Allow donations. Repeat using the Mobile PAC tab, if appropriate. For specific instructions, see Credit Card Payments from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC and select the link for your e-commerce provider.
    • +
    • Donation branch order in PAC - In the PAC, the patron chooses a branch from a list when making a donation. The branch display order is controlled in PAC Administration. SeeSet up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    • Suppressing a branch from the donation branch list - Use the system-level PAC profile Suppress branches to prevent a branch from appearing in the list. For Polaris PowerPAC, this profile also suppresses the selected branches from the connection branch list (Switch to another branch), the list of branches on the Search Options scoping page, and the list of branches on the Advanced Search scoping page. For Mobile PAC, the profile suppresses the branch from the drop-down lists on the Library Hours and Preferences pages.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    The donation Web part appears in the PowerPAC dashboard when you assign it to the page. Be sure to assign the donation Web part to the pages where you want it to appear. See Assign Web parts to public pages.To display the donation link in Mobile PAC, set the Mobile PAC profileNavigation: Donations toYes.

    +

    Using Google's reCAPTCHA on the PAC Donations Page

    +

    Libraries that use PayPal Payflow Pro for credit card payments through Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC can enable Google's free reCAPTCHA feature, which adds human verification to the process of submitting a donation to the library. This minimizes the possibility of a robotic "user" making many small fake donations to the library to verify stolen credit card information. Genuine donors identify a picture or select I'm not a robot to continue with the donation process. For more information about reCAPTCHA, see https://www.google.com/recaptcha/intro/index.html.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayexclinhou.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayexclinhou.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04cc42ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayexclinhou.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Excluding In-House Workstations from Web-Based Payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Excluding In-House Workstations from Web-Based Payments

    +

    To prevent web-based credit card payments from within the library, set the system-level Credit Card Payments parameter Exclude local workstations from web based payments to Yes. This setting supports a lower level of PCI compliance responsibility on the library’s part by preventing web-based payments through EnvisionWare from within the library network. “Local workstations” are those defined in the In-House IP Addresses database table. Add the library’s wi-fi connection to the table if you also want to exclude payments from mobile devices within the library.

    +

    When you exclude local workstations from web-based payments, the Pay option is suppressed from the patron account Fines & Fees page, and the Donation link displays a message.

    +

    For more information about the In-House IP Address table, see Identifying In-House Computers.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaymanager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaymanager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..279562d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaymanager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Credit Card Payment Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payment Manager

    +

    Staff members can view transaction details and refund payments made with a credit card using the Credit Card Payment Manager, available from the Utilities menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The system Circulation permission, Access Credit Card Payments Manager: Allow, is required to access the Credit Card Payment Manager. The Credit Card Payment Manager shows only those orders and transactions where the staff client workstation’s log-on branch and the transacting branch use the same payment gateway.

    +

    For more information about using the Credit Card Payment Manager, see Managing Credit Card Orders.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaypartial.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaypartial.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d3a515e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaypartial.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + E-Commerce Partial Payments + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce Partial Payments

    +

    Partial payments are supported in the staff client only. Patrons can select specific fines to pay or opt to pay all, but they cannot make partial payments from the PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, or ExpressCheck. The patron’s registered branch settings determine the specific credit card processor and parameters. For donations, the selected recipient branch’s settings determine the specific credit card parameters.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayprivandref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayprivandref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b03bd4da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpayprivandref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options

    +

    When you set up an e-commerce for PowerPAC, MobilePAC, or ExpressCheck, you can select the options: Display privacy policy and/or Display refund policy. The text for these display options is set for the patron's registered branch using PolarisWebAdmin (Language Editor) as follows:

    +
      +
    • PowerPAC Privacy Policy - You specify your privacy policy text for PowerPAC using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The message ID is PACML_PAYMENT_PRIVACYPOLICY_1066. The system uses the text specified for the patron’s registered branch. For information about editing PAC language files, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online Help. Any custom text and markup must be responsive to the user's device.
    • +
    • PowerPAC Refund Policy - You specify your refund policy text for PowerPAC using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The message ID is: PACML_PAYMENT_REFUNDPOLICY_1067. The system uses the text specified for the patron’s registered branch. For information about editing PAC language files, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online Help. Any custom text and markup must be responsive to the user's device.
    • +
    • Mobile PAC Privacy Policy - You specify your privacy policy text for Mobile PAC using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The message ID is MP_CRUMBS_FINESANDFEES_PRIVACY. The system uses the text specified for the patron’s registered branch. For information about editing PAC language strings, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online Help.
    • +
    • Mobile PAC Refund Policy- You specify your refund policy text using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The message ID is MP_CRUMBS_FINESANDFEES_REFUND_POLICY. The system uses the text specified for the patron’s registered branch. For information about editing PAC language strings, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online Help.
    • +
    • ExpressCheck Privacy Policy- You specify your privacy policy text for ExpressCheck using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The message ID is EC_TEXT_POLICY_PRIVACY. For information about editing ExpressCheck language strings, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online help.
    • +
    • ExpressCheck Refund Policy - You specify your refund policy text using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The message ID is EC_TEXT_POLICY_REFUND. For information about editing ExpressCheck language strings, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online help.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaystaff.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaystaff.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..526c4e89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/creditpaystaff.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Credit Card Payments from the Staff Client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payments from the Staff Client

    +

    The staff member selects the charges in the patron's account, selects Pay, and selects Credit Card as the payment method. The fine amount is displayed, and the staff member selects Submit.The system creates Store Order, Store Transaction, and Store Details entries within the Pending status; sends the request to the e-commerce gateway provider; and sends a query result request to the payment gateway provider. The staff member swipes the credit card through the card reader attached to the workstation. When the credit card is authorized, the system notifies the payment gateway provider that the transaction is finished, the Store Order is updated to a Complete status, the Store Transaction is updated to a Success status, and the patron account is updated. A confirmation message is displayed, and a receipt is generated as with any other payment method.

    +

    Note: +
    Staff members require the Fines: Allow credit card payments to accept credit card payments and Fines: Allow refunds to process refunds.

    +

    Possible error messages:

    +
      +
    • Timeout message - The transaction timed out and is canceled.
    • +
    • Payment did not go through as entered - Transaction is not authorized or is canceled by the gateway.
    • +
    • Update patron account failed - The patron’s credit card was charged, but the patron account was not updated.
    • +
    +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that can process credit card payments from the Polaris staff client, Leap, ExpressCheck, PowerPAC, and MobilePAC, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    +

    Note: +
    EnvisionWare and Comprise are the only payment gateways for credit card payments from Leap.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/e-commerce-with-jetpay.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/e-commerce-with-jetpay.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17c3aa72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/e-commerce-with-jetpay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + E-Commerce with JetPay + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Commerce with JetPay

    +

    Polaris supports the use of JetPay for accepting credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC. JetPay is a hosted method of accepting credit card payments from PowerPAC. You can enable the use of JetPay at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    When you use JetPay for payments, JetPay handles much of the responsibility of Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) compliance for your library. No credit card information is stored in the Polaris database when a payment is made via JetPay.

    +

    Note: 
    The use of JetPay for payments from the staff client, Polaris ExpressCheck, or Mobile PAC is not supported.

    +

    To enable JetPay e-commerce, you must:

    +
      +
    1. Set up a JetPay account +
    2. +
    3. Set up JetPay processing in the Administration Explorer +
    4. +
    +

    For additional information about handling refund transactions when using JetPay for credit card payments Handling Refunds When Using JetPay

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/handling-refunds-jetpay.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/handling-refunds-jetpay.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d26405ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/handling-refunds-jetpay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Handling Refunds When Using JetPay + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Handling Refunds When Using JetPay

    +

    When you use JetPay hosted e-commerce, refund and void transactions are not integrated in Polaris. Credit card refunds must be handled separately, both through the JetPay management interface and manually from the Polaris patron account in the Polaris staff client.

    +

    For example, if a replacement charge has been paid via credit card, the refund must be issued manually from the Polaris patron account transaction summary and then again from the JetPay interface.

    +

    Your library should work with JetPay to establish the appropriate staff accounts for handling refunds, then establish the refunds workflow with your staff. Do not allow staff to issue refunds to credit card payments from the Polaris patron account as cash or credit; instead, they must select Refund.

    +

    + RefundTrans00482.gif 

    +

    Note:
    Voided payments, as when the connection fails, are not recognized in Polaris, and the voided transaction will appear in Polaris as a completed transaction.

    +

    Polaris also supports integrated credit card processing, such as PayPal’s Payflow Pro (see E-Commerce with PayPal® Payflow Pro), which does offer credit card refunds from within Polaris. In systems where some sites use an integrated solution and others use a gateway solution such as JetPay, refunds can only be made in these circumstances:

    +
      +
    • The staff client log-on branch supports integrated payments, and the Online Payments: Configure option in Polaris Administration (Credit Card parameters) is set to allow payments from the staff client for the integrated solution.
    • +
    +

     AllowOnlinePayments00483.gif

    +
      +
    • The original payment was made using the integrated solution, and the Online Payments: Configure option is set to allow payments from the staff client for the integrated solution.
    • +
    +

    Otherwise, when an attempt is made to refund a credit card payment in Polaris, a message displays indicating that no refund transaction can be created. The credit card is not refunded, and the patron account is left as is. This situation might occur if a consortium has implemented both integrated and hosted credit card payment solutions, or a library or consortium has changed from one solution to another, and the refund is attempted after the change.

    +

    Lost Item Recovery

    +

    If a lost-and-paid item is recovered at check-in and the payment was made via credit card, and the library has set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to automatically credit the patron’s account, a “dummy” refund is created instead of a credit. The refund will appear as a refund in the Polaris patron account, and a refund transaction created. This transaction is available for reporting in the Refunds to Credit Card Payments report. You can use the report to cross-check transactions logged by JetPay. (Note that the refund must also be made via JetPay.)

    +

    Instead of automatically crediting the patron’s account, you may want to set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to Leave as is. With this setting, the payments remain in the Polaris patron account and the refund or credit can be issued via JetPay. Or your library may choose to disable all automatic recovery actions, requiring staff to create manual refunds when a lost-and-paid item is recovered. For more information about setting lost item recovery options, see Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-account.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-account.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32fa6455 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-account.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Set Up a JetPay Account + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up a JetPay Account

    +

    To enable the use of JetPay for accepting credit card payments from Polaris PowerPAC, contact JetPay to establish an account for your library.

    +

    When establishing your library's JetPay account, make a note of the following two pieces of information:

    +
      +
    • Client key
    • +
    • Web key
    • +
    +

    You will need this information to set up JetPay processing in the Administration Explorer.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-processing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17877564 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditCard/set-up-jetpay-processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Set Up JetPay Processing in the Administration Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up JetPay Processing in the Administration Explorer

    +

    Note: 
    To complete this workflow, your library must have already established a JetPay account. For more information, see Set Up a JetPay Account.

    +

    To configure Polaris to use JetPay for processing credit card payments from PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, navigate to the organization for which you want to enable JetPay processing, and click ParametersCredit Card Payment.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Online Payments: Configure.
    4. +

      The Online Payments Settings dialog box opens.

      +

      + +

      +
    5. In the Payment processing gateway list, select JetPay.
    6. +
    7. Click Properties.
    8. +

      The JetPay dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    9. Enter the following connection information:
      1. Transaction URL - Enter the following URL: 
      2. https://magic.collectorsolutions.com/magic-api/api/transaction/redirect

      3. Payment page URL - Enter the following URL: 
      4. https://magic.collectorsolutions.com/magic-ui/PaymentRedirect

      5. Transaction fee URL - Enter the following URL: 
      6. https://magic.collectorsolutions.com/magic-api/api/fee

      7. Client key - Enter the client key provided when your library set up a JetPay account.
      8. Web key - Enter the web key provided when your library set up a JetPay account.
      9. Post-back URL - Enter the post-back URL for your site, using the format below:
      10. https://<www.mylibrary.org/polaris>/payments/PostbackJetPay.aspx

        Note:
        Replace <www.mylibrary.org/polaris> with your Polaris PowerPAC URL.

        This field accepts a maximum of 250 alphanumeric characters.

      11. PAC return URL - Enter the URL that will be displayed when the user clicks the return link on the JetPay final payment transaction page. To use your library's PowerPAC patron account Fine & Fees page, use the format below:
      12. https://<www.mylibrary.org>/polaris/patronaccount/finesfees.aspx

        Note:

        Replace <www.mylibrary.org/polaris> with your Polaris PowerPAC URL.

        This field accepts a maximum of 250 alphanumeric characters.

      13. Donations PAC return URL - If you plan to accept donations, enter the URL of the Polaris PowerPAC page that will be displayed when the user clicks the return link on the JetPay final payment transaction page. This field is required. If you do not plan to accept donations, simply enter your PAC Return URL. This field accepts a maximum of 250 alphanumeric characters.
      14. Library absorbs fees - Select this check box if you want the library to absorb the JetPay credit card processing fee. This check box is a shadow setting of how your account is set up in JetPay to display warnings and fees to the patron and it must match the corresponding setting in JetPay. If this check box is not selected, the processing fee is billed to the patron.
      15. Click OK.
    10. +
    11. Configure the following settings on the PowerPAC tab of the Online Payments Settings dialog box:
      1. Allow online payments - Select this check box to enable the use of JetPay for credit card payment processing.
      2. Note:
        In PowerPAC, patrons pay fines on the Fines and Fees page of the patron account. Be sure the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Fines & fees is set to Yes for the organization to allow patrons to access this page. For more information Enable patron account access - PowerPAC.

      3. Minimum fine - Enter the minimum fine amount that will be accepted via credit card payment. The default value for this setting is $1.00.
      4. Note:
        If the amount a patron owes is less than the Minimum fine value, the Pay fines link does not appear in the patron's account in Polaris PowerPAC.

      5. Processing fee -This is controlled completely by JetPay and should be set up there. To charge a processing fee for fine payments, enter an amount in the Processing fee box. The maximum value for this setting is $20.00. The default value is $0.00.
      6. Display privacy policy - To display a privacy policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select Display privacy policy. For more information, see Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
      7. Display refund policy - To display a refund policy link in Polaris PowerPAC, select Display refund policy. For more information, see Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.
      8. Allow donations - Select this check box to enable the use of credit card payments for donations.
      9. Processing fee - This is controlled completely by JetPay and should be set up there. To charge a processing fee for donations, enter an amount in the Processing fee box for donation payments. The maximum value is $20.00. The default value is $0.00.
      10. Allow patron to designate title purchase - Select this check box to allow the donor to direct a donation toward a title purchase in a specific subject area. When this option is selected, the donations page includes a field where the donor can specify a title purchase.
    12. +
    13. Click OK to save your settings.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditParams/Credit_Card_Payment_Parameters_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditParams/Credit_Card_Payment_Parameters_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f078876 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPCreditParams/Credit_Card_Payment_Parameters_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + Credit Card Payment Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payment Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available on the Parameters, Credit Card Payment tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    +

    Exclude local workstations from web based payments (System)

    +

    When set to Yes, supports a lower level of PCI compliance on the library’s part by preventing payments through PayPal’s Payflow Pro or hosted gateway solutions such as Payflow Link, Payments Gateway, or Comprise SmartPay from within the library network. “Local workstations” are those defined in the In-House IP Addresses database table.

    +
      +
    • Default: No
    • +
    +

    Online Payments: Configure
    (System, Library, Branch)

    +

    Use this parameter to set up credit card processing in the staff client, PAC, and Polaris ExpressCheck. Double-click to display the Online Payment Settings dialog box. You need specific values from your e-commerce provider to configure online payments. See Setting Up E-Commerce.

    +

    Payment Terminal ID
    (Workstation)

    +

    For Comprise SmartPAY users. Use this parameter to specify the SmartTerminal card reader ID. You must set this parameter for each staff client and ExpressCheck workstation with a SmartTerminal reader. See E-Commerce with Comprise™ SmartPAY™.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Add_a_hold_note_to_incoming_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Add_a_hold_note_to_incoming_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c620168 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Add_a_hold_note_to_incoming_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add a hold note to incoming requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a hold note to incoming requests

    +

    To add a hold note to incoming requests:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the system, library, or branch level, and select the NCIP tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click NCIP ILL holds: Add staff display note. The NCIP ILL holds: Add staff display note dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + NCIPnote.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable.
    2. +
    +

    The default Item was requested through ILL text is displayed in the Staff display note field. You can customize this text by entering up to 255 characters.

    +
    +

    Note:
    When enabled, the note text appears in the hold request Staff Display note that displays when trapping and also prints on the hold slip. If the other notes are added during hold request processing, the ILL note is appended to the existing text.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Delete_temporary_records_when_item_is_checked_in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Delete_temporary_records_when_item_is_checked_in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c150cd12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Delete_temporary_records_when_item_is_checked_in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Delete temporary records when item is checked in + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete temporary records when item is checked in

    +

    The interlibrary loan application handles most ILL workflows step-by-step, including checking a requested item back in after circulation, which deletes the temporary records created in Polaris. However, some libraries may prefer checking the item in and then automatically removing the temporary records at that point. If you prefer to use this method, set the Delete temporary records on receive NCIP parameter to Yes; the default setting is No.

    +

    To delete temporary records when an item is checked in:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the system level, and select the NCIP tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Delete temporary records on receive.
    4. +
    +

    + deletetemp.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save, or press Ctrl+S to save the setting.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_medium_types_to_item_material_types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_medium_types_to_item_material_types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f2f482cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_medium_types_to_item_material_types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + + + + + + + + Map NCIP medium types to item material types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Map NCIP medium types to item material types

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify the NCIP Medium Types policy tables: Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify NCIP Medium Types: Outgoing - Allow; Modify NCIP Medium Types: Incoming - Allow.

    +

    NCIP supports a limited number of medium types, as shown in the table below.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    NCIP Medium Type ID +

    +
    +

    Description +

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Audio tape

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Blu-Ray

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Book

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Book with Audio Tape

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Book with Compact Disc

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Book with Diskette

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Bound Journal

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    CD-Rom

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Compact Disc (CD)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Diskette

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    DVD

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Magazine

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    Microform

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Video Tape

    +
    +

    To map NCIP medium types to Polaris item material types for outgoing and incoming requests:

    +

     

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the system, and select NCIP Medium Types: Outgoing. The NCIP Medium Types: Outgoing policy table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To map a Polaris item material type to an NCIP medium type, double-click the material type. The Modify dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select an NCIP Medium Type from the list and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    You can assign none, one, or more than one item material type to each NCIP medium type, but an item material type can be assigned to only one NCIP medium type. The default NCIP medium type is Book. If you select None for the Medium Type, the item material type cannot be assigned to that medium type and will not be eligible for ILL requests.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    3.  In the Policy Tables folder for the system, select NCIP Medium Types: Incoming. The NCIP Medium Types: Incoming policy table is displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    +

    This table maps NCIP Medium types to Polaris item material types for incoming requests, and is used for requests where the Polaris library is the borrower. This table allows the library to create ILL items with different material types.

    +
      +
    1. To map an NCIP medium type to a Polaris item material type, double-click the NCIP medium type. The Modify dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select a Polaris item material type from the list and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The default item material type is ID 01 (typically Book, but your library may assign a different material type to ID 01 in the Material Types policy table; see Defining Material Types).

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_user_privileges_to_Polaris_patron_codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_user_privileges_to_Polaris_patron_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6410114 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Map_NCIP_user_privileges_to_Polaris_patron_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + Map NCIP user privileges to Polaris patron codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Map NCIP user privileges to Polaris patron codes

    +

    To map NCIP user privilege types to Polaris patron codes:

    +

    Note:
    Contact your Polaris Site Manager for advice on completing this table.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the system, and select NCIP User Privilege Types. The NCIP User Privilege types policy table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To modify a mapping, select the Polaris patron code and click the Modify icon above the table. The Modify dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select a public user privilege, an academic user privilege, both, or None (no mapping).
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    None means that those Polaris patron codes are not mapped to any NCIP user privilege type, and will not be authenticated for ILL requests.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The NCIP User Privilege types table appears with the new mapping. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save your changes.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Mapping_NCIP_Data_to_Polaris_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Mapping_NCIP_Data_to_Polaris_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..588af11e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Mapping_NCIP_Data_to_Polaris_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Mapping NCIP Data to Polaris Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mapping NCIP Data to Polaris Data

    +

    Use the following policy tables to map NCIP data to Polaris data:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_fiscal_action_types_mapping.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_fiscal_action_types_mapping.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19f3d256 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_fiscal_action_types_mapping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Modify the NCIP fiscal action types mapping + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify the NCIP fiscal action types mapping

    +

    The NCIP Fiscal Action Types policy table is pre-filled with NCIP fiscal action types that cannot be modified. You can select the patron account transaction to map to the NCIP fiscal action type.

    +

    Note:
    The permission Modify NCIP Fiscal Action Types table: Allow is required to modify this table.

    +

    To modify NCIP fiscal action type mapping:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder at the system level, and select NCIP Fiscal Action Type.
    2. +
    +

    The following NCIP fiscal action types are listed with their corresponding Polaris patron account transactions:

    +
    +
      +
    • Assess
    • +
    • Cancel
    • +
    • Forgive
    • +
    • Payment
    • +
    • Penalty
    • +
    • Waive
    • +
    • Write Off
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click a fiscal action type. The Modify: NCIP Fiscal Action Types dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Select a Polaris patron account transaction type from the drop-down list box.
    4. +
    +

    Only one Polaris patron account transaction type may be selected for each NCIP fiscal action type, but a Polaris payment method can be assigned to more than one NCIP fiscal action type. The payment type value can be blank.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_payment_types_mapping.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_payment_types_mapping.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7fdef2a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_NCIP_payment_types_mapping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Modify the NCIP payment types mapping + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify the NCIP payment types mapping

    +

    This table is pre-filled with NCIP payment types that cannot be modified. You can select the Polaris payment method to map to the NCIP payment type.

    +

    Note:
    The permission Modify NCIP Payment Types table: Allow is required to modify this table.

    +

    To modify NCIP payment type mapping:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder at the system level, and select NCIP Payment Types.
    2. +
    +

    The following NCIP payment types are listed with their corresponding Polaris patron account transactions:

    +
    +
      +
    • Bank Draft
    • +
    • Cash
    • +
    • Check
    • +
    • Credit Card
    • +
    • Debit Card
    • +
    • Deposit Account
    • +
    • Direct Debit
    • +
    • Funds Transfer
    • +
    • Money Order
    • +
    • Traveler’s Check
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click a payment type. The Modify: NCIP Payment Types dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Select a Polaris payment method from the drop-down list box.
    4. +
    +

    Only one Polaris payment method may be selected for each NCIP Payment Type, but a Polaris payment method can be assigned to more than one NCIP Payment Type. The Polaris payment type value can be blank.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_SIP_payment_types_mapping.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_SIP_payment_types_mapping.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9bfed7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Modify_the_SIP_payment_types_mapping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Modify the SIP payment types mapping + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify the SIP payment types mapping

    +

    This table is pre-filled with SIP payment types that cannot be modified. You can select the Polaris payment method to map to the SIP payment type.

    +

    Note:
    The permission Modify SIP Payment Types table: Allow is required to modify this table.

    +

    To modify SIP payment type mapping:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder at the system level, and select SIP Payment Types.
    2. +
    +

    The following SIP payment types are listed with their corresponding Polaris payment methods:

    +
    +
      +
    • AAM Allocation Account Payment Code
    • +
    • Blackboard Account Payment Code
    • +
    • Cash
    • +
    • Check
    • +
    • Coupons
    • +
    • Credit Account Payment Code
    • +
    • Credit Card
    • +
    • Debit Card
    • +
    • Deposit Account Payment Code
    • +
    • Direct Debit
    • +
    • Gift cards/certificates
    • +
    • Other
    • +
    • Patron Account
    • +
    • Stored Value Card
    • +
    • Waive
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click the payment type. The Modify: SIP Payment Types dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Select a Polaris payment method from the drop-down list box.
    4. +
    +

    Only one Polaris payment method may be selected for each SIP payment type, but a Polaris payment method can be assigned to more than one SIP payment type. The payment method value can be blank.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/NCIP_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/NCIP_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66de23f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/NCIP_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + NCIP Administration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP Administration

    +

    NCIP (NISO Circulation Interchange Protocol) is a standard suite of messages designed to allow disparate systems, such as the Polaris ILS and regional resource sharing solutions or ILL applications, to exchange data in support of lending and circulating material among members of the two systems. NCIP is also used for patron authentication alone by some third party applications.

    +

    To set up NCIP processing with Polaris, you use policy tables to map NCIP data to Polaris data and NCIP parameters to configure NCIP processing for your library.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Prevent_creation_of_holds_in_response_to_ILL_message.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Prevent_creation_of_holds_in_response_to_ILL_message.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbc0ba96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Prevent_creation_of_holds_in_response_to_ILL_message.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Prevent creation of holds in response to ILL message + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Prevent creation of holds in response to ILL message

    +

    In NCIP processing, the hold request is created in response to the ItemRequested message used by ILL. This is early in the ILL process, and the hold request cannot be canceled or modified in Polaris. Some library systems may prefer to prevent the immediate creation of the hold request.

    +

    To prevent an automatic hold request to be placed in response to the ItemRequested message:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the System level only, and select the Request tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click NCIP: Use unlocked hold request,and select No.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save or press Ctrl+S to save the setting.
    2. +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Select_an_institutional_patron.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Select_an_institutional_patron.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..047c41d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Select_an_institutional_patron.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Select an institutional patron + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Select an institutional patron

    +

    When lending items through interlibrary loan, NCIP uses a default “institutional patron” as the borrower. Only one institutional patron is used for all ILL lending. When the request is filled in the other system, the Polaris item will be checked out automatically to this NCIP patron.

    +

    To select an institutional patron in Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the system level and select the NCIP tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click ILL institutional patron. + The ILL institutional patron dialog box opens. If a patron record has already been defined as the "institutional patron," the patron's name, branch, and barcode appear in the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + NCIPILLpatr.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the Find Patron button. The Find Tool opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for and select the patron record.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Set up centralized or decentralized NCIP processing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Set up centralized or decentralized NCIP processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fdd1485 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Set up centralized or decentralized NCIP processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Set up centralized or decentralized NCIP processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up centralized or decentralized NCIP processing

    +

    The default setting for the NCIP Processing option is Decentralized processing, but you can change it to Central processing. Use the Central processing setting if ILL items are received at the central location and then sent to the requesting library or branch, and returned items are sent to the central location to be returned to the lender. The central location may be a branch or it may be a workstation within a library.

    +

    Note: +
    If your library or consortium uses a mixture of centralized and decentralized ILL processing, where items are received at a central location but each branch returns items directly to the lender, the Central Processing option is recommended.

    +

    To set up central or decentralized NCIP processing:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the system level and select the NCIP tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click NCIP processing. The NCIP processing dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Central processing - When this option is selected, the ILL processing branch drop-down list displays all branches in the system. Select a branch from the ILL processing branch field.
    • +
    • Decentralized processing - When this option is selected, the Default requesting branch drop-down list displays all branches in the system. Select a branch from the list. This branch will be substituted in cases where NCIP messaging does not include a recognizable Polaris branch to use as the pickup branch.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Setting_NCIP_Parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Setting_NCIP_Parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ad07ccf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Setting_NCIP_Parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting NCIP Parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting NCIP Parameters

    +

    The NCIP parameters are located on a separate tab in Polaris Administration. Another parameter that affects NCIP is on the Request tab at the System level only.

    +

    The NCIP ILL holds: Add staff display note is the only NCIP parameter that is available at the Library and Branch levels in Polaris Administration; all other settings are at the System level.

    +

    Use these parameters to do the following:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Specify_the_NCIP_user_privilege_type.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Specify_the_NCIP_user_privilege_type.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c262b678 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPNCIP/Specify_the_NCIP_user_privilege_type.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Specify the NCIP user privilege type + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the NCIP user privilege type

    +

    To select an academic or public library in Polaris:

    +

    Note: +
    The default is Public.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the system level, and select the NCIP tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click NCIP User Privilege type. +
    4. +
    +

    The drop-down list is available.

    +

    + userpriv.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Academic or Public in the drop-down list box.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save or press Ctrl+S to save the setting.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPParamsRef/Patron_Services_Parameters_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPParamsRef/Patron_Services_Parameters_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7dee27c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPParamsRef/Patron_Services_Parameters_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1303 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Services Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available on the Parameters > Patron Services tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    +

    Note: +
    Separate sets of parameters affect hold requests, notification, and self-check circulation. See Request Parameters Reference, Notification Parameters Reference and Self-Check Parameters Reference.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Parameter

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Account transaction deletion

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether finished transactions older than a specified period are deleted from the patron’s transaction summary. Double-click to display the Finished Transaction deletion setup dialog box. See Setting Patron Accounting Options. This setting also determines how long certain patron account data from deleted patron records is saved for cash reports. See Retaining Financial Information for Deleted Patron Records.

    +
    +

    Not enabled (transactions are not deleted); if enabled, default period is 3 years.

    +
    +

    Accrued fine options +
    +

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Determines whether to include claimed items and/or lost items in estimated accrued fine calculations; determines whether to include estimated accrued fines in blocking calculations. See Calculating and Blocking for Estimated Accrued Fines.

    +
    +

    No options checked

    +
    Address verificationSystem Opens the Address Verification dialog box where you can enable address verification, specify the URL for the verification service, and set an expiration term.
    +

    Associated patron options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets a limit on the number of records that can be associated with one patron record, specifies the defaults for whether primary patrons are allowed to pick up held items for their associated patrons, and whether the primary patron is blocked when associated patrons are blocked. See Associated Patron Blocking.

    +
    +

    20; do not block; do not allow pickup

    +
    +

    Check-in: auto-charge fine from item work form and find tool context menu

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether overdue fines are automatically charged to the patron account when overdue items are checked in from the Item workform, the Find Tool context menu, or the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. When the parameter is set to Yes and an overdue item is checked in, the fine is automatically charged to the patron account. If the overdue item can fill an active hold request, the hold request message appears and the staff member takes action on the hold request message. (When the parameter is set to Yesand a billed item is checked in, the Resolve lost/billed item dialog box appears, the staff member resolves the billed charges, and the item is checked in. If the billed item can fill a request, the hold request message appears before the Resolve lost/billed item dialog box. The staff member takes action on the hold request message first.) If the parameter is set to No, the Check In - Fine dialog box appears when the item is overdue, and the staff member resolves the fine accordingly. However, if the item can fill a hold request, the hold request message always appears first.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Check-in: Listview options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which optional columns (Title, Material Type, Patron Name) appear on the Check In workform’s Items Checked In list for the Normal view and Bulk view. See Setting Up the Check In Workform.

    +
    +

    All values selected

    +
    +

    Check-in: Prompt for in-transit in bulk mode

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Applies to bulk check-in. Items assigned to another branch are automatically given a status of In-transit when checked in. This parameter specifies if a message notifies the user of the In-transit status when an item is checked in at a branch other than the assigned branch.

    +
    +

    No — No message is displayed.

    +
    +

    Check-in: Prompt for in-transit in normal mode

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Applies to normal check-in. Specifies if a prompt appears when an item is checked in at a branch other than the assigned branch. The prompt offers the choice of changing the item’s status to In-transit to its assigned branch, or changing the item’s status to In.

    +
    +

    No — Items assigned to another branch are automatically given a status of In-transit when checked in

    +
    +

    Check-in: Receipt options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which fields appear on the check-in receipt. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    Item barcode, title, author, material type, call number, and patron’s limited barcode

    +
    +

    Check-out: Charge options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets policies for charging for check-out and/or renewal. See Charging for Checkout and Renewal.

    +
    +

    No charges enabled

    +
    +

    Check-out: Listview options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which optional item information columns appear on the Check Out workform. See Setting Up the Check Out Workform.

    +
    +

    All values selected

    +
    +

    Check-out: Optional patron data

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which optional patron data fields appear on the Check Out and Patron Status workform. See Setting Up the Check Out Workform.

    +
    +
    +

    Check-out: Receipt options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which optional fields appear on the check-out receipt. Also specifies if receipts are printed after a prompt and whether Leap checkouts prompt for eReceipt options for patrons who do not receive eReceipts. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    Library phone, library Web address

    +
    +

    Check-out: Require format selection when checking out integrated eContent

    +
    +

    System, Library, and Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons are required to select the format when checking out integrated eContent titles in the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    No

    +

    If set to Yes for the organization, patrons must select the format when checking out integrated eContent titles from the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Check-out: warn if item is from another branch

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether this message is displayed when you attempt to check out an item that belongs to another branch: This item is assigned to ‘Branch X.' Do you want to continue with this transaction?

    +
    +

    No +

    +
    +

    Check-out: warn to send item in-transit

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Applicable when the parameter Check-out: warn if item is from another branch is set to Yes and the staff member chooses No (do not continue with the check-out transaction). Determines whether this subsequent message is displayed: Do you want to put this item in transit to ‘Branch X?’

    +
    +

    Yes +

    +
    +

    Claims: Number patron can have at one time

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    If a patron claims that she never had an item or that she returned an item, and a claim is added to her record, this setting determines how many claims she can have before Polaris blocks her account. These include only the claims still on the patron’s record, not items that have been recovered.

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Claims: Total number allowed

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the maximum number of resolved and unresolved claims a patron is allowed. If a patron accumulates the maximum number of claims, Polaris blocks the patron from borrowing any more items. Maximum claims include current claims and all the old claimed items that have since been found.

    +
    +

    Value from parent organization setting

    +
    +

    Collection agency options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines the conditions and methods for sending delinquent account information to a collection agency. Double-click Collection agency optionsto display the Collection Agency Setup dialog box. See Using a Collection Agency.

    +
    +
    +

    Consortium circulation

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies the governing library (transacting branch, item’s assigned branch, patron’s branch) to use for due date calculation, loan and request limits, fine calculation, and lost item recovery. Double-click Consortium circulation to display the Consortium Circulation dialog box. See Governing Library for Circulation Transactions.

    +
    +
    +

    Course reserve options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines the default settings for the reserve item “record,” which stores circulation, status, and disposition information about an item that has been placed on course reserve. Double-click Course reserve options to display the Course Reserve dialog box. See Setting Up Course Reserves.

    +
    +
    +

    Credit for overpayment

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an overpayment on a patron account can be applied to the account as a credit. See Setting Patron Accounting Options.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Days not fineable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Identifies the days of the week for which fines are not charged on an overdue item. For example, a library decides to designate Sunday as a “day not fineable” because the library is closed. If an item is due on Saturday and returned on Monday, fines are not charged for Sunday.

    +

    To select days for which overdue fines are not charged, double-click Days not fineable to display the No Fine Day(s) dialog box. Then select the check box for each day to be omitted for overdue fines, and click OK.

    +
    +

    None

    +
    +

    Distributed waives

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a specific amount can be deducted from each of several selected charges on a patron’s account. See Setting Patron Accounting Options.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Due date truncated: Prompt

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a message is displayed at circulation when a due date is changed automatically according to the number of hold requests for an item (see Defining Hold Processing Options), or for an end-of term due date setting (see Setting End-of-Term Due Dates).

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Duplication detection options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which, if any, additional patron record fields are checked for matching criteria during patron duplicate detection. Double-click Duplicate detection options to display the Duplicate detection options dialog box. See Setting Patron Duplicate Detection.

    +
    +

    No values selected

    +
    +

    End-of-term due date options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies one or more due dates for items. This feature allows libraries to prevent the circulation of items after a certain date, such as the end of a school term. After the date has passed, items can circulate again. Double-click End-of-term due date options to display the End-of-term due date options dialog box. See Setting End-of-Term Due Dates.

    +
    +
    +

    EReceipt options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables eReceipts (e-mail and/or text message receipts) so that patrons can receive these instead of printed check-out, renewal, and fine receipts. See Setting Up eReceipts.

    +
    +

    Not enabled; no values selected

    +
    +

    Express patron registration options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the values that automatically appear in fields on the Express Registration workform upon express patron record creation. Double-click Express patron registration options to display the Express patron registration options dialog box. See Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements.

    +
    +
    +

    Fine and loan period defaults

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies default fine and loan period values to use when a new fine or loan period code is created. See Setting Up Course Reserves and Set SIP self-check parameters.

    +
    +
    +

    Fine receipt options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which optional fields appear on the fine receipt, and whether a receipt is printed for waived charges. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    Library phone, library Web address, Suppress for waived charges

    +
    +

    Fine receipts: Print duplicate receipt

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    If fine receipts are printed, this setting specifies whether duplicate fine receipts are also printed, which may be required by library policy. See Set fine receipt options.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Floating options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether floating collections processing is enabled. At the System level, specifies limits on items that can float by collection or title/material type. See Setting Up Floating Collections.

    +
    +

    Floating not enabled.

    +
    +

    Free days (bulk)

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Identifies the default number of days omitted from overdue fine calculations at bulk check-in and when uploading offline transaction files (Bookmobile workform). This setting also determines free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. for check-in and renewal from the Patron Status workform - Items out view, the item record, Find Tool, and during check-out when an item already checked out to one patron is checked out to another. See Free Days.

    +
    +

    0 days

    +
    +

    Free days (normal)

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Identifies the default number of days omitted from overdue fine calculations at normal check-in. Free days are used to cover unexpected closings when books might be checked in late, and the library does not want to charge overdues for the unexpected down time. See Free Days.

    +
    +

    0 days

    +
    +

    Hold slip options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which optional fields appear on the hold slip. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    Patron name, Limited patron barcode, Print patron phone, Patron address

    +
    +

    Holds call slip: enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a specially formatted hold call slip is available. This slip includes extended information, and can be folded to conceal patron information. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Holds pickup slip options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a specially formatted hold pickup slip is available. This slip is formatted for libraries that let patrons pick up their own held items. Specifies which optional fields appear on the hold pickup slip and the number of blank lines to place at the right ride of the hold pickup slip. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    Not enabled

    +
    +

    Hours of operation

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Identifies the days closed and hours opened for the organization. Double-click Hours of operation to display the Hours of Operation dialog box. You can also make these settings on the branch workform (select Tools, Define Hours of Operation). To set specific dates closed, such as January 1, 2010, see Identifying Dates Closed.

    +
    +

    No values

    +
    +

    In-transit slip options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a requesting patron’s name is printed on the in-transit slip, whether the destination branch’s full name or an abbreviation is printed, and whether the in-transit and pickup slips are to be combined. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +

    Patron’s name - Yes; Branch full name

    +
    +

    Items out receipt options

    +

    +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the optional information to include on the printed Items Out list, available from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. See Set Items Out receipt options.

    +
    +
    +

    Last use patron display

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the link to the previous borrower’s record is available, and whether the patron’s barcode is displayed, on the Item Record workform - Circulation view. Privacy policies at the library may restrict displaying who had an item after the item is returned.

    +
    +

    Yes — The Item Record workform - Circulation view offers a link to the last borrower’s record, and the patron’s barcode is displayed.

    +
    Last use patron: Delete System, Library, BranchDetermines if the previous borrower’s information is kept on item records.Yes
    Last use patron: Number of days to keepSystem, Library, Branch Sets the number of days the previous borrower’s information is kept on item records.0
    +

    Lost item charge options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an item’s status is changed to lost when the item is billed for overdue fines (system level only); whether overdue fines are charged to the patron’s account if you set billed items to be declared lost automatically; whether overdue fines are charged to the patron’s account when an item is declared lost; or whether overdue fines are instead calculated when a lost item is returned. See Overdue Fines on Lost Items.

    +
    +
    +

    Lost item recovery

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the automatic actions to take when lost items are recovered at check-out, normal check-in, and bulk check-in. Certain settings also apply to offline circulation and Polaris ExpressCheck. When you set automatic default processing options, staff do not need to resolve lost items manually when they are recovered at circulation. See Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults.

    +
    +
    Lost item transitionSystem, Library, Branch +

    Updates the circulation status of Lost items to either Missing or Withdrawn based on the amount of time they have been lost. See +Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn.

    +
    +
    +

    Material type groups

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies groups of material types and sets check-out limits on a selected groups for specified patron codes. See Defining Material Type Group Limits.

    +
    +
    Missing item transition SystemUpdates the circulation status of Missing items to a status of Withdrawn after a specified period of time. +See Set up missing item transition to withdrawn. +
    +

    Offline (Automated): Client workstations: Continue on error +

    +
    + +

    Specifies whether to continue or stop the automatic offline process if an error is encountered when pulling transactions from a workstation. If this parameter is set to Yes, the process continues even if an error is encountered, such as the workstation is offline or the .TRN path is invalid, and the job cannot pick up the .TRN files. +

    +
    Yes
    +

    Offline (Automated): Directory where offline TRN files are stored +

    +
    System +

    Specifies the directory where the offline TRN files are gathered and stored on the client workstation. +

    +
    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\5.0\OfflineTransaction

    +

    Note:
    If your library chooses to use a network share, enter the path in this parameter. For example, \\server\share

    +
    +

    Offline (Automated): Enable automatic offline uploading

    +
    SystemWhen set to Yes, this parameter enables automatic offline processing for all branches in the library system. See Setting Patron Duplicate Detection.No
    Offline (Automated): Generate one upload log per branch - This parameter, set at the System level only, is SystemSpecifies whether one or multiple log reports are created. If the value is set to Yes, one upload log is generated per offline branch. If this parameter is set to No, a single log file is generated for all offline branches. Log files are saved to: \\SERVER\c$\ProgramData\Polaris\<version>\Logs\OfflineYes
    +

    Offline (Automated): Polaris user for automatic upload process

    +
    SystemSpecifies the user assigned during the automatic upload processing. To specify a user, choose the user from the drop-down list of usernames.PolarisSuperUser.
    +

    Offline (Automated): Send offline upload log report to email address +

    +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Specifies the email addresses of users who receive the log reports. (If the job runs and no email address has been entered at the branch, library, or system level, the logs will still be produced, but they will not be emailed.) You can enter one or multiple email addresses, not to exceed 255 characters total. If multiple email addresses are entered, they must be separated by semicolons. +

    +
    None defined
    +

    Offline: Include patron account balance

    +
    + +

    Determines whether the patron account balance is included in the offline MDB files. (It does not affect offline circulation operations.

    +
    +
    +

    Offline: trap holds at check-in

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether eligible items are trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for holds when an offline file with check-in transactions is uploaded. See Holds Processing at Upload.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    ORS packing list

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies header and rating line text for outreach services packing lists where reader ratings are enabled. See Setting Up Reader Ratings.

    +
    +

    None defined

    +
    +

    ORS reading history

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the length of time a title is kept in an Outreach Services patron’s reading history, and the maximum number of titles the history can contain. See Setting Up Outreach Services.

    +
    +

    3 years, 1,000 titles

    +
    +

    ORS automatically print packing list

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether the packing list is automatically printed when items are checked out for outreach services patrons. See Setting Up Reader Ratings.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    ORS: Include other library items in selection list processing

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Used in outreach services processing. When this parameter is set to Yes, items belonging to the libraries in the ORS: Included Branches policy table are candidates for selection list processing when staff members choose Default branches to select items. The staff member can also choose Any to include items from any branch in the system. When the parameter is set to No, the table is ignored and the Default branches and Any options are not available. Only items belonging to the logged-in branch are selection list candidates. For more information about setting the ORS: Included Branches policy table, see Set branch items to include in outreach selection lists. For more information about all Polaris Administration settings that affect outreach services processing, see Setting Up Outreach Services

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    ORS: Prompt for update during normal check-out

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a prompt to update the next service date for an active ORS patron during normal check out.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    Outreach title ratingSystemSpecifies a rating scale for outreach services patrons if you choose to enable reader ratings. Outreach services patrons return their ratings with their items, and staff members enter the ratings in the patron account. See Set up reader ratings. 
    +

    Outreach title rating enabled

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether reader ratings for titles can be added to an outreach services patron record (Patron Status workform -Reader Services view). See Setting Up Reader Ratings.

    +
    +

    No — Reader ratings cannot be added to patron record.

    +
    +

    Overdues: # of days until long overdue

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the number of days to count from the day the item becomes overdue until the item becomes “long overdue.” Polaris uses the threshold to increment the long overdue counter.

    +
    +

    0 (zero) — Suppresses the long-overdue status and any related long-overdue processing.

    +
    +

    Overdues: Add closed days/dates to grace days

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether to include closed days and dates in your system’s grace period calculations. See Grace Periods.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Overdues: Block for long overdue items

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether a check-out is interrupted if the patron has any borrowed items with the long overdue status. The time interval that makes an item long overdue is specified by the Overdues: # of days until long overdue parameter

    +
    +

    Yes - A message interrupts check-out when the patron barcode is entered if the patron has long overdue items.

    +
    +

    Overdues: Charge fines for claimed items

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an overdue fine is charged if an item with the status Claim Returned or Claim Never Had is checked in or checked out.

    +
    +

    Yes - Overdue fines are charged on overdue claimed items that are checked in or checked out.

    +
    +

    Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at check-out
    (System)

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an overdue fine is automatically waived if the item is “recovered” during a check-out.

    +
    +

    No - The fine remains in a patron’s account history for the overdue item.

    +
    Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at renewal
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an overdue fine is waived automatically for an overdue item if the patron is renewing the item.

    +
    +

    No - The fine remains in a patron’s account history for the overdue item.

    +

    If set to Yes, the fine is waived automatically if the patron renews the overdue item.

    +
    Overdues: Maximum overdue fine balanceSystem +

    If a dollar amount above $0.00 is set, the overdue fine balance in all patron accounts cannot exceed this amount.

    +

    See Circulation Permissions Reference

    +
    $0.00 - By default, the maximum overdue fine limit is not set, and the amount displays as $0.00.
    +

    Overnight loan period

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Indicates that the library automatically permits overnight loans for hourly loans (less than 24 hours) due after the library’s closing time. Double-click Overnight loan period to display the Overnight Loan Period dialog box. To permit automatic overnight loans, select the Allow automatic overnight loan check box. To make overnight loans due later than the library’s opening time, input hours or minutes in the time period boxes (Time after opening when item is due). Click OK to submit your settings. See Hourly Loans.

    +
    +

    Selected, with one hour of additional time.

    +
    Patron Account: Charge Alert ThresholdSystem, Library, BranchDefines the charge alert threshold value. The system displays a warning message if a staff member adds a charge to a patron account that exceeds the charge alert threshold.$999.00
    +

    Patron delete options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines whether and how Polaris automatically deletes patron records in batch processing. With this parameter, you also set the thresholds for exceptional conditions to block patron record deletion. Double-click Patron delete options to display the Patron delete options dialog box. See Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron message text: Configure

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines available messages for posting to specific patron records and provides the ability to translate the messages into languages licensed for Polaris PowerPAC. See Setting Up Patron Messages.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron message text: Expiration period

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the standard posting period (1-99 days) for messages that have been posted to specific patron records. See Setting Up Patron Messages.

    +
    +

    14 days

    +
    Patron Registration Filter gendersSystem, Library, BranchAllows you to manage gender drop down lists. 
    +

    Patron registration: Filter patron codes

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies which patron codes, as defined in the Patron Codes policy table, are available for selection in the organization's workforms. See Defining Patron Codes.

    +
    +

    All selected

    +
    +

    Patron registration options
    (System, Library, Branch)

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the values, if any, that automatically appear in fields on the Patron Registration workform upon patron record creation. Double-click to display the Patron registration options dialog box. See Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Quick-circ: material type

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the default material type setting for new quick-circ item records. See Circulating Ephemeral Items.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Reading history

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Identifies how patron reading histories are maintained in Polaris. Double-click to display the Reading History Setup dialog box. See Setting Reading History Options.

    +

    Applies to Leap.
    If the Enable reading history box is checked, in the Reading History Setup dialog box, the Reading History link appears in the More menu on the Patron Registration workform in Leap. If the check box is not checked, the link does not appear.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Registration fee options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the registration fees, if any, for specific patron codes. The fee is applied automatically at the time of registration or renewal, and the patron account is blocked until the charge is paid.

    Double-click to display the Registration Fee Options dialog box. See Charging for Patron Registration.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Remove patron ID from circ transactions

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Purge patron identification information from transaction records and item record histories after a specified time period. See Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files.

    +
    +

     

    +
    Renewal: Auto renewSystem, Library, Branch +

    Specifies whether automatic renewals are performed. Automatic renewals are completed as part of the Notices Processing SQL job. When the job runs, it automatically renews eligible items for which the item's assigned branch has theRenewal: Auto-renewparameter set to Yes. A patron's items will be auto-renewed based on the number of days specified in the Notice options, Reminders setting for the patron's registered branch. See Automatic Renewal Process.

    +
    No
    +

    Renewal: Block if there are holds

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Displays a block message when a renewal attempt is made on an item that is out and there are requests for the title. Staff with the required permissions can renew the item, or the renewal can be canceled.

    When set to Yes, the block message is always displayed when there are requests for the title. When set to No, the block message is displayed only when the item being renewed is the only item available to fill the request. If other holdable and potentially eligible items are In, no dialog box appears and the item can be renewed. See Blocking Holds at Renewal.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Replacement fee options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines how the replacement cost and processing fees are calculated for each material type when a patron is charged for replacing a lost or damaged item.

    Double-click to display the Replacement Fee Defaults dialog box. See Setting Replacement Fee Defaults.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Shelving status options

    +
    +

    System, library, branch

    +
    +

    When an item is returned to its assigned branch and checked in, the item’s circulation status becomes In even though the item may not be immediately returned to the shelf. Use this parameter to enable a shelving status description and, for each material type, set a period of time during which the checked-in item’s In status is displayed as Shelving (or another appropriate description). See Setting Shelving Status.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Standard loan period

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines the loan period that the system, library, or branch uses during offline circulation, when there is no access to the database to determine the loan period.

    +
    +

    21 days

    +
    +

    Undefined fine amount

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Defines the fine amount that the system uses when the fine cannot be determined, perhaps because a patron code has not been defined. This value is also used to automatically populate the tables if a new branch or patron code is added.

    +
    +

    $5.00

    +
    +

    Undefined loan period

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Defines the loan period that the system uses when the loan period cannot be determined, perhaps because a patron or item code has not been defined. Polaris displays a message at check-out if the undefined loan period is being used. Staff members can use the undefined loan period or set a loan period manually, using the Special Loan Period dialog box. This value is also used to automatically populate the appropriate tables if a new branch or patron code is added.

    +
    +

    14 days

    +
    +

    Waive All displays

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether the Waive All icon and shortcut key are available for use from the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Waive All Option in the Patron Status Workform - Account View.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    WAM Block if Patron has stops

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    For libraries that use Wireless Access Manager (WAM) software. Determines whether patrons whose accounts are blocked can use wireless access. When you set this parameter to Yes at the branch level, it applies to patrons registered at that branch no matter where the blocked patron tries to use wireless access. That is, even if the blocked patron tries to use wireless access at a branch that sets this parameter to No, the patron cannot use wireless access at that branch.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    You Saved Receipt OptionsSystem, Library, Branch (some options available at System level only)Use this parameter to include a “you saved” message on print and email check out receipts. You can set the options to include the message on printed and e-mail receipts and items out slips at the System, Library, or Branch level. The options to use the default replacement fee when price is unavailable, and include renewals in the total value can be set at the System level only. See +You Saved Receipt Messages 
    +

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_Permissions_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_Permissions_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46935405 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_Permissions_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1067 @@ + + + + + + + Circulation Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulation Permissions Reference

    +

    These permissions are available under Security > Circulation at the listed organizational levels on the Administration Explorer. They control the ability to perform patron services and circulation tasks.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Control Record

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Permissions

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Access bookmobile

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open the Bookmobile workform. This workform is used to select and upload offline transaction files. User can retrieve transaction files created during offline operations.

    +
    +

    Access circulation control

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open the Circulation menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Check in materials, check-out materials, process holds or ILL requests, and accept fee and fine payments.

    +
    +

    Access Credit Card Payments Manager

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open the Credit Cards Payment Manager from the Utilities menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Work with the Credit Card Payments Manager.

    +
    +

    Access hold request manager

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open and use the Holds view on the Request Manager workform to process and manage hold requests.

    +
    +

    Access ILL request manager

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open and use the ILL view on the Request Manager workform to process and manage interlibrary loan requests.

    +
    +

    Access notice history

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open the Notice History dialog box from the Polaris Status workform and view the notice history for a specific item.

    +
    +

    Access patron record bulk change

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Use the Bulk Change option on the Record Set workform, Tools menu to change multiple patron records. To change records for a specific Registered at branch, the user also needs the permission Patron registration: Modify for that branch.

    +
    +

    Access patron services

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open the Patron Services menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar to register patrons and manage patron records/services.

    +
    +

    Circulation check-in workform

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Access Bulk Mode; Access In-house mode; Access Inventory mode; Access Normal mode

    +
    +

    Access specific views of the Check-in workform to: do bulk check-ins; check in items that were used in the library but did not circulate outside of the library; check in items in normal mode at the circulation desk; and take item inventory.

    +
    +

    Close ExpressCheck

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Exit the Polaris ExpressCheck application at a self-check workstation.

    +
    +

    Create a patron account credit

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Accept overpayments from patrons and post credits to patron accounts.

    +
    Create on-the fly recordsSystemAllowCreate brief records that enable an item to circulate.
    +

    Create patron associations +

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Open the Associations view on the Patron Status workform, and add patron associations.

    +
    +

    Create, return or forfeit a patron account deposit +

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Work with deposits in the Patron Status workform, Account view

    +
    +

    Delete patron associations

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Use the Delete option in the Associations view of the Patron Status workform to remove the links between patron records.

    +
    +

    Delete patron message

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Remove a posted message from a patron record.

    +
    +

    Delete photo IDs

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Delete a patron photo from the Patron Photo view of the Patron Registration workform.

    +
    +

    Display hold-request queues

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Display the Holds Queue workform; process hold requests at any branch.

    +
    +

    Fines: Allow credit card payments

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select Credit Card as payment method and input credit card information when a credit card is used to pay a fine or fee.

    +
    +

    Fines: Allow refunds

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Refund one or all payments from the Patron Status or Store Order workform.

    +
    +

    Fines: override 2nd level fine block

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Override a second-level fine block to allow patrons to check out.

    +
    +

    Fines: pay fines at circ

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select Pay on the Fines Block dialog box to pay a patron's fines during check-out, renewal, or check-in.

    +
    +

    Fines: waive fines at circ

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select Waive on the Fines Block dialog box to waive a patron's fines during check-out.

    +
    +

    Hold requests

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Ask me later; Create; Delete; Deny item request; Locate/Return; Modify; Modify PAC display note; Reactivate request

    +
    +

    Each branch that processes hold requests assigns permissions for staff members to manage holds for their branch. Staff members who have the permission Modify PAC display note can change the note that displays for held items in the PAC.

    +
    +

    ILL requests

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Delete; Modify; Convert holds

    +
    +

    Each branch that handles interlibrary loan requests assigns permissions for staff members who manage ILL requests. Staff members with the permission Convert holds can convert a hold request to an ILL request.

    +
    +

    Manage item dialogs

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Modify assigned collection; Modify barcode; Modify blocks; Modify circulation status; Modify material type; Modify notes; Modify shelf location; Withdraw items

    +
    +

    Change specific aspects of selected item records from the Check-in workform, without accessing the records. The items must have a status of In and belong to the branch associated with the logged-in workstation.

    +
    +

    Merge patrons

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Use the Patron Merge dialog box, available from the Tools menu on the Patron Registration workform to merge information from the secondary patron into the primary patron's record, and delete the secondary record.

    +
    +

    Modify due date and time

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select Special on the Check Out workform, and use the Special Loan dialog box to set a special due date and time during check-out.

    +
    +

    Modify fine amount

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Change the fine amount in the Overdue Fine dialog box when an overdue item is checked in or renewed.

    +
    +

    Modify free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation.

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Type a new number of days in the Free days box on the Check In workform to change the default number of free days (days exempt from overdue fines) when an item is checked in.

    +
    +

    Modify hold queues

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Change the position of holds on the Holds Queue workform.

    +
    +

    Modify lost item amount

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Change the amount of the replacement charge or processing fee in the Declare Lost Item dialog box when declaring an item lost.

    +
    +

    Modify ORS patron ratings

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select items from the Patron Status workform, Reader Services view and add or modify the patron's ratings, including notes.

    +
    +

    Modify photo IDs

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    On the Patron Registration workform, Patron Photo view, add or replace a patron photo.

    +
    +

    Modify receipt message text

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Edit and save the message text on the Circulation, Options, Receipt Printer Options tabbed page.

    +
    +

    Modify renewal period

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select Special Renew on the Items Out view of the Patron Status workform to set a special renewal loan period for a checked-out item.

    +
    +

    ORS: Link from bibliographic record

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select Links, Outreach Patrons in the Bibliographic Record workform or right-click a bibliographic record in the Find Tool results list, and select Links, Outreach Patrons to display the list of linked patrons whose reading histories include items linked to the bibliographic record. (Outreach Services must also be licensed for the staff member's logged-in workstation.)

    +
    +

    Outreach Services Manager

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Access

    +
    +

    Open the Outreach Services Manager workform and process outreach services for multiple patrons.

    +
    +

    Override associated patron block

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal for a patron whose associated patrons are blocked. Both this permission and the permission to override the specific block are required to continue a checkout.

    +
    +

    Override claimed item limits

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout, continue a renewal, and add new claims for a patron who has exceeded the current or total claimed items limit.

    +
    +

    Override collection agency block

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal for a patron who is blocked because their account has been referred to a collection agency.

    +
    +

    Override invalid patron barcode message

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue to save a patron record when an invalid barcode message is displayed.

    +
    +

    Override item assigned blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal when the item has library-assigned blocks.

    +
    +

    Override item free-text blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal when the item has a free-text block.

    +
    +

    Override item limit blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal when the item exceeds the items out limits have been reached for: material type, total items out, or reserve items out.

    +
    +

    Override non-circulating blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal when the item is non-circulating; when the material type limit for that patron code is set to 0 in the Patron Material Type Loan Limits policy table; or when the loan period is set to 0 in the Loan Periods policy table.

    +
    +

    Override overdue limit

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal operation for a patron who has exceeded the limit for overdue or long overdue items.

    +
    +

    Override patron assigned blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal for a patron who has a library-assigned block on their patron record.

    +
    +

    Override patron free-text blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal for a patron with a free-text block on the patron record.

    +
    +

    Override renewal limit blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue a checkout or renewal for a patron with free-text block on the patron record

    +
    +

    Override request blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Continue to create a hold request when a patron or item block occurs.

    +
    Override request limitsSystemAllowContinue to create a hold request when a message blocks the request because the patron exceeded the request limit.
    +

    Patron claims: Reset total claim count

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    On the Patron Status workform - Claims view, reset a patron’s total (lifetime) claims to 0.

    +
    +

    Patron record sets

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Delete/Undelete; Export; Modify

    +
    +

    Each organization that owns patron record sets assigns permissions to the staff members who work with patron record sets belonging to that organization.

    +

    The Export permission lets you export patron record sets from Leap to Excel.

    +

    Note: You can only export record sets owned at the System, Library, or Branch level. Record sets owned by individuals cannot be exported.

    +
    +

    Patron registration

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Access; Create; Create express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons. record;Delete; Modify; Modify postal address fields; Override blocks to delete

    +
    +

    Each branch assigns permissions for staff members to access the Patron Registration workform, edit the information, and delete patron registration records for patrons registered at that branch. The Modify postal address fields permission allows staff members to enter a city/state/county/postal code combination that does not already exist in the postal codes table.(The new combination is added to the table when the record s saved.)

    +
    +

    Patron status

    +
    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Access;
    Access notice history;
    Access patron account;

    +

    Access patron account: Transaction summary

    +

    +

     

    +

     

    +

    Bill a charge manually

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

    Create/delete patron blocks;

    +

    Display associations; Display claimed items; Display hold request list; Display items checked-out; Display notes; Display patron blocks; Display reader services;

    +

     

    +

     

    +

    Modify notes; Modify patron account; Modify reader services

    +

    Patron record: Release; Patron record: Secure

    +

     

    +
    +

    Each branch assigns permissions for staff members to access account information for patrons registered at that branch.

    +

    Access permissions allow staff members to access all patron status (account) information or specific patron account views.

    +

    Bill a charge manually allows users with this permission in addition to Access and Modify patron account permissions, to bill a charge manually.

    +

     

    +

    Display permissions indicate the patron status information that is displayed.

    +

     

    +

    Modify permissions allow staff to change information in the patron's account.

    +

    Patron record secure and release permissions allow staff to secure a patron record to prevent check outs and other library activity, and then release the record to resume library activity.

    +
    Picklist applicationSystem, Branch +

    +
    Allow

    +

     

    +

    Modify circulation status

    +
    +

     

    +

     

    +

    Use the Picklist in the Polaris Web App (Leap).

    +

    Modify an item's circulation status from the Picklist in the Polaris Web App (Leap)

    +
    +

    Post patron message

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Use the Add message and Modify message options in the Notes view of the Patron Status workform to add a message that the patron can read and delete from their patron account in the PAC.

    +
    +

    Reading history: Remove non-ORS patron history entries

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select and remove individual items from the Reading History list on the Patron Status workform, Reader Services view. The Patron Status: Modify reader services is also required.

    +
    +

    Reading history: Remove ORS patron history entries

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select and remove individual items from an outreach services patron's reading history. The Patron Status: Modify reader services is also required.

    +
    +

    Remove collection agency block

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Select and remove specific charges for a patron from collection agency reporting.

    +
    +

    Renew items

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Renew items

    +
    +

    Renew items with holds

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Renew items with hold requests

    +
    +

    Renew overdue items

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Renew items that are overdue

    +
    +

    Reset due date

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Reset the due date of checked out items

    +
    Special item check inSystem, Library, BranchAccess; Select missing part; Select unavailableA staff member with these permissions can use the Special Item Check-In dialog box to check in multi-part items that are missing a part or parts.
    +

    Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple patron records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    A staff member with this permission can uncheck the Warn me about breakable links box when deleting multiple patron records so that these warnings do not appear for each record that has breakable links.

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for unbreakable links, and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple patron records

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    A staff member with this permission can uncheck the Warn me about unbreakable links and other stopping conditions box when deleting multiple patron records so that these warnings do not appear for each record that has unbreakable links.

    +
    +

    Use 'own' patron record sets

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Allow

    +
    +

    Create and maintain patron record sets owned by an individual staff member or group.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_and_Patron_Services_Workflow_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_and_Patron_Services_Workflow_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b828712f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPPermsRef/Circulation_and_Patron_Services_Workflow_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Circulation and Patron Services Workflow Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    +

    +

    Circulation and Patron Services Workflow Permissions

    +

    This section lists the combinations of permissions needed to do common circulation and patron services workflows. For a staff member to do a task at a particular workstation, both the staff member and the workstation need the appropriate permissions.

    +

    Note:
    For an alphabetical list of all circulation permissions, see Circulation Permissions List. For more information about setting permissions in Polaris, see Granting Permissions.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    WorkflowRequired PermissionsAdministration Explorer Security Location
    +

    Checking Out and Renewing +

    +
    +

    Check out and renew materials - minimum

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Renew items: Allow

    +

    Item records: Access

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Modify a fine amount for a specific overdue item during renewal

    +
    +

    Modify fine amount: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Renew items from patron account

    +
    +

    Patron status: Modify patron account

    +

    Renew items: Allow

    +

    Renew overdue items: Allow

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Renew items that fill hold requests

    +
    +

    Renew items: Allow

    +

    Renew items with holds: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item to a patron who has a blocked associated patron record

    +
    +

    Override associated patron block: Allow

    +

    The staff member must also have permission to override the specific block on the associated patron record.

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item, renew an item, or enter a new claim for a patron who has exceeded the current claims or total claimed items limit

    +
    +

    Override claimed item limits: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item that has library-assigned blocks

    +
    +

    Override item assigned blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item that has a free-text block

    +
    +

    Override item free-text blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item that exceeds the limit for items out by material type, total items out, material type group, or reserve items out

    +
    +

    Override item limit blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item to a patron who has exceeded the limit for overdue or long overdue items

    +
    +

    Override overdue limit: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item to a patron with library-assigned blocks

    +
    +

    Override patron assigned blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item to a patron with a blocking note

    +
    +

    Override patron blocking note: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item to a patron with a free-text block

    +
    +

    Override patron free-text blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override a circ block to check out an item to a patron who has exceeded the total request limit, a request limit by material type, or the ILL request limit

    +
    +

    Override request limits: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override second-level fine block during checkout

    +
    +

    Fines: override 2nd level fine block: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override renewal blocks

    +
    +

    Renew overdue items: Allow

    +

    Override renewal limit blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override block if patron’s account is in collection

    +
    +

    Override collection agency block: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Create or delete patron blocks during checkout

    +
    +

    Patron status: Create/delete patron blocks

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Express-register a patron during checkout

    +
    +

    Patron registration: Create express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons. record

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override blocks during checkout for items pending in the hold queue

    +
    +

    Override request blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override blocks during checkout for items that do not circulate

    +
    +

    Override non-circulating blocks: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Do express cataloging during checkout for items not found in the database

    +
    +

    Create on-the-fly records: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Set special loan periods during checkout

    +
    +

    Modify due date and time: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Set special loan periods for a renewal

    +
    +

    Modify renewal period: Allow

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Display items checked-out

    +

    Patron status: Modify patron account

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Set a new due date for items already checked out

    +
    +

    Reset due date: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Customize the message text on checkout receipts

    +
    +

    Modify receipt message text: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Receiving Payments +

    +
    +

    Receive payments for fines and fees

    +
    +

    Create a patron account credit: Allow

    +

    Fines: pay fines at circ: Allow

    +

    Fines: waive fines at circ: Allow

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Access patron account

    +

    Patron status: Access patron account: transaction summary

    +

    Patron status: Modify patron account

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Receive credit card payments, issue refunds to credit card accounts

    +
    +

    Fines: Allow credit card payments

    +

    Fines: Allow refunds

    +

    Access Credit Card Payments Manager: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Checking In Items +

    +
    +

    Check in materials at the circulation desk

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Circulation check in workform: Access Normal mode

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Check in materials from the book drop

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Circulation check in workform: Access Bulk mode

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the default number of free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. at normal, bulk, or offline check-in

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Modify free days: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the collection of a checked in item from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify assigned collection

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the barcode of a checked in item from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify barcode

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change a library-assigned or free-text block of a checked in item from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify blocks

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the circulation status of a checked in item (from In to In-repair, Unavailable, or Bindery) from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify circulation status

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the material type of a checked in item from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify material type

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the non-public note of a checked in item from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify notes

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the shelf location of a checked in item from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Modify shelf location

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Change the circulation status of a checked in item (from In to Withdrawn) from the Check In workform

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Manage item dialogs: Withdraw items

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Check in materials that have been used in the library

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Circulation check in workform: Access In-House mode

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Take an item inventory

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Circulation check in workform: Access Inventory mode

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Receiving and Checking In Shelf-Ready Acquisitions Items +

    +
    +

    Check in new shelf-ready materials at the loading dock

    +
    +

    Access Acquisitions: Allow

    +

    Check in shelf-ready materials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +

    +
    +

    Circulating Ephemeral Items (Polaris Quick-Circ) +

    +
    +

    Work with quick-circ item records

    +
    +

    Quick-circ item records: Access

    +

    Quick-circ item records: Create

    +

    Quick-circ item records: Delete

    +

    Quick-circ item records: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +

    Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Working with Patron Records +

    +
    +

    Answer questions from patrons about their accounts; work with deposits

    +
    +

    Access patron services: Allow

    +

    Create, return or forfeit a patron account deposit

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Access notice history

    +

    Patron status: Access patron account

    +

    Patron status: Display associations

    +

    Patron status: Display claimed items

    +

    Patron status: Display hold request list

    +

    Patron status: Display items checked-out

    +

    Patron status: Display notes

    +

    Patron status: Display patron blocks

    +

    Patron status: Display reader services (reading histories and Outreach Services)

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    Add a charge or select an existing charge and bill the patron +

    +

    Access patron services: Allow

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Access notice history

    +

    Patron status: Access patron account

    +

    Bill a charge manually

    +
    +

    Branch

    +

    Staff member

    +

    Workstation

    +
    +

    Register patrons

    +
    +

    Access patron services: Allow

    +

    Create patron associations: Allow

    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Patron registration: Create

    +

    Override invalid patron barcode message: Allow

    +

    Patron registration: Create express registration record

    +

    Patron registration: Modify

    +

    Patron registration: Modify postal address fields

    +

    Note:
    With this permission, you can enter a postal code/city/state/country combination in the patron record that does not already exist in the system postal code table. When the record is saved, the new combination is added to the system postal code table. Without this permission, you can edit only the street address or select an existing combination.

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Maintain patron registration records

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Access patron record bulk change: Allow

    +

    Access patron services: Allow

    +

    Create patron associations: Allow

    +

    Delete patron associations: Allow

    +

    Merge patrons: Allow

    +

    Patron record sets: Access

    +

    Patron record sets: Create

    +

    Patron record sets: Delete/Undelete

    +

    Patron record sets: Export

    +

    Patron record sets: Modify

    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Patron registration: Delete

    +

    Patron registration: Modify (also needed to bulk-change patron records for an organization)

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Display associations

    +

    Patron status: Display reader services (reading histories and Outreach Services)

    +

    Patron status: Modify notes

    +

    Patron status: Modify patron account

    +

    Reading history: Remove non-ORS patron history entries: Allow (remove individual items from reading history) This permission is also required: Patron Status: Modify reader services.

    +

    Reading history: Remove ORS patron history entries: Allow (remove individual items from reading history) This permission is also required: Patron Status: Modify reader services.

    +

    Use 'own' patron record sets: Allow

    +

    Post patron message

    +

    Delete patron message

    +

    Modify photo IDs: Allow (licensed feature)

    +

    Delete photo IDs: Allow (licensed feature)

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Suppress warning messages when deleting multiple patron records

    +
    +

    Suppress warnings for unbreakable links, and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple patron records: Allow

    +

    Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple patron records: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Override the blocks that prevent deleting patron registration records

    +
    +

    Patron registration: Override blocks to delete

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Alter replacement and processing fees when declaring an item lost

    +
    +

    Modify lost item amount: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Working with Hold and ILL Requests +

    +
    +

    Generate hold and interlibrary loan requests for a patron

    +
    +

    Hold requests: Create

    +

    ILL requests: Convert holds

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Bibliographic Records: Access

    +

    Item Records: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Cancel a hold or interlibrary loan request from the Patron Status workform

    +
    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Display hold request list

    +

    Patron status: Modify patron account

    +

    Bibliographic Records - Access

    +

    Item Records - Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Manage hold requests

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Access hold request manager: Allow

    +

    Display hold-request queues: Allow

    +

    Modify hold queues: Allow

    +

    Hold requests: Modify PAC display note

    +

    Hold requests: Access

    +

    Hold requests: Delete

    +

    Hold requests: Deny item request

    +

    Hold requests: Modify

    +

    ILL requests: Convert holds

    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Display hold request list

    +

    Bibliographic Records: Access

    +

    Item Records: Access

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Managing interlibrary loan requests

    +
    +

    Access circulation control: Allow

    +

    Access ILL request manager: Allow

    +

    ILL requests: Access

    +

    ILL requests: Create

    +

    ILL requests: Delete

    +

    ILL requests: Modify

    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Display hold request list

    +

    Bibliographic Records: Access

    +

    Item Records : Access

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Working with Course Reserves +

    +
    +

    Designate instructors for course reserve records

    +
    +

    Patron registration: Access

    +

    Patron registration: Create

    +

    Patron registration: Delete

    +

    Patron registration: Modify

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Create and manage course reserve records

    +
    +

    Auto delete processing of reserve item records: Allow
    (for deleting temporary item and bibliographic records when a “disposable” or instructor-owned item is taken off reserve)

    +

    Course reserve records: Access

    +

    Course reserve records: Create

    +

    Course reserve records: Delete

    +

    Course reserve records: Modify

    +

    Course reserve templates: Access

    +

    Course reserve templates: Create

    +

    Course reserve templates: Delete

    +

    Course reserve templates: Modify

    +

    Item records: Access

    +

    Item records: Create

    +

    Item records: Delete

    +

    Item records: Modify reserves view

    +

    Item templates: Access

    +

    Item templates: Create

    +

    Item templates: Delete

    +

    Reserve item templates: Access

    +

    Reserve item templates: Create

    +

    Reserve item templates: Delete

    +

    Reserve item templates: Modify

    +

    Bibliographic records: Create (for on-the-fly items)

    +
    +

    System- Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +

    System, Library, Branch - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Working with Outreach Services +

    +
    +

    View outreach services for individual patrons

    +
    +

    Patron status: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Patron status: Display reader services

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Modify outreach services settings for individual patrons

    +
    +

    Patron status: Modify reader services

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Manage outreach services for multiple patrons

    +
    +

    Outreach Services Manager: Access

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    Modify reader ratings for ORS patrons

    +
    +

    Modify ORS patron ratings: Allow

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Circulation

    +
    +

    From bib record, display list of ORS patrons with linked items in their reading histories

    +
    +

    ORS: Link from bibliographic record: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +

    Working with Patron Accounts in Collections +

    +
    +

    Remove a specific amount on a patron’s account from collection agency reporting

    +
    +

    Patron status: Access

    +

    Patron status: Access patron account

    +

    Patron status: Modify patron account

    +

    Remove collection agency block: Allow

    +
    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    Branch - Circulation

    +

    System - Circulation

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPProfRef/Patron_Services_Profiles_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPProfRef/Patron_Services_Profiles_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..11839247 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPProfRef/Patron_Services_Profiles_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,299 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Services Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available on the Profiles > Patron Services tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Audio feedback for barcode scan

    +
    +

    Workstation

    +
    +

    Specifies if a workstation produces a sound to signal a successful barcode scan. Most barcode readers are programmed to beep for a correct scan. If your reader does not produce a sound, you can enable a sound with this setting. The sound comes from the default computer speaker or external speakers, depending on the setting of the Circulation Option dialog box (Circulation, Options on Polaris Shortcut Bar). If you select Use Windows Sounds , the sound is specified by the Default Sound setting on the Sounds dialog box (displayed from the Windows Control Panel). See Set up audio circulation signals.

    +
    +

    No +

    +

    If you set this profile to Yes, you must restart the Polaris staff client on the workstation before it takes effect.

    +
    +

    BNC FTP: Set mode to Active

    +
    SystemDetermines whether you use Active or Passive FTP to send files to BookNet Canada (BNC). For details, see BNC Reporting Now Includes New Data.Yes +
    +

    Contribute to BNC

    +
    SystemDetermines whether your library system’s branch and circulation statistics are compiled and sent through FTP to BNC. For details, see BNC Reporting Now Includes New Data.No +
    +

    Contribute to LJ Books Most Borrowed

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Determines whether your library system’s circulation and hold request statistics are compiled for inclusion in Library Journal’s Books Most Borrowed feature. For details, see Sending Circulation Statistics to Library Journal.

    +
    +

    Yes - Via Web Service

    +
    +

    Default directory

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Displays the Default Directory Setup dialog box, which specifies the folder used as the default path for patron services reports. The folder can be a shared folder on the network or a folder on the staff computer. Each workstation may have a different default directory for patron services functions.

    +
    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\

    +
    +

    Display photo ID

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch, Workstation

    +
    +

    Determines whether the Patron Registration workform - Photo ID view is available and whether the patron’s ID photo is displayed in the Check Out workform. This feature is available by separate license. See Setting Up Patron Photos.

    +

    Applies to Leap. If this profile is set to Yes, and the patron's record includes a photograph, it appears in the Patron Registration workform and workform tracker in Leap. If the profile is set to No, a generic patron icon appears.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    Due Date modification: Reason requiredSystem, Library, Branch, StaffSpecifies whether a reason is required when a staff member resets an item's due date in Polaris Leap. If set to Yes, the staff member must select a reason from a drop-down list when resetting the due date in Leap. The Reasons drop-down list is populated with the entries in the User Defined Due Date Modification Reasons policy table. +

    No +

    +
    FTP password for the BNC accountSystemDefines the password to sign in to BNC. 
    FTP URI for BNCSystemDefines the URI of the FTP server responsible for sending data files to BNC. 
    FTP user name for the BNC accountSystemDefines the username to sign in to BNC. 
    +

    Override patron services blocks

    +
    +

    Staff

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the staff member can override permission blocks in patron services and circulation.

    +
    +

    No - The staff member is not allowed to override permission blocks on restricted patron services and circulation functions.

    +
    +

    Patron can enable/disable reading history

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies if the patron can stop or start a reading history from the PAC patron account.

    +

    Requirements: If you will allow patrons to start and stop reading histories, you must set up reading history parameters. Also, Outreach Services patrons cannot stop their reading histories. See Setting Reading History Options.

    +
    +

    No - Patrons cannot enable or disable their reading histories.

    +

    If set to Yes, the option is available in the Contact Information and Preferences section of the PAC patron account.

    +
    +

    Patron custom data: Definition

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Defines patron custom data fields at the library system level. See the Patron Services Administration PDF Guide, Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields. See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

    +
    +
    +

    Patron custom data: Filter

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    Once the patron custom data fields are defined at the system level, they can be filtered at the branch or library level using the Patron custom data: Filter profile.

    See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

    +
    +

    Patron initiated circulation: Blocking conditions

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the conditions that block renewals from PAC, by telephone, and from SIP self-check units, and eContent circulation from PAC. You can set blocks related to patron records and blocks related to item records. Patrons are blocked according to the settings for the patron’s registered branch. Items are blocked according to the settings for the item’s assigned branch. See Set blocks on patron-initiated circulation and ebook circulation.

    +
    +
    +

    Patron initiated circulation: Transacting branch

    +
    + +

    Specifies the loaning branch for eContent circulations from the PAC.

    +

    + See Set the loaning branch for eContent circulations. +

    +
    +
    +

    Patron registration user defined fields

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Defines the labels for free-text and drop-menu user-defined fields (UDFs) in patron records, and the possible options from drop-menu UDFs. (The labels are set up at implementation.) Individual branches can specify which drop-menu UDF options to display, determine the order of display, and designate a default See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.
    For information about setting default values for UDFs in the staff client, see Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults and Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements. For information about setting default values for UDFs for PAC online registration, Set up online patron self-registration.

    +
    +
    Retain deleted record sets SystemSpecifies whether patron record sets are retained in the database when they are marked for deletion. +

    The default is No; to enable, select Yes.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPRequestParams/Request_Parameters_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPRequestParams/Request_Parameters_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0ca529e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPRequestParams/Request_Parameters_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + Request Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Request Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available on the Parameters, Request tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    +

    Note: +
    If your library has a license for INN-Reach integration with Polaris, three additional parameters are available for managing INN-Reach. See Set INN-Reach Request Parameters in Polaris Administration.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Parameter

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Borrow by mail

    +
    +

    Designate processing centers at the System level. Other settings are available at the System, Library, and Branch levels.

    +
    +

    These settings control Polaris Borrow by Mail, a licensed feature. See Define Borrow by Mail parameters.

    +
    +

    Hold options

    +
    +

    Some options can be set at the System level only.

    +
    +

    These settings control holds processing in Polaris. See Holds Processing Overview.

    +
    +

    ILL options

    +
    +

    You can set most ILL options at the System, Library, or Branch level.

    +

    Applies to Leap.

    +

    If either or both of the Enable check boxes are checked (PAC requests or Staff requests), the ILL option appears in the More menu in Leap. If both Enable check boxes are not checked, the ILL option does not appear in the menu.

    +
    +

    These settings control ILL processing in Polaris. See Setting Up ILL Requests.

    +
    +

    ILL: Computer designated for sending OCLC/ILL direct requests

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    The Polaris Application Server handles ILL direct requests to OCLC. Your existing application server is the default entry. If your application server name changes, enter the new Polaris Application Server name in this parameter. See Setting Up ILL Requests.

    +
    +

    NCIP: Use unlocked hold requests

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    In NCIP processing, the hold request is created in response to the ItemRequested message used by ILL. This is early in the ILL process, and the hold request cannot be canceled or modified in Polaris. Some library systems may prefer to prevent the immediate creation of the hold request. See Prevent creation of holds in response to ILL message

    +
    Web App: Use patron's preferred branch for multiple holds from record setSystem, Library, and BranchThis setting determines if the Patron's Preferred Location option appears in the Pickup list when you request a single title for multiple patrons in Leap. See "Request the Same Title for Multiple Patrons" in the Leap help.
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33524777 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Services Administration Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services Administration Reference

    +

    The following tables include the permissions required to do specific Patron Services tasks, reference lists for Circulation permissions, and Patron Services parameters and profiles.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48cc2534 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPabout/Patron_Services_Administration_Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + Patron Services Administration Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services Administration Overview

    +

    Polaris Administration settings control how Polaris data is categorized, used, and stored, and what functions are available to staff and patrons. You can make most administration settings by two methods: through the Administration Explorer, and through the appropriate workform for a specific record. Patron services administration includes specific settings for patron services and circulation functions. Many Patron Services Administration settings apply to both the Polaris staff client and Polaris Leap.

    +

    Note: +
    For information on the Patron Services Administration settings that affect Leap, see Polaris Leap Administration.

    +

    For more information on the features and functions for managing Polaris Patron Services, see the following topics:

    +

    Setting Circulation Permissions +

    +

    Granting permissions for staff based on their library tasks.

    +

    Setting Patron Services Parameters and Profiles +

    +

    Overview of patron services parameters and profiles and how to set them.

    +

    Defining Patron Account Features 

    +

    Setting up patron codes, user-defined fields, and patron custom data fields for patron records; NCIP mapping; setting defaults for patron registration and express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons.; charging for patron registration; setting up patron messages; setting up patron photo identification and importing photos; options for duplicate detection, reading histories, deleting patron records; setting patron accounting functions; purging patron identification information from transaction logs.

    +

    Setting Up E-Commerce - Overview and Requirements +

    +

    Setting up credit card processing.

    +

    Setting Up Circulation Workforms 

    +

    Specifying the data fields for the check-out and check-in workforms.

    +

    Setting Up Circulation Receipts +

    +

    Setting up printed check-out and check-in receipts, Items Out receipts, fine receipts, hold slips/hold call slips, and in-transit slips; setting receipt printer control codes; Epson® ReStick™ printers; setting up eReceipts (e-mail and text message receipts).

    +

    Item Record Circulation Settings +

    +

    Defining the item record settings (material types and circulation statuses) that affect circulation; mapping item material types to NCIP medium types; setting a “shelving” status for display purposes; displaying an item’s last borrower.

    +

    Circulation Permissions Reference +

    +

    Specifying which library’s settings should control due date calculation, loan and request limits, and fine calculation.

    +

    Defining Loan Periods +

    +

    Settings for calculating due dates, loan period codes, loan periods, end-of-term due dates.

    +

    Defining Fines and Fees +

    +

    Fines and fees, including fine codes, fine amounts, fee descriptions, and replacement fees; setting default account actions for lost-and-recovered items; charging for checkout and renewal.

    +

    Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC +

    +

    Setting up automated collection agency reporting; processing collection agency reports.

    +

    Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing +

    +

    Setting up hold requests routing; setting up holds and interlibrary loan processing; restricting holds on specific items.

    +

    Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration +

    +

    Overview and steps for implementing INN-Reach direct consortial borrowing with Polaris.

    +

    Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks +

    +

    Item and patron blocks; loan and request limit blocks; blocking for estimated accrued fines; material type group limits; blocks on patron-initiated renewals and ebook circulation; associated patron blocking.

    +

    Setting Up Floating Collections +

    +

    Floating collections overview; designating floating collections; setting home and receiving branch policies; setting branch parameters; setup examples; reports.

    +

    Managing Offline Circulation 

    +

    Setting up Polaris to work offline; using Polaris offline; uploading offline transactions (Bookmobile).

    +

    Setting Statistical Codes for Reports 

    +

    Defining patron and item statistical codes for reporting purposes.

    +

    Managing Notification +

    +

    Setting up overdue, billing, hold request, fine, combined, and routing notices (print, e-mail, text message, and phone notification); reminders and special announcements; generating print, e-mail, and text message notices.

    +

    Setting Up SIP Self-Check Circulation +

    +

    Settings for SIP self-check systems.

    +

    Setting Up Course Reserves +

    +

    Overview and set-up information for media dispenser circulation in the staff client and Polaris ExpressCheck.

    +

    Setting Up Course Reserves +

    +

    Enabling and configuring Borrow by Mail request processing.

    +

    Setting Up Outreach Services +

    +

    Configuring Outreach Services: setting up delivery modes and routes; disability and equipment options; selection list filters; list view column heads; reader ratings scale and packing list.

    +

    Setting Up Course Reserves +

    +

    Setting up course reserve functions to manage reserving and circulating items for academic courses.

    +

    Circulation Permissions List +

    +

    Reference list of circulation permissions as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer, Security view.

    +

    Set SIP self-check parameters +

    +

    Reference list of Patron Services parameters as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer - Parameters, Patron Services tabbed page.

    +

    Patron Services Profiles Reference 

    +

    Patron Services profiles available at organization levels and reference list of Patron Services profiles as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer - Profiles, Patron Services tabbed page.

    +

    Set SIP self-check parameters +

    +

    Reference list of Notification parameters as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer - Parameters, Notification tabbed page.

    +

    Request Parameters Reference 

    +

    Reference list of Request parameters as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer - Parameters, Request tabbed page.

    +

    Self-Check Parameters Reference 

    +

    Reference list of SelfCheck Unit parameters as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer - Parameters, SelfCheck Unit tabbed page.

    +

    Credit Card Payment Parameters Reference 

    +

    Reference list of Credit Card Payment parameters as they appear in the Polaris Administration Explorer - Parameters, Credit Card Payment tabbed page.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_an_item_block_description.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_an_item_block_description.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b2f18fb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_an_item_block_description.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add an item block description + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add an item block description

    +

    To add an item block description in the Item Block Descriptions database table:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the organization, and select Item Block Descriptions. The Item Block Descriptions table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Item Block Descriptions dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Select the branch that needs the item block description in the Organization list.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Item Block Descriptions table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the text describing the item block in the Description box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the assigned branch is changed for an item with a library-defined block, the system checks whether there is matching block description text for the former and newly assigned branch. If so, the block is retained. If there is no match, the block is set to None.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Item Block Descriptions dialog box closes and the new entry is displayed in the policy table. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Order the block display - Select table entries and click btnUpArrow.gif or btnDownArrow.gif. The order of blocks in the table determines their display order when a block is added to an item record and when blocks are displayed at check-out.
    • +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry, click ModIcon.gif, and change the description. Any changes are immediately applied to every item record that used the original block. If you need to assign the entry to another organization, delete the incorrect entry and add a new item block description for the desired organization.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif. However, you cannot delete a block description if the block is currently assigned to an item.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_select_and_order_patron_block_entries.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_select_and_order_patron_block_entries.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e8c7e625 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Add_select_and_order_patron_block_entries.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add, select, and order patron block descriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add, select, and order patron block descriptions

    +

    To add a patron block to the Patron Block Descriptions table, then select blocks for branch use, determine their display order, and designate whether they trigger display text in the PAC patron account:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Patron Block Descriptions.
    2. +
    +

    If you open the table at the system or library level, you can add new blocks. If you open the table at the branch level, the table includes controls for selecting and ordering blocks, and specifying which ones should display a message in the PAC patron account.

    +
      +
    1. (System or library level only) To add a new block, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00502.gif to display the Insert Patron Block Descriptions dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Type text describing the patron block in the Description box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The description can be up to 80 characters long. For best display results, limit your description to fewer than 40 characters.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Insert Patron Block Descriptions dialog box closes, and the new patron block entry is displayed in the table. The new block is displayed in the table for all organizations. Each branch can decide whether to use the block (set to Yes by default), and determine the order of blocks in lists in staff client dialog boxes and user controls.

    +
      +
    1. (Branch level only) To select or de-select blocks for use by the branch, or to change their Display in PAC status, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click the block that needs the change, or select the block and click ModIcon00503.gif. The Modify Patron Block Descriptions dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + dPatrnBlokModify.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes or No in the Selected box to indicate whether the new block should be selected for use at the branch.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes or No in the Display in PAC box to change that status.
    4. +
    +

    The Selected box must be set to Yes if you want to set Display in PAC to Yes. That is, a block must be set to display for the patron’s registered branch in the staff client if you also want to display the library-block text in the PAC patron account summary.

    +

    Note:
    You can set the display text with the PAC profile Patron library assigned and free text block default text (maximum 255 characters). The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The default setting is Library assigned block. The same text is displayed for any library-assigned block you set to display in PAC, and when the patron record has a free text block.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also change the description at the system, library, or branch level. Limit your changes to correcting spelling or using a different choice of words for the same type of patron block.

    +

    Important:
    If you set a block for address check and/or expiration dates in the past, when the address check term or expiration term is updated in a patron record, the system process that removes the block looks for the exact block text specified in thePatron Block Descriptions table. If the Address Check or Expiration block text is missing or has changed since the block was placed on the patron record, the patron record will still be blocked when one of these dates is in the past, but the block will never be removed by real-time or overnight processing and will need to be manually removed.

    +
      +
    1. (Branch level only) To order the block display, select any block in the table with a status of Yes and click btnUpArrow00504.gif or btnDownArrow00505.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The order of blocks in the table determines their display order in the New Block dialog box when a block is added to a patron record, when blocks are displayed at check out, and when multiple blocks are listed in the Delinquent Patrons Report.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete00506.gif. You cannot delete a block description if the block is currently assigned to a patron.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Calculating_and_Blocking_for_Estimated_Accrued_Fines.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Calculating_and_Blocking_for_Estimated_Accrued_Fines.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ed7a216 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Calculating_and_Blocking_for_Estimated_Accrued_Fines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating, Blocking for, and Displaying Estimated Accrued Fines + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Calculating, Blocking for, and Displaying Estimated Accrued Fines

    +

    Polaris provides the ability to display an estimated fine amount (accrued fines) for overdue items a patron has currently checked out. You can opt to include claimed and/or lost items in the estimate calculation (system level only). The estimated fine amount information is available in the staff client, the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC patron account, and the Polaris ExpressCheck patron account.

    +

    In addition, you can choose to block the patron for a threshold amount that is the total of actual fines and accrued fines, not just fines already on the patron account, using the normal fines block functionality (see Fine Limits). If you choose to include accrued fines in blocking calculations, the accrued fines are added to any existing fines in real time and patrons are blocked as appropriate, using the normal fines block. The option to include accrued fines in blocking calculations is available at the system level only. This function applies to all check-out and renewals in Polaris, including staff client check-out and renewal, ExpressCheck check-out and renewal, renewal from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, telephony renewal, and SIP check-out and renewal.

    +
      +
    • Governing library - The calculation of the accrued amount is based on the setting of the governing library for fine calculation, set in the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium circulation.  (If that option is set to Use transacting branch, the calculation is based on the lending branch’s settings.)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    In some lost item scenarios it is possible to have a lost item where the replacement and overdue charges have not been charged. If the Transacting branch (the branch where the item is checked in) has been selected as the governing library for lost item recovery, that branch’s charges would apply when and where the item is finally recovered, which cannot be known in advance. In this case the estimated amount will be based on the loaning branch’s settings.

    +
      +
    • Hourly loans - Accrued fines on hourly loans are calculated in real time and added to any actual fines at the time the block is calculated.
    • +
    • Maximum fine limit - When the total amount is calculated and displayed, the displayed amount will not exceed the maximum fine limit per material type as defined in the Fines policy table, even if the calculated amount is greater. In other words, the patron will not be charged for an amount greater than the maximum fine limit.
    • +
    • Lost items with overdues - You can opt to include items in the estimated fine calculation that are declared or billed lost but the overdue fine has not been charged. See Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking.
    • +
    • Claimed items - You can also opt to include claimed items in the estimated fine calculation. See Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking.
    • +
    • Claimed and lost items in PAC patron account display - The PAC patron account displays claimed and lost items only if the PowerPAC profile (and Mobile PAC profile, if applicable) Navigation: Claimed and Lost is set to Yes for the patron's registered branch. If it is set to No, the patron may be blocked for accrued fines that are not obvious in the patron account display. Many libraries have a lost item limit block and/or a claimed item limit block, and these may block the account before or in addition to the accrued fines block.
    • +
    • Notification and reporting - The accrued amounts are not included on overdue notices, in the calculation for billing, or in calculations for collection agency reporting.
    • +
    +

    In summary, accrued fines are calculated for overdue items if the Patron Code/Fine Code Fine Amount definition is greater than $0.00 and any one of the following conditions is true:

    +
      +
    • The circulation status is Out and the item is overdue, but the overdue fine is not charged.
    • +
    • You have opted to included claimed items in the calculation, the item circulation status is Claimed, and the system-level Patron Services parameter Overdues: Charge fines for claimed items is set to Yes. The table summarizes the effects of claimed items settings:
    • +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Include claimed items in accrued fine calculationOverdues: Charge fines for claimed itemsInclude in estimated amount calculation and block?
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +
      +
    • You have opted to include lost items in the calculation, the item circulation status is Lost, and the overdue fine has not been charged. The table summarizes the effects of lost items settings:
    • +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Include lost items in accrued fine calculationLost items charge options: Charge overdueInclude in estimated amount calculation and block?
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    For set-up instructions, see Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking.

    +

    Displaying Estimated Fines

    +

    Estimated fines are available for display in both the staff client and PAC. (Including accrued fines in blocking calculations is optional and set at the system level. See Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking.)

    +

    Staff Client Display

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, staff can estimate accrued fines on items that are currently overdue, calculating the fines if the items were returned today or on a date selected from a calendar. Estimate fines on currently checked out items If you choose to include lost and/or claimed items in the accrued fine calculation, similar functionality is available from the Patron Status workform - Claims view. Estimate fines on currently checked out items

    +

    PAC Patron Account Display

    +

    In PAC, the patron can estimate accrued fines from the Items Out page, the Fines & Fees page, and the Claimed & Lost page of the patron account. In PowerPAC, the option to estimate overdue fines appears below the list if there are overdue items. The example shows the Items Out page.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the patron clicks Estimate Overdue Fines, a light box displays the title, author, item status, due date, and accrued fine for each overdue item, as well as the total due as of the current date. If you have opted to include claimed and/or lost items in the estimate, these are included in the display and calculation.

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron can click the date field to select a different estimation date from a calendar.

    +

    + +

    +

    Mobile PAC offers similar features.

    +

    + MPACEstFines.gif 

    +

    If you choose to include accrued fines in the patron blocking calculation, the patron fine block message appears when appropriate in PAC and the patron cannot renew items.

    +

    Note:
    If the estimated amount includes lost item overdues or claimed items, the patron account is blocked. However, claimed and lost items are only displayed in the PAC patron account if the PowerPAC profile (and Mobile PAC profile, if applicable) Navigation: Claimed and Lost is set to Yes for the patron's registered branch.

    +

    ExpressCheck Patron Account Display

    +

    ExpressCheck users can estimate fines using a dashboard control in the patron account. The patron sets the date and clicks Calculate.

    +

    + AccruedFinesXpress1.gif 

    +

    The accrued fines are displayed according to the selected date.

    +

    + AccruedFinesXpress2.gif 

    +

    Polaris Phone Attendant (Inbound Telephony)

    +

    You enable a selection to hear estimated fines at the top-level menu. (If the patron does not have any overdue or claimed items, the option is not available.) When the patron selects this option, the message includes the author, title, due date, and estimated amount for each item, and the total due. To enable this option, select (check) Estimate Fines in the Phone Attendant configuration utility. Set Phone Attendant options for specific lines.

    +

    + PhoneConfigEstFines2.gif 

    +

    If the patron has lost or claimed items and overdue items, an additional message states Additional charges are due for lost or claimed items, please contact the library for more information. If the patron has only lost or claimed items but no overdue items, only the Additional charges message is played.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Circ_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Circ_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87a4a683 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Circ_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks

    +

    Blocks interrupt circulation transactions, such as check outs, renewals, and hold requests. A threshold value determines the limit that causes a block to interrupt the transactions. Most blocks can be overridden at the discretion of the library staff member.

    +

    You can set up circulation blocks related to item records (for example, the item does not circulate) and patron records (for example, the patron owes money or has borrowed too many items). You can also set loan and request limits that trigger blocks based on patron codes and material types. Separate settings control blocks on patron-initiated renewals from the PAC or inbound telephony service. Polaris also provides the ability to block a patron from checking out or renewing materials when an associated patron record is blocked; you define default settings for this feature in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    If your system includes self-check units, you set up blocks specifically for circulation transactions at the self-check units. For more information about SIP2 units, see Setting Up SIP Self-Check Circulation. For Polaris ExpressCheck, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Item_Blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Item_Blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d9090e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Item_Blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Item Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Item Blocks

    +

    An item block stops circulation based on a setting in the item record. The Library assigned box on the Notes and Notices view of the Item Record workform lists the standard, library-assigned block descriptions (for example, Be sure all parts are present). The blocks available in the list and the order in which they appear depend on the item block description settings for the library named in the Assigned box on the Item Record workform. The settings of the item’s assigned branch also control the blocks available for item bulk change.

    +

    Note:
    When you are bulk-changing library-assigned blocks in an item record set, you must first select a branch because library-assigned block choices depend on the item’s assigned branch.

    +

    You define the standard item blocks in the Item Block Descriptions database table. You can standardize item block descriptions among all organizations, or you can have different descriptions for each organization. You can define them at the system, library, and branch levels, but they are assigned to a specific branch when you define them, and are not inherited from a parent organization. This table can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. When you open the table at the system level, you can view, add, change, and delete item block descriptions for all branches. At the library level, you can view, add, change, and delete item block descriptions for the branches associated with the library. At the branch level, you can view, add, change, or delete item descriptions for the branch, even if the entry was added at a higher level.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify item block descriptions table: Allow.

    +

    See: Add an item block description

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Loan_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Loan_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a07c77d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Loan_and_Request_Limit_Blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks

    +

    Loan and request limit blocks interrupt circulation transactions based on the thresholds you set for patron overdues and fines, item limits, and request limits. Each branch may set different limits, and the limits can be different for each patron code. In the staff client, a check-out clerk with appropriate permission may override a loan or request limit block (except the second-level fine block). In the PAC, a message is displayed and the renewal is stopped. You can specify whether request limits block PAC requests. See: List and modify loan and request limit entries

    +

    Important:
    The System-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation determines which branch’s settings are used for loan and request limit blocks. For request limits, the “transacting branch” is the pick-up branch for the request, not the staff member’s logged-in branch. See Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Patron Overdue Limits

    +

    A patron has too many overdue items, based on the number of items and the patron code. These blocks occur when the patron attempts to check out or renew an item.

    +

    Fine Limits

    +

    Blocks for unpaid fines are based on the total amount the patron owes and the patron code. These blocks occur when the patron attempts to check out or renew an item. You can define two fine limit levels. The first (minor) fine limit block allows libraries to remind patrons that fines are owed, but does not disrupt a busy circulation desk for minor fines. The second (major) fine a separate permission is required to continue the transaction. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.

    +

    Example:
    The first fine limit may be set to $.10 (10 cents) the second to $10.00. If the patron owes over $.10 but is not over $10.00, a courtesy block, not requiring permission to continue, will display. If the patron owes over $10.00 a different block message appears. Staff will require a separate permission to continue.

    +

    Note that all threshold blocking is based on values up to and including the value set in the System Administration control. Setting a fine limit of $10.00 or an item limit of 15 means that the patron can have up to $10.00 in fines or up to 15 items, but will be blocked at $10.01 or 16 items.

    +

    You can manipulate the settings for special conditions:

    +
      +
    • Block for any fines - Set the first fine limit to 0.00 to block the transaction if the patron has any unpaid fines. The permissioned staff member can bypass the block at her discretion. To require a supervisor override for any unpaid fines, set the first fine limit to 999999.99 and the second limit to 0.00.
    • +
    • Do not block for fines - Setting the first or second level fine limit to 999999.99 effectively suppresses the block at that level.
    • +
    • Fine notices - If your library uses fine notices, set the second level fine amount to a value equal to or less than the setting in the Minimum balance box for fine notices (Notification options). This combination of settings blocks the patron at circulation before a fine notice is sent, which helps prevent additional fines after notification. For more information about fine notices, see Fine Notices.
    • +
    +

    You can choose to include estimated accrued fines in the blocking calculation. See Calculating and Blocking for Estimated Accrued Fines.

    +

    Item (Loan) Limits

    +

    A patron has too many total items, too many items of a specific material type, or too many course reserve items borrowed at the same time. For example, if the items out limit is set to 10, the block occurs if the patron attempts to Borrow an eleventh item without returning any of the other ten items. These blocks occur as each item is scanned at check-out, but not at renewal. To set these limits, see List and modify loan and request limit entries. You can also set limits on groups of material types for specific patron codes. See Defining Material Type Group Limits.

    +

    Total Requests and Request By Material Type Limits

    +

    These blocks occur in the PAC and at SIP self-check stations when a patron has too many requests (status of Active or Pending, and optionally Held/Shipped or Inactive) or too many requests for a specific material type at the same time. The request limit blocks occur in the staff client when you have selected the holds option Block in staff client (see Set Holds options: Alerts and blocks). If you have selected this option, a block message is displayed in the staff client, and staff members have the option of overriding the block. The request is then placed as Active. If the Block in staff client option is not selected, no block message is displayed and the request is placed as Active (or whatever status is appropriate), regardless of any request limits you set. Patrons are automatically blocked in the PAC and at the SIP self-check station when they try to place a request that is one over the specified limit.

    +

    In the case of material type limits, for item-level requests, the limit for the item’s material type is checked directly. Items with valid barcodes and items without barcodes but with a status of On Order or In Process are included in the limit check. For bibliographic-level requests, the limit for each attached item’s material type is checked, and the Holds Options setting If all material limits are exceeded set to Not Supplied determines how the request is handled in the staff client when a patron reaches the hold limit by material type. If this option is checked, and all the items attached to the bibliographic record have the same material type, a block message is displayed in the staff client, and staff members have the option of overriding the block. If the block is overridden, the request is placed with a status of Not Supplied. The Not Supplied reason is All items denied by system. If some items have the limited material type and some do not, a message is displayed and those of the limited material type are automatically denied by the system. If this option is not checked, and all the items attached to the bibliographic record have the same material type, a block message is displayed in the staff client, and staff members have the option of overriding the block. If the block is overridden, the request is placed with a status of Active. If some items have the limited material type and some do not, a message is displayed and those of the limited material type are automatically denied by the system. See Set Holds options: Alerts and blocks.

    +

    For bibliographic-level requests where no items are attached to the bibliographic record, the limit is not checked. You can allow or deny holds on these items with a separate Holds Options setting. See Set Holds options: Alerts and blocks.

    +

    Note:
    The system includes a patron’s inactive requests when calculating whether the patron will exceed the total request limit or request by material type limit. This prevents patrons who are near the limit from suspending a number of requests in order to place more. The limit is also checked when a cancelled hold is reactivated.

    +

    The Hold request workform - Notes view displays a blue icon DenyHoldIconSys.gif for the item if the system denied the request on that item, or a red icon DenyHoldIcon.gif if a staff member denied the request.

    +

    Governing Library for Loan and Request Limits

    +

    The governing library for patron blocks determines which branch’s request limit settings are used (see Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks).

    +

    Example:
    Governing library = Transacting branch
    The request is placed from branch A, the patron is from branch B and the pick-up branch is branch C. Branch C’s limit settings apply because it is the transacting branch.
    Governing library = Patron branch
    The request is placed from branch A, the patron is from branch B and the pick-up branch is branch C. Branch B’s limit settings apply because it is the patron’s branch.

    +

    Since the same governing library setting applies to both the loan and request limits, you may want to coordinate the settings for total item limits and total request limits. Some libraries set these limits to an equal value, reasoning that a patron should not be able to request an item if the patron cannot check it out. Alternatively, you may want to set the hold request limit without regard to the item limit, since the number of items checked out may change by the time a request is filled.

    +

    Setting Up Loan and Request Limit Blocks

    +

    The loan and request limit blocks are set with the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks policy table. They can be defined from the system, library, and branch levels, but are always assigned to a specific branch. They are not inherited from a parent organization. The table is displayed with the Administration Explorer only. When you open this table at the system level, you can view and change loan and request limits for all branches in Polaris. At the library level, you can view and change loan and request limits for the branches associated with the library. At the branch level, you can view and change the limits for the selected branch. Each organization can change limit blocks assigned specifically to the organization, even if the entry was added at a higher level. New patron and new material type entries are added automatically to the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks policy table:

    +
      +
    • When a new patron code is added to Polaris, a patron loan limit entry is added automatically for every branch.
    • +
    • When a new material type is added to Polaris, a material loan limit entry is added automatically to the table for every patron loan limit entry for each branch.
    • +
    • When a new branch is added to Polaris, all patron and material type entries are added automatically to the table for every patron code and material type.
    • +
    +

    The new entries use default values as the thresholds. You can change the values after the entries are added to the table. You cannot add entries to or delete entries from the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks table.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify patron/material type loan limit blocks table: Allow.

    +

    All threshold blocking is based on values up to and including the value set in the System Administration control. Setting a fine limit of $10.00 or an item limit of 15 means that the patron can have up to $10.00 in fines or up to 15 items, but will be blocked at $10.01 or 16 items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Material_Type_Group_Limits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Material_Type_Group_Limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..538687d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Material_Type_Group_Limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Material Type Group Limits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Material Type Group Limits

    +

    You can create groups of material types and place check-out limits on the group as a whole for specific patron codes. The group limit may be different from the individual limit on each material type that is part of the group. For example, a patron code may have individual limits of DVD = 5 and Blu-Ray discs = 2. A patron with that code may check out up to five DVDs and 2 Blu-Ray discs. (These individual limits are set in the Material Type Loan Limits policy table. See List and modify loan and request limit entries.) However, if both material types are assigned to a “Media” group with a group limit of 5, and the patron’s code is specified for the Media group, the patron will be blocked if he already has 4 DVDs and 1 Blu-Ray disc or a similar combination.

    +

    If the individual material type limits and group limit conflict, the patron is blocked according to the group limit. For example, a “Media” material type group consisting of Video Cassette and DVD may be set to 0 for a patron code “Child,” while the individual Video and DVD limits are set to 5 each. In this case, the patron code Child would be blocked at 0—that is, not allowed to check out Videos or DVDs. If the patron code Child is removed from the group, the patron code Child may have up to 5 each of both Videos and DVDs (total of 10 items) because the system then uses the individual material type limits.

    +

    Limits on material type groups affect check-out from the staff client, including bulk check-out for Outreach Services or Borrow by Mail, Polaris ExpressCheck, and check-out from third-party workstations via SIP or NCIP, where block messages appear at check-out. The group limit is also checked when offline circulation transactions are uploaded, and an appropriate message is written to the offline upload report. The message includes the group name.

    +

    At normal check-out in the staff client, if the patron would exceed the group limit for the patron code, a block message appears. The staff member must have the Circulation permission Override item limit blocks: Allow to override the block and continue the transaction.

    +

    You can set up material type groups at the system, library, and branch levels. As with other loan limit blocks, the system uses the setting for the governing library for patron blocks, which may be the transacting branch or the patron’s registered branch (set in the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium circulation).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron-Initiated_Circulation_Blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron-Initiated_Circulation_Blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28051dca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron-Initiated_Circulation_Blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks

    +

    If your library allows patrons to renew items from the PAC, or by telephone, or you provide integrated eContent circulation from PAC, you can set blocking conditions on these actions that are different from those that apply to renewals from the staff client. (EContent circulation is not supported in the staff client.) The PAC displays appropriate messages related to the blocks that you set.

    +

    Example: +
    You allow PAC renewals on overdue items. There is a fine associated with an overdue item, but the fine does not cause the total charges on the patron’s account to exceed a block threshold. When the patron attempts to renew the item, the PAC displays a message that the patron’s account will be charged at renewal and requests confirmation to proceed with the renewal. If the patron chooses to proceed, the patron’s account is charged the fine for the overdue item. If the patron cancels, the item is not renewed, and the account is charged when the item is returned.

    +

    You set these blocks with the Patron Services profile Patron initiated circulation: Blocking conditions. You can set the profile at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    Patrons are blocked according to the setting for the governing library for patron blocks in the Consortium Circulation parameter. Consortium Circulation parameter.

    +

    Note: +
    In addition to the blocking conditions you set for patron-initiated renewals and eContent circulation, PAC renewals are blocked when an item can fill an Active or Pending hold request, when the number of renewals (including the current renewal) would be greater than the renewal limit set in the item record, and if the PAC profile Patron Access: Renewal is set to block renewals if the due date would fall after the patron’s registration has expired.

    +

    For more information on integrated eContent in Polaris Managing EContent in the PAC.

    +

    See: Set blocks on patron-initiated circulation and eContent circulation.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron_Block_Descriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron_Block_Descriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8aa144e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Defining_Patron_Block_Descriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Patron Block Descriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Patron Block Descriptions

    +

    A patron block (also called patron stop) interrupts check-out, renewal, or placement of a hold request based on certain conditions in the patron record. Among these conditions are library-assigned blocks. When a staff member adds a block to a patron record from the Patron Status workform, the Library assigned box on the Patron Block dialog box lists the standard, library-assigned patron block descriptions (for example, Address correction required) based on the block descriptions set up for the patron’s registered branch. The staff member can choose a library-assigned block from the list (or type a free-text block).

    +

    + PatronBlocks.gif 

    +

    Note:
    When you are bulk-changing library-assigned blocks in a patron record set, you must first select a registered branch because library-assigned block choices depend on the patron’s registered branch. When you search for patron records by library-assigned blocks with the Polaris Find Tool, the blocks are determined by the settings for your current log-on branch.

    +

    You define the standard library-assigned patron blocks in the Patron Block Descriptions policy table. You can standardize patron block descriptions among all organizations, or you can have different descriptions for each organization. You can add new blocks at the system or library level, but each branch selects which blocks to use. This table can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. When you open the table at the system or library level, you can view, add, change, and delete patron block descriptions. At the branch level, you can view, change, or delete the descriptions, select blocks for use at that branch, and determine their display order. In addition, of the blocks selected for use at a branch, you can designate which ones trigger a generic block message in the PAC patron account summary. (A free text block in the patron record triggers the same message in the PAC patron account.)

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify patron stop descriptions table: Allow.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/List_and_modify_loan_and_request_limit_entries.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/List_and_modify_loan_and_request_limit_entries.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e76346a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/List_and_modify_loan_and_request_limit_entries.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + List and modify loan and request limit entries + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    List and modify loan and request limit entries

    +

    To view and modify the entries in the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks table:

    +

    Important:
    The system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation determines which branch’s settings are used for loan and request limit blocks. For request limits, the transacting branch is considered to be the pick-up branch for the request, not the staff member’s logged-in branch. Governing Library for Circulation Transactions.

    + +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization.
    2. +
    3. Select Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks. The Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks table is displayed in the details view. + +

      The top portion of the table shows the limits for each patron code, organized by branch. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see all the limit categories (1st Level Fine, 2nd Level Fine, Total Overdue, Total Holds, Total ILL, Total Reserve Items.) Use the vertical scroll bar to see all the branch/patron code entries.

    4. +
    5. To modify the limits for a patron code:
    6. + +
        +
      1. Select the branch/patron code entry in the top portion of the table, and click ModIcon00507.gif. The Modify: Patron Loan Limits dialog box appears. + +

        ModPatLoanLimits.gif 

      2. +
      3. Type new values for the limits you want to modify, and click OK: +
        • First and second level fines - See Fine Limits. If both first and second level fine limits are set to identical values, two blocks are displayed during a transaction. Identical settings for both fine limits are not recommended unless you are suppressing all blocks for unpaid fines. In that case, set both limits to 9999.99.
        • Total limits - The number in Total overdue items is the sum of items overdue and items long overdue. Circulation to the patron is blocked when their total overdue items exceeds the number you specify. You can type a number that you believe will not be exceeded, such as 999, if you do not want to block circulation based on one of these specific totals. For example, if you do not want to block circulation for this patron code based on how many overdue items the patron has, type 999 in the Total Overdue box. The combined system limit for Total Item Limit, Total Overdue, Total Holds, and Total ILL is 3,000. The system limit for Total Reserve Items is 999. +
      4. +
      +
    7. To view the material loan and request limit entries for a specific patron classification, select the branch/patron code entry in the top portion of the table. + +

      The material loan and request limit entries for the selected entry are displayed in the bottom portion of the table. The view lists the maximum item limits for each material type. Use the vertical scroll bar to see all the material type entries. Use the horizontal scroll bar to see the Maximum Item Limit and Hold Limit columns.

    8. +
    9. To modify the maximum number of items of a specific material type that can be checked out for a specific branch/patron code, follow these steps: +
      1. Select the branch/patron code entry in the top portion of the table.
      2. Select the material type you want to modify in the bottom portion of the table, and click ModIcon00508.gif.

      The Modify Material Loan Limits dialog box appears.

      ModMaterialLoan.gif 

      1. Type the new setting in the Maximum Item Limit box, and click OK. The maximum is 3,000.

      Note:
      You can also set check-out limits on groups of material types for specific patron codes. See Defining Material Type Group Limits.

    10. +
    11. To modify the maximum number of items of a specific material type that can be requested for a specific branch/patron code, follow these steps: +
      1. Select the branch/patron code entry in the top portion of the table.
      2. Select the material type you want to modify in the bottom portion of the table, and click ModIcon00509.gif. The Modify Material Loan Limits dialog box appears.
      3. Type the new setting in the Hold Limit box, and click OK. The maximum is 3,000.

      This setting applies only to hold requests, not ILL requests. The material request limits you set for each patron code/material type combination do not need to add up to the Total Holds limit. For more information about this setting, see Total Requests and Request By Material Type Limits.

      Note:
      A separate setting blocks hold requests from the PAC if the request would exceed the setting for the total number of requests allowed, or the number of requests allowed for a particular material type. See Set Holds options: Enabling, Item Status Restrictions, First Available Copy.

      Items with valid barcodes and items without barcodes but with a status of On Order or In Process are included in the limit check.

    12. +
    13. Select File | Save to save any changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    14. +
    + +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Limiting check-out by material type group - You can set up groups of material types and limit the number of items belonging to the group that can be checked out to specific patron codes. See Defining Material Type Group Limits.
    • +
    • Blocks on long-overdue items - You can set an additional circulation block in the staff client based on an item’s long-overdue status. Two parameters affect this block. The period after which an overdue item changes to “long overdue” is set with the Patron Services parameter Overdues: # of days until long overdue. Then, set the Patron Services parameter Overdues: Block for long overdue items to Yes. You can set these parameters at the system, library, or branch level.
    • +
    • Patron codes - See Defining Patron Codes.
    • +
    • Material types - See Defining Material Types.
    • +
    • Blocks on renewals from PAC or Polaris Phone Attendant - See Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks.
    • +
    • Blocks on self-check circulation - SIP self-check units use your settings in the Patron Loan and Request Limits table for maximum fines, items out, items overdue, and request limits. For other SIP self-check settings, see Setting Up Bibliotheca ITG DiscXpress II. For Polaris ExpressCheck, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.
    • +
    • Blocks on using Wireless Access Manager (WAM) - If your library uses the WAM application, you can prevent patrons with blocked accounts from using wireless access. Set the Patron Services parameter WAM: Block if Patron has stops to Yes at the system, library, or branch level. When you set this parameter at the branch level, it applies to patrons registered at that branch no matter where the blocked patron tries to use wireless access. That is, even if the blocked patron tries to use WAM at a branch that sets this parameter to No, the patron cannot use WAM at that branch. For more information about WAM, see the Wireless Access Manager Administration Guide, available on the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com).
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_blocks_on_patron-initiated_circulation_and_ebook_circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_blocks_on_patron-initiated_circulation_and_ebook_circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a258d3a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_blocks_on_patron-initiated_circulation_and_ebook_circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Blocks on Patron-Initiated and eContent Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Blocks on Patron-Initiated and eContent Circulation

    +

    Note: +
    Patrons are blocked according to the Governing library for patron blocks setting in the Consortium Circulation parameter.

    +

    To set patron and item blocks on eContent checkout and physical item renewals from PAC or by telephone:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron initiated circulation: Blocking conditions. The Patron Initiated Circulation Blocking Conditions dialog box opens with the Patron Blocks tab displayed.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. On the Patron Blocks tab, select from the following options related to the patron record:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Free text blocks - Blocks patrons whose records contain free-text blocks.
    • +
    • Money owed - Blocks patrons whose total charges are greater than a specified amount. If you select Money owed, select either Over 2nd level fine amount, or select Over and type an amount.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The second level fine amount depends on the setting for the governing library for patron blocks. For information about setting the governing library, see Set the governing library for circ transactions. For information about setting the second level fine amount, see List and modify loan and request limit entries.

    +
      +
    • Collection agency blocks - Blocks patrons whose accounts are in collection.
    • +
    • Verify borrower blocks - Blocks patrons whose records require staff to verify the patron’s identity.
    • +
    • At least.... lost items - Blocks patrons who have one or more lost items. If you select this option, set the number of lost items that activates the block.
    • +
    • At least.... overdue items - Blocks patrons who have one or more overdue items. If you select this option, set the number of overdue items that activates the block. All renewals and ebook circulations by the patron are blocked if the patron has the specified number of overdue items, even if other items are not overdue.
    • +
    • At least.... long overdue items - Blocks patrons who have one or more long overdue items. If you select this option, set the number of long overdue items that activates the block. All renewals and ebook circulations by the patron are blocked if the patron has the specified number of long overdue items, even if other items are not overdue.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The period after which an overdue item changes to “long overdue” is set with the Patron Services parameter Overdues: # of days until long overdue. You can set the parameter at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    • At least.... current claims - Blocks patrons who have one or more current claims that they have returned or never had items that are still shown as checked out. If you select this option, set the number of current claims that activates the block.
    • +
    • At least.... total claims - Block patrons who have one or more total claims that they have returned or never had items that are still shown as checked out, regardless of whether or how the claims have been resolved. If you select this option, set the number of total claims that activates the block.
    • +
    • Library-assigned blocks - Select any library-assigned blocks that, when they appear in the patron record, should block PAC and telephone renewals and ebook circulation.
    • +
    • Patron code blocks - Select patron codes that should be blocked from making PAC and telephone renewals or checking out ebooks.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Item Blocks tab. The Item Blocks tabbed page displays options that block renewals and ebook circulation according to conditions related to the item record.
    2. +
    +

    + IBlocksDX.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Set the item record conditions that should block renewals:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Has a free text block - Blocks renewals or (ebook circulation) on any item with a free-text block.
    • +
    • Is overdue - Blocks renewal on any overdue item.

      Is long overdue - Blocks renewal on any long-overdue items.

    • +
    +

    Note:
    The period after which an overdue item changes to “long overdue” is set with the Patron Services parameter Overdues: # of days until long overdue. You can set the parameter at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    • Library-assigned blocks - Select any library-assigned blocks for the item’s assigned branch that should block PAC and telephone renewals and ebook circulation when they appear in the item record.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK in the dialog box. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save any changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Patron blocks - Library-assigned blocks available for patron records are defined in the Patron Blocks policy table Defining Patron Block Descriptions.
    • +
    • Item blocks - Library-assigned blocks available for item records are defined in the Item Block Descriptions database table. See Designating Floating Collections.
    • +
    • Loan limit blocks, including fine limits - Loan, fine, and request limits are set in the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks policy table. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.
    • +
    • Other blocks on self-check circulation - For SIP self-check equipment, see . For Polaris ExpressCheck, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_blocks_for_claims.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_blocks_for_claims.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb2f693d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_blocks_for_claims.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up blocks for claims + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up blocks for claims

    +

    When a patron receives an overdue notice or a bill, the patron may claim that she never had an item or that the item was returned. The claim is recorded in the patron’s record. You can set Polaris to block transactions for patrons who have too many claims. To block patron accounts automatically based on current and total claims:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Claims: Number patron can have at one time, and type or select the number of current (unresolved) claims a patron can have before the patron’s account is blocked.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Claims: Total number allowed, and type or select the number of total (lifetime) claims a patron can have before the patron’s account is blocked.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Staff with appropriate permission can reset this count to 0. Reset a patron’s total claims count.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Overdue fines on claimed items in estimated fines - Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_check-out_limits_by_material_type_groups.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_check-out_limits_by_material_type_groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d72a4a77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_check-out_limits_by_material_type_groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up check-out limits by material type groups + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up check-out limits by material type groups

    +

    To set up material type groups and set check-out limits for specific patron codes:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Material type groups. The Material Type Groups dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + MatTypGrpDef.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Define a material type group:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the group in the Group definition box.
    2. +
    3. Click Add Group. The new group appears in the Group name list at the top left portion of the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + MatTypCreateGroup.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Assign material types to the group:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the new group name in the Group Name list.
    2. +
    3. In the Material Type Assignment list, check the material types that should be included in the group. Because a material type can belong to only one group, the list displays the material types not already assigned to another group for this organization.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot add all material types to a group.

    +
      +
    1. Assign patron codes and patron code limits to the group:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the group in the Group Name list.
    2. +
    3. In the Patron Code list, check the patron codes that should have a limit for this group. If several patron codes should have the same limit, select the appropriate codes. If all patron codes should have the same limit, click Select All.
    4. +
    5. In the number control, specify the number of items allowed for the selected patron codes, and click Apply.
    6. +
    +

    + MatTypPatronLimit.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps a and b to set different limits for different patron codes.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your group settings.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a material type group - In the Material Type Groups dialog box, select the group in the Group Names list. You can then change the item material type and patron code selections, and set new limits. To modify the group name, select the group in the Group Names list. The name appears in the Name box. Edit the name and click Modify Name.
    • +
    • Delete a material type group - Select the group in the Group Names list. The name appears in the Name box. Click Delete. When you delete a material type group, the limits set for individual material types are applied at check-out.
    • +
    • Patron codes - See Defining Patron Codes.
    • +
    • Material types - See Defining Material Types.
    • +
    • Governing library for patron blocks - The governing library for patron blocks determines which branch’s material limit settings are used. See Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_estimate_accrued_fine_calculations_and_blocking.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_estimate_accrued_fine_calculations_and_blocking.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4fc76f1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPblocks/Set_up_estimate_accrued_fine_calculations_and_blocking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up estimate accrued fine calculations and blocking

    +

    To set whether to include lost and/or claimed items in accrued fine estimates, and whether to include accrued fines in blocking calculations:

    +
      +
    1. In Polaris Administration (system level only), double-click the Patron Services parameter Accrued fine options. The Accrued fine options dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. If you want to include overdue fines for claimed items in the estimated fine calculation, select (check) Include claimed items in accrued fines. When this option is checked, the claims list view in the Patron Status workform displays Claimed/Accruing for claimed items with accruing overdue fines.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If the system-level Patron Services parameter Overdues: Charge fines for claimed items is set to No, and the Include claimed items option for accrued fines is set to Yes, no overdues will accrue. The Include claimed items option setting has no impact in this case.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to include overdue fines for lost items in the calculation, select (check) Include lost items in accrued fines. When this option is checked, the claims list view in the Patron Status workform displays enhanced information for lost items with accruing overdue fines as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Overdue is charged when the item is billed:

    +
    +
      +
    • Lost with unpaid replacement and unpaid overdue: Lost/Unpaid
    • +
    • Lost with paid replacement and unpaid overdue: Lost/Accruing
    • +
    • Lost with unpaid replacement and paid overdue: Lost/Unpaid
    • +
    +
    +

    Overdue is charged when returned: +

    +
    +
      +
    • Lost with unpaid replacement and accruing overdue: Lost/Unpaid
    • +
    • Lost with paid replacement and accruing overdue: Lost/Accruing
    • +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the branch-level Patron Services parameter Lost items charge options: Charge overdue when returned is set to No, and the Include lost items option for accrued fines is set to Yes, no overdues will accrue. The Include lost items option setting has no impact in this case. If Lost items charge options: Charge overdue when returned is set to Yes, the lost item charge options are applied according to the governing library for fines.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to block patrons based on estimated fine amounts, select (check) Block for estimated fines.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_Check_In_list_view_fields_for_patron_and_item_data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_Check_In_list_view_fields_for_patron_and_item_data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9fcc0439 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_Check_In_list_view_fields_for_patron_and_item_data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + Set Check In list view fields for patron and item data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Check In list view fields for patron and item data

    +

    To specify the information that appears in the list view of the Check In workform:

    +

    Note:
    You can set these options at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Check-in: Listview options. The Check-in listview options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + CheckInListOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Normal column, select the fields (Title, Material Type, Call Number, Shelf Location, Patron Name, Assigned Branch, Collection) to display for normal check-in. The selected fields will be displayed as data columns in the Check In workform list view for normal check-in. The title field includes issue information for serials.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Select Assigned Branch if you allow circulation staff to change an item’s barcode, circulation status, or shelf location from the Check In Workform. These operations can be performed only when an item’s assigned branch is the same as the workstation’s logged-in branch, so it is useful to know the assigned branches of the items in the Check In list view.

    +
      +
    1. In the Bulk column, select the fields (Title, Material Type, Call Number, Shelf Location, Patron Name, Assigned Branch, Collection) to display for bulk check-in. The selected fields will be displayed as data columns in the Check In workform list view for bulk check-in.
    2. +
    +

    These settings (except Patron Name) are also used in the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform if your library sends Enriched EDI orders using Polaris Acquisitions and receives and checks in shipments of shelf-ready barcoded materials. Checking In Shelf-Ready Items.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Administration Explorer appears.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_item_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_item_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e19dbba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_item_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set item data fields for the Check Out workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set item data fields for the Check Out workform

    +

    To set which item information appears, and the order in which it appears, in the list view of the Check Out workform:

    +

    Note:
    You can set these options at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Check-out: Listview options. The Check-out Listview Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + CheckOutListOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To display a field in the item list view on the Check Out workform, select the field in the Options list and click Add. The field is placed in the Selections list, and will be displayed as a data column in the list view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For serials, the title field includes issue information.

    +
      +
    1. To move a column to the left or right in the workform list view, select the field in the Selections list, and click Up (left) or Down (right).
    2. +
    3. To remove a field from the list view, select the field in the Selections list, and click Remove. The field is placed in the Options list.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box. The Administration Explorer appears.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_patron_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_patron_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32d5a345 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Set_patron_data_fields_for_the_Check_Out_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set patron data fields for the Check Out workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set patron data fields for the Check Out workform

    +

    To set which optional patron data fields appear, and the order in which they appear, in the header of the Check Out workform:

    +

    Note:
    You can set these options at the system, library, or branch level. The settings you make here also control the patron data displayed in the header of the Patron Status workform.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Check-out: Optional patron data. The Optional Patron Data Display dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + OptPatronData.gif 

    +

     

    +
      +
    1. To display a field in the Check Out workform header, select the field in the Options list and click Add. The options include the user-defined fields set up for your system. The field is placed in the Selections list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select eReceipt, the field will be displayed regardless of whether you have enabled eReceipts for this organization. If eReceipts are enabled and you later decide to disable them, remember to remove the eReceipt option from the Check Out workform header. For more information about eReceipts, see Setting Up eReceipts.

    +
      +
    1. To move a field higher or lower in the workform header, select the field in the Selections list, and click Up or Down.
    2. +
    3. To remove a field from the workform header, select the field in the Selections list, and click Remove. The field is placed in the Options list.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box. The Administration Explorer appears.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_Circulation_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_Circulation_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..673f3bf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_Circulation_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Circulation Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Circulation Workforms

    +

    You can customize the fields that appear on the Check Out and Check In workforms, so that only the information needed by your staff members is displayed. These options can be set at the system, library, or branch level using the Patron Services parameters Check-out: Optional patron data and Check-in: Listview options. The settings for the Check Out workform also apply to the patron data in the header of the Patron Status workform.

    +

    You can specify different fields for normal and bulk check-ins using the Check-In Listview options. The settings for bulk check­in also apply to the Receive Shipment workform available from the Acquisitions menu.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c872fd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up the Check In Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the Check In Workform

    +

    Use the Patron Services parameter Check-in: Listview options to customize the Check In workform so that only the patron and item information needed by your staff displays in the workform. You can specify different fields for normal and bulk check-in.

    +

    Note:
    If your library sends enriched EDI orders using Polaris Acquisitions and receives and checks in shipments of shelf-ready barcoded materials, your settings for bulk check-in are also used for the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform.Checking In Shelf-Ready Items.

    +

    + CheckInList.gif 

    +

    See also: Set Check In list view fields for patron and item data

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_Out_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_Out_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f437d56e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcircforms/Setting_Up_the_Check_Out_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up the Check Out Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the Check Out Workform

    +

    You can customize the Check Out workform so that only the patron and item information needed by your staff is displayed. Patron data fields are displayed in the workform header. Item data is displayed in the columns of the item list view.

    +

    + CheckOutOps.gif 

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Collection_Processing_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Collection_Processing_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd0523e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Collection_Processing_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + Collection Processing Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Collection Processing Reports

    +

    Three reports are created in Polaris and sent to the collection agency. The Submission Report and the Update Report are scheduled to run in overnight batch processing, while the Collection Agency Synchronization Report is run on demand. These reports are ASCII text files that can be imported into Microsoft Excel or another spreadsheet application to format as needed.

    +

    Important:
    Collection Agency reports depend on the SQL Server job Polaris_Collection. Before running reports, in SQL Enterprise Manager, check that the SQL Server job Polaris_Collection is scheduled properly and enabled. The schedule should not interfere with other running jobs.

    +
      +
    • Submission Report - Includes all patrons who have been flagged for collection since the last Submission Report was generated. See Using a Collection Agency. These patrons are not included in subsequent Submission reports unless their patron records are cleared, and they qualify at a later time. The report runs in overnight batch processing on a regular schedule and is transmitted to the collection agency automatically. Set up collection agency processing 
    • +
    • Update Report - Includes all patrons whose accounts are in collection and have had any activity (new charge, payment, or waive) at the reporting organization since the last report (Submission or Update) was generated. The report runs in overnight batch processing on a regular schedule and is transmitted to the collection agency automatically. Set up collection agency processing 
    • +
    +

    Important:
    To be sure the system reports the recovery of lost items correctly, set the Patron Services parameter Overdues: Billed items set to lost to Yes.

    +
      +
    • Collection Agency Synchronization Report- Summary of all patrons currently reported to the collection agency. It includes each patron’s barcode, name, and the amount due. The Balance Due System is the amount a patron owes to all reporting organizations, and the Balance Due Org is the amount a patron owes to the reporting library. (If the reporting organization is the system, the amounts are the same.) It is possible that the patron may be reported on behalf of more than one library; for example, if the reporting options are set to Item’s Branch. In this case the patron would appear twice in the report, once for each reporting organization, and the Balance Due System is the total amount owed to both organizations. Also, the patron may have an actual account balance greater than the Balance Due System. This would happen if the patron owed additional charges to a third library that did not report to the collection agency. That larger amount, the sum of amounts due to the two reporting libraries and the one that did not report, is not included in the Synchronization Report because it does not impact any collection agency processing. The collection agency may use this report to verify that its records are accurate. You can run this report on demand, at any time. When you run the report, it is automatically transmitted to the collection agency.Generate the Collection Agency Synchronization .
    • +
    +

    In addition to the three reports intended for the collection agency, formatted reports for library use are available from Utilities, Reports on the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +
      +
    • Collection Agency Summary - Lists all patrons in collection and the amounts they owe.
    • +
    • Collection Agency Detail - Lists all transactions on accounts submitted to collection within a specified date range.
    • +
    +

    Patron Financial Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Generate_the_Collection_Agency_Synchronization.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Generate_the_Collection_Agency_Synchronization.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e6177e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Generate_the_Collection_Agency_Synchronization.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Generate the Collection Agency Synchronization Report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Generate the Collection Agency Synchronization Report

    +

    The Collection Agency Synchronization Report identifies patrons currently reported to the collection agency, with their balances. It is recommended that you run it at least quarterly. To run this report.

    +

    Important:
    Collection Agency reports depend on the SQL Server job Polaris_Collection. Before running reports, in SQL Enterprise Manager, check that the SQL Server job Polaris_Collection is scheduled properly and enabled. The schedule should not interfere with other running jobs.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar (staff client). The Polaris Reports dialog box appears.
    2. +

      + PolReportsDx.gif

      +
    3. Expand the Notices folder.
    4. +
    5. Select the Collection Agency folder under Notices.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Collection Agency Synchronization in the Available Reports list. The Report Parameter Wizard appears.
    8. +
    9. Select the organization(s) for which you want to run the report, or select All, and click Submit.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    The organizations available for selection depend on the setting in the Staff Client profile Report Server. See Report Server Set Up Dialog Box.

    +

    The report is created and transmitted to the collection agency according to the Polaris Administration collection agency settings you made for the Submission and Update reports. For information about these settings, see Set up collection agency processing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Managing_Collection_Agency_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Managing_Collection_Agency_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d0cf092 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Managing_Collection_Agency_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Collection Agency Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Collection Agency Services

    +

    Your library may contract with a collection agency to encourage patrons to pay their fines or return borrowed items. Delinquent accounts are reported to the collection agency automatically, and the patron records automatically updated, according to settings you make in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    Innovative Interfaces charges a modest annual site license fee to use the collection agency interface in Polaris. Contact your Site Manager at Innovative Interfaces for additional information.

    +

    If your library uses a second collection agency to collect from patron accounts that were not settled with the first agency Second Level Collection Agency Management.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Using_a_Collection_Agency.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Using_a_Collection_Agency.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51fd7e65 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcollect/Using_a_Collection_Agency.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + Using a Collection Agency + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using a Collection Agency

    +

    Note: +
    + Set up collection agency processing 

    +

    Collection agencies differ in notification practices and in how repayment is obtained. Some collection agencies, such as Unique Management Services (UMS), manage all collection communications with patrons who have delinquent accounts, but the patrons make all payments directly to the library. For other collection agencies, the library may send a fine notice warning the patron that the account will be turned over to collection. Once the account is turned over, patrons may make payments to the collection agency as well as to the library. Your library’s contract with the collection agency determines the cost to the library for collection agency services. To recoup some of these costs, you can set a collection fee on delinquent patron accounts.

    +

    Regardless of communication and payment methods, collection agency services rely on the automatic reporting capabilities of Polaris. Polaris automatically transmits a Submission Report of delinquent patron information and an Update Report of patron account activity to the collection agency, via e-mail, FTP, or both. You can have Polaris send copies of the reports to a library staff member for verification and backup. In addition, a Synchronization Report lists all currently reported patrons with their balances. You can run this report manually, any time.

    +

    A patron’s account is considered delinquent and is included on the Submission Report when all the following conditions exist:

    +
      +
    • The patron owes an amount of money over a library-defined limit.
    • +
    • The money has been owed longer than a library-specified period of time.
    • +
    • The specific patron has not been excluded from collection reporting (the Exclude from collection agency check box is not selected on the Patron Registration workform - General view).
    • +
    • The patron code in the patron record has not been excluded from collection reporting.
    • +
    +

    The total amount reported may include charges of all types, replacement costs, processing fees, and collection fees. Or, you can opt to report patron accounts based only on lost item charges (see Reporting for Lost Item Charges Only).

    +

    Accrued overdue fines that have not yet been charged are not included in the calculation for reporting to a collection agency. See Calculating and Blocking for Estimated Accrued Fines.

    +

    The following events occur during collection agency processing:

    +
      +
    • After collection agency functions are started, the system identifies delinquent patrons. The Submission Report is produced during overnight batch processing and is sent to the collection agency by e-mail or FTP. The report includes all patron accounts that match the criteria you set in Polaris Administration. See Collection Processing Reports.
    • +
    • A system-generated collection block and collection fee (if specified) is automatically added to the patron record. Only staff members with the system-level Circulation permission Override collection agency block: Allow can override the block.
    • +
    • The collection agency encourages the patron to settle with the library, or collects money directly from patrons and transmits it to the library.
    • +
    • The patron pays all participating libraries all the money that is owed, including fines and collection fees incurred after being reported to the collection agency. When the patron no longer owes money to the reporting libraries, the patron’s account is out of collection. (The patron may still owe money to non-participating libraries.) The block is automatically removed from the patron’s account, and the patron’s account is considered to be out of collection.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the patron’s account is not paid down to $0.00 at all the participating organizations, the patron’s account is still in collection. If the patron’s account is paid down to $0.00 after submission to collection, but the patron incurs a new fine before the Update Report is generated, the patron’s account is still in collection.

    +
      +
    • The Update Report is generated during overnight batch processing, and is sent to the collection agency by e-mail or FTP. The report includes all patrons who have been identified for collection and have had any activity (payment, waiver, or new charge) at the reporting organization since the last report, either the Submission Report or Update Report, was generated.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can manually remove a patron’s account from collection. Remove a patron account from collection. However, the action is not included in any automatic collection agency reports. If a patron’s account is manually removed from collection, you must inform the collection agency.

    +

    If your library uses a second level of collections with the first agency reporting patron accounts that are still unsettled to the library and the library referring these accounts to a second collection agency, see Second Collection Agency Management.

    +

    +

    +

    Reporting for Lost Item Charges Only

    +

    Patron accounts can be sent to collection based only on lost item charges (combined replacement and processing fees). No other charges are included when determining if the patron account should be reported. However, if the patron account does qualify for reporting based on lost item fees, the total amount owed, including all charges such as overdue fines or printing, is sent to the agency. Similarly, after a patron account is submitted to the collection agency, all new charges of any type are included in the Update Report, not just lost item fees.

    +

    A patron account is sent to collection based on a threshold amount you specify. If you set the “item fees only” option, the calculation to determine if the patron meets the minimum balance for reporting is based only on combined replacement and processing fee charges. For example, if the threshold amount is $25:

    +
      +
    • A patron who owes $30 in combined replacement cost and processing charges for lost items will be reported to the collection agency. If this patron owes an additional $10 in overdue fines, making his total owed $40, when the account is submitted to the agency his amount owed will be $40, and the account will not be cleared until the balance is $0.
    • +
    • A patron who owes $20 in combined replacement cost and processing charges and $10 in overdue fines will not be reported.
    • +
    +

    The “item fees only” option is available only at the system level. If selected, it affects all calculations to determine if a patron account qualifies for reporting, regardless of the Reporting Level setting (System, Library, Branch) or Reporting By setting (Patron Branch, Item Branch, Loaning Branch). Set up collection agency processing 

    +

    Note:
    When you set the “item fees only” option, calculations for new collection agency submissions from that point on will be affected. Patron accounts reported under previous rules are not affected.

    +

    Reporting Minors

    +

    Polaris identifies patrons under the age of 18 from the Birth date field in the patron record. You can specify a guardian for collection purposes by setting up a user-defined field (UDF) for the guardian’s patron barcode. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields. In this case, the Submission Report to the collection agency lists the guardian’s address and telephone numbers for collection purposes. If you use library-generated fine notices, the message regarding the minor’s delinquent account is addressed to the minor, in care of the guardian, at the guardian’s address. If the patron’s record does not include a birth date, but does contain a UDF with a valid patron barcode, the patron is reported as a minor. If the system cannot identify the UDF barcode as a patron, the delinquent patron is reported on her own behalf (not as a minor).

    +

    Important:
    Innovative Interfaces sets up user-defined fields at implementation. If you plan to use collection agency services, and you want to specify a UDF to use for the guardian barcode, you must have Innovative Interfaces set up the UDF.

    +

    Collection Agency Reporting via FTP

    +

    You can transmit Submission and Update reports to your collection agency via FTP (File Transfer Protocol), instead of or in addition to e-mail.

    +

    FTP is a method of  sending data files to (or retrieving them from)  specified locations on remote servers.  In Polaris Administration, the library  specifies the FTP address on the collection agency server. When the process runs, the Submission and Update files are automatically placed on the remote server.

    +

    Depending on the collection agency’s requirements, the FTP file location for multiple branches may require individual folders for each branch or library, or a single folder containing the data files from all locations. For example, UMS prefers a single folder since the files for individual branches are distinguished by file name.

    +

    Secure FTP and Third-Party FTP software

    +

    Polaris also supports SFTP (Secure FTP), a secure way to transmit the data. If the library chooses to use SFTP, you must install a third-party SFTP program on the library network. You can also use third-party FTP software that does not support SFTP. In either case, you specify the program executable and any associated parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    Some networks may have restrictions on FTP or on file sizes, and there may be firewall settings that prevent FTP. The library is responsible for clearing the way for FTP on the local network.

    +

    Active FTP

    +

    Some collection agencies may support Active FTP. Active FTP allows the remote service to initiate the connection to begin the transfer. However, the firewall on some networks will not allow this, so Passive mode is used. If the remote server accepts Active FTP, you can select the option in your Polaris Administration setup. As with Passive mode, the remote service will need to provide the parameters necessary to connect via Active FTP.

    +

    E-Mail Summary

    +

    The Polaris Administration e-mail setup for collection agency processing includes an option to send an e-mail summary only. When this option is selected, the program sends a summary to the specified e-mail addresses instead of a full report. The summary e-mail includes the summary data normally included in the full report. (This summary data is not included in the FTP files.) The header of the summary includes a mapping of the UDFs included in the files. The summary option should be used in connection with FTP transmission to alert the designated recipients that the reporting process ran.

    +

    Important:
    The e-mail summary option is intended to be used with the FTP option. If the library sends files to the agency via e-mail but does not use FTP, do not select this option.

    +

    The e-mail summary feature is also valuable if there are transmission errors. If the FTP transmission fails for any reason, the summary e-mail message indicates that the process failed. The message includes the filename of the document to be sent and a reason for the failure, if one can be determined.

    +

    Sending the Files

    +

    When you enable FTP transmission, the Submission and Update reports are automatically sent to the designated file location, and a copy of the report file is automatically saved to a local directory on your server:
     \[Polaris Data Path]\[Version No.]\Logs\SSIS\CollectionAgency\Reports

    +

    If you report by branch or library, each location has a subdirectory: SSIS\CollectionAgency\Reports\AMS-3

    +

    Note:
    If both e-mail and FTP output options are selected, only one copy is sent to the local directory.

    +

    Setting Up FTP Transmission in Polaris Administration

    +

    Before you begin setting up FTP transmission in Polaris Administration, contact your collection agency to determine the following:

    +
      +
    • FTP server location
    • +
    • FTP port
    • +
    • FTP folder name
    • +
    • Your user name and password for the agency’s FTP server
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_course_schedule_information_for_course_reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_course_schedule_information_for_course_reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..82625e4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_course_schedule_information_for_course_reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add course schedule information for course reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add course schedule information for course reserves

    +

    You associate the schedule entries with a branch organization. To add course terms and dates to the Course Reserves: Course Term table:

    +

    Important:
    Add appropriate course terms, years, start dates, and end dates to this table at regular intervals (for example, annually).

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Course Reserves: Course terms. The Course Terms table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + CourseTermsTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00533.gif to display the Insert Course Terms dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + InsertTerm.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Course Terms policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type a term name (such as Fall or Spring) in the Course Term box.
    2. +
    3. Type a four-digit year (such as 2012) in the Term Year box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The Course Term and Term Year values together provide an option that a staff member can select when creating a course reserve record. For example, if you create an entry for Fall 2012 in the Course Terms table, a staff member can choose this value to identify a course in a course reserve record.

    +
      +
    1. Set the course start date:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the calendar icon on the Course Start Date box. The calendar appears.
    2. +
    +

    + InsertTermDate.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the month arrows until the month for the start date appears.
    2. +
    3. Click the date on which the course starts. The Start Date calendar closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Set the course end date (must be after the course start date):
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the calendar icon on the Course End Date box. The calendar appears.
    2. +
    3. Click the month arrows until the month for the end date appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the date on which the course ends. The End Date calendar closes.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK in the dialog box. The Course Term table  is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon00534.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current course reserve record. Select the entry and click btnDelete00535.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_courses_for_course_reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_courses_for_course_reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97941935 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_courses_for_course_reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + Add courses for course reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add courses for course reserves

    +

    When you add courses, you associate each course entry with a branch organization, and specify more detailed identification information about each course. To add individual courses to the Course Names table:

    +

    Tip:
    You can set up one or two “dummy” courses to accommodate special situations. For example, a library may put valuable or special items on permanent reserve behind the circulation desk. You might name the “course” for these items CircDesk. Although they are not reserved for an actual course, you can use course reserve functionality to control their circulation.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Course Reserves: Course names. The Course Names table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + CourseNamesTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Course Names dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + InsertCourse.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Course Names policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +

    Tip:
    Omit initial articles (A, An, The) from the course name. Unlike most searches in Polaris, if the course name begins with an article (A, An, The), you must include the article or use a wildcard character in the Polaris Find Tool search term.

    +
      +
    1. Type the appropriate values in the Course Name, Course Number, Section Number, and Course Abbreviation boxes.
    2. +
    +

    The course number, section number, and course abbreviation are optional. Each value you specify will appear as a selectable option in the course reserve record workform. See the following examples:

    +
      +
    • If a course is always identified by a unique name and number combination, you can set up the table entry so that selecting the course name in the course reserve record workform always provides the correct course number.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    For a course listed as CIS631 Computer and Network Security, add one Course Name table entry with these values:
    Course Name: Computer and Network Security
    Course Number: CIS631
    When the course reserve record is set up for this course, selecting the name provides the correct number in the course number field.

    +
      +
    • If courses are listed with common names but unique numbers, you may want to add separate entries for each name/number combination.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    Courses are listed as English 101, English 102, and English 103. Add three Course Name table entries with these values:
    (Entry 1)
    Course Name: English
    Course Number: 101
    (Entry 2)
    Course Name: English
    Course Number: 102
    (Entry 3)
    Course Name: English
    Course Number: 103
    When the course reserve records are set up for these courses, the staff member selects the course name English, then selects the course number from the options 101, 102, or 103.

    +
      +
    • Alternatively, you can make the course number part of the name itself, and leave the number blank.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    Courses are listed as English 101, English 102, and English 103. Add three Course Name table entries with these values:
    (Entry 1)
    Course Name: English 101
    Course Number:
    (leave blank)
    (Entry 2)
    Course Name: English 102
    Course Number:
    (leave blank)
    (Entry 3)
    Course Name: English 103
    Course Number:
    (leave blank)
    When the course reserve records are set up for these courses, the staff member selects the course name English 101, English 102, or English 103. There are no course numbers to select.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The Courses table list is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current course reserve record. Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif.
    • +
    • Add table entries from a new course reserve record - Course names, course numbers, section numbers, and course abbreviations can also be added to the Course Names table from the Course Reserve workform in the staff client, by entering the information in the Add New Course Information dialog box. The information is added to the Course Names table for the branch that owns the course reserve record, and to the Course Names table at the system level. For more information, see Setting Up Course Reserve Records.
    • +
    • Specify the default search field for PAC course reserve searches - See Specifying Default Search Settings.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_departments_for_course_reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_departments_for_course_reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab337b97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_departments_for_course_reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add departments for course reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add departments for course reserves

    +

    You associate each department entry with a branch organization. To add academic departments to the Course Reserves: Departments table:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Course Reserves: Departments. The Departments table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + CourseDeptsTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00536.gif to display the Insert Departments dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + InsertDept.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Course Departments policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the name text in the Department Name box, and click OK. The Department Name list is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon00537.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current course reserve record. Select the entry and click btnDelete00538.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_schools_divisions_for_course_reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_schools_divisions_for_course_reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d024bf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Add_schools_divisions_for_course_reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add schools/divisions for course reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add schools/divisions for course reserves

    +

    You associate each school or division entry with a branch organization.

    +

    To add schools or divisions to the Course Reserves: School/Divisions table:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Course Reserves: School/Divisions. The School/Divisions table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + CourseSchoolsTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00539.gif to display the Insert School Divisions dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + InsertSchool.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the School/Divisions policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the name text in the School/Division Name box, and click OK. The School/Divisions table list is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon00540.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current course reserve record. Select the entry and click btnDelete00541.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Set_default_values_for_reserve_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Set_default_values_for_reserve_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7fc42aa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Set_default_values_for_reserve_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set default values for reserve items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set default values for reserve items

    +

    To set the default values for reserve item records:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization.
    2. +
    3. Click the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Course reserve options to display the Course Reserve Options dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    + dReservDefaults.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the default assigned branch for reserve item records from the Assigned branch list.
    2. +
    3. To include default collection information in the reserve item record, select a collection in the Assigned collection list. The list includes all collections defined for the assigned branch.
    4. +
    5. To include default shelf location information in the reserve item record, select a location in the Shelf location list. The list includes all shelf locations defined for the assigned branch.
    6. +
    7. Select a default loan period in the Loan period code list.
    8. +
    9. Select a default fine code in the Fine code list.
    10. +
    11. Select a default renewal limit in the Renewal limit list. If you do not ordinarily allow renewals on reserve items, select 0.
    12. +
    13. Select (check) Holdable if hold requests are allowed on most reserve items.
    14. +
    15. Designate the default owner of reserve items:
    16. +
    +
      +
    • Select Library if most reserve items are drawn from the library’s collection.
    • +
    • Select Instructor if instructors supply most reserve items.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the default action to take when a reserve item is taken off reserve:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Discard - Indicates that the item should be discarded when it is taken off reserve. You may wish to use this option if most of your reserve items are photocopies or temporary materials provided by the instructor.
    • +
    • Return item to collection - Indicates that the item should return to the library’s circulating (non-reserve) collection when it is taken off reserve. This option is available only if Library is the selected copy owner.
    • +
    • Return to owner - Indicates that an item should be returned to the instructor when it is taken off reserve. This option is available only if Instructor is the selected copy owner.
    • +
    • Auto-delete - Automatically deletes the item record (and the associated bibliographic record, if appropriate) when an item is taken off reserve. If most of your reserve items are instructor-owned, and you are therefore creating temporary item records for them when they are placed on reserve, you may wish to select this option. This option is available only if Discard or Return to Owner is selected.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. If most of your reserve items are photocopies, select a copyright compliance option:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • CCG (compliance with copyright guidelines) - Use this option for photocopied journal articles if the article is dated within the last five years, and your library does not own the journal title, and this is the fifth or fewer request made for this item within the current calendar year.
    • +
    • CCL (compliance with copyright law) - Use this option for all other photocopies; for example, if the article is older than five years, or your library owns the journal title, or this is the sixth or greater request within the calendar year and if your library is paying royalties to the Copyright Clearance Center or a document delivery vendor.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Select None if most reserve items are not photocopies.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Library use only if most reserve items should not be removed from the library.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Requires full cataloging if most reserve items need further cataloging. This option is available only if Library is the selected copy owner.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Purchase to indicate that the library may wish to purchase copies of most reserve items, if they are instructor-owned, or additional copies of library-owned items.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    This option sets an indicator in the reserve item record. It does not initiate automatic purchase order functions.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Copyright fee required if a copyright fee is required for most reserve items.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save any changes.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Reserve collections - Branches that deal with extensive course reserves may want to set up reserve collections. For more information about setting up collections, see Setting Up eReceipts.
    • +
    • Limit the number of reserve items a patron can check out - See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.
    • +
    • Instructor information - Information about instructors in course reserve records derives from linked patron records for the instructors. For more information, see Creating and Editing Patron Records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9632ca4d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Course Reserve Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Course Reserve Options

    +

    Course reserve options control the default settings for the reserve item “record,” which stores circulation, status, and disposition information about an item that has been placed on course reserve. The default values for the reserve item record can be different from those used in the equivalent (non-reserved) item record. For example, when an item is placed on reserve, the default loan period and fine code can be different from the values set for the same item when it is in the library’s circulating (non-reserve) collection.

    +

    You set reserve item defaults with the Patron Services parameter Course reserve options, which you can access from the Administration Explorer or an organization workform. Course reserve options are available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    See also: Set default values for reserve items

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Tables.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Tables.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..544ee2c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Course_Reserve_Tables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Course Reserve Tables + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Course Reserve Tables

    +

    Course Reserve policy tables control what options are available for fields in the Course Reserve record as follows:

    +
      +
    • Course Reserves: Course names - Associates the organizations (branches) with the course numbers, section numbers, course names, and course abbreviations for which the branches handle course reserves.
    • +
    • Course Reserves: Course terms - Associates the organizations (branches) with the course terms, course start dates, and course end dates for which the branches handle course reserves.
    • +
    • Course Reserves: Departments - Associates the organizations (branches) with the academic departments for which the branches handle course reserves.
    • +
    • Course Reserves: School/Divisions - Associates the organizations (branches) with the academic schools or divisions for which the branches handle course reserves.
    • +
    +

    You can add, change, or delete items from the course reserves tables at the system, library, or branch levels.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to work with Course Reserve tables: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify Reserve Tables: Allow.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Up_Course_Reserves.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Up_Course_Reserves.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..01097a07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPcourse/Setting_Up_Course_Reserves.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Course Reserves + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Course Reserves

    +

    Your Polaris system may include course reserve functions to serve an academic community. With these features, you can place materials on reserve for use in a class during a semester or term. Reserve materials can be drawn from the regular collection, instructors may bring in personal material to be placed on reserve, or the materials may be temporary items such as photocopies. Course reserve records store information about the courses for which items are placed on reserve.

    +

    Polaris handles the reserved items through reserve item “records,” which are views of Polaris item records for materials placed on reserve. The reserve item record carries its own circulation parameters, which may be different from those in effect if an item is taken off reserve and returned to the circulating collection. Circulation statistics for reserve items are also kept separately. Staff and patrons can search for reserve materials from the staff client and the PAC.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, you set up course reserve data tables that supply the options for fields such as course name, school, department, and term dates in the course reserve record. Additional course reserve parameters enable course reserve functions, and control the default settings for reserve item records.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris course reserve functions are available by specific contract. If your Polaris installation does not include Polaris course reserves, the features described in this unit are not available.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fee_description_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fee_description_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffa66c63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fee_description_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a fee description entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a fee description entry

    +

    To add a fee description to the Fee Descriptions policy table:

    +

    Note:
    Check existing descriptions before you add a new one. You cannot delete duplicate descriptions.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Fee Descriptions. The Fee Descriptions table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    In the Fee Descriptions table, ID numbers preceded by a minus sign are supplied by the system and used in system processes.

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00493.gif to display the Insert Fee Descriptions dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dFeeDescriptDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type text describing the type of fee in the Fee Description box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box. The Fee Descriptions policy table appears with the new fee description name. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry, click ModIcon00494.gif, and change the description.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Any changes to an existing fee description are immediately applied to all records using the original fee. Descriptions should be maintained as is for accounting purposes, as long as charges using a description are kept on the patron records or are assigned an amount.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_amount.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_amount.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8eafdcf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_amount.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a fine amount + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a fine amount

    +

    To add a fine amount to the Fines policy table:

    +

    Note:
    The default fine amount, default maximum fine, and default grace period are set with the Patron Services parameter Fine and Loan period defaults, and when you add a new fine code the default value is used until you change it. If for some reason a fine amount cannot be calculated, the setting for the system-level parameter Undefined Fine Amount is used. This setting is also used automatically when a new organization or patron code is added to the table.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Fines. The Fines table is displayed.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00491.gif to display the Insert Fines dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select the organization for which you are assigning the fine in the Organization box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Fines policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the patron code for the fine amount in the Patron Code box.
    2. +
    3. Select a fine name in the Fine Code box to associate with the patron code shown in the Patron Code box. The options available in the Fine Code box depend on the organization you selected. See Setting Fine Codes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If a relationship between the patron code and fine code cannot be found in the Fine Code policy table, Polaris uses the setting in the Patron Services parameter Undefined fine amount, which is set at the system level. The default value is $5.00. This value is also used to automatically populate the table if a new branch or patron code is added.

    +
      +
    1. In the Amount box, type the amount of money to fine for a single loan period unit for the item.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    The loan period unit for a certain type of item is daily. To set up a fine of 10 cents per day, type $0.10 in the Amount box.

    +

    Loan period units are defined in the Loan Period policy table. See Defining Loan Period Durations. Polaris uses the loan period unit for which an item was charged and the value you put in the Amount box to calculate the fine.

    +
      +
    1. In the Maximum Fine box, type the total amount that can be fined for items associated with this fine description and charged to the selected patron code.
    2. +
    3. In the Grace Units box, type the number of loan period units allowed for an overdue item before Polaris begins calculating a fine.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The actual time specified by the Grace Units setting depends on the loan period unit used when the item was checked out. For example, if the item is checked out for 14 days and the grace unit is 1, then the grace period is one day. Any items returned the day after they were due are not charged an overdue fine. A grace period of 0 means that items must be returned by the end of the date they are due. Otherwise, overdue charges apply. Loan period units are defined in the Loan Period policy table.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK in the dialog box. The Fines policy table appears with the new fine name. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_code.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_code.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0edaf9e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Add_a_fine_code.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a fine code + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a fine code

    +

    To add a fine code in the Fine Codes policy table:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Fine Codes. The Fine Codes table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Fine Codes dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + dFinCodDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type text describing the fine code in the Description box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box. The Fine Codes policy table appears with the new fine code name. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    6. +
    +

    The status bar indicates that the record is saved. The new fine code is available to all organizations and appears in the Fines table. See Setting Fine Amounts. Default fine amounts, maximum fine amounts, and grace periods for new fine codes are set with the Patron Services parameter Fine and Loan period defaults.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Modify a table entry - Select the entry, click ModIcon.gif, and change the description.

    +

    Important:
    Any changes to an existing fine code are immediately applied to all records using the original code.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Calculating_Overdue_Fines.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Calculating_Overdue_Fines.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a355ac6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Calculating_Overdue_Fines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Calculating Overdue Fines + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Calculating Overdue Fines

    +

    Overdue fines are calculated when the item is checked in and the check-in date/time is past the due date/time. Ordinarily, for daily and weekly loans, a fine is calculated if an item is returned the day following the due date. The patron has until the end of the due date to return the book, even if the check-out time was early in the day. For hourly loans, a fine is calculated according to the exact time due. The Fines policy table associates patron codes with fine codes to determine the fine for the overdue item (see Setting Fine Amounts).

    +

    Note:
    If no fine can be determined in the Fines table, a message at check-in indicates that the fine cannot be calculated. The check-in clerk can set a fine manually, using the Overdue Amount box on the Resolve Billed Item dialog box, or by adding an entry in the Patron Status workform - Account view for the patron.

    +

    Fine calculations are also affected by dates closed, days designated as not fineable, free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation., and grace periods.

    +

    Dates Closed

    +

    For each organization, the Dates Closed policy table defines specific closed dates that fall when the organization might otherwise be open. Identifying Dates Closed You specify which branch’s entries in this table are used in fine calculation with the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation. For details, see Defining Fines and Fees.

    +

    Example:
    A library designates January 1 as a closed date. If an item is returned to that library on January 2, 2017, fines are not charged for January 1, based by default on the setting for the receiving branch (and regardless of the setting for the item’s assigned branch).

    +

    Important:
    The system uses dates defined at the system or library level if none are defined for the governing branch. For consistent results, you may want to leave the Dates Closed policy table empty at the system and library levels and set dates only at the branch level, or set the same dates at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    Days Not Fineable

    +

    You can designate specific days of the week as not fineable with the Patron Services parameter Days not fineable. You can set this parameter at the system, library, or branch level. You specify which branch’s setting for this parameter is used in fine calculation with the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation (see Defining Fines and Fees).

    +

    Example:
    A library designates Sunday as a “day not fineable” because the library is closed. If an item is due on Saturday and returned at the branch on Monday, fines are not charged for Sunday, based by default on the setting for the receiving branch (and regardless of the setting for the item’s assigned branch). No Sunday is calculated in a fine. For a book seven days overdue, the fine is calculated for six days because Sunday is not counted. For a book 14 days overdue, the fine is calculated for 12 days.

    +

    Important:
    The system uses days defined at the system or library level if none are defined for the governing branch. For consistent results, you may want to leave the Days not fineable parameter set to None at the system and library levels and set days only at the branch level, or set the same days at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    Free Days

    +

    Free days are omitted from the overdue fine calculation during normal, bulk, or offline check in, and are typically set to cover unexpected closings. Libraries that allow items to be returned to non-Polaris libraries may find this feature especially useful; using the Free Days calendar control, staff can pick the date the item was returned at the non-Polaris library and the correct number of Free Days is automatically applied. The following Patron Services parameters control free days; you can set them at the system, library, and branch levels:

    +

    Note:
    The governing library for fine calculation setting does not affect the free days parameters. The system always uses the free days settings of the receiving branch.

    +
      +
    • Free days (normal) - Determines the default number of free days for normal check in. Staff members with the appropriate permission can change the setting at normal check in (Check In workform - Normal view) using the Free days box or calendar on the workform. The new setting applies to the current check-in session.
    • +
    • Free days (bulk) - Determines the number of default days for bulk and offline check-in. This setting also applies to check in or renewal from the Patron Status workform - Items out view, the item record, Find Tool, and during check out when an item already checked out to one patron is checked out to another. Staff members with the appropriate permission can change the setting at bulk check in (Check In workform - Bulk view) and when uploading offline transaction files (Bookmobile workform) through the Free days box or calendar on these workforms. The new setting applies to the current check in or offline upload session, and does not affect check in from any other workform or the Find Tool.
    • +
    +

    When an item is billed and declared lost, no free days are applied to the overdue fine calculation.

    +

    A check-in transaction subtype indicates how many free days were applied when the item was checked in. Also, if the patron was charged overdue fines when the item was checked in, the Properties dialog box for the charge in the patron account shows how many free days were applied and the amount that was deducted for the free days. To open the dialog box, right-click the charge in the Patron Status workform - Account view.

    +

    Grace Periods

    +

    A grace period allows a patron to return an item just a little late without incurring a fine. The item is still marked as overdue in the patron record. Grace periods are set in association with specific patron code/item fine code combinations in the Fines policy table. For more information, see Setting Fine Amounts. A grace period differs from free days in that free days are omitted from the overdue fine calculation no matter when the item is checked in, whereas if an item is checked in after a grace period, the fine is calculated from the day or hour after the item due time.

    +

    Example:
    If an item is checked out at 10:12 A.M. on Monday and circulates for a week, it becomes overdue at 12:00 A.M. on Tuesday (one minute after 11:59 P.M. on Monday). There is one grace day. Due to the grace period, the patron is not charged an overdue fine if the item is returned on or before 11:59 P.M. on Tuesday. If the item is returned after 11:59 P.M. on Tuesday, the patron is charged for one day overdue.

    +

    You can optionally include closed days and dates in your system’s grace period calculations. Set the system-level Patron Services parameter Overdues: Add closed days/dates to grace days to Yes to include these in the calculation. The default setting is No.

    +

    If you set the option to Yes, and the grace period includes one or more “days closed” as defined in the Patron Services parameter Hours of Operation or “closed dates” as defined in the Dates Closed policy table according to the governing library for fine calculation, the grace period will be extended by the number of closed days or dates. For example, if the number of grace days is 2 and if Sunday is a closed day, no fine will be assessed if the item is due on Friday and returned on Monday. But if Overdues: Add closed days/dates to grace days is set to No (the default value), only the two grace days, Saturday and Sunday, would be considered, and the fine would be assessed if returned on Monday.

    +

    Important:
    The Free Days setting and the calculation of the actual fine amount are not affected by setting Overdues: Add closed days/dates to grace days to Yes. The grace period exempts the patron from the fine, but if grace days are exceeded, the fine is calculated as if there were no grace period.

    +

    Waiving Fines Automatically at Circulation

    +

    Two system-level Patron Services parameters control whether fines are waived automatically when items are recovered at circulation. To automatically waive the fine if an overdue item is found during check-out, set Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at check-out to Yes. To automatically waive the fine if the patron is renewing an overdue item, set Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at renewal to Yes. Both parameters are set to No by default. (These settings also apply to SIP self-check units.)

    +

    Note:
    Separate settings control how overdue fines for lost items are handled. See Overdue Fines on Lost Items.

    +

    Charging Fines Automatically at Check In

    +

    The Patron Services parameter Check in: auto-charge fine from item work form and find tool context menu, controls whether overdue fines are automatically charged to the patron account when overdue items are checked in from the Item workform, the Find Tool context menu, or the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch levels and is set to Yes by default.

    +

    When the parameter is set to Yes and an overdue item is checked in, the fine is automatically charged to the patron account. If the overdue item can fill an active hold request, the hold request message appears and the staff member takes action on the hold request message. (When the parameter is set to Yes and a billed item is checked in, the Resolve lost/billed item dialog box appears, the staff member resolves the billed charges, and the item is checked in. If the billed item can fill a request, the hold request message appears before the Resolve lost/billed item dialog box. The staff member takes action on the hold request message first.)

    +

    If the parameter is set to No, the Check In - Fine dialog box appears when the item is overdue, and the staff member resolves the fine accordingly. However, if the item can fill a hold request, the hold request message always appears first.

    +

    Fines for Claimed Items

    +

    A system-level Patron Services parameter controls whether fines are charged if an overdue item with a status of Claimed Returned or Claimed Never Had is checked in or checked out. To automatically waive overdue fines for these items at circulation, set Overdues: Charge fines for claimed items to No. This setting waives fines for overdue claimed items found at renewal, normal and offline check in and check out, and Polaris ExpressCheck check out. The parameter is set to Yes by default.

    +

    Setting a Maximum Overdue Fine Balance

    +

    If your library policy is that overdue fines cannot accrue over a certain dollar amount in the patron overdue fine balance, you can set a limit. See: Setting a Maximum Overdue Fine Balance Limit.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Charging_for_Checkout_and_Renewal.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Charging_for_Checkout_and_Renewal.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8231ea26 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Charging_for_Checkout_and_Renewal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ + + + + + + + + Charging for Checkout and Renewal + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Charging for Checkout and Renewal

    +

    You can charge patrons for checking out items of specified material types and optionally charge for renewing them, or charge only for renewal. You can also choose to waive the charge for certain patron codes. The charge policy is applied according to the settings of item’s assigned branch. Your renewal settings also apply to Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC and renewals made through inbound telephony. Separate settings determine how the charge policy affects transactions at Polaris ExpressCheck and SIP self-check workstations.

    +

    Staff Client Transactions

    +

    For staff client transactions, you can optionally display a prompt regarding charges during checkout and renewal as appropriate. You might also consider placing physical labels on your chargeable items so that patrons know there is a charge before they reach the circulation desk.

    +

    When a chargeable item is scanned at check-out or selected for renewal, the system first checks for item blocks, holds, and patron item limits. Then, if you have set the system to display a prompt, a Patron check-out charge dialog box is displayed.

    +

    The staff member can choose to charge the patron’s account and continue the check-out, pay the charge, waive the charge, or cancel the transaction. The appropriate permissions are required to pay or waive the charge. If the staff member chooses to pay the charge, a standard Pay dialog box is displayed. The Charge for Check-out dialog box also appears during bulk check-out of Borrow by Mail or Outreach Services items. If you have chosen not to display the prompt, the charge is automatically applied to the patron account. Check-out charges are not listed on the check-out receipt. If the same item is checked out again to the same patron before the library closes, the patron is not charged again.

    +

    If the item's assigned branch has options set to charge for renewals and charge for overdues, the Renew chargeable overdue item dialog box opens when you renew an overdue item.

    +

    + +

    +

    When a chargeable item is checked out offline, the charge is applied to the patron account and a message is written to the upload log file.

    +

    Note:
    In systems that use floating collections, the chargeable settings for an item change as the item’s assigned branch changes.

    +

    The Patron Status workform - Account view lists check-out charges. The organization listed with the charge is the item’s assigned branch. The charges are also listed on the PAC My Account - Fines & Fees page.

    +

    PAC Display

    +
      +
    • Item availability display - The PAC item availability display includes an icon DollarIcon.gif next to an item if the item’s assigned branch has defined the item’s material type as chargeable.
    • +
    • Courtesy message for hold requests - When a patron places a bibliographic-level hold request in PAC, and at least one item eligible to fill the request would incur a check-out charge, a courtesy message is displayed. Note that the request may actually be filled by a non-chargeable item, depending on which items trap for the request. If after the request is placed new items become available from a branch that does not charge for checkout, or holds policies change, the message may no longer be accurate. It is a courtesy message only. You can edit the message in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin):
      • For PowerPAC, the default message is If your request is filled you may be charged to check out the item according to the policy of the library owning the item. Do you want to place this request? The Polaris Language Editor string ID is PACML_CHARGECKOREQ.
      • For Mobile PAC, the default message is If your request is filled you may be charged to check out the item according to the policy of the library owning the item. Do you want to place this request? The Polaris Language Editor string ID is MP_MSG_HOLDS_CHARGE_WARNING.
    • +
    +

    Renewing Items From PAC

    +

    If renewing an item is chargeable according to the settings of the item’s assigned branch, a message is displayed when the patron attempts to renew the item from the patron account. The patron can choose whether to continue or cancel the renewal. The default messages can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin).

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    PowerPAC String ID

    +
    +

    Default Message

    +
    +

    PACML_CHARGE_RENEW

    +
    +

    There is a charge to renew this item.

    +
    +

    PACML_CHARGE_RENEW_MULTIPLE

    +
    +

    There is a charge to renew the following items.

    +
    +

    PACML_RENEWITEMS_1347

    +
    +

    If you renew these items your account will be charged

    +
    +

    PACML_RENEWITEMS_1348

    +
    +

    To accept these charges and continue with the renewal, press 'OK'.

    +
    +

    PACML_RENEWITEMS_1349

    +
    +

    Your account has been charged.

    +
    +

    Mobile PAC String ID

    +
    +

    Default Message

    +
    +

    MP_MSG_ITEMSOUT_CHECKOUT_CHARGE_
    WARNING

    +
    +

    There is a charge of {0} to renew this item.  Your account will be charged. Do you want to accept this charge?

    +
    +

    MP_MSG_ITEMSOUT_CHECKOUT_CHARGE

    +
    +

    Your account has been charged.

    +
    +

    Phone Renewal

    +

    The Polaris Phone Attendant also supports charges for item renewals, according to the policies of the item’s assigned branch. The patron is notified of any renewal charges and prompted to accept them. If both overdue and renewal charges will be applied, the notification is combined in a single message. If the patron chooses to renew all items at once (option #6), a status message informs the patron that the “renew all” process is underway, since the process may take a few seconds to gather information. In Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), the following language strings define these messages:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    String ID +

    +
    +

    Default Message +

    +
    +

    PA_TEXT_PATREC_RENEWITEMS_CHARGE

    +
    +

    Your account will be charged $%3.2f to renew these items.

    +
    +

    PA_TEXT_PATREC_RENEWITEM_CHARGE

    +
    +

    Your account will be charged $%3.2f to renew this item.

    +
    +

    PA_TEXT_PATREC_RENEWITEM_OVDANDCHARGES

    +
    +

    Overdue and renewal charges will apply. Your account will be charged $%3.2f.

    +
    +

    PA_TEXT_PATREC_RENEW_WAIT

    +
    +

    Please wait while we process your renewals.

    +
    +

    See also: Set up charges for checkout and renewal

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fee_Descriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fee_Descriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..baddfd90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fee_Descriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Fee Descriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Fee Descriptions

    +

    Fees are charges that are unrelated to overdue fines. The Fee Descriptions policy table defines and standardizes fee descriptions. Entries in this policy table display as selections on workform views and dialog boxes where you deal with patron charges, such as the Reason list from which you can select a fee reason when adding a charge to a patron's account.

    +

    + ReasonList.gif +

    +

    The Fee Descriptions policy table can be displayed only with the Administration Explorer. All organizations in a Polaris installation must agree on the fee descriptions. You can add and change entries in the Fee Descriptions policy table, but you cannot delete them.

    +

    Fee descriptions are created at the system and library levels, but the entries are assigned to the system. At the branch level, you can set which reasons are displayed to branch staff for selection and edit the description display text. You can also determine the order of the selections displayed. Some libraries prefer alphabetical order; others prefer to put the most commonly used selections first.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table:Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify fee descriptions table: Allow.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fines_and_Fees.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fines_and_Fees.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fbc028ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Defining_Fines_and_Fees.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Fines and Fees + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Fines and Fees

    +

    Administration tables and parameters, combined with settings in the item and patron records, control how fines are calculated. The Administration settings are established when Polaris is first installed, but you can change them when a library or branch is added to the system, or when lending policies change. Polaris Administration tables define patron codes and item fine codes, and determine the relationship between them. Patron codes and fine codes are shared by all libraries to make circulation consistent throughout the system. However, each branch in the system can establish different policies concerning fines for specific combinations of patron and item fine codes. If an item is overdue at check in, the fine is automatically calculated based on these settings and posted to the patron’s account. You can also set Polaris to waive fines automatically for items recovered at check out or renewal.

    +

    Important:
    You set which branch’s policies are used in fine calculation with the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation.

    +

    Note:
    Set the criteria that determine due dates before you set up fines.

    +

    The library may also define fees that are unrelated to fines. For example, you may charge patrons for hold requests, equipment rental, damaged or lost items, and checkout and renewal for certain types of items. In Polaris Administration, you set up the fee descriptions at the system level, and at the branch level determine which reasons are displayed to staff for selection. You can also set up default replacement and processing fee amounts for items the library does not expect to recover, and how to handle overdue charges on lost items. Additional settings control how the charges associated with lost items are processed when the items are recovered at circulation.

    +

    If your library policy limits the amount that can be accrued for overdue fines, you can use a system-level parameter to specify a dollar limit on the overdue fine balance. When an overdue fine limit is set, the overdue fine balance in all patron accounts never exceeds this limit.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Overdue_Fines_on_Lost_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Overdue_Fines_on_Lost_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0fcf57bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Overdue_Fines_on_Lost_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Overdue Fines on Lost Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overdue Fines on Lost Items

    +

    An item may be declared lost in the following situations:

    +
      +
    • A patron notifies the library that a checked-out item is lost. Then a staff member manually declares the item lost.
    • +
    • Billed items may be declared lost automatically, a system-level decision.  (If they are not automatically declared lost, a staff member may manually declare a billed item lost.)
    • +
    +

    The Patron Services parameter Lost item charge options determines how overdue fines are handled at the time an item is billed and automatically set to lost, or when a staff member declares the item lost.

    +

    Most options controlled by the Lost item charge options parameter are available at the system, library, and branch levels. The governing library setting for fine calculation determines which library’s settings rule lost item charges. For more information about governing library settings, see Governing Library for Circulation Transactions.

    +

    Settings for Lost Item Charge Options

    +

    The Lost item charge options parameter offers the following settings:

    +
      +
    • Overdues: billed items set to lost - System level only. Setting the item status to Lost at the time the item is billed will ensure the most consistent results for lost item recovery. However, leave this option unchecked if libraries in your system prefer to declare the item lost manually.
    • +
    • Charge overdue with bill - For best results, check this option if it is available (not grayed out). When this option is selected, the overdue charge is included in the bill regardless of whether the billed items are set to lost. If you prefer not to charge overdues with the bill, select the option Charge overdue when returned. The replacement fee and optional processing fee will still be billed. If your library has set a system-wide limit for the maximum fine balance, it is recommended that you do not select this option.
    • +
    • Charge overdue when declared lost - Like Charge overdue with bill, this option is available only if Charge overdue when returned is not set. For best results, check this option if it is available.  If the library does not charge overdues when items go to Lost as a matter of policy, the option Charge overdue when returned should be checked instead.
    • +
    • Charge overdue when returned - Select this option if the library policy is to charge the overdue fine only if and when the lost item is returned. If you select this option but do not set Overdues: billed items set to lost, the library charges the overdue fine when a lost item is recovered but does not assume an item is lost until the patron comes in and says he cannot find it. In this situation, you will see the following effects:
      • No automatic lost item recovery options are possible because the item’s status is not Lost.
      • The patron is billed for the replacement cost and optional processing fee. However, the overdue fine remains uncharged and unresolved.
      • If the patron brings the item back, a staff member checks the item in and waives the replacement and optional processing fees. The overdue fine is calculated at that time and the staff member pays, waives, or charges the overdue fine.
      • If the patron says he cannot find the item, the staff member declares the item lost on the Patron Status workform - Items out view, then pays, waives or leaves the replacement and optional processing fees; the overdue is calculated at that time. The item is now lost, so lost item recovery options may apply (see Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults). (If the staff member does not declare the item lost, it stays out to the patron until checked in and the overdue fine is calculated at that time.)
    • +
    +

    Policy Decisions for Lost Item Charge Options

    +

    Different combinations of settings reflect your library’s policy:

    +
      +
    • If you want to include overdue fines with the bill, and billed items are automatically set to lost, select (check) the following options:
      • Overdues: billed items set to lost (system level only)
      • Charge overdue with bill
      • Charge overdue when declared lost
    • +
    +
      +
    • If you want to include overdue fines with the bill, and billed items are not automatically set to lost, select (check) the following options:
      • Charge overdue with bill - This option should not be selected if your library specifies a maximum overdue fine balance amount.
      • Charge overdue when declared lost
    • +
    +
      +
    • If you want to charge overdue fines when an item is returned, and billed items are not automatically set to lost, select (check) Charge overdue when returned.
    • +
    +
      +
    • If you want to charge overdue fines when an item is returned, and billed items are automatically set to lost, select (check) the following options:
      • Overdues: billed items set to lost (system level only)
      • Charge overdue when returned
    • +
    +

    See also: Set lost item charge options

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_a_maximum_overdue_fine_balance.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_a_maximum_overdue_fine_balance.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2cebaed --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_a_maximum_overdue_fine_balance.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Setting a Maximum Overdue Fine Balance Limit + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting a Maximum Overdue Fine Balance Limit

    +

    You can use the System-level Patron Services parameter Overdues: maximum overdue fine balance to define a maximum amount for overdue fine balances so that patron accounts never exceed a certain dollar amount for overdue fines. By default, this parameter is disabled (set at $0.00). To enable this parameter, the amount must be set above $0.00. Once enabled, the maximum overdue fine balance is applied at the System level–to all patron accounts for all branches.

    +

    When a maximum overdue fine balance amount greater than zero is entered in the parameter, the system checks the total current overdue fine balance in patrons' accounts before adding overdue fines. As each overdue item is checked in or renewed, the patron's account is charged the overdue fine until the total current balance reaches the dollar amount limit defined in the parameter. Once the limit is reached, fines for subsequent overdue items are not added to the patron's account.

    +

    If a dollar amount is entered in the parameter, the threshold is checked when overdue fines are assessed during check-ins or renewals from: the Polaris staff client; self-check units (Polaris ExpressCheck and SIP); Leap; PowerPAC (renewals); and the Polaris API.

    +

    Note: +
    When enabled, this parameter sets the maximum dollar amount for total current overdue fines only. The limit is applied to a patron's account at check in or renewal; it does not apply to manually-added charges, replacement costs or other fees.

    +

    To set a maximum overdue fine balance amount for all patron accounts in your library system:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the System.
    2. +
    3. Click the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Overdues: Maximum overdue fine balance, and type a dollar amount.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the setting.
    2. +
    +

    Notes: +
    If your library specifies a maximum overdue fine balance amount, it is recommended that charges for overdue fines are not included on bills for lost items. This is because the overdue fine amount reflected on the bill may not be accurate. See Settings for Lost Item Charge Options.
    In addition, when a maximum overdue fine balance is set, the overdue fine amounts displayed in the Estimated Fines dialog box may not be the same as the actual amounts calculated at check-in or renewal. See t.Estimate fines on currently checked out items

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_fee_descriptions_for_branch-level_display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_fee_descriptions_for_branch-level_display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a393ffa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_fee_descriptions_for_branch-level_display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set fee descriptions for branch-level display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set fee descriptions for branch-level display

    +

    Fee descriptions are displayed to staff for selection when the staff member adds a charge to the patron account.

    +

    To set the fee descriptions that should display to staff at a specific branch, edit the descriptions, and determine the order of entries in the fee reason list:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, open the Policy Tables folder for the branch, and select Fee Descriptions. The Fee Descriptions table (branch-level version) is displayed in the details view. At the branch level, the table displays a Selected column, indicating whether an entry is displayed for staff selection, and a Sequence column, indicating the entry’s position on the list of reasons.
    2. +
    3. To change an entry’s display setting, select the entry and click ModIcon00495.gif or double-click the entry. For example, if the branch does not use Borrow by Mail, you may want to suppress Borrow by mail charge from display in the fee reasons list.
    4. +
    +

    The Modify fee descriptions dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes or No in the Selected box to display or suppress the fee reason.
    2. +
    3. To modify the description, type the new description in the Fee Description box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The modified description is displayed only at the branch for which you made the setting. It is not changed at the system level.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    3. To move an entry up or down in the selection list, select the entry and click the up or down arrow at the top of the table.
    4. +
    +

    + FeeDescripOrd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_lost_item_charge_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_lost_item_charge_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6988671 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_lost_item_charge_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set lost item charge options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set lost item charge options

    +

    To set whether billed items are automatically set to Lost (system level only), and how to handle overdue charges on billed and lost items:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Lost item charge options to display the Lost item charge options dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + LostItemOps.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    See Policy Decisions for Lost Item Charge Options for suggested combinations of settings in this dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. (System level only) Select (check) Overdues: billed items set to lost to make the status of billed items automatically set to Lost.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Set this parameter to Yes if you use collection agency services. This ensures that if a lost item is recovered, the system reports the recovery correctly.

    +
      +
    1. To charge overdue fines when an item’s status changes to lost, select  one or both of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Charge overdue with bill - If Overdues: billed items set to lost is selected for the system, when the billed item’s status automatically changes to Lost the overdue charge is placed on the patron account, along with other appropriate charges related to lost items (see Setting Replacement Fee Defaults). If Overdues: billed items set to lost is not selected for the system, the billed item’s status remains Out. The overdue charge and any other charges related to billed items are placed on the patron account.
    • +
    • Charge overdue when declared lost - Select (check) this option to charge overdue fines to the patron account when an item is declared lost by a staff member.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    When Charge overdue when returned is selected, replacement costs are charged immediately when the item’s status changes to Lost, but not overdue fines. If your library uses a collection agency, the patron would be reported only for the total replacement costs. (However, any overdue fines already owed would be included in the collection agency calculation.)

    +
      +
    1. To charge overdue fines to the patron account when a lost item is recovered at circulation, instead of when the item’s status changes to Lost, select Charge overdue when returned.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Charge overdue with bill, Charge overdue when declared lost, or both, this option is unavailable.

    +

    Libraries that use this option typically charge any replacement and processing fees to the patron when the item’s status changes to Lost, but not overdue charges. If the item is recovered, replacement and processing fees are then waived or credited (if already paid), the overdue fine is calculated up to the point when the item was returned, up to the maximum fine amount, and the overdue charge is placed on the patron account.

    +

    Important:
    If you select Charge overdue when returned, set the Lost item recovery parameter for lost-and-paid items to Charge for overdues. See Set the lost item recovery default actions.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_lost_item_recovery_default_actions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_lost_item_recovery_default_actions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd6fbcb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_lost_item_recovery_default_actions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the lost item recovery default actions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the lost item recovery default actions

    +

    To set the automatic actions for resolving the charges associated with lost items when they are recovered at circulation:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view. To see the patron services parameters list, select the appropriate level - System, Library, Branch.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Lost item recovery to display the Lost Item Recovery Options dialog box. The dialog box opens with the Lost Item Recovery tab selected.
    4. +
    +

    + LostItemRecovery.gif 

    +
      +
    1. On the Lost Item Recovery tabbed page, set the processing defaults that should apply when lost items are recovered at circulation, but the charges related to the items have not been paid or waived:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Default action if recovered in fields, specify the maximum time period for which automatic changes to the patron account should apply. For any specific item, the period you specify is measured from the point when the item was declared lost. The maximum numerical value is 999 (months or years).
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    This feature depends on the availability of patron ID information. If your organization purges patron ID information from transactions after a set period of time, be sure to coordinate the settings so that the patron ID is available if the lost item is recovered within the time period you specify. See Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check box for each circulation situation (normal check in, bulk check in, and check out) where you want to charge or waive lost item fees automatically.
    2. +
    +

    If a lost item is recovered in one of the circulation situations you selected before the time specified in the Default action if recovered in fields, fees are charged or waived automatically according to your settings. If the item is recovered after the specified time, the circulation transaction continues but no changes are made to the patron account.

    +

    If you do not select a circulation situation, automatic processing is not applied, and staff members must resolve the charges when a lost item is recovered in that situation. Resolve a lost-and-unpaid item at circulation.

    +
      +
    1. For each circulation situation that you checked, select the automatic action to take for each fee (Overdue fine, Processing fee, and Replacement cost):
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Charge - This option leaves the charge related to the lost item unchanged in the patron account.
    • +
    • Waive - This option waives the charge in the patron account. For overdues, the charge is placed in the patron account and then automatically waived.
    • +
    +

    The patron’s Account Transaction Summary will be updated according to the action you specify.

    +

    Note:
    For more information about setting replacement costs and processing fees, see Setting Replacement Fee Defaults.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Lost-and-paid recovery tab, and set the processing defaults that should apply when lost items are recovered at circulation, and the charges related to the items have already been paid.
    2. +
    +

    + LostandPaidRecovery.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Default action if recovered in fields, specify the maximum time period for which automatic processing should apply. For any specific item, the period you specify is measured from the point when the item was declared lost. The maximum numerical value is 999 (months or years).
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    This feature depends on the availability of patron ID information. If your organization purges patron ID information from transactions after a set period of time, be sure to coordinate the settings so that the patron ID is available if the lost item is recovered within the time period you specify. See Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check box for each circulation situation (normal check-in, bulk check-in, and check-out) where you want to credit lost item fees or leave them as is automatically.
    2. +
    +

    If a lost item is recovered before the time specified in the Default action if recovered in fields, in one of the circulation situations you selected, payments are credited or left as is automatically according to your settings. If the item is recovered after the specified time, the circulation transaction continues but no changes are made to the patron account.

    +

    If you do not select a circulation situation, automatic processing is not applied, and staff members must resolve the account when a lost item is recovered in that situation. Resolve a lost-and-unpaid item at circulation.

    +
      +
    1. For each circulation situation that you checked, select the automatic action to take for each fee (Overdue fine, Processing fee, and Replacement cost):
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Charge - For overdue fines only. This option charges overdue fines to the patron’s account calculated from when the item went overdue to the day it was recovered. Libraries that set the Lost item: Charge overdue when returned parameter (see Set lost item charge options) typically charge any replacement and processing fees to the patron when the item’s status changes to Lost, but not overdue charges. If the item is recovered, replacement and processing fees are then waived or credited (if already paid), the overdue fine is calculated up to the point when the item was returned, up to the maximum fine amount, and the overdue charge is placed on the patron account.
    • +
    • Credit - This option credits the patron’s account for the payment amount related to the lost item. If an amount was partially paid, the paid amount is credited and the unpaid balance is waived. For payments made by credit card:
      • PayPal PayFlow Link - A “dummy” refund is created instead of a credit. The refund will appear as a refund in the Polaris patron account and a refund transaction created. This transaction is available for reporting in the Refunds to Credit Card Payments report . You can use the report to cross-check transactions logged in Payflow Link. (Note that the refund must also be made from Payflow Link.) Instead of automatically crediting the patron’s account, you may want to set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to Leave as is. With this setting, the payments remain in the Polaris patron account and the refund or credit can be done from Payflow Link.
      • PayPal Payflow Pro - Polaris issues a refund to the credit card account.
      • Payments Gateway - A "dummy" refund is created instead of a credit. The refund will appear as a refund in the Polaris patron account and a refund transaction created. This transaction is available for reporting in the Refunds to Credit Card Payments report. You can use the report to cross-check transactions logged in the Virtual Terminal. (Note that the refund must also be made from the Virtual Terminal.) Instead of automatically crediting the patron’s account, you may want to set the lost-and-paid item recovery options to Leave as is. With this setting, the payments remain in the Polaris patron account and the refund or credit can be done from Payments Gateway. Or your library may choose to disable all automatic recovery actions, forcing staff to create manual refunds when a lost-and-paid item is recovered.
      • Comprise SmartPay - Automatic credits are not supported. The payment is left as is.
      • EnvisionWare (integrated) - Automatic credits are not supported. The payment is left as is.
    • +
    • Leave as is - This option leaves the transactions related to the lost item unchanged in the patron account.
    • +
    +

    The patron’s Account Transaction Summary will be updated according to the action you specify.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Separate settings control whether overdue fines are charged when an item is declared lost, when an item’s status is automatically changed to lost when it is billed, or when a lost item is recovered at circulation. See Overdue Fines on Lost Items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_replacement_charge_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_replacement_charge_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..192d35f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_the_replacement_charge_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the replacement charge defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the replacement charge defaults

    +

    To set the defaults for item replacement charges:

    +
      +
    1.  In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Replacement fee options to display the Replacement Fee Defaults dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    + dReplacFeeDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Choose how replacement charges should be calculated:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To use the original purchase price (if specified in the item record), click Use item record price field or default. If the original purchase price is not available for the calculation, the value specified in the Replacement cost field for the material type is used.
    • +
    • To always use the replacement cost for the material type, and ignore actual purchase prices, click Use defaults only.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the original purchase price is specified in the item record as $0.00 (the item was free), no replacement cost is charged.

    +
      +
    1. For each material type, in the Replacement Cost field, type the standard replacement value that is specified by library policy.
    2. +
    3. For each material type, in the Processing Fee box, type the amount to charge a patron for processing a replacement item.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_up_charges_for_checkout_and_renewal.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_up_charges_for_checkout_and_renewal.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..230b7ee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Set_up_charges_for_checkout_and_renewal.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up charges for checkout and renewal + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up charges for checkout and renewal

    +

    To set up charges for checkout and renewal:

    +
      +
    1. Enable the fee description in Polaris Administration:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Open the Fee Descriptions policy table for the organization that is setting up check-out or renewal charge policies.
    2. +
    3. Set the fee description Item charge for check-out/renewal to Yes. This setting displays the fee description on views and dialog boxes that list charges on the patron account. The charge transactions are logged with the Fee Description code -11. They are included in all Polaris toolbar reports of charge transactions and are available for reporting in Polaris SimplyReports.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    For more information about working with this table, see Defining Fee Descriptions.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Patron Services parameter Check-out: Charge options to enable the charge and specify the appropriate material types, charge amounts, and patron codes.
    2. +
    +

    The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch levels. To see the patron services parameters list, click the appropriate level- System, Library, Branch.

    +

    The Check Out: Charge options dialog box opens.

    +

    + ChargeDX.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) a material type to which a check-out charge should be applied.
    4. +
    5. Specify the amount to be charged for the selected material type and click Apply.
    6. +
    +

    You can also click several material types or Select All, specify a single amount, and click Apply.

    +

    Note:
    It is possible to select a material type and leave the amount at $0.00, or to set an amount for a selected material type and then uncheck that material type. In either case, no charge will be applied.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) the patron codes that should be charged the specified check-out charges. You can also click Select All.
    2. +
    3. Select one option for applying charges:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Check-out only - Apply the charge only at check-out
    • +
    • Check-out and Renewal - Apply the charge at check-out and again if the item is renewed
    • +
    • Renewal only - Apply the charge only when the item is renewed
    • +
    +
      +
    1. If you want a message to appear when a staff member attempts to check out or renew a chargeable item to a patron, select (check) Prompt in Staff Client. For this option, the system uses the setting of the transacting workstation’s log-on branch.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Polaris ExpressCheck transactions - Your charge policies also apply to checkout and renewal from Polaris ExpressCheck. You can choose to allow the transactions and have the patron’s account charged appropriately when the transactions occur, or stop the transactions and display a message. The option is available in the SelfCheck unit parameter Polaris ExpressCheck: Blocking conditions (Item Blocks tabbed page). For more information, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.
    • +
    • SIP Self-Check transactions - Your charge policies also apply to checkout and renewal from SIP self-check units. You can choose to allow checkout and have the patron’s account charged appropriately when the transactions occur, allow renewal and have the patron’s account charged, automatically charge when the patron chooses to renew all items out, or stop the transactions and display a message. For more information, see Setting Up SIP Self-Check Circulation.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Amounts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Amounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab1ca73c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Amounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Fine Amounts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Fine Amounts

    +

    Fine amounts are set based on the patron code of the person being charged and the fine code assigned to the item. You can specify a different fine amount for each combination of patron code and fine code, as well as a maximum fine and a grace period for each combination (see Grace Periods).

    +

    Since fine amounts are defined using patron codes, fine codes, and loan periods, you must set up the Patron Codes, Fine Codes, and Loan Periods policy tables before you can define fine amounts. See: Defining Patron Codes, Defining Loan Period Durations, and Setting Fine Codes.

    +

    Fine amounts are set with entries in the Fines policy table, which can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. Fines can be set from the system, library, and branch levels. However, entries are assigned to specific branches, and you specify fines for each branch in Polaris. You specify which branch’s entries in this table are used in fine calculation with the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation. See: Defining Fines and Fees.

    +

    When you open the table at the system level, you can view, add, or change entries for any branch. At the library level, you can view, add, or change entries for the branches associated with the library. At the branch level, you can view, add, or change entries for the selected branch. You cannot delete fine entries in Polaris Administration. The system administrator can change the Fines table using the Query Analyzer in SQL Server.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify fines table: Allow.

    +

    See also: Add a fine amount

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac6d909a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Fine_Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Fine Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Fine Codes

    +

    Fine codes represent the various fine policies used in combination with patron codes to determine fine amounts. Fine codes are displayed as selections in the Fines policy table and the Fine code box on the Item Record workform.

    +

    Fine codes are defined as entries in the Fine Codes policy table, which can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. Fine codes can be added from the system, library, and branch organization levels, but they are then available to all organizations. You cannot delete fine code entries in Polaris Administration, but the system administrator can change the Fine Codes table using the Query Analyzer in SQL Server.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify fine codes table: Allow.

    +

    See also: Add a fine code

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Lost_Item_Recovery_Defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Lost_Item_Recovery_Defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bfe45301 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Lost_Item_Recovery_Defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults

    +

    When a lost item is recovered at check out or check in, the charges associated with the item must be resolved (charged, waived, credited, or left as is, as appropriate). With the Patron Services parameter Lost item recovery, you can set the default actions so that the charges are resolved automatically when lost items are recovered at circulation, and staff members do not have to resolve each item manually. Charges for lost items may include a replacement charge, a processing fee, and an overdue charge. You can set up separate resolutions depending on whether the charges have been paid or remain unpaid.

    +

    The governing library setting for lost item recovery (transacting library or lending library) determines which library’s settings rule when a lost item is recovered at circulation. The governing library for fines determines how the overdue charges are calculated. For more information about governing library settings, see Set fine receipt options. The replacement charge and processing fee are calculated according to the settings for the item’s assigned branch. See Setting Replacement Fee Defaults.

    +

    You can set separate default actions for normal check in, bulk check in, and check out. Your settings determine how lost items are resolved in the online staff client and in the following situations:

    +
      +
    • Offline circulation - Uses check-out and normal check-in settings.
    • +
    • Polaris ExpressCheck - If you have set Polaris ExpressCheck to permit check out of lost items, your settings for normal check out are used. For information about Polaris ExpressCheck settings, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    SIP/NCIP circulation does not support default settings, and returns error messages for lost items.

    +

    See also: Set the lost item recovery default actions

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Replacement_Fee_Defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Replacement_Fee_Defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e07fcf4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfines/Setting_Replacement_Fee_Defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Replacement Fee Defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Replacement Fee Defaults

    +

    When a patron must be charged to replace a lost, damaged, or long overdue item, Polaris can use the original price of the item or a default cost set by library policy. If the item’s original price is unknown (the Price box on the Item Record workform is blank), the default replacement cost is used. (If the item’s price was $0.00, no replacement cost is charged.) You may choose to use the default replacement cost for every item, whether the original price is known or not. In addition, you can specify a processing fee that is added to the replacement cost. You can set separate replacement costs and processing fees for each material type.

    +

    The Patron Services parameter Replacement fee options controls default cost settings. You can set the parameter at the system level, library, or branch level. When an item is manually declared lost, or is automatically declared lost when it is billed, the Replacement fee options settings for the item’s assigned branch are used. The settings for the governing branch for fine calculations are used to calculate the overdue fine, if any. See Defining Fines and Fees.

    +

    See also: Set the replacement charge defaults

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designate_collections_as_eligible_to_float.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designate_collections_as_eligible_to_float.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9a26aaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designate_collections_as_eligible_to_float.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Designate collections as eligible to float + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Designate collections as eligible to float

    +

    To specify what collections are potentially eligible to float from which branches:

    +

    Note:
    For general information about setting up and editing collections, see Working with Collections.

    +
      +
    1. From the Polaris Shortcut bar, select Administration, Explorer, System. The Administration Explorer opens.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To work with a specific collection, you can use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and open the collection record. Select Administration, Collection on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. To work with multiple collections, use the Administration Explorer.

    +
      +
    1. Click Collection in the Administration Explorer tree view. A search button appears in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    +

    + dCollSearch.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to display the Polaris Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Search for the collections with which you wish to work.
    4. +
    5. Select collections from the Find Tool results list to list in the Administration Explorer. You can use the CTRL or SHIFT key to select multiple collections.
    6. +
    7. Right-click in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu. The collections are listed in the Explorer.
    8. +
    9. Right-click the collection in the Administration Explorer, and select Edit from the context menu. The Collection workform opens.
    10. +
    11. Select View > Floating branches The Collection workform - Floating branches view opens. The workform lists all the branches in the system.
    12. +
    +

    + CollWFFloatView.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the potential home branches for this collection (those that may allow items from this collection to float), using one of these methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Click Select All to select all the listed branches.
    • +
    • Click Select Assigned to select all the branches that have been assigned to this collection. This option makes the floating branches selections the same as the assigned branches selections.
    • +
    • Select the check boxes by individual branches.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    If you have selected a branch to which the collection has not been assigned, a message asks if you want to assign the branch to the collection or cancel your work.

    +

    + AssignedCollPrompt.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to assign the branch to the collection and continue to save your work.
    2. +
    +

    When floating branches have been assigned, the Collection property sheet in Polaris Administration shows what branches have been assigned for floating.

    +

    + CollectionSA.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Set policies for the individual home branches that will allow collections to float. See Setting Home and Receiving Branch Policies.
    2. +
    3. Set individual branch parameters for floating collections. See Setting Branch Parameters.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designating_Floating_Collections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designating_Floating_Collections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc102d22 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Designating_Floating_Collections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Designating Floating Collections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Designating Floating Collections

    +

    Polaris collection records name collections, track which branches use the collections, and designate what collections are potentially eligible to float from which branches. See also: Designate collections as eligible to float.

    +

    Consider setting up these collections so that all branches that participate in the floating arrangement use the collections; otherwise, you will need to set parameters to deal with the case where an item floats to a receiving branch that does not share the item’s collection (see Set parameters and profiles for floating collections).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Processing_Overview.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Processing_Overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e017bb8a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Processing_Overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + + + Floating Collections Processing Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating Collections Processing Overview

    +

    When you set up floating collections, you first determine what collections are eligible to float for which home branches. The home branch’s policies determine if an item from the eligible collection should float. For each branch that enables floating collections, you set the following additional limits:

    +
      +
    • Which branches can receive the home branch’s floating items
    • +
    • Which material types may not float regardless of whether the item belongs to an eligible collection.
    • +
    • Whether limits are applied based on the number of items of the same material type attached to the same bibliographic record, or by the number of items in a collection.
    • +
    +

    If floating is enabled for an item’s home branch, when the item is checked in at a receiving branch, the system checks the limits. If all conditions permit floating, the item is checked in at the new branch and the item’s assigned branch automatically changes to the new branch.

    +

    Note:
    If floating collections are not used, the item’s home branch and assigned branch are typically the same. The home branch value is used only for floating collections and does not affect any other item processing.

    +

    Cooperative Considerations for Floating Collections

    +

    Libraries and branches that participate in floating collections may want to have matching, reciprocal policies to help maintain a balance of items. If the participating organizations will float many items, it is a good practice to standardize the classification system and collections.

    +

    Circulation Processing for Floating Items

    +

    Floating collection processing takes place at check in. The system check for floating eligibility and the migration of the item to its new assigned branch are nearly the last steps in the check-in process. The process happens automatically; no message is displayed to the staff member when the item floats to its new assigned branch.

    +
      +
    • Fines - All fines are calculated before floating, according to the most recent assigned branch for the item.
    • +
    • Holds - All holds are filled before the floating check. The hold is filled according to the policies of the most recent assigned branch. If the item fills a hold, it does not float to the new branch; it goes to the pick-up branch.
    • +
    • Blocks - Checked according to the most recent assigned branch, before the floating check.
    • +
    • Cancelling check in - The option to cancel a check in occurs before the check for floating. Cancelling check-in retains the original Assigned Branch of the item.
    • +
    • Lost or Lost-and-Paid items - Lost recovery options, including the lost recovery dialog, are invoked according to the rules of the receiving branch, regardless of whether the item floats to that branch or not.
    • +
    • Claimed items - Floating has no impact. The patron record is updated normally when the item checks in, regardless of floating.
    • +
    • Prompt for In-transit - If an item qualifies for floating but does not migrate to the receiving branch (for example, the item is over a specified material type or collection limit for the receiving branch), you can have the system display a prompt to accept an item over the limit anyway (see Set parameters and profiles for floating collections). If you suppress the prompt from display, an in-transit prompt is displayed instead, and the staff member can put the item in-transit or check it in (the assigned branch and other parameters do not change to those of the receiving branch).
      If the item does not qualify for floating, the system displays or does not display the in-transit prompt according to the Polaris Administration setting for the receiving branch. If the prompt displays and the option to put the item in-transit is not selected, the item is checked in at the receiving branch but the assigned branch and other parameters do not change to those of the receiving branch.
    • +
    • Shelving Status - The assignment of a shelving status occurs after the item becomes In at the receiving branch. The behavior is not affected by floating.
    • +
    • In-to-In - If the assigned branch is the same as the check-in branch, the item goes from In to In. If an item status is In and the Assigned Branch is different from the receiving branch, the transaction is treated as a new check-in.
    • +
    • Bulk check in - If an item successfully floats, the item becomes In at the new assigned branch. No additional messages display.
    • +
    • Check in from item record - Same processing as normal check in from the Check In workform.
    • +
    • OTF (on-the fly) items - These behave as normal items. They may float as long as they fit the rules established for floating.
    • +
    • Items that do not float - ILL items and reserve items with a reserve status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve never float.
    • +
    • Offline check in - Floating checks are performed as part of the offline upload. There are no additional messages in the upload log resulting from floating. If an item that would check in at the receiving branch (per the floating item option of the Home Branch) is checked in offline, the Assigned Branch field in the item record will be updated when the transactions are uploaded. No message is written to the upload transaction file. If an item that would be placed in-transit from the receiving branch is checked in offline, the item status is set to In-Transit, and a message is written to the offline upload transaction file.
    • +
    • SIP check in - If an item that would check in at the receiving branch (per the floating item option of the Home Branch) is checked in at a SIP workstation, the item floats to the receiving branch like the normal check-in. The Assigned Branch field in the item record is updated accordingly.
    • +
    • Transactions - For check in, the subtype Item float branchID shows the branch ID of the receiving branch if an item has floated there. Check-out and check-in transactions include the item’s home branch.
    • +
    +

    Possible Issues

    +
      +
    • If the assigned branch of a floating item is changed manually or by bulk change to a branch that is not on the home branch’s list of receiving branches, the item will obey the circulation parameters of its new assigned branch, unless it is checked in at a branch controlled by the home branch.
    • +
    • If the floating option is disabled for the home branch, items will stay at their last assigned branch. Reporting is available to identify items where the Home branch and Assigned branch differ. See Floating Collections Reports.
    • +
    • If you choose to allow serial items to float, the PAC compressed holdings statement may be inaccurate. You can minimize the difficulty by restricting a serials collection or material type from floating, or by creating serial item records with a template in which Do Not Float is checked.
    • +
    +

    Collection Agency Processing and Floating Items

    +

    If several branches report to a collection agency and the reporting is set by item’s branch, remember that floating items can change branch. For example, if a patron account is submitted to a collection agency for a charge on Item X from Branch A and then that item floats to Branch C, in subsequent reporting, the patron’s account will be reported from Branch C. The patron will not have multiple charges, but the amount owed for that item is now associated with C. The patron’s account is no longer listed on the Update Report for Branch A; it appears on the next Submission Report for Branch C. Subsequent payments and other activity will appear for Branch C unless the item moves again.

    +

    Item Record Updates for Floating Items

    +

    When a floating item is checked in at the receiving branch, the item record fields are updated as follows:

    +
      +
    • Assigned branch - Changes to the branch of the check-in workstation.
    • +
    • Collection - If both the home branch and receiving branch are assigned to the collection, that collection is displayed. If the receiving branch is not assigned to the collection, or if there is no collection indicated in the item record, the behavior depends on Polaris Administration settings. See Cooperative Considerations for Floating Collections.
    • +
    • Loan Period - The Loan Period defined for the loan period code of the receiving branch.
    • +
    • Fine Code - The Fine Code defined for the receiving branch.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Loan Period Codes and Fine Codes can be defined at the system level so that all participating branches share these settings. Also, you can use the Patron Services Parameter Fine and Loan period defaults to set default values to apply when the loan period code and fine code are not shared by the home branch and receiving branch.

    +
      +
    • Shelf Location - The program attempts a character-for-character match on the field. If the fields match, the value remains. If the fields do not match, the value is set to None.
    • +
    • Stat code - The program attempts a character-for-character match on the field. If the fields match, the value remains. If the fields do not match, the value is set to None.
    • +
    • Library-assigned blocks - The program attempts a character-for-character match on the field. If the fields match, the value remains. If the fields do not match, the value is set to None.
    • +
    • Free text block - The text is not altered or deleted. It appears in the item record after check in.
    • +
    +

    The Item Record workform - Circulation History view shows the item’s Home branch, the Do not float option, and the circulation history of the item as the item moves from branch to branch. (You can also see the circulation history for floating items linked to the same bibliographic record by selecting Tools, Show Usage Statistics in the Bibliographic Record workform.) Two transactions appear each time an item floats, one for the check in, and one for the change in assigned branch due to floating.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d82e811 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Floating Collections Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating Collections Reports

    +

    Floating collections reports are available to help you gather statistics about floating items in your system, and to summarize home branch settings. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices, Circulation.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Setup_Examples.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Setup_Examples.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e160df7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Setup_Examples.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Floating Collections: Setup Examples + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating Collections: Setup Examples

    +

    Here are some setup examples to help you decide how to set up floating collections processing for your system.

    +
      +
    • All items in a collection can float - Let any items from the Biographies collection at Community Library float to branches A, X and Z:
      • In the Collections workform for the Biographies collection, select Community Library on the Floating branches view. This indicates that Community Library as the home branch will let items in this collection float. Refer to Designate collections as eligible to float.
      • In the Floating: To Branch policy table for Community Library, set Received branches A, X, Z to Yes. This indicates that Community Library allows items to float to these branches. Refer to Set the branches to receive floating items.
      • In the Floating: Material Type Limits policy tables for branches A, X, and Z, set the limits for items permitted to float to each receiving branch. Note that these limits are not set in the policy table for Community Library, but in the policy tables of the branches that will receive the items. Refer to Limit the floating items for the same title a branch can receive.
      • Set the Patron Services parameter Floating enabled to Yes for the home branch and the receiving branches.
    • +
    • All items in a collection can float except a certain material type - Let all items from Community Library’s Biographies Collection except Reference material float to any branch:
    • +
    • All items of a certain material type can float - Let any item of material type DVD-NonFiction float from Community Library to any branch:
    • +
    • Only items with no collection can float - Let only items with no assigned collection float from Community Library to any branch:
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Troubleshooting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Troubleshooting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ef00d80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Floating_Collections_Troubleshooting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Floating Collections: Troubleshooting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating Collections: Troubleshooting

    +

    You have designated floating collections and assigned branches to the collections. For each home branch, you have set float-to branches and determined which material types can float. Now you have scanned an item from another branch and the item went to In-transit instead of floating to your branch. What happened?

    +
      +
    • Check the item’s material type. Is this a material type that is set to float?
    • +
    • Check your limits by material type for the receiving branch. Is this item over the limit?
    • +
    • Check your limits by collection for the receiving branch. Is this item over the limit?
    • +
    • Check the Floating parameters (Parameters, Patron Services) for the receiving branch. Has floating been enabled?
    • +
    • Does the item have an assigned collection? If not, check the setting for the Patron Services parameter Floating: Items with blank Assigned Collection can float.
    • +
    • Does the assigned collection of the incoming item match a collection used by the receiving branch? If not, check the setting for the Patron Services parameter Floating: Float Items with no matching collection.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_floating_items_for_the_same_title_a_branch_can_receive.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_floating_items_for_the_same_title_a_branch_can_receive.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1121fca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_floating_items_for_the_same_title_a_branch_can_receive.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Limit the floating items for the same title and material type + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Limit the floating items for the same title and material type

    +

    You can limit the number of items attached to the same bibliographic record that the receiving branch will accept. For example, a limit of 20 on material type DVD indicates that the receiving branch will not accept more than 20 DVD copies of any given title. In determining how many items to bring in, the system counts how many of the items are immediately available (In), as well as how many of the items have floated to the receiving branch regardless of their current circulation status.

    +

    To set limits on items with the same material type linked to the same bibliographic record:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system-level System Administration permission Modify floating material type limits table: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the receiving branch (the branch to which items will float).
    2. +
    3. Open the Policy Tables folder for the receiving branch, and select Floating: Material Type Limits. The Floating: Material Type Limits table is displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Material Type list, select the material type for which you want to change the receiving branch’s limits. By default, the maximum number of In items attached to the same bibliographic record for each material type is set to 5. The default maximum number of items of any circulation status is 10.
    2. +
    3. Click ModIcon00511.gif. The Modify box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + ModFloatMatLimits.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Change the limit settings as appropriate, and click OK. The Maximum In Item Limit can be 0 or greater. The Maximum Total Item Limit must be 1 or greater.
    2. +
    +

    Examples: +

    +

    Due to normal circulation processes, you may end up with more floating items than your on-shelf (In) item limit. For example, your In Item Limit is set to 5. You have 4 items on the shelf, and you check another item in. You have reached the limit. Then you check out 2 of the items. Another item comes in and successfully floats to your branch because you have 2 less than your In limit. The two checked out items come back. All items are on the shelf, and they total to one more than the limit. You can manipulate the limit settings depending on the results you want:

    +

    — To closely enforce an on-shelf (In) limit, set the In Item Limit to any value greater than 1, and set the Total Item Limit to an equal or slightly greater value. For example, set the In Item Limit to 10 and the Total Item Limit to 12. The on-shelf limit is enforced but the total items may grow somewhat over the on-shelf limit. The Total Item Limit setting helps to control the expansion.

    +

    — To loosely enforce an on-shelf limit, set the In Item Limit to any value greater than 1, and set the Total Item Limit to a value much greater than the In item Limit. The on-shelf limit is enforced but the total items may grow over the on-shelf limit.

    +

    — To enforce only a total limit, set the In Item Limit to any value greater than 2, and set the Total Item Limit to any value equal or less than the In Item Limit (other than 1). For example, set the In Item Limit to 50 and the Total Item Limit to 10. This essentially overrides the on-shelf limit.

    +

    — To not impose any limits, set both limits to very high values (such as 99). This essentially turns off checking.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 2-4 for each material type for which you want to change the limits.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    You can display a prompt when checking in a floating item that would exceed the material type limits. See Set parameters and profiles for floating collections.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_number_of_floa.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_number_of_floa.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1241102 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Limit_the_number_of_floa.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection

    +

    To set limits on the number of items that can be checked in for a floating collection:

    +

    Note: +
    The items In-transit to the receiving branch, as well as the In items, are counted towards the maximum items in a collection.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, select the System, Library or Branch.
    2. +
    3. Open the Policy Tables folder, and select Floating: Collection Limits. The Floating: Collection Limits table is displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the collection for which you want to change the receiving branch’s limits.
    2. +
    3. Click . The Modify box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Change the collection limit as appropriate, and click OK. The Modify box closes.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    Items that are In-transit to the receiving branch are counted as well as items that are In.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the policy table.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_parameters_and_profiles_for_floating_collections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_parameters_and_profiles_for_floating_collections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef047897 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_parameters_and_profiles_for_floating_collections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + Set parameters and profiles for floating collections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set parameters and profiles for floating collections

    +

    At the System level, your library can use the Floating Options parameter to define floating limits by the maximum number of In items attached to the same bibliographic record for each material type, or by the number of In and In-transit items in a collection. If Title/Material type is selected, the limits are set for the receiving branches using the Floating: Material Type Limits policy table. If Collection is selected, the limits are set for the receiving branches using the Floating: Collection Limits policy table.

    +

    If the Limit by Collection option is selected on the Floating Options dialog box, you can also select Load balancing (at the System level only). When load balancing is enabled, and an item cannot float into the receiving branch because it would exceed that branch’s collection limit, the system checks all eligible receiving branches that participate in floating collections to find the branch with the fewest In and In-transit items (with a final status) in comparison to the collection limit. The item will float to the branch that has the lowest ratio of the number of items to the collection limit. If no eligible branches are found, or two or more branches' collections have the same ratio of the number of In and In-transit items to the collection limit, the item is returned to its assigned branch.

    +

    To set floating collections options:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the System, Library, or Branch level and select the Patron Services tab.
    2. +
    3. Select Floating Options. The Floating Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the Floating enabled check box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If this parameter is set to No for a branch, items will not float to the branch even if the branch is selected as a receiving branch in the home  branch’s Float: To Branch policy table. A home branch must also set this parameter to Yes; otherwise, no items will float even if a collection is designated as floating for the branch in the Collection workform.

    +
      +
    1. (System level only) Under Limit by, select one of these options: Title/Material type or Collection.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. If Title/Material type is selected, limits are applied according to the material type limits the participating branches specify in the policy table (see Limit the floating items for the same title and material type).
    2. +
    3. If Collection is selected, select the default limit on the number of items for all participating branches' collections. Branches can change this limit using the policy table (see Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection . If Collection is selected, you can select Load balancing, but only the Prompt for additional floating items check box options is available when Load balancing is selected.
    4. +
    5. If either Limit by option is selected, you can select or clear the following check boxes.
      • Prompt for additional floating items
      • Float items with no matching collection (not available with Load Balancing)
      • Float items with no collection (not available with Load Balancing)
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. If you want items to float even if the receiving branch has no matching collection, set Floating: Float items with no matching collection to Yes. (The default setting is No.)
    2. +
    +

    When this parameter is set to Yes and such an item is checked in at the receiving branch, the item’s Assigned Collection is reset to blank (none assigned) for the new Assigned Branch.

    +
      +
    1. If you want items with no assigned collection to float, set Floating: Items with blank Assigned Collection can float to Yes. (The default setting is No.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you want only items with no assigned collection to float, do not designate any collections as eligible to float. Select receiving branches for the home branch, and set Floating: Items with blank Assigned Collection can float to Yes for the home branch. Then enable floating for both the home branch and the receiving branches.

    +
      +
    1. To display a prompt at check in when material or collection limits would be exceeded for the receiving branch, set Floating: Prompt for additional floating items to Yes. (The default setting is No.) The effect of the staff member's response to the prompt depends on the Limit by setting as follows:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Limit by Title/Material Type or Limit by Collection (no load balancing) - When this prompt option is set to Yes, and a floating item is checked in, a prompt appears if the item would exceed the maximum limit for items attached to the same bibliographic record (see Limit the floating items for the same title a branch can receive) or collection limit (see Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection ). The staff member can override the limit and accept the item. If you leave this parameter set to No and an item is over the limit, an in-transit prompt is displayed instead, and the staff member can put the item in-transit or check it in (the assigned branch and other parameters do not change to those of the receiving branch in this case).
    • +
    • Limit by Collection with load balancing - When this prompt option is set to Yes, and a floating item is checked in, a prompt appears if the item would exceed the branch's collection limit. The staff member can override the limit and check in the item. If the staff member selects No, the item floats out to the branch with the lowest ratio of the number of items to collection limit.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Cataloging tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To display a warning message during item bulk change when the items’ assigned and home branches are changed, set Item bulk change: Warning if changing Assigned or Home branch to Yes. (The default value is No.)
    4. +
    +

    If you set this parameter to Yes, when the Assigned and Home branches are changed so that the two values are not the same, the warning message is displayed. You can continue or cancel to stop and reset the values. When the parameter is set to No, no warning message is displayed and the change continues.

    +
      +
    1. To display a message when an individual item’s assigned or home branch is changed, set Item Records: Warning if changing Assigned or Home branch to Yes. (The default value is No.)
    2. +
    +

    If you set this parameter to Yes, when either the Assigned or Home branch is changed so that the two values are not the same, the  message appears on the bulk change summary window. When the parameter is set to No, no message is displayed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_branches_to_receive_floating_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_branches_to_receive_floating_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..950e0632 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_branches_to_receive_floating_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the branches to receive floating items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the branches to receive floating items

    +

    The home branch decides which branches may receive its floating items.

    +

    To set the receiving branches:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system-level System Administration permission Modify floating to branch table: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the home branch, and select Floating: To Branch. The Floating: To Branch table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Received Branch list, select a branch to designate as a branch that can receive items from the home branch. Press CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select multiple branches. By default, Can float for each possible Received branch is set to No.
    2. +
    3. Click ModIcon.gif. The Modify box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + ModFloatingMatrix.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Change Can Float to Yes, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Repeat steps 2-4 to change additional “float to” (Received) branches.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_material_types_that_cannot_float.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_material_types_that_cannot_float.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aff48d1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Set_the_material_types_that_cannot_float.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the material types that cannot float + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the material types that cannot float

    +

    Even if an item belongs to a collection that a home branch allows to float, the home branch can prevent certain material types from floating.

    +

    To set the material types that the home branch is not willing to allow to float, even if the items belong to a collection that is allowed to float:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system-level System Administration permission Modify floating material types table: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the home branch, and select Floating: Material Types. The Floating: Material Types table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines if this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Material Type list, select a material type that should not float from the home branch. Press CTRL+click or SHIFT+click to select multiple material types. By default, Can float for each material type is set to Yes.
    2. +
    3. Click ModIcon00510.gif. The Modify box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + ModFloatingMatType.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Change Can Float to No, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Repeat steps 2-4 to designate additional material types that should not float.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Branch_Parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Branch_Parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9b3427c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Branch_Parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Branch Parameters for Floating Collections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Branch Parameters for Floating Collections

    +

    You can set the appropriate Patron Services parameters and Cataloging profiles at the system, library, or branch level to fine-tune how floating collections work among the branches that participate. In addition, the Patron Services parameter Floating enabled controls whether a branch uses floating collections functionality at all. You may wish to set this parameter last, after reviewing all  your settings for floating collections.

    +

    Before you fine-tune and enable floating collections, do the following:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Home_and_Receiving_Branch_Policies.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Home_and_Receiving_Branch_Policies.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..162d2d76 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Home_and_Receiving_Branch_Policies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Home and Receiving Branch Policies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Home and Receiving Branch Policies

    +

    The following policy tables control floating item policies:

    +
      +
    • Floating: To Branch - This table sets the possible receiving branches for items that are allowed to float. The Home branch designated in the item record determines the branches to which its items may float. See Set the branches to receive floating items.
    • +
    • Floating: Material Types - Use this table to set the material types that should not float, even if the items belong to a floating collection. The Home branch designated in the item record determines the material types that should not float. See Set the material types that cannot float.
    • +
    • Floating: Material Type Limits - A busy branch that receives many floating items may be at risk of being overwhelmed by popular items, running short of shelf space, or of absorbing the bulk of available items. Use this table to set how many items linked to the same bibliographic record the receiving branch is willing to accept. The receiving branch determines separate limits for In items attached to the same title and items of any circulation status attached to the same title. See Limit the floating items for the same title and material type.
    • +
    • Floating: Collection Limits- Use this table to set limits on the number of items a branch can receive into each of its floating collections. See Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Up_Floating_Collections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Up_Floating_Collections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b51650e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPfloating/Setting_Up_Floating_Collections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Floating Collections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Floating Collections

    +

    Floating collections processing is the ability to allow certain items to remain at the branch where they were last checked in. If an item is called to another branch, for example to fill a hold request, the item will stay at that branch when it is returned. The items move among branches as they are used, not according to a rotation schedule. Floating collections allow high-demand items to remain at high-traffic organizations, and collection contents to change with demand. They also reduce the cost of returning materials to a single starting point after each use at another branch. You can check in an item at branch B that belongs to branch A and, rather than putting the item in transit back to A, let it remain at B. The item’s Assigned Branch changes from branch A to branch B, and the reassigned item takes on branch B’s circulation parameters.

    +

    Floating collection functions are optional. If your system consists of organizations that do their own purchasing and processing, and item ownership is important to each organization, you may not want to implement floating collections. If your system does central purchasing and processing, then distributes items to branch organizations, you may find floating collections very useful.

    +

    Some libraries allow nearly all items to float. Others exert more control over what items may float and to what locations. You can configure floating options at the branch level, so that each “home” branch can determine if any of its items are allowed to float and to which branches. You can specify limits by the number of items attached to the same title (with the same material type) that can float into a collection, or by the number of items in each collection.

    +

    Individual items can be designated as exempt from floating. The item record includes a Do not float option that can be set manually for an individual item, through an item template, or by bulk change to an item record set. ILL items and reserve items with a reserve status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve never float.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Automatic_Process_Lost_Missing_Withdrawn_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Automatic_Process_Lost_Missing_Withdrawn_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db79fdb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Automatic_Process_Lost_Missing_Withdrawn_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Automatic Process for Lost, Missing, Withdrawn Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Automatic Process for Lost, Missing, Withdrawn Items

    +

    Libraries can set the patron services parameters, Lost item transition and Missing item transition, to automatically update the circulation status of lost or missing items based on a specified period of time. When the Lost item transition or Missing item transition processing has been enabled, the Lost Missing Withdrawn Processing SQL job identifies items that meet the criteria specified in the applicable parameter and updates the items as follows:

    +
      +
    • Lost items transition to either Missing or Withdrawn
    • +
    • Missing items transition to Withdrawn
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The first time the job runs, processing may take some time because all the item records that have retained a Lost status for longer than specified in the Lost item transition parameter, and all the items that have retained a Missing status for longer than specified in the Missing item transition parameter are included in the processing. When determining if a particular item should be updated automatically, the day on which the job is run is not included.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Defining_Material_Types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Defining_Material_Types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6345dbe8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Defining_Material_Types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Material Types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Material Types

    +

    Names for the various material types held by the library are defined in the Material Types policy table. Material types are key elements in determining loan periods, lending limit blocks, and hold policies, and in generating statistics. They are displayed in the following locations:

    +
      +
    • In the Material type list box on the Item Record workform, the Serial Holdings Record workform, the Selection List Line Item workform, the Purchase Order Line Item workform, and the Invoice Line item workform
    • +
    • In the PAC availability information for each item associated with a title
    • +
    • As search limiting options in the staff client Find Tool and the PAC
    • +
    +

    The same entries are displayed for every organization level at which the Material Types table is opened. Material types can be set from the system, library, and branch levels, but additions and changes are applied to all organizations. You cannot delete a material type from the table in Polaris Administration. The system administrator can change the Material Types table using the Query Analyzer in SQL Server.

    +

    The Material Types table is displayed from the Administration Explorer only. You cannot access the Material Types table from an organization workform.

    +

    Note: +
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify the Material Types policy table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify material types table: Allow.

    +

    See: Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Displaying_Items_Last_Borrower.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Displaying_Items_Last_Borrower.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e53c025 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Displaying_Items_Last_Borrower.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying an Item’s Last Borrower + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying an Item’s Last Borrower

    +

    Use the Patron Services parameter Last use patron display to enable a link from the item record to the Patron Status workform for the item’s last borrower, or to suppress the link. This parameter also controls whether the patron’s barcode is displayed in the Item Record workform. This parameter can be set on the system, library, or branch level. The setting for the log-on branch controls whether the link is available.

    +

    + LastBorrower.gif 

    +

    To enable the previous borrower link in item records as displayed for the staff member’s log-on branch:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Last use patron display, and select Yes.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +

    You can limit the number of days that the last borrower's information is kept in the item record. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Parameters > Patron Services:

    +
      +
    • Last use patron: Delete: Determines if the last borrower's information is kept in item records. The default value is Yes.
    • +
    • Last use patron: Number of days to keep: Sets the number of days the last borrower's information is kept. The default value is 0.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Enable the auto-renew process.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Enable the auto-renew process.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f15dd16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Enable the auto-renew process.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Enable the auto-renew process + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable the auto-renew process

    +

    To enable automatic renewal of items:

    +
      +
    1. In Polaris Administration, select the library organization (system, library, or branch), Parameters, Patron Services.
    2. +
    3. Select Renewal: Auto-renew, and select Yes.
    4. +
    +

    Automatic renewals are completed as part of the Notices Processing SQL job. When the job runs, it automatically renews eligible items for which the item's assigned branch has the Renewal: Auto-renew parameter set to Yes. A patron's items will be auto-renewed based on the number of days specified in the Notice options, Reminders setting for the patron's registered branch.

    +

    See also: Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Item_Record_Circulation_Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Item_Record_Circulation_Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81a41576 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Item_Record_Circulation_Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Circulation Settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Circulation Settings

    +

    Circulation settings for item records are controlled by a Polaris Administration policy table, database table, and patron services parameters. The Material Types policy table defines standard descriptions and the banner text displayed in Leap for specific items held by the library; the Circulation Statuses database table defines standard labels for item circulation statuses; the Shelving status options parameter controls an option to display a temporary shelving status; and the Last use patron display parameter controls whether to display a link to the last patron who checked out the item.

    +

    In addition, if your library uses NCIP, you should map item material types to the NCIP medium types defined by the NCIP standard. Mapping NCIP Data to Polaris Data.

    +

    For more information about items that can float from one branch to another, see Setting Up Floating Collections.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0023e512 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn

    +

    Note: +
    Libraries in a consortium will need to consider whether to implement the automatic transition of Lost items because the items will be assigned the new status without regard to Lost item recovery settings for the Governing library.

    +

    To enable lost item transition processing:

    +
      +
    1. In Polaris Administration, select the library organization (system, library, or branch), Parameters, Patron Services. To see the patron services parameters list, click the appropriate level- System, Library, Branch.
    2. +
    3. Select Lost item transition in the list of parameters.
    4. +
    +

    The Lost item transition dialog box opens. The Do not change status option is selected by default.

    +
      +
    1. Select Missing or Withdrawn.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Specify the time period after which Lost items will be updated to either Missing or Withdrawn by selecting a number and Months or Years.
    2. +
    +

    Recommendation: +
    The transition period set by the Assigned Branch should be longer than any of the lost-and-paid recovery periods set within the library system. This reduces the likelihood of an item being recovered after it has received a Withdrawn status.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to charge accruing overdues to the patron’s account, select Charge accruing overdues.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select OK.
    2. +
    +

    Lost item transition processing

    +

    When an item transitions from Lost, the following updates are made to the item record:

    +
      +
    • The circulation status changes from Lost to Missing or Withdrawn.
    • +
    • The status reflects the date and time of the change.
    • +
    • The item is removed from the Patron Status workform, Claims view.
    • +
    • If the item is lost and not paid, the charge remains on the patron’s account.
    • +
    • If the item is lost and paid, no lost-item-recovery options, such as crediting the patron’s account, are applied.
    • +
    • If Charge accruing overdues is selected, the charges are added to the patron account.
    • +
    • The item record history displays: Circulation status modified via Lost Item Transition processing Automatic status change.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up missing item transition to withdrawn.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up missing item transition to withdrawn.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f809116 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set up missing item transition to withdrawn.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Set up missing item transition to withdrawn + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up missing item transition to withdrawn

    +

    To enable missing item transition processing:

    +
      +
    1. In Polaris Administration, select the library organization (system, library, or branch), Parameters, Patron Services.To see the patron services parameters list, click the appropriate level- System, Library, Branch.
    2. +
    3. Select Missing item transition in the list of parameters.
    4. +
    5. The Missing item transition dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Select Move missing items to withdrawn.
    8. +
    9. Specify the time period after which Missing items will be updated to Withdrawn by selecting a number and Months or Years.
    10. +
    11. Select OK.
    12. +
    +

    Missing item transition processing

    +

    When an item transitions from Missing to Withdrawn, the following updates are made to the item record:

    +
      +
    • The circulation status changes from Missing or Withdrawn.
    • +
    • The status reflects the date and time of the change.
    • +
    • The item record history displays: Circulation status modified via Missing Item Transition processing Automatic status change.
    • +
    • Other item data, including the last borrower, remain.
    • +
    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set_shelving_status_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set_shelving_status_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc724386 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Set_shelving_status_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Shelving Status Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Shelving Status Options

    +

    +

    +

    Note: +
    For more information about how Polaris calculates the shelving status period and then applies and removes the shelving status, see Understanding the Shelving Status Period.

    +

    To set shelving status options +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Shelving status options to display the Shelving Status Options dialog box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Enable shelving status. The other options become available.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. (System level only) Specify the status text to display for an item in the PAC and the staff client Find Tool when an item is checked in and the status changes to "In". The default text is "Shelving". Use this text or specify any description that will make sense to your patrons, such as "Sorting" or "Recent Return".
    2. +
    3. Select the material type or types for which you want to set the time period.
    4. +
    5. In the Time boxes, specify the shelving status period for the selected material type(s). Select hours or minutes, and type or select the number of hours or minutes.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Set Time.
    2. +
    +

    The number of hours or minutes you specified is listed for the selected material type or types.

    +
      +
    1. Select an option to specify what should happen when an item is checked in, the status changes to "In", and the item is checked in again (circulation status goes from "In" to "In" before the shelving status time period has expired):
      • Clock is reset - The specified time period to display the shelving status description starts again, as if the item were being checked in the first time.
      • Shelving status will expire at the time already set - The clock is not reset. The shelving status description will expire at the end of the original period.
      • Circulation status will display as In - The shelving status description will no longer be displayed. In the PAC and staff client Find Tool, the circulation status will be displayed as "In".
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select OK to save your settings.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Setting_Shelving_Status.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Setting_Shelving_Status.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d627cc98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Setting_Shelving_Status.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Shelving Status + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Shelving Status

    +

    When an item is returned to its assigned branch and checked in, the item’s circulation status becomes In even though the item may not be immediately returned to the shelf. This can be confusing for a patron who finds the item in PAC, notes that the item’s status is In, but cannot find it on the shelf. To inform the patron that the item is not yet returned to the shelf, you can set a period of time for each material type during which the item’s status is displayed as "Shelving" (or another appropriate description).

    +

    For the time period you set, patrons see the shelving status description for the item in the PAC. In the staff client, the shelving status description is displayed in Find Tool search results, the PAC preview in the bibliographic record, and the list of linked item records available from the bibliographic record or the item record. You can also limit Find Tool item searches by shelving status. For items checked in offline, when the offline transactions are uploaded, the shelving status display is calculated according to the date/time of the check-in recorded in the upload file.

    +

    When you enable the shelving status option, the shelving description is displayed only when an item is checked in during a circulation process and its circulation status changes to In. The option is not used when an item is created with a status of In or when the status of multiple items is changed to In through bulk change.

    +

    Note:
    If you use Polaris Serials, part of your serials processing workflow may be to create items with a status of In when a serial issue is checked in. To use the shelving status description with these items, set the status to In Process or another status other than In, then check in the item as a circulation process—using Circulation > Check In or selecting Tools > Check In from the item record workform.

    +

    Use the Patron Services parameter Shelving status options to enable this option and to control how long the system displays the shelving status description for each material type. You can set the shelving status period at the system, library, or branch level, but you can only set the shelving status description text at the system level so that the description is consistent in PAC search results. When an item is checked in, the system uses the shelving status settings for the transacting branch.

    +
    +

    Note: +

    +
      +
    • For more information about how Polaris calculates and applies the shelving status period, see Understanding the Shelving Status Period.
    • +
    • If you have the shelving status option activated for a branch, then turn it off, the status of items currently in “shelving” changes to In. This change may take up to 10 minutes.
    • +
    +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Understanding_shelving_status_period.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Understanding_shelving_status_period.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06f1b83a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Understanding_shelving_status_period.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + Understanding the Shelving Status Period + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Understanding the Shelving Status Period

    +

    The following sections explain how Polaris calculates the shelving status period and then applies and removes the shelving status after an item is checked in:

    + +

    Shelving Status Period and Library Open Hours

    +

    The shelving status period is calculated based on the hours the library is open. For example, if the shelving status period is set to 48 hours, the shelving status remains in effect for 48 open hours after the item is checked in (not 48 continuous hours). Set the shelving period based solely on the average time it takes to shelve items; program calculations will take into account the library’s schedule.

    +

    Days closed (hours of operation) and dates closed are taken into account. For proper calculation, be sure hours of operation are set up for your branch. See Register a branch.

    +

    The shelving status period is recalculated when items are checked in close to the library's closing time:

    +
      +
    • +

      If the period is less than 24 hours, and the item is checked in less than three hours before closing time, the shelving status expiration time is recalculated.

      +

      Example:
      The shelving status period is six hours. The item is checked in one hour before the library closes. The shelving status period begins at opening time on the next open day and lasts for six hours.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the period is less than 24 hours, and the item is checked in three hours or more before closing time, the shelving status expiration time is not recalculated.

      +

      Example:
      The shelving status period is six hours. The item is checked in five hours before the library closes. The shelving status period is applied using the five hours today and one hour tomorrow.

      +
    • +
    +

    Shelving Status and the Item Shelving Status SQL Job

    +

    The Item Shelving Status SQL job checks for items with a status of Shelving and updates the status to In once the shelving status period has elapsed.

    +

    The job runs at an interval that is determined by the settings configured on the Shelving Status Options +dialog box. The job runs at an interval that is half as long as the shortest shelving period configured (for any branch or material type). For example, if the shortest shelving period is eight hours, the Item Shelving Status job runs every four hours.

    +
    +

    Note: +

    +
      +
    • Since the Item Shelving Status job runs at defined intervals, an item's status could change from Shelving to In at a time that does not match the shelving status period to the minute.
    • +
    • Running the Item Shelving Status job uses system resources. Be sure to set realistic shelving status periods -- 12 hours rather than 12 minutes -- when you configure shelving status options. Setting periods less than nine minutes can adversely affect circulation workflows.
    • +
    +
    +

    For more information about the Item Shelving Status job, see Polaris SQL Jobs Reference.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/View_circulation_status_names_and_edit_descriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/View_circulation_status_names_and_edit_descriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ace1aeb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/View_circulation_status_names_and_edit_descriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + View circulation status names, edit descriptions, and add Leap banner text + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View circulation status names, edit descriptions, and add Leap banner text

    +

    Circulation statuses are defined at the System level and cannot be modified. However, if you have the required permissions, you can modify the description and/or the circulation status that appears at the bottom of the book jacket image on the Item Record workform in Leap. For more information on the Item Record workform in Leap, see the Leap online Help.

    +

    To view the standard names for item circulation statuses, edit descriptions, and add Leap Item Record workform banner text:

    +

    Note:
    You can modify the description for any circulation status, and you can use the same description for more than one status, but be cautious in applying the same description to multiple circulation statuses, since this may confuse both staff and patrons.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the organization, and select Circulation Statuses.
    2. +
    +

    The Circulation Statuses table is displayed in the details view.

    +

    + CircStatusesTabl.gif +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the circulation status entry or click .
    2. +
    +

    The Modify: Item Status dialog box appears.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type the new description in the Description box. Modify the description so that it is understandable to everyone, including patrons. The modification affects only the description that is displayed; it remains associated with the underlying circulation status that appears in the Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The non-circulating item status applies to those items where Non-circulating is checked in the item record. When you modify the description for this status, your description is displayed in the PAC for these items, but the description is not available as a Find Tool search filter or an option for bulk change. The actual status is Non-circulating.

    +
      +
    1. If your library uses Leap and you want to display the circulation status on the bottom of the bookjacket image on the Item Record workform, type the text in the Banner Text box.
    2. +
    +

    The example below shows the banner text in the Leap Item Record workform.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Shelving status - When an item is returned to its assigned branch and checked in, the item’s circulation status becomes In even though the item may not be returned immediately to the shelf. For each material type, you can set a period of time during which the checked-in item’s In status is displayed as Shelving (or another appropriate description). See Setting Shelving Status.
    • +
    • Non-circulating items - See Setting Up Non-Circulating Items.
    • +
    • Suppressing from PAC by circulation status - You can suppress items with specific circulation statuses from the PAC availability display. Suppressing Items from Search Results.
    • +
    • Circulation statuses and how they occur - See Default Circulation Statuses.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Viewing_Circulation_Statuses.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Viewing_Circulation_Statuses.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2209b80f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPitems/Viewing_Circulation_Statuses.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + Viewing Circulation Statuses and Editing Descriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing Circulation Statuses and Editing Descriptions

    +

    One common set of circulation statuses is used in item transactions from any branch in the system. The Circulation Statuses database table, available only from the Administration Explorer, identifies the standard names for item circulation statuses.

    +

    Although the circulation status entries are owned by the system level, you can view the table and modify the status descriptions from any level. If your library uses the Polaris Web application, Leap, you can also define circulation status text to appear on a banner on the bottom of the book jacket image on the Item Record workform in Leap.

    +

    The Circulation Statuses table is set up during Polaris implementation, conversion, and site installation. All organizations in a Polaris installation must agree on the circulation statuses to use. You can view circulation status names, edit descriptions, and define banner text for Leap, but you cannot add or delete entries.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to view this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow.

    +

    Circulation statuses are displayed in the following locations in the Polaris staff client:

    +
      +
    • In the Circulation status box on the Item Record workform
    • +
    • As selections in the For and Limit by boxes on the Polaris Find Tool when you search for items
    • +
    • In the PAC availability information for each item associated with a title, if you choose to display detailed item statuses (see Set up the local/system item availability display).
    • +
    +

    Default Circulation Statuses

    +

    The default circulation statuses are:

    +
      +
    • In - The item is on the shelf and available for circulation.
    • +
    • Out - The item has been checked out and is in circulation.
    • +
    • Held - The item was requested by a patron while it was in circulation. When the item returned it was “trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for hold” and set aside for the requestor. The item status is Held until the requestor retrieves the item for check-out.
    • +
    • Transferred - The item was trapped for a hold for a patron from another library, and has been shipped to that library for pickup. The item will remain Transferred until received at the pickup library, where it will become Held. Transferred items may be said to be out-bound.
    • +
    • In-Transit - In-transit items are items that have circulated at a remote branch and have been sent to the assigned branch. They may be said to be in-bound. When received at the Assigned branch and checked in, the item will become In.
    • +
    • Claim Returned - Polaris shows that an item is out, but the patron claims that the item was returned. The staff member used the Claim function in Patron Status to change the item circulation status from Out to Claim Returned. The status will change to In if the item is recovered at circulation.
    • +
    • Claim Never Had - Polaris shows that an item is out, but the patron claims that she never had the item. The staff member used the Claim function in Patron Status to change the item circulation status from Out to Claim Never Had. The status will change to In if the item is recovered at circulation.
    • Claim Missing Parts - When staff members use the Special Item Check-in dialog box to check in multi-part items for which a part or parts are missing, they can update the items to a status of Claim Missing Parts. This blocks the item from being circulated; moves the item to the Claims view of the Patron Status workform; and generates a notice to the patron.
    • +
    • Lost - The item was checked out and the patron has informed the library that she lost the item. The staff member changes the status from Out to Lost using the Lost function in Patron Status. Or, the patron may be billed for the item if it has been long overdue, at which point the librarian may declare the item lost. The status will change to In if the item is recovered at circulation.
    • +
    • Out-ILL - Intended to be used in conjunction with a third-party ILL application, for example when using NCIP, to indicate the item has checked out to a remote library.
    • +
    • Returned ILL - Intended to be used in conjunction with a third-party ILL application, for example when using NCIP, to indicate an item out to a remote branch has been returned by that branch.
    • +
    • Non-Circulating - The item does not circulate; the Non-Circulating option is checked in the item record.
    • +
    • Missing - An inventory status indicating that the item is not on the shelf as expected. Missing is distinguished from Lost in that Lost indicates that the item was in fact checked out and did not return. Missing indicates that, to the extent the library can determine, the item has not circulated but cannot be found.
    • +
    • Shelving - A display status for items that are In but not yet returned to the shelf for circulation. The library defines how long the Shelving status is displayed for an item that is checked in.
    • +
    • Withdrawn - The item has been removed from the circulating collection. It is not available for check-out or request.
    • +
    • Bindery - The item has been removed from the collection temporarily and sent to the bindery.
    • +
    • In Repair - The item has been removed from the collection temporarily for repair.
    • +
    • Unavailable - A miscellaneous status used to indicate that the item is not available for circulation. No specific reason is associated with the status and there are no links to any program functions.
    • +
    • In Process - The item has recently been received and has not yet completed processing. The status can be assigned automatically at item creation within Acquisitions.
    • +
    • On-Order - The material has been ordered through Acquisitions and item records created in anticipation of receipt. The status can be assigned automatically at item creation within Acquisitions.
    • +
    • Routed - If a routed serial issue is linked to an item record, the item’s circulation status is Routed. Attempts to check out a routed item produce an error message. Check the item in to change its circulation status from Routed to In, and then check it out.
    • +
    • EContent External Loan -Updates the eContent item record when a Polaris library loans an eContent title to a patron whose record is not in the Polaris database. The check-outs are from the vendor's application and the check-ins are from the patron view of the patron account or from the vendor's application. Only the APIs can apply the eContent external loan circulation status and only to integrated eContent items.
    • +

      See also: View circulation status names, edit descriptions, and add Leap banner text

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Enable_the_media_dispenser.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Enable_the_media_dispenser.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f31bd3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Enable_the_media_dispenser.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enable media dispenser processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable media dispenser processing

    +

    Note: +
    If the workstation on which Leap is running does not have the Polaris staff client installed, you must set the Workstation parameter, Media dispenser: Use local security manager to Yes.

    +

    To set up media dispenser processing in Polaris Administration for the Polaris staff client, Leap, and ExpressCheck:

    +

    Note: +
    The media dispenser parameter can be set at the System, Library, or Branch organization level in Polaris Administration. To enable the media unit, you must obtain and enter the full network address or URL of the dispenser unit. Your network administrator determines the network address when the device is installed on your network.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, click the organization to expand the tree view.
    2. +
    3. Click Parameters to display the details view for the organization's parameters.
    4. +
    5. Click the SelfCheck Unit tab in the details view to display the self check unit parameters.
    6. +
    7. Double-click the SelfCheck Unit parameter Media dispenser settings.
    8. +
    +

    The Media Dispenser Settings setup dialog box opens with the General tab displayed.

    +

    + MediaDispenserDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enabled.
    2. +
    3. Click the Properties button to open the Properties dialog box.
    4. +
    5. On the Properties dialog box, type the full network address or URL of the dispenser unit (100-character limit) in the Network location box, and click OK to close the dialog box.
    6. +
    7. On the General tab, check the material types that can be dispensed by the unit. Select at least one item material type.
    8. +
    9. (Optional) Check Include dispenser unit location on printed receipt. This option applies to staff client, Leap, and ExpressCheck receipts. Check-out receipts must be enabled for the staff client and Leap workforms, and for ExpressCheck to include this information on a printed receipt.
    10. +
    11. Click the Staff Client tab.
    12. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type the text to appear on the receipt in the Receipt text box (250-character limit).
    2. +
    3. (Optional) To issue a message when checking out from a media unit, check the Enable check-out warning box, and type the warning text in the box. The default warning message text is Please retrieve items from the dispensing unit. You can customize the message in the text box (250-character limit). If this warning message is enabled, it is displayed for each dispenser item during checkout. The staff member clicks OK to acknowledge the message and continue.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Media Dispenser Settings dialog box to save the settings.
    6. +
    +

    Note: +
    If you are using Leap from a workstation that does not have the Polaris staff client installed, the workstation must be set up to use the local security manager for the media dispenser.

    +

    Display Media Dispenser Acknowledgment Message in Polaris ExpressCheck

    +

    To display an on-screen dispenser acknowledgment message in Polaris ExpressCheck:

    +
      +
    1. Open the SelfCheck Unit parameter Polaris ExpressCheck: Enable.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Dispenser acknowledgment message.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Polaris ExpressCheck Enable dialog box.
    6. +
    7. The default message is Checkout Completed Successfully! Please retrieve item from the dispensing unit. You can edit the message using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin); the string ID is EC_TEXT_CHECKOUT_COMPLETE_DISPENSER
    8. +
    +
    +

    A similar message is printed on the ExpressCheck check-out receipt. The default message is Please retrieve items from the dispensing unit. As appropriate items are checked out at the ExpressCheck workstation, the screen also displays the reminder message Please remove items from the dispensing unit. These messages are also available for editing using Polaris Language Editor. The strings IDs are
    EC_TEXT_CHECKOUT_RCPT_DISPENSER
    EC_TEXT_DISPENSER_REMINDER

    +

    If the system fails to communicate with the dispenser unit during checkout, the ExpressCheck workstation displays an on-screen message, also available for editing. The default text is The dispensing unit is not responding. The item cannot be checked out. Please contact a librarian. The string ID in Polaris Language Editor is
    EC_TEXT_CHECKOUT_ERROR_DISPENSER_COMM

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media Dispenser_-_Errors_and_Troubleshooting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media Dispenser_-_Errors_and_Troubleshooting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecd8cdcb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media Dispenser_-_Errors_and_Troubleshooting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Media Dispenser - Errors and Troubleshooting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Media Dispenser - Errors and Troubleshooting

    +

    You may occasionally encounter the following conditions and error messages:

    +
      +
    • The system finds no matching item in the dispenser unit - The check-out process continues. The item is checked out anyway, because it is assumed that the item is in the case.
    • +
    • No response from the dispenser unit - An item is scanned for check-out but the dispenser unit does not respond. In Polaris ExpressCheck, the item check-out fails and a message is displayed (see Enable the media dispenser). In the staff client, the following message is displayed: The dispensing unit is not responding. The item may be retrieved manually. Do you want to check this item out? The staff member must select Yes or No. Yes continues the check-out transaction; No stops the transaction.
    • +
    • An item will fill a hold request or is already held - There is no change to current program behavior, which depends on library policy. These checks take place before the system queries the dispenser unit.
    • +
    • Items in the dispenser may have a status of Held - For example, the empty case may have been on the hold shelf or self-pickup shelf. The Held item is be checked out to the patron according to normal check-out processing. The patron goes through a normal dispenser check-out to retrieve the disc.
    • +
    • The item is already out to this patron - Since the item has not gone to In, and so is not in the dispenser, the transaction is a simple renewal.
    • +
    • Patron claims not to have an item checked out from the dispenser - Treat this claim as you would any other claim in Polaris.  Staff may have to check the dispenser.
    • +
    • Polaris shows that an item is already out to another patron - If library policy allows the patron to continue check-out and the item is in the dispensing unit, the item is removed from the last patron’s record and checked out to the current patron. If the item is not in the dispensing unit, the item is now checked out to the current patron in Polaris but in fact is either still out to the previous patron or is missing. The library should follow its usual practice for trouble-shooting missing items, and if the item is found it should be checked in from the patron record.
    • +
    • The dispensing unit has “locked” the item for another patron - At ExpressCheck, this might happen if a patron scans an item case and the check-out is successful, but the patron leaves the case at the workstation and does not retrieve the item. Another patron scans the case, but the dispenser has queued the item for the first patron. The ExpressCheck workstation then displays a message: The dispensing unit is holding this item for another library member. The item cannot be checked out. Please contact a librarian. You can edit the message in Polaris Language Editor (string ID EC_TEXT_CHECKOUT_ERROR_DISPENSER_BIND).
    • +
    • Multi-part sets - The recommended practice is to have a separate item record for each part. If one item barcode is attached to a multi-part set, ExpressCheck has no provision to define or display an alert message for multi-part sets. In the staff client, if the item record contains a blocking note to check for multiple parts, the note is displayed as usual.
    • +
    • Post check-out error conditions - These situations may occur after Polaris processing is complete:
    • +
    • Check out is successful but the patron does not claim disc - The transaction is complete in Polaris. The dispenser unit has a time out. Trouble-shooting for the dispenser unit is possible by examining the dispenser queue.
    • +
    • Check out is successful but the wrong item is dispensed - This might happen if an item is incorrectly loaded. The patron must contact library staff, who must examine the dispenser unit.
    • +
    • Check out is successful, but no item is dispensed - This might happen if the item material type is not correctly entered or identified. The patron must contact library staff, who must examine the dispenser queue.
    • +
    • Check out is successful, but the DVD case already contains another item - This might happen if the correct item was not loaded into the dispenser unit. The patron should return the item to library staff.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media_Dispenser_ Circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media_Dispenser_ Circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26dc84bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPmedia/Media_Dispenser_ Circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + Media Dispenser Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Media Dispenser Circulation

    +

    The Polaris staff client, Leap, and Polaris ExpressCheck support circulation from media dispenser units. These units consist of a tower of dispensers, each holding up to 100 media discs (DVDs, CDs. Blu-Ray discs).

    +

    To queue the media in the dispenser, a staff member or patron scans the item barcode on the empty case. When the system finds a matching barcode in the unit, and there are no blocks preventing the item's circulation, the patron scans her barcode into the media dispenser unit to retrieve the item.

    +

    Polaris supports one media dispenser unit (one network address) per location (branch organization). At each branch, multiple staff client, Leap, and Polaris ExpressCheck workstations can connect to the location’s unit.

    +

    The Polaris integration that enables circulation via a media dispenser is available by separate license. Polaris ExpressCheck workstations and the Polaris ExpressCheck application are also available to your library by separate contract. For information about setting up the workstations and setting the Polaris Administration parameters that control Polaris ExpressCheck functions, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

    +

    Note: +
    The media dispenser can be used with or without RFID.

    +

    With the few exceptions noted below, circulation processes from the Polaris staff client, Polaris Leap, or Polaris ExpressCheck do not differ from normal procedures.

    +

    Polaris Staff Client and Leap +

    +

    Patron authentication and checking for patron and item circulation blocks occur as in normal check-out processing, before the system checks for dispenser items. Then, when an item is scanned and a material type is detected that has been identified for dispenser processing by the check-out workstation’s branch, Polaris queries the dispenser unit specified in the Network location setting for the workstation’s branch. If a matching item barcode is found in the dispenser unit, the item check-out continues. If you have opted to display a message to staff, a message is displayed for each dispenser item checked out.

    +

    Bulk check-out, which is used when processing items for Outreach Services and Borrow by Mail, also supports dispenser circulation. If a dispenser item is encountered during bulk check-out, a message is displayed and the item is checked out.

    +

    Staff Client and Leap Receipts +

    +

    At the end of the patron’s check-out process, the printed receipt includes the text defined for the workstation’s branch in Polaris Administration. The text is printed after any library custom text. If you have chosen to include the dispenser location, this information is included for each item checked out, indicating the dispenser and slot number for the item.

    +

    Offline Processing +

    +

    The dispenser unit can be queried in offline mode and the check-out can continue.

    +

    Check-In +

    +

    Establish the appropriate procedures with library staff for loading checked-in items into the dispenser and reshelving the empty cases. Other than this workflow, no special conditions or exceptions apply to dispenser items when they are checked in.

    +

    Holds

    +

    The check for hold requests happens before the check for dispenser material type. The item may become Held before being assigned to the dispenser. Staff can re-assign the item after it becomes Held, depending on policy.

    +

    Floating items

    +

    The check for floating happens before the check for dispenser material type. If the item can float in, the system then checks the dispenser material type. Dispenser items may float to another branch. If no dispenser controls have been defined at the receiving branch, there is no change and the item circulates normally. If dispenser controls have been defined at the receiving branch, the item behaves according to that branch’s dispenser settings.

    +

    Lost, missing, and other status transitions to In - If the check-in message has been enabled and the material type matches a material type defined for the dispenser unit, the check-in message is displayed as usual.

    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck +

    +

    As in the staff client, patron authentication and checking for patron and item circulation blocks occur as in normal check-out processing, before the system checks for DiscXpress items. Then, when an item is scanned and a material type is detected that has been identified for DiscXpress processing by the check-out workstation’s branch , Polaris queries the dispenser unit specified in the Network location setting for the workstation’s branch. If a matching item barcode is found in the dispenser unit, a message is displayed on the check-out screen . At the end of the check-out session, the dispenser acknowledgment message is displayed. The patron must acknowledge the message to continue. If the message is not acknowledged, the process times out as in any other check-out.

    +

    ExpressCheck Receipts +

    +

    If the patron opts to print a receipt or if the receipt prints when the patron selects Exit, the system uses the receipt text specified for the workstation branch . If the option to print individual receipts for each item has been enabled for the ExpressCheck unit, the message prints at the end of each item in the dispenser unit. If you have chosen to include the dispenser location this information is included for each item checked out, indicating the dispenser and slot number for the item.

    +

    Note: +
    If the patron opts to not print a receipt or to receive a receipt by e-mail, no additional dispenser receipt is printed.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnoticeParams/Notification_Parameters_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnoticeParams/Notification_Parameters_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58106261 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnoticeParams/Notification_Parameters_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,165 @@ + + + + + + + + Notification Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Notification Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available on the Parameters > Notification tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    ParameterOrg LevelsDescriptionDefault
    +

    Active default notification delivery option

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    +
    +

    Identifies the default delivery method for notices, if not specified in the patron record. This parameter affects only the notice queue, not the patron record itself.

    +
    +

    Mailing Address

    +
    +

    Notification options

    +

    +
    +

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Identifies the notice types, languages, and notification delivery methods that organizations use, as well as settings for overdue, hold request, and e-mail reminder notices. See Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony) for detailed information.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Notice history: hold notices time threshold

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Controls how long pick-up and cancelled hold notices are kept in the patron’s notice history. The default setting is 90 days; the maximum value is 9,999 days. See The Notification History for detailed information.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Notice history: item and account notices time threshold

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Controls how long overdue, fine, bill, and reminder notices are kept in the notice history. The default setting is 90 days; the maximum value is 9,999 days. See The Notification History for detailed information.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_By_E-mail.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_By_E-mail.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8664a5d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_By_E-mail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delivering Notices By E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delivering Notices By E-mail

    +

    You can send overdue, billing, fine, hold request, reminder, and routing notices by e-mail. Most e-mail notices are sent automatically by the Polaris E-mail Manager, and posted by the SQL Server job Notice Processing, the job that processes all notices.

    +

    Note:
    A separate SQL job, Hold Notice Processing, processes e-mail and text message (SMS) first and second hold notices separately. Designed to run multiple times per day, the job runs every 4 hours from 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m by default. See Hold Notice Processing for E-Mail and Text Message Notices.

    +

    The To field in an e-mail notice is taken from the e-mail address field in the patron record. You specify the From field, any Reply To address, and any footer with the Notification Options parameter. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location. When you send e-mail notices, the appropriate queue is cleared, the transaction is posted, and a summary report is sent to the e-mail addresses specified when you set up notification. The summary report is also available from the Report Manager. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar to open the Report Manager. In the Report Manager, select Notices, Email, Email_SummaryReport.

    +

    Special announcements are free-text e-mail messages, such as for a book sale, that are not part of the automated notification process. You can send special announcements by e-mail manually, using the Polaris E-mail Manager utility. See Send e-mail special announcements.

    +

    The default e-mail format is HTML. However, certain e-mail servers send HTML messages in odd format, or insert strange characters in the messages. You can specify plain-text format for specific patrons through an option in the Patron Registration workform - General view. Add general data to a patron record. You can also set plain text as a default setting in new patron records. See Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults and Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements.

    +

    Note:
    Plain-text e-mail notices have the following limitations:
    —Detailed content is displayed in separate lines instead of in one line or one group.
    —Combined notices may include some fields that are correctly suppressed in HTML notices.

    +

    E-Mail Failure Detection

    +

    Before e-mail notices are sent to patrons, an internal test message is sent to the Reply-to e-mail address if available; otherwise, the test message is sent to the From address specified in the Notification options parameter. This message verifies the SMTP connection and notifies the sender application that e-mail processing will run. The reporting server connection is also checked. If the SMTP connection or reporting server connection cannot be verified, the e-mail notices are not generated or sent. Failures are recorded in the PolEmailManager program log file: [server]\PolarisProgramData\[version]\Logs\POLEMAILMANAGER
    The notices are not posted, and are re-sent the next time notices are processed.

    +

    If an e-mail notice is sent but fails due to a poorly formatted e-mail address, or the recipient server rejected it, the failure is recorded in the notification log and the notice set to print instead. It is then posted with the rest of the printed notices when they are run. These failures are listed in the Email delivery failure report available from the Polaris Shortcut bar. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar to open the Report Manager. In the Report Manager, select Notices, Email delivery failure to list any failed e-mail notices. You can filter this report by date and reporting branch.

    +

    Note:
    This process does not apply to reminder notices. When a reminder e-mail notice fails due to an invalid e-mail address, it is posted and not sent to print.

    +

    An e-mail notice may be sent but fail due to reasons other than being poorly formatted or rejected by the recipient mail server. These failures can occur, for example, when a mailbox is busy or temporarily unavailable. In this case, the notice is not posted and is re-sent the next time notices are processed.

    +

    Note:
    If no patrons receive scheduled e-mail messages, the SMTP server may not be set up properly. For help with SMTP installation, see your Windows server help file.

    +

    Automatic E-Mail Report

    +

    You can set Polaris to send a report to one or more e-mail addresses after the notices are generated. The report includes the starting and completion date and time, the number of notices of each type that were generated, and the name, barcode, and e-mail address (if any) of each recipient. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_by_Text_Message.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_by_Text_Message.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b79f0cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Delivering_Notices_by_Text_Message.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delivering Notices by Text Message + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delivering Notices by Text Message

    +

    Text message notices to patrons’ mobile phones are sent as part of normal notice processing. You can send notices by text message alone, or in addition to another method. For example, you can send a request notice by text message only, or by conventional e-mail with an additional text message. As with other notification methods, you can set text messaging as the patron’s preferred notification method in the Patron Registration workform.

    +

    Text messages are sent by the Polaris E-mail Manager as part of conventional e-mail notice processing. They are included in the Summary Report as a separate notification category. For more information about e-mail notice setup and processing, see Delivering Notices By E-mail.

    +

    Note:
    A separate SQL job, Hold Notice Processing, processes e-mail and text message (SMS) first and second hold notices separately. Designed to run multiple times per day, the job runs every 4 hours from 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m by default. See Hold Notice Processing for E-Mail and Text Message Notices.

    +

    Successful text message notices are posted and the appropriate patron and item records are updated accordingly. Failed text message notices where text message is the specified notification method are converted to print. Failed “additional” text messages are not converted.

    +

    Text Message Notice Delivery Failure Report

    +

    The report TXT Delivery Failure Report is available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. To access the report, select Utilities > Reports and Notices (Notices folder). The report lists all failed TXT notices for a specified time period for selected or all organizations. The organizations are the notification branches (the branches responsible for sending the notices). TXT notice failures may be detected for empty e-mail body content or SMTP server failure. A message that cannot be delivered because the address has changed or the remote server does not respond (a delivery failure) is not included in this report.

    +

    For each failure, the report lists the patron’s barcode, branch, and name; the phone carrier and the carrier’s SMS e-mail address; the failure reason and failure date. If multiple failed notices were generated to the same patron during the specified time period, the patron is listed multiple times.

    +

    Patron Record Settings for Text Message Notices

    +

    To enable patrons to receive notifications by text message, the Send additional TXT message check box must be selected for the notice type on the corresponding tab of the Notification options dialog box (Parameters | Notification in Polaris Administration). When the Send additional TXT message check box is checked for the notice type, and the Registration workform for the patron has a mobile phone number and carrier entered for text messaging, an additional text message will be sent. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number and carrier, the Send additional TXT message check box is automatically checked on the Registration workform. If e-mail reminder notices are set up for the library organization, and the patron's registration does not contain an email address but does contain a phone number and carrier for text messaging, reminder notices will be sent to these patrons unless they opt out.

    + +

    + PhoneTXTCarrier.gif 

    +
      +
    • To set text messaging as the patron’s preferred notification method, select TXT message from the Notification option drop-down list.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The default notification settings for normal and express patron registration are controlled by the Patron Services parameters Patron registration options and Express patron registration options respectively. You can select TXT Messaging as the default notification option for either or both of these parameters.

    +

    + PhoneTXTNotice.gif 

    +
      +
    • Select (check) Additional TXT notice if you plan to send text messages in addition to another notice format. For example, the first overdue notice may be sent by e-mail and an additional text message. This option must be checked both in the Notification options parameter for the type of notice and in Registration workform for the individual patron.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Additional text message notices do not appear in the patron’s notification history.

    +

    + PhoneTXTAdd.gif 

    +

    Text Message Content

    +

    You can edit text message notices in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). If you edit the messages, be aware of these rules:

    +
      +
    • Character limit - Individual messages are limited to 160 characters including the subject line, if specified, and the sender’s address if the carrier includes it. Longer messages may be split and sent as multiple messages.
    • +
    • URLs - You can include a URL in the message, but note that the URL takes up message space and the link may not be active, depending on the patron’s carrier.
    • +
    • Languages - Text messaging does not support Unicode, so text message notices in languages with diacritics are not rendered accurately.
    • +
    +

    For more information about editing notices and a list of default text message notices, see the Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) Guide or WebAdmin online Help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Fine_Notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Fine_Notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36338a3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Fine_Notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fine Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fine Notices

    +

    Fine notices, sometimes called collection notices, are optional. They are typically sent to patrons to warn them that their account will be referred to a collection agency within a certain period of time. A patron receives a fine notice when the amount owed exceeds a specified amount, excluding fines defined as recent. (Patrons whose accounts are already in collection do not receive fine notices.) The criteria for fine notices are independent of the criteria you specify for overdue and billing notices, although a patron typically receives several overdue notices and bills before receiving a fine notice. Patrons receive only one fine notice, but they may continue to receive overdue notices or bills.

    +

    If you use a collection agency that does not send an initial warning notice to patrons, you may want to set up fine notices. However, if you use a collection agency that handles the initial patron notification for collection, such as UMS, you may not want to send your own fine notices. You can also send fine notices even if you do not use collection agency services, specifying your own message for the notice.

    +

    Fine notices can be delivered as print notices, e-mail notices, or text messages. When fine notices are generated, the notices are posted in the transaction file, and the notice queue is cleared. See: Set Up Fine Notices

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Managing_Notification.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Managing_Notification.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e590cb5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Managing_Notification.htm @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Notification + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Notification

    +

    Your library can send a variety of notices to patrons, staff, and third-party vendors. Polaris Administration settings determine which types of notices are automatically generated and how they are delivered. You can customize many notice elements in Polaris Administration, and use Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) to customize notice text. In addition, because notices are generated with Polaris Reports, you can customize the standard Polaris notice formats and any system-generated information using Report Manager and Visual Studio.net. If your library uses a third party service for notices, you can export certain notices directly to the vendor.

    +

    You can set up notification options at the system, library, or branch level that specify the kinds of notices used, the library that generates the notices, the delivery methods, notice intervals, language, and other options. Additional Polaris Administration settings specify how long to keep notification history in patrons' records.

    +

    Based on the notification options your library has set, the patrons and items that should be included in the next notification cycle are identified and the notices are queued. When the next notification cycle runs, the notices in the queue are sent according to the specified delivery method. Once notices are generated, the notice queue is cleared and the process begins again.

    +

    You can track notifications using notification reports.

    +

    The following types of notices can be generated in Polaris:

    + +

    Notices can be generated and sent in following ways:

    +
      +
    • Mail +
    • +
    • Email +
    • +
    • Text message +
    • +
    • Phone, search the Polaris help for "Delivering Notices by Phone-Outbound Telephony"Phone
    • +
    +

    The Notification Library

    +

    The notification library is the library responsible for producing and sending the notice and whose return address ordinarily appears on the notice. (If notices are generated for all libraries or branches from a central location, you can specify a central processing branch return address instead.) For overdue, bill, and fine notices, you can designate the patron’s branch, the item’s branch, or the lending branch as the notification library. This setting determines how patrons and items are identified for notification, based on the settings of the designated notification library.

    +

    For example, the notification library setting affects which patrons should receive overdue notices in these ways:

    +
      +
    • Notification library is patron’s library - If the patron’s record includes one or more overdue items, and if the patron’s registered branch is the notification library, a notice is generated from the patron’s library for all the overdue items, regardless of the items’ assigned branches or where the items were checked out.
    • +
    • Notification library is item’s library - If the patron’s record includes one or more overdue items having an assigned branch that is the notification library, a notice is generated from the item’s assigned branch for those items. A patron can receive more than one overdue notice from different branches, each notice listing different items.
    • +
    • Notification library is lending library - If the patron’s record includes one or more overdue items having a lending branch that is the notification library, a notice is generated from the lending branch for those items. A patron can receive more than one overdue notice from different branches if the overdue items were checked out at different branches.
    • +
    +

    It is also possible for branches to set the notification library for bills so that a patron can receive two bills for the same item. You may want to avoid this situation by coordinating the bill notification library settings among branches, even if you allow a patron to receive more than one overdue notice from different branches.

    +

    Example:

    Library A sets the overdue notification library to loaning branch. That is, they send overdue notices to borrowers transacting at Library A. Library B sets the overdue notification library to patron’s branch. That is, they send overdue notices to Library B patrons. If a Library B patron borrows an item from Library A, and the item goes overdue, the patron gets an overdue notice from Library A and Library B. The Library B notice includes the overdue items transacted at Library A as well as any other overdue items the patron may have. If Library A and Library B set their notification library for bills in the same way, the patron may receive two bills for the same item.

    +

    You can avoid the potential confusion of duplicate bills if all branches use the same setting for the bill notification library. However, even if the settings allow the patron to receive two bills for the same item, the patron’s account is charged only once. In this case, the Organization column in the Patron Status workform - Account view indicates System for the bill, rather than Library A or Library B.

    +

    Bills are triggered when the specified number of overdue notices have been sent. If the notification library for overdues is different from the notification library for bills, it is possible that a patron will not receive a bill at all. To prevent this situation, libraries should coordinate their settings.

    +

    Example:

    The notification library for overdue notices (Library A) is the loaning branch and this branch sends two overdue notices. The notification library for bills (Library B) is the item’s assigned branch, and this branch sends three overdue notices. The bill will not be triggered until three overdue notices have been sent, but this will not happen because Library A sends only two overdue notices.

    +

    The Notification History

    +

    A staff member can view a patron’s notification history from the Patron Status workform - General view and the Patron Registration workform - Status view. Staff members can open or print a patron’s notices from this view, or link to the related item records for overdue, bill, overdue reminder, and hold notices. The illustration shows a sample Patron Status workform.

    +

    Entries are retained in the notification history for periods you specify with two Polaris Administration Notification parameters, available at the system, library, or branch level:

    +
      +
    • Notice history: hold notices time threshold - Controls how long pick-up and canceled hold notices are kept in the notice history. The default setting is 90 days; the maximum value is 9,999 days.
    • +
    • Notice history: item and account notices time threshold - Controls how long overdue, fine, bill, and reminder notices are kept in the notice history. The default setting is 90 days; the maximum value is 9,999 days.
    • +
    +

    An entry is kept in the notification history if it falls within the specified period of time, the related item is checked out, claimed or lost by the current patron, and current charges are not resolved. The entry is kept under these circumstances even if the related item is purged or deleted from the database; in this case, the title is prefixed by [DELETED].

    +

    Note:

    Additional text message notices, which are sent in addition to another method, do not appear in the patron’s notification history. For example, if both a printed notice and an additional text message notice are sent for an item, only the printed notice appears in the notification history.

    +

    Calculating the Number of Days to Keep the Notice History

    +

    The number of days to keep the notice history is counted from the date following the notice through and including the number of days you specify in Polaris Administration. The notice is then cleared from the history during overnight processing.

    +

    Example:

    The Notice history: hold notices time threshold parameter is set to 10. A hold notice was generated on the 1st day of the month. The notice history will be cleared on the 12th when the overnight process runs after midnight, counting from the 2nd of the month (the date following the date the notice was generated) through the 11th.

    +

    Notice Delivery Methods

    +

    You can specify the delivery method for most notices as print, e-mail, text message to mobile phone, phone (if you use outbound telephony software), or patron preference (print, e-mail, phone, text message). Patron preference is set up during patron registration, when the patron selects a preferred delivery method for notices. The setting is available in the Notification option box on the Patron Registration workform Addresses view.

    +

    Note:

    If the Notification option is set to None in a patron’s record, that patron will receive no notices at all.

    +

    Also, you can optionally send text messages to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to print, e-mail, or voice phone notification. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.

    +

    If you select a delivery method for a particular kind of notice other than patron preference, the method you specify overrides the patron preference if the methods do not match.

    +

    Example:

    A library decides to send overdue notices according to patron preference, but to send bills only as print notices. A patron who has specified a preferred delivery method of e-mail receives overdue notices by e-mail, but receives a bill as a printed notice.

    +

    There are certain exceptions. If the delivery method is e-mail or phone, but Polaris detects an e-mail failure or a phone failure, Polaris generates a printed notice. (For more information about e-mail failures, see E-Mail Failure Detection). Also, if the delivery method is patron preference, and the patron’s preference is changed, notices are not duplicated. This means that if a notice is delivered by one method and then the patron record is changed to a different delivery method, Polaris does not deliver the same notice again by the new method.

    +

    Hold Notice Processing for E-Mail and Text Message Notices +

    +

    A separate SQL job, Hold Notice Processing, processes e-mail and text message (SMS) first and second hold notices separately from print notices and phone notices. Designed to run multiple times per day, by default the job runs every 4 hours from 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m by default. See Polaris SQL Jobs Reference.

    +

    With this method, e-mail and text message notices are not sent in the early morning when the print notification job runs. Patrons can receive their notices sooner because the notification can be scheduled to be more closely timed with your library’s workflow for filling the requests. If your library has self-pickup for requested materials and you stock the shelves at certain times during the day, you can time the notices to go out near the time the items will be ready for pickup.

    +

    Delivery Methods for Serial Claim Notices +

    +

    For serial claim notices, you can specify a delivery method of print, e-mail, or supplier preference. The supplier preference method is indicated in the supplier record. If you select a delivery method other than supplier preference, the method you specify overrides the supplier preference if the methods do not match.

    +

    Notification Language

    +

    If you have purchased the appropriate licenses for Polaris PowerPAC, you can send print and e-mail notices in English and the licensed languages. Multilingual phone notification is available by separate license. Once set up, a patron receives notices in the licensed language if the Language field in the Patron Registration workform is set to that language.

    +

    If a multilingual license is purchased, the option is available at the system, library, and branch levels. Because branches can determine a notification library for each notice type, a notice may be generated for any patron from nearly any branch (see The Notification Library). If the patron designates a preference for notices in Spanish, for example, the patron might receive some notices in Spanish and others in English depending on how the notification library option is set. For example, if the option is set to Lending branch, some branches may have enabled Spanish notices and others not. If the notifying library has enabled Spanish notices, the notice is sent in Spanish. For system-wide consistent results, you will need to coordinate branch settings.

    +

    Polaris provides default English and multilingual text (if licensed) and support that text in the standard formats.

    +

    Notes:
    Language options do not apply to exported notices.Text messaging does not support Unicode, so text message notices in languages with diacritics are not rendered accurately.

    +

    Customizing Notice Text with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor)

    +

    You can customize the text of both English and multilingual notices in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor.) You can add or customize language strings at the system, library, and branch levels. Branch settings override library settings; settings made at the library level override system-level settings.

    +

    You need the Polaris permission WebAdmin access: Allow to use the WebAdmin. In Polaris Administration, this permission is available at the system level under the System Administration security node. For more information about setting Polaris permissions, see Granting Permissions.

    +

    To access WebAdmin, open your browser and navigate to the site where WebAdmin is installed. You must supply your Polaris username, password, and domain to log in to WebAdmin. For detailed information about using the Language Editor, select the WebAdmin Help tab.

    +

    Exporting Notices to a Notification Service

    +

    You can set up notification in Polaris Administration to export both print and phone notices to a third-party service. If your library has a contract with a service such as Unique Management Services (UMS) to send printed notices, you can export overdue, bill, fine, request pick-up, and request cancellation notices directly to the vendor. The following information from the patron record is included in the exported notices file:

    +
      +
    • Last name, first name, middle name, title, suffix
    • +
    • Patron barcode
    • +
    • Patron code description
    • +
    • Registered branch name
    • +
    • Address for notices and bills (if none has been defined, the home address is used; if there is no home address, the first available address is used)
    • +
    • Phone numbers
    • +
    • E-mail addresses, primary and alternate
    • +
    • Preferred language
    • +
    +

    The following additional information is included for each notice type:

    +
      +
    • Overdue notices and bill - Item title, author, material type, barcode, due date, check-out location, check-out date, and overdue notice number. Bills also include any replacement cost, processing fee, overdue fine, and the patron account balance.
    • +
    • Fine notices - Fee reason, author, title, call number, check-out date, amount, patron’s account balance, patron’s last activity date.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If the charge is not linked to any item, the item data fields are blank.

    +
      +
    • Request pick-up notices - Item title, author, material type, barcode, date held, held until date (unclaimed date), pickup branch ID, pickup branch name.
    • +
    • Request cancellation notices - Item title; item author; item material type (item-level request only); item barcode (item-level request only); request creation date; cancellation reason.
    • +
    +

    Tip:

    If the patron record is set to receive notices by e-mail, print, or text message, or if the notice type is set for e-mail or print only, these notices are sent as designated and are not exported.

    +

    The vendor determines the notice text.

    +

    Your library may have a contract to use TALKINGtech’s i-tiva for telephone notification. You can export overdue, fine, request pick-up, and request cancellation notices to i-tiva. TALKINGtech generates the telephone notices and sends an update back to Polaris via SIP (Standard Interchange Protocol), which updates the patrons’ notification history. If a telephone notice fails, Polaris sends the notice in print. Polaris supports TALKINGtech’s Format B and Format C. Format B is the default setting. If your library uses Format C and you upgrade Polaris, you must specify Format C with a command line parameter in the Notice Processing Job. Contact your Polaris Site Manager for assistance.

    +

    Exporting Txt Messages to i-tiva

    +

    You can export text messages for patrons without carrier information to the i-tiva SMS service. The text messages are exported to a notice file report that is sent to i-tiva for processing, and i-tiva then sends back a success notice after each text message goes out. The incoming success notice updates notification information in the patron record.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Export checkbox for this option.
    2. +
    3. Complete the Txt Message export section to provide the FTP Server URI, Username, and Password for where the notice file report will be exported.

      When the Export option is selected, a warning note about disabling text receipts is displayed. Select OK to close the message.
    4. +
    +

    Unspecified is an option in the carrier list in Leap, the staff client, and PowerPac. Carrier information is required for patrons with a Notification preference of Txt Message. When the Export Txt Message option is selected, Unspecified is the default carrier when the patron has selected a txt message phone number but has not selected a carrier.

    +

    Notification Statistical Reports

    +

    Polaris offers two reports that track notification statistics—the Notification Summary and the Notification Detail Report. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and select the Notices folder.

    +

    The reports offer statistics for print, e-mail, and phone notices by language, and summarize and compare statistics across three fiscal years.

    +

    Notification Summary Report

    +

    This report summarizes the total number of print, e-mail, and phone notices produced by fiscal year and notification language, and provides comparative statistics for the two previous fiscal years. The report also includes a summary total of all notices produced by language. Success and failure statistics are included for e-mail and telephone notices as well. You can filter this report by branch, and set the fiscal year by ending month. (Because telephone notices run at the server level, they are not included if you choose to filter the report by a branch.)

    +

    Notification Detail Report

    +

    This report provides detailed statistics on the number of notices produced by notification method and notice type, each with a separate count by language. You can filter this report by branch, and set the fiscal year by ending month. (Because telephone notices run at the server level, they are not included if you choose to filter the report by a branch.)

    +

    Note:
    In the Notification Detail Report, combined notice statistics are reported as individual notice types. For example, a combined notice that includes an overdue notice and a hold request pick-up notice is reported twice - once as an overdue notice and once as a hold request pick-up notice.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Overdue_Notices_Bills_and_Combined_Notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Overdue_Notices_Bills_and_Combined_Notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c295dbf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Overdue_Notices_Bills_and_Combined_Notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + + Overdue, Missing Part, Combined Notices and Bills + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overdue, Missing Part, Combined Notices and Bills

    +

    Polaris provides up to three scheduled overdue notices for a patron, followed by an optional bill. You can also choose to combine notices for patrons due to receive more than one type.

    +

    See also: Set up overdue notices, bills, and combined notices

    +

    Overdue Notices

    +

    You can send up to three overdue notices, scheduling the interval between them. Each overdue interval is measured from the date and time the item status changed to overdue, not from the date and time that the previous notice was sent. An item qualifies for inclusion in an overdue notice when the number of days specified in the interval setting added to the due date of the item falls before midnight on the processing date. If an item has qualified for overdue notice processing, but is returned before the notice is sent, the item is removed from notice processing.

    +

    Overdue notices can be delivered through the mail as print notices, by e-mail, by phone, or as text messages to mobile phones. Print and e-mail overdue notices include the following information:

    +

    Note:
    Text messages must be brief. The default text message for overdue notices, which can be edited in Polaris Language Editor, is Library items are overdue. Please call the library or check your account online.

    +
      +
    • Library return address - Taken from the Return address field in the notification branch’s organization record. If no return address is specified, the notice uses the organization’s Primary address. For full-page and Z-fold printed notices, the notification branch’s primary phone number is also included.
    • +
    • Date - Date the notice was generated
    • +
    • Printed notice text - Polaris supplies default text for the header and introductory paragraph, which you can edit in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). See Customizing Notice Text with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).
    • +
    • E-mail notice text - Polaris supplies default text for the subject line and introductory paragraph, which you can edit in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). See Customizing Notice Text with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).
    • +
    • System-supplied list of overdue items - Items are sorted first by notice number (1st, 2nd, 3rd), next in title order. Call numbers are truncated to 60 characters.
    • +
    • (Optional) Claimed items - You can include a list of claimed items with their status (Claim Never Had, Claim Returned).
    • +
    +

    When overdue notices are generated, the date is recorded in the appropriate item records, the notices are posted in the transaction file, the patron notification history is updated, and the notice queue is cleared.

    +

    Missing Parts Notices

    +

    Missing part notices are sent when a staff member checks in an item using the Special Item Check-in Tools option on the Check In workform and selects Missing part: block and notify. Special Item Check-in Tools option on the Check In workform

    +

    The notices are sent according to the setting in the Notification options parameter for the check-in branch, and the patron preference set in the patron's record. You can set up missing part notices to be printed and mailed; sent via email; sent via text message; or sent by phone message. Missing part notices can be sent as reminder notices or in a combined notice. The Missing Part Mailer is available under Utilities > Reports and Notices > Notices > Claims > Missing Part Mailer.

    +

    The missing part notice contains similar information whether delivered by mail, email, or text message.

    +

    The Subject line in both the email and text message is: Missing Library Item

    +
      +
    • The default text for the email, printed, and phone notice is: An item was returned to the [check-in library name] missing a part(s). Please return the part(s) to the library within 48 hours to avoid fines.
    • +
    • The default text for the text message notice is: [item title] was returned to the library with parts missing. Please return the part(s) to the library within 48 hours to avoid fines.
    • +
    • The following item details are included in the emailed and printed Missing Part notice: Title, Author, Barcode, Format, Due Date, Check-out Date, Check-out from [check out library name|
    • +
    • The text regarding the missing item is included on the printed and email notice if it was entered when the staff member checked the item in using the Special Item Check-In option.
    • +
    +

    Bills

    +

    You can follow up overdue notices with a bill. Bills are scheduled for processing at a standard interval from the date and time the item status changed to overdue, not from the date and time that the last overdue notice was sent (see Overdue Notices). An item qualifies for inclusion in a bill when the number of days specified in the interval setting added to the due date of the item falls before midnight on the processing date. If an item has qualified for bill processing but is returned before the notice is sent, the item is removed from notice processing. Bills may include overdue charges and replacement fees. Settings for free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. are not used in the overdue fine calculation, but closed days and dates are included. For more information about replacement fees, see Setting Replacement Fee Defaults.

    +

    Bills can be delivered as print, e-mail, or text message notices. Print and e-mail bills include the following information:

    +

    Note:
    Text messages must be brief. The default text message for bills, which can be edited in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor), is Money is owed on your library account. Please call the library or check your account online.

    +
      +
    • Library return address - Taken from the Return address field in the notification branch’s organization record. If no return address is specified, the notice uses the organization’s Primary address. For full-page and Z-fold printed notices, the notification branch’s primary phone number is also included.
    • +
    • Date - Date the notice was generated
    • +
    • Printed notice text - Polaris supplies default text for the header and introductory paragraph, which you can edit in Polaris WebAdmin.
    • +
    • E-mail notice text - Polaris supplies default text for the subject line and introductory paragraph, which you can edit in Polaris WebAdmin.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    For information on customizing text, see Customizing Notice Text with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).

    +
      +
    • System-supplied list of items billed - Each item listing includes the replacement cost and overdue charges, and the total of these for each item. Call numbers are truncated to 60 characters.
    • +
    • System-supplied total amount billed - Total amount due for the bill.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you set overdue notice processing to include claimed items, the bill also includes claimed items. See Overdue Notices.

    +

    Bills are generated as part of overdue notice processing. When the bills are generated, the date is recorded in the appropriate item records, the notices are posted in the transaction file, the patron notification history is updated, and the notice queue is cleared. If the system-level Patron Services setting Overdues: billed items set to lost (Lost item charge options parameter) is set to No, replacement and overdue charges are written to the patron account, the item status remains Out, the item remains in the patron’s Items Out list, and the lost item counter is not incremented. If Overdues: billed items set to lost is set to Yes, replacement charges are written to the patron account, the item status changes to Lost, the item is removed from the patron’s Items Out list, and the lost item counter is incremented. When Overdues: billed items set to lost is set to Yes, a separate setting determines whether overdue fines are also written to the patron account. See Overdue Fines on Lost Items.

    +

    Combined Notices

    +

    When notification processing identifies a patron as qualifying for more than one type of notice, Polaris can combine overdue, bill, and request notices (in that order), so that a single notice is sent.

    +

    To ensure that all notices for a particular patron are included in the combined notice, set the same notification method for each notice type and the combined notice. For example, if the combined notice method is set to Patron Preference, set each overdue notice, bill, and hold notice to Patron Preference. Otherwise a notice type may not be included in the combined notice. For example, if you set the notification method for bills to Print but set other notice types to Patron Preference, the bill will be included in the combined notice only if the patron preference happens to be Print. In this situation, to ensure that bills will be printed for all patrons who are due for them, you would need to generate the billing notices in addition to the combined notices. If Include claimed items and Combined patron notices options are selected on the Overdue & Bill tab, the Missing Part notice is included in the combined notice.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_overdue_bill_fine_or_request_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_overdue_bill_fine_or_request_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a77aaf29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_overdue_bill_fine_or_request_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + Print Overdue, Bill, Fine, or Request Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Overdue, Bill, Fine, or Request Notices

    +

    To print overdue, bill, fine, or hold request notices:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar (staff client). The Polaris Reports dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Expand the Notices folder.
    2. +
    3. Select the Overdues, Holds, or Fines folder under Notices. The appropriate notices are displayed in the Available Reports list.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Mailers in various formats for combined notices are listed individually under Notices. Bills are available in the Overdues folder.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the notice format you want to print:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Full Page Mailer - 8.5 x 11 inches
    • +
    • Half Page Mailer - 9 x 5.5 inches, commonly available half-page mailer stock
    • +
    • Post Card - 6 x 4 inches
    • +
    • Z Fold Mailer - 8.5 x 11 inches, folds so addresses are exposed in window envelope
    • +
    • Z Fold Mailer Oversized - 8.5 x 14 inches, folds so addresses are exposed in window envelope
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Printed notices designed to be inserted in an envelope are formatted for standard #10 window envelopes.

    +

    The Report Setup Wizard appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization(s) whose notices you want to run.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The organizations available for selection are set in the Report server profile. For more information, see Specify a server for Reporting Services.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Sorting Options tab.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Your system’s user-defined fields for patron records are included in the sorting options.

    +
      +
    1. Select a sorting order in the list on the left, and click the right arrow button.
    2. +
    +

    The field is moved to the list on the right, indicating that it is selected for sorting. You can select more than one field. The notices will be printed sorted by the first  field, and within the first field by the second field, and within the second field by the third field.

    +

    The reporting branch name is selected by default. If your library or system does not do central notice processing, you may want to leave this option in place. You can select additional sorting fields. If you do central processing, you may want to move Reporting branch name to the left (unselected) list, and instead select a more useful primary sort for mailing—for example, Patron address zip. You must select at least one sorting option.

    +

    To remove a field from the selected list on the right, select the field and click the left arrow button.

    +
      +
    1. Click Submit. After a few moments, the notices are generated and the Report Preview window opens.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    A message asks if you want to post the notices to the database.

    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Move the message box to one side and decide whether to post after you print the notices.
    • +
    • If you are satisfied with the notices in the preview, click Yes.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you click Yes, the notices are posted (recorded) as issued, and the appropriate queue for the notice type and branch you chose is cleared. However, the set of notices remains available in your workstation’s My Documents/My Reports folder, and can be reprinted from that location. The file is overwritten each time notices are generated.

    +
      +
    • If you see problems, click No. This option allows you to start over, without posting or printing the notices.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can click the arrows at the bottom of the Report Preview window to see the notices one by one. Or, click the Pages tab to see several notices at once.

    +

    Tip:
    You can print a limited range of pages to test the notices. Note that by design, title and author information is limited to 100 characters on all notices.

    +
      +
    1. Click the printer icon ReportPrintBtn.gif to print the notices. The Print dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Modify the printer settings, if necessary, and click OK. The notices are printed.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are printing both English and other language notices, they are interfiled.

    +
      +
    1. Close the Report Preview window.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Printing Chinese, Japanese, or Korean notices - If Chinese, Japanese, or Korean notices are printing incorrectly, you may need to install a different printer driver. Check your printer documentation for more information.
    • +
    • Printing Acquisitions notices - Canceling Orders and Claiming.
    • +
    • Printing Collection Agency Synchronization Report - See Collection Processing Reports.
    • +
    • Customizing notice text - The default fine notice text for both mailed and emailed notices is: Our records show an outstanding fine balance on your account. Please contact the library as soon as possible to resolve these fines. You can use the WebAdmin tool to change the text. The mnemonics are as follows:
      • Printed and Mailed notices: NT_FINE_M_TEXT
      • Emailed notices: NT_FINE_EM_TEXT
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_patron_billing_statements.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_patron_billing_statements.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c98004a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Print_patron_billing_statements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print patron billing statements + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print patron billing statements

    +

    A patron billing statement details all the outstanding charges on a patron’s account. It does not affect the notices queue.

    +

    To print patron billing statements:

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar (staff client). The Polaris Reports dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Expand the Notices folder.
    4. +
    5. Select the Overdues folder under Notices. The notices are displayed in the Available Reports list.
    6. +
    +

    + ReportsOverdues.gifa) 

    +
      +
    1. To print patron billing statements by organization, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Patron Billing Statement by Organizations. The Report Setup Wizard opens.
    2. +
    +

    + ReportStateOrg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the organizations whose patrons should receive a billing statement.
    2. +
    3. In the Minimum amount box, type the minimum amount of outstanding charges on a patron’s record that determines whether a billing statement is generated for the patron.
    4. +
    5. In the Maximum amount box, type the maximum amount of outstanding charges on a patron’s account that determines whether a billing statement is generated for the patron.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. To print patron billing statements for specific patrons, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Patron Billing Statement by Patron Barcode. The Report Setup Wizard appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ReportStatePat.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type or scan the patron’s barcode in the Patron barcode box. You can enter multiple barcodes, separated by commas (255 characters maximum). The barcodes are not validated; if you enter an incorrect barcode, a billing statement for that patron will not be generated.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Submit. After a few moments, the statements are generated and the Report Preview window opens.
    2. +
    +

    + ReportBillState.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Review the statements, if necessary. You can click the arrows at the bottom of the Report Preview window to see the notices one by one. Or, click the Pages tab to see several statements at once.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you see problems, or change your mind about printing the statements, close the Report preview window.

    +
      +
    1. Click the printer icon ReportPrintBtn00514.gif to print the statements. The Print dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Modify the printer settings, if necessary, and click OK. The statements are printed.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Printing_Notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Printing_Notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..869a3b4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Printing_Notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Printing Notices

    +

    You can print overdue, bill, fine, and hold request notices at any time from the Utilities menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. For overdue and fine notices, a nightly process automatically places the notices in the queue for delivery. The queue for hold request notices is built item-by-item as each item’s status changes to Held. After you print the notices, if you choose to “post” the notices, data is written to the database records and the appropriate queue is cleared. These printed notices are produced according to the paper format you specify. If a notice lists too many items to fit on a single form, a second form is generated for the same patron, using the same header text and listing the remaining items. (The Post Card format does not contain specific item information.) The notices are sent to the address in the Address for notices and bills field in the patron record (Patron Registration workform - Addresses view). See: Print overdue, bill, fine, or request notices.

    +

    You can also print Patron Billing Statements, which list all the current charges on a specific patron’s account. You can print these notices for a specific patron or patrons, or on an organization basis, automatically printing a statement of current charges for each patron who owes an amount within a specified range. This statement is intended to help patrons understand exactly what they owe, and does not affect the notices queue in any way. Like other printed notices, Patron Billing Statements are sent to the address in the Address for notices and bills field in the patron record. See: Print patron billing statements.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Reminder_Notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Reminder_Notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd8742c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Reminder_Notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reminder Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reminder Notices

    +

    You can send email reminder notices to any qualifying patrons with a valid email address, regardless of the patrons’ preferred notification method, and optionally send an additional text message. If a patron's record does not contain an email address, but does contain a phone number and carrier for text messaging, reminder notices will be sent via text message. See: Setting Up E-mail Reminder Notices.

    +

    The following email reminder notices are available:

    +
      +
    • Almost overdue notice/Auto-renew - A notice is sent a specified number of days before a patron’s item becomes overdue. If automatic renewals are enabled, and the patron has items out that were renewed, the notice also includes these items. The notice also lists other items that the patron currently has checked out. Polaris supplies the item title, call number, volume, due date, format, check-out branch, and number of renewals left for each item. When an Almost Overdue reminder notice is sent regarding an item, the date is recorded in the item record. The default setting in the Notification options parameter is to exclude integrated eContent titles in reminder notices, but your library can change this default setting.
    • +
    • Patron record expiration notice - A notice is sent a specified number of days before a patron’s registration expires. The notice alerts the patron to contact the library. Polaris supplies the patron’s home address, telephone number, and email address for verification.
    • +
    • Inactive patron notice - A notice is sent to a patron whose account has had no activity for a specified number of days. The notice advises the patron to visit the library or call to update the patron’s registration. Polaris supplies the patron’s home address, telephone number, and email address for verification.
    • +
    • Missing part notice - A notice is sent to a patron if an item was checked in using the Special Item Check-in function, and the Missing part: block & notify option was selected.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Last Activity Date field in the patron record tracks patron activity. It is updated in the following circumstances. Staff client: item check-out; renewal; quick-circ item check-out; a claim is made on an item. PAC: log-in to patron account; placing and modifying hold and ILL requests; online renewal; patron information updates; payments; access to remote databases that require log-in. Polaris ExpressCheck, SIP self-check units: check-out and renewal; patron account access; payments. Time and print management applications: log-in. Inbound telephony: Access account information and renew items.

    +

    Reminders are sent according to the settings for the patron’s registered branch (not the item’s assigned branch or the loaning branch).

    +

    Reminder notices are sent only once. The notice processing program runs daily so that reminder notices are not re-sent to the same patrons. You can modify the subject line and introductory text of all reminder notices using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). See Customizing Notice Text with Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).

    +

    Reminder notices are not exported to outside vendors.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Request_Pick-Up_Second_Pick-Up_Cancelled_Request_Notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Request_Pick-Up_Second_Pick-Up_Cancelled_Request_Notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8001cce7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Request_Pick-Up_Second_Pick-Up_Cancelled_Request_Notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Request Pick-Up, Second Pick-Up, & Cancelled Request Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Request Pick-Up, Second Pick-Up, & Cancelled Request Notices

    +

    Polaris offers three types of notices related to hold requests: request pick-up, second pick-up, and cancelled request notices. See: Set up request pick-up, second pick-up, and cancelled request notices.

    +

    Note:
    A separate SQL job, Hold Notice Processing, processes e-mail and text message (SMS) first and second hold notices separately from print notices and phone notices. Designed to run multiple times per day, the job runs every 4 hours from 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m by default. See Hold Notice Processing for E-Mail and Text Message Notices.

    +

    Request Pick-Up Notices

    +

    Request pick-up notices inform patrons that an item that fills a hold or ILL request is available for pick-up. When an item is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for a hold request and the item’s circulation status changes to Held, the item is included in request notice processing. The patron who should receive the notice is identified by the link to the request. The notification library for hold request notices is always the pick-up library. If the pick-up library is changed, a new notice is generated when the item status becomes Held at the new pick-up branch. (If the notice has not been generated for the first pick-up location, the first notice is deleted.) ILL items are also included in request pick-up notice processing. When an item record is created for an ILL request, and the circulation status becomes Held, the item is included in the request notice.

    +

    Request pick-up notices can be delivered as print notices, e-mail notices, by telephone, or by text message. Print and e-mail request notices include the following information:

    +

    Note:
    Text messages must be brief. The default text message for request pick-up notices, which can be edited in Polaris Language Editor, is The item you requested [first 20 characters of title] is available for pickup at branch [branch display name] until [unclaim date]. One message is sent for each item held. If items are held at more than one branch, the patron will receive a notice from each branch.

    +
      +
    • Library return address - Taken from the Return address field in the pick-up library’s organization record. If no return address is specified, the notice uses the organization’s Primary address.
    • +
    • Date - Date the notice was generated
    • +
    • Printed notice text - Polaris supplies default text for the header and introductory paragraph, which you can edit in Polaris Language Editor.
    • +
    • E-mail notice text - Polaris supplies default text for the subject line and introductory paragraph, which you can edit in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).
    • +
    • System-supplied list of  items to pick up - The items are sorted by title. Each entry includes the title, author, item material type, item barcode, and Held-Till date.
    • +
    +

    When request notices are generated, the date is recorded in the appropriate item records, the notices are posted in the transaction file, and the notice queue is cleared.

    +

    Second Pick-Up Notices

    +

    You can follow up a patron’s first hold pick-up notice with a second notice, sent after a time interval you specify, for requests that remain with a Held status. The second notice can be sent by print, phone, e-mail, or TXT message. The default text is the same as that defined for the first notice, and can be edited in WebAdmin (Polaris Language Editor).

    +

    The notice is sent if the number of days specified is reached and the request status is still Held. If the hold request status becomes Unclaimed after the process to send the second notice runs, the notice will be removed from the notification queue. Your settings also apply to ILL requests, which do not have an Unclaimed status; in this case, the second notice is sent if the item has not been checked out within the specified period.

    +

    Note:
    There is no program dependency between the notice interval for the 2nd hold notice and your setting for Number of days held for pickup, specified in the Requests parameter Holds options. If the notice interval is greater than the number of days held for pickup, the notice is never sent, so you may want to coordinate these settings.

    +

    When the notice is sent, it appears in the patron’s notification history as 2nd hold notice. The item record also shows the notice date. Status reports such as Delivery Failure reports include the second hold notice with the hold notices. The second hold notice is also included in the total hold notice count for statistical reports.

    +

    Note:
    Because multiple first and second hold notices may appear in a single print, e-mail, or text message notice, the notification log lists the type for all hold pick-up notices as 2 (regular hold notice request).

    +

    For best results with printed notices, the Holds overnight processing job should run before the Notices processing job.

    +

    Note:
    A separate SQL job, Hold Notice Processing, processes e-mail and text message (SMS) first and second hold notices separately from print notices and phone notices. Designed to run multiple times per day, the job runs every 4 hours from 9:00 a.m. to 8:00 p.m by default. See Hold Notice Processing for E-Mail and Text Message Notices.

    +

    Cancelled Request Notices

    +

    Cancelled request notices are sent when a request status changes from Active, Pending, or Inactive to Cancelled. A request status changes to Cancelled in these circumstances:

    +
      +
    • The last item linked to a bibliographic record is deleted
    • +
    • A purchase order is cancelled
    • +
    • A request is manually cancelled from the staff client
    • +
    • A request is cancelled from PAC
    • +
    +

    However, cancelled request notices are not sent in these circumstances:

    +
      +
    • A request status changes from Held to Unclaimed, then changes to Cancelled
    • +
    • A Held item is checked out to another patron, and the original request is not reactivated
    • +
    • A staff member is prompted to hold an item to fill a request but declines to fill the request with that item, and chooses not to reactivate the request
    • +
    • An item is checked out to a patron who has a request for it, and the request status is still Pending. The request is automatically cancelled because the patron has the item.
    • +
    • A request is accidentally cancelled, then reactivated for the same patron before notice processing
    • +
    +

    Notices for Integrated Ebook Requests

    +

    If your library offers PAC users integrated eContent such as cloudLibrary ebooks, patrons may request ebooks and cancel their requests from the PAC. Notices for “held” ebooks (requests available for checkout) and cancelled requests are available for ebooks. These notices can be sent via e-mail, TXT message, or patron preference if the preference is one of these methods.

    +

    Note:
    Second pick-up notices are not available for ebooks.

    +

    When ebook request notices are enabled, the patron receives a notice when a requested ebook is available for checkout and download. Request notices are sent when the request is placed in PAC and when the request is placed in the cloudLibrary (former 3M Cloud Library) application. The subject line and notice text can be edited in Polaris WebAdmin; the Notice “product” language strings are NOTICE_EBOOKREQAVAILSUB (subject line) and NOTICE_EBOOKREQAVAILBODY (notice text).

    +

    The same text defined in WebAdmin is used for both e-mail and TXT notices. Text can be defined for the hold notice and the hold cancel notice, but the text defined for the notice will be used in both the email and TXT notification messages. Because of the character limit for TXT messages, the text of the notification is kept to a minimum.

    +

    When cancelled ebook request notices are enabled, the patron receives a notice when he or she cancels the request from the PAC patron account. When the patron cancels multiple requests in one action, these notices are combined in one e-mail notice. TXT notices are sent separately due to message length restrictions. (If the patron cancels a request from the cloudLibrary application, no notice is sent.) The subject line and notice text can be edited in WebAdmin; the PowerPAC “product” language strings are PACML_EBOOKCANCELSUBJ (subject line) and PACML_EBOOKCANCEL (notice text).

    +

    The notices are sent close to the time of the action taken in PAC, according to the settings of the patron’s branch. Request and request cancel notices appear in the patron’s notification history. The notices are logged with other notice types, and failures are reported in the e-mail and TXT failure reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Send_e-mail_special_announcements.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Send_e-mail_special_announcements.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c76280d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Send_e-mail_special_announcements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Send e-mail special announcements + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Send e-mail special announcements

    +

    Most e-mail notices are run automatically by the SQL Server job Notice Processing. However, you can send special announcements manually.

    +

    Note:
    A separate SQL job, Hold Notice Processing, processes e-mail and text message (SMS) first and second hold notices separately. See Hold Notice Processing for E-Mail and Text Message Notices.

    +

    To send special announcements by e-mail:

    +
      +
    1. Be sure that e-mail prerequisites have been set up. See Set up e-mail notification prerequisites.
    2. +
    3. On the Polaris database server, double-click the desktop shortcut to
       /Program Files/Polaris/[version]/Bin/PolEmailManager.exe. The Polaris E-mail Manager dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Type a topic for the message in the Subject box (1,000 characters maximum).
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    Particularly for longer messages, you may want to create the message text in a word processor, spell-check the text, and save it as a text file. Then copy and paste the message into the Polaris Email Manager.

    +
      +
    1. Type the announcement text in the Message box. (You may want to add “Please do not reply to this message.”) The maximum message size is 64 KB.
    2. +
    3. Click Send to send the message. The special announcement is sent to all patrons with a valid e-mail address.
    4. +
    5. Click Close to exit the Polaris E-mail Manager dialog box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_notification_prerequisites.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_notification_prerequisites.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb8076dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_notification_prerequisites.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set up e-mail notification prerequisites + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up e-mail notification prerequisites

    +

    To prepare Polaris for e-mail notification:

    +
      +
    1. In Polaris Administration, set the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service for the organization. Use the computer name where the SMTP service is installed.
    2. +
    3. On the Polaris database server, create a desktop shortcut to /Program Files/Polaris/[version]/Bin/PolEmailManager.exe. The PolEmailManager.exe utility is used to send special announcement e-mail messages.
    4. +
    5. Set up reverse DNS in Active Directory for your network. Reverse DNS is used to authenticate a sender’s address with the domain. This step helps ensure your patrons will receive their e-mail notices. As a security measure, certain Internet service providers block e-mail to their users if they cannot find the sending server.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_reminder_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_reminder_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7682dada --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_e-mail_reminder_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up E-mail Reminder Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up E-mail Reminder Notices

    +

    To set up e-mail reminder notices:

    +

    Note:
    For reminder notices, the notification library is always the patron’s registered branch.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Parameters for the organization, and click the Notification tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Notification options. The Notification Options dialog box - General tabbed page is displayed. Verify that e-mail and text messages (if you will send additional text messages) have been specified as possible delivery methods. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    4. +
    5. Click the Reminder tab.
    6. +
    +

    + NoteReminder.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To send text message reminders in addition to e-mail reminders, select (check) Send additional TXT message.
    2. +
    +

    A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to enable the additional reminder text message but a specific patron prefers not to receive the additional reminder text messages, clear the Additional TXT notice option in the patron record.

    +
      +
    1. To set up “almost overdue” notices, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    +

      +
    1. Select (check) Almost overdue.
    2. +
    3. Select or type the number of days before an item is overdue that qualifies the patron to receive the notice.
    4. +
    5. Select or type the number of days that should elapse between notices. This setting prevents multiple e-mail messages from being sent to the same person over several days.
    6. +
    7. If you want to change the Include integrated eContent titles option, select or clear the check box. The default setting for the Include integrated eContent titles check box is unchecked, meaning these titles do not appear as almost overdue items on reminder notices.
    8. +
    +

    +
      +
    1. To set up reminder notices for patrons whose accounts are due to expire, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Patron record expiration.
    2. +
    3. Select or type the number of days before the registration expires that qualifies the patron to receive the notice.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up reminder notices for patrons whose accounts are inactive, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Inactive patron.
    2. +
    3. Select or type the elapsed number of days with no account activity that qualifies the patron to receive the notice.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up missing part notices for patrons who return multi-part sets that are missing parts:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Missing part notice.
    2. +
    3. Select the notification method.
    4. +
    5. Select Send additional TXT message if you want patrons to get an additional text message for missing parts.
    6. +
    7. If you want to change the default notification method of Patron preference, select a different option.
    8. +
    9. If you want to change the default notification library of Patron's branch, select a different option.
    10. +
    11. If you want to change the return address of Use notification library, select a Use optional address, and select from the list.
    12. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save your settings and close the Notification options dialog box, or select another tab to set up another notice type.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_fine_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_fine_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe62692b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_fine_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Up Fine Notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Fine Notices

    +

    To set up fine notices:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Parameters for the organization, and click the Notification tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Notification options. The Notification Options dialog box - General tabbed page is displayed. Verify that the possible delivery methods have been specified. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    4. +
    5. Click the Fine tab.
    6. +
    7. To enable fine notices, select (check) Fine.
    8. +
    9. Select (check) Export if you export fine notices to an outside vendor for delivery. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tabbed page at the system level. See Exporting Notices to a Notification Service.
    10. +
    +

    Important:
    If you export fine notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail or text message, that method is used. Fine notices cannot be delivered by phone.

    +
      +
    1. Select a delivery method in the Notification Method box. You can deliver fine notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tabbed page except phone. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Fine notices cannot be delivered by telephone. If you set the method to Patron Preference and the patron’s preference is set to Phone in the patron record, the notice will be printed instead.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Send additional TXT message if you want to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones  in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.
    2. +
    +

    If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.

    +
      +
    1. Select the library that should generate the fine notice in the Notification library box.
    2. +
    +

    The notification library is the library responsible for producing and sending the notice. For more information about how this selection affects which patrons and items are identified for fine processing, see The Notification Library.

    +
      +
    1. Set the return address for the notice in the Return address box:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Use notification library - This option uses the address specified in the organization record for the notification library.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Select Use optional address if your notices are processed and sent from a central location.

    +
      +
    • Use optional address - Select this option to set an address other than the notification library. If you select this option, select the organization whose address should appear on the notice.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Specify which user-defined field (UDF) to use for guardian (for patrons under the age of 18). See Reporting Minors. If you specify a guardian UDF, the fine notice regarding the minor’s delinquent account is sent to the minor in care of the guardian, at the guardian’s address.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If your library does not use a UDF for guardian barcode, or if no guardian can be determined, the notice is sent to the minor patron.

    +

    Tip:
    Set this value to one equal or greater than the Second Level Fine amount set in the Patron and Material Loan Limit table. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.

    +
      +
    1. In the Minimum balance box, type the amount owed that a patron must exceed to receive a fine notice. For example, if the minimum balance is set at $50.00, a fine notice is generated when the patron owes more than $50.00.
    2. +
    3. In the Fine age (days) box, specify the number of days old a fine must be to be included in the balance that triggers the fine notice.
    4. +
    +

    Example:
    The Minimum Balance is set to $25.00 and the Fine Age is set to 10 days. If the patron’s fines still exceed $25.00 10 days after the latest fine is incurred, the patron receives a fine notice.

    +

    If you use collection agency services, be sure the Fine age (days) setting is less than the fine age setting for sending an account to collection. This will ensure that the patron receives the notice before the account is sent to collection. See Using a Collection Agency.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save your settings and close the Notification options dialog box, or select another tab to set up another notice type.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_notification_methods_e-mail_options_and_export_location.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_notification_methods_e-mail_options_and_export_location.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cda809f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_notification_methods_e-mail_options_and_export_location.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location

    +

    To set up general notification options:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Parameters for the organization, and click the Notification tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Notification options. The Notification Options dialog box - General tabbed page opens.
    4. +
    5. In the Notification method area, select all the methods that this organization might use to deliver notices. Then make these additional settings as appropriate: + +
      • Select (check) Available in PAC for each method that patrons should be able to choose when self-registering or updating account preferences from PAC.
      • (System level only.) Select Print and Export if you export notices for print delivery. Select Phone and Export if you export notices for telephone notification.
    6. +
    7. The method settings determine which delivery options are available for selection for specific types of notices. +

      Note:
      At the system, library, or branch level you can designate a specific method for each type of notice when you set up the specific notices. If you plan to designate Patron Preference as a notification method, or Supplier Preference for serial claim notices, be sure to select the possible preference options in this list. See Notice Delivery Methods. If you export print or telephone notices to an outside vendor, each branch must set the notification method to Print for all exported notice types if all branches’ notices should be exported.

    8. +
    9. To select the languages in which to send notices: + +

      Note:
      Multi-lingual notices are a separately licensed feature. See Notification Language. When you enable multi-lingual notices here, patrons can also select a preferred language for notification when they register from the PAC; once registered, they can change their language preference from the patron account page (Change Preferences option). Not all languages are available for telephone notification. Text messaging does not support Unicode, so notices in languages with diacritics are not rendered accurately.

      1. Click the Languages link. The Licensed Languages dialog box opens.
      2. Select (check) the languages in which you will send notices, and click OK. +

        Note:
        The read-only Licensed column shows which languages are licensed for your system. If notice translations are not available for a licensed language and you need notification in that language, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    10. +
    11. If this organization sends any type of e-mail notices, set the following options in the E-mail notice area: +
      • From - Type the library e-mail address that should appear in the From field of the e-mail notice.
      • Reply-to - Type the library e-mail address that should appear in the Reply to field of the e-mail notice.
      • E-mail address to use - To use only the primary e-mail address specified in the patron record, select Use E-mail address only. To send the notice to both the patron’s primary e-mail address and an alternate e-mail address, if any is specified in the patron record, select Use both E-mail and Alt E-mail. +
    12. +
    13. For e-mail notices, if you want Polaris to send the notice processing report to a staff member, set these options: +
      • Select (check) Send report for e-mail notice processing. +

        Tip:
        The summary report is also available from the Report Manager. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices on the Polaris Shortcut Bar to open the Report Manager. In the Report Manager, select Notices, Email, Email_SummaryReport. +

      • In the box below the report option, type the e-mail address of the staff member who should receive the report. You can type more than one e-mail address, separating the addresses with a semicolon (;). The maximum number of characters is 255.
    14. +
    15. (System level only) If you have a contract with an outside vendor to send print notices, supply information in the following Print Export fields: +
      • FTP Server URI - Type the full Internet address of the vendor’s FTP server. Your exported notice file will be sent to this address.
      • Logon Name - Type the logon name for the vendor’s FTP server.
      • Password - Type the password for the vendor’s FTP server.
      • Save a local copy - Select this option to save a copy of exported notices. When this option is selected, the copy is automatically saved on the Polaris server to C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\EXPORTNOTICES\Reports

      Note:
      Local copies are not automatically deleted. You may want to purge them periodically.

      If you leave this option unchecked, the notice file is saved in C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Temp on the Polaris server for FTP transmission.

    16. +
    17. (System level only) If you have a contract with an outside vendor to send phone notices, supply information in the following Phone Export fields: + +
      • FTP Server URI - Type the full Internet address of the vendor’s FTP server. Your exported notice file will be sent to this address.
      • Logon Name - Type the logon name for the vendor’s FTP server.
      • Password - Type the password for the vendor’s FTP server.
      • Save a local copy - Select this option to save a copy of exported notices. When this option is selected, the copy is automatically saved on the Polaris server to C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\EXPORTNOTICES\Reports

      Note:
      Local copies are not automatically deleted. You may want to purge them periodically. If you leave this option unchecked, the notice file is saved in C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Temp on the Polaris server for FTP transmission. +

      Note:
      If you export print notices to one vendor and phone notices to a different vendor, you can specify different Export settings for each method.

    18. +
    19. Click Save to save your settings and close the Notification options dialog box, or select another tab to set up a specific notice type.
    20. +
    + +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_overdue_notices_bills_and_combined_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_overdue_notices_bills_and_combined_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea5bfd59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_overdue_notices_bills_and_combined_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up overdue notices, bills, and combined notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up overdue notices, bills, and combined notices

    +

    To set up overdue notices, bills, and combined notices:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Parameters for the organization, and click the Notification tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Notification options. The Notification Options dialog box - General tabbed page is displayed. Verify that the possible delivery methods have been specified.
    4. +
    5. Click the Overdue & Bill tab.
    6. +
    7. Select (check) Overdue if you send overdue notices.
    8. +
    9. In the Overdue section, select (check) Export if you export overdue notices to an outside vendor for delivery. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tabbed page at the system level. See Exporting Notices to a Notification Service.
    10. +
    11. In the First overdue section, set the options for first overdue notices:
    12. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Notice interval box, type or select the number of days (999 maximum) after an item is declared overdue that the item is added to the queue for the first overdue notice.
    2. +
    3. To include claimed items in overdue notice processing, select (check) Include claimed items.
    4. +
    5. Select a delivery method in the Notification Method box.
    6. +
    +

    You can deliver overdue notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tabbed page.

    +

    Important:
    If you export overdue notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail or phone, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail, phone, or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Send additional TXT message if you want to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones  in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.
    2. +
    +

    If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.

    +
      +
    1. Select the library that should generate the overdue notice in the Notification library box.
    2. +
    +

    The notification library is the library responsible for producing and sending the notice. For more information about how this selection determines which patrons and items are identified for overdue notice processing, see The Notification Library.

    +
      +
    1. Set the return address for the notice in the Return address box:
      • Use notification library - This option uses the address specified in the organization record for the notification library.
      • Use optional address - Select this option to set an address other than the notification library if your library uses a central location to process and send notices. If you select this option, select the organization whose address should appear on the notice.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the notification library is set to Item’s branch or Transacting branch, and the return address is set to Use notification library, the return address on the notices is that of the item branch or transacting branch. If you want the return address to be your own, select Use optional address and choose your own branch.

    +
      +
    1. If you send second overdue notices, set the interval and method in the Second overdue section.
    2. +
    +

    To prevent Polaris from generating an overdue notice for a particular overdue level, as well as the overdue levels that follow it, set the overdue level to zero (0). For example, if you do not want to send second and third overdue notices, set the Notice interval for the second overdue to 0.

    +

    The interval is measured from the point when the item status changed to overdue, not from the first overdue notice. The method and settings can be different from the first overdue notice settings. The notification library, return address, and claimed items settings are the same as the first overdue notice settings.

    +
      +
    1. If you send third overdue notices, set the interval and method in the Third overdue section.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you do not send third overdue notices, set the Notice interval for the third overdue to 0.

    +

    The interval is measured from the point when the item status changed to overdue, not from the second overdue notice. The method settings can be different from the first and second overdue notice settings. The notification library, return address, and claimed items settings are the same as the first overdue notice settings.

    +
      +
    1. If you send bills, select (check) Bill and set the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Export if you export bills to an outside vendor for delivery. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tabbed page at the system level. Bills cannot be exported for telephone notification.
    2. +
    3. In the Notice interval box, type or select the number of days (999 maximum) after an item is declared overdue that the item is added to the queue for the billing notice.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Coordinate this setting with your interval settings for overdue notices.

    +
      +
    1. Select a delivery method in the Notification Method box.
    2. +
    +

    You can deliver bills by print, e-mail, or text message if you have selected the method on the General tabbed page. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.

    +

    Note:
    Bills cannot be delivered by telephone. If you set the method to Patron Preference and the patron’s preference is set to Phone in the patron record, the notice will be printed instead.

    +

    Important:
    If you export billing notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Send additional TXT message if you want to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones  in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.
    2. +
    +

    If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.

    +
      +
    1. Select the library to generate the bill in the Notification library box.
    2. +
    +

    The notification library is the library responsible for producing and sending the notice. For more information about how this selection affects which patrons and items are identified for bill processing, see The Notification Library.

    +
      +
    1. Set the return address for the bill in the Return address box:
      • Use notification library - This option uses the address specified in the organization record for the notification library.
      • Use optional address - Select this option to set an address other than the notification library if your notices are processed and sent from a central location. If you select this option, select the organization whose address should appear on the notice.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To send combined notices (see Combined Notices), select (check) Combine patron notices and set the delivery method.
    2. +
    +

    You can deliver combined notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tabbed page. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.

    +

    Note:
    If Combine patron notices is not checked, combined e-mail notices are not automatically generated. However, the option is displayed and functions from the Polaris Reports utility.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save your settings and close the Notification options dialog box, or select another tab to set up another notice type.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_request_pick-up_second_pick-up_cancelled_request_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_request_pick-up_second_pick-up_cancelled_request_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..af841208 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Set_up_request_pick-up_second_pick-up_cancelled_request_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up request pick-up, second pick-up, and cancelled request notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up request pick-up, second pick-up, and cancelled request notices

    +

    These notices are sent according to the settings of the request’s pick-up library. To set up hold request pick-up notices and canceled request notices:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select Parameters for the organization, and click the Notification tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Notification options. The Notification Options dialog box - General tabbed page is displayed. Verify that the possible delivery methods have been specified. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    4. +
    5. Click the Hold Request & Cancellation tab.
    6. +
    7. To enable request pick-up notices, follow these steps:
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Request.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Export if you export request notices to an outside vendor for delivery. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tabbed page at the system level. See Exporting Notices to a Notification Service.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    If you export request notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail or phone, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail, phone, or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    1. Select a delivery method in the Notification Method box. You can deliver request notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tabbed page. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Send additional TXT message if you want to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones  in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.
    4. +
    +

    If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.

    +
      +
    1. To enable second pick-up notices, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) 2nd hold notice.
    2. +
    3. Select the delivery method. You can deliver request notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tabbed page. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location. The default setting is Patron Preference.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you export the regular hold request notice to a third-party service, the second hold notice is also exported.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Send additional TXT message if you want to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected.
    2. +
    3. Set the Notice Interval for the number of days to wait from the date the request became Held before sending the second notice. The count includes the date held. For example, if the item was Held on the 1st of the month and the interval is set to 3 days (the default), the notice is sent on the 3rd. See Second Pick-Up Notices for more details about second request processing.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To enable cancelled request notices, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you export request pick-up notices, and enable cancelled request notices, these are also exported.

    +
      +
    1. Select a delivery method in the Notification Method box. You can deliver cancelled request notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tabbed page. See Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Send additional TXT message if you want to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones  in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT notice option is checked in the patron record, the TXT box is checked for Phone 1, Phone 2, or Phone 3, and a carrier is specified for that phone number. If a patron registers or updates account information online through Polaris PowerPAC and supplies a phone number for text messages and a carrier, this option is automatically checked.
    4. +
    +

    If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.

    +
      +
    1. To enable ebook hold notices, select (check) Ebook request, and select a notification method (e-mail, TXT, or both). See Notices for Integrated Ebook Requests.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Both for the method, the notice is sent either by e-mail or TXT message, depending on the patron’s notification preference. If the patron has not selected either option as a preference, the patron will not receive notification.

    +
      +
    1. To enable notices for cancelled ebook requests, select (check) Cancelled ebook request, and select a notification method. See Notices for Integrated Ebook Requests.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Both for the method, the notice is sent either by e-mail or TXT message, depending on the patron’s notification preference. If the patron has not selected either option as a preference, the patron will not receive notification.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save your settings and close the Notification options dialog box, or select another tab to set up another notice type.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Specify_available_carriers_for_phone_and_text_messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Specify_available_carriers_for_phone_and_text_messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b56595e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPnotices/Specify_available_carriers_for_phone_and_text_messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify available carriers for phone and text messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify available carriers for phone and text messages

    +

    You set up the list of possible mobile phone carriers for conventional phone and text messages in Polaris Administration. The carriers you specify are then available for selection in the Patron Registration workform and when patrons register or update their account information from the PAC.

    +

    To set up text message carriers:

    +

    Note:
    You need the system-level System Administration permission Modify mobile phone carriers: Allow to work with this table.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the system, and select Mobile Phone Carriers. The Mobile Phone Carriers table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To add a carrier, click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Mobile Phone Carriers dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Type the carrier display name in the Carrier Name box (100 characters maximum). This name will appear in the drop-down list of carriers on the Patron Registration workform and the PAC self-registration and contact information update forms.
    6. +
    7. Type the carrier’s SMS (text messaging) address in the SMS Address box (100 characters maximum). Addresses must include the @ sign, which can appear anywhere in the field. This exact address will be used to send text message notices to patrons who use this carrier.
    8. +
    +

    Examples:
    AT&T - @txt.att.net
    Verizon - @vtext.com
    T-Mobile - @tmomail.net

    +
      +
    1. Set the Display setting to Yes to display this carrier in the lists of carriers, and click OK on the dialog box. The Mobile Phone Carriers database table appears with the new carrier entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Polaris provides a list of common carriers in the table. Use this method to suppress a carrier that you do not want to display for selection.

    +
      +
    1. To change a display setting, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the carrier and click ModIcon.gif. The Modify Mobile Phone Carriers dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Set the Display setting to Yes or No, and click OK on the dialog box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved. New carriers are available as options for every organization in the system.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select an entry, click ModIcon00515.gif, and edit the entry. To delete an entry, select the entry and click btnDelete.gif.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the modification or deletion would cause an existing setting to be invalid in a patron record, you receive a warning message when you attempt to save your changes. If you choose to continue, the carrier is set to None in the patron record and text message notices will not be delivered.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/CopyMDBFilesAuto.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/CopyMDBFilesAuto.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5716fb3d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/CopyMDBFilesAuto.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + Enable automatic copying of .mdb files from the server to offline clients + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable automatic copying of .mdb files from the server to offline clients

    +

    Note: +
    Each night, the SQL job OfflineExtract updates the .mdb files automatically. If you are setting up offline Polaris at a time other than at the beginning of the day, you must manually run the SQL Server job to update the .mdb files before copying them to the offline client(s). See Manually update the offline .mdb files

    +

    No matter whether your library is setting up offline processing to upload the offline transaction files manually or automatically, you first need to copy the PolPatron.mdb and PolSystem.mdb files from the server to the designated offline workstations, either by manually copying the files or copying them automatically.

    +

    To enable the Copy Offline Files job that automatically copies the . mdb files from the server to the designated offline workstations, you must create a SQL Server credential, then create a proxy account to associate this credential with the process, so that it can access and update the designated offline workstations. The credential name and proxy name can be anything you choose.

    +

    Note: +
    If you are using automated offline processing, you must also create a credential and proxy to allow the automatic upload process. See Enable and schedule the Automated Offline SQL job.

    +

    To enable the Copy Offline Files job to automatically copy .mdb files from the server to the designated offline workstations:

    +
      +
    1. Create the SQL Server credential. The credential account must be a domain account that has rights to the domain workstations to which the job will copy the .mdb files.
    2. +
    3. Then create the proxy under PowerShell.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Once the credential and proxy are set up, the SQL Agent can copy the .mdb files from the server to the designated workstations.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Copy_files__server_manu.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Copy_files__server_manu.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be7da522 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Copy_files__server_manu.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + Copy files from the server to the offline client manually + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy files from the server to the offline client manually

    +

    Note: +
    Instead of manually copying the .mdb files, you can set up a job to automatically copy the .mdb files from the server to all the designated offline workstations. See Enable automatic copying of .mdb files from the server to offline clients.

    +

    To copy files from the Polaris server to the offline client manually:

    +

    Note: +
    The Offline Extract Job runs automatically each night, but if you are copying the offline Polaris files from the server at a time other than at the beginning of the day, manually run the SQL Server task, Offline Extract job. See Manually update the offline files.

    +
      +
    1. Select the following files in the ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Offline folder on your library’s server:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • PolPatron.mdb +
    • +
    • PolSystem.mdb +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Copy the files to one of the following folders in the offline client:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • If no datalink is used: Local drive:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\offline. This folder is created by default when the staff client is installed. If you are using multiple offline clients, you must copy the .mdb files to each offline client. +
    • +
    • If a datalink is used:Local drive:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\datalink\offline +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Administrators can override the default location with a registry entry, and create a convenient location in a common area such as a network share. First create a Polaris or UDL instance (if there is one) folder at that location. However, do not include the new folder in the registry entry, because it is automatically appended. The registry entry should consist of network path\offline.

    +

    See also: Working Offline.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Managing_Offline_Circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Managing_Offline_Circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..479ba8c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Managing_Offline_Circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + Managing Offline Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Offline Circulation

    +

    Your library can use Polaris offline when the Polaris server is not accessible, such as during an upgrade or when you use the Bookmobile. The offline files contain the transactions that occurred while the workstations were disconnected from the main server.

    +

    To manage offline circulation in Polaris Administration, you can set up a highly automated process that copies and retrieves the offline transactions from the workstations and automatically loads them into the database, or you can opt for a more manual process for transferring and uploading the transaction files.

    +

    With either the manual or automated offline process, the offline files PolPatron.mdb and PolSystem.mdb must first be copied from the server to the workstations that will be used offline. These .mdb files are updated automatically each night by the Offline Extract SQL job, but if you are copying the files to the workstations at a time other than the beginning of the day, you must run the job manually to ensure that the files are updated.

    +

    After the .mdb files are updated, you can copy them from the server to the designated offline workstations manually or automatically. To copy the .mdb files automatically, you must enable the SQL job, Copy Offline Files,which automatically updates the offline files on designated workstations. The job is disabled by default because it must be run under an account that has rights to copy the files to the local workstations on a network. To create the account, first create a SQL Server credential and then create a proxy account that associates this credential with the process that allows access to the workstations. The credential name and proxy name can be anything you choose.

    +

    If your library is implementing automated offline processing, whereby the offline transaction files are uploaded automatically to the server, you must also set up a credential and proxy to allow this process.

    +

    The procedure staff use when working offline is the same whether your library is set up for manual or automatic uploading of the transaction files.

    +

    Important:
    The procedures described in this unit differ for Polaris Hosted customers. Polaris Hosted customers can find specific instructions for installing the Polaris staff client and working offline on the Polaris Hosted Utilities page or the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com).

    To use the Automated Offline process, the Polaris system used for offline processing must be directly accessible by the SQL Server where the Copy Offline and the Automated Offline Upload jobs and processes are executed.

    In a Polaris library with their databases running in a hosted environment, the workstations designated for offline processing must be directly connected to the SQL server to use Automated Offline. If the Polaris client is installed on a local workstation that is not connected to a terminal server via a Remote Desktop connection, the user must manually copy the .mdb files to work offline and must also manually copy the transaction files.

    +

    For information on the steps you must take to ensure that the offline workstations are prepared for offline transactions, whether you are implementing the automatic upload process or using the manual upload process, see:

    + +

    If you are implementing automated offline processing, see: Setting Up Automated Offline Processing

    +

    If you are implementing offline circulation with manual uploading of transaction files, see: Setting Up Offline Circulation for Manual Uploading.

    +

    For procedures staff members use when working offline, whether the transactions are uploaded automatically or manually, see: Working Offline.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Manually_update_the_offline_files.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Manually_update_the_offline_files.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee493867 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Manually_update_the_offline_files.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Manually update the offline .mdb files + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Manually update the offline .mdb files

    +

    The Offline Extract job runs automatically each night, but you need to run it manually if, for example, you want to start using offline Polaris in the middle of the day and include that morning’s transactions in the offline database.

    +

    To manually run the SQL Server job that updates the offline files:

    +

    Note:
    This procedure does not apply to Polaris Hosted customers. Contact your Polaris Site Manager if it is necessary to update the offline files manually. Polaris Hosted customers can also find specific instructions for working offline on the Polaris Hosted Utilities page or the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com).

    +
      +
    1. From any in-library client with SQL Server, display the SQL Server Enterprise Manager window.
    2. +
    3. Select the production server, and display the contents of the following folder: Management\SQL Server Agent\Jobs
    4. +
    5. Right-click the Offline Extract job, and select Start job from the context menu. The job runs, and the offline files are updated.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_auto_offline.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_auto_offline.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..914e7755 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_auto_offline.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Setting Up Automated Offline Processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Automated Offline Processing

    +

    With automated offline processing, libraries can automatically retrieve offline files from library workstations and load them into the database without library staff intervention. When automated offline processing is enabled via a system-level parameter, all transactions (files with a .TRN extension) for patron registrations, check-ins, and check-outs are pulled from the designated offline workstations to the server.

    +

    Note: +
    The designated offline workstation could include a terminal server located on the same network as the library’s SQL server.

    +

    The process then uploads the transactions to the Polaris database, renames the .TRN files with a .DON extension, and logs the results of the upload. Upload logs are generated for each branch or for all offline branches, and then the logs are emailed to specified staff members.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    When calculating fines for uploaded check-in transactions, the system uses the number of days specified in the Patron Services Administration parameter Free days (bulk).

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_man_upload.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_man_upload.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f186046 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Set_up_man_upload.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Offline Circulation for Manual Uploading + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Offline Circulation for Manual Uploading

    +

    If your library is not using automated offline processing, the offline transaction files (.TRN) files must be copied manually from the offline workstations and uploaded to the appropriate directory. You can upload transaction files to any directory, anywhere on the network share. But you must first create the appropriate Polaris\[version]\offline folder in that directory, before you upload the files. Administrators can specify the filepath for offline transaction files on the workstation during staff client installation.

    +

    When staff members are done using offline Polaris, the transaction files from each offline client must be copied to the online staff client workstation, located by default at:

    +

    Local Drive:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\OfflineTransaction
     or
    Local Drive:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\datalink\OfflineTransaction)

    +

    When you upload the files, a report (log file) is created. The file extension changes from .TRN to .LOG. For example, the file name PTF 2017 06 01 0913 _workstation name.LOG consists of the following elements:

    +
      +
    • PTF is an abbreviation for Polaris Transaction File
    • +
    • 2017 is the year the file was created
    • +
    • 06 is the month
    • +
    • 01 is the day
    • +
    • 0913 is the time (using the 24 hour clock)
    • +
    • workstation name is the machine name of the offline client
    • +
    • LOG is the extension
    • +
    +

    Under certain conditions, warning messages appear in the upload report. This generally occurs when an item was checked in or checked out offline, but the circulation status is not In or Out when uploaded to online Polaris. The item that circulated offline would have caused a block or alert if it had circulated online; for example, a patron exceeds the overdue item limit at check-out, or an item that fills a hold request is checked out. The warning messages in the upload report alert the staff that some follow-up action or an automatic update by Polaris may be necessary. See Upload Report Warning Messages.

    +

    +

    +

    Holds Processing at Upload

    +

    When an offline file with check-in transactions is uploaded, eligible items are trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for holds by default. This may be a problem for some libraries, where staff might overlook the upload report indicating that an item has been trapped, and reshelve the item instead of holding it. In this case, set the Patron Services parameter Offline: Trap holds at check-in to No to suppress any holds processing when offline check-in transactions are uploaded. The default setting is Yes, which allows holds processing at upload. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    +

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/View_and_upload_offline_transaction_files.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/View_and_upload_offline_transaction_files.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a34bba57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/View_and_upload_offline_transaction_files.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + View and upload offline transaction files + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View and upload offline transaction files

    +

    Note:
    This procedure differs for Polaris Hosted customers. Polaris Hosted customers can find specific instructions on the Polaris Hosted Utilities page or the Innovative Customer Supportal (https://support.iii.com).

    +

    To view and upload offline transaction files to your online client:

    +

    Tip: pBookmobileIcon.gif
    Click this button on the Shortcut Bar to display the Bookmobile workform.

    +
      +
    1. Using your online staff client, select Circulation, Bookmobile from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. The Bookmobile workform appears. The list displays the transaction files available on the local drive.
    2. +
    +

    + pBookmobile.gif 

    +

    In a terminal server environment, specify which transaction files you want to display in the Transaction files to be uploaded list:

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Options. The Bookmobile: Tools Options dialog box appears. Then select a Display files option:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Created by logged on user - Files created by the user currently logged on
    • +
    • Created by workstations at this branch - Files created by workstations at the branch
    • +
    • All offline transaction/log files - All files on the computer. In non-terminal server environments this option is selected and cannot be changed.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the transaction files were created in a non-terminal server environment, but you are working in a terminal server environment, you can click Find File (or press ALT+N) and navigate to the local machine’s files. Select the files (up to 50 at a time) to list them.

    +
      +
    1. To view files before uploading them, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the transaction files in the Transaction files to be uploaded list. You can select up to 50 files at a time.
    2. +
    3. Click View File. The View Transaction file dialog box displays the files.
    4. +
    5. When you are finished viewing the files, click Close on the dialog box.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Specify the number of days to omit from overdue fine calculation, if any, in the Free days box or click Pick a date and select a date from the calendar. See Free Days.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    When you select a date from the calendar, the system automatically calculates the number of free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation.. The date box reflects the number of free days selected.

    +

    The specified number of days will be omitted from fine calculation when check-in transactions are uploaded. If you do not enter a value, the system uses the value set by the Patron Services parameter Free days (bulk) in Polaris Administration parameters. See Free Days.

    +
      +
    1. To set error handling during upload, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Upload File. The Error Stop Option dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options, and click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +
      +
    • Click stop on errors if you want the file upload process to stop for any file in which Polaris finds an error. When errors are found, a message indicates why the file is not being uploaded.
    • +
    • Click continue and get error report in the end if you want Polaris to complete the file upload process and then compile an error report.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Upload File to upload the selected files. The files are transferred to the Transaction files already uploaded list with a .log extension.
    2. +
    3. To view the report, select the file in the Transaction files already uploaded list, and click View Report.
    4. +
    +

    If the log files were created in a non-terminal server environment, but you are working in a terminal server environment, you can click Find Report (or press ALT+O) and navigate to the local machine’s files. Select the files to display them in the Transaction files already uploaded list.

    +

    Important:
    Always review the report for errors after uploading offline files. See Upload Report Warning Messages.
    To delete a transaction report, on the Bookmobile workform, select the log file in the Transaction files already uploaded list, and click Delete report.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Working_Offline.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Working_Offline.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63c549e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/Working_Offline.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Working Offline + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Working Offline

    +

    The process for working offline in Polaris is the same whether your library has opted to use the automated offline uploading process or the manual uploading process. For more information on these options, see Managing Offline Circulation.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris Hosted customers should not connect to Polaris Terminal Server to work offline.

    +

    To work offline in Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. When you log on to Polaris, select the Work off-line check box on the Polaris Log On dialog box.
    2. +
     

    Note:
    Your workstation may be set to automatically log you on when you open Polaris, and the Log On dialog box is not displayed. In this case, select File > Log Off > then File, Log On to display the Log On dialog box. For more information about setting Polaris for automatic log-on. Automatic Staff Client Log-On.

    Once you have logged on, you are ready to work offline. Polaris creates a new transaction file for the session and automatically generates a file name.

    1. Do any of the following tasks using offline Polaris:

    Note:
    Patron records created offline receive a Verify Patron block. Resolve a Verify Patron block.

    Note:
    In offline circulation, the due date calculation is based on the Standard Loan Period of the workstation’s branch, not the user’s branch. However, the Loaning Branch recorded in the transaction and in the item record is the logged-on user’s branch. This allows libraries to gather statistics for different bookmobile stops based on user log-on, while maintaining a consistent loan period for the bookmobile (the workstation branch).

    If your library does not use automated offline processing, you must upload the offline transaction files manually. See View and upload offline transaction files.

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/enable_the_sql_job.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/enable_the_sql_job.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ee6da43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/enable_the_sql_job.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Enable and schedule the Automated Offline SQL job + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable and schedule the Automated Offline SQL job

    +

    When the Automated Offline job runs, it pulls the .TRN files from the offline folder location defined in the system-level parameter Offline (Automated): Directory where offline TRN files are stored.

    +

    To enable and schedule the Automated Offline SQL job:

    +

    Note: +
    You can also run this job manually.

    +
      +
    1. Create the server credential and proxy that allow the Automated Offline SQL job to access the designated offline workstations and pull the transaction files from them: +

      Note:
      You can use any name for the credential and proxy.

      1. Create the credential - The credential account must be a domain account that has access to the domain workstations from which the job will pull the offline circulation transactions (.TRN files).
      2. Create the proxy that associates the credential with the job under Operating System (CmdExec).

    2. +
    3. Ensure that the System-level Offline (Automated): Enable automatic offline uploading parameter is set to Yes. See also: Set up Offline (Automated) Parameters.
    4. +
    5. Schedule the Automated Offline SQL job. No default schedule is specified. You can also run the job manually.

      When the job runs, it finds the TRN files that are stored on the workstations in the directory specified in the parameter Offline (Automated): Directory where offline TRN files are stored. It then pulls these files from the workstations to the server, uploads the transactions into the Polaris database, renames the .TRN files with a .DON extension, and logs the results of the upload.

      Note:
      If no .TRN files are found, the SQL job history includes the message: There were no TRN files copied.

    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/log_file.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/log_file.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bf4be2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/log_file.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Automated offline log processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Automated offline log processing

    +

    If your library has set up automated offline processing, a System-level Patron Services parameter Offline (Automated): Generate one upload log per branch specifies whether one or multiple upload logs are generated. If the parameter is set to Yes, (the default), a log file is generated for each offline branch. If the parameter is set to No, a single log file is generated for all offline branches. Log files are saved to: \\SERVER\c$\ProgramData\Polaris\<version>\Logs\Offline

    +

    Another parameter Offline (Automated):Send offline upload log report to email address, which can be set at the System, Library, or Branch level, specifies the email addresses of users who receive the log reports.

    +

    Note: +
    For more information on the Offline (Automated) parameters, see Set up Offline (Automated) Parameters.

    +

    The log files contain the following information:

    +
      +
    • If a single log is generated at the System level for all offline branches, it has a section for each branch with the branch name and branch totals displayed at the top of each section.
    • +
    • If the log is generated at the branch level, only one branch name is displayed with totals for that branch displayed at the top of the log.
    • +
    • The log files have a .log extension and are named with the system or branch abbreviation and a date/time stamp.
      • Example of a System-level log file name: QA Quantum YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.log
      • Example of a Branch-level log file name: STI YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.log
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/set_up_auto_offline_param.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/set_up_auto_offline_param.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b25e383 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/set_up_auto_offline_param.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + Set up Offline (Automated) Parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Offline (Automated) Parameters

    +

    To set the Offline (Automated) parameters, open the Administration Explorer, select System, select Parameters and select the Patron Services tab.

    +

    + + +

    +
    +
      +
    • Offline (Automated): Client workstations: Continue on error - This parameter, set at the System level only, is used to specify whether to continue or stop the automatic offline process if an error is encountered when pulling transactions from a workstation. The default setting is Yes. If this parameter is set to Yes, the process continues even if an error is encountered, such as the workstation is offline or the .TRN path is invalid, and the job cannot pick up the .TRN files
    • +
    • Offline (Automated): Directory where offline TRN files are stored - This parameter, set at the System level only, is used to specify the directory where the offline TRN files are gathered and stored on the client workstation. The default setting is: C:\ProgramData\Polaris\5.0\OfflineTransaction.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    +
    If your library chooses to use a network share, enter the path in this parameter. For example, \\server\share.

    +
      +
    • Offline (Automated): Enable automatic offline uploading - This parameter, set at the System level only, is used to enable automatic offline processing for the library system. The default value is No. If this parameter is set to Yes, the Automatic Offline Circulation Upload Processing job is enabled for all branches. For more information on this job, see Enable and schedule the Automated Offline SQL job.
    • +
    • Offline (Automated): Generate one upload log per branch - This parameter, set at the System level only, is used for generating one or multiple log reports. If the value is set to Yes (the default), one upload log is generated per offline branch. If this parameter is set to No, a single log file is generated for all offline branches. Log files are saved to: \\SERVER\c$\ProgramData\Polaris\<version>\Logs\Offline +
    • +
    • Offline (Automated): Polaris user for automatic upload process - This parameter, set at the System level only, specifies the user assigned during the automatic upload processing. The default setting is PolarisSuperUser. To specify a user, choose the user from the drop-down list of usernames. If this user has the permission, Patron registration: Modify postal address fields, she can enter a valid postal code that does not already exist, and it is added to the Postal Codes database table.
    • +
    • Offline (Automated): Send offline upload log report to email address - This parameter, which can be set at the System, Library, or Branch level, specifies the email addresses of users who receive the log reports. No email address is specified by default. (If the job runs and no email address has been entered at the branch, library, or system level, the logs will still be produced, but they will not be emailed.) You can enter one or multiple email addresses, not to exceed 255 characters total. If multiple email addresses are entered, they must be separated by semicolons.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/upload_rep_warn.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/upload_rep_warn.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0967e054 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoffline/upload_rep_warn.htm @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Upload Report Warning Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Upload Report Warning Messages

    +

    A report of warning messages is created automatically when you upload offline transaction files to the online Polaris client. The report may contain any of the following messages related to the offline transactions.

    +

    Warning Messages for Barcodes, Blocks, Closed Day/Date +

    +

    The following situations generate warning messages in the upload report:

    +

    Barcodes (invalid, unexpected, assigned)

    +

    At circulation, these situations generate messages:

    +
      +
    • An item with an invalid barcode type is circulated.
    • +
    • An item is checked out, but the patron barcode is an invalid type.
    • +
    • An item is checked out, but the patron barcode is an item barcode type.
    • +
    • An item with a patron barcode type is circulated.
    • +
    +

    At patron record creation, these situations generate messages:

    +
      +
    • A barcode format is for an item instead of a patron.
    • +
    • A barcode format is unrecognized.
    • +
    • A barcode is already assigned.
    • +
    +

    Item blocks +

    +

    An item is checked in with a free-text, library-assigned, or system block.

    +

    1st level fine limit (by patron code and branch)

    +

    A patron exceeds the 1st level fine limit at check-out/renewal.

    +

    2nd level fine limit (by patron code and branch)

    +

    A patron exceeds the 2nd level fine limit at check-out/renewal.

    +

    Item limit by material type (by patron code and branch)

    +

    A patron exceeds the number of items of a specific material type that can be checked out.

    +

    Total item limit (by patron code and branch)

    +

    A patron exceeds the total number of items that can be checked out.

    +

    Overdue item limit (by patron code and branch)

    +

    A patron exceeds the overdue item limit at check-out.

    +

    A patron exceeds the overdue item limit at renewal. An overdue fine is charged.

    +

    Overdue item limit (by patron code and branch) with long overdues

    +

    A patron exceeds the overdue item limit at check-out and has long overdue items.

    +

    A patron exceeds the overdue item limit at renewal and has long overdue items. An overdue fine is charged.

    +

    Long overdues

    +

    A patron has long overdue items at check-out/renewal.

    +

    Renewal limit

    +

    A patron checks out an item, and the item exceeds its renewal limit.

    +

    Closed day/date

    +

    An item’s original due date is changed to the next open date because the original date falls on a day closed (Hours of operation parameter) or a date closed (Dates Closed policy table).

    +

    Warning Messages for Item Statuses +

    +

    The following item statuses generate warning messages in the upload report:

    +

    Bindery, Damaged, In-Repair

    +

    The item status was Bindery (or Damaged or In-repair) before the item was circulated.

    +

    Claim

    +

    The item status was Claimed missing or Claimed never had before the item was circulated.

    +

    Held

    +

    An item with a held status is checked out, and Polaris compares the borrower’s barcode to the requestor’s barcode. If the barcodes are identical, the request status is filled and the request is deleted. If the barcodes are not identical, the request status remains active. The request is reactivated for the requestor’s barcode. If an item that might fill a hold request is checked in, the item status and the request status become held.

    +

    Note:
    You can suppress holds processing for checked-in items at upload.

    +

    In-Process

    +

    The item status was in-process before the item was circulated.

    +

    In-Transit

    +

    The item status was in-transit before the item was checked out.
    An item is bound to a hold request, and the item status was in-transit before the item was checked out.
    The item status was in-transit before the item was checked in. Polaris checks for the destination library and any bound hold request:

    +
      +
    • If there is no hold request and the assigned branch is not the check-in branch, send the item to the assigned branch.
    • +
    • If there is no hold request and the assigned branch is the check-in branch, nothing needs to be done.
    • +
    • If the item is bound to a hold request and the pickup branch is not the check-in branch, send the item to the pickup branch.
    • +
    +

    Lost

    +

    The item status was lost before the item was circulated. Delete the replacement cost for the last borrower.

    +

    Transferred

    +

    The item status was transferred before the item was circulated. The item retains its transferred status, with a hold request status of shipped. Send the item to the pickup library.

    +

    Messages Related to Reserve Items (Course Reserves) +

    +

    Library Use Only

    +

    A reserve item was checked out offline. The reserve status is On Reserve, and Library Use Only is checked; that is, the reserve item is intended to be used only within the library. The message includes the item barcode and title.

    +

    Total number of items exceeded

    +

    A reserve item was checked out offline. The reserve status is On Reserve and the Total Number of Reserve Items in the Patron/Material Type Loan Limits table has been exceeded. The message includes the patron name and patron barcode.

    +

    Reserve item checked in

    +

    A message is written if a reserved item was checked in. The message includes the item barcode and title.

    +

    Item linked to more than one course

    +

    When a reserve item is checked out offline, and the item is linked to more than one course, the system logs the check-out to the first course listed for the item and writes a message to the log file. The message includes the item barcode, title, and the course name, number, and section of the course credited with the circulation.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Prompt_-_update_next_service_date_at_normal_check_out.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Prompt_-_update_next_service_date_at_normal_check_out.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d30c83e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Prompt_-_update_next_service_date_at_normal_check_out.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Prompt - update next service date at normal check out + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Prompt - update next service date at normal check out

    +

    You can choose to display a prompt during normal check out to update an active Outreach Services patron’s next service date if the item is not on the patron’s pick list. If the staff member chooses to update the next service date from the prompt, the patron’s Next Service Date and Last Service Date are updated based on the Outreach Services delivery schedule set for that patron. If no prompt is displayed, or if the staff member chooses not to update the service date, the patron’s next service date is not affected. The parameter is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The system uses the setting of the staff member’s log-on branch.

    +

    To set the prompt to display:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click ORS: Prompt for update during normal check-out, and set the parameter to Yes.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_branch_items_to_include_in_outreach_selection_lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_branch_items_to_include_in_outreach_selection_lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa617383 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_branch_items_to_include_in_outreach_selection_lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set branch items to include in outreach selection lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set branch items to include in outreach selection lists

    +

    The Outreach: Included Branches table works with the Patron Services parameter ORS: Include other library items in selection list processing. When the parameter is set to Yes, staff members can choose Default branches in the Selection List workform to include items belonging to all the libraries in the Included Branches table in selection list processing, or select any one of these branches from the drop-down list. However, if the parameter is set to Yes but no branches have been set in the Included Branches table, the Default branches option includes only the user’s workstation branch. When the parameter is set to No, the Outreach: Included Branches table is ignored and only items belonging to the user’s workstation branch are selection list candidates.

    +

    To set the branch items that should be included in outreach selection list processing:

    +

    Note:
    Included Branches processing can be manually overridden when building selection lists. When you use the Find Tool to search for a title to add to the selection list, the Find Tool searches all branches, not just included branches. When a title is manually added by this method, all items attached to the bibliographic record are returned as candidates to add to the pick list (not just those assigned to included branches). Placing Items on Reserve.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click ORS: Include other library items in selection list processing, and set the parameter to Yes.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save this change.
    6. +
    7. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Included Branches.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +

    The Outreach Included Branches table is displayed in the details view.

    +

    + ORSInclBranches.gif 

    +

    For each organization, you can indicate whether items from a particular branch should be included in outreach selection lists (Yes in the Included column), or not considered in outreach selection lists (No in the Included column). You cannot add or delete entire table entries.

    +
      +
    1. To change the Included setting for a branch, select the line entry and click ModIcon00529.gif, or double-click the entry. The Modify Outreach Included Branches dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSInclBranchMod.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes or No in the Included box, and click OK. The Outreach Included Branches table is displayed with the new setting. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Results set size - The maximum result set size for the Outreach Services selection list is controlled by the PowerPAC profile Results set: Maximum number of records to return. The default setting is 100,000. When the results set is returned, your settings for status and branch exclusions are applied, and the top 5,000 relevancy-ranked titles are returned.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_circulation_statuses_for_outreach_selection_lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_circulation_statuses_for_outreach_selection_lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a40822d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_circulation_statuses_for_outreach_selection_lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set circulation statuses for outreach selection lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set circulation statuses for outreach selection lists

    +

    To set the item circulation statuses that should be excluded from outreach selection list processing:

    +

    Note:
    By default, items with the following circulation statuses are excluded from selection list processing: Bindery, Claim Missing, Claim Never Had, Held, In-Repair, In-Transit, Lost, Missing, Transferred, Unavailable, Withdrawn.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Excluded Circ Statuses. The Outreach Excluded Circ Statuses table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSExclStat.gif 

    +

    For each organization, you can indicate whether a circulation status should be excluded from outreach selection lists (Yes in the Excluded column), or included in outreach selection lists (No in the Excluded column). You cannot add or delete entire circulation status entries.

    +
      +
    1. To change the setting for a status, select the line entry and click ModIcon00528.gif, or double-click the entry. The Modify Outreach Excluded Item Statuses dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSExclStatMod.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes or No in the Excluded box, and click OK. The Outreach Excluded Circ Statuses table is displayed with the new setting. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_delivery_mode_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_delivery_mode_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe727d69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_delivery_mode_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set outreach delivery mode options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set outreach delivery mode options

    +

    To set the possible methods by which your organization delivers items to outreach services patrons:

    +

    Note:
    Your organization may allow a designated person to pick up items on behalf of the outreach services patron. If so, include a “pickup” delivery mode so that this option is available in the appropriate patron status records.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Delivery Mode. The Outreach Delivery Mode table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSDelivMode.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Outreach Delivery Mode dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSDelivModeAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Outreach Delivery Mode policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the delivery method in the Description box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Outreach Delivery Mode table is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current patron record. Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_disability_selections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_disability_selections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43a6eeb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_disability_selections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set outreach patron disability selections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set outreach patron disability selections

    +

    To set the options staff can select to note an outreach patron’s disability in the patron’s record:

    +

    Note:
    This table is optional and can be left empty. If you do not set up the table, no disability-related options are available for selection in the patron record.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Disability. The Outreach Disability table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSDisab.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00522.gif to display the Insert Outreach Disability dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSDisablAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Outreach Disability policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the disability selection in the Description box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Outreach Disability table is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon00523.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current patron record. Select the entry and click btnDelete00524.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_equipment_selections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_equipment_selections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0dcbb0e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_outreach_patron_equipment_selections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set outreach patron equipment selections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set outreach patron equipment selections

    +

    To set the options staff can select to specify a special equipment need for an outreach patron.

    +

    Note:
    This table is optional and can be left empty. If you do not set up the table, no equipment options are available for selection in the patron record.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Equipment. The Outreach Equipment table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSEquip.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00525.gif to display the Insert Outreach Equipment dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSEquipAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Outreach Equipment policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the equipment selection in the Description box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Outreach Equipment table is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon00526.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current patron record. Select the entry and click btnDelete00527.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_pick_list_column_heads.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_pick_list_column_heads.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..517a22d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_pick_list_column_heads.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set pick list column heads + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set pick list column heads

    +

    To set the column heads for outreach services pick lists, and the order in which they appear on the workform:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Pick List Headers. The Outreach Pick List Headers table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSPickHdr.gif 

    +

    You can indicate whether a column should be included in the pick list view of the workform (Yes in the Included column), or not included (No in the Included column), and you can modify the column display order. However, you cannot add or delete entire table entries.

    +
      +
    1. To change the Included setting for a column, select the line entry and click ModIcon00530.gif, or double-click the entry. The Modify Outreach Pick List Headers dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSPickHdrMod.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Yes or No in the Included box, and click OK. The Outreach Pick List Headers table is displayed with the new setting. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    2. +
    3. To change the order of columns in the pick list view, select an entry and click btnUpArrow00531.gif or btnDownArrow00532.gif to move the stop to the left or right. The up arrow moves the column to the left. 1 indicates the first column on the left. The down arrow moves the column to the right.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_reading_history_limits_for_outreach_patrons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_reading_history_limits_for_outreach_patrons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b746257 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_reading_history_limits_for_outreach_patrons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set reading history limits for outreach patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set reading history limits for outreach patrons

    +

    To set limits on reading histories for outreach services patrons:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click ORS Reading history. The ORS Reading History dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + ORSReadingHistorySA.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Specify the length of time (from check-out date to current date) to retain an entry in the Reading History list by doing these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type the number of months or years in the first History length box.
    2. +
    3. Select the unit of time (months or years) in the second History length box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Maximum history box, type the maximum number of entries that can be retained at one time in the Reading History list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    An entry’s creation date in the reading history is usually, but not always, the check-out date. For example, offline uploads may cause some variation. Also, Polaris does not consider the exact time of check-out. If the Maximum history value is exceeded, and several items were checked out on the same date, Polaris deletes the items from the reading history in an unspecified order.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Reading History Setup dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Reading history limits for non-outreach services patrons - Setting Reading History Options.
    • +
    • Allow staff members to remove items from reading histories - Staff members with the Circulation permission Remove non-ORS patron histories: Allow can remove individual items from the reading histories of non-outreach services patrons. Staff members with the Circulation permission Remove ORS patron histories: Allow can remove individual items from the reading histories of outreach services patrons. Working with Reading Histories
    • +
    • Reader ratings - Staff members can enter title ratings on behalf of an outreach services patron in the patron’s reading history. See Setting Up Reader Ratings.
    • +
    • Links from bibliographic record - Staff members with the Circulation permission ORS: Link from bibliographic record: Allow can select Links, Outreach Patrons in the Bibliographic Record workform to display a list of Outreach Services patrons who have items linked to the bibliographic record in their reading histories. Link from a bibliographic record to outreach services patrons.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_outreach_delivery_routes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_outreach_delivery_routes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57c7388d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_outreach_delivery_routes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up outreach delivery routes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up outreach delivery routes

    +

    If you deliver items to outreach services patrons, you can set up delivery routes and specify stops along the routes. To set up outreach delivery routes:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Outreach: Delivery Route/Stops. The Outreach Delivery Route/Stops table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSDelivRte.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To add a delivery route, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00516.gif with no existing route selected. The Insert Delivery Route dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSDelivRteAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization Name box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Outreach Delivery Route policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the route in the Route Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type a brief note or description of the route in the Description box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK. The Outreach Delivery Route table is displayed with the new entry in the upper part of the table.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. To add stops to a delivery route, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Each stop you specify will appear as a selectable option for the route in the Patron Delivery Options dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view).

    +
      +
    1. In the upper part of the table, select the route you want to modify. In the lower part of the table, one stop is listed for the route by default.
    2. +
    3. To modify the name and description of the default stop, select the stop in the lower part of the table and click ModIcon00517.gif. The Modify Delivery Route Stops dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + ORSDelRteStopMod.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the name and description (optional) for the first stop, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. To add new stops to the route, select any line in the lower part of the table, and click btnInsert00518.gif. The Insert Delivery Route Stops dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + ORSDelRteStopAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the name and description (optional) for the new stop, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Type a brief note or description of the stop in the Description box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK. The Outreach Delivery Route table is displayed with the new entry in the bottom part of the table. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    6. +
    7. Continue to add stops to the route by repeating steps d-g.
    8. +
    +
      +
    1. To adjust the order of stops on a route, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the route in the upper part of the table. The stops for the route are listed in the lower part of the table.
    2. +
    3. Select a stop and click btnUpArrow.gif or btnDownArrow.gif to move the stop earlier or later in the stop sequence.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - To modify a route, select an entry in the top portion of the table and click ModIcon00519.gif. To modify a stop along a route, select the route, then select the stop in the bottom portion of the table and click ModIcon00520.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - You can delete an entry only if it is not being used in a current patron record. Select the entry and click btnDelete00521.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_reader_ratings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_reader_ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..498c88a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_reader_ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up reader ratings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up reader ratings

    +

    To enable reader ratings and set up the rating scale:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the system, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. (System level only.) Double-click the Patron Services parameter Outreach title rating. The Outreach Title Rating dialog box opens, where you define the 1-5 rating scale.
    4. +

      + +

      +
    5. Click the Highest value to indicate which end of the scale (1 or 5) is the most positive rating a title can receive.
    6. +
    7. Type a description (maximum of 50 characters) for each rating increment on the scale.
    8. +
    9. Click OK.
    10. +
    11. To enable reader ratings for individual organizations, open the Parameters folder for each organization and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view. If all organizations will use reader ratings, you can set the parameter at the system level.
    12. +
    13. Double-click the Patron Services parameter Outreach title rating.
    14. +
    15. Double-click Outreach title rating enabled, and set the parameter to Yes.
    16. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_the_packing_list_content_and_print_method_for_reader.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_the_packing_list_content_and_print_method_for_reader.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ee39632 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Set_up_the_packing_list_content_and_print_method_for_reader.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the packing list content and print method for reader ratings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the packing list content and print method for reader ratings

    +

    To set up packing list printing:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Packing list text can be set at the system, library, and branch levels. For consistent results, you may want to specify the text at the system level.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click ORS packing list. The ORS Packing List dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + ORSPackingListSA.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Specify the header text and introductory rating text.
    2. +
    +

    Each part can be 500 characters maximum; press ENTER to start a new line within the header or rating text. The header does not automatically include the library address and/or contact information in the header, so you may want to add this information. Other content is always included in the packing list; see Packing Lists.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    3. To set the packing list to print automatically at check-out, double-click the Patron Services parameter ORS automatically print packing list, and set the parameter to Yes.
    4. +
    +

    If the parameter is set to Yes, the packing list is printed automatically when the items are checked out from the patron’s ORS Selection List or the Outreach Services Manager Pick List view. In these cases, the list is printed in place of the check-out receipt. (A packing list can also be printed from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view for selected items that have already been checked out, if the patron is an Outreach Services patron.) If the parameter is set to No, a staff member must print the packing list.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Delivery_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Delivery_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8c08a8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Delivery_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Outreach Delivery Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Outreach Delivery Options

    +

    You set up delivery methods, routes, and stops in Polaris Administration to make these available as selections for outreach services patrons.

    +
      +
    • Delivery methods (modes) - Each method you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Delivery Options dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view), and as an option for filtering the patron list in the Outreach Services Manager when outreach services processing is done for multiple patrons. See Set outreach delivery mode options.
    • +
    • Delivery routes and stops along the routes - Each route you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Delivery Options dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view), and as an option for filtering the patron list in the Outreach Services Manager when outreach services processing is done for multiple patrons. See Set up outreach delivery routes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Items_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Items_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a10aff2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Items_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Outreach Items Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Outreach Items Options

    +

    These settings control what items are candidates for selection list processing for outreach services patrons and the information that appears in the pick lists that are built from selection lists.

    +
      +
    • Excluded circulation statuses - You can exclude items with specific statuses from selection list processing. For example, if you exclude items with a status of Bindery, no item with this status ever appears in a selection list as a “candidate” for the outreach patron’s pick list. See Set circulation statuses for outreach selection lists.
    • +
    • Branch items to include - You can opt to include other branches’ items in selection list processing, and specify which branches to include. Or you can opt to restrict the candidate items to those belonging to the user’s workstation branch. See Set branch items to include in outreach selection lists.
    • +
    • Pick List column heads - You can tailor the Outreach Services Pick List view to include the item data most useful for your organization’s workflow. See Set pick list column heads.
    • +
    • Prompt to update next service date at normal check-out - You can display a prompt during normal check-out to update an active Outreach Services patron’s next service date if an item not on the patron’s pick list is checked out to the patron. See Prompt - update next service date at normal check out.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Patrons_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Patrons_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14bbdfab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Outreach_Patrons_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Outreach Patrons Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Outreach Patrons Options

    +

    You can set up the following patron options specifically for outreach services patrons:

    +
      +
    • Disability descriptions - Each disability description you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Preferences dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view). See Set outreach patron disability selections.
    • +
    • Equipment needs - Each equipment description you specify will appear as a selectable option in the Patron Preferences dialog box (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view). See Set outreach patron equipment selections.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Disability and equipment needs descriptions are informational only, and do not affect what titles are selected for the patron or how they are delivered.

    +

    In addition, reading histories are automatically enabled for outreach services patrons because the system uses reading histories in processing selection lists for outreach services patrons. You can set limits on the length of time the history covers and the number of items it can contain that are separate from reading history limits for non-outreach services patrons. See Set reading history limits for outreach patrons .

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Outreach_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Outreach_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f6ba5f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Outreach_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Outreach Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Outreach Services

    +

    Polaris Outreach Services are available by specific contract with Innovative Interfaces. These functions automate title selection and delivery to homebound and other designated patrons, and allow individual patron profiles based on reading preferences, delivery mode, and other characteristics. You can have Polaris generate selection lists for individual patrons, or manage outreach services for multiple patrons, based on the next scheduled delivery date or delivery route. An outreach services “patron” does not have to be an individual; you can set up a patron record for an institution and designate the institution as an outreach services patron. For more information about outreach services workflows, see Outreach Services Processing.

    +

    To set loan periods and fine policies for outreach services patrons, you can set up a patron code or codes to use specifically for these patrons, then set the appropriate loan periods and fine codes for the outreach patron codes. See also:

    + +

    Outreach services policy tables control what options are available for fields in the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view and the Outreach Services Manager, and what items are eligible for selection list processing. You can work with the outreach services tables at the system, library, or branch levels.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to work with outreach services policy tables: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify outreach services tables: Allow.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Reader_Ratings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Reader_Ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d63f7cf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPoutreachSA/Setting_Up_Reader_Ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Reader Ratings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Reader Ratings

    +

    Staff members with the Circulation permission Modify ORS patron ratings: Allow for the patron’s registered branch can enter reader ratings submitted by Outreach Services patrons after the items have been returned. The staff member selects the item in the patron’s Reading History list (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view) and enters the rating and related note, if any. Ratings already entered can also be modified. The Reading History list includes Rating and Note columns for outreach services patrons, where the rating number and any associated note are displayed. For more information about entering reader ratings Working with Reader Ratings.

    +

    Packing Lists

    +

    To gather the ratings, the staff member provides a printed packing list to the Outreach Services patron when the items are checked out to the patron. The list can be printed manually, or you can set the packing list to be printed automatically when the items are checked out from the patron’s ORS Selection List or the Outreach Services Manager Pick List view. In this case, the list is printed in place of the check-out receipt. (A packing list can also be printed from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view for selected items that have already been checked out, if the patron is an Outreach Services patron.)

    +

    Note:
    If items are checked out to an Outreach Services patron from the Check Out workform, the standard check-out receipt is printed.

    +

    The 8.5 x 11” packing list consists of the following elements:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Enable_hold_call_slips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Enable_hold_call_slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c34c2d8c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Enable_hold_call_slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Enable hold call slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable hold call slips

    +

    Hold call slips are specially-formatted hold slips that contain additional title information for libraries that manually call patrons. For details, see Setting Up Printed Receipts. If you enable hold call slips, from any specific workform, the hold slip, the hold call slip, or the hold pickup slip can be selected as the default hold “receipt,” but not more than one per workform.

    +

    To enable the hold call slip:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds call slip: enable, and select Yes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you specified user-defined fields for hold slips (see Set hold slip options), these appear on the hold call slip. All the other fields are fixed and cannot be customized in Polaris Administration.

    +

    The illustration shows an example.

    +

    + HoldCallSlip.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Epson_ReStick_Printers_Hold_In-Transit_Slips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Epson_ReStick_Printers_Hold_In-Transit_Slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..725e913e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Epson_ReStick_Printers_Hold_In-Transit_Slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Epson® ReStick™ Printers - Hold and In-Transit Slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Epson® ReStickPrinters - Hold and In-Transit Slips

    +

    Polaris can export hold pickup slip (“wrapper”) and in-transit slip data to Epson ReStick printers using the Epson Intelligent Label Service (ILS). This software allows the user to configure printed receipt formatting (font, orientation, data printed, etc.). It also allows the library to direct output to one or more specified printers. To support the integration, Polaris receipt output for these types of slips is converted to ANSI RAW instead of Unicode RAW, a header is added to the slip, and each data element is labeled for use by the Epson ILS. (The data labels are not printed.)

    +

    Note:
    If the option to use the Epson ILS is selected, the Polaris Administration configuration options for in-transit and hold pick-up slips do not affect the Epson ReStick printer output. All other receipts are printed according to the configuration options set in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To enable receipt data export to the Epson ILS in Polaris Administration, set the Staff Client profile Receipts: Support Epson ILS to Yes. The profile is available at the system, library, branch, and workstation levels. When the profile is set to Yes for the workstation, only hold pick-up and in-transit slips are printed on the Epson ReStick printer. All other receipts (such as check-out receipts) are directed to other, non-ReStick printers, and are printed according to the configuration options set in Polaris Administration (see Setting Up Printed Receipts). If the profile is set to Yes but a different printer is chosen for the workstation, all circulation receipts and slips can be printed according to the configuration options set in Polaris Administration. However, hold and in-transit receipts will print the headers as they have been configured for Epson ILS, for example, +++---Hold---+++. See below. The header cannot be edited in Polaris.

    +

    Note:
    When the profile is set to No, no slips can be printed on the Epson ReStick printer. All circulation receipts and slips can be printed on other types of printers according to the configuration options set in Polaris Administration. See Setting Up Printed Receipts.

    +

    When the profile is set to Yes and a hold wrapper or in-transit slip is printed, all the data associated with the receipt is sent to the Epson ILS, which configures which data prints, font, format, and orientation.

    +

    Note:
    CJK, Arabic and other non-Western characters are not printed correctly.

    +

    For hold pickup slips, the following data is exported to the Epson ILS:

    +

    Note:
    The Epson ILS controls which data is actually printed.

    +
      +
    • Header text: +++---HOLD---+++ [cannot be edited]
    • +
    • Data field labels:
    • +
    • Name - The patron name, Last, First MI. Referred to as User Name by the Epson ILS.
    • +
    • Lib - Lib abbreviation
    • +
    • Phone - Last 4 digits of patron phone
    • +
    • Patron barcode - Patron barcode
    • +
    • Pick-up by - Pickup date. Format: mm/dd/yyyy
    • +
    • Item barcode - Item barcode
    • +
    • Title - Item title
    • +
    +

    For in-transit slips, the following data is exported to the Epson ILS:

    +

    Note:
    The Epson ILS controls which data is actually printed.

    +
      +
    • Header text - +++---IN-TRANSIT+++--- [cannot be edited]
    • +
    • Data field labels:
    • +
    • Name - The patron name, Last, First MI
    • +
    • Pbarcode - Patron barcode
    • +
    • LibraryName - Library name. Referred to as Location by some Epson clients.
    • +
    • LibraryAbbrev - Library abbreviation
    • +
    • BranchName - location [lower case is required]
    • +
    • BranchAbbrev - location [lower case is required]
    • +
    • From - Library name or abbreviation
    • +
    • Hold for
    • +
    • Title
    • +
    • Material type
    • +
    • Call number
    • +
    • Item Barcode
    • +
    • Assigned Branch
    • +
    +

    The following options for Polaris receipts do not apply to data exported to the Epson ILS:

    +
      +
    • Trailing blank lines
    • +
    • Orientation
    • +
    • Large print
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_Items_Out_receipt_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_Items_Out_receipt_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f260f0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_Items_Out_receipt_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Items Out receipt options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Items Out receipt options

    +

    Staff members can print a patron’s Items Out list from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. This “receipt” lists all the items a patron currently has checked out. The header of the Items Out list always includes the library name and date/time. You can include the following optional header data: author, call number, collection, due date, any custom note set for printed receipts, item’s assigned branch, item barcode, item count, library phone, material type, limited patron barcode, patron name, renewals left, title, library Web address, and user-defined fields.

    +

    Note:
    If you choose to print check-out receipts only when prompted (see Set check-out receipt options), the receipt prompt is not displayed for renewals from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. However, staff can optionally print the Items Out “receipt” from this view by suppressing check-out receipt printing from the workform Tools options, and then printing receipts on demand by printing the Items Out list (CTRL+ALT+P).

    +

    To select additional information to appear on the Items Out list:

    +

    Note:
    You can set these options on the system, library, or branch level. The system uses the settings for the workstation’s log-on branch.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Items out receipt options. The Items Out Receipt Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + ItemsOutOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To include a field in the Items Out receipt, select the field in the Select content list. User-defined fields are grouped together at the end of the list.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Custom note text - You can specify custom note text to appear on check-out, Items Out, and fine receipts. For details, Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.
    • +
    • You Saved message - You can add a “you saved” message to the printed Items Out list. The message helps to remind patrons of the value of library service by displaying how much it would cost to purchase the items. For details, see You Saved Receipt Messages.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-in_receipt_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-in_receipt_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86c1621e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-in_receipt_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set check-in receipt options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set check-in receipt options

    +

    Check-in receipts can be printed from the Check In workform - Normal view and Check In workform - Bulk view. They include the item barcode, title, author, material type, call number, and patron’s limited barcode. The following information fields are also available for use: author, due date, item’s assigned branch, full patron barcode, patron name, status. You can set these options on the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    Note:
    The Check In workform list view can also be printed on a receipt printer.

    +

    To set the information that appears on check-in receipts:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Check-in: Receipt options. The Check-in Receipt Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + CheckInReceiptOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To include a field in the check-in receipt, select the field in the Options list and click Add. The field is placed in the Selections list.
    2. +
    3. To remove a field from the check-in receipt, select the field in the Selections list, and click Remove. The field is placed in the Options list. To print check-in receipts, at least one field must be listed in Selections.
    4. +
    5. Click Save on the dialog box.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-out_receipt_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-out_receipt_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c7046a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_check-out_receipt_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + Set check-out receipt options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set check-out receipt options

    +

    Check-out receipts always display the library name, date/time, type of receipt, item titles, and due dates. You can add any of the following information: call number (item); item bar code; item count (total number of items); library phone number; material type; patron barcode (limited -  last 5 digits of the patron barcode); patron name; staff record number (unique identification number from the staff member record); Web address (library URL defined in the organization record); any user-defined fields from the patron record.

    +

    To select additional information to appear on check-out receipts:

    +

    Note:
    You can set these options on the system, library, or branch level. Your settings affect receipts generated from the staff client and from Polaris ExpressCheck, but do not affect offline check-out receipts. The offline information is fixed and cannot be changed in Polaris Administration.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Check-out: Receipt options. The Check-out Receipt Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To include a field in the check-out receipt, select the field in the Both printed and e-mail receipts list. User-defined fields are grouped together at the end of the list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For more information about setting up eReceipts (e-mail and TXT receipts), see Setting Up eReceipts.

    +
      +
    1. To include additional information on e-mail receipts, select Include custom note from printed receipts or Include summary data. +
      • Include custom note from printed receipts: allows you to type a custom note. On the circulation workstation, select Circulation, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and type the custom text in the Circulation Options dialog box - Receipt Printer Options tabbed page.
      • Include summary data: automatically adds the following patron account information:
        • number of items currently checked out;
        • number of open requests (the total number of Hold requests with a status of Active, Inactive, or Pending, and the number of ILL requests with a status of Active or Inactive);
        • number of items (ILL or Hold) with a status of Held;
        • total amount of unpaid charges.
    2. +
    3. To prompt for eReceipts when checking out in Leap, select Prompt for eReceipt configuration in Leap. If this check box is selected, and you check out a patron in Leap for whom eReceipts is set to None, the prompt appears and you can set up eReceipts for the patron right from check out. For more information, see Leap online Help.
    4. +
    5. If you want to print a receipt only when the patron requests one, select (check) Print receipts only with prompt. (If the option is not checked, no prompt is displayed and the receipt is always printed when check-out receipts are enabled for the workform.) This option applies only to online staff client operations; a checkout receipt with limited data is always printed during offline circulation.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    You can enable e-mail or text message check-out receipts for patrons who prefer these to printed receipts. See Setting Up eReceipts.

    +

    This option can reduce unnecessary printing. When the Check out receipt option is checked on the workform Tools, Options menu and the option to prompt for the optional check-out receipt has been enabled for the workstation branch, the prompt to print a receipt is displayed when the Enter key is pressed to signal the end of the check-out transaction. The prompt to print the receipt is displayed during the following processes: normal and reserve item check out from the staff client Check Out workform; RFID check out; media dispenser unit check out; offline check out.

    +

    Note:
    The receipt prompt is not displayed for renewals from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. However, staff can optionally print a “receipt” from this view by suppressing check-out receipt printing from the workform Tools options, and then printing receipts on demand by printing the Items Out list. (CTRL+ALT+P). You can specify the information included in the printed version of the Items Out list. See Set Items Out receipt options.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    At each staff client workstation, you must enable the receipt from each workform that generates the receipt. Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_fine_receipt_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_fine_receipt_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88ed54ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_fine_receipt_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set fine receipt options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set fine receipt options

    +

    Fine receipts always display the library name, date/time, type of receipt, title, reason (from the charge transaction), the amount paid or waived, and total charges. You can add any of the following information: call number (associated item); item barcode; material type; patron name; library phone number; Web address (library URL); patron name; last 5 digits of the patron barcode; staff record number (unique identification number from the staff member record); any user-defined field from the patron record; transaction number (unique identifying number of the transaction). You can also set Polaris to print duplicate fine receipts if your audit policies require them. To select additional information to appear on fine receipts and enable duplicate receipts if required.

    +

    Note:
    You can set these options at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Fine receipt options. The Fine Receipt Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + FineReceiptOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To print a field on the fine receipt, select the field in the Options list and click Add. The field is placed in the Selections list. (To remove a field from the fine receipt, select the field in the Selections list, and click Remove. The field is placed in the Options list.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The options include any user-defined fields. If you add Suppress for waived charges, the fine receipt is not printed for only a waived transaction. However, if a transaction contains both payments and waives, the receipt is printed regardless of this setting.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save on the dialog box.
    2. +
    3. To enable duplicate printed fine receipts for the organization, set the Patron Services parameter Fine receipts: Print duplicate receipt to Yes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    At each staff client workstation, you must enable the receipt from each workform that generates the receipt. See Loading... this may take several minutes to complete..

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_hold_slip_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_hold_slip_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b6ad321 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_hold_slip_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set hold slip options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set hold slip options

    +

    Hold slips always display pickup location, date the item was trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for the hold, held till (unclaimed) date, item title, item call number, item barcode, any display notes (in bold), and item’s assigned branch. You can add any of these options to print on a hold slip:

    +
      +
    • Patron name (if selected, this is printed in bold at the top of the slip)
    • +
    • Last 5 digits of the patron barcode (Limited patron barcode)
    • +
    • Patron phone (all phone numbers from the patron record)
    • +
    • Patron address (home address from the patron record if available, otherwise the first available address in the patron record)
    • +
    • Notification method
    • +
    • Patron e-mail address
    • +
    • Any user-defined fields from the patron record
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you add any user-defined fields and enable hold call slips (see Enable hold call slips), the fields you specified appear on the hold call slip.

    +

    The illustration shows an example.

    +

    + HoldSlip.gif 

    +

    To select additional information to appear on hold slips.

    +

    Note:
    You can set hold slip, hold call slip, and hold pickup slip parameters on the system, library, or branch level. For details about these slips, see Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Hold slip options. The Hold Slip Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + HoldSlipOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To print additional fields on the hold slip, select the field in the Options list and click Add. The field is placed in the Selections list. (To remove a field from the hold slip, select the field in the Selections list, and click Remove. The field is placed in the Options list.)
    2. +
    3. Click Save on the dialog box.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_in-transit_slip_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_in-transit_slip_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7b084c08 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_in-transit_slip_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set In-Transit Slip Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set In-Transit Slip Options

    +

    To set information options for in-transit, in-transit for hold slips, or combination in-transit and pickup slips:

    +

    Note:
    When a library uses a combined in-transit slip, the library’s in-transit settings determine how information displays on the slip. For example, when an item is scanned at the original library, a combined slip prints containing the pickup branch name and the library name, in a format set per the original library’s in-transit settings. The patron name and other contents for the pickup slip are determined per the pickup branch’s setting.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click In-transit slip options. The In-Transit Slip Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + InTransitSlipOps.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To include a requesting patron’s name on the slip, select (check) Print patron name on In-transit-hold slip.
    2. +
    3. To include a requesting patron’s barcode on the in-transit for hold slip, select (check) Print patron barcode on In-transit-hold slip.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    For the patron’s barcode to display on the in-transit for hold slip, the pickup branch must have Print x digits of the patron barcode selected (checked) in Hold Pickup Slip Options. See Set hold slip options.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Select Print library full name, Print library abbreviation, or both to print the parent library of the destination branch. These options apply to all in-transit slips.
    2. +
    3. For the destination branch name, select Print branch full name or Print branch abbreviation. This option applies to all in-transit slips. You must select one option.
    4. +
    5. To control the length of the in-transit slip, select or type the number (0-999) of trailing blank lines to add to the slip.
    6. +
    7. Click OK.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    At each staff client workstation, you must enable the slip from each workform that generates the slip. Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Printing in-transit slips only for holds - Set the workstation to print receipts and slips.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_option_to_open_the_cash_drawer_only_for_cash_fine_receipts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_option_to_open_the_cash_drawer_only_for_cash_fine_receipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf02b368 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_option_to_open_the_cash_drawer_only_for_cash_fine_receipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set option to open the cash drawer only for cash fine receipts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set option to open the cash drawer only for cash fine receipts

    +

    The receipt printer must be set up in Polaris Administration at the system level to open the cash drawer automatically when a receipt is printed. See Set receipt printer control codes. You can set an additional option at the system, library, or branch level that opens the cash drawer only when a fine receipt is printed and the payment method is cash, check, collection agency, or voucher. Fine receipts are still printed for credit card payments, but the cash drawer does not open.

    +

    To set the option to open the cash drawer only when fine receipts are printed for cash payments:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system, library, or branch level, and select the Staff Client tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Receipts: Cash drawer opens for cash payments only, and select Yes. The default is No.
    4. +
    +

    + cashonly.gif 

    +

    If the receipt printer is set up to open the cash drawer automatically when a payment is made, and the Receipts: Cash drawer opens for cash payments only is set to Yes for the organization at which the payment is made, the cash drawer will open only for the following types of payments:

    +
      +
    • Cash
    • +
    • Check
    • +
    • Voucher
    • +
    • Collection Agency
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_receipt_printer_control_codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_receipt_printer_control_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2291f7c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_receipt_printer_control_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set receipt printer control codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set receipt printer control codes

    +

    To enable large print, bold print, red print, underlining, auto-cutting, or cash drawer for standard receipt printers, or to add other kinds of receipt printers to your system:

    +

    Note:
    Install the appropriate printer drivers on the staff client workstations that use receipt printers.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system level, and select the Staff Client tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Receipt printer control codes. The Receipt Printer Control Codes dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + ReceiptPrintStandard.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you use receipt printers already listed in the Drivers list, To set optional features for them:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Repeat these steps for each printer in your system.

    +
      +
    1. Select the printer in the Drivers list.
    2. +
    3. Select the check box for each feature (such as expanded, bold, red, auto-cut, cash drawer) you want to enable for that printer.
    4. +
    +

    A specific printer may not support all these features. If a feature is not supported, the Start and End code fields are blank.

    +

    Note:
    The Expanded setting affects in-transit and hold slips. On the in-transit slip, the destination branch’s name is printed in a font that is twice as large as the font on the rest of the slip. On the hold slip, the patron’s name and the unclaimed date are printed in the large font. Although you set this option for specific receipt printers, if you choose to print these slips on a page printer, the font is also enlarged.

    +
      +
    1. To list the printer for selection in Polaris workforms, be sure the Selected option is checked.
    2. +
    3. Click Save.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To add a receipt printer and enable special features for it, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can add more than one printer. Repeat these steps for each printer you want to add.

    +
      +
    1. Scroll the Drivers list to the last blank field, which is marked by an asterisk.
    2. +
    +

    + ReceiptPrintAdd.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the blank field and type the printer name in the field.
    2. +
    3. Click Save.
    4. +
    5. Select your printer in the Drivers list, and select the check box for each feature you want to enable. Your printer may not support all features.
    6. +
    7. For each enabled feature, select the Start and End code fields, and type the appropriate codes in the format shown.
    8. +
    +

    See your printer documentation for the correct codes. Some models may require only a start code for some features.

    +

    Note:
    If you select Cash drawer, the receipt printer must be connected to a cash drawer via an RJ11 connector that signals the cash drawer to open automatically when a receipt is printed. You can also set a staff client profile at the system, library, or branch level to open the cash drawer when a receipt is printed only if the payment was a cash payment. See Set option to open the cash drawer only for cash fine receipts .

    +
      +
    1. To list the printer for selection in Polaris workforms, select (check) the Selected option.
    2. +
    3. Click Save.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To suppress an unused printer from the receipt printer list in Polaris workforms, clear (uncheck) the Selected check box for the printer.
    2. +
    +

    If you change multiple printers, you must click Save after each printer change.

    +
      +
    1. Click Close.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5cbcb5ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up You Saved receipt messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up You Saved receipt messages

    +

    To set up You Saved receipt messages:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization (system, library, or branch), and click the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click You Saved Receipt Options. The You Saved Receipt Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select Include message on printed and e-mail receipts to add the You Saved message to these checkout receipts.
    6. +
    7. Select Include message on Items Out slip to add the You Saved message to the Items Out list (printed from the Patron Status workform and from Leap patron Items Out view).
    8. +
    9. (System level only) Select Use default replacement fee when item price is unavailable to use this value for items with no price in the item record. (Default replacement fees are set with the Patron Services parameter Replacement fee options.) If you leave this option unchecked and the item record does not include a price, the item is not included in the You Saved calculation.
    10. +
    11. (System level lonly) Select Include renewals in total value to include the value of renewed items in the You Saved calculation.
    12. +
    13. If you want to set a minimum You Saved value to trigger the You Saved message, enter the value in the Minimum total value to print box. If the value is below the minimum setting or the sum is 0, no message appears. The default value is $0.01; in this case, the receipt includes the You Saved message regardless of the calculated You Saved amount.
    14. +
    15. Click OK.
    16. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_eReceipts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_eReceipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35e9c21d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_eReceipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Enable eReceipts and specify their content + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable eReceipts and specify their content

    +

    To enable eReceipts and specify their content:

    +
      +
    1. Confirm that the following e-mail prerequisites are set up for the organization:
    2. +
        +
      • In Polaris Administration, set the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service for the organization. Use the computer name where the SMTP service is installed.
      • +
      • Set up reverse DNS in Active Directory for your network. Reverse DNS is used to authenticate a sender’s address with the domain. This step helps ensure your patrons will receive their e-mail receipts. As a security measure, certain Internet service providers block e-mail to their users if they cannot find the sending server.
      • +
      +

      Note:
      These settings are also necessary for e-mail notification. See Delivering Notices By E-mail.

      +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view. The parameter is available at the system, library, or branch level.
    4. +
    5. Double-click EReceipt options. The EReceipt Options dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Check Enable e-mail receipts, Enable TXT receipts, or both. When at least one option is selected for the patron’s branch, you can select the eReceipt option in the Patron Registration workform.
    8. +

      Note: +
      eReceipts must be enabled for both the patron’s branch and the check-out (log-on) branch in order for the patron to receive the check-out eReceipt.

      +
    9. To enable renewal eReceipts from PAC, check Send receipts for renewal from PAC. For more information about eReceipt options in PAC, see eReceipt Options in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.
    10. +
    11. Click OK.
    12. +
    13. Set the optional content for eReceipts:
    14. +

      Note:
      Your settings for the check-out branch determine the content of e-mail receipts and TXT receipts.

      +
    15. Double-click the Patron Services parameter Check out receipt options. The Check-out Receipt Options dialog box opens. Options checked in the left column apply to both printed and e-mail receipts. See also: Set check-out receipt options.
    16. +
    17. If you want to include additional content for e-mail receipts, select Include Custom note from printed receipts or Include summary data in the E-Mail receipts (additional) list. The custom receipt note is set up on the circulation workstation, from the Polaris Shortcut bar. +
      • Include custom note from printed receipts: allows you to type a custom note. On the circulation workstation, select Circulation, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and type the custom text in the Circulation Options dialog box - Receipt Printer Options tabbed page.
      • Include summary data: automatically adds the following patron account information:
        • number of items currently checked out;
        • number of open requests (the total number of Hold requests with a status of Active, Inactive, or Pending, and the number of ILL requests with a status of Active or Inactive);
        • number of items (ILL or Hold) with a status of Held;
        • total amount of unpaid charges.
    18. +
    19. In the TXT receipts list, check the content options for the TXT receipt. Because text messages must be brief, the set of content options for TXT receipts is separate and more limited than the content options for printed and e-mail receipts.
    20. +

      Note:
      Subject, introduction, and footer text for eReceipts can be customized in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). See Patron Record Settings for eReceipts.

      +
    21. Click OK.
    22. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Polaris ExpressCheck eReceipts for check out and renewal - Use the SelfCheck Unit parameter Polaris ExpressCheck: Options. Check the Enable eReceipts option. Once this option is checked, the patron will receive eReceipts if both the patron’s branch and the ExpressCheck workstation’s branch have enabled eReceipts in the EReceipt options parameter, and an eReceipt option is set in the patron’s record. The eReceipt is sent when the patron selects Exit in Polaris ExpressCheck.
    • +
    • Printed receipts - See Setting Up Printed Receipts.
    • +
    • Bound-With receipts. Notices, Slips, Receipts and Other Data Displays.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_hold_pickup_slips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_hold_pickup_slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b9e66caf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Set_up_hold_pickup_slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up hold pickup slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up hold pickup slips

    +

    Hold pickup slips are formatted for libraries that allow patrons to pick up their own held items. These slips require a line mode receipt printer.

    +

    At the System level, you can set options to combine the hold pickup and in-transit slips or append hold call slip to the pickup slip.

    +

    To set up hold pickup slips:

    +

    Note:
    Your settings for the holds pickup slip also apply to the equivalent ILL pickup slip, which is printed when an interlibrary loan item is received.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Patron Services tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Hold pickup slip options. The Hold Pickup Slip Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + holdpickupoptSys.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable Pickup Slip.
    2. +
    3. Specify the patron identification to appear on the slip:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Select (check) Print full patron name to print the entire name in this format: Last name (comma), First name (no comma) and Middle initial. Example: Smith John T.
    • +
    • Print x characters of patron last name, and set the number of characters to print the name in this format: First x number of characters of the last name (no comma) and the first initial of first name. Example: Smit J 
      If the control is set to print only 1 character of the last name, only the first character of the last name is printed, not the first or middle initial.
      If you chose to include the patron’s name or limited characters, it is printed in bold, large characters at the top of the slip. If you do not check either option, no name appears on the slip.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Printer limitations restrict the name to approximately 38 characters, depending on the width of the characters and the printer model. Very long names may be cut off even if you specified the full patron name. If you set the number of characters to 1, only the first character of the last name is printed.

    +
      +
    • To include a patron barcode on the slip, select (check) Print x digits of the patron barcode, and specify the number of digits to print, counting to the left from the last digit of the barcode.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Print x digits of the patron barcode must be selected (checked) at the pickup branch to allow for the patron’s barcode to print on the slip. See Set in-transit slip options.

    +
      +
    • To print the barcode in large print, select (check) Large print.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select a printing orientation for the slip:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Horizontal (default) - The hold pickup slip is inserted in the material, exposing the patron name and pickup date. The material is shelved so that the slip extends horizontally from the material.
    • +
    • Vertical - The hold pickup slip is a wrapper that is typically taped to the spine of the material. The pickup date is printed horizontally at the top and the patron’s name is printed vertically down the slip. Any additional content is printed in small type under the pickup date.
    • +
    • Tag - The hold pickup slip is inserted into the material. When the slip is inserted, the patron name and pickup date are exposed at the top of the slip, printed horizontally, and the “tail” of the slip is inside the material. The material is shelved so that the slip extends above the material. Any additional content is printed in small type under the item barcode.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select a number in the Trailing blank spin control to specify the number of blank lines to insert on the right side or horizontal slips or the bottom of vertical slips.
    2. +
    3. Under Hold slips combined, select one of the following options:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • None - This is the default. Hold slips are not combined.
    • +
    • Combine hold pickup and in-transit slip - When this option is selected at the System level, hold pickup and in-transit slips are combined.
    • +
    • Append hold call slip to pickup slip - When this option is selected at the System level, check the Append call slip check box. The option will be selected for all organizations in the system, but it can be unchecked.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To print additional fields on the hold pickup slip, click the Contents Selection tab. The Contents Selection tab displays the available options in the left column of the dialog box, and the selected options in the right column.
    2. +
    +

    + HoldPickupContents.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To add a field to be printed on hold pickup slips, select it in the Options column and click Add to add it to the Selections column. To remove a field, select it in the Selections column and click Remove.
    2. +
    +
      +
    • last 4 digits of patron phone - You can add the last four digits of the patron’s phone number after the patron’s name, in the same large font. The system uses the last four consecutive numeric characters of the Phone 1 field in the patron record. If this field is blank, or if four consecutive numeric characters cannot be found, no number is printed.
    • +
    +

    Examples: +

    +

    315 634-4512 ext 123
    634-4512 WORK
    In both cases, the system sees alpha characters in the last 4 characters and moves left until it identifies 4 consecutive numbers. The slip will print 4512.

    +

    634-4512 ex 1234
    The system identifies and prints 1234 because there are 4 consecutive numbers.

    +

    451 ex.123
    The system cannot identify 4 consecutive numbers. No numbers will be printed on the slip.

    +
      +
    • Pickup branch abbreviation - When selected, the pickup branch abbreviation is printed on all holds pickup slips, and on combination in-transit/holds pickup slips, regardless of format, at the top of the slip. On horizontal slips, the branch abbreviation is printed above the patron name in bold capital letters the same font size as the date. On vertical slips, it is printed above the “Pickup by” date, also in bold capital letters the same size as the date. On tag slips, it is printed above the patron name in the same size font as the “Pickup by” date.
    • +
    • Title - When selected, the title is printed on the hold pickup slips.
    • +
    • Item barcode - The full item barcode is printed.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Libraries that process items for holds centrally, sorting held items by pickup branch, may want to select the pickup branch abbreviation option to print at the top of the holds pickup slip for ease in sorting.

    +
      +
    • Unclaimed date - The Unclaimed date is the date to pull the item from the shelf if it has not been picked up. The date is based on a time period defined by the pickup branch.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If your library is using a combined in-transit/hold pickup slip, this date is not available because the slip is printed when the item goes in-transit.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Administration Explorer (Parameters - Patron Services) appears.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    At each staff client workstation, you must enable the slip from each workform that generates the slip. Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Circulation_Receipts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Circulation_Receipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92dc72de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Circulation_Receipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Circulation Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Circulation Receipts

    +

    Polaris provides a number of printed receipts that you can configure to suit your library’s policies. You can also enable eReceipts, so patrons can receive check-out, renewal, and fine receipts by e-mail or text message.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Printed_Receipts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Printed_Receipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12a9f682 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_Printed_Receipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Printed Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Printed Receipts

    +

    Polaris provides the following printed circulation receipts and slips:

    +
      +
    • Check-out/renewal receipt - Lists the items checked out or renewed for a patron during a circulation session. For set-up information, see Set check-out receipt options.
    • +
    • Items Out receipt - Printed from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, this receipt lists all the items a patron currently has checked out. For set-up information, see Set Items Out receipt options.
    • +
    • Check-in receipt - Lists the items checked in for a patron or group of patrons. If items are selected from multiple patrons, the items are grouped by patrons, and three blank lines are added at the end of each group. If auto-cut receipt printing is enabled, the receipt is cut at the end of each patron’s group of items. (Items with no patron information, for example those that went from In to In at check in, are also grouped together and separated from patron items.) For set-up information, see Set check-in receipt options.
    • +
    • Fine receipt - Lists the fines and fees paid or waived for overdue items, replacement items, and other fees for a patron. For set-up information, see Set fine receipt options.
    • +
    • Hold slip - Identifies a held item and the patron for whom the item is being held. Four types of hold slips are available:
    • +
    • Default hold slip - A hold slip prints automatically when an item’s status becomes Held as a result of a circulation transaction (for example, the item is checked in). Libraries typically place the hold slip with the held material for identification purposes. The slip also prints when an ILL item is received on the Request Manager workform - ILL Requests view. For set-up information, see Set hold slip options.
    • +
    • Hold call slip - For libraries that call their patrons for held items. It includes extended information and is laid out so that it can be folded to expose the title when placed in a book, with all the necessary patron information located below the fold. See Enable hold call slips.
    • +
    • Hold/ILL pick-up slip - For libraries that allow patrons to pick up their own held items. This slip is inserted in the book so that the patron’s name (in a specified format) and the pick-up date are visible on the shelf. By default, this slip is printed horizontally on the receipt paper, and requires a line mode receipt printer such as a Star® TSP600, Star TSP700, or Dell™ T200. The settings for this slip also apply to an equivalent ILL pickup slip, printed when an interlibrary loan item is received. Vertical printing settings are also available. For set-up information, see Set up hold pickup slips
    • +
    • In-transit slip - Prints automatically when an item’s status changes to In Transit (because it belongs to another branch) or Transferred (because it will fill a hold and needs to be sent to the pick-up library) during a circulation transaction. You can also choose to print the in-transit slip only when the status changes to Transferred ( Set the workstation to print receipts and slips). In Polaris Administration, you can choose the information to include on the slip and select the option to combine the in-transit and pickup slips. See Set in-transit slip options.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When an item’s status changes to Transferred to fill a request, the in-transit slip includes the text FOR HOLD. The text does not appear on in-transit slips printed when an item is checked in and just needs to be shipped back to its assigned branch.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, you also specify which printers are available for selection from staff client workforms, and you can specify receipt printer control codes for printer options such as bold type, in addition to the set of control codes that Polaris provides for specific receipt printers. See Set receipt printer control codes.

    +

    Important:
    You must also set up receipt or slip printing at each staff client workstation that generates receipts or slips. Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris also supports hold pickup and in-transit slips printed from Epson ReStick printers. See Epson® ReStick™ Printers - Hold and In-Transit Slips.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_eReceipts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_eReceipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55f02506 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/Setting_Up_eReceipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up eReceipts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up eReceipts

    +

    You can send eReceipts (e-mail and/or text message receipts) to patrons who prefer either of these options. They can be sent to patrons for check-outs, renewals, and paid fines from the staff client or Leap; renewals from PAC; check-out and renewals from Polaris ExpressCheck; and renewals from Polaris Phone Attendant (inbound telephony). No overnight processing is required, so these receipts are sent within a few moments of the transaction. All eReceipts are sent in plain text format. One checked out or renewed item is listed per text message (TXT) receipt to limit the length of the message.

    +

    Note:
    eReceipts are not sent for offline staff client transactions.

    +

    +

    +

    To set up eReceipts to be sent to patrons in email or text message:

    + +

    Patron Record Settings for eReceipts

    +

    Staff members set the eReceipt option on the Patron Registration workform - Addresses view to specify the patron’s preference for e-mail receipts, TXT message receipts, or both (All). The option is available if eReceipts have been enabled for the patron’s branch.

    +

    You can set these options as default selections for normal and express patron registration. For more information about setting registration default values, see Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults and Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements.

    +

    If a patron record specifies eReceipts, you can also choose to include the setting in the optional patron data that is displayed in the header area of the Check Out and Patron Status workforms. For more information about selecting data to be displayed in these header areas, see Setting Up the Check Out Workform.

    +

    Leap and eReceipt Settings

    +

    When eReceipts are enabled for the branch and the patron receives only eReceipts, an alert appears in Leap when checking in, checking out or paying fines so that staff know not to wait for a printed receipt.

    +

    When staff enter a fine payment in Leap, the following message appears if the patron receives only eReceipts: EReceipt submitted for fine payment.

    +

    When checking out an item to a patron in Leap, the following message appears if the patron receives only eReceipts: EReceipt submitted for check out/renewal.

    +

    Prompt for eReceipts in Leap +

    +

    You can set an eReceipt prompt to appear in Leap when checking out items to patrons whose eReceipt option is set to None in the Patron Record > Notification options. The prompt also includes an option to enable eReceipts for the patron.

    +

    The eReceipt prompt, Would you like to configure this patron to receive an eReceipt for this and future check-outs? appears in Leap when:

    +
      +
    • email or text message receipts have been enabled in the EReceipt options patron services parameter for the patron's registered branch and the Leap login branch;
    • +
    • the Prompt for eReceipt configuration in Leap check box is selected in the Check-Out Receipt Options patron services parameter for the Leap login branch;
    • +
    • and None is selected for the eReceipt option in the Patron Registration > Notification Settings in Leap.
    • +
    +

    Fine eReceipts

    +

    Patrons receive e-mail or TXT receipts for fine payments if eReceipt options have been enabled for both the transacting workstation’s branch and the patron’s branch, and the patron record is set to receive e-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both.

    +

    Note:
    EReceipt features do not apply to credit card payments because e-mail receipts are sent for these payments as a separate process.

    +

    Staff members can print a fine receipt even if the patron receives an eReceipt. The Tools, Options menu on any workform where staff members can take fine payments offers a fine receipt option: only if no eReceipt.

    +

    When eReceipts are enabled and Fine receipt is checked in the Options dialog box, the option only if no eReceipt is available. If the option is not checked, printed receipts are produced in addition to eReceipts for patrons who have opted to receive eReceipts. If only if no eReceipt is checked, fine receipts are printed only when the patron does not receive eReceipts.

    +

    Note:
    The Options dialog box settings affect fine receipt printing only. A patron who has opted to receive eReceipts will always receive eReceipts for fines, regardless of these settings. For more information about setting up workstations for receipt printing, .Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    Waive eReceipts

    +

    An eReceipt is sent for waived charges if all the conditions for sending a fine eReceipt are met, and if the Suppress for waived charges option (Patron Services parameter - Fine receipt options) is not selected for the workstation’s branch. A receipt for waives is printed in addition to the eReceipt if all the conditions for printing a fine receipt are met (see Fine eReceipts) and if the Suppress for waived charges option is not selected for the workstation branch.

    +

    eReceipt Options in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC

    +

    If the patron’s registered branch has enabled eReceipts (see Set up eReceipts), that organization can also offer the option to receive e-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both in patron self-registration or account updates from PAC. To enable eReceipt preference options in PAC, use the PAC profile Patron eReceipts, available at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    In the PAC, the patron can then select e-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both, as enabled by the registered branch. The patron will receive eReceipts for renewals from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC if this option has been enabled for the patron’s registered branch (see Set up eReceipts), and check-out and fine eReceipts if both the check-out branch and the patron’s branch have enabled eReceipts.

    +

    Important:
    The eReceipt options are available for patron account updates from PAC only if you also allow patrons to update the e-mail address or phone number from PAC. These settings are available in the PAC profile Patron access options. For details, see You Saved Receipt Messages.

    +

    Editing eReceipt Content in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin)

    +

    Your settings for the check-out branch determine the content of e-mail receipts and TXT receipts. For e-mail receipts, the From field is determined by the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender. The subject line, introduction, and footer text can be modified in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). For TXT receipts, the subject line and footer text can be modified in Polaris WebAdmin.

    +

    Note:
    Use the Patron Services parameter Check out receipt options to specify the optional additional data fields for e-mail receipts and TXT receipts. See Set up eReceipts.

    +

    Polaris WebAdmin includes a Receipts “product.” Select this product to edit the content of e-mail and TXT receipts.

    +

    + WebAdminReceipts.gif 

    +

    The table lists the string IDs. For more information about using Polaris WebAdmin, see WebAdmin online Help.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Receipt TypeMnemonic (String ID)Default TextContext
    +

    E-Mail Check-Out Receipts

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_CHECKOUT_EMAIL_SUBJECT

    +
    +

    Checked-out from your library

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_CHECKOUT_EMAIL_INTRO

    +
    +

    The following items were checked out by you on [DATE] from [BRANCH]

    +
    +

    Introduction

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_EMAIL_FOOTER

    +
    +

    Please do not reply to this message.

    +
    +

    Footer

    +
    +

    E-Mail Renewal Receipts

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_RENEWAL_EMAIL_SUBJECT

    +
    +

    You renewed library items

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_RENEWAL_EMAIL_INTRO

    +
    +

    Items renewed on [DATE].

    +
    +

    Introduction

    +
    +

    Text Message Check-Out Receipts

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_CHECKOUT_TXT_SUBJECT

    +
    +

    Checked-out from your library

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_TXT_FOOTER

    +
    +

    Access your library account for additional information.

    +
    +

    Footer

    +
    +

    Text Message Renewal Receipts

    +
    +

    RECEIPT_RENEWAL_TXT_SUBJECT

    +
    +

    You renewed library item

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    You Saved Messages in eReceipts

    +

    You can add a “you saved” message to check-out and/or renewal eReceipts. The message helps to remind patrons of the value of library service by displaying how much it would cost to purchase the items. For details, see You Saved Receipt Messages.

    +

    Logging eReceipts and Reporting Failures

    +

    E-mail and TXT receipt messages are logged in the Polaris Transactions database, and failures are included in the Receipt delivery failure report. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and open the Circulation folder in the Polaris Reports window. For a specified time period and organizations (sending branches), the report lists the transactions where an e-mail or TXT receipt failed to be sent for a check-out or renew transaction. For more information, see Circulation Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9017e966 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPreceipts/You_Saved_Receipt_Messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + You Saved Receipt Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    You Saved Receipt Messages

    +

    You can add a “you saved” message to printed and email check-out/renewal receipts and the printed Items Out list. The message helps to remind patrons of the value of library service by displaying how much it would cost to purchase the items. It includes the total value of the current receipt transactions, the value of the patron's year-to-date transactions, and the “lifetime” value of all the patron’s transactions.

    +

    The value for each item is calculated based on the retail price stored in the item record. If the item doesn't have a price, you can opt to use the Replacement Fee default value for that material type. You can also choose to suppress the message if the value is below a specified dollar amount.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    The You Saved message option does not apply to text message receipts, and it cannot be activated or suppressed for individual patrons.

    +
      +
    • Staff client - When the You Saved message is implemented at the check-out workstation branch, the value is calculated for all items, regardless of item or patron branch. The message is included on check-out receipts generated from the staff client Check Out workform and (if the branch has opted to include renewals in the calculation) renewals from the Patron Status workform. If the organization has opted to print the message on the Items Out slip, the message also appears when the Items Out slip is printed from the Patron Status Items Out list view.
    • +
    • Leap - When the logged-on user's branch has implemented the You Saved message, the message is included on receipts generated from the Leap Check Out workform (check out or renewal) and from the patron Items Out view (renewal).
    • +
    • Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC - Settings for the patron’s registered branch control whether the You Saved message appears on email receipts for items renewed from PAC. To enable the message on email receipts for items renewed from PAC, check Send receipts for renewal from PAC in the Patron Services parameter EReceipt options, then enable You Saved receipt messages (see Set up You Saved receipt messages).
    • +
    • Polaris ExpressCheck - When the You Saved message is implemented at the ExpressCheck workstation's parent branch, the value is calculated for all items, regardless of item or patron branch. If the ExpressCheck station is configured to print one receipt per item (Parameters > SelfCheck unit > Polaris ExpressCheck Options), then only one item will be included in the receipt tally.
    • +
    • SIP Self-Check Units - You can include the You Saved message on printer messages, screen messages, or both. The message is added to the existing check-out and renewal messages (if you have opted to include the message for renewals). The system uses the settings of the organization associated with the self-check unit’s SIP Service Port.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +

    Customizing the You Saved Message

    +

    The default You saved message is You just saved [Value] by using your library. You have saved [YTDValue] this past year and [LifetimeValue] since you began using the library! Use Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to customize the You Saved message. Select the Receipts “product.” The message mnemonic is RECEIPT_YOUSAVED. To include monetary values, do not edit the text in backets. The message is truncated to 255 characters. For more information about editing messages, see WebAdmin online help.

    +

    Year-To-Date and Lifetime Savings in the Patron Record

    +

    Year-to-date and lifetime savings values are available in the Polaris staff client patron record properties sheet. In the staff client, select the Properties icon or press F8 on the Patron Registration or Patron Status workform to view the patron record properties sheet.

    +

    In Leap, year-to-date and lifetime savings values are available in the Misc. Info section of the patron record.

    +

    Processing the Year-to-Date Amount

    +

    Previous year-to-date values are saved in the PrevYearYouSavedAmount table, which is populated when the circulation year-end rollover job runs. Table columns include PatronID (int) and YTDYouSavedAmount (money). The Circ_YearEndCircCountRollover job script rolls over the new YTDYouSavedAmount field from the patron record into the PrevYearYouSavedAmount table and then zeroes out the YTDYouSavedAmount value in the patron record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Add_a_not-supplied_reasons_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Add_a_not-supplied_reasons_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc5809c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Add_a_not-supplied_reasons_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a Hold Not Supplied Reason to the Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a Hold Not Supplied Reason to the Policy Table

    +

    You define the reasons that a hold request was not supplied in the User Defined Hold Not-Supplied Reasons policy table. The same entries are displayed for every organization level at which the table is opened. You can add entries to the table at the system, library, and branch levels, but the addition is applied to all organizations. All organizations should agree on the not-supplied reasons they use for their hold requests. You cannot delete or modify entries in this table.

    +

    You can open the User Defined Hold Not-Supplied Reasons table from the Administration Explorer only. You cannot access this table from an organization workform.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to add rows to the table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow.

    +

    To add a not-supplied reason to the User Defined Hold Not-Supplied Reasons policy table:

    +

    Important:
    New not-supplied reasons are available to all organizations.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select User Defined Hold Not-Supplied Reasons. The table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + HoldsNotSupplied.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00499.gif to display the Insert User defined hold not-supplied reasons dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + pNotSupReasonsInsert.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the text describing the not-supplied reason in the Description box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK in the dialog box. The User Defined Hold Not-Supplied Reasons policy table is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_pickup_location_from_ PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_pickup_location_from_ PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42227e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_pickup_location_from_ PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Change pickup location from PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change the hold pickup location from PowerPAC

    +

    When at least one hold status is selected in the Hold options parameter at the System level, patrons can select holds with any of these selected statuses in the Requests view of their PowerPAC account, and click or tap Change Pickup Location. If no hold statuses are selected, the Change Pickup Location button does not appear. For information about the Administration parameters, see: Set Holds options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC.

    +

    To change the pickup location from PowerPAC, the patron follows these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Logs in to the patron account in PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. Selects Requests from the My Account menu or dashboard to see the hold requests.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Selects the check boxes next to the holds for which the pickup location needs to change, and clicks or taps Change Pickup Location.
    2. +
    +

    After the pickup location has been changed for a hold request with a status other than Held, the new pickup location is displayed in the Pickup Library column. If the hold request has a status of Held, Rerouting from [original pickup location] to [changed pickup location] is displayed in the Pickup Library column.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_the_hold_pickup_location_from_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_the_hold_pickup_location_from_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edea5f60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Change_the_hold_pickup_location_from_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Change the hold pickup location from Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change the hold pickup location from Mobile PAC

    +

    When at least one hold status is selected in the Hold options parameter at the System level, patrons can select holds with any of these selected statuses in the Requests page of their Mobile PAC account, and tap Change Pickup Location. If no hold statuses are selected, the Change Pickup Location button does not appear.

    +

    To change the hold pickup location from Mobile PAC, the patron follows these steps:

    +
      +
    1. Logs into the patron account.
    2. +
    3. Selects Hold Requests.
    4. +
    +

    The Requests page is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Selects the checkbox next to the hold or holds, and selects Change Pickup Location.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    If any of the selected holds have a status for which changing the hold pickup location is not allowed, you cannot select the Change Pickup Location button.

    +

    The next view displays the Pickup Library list box.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. The patron selects the new pickup library from the Pickup Library list and taps Yes.
    2. +
    +

    A confirmation message is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Defining_Hold_Statuses_and_Hold_Not_Supplied_Reasons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Defining_Hold_Statuses_and_Hold_Not_Supplied_Reasons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80c632aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Defining_Hold_Statuses_and_Hold_Not_Supplied_Reasons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Defining Hold Statuses and Hold Not Supplied Reasons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Hold Statuses and Hold Not Supplied Reasons

    +

    The descriptions for hold statuses are defined using the Hold Request Statuses database table, and the possible reasons for denying a hold request are defined using the User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons policy table. To access these tables, go to the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables or Database Tables folder, and select the table. The table is displayed in the details frame.

    +

    + +

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Edit_hold_request_status_descriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Edit_hold_request_status_descriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a4294821 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Edit_hold_request_status_descriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + Edit hold request status descriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit hold request status descriptions

    +

    As a hold request moves through the processing cycle, the request status changes.The status descriptions are displayed in various contexts in the staff client, in the PAC patron account, and in Polaris ExpressCheck.The standard hold status descriptions are as follows:

    +

    Active - When a hold request is placed in the queue, its status is automatically set to Active. All items that can fill the hold request are bound to it, and the items can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. to fill the request. The system is actively looking for items to fill the request.

    +

    Cancelled - Cancelled hold requests remain in the database and visible on Polaris workforms. A Cancelled request cannot be filled. However, you can reactivate or delete it.

    +

    Expired - If a hold request is not filled within the specified period of time, the request status automatically changes to Expired. (The current date is later than the Expiration date on the Hold Request workform.) An Expired request cannot be filled. However, you can reactivate or delete the request, or convert it to an interlibrary loan request.

    +

    Held - A Held request means an item has been trapped to fill the request, and the circulation status is Held. The item is ready for the patron to pick up.

    +

    Inactive -An Inactive hold request has an activation date in the future. The request does not appear in the queue, and an item cannot be trapped to fill the request until the activation date. You can cancel or delete an inactive request, or convert it to an interlibrary loan request.

    +

    Not-supplied - If no items can fill the request (for example, if no items are attached to the bibliographic record), the request status is Not-supplied. You can delete the request or convert it to an interlibrary loan request. You can also reactivate a Not-supplied request, but if the reason it was not supplied has not changed, the request becomes Not-supplied again.

    +

    Out - An item has been linked to the hold request, and the item’s circulation status has changed to Out (that is, the item has been checked out). This status is useful in keeping track of items requested and circulated by Borrow by Mail.

    +

    Note:
    This status is automatically enabled for organizations using Borrow by Mail and is displayed in the staff client and the PAC patron account (where it appears as Sent). Organizations who do not use Borrow by Mail can choose to display or suppress the display of requests with the status of Out. On the Holds options dialog box - Staff & PAC tabbed page (Request parameters), select (check) the option Display request status “Out”. The setting for the workstation’s logon branch controls the display in the staff client, while the setting for the patron’s registered branch controls the display in the PAC patron account.

    +

    Pending - When an active request can be filled by an item with a status of In at your library, or the request has been routed to another library that has the item with a status of In, the status changes to Pending. If none of the items there have a status of In, the request keeps its Active status, and items can be trapped to fill the request.

    +

    Shipped - A Shipped hold request means that an item was trapped at a branch other than the pickup branch, and is being shipped to the pickup branch.

    +

    +

    Unclaimed - If the requesting patron does not pick up the held item within the specified period of time, the hold request status automatically changes from Held to Unclaimed. (The current date is later than the Unclaimed date on the Hold Request workform.)

    +

    +

    To edit the display descriptions for hold request statuses:

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to view and modify this table: Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify hold status table: Allow.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the organization, and select Hold Request Statuses. The Hold Request Statuses table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To modify a description, follow these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the hold request status entry and click . The Modify Hold Request Statuses dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Type the new description in the Description box.
    4. +
    +

    Modify the description so that it is brief and understandable to everyone, including patrons. The modification affects only the description that is displayed; it remains associated with the underlying hold request status that appears in the Name box. Reports use the status name, not the description.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Processing hold requests (staff client) Working with Interlibrary Loans.
    • +
    • Deleting bibliographic or item records with linked hold requests - Two system-level Cataloging parameters control whether a bibliographic or item record can be deleted when there are hold requests attached to it:
      • Bibliographic record delete: Allow if there are holds - The default setting is No (do not allow bibliographic record deletion if hold requests are attached). When this option is set to Yes, if the record is linked to one or more hold requests with a status of Active, Pending, or Inactive, and no other circumstances prevent the deletion, the deletion is allowed and the request status is set to Not Supplied. A canceled hold notice is generated according to your library’s settings for this type of notice. Regardless of your setting for this parameter, the deletion will be allowed and the request deleted if the request has a status of Not-supplied, canceled, Expired, or Out. The deletion will not be allowed if the request status is Unclaimed, Shipped, Held.
      • Item record delete: Allow if there are holds - The default setting is No (do not allow item record deletion if hold requests are attached). When this option is set to Yes, if the record is linked to one or more bibliographic-level or item-level hold requests with a status of Active, Pending, or Inactive, and no other circumstances prevent the deletion, the deletion is allowed and the request status is set to Not Supplied. A canceled hold notice is generated according to your library’s settings for this type of notice. As with the bibliographic record parameter, the deletion will be allowed and the request deleted if the request has a status of Not-supplied, Canceled, Expired, or Out. The deletion will not be allowed if the request status is Unclaimed, Shipped, Held.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/HoldsroutingSeq.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/HoldsroutingSeq.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f083b7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/HoldsroutingSeq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Holds Routing Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds Routing Overview

    +

    The Holds Routing Sequences Primary and Holds Routing Sequences Secondary policy tables specify the RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. routing sequences of hold requests from the requester branch to other branches, and determine whose items can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation to fill a request. Your Polaris Implementation Manager helps set up the tables when Polaris is installed, but you can modify them as needed. The Holds Routing Sequences Secondary table can be left empty if the branch does not use a secondary RTF sequence.

    +

    You can work with these tables from an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. When you open the tables at the system level, you can view, add, change, delete, and reorder entries for any branch. At the library level, you can view, add, change, delete, and reorder entries for any branch associated with the library. At the branch level, you can view, add, change, delete, and reorder entries only for the specific branch.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify these tables: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify holds routing sequence table: Allow.

    +

    For instructions on setting up the Hold Routing Sequence tables, see Edit holds routing tables. After setting up tables, you use the Request parameter, Holds options, RTF tab to set the total number of days in the RTF cycle and specify how the requests are filled. See Set Holds options: RTF processing.

    +

    Request to Fill (RTF) Routing

    +

    In Polaris, the specified pickup branch for a hold request (not the patron’s registered branch) is the “requester” branch for the purposes of RTF routing. Each branch can specify the RTF routing sequence that the system uses when that branch is the pickup branch. When you set up a routing sequence for a requester branch, you are effectively defining the branches with which the requester branch can do the business of hold requests, whether items are taken off the shelf as part of RTF processing or trapped at circulation.

    +

    A branch can specify a primary routing sequence alone, or both primary and secondary routing sequences. This allows a library to establish levels of priority in filling hold requests. In a system where libraries are geographically close and have fairly uniform lending policies, a branch may define only a primary group of RTF branches, allowing a request to pass from one branch to the other in a preferred order. Leaving a branch out of a routing cycle will prevent your items from filling requests at that branch. You might do this, for example, if a branch has closed temporarily.

    +

    If the concern is not just to fill requests from any branch as efficiently as possible but to first check with a specific group of branches (such as geographically close or politically allied branches) the library might place itself and a few other branches in the primary group, but place other libraries in the secondary group. Then a request is routed to the secondary group only if the primary group does not have the item.

    +

    Note:
    You can set Polaris to randomize the request sequence so that the same library is not always the first asked to fill the request.

    +

    When you use primary and secondary routing groups, and a request is routed to the secondary group, the position of the request in the holds queue may change. If you think this might confuse patrons, you can suppress the display of the holds queue position in PAC and Polaris ExpressCheck. For PAC, set the PAC profile Patron access: Display hold queue information to No. The profile setting for the patron’s registered branch controls whether the holds queue column is displayed in the online patron account, and whether the patron receives a message about the current number of active requests for the material when she places a hold. For Polaris ExpressCheck, open the SelfCheck Unit parameter Polaris ExpressCheck enable and clear the Display hold queue position check box.

    +

    Note:
    It is neither necessary nor desirable to include the same branches in both the primary and secondary cycles as this defeats the purpose of separately defined groups. Also, when a request passes to the secondary routing cycle, an item that checks in to a primary branch will still trap for the request.

    +

    The illustration shows an example of primary group routing.

    +

    + rtfprocessing.gif 

    +

    For each branch (and in each routing group, if you use both groups), the following information is defined:

    +
      +
    • Requester branch - The branch designated as the pickup branch for the hold request.
    • +
    • Responder branch - A branch that can fill a hold request for the requester branch. If the responder branch owns an item that fills a request and the item has a status of In, the branch is part of the RTF sequence for that request. If a branch is not listed as a responder branch, the branch cannot fill a hold request from the requester branch, regardless of any items it may have.
    • +
    • Sequence - The order in which a request is routed to responder branches, one branch at a time. For example, if Responder A has a Sequence setting of 3, it is the third library to receive a request from the Requester library (assuming that branches with a sequence of 1 and 2 have items that are In, but deny or ignore the request). You can randomize which library should come next to start the sequence, if number 1 denies or ignores the request.
    • +
    +

    Important: +
    Each branch should put itself in the first position (sequence of 1) for the Primary table’s Responder column. That way, the request can be filled first by the requester branch, if that branch has an item that is In. If the branch is not listed as a responder branch for itself, its own items do not trap for holds at circulation. If you use secondary groups, you would probably not want your branch as a responder branch in the secondary group, since the branch would be polled again if the request went to the secondary group. If a request does go to the secondary RTF group, an item can still be trapped at any branch in either group.

    +
      +
    • Days at branch - The number of days a request stays on a branch’s RTF list if no one responds to the request. When the period is over, the request moves to the next responder branch in the sequence with an item that is In. Polaris skips days closed and dates closed for the responder branch when calculating this period, so they do not count toward the total days at the branch. Days closed are specified with the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation, set at the system, library, or branch level. Dates closed are set in the Dates Closed policy table for an organization. Identifying Dates Closed.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Managing_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Managing_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43f98ca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Managing_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + Managing Hold Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Hold Requests

    +

    Use the Request parameter, Hold options, to specify how your library organization manages holds. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the System, and click the Request tab in the details view. Then, double-click Holds options to open the Hold Options dialog box.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    To allow renewals when an item is out to a patron but there are hold requests with certain statuses, the renewal is blocked by default. You can change the setting to allow renewals of these items as long as the item is not the only one available to fill the request. See Allow renewals for items with hold requests.

    +

    To prevent holds from being placed on a specific item, see Restrict holds on specific items.

    +

    To allow patrons to place multiple holds at once from Polaris PowerPAC working or saved title lists, see Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Restrict_holds_on_specific_items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Restrict_holds_on_specific_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10e9f5ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Restrict_holds_on_specific_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Restrict holds on specific items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Restrict holds on specific items

    +

    To restrict holds on specific items:

    +
      +
    1. Search for and open the item record. Finding Polaris Records.
    2. +
    3. Select View > Cataloging or click ItemCatViewIcon.gif.
    4. +
    5. To allow the item to be eligible for unrestricted hold requests, select the Holdable check box and clear all the Limit To check boxes.

    6. +
    7. To allow the item to be eligible for hold requests under restricted circumstances, select the Holdable check box and one (or certain combinations) of the following options:
    8. +
        +
      • Pickup at - Limit the item to filling hold requests only at a selected branch, not just the item’s assigned branch. From this list, only one branch can be selected. Upon selection of this option, you can also select Patrons from this library and branches or Patrons from this branch only.
        patronpickupat.gif
        The branches that display for selection in the Pickup at list are selected in the Holds: Item Pickup Branches option located under Parameters, Patron services at the Branch organization level. See Set up the hold pickup branch list. +
      • +
      • Patrons from this library and branches - Limit the item to filling hold requests from patrons registered at the item’s assigned branch library and associated branches. When you select this option, you can also select number of days past first available.
      • +
      • Number of days past first available - Sets the number of days a new item is available only to the assigned library's patrons. During the specified number of days, patrons from all libraries can still find the new item and place a hold. After the specified number of days, holds on the new item placed by patrons from other libraries can be filled.
      • +
      • Patrons from this branch only - Limit the item to filling hold requests only from patrons registered at the item’s assigned branch. + +

        Note:
        If a branch that has been selected in existing item records is removed or deselected in this SA control, the Pickup at: option in the item record is deselected. Additionally, requests linked to the items are not impacted since their eligibility to fill the request has not changed.

      • +
      • +

        Preferred borrowers - Limit the item to filling hold requests only where the pick-up library is on the preferred lender list of the item’s assigned branch. See Defining Hold Processing Options. When you select this option, you cannot select any other Limit to options.

        +
      • +
      +
    9. Select File > Save.
    10. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Restricting multiple items - To restrict multiple existing item records in the same way, search for the records and place them in a record set. For example, you may want to restrict all DVDs to the assigned branch’s Preferred lender list. Then use the bulk change function to set the Preferred lenders option for all the record set members. For more information about finding item records and limiting searches by material type Doing a Basic Search. For more information about bulk-changing item recordsWorking With Multiple Records. You can set any item hold restrictions with bulk change.
    • +
    • Restricting new records - To restrict holds on all new item records of a certain material type, create an item template for the material type with the Preferred lenders option selected (checked). Then use the template for all new item records of this material type.
    • +
    • Items relinked to a new bibliographic record - If an item is linked to a different bibliographic record after an item-level hold request is placed, the hold request is updated with the new bibliographic information.
    • +
    • General information about item records Creating Item Records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Alerts_and_blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Alerts_and_blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c888e063 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Alerts_and_blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Holds options: Define staff client and PAC alerts and blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds options: Define staff client and PAC alerts and blocks

    +

    This group of Hold options settings controls staff client and PAC alerts and blocks. You can also set an automatic due date adjustment based on the number of hold requests for items, so that popular items can circulate more quickly.

    +

    To set alerts, blocks, and adjusted due dates:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the Staff client & PAC tab.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To allow staff members to fill a hold request at check-out, select (check) Trap at check-out. When this option is checked, an alert message appears when a staff member attempts to check out an item that can fill a request. This setting also blocks check-out of these items at SIP self-check units.
    2. +
    3. To include a patron’s telephone number in a trapping message, select (check) Display patron phone number when trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision.. When this option is checked, the patron’s phone number, along with the patron’s name and barcode, appears on the alert message that an item can fill a hold request.
    4. +
    5. Set the bulk check-in alerts:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Alert in bulk check-in if the item will fill holds - Alert staff during bulk check-in if an item can fill a hold request. Staff have the option of filling the request or not. If you leave this option unchecked, Polaris traps the item automatically.
    • +
    • Alert in bulk check-in if the item is held - Alert staff that an item is held. Staff can choose whether to continue to hold the item. If this option is unchecked, no message alerts staff that the item is held.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This setting also affects ILL items. At bulk check-in, the ILL item status goes from Held to In, and if you check this option, the alert message appears for the ILL item.

    +
      +
    1. To provide a note field on the PAC patron request form, allowing the patron to enter a note with the request, select (check) Permit patron notes from PAC.
    2. +
    3. (System level only.) To allow patrons to suspend and reactivate hold requests from Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Polaris ExpressCheck, select Permit suspended requests from PAC.
    4. +
    +

    Requests with the status Active or Pending can be suspended. Requests with the status Inactive can be reactivated.

    +

    Important:
    If this option is disabled, patrons cannot set an activation date in the future when placing a request.

    +
      +
    1. To allow staff and patrons to cancel holds that have the status Shipped, select Permit cancellation on Shipped status.
    2. +
    3. Set the following options (If no items are attached) for bibliographic-level hold requests when no items are attached to the bibliographic record:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Alert in Staff Client - When this option is checked, staff members receive an alert message if they place bib-level hold requests when no items are attached. From the alert message, the staff member can place or cancel the hold request. If this option is not checked, no message appears and the hold request is automatically placed. You may want to leave this option unchecked to prevent repeated messages to staff if your acquisitions staff regularly place bib-level hold requests when no items are attached—for example, from the Purchase Order or Purchase Line Item workforms. The setting for the staff member’s log-on branch controls whether the alert message is displayed.
    • +
    • Block in PAC - When this option is checked, patrons are blocked from placing bib-level hold requests when no items are attached. The request cannot be placed from PAC, and a message advises patrons to contact the library for assistance. If this option is not checked, a message informs the patron that no items are linked to the request. The patron can continue or cancel the request. The settings for the requesting patron’s registered branch determine how the system treats bibliographic-level hold requests when no items are attached.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the following options (If patron is blocked) for hold requests from patrons whose records are blocked:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Block in Staff Client - Select to block a hold request initiated in the staff client if the patron’s record is blocked for any reason. Staff members can override the block. If you leave this box unchecked, staff can place a hold for the patron regardless of any blocks on the patron’s record or hold limits (see Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks), and no block messages appear. The system uses the setting of the branch defined in the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation. See Defining Circ and Request Limit Blocks.
    • +
    • Block in PAC - Select to block a hold request initiated in Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, or Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition if the request would exceed the setting for the total number of requests allowed or the number of requests allowed for a particular material type. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To enable a request status of Out and display requests with this status in the staff client and PAC patron account, select (check) Enable request status “Out”. The setting for the workstation’s logon branch controls the display in the staff client; the setting for the patron’s registered branch controls the display in the PAC patron account.
    2. +
    +

    A request status changes to Out when a held item is checked out, allowing the request to remain available for tracking purposes until the item status changes from Out to In, Held, Transferred, In-Transit, or Lost.

    +

    Note:
    The Out request status is automatically enabled if your library offers Borrow by Mail. See Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) PAC display patron contact info to display the patron’s contact information on the PowerPAC request confirmation page so that patrons can verify the information. A link is provided so the patron can update the information if necessary.
    2. +
    +

    This feature is particularly convenient for patrons who place Borrow by Mail requests and need to check their mailing addresses.

    +

    Note:
    This feature does not apply to Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) PAC block for patron verification to block hold requests from PAC if there is a verification block on the patron record.
    2. +
    +

    This type of block is added when the patron has registered online or has requested updates to certain patron account information. See Setting Patron Account Options.

    +
      +
    1. To set an item’s due date to change automatically according to the number of hold requests for the item (request-to-item ratio), do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Change due date based on ratio.
    2. +
    +

    Loan periods are shortened to a library-specified period. For example, if there were five requests for one item, the loan period for the item could be shortened to allow the item to circulate more quickly. This setting affects only loan periods of more than 7 days, and applies only to bibliographic-level holds. The calculation is based on all holdable items attached to a bibliographic record, regardless of Assigned Branch, and all open hold requests, but shortens the loan period of items according to the value set for this parameter by the item’s assigned branch. (Non-holdable items are not included in the calculation.)

    +

    Note:
    To display a message to circulation staff when a due date is automatically changed according to the request-to-item ratio, set the Patron Services parameter Due date truncated: Prompt to Yes.

    +
      +
    1. In the Requests box, type the number of requests in the requests-to-item ratio that triggers the change in due date.
    2. +
    3. In the Items box, type the number of items in the requests-to-item ratio that triggers the change in due date.
    4. +
    5. In the Loan period box, type the number of days for the loan period when the requests-per-item ratio is met.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Charge_for_hold_requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Charge_for_hold_requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3993dce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Charge_for_hold_requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Holds options: Charge for hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds options: Charge for hold requests

    +

    You can choose to charge patrons for hold requests if they are filled. This setting is available at the System level only, and your settings apply to all organizations in the system.

    +

    To set up charges for hold requests:

    +

    Important:
    If you choose to charge fees for hold requests, and you want the charge to apply to hold requests from Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, set the Children’s PAC profile Allow hold requests if charging for holds to Yes. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the default setting is No. If you choose to charge a fee for hold requests and you leave the Children’s PAC profile set to No, hold requests cannot be placed in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the System, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the Charges tab.
    6. +
    +

    + pHoldOptChrgs.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the Charge check box.
    2. +
    3. Type the fee per request in the Rate box. This amount is automatically added to the patron’s account when the hold request is filled.
    4. +
    5. In the Message box, type the text that patrons see when they attempt to place a hold request in Polaris PowerPAC. This message should state that a fee will be charged to the patron account when the hold request is filled.
    6. +
    7. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options settings, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Define_Terms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Define_Terms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aa95025a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Define_Terms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Holds options: Define terms and limits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds options: Define terms and limits

    +

    This group of settings controls how long a requested item’s status remains held for pickup, how long a hold request remains in the queue without being filled, when the system deletes hold request records, how to handle unclaimed requests, and whether to include Held and Shipped requests in limit calculations.

    +

    To set terms and limit calculations:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Click the Terms tab.
    6. +

      + +

      +
    7. In the Number days held for pickup box, type the number of days an item is held for a patron.
    8. +

      The hold request status becomes unclaimed at 11:59 pm on the last day the item is held. The system takes into account the dates closed and hours of operation (days closed) when calculating the last day the item is held. The pick-up branch’s setting is used.

      +
    9. In the Default expiration period box, type the number of days that a hold request remains in the queue before the request status automatically changes to expired.
    10. +

      When a request has expired, it can no longer be filled. The pick-up branch’s setting is used.

      +
    11. (System level only) Specify when the system deletes expired, canceled, and not-supplied hold request records:
    12. +
        +
      • Delete expired in - The number of days after which an expired hold request is automatically deleted from Polaris. To delete requests immediately upon their expiration, set this to 0 days.
      • +
      • Delete canceled in - The number of days after which a canceled hold request is automatically deleted from Polaris. To delete requests immediately upon their cancellation, set this to 0 days.
      • +
      • Delete not-supplied in - The number of days after which a hold request with a not-supplied status is automatically deleted from Polaris. To delete requests immediately when they become not supplied, set this to 0 days.
      • +
      +
    13. For Unclaimed requests, select one of the following options for handling unclaimed requests:
    14. +
        +
      • Delete - An unclaimed request is automatically deleted when the item is checked in or out. Deleted requests are automatically removed from the system. This setting also applies to SIP self-check units.
      • +
      • Cancel - An unclaimed request is automatically canceled when the item is checked in. A canceled request remains in the system, so it can later be reactivated or deleted.
      • +
      +
    15. (System level only) To include requests with a status of Held and Shipped when calculating the total number of hold requests a patron can have and the request limit by material types, select (check) Total holds thresholds include held/shipped.
    16. +

      If you leave this option unchecked, calculations include requests with a status of Active, Inactive, and Pending only. For information about setting total request limits and request limits by material type, see Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.

      +
    17. (System level only) To specify that inactive requests are counted toward a patron's total number of allowed hold requests, select Total holds thresholds include Inactive. For more information about request limits, see Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.
    18. +
    19. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    20. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Hold request status definitions - See Edit hold request status descriptions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enable_patrons_pickup.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enable_patrons_pickup.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0277340 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enable_patrons_pickup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC

    +

    At the System level only, you can open the Holds options dialog box, select the Pickup tab and specify the hold statuses for which patrons can change the pickup location from the PAC (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC).

    +

    Note: +
    If your library allows patrons to change the hold pickup location for holds with a status of Held, the holds will appear in the Held items to transfer list in the Request Manager. You can open the hold from the list and check it in. Check-in a held item with a changed pickup location.

    +

    To select the hold statuses for which patrons can change the hold pickup location:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer > System > Parameters.
    2. +
    3. Select the Request tab, and double-click Holds options. The Hold options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select the Pickup tab.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the check boxes to specify the hold statuses for which patrons can change the pickup branch from the PAC. If no status check boxes are selected, the option to change the pickup location does not display in the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC.
    2. +
    3. Click Apply to set the selected options, and click OK to close the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Patrons can change the pickup location for holds with the selected statuses.

    +
    +

    Note: +
    When the hold location is changed, the number of days held restarts once the item has been checked into the new pickup location.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enabling_Item_Status_Restrictions_First.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enabling_Item_Status_Restrictions_First.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..691e7aab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Enabling_Item_Status_Restrictions_First.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + Set Holds Options: Enable Hold Requests by Patrons and Define Restrictions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds Options: Enable Hold Requests by Patrons and Define Restrictions

    +

    To define hold request processing options for PAC, item-level, and first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD)., and to set restricted item statuses:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    2. +
    +

    + RequestParams.gif +

    +
      +
    1. If applicable, set Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC title-level hold request options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Enable title level hold requests from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC - Select (check) this box to allow hold requests from Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. If this option is not checked, patrons cannot place title-level requests in either application.
    • +
    • Default pickup branch - Select the default location for patrons to pick up their held items. This option sets the default only. A patron can select a different location when placing a request from among those you have designated as pickup libraries. See Set Holds options: Pickup library options . When the default setting is None and the patron selects a pickup branch the first time, or changes the current setting, a message offers to use the selected location until it is changed again. The patron can choose to use the new setting or keep the old one. (The patron can change the setting at any time.) The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can completely suppress request and availability information options from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results for specific types of material. SeeSuppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +
      +
    • Enable one-click requests in PowerPAC - Select this option to enable one-click hold requests from PowerPAC. When this option is selected, logged in patrons can place requests by clicking on the ONE CLICK REQUEST button.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. If applicable, set Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition title-level hold request options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Enable title level hold requests from Children’s PAC - Select (check) this box to allow hold requests from Polaris PowerPAC. If this option is not checked, patrons cannot place title-level requests in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.
    • +
    • Default pickup branch - Select the location for patrons to pick up their held items. In Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, patrons cannot select a different location when placing a request. Be sure the location you select is allowed as a pickup library for this organization, and do not set the default to None. See Set Holds options: Pickup library options. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select an option under Manage item requests to set your policies for item-level requests on monographic materials, specific issues of serial titles, and specific parts of multi-part titles:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Do not allow item requests from PAC - When this option is selected, the item-level request icon never appears in PAC search results. Patrons cannot place any monographic item-level, serial issue, or part-level requests.
    • +
    • Allow item requests from PAC (default) - When this option is selected, the item-level request icon appears in the availability view of PAC search results for all item records that have not been restricted from filling holds, and patrons can place requests on specific items. The illustration shows a sample PAC display.
    • +
    +

    + +

    + +

    Note:
    Regardless of how your item request options are set, if you have enabled title-level requests in the PAC, the title-level Request option is displayed. When a patron selects this option, the system will direct the patron to place a request at the item level if appropriate (as for Time Magazine). If your settings prevent item-specific or first-available-copy requests, the option to request will only be available at the title level.

    +
      +
    1. To prevent items with specific statuses from filling hold requests, select the appropriate check boxes for the statuses.
    2. +
    +

    If an item that could otherwise fill a hold request has a circulation status that you have designated as ineligible (such as Missing), the item is ineligible to fill requests when hold requests are placed and requests are routed. However, the item can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for a hold at check in.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also restrict specific items from filling hold requests according to various conditions. See Restrict holds on specific items.

    +

    If you specify that items with the status of In should not fill hold requests, the staff client user receives a warning message if any item is In at the pickup branch. (Items with a status of In at other branches do not block the request.) The staff user can override the warning and continue to place the hold request, but requests from PAC are blocked.

    +

    Items with a status of Provisional or Deleted are automatically filtered from holds processing.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options settings, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    You can allow patrons to place multiple hold requests at once from their working or saved title lists in Polaris PowerPAC. Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Exclude_Pickup_branches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Exclude_Pickup_branches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98dacb77 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Exclude_Pickup_branches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Holds options: Pickup library options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds options: Exclude pickup branches

    +

    Note: +
    When you open the Hold options dialog box at the System level, you can specify the holds statuses for which patrons can change the pickup branch in the PAC. See Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC.

    +

    To set which branches should not be available as pickup library options in the PAC and staff client:

    +

    Note:
    For hold requests from the PAC, the settings for the patron’s registered branch determine the available pickup branches.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options.
    4. +
    +

    The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Pickup tab.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    Typically, if a branch is not included in your Holds Routing Sequence policy table, you should exclude it from the pickup branches.

    +
      +
    1. Select the check boxes to indicate which branches should not be available as pickup library selections in PAC.
    2. +
    3. To exclude the same pickup branches from the staff client, select (check) Exclude selected branches in staff client.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To specify a particular library as a pickup branch for a hold request in the staff client, the staff member needs permission to create hold requests at that branch. However, the available pickup branch options depend on the Exclude selected branches in staff client settings for the logged-in branch. If there is no permission to create holds for the branch, and the branch is excluded, the list of available pickup libraries in the staff client is blank.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options settings, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Pick-up branch display order (PAC) - When placing a request from PAC, the patron chooses a pickup library from a list of those you allow. The branch display order is controlled in PAC Administration.
    • +
    • To specify which branches are listed as hold pickup branches in the Item Record workform, use the branch-level Polaris Administration patron services parameter Holds: Item pickup branches.The Pickup at list in the Item Record workform includes the branches selected in this dialog box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_ILL.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_ILL.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..871b7042 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_ILL.htm @@ -0,0 +1,620 @@ + + + + + + + + Set holds options: Interlibrary (ILL) loan request processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set holds options: Interlibrary (ILL) loan request processing

    +

    To allow staff (and patrons, if you choose) to request interlibrary loans:

    +

    Note:
    If you plan to use OCLC’s ILL Direct Request service and your library is not already an OCLC member, establish an account with Direct Request Service to use the Direct-to-Review service. Contact the OCLC regional office. The setup in Polaris requires the IP address and your OCLC log-in name and password for the service.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click ILL options. The ILL Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    +

    + dpILLOptdlg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To permit ILL requests from Polaris PowerPAC, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For details about PAC processing, see ILL Requests from PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select the PAC requests Enable check box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When a patron requests a title from remote database (Z39.50) search results and logs on, a message regarding ILL requests is displayed according to the setting for the patron’s registered branch. The default message is You are about to place an Inter-Library Loan request for an item from a remote library system. If your library charges for Inter-Library Loan requests, your account will be charged accordingly. Do you want to place this request? You can customize and translate the message using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The message string ID is ILL_TEXT_REQINFO (ILL “product”). For more information about using Polaris Language Editor to customize and translate messages, see the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) Guide, or Language Editor online Help.

    +
      +
    1. If you will use OCLC and you want your staff to review all ILL requests made by patrons before they are sent to OCLC, select the Mediate all check box.
    2. +
    3. Click Apply.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    The settings for the patron’s registered branch determine whether the patron can place an ILL request from the PAC. You should also set up remote databases as PAC search targets. Registering Remote Resource Servers and Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
      +
    1. To allow library staff to create ILL requests in the staff client, select the Staff requests Enable check box, and click Apply.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    If your library uses the Polaris Web App (Leap) and you have enabled ILL requests from either the PAC or staff client (or both), the ILL view is available in the Patron Registration workform in Leap. If ILL requests are not enabled, the ILL view is not available, the Patron Registration workform in Leap does not include this view.

    +
      +
    1. To place limits on ILL requests, click the Restrictions tab and do the following steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. If you will use OCLC and you want your staff to review ILL requests converted from hold requests in the staff client, select the Hold-to-ILL is mediated check box. If the check box is cleared, the converted ILL requests are automatically sent to OCLC.
    2. +
    3. To prevent one or more categories of patrons from requesting interlibrary loans, select the check box for each appropriate patron code in the Patron codes to exclude list.
    4. +
    5. In the Need-by box, set the default number of days by which an ILL request should be filled.
    6. +
    7. In the Held Period box, specify how long an item is held for a patron to pick up before being returned to the lending library. The system takes into account the library’s closed dates and days when calculating this period.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    The Held Period setting controls the date that prints on the Polaris ILL hold slip, but it does not automatically change the ILL status.

    +

    Note:
    If your library uses INN-Reach for interlibrary loans and you do not allow patrons to place ILL requests from PAC (see Step 3), you can still modify the default Need-by and Held Period settings. For more information about INN-Reach, see Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration.

    +
      +
    1. (System level only) Choose a block option:
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    • Over 2nd level fine amount - The patron is blocked if the money owed is over the 2nd level fine amount set by the patron’s registered branch, and a block message is displayed in PAC.
    • +
    • Over [amount] - Select this option and set an amount. The patron is blocked if the money owed is greater than or equal to the amount you specify, and a block message is displayed in PAC. This is the default setting. The default amount is $0.01, which blocks the request if the patron owes any money at all.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1.  (OCLC subscribers only) To set up your connection to OCLC’s ILL service, click the OCLC tab and do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Enable OCLC connection check box to indicate you are using the OCLC ILL service provider.
    2. +
    3. In the OCLC Symbol box, type the library mnemonic for the system, library, or branch that has the account with OCLC.
    4. +
    5. (System level only) In the Polling interval box, specify how often (in minutes) Polaris should send ILL requests to OCLC. The default setting is 15 minutes.
    6. +
    7. In the Address and port box, type the IP address and the port number (IP address:port number) of the server where Polaris sends the ILL requests. Do not include http://.
    8. +
    9. In the Login name box, type the login identifier for the OCLC server.
    10. +
    11. In the Password box, type the password for your OCLC account.
    12. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save to submit your settings. The Explorer or workform is displayed.
    2. +
    +

    Important (OCLC Subscribers only):
    The Polaris Application Server handles ILL direct requests to OCLC. If your application server name changes, enter the new Polaris Application Server name in the system-level Request parameter ILL: Computer designated for sending OCLC/ILL direct requests.

    +

    If a library is unable to provide the requested item for any reason, a Not Supplied status is available.

    +

    To set the not supplied status:

    +

    Note:
    The option is a check box and is not checked by default.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the system, library, or branch level, and select the Requests tabbed page in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. tab.
    6. +
    7. Select (check) Set request to Not-supplied if.
    8. +
    9. Select one or all of the following options to accompany Set request to Not-supplied if:
    10. +
    +
      +
    • All items are denied
    • +
    • All material limits exceeded
    • +
    • No items can fill the request
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For a request to go to Not-Supplied, the following must be true:
    -The request must be a bib-level request
    -All attached items are not holdable due to the holdable option not checked, items are restricted by status, or items are restricted by holdable option.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Request Manager Options

    +

    If the request status is Located, the following options are available from the Request manager tool bar.

    +
      +
    • Return - New functionality, new option, active only for Located
    • +
    • Deny - Current functionality
    • +
    • Cancel - Current functionality
    • +
    • Fill now PDPrequests00498.png
    • +
    +

    Note:
    These same options are available from the request workform when the request is in this status.

    +

    Upon selection, the new status is displayed in the request workform with associated date/time stamp. This status is also displayed in the request history with associated date/time, username and branch.

    +

    Holds Status Matrix

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
      +

    Inactive

    +
    +

    Active / Pending

    +
    +

    Located

    +
    +

    Shipped

    +
    +

    Held

    +
    +

    Unclaimed

    +
    +

    Cancelled

    +
    +

    Not-supplied

    +
    +

    Expired

    +
    +

    Out*

    +
    +

    Inactive +

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y/FN

    +
    +

    Y/FN

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N?

    +
    +

    Active/ Pending

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Located

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Shipped

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Held

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y/1

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Unclaimed

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Y

    +
    +

    Cancelled

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Not-supplied

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Expired

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    Out*

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    *Optional

    +

    +
    This chart indicates the workflow of hold items and assists in clarifying the processes available within Polaris.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Key

    +
    +

    Y/FN

    +
    +

    Yes with Fill Now

    +
    +

    Y/Re

    +
    +

    Yes with Reactivate

    +
    +

    Y/1

    +
    +

    Held can go to Shipped if the pickup branch is changed

    +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    For example, a request can go from Inactive to Active/ Pending and Expired. Additionally, a request can go to Shipped or Held only with Fill Now. However, Located cannot go to Cancelled.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Preferred_borrowers_branches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Preferred_borrowers_branches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6df9e0bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Preferred_borrowers_branches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Holds options: Preferred borrowers branches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds options: Preferred borrowers branches

    +

    Settings in this list work with the hold limit option Preferred borrowers in the item record. When Preferred borrowers is checked in an item record, the item is eligible to fill holds only when the item’s assigned branch has selected (checked) the pickup branch in this list. See Restricting Holds on Specific Items.

    +

    To set the pickup branches for preferred borrowers:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the Preferred tab.
    6. +
    +

    + pHoldOptPref.gif 

    +
      +
    1. De-select (uncheck) any branches that should not be listed as items’ “preferred borrowers” branches.
    2. +
    3. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options settings, or click OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Queue_and_Trapping_preferences.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Queue_and_Trapping_preferences.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79feaa3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_Queue_and_Trapping_preferences.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings

    +

    The holds queue is the prioritized list of Active or Pending requests for a specific title or item. By default, hold requests are arranged from the request with the earliest Active date at the top to the request with the most recent Active date at the bottom.

    +

    Trapping preference settings, which are optional, can override the queue and affect which request an item will fill when it is scanned at check in, nearly the last step in holds processing. They do not affect Pending requests in requests-to-fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) routing, which determines which requests to place on a pull list. Also, trapping preferences do not affect restrictions on specific items (such as restricting Withdrawn items from filling requests, or limiting a specific item to Patrons from this branch only). If these rules allow an item to be a candidate to fill a request, only then do trapping preferences affect which request may be filled first.

    +

    Trapping preference settings are also applied when offline files are uploaded, after the items have been checked in offline. You can suppress holds processing for items checked in offline when the offline transaction file is uploaded. See Holds Processing at Upload.

    +

    When you open the Hold options > Queue tab at the System level, you can set up optional trapping preference groups, which apply trapping preferences to a designated group of branches. You may find this feature useful in a consortium where various groups of organizations are far apart or have very different hold request policies. If you use trapping preference groups, you can specify whether you want preference within the group to be applied based on the hold pickup location branch or the patron's registered branch.

    +

    +

    +

    To set trapping preferences and other hold request queue management options:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and select the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the Queue tab.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To set up an optional preference group (available at the System level only):
      1. Open the Hold options > Queue tab at the System level, and select to add a new preference group.
      1. To add a branch to the group, expand the branch’s parent library in the list and select the branch. + +To select all the branches under a parent library at once, expand the parent library and select the library name or press the space bar. You can select branches from different libraries to place in one group, but a branch can be in only one group.

    2. +

      +

      The information in brackets for a branch in the group list includes that branch’s trapping preference setting and the group number, if any, to which the branch belongs.

      +

      +
    3. Select Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options, or select OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    4. +

      +

      Note: +
      After you have set up a group, you can select it in the Preference Group drop-down list to display the members of the group.

      +

      +
    5. +

      Select a trapping preference:

      +
        +
      • None - The existing queue order is followed when an item that can fill a request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. during circulation.
      • +
      • +

        Prefer my location - If an item’s assigned branch matches the pickup branch of any request in the queue, fill that request ahead of the others. In effect, Prefer my location favors requests that keep or return an item to its assigned branch.

        +
          +
        • in Preference Group - If both Prefer my location and in Preference group are selected, preference is given to hold requests where the pickup branch is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch. When a hold request has a pickup branch that is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch, the hold is filled ahead of those with other pickup branches in the preference group. If you want to honor queue position within a preference group, do not select Prefer my location, because it overrides queue position to prefer the pickup library's requests within the preference group.
        • +
        +
      • +
      • +

        Prefer my patron - If an item’s assigned branch matches a patron’s registration branch of any request in the queue, fill that request ahead of others. In effect, this option favors requests that place your branch’s items in the hands of your branch’s patrons.

        +
          +
        • in Preference Group- If both Prefer my patron and in Preference Group are selected, preference is given to hold requests where the patron’s registered branch is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch, regardless of queue position. When a hold request is placed by a patron whose registered branch is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch, the hold is filled ahead of those placed by patrons registered at other branches in the preference group. If only Prefer my patron is selected, and in Preference Group is not selected, requests are filled for branches within the preference group but the queue position is honored. That is, the item may not go to your patron first, but it will go to the next patron in the queue that belongs to your preference group.
        • +
        +
      • +
      • +

        Prefer check-in location - If an item could fill a request where the pickup branch matches the check-in branch, fill that request ahead of others. In effect, this option favors requests where the item does not need to be shipped.

        +

        Note: +
        If the check-in branch is in a preference group, priority is given to hold requests with both the check-in branch and the pickup branch in the preference group.

        +
      • +
      +
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. +

      Specify how to handle the queue position of reactivated and suspended/inactive requests:

      +
        +
      • Maintain queue position for re-activated requests - When this option is selected, not-supplied, expired, or canceled requests regain their position in the holds queue when they are reactivated. That is, the request will continue to move up the queue as other requests are filled. This setting also applies to requests reactivated during check out or check in. If this option is not selected, the request is placed at the end of the queue when reactivated.
      • +
      • Maintain queue position for suspended/inactive requests - When this option is selected, and you have also checked Permit suspended requests from PAC (Staff client & PAC tabbed page - system level), suspended requests regain their position in the holds queue when they are reactivated. That is, the request will continue to move up the queue as other requests are filled. This setting also controls the queue position when a request placed with an activation date in the future becomes Active. If this option is not selected, the request is placed at the end of the queue when reactivated.
      • +
      +
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options, or select OK to save your settings and close the Holds options dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_RTF_processing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_RTF_processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14542683 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Set_Holds_options_RTF_processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + Set Holds Options: RTF Processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Holds Options: RTF Processing

    +

    To set options related to requests-to-fill processing:

    +

    Note:
    For more information on holds routing and setting up primary and secondary RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. routes, see Edit holds routing tables.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the Request tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds options. The Hold Options dialog box - Requests tabbed page appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the RTF tab.
    6. +
    +

    + pHoldOptsRTF.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Allow only one cycle in Primary RTF to send requests through the RTF cycle only once when all libraries in the requester branch’s primary routing table deny or ignore the request.
    2. +
    +

    When this option is checked and you use only one routing sequence, at the end, the request status becomes Active and the item can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation, but the request no longer appears on the responder libraries’ RTF lists. If you use a primary and secondary routing sequence, the request goes to the secondary routing sequence at the end of the cycle.

    +
      +
    1. (For libraries that use secondary routing sequences.) Select the Allow only one cycle in Secondary RTF sequence to send requests through the secondary RTF cycle only once when all libraries in the requester branch’s secondary routing table deny or ignore the request.
    2. +
    +

    When this option is checked, at the end of the secondary routing cycle, the request status becomes Active, and the item can be trapped at circulation at any branch, but the request no longer appears on the libraries’ RTF lists.

    +

    Note: When a request is routed to the secondary cycle, items will still trap if checked in at a primary cycle branch. +

    +
      +
    1. Select Randomize Primary RTF to have the system randomly select which library in the primary RTF sequence is the next library to get the request when the first branch in the sequence denies or ignores the request. After Polaris selects the next library, the sequence is followed in order.
    2. +
    +

    You might select this option to prevent the same library from repeatedly filling the requester branch’s requests.

    +
      +
    1. (For libraries that use secondary routing sequences.) Select Randomize Secondary RTF to have the system randomly select which library in the secondary RTF sequence is the next library to get the request when the first branch in the specified start sequence denies or ignores the request. This option works like Randomize Primary RTF (above), but it applies to the secondary routing sequence.
    2. +
    3. (For libraries that use secondary routing sequences.) Select When no items in Primary RTF transfer immediately to send a request immediately to the secondary routing sequence when no items are In at any of the responder branches in the primary routing sequence. If this option is not selected (do not transfer immediately), if all items are out, are holdable, or otherwise not restricted from filling requests, the request remains in the primary cycle for the period of time you set in Total Days in Primary RTF cycle.However, if all remaining items are somehow restricted from filling requests–for example, if they are not holdable or they have a request such as Lost and items with that status have been restricted from filling requests–the request will move to the secondary because there are no items that can fill the request in the primary.
    4. +
    5. In the Total Days in Primary RTF cycle box, type the number of days a hold request continues to follow the sequence of responder branches designated in the Holds Routing Sequences Primary policy table (see Setting Up Holds Routing).
    6. +
    +

    If you use a single routing sequence, when this time period is over, the request can still be filled when an item is trapped at circulation, but it is no longer routed to the branches. If you use both primary and secondary routing sequences and you have not selected transfer immediately (see step 8), the request remains Active in the primary cycle for this number of days before going to the secondary routing sequence.

    +
      +
    1. (For libraries that use secondary routing sequences.) In the Total Days in Secondary RTF cycle box, type the number of days a hold request continues to follow the sequence of responder branches, as designated in the Holds Routing Sequences Secondary policy table.
    2. +
    +

    When this time period is over, the request can still be filled when an item is trapped at circulation, but it is no longer routed to the branches.

    +
      +
    1. (System level only.) In the Default not-supplied reason box, select the default reason that is displayed when a library denies a hold request.
    2. +
    +

    Your choices for this setting are defined in the User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons policy table. See Defining Not-Supplied Reasons.

    +
      +
    1. Select If all material limits are exceeded set to Not Supplied to display a block message in the staff client when all the items attached to the bibliographic record have the same material type and a patron has reached the hold limit by material type. The system uses the setting of the governing library for patron blocks.
    2. +
    +

    If the block is overridden, the request is placed with a status of Not Supplied. The Not Supplied reason is All items denied by system. If some items have the limited material type and some do not, a message is displayed and those of the limited material type are automatically denied by the system.

    +

    If this option is not checked, and all the items attached to the bibliographic record have the same material type, the block message is displayed in the staff client as above. However, if the block is overridden, the request is placed with a status of Active. If some items have the limited material type and some do not, a message is displayed and those of the limited material type are automatically denied by the system.

    +
      +
    1. To specify the length of time that a request can remain in a Located status before it reverts to Pending, select the Time out Located status box, and type or select the number of hours (1-99).
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The Located status can be assigned only through the Polaris Leap Picklist. It indicates that an item was found to fill a request but has not been checked in to trap. If a time out period has been set for the Pickup library, requests that remain in a Located status for the specified time period revert to a status of Pending.

    +
      +
    1. To stop all RTF processing, select Stop RTF processing.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    When RTF processing is stopped, ILL requests submitted via INN-Reach are not processed. Items will still trap for holds if they are manually checked in.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to save your settings and continue to work with holds options, or click OK to save your settings and close the Hold options dialog box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_Holds_and_ILL_Request_Processing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_Holds_and_ILL_Request_Processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c0682ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_Holds_and_ILL_Request_Processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    +

    Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing

    +

    Note: +
    If your library uses INN-Reach, see Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration.

    +

    Staff and patrons (if your library allows patrons to place holds) can create hold requests for titles that are not available at a particular branch, but are owned by other libraries in the system. The hold requests may be filled during Request-to-Fill processing, or when an item that can fill the hold request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation.

    +

    You can use Polaris Administration settings to control the following aspects of holds and interlibrary loan (ILL) request processing:

    + +

    Note: +
    Staff members with the appropriate permissions can restrict holds for specific items using settings in the Item Record workform.

    +
      +
    • Trapping preferences and queue settings - Each branch can set a holds trapping preference and queue settings. At the system level, you can set up optional trapping preference groups to apply trapping preferences to a designated group of branches, such as a consortium where various groups of organizations are far apart or have very different hold request policies. Within a trapping preference group, you can prefer the patron's registered branch or the item's assigned branch. See Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings.
    • +
    • Patron hold limits - You can block requests based on combinations of specific patron codes, limits on total requests, and limits on requests for specific material types. You can also create groups of material types and place limits on the group as a whole. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.
    • +
    • Renewals for items with hold requests - Your library system can prevent renewals for items with hold requests or allow renewals unless the item is the only one eligible to fill a request. See Allow renewals for items with hold requests.
    • +
    • Hold pickup branches listed in item records - Use the branch-level Polaris Administration patron services parameter Holds: Item pickup branches to select the branches that appear in the list of pickup branches. See Set up the hold pickup branch list.
    • +
    • Branches to exclude from the pickup branch list - You can specify which libraries to exclude as possible pickup libraries in the PAC and in the staff client. See Set Holds options: Exclude pickup branches.
    • +
    • Specify the hold statuses for which patrons can change the hold pickup location- At the system level only, you can select the hold statuses for which patrons can change the hold pickup location. See Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC.
    • +
    • Hold request notices - When a hold request is ready for pick-up, a notice informs the patron. Libraries define the mail, e-mail, and phone notification settings.Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Polaris Borrow by Mail is a licensed feature available at no additional cost that allows staff members and patrons to request library materials and have the requested materials delivered to the patrons by mail. For information about Borrow by Mail request processing, see Set the Workstation to Print Receipts and Slips.

    +

    Note:
    Libraries that offer integrated eContent set up request limits and other options with the vendor; many of the features described in this unit do not apply to eContent requests. Managing EContent in the PAC.

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_ILL_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_ILL_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..257bcdf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/Setting_Up_ILL_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up ILL Requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up ILL Requests

    +

    Note: +
    If your library uses INN-Reach, see Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration.

    +

    An interlibrary loan (ILL) request is filled by routing the request to potential lenders outside of the library system. You can set Polaris to allow interlibrary loan requests from the staff client, PAC, or both.

    +

    Polaris ILL requests can be processed automatically. Automatic processing is brokered through OCLC’s ILL Direct Request Service. Polaris customers who are OCLC members can use the OCLC Direct-to-Review service. With this service, ILL requests are sent to a review file at OCLC where they are reviewed by library staff and directed to OCLC lending libraries.

    +

    Note:
    You can also allow ILL requests and process them manually or through a third-party ILL fulfillment system, without OCLC membership.

    +

    If you participate in OCLC’s service, you can specify whether requests are sent directly to OCLC's Direct-to-Review service (unmediated), or reviewed by library staff and manually exported to OCLC (mediated).

    +

    Use the Request parameter ILL options to specify whether ILL requests are mediated or unmediated, set any restrictions, and enable the OCLC connection. You can set most ILL options at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    To set ILL options, in the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, click the Request tab in the details view, and double-click ILL options to open the dialog box. See Set holds options: Interlibrary (ILL) loan request processing.

    +

    ILL Request Processing Overview

    +
      +
    • Patron places an ILL request or a staff member converts a hold request to an ILL request
    • +
    • Depending on your library's policy:
      • The ILL request status is Active and the ILL request is exported directly to OCLC.
      • The ILL request is Inactive until a staff member reviews the request and exports it to OCLC.
    • +
    • OCLC processes the request and sends it to the lending library.
    • +
    • The lending library ships the item to your library.
    • +
    • A staff member receives the item in Polaris.
      • Temporary bib and item records are created to enable circulation.
      • The ILL request status is set to Received.
      • A notice is sent to the patron that the item is available for pickup.
    • +
    • The item is checked out to the patron.
    • +
    • The patron returns the item to the library.
    • +
    • The item is returned to the lending library.
    • +
    • A staff member deletes the ILL request, which automatically deletes the temporary bib and item record.
    • +
    +

    Bibliographic and Item Records for ILL Items

    +

    When an item that fills an interlibrary loan request arrives at the library, staff receive the item in Polaris using a special ILL item template. Temporary bibliographic and item records are created from the template to track the item in Polaris. (For more information about this process Receiving Interlibrary Loans.) Later, these temporary records are automatically deleted when the ILL request is deleted. Bibliographic and item record deletion for ILL requests honors the settings for the Cataloging profiles Retain deleted bibliographic records and Retain deleted item records for the item’s assigned branch:

    +
      +
    • If both Retain deleted bibliographic records and Retain deleted item records for the item’s assigned branch are set to Yes, the records are retained (deleted provisionally) until purged. They cannot be undeleted, however.
    • +
    • If one of the profiles is set to No and the other is set to Yes, both the bibliographic and item record will be immediately deleted and purged.
    • +
    • If both Retain deleted bibliographic records and Retain deleted item records for the item’s assigned branch are set to No, the records are immediately deleted and purged.
    • +
    +

    When an ILL bibliographic or item record is marked for deletion, the “marked for deletion” transaction is logged. When an ILL bibliographic or item record is purged (physically deleted), the transaction is logged is an “ILL delete.”

    +

    Note:
    Bibliographic and item records for ILL items cannot be deleted manually.

    +

    ILL Requests from PAC

    +

    If you choose to allow patrons to place ILL requests from PAC, the Place Request button appears for titles in remote database search results. When the patron clicks Place Request and logs in, the system checks for settings that block hold requests from PAC (such as patron blocks, duplicate requests, and request limits). It also checks for separate blocks specifically for ILL requests. If the request is blocked for any of these reasons, the appropriate message is displayed. If the request passes these checks, the system then checks to see if any duplicate titles are available for requests in the local database. If matching local titles are detected and one or more is available, the system displays a message that includes the options to continue the ILL request for the remote title, place a request on the local title, or cancel. If the patron chooses to place the local request, the ILL process stops and the system creates a hold request. If the patron chooses to proceed with the ILL request, the system processes the request as an ILL request.

    +

    Note:
    You can suppress the Place Request button for selected types of material. Your settings affect search results in both local and remote databases. Suppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/allowrenewitemholds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/allowrenewitemholds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66df35c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/allowrenewitemholds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Allow renewals for items with hold requests + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Allow renewals for items with hold requests

    +

    When an item is out to a patron but there are hold requests with certain statuses, a System-level patron services parameter is set by default to block the renewal and display a blocking message. Your library organization can set this parameter so that renewals are blocked only if the item being renewed is the last item that will fill the hold request.

    +

    Note:
    If you choose to set this parameter to No, be aware that the system does not check the eligibility status of each In item at every branch. An item may be In and holdable, but not necessarily eligible to fill requests. So it is possible, although perhaps not very likely, to allow renewal on the only item that will fill the request even though other items are In, and thus delay the request.

    +

    To set the System-level parameter to block renewals only when the item being renewed is the only item available to fill the request:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder at the System level.
    2. +
    3. Select the Patron Services tab.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Renewal: Block if there are holds and select No.
    2. +
    +

    When this parameter is set to No, and other holdable and potentially eligible items are In, no dialog box appears and the item can be renewed. (The other In items could be identified by the next round of RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. processing and pulled to fill the request.) In PAC, the renewal is allowed in the same circumstances. But if the item selected for renewal is the only item available to fill a request, the renewal is not allowed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/definepickupbranch.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/definepickupbranch.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e5a6a88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/definepickupbranch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Set up the hold pickup branch list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the hold pickup branch list

    +

    The branch-level Polaris Administration patron services parameter Holds: Item pickup branches specifies the branches that appear in the Pickup at list in the Item Record workform.

    +

    + +

    +

    To specify the branches listed in the Pickup at list in the Item Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the branch, and click the Patron Services tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Holds: Item pickup branches.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The Holds: Item Pickup Branches dialog box opens.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the check boxes next to the branches that you want to appear in the Pickup at list in the Item Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select OK to add the branches to the Pickup at list for the branch's item records and close the dialog box.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_copy_serials.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_copy_serials.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..778d18c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_copy_serials.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + First available copy requests on serials + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    First available copy requests on serials

    +

    When requests are allowed for serials, and a patron clicks Place Request at the title level, a message directs the patron to select individual issues. In the staff client, this option does not prevent a staff member from placing an item-specific request for a monographic title, and the staff member can place a first-available-copy request for an issue or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part.

    +

    If the item record is linked to a Serial Issue Record, is holdable, and has data in the Issue field, the request is treated as a first available copy request. The MARC Bibliographic level entry may or may not be S. If there are other items with matching Issue data linked to the same bibliographic record, these will also be eligible to fill the request. When considering whether Issue data matches, internal spaces and all punctuation are considered, but letter case and beginning and trailing spaces are ignored.

    +

    If the item is linked to a bibliographic record with the Bibliographic level entry S, but there are no linked Serial Issue Records, the request can be filled by that specific item only—the equivalent of an item-level request on a monographic title. In other words, if you do not use the Polaris Serials subsystem, but manually enter volume data in the call number of the item, the first-available-copy functionality is not available.

    +

    Note:
    Libraries who do not use the Serials subsystem can allow individual item requests, setting up each specific issue with an item record. Or, they may use the grouped request functionality in the staff client (Grouping a Patron’s Hold Requests).

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_multipart.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_multipart.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed258b4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/first_avail_multipart.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + First Available Copy Requests and Multi-Part Titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    First Available Copy Requests and Multi-Part Titles

    +

    When the Allow requests on multi-part sets in PAC and Staff Client option is selected, for monographic titles like Harry Potter and the Deathly Hallows, the request option will be available at the title level only. But the request icon will be available at the item level if you have multiple copies of each season of The Sopranos linked to one bibliographic record. Selecting the item-level request icon for Season One will automatically link the request to all copies of Season One. In the staff client, this option does not prevent a staff member from placing an item-specific request for a monographic title, and the staff member can place a first-available-copy request for Season One of The Sopranos.

    +

    If the item record is linked to a bibliographic record with a Bibliographic level entry other than S, and has data in the Vol field of the call number, the request is treated as a first available copy request. If there are other items with matching Vol data linked to the same bibliographic record, these will also be eligible to fill the request. (If the Bibliographic level entry is any value other than S and no linked items have data in the Vol field, the option to place a request at the item level is not available. In this case, only bib-level requests are allowed.)

    +

    Since manually-input Vol data may be inconsistent in your database, you may want to use item bulk change to help ensure uniformity of your existing data before implementing the first available copy option for multi-part sets. The multi-part option is separate so that libraries who may have inconsistent item data can implement serial requests and multi-part requests separately while suppressing item requests on plain monographs.

    +

    Tips: +
    If you plan to make the Vol data consistent before implementing this feature, keep in mind that request processing uses exact, character-for-character matches as follows:

    Internal spaces and all punctuation affect a match:
    Vol 1 and Vol1 do not match.
    Vol.1 and Vol1 do not match.

    Case does not matter:
    Vol.1 and vol.1 match.

    Beginning and trailing spaces are ignored:
    [space] v.1
     and [no space] v.1 match
    v.1 [space] and v.1 [no space] match

    +

    Note:
    A request on an item with blank Vol data is placed as a single, item-level request.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holds_onorder_multivolsets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holds_onorder_multivolsets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e3b85df0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holds_onorder_multivolsets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Holds for on-order multi-volume sets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds for on-order multi-volume sets

    +

    Libraries that use enriched EDI ordering through Polaris Acquisitions and receive shelf-ready items from their vendors can automatically provide patrons with the first volume of a multi-volume set when the set arrives. When the patron places a hold on a new multi-volume set, such as on a television series just released on DVD, the hold is placed at the bibliographic level for the series title. Then, when the full bibliographic record is imported, the embedded holdings create the shelf-ready item records for all the volumes in the series, and the hold is automatically placed on the first volume.

    +

    Tip:
    Polaris automatically moves the holds placed at the bibliographic level to the first volume only when items were created and when the bibliographic records are imported using the Enriched EDI import profile. If you send a non-enriched EDI order and create items, the holds remain at the bibliographic level. In this case, you would need to deactivate the holds at the bibliographic level and place them on linked items where the volume information was entered manually.

    +

    If a patron places a hold on a new multi-volume set, such as on a television series just released on DVD, the hold is placed at the bibliographic level for the series title. Then, when the full bibliographic record is imported, the embedded holdings create the shelf-ready item records for all the volumes in the series, and the hold is automatically placed on the first volume.

    +

    When you order a new multi-volume set, you create a purchase order line item for the entire series. You may order more than one copy of the series for one branch, or you may order the series for several branches. When the purchase order is released, and items are generated, one item record is created per ordered quantity.

    +

    For example, if you order two copies of the television series, Downtown Abbey, Season 2, two item records are created. However, the supplier’s shipment includes 6 DVDs - three DVDs for each copy of the series. In addition to the physical shipment, the supplier provides a full bibliographic record for the series with 949 tags representing each DVD.

    +

    + multivolPO.gif 

    +

    When the full bibliographic record with embedded holdings is imported using the Enriched EDI Orders profile, the two items are updated with the appropriate shelf-ready item data. New item records are also created for every other 949 tag that has both a purchase order line item segment ID in $e (or other subfield) and a volume designation in $v.

    +

    Any holds that were placed at the bibliographic level for the on-order series are moved to the item with the first (or lowest) volume number. This allows patrons to place holds for a new series and then receive the first volume of that series when it arrives.

    +

    See also:Set Holds Options: Enable Hold Requests by Patrons and Define Restrictions

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holdsrouttable.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holdsrouttable.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87f28dd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPrequests/holdsrouttable.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + Edit Holds Routing Tables + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Holds Routing Tables

    +

    If you use primary and secondary routing sequences, you edit the Holds Routing Sequences Primary and Holds Routing Sequences Secondary tables separately; however, the basic procedure is the same for both tables.

    +

    Note:

    Although it is possible to add the same branch to both the Holds Routing Sequences Primary and Holds Routing Sequences Secondary tables, this might result in the same branch being polled in both RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. cycles. Secondary routing groups handle RTF routing in “only if not in the primary group” situations, so adding the same branch to both tables would defeat this purpose.

    +

    To edit the holds routing policy tables:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Holds Routing Sequences Primary or Holds Routing Sequences Secondary.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether these tables can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +

    The Hold Routing Sequences table is displayed in the details view.

    +

    + dHoldRoutTabl.gif + +

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Holds Routing Sequences dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dHoldRoutDx.gif + +

    +
      +
    1. In the Requester Branch list, select the branch to which the holds routing entry is being assigned.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    If the Holds Routing Sequences table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Requester Branch list.

    +
      +
    1. In the Responder Branch list, select the branch to which you want to send hold requests.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    If all the branches in the system are already in the table, the Responder Branch box is unavailable, because you cannot add a duplicate entry to the table.

    +

    You can add any or all branches as responder branches. If you do not exchange requested materials with one or more branches in the system, do not add these branches to the table. A responder branch may be included in the Holds Routing Sequences table for one library, but not another. For example, Branch A may include Branches C and D as responder branches, but not Branch B. However, Branch B may include Branches A, C, and D.

    +

    Important:

    When defining the routing cycles for your branch (you are the requester) your branch will normally be the first branch in the sequence. This insures that requests always come to you first. Omitting a branch from the sequence means that this branch will never fill hold requests, a branch that is a processing center is an example of this. However, if you use both a primary and a secondary routing group, add your branch to only one cycle. It is not necessary to include a branch in both cycles.

    +
      +
    1. In the Days at branch box, type the number of days a request should stay on the RTF list for the responder branch when the branch does not fill or deny the request.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box. The Holds Routing Sequences table appears with the new requester branch/responder branch entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    4. +

      To position the responder branch in the holds routing sequence, select the responder branch, and click the arrow buttons:

      • Click to move the branch earlier in the sequence.
      • Click to move the branch later in the sequence.

      +
    +

    Important:

    Each requester branch should put itself as a responder branch in the first position (Sequence of 1).

    +

    The value in the Sequence column changes as you reposition the entry.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save your changes. The status bar indicates that the record is saved.
    2. +
    3. Set the Request parameter Holds options, if you have not already done so.
    4. +
    +

    Several Holds options settings affect the RTF cycle.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click . You can change the Days at branch setting for an existing holds routing entry. If you need to change the holds routing entry to another responder branch, delete the incorrect entry and insert a new holds routing entry.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click .
    • +
    • Reorder the holds routing sequence - To change the order in which a hold request is routed, change the position of the responder branch in the routing sequence. Select the responder branch entry, and click  to move it earlier in the sequence, or click  to move it later in the sequence.
    • +
    • Request history - You can see a request’s status as it passes from branch to branch in the request-to-fill cycle. On the Hold Request workform in the staff client, select View, Notes. Request history information is located at the bottom of the Notes view. Each time the request passes to a different branch, the status is displayed as PendingPlacing Hold Requests.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Add_a_self-check_material_type_entry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Add_a_self-check_material_type_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0264a64b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Add_a_self-check_material_type_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a self-check material type entry + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a self-check material type entry

    +

    Self-check material types can be set from the system, library, and branch levels, but the same self-check material types are shared by all organization levels and are assigned to the system organization record. To add a self-check material type to the Self-Check Material Types policy table:

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to work with the SelfCheck Material Types table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify self check material types table: Allow.

    + +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select SelfCheck Material Types. The SelfCheck Material Types table is displayed in the details view. + +

      Note:
      The Self-Check Material Types policy table is displayed from the Administration Explorer only. You cannot access the table from an organization workform.

    2. +
    3. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Self Check Material Types dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Select a Polaris material type in the Material Type box.
    6. +
    7. In the Self Check Media Type box, select the self-check media type to associate with the material type displayed in the Material Type box. + +

      Note:
      If one of your Polaris material types does not closely match a self-check media type, use the Other media type.

    8. +
    9. In the Is Magnetic box, indicate whether the material type is magnetic by choosing one of the following options: + +
      • If the material type is not affected by magnetic fields, select No.
      • If the material type is a magnetic medium, such as a video tape or cassette tape, select Yes.
      • If you are not sure if the media can be damaged by magnetic fields, select Unknown.

      Note:
      Polaris ExpressCheck client software supports RFID, electromagnetic (EM), and AVLocker security options. If you use Polaris ExpressCheck on hardware with electromagnetic (EM) strip security, your setting for Is Magnetic also applies to Polaris ExpressCheck.

    10. +
    11. In the Can Desensitize box, indicate whether the security strip for the material type can be desensitized by choosing one of the following options: + +
      • If the material type is not a magnetic medium, has a security strip, and can be desensitized, select Yes.
      • If the material type is a magnetic medium, such as a video tape or cassette tape, select No.
      • If the material type is not circulated, select No.
      • If you do not know if the material type can be damaged by magnetic fields or if it has a security strip, select Unknown.

      Note:
      Polaris ExpressCheck client software supports RFID, electromagnetic (EM), and AVLocker security options. If you use Polaris ExpressCheck on hardware with electromagnetic (EM) strip security, your setting for Can Desensitize also applies to Polaris ExpressCheck.

      Important:
      The Polaris Security Manager is automatically installed if you select RFID, electromagnetic (EM), or AV Locker security options while installing Polaris ExpressCheck, or RFID while installing the Polaris staff client. TCP port 8075 is used by the Security Manager. This port must be open if any security measures (RFID, EM, AV Locker) are used.

    12. +
    13. In the Is Blocked box, choose one of the following options to indicate if items of this material type can be checked out at a self-check unit: + +
      • If the material type can be checked out with a self-check unit, select No (not blocked).
      • If the material type must be checked out by library staff or cannot be checked out at all, select Yes (blocked).

      Important:
      Your blocked settings also apply to check-outs from Polaris ExpressCheck.

    14. +
    15. In the Double Sided box, specify whether both spine and main magnets should be used when desensitizing an item. + +

      Note:
      Polaris ExpressCheck client software supports RFID, electromagnetic (EM), and AVLocker security options. If you use Polaris ExpressCheck on hardware with electromagnetic (EM) strip security, your setting here also applies to Polaris ExpressCheck.

    16. +
    17. In the Unlocker box, specify whether the AV security locker should be opened following a checkout of this material type. + +

      Note:
      This setting applies only to Polaris ExpressCheck client software installed on an workstation with the AV locker security option.

    18. +
    19. If you use EnvisionWare RFID, select the Danish Data Model (DDM) format for this material type in the DDM Media Format box.
    20. +
    21. Click OK on the dialog box. The Self Check Material Types table is displayed with the new entry. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.
    22. +
    23. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    24. + +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click ModIcon.gif.You can change all elements in the self-check material type entry. Any changes made to an entry are applied to all organizations in Polaris.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif. Removing an entry at any organization removes the entry from all organizations.
    • +
    • Polaris material types - See Defining Material Types.
    • +
    • EnvisionWare RFID and DDM media formats - Go to http://www.envisionware.com/en/ddm_use.
    • +
    • Polaris ExpressCheck setup - See the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Set_SIP_self-check_parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Set_SIP_self-check_parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cfb7469e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Set_SIP_self-check_parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set SIP self-check parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set SIP self-check parameters

    +

    +

    Self-check parameters can be set at the system, library, and branch level. Each organization level may have a different set of parameters, depending on where the self-check units are installed. Set the parameters at the System level if your library system has a single self-check unit installed or if all your self-check units use the same settings. If each branch uses the units differently, set the parameters at the branch level only.

    +

    +

    +

    +

    To set self-check parameters:

    +

    +

    Tip:
    You can work with self-check parameters from the Administration Explorer or from an organization workform. The self-check unit does not need to be installed to set the self-check parameters in Polaris Administration.

    +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization folder and select Parameters.
    2. +
    3. Select the SelfCheck Unit tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Set Allow SIP processing to Yes.
    6. +
    7. Set the following system identification parameters:
    8. +
    +
      +
    • Assigned staff member - The library staff member listed for self-check circulation transactions.
    • +
    • SIP default workstation +
    • +
    • SIP Login Password - The staff password needed to log in to self-check.
    • +
    • SIP Login User ID - The staff user name needed to log in to self-check.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Default security marker value, and choose the type of security marker your library uses. Select None if your library does not use security markers.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron blocks to open the dialog box, and set and save the patron block options:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Free text blocks - This parameter affects the SIP messages Patron Status and Patron Information. Many SIP check-out devices check the Patron Status or Patron Information message before attempting to perform a checkout. On these devices, if this parameter is checked, a patron with free text blocks will be blocked from checkout. Checked by default (patron will be blocked).
    • +
    • Library-assigned blocks - Checked by default (patron will be blocked).
    • +
    • Blocking notes - Checked by default (patron will be blocked).
    • +
    • Associated patron blocks - Blocks SIP self-check transactions by patrons with blocked associated patron records. See Associated Patron Blocking. Unchecked by default (patron will not be blocked if associated patrons are blocked).
    • +
    • Collection agency blocks - Blocks SIP self-check workstation transactions by patrons with collection agency blocks. Checked by default (patron will be blocked).
    • +
    • Verify patron data block - Blocks SIP self-check workstation transactions for patrons whose records require verification.
    • +
    • Maximum claims - Blocks patrons who have exceeded the number of claims in this box.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Check-out: item options and set and save the following item options:
    2. +
    +

    +

    Note:
    SIP circulation uses the settings in the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks policy table to determine check-out blocks based on maximum items out, material type limits, maximum overdues, and similar settings. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks. Material type group limits also apply to SIP circulation. See Defining Material Type Group Limits.

    +

    +
      +
    • Deny checkout if item is from another branch - If checked, items from other branches cannot be checked out from the unit.
    • +
    • Allow check-out of items with free text blocks - If checked (default), an item with a free text block can be checked out. If unchecked, items with free text blocks cannot be checked out.
    • +
    • Allow check-out of items with library-assigned blocks - If checked (default), an item with a library-assigned block can be checked out without interruption. If unchecked, items with a library-assigned block cannot be checked out.
    • +
    • Allow check-out of items with the selected circ statuses - Select the circulation statuses that you want to allow to circulate via the self-check unit. +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the additional options to control self-check circulations:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Allow checkouts during renewal - Permits a patron to check out an item that is recorded as already checked out to another patron. +
    • +
    • Checkins ok - Permits check-in at the self-check station. +
    • +
    • Checkouts ok - Permits check-out at the self-check station.
    • +
    • Deny checkout if there are notes - Prevents check-out if the patron record has a Blocking note.
    • +
    • Holds ok - Permits hold requests at the self-check station.
    • +
    • Renewals ok - Permits renewals at the self-check station.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Renewals via SIP are blocked as they would be in PAC, according to the thresholds set in the Patron Services profile Patron initiated circulation: Blocking conditions.

    +

    Note:
    To prevent check-out of specific item material types, use the Self Check Material Types policy table. See Add a self-check material type entry.

    +
      +
    1. If your library charges for checkouts/renewals, double-click Check-out: Charge options to open the dialog box, and set and save the following options for items that are chargeable:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The system uses the SIP settings for the workstation’s branch, but uses the chargeable settings for the item’s assigned branch. For more information about setting up charges for checkout and renewal, see Charging for Checkout and Renewal.

    +
      +
    • Allow check-out if item is chargeable +
    • +
    • Allow renewal if item is chargeable 
    • +
    • Auto-charge for renew all +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the material type is blocked from check-out at SIP self-check units, that setting takes precedence over any chargeable policies and the transaction is stopped.

    +
      +
    1. Set these parameters to Yes or No to specify whether claimed items can be checked in at the self-check unit:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Check-in: Claim Never Had, allow checkin +
    • +
    • Check-in: Claim Returned, allow checkin +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the following self-check operational conditions as needed:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • SIP uses patron passwords - Requires patron passwords for patrons to use self-check.
    • +
    • Retries allowed - Number of times the self-check unit attempts to resend a message to the client workstation. Retries may be attempted when there are network problems or if the client software goes offline.
    • +
    • Time-out period: 000 (none) - 999 (not known) - Number of seconds (in tenths of a second) that the self-check unit pauses before retrying or canceling a transaction that does not receive a response from the client software.
    • +
    • Status update ok (can block a patron, etc.) - Permits a patron’s status to be updated, allowing the unit to create a patron block under limited circumstances. For example, if the self-check unit is equipped to detect tampering (such as swapping out books in a stack) or if the patron forges a card, the unit applies a free text block to the patron record (Patron was blocked by a selfcheck unit) and stops the check-out. Set this option to Yes. It facilitates testing in some situations and has no impact on check-out processing in units that do not have tamper detection.
    • +
    • Use error correction - Permits a checksum and sequence number at the end of every message sent to and from the software, which helps maintain data integrity and assists in troubleshooting. The recommended setting is Yes.
    • +
    • SIP2 extensions enabled - Enables specific SIP2 functionality for the self-check units of certain vendors. If you are not sure what your equipment requires, contact your Polaris Site Manager to determine if this parameter should be set to Yes.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Allow or prevent messages by setting these parameters:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To allow messages to be printed on receipts, set Use printer messages to Yes.
    • +
    • To allow messages to be displayed on the screen, set Use screen messages to Yes.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Add You Saved messages (see Set SIP self-check parameters) to receipts with these settings:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Set You Saved options. See Set SIP self-check parameters.
    • +
    • To include the You Saved message in the self-check printed receipt, set Use printer messages to Yes, and set Check-out: Append you saved message to Checkout Printer message to Yes
    • +
    • To include the You Saved message in the self-check screen display, set Use screen messages to Yes, and set Append you saved message to Checkout Screen message to Yes.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Specify the messages that the self-check unit supports by setting the appropriate System supports the . . . message parameters to Yes or No:
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    These controls refer to messages defined in the SIP protocol and determine which ones are sent as part of normal SIP processing. Refer to the SIP standard for message definitions. All message parameters should be set Yes unless your Polaris Site Manager specifically instructs otherwise.

    +
      +
    1. To change the text for any of the printer or screen messages, double-click the appropriate message parameter value, type a new message over the existing value and press Enter.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save the settings. Save complete appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    +

    See also:

    +

    Self-Check Parameters Reference - Lists and describes all self-check unit parameters.

    +

    Managing Hold Requests - The following settings on the Holds options dialog box apply to self-check units as well as the staff client:

    +
      +
    • Trap at check-out on the Staff Client & PAC tab
    • +
    • Unclaimed requests, Delete on the Terms tab
    • +
    +

    Waiving Fines Automatically at Circulation - The settings for the following Patron Services parameters affect SIP self- check units as well as the staff client:

    +
      +
    • Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at check-out +
    • +
    • Overdues: Clear fine if recovered at renewal +
    • +
    +

    Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks - SIP self-check units use your library's settings in the Patron Loan and Request Limits table for maximum fines, items out, items overdue, and request limits.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_SIP_payment_types_and_Polaris_payment_methods.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_SIP_payment_types_and_Polaris_payment_methods.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f8bfa97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_SIP_payment_types_and_Polaris_payment_methods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set SIP payment types and Polaris payment methods + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set SIP payment types and Polaris payment methods

    +

    To set SIP Payment Types and Polaris Payment Methods:

    +

    Note: +
    By default, no values are specified for the SIP Payment Types.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder at the System level, and select SIP Payment Types. The SIP Payment Types policy table appears.
    2. +
    3. Select a form of payment from the SIP Payment Type column.
    4. +
    5. Double click on the payment method. The Modify: SIP Payment Types dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Select a Polaris Payment Method from the drop-down list box. Only one Polaris Payment Method may be selected for each SIP Payment Type, but a Polaris Payment Method can be assigned to more than one SIP Payment Type. Additionally, the Payment Type value can be blank.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    The default value is set to blank, with no value assigned. The table is pre-populated by an alterscript provided by Polaris.

    +
      +
    1. When complete, click OK. The payment type is updated.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_Up_SIP_Self-Check_Circulation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_Up_SIP_Self-Check_Circulation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21ebac43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheck/Setting_Up_SIP_Self-Check_Circulation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up SIP Self-Check Circulation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up SIP Self-Check Circulation

    +

    Polaris supports two types of self-check systems: those that rely on SIP protocol as the interface between the self-check unit and Polaris, and Polaris® ExpressCheck™ units, which interact with Polaris directly.

    +

    Note: +
    Polaris ExpressCheck workstations and the client application are available through contract from Innovative Interfaces. Some of the self-check material types in the Self-Check Material Types policy table also apply to ExpressCheck. For information about setting up Polaris ExpressCheck units, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

    +

    SIP self-check units have specific media classifications for each material type the library circulates via self-checkouts. When you are setting up the self-check interface, you associate each Polaris material type with a self-check media type; indicate whether the media is magnetic and if the security strip can be desensitized; if necessary, block certain material types from being checked out; and specify the item circulation statuses that you do not want to block circulations.

    +

    To set up self-check circulation in Polaris, do the following:

    +
      +
    • Use the Self-Check Material Types policy table to associate Polaris material types with self-check media types.
    • +
    • Use the SIP Payment Types policy table to associate SIP payment types and Polaris payment methods.
    • +
    • Use the SIP Self Check Unit parameters to:
      • Identify the staff member for self-check unit transactions.
      • Specify the staff login ID and password
      • Identify conditions that block patrons from checking out items
      • Identify conditions that prevent items from being checked out
      • Specify the messages that appear on the self-check unit screen and on printed logs
      • Specify other self-check unit operating conditions, such as the number of retries allowed, the inactivity time-out period, and whether patron passwords are required
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheckParams/Self-Check_Parameters_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheckParams/Self-Check_Parameters_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70c9c9c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPselfcheckParams/Self-Check_Parameters_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,908 @@ + + + + + + + + + Self-Check Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Self-Check Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available on the Parameters > SelfCheck Unit tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at organization level indicated. See also: Setting Up SIP Self-Check Circulation

    +

    Note: +
    The Polaris ExpressCheck parameters apply only to Polaris ExpressCheck self-check units.

    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Parameter

    +
    +

    Org Level

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck: Options

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Set options to activate Polaris ExpressCheck, require a patron password, display an on-screen keypad, display the holds queue position, display a warning message for expiring patron accounts, permit registration renewal at the Polaris ExpressCheck unit, print receipts for individual items, allow access to patron accounts, enable eReceipts, and other options. You can also set the time-out period. If you use ITG DiscXpress II dispenser units, you can choose to display an on-screen acknowledgment message when a dispenser item is checked out. See Enable the media dispenser.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck: Blocking Conditions

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays the Polaris ExpressCheck Blocking Conditions dialog box, where you set the conditions related to patron records and item records that should block circulation at the Polaris ExpressCheck unit.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Media dispenser settings

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Enable Polaris to work with the media dispenser, and specify material types and messages. +

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Allow SIP processing

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Enables self-check to run.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Assigned staff member  

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    The library staff member who is assigned the circulation transaction.

    +
    +

    PolarisExec

    +
    +

    SIP default workstation

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    The workstation ID used for self-check transactions.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    SIP login password

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    The password for logging in to self-check.

    +
    +

    3MLogin

    +
    +

    SIP login user ID   

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    The username for logging in to self-check.

    +
    +

    3MLogin

    +
    +

    SIP uses patron passwords

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Enables self-check to require passwords for patrons to use self-check

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Default security marker

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Type of security marker on the items.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron Blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Options for respecting or ignoring blocks on patron records: free-text blocks; library-assigned blocks; associated patron blocks; collection agency blocks; blocking notes; setting for maximum claims allowed.

    +
    +

    Various

    +
    +

    Retries allowed

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Number of times the self-check unit attempts to resend a message to the client machine. This applies when there are network problems or if the client software goes offline.

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Time-out period 000 (none)- 999 (not known)

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Number of seconds (in tenths of a second) that the self-check unit pauses before retrying or canceling a transaction that does not receive a response from the client software.

    +
    +

    300 tenths of a second (30 seconds)

    +
    +

    Allow check-outs during renewal

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits a library item that is already checked out to one person, according to the system, to be checked out to another person.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Check-ins ok

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits library items to be checked in.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Check-outs ok

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits library items to be checked out.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    Check-out: Append you saved message to Checkout Printer message +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    Adds You Saved message to printed check-out receipts. See Set SIP self-check parameters.No
    Check-out: Append you saved message to Checkout Screen message +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    Adds You Saved message to check-out screen messages. See Set SIP self-check parameters.No
    +

    Check-out: Charge options

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    If the organization has set charge policies for checkout or renewal, this parameter determines whether chargeable items can be checked out or renewed at the SIP self-check workstation.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Deny check-out if item is from another branch

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether an item can be checked out if it belongs to another branch.

    +
    +
  • +

    No  - An item assigned to another branch can be checked out using this self-check unit.

    +
  • +
    +

    Holds ok

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits hold requests to be placed on items.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Offline ok

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Set this to No because currently, you cannot use SIP self-check offline.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Renewals ok

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits an item to be renewed.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Use error correction

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits a checksum and sequence number at the end of every message sent to and from the software.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Status update ok (can block a patron, etc.)

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Permits a patron’s status to be updated. Allows a self-check unit equipped to detect suspicious behavior (such as swapping items in a stack) to apply a block to a patron record.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the block patron message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message when a patron is blocked from checking out material. The message may appear if a patron left his card in the SelfCheck machine or was tampering with the machine.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the check-in message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to check in material.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the check-out message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to check out material.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the end session message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to end the session.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the fee paid message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to pay a fee to the patron’s account.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the hold message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to put an item on hold.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the item info message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message with item information.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the item status message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message with an item’s status.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the login message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message for a user to log on to self-check.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the patron enable message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message for a patron to access self-check

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the patron info message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message with patron information.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the Patron status message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message with the patron status.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the renew all
    message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to renew all items checked out to a patron.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the renew message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to renew an item.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    System supports the request resend message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message to resend a request.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    System supports the system status message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a message with the system’s status.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Allow checkout of items with free text blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether items with free-text blocks to be checked out

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Allow checkout of items with library assigned blocks

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether items with library-assigned blocks can be checked out.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Checkin: Claim Never Had, allow checkin

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an item with a status of Claim Never Had can be checked in at the self-check unit.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Checkin: Claim Returned, allow checkin

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether an item with a status of Claim Returned can be checked in at the self-check unit.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Printer messages

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    The messages that appear on receipts. You can modify them to differ from the messages that appear on the screen for the same functions.
    The Checkin printer message, This item is committed for INN-Reach ILL appears only checking in pending, located, or shipped items requested through INN-Reach.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Screen messages

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    The messages that appear on the screen. You can modify them to differ from the messages that appear on receipts for the same functions.
    The Checkin screen message, This item is committed for INN-Reach ILL appears only when checking in pending, located, or shipped items requested through INN-Reach.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    SIP2 extensions enabled

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    For certain vendors’ self-check units, enables specific SIP2 functionality.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Use printer messages

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Enables the printer messages to be printed on receipts.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Use screen messages

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Enables the screen messages to appear on the screen.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Allow Security Manager in Terminal Services

    +
    +

    Workstation only

    +
    +

    Disables or enables RFID at the workstation level when using Polaris in a terminal services environment where Security Manager is running on the terminal server.

    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Review_and_set_Patron_Services_parameters_and_profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Review_and_set_Patron_Services_parameters_and_profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1469447b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Review_and_set_Patron_Services_parameters_and_profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Review and Set Patron Services Parameters and Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Review and Set Patron Services Parameters and Profiles

    +

    To review and set Patron Services parameters and profiles:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization for which you want to set parameters.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters or Profiles in the list under the expanded folder. The Parameters or Profiles tabs are displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Select the Patron Services tab. The list of Patron Services parameters appears.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Use the scroll bar to review all the parameters or profiles in the list.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the parameter or profile you want to set. The parameter or profile value is highlighted, ready for editing, or a dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    To get a setting from the next higher organizational level, right-click the parameter or profile and select Inherit higher level values. To give a setting to multiple lower organizations, right-click the parameter or profile and select Transmit values to lower levels. Not all settings can be inherited or transmitted.

    +
      +
    1. Set the parameter or profile as follows:
      • Type text.
      • Use arrows to select an option.
      • In a dialog box, enter the information and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Select File|Save to save any changes.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    To see the effects of your parameter and profile changes in the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Set_circulation_security.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Set_circulation_security.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4096e54a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Set_circulation_security.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Circulation Security + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Circulation Security

    +

    To review and set circulation security:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the Securityfolder for the organization for which you want to set circulation permissions. Certain permissions related to holds, interlibrary loans, patron registration, and patron status (accounting) must be set for each branch that does these functions. Other permissions are set at the system level.
    2. +
    +

    The Security view is displayed in the details pane.

    +

    Tip:
    To display all the circulation permissions, select (highlight) Circulationin the Control Record list, and press ALT+*(on the numeric key pad).
    +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Circulationin the Control Record list.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the record or function for which you want to assign permissions. The permissions list for the selected object appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the permission you want to assign. The staff members, workstations, and groups that have the permission for the organization are listed under Individuals With Permission.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    For a list of the permissions that are required to do specific circulation and patron services tasks, see

    +
      +
    1. Add the resources (groups, workstations, staff members) that need the selected permission by doing the following steps:
      1. Click Assign, and select the resource type. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
      2. Use the Find Tool to search for and select one or more resources. The Administration Explorer is displayed. The selected resources are displayed in the Individuals With Permission list.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 3-5 as needed.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To apply your permission changes to the staff client, exit the staff client and log back in.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f5241b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Circulation Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Circulation Permissions

    +

    Before your staff can do patron registration, patron accounting, and circulation tasks in the Polaris staff client or Leap, you must set specific permissions to do the tasks. Circulation permissions define who can create, access, and work with patron records and circulation functions. Each organization can specify which groups, workstations, and staff members are allowed to work with records and control processes. Granting Permissions.

    +

    + Permissions to Set Permissions. +

    +

    See also:

    + +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Policy_and_Database_Tables.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Policy_and_Database_Tables.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..263941cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Circulation_Policy_and_Database_Tables.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Circulation Policy and Database Tables + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Circulation Policy and Database Tables

    +

    Many circulation workflows are affected by policy and database table settings. Some tables define the options available for specific fields in item and patron records, while others identify values used in circulation transactions, such as due date calculation and overdue fine calculation. The tables are typically set up during implementation, data conversion, or Polaris site installation. Many can be edited as your needs change. You can edit some tables at the branch level. Other settings must be shared by all organizations.

    +

    Note: +
    Specific System Administration permissions are required to work with circulation policy, database, and notification tables. Circulation Administration Permissions.

    +

    +

    Working with Tables.

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Patron_Services_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Patron_Services_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c9b6da57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/Setting_Patron_Services_Parameters_and_Profiles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting Patron Services Parameters and Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Patron Services Parameters and Profiles

    +

    Patron Services parameters and profiles control both patron services and circulation functions. The sets of available parameters and profiles are different for each administration level (system, library, and branch). Separate sets of parameters control requests, notification, self-check operations, and credit card transaction processing.

    +

    You can view and set the Patron Services parameters and profiles from the Administration Explorer or an administration workform.

    +

    Note: +
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify parameters and profiles: Access Administration: Allow; Libraries: Access; Branches: Access; Modify parameters: Allow; Modify profiles: Allow.

    +

    See also: Review and Set Patron Services Parameters and Profiles

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/overrideblks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/overrideblks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..578d942d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstart/overrideblks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Override Patron Services Permissions Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Override Patron Services Permissions Blocks

    +

    When a staff member does not have the appropriate permission to do a patron services/circulation task, a permission block message appears. You can allow certain staff members or supervisors to override the permission block so that the staff member without permission can continue the blocked task.

    +

    Set the Patron Services profile Override patron services blocks to Yesat the staff member level for the staff member who should be able to override permission blocks. For more information about how to set profiles, see Setting Patron Services Parameters and Profiles.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_a_patron_statistical_code.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_a_patron_statistical_code.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79f6b8b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_a_patron_statistical_code.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a patron statistical code + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a patron statistical code

    +

    To add a patron statistical code to Polaris for reporting purposes:

    +

    Note:
    Check the table for duplicates before you enter a new statistical code. You cannot remove entries from the Patron Statistical Class Codes policy table.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, expand the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Patron Statistical Class Codes. The Patron Statistical Class Codes table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to display the Insert Patron Statistical Class Codes dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dStatCodInDx.gif 

    +

    Note:
    If the Patron Statistical Class Codes policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization list to which the new statistical code belongs.
    2. +
    3. Type the statistical code description in the Description box, and click OK. The new entry is displayed in the Patron Statistical Class Codes policy table. Modification pending appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes. Record saved appears in the status bar.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Modify a table entry - Select the entry, click ModIcon.gif, and change the description. Changes to a statistical code entry affect all patron records that used the original wording of the entry, so you should limit changes to correcting spelling or using similar wording.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_an_item_statistical_code.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_an_item_statistical_code.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6458ee6f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Add_an_item_statistical_code.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add an item statistical code + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add an item statistical code

    +

    To add an item statistical code for reporting purposes:

    +

    Note:
    Check the table for duplicates before you enter a new statistical code. You cannot remove entries from the Item Statistical Class Codes table.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, expand the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Item Statistical Class Codes. The Item Statistical Class Codes table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +

    + dItmStatClassTbl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00512.gif to display the Insert Item Statistical Class Codes dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dItmStatClasDx.gif 

    +

    Note:
    If the Item Statistical Class Codes policy table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch in the Organization list to which the new statistical category belongs.
    2. +
    3. Type text describing the statistical classification in the Description box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK. The new entry is displayed in the Item Statistical Class Codes policy table. Modification pending appears in the status bar.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save to save your changes. Record saved appears in the status bar.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Modify a table entry - Select the entry, click ModIcon00513.gif, and change the description. Changes to a statistical code entry affect all item records that used the original wording of the entry, so you should limit changes in statistical descriptions to correcting spelling and using similar wording for a given statistical code.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Item_Statistical_Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Item_Statistical_Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..602e803e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Item_Statistical_Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Item Statistical Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Item Statistical Codes

    +

    Item statistical codes are useful for creating specific circulation reports an organization may require. You can also limit Find Tool searches for item records by statistical code. (Unlike material type definitions, statistical codes do not affect loan limits.) Statistical codes should not duplicate material type, collection, or genre descriptions, but you can use them to make finer distinctions for any of these. For example, a branch might define item statistical codes for Adult Books on Compact Disc and Comic Books, among others. As another example, some libraries use these codes to break out shelving areas into smaller units for reporting purposes, so that Adult Non-Fiction is broken down with a statistical code for call numbers 000-099, another for 100-199, another for 200-299, and so forth. The item statistical codes are displayed for selection in the Statistical code box on the Item Record workform.

    +

    + ItemStatClass.gif 

    +

    You define the available statistical codes in the Item Statistical Class Codes policy table. The policy table can be opened on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. If a branch needs statistical reporting, you must specify statistical codes for that branch because they are not inherited from parent organizations.

    +

    When you open the policy table at the system level, you can view, add, and change entries for any branch. At the library level, you can view, add, and change entries for any branch that is part of the library. At the branch level, you can view, add, and change entries for the selected branch.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to work with this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify item statistical class codes table: Allow.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Patron_Statistical_Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Patron_Statistical_Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d437f4b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Defining_Patron_Statistical_Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Defining Patron Statistical Class Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Patron Statistical Class Codes

    +

    Patron statistical codes are useful for demographic or other reports an organization may require. They should not duplicate patron codes, but you can use them to make finer distinctions in patron code categories. For example, statistical codes might be defined for district residence, course major, or society membership. Unlike patron codes, statistical codes do not affect circulation limits or fine calculations. They are used for reporting purposes, and you can limit Find Tool searches for patron records by statistical class (code). The patron statistical codes are displayed for selection in the Statistical class box on the Patron Registration workform- General view.

    +

    You define the available statistical codes in the Patron Statistical Class Codes policy table. This table can be opened on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer. Statistical codes can be defined from the system, library, and branch levels. If a branch needs statistical reporting, you must specify statistical codes for that branch. They are not inherited from a parent organization.

    +

    When you open this table at the system level, you can view, add, and change entries for any branch. At the library level, you can view, add, and change entries for any branch that is part of the library. At the branch level, you can view, add, and change entries for the selected branch.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to work with this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify patron statistical class codes table: Allow.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Setting_Statistical_Codes_for_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Setting_Statistical_Codes_for_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a2000f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDPstats/Setting_Statistical_Codes_for_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +  Setting Statistical Codes for Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

     Setting Statistical Codes for Reports

    +

    Some Polaris circulation reports depend on patron and item statistical codes. Although statistical codes are not required for Polaris to work, you must define them in the Polaris Administration policy tables Patron Statistical Class Codes and Item Statistical Class Codes to do statistical reporting.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Enter_a_Computype_printer_command.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Enter_a_Computype_printer_command.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1662dc50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Enter_a_Computype_printer_command.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter a Computype printer command + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter a Computype printer command

    +

    To enter a Computype printer command:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the system or organization, and select Database tables.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Computype Label Printer Commands to open the table.
    4. +
    +

    + computypelabelprinter.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif to insert the command. The Insert: Computype Label Printer Commands dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + insertprintercommand.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Enter the printer name in the Printer Name box.
    2. +
    3. Paste or enter the printer command in the Printer Commands box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To locate and copy the printer command, see Find Computype printer commands .

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Find_Computype_printer_commands.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Find_Computype_printer_commands.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b64c149 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Find_Computype_printer_commands.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find Computype printer commands + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Computype printer commands

    +

    To locate the Computype printer command to enter in the database table:

    +
      +
    1. Go to the Control Panel on the computer.
    2. +
    3. Select Hardware and Sound, Devices and Printers to see the printers.
    4. +
    +

    + device&printer.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the Computype spine printer, right-click and select Properties. The Properties window opens.
    2. +
    3. Select the Printer Commands tab.
    4. +
    +

    + spineprintcomm.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select and copy the text in the Begin Print Job box. This is the printer command that is entered in Polaris Administration.
    2. +
    3. Enter the printer name and command code in the Computype Label Printer Commands database table in Polaris Administration. See Enter a Computype printer command .
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Setting_Up_Computype_Label_Printers.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Setting_Up_Computype_Label_Printers.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34fcb340 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Patron_Services_Admin/PDlabelprinter/Setting_Up_Computype_Label_Printers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Computype Label Printers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Computype Label Printers

    +

    These instructions apply to Zebra printers with the Computype LabelMorphor IIE, models:

    +
      +
    • T402
    • +
    • TLP 3844Z
    • +
    • Z4M Plus
    • +
    • ZM400
    • +
    • GX420T
    • +
    • GX430T
    • +
    +

    One of the following versions of the Computype firmware must be loaded on the LabelMorphor:

    +
      +
    • Polaris_v1.c
    • +
    • Polaris_v2.c
    • +
    • Polaris_v3.c
    • +
    • Polaris_v4.c
    • +
    +

    The printer command is entered in the Computype Label Printer Commands database table in Polaris Administration. To find the command, go to the printer properties.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Basic_Shortcut_Keys.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Basic_Shortcut_Keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18be8aba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Basic_Shortcut_Keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,421 @@ + + + + + + + + + Basic Shortcut Keys + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Basic Shortcut Keys

    +

    These charts list the basic Polaris keyboard shortcuts.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    POLARIS KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Select AllCTRL+A +
    CopyCTRL+C +
    DeleteCTRL+D +
    Log on, Log offCTRL+ L
    NewCTRL+ N
    OpenCTRL+O
    Print current viewCTRL+ P
    Print list viewCTRL+SHIFT+P
    ReportsCTRL+ R
    SaveCTRL+S
    PasteCTRL+V
    Launch browserCTRL+W
    CutCTRL+X
    RedoCTRL+Y
    UndoCTRL+ Z
    ClearDELETE
    Topic or workform helpF1
    Open Check-in workformF2
    Open Check-out workformF3
    RefreshF5
    Find patron (status)F6
    Find patron (registration)F7
    PropertiesF8
    Find bibliographic recordsF12
    Find item recordsCTRL+ALT+F9
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    SHORTCUT BAR: MENU ACCESS KEYS
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    FileALT+F
    AcquisitionsALT+A
    SerialsALT+S
    CatalogingALT+C
    Patron ServicesALT+P
    CirculationALT+R
    AdministrationALT+M
    UtilitiesALT+U
    WindowALT+W
    HelpALT+H
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    FIND TOOL ACCESS KEYS
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Object boxALT+O
    By boxALT+B
    Type boxALT+Y
    For boxALT+F
    Search buttonALT+S
    Stop buttonALT+T
    New Search buttonALT+N
    Help buttonALT_H
    Retrieve all records in search resultsCTRL+SHIFT+A
    Display context menuSHIFT+F10
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    WORKFORMS: MENU ACCESS KEYS
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    FileALT+F
    EditALT+E
    ViewALT+V
    LinksALT+L
    ToolsALT+T
    HelpALT+H
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    WORKFORMS: SHORTCUTS
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Workform HelpF1
    Print current viewCTRL+P
    Print list viewCTRL+SHIFT+P
    Display context menuSHIFT+F10
    Expand treeSHIFT+ALT+* [numeric keypad]
    Collapse treeSHIFT+ALT+- [numeric keypad]
    Move among open workformsALT+TAB
    Switch views in a workformCTRL+TAB
    Close workformALT+F4
    Save recordCTRL+S
    Delete recordCTRL+D
    PropertiesF8
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_linked_record_from_a_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_linked_record_from_a_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e794b19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_linked_record_from_a_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a linked record from a workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Linked Record from a Workform

    +

    For some record types, you can create a record that is linked to the record displayed in an open workform. When records are linked, you can easily access one from the other.

    +

    To create a new record that is linked to the displayed record:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and select the record. See Doing a Basic Search. The record is displayed in the appropriate workform.
    2. +
    3. From the workform menu bar, select Tools > Create [record type].
    4. +
    5. Enter information in the fields in the workform.
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save. A message in the status bar indicates the record was saved.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_a_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_a_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fbf189b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_a_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new record from a workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Record from a Workform

    +

    For certain records, you can create a record of the same type as the one displayed in an open workform.

    +

    To create a record from a workform:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Polaris Find Tool to locate and display an existing record in a workform. See Doing a Basic Search.
    2. +
    3. Select File > New from the workform menu bar. The New Record dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select one of the following options.
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Clear Work Form - The data is cleared from the workform (except default data), and a new, blank workform appears.
    • +
    • Copy Existing Work Form - The original workform closes, and a copy of the workform appears.
    • +
    • Use Existing Template - This option appears only for record types that have templates. Select Templates>> to display a list of templates, and select a template.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    3. Modify the data, as necessary.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save. The record is saved with a new control number that uniquely identifies the record, and a message in the status bar indicates the record was saved.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc673e00 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new record from the Find Tool results list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Record from the Find Tool Results List

    +

    You can create new records from a variety of types of records displayed in the Polaris Find Tool results list. For example, from an entry in a list of bib search results, you can create an item record.

    +

    To create a new record from a record listed in the Polaris Find Tool results:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Polaris Find Tool to search for the record. See Doing a Basic Search. The records that meet the criteria you specified are displayed in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    3. Select the record that you want to use to create the new record.
    4. +
    5. Right-click, select Create, and select the type of record you want to create.
    6. +
    +

    The workform for the type of record opens.

    +
      +
    1. Enter information in the fields in the workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save. A message in the status bar indicates the record was saved.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Various Polaris subsystems offer additional methods for creating records: 

    +
      +
    • Using Templates - You can use templates to create new records such as item, bibliographic, and purchase order records. Using templates to create records is more efficient and ensures that certain standard information is entered the same way in each new record. See Using Cataloging Templates and Setting Up Templates for Acquisitions.
    • +
    • Creating multiple item records for the same title - You can create item records for multiple copies of the same title in one step. See Create multiple item records for a single title.
    • +
    • Importing records - You can import bibliographic or authority records to create new records in the Polaris database. Item records can be created automatically from embedded holdings data in imported bibliographic records. See Importing Records.
    • +
    • Creating purchase orders by bulk adding - You can create new purchase orders by bulk adding titles from a bibliographic record set. See Create a Purchase Order by Bulk Adding Titles.
    • +
    • Creating serial issue records - You can create serial issue records through automatic prediction. See Setting Up Serials Records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18524c9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Create_a_new_record_from_the_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a new record from the Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a New Record from the Shortcut Bar

    +

    You can create primary records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, but not records that are dependent on another record for their existence. For example, you can create a purchase order, but not a purchase order line item, with this method.

    +

    To create a record from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +

    Tip:
    Click new_doc_icon.gif or press CTRL+N to display the New dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New from the Shortcut Bar. The New dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Type the first letter of the record type to go to all records that begin with that letter. For example, type i to go to Invoice and scroll slightly to see Item Record and Item Template.To limit the record types in the Objects list, select the subsystem in the View box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate record type in the Objects list.
    2. +
    +

    If templates are listed, and you want to use one, select Existing template, and select a template. If you are creating multiple records using the same template, you can select the template, and select the Make session default box. When you create the next record of the same type, the template is automatically selected.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The workform appears.
    2. +
    3. Enter information in the workform.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save to save the record. A message in the status bar indicates the record was saved.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_New_Records_in_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_New_Records_in_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6da654c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_New_Records_in_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating New Records in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating New Records in Polaris

    +

    If you have the appropriate permissions, throughout Polaris you can create new records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar or from an existing record’s workform. Some types of records can be created by linking from an existing record displayed in a workform or in the Find Tool results list. Each record is assigned a unique control number.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_and_Deleting_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_and_Deleting_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f09da74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Creating_and_Deleting_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating and Deleting Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating and Deleting Records

    +

    You can create new records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar and from workforms. Although specific details vary depending on the type of record you are creating, the general procedures are the same for all records.

    +

    When you enter data to create or modify records in Polaris, be sure to follow the conventions your library has established. For example, your library may have decided to use all capitals for codes and abbreviations, and initial capitals for words. While this may not affect the way Polaris processes information, it does affect the appearance of indexes and reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_a_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_a_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..58735460 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_a_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete a record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Record

    +

    To delete a record from the Polaris database:

    +

    Important:
    For records other than bibliographic, item, or authority records, deleting records permanently removes the record from the Polaris database, and the record cannot be recovered. Your Polaris administrator specifies whether item records, bibliographic records, and authority records are retained even though they are marked for deletion. A purge process, with separate permissions, permanently deletes these records when marked for deletion.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Polaris Find Tool to locate and display a record in its workform. See Doing a Basic Search.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can delete a record directly from the Polaris Find Tool. Right-click the record, and select Delete from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Delete.
    2. +
    +

    The message, Are you sure you want to permanently delete [record type]? appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_multiple_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_multiple_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50ca9845 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Delete_multiple_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Delete multiple records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete Multiple Records

    +

    To delete multiple records from the Polaris database:

    +
      +
    1. Select multiple records from the Find Tool results list, a list box, or a record set.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    If you are deleting bibliographic, item, or patron records, the Multiple Object Deletion dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you have the required permissions, and you want to keep warning messages from displaying whenever a record with links to other records is encountered, select one or both of the following check boxes.
    2. +
    +
      +
    • breakable links - If you select this option, the records with breakable links will be deleted without any warning messages appearing.
    • +
    • unbreakable links and other stopping conditions - If you select this option, the records with unbreakable links are not deleted, but they are skipped over without any warning messages appearing.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to delete the selected records. If you decide not to delete the selected records, click No or close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Permissions to suppress warning messages when deleting multiple records

    +
      +
    • +

      Cataloging permissions to suppress warnings when deleting multiple bibliographic or item records:

      +
        +
      • Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow
      • +
      • Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow
      • +
      • Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple item records: Allow
      • +
      • Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple item records: Allow
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Circulation permissions to suppress warning messages when deleting multiple patron records:

      +
        +
      • Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple patron records: Allow
      • +
      • Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple patron records: Allow
      • +
      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Deleting_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Deleting_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67cb5354 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIcreatrec/Deleting_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deleting Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deleting Records

    +

    If you have the appropriate permissions, you can delete certain kinds of Polaris records. When you delete some types of records, you are permanently removing them from the Polaris database, and they cannot be recovered. However, for cataloging records, your Polaris Administrator can set the following profiles to control deletion of these records: Retain Deleted Authority Records, Retain Deleted Bibliographic Records and Retain Deleted Item Records. If these profiles are set to Yes, cataloging records are marked for deletion, but they are not removed from the Polaris database unless you run a purge process. See Managing Record Deletion.

    +

    You can delete records from the Polaris Find Tool, from record sets, from linked list boxes and from workforms. If the record you want to delete is linked to one or more other records, a message tells you that the record cannot be deleted. If you have the required permissions, you can suppress the unbreakable and breakable links messages when you are deleting multiple item, bibliographic, or patron records. This prevents a message from appearing for each record that has these links when you are deleting many records at once.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_author_series_or_subject.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_author_series_or_subject.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3c4e8972 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_author_series_or_subject.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Browse by author, series, or subject + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Browse by Author, Series, or Subject

    +

    To browse search for bibliographic records by author, series, or subject authorized headings:

    +

    Note:
    You cannot browse by author, series, or subject when using the Find Tool from within a workform.

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool, General tabbed page, select Bibliographic Records in the Object box.
    2. +
    3. Select Author, Series, or Subject in the Search by box.
    4. +
    5. Select Browse in the Type box.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Tip: 
    Type the name of the author using the format: last name first name. For example, type    William Shakespeare as Shakespeare William.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the name of the author, the series name, or the subject word in the For box.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You do not need to type the entire index heading.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Search to begin searching. Author, subject, or series headings appear in the results list. The numbers in the Count column specify how many records are associated with that heading.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can select a See or See Also cross reference.

    +
    +

    + browsesubj.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click a heading. The Heading dialog box displays the titles associated with the heading.
    2. +
    +

    + subjhead.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you want to open the record, double-click it in the list. The Bibliographic Record workform opens for the title you selected.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_call_number_or_title.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_call_number_or_title.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5774e282 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Browse_by_call_number_or_title.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Browse by call number or title + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Browse by Call Number or Title

    +

    To browse search for bibliographic records by bib call number or title:

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool, General tabbed page, select Bibliographic Records in the Object box.
    2. +
    3. Select Call number or Title in the Search by box.
    4. +
    5. Select Browse in the Type box.
    6. +
    7. Type the call number or title in the For box. You do not need to type the entire title or call number.
    8. +
    9. Click Search. The results list displays the portion of the title or call number index that begins with your search text.
    10. +
    +

    + browsetitle.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Right-click a title line item, and select Open from the context menu to display the record in the Bibliographic Record workform.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Customize_the_Find_Tool_by_user.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Customize_the_Find_Tool_by_user.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe51337d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Customize_the_Find_Tool_by_user.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Customize the Find Tool by user + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customize the Find Tool

    +

    You can customize the Find Tool to save default general search criteria and, for bibliographic record searches, to save default remote search databases.

    +

    Your custom default search settings are associated with your user account and are used each time you sign in with your user ID. You can change your default search settings at any time.

    +

    Save Default General Search Criteria

    +

    You can set the Find Tool to default to the same selections in the Search by, Type, Sort by, and Limit by boxes each time you search for the same type of record.

    +

    Values that can be selected from drop-down lists are also saved, but free-text values are not. For example, if you select Genre in the Search by or Limit by box, enter a free-text value, and select Save as User Default > Genre will be retained, but not the free-text value.

    +

    To customize the Find Tool:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Select the record type you want to find.
    4. +
    5. Select an option from the list in the Search by box.
    6. +
    7. If you want the search results sorted the same way every time you search for that type of record, select an option in the Sort by box.
    8. +
    9. If you want the search results limited in the same way every time you search for that type of record, select an option in the Limit by box, and select a value in the Limit by values box.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    Limit by values selected from a drop-down list are saved in the user default, but free-text values are not saved. For example, if the Limit by selection is Subject and you enter history in the Values box, the value is not saved.

    +
      +
    1. Select Options > Save as User Default from the Find Tool menu bar.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you save a Power search as the user default, the Find Tool will open to the Power Search tab the next time you search for the same type of record, but the search criteria are not saved.

    +

    The Find Tool is customized to search for the record by the option you selected in the Search by box. To set the Search by option back to the default for the record type, select Revert to System Default.

    +

    Note:
    If you set user defaults for the bibliographic or item record Find Tool, these defaults are in effect in the Find Tool shortcuts (F12 for bibs and Ctrl+Alt+F9 for items).

    +

    Save Default Remote Search Databases

    +

    Note:
    Default search databases can only be saved for bibliographic record searches.

    +

    To save default search databases:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool for bibliographic records and navigate to the Databases tab.
    2. +
    3. Select the remote databases you would like to search.
    4. +
    5. Select Options > Save as User Default.
    6. +

      Polaris saves your preferred remote search databases. When you open the Find Tool for bibliographic records in the future, your preferred search databases are already selected.

      +
    +

    To clear saved default search databases:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool for bibliographic records, and navigate to the Databases tab.
    2. +
    3. Select OptionsRevert to System Default.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_SQL_search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_SQL_search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86e19cd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_SQL_search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Do a SQL search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Do a SQL Search

    +

    To search using SQL:

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of record you want to search for in the Object box on the General tab of the Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can save the SQL search mode as the default search mode setting. See Customize the Find Tool by user.

    +
      +
    1. Select SQL. The SQL Search Criteria box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To search using an existing SQL search, see Search using a saved SQL search.

    +
      +
    1. Type the SQL search criteria and click Search.
    2. +
    3.  If you want to save the SQL search criteria, click Save, type the name of the saved search in the Save SQL Search dialog box, and click OK. You can use this saved search when you search for the same type of record (object).
    4. +
    5. Click Search. The search results appear.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_power_search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_power_search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..240745c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Do_a_power_search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Do a power search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Write a Power Search Query

    +

    To do a complex, precise search by writing a query in Common Command Language (CCL):

    +

    Note:
    Search expressions are not case-sensitive. That is, you can use uppercase letters, lowercase letters, or a combination of both. They do not affect the results.

    +

    Tip:
    To delete all the information in the Power Search Criteria box, click Clear. To start a new search with a basic search expression, click New Search.

    +
      +
    1. To create a basic query first, select a record type in the Object box and enter the search criteria in the Search by, Type, and For boxes on the Find Tool - General tabbed page. See Doing a Basic Search.
    2. +
    3. Click Power. The General page displays a Power Search Criteria box. If you created a query in the previous step, the query appears in the Power Search Criteria box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    You must write your power search queries precisely. This means you may need to edit search expressions that are carried over to the Power Search Criteria box. For example, to find the works of all authors with names beginning with Shake, type AU=shake* in the Power Search Criteria box. If you type AU=shake, only the works of authors named Shake are found.

    +
      +
    1. Input additional criteria or edit existing criteria in the Power Search Criteria box, using CCL syntax.
    2. +
    3. Click Search to begin searching. The results list appears.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_Power_Searches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_Power_Searches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b99ab12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_Power_Searches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,377 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing Power Searches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing Power Searches

    +

    With power searching, you can construct complex, precise searches by writing Common Command Language (CCL) queries. Power searching is a good way to list records that share a combination of very specific characteristics. To construct a power search, you can begin with a basic search expression and then add more search expressions to it, or you can write the entire query.

    +

    Note:
    You can do complex searches for cataloging records and have Polaris format the information you provide into CCL for you. See Scoping Searches for Bibs and Items.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Setting Up CCL Queries

    +

    CCL queries in the Find Tool consist of one or more search expressions. Each search expression is a search string and a series of symbols and operators specifying the desired search results.

    +

    Tip:
    You can change the time out for the search from the default of 30 seconds to another length of time by typing TIMEOUT=(number). For example, if you want to search for United States and increase the time out to 60 seconds, type:
    KW=United States and TIMEOUT=60

    +

    A search expression includes the following components:

    +
      +
    • +

      Access point - A search field identifier, such as author or title. Also known as a qualifier.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Operator - The logical link between an access point and a search string, or between search expressions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Search string - A string of characters identifying the item for which you are searching. Also known as an item description, search term, or value.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    The following query, composed of two search expressions linked by AND, finds the works of author Asimov published in or after 1970:

    AU=asimov AND PD >= 1970

    where

    AU
     and PD are access points (Author and Publication Date)
    =, AND, >= are operators
    asimov and 1970 are search strings

    +

    You can group search expressions with parentheses to direct the order of operations.

    +

    Mnemonic Codes for Access Points

    +

    When you are creating queries, you must use the mnemonic code, and not the full term, for the following access points:

    +

    Note:
    Branches and collections are available only with normal searches.

    +
      +
    • +

      Find Tool Search by options

      +
    • +
    • +

      Language (LA)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Target audience (TA)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Collection (COL) - Click the Collections tab on the Find Tool to see the abbreviations for your system.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Assigned Branch (AB) - Click the Branches tab on the Find Tool to see the abbreviations for your system.

      +
    • +
    +

    CCL Operators

    +

    The following are CCL operators:

    +
      +
    • +

      Boolean (logical) operators - AND, OR, NOT logically connect items

      +
    • +
    • +

      Proximity (nearness) operators - Specify the location of and distance between items

      +
    • +
    • +

      Relational operators - Specify comparative relationships between items, such as greater than, less than, or equal to

      +
    • +
    +

    Boolean Operators

    +

    The Boolean operators AND, OR, and NOT combine search expressions in logical sequences:

    +
      +
    • +

      AND - A record must match both the search expression before and the expression after the operator to be included in the search results.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU=isaac asimov AND TI=planets
    +
    Finds only the items written by Isaac Asimov that have the word planets in the title.

    +
      +
    • +

      OR - A record must match either the search expression before or the expression after the operator, or both, to be included in the search results.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU=isaac asimov OR TI=planets
    +
    Finds all items written by Isaac Asimov and all items with the word planets in the title by any author.

    +
      +
    • +

      NOT - A record must match the search expression before the operator, but not the expression after the operator to be included in the search results. The expression after the operator must be enclosed in parentheses.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU=isaac asimov NOT (TI=planets)

    Finds only those items written by Isaac Asimov that do not have the word planets in the title.

    +

    You may build a more complex query using the Boolean operators. When using multiple operators in the same query, use parentheses to group the search expressions so that they are done in the correct order, from left to right.

    +

    Proximity Operators

    +

    The proximity operators N, Nn, W, and Wn specify the relative position of search terms in the search results. Proximity operators are used with a number representing the distance between the two terms (the proximity distance). Adjacent terms have a proximity distance equal to 1, and the default proximity relation is LE (less than or equal to).

    +

    If the proximity operator begins with N, it indicates the search terms may be separated by the specified number of words in any order. For example, a power search for KW="United States" N2:EQ KW="Union" searches for records where the phrase United States appears exactly two words before or after the keyword Union.

    +

    If the proximity operator begins with W, it indicates the search terms must be within the specified number of words in the specified order. For example, a power search for KW="Harry Potter" W10:LT KW="J.K. Rowling" searches for records where the phrase Harry Potter appears less than 10 words before the phrase J.K. Rowling.

    +
      +
    • +

      N or % - Indicates the search terms should be next to each other in any order.

      +
    • +
    +

    Examples:
    AU="james" N AU="joyce"
    AU="james" % AU="joyce"

    Finds any items with authors that have the names James and Joyce next to each other, such as James Joyce or Joyce James.

    +
      +
    • +

      Nn - Indicates the search terms may be separated by the specified number of words (n) in any order, where n is a number between 1 and 9.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU="james" N4 AU="joyce"

    Finds any items with authors that have the names James within four words of the name Joyce, such as James C. Joyce or Joyce and Roberta James.

    +
      +
    • +

      W or ! - The search terms must be next to each other in the specified order.

      +
    • +
    +

    Examples:
    AU="james" W AU="joyce"
    AU="james" ! AU="joyce"

    Finds any items written by James Joyce, but ignores items written by Joyce James.

    +
      +
    • +

      Wn - The search terms must be within the specified number of words (n) in the specified order, where n is a number between one and nine.

      +
    • +
    +

    Examples:
    AU="james" W4 AU="joyce"
    AU="james" !4 AU="joyce"

    Finds any items written by James C. Joyce and James Robert Collins Joyce, but ignores items written by Joyce C. James.

    +

    Relative Operators

    +

    The relative operators include the following mnemonic codes for comparing items:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    OperationMnemonic Code/Relative Operator
    +

    Equal to specified item

    +
    +

    EQ or =

    +
    +

    Not equal to specified item

    +
    +

    NE or <>

    +
    +

    Less than specified item

    +
    +

    LT or <

    +
    +

    Less than or equal to specified item

    +
    +

    LE or <=

    +
    +

    Greater than specified item

    +
    +

    GT or >

    +
    +

    Greater than or equal to specified item

    +
    +

    GE or >=

    +
    +

    Equal to specified item

    +
    +

    EQ or =

    +
    +

    Examples:
    - The following example finds items published in or after 1987:
    PD GE 1987
    - The following example finds items published before 1932 that have the words solar system in any indexed field:
    KW=solar system AND PD < 1932

    +

    Wildcard Characters

    +

    You can use the following special characters to search for character pattern matches to the item description:

    +

    Tip:
    Enter as much of the base search term as you can because the shorter the base, the more imprecise the search. For example, entering bee* can yield search results of bees, beer, or Beecher.

    +
      +
    • Question mark (?) - Indicates 0 or more characters. For example, type child? to find child, children, child’s, and so forth.
    • +
    • Asterisk (*) - Indicates 0 or more characters. For example, type west* to find west, western, West’s, and so forth.
    • +
    • Number sign (#) - Indicates 0 or 1 character. For example, type wash# to find wash, washi, washy, and so forth.
    • +
    +

    Quotation Marks in Power Searching

    +

    Tip:
    You can enclose any search string in quotation marks. If you are not sure whether to enclose the search string in quotation marks, you can always safely use them.

    +

    Strings containing the following words and characters must be enclosed in quotation marks if they are used as part of an item description in a CCL search:

    +

    Tip: +
    The number sign (#) is treated as a single-character wildcard and not as the character itself. Therefore, a power search for TI="#*" does not limit the results to records with # in the title. Instead, use an embedded SQL search with 9999 as the Bib-1 Use attribute for ADHOC.

    To search for bibliographic records with # in the title, enter the following in the Power Search Criteria box:

    [9999]="SELECT RecordID FROM Z3950_AP_BR_TI_S WHERE Term LIKE '#%'"

    To search for item records with # in the title, enter the following in the Power Search Criteria box:

    [9999]="SELECT RecordID FROM Z3950_AP_IR_TI_S WHERE Term LIKE '#%'"

    +
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    N

    +
    +

    ?

    +
    +

    N[1-9]

    +
    +

    #

    +
    +

    %

    +
    +

    =

    +
    +

    W

    +
    +

    <>

    +
    +

    W[1-9]

    +
    +

    eq

    +
    +

    !

    +
    +

    gt

    +
    +

    and

    +
    +

    lt

    +
    +

    or

    +
    +

    ge

    +
    +

    not

    +
    +

    le

    +
    +

    *

    +
    +

    -

    +
    +

    &

    +
    +

     

    +
    +
    +

    Examples:
    - To find the title Bud, Not Buddy, you type the following command:
    TI = “bud not buddy”
    The string must be enclosed in quotation marks because in a CCL command, not is ordinarily a Boolean operator.

    - To find the telephone number 453-7890, you type the following command:
    PHONE = “453-7890”
    The string must be enclosed in quotation marks because in a CCL command, the hyphen (-) ordinarily separates two values, indicating a range of values between the two.

    +

    Power-Searching for Multiple ISBNs

    +

    Tip:
    If you are pasting the ISBNs from another source (such as a Word document) that uses the curved “smart quote” characters, change the quotation marks to straight quotes in the search command.

    +

    The internal limit to the number of search terms you can enter with no parentheses is 10. If you search for multiple ISBNs, you can avoid this limit by placing each ISBN in quotation marks. The example shows the syntax you can use:

    +

    Example:
    Each number represents an ISBN.
    ISBN={"1", "2", "3", "4"}

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Basic_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Basic_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe18ccfd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Basic_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing a Basic Search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing a Basic Search

    +

    The Find Tool appears when you select a subsystem and record type from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or when you click Find on workforms and dialog boxes. You can also press F12 from anywhere in the Polaris staff client application to open the Find Tool and search for bibliographic records, or Ctrl+Alt+F9 to search for item records.

    +

    When the Find Tool opens, select the type of record to search for (object), the access point to search by, and the type of search. Then type the word or phrase to use for the search. In addition, you can use various options on the Find Tool to narrow your search results, specify how to sort the results, or get a simple count of the number of records.

    +

    Depending on the type of record, you can display the records in the Find Tool results list and add them to a record set, or select Count only and add them all to a record set without having to display them in a list. If you want to add specific records to a record set, you can display them in the results list, right-click the selected records, and select Add to Record Set from the context menu.

    +

    If you usually search for records using the same criteria, you can save the search options as your user default. For example, if you usually search for bibliographic records by title and limit the search by material type, you can set this up as your default. You can also specify sorting options as part of your user default. Each time you search for bibliographic records, the options are set automatically. For more information, see Customize the Find Tool by user.

    +

    You can have multiple Find Tools open at once. The title bar of each Find Tool displays the object and access point selected for that search. For example, if you are searching for an item record by barcode, the title bar displays Item Records - Barcode Find Tool.

    +

    Important:
    Your Polaris administrator may set the Find Tool so that search results are filtered according to your staff member permissions and those of the workstation you are using. In Polaris Administration, if the Staff Client profile Find Tool: Filter search results by permission is set to Yes, you will see only the records for which you have Access permission. If it is set to No, you can see records in the search results even if you do not have permission to access (open) them.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Browse_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Browse_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84fa89e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Browse_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing a Browse Search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing a Browse Search

    +

    You can select Browse as a search type only when you are searching for bibliographic records by Author, Call number, Series, Subject, or Title. When you browse by author, series, or subject, the index opens to the authorized heading that begins with what you entered in the For box. You select the heading to display the titles associated with it. When you browse by title, the results list displays the portion of the alphabetical title index that begins with the text you typed. When you browse by call number, the portion of the catalog that begins with the call number is displayed. Browse searching includes Unicode support for searching by author, subject, series, and title. You can enter diacritics and other characters when browse searching.

    +

    Note:
    The Limit by, Count only, Sort by and Add to Record Set options do not apply to browse searches.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Keyword_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Keyword_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eeabedca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Keyword_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing a Keyword Search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing a Keyword Search

    +

    When you select a record type in the Object box and an access point in the Search by box, Keyword search appears in the Type list if available for this combination of record type and access point.

    +

    For some types of records, keyword searching is available because the selected Search by access point actually searches in linked records. For example, when you search by Title for a line item in a selection list, purchase order, or invoice, Keyword search appears in the Type box because the system searches for the line item by the title in the linked bibliographic record.

    +

    Keyword searching is available for the following types of records (depending on the selection in the Search by box):

    +
      +
    • Acquisitions
      • Claims
      • Invoice Line Items
      • Purchase Order Line Items
      • Selection List Line Items
    • +
    • Cataloging
      • Authority
      • Bibliographic
      • Community
      • Course Reserves
      • Items
      • Promotions
      • Reserve Items
    • +
    • Patron Services/Circulation
      • Course Reserves
      • Hold Requests
      • ILL
      • Patron Records
    • +
    • Serials
      • Claims
      • Issues
      • Parts
      • Route Lists
      • Subscriptions
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +

    Automatic Suggestions in Keyword or Phrase Searching

    +

    If your library system has the Cataloging parameter Auto-suggest feature enabled set to Yes, a list of suggestions appears as you type if you are doing a keyword or phrase search for a record by an access point that is keyword-indexed. Automatic suggestions do not appear if you are searching a remote database. See Managing Auto-Search Suggestions.

    +

    Note:
    You can turn automatic suggestions off by selecting Hide Suggestions at the bottom of the list of suggestions. To turn them back on, click autosugback.gif in the For box.

    +

    Automatic suggestions for patron records

    +

    When you do a keyword or phrase search for a patron record using any of the following access points, a list of suggestions appears automatically as you type:

    +
      +
    • Phone Number
    • +
    • Address (StreetOne, StreetTwo)
    • +
    • City, State PostalCode (ZipPlusFour)
    • +
    • Email Address
    • +
    • Name (First, Middle Last)
    • +
    • Name (Last, First Middle)
    • +
    +

    Automatic suggestions for bibliographic or item records

    +

    When you do a keyword or phrase search for a bibliographic record or item record using any of the following access points, a list of suggestions appears automatically as you type:

    +
      +
    • Author
    • +
    • General notes
    • +
    • Genre
    • +
    • Publisher
    • +
    • Subject
    • +
    • Title
    • +
    +

    Automatic suggestions for authority records

    +

    When you do a keyword or phrase search for an authority record using any of the following access points, a list of suggestions appears automatically as you type:

    +
      +
    • Heading
    • +
    • All keyword fields
    • +
    • Conference name
    • +
    • Corporate name
    • +
    • Genre/Form subject
    • +
    • Geographic name
    • +
    • LC children’s subject
    • +
    • LC subject
    • +
    • Name
    • +
    • Personal name
    • +
    • Subdivision heading
    • +
    • Topic term
    • +
    • Tracing/Reference
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Phrase_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Phrase_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cc70e488 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Doing_a_Phrase_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing a Phrase Search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Doing a Phrase Search

    +

    A phrase search looks for multiple words in the exact order you type them. You can do a phrase search for bibliographic and item records. When you select Phrase in the Type box and type a phrase in the For box, the search looks in all indexed fields for that phrase in the same word order. You can also narrow the search to look for the phrase in specific fields. Phrase searching is not available for all access points. For example, if you are searching for a bibliographic record and select Call number in the Search by box, phrase searching is not available in the Type box.

    +

    To do a phrase search:

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool, General tabbed page, select Bibliographic Records or Item Records in the Object box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can use wildcards in the beginning, middle, or end of phrase search strings to indicate that other words come before, in the middle, or at the end of the search string.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following access points in the Search by box:
      • All Keyword Indexed Fields
      • Author
      • General notes
      • Genre
      • Series
      • Subject
      • Title
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Phrase in the Type box.
    2. +
    3. Type the phrase in the For box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    A list of suggestions may appear as you type. See Automatic Suggestions in Keyword or Phrase Searching.

    +
      +
    1. If automatic suggestions appear, and one of the suggestions is the phrase you want to search by, select it. The results appear as soon as you select an automatic suggestion.
    2. +
    3. If no automatic suggestions appear, or they are not useful, continue typing the entire phrase, and click Search. Titles appear in the results list.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Finding_Polaris_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Finding_Polaris_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ca36851 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Finding_Polaris_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Finding Polaris Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Finding Polaris Records

    +

    You use the Polaris Find Tool to search for existing records in your local database and to perform actions with these records without having to open them. You can use the Find Tool to do a basic search, or you can use various options to focus your search more precisely. If your library has established connections to other remote databases, you can also use the Polaris Find Tool to search these databases.

    +

    Note: +
    For information about searching for Polaris Administration records, such as libraries, branches, staff members or workstations, see Find an administration record. For information about searching for permissions, see Finding Permissions.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Get_a_count_of_records_without_displaying_them.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Get_a_count_of_records_without_displaying_them.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64e3b99b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Get_a_count_of_records_without_displaying_them.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Get a count of records without displaying them + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Get a Count of Records Without Displaying Them

    +

    You can use the Count only option with any type of search, including an SQL search. To search for specific types of records and get a count of the records without displaying them in a list:

    +
      +
    1. Enter your search criteria on the Find Tool- General tab.
    2. +
    3. Select Count only.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you want to add the records to a record set, go to the Settings tab and enter the information for the record set before clicking Search.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search. A count of the records appears in the status line of the Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    + FTcountonly.gif 

    +
    +

    Note:
    When you select Count only, the Retrieval Limit on the Settings tab is ignored so that the count includes all records that meet the selected criteria, but the Search timeout setting is still in effect.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Link_to_other_records_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Link_to_other_records_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b40f22ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Link_to_other_records_from_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Link to other records from the Find Tool results list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link to Other Records from the Find Tool Results List

    +

    You can link from a record listed in the Find Tool results to other related records. For example, you can link from a bibliographic record listed in the results to its linked item record or records. To link to other records from the Find Tool results list:

    +
      +
    1. Search for a record. The records that meet the criteria you specified appear in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    Press the up or down arrow keys to locate the record, and press SHIFT+F10 to open the context menu. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the context menu options, and press ENTER to select an option. For more keyboard shortcuts, see Basic Shortcut Keys.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Right-click the record from which you want to link to other related records, and select Links. The types of records to which this record could be linked are listed.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    You can sort the list of linked records by clicking on the headers in the dialog box. If you print the list, it will be printed in the order in which you sorted it.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the type of record.
    2. +
    +

    If only one record of the selected type is linked, it opens in the appropriate workform. If multiple records are linked to the selected record in the Find Tool results list, they appear in a Linked Records dialog box. You can right-click on the linked records and perform certain actions from the context menu.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Polaris_Find_Tool_Overview.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Polaris_Find_Tool_Overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4103ff7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Polaris_Find_Tool_Overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Find Tool Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Find Tool Overview

    +

    With over 600 access points as well as relevancy ranking, sorting, limiting, proximity searching, CCL queries, scoping, SQL searches, and automatic suggestions, the Polaris Find Tool provides search options for all types of tasks. You can save user defaults for the types of searches you do most often.

    +

    The “count only” option gives you a simple count, such as the number of DVDs in a certain collection, without returning the search result list. You can add records to a record set from a “count only” search without returning the records in a the results list, or you can select the records from the results list and put them in a record set.

    +

    Your library can set up Z39.50 targets for external databases that you can search directly from the Find Tool - allowing you to save new records to the local database in one step.

    +

    If you have the required permissions, you can create and save a SQL search in the Polaris Find Tool. SQL searches are used for data retrieval only; data cannot be manipulated through the Find Tool. Once a SQL query is saved, other staff members can use the saved search even if they do not have permission to create and save one.

    +

    In addition to the many methods and access points available for searching in the Find Tool, you can perform tasks on single or multiple records listed in search results, provided you have the required permissions. If you select a single record, you can select Links to access the linked records. From the bibliographic search results, you can select Preview to see the titles’ circulation statistics. Other options include checking in multiple serial issues and bulk-changing multiple item records.

    +

    You can also use the Polaris Find Tool to create quick reports from the search results list. For example, if the library needs to see a list of items in a certain collection that have not circulated in the last three years, you can create a report in the Find Tool by printing the results list.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Find Tool Tab Display

    +

    When you search for bibliographic or item records, all the Find Tool tabs are displayed: General, Settings, Scoping, Branches, Collections, and Databases.

    +

    All tabs are also displayed when you search for an object that has bibliographic or item records in the Object list. For example, when you search for Community Records, Bibliographic Records or Item Records can be selected in the Object list.

    +

    However, if the tab cannot be used in the context of the search, a message appears on the tab. For example, if you are searching for a bibliographic record using a Browse search type, and you select the Scoping tab, the message Scoping is not applicable in this context appears.

    +

    For most other records (objects), such as Acquisitions, Serials, and Patron records, only the General and Settings tabs are displayed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Resolving_Find_Tool_Search_Issues.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Resolving_Find_Tool_Search_Issues.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1c61565 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Resolving_Find_Tool_Search_Issues.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Customize the Find Tool by user + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolving Find Tool Search Issues

    +

    If you enter the search criteria and the results do not appear or are fewer than expected, try the following:

    +
      +
    • On the Settings tab, increase the number in the Retrieval Limit box. This resets the retrieval limit for the current search only. If you select New Search, the retrieval limit reverts to the default set in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Select the Count only check box with the same search criteria selected. This will give you the actual count of all the records that meet your search criteria, regardless of the number in the Retrieval Limit box.
    • +
    +
      +
    • On the Settings tab, increase the number in the Search Timeout (sec) box.
    • +
    +
      +
    • If you enter the search criteria, and you encounter a CCL Syntax error that states, Invalid Search. Please verify the query and then resubmit the search., you can enter the primary search criteria on the General tab and then use the Scoping tab to refine the search. For example, the Invalid Search message appears if you select Type of material in the Limit by box and select all values except for Book. In this case, the Limit by option is being used to exclude the Book type of material, but include all other values.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Instead of using the Limit by option to exclude a specific type of material, you could enter the primary search criteria, on the General tab, then go to the Scoping tab to exclude the book format. The search results display the bibliographic records with that title in every format except book.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Scoping_Searches_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Scoping_Searches_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b50b88d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Scoping_Searches_for_Bibs_and_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + + + Scoping Searches for Bibs and Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Scoping Searches for Bibs and Items

    +

    Scoping is a method of further focusing your search beyond the basic search expression. Scoping, like power searching, allows you to conduct complex, precise searches with the Common Command Language (CCL). However, power searching requires you to know CCL and write your own queries. With scoping, you select the access points (qualifiers), operators, and search strings (values), and Polaris formats the information into CCL. You can use scoping with exact match, keyword, and phrase searches for bibliographic and item records.

    +

    To do a complex, precise search by scoping:

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool - General tabbed page, fill in the Object, Search by, Type, and For boxes (see Doing a Basic Search).
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Scoping tab to display the Scoping tabbed page. The search expression you created on the General tabbed page appears in the Current Criteria box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Choose one of the following Boolean operators (see Boolean Operators):
      • If the search results must match both search expressions, click And.
      • If the search results can match either search expression, click Or.
      • If the search results must match the first search expression, but not the second one, click Not.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select an access point or modifier in the Qualifier box.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following relative operators:
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can choose [=] or [<>] for all the qualifiers.
    You can choose the following relative operators for the Publication date only: [<], [<=], [>], or [>=].

    +
      +
    • Click [=] for results equal to the value.
    • +
    • Click [<>] for results not equal to (excluding) the value.
    • +
    • Click [<] for publication dates less than the value.
    • +
    • Click [<=] for publication dates less than or equal to the value.
    • +
    • Click [>] for publication dates greater than the value.
    • +
    • Click [>=] for publication dates greater than or equal to the value.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select or type a value for the query in the Value box. For additional information, see:
    2. +
    + +
      +
    1. Click Add to add the search expression to the Current Criteria box. If the search expression is longer than the width of the Current Criteria box, a horizontal scroll bar is displayed. The status bar displays SC to indicate scoping is in effect.
    2. +
    3. To add another search expression, do these steps:
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    The original search expression, created on the General page, can be modified on the General page.

    +
    +
      +
    1. In the Current Criteria box, select the expression which you want to precede the new expression.
    2. +
    3. Select a Boolean operator, qualifier, relative operator, and value.
    4. +
    5. Click Add to add the search expression to the Current Criteria box.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    To remove a search expression created on the Scoping page, select it in the Current Criteria box and click Remove. To delete all the search expressions, except for the expression that you created on the General tabbed page, click Clear.

    +
      +
    1. To edit a search expression created on the scoping page, do these steps:
      1. Select the search expression in the Current Criteria box.
      2. Change the operators, qualifier, or values.
      3. Click Update to update the search expression in the Current Criteria box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Search to begin searching. The results list appears.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_by_keyword.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_by_keyword.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f72b4f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_by_keyword.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search by keyword + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search by Keyword

    +

    To find records using keyword searching:

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool, General tabbed page, select the record type that uses keyword searching in the Object box.
    2. +
    3. Select an access point for which you can use keyword searching in the Search by box:
    4. +
    5. Select Keyword search in the Type box.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can type part of a word and use a wildcard character. For example, if you type King* for a keyword author search, then the results list includes works by authors named King, Kings, Kingsley, and others. You can also use wildcards in the beginning of a word to indicate that something may come before it. See Using Wildcard Characters in Searches.

    +
      +
    1. Type one or more keywords, in any order, in the For box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Automatic suggestions may appear as you type. See Automatic Suggestions in Keyword or Phrase Searching.

    +
      +
    1. If automatic suggestions appear, and one is the search term you want to use, select it. The results appear as soon as you select an automatic suggestion.
    2. +
    3. If no automatic suggestions appear, or they are not useful, click Search to begin searching. Titles appear in the results list.
    4. +
    +

    + keywordspanish.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_for_a_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_for_a_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0f6f7f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_for_a_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search for a record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search for a Record

    +

    To do a simple search for records:

    +

    Note: +
    If you encounter any issues with your search, see Resolving Find Tool Search Issues.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool using one of these methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Select a menu option from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click Find on a workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you are searching for a bibliographic record, press F12.

      +
    • +
    +

    The General tabbed page of the Find Tool appears.

    +
      +
    1. If the object selected is not what you wanted to search for, select the record type to search for in the Object box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To quickly locate an item in a list box, type the first letter. For example, to search by genre, open the Search by list and press G.

    +
      +
    1. Select the access point to search by in the Search by box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select a date option in the Search by box (for example, you are searching for serial issues and select Expected arrival date), the Find Tool displays date range boxes where you select the beginning and ending dates from a calendar.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of search in the Type box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you have selected an access point and a search type, but then decide to change the access point, the search type is retained. For example, if the search type is Keyword and the access point is Author, you can switch the access point to Title and the search type will be retained because both access points can be used with keyword searching.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to sort the results before they appear in the list, select an option in the Sort by box.
    2. +
    3. Type a search string in the For box.
    4. +
    +

    If you have entered a search string but decide to search for a different object, you can switch the object while retaining the same search string.

    +

    Example:
    You search for bibliographic records by author and then you want to search for item records with the same author. You can select Item Records in the Object box and the author’s name remains in the For box.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to narrow your search, select an option in the Limit by box, and select or type a value in the Value box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Value box lists options for some Limit by settings, while other settings require a text entry in the Value box. For example, if you select Language in the Limit by box, the Value box contains a list of languages. If you select Author in the Limit by box, you type the author’s name in the Value box. If you enter a portion of a Limit by value, you must enter an asterisk. For example, select Author in the Limit by box and enter Kin* in the Value box to display works by authors named King, Kings, Kingsley, and others. See Limit By.

    +

    Tip:
    The results list automatically clears when you start another search. You can also click New Search to close the results list, return the Find Tool to its default settings, and clear the For box.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search or press ENTER. If you want to cancel the search, click Stop or start a new search with a different query. The results list appears in the Find Tool window.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you see the message Could not connect to the Z3950 search engine, try increasing the search timeout limit. Select the Settings tab, and type a larger number in the Search Timeout (sec.) box. For example, if the timeout is set to 30 seconds, increase it to 60 seconds. The search process continues for 60 seconds, if necessary.

    +

    Tip:
    Check the status line to see if all results are displayed. If not, you can press CTRL+SHIFT+A to return all results.
    To sort the list after the results appear, you can click on the column headers.

    +
      +
    1. To work with a record in the results list, do one of the following actions:
    2. +
    + +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_using_a_saved_SQL_search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_using_a_saved_SQL_search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c851866f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Search_using_a_saved_SQL_search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search using a saved SQL search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search Using a Saved SQL Search

    +

    To use a saved SQL search:

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of record you want to search for in the Object box on the General tab of the Find Tool.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can save the SQL search mode as the default search mode setting. See Customize the Find Tool by user.

    +
      +
    1. Select SQL. The SQL Search Criteria box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + sqlsrchblk00004.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the saved search in the Open box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The saved SQL searches listed in the Open box are those associated with the selected record (object).

    +

    The saved SQL search appears in the Search Criteria box.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you have permission, you can edit a saved search, and click Save As... to rename it. See Special Permissions for SQL Searches in the Find Tool.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Branches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Branches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24983a68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Branches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Searching Branches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Searching Branches

    +

    When you are searching for bibliographic and item records, you can choose which branches you want Polaris to search, as well as which collections to search within each branch. The Find Tool’s Branches tabbed page lists all the assigned branches, along with their collections, in your library system. Searches for bibliographic records by branch or collection return results based on the linked item records. If the bibliographic record is not linked to any item records with that assigned branch, it does not appear in the results list on the Branches tab. If the bibliographic record is not linked to any item records with that collection, it does not appear in the results list on the Collections tab. Bibliographic records without linked item records do not appear in the results list.

    +

    Important:
    Search results, except for bibliographic titles and call number browse searches, may be filtered so the results list includes only those results that you have permission to access. If the Staff Client profile Find Tool: Filter search results by permission is set to Yes, you will see only those records for which you have Access permission. For more information about setting permissions in Polaris, see Setting Administration Permissions

    +

    Tip:

    If you want to find bibliographic records owned by a certain branch but with no linked item records, do a Scoping search instead of a Branch search. A branch search looks for bibliographic records with linked items assigned to the branch. If no items are linked, the bibliographic record is not found.

    +

    To search for bibliographic and item records by branch and by collection associated with each branch:

    +

    Note:

    You can search by branches only in normal search mode.

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool - General tabbed page, fill in the Object, Search by, Type, and For boxes (see Doing a Basic Search).
    2. +
    3. Click the Branches tab to display the Branches tabbed page.
    4. +
    +

    By default, all branches and collections are selected.

    +

    Tip:

    To search all branches, click Select All.

    +
      +
    1. Click Unselect All to clear the check boxes for all branches and collections.The status bar displays BR to indicate that you are searching by branch.
    2. +
    3. If you want to search all the collections in a branch, select the check box next to each branch to be searched.
    4. +
    5. If you want to search by particular collections in a branch, follow these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the plus sign [+] next to the branch. The plus sign is replaced by a minus sign [-]. All the collections for the branch appear.
    2. +
    3. Select the check box next to each collection you want to search. The check box next to the branch is grayed out to indicate that one or more collections are not to be searched within the branch.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:

    To start a new search, click New Search. The General tabbed page appears. To reset the list, click Reset.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to begin the search. The results list appears.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    When searching by branch and collection, you can also use other searching features. See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Collections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Collections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c9ccf74a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Collections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Searching Collections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Searching Collections

    +

    You can search for item records or bibliographic records by collection, but when you search for bibliographic records by collection, the search is actually looking for the linked item records with the selected collection. If the bibliographic record has no linked items in that collection, the bibliographic record is not included in the results. The Find Tool’s Collections tabbed page lists all the assigned collections in the system, along with their associated branches. You can search by collection and by the branches that share the collection.

    +

    To search for bibliographic and item records by collection and by branch:

    +

    Note:

    You can search using collections only in normal search mode.

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool - General tabbed page, fill in the Object, Search by, Type, and For boxes (see Doing a Basic Search).
    2. +
    +

    Tip:

    If you search for bibliographic records by collection, the search looks for bibliographic records linked to item records in that collection. Bibliographic records that are not linked to item records do not appear in the results list.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Collections tab to display the Collections tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    By default, all collections and the branches that use each collection are selected.

    +

    Tip:

    To search all collections, click Select All.

    +
      +
    1. Click Unselect All to clear the check boxes for all collections and their branches. The status bar displays CO to indicate that you are searching by collection.
    2. +
    3. If you want to search all the branches that use a collection, select the check box next to each collection to be searched.
    4. +
    5. If you want to search by particular branches associated with a collection, follow these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the plus sign [+] next to the collection. The plus sign is replaced by a minus sign [-]. All the branches for the collection appear.
    2. +
    3. Select the check box next to each branch you want to search. The check box next to the collection is grayed out to indicate that one or more branches that use the collection are not to be searched.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:

    To start a new search, click New Search. The General tabbed page appears. To reset the list, click Reset.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to begin the search. The results list appears.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    When searching by branch and collection, you can also use other searching features. See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Remote_Databases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Remote_Databases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03e09f3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Searching_Remote_Databases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Searching Remote Databases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Searching Remote Databases

    +

    When you are searching for bibliographic records, you may be able to search remote sites using Z39.50 standard search protocol. If you have a subscription to Polaris ZMARC, the Polaris ZMARC databases appear in the list of databases. You can choose to search the local Polaris database simultaneously along with one or more remote databases.

    +

    Z39.50 searching depends on standard Bib-1 Use attributes for search access points. If a standard Bib-1 Use attribute has not been defined for a search access point, Polaris relies on proprietary Bib-1 Use attributes. (Bib-1 Use attributes between 5,000 and 10,000 are reserved for these proprietary attributes). These non-standard search access points may not work with Z39.50 target sites. For example, the UPC barcode does not have a standard Bib-1 Use attribute. If you search bibliographic records at a Z39.50 target site for the UPC barcode number, setting the Search by field to UPC number in the Polaris Find Tool, the search will likely fail. However, if you search for the UPC barcode number by Other system number (a standard access point), you will likely find the title. For a list of standard and proprietary Bib-1 Use Attributes, see Bib-1 Use Attributes in Polaris Searches.

    +

    Note:
    Before you are able to search a remote database, it must be registered as a Z39.50 target and set to display in the Find Tool. See Registering Remote Resource Servers and Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client.

    +

    To search for records in multiple and remote databases:

    +

    Note:
    You can search remote databases in normal and power search modes.

    +
      +
    1. On the Find Tool - General tabbed page, fill in the Object, Search by, Type, and For boxes on the General tabbed page (see Doing a Basic Search).
    2. +
    3. Click the Databases tab.
    4. +

      + iExDatabases.gif 

      +

      If you have saved default search databases, they are selected on the Databases tab. If you have not saved default search databases, your Polaris database is selected by default. For more information about saving default search databases, see Customize the Find Tool.

      +
    5. Select the databases to be searched:
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    Click the minus (-) sign next to a site to display only the site, without its associated databases. Click the plus (+) sign next to a site to display the site’s associated databases.

    +
      +
    • To select the Polaris databases and all remote sites’ databases, click Select All.
    • +
    • To select one or more sites (including all the listed databases at the sites), select the check box next to each site.
    • +
    • To select one or more databases at a site, select the check box next to each database that you want to search. The check box next to the site is automatically selected, but it is also dimmed to indicate that one or more databases at the site are not selected.
    • +
    +

    The status bar displays DB to indicate that you are searching by database.

    +

    Tip:
    To start a new search, click New search. The General tabbed page appears.
    To reset the list, click Reset.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search to begin searching.
    2. +
    +

    The database results list appears with a count of the records found. If you searched multiple databases, the records from each database are displayed in separate result sets.

    +

    + databaseresults.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click a database to display its results. A dialog box displays the list of records for the selected database.
    2. +
    3. Double-click a record in the list to open it in a Polaris workform.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Send_search_results_to_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Send_search_results_to_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99a0eab0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Send_search_results_to_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Send search results to a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Send Search Results to a Record Set

    +

    Sending search results to a record set is useful if there is some action you want to take on the records. For example, you could search for bibliographic records that do not display in the PAC, send the search results to a record set, and then bulk change the Display in PAC setting for all the records at once. For more information on the types of records that support record sets, see Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +

    Tip:
    If your search is likely to return more records than the number in the Retrieval Limit box on the Settings tab, you may want to select Count only or increase the retrieval limit. When you select Count only, the retrieval limit is ignored, and it counts all the records. A warning message appears if the record set that will be created exceeds the limits set in Polaris Administration.

    +

    To put search results into a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Enter the search criteria for the records on the Find Tool-General tabbed page.
    2. +
    3. If you want the records to be sent to the record set without displaying them, select Count only.
    4. +
    5. Select the Settings tab. The Settings tabbed page appears.
    6. +
    7. Select Send Results to a New Record Set.
    8. +
    9. Type a name for the record set in the Name box.
    10. +
    11. Select the record set owner in the Owner box.
    12. +
    13. If you want to change the number of records that can be added to a record set before a warning message appears, type a different number in the Warning Size Threshold box. For example, if you want a warning message to appear only when five thousand or more records are about to be added to the record set, type 5000.
    14. +
    +

    Tip:
    The default threshold is set in Polaris Administration using the Staff Client profile Find Tool/record-set-to-record-set creation: Record set size warning threshold. It applies to record sets created from the Find Tool and record sets created from other record sets. See Set Find Tool defaults. 

    +
      +
    1. Click Search. A message asks if you want to open the record set.
    2. +
    3. Select Yes to open the record set in the record set workform, or No to return to the Find Tool results list. You can search for the record set and open it later.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    For information on other methods for creating record sets, adding records to existing record sets, and using record sets, see Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Set_Find_Tool_results_limits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Set_Find_Tool_results_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d3bfb8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Set_Find_Tool_results_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Find Tool results limits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Find Tool Results Limits

    +

    The greater the number of records retrieved and displayed in the results list, the slower the retrieval time. To ensure optimal performance, a default retrieval limit is set in Polaris Administration, but you can change the limit for a specific search. You can also increase the amount of time the system will search before timing out. For information on Find Tool error messages and how you can resolve them, see Resolving Find Tool Search Issues.

    +

    Note:
    For more information on the Find Tool profiles in Polaris Administration, see Setting Find Tool Profiles.

    +

    To specify how you want retrieval results to be handled:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Create your search query, but do not click Search yet.
    4. +
    5. Select the Settings tab.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    These settings remain in effect until you click New search or close the Find Tool. Changing the settings here does not affect the default settings in Polaris Administration. You can restore the default settings by clicking Reset to Default.

    +

    The Settings tab appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to create a record set from the results, check Send Results to a New Record Set. See Create a record set from all the Find Tool results.
    2. +
    3. If you want to change the default settings, do the following:
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the number of records returned in a search is equal to the retrieval limit, increase the retrieval limit to make sure all records that meet your search criteria are retrieved.

    +
      +
    • +

      Type a different number to change the number of records that are retrieved in the Retrieval Limit box. The default limit is set in Polaris Administration with the profile Find Tool: Default number of records to return in a result set. See Set Find Tool Defaults. To set the retrieval limit back to the default, click Reset to Default.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type a different number in the Search Timeout (sec) to increase or decrease the amount of time (in seconds) that the system will search before timing out. The default is 30 seconds.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you want Polaris to sort records, you must select a Sort by option on the Find Tool’s General page.

    +

    +

      +
    • Check or clear the Use Initial Articles Table check box. If this box is checked, the initial article in a title is ignored if that article is defined in the Initial Articles table (see Defining Leading Articles).
    • +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_A_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_A_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9de7486 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_A_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + + + + + Doing a Basic Search + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up a Search

    +

    A search query is a structured request for database information. The simplest query uses default settings, and you simply type a word or phrase to describe the records. This word or phrase might be, for example, a full or partial title, the last name of an author, a patron’s name, or a purchase order number.

    +

    A standard search query on the Find Tool requires the following four criteria:

    +
      +
    • Record (Object)
    • +
    • Access point (Search by)
    • +
    • Type of search (Type)
    • +
    • Search string (For)
    • +
    +

    You can also narrow your search by selecting an option in the Limit by box, and then a value in the Value box. To sort the results before they are returned, select an option in the Sort by box. The options in the Limit by and Sort by boxes depend on the type of record you selected in the Object box.

    +

    Record (Object)

    +

    The record types that you can select in the Object box depend on the menu option, workform, or field where you accessed the Find Tool. For example, in a Purchase Order workform, if you click Find in the Supplier field, the Find Tool opens with Supplier in the Object box. When you open the Find Tool from the Funds field, Fund is selected in the Object box.

    +

    Access Point (Search by)

    +

    You select the access point in the Search by box. The list of access points depends on the record type you selected in the Object box. For example, access points for bibliographic records include Title, Author, and Subject (among others). You can set your own default Search by access point for each record type. Then, whenever you log on with your user ID and search for a record using the Find Tool, the Search by option is automatically set for the record type. See Customize the Find Tool by user. You can set the option back to the system default at any time.

    +

    Search Type

    +

    The available search types depend on your selections in the Object box and the Search by box.

    +

    Tip:
    When you do a title search, Polaris checks fields in the bibliographic record indexed for title searching, such as the 245, 246, 440, and 740 tags.

    +
      +
    • Exact match (implicitly truncated) - Displays all the records beginning with the letters or numbers in the For box. No asterisk is needed after the term in this type of search. However, you may want to enter an asterisk before the search term. See Using Wildcard Characters in Searches.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    Type energy in the For box for a bibliographic title search. The results list includes all titles that begin with energy.

    +
      +
    • Exact match (explicitly truncated) - Displays only the records that exactly match the letters or numbers in the For box. If you use an asterisk, the Results list displays the same records as those of an implicitly truncated search.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    Type energy in the For box for a bibliographic title search. The results list includes only items titled energy.
    If you type energy*, the results are the same as for an implicit search of energy.

    +
      +
    • Browse - Display the specified index headings, beginning with entries that start with text similar to the text in the For box. For example, a browse title search for trains displays the portion of the title index containing the first title that starts with trains. Browse searching is Unicode-compliant, so you can enter diacritics or special characters and the headings display that begin with the characters. See Doing a Browse Search.
    • +
    • Keyword search - Finds records that include the exact search term or terms you input, in any order. There is an implied and between multiple words. For example, a keyword title search for trains displays a list of items that have the word trains anywhere in the title. See Doing a Keyword Search.
    • +
    • Phrase search - A special kind of keyword search for multiple words in the exact order in which you entered them. See Doing a Phrase Search.
    • +
    +

    Sort By

    +

    Tip:
    The Sort by option is not available for browse searching.

    +

    If you want search results to display in a specific order, you can select an option in the Sort by box. The sort option can be part of your user default settings when you are searching for a specific type of record. For information on setting a user default search, see Customize the Find Tool by user.

    +

    The available options in the Sort by box depend on the record. For example, if you are searching for a bibliographic record, you can select from the following sort options:

    +
      +
    • Author
    • +
    • Author, the Publication Date
    • +
    • Author, then Title +
    • +
    • Call Number +
    • +
    • Call Number, then Author +
    • +
    • Call Number, then Publication Date +
    • +
    • Call Number, then Title +
    • +
    • Control Number +
    • +
    • Most Popular +
    • +
    • Publication Date +
    • +
    • Publication Date, then Author +
    • +
    • Publication Date, then Relevance +
    • +
    • Publication Date, then Title +
    • +
    • Relevance +
    • +
    • Title +
    • +
    • Title, then Author +
    • +
    • Title, then Author, then Type of Material +
    • +
    • Title, then Publication Date +
    • +
    • Title, then Type of Material +
    • +
    • Type of Material +
    • +
    +

    Search String (For)

    +

    You specify the search string in the For box by typing one or more characters. Polaris ignores letter case, multiple spaces, and all punctuation (except quotation marks) entered in the For box. The search does consider special characters and diacritics. Consider the following when entering text in the For box:

    +

    Initial articles

    +

    If the Use Initial Articles Table check box is checked on the Settings tab, the initial article in a title is ignored or “stripped out” if that article is defined in the Defining Leading Articles).

    +

    Example:
    Searching for The Great Gatsby yields the same results as searching for Great Gatsby.

    +

    The check box is used when the search type is Exact match (either implicitly or explicitly truncated), and you are searching for the following records:

    +
      +
    • Authority Records (Heading, Tracing/Reference)
    • +
    • Bibliographic Records (Title and Series)
    • +
    • Check In Records (Title)
    • +
    • Claims (Title) (both for Acquisitions and Serial versions)
    • +
    • Course Reserve Records (Title)
    • +
    • Hold Requests (Title)
    • +
    • ILL Requests (Title)
    • +
    • Invoice Line Items (Title)
    • +
    • Issue Records (Title)
    • +
    • Item Records (Title and Series)
    • +
    • Part Records (Title)
    • +
    • Purchase Order Line Items (Title)
    • +
    • Reserve Item Records (Title)
    • +
    • Route Lists (Title)
    • +
    • Selection List Line Items (Title)
    • +
    • Serial Holdings Records (Title)
    • +
    • Subscription Records (Title)
    • +
    +

    Reusing a search string

    +

    All the search strings you type in the For box are retained during a Polaris session. To use a search string for another search, select the string in the For box.

    +

    Using an implicitly truncated search - A title search for “bulletin” could be done using the following string: bulle.

    +

    Note:
    If you can use an ampersand (&) in a search string for phrase and keyword searching, it is equivalent to the word and. The ampersand and the word and are not interchangeable for exact match or browse searching.

    +

    Using Wildcard Characters in Searches

    +

    Wildcard characters are the special characters asterisk * or question mark ?, which you can use in a search to represent the rest of the word in keyword and exact match - implicitly truncated searches. A wildcard character is not necessary after the search term in an exact match - implicitly truncated search because the truncation is implied. However, you may want to enter an asterisk before your search term if you are not sure if something comes before the search term.

    +

    Examples:
    Keyword searching - The entry King* for a keyword author search yields results such as King, Kingsley, and Kingford. The entry *King* for a keyword author search yields results such as Talking Heads, Dykinga, and Polkinghorne.

    +

    Exact match (implicitly truncated) -The entry material for a selection list line item notes search gets no search results. However *material finds the selection list line item that has the note: This is printed music, but the material type is set to 28 Youth. The search finds the results because it looks for material anywhere in the note.

    +

    Limit By

    +

    Tip:
    The Limit by option is not available in Browse searches.

    +

    You can limit your search to narrow the results. For example, you can search for a title and limit the format to DVD. Some Limit by options have pre-set selections in the Value box. For example, if you select Language, a list of languages appears in the Value box. But, if you select Author, you type the author’s name in the Value box. You must be precise when you enter free text in the Value box because there is no implicit truncation. When you enter only a part of the value you want to limit by, you must also enter an asterisk.

    +

    Example:
    If you are searching for item records by title, and you limit by Current borrower, type the patron’s name in the Value box in these formats:

    last name*

    last name, first name*

    last name, first name middle name

    You must include the comma and the wildcard character as shown. The last name alone will not work in the Value box.

    +

    The specific languages listed in the Value box are set in the MARC Language Scoping Display policy table. This list is used if the Staff Client profile Find tool: Use language scoping display is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. See Setting Language Display

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_SQL_Searches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_SQL_Searches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a58e7433 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Setting_Up_SQL_Searches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up SQL Searches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up SQL Searches

    +

    You can do a search for records using Structured Query Language (SQL). SQL is a computer language used to create, modify, retrieve and manipulate data from relational database management systems, such as Polaris. In the Polaris Find Tool, SQL is used for data retrieval only. You cannot manipulate data in the Polaris database through SQL searching.

    +

    To use all the options for SQL searching in the Find Tool, you must have permissions set in Polaris Administration. Separate permissions are required for accessing the SQL searching mode and saving search strings to the database. See Special Permissions for SQL Searches in the Find Tool.

    +

    Tip:
    You can save text, even if it is not a legitimate SQL search, as a rough SQL template that users can use as a basis for searching. They can edit the search in the Search Criteria box without saving the changes to the template.

    +

    In the Polaris Find Tool, the SQL query must use the following structure: SELECT Column From Table Where Limit criteria. The column name must match the column name in the database.

    +

    Examples:

    To find item records without an assigned collection, type: SELECT ItemRecordID FROM CircItemRecords WHERE AssignedCollectionID IS NULL

    To find item records with no statistical code, type:SELECT ItemRecordID FROM CircItemRecords WHERE StatisticalCodeID IS NULL

    To find item records with the circulation status of Lost, type:SELECT ItemRecordID FROM CircItemRecords WHERE ItemStatusID = 7

    To find item records that have a temporary shelf location, type:SELECT ItemRecordID FROM ItemRecordDetails WHERE TemporaryShelfLocation IS not NULL

    To find patron records where the registration expiration date is before or equal to October 31, 2009, type:SELECT PatronID from PatronRegistration WHERE ExpirationDate <= '10/31/09'


    +

    The SELECT command retrieves zero or more rows from one or more tables in a database. Commonly available keywords related to SELECT include:

    +
      +
    • +

      FROM - Indicates the tables from which the data is to be taken, as well as how the tables join to each other.

      +
    • +
    • +

      WHERE - Identifies which rows to retrieve, or applied to GROUP BY.

      +
    • +
    • +

      GROUP BY - Combines rows with related values into elements of a smaller set of rows.

      +
    • +
    • +

      HAVING - Identifies which of the “combined rows” are to be retrieved. HAVING acts much like WHERE, but it operates on the results of the GROUP BY function.

      +
    • +
    • +

      ORDER BY - Identifies which columns are used to sort the resulting data.

      +
    • +
    +

    When the search results are displayed, you can print the results for a quick report. See Print search results from the Find Tool.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Use_the_context_menu_in_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Use_the_context_menu_in_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f40abe8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Use_the_context_menu_in_the_Find_Tool_results_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + + + Use the context menu in the Find Tool results list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Perform Actions on Records in the Find Tool Results List

    +

    To perform actions on records from the Find Tool results list without opening the records:

    +
      +
    1. Search for the record or records using the Find Tool. The records are displayed in the results list.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Press the up or down arrow keys to locate the record, and press SHIFT+F10 to open the context menu. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the context menu options, and press ENTER to select an option. For more keyboard shortcuts, see Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +
      +
    1. Select the record and right-click to display the context menu. The following options may be available depending on the record type:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Not all options are available for all types of records, and some options are available only for specific records. For example, you can check in serial issues from the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    • +

      Open - Opens the record in the appropriate workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Place Hold - Place a hold request for the title or item.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Preview - See the brief bibliographic display, circulation statistics, and all the linked item records in one view.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print - Select List View to print the list of items in the results list, or select another option. Some records, such as bibliographic records, can be printed in the full or brief format. See Print search results from the Find Tool.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add to record set - Select one or multiple item, bibliographic, authority, or patron records, and add them to a record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Links - Link to associated records. See Link to other records from the Find Tool results list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete - Select one or multiple records and delete them.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Undelete - Select one or multiple records marked for deletion and undo the delete.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create - Create other linked records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Properties - Display a dialog box with information about the record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add to Purchase Order - This option is available for bibliographic record sets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add to Selection List - This option is available for bibliographic record sets.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Using_Find_Tool_Results_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Using_Find_Tool_Results_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70461fd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIfindrec/Using_Find_Tool_Results_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Find Tool Results Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Find Tool Results Lists

    +

    Once the search results are retrieved, you can scroll through the list to display additional records, or press CTRL+SHIFT+A to automatically retrieve all records. The status bar displays Done and indicates the number of records retrieved.

    +

    Depending on the Retrieval Limit set in the Find Tool Settings tab, the total number of records retrieved may not equal the number of records in the database that meet the criteria you entered. The default retrieval limit is set in Polaris Administration, but you can change it temporarily if the search is likely to exceed the retrieval limit. See Set Find Tool results limits.

    +

    From the Find Tool results list, you can select records and open them, perform actions on the records by right-clicking and selecting options from the menu, link to other records, send the records to a record set, or print the results list for a quick report.

    +

    Important:
    Search results, except for browse title and browse call number searches, may be filtered so the results list includes only those records that you have permission to access. For more information about setting permissions in Polaris, see Granting Permissions.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Access_Polaris_licenses.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Access_Polaris_licenses.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e968f738 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Access_Polaris_licenses.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Access Polaris licenses available to your library + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View Polaris Licenses Available to Your Library

    +

    To view the licenses available to the library:

    +
      +
    1. Select Help | About Polaris from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The About Polaris window opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select the link next to Application Server in the About Polaris window.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Properties window opens.

    +
      +
    1. In the Polaris Properties window click the Licenses tab.
    2. +
    +

    The available and enabled licenses for the Polaris application are displayed in the window.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Close_all_windows_within_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Close_all_windows_within_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e31d6ece --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Close_all_windows_within_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Close all windows within the Polaris staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Close All Windows Within the Polaris Staff Client

    +

    To close all open windows in the staff client but keep the Polaris staff client open:

    +
      +
    1. Select Windows, Close All from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    A message informs you that any open windows will be closed and asks if you want to continue.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close all windows.
    2. +
    +

    All open Polaris windows close if there are no unsaved records. If there are unsaved records, a message asks if you want to save them.

    +
      +
    1. If unsaved records are open, choose one of the following options:
      • To save the record and exit Polaris, click Yes.
      • To exit Polaris without saving the record, click No.
      • To return to the record’s workform and cancel the exit command, click Cancel.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Encountering_Permission_Blocks.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Encountering_Permission_Blocks.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f360f07a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Encountering_Permission_Blocks.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Encountering Permission Blocks + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Encountering and Overriding Permission Blocks

    +

    If you encounter a message that says you do not have permission to do a certain task in Polaris, you can either cancel the task or ask a supervisor or another staff member to override the permission block. The staff member must have the override profile set to Yes for the subsystem and permission to do the task for which you were blocked. If the record has a specific owner, the supervisor or staff member doing the override must be the record’s owner or have permission to modify organizational-level records. See also Granting Permissions.

    +

    To override a permission block:

    +
      +
    1. Click Override>> on the Polaris Permissions dialog box. The Polaris Permissions dialog box expands.
    2. +
    3. Ask someone with override ability to type her Polaris user name and password in the Name and Password boxes. If the domain is different from the domain that appears, type it in the Domain box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to override the block. You can do the specific task.
    6. +
    +

    Override Profiles

    +

    In the Staff Member workform, the following staff-level profiles determine a staff member’s ability to override permission blocks:

    +

    Acquisitions/Serials profiles -

    +
      +
    • Override acquisitions blocks- If set to Yes, the staff member can override acquisitions permissions blocks
    • +
    • Override serials blocks - If set to Yes, the staff member can override serials permission blocks.
    • +
    +

    Cataloging profile - Override cataloging blocks - If set to Yes, the staff member can override cataloging permission blocks.

    +

    Patron Services profile - Override patron services blocks - If set to Yes, the staff member can override patron services permission blocks.

    +

    Staff client profile - Find Tool: Override SQL search blocks - If set to Yes, the staff member can override Find Tool SQL search blocks.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Exit_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Exit_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c19fd92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Exit_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Exit the Polaris staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Exit the Polaris Staff Client

    +

    This closes all Polaris windows and the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +

    To exit the staff client:

    +

    Note:
    To log off the Polaris staff client, which closes all open windows but keeps the Shortcut Bar displayed, select File > Log Off, or press CTRL+L.

    +

    Tip:
    Press ALT+F to open the File menu, and press X to exit.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Exit from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +

      A message informs you that all open windows will be closed and asks if you want to continue.

      +
    3. Click OK to exit Polaris.
    4. +

      All open Polaris windows and the Polaris Shortcut Bar close if there are no unsaved records. If there are unsaved records, a message asks if you want to save them.

      +
    5. If unsaved records are open, choose one of the following options:
      • To save the record and exit Polaris, click Yes.
      • To exit Polaris without saving the record, click No.
      • To return to the record’s workform and cancel the exit command, click Cancel.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Getting_Started_in_Polaris.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Getting_Started_in_Polaris.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9799f2ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Getting_Started_in_Polaris.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Getting Started in Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Getting Started in Polaris

    +

    See the following topics for information on the features, functionality, and navigation methods found throughout the Polaris staff client application.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Linking_to_Other_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Linking_to_Other_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02146f97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Linking_to_Other_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Linking to Other Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linking to Other Records

    +

    Tip:
    In the Find Tool results list, press the up or down arrow keys to locate the record, and press SHIFT+F10 to open the context menu. Use the arrow keys to navigate through the context menu options, and press ENTER to select an option. For more keyboard shortcuts, see Basic Shortcut Keys.

    +

    Certain Polaris records are linked to other records so that you can easily navigate from one record to another. For example, item records are linked to bibliographic records. To display linked records from an open workform, press ALT+L and type the first letter of the type of record, or select Links, Existing and select the type of record.

    +

    You can also right-click a record listed in Find Tool search results to open the context menu, and then select Links and the type of record. For more information about using the Find Tool, see Finding Polaris Records.

    +

    Tip:
    You can expand the Find Tool results list and list boxes by dragging the bottom right corner of the window, and you can sort the columns by clicking on the column headings.

    +

    If only one record is linked to the record in the workform or in the Find Tool results list, it opens in the appropriate workform. If there are multiple linked records, they are listed in a linked list box.

    +

    In a linked list box, you can click a column heading to sort the list; drag a column border to expand the column; or select a record or records and perform a function. Depending on the type of record, you can select multiple or all records in a linked list box, right-click, and select an action to perform on all the selected records. For example, you can display all the linked item records for a bibliographic record in the Linked Item Records dialog box, and add them all to a record set in one step. For more information about record sets, see Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Polaris Display Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Polaris Display Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68f0e365 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Polaris Display Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Opening and Exiting Polaris + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Display Settings

    +

    The Polaris staff client is displayed according to the computer's screen resolution and magnification settings. For workstations running Windows 7, Windows 8, or Windows 10, you can modify your computers magnification setting from the default Small (100%) to Medium (125%) or Large (150%), and the Polaris UI will reflect these changes. (This is not supported in Terminal Services.) In addition, customers who have large monitors can change the screen resolution to 1024 x 768 or above.

    +

    However, when the resolution is set at 1024 x 768 or below, and you change the magnification from the default Small (100%) to Medium (125%) or Large (150%), some workforms might be partially obscured. If you set the resolution above 1024 x 768, you can increase the magnification above the default (100%) to enlarge the workforms while still fitting them into the screen.

    +

    You can change the default orientation of landscape in the printer dialog, but not in Polaris. This means that you must change the orientation for each record you want to print, since Polaris does not offer bulk printing for records.

    +

    When you log on to Polaris, the settings in effect are determined by the branch with which your user name is associated. In addition, the permissions associated with your logon ID and the workstation determine what Polaris tasks you can do. If you work at multiple branches, you select a branch name at log-on to be sure the settings are appropriate for the branch where you are working.

    +

    For libraries that use a training server, the Polaris Administrator can set an alert message to staff members that they are logging into the training server. Or, the Polaris Administrator can set different workform colors to distinguish the training server from the production server.

    +

    If automatic logon is enabled for the workstation, the logon dialog box is skipped, and you are automatically logged on to the Polaris application using Windows Active Directory.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_a_record_from_a_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_a_record_from_a_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0b5bc64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_a_record_from_a_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print a record from a workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print a Record from a Workform

    +

    To print a record from a workform:

    +

    Note:
    For more information on using the Polaris Find Tool, see Finding Polaris Records.

    +

    Tips: +
    Select the printer portion of the print icon in the toolbar to print the current view. Select the arrow portion of the print icon to display the other print options.

    Press CTRL+P to print the current view of the workform.
    Press CTRL+SHIFT+P to print the list view
    Or,
    Press ALT+F to display the File menu, press P to display the print options, and press one of the following keys (the underlined letters in the print options correspond to the shortcut key):
    C - Prints current view
    L - Prints the list view
    V - Prints all views of the workform

    +
      +
    1. On the workform you want to print, select File > Print from the workform menu bar, and select an option in the list:
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    Additional options may be available depending on the type of record. For example, Route Slip is a print option available from the Serial Issue workform if the issue is on a routing list.

    +
    +
      +
    • Current View - Prints the current view of the workform.
    • +
    • All Views - Prints all views of the workform. These are listed on the workform View menu, and represented by icons on the left side of the workform.
    • +
    • List View - If the workform has a list, the entire list will be printed. Sort the list by selecting a column heading, and the list will be printed in the sort order you selected.
    • +
    • Brief or Full - Some workforms, such as the Bibliographic Record and Community Record workforms, have options to print formatted reports.
    • +
    +
    +

    The Windows Print dialog box opens when workform views are selected. Adobe Reader displays a pdf when Brief or Full is selected. For information on formatting the printout see Printing Records.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris does not offer bulk printing for records.

    +
      +
    1. Select the printer if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    3. Click Print to print the record at the selected printer.
    4. +
    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_search_results_from_the_Find_Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_search_results_from_the_Find_Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..439bce3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_search_results_from_the_Find_Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print search results from the Find Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Search Results from the Find Tool

    +

    To print search results from the Find Tool:

    +

    Tip:
    For information on searching for records in Polaris, see Finding Polaris Records.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of record, and enter your search criteria. The records are displayed in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you want to print a list of all the search results, press CTRL+SHIFT+A to retrieve all records that meet your search criteria before printing the list view. You may also need to increase the number of records that can be retrieved by changing the Retrieval Limit on the Settings tab. See Set Find Tool Results Limits.

    +

    + FTprint.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Print, and select a print option:
    2. +
    +

    Tips:
    Press CTRL+P to print the current view.
    Press CTRL+SHIFT+P to print the list view.

    +
      +
    • +

      Current View - Prints the search criteria on the current tab of the Find Tool and a list of the items displayed in the window.

      +
    • +
    • +

      All Views - Prints the search criteria on all tabs of the Find Tool and a list of the items displayed in the window.

      +
    • +
    • +

      List View - Prints a list of all the results currently retrieved. You can adjust the column widths, or sort the list before printing. If you want to print all the results, press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load all the search results. Also, the Retrieval Limit may need to be increased on the Settings tab.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the print parameters on the print window, and click Print. The Find Tool results are printed or saved in the format you selected.
    2. +
    +

    Printing from List Boxes and Record Sets

    +

    Select File | Print or select specific records in the list box or record set, right-click and select an option from the context menu.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_selected_entries_in_a_workform_list_view.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_selected_entries_in_a_workform_list_view.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7da6c82 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Print_selected_entries_in_a_workform_list_view.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print selected entries in a workform list view + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Selected Entries in a Workform List View

    +

    Workforms with list views offer separate printing options for items in the list views.

    +

    To print one or more records from the list view of a workform:

    +

    Tip:
    To print the entire list view, press CTRL+SHIFT+P.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to locate and open the workform that contains the record you want to print.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    For more information on using the Polaris Find Tool, see Finding Polaris Records.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Display the list view of the workform if it is not already displayed by selecting View > List View.
    2. +
    3. Select the item or items to print.
    4. +
    5. Right-click and click Print, and select a print option.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Tip:
    To print the list view itself, select an item in the list and click the printer portion of the print icon iPrintIcon00002.gif above the list view. If formatted print options are available for the selected item or items, select the arrow portion of the print icon iPrintArrowIcon00003.gif to display the options.

    +
    +

    The Windows Print dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Print. The record is printed at the selected printer.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Printing_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Printing_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab303f88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Printing_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Printing Records

    +

    You can print records in Polaris from the workform, from the Find Tool results list, or from a list box. The available printing options depend on the type of record. When you select a workform view or all views to print, the Print dialog box appears, and you click Print to print the view(s). The view printout contains all the fields in the view, whether the fields contain data or not.

    +

    Because workform view printouts are exact replicas of the view displayed on the screen, they are affected by the workstation’s resolution and magnification settings. By default, the view printout is automatically printed in landscape. See Polaris Display Settings for more information on workstation display settings and Polaris. Some workforms have additional Brief or Full print options. When either of these options are selected, a formatted “report” appears in pdf format in Adobe Reader.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Start_and_log_on_to_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Start_and_log_on_to_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a0d60ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Start_and_log_on_to_the_Polaris_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Start and log on to the Polaris staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Start and Log on to the Polaris Staff Client

    +

     To log on:

    +
      +
    1. Turn on the Polaris staff client computer.
    2. +
    +

    The Windows desktop appears.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the Polaris shortcut icon on the desktop .
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Shortcut Bar and the Polaris Log On dialog box appear.

    +
      +
    1. If your staff client is configured to log on to Polaris using Windows credentials, select Use Windows Authentication; Name, Password, and Domain fields will be unavailable.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you do not want to log on at this time, click Cancel. When you want to log on, select File > Log On.

    +
      +
    1. If your user name is not automatically entered in the Name box, type your user name in the box.
    2. +
    3. Type your password in the Password box.
    4. +
    5. If the domain name is not automatically entered in the Domain box, type the library’s domain name in the box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Your system may be set up so that you do not need to specify a network domain.

    +
      +
    1. If you are logging on to Polaris offline, such as from a bookmobile, select the Work off-line check box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If your library provides the ability to log on as a rotating staff member, the Polaris Log On Branch dialog box appears. Select the branch at which you are working. (The options are determined by Polaris Administration settings. See Permission Strategies.

    +
      +
    1. If the Polaris log on branch dialog box appears, select the branch.
    2. +
    +

    The menu and toolbar options are available on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Your user name is displayed in the title bar to indicate that you have logged on.

    +

    Related Information +

    +

    +

    After you log on, you can use the Shortcut Bar to do the following tasks:

    +

    + +

    Alerts for users logging on to training server - Your system administrator can use the system-level Staff Client profile Client visual alert configuration to set an alert message and/or custom title bar colors, so that users can quickly identify whether they are logging on to a training or production server.

    +

    Overriding permission blocks - Occasionally you may need to ask a supervisor (or anyone with the appropriate override profiles set to Yes) to override a Polaris block and allow the operation to continue.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Menus.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Menus.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fcc9bb9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Menus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Polaris Menus + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Polaris Menus

    +

    +

    Note: +
    Course Reserves, Feature It (Promotions), Community Profiles, EContent Integration, and certain other products each require a separate license. If these products are not licensed, the records associated with the products do not appear in menus, Find Tool Objects lists, or New Record lists. If these products are licensed, the associated records are listed as selections in menus and lists. See View Polaris Licenses Available to Your Library.

    +

    +

    +

    The Polaris Shortcut Bar contains the following menus:

    +

    Note:
    When you select a record type from a subsystem menu, the Polaris Find Tool appears. See Finding Polaris Records.

    +

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c21fa8e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_Polaris_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Polaris Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Polaris Workforms

    +

    In Polaris, the windows where you create, view, and edit records are called workforms. Each workform has its own menu bar and toolbar for performing the tasks related to the record or records displayed in the workform. Some workforms display a single record, such as the Bibliographic Record workform, and you can edit only the data related to that record. Other workforms, such as the Bibliographic Record Set workform, list more than one record and you can perform actions on multiple records from the same workform.

    +

    Workforms have color-coded banners along the left side that correspond to the subsystem. For example, the Bibliographic Record workform has a dark blue banner.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Working with Multiple Workforms

    +

    You can have multiple workforms open simultaneously, and switch from one workform to another by clicking the workform or by pressing ALT+TAB. You can also use the following options on the Window menu:

    +

    Tip:
    To use the key combinations to maximize, minimize, or close multiple workforms, the cursor must be in the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +
    +
      +
    • Cascade - ALT+W+C - Restores minimized Polaris windows to the desktop. Each consecutive window is positioned below and to the right of the previous window.
    • +
    • Minimize All - ALT+W+M - Minimizes all Polaris desktop windows and places each with an icon on the Windows taskbar.
    • +
    • Close All - ALT+W+A - Closes all open Polaris windows. However, the Shortcut Bar remains displayed and available for use.
    • +
    +
    +

    Workform Features

    +

    All Polaris workforms have a menu bar and a tool bar with options to perform tasks on the displayed record, link to other records, create new records, see record properties, and get online help. Many workforms have more than one view, and you change the workform view by selecting an option from the View menu, by clicking an icon on the left banner of the workform, or by pressing CTRL+TAB on the keyboard. The status bar at the bottom of a workform displays information such as The record was saved successfully.

    +

    Workforms contain fields in the form of drop-down list boxes, text boxes, check boxes, date pickers, or other types of controls. For more information on entering dates in Polaris workforms, see Using Date Pickers.

    +

    You can move from one field to another in a workform using the mouse or the TAB key. If you use the TAB key to go to a list box, press the ALT key and the down arrow key to open the list box.

    +

    You can enter or edit data in boxes with a white background; boxes with gray backgrounds are read-only for system-generated information or information that you cannot edit. Bold labels indicate required fields, and the record cannot be saved without information in these fields. If the bottom right corner of the workform has a dotted arrow resize.gif, you can resize the workform by dragging the corner.

    +

    If a workform has a Find button, the Find Tool opens with the appropriate type of record selected. For example, the Title field on the Item Record workform has a Find button that opens the Find Tool with Bibliographic Records selected in the Object box. For more information about the Polaris Find Tool, see Finding Polaris Records.

    +

    Workform Actions

    +

    You can do the following actions on Polaris workforms.

    +
      +
    • Save the displayed record - Select File > Save.
    • +
    • View the record’s properties - Select File > Properties to view the record’s property sheet. See Viewing a Record’s Properties.
    • +
    • Delete the record - Select File > Delete. See Deleting Records.
    • +
    • Create a new record - Select File > New. See Creating New Records in Polaris.
    • +
    • Open another record - Select File > Open. The Find Tool appears with the record type selected. See Finding Polaris Records.
    • +
    • Print the workform - Select File > Print. See Printing Records.
    • +
    • Link to other related records - If the record is linked to other records, you can select the Links menu and select the type of record. If only one record of the selected type is linked to the record, the record opens in its workform. If multiple records of the selected type are linked to the record, the linked records are displayed in a list box. See Linking to Other Records.
    • +
    • Get help with Polaris - Select Help, press F1, or click helpbtn.gif.
    • +
    • View the record’s properties - Select File > Properties. See Viewing a Record’s Properties.
    • +
    • Minimize the workform - Click minimize.gif.
    • +
    • Maximize the workform - Click maximize.gif
    • +
    • Close a workform - Select File > Close.
    • +
    +

    Using Date Pickers

    +

    To open the calendar, click the down arrow next to a date box. The default date selected in the calendar is today’s date, which is displayed in the bottom of the calendar. Select a different date in the same month, or move to the previous or next month by clicking the right or left arrows at the top of the calendar.

    +

    To go to a date in a different month, click on the date at the top of the calendar to display months of the year, and select a different month. To go to the previous or next year, click the arrows at the top of the calendar.

    +

    To select a different year, click the year at the top of the calendar. The calendar changes to display the years in the current decade. Select a different year. To go to the next or previous decade, use the left and right arrows at the top of the calendar.

    +

    To select a different decade, click the decade at the top of the calendar. The calendar changes to display decades. Select a different decade.

    +

    Date Picker Keyboard Shortcuts +

    +

    You can use the following keys to select dates in the date picker calendar control.

    +

    Note:
    The keyboard commands and resulting actions listed below are for the calendar control as it is first displayed with the days of the month. You can also use these keys to move around in the calendar displaying the months of the year, the years in a decade, or decades.

    +
      +
    • Left arrow - Select the previous day
    • +
    • Right arrow - Select the next day
    • +
    • Up arrow - Select the same day in the previous week
    • +
    • Down arrow - Select the same day in the next week
    • +
    • Page Up - Select the same day in the previous month
    • +
    • Page Down - Select the same day in the next month
    • +
    • Home - Select the first day of the current month
    • +
    • End - Select the last day of the current month
    • +
    • Ctrl + Page Up - Select the same day in the previous month
    • +
    • Ctrl + Page Down - Select the same day in the next month
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..25d291e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Using_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using the Polaris Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using the Polaris Shortcut Bar

    +

    When you first log on to the Polaris staff client (for instructions, see Start and log on to the Polaris staff client), you see the Polaris Shortcut Bar, which is the starting point and navigational tool for library staff. The Polaris Shortcut Bar consists of a menu bar with menus organized by subsystem, and a toolbar with round icons that provide alternate ways to access Polaris functions.

    +

    Tips:
    Use the following shortcut keys to access menus:
    ALT+F - File
    ALT+A - Acquisitions
    ALT+S - Serials
    ALT+C - Cataloging
    ALT+P - Patron Services
    ALT+R - Circulation
    ALT+M - Administration
    ALT+U - Utilities
    ALT+H - Help
    If you use a shortcut key to access a menu, the keys for the functions are underlined. For example, if you select ALT+A for the Acquisitions menu the F is underlined in Funds. Press F to open the Find Tool and search for Fund records. For more shortcut keys, see Basic Shortcut Keys.

    +

    To access a subsystem menu, you can press shortcut keys or use the mouse and click a menu title.

    +

    You can also click one of the color-coded round icons (for example, dark blue for Cataloging), and the record icons appear. Click the icon borders (handles) to expand, contract, and reorder the toolbar.

    +

    Display or hide the subsystem buttons by clicking the round icon or by dragging the handle. Hover the cursor over an icon to see the name of the record. Create a two-level toolbar by dragging down the round icon or handle. When you close Polaris and log back on, the Shortcut Bar returns to its default display.

    +

    See also: Using Polaris Menus

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Viewing_Record_Props.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Viewing_Record_Props.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..445d2579 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIgetstart/Viewing_Record_Props.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Viewing a Record’s Properties + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Viewing a Record’s Properties

    +

    You can see information such as the record’s creation and modification dates from the Properties dialog box, but you cannot edit the information. To see a record’s properties, use one of the following methods:

    +
      +
    • From the Find Tool results list or a list of records, right-click a record and select Properties from the context menu.
    • +
    +

    + findtoolpropert.gif 

    +
      +
    • From a workform, select File > Properties.The Properties sheet opens.
    • +
    +

    The General tab contains general information about the record.

    +

    + bibpropgen.gif 

    +

    The About tab contains information such as: the creator and modifier of the record; the dates the record was created and modified; the owner and record status; and statistics.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Get_quick_help_with_a_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Get_quick_help_with_a_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c59f381 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Get_quick_help_with_a_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Get quick help with a workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Get Quick Help with a Workform

    +

    Use workform-level Help when you want to find specific information about a workform and the tasks that are done using the workform.

    +

    Tip: formHelp_Icon.gif
    Click to display Help for a workform, or press F1.

    +
      +
    1. From a workform, select Help, This Window Help.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Staff Help window appears with information about the workform.

    +
      +
    1. Click a procedure link to see more information about a task, or use the left pane to navigate to other topics.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Use_topic-level_Help_in_the_staff_client.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Use_topic-level_Help_in_the_staff_client.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c77a54de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Use_topic-level_Help_in_the_staff_client.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Use topic-level Help in the staff client + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Topic-Level Help in the Staff Client

    +

    Use topic-level Help when you want to find information on any Polaris function.

    +

    Open topic-level Help, by selecting one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • From the Polaris Shortcut Bar, press ALT+H or and press P, or select Help, Polaris Topics.
    • +
    • From the Find Tool, select Help, Find Tool Topics.
    • +
    • From a workform, select Help, Subsystem Help Topics.
    • +
    +

    The Polaris Staff Help window appears. The location from which you access Help determines the content that displays in the window. If you access Help from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, the Help window opens with topics relating to the Shortcut Bar and Polaris menus. If you access Help from the Find Tool, the Help window opens with topics relating to using the Find Tool. If you access Help from a workform, the Help window opens with topics relating to the workform’s subsystem. You can navigate to other topics no matter how you first accessed the Help window.

    +

    The right pane of the Polaris Staff Help window displays topic information. The left pane is used for searching and navigation.

    +

    To navigate through the staff Help table of contents, do the following:

    +

    Note:
    The table of contents displays help topics in a tree view as they would be organized in a book. The table of contents shows the book hierarchy and how topics are related to each other, and lets you progress from topic to topic. If you have a topic displayed in the right pane, you can click the Contents tab to see where the topic appears in the hierarchy.

    +
      +
    • Click the Contents tab in the left pane.
    • +
    • Double-click the main topic to display subtopics.
    • +
    • Double-click the main topic to hide subtopics.
    • +
    +

    To use the index, do the following:

    +

    Note:
    The index displays help topics in alphabetical order. Use the index for most searches unless the term is uncommon. You may also find useful cross-references and alternate terms.

    +
      +
    • Click the Index tab in the left pane.
    • +
    • Type the term you are searching for (or the first few letters) in the Type in the keyword to find box.
    • +
    • The index displays the alphabetical part of the list that includes the term you typed.
    • +
    • Double-click the topic in the list, or select the topic and click Display.
    • +
    • The topic appears in the right pane.
    • +
    +

    To search for a keyword term, do the following:

    +

    Note:
    The Search feature is most useful for uncommon terms. For example, you could use the Search tab when looking for information on Z39.50. But if you are looking for information on bibliographic records, you will get more useful results using the Index tab.

    +
      +
    • Click the Search tab in the left pane.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can display the Search page directly from a workform or the Polaris Shortcut Bar by selecting Help, Search For Help On.

    +
      +
    • Type the term you are searching for (or the first few letters) in the box.
    • +
    • Double-click the entry, or select the entry and click Display.
    • +
    +

    The topic appears in the right pane. Each instance of the term is highlighted.

    +

    To navigate through a topic displayed in the right pane, use these controls:

    +
      +
    • Press the down arrow or up arrow on the right side of the window to scroll through the topic.
    • +
    • Click links in the topic information to display related information.
    • +
    • Click the book icons in the table of contents on the left panel to see other topics.
    • +
    • See where the displayed topic appears in the table of contents. With the topic displayed in the right pane, click the Contents tab to see the topic in the tree view. You can select another heading to see other procedures or an overview.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    When you search using the Search or Index tab, and you need to see the topic in context or you need to go back to an overview, you can click the Contents tab.

    +

    To save a topic link to frequently access the topic, do the following:

    +
      +
    • Display the topic.
    • +
    • Click the Favorites tab in the left pane.
    • +
    • If you want to change the name of the topic link, type the new name over the existing name in the Current topic box.
    • +
    • Click Add.
    • +
    +

    The new topic link appears in the Topics list.

    +

    Notes:
    - To display a Favorite topic, select the topic link in the Topics list, and click Display.
    - To delete a topic link from Favorites, select the topic link in the Topics list, and click Remove.

    +

    To print from the Help file, do the following:

    +
      +
    • Right-click the topic you want to print.
    • +
    • Select Print from the context menu.
    • +
    • To copy from the Help file, do the following:
    • +
    • Select the text you want to copy.
    • +
    • Right-click and select Copy from the context menu.
    • +
    • To leave online Help, click X to close the Polaris Staff Help window.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Using_Online_Help.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Using_Online_Help.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c717a452 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIpoldoc/Using_Online_Help.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Online Help + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Online Help

    +

    When you select Help from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, the menu lists the following options:

    +
      +
    • Polaris Topics - Look up any topic in Polaris. See Using topic-level Help in the staff client.
    • +
    • Search for Help on... - Search for a term anywhere in Polaris Help.
    • +
    • Shortcut Bar Help - Information regarding the Polaris Shortcut Bar. See Using the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    • +
    • Library Documentation - Access the library documentation if your library provides its own documentation for Polaris.
    • +
    • Obtaining Technical Support - Opens the login page for the Innovative Customer Supportal.
    • +
    • About Polaris - Information about the Polaris version and build. Provides a link to a list of Polaris licenses. See View Polaris Licenses Available to Your Library.
    • +
    +

    You can also get information about a specific workform or dialog box by clicking on the question mark button. See Get Quick Help with a Workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Add_records_to_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Add_records_to_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ba0c105 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Add_records_to_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add records to a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Records to a Record Set

    +

    You can add bibliographic records, item records, or patron records to a record set by searching for the records or by scanning item or patron barcodes. For patron record sets only, you can select an Excel file to populate the record set. No data is imported from the Excel file; if the patron ID in the file matches an existing patron record in the Polaris database, the record is added to the record set.

    +

    To add records to a new or existing record set:

    +

    Note:
    You can use the Find Tool to search for an existing record set by the record set name, owner, or creation date. See Doing a Basic Search.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Record Set workform for a new or existing record set.
    2. +
    3. Use one of the following methods to add the records:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Search for the records to add - Select Tools > Add, press CTRL+E, or click AddSrchbtn.gif. The Polaris Find Tool appears. Search for the record, and select it from the results list.
    • +
    • Scan item or patron barcodes - Select Tools > Add, Scan, press CTRL+K, or click AddBrcdBtn.gif. The Scan Barcode dialog box appears, in which you scan the barcode (or type the barcode and press ENTER). Keep scanning item or patron barcodes. Click Close when you have added all the records.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Scanning a patron’s barcode on the Patron Record Set workform adds the patron record to the record set, and scanning an item’s barcode on the Item Record Set workform adds the item record to the record set. However, scanning an item record on the Bibliographic Record Set adds that item’s linked bibliographic record to the record set.

    +
      +
    • Use a file to add patron records. Select Tools > Add > Add from file, or click .
    • +
    +

    The Add from file dialog box opens.

    +
    +
      +
    • Select Browse to locate the Excel file containing the patron IDs for the patron records to add.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • In the Worksheet/Column containing Polaris PatronID drop-down list box, select the location of the PatronID in the Excel file.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Click Add to add the records to the record set. For information on using this method to manage patron records that will be sent to a second collection agency, see Second Level Collection Agency Management.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the record set. After the record set is saved, the Number of records box displays the current number of records in the record set.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_all_the_Find_Tool_results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_all_the_Find_Tool_results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2aed7bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_all_the_Find_Tool_results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a record set from all the Find Tool results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Record Set from All the Find Tool Results

    +

    Note: +
    For general information on using the Find Tool, see Doing a Basic Search.

    +

    To send all the records in the search results to a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Enter the search criteria on the General tab of the Find Tool, but do not click Search yet.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you do not need to see the Find Tool results list before creating the record set, select Count only on the General tab to make sure all the records that meet the criteria you set are included in the record set. If you do not select Count only, the number of records in the record set will be limited to the number in the Retrieval Limit box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Settings tab. The Settings tabbed page appears.
    2. +
    3. Select Send Results to a New Record Set.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Type the name you want to give the record set in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Select the record set’s owner in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    Only the owner can modify the record set. If the owner is an organization, all the organization’s staff members can modify the record set (if they have the appropriate permissions). If you have the permission Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets: Allow, you can create cataloging record sets that no other users can access, including your system administrator. When you create a new cataloging record set, your user name will be in the Owner box by default if you have this permission. To allow other users to access the record set, first select a different owner before saving the record set.

    +
      +
    1. Click Search.
    2. +
    +

    If the number of records in the record set will exceed the limit set in Polaris Administration, a warning message appears. Click Yes to continue creating the record set or No to cancel creation of the record set.

    +

    If the record set does not exceed the record limit, a message informs you that the record set was created and asks if you want to open it.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to open the record set. The record set workform appears with the name you gave the record set and the date and time it was created.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_specific_Find_Tool_results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_specific_Find_Tool_results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e509b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_specific_Find_Tool_results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a record set from specific Find Tool results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a record set from specific Find Tool results

    +

    Note: +
    For general information on using the Find Tool, see Doing a Basic Search.

    +

    To select the Find Tool results to add to a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Find Tool.
    2. +
    3. Enter the search criteria.
    4. +
    5. Click Search. The Find Tool results display.
    6. +
    +

    Tips:
    Press CTRL+SHIFT+A to load all records that meet your search criteria. To select records listed one after the other in the list, click with the left mouse button on the first record you want to select, hold down the SHIFT key, and click on the last record you want to select. To select specific records, click on each record while holding down the CTRL key. To select all the records in the record set, press CTRL+A.

    +
      +
    1. Select the records in the results set to add to the record set.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Add to Record Set > New.
    4. +
    +

    The Record Set workform appears containing the records you selected.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the record set in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. If you want to change the record set’s owner, select it in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    Only the owner can modify the record set. If the owner is an organization, all the organization’s staff members can modify the record set (if they have the appropriate permissions). If you have the permission, Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets: Allow, you can create record sets that no other users can access, including your system administrator. When you create a new record set, your user name will be in the Owner box by default if you have this permission. To allow other users to access the record set, first select a different owner before saving the record set.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to include a note, type it in the Note box.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save, press CTRL+S or click the Save button.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b3c9c6d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Patron_Registration_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a record set from the Patron Registration workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Record Set from the Patron Registration Workform

    +

    To create a record set from the Patron Registration workform:

    +
      +
    1. Display the Patron Registration workform for the patron record you want to add to a record set.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools > Add to Record Set > New from the context menu. The Record Set workform appears with one patron record listed.
    4. +
    5. Type a name for the record set in the Name box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Only the owner can modify the record set. If the owner is an organization, all the staff members of the organization can modify the record set (if they have the appropriate permissions).

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the record set’s owner, select it in the Owner box.
    2. +
    3. If you want to include a note, type it in the Note box.
    4. +
    5. Add other patron records to the record set. See Add Records to a Record Set.
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save to save the record set.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8aabdc91 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Create_a_record_set_from_the_Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a record set from the Polaris Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Record Set from the Polaris Shortcut Bar

    +

    To create a new record set from the Polaris Shortcut Bar:

    +
      +
    1. Select File > New. The New dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select Record Set from the Objects list, and click OK. The New Record Set dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the record type (Authority, Bibliographic, Item, or Patron) in the Record Type box, and click OK. An empty New Record Set workform appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the record set in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Specify a person or library as the record set owner in the Owner box.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    Only the owner can modify the record set. If the owner is an organization, only organization’s staff members can modify the record set (if they have the appropriate permissions). If you have the permission, Use ‘own’ cataloging record sets: Allow, you can create record sets that no other users can access, including your system administrator. When you create a new record set, your user name will be in the Owner box by default if you have this permission. To allow other users to access the record set, first select a different owner before saving the record set.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type notes in the Note box.
    2. +
    3. Add records to the record set. See Add Records to a Record Set.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Creating_and_Using_Record_Sets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Creating_and_Using_Record_Sets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c19159c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Creating_and_Using_Record_Sets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating and Using Record Sets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating and Using Record Sets

    +

    Record sets gather multiple records of one type together so that you can take action on them all at once. As examples, you can use record sets to:

    +
      +
    • Make changes to all the records in a patron, item, or bibliographic record set using the Bulk Change process.
    • +
    • Add multiple titles to a purchase order or selection list.
    • +
    • Publish the URL to a bibliographic record set in the Polaris PowerPAC’s portal page, dashboard, or Web site page as a quick way for patrons to access title lists such as summer reading lists.
    • +
    • Sort the records in the record set and print the view for a working list.
    • +
    +

    You can create record sets from the Find Tool results list, the Polaris Shortcut Bar, another record set, SimplyReports. Record sets are also created as part of automatic processes, such as identifying and gathering all unlinked bibliographic records in a record set.

    +

    For general information on record sets, see:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_a_record_set_from_the_Record_Set_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_a_record_set_from_the_Record_Set_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a1f18708 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_a_record_set_from_the_Record_Set_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete a record set from the Record Set workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete/Undelete a Record Set from the Record Set Workform

    +

    When you delete a record set, the records within the record set remain in the database. A record set cannot be deleted if it is being used (open) by another user.

    +

    To delete a record set from the Record Set workform:

    +
      +
    1. Display the record set to be deleted in the Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Delete.

    4. +
    5. A confirmation dialog box appears. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the record set.
    6. +
    7. The Record Set workform closes. The record set is deleted, but member records remain in the database.
    8. +
    +

    You can only undelete records sets if this feature has been enabled by the system administrator. When you undelete a record set, it is restored and its status is changed back to Final.

    +

    To undelete a record set from the Record Set workform:

    +
      +
    1. Display the record set to be undeleted in the Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Undelete.

    4. +
    5. The record set is undeleted.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_member_records_from_the_database.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_member_records_from_the_database.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf1e66d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_member_records_from_the_database.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete member records from the database + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete Member Records from the Database

    +

    If you have the required permissions, you can delete a record from the database while it is a member of a record set, but it cannot be recovered (unless your Polaris Administrator has set profiles to retain cataloging records).

    +

    To delete records from the Polaris database while they are members of a record set:

    +

    Important:
    If you want to remove a record from the record set, but keep the record in the database, see Remove records from a record set.

    +
      +
    1. Display the record set containing the record you want to delete in the Record Set workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the record or records you want to delete in the Record list.
    4. +
    +

    Tips:
    To select records listed one after the other in the list, click with the left mouse button on the first record you want to select, hold down the SHIFT key, and click the last record you want to select. To select specific records, click each record while holding down the CTRL key. To select all the records in the record set, press CTRL+A.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Delete, or click the Delete button.
    2. +
    3. If you are deleting a single record, a confirmation dialog box appears. If you are deleting multiple bibliographic, item, or patron records, the Multiple Object Deletion dialog box appears where (with the required permissions) you can select one or both of the check boxes to prevent warning messages from displaying. See: Delete multiple records.
    4. +
    5. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the record or records.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If a record cannot be deleted, the delete error dialog box appears. Select from the available options on the dialog box.

    +

    The deleted records no longer appear in the Records list. A message in the status bar tells you how many records were deleted.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save the record set. The following message appears in the status bar: The record set was saved successfully, and the Number of records box displays the correct number of records in the record set.
    2. +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_record_sets_from_the_Find_Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_record_sets_from_the_Find_Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c320c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Delete_record_sets_from_the_Find_Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete record sets from the Find Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete/Undelete record sets from the Find Tool

    +

    You can select one or multiple record sets from the Find Tool results list and delete them. The records within the record sets are not deleted.

    +

    To delete record sets from the Find Tool:

    +
      +
    1. Search for the record sets you want to delete. The record sets are displayed in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. The record sets are deleted, but the records that belonged to the record set remain in the database.
    4. +
    +

    You can select one or multiple record sets from the Find Tool results list and undelete them.

    +

    To undelete record sets from the Find Tool:

    +
      +
    1. Search for the record sets you want to undelete by record set status or by record set ID. The record sets are displayed in the Find Tool results list.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Undelete from the context menu. The record sets are undeleted.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Remove_records_from_a_record_set.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Remove_records_from_a_record_set.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c4c2475 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIrecsets/Remove_records_from_a_record_set.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remove records from a record set + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove Records from a Record Set

    +

    When records are removed from a record set, they are not deleted from the database.

    +

     To take a record out of a record set:

    +
      +
    1. Display a Record Set workform with one of the following methods:
    2. +
    +

    Tip: recsetbtn.gif 
    Click this button on the Shortcut Bar to search for a record set.

    +
      +
    • Use the Polaris Find Tool to search for and open an existing record set.
    • +
    • Right-click a record in the Find Tool’s results list, and select Links > Record sets from the context menu (the record must be a member of a record set).
    • +
    • Select Links > Existing > Record Sets from the workform (the record must be a member of a record set).
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select the record(s) you want to remove in the Record list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Use CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to select multiple records. To select all the records in the record set, select Edit > Select All, or press CTRL+A.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools > Remove, or press CTRL+R, or click remrecbtn.gif. The records no longer appear in the Records list, but remain in the database as individual records.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save to save the record set.
    4. +
    +

    The following message appears in the status bar: The record set was saved successfully, and the Number of records box shows the number of records in the record set.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Acq_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Acq_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a6f9457 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Acq_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + Acquisitions Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions Reports

    +

    To access Acquisitions reports, select Utilities from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and select Reports and Notices, Acquisitions.

    +
      +
    • Advanced Shipment Container Content - Lists all items found in a specific package or container for which the supplier has sent an EDI ASN file. Type or scan the 18-digit SSCC tracking barcode in the Report Wizard window. The header shows the date shipped. The report is sorted by title, and it includes the following information: title; author; ISBN or UPC; purchase order number and suffix; purchase order line item ID; and the total quantity sent.
    • +
    • Advanced Shipment Containers Not Yet Received - Lists all items found in a package/container for which the supplier has produced an ASN, but which has not yet been received through the ASN workform. To generate the report, enter the supplier’s SAN (with or without hyphens) in the Report Wizard dialog box. The report is grouped by tracking barcode, and sorted by title, then purchase order number. It lists the tracking barcode, PO#/Suffix, Title/Author/ISBN (UPC), PO Line ID, Qty Sent, and the Date Shipped.
    • +
    • Advanced Shipment Notification Log - The Advanced Shipment Notification log displays all titles received via ASN for a supplier and line item status date range. To generate the report, enter the Supplier SAN (with or without the hyphen), the Line item status start date, the Line item status end date, and press Enter or click Submit. The line item status date is the date the line item’s status was updated to Received (all segments were received via ASN).

      The report lists purchase order line items that have segments received via ASN within the time period (including the start and end dates) for the specified supplier. It includes the following columns of information sorted by purchase order number, then title, then carton tracking number: PO # / Suffix; Title / Author / ISBN (UPC); Tracking Barcode; POLI ID; Ord - Total quantity ordered from the purchase order line items; Sent - Total quantity shipped by the supplier; Rec - Total quantity of all received purchase order line item segments; ASN Rec - Total quantity of purchase order line item segments received using the Receive ASN Shipments workform; Note - If the shipped quantity was adjusted, a note appears in this column. The report is printed in landscape page orientation.
    • +
    • Average Days On Order by Supplier and Material Type - Shows how long suppliers take to fulfill orders. For each supplier, it shows the material type, the date ordered, the date received, and the destination library.
    • +
    • Average Material Cost by Supplier - Compare suppliers by the type of material purchased. It shows the average price of invoiced items for each supplier, according to material type.
    • +
    • Canceled Titles by Supplier - Each canceled title is listed with its ISBN/ISSN, quantity, amount (price), purchase order number, and line number.
    • +
    • Check In Shelf-Ready Materials - For each branch listed, the report contains the following information:
    • +
    • Purchase order line item segment receipt information: Purchase order number and suffix; Title and author; Purchase order line ID number and Segment ID number; Fund; Quantity ordered/Quantity received
    • +
    • Comments: If the line item segment was split because fewer copies were received than were ordered, a note appears in this section.
    • +
    • Item check in information: The date and time that the item was checked in using the Receive Shipment workform; the workstation name where the check in was done; the user name of the staff member doing the check in; item’s barcode, title, author, ISBN/UPC, item ID, assigned branch abbreviation
    • +
    • Claims Ready for Cancellation - Lists items that should be cancelled because the maximum number of claims have been generated, and the item still has not been received. If your library has chosen to automatically cancel items after the claim cycle, the items will not appear on this report.
    • +
    • Currency Exchange Rates - For each library organization selected, the report shows the foreign currency, the exchange rate, the last modified date, and the user who last modified the exchange rate for that organization and foreign currency.
    • +
    • Electronic Invoice - Specify the date range and the supplier SAN to see the EDI invoices. For each invoice, the report lists the invoice date, the invoice number, the purchase order number, the currency (if a currency other than the base currency was used), the date shipped, and the library account’s SAN ID. Under the invoice information are the details for each purchase order line item, including the purchase order line ID, the ISBN, the title, the quantity, the discount and retail prices, the line item’s purchase order number, and the discount percentage. The report’s page orientation is landscape.
    • +
    • Electronic Purchase Order Acknowledgment - An electronic purchase order acknowledgment (POA) is the supplier’s response to an electronic purchase order that the library sent. A Polaris utility scans the supplier’s FTP server for acknowledgments and invoices. If a purchase order has been sent and an acknowledgment is on the supplier’s server, the utility downloads the file to the C:\Polaris Reports\EDINew directory (or another directory your library has specified to store these files). The information in the downloaded file is used to create this report.

      Use this report to identify the status of titles electronically transmitted in a purchase order. The acknowledgment status codes in the report vary according to supplier. You can also refer to the report to manually adjust a purchase order in Polaris to reflect the current status of on-order titles. Each purchase order confirmed in the report begins a new page, and the information on the page is grouped by line item status. The report’s page orientation is landscape. To run the report, select a branch (or select All) from the Organization list, enter the start date, end date, and the supplier’s SAN without a hyphen. The supplier’s SAN is in the Supplier record.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Encumbrances and Expenditures by Supplier - Use this report to inform materials suppliers of how much money has been spent (expenditures) and how much money the library plans to spend (encumbrances) for a fiscal year. The report lists suppliers by SAN, and suppliers that share the same SAN are grouped together and listed in alphabetical order. If no SAN is found in the supplier record, the supplier displays individually on the report. The encumbrances and expenditures amounts are sub-totalled for each supplier account, and then totaled for the supplier group.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If your library supports more than one fiscal year hierarchy for the same collection, the report should be run for each fiscal year hierarchy.

    +

    Suppliers are listed on the report if they are linked to:

    +
    +
      +
    • Purchase order line items for which amounts have been encumbered in funds linked to the selected fiscal year.
    • +
    • Invoice line items for which amounts have been expended from funds linked to the selected fiscal year.
    • +
    +
    +

    To run the report, select a single branch or all branches (you cannot select multiple branches) under Parameters. The fiscal year records for the selected branch (or all branches) are listed. Then, select a fiscal year from the list, and press Enter or click Submit.

    +
      +
    • Expenditures by Fund and Material Type - Use this report to see expenditures grouped by funds (linked to the selected fiscal year) that were used to pay for items (items linked to invoice line item segments).

      To run the report, first select a branch, multiple branches or all branches. If your library’s acquisitions tasks are done centrally, select multiple branches or all branches. When multiple branches are selected, the funds are sub-totaled without branch grouping. If your library’s acquisitions tasks are done decentrally, select a single branch to see the fund expenditures for that branch. Next, select the fiscal year. Only one fiscal year can be selected for each report. If the branch uses multiple fiscal years, a separate report must be run for each fiscal period.

      Each fund grouping displays the fund’s name and alternative name in a heading. Under the fund heading, the report lists the following information in columns from left to right as follows:
      • Material type - The material types are sorted alphabetically within the fund group. (This is the item record’s current Material Type, not the linked bibliographic record’s Type of Material (TOM).) Items are counted unless they have been permanently deleted from the database.
      • Purchased - The number of items of each material type that were paid for using the listed fund. The total in the Purchased column shows the total number of items of all material types purchased using the listed fund.
      • Check-Outs - The number of check out transactions for each material type. The total in the Check-Outs column shows the total number of check outs for items of all material types purchased using the listed fund.
      • Amount paid - The dollar amount paid for the items by material type. The total in the Amount paid column is the total for items of all material types paid for using the listed fund.
    • +
    • Expenditures by Material Type and Fund - Use this report to see expenditures grouped by material type and then sorted by fund within the material type grouping. To run the report, first select a branch, multiple branches or all branches. If your library’s acquisitions tasks are done centrally, select multiple branches or all branches. When multiple branches are selected, the funds are sub-totaled without branch grouping. If your library’s acquisitions tasks are done decentrally, select a single branch to see the fund expenditures for that branch. Next, select the fiscal year. Only one fiscal year can be selected for each report. If the branch uses multiple fiscal years, a separate report must be run for each fiscal period.

      Each material type grouping displays the material type heading. Under the material type heading, the report lists the following information in columns from left to right as follows:
      • Fund - The funds are sorted alphabetically within the material type group.
      • Purchased - The number of items of this material type that were paid for using the fund. The total in the Purchased column shows the total number of items with this material type paid for by any of the listed funds.
      • Check-Outs - The number of check out transactions for each fund. The total in the Check-Outs column shows the total number of check outs for items with this material type purchased using any of the listed funds.
      • Amount paid - The dollar amount paid for the items by fund. The total in the Amount paid column is the total for items with this material type that were paid using any of the listed funds.
    • +
    • Fund Hierarchy Report - Lists the funds for the selected fiscal year in a hierarchical view (similar to the Fund Explorer view) with sub-funds listed under top-level funds. The top of the report displays the fiscal year’s total amount budgeted, encumbered, expended, available and the total percentage used. If your library orders centrally, you can select the fiscal year for the central processing organization, and the report will display all the top-level funds linked to the selected fiscal year with the subfunds under them. If your library orders decentrally, you can select the fiscal year for a branch, and all the top-level funds linked to the fiscal year will be listed with their subfunds under them. For each top-level fund listed, the following totals are displayed: Total Allocated, Total Encumbered, Total Spent, Total Unspent, Unspent = Total Allocated minus Spent. The totals include all the amounts for the subfunds added together.
    • +
    • Fund Summary Report - Lists the fund activity for the selected fiscal year. The top of the report displays the fiscal year’s total amount budgeted, encumbered, expended, available and the total percentage used. If ordering is done centrally, the user selects the fiscal year for the central processing organization, and all the funds linked to the fiscal year are listed. If ordering is done decentrally, the user selects the fiscal year, and the funds are grouped by branch. The funds are listed with the totals for each individual fund.
    • +
    • Fund Transaction Comparisons - Lists any discrepancies between the amount displayed in the fund balances in the Fund workform and amounts that include manual fund adjustments to encumbrances or expenditures.
    • +
    • Fund Transaction History - Lists the entire transaction history for a fund.
    • +
    • Funds by Group Name - Lists the library’s fund activity for a specified date range by fund group name. Enter a part or whole fund name, or a portion of a word within a fund name. To see the activity for the current fiscal year, enter the exact start and end dates for the current fiscal year. The fund activity is available only for open fiscal years.
    • +
    • Invoice Title, Status and Funds - Lists funds according to the invoice line item segment status.
    • +
    • Items by Approval Plan - Lists items purchased using approval plans within a specified date range, including the material type, unit price, and number of copies for each title ordered under an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile..
    • +
    • Items by Blanket Plan - Lists items purchased using blanket plans within a specified date range. It lists the material type, unit price, and number of copies for each title ordered under a blanket plan A blanket plan (also called a blanket order) is most commonly used for ordering all materials or a specific subset of materials that are published by an organization. In contrast with approval plans, blanket plans do not generally allow return privileges with simple deductions from the invoice. With blanket plans, quality is less important than comprehensiveness of coverage. Blanket plans can be as narrow as a specific publisher’s series or as broad as a request to send all material of a particular type or on a particular subject..
    • +
    • Items by Donor Fund - Lists items purchased with donor funds within a specified date range, including the material type, unit price, and number of copies for each title ordered under a donor fund.
    • +
    • Items Ordered by Deposit Account Fund - Lists items purchased with deposit account A deposit account is an account with a vendor that allows customers to pay all or a portion of the estimated annual billing in advance. Depending on the amount prepaid, the typical discount is from 1.5% to 4.5% more than with a regular plan, where invoices are paid after the receipt of titles. funds within a specified date range, including the material type, unit price, and number of copies for each title ordered under a deposit account fund.
    • +
    • List of Funds by Fiscal Year - Lists the fiscal year and fund hierarchy for each library for all open fiscal years and funds. It includes the total amount allocated; the total currently encumbered and expended; the free balance; and the total amount remaining for each fund listed. The Report Parameters window displays the fiscal years according to the selected Organization(s).
    • +
    • List of Suppliers by Owning Branch - The supplier information includes the supplier SAN (Standard Address Number), library account number, order address, payment address, and claim address.
    • +
    • Number of Titles by Supplier - The number of titles that were ordered from a supplier over a specified period of time.
    • +
    • Outstanding Claims by Supplier - Lists unresolved claims made for titles that were ordered but not received.
    • +
    • Outstanding Orders - Lists purchase orders that are pending or have not been paid. It is useful to run this report to see the outstanding orders before running the Fiscal Year Rollover Utility. For each purchase order listed, the report shows the purchase order number, order type, ordering library, and the total amount of the purchase order. For each title ordered, the report shows the number of copies ordered for each destination/collection.

      To run the report, select the organization for which you want to list the outstanding orders, and select the start and end dates to define a date range. You can limit the report output further by selecting a fiscal year.
    • +
    • PO Title Status and Fund - Use this report to see the status of purchase orders. It lists fund encumbrances and disencumbrances, according to the purchase order line item segment statuses (canceled, on order, pending, received) and payment statuses (open, paid, or prepaid). In the Report Wizard dialog box, select the organization, payment status, and purchase order status. Then, specify the payment status start and end dates, and the purchase order status start and end dates.
    • +
    • Preliminary Level Bibliographic Records - Identifies preliminary bibliographic records created in Acquisitions, so these records can be fully cataloged. When bibliographic information is entered in the Description fields of a Purchase Order Line Item (either manually or using Titles to Go), a preliminary bibliographic record is created with an encoding level of 5 (partial or preliminary) in the Leader position 17. The report identifies any bibliographic record with Leader position 17=5, and other details like Title, ISBN, and the number of the linked purchase order. The purchase order must have been released for it to appear in this report. If there is invoice data, it is included in the report.
    • +
    • Shelf Ready Items Not Received in Acquisitions - Use this report to see purchase order line items that have not been updated to Received but the linked shelf-ready items have been checked in. The report lists any purchase order line item segment with a status of Pending, Cancelled, Closed, Currently Received or Received that has linked Items with a circulation status other than On-Order.
    • +
    • Supplier Performance Report- Use this report to see the number of items ordered and received; the fill rate; and the number of items canceled and claimed. Select the library or branch for which you want to see the supplier data, and select the date range.
    • +
    • Uncataloged Titles with Holds - Use this report to expedite the cataloging of received items that have hold requests. It identifies titles that had no hold requests at the time they were received, but then hold requests were made later on these received items. The report shows the bibliographic record ID number, the title, author, format, received date, and the number of holds. The report is sorted in descending order by the purchase order line item’s receipt date (most recent first), then by title in ascending order. An uncataloged title appears in the report if all items linked to the purchase order line item have a status of In-Process or On-Order, and at least one item has a status of In-Process. This status means that at least one copy of the title in the purchase order line item has been received. Also, the hold requests must have a status of Active to appear on the report.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Holds Purchase Alert Circulation report is useful in making purchasing decisions because it lists titles that are requested frequently, but have too few items to meet the demand. To generate the report, select the Utilities menu from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Then select Reports and Notices, Circulation, Holds, Holds Purchase Alert. For more information, see Circulation Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Borrow_By_Mail_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Borrow_By_Mail_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed6a5c56 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Borrow_By_Mail_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Borrow By Mail Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Borrow By Mail Reports

    +

    The following reports help you track Borrow by Mail requests. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Patron Services, Borrow by Mail in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
      +
    • Borrow by Mail Circulation Summary - A summary of Borrow by Mail circulation (number of check-outs), including material type, the number of items checked out, the number of patrons transacting, and the total number of check-out transactions. Each patron is counted once, regardless of the number of items checked out to that patron, and renewals are not included. You can filter the report by organization (all branches designated as Borrow by Mail processing centers) and specify a date range.
    • +
    • Borrow by Mail Holds Summary - A summary of Borrow by Mail requests, including the number of requests created, requests filled (requests become held), requests checked out, requests unclaimed, and requests cancelled. You can filter the report by pickup organization (processing center) and specify a date range.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Cat_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Cat_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..49c483ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Cat_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + Cataloging Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Reports

    +

    To access Cataloging reports, select Utilities from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and select Reports and Notices, Cataloging. If your library has a license for Polaris Community Profiles, standard Community reports are available.

    +

    Authority Reports

    +
      +
    • Authority Records where 4xx matches 1xx - Identifies authority records where a See reference (4xx field) in one record matches a heading (1xx field) in another record in the database. It also lists situations where the same authority record contains a 1xx and 4xx that match because of normalization. For example, one field contains the heading using “and” while the other field contains the same heading using “&”.
    • +
    • Authority Records with No Linked Bibs - Identifies authority records that are not linked to any bibliographic record. They may have links to other authority records.
    • +
    • Macros for Authority Records - All Staff Members - Identifies the macros created by all staff members who work with authority records. For each macro, the report specifies the macro name, shortcut keys, description of the macro’s task, creation date, and staff member who added the macro.
    • +
    • Macros for Authority Records - Single Staff Member - Identifies the macros added by a specific staff member who works with authority records. Select the staff member’s name. For each macro, the report specifies the macro name, shortcut keys, description of the macro’s task, creation date, and staff member who added the macro. Generate this report if you want a printed copy of your macros.
    • +
    • Problem Authority Headings - Identifies possible duplicate authority headings where the normalized text is the heading of more than one authority record. It lists the normalized heading that matched, the authority record IDs, the actual heading text, and the thesaurus of the authority record.
    • +
    • Unlinked Authority Records - Identifies all headings not used by any bibliographic record or as a cross-reference for other headings. You can also create a record set of all unlinked authority records and delete the records or open them from the record set.
    • +
    +

    Bibliographic Reports

    +
      +
    • Bibliographic Records No Longer In Database - Identifies bibliographic records that were purged from the database during a specified period of time. The OCLC Control Number column contains values from the 035 bibliographic tag and the “other system control number” (OCLC control number).
    • +
    • Bibliographic Records That Do Not Display in PAC - Identifies titles that do not display when you search the public catalog. For each of these titles, the Display in PAC check box is not selected on the Bibliographic Record workform.
    • +
    • Bibliographic Records With No Format - Identifies bibliographic records without a Type of Material (TOM) code assigned to them. It lists the bibliographic control number, title, and record owner for each bibliographic record that does not have a TOM associated with it.
    • +
    •  Bibliographic Records With No Linked Authority Records - Identifies bibliographic records that need authority records found or created for them. You can also create a record set of all unlinked authority records and delete the records or open them from the record set.
    • +
    • Bibliographic Records With No Linked Items - Identifies bibliographic records for which there are no linked item records. Select the bibliographic record modification date range and the organizations. Set the modification start date far in the past and use today’s date for the end date so that all bibliographic records without linked items are included in the report.
    • +
    • Integrated Ebooks With All Copies Expired - Identifies ebook bibliographic records where all the linked item records have a status of Withdrawn. In the Report Wizard window, select the vendor account from a drop-down list of all integrated ebook vendors. The report columns display the bib ID, title, author, the number of resource entities, and the name of the vendor account with all copies expired.
    • +
    • Macros for Bibliographic Records - All Staff Members - Identifies the macros create by all staff members who work with bibliographic records. For each macro, the report specifies the macro name, shortcut keys, description of the macro’s purpose, creation date, and staff member who added the macro.
    • +
    • Macros for Bibliographic Records - Single Staff Member - Identifies the macros created by a single staff member who works with bibliographic records. Select the staff member’s name. For each macro, the report specifies the macro name, shortcut keys, description of the macro’s purpose, creation date, and staff member who added the macro. Generate this report to see a printed copy of your macros.
    • +
    • New Titles Imported - Identifies the titles that have been added to your collection during a specified time period.
    • +
    • Provisional Bibliographic Records - Identifies all bibliographic records with a status of provisional. A provisional record is an incomplete record that does not appear in the public catalog and cannot be used at check-out.
    • +
    • Subfield 9 utility log - Identifies records where tags used in automatic processing (to create item records or purchase order/selection list line item segments) were deleted automatically by the $9 Cleanup Utility. On the Parameters tab, select the Begin date and End date. On the Sorting Options tab, select the sort option, and click the right arrow. The report columns will be sorted in the order in which they appear in the list on the right side of the Sorting Options tab. Then, select Ascending or Descending, and press Enter or click Submit.

      For each date listed, the report indicates whether the utility was enabled or not enabled. If the utility did not run that day, Subfield 9 utility not enabled appears without any processing information.

      If the utility was run that day, Subfield 9 utility enabled appears along with the settings in the profile at the time the utility was run: Candidate tags will be removed that contain a date earlier than (number) (days, months, or years) ago. The following details of the processing are included: start time, end time, number of bibliographic records checked, and the number of tags deleted.
    • +
    +

    Community Reports

    +

    Standard Community reports are available to libraries with a license for Polaris Community Profiles.

    +
      +
    • New Community Records - The report shows the community records created after a specified date for a selected branch or for all branches. +
    • +
    • Updated Community Records - The report shows the community records updated after a specified date for a selected branch or for all branches. +
    • +
    +

    Item Reports

    +

    For Item reports, except for the In-Transit Items report, you can select all organizations, multiple organizations, or a single organization. If you select specific organizations, the report includes item record information only for items owned by the selected organizations.

    +
      +
    • Call Number List - Item record-level listing of call numbers to be used by catalogers who need to assign call numbers. The report is sorted by classification (ignoring prefix) so you can see the detail of already assigned call numbers and determine where to insert the call number you are constructing.
    • +
    • Claimed Items - Use this report to track missing items that patrons have claimed they returned or never checked out. The Claimed Items report lists all items that have a circulation status of Claim returned or Claim never had, and identifies the last patron known to have borrowed the item.
    • +
    • Collection Disposition by Material Type - You can select the branches to include in the report and group the data by branch or collection. The report shows the number and percentage of items currently on the shelf (or otherwise considered available), items out (unavailable but accounted for), or not accounted for (lost, missing). It shows a sum total for each branch and a grand total for all branches selected. If the report is grouped by collection, it is broken down by collection and shows the totals for each collection for all selected branches. The count is broken out by the material type within the collection.
    • +
    • Collection Material Type Analysis - This report is available from both the Cataloging and Circulation report menus. For the selected organizations, or for the whole library system, the report shows items grouped by collection, with a breakdown of material types within the collection. For each collection/material type combination, the report displays the number of items of each material type in the collection, as well as the percentage of the total number of items in the system that this collection/material type combination represents. At the bottom of each collection group, the report also shows the total number of items of all material types for each collection, and the percentage of the total number of items that this collection represents.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Only final item records are included in the Collection Material Type Analysis reports. Items without barcodes and on-order items are excluded from the report.

    +
      +
    • Collection Value by Organization - Use this report to list the monetary value of the collections for your organization. Select the organization or organizations for which you want to see the value of each of the collections.
    • +
    • In-Transit Items - Item records with a circulation status of In-Transit or Transferred on a date you select. The items are grouped by the “sent from” branch—the branch listed in the In-Transit/Transferred From field on the item record workform. This report can help you identify items that were sent to another library but may be delayed or lost in transit.
    • +
    • Inventory Exception - Incorrect Status - Lists items that had a status other than In during inventory. You specify a call number range and a cut-off date. Set the cut-off date to the day before the inventory date. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    • Inventory Exception - Misshelved - Lists items with a status of In that should have been in the inventory sequence but were not. You specify a call number range and a cut-off date. Set the cut-off date to the date you started the inventory. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    • Inventory Shelflist- Items inventoried using the Update InventoryDate view on the Check In workform. You specify the call number range to include in the report. Run this report after taking an inventory.
    • +
    • Item Records by Funding Source and Stat Code - This report lists items added within a certain time frame grouped by fund and then by statistical code. You select the organization or organizations, the begin date, and the end date. If your library uses Polaris Acquisitions, the fund used to pay for the items appears next to Funding Source. Under the funding source is the statistical code for the items.
    • +
    • Item Records That Do Not Display In PAC - Use this report to identify items that do not display in the public access catalog. You can select the organizations, collections, and material types for this report.
    • +
    • Item Records Without Barcodes - Use this report to identify items without barcodes for the selected organizations. You can select the organizations, collections, and material types for this report.
    • +
    • Item Status - Use this report to identify the number of items belonging to the selected organizations that have a certain circulation or hold status. The report is not intended to be an inventory of all items on the shelves. The following item statuses are included in this report:
      • Bindery
      • Claim Never Had
      • Claim Returned
      • Held
      • In
      • In-process
      • In-repair
      • In-transit
      • Lost
      • Missing
      • On-order
      • Out
      • Returned - ILL
      • Transferred
      • Unavailable
      • Withdrawn
    • +
    • Lost and Missing Items - Use this report to list all items with a status of Lost and all items with a status of Missing for the selected organizations. The lost and missing items are listed by assigned branch and the details include the call number, barcode, title, patron’s name and phone number, and the last transaction date.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Statistical Summary Report under the System folder provides detailed information about activity for the selected organization or organizations. See System Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Circ_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Circ_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4d0ddfe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Circ_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + Circulation Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulation Reports

    +

    Circulation reports help you track circulation, overdue items, overdue patrons, and delinquent patrons. To access these reports, select Utilities > Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Circulation in the Polaris Reports window.

    +
      +
    • Circulation by Collection Material Type Analysis - This report shows a count of circulations by material type within each system-defined collection for a time period you designate. It gathers statistics from the transaction file and will include circulated items that have since been deleted. The report counts checkouts and renewals as separate transactions; if an item is checked out multiple times, each checkout is counted. The report also displays the percentage of total items that each collection/material type combination represents. You can filter the report by one or more branches. The branches included are the circulated items’ assigned branches.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Cataloging Item report Collection Material Type Analysis provides the collection/material type information without circulation statistics.

    The Cataloging Item report Collection Disposition by Material Type shows the number and percentage of items currently on the shelf (or otherwise considered available), items out (unavailable but accounted for), or not accounted for (lost, missing).

    For more information about these and other Cataloging reports, see Cataloging Reports.

    +
      +
    • Circulation by Item’s Assigned Branch - For a specified date range, reports the number of items from the reporting (item) branch that have been checked out and renewed at other branches, as well as the reporting branch. You can see how many items have been shipped from the reporting branch to each loaning branch, and the total circulation for the reporting branch’s items. The report is sorted by organization, loaning branch, and item material type. You can filter this report by organization (item’s assigned branch).
    • +
    • Circulation by Item’s Loaning Branch - For a specified date range, reports the number of items from all the branches that have been checked out and renewed at the reporting (loaning) branch. The report also includes total items and total transactions. The report is sorted by organization, item’s assigned branch, and item material type. You can filter this report by organization (loaning branch).
    • +
    • Circulation by Postal Code - For a specified date range and organization, reports checkout transactions by postal code. The results are grouped by branch then country type (USA, Canada, Non-USA/Non-Canada, and No Postal Code). Details include the Postal Code, City, State, Number of Checkouts, Unique Patrons, and Unique Items followed by Totals and Grand Totals.
    • +
    • Circulation by Workstation - For a specified date range, reports the number of items that have been checked out and renewed at specified workstations. The report is sorted by organization, workstation, and item statistical class (item stat code), and includes totals by item stat code, totals for each workstation, and totals for each organization. You can filter this report by organization (workstation’s parent branch). The branch responsible for the checkout is the branch associated with a renewal. The report separates renewals done from PAC and lists them under System.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The report is based on workstation ID, so if a workstation is reassigned to a new organization the report will include transactions for both the old and new locations. This may also happen if a “floating” staff member at the workstation logs on to one branch, does transactions, then logs on to a different branch from the same workstation.

    +
      +
    • Delinquent Patrons - Identifies patrons (name, phone, barcode) who have system blocks, free-text blocks, or library-defined blocks on their records. You can filter this report by organization (patron’s registered branch).
    • +
    • Expired Reserve Items - Identifies items with a status of On Reserve, but for which the reserve period has expired. You may find this report especially useful at the end of an academic term. After you run the report, you can take the reported items off reserve, pull them from the shelves, and return them to the regular collection or otherwise dispose of them. You can filter this report by organization, and sort it by call number, title, and course name.
    • +
    • Fiscal Year Turnover Rate - This report offers similar information to the Turnover Rate report, but you can specify a fiscal year and that year’s starting month. The report then compares that year’s turnover rate information with the current year’s statistics.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Because this report gathers up to two years of data, it may take several minutes to complete.

    +
      +
    • Floating Items by Home Branch -  A statistical report that counts how many items from the home branch have floated to other branches. You can select one or more home branches and set a date range. The report includes the following information:
      • Home branch
      • Date range
      • Collection - Listed if an item from that collection has floated; includes the total number of items from that collection that have floated.
      • Material type - Listed if an item of that material type has floated; includes the number of items of that material type that have floated.
      • Float to branches - Lists each branch that items have floated to and the number of unique items that have floated to that branch. (The same item may float to a branch more than one time; the report counts an item only once.) If the same item floats to more than one branch, it is counted once for each branch.
      • Total number of items that have floated - Unique items only. The same item may float to different branches or float and return. It is counted only once.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Floating Items Setup - A summary report for the home branch showing the branch’s floating settings. You can select one or more branches. If a branch has not enabled floating collections but has defined values, the report prints the values. If a branch has not enabled floating collections and has not defined any values (collections, material types and so forth) the report is blank. This report includes the following information for each selected home branch:
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • All collections selected for floating
    • +
    • All material types selected for floating
    • +
    • All branches selected for receiving
    • +
    • On-shelf item limit for receiving branches
    • +
    • Total item limit for receiving branches
    • +
    • No matching collection allowed (yes/no)
    • +
    • Blank collection allowed (yes/no)
    • +
    • Floating enabled (yes/no)
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Floating Items by Assigned Branch - A statistical report that counts how many items from other branches have been checked into the receiving branch. You can select one or more receiving branches and set a date range. The printed report includes the following information for each receiving branch selected for the specified time period:
      • Date range
      • Receiving branch name
      • Received items by collection - Lists the collections into which floating items were received and the total number of items received into each collection.
      • Received items by material - Lists the material types of floating items that were received and the total count for each material type.
      • Previous branch (the last assigned branch of an item) - Lists each branch and the number of items received from that branch.
      • Home branch - Lists each home branch and the number of items received from that branch.
      • Total number of (unique) items received - The number of unique items. If a particular item floated out to another branch and then floated back at a later time, the item is counted only once.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Hourly Circulation Report - Counts in-library check-out and renewal transactions for a selected date range by day of the week and by hour. (Renewals from Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC are not included.) You select one, several, or all branches in the system and specify a date range. The report will include transactions from the beginning of the first day through and including the end of the final day. The report is divided into sections by selected branch, and sorted within each branch section by day, then by hour; a grand total for all selected branches is included. Report output columns include:
    • +
    • Day of week and hour of day - The report breaks out each hour of the day in which transactions occurred starting from 12:00 a.m. It repeats each day with an hourly unit during which transactions occurred. The report lists only the hours with transactions. If no circulation transactions occurred for an hourly period, that period does not appear in the report; if no circulation transactions occurred for an entire day, that day is listed in a single line with 0  total check-outs.
    • +
    • Total circulation - Total transactions for each branch.
    • +
    • In-House Use - Reports the number of items used in a specified organization, sorted by material type. These counts are taken from the Year-to-date in-house usage counter and Lifetime in-house usage counter in the item records. The Year-to-date counter is a count of everything checked in, through InHouse mode, since the last time the site did an item record fiscal year-end rollover. The Lifetime counter is a continuous counter. Both counters follow the site’s year-end rollover schedule.
    • +
    • Item Circulation by Collection - For the specified date range and the selected circulating organization(s), reports the number of items by collection that have been circulated, the number of check-out transactions, and the number of renewal transactions. The report is sorted by the circulating (transacting) branch and collection. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This report includes on-the-fly and QuickCirc items. A similar report, constructed in Polaris SimplyReports, also includes these ephemeral items in the count but does not assign them a collection code.

    +
      +
    • Item Circulation by Item Statistical Code - For a specified date range, reports the number of items by statistical code that have been circulated, the number of check-out transactions, and the number of renewal transactions. Check-out transactions include those made in the staff client, offline/bookmobile, Polaris ExpressCheck, and SIP self-check. Renewals include these sources as well as renewals from PAC. The report is sorted by organization and statistical code. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Item Circulation Statistics - For a specified date range, reports the number of items by material type that have been circulated, the number of check-out transactions, and the number of renewal transactions. The report is sorted by organization and material type. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Long Overdue Items - Lists items that are currently long overdue; includes assigned branch, call number, title, item barcode, check-out date, due date, date of last notice, patron, and patron barcode for each item. The report is sorted by organization and call number. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Overdue Items - Lists items that are currently overdue and long overdue; includes assigned branch, call number, title (with issue designation for serials), item barcode, due date, patron and patron’s branch, and patron’s telephone number for each item. This report helps you confirm that the reported items are not on the shelf before sending overdue notices. The report is sorted by organization and call number. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Overdue Patrons - Identifies patrons from the reporting library who currently have overdue or long overdue items, including detailed information about the patron and the items. The report is sorted by organization and patron name. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Overdue Items report identifies patrons from other libraries who have overdue items.

    +
      +
    • Overdue Reserve Items - Lists reserve items with a status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve that are checked out and overdue. You can use this report to contact patrons with overdue reserve items. It includes the title, material type and barcode, due date, course, and the borrowing patron’s telephone number and registered branch. You can filter the report by reserve item branch, and sort it by branch, call number, course name, due date, or title.
    • +
    • Patron Circulation by Statistical Class - This report shows the number of circulation transactions by patron statistical class that occurred during a specified date range for a selected branch or branches. The report is grouped by branch and then by patron statistical class. Under each branch heading, the following columns appear:
      • Patrons - The total number of patrons in the statistical class.
      • Check-outs - The number of checkout transactions associated with the patrons in this statistical class for the specified time period.
      • Renewals - The number of renewal transactions associated with the patrons in this statistical class for the specified time period.
      • Total check-outs + renewals - The total number of checkout and renewal transactions associated with the patrons in this statistical class for the specified time period.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Patron Circulation Statistics - For a specified date range, reports the number of circulation transactions (check-outs and renewals), according to patron code. This report measures circulation activity, not the number of items circulated. The report is sorted by branch name, in alphabetical order. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Patron Code Statistics - For a specified date range, reports the number of patrons that have done check-outs and renewals, according to patron code and statistical class code. The report is sorted by organization, patron code, and statistical class. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Patron Cross Borrowing - For a specified date range, reports the number of borrowers by patron code who were registered at a library other than the transacting library; includes the number of circulation transactions (check-outs and renewals) done by each patron. The report is sorted by organization (transacting library), patron library, and the number of circulation transactions (highest to lowest). You can filter the report by organization (transacting library).
    • +
    • Patron Lost Items by Owning Branch - Lists lost items assigned to a specific branch, broken down by the registered branches of the patrons who lost the items. You can set a date range and filter the report by organization. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Circulation in the Polaris Reports dialog box.
    • +
    • Payment Distribution Report - For a specified date range, for all or select branches, reports the money that was taken in at a branch for items belonging to other branches. Payments consists of all overdue, replacement, and processing fees.
    • +
    • Receipt Delivery Failure - Lists the patron barcode, patron name, carrier name, delivery address, subject, and failure date for receipts that failed to be delivered to patrons.
    • +
    • Remove Patron ID Report - When you enable patron ID purging, you can run a report to track the number of patron IDs purged during a time period you specify. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, select Circulation in the Polaris Reports dialog box, and double-click Remove Patron ID from circ transactions process log. You set transaction start and end date parameters for this report. The report includes Organization (transacting organization), Transaction Start Date (starting date of the purged transactions), Transaction End Date (ending date of the purged transactions), a count of the patron IDs removed from transactions for the specified period, a count of the patron IDs removed from item record histories for the specified period, and total IDs removed. (If the same patron ID occurs more than once in an item record history, each occurrence is counted.)
    • +
    • Reserve Item Records - Lists all reserve item records by assigned branch, regardless of the reserve status; includes call number, barcode, title, material type, course information, reserve start/end date, and reserve status. You can filter this report by organization, and sort it by reserve status, title, call number, and course name.
    • +
    • Reserve Shelf List - Lists reserve items currently on reserve (status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve). You can use this report as a shelf list to check all items that should be currently reserved at the library. The report includes the circulation status of each item, as well as other item and course information. You can filter this report by organization, and sort it by call number, title, and course name. If an item is on reserve for more than one course, the report lists the item more than once.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can send the Reserve Statistics by Course report as a notice to the primary and alternate instructors linked to the active courses.

    +
      +
    • Reserve Statistics by Course - Lists reserve items currently on reserve (status of On Reserve or Permanent Reserve) for a course with a status of Active, and the number of times each item has been checked out. For example, this report is useful if an instructor asks whether items on reserve for a particular course are circulating. You run the report for a selected course/section number or multiple course/section numbers at a particular branch. Items that circulate while on reserve also increment the year-to-date circulation counter in the primary item record. Reserve circulations are included in the standard circulation statistical reports.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The turnover rate is the number of items circulated divided by the total number of items owned. Two reports calculate turnover rate by collection or item statistical code, for a selected branch or multiple branches. These reports can help you determine, for example, how heavily a collection is used in relation to the size of the collection:

    +
      +
    • Top Circulating Titles by Collection - Lists the top circulated titles, organized by selected branch and collection, for a specified date range. You select one, several, or all branches in the system and specify a date range, collection, and number of titles to show. The branches are items’ assigned branches. The report will count check-out and renewal transactions for the date range from the beginning of the first day through and including the end of the final day. The report is divided in to sections by items’ assigned branch, and sorted within each branch section by collection name and then by titles according to circulation count (high to low). The columns include the following information:
    • +
        +
      • Collection +
      • +
      • Titles within collection +
      • +
      • Count of circulations for each title - Each checkout and each renewal is counted for each title regardless of check-out branch or patron’s branch. The titles with the highest circulation numbers appear in the report. If there are fewer than the specified number of circulated titles in a collection, the reports lists all the titles that have circulation counts. If some titles have the same count, the report lists each, up to the specified number of titles.  If a collection has no circulating titles, it is not listed in the report.
      • +
      +
    +
      +
    • Turnover Rate - This report counts all item check-out and renewals where the item’s assigned branch matches a selected branch or branches and the transaction date is within the selected date range. You specify whether to report by collection (the default) or by item statistical code. For each selected branch, the report lists each collection or item statistical code that has had circulation, the total items in the collection or statistical code, the number of circulations for each collection or statistical code, and the corresponding turnover rate (circulated items/total items) expressed as a decimal figure, and the totals of these figures for each branch. If the report includes more than one branch, combined totals for the selected branches are also included.
    • +
    +

    Notes:
    The item count is based on the number of items in the assigned branch’s holdings on the date the report is run.

    Check-out and renewal transactions are counted without regard to the transacting patron. That is, if the same patron checks out the same item 12 times, 12 transactions are counted.

    The patron’s registered branch is not considered in any way.

    If an item is put in transit to fill a hold at another branch and is checked out from that branch, the transaction is counted.

    +
      +
    • Uncirculated Items - Identifies items with little or no circulation since their creation date, to help you remove them from the collection. You specify the item record creation date and circulation thresholds. The report lists all items created before the specified date with a record status of Final that have the specified number or fewer circulations. The default number is 0; that is, no circulations. The report includes the total number of circulations and the last circulation date for reference, and is sorted by organization and call number. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Statistical Summary - To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box. See System Reports.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_a_report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_a_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e15daf59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_a_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customize a report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customize a Report

    +

    To customize reports, you must have Microsoft’s Visual Studio installed. You must also have rights to customize the reports. If your organization has Polaris SimplyReports, and you have the required permissions, you can customize a report created in SimplyReports and make it available from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. For more information, see SimplyReports online Help. When you customize a report, it is saved in the Custom folder for your organization.

    +

    Note: +
    When you place a custom report in a new folder, click Refresh Reports on the Polaris Reports toolbar to see the new folder.

    +

    To generate a custom report:

    +

    Important:
    If you save a custom report in a folder other than Custom, it will be overwritten when a new Polaris release is installed.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities | Reports and Notices. The Polaris Reports window appears.
    2. +
    3. Select the subsystem folder for the type of report you want to customize. The reports related to the subsystem appear.
    4. +
    5. Select the report you want to customize, right-click, and select Customize.
    6. +
    +

    A copy of the report is saved in the Custom folder on the reports server.

    +
      +
    1. To save the copy to the workstation that has Visual Studio.Net:
      1. Click the Start button on the desktop. In the search box, type the address of the reports folder on the server with Polaris reports, and click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Example:
    If your reports server is PolarisServer, type http://PolarisServer/reports.

    +
    +

    The Report Manager home page appears.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Polaris | Custom on the Polaris reports page.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    + ReportMngrHome.gif 

    +
    +

    The Custom page opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the report you want to edit.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    + custrep.gif 

    +
    +

    The report you selected appears in the View tab.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Properties tab. The Properties tabbed page appears.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    + ReportManProp.gif 

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Select Edit under Report Definition. A message asks whether you want to open or save the report.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save. Another message informs you that the download is complete.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Save the report to a location accessible to VisualStudio.Net.
    2. +
    3. Select Start on the desktop, and select Programs | Visual Studio. Visual Studio opens.
    4. +
    5. Select File | New Project.
    6. +
    +

    + busiintel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Business Intelligence Project in the Project Types list.
    2. +
    3. Set up a new Reports project.
    4. +
    5. Open the project, and add your report to the project.
    6. +
    +

    + SolExpl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Customize the report using any features available in the application.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Follow the instructions in your Microsoft manual or go to Microsoft’s Web site for information on using VisualStudio to customize reports.

    +
      +
    1. When you have finished customizing the report, save the customized version in the Custom folder on the report server.
    2. +
    3. Open the Custom folder, select the customized report, and select the Properties tab on the report page.
    4. +
    5. Click Update to update the report definition in the Polaris Reports Manager.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_an_internal_report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_an_internal_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55478049 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Customize_an_internal_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customize an internal report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customize an Internal Report

    +

    You can customize Polaris internal reports, such as purchase orders, using Reporting Services. To customize an internal report:

    +
      +
    1. Depending on your Windows version, press the Windows logo key winlogo.gif and press R, or select Start, Run.
    2. +
    3. In the Run dialog box, type the address of the reports folder on the server with Polaris reports, and click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Example:
    If your reports server is PolarisServer, type http://PolarisServer/reports.

    +

    The Report Manager home page appears.

    +

    + ReportMngrHome00011.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Polaris. The Polaris folder appears.
    2. +
    +

    + polarfold.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the System folder. The System folder appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Internal folder. The Internal folder appears with a list of the internal reports that you can customize.
    2. +
    +

    + internalreplist.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Show Details. The details view of the internal reports appears.
    2. +
    +

    + detailsview.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the internal report you want to modify.
    2. +
    3. Click the Properties button propintrep.gif. The Properties view appears.
    4. +
    +

    + proppg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Edit. The File Download dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save. The Save As dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the copy of the report anywhere, for example on your desktop.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This is just a temporary location until the report is edited and uploaded into Reporting Services.

    +
      +
    1. Depending on your SQL version, click Start on the desktop, and select Programs > Visual Studio.NET or SQL Business Intelligence Studio. Visual Studio.Net or SQL Business Intelligence Studio opens.
    2. +
    3. Select New Project.
    4. +
    5. Select Business Intelligence Project in the Project Types list.
    6. +
    7. Set up a new Reports project.
    8. +
    +

    Tip:
    Follow the instructions in your Microsoft manual or go to Microsoft’s Web site for information on using VisualStudio.NET and customizing reports.

    +
      +
    1. Open the project, and add your report to the project.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This is a copy of the report on your desktop. Delete the version on your desktop to make sure you upload the edited report.

    +
      +
    1. Customize the report, and upload it to Reporting Services to the following location:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the folder does not exist, click New folder and create it: Polaris/custom/all/system/internal for system-wide customized internal reports or Polaris/custom/branch name/system/internal for branch-specific customized internal reports.

    +
      +
    • To customize the internal report for your entire system, upload it to Polaris/custom/all/system/internal
    • +
    • To customize the internal report for your branch, upload it to Polaris/custom/branch name/system/internal
    • +
    +
      +
    1. After the report is uploaded, select Datasource, Polaris, Shared Data Source.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the report name includes underscores, replace them with spaces.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Apply button.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/E-mail_save_or_print_a_report_using_the_toolbar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/E-mail_save_or_print_a_report_using_the_toolbar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8360f83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/E-mail_save_or_print_a_report_using_the_toolbar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + E-mail, save, or print a report using the toolbar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Mail, Save, or Print a report from Adobe Reader

    +

    To e-mail, save, or print a report in pdf format from Adobe Reader:

    +
      +
    1. Generate a report. See Generate a report. The report pdf appears in Adobe Reader.
    2. +
    3. If the e-mail and print icons are not displayed in the toolbar, right-click in the toolbar area at the top of Adobe Reader to display the menu.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    Once you set up the toolbar icons for e-mailing, saving, and printing a report, they appear the next time you open Adobe Reader.

    +
      +
    1. Select File from the menu to list the tools.
    2. +
    3. Select Print > Send File, and Save. Or, select Show All File Tools. The selected file tools are displayed in the toolbar.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you want to save the report with a different name, select File > Save as.

    +
      +
    1. Select the appropriate icon to print, email, or save the report.
    2. +
    3. Close Adobe Reader.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Generate_a_report.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Generate_a_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0968dd6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Generate_a_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Generate a report + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Generate a Report

    +

    To generate a report:

    +

    Tip:
    Each time a report is run in Polaris, the report output is saved to the My Reports folder of the user logged into the staff client. It may be necessary after time to delete older files from this folder.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities > Reports and Notices. The Polaris Reports window appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If running the same report each day, only the first run of the report is saved. However, when running workslips in Acquisitions, each one is saved as a different file.

    +
      +
    1. Select the subsystem folder for the type of report you want to generate. The reports related to the subsystem appear.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Some reports are grouped together under folders within the subsystem folders. Open the folder to select the report.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the report you want to generate. The Report Wizard dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Depending on the report type, you may need to select the organization or organizations, date ranges, or other parameters in the Report Wizard.The branches and libraries that appear in the Organizations box depend on the settings in the Staff Client Report Server profile in Polaris Administration. See Specifying Report Servers.

    +

    Tip:
    If you are entering start and end dates, and you want to include data from today, make sure the End date you enter is tomorrow’s date. If you enter today’s date as the end date, the report may not include data from today.

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization or organizations (or select All for all organizations) and other parameters, such as the start date and end date for the report.
    2. +
    3. If the Report Wizard has a Sort tab, click the tab, and select the sort option you want for the report.
    4. +
    5. Press Enter or click Submit.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    To cancel the report, press Esc or click Cancel.

    +

    The Report pdf appears in Adobe Reader unless you have chosen a different format. See Report Output Types.

    +
      +
    1. Save, print, or e-mail the report. See E-mail, save, or print a report using the toolbar.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The information for the report you just generated stays in the cache for approximately 30 minutes. If you run the same report again within 30 minutes, the information may be from the previous report.

    +

    Printing Long Reports

    +

    When the Report Print Dialog box indicates a report will be very long, you can print specific pages or cancel the report. Select Specific Page(s) and select the range of pages to print. Then, click Continue to continue printing or Cancel to cancel the print. If you click Cancel, you can choose to generate the report in HTML format for faster results. See Report Output Types.

    +

    Report Output Types

    +

    To generate the report in a format other than PDF, use either of these methods:

    +
      +
    • Click the down arrow next to the printer button on the Polaris Reports window, and choose another format.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Generating the report in HTML format will give you faster results, especially when you expect a long report.

    +
      +
    • Select the report, right-click and select the format from the Output type sub-menu.
    • +
    +

    If you select HTML or MHTML, you view the report in a browser window. If you select Excel or Word, the appropriate application opens. If you select CSV, the report opens in CSV format.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Holds_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Holds_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0788227 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Holds_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + Holds Processing Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds Processing Reports

    +

    Reports related to holds are part of the regular holds processing workflow. They identify a branch’s hold requests to fill, requests awaiting pickup, unclaimed requests, titles that have a high volume of holds, expired requests, and other useful information. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Circulation, Holds in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
      +
    • Expired Requests - Lists expired requests with item and patron information. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Held Checklist - Lists the held items that are awaiting pickup by patrons; includes item and patron information, sorted by organization and call number. You may find it useful to run this report daily. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Holds Alert Reports - These reports list titles where the number of Active and Pending requests is equal to or greater than a selected number of requests, and count the number of items linked to those titles that might fill the requests. The linked items count includes items with a Final record status, and any circulation status except Claim Never Had, Claim Returned, Lost, Missing, Withdrawn, or Unavailable. You can select a pickup branch or branches to filter the Holds alert report by branch. You can select a library or libraries to filter the Holds alert report by library; in this case, the report includes requests where the pickup branch belongs to one of the selected libraries. Report output columns include the bib record ID, title, author, type of material (format), ISBN, local holds count, local items count, system holds count, and system items count.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    These reports are based on current holds data (all current Active and Pending requests), not transaction data. They do not report the number of requests that have been placed in the past, only the requests that are in the system when the reports are run.

    +
      +
    • +

      Holds Purchase Alert - Lists bibliographic records with hold requests on them, the number of requests, and the number of items that can fill the request. This report provides the library with an indication of which titles are most frequently requested and have too few items to meet the demand, and is useful for making purchasing decisions. Using the report parameters, you can do the following:

      +
        +
      • Set the levels for the number of holds on a bibliographic record and the number of items attached to a bibliographic record in the report. The report returns results based on the ratio of number of holds to number of items. The report also includes bibliographic records for which there are no linked items.
      • +
      • Include or exclude items that are not holdable (Lost, Missing, Withdrawn, Unavailable and non-holdable) by selecting Yes or No next to Include non-holdable items. The default is No - no non-holdable items will be included.
      • +
      • Filter the report by TOM by selecting one or multiple TOM filters. When TOM filters have been applied, only bibliographic records with the selected primary TOMs are included. For example, if you want to see Blu ray discs for which there are at least 10 holds and only 1 item, enter 10 in the Number of Holds box and 1 in the Number of Items box, and select Blu ray Disc in the Type of Material box.
      • +
      • Group the report by TOM, or leave it ungrouped.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The report includes the UPC code (if any) for bibliographic records with no ISBN to help you track non-print records.

    + +

    Note:
    You can also print the Hold Requests To Fill report and the Hold Requests to Transfer reports from the Request Manager workform (File, Print, Holds to Fill or Holds to Transfer). However, you cannot sort information.

    +
      +
    • Hold Requests To Transfer- Lists held items that need to be transferred to another branch location because the pickup branch was changed. In the Report Wizard dialog box, select a branch or branches on the Parameters tab, and select the Sorting Options tab. Select an option (CallNumber, Collection, Format, PatronName, Title) in the list in the left column, and click the right arrow to select the default sort order for the report.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If your holds shelf is arranged alphabetically by the patron's last name, you can sort the report by the patron's name and quickly locate the item to transfer.

    +
      +
    • Holds Fiscal Year Analysis- Shows the system-wide number of patron-placed hold requests per month, staff-placed hold requests per month, total hold requests for the year to date, and total hold requests filled, beginning with today’s date and going back to the month you specify. The report also includes the percentage of increase or decrease for each category compared to the same month in the previous year, and shows the grand totals for successive past years as available data permits. The report gathers the data from the holds transaction files. For reporting purposes, hold requests “placed” includes all requests that acquired a status of Inactive, Active, or Pending. Reactivated requests are not counted.
    • +
    • Local Hold Request and Item Counts by Branch - Lists Active and Pending requests for each branch where the branch is the pick-up library. The Number of Local Holds column shows the requests. The Number of Local Copies column shows the number of items owned by the branch, including items with a status of In, Out, Held, Transferred, In Transit, On Order, In Repair, and In Process. Items designated as Not Holdable are also included in the count. This column lists 0 for a title if the pickup branch does not own any eligible items, or if the title does not have any linked items. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Pending Holds Count - Counts pending requests per day for a selected pick-up branch or branches, and can help you gauge the amount of staff time spent on finding and pulling items that fill requests. You specify a date range and select an organization or organizations (the pick-up branches for the hold requests). The report lists all the holds requests that changed to a status of Pending during the selected date range for the selected pick-up libraries. If the same request went Pending more than once during the specified time period, it is counted only once. The report is organized by branch and lists one line per day during the time period with the total number of pending requests for that day. If the count for a day is 0, that day is not listed. For example, a selected date range of 30 days could include up to 30 lines for a branch, with a count of requests for each day. The reports also includes the total number of requests for each selected branch and the grand total for all selected branches.
    • +
    • Request Time to Fill - Shows how many days it took to fill hold requests during a specified time period, from the date the request was placed to the date the item was placed on the hold shelf. The report is organized in 10-day increment columns. That is, you see how many requests were filled in 10 days or less, how many were filled in 11-20 days, and so forth. A percentage of the total requests filled is also provided for each 10-day increment, as well as an overall average days-to-fill figure. (Note that the percentages for each 10-day column may not total exactly 100% due to rounding.) The report is grouped by pick-up branch, and you can filter the report by pick-up branch.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The report does not include requests that took more than two years to fill.

    +
      +
    • Unclaimed Checklist - Lists unclaimed requests with item and patron information. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To access the Statistical Summary report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System. See System Reports.

    +

    INN-Reach Reports - Polaris libraries that use INN-Reach integration can generate reports to assist in tracking items borrowed or loaned through INN-Reach. See: INN-Reach Reports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/ILL_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/ILL_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d6aa9c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/ILL_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + Interlibrary Loan Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Interlibrary Loan Reports

    +

    Interlibrary loan reports help you notify patrons when their ILL items have arrived, and track ILL statistics. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select ILL in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
      +
    • ILL Held Items - Lists all the held items obtained through interlibrary loan that are awaiting pickup by patrons; includes information about the items and patrons. You may find it useful to run this report daily, so you can contact the patrons waiting for the items. The report is sorted by organization (pick-up library) and ILL Request ID number. You can filter the report by organization (pick-up library).
    • +
    • ILL Request Statistics - For a specified date range, identifies how many interlibrary loan requests have been created for each patron code. The report is sorted by organization (pick-up library) and patron code. You can filter the report by organization (pick-up library).
    • +
    • ILL Request Statistics by Workstation - Tracks how many interlibrary loan requests were placed at each workstation during a specified time period. The report is sorted by organization (pick-up library) and workstation. You can filter the report by pick-up organization.
    • +
    • +

      Unclaimed ILL Items - Lists the unclaimed ILL items with a HoldTillDate less than the date on which the report was generated. Select one or more branches or select <All> from the Organizations drop-down list.The report is sorted and grouped in tables by the pickup branch. Each table is headed by Pickup Branch: [branch name], and within each table the data appears in the following columns, sorted by the patron name:

      +
        +
      • Patron Name
      • +
      • Call Number
      • +
      • Title
      • +
      • Patron Address
      • +
      • Patron Phone
      • +
      • Held Date
      • +
      • Held Until
      • +
      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Inventory_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Inventory_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..acc13495 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Inventory_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + Inventory Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Inventory Reports

    +

    Run these reports immediately after the inventory. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices, Cataloging, Item.

    +
      +
    • Inventory Exception Incorrect Status - Lists items that had a status other than In during inventory. You specify a call number range and a cut-off date. Set the cut-off date to the day before the inventory date. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    • Inventory Exception Misshelved - Lists items with a status of In that should have been in the inventory sequence but were not. You specify a call number range and a cut-off date. Set the cut-off date to the date you started the inventory. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Outreach_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Outreach_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a5eac6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Outreach_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach Services Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Reports

    +

    The following reports can help you organize and track outreach services processing. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Outreach Services in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +

    Pick List Reports

    +
      +
    • Outreach Services Pick List by Date of Next Service - After you generate pick lists for your outreach services patrons, this report lists detailed item information for each patron due for outreach services deliveries within a specified time period. You can filter the report by patron’s branch and date range, and sort it by a number of fields, such as title, call number, patron name, delivery mode and route.
    • +
    • Outreach Services Pick List by Delivery Option - This report lists detailed item information for each patron due for outreach services deliveries by a specified delivery option. You can filter the report by patron’s branch and delivery option, and sort it by a number of fields.
    • +
    • Outreach Services Pick List by Route - This report lists detailed item information for each patron due for outreach services deliveries on a specified delivery route. You can filter the report by patron’s branch and delivery route, and sort it by a number of fields.
    • +
    +

    Usage Reports

    +
      +
    • All ORS Patrons - This report lists all enabled ORS patrons (active and inactive), grouped by branch. It includes the patron’s name, ORS status, notes, last service date, next delivery date, route, and mode of delivery. You can filter the report by patron’s branch.
    • +
    • Item Circulation Statistics for ORS - This report shows the number of items checked out to ORS patrons within a specified time period. Items are grouped by material type and organization. The report includes the number of items by material type, checkouts, renewals, and total transactions. You can filter the report by branch.
    • +
    • Patron Circulation Statistics for ORS - This report lists the number of items checked out and renewed to ORS patrons, grouped by patron code, within a specified time period. You can filter the report by branch.
    • +
    +

    Reader Ratings Reports

    +

    Note:
    Rating average calculations do not include titles with a rating of 0.

    +
      +
    • ORS Rated titles - This report includes titles where the title appears on a reading history linked to an ORS patron, the patron’s registered branch is a selected branch, the title has an average rating that matches the selected ratings, and at least one item attached to the title appears in the selected patron reading histories and has a rating date within the selected range. You can filter the report by branches, ratings, and rating date range, and opt to combine branch totals or report each branch separately. The report lists title, author, format (bibliographic format), patrons (the number of patron records where the title appears), number of ratings, average rating, total number of items for the branch, total number of patrons for the branch, and grand totals for items and patrons when multiple branches are selected.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can sort this report by author, format, number of ratings, or title. You must select a sort option to run the report.

    +
      +
    • ORS Rated titles by patron - This report includes all titles where the patron is an ORS patron, the patron’s registered branch is a selected branch, the title has an average rating that matches the selected ratings, and at least one item attached to the title appears in the selected patron reading histories and has a rating date within the selected range. You can filter the report by branches, ratings, and rating date range. The report lists patron name, titles grouped alphabetically by rating, author, format, number of ratings, and average rating.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can sort this report by format, patron name, or title. You must select a sort option to run the report.

    +
      +
    • ORS titles not rated - This report shows the number of titles with no rating checked out to ORS patrons for a specified date range. You can filter the report by patron’s registered branch, and sort it by author, format, title, or total check-outs.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You must select a sort option to run the report.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/PAC_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/PAC_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f573cfdf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/PAC_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + PAC Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Reports

    +

    To access PAC reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select PAC in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +

    E-Source Reports

    +

    The E-Source report lists the subscription databases you have set up for searching from the PAC e-sources page, organized by branch. Information about each e-source includes the name, description, connection URL, message, categories/subcategories, restriction data, and connection data. You can filter the report by organization. For the purposes of custom reports, you can choose to log the transaction when a patron accesses an e-source target:

    +
      +
    • Transaction - E-Source Access
    • +
    • Transaction code - 2201
    • +
    • Transaction subtypes +
        +
      • 239 - Remote User flag
      • +
      • 240 - Selected Language ID
      • +
      • 241 - Name of e-source selected to view
      • +
      • 7 - Patron Code (if patron logged on)
      • +
      • 123 - Patron Assigned Branch (if patron logged on)
      • +
      • 33 - Patron Statistical Code (if patron logged on)
      • +
      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Public_Services_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Public_Services_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6845da5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Public_Services_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + Public Services Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Public Services Reports

    +

    To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Patron Services.

    +

    Patron Services Reports

    +

    The following reports can help you gather statistics about the patrons registered in your system and at specific branches.

    +
      +
    • Associated Patron Groups Report - Lists all patron records that are linked in associations (whether or not these are blocking relationships). You can select one, many, or all patron registration branches. The report lists all patron records from the selected branches that have one or more associated patron records, and lists the associated records for each patron. Each patron’s full name, patron code, and barcode is included. Patrons are listed in alphabetic order by last name.
    • +
    • Expired Patrons - Lists information about patrons whose registration has expired before a specified date. The report is sorted by organization and expiration date. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Inactive Patrons - Lists information about patrons registered during a specified date range whose accounts show no activity since the end date of the range. The report includes the patron’s last activity date. The report is sorted by organization, last activity date, and patron name. You can filter this report by organization. The Last Activity Date field in the patron record is updated in these circumstances:
      • Staff client - Item check-out; renewal; quick-circ item check-out; when a claim is made on an item
      • PAC - Log-in to patron account; placing and modifying hold and ILL requests; online renewal; patron information updates; payments; access to remote databases that require log-in
      • Polaris ExpressCheck, SIP self-check units - Check-out and renewal; patron account access; payments
      • Time and print management applications - Log-in
      • Inbound telephony - Account information access; item renewal
    • +
    • Patron Library Assigned Blocks - Lists patron records with library-assigned blocks. You can select one, many, or all organizations, and select one, many, or all library-assigned blocks. The list of block available for selection depends on the organizations you have selected. The report lists currently blocked patron records according to your selections, and totals the number of unique patrons. That is, if a patron has more than one block, that patron is counted only once for the total.
    • +
    • Patron Register - Reports the total number of patrons, by patron code, who were registered during a specified time period. The report is sorted by organization and patron code. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Patrons Registered by Zip Code - Reports the total number of patrons who were registered, according to postal code, during a specified time period. The report is sorted by organization and Zip code. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Patrons Without Addresses - Identifies and lists information about patrons registered before a specified date whose accounts do not include an address. The report is sorted by organization and patron name. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Patrons with Messages Report - This report provides a snapshot of read and unread messages currently in patron accounts where the patron’s registered branch matches the selected branch or branches and where the patron record has at least one message, read or unread. The report includes patron names, message text, whether the message is read, the date the message was created, and the creator.
    • +
    • Verify Patron Data - Lists patrons who are currently blocked because they have self-registered or they have made account changes through the PAC. The report is sorted by organization and patron name. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Statistical Summary - To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System. See System Reports.
    • +
    +

    Patron Financial Reports

    +

    To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Patron Financial in the Polaris Reports dialog box. The following reports can assist you in processing and evaluating patron financial transactions:

    +

    Note:
    For information on reports regarding patron credit card payments, see E-Commerce Credit Card Reports.

    +
      +
    • Billed Patrons - Identifies patrons who have received a billing notice. The report includes basic item information and the amount owed by each patron, sorted by organization name and patron name. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    • Collection Agency Detail - Reports all patron accounts submitted to collection that show account activity within a specified date range. It shows who has been reported during that time period, even though a patron’s standing with regard to the collection agency may have changed after that time period. You can also run it for a time period ending at the current date to get a picture of any patron’s current standing with regard to the collection agency. The report lists details of the account activity for each patron, grouped by organization. Organizations and amounts are based on the library’s settings for reporting level (system, library, or branch) and reporting branch (item’s branch, patron’s branch, or loaning branch) set in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    +

    Examples:
    Reporting level is Branch - Patrons with activity based on reporting branch (by patron’s branch, item’s branch, or loaning branch). That is, if the reporting branch is loaning branch, then a report for the branch will include all patrons reported because they checked the item out at the branch.
    Reporting level is System - Patrons with activity during the specified period, regardless of how they were reported (by patron’s branch, item’s branch, or loaning branch).

    +
      +
    • Collection Agency Summary - Identifies all patrons who have been reported to a collection agency and the amounts they owe, grouped by organization.
    • +
    • Daily Cash Drawer - Reports the financial transactions completed on a workstation, including the time of each transaction and the operator. The report includes totals for each type of transaction (Payment, Charge, and Waive), totals for all cash taken in and paid out, and the net balance for the specified time period. You may want to coordinate this report with the times that various staff members use a particular workstation for patron accounting transactions.
    • +
    • Donations - Credit Card Payments - PayPal® Payflow Pro®, Payflow Link, or Comprise™ SmartPAY™. Lists donation payments, including details such as the amount, the purpose, whether the donor wants a printed acknowledgment and, if so, the donor’s address; includes credits and voided transactions. You can filter this report by a date range and by organization. The report includes subtotals by organization. The organization is the branch the donor has designated to receive the gift. Use this report to distribute donations to the appropriate organizations. Run the report at the system level to view voided transactions.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Printed acknowledgments are not automatically generated. Using the information on the report, you can create and send your own acknowledgments.

    +

    Note:
    The Donations - Credit Card Payments report records payments made through Payflow Link, but do not reflect credit or void transactions.

    +
      +
    • Financial Transaction Summary by Fee Reason - Reports patron financial transactions, organized by transaction (fee) reason, for a selected transaction date range. You can select one, many, or all branches (transacting organizations). If the transaction is a payment, waive, or refund, the transaction is included even if the initial charge was prior to the date range. You can also choose to include or exclude credit card transactions. The detail section of the report lists transactions grouped by transaction reason (such as overdue item) and the total payments for that reason. Transaction details include the date, amount, payment method, operator, and patron barcode, and are sorted by transaction date/time. The summary section of the report lists the totals for all branches included in the report, with the total amounts for each transaction reason. A separate summary reports the total of all debit transactions. These include refunds from payments, refunds from deposits, and credits from deposits. (Individual debit transactions are not included in the report detail.) A separate summary for waive transactions is also included. The following patron financial transactions are included:
      • Charges - A charge may be created manually by staff, created automatically by a process such as an overdue or hold request, or created by a third-party device.
      • Payments - A payment may be made by staff in the staff client, by the patron from PAC, or via a third-party device.
      • Waives - Waives may be created manually, or automatically when a lost item is returned. A total of all waives is included in a separate summary at the end of the report, but individual waive transactions are not included in the detail section of the report.
      • Refunds - Cash or check refunds. These are summarized at the end of the report but are not included in the detail section of the report.
      • Credits - Amounts are credited to a patron account under certain circumstances, such as when a lost and paid for item is recovered. Staff members with appropriate permission can manually create a credit.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Deposits and deposit returns are not included in the reported patron financial transactions.

    +
      +
    • Financial Transaction Summary by Payment Type - This report is similar to the Financial Transaction Summary by Fee Reason report, but lists only payment transactions. All payment methods are included. The detail section of the report lists the transaction date, transaction reason, item barcode and title if applicable, operator, workstation, patron barcode, and amount. This section is grouped by payment method and sorted by transaction date/time. The summary section of the report includes the total for each payment method, the total for all payment methods per branch, and grand totals for all selected branches.
    • +
    • Fines and Fees - Lists fines and fees transactions according to transaction type (such as payments, waives, refunds, and charges), during a specified time period. The report provides detailed information on each transaction, including the transaction date, reason, and amount; the item barcode and title; the computer workstation and operator; the patron barcode; and totals for each transaction type and library. Charges are listed on the report according to the governing library for fine calculation. Payments, credits, and waives are listed according to the library where the transaction took place. You can filter this report by organization, including the system organization. If you prefer a summary, run the Fines and Fees Summary report.
    • +
    • Fines and Fees Summary - For a specified date range, reports the total amounts for fines and fees transactions (for example, payments, waives, refunds, and charges), according to transaction type. You can filter this report by organization, including the system organization.
    • +
    • Fines by Amount - This report provides basic information about patrons with account charges in a specified range of amounts. You select one, several, or all branches in the system and specify a fine amount range. The branches are patrons’ branches; for the fine amount range, valid From and To values are $0.00 up to  $9,999,999.99. The To value must be greater than the From value. (The amount includes all charges, not just fines.) The report lists all patrons by selected registered branch who have any outstanding unpaid charges within the specified fine range. The report is divided into sections by registered branch. Within each branch section, the report is sorted by patron last name and amount. Totals of all amounts owed for each branch are included, as well as the grand total of amounts owed for all selected branches. Includes the following information for each patron:
      • Patron barcode
      • Patron name - Last, First Middle, Suffix
      • Patron code
      • E-mail address
      • Postal address
      • Phone - Lists all phone numbers and carriers, if appropriate
      • Charges - The total amount of charges owed.
    • +
    • +

      Waived Fines - Reports all waived fines during a specified period, including the staff member and computer workstation responsible for each waive transaction. The report groups the auto-waived fines (fines that are automatically waived at check-in, if any) and regularly waived fines (fines manually waived by staff members). It also includes an auto-waive total, waive total, and grand total for each patron, as well as a total for each organization. The report is sorted by organization, patron name, and transaction type (auto-waive and waive). You can filter this report by organization.

      +
    • +
    +

    E-Commerce Credit Card Reports

    +

    These reports help you track credit card transactions. To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select Public Services, Patron Financial in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
      +
    • Fines and Fees - Credit Card Payments - EnvisionWare, PayPal Payflow Pro, Payflow Link, or Comprise SmartPAY. Lists payments for charges, including details such as each patron’s total payment credit transaction ID, as well as individual charges and processing fees, the items associated with charges, and the patron barcode. Declined transactions, credits, and voided transactions are also listed. You can filter this report by a date range and by organization. The report includes subtotals by organization. The organization is the organization associated with individual charges on the patron’s account. The report does not include payments made through SIP self-check stations. The report is grouped by the ILSStoreOrderID, Patron Barcode and Date. If a patron makes multiple credit card payments in a single day, the payments will be grouped under the first transaction of the day.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Fines and Fees - Credit Card Payments report records payments made through Payflow Link, but do not reflect credit or void transactions.

    +
      +
    • Hosted Credit Card Payments - Payflow Link, Payments Gateway, or Comprise SmartPAY. Tracks credit card payments in the patron account made through the hosted gateway. You can set a date range and select one, several, or all organizations, and set a sort order by patron barcode, StoreOrder ID, or transaction date. The organization is the patron’s registered branch for fines and fees payments, or the receiving branch for donations.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If your library accepts credit card payments through a hosted gateway for reasons other than patron fines and fees or donations, such as gift shop purchases, those payments do not appear on the Polaris Hosted Credit Card Payments report. However, the transactions are available in the hosted gateway’s reports.

    +
      +
    • Refunds to Credit Card Payments - Payflow Link, Payments Gateway, or Comprise SmartPAY. Helps you track refunds to credit card payments that have been made in the Polaris patron account. Use this report to reconcile refund transactions made in Polaris with transactions in hosted gateways. You can set a date range and select one, several, or all organizations.
    • +
    +

    Active Network (Class) POS Reports

    +

    These reports help you reconcile Class POS transactions in Polaris. On the Polaris Shortcut Bar, select Utilities, Reports and Notices, Public Services, Patron Financial, Active Network POS.

    +
      +
    • Daily Cash Balance Detail - For Class POS customers. Reports payments by payment type per the POS detail during a specified date range. The report includes only those POS payments taken in Polaris.
    • +
    • Daily Cash Drawer POS - For Class POS customers. A copy of the Daily Cash Drawer report that includes the POS Transaction ID for payment transactions.
    • +
    • Non POS Payments - For Class POS customers. For a specified date range, this report lists all payments made in Polaris that did not go through the POS system.
    • +
    • Sales Summary Report - For Class POS customers. This report is comparable to a similar CLASS report that summarizes all payments, refunds, and adjustments by reason for a specified date range. You can select organization (including the system organization), workstation, and user parameters.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Serials_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Serials_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..92831240 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Serials_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Serials Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Reports

    +

    To access Serials reports, select Utilities from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, and select Reports and Notices, Serials.

    +

    Tip:
    There may be other unreceived issues or parts with a status of Never Published or Not Available. You can search for the issues or parts using the Find Tool, select Status in the Limit by box, and select the statuses.

    +
      +
    • Issues or Parts not Received - Lists the issues or parts that were not received as expected. Only the issues with a status of Expected, Pending Claim or Claimed are listed in this report.
    • +
    • List of Subscriptions by Publisher - Lists the subscriptions your library is receiving, according to the publisher in the linked bibliographic record’s 260 tag, $b. To generate the report, you specify a subscription record status (open, canceled, or all), an expiration date or date range, and the publisher’s name.
    • +
    • List of Subscriptions by Subject - Lists the subscriptions your library is receiving, according to the subject in the linked bibliographic record’s 6XX tag. To generate the report, you specify a subscription record status (open, canceled, or both), an expiration date or date range, and the subject. You can include multiple subjects separated by #.
    • +
    • List of Subscriptions by Supplier - Lists the subscriptions your library is receiving, according to the supplier linked to the subscription record. To generate the report, you specify a subscription record status (open, canceled, or both), an expiration date or date range, and the supplier’s name. You can select multiple suppliers.
    • +
    • Monthly Check In Statistics - The number of issues a library has received during a specified time period.
    • +
    • Renewal Reminder - Identifies the subscriptions due to be renewed within a specified time period. You can compare this report with the paper renewal list that the supplier sends to confirm that the library and the supplier have the same information about the subscriptions. Select one or more organizations (or select All), select the subscription start date and expiration date range, and the supplier or suppliers. The report lists the titles (grouped by organization and supplier) that are up for renewal. It also shows the total cost for each subscription and the total cost by supplier.
    • +
    • Serial Holdings Records by Branch - Lists the serial holdings records for a specific branch.
    • +
    • Subscription Cost Analysis - Provides a graphical representation of a subscription’s cost for the years that your library has tracked the cost in Polaris. You can set the report to show a single subscription or multiple subscriptions. You can also print the report from the Subscription Record workform (File, Print, Subscription Cost Analysis) to report on that specific subscription record.
    • +
    • Subscription Expenditure Prediction - Projects a library’s expenditures, based on a specified percentage increase. The report applies only to subscriptions with a status of open. You can also print the report for a specific subscription from the Subscription Record workform (File, Print, Subscription Expenditure Prediction).
    • +
    • Titles Not Automatically Renewed - Identifies subscriptions that were not automatically renewed, so they can be renewed manually. Select one or more organizations and one or more suppliers. The report lists the subscriptions by supplier, the status of the subscription, the fund that was used to pay for the subscription, the price, and the number of active and fulfilled.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Staff_and_Wkstn_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Staff_and_Wkstn_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..efabfe34 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Staff_and_Wkstn_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Staff and Workstation Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Staff and Workstation Reports

    +

    The following reports identify the staff members and workstations registered in Polaris.

    +
      +
    • Affiliated Branches of Staff Members - Lists the staff members associated with each branch, organized by system, library, and branch. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • Hierarchy of Libraries, Branches & Workstations - Lists the workstations assigned to each branch in the system, organized by system, library, and branch, including the computer names and workstation display names. You can filter this report by organization.
    • +
    • +

      Staff Member Permissions - This report lists a staff member’s permissions. Any permissions granted at the system level only or at the library level only (the selected branch’s parent library) are also included on the report. The report layout is landscape; it is sorted primarily by the control record name and secondarily by the permission name; and it includes the following columns from left to right: Control Record, Permission, Subsystem, Organization, Organization Type.

      +

      To access this report, select a single staff member in the Staff Member box; single, multiple, or all branches in the Organizations box; and single, multiple or all subsystems in the Subsystems box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Staff Member Permissions Comparison - This report is used to compare two staff members’ permissions by listing the permissions the staff members do not share. Permissions that the staff members have in common do not print on the report. The report layout is landscape; it is sorted primarily by the control record name and secondarily by the permission name; and it is divided into two sections headed by each staff member’s user name and user ID. Under each of the two staff member name headings, the report includes the following columns from left to right: Control Record, Permission, Subsystem, Organization, Organization Type.

      +

      To access this report, in the Report Wizard, select a single staff member in the Staff Member 1 box; a single staff member in the Staff Member 2 box; single, multiple, or all branches in the Organizations box; and single, multiple or all subsystems in the Subsystems box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/System_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/System_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c67395b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/System_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + System Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    System Reports

    +

    To access these reports, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +
      +
    • Statistical Summary - Detailed information about system activity, including new charges, money collected, refunds, amounts waived, and outstanding fines. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box.
    • +
    • The Hierarchy of Library, Branches, & Collections report lists all the collections assigned to each branch in the system, organized by system, library, and branch. You can filter the report by organization.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Telephony_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Telephony_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d1b4f14 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Telephony_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Outbound Telephony Reports and Troubleshooting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outbound Telephony Reports and Troubleshooting

    +

    Polaris provides the following reports to help you trouble-shoot problems with Telephony. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices, Notices to access these reports:

    +
      +
    • Telephony Delivery Failure Report - Lists failed telephone notices with their failure reasons. You can filter this report by date and reporting branch. It includes the patron's barcode, patron's branch, patron's name and telephone number, the failure reason, and the failure date.
    • +
    • Telephony Summary Report - Summarizes the number of calls made for each notice with their statuses, including failure reasons, in a specified date range. The report is organized by patron branch.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Inspect this report regularly. In this report, Unknown connection type indicates that a busy signal was received. A sudden spike in the number of busy signals received may indicate telephony board problems.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Using_Polaris_Standard_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Using_Polaris_Standard_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07fb9235 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/PIreports/Using_Polaris_Standard_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Using Polaris Standard Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Using Polaris Standard Reports

    +

    Polaris provides many standard and customizable reports to help you track all aspects of library activities. The default output format for a report is a PDF file, or you can choose HTML 4.0, MHTML, Excel, or Comma Separated Values (CSV). (Depending on the data in the report, the additional formats such as Excel and HTML may not produce the results you expect.) You can print or email a report from Adobe Reader.

    +

    To access the Polaris standard reports, select Utilities > Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut Bar and select a subsystem folder. A report may be located in a subsystem’s main folder or subfolder. Additionally, Notices may be located within a subsystem’s main folder, containing applicable subfolders. For example, all acquisitions reports are located in the Acquisitions folder, but cataloging reports are located in one of the following subfolders within the Cataloging folder: Authority, Bibliographic, Community, or Item.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, the settings in the Staff Client Report Server profile specify your report server, the organizations that you can select, and the number of entries in the report parameter lists. If your organization’s setting is Unrestricted, you can run reports for all organizations in your library system. If your organization’s setting is Restrict Organization to Library Only, you can run reports for your branch (the branch where you are logged in) and all other branches associated with your parent library. If your organization’s setting is Restrict organization to Branch Only, you can run reports only for your branch (the branch where you are logged in).

    +

    Tip:
    To generate, print, or customize reports, you must have the following permission in Polaris Administration: Access Reports and Notices.

    +

    Note: +
    INN-Reach is Innovative's user-initiated direct consortial borrowing system. If your library participates in an INN-Reach consortium, you can run INN-Reach reports. See INN-Reach Reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Polaris_Basics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Polaris_Basics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..73ef9faf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Polaris_Basics/Polaris_Basics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Basics Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Application Overview

    +

    Polaris is a Microsoft Windows-based client-server application. Staff members use staff client software, while the server stores, retrieves, and protects data.

    +

    Library staff and administrators use the staff client to do administrative, technical services, and patron services tasks.

    +

    Your patrons may use one or a combination of the following Web-based applications:

    +
      +
    • Polaris® PowerPAC provides Web-based access to library searches and services from remote computers, and from computers in the library.
    • +
    • Polaris® PowerPACChildren’s Edition is the Web-based application designed specifically for children’s use.
    • +
    • Polaris® Mobile PAC is the Web-based public access catalog that has been optimized for mobile devices. It provides simplified access to many of the features that are available in Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    +

    Your Polaris system may also include Polaris ExpressCheck client workstations for self-check and patron account access, Polaris Inventory Manager software and hardware, and other related products.

    +

    Certain features, functions, and user-interface elements are common throughout the Polaris application. See the following topics for more information on these:

    +

    Getting Started in Polaris +

    +

    Features, functionality, and navigation methods common throughout Polaris; how to use the Polaris Shortcut Bar and workforms; printing records; logging on and exiting Polaris; viewing available Polaris licenses.

    +

    Finding Polaris Records +

    +

    Basic searching; browse, keyword, and phrase searches; how to focus searches. Search tips.

    +

    Creating and Deleting Records +

    +

    Creating new records; linking records; deleting records.

    +

    Creating and Using Record Sets +

    +

    Creating record sets and using them to do bulk processing on many records simultaneously.

    +

    Using Polaris Standard Reports +

    +

    Generating standard and custom reports in Polaris; reference list of standard reports.

    +

    Using Online Help +

    +

    Help menu options; context-sensitive help with workforms and dialog boxes.

    +

    Basic Shortcut Keys +

    +

    List of shortcut keys formatted for convenient printing and clipping.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDODeepLinks/Deep_Links_to_Polaris_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDODeepLinks/Deep_Links_to_Polaris_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e85516bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDODeepLinks/Deep_Links_to_Polaris_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,254 @@ + + + + + + + + Deep Links to Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deep Links to Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC

    +

    Deep links allow searches for specific bibliographic records in your PAC from external sites. Such searches are launched, for example, when you use the PAC look-up feature on the sites of book and material vendors. This section lists the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC URLs for setting up links to specific bibliographic records in your PAC from an external site.

    +

    PowerPAC

    +

    All URLs should be prefixed with your site-specific base URL (example:
    mylibrary.com/polaris/). The URL is necessary for each link parameter.

    +

    ISBN

    +

    view.aspx?isbn={isbn},{isbn}, … +

    +

    Examples - Single and multiple ISBNs, any branch: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?isbn=1234567890 +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?isbn=1234567890,2222333344,987698765X +

    +

    Important: To limit by branch, you must use searchresults.aspx instead of view.aspx. Be aware of the following points:

    +
      +
    • Searchresults.aspx is subject to change as Polaris PowerPAC changes. You may need to change your link format accordingly. (View.aspx is stable from release to release.)
    • +
    • You must have already set up a custom “limit by” for assigned branch in Polaris Administration. For instructions, see Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).
    • +
    +

    Example - Branch-specific and limited to titles with linked items at that branch +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/search/searchresults.aspx?ctx=17.1033.0.0.1&type=keyword&by=ISBN&term=0375750126&limit=AB=17&page=0 +

    +

    Where 17 is the branch’s organization ID in Polaris. You can use the same format with other link parameters.

    +

    LCCN

    +

    view.aspx?lccn={lccn},{lccn}, … +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?lccn=2001627090 +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?lccn=2001627090,2001336783,85153773 +

    +

    Control Number

    +

    view.aspx?cn={control_number},{control_number}, … +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?cn=13243 +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?cn=13243,9999,24354,348 +

    +

    See also Limited Control Number.

    +

    Keyword

    +

    view.aspx?keyword={url_encoded_keywords} +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?keyword=cars +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?keyword=science+fiction+robots +

    +

    Title

    +

    view.aspx?title={url_encoded_title} +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?title=Misery +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?title=Punishment+Crime +

    +

    Title searches are keyword searches, and hits are returned regardless of the word order in the tag. If you want the title search to return only hits that match the order in the tag, you can have your vendor add a type=phrase query string parameter to the vendor’s template.

    +

    Example (type=phrase): +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?title=Crime+and+Punishment&type=phrase +

    +

    Author

    +

    view.aspx?author={url_encoded_author} +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?author=Shakespeare +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?author=John+Grisham +

    +

    Author searches are keyword searches to ensure that hits are returned whether the name order is first, last or last, first. If you want the author search to return only hits that match the order in the tag, you can have your vendor add a type=phrase query string parameter to the vendor’s template.

    +

    Example (type=phrase): +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?author=Grisham+John&type=phrase +

    +

    Subject

    +

    view.aspx?subject={url_encoded_subject} +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?subject=dogs +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?subject=History+Civil+War +

    +

    Subject searches are keyword searches, and hits are returned regardless of the word order in the tag. If you want the subject search to return only hits that match the order in the tag, you can have your vendor add a type=phrase query string parameter to the vendor’s template.

    +

    Example (type=phrase): +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?subject=Civil+War+History&type=phrase +

    +

    Series

    +

    Example: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?series=lonely+planet +

    +

    Combination: Author, Title, Subject

    +

    You can combine Author, Title, and/or Subject parameters in the same query.

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?author=King&title=Misery +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?title=Harry+Potter&subject=wizard+schools +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?subject=cabin+building&author=Thoreau +

    +

    UPC

    +

    view.aspx?upc={upc_code},{upc_code}, … 

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?upc=287986736748 +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?upc=289839472834,771826736475,112989783678 +

    +

    OCLC

    +

    view.aspx?oclc={oclc_number},{oclc_number}, … +

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?oclc=ocm12384675 +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?oclc=ocm768375267,ocm38916725,ocm11286756 +

    +

    Record Sets (Bibliographic)

    +

    See Create a URL Link to a Record Set in the PAC.

    +

    E-Source Targets

    +

    See Provide links to e-sources on external sites.

    +

    Limited Control Number

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC’s full bibliographic product page (title.aspx) also supports a deep link by control number for local titles. This limited-function deep link was added to improve link sharing on social web sites that the PowerPAC deep link format for view.aspx (see Control Number) did not support as well. The deep link for title.aspx supports a control number parameter (cn={control-number}) which, if present, searches for and goes directly to the PAC product page for the single, local bibliographic title with that control number.

    +

    {pac-root-url}/search/title.aspx?&ctx={ctx-value}&pos=1&cn={control-number} +

    +

    Examples: +

    +
      +
    • Any branch or language (no ctx parameter):
    • +
    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/search/title.aspx?&pos=1cn=12345 +

    +
      +
    • Branch organization ID is 83 (ctx=83):
    • +
    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/search/title.aspx?ctx=83&pos=1&cn=12345 +

    +
      +
    • Branch organization ID is 83, language is English (ctx=83.1033):
    • +
    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/search/title.aspx?ctx=83.1033&pos=1&cn=12345 +

    +

    Mobile PAC

    +

    All URLs should be prefixed with your site-specific mobile base URL (example: mylibrary.com/mobile/). The URL is necessary for each link parameter:
    {Base Mobile PAC URL}/view.aspx?{TYPE}={TERM}

    +

    Because Mobile PAC does not currently support Boolean searching, only single terms are allowed. The following access points {TYPE} are available:

    +
      +
    • ISBN +
    • +
    • LCCN +
    • +
    • CN - Control number
    • +
    • ISSN +
    • +
    • Title +
    • +
    • Author +
    • +
    • Subject +
    • +
    • Series +
    • +
    • Keyword +
    • +
    • brs - Record set ID
    • +
    • brsn - Record set name
    • +
    +

    In general, if a mobile device goes to a PowerPAC deep link and Mobile PAC supports the search criteria specified in the URL, the mobile device user is automatically directed to the Mobile PAC search results page. If Mobile PAC does not support the search criteria, the mobile device user is directed to the PowerPAC search results page.

    +

    However, if type=phrase is part of the PowerPAC deep link, the user is directed to the Mobile PAC search results page. Also, the user is directed to the Mobile PAC search results page when there are multiple terms for author, title, or subject in the PowerPAC deep link.

    +

    Examples: +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?title=time+to+kill&type=phrase +

    +

    http://mylibrary.com/polaris/view.aspx?title=time+to+kill&author=grisham+john +

    +

    Note:
    Although the user is directed to the Mobile PAC search results page in these cases, if the user then clicks the Search bread crumb in the Mobile PAC page header, the search form does not support the deep link search terms due to their complexity.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Baker_Taylor_Enriched_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Baker_Taylor_Enriched_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..49915f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Baker_Taylor_Enriched_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Baker & Taylor Enriched Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Baker & Taylor Enriched Data

    +

    You can use book jackets (cover images) from Baker & Taylor, and provide a variety of Content Cafe links on the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC product pages.

    +

    Note:
    For Baker & Taylor port access requirements, see Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access.

    +

    Note:
    If you allow patrons to save searches to run automatically, cover images are displayed in the results based on the Enriched Data settings for the patron’s registered branch. For more information about setting up saved searches, see Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

     

    +

    To set up Polaris to use enriched data from Baker & Taylor, including Content Cafe:

    +

    Tip:
    Cover images can be enabled for only a single vendor. Other enriched data services may be received from multiple vendors.

    +
      +
    1. Contact your vendor’s customer support department for help in obtaining your library’s connection and authentication information for this enriched data provider.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enriched Data. The Enriched Data dialog box opens.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click the Baker & Taylor tab, if it is not already selected.
    2. +
    3. If you receive cover images (book jackets) from Baker & Taylor, click the Cover Images tab. Then select (check) Enable.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you use Baker & Taylor cover images for rotating book jackets on the Polaris PowerPAC portal page, you must also supply Content Cafe settings. See steps 8 through 10. For more information about setting up rotating book jackets, see Set up rotating book jackets.

    +
      +
    1. In the URL Prefix (before ISBN) box, type the Web address and path to the Baker & Taylor content domain or server that provides book jacket images.
    2. +
    +

    This prefix is the part of the URL that comes before the title’s ISBN when a search is launched at the Baker & Taylor site for the book jacket image. The default setting is
    http://images.btol.com/ContentCafe/Jacket.aspx?UserID={site_userid}&
    Password={site_password}&Return=1&Value=

    +

    Contact your vendor to obtain the site user id and password to use in this setting.

    +

    The URL Suffix (after ISBN) setting is always &Type=S.

    +
      +
    1. If you receive other content from Baker & Taylor’s Content Cafe, click the Content Cafe tab.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable.
    2. +
    3. Type your Content Cafe user ID and password in the appropriate boxes. These are the same settings you use for Baker & Taylor cover images. Contact your vendor to obtain these settings.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +

    Polaris Bookstore with Baker & Taylor - See Enabling Online Book Purchases.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/ChiliFresh_Enriched_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/ChiliFresh_Enriched_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b756328a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/ChiliFresh_Enriched_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + ChiliFresh Enriched Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    ChiliFresh Enriched Data

    +

    ChiliFresh.com provides patron reviews and ratings in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. You can choose to display reviews written only by your own patrons, by patrons in a specific region, or by patrons at multiple locations. You can also choose to screen reviews before they are made available for viewing. The patron logs in with a user name (e-mail address) and password to write a review. The ChiliFresh Review Engine consists of a database of reviews that reside on a ChiliFresh remote server, so your servers are not burdened with storing and processing the reviews. The illustration is an example of ChiliFresh reviews in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    + +

    +

    ChiliFresh.com also offers cover images. If you subscribe to ChiliFresh Connections, a readers’ social networking tool available in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, you can receive ChiliFresh cover images at no cost. These images are displayed in the PAC and work with the ChiliFresh drag-and-drop feature to add covers to reader recommendations and virtual Connections bookshelves.

    +

    Tip:
    The PAC product page for a title displays a “drawer” for a large cover image when the large image is available from ChiliFresh. If the large image is not available, the drawer is not displayed.

    +

    Notes:
    For ChiliFresh port access requirements, see Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access.

    +

    Polaris Social, a separately licensed product, offers ChiliFresh Connections features integrated in Polaris PowerPAC. See Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.

    +

    For more information about ChiliFresh.com products, go to www.chilifresh.com.

    +

    To set up Polaris PowerPAC to use patron ratings and reviews from ChiliFresh.com:

    +

    Note:

    You can enable and receive enriched data from more than one vendor, except cover images. These must be enabled for one vendor only.

    +
      +
    1. Contact your vendor’s customer support department for help in obtaining your library’s connection and authentication information for this enriched data provider.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enriched Data. The Enriched Data dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Click the ChiliFresh tab.
    8. +
    9. To set up patron reviews and ratings, follow these steps:
    10. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Other Features sub-tab.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Enable.
    4. +
    5. In the Service URL box, type your ChiliFresh service URL as in the following example:
      http://chilifresh.com/on-site/js/polaris4.1-R2a.js
    6. +
    +

    Obtain your specific URL from ChiliFresh.

    +

    Note:

    ChiliFresh supports SSL (Secure Socket Layer). If you use SSL to secure the entire PowerPAC site, change the beginning of the ChiliFresh URL setting from http://chilifresh.com to https://secure.chilifresh.com.

    +
      +
    1. In the Account ID box, type your account identification code. Obtain your specific account code from ChiliFresh.
    2. +
    3. In the API Key box, type your API key. Obtain your specific API key from ChiliFresh. The key is unique for your account ID.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up cover images, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Cover Images sub-tab.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Enable.
    4. +
    5. Type the URL prefix and suffix for your ChiliFresh cover images account in the appropriate fields.
    6. +
    +

    Note:

    Mobile PAC also uses ChiliFresh cover images when these are enabled.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +

    ChiliFresh Connections integration - Polaris Social, a separately licensed product, offers ChiliFresh Connections features integrated in Polaris PowerPAC. See Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/EBSCO_NoveList_Enriched_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/EBSCO_NoveList_Enriched_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dae78e62 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/EBSCO_NoveList_Enriched_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + EBSCO’s NoveList Select Enriched Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EBSCO’s NoveList Select Enriched Data

    +

    If your library has a contract with NoveList Select, patrons see NoveList content in the Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC product pages. NoveList Select automatically provides the appropriate connections for your library's NoveList contract. If you have any questions or concerns about your NoveList subscription, contact EBSCO at novelistselectsupport@ebsco.com.

    +

    Note:
    NoveList works with customers to configure NextReads newsletters and subscription links.

    +

    The NoveList content contains no active links except in the NextReads newsletter, which offers links to related newsletters (NoveList-generated content) and a link to a subscription page (also NoveList-generated content). These links open separate browser windows. The Link to NoveList option opens the NoveList site in a separate browser window due to frameset security issues.

    +

    Note:
    For NoveList Select port access requirements, see Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access.

    +

    Updating the Library’s Holdings for NoveList Select

    +

    The accuracy of NoveList Select features such as Similar Titles depends on NoveList Select having up-to-date information about the titles in your library catalog. NoveList Select requires a CSV file consisting of one ISBN per line to collect this information. Polaris provides a SQL job, ISBN List, which is disabled by default. To generate the CSV file, enable the job, which is scheduled to run weekly (Monday at 1:10 am) by default. You can change the schedule if necessary. The job places the ISBNList.csv file in {Server - Active Node}/ProgramData/Polaris/[version]/Logs/SQLJobs. The file includes the ISBNs for bibliographic records where the ISBN is valid, the record status is final, and the record is set to display in PAC. For instructions about uploading the CSV file to NoveList, contact your NoveList support representative or go to:
    http://support.ebsco.com/help/index.php?lang=en&amp;int=novselect

    +

    You will need to upload the file regularly (typically once a month) to reflect changes in your catalog.

    +

    Set up Enriched Data - EBSCO’s NoveList

    +

    To set up Polaris to use enriched data from EBSCO’s NoveList:

    +

    Note: +
    You can enable and receive enriched data from more than one vendor, except cover images. These must be enabled for one vendor only.

    +
      +
    1. Contact your vendor’s customer support department for help in obtaining your library’s connection and authentication information for this enriched data provider.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enriched data. The Enriched Data dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Click the NoveList tab.
    8. +
    +

    The NoveList Select subtab appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type your Profile ID, password, and service URL in the appropriate boxes. Contact your vendor to obtain the unique first part of the Profile ID and your password.
    2. +
    +

    Important: +
    The Service URL is the same for all Polaris customers. You do not need to change it unless the NoveList Select Service URL changes. However, if you run Mobile PAC in SSL mode, the Service URL must begin with https://

    +
      +
    1. Click the Other Features tab.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click the check boxes for the other features you want to enable.
    2. +
    +

    If you enable similar titles, Goodread ratings, or Lexile number, the features appear on the search results and full display. If you enable separate content drawers, the selected features appear in separate content drawers on the full display. You can use the PowerPAC profile Product Page Categories: Configure to specify the order in which the NoveList content drawers appear and whether they are expanded by default. See Set SIP self-check parameters.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Enabling_Enriched_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Enabling_Enriched_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..70653b0f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Enabling_Enriched_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,229 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enabling Enriched Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enabling Enriched Data

    +

    The term “enriched data” describes a variety of third-party services that enhance a title’s display in the PAC. Depending on your contract with the vendor, the enriched data can consist of a simple book jacket image, or contents, excerpts, reviews, ratings, and other information related to the title. When enabled, enriched data is displayed automatically in both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results.

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC, when the patron clicks the title or the Full Display button for a title in the search results list, the additional information is available in a series of content “drawers” on the title’s product page. You can set the display order of the drawers and whether each is initially expanded or collapsed. See Configuring the PowerPAC Product Page. Reader ratings and reviews may also be displayed. When the patron clicks a link, the selected information is displayed in a lightbox window. For a description of the enriched content display in Mobile PAC, see Title Links: Enriched Content.

    +

    You can also display rotating book jackets on the Polaris PowerPAC home page, based on the images supplied by your enriched data vendor, that launch a search for the title. For more information, see Set up rotating book jackets. Book jackets are also featured in content carousels. See Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page.

    +

    Polaris supports enriched data from Baker & Taylor; EBSCO’s NoveList®; Syndetics Solutions (Bowker); Syndetics Unbound; ChiliFresh; OverDrive; and LibraryThing. Polaris Social, a separately licensed product, offers ChiliFresh Connections features integrated in Polaris PowerPAC. See Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.

    +

    Note:
    If you use Secure Socket Layer (SSL) to secure the entire PowerPAC site, and you use content from third-party vendors, be aware that your patrons may receive messages about allowing unsecured content. If you think the messages will be a problem, contact your vendors to see if they can use https. If so, you will need to change their URL settings from http to https when you follow the procedures in this unit.

    +

    Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access

    +

    If you lock down ports 80 and 443 on your PAC server, be aware that the following domains must be open on the PAC server for these features to work properly on any browser client, including remote access clients:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    FeatureDomainPortMore Setup Information
    Baker & Taylor Content Cafecontentcafe2.btol.com80 +

    Baker & Taylor Enriched Data +

    +
    ChiliFresh Reviews & Ratingssecure.chilifresh.com443ChiliFresh Enriched Data +
    Syndetics Reviews & Ratingswww.syndetics.com80Syndetics Enriched Data +
    ChiliFresh Connections +

    chilifresh.com
    secure.chilifresh.com

    +
    80
    443
    Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections +
    +

    If the PAC browser session is run directly on the PAC server, the following domains must be open for the features to work properly:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    FeatureDomainPortMore Setup Information
    Baker & Taylor Cover Imagesimages.bol.com80 +

    Baker & Taylor Enriched Data +

    +
    ChiliFresh Cover Imagescontent.chilifresh.com80ChiliFresh Enriched Data +
    LibraryThing Reviews & Ratingsltfl.librarything.com80LibraryThing Enriched Data +
    NoveList Select (Suggestions and More)imageserver.ebscohost.com80EBSCO’s NoveList Enriched Data +
    Syndetics Cover Imageswww.syndetics.com80/443Syndetics Enriched Data +
    Google Previewwww.google.com80Google Preview for PowerPAC Search Results +
    Google Analyticsgoogle-analytics.com80/443Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC +
    Google Mapsmaps.google.com80Map It (Google Maps) in PAC +
    ChiliFresh Connections +

    chilifresh.com
    secure.chilifresh.com

    +
    80
    443
    Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/LibraryThing_Enriched_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/LibraryThing_Enriched_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95311195 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/LibraryThing_Enriched_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + LibraryThing Enriched Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    LibraryThing Enriched Data

    +

    LibraryThing for Libraries offers tag “clouds” and similar tagged titles to patrons, available from the product page for a title in PowerPAC search results. Patrons can browse for titles by clicking tags and links to other editions. Tags are based on LibraryThing’s database. Tag features appear in a lightbox (an inline frame dialog box). The illustration shows an example of tag cloud links and the Tag Browser lightbox that appears when the patron clicks or taps a link.

    +

    + +

    +

    You can also offer reader reviews from the LibraryThing database. When this feature is enabled, a link to reviews appears under the book jacket image for the title in PowerPAC brief search results and in the full display for a title.

    +

    + +

    +

    You can determine the text of this link when you specify your configuration on the LibraryThing Web site. You can configure your LibraryThing settings to display reviews from all participating libraries, from specific selected libraries, or from your library only.

    +

    Notes
    For LibraryThing port access requirements, see Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access.

    +

    You can export your catalog data to LibraryThing in MARC21 format using Polaris Export Express, a separately licensed feature of Polaris SimplyReports. Using SimplyReports scheduling features, you can run exports periodically to update LibraryThing content for your new titles. See your SimplyReports documentation for more information.

    +

     

    +

    To set up Polaris PowerPAC to use tags, other edition,  and similar title links from LibraryThing:

    +

    Note:
    You can enable and receive enriched data from more than one vendor, except cover images. These must be enabled for one vendor only.

    +
      +
    1. Contact your vendor’s customer support department for help in obtaining your library’s connection and authentication information for this enriched data provider.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enriched Data. The Enriched Data dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Click the LibraryThing tab.
    8. +
    9. Select (check) Enable tags and related titles to display tags and related title links in PAC search results.
    10. +
    11. Select (check) Enable user reviews to display reader ratings and the link to reader reviews. You can select either or both of these features.
    12. +
    13. Be sure the Service URL setting is
      http://ltfl.librarything.com/connector/connector.php?systype=polaris&id=
    14. +
    15. Type your account number in the Account ID box. Obtain your specific site setting from LibraryThing.
    16. +
    17. Click OK.
    18. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Syndetics_Enriched_Data.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Syndetics_Enriched_Data.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cea76971 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOEnrich/Syndetics_Enriched_Data.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + Syndetics Enriched Data + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Syndetics Enriched Data

    +

    If your library has access to enriched content from Bowker’s Syndetic Solutions or Syndetics Unbound, you can use the Enriched data PAC profile to enable the display of the following content in the PAC:

    +
      +
    • +

      Cover images (book jackets) - Polaris automatically sends the ISBN, UPC, and OCLC number from the title’s MARC record to Syndetics. Be sure to include the UPC in the MARC records for these types of material to ensure that the appropriate cover images are displayed. Syndetics cover images may fail to display in search results for certain types of material, such as music CDs or DVDs, when there is no ISBN in the MARC record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you allow patrons to save searches to run automatically, book jackets are displayed in the results based on the Enriched Data settings for the patron’s registered branch. For more information about setting up saved searches, see Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Other Features - When Other Features are enabled, your library can display content such as video/music profiles and video game profiles in PowerPAC product page drawers and Mobile PAC product page links. If available, the enriched content displays in the PAC for video, music, and video game titles based on real-time matching on the product’s UPC, OCLC number, and ISBN. The Syndetics formatting is retained where possible. Once the content has been enabled for your organization, use the following Administration profiles to specify how the content displays: Mobile PAC profile, Product page categories: Configure and PowerPAC profile, Product page categories: Configure.

      +

      Syndetics Unbound Service - When the Syndetics Unbound service is enabled, your library can display enriched content including: cover images, annotations, author biographies, "look inside book" feature, awards, recommendations, reader and professional reviews, other formats, tag clouds, and other content.

      +
    • +
    +

    Syndetics also offers a Find Similar Titles link on the Polaris PowerPAC product page. The Find similar titles link opens a Web site in a secondary browser window where the patron can specify the characteristics of a title and get a list of similar titles available at the library.

    +

    Note:
    For Syndetics port access requirements, see Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access.

    +

    To set up Polaris to use enriched data from Bowker’s Syndetic Solutions:

    +

    Note:
    You can enable and receive enriched data from more than one vendor, except cover images. These must be enabled for one vendor only.

    +
      +
    1. Contact your vendor’s customer support department for help in obtaining your library’s connection and authentication information for this enriched data provider.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enriched data. The Enriched Data dialog box opens.
    6. +
    7. Click the Syndetics tab.
    8. +
    9. If you receive cover images (book jackets) from Syndetics, click the Cover Images tab, and do the following:
      • Select (check) Enable.
    10. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you use Syndetics cover images for rotating book jackets on the portal page, you must also supply Other Features settings. See Set up rotating book jackets.

    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • In the URL prefix box, type the Web address and path to the Syndetics content server or domain used for your account. The address must begin with http://www.syndetics.com/
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    PAC title lists and request pages use https, which is not supported by this prefix. If you want book jackets to be displayed on these pages, use the prefix https://secure.syndetics.com/

    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If possible, use the Fully Qualified Domain Name instead of the IP address. If your infrastructure does not allow this, your Polaris Site Manager can help you work with Bowker Technical Support to resolve connectivity issues.

    +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    • In the URL suffix box, type your client code after &client=.The suffix defines your specific account access information. Contact your vendor to obtain this setting.
    • +
    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. If you receive other Syndetics enriched data, such as video/music content and game profiles, click the Other Features tab, and do the following:
      1. Select (check) Enable.
      2. In the URL prefix box, type the Web address and path to the Syndetics content server or domain used for your account. The address must begin with
        http://www.syndetics.com/. Contact your vendor to obtain the account-specific portion of this setting.
      3. In the URL suffix box, type your client code after &client=. Contact your vendor to obtain this setting.
      4. Click OK.
    2. +
    3. If you use the Syndetics Unbound service, click the Unbound tab and do the following:
      1. In the Service URL box, type the URL for the Syndetics Unbound JavaScript library.
      2. In the Account ID box, type your library's account ID for Syndetics Unbound.
      3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Once the enriched content is enabled, configure the display of this content using the Product page categories: Configure profiles for PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. See Set up the PowerPAC product page and Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Edit_PowerPAC_messages_and_labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Edit_PowerPAC_messages_and_labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7fa5fffc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Edit_PowerPAC_messages_and_labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit PowerPAC messages and labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit PowerPAC messages and labels

    +

    You can edit messages on the system, library, or branch level. To edit messages, labels, and news headings for Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Multiple language strings. The Language Strings dialog box appears. The Field Name column lists the messages and labels. The Display Text column lists the text that has been defined for each message or label.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    For more information, see PAC Messages and Labels Reference.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, select the language you want to edit in the Choose Language box.
    2. +
    3. Highlight the text you want to change.
    4. +
    5. Open the text box by pressing ENTER or double-clicking the text.
    6. +
    7. Type the text for the message, label, or news heading. You can use letters, numbers, and spaces. Polaris PowerPAC can display approximately 150 characters and spaces in a single line for messages. Text strings work well as plain text. You can format messages to have up to four lines of text, with up to 250 characters. In this case, you can use well-formed XML or HTML tags to place bold and italic formatting in your messages. Use the tag <br/> to designate the start of a new line in the message. The formatting tags count as characters and there is a 255-character maximum.
    8. +
    9. To insert a diacritic character, follow these steps:
    10. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert. The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Press ENTER or select another message.
    2. +
    3. Repeat steps 4-8 for each message you want to edit.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box.
    6. +
    7. Select File | Save.
    8. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Editing_Messages_and_Labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Editing_Messages_and_Labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3237f7d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/Editing_Messages_and_Labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Messages and Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Editing Messages and Labels

    +

    Many messages and labels that appear in Polaris PowerPAC are stored in your database. You can easily edit these and save your changes in Polaris Administration, using the PAC profile Multiple language strings. If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, you can edit the messages for each supported language. Using the same method, you can also edit and translate the labels for the Narrow and Related Web parts that are displayed with search results.

    +

    Note:
    You can also use Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) to edit language strings in Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and several other Polaris products. WebAdmin is installed by default with Polaris Web Server software. The server must be registered as a workstation in Polaris Administration, and both the workstation and staff user must have the System Administration WebAdmin access: Allow permission. Access WebAdmin through your browser and click Help for more information. See Customizing Language Strings for details.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/PAC_Messages_and_Labels_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/PAC_Messages_and_Labels_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..52226126 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMessages/PAC_Messages_and_Labels_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,350 @@ + + + + + + + PAC Messages and Labels Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Messages and Labels Reference

    +

    You can edit the following messages and labels using the Multiple language strings PAC profile. See Edit PowerPAC messages and labels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Field Name

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Display Text

    +
    +

    Hours of operation message

    +
    +

    The message you specify here is displayed on the Polaris PowerPAC Hours page and the Mobile PAC Hours & Contact Info page. For more information about the PowerPAC Hours page, see Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar.

    +
    +

     

    +
    Item availability label: Due date Due
    +

    Item availability text: Available

    +
    +

    Indicates an item is available to request or check out. This text is used instead of the circulation status when you do not display the detailed item status in the Availability view.

    +

    Requirement: PAC profile settings Item Availability: Display status (Yes); Item Availability: Display detailed item status (No).

    +
    Available
    +

    Item availability text: No items found

    +
    Indicates that a title does not have any items associated with it anywhere in the entire Polaris system.No items available
    +

    Item availability text: No local items found

    +
    +

    Displayed when a selected title does not have linked items within the local area. The local area is defined by branches designated as local in the Item Availability Display Order policy table. See Setting Up Local and System Availability. This message displays if items do exist elsewhere in the Polaris system; otherwise, the message for the Item Availability text: No items found message is displayed.

    +
    +

    No items available locally

    +
    +

    Item availability text: Non-circulating

    +
    Indicates that an item does not circulate.Non-circulating
    +

    Item availability text: Not available

    +
    +

    Indicates an item is not available for check-out. This text is used as a status replacement when you do not display the detailed item status in the Availability view.

    +

    Requirement: PAC Profile settings Item Availability: Display status (Yes); Item Availability: Display detailed item status (No).

    +
    Not Available
    +

    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Assigned branch

    +
    The Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic) labels apply to the bibliographic elements that appear in the Narrow Web part, which can be displayed with the Polaris PowerPAC search results pages. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options. +

    Assigned branch

    +
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic):AuthorsAuthors
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic):AvailabilityAvailability
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic):Dashboard labelNarrow your search
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): DatabaseDatabase
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): LanguageLanguage
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Lexile Reading LevelLexile Reading Level
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Literary FormLiterary Form
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): PopularityPopularity
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Publication DatePublication Date
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Record OwnerRecord Owner
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Related WordsRelated Words
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): SeriesSeries
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): SubjectsSubjects
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Target audienceTarget Audience
    Narrow search dashboard (Bibliographic): Type of MaterialType of Material
    Narrow search dashboard (Community): Dashboard labelThe Narrow search dashboard (Community) labels apply to the Community Profiles elements that appear in the Narrow Web part. For more information, see Set Up the Narrow Your Search Web Part.Narrow your search
    Narrow search dashboard (Community):Event dateEvent Date
    Narrow search dashboard (Community):Primary NameOrganization Name
    Narrow search dashboard (Community): Services AvailableServices
    Narrow search dashboard (Community):SubjectSubject
    Narrow search dashboard (Community):Type of organizationType of Organization
    +

    Patron Access: Patron self-registration brief instruction

    +
    Displayed at the top of the patron self-registration form in Polaris PowerPAC. You can use this text to tell a new patron how to fill out the form, or include any message considered important to the self-registration process. +

    Please fill in the fields on this form and click Submit to register. Your online registration will be forwarded to the library. You can pick up your library card at the branch you specify in the form.

    +
    +

    Patron Access: Privacy message

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Confirmation message displayed when a patron initiates an action that saves information in connection with the patron account, such as saving a search or starting a reading history.

    +
    The feature you have selected is associated with personal data in your patron account. Such data may be accessed by law enforcement personnel without your consent. Do you wish to continue?
    +

    Patron Access: Self-registration acknowledgment message

    +
    Displayed when a patron successfully completes the self-registration form. +

    Thank you! Your registration has been recorded. Your library card will be ready for you at the library you designated in your registration.

    +
    +

    Patron Access: Self-registration warning message

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +

    Displays when a patron selects click here to register now on the PowerPAC patron logon pages. This message allows the library to comply with the Children’s Online Privacy Act.

    +

    Requirement: Self-registration warning message enabled (PAC profile Patron Access Options)

    +
    +

    In compliance with the Children\’s Online Privacy Protection act, you must be 13 or older in order to complete this registration.

    +

    Note:
    In the default message, the apostrophe character is preceded by a backslash \ for programmatic purposes. In your custom text, you do not need to use the backslash before an apostrophe.

    +
    +

    Related search dashboard (Bibliographic): Authors

    +
    +

    The Related search dashboard (bibliographic) labels apply to the elements that appear in the Related Web part for bibliographic records, which can be displayed with the Polaris PowerPAC search results pages. For information about specifying bibliographic elements and their labels, see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +
    +

    Authors

    +
    Related search dashboard (Bibliographic): Dashboard labelRelated searches
    Related search dashboard (Bibliographic): Other databasesOther Databases
    Related search dashboard (Bibliographic): Other searchesOther Searches
    Related search dashboard (Bibliographic):SeriesSeries
    Related search dashboard (Bibliographic):SubjectsSubjects
    Related search dashboard (Community): Dashboard labelThe Related search dashboard (Community) labels apply to the elements that appear in the Related Web part for community records. For more information, see Set Up the Related Searches Web Part.Related Searches
    Related search dashboard (Community): Event DateEvent Date
    Related search dashboard (Community): Primary NameOrganization Name
    Related search dashboard (Community):Services AvailableServices
    Related search dashboard (Community): SubjectSubject
    Related search dashboard (Community): Type of organizationOrganization
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Configuring_the_Mobile_PAC_Title_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Configuring_the_Mobile_PAC_Title_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86e2a9f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Configuring_the_Mobile_PAC_Title_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,987 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display

    +

    Using the Mobile PAC profile Title Display: Configure, you can do the following:

    +
      +
    • Select which data elements (tags, subfields, and indicators) appear in the brief, summary, and full displays. The brief display is the information shown in initial search results. The summary information is displayed on the Mobile PAC product page for title. The full display appears when the user clicks Details on the product page.
    • +
    • Show multiple instances of a single tag in the brief display: for example, multiple 856 $u fields.
    • +
    • Specify different elements for monographs and serials.
    • +
    • Edit existing data elements.
    • +
    • Set the display order of data elements.
    • +
    • Specify a custom label for each data element, and create translated versions of the data labels for languages you have licensed.
    • +
    • Specify additional data elements by selecting the tags, indicator values, and subfields to include in each custom entity.
    • +
    • Display a "requested" indicator for titles on which the patron has an active, pending, held, shipped, or located hold request. The indicator is a message: You requested this on [date]; the system supplies the date. The indicator can be displayed to logged-in patrons on the search results page, the title screen, the working title list, and saved title lists. The Brief and Full configuration view settings in the profile apply to both search results screens and title lists; that is, when you set the Requested date indicator to display in search results, it will also display in working and saved title lists.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    When enabled, the indicator is displayed only for requests that have been placed in Polaris. The requested indicator does not apply to integrated eContent titles.

    +
      +
    • Copy all these settings from any organization to any other organization.
    • +
    +

    The system uses the connection organization’s settings for the Mobile PAC profile Title Display: Configure, but the setup workflow is the same as that for PowerPAC. For detailed procedures, see Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    For libraries that use Polaris Community Profiles, a separate profile controls the Mobile PAC display of community information results, and a separate set of data elements is available for your community information displays. For details, see Configuring the PAC Community Results Display.

    +

    The tables show the default title display configuration for Mobile PAC bibliographic search results.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Mobile PAC Brief Display - Monograph

    +
    Mobile PAC Brief Display - Serial
    +

    Entity

    +
    +

    Display Order

    +
    +

    Label

    +
    +

    Entity

    +
    +

    Display Order

    +
    +

    Label

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Publication Year

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Publication Year:

    +
    +

    Publication Year

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Publication Year:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Mobile PAC Summary Display - MonographMobile PAC Summary Display - Serial
    +

    Entity

    +
    +

    Display Order

    +
    +

    Label

    +
    +

    Entity

    +
    +

    Display Order

    +
    +

    Label

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Publication Year

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Publication Year:

    +
    +

    Publication Year

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Publication Year:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Mobile PAC Full Display - MonographMobile PAC Full Display - Serial
    +

    Entity

    +
    +

    Display Order

    +
    +

    Label

    +
    +

    Entity

    +
    +

    Display Order

    +
    +

    Label

    +
    +

    Type of Material

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Format:

    +
    +

    Type of Material

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Format:

    +
    +

    Uniform Title (Long)

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Uniform Title:

    +
    +

    Uniform Title (Long)

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Uniform Title:

    +
    +

    Author (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Author (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Title (Long)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Title (Long)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Edition (Long)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Edition:

    +
    +

    Edition (Long)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Edition:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Long)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Long)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Description (Long)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description (Long)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Summary (Long)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Summary:

    +
    +

    Summary (Long)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Summary:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Long)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Long)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Series (Long)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Series (Long)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Volume (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Volume:

    +
    +

    Volume (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Volume:

    +
    +

    Frequency (Long)

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Frequency:

    +
    +

    Frequency (Long)

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Frequency:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Other Author (Long)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Other Author:

    +
    +

    Other Author (Long)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Other Author:

    +
    +

    Other Title (Long)

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Other Title:

    +
    +

    Other Title (Long)

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Other Title:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Long)

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Long)

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Long)

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Long)

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Long)

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Long)

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    LCCN (Long)

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    LCCN:

    +
    +

    LCCN (Long)

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    LCCN:

    +
    +

    ISBN (Long)

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    ISBN:

    +
    +

    ISBN (Long)

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    ISBN:

    +
    +

    ISSN (Long)

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    ISSN:

    +
    +

    ISSN (Long)

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    ISSN:

    +
    +

    OCLC Control Number

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Other Number:

    +
    +

    OCLC Control Number

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Other Number:

    +
    +

    STRN (Long)

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    STRN:

    +
    +

    STRN (Long)

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    STRN:

    +
    +

    GPO (Long)

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    GPO Item No.:

    +
    +

    GPO (Long)

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    GPO Item No.:

    +
    +

    CODEN (Long)

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    CODEN:

    +
    +

    CODEN (Long)

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    CODEN:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Hold Request Count

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Current Holds:

    +
    +

    Hold Request Count

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Current Holds:

    +
    +

    Control Number

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Control Number:

    +
    +

    Control Number

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Control Number:

    +
    +

    Bibliographic Call Number

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Bibliographic Call Number

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Count

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Course Reserves:

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Count

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Course Reserves:

    +
    +

    Medium (Long)

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Medium:

    +
    +

    Medium (Long)

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Medium:

    +
    +

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Credit_Card_Payments_from_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Credit_Card_Payments_from_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d12718c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Credit_Card_Payments_from_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Credit Card Payments from Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payments from Mobile PAC

    +

    Mobile PAC supports credit card payments for patron account charges and donations, using the any Polaris-supported gateway (see Setting Up E-Commerce). E-commerce for Mobile PAC is a separately licensed feature, but there is no additional cost for the license.

    +

    When credit card payments for fines and fees are enabled, patrons can select charges to pay and click Pay Fines on the Fines and Fees page of the patron account. The Payment form opens, where the patron enters and submits billing and credit card information.

    +

    If donations are enabled, the link appears in the footer of Mobile PAC pages and as a Make a Donation link on the Home page. To display these links, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Donations to Yes. (The user can choose to display or suppress the Make a Donation link on the home page from the User Preferences page.)

    +

    When the user taps the donation link, the donation form opens. Like Polaris PowerPAC, the user does not have to log on to make a donation.

    +

    The user completes the form and taps Next to open the credit card Payment form, where the user supplies and submits billing and credit card information.

    +

    For detailed information about setting up e-commerce in Polaris, see Setting Up E-Commerce. Once you have set up e-commerce, use the Credit Card Payment parameter Online payments: Configure to set up credit card payments from Mobile PAC.

    +

    Important:
    To accept Mobile PAC online payments, you must enable secure socket layer (SSL) in Polaris Administration. Set the SSL: Enable Mobile PAC parameter for the Web server to Yes. See Setting Web Server Parameters. Patrons must have SSL protocol enabled for their mobile device Web browser.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Enable_branch_switching_and_set_branch_display_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Enable_branch_switching_and_set_branch_display_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c799e633 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Enable_branch_switching_and_set_branch_display_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enable Mobile PAC branch switching and set branch display order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable Mobile PAC branch switching and set branch display order

    +

    The Mobile PAC home page includes a Preferences link. You can allow Mobile PAC users to change the connection branch on the Preferences page, and you can set a display order for the branch names.

    +

    To set up branch switching:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Mobile PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Except where noted in this procedure, you can set these profiles at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Branch Switching: Enable, and select Yes. This setting allows patrons to choose branches in the Branch list on the Mobile PAC Preferences page. The chosen branch’s Mobile PAC settings become effective. If you set this to No, the patron can connect only to the organization represented by the Mobile PAC connection URL. See Set the Mobile PAC Connection URL.
    2. +
    3. If you set Branch switching: Enable to Yes, set the PAC profile Branch list Order to determine the display order of the branches:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Select Yes to display the branch names in ascending alphabetical order by name.
    • +
    • Select No to display the branch names in ascending numerical order by internal organization ID.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    This setting also affects Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    With either setting, the system organization is always first. The setting for the current connection branch is used. The profile also controls the display order of the list of pick-up branches for requests, but the setting for the patron’s registered branch is used for the pick-up branch list.

    +

    Note:
    Use the system-level PAC profile Suppress branches to suppress a branch from display in the Switch to another branch list. This setting also affects Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Related Information +

    +

    Organization names - Mobile PAC uses the Display Name defined in the organization record. See Registering a Branch.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Basics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Basics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ad6f2fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Basics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + + Mobile PAC Basics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mobile PAC Basics

    +

    Polaris Mobile PAC provides a simple interface that has been optimized for mobile devices. Basic functions are available directly from the home page.

    +

    Users can click Preferences to set which links appear on the home page, and other preferences such as connection organization, language, and display options. These settings persist from session to session for one year, so that common selections are already made when the user connects to Mobile PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Installation

    +

    You select Mobile PAC for installation when you install Polaris Web Server software. (By default, Mobile PAC is not selected for installation.)

    +

    Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

    +

    Mobile PAC works without using SSL protocols (https:) to encrypt data, but personal data sent over the Internet is exposed to potential interception. If you have the appropriate site certificate, you can encrypt the entire Mobile PAC site to protect your patrons’ logon and library account information when they log on to request holds, renew items, or review their accounts. To enable data encryption, set the SSL: Enable: Mobile PAC parameter for the Web server to Yes. For more information about SSL and Polaris, see Setting Web Server Parameters.. (You can set SSL for Polaris PowerPAC with a separate parameter.)

    +

    Note:
    Some older mobile phones do not support SSL.

    +

    Updating Page Caches

    +

    When you change Polaris Mobile PAC settings, you may need to update page caches to see the effects of your changes. Most cached information is stored at the application level on the Web server. You can update that information with the Reload tool in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). For more information, see the WebAdmin online help.

    +

    Note:
    The Reload function reloads settings only for those organizations whose settings have already been cached. You may have to do an IIS reset to see changes applied to other organizations. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +

    Analyzing Polaris Mobile PAC Use

    +

    Google™ Analytics is a free tool from Google that allows Web site administrators to record and analyze traffic on their sites. Like Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC includes the JavaScript code for Google Analytics in the page footer. To use this feature, open the Polaris Administration Mobile PAC profile Mobile PAC Analytics. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. On the Google tabbed page, check Enable and supply your Google Analytics tracking code.

    +

    For more information about Google Analytics, and to obtain a tracking code, go to: http://www.google.com/analytics

    +

    Note:
    If you have already enabled Google Analytics for Polaris PowerPAC, you can use the same tracking code for Mobile PAC.

    +

    Alternatively, you can supply your own JavaScript for site analysis. Open the MobilePAC Analytics profile, Custom tabbed page, check Enable, and type your JavaScript code in the field provided.

    +

    Note:
    Cell phones that do not support JavaScript ignore the JavaScript code, so these connections are not calculated in your site analysis.

    +

    Customizing Mobile PAC

    +
      +
    • Text customization - You can edit language strings for Mobile PAC pages in English and any licensed language using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). For instructions, see the WebAdmin Help file.
    • +
    • Page customization - With appropriate knowledge of XML, you can also customize Mobile PAC at the program level. For more information, see PAC Customization.
    • +
    +

    Mobile Device Detection

    +

    In Polaris version 5.2 and earlier, checks in Polaris code help to ensure that mobile device users were automatically redirected to the Mobile PAC site if they connected to the Polaris PowerPAC site.

    +

    Beginning with Polaris 5.5, mobile device users are not automatically redirected to the Mobile PAC site, since PowerPAC features responsive web design that adapts to the user's device. However, the Polaris PowerPAC page footer still displays a Classic Mobile Site link if the link has been set up and conditions are met as described in Set the Mobile PAC Connection URL.

    +

    Mobile PAC Device Compatibility

    +

    To ensure compatibility with most mobile devices, Mobile PAC does not use any HTML syntax, such as HTML 5 or CSS3, that requires a more modern browser. Also, unlike PowerPAC, Mobile PAC's core functionality (searching, accessing the patron account, etc.) does not rely on JavaScript. Therefore, if a mobile device has JavaScript disabled, the user should be able to perform the majority of Mobile PAC functions, with the exception of some third-party products that require JavaScript, specifically NoveList and Google Maps. In some cases, the mobile device and/or browser may be too old to support Mobile PAC.

    +

    Trouble-Shooting

    +

    You can get a quick idea of whether Mobile PAC is installed and running properly by viewing a status page. Go to:

    +

    http://[Your PAC site]/mobile/plsstatus +

    +

    The Mobile PAC status page lists five status items, each with a Success or Failure rating:

    +
      +
    • AppCache initialized
    • +
    • DisplayCache initialized
    • +
    • Active SQL connection
    • +
    • Active ERMS connection
    • +
    • Test Keyword search
    • +
    +

    If you see a Failure status for any of these five items, check for details in the Mobile PAC logs in C:\ProgramData. For assistance, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Results_Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Results_Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f8e2ea3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Results_Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ + + + + + + + + + Mobile PAC Results Settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mobile PAC Results Settings

    +

    From the search results set, users can locate items, see more bibliographic information, and place hold requests. The initial search results display is a list of titles, with format icons and cover images if these are enabled.

    +

    Note:
    You can configure the title information displayed in this view. See Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display.

    +

    By default, five titles are displayed per page, but the user can change this number on the Preferences page. The user can also sort the results list.

    +

    The initial search results display also includes links from the 856 MARC tag. The link text is displayed according to the following logic:

    +

    Note:
    If there is text in the 856$z, it displays as a note but not as part of the web link.

    +
      +
    • 856$y - Link Text - If the bibliographic record has an 856$y, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the Web link display instead of the URL in the 856$u.
    • +
    • 856$3 - Material Specified - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856$y, but it does have an 856$3, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the Web link display instead of the URL in the 856$u.
    • +
    • 856$u - URL - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856$y or an 856$3, the default web link text is Web Site. You can change the label using the Mobile PAC profile Title Display: Configure. For more information, see Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display.
    • +
    +

    Mobile PAC supports integrated eContent. For details on this licensed feature, see EContent Vendors and Polaris.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Cover Images

    +

    Cover images are displayed according to the connection organization’s settings for the content provider in the PAC profile Enriched data. For more information, see Enabling Enriched Data. These settings also affect Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    In Mobile PAC, when cover images are enabled, the user can choose to hide them. The Hide Covers option appears at the bottom of each search results page. This may improve the display on certain mobile phones. When cover images are hidden, the title format (Type of Material, or TOM) is also displayed as text instead of an icon. This setting is saved on the device until the user chooses to display the images again.

    +

    Title (Product) Page Links

    +

    Users click a title in the search results list to see more choices related to the individual title. The following links may be displayed on the title (product) page:

    + +

    Note:
    You can configure the title information displayed in this view. See Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display.

    +

    You can set the order of links on this page. See Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page.

    +

    Title Link: Find It

    +

    This link displays summary availability information for items linked to the title. Like other Mobile PAC displays, the list uses the branch Display Name defined in the organization record.

    +

    A branch is listed if it is selected for display as a system holding in the Item Availability Display Order policy table for the connection organization, and the branch is the Assigned Branch for at least one item linked to the title. Settings in the Item Availability Display Order policy table also determine the order in which branches are listed. (If at least one item is In at the branch, the summary availability information also includes the word In.) For more information about these settings, which are shared with Polaris PowerPAC, see Setting Up Local and System Availability.

    +

    The user can click a branch name to see the call number and other information, if enabled, for that branch’s items. If item-level or first-available-copy requests are enabled, a Request It link is also available.

    +

    Note:
    You can suppress the Find It and Request links for designated types of material. See Suppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +

    Note:
    For more information about placing requests from Mobile PAC, see Title Link: Request It. For information about enabling item-level or first-available-copy requests, see Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing.

    +

    The connection organization’s settings for the following PAC profiles determine what information is displayed for each item:

    +

    Important:
    These settings also affect Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Display detailed item status - Set to Yes to display the specific item circulation status of unavailable items, such as Lost or Bindery. Set to No to display No items available or your own text for items that are unavailable for circulation for any reason. (You must also set Item Availability: Display status to Yes.)
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display due date in detailed item status - If you set Item Availability: Display detailed item status to Yes, you can set this parameter to display or suppress the item’s due date. (If you set Item Availability: Display detailed item status to No, you cannot display the due date.)
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display status - Set to Yes to display an item’s availability status. If you set this to Yes, also review the setting for Item Availability: Display detailed item status.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display shelf location - Set to Yes to display an item’s shelf location.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display type - Set to Yes to display the item’s material type.
    • +
    • Suppress item display - Specify item circulation statuses that should prevent an item from being displayed in search results. When a circulation status is selected, items with this status are not displayed in PAC even when Display in PAC is checked in the item record.
    • +
    +

    For more information, see Displaying PAC Search Results.

    +

    Text It in Mobile PAC

    +

    From the Mobile PAC item availability display, a patron can send an email text message containing the item call number to his or mobile phone via the mobile phone carrier’s SMTP email service.

    +

    When you enable this feature, a Text It link appears for each item in the item availability display for Mobile PAC search results. When the patron clicks Text It, the Text It form opens.

    +

    If the user is logged in and the patron record includes a phone number that has been designated for TXT notification, the Mobile phone number and Carrier fields are already filled in. If the user is not logged in, or is logged in but does not have a phone number designated for TXT notification in the patron record, the user enters the mobile phone number and selects a carrier from the list. The carrier options are set in the system-level database table Mobile Phone Carriers. When the patron clicks Send, the text message is sent to the specified mobile phone.

    +

    To display the Text It link in Mobile PAC, set the PowerPAC profile Item availability: “Text it” feature enabled to Yes (the default setting). This setting also controls the feature in Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Sending Call Numbers by Text Message.

    +

    Title Link: Details

    +

    When the user clicks Details for a title, more bibliographic information is displayed.

    +

    The connection organization’s settings for the Mobile PAC profile Title display configure control which bibliographic fields are displayed and their label text. For more information, see Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display.

    +

    Title Link: Request It

    +

    The user clicks Request It for a title to place a title-level hold request.

    +

    Note:
    You can suppress the Request It link for designated types of material. See Suppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +

    Hold requests from Mobile PAC are enabled from and use the settings in the Holds Options Request parameter. For more information about these settings, see Managing Hold Requests. Rules set for specific patron codes or specific items also apply to Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    When the patron clicks the Request It link, the logon page appears (see Patron Logon Settings for Mobile PAC). After logging in, the patron selects a pickup location from a list of locations. The default location is the patron’s home library (registered branch).

    +

    Mobile PAC supports Borrow by Mail requests, and if these are enabled the patron can opt to have the requested item mailed instead of selecting a pick-up location. For more information about Borrow by Mail settings, see Setting Up Borrow by Mail Circulation.

    +

    Note:
    Item-level or first-available-copy requests can be placed from the detailed item availability page (see Title Link: Find It) if these types of requests are enabled in the Holds Options Request parameter.

    +

    The patron can then submit the request or cancel it. If the patron selects Submit Request, a hold request is sent to the library and a confirmation message is displayed if the request is successful. (If the request is not successful, the patron is informed that request cannot be placed and is advised to contact the library for more information.)

    +

    Title Link: Purchase or Buy It Now

    +

    A Purchase link is available in the Title page for a title in Mobile PAC search results. When the user clicks the link, a search is launched for the title in a specified vendor’s Web site. As in Polaris PowerPAC, the purchase transaction takes place on the vendor’s site. For more information, see Setting Up Purchase Links.

    +

    Mobile PAC also supports Polaris Bookstore, available by separate contract. Through Polaris Bookstore and Baker & Taylor Inc., your library can establish an online bookstore where patrons can purchase materials at a discount comparable to other major online retailers, and your library receives a portion of the sales as a donation. As in Polaris PowerPAC, if you enable both links, the Buy It Now link is displayed when the title is available at the Bookstore. The Purchase link is displayed when the title is unavailable at the Bookstore and the title has an ISBN. For more information about Polaris Bookstore, see Setting Up Polaris Bookstore.

    +

    To enable the Purchase link, Buy It Now link (if you have a contract), or both, use the PAC profile Purchase options. Your settings also apply to Polaris PowerPAC. See Enabling Online Book Purchases.

    +

    You can edit the Purchase and Buy It Now link labels using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The strings IDs are MP_LBL_SEARCH_PURCHASE and MP_LBL_SEARCH_BUY_IT_NOW.

    +

    Title Links: Enriched Content

    +

    Enriched content from third-party sources is available in Mobile PAC search results, from links in the title (product) page.

    +

    Tip:
    If you use NoveList or NoveList Select, and you run Mobile PAC in SSL mode, your NoveList URL must begin with https://.

    +

    Mobile PAC shares enriched content settings with Polaris PowerPAC. For more information about setting up enriched data for PAC use, see Enabling Enriched Data.

    +

    Title Link: Map It

    +

    Using the JavaScript interface provided by Google Maps™, Mobile PAC  offers the Map It feature (also available in PowerPAC), which provides a visual guide to the location of items linked to titles in the patron’s search results list. When you enable this feature, the Mobile PAC Map It link is available to users who have enabled JavaScript on their mobile devices.

    +

    When the user clicks Map It in the title product page (full display), a map displays bubble markers for branch locations that have linked items.

    +

    The user can place the cursor over a marker bubble to see the branch name, or click the branch marker to see the branch’s address and hours.

    +

    When the user clicks Get Directions in the hours window, directions to the branch are available from any address. The user enters the address and clicks Go!. (If the user is logged in, the primary address from the patron record is already filled in for convenience, but it can be changed.)

    +

    As in PowerPAC, the Mobile PAC Map It link is displayed for titles whose # system items count in the PAC brief display is greater than 0.

    +

    Use the PAC profile Google Maps in Polaris Administration; check the Enable in Mobile PAC box to enable Map It in Mobile PAC. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    Mobile PAC and PowerPAC share the same geographic center and zoom level settings. For detailed information about these settings, see Map It (Google Maps) in PAC.

    +

    When you enable Map It for Mobile PAC, the link is automatically enabled for the Mobile PAC product page and placed by default at the end of the list for the enabled product page categories. You can change the position of the link on the page using the Mobile PAC profile Product Page categories: Configure. See Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page.

    +

    Title Link: Librarian’s (MARC) View

    +

    When the user clicks the Librarian’s View link in the Title page for a title in Mobile PAC search results, the MARC record view is displayed.

    +

    You can choose to display or suppress the Librarian’s View link with the PowerPAC profile Librarians (MARC) view: Enable. (This profile also affects Polaris PowerPAC). You can edit the Librarian’s View link label using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The string IDs is MP_LBL_MARCVIEW_LIBRARIAN_VIEW.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Search_Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Search_Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83e95260 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Mobile_PAC_Search_Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specifying Mobile PAC Search Settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specifying Mobile PAC Search Settings

    +

    Mobile PAC offers a quick search and an advanced search. Both options are keyword searches.

    +

    Quick Searches - When the user clicks Search the Catalog on the main page, the quick search page opens. In this type of search, the user simply types a search term in the Search for box and clicks Search. This search uses the search by, limit by, and sort by settings for quick searches from the PAC profile Search settings defaults. See Set default search selections. If the Search by setting in Polaris Administration is other than the default Any Field and the Limit by setting is other than the default All formats (TOM=*), the settings currently in effect appear below the Search for text box in Mobile PAC.

    +

    Advanced Search - When the user clicks Advanced Search on the Search page, the advanced search page opens. On this page, users can select the Search by field, the Limit by filter, and a sort order. The default values for Search by, Limit by, and Sort by are taken from the advanced search settings in the PAC profile Search settings defaults. See Set default search selections. The selections in the drop-down list for the Limit by filter are taken from the PAC Limit by display policy table. The user can also set the number of titles per page in the search results. The options are 5 (default), 10, 25, and 50.

    +

    The user’s selected search settings are retained until the user closes the browser, clicks Reset, or reopens the Advanced Search page by selecting the Advanced Search link on the quick search page. The Reset button resets all controls in the Advanced Search page to their default values and clears the text from the Search for box.

    +

    When search results are displayed, if the user selects the Search link in the bread crumb trail at the top of the window, the options set for the user’s most recent search are retained on the Advanced Search page.

    +

    To specify the default selections for quick and advanced searches:

    +

    Important:

    These settings also affect Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view. Mobile PAC uses the settings for the user’s current connection branch.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    For information about allowing branch switching, see Setting Up Mobile PAC Connections.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Search settings defaults. The Search Settings Defaults dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Set the quick search defaults:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Quick tab.
    2. +
    3. Select the default search field in the Search by list. The setting applies to every quick search. The default is Any Field.
    4. +
    5. Select the default search filter in the Limit by list. The available selections depend on the organization’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. The default selection is All formats (that is, no filter; TOM=*).
    6. +
    +

    Note:

    You can change the labels of existing filters and set up custom filters. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).

    +
      +
    1. Select the default sort order for search results in the Sort by list. The setting applies to every quick search. The default selection is Relevance. This selection sorts results based on weighted keyword frequency and proximity, so that those most likely to meet the user’s needs appear first in the list. Most Popular sorts titles in the search results so that the titles most frequently checked out or requested over the past 120 days appear first in the list.
    2. +
    +

    Options that include two categories sort results by the first category, then by the second category. For example, with Author, then Title, the titles are sorted alphabetically by author then, within each author’s works, alphabetically by title.

    +
      +
    1. Set the advanced search defaults:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Advanced tab.
    2. +
    3. Select the default search field in the Search by list. The default selection is Any Field.
    4. +
    5. Select the default search filter in the Limit by list. The default selection is All formats (that is, no filter; TOM=*).
    6. +
    +

    Note:

    You can change the labels of existing filters and set up custom filters. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).

    +
      +
    1. Select the default sort order for search results in the Sort by - When searching local databases only list. The default selection is Relevance.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) To set automatic subsorting by title for certain sort types, set the PAC profile Search: Sub-sort-by-title to Yes. This allows patrons to quickly find a known title in a large results set.
    4. +
    +

    When the profile is set to Yes, the records are first sorted by the selected sort option and then sorted alphabetically by title, ignoring nonfiling characters (respecting the value of the 245 second indicator). The setting does not affect these sort types: relevance, most popular, title, author then title, title then author, title then publication date, title then format, publication date then title, call number then title.

    +

    Note:

    This setting affects both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. It is set to No by default; you may want to leave this setting if you find the automatic subsort impacts performance.

    +

    Related Information +

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/New_Popular_Titles_in_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/New_Popular_Titles_in_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ac4ac80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/New_Popular_Titles_in_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up New and Popular Titles in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up New and Popular Titles in Mobile PAC

    +

    The Mobile PAC home page displays a New and Popular Titles link. When the user clicks this link, New at the Library, On Order Titles, Best Seller, and Popular at the Library (most circulated) lists are displayed. When the user clicks a link in a list, such as Books under New at the Library, the appropriate search is launched in the library catalog.

    +

    To set up New and Popular Titles options:

    +

    Note:
    You can set the New and Popular Titles profile at the system, library, or branch level. The connection organization’s settings determine the options available to Mobile PAC users.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Mobile PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click New and Popular Titles. The New and Popular Titles dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) the New at the Library categories to include on the New and Popular page in Mobile PAC.
    6. +
    +

    When the patron clicks a New at the Library category, the search is launched for titles in that category that have recently been added to your catalog. This feature uses the same processing as the New Titles Web part in Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +

    Note:
    When the Mobile PAC connection is to a branch, the patron sees only new titles for that branch. When the Mobile PAC connection is to the system, the patron sees new titles for the whole system.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) the Best Seller Lists categories to include on the New and Popular page in Mobile PAC.
    2. +
    +

    When a patron selects a title from one of these lists, a search for the title is launched in the Polaris database. The lists are updated automatically with content from IndieBound (formerly Book Sense), using the same process as Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +

    Important:
    If a title in the Best Seller list is not in the catalog, the list item for the title is not a live link. As best-seller titles are added to the catalog, the links are updated when MobilePAC is reloaded using the Reload tool in Polaris Language Editor, or when an IIS reset is performed on the server. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) the Popular categories to include on the New and Popular page in Mobile PAC.
    2. +
    +

    These categories use the same processing as the Most Circulated Web part in Polaris PowerPAC; that is, the Popular links launch searches for popular titles, authors, or subjects in the Polaris database, based on circulation statistics for the past 31 days.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Show on-order items to provide links that launch searches for titles in the Polaris database that have linked items with a status of On-Order.
    2. +
    +

    This feature uses the same processing as the On-Order Items Web part in Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Account_My_Account_in_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Account_My_Account_in_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5e34367 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Account_My_Account_in_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC

    +

    To make the My Account link available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Patron account to Yes. This profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. After the patron clicks the My Account link and logs in, the Account Summary screen opens.

    +

    The top portion of the screen displays account information: patron name, barcode, registered branch, account expiration date, telephone number, email address, and any current blocks on the account. The lower portion displays links to the other patron account pages if these are enabled: messages, items checked out, hold requests, fines and fees, saved searches, reading list (reading history), update account information and preferences, and saved title lists.

    +

    Messages

    +

    This link appears if you have enabled patron messages in the Polaris staff client. When the patron taps the Messages link, current messages from the library are listed. The patron can mark messages as read and delete them.

    +

    For more information about setting up patron messaging in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up Patron Messages. For information about posting messages to patron accounts, see Posting Patron Messages. see "Posting Patron Messages" in the Patron Services Guide.

    +

    Items Checked Out

    +

    This patron account page lists all items currently checked out to the patron. To make this page available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Items out to Yes. This profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    The patron can renew items by selecting the appropriate check boxes and tapping Renew. If there is a charge for renewal, the item is marked with a dollar icon DollarIcon.gif. As in other Polaris PAC applications, if the renewal is allowed, a message with the new due date appears. If the renewal fails, an appropriate message appears.

    +

    Note:
    Mobile PAC shares the Polaris Administration settings for renewals, renewal charges, and blocks on renewals with Polaris PowerPAC. To allow renewals, set the PAC profile Patron access: Renewals. To set charges for renewals, see Charging for Checkout and Renewal. To set blocks on renewals from PAC (and ebook circulation), use the Patron Services profile Patron-initiated circulation: Blocking conditions. For more information, see Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks.

    +

    When you select an item in the Items Out list, detailed information about the item is displayed. The patron can also renew the item from this screen if the renewal is allowed.

    +

    If the patron has currently checked out overdue items, the Items Out list also offers an option to estimate overdue fines. The patron taps Estimate Overdue Fines to display a view with a date option. The patron leaves today’s date or specifies a date in the future and taps Estimate Overdue Fines. The calculated accrued fines are displayed according to the specified date. (This feature is also available from the Fines and Fees page).

    +

    Note:
    If the library has opted to include lost or claimed item overdue amounts in the estimate, these are included in the calculation. For details about estimated accrued fines settings, see Calculating, Blocking for, and Displaying Estimated Accrued Fines.

    +

    Hold Requests

    +

    This patron account page lists the patron’s hold requests. To make this page available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Requests to Yes. This profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    The patron can select requests with the appropriate status and cancel, suspend, or renew them.

    +

    When the patron taps a title in the Hold Requests list, detailed information about the request is displayed. The patron can also cancel, suspend, or reactivate a request with the appropriate status from this detail page.

    +

    All Polaris Administration settings for PAC hold requests apply to Mobile PAC. For more information, see Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing.

    +

    Fines and Fees

    +

    This patron account page summarizes fines and fees on the patron account. To make this page available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Fines & Fees to Yes. This profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    When the patron taps an item in the Fines and Fees List, detailed information about the transaction is displayed.

    +

    If the connection branch and the patron’s registered branch accept credit card payments for fines and fees, the patron can select and pay charges from the Fines and Fees page. See Credit Card Payments from Mobile PAC.

    +

    If the patron has overdue items, this page offers an option to estimate accrued fines, also available on the Items Out page. See Items Checked Out .

    +

    Claimed and Lost

    +

    This patron account page lists the patron's claimed and lost items. To make this page available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Claimed and Lost to Yes. See Enable display of claimed and lost items in Mobile PAC.

    +

    Saved Searches

    +

    This page shows the patrons’ saved searches, if the Search Agent has been enabled in Polaris Administration. For details, see Saved Searches (Search Agent) in Mobile PAC.

    +

    The patron can select saved searches and delete them from this page. When the patron taps a search name, details about the saved search are displayed. The patron can edit the name, notes, notification e-mail address and format, frequency, and number of times to run the search, and save the settings. (The saved search cannot be run manually from Mobile PAC.)

    +

    Reading History

    +

    This page shows the patron’s reading history, if reading histories have been enabled in Polaris Administration. See Setting Reading History Options.

    +

    Tip:
    If you enable reading histories, a patron can start or stop a reading history on the Update Account and Preferences page. See Update Account and Preferences. Reading histories are always enabled for Outreach Services patrons.

    +

    When the patron taps a title in the reading history, detailed information about the title is displayed.

    +

    To allow patrons to remove individual items from the reading history, set the PAC profile Patrons can remove reading history to Yes. This setting also applies to Polaris PowerPAC. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. The patron can check individual items and click Delete Selected, or click Delete All. When a patron removes an item from the reading history, the item is also removed from the reading history list in the staff client (Patron Status workform - Reader Services view).

    +

    Saved Lists (Title Lists)

    +

    This page is available if you allow patrons to create and save title lists. The patron can copy or move titles from list to list, see details about and place requests for titles on a saved list, and e-mail selected titles or entire lists. For details, see Title Lists in Mobile PAC.

    +

    Update Account and Preferences

    +

    This page is available if you allow patrons to request updates to their accounts in Polaris Administration. Set these features with the PAC profile Patron access options (Update Info tabbed page). Your setting also applies to Polaris PowerPAC. For more information, see Set up online patron account updates.

    +

    The Update Account page also offers a link to update preferences. These options can include email address, phone numbers, the ability to start and stop the reading history, email format, preferred language, preferred notification method, and e-receipts preference.

    +

    Note:
    If the preferred notification method is set to email, an email address must be supplied. If the preferred method is phone, the patron must indicate the phone number to use for notification. If the patron chooses TXT Messaging or text message e-receipts, the patron must indicate the phone number to be used for TXT messages, and select a carrier for that number.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Log-In_Settings_for_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Log-In_Settings_for_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1b18696 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Log-In_Settings_for_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Logon Settings for Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Logon Settings for Mobile PAC

    +

    Mobile PAC users must log on to their patron accounts to place a hold request or access account information.

    +

    Note:
    To make the My Account link available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Patron account to Yes. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +

    Once logged on, the patron stays logged on until he or she deliberately logs off, disconnects from the Mobile PAC site, or is inactive for 20 minutes. When the patron is logged on, a Log Out link is available on every page.

    +

    When the patron logs off, the Mobile PAC home page is displayed.

    +

    User Names

    +

    Mobile PAC accepts user names as well as patron account barcodes, if patron user names are enabled for PAC use in Polaris Administration. For more information, see Set patron password and user name options. The same PAC setting displays a link on the logon page to allow patrons who have a barcode and password to set up the user name.

    +

    Remember Me

    +

    The Remember me check box is available on the logon screen by default. When the patron checks this box and logs on, the user name or barcode the patron entered is preserved from session to session by a cookie on the patron’s device. The next time the patron connects to Mobile PAC and chooses to log on, the information is already filled in. The cookie expires after one month. The patron must always enter the password, and can choose to clear the Remember me check box.

    +

    Note:
    Some browsers may retain the user name or barcode regardless of the Mobile PAC Remember me feature, depending on auto-save, auto-fill or other settings in the browser.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, the Mobile PAC profile Remember me: Enabled controls whether this feature is available. The profile is available at the system level. If you set the profile to No, the Remember me check box does not appear on the logon screen.

    +

    Logon Attempt Limits

    +

    You can limit the number of times a patron can attempt to log on before being forced to wait five minutes. In Polaris Administration, use the system-level PAC profile Login retries to enable or disable the limit and set the number (5-99) of attempts allowed. By default, the limit is enabled and five attempts are allowed. These settings also apply to Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Forgotten Passwords

    +

    Mobile PAC supports a Forgot password? link on the Account Log On page that appears when the patron selects a feature that requires logon. When the patron selects the link, a page opens where the patron supplies the username or barcode.

    +

    A patron who wishes to create or reset a password can click a link in Mobile PAC and receive an email message containing a time-sensitive link to a Reset Password page where the patron can configure a new password. Libraries can use the new Reset password link timeout duration setting to specify the time period during which the time-sensitive password reset link remains valid. If no email address is present in the patron record, the system displays an error message.

    +

    Your setting for this feature also applies to Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris ExpressCheck. For more information, see Set up online patron self-registration.

    +

    Active Directory Logon to Mobile PAC

    +

    You can allow logon to PAC using Active Directory credentials instead of the Polaris patron barcode or username and password. This feature is particularly suitable in academic settings, enabling students to authenticate into Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC using their campus network credentials established in Active Directory. For details, see Set Up PAC Active Directory Log On.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Registration_in_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Registration_in_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03e0e48e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Patron_Registration_in_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration in Mobile PAC

    +

    Mobile PAC supports online self-registration. To make this feature available and set self-registration options, use the PAC profile Patron access options. (Your settings for this profile also control self-registration for Polaris PowerPAC.) For more information, see Set up online patron self-registration.

    +

    When online self-registration is enabled and the user taps My Account, a Create one link is displayed on the log-on page.

    +

    Note:
    To make the My Account link available, set the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Patron account to Yes. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +

    Self-registration in Mobile PAC is similar to Polaris PowerPAC functionality. When the user taps the registration link, the first screen displays the home library and postal code page. The user selects a registration branch, enters the postal code, and selects a country. When the user taps continue, the registration screen appears.

    +

    Required fields, verification blocks, recipient’s email address, and other aspects of self-registration are set in the PAC profile Patron access options. (You can also provide the option to receive renewal receipts by email, TXT message, or both. See Setting Up eReceipts.)

    +

    Note:
    If the preferred notification method is set to email, an email address must be supplied. If the preferred method is phone, the patron must indicate the phone number to use for notification. If the patron chooses TXT Messaging, the patron must indicate the phone number to be used for TXT messages, and select a carrier for that number.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Polaris_Fusion_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Polaris_Fusion_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6ace3ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Polaris_Fusion_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris Fusion Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Fusion Results

    +

    Mobile PAC supports Polaris Fusion (digital collection) searches and results. Materials in the digital collections may include images, video clips, sound files, and text files. To limit search results to digital collection materials, the user selects Digital Collection in the Limit by box on the Advanced search page.

    +

    In the search results, the digital collection icon formatid38.gif identifies digital collection materials.

    +

    When the user clicks a title, more choices related to the title are displayed. Digital collection titles with a single linked resource, such as one image, offer a link to that resource. If there are no access restrictions, the user can click the link to see the resource.

    +

    Note:
    Image resources open in the same browser window. Other types of digital resources open in a new browser window to ease navigation back to Mobile PAC.

    +

    When the user clicks a title with multiple linked resources, the title page displays a Show Resources link. The user clicks this link to see the attached resources.

    +

    If a resource has restricted access, the user can request access by clicking the place access request link. If purchase is required, the access request page offers a link to the full library catalog.

    +

    When the user clicks the full catalog link, the same search is launched and the title is displayed in Polaris PowerPAC. Like the Full Site link at the bottom of Mobile PAC pages, the full library catalog is the address specified in the parameter URL of the PowerPAC’s root for the Web server in Polaris Administration. See Set the Full Site link.

    +

    For more information about setting up and using Polaris Fusion to manage digital collections, see the Polaris Fusion online Help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Saved_Searches_Search_Agent_in_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Saved_Searches_Search_Agent_in_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20fbd58f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Saved_Searches_Search_Agent_in_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Saved Searches (Search Agent) in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Saved Searches (Search Agent) in Mobile PAC

    +

    Registered patrons can save searches in Mobile PAC, and have the saved searches run automatically either weekly or monthly. Each search run looks for results that are new since the last run. The results are automatically sent to an e-mail address the patron specifies. By accessing their patron accounts, patrons can view, edit, and delete saved searches, or run them manually. (These features are also available in Polaris PowerPAC).

    +

    To save a search, the patron first searches the catalog using the criteria he wants for the saved search, then clicks Save Search at the bottom of any page in the search results.

    +

    If the patron has not logged on, the Log On page opens. After the patron logs on, he names the search, types an optional note, sets the notification criteria and number of times to run the search, and clicks Save.

    +

    All saved searches sent to the same patron email address must be in the same email format. If the patron specifies a format different from existing saved searches when saving a new search, a message provides the options to specify a different format for the new search or to change all the others.

    +

    Saved searches are available to delete, edit, or run manually from the patron account. On the My Account page, the patron clicks Saved Searches to access the list.

    +

    On the Saved Searches page, the patron can check searches to delete, or select a search name to edit the settings or run the search manually.

    +

    Note:
    As in Polaris PowerPAC, the patron cannot edit the search criteria. Instead, the patron sets up and saves a new search, and deletes the old one if necessary.

    +

    To allow patrons to save searches in Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Set the PAC profile Search agent: Enable to Yes.
    2. +
    3. Set up the PAC parameter Search agent parameters. See Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC. Search agent settings also apply to Polaris PowerPAC.
    4. +
    +

    You can edit text strings related to Mobile PAC save search functions using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). For more information about using WebAdmin, see WebAdmin online Help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_Full_Site_link.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_Full_Site_link.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8595b248 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_Full_Site_link.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Mobile PAC Full Site link + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Mobile PAC Full Site link

    +

    The Full Site link on the Mobile PAC home page is the URL specified in the parameter URL of the PowerPAC’s root for the Web server in Polaris Administration. This destination is typically your library web site. Do not change this setting unless your Polaris PowerPAC root URL changes.

    +

    The Full Site link retains the user’s preference settings for connection organization and display language when connecting to Polaris PowerPAC. See Enable branch switching and set branch display order.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_connection_URL.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_connection_URL.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..323404e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_the_connection_URL.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set the Mobile PAC Connection URL + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Mobile PAC Connection URL

    +

    The connection URL is the address the user enters to connect to your Mobile PAC catalog, the destination address when the mobile device user is automatically re-directed from Polaris PowerPAC (Polaris version 5.2 and earlier), and the destination address when the user selects the Class Mobile Site link in the PowerPAC page footer. To specify the connection URL for Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Server folder and expand the server for which you want to set Web parameters.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters under the server. The PAC parameters tabbed page is displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click URL of the Mobile PAC’s root and type the full URL.
    6. +
    +

    The default connection URL is http://[localhost]/mobile, which is the system organization.

    +

    If you plan to disable branch switching (see Enable branch switching and set branch display order) and you want to specify a connection organization other than the system organization, add

    +

    /org/{orgid} +

    +

    to the end of the URL. For example, if the organization ID number is 25, type the URL in this format:

    +

    http://[localhost]/mobile/org/25 +

    +

    The organization ID is the number in the title bar of the organization workform. It is also available on the Properties dialog box - About tabbed page for the organization, which you can open from the Polaris Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note:
    If you specify an organization that is suppressed from display in PAC, the connection organization defaults to the system. The system-level PAC profile Suppress branches controls which branches are suppressed from display. This profile also affects Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Link from PowerPAC - A Classic Mobile Site link is displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC footer if Mobile PAC is licensed for your library and you have set a value for URL of the Mobile PAC’s root in Polaris Administration.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This feature does not apply to in-house workstations, as defined by the setting for patron actions in the PowerPAC profile In-house access definitions. This protects patron privacy if a PowerPAC user on an in-house workstation follows the Mobile Site link, perhaps logs into the patron account, and then leaves the workstation in Mobile PAC. (There is no inactivity timeout in Mobile PAC.) Staff members who need to access Mobile PAC can enter the URL directly into their workstation browsers. If you want the Mobile Site link to appear in PowerPAC for staff workstations, you must set the in-house definition to In-house IP Addresses Table only, and then make sure that no staff workstations appear in the In-House IP Address Table. For more information about in-house definition settings, see Identifying In-House Computers.

    +
      +
    • +

      Connection organization from PowerPAC redirect - When a redirection to Mobile PAC is made automatically (Polaris version 5.2 and earlier) or with the PowerPAC footer link, the PowerPAC connection organization is retained for the Mobile PAC connection. If the PowerPAC connection organization was the system, Mobile PAC uses the organization saved in the user’s Mobile PAC Preferences settings. See Enable branch switching and set branch display order.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display language from PowerPAC redirect - For multilingual versions, when a redirection to Mobile PAC is made automatically (Polaris version 5.2 and earlier) or with the PowerPAC footer link and the PowerPAC display language is not English, the language setting is retained for the Mobile PAC connection. If the PowerPAC display language was English, Mobile PAC uses the language saved in the user’s Mobile PAC Preferences settings.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Automatic redirection - In Polaris version 5.2 and earlier, PAC users with mobile devices are automatically redirected to Mobile PAC if they attempt to connect to Polaris PowerPAC on the home (portal) page, default search page, or patron account page. This feature accommodates libraries that have direct links from their library Web sites to search and patron account pages. Beginning with Polaris 5.5, users with mobile devices go directly to the appropriate PowerPAC page, which is designed to automatically adapt to the user's device.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_up_the_Mobile_PAC_title_product_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_up_the_Mobile_PAC_title_product_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65f3281e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Set_up_the_Mobile_PAC_title_product_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page

    +

    To determine the display order of links on the Mobile PAC title page:

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Modify product page categories: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Mobile PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Product page categories: Configure. The Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box opens. The top portion lists the categories (features) that have been enabled for the organization.
    4. +
    5. To change the display order, select the category and click the appropriate arrow at the side of the dialog box to move the category up or down in the display order.
    6. +
    7. Click OK.
    8. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Editing category labels - The Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box lists the language string ID for each category for use in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor), where you can search for and edit the link labels. For more information, see WebAdmin online Help.
    • +
    • +

      Enabling categories - The bottom portion of the Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box lists the features that are possible to display on the product page, but have not been enabled for the organization. For information about setting up the features that can be displayed on the product page, see:

      + +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can also configure the product page for Polaris PowerPAC, using a separate profile. See Configuring the PowerPAC Product Page.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Ask_Us_in_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Ask_Us_in_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66022ac3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Ask_Us_in_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Ask Us in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Ask Us in Mobile PAC

    +

    As in Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC users can send an “Ask Us” reference question to a designated library email address. When the user clicks the Ask Us link on the home page, and the library requires patrons to log on to use this feature, the logon page appears. Once logged on, the user can type the question and send it to the library.

    +

    You set up a receiving email address on the branch level with the PAC profile Patron access options, then enable the feature specifically for Mobile PAC. As with Polaris PowerPAC, you can require a patron logon for Ask Us in Mobile PAC, or bypass the logon and allow anyone to send a question via Ask Us. In this case, a Guest button is displayed on the logon page.

    +

    The Sent From email address on the message to the library is the email address the user has specified in the Ask Us form, if any. If no address is specified, the user has logged on as a patron, and the patron account includes an email address, that address is used. If no email address is specified in the Ask Us form or the patron account, or the patron has cleared the address from the form, the Sent From address is that specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender.

    +

    Note:
    Any email from PAC, including Ask Us messages, requires you to specify the SMTP server in Polaris Administration. Double-click the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service, and type the domain name of the email SMTP server. This setting applies to all Polaris PAC applications and is also used by other Polaris processes, such as email notification.

    +

    To set up the Ask Us function in Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    These settings also affect Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Patron Access options. The Patron Access Options dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Click the Ask Us tab.
    4. +
    5. To specify the receiving address for Ask Us email messages, do these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Add, and use the Find Tool to search for the staff member or members who should receive the Ask Us messages.
    2. +
    3. Select the names in the results list, right-click the highlighted names, and choose Select from the context menu. The Patron Access Options dialog box appears, and the selected names are displayed in the E-mail to list.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to apply your settings and continue working with Patron Access options, or click Save to save your settings and close the Patron Access options dialog box.
    2. +
    3. To make the Ask Us feature available in Mobile PAC, do these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the MobilePAC tab in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Navigation: Ask us, and select Yes.
    4. +
    5. To require a patron logon for Ask Us, double-click Ask Us: Require Login, and set the value to Yes. If this value is set to No, a Guest button is displayed on the Ask Us logong page in Mobile PAC. The user can click Guest to send a question without logging on.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0be8a87c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Mobile PAC - Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Mobile PAC - Overview

    +

    Polaris Mobile PAC is a Web-based public access catalog that has been optimized for mobile devices, providing simplified access to most of the features available in Polaris PowerPAC. Any device with a Web browser can access the site, including mobile devices with browsers optimized for mobile use and computers with standard Web browsers.

    +

    Polaris Mobile PAC works best with mobile devices where users navigate the interface in either of two ways: with a pointing device, where user touches the desired option or selects it with a stylus; or with navigation keys, where the user presses keys (such as arrow keys) on the device key pad to move the focus up or down in a list. Full functionality may not be available for cell phones without full keyboards or pointing devices.

    +

    Note: +
    Beginning with Polaris 5.5, Polaris PowerPAC features responsive web design so users can enjoy the same PowerPAC features regardless of device (desktop computer screens, tablets, or phones).

    +

    Mobile PAC must be installed on a Polaris Web server and the library must have a current, valid license to make Mobile PAC available. Mobile PAC also offers a multilingual version, where users can select the display language on any page or set a language preference that persists from session to session. Polaris Administration settings control the features available in Mobile PAC. Mobile PAC shares some settings with Polaris PowerPAC. Other settings apply only to Mobile PAC.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Connections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Connections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fd50f0db --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Connections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Mobile PAC Connections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Mobile PAC Connections

    +

    To set up Mobile PAC connections, define the connection URL that the user enters to connect to your Mobile PAC; set the link to the full site; and specify whether patrons can switch branches.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Library_Information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Library_Information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4389d362 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Setting_Up_Mobile_PAC_Library_Information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Mobile PAC Library Information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Mobile PAC Library Information

    +

    The Mobile PAC home page displays a link for library hours and contact information. When the connection organization is a library or branch, the link opens information about the current connection organization. When the connection organization is the system, the link opens a page where the user selects a library or branch to see that organization’s information.

    +

    The specific hours are set in the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation for the connection organization. The address and telephone number are taken from the organization record.

    +

    Note:
    The system-level PAC profile Suppress branches controls whether a branch is listed in the drop list of organizations. If you choose to suppress a branch, it is also suppressed from display on the Preferences page. See Enable Mobile PAC branch switching and set branch display order

    +

    You can choose to display a message in addition to, or instead of, the formatted hours table. You can also choose to display a link to the library’s Web site along with the address and telephone number.

    +

    To specify the information that should appear on the Library Hours & Contact page:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To display the organization’s hours formatted in a table, set the profile Hours of operation: Display to Yes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    This setting also applies to Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Important:
    The hours listed in the table on the Hours & Contact page are controlled by the settings in the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation. Even if you do not want to display the table on the Hours & Contact page, you must set up the organization’s schedule in the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation, because these settings also affect due dates and other circulation processes.

    +

    Tip:
    The Hours of operation message option below is useful for organizations with split hours or other conditions that the usual Hours of Operation table does not accommodate.

    +
      +
    1. To specify a message to display on the Hours & Contact page, follow these steps:
      1. Double-click the Hours of operation message profile.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This setting also applies to Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
    +

    The Language Strings dialog box opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the list of those licensed for Polaris PowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the message field in the Display text column and type the message (up to 500 characters).
    4. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    You can insert diacritic characters in your message. Click Diacritics. In the Character Picker dialog box, select a graphic character set. Then select the character, and click Insert.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To include a link to the library’s Web site along with the address and telephone number, follow these steps:
      1. Open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Mobile PAC tab in the details view.
      2. Double-click Navigation: Web site URL and type the complete URL, beginning with http:// 
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    You can also use the PAC profile Multiple language strings to specify the Hours of Operation message. This method may be more convenient if you have multiple PAC messages to customize. For more information, see Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Title_Lists_in_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Title_Lists_in_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce083512 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobilePAC/Title_Lists_in_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Title Lists in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Title Lists in Mobile PAC

    +

    Patrons using Mobile PAC can develop and save title lists from search results. From the working title list, individual title information or the whole list can be sent by email, and working title lists can be saved to the patron account. Titles can be copied or moved among a patron’s title lists, and patrons can place requests and view availability information and enriched content for titles in a title list.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Creating a Working List

    +

    To create a working list, the user taps the Add to my list link for a title returned in search results. The link is displayed in the initial results list and in the detailed view for a title. Working title lists are limited to 100 titles. When the user tries to add more, the system displays a message advising the user to save the list.

    +

    After the title has been added, the link changes to Remove, which the user can tap to remove the title from the working list.

    +

    When at least one title has been added to the working list, the bottom of each search results page displays links to access or clear the working list. The user clicks Working list to display the working list. You can choose a Sort by option at the top of the page and tap Go to sort the list according to your selection.

    +

    Email Options

    +

    From the working list page, the user can check and delete individual titles from the working list, check individual titles and tap EMail, or tap Email All to send the entire list. When the user taps Email or Email All, the email page is displayed. Format options include Brief Bibliographic and Full Bibliographic.

    +

    After selecting a format, the user types an email address and taps Email.

    +

    Very long emails may exceed system or email service limits that prevent successful delivery. Very long emails may exceed system or email service limits that prevent successful delivery. In this case, the system displays an alert message. The user can tap OK to close the alert and send the email, or Cancel to return to the title list. The user can then select a different display format, or select fewer titles.

    +

    Saving Lists

    +

    Logged on patrons can access the working list and any previously saved lists by clicking My Lists on the My Account page. The Saved Lists page is displayed.

    +

    The working list is available for the current session. To create a new saved list, the patron taps Create new saved title list. The Create List page opens, where the patron can name and save the new list.

    +

    The new list is saved with no titles in it. Titles can be copied or moved from the working list or an existing saved list to the new list (or to any other saved list.)

    +

    Copying and Moving Titles Among Lists

    +

    From the Saved Lists page, the patron opens the list that contains the title to be copied or moved.

    +

    From the list of titles, the patron checks the title or titles and taps Copy or Move. The Copy or Move page opens.

    +

    The patron chooses a destination list from the saved lists in the patron account, and taps Copy to or Move to. The selected title is copied or moved to the destination list.

    +

    Title Details

    +

    When the patron taps a title in the title list, the Title Detail page opens.

    +

    From the Title Detail page, the patron can select a display format or tap the title link for further options on the product page; for example, viewing availability information, viewing detailed bibliographic information, placing a hold request on the title, viewing enriched data.

    +

    Requested Indicator

    +

    You can display a "requested" indicator in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC title lists for titles on which the patron has an active, pending, held, shipped, or located hold request. The indicator is a message: You requested this on [date]; the system supplies the date. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display and Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display.

    +

    Setting Up Mobile PAC Title Lists

    +

    To provide the title list option in Mobile PAC, set the PowerPAC profile Title list: Enable to Yes in Polaris Administration. To allow patrons to email selected titles or entire lists, set the PowerPAC profile Title list: Email to Yes. These settings also apply to Polaris PowerPAC. See Enabling PAC Title Lists.

    +

    You can edit text strings related to Mobile PAC title lists using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). For more information, see WebAdmin online Help.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobileProfs/Mobile_PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobileProfs/Mobile_PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96c738dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOMobileProfs/Mobile_PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,361 @@ + + + + + + + + Mobile PAC Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mobile PAC Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available on the Profiles, Mobile PAC tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Ask us: Require login

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Determines whether users must be registered patrons to send a question to the library by e-mail, using the Ask Us feature. See Setting Up Ask Us in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes - Patrons must log in with a barcode and password to use Ask Us.

    +

    If set to No, the Ask Us log-in page displays a Guest button that bypasses log-in.

    +
    +

    Branch switching: Enable

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Allows users to change connection branches. See Setting Up Mobile PAC Connections.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Mobile PAC Analytics

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Specify Google Analytics or custom coding to track site usage. See Analyzing Polaris Mobile PAC Use.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Navigation: Ask us

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Places the Ask Us link on the Mobile PAC home page. See Setting Up Ask Us in Mobile PAC

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    Navigation: Claimed and Lost +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    Specifies whether claimed and lost items are displayed in the patron's Mobile PAC account. 
    +

    Navigation: Donations

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Places the Donations link on Mobile PAC pages. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. See Credit Card Payments from Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Navigation: Fines & fees

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Places the Fines and Fees link on the Patron Account page. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Navigation: Items out

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Places the Items checked out link on the Patron Account page. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Navigation: Patron account

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Places the My Account link on the Mobile PAC home page. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Navigation: Requests

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Places the Hold requests link on the Patron Account page. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Navigation: Web site URL

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Displays the organization’s Web site address on the Hours and Contact page. See Setting Up Mobile PAC Library Information.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    New and Popular Titles

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Displays the New and Popular link on the home page, and sets up the lists of new, best seller, on-order, and most circulated (popular) titles. See New & Popular Titles in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Product page categories: Configure

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Determines the display order of links on the Mobile PAC product page for a title in search results. See Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Remember me: Enable

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    +
    +

    Displays the Remember me check box on the patron login page. See Patron Log-In Settings for Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Title Display: Configure

    +
    +
      +
    • System
    • +
    • Library
    • +
    • Branch
    • +
    +
    +

    Specify the data elements that appear in the brief, full, and summary results for Mobile PAC bibliographic searches. You can customize and order the elements you select, and customize and translate their labels. See Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Administration_Reference_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Administration_Reference_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c0be8ce3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Administration_Reference_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + PAC Administration Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Administration Profiles Reference

    +

    These tables list the PAC, PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Children's PAC profiles in Polaris Administration and the organization level, description, and default setting for each profile.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c556e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/PAC_Profiles_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,683 @@ + + + + + + + + PAC Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available on the Profiles, PAC tabbed page on the Administration Explorer at the levels listed. They affect aspects of Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris Mobile PAC.

    +

    Note:
    For more information about Polaris Mobile PAC, see Setting Up Mobile PAC.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    Active directory logon

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Enables log-on to PowerPAC and Mobile PAC using network credentials instead of the Polaris barcode/username and password. See Set Up PAC Active Directory Log On.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Branch list order

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, sets the display order of branches in the Switch to another branch list if you allow patrons to switch connection branches. This profile also controls the display order of branches on the PowerPAC search options page, the self-registration page, and the donations page. The setting for the current connection branch is used. The profile also controls the display order of the list of pick-up libraries for requests, but in this case the setting for the patron’s registered branch is used. Set the profile to Yes to display the branch names in ascending alphabetical order by name. Set the profile to No to display the branch names in ascending numerical order by internal organization ID. In either case, the system organization is always first.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Default Polaris user in PAC

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies a user account for recording and reporting statistics. Leave this profile at the default setting.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Did you mean: Enabled

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether Did You Mean search suggestions are displayed in Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. See Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking.

    +
    +

    Yes (suggestions are displayed)

    +
    +

    Email notification: Email address of sender

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies a standard sender address (required for most e-mail applications) for e-mail services from the public interfaces, such as e-mailing a title list. This address is also used for online payment receipts, telephony service error and warning messages, and the EDI e-mail log.

    +

    Type an email address (it must contain the @ symbol).

    +
    +

    youremail@yourdomain.com

    +
    +

    Email notification: Server running SMTP service

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server to use for PAC e-mail features such as Ask Us or purchase requests from rotating book jacket titles. If each branch has its own SMTP server, patron e-mail messages from public stations can be routed through that server. This setting is also used for telephony service error and warning messages, and for e-mail notification.

    +

    Type the domain name of the e-mail SMTP server.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Enriched data

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the settings to receive cover images, reviews, ratings, and other enriched data content from your enriched data provider or providers. Enabling Enriched Data.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Fines and Fees: Show history in detailed view

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    When set to Yes, displays a history section that includes date, type, amount, payment, and staff name for a selected fine or fee when a logged-in patron clicks the information icon for a fine or fee in the Fines & Fees page of the patron account in Polaris PowerPAC. The setting for the patron’s registered branch controls the display.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Google Maps

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Enables the Map It! feature in PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC search results for the connection organization and sets the initial map center and zoom level. Map It (Google Maps) in PAC.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Hours of operation: Display

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    (Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC) When set to Yes, the organization’s Hours page includes a formatted schedule derived from the settings for the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation. See Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Hours of operation message

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    (Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC) Displays a message on the organization’s Hours page. See Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display detailed item status

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Item Availability display includes item status information more detailed than Not Available. Set the profile to Yes to displays the detailed item status description.

    +
  • +

    Requirement: Detailed item status descriptions are specified in the Circulation Statuses table (Database Tables).

    +
  • +

     

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display due date in detailed item status

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Item Availability detailed item status display includes the item’s due date.

    +

    Requirement: The PAC profile Item availability: Display detailed item status must also be set to Yes to display the due date

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display shelf location

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Item Availability display includes the item shelf location (for example, New Arrivals or Children’s Center).

    +

     

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display type

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Item Availability display includes the material type (for example, books or audio cassettes) from the item record.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display status

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Item Availability display includes item availability status.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    Item availability: Suppress for integrated eContent titles +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    Specifies whether availability information appears in the PAC for integrated eContent titles. SeeSuppress eContent Availability Display in PAC.No
    +

    Login retries

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Double-click to display the PAC Login Retries dialog box. Use this dialog box to enable a limit on the number of times a patron can attempt to log in before waiting 5 minutes to try again. See Limit log-in attempts.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Most popular sort settings

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    This profile is used if the Most Popular sort option is selected in the Search Settings Defaults profile. It is set by default to apply 50% relevance and 50% popularity when Most Popular is the selected sort option. You can adjust this setting to factor relevance either more or less than 50% when results are sorted by popularity. See Specify level of relevance applied to popularity sort.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Multiple language strings

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Double-click to display the Language Strings dialog box. Use this dialog box to edit messages and news headings. If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, you can edit messages and headings in your choice of languages. See Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron access options

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Double-click to display the Patron Access Options dialog box. Use this dialog box to set up patron account, self-registration features, suppress gender, send patrons a reset password link, and enforce phone number format validation. You can have different setup options for each organization.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron access: Display hold queue information

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether the holds queue column is displayed in the online patron account, and whether the patron receives a message about the current number of active requests for the material when she places a hold. The system uses the profile setting for the patron’s registered branch.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron access: Policy statement hyper text link

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the URL or network path to the Web page for the library privacy policy. The link is displayed on the patron self-registration pages and at all patron log-in points when Single Login is enabled and the patron has not yet logged in.

    +

    Type the complete path to the privacy policy page.

    +

    Requirement: Set Patron Access: policy statement hyper text link permitted to Yes.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron access: Policy statement hyper text link permitted

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Indicates whether a link to the Web page of the library privacy policy is displayed from the patron self-registration pages, and at all patron log-in points when Single Login is enabled and the patron has not yet logged in.

    +

    If set to Yes, the privacy policy link For more information on our privacy policy, click here is displayed on the Select a home library page, and at all patron log-in points when Single Login is enabled and the patron has not yet logged in. If you set this profile to Yes, specify a URL for the privacy policy Web page using the profile Patron Access: policy statement hyper text link.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Patron access: Renewal

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Indicates whether patrons can renew items from PAC. If this option is selected, you can also choose to allow renewals if the patron record will expire before the renewal due date. (You can also set up blocks that apply specifically to renewals from PAC. )

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Patron eReceipts

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Provides patrons the option of selecting e-mail renewal receipts, TXT message renewal receipts, or both, during patron self-registration and account updates. The patron’s registered branch must also enable eReceipts.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Patron library assigned and free text block default text

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the text to display in the PAC patron account summary when a patron account has selected library-assigned blocks or free text blocks. The maximum number of characters is 255

    +
    +

    Library assigned bock

    +
    +

    Patrons can remove reading history

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether patrons can remove individual items from their readings histories from the PAC patron account.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Purchase options

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    (Polaris PowerPAC) Specifies whether the Purchase link or Buy It Now link (Polaris Bookstore) is available in the results list, and contains the appropriate settings to set up the links. When a patron selects the link, an online bookstore Web site is displayed. See Enabling Online Book Purchases.

    +
    +

     

    +
    Reset password link timeout duration +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    Specifies the time period, in minutes, during which the time-sensitive password reset link remains valid once a patron initiates the password reset process from either Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. Enter a value between 1 and 999 minutes. See the Polaris PowerPAC help for more information about the patron workflow for recovering, resetting, or creating a password.60
    +

    Resource Groups: Search results settings

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Sets conditions for the display of eContent in PAC search results.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Search agent: Enable

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Provides patrons the ability to set up and save searches to run automatically at specified intervals. If the profile is set to Yes, the Search Agent option is available to patrons using Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.

    +

    Requirements:

    +

    Configure Search Agent Parameters (in Polaris Administration, PAC Parameters).

    +

    To allow logged-in patrons to view a list of their saved searches in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard, set the PowerPAC profile Single Login: Enable to Yes.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Search settings defaults

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the default settings for Search by, Limit by, Sort by, and Using for each PAC search type as applicable. See Specifying Default Search Settings.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Search: Sub-sort-by-title

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether search results for many types of searches and sort orders are automatically subsorted by title. See Specifying Default Search Settings.

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Suppress availability and requests

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the primary types of material (TOMs) for which availability and request options should be suppressed from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results displays. See Suppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +
    +

    No TOMs checked (all display)

    +
    +

    Suppress branches

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies branches to suppress from list displays. For Polaris PowerPAC, suppresses selected branches from the connection branch list (Switch to another branch), the list of branches on the Search Options scoping page, the list of branches on the Advanced Search scoping page, and the list of branches on the donations page. For Mobile PAC, suppresses selected branches from the drop list of organizations on the Library Hours page and the Mobile PAC Preferences page.

    +
    +

    No branches checked (all display)

    +
    +

    Suppress item display

    +
    +

    System

    +

    Library

    +

    Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the item circulation statuses that should prevent an item from being displayed in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results. See Suppressing Items from Search Results.

    +
    +

    No statuses checked (all display)

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Childrens_Pages_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Childrens_Pages_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..acee4761 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Childrens_Pages_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition Pages Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition Pages Reference

    +

    These files are located in the default root folder C:\Program Files\Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC on your Polaris PowerPAC server in the Children subfolder as noted.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Page

    +
    +

    PageID

    +
    +

    Function

    +
    children\default.aspx44The default page appears when you connect to the Children’s Edition, and when you click the banner graphic to clear search results.
    children\events.aspx45The events page appears when you click the Events link on any Children’s Edition page. The page lists events specified by the library
    children\fulldisplay.aspx47The full display page appears when you click the More Information link for a title, or the title name itself, in a search results list. The page displays detailed bibliographic and location information for the selected title.
    children\searchresults.aspx46The search results page displays the results of a search as a list of titles, with brief information about each title.
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Pages_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Pages_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..682396a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Pages_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,345 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC Pages Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Pages Reference

    +

    These files are located in the default root folder C:\Program Files\Polaris\[version]\PowerPAC on your Polaris PowerPAC server and in subfolders as noted.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Page

    +
    +

    PageID

    +
    +

    Function

    +
    bookrequest.aspx49 +Request page displayed when a rotating book jacket image is clicked on the portal page.
    default.aspx1First page to appear when Polaris PowerPAC is accessed if the portal page is enabled. If you add custom html content to this page, be sure that it is responsive.
    help\default.aspx7Displayed when All topics is selected on the Help menu.
    help\tutorials.aspx8Obsolete
    library\askus.aspx2Displayed when Ask Us on the Library Info menu is selected and the patron logs on. The page allows patrons to send an e-mail message to the library staff.
    library\events.aspx3 +Displayed when Events on the Library Info menu is selected. The Events page is where you can show information about upcoming library and community programs. If you add custom html content to this page, be sure that it is responsive. For information about editing the Events page, see Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters
    library\hours.aspx4Displayed when Hours on the Library Info menu is selected. The Hours page is where you can list the times when the library is open to the public.
    library\policies.aspx5Displayed when Policies on the Library Info menu is selected. The Policies page is where you can list the lending and usage policies. If you add custom html content to this page, be sure that it is responsive.See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters
    library\vrquestion.aspx43Displayed after a patron selects the virtual reference link and logs on. This page allows the patron to send a question to the virtual reference service.
    library\website.aspx6Displayed when Web Site on the Library Info menu is selected. The Web Site page is where you can list links to library-selected Web pages in the library or on the Internet. If you add custom html content to this page, be sure that it is responsive.
    logon.aspx17Displayed when any function is selected that requires the patron to log in. Patrons use this page to supply the patron account number or username and password.
    message.aspx29Notifies the patron that something has been done, such as changing a password or address, or displays a message when a problem occurs.
    patronaccount\claimedandlost.aspx69Displayed when Claimed and Lost is selected on the My Account menu. This page displays the patrons claimed and lost items.
    patronaccount\coursereserves.aspx58Displayed when Courses is selected on the My Account menu and the patron is an instructor for an active course. The page reports circulation statistics for reserved course materials.
    patronaccount\default.aspx9Displayed when the patron selects My Record on the My Account menu. This page displays the patron’s basic registration information.
    patronaccount\finesfees.aspx14 +Displayed when Fines & Fees is selected on the My Account menu. The Fines page lists the fines and fees the patron owes.
    patronaccount\itemsout.aspx16Displayed when Items Out is selected on the My Account menu. The Items Out page shows the items currently checked out by the patron.
    patronaccount\patroncommunity.aspx64Licensed feature. Displayed when an organization representative selects Community on the My Account menu.
    patronaccount\readinghistory.aspx31Displayed when Reading History is selected on the My Account menu. The Reading History page displays a list of the items the patron has checked out since the reading history began.
    patronaccount\registerconnections.aspx67Polaris Social. Displayed when a patron clicks the appropriate link on the PowerPAC log-on page. This page provides options for setting up a new ChiliFresh account or linking an existing account to the patron’s library account.
    patronaccount\requests.aspx18Displayed when Requests is selected on the My Account menu. The Request page lists the hold and interlibrary loan requests the patron has made.
    patronaccount\searchagent.aspx40Displayed when Saved Searches is selected on the My Account menu. The Saved Searches page lists information about saved (automatic) searches and provides links for editing and deleting the searches.
    patronaccount\selfregister.aspx20Displayed when click here to register on any log-on page is selected. The Self Register page allows patrons to register for a library card.
    patronaccount\shoppingcart.aspx57Displayed when My Shopping Cart is selected on the My Account menu. This page displays a list of digital materials a patron has placed in the shopping cart for purchase. Used with Polaris Fusion, a separately licensed product.
    patronaccount\social.aspx66Polaris Social. Available to logged-in patrons from the PowerPAC patron account; displayed when the patron clicks Connections in the dashboard or the menu bar.
    patronaccount\virtualreference.aspx33 +Displayed when Virtual Reference is selected on the My Account menu. The Virtual Reference page provides access to transcripts of the patron’s interaction with a virtual reference service, if the service provides this feature.
    search\browse.aspx +52Displayed in response to a Browse search. This page allows patrons to browse the appropriate index headings.
    search\changedatabases.aspx +50Displayed when the Select Databases link is chosen on a search page. This is the Other Databases page, where patrons can select Z39.50 databases to search simultaneously with the library catalog.
    search\communityinformation.aspx61Licensed feature. Displayed when the user selects Community Keyword on the Community menu.
    search\communityinformationbrowse.aspx +62Licensed feature. Displayed when the user selects Community Browse on the Community menu.
    search\communityinformationfull.aspx63Licensed feature. Displayed when the user selects a community entry in the community search results list.
    search\communitylist.aspx65 +Licensed feature. The initial search results list for a community information search. +
    search\default.aspx?type=Advanced (before search)24 +Displayed when Advanced is selected from the Search menu. You set up and launch an advanced search from this page.
    search\default.aspx?type=Boolean (before search) +25Displayed when Boolean is selected from the Search menu. You set up and launch a Boolean (command) search from this page.
    search\default.aspx?type=Browse (before search)22Displayed when Browse is selected from the Search menu. You set up and launch a browse search from this page
    search\default.aspx?type=Course (before search)48Displayed when Course Reserves is selected from the Search menu. You set up and launch a search for course reserve records from this page.
    search\default.aspx?type=Exact (before search)30Displayed when Exact is selected from the Search menu.
    search\default.aspxtype=Keyword (before search)21Displayed when Keyword is selected from the Search menu. You set up and launch a keyword search from this page.
    search\default.aspx?type=Phrase (before search)23Displayed when Phrase is selected from the Search menu. You set up and launch a phrase search from this page.
    search\misc\dictionary.aspxN/Asearch\misc\dictionary.aspx
    search\misc\esources.aspx34Displayed when E-Sources is selected from the Search menu. The e-Sources page provides links to the proprietary, non-Z39.50 databases available for patron searches.
    search\misc\thesaurus.aspxN/AObsolete
    search\newreleases.aspx35Displayed when you click a category in the New Titles Web part on the dashboard. The page displays title links for new library acquisitions.
    search\related.aspx53Displayed when you click More in the Related Web part on the dashboard for the search results page.
    search\searchresults.aspx51Displays the initial bib search results list (brief information).
    search\title.aspx54Displays the title product page when a title listed in search results is selected for full display.
    search\titlelist.aspx56Title list page, displayed when you click My Lists in the Search menu.
    social\profile.aspx68Read-only page that displays the public profile of any of the “social” users in PowerPAC (as opposed to the patronaccount/social.aspx page which is the patron’s own profile page).
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Standard_PAC_Pages_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Standard_PAC_Pages_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3a9a4e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPacProfs/Standard_PAC_Pages_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Standard PAC Pages Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Standard PAC Pages Reference

    +

    This topic lists the Polaris PowerPAC and Children’s Edition pages and when they are displayed. You can use this information to decide which, if any, Web parts should be assigned to the dashboard for a specific page (see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards - Overview), or to edit the pages as part of customizing Polaris PowerPAC for your library.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Web Page IDs for User-Defined Pages

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition are based on ASP.NET programming. All .aspx and .ascx files are directly editable, but you should back up your changes to preserve them from being overwritten when the application is updated and reinstalled. For more information, see PAC Customization.

    +

    If you create a custom page with the user-defined template /Custom/CustomPage-template.aspx, you may want to set the PageID value so that the appropriate Web parts are displayed in the dashboard. The default value is 1, which means that your custom page will display the same Web parts as the default PowerPAC portal page (default.aspx). To get a different set of Web parts on your custom page, you change the default PageID value to that of an existing standard page. Simply search your custom file for PageID and change the value at each occurrence.

    +

    Example: +
    You have created a new Web page for a patron account function. If you want the Web parts that normally display on the default patron account page to be displayed on your new custom page, change the webpageid value to 9.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Controlling_Patron_Account_Login_Access.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Controlling_Patron_Account_Login_Access.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..186a58aa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Controlling_Patron_Account_Login_Access.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + Controlling Patron Account Login and Access + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Controlling Patron Account Login and Access

    +

    Use the following Polaris Administration settings to control PAC login and access to patron account information:

    +

    Single Login: Enable (PowerPAC profile) - If this profile is set to Yes, a Log In/Register option is displayed in the My Account menu and in the page footer. A Log In link is also displayed at the top of the page. This allows a patron to log in once for a session, instead of each time a function requires identification. When patrons provide log-in information for the first time (for example, in requesting a hold), they remain logged in until they select a log-out option, or until the Polaris PowerPAC session times out.

    +

    Important:
    If you change this profile, you must clear the page cache. See Updating Page Caches. If you do not, you may see unexpected results, and it may be possible for a patron to see another patron’s account information at a library workstation.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the patron has logged in, the PowerPAC page displays the patron’s name and the Log Out option in the dashboard and at the top of the the page. The patron can click or tap the Welcome link to display the Items Out page for the patron's account. When a patron logs in from the My Account menu, the Items Out page is automatically displayed

    +

    + +

    +

    The logged-in patron can select an option in the My Account menu or on the dashboard to see their record, the items they have checked out, hold requests, fines and fees, and saved searches.

    +

    Note:
    The Single Login profile also allows Polaris to cache patron log-in information for e-sources authentication. See Setting Up E-Source Targets.

    +

    Polaris Mobile PAC allows a single log-in until the patron deliberately logs out, disconnects from the Mobile PAC site, or is inactive for 20 minutes. See Patron Log-In Settings for Mobile PAC.

    +

    Patron Access: policy statement hyper text link permitted and Patron Access: policy statement hyper text link (PAC profile) - Enable the hyperlink text and define the text. See Set up a privacy statement link (Polaris PowerPAC).

    +

    Login retries (PAC profile) - Limits the number of times a patron can attempt to log into the PAC without success. See Limit log-in attempts.

    +

    Patron inactivity timeout (PowerPAC profile) - Specifies the period of inactivity after which a logged-in patron at a library (in-house) workstation is automatically logged out. See Set an inactivity timeout for in-house workstations.

    +

    Active directory logon (PAC profile) - Allows a PAC log-on using Active Directory credentials instead of the Polaris patron barcode or username and password. This feature is particularly suitable in academic settings, enabling students to authenticate into Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC using their campus network credentials established in Active Directory. The user must have a Polaris patron record, but the authentication uses the user’s network ID, contained in a Polaris patron record User Defined Field (UDF), rather than the patron record barcode and password. Although a patron record barcode is required by Polaris, it will not be used for any PAC authentication. When the user attempts to log in from Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, the log-in page prompts for the network credentials instead of the usual Polaris barcode/username and password. For set-up instructions, see Set Up PAC Active Directory Log On.

    +

    Navigation: Patron account (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC profiles) - When this profile is set to Yes, the My Account option is displayed on the Polaris PowerPAC menu bar.

    +

    Navigation: Fines & fees (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC profiles) - When this profile is set to Yes, the Fines & Fees option is displayed on the My Account menu.

    +

    Navigation: Items Out (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC profiles) - When this profile is set to Yes, the Items Out option is displayed on the My Account menu and summary information is displayed in the patron account page dashboard.

    +

    Navigation: My Record - When the profile is set to Yes, the My Record option is displayed on the My Account menu.

    +

    Navigation: Requests (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC profiles) - When this profile is set to Yes, the Requests option is displayed on the My Account menu, summary information is displayed in the patron account page dashboard, and a link to the list of requests is displayed when a request is placed.

    +

    Navigation: Claimed and Lost (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC profiles) - When this profile is set to Yes, the Claimed and Lost view is displayed in the patron account.

    +

    Patron access: Display hold queue information (PAC profile) - When this profile is set to Yes, the position of a patron’s request in the holds queue is displayed on the Requests page of the patron account.

    +

    Patron Access: Renewal (PAC profile) - When the Renewal permitted option is checked, patrons can renew all or selected items from the Items Out page in the patron account. If the Allow renewal if patron registration will expire option is selected, the patron sees the expiration message in PAC but the renewal is allowed. The system uses the setting of the governing library for patron blocks.

    +

    Patron access options (PAC profile) - Use the options available in this profile to set up self-registration; specify defaults; set password options; specify the reminder notices that patrons can opt out of receiving; specify the contact information the patron can change; specify the associated patron information that is displayed for patrons who have associations; specify which custom fields display and whether they are required; specify whether patrons can send "Ask us" emails. See Setting Patron Account Options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_PCDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_PCDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4782ca68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_PCDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display and require PCDFs in patron update pages in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display and require PCDFs in patron update pages in PAC

    +

    To display patron custom data fields (PCDFs) in the patron update pages in the PAC, and to specify that certain patron custom data fields are required:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron Access options. The Patron Access Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select the Preferences tab.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Custom Field Display tab to display the available PCDFs.
    2. +
    +

    + custdisp00562.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To display a PCDF in the patron account update page in the PAC, select the left check box under Label.
    2. +
    3. To indicate that a displayed PCDF is a required field, select the PCDF and click Change Required Status. The Required setting changes from No (the default) to Yes.
    4. +
    +

    See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply when you are finished setting up the PCDFs.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_UDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_UDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88bdb25d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Display_and_require_UDFs_in_patron_update_pages_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Display and require UDFs in patron update pages in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display and require UDFs in patron update pages in PAC

    +

    To display user-defined fields (UDFs) in the patron update pages in the PAC, and to specify that certain user-defined fields are required:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron Access options.The Patron Access Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Preferences tab. The available UDFs are listed on the UDF Display subtab.
    2. +
    +

    + prefpage.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To display UDFs in the patron account update pages in the PAC, select the left check box under User defined fields to display.
    2. +
    3. To indicate that a displayed UDF is a required field, select the Required check box.
    4. +
    +

    + See Setting Up User-Defined Fields. +

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply when you are finished setting up the UDFs.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Enable_patron_account_access_-_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Enable_patron_account_access_-_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a8751f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Enable_patron_account_access_-_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enable patron account access - PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable patron account access - PowerPAC

    +

    To allow patrons to view their accounts from Polaris PowerPAC, and to specify the available account features:

    +

    Note:
    Separate Mobile PAC profiles control patron account access, navigation, and features in Mobile PAC. See Patron Account (My Account) in Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Navigation: Patron Account, and set the value to Yes. When this profile is set to Yes, the My Account option is displayed on the Polaris PowerPAC menu bar.
    4. +
    5. Set the following PowerPAC profiles to control what features you offer when patrons access their accounts:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Navigation: Fines & Fees - Specifies whether patrons can view the fines and fees associated with their library accounts. When the profile is set to Yes, the Fines & Fees option is displayed on the My Account menu. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Patrons can select an information icon InfoIconBlue.gif to see detailed information about an individual fine or fee. The history section on the details page includes the date, type, amount, payment, and staff name associated with the fine or fee. If you prefer to suppress the history section, set the PAC profile Fines & Fees: Show history in detailed view to No.

    +

    Note:
    If you plan to accept online credit card payments, set Navigation: Fines & Fees to Yes. See Setting Up E-Commerce.

    +
      +
    • +

      Navigation: Items Out - Specifies whether patrons can view a list of the items checked out to their account. When the profile is set to Yes, the Items Out option is displayed on the My Account menu and summary information is displayed in the patron account page dashboard. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you want to allow patrons to renew items from the Items Out page, set this option using the PAC profile Patron Access: Renewal Permitted. See step 4.

    +
      +
    • +

      Navigation: My Record - Specifies whether patrons can view their library registration information. When the profile is set to Yes, the My Record option is displayed on the My Account menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Navigation: Requests - Specifies whether patrons can view a list of the titles they have requested. When the profile is set to Yes, the Requests option is displayed on the My Account menu, summary information is displayed in the patron account page dashboard, and a link to the list of requests is displayed when a request is placed. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. The page shows the status of each request, and allows the patron to cancel, suspend and reactivate requests. From the Requests page, the patron can also see detailed information about each request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron access: Display hold queue information - Specifies whether the position of a patron’s request in the holds queue is displayed on the Requests page of the patron account, and whether the patron receives a message about the current number of active requests for the material when she places a hold. The profile setting for the patron’s registered branch controls whether the holds queue information is displayed.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You may want to suppress the holds queue information because it can be confusing in certain circumstances. For example, a request may be first in the queue, but if it is overridden for some reason, it may not be filled first. Also, if a branch uses primary and secondary routing groups, the queue position of a request may change if the request is sent to the secondary routing group. For more information about holds processing, see Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing.

    +
      +
    1. To allow patrons to renew items from Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the PAC tab in the details view of the Administration Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron Access: Renewal, and select (check) Renewal permitted.
    4. +
    +

    When this option is checked, patrons can renew all or selected items from the Items Out page in the patron account. (When the profile is set to No, the renewal links are not displayed on the Items Out page.)

    +

    Note:
    Even when you permit renewals, renewal options are not displayed for items that cannot be renewed.

    +
      +
    1. To allow renewals where the patron registration will expire before the renewal due date, select Allow renewal if patron registration will expire.
    2. +
    +

    If this option is selected, the patron sees the expiration message in PAC but the renewal is allowed. The system uses the setting of the governing library for patron blocks.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Patron messages - You can allow staff to post library-defined or free-text messages to patron accounts. Patrons can then read and delete the messages from the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC patron account. For more information about setting up patron messages, see Setting Up Patron Messages. For more information about posting patron messages in the staff client, see Posting Patron Messages.
    • +
    • Blocks on renewals and ebook circulation - You can set blocking conditions that apply to renewals and ebook circulation from the PAC or renewals by telephone. See Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks. You can also block renewal from PAC if an associated patron has exceeded the 2nd level fine amount as determined by the governing library for patron blocks, or if the associated patron has exceeded the maximum overdue limit as determined by the governing library for patron blocks. For more information about setting up blocking relationships, see Patron Associations.
    • +
    • Hold/ILL requests - You set conditions for requests from PAC with Requests parameters. See Setting Up Hold and ILL Loan Request Processing.
    • +
    • Online registration, password changes, and account updates - See Setting Patron Account Options.
    • +
    • Setting a staff override password - See Set patron password and user name options.
    • +
    • Allowing credit card payments - See Setting Up E-Commerce.
    • +
    • Search agent (saved searches) - If you offer search agent functionality, patrons can view and work with their saved searches from the patron account pages. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.
    • +
    • Ask Us - Using Ask Us, registered patrons can log in and send an email message to designated library staff members. See Set up and start Ask Us. You can optionally offer this feature to guest users (no logon required).
    • +
    • 3M PAMS - 3M™ Public Access Management System “smart cards” allow patrons to log in by placing a smart card in a reader. See Set up Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    • Polaris® ExpressCheck™ - Use the SelfCheck Unit parameter Polaris ExpressCheck: Options to control access to the patron account from ExpressCheck.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Limit_log-in_attempts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Limit_log-in_attempts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74856b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Limit_log-in_attempts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Limit log-in attempts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Limit log-in attempts

    +

    You can limit the number of times a patron can attempt to log in before being forced to wait 5 minutes. To limit the number of times a patron can attempt to log in before the waiting period is enforced:

    +

    Note:
    These settings apply to the following PAC applications:
    Polaris PowerPAC - Main log-in page, hold request page
    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition - Hold request page
    Mobile PAC - Main log-in page

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system level, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Login retries. The PAC Login Retries dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Enable limit on login retries.
    6. +
    7. Set the number of attempts (5-99) allowed before the patron must wait 5 minutes.
    8. +
    9. Click OK.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_Up_PAC_Active_Directory_Log_On.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_Up_PAC_Active_Directory_Log_On.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..53fc4f8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_Up_PAC_Active_Directory_Log_On.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up PAC Active Directory logon + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up PAC Active Directory logon

    +

    You can allow users to log on to PAC using network credentials (Active Directory logon) instead of the Polaris patron record barcode/username and password. ActiveDirectory logon has these requirements and limitations:

    +
      +
    • The Polaris production server must be in the same domain as the Active Directory service.
    • +
    • The library must designate a user-defined field (UDF) to contain the network ID in the patron record. Staff can search for patron records by this UDF if trouble-shooting is necessary. For information about setting up UDFs, see Setting Up User-Defined Fields.
    • +
    • +

      The Polaris patron record barcode and password will not work to log on to the patron record in PAC. Because the network ID is the standard for access and the Polaris patron barcode/password cannot be used to log on, the library must limit the user’s ability to manage this Polaris patron data by suppressing certain options from PAC. In Polaris Administration, suppress the following options with the PAC profile Patron access options (see Setting Patron Account Options):

      +
        +
      • Create a username - On the Log In tabbed page (system level only), clear the Enable patron username check box.
      • +
      • Change passwords - On the Log In tabbed page, clear the Patron can change password check box.
      • +
      • Manage forgotten passwords - On the Log In tabbed page (system level only), clear the E-mail forgotten password check box.
      • +
      • Register for a patron account online - On the Self-registration tabbed page, clear the Patron can self-register check box.
      • +
      +
    • +
    • SIP applications, such as third-party self-check, will not work with the Active Directory credentials. They require the Polaris patron record barcode and password.
    • +
    • Offline Polaris will not work with the Active Directory credentials. It requires the Polaris patron record barcode and password.
    • +
    +

    See Active Directory Log On in PAC.

    +

    To allow users to log on to PAC using network credentials instead of the Polaris patron record barcode/username and password:

    +

    Note:
    These settings apply to both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Active directory logon. The Active Directory Logon dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Enable.
    6. +
    7. Select the UDF (user-defined field) that contains the network ID from the list.
    8. +
    9. The options are the UDFs defined for the system. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.
    10. +
    11. Enter the network domain name (maximum 25 characters).
    12. +
    13. Click Save.
    14. +
    15. Suppress user name, password, and self-registration options from display in PAC, using the PAC profile Patron access options. See Enable patron account access - PowerPAC.
    16. +

      Important:
      There are no programmatic relationships between the Active Directory Logon settings and the Patron access options settings that control patron usernames, passwords, or self-registration. You must suppress these options in Polaris Administration as described here.

      +
    17. Using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), reload Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.
    18. +
    +

    Active Directory Log On in PAC

    +

    When the Active Directory option is enabled, the PAC log-on page displays Username and Password fields. The user enters the network ID (username) and password. If the password is correct and the username matches that entered in a single patron record UDF, the user is logged on. The Username field label can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin).

    +

    Authentication fails in the following situations:

    +
      +
    • The credentials cannot be validated according to network validation rules (for example, the user has entered a Polaris patron barcode instead of the network username). A message is displayed: You have entered an invalid ID or password. Please try again.
    • +
    • The ID (username) entered does not match the designated UDF in any patron record. A message is displayed: Your library account cannot be verified. Please contact the library for assistance.
    • +
    • The ID entered matches the designated UDF in more than patron record. A message is displayed: Your ID matches more than one library record. Please contact the library for assistance.
    • +
    +

    These messages can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The language strings are:

    +
      +
    • PACML_ADLOGON_FAILED (invalid ID or password)
    • +
    • PACML_ADLOGON-NOPATRON (library account cannot be verified)
    • +
    • PACML_ADLOGON_MULTPATRON (more than one library record)
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_an_inactivity_timeout_for_in-house_workstations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_an_inactivity_timeout_for_in-house_workstations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4191aef6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_an_inactivity_timeout_for_in-house_workstations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set an inactivity timeout for in-house workstations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set an inactivity timeout for in-house workstations

    +

    To automatically log out patrons from in-house workstations after a specified period of inactivity:

    +

    Note:
    These settings do not apply to patrons who are not logged in or those working outside the library.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron inactivity timeout. The Patron Inactivity Timeout dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable patron inactivity timeout for in-house workstations to enable the inactivity timeout.
    2. +
    3. Set the time after which the patron is logged out and the specified page (see step 5) is displayed. You can specify a time from 1 to 20 minutes.
    4. +
    5. Specify the page to display after the inactivity period and automatic logout:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Select Default PowerPAC home page to return to the page you have specified as the PowerPAC home page. See Set up Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    • Select URL and type the complete URL of the page that should be displayed (255 characters maximum).
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your settings.
    2. +
    +

    Patron Inactivity Timer

    +

    The patron inactivity timer starts only when a patron has stopped doing any of the following actions: clicking Polaris product buttons, links, cover images; clicking in the PowerPAC portion of the browser window; or entering a credit card payment. When any of these actions occur, activity is registered and the inactivity timer is restarted. Actions that are not counted as activity include resizing or moving the browser window; accessing browser menu options; scrolling; or accessing any third-party resource that opens in a lightbox, frameset, or new browser window.

    +

    When this feature is enabled, the browser status bar displays a count-down timer when 60 seconds are left before automatic logout. In addition, an alert box displays the following message 30 seconds before the session is due to time out: Your session will end in 30 seconds.

    +

    If the user clicks the Continue session button in the timeout alert box, the session timeout clock restarts, and the user remains on the current page. If a lightbox was open, it remains open. If the user does not click the Continue session button, the session ends, and the page defined in the Patron inactivity timeout profile displays.

    +

    Note:
    When a credit card payment is submitted, the Patron Inactivity Timeout value is calculated by adding it to the credit card gateway timeout set in the Credit Card parameter Online payments: Configure plus 90 seconds.

    +

    The count-down timer text can be edited in Polaris Language Editor (string ID PACML_TIMEOUMSG).

    +

    The following language strings can be edited in Polaris Language Editor:

    +
      +
    • PACML_TIMEOUTALERT +
    • +
    • PACML_TIMEOUTALERT2 +
    • +
    • PACML_CONTINUESESSION +
    • +
    • PACML_TIMWINTITLE +
    • +
    • PACML_TIMEOUTCLICK +
    • +
    • PACML_TIMEOUTSECONDS +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The number of seconds cannot be modified.

    +

    Note - Secure Socket Layer (SSL):
    If SSL is enabled for the entire site, the 60-second countdown timer appears in the status bar only if you add the site to the trusted sites list in Internet Explorer. For more information about SSL, see Secure Socket Layer (SSL) and Set the entire PowerPAC site to https only.

    +

    Note - Firefox browsers:
    You may need to clear the browser history to make the timer work correctly.

    +

    To display the count-down timer in the status bar, select Tools, Options, Content tabbed page, and click Advanced. On the Advanced JavaScript Settings dialog box, select (check) Change status bar text.

    +

    The automatic logoff applies only to in-house workstations. A workstation is typically considered to be in-house if it is registered in Polaris Administration (staff client workstations) or if the workstation’s IP address is listed in the In-House IP Addresses database table. If you use Polaris PowerPAC on workstations within the library and you are enabling the patron inactivity timeout, be sure to list them in the In-House IP Addresses database table.

    +

    For information about registering client workstations in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up Workstations.

    +

    For information about listing PowerPAC workstations in the In-House IP Addresses database table, see Identifying In-House Computers.

    +

    You can determine whether the system checks both the In-House IP Addresses table and the registered workstations (the default setting), or only the In-House IP Addresses table, to determine whether a workstation is in-house. See Set criteria for determining in-house location.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_associations_display_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_associations_display_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74dc84ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_associations_display_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + Set patron associations display in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set patron associations display in PAC

    +

    If your library uses associated patrons functionality to link patron accounts together, you can specify whether to display the "block me" and/or "allow me" settings for associated patrons in the PAC.

    +

    To specify the settings that patrons can see about their associated patrons in the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron access options. The Patron Access Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select the Preferences tab.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the Associated Patrons check box, and select one or both of these check boxes:
      • Show 'Block me' setting - When this check box is selected for a branch, patrons registered at this branch can see whether they are blocked when their associated patrons are blocked.
      • Show 'Allow me' setting - When this check box is selected for a branch, patrons registered at this branch can see whether they are permitted to pick up and check out held items for their associated patrons.
    2. +
    3. Click Save.
    4. +
    +

    Associated Patron Display in PowerPAC

    +

    If both the Associated Patrons options (Show 'Block me' setting and Show 'Allow me' setting) are selected in the Patron Access Options profile for the branch, patrons registered at that branch who have associations can access their account in PowerPAC, expand the Associated Patrons area, and see the block and allow settings for each of their associated patrons.

    +

    + +

    +

    Associated Patron Display in Mobile PAC

    +

    If both the Associated Patrons options (Show 'Block me' setting and Show 'Allow me' setting) are selected in the Patron Access Options profile for the branch, patrons registered at that branch who have associations can access their account in Mobile PAC, expand the Associated Patrons area by selecting the right arrow, and see the block and allow settings for each associated patron.

    +

    Patron account in Mobile PAC +

    +

    + +

    +

    Block and Allow settings for associated patrons in Mobile PAC +

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_password_and_user_name_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_password_and_user_name_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7379a5be --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_patron_password_and_user_name_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set patron password and user name options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set patron password and user name options

    +

    To set the password and user name options offered to patrons using Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC:

    +

    Important:
    Do this procedure for each branch that allows patron self-registration.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron access options. The Patron Access Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the Log In tab.
    6. +

      + +

      +
    7. To allow patrons to change their passwords online, select the Patron can change password check box.
    8. +
    9. To specify an override password for staff, do these steps:
    10. +

      Note:
      A staff member can use the staff override password to help a patron access the account in case the password has been forgotten. Once in the account, if the Patron can change password box is selected, the patron can specify a new password by clicking a link on the PAC patron account page.

      +
        +
      • Select the Enable staff override check box.
      • +
      • Type a password in the PAC override password box. The password can be 4 to 16 characters (letters and numbers), but cannot include spaces.
      • +
      +
    11. (System level only) To allow patrons to set up and change user names, select Enable patron username.
    12. +

      A patron can enter her user name instead of a barcode when logging in to use PAC functions such as viewing the patron account or placing a hold request. The user name is displayed in the patron account in PAC, and the patron barcode is masked to display only the last four digits. The user name is also accepted for logging in to third-party self-service devices (devices that rely on SIP or SIP2) and in Polaris ExpressCheck. The user name must be a minimum of 4 alpha-numeric characters, not more than 50 characters, and cannot contain spaces. It must begin with an alpha character. The following special characters are also allowed: - (dash), _ (underscore), . (period), and @ (at). The user name must not contain two adjacent special characters, and cannot match an existing patron barcode.

      +

      Note:
      Patron user names are not available to staff. Staff cannot assign them during patron registration, they are not searchable or available for reports, and they are not displayed in the patron record. Only patrons can create or change user names.

      +
    13. (System level only) To allow patrons to receive an email message containing a time-sensitive link to reset their password, select E-mail reset password link.
    14. +

      When this option is set, the PAC, MobilePAC, or Polaris ExpressCheck sign in pages include a Forgot password? link. When the patron clicks the link, an email message containing a time-sensitive link to reset their password is sent to both the primary and alternate email addresses in the patron record. If no email address is present in the patron record, the system displays an error message.

      +

      Note:
      If the patron has forgotten both user name and password, the patron must contact the library. Staff can assign a new password. Using this and the barcode, the patron can set up a new user name.

      +
    15. To restrict passwords to numeric characters (PINs), select Passwords must be numeric only.
    16. +

      This option is useful if you use Polaris Phone Attendant and allow patrons to log in by telephone to hear information about their accounts. (Alternatively, you can allow alpha-numeric passwords from the Phone Attendant. See Set Phone Attendant Options for Specific Lines.) If you choose to enable this option, existing alphanumeric passwords will continue to work but only numeric passwords are accepted when a new account is created or when a patron password is changed from the staff client or from PAC.

      +
    17. Click Apply to apply your settings and continue working with Patron Access options, or click Save to save your settings and close the Patron Access options dialog box.
    18. +
    19. Select File > Save.
    20. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_a_privacy_statement_link_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_a_privacy_statement_link_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b615d679 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_a_privacy_statement_link_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up a privacy statement link (Polaris PowerPAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up a privacy statement link (Polaris PowerPAC)

    +

    You can display a link to the library’s privacy policy (For more information on our privacy policy, click here) on the patron self-registration pages and at all patron log-in points when Single Login is enabled and the patron has not yet logged in.

    +

    To display the link in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron Access: policy statement hyper text link permitted, and set the value to Yes.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Patron Access: policy statement hyper text link, and type the complete URL to the Web page for the library privacy policy.
    6. +
    7. Select File, Save.
    8. +
    +

    See also: Privacy and Refund Policy Display Options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_and_start_Ask_Us.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_and_start_Ask_Us.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..930b7dbf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_and_start_Ask_Us.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up and start Ask Us + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up and start Ask Us

    +

    With the Ask Us feature, patrons can use Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC to send a reference question to a designated library email address. You set up a receiving email address on the branch level, then enable the feature in PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, or both. You can require a patron logon, or bypass the logon and allow anyone to send a question via Ask Us.

    +

    The Sent From email address on the message to the library is the email address the user has specified in the Ask Us form, if any. If no address is specified, the user has logged in as a patron, and the patron account includes an email address, that address is used. If no email address is specified in the Ask Us form or the patron account, or the patron has cleared the address from the form, the Sent From address is that specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender.

    +

    Note:
    Any email message from PAC, including Ask Us messages, requires you to specify the SMTP server in Polaris Administration. Double-click the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service, and type the domain name of the email SMTP server.

    +

    To set up the email addresses to receive questions sent from the PAC, and to start the Ask Us function:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron Access options. The Patron Access Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the Ask Us tab.
    6. +
    +

    + dPatronAccAskUs.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To specify the receiving address for Ask Us email messages, do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Add, and use the Find Tool to search for the staff member or members who should receive the Ask Us messages.
    2. +
    3. Select the names in the results list, right-click the highlighted names, and choose Select from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Patron Access Options dialog box appears, and the selected names are displayed in the E-mail to list.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to apply your settings and continue working with patron access options, or click Save to save your settings and close the Patron Access Options dialog box.
    2. +
    3. To make the Ask Us feature available in Polaris PowerPAC, do these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the PowerPAC tab in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Navigation: Ask us, and select Yes.
    4. +
    5. To require a patron login for Ask Us, double-click Ask Us: Require Login, and set the value to Yes.
    6. +
    +

    If this value is set to No, a Guest button is displayed on the Ask Us logon page in Polaris PowerPAC. The user can click Guest to send a question without logging on.

    +
      +
    1. To make the Ask Us feature available in Mobile PAC, do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the MobilePAC tab in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Navigation: Ask us, and select Yes.
    4. +
    5. To require a patron login for Ask Us, double-click Ask Us: Require Login, and set the value to Yes.
    6. +
    +

    If this value is set to No, a Guest button is displayed on the Ask Us logon page in Mobile PAC. The user can click Guest to send a question without logging on.

    +

    Note:
    Libraries that use Polaris Community Profiles and ContentXChange should set this option to No so that logon is not required. Organizations can place the Ask Us feature on their own Web sites, where any visitor to the site can send a question to the library. For more information, see Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +

    The ContentXChange Ask Us widget uses the Ask Us settings for the organization specified in the ContentXChange widgets link to: box on the Community Record workform. See Enter Basic Community Information in the Staff Client.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_account_updates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_account_updates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47a84fcc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_account_updates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + Set up online patron account updates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up online patron account updates

    +

    To allow patrons to request updates to their patron account information in Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC and opt out of receiving certain email reminder notices:

    +

    Note:
    When patrons request certain updates to their account information online, Polaris blocks the patron from checking out materials until staff verify the update. See Resolve a Verify Patron block.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron Access options.
      The Patron Access Options dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Click the Contact Info tab.
    6. +
    7. Select Patron can change notification method to allow patrons to change their notification method online. This option does not place a verification block on the patron account.
    8. +
    9. Select Confirmation e-mail to patron to have the system send an acknowledgment message by email to the patron when he or she submits a request to change account information. +

      When you enable this option, a single email message is sent soon after the patron clicks Submit Change Request. The message is sent to both the primary and alternate email addresses. If the patron record does not have an email address, no message is sent.

    10. +
    11. Select Patron address - Change allowed to allow patrons to change their physical address online, then select one of the following options: +
      • Patron can submit change request places a verification block on the patron account when the patron requests a change, and an email message is sent to the library staff, so library staff can verify and add the address.
      • Patron can change without verification allows a patron to change the address online without incurring a verification block.

      Note: PowerPAC and Mobile PAC perform basic validation against the postal codes table when updating the patron address, regardless of which option you select.

    12. +
    13. Select E-mail address - Change allowed to allow patrons to change an email address online, then select one of the following options: +
      • Patron can submit change request places a verification block on the patron account when the patron requests a change, and an email message is sent to the address specified on this tabbed page.
      • Patron can change without verification allows a patron to change the email address online without incurring a verification block.
    14. +
    15. Select Phone number - Change allowed to allow patrons to change a contact telephone number online, then select one of the following options: +
      • Patron can submit change request places a verification block on the patron account when the patron requests a change, and an email message is sent to the address specified on this tabbed page.
      • Patron can change without verification allows a patron to change the phone number online without incurring a verification block.
      • Enable phone validation (system level only) specifies whether Polaris validates phone numbers when they are entered in the Update Preferences page in Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. Libraries that require their patrons to enter an initial 1 with the phone number should leave this option cleared. + +

        Note:
        In Mobile PAC, when validation is not enabled, each phone number option is one entry field, similar to Polaris PowerPAC. When validation is enabled, each phone number option has three entry fields (area code/prefix/four-digit number).

    16. +
    17. Select (check) the patron codes that can request account updates online. (Clear the appropriate patron code check boxes to prevent these patrons from requesting account updates online.)
    18. +
    19. (Optional) You can click Add to add patron codes or Delete to delete them.
    20. +
    21. To allow patrons to opt out of receiving certain reminder notices, select from the following options: +
      • + Almost overdue/Auto-renew +
      • Patron record expiration +
      • Inactive patron +
    22. +
    23. Select Save or Apply.
    24. +
    25. Select File > Save.
    26. +
    +

    + Related Information

    +
      +
    • Verify borrower blocks - Patrons who have requested the specified account updates online are automatically blocked from check-out and renewal at the staff circulation desk until a library staff member has reviewed the change. (The block is not applied if you have chosen to allow the change without verification.) In addition, you can set Polaris to block renewals online or by telephone. See Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks.
    • +
    • EReceipts - If the patron’s registered branch has enabled eReceipts (see Setting Up eReceipts), that organization can also offer the option to receive email receipts, TXT receipts, or both for renewals from PAC. The option is available from both patron self-registration and account updates from PAC. To enable eReceipt preference options in PAC, use the PAC profile Patron eReceipts, available at the system, library, or branch level.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_self-registration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_self-registration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..911053fe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Set_up_online_patron_self-registration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,200 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up online patron self-registration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up online patron self-registration

    +

    When a patron registers for a new library account online, a patron record is created. Polaris issues the patron a temporary barcode that allows the patron to do certain operations online, such as request a hold, but blocks the patron from checking out materials until the new record is verified by staff. You can also set Polaris to send an automatic notification email to a library staff account. When the notification arrives, staff members can review the registration information and create the library card.

    +

    To allow patrons to register for a library account from Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC:

    +

    Important:
    Do this procedure for each branch that allows patron self-registration.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the branch, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Patron access options. The Patron Access Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. On the Self-registration tabbed page, select (check) the Patron can self-register check box to make online registration available. When this option is selected, patrons see a register now link on PAC logon pages such as the Patron Account logon page and the Ask Us logon page. Clearing the check box removes the link, and self-registration is not available.
    2. +
    3. To specify a staff address for automatic notification email, do the following steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Add. The Polaris Find Tool appears.
    2. +
    3. Search for the staff member or members who should receive the registration notification messages, and select their names in the results list.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the highlighted names, and choose Select from the context menu. The Patron Access Options dialog box appears, and the selected names are displayed in the E-mail to list.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. To enable a message regarding self-registration, select the Self-registration warning message enabled check box. This message allows the library to comply with the Children’s Online Privacy Act. For information about editing the text of this message, see Editing Messages and Labels.
    2. +
    3. To display user-defined fields in the patron self-registration pages in the PAC, and to specify that certain user-defined fields are required, do the following:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the UDF Display tab to display the available UDFs.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To display user-defined fields (UDFs) in the patron self-registration page in the PAC, select the appropriate left check box or boxes under User defined fields to display.
    2. +
    3. To indicate that a selected UDF is a required field, select the Required check box.
    4. +
    +

    + See Setting Up User-Defined Fields..

    +
      +
    1. To display patron custom data fields (PCDFs) in the patron self-registration pages in the PAC, and to specify that certain PCDFs are required, do the following:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the Custom Field Display tab to display the available PCDFs.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To display a PCDF in the patron self-registration page in the PAC, select the appropriate left check box or boxes under Label.
    2. +
    3. To indicate that a PCDF is a required field, select the PCDF and click Change Required Status. The status changes from No (the default) to Yes.
    4. +
    +

    + See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields. +

    +
      +
    1. To require a birth date for self-registration, click the UDF Display tab and select the Birth date required check box.
    2. +
    +

    When a birth date is included in PAC self-registration, the system uses the birth date to check for duplicate patron records, in addition to the first name and last name. If no birth date is supplied, duplicate checking uses only the first and last names.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Defaults tab, and specify the default values for patron records created through self-registration:
    2. +
    +

    Notes:
    Library staff members can change the default values when they review the online registration.

    +

    The default notification method is set by the Patron Services parameter Express patron registration options. See Set express registration default values and required fields.

    +
      +
    • Patron code - Select the patron code to assign to all self-registered patrons. You may want all self-registered patrons to have the same code assigned to the majority of your patrons, or you may have a patron code specifically identifying self-registered patrons.
    • +
    • Language - Select the default language for self-registered patrons.
    • +
    • Statistical Class - Select the default statistical classification for self-registered patrons.
    • +
    • Expiration term - Set the default period of time before the library card expires. To set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Expiration term box, and type a number in the first box. To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Expiration term box; then click the calendar icon and choose a date from the calendar in the first box (or type the date in the format shown in the Expiration term box).
    • +
    • Address check term - Set the default period of time when the registration address should be verified. To set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today), selectmonths or years in the second Address check termbox, and type a number in the first box. To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Address check term box; then click the calendar icon and choose a date from the calendar in the first box (or type the date in the format shown in theAddress check term box).
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To specify default values for user-defined fields (UDFs) in PAC self-registration pages, do the following:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. On the Defaults tabbed page, select the UDFs subtab to display the UDFs for your organization.
    2. +
    +

    + userDefPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To specify a default value for a text field, type the text.
    2. +
    3. To specify a default value for a drop-down list, select an option in the list.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you require a drop-menu UDF but do not specify a default option, the field is blank in a new record but the user must select an option.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to apply your settings.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To specify default values for patron custom data fields (PCDFs) in PAC self-registration pages, do the following:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. On the Defaults tabbed page, select the Custom Fields subtab to display the PCDFs that are available for your organization.
    2. +
    +

    + custdefPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the data field and do the following:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    A Date field type cannot have a default value.

    +
      +
    • String custom field - When you select a string field type, you can enter a default value of up to 255 characters.
    • +
    +

    + patdefStr.gif 

    +
      +
    • Boolean custom field - When you select a Boolean field type, you can select a default value of Yes or No. Boolean fields appear as check boxes in the patron registration forms. If the default is set to Yes, the check box is checked. If the default is No, the check box is unchecked.
    • +
    +

    + pacdefBoo.gif 

    +
      +
    • Integer custom field- When you select an Integer field type, you can enter a default value of up to 255 numbers in the box.
    • +
    +

    + pacdefInt.gif 

    +
      +
    1. After defining the default value for a field, click Set Default.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. When you are finished making changes, click Apply.
    2. +
    3. Click  Save and close the dialog box. .
    4. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Remove block on self-registered patron record - + See Resolve a Verify Patron block. +
    • +
    • Notification preference - The default notification preference for self-registered patrons is the notification setting for the Patron Services parameter Express patron registration options (General defaults tab). The patron can choose another method from the drop-down list during self-registration, and the notification preference can be changed when the registration is verified. You can filter the methods available for selection; see Set up notification methods, e-mail options, and export location. If the patron chooses Phone, the patron must indicate the phone number to use for notification. If the patron chooses TXT Messaging, the patron must indicate the phone number to be used for TXT messages, and select a carrier for that number.
    • +
    • EReceipts - If the patron’s registered branch has enabled eReceipts (see Setting Up eReceipts), that organization can also offer the option to receive e-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both for renewals from PAC. The option is available from both patron self-registration and account updates from PAC. To enable eReceipt preference options in PAC, use the PAC profile Patron eReceipts, available at the system, library, or branch level.
    • +
    • Registered branch - The patron chooses a registered branch from a list during self-registration. The order of branches in the list is controlled by the PAC profile Branch list order. The setting for the current connection branch is used. When the profile is set to Yes, the branch names are displayed in ascending alphabetical order by name. When the profile is set to No, the branch names are displayed in ascending numerical order by internal organization ID. With either setting, the system organization is always first.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Patron_Account_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Patron_Account_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..752e8a25 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Patron_Account_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Patron Access Options - Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Patron Access Options - Overview

    +

    You can use the Patron access options PAC profile in Polaris Administration to specify the options that are available to patrons for registering or updating their account information from the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. The Patron Access Options dialog box has separate tabs to specify the following types of patron account settings:

    +

    Note: +
    In addition to the patron account options, you can set holds options that enable patrons to change the hold pickup branch. See Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC.

    +
      +
    • Self-registration - Enable self-registration and set up the fields for the form. This tab includes two subtabs for UDF and Custom Field Display.
    • +
    • Defaults - Set defaults for patron code, language, expiration term, address check date, and UDFs/Custom Fields.
    • +
    • Log in - Enable patrons to change their passwords, set up user names, create passwords, receive e-mail messages for forgotten passwords and set other log in options.
    • +
    • Contact Info - Enable patrons to submit changes to their account contact information and opt out of receiving reminder notices.
    • +
    • Preferences - Select options for displaying settings for associated patrons; define the UDF and Custom Field display and which fields are required.
    • +
    • Ask Us - Enable patrons to send a reference question to a designated library email address. You set up a receiving email address on the branch level, then enable the feature in PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, or both. You can require a patron logon, or bypass the logon and allow anyone to send a question via Ask Us.The Sent From email address on the message to the library is the email address the user has specified in the Ask Us form, if any. If no address is specified, the user has logged in as a patron, and the patron account includes an email address, that address is used. If no email address is specified in the Ask Us form or the patron account, or the patron has cleared the address from the form, the Sent From address is that specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Any email from PAC, including Ask Us messages, requires you to specify the SMTP server in Polaris Administration. Double-click the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service, and type the domain name of the email SMTP server.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Up_Patron_Account_Access.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Up_Patron_Account_Access.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1acf177 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/Setting_Up_Patron_Account_Access.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Patron Account Access and Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Patron Account Access and Options

    +

    If you permit access to patron accounts from the PAC, patrons can log on to view and cancel requests, view and renew items out, estimate fines on currently overdue items, and view fines and fees. Depending on the features you offer, they can also manage messages, view their reading histories, pay fines or make donations by credit card, work with saved search agent searches, or view transcripts of sessions with a virtual reference service. Additional Administration settings allow users to set up a new patron account from the PAC, create and change user names and passwords, and request address changes. You can also offer email communication with the library (Ask Us) to registered patrons and guests. In addition to the patron account options, you can set holds options that enable patrons to change the hold pickup branch. See Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC.

    +

    Important:
    Certain patron account settings apply to both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. You may need to clear the page cache to see the results of some changes in either PAC. See Updating Page Caches. Patrons cannot access their accounts from the PowerPAC Children's Edition.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/claimlostSA.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/claimlostSA.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2759919 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/claimlostSA.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Displaying Claimed and Lost Items in Patron Accounts in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying Claimed and Lost Items in Patron Accounts in PAC

    +

    The PowerPAC and Mobile PAC Navigation: Claimed and Lost profiles are available at the System, Library, and Branch levels. When a patron logs into the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, the profile setting for the patron's registered branch determines whether claimed and lost items are displayed.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navMobPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navMobPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c6bda7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navMobPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Enable display of claimed and lost items in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable display of claimed and lost items in Mobile PAC

    +

    To enable claimed and lost items to display in the patron account view in Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Select the organization (System, Library, or Branch).
    4. +
    5. Select Profiles, and select the Mobile PAC tab.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Navigation: Claimed and Lost, and select Yes.
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +

    If this profile is set to Yes for the patron's registered branch, when the patron logs into Mobile PAC, any items that were claimed or declared lost are displayed on the Claimed and Lost view. See the example below.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navPowPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navPowPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0555f285 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPatAcc/navPowPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + Enable display of claimed and lost items in PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enable display of claimed and lost items in PowerPAC

    +

    To enable claimed and lost items to display in the patron account view in PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer.
    2. +
    3. Select the organization (System, Library, or Branch).
    4. +
    5. Select Profiles, and select the PowerPAC tab.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Navigation: Claimed and Lost, and select Yes.
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +

    If this profile is set to Yes for the patron's registered branch, when the patron logs into his or her account in PowerPAC, any claimed or lost items the patron has are displayed in the Claimed and Lost view. See the example below.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPowerProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Profiles_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPowerProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Profiles_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e716bf2c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOPowerProfs/Polaris_PowerPAC_Profiles_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1307 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available on the Profiles > PowerPAC tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    +

    3M PAMS: Enabled

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether 3M™ Public Access Management System “smart cards” are used at public access workstations in the library.

    +

    Requirement: Set Single Logon: Enable to Yes in PowerPAC Profiles. List workstation with readers in the In-House IP Addresses table.

    +
    +

    No (no smart card use)

    +
    +

    Ask us: Require login

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether users must be registered patrons to send a question to the library by email, using the Ask Us feature. See Set up and start Ask Us.

    +
    +

    Yes - Patrons must log in with a barcode and password to use Ask Us. If set to No, the Ask Us log-in page displays a Guest button that bypasses log-in.

    +
    +

    Bookmarking & Sharing: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enable social bookmarking for titles in PowerPAC search results. See Social Bookmarking for Search Results (AddThis™).

    +
    +

    No

    +
    +

    Bookmarking & Sharing: Profile ID for AddThis analytics

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specify your AddThis profile ID for social bookmarking analytics. See Social Bookmarking for Search Results (AddThis™).

    +
    +
    +

    Branch switching: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether the Switch to another branch list is displayed on Polaris PowerPAC pages. The Switch to another branch list allows patrons to select another library in the system. See Setting Up Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
    Yes - The Switch to another branch list is displayed in Polaris PowerPAC.
    +

    Categorization of ESource targets

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays the E-Source Target Categorization dialog box, which is used to set up e-sources (proprietary non-Z39.50 databases) and organize e-source targets as a finding aid. See Setting Up E-Source Targets.

    +
    +
    Cookie acceptance: EnableSystemDetermines whether PowerPAC displays the cookie policy message. See Prompting PowerPAC Users to Accept Cookies.No
    Cookie acceptance: External workstation retention periodSystemDetermines how frequently the cookie policy message appears for external patrons. See Configuring How Frequently the Cookie Policy Message Appears.365 (days)
    +

    Dashboards: Expanded

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the default display of most lists (Web parts) on the dashboard to expanded or closed. Patrons can select the title bar of any list to expand or close the list.

    +
    Yes - Dashboard lists are expanded by default.
    +

    Dashboards: Narrow your search & related searches

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables and sets up the Narrow and Related Web parts settings that are displayed with search results. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +
    +

    Both Web parts are enabled and all possible elements are displayed.

    +
    +

    Dashboards: Web page / web part assignment

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays the Web Page - Web Part Configuration dialog box, to specify which Web parts display in the dashboards on specific Web pages for each branch. See Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +

    Requirement: Define Web parts at the system level, using the profile Dashboards: Web Part Construction (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    +
    +

    Dashboards: Web part construction

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Displays the Web Part Editor dialog box, to create custom Web parts for dashboards and limit the number of items on automated lists in Web parts. See Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +

    Requirement: Assign the Web parts to specific Polaris PowerPAC pages using the profile Dashboards: Web Page / Web Part Assignment (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    +
    +

    Did you mean: Suggestions are to display even when hits are returned

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC, specifies whether Did You Mean search suggestions are displayed with search results (Y), or only when a search returns no hits (N). (Profile does not affect Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.) See Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking.

    +
    +

    No (suggestions are displayed only when a search returns no hits)

    +
    +

    Enable logging of transactions

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Determines whether transactions (such as hold requests and self-registration) initiated through Polaris PowerPAC are logged.

    +
    +

    No - No recording of activity in Polaris PowerPAC is done.

    +
    +

    Feature It: Screen display options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables Feature It promotions in Polaris PowerPAC and specifies the promotion position in the search results display. See Feature It Promotions.

    +

    Note:
    Feature It is available by specific contract to your library.

    +
    +
    +

    Google Preview: Enable on full display

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables the Google Preview (book viewer) feature on the product page for a title in PowerPAC search results. See Google Preview for PowerPAC Search Results.

    +
    +

    Yes - Google Preview button is displayed for titles that have previews in Google Book Search.

    +
    +

    Google Preview: Enable on search results pages

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables the Google Preview (book viewer) feature on the initial search results pages. See Google Preview for PowerPAC Search Results.

    +
    +

    Yes - On the initial search results page, the Google Preview button is displayed for titles that have previews in Google Book Search.

    +
    +

    Highlight local items in matching title view

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether titles with at least one local item are highlighted in search results. See Highlighting Titles with Local Items (PowerPAC).

    +
    +

    No - No titles are highlighted.

    +
    +

    In-house access definitions: Setup

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Controls how a workstation’s in-house status is determined for PAC patron actions (patron inactivity timeout, Recently Viewed Titles) and e-source access. The system uses the settings of the Polaris PowerPAC connection organization. If you select In-House IP Addresses Table only, a workstation’s IP address must be included in that table to be considered in-house. If you select In-House IP Addresses Table AND registered workstations (default), a workstation’s IP address can either be included in the In-House IP Addresses table or the workstation can be registered in Polaris to be considered in-house.

    +
    +
    +

    Item availability: “Text it” feature enabled

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Allows patrons to send a call number by text message from the item availability view in PowerPAC or Mobile PAC search results. See Sending Call Numbers by Text Message (PowerPAC) and Text It in Mobile PAC (Mobile PAC).

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display last circ date

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the Item Availability display includes the last circulation date of the item.

    +
    +

    Yes (displays last circulation date)

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display local and system levels

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether all system holdings are displayed in one list (setting is No), or local and system holdings are displayed in separate lists (setting is Yes).

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display notes

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Offers options for item/issue public notes display: hover over icon to display note text, display text, or do not display.

    +
    +

    Icon display

    +
    +

    Item availability: Display textual holdings notes

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Offers options for displaying serials textual holdings notes: hover over/tap icon to display note, display text or do not display.

    +
    +

    Icon display

    +
    +

    Item availability: Expand non-serial titles

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the default item availability display to expanded or closed for non-serial items (those with no holdings statement for the branch). Patrons can select branch and collection controls to expand or close the list of items under each branch and collection.

    +
    +

    Yes - Branches and collections in the item availability display are expanded by default.

    +
    +

    Item availability: Expand serial titles

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the default item availability display to expanded or collapsed for serial items (those with a holdings statement for the branch). Patrons can select branch and collection controls to expand or collapse the list of items under each branch and collection.

    +
    +

    No - Branches and collections in the item availability display collapsed by default.

    +
    +

    Librarian’s (MARC) View: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays (default) or suppresses the Librarian’s View (MARC record view) in PAC search results when the patron clicks the format icon for a title in Polaris PowerPAC, the Librarian’s View option on the product page for a title in PowerPAC, or the Librarian’s View link for a title in Mobile PAC search results.

    +
    +

    Displays

    +
    +

    Local call number indexed field: Limit choice

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can browse-search the local (item-level) call number index only, or browse-search the Dewey or LC call number indexes for bibliographic records, as well as the local call number index.

    +
    +

    Yes - Allows patrons to browse-search the local item-level call number index only, and suppress the Dewey and LC bibliographic record choices. Set at the system level, when Polaris PowerPAC users are connected to the system organization, this setting suppresses all call number options for browse searching.

    +

    When set to No, provides choices for call number browse searches: local (item-level), LC (bibliographic record level), and Dewey (bibliographic record level). Set at the system level, when Polaris PowerPAC users are connected to the system organization, this setting offers the Dewey and LC bibliographic record choices for browsing call numbers.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Advanced

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can use the Advanced search dialog box to create complex Boolean searches. See Setting Available Search Types.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Advanced option is displayed on the Search submenu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Ask us

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can send suggestions, questions, and comments via email message to the library.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Ask Us option is displayed on the Library Info menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Boolean

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can use the Common Query Language (CQL) syntax to create complex searches. See Setting Available Search Types.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Boolean option is displayed on the Search menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Browse

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can browse the heading indexes. See Setting Available Search Types.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Browse option is displayed on the Search menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Children’s PAC

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can access Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition from Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
    +

    No - The Kid’s Catalog link is not available.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition is available by specific contract to your library. If your Polaris installation does not include Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, this option is not available.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Claimed and Lost

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can see their claimed and lost items.

    +
    +

    No - Claimed and lost items do not appear on patron's account.

    +

    If the profile is set to Yes for the patron's registered branch, any claimed or lost items the patron has are displayed in their PowerPAC account.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Course reserves

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can search for course reserve records and reserve item records.

    +
    +

    No - Course reserve searching is not available.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris course reserve functions are available by specific contract to your library. If your Polaris installation does not include Polaris course reserves, this option is not available.

    +
    +

    Navigation: E-Sources

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can access E-Sources, which are non-Z39.50, proprietary databases that may require authentication for use. See Setting Up E-Source Targets.

    +
    +

    Yes - The E-Sources option is displayed on the Search menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Events

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can display the Events page. For information about editing the Events page, see Add text to the Events page.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Events option is displayed on the Library Info menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Exact

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can search the public catalog with the exact text (including stop words) shown in the Search box. See Setting Available Search Types.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Exact option is displayed on the Search menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Fines & Fees

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can view the fines and fees associated with their library accounts. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    Requirement: Set Navigation: Patron Account to Yes (PowerPAC profile).

    +
    +

    Yes - The Fines & Fees option is displayed on the My Account menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Hours

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can display the Hours page. For information about specifying information for the Hours page, see Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Hours option is displayed on the Library Info menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Items out

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can view the items checked out to their library card. If you allow renewals from the PAC, patrons select the items on this page. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch.

    +

    Requirement: Set Navigation: Patron Account to Yes (PowerPAC profile). To allow patrons to renew items, set Patron Access: Renew permitted to Yes (PAC profile). You can block renewals under certain circumstances.

    +
    +

    +

    Yes - The Items Out option is displayed on the My Account menu.

    +

    +
    +

    Navigation: Keyword

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can do a keyword search. See Setting Available Search Types.

    +
    +

    +

    Yes - The Keyword option is displayed on the Search menu.

    +

    +
    +

    Navigation: My record

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can view their library account information. For example, if you allow patrons to update their registration information, change their passwords from the PAC, or manage reading histories, this page provides the appropriate links.

    +

    Requirement: Set Navigation: Patron Account to Yes (PowerPAC profile). For information on allowing patrons to update their accounts from the PAC, see Setting Patron Account Options.

    +
    +

    Yes - The My Record option is displayed on the My Account menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: PAC help

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch)

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can access the Polaris-supplied Help page. See Polaris PowerPAC Help.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Help option is displayed on the main menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Patron account

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can access their patron accounts. See Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
    +

    Yes - The My Account option is displayed on the menu bar.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Phrase

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can search the public catalog based on a phrase. See Setting Available Search Types.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Phrase option is displayed on the Search menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Policies

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch)

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can view the library policy page. See Add text to the Policies page.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Policy option is displayed on the Library Info menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Portal

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch)

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can view the portal page, which may include the quick search feature, content carousels and/or rotating book jacket, and custom content. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Portal option is displayed on the Library Info menu. Select this option when you are using Polaris as the library home page.

    +
    +

    +

    Navigation: Requests

    +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can see a list of their hold/ILL requests, and cancel or reactivate requests. The system uses the setting for the patron’s registered branch. You set conditions for requests from PAC, and whether they can be canceled and reactivated, with the Requests parameter Holds options.

    +

    Requirement: Set Navigation: Patron Account to Yes (PowerPAC profile).

    +
    +

    Yes - The Requests option is available on the My Account menu.

    +

    If set to No, patrons cannot review or cancel hold/ILL requests. The Requests menu option, summary information in the My Account dashboard, and option to go to list of requests when a request is placed are suppressed.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Web site

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can access the links of interest page provided by the library in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
    +

    Yes - The Web Site option is available on the Library Info menu.

    +
    +

    Navigation: Web site URL

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies an address for the web page to display when a patron selects Web Site on the Library Info menu.

    +

    Requirement: Navigation: Web Site - Yes (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    +

    blank (empty address field) - The default website.asp page is displayed if this field is empty. The default page allows you to provide links to multiple Web sites.

    +

    url (web page address or path) - Automatically displays the page when Web Site is selected from the Library Info submenu.

    +
    OverDrive download: Enable on in-house workstationsSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies whether patrons can access and download OverDrive eContent on library computers designated as in-house workstations.No
    +

    OverDrive Preview: Enable on full display

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the OverDrive Sample button appears on the eContent title's full display in PowerPAC +

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    OverDrive Preview: Enable on search results pages

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether the OverDrive Sample button appears on the search results page when the results are eContent titles from OverDrive.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    Page header options

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Settings to customize the PowerPAC page header, including the logo image, return link URL for the logo image, background and branch name text colors, logo and branch name position, and suppressing the branch name text. See Customize the page header.

    +
    +
    +

    Patron inactivity timeout

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets a period of inactivity after which a logged-in patron at a library workstation is automatically logged out.

    +

    Applies to in-house workstations only. See Set an inactivity timeout for in-house workstations.

    +

    Also determines how frequently the cookie policy message appears on in-house workstations. See Configuring How Frequently the Cookie Policy Message Appears.

    +
    +

    Not enabled

    +
    +

    Perform a new search if a cross-reference is selected

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether the location in the headings display changes to the cross-reference location when the cross-reference is selected.

    +
    +

    Yes - Search from selected cross-reference, so that the display is set to the new location in the browse headings index.

    +
    +

    Portal custom content (URL)

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the URL for custom content you want to include on the Polaris PowerPAC portal page. Type the complete URL, beginning with http://. See Customizing Portal Page Features.

    +
    +
    +

    Portal page content carousels

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets up content carousels (rotating images of library-specified titles in the library catalog) for display on the Polaris PowerPAC portal page. See Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page.

    +

    Requirement: Navigation: Portal - Yes (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    +

    None defined.

    +
    +

    PowerPAC Analytics

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables Google Analytics or custom analytics use in Polaris PowerPAC. The same code is also used in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. See Analyzing Polaris PowerPAC Use.

    +
    +

    No (no page use analysis)

    +
    +

    Product page categories: Configure

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the default state of categories (expanded or collapsed) on the Polaris PowerPAC product page for a title in search results, and determines the display order of the categories. See Configuring the PowerPAC Product Page.

    +
    +
    +

    Quick search button configuration

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    These settings enable a quick search feature with search option buttons on the Polaris PowerPAC portal page. You can specify which search option buttons to display and what type of search each launches. See Customizing Portal Page Features and Set up quick search with search option buttons.

    +
    +

    Feature is not enabled. The default quick search feature is used on the portal page.

    +
    +

    Recently viewed titles

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Enables the Recently Viewed Titles feature for in-house workstations, remote workstations, or both; sets the maximum number of titles that can be displayed. See Setting Up Recently Viewed Titles.

    +
    +
    Related words optionsSystem, Library, BranchEnables the Include related words feature for PowerPAC keyword and phrase search results; sets the maximum number of titles that can compose results lists and still display the Included related words link. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.Yes; 1,000
    +

    +
    Remote databases: Categorization of target databases

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays the Z39.50 Target Categorization dialog box, to allow an organization to group remote search targets as a finding aid. See Editing Messages and Labels for detailed instructions on using target categories.

    +

    +

    Requirement: Make remote resources available for searching.

    +

    +
    +
    +

    Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at once

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Set the number of remote databases that can be searched at one time. See Maximum Number of Databases Searchable at One Time.

    +
    +
    +

    Remote databases: Usage settings

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Set usage conditions for specific remote resources, including authentication requirements and search access points. Enable follow-on searches and specify follow-on search targets. Set PAC display name; specify databases for Using drop-down list in PowerPAC search forms. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +
    +
    +

    Remote user PowerPAC: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons use Polaris PowerPAC to access the library catalog from remote locations (that is, from computers that are not in the library or are not defined in the In-House IP Addresses table)

    +
    +

    Yes - Patrons can use Polaris PowerPAC from remote locations.

    +

    + If set to No, Polaris PowerPAC access is available only from workstations defined in the In-House IP Addresses database table.

    +
    +

    Results set: Maximum number of records to return

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the maximum number of records that can be returned in a results set. If you experience decreased performance for searches with large results due to limited server capacity, you can lower the maximum number of records to return. However, relevancy ranking may be less effective at lower maximum value.

    +
    +

    100,000 (maximum)

    +
    +

    Rotating best seller jacket on Portal page

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a random book jacket image drawn from best-seller lists on the portal page. When the image is selected, a search is launched for the title. See Set up rotating book jackets.

    +

    Requirement: Set up an enriched data source. See Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.

    +
    +

    Yes - Book jacket images are displayed on the portal page.

    +
    +

    RSS Feeds: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Provides RSS feeds from the New Titles dashboard list. See Setting Up RSS Feeds. When this profile is set to Yes, an orange XML icon is displayed by the elements of the New Titles list.

    +
    +

    Yes

    +
    +

    RSS Feeds: Maximum new releases

    +
    +

    System

    +
    +

    Specifies how many titles should be listed in the RSS feed that the patron receives. This profile is available at the system level only; that is, it controls the number for every branch that enables RSS feeds.

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Scoping: Use MARC language scoping display table

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Determines whether catalog searches can be limited only by certain languages, or by any language defined by the MARC 21 format. This profile controls the languages displayed for selection in the PowerPAC Search Options list.

    +

    Requirement: Specify languages in Policy Tables, MARC Language Scoping.

    +
    +

    Yes - Allow language scoping by the languages specified in the MARC Language Scoping Display table.

    +

    If set to No, all languages defined by the MARC 21 format are displayed for search scoping.

    +
    +

    Search: Display search criteria in search box for link-produced searches

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether search terms such as an ISBN are displayed in the search box when the user clicks a link (for example, in the New Titles list) to launch a search.

    +
    +

    No. Only search terms actually typed by the user are displayed in the search box.

    +
    +

    Search options: Limit by collection enabled

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether collections are available as a scoping option on the Polaris PowerPAC Search Options page.

    +
    +

    No (the Collections list does not appear as a scoping option)

    +
    +

    Single login: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Displays a Log In option on the My Account menu that allows a patron to log on once for a PAC session, instead of each time the patron selects a function that requires identification. See Controlling Patron Account Login & Access.

    +
    +

    Yes (the Login option is displayed on the menu)

    +
    +

    Text: Headings count column for “see from” headings

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the text to display in the number of titles column of the headings list when the headings entry is a SEE heading.

    +
    +

    __

    +
    +

    Theme dashboard position

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Sets the position of the dashboard on Polaris PowerPAC pages. (Does not affect the dashboard position on the product page, which is always on the right.) See Setting Polaris PowerPAC Themes.

    +
    +

    Left

    +
    +

    Theme selection

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the overall appearance of Polaris PowerPAC pages by providing several ready-made skin choices. See Setting Polaris PowerPAC Themes.

    +
    +

    Classic

    +
    +

    Title Display: Configure

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies the data elements that are displayed in brief, full, and summary search results views for a title in the Polaris PowerPAC. You can customize and order the elements you select, and customize and translate their labels. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +
    +
    Title Display: Number of characters in the Summary (Short)System, Library, BranchSpecifies the maximum number of characters of the Summary (Short) field that are displayed in the brief and full search results views for a title in the Polaris PowerPAC. Enter a value between 0 and 4000.

    See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    0 (the number of characters is not limited)
    +

    Title list: Email

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can send their title list as an email message from Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC.

    +

    Requirements: Set Title List: Enable to Yes (PowerPAC profiles) and specify an email address for sender in Email Notification: Email address of sender (PAC Profile)

    +
    +

    Yes - Allows patrons to send their title list as an email message.

    +
    +

    Title list: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can create a bibliography of titles they select from search results. See Enabling PAC Title Lists. This profile also affects Mobile PAC. See Title Lists in Mobile PAC.

    +
    +

    Yes - Allows patrons to add titles to a bibliography, and view and modify the contents of the list.

    +
    Title list: Enable bulk holdsSystem, Library, Branch +

    Specifies whether patrons can place multiple hold requests at once from PowerPAC working or saved title lists. See Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists.

    +

    Requirement: Set Title List: Enable to Yes (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    No - The Place Request button does not appear on PowerPAC working or saved title lists.
    Title list: Maximum number of titles to request in bulkSystem, Library, BranchLimits how many titles from working or saved title lists can be requested at once. See Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists.10
    +

    Title list: Print

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can print their title lists.

    +

    Requirement: Set Title List: Enable to Yes (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    +

    Yes - Allows patrons to print their title lists to any printer available from the workstation. If set to No, the printer icon does not appear.

    +
    +

    Title list: Save

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can save their title list to a file.

    +

    Requirement: Set Title List: Enable to Yes (PowerPAC profiles).

    +
    +

    Yes - Allows patrons to save the contents of the title list to a text file. If set to No, the Save icon does not appear.

    +
    +

    Virtual reference: Configure

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    If you contract with a virtual reference service, use this dialog box to set up the specific profiles for that service. For more information, see Setting Up Live Virtual Reference Services.

    +

    Requirement: Virtual reference: Enable - Yes (PowerPAC profiles)

    +
    +
    +

    Virtual reference: Enable

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies whether patrons can use a virtual reference service from Polaris PowerPAC. This feature provides interactive, online reference services. See Setting Up Live Virtual Reference Services.

    +
    +

    Yes - The virtual reference link is available in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
    +

    Virtual reference: Supplier

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch

    +
    +

    Specifies your virtual reference service provider. If you contract with a virtual reference service, select the provider here. See Setting Up Live Virtual Reference Services.

    +

    Requirements: Set Virtual reference: Enable to Yes (PowerPAC profiles) and Virtual reference: Configure - PowerPAC profile - specific settings for the provider you selected.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Auto-Search_Suggestions_-_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Auto-Search_Suggestions_-_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f98d11d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Auto-Search_Suggestions_-_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Auto-Search Suggestions - PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Auto-Suggest in PowerPAC

    +

    The system-level Cataloging parameter Auto-suggest feature enabled controls whether the auto-suggest feature is available in both Polaris PowerPAC and the staff client Find Tool. (For details on the applicable Find Tool searches, see Automatic Suggestions in Keyword or Phrase Searching.) If you set this parameter to No, automatic search suggestions are suppressed in both PAC and the Find Tool.

    +

    By default, quick, keyword, and phrase searches in Polaris PowerPAC offer suggested search terms as you type. A user can ignore the suggestions and continue to type the search term, or click a suggestion to launch the search for the suggested term.

    +

    Note:
    The auto-suggest feature is not available for numeric search access points, such as ISBN and ISSN, in keyword searches.

    +

    To hide suggestions for the PAC session, the PowerPAC user can click Hide Suggestions at the bottom of the suggestion list.

    +

    + +

    +

    To show the suggestions after hiding them, the user clicks the arrow in the search text box.

    +

    + +

    +

    Secure Socket Layer (SSL) and Auto-Suggest

    +

    The ERMS Daemon is a service that provides storage, processing, and access to electronic resources. When ERMS Server is selected during Polaris server software installation, an ERMS Port Configuration dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to change the default listening ports if necessary. The HTTPS Port option is disabled by default. If you will use HTTPS (Secure Socket Layer) for the entire Polaris PowerPAC site, select the HTTPS Port check box and enter the HTTPS port (normally 443). This allows auto-suggest features to function properly when site-wide Secure Socket Layer is in use.

    +

    Note:
    If you will use Secure Socket Layer to protect patron account information only (not site-wide HTTPS), do not check the HTTPS Port option. For more information about Secure Socket Layer, see Secure Socket Layer (SSL).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Customizing_Search-by_Labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Customizing_Search-by_Labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea15fd1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Customizing_Search-by_Labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,373 @@ + + + + + + + Customizing Search by Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Search by Labels

    +

    You can edit the search field (Search by) labels in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). Your custom labels are displayed in Polaris PowerPAC but the default system labels are used in the Polaris Administration profile for search setting defaults. See Set PAC search setting defaults. The table shows the default labels and the corresponding language string in Polaris WebAdmin. For more information about using Polaris WebAdmin, see WebAdmin online help.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Search By Option
    Default Label
    CodeLanguage String ID
    +

    Any Field

    +
    +

    KW

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1607

    +
    +

    Title

    +
    +

    TI

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1608

    +
    +

    Author

    +
    +

    AU

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1609

    +
    +

    Subject

    +
    +

    SU

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1610

    +
    +

    General notes

    +
    +

    NOTE

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1611

    +
    +

    Publisher

    +
    +

    PUB

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1612

    +
    +

    Genre

    +
    +

    GENRE

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1613

    +
    +

    Series

    +
    +

    SE

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1614

    +
    +

    ISBN
    [International Standard Book Number]

    +
    +

    ISBN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1615

    +
    +

    ISSN
    [International Standard serial Number]

    +
    +

    ISSN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1616

    +
    +

    LCCN
    [Library of Congress Control Number]

    +
    +

    LCCN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1617

    +
    +

    Publisher No.
    [Publisher’s number]

    +
    +

    PN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1618

    +
    +

    LC
    [Library of Congress call number option for browse searches]

    +
    +

    LC

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1642

    +
    +

    Dewey
    [Dewey call number option for browse searches]

    +
    +

    DD

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1643

    +
    +

    Call Number
    [Local call number option for browse searches]

    +
    +

    LOCAL

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1624

    +
    +

    SuDoc
    [Superintendent of Documents classification number (identifier)]

    +
    +

    SUDOC

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1639

    +
    +

    CODEN
    [Identifier for scientific and technical periodical titles]

    +
    +

    CODEN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1640

    +
    +

    STRN
    [Standard technical report number (identifier)]

    +
    +

    STRN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1641

    +
    +

    Control Number
    [Not exposed in default user interface, but available as a search access point by editing the configuration file SearchByOptions.xml.]

    +
    +

    CN

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_CNUMBER

    +
    +

    Item Barcode
    [Not exposed in default user interface, but available as a search access point by editing the configuration file SearchByOptions.xml.]

    +
    +

    BC

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_BARCODE

    +
    +

    Course Name

    +
    +

    CRSNA

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1647

    +
    +

    Course Number/Section

    +
    +

    CRSNO

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1648

    +
    +

    Course Abbreviation

    +
    +

    CRSABBR

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1649

    +
    +

    School/Division Name

    +
    +

    CRSSCHL

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1650

    +
    +

    Department Name

    +
    +

    CRSDPT

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1651

    +
    +

    Instructor Name

    +
    +

    CRSINST

    +
    +

    PACML_SEARCHBARS_XSL_1652

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/PAC_Search_Agent_Saved_Searches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/PAC_Search_Agent_Saved_Searches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7aefa80 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/PAC_Search_Agent_Saved_Searches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + PAC Search Agent (Saved Searches) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Saved Searches in the PAC

    +

    Using the search agent, registered patrons can save any search except browse searches, and have the saved searches run automatically either weekly or monthly. (Patrons can also run a saved search manually, at any time.) Saved search criteria have full Unicode support; that is, saved searches can contain non-ASCII characters. Each search run looks for results in the local database that are new since the last run. The results are automatically sent to an email address the patron specifies. By accessing their patron accounts, patrons can view, edit, and delete saved searches. The result count displayed in the PAC patron account shows the total number of new records found in all weekly and/or monthly runs (excluding the initial run).

    +

    Note:
    Saved searches return results from the local database only, even if the original search included remote databases.

    +

    You specify a maximum number of titles to return in the email message. If the maximum is exceeded, the email message includes a link that allows the patron to retrieve the entire set of new titles. Resource groups are honored in saved searches, and a logon link is displayed for eContent in the search results email message. If the patron’s registered branch is a member of a resource group for the econtent, the patron can access the eContent.

    +

    The system also stores a “DaysToBacktrack” value, set to 180 days. This allows records that did not match the search criteria in a previous run, but that match now (for example, because a record’s Display in PAC setting has been changed) to be reported once they become available.

    +

    The search agent is available in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. The example shows the Save Search option in the PowerPAC dashboard.

    +

    + +

    +

    For each organization that makes the search agent available, you can specify how many searches a patron can have currently saved, the maximum total number of new titles that can be returned when a search is run, and the number of times a search can be run. You specify whether to offer weekly search runs, monthly search runs, or both, and designate a “from” address to appear in the email message that delivers the search results to the patron.

    +

    The SQL job SDIDaily runs nightly to process the appropriate saved searches. That is, on any given night, both the weekly and monthly searches scheduled to run on that date are processed. Any errors in the job are reported in an error log, which is placed by default in C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\SDIAgent (server installation). If there is a datalink (instance), the default location is C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[DataLinkName]\Logs\SDIAgent.

    +

    To set up and enable the search agent:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Parameters folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Search agent parameters. The Search Agent Parameters dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + SearchAgentParameters.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. In the Number of Saved Searches box, type the maximum number of searches a patron can have saved at a time.
    2. +
    3. In the Maximum Number of Search Results Returned box, type the maximum number of titles that any run of a saved search can return after filtering for newness.
    4. +
    +

    The default value is 500. Since 500 is a potentially large number to include in an e-mail message, you may want to set this to a lower number. (The minimum value is 1, and the maximum value is 1000.)

    +
      +
    1. In the Number of Times to Run a Saved Search box, type the maximum number of times a saved search can be run.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    Patrons can set the number of times to run a saved search, up to the maximum you specify with this setting.

    +
      +
    1. Specify what search frequencies to offer to patrons by selecting either or both of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select the Allow Weekly Searches check box to offer patrons the option of running a saved search weekly.
    • +
    • Select the Allow Monthly Searches check box to offer patrons the option of running a saved search monthly.
    • +
    +

    The frequency options you specify are displayed in the form that patrons complete when they save searches. The form always offers the additional option Suspend, which the patron might use to stop the search for a period of time.

    +
      +
    1. To set up a “from” address for the notification e-mail, type the address in the Notification “from” Address box. The address can be a real address or a fictitious account. The address must contain the @ symbol; for example, yoursearch@yourlibrary.org
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box.
    4. +
    5.  In the Administration Explorer, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Search Agent: Enable, and select Yes.
    8. +
    +

    Note:

    To allow logged-in patrons to view a list of their saved searches in the dashboard area of the Polaris PowerPAC window, set the PowerPAC profile Single Login: Enable to Yes.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Book jacket images in search agent results - When a saved search is run, book jackets are displayed in the results based on the Enriched Data setting for the patron’s registered branch. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.
    • +
    • Patron email format - All saved searches sent to the same patron email address must be in the same email format. If the patron specifies a format different from existing saved searches when saving a new search, a message provides the options to specify a different format for the new search or to change all the others.
    • +
    • Mobile PAC interface - See Saved Searches (Search Agent) in Mobile PAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/RelatedWords.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/RelatedWords.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ec4f5df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/RelatedWords.htm @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + + Related Words in PowerPAC Searches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Related Words in PowerPAC Searches

    +

    When you enable the Related Words feature, PowerPAC users can choose to add records containing related words as well as the literal typed search term to keyword and phrase search results. "Related words" include words formed from stemming (for example, regular plurals and verb endings such as walk, walks, walker, walked, walking, but not irregular forms such as mouse/mice or run/ran) and synonyms. Synonyms include common nicknames, proper name variations, and spelling variations. The Include related words link is enabled by default; the connection library's setting determines whether to display the option (see Enabling Related Words).

    +

    The Include related words link is available for keyword and phrase search results when:

    +
      +
    • The user enters search terms for a keyword or phrase search and clicks or taps the search icon .
    • +
    • The user does a keyword or phrase search from the Advanced Search screen.
    • +
    • The user selects an Other Searches entry in the Related Searches dashboard.
    • +
    +

    The link appears only if additional records are found when the stemming and synonyms rules are applied.

    +

    + +

    +

    If the user clicks the link, additional records are retrieved. The search results list is then refreshed, and the Include related words link disappears until the user does a new search. Any facets that had been selected become unselected for the new search results, and a Related Words facet, if enabled, is added to the top of the Narrow your search dashboard element. See Related Words Facet.

    +

    The link becomes available again when a search is relaunched; for example:

    +
      +
    • The user changes the search terms, the Search by selection, or the Limit by selection, and clicks or taps the search icon.
    • +
    • The user updates a selection in More Search Options.
    • +
    • The user updates a selection in Select Databases.
    • +
    +

    The default Include related words strings are Include related words (nnn more titles) (plural) or  Include related words ({0} more title) (singular). You can change the string in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). The PowerPAC string ID for the plural statement is PACML_INCLUDE_RELATED_WORDS_LINK_TEXT. The PowerPAC string ID for the singular statement is PACML_INCLUDE_RELATED_WORDS_SINGUAL.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Search Results Including Related Words

    +

    The search results with related words depend on the user's Search By selection and return only records containing the related word in the same field ( Any Field, Title, Author, Subject, General notes, Publisher, Genre, and Series). The related words option does not apply to number searches (ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, Publisher no., SuDoc, CODEN, STRN).

    +

    For phrase search results that include related words:

    +
      +
    • Individual words in the phrase are processed for related words separately. For example, a phrase search for "fate and fury" retrieves titles with phrases such as "fate and furies," "fates and furies," and "fates and fury."
    • +
    • The system checks the synonyms table for individual words in the phrase. For example, a phrase search for "colour purple" retrieves titles with "color purple."
    • +
    • The phrase as a whole is NOT checked for synonyms. For example, a phrase search for "united kingdom" does NOT retrieve titles with "uk." Stemming and synonym pair matching is limited to individual keywords. That is, related terms map a keyword to another keyword. Mapping a single keyword to multiple keywords or multiple keywords to a single keyword is not supported.
    • +
    +

    Like the user's literal search term, related words appear in italics in the search results on the brief, summary and full displays in PowerPAC. Relevancy ranking also applies to search results that include related words. A match on the exact form of the word carries more weight than a match on other forms.

    +

    Related Words Facet

    +

    A Related Words facet is available as the first filter on the Narrow Your Search dashboard when the user has selected Include related words for search results. The filter consists of two checkbox options: See what was added (nnn titles), and See original results (nnn titles).

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • To see only the related words records, select only See what was added.
    • +
    • To see only the original search results without the related words records, select only See original results.
    • +
    • To see the original search results PLUS the related words records, check or uncheck both checkboxes.
    • +
    +

    You can control the display of the Related Words facet in system administration with the PowerPAC profile Dashboards: Narrow your search & related searches. The facet is set to display by default. For more information about this profile, see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +

    Overnight Processing for Related Words

    +

    A step in the nightly CJ K Keyword Processing job applies processing rules and a Synonyms table to keywords in the BibliographicKeywords table. The job output goes to the BibliographicKeywordRelations table, which the search engine uses to find records containing words that are related to the user's search terms.

    +

    Enabling Related Words

    +

    To enable related words in Polaris PowerPAC search results:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the PowerPAC connection organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Select the PowerPAC profile Related words options.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To enable the feature if it is not enabled, select Enable 'Include related words' link on keyword and phrase search results.

      When this option is checked, overnight processing occurs (see Overnight Processing for Related Words) and the Include related words option appears on the search results screen. If the feature is not enabled, overnight processing occurs, but the Include related words option does not appear on the search results screen.
    2. +
    3. (Optional) Specify a maximum number of titles for the search results; if the maximum is exceeded, the Include related words option is not displayed. The default value is 1000 results. Note that including related words increases the number of titles in the search results list.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    Be sure the value specified here does not exceed the number specified in the PowerPAC profile Result set: Maximum number of records to return for the same organization. If it does exceed Result set maximum, the link will never be suppressed.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_Record_Sets_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_Record_Sets_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e0047ee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_Record_Sets_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,267 @@ + + + + + + + + + Searching Record Sets (Polaris PowerPAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Searching Record Sets (Polaris PowerPAC)

    +

    You can create a bibliographic record set in the Polaris staff client and publish the URL to the record set on your Polaris PowerPAC portal page, to a page dashboard, or to your website pages. One or multiple record sets can be referenced by a single URL, and you can specify a sort order for the results. For information on creating record sets, see Using Cataloging Record Sets. For information about making record sets available in PowerPAC, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +

    When the patron clicks the URL link, a catalog search is launched for the titles in the record set. The Polaris PowerPAC results set consists of the titles in the record set, formatted according to your organization’s settings for PowerPAC search results and including all the title information that your PAC normally displays. You can use this feature to integrate bibliographies such as summer reading lists with your catalog and make them readily accessible to your patrons.

    +

    This feature uses two search access points that are also available for Boolean searches in Polaris PowerPAC: brs - Record set control number; brsn - Record set name

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Record Set Control Number Searches

    +

    To set up a record set link with the record set control number, structure the URL like this:

    +

    http://{PowerPACURL}/polaris/view.aspx?brs=bibrecordsetid +

    +

    Where bibrecordsetid is the Polaris control number for the bibliographic record set.

    +

    Example (single record set by number)
    http://mylibrary.org/polaris/view.aspx?brs=1234 +

    +

    Separate multiple record set control numbers with commas.

    +

    Example (multiple record sets by number):
    http://mylibrary.org/polaris/view.aspx?brs=1234,12345,123456 +

    +

    Record Set Name Searches

    +

    To set up a record set link with the record set name, structure the URL like this:

    +

    http://{PowerPACURL}/polaris/view.aspx?brsn='bibrecordsetname' +

    +

    Where bibrecordsetname is the name of the record set. Enclose the name in single quotation marks.

    +

    Example (single record set by name):
    http://mylibrary.org/polaris/view.aspx?brsn='MyRecordSet' +

    +

    This format also works with a record set name that contains spaces.

    +

    Example (record set name with spaces):
    http://mylibrary.org/polaris/view.aspx?brsn='Science Fiction Book Club' +

    +

    Separate multiple record set names with commas, enclosing each name in single quotation marks.

    +

    Example (multiple record sets by name):
    http://mylibrary.org/polaris/view.aspx?brs='TotSummer','TeenSummer','AdultSummer' +

    +

    Sort Order

    +

    By default, the PAC search results (the titles in the record set) are sorted by author, then title. You can specify a different sort option using this format:

    +

    http://{PowerPACURL}/view.aspx?brs={bibrecordsetid}&sort={sortoption} +

    +

    Example (results sorted by call number):
    http://mylibrary.org/polaris/view.aspx?brs=1234&sort=CALL +

    +

    The following table lists the mnemonics for the valid sort options:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Sort OrderMnemonicSort OrderMnemonic
    +

    Relevance

    +
    +

    &sort=RELEVANCE +

    +
    +

    Title, then Author

    +
    +

    &sort=TI_AU +

    +
    +

    Most Popular

    +
    +

    &sort=MP +

    +
    +

    Title, then Publication Date

    +
    +

    &sort=TI_PD +

    +
    +

    Author

    +
    +

    &sort=AU +

    +
    +

    Title, then Format

    +
    +

    &sort=TI_TOM +

    +
    +

    Title

    +
    +

    &sort=TI +

    +
    +

    Publication Date, then Author

    +
    +

    &sort=PD_AU +

    +
    +

    Call Number

    +
    +

    &sort=CALL +

    +
    +

    Publication Date, then Title

    +
    +

    &sort=PD_TI +

    +
    +

    Publication Date

    +
    +

    &sort=PD +

    +
    +

    Call Number, then Author

    +
    +

    &sort=CALL_AU +

    +
    +

    Author, then Title (default)

    +
    +

    &sort=AU_TI +

    +
    +

    Call Number, then Title

    +
    +

    &sort=CALL_TI +

    +
    +

    Author, then Publication Date

    +
    +

    &sort=AU_PD +

    +
    +

    Call Number, then Publication Date

    +
    +

    &sort=CALL_PD +

    +
    +

    Record Set Results

    +

    Record sets may contain any number of records, but the number of records displayed in the PAC is limited by the setting in Polaris Administration for the PowerPAC profile Result set: Maximum number of records to return. Searches for multiple record sets return results in one results list.

    +

    Note:
    Bibliographic records that are suppressed from display in PAC are not included in the results set.

    +

    If records are added, edited, or removed from the record set, the changes are reflected in the result set. If you have enabled the Search Agent for Polaris PowerPAC, patrons can save the search, have it run automatically, and receive notification of any changes.

    +

    If the record set itself is deleted, and you do not remove the URL from the Web page or dashboard, the standard Web error message for “page not found” is displayed when a patron clicks the URL.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c32f6cfa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Searching_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Search Options for Polaris PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Search Options for Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC search features can be tailored to your library catalog and your patrons’ needs. (Certain settings described here also affect Polaris Mobile PAC. For details, see Mobile PAC Search Settings.)

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_PAC_search_setting_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_PAC_search_setting_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8fe573d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_PAC_search_setting_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + Set PAC search setting defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set PAC search settings defaults

    +

    To set the library’s defaults for PAC searches:

    Note:
    Certain search settings affect both Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris Mobile PAC. These are noted in the following procedure.

    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. Double-click Search settings defaults. The Search Settings Defaults dialog box opens. Settings on each tabbed page control the defaults for that search type.

    SearchSetDefaults.gif 

    1. Click the Quick tab and set the quick search defaults:

    Note:
    Quick search settings also apply to Mobile PAC.

    1. Select the library default search field in the Search by list.

    The Polaris default selection is Any Field. Patrons cannot select a search field for quick searches, so your setting applies to every quick search.

    Note:
    You can customize the labels displayed in Polaris PowerPAC for Search by options. See Customizing Search by labels. However, the Search Setting defaults dialog box always displays the default labels.

    1. Select the library default search filter in the Limit by list.

    The available selections depend on the library’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. You can change the label of existing filters and set up custom filters. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By). The default selection is All formats (that is, no filter).

    1. Select the library’s default sort order for search results in the Sort by list. The Polaris default selection is Relevance. This selection sorts results based on weighted keyword frequency and proximity, so that those most likely to meet the user’s needs appear first in the list.

    If you select Most Popular, the sort is affected by the settings in the Most popular sort settings system level PAC profile, which is set to a Polaris default of 50% relevance and 50% popularity. You can adjust this setting to factor relevance either more or less than 50% when results are sorted by popularity. For example, if you want the sort to be based only on popularity (the titles most frequently checked out or requested over the past 120 days first in the list) you can adjust the Most popular sort settings to 100% popularity. See Specify level of relevance applied to popularity sort.

    Note:
    Quick searches are available for the library catalog only, not remote databases.

    Options that include two categories sort results by the first category, then by the second category. For example, with Author, then Title, the titles are sorted alphabetically by author then within each author’s works, alphabetically by title.

    Note (Polaris PowerPAC):
    These settings apply only to the default quick search. If you choose to offer a quick search feature with search option buttons, these settings are not used. For more information about the two types of quick searches, see Customizing Portal Page Features.

    1. Click the Keyword, Phrase, or Exact tab to set search defaults:

    Note:
    The same settings are available for keyword, phrase, and exact searches. Click the appropriate tab to make the settings

    KeywordDefaults.gif 

    1. Select the library default search field in the Search by list.The Polaris default selection is Any Field.

    Note:
    You can customize the labels displayed in Polaris PowerPAC for Search by options. However, the Search Setting defaults dialog box always displays the default labels. See Customizing Search by Labels.

    Tip:
    You can set an automatic subsort by title for many types of searches. See “Related Information” at the end of this procedure.

    1. Select the library default search filter in the Limit by list. The available selections depend on the organization’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).
    1. Select the library default sort order for local catalog search results in the When searching local database only list.
    2. Select the library default sort order for search results in the When at least 1 remote database is selected list.
    3. Most Popular and call number sorting options are not available for searches that include at least one remote database.
    1. Click the Advanced tab and set the advanced search defaults:

    AdvancedDefautls.gif 

    1. Select the default search field in the Search by list. This setting also applies to Mobile PAC. The default selection is Any Field.

    Note:
    You can customize the labels displayed in Polaris PowerPAC for Search by options. See Customizing Search by Labels. However, the Search Setting defaults dialog box always displays the default labels.

    1. Select the default search filter in the Limit by list.This setting also applies to Mobile PAC. The available selections depend on the organization’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).
    1. Select the sorting default for results from local databases in the When searching local database only. This setting also applies to Mobile PAC.
    1. Select the default sort order for results where a remote database is selected in the When at least 1 remote database is selected list.

    Note:
    Most Popular and call number sorting options are not available for searches that include at least one remote database.

    1. To offer patrons choices regarding how multiple words in a text entry box should be handled, select (check) Show relational operators dropdowns.

    When this option is checked, a drop-down list of options next to each text box is displayed. The table shows the applicable access points for each option, and the effect on search results:

    RELATIONAL OPERATOR OPTIONACCESS POINTSSEARCH EFFECT

    Keyword (ALL)

    AU, GENRE, KW (Any Field), NOTE, PUB, SE, SU, TI

    All of the keywords in the search term must exist.

    Keyword (ANY)

    AU, GENRE, KW (Any Field), NOTE, PUB, SE, SU, TI

    Any one of the keywords in the search term must exist.

    Phrase (ADJ)

    AU, GENRE, KW (Any Field), NOTE, PUB, SE, SU, TI

    All of the keywords in the search term must exist, and must be adjacent to each other in the order specified in the search term.

    Exact (==)

    AU, CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, PN, SE, STRN, SU, SUDOC, TI

    The search term must be an exact match.

    If you think these choices would be confusing to patrons, leave the Show relational operators dropdowns option unchecked (the default setting). In this case, the list of options is suppressed and the search looks for all the words entered in a text box (Keyword ALL search).

    Note:
    You must display the relational operators to make phrase searching available in Advanced searches. The Advanced Keyword All search does not support quotation marks to indicate a search phrase.

    1. Click the Boolean tab and set the Boolean search defaults.

    BooleanDefaults.gif 

    1. Select the default sort order for local catalog search results in the When searching local database only list.
    2. Select the default order for search results from remote databases in the When at least 1 remote database is selected list.

    Note:
    Most Popular and call number sorting options are not available for searches that include at least one remote database.

    +
      +
    1.  Click the Browse tab and set the browse search default:
    2. +
    +

    + BrowseDefaults.gif 

    +

    +

      +
    1. Select the default search index in the Search by list. The default selection is Title.
    2. +
    +

    If you are setting this profile at the system level, the Call Number choice is unavailable as a default, since it browses a local (item-level) call number index. See also Related Information, at the end of this procedure.

    +

    Note:
    You can customize the labels displayed in Polaris PowerPAC for Search by options. See Customizing Search by Labels. However, the Search Setting defaults dialog box always displays the default labels.

    +
      +
    1. In the Sort by list, select the default sort order for the list of titles associated with a heading.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Browse searches are available for the library catalog only, not remote databases.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Course Reserves tab and set the course reserve search default in the Search by list. The default selection is Course Name.
    2. +
    +

    + CourseReservesDefaults.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Customizing labels for search options - You can customize the labels displayed in Polaris PowerPAC for Search by options. See Customizing Search by labels. However, the Search Setting defaults dialog box always displays the default labels.
    • +
    • Making search types available in Polaris PowerPAC - See Setting Polaris PowerPAC search types.
    • +
    • Limit call number browse searching to the local item-level call number index - Open PowerPAC profiles, double-click Local Call Number Indexed Field: Limit Choice, and select Yes. If the profile is set to Yes at the system level, and a Polaris PowerPAC user is connected to the system organization, all call number options for browse searching are suppressed. If the profile is set to No at the system level, and a Polaris PowerPAC user is connected to the system organization, the user can choose to browse the Dewey or LC bibliographic-level call number indexes. (The item-level call number index is not available for the system organization.) If the profile is set to Yes at the branch level, and a Polaris PowerPAC user is connected to the that branch, the user can browse the local item-level call number index only. If the profile is set to No at the branch level, and a Polaris PowerPAC user is connected to that branch, the user can choose to browse the Dewey or LC bibliographic-level call number indexes as well as the local item-level index.
    • +
    • +

      Automatic subsorting by title (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC) - Set the PAC profile Search: Sub-sort-by-title to Yes to have PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results for most types of searches secondarily sorted by title. This allows patrons to quickly find a known title in a large results set. The profile is available on the system, library, and branch levels. It is set to No by default; you may want to leave this setting to preserve former behavior for patrons or if you find the automatic subsort impacts performance. When the profile is set to Yes, the records are first sorted by the selected sort option and then sorted alphabetically by title, ignoring nonfiling characters (respecting the value of the 245 second indicator). However, the setting does not cover the following search and sort types:

      +
        +
      • Any browse search
      • +
      • Any multi-database search
      • +
      • The following sort types: relevance, most popular, title, author then title, title then author, title then publication date, title then format, publication date then title, call number then title
      • +
      +
    • +
    • Search performance - You may experience decreased performance for searches with large results sets if your server capacity is limited. To improve performance, you can adjust the maximum number of records to return. The PowerPAC profile Result set: Maximum number of records to return, available at the system, library, and branch levels, controls this limit for Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    +

    Notes:
    If you lower the maximum number of records to return, relevancy ranking may be less effective.

    For browse search results, the maximum number of headings that a user can browse through is 1,000.

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_availability_search_filters_for_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_availability_search_filters_for_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c825882c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_availability_search_filters_for_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up availability search filters for PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up availability search filters for PAC

    +

    Note:
    When a patron selects remote databases to search along with the local Polaris database, and an availability search filter is selected, the availability search filter is applied to the Polaris database but not to the selected remote databases.

    +

    To place an availability search filter in the Polaris PAC Limit by list:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select PAC Limit By Display. The PAC Limit By Display table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Click btnInsert00547.gif in the PAC Limit By Display table. The Insert PAC Limit By Display dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for your availability filter in the Description box. This name appears in the Limit by list in PAC.
    2. +
    3. In the CCL Filter box, type the following command:
    4. +
    +

    AVAILABILITY > 0 +

    +

    Note:
    The AVAILABILITY access point works only for values greater than 0. (AVAILABILITY = 0 is not valid.)

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The Insert PAC Limit by Display dialog box closes, and the table displays your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    When Polaris ILS is installed, the default selection is All formats, which specifies no filter on the search. You may want to change the description of this selection—to No limits, for example—if your list includes custom filters.

    +
      +
    1. To set the order of options in the Limit by list, select a filter in the table and click btnUpArrow00549.gif or btnDownArrow00550.gif. Repeat this step until the list is ordered the way you want it. The higher an enabled item is positioned in the table (the lower the Display Order number), the closer to the top the item appears in the Limit by list. The first enabled item in the table is always the top item in the Limit by list.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_type_of_material_custom_search_filters_for_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_type_of_material_custom_search_filters_for_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7951572 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Set_up_type_of_material_custom_search_filters_for_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up type of material/custom search filters for PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up type of material/custom search filters for PAC

    +

    To specify what format/types of material are listed in the Limit by list as search filters in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, set up your own filters, and specify the default (top) filter for the Limit by list:

    +

    Note:
    For a list of the Type of Material codes, see Type of Material Filters. For a list of CQL codes that you can use to create custom filters, see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select PAC Limit By Display. The PAC Limit by Display table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + PACLimitDisTable.gif +

    +
      +
    1. To work with a standard format/type of material, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the format and click btnUpdate.gif. The Modify PAC Limit by Display dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + PACLimitMod.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To change the name of the format/type of material, type the new name in the Description box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This setting affects only the names as listed in the PAC Limit by list. The tooltip associated with each format icon in PAC search results always displays the default name of the format, as does the detailed information for a title.

    +
      +
    1. To display or suppress the format/type of material in the PAC Limit by list, select Yes (display) or No (suppress) in the Enabled box.
    2. +
    +

    Set all the table entries to No to suppress the Limit by list from display.

    +

    Note:
    The Digital Collection format/type of material identifies materials such as images, sound files, video clips, and text files. It is intended for use with Polaris Fusion™, a separately licensed feature. Contact the Polaris Customer Sales Department for more information about Polaris Fusion.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The Modify PAC Limit by Display dialog box closes, and the table displays your changes.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up a custom filter, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert.gif in the PAC Limit By Display table. The Insert PAC Limit By Display dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + PACLimitInsert.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the filter name in the Description box. This name appears in the Limit by list in PAC.
    2. +
    3. Type the CQL search command for the filter in the CCL Filter box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can construct a filter that limits search results to titles with at least one linked item that is available. See Set up availability search filters for PAC.

    +

    You can type any valid CQL command. Refer to PAC CQL Commands & Access Points. (If the command is not valid, the PAC search will return no results.) If the patron leaves the search term blank, the search finds all the titles that satisfy the CQL command.

    +

    Examples:
    A filter that allows patrons to search quickly for mysteries on DVD:
    Description: DVD Mysteries
    CQL Filter: TOM=DVD and GENRE=mystery

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The Insert PAC Limit by Display dialog box closes, and the table displays your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    When Polaris ILS is installed, the default selection is All formats, which specifies no filter on the search. You may want to change the description of this selection—to No limits, for example—if your list includes custom filters.

    +
      +
    1. To set the order of options in the Limit by list, select a filter in the table and click btnUpArrow.gif or btnDownArrow.gif. Repeat this step until the list is ordered the way you want it.
    2. +
    +

    The higher an enabled item is positioned in the table (the lower the Display Order number), the closer to the top the item appears in the Limit by list. The first enabled item in the table is the top item in the Limit by list.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Setting a default search filter by search type - You can specify a Limit by default setting for each search type that includes this feature. See Specifying Default Search Settings.
    • +
    • Deleting a search filter - Select a custom filter in the PAC Limit by Display policy table, and click btnDelete.gif. You cannot delete standard formats/types of materials. The Protected column indicates whether a filter can be deleted. If the value is Yes, you cannot delete the filter.
    • +
    • Modifying a search filter - Select the filter in the PAC Limit by Display policy table, and click btnUpdate00545.gif. You can modify the description, CQL command, and the Enabled setting for a custom filter. You can modify only the description and the Enabled setting for standard formats/types of materials. The Protected column indicates whether the CQL command can be edited for a filter. If the value is Yes, you cannot edit it.
    • +
    • EContent - The definition of electronic resources includes any ebooks that contain 07/00=c (see Type of Material Codes (TOMs)). If you want ebooks to be excluded from searches for electronic resources, change the Enabled setting for the standard electronic resource (TOM=elr) to No. Then create a custom Limit by filter for electronic resources that excludes ebooks: TOM=elr not TOM=ebk and enable your custom filter for display.
    • +
    • Narrowing search results - The Narrow Web part is displayed in the dashboard by default with the patron’s search results. When the patron selects a filter with this feature, the filter is applied to the current results set. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.
    • +
    • Scoping searches by collection - To offer an option to scope searches by collection, set the PowerPAC profile Search options: Limit by collection enabled to Yes. This setting places the Collections option on the More Search Options light box in Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • Scoping searches by language - To allow search scoping by the languages specified in the MARC Language Scoping Display table, set the PowerPAC profile Scoping: Use MARC language scoping display table to Yes. For more information about this table, see Setting Language Display. If you select No, all languages defined by the MARC 21 format are displayed for search scoping on the Search Options page of Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Available_Search_Types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Available_Search_Types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5016bb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Available_Search_Types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Available Search Types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Available Search Types

    +

    You can make the following kinds of searches available in Polaris PowerPAC, in addition to the Quick Search feature:

    +
      +
    • Keyword - Search for a word or multiple words (in any order) in bibliographic record fields.
    • +
    • Browse - Browse the title, author, subject, series, and call number indexes in the library catalog database.
    • +
    • Phrase - Search for multiple words (in order) in bibliographic record fields.
    • +
    • Exact - Search for multiple words (in order) in bibliographic record fields, including stop words.
    • +
    • Advanced - Do a complex keyword search by typing keywords and selecting And, Or, and Not operators.
    • +
    • Boolean - Search by typing a CQL (Common Query Language) command.
    • +
    • Course reserves - Search for course records and associated reserved items (available only if your Polaris contract includes course reserves)
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Options for community information keyword and browse searches are also available if your Polaris installation includes Polaris Community Profiles, a separately licensed feature. For more information, see Setting Community Search Options for PAC.

    +

    You control what searches are available with settings that display or suppress options on the Search menu.

    +

    + +

    +

    To set the search types available in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Set the following profiles to display or suppress the appropriate search types; by default, all are set to Yes (available):
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Navigation: Advanced +
    • +
    • Navigation: Boolean +
    • +
    • Navigation: Browse +
    • +
    • Navigation: Course reserves (available by contract)
    • +
    • Navigation: Exact +
    • +
    • Navigation: Keyword +
    • +
    • Navigation: Phrase +
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Select File, Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Quick search setup (Polaris PowerPAC) - You can offer a quick search feature on the portal page that includes search option buttons. See Customizing Portal Page Features.
    • +
    • Search filters (Limit by) - PAC offers a set of standard formats/types of material and custom search filters in the Limit by list. Users can select a filter before launching a quick, keyword, phrase, exact, or advanced search. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).
    • +
    • Default search settings - Users can select various settings for each type of search. For example, for keyword searches, patrons can set a search field, search filter, search database, and sort order for the results. You can set the default selections for these options. See Specifying Default Search Settings.
    • +
    • Remote databases (Z39.50 search targets) for PAC searches - See Managing Federated Search Targets .
    • +
    • Subscription databases for PAC searches - See Managing Federated Search Targets
    • +
    • Course reserve functions - See Setting Up Course Reserves
    • +
    • Search results display - You can determine what data to display in PAC search results. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.
    • +
    • Search Agent - Using the search agent, patrons can save searches and have them run automatically. The PAC parameter Search Agent Parameters controls search agent functions for both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. When the search agent is enabled, the Save Search link is available in the Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. See Setting Up Saved Searches in the PAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Did_You_Mean_Term_Checking.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Did_You_Mean_Term_Checking.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..852710cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Did_You_Mean_Term_Checking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking

    +

    When Did You Mean is enabled, suggestions are displayed on the search results page if there would be results in the Polaris database when the user clicks or taps a suggestion. Potential results in the Polaris database take into account any Search by, Limit by, and More Search Options selections, as well as resource groups, that were in effect when the search was launched. However, if the user changes a selection in the Limit By dropdown list or a selection in More Search Options and then clicks or taps the Did You Mean suggestion without launching the search again, the new selections are ignored.

    +

    Note: +
    If the user is also searching a remote database, Did You Mean suggestions may display even if there will be no results in the Polaris database, in case the remote database will return results. No attempt is made to determine if there will be hits in the remote database due to concerns about processing time.

    +

    If enabled, the Did You Mean function applies to quick, keyword, phrase, and exact phrase searches in Polaris PowerPAC, and to searches typed in the Look for bar in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. Additional suggestions, if any, are displayed in line when the user clicks or taps More. The illustration is an example from Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    The user can click or tap Less to collapse the list of suggestions and display only the first suggestion.

    +

    The Did You Mean process identifies a possible search suggestion or suggestions in a Did You Mean Overrides table match, a sound value (metaphone) match in the underlying SearchSuggestions table, or one or more matches in the spell check dictionary.

    +

    At least one bibliographic record will be retrieved if the user follows the suggestion. If the process returns multiple suggestions, each suggestion is checked individually and is not displayed in the suggestion list if it produces zero hits. Any returned records must have Display in PAC checked. When multiple suggestions are returned, the first suggestion is displayed with a "more" link, which opens a small pop-up window that shows the other suggestions. Multiple matching suggestions show all the suggestions that will return at least one record.

    +

    When the user clicks or taps a Did You Mean suggestion, there may be a pause while the search is conducted; the pause is most noticeable when CQL filters from the Limit by list were applied to the search. Processing is limited to 10 seconds. The user is not prevented from doing other actions during processing time, but if another action is taken, the Did You Mean results are not returned. No additional search transaction is logged when the user clicks a Did You Mean suggestion.

    +

    You can set whether Did You Mean suggestions are displayed at all, for PowerPAC only, whether they are displayed when there are search results or only when there are none. In addition, in the Did You Mean Overrides database table, you can specify your own Did You Mean suggestions for specific search terms to be displayed instead of the program’s suggestions.

    +

    To set up Did You Mean search suggestions and optionally specify override suggestions:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the profile Did You Mean: Enabled, and set the profile to Yes. This setting displays Did You Mean search suggestions in Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.
    4. +
    5. (PowerPAC only) On the PowerPAC profile tab, double-click the profile Did You Mean: Suggestions are to display even when hits are returned, and set the profile to Yes to display Did You Mean search suggestions when a search returns hits.
    6. +
    +

    When this profile is set to No (the default), Did You Mean search suggestions are displayed only when a search returns no hits at all. If you think patrons will find the search suggestions confusing when they already have satisfactory results, set the profile to No.

    +

    Note:
    This profile does not apply to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. In the Children’s Edition, when Did You Mean is enabled, suggestions are displayed only when a search produces no hits.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    3. To set override suggestions, follow these steps:
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You may want to wait to set overrides until you have an idea of the common mistakes your patrons may make.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the organization, and select Did You Mean Overrides. The Did You Mean Overrides table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    You can modify this table at the system, library, or branch level, but your changes affect all organizations in the system.

    +

    + DidYouMeanTbl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00551.gif to display the Insert: Did You Mean Overrides dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + insertdidumeanover.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Phrase box, type the search term as your patrons may enter it.
    2. +
    3. In the Override Phrase box, type the Did You Mean suggestion that you want to be displayed instead of any system-generated suggestion.
    4. +
    +

    These fields are not case-sensitive.

    +

    Example:
    A unique local place name is commonly misspelled. You can enter the common misspelling in the Phrase box, and the correct spelling in the Override Phrase box. Your override phrase will always be suggested for the misspelled term.

    +

    Note:
    You may find that the system suggests inappropriate terms for terms that the patron intended. For example, the patron types amelia bedelia (correct), but the system suggests Amalia Delia.You can enter a correctly spelled term in the Phrase box and the identical term in the Override Phrase box. In this case, when the patron enters the term correctly, no Did You Mean suggestion will be displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    3. The new entry is displayed in the Did You Mean Overrides database table for the organization. Modification pending appears in the status bar.
    4. +
    5. Repeat steps a-f until you have listed all the overrides for the organization.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate00552.gif.
    • +
    • Delete an entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete00553.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Search_Filters_Limit_By.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Search_Filters_Limit_By.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fd6c1e4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Setting_Up_Search_Filters_Limit_By.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By)

    +

    You can set up search filters that PAC users can select to limit search results. PowerPAC users can select a filter before launching a quick, keyword, phrase, exact, or advanced search. For example, a patron can filter a keyword search to return only DVDs. The filters are also available to Mobile PAC users who use the Mobile PAC Advanced search.

    +

    + +

    +

    Use the PAC Limit by Display policy table to specify the search filters available to PAC users in the Limit by drop-down list, and the order in which the filters are listed. The PAC Limit by Display policy table is available at the system, library, or branch level. The organization level at which the table is opened determines the entries you see in the list, and you can view and change entries for the selected organization only. This table can be displayed with the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note: +
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow; Access tables: Allow; Modify PAC limit by display table: Allow

    +

    + +

    +

    You can include the following types of filters in the Limit by list:

    +

    Note:
    If a PAC user enters a search term, selects the local database and one or more remote databases, and selects a Limit by option, the Limit by filters will be applied to the remote databases that can support that filter. If the remote database is unable to use the filter, it will be applied only to the local results. Results may be returned from the remote databases using the search string without the filter. If an unsupported filter was removed from a search of a remote database, a message appears in the Search Status box.

    +
      +
    • Type of material (TOM) filters - Polaris PowerPAC offers a set of standard formats/types of material and custom search filters in the Limit by list. In the PAC Limit by Display policy table, you can modify the description and the Enabled setting for standard formats/types of materials, but you cannot edit the CQL command for these standard filters. The TOM Limit by filters are used in Z39.50 searches of remote databases, but not in MuseGlobal databases. For MuseGlobal databases, the TOM limiter is discarded because MuseGlobal databases cannot interpret this limiter and would return zero results if this limiter were included in the search.
    • +
    • Custom filters - Use CQL commands to set up custom filters for the Limit by list. You can combine standard type of material codes with other CQL commands to create custom search filters. See Managing Federated Search Targets .
    • +
    • Availability filters - You can also use the PAC Limit by Display policy table to set up search filters that limit search results to titles with at least one available linked item. The patron selects the filter in the Limit by list before launching the search. If a PowerPAC or Mobile PAC connection is at the system level, the search results include all titles with at least one available item. If the connection is at the branch level, the results include all titles that have at least one linked available item assigned to that branch or the other branches defined as Local in the branch’s Item Availability Display Order table. (At either level, items with a suppressed circulation status are not included, and items where Display in PAC is not checked in the linked bibliographic record are not included.)
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specify_level_of_relevance_applied_to_popularity_sort.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specify_level_of_relevance_applied_to_popularity_sort.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..878e189b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specify_level_of_relevance_applied_to_popularity_sort.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Specify level of relevance applied to popularity sort + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify level of relevance applied to popularity sort

    +

    The system-level PAC profile, Most popular sort settings, automatically incorporates relevance into the Most popular sort option if this sort is selected for search results in the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. The Polaris default setting provides a 50/50 balance between popularity and relevancy when the Most popular sort option is selected. If you want the sort to consider only the popularity of the titles, adjust the setting in the Most Popular Sort Settings dialog box to 100% popularity. If you adjust the sort settings and do not like the results, click Revert to return to the default setting of 50% popularity and 50% relevance.

    +

    To adjust the relevancy factor applied to most popular sorting of search results in the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the System level, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Most popular sort settings.
    4. +
    +

    + mostpopsortdial2.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To adjust the Polaris default sort settings of 50/50, either click on an up or down arrow or move the slider. The % Relevance number increases as you move the slider right, and the % Popularity number increases as you move the slider left.
    2. +
    +

    If you find that this adjustment is not what you expected, click Revert to restore the 50/50 default.

    +

    Any changes made to this dialog box are reflected immediately in PAC search results.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specifying_Default_Search_Settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specifying_Default_Search_Settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b2a082a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSearching/Specifying_Default_Search_Settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specifying Default Search Settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specifying Default Search Settings

    +

    Patrons can set various options for each type of search in Polaris PowerPAC. For example, for keyword searches, patrons can set a search field (Search by) and search filter (Limit by) for the search, and then sort the returned results by any of several options.

    +

    + +

    +

    You use the PAC profile Search settings defaults to specify the default settings for search field, search filter, and sort order.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSocial/Polaris_Social_with_ChiliFresh_Connections.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSocial/Polaris_Social_with_ChiliFresh_Connections.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7ab16dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOSocial/Polaris_Social_with_ChiliFresh_Connections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + + + + + Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections

    +

    With Polaris Social, the library’s catalog becomes a gateway to a worldwide network of readers, allowing patrons to share the books they read, see what others are reading, and discover new books based on the social network connected to a title. Polaris Social offers integrated social functions in Polaris PowerPAC through a collaboration with ChiliFresh Connections, with interactions embedded in Polaris PowerPAC. Navigation to and from each ChiliFresh Connections feature is seamless, and users enjoy a single, unified interface in Polaris PowerPAC. Features include single sign-on through PAC; the ability to set up a patron profile; create lists of books that other readers can see; follow what readers with similar tastes are reading; see the network of patrons connected to a title; add recommendations, reviews and tags to titles, and more. For information about ChiliFresh Connections, see www.chilifresh.com.

    +

    While ChiliFresh provides the library system administration options for controlling feature display and functionality, Polaris designates the placement of the ChiliFresh Connections features in Polaris PowerPAC. Accessing ChiliFresh Connections features from PowerPAC requires no further authentication once patron logon occurs in Polaris PowerPAC, and the patron has registered for the first time in ChiliFresh Connections. Patrons can manage Connections user account information as part of My Account in Polaris PowerPAC. For any catalog items in the ChiliFresh database, patrons can add tags and view library users.

    +

    Note: +
    The font type and color scheme for ChiliFresh Connections information displayed in Polaris PowerPAC matches the PowerPAC theme. The PowerPAC display does not use any font or color customizations created by patrons in ChiliFresh Connections.

    +

    In the Polaris themes/shared folder, ChiliFresh Connections has its own style sheet (chilifresh.css). Customers who have a custom theme and wish to override the default chilifresh.css file should copy the file from the themes/shared folder to the custom theme folder and edit the custom version accordingly. Unlike the main styles.css page with overrides, the custom chilifresh.css page must contain all the CSS classes from the default version.

    +

    Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections is a separately licensed feature at the branch level. You can also offer reviews from ChiliFresh under a separate ChiliFresh contract, without offering the full features of ChiliFresh Connections. However, ChiliFresh reviews without ChiliFresh Connections require separate patron authentication. See ChiliFresh Enriched Data.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Exporting Records to the ChiliFresh Database

    +

    To display Chilifresh Connections content in PAC, you must initially export a file containing all your library’s MARC bibliographic information to ChiliFresh. Use the Polaris staff client Utilities, Export function to upload the records, using the default option Extract All Final MARC 21 Records. Instructions are available on the ChiliFresh Connections Admin page. For subsequent exports of newly acquired titles, define the appropriate date range for the export using the Extract Only MARC 21 Records Added/Changed from Date option.

    +

    Patron Login and ChiliFresh Connections Registration

    +

    Within PowerPAC, a patron can easily link his or her library account to a new or existing ChiliFresh account. Once the link is established, the patron logs on with library account credentials to access Connections features within PowerPAC.

    +

    A patron who has not logged on can start this process by clicking or tapping any Connections function that requires logon. For example, the registration process can be initiated from search results Connections functions in the patron’s search results, or by clicking or tapping Connections on the menu bar and logging on.

    +

    + +

    +

    Once logged on, the patron receives a sign-up message for social features, and can click or tap a link to connect the library account to a new or existing ChiliFresh account.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    For new accounts, the patron clicks or taps the Create a nickname option, supplies a nickname, and specifies the birth date. The nickname is the public name exposed to other users of Polaris Social functions. If the library’s setup with ChiliFresh requires a birth date and the patron is under 13, a message is displayed and the sign-up is canceled. To link an existing ChiliFresh account, the patron clicks or taps Use an existing ChiliFresh Connections account and supplies the email address and password associated with the account.

    +

    A similar process occurs when a patron who has not logged on clicks or taps a ChiliFresh feature such as Rate or review in search results.

    +

    After the library account and the ChiliFresh account are linked, the patron who is logged into PAC does not have to log on to ChiliFresh Connections to use those Connections features in PAC that require logon.

    +

    Logging off in PowerPAC also logs the patron off the ChiliFresh Connections account.

    +

    Note: +
    Logging on to ChiliFresh Connections from outside PowerPAC does not log the user on to the PowerPAC (library) account.

    +

    When the library account and the ChiliFresh account are linked, deleting an existing Connections account from the ChiliFresh Connections site removes the shared logon credential from PAC. The patron can create a new shared logon credential between the PAC patron account and Connections by re-registering with Connections via PAC, as described above.

    +

    Social Features in the PowerPAC Patron Account

    +

    Social features are available to logged on patrons from the PowerPAC patron account. The patron can click or tap Connections in the dashboard or Connections in the menu bar to display these features.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Connections account page offers links for invitations, comments, messages, recommendations, and suggested connections. Each of these features opens in a lightbox. Below, five content “drawers” contain ChiliFresh Connections user account data. They are initially displayed as collapsed, but the user can choose to expand individual drawers, expand all, or collapse all.

    +

    ChiliFresh Connections notifies patrons by email when they receive a new message, recommendation, invitation, or comment. The email message contains a logon link to the email recipient’s PAC branch. ChiliFresh Connections defines this notification functionality, including text of the email message and which Connections actions will initiate a notification.

    +

    Bookshelves Drawer +

    +

    Bookshelves may include My library, My current reads, My wishlist, and any custom bookshelves (lists) the patron has created.

    +

    + +

    +

    Books can be added to any bookshelf by clicking or tapping the Search for more bookslink. (Books can also be added to bookshelves from the patron’s search results. See Social Features in Search Results.) If a bookshelf currently has contents, the list can be sorted by Latest, Author, Title, Ascending alphabetical, or Descending alphabetical.

    +

    Icons next to each title offer options to remove the title from the bookshelf, set the title as a current read, or move the title to another shelf. The illustration above shows the interface when the patron chooses to move the title to another shelf.

    +

    Friends and Followers Drawer +

    +

    + +

    +

    This drawer displays five sections:

    +
      +
    • +

      My friends - The patron’s ChiliFresh Connections friends. The patron can invite friends, see all friends, or browse library users to find other Connections users registered at the library. Each library user’s name is accompanied by an Add Friend icon ChiliAddFriend.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Users following me - Users who follow the logged-in patron.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Following users - Users whom the logged-in patron follows. You can also select View recent updates to see recent activity.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Find users - The logged-in patron can search for any ChiliFresh Connections user by user name or email address. When the patron selects the link for another ChiliFresh Connections user, that user’s profile page is displayed.

      +
    • +
    +

    On that page, the logged-in patron can click or tap a title to display the brief title information in PowerPAC, as in the patron’s own profile. The social drawers are also the same. The following features are available by clicking the icons:

    +
      +
    • +

      Add to friends + ChiliAddFriend00563.gif - Sends a friend request to the ChiliFresh user; if the user accepts, he or she is added to the patron’s friends list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Send message + ChiliFreshSendMsgIcon.gif - Sends a message to this user.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add comment to corkboard + ChiliAddComment.gif - This option adds a comment to the user’s Comments list, and sends the user an e-mail alert.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Follow/unfollow this user + ChiliFreshFollowIcon.gif - Adds the patron to the Followers list on the ChiliFresh user’s profile and adds the ChiliFresh user to the Following list on the patron’s profile (or reverses the operation).

      +
    • +
    +

    Reviews Drawer

    +

    This drawer displays the reviews the patron has already submitted. The patron can select a title to display search results for that title in PowerPAC. Reviews can be added from search results. See Social Features in Search Results.

    +

    Edit My Profile Drawer +

    +

    The patron can edit the Connections profile picture, nickname, “My Interests” (favorite authors, books, movies), and Facebook, Twitter, or LinkedIn link settings. The ChiliFresh site provides more information about these link settings.

    +

    Link to Connections Drawer +

    +

    This drawer is a link to the ChiliFresh Connections site, which opens in a lightbox. The system uses the linked ChiliFresh Connections authentication for the logged on patron to log on to the ChiliFresh Connections site.

    +

    + ChiliFreshSite.gif +

    +

    After the patron makes account changes in the Chilifresh Connections lightbox window, the PowerPAC patron account drawer content is refreshed when the account page is refreshed.

    +

    Social Features in Search Results +

    +

    Ratings and Reviews +

    +

    Logged on users can rate titles, add reviews, and read reviews from other readers. The user clicks or taps Rate or review (for titles with no previous reviews) or Review (for titles with previous ratings or reviews) to open this feature in a lightbox. This illustration shows a title with no previous reviews.

    +

    + +

    +

    Add to Shelf +

    +

    In PowerPAC initial (brief) search results, an option to add the title to a ChiliFresh Connections bookshelf is displayed under other Chilifresh content, such as the book jacket image and the ratings/reviews link.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the logged-in patron selects Add to Shelf, a list of bookshelves associated with the patron’s account is displayed (see Bookshelves Drawer).

    +

    Note: +
    If the patron is not logged in, he or she is prompted to do so.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    If the title has already been added to one of patron’s bookshelves, the displayed link is Already on Shelf.

    +

    When the patron selects a bookshelf, the bookshelf opens in a lightbox, with the newly-added title at the top. Icons next to each title offer options to remove the title from the bookshelf, set the title as a current read, recommend the title to a friend, or move to the title to another shelf. The patron can also click or tap Manage shelves. This option opens a light box where the patron can set up a new bookshelf, specify a default bookshelf, delete custom bookshelves, and choose a bookshelf for display in the lightbox.

    +

    + ChiliManageShelf.gif +

    +

    More Options +

    +

    More options are available from the product page (full display) of a title in PAC. The product page includes the Add to Shelf/Already on Shelf option. In addition, the patron can select More Options to display additional ChiliFresh Connections options:

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • +

      Related Users - Selecting this link displays a lightbox that lists users who have taken an action on the item, such as adding it to their shelf or reviewing it. Selecting a Connections user in the lightbox opens the public profile display of that user (see Friends and Followers Drawer).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Related Items - This option displays a lightbox with “you might also like” titles related to the currently displayed title. ChiliFresh determines what titles are “related.” Selecting any item from the list of related items launches a search in PowerPAC and displays the product page for the selected title.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Tags - Selecting Tags opens the Connections tags widget in a lightbox. The patron may add a new tag or select an existing one. Selecting a tag in the lightbox navigates within the lightbox to the ChiliFresh Connections list of titles associated with that tag; selecting a title launches a search and displays the brief result for the title.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Comment - The patron can select this option to add the title as a favorite or post a comment. The Playback option shows any existing discussion (comment thread).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Share - Selecting any of the options in the Share lightbox shares a deep link to the PowerPAC product page for the title via e-mail or on the appropriate social media site.

      +
    • +
    +

    + ChiliShare.gif +

    +
      +
    • +

      Recommend - The patron can recommend the title to another Connections user, or email the recommendation to a friend.

      +
    • +
    +

    + ChiliMoreRecommend.gif +

    + +

    Set Up ChiliFresh Connections in Polaris Administration

    +

    Open the PAC profile Enriched data for the PowerPAC connection organization. On the ChiliFresh - Other Features tabbed page, select Enable and supply your ChiliFresh Service URL, account ID, and API key. See Set up enriched data - ChiliFresh.

    +

    For information about port 80/443 access requirements, see Enriched Data Domains Requiring Port 80/443 Access.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOabout/Public_Access_Administration_Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOabout/Public_Access_Administration_Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2e4e827 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOabout/Public_Access_Administration_Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + + Public Access Administration Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Public Access Administration Overview

    +

    Your library organization can use the settings in Polaris Administration to manage how your public access catalog appears and functions. In addition to the options available in Polaris Administration, Polaris provides customization features. See PAC Customization.

    +

    See the following topics for information on the options for managing your PAC:

    +

    Note: +
    If your library uses Polaris Community Profiles, you can specify how these records are displayed in the PAC. SeeCommunity Setup for PAC Display.

    +

    Review and set public access profiles and parameters +

    +

    General instructions for setting the profiles and parameters that control public access features.

    +

    Setting Up Polaris PowerPAC - Overview +

    +

    Updating page caches; privacy; accessibility; use analysis; basic set-up; banner graphics; branch switching; themes (skins); portal page features; content carousels; dashboards; RSS feeds; virtual reference; online help; editing language strings.

    +

    Setting Search Options for Polaris PowerPAC +

    +

    Default settings for PAC searches; setting up search filters; setting available search types for Polaris PowerPAC; record set searches for Polaris PowerPAC; setting up the search agent (saved searches); automatic search suggestions; “Did You Mean” search term suggestions.

    +

    Displaying PAC Search Results 

    +

    Specifying search results data and display options; setting up the title (product) page for individual titles; recently viewed titles; settings for Feature It promotions; narrow and related searches options; suppressing request and availability options for specific types of material; cross-reference display; local and system availability; call numbers by text message; item-specific display settings; shelf locations; highlighting titles with local items (Polaris PowerPAC); mapping item availability in Polaris PowerPAC; Google Preview for search results; title lists in Polaris PowerPAC; social bookmarking and sharing in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC +

    +

    Managing patron access to integrated eContent; specifying availability display; controlling patron-initiated circulation of eContent from the PAC.

    +

    Enabling Online Book Purchases 

    +

    Setting up links to online bookstores for titles in Polaris PowerPAC search results; Polaris Bookstore.

    +

    Editing Messages and Labels 

    +

    Editing and translating standard messages for Polaris PowerPAC in Polaris Administration; reference list of messages and labels.

    +

    Customizing Language Strings 

    +

    Using Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) to customize English and other licensed language strings in all the parts of Polaris that support multiple languages (overview).

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition 

    +

    Setting up and customizing Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition; for example: themes; dashboards; search filters; “canned” searches (categories); results display.

    +

    Setting Up Mobile PAC 

    +

    Mobile PAC set-up basics; settings for searches and results; patron registration, log-in and account features; credit card payments.

    +

    Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections 

    +

    Integrated social features in Polaris PowerPAC: exporting records; log-on; patron account features; search results features; setup.

    +

    PAC Profiles Reference 

    +

    Reference list of general PAC profiles as they appear in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Profiles Reference 

    +

    Reference list of Polaris PowerPAC profiles as they appear in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Children’s PAC Profiles Reference 

    +

    Reference list of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition profiles as they appear in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Mobile PAC Profiles Reference 

    +

    Reference list of Mobile PAC profiles as they appear in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Standard PAC Pages Reference +

    +

    Reference list of standard pages for Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.

    +

    See also the following topics in the Public Access Administration Guide:

    +

    Managing Federated Search Targets +

    +

    How to organize remote databases so that patrons can select them in the PowerPAC’s Select Databases page to search simultaneously; setting up databases using Z39.50 search protocol; setting up databases that use other search protocols provided in partnership with MuseGlobal; setting up use conditions and access conditions; setting up follow-on searching.

    +

    Managing E-Sources +

    +

    Setting up and organizing e-sources, which are proprietary, non-Z39.50 databases that the library offers to patrons for searching in Polaris PowerPAC. Setup examples; E-Source connection report.

    +

    Enabling Enriched Data +

    +

    Settings that integrate third-party book jacket images and additional title content in Polaris PowerPAC search results.

    +

    Setting Up Patron Account Access and Options +

    +

    Settings that affect patron account access in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC: enabling account access; limiting log-in attempts; inactivity timeout; patron account features; self-registration and online updates; patron passwords and user names; patron e-mail (Ask Us).

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOccl/PAC_CQL_Commands_Access_Points.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOccl/PAC_CQL_Commands_Access_Points.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8653aaf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOccl/PAC_CQL_Commands_Access_Points.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1180 @@ + + + + + + + + PAC CQL Commands and Access Points + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC CQL Commands and Access Points

    +

    This section lists the CQL (Common Query Language) commands and access points you can use to construct custom search filters for Polaris PowerPAC. For more information about this procedure, see Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By). You can also use CQL commands to construct ready-made searches for search categories in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. For more information about this procedure, see Add a new search target to a category.

    +

    The CQL search command can include the following parts:

    +
      +
    • The text for which you are searching
    • +
    • The access points (fields) you want to search; for example, author or title (see Search Access Point (Field) Codes). Operators (connectors) that link one part of the search with another
    • +
    +

    Example:
    To find the works of author Asimov published in or after 1970, you type the following command:
    AU=asimov AND PD >= 1970
    AU
     specifies the access point Author. The search text for this access point is asimov. AND is the Boolean operator connecting the two conditions of this search (the author and the date). PD specifies the access point Publication Date. The search text for this access point is 1970. The symbol >= stands for the relative operator greater than or equal to.

    +

    Fields that can be searched with CQL search commands fall into one of three categories:

    +
      +
    • Keyword-indexed fields (for example, author, title, subject, notes) - A record must contain all the keywords entered in the field selected for search, in any order. Other words may be present, or the words may be present in different fields of the same type.

      To retrieve only records that contain the search words in a specific order with no words in between (that is, to do a phrase search), enter the words in double quotation marks. For example, a search for TI=french cooking finds the title French Provincial Cooking while TI=“french cooking” does not.
    • +
    • Fields that are searched with string searches - A record must contain an exact match on the search characters (for example, a call number or publisher number search). If the field typically includes spacing or punctuation, and you want to find an exact match on the entire string, enter the text within double quotation marks. For example, when searching for a call number: CALL="641.5944 Dia"
    • +
    • Fields that require library-specific or Polaris-specific codes (for example, language, target audience, type of material).
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To see whether fields use keywords or codes, refer to Search Access Point (Field) Codes.

    +

    Boolean Operators

    +

    The Boolean operators And, Or, and Not combine search terms:

    +
      +
    • And - A record must match both the term before and the term after the operator to be included in the search results.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU=“isaac asimov” AND TI=planets
    Finds only the items written by Isaac Asimov that have the word planets in the title.

    +
      +
    • Or - A record can match either the term before or the term after the operator, or both, to be included in the search results.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU=“isaac asimov” OR TI=planets
    Finds all items written by Isaac Asimov and all items with the word planets in the title by any author, including Asimov.
    If you have a number of terms to combine with OR, type the command this way:
    AU={list}asimov, dick, ballard, lem, capek{/list}
    You can insert as many terms as you need between {list} and {/list}

    +
      +
    • Not - A record must match the term before the operator, but not the term after the operator, to be included in the search results.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    AU=“isaac asimov” NOT TI=planets
    Finds only those items written by Isaac Asimov that do not have the word planets in the title.

    +

    If you use multiple operators in the same search command, use parentheses to group the operations to be performed.

    +

    Search Text That Includes Operators or Special Characters

    +

    To search for text that includes an operator or special characters as part of the search text, put the text in double quotation marks.

    +

    For example, to find the title Bud, Not Buddy, type this command:
    TI = “bud not buddy”
    Put this text in quotation marks because not is ordinarily a Boolean operator.

    +

    As another example, to find the title Tim O'Toole and the Wee Folk, type this command:
    TI= “tim o’toole”
    Put this text in quotation marks because the apostrophe in the word o’toole is a special character.

    +

    Relative Operators

    +

    Relative operators are symbols that compare search terms:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    SymbolRelative Operation
    +

    =

    +
    +

    Equal to search term

    +
    +

    <>

    +
    +

    Not equal to a single search term:
    PD <> 1970
    For a range of dates, use NOT:
    NOT PD = 1970-1980.

    +
    +

    >=

    +
    +

    Greater than or equal to search term

    +
    +

    >

    +
    +

    Greater than search term

    +
    +

    <=

    +
    +

    Less than or equal to search term

    +
    +

    <

    +
    +

    Less than search term

    +
    +

    Example:
    PD >= 1987
    This example finds items published in or after 1987. PD specifies the publication date access point. See Search Access Point (Field) Codes for access point codes.

    +

    Example:
    KW=solar system AND PD < 1932
    This example finds items published before 1932 that have the words “solar system” in any record field. KW specifies the keyword access point. See Search Access Point (Field) Codes for access point codes.

    +

    Proximity-Distance Operator

    +

    With proximity searching, you specify the allowable distance between two terms, which can be keywords or phrases. The proximity-distance operator is PROX/distance. The proximity-distance is the difference between the positions of the left and right terms. The distance is never negative, and adjacent terms have a proximity-distance equal to 1. You can use the operator with the relative operators < (less than), <= (less than or equal to), = (equals), >= (greater than or equal to), > (greater than), or <> (not equal to).

    +

    You can use the following modifiers:

    +

    /ordered - The order of the two terms in the search results must be the same as the order of the terms in the query.

    +

    /unordered - The order of the two terms does not matter in the search results.

    +

    You can use keyword or phrase search access points (such as KW, AU, TI) but the access point must be the same for both terms. See Search Access Point (Field) Codes.

    +

    Example:
    KW=“cat” PROX/distance<=5 KW=“the hat”
    Find the keyword cat where it appears less than or equal to 5 words before or after the phrase the hat. That is, between 0 and 4 words exist between the keyword cat and the phrase the hat.

    +

    Example:
    KW=“Harry Potter” PROX/distance<10/ordered KW=“J. K. Rowling”
    Find the phrase Harry Potter where it appears less than 10 words before the phrase J. K. Rowling. That is, between 0 and 8 words must exist between the phrase Harry Potter and the phrase J. K. Rowling, counting from the first word in each phrase.

    +

    Example:
    KW=“United States” PROX/distance=2 KW=“Union”
    Find the phrase United States where it appears exactly 2 words before or after the keyword Union. That is, exactly 1 word must exist between the phrase United States and the keyword Union.

    +

    Restrictions

    +
      +
    • The proximity operator does not support nested Boolean expressions in either the left or right terms. For example,
      ((KW=Dog OR Cat) PROX/distance=5 KW=Food) PROX/distance=6 KW=Kennel is not supported.
    • +
    • The maximum proximity-distance is 1024. If the proximity-distance in the query is greater than 1024, the search process changes it to 1024.
    • +
    • The total maximum number of keywords in a proximity expression is 16. That is, the number of keywords on the left side of the proximity operator plus the number of keywords on the right side of the proximity operator is limited to 16. If a proximity expression contains more than 16 words, then the proximity operator will be ignored but up to the first 16 words on the left and the right will be checked for adjacency.
    • +
    • The keyword or phrase access point (such as KW, AU, TI) used in the left and right terms must be the same. For example, the query
      SU="HARRY" PROX/distance<=5 AU="POTTER" is not supported and will produce an Unsupported search error.
    • +
    • The left and right terms for each proximity operator must be a keyword or phrase and not a Boolean expression, but there is no limit to the number of proximity operators in a query. For example, this query is valid:
      (AU=“J. K.” PROX/distance<10 AU=“Rowling”)
      AND (TI=“Conversations With” PROX/distance<10 TI=“Rowling”)
      AND MAT=BKS
    • +
    +

    Search Access Point (Field) Codes

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Access PointDescription
    +

    AB

    +
    +

    Assigned branch (requires library-specific codes)

    +
    +

    AU

    +
    +

    Author (keyword)

    +
    +

    AVAILABILITY

    +
    +

    Filters search results to titles that have at least one available item. Type AVAILABILITY > 0. Example: To find Harry Potter titles with at least one available item, type TI = Harry Potter AND AVAILABILITY > 0.The AVAILABILITY access point works only for values greater than 0. (AVAILABILITY = 0 is not valid.)

    +
    +

    BRS

    +
    +

    Polaris bibliographic record set - control number

    +
    +

    BRSN

    +
    +

    Polaris bibliographic record set - record set name

    +
    +

    CALL

    +
    +

    Call number

    +
    +

    CN

    +
    +

    Polaris bibliographic record - control number

    +
    +

    CODEN

    +
    +

    Identifier for scientific and technical periodicals

    +
    +

    COL

    +
    +

    Collection (requires library-specific codes)

    +
    +

    DD

    +
    +

    Dewey classification

    +
    +

    GENRE

    +
    +

    Genre (keyword)

    +
    +

    GOV

    +
    +

    Superintendent of Documents classification number for government documents

    +
    +

    ISBN

    +
    +

    International Standard Book Number

    +
    +

    ISSN

    +
    +

    International Standard Serial Number

    +
    +

    KW

    +
    +

    Keyword (any field)

    +
    +

    LA

    +
    +

    Language (see LA (Language) Codes)

    +
    +

    LC

    +
    +

    Library of Congress classification

    +
    +

    LCCN

    +
    +

    Library of Congress Control Number

    +
    +

    MAT

    +
    +

    Material type of physical items (requires library-specific codes)

    +
    +

    NAL

    +
    +

    National Agricultural Library classification

    +
    +

    NLC

    +
    +

    National Library of Canada classification

    +
    +

    NLM

    +
    +

    National Library of Medicine classification

    +
    +

    NOTE

    +
    +

    General notes (keyword)

    +
    +

    OCLC

    +
    +

    Online Computer Library Center (OCLC) control number

    +
    +

    OCN

    +
    +

    Other system control number (requires library-specific codes)

    +
    +

    OWN

    +
    +

    Record owner (requires library-specific codes)

    +
    +

    PD

    +
    +

    Publication date

    +
    +

    PN

    +
    +

    Publisher’s number

    +
    +

    PUB

    +
    +

    Publisher (keyword)

    +
    +

    SE

    +
    +

    Series (keyword)

    +
    +

    STATB

    +
    +

    Record status (requires library-specific codes)

    +
    +

    STRN

    +
    +

    Standard Technical Report Number

    +
    +

    SU

    +
    +

    Subject (keyword)

    +
    +

    TA

    +
    +

    Target audience (see TA (Target Audience) Codes)

    +
    +

    TI

    +
    +

    Title (keyword)

    +
    +

    TOM

    +
    +

    Format/Type of Material (see TOM (Format/Type of Material) Codes)

    +
    +

    UDC

    +
    +

    Universal Decimal classification

    +
    +

    UPC

    +
    +

    Universal Price Code number

    +
    +

     LA (Language) Codes

    +

    These are some common codes to use with the language access point (LA) in a Boolean (CQL) search. Use the code, not the language name. For example, to specify English, type LA=ENG.

    +

    Note:
    You can see a complete list of language codes at the Library of Congress Web site:
    www.loc.gov/marc/languages

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    LanguageCode
    +

    Arabic

    +
    +

    ARA

    +
    +

    Bosnian

    +
    +

    BOS

    +
    +

    Chinese

    +
    +

    CHI

    +
    +

    Czech

    +
    +

    CZE

    +
    +

    Danish

    +
    +

    DAN

    +
    +

    Dutch

    +
    +

    DUT

    +
    +

    English

    +
    +

    ENG

    +
    +

    French

    +
    +

    FRE

    +
    +

    German

    +
    +

    GER

    +
    +

    Modern Greek

    +
    +

    GRE

    +
    +

    Hebrew

    +
    +

    HEB

    +
    +

    Hindi

    +
    +

    HIN

    +
    +

    Italian

    +
    +

    ITA

    +
    +

    Japanese

    +
    +

    JPN

    +
    +

    Korean

    +
    +

    KOR

    +
    +

    Latin

    +
    +

    LAT

    +
    +

    Multiple Languages

    +
    +

    MUL

    +
    +

    Polish

    +
    +

    POL

    +
    +

    Portuguese

    +
    +

    POR

    +
    +

    Romanian

    +
    +

    RUM

    +
    +

    Russian

    +
    +

    RUS

    +
    +

    Serbian

    +
    +

    SCC

    +
    +

    Sign

    +
    +

    SGN

    +
    +

    Spanish

    +
    +

    SPA

    +
    +

    Ukrainian

    +
    +

    UKR

    +
    +

    Vietnamese

    +
    +

    VIE

    +
    +

    Yiddish

    +
    +

    YID

    +
    +

    TA (Target Audience) Codes

    +

    Use these codes with the target audience (TA) access point in a Boolean (CQL) search. Use the code, not the target audience name. For example, to specify a preschool audience, type TA=a.

    +

    Note:
    Not all bibliographic records include target audience information.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Target AudienceCode
    +

    Preschool

    +
    +

    a

    +
    +

    Primary school

    +
    +

    b

    +
    +

    Elementary and junior high school

    +
    +

    c

    +
    +

    Secondary (senior high) school

    +
    +

    d

    +
    +

    Adult

    +
    +

    e

    +
    +

    Specialized

    +
    +

    f

    +
    +

    General

    +
    +

    g

    +
    +

    Juvenile

    +
    +

    j

    +
    +

    TOM (Format/Type of Material) Codes

    +

    Use these codes with the Type of Material access point (TOM) in a Boolean (CQL) search. Use the format/type of material code, not the name. For example, to specify DVDs, type TOM=DVD.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Format/Type of MaterialCode
    +

    Abstract

    +
    +

    abs

    +
    Atlasatl
    +

    Audio book

    +
    +

    abk

    +
    Audio book on cassetteabt
    Audio book on CDabc
    +

    Blu-Ray Disc

    +
    +

    brd

    +
    Blu-Ray + DVDbdv
    +

    Book

    +
    +

    bks

    +
    +

    Book + Cassette

    +
    +

    bcs

    +
    +

    Book + CD

    +
    +

    bcd

    +
    Book + DVDbkv
    +

    Braille

    +
    +

    brl

    +
    +

    Cartographic material

    +
    +

    cmt

    +
    +

    Digital media collection

    +
    +

    dmc

    +
    +

    DVD

    +
    +

    dvd

    +
    +

    EAudiobook

    +
    +

    aeb

    +
    +

    Ebooks

    +
    +

    ebk

    +
    +

    Electronic resources

    +
    +

    elr

    +
    Emagazineemg
    +

    Globe

    +
    +

    glb

    +
    +

    Kit

    +
    +

    kit

    +
    +

    Large print

    +
    +

    lpt

    +
    +

    Manuscript cartographic material

    +
    +

    mcm

    +
    +

    Manuscript material

    +
    +

    mss

    +
    +

    Manuscript music

    +
    +

    mmu

    +
    +

    Map

    +
    +

    map

    +
    +

    Microform

    +
    +

    mic

    +
    +

    Mixed materials

    +
    +

    mix

    +
    +

    Motion picture

    +
    +

    mot

    +
    +

    Music CD

    +
    +

    mcd

    +
    +

    Musical sound recording

    +
    +

    msr

    +
    +

    Newspaper

    +
    +

    new

    +
    +

    Nonmusical sound recording

    +
    +

    nsr

    +
    +

    Periodical

    +
    +

    per

    +
    +

    Printed cartographic material

    +
    +

    pcm

    +
    +

    Printed music

    +
    +

    pmu

    +
    +

    Printed or manuscript music

    +
    +

    mus

    +
    +

    Projected medium

    +
    +

    pgr

    +
    +

    Serial

    +
    +

    ser

    +
    +

    Sound recording

    +
    +

    rec

    +
    Streaming musicstm
    Streaming videostv
    +

    Three-dimensional object

    +
    +

    art

    +
    +

    Two-dimensional nonprojected graphic

    +
    +

    ngr

    +
    Video gamevgm
    +

    Videorecording

    +
    +

    vid

    +
    +

    Videotape

    +
    +

    vcr

    +
    Vinylvyl
    +

    Visual materials

    +
    +

    vis

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_category.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_category.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d89abc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_category.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a New Category + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a New Category

    +

    You can define categories at the system, library, or branch level. To add a category or subcategory for Children’s PAC searches:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Category construction. The Children’s PAC Category Configuration dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + dCategoryDx.gif 

    +

    Note:
    Existing categories and subcategories are represented by folder icons. Click the plus sign by a category to display its contents (subcategories and targets). To view specific characteristics of any category, subcategory, or target, select the item and click Modify.

    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) the folder to which you want to add a category.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The top-level Root category is always listed. The link for any category or target on the next level under Root is displayed directly on the Children’s PAC home page. If you do not select an existing folder, the category is added directly under the Root group.

    +
      +
    1. Click Add Category. The Add Category dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + dAddCategoryDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Display Name box, type a category name. The Display Name identifies the new category in the Category Configuration dialog box and in Children's PAC. If no category icon is defined, the Display Name is directly displayed as a link on the Children’s PAC home page. If an icon is defined for the category, the category is displayed as a link when the icon is selected. (See step 8.)
    2. +
    3. To insert a diacritic character in the display name, follow these steps:
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you frequently enter diacritics, you can add Input Method Editor (IME) keyboards and switch back and forth from the English keyboard to the international keyboards. See Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +
      +
    1. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert. The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Type any text in the Display Message box that should be displayed below the category Display Name and above the matrix or list of targets.
    2. +
    +

    + dDisplayMessage.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    You can insert diacritic characters in the display message. See step 6.

    +
      +
    1. Type the file name for the category icon graphic in the Icon File Name box. In the Children’s PAC interface, the patron can click the category icon to see subcategories or targets.
    2. +
    +

    Type only the file name. Polaris constructs the appropriate URL to the categories folder of the theme the patron has selected, or to the default theme if you do not allow theme selection.

    +

    Important:
    Be sure to place the category icon graphic file in the categories folder for each theme you offer. Although the actual image can be different, the filename must be the same in each theme. For example, if you specify a category icon graphic file pets.gif, the categories folder for each theme must contain a graphic file called pets.gif. Otherwise, if a theme is chosen that does not include the appropriate category icon graphic file, the interface displays a missing link. For more information about themes, see Managing Themes.

    +
      +
    1. Select or clear the Tooltip Preview check box. If the Tooltip Preview box is checked, targets for this category are displayed when the cursor hovers over the category link in the Children’s PAC interface. To display tooltip previews, you must also specify an icon file name for the category (see step 7).
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Use the Children’s PAC profile Number of tooltip entries displayed to set the maximum number of tooltip entries to display. You must also check the Preview Search Target box for each target you want to display in the tooltip. See Add a new search target to a category for more information about setting up targets.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Add Category dialog box. The Add Category dialog box closes. The new category is displayed in the Category Configuration dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the Category Configuration dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To display categories in the Children’s PAC interface, be sure the Children’s PAC profile Categories: Enable is set to Yes for the organization.

    +
      +
    1. Add targets to the new category. See Add a new search target to a category.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Copy a category - See Copy a category or target.
    • +
    • Delete a category or subcategory - Select the category, and click Delete.
    • +
    • Edit the settings for a category - Select the category, and click Modify.
    • +
    • Translate category names - If your library system has purchased other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, you can translate the category name or all category names. See Translate a category or target and Translate all categories and targets.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_search_target_to_a_category.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_search_target_to_a_category.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3754a98d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_a_new_search_target_to_a_category.htm @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a New Search Target to a Category + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a New Search Target to a Category

    +

    Within a category, a target may be displayed as a text link in a list of links, or as a graphic link in a matrix of target graphics. To set up a new search target of either display type, and add it to a category:

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Category construction on the Children’s PAC Profiles tabbed page for the organization. The Children’s PAC Category Configuration dialog box appears.
    2. +
    3. Select the category (folder) to which you want to add the new search target.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can add a target directly under the Root level. In this case, the target link displays directly on the home page.

    +

    Tip:
    You can view the structure of default targets to get ideas about how to set up targets. Select a default target and click Modify to view the target.

    +
      +
    1. Click Add Target. The Add Children’s PAC Search Target dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + dAddCatTargetDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. In the Display Name box, type a target name. The Display Name identifies the new target in the Category Configuration dialog box and on the Children's PAC home page.
    2. +
    3. To insert a diacritic character in the display name, follow these steps:
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you frequently enter diacritics, you can add Input Method Editor (IME) keyboards and switch back and forth from the English keyboard to the international keyboards. See Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +
      +
    1. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans00564.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert. The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. If you want this target to be part of a matrix of search targets for the category, do these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type the name of the target icon file in the Icon File Name box.
    2. +
    +

    The search target icon is displayed in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition as a link, which you can click to launch the search. All targets with icons in a specific category are grouped together in the matrix. If you do not specify an icon, the target is displayed as a simple text link in a list with any other text-link targets.

    +

    Important:
    Be sure to place the target icon graphic file in the categories folder for each theme you offer. Although the actual image can be different, the filename must be the same in each theme. For example, if you specify a target icon graphic file dogs.gif, the categories folder for each theme must contain a graphic file called dogs.gif. Otherwise, if a theme is chosen that does not include the appropriate target icon graphic file, the interface displays a missing link. For more information about themes, see Managing Themes.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to display text along with the target icon in the matrix, type the text in the Icon Display Name box. (If you specify an Icon Display Name, be sure you specify an Icon File Name.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can insert diacritic characters in the icon display name. See step 5.

    +
      +
    1. Select a target type:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Search - Launches a defined search in the Polaris database. This target type is identified by a database icon dTargetSearch.gif in the Category Configuration dialog box. If you select this target type, also do step 8.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you want all search targets in this category to be organized in a matrix, specify both an Icon Display Name and a corresponding Icon File Name for each search target. Otherwise, the search target is displayed as a text link.

    +
      +
    • Bibliography - Displays a search link. The link launches a search for titles you specify. This target type is identified by a book icon dTargetBib.gif in the Category Configuration dialog box. If you select this target type, also do step 9.
    • +
    • URL - Displays a text link that connects to a Web site. This target type is identified by a Web Site icon  in the Category Configuration dialog box. If you select this target type, also do step 10.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. If you selected Search as the target type, input the search command as a Common Query Language (CQL) command in the Search box.
    2. +
    +

    If the search string does not begin with FIND, the system automatically adds Find before the search is launched. For more information about using CQL search commands, see PAC CQL Commands & Access Points.

    +

    Exception: You cannot set up a phrase search with quotation marks in the Search box; instead, use the AND operator. For example, if you are setting up a subject search for the subject heading $aAnimals$xAdaptation$vJuvenile films, type
    su=animals AND su=adaptation AND su=juvenile films
    (not su= “Animals--Adaptation--Juvenile films”).

    +
      +
    1. If you selected Bibliography as the target type, add titles to the bibliography by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Add next to the Bibliography box.
    2. +
    +

    + dAddToBibTarget.gif 

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool is displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to locate and select the bibliographic record for the title you want to add to the bibliography.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When the search is launched in the Children’s PAC, any search filters you defined in the Children’s PAC profile Default search limits are applied. If a title you selected does not meet the search filter criteria, it is not displayed in the search results.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat these steps to add each title to the bibliography. You can add up to 120 titles.
    2. +
    +

    You can multi-select records from the Find Tool results.

    +
      +
    1. If you selected URL as the target type, input the complete URL for the Web page search target in the URL box.
    2. +
    +

    To allow live-link Web targets, set the Children’s PAC profile Web access: Enable to Yes. Libraries where children’s Internet access is a concern should use lockdown software or set this profile to No. In this case the URL target appears as text only, and does not allow Web access.

    +
      +
    1. Select or clear the Preview Search Target check box.
    2. +
    +

    If you are adding a target directly under the Root level, the Preview Search Target box is not available, since the interface does not display the preview target link if it is not associated with a category.

    +

    If the Preview Search Target box is checked, the target Display Name is displayed as a link under the category to which the target belongs.

    +

    Note:
    The preview search target does not automatically display once the category is selected. If you want the same target link to be displayed once the category is selected, set it up again under the appropriate category, leaving Preview Search Target unchecked. You can copy and edit a target. See Copy a category or target.

    +

    To display preview search targets, you must also specify an icon file name for the category (see Add a new category).

    +

    The illustration shows an example of preview search targets:

    +

    + dPreviewTargets.gif 

    +

    Note: +
    If the Preview Search Target box is checked for a target, the target icon is displayed with a small red flag in the Category Configuration dialog box. For example, the search target icon dTargetSearch00565.gif changes to dTargetSearchPrev.gif.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Add Children’s PAC Search Target dialog box. The Add Children’s PAC Search Target dialog box closes. The new target is displayed in the Category Configuration dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the Category Configuration dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To display the categories in the Children’s PAC interface, be sure the Children’s PAC profile Categories: Enable is set to Yes for the organization.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Copy a target, and place the copy in another category - See Copy a category or target.
    • +
    • Remove a target from a category - In the Category Configuration dialog box, select the target you want to remove from the category, and click Delete.
    • +
    • Edit the settings for a target - In the Category Configuration dialog box, select the target you want to edit, and click Modify.
    • +
    • Translate categories and targets - If your library system has purchased other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, you can translate the category and target names. See Translate a category or target, and Translate all categories and targets.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_text_to_children_Events_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_text_to_children_Events_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..300418a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Add_text_to_children_Events_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add text to the children’s Events page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add text to the children’s Events page

    +

    The Events page is displayed when a patron selects the Events link on the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages. Since Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition uses an Events page distinct from Polaris PowerPAC, you can focus the page on events specifically for children.

    +

    To add events or other text to the events page:

    +
      +
    1. On the Web server, open the file Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/children/events.aspx in any HTML or text editor.
    2. +
    3. Find the following section:
    4. +
    +

    SessionObject.GetLanguageString("CPACML_EVENTS_1000")%>:</div> +

    +

    <p>&nbsp;</p> +

    +

    <p>&nbsp;</p> +

    +

    <p>&nbsp;</p> +

    +

    Each segment <p>&nbsp;</p> creates a separate line on the Events page.

    +

    Note:
    If you need more than three lines, copy the segment <p>&nbsp;</p> and paste it after the last segment <p>&nbsp;</p>, pasting once for each additional line you require.

    +
      +
    1. For each line, insert your text between &nbsp; and </p>. You can format the text with basic HTML tags.
    2. +
    3. Save the file.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To display the Events link on the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages, set the Children’s PAC profile Navigation: Events to Yes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Administering_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Administering_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3e0df7a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Administering_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Administering PowerPAC Children’s Edition + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Administering PowerPAC Children’s Edition

    +

    Through Polaris Administration settings, you can set up and customize the following kinds of functions in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition:

    +
      +
    • Themes (general appearance of the pages)
    • +
    • Dashboards, including library-defined lists
    • +
    • Pre-defined search limits, such as target audience=juvenile and designated collections (for example, children’s periodicals)
    • +
    • Search categories
    • +
    • Item availability information
    • +
    • Feature availability, such as online Help and Events page
    • +
    +

    An organization’s settings control the features and functions the patron sees when connected to that organization. You can set most Children’s PAC profiles at the system, library, and branch levels. If you are making settings unique to an organization, the Children’s PAC URL must include the organization ID.

    +

    Example:
    http://library/Polaris/children/default.aspx?SessionOrgID=33

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Assign_themes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Assign_themes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09eb0015 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Assign_themes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Assign themes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Assign themes

    +

    When you assign themes, you make them available as choices from the Children’s PAC. You can assign the themes that are provided with Polaris, or your own custom themes (see Construct a theme). To assign themes at the system, library, or branch level:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Theme assignment. The Theme Assignment dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To make a theme available for selection in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, select the theme in the Unassigned Themes list, and click Assign. The theme is added to the Assigned Themes list.
    2. +
    3. To designate an assigned theme as the default theme, select the theme in the Assigned Themes list, and click Assign Default Theme.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the dialog box. The dialog box closes, and your settings are automatically saved.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    To display the theme options, set the Children’s PAC profiles Select theme: Enable and Dashboards: Enable to Yes for the organization.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Construct_a_theme.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Construct_a_theme.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d490d2f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Construct_a_theme.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Construct a Theme + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Construct a Theme

    +

    To construct a theme:

    +
      +
    1. Set up a unique folder for the theme on the Web server, in Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/language folder.
    2. +
    3. Create the subfolders categories and formats in the new theme folder (or copy them from an existing theme folder).
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You may want to copy the style sheet (.css) file from a default theme to your own theme folder and then edit the file as you wish, rather than constructing a style sheet from scratch.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder at the system level, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Theme Construction.The Theme Construction dialog box is displayed.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    The Theme Construction dialog box lists the default themes that are included with Polaris (Antique, Ocean, and Treasure), and any custom themes that have already been defined. You cannot edit the default themes.

    +

    Tip:
    To use an existing theme as the basis of a new theme, select the theme and click Copy. Then select the copy and click Edit.

    +
      +
    1. Click Add. The Add Theme dialog box is displayed.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the theme in the Display Name box. The display name identifies the theme in Polaris Administration profiles and on the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition interface.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Cursor Type field is not functional.

    +
      +
    1. In the appropriate File Name boxes, type the filenames for the page graphic elements and for the stylesheet, as listed in the Description column.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The system constructs the appropriate URL. Type only the filename. For example, for the page background image, you might type the filename background.gif. For the style sheet, you might type the filename stylesheet.css.

    +
      +
    1. Type the name of the theme folder you created in step 1 in the Default Image Path box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Type only the folder name. The system constructs the appropriate URL for the theme files to Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/language folder/your folder on the server, based on the theme folder you specify. All the files for the theme must be located in the same folder.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The dialog box closes, and your settings are automatically saved.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Making themes available - See Assign themes for information about making the new theme available for selection in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Copy_a_category_or_target.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Copy_a_category_or_target.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1a77c33 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Copy_a_category_or_target.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Copy a category or target + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a category or target

    +

    You can copy categories and targets you have already defined, and place the copies in any categories you choose. When you copy a category, you also copy the contents (subcategories and targets) of the category. To copy a category or target into another category:

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Category construction on the Children’s PAC Profiles tabbed page for the organization. The Children’s PAC Category Configuration dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Click the plus sign by any category folder to display the contents of the folder.

    +
      +
    1. Select the category or target you want to copy.
    2. +
    3. Click Copy.
    4. +
    5. Select the category folder into which you want to place the copy of the category or target.
    6. +
    7. Click Paste. The copied category or target is displayed in the selected folder.
    8. +
    9. Click OK to save your settings.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customize_children_item_availability_display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customize_children_item_availability_display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94748b49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customize_children_item_availability_display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customize the Children’s PAC item availability display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customize the Children’s PAC item availability display

    +

    To customize the item availability display in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. To display the item’s owning branch, double-click Item Availability: Display branch location, and select Yes.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Single-branch libraries may want to set this profile to No to save space in the availability display.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Item Availability: Display local and system levels to set which items are shown in the availability display. Select Yes or No:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Yes - If the logged-on branch is the system, information about items that are designated to display in PAC and owned throughout the system is displayed. If the logged-on branch is a local branch, only items held by that branch are displayed. If none are owned by the local branch, the system-level items are displayed.
    • +
    • No - If the logged-on branch is the system, information about items owned throughout the system is displayed. If the logged-on branch is a local branch, only the local items are displayed. If none are owned by the local branch, no items are displayed.
    • +
    +

    The Item Availability Display Order table determines which branches’ items should be displayed as “system” and which should be displayed as “local.” See Set up the local/system item availability display.

    +
      +
    1. To display the items’ shelf locations, double-click Item Availability: Display shelf location, and select Yes.
    2. +
    3. To display the items’ circulation status, double-click Item Availability: Display status, and select Yes.
    4. +
    5. If you chose to display item status, specify the status text:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Double-click Item availability text: Available, and type the text that indicates an item is available. The default is In Library.
    • +
    • Double-click Item availability text: Not available, and type the text that indicates an item is not available. The default is Checked Out.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To display item-level call numbers, double-click Item Availability: Display call number, and select Yes.
    2. +
    3. To display the items’ collection information, double-click Item Availability: Display collection, and select Yes. If the library does not use collections, you may want to set this profile to No to save space in the availability display.
    4. +
    5. To display the items’ material types, double-click Item Availability: Display type, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. To make public notes from the item record available, double-click Item Availability: Display notes, and select Yes. This setting displays a note icon for items whose records include public notes. Users can click the icon to read the note.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customizing_Children_Results_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customizing_Children_Results_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20264175 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Customizing_Children_Results_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customizing the Children’s Results Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing the Children’s Results Display

    +

    When a patron selects a title or the More link for a title in the search results, Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition displays detailed information about the title and the items associated with it.

    +

    + FullView.gif 

    +

    Note: +
    The format/type of material icons in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition are the same as those used in Polaris PowerPAC. For a list, see Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).

    +

    Using Children’s PAC profiles, you can specify what information displays about the associated items, including branch location, collection, shelf location, call number, status, and material type. You can set these profiles at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Web Access from Children’s PAC

    +

    If the title information includes a Web link, you can specify whether children can access the associated Web site. Web links are indicated by the Web Site icon next to a title, and by the URL link text in the detailed information for the title. To allow Web access, set the Children’s PAC profile Web access: Enable to Yes at the system, library, or branch level. When the patron clicks the Web Site icon, the Web site opens in a new browser window.

    +

    Important:
    Libraries concerned about children’s Internet access should use lockdown software or set the profile Web access: Enable to No. If this profile is set to No, the globe icon and URL links are not “live.”

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Filter_children_searches.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Filter_children_searches.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e43070cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Filter_children_searches.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Filter children’s searches + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Filter children’s searches

    +

    To set filters on searches from Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and to allow subject searches scoped by fiction or non-fiction:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Default search limits. The Children’s PAC Default Search Limit dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To filter searches with a free-text filter, type the Common Query Language command in the Default free text search limit box, beginning with the Boolean operator and.
    2. +
    +

    The system constructs the full search command when the user launches a search. The first part of the command (before and) is determined by the user’s selection in the interface. Your filter determines the second part. The default filter is AND TA=j, which limits the results to titles with a juvenile target audience.

    +

    Note:
    Structure multi-part filters in either of these two ways:
    AND TA=j OR TA=a OR TA=b
    AND TA={list}j, a, b {/list}
    Not valid:
    AND TA= j, a, b

    +
      +
    1. To limit search results to titles in certain collections, select the collections in the Collections list.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you have collections set up for children’s periodicals, this is a good way to include the periodicals in Children’s PAC search results, since serials records do not include target audience information. The results include titles from the collection OR the specified target audience filter.

    +

    Combining free-text and collections filters works best if you select only the collections intended for children. If all collections are selected, and you specify a free-text filter, the search applies the free-text filter but ignores the collections. If no free-text filter is specified, all the collections are searched, but records that do not specify a collection are ignored.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Children_Dashboards.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Children_Dashboards.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50a04186 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Children_Dashboards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Children’s Dashboards + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Children’s Dashboards

    +

    Web parts on the dashboard can provide links to pre-defined searches or Web sites or deliver messages or instructions. They are displayed in the dashboard at the side of the pages in Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. Different Web parts can be displayed on different pages. You set up Web parts at the system level for use by any or all branches.

    +

    + dChildrensDashboard.gif 

    +

    Note:
    The Select a Theme Web part is displayed on all pages when the Children’s PAC profiles Select theme: Enable and Dashboards: Enable are set to Yes.

    +

    Separate Polaris Administration profiles control Web parts for Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, but the process for setting up Web parts is the same for both PACs (see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards):

    + +

    Web parts set up for Polaris PowerPAC are available to be assigned to Children's PAC pages, and Web parts set up for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition are available to be assigned to Polaris PowerPAC pages. However, the New Titles Web part provided by Polaris may not be useful for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, since the New Titles Web part elements are links that launch searches for recent additions to your catalog, regardless of the titles’ target audience.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Search_Categories.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Search_Categories.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dda1f7bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Search_Categories.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Search Categories + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Search Categories

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition offers targets (predefined searches or Web links), organized in categories and subcategories. Children can use categories to find information without typing a search string. When the Children’s PAC profile Categories: Enable is set to Yes, the default page of the Children’s PAC displays the defined search categories.

    +

    + dChildPacCategor.gif 

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition includes a set of default categories and targets that you can use as they are, or edit to suit your purposes. You can also set up your own categories at the system, library, and branch levels. Using the Children’s PAC profile Category construction, you define the categories and subcategories, and the targets to include in the categories and subcategories. You can offer the following types of search targets:

    +
      +
    • Search - Launches a defined search in the Polaris database, and displays the results.
    • +
    • Bibliography - Launches a search for titles you specified when you set up the target.
    • +
    • URL - Connects to a Web site, which opens in a new browser window. The Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition session is maintained.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To allow live-link Web targets, set the Children’s PAC profile Web access: Enable to Yes. If this profile is set to No, the URL targets appear as text only.

    +

    A search target or subcategory can belong to as many categories as you wish. You can copy and paste search targets and categories to organize them in any way that suits the needs of your users. If you have Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition multilingual version, you can translate category and target names so that they are displayed in the language the user has selected.

    +

    You can display a category or subcategory as a text link, an image link, or both. When a category link is selected, all the subcategory and target links are displayed. If icons are defined for search targets, these are organized in a matrix of links. If no icons are defined, the search targets are also displayed as a list of text links.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Themes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Themes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56519dda --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Managing_Themes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Themes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Themes

    +

    Themes determine the page appearance (background, icons, and other page elements) of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. When you enable themes, children can choose a theme from the options you specify. You can offer some or all the themes that are shipped with Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and you can develop your own themes.

    +

    + Themes.gif 

    +

    Themes are developed at the system level, but you can assign them at the system, library, or branch level, so that each branch can control which (if any) theme options are available. The default theme—the theme that is displayed when users first connect to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition—can also be set at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    Themes are stored in folders that contain sets of image files and a style sheet (.css) file that controls aspects of general page appearance, such as fonts, links, and colors. Each theme has a unique folder on the Web server (Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/<language folder>). For example, files for the default Treasure theme (English) are located in the folder Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/1033/treasure. If you are constructing your own theme, set up a unique folder for your files on the Web server, in Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/<language folder>.

    +

    Note:
    Each language is represented by a number. English is represented by 1033, so theme folders for the English version are stored in Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/1033. If you have Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition Multilingual Version, and you want to offer the same theme in other language versions, place the theme folder in all the appropriate language folders.

    +

    Theme folders also contain the image files specified for category and format icons, since these images can change when a different theme is chosen. Categories contain predefined targets, such as searches or Web site URLs. For more information about setting up categories, see Managing Search Categories. Format icons identify the type of material of a title listed in search results, such as a book or a musical sound recording.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10b9c3e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition is the public access Web interface designed specifically for children’s use. Children can connect to the library’s catalog and services from within the library, or from a remote location such as home or school.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition is available by specific contract to your library. If your Polaris installation does not include Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, the features described in this section are not available.

    +

    Important:
    When you change Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition settings, you may need to update page caches to see the effects of your changes. See Updating Page Caches.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition are based on ASP.NET programming code. All .aspx page files are editable, and other advanced customizations are available. For more information, see PAC Customization..

    +

    Note: +
    Polaris PowerPAC version 5.5 and later features responsive web design that adapts to the user's device (desktop computer, tablet, or smart phone). Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition does not use responsive design, and is best used from a desktop computer or tablet.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_children_search_buttons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_children_search_buttons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e958eba2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_children_search_buttons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Children’s Search Buttons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Children’s Search Buttons

    +

    To set which search buttons are available for text searches in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the following profiles and set them to Yes or No:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Search button visibility: Anywhere button - Launches keyword search in all fields
    • +
    • Search button visibility: Authors button - Launches keyword search for author
    • +
    • Search button visibility: Fiction button - Launches search term subject search scoped to fiction
    • +
    • Search button visibility: Non-Fiction button - Launches search term subject search scoped to non-fiction
    • +
    • Search button visibility: Series button - Launches keyword search for series name
    • +
    • Search button visibility: Subject button - Launches keyword search for subject
    • +
    • Search button visibility: Title button - Launches keyword search for title
    • +
    +

    By default, each is set to Yes (search button is displayed).

    +

    If all seven profiles are set to No, the Look for text field remains displayed although no buttons appear. However, the user can type text in the field and press ENTER. A keyword search in all fields (Anywhere) is launched. This feature is available regardless of what buttons are displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Did You Mean - When you enable “did you mean” search term checking, the search results page includes a suggested alternate search term if one can be identified. You can click the alternate term to launch a search on that term. The Did You Mean function applies to quick, keyword, phrase, and exact phrase searches in Polaris PowerPAC, and to searches typed in the Look for bar in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition when there are no results. See Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac286b75 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC_Children_Ed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition

    +

    To set basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition:

    +
      +
    1. Set up the Polaris PowerPAC Web server in Polaris Administration. See Setting Up Server Records.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. To allow remote connections to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, double-click Remote user: Enable, and select Yes. If you use Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition only in the library, and you do not offer remote access, set this profile to No.
    6. +
    7. To allow patrons to select a theme for the Children's PAC interface, double-click Select theme: Enable, and select Yes.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    This setting displays theme options in the dashboard area of the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages. If you want to display theme options, you must also set Dashboards: Enable to Yes. See step 5.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition includes several default themes, and you can define your own. For more information, see Managing Themes.

    +
      +
    1. To display the dashboard on Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages, double-click Dashboards: Enable, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition includes automated Web parts for dashboards, and you can define your own. For more information, see Managing Children’s Dashboards.

    +
      +
    1. To allow users to view an events page, double-click Navigation: Events, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    This setting displays the Events link in the upper right portion of the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages. When the user selects the link, the Events page is displayed. For information about editing this page, see Add text to the children’s Events page.

    +
      +
    1. To allow users to get quick help with searches, double-click Navigation: Help, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    This setting displays the Help bookworm link in the upper right portion of the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition uses Did You Mean search suggestions. See Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking.

    +
      +
    1. To display a link to Polaris PowerPAC on Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages, double-click Navigation: PowerPAC, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    This setting displays the Go to Polaris link at the bottom left corner of the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages. If the user selects this link on the home page, the Polaris PowerPAC home page is displayed. If the user selects this link on the search results page, the same search is launched in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Themes - You can offer default appearance themes for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages, or create your own. See Managing Themes.
    • +
    • Searching - You can set search filters to focus search results for children. See Setting Children’s Search Limits. In addition, categories offer predefined searches or links. See Managing Search Categories.
    • +
    • Search performance - Searches with large results sets may decrease performance if your server capacity is limited. To improve performance, you can adjust the maximum number of records to return. The Children’s PAC profile Result set: Maximum number of records to return, available at the system, library, and branch levels, controls this limit.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you lower the maximum number of records to return, relevancy ranking may be less effective.

    +
      +
    • Results Display - See Customizing the Children’s Results Display.
    • +
    • Requests - You set requests options (enable requests, specify whether item-level requests are offered, and select a default pickup branch) for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition with the Request parameter Hold options. If the library charges fees for hold requests, patrons cannot request holds from Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.
    • +
    • Editing text on Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages - You can edit most of the text on Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages, and preserve your changes from being overwritten if the application is updated and reinstalled. See Customizing Language Strings.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Setting_Children_Search_Limits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Setting_Children_Search_Limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..257cdcee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Setting_Children_Search_Limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Children’s Search Limits + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Children’s Search Limits

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, users can search for a title in the library catalog by typing a word or words and selecting a field to search (Anywhere, Subjects, Titles, Authors, or Series). You control which of these choices are available. In addition, you can display Fiction and Non-Fiction buttons that launch subject searches for the search text, scoped to fiction or non-fiction. See Set children’s search buttons.

    +

    + SearchString.gif 

    +

    You can also filter all searches to make the results more useful for children by setting a free-text filter (expressed as a Common Query Language search term), by specifying which collections should be searched, or by using a combination of the two strategies. See Filter children’s searches.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition also offers targets (predefined searches or Web links), organized in categories and subcategories. Children can use categories to find information without typing a search string. See Managing Search Categories.

    +

    Important:
    In addition to the filtering and scoping options you set, Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition is designed to display item availability information only if there are items available at the local branch. You can set it so that item availability information is displayed for items at other branches if there are no items assigned to the local branch. See Customize the children’s item availability display.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_a_category_or_target.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_a_category_or_target.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97fceec7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_a_category_or_target.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Translate a category or target + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Translate a category or target

    +

    If your library system has other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, you can translate the names of categories and targets. To translate categories or targets one at a time:

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Category construction on the Children’s PAC Profiles tabbed page for the organization. The Children’s PAC Category Configuration dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Click the plus sign by any category folder to display the contents of the folder.

    +
      +
    1. Select the category or target you want to translate.
    2. +
    3. Click Modify. If you selected a category, the Edit Category dialog box opens. If you selected a target, the Edit Children’s PAC Search Target dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + dEditTargetDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Translate by the name you want to translate.
    2. +
    +

    If you selected a category, you can translate the category name and the display message, if any (see Add a new category). If you selected a target, you can translate the display name and the icon display name, if any (see Add a new search target to a category).

    +

    The Language Strings dialog box opens.

    +

    + dLanguageStringsDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the Choose Language box. The options are determined by the language versions of Polaris PowerPac Children’s Edition purchased by your library system.
    2. +
    3. Click the box in the language column next to the target or category name you want to translate, and type the translated word in the box.
    4. +
    5. To insert a diacritic character, follow these steps:
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you frequently enter diacritics, you can add Input Method Editor (IME) keyboards and switch back and forth from the English keyboard to the international keyboards. See Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +
      +
    1. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans00566.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert. The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Language Strings dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the Edit dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Click OK on the Children’s PAC Category Configuration dialog box.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Translate all categories and targets +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_all_categories_and_targets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_all_categories_and_targets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..45345fec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchild/Translate_all_categories_and_targets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Translate all categories and targets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Translate all categories and targets

    +

    If your library system has purchased other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, you can translate all the names of categories and targets to a language of your choice. To view and translate categories and targets:

    +

    Note:
    You must set the translations at the system level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and select the Children’s PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Multiple language strings. The Language Strings dialog box lists all the category names, category display messages, target display names, and icon display names defined for your Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.
    4. +
    +

    + CPACMultipleLangStrings.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the Choose Language box. The options are determined by the language versions of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition purchased by your library system.
    2. +
    3. Click the box in the language column next to each name you want to translate, and type the translated word in the box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also edit the English names. Click the English word you want to edit, and type a new word in the space.

    +
      +
    1. To insert a diacritic character, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you frequently enter diacritics, you can add Input Method Editor (IME) keyboards and switch back and forth from the English keyboard to the international keyboards. See Enter diacritics/characters using an IME keyboard.

    +
      +
    1. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans00567.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert. The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Language Strings dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchildProfs/Childrens_PAC_Profiles_Ref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchildProfs/Childrens_PAC_Profiles_Ref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0bc78891 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOchildProfs/Childrens_PAC_Profiles_Ref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,362 @@ + + + + + + + + Children’s PAC Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Children’s PAC Profiles Reference

    +

    These profiles are available on the Profiles, Children’s PAC tabbed page on the Administration Explorer, at the listed organizational levels.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Profile

    +
    +

    Org Levels

    +
    +

    Description

    +
    +

    Default Setting

    +
    Allow hold requests if charging for holdsSystem, Library, Branch +

    Determines whether hold requests are allowed from Children’s PAC if the system charges for holds. If set to Yes, hold requests are allowed and a message concerning the charge is displayed when the request is placed. The patron can continue or cancel the request.

    +
    No (hold requests cannot be placed from Children’s PAC if the system charges for hold requests)
    Categories: EnableSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether library-defined categories are available for searching. See Managing Search Categories. +

    Yes

    +

    Requirement: If yes, define categories with the profile Category construction

    +
    Category constructionSystem, Library, BranchDisplays the Category Construction dialog box. Set up subject categories, define search targets within the categories, and edit existing categories and targets. See Managing Search Categories. +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition includes a set of default categories.

    +

    Requirement: Set Categories: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles)

    +
    Dashboards: EnableSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether library-defined elements and theme choices are displayed in lists on the left portion (“dashboard”) of the Children’s PAC interface. See Managing Children’s Dashboards, and Managing Themes.Yes
    Dashboards: Webpage/web part assignmentSystem, Library, BranchDisplays the Web Page - Web Part Configuration dialog box. Specify which Web parts to display in the dashboard on specific Web pages for the Children’s PAC at each branch. See Managing Children’s Dashboards. +

    Requirements:

    +

    Define Web parts at the system level, using the profile Dashboards: Web part construction (Children’s PAC profiles).

    +

    Set Dashboards: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles) to display dashboards in the Children’s PAC.

    +
    Dashboards: Web part constructionSystemDisplays the Web Part Editor dialog box. Create custom Web parts (title searches, URLs, free text, and polls), and limit the number of items on automated Web parts. See Managing Children’s Dashboards. +

    Requirements:

    +

    Assign the Web parts to specific Children’s PAC pages using the profile Dashboards: Web page / web part assignment (Children’s PAC profiles).

    +

    Set Dashboards: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles) to display dashboards in the Children’s PAC.

    +
    Default search limitsSystem, Library, BranchDisplays the Children’s PAC Default Search Limit dialog box. Specify a search filter, expressed as a Common Query Language search term, in the free text search limit box. In addition, you can specify which collections defined in the system should be included in Children’s PAC search results. See Setting Children’s Search Limits.AND TA=j (limits results to records where the target audience is juvenile); no collections selected
    Item availability text: AvailableSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies the text that indicates an item is available. +

    In Library

    +

    Requirement: Set Item Availability: Display status to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles)

    +
    Item availability text: Not availableSystem, Library, BranchSpecifies the text that indicates an item is not available. +

    Checked Out

    +

    Requirement: Set Item Availability: Display status to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles)

    +
    Item availability: Display branch locationSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the item’s assigned branch is displayed.Yes
    Item availability: Display call numberSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether to show the call number from the item record in the Availability view.Yes
    Item availability: Display collectionsSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the collection information from the item record is displayed.Yes
    Item availability: Display local and system levelsSystem, Library, BranchDetermines which items are included in search results availability information. See Customize the children’s item availability display. +

    Yes. If the logged-on branch is the system, information about items that are designated to display in PAC and owned throughout the system is displayed. If the logged-on branch is a local branch, only items held by that branch are displayed. If none are owned by the local branch, the system-level items are displayed.

    +

    If set to No, if the logged-on branch is the system, information about items owned throughout the system is displayed. If the logged-on branch is a local branch, only the local items are displayed. If none are owned by the local branch, no items are displayed.

    +
    Item availability: Display notesSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether a note icon is displayed for items that include public notes. Patrons can click the icon to read the note.Yes
    Item availability: Display shelf locationSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the item’s shelf location is displayed. +

    Yes

    +
    Item availability: Display statusSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the circulation status of an item is displayed in the item information.Yes
    Item availability: Display typeSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the material type (information about physical format from the item record) is displayed in the item information.Yes
    Multiple language stringsSystemDisplays a dialog box that allows you to specify a language and translate all search categories and targets from English to the language of your choice. Other languages are available in this dialog box only if your library system has purchased other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. You can also edit the English names. See Translate all categories and targets.No translations (lists English categories and targets only)
    Navigation: EventsSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the Children’s PAC interface includes the Events button, which is used to access a library-maintained Events page. See Add text to the children’s Events page.Yes
    Navigation: HelpSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether the Children’s PAC interface includes the Help button, which is used to access online Help for the Children’s PAC.Yes
    Navigation: PowerPACSystem, Library, BranchDetermines whether a link to Polaris PowerPAC is displayed in the Children’s PAC interface.Yes
    Number of tooltip entries displayedSystem, Library, BranchFor categories, defines the number of targets that display in a tooltip when the cursor hovers over the category link. See Managing Search Categories. +

    5

    +

    Requirements:

    +

    Use the profile Category construction (Children’s PAC profiles) to set up search categories.

    +

    Set the profile Categories: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles) to display the defined search categories in the Children’s PAC.

    +
    Remote user: EnableSystem, Library, BranchAllows access to the Children’s PAC from workstations outside the library. +

    Yes. Remote users can access the Children's PAC interface.

    +

    If set to No, Children’s PAC access is available only from workstations defined in the In-House IP Addresses database table.

    +
    Results set: Maximum number of records to returnSystem, Library, BranchSets the maximum number of records that can be returned in a results set. If you experience decreased performance for searches with large results due to limited server capacity, you can lower the maximum number of records to return. However, relevancy ranking may be less effective at lower maximum values.1,000 (maximum = 10,000)
    Results set: Do not sort if it contains more than this many recordsSystem, Library, BranchSets the maximum number of records that a record set can contain and still be sorted. If you experience decreased performance for searches with large results due to limited server capacity, you can lower the maximum number of records that can be sorted.1,000 (maximum)
    Search button visibility: Anywhere buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword search in all fields. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Search button visibility: Authors buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword search for author. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Search button visibility: Fiction buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword subject search scoped to fiction. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Search button visibility: Non-Fiction buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword subject search scoped to non-fiction. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Search button visibility: Series buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword search for series name. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Search button visibility: Subjects buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword search for subject. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Search button visibility: Titles buttonSystem, Library, BranchDisplays a search button that launches a keyword search for title. See Set children’s search buttons.Yes
    Select theme: EnableSystem, Library, BranchAllows users of Children’s PAC to select an interface theme from choices you specify. See Managing Themes. +

    Yes

    +

    Requirements:

    +

    Specify which themes are available as choices with the profile Theme assignment (Children’s PAC profiles).

    +

    Set Dashboards: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles), because the theme options are displayed in the dashboard.

    +
    Theme assignmentSystem, Library, BranchDisplays the Theme Assignment dialog box, where you can specify which library-defined or system-provided interface themes are available as choices from the Children’s PAC. You can also set a default theme here. See Managing Themes for more information. +

    Requirements:

    +

    Set up and edit themes at the system level, with the Children’s PAC profile Theme construction (Children’s PAC profiles).

    +

    Set the profile Select theme: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles) to display the assigned themes in the Children’s PAC

    +

    Set Dashboards: Enable to Yes (Children’s PAC profiles) for the organization, because the theme options are displayed in the dashboard.

    +
    Theme constructionSystemDisplays the Theme Construction dialog box. Set up and edit themes for the Children’s PAC interface. See Managing Themes for more informationRequirement: Specify which themes are available to specific organizations using the Children’s PAC profile Theme assignment.
    Web access: EnableSystem, Library, BranchAllows live Web links in Children’s PAC search results. See Customizing the Children’s Results Display. +

    No - Web links are text-only, and do not allow Internet access.

    +

    If set to Yes, users can click the Web Site icon or a web link to view the site.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/E-Source_Reports.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/E-Source_Reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb2a154b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/E-Source_Reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + E-Source Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Source Reports

    +

    The E-Source report lists the subscription databases you have set up for searching from the PAC e-sources page, organized by branch. Information about each e-source includes the name, description, connection URL, message, categories/subcategories, restriction data, and connection data. You can filter the report by organization. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select PAC in the Polaris Reports dialog box. For information on generating reports, see Using Polaris Standard Reports.

    +

    For the purposes of custom reports, you can choose to log the transaction when a patron accesses an e-source target:

    +
      +
    • +

      Transaction - E-Source Access

      +
    • +
    • +

      Transaction code - 2201

      +
    • +
    • +

      Transaction subtypes +

      +
        +
      • +

        239 - Remote User flag

        +
      • +
      • +

        240 - Selected Language ID

        +
      • +
      • +

        241 - Name of e-source selected to view

        +
      • +
      • +

        7 - Patron Code (if patron logged on)

        +
      • +
      • +

        123 - Patron Assigned Branch (if patron logged on)

        +
      • +
      • +

        33 - Patron Statistical Code (if patron logged on)

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    For information about logging transactions, see Collecting Transaction Statistics.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetGetTransfer .htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetGetTransfer .htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7432e1c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetGetTransfer .htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Example - E-Source Target Get Transfer Type + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Example - E-Source Target Get Transfer Type

    +

    This procedure lists how to enter a URL and view source code to set up connection authentication to Gale as an example of get transfer type. See Set up an e-source target for a detailed procedure on setting up e-sources.

    +

    Note:
    Database suppliers may require different authentication routines for different databases. Therefore, the authentication setup for one Gale database may differ from the setup for another Gale database. The following procedure is an example only. You must contact your vendor to get your library-specific connection information.

    +
      +
    1. On the PowerPAC profiles tab for the organization, double-click Categorization of ESource targets.
    2. +
    3. Click Add Target on the ESource Categorization dialog box to display the Add ESource Target dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the library has an existing subscription with the supplier that uses IP authentication, the logon page is automatically bypassed. You can access the logon page by working from an IP outside the subscribed range.

    +
      +
    1. Open a Web browser, and access the online logon form for Gale at http://gale.cengage.com.
    2. +
    +

    + Gale1.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Copy the URL for the logon form that now displays in the browser address bar and paste it into the URL field on the Add ESource Target dialog box. (Keep the browser window open.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    As a general rule, if the URL contains a question mark, copy all the text before the question mark. Do not copy the question mark or any text following it.

    +
      +
    1. Return to the browser menu bar, and select Page, View Source. The HTML source code for the log-in page is displayed in your default text editor.
    2. +
    3. Determine the transfer method by following these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Edit, Find (or press CTRL+F) to display a Find dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Search for the text string form or method.
    4. +
    +

    + Gale2.gif 

    +

    The transfer method is get.

    +
      +
    1. On the Add E-Source Target dialog box, set the Transfer Type to Get.
    2. +
    3. On the source code window, determine the logon parameters by following these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Edit, Find (or press CTRL+F) to display a Find dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Search for the text string input. Ignore input type= “hidden” entries. Look for associated name= statements.
    4. +
    +

    + Gale3.gif 

    +

    For the purposes of this example, the Gale log-in form requires two parameters. Each parameter has a name (userName and password) that you enter in the Name box on the Connection Data tabbed page of the Add ESource Target dialog box (see step 9). Each parameter also requires a value specific to your organization.

    +

    Important:
    Vendors with multiple databases usually require a separate set of parameters for each database. Typically, two parameters in the set are your library’s user name and password; a third parameter is named db and the value is the code for the specific database.

    +
      +
    1. On the Connection Data tabbed page of the Add ESource Target dialog box, set the first Gale parameter by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type userName in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type your organization’s subscriber name (as determined by your organization and Gale) in the Value box.
    4. +
    5. Click Add.
    6. +
    +

    The first parameter is listed in the Parameter box.

    +
      +
    1. Set the second Gale parameter by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type password in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type your organization’s password (as determined by your organization and Gale) in the Value box.
    4. +
    5. Click Add.
    6. +
    +

    The second parameter is listed in the Parameter box.

    +
      +
    1. Close the logon source code window, and exit from the browser.
    2. +
    3. On the Add ESource Target dialog box, specify a description and a message, if you wish, and set any access restrictions. See Set up an e-source target.
    4. +
    5. Close the Add ESource Target dialog box, and save your changes. See Set up an e-source target.
    6. +
     
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetPostTransfer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetPostTransfer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67e5aae2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Example_ESourceTargetPostTransfer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + + Example - E-Source Target Post Transfer Type + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Example - E-Source Target Post Transfer Type

    +

    This procedure lists how to enter a URL and view source code to set up connection authentication to EBSCOhost as an example of post transfer type. See Set up an e-source target for a detailed procedure on setting up e-sources.

    +
      +
    1. On the PowerPAC profiles tab for the organization, double-click Categorization of ESource targets.
    2. +
    3. Click Add Target on the ESource Categorization dialog box to display the Add ESource Target dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    If the library has an existing subscription with the supplier that uses IP authentication, the logon page is automatically bypassed. You can access the logon page by working from an IP outside the subscribed range.

    +
      +
    1. Open a Web browser, and access the online log-in form for the vendor. The example shows EBSCO at http://search.ebscohost.com.
    2. +
    +

    + Ebsco1.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Copy the URL in the browser address bar, and paste it into the URL field on the Add ESource Target dialog box. (Keep the browser window open.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    As a general rule, if the URL contains a question mark, copy all the text before the question mark. Do not copy the question mark or any text following it.

    +

    + EbscoAdd1.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Return to the browser menu bar, and select Page, View Source. The HTML source code for the logon page is displayed in your default text editor.
    2. +
    3. Determine the transfer method by following these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Edit, Find (or press CTRL+F) to display a Find dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Search for the text string form or method.
    4. +
    +

    + Ebsco2.gif 

    +

    The transfer method in this example is post.

    +
      +
    1. On the Add ESource Target dialog box, set the Transfer Type to Post.
    2. +
    3. On the source code window, determine the logon parameters by following these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select Edit, Find (or press CTRL+F) to display a Find dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Search for the text string input. Ignore input type= “hidden” entries. Look for associated name= statements.
    4. +
    +

    + Ebsco3.gif 

    +

    For the purposes of this example, the EBSCOhost logon form requires two parameters. Each parameter has a name (user and password) that you enter in the Name box on the Connection Data tabbed page of the Add ESource Target dialog box (see step 9). Each parameter also requires a value specific to your organization.

    +

    Important:
    Vendors with multiple databases usually require a separate set of parameters for each database. Typically, two parameters in the set are your library’s user name and password; a third parameter is named db and the value is the code for the specific database.

    +
      +
    1. On the Connection Data tabbed page of the Add ESource Target dialog box, set the first EBSCOhost parameter by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type user in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type your organization’s subscriber name (as determined by your organization and EBSCO) in the Value box.
    4. +
    5. Click Add.
    6. +
    +

    The first parameter is listed in the Parameter box.

    +
      +
    1. Set the second EBSCOhost parameter by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Type password in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Type your organization’s password (as determined by your organization and EBSCO) in the Value box.
    4. +
    5. Click Add.
    6. +
    +

    The second parameter is listed in the Parameter box.

    +

    + EbscoAdd2.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Close the logon source code window, and exit from the browser.
    2. +
    3. On the Add ESource Target dialog box, specify a description and a message, if you wish, and set any access restrictions. See Set up an e-source target.
    4. +
    5. Close the Add ESource Target dialog box, and save your changes. See Set up an e-source target.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Managing_E-Sources.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Managing_E-Sources.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e787524 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Managing_E-Sources.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing E-Sources + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing E-Sources

    +

    E-sources are subscription databases presented as search links on an e-sources page in Polaris PowerPAC. The library may limit access to specific e-sources, often to comply with the terms of the database subscription.

    +

    Unlike federated databases, which can be searched simultaneously along with the local catalog, e-source databases are searched separately. When the patron selects an e-source target, the patron uses the provider’s interface for searching (not the PowerPAC interface). When the e-source session is finished, the Polaris PowerPAC session is resumed.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also offer remote databases that can be searched simultaneously in PowerPAC. See Managing Federated Search Targets .

    +

    To set up e-source targets, you need to get the appropriate connection information from the e-source provider and enter it in the PowerPAC profile, Categorization of e-source targets.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Organizing_E-Source_Targets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Organizing_E-Source_Targets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b8c69f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Organizing_E-Source_Targets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Organizing E-Source Targets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Organizing E-Source Targets

    +

    By default, all e-source targets are displayed as a single (potentially long) list on the PAC e-Source page. To make it easier for patrons to find e-source targets, you can organize the targets list into categories and subcategories. For example, you might organize e-source targets by subject matter categories, such as Business and Education, and perhaps define subcategories within these categories. You can set up categories at the system, library, or branch level. If categories are not set up for an organization, the organization scheme from the parent level is used.

    +

    A specific e-source target can be represented in multiple categories. You can add a target to a category when you set up the target, or you can copy targets from other categories. The copied targets are linked, so if you modify a target in one category, the same change is made to the linked targets in other categories. Categories can be copied, pasted, renamed, and deleted.

    +

    To organize the library’s e-source targets into categories and subcategories:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Categorization of ESource targets. The ESource Target Categorization dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. To add a category, do these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) the folder to which you want to add a category. Root, the default category, cannot be copied, deleted, or renamed. If you are adding a new category to the root level, select Root. If you are adding a subcategory to an existing category, select the existing category folder.
    2. +
    3. Click Add Category. A folder icon appears in the Category tree view, with the cursor positioned to name the folder.
    4. +
    5. Type a category heading, and press ENTER.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Use the following methods to place e-source targets in categories:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Add individual e-source targets to a category. See Set up an e-source target.
    • +
    • Copy an existing e-source target (book icon) to another category. Select the target in the ESource Categorization dialog box, and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy of the target, and click Paste. This procedure creates targets that are linked. Any change to one target is applied to all the linked targets.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To set the display order in the PAC, select a category or target and click Up or Down. Repeat until the categories or targets are in the display order you want.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    On the PAC e-sources page, targets defined at the Root level are always displayed below any categories.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Delete an e-source target - Select the target in the ESource Target Categorization dialog box, and click Delete. Deleting a target from a particular category, including Root, does not delete it from other categories. Deleting a linked target only removes the target from the current category, unless the target is part of a linked category; any linked targets remain in the other categories.
    • +
    • Copy a category - Select the category in the ESource Target Categorization dialog box, and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy, and click Paste. This procedure creates categories that are linked, indicated by a hand on the folder icon. When you copy categories, all subcategories and targets are copied, and all the copied subcategories and targets also become linked. Any change to one category is applied to all the linked categories. To remove a link, select the category you want to make stand-alone, and click Unlink.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot paste a category at the same level as the original category. There cannot be two subcategories with the same name within a category.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Provide_links_to_e-sources_on_external_sites.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Provide_links_to_e-sources_on_external_sites.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c275248 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Provide_links_to_e-sources_on_external_sites.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Provide links to e-sources on external sites + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Provide links to e-sources on external sites

    +

    After you set up e-source targets, you can place links to specific e-source targets in other Web site locations, outside the catalog. To find and copy the e-source link:

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the e-source target on your PowerPAC e-sources page and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialog box displays the URL in the Address (URL) field.
    2. +
    3. To select the link, position the cursor at the start of the Address (URL) field, hold down the Shift key, and use the down arrow key to select all of the text.
    4. +
    +

    + eSourceTargetID.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the selected URL, and select Copy.
    2. +
    3. Paste the URL as a hypertext link. The external link uses the authentication criteria and access restrictions placed on the target.
    4. +
    +
      +
    • If the e-source does not require logon, the user will go directly to that e-source.
    • +
    • If a logon is required, the user will go to the library’s e-sources page where they can click a link to log on.
    • +
    +

    + esource.gif 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Set_up_an_e-source_target.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Set_up_an_e-source_target.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cfe6dad2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Set_up_an_e-source_target.htm @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up an e-source target + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up an e-source target

    +

    To set up access restrictions and authentication data elements for an e-source target:

    +
      +
    1. Obtain the following information from the e-source target provider:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • URL for the target’s login page - The complete URL for the target’s login page (not the site’s home page, or account setup page). Polaris automatically passes your library’s authentication information to this URL.
    • +
    • Connection data parameters  - Connection data parameters are set up in sets consisting of Name and Value. Name is the descriptive field name that the database provider uses to prompt for input. Value is the actual text string that the database provider assigns to your library when the subscription is established.
    • +
    +

    Example:
    A vendor requires a user ID and a password to access a database, so you define two parameters (two sets of Name and Value data elements). For the first set, Name is UserID. Value is WESTSIDELIBRARY. For the second set, Name is Password and Value is read.

    +
      +
    • Transfer type (Get or Post) - The protocol for passing authentication data from your library to the e-source target. Get displays authentication information in the URL string, unless Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is enabled at the server level. Post does not display the authentication information. Most vendors can use the post method. To determine this information yourself, see Example - E-Source Target Post Transfer Type and Example - E-Source Target Get Transfer Type.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Categorization of ESource targets. The ESource Categorization dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + dESourceAddTar.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    Click Revert to restore system-level settings.

    +
      +
    1. Select a category for the new target (optional), and click Add Target. The Add ESource Target dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Root is the default category, represented by a tree icon. Other categories are represented by folder icons. See Organizing E-Source Targets.

    +

    + dESourceGenChar.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Set up general information for the target as follows:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Type a name for the target in the Name box. This name is displayed on the PAC E-Sources page.
    • +
    • Type a brief (890-character maximum) description in the Description box, if you want to display a description on the PAC E-Sources page.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    The message can inform patrons of any use restrictions for the target, or to highlight a new offering.

    + +
      +
    1. To set in-library access to the target, select an option under Inhouse access (General Restrictions tabbed page):
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To make the e-source unavailable to in-house users, select Disabled.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you disable access for both in-house and remote users (see step 7), the e-source will be displayed on the PowerPAC page as unlinked text.

    +
      +
    • To make the e-source available from in-house workstations only to registered patrons, select Login required. If you select this option, you can further restrict access by blocking selected patron codes. See step 8.
    • +
    • To make the e-source available from in-house workstations to anyone, select No login required.
    • +
    +

    By default, if a workstation is registered in Polaris Administration, it is automatically considered “in-house.” If the workstation is not registered in Polaris Administration, but the IP address is listed in the system-level In-House IP Addresses database table, it is considered to be in-house. If you use Polaris PowerPAC on workstations within the library, you may want to list them in the In-House IP Addresses database table. If neither the workstation nor the IP address is found in the system, the user is considered remote.

    +

    Note:
    By default, the system checks both the In-House IP Addresses table and registered workstations to determine if a computer is in-house. However, if you experience performance issues related to e-source restrictions, you can set the system to check only the In-House IP Addresses table.

    +
      +
    1. To set remote access to the target, select an option under Remote access (General Restrictions tabbed page):
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To make the e-source unavailable to remote users, select Disabled.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you disable access for both remote and in-house users (see step 6), the e-source will be displayed on the PowerPAC page as unlinked text.

    +
      +
    • To make the e-source available from remote workstations only to registered patrons, select Login required. If you select this option, you can further restrict access by blocking selected patron codes. See step 8.
    • +
    • To make the e-source available from remote workstations to anyone, select No login required.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. If you have required login for in-house or remote access, and you want to prevent patrons with certain patron codes from accessing the target, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Patron Codes tab on the Add E-Source Target dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dESourcePatCode.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) the codes you want to prevent from accessing the target. Patrons who are assigned these codes cannot access the e-source target.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Your patron code settings are used only if you have required log-in for in-house or remote access.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to allow access only from certain IP addresses, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    Set this restriction if you want to allow access only from the specific IP addresses listed here. If at least one address is listed, the system blocks access from any workstations or IP addresses that are not listed here, regardless of any other access restrictions you may have set. You might use this setting to limit access to a very specialized (and costly) research site.

    +
      +
    1. Click the IP Addresses tab on the Add ESource Target dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dESourceIP.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Define IP addresses using one of the following methods:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To define IP addresses one at a time, type each IP address in the boxes and click Add. The addresses are displayed in the Allowed IP Addresses list.
    • +
    • To define a range of IP addresses, select the Enter IP Range check box. Then enter the first address of the range in the IP address boxes, and enter the last address of the range in the End of IP Range boxes. Click the radio button below the appropriate End of IP Range box to specify if the last number in the range is in that address segment. Click Add to add the range to the Allowed IP Addresses list.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To remove IP addresses from the Allowed IP Addresses list, select the address and click Remove. Use CTRL+select or SHIFT+select to select multiple entries.

    +
      +
    1. Set connection parameters for the target by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Connection Data tab on the Add ESource Target dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dESourceAuth.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type a name in the Name box, type a value in the Value box for the first parameter, and click Add.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Name requirement is specific to the vendor, and the Value requirement is set up in your organization’s account with the vendor. See step 1.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat step b to add as many parameters as the e-source provider requires for connection authentication.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Add ESource Target dialog box. The new target is represented by a book icon in the ESource Categorization dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the ESource Categorization dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Connection setup examples - Example - E-Source Target Post Transfer Type and Example - E-Source Target Get Transfer Type
    • +
    • Modify an e-source target - Select the target in the ESource Categorization dialog box, and click Modify. The Modify ESource Target dialog box offers the same functions as the Add ESource Target dialog box.
    • +
    • E-Source reports - You can print a report of the e-source targets you have set up, including any access restrictions and connection requirements. You can also choose to log e-source transactions for custom reports. See E-Source Reports.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Setting_Up_E-Source_Targets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Setting_Up_E-Source_Targets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13c57ce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOeSources/Setting_Up_E-Source_Targets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up E-Source Targets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up E-Source Targets

    +

    To set up an e-source target for Polaris PowerPAC, you specify how the connection to the database is made, and set any authentication criteria and access restrictions. The terms of your library’s contract with the e-source provider may require authentication from your system when a patron attempts to connect to the e-source. Authentication identifies your library as a subscriber to the e-source provider. When a patron selects an e-source, and the access criteria are met, authentication data for the library is automatically passed to the e-source target for validation, bypassing the provider’s logon page. You can allow access from in-house workstations, remote workstations, or both, and set separate logon requirements for each location. You can further define access by preventing patrons with certain patron codes from accessing an e-source target, and by setting specific IP addresses for access.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Events_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Events_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4a0df24 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Events_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add text to the Events page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

     Add text to the Events page

    +

    The Events page is displayed when a patron selects Events on the Library Info submenu in Polaris PowerPAC. The Events page is located on the Web server, Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/library/events.aspx. You can place your own text on the page by editing the file Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/library/userdef/ud_events.ascx. You can format your text with basic HTML tags.

    +

    Note: +
    Be sure your custom content displays correctly for wide (computer), medium (tablet), and narrow (phone) screens.

    +

    To add events or other text to the events page:

    +
      +
    1. On the Web server, open the file Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/library/userdef/ud_events.ascx in any HTML or text editor. The text of the file is displayed in the editor.
    2. +
    3. Insert your text between the elements </div> and <!-- End -->. For example:
    4. +
    +

    SessionObject.GetLanguageString("PACML_UD_EVENTS_1118") %></div> +

    +

    <p> event1 </p>

    +

    <p> event2 </p>

    +

    <p> event3 </p>

    +

    <!-- End --> +

    +
      +
    1. Save the file.
    2. +
    3. Back up your edited file to preserve your changes from being overwritten when Polaris PowerPAC is reinstalled on the server.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To display the Events option on the Library Info menu, set the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Events to Yes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Policies_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Policies_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bb63233 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Add_text_to_the_Policies_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Add text to the Policies page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add text to the Policies page

    +

    The Policies page is displayed when a patron selects Policies on the Library Info menu in Polaris PowerPAC. The Policies page is located on the Web server, Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/library/policies.aspx. You can place your own text on the page by editing the user-defined file Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/library/userdef/ud_policies.ascx. You can format your text with basic HTML tags.

    +

    Note: +
    Be sure your custom content displays correctly for wide (computer), medium (tablet), and narrow (phone) screens.

    +

    To add text to the policies page:

    +
      +
    1. On the Web server, open the file Polaris [version]/PowerPAC/library/userdef/ud_policies.ascx in any HTML or text editor. The text of the file is displayed in the editor.
    2. +
    3. Insert your text between these elements: SessionObject.GetLanguageString("PACML_UD_POLICIES_1123") %></asp:panel></p>and <!-- End -->. For example:
    4. +
    +

    SessionObject.GetLanguageString("PACML_UD_POLICIES_1123") %></asp:panel></p> +

    +

    <p> policy1 </p>

    +

    <!-- End --> +

    +
      +
    1. Save the file.
    2. +
    3. Back up your edited file to preserve your changes from being overwritten when Polaris PowerPAC is reinstalled on the server.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To display the Policies option on the Library Info menu, set the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Policies to Yes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Administering_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Administering_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a1a39ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Administering_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Polaris PowerPAC - Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Polaris PowerPAC - Overview

    +

    Many Polaris Administration settings control the features and behavior of the PAC in general and affect both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. However, specific Polaris PowerPAC settings control the appearance and available features of Polaris PowerPAC. You can also choose the overall appearance of Polaris PowerPAC pages from several ready-made themes. In addition, you can customize most of the text that appears on Polaris PowerPAC pages by editing the text strings in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor).

    +

    Note:
    For instructions on programmatic-level customization techniques, see Polaris PowerPAC Help.

    +

    You can customize Polaris PowerPAC to suit your library’s needs, from the home page start-up to the features you choose to offer to patrons. For the home page, you can use the Polaris PowerPAC portal page, including the dashboard lists, rotating book jackets or content carousels, and custom content. Alternatively, you can use your own home page. You can also offer events and hours pages. In general, you control what features are available in Polaris PowerPAC with Polaris Administration settings that display or suppress options.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC settings for the organization to which the patron is connected typically control the features and functions the patron sees. You can choose to allow patrons to switch branches after they have connected to Polaris PowerPAC, by selecting a branch in the Switch to another branch list. When the patron selects a different branch, the settings for that branch become effective.

    +

    However, the system-level settings for the Patron Services parameter Consortium Circulation determine what branch’s policies govern due date calculation, loan and request limits, and fine calculation for renewals. Also, settings for the patron’s registered branch control many patron account functions.

    +

    For general information about PowerPAC, see:

    + +

    For instructions on setting PowerPAC profiles that control basic features, see:

    + +

    For information about options for displaying, managing, and circulating eContent, see:

    + +

    For information about display and feature options for PowerPAC, see the following topics :

    + +

    Updating Page Caches

    +

    When you change Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and PowerPAC Children’s Edition settings, you might need to update page caches to see the effects of your changes. Most cached information is stored at the application level on the Web server. You can update that information with the Reload tool in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). For more information, see WebAdmin online help. Some information is stored at the session level (one session for each currently connected client browser), and you cannot reload each session’s cached data for security reasons. In these cases, restart the Internet Information Server (IIS) to clear the cache and load any pages that have changed. Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset. You might also need to close and re-open browsers. You might want to organize changes to Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC so that you do much of your planned work in one session.

    +

    Patron Privacy in the Library - Tips

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC, the browser Back button does not work past the log-in screen. For example, if the patron does a search, then logs in to the patron account, then logs out, the next patron cannot use the Back button to see the previous patron’s account pages or search results.

    +

    You can also set an inactivity timeout for logged-in patrons working in the library. The patron is automatically logged out after a specified period. See Set an inactivity timeout for in-house workstations.

    +

    “Autocomplete” is the browser feature that automatically supplies information on forms, based on past entries. You should disable the Autocomplete feature in public workstation browsers. In Internet Explorer, for example, select Tools, Internet Options. On the Content tabbed page, select AutoComplete. Clear Usernames and passwords on forms. This prevents previous usernames and passwords from being exposed when the next patron logs in to use a feature.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC and JavaScript™

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC uses JavaScript, and displays a warning message at the top of the page when JavaScript is disabled in the user’s browser.

    +

    The default message is
    JavaScript has been disabled in your browser. Please enable JavaScript to enjoy all features of this site.

    +

    You can customize the message in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). For more information about editing messages, see Customizing Language Strings.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Accessibility

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC pages include features to facilitate accessibility in the following ways:

    +
      +
    • ALT tags provide text equivalents for inline images.
    • +
    • “Skip navigation” links are included at the top of each PowerPAC page.
    • +
    • Table header <TH> tags distinguish column headers for data tables, such as those displayed on patron account pages.
    • +
    +

    Although these features are not generally visible when the pages are displayed, they improve the experience of patrons who use screen readers.

    +

    Note:
    If you customize PowerPAC pages, you will likely want to retain these features. For more information about code-level customization, see the Polaris Developer Network.

    +

    In addition, the footer of the page displays a text-only site index.

    +

    + +

    +

    The available links depend on the features you have enabled in Polaris Administration. For example, if you have suppressed Boolean searching from the menu bar, it is also suppressed from the site index.

    +

    Analyzing Polaris PowerPAC Use

    +

    Google™ Analytics is a free tool from Google that allows Web site administrators to record and analyze traffic on their sites. Polaris PowerPAC includes the JavaScript code for Google Analytics in the page footer. To use this feature, open the Polaris Administration PowerPAC profile PowerPAC Analytics. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. On the Google tabbed page, check Enable and supply your Google Analytics tracking code. For more information about Google Analytics, and to obtain a tracking code, go to:
    http://www.google.com/analytics/

    +

    Alternatively, you can supply your own JavaScript for site analysis. Open the PowerPAC Analytics profile, Custom tabbed page, check Enable, and type your JavaScript code in the field provided.

    +

    Note:
    This profile also applies to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. A separate profile applies to Mobile PAC. SeeAnalyzing Polaris Mobile PAC Use.

    +

    Note:
    If the PAC browser session is run directly on the PAC server, the following domain must be open for Google Analytics to work properly:
    Port 80/443: google-analytics.com

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Assign_Web_parts_to_public_pages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Assign_Web_parts_to_public_pages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ec47b940 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Assign_Web_parts_to_public_pages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Assign Web parts to public pages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Assign web parts to public pages

    +

    Each organization specifies which web parts are displayed on the dashboard for specific pages. You can add and remove web parts from individual pages without affecting other pages, and change the order in which web parts appear on any specific page.

    +

    Note:
    Custom web parts must be defined at the system level before they can be assigned to public pages at the branch level. See Create a custom web part. Web parts set up for Polaris PowerPAC are available to be assigned to Children’s PAC pages, and web parts set up for the Children’s PAC are available to be assigned to Polaris PowerPAC pages.

    +

    To specify which web parts are available on specific public pages for an organization:

    +

    Important:
    Web parts are inherited from the system level unless you make any change at the branch level. Then none are inherited for that branch and you must make the appropriate assignments at the branch level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab (or Children’s PAC tab) in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You assign web parts to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition separately from Polaris PowerPAC, but the procedure is the same.

    +
      +
    1. +

      Double-click Dashboards: Web Page/Web Part Assignment. The Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box opens.

      +

      + +

      +
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. +

      In the Web Pages list, select the public page to which you want to assign web parts:

      +
        +
      • If you are assigning web parts to Polaris PowerPAC pages, see Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters for information about each page.
      • +
      • +

        If you are assigning web parts to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages, see Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters for information about each page.

        +

        Tip:
        To set a page to use the same web parts specified for the page in a parent organization, select the page, and select  Revert.

        +

        The web parts currently assigned to the page are shown in the Assigned Web Parts list.

        +
      • +
      +
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To assign a web part to the selected page, do the following:
      1. Select Add. The Web Page - Add Web Parts dialog box appears.

      2. Select the web parts you want to assign to the webpage.
      3. Select OK.

        The selected web parts are displayed in the Assigned Web Parts list on the Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box. The order of the list determines the display order in the dashboard for the selected page. To change the position of a web part in the dashboard, select the web part in the Assigned Web Parts list, and select Up or Down.

    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each page to which you want to assign web parts for this organization.
    2. +
    3. Select OK on the Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Delete a web part from a page - On the Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box, select the web part in the Assigned Web Parts list, and select Delete.
    • +
    • Revert to system-level settings - On the Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box, select Revert.
    • +
    • Set the default display of web parts - You can determine whether web parts are expanded or closed by default when a page opens. (Patrons can always select a control in the header to expand or close a web part.) To set the default display to expanded web parts, set the PowerPAC profile Dashboards: Expanded to Yes. To set the default display to closed web parts, set the profile to No.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Content_Carousels_on_the_PowerPAC_Portal_Page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Content_Carousels_on_the_PowerPAC_Portal_Page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db816dec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Content_Carousels_on_the_PowerPAC_Portal_Page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + + Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page

    +

    A content carousel is a rotating graphical representation of a list of materials in the local library catalog, displayed on the PowerPAC portal page. The PowerPAC user can click or tap any title in the carousel to launch a search for the title in the library catalog.

    +

    + +

    +

    Each carousel can consist of a specified bibliographic record set created in the staff client, or titles from any of the following system-defined and automatic dashboards (Web parts):

    +
      +
    • Most Circulated Titles
    • +
    • On-Order Items
    • +
    • New Books
    • +
    • New Large Print
    • +
    • New Sound Recordings
    • +
    • New Videos
    • +
    • BookSense best-seller lists:
      • Children's Fiction Series
      • Children’s Illustrated
      • Early and Middle Grade Readers
      • Hardcover Fiction
      • Hardcover Non-Fiction
      • Mass Market
      • Trade Paperback Fiction
      • Trade Paperback Non-Fiction
      • Young Adult
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    The content carousel is not intended to be an alternate display of the best-seller lists as they appear in the dashboard. Instead, it is an entry point into the library’s collection because it contains only materials known to be in the library’s database.

    +

    For more information about these system-defined and automatic Web parts, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +

    Carousels based on record sets are populated when they are displayed. If a title is added to or deleted from a record set, the carousel is updated when the page cache is refreshed (for example, through IIS reset or auto-cycling), rather than every time the carousel appears. If the record set is deleted, the carousel is not created and does not appear on the page. Carousels based on automatic and system-defined dashboards are also refreshed to reflect new content whenever the cache is rebuilt in PowerPAC.

    +

    There is no limit to the number of content carousels that can appear on the portal page, but you may find that displaying too many content carousels will adversely affect response time.

    +

    Tip:
    If a bibliographic record on a carousel is deleted or updated to not display in PAC, it will continue to display on the carousel until the cache is rebuilt. If the user selects that record before the cache is rebuilt, the search returns 0 results.

    +
      +
    • Carousel title display - Content carousels display only titles for which there is a bibliographic record in the local database. The record must be set to display in PAC, and the record status must be final. For each title, the carousel contains the cover image if any, and title and author tags and subfields specified in the Primary Display Title and Primary Display Author database tables. When the PAC connection is to a branch, carousels based on new titles  include only new titles for that branch. When the PAC connection is to the system, the carousel includes new titles for the whole system.
    • +
    • Sort order and entry point - Carousels based on ranked best-seller lists are sorted in the ranked order provided by the best-seller list supplier. All other carousels are sorted in title order. The carousel “starts” at a random point in the list every time it appears, and the display is circular. That is, the user can scroll endlessly through the carousel. When the carousel reaches the end of the designated sort order (when the scrolling forward) or the beginning (when scrolling backward), the carousel continues at the beginning (or end) of the sorted list.
    • +
    • +

      Maximum entries - Content carousels display a maximum of 50 titles. If the list that generates the carousel contains more than 50 items, only the first 50 items in the sorted list appear in the carousel, using the sort order described above.

      +
    • +
    • Content carousels and rotating book jackets - You can enable a rotating, random book jacket image on the portal page. The user clicks the book jacket image and if the title is not in the library catalog, the user can request that the library purchase it. For details, see Set up rotating book jackets. While it is possible to enable both rotating book jackets and content carousels on the portal page, the display may confuse the user since the features may appear somewhat similar but serve different purposes. Polaris recommends that you enable one or the other of these features, but not both. If you do enable both, the content carousel appears below the rotating book jacket image.
    • +
    +

    You can set up content carousels at the system, library, or branch level. The system uses the settings of the PowerPAC connection organization. To set up content carousels:

    +

    Important:
    Content carousels are displayed on the PowerPAC portal page. You must also enable the portal page. See Set up Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. To enable the display of cover images in content carousels, check that enriched data options for cover images have been set in Polaris Administration. See Enabling Enriched Data.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Portal page content carousels. The Portal Page Content Carousels dialog box opens.
    6. +
    +

    + CarouselSABlank.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable.
    2. +
    3. To add a dashboard carousel, select a dashboard (Web part) from the dashboard list and click Add New Dashboard Carousel. The selected dashboard appears in the Carousels list in the upper part of the dialog box. For more information about these lists, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.
    4. +
    +

    + CarouselDash.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. To add a record set carousel, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Find. The Find Tool for bibliographic record sets opens.
    2. +
    3. Search for the record set and select one or more record sets in the results lists.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:

    You can search for any bibliographic record set. Existing rules and permissions are in effect when searching for and selecting record sets. For example, you cannot find record sets owned by individuals other than yourself.

    +

    The record set or sets you selected are displayed in the record set list.

    +

    + CarouselRecSet.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. To create the carousel, select the record set in the list and click Add New Record Set Carousel. The selected record set appears in the Carousels list in the upper part of the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + CarouselRecSetAdd.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. By default, the carousel name is the name of the dashboard or record set. To assign a different display name for the PAC:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the carousel in the Carousels list. The name appears in the text box just below the list.
    2. +
    3. Type the new name and click Rename.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To set the display order of multiple carousels, select a carousel and click the up arrow to move it closer to the top of the list, or click the down arrow to move it closer to the bottom. The order of the list represents the display order in PAC.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Delete a carousel - Select the carousel in the Carousels list and click the Remove carousel icon CarouselDelete.gif.
    • +
    • Inherit settings from a parent organization - The top of the dialog box indicates the organization where the current carousel options have been set. To inherit the settings of the parent organization, click the up arrow at the top of the dialog box.
    • +
    • Content carousels and Community Profiles - For libraries that use Polaris Community Profiles, organization representatives can display content carousels on the organization’s page in PAC search results or on the organization’s own web site through widgets that are created with ContentXChange. These carousels can consist of title lists or searches saved in association with the organization representative’s patron account. See Using ContentXChange.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Create_a_custom_Web_part.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Create_a_custom_Web_part.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a438221 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Create_a_custom_Web_part.htm @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a custom Web part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a custom web part

    +

    To create a custom web part, you define a heading for the web part and add data elements to the heading. You can add any combination of elements to the heading. (You create web parts for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition separately from Polaris PowerPAC, but the method is the same.)

    +

    + +

    +

    To create a custom web part:

    +

    Important:
    You can create web parts at the system level only. To actually display the created web parts in the PAC, you assign them to specific pages for the appropriate organization. See Assign web parts to public pages.

    +
      +
    1. +

      In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.

      +

      Note:
      If you are working with web parts for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, select the Children’s PAC tab.

      +
    2. +
    3. +

      Double-click Dashboards: Web part construction. The Web Part Editor dialog box appears.

      +

      + +

      +
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select the User Defined tab.
    2. +
    3. Select Add by the Web Parts list to specify the heading for the new web part.
    4. +
    +

    + dWebPartAdd.gif 

    +

    The Add Web Part Title dialog box appears.

    +

    + dAddWebPartTitlDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type the heading text in the Title box, and select OK. The heading for the new web part is displayed in the Web Parts list.
    2. +
    3. Select the heading in the Web Parts list to which you want to add elements.
    4. +
    5. Select Add by the Data Elements list.
    6. +
    +

    + dDataElementsAdd.gif 

    +

    The Add Data Element: Pick Type dialog box appears.

    +

    + AddDataPickType.gif 

    +
      +
    1. +

      Select one of the following element types to add to the web part. When you select an element type, the appropriate Add … Element dialog box for the selected element type appears:

      +
        +
      • +

        Title Search – Puts a title link in the list. When a patron selects the title in the list, the title information is displayed as search results. Type the bibliographic control number of the title, or select the title from the Polaris Find Tool results list (select Find to display the Find Tool).

        +

        + dTitleSearchFind.gif +

        +
      • +
      • +

        URL – Puts a link to a website or page in the list. When a patron selects the link, the browser displays the destination page. Type the link text in the Title box, and type the uniform resource locator (address) in the URL box. See also URL Data Elements and PowerPAC Context After Timeout.

        +

        + URLElement.gif 

        +
      • +
      • +

        Free Text – Puts text in the list. Use free text for announcements, page instructions, or introducing the list. Type the text of the announcement or message you want to display. You can use basic HTML tags to format the text.

        +

        + FreeTextElement.gif 

        +
      • +
      +
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select OK on the Add … Element dialog box. The new element is displayed in the Data Elements list on the Web Part Editor dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Repeat steps 8 and 9 to add additional elements to the selected Web Part (heading). You can add any combination of element types to a single heading.
    4. +
    5. When you are finished working with the library-defined web parts, select OK.
    6. +
    7. Select File > Save.
    8. +
    +

    URL Data Elements and PowerPAC Context After Timeout

    +

    To protect patron privacy, Polaris PowerPAC is designed to return to the system organization context after a timeout period even if the last connection had been to a specific branch organization. For example:

    +
      +
    • The user connects to Polaris PowerPAC at the system level.
    • +
    • The user then clicks a link to an external page with a specific organizational context (for example, a branch's hours page).
    • +
    • The user has no activity and leaves the browser open for 20 minutes. PowerPAC times out.
    • +
    • The user then clicks a link to a page with a specific organizational context, but Polaris PowerPAC returns to the system organization context.
    • +
    +

    If you want the URL on the external page to bring the user to the specific organization context in the above circumstances instead of reverting to the system context , place only the organization ID in the ctx portion of the URL data element. For example, use ctx=30 instead of ctx=30.1033.0.1.

    +

    + +

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Edit the title of a web part - Select the heading in the Web Parts list, and select Edit by the Web Parts list.
    • +
    • Delete a web part - Select the heading in the Web Parts list, and select Delete by the Web Parts list.
    • +
    • Edit an element in a web part - Select the heading in the Web Parts list, and select the element in the Data Elements list. Select Edit by the Data Elements list.
    • +
    • Delete an element from a web part - Select the heading in the Web Parts list, and select the element in the Data Elements list. Select Delete by the Data Elements list.
    • +
    • Reorder the elements in a web part - Select the heading in the Web Parts list, and select the element in the Data Elements list. Select Up or Down by the Data Elements list. The order in the Data Elements list determines the display order in the dashboard.
    • +
    • Add a web part to a page - See Assign web parts to public pages.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customize_the_page_header.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customize_the_page_header.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42714154 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customize_the_page_header.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customize the page header + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customize the page header

    +

    You can customize the header for all PowerPAC pages using the PowerPAC profile Page header options. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the system uses the setting for the PowerPAC connection organization. You can specify your own graphic file for the header logo. This area is also a link to the Polaris PowerPAC home page (the portal page, if you choose to use it, otherwise the keyword search page or a destination you specify).

    +

    The profile also offers options to set the position of the logo image and branch name for medium and wide screens. You can also set custom colors for background and text, and suppress the branch name text if your logo already includes this information.

    +

    + +

    +

    To customize the PowerPAC page header:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Page header options. The Page Header Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. If you will use your own logo, type the path for your custom graphic file, in the Alternate logo (URL) box.
    2. +
    +

    If none is specified, the default logo image is used. Any standard graphic file format, such as .gif or .jpg, is acceptable. The maximum image width is 1500 pixels. The system scales the image for the medium display.

    +

    Example:
    [PACWebServer]/Polaris/custom +

    +

    Note:
    You can place the graphic file in a different location. In this case, type the complete URL for that location. Be sure the security settings for the directory allow access to the file. The location must have a security (SSL) certificate.

    +
      +
    1. Select Left, Center, or Right to position the logo and branch name in the header. The default position is center. This setting applies to medium and wide screen displays only.
    2. +
    3. If your logo image already includes your branch name, check Exclude the branch name to suppress the branch name text string from the header. Narrow width display: When this option is checked, the logo is displayed in the narrow width header, appropriately scaled. If you leave this option unchecked, only the branch name is displayed in the narrow width header.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you suppress the branch name at the system level, and all connection branches inherit the system setting, users cannot readily determine their connection branch after switching branches if the branch logo does not include the branch name. To avoid this problem, you can suppress the organization name for the system but allow the branch name to be displayed at the appropriate branches by setting the profile at the branch level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Return link URL for header logo box, type the URL for the page that should appear when the user clicks the header logo or branch name. If this setting is left blank, the link destination is the portal page if you choose to use it, or the keyword search page if you do not use the portal page.
    2. +
    3. Set custom background and/or branch name text colors:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Customize background color, Customize branch name text color, or both.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can suppress the branch name text from the header, which you may want to do if your logo image includes the organization name. See step 5 above.

    +
      +
    1. Select the drop-down arrow for each selected option to access the color picker.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click a color, or click Other to open the color tool.
    2. +
    +

    + PageHeaderStandardColors.gif 

    +
      +
    • To select a color on the Standard tab of the color tool, click Select and click the color or gray-scale value.
    • +
    • Or click the Custom tab to select a color from a palette. Alternatively, you can type standard RGB values.
    • +
    +

    + PageHeaderCustomColors.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close the color tool.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Reload Polaris PowerPAC to see your changes. See Updating Page Caches.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to close the Page Header dialog box and save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Language_Strings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Language_Strings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf91fc52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Language_Strings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customizing Language Strings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Language Strings

    +

    Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor) is a web-based tool you can use to customize English and other licensed language strings in all the parts of Polaris that support multiple languages, including Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris Mobile PAC, Polaris ExpressCheck, printed and e-mail notices, telephone notices, and Polaris Phone Attendant (inbound telephony). You can compare, add, edit and distribute language strings easily, without editing individual files. Polaris WebAdmin also provides a language string identifier specifically for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    You can add or customize language strings at the system, library, and branch levels. Branch settings override library settings; settings made at the library level override system-level settings.

    +

    When you change Polaris PowerPAC, PowerPAC Children’s Edition, or Mobile PAC settings in Polaris Administration, or customize language strings with WebAdmin, you must update page caches to see the effects of your changes. Most cached information is stored at the application level on the specified web server. You update that information with the Reload tool in WebAdmin.

    +

    For security purposes, Polaris WebAdmin should be installed on a server to which there is no outside access, but which has access to the Polaris database—for example, the web portion of the Polaris application server. You can access and use WebAdmin with most browsers.

    +

    You need the Polaris permission WebAdmin access: Allow to use Polaris WebAdmin. In Polaris Administration, this permission is available at the system level under the System Administration security node.

    +

    To access WebAdmin, open your browser and navigate to the site where WebAdmin is installed. You must supply your Polaris username, password, and domain to log in. For detailed information about using WebAdmin, see WebAdmin online help.

    +

    Note:
    You can also edit certain messages and labels in Polaris Administration. See Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Portal_Page_Features.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Portal_Page_Features.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bea89595 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Customizing_Portal_Page_Features.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customizing Portal Page Features + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Portal Page Features

    +

    The default Polaris PowerPAC portal page offers a quick search feature; content carousels or rotating book jackets; optional custom content; and specific dashboard elements. The illustration shows the Polaris PowerPAC portal page (Ocean theme) with a content carousel.

    +

    + +

    +

    Each branch can use the default portal page or a custom portal page, or all organizations can share a single portal page. You can designate the portal page as the home page, see Set up Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    You can customize the portal page with the following features:

    +
      +
    • Default quick search - The default quick search launches a keyword search in any field. You can set the search field, the default search filter (Limit by), the database to search, and the sort order for results in Polaris Administration, although patrons cannot specify these options for the quick search other than selecting a search filter. By selecting an option in the Limit by list, a patron can limit the quick search by any filter you offer. For information about search filters, see Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).
    • +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • Quick search with search option buttons - You can provide optional buttons with the quick search feature, instead of a search filter. The patron types the search text and selects a button to launch a particular type of search. You can offer Anywhere, Fiction, Nonfiction, My Library, My Library plus Articles, Subject, Title, Author, and Series buttons. Anywhere, Fiction, and Nonfiction, My Library, or My Library plus Articles are always keyword searches. For Subject, Title, Author, and Series, you can specify whether a keyword or browse search should be launched. See Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    +

    + +
    +

    +
      +
    • Rotating book jackets - If you subscribe to enriched data, you can offer rotating book jacket images on the portal page. Each time the page is loaded, the image changes to show the book jacket of a title randomly selected from best-seller lists. When a patron selects the jacket image, a search is launched for the title. If the title is not found, a form opens where the patron can ask the library to purchase the title. See Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    • Custom content - You can also place custom content on the portal page. See Set up custom portal page content
    • +
    • Content carousels - A content carousel is a rotating graphical representation of a list of materials in the local library catalog. The PowerPAC user can click any title in the carousel to launch a search for the title in the catalog. You can set up content carousels based on bibliographic record sets, and/or on certain system-defined and automatic dashboards (Web parts). See Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page.
    • +
    • Custom dashboard links - Web parts can provide links to pre-defined searches or Web sites. See Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Defining_Web_Parts_for_Dashboards.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Defining_Web_Parts_for_Dashboards.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c9f99dd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Defining_Web_Parts_for_Dashboards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + + Defining Web Parts for Dashboards - Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Defining Web Parts for Dashboards - Overview

    +

    Web parts are displayed in the dashboard area on the side of the pages on Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. Web parts can provide links to pre-defined searches or websites and deliver messages or instructions. Different web parts can be displayed on different pages. You set up web parts at the system level for use by any or all branches. Then, each branch can choose which web parts to display on the dashboard for any particular page.

    +

    Note:
    Separate Polaris Administration profiles control web parts for Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, but the process for setting up the web parts is the same for both PACs.

    +

    + +

    +

    For general information on web parts, see:

    + +

    For information on creating and using web parts, see:

    + +

    For reference lists of Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children's Edition pages, see:

    + +

    Automatic Web Parts

    +

    Polaris provides several web parts that are automatically updated by background database processing, using transactions at your library to determine the contents of the lists:

    +
      +
    • Most Circulated - The Most Circulated web part elements are links that launch searches for popular titles, authors, or subjects in the Polaris database, based on circulation statistics for the past 31 days. Only items that are marked for display in PAC are listed. By default, the SQL job Dashboard_MostCirculated updates the list once a month.
    • +
    • New Titles - The New Titles web part elements are organized by the broad material categories Books, Videos, Sound Recordings, and Large Print. When the patron selects a category, the page displays appropriate links that launch searches for titles that have recently been added to your catalog. Only items that are marked for display in PAC are listed, and an item must have been checked in to be eligible for inclusion. By default, the SQL job Dashboard_NewTitles updates the list nightly and includes items new in the last 31 days. Although the title search is for bibliographic records, if the process finds any bibliographic records that do not have a First Available date, the process checks their associated items to see if an item has become available since the last time it was processed. If so, the First Available date in the bibliographic record is updated with the item’s First Available date. You can also provide RSS feeds from the New Titles web part. See Setting Up RSS Feeds.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When the PAC connection is to a branch, the patron sees only new titles for that branch. When the PAC connection is to the system, the patron sees new titles for the whole system.

    +
      +
    • On-Order Items  - The On-Order Items web part elements are links that launch searches for titles in the Polaris database that have linked items with a status of On Order. By default, 20 titles are listed; the title that has the linked item with the most recent status change to On Order is listed first. If more than one On-Order item is associated with a bibliographic record, the most recent On-Order item is used to order the list. Only titles that are marked for display in PAC are listed. This web part is updated as part of the nightly Dashboard_NewTitles job.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    By default, Narrow and Related web parts are displayed on the search results page. You can determine whether or not to display these features, specify the filters and categories they contain, and customize the labels. See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options. You cannot specify the number of elements in them or assign them to other pages.

    +

    You can set the number of items that are automatically listed in the Most Circulated, New Titles, and On-Order Items web parts. See Limit items in Polaris and third-party lists.

    +

    Polaris also provides a Make a Donation web part that allows users to make a donation to the library by credit card. The user does not have to log in to make the donation.

    +

    Custom Web Parts

    +

    You can create custom web parts tailored to your needs and programs. See Create a custom web part. Custom web parts can include any combination of the following types of data elements:

    +
      +
    • Title Search - Links that launch searches for specific titles. Title search elements work well for listing titles for a particular purpose, such as a reading program, seasonal reading, special-interest subjects, or a teacher’s reading list.
    • +
    • URL - Links to websites or pages. You define the text or image that serves as the link. The link element can be formatted with basic HTML tags. For example, you can create a link to a URL that launches a search for the records in a record set created in the staff client. See Searching Record Sets (Polaris PowerPAC).
    • +
    • Free text - Text that is displayed in the web part. You can use free text for announcements, page instructions, or for introducing other elements in the list. The text can be formatted using basic HTML tag elements. You can include images using the <IMG> tag.
    • +
    +

    Best-Seller Lists from IndieBound (Book Sense, Inc.)

    +

    The following web parts are updated automatically with content from IndieBound (formerly Book Sense, Inc.), based on sales from over 350 independent bookstores in the United States: Trade Paperback Fiction, Trade Paperback Nonfiction, Hardcover Fiction, Hardcover Nonfiction, Mass Market, Early and Middle Grade Readers, Young Adults, Children's Fiction Series, and Children’s Illustrated. When a patron selects a title from one of these lists, a search for the title is launched in the Polaris database.

    +

    Every week, Innovative Interfaces receives a file of the updated best-seller lists from IndieBound. During overnight processing at your library, the BookSenseImport Microsoft SQL Server Agent at Innovative Interfaces updates the best-seller lists at your site.

    +

    Polaris Customer Operations helps you set up your Polaris system to support updating the IndieBound best-seller lists. The server running MS SQL Server must be able to do FTP downloads, and your webpage caches must be cleared after the download to allow the updated pages to be displayed (see Updating Page Caches).

    +

    You can limit the number of items that are automatically listed, but you cannot change the contents of the lists. See Limit items in Polaris and third-party lists.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Limit_items_in_Polaris_and_third-party_lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Limit_items_in_Polaris_and_third-party_lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab7eda9f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Limit_items_in_Polaris_and_third-party_lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Limit items in Polaris and third-party lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Limit items in Polaris and third-party lists

    +

    To specify the maximum number of items to display in the Polaris and third-party web parts that are updated automatically, such as “Most Circulated.”

    +

    Note:
    You must set the limit at the system level. You set the limits for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition separately from Polaris PowerPAC, but the procedure is the same.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and select the PowerPAC tab (or Children’s PAC tab) in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Web part construction. The Web Part Editor dialog box appears.
    4. +
    +

    + WebPartEd00543.gif 

    +
      +
    1. On the Polaris and 3rd Party tabbed page, select the heading in the Web Parts list for the web part you want to limit.
    2. +
    3. Type the number of items (elements) in the Total Listing Rows box to display for the selected list, and select Save.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    The maximum number is 100 for Polaris and 3rd Party web parts, except the New Titles web part. The maximum for this web part is 9,999.

    +

    Type 0, indicating no limit, in the Total Listing Rows box to display all items available for the automated list. For the web part New Titles, a setting of 0 in the Total Listing Rows box will display all titles added to the catalog in the past 31 days in each New Title category. Any other setting limits the number of new titles in each category to that number. The zero setting has the same effect on the On-Order Items web part. For more information about these web parts, see Automatic Web Parts.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each Polaris and third-party web part you are using.
    2. +
    3. Select OK. The Web Part Editor dialog box closes.
    4. +
    5. Select File > Save. Your new settings are effective when the automatic lists are updated.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Polaris_PowerPAC_Help.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Polaris_PowerPAC_Help.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ddc4b0bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Polaris_PowerPAC_Help.htm @@ -0,0 +1,585 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris PowerPAC Help + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Help

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC is installed with a default set of help topic html files. When the user clicks the Help option on the menu bar, a scrollable set of help topic links is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the user clicks a topic link, the appropriate topic is displayed in a lightbox, without losing the current page context.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the user clicks All topics at the bottom of the Help menu list, a page with the complete set of links is displayed. This page is also available by clicking the Help link in the site index list at the bottom of the page.

    +

    + +

    +

    Certain links are always displayed because they are applicable to PowerPAC in general. Availability is an example of this type of topic link. Others are displayed only when the connection organization has enabled the corresponding feature in Polaris Administration. For example, if the organization has not enabled Google Maps, the topic link Locate Items with Map It is automatically suppressed. The table shows the PowerPAC feature settings in Polaris Administration that control whether a help topic is displayed. You can customize the link labels in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor); see Customizing Language Strings. The table lists the Language Editor string IDs.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    HELP TOPIC FILENAMETOPIC LINK LABELLANGUAGE EDITOR STRING IDPOLARIS ADMINISTRATION FEATURE SETTING
    +

    Overview.htm

    +
    +

    Getting Started

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_INTRO

    +
    +

    [Always displayed]

    +
    +

    QuickSearch.htm

    +
    +

    Quick Search

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHQUICK

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Portal

    +
    +

    Keyword.htm

    +
    +

    Keyword Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHKEYWORD

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Keyword

    +
    +

    Phrase.htm

    +
    +

    Phrase Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHPHRASE

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Phrase

    +
    +

    Exact.htm

    +
    +

    Exact Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHEXACT

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Phrase

    +
    +

    Advanced.htm

    +
    +

    Advanced Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHADVANCED

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Advanced

    +
    +

    Boolean.htm

    +
    +

    Boolean Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHBOOLEAN

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Boolean

    +
    +

    Browse.htm

    +
    +

    Browse the Catalog

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHBROWSE

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Browse

    +
    +

    CommInfo.htm

    +
    +

    Community Information Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHCOMMUNITY

    +
    +

    Community profile

    +

    Navigation (PowerPAC): Community - Keyword Search

    +
    +

    CourseReserve.htm

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHCOURSE

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Course Reserves

    +
    +

    Filters.htm

    +
    +

    Narrowing Results and Related Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SEARCHNARROW

    +
    +

    [Always displayed]

    +
    +

    SavingSearches.htm

    +
    +

    Saving Searches

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SAVESEARCH

    +
    +

    PAC profile

    +

    Search agent: Enabled

    +
    +

    TitleInfo.htm

    +
    +

    Viewing Title Information

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_TITLEINFO

    +
    +

    [Always displayed]

    +
    +

    Availability.htm

    +
    +

    Availability

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_AVAILABILITY

    +
    +

    [Always displayed]

    +
    +

    MapIt.htm

    +
    +

    Locating Items with Map It

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_MAPIT

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Google Maps

    +
    +

    Fusion.htm

    +
    +

    Access Digital Collection Materials

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_FUSION

    +
    +

    [Polaris Fusion is enabled]

    +
    +

    TitleLists.htm

    +
    +

    Save Results with Title Lists

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_TITLELISTS

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Title List: Enable

    +
    +

    Share.htm

    +
    +

    Share Search Results

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_SHARE

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Bookmarking & Sharing: Enable

    +
    +

    ESources.htm

    +
    +

    Search Subscription Databases (E-Sources)

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_ESOURCES

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: E-Sources

    +
    +

    Request.htm

    +
    +

    Request Materials

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_REQUEST

    +
    +

    Request parameter

    +

    Holds options

    +
    +

    Purchase.htm

    +
    +

    Buy Materials

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_PURCHASE

    +
    +

    PAC profile

    +

    Purchase options

    +
    +

    NewAccount.htm

    +
    +

    Set Up a New Account

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_NEWACCOUNT

    +
    +

    PAC profile

    +

    Patron access options (self-registration enabled)

    +
    +

    Username.htm

    +
    +

    Create a User Name

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_USERNAME

    +
    +

    PAC profile

    +

    Patron access options (patron user name enabled)

    +
    +

    AcctUpdates.htm

    +
    +

    Account Updates, Preferences, Messages

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_UPDATEACCOUNT

    +
    +

    [Always displayed]

    +
    +

    AcctRequests.htm

    +
    +

    Manage Your Requests

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_ACCTREQUESTS

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Requests

    +
    +

    AcctItemsOut.htm

    +
    +

    View and Renew Items Out

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_ACCTITEMSOUT

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Items out

    +
    +

    AcctReadingHistory.htm

    +
    +

    Your Reading History

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_ACCTHISTORY

    +
    +

    [Reading history is enabled for patron]

    +
    +

    AcctFines.htm

    +
    +

    Fines and Fees

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_ACCTFINESFEES

    +
    +

    PowerPAC profile

    +

    Navigation: Fines and fees

    +
    +

    AcctCourseStats.htm

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Statistics

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_ACCTCOURSE

    +
    +

    [Course reserves enabled, patron is instructor]

    +
    +

    Donations.htm

    +
    +

    Make a Donation

    +
    +

    PACML_HELP_DONATE

    +
    +

    Credit Card Payment parameter

    +

    Online payments: Configure (Allow donations from PowerPAC)

    +
    +

    The PowerPAC profile Navigation: PAC help controls whether the Help option appears on the menu bar. If you choose to offer your own help materials from the dashboard, set this profile to No to suppress the Help option from the menu bar.

    +

    You can also display the Help option on the menu bar but edit the default .html files, retaining the same filenames. The files, with the .css style sheet and appropriate graphic files, are located at {PowerPAC Root}/help/content.

    +

    Important:
    If you edit the .html help files, be sure to back up your customized files in a location where they will not be overwritten if Polaris is re-installed.

    +

    If you have some programming knowledge, you can add your own links to the Help page. For more information, see the Polaris Developer Network.

    +

    Help with Searching

    +

    On each search page except Advanced, the user can click a link to display the appropriate help information.

    +

    + +

    +

    Creating Custom Help on the Dashboard

    +

    To provide custom help from the dashboard in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +

    Tip:
    Your instruction pages can be any file format that the workstation can display. If patrons use Polaris PowerPAC from remote locations, choose a format that is accessible to most workstations and browsers, such as .html.

    +
      +
    1. Create and save the instruction pages you want to be accessible from the dashboard.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Dashboards: Web part construction. The Web Part Editor dialog box appears.
    6. +
    7. Click the User Defined tab.
    8. +
    9. Click Add by the Web Parts list to specify the heading for the instruction Web part. The Add Web Part Title dialog box appears.
    10. +
    11. Type the heading text in the Title box, and click OK. The heading for the new Web part is displayed in the Web Parts list.
    12. +
    13. Select the new heading in the Web Parts list.
    14. +
    15. Click Add by the Data Elements list. The Add Data Element: Pick Type dialog box appears.
    16. +
    17. Select URL. The Add … Element dialog box for the URL element type appears.
    18. +
    19. Type the link text in the Title box, and type the complete path and filename or URL in the URL box.
    20. +
    21. Click OK on the Add … Element dialog box. The new element is displayed in the Data Elements list on the Web Part Editor dialog box.
    22. +
    23. Repeat steps 8-11 to add additional elements to the selected Web Part (heading), and click OK. The Web Part Editor dialog box closes.
    24. +
    25. Select File | Save.
    26. +
    27. To assign the instruction Web part to the appropriate pages, do these steps:
    28. +
        +
      1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
      2. +
      3. Double-click Dashboards: Web Page / Web Part Assignment. The Web Page - Web Part Configuration dialog box appears.
      4. +
      5. In the Web Pages list, select the page to which you want to assign the instruction Web part. See Polaris PowerPAC Pages Reference. The Web parts currently assigned to the page are shown in the Assigned Web Parts list.
      6. +
      7. Click Add. The Web Page -Add Web Parts dialog box appears. It lists all the Web parts not currently assigned to the selected page.
      8. +
      9. Select your instruction Web part.
      10. +
      11. Click OK on the Web Pages - Add Web Parts dialog box. The selected Web parts are displayed in the Assigned Web Parts list.
      12. +
      13. Click OK on the Web Page - Web Part Configuration dialog box.
      14. +
      +
    29. Select File > Save.
    30. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    More about dashboards - See Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_Polaris_PowerPAC_features_on_the_menu_bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_Polaris_PowerPAC_features_on_the_menu_bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f04eeaf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_Polaris_PowerPAC_features_on_the_menu_bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar

    +

    All menu features are available regardless of screen size, but certain options shift to accommodate display on a narrow phone screen. The example below shows main menu options on a desktop or tablet screen.

    +

    + +

    +

    For the narrow screen size (phone), certain options move from the default desktop/tablet position to a menu.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the user taps Menu, a "flyout" menu displays the main menu options .

    +

    + +

    +

    To set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can set these profiles at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. To allow access to an events page, double-click Navigation: Events, and select Yes. This setting displays the Events option on the Library Info menu. When the patron selects Events, the events page on the Web server, Polaris/PowerPAC/library/events.aspx, is displayed. For information about editing the events page, see Add text to the Events page.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To allow access to a policies page, double-click Navigation: Policies, and select Yes. This setting displays the Policies option on the Library Info menu. When the patron selects Policies, the policy page on the Web server, Polaris/PowerPAC/library/policies.aspx, is displayed. For information about editing the policies page, see Add text to the Policies page.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. To allow patrons to send an e-mail message to a designated library address, double-click Navigation: Ask Us, and select Yes. This setting displays the Ask Us option on the Library Info menu. For information about setting up the Ask Us feature, see Set up and start Ask Us.
    2. +
    3. To allow access to patron accounts, double-click Navigation: Patron Account, and select Yes. This setting displays the My Account option on the main menu bar. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.
    4. +
    5. To offer access to help topics, double-click Navigation: PAC Help, and select Yes. This setting controls access to the html help files that Innovative Interfaces provides with Polaris PowerPAC. See Polaris PowerPAC Help.
    6. +
    7. To allow access to the e-Sources page, double-click Navigation: E-Sources, and select Yes. This setting displays the E-Sources option on the Search menu. E-sources are non-Z39.50, proprietary databases that may require authentication for use. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters. When the patron selects this option, the e-Sources page is displayed.
    8. +
    9. To allow access to an Hours page, double-click the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Hours, and select Yes. This setting displays the Hours option on the Library Info menu. When the patron selects Hours, the hours page on the Web server, Polaris/PowerPAC/library/hours.aspx, is displayed. The Hours page includes location information and optional schedule information for the current connection organization. The schedule information is drawn from settings in the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation for the connection organization. The location information comes from the organization administration record. For formatting options, see step 10.
    10. +
    11. Select File, Save.
    12. +
    13. To set the information to display on the Hours page, choose one or both of the following PAC profiles:
    14. +
    +

    Note:
    These settings also affect Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    • To display the organization’s hours formatted in a table, set the PAC profile Hours of operation: Display to Yes.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    The hours listed in the table on the PAC Hours page are controlled by the settings in the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation. Even if you do not want to display the table on the PAC Hours page, you must set up the organization’s schedule in the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation, because these settings also affect due dates and other circulation processes.

    +
      +
    • To specify a message to display on the Hours page, double-click the PAC profile Hours of operation message. (This option is useful for organizations with split hours or other conditions that the Hours of Operation table does not accommodate.) The Language Strings dialog box opens.
    • +
    +

    + HoursOfOpDX.gif 

    +

    Choose a language from those licensed for Polaris PowerPAC. Then double-click the message field in the Display text column and type the message (up to 500 characters). Click OK.

    +

    Notes:
    You can insert diacritic characters in your message. Click Diacritics. In the Character Picker dialog box, select a graphic character set. Then select the character, and click Insert.

    +

    You can also use the PAC profile Multiple language strings to specify the message. This method may be more convenient if you have multiple messages to customize. For more information, see Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c8df015 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    To set basic operating features for Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. Set up the Polaris PowerPAC Web server in Polaris Administration. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    +

    Note: +
    Except where noted in this procedure, you can set these profiles at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. To allow remote connections to Polaris PowerPAC, double-click the PowerPAC profile Remote User PowerPAC: Enable, and select Yes. If you use Polaris PowerPAC as your PAC interface only in the library, and you do not offer remote PAC access, set this profile to No.
    2. +
    3. To allow access to the portal page, double-click the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Portal, and select Yes.
    4. +
    +

    This setting displays the Portal option on the Library Info menu. Set this profile to Yes if you are using the portal page as the Polaris PowerPAC home page. For more information, see Customizing Portal Page Features. Set this profile to No if the home page is a library page from which patrons access the public catalog. When you turn off the portal button, the default Polaris PowerPAC home page is the keyword search page.

    +
      +
    1. To allow access to the library Web site from the portal page, or to another page you specify, set these PowerPAC profiles:
      • Double-click Navigation: Web Site, and select Yes. This setting displays the Web site option on the Library Info menu.
      • Double-click Navigation: Web Site URL, and type the URL or complete network path to the page you want to display. If you leave this value blank, the default page website.aspx is displayed.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Website.aspx is stored on the Web server (Polaris/PowerPAC/library/website.aspx. You can edit the file to display a set of appropriate Web links. If you customize this file, back up your changes to preserve them in case Polaris is reinstalled on the server.

    +
      +
    1. To allow patrons to connect to other branches in the system once they have connected to Polaris PowerPAC, double-click the PowerPAC profile Branch Switching: Enable, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    This setting allows patrons to choose branches in the Branch list on the Polaris PowerPAC banner. The chosen branch’s settings become effective. If you set this to No, the patron can connect only to the organization represented by the connection URL.

    +

    If you set Branch switching: Enable to Yes, select Profiles, select the PAC tab, and set the PAC profile Branch list Order to specify the display order of the branches: select Yes to display the branch names in ascending alphabetical order by name, or No to display the branch names in ascending numerical order by internal organization ID.

    +

    With either setting, the system organization is always first. This profile also controls the display order of branches on the search options page, the self-registration page, and the donations page. The setting for the current connection branch is used. The profile also controls the display order of the list of pick-up libraries for requests, but in this case the setting for the patron’s registered branch is used.

    +

    Note: +
    Use the system-level PAC profile Suppress branches to suppress a branch from display in the Switch to another branch list. This profile also suppresses the selected branches from the branch lists on the Search Options scoping page, the Advanced Search scoping page, and the donation page.

    +
      +
    1. To log transactions (such as hold requests and renewals) initiated through Polaris PowerPAC, select System, Profiles and select the PowerPAC tab, select Enable logging of transactions, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    This setting is available at the system level only.

    +
      +
    1. To allow patrons to log on once for the Polaris PowerPAC session, double-click Single Login: Enable, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    When this profile is set to Yes, the My Account menu and page footer display a Log In option. Once logged in, patrons select a Log Out option or quit Polaris PowerPAC to log out. For more information, see Controlling Patron Account Login & Access. Be sure to set the profile to Yes in these cases:

    +
    +
      +
    • +

      You offer e-sources that require patron log-in. See Setting Up E-Source Targets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      You offer the ability to save searches, and want patrons to be able to work with a list of their saved searches in the dashboard. See Setting Up Saved Searches in the PAC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Your library uses 3M™ Public Access Management System smart cards. See step 10.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. To display a link to Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition on Polaris PowerPAC pages, double-click Navigation: Children’s PAC, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition is available by specific contract.

    +
      +
    1. If your library uses 3M™ Public Access Management System smart cards, double-click 3M PAMS: Enabled, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Patrons use smart cards to log in by placing the card in a reader. The cards may also provide scheduling and fund transaction capabilities. If you set this profile to Yes, also set Single logon: Enable to Yes.

    +

    Note: +
    Polaris PowerPAC workstations with readers must be listed in the In-House IP Addresses table. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_custom_portal_page_content.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_custom_portal_page_content.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d6de9b00 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_custom_portal_page_content.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up custom portal page content + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up custom portal page content

    +

    You can display your own content on the portal page. To specify the link to your content:

    +

    Tip:
    If you use Polaris Bookstore, you can use the custom content area to promote the bookstore. For more information about Polaris Bookstore, see Enabling Online Book Purchases.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Portal custom content (URL).
    4. +
    5. Type the complete URL for your content, beginning with http://.
    6. +
    7. Select File, Save.
    8. +
    +

    Custom Portal Page Content Tips

    +
      +
    • The HTML content from the page you specify will be displayed in the custom content area on the portal page. You can include elements such as links and graphics, but be sure the source HTML specifies an absolute path for these elements.
    • +
    • Be sure your custom content displays correctly for wide (computer), medium (tablet), and narrow (phone) screens.
    • +
    • You do not have to reload Polaris PowerPAC to clear the cache whenever you change your custom content. The HTML is reloaded whenever the portal page is accessed and the content was cached more than five minutes previously. Also, you can enable or disable the custom content by setting or clearing the profile without reloading Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_quick_search_with_search_option_buttons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_quick_search_with_search_option_buttons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b501f7fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_quick_search_with_search_option_buttons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Up Quick Search with Search Option Buttons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Quick Search with Search Option Buttons

    +

    By default, the Polaris PowerPAC portal page includes a quick search feature that allows the patron to select a search filter. You can choose instead to supply a quick search feature with search option buttons.

    +

    To set up the quick search feature with search option buttons:

    +

    Note:
    You can set up the quick search with search option buttons at the system, library, or branch level. The settings for the organization to which the patron is connected determine whether this feature is available.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Quick search button configuration. The Quick Search Button Configuration dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Select (check) Enable quick search buttons. The remaining options become available for selection.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Enable quick search buttons but do not select any specific buttons, Polaris PowerPAC will use the default quick search feature instead of the quick search with buttons.

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) each button option that you want to display for quick search.
    2. +
    3. Select the search type (Browse or Keyword) that each selected button should launch.
    4. +
    +

    Notes:
    Anywhere always launches a keyword search for the search text in any indexed field in the bibliographic records. This type of search is also launched if a patron presses ENTER without selecting a search option button.

    Fiction and Nonfiction also launch keyword searches in any indexed field, but filtered by fiction or nonfiction as appropriate. The system determines whether a title is fiction or non-fiction by the following bibliographic record information:

    Fiction - 008/33= 1, c, d, f, h, j, p

    Nonfiction - 008/33 = 0, e, i, s

    Selecting My Library searches only your library's database.

    If your library subscribes to EBSCO Discovery Service (EDS) and has integrated EDS with Polaris PowerPAC, selecting My Library plus Articles searches your library's database plus articles from EDS.

    +

    Keyword search results are presented as a list of titles that match the search criteria. The results are sorted by relevance. Brief information is presented about each title, and the patron can select various options to see more information. See Displaying PAC Search Results.

    +

    Browse search results initially present the portion of the index or title listings that begins with the search text. Patrons can browse through the index or title listings and select an entry to see the titles associated with the entry.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Default quick search settings - If you choose to use the default quick search instead of the quick search with search option buttons, you can set certain values that apply to every quick search. See Specifying Default Search Settings.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_rotating_book_jackets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_rotating_book_jackets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e1d74c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Set_up_rotating_book_jackets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up rotating book jackets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up rotating book jackets

    +

    If you subscribe to an enriched data service, you can display book jacket images drawn from the enriched data source, randomly selected from the titles in the best-seller lists provided for dashboards. See Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters. A different image is displayed each time the portal page is accessed or refreshed. When a patron selects the image, a search is launched in the catalog for the title. If the title is not found in the catalog, the patron can click an email link to the library to request that the title be purchased. To set up rotating book jackets (system, library, or branch level):

    +
      +
    1. Set up the subscription to the enriched data service. For more information about enriched data, see Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.
    2. +
    3. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PAC tab in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enriched data.
    6. +
    7. Enable cover images from your enriched data provider.
    8. +
    9. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    10. +
    11. Double-click Rotating best seller jacket on portal page, and select Yes.
    12. +
    13. Select File, Save.
    14. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Email server and address for purchase request - When a search on the book jacket returns no results in the library catalog, the patron can request that the library purchase the title. Any email from PAC, including the purchase request, requires you to specify the SMTP server in Polaris Administration. Double-click the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service, and type the domain name of the email SMTP server. The purchase request goes to the email address specified for Ask Us email. See Set up and start Ask Us.
    • +
    • Rotating book jackets and content carousels - A content carousel is a rotating graphical representation of a library-specified list of materials in the local library catalog. The PowerPAC user can click any title in the carousel to launch a search for the title. While it is possible to enable both rotating book jackets and content carousels on the portal page, the result will likely confuse the user since the features may appear somewhat similar but serve different purposes. Innovative recommends that you enable one or the other of these features, but not both. If you do enable both, the content carousel appears below the rotating book jacket image. See Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Polaris_PowerPAC_Themes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Polaris_PowerPAC_Themes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..346b74a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Polaris_PowerPAC_Themes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Polaris PowerPAC Themes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Polaris PowerPAC Themes

    +

    You can change the overall appearance of your library’s Polaris PowerPAC, without complex coding, by choosing a page theme (skin). You can set themes at the system, library, or branch level. When a patron connects to Polaris PowerPAC, the connection branch’s theme is displayed. If you allow patrons to switch branches, the theme changes according to the selected branch’s setting. Five themes are available: Ocean (the default), Pomegranate, Mint, Black & Gold, and Gray. You can also set the dashboard position (left or right side of the page) for any theme you select.

    +

    To set a Polaris PowerPAC theme and dashboard position:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Theme selection, and select a theme from the drop-down list.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Theme dashboard position, and set the position of the dashboard (Left or Right) for your selected theme.
    6. +
    +

    Note:

    This setting does not affect the product page (full display) for an entry in the user’s search results. The product page dashboard is always on the right.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    3. Reload PowerPAC pages to see your changes. See Setting Up Polaris PowerPAC - Overview.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Editing theme fonts and colors - Theme appearance is controlled by a shared style sheet (.css) file. You can override fonts, colors, and link appearance for a custom theme. For more information, see Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.
    • +
    • Editing text on Polaris PowerPAC pages - You can edit most of the text on Polaris PowerPAC pages no matter what theme is chosen, and preserve your changes from being overwritten if the application is updated and reinstalled. See Customizing Language Strings.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_Live_Virtual_Reference_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_Live_Virtual_Reference_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bea1bb0e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_Live_Virtual_Reference_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Live Virtual Reference Services + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Live Virtual Reference Services

    +

    If your library contracts for services with a virtual reference service provider, you can offer online reference services in live chat format through Polaris PowerPAC. Polaris currently supports virtual reference services from Tutor.com (Virtual Reference Toolkit™) and QuestionPointSM from OCLC Online Computer Library Center, Inc. The provider can be set at the branch level, and different organizations in the system can use different providers. However, a branch can offer only one provider at a time.

    +

    Tutor.com services require a patron logon to use live virtual reference. If you use QuestionPoint services, you can require a patron logon or allow users to access virtual reference services as “guests” without logging on.

    +

    When the virtual reference service is enabled, a link at the bottom of most PowerPAC pages leads to the reference service. If a search is unsuccessful, Polaris PowerPAC also displays a prompt to use the service. A patron selects the link, logs on, and types a question. The question, along with patron identification information, is sent to the provider’s URL.  If you do not require users to log on for QuestionPoint, the Guest link on the log-on page goes directly to the QuestionPoint site, and users submit their questions at the site. Polaris records a transaction for every virtual reference session.

    +

    In addition, patrons can access their patron accounts to see a list of their virtual reference sessions. Only logged-on sessions are listed. The session list includes the date and time the session was ended and the original question. From the list, the patron may be able to view a detailed transcript of the session. The branch where the patron is logged on (not necessarily the patron’s registered branch) must be set up for the specific provider in order to display that provider’s transcripts in the patron account. The information available in a transcript varies by virtual reference provider, and some virtual reference providers may not support stored transcripts. Currently, both Tutor.com and QuestionPoint support transcripts viewable from the PAC.

    +

    To make a virtual reference service available:

    +
      +
    1. Establish an agreement with a virtual reference service.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Obtain the settings you need for this procedure from the virtual reference provider. See later steps in this procedure for the appropriate list of settings. Be sure the provider is aware of which Polaris PowerPAC page patrons should return to when they exit from the provider’s site.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Virtual reference: Enable, and select Yes. This setting displays the virtual reference link on Polaris PowerPAC pages, and allows access to the virtual reference session history from the patron account.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Virtual reference: Supplier, and select your virtual reference provider from the list.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Virtual reference: Configure. The Virtual Reference Configure dialog box opens with the Tutor.com tabbed page displayed.
    8. +
    +

    + VirtRefTut.gif 

    +

    Note:
    You need specific information from the provider to do the next steps.

    +
      +
    1. If your provider is Tutor.com, set the following connection profiles on the Tutor.com tabbed page:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Category, DB Name, DB Login, DB Password, Interact Server, Live Server - Obtain these site-specific values from Tutor.com.
    • +
    • Main URL - URL that connects to the Tutor.com virtual reference librarian
    • +
    • Partition - Obtain this site-specific value from Tutor.com.
    • +
    • Transcript URL - URL that retrieves virtual reference history for a patron
    • +
    • View Port - Your Polaris PowerPAC home page URL
    • +
    +
      +
    1. If your provider is QuestionPoint, set the following profiles on the QuestionPoint tabbed page:
    2. +
    +

    + QPoint_Config.gif 

    +
      +
    • Library ID, Category - Obtain these site-specific values from OCLC. +
    • +
    • Partner ID - Not needed
    • +
    • Main URL - URL that connects to the QuestionPoint virtual reference librarian
    • +
    • Transcript URL - Not needed
    • +
    • View Port - Your Polaris PowerPAC home page URL
    • +
    • Log in required - If you want to restrict access to registered patrons, select (check) this option. If this option is not checked, a Guest button is displayed on the virtual reference log-in page. The user can click Guest to go straight to the QuestionPoint Web site and submit a question.
    • +
    • No Login URL - If you do not require log-in, type the QuestionPoint URL to which the Guest link should connect.
    • +
    +

    For more information about setting up QuestionPoint virtual reference, go to

    +

    http://questionpoint.org/support +

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your settings for the currently selected provider and close the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Click X in the upper right corner of the dialog box to cancel your changes for the currently selected provider and close the dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Restart the Internet Information Server (IIS). Polaris Hosted customers should contact Polaris Customer Support to perform an IIS reset.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Email reference service - You can allow patrons to send reference questions to your library via email. See Set up and start Ask Us.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_RSS_Feeds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_RSS_Feeds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3b3c78c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Setting_Up_RSS_Feeds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up RSS Feeds + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up RSS Feeds

    +

    Real Simple Syndication (RSS) is a method of publishing links to content on your Web site. You can allow patrons to set up RSS feeds for new titles from Polaris PowerPAC directly to a Web site such as My Yahoo!. When the feed is received, the patron can click the link on the Web site to see a list of new titles in your library catalog and launch a catalog search for a specific title. Polaris PowerPAC is RSS 2.0 compliant.

    +

    Processing for the RSS feed is related to Polaris PowerPAC’s New Titles dashboard feature (see Automatic Web Parts). Automatic processing for the New Titles Web part occurs nightly via the SQL job Dashboard_NewTitles, and the dashboard links contain new titles for the past 31 days. For the RSS feed, background processing updates the current New Titles list hourly via the SQL job RSS_PopulateNewTitles. If you want to test RSS feeds after setup, you can run this job manually.

    +

    Set these PowerPAC profiles to control RSS feeds:

    +
      +
    • RSS Feeds: Enable - Allows RSS feeds from Polaris PowerPAC. This profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels.
    • +
    • RSS Feeds: Maximum new releases - Specifies how many titles should be listed in the RSS feed that the patron receives. This profile is available at the system level only; that is, it controls the number for every branch that enables RSS feeds.
    • +
    +

    When RSS is enabled, an orange RSS icon appears in the New Titles dashboard.

    +

    + +

    +

    Patrons can click the icon to set up feeds, or click What’s RSS? for more information about how to set up RSS feeds and where to find readers. When you click the RSS icon, the RSS feeds are listed in the center area of the page. If you have a Windows-based reader such as SharpReader, you can drag each feed’s orange XML icon to the reader. If you have a Web-based RSS news reader such as My Yahoo!, you copy the URL for the feed and paste it into the appropriate field on the news reader’s RSS set-up page. If the patron subscribes to the RSS feed while connected to the system organization, the feed supplies all new titles in the system. If the patron subscribes to the feed while connected to a branch organization, the feed supplies all new titles for the branch.

    +

    When RSS is enabled, the header of the Polaris PowerPAC default.aspx page includes link tags that contain the RSS URLs. This allows RSS-aware browsers such as Firefox® to recognize the RSS feeds automatically when the user navigates to the portal page. Also, certain RSS programs such as SharpReader allow the user to enter the main URL of the Web site. For these programs, the patron can enter the main Polaris PowerPAC URL. The RSS program recognizes the links in the page header and subscribes to the feeds automatically.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Type of Material Filters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Type of Material Filters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2d9cc50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/Type of Material Filters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,819 @@ + + + + + + + Type of Material Filters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Type of Material Filters

    +

    The standard formats/material types are derived from the bibliographic records. The Polaris database includes a Type of Material search access point, which finds the formats and types of materials defined in the Z39.89 standard for MARC bibliographic records, as well as several Polaris-specific types. Formats are identified in the LDR/06, LDR/07, 006/00 or 007/00 fields of the MARC record. Types of material are identified in the LDR/06, LDR/07, 006/00, 007/00, 008/21, 008/23, or 008/29 fields. For details, see Type of Material Codes (TOMs). You can offer any, all, or none of these as options in the Limit by list. In addition to selecting a format/material type filter from the Limit by list, patrons can do a Boolean (CQL) search for any format/type of material using the access point TOM =. For more information about CQL, see Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters.

    +

    In PAC search results, an icon indicates the format/type for a title. A tooltip identifies the icon. If several formats/types are associated with a title, a programmed order of precedence determines which icon is displayed. Users can see all the formats/types in the record in the detailed information view of the title.

    +

    You can also use CQL commands to set up custom filters for the Limit by list. You can offer only standard formats/types of material, only your custom filters, or any combination of the two.

    +

    Note:
    Search filters do not apply to title searches launched from the dashboard.

    +

    The table lists the standard types of material (TOM) by name and code, the TOM’s corresponding icon, and the icon filename. These are the default TOM filters available for the Limit by list.

    +

    Note:
    By default, the TOM icon files are located at C:\Program Files\Polaris\{version}\PowerPAC\themes\shared\formats on your PowerPAC server. See the table below for icon filenames. If you edit an icon file, be sure to back up your changes so you can replicate them after an upgrade.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Format/Type of Material

    +
    +

    Code

    +
    +

    Icon

    +
    +

    Icon Filename

    +
    Enabled by Default
    +

    Abstract

    +
    +

    abs

    +
    +

    + formatid39.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid39.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Archival/mixed materials

    +
    +

    mix

    +
    +

    + formatid07.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid07.gif

    +
    N
    Atlasatl + + formatid47.gifY
    +

    Audio books

    +
    +

    abk

    +
    +

    + formatid37.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid37.gif

    +
    Y
    Audio book on cassetteabt + + formatid53.gifY
    Audio book on CDabc + + formatid52.gifY
    +

    Blu-Ray Disc

    +
    +

    brd

    +
    +

    + formatid40.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid40.gif

    +
    Y
    Blu-Ray + DVDbdv + + formatid45.gifY
    +

    Book

    +
    +

    bks

    +
    +

    + formatid01.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid01.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Book + Cassette

    +
    +

    bcs

    +
    +

    + formatid43.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid43.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Book + CD

    +
    +

    bcd

    +
    +

    + formatid42.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid42.gif

    +
    Y
    Book + DVDbkv + + formatid46.gifY
    +

    Braille

    +
    +

    brl

    +
    +

    + formatid28.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid28.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Cartographic material

    +
    +

    cmt

    +
    +

    + formatid03.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid03.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Digital collection

    +
    +

    dmc

    +
    +

    + formatid38.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid38.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    DVD

    +
    +

    dvd

    +
    +

    + +

    +
    +

    formatid33.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    EAudioBook

    +
    +

    aeb

    +
    +

    + formatid41.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid41.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Ebooks

    +
    +

    ebk

    +
    +

    + formatid36.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid36.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Electronic resources

    +
    +

    elr

    +
    +

    + formatid06.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid06.gif

    +
    Y
    Emagazineemg + + formatid50.gifY
    +

    Globe

    +
    +

    glb

    +
    +

    + formatid14.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid14.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Kit

    +
    +

    kit

    +
    +

    + formatid23.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid23.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Large print

    +
    +

    lpt

    +
    +

    + formatid27.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid27.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Manuscript cartographic material

    +
    +

    mcm

    +
    +

    + formatid12.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid12.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Manuscript material

    +
    +

    mss

    +
    +

    + formatid15.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid15.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Manuscript music

    +
    +

    mmu

    +
    +

    + formatid10.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid10.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Map

    +
    +

    map

    +
    +

    + formatid13.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid13.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Microform

    +
    +

    mic

    +
    +

    + formatid26.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid26.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Motion picture

    +
    +

    mot

    +
    +

    + formatid17.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid17.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Music CD

    +
    +

    mcd

    +
    +

    + formatid35.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid35.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Musical sound recording

    +
    +

    msr

    +
    +

    + formatid21.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid21.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Newspaper

    +
    +

    new

    +
    +

    + formatid25.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid25.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Nonmusical sound recording

    +
    +

    nsr

    +
    +

    + formatid22.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid22.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Periodical

    +
    +

    per

    +
    +

    + formatid24.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid24.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Printed cartographic material

    +
    +

    pcm

    +
    +

    + formatid11.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid11.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Printed music

    +
    +

    pmu

    +
    +

    + formatid09.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid09.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Printed or manuscript music

    +
    +

    mus

    +
    +

    + formatid02.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid02.gif

    +
    N
    +

    Projected medium

    +
    +

    pgr

    +
    +

    + formatid16.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid16.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Serial

    +
    +

    ser

    +
    +

    + formatid08.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid08.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Sound recording

    +
    +

    rec

    +
    +

    + formatid05.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid05.gif

    +
    Y
    Streaming musicstm + + formatid48.gifY
    Streaming videostv + + formatid49.gifY
    +

    Three-dimensional object (artifact)

    +
    +

    art

    +
    +

    + formatid20.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid20.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Two-dimensional nonprojected graphic

    +
    +

    ngr

    +
    +

    + formatid19.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid19.gif

    +
    Y
    Video gamevgm + + formatid44.gifY
    +

    Videorecording

    +
    +

    vid

    +
    +

    + formatid18.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid18.gif

    +
    Y
    +

    Videotape

    +
    +

    vcr

    +
    +

    + formatid34.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid34.gif

    +
    Y
    Vinylvyl + + formatid51.gifY
    +

    Visual materials

    +
    +

    vis

    +
    +

    + formatid04.gif 

    +
    +

    formatid04.gif

    +
    N
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/configuring_cookie_policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/configuring_cookie_policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b1a7de8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/configuring_cookie_policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + Configuring How Frequently the Cookie Policy Message Appears + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring How Frequently the Cookie Policy Message Appears +

    +

    When a patron clicks Accept, the cookie policy message disappears and does not reappear for a configurable period of time. You can configure different "cookie acceptance" periods for different types of users:

    +
      +
    • In-house patrons (patrons accessing PowerPAC at public workstations in the library)
    • +
    • External patrons (patrons accessing PowerPAC from home)
    • +
    +

    For In-house Patrons

    +

    For in-house patrons, PowerPAC uses the PowerPAC: Patron inactivity timeout profile setting to determine when to display the cookie policy message.

    +

    When an in-house patron clicks Accept, the cookie policy message disappears and does not reappear until one of the following conditions causes it to reappear:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    If the patron is + And + The following occurs +
    Signed inSigns out of PowerPACThe cookie policy message appears.
    Signed inLeaves the workstation without signing out +

    The cookie policy message appears when the Patron inactivity timeout period elapses.

    +

    If this profile is not enabled in Polaris Administration, the cookie policy message appears when the session timeout period elapses.

    +
    Not signed inLeaves the workstationThe cookie policy message appears when the session timeout period elapses.
    +
    +

    Notes: +

    +
      +
    • For more information about the Patron inactivity timeout profile setting, see Set inactivity timeout for in-house workstations.
    • +
    • PowerPAC's default session timeout period is 20 minutes. Contact Innovative Support to change the timeout period.
    • +
    +
    +

    For External Patrons

    +

    For external patrons, PowerPAC uses the system-level PowerPAC: Cookie acceptance: External workstation retention period profile setting to determine when to display the cookie policy message.

    +

    To configure how frequently the cookie policy message appears for external patrons +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, select SystemProfilesPowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. +

      On the PowerPAC tab, double-click the value beside the Cookie acceptance: External workstation retention period profile.

      +

      + +

      +
    4. +
    5. +

      Enter a value in days.

      +

      When an external patron accepts the cookie policy, the message disappears and does not reappear until the specified External workstation retention period elapses. By default, this profile is set to 365 days.

      +

      Note: +
      The cookie policy message reappears before the External workstation retention period elapses if the patron clears their browser cache and cookies.

      +
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/customizing_cookie_policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/customizing_cookie_policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a2d5402 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/customizing_cookie_policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + Customizing the Cookie Policy Message Text + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing the Cookie Policy Message Text

    +

    Two strings in the Polaris Web Admin Tool allow you to customize the cookie policy message:

    +
      +
    • PACML_PRIVACY_POLICY - Cookie policy message text
    • +
    • PACPROF_COOKIE_ACCEPT_BUTTON - Accept button label
    • +
    +

    By default, the cookie policy message includes links to Innovative's privacy policy and services privacy policy. You can edit the message to include links to your library's policies.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/enabling_cookie_policy_message.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/enabling_cookie_policy_message.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18c012f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/enabling_cookie_policy_message.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Enabling the Cookie Policy Message + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enabling the Cookie Policy Message

    +

    You can enable or disable the appearance of the cookie policy message at the system level.

    +

    To enable the cookie policy message +

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, select SystemProfilesPowerPAC.
    2. +
    3. +

      On the PowerPAC tab, set the Cookie acceptance: Enable profile to Yes.

      +

      + +

      +
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/powerpac_cookie_acceptance.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/powerpac_cookie_acceptance.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3efb9bde --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpower/powerpac_cookie_acceptance.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + Prompting PowerPAC Users to Accept Cookies + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Prompting PowerPAC Users to Accept Cookies

    +

    You can configure PowerPAC to display a message that informs patrons that the site uses cookies and prompts them to agree to the use of cookies.

    +

    When you enable this feature, the following message appears at the bottom of each PowerPAC screen. The message formatting matches your PowerPAC theme.

    +

    + +

    +

    When a patron clicks Accept, the message disappears.

    +

    By default, the cookie policy message is not enabled.

    +

    To enable and manage the cookie policy message +

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Enabling_Online_Book_Purchases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Enabling_Online_Book_Purchases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d286d5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Enabling_Online_Book_Purchases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enabling Online Book Purchases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enabling Online Book Purchases

    +

    You can set up either or both of two features to give patrons the ability to purchase materials through Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    • You can set up Purchase links for titles in PAC search results. When a patron clicks the link, a search for the title is launched at a specified online bookstore site.
    • +
    • You can set up Polaris Bookstore by specific contract, and receive back a portion of the sales as a donation to the library. The patron can click a Buy It Now link for titles available at the Bookstore, or browse the Bookstore through a Shop Now link.
    • +
    +

    If you have a Polaris Bookstore contract and you enable both options, the Buy It Now link is displayed when the title is available at the Bookstore, and the Purchase link is displayed when the title is unavailable at the Bookstore and the title has an ISBN.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Polaris_Bookstore.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Polaris_Bookstore.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5fe7a46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Polaris_Bookstore.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Polaris Bookstore + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Polaris Bookstore

    +

    Through Polaris Bookstore and Baker & Taylor Inc., your library can establish an online bookstore where patrons can purchase materials at a discount comparable to other major online retailers, and your library receives a portion of the sales as a donation. The Bookstore is customized for your library, with your own graphics, URL prefix, and custom packing slip text. Polaris Bookstore is available to your library by specific contract with Baker & Taylor.

    +

    When a title in a patron’s search results is available in the Bookstore, the patron can click a Buy It Now link in the title product page to purchase the title. (If the title is not available at the Bookstore, no link is displayed.)

    +

    Note:
    For information about Buy It Now links in Mobile PAC, see Title Link: Purchase or Buy It Now.

    +

    You can also place a “shop now” button on your library’s Web site, or promote the bookstore with a link in the custom content area of the portal page. Patrons can search or browse the store and order any available title, placing their purchases in an online shopping cart and paying by credit card.

    +

    Baker & Taylor maintains the bookstore site and handles any returns. You receive your portion of the proceeds at regular intervals as determined by your Polaris Bookstore contract. You work with your Polaris Site Manager to set up your bookstore profile. When the bookstore is implemented, ongoing support is provided by Innovative.

    +

    Polaris Bookstore works well for library consortia, because each organization that wants to participate can have its own bookstore. The proceeds are distributed to the appropriate organizations. (If the consortium office itself set up a bookstore for the whole consortium, the consortium office is responsible for dividing the proceeds appropriately.)

    +

    You can set up Polaris Bookstore at the system, library, or branch level. To make Polaris Bookstore available from Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC:

    +

    Important:

    This procedure is included for your information only. Your Polaris Site Manager enters the appropriate Polaris Bookstore settings for your site.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Purchase Options. The Purchase Options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Click the Polaris Bookstore tab.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable. The other data fields become available.
    2. +
    3. In the Home Page URL box, type the value specified by Baker & Taylor. This profile is the Bookstore home page link, typically displayed when the patron clicks Shop Now. The patron can browse the Bookstore from this page.
    4. +
    5. In the URL prefix (before ISBN) box, type the value specified by Baker & Taylor. The prefix and suffix settings control the Bookstore search result page that appears when the patron clicks Buy It Now.
    6. +
    7. In the URL suffix (after ISBN) box, type the value specified by Baker & Taylor.
    8. +
    9. Type your site’s user name in the Username box.
    10. +
    11. Type your site’s password in the Password box.
    12. +
    13. Click OK.
    14. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Shop Now dashboard link - You can place a link to the library’s Polaris Bookstore site on the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard. See Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.
    • +
    • Polaris Bookstore on the portal page - You can promote the Polaris Bookstore on your Polaris PowerPAC portal page using custom content. See Set up custom portal page content.
    • +
    • Vendor purchase links - You can offer a Purchase link to another vendor’s site. See Setting Up Purchase Links.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Purchase_Links.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Purchase_Links.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b8d69e75 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOpurchase/Setting_Up_Purchase_Links.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Purchase Links + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Purchase Links

    +

    You can provide Purchase links for titles in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results. When a patron clicks or taps the link, a search for the title is launched at a specified online bookstore site, based on the ISBN or ISSN of the title. You can specify a local book store that offers online purchasing, or one of the larger online merchants such as Amazon.com®. Any purchase transaction takes place between the patron and the book vendor; the library does not mediate the transaction in any way. Each branch may define a different online book store.

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC, when the patron clicks or taps Purchase on the title product page, the vendor’s site is displayed in a new browser window.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    For information about Purchase links in Mobile PAC, see Title Link: Purchase or Buy It Now.

    +

    To set up Purchase links for titles listed in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results:

    +
      +
    1. Use a Web browser to display the search page for the online book store to which you want to direct your patrons for their purchases.
    2. +
    3. Do an ISBN search for any title and retrieve the title information, leaving your browser window open.
    4. +
    5. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    6. +
    7. Double-click Purchase Options. The Purchase Options dialog box opens. The Generic Link tabbed page is displayed.
    8. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. On the Generic Link tabbed page, select (check) Enable. The other data fields become available.
    2. +
    3. In the Address (or Location) box on your browser, copy everything before the ISBN of the title you found, and paste it into the URL prefix (before ISBN) box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Depending on the vendor’s search methods, you may not be able to extract the information from the URL at the vendor’s web site. In this case, check the vendor’s online Help file or contact the vendor for instructions.

    +
      +
    1. In the Address (or Location) box on your browser, copy everything after the ISBN, and paste it into the URL suffix (after ISBN) box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Polaris Bookstore - You can set up Polaris Bookstore by specific contract with Baker & Taylor, and receive back a portion of the sales as a donation to the library. See Setting Up Polaris Bookstore.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Bulk_Hold_Requests_PowerPAC_Title_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Bulk_Hold_Requests_PowerPAC_Title_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54de98e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Bulk_Hold_Requests_PowerPAC_Title_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists

    +

    When you enable the bulk holds feature, patrons can select multiple titles from their working or saved title lists in Polaris PowerPAC and place hold requests on all the selected titles at once.

    +

    Note: +
    For more information about PAC title lists, see Setting Up PAC Title Lists. A Requested date indicator is also available to let patrons know which titles they have already requested in a title list or set of search results. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    The bulk holds feature is not available in these cases:

    +
      +
    • Titles from remote databases listed in the title list cannot be requested through bulk holds.
    • +
    • Integrated eContent titles cannot be cannot be requested through bulk holds.
    • +
    • The bulk hold feature does not apply to Borrow by Mail requests.
    • +
    • The bulk hold feature is not available in Mobile PAC.
    • +
    +

    For details, see:

    + +

    Placing Bulk Hold Requests in PowerPAC

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC, the logged-in patron checks at least one title in a working or saved title list and clicks or taps Place Request.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • The Place Request button is disabled if the patron has not selected at least one title in the list. The button is also disabled for secured patrons. (The button is not displayed at all if PAC title-level holds and bulk holds have not been enabled in Polaris administration. See Enabling Bulk Holds.)
    • +
    • You can edit the Place Request button label in Polaris WebAdmin. The string mnemonic is PACML_REQUESTS_1380. See Polaris WebAdmin online help.
    • +
    • If the patron has selected more titles than allowed by the PowerPAC profile Title list: maximum number of titles to request in bulk, the system displays a message: "You can only place [n] holds at once. Uncheck one or more titles and try again." You can edit the message in Polaris WebAdmin; the string mnemonic is PACML_REQUESTS_MAXREQ
    • +
    +

    Place Requests Page +

    +

    When the patron's selections meet the bulk hold limit and the patron clicks or taps Place Requests, the Place Requests page is displayed. The patron can set an activation date; the patron can also select a pickup library and enter a note if these features are enabled for patron-initiated requests. See Managing Hold Requests for more information about these settings. This page also displays a policy statement link if the PAC profile Patron access: Policy statement hypertext link permitted is set to Yes for the connection branch.

    +

    Note: +
    The activation date must be entered in the format displayed on the Place Requests page. It cannot be in the past, and cannot be more than two years from the current date. If there is a problem with the date entry, the system displays a message. The patron clicks or taps OK and re-enters the date.

    +

    + +

    +

    You can edit the Place requests: title on this page in Polaris WebAdmin. The string mnemonic is PACML_REQUESTS_1380.

    +

    The Place Requests page displays a warning message if the system-level Request parameter Holds Options (Charges tab) is set to charge for holds. See Set Holds options: Charge for hold requests. The patron can click or tap OK to proceed or Cancel to exit. If your library system has set this option, you can edit the message in the Request parameter Holds Options, Charges tab.

    +

    The patron can click or tap Cancel on the Place Requests page to return to the title list, where any titles previously checked remain checked, or (if not blocked) the patron can select Continue to proceed with the bulk hold requests. A progress indicator and the message "Checking status and limits..." are displayed. The WebAdmin string mnemonic for the message is PACML_REQUESTS_1395.

    +

    If placing the hold requests would meet or exceed the maximum total number allowed for the patron as set in the Patron/Material Type policy table, and If the patron is blocked: Block in PAC is checked in the Holds Options parameter (Staff client & PAC tab), the system displays a page with a message: "Your requests cannot be placed because you have reached your limit of [n] requests. You may want to cancel some requests from your patron account, then try again." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for the message is ILL_BULK_BLOCKEDMAXNUMREQS. The patron can click or tap Back to return to the title list.

    +

    Confirm Bulk Requests Page +

    +

    When the patron clicks or taps Continue on the Place Requests page, the Confirm Bulk Requests page appears.

    +

    + +

    +

    The list displays the selected titles, and for each title, the material types of the items that can potentially satisfy the request. If the PAC profile Patron access: Display hold queue information is set to Yes for the patron's registered branch, the list includes an Active Requests column that displays how many other requests exist for the title. (This profile also affects the PAC patron account Requests page. See Controlling Patron Account Login and Access.) Titles with check boxes can be unchecked if the patron does not want them.

    +

    Titles without check boxes in the display cannot be requested at all, either because they are from remote databases, they are duplicates, they represent integrated eContent, the bibliographic record has been deleted but not yet removed by overnight processing, or due to item-related or patron-related conditions. A message specific to the error displays under the title of each request.

    +

    The Confirm Bulk Requests page displays appropriate messages if a request on a selected title or titles cannot be placed due to the following item-related conditions:

    +

    Note: +
    When no items can fill a request on a title and the checkbox is suppressed, the material type and active request information is also suppressed.

    +
      +
    • The title has no linked items and If no items are attached: Block in PAC checked in the Holds Options parameter (Staff client & PAC tab). The system displays this message under the title: "No items are available to fill your request. Contact the library for assistance." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_TEXT_NOITEMSAVAILABLE.
    • +
    • The title is linked to at least one item that is IN and Prevent on status: In is checked in the Holds Options parameter (Requests tab). The system displays this message under the title: "The request cannot be placed because a copy of this title is currently available at the library. You can obtain the item at the library." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_TEXT_ERR_COPYAVAILABLE.
    • +
    • All items associated with the title are restricted from being held. The system displays this message under the title: "Requests are not permitted for this title. Contact the library for assistance." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_TEXT_REQNOTPERMITTED.
    • +
    • +

      There are no item records linked to the title, or all the linked item records fit one or more of these conditions:

      +
        +
      • +

        Display in PAC is set to No (not checked) in the item record, or

        +
      • +
      • +

        The item circulation status is set to be suppressed from the PAC display in the PAC profile Suppress item display for the connection branch, or

        +
      • +
      • +

        The connection organization is the System, and the linked item is assigned to a branch that is set for suppression from PAC in the system-level PAC profile Suppress branches,

        AND

        +
      • +
      • Suppress All records is selected for the Type of Material (TOM) in the PAC profile Suppress availability and requests for the connection branch, or
      • +
      • Suppress Records with an 856 is selected for the Type of Material (TOM) in the PAC profile Suppress availability and requests for the connection branch. Note that this selection applies only to records with the 856$u tag.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    The system displays this message under the title: "Requests are not permitted for this title. Contact the library for assistance." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_TEXT_REQNOTPERMITTED.

    +
      +
    • All items associated with the title have an excluded status. The system displays this message under the title: "This item is not available to fill your request. Contact the library for assistance." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_TEXT_ITEMNOTAVAILABLE.
    • +
    • The title is from a remote database, or the bibliographic record has been deleted but the cached copy has not yet removed by overnight processing. The system displays this message under the title: "The library does not own this title. You cannot request this title from your title list. You can search for the title in a remote database and request it individually, or contact the library for assistance." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is PACML_REQUESTS_REMOTEDB.
    • +
    • All items linked to the title are restricted, and at least one item's eContent check box is checked. The system displays this message under the title: "You cannot request this eContent title through bulk requests. Please contact your library for more information." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_BULK_NO_ECONTENT.
    • +
    • The title is a journal and Allow requests on serials in PAC and Staff client is set in the Holds options parameter, Requests tab (Manage item requests). The system displays this message under the title: "Serial issues must be searched for and requested individually." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_BULK_SERIALSNOREQ.
    • +
    • The title is a multi-part set and Allow requests on multi-part sets is set in PAC and Staff client is set in the Holds options parameter, Requests tab (Manage item requests).The system displays this message under the title: "Multi-volume sets must be searched for and requested individually." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is ILL_BULK_MULTIPARTNOREQ.
    • +
    • The title appears in the list more than once, so the system does not allow the duplicate request. The system displays this message under the title: "This title is a duplicate of another title in this list." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for this message is PACML_REQUESTS_1396.
    • +
    +

    The Confirm Bulk Requests page also displays appropriate messages if a request on a selected title or titles cannot be placed due to patron-related conditions as specified in Polaris Administration. See Managing Hold Requests for more information about these settings. The following situations are examples:

    +
      +
    • Placing a hold request on a title would result in a duplicate request. The system displays this message: "The request cannot be placed because a duplicate request has been found. Please check your account." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for the message is ILL_TEXT_DUPLICATEREQ.
    • +
    • If placing these hold requests would exceed the maximum total number allowed for the patron as set in the Patron/Material Type policy table, and If the patron is blocked: Block in PAC is checked in the Holds Options parameter (Staff client & PAC tab) for the pickup branch, the system displays a message: "You currently have [n] total requests. You are allowed a maximum of [n]. Uncheck [n] and click Update." The WebAdmin string mnemonic for the message is ILL_BULK_ILL_BULK_EXCEEDMAXREQUESTS.
    • +
    • Placing the hold requests would exceed the maximum number of holds for a particular material type for the patron as set in the Patron/Material Type policy table and If the patron is blocked: Block in PAC is checked in the Holds Options parameter (Staff client & PAC tab). The system displays this message: "You will exceed the maximum number of requests allowed for one or more material types:". The WebAdmin string mnemonic for the message is ILL_BULK_EXCEEDMATERIALLIMITS. Separate messages then detail the material types affected; for example:
      • "Book: maximum = 20; uncheck 4 of this type" (ILL_BULK_EXCEEDMATERIALLIMITS_UNCHECK)

      • "Audiobook: maximum = 5; limit reached, uncheck all of this type" (ILL_BULK_EXCEEDMATERIALLIMITS_UNCHECKALL)

    • +
    +

    Note: +
    For both maximum holds and maximum holds for material type, if the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium circulation - Patron blocks is set to Transacting branch, the pickup branch's setting for Block in PAC determines whether the patron can place the hold requests. If Consortium circulation - Patron blocks is set to Patron branch, the patron's registration branch setting for Block in PAC determines whether the patron can place the hold requests.

    +

    The Confirm Bulk Requests page may also display warning messages for certain titles with checkboxes:

    +
      +
    • An item attached to a selected title might fill the request, and the Patron Services parameter Check-out: Charge options for the item's assigned branch is checked for the logged-in patron's code. The default message text is "If your request is filled you may be charged to Borrow this item according to the policy of the owning library." You can edit the message in WebAdmin. The string mnemonic is ILL_BULK_CHARGECKOREQ.
    • +
    • The title has no linked items, but If no items are attached: Block in PAC is not checked in the Holds Options parameter (Staff client & PAC tab). The default message text is "This title has no items. Your request may not be filled." You can edit the message in WebAdmin. The string mnemonic is ILL_TEXT_NOITEMSAVAILABLE_BULK .
    • +
    +

    The patron can uncheck selected titles if necessary, and click or tap Update. If no titles are selected and the patron clicks or taps Update, a message is displayed: "You must select one or more titles, or click Cancel to return to your title list" (WebAdmin string mnemonic PACML_REQUESTS_1394). When the list is satisfactory, and after the patron has clicked ortapped Update to save any changes, the patron clicks or taps Confirm. If the patron clicks or taps Cancel, the display returns to the page of the title list that was displayed when the patron navigated away from the page; any titles previously checked remain checked.

    +

    You can edit the text of page elements on the Confirm Bulk Requests page in Polaris WebAdmin. The string mnemonics are as follows:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    LABELMNEMONIC
    Confirm bulk requestsPACML_REQUESTS_1381
    Click Update to make changes. Click Confirm to submit your hold requests.PACML_REQUESTS_1382
    TypePACML_REQUESTS_1383
    Active RequestsPACML_REQUESTS_1384
    TitlePACML_REQUESTS_1385
    UpdatePACML_REQUESTS_1386
    ConfirmPACML_REQUESTS_1387
    CancelPACML_REQUEST_XSL_1652
    +

    Bulk Requests Results Page +

    +

    When the patron clicks or taps Confirm, a "processing" spinner icon is briefly displayed with the message Creating requests . . .. You can edit the message in Polaris WebAdmin (string mnemonic PACML_REQUESTS_1393). When processing is complete, the system displays the Bulk Requests Results page with the message: Your requests were successfully placed!

    +

    + +

    +

    The patron can select Return to your Title List, Go to your list of hold requests, or Log Out. The labels can be edited in Polaris WebAdmin. The string mnemonics for the page are as follows:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    LABELMNEMONIC
    Bulk requests results: [page title]PACML_REQUESTS_1389
    Return to your Title ListPACML_REQUESTS_1392
    Go to your list of hold requestsPACML_REQUEST_GOTO_ACCOUNT
    Log Out PACML_BASICINFO_1195
    +

    Bulk Holds Processing

    +

    Bulk Holds processing uses two database tables: BulkHolds and BulkHoldsBibs. These tables are populated with data that is needed during bulk holds processing but are not required once the bulk holds process has completed. The Hold Request Cleanup Nightly SQL job includes a Bulk Holds Cleanup step. This step deletes all entries in the BulkHolds and BulkHoldsBibs tables that are over 120 minutes old. See Polaris SQL Jobs Reference.

    +

    Enabling Bulk Holds

    +

    To enable bulk hold requests:

    +
      +
    1. Confirm that the setting Enable title-level hold requests from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC is checked for the connection branch (Request parameter Holds options, Requests tab). See Set Holds Options: Enable Hold Requests by Patrons and Define Restrictions.
    2. +
    3. Set the PowerPAC profile Title list: Enable bulk holds to Yes.
    4. +
    +

    The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the system uses the PAC connection branch setting. When this profile is set to Yes and title-level hold requests from PAC are enabled, the Place Request button is displayed in working and saved title lists.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Set the number of titles that can be processed in one bulk hold request.
    2. +
    +

    The default number is 10. Change the setting with the PowerPAC profile Title list: maximum number of titles to request in bulk. The range is 1-100. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the system uses the PAC connection branch setting.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Product_Page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Product_Page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..abdc54be --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Product_Page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configuring the PowerPAC Product Page + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring the PowerPAC Product Page

    +

    The PowerPAC product page is displayed when a user clicks or taps a title, cover image, or Full Display for a title in the search results list. This page includes the bibliographic information set for the full display in the PAC profile Title display: Configure (see Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display). Since this information may be extensive, this section of the page can be scrolled. Below the bibliographic information is a series of expandable category “drawers” for availability information, enriched content, and other features. External links to other resources are indicated by an icon . (These links open in a new browser window.) The user can click Expand All or Collapse All to control the display of the drawer contents, or expand and collapse individual drawers. In Polaris Administration, you can set which drawers are expanded by default when the page is opened, and specify the display order of the drawers on the page. The illustration shows an example with drawers collapsed (not all drawers are shown).

    +

    + +

    +

    To configure the Polaris PowerPAC product page:

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Modify product page categories: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Product page categories: Configure. The Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box opens. The top portion lists the categories (features) that have been enabled for the organization.
    4. +
    +

    + ProductPageSAPPAC.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To set a category to be expanded in the initial product page display, check the category.
    2. +
    3. To change the display order, select the category and click the appropriate arrow at the side of the dialog box to move the category up or down in the display order.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Editing category labels - The Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box lists the language string ID for each category for use in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), where you can search for and edit the drawer labels. For more information, see the Language Editor online Help.
    • +
    • Enabling categories - The bottom portion of the Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box lists the features that are possible to display on the product page, but have not been enabled for the organization. For information about setting up the features that can be displayed on the product page, see also:
    • +
    • Enriched content from third parties - Enabling Enriched Data
    • +
    +

    Note:
    NoveList Select content drawers are not displayed for digital content (Polaris Fusion) bibliographic records.

    + +
      +
    • Librarian’s View - Set the PowerPAC profile Librarian’s (MARC) View: Enable to Yes.
    • +
    • Mobile PAC product page - You can use a separate profile to configure the product page for Mobile PAC. See Set up the Mobile PAC title (product) page.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Title_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Title_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1ea0272 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Configuring_the_PowerPAC_Title_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display

    +

    Polaris provides complete flexibility in selecting, editing, and displaying information in PAC search results. Using the PowerPAC profile Title Display: Configure, you can do the following:

    +
      +
    • + Select which bibliographic data elements appear in the initial search results list, on the summary view for a title, and in the full display. The brief display is the information shown in initial search results. The summary information is displayed when the user hovers the cursor over a cover image (desktop or tablet) or taps the image (phone). The full display appears on the product page, when the user selects Full Display or the title itself. +

    • +
    • Show multiple instances of a single tag in the brief display: for example, multiple 856$u fields.
    • +
    • Specify different elements for monographs and serials.
    • +
    • Suppress selected elements from display at narrow screen (cell phone) width.
    • +
    • Edit existing data elements.
    • +
    • Set the display order of the data elements.
    • +
    • Specify a custom label for each data element, and create translated versions of the data labels for languages you have licensed.
    • +
    • Specify any additional data elements you need (custom entities), selecting the tags, indicator values, and subfields to include in each custom entity.
    • +
    • Display a "requested" indicator for titles on which the patron has an active, pending, held, shipped, or located hold request. The indicator is a message: You requested this on [date]; the system supplies the date. The indicator can be displayed to logged-in patrons on the search results page, the title screen, the working title list, and saved title lists. The Brief and Full configuration view settings in the profile apply to both search results screens and title lists; that is, when you set the Requested date indicator to display in search results, it will also display in working and saved title lists.
    • +

      Note: +
      When enabled, the indicator is displayed only for requests that have been placed in Polaris. The requested indicator does not apply to integrated eContent titles.

      +
    • Copy all these settings from any organization to any other organization.
    • +
    +

    You can also use the PowerPAC profile Title Display: Number of characters in the Summary (Short) to specify the maximum number of characters of the Summary (Short) field that are displayed in the brief and full search results views for a title in the Polaris PowerPAC. By default, this profile is set to "0", and the number of characters displayed is not limited. When Summary field text exceeds the specified limit, Polaris PowerPAC displays truncated summary text followed by a More link. Users can click More to expand the display to show the entire summary, and click Less to collapse the display again.

    +

    The Mobile PAC profile Title Display: Configure provides similar flexibility for the Mobile PAC bibliographic results display, and you follow the same procedures to set up the display. See Configuring the Mobile PAC Title Display. For libraries that use Polaris Community Profiles, separate profiles control the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC displays of community information results, and a separate set of data elements is available for your community information displays. See Configuring the PAC Community Results Display.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Cross-Reference_Display_in_Browse_Search_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Cross-Reference_Display_in_Browse_Search_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3fc1f5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Cross-Reference_Display_in_Browse_Search_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cross-Reference Display in Browse Search Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cross-Reference Display in Browse Search Results

    +

    You specify the labels that identify cross-references in Polaris PowerPAC browse search results. Typical cross-reference labels are See and See Also. However, you can specify any text for cross-reference labels.

    +

    + +

    +

    You edit cross-reference labels in the Cross Reference Display Constants policy table, at the system, library, or branch level. Settings from the parent organization are used for the libraries or branches unless you change them at the lower level. The organization level at which the Cross Reference Display Constants table is opened determines the entries you see in the list, and you can view and change entries for the selected organization only. This table can be displayed on an organization workform or with the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify cross reference display constants table: Allow.

    +

    To edit the labels that identify cross-references:

    +

    Note:

    The cross-reference structure is set up when Polaris is implemented. You cannot add entries to this table or delete entries from it, only modify the text for the cross-reference labels.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Cross Reference Display Constants. The Cross-reference Display Constants table is displayed in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    The table may be blank at the library or branch level. Click btnInsert.gif to copy the entries from a higher level into the table for editing.

    +
      +
    1. To modify an entry, select the entry and click btnUpdate.gif. The Modify Cross Reference Display Constants dialog box appears. You can change only the Description text for an existing entry. You cannot delete an entry.
    2. +
    3. Click OK on the dialog box.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save any changes.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Action when a cross-reference is selected - The PowerPAC profile Perform a new search if a cross-reference is selected controls what happens when a cross-reference is selected. When this profile is set to Yes and a cross-reference is selected in the PAC browse headings index, the display is reset to the new location in the browse headings index. When this profile is set to No and a cross-reference is selected, the browse headings index remains at the same location, but the titles associated with the cross-reference are displayed.
    • +
    • Text in Titles column for “See” references - The PowerPAC profile Text: Headings count column for “See From” headings sets the characters that are displayed instead of a title count for a “See” cross-reference entry when no titles are associated with a heading. The default characters are hyphens --, but you can specify any characters.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Define_custom_entities.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Define_custom_entities.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1767a33b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Define_custom_entities.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Define Custom Entities + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Define Custom Entities

    +

    Custom entities can be defined at the system level only. To define new entities for display in PAC bibliographic search results:

    +

    Note:
    The maximum number of custom entities that can be defined at one time is 16,383. Internally, custom entities are assigned identifiers in the range of 16,384 and 32,767. The identifier number is displayed in the Entity Properties dialog box, Advanced tabbed page (Entity path).

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Modify and create display entities: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. Select System, PowerPAC profiles, Title Display: Configure to open the Title Display: Configure dialog box at the system level.
    2. +
    3. Click the new entity icon TitleDisplayNewEnt.gif at the top of the Available Entities list. The New Custom Entity dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Type a description for the entity. The description identifies the entity in the system, but does not display in PAC. Your description must contain at least one character and no more than 255 characters, and it must be unique within the set of bibliographic entities.
    2. +
    3. Type an initial label for the entity.
    4. +
    +

    The label will be displayed in PAC if this entity and its label are both set to display. Labels associated with custom entities do not have default values. The initial label that you specify is created for each language at the system level. You can later edit the label for specific languages; see Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels.

    +
      +
    1. If this entity is repeatable, select (check) Repeatable.
    2. +
    3. Click OK to save the new entity and close the New Custom Entity dialog box. The Entity Properties dialog box appears.
    4. +
    5. Define the tags, indicators, and subfields for the new entity:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. On the Entity Properties dialog box, click Define Entity.
    2. +
    3. See Edit a bibliographic entity definition for editing instructions.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Deleting a custom entity - You cannot delete a custom entity if it is currently used in any display configuration. Select the entity in the Available Entities list and click the delete icon TitleDispDelete.gif above the list. If the entity is currently in use, a message lists the configurations where it is used.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_Bound-With_Materials_in_the_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_Bound-With_Materials_in_the_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b6d589e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_Bound-With_Materials_in_the_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Selecting Bound-With Host and Constituent Links for Display in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Selecting Bound-With Host and Constituent Links for Display in PAC

    +

    Bound-with groups display in the PAC according to the settings in the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC Title Display Configuration profiles in Polaris Administration. The display entities, Constituent link and Host link, are system-generated and display as single strings that wrap, if necessary. The display entities are system-generated and cannot be edited, but the labels can be edited.   

    +

    + +

    +

    Libraries using bound-with features should be sure to add the display entities to the PAC views (especially brief and full) so PAC users will be able to see why individual titles were retrieved. In addition, they should add both host and constituent links to each view in which they want the linking entries to appear. Only one type of link will appear in any given record, depending on whether it is a host or constituent.

    +

    The constituent links display as active or “hot” links in on all displays (PowerPAC brief, summary, and full; and Mobile PAC details). The text of the hot links is equal to the value in the $t, $a, and $d equivalent fields (not the $w).

    +

    + See also Cataloging Bound-With Materials. +

    +

    Host Title Displays Constituent Links in the PAC

    +

    When the host title is displayed in the PAC, the titles bound within the volume display as active links next to the Constituent Part heading.

    +

    + +

    +

    In the Librarian’s View, the constituent titles are displayed in 774 tags, subfield t.

    +

    + +

    +

    Constituent Title Displays the Host Link in the PAC

    +

    When a user searches for a title that is a constituent in a bound-with group, the constituent title displays at the top level with the host title on the following line next to In.

    +

    + +

    +

    In the Librarian’s View, the host title is displayed in the 773 tag, subfield t.

    +

    + +

    +

    Item Display for Bound-With Group in the PAC

    +

    In the Availability display, the call number for a constituent title in a bound-with group is taken from the constituent call number tag, unless none has been defined. If a constituent does not have a call number, the host item’s call number is displayed.

    +

    + +

    +

    Hold Requests Placed in the PAC

    +

    Hold requests are placed on the host volume that contains the constituent titles of the bound-with group.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_PAC_Search_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_PAC_Search_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3e01bfc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Displaying_PAC_Search_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying PAC Search Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying PAC Search Results

    +

    You can control the information displayed in PAC search results for both bibliographic records and specific items (holdings).

    +

    Note:
    Certain settings described in this unit also affect Mobile PAC. For detailed information about Mobile PAC search results, see Mobile PAC Results Settings. Separate settings control the display of community information search results. See Configuring the PAC Community Results Display.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_a_bibliographic_entity_definition.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_a_bibliographic_entity_definition.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e265d05c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_a_bibliographic_entity_definition.htm @@ -0,0 +1,213 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit a bibliographic entity definition + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit a bibliographic entity definition

    +

    At the system level, you can edit the definitions (tags, indicators, subfields) of many bibliographic information display entities. However, the following system-defined entities cannot be edited:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Bibliographic call number

    +
    +

    Fiction

    +
    +

    Primary title

    +
    +

    Hold Request Count

    +
    +

    Primary author

    +
    +

    Holdings Note

    +
    +

    Snippet [the brief text string that shows the search terms in context]

    +
    +

    Local Availability (Available Local Item Count and Total Local Item Count)

    +
    +

    System Availability (Available System Item Count and Total System Item Count)

    +
    +

    OCLC Control Number

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    Publication year

    +
    +

    Available Local item Count

    +
    +

    Retention Statement

    +
    +

    Available System Item Count

    +
    +

    Total Local Item Count

    +
    +

    Control Number

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Count

    +
    +

    Type of Material

    +
    +

    Also note that certain fields are ordinarily displayed as hyperlinks leading to a browse search in PowerPAC (for example, author or subject). However, adding a tag to a materialization rule for that type of data does not automatically cause the field to be displayed as a hyperlink (that is, it is not added to the browse index).  The hyperlink will only occur if the tags, indicator values, and subfields selected for inclusion in the display correspond exactly to the fields that are already included in the browse index.

    +

    To edit existing entities for display in PAC search results:

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Modify and create display entities: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the system, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Title Display: Configure. The Title Display: Configure dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Right-click the entity in the Available entities list and select Properties from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    To display an entity for selection, you may need to click the Browse icon TitleDisplayBrwsIcon00554.gif at the top of the Available entities list. Select the entity in the Browse Entities dialog box and click Reveal to add the entity to the Available entities list.

    +
      +
    1. On the Entity Properties dialog box, click Define Entity. The Entity Definition dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + TitleDisplayEntityDef.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To add a new tag to the entity, click the ellipsis button in the Tags column.
    2. +
    +

    + TitleDisplayEntTagOpen.gif 

    +

    The Tag Picker dialog box opens.

    +

    + TitleDisplayTagPckr.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a tag or multiple tags:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To select one tag, click it in the grid, and then click Enable.
    • +
    • To select a contiguous range of tags, enter the beginning and ending tags in the Select range box, and click the + button to highlight the tags in the grid.  Then click Enable.
    • +
    • To select a non-contiguous set of tags, press CTRL+click to select the tags in the grid, and then click Enable.
    • +
    • To save your changes and close the dialog box, click OK. The Entity Definition dialog box is displayed.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To select indicator values, click the ellipsis button in the Ind1 or Ind2 column.
    2. +
    +

    + TitleDisplayIndCdOpen.gif 

    +

    The Code Picker dialog box opens.

    +

    + TitleDisplayCdPckr.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select an indicator value or multiple indicator values:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To select an indicator value, click it in the grid, and then click Enable.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The dot character in the upper left corner of the Code Picker grid indicates a space.

    +
      +
    • To select a contiguous range of indicator values, enter the beginning and ending values in the Select range box, and click the + button to highlight the values in the grid.  Then click Enable.
    • +
    • To select a non-contiguous set of values, press CTRL+click to select the values in the grid, and then click Enable.
    • +
    • To save your changes and close the Code Picker dialog box, click OK. The Entity Definition dialog box is displayed.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To select subfields, click the ellipsis button in the Subfields column to display the Code Picker dialog box, and follow the same steps you used to select the indicator values. See step 8.
    2. +
    3. When all the tags, indicators and subfields are defined for the entity, click Apply to permanently save your work and keep the Entity Definition dialog open, or click OK to permanently save your work and close the dialog box.
    4. +
    +

    Use the Change Labels dialog box to edit labels. See Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_bibliographic_information_display_order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_bibliographic_information_display_order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57a05d8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Edit_bibliographic_information_display_order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit bibliographic information display order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit bibliographic information display order

    +

    To insert a zone separator or set the entity display order:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Title Display Configure dialog box if it not already open, and select the view you want to arrange. See Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels.
    2. +
    3. To insert a zone separator:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Display these entities list, select the entity that should appear just below the new zone separator.
    2. +
    3. Right-click and select Create Zone from the context menu, or click the Create Zone icon TitleDisplayCreateZoneIcon.gif at the top of the Display these entities list.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To remove an existing zone separator, select it, right-click and select Drop Zone, or click the Drop Zone icon TitleDisplayDrZnIcon.gif.
    2. +
    3. To change the order in which the entities and zone separators are displayed, select the entity or zone separator and click the up or down arrow buttons at the top of the Display these entities list.
    4. +
    5. To suppress the field label (but not the entity itself) from the PAC display, select the data element in the Display these entities list, right-click, and select Show/Hide Label from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    In the Display these entities list, the label icon TitleDisplayLblIcon.gif indicates that the label is currently set to be shown.

    +
      +
    1. Save or cancel your work in the Title Display Configure dialog box:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To remove any changes that have not been applied and close the dialog box, click Cancel.
    • +
    • To remove any changes that have not been applied and keep the dialog box open, click Reset.
    • +
    • To permanently save changes and keep the dialog box open, click Apply.
    • +
    • To permanently save changes and close the dialog box, click OK.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    After saving your changes, use Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to reload PowerPAC. See Updating Page Caches.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Enabling_PAC_Title_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Enabling_PAC_Title_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..acba039d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Enabling_PAC_Title_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up PAC Title Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up PAC Title Lists

    +

    PAC users can place titles selected from their search results in a formatted title list that can be printed, saved, or sent by email. List formats include Brief Bibliographic, Full Bibliographic, Chicago Manual of Style, and APA.

    +

    As the user selects titles from search results, they are placed in a working list that is displayed in the dashboard.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC, the working list remains in the dashboard for the duration of the session. (For details about title list features in Mobile PAC, see Title Lists in Mobile PAC). Working title lists are limited to 100 titles. When the user tries to add more, the system displays a message advising the user to save the list. The example shows a portion of a working list when the user has clicked or tapped Show list details.

    +

    + +

    +

    Registered library patrons can create and save multiple title lists in association with their patron accounts. Whenever patrons log in, they can see and work with their saved lists. The example shows a portion of the dashboard for a logged-in patron with saved title lists.

    +

    + +

    +

    For more information:

    + +

    Selecting Multiple Titles in a List

    +

    In working and saved lists, the user can check multiple titles and move or copy them from a working list to a saved list or among saved lists, and print, email, or save to disk any list pages, as well as email the entire list. The user can also check single or multiple titles to place hold requests on the selected title or titles. if you choose to enable this feature (see Bulk Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Title Lists).

    +

    A Select Page check box is available at the top and bottom of the title list page in Polaris PowerPAC. When you select this check box, all titles on the current page are checked. A Remove from list button is also available for individual titles on working and saved title lists when displayed in Brief Bibliographic or Full Bibliographic format. You can click or tap Remove from list to remove a single title without first selecting the check box.

    +

    + +

    +

    The user clicks or taps the appropriate button at the bottom of the page to take action on the selected titles.

    +

    + +

    +

    Paging Title Lists

    +

    PowerPAC title lists offer paging. The user can choose to display 10 (the default), 20, 30, 50, or 100 titles per page from a drop-down control at the top or bottom of the list.

    +

    + +

    +

    Paging controls are available at the bottom of multi-page lists.

    +

    + +

    +

    Sorting Title Lists

    +

    The user can sort the brief and full views of working and saved title lists by date added to list (the default), author, publication date, or title. When you select a new sort order, the entire list is sorted even if it extends to multiple pages; the page refreshes and you return to the first page of the list. The selected sort order is retained in the output file when you select print, email list, or save to disk. When a logged-in patron selects a sort order in a saved title list, the sort order is retained the next time the patron logs in, and any titles added to the saved list are correctly sorted for that list.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    If you select the Chicago Manual of Style or APA format, the list is sorted according to the rules of those style guides, and that order is retained in the output file for print, email, or save to disk. If you switch back to the brief or full view, the sorting order is the one most recently selected for those views.

    +

    Printing and Emailing Title Lists

    +

    When you click or tap Printer Friendly or Email List on a working or saved title list, titles from the current list page are displayed in the printer-friendly view. You can click or tap Print Page, Save Page to Disk, or Email Page to to take action on the current page, or select Email all to, which emails the entire list to the designated address. Very long emails may exceed system or email service limits that prevent successful delivery. In this case, the system displays an alert message. The user can click or tap OK to close the alert and send the email, or Cancel to return to the title list. The user can then select a different display format, or select fewer titles.

    +

    Availability Information in Title Lists

    +

    Availability counts and availability details on working and saved title lists are automatically updated to reflect real-time data whenever the user displays the list.

    +

    Note: +
    As in previous versions of Polaris, availability details are available only on the working list.

    +

    When availability counts on the brief and full displays for the connected branch are set to display (PowerPAC profile - Title Display: Configure), the counts on working and saved title lists reflect real-time data when the patron displays the title list page. The counts are refreshed when the patron takes any action that refreshes the page; for example, leaving the page and returning; paging through a multi-page list; changing the sort order; changing the list format.

    +

    + +

    +

    When availability details on the brief and full displays for the connected branch are set to display (PowerPAC profile - Title Display: Configure), the working list displays the details when the patron selects Local Availability or System Availability from the Include Availability drop-down list. Availability details are also updated in real time when the patron takes any action that refreshes the page.

    +

    + +

    +

    Setting Up Title List Functions

    +

    To set up title list functions in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Title List: Enable, and select Yes.
    4. +
    5. To allow patrons to send title lists by email, double-click Title List: Email, and select Yes.
    6. +
    7. To allow patrons to print title lists, double-click Title List: Print, and select Yes.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    This setting does not apply to Mobile PAC. See Title Lists in Mobile PAC for details about Mobile PAC title list features.

    +
      +
    1. To allow patrons to save title lists to a computer drive or disk, double-click Title List: Save, and select Yes.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This setting does not apply to Mobile PAC. See Title Lists in Mobile PAC for details about Mobile PAC title list features.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information +

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Feature_It_Promotions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Feature_It_Promotions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a914b786 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Feature_It_Promotions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Feature It Promotions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Feature It Promotions

    +

    Libraries can use Feature It to generate awareness of relevant resources that might otherwise go undiscovered in the public access catalog or in the community. With Feature It, you can promote library materials, web resources, and/or community organizations and events in the context of specific search results, similar to “You might also like” features on many popular web sites.

    +

    Note:
    Feature It and Community Profiles are available by separate licenses.

    +

    Use the Cataloging Promotions function in the staff client to select resources to feature, and to specify the conditions under which they will be featured. See Managing Promotions.

    +

    Once promotions are set up, when one or more of the PowerPAC user’s search terms (16 words maximum) match the triggers and filters associated with one or more promotion records, promotion links are displayed in a position you specify on the PowerPAC search results screen. A maximum of 8 promotion links can be displayed. If more than 8 promotion links match the user’s search terms, a relevancy ranking formula is applied to select those most relevant to the user’s search terms. (Relevancy is based on the words entered as triggers in the promotion record, not on the metadata in the featured resource records.)

    +

    The example shows promotion links for community resources on the dashboard, and library material promotion links at the top of the search results list.

    +

    + +

    +

    For bibliographic searches, promotions may be displayed for keyword, phrase, exact, advanced, and Boolean searches by one of the following access points (Search by): Any field, Author, General notes, Publisher, Series, Subject, Title. Promotions are not available for course reserve searches or browse searches. However, when the user selects a heading in a browse search headings list, promotions are displayed along with the titles associated with the heading. The selected heading is considered to be the user’s search term when determining which promotions to display.

    +

    Promotions are also available for community keyword searches by one of the following access points: Any Field, Organization Name, Event Name, Services available, Subject, Notes. Promotions are not available for community browse searches, but when the user selects a heading in community browse results, promotions are displayed along with the records associated with the heading. As with bibliographic browse results, the selected heading is considered to be the user’s search term when determining which promotions to display.

    +

    When the user clicks a promotion for a bibliographic record, a deep link to the catalog, or a community/event record, a search is launched for the appropriate bibliographic or community/event record, and the record is displayed in the PowerPAC results list.

    +

    + +

    +

    When the user clicks a promotion link that is a URL for an external resource, a new browser window opens.

    +

    You can enable Feature It for library materials and web resources, community profile and event information (if licensed), or both, setting a separate display placement for each or presenting all promotions in one merged list. In the PAC display, the library icon LibraryIcon.gif indicates bibliographic materials. The briefcase icon BriefcaseIcon.gif indicates community information.

    +

    For library (bibliographic) material, the list header is You might also like these library materials and web pages. For community information, the list header is You might also like these community resources. For a merged list, the header is You might also like. You can edit the headers in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The language string IDs are:

    +
      +
    • Bibliographic materials - PACML_PACFEATURE_DASHHEAD
    • +
    • Community information - PACML_CIPACFEATURE_DASHHEAD
    • +
    • Merged list - PACML_FEATURE_DASHHEAD
    • +
    +

    In the staff client, use the Cataloging Promotions workform to set up promotions for specific resources (see Managing Promotions). To specify how the promotions are displayed in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +

    Note:
    You can set Feature It display options at the system, library, or branch level. The system uses the settings for the PowerPAC connection organization.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Feature It: Screen display options. The Feature It: Screen display options dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + FeatureItSA.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To set up Feature It for library materials and web resources:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable Feature It for library materials and web pages.This setting enables promotion links for library materials and featured URLs when the user searches for either bibliographic records or community information.
    2. +
    3. Select the promotion placement on the search results screen. You can select Dashboard area, Beginning of search results, or End of search results.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. To set up Feature It for community information:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable Feature It for community profiles. This setting enables promotion links for community information when the user searches for either bibliographic records or community information.
    2. +
    3. Select the promotion placement on the search results screen. You can select Dashboard area, Beginning of search results, or End of search results.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Community Profiles is a separately licensed feature.

    +
      +
    1. To display library materials and community profile information in one list:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Enable both options and choose the same display position for both. See steps 3 and 4.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Display library and community resources in a single merged list.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. If you have selected Dashboard area as the placement for an enabled Feature It option, set the maximum number of promotion links to show in an unexpanded dashboard list.
    2. +
    +

    The maximum (and default) value is 8 promotion links. Since this list can occupy considerable dashboard space at the top of the dashboard, forcing the user to scroll to see search filters and related searches, you might want to set the value to a lower number. In this case, the dashboard list displays a more link when appropriate. The user can click more to expand the list (up to 8 links) and less to collapse it. If you set this value to 0, the list is completely collapsed and the user must click a plus sign to expand it.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Google_Preview_for_PowerPAC_Search_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Google_Preview_for_PowerPAC_Search_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e95bbc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Google_Preview_for_PowerPAC_Search_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Google Preview for PowerPAC Search Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Google Preview for PowerPAC Search Results

    +

    Google Preview is a book viewer for every book that has a preview in Google Book Search. You can offer Google Preview for titles in the brief search results list, on the product page (full display) for a title, or in both locations. The Google Preview button is displayed only for titles with an ISBN match that have Google previews.

    +

    Note: +
    On rare occasions, a match is found but Google Preview fails to load when the user clicks the Google Preview button. Polaris PowerPAC displays the following message in this situation: Google Preview is not available for this title at this time.

    +

    The illustration shows the Google Preview button on the title product page.

    +

    + +

    +

    When you click the Google Preview button, the preview is displayed in a lightbox window (desktop computer or tablet) or full screen on a new browser tab (phone). The Preview controls are available to page through the preview.

    +

    + +

    +

    Use the PowerPAC profiles Google Preview: Enable on search results pages and Google Preview: Enable on full display to enable this feature in the brief search results and the product page for a title respectively. The profiles are available on the system, library, or branch level and are set to Yes by default.

    +

    Important:
    You do not need any kind of Google account ID to enable this feature, but Google’s terms of service document states that you cannot alter the Google Preview button image. For details, go to
     https://developers.google.com/books/branding

    +

    Note:
    If the PAC browser session is run directly on the PAC server, the following domain must be open for Google Preview to work properly:
    Port 80: www.google.com

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Highlighting_Titles_with_Local_Items_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Highlighting_Titles_with_Local_Items_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a341dbd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Highlighting_Titles_with_Local_Items_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Highlighting Titles with Local Items (PowerPAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Highlighting Titles with Local Items (PowerPAC)

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC search results, you can choose to highlight titles that have at least one local item. The items considered to be local are based on the connection organization’s settings in the Item Availability Display Order policy table (see Set up the local/system item availability display). This setting can help patrons quickly see the titles with locally owned items.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    If the connection organization is the system, or if only one local library or branch is defined as a connection organization, no titles are highlighted

    +

    Use the PowerPAC profile Highlight local items in matching title view to control whether these titles are highlighted. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. To highlight local items, set the profile to Yes. The default setting is No (do not highlight).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Map_It_Google_Maps_in_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Map_It_Google_Maps_in_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b71cbf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Map_It_Google_Maps_in_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Map It (Google Maps) in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Map It (Google Maps) in PAC

    +

    Using the JavaScript interface provided by Google Maps™, Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC offer a Map It feature that provides a visual guide to the location of items linked to titles in the patron’s search results list. The Map It feature offers all the zoom, pan, satellite and map imagery available on Google’s hosted mapping site.

    +

    Note:
    If the PAC browser session is run directly on the PAC server, the following domain must be open for Google Maps to work properly:
    Port 80: maps.google.com

    +

    When the patron clicks or taps Map It in the title product page (full display), a map displays bubble markers for branch locations that have linked items.

    +

    Note:
    For a description of the Map It display in Mobile PAC, see Title Link: Map It.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    On a desktop computer, the patron can place the cursor over a marker bubble to see the branch name.

    +

    + MapItHoverName.gif 

    +

    Click or tap the branch marker to see the branch’s address and hours.

    +

    + MapItHours.gif 

    +

    When you click or tap Get Directions in the hours window, you can get directions to the branch from any address. You enter the address and click or tap Go!. (If the patron is logged in, the primary address from the patron record is already filled in for convenience, but it can be changed.)

    +

    + MapItDirections.gif 

    +

    Note:
    No separate fees are required to enable Map It in Polaris PowerPAC, either by Google or Innovative Interfaces. However, to comply with Google’s terms of free use, the mapping feature must be accessible on the public Internet to any user; no private Intranet use is allowed without paying Google for the service. Also, public users of the service must not be charged any fee to use it. For details, see
    http://code.google.com/apis/maps/terms.html

    +

    For general information about Map It, see:

    + +

    For instructions on setting up Map It, see:

    + +

    PowerPAC Map It Option Display

    +

    The Map It drawer is displayed for any title in a results set whose # system items count in the PAC brief display is greater than 0. For more information about # system items, see Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display. The Map It button does not appear for any title whose # system items is 0, even when Google Maps is enabled for the connection organization.

    +

    The PAC profile Suppress availability and requests also controls whether the Map It drawer appears. If the bibliographic record meets the criteria for suppression as specified in this profile, the Map It option does not appear. For more information about these settings, see Suppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +

    Marker Display

    +

    The map displays markers for every branch that has at least one item for that title (that is, # local items is greater than 0). Default markers for branches that have items that are currently in are orange and display the number of copies in, while blue markers indicate branches that have no copies currently in. “In” is defined using the same rules that govern the # local items in count in the PAC brief display (see Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display). Non-circulating items are included in the availability counts, so an orange marker does not necessarily mean that an item can circulate outside the library. A text key explains the meaning of the markers.

    +

    + MapItKey.gif 

    +

    You can edit the explanatory text and the label on the Map It “drawer” itself with Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). Polaris provides a set of stock marker images in /Themes/Shared/Map/Pins/, so you can specify different marker shapes and colors.

    +

    Hours Display

    +

    When the patron clicks a map marker, details about the availability counts at that branch as well as address, phone, and hours open that day are listed. The details window uses the settings for the Polaris PowerPAC Hours page. For details, see Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Naming_Shelf_Locations.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Naming_Shelf_Locations.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84084c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Naming_Shelf_Locations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Naming Shelf Locations + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Naming Shelf Locations

    +

    If the PAC profile Item Availability: Display shelf location is set to Yes, the Availability view in the PAC displays the shelf location of an item, as specified by the setting in the Shelf Location box on the Item Record workform. Each branch can have its own shelf location descriptions. Typically, shelf locations are names of the various areas where items are currently shelved, such as the New Books Shelf, the Display Case, or the Atlas Stand.

    +

    Note:
    You can also define collections in Polaris. For example, a branch may have collections named Genealogy, Non-Fiction, Children, and Reference. Any collection you define can be shown, along with call number and shelf location, in the Availability view in the PAC. Shelf locations are not related to collections, and you do not need to define collections to use shelf locations.

    +

    Entries in the Shelf Locations database table determine the branch’s shelf location options in an item record. You can open the table from the system, library, and branch levels, but entries are branch-specific. Shelf locations are not inherited or shared from the parent organizations. If you open the table at the system level, you can view, add, and change shelf locations for any branch. If the table is opened at the library level, you can view, add, or change shelf locations for the branches in the selected library. If the table is opened at the branch level, you can view, add, or change entries for the specific branch.

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify shelf locations table: Allow.

    +

    To define shelf location options for an organization’s item records:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Database Tables folder for the organization, and select Shelf Locations. The Shelf Locations table appears in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To better manage memory, a program-defined row limit determines whether this table can be opened at a specific organizational level. For example, if the table is opened at the system level and would require more than the limit (comprising entries from all branches) to be loaded, you will see a message advising you to open the table at a lower organizational level.

    +

    + ShelfLocTabl.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00558.gif to display the Shelf Locations dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dShelfLocInDx.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch that needs the shelf location in the Organization list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Shelf Locations policy table is opened at the branch level, only that branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the shelf location in the Description box, and click OK. The new entry is displayed in the Shelf Locations database table for the selected branch. Modification pending appears in the status bar.
    2. +
    3. Repeat steps 2-4 until you have listed all shelf locations for the branch.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate00559.gif. You can change only the description for an existing shelf location entry. Your changes should be limited to correcting spelling unless the location name has changed; for example, the Children’s Reading Room officially becomes the Young Readers’ Center.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Changes to a shelf location description are applied to all item records that used the original description of the entry.

    +
      +
    • Delete an entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete00560.gif.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    You cannot delete a shelf location description if it is used by any item record in Polaris. Use the Bulk Change tool on the Record Set workform to change the shelf location on item records that use the entry, so you can delete the entry.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/One_Click_Hold_Requests.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/One_Click_Hold_Requests.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fdcce0a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/One_Click_Hold_Requests.htm @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ + + + + + + + + + One-Click Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Search Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    One-Click Hold Requests from Polaris PowerPAC Search Results

    +

    Patrons who are signed in can place title-level hold requests with one click in Polaris PowerPAC. When you enable this feature, the One-Click Request button is displayed on search results pages and on full display pages for single titles, as shown in the following examples:

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    The activation date for a one-click request is set to the current date.

    +

    To set the request pickup location, the system checks to determine whether:

    +
      +
    • The patron has specified a preferred pickup location.
    • +
    • The patron's preferred pickup location (if one exists) has been excluded via the Hold optionsPickupPickup branches to exclude in PAC when creating requests setting in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    • The patron's registered branch has a default pickup branch specified via the Hold optionsRequests > Default pickup branch setting in Polaris Administration.
    • +
    +

    The table below describes the logic that the system uses to determine the pickup location for the one-click request.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Does the patron have a preferred pickup location?

    +
    +

    Is the preferred pickup location excluded?

    +
    +

    Does the patron's branch have a default pickup branch?

    +
    +

    Pickup location

    +
    YesNoN/APatron's preferred pickup location
    YesYesYesDefault pickup branch
    YesYesNoPatron's registered branch
    NoN/AYesDefault pickup branch
    NoN/ANoPatron's registered branch
    +

    If the request is successfully placed, the system displays a confirmation message:

    +

    + +

    +

    You can edit the confirmation message in Polaris Language Editor (Web Admin Tool). The string ID for the message is PACML_1CLICKHOLD_SUCCESS. The patron can click or tap View My Requestson the confirmation message to go to the Requests page of the patron account. The string ID for the View My Requests link is PACML_1CLICKHOLD_SUCCESS_LINK.

    +

    Even when enabled, the One-Click Request option is not displayed in these situations:

    +
      +
    • The patron is blocked from placing any requests.
    • +
    • The Place Requests button is not displayed for a title (for example, when the PAC profile Suppress Availability and Requests is set for the title’s type of material).
    • +
    • The system charges for holds.
    • +
    • The title belongs to a remote database.
    • +
    • The title represents integrated eContent.
    • +
    +

    The one-click option is never available for item-level or first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD)., or requests from Mobile PAC or Children’s PAC.

    +

    Block Messages

    +

    If the patron clicks or taps the One-Click Request button but the request cannot be placed due to a block (for example, the request would exceed material type hold limits for the patron), a message indicates why the request cannot be placed. You can edit the block messages in Polaris Language Editor (Web Admin Tool). The table lists the possible blocking messages:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Message StringString ID
    The request cannot be placed because your account has exceeded the maximum number of requests. You can cancel some requests or wait for a request to be filled, then submit this request again.ILL_TEXT_EXCEEDEDMAXNUMREQS
    The request cannot be placed because your account has exceeded the maximum number of requests for this material type. You can cancel some requests for this material type or wait for a request to be filled, then submit this request again.ILL_TEXT_EXCEEDEDMAXNUMREQS_MAT
    You cannot request all the volumes of this title. Please use the "{0}" button to request a specific volume.ILL_TEXT_1CLICK_NOREQUESTFORMULTIVOL
    You cannot request all the issues of a journal or magazine. Please use the "{0}" button to request an individual issue.ILL_TEXT_1CLICK_NOREQUESTFORALLISSUES
    +

    In the above table, {0} represents the Place Request button. If you customize the text for this button, the system uses your customized text in the message instead of the default Place Request.

    +

    If there are multiple blocking conditions, only the top-level blocking message is displayed (maximum number of requests exceeded, then material type limit, then title-level errors for multi-part or serial requests.

    +

    If the system encounters a processing error, a general error message is displayed: An error was encountered placing your request. The string ID is PACML_ONECLICK_ERROR_MSG.

    +

    Information Messages

    +

    If the patron clicks or taps the One-Click Request button and the request can be placed, the system displays an information message in certain circumstances (for example, a charge may be applied at checkout):

    +

    + +

    +

    The system displays all information messages applicable to the request. The table lists the possible information messages:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    One-Click Request SituationMessage StringString ID
    Request on a constituent bibliographic record (bound-with) This item is bound with the title: your-title-here +PACML_BOUNDMSG3
    Request where a charge may be applied at checkoutIf your request is filled, you may be charged to check out this item according to the policy of the owning library.ILL_BULK_CHARGECKOREQ
    Request where no items are attached to the bibliographic record, and the Requests parameter - Hold Options, Staff client & PAC option If no items are attached: Block in PAC setting is disabledThis title has no items. Your request may not be filled. ILL_TEXT_NOITEMSAVAILABLE_BULK
    +

    Enabling One-Click Requests

    +

    Use the Requests parameter - Holds Options – Requests tab to enable one-click requests. Select Enable one-click requests in PowerPAC. The checkbox is available for selection when you have selected Enable title-level hold requests from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. It is not selected by default.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Select_bibliographic_entities_for_display_and_edit_labels.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Select_bibliographic_entities_for_display_and_edit_labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb14b439 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Select_bibliographic_entities_for_display_and_edit_labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + + + + Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels

    +

    To select entities for display and edit their labels for PowerPAC bibliographic search results:

    +

    Note:
    You need the permission Modify bibliographic record title displays: Allow to do this procedure.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view. To see the PowerPAC profiles, select the appropriate level - System, Library, Branch.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Title Display: Configure. The Title Display: Configure dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select the view you want to configure from the Configuration view menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note that you can configure separate displays for monographs and serials. The system uses your serials configurations for bibliographic records where LDR/07 = b or i or s.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Available entities list on the left side of the dialog box displays the entities that can be added to a view.

    +

    Note:
    The Available entities list may include both system-supplied and custom entities. Custom entities are defined at the system level only. See Define custom entities. You can also edit many existing entities. See Edit a bibliographic entity definition.

    +

    + +

    +

    The Display these entities list on the right side of the dialog box lists those entities that are currently selected for the configuration view.

    +

    + +

    +

    “Short” entities are not repeatable for a single view. “Long” entities are repeatable within a single view. You can double-click the edge of a column header to expand the column and display the full text if necessary.

    +
      +
    1. To see what tags, indicators and subfields are included in an entity, hover the cursor over the entity for a quick view, or right-click and select Properties from the context menu. The Entity Properties dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. To add an entity to the view, click the entity in the Available entities list and then click Add.The entity is added to the Display these entities list.
    2. +
    3. To remove an entity from the view, click the entity in the Display these entities list and then click Remove.
    4. +
    5. If the Available Entities or Display these entities list does not include the data element you want to display, follow these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click the Browse icon TitleDisplayBrwsIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities list. The Browse Entities dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. In the Browse Entities dialog box, select the entity you want to add to the Available entities list. You can hover the cursor over an entity to see its properties.
    2. +
    3. Click Reveal.  The entity now appears in the Available entities list and can be selected for display.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    You can shorten the Available entries list to reduce scrolling. Select the entity that you want to remove, right-click and select Suppress from the  context menu, or click the Suppress icon TitleDisplaySuppressIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities list. To add an entry back to the list, repeat steps a-c.

    +
      +
    1. To edit the default English label for an entity, and to enter or change the labels for other languages, follow these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Right-click the entity in the Available entities or the Display these entities list, and select Labels from the context menu, select Edit Labels from the Entity Properties dialog box, or click the Change Labels icon TitleDisplayChangeLabelsIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities or Display these entities list. The Change Labels dialog opens for the entity you selected.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Tip:
    You can also edit the labels using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The Mnemonic field at the top of the Change Labels dialog box displays the language string ID for the entity’s label. In Polaris Language Editor, select the ERMSPortal “product” to edit entity labels. For more information about using Polaris Language Editor, see online Help for Polaris Language Editor.

    +
      +
    1. On the Change Labels dialog box, click the language you want to edit.
    2. +
    3.  To customize the label, click the Customize option and then enter your text.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To enter diacritics or non-Latin characters, press and hold ALT while typing the code on the numeric keypad.

    +
      +
    • To permanently save your changes and keep the dialog box open, click Apply.
    • +
    • To permanently save your changes and close the dialog box, click OK.
    • +
    • To remove any changes that have not been applied and close the dialog box, click Cancel.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Save or cancel your work in the Title Display Configure dialog box:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To remove any changes that have not been applied and close the Title Display Configure dialog box, click Cancel.
    • +
    • To remove any changes that have not been applied and keep the Title Display Configure dialog box open, click Reset.
    • +
    • +

      To permanently save changes and keep the Title Display Configure dialog box open, click Apply.

      +

      Important:
      After saving your changes, use Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) to reload PowerPAC. PowerPAC users may also need to clear their browser caches.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To permanently save changes and close the Title Display Configure dialog box, click OK.

      +

      Important:
      When you click Revert, all branch-level configuration settings are lost.  The action cannot be undone.

      +
    • +
    +

    After making changes to the Title Display Configure dialog box at the branch or library level, you can revert to the parent-level settings. Click Revert on the Title Display Configure dialog box. Only the currently-selected configuration view is inherited from the parent organization. If you make changes after clicking Revert, then inheritance is broken and you will no longer inherit settings from the higher organization.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Sending_Call_Numbers_by_Text_Message.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Sending_Call_Numbers_by_Text_Message.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9cacd6f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Sending_Call_Numbers_by_Text_Message.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Sending Call Numbers by Text Message + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Sending Call Numbers by Text Message

    +

    From the Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC item availability display, a user can send an email text message containing the item call number to his or her mobile phone via the mobile phone carrier’s SMTP email service. If you enable this feature, a Text It icon  appears next to each item in the Availability display for a title.

    +

    The illustration shows the Text It icon in the Availability view in Polaris PowerPAC brief search results.

    +

    + +

    +

    In Polaris PowerPAC, the icon is displayed in the Availability view when the view is accessed from the brief search results and from the title product page. When the user clicks the Text It icon, a window opens. (For details about the Mobile PAC interface, see Text It in Mobile PAC.)

    +

    + +

    +

    If the user is logged in and the patron record includes a phone number designated for TXT notification, the Mobile phone number and Carrier fields are already filled in. If the user is not logged in, or is logged in but does not have a phone number designated for TXT notification in the patron record, the user enters the mobile phone number and selects a carrier from the list. (The carrier options are set in the system-level database table Mobile Phone Carriers.) When the patron clicks Send, the text message is sent to the patron’s mobile phone.

    +

    To display the Text It icon in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, set the PowerPAC profile Item availability: “Text it” feature enabled to Yes (the default setting). The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels.

    +

    In addition, the current connection organization must have specified the email server in the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service. The “from” field of the message is taken from the PAC profile Email notification: email address of sender for the current connection organization. If no address has been specified in that profile, the “from” field is taken from the system-level parameter setting for the return email address in Notification options. (If no address is available from these settings, the Text It icon is not displayed.) The subject of the message is the first 30 characters of the title. The body of the message includes the branch display name and the call number and designation (if present).

    +

    Due to common carrier limitations, the entire message must not exceed 160 characters. If the message is longer, certain fields are automatically eliminated in the following order:

    +
      +
    • Branch display name
    • +
    • Designation
    • +
    • If the branch display name and designation have been eliminated and the total still exceeds 160 characters, characters are removed from the end of the call number field until a total of 156 characters is reached.  Then the system adds a space and an ellipsis to the end of the call number.
    • +
    +

    The patron does not receive notification if the delivery fails, and Polaris does not record the failure.

    +

    Text It Report

    +

    A report, PAC Text It Use, is available in Polaris SimplyReports on the Patron tab, Patron Statistical Reports sub-tab. The report includes an activity summary, the number of in-house transactions, and the number of outside transactions. In-house transactions are those from workstations that are identified as in-house for the selected transacting organizations in the In-House IP Addresses database table. Standard SimplyReports parameters, filters, and formats for patron statistical reports are available for the report. For more information, see online Help in SimplyReports.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_Map_It_for_PowerPAC_and_or_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_Map_It_for_PowerPAC_and_or_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b39a340 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_Map_It_for_PowerPAC_and_or_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up Map It for PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up Map It for PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC

    +

    Map It is a feature that uses Google Maps provides a visual guide to the location of items linked to titles in the patron’s search results list. To set up Map It for Polaris PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    1. Find and copy or record the geographic coordinates for each branch that should appear on the map.
    2. +
    3. Enter the geographic coordinates in Polaris Administration by following these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer, select the system-level database table Geographic Coordinates. The table is displayed in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You need the System Administration permission Modify geographic coordinates table: Allow to edit this table.

    +

    + GeoCoordTable.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To add an organization to the table, click btnInsert00561.gif. The Insert dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + InsertGeoCoords.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization from the Organization list, which displays all the system organizations that have not yet been added to the table.
    2. +
    3. Enter or copy the organization’s latitude and longitude (obtained in step 1) in the appropriate text boxes. You can enter up to 20 characters in each box. Valid characters include one minus sign (to indicate a negative number, must be the first character), one period (to indicate a decimal point) and numerals 0-9. The allowed range is -90 to 90 latitude, and -180 to 180 longitude.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Set up Google Maps for an organization by following these steps:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click the PAC profile Google Maps for the organization. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch level. The Google Maps dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select (check) Enable in PowerPAC to display the Map It button in Polaris PowerPAC when this organization is the connection organization.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) Enable in Mobile PAC to display the Map It link in Mobile PAC when this organization is the connection organization.
    4. +
    5. If you are implementing Map It for the first time after June 2016, enter your Google Maps API key in the box. For more information about obtaining the API key, go to https://developers.google.com/maps/faq#keysystem. If you implemented Map It before June 2016 and are simply changing your settings, the API key is not necessary.
    6. +
    7. For Geographic center of map position, enter the latitude and longitude that should be used to position the initial display of the map. For valid format, see step 2. If you have entered geographic coordinates for the system organization (see step 2), these are already entered as the default values. If no system coordinates have been entered, the default coordinates are those of the current organization. If these have not been entered in the Geographic Coordinates table, the Latitude and Longitude fields are blank.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    Users can shift the map away from the initial center as they navigate it.

    +

    Tip:
    Change the zoom level on the Polaris Latitude and Longitude tool to determine the zoom level you want for the initial map display. See step 1.

    +
      +
    1. Set a value for Zoom level of initial display. This setting determines the  zoom level of the initial map display. The default level is 10; valid values are 1-21. Higher numbers produce a view that is zoomed in closer.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Users can change the initial zoom level as they navigate the map.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Narrow_your_search_Web_part1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Narrow_your_search_Web_part1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b78bdb11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Narrow_your_search_Web_part1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the Narrow your search web part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the Narrow your search web part

    +

    To set up the Narrow your search web part, which provides elements to filter a PAC search results set:

    +

    Note:
    You save your settings separately for the Narrow your search and Related web parts, and they are inherited separately. For example, your branch may set its own elements for the Narrow part, but inherit the system settings for the Related Web part. Once you change the settings at the branch level, the branch no longer inherits the system settings.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches. The dialog box opens to the Narrow Your Search tabbed page.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Settings on this tabbed page control whether the Narrow your search web part is displayed, and what elements will be available for filtering search results. If at least one element is set to display (set to Yes), the Narrow your search web part label can be displayed in the dashboard.

    +
      +
    1. To modify the display of a Narrow element, select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element. The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Narrow) dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ModSearchNarrow.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To display the element in the Narrow your search web part, select (check) Display the element.
    2. +
    3. To display the element’s links when the search results page appears, select (check) Show initially expanded. By default, all elements are set to display as initially expanded.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    To minimize the need to scroll the PAC search results page, you may want to consider displaying some or all elements as initially unexpanded. The patron can choose to expand any element that is unexpanded.

    +
      +
    1. To change the minimum and maximum number of links that can be displayed for the element, select or type the numbers in the Minimum to show and Maximum to show boxes. The default values are 5 minimum, 25 maximum.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    The maximum number of links that can be displayed for one element is 99. However, higher numbers of links can slow processing time and may not be particularly useful to patrons, since the list of links for an element may be quite long for certain searches.

    +

    Note: +
    Lexile Reading Level: There are 15 possible Lexile levels. Typically you would leave the Minimum to Display setting at 15 to display all possible ranges if they exist in the search results, and leave the Maximum to Display setting at 25.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the default English label for the element, type the text in the Label box. The maximum number of characters is 50.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Narrow) dialog box closes.
    4. +
    5. To change the order in which elements are displayed, select each element and click the up or down arrow until these elements are listed in the order you want them.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. The web part label is always displayed at the top of the list, before the individual elements.

    +

    Tip: +
    If you have enabled the Availability facet, consider positioning the Assigned Branch facet immediately under the Availability facet. See Availability and Assigned Branch Facets in the Narrow Your Search Web Part.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Save icon to save your settings on the Narrow Your Search tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    A message alerts you if you have set DASHBOARD to be displayed without setting elements to be displayed. At least one element within the web part must be set for display in order to display the web part itself.

    +

    Your changes are immediately applied to the Polaris database, but you need to clear the page cache. See Updating Page Caches.

    +

    Note:
    Because the Narrow your search Web part may be quite long, the Related Web part may not be visible in the interface without scrolling. If you want to be sure that patrons see the Related Web part without scrolling, you will need to limit the elements you enable for the Narrow your search Web part, or set at least some of the elements to be displayed as initially unexpanded.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Related_searches_Web_part1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Related_searches_Web_part1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f095930f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Set_up_the_Related_searches_Web_part1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the Related searches web part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set up the Related searches web part

    +

    To set up the Related searches web part, which provides elements to launch new searches related to a PowerPAC search results set:

    +

    Note:
    You save your settings separately for the Narrow your search and Related searches web parts, and they are inherited separately. For example, your branch may set its own elements for the Narrow your search web part, but inherit the system settings for the Related searches web part. Like other Polaris Administration settings, once you change the settings at the branch level, the branch no longer inherits the system settings.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches. The dialog box opens to the Narrow Your Search tabbed page.
    4. +
    5. Click the Related Searches tab.
    6. +
    +

    + DashRelatedSA.gif 

    +

    Settings on this tabbed page control whether the Related searches Web part is displayed, and what elements will be available for filtering search results.

    +
      +
    1. To modify the display of a Related element, select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element. The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Related) dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    + ModSearchRel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To display the element in the Related searches Web part, select (check) Display the element.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To minimize the need to scroll the PAC search results page, you may want to consider displaying some or all elements as initially unexpanded. The patron can choose to expand any element that is unexpanded.

    +
      +
    1. To display the element’s links when the search results page appears, select (check) Show initially expanded. By default, all elements are set to display as initially expanded.
    2. +
    3. To change the minimum and maximum number of links that can be displayed for the element, select or type the numbers in the Minimum to show and Maximum to show boxes. The default values are 5 minimum, 25 maximum.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    The maximum number of links that can be displayed for one element is 99. However, higher numbers of links can slow processing time and may not be particularly useful to patrons, since the list of links for an element may be quite long for certain searches.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the default English label for the element, type the text in the Label box. The maximum number of characters is 50.
    2. +
    3. Click OK. The Modify Search Dashboard Element (Related) dialog box closes.
    4. +
    5. To change the order in which elements are displayed, select each element and click the up or down arrow until these elements are listed in the order you want them.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. The web part label is always displayed at the top of the list, before the individual elements.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Save icon to save your settings on the Related Searches tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    A message alerts you if you have set DASHBOARD to be displayed but have not set any elements to be displayed. At least one element within the web part must be set for display in order to display the web part itself.

    +

    Your changes are immediately applied to the Polaris database, but you need to clear the page cache. See Updating Page Caches.

    +

    Note:
    Because the Narrow your search Web part may be quite long, the Related searches web part may not be visible in the interface without scrolling. If you want to be sure that patrons see the Related searches web part without scrolling, you will need to limit the elements you enable for the Narrow your search web part, or set some or all of the elements to be displayed as initially unexpanded.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_PowerPAC_Narrow_Related_Search_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_PowerPAC_Narrow_Related_Search_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..206a7cbe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_PowerPAC_Narrow_Related_Search_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + + + Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options

    +

    When a user’s search results are returned, the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard can display two web parts related to the results. The Narrow your search web part offers facets to filter the current search results; the Related searches web part offers links to launch other, related searches. By default, both web parts and all their available elements are enabled and set to an expanded initial display.

    +

    Using the PowerPAC profile Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches, you can:

    +
      +
    • offer the Narrow your search web part, the Related searches web part, or both;
    • +
    • specify the elements available for each web part and set the display order;
    • +
    • set the initial display to expanded or collapsed;
    • +
    • set the minimum and maximum number of links for each element;
    • +
    • specify your own labels for the web parts and elements and translate the labels.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This profile does not affect course reserve or community information search results. A separate profile is available for community information search results. See Configuring the PAC Community Results Display.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Narrow Search Web Part

    +

    The Narrow your search dashboard offers two types of facets for filtering a set of search results: check boxes and bulleted items. When a user selects a facet, it is placed at the top of the list and the results set is filtered accordingly.

    +
      +
    • Check box facets represent “or” filters for the results set. If you select another facet from within the same group, it is also added to the top of the list for that facet type. The filtered results set grows to include results that match the first selected facet or the second selected facet. When you select facets from different check box groups, the filtered results set is restricted to results that match the selected facet in one group and the selected facet in the other group.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Check box facets are not necessarily mutually exclusive. For Type of Material, each title is included in the count for all facets that apply to it. For example, a large print book appears in the counts for both the Book and Large Print facets. As another example, Musical sound recording is a subset of Sound recording. If you select the Musical sound recording facet, the count for Sound recording may go down.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    • Bulleted facets represent “and” filters for the results set. When you select a bullet facet, it is also placed at the top of its list. The filtered results set is now restricted to results that match any already selected facet and the selected bullet facet.
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    The following elements are available for narrowing search results:

    +
      +
    • Related words - See Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options for information about this element.
    • +
    • Availability - See Availability and Assigned Branch Facets in the Narrow Your Search Web Part for information about this element.
    • +
    • Database - See Develop the remote targets display for PAC for information about setting up remote databases for searching.
    • +
    • Type of Material - See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By) for detailed information about this filter.
    • +
    • Target Audience +
    • +
    • Publication Date +
    • +
    • Subjects +
    • +
    • Authors +
    • +
    • Series +
    • +
    • Popularity - Divides the results set into three roughly equal-sized groups. Records with the highest popularity index are placed in the high group, those with the lowest popularity index are placed in the Low group, and the others are placed in the Medium group. The popularity index rank associated with each bibliographic record is based on sorting all the bibliographic records in the database by the following characteristics, listed in descending order of significance: (1) number of hold requests plus the number of check-outs in the last 120 days; (2) number of check-outs in the last 120 days; (3) lifetime circulation count; (4) in-house use count; (5) record creation date.
    • +
    • Language +
    • +
    • Assigned Branch +
    • +
    • Record Owner +
    • +
    • Literary Form +
    • +
    • Lexile Reading Level - The Lexile facets allow filtering by reading level. Lower ranges indicate easier reading levels, while higher ranges indicate more advanced reading levels. For more information about Lexile numbers and reading level equivalents, see https://lexile.com. The Lexile number for a title is derived from the 521 tag in the MARC record, subfield $a. The first indicator must be 8; the second indicator is undefined (#). Subfield $b should always contain Lexile. When multiple tags exist in the bibliographic record, all tags meeting the criteria are considered. The system normalizes the data from the MARC tag and groups the facets into Lexile ranges; for example, 521 $a1150 is included in the displayed range facet 1100-1195.
    • +
    +

    Record counts are included for each filter offered on the Narrow your search dashboard element. The counts are recomputed by the Keyword Processing SQL job, which runs nightly by default.

    +

    Availability and Assigned Branch Facets in the Narrow Your Search Web Part

    +

    You can display an Availability facet under the Narrow Your Search dashboard. Used in conjunction with the Assigned Branch facet, your patrons can filter their search results to identify items that are available anywhere or at specific branches. Item availability for most titles is updated in real time. The Assigned Branch facet consults the system administration Item Availability Display Order policy table for the connection branch to show local libraries first in the list of assigned branches, making it simple for patrons to find available titles that are nearby.

    +

    Libraries that have "availability" or "assigned branch" limits configured for the Limit By search drop-down list [see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options] may want to consider using the Availability and Assigned Branch facets instead. The Availability facet works much like the “availability” Limit By feature, but PowerPAC users can combine the facet with multiple assigned branches to retrieve a narrow or wide range of available titles from their search results.

    +

    Libraries whose branches all connect at the system level can take advantage of the new Availability facet since both local and system organizations (as defined in the Item Availability Display Order table) are included in the Availability facet results. For more information about the Item Availability Display Order table, see Setting Up Local and System Availability.

    +

    When you enable the facet, an Available now check box is displayed in the Narrow Your Search dashboard for search results. The Available now line also displays the number of titles that will be in the search results list if Available now is checked.

    +

    + +

    +

    Libraries listed under the Assigned Branch facet are divided into two categories: Local and Other. Local lists those branches defined as local in the Item Availability Display Order policy table for the connection branch. Other lists those branches defined as system in the Item Availability Display Order policy table. You can edit the Local and Other labels in Polaris WebAdmin; the string mnemonics are PACML_DASHBOARD_LOCAL and PACML_DASHBOARD_OTHER.

    +

    A branch appears in the Assigned Branch list only if it has at least one item on at least one title in the search results. Within each category, organizations are listed in descending order by the number of titles that will be retrieved if the facet is selected. The connection branch appears at the top of the local list. An icon indicates the connection branch. See the example below.

    +

    + +

    +

    If the assigned branch in an item record is changed, the change is reflected in the results the next time a search is done.

    +

    The Assigned Branch facet uses the Minimum to Show and Maximum to Show settings in the PowerPAC profile Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches. The settings are applied to the list as a whole, regardless of where the local/other cut-off point may occur for any given set of search results. The system limit on the number of entries for the web part is 99.

    +

    A title is available for a connection branch when these conditions are met:

    +
      +
    • Display in PAC is checked in the bib record, and either:
      • There is at least one linked item record where the item record status is Final, and
      • The item circulation status is In, and
      • The assigned branch is in the Item Availability Display Order policy table for the connection branch, and
      • Display in PAC is checked in the item record, and
      • The item's circulation status is not checked in the PAC profile Suppress Item Display for the connection branch (for example, shelving or non-circulating).
    • +
    • Or Display in PAC is checked in the bib record, there is an issue record, the issue is not linked to an item, and the issue is linked to a subscription Serial Holdings record and is retained.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    +
    Bib records that do not typically have linked item records (for example, titles from remote databases, non-integrated eContent titles, digital collections, and cataloged web sites) have an availability count of 0, and are not included in the filtered search results list when Available Now is checked.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    For integrated eContent, the availability results reflect the status of the Polaris eContent item records and are accurate unless a checkout or checkin has taken place in the last few minutes.

    +

    When the patron checks Available now, but does not check an Assigned Branch facet, the search results list is filtered to display the titles that meet the requirements for displaying in PAC and have at least one item record that is “available” at a branch listed in the organization’s Item Availability Display Order table. Bib records that do not meet those requirements are no longer in the search results list. The Assigned Branch facet lists only organizations that have at least one item record that is available at a branch listed in the organization's Item Availability Display Order table. The assigned branch facet count for an organization is the number of titles that will be in the search results list if that assigned branch facet is selected.

    +

    If the patron checks both Available Now and an Assigned Branch facet, the search results list is filtered to display only the titles that meet all current requirements for displaying in PAC and have at least one item record that is available at the selected assigned branch. The Assigned Branch facet count on the remaining assigned branch facets includes a plus sign and the number of records that will be added to the search results list if the patron selects the branch facet.

    +

    When the Availability facet is combined with another dashboard facet, each title in the results list matches both facet selections. When the Availability facet is combined with a CQL filter from the Limit By drop-down list, each title in the results list matches both the CQL filter and the availability facet. When the availability facet is combined with title-level More Search Options (Publication Dates, Target Audiences, Languages), each title in the results list matches both the selected options and the availability facet. When the availability facet is combined with item-level More Search Options (Libraries, Detailed Material Types, Collections), each title in the results list matches the selected item-level search options and the selected facets, but the selected options and facets are not necessarily on the same item record.

    +

    Once Available now is checked, it remains checked if the user navigates to the full display for a title or logs in to place a request, then returns to the search results. The facet checkbox is cleared when a new search is launched, the PAC times out, the user clicks Reset after setting More Search Options, or the user logs in from the My Account menu.

    +

    Related Searches Web Part

    +

    The Related searches web part is displayed below the Narrow your search web part in the dashboard. When the user selects an element in this web part, a new search for the same search text is launched. Depending on the element, the new search may be a browse search for a heading in a specified index (Subject, Author, or Series), a keyword search in a specified field (Other searches), or a keyword search in a different (Z39.50) database (Other databases). The Other databases element lists the databases you specified for the Using box in the top area of the search page (see Develop the remote targets display for PAC).

    +

    Note:
    The Related browse search options (Subject, Author, or Series) are not displayed when remote databases have been selected.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Local_and_System_Availability.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Local_and_System_Availability.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e193f016 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Local_and_System_Availability.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Local and System Availability + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Local and System Availability

    +

    When a user searches for and selects a title in the PAC, he or she can see detailed holdings information about the items associated with the title. Polaris Administration settings control the availability display in the PAC: whether all the system holdings are displayed in one list, or separated into local and system views; which branches are defined as “local,” the order of branch holdings; and the specific information that is displayed about each item.

    +

    Entries in the Item Availability Display Order policy table, combined with the Display local and system levels PowerPAC profile, create the following availability displays in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Display local and system levels profile set to No - Only the entries designated as System are displayed. Put the same list of libraries under both Local and System in the Item Availability Display Order policy table to generate local availability counts and facets.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display local and system levels profile set to Yes - The Local Availability view initially displays items for the branches designated as Local in the Item Availability Display Order policy table. The user clicks or taps a link to see branches designated as System in the table.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Assigned Branch box in the item record determines the branch for which an item is displayed in the Availability view. If the item is not assigned to a branch, the item is not listed in any PAC availability display. Also, if the Display in PAC box is not checked in the item record, or the item has a circulation status that is suppressed from display, the item is not listed in any PAC availability display.

    +

    To set up the item availability display in the PAC:

    +

    Note:

    These settings control how information about specific items is displayed in Polaris PowerPAC, and Mobile PAC where noted. Use the PowerPAC profile Title display configure to specify the information that should be included in brief and expanded title information, which bibliographic-level title information should be displayed, and the labels for the information. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the profile Item Availability: Display local and system levels, and select one of the following options:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Yes - In Polaris PowerPAC, when a patron is connected to a branch, items for the branches defined as local for that branch are displayed and the patron can click or tap a link to see branches defined as system. When the patron is connected to the system organization, all branches’ items are displayed in one list.
    • +
    • No - Shows only entries designated as system. In this case, put the same list of libraries under both Local and System in the Item Availability Display Order policy table to generate local availability counts and facets.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the following additional PowerPAC profiles for the PowerPAC display:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Display last circ date - Set to Yes to display the last circulation date of the item.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display notes - Set to Text to display any item or issue public notes as text, set to Icon to display an icon that the user clicks or taps to see the notes, or set to Do not display to suppress item or issue public notes from display.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For a serials public note to display in PAC, at least one issue or issue with a linked item must be added to a serials holdings record. If no issues exist, you can generate a “dummy” issue so the note will display. See Serial Holdings Record Fields Affecting Serials Display in PAC.

    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Display textual holdings notes - Set to Text to display serials textual holdings notes as text, set to Icon to display an icon that the user clicks or taps to see the notes, or set to Do not display to suppress textual holdings notes from display.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the following PAC profiles to Yes or No to specify what information about each item should be displayed. These settings also affect Mobile PAC:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Display detailed item status - Set to Yes to display the specific item circulation status of unavailable items, such as Lost or Bindery. Set to No to display No items available or your own text for items that are unavailable for circulation for any reason. (You must also set Item Availability: Display status to Yes.) This setting also affects Mobile PAC.
    • +
    +

    Note:

    If you set this profile to No, you can customize the text that is displayed to indicate that an item is unavailable. See Editing Messages and Labels.

    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Display due date in detailed item status - If you set Item Availability: Display detailed item status to Yes , you can set this parameter to display or suppress the item’s due date. (If you set Item Availability: Display detailed item status to No, you cannot display the due date.) This setting also affects Mobile PAC.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display shelf location - Set to Yes to display an item’s shelf location. For more information, see Naming Shelf Locations. This setting also affects Mobile PAC.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display status - Set to Yes to display an item’s availability status. If you set this to Yes, also review the setting for Item Availability: Display detailed item status. This setting also affects Mobile PAC.
    • +
    • Item Availability: Display type - Set to Yes to display the item’s material type. This setting also affects Mobile PAC.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Policy Tables folder for the organization, and select Item Availability Display Order.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    These System Administration permissions are required to modify this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify item availability display order table: Allow. The organization level at which the table is opened determines the entries you see in the list.

    +

    The Item Availability Display Order table appears in the details view.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click btnInsert00557.gif to display the Insert Item Availability Display Order dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    + dItmAvailInDx.gif +  

    +
      +
    1. In the Organization box, select the organization for which the item availability entry is being set up. The new entry will affect the PAC item availability display for this organization.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    If the Item Availability Display Order table is opened at the branch level, only the branch name is displayed in the Organization list.

    +
      +
    1. In the Branch Location box, select the organization whose holdings you want to display in the PAC for the Organization branch.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:

    If you want a branch to display in both the Local and System Availability views, add it to the table twice, designating it as Local for one entry and System for the other.

    +
      +
    1. Specify whether the item holdings for the organization named in the Branch Location box are displayed in the Local or System Availability view of the PAC for the Organization branch:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • To display the Branch Location item holdings as local holdings, select Local in the Level box.
    • +
    • To display the Branch Location item holdings as system holdings, select System in the Level box.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you set the PAC profile Item Availability: Display local and system levels to Yes, entries designated as Local are displayed in the Local Availability view, and entries designated as System are displayed when the user clicks the link to see all items. If you set the profile to No, only the entries designated as System are displayed; in this case, put the same list of libraries under both Local and System in the Item Availability Display Order table to generate local availability counts and facets.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box. The Item Availability Display Order dialog box closes. The new item availability display entry is displayed at the end of the policy table.
    2. +
    3. Position the item holdings in the availability display for the organization by following these steps:
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Select (highlight) the branch location entry for which you want to change the displayed order.
    2. +
    3. To move the branch entry’s holdings higher on the list, click btnUpArrow.gif.
    4. +
    5. To move the branch entry’s holdings lower on the list, click btnDownArrow.gif.
    6. +
    +

    The Sorting Order value changes for the entry as you position the entry.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify an entry in the Item Availability Display Order policy table - Select the entry and click btnModify.gif.You can change only the Highlight setting for an existing entry. If you need to change the entry in another way, delete the incorrect entry and create a new entry.
    • +
    • Delete an entry in the Item Availability Display Order policy table - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif. If you delete an entry in the middle of the sort order, the remaining entries are automatically reordered.
    • +
    • Item availability display in Polaris PowerPAC - You can set the default item availability display for a branch or collection to expanded or closed, and make separate settings for non-serial and serial holdings. (Patrons can always select branch and collection controls to expand or close the list of items under each branch and collection.) To set the default display to expanded branch and collection lists for non-serial holdings, set the PowerPAC profile Item Availability: Expand non-serial titles to Yes. To set the default display to closed branch and collection lists, set the profile to No. To set the default display to expanded lists for serial holdings (those with a holdings statement for that particular branch), set the PowerPAC profile Item Availability: Expand serial titles to Yes. To set the default display to closed branch and collection lists, set the profile to No. (If you have extensive serial holdings, consider setting this profile to No to reduce scrolling in the PAC. Patrons can expand the lists they want to see at any time.)
    • +
    • Item Availability display in Mobile PAC - See Title Link: Find It.
    • +
    • Text-message call numbers from item availability display - See Sending Call Numbers by Text Message.
    • +
    • Item availability summary in Polaris PowerPAC - You can display a summary count of available items associated with a title, and the current number of holds on the title, on the initial search results pages. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.
    • +
    • Item display and circulation status - You can specify item circulation statuses that should prevent an item from being displayed in PAC search results. See Suppress items by circulation status.
    • +
    • Suppressing availability for specific types of material - You can suppress availability information for designated types of material from the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results displays. See Suppressing Request and Availability Options.
    • +
    • Serials display in PAC availability views - Settings in the serial holdings record control the location-specific compressed holdings statement and the issues that are displayed. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Recently_Viewed_Titles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Recently_Viewed_Titles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dcd77930 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Setting_Up_Recently_Viewed_Titles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Recently Viewed Titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Recently Viewed Titles

    +

    The Recently View Titles list is available when the user has viewed at least one product page for a title in the current session. It is displayed in the PowerPAC dashboard on the product page for a title, and on any bibliographic record search and results page. The list displays the titles already viewed, including the cover image, title, author, format icon, and publication date. The user can click or tap a title in the list to launch a search for the title.

    +

    The list is available as long as the current session is active, and is cleared when the browser is closed or the session times out. It is available regardless of whether the user has logged in. The user can disable the feature for the session by clicking or tapping Turn off recently viewed titles. This action clears the list; the user can start it again by clicking or tapping Turn on recently viewed titles.

    +

    You can enable the feature for in-house workstations, remote workstations, or both. Use the PowerPAC profile Recently viewed titles, available at the system, library, or branch level, to set up the Recently Viewed Titles web part.

    +

    + +

    +

    To set up the Recently Viewed Titles feature in Polaris PowerPAC:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Recently viewed titles. The Recently Viewed Titles dialog box opens.
    4. +
    5. Set either or both location options:
    6. +
    +
      +
    • Check Enable for in-house workstations to make this feature available at workstations in the library. In-house workstations are those defined by the settings in the organization’s PowerPAC profile In-house access definitions. If you have privacy concerns regarding in-house PAC workstations, leave this option unchecked.
    • +
    • Check Enable for remote access to make this feature available to users outside the library.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Set the maximum number of titles that should appear in the list. The maximum is 99; the default value is 5.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Share_a_bibliographic_information_display_configuration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Share_a_bibliographic_information_display_configuration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8abe0e9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Share_a_bibliographic_information_display_configuration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Share a bibliographic information display configuration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Share a bibliographic information display configuration

    +

    To copy your bibliographic display configurations to other organizations:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Title Display Configure dialog box if it not already open, and select the view you want to copy. See Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels. If the dialog box is already open and you have been making changes, click Apply to save your changes.
    2. +
    3. Click Copy. The Copy dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + TitleDisplayCopy.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the configuration views you want to copy.
    2. +
    3. Select the organizations that should receive your settings.
    4. +
    5. (Optional) To overwrite the destination organization’s labels with the source organization’s labels, select (check) Overwrite labels.
    6. +
    7. Click Copy.
    8. +
    +

    Important:
    The copy action takes place immediately. The action cannot be undone.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Social_Bookmarking_for_Search_Results_AddThis.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Social_Bookmarking_for_Search_Results_AddThis.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51e7f95b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Social_Bookmarking_for_Search_Results_AddThis.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Social Bookmarking for Search Results (AddThis™) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Social Bookmarking for Search Results (AddThis™)

    +

    Social bookmarking is a method for Internet users to share, organize, search, and manage bookmarks of web resources. Polaris PowerPAC users can share bookmarks to titles in their search results on over 200 sites that support social bookmarking, such as Facebook™, Twitter™, and Digg™. Polaris uses AddThis™ to provide this feature, a widely available no-fee service that maintains the social bookmarking URLs and provides usage analytical statistics to libraries that register for an AddThis account.

    +

    If you enable bookmark sharing, icons representing popular bookmarking sites are displayed on the summary view when the user hovers the cursor over or taps a book jacket image in brief Polaris PowerPAC search results, and on the product page for a title.

    +

    + +

    +

    + +

    +

    The initial icons represent the most popular bookmarking and sharing sites according to AddThis. The user can select an icon, or click or tap Share to open a dialog box with a list of additional sites and a search feature that covers more than 200 social bookmarking providers.

    +

    Tip:
    Users can “pin” PowerPAC search results pages in Pinterest only with the Pin It icon. The Pin It browser bookmark offered by Pinterest currently supports only static URLs and does not accommodate the dynamic URLs generated through a PowerPAC search.

    +

    The user selects a site link to open a new window for the selected site, log on to the site account, and add a bookmark for the selected title. When someone selects the link on the social network site, a search for the title is launched in the library catalog.

    +

    To set up bookmarking and sharing for PowerPAC search results:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Bookmarking & Sharing: Enable, and select Yes. This setting displays the Share link for titles in Polaris PowerPAC search results.
    4. +
    5. If you want usage statistics from AddThis, follow these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Set up an AddThis account at the AddThis Web site: go to http://www.addthis.com/ and click the Join Now link at the top of the page.
    2. +
    3. Create a user name and password for the AddThis account, and supply an appropriate e-mail address.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The AddThis terms of service and privacy policies are available on the AddThis Web site.

    +
      +
    1. In Polaris Administration, type your AddThis profile ID in the PowerPAC profile Bookmarking & Sharing: Profile ID for AddThis analytics.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The current implementation of Pinterest by AddThis does not function properly across all web sites. The Pinterest feature is therefore a custom integration in PowerPAC and is not included in AddThis analytics.

    +

    Select File > Save.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Polaris Social, in partnership with ChiliFresh Connections, offers integrated social features in Polaris PowerPAC. See Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppress_entities_from_small_screen.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppress_entities_from_small_screen.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc1d53bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppress_entities_from_small_screen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Suppress bibliographic entities from small screen display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppress bibliographic entities from small screen display

    +

    All title entities that are set to display for a given configuration view will display at mobile width by default. You can suppress bibliographic entities from the PowerPAC results display at mobile (650 px or narrower) width. This saves user data use and excessive scrolling through title information.

    +

    To suppress a bibliographic entity from the mobile display:

    +
      +
    1. Using the PowerPAC profile Title Display: Configure, set up bibliographic entities for display. See Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels.
    2. +
    3. Select the configuration view that you want to modify; for example, Full (monograph).
    4. +
    5. Select the entity to suppress in the Display the entities list and click the phone icon at the top of the list.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply.
    2. +
    +

    When you have selected an entity to suppress from the mobile display, a phone icon by the entity in the Display these entities list indicates that it will be suppressed.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Items_from_Search_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Items_from_Search_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1a12f8d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Items_from_Search_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Suppressing Items from Search Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppressing Items from Search Results

    +

    To be included in item counts and displayed in search results, Display in PAC must be checked in the item record, and the item record status must not be provisional or deleted. Serial issues are included in the counts if Display in PAC is checked in the linked serial holdings record and the issues are retained (see Creating and Copying Serial Holdings Records). In addition, you can use the PAC profile Suppress item display to specify item circulation statuses that should prevent an item from being displayed in both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results. When a circulation status is selected, items with this status are not displayed in PAC even when Display in PAC is checked in the item record. You can set this profile at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    To suppress items with specific circulation statuses from appearing in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    For any particular item, the system uses the setting for the item’s assigned branch to determine whether the item should be included in the search results display.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click Suppress item display. The Suppress Item Display dialog box opens.
    2. +
    3. Select (check) the circulation statuses that should prevent an item from being displayed in PAC search results.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +

    Your changes will not be evident in the PAC until the SQL job PAC Availability adjusts the counts. This job ordinarily runs automatically during overnight processing.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Request_and_Availability_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Request_and_Availability_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ccb84c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Suppressing_Request_and_Availability_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + Suppressing Request and Availability Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppressing Request and Availability Options

    +

    Typical Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results include title-level options for placing requests and viewing availability information. However, you may want to suppress the ability to place requests and view availability for titles that do not have linked items in the Polaris database and have a specific primary system-defined type of material.

    +

    For both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, you can suppress the ability to place requests and view availability information for bibliographic records with the primary system-defined types of material (TOMs) that you specify. For example, you can suppress these features for materials where the item is not physically in the library, either because it is eContent that is available only in downloadable form from another site, or because it is in an external storage device from companies such as Libramation’s MediaBank or redbox®.

    +

    This PAC profile does not apply to EContent that is integrated with Polaris because in this case, item records are attached to the bibliographic record and the availability information is updated by the vendor. You can opt to suppress the display of integrated eContent titles using the PAC profile, Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles.

    +

    The ability to place requests and view availability information in PAC is suppressed under these conditions:

    +
      +
    • The title’s primary TOM is checked in the PAC profile Suppress Availability and Requests
    • +
    • At least one 856$u or resource entity is present in the bib record (if you have selected Records with an 856 for that TOM)
    • +
    • The system availability count = 0, which means that there are no linked item records, the linked item records all have Display in PAC set to No, or the linked item records all have circulation statuses that are set for suppression from the display in the PAC profile Suppress item display.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If a bibliographic record has linked issue records (via the serial holdings record) but no linked item records, the issue records are factored into the availability count, so availability information is not suppressed in this case.

    + +

    If these conditions are met, the following elements are suppressed from the results displays in PowerPAC (local and remote databases) and Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    • Item availability fields in the brief and full title displays
    • +
    • Local Availability Summary
    • +
    • System Availability Summary
    • +
    • # Local items
    • +
    • # System items
    • +
    • # Local items in
    • +
    • # System items in
    • +
    • PowerPAC Availability button at the title level
    • +
    • Mobile PAC Find It button at the title level
    • +
    • PowerPAC Place Request button and Mobile PAC Request It button at the title level
    • +
    +

    To suppress request and availability options for designated types of material from the PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results display:

    +

    Note:
    You can make these settings at the system, library, or branch level. The setting of the PAC connection organization determines the effect on Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. These settings do not affect the staff client. They can lessen patrons’ confusion about how to access and obtain certain material types, but they do not prevent a staff client user from placing a hold on one of the suppressed types of material.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and select the PAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Suppress availability and requests. The Suppress Availability and Requests dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    The list is ordered by the three-character alphabetic code that represents the TOM (Type of Material). The descriptions are the Polaris default descriptions, not the custom display descriptions you may have defined in the PAC Limit by Display policy table.

    +
      +
    1. Select the TOM code and choose one of the following options:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Records with an 856 - Suppress request and availability options for records with this TOM if there is an 856$u tag or resource entity. Note that this setting affects only records with an 856$u tag.
    • +
    • All records - Suppress request and availability options for all records with this TOM.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If All records is selected for any given type of material, records of that type that do not have 856$u tags will appear in the catalog but there will be no way for the user to request the resource or view availability. This is likely acceptable for Polaris Fusion resources (TOM=dmc), which typically do not have 856$u tags and are accessed by clicking a thumbnail image, but may be a problem for other types of material. The All records setting should be used with caution.

    +
      +
    • Do not suppress - Request and availability options are displayed in search results for this type of material.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Repeat step 3 for each TOM for which you want to change the display setting.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/TitleDispRef.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/TitleDispRef.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b74c4d22 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/TitleDispRef.htm @@ -0,0 +1,2226 @@ + + + + + + + + + Default Title Display Configuration for PowerPAC - Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Default Title Display Configuration for PowerPAC - Reference

    +

    The tables show the default title display configuration for PowerPAC bibliographic search results.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    PowerPAC Brief Display - Monograph +

    +
    +

    PowerPAC Brief Display - Serial +

    +
    +

    Entity +

    +
    +

    Display Order +

    +
    +

    Label +

    +
    +

    Entity +

    +
    +

    Display Order +

    +
    +

    Label +

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Description (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Series (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Series (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Short)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Short)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Short)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Short)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    System Availability

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    System Availability

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Available System Item Count

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    # System items in:

    +
    +

    Available System Item Count

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    # System items in:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Call Number (Short)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Call Number (Short)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement:

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement:

    +
    +

    PowerPAC Summary Display - Monograph +

    +
    +

    PowerPAC Summary Display - Serial +

    +
    +

    Entity +

    +
    +

    Display Order +

    +
    +

    Label +

    +
    +

    Entity +

    +
    +

    Display Order +

    +
    +

    Label +

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Title

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Primary Author

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Snippet

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Snippet:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Short)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Short)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Description (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description (Short)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Series (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Series (Short)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Short)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Short)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Short)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Short)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Short)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    System Availability

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +

     

    +
    +

    System Availability

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +

     

    +
    +

    Available System Item Count

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    # System items in:

    +
    +

    Available System Item Count

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    # System items in:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Call Number (Short)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Call Number (Short)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement:

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement:

    +
    +

    PowerPAC Full Display - Monograph +

    +
    +

    PowerPAC Full Display - Serial +

    +
    +

    Entity +

    +
    +

    Display Order +

    +
    +

    Label +

    +
    +

    Entity +

    +
    +

    Display Order +

    +
    +

    Label +

    +
    +

    Type of Material

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Format:

    +
    +

    Type of Material

    +
    +

    1

    +
    +

    Format:

    +
    +

    Uniform Title (Long)

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Uniform Title:

    +
    +

    Uniform Title (Long)

    +
    +

    2

    +
    +

    Uniform Title:

    +
    +

    Author (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Author (Long)

    +
    +

    3

    +
    +

    Author:

    +
    +

    Title (Long)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Title (Long)

    +
    +

    4

    +
    +

    Title:

    +
    +

    Edition (Long)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Edition:

    +
    +

    Edition (Long)

    +
    +

    5

    +
    +

    Edition:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Long)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Publisher (Long)

    +
    +

    6

    +
    +

    Publisher, Date:

    +
    +

    Description (Long)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Description (Long)

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    Description:

    +
    +

    Summary (Long)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Summary:

    +
    +

    Summary (Long)

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    Summary:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Long)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note (Long)

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    Target Audience Note:

    +
    +

    Series (Long)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Series (Long)

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    Series:

    +
    +

    Volume (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Volume:

    +
    +

    Volume (Long)

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    Volume:

    +
    +

    Frequency (Long)

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Frequency:

    +
    +

    Frequency (Long)

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    Frequency:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Subjects

    +
    +

    13

    +
    +

    Subjects:

    +
    +

    Other Author (Long)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Other Author:

    +
    +

    Other Author (Long)

    +
    +

    14

    +
    +

    Other Author:

    +
    +

    Other Title (Long)

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Other Title:

    +
    +

    Other Title (Long)

    +
    +

    15

    +
    +

    Other Title:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Long)

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Former Title (Long)

    +
    +

    16

    +
    +

    Former Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Long)

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    Later Title (Long)

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    Later Title:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Long)

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    Web Link (Long)

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    Web Site:

    +
    +

    LCCN (Long)

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    LCCN:

    +
    +

    LCCN (Long)

    +
    +

    19

    +
    +

    LCCN:

    +
    +

    ISBN (Long)

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    ISBN:

    +
    +

    ISBN (Long)

    +
    +

    20

    +
    +

    ISBN:

    +
    +

    ISSN (Long)

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    ISSN:

    +
    +

    ISSN (Long)

    +
    +

    21

    +
    +

    ISSN:

    +
    +

    OCLC Control Number

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Other Number:

    +
    +

    OCLC Control Number

    +
    +

    22

    +
    +

    Other Number:

    +
    +

    STRN (Long)

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    STRN:

    +
    +

    STRN (Long)

    +
    +

    23

    +
    +

    STRN:

    +
    +

    GPO (Long)

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    GPO Item No.:

    +
    +

    GPO (Long)

    +
    +

    24

    +
    +

    GPO Item No.:

    +
    +

    CODEN (Long)

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Label:            CODEN:

    +
    +

    CODEN (Long)

    +
    +

    25

    +
    +

    Label:            CODEN:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Total System Item Count

    +
    +

    26

    +
    +

    System Availability:

    +
    +

    Hold Request Count

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Current Holds:

    +
    +

    Hold Request Count

    +
    +

    27

    +
    +

    Current Holds:

    +
    +

    Control Number

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Control Number:

    +

     

    +
    +

    Control Number

    +
    +

    28

    +
    +

    Control Number:

    +

     

    +
    +

    Bibliographic Call Number

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Bibliographic Call Number

    +
    +

    29

    +
    +

    Call Number:

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Count

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Course Reserves:

    +
    +

    Course Reserve Count

    +
    +

    30

    +
    +

    Course Reserves:

    +
    +

    Medium (Long)

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Medium:

    +
    +

    Medium (Long)

    +
    +

    31

    +
    +

    Medium:

    +
    +

    System-Defined Entities for Title Display Configuration

    +

    This table lists the available system-defined entities for configuring the Brief and Full Title Display for PowerPAC.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Available System-Defined Entities for Configuring Brief or Full Title Display +

    +
    +

    Data Element +

    +
    +

    Description +

    +
    +

    Keywords in Context string +

    +
    +

    Like many popular web search engines, this element shows an excerpt from the record that contains the search term in quick, keyword, phrase, exact, advanced, and Boolean brief search results. Helps patrons determine if a title is relevant by showing context, but some may find the additional information confusing. +

    +
    +

    Publisher, date (260 $b, $c) +

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. +

    +
    +

    Edition (250 all subfields) +

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. +

    +
    +

    856 (URL link) +

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated. The following program logic determines the link text: +

    +

    •856 $y - Link Text - If the bibliographic record has an 856 $y, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the web link display instead of the URL in the 856 $u. +

    +

    856 $3 - Material Specified - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856 $y, but it does have an 856 $3, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the web link display instead of the URL in the 856 $u.

    +

    •856 $u - URL - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856 $y or an 856 $3, the web link text that you specify in the Label field. The default text is Web Site. +

    +

    Note: If there is text in the 856 $z, it displays as a note but not part of the web link. +

    +

    When the link is selected, the related web site opens. +

    +
    +

    Description (300 all subfields) +

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. +

    +
    +

    Series

    +
    +

    A single series field is selected for brief display. The following program logic determines which series field is used:

    +

    1. Use the first 4xx in the record that is not a 490.

    +

    2. If the only 4xx in the record is a 490, do not use it; instead, use the first 8xx in the record.

    +

    3. If the only 4xx in the record is a 490 and there is no 8xx, use the 490.

    +

    Clicking the series entry launches a browse search on the series.

    +
    +

    Target Audience (521 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated. This field displays the Motion Picture Association of America (MPAA) rating for movies.

    +
    +

    Former Title (780 selected subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Note:

    +

    Subfields o, r, u, w, x, y, z, 4, 6, 7, and 8 are suppressed from the brief title display

    +
    +

    Later Title (785 selected subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Note:

    +

    Subfields o, r, u, w, x, y, z, 4, 6, 7, and 8 are suppressed from the brief title display.

    +
    +

    Local Availability Summary

    +
    +

    Set this in conjunction with # Local items in and # of Local items (see below). This setting displays the specified label; the other two provide the appropriate numbers. If the local count is 0 and the user is connected to the system, the display is suppressed. Example with default label: Local Availability: 3 (of 4)

    +
    +

    System Availability Summary

    +
    +

    Set this in conjunction with # System items in and # of System items (see below). This setting displays the specified label; the other two provide the appropriate numbers. Example with default label: System Availability: 3 (of 4)

    +
    +

    Call Number

    +
    +

    If the user is connected to a branch, the item call number from the first item with a status of In at that location is displayed; if none are in, the call number of the last item that was In is displayed. If there are no local items, no call number is displayed. If the user is connected to the system and this data element is set to display, the bibliographic call number is used.

    +
    +

    Edition (250 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    ISBN (020 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # System items

    +
    +

    Total items in the system attached to this bibliographic record. Works with the # System items in data element (see below) to construct an availability count - for example, 3 of 4. The data element System Availability Summary (see above) specifies the label for the count. To be included in item counts, Display in PAC must be checked in the item record, and the item record status must not be provisional or deleted. Serials: An item is considered a serial if there is an issue record (with or without linked item records), the copy order type is subscription, and issues are retained. These serials are included in the counts if Display in PAC is checked in the serial holdings record.

    +
    +

    # Hold requests

    +
    +

    Number of current hold requests for the title.

    +
    +

    Summary (520 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # Local items

    +
    +

    Total number of local items attached to this bibliographic record. A local item is one whose assigned branch is listed as local to the connection organization in the Item Availability Display Order policy table for the organization. Works with the # Local items in data element (see below) to construct an availability count - for example, 3 of 4. The data element Local Availability Summary (see above) specifies the label for the count. If the local count is 0 and the user is connected to the system, the display is suppressed.

    +
    +

    Control number (001)

    +
    +

    The Polaris control number of bibliographic record, taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # Course reserves

    +
    +

    Number of courses for which items linked to this bibliographic record are reserved.

    +
    +

    # Local items in

    +
    +

    Works with the # Local Items data element (see above) to construct an availability count. If the local count is 0 and the user is connected to the system, the display is suppressed.

    +
    +

    # System items in

    +
    +

    Works with the # System Items data element (see above) to construct an availability count.

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    For serials. Displays the retention period from the first to the last retained for all branches. Gaps are not included, certain issues may not be actually available locally.

    +
    +

    Medium (245 $h)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Format

    +
    +

    Polaris Type of Material entries, taken from multiple MARC record fields.  

    +
    +

    UPC (024 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 1.

    +
    +

    Gov Doc Number (086 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Bibliography Note (504 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Restrictions on Access Note (506 $a - $f, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Credits Note (508 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Participants and Performers Note (511 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Summary Note (520 $a - $c, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = blank or 8.

    +
    +

    Subject Note (520 $a - $c, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 0.

    +
    +

    Review Note (520 $a - $c, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 1.

    +
    +

    Scope and Content Note (520 $a - $c, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 2.

    +
    +

    Abstract Note (520 $a - $c, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 3.

    +
    +

    Content Advice Note (520 $a - $c, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 4.

    +
    +

    Audience Note (521 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = blank or 8.

    +
    +

    Reading Grade Level Note (521 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 0.

    +
    +

    Interest Age Level Note (521 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 1.

    +
    +

    Interest Grade Level Note (521 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 2.

    +
    +

    Special Audience Characteristics (521 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 3.

    +
    +

    Motivation/Interest Level (521 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 4.

    +
    +

    Reading Program Note (526 $a -$d, $i, $z)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    System Details Note (538 $a, $i, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Terms Governing Use and Reproduction Note (540 $a - $d, $u)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Language Note (546 $a - $b)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Awards Note (586 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # Hold requests

    +
    +

    Number of current hold requests for the title.

    +
    +

    Summary (520 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # Local items

    +
    +

    Total number of local items attached to this bibliographic record. A local item is one whose assigned branch is listed as local to the connection organization in the Item Availability Display Order policy table for the organization. See “Set up the local/system item availability display” on page 158. Works with the # Local items in data element (see below) to construct an availability count - for example, 3 of 4. The data element Local Availability Summary (see above) specifies the label for the count. If the local count is 0 and the user is connected to the system, the display is suppressed.

    +
    +

    Control number (001)

    +
    +

    The Polaris control number of bibliographic record, taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # Course reserves

    +
    +

    Number of courses for which items linked to this bibliographic record are reserved.

    +
    +

    # Local items in

    +
    +

    Works with the # Local Items data element (see above) to construct an availability count. If the local count is 0 and the user is connected to the system, the display is suppressed.

    +
    +

    # System items in

    +
    +

    Works with the # System Items data element (see above) to construct an availability count.

    +
    +

    Holdings Statement

    +
    +

    For serials. Displays the retention period from the first to the last retained for all branches. Gaps are not included, certain issues may not be actually available locally.

    +
    +

    Medium (245 $h)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Format

    +
    +

    Polaris Type of Material entries, taken from multiple MARC record fields.  

    +
    +

    UPC (024 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated when IND1 = 1.

    +
    +

    Gov Doc Number (086 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    This table lists the available system-defined entities for configuring the Full Title Display for PowerPAC.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Available System-Defined Entities for Configuring the Full Title Display +

    +
    +

    Data Element +

    +
    +

    Description +

    +
    +

    Format

    +
    +

    Polaris Type of Material entries, taken from multiple MARC record fields.

    +
    +

    Uniform Title (130 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. If a record in the search results does not have a Title Statement (245 tag), the system uses the Uniform title as the primary title. If you select this element for display, and the record has entries in both the 245 and 130 tags, both will display.

    +
    +

    Author (1xx all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Clicking an author entry launches a browse search on the author.

    +
    +

    Title (245 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Edition (250 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Publisher, date (260 $b, $c)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Description (300 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Summary (520 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Target Audience (521 $a - $z)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Series (400, 410, 411, 440, 490, 800, 810, 811, 830 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Clicking a series entry launches a browse search on the series.

    +
    +

    Volume (362 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Frequency (310 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Subject (6xx - except 655 - alphabetic subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Clicking a subject entry launches a browse search on the subject.

    +
    +

    Genre (655 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Added Author (700, 710, or 711 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Added Title (222, 240, 242, 243, 246, 247, 730, or 740 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Former Title (780 all non-numeric subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Note:

    +

    Subfields o, r, u, w, x, y, and z are retained in the full title display.

    +
    +

    Later Title (785 all non-numeric subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated. Note:

    +

    Subfields o, r, u, w, x, y, and z are retained in the full title display.

    +
    +

    Notes (5xx all subfields, except 505, 520, and 521)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    Contents (505 all subfields)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record fields indicated.

    +
    +

    856 (URL link)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated. The following program logic determines the link text:

    +

    •856 $y - Link Text - If the bibliographic record has an 856 $y, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the web link display instead of the URL in the 856 $u.

    +

    •856 $3 - Material Specified - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856 $y, but it does have an 856 $3, the text in the first occurrence of this tag is used for the web link display instead of the URL in the 856 $u.

    +

    •856 $u - URL - If the bibliographic record does not have an 856 $y or an 856 $3, the web link text that displays is the URL in the 856 $u.

    +

    Note: If there is text in the 856 $z, it displays as a note but not part of the web link.

    +

    When the link is selected, the related web site opens.

    +
    +

    LCCN (010 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    ISBN (020 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    ISSN (022 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Publisher Number (028 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    Other Number (035 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    STRN (027 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    GPO Item No. (074 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    CODEN (030 $a)

    +
    +

    Taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +

    # System items

    +
    +

    Total items in the system attached to this bibliographic record. Works with the # System items in data element (see below) to construct an availability count - for example, 3 of 4. To be included in item counts, Display in PAC must be checked in the item record, and the item record status must not be provisional or deleted. Serials: An item is considered a serial if there is an issue record (with or without linked item records), the copy order type is subscription, and issues are retained. These serials are included in the counts if Display in PAC is checked in the serial holdings record.

    +
    +

    # Hold requests

    +
    +

    Number of current hold requests for the title.

    +
    +

    # Local items

    +
    +

    Total number of local items attached to this bibliographic record. A local item is one whose assigned branch is listed as local to the connection organization in the Item Availability Display Order policy table for the organization. Works with the # Local items in data element (see below) to construct an availability count - for example, 3 of 4.

    +
    +

    Control number (001)

    +
    +

    The Polaris control number of the bibliographic record, taken from the MARC record field indicated.

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Translate_labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_parts_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Translate_labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_parts_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2cf17cf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/Translate_labels_for_Narrow_Related_Web_parts_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Translate labels for Narrow/Related web parts (Polaris PowerPAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Translate labels for Narrow/Related web parts (Polaris PowerPAC)

    +

    If your library system has purchased other language versions of Polaris PowerPAC, you can translate the labels for the Narrow your search and Related searches web parts and the labels for the elements displayed under them. To translate the labels:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches. The dialog box opens to the Narrow Your Search tabbed page.
    4. +
    5. Click the appropriate tab (Narrow Your Search or Related Searches) for the labels you want to translate. See Set up the Narrow your search web part or Set up the Related searches web part.
    6. +
    7. Select the appropriate data element, and click Translate Label. The Language Strings dialog box opens.
    8. +
    +

    + LangStringsRel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the Choose Language list. The options are determined by the language versions of Polaris PowerPAC purchased by your library system.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the box in the Display Text column next to the label name you want to translate, and type the translated text in the box. The maximum number of characters is 50.
    4. +
    5. To insert a diacritic character, follow these steps:
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens.
    2. +
    +

    + LanguageStringsTrans.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a graphic character set.
    2. +
    3. Select the character, and click Insert. The Character Picker dialog box closes.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the Language Strings dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click the Save icon on the Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches dialog box to save your settings on the current tabbed page.
    4. +
    +

    Your changes are immediately applied to the Polaris database, but you need to clear the page cache. See Updating Page Caches.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fdd78723 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + EContent Availability Suppressed in Mobile PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Availability Suppressed in Mobile PAC

    +

    When the PAC profile Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles is set to Yes for the branch the patron is connected to, the Find It link does not display on the Mobile PAC Title view.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPowPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPowPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7964054 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/econtentmobPowPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + EContent Availability Suppressed in PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Availability Suppressed in PowerPAC

    +

    When the PAC profile, Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles, is set to Yes for the branch the patron is connected to, the results list does not display the Availability button, and the full display for a title does not include the Availability drawer for integrated eContent titles in PowerPAC. The availability counts display regardless of the profile setting.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/suppressPACavail.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/suppressPACavail.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..035ba43a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOresults/suppressPACavail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + Suppress eContent Availability Display in PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppress eContent Availability Display in PAC

    +

    Your library can prevent detailed availability information from displaying for integrated eContent titles in PAC (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC). When the PAC profile Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles is set to Yes for the branch the patron is connected to, eContent titles display as follows:

    +
      +
    • PowerPAC - Neither the Availability button nor the Availability drawer are displayed for integrated eContent. The availability counts are not affected by this setting and will continue to display.
    • +
    • Mobile PAC - The Find It links do not display for integrated eContent.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The Suppress availability and requests profile applies to bibliographic records without any linked items, and generally does not apply to integrated eContent titles, which have linked items. The Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles option suppresses availability display for integrated eContent titles that have eContent items.

    +

    To suppress the availability display for integrated eContent titles:

    +
      +
    1. Select Administration > Explorer, and select the organization (System, Library, or Branch).
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles, and select the PAC tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Item availability: Suppress for integrated econtent titles, and select Yes.
    6. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    For examples of integrated eContent title display when availability is suppressed for the selected branch connection in the PAC, see:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Public_Access_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Public_Access_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd9d48fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Public_Access_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Public Access Profiles and Parameters

    +

    Public access parameters and profiles control general aspects of public access, and specific functions related to Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and Polaris Mobile PAC. You can make most settings at the system, library, or branch level. You can view and set public access profiles and parameters from the Administration Explorer or an administration workform.

    +

    Note:

    These System Administration permissions are required to modify profiles and parameters: Access Administration: Allow, Libraries: Access, Branches: Access, Modify parameters: Allow, Modify profiles: Allow, System: Access, System: Modify.

    +

    Your library may use multiple Polaris public access applications:

    +
      +
    • Polaris® PowerPAC provides responsive Web-based access to library searches and services from remote computers, tablets, and smartphones, and from devices in the library.
    • +
    • Polaris® PowerPACChildren’s Edition is the Web-based application designed specifically for children’s use.
    • +
    • Polaris Mobile PAC is the Web-based PAC application designed for mobile devices.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Statistical Summary report provides detailed information about system activity, including PAC activity such as patron logins, patron self-registration, holds placed from PAC, and holds cancelled from PAC. To access this report, select Utilities, Reports and Notices from the Polaris Shortcut bar, and select System in the Polaris Reports dialog box.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Review_and_set_public_access_profiles_and_parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Review_and_set_public_access_profiles_and_parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a098a9d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOstart/Review_and_set_public_access_profiles_and_parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + + Review and set public access profiles and parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Review and set public access profiles and parameters

    +

    To review and set public access profiles and parameters:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization for which you want to set profiles or parameters.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters or Profiles in the list under the expanded folder. The Parameters or Profiles tabs are displayed in the details view.
    4. +
    5. Select the appropriate tab:
      • If you selected Parameters, click the PAC tab.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Search Agent Parameters is the only organization PAC parameter. It controls the ability to set up and save automatic searches in the PAC. See Setting Up Saved Searches in the PAC.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • If you selected Profiles, click the PAC tab for general public access profiles; the PowerPAC tab for profiles specifically for Polaris PowerPAC; the Children’s PAC tab for profiles specifically for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition; or the Mobile PAC tab for profiles specifically for Polaris Mobile PAC.
    • +
    +
    +

    The selected tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the parameter or profile you want to set. The option value is highlighted for editing, or a dialog box appears.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To get a setting from the next higher organizational level, right-click the parameter or profile and select Inherit higher level values. To give a setting to multiple lower organizations, right-click the parameter or profile and select Transmit values to lower levels. Not all settings can be inherited or transmitted.

    +
      +
    1. Depending on the options, set the parameter or profile by typing text or selecting an option, and click OK.
    2. +
    3. Select File > Save.
    4. +
    +

    Important:
    To see the effects of your changes, you may need to update page caches. See Updating Page Caches.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Configure_remote_database_usage_settings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Configure_remote_database_usage_settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c115751 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Configure_remote_database_usage_settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configure remote database usage settings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configure remote database usage settings

    +

    Usage settings for remote databases can be defined at the system, library, or branch level. To configure usage for each remote database:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the Remote databases: Usage settings profile. The Remote Databases: Usage Settings dialog box opens.
    4. +
    +

    + +

    +

    The database list is filtered based on the organization’s resource group membership. The number of entries is displayed at the top of the list. The Follow On column indicates whether the database has been configured to be a follow-on search database for the organization (see step 6).

    +

    Note:
    Each database can inherit configuration settings independently of the other databases. The icon to the left of the database name indicates the level at which the database was configured.

    +
      +
    1. To enable any remote databases to be suggested automatically if a search of the local database yields no results, select the Enable follow-on search after zero hits in local database search check box. To also show the total number of hits in the follow-on search databases, select the Show total hits in follow-on search databases check box.
    2. +
    +

    Once follow-on searching is enabled, you can set specific databases for the follow-on search. See step 6.

    +
      +
    1. Select the database you want to configure, and click Configure Database. The Configure <Database Name> dialog box opens to the Parameters tabbed page.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +

    Note:
    The Revert button returns all settings in this dialog box to those of the parent organization (System, Library, or System defaults).

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) Specify a PowerPAC display name for this database, if you want a name other than that shown.
    2. +
    3. To designate this database for follow-on searching, select Enable for follow-on searching.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    This option is available only if follow-on searching has been enabled for remote databases on the Remote Databases Usage Settings dialog box (see step 3). The database must also be added as a search target for this organization’s PAC. See Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display.

    +

    Consider selecting databases that are universally available to all patrons, regardless of location (all branches, both in-house and remote locations) or patron code, and that do not require logon. If you select a database that requires logging on, the patron will be required to be logged on before the follow-on search occurs. If you select a database that is not available to all patrons, then that database will not be searched during the follow-on search. See Follow-On Search Display in PowerPAC.

    +

    Note:
    You cannot select more follow-on databases than the limit set with the PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at once. See Maximum Number of Databases Searchable at One Time. Conversely, you cannot set a maximum number that is fewer than the number of follow-on databases you have selected.

    +
      +
    1. To enable interlibrary loan (ILL) requests from the PowerPAC for this remote database, select Enable ILLs in PAC. This check box is checked by default. If you do not want to enable ILL requests for this database, clear the Enable ILLs in PAC check box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    To allow ILL requests to be sent to remote databases from the PAC, the Enable check box must be selected in the ILL options dialog box available from the Parameters Request tab (Parameters, Request, ILL options).

    +
      +
    1. To include this database in PowerPAC searches by default, select Include by default. For more information about this feature, see Default Remote Databases in PowerPAC Searches.
    2. +
    +

    Note: +
    The PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at once sets the maximum number of databases that can be searched at one time. The system honors this limit when including remote databases to be searched by default. For example, if you set the maximum number that can be searched at once to 10, but select 12 to be searched by default, only the first 10 will be selected in PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    1. To include the database in the Using drop-down list box in the PowerPAC, select the Include in quick-select drop down check box.
    2. +
    +

    The illustration shows an example from PowerPAC.

    +

    + +

    +

    The PowerPAC Using field always includes the local database. When at least one remote database is specified for the Using quick-select drop down, the drop-down list includes the local database and any remote databases specified for inclusion. However, the drop-down list suppresses a database from display according to access restrictions (see steps 13-16), even if it is selected for inclusion.

    +

    Note:
    A database must be selected to appear in at least one place in the Remote Databases: Categorization of Target Databases dialog box for the organization. See Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display. If the database is not currently categorized and you select Include in quick-select drop down, a warning message appears and the selection is stopped.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the retrieved records limit by selecting a number in the Maximum number of records to return box.
    2. +
    3. Specify the search time limit in seconds by selecting a number in the Maximum search time (seconds) box.
    4. +
    5. Click Save.
    6. +
    7. Click the Authentication tab to set the authentication methods. The Authentication tab page has three subtabs: Restrictions, Patron Codes, and IP Addresses. The Restrictions subtab is displayed first.
    8. +
    +

    + RemoteDBAuthRestrict.gif 

    +
      +
    1. On the Restrictions subtab, specify whether and how patrons access the database from in-house computers within the library and from remote computers:
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options under In-house access:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Disabled - Prevents patrons from accessing the database from a library computer.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Login required - Requires patrons to log on with their library account credentials to access the database from a library computer.

      +
    • +
    • +

      No login required - Patrons can access the database from a library computer without logging on.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For information about setting the criteria that determine whether a workstation is in-house or remote, see Identifying In-House Computers.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following options under Remote access:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Disabled - Prevents patrons from accessing the database from a computer outside of the library.
    • +
    • Login required - Requires patrons to log in with their library account credentials to access the database from a computer outside of the library.
    • +
    • No login required - Patrons can access the database from a computer outside of the library without logging in.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. To control access to the database by patron code, select the Patron Codes subtab, and select the patron codes to restrict. Patrons whose records have the selected patron code will be prevented from accessing the database.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you choose to restrict access by patron code, you must also require the patron to log in (see Step 13). If you do not require log-in, your settings for restricted patron codes are ignored.

    +

    + RemoteDBPatronCode.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To allow access to the remote database by the IP address of the PAC search computer, select the IP Addresses subtab, and do the following:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Type the IP address in the top boxes and click Add.
    • +
    • To include an IP address range, select Enter IP range, type the beginning IP address in the top boxes and the last two digits of the ending IP address in the bottom boxes.
    • +
    +

    The IP addresses allowed access are listed in the Allowed IP Addresses box.

    +
      +
    • To remove an IP address, select it and click the Remove button.
    • +
    +

    + RemoteDBIPAddress.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the UI Options tab to define the search access points that are available for the selected database and search type as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The default access points for all search types are: Author, Subject, and Title.

    +
      +
    • Keyword - Select the access points available for a keyword search with this database selected. ISBN and Any field are additional default access point for keyword searches.
    • +
    • Advanced - Select the access points available for an advanced search with this database selected. ISBN and Any field are additional default access point for advanced searches.
    • +
    • Phrase - Select the access points available for a phrase search with this database selected. Any field is an additional default access point for phrase searches.
    • +
    • Exact - Select the access points available for an exact search with this database is selected.
    • +
    +

    + RemoteDBUIOptions.gif 

    +

    Your settings also control the types of searches available in the PowerPAC Other Searches dashboard that is displayed with results when this database is searched.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the settings.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Filtering PAC remote database search results - You can set up a Contextual Query Language (CQL) filter for a particular Z39.50 connection that filters the results to show only those materials that patrons can actually request. See Filter Remote Z39.50 Target Search Results in PowerPAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Develop_the_remote_targets_display_for_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Develop_the_remote_targets_display_for_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95c2c008 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Develop_the_remote_targets_display_for_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Develop the remote targets display for PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Develop the remote targets display for PAC

    +

    To make remote search targets available for searching in Polaris PowerPAC, and organize them into categories:

    +

    Note:
    You establish connections to remote resources through Polaris Administration server records. See Registering Remote Resource Servers. In Polaris PowerPAC, if no remote search targets have been set up, the Select Databases link and the Using label and drop-down list are not displayed.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Profiles folder for the organization, and click the PowerPAC tab in the details view.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Categorization of target databases.
    4. +
    +

    The Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box displays a list of remote database targets and any defined categories. Book icons represent individual targets. Folder icons represent categories.

    +

    + RemoteDBCategories.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select Root to add a new category at the top level, or select an existing category folder to add a subcategory, and click Add Category. A new category folder icon appears in the tree view, with the cursor positioned to name the folder.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    Root is the default category, represented by a tree icon. It cannot be copied, deleted, or renamed.

    +
      +
    1. Type a category heading, and press ENTER.
    2. +
    +

    + addcateg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. To make an individual search target available, select the category, and click Add Target. (To add a target directly to the Root level, select Root.)
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    New search server targets are not automatically added to the Root level category folder for the system. You must explicitly add them to make them available for search selection. Also, if an organization no longer inherits system-level settings, the organization will need to manually add the new target at the organization level.

    +

    The Add Target dialog box appears with a list of databases available to the organization, based on its membership in the resource groups with access to the databases. See Setting Up Organization Resource Groups.

    +

    + AddTarget.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the target database to add to the category.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can specify a PAC display name for the target. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +

    Note:
    If a single category contains more than the maximum number of databases to search (see Maximum Number of Databases Searchable at One Time), a warning message advises you to put fewer databases in the category.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK. The target database is added to the category.
    2. +
    3. Continue adding categories and targets as needed for the organization.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information +

    +
      +
    • Copy a target - Select the target in the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box, and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy of the target, and click Paste. You can use the Copy/Paste function to add a target to multiple categories. However, a single target cannot appear more than once at the same category level, unless the different instances of the target are in different subcategories.
    • +
    • Copy a category - Select the category in the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box, and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy, and click Paste. This procedure creates categories that are linked. When you copy categories, all subcategories and targets are copied, and all the copied subcategories and targets also become linked. Any change to one category is applied to all the linked categories. A linked category is indicated by a hand on the folder icon. To remove the link between categories, select the category you want to make independent, and click Unlink.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot paste a copied category at the same level as the original category.

    +
      +
    • Delete a target - Select the target in the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box and click Delete. (Deleting a target from a particular category, including Root, does not delete it from other categories.) The local Polaris database cannot be completely removed from the categorization dialog box.  If you select the last instance of the local database and click Delete, a message informs you that the local database must appear at least once, either at the root level or within one category. When you click OK, the message box closes and the local database remains selected. It is not deleted.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When the last instance of a target is removed from the categorization dialog for an organization, the Enable for follow-on searching and Include in quick-select drop down options are automatically disabled for that database in that organization context. For more information about these options, see Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC. If you add the database back to the categorization dialog, the Enable for follow-on searching and Include in quick-select drop down options must be manually set again; they are not automatically restored.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Managing_Federated_Search_Targets.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Managing_Federated_Search_Targets.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a29d4fa6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Managing_Federated_Search_Targets.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Federated Search Targets + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Federated Search Targets

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC features integrated federated searching, which enables users to simultaneously search local and remote databases, and retrieve merged search results. Libraries can offer federated searching of Z39.50 databases only, a feature included in Polaris at no additional cost. These search targets are remote databases or Web search engines that can be searched simultaneously with the Polaris database using the Z39.50 search protocol. If your library allows patrons to place interlibrary loan requests from PAC, you will likely provide Z39.50 search targets that patrons can choose using the Select Databases feature in Polaris PowerPAC. You can filter Z39.50 search target results to show only those materials that patrons can actually request. See Filter Remote Z39.50 Target Search Results in PowerPAC.

    +

    Note: +
    Vital is Innovative's digital asset management solution for describing, indexing, and making available electronic content, such as photographs, slides, digital video, sound clips, and electronic documents. Polaris PowerPAC users can search for Vital digital resources along with other types of material in the library catalog. You set up Vital for searching as you would other remote databases. See Searching Vital Digital Resources in PowerPAC - Overview.

    +

    Tip:
    Your library can also offer remote databases that are searched separately in PowerPAC. See Configure remote database usage settings.

    +

    In addition, Polaris offers separately-activated federated searching in partnership with MuseGlobal, a leading supplier of content integration, aggregation and transformation solutions. This partnership extends federated search capabilities to other protocols in addition to Z39.50, such as: HTTP sources; free text databases; SQL or ODBC databases; and proprietary protocol sources. MuseGlobal offers over 6,500 potential targets and provides search access, connectors, and appropriate URLs for the target resources covered by your subscription. For more information about MuseGlobal, see http://www.museglobal.com

    +

    Note:
    For specific information about setting up federated searching with MuseGlobal, see Polaris PowerPAC and MuseGlobal Federated Search - Overview.

    +

    To set up remote resources as federated search targets, you set up server records for the remote resources in Polaris Administration. See Registering Remote Resource Servers for more information. Then, using the procedures outlined here, you organize them in the way that is most convenient for your patrons, using the PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Categorization of target databases. You can set usage conditions on individual databases, and set a limit on the number of targets that can be searched at one time.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Maximum_Number_of_Databases_Searchable_at_One_Time.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Maximum_Number_of_Databases_Searchable_at_One_Time.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad700dfd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Maximum_Number_of_Databases_Searchable_at_One_Time.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Maximum Number of Databases Searchable at One Time + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Maximum Number of Databases Searchable at One Time

    +

    If system performance is a concern, you can restrict the number of databases that can be searched at one time. Use the PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at once. Valid values are 1-25; the default setting is 10. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels. The PAC connection organization’s setting is used.

    +

    Note:
    You cannot set a maximum number of databases searchable at one time that is fewer than the number of databases you have selected for follow-on searches. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC. Conversely, you cannot select more follow-on databases than your setting for the maximum number searchable at one time.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Merged_Results_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Merged_Results_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0c7ff2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Merged_Results_in_Polaris_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Merged Results in Polaris PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Merged Results in Polaris PowerPAC

    +

    When users search both remote databases and the local catalog, the results are displayed in a merged list. To select the remote databases for searching, the user clicks or taps the Select Databases link to open the list of available databases, and selects the check box next to the databases.

    +

    + +

    +

    Note: +
    You can specify a remote database or databases to be included by default in PowerPAC search results. When you have set this option, patrons do not have to deliberately select the databases for searching using the Select Databases feature. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +

    The user then clicks or taps Set Databases, enters the search term, and clicks or taps the search icon. The search results list first displays results from the local catalog, if selected, and the user can select Add Pending Results to add more results to the list. The number displayed at the top of the list changes as the results are added.

    +

    + +

    +

    As results are being added from the selected databases, the user can click or tap Search Status to see the progress. A status window displays the total results for each database, the database status, the results pending, and the results retrieved.

    +

    + +

    +

    When all the pending records have been retrieved, the search bar indicates that all retrieved results have been added.

    +

    + +

    +

    Users can filter the search results list by database. The Narrow your search dashboard displays the Database facets. For more information about setting up facets, see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +

    + +

    +

    In the merged result set, the brief information for the title displays a database icon DatabaseIcon.gif and the source database for titles found in remote databases.

    +

    + +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Organizing_Target_Databases_for_PowerPAC_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Organizing_Target_Databases_for_PowerPAC_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d7cfae0b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Organizing_Target_Databases_for_PowerPAC_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display

    +

    By default, all remote search targets available for the connection organization’s PowerPAC searches are displayed as a single list, which may be very long. Using the PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Categorization of target databases, you can organize the list into categories, add search targets, and specify which targets should be listed under each category heading. A specific search target can be represented in multiple categories. In the PowerPAC Select Databases lightbox, the user can select a category to search all the targets in the category, or select single targets to search. For example, you might set up categories for different types of targets, such as university libraries and local history archives, or for topics such as Genealogy, Health, and Employment. Categories are initially displayed as expanded, but the user can collapse them as desired. You can have an unlimited number of categories that you can set up at the system, library, or branch level. If categories are not set up for an organization, the organization scheme from the parent level is used.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Select Databases Lightbox in PowerPAC

    +

    Your settings in the PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Categorization of target databases determine the Select Databases lightbox display in Polaris PowerPAC. However, any access restrictions you have set may suppress specific targets from the display (see Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC).

    +

    An explanatory message is displayed at the top of the Select Databases lightbox. If the patron is not logged in, the default text is:

    +

    Some databases are not available to all catalog users in all locations. Please log in to see which databases are available to you. You may continue without logging in, but some databases may not be searched.

    +

    You can edit the message in Polaris WebAdmin (Language Editor). Choose the PowerPAC product; the language string IDs for this message are PACML_SELECTDB_NOTE_LOGIN and PACML_SELECTDB_NOTE_LOGIN2. See WebAdmin online help for detailed instructions.

    +

    + +

    +

    In addition, the Select Databases lightbox displays a Why these databases? link. When the user clicks or taps the link, an explanatory message is displayed:

    +

    + +

    +

    You can edit the label and message in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). Choose the PowerPAC product; the language string IDs for the label and message are PACML_SELECTDB_WHYDB and PACML_SELECTDB_NOTE_CONNECT.

    +

    At the bottom of the lightbox, the user clicks or taps Set Databases to save the database selections. This action typically launches the search in the selected databases using the search term from the user’s immediately preceding search. However, no search is launched in these cases:

    +
      +
    • The immediately preceding search was a keyword control number search (launched when the user selected a dashboard or content carousel link).
    • +
    • There was no immediately preceding search in the current session.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the user types a new search term but does not click the search icon, and then opens the Select Databases lightbox and clicks or taps Set Databases, the new search term is ignored and the search is launched using the immediately preceding search for which the application actually constructed a search string.

    +

    Selecting Clear deselects (unchecks) all databases except the local database, and selects the local database.

    +

    The Close option is displayed when no changes have been made, and simply closes the lightbox, retaining the current selections. A new search is not launched. If changes have been made, a Cancel option is displayed instead of Close; this option cancels any changes and closes the lightbox, retaining the selections in place before the lightbox was opened. A new search is not launched. The X button in the upper right corner of the lightbox functions like Close if no changes have been made, or like Cancel if changes have been made.

    +

    Users can also reset the database selections from the search form. When remote databases have been selected, a Clear option appears next to the Select Databases option; both are highlighted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Remote_Database_Usage_Settings_for_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Remote_Database_Usage_Settings_for_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..896eb8b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Public_Access_Admin/PDOz3950/Remote_Database_Usage_Settings_for_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC

    +

    You can set usage conditions for individual remote databases, including use in the PowerPAC quick-select drop-down, limits on records returned and search time, use as follow-on databases, access restrictions, and search access points.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Follow-On Search Display in PowerPAC

    +

    You can enable a prompt to the PowerPAC user for a follow-on search of databases pre-selected by the library, when a search of the local database returns no hits. This feature is most effective when you specify follow-on target databases that all your patrons can access, regardless of branch, location, or logon status; for example, a state union database.

    +

    If you have enabled follow-on searching and designated follow-on databases (see Configure remote database usage settings), a message and link are displayed when the PowerPAC user searches the local database only and no hits are found. If you have not enabled the Show total hits in follow-on search databases option (see Configure remote database usage settings), the user must click or tap the link to determine if there are results in the follow-on databases.

    +

    If the Show total hits in follow-on search databases option is enabled and no results are found, no message is displayed. If there are results in the follow-on databases, the message displays the search link and the total number of hits found in the follow-on databases.

    +

    Note:
    If Show total hits is enabled, the search is performed in the background regardless of whether the user links to the results. The remote database will likely count the search for statistical purposes. If Show total hits is not enabled, no searches are done unless the user clicks or taps the link to see the results.

    +

    When follow-on searching is enabled, the user does not have to retype the search term when the follow-on search is launched. However, if any of the follow-on databases require logon, and the user has not logged on, the database requiring logon is not searched. Only those follow-on databases that do not require logon are searched, and an error message is displayed in the search status window for the databases that could not be searched. Similarly, if the library has selected databases that are not accessible to the current user (perhaps because of the user’s registered branch, location, or patron code), those databases are not searched and an error message is displayed in the search status window for the databases that could not be searched.

    +

    The follow-on databases (and the local database) are also automatically selected on the Select Databases light box (see Select Databases Lightbox in PowerPAC). All subsequent searches use the selected databases, until the user resets the search databases or ends the session. The Reset Databases option is also displayed next to the Select Databases option on the search form.

    +

    Default Remote Databases for PowerPAC Searches

    +

    You can specify a remote database or databases to be included by default in PowerPAC search results. When you have set this option, patrons do not have to deliberately select the databases for searching using the Select Databases feature, but they can deselect them to omit the database results from a search if they choose.

    +

    Be sure the database servers are registered in Polaris, and that resource groups have been specified if necessary. See Set up a Server Record for a Z39.50 or Other Search Server .

    +

    Note: +
    The PowerPAC profile Remote databases: Maximum number that can be searched at once sets the maximum number of databases that can be searched at one time. The system honors this limit when including remote databases to be searched by default. For example, if you set the maximum number that can be searched at once to 10, but select 12 to be searched by default, only the first 10 will be selected in PowerPAC.

    +

    See Configure remote database usage settings for set-up instructions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_from_the_Serial_Issue_Part_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_from_the_Serial_Issue_Part_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..514f6710 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_from_the_Serial_Issue_Part_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claim from the Serial Issue/Part workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claim from the Serial Issue/Part Workform

    +

    If you did not select Automatic claiming, you can manually generate claims from the issue or part record. You can search for issues or parts by title and limit by the status of Pending Claim to find specific issues.

    +

    To claim from the Serial Issue or Part workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Issue or Serial Part workform for the issue or part that is eligible to be claimed.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools | Claim or click claimiconiss.gif.
    4. +
    +

    A message asks if you are sure you want to claim the issue or part.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The claim data is recorded in the Claims view of the Issue or Part workform under Claim History. A claim notice is generated and sent to the supplier via e-mail, if you have set up the notice method as E-mail. If your claim notice method is set to Print, you can print the notice.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_issues_parts_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_issues_parts_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..652b6cf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claim_issues_parts_from_the_Claim_Alert_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claim issues/parts from the Claim Alert List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claim Issues/Parts from the Claim Alert List

    +

    To claim serial issues/parts that appear on the Claim Alert List:

    +

    Tip:
    Use the Organizations and Status boxes to filter the Claim Alert List. To see more claims, drag the lower right-hand corner of the Claim Alert List window. Expand the columns by dragging the borders of the column headings.

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Claim Alert List from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Claim Alert List appears.

    +

    Note:
    The Claim Alert List shows serial issues or parts that are eligible to be claimed. If you select Claim Alert List from the Acquisitions menu, you will see the purchase order line items that are eligible to be claimed. You can also see the purchase order line items information if you change the record type.

    +

    Tip:
    Click ClaimBut.gif on the menu bar to claim all items, or click this icon in the list bar to claim selected line items.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the issue or part for which you want a claim to be sent to the supplier, and select Claim from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can also claim all the issues/parts that appear on the Claim Alert List by selecting Tools, Claim from the menu bar on the Claim Alert List.

    +

    The issue or part record is updated, and the claim history appears in the bottom of the Issue or Part workform. You can double-click the issue or part in the Claim Alert List to go to the Issue or Part workform.

    +
      +
    1. If you selected Print as your notice method, the notice is generated, but you need to print it. See Print a claim notice.
    2. +
    +

    If you selected email as your notice method, the claim notice will be emailed automatically according to the schedule for the SQL Server job, Notice Processing. All email notices (overdue, billing, fine, hold request, reminder, routing, and claim) are handled by this job. See Polaris SQL Jobs Reference.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Selecting claiming notification methods - See Set up claiming notification.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_Issues_or_Parts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_Issues_or_Parts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c01d832a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_Issues_or_Parts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claiming Issues or Parts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claiming Issues or Parts

    +

    If your library does not claim serial issues and parts automatically, you can generate claims from the Claim Alert List or from the Issue or Part workform. When you make a claim manually, the notice is generated and you can print it or e-mail it.

    +

    Note:
    For more information on setting serials claiming to manual or automatic, see Set up claiming notification.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_in_Serials.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_in_Serials.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..facebbcb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Claiming_in_Serials.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claiming in Serials + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claiming in Serials

    +

    An issue or part may be claimed if it does not arrive when expected, it arrives damaged, or the wrong issue is received. To set up claiming, you enter the claiming data in the Supplier record, and the data is copied automatically to the Serial Holdings records linked to this supplier. You can change the claiming data in the Serial Holdings record, and add more claiming intervals beyond those in the Supplier record.

    +

    You can set up manual or automatic claiming, and you can specify the claim notification method and text in Polaris Administration. See Set up claiming notification.

    +

    If you select manual claiming, issues or parts go to Pending claim status (via overnight processing), and they remain pending on the Claim Alert List until you claim the issue or part. When you claim the issue or part from the Claim Alert List, the issue or part’s status changes to Claimed. As each issue or part is claimed manually, a notice is generated as an e-mail or printable notice, depending on how you set the notice method in Polaris Administration.

    +

    If you select automatic claiming, issues or parts change to a Claimed status via overnight processing. The claim notices are generated automatically as e-mail or printable notices, depending on your claiming notification method.

    +

    When the claiming method is set to e-mail, the e-mail notices are generated (either by automatic or manual claiming), and they are sent out by the e-mail manager. When the claiming method is set to print, the notices are also generated, but you must print the notices by going to Utilities, Reports and Notices. See Print a claim notice.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_claiming_criteria_in_the_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_claiming_criteria_in_the_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc2a77a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_claiming_criteria_in_the_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter claiming criteria in the serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Claiming Criteria in the Serial Holdings Record

    +

    To add claiming information in the Serial Holdings Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are creating a new serial holdings record, see Create a serial holdings record.

    +
      +
    1. Select View | Orders.
    2. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings Record, Orders view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Link to the purchase order and/or subscription record, if applicable. See Enter order data for a serial holdings record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    It is not necessary to have a linked purchase order or subscription record to do serials claiming.

    +
      +
    1. If the supplier’s name and SAN fields are not already filled in, click Find to search for and select the supplier for the serials title.
    2. +
    +

    The supplier’s name and SAN are filled in, and the claiming information for the basic bibliographic unit appears in the lower right corner of the workform. Up to five claiming intervals can be defined in the Supplier record for the basic bibliographic unit. You can define more claiming intervals for the basic bibliographic unit or enter claiming data for the serial title’s index or supplement on the Serial Holdings Record workform.

    +
      +
    1. Under Claim Setup, type the vendor’s identification number for the subscription in the Subscription ID box. This number is printed on the claim notice.
    2. +
    3. Click Add if you want to add more claims to the claiming data in the supplier record.
    4. +
    +

    The Add Claim Interval dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of publication in the Category box, type the number of days between the last claim and the next claim in the Interval box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    When a serial issue is not received by the number of days in the Days after released/expected arrival box in the Supplier record, the claiming cycle begins. When the claiming cycle has passed without receipt of the issue or part, the serial issue appears on the Claim Alert List unless you have chosen automatic claiming.

    +

    If your library has chosen automatic claiming, notices are generated and they are e-mailed automatically (if you have selected e-mail as your notice method), or you can print them in a batch.

    +

    Tip:
    All e-mail notices are sent automatically according to the schedule for the SQL Server job Notice Processing. This includes overdue, billing, fine, hold request, reminder, routing, and claim notices.

    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_serials_claiming_information_in_the_Supplier_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_serials_claiming_information_in_the_Supplier_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8339ae9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Enter_serials_claiming_information_in_the_Supplier_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter serials claiming information in the Supplier workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Serials Claiming Information in the Supplier Workform

    +

    To enter claiming information in the Supplier workform:

    +
      +
    1. On the Supplier Record workform, select View > Claims or select  ClaimIcon.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Claims view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the number (1-5) in the Maximum claims box to indicate the number of claims that you want to go to the supplier.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can send more than five claims for serial issues/parts. Enter the five claiming intervals in the Supplier record, and add more claiming intervals on the Serial Holdings record.

    +
      +
    1. In the days after release/expected box, type the number of days you want to elapse between when a serial issue is expected and the time when the first claim is generated.
    2. +
    3. Enter the claim cycle information as follows:
      1. Type a number in the 1st claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the first claim is generated before the second claim is generated.
      2. Type a number in the 2nd claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the second claim is generated before the third claim is generated.
      3. Type a number in the 3rd claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the third claim is generated before the fourth claim is generated.
      4. Type a number in the 4th claim box to indicate the number of days that must pass after the fourth claim is generated before the fifth claim is generated.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    The cancel information is not relevant for claimed serial issues because individual issues are not canceled. Rather, the whole subscription may be canceled or not renewed.

    +
      +
    1. Select Claim notice if you want claim notices to be sent.
    2. +
    3. If you have selected the Claim notice box, select the Notice method.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If Supplier Preference is selected in the Notification method box in Notification options in Polaris Administration, the notice method you set in the Supplier record will be used to send a claim notice. See Set up claiming notification.

    +
      +
    1. Select File > Save to save the record.
    2. +
    +

    The claiming data is filled in for any serials holdings records that are linked to this supplier record. You can change the claiming information in the serial holdings records, or you can add more claiming intervals beyond the five in the supplier record. See Enter claiming criteria in the serial holdings record.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Printing Serial Claim Notices - If you have selected Print for the notice method in the Supplier record and the notification option in Polaris Administration is set to Supplier Preference or Print, you can print claim notices. See Print a claim notice.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Entering_Serials_Claiming_Information.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Entering_Serials_Claiming_Information.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e25599f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Entering_Serials_Claiming_Information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Entering Serials Claiming Information + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Entering Serials Claiming Information

    +

    You enter serials claiming criteria and the claiming notice address in the Supplier workform. The claiming criteria are copied to the Serial Holdings Record workform for any linked serial holdings records. If needed, additional claiming intervals can be added in the Serial Holdings Record workform.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Print_a_claim_notice.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Print_a_claim_notice.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bd092ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSclaim/Print_a_claim_notice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print a claim notice + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print a Claim Notice

    +

    To print a claim notice:

    +

    Tip:
    Claim notice options are set in Polaris Administration. See Set up claiming notification.

    +
      +
    1. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Reports dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Notices, Serials, Serial Claim Notice.
    2. +
    +

    The Parameters dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization for which you want to print notices and the date range (Start date and End date) to indicate the notices you want to print.
    2. +
    +

    Notes:
    If you do automatic claiming and print claim notices, all the automatically-generated claim notices will be printed for the date range you specified.
    If your serials claiming is centralized, set up notification at the system level. If your serials claiming is decentralized, set up notification at the library or branch level.

    +

    The Print Preview dialog box appears with the claim notices displayed.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Print to print the notice.
    2. +
    +

    You can fax or mail the claim notices to the serials supplier.

    +

    Note:
    The Subscription ID is printed on the claim notice if you entered it on the Orders view of the Serial Holdings record. This ID is the vendor number for the subscription.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_serial_item_from_the_Issue_Part_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_serial_item_from_the_Issue_Part_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4570829c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_serial_item_from_the_Issue_Part_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a serial item from the Issue/Part workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a serial item from the Issue/Part workform

    +

    If you did not generate item records automatically at check in, you can add them from the Issue or Part workform.

    +

    Tip:
    For information on creating item records at check in, see Check in issues/parts from the Check In workform.

    +

    To create an item record from the Issue or Part workform:

    +
      +
    1.  From the Issue or Part workform, select Tools, Create Item.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Item for Issue/Part dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type the unit price.
    2. +
    3. Type the barcode.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +

    If the barcode is not recognized as a valid barcode for an item record, a message appears and you can continue creating the item record if you have the Cataloging permission Override invalid item barcode message: Allow.

    +

    If the barcode is valid, the message Linked item record was generated successfully appears in the status bar.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_special_issue_part_at_check_in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_special_issue_part_at_check_in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1214ac47 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_a_special_issue_part_at_check_in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a special issue/part at check in + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a Special Issue/Part at Check In

    +

    You may receive a special issue or part of a serials title that has the same name as the serials title but is published outside of the usual publication pattern. In this case, you can add the issue or part at check in. To add a special issue or part:

    +

    Note:
    Serial issues display in the PAC according to the retention information in the serial holdings record and the most-recently checked in issue, including special issues. For example, if the serial holdings record specifies that issues will be retained for one year, and the special issue is checked in a year after all the other issues were checked in, only the special issue will be displayed in the PAC. The retention information can be changed in the linked serial holdings record. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.

    +

    Tip:
    For special issues that follow the publication pattern, but have a different title than the title in the serial holdings record, see Predict issues/parts with different titles.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click a pattern on the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    The context menu appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Add issue/part from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The new issue or part displays in the Issue or Part workform. It contains the captions and category from the linked pattern, a status of Expected, and information from the Serial Holdings Record.

    +
      +
    1. Type a value for each level of enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing..
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The read-only Chronology date in the Issue or Part workform is the internal chronology date Polaris uses for displaying the issue or part in the correct order in the PAC. The chronology date always displays as MM/DD/YYYY format, whether or not all three levels of chronology are defined in the publication pattern. The chronology date uses the year selected in the first level of chronology if it is selected, or the current year if the year is not selected. If the month and day are not defined, the chronology date uses the month and day from the publication pattern's start date.

    +
      +
    1.  Type or select an expected arrival date in the Expected arrival date box.
    2. +
    3.  Select File | Save to save the issue.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Check in the issue, following the steps in Checking In Serials.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the second level of enumeration in the publication pattern indicates the enumeration restarts after a certain number of issues, you will get a warning message if the issue you are adding exceeds that number. For example, the publication pattern is for a quarterly and the second level of enumeration indicates the numbering restarts after 4 issues. You receive an extra issue that you want to be issue number 5. You can save this issue, but you will receive a warning message that says: “This issue's enumeration contains a value greater than 4. Do you want to continue saving this issue?”

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_irregular_serial_issues_parts_at_check-in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_irregular_serial_issues_parts_at_check-in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24cb079b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Add_irregular_serial_issues_parts_at_check-in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add irregular serial issues/parts at check-in + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Irregular Serial Issues/Parts at Check-In

    +

    The arrival of most serial issues or parts can be predicted using the publication pattern in the serial holdings record. However, some serial issues or parts cannot be predicted because their publication pattern is too irregular or complex to accurately predict an expected arrival date. For the irregular serials, you can manually add issue/part records in advance of the expected arrival of the physical piece:

    +

    To add a subscription issue or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part for an irregular publication pattern:

    +
      +
    1. Display the Subscription Check In workform or the Standing Order Check In workform for the serial to which you want to add an issue or part.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Add Issue/Part.
    4. +
    +

    If there is more than one publication pattern associated with this serial title, a dialog box lists the publication patterns.

    +
      +
    1. If the Publication Patterns dialog box appears, select the publication pattern for the serial issue or standing order part, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can wait until you check in the part to create the bibliographic record. The Create Part Bibliographic Record dialog box appears automatically when you check in the part. See Check in issues/parts from the Check In workform.

    +
      +
    1. If you are adding a standing order part, and you know the bibliographic information, select Tools, Add Bibliographic Record, and enter the information in the Create Part Bibliographic Record dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    The Serial Issue or Standing Order Part workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. of the new issue in the value column of the Enumeration levels boxes in the Issue/Part workform.
    2. +
    3. Enter the chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. of the new issue in the value column of the Chronology levels boxes.
    4. +
    +

    The Chronology date displays the selected chronology levels.

    +

    Note:
    The read-only Chronology date in the Issue or Part workform is the internal chronology date Polaris uses for displaying the issue or part in the correct order in the PAC. The chronology date always displays as MM/DD/YYYY format, whether or not all three levels of chronology are defined in the publication pattern. The chronology date uses the year selected in the first level of chronology if it is selected, or the current year if the year is not selected. If the month and day are not defined, the chronology date uses the month and day from the publication pattern's start date.

    +
      +
    1. If needed, change the date in the Expected arrival date box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Public notes display in the PAC. For example: This issue does not circulate.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Notes to display the Notes view.
    2. +
    3. Type notes in the Public, Non-public, or Non-public/warning boxes that relate to this specific issue.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    The new issue record is added to the Serial Check In issues or parts list with a status of Expected.

    +
      +
    1. If the record was added because the issue has arrived, check in the issue by selecting Tools, Check-In before closing the Serial Issue workform.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_an_issue_or_part_status.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_an_issue_or_part_status.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6e965ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_an_issue_or_part_status.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change an issue or part’s status + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change an Issue or Part’s Status

    +

    If you did not receive an issue as expected and the publisher informs you that the issue or part cannot be supplied, you can change the status from Expected to Never published or Not available. If you have the Display of Issues on Check In Acquisitions/Serials parameter set to exclude these statuses from display, these issues will not display in the Check In workform, but they are retained for statistical purposes. See Setting the Check In Display.

    +

    To change a serial issue or part’s status:

    +
      +
    1. Select the issue or part and select Open.
    2. +
    +

    The Issue or Part workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the status in the Status box.
    2. +
    +

    The drop-down list of statuses appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the status for the issue or part, and select File | Save.
    2. +
    +

    The issue or part is saved with the new status you selected.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_serial_label_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_serial_label_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3cc561bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Change_serial_label_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change serial label defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change Serial Label Defaults

    +

    The defaults for serial labels are set up using profiles in Polaris Administration (see Set Label Profiles). However, you can change these defaults from the Serials menu using the Serials Options dialog box. Once you have made changes using this dialog box, the defaults are set for your login.

    +

    To change the serial label defaults:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Serials Options dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of label to use for serials labels in the Label Type box.
    2. +
    +

    If you want Label Manager to open with serial labels, select Open Label Manager using this default.

    +
      +
    1. Select the method for printing serials labels in the Print Method box.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The serials labels defaults are updated for your user login.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_from_the_Issue_Standing_Order_Part.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_from_the_Issue_Standing_Order_Part.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d50ba3c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_from_the_Issue_Standing_Order_Part.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check in from the Issue/Standing Order Part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check in from the Issue/Standing Order Part

    +

    To check in from the Issue or Standing Order Part:

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for and select the standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part or serial issue you want to check in.
    2. +
    +

    The Standing Order Part or Issue workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Check In from the menu.
    2. +
    +

    If you are checking in a serial issue, the check in is complete. However, you can create an item record for the serial issue if you circulate issues or track their in-house use statistics.

    +

    If you are checking in a standing order part, the Create Part Bibliographic Record dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you checked in a standing order part, complete the Create Part Bibliographic Record dialog box as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Do not use articles before title names, such as “The” or “A”. For The Big Apple, enter: Big Apple. The linked MARC record automatically assigns to the Title information (245) the indicators 10 (one-zero).

    +
      +
    1. Link to an existing bibliographic record by clicking Find to search for and select an existing record, or enter the bibliographic record information in the fields (the minimum required is Title) to create a new bibliographic record.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you do not want this bibliographic record to display in the PAC, clear the Display in PAC check box.

    +

    The bibliographic record is created and saved in the database with a status of Final.

    +

    Tip:
    The Unit price field is read-only if the Polaris Administration Acquisitions/Serials parameter Enter unit price at serials check-in is set to No. The price will appear if it was set in the publication pattern, but it will be read-only. The cursor will go to the Item barcode field on the Create Item for Issue/Part dialog box where you can scan or type the barcode. See Set the prompt for price at check-in.

    +
      +
    1. If the Enter Barcode dialog box appears, type or scan the barcode number, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Generate Item Records at Check In box has been checked in the publication pattern, but not the Prompt for barcode at Check In, the Enter Barcode dialog box does not display. An item is generated at issue check-in.

    +

    The issue or part is received, and the following status changes occur:

    +
      +
    • +

      The issue’s or part’s status is changed to Received.

      +
    • +
    • +

      The status of both the serial holdings record and the linked purchase order line item (if one exists) change to Currently Received.

      +
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Printing serial labels - If the Polaris Administration Staff Client profile Labels: Automatically generate labels for each SO and SUBS check-in is set to Yes, labels are generated automatically when issues or parts are checked in. See Print a label for a serial issue or part.
    • +
    • Routing issues - If you are checking in a serial issue that is on a route list, a message asks if you want to print a route slip. See Print a route slip.
    • +
    • Uncheck in - If you checked in an issue in error, you can undo the check in. See Uncheck in issues or standing order parts.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_from_a_linked_list_box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_from_a_linked_list_box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff26f6e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_from_a_linked_list_box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Check in issues from a linked list box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In Issues from a Linked List Box

    +

    To check in a single or multiple issues from a linked list box that displays issues:

    +
      +
    1. Display the linked list box with the issues listed.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To sort the issues, click a column heading.

    +

    Example:
    You could search for a serial holdings record in the Polaris Find Tool. Then, select the serial holdings record in the Find Tool results list, right-click, and select Links, Issues/Parts. If there are issues linked to the serial holdings record, they display in the linked list box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the issue or issues you want to check in, right-click and select Check In from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the serial holdings record is set to create item records and prompt for a barcode, a message box appears, and you can enter the barcode. If you are checking in multiple serial issues, the check in process pauses when a message box appears, and the issue is highlighted in the list. When you respond to the message, the check in process continues where it left off.

    +
      +
    1. If the Enter Barcode dialog box appears, type or scan the barcode number, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The issues are checked in and their statuses change to Received.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    If a message tells you that the item barcode is invalid, you can continue saving the serial item if you have the cataloging permission Override invalid item barcode message: Allow. 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_parts_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_parts_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..990316dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_issues_parts_from_the_Check_In_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check in issues/parts from the Check In workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In Issues/Parts from the Check In Workform

    +

    To check in serial issues or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts from the Subscription or Standing Order Check In workform:

    +

    Note:
    You can specify the default display of issues or parts in the Check In workform using the Polaris Administration Acquisitions/Serials parameter Display of Issues on Check In. See Setting the Check In Display.

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Check In from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with Check In Records selected in the Object box.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for the serial title.
    2. +
    +

    A list of the standing orders or subscriptions appears in the results list.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the standing order or subscription Check In record.
    2. +
    +

    The Subscription Check In or Standing Order Check In workform appears.

    +

    Tip:
    To expand the window, click and drag the lower right corner.

    +

    Note:
    If you want to enter notes for staff regarding the serial title, such as change in the publication pattern, type in the Non-public or Non-public/warning notes fields. Use the scroll buttons to scroll through the notes. The notes are also updated in the Serial Holdings Record, but they do not display in the PAC. These notes are read-only if you do not have the permission Modify Serial Holdings Record.

    +
      +
    1. Select one standing order part, or select one or more serial issues from the list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot check in multiple standing order parts at once.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click and select Check In from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    If you are checking in a standing order part, the Create Part Bibliographic Record dialog box appears. This dialog box does not appear when you check in a serial issue.

    +
      +
    1. If you checked in a standing order part, complete the Create Part Bibliographic Record dialog box as follows:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Do not use articles before title names, such as “The” or “A”. For The Big Apple, enter: Big Apple. The linked MARC record automatically assigns to the Title information (245) the indicators 10 (one-zero).

    +
    +
      +
    1. Link to an existing bibliographic record by clicking Find to search for and select an existing record, or enter the bibliographic record information in the fields (the minimum required is Title) to create a new bibliographic record.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you do not want this bibliographic record to display in the PAC, clear the Display in PAC check box.

    +

    The bibliographic record is created and saved in the database with a status of Final.

    +

    Tip:
    The Unit price field is read-only if the Polaris Administration Acquisitions/Serials parameter Enter unit price at serials check-in is set to No. The price will appear if it was set in the publication pattern, but it will be read-only. The cursor will go to the Item barcode field on the Create Item for Issue/Part dialog box where you can scan or type the barcode. See Set the prompt for price at check-in.

    +
      +
    1. If the Create Item for Issue/Part dialog box appears, enter a unit price (if necessary), type or scan the barcode number, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Generate Item Records at Check In box has been checked in the publication pattern, but not the Prompt for barcode at Check In, the Create Item for Issue/Part dialog box does not display, but an item is generated.

    +

    The issue or part is received, and the following status changes occur:

    +
    +
      +
    • The issue’s or part’s status is changed to Received.
    • +
    • The status of both the serial holdings record and the linked purchase order line item (if one exists) changes to Currently Received.
    • +
    +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_single_or_multiple_issues_from_the_Find_Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_single_or_multiple_issues_from_the_Find_Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e26cb119 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Check_in_single_or_multiple_issues_from_the_Find_Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Check in single or multiple issues from the Find Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check in Single or Multiple Issues from the Find Tool

    +

    Checking in multiple issues from the Find Tool is useful if you are doing centralized check in. Sorting by the issue’s designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) lets you quickly identify the correct issue and check in multiple copies of the issue for various locations. To check in issues from the Find Tool:

    +

    Tip:
    You cannot check in standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts from the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. In the Polaris Find Tool, select Issue records in the Object box, select Title in the Search by box, select Exact match (implicitly truncated) in the Type box, and select Designation in the Sort by box.
    2. +
    3. Press Enter or click Search.
    4. +
    +

    The issues appear in the Find Tool results list sorted by designation.

    +

    Tip:
    If the publication has a SICI The colloquial name for Serial Item and Contribution Identifier. +The SICI is the SISAC bar code. The SICI incorporates the ISSN and is used on scholarly, technical, medical and other subscription based serials. barcode, you can scan it to locate the issue.

    +
      +
    1. Select the issue or issues you want to check in, right-click, and select Check-In from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the serial holdings record is set to create item records and prompt for barcodes, a message box appears, and you can enter the barcode. If you are checking in multiple serial issues, the check in process pauses when a message box appears, and the issue is highlighted in the list. When you respond to the message, the check in process continues where it left off.

    +
      +
    1. If the Enter Barcode dialog box appears, type or scan the barcode number, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The issue or issues are checked in.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Checking_In_Serials.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Checking_In_Serials.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47ee7f6e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Checking_In_Serials.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + + Checking In Serials + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Checking In Serials

    +

    When you receive serial issues or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts from the supplier, you check in the issue or part. You can check in any issue or part that has a status of Expected, Pending Claim, or Claimed.

    +

    If you set up a publication pattern in the Serial Holdings Record for the title, and you choose to generate issues or parts, they display in the Serial Check In workform. You can predict more expected issues or parts under this publication pattern from the Check In workform, and you can add issues or parts that arrive unexpectedly. When you check in a standing order part, you can either link to an existing bibliographic record or, if no title exists in the database, you can manually create a new bibliographic record.

    +

    You can check in serial issues and standing order parts from the Issue or Standing Order Part workform, the Check In workform, the Polaris Find Tool, and any linked list box that displays the issues or parts. Multiple issues can be checked in at once from the Find Tool or Check In workform.

    +

    If the Generate Item Records at Check In and the Prompt for barcode at Check In boxes are checked in the publication pattern, the barcode prompt appears, and you can scan in a barcode. The prompt may also include a box for the serial issue’s price, if the Enter unit price at serials check-in parameter is set to Yes in Polaris Administration. The Generate Item Records at Check In may also be enabled without the Prompt for barcode at Check In. If this is done, an issue’s linked item will be automatically generated behind the scenes.

    +

    Note:
    During Serials check-in, if the System Administration Permission Override invalid item barcode message: Allow is enabled in Cataloging, an alert appears if an invalid item (format) barcode is scanned.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Combine_issues.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Combine_issues.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d13c977 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Combine_issues.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Combine issues + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Combine Issues

    +

    Sometimes publishers deviate from a normal publication pattern and produce a combined issue. You can combine issues when this deviation from the established publication pattern happens once. If the publication will regularly include this combined issue, you should modify the publication pattern (see Set up the serial publication pattern regularity).

    +

    Note:
    Only expected issues, not parts, can be combined.

    +

    To combine expected issues:

    +
      +
    1. Display the Subscription Check In workform that contains the expected issues you want to combine.
    2. +
    3. Select the two expected issues you want to combine.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    The two issues must be linked to the same publication pattern to be combined. If they are not linked to the same publication pattern, an error message appears, and the issues are not combined.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Combine issues from the menu, or right-click and select Combine issues from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Combine Issues dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Enumeration, Chronology, or Both in the Combine box. If the combined issue is for supplements or indexes, modify the title information for the new combined issue.
    2. +
    3. Update the notes information in the Public, Non-public, Non-public/warning fields.
    4. +
    5. Click OK to combine the two issues.
    6. +
    +

    The original two issues are deleted, and the expected combined issue appears on the Subscription Check In workform.

    +

    Note:
    When two issues are combined, the resulting issue takes the chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. date from the earlier issue, and the expected arrival date is calculated based on the earlier issue's chronology date.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_a_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_a_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da17bd38 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_a_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete a serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete a Serial Holdings Record

    +

    If you no longer need a serial holdings record, you can delete it, but you must first delete all linked issues or parts. See Delete single or multiple serial issues/parts. To delete a serial holdings record:

    +
      +
    1. On the Serial Holdings workform, select File, Delete or click the Delete button.
    2. +
    +

    A message asks if you want to permanently delete the record.

    +
      +
    1. Select OK.
      • If all linked parts or issues have a status of Expected, the serial holdings record is deleted and all linked issues or parts are also deleted.
      • If there are linked issues or parts with a status of Never published or Not available, a warning message appears, but you can delete the serial holdings record.
    2. +
    +

    The serial holdings record is deleted if no issues or parts are linked to it.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_single_or_multiple_serial_issues_parts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_single_or_multiple_serial_issues_parts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0bf4cc23 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Delete_single_or_multiple_serial_issues_parts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delete single or multiple serial issues/parts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Delete Single or Multiple Serial Issues/Parts

    +

    If you have the required Serials permissions, you can delete serial issues and standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts that are no longer retained by your library, regardless of their status. When you delete a received serial issue or standing order part that is linked to an item record, the linked item record is automatically deleted if you also have the Acquisitions permission Allow Create and delete item records from acquisitions and serials and the item can be deleted. See Setting Delete of Issue/Part with Item for more information on the permissions required for managing serial issues and parts.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also delete serial issues or parts automatically when a serials item is deleted in Cataloging. If the Polaris Administration Acquisitions/Serials parameter Delete linked serial issue/part when serial item is deleted is set to Yes, the issue or part is automatically deleted whenever a serial item is deleted.

    +

    You can delete a single or multiple issues or parts at once from the Check In workform, the Find Tool results list or from linked list boxes that display the issues or parts. You can delete a single issue or part from the Issue or Part workform.

    +

    To delete a subscription issue or standing order part, regardless of its status:

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions:
      • From the Issue or Standing Order Part workform, select File, Delete, click the Delete button, or press CTRL+D.
      • From the Find Tool results list, select the issues or parts, right-click and select Delete.
      • From a linked list box that displays issues or parts, select the issues or parts, right-click and select Delete.
      • From the Subscription or Standing Order Check In workform, select the issues or parts, right-click, and select Delete.
    2. +
    +

    A message asks you to confirm the deletion.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to continue deleting the issues or parts.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you are deleting multiple issues at once, the applicable messages appear for each of the issues to be deleted. The process pauses until you respond to the message, and the issue or part is highlighted where the process stopped. See Possible Messages When Deleting Issues or Parts

    +

    The issues or parts are deleted and any linked item records are also deleted, unless there are conditions that prevent their deletion. The items may be marked for deletion but retained in the database if your library retains deleted items until a purge process is run.

    +

    Possible Messages When Deleting Issues or Parts

    +

    When you are deleting issues or parts, the following types of messages may appear:

    +

    Note:
    Each message displays the title of the issue or part you are attempting to delete, its destination branch abbreviation, and its designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.).

    +
      +
    • You cannot delete the issue because the linked item’s status or links to other records prevent it from being deleted. To delete the issue, you must first change the item’s status or links.
    • +
    • Retention settings in the linked serial holdings record indicate the issue is retained. You can click Yes to continue deleting the issue/part.
    • +
    • No other records are linked to the bibliographic record. If there are no other item records linked to this bibliographic record, a message asks you to confirm that you want the Display in PAC check box to be cleared in the bibliographic record. You can click OK to clear the Display in PAC check box in the linked bibliographic record and continue.
    • +
    • There are route list records linked to the issue. You can click OK to continue.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Print_a_label_for_a_serial_issue_or_part.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Print_a_label_for_a_serial_issue_or_part.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a002fed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Print_a_label_for_a_serial_issue_or_part.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print a label for a serial issue or part + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print a Label for a Serial Issue or Part

    +

    A serial label placed on the outside of serial material assists in shelving and provides abbreviated information about the issue or part. You can print labels on sheets or on a continuous feed roll. For information on setting up serial labels, see Serials Administration. If you want to change the default label type or print options, select Serials, Options from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. See Change serial label defaults.

    +

    To print a label for a serial issue or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part +

    +
      +
    1. Access one of the following workforms:
      • Subscription Check In
      • Standing Order Check In
      • Serial Issue
      • Standing Order Part
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The dialog box for printing labels may automatically appear when you check in a serial issue or part.

    +
      +
    1. If you are printing labels from the Subscription or Standing Order Check In workform, select the issue or part for which you want to print labels.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Click singlab.gif or press Ctrl+Alt+L to print a single label, or click multilab.gif or press Ctrl+Alt+M to print multiple labels.

    +
      +
    1. Select File, Label Request and select one of the following options:
      • Single Label
      • Multi-Label 
    2. +
    +

    If you selected Multi-Label, the Insert Multiple Label dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. If you are printing multiple labels, type the number of labels you want to print in the Number of labels to insert box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you selected Single Label, no dialog box appears, and the single label is printed.

    +

    The message Labels requested appears in the status bar, and the labels are printed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Uncheck_in_issues_or_standing_order_parts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Uncheck_in_issues_or_standing_order_parts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2531fd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrecev/Uncheck_in_issues_or_standing_order_parts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Uncheck in issues or standing order parts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Uncheck In Issues or Standing Order Parts

    +

    Sometimes a serial issue or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part is mistakenly checked in for the wrong title. In these cases, you can reset the status of an issue or part record from Received to Expected, thus “undoing” check-in. Undoing the check-in for issues and parts automatically deletes any serial item records which may have been created at check-in.

    +

    To uncheck in issues:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Subscription Check In or Standing Order Part Check In workform for the serial title and copy that need resetting.
    2. +
    3. If the received issues or parts do not display in the Check In workform, select Received in the Issue/part status box above the list.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can press CTRL and select multiple issues or parts.

    +
      +
    1. Select the issue or part with a Received status in the Issues list.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, UnCheck In, or right-click and select UnCheck-In from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The issue or part’s status reverts to its status before it was checked in (Expected, Claimed, Pending Claim, Not Available, or Never published).

    +

    Any serial item records automatically created as a result of check-in are deleted unless there are conditions that prevent their deletion.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_or_an_issue_to_a_route_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_or_an_issue_to_a_route_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a89ef037 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_or_an_issue_to_a_route_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list

    +

    To add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list from the Route List workform:

    +

    Tip:
    You can search for an issue using the Find Tool, and add it to a route list by right-clicking and selecting Add To Route List. You can remove an issue from a route list by selecting Remove From Route List.

    +

    Note:
    You can add an issue to a route list when you check it in. Then, you can either print the individual route slip or print route slips in a batch. (See Print a route slip.)

    +
      +
    1. Display the route list in the Route List workform.
    2. +
    3. Click AddPiecMemBut00363.gif in the Pieces frame.
    4. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also add a serial holdings record to a route list by selecting Tools, Add to Route List on the Serial Holdings Record workform.

    +
      +
    1. Use the Find Tool to search for the serial holdings record or specific issue you want to add to the route list.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select a serial holdings record, all issues for this title can be routed. If you select an issue, only the specific issue can be routed.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the serial holdings record or issue, or right-click and choose Select to add it to the route list.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_members_to_a_route_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_members_to_a_route_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b50fd870 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Add_members_to_a_route_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add members to a route list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add Members to a Route List

    +

    To add the people to whom the piece will be routed:

    +
      +
    1. Display the route list in the Route List workform.
    2. +
    3. Click AddPiecMemBut.gif in the Members frame.
    4. +
    +

    The New Route List member dialog box appears.

    +

    Tip:
    You can type the patron’s name (last name, first name) in the Route to box and use the accelerator keys SHIFT+ALT+F keys to quickly initiate the search for the patron.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find to search for and select the patron to whom you want to route the issue.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To route to someone who is not a registered patron, type the person’s name in the Route to box.

    +
      +
    1. Type any notes you want to include regarding the member.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The member is added to the route list.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Remove a member - Select a member in the route list, right-click, and select Remove or click minus.gif.
    • +
    • Change a member note - If a note appears next to the member’s name, you can change it by double-clicking on it and editing it.
    • +
    • Change the member order - Select a member in the route list, right-click and select Move Up or Move Down, or click the up or down arrow arrows.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Copy_a_route_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Copy_a_route_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..409c5448 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Copy_a_route_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy a route list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Route List

    +

    When you copy a route list, the members are copied and remain in the same order, but the serial holdings records or issues are not copied to the new route list. To create a route list by copying an existing route list:

    +
      +
    1. Display the route list in the Route List workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File | New from the menu.
    4. +
    +

    The New Route List dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Copy Existing Workform, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Route List workform appears with the same member names and information, but without any issues.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the new route list over the existing name.
    2. +
    +

    The new route list must have a different name or owner.

    +
      +
    1. Add issues to the route list. See Add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list.
    2. +
    3. Change the member list, if necessary, as well as other information on the Route List workform.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save.
    6. +
    +

    The new route list is saved with the following copied data:

    +
    +
      +
    • Route List Name +
    • +
    • Owner +
    • +
    • Header +
    • +
    • Footer +
    • +
    • Home Location +
    • +
    • Return Instructions +
    • +
    • Route Period +
    • +
    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Create_a_route_list.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Create_a_route_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e1a66de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Create_a_route_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a route list + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Route List

    +

    To create a route list:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Route List, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Route List workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name for the route list in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Select the library or branch in the Owner box.
    4. +
    5. Select View, Route Slip from the menu.
    6. +
    +

    The Route Slip view appears.

    +

    Important:
    If you print route slips on a receipt printer, only the Return by date (calculated from the Route Period), the title and designation of the issue, and the list of names appear the route slip. If you print route slips on 8.5 x 11 sheets of paper, the route list name, owner, return by date, home location, return instructions, and header and footer are printed.

    +
      +
    1. Indicate the time period for which you want the piece routed by typing a number and selecting Days or Weeks in the Route Period boxes. The Return by date on the route slip is calculated using this route period.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    If you enter 5 days and the issue is checked in on March 1, 2016, the route slip will print with Return by: 3/6/2016. (The date may display differently depending on your regional settings.) +

    +
      +
    1. Add the people to whom you are routing the serials (see Add members to a route list).
    2. +
    3. Add the serial holdings records for the titles you want to route, or add a specific issue (see Add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list).
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    When you add a serial holdings record to the route list, all issues can be routed. When you add a specific issue, the one issue can be routed.

    +
      +
    1. If you do not use a receipt printer to print route slips, you can enter additional information to print on the 8.5 x 11 route slip:
    2. +
    +
      +
    • Select the library where you want the issue returned in the Home location box.
    • +
    • Type instructions in the Return Instructions box.
    • +
    • Type text to appear in the header and footer of the route slip in the Header and Footer boxes.
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Print a route slip +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Creating_Route_Lists.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Creating_Route_Lists.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ac34be3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Creating_Route_Lists.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Route Lists + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Route Lists

    +

    A route list includes the serials to be distributed, the people to whom the serials are distributed, and the time period for which the serials are to be routed. You can add specific issues to a route list, or you can add a serial holdings record to a route list so that each issue of the serials title is routed as it is checked in.

    +

    Your Polaris administrator can set up default values for your library’s route slips. See Set up serials route list defaults. The values can be changed when you change individual route lists, but the default settings remain unless they are changed in Polaris Administration.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Print_a_route_slip.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Print_a_route_slip.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4326b956 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Print_a_route_slip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print a route slip + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print a Route Slip

    +

    To print a route slip:

    +

    Note:
    If the issue/part does not have a route list associated with it, you can select Tools, Add to route list on the Issue, Part, or Check In workform. Or, right-click on the issue/part in the Find Tool results list and select Add to route list. The Find Tool appears with Route List selected. Search for and select the route list that you want to associate with the issue/part.

    +
      +
    1. Display the Check In workform for the issue you want to route.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also select the issue from the Find Tool results list, right-click and select Check in. The issue is checked in and the route slip is printed.

    +
      +
    1. Select the issue to check in, double-click it or select Tools, Check in.
    2. +
    +

    The issue is checked in and the route slip is printed if the print method in the Polaris Administration profile Route list defaults is set to Automatic. If the print method is set to Batch, the route slip is sent to a batch file that you can print by selecting Serials, Batch Print, Route Slip.

    +

    Note:
    The example below shows a route slip printed on a receipt printer. Only the title of the issue, the list of people to whom the issue is routed, and the return by date is printed. If you do not use a receipt printer, more information may appear on the route slip depending on what is set in the Route List workform. See Create a route list.

    +

    + routeslip.gif 

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Route list setup - Route lists define the names on the route slip, the titles to be routed, the time period for which the issues are routed, and other information. For information on setting up route lists, see Creating Route Lists.
    • +
    • Route list defaults - Your system administrator can set up defaults for all the route lists for your organization. See Set up serials route list defaults.
    • +
    • Item records linked to routed issues - If a routed issue is linked to an item record, the item’s circulation status is Routed. If you try to check out a routed item, you will receive an error message. Check the item in to change its circulation status from Routed to In, and then check it out. Or, go to the Notes view on the linked Issue record and change the issue’s status to Returned or blank. The item record’s circulation status will be changed to In.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Printing_Route_Slips.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Printing_Route_Slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ca70e9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Printing_Route_Slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Printing Route Slips + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Printing Route Slips

    +

    You can print route slips to attach to issues that are routed to staff members or other individuals. Route slips are printed on a receipt printer if a receipt printer is the default printer for the workstation. If a regular printer is set as the default printer, the route slips are printed on 8.5 by 11 inch paper.

    +

    Note:
    To print route slips, the issue or part must be associated with a route list. See Add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Return_a_routed_issue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Return_a_routed_issue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fdc09fb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Return_a_routed_issue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Return a routed issue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Return a Routed Issue

    +

    When a routed issue is returned and there is no linked item record to check in, you must change the issue’s status manually from the Issue Record workform or from the Route List workform. If there is an item record linked to the routed issue, you can check in the item record and the status of the linked issue will change to Returned. To change an issue’s status from Routed to Returned:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Issue Record workform for the issue you want to change, and select View, Notes or click IssueNotesIcon.gif to go to the Notes view.
    2. +
    3. Select the route list, and double-click Route Status to display the options.
    4. +
    5. Select Returned to change the issue’s status from Routed to Returned.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Routing_Serial_Issues.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Routing_Serial_Issues.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17f85c27 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSrouting/Routing_Serial_Issues.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Routing Serial Issues + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Routing Serial Issues

    +

    When you check in a serial issue, you can print a route slip to attach to the issue if you want to route it to several people. In order for a route slip to print, the serial holdings record, or individual issue must be associated with a route list.

    +

    The default printer attached to the workstation where you are doing serials check in determines the type of route slip that is printed. If the default printer is a receipt printer, a standard type of route slip is printed on a 3.5 inch receipt slip. If the default printer is not a receipt printer, the route slip prints on an 8.5 x 11 sheet.

    +

    Note:
    If you print route slips on a receipt printer, you cannot customize the text that appears on the slip.

    +

    Your Polaris Administrator can set up route lists defaults, and you set up the route lists in Serials using the Route List workform:

    +
      +
    • +

      Route list defaults profile - Your Polaris Administrator can set up the Route List defaults profile to specify the defaults such as the text to appear on route slips, the issue details (title, designation, collection, etc.) and the print method (batch or automatic). See Set up serials route list defaults.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Route List workform - Use this workform to specify the names of the people to whom the issue will be routed and link the serial titles (serial holdings records) or specific issues that you want routed. For information on setting up route lists, see Creating Route Lists.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you want a notice sent to people on the route list that the issue is being routed to them, you can set up routing notices in Polaris Administration. See Set up routing notices.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_Serial_Holdings_Records_Title.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_Serial_Holdings_Records_Title.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aea8e2bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_Serial_Holdings_Records_Title.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing a Serial Holdings Record’s Title + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Changing a Serial Holdings Record’s Title

    +

    If you have saved a serial holdings record with the wrong title, you can link it to a new bibliographic record. However, any received and retained issues/parts and any linked serial item records will be linked to the new bibliographic record, and they will display in the PAC with the new title.

    +

    In cases where the publisher changes the title of the serial publication, and your library uses successive entry cataloging, it is preferable to create a new serial holdings record and link it to the bibliographic record with the publication’s new title. Close the publication pattern for the old serial holdings record, which deletes any issues that have been predicted but not received. Then, select File | New, Copy to create a new serial holdings record with the same publication pattern as the old title, and then link to the new bibliographic record.

    +

    If the publication pattern has not changed with the new title, you can then generate issues from the existing pattern, and check in issues for the new title. This method ensures that any retained issues and items from the old serial holdings record keep the link to the old bibliographic record and display in the PAC under the old title. Any subsequent retained issues and items will display in the PAC under the new title.

    +

    In Polaris Administration, the title display for serials can be configured to display the 780 (Former Title) and 785 (Later Title) fields in the PAC. When the title display has been configured to display the former and later title, patrons can find all the issues of a serial. See Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    Note:
    When you select a different bibliographic record to be linked to the serial holdings record, the compressed holdings statement in the PAC will not reflect the change until the BuildUpCompressedHoldings SQL job has been run. See Polaris SQL Jobs Reference.

    +

    To change a serial holdings record’s title:

    +

    Important:
    You should change the bibliographic record only when you have linked to the wrong record. If there are received issues/parts and item records linked to the serial holdings record, they will all be linked to the new title. If the publication’s title changed, copy the serial holdings record, link the new serial holdings record to the new bibliographic record, and close the publication pattern for the old serial holdings record. See Close a publication pattern.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Click Find to search for the new bibliographic record.
    4. +
    +

    If the serial holdings record is linked to a subscription record, purchase order line item, or invoice line item, a message appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to continue.
    2. +
    +

    If there are links to received and retained issues/parts, and any item records, a message appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Yes to continue.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears with Bibliographic Records selected in the Object box.

    +
      +
    1. Search for the bibliographic record with the new title.
    2. +
    +

    The bibliographic record or records matching your search criteria appear in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Select the new bibliographic record.
    2. +
    +

    Polaris checks for any received issues and any linked items.

    +
      +
    1. Save the serial holdings record.
    2. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings Record is updated with the new title information.

    +

    Publisher Changes a Serials Title

    +

    If the publisher changes the title of a serial publication for which the library already has received and retained issues/parts, create a new serial holdings record, and close the publication pattern for the old serial holdings record. This ensures that any issues/parts received under the old title display the old title, and new issues/parts display the new title.

    + +

    You can set Polaris Administration profiles to display the former and later titles in the PAC.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_a_Publication_Pattern.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_a_Publication_Pattern.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50575011 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Changing_a_Publication_Pattern.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Changing a Publication Pattern + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Changing a Publication Pattern

    +

    You can change the publication pattern for a serial holdings record if no issues or parts were received using that pattern. If one or more issues have already been received and the publisher changes the enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and/or chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. captions, or the arrival pattern (the publisher produces the serial monthly and then bimonthly), you can close the old pattern and create another one. If the publication pattern resumes, you can reopen the pattern. You can also add or remove predicted issues.

    +

    There are two ways you can change a publication pattern for a serial holdings record. One method is to change only the publication pattern options, such as the start or end date. For example, you want to keep the frequency, regularity, chronology, and enumeration that are defined in the pattern, but you want to change the start and end dates. The other method is to change the frequency, chronology, enumeration and other settings in the publication pattern but leave the start and end dates the same.

    +

    If the publication pattern is saved as a template, the changes are only made for that serial holdings record. To change a template, you must make the changes from the Publication Pattern Template Manager. See Edit a publication pattern template.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Close_a_publication_pattern.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Close_a_publication_pattern.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7866892f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Close_a_publication_pattern.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Close a publication pattern + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Close a Publication Pattern

    +

    To close a publication pattern:

    +

    Important:
    Be sure to predict all issues still under the old pattern before closing it and establishing a new publication pattern. Closing the pattern stops prediction even if the End date has not been reached. If you try to close a pattern, and issues have already been received, Polaris deletes only the expected, never published or not available issues with a start date after the End date entered in the Close publication pattern dialog box.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click an open publication pattern on the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    The context menu appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Close pattern from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Close Publication Pattern dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the end date in the End date box, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The publication pattern is closed.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Serial title changes - If the publication’s title changed, copy the serial holdings record, link the new serial holdings record to the new bibliographic record, and close the publication pattern for the old serial holdings record. You can link to a different bibliographic record from a serial holdings record if no issues were received under that title. See Link a new bibliographic record to a serial holdings record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_publication_pattern_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_publication_pattern_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3cdc01d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_publication_pattern_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy a publication pattern template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Publication Pattern Template

    +

    If you want to start with an existing publication pattern template, modify it, and create a new template, you can copy the template. To copy a publication pattern template:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Templates, Publication Patterns from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Publication Pattern Template Manager workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click a publication pattern template, and select Create from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    + PubPatTempl.gif 

    +

    The Create Publication Pattern dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Modify the publication pattern as needed. See Creating Publication Pattern Templates.
    2. +
    3. Type a name for the new template in the Template name box on Step 3 of the Create Publication Pattern window, and click Finish.
    4. +
    +

    The publication template is saved with the new name.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08e1069e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Copy_a_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy a serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Serial Holdings Record

    +

    If you hold multiple copies of the same serial title, you can create a serial holdings record for one of the copies of the title, and then duplicate that record as many times as needed. Each copied record must have at least a different copy number, destination, or collection from the record being copied before it can be saved. When you save a new serial holdings record, Polaris checks to make sure another serial holdings record does not exist with the same title, copy number, destination library, collection, and material type. The publication pattern is also copied to the new serial holdings record. To change the publication pattern, see Changing a Publication Pattern.

    +

    To copy a serial holdings record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform for the record you want to copy.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    Click NewFileButton.gif on the toolbar at the top of the workform to create a record for the next serial holdings record. All the information, except for the order information, is copied to the new record, and you simply change the copy number, destination, and collection for the next serial holdings record.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New.
    2. +
    +

    The New Serial Holdings Record dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Copy Existing Workform (default).
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings Record workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Change the Copy No., Destination, Collection, and Material Type boxes as necessary.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If a purchase order line item segment is linked to the serial holdings record you are copying, Polaris checks the quantity ordered in the linked purchase order line segment. If the number of copies already linked is equal to the quantity ordered in the purchase order line, an error message appears. The new serial holdings record cannot be saved if it is a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. because it is not linked to a purchase order line item. If the order type is Subscription, the serial holdings record can be saved, but it is not linked to the purchase order line item.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_publication_pattern_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_publication_pattern_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fecf99c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_publication_pattern_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a publication pattern template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Publication Pattern Template

    +

    To set up a serial publication pattern template:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Templates, Publication Pattern from the Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Publication Pattern Template Manager workform appears.

    +

    Tips:
    Expand the Publication Pattern Manager by dragging the bottom right corner of the workform.
    Widen a column by dragging the border of the column header.
    Filter the list by selecting a creator or frequency.
    Sort the list by clicking the column header.
    Quickly locate a template by placing the cursor in the list and typing the first letter of the template name.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New, or click the New button.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern Template - Enumeration and Chronology dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Define the publication pattern enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing., and click Next. See Establish chronology and enumeration.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern Template - Regularity Pattern dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the publication regularity, and click Next. See Set up the serial publication pattern regularity.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern Template - Prediction Results dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Review the predicted issues to make sure the results are what you expected. See Review a publication pattern’s prediction.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the results are not what you expected, click Back to go back and change the prediction pattern.

    +
      +
    1. If you want a note to appear next to this template in the Publication Pattern Template Manager list, type up to 512 characters in the Note box.
    2. +
    3. Type a name for the template in the Template name box.
    4. +
    5. Click Finish.
    6. +
    +

    The publication pattern template is saved and will appear in the list of templates when you create a new pattern in a serial holdings record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c075ab1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Create_a_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Serial Holdings Record

    +

    The serial holdings record contains information regarding the serial title, copy, publication pattern, purchase order, and notes. To create a serial holdings record:

    +

    Note:
    A final (not provisional) bibliographic record for the title must exist in the Polaris database before you can create a serial holdings record.

    +

    Tip:
    To create a serial holdings record from a bibliographic record, press <F12> to bring up the bibliographic record Find Tool, limit by Type of Material, Serial, enter other search criteria, and press Search. Right-click on the bib in the Find Tool results list, and select Create, Serial Holdings Record. Or, you can open the bib record and select Tools, Create, Serial Holdings Record. Then, go to step 6.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, click the New button, or press CTRL+N to display the New dialog box.
    2. +
    3. Select Serial Holdings Record from the Objects list, and click OK.
    4. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings Record workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find.
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +

    Tip:
    In the Find Tool, select Limit by and select Type of Material, Serial to make sure you select a title coded as a serial. If you wish to select a title not coded as a serial, see the note in step 5.

    +

    + newserholdrecFind.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Search for the bibliographic record (title) to which you want the serial holdings record linked. 
    2. +
    +

    The Find Tool results list appears.

    +

    Note:
    You cannot link a serial holdings record to a bibliographic record with a status of provisional or deleted.

    +
      +
    1. Select the bibliographic record in the Find Tool results list and double-click, or right-click and choose Select from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings Record workform appears with the bibliographic information from the title you selected.

    +

    Note:
    If you selected a record that is not a serial, the following message appears: This bibliographic record’s leader is not a serial. Do you wish to continue? Click Yes to continue the operation, or click No and select a serial record instead. You might select Yes if you are linking a non-serial bibliographic record for a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. to a monographic series A group of monographs with a collective title in addition to their individual titles. The individual titles may or may not be numbered. The collective title is generally found on the title page or the cover of each monograph..

    +
      +
    1. Select a destination library in the Destination box.
    2. +
    3. Select Standing Order or Subscription in the Order Type box.
    4. +
    5. Select a material type in the Material Type box.
    6. +
    7. Select a collection in the Collection box.
    8. +
    9. Select the status in the Status box.
    10. +
    11. Type a number in the Copy no. box that is unique for the title, destination library, collection, and material type.
    12. +
    13. Type a call number in the Call no. boxes.
    14. +
    +

    The call number is composed of a prefix, a classification number, and the cutter.

    +

    Tip:
    When serial items are created, the call number is pulled from the serial holdings record. If the serial holdings record does not have a call number, it is pulled from the item template (if present). See Create a serial item template.

    +
      +
    1. Select the shelving scheme in the Shelving Scheme box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If the shelving scheme is defined in the Polaris Administration Cataloging profile, Default shelving scheme for new item and holdings records, the shelving scheme is selected automatically.

    +
      +
    1. Select the completeness code in the Completeness Code box.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    The retention information is displayed in the compressed holdings statement in the PAC. It also limits the number of issues in the expanded view. The retention information and the public note are at the branch level, not the collection level. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.

    +
      +
    1. Select a description for the retention policy in the Retention designator box. If you select Retained for a limited period, the Previous retained and Latest retained boxes appear.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Retained for a limited period in the Retention designator box, do the following steps:
      1. Select Previous or Latest.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Although the MARC Format for Holdings standard specifies that latest includes the current issue while previous does not, Polaris includes the current issue in the retention. The issues display in the PAC the same way whether you choose Previous or Latest.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Type a number, and select a category next to Previous or Latest.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Example:
    Latest 5 Years indicates your library retains all the issues for the last five years.

    +
      +
    1. To prevent all issues that are linked to this Serial Holdings Record from displaying in the public access catalog, if they do not have linked items, clear the Display in PAC check box. You can clear this check box when you have issues that do not circulate and do not have linked item records. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save to save the Serial Holdings Record.
    4. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings Record is saved if there are no other serial holdings records with the same bibliographic ID, copy number, destination, collection, material type, and order type.

    +

    Tip:
    If you want to add the serial holdings record to a subscription record, select Tools, Add to Subscription Record, and select the subscription record from the Find Tool. See Create a subscription record.

    +
      +
    1. Set up the publication pattern for the Serial Holdings Record using one of the following methods:
    2. +
    + +
      +
    1. Enter staff and public notes following these procedures:
    2. +
    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Publication_Pattern_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Publication_Pattern_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e2df89d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Publication_Pattern_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Publication Pattern Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Publication Pattern Templates

    +

    You can create publication pattern templates from the Publication Pattern Template Manager or by saving a publication pattern as a template from the Serial Holdings Record workform. All publication pattern templates are available from the Serial Holdings Record.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Serial_Item_Templates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Serial_Item_Templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0dea6d3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_Serial_Item_Templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating Serial Item Templates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating Serial Item Templates

    +

    If your library circulates serials or tracks their use in-house, use a serial item template to generate serial items at check-in. You can create serial item templates for every branch, serials collection, and serials material type so that there is minimal processing required after the item record is created.

    +

    To create a serials item using an item template, there must be an item template with a name that begins with Serial or Serials, and the following fields in the Serial Holdings Record workform and the Item Template workform must match:

    +
      +
    • Destination on the Serial Holdings Record workform and Assigned on the Item Template workform
    • +
    • Collection on the Serial Holdings Record workform and Collection on the Item Template workform
    • +
    • Material type on the Serial Holdings Record workform and Material type on the Item Template workform
    • +
    +

    + itemtempcomp.gif +

    +

    To create a serial item template:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or click PSsetup00358.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The New dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Item Template in the Objects list, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Item Template workform appears.

    +

    + NewItemTem.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Type Serial or Serials followed by a template name in the Name box.
    2. +
    3. Select the template owner in the Template Owner box.
    4. +
    5. Select the owner for the item records in the Owner box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Select the same branch name in the Owner box as that in the Assigned branch box.

    +
      +
    1. Select the branch name in the Assigned box.
    2. +
    3. Select the material type in the Material type box.
    4. +
    5. Select the collection in the Collection box.
    6. +
    7. Select the following required fields to create an item record: Loan period, Fine code, and Renewal limit.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    + See Using Cataloging Templates. +

    +

    Tip:
    You can set the Circ status in the template to In if you want all your serial items created from this template to have a circulation status of In.

    +
      +
    1. Complete the information for circulating serials according to your library’s policies and workflow.
    2. +
    3. Select File | Save.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If the template does not have the required information for creating an item record, a message appears and you cannot save the template. Fill in the required fields labeled in bold type, and save the template again.

    +

    The template is saved. When you check in serial issues and the serial holdings record has the same destination (assigned branch), collection, and material type as the item template, serial items are create automatically.

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Checking in serial issues and creating item records - See Checking In Serials.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_a_Publication_Pattern.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_a_Publication_Pattern.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e711dbe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_a_Publication_Pattern.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating a Publication Pattern + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating a Publication Pattern

    +

    To create a publication pattern for automatic prediction, you can use a publication pattern template, or you can specify the enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole., chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing., frequency, and regularity for the serial title in the serial holdings record. If you are creating the publication pattern by specifying the enumeration, chronology, frequency, and regularity for the serial title, you may also save the publication pattern as a template before you save the publication pattern, so that it may be used to create other publication patterns for your organization. If you already have publication pattern templates, you may test them by checking the prediction preview. If the publication pattern has changed since the templates were created, you can update the template. When you create a new publication pattern for a serial title, you can save it as a template.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_and_Copying_Serial_Holdings_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_and_Copying_Serial_Holdings_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..32971403 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Creating_and_Copying_Serial_Holdings_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Creating and Copying Serial Holdings Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Creating and Copying Serial Holdings Records

    +

    A serial holdings record identifies a subscription to a serial title or a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. for a monographic series A group of monographs with a collective title in addition to their individual titles. The individual titles may or may not be numbered. The collective title is generally found on the title page or the cover of each monograph.. Each serial holdings record is linked to a bibliographic record in the Polaris database, as well as to one or more serial issues/parts. The serial holdings record enables automatic prediction of subscription issues and standing order parts by establishing the publication pattern and defining the chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. and enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole..

    +

    Each serial holdings record linked to the same bibliographic record has a copy number that is unique for the destination library, collection, and material type. For example, if the branch has two copies of Time Magazine in the Periodicals collection, there will be two serial holdings records—copy 1 and copy 2. You can copy a serial holdings record to create a new one, and then change the copy number on the Serial Holdings Record workform before you save the new one.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Displaying_Serial_Titles_in_the_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Displaying_Serial_Titles_in_the_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a4cf1a10 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Displaying_Serial_Titles_in_the_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + + + Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC

    +

    When a patron searches for a serial title in the PAC, the results display according to settings in Polaris Administration and in the Serial Holdings Record. In addition, the compressed holdings statement is generated through the Build up Compressed Holdings statement SQL job. For more information on jobs, see Polaris SQL Jobs Reference.

    +

    PAC Profiles Affecting Serials Display

    +

    The display of serial titles can be configured at the title level for Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. However, the item availability display can be configured only for Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Serial Title Display in PAC

    +

    Titles are displayed according to settings in the Title Display: Configure profiles for PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. The profile has selections for configuring the Brief (serial) display, the Full (serial) display, and the Summary (serial) display. If the bibliographic record’s LDR07 has b, i or s, the title displays according to the title configuration settings for serials. If the LDR07 has anything else, the title displays according to the configurations for monographs. For more information on title display options for serials titles, see Configuring the PowerPAC Title Display.

    +

    Tip:
    The compressed holdings are built based on the retained issue records using the organization in the linked serial holdings record. If the assigned branch in the linked item record is changed, the item record’s organization can be different from the linked serial issue, making the item’s availability inconsistent with the compressed holdings statement in the PAC display.

    +

    Serial Item Availability Display in PowerPAC

    +

    Item availability display for serials in Polaris PowerPAC is also affected by the following PowerPAC profiles:

    +

    Note:
    For more information on availability display options for serials issues, see Set up the local/system item availability display.

    +
      +
    • Item Availability: Expand serials titles - If this profile is set to Yes, when you click or tap Availability the location-specific compressed holdings statement and all the issues that are retained will display. If it is set to No, when you click or tap Availability you see only the location-specific holdings information. Click or tap Reference to see individual issues. You can have separate settings for monographic and serials items. The profile Item Availability: Expand non-serials titles can be set to Yes so that patrons do not need to click or tap again to see more information. At the same time, the Item Availability: Expand serials titles can be set to No so that a compressed holdings statement appears for the serials title, and not all the issues.
    • +
    • Item availability: Display textual holdings notes - The profile can be set to suppress or display textual holdings, display them with a flag icon that the user hovers over or taps to display the textual holdings, or display the textual holdings immediately without the icon.
    • +
    • +

      Item availability: Display notes - This profile can be set to display or suppress item or issue public notes, display a flag icon that the user hovers over or taps to see the notes, or display the notes immediately without the icon.

      +
    • +
    +

    Serial Holdings Record Fields Affecting Serials Display in PAC

    +

    The display of serial holdings in PowerPAC and Mobile PAC also depends on the following elements in the Serial Holdings Record:

    +
      +
    • Retention designator - Select Retained for a limited period on the General view of the Serial Holdings Record, and specify the range of issues your library retains. The retention information controls the branch-specific compressed holdings statement as well as the number of issues that display under the statement. If you have multiple serial holdings records for the same title and the same branch, but they have different retention periods based on collection, update one of these serial holdings records with the longest retention period. All the serial holding records for the same title and same owning branch share the retention information and the public note. When special or supplemental issues are checked in, the retention information may need to be changed. For example, if the issues are retained for 1 year, and the supplemental issue is checked in a year after the other issues, only the supplemental issue will display in the PAC. See Create a serial holdings record.
    • +
    • Display in PAC - If this check box is unchecked, no issues will display in the PAC (unless there are linked item records that are set to display). If it is checked, the checked in issues display according to the retention information.
    • +
    • Public Notes - You can enter holdings notes to display at the branch, collection, and/or issue level. The item availability PAC profiles in Polaris Administration control how these notes are displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC. See PAC Profiles Affecting Serials Display.
      • Branch level - To display notes at the branch level, enter the notes in the Shared public note box on the Public Notes view of the Serial Holdings Record. The shared public note displays in the PAC even if the prediction pattern is closed and no active issues are linked to the serial holdings record. See Displaying Issues from Ceased Publications in PAC.
      • Collection level - To display notes at the collection level, enter them in the Textual holdings and/or Textual holdings public note in the publication pattern for the serial holdings record.
      • Issue level - To display notes at the issue or item level, enter them in the Public notes box in the serial issue or item. Notes in the issue record are copied to the item record.
    • +
    +

    Displaying Issues from Ceased Publications in PAC

    +

    When your library no longer receives the publication or the publication has ceased, you can still display the title in the PAC with a note about your library’s holdings. However, to display the public note in the PAC, at least one issue, with or without a linked item, must be generated and checked in.

    +

    Follow these general steps to display serial holdings notes for a serial title no longer being received:

    +
      +
    1. Create a serial holdings record for the title.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    The Call number Storage appears in the PAC, indicating the location of the back issues.

    +

    + shrcallnum.gif 

    +

    Tip:
    The Shared public note appears in the PAC exactly as you type it in the Serial Holdings Record; the lines break in the same place in the PAC.

    +
      +
    1. On the Public Notes view of the Serial Holdings Record workform, add a public note in the Shared public note box.
    2. +
    +

    Examples: +
    This periodical ceased publication June 2010. +
    Library holds the following back issues in storage: v.22, no.1 (Jan. 1997) - v.35, no.6 (Jun 2010) +
    Some issues missing. +
    +

    +
      +
    1. Create a publication pattern, and generate one issue.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    Enter one level of free text enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. such as [Ceased Holdings] and no chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.. The brackets prevent the enumeration from displaying.

    +

     pubpatceased.gif

    +
      +
    1. Check in the issue. No linked item is needed.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    In the Issue workform, enter the free text enumeration: Ceased. Click on Availability for back issues.

    +

    + issueceased.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Check the PAC display. See Example of PAC Display for a Ceased Serial Publication.
    2. +
    +

    Example of PAC Display for a Ceased Serial Publication

    +

    Under the serial title, the following displays:

    +
      +
    • Call number: Storage (from the call number in the General view of the Serial Holdings Record workform)
    • +
    • Holdings: Ceased. Click on Availability for back issues. (from the free-text enumeration in the Issue workform for the single issue)
    • +
    +

    + +

    +

    The user clicks Availability and the note entered in the Shared public note field in the Serial Holding Record workform is displayed. The shared public note lists all holdings, formatted however the library wants to see them displayed.

    +

    + +

    +

    Related Information

    +

    Hold Requests on Serial Items -The Holds options parameter in Polaris Administration can be set to allow only bibliographic-level holds for monographic items, but allow the first copy of a serial issue or volume in a multi-volume set (or both) to be held. For more information, see Set Holds Options: Enable Hold Requests by Patrons and Define Restrictions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Edit_a_publication_pattern_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Edit_a_publication_pattern_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c21bafd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Edit_a_publication_pattern_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit a publication pattern template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit a Publication Pattern Template

    +

    To edit a publication pattern template:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Templates, Publication Patterns from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Publication Pattern Template Manager workform appears.

    +

    Tips:
    Expand the Publication Pattern Template Manager by dragging the bottom right corner of the workform.
    Widen a column by dragging the border of the column header.
    Filter the list by selecting a creator or frequency.
    Sort the list by clicking the column header.
    Quickly locate a template by placing the cursor in the list and typing the first letter of the template name.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click a publication pattern, and select Open from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To delete or print multiple publication patterns, multi-select the patterns, right-click, and then select Print or Delete from the context menu. Other options are available on the menu when you select a single template.

    +

    The Modify Publication Pattern dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Modify the publication pattern as needed. See Creating Publication Pattern Templates.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_order_data_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_order_data_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..908e55d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_order_data_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter order data for a serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter order data for a serial holdings record

    +

    You can enter order data for a Serial Holdings record and link to a purchase order line item segment. To enter the order data for a serial holdings record:

    +

    Important:
    You can save a serial holdings record for a subscription without linking to a purchase order line item segment, but a serial holdings record for a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. must be linked to a purchase order line item segment before it can be saved.

    +

    Open the Serial Holdings Record workform, and select View, Orders or click shrordersbtn.gif to display the Orders view.

    +

    + SerHold(new)Orders.gif 

    +

    Click Find next to the PO no box in the Purchase order section to search for the purchase order line item segment.

    +

    If the purchase order line item has one segment, the information from that segment is automatically brought into the serial holdings record. If it has multiple segments, a dialog box appears with a list of segments, and you select a segment from the list. If no purchase order line item segments match the destination and collection, an error message appears.

    +

    When you link to a matching purchase order line item segment, the following boxes are automatically filled in on the Serial Holdings Record workform:

    +

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

     Destination (header)

    +
    +

     Maximum no. of claims (Orders view)

    +
    +

     Collection (header)

    +
    +

     Claim waiting period (Orders view)

    +
    +

     Ordered at (Orders view)

    +
    +

     PO no.

    +
    +

     Plan (Orders view)

    +
    +

     PO line no.

    +
    +

     Supplier Name (Orders view)

    +
    +

     Seg. no.

    +
    +

     Supplier SAN (Orders view)

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

     

    +

    Type the subscription start number in the Start number box.

    +

    If you have set up a subscription record for this serial title, select Tools, Add to Subscription Record to add this serial holdings record to the subscription record. See Create a subscription record.

    +

    The Start date and Expiration date boxes are filled in with the information from the linked subscription record.

    +

    If you intend to claim issues, enter any additional claiming data. See Enter claiming criteria in the serial holdings record.

    +

    If applicable, enter a date in the Intent to cancel box.

    +

    Select File | Save to save the serial holdings record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_public_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_public_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8685a3d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_public_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter public notes for a serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Public Notes for a Serial Holdings Record

    +

    If the serial title is set to display in PAC and at least one issue is generated and checked in, the notes entered on the Public Notes view appear in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC at the serial title’s branch level display. See Serial Holdings Record Fields Affecting Serials Display in PAC.

    +

    To enter public notes for a serial holdings record:

    +

    Important:
    At least one issue, with or without a linked item, must be generated and checked in for the public note to display in PAC. You can enter free-text enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole., such as This publication has ceased, and a call number, such as Storage, to indicate it is not a real issue.

    +
      +
    1. On the Serial Holdings Record workform, select View, Public Notes or click SHRnotesicon.gif 
    2. +
    +

    The Public Notes view appears.

    +
      +
    1. Type a note in the Shared public note box. You can enter up to 4,000 characters. Press Enter to go to the next line, and the line breaks will display in the PAC as they are entered in the Shared public note box.
    2. +
    3. Save the serial holdings record.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_staff_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_staff_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..862ec523 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Enter_staff_notes_for_a_serial_holdings_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enter staff notes for a serial holdings record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enter Staff Notes for a Serial Holdings Record

    +

    To enter staff notes for a serial holdings record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform, and click View, Staff Notes or click notesbtn.gif.
    2. +
    +

    The Staff Notes view appears.

    +
      +
    1. If the serial is received as part of a membership in a professional organization, select the Designation box, type the name of the member in the Member name box, and the organization name in the Organization box.
    2. +
    3. In the Electronic access box, type the URL, listserv, or e-mail address used to manage online journal subscriptions or standing orders.
    4. +
    5. To include notes for staff members, type them in the Non-public note and/or Non-public/warning note boxes. These notes appear on the Serial Check-In workform.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Notes can be entered with carriage returns for display in the Serial Check-In workform.

    +
      +
    1. Save the serial holdings record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Establish_chronology_and_enumeration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Establish_chronology_and_enumeration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4635a152 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Establish_chronology_and_enumeration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + + Establish chronology and enumeration + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Establish Chronology and Enumeration

    +

    To establish a serial publication’s chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. and enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole.:

    +

    Note:
    You can specify up to four levels of chronology, six levels of enumeration, and two levels of alternative enumeration. There must be at least one level of enumeration or chronology.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the publication pattern options, following the steps in Specify the publication pattern for a serial title, and click Next.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Enumeration and Chronology dialog box appears.

    +

    Tip:
    If the frequency is Quarterly, see Tips for Predicting Quarterly Issues.

    +
      +
    1. Select the frequency with which the serial is published in the Frequency box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The frequency is specified in the 008 field Fixed-length Data Elements - General Information +This field contains 40 character positions (00-39) that provide coded information about the record as a whole and about special bibliographic aspects of the item being cataloged. These coded data elements are potentially useful for retrieval and data management purposes. +  +The data elements are positionally defined. Character positions that are not defined contain a blank (#). All defined character positions must contain a defined code; for some field 008 positions, this may be the fill character (|). The fill character may be used (in certain character positions) when a cataloging organization makes no attempt to code the character position. The fill character is not allowed in field 008 positions 00-05 (Date entered on file). Its use is discouraged in positions 07-10 (Date 1), 15-17 (Place of publication, production, or execution), and the 008 position defined for Form of item (either position 23 or 29 depending upon the 008 configuration). +  +Character positions 00-17 and 35-39 are defined the same across all types of material, with special consideration for position 06. The definition of character positions 18-34 was done independently for each type of material, although certain data elements are defined the same in the specifications for more than one type of material. When similar data elements are defined for inclusion in field 008 for different types of material, they occupy the same field 008 character positions., position 18 of the bibliographic record.

    +
      +
    1. For each level of chronology, enter information in the following fields in the Chronology Setup frame:
      1. Select the chronology caption in the Caption box.
      2. Select the format in the Format box.
      3. If applicable, select the Alternative chronology box.
      4. Click Add to add the chronology level.
      5. Continue adding chronology levels.
    2. +
    +
    +

    Example:
    If the chronology includes a year, month, and day (November 24, 2003), there are three levels of chronology. Select Year as the caption and select Number as the format for the first level of chronology. Select Day of Month as the caption and select Number as the format for the second level of chronology. Select Month as the caption and select Full text as the format for the third level of chronology.

    +
    +
      +
    1. For each level of enumeration, enter information in the following fields in the Enumeration Setup frame:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    To suppress the enumeration display, use square brackets [ ] in the Caption box. To force a value to display in reverse order, use a plus sign + in the Caption box under Enumeration Setup. For example: +Ed. with a format of numeral, and a start value of 5 would display as 5th Ed.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Type the enumeration caption in the Caption box.
    2. +
    3. Select the enumeration format in the Format box.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Free text for the enumeration format, you can leave the Start value blank. For more information on using free text enumeration to add an issue that is a supplement or a special issue with a different title than the title in the serial holdings record, see Predict issues/parts with different titles.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Type a start value for the enumeration in the Start value box.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Number, Numeral, or Roman in the Format box, enter an Arabic number in the Start value box. The number is converted to the appropriate format. For example, if you selected Numeral for the format and 5 as the start value, it is converted to 5th. If you selected Roman for the format and 5 as the start value, it is converted to V. The start value can be blank if the enumeration format is free-text.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. If applicable, select the Alternative enumeration box.
    2. +
    3. Click Add to add the enumeration level.
    4. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the enumeration for the serial has volume and number, the highest (first) level of enumeration is the volume.

    +
    +

    The Bib units per next higher level and Continuity boxes appear for each level of enumeration you define after the first level of enumeration.

    +
      +
    1. In the Bib units per next higher level box, indicate how many units are needed in each enumeration level (second - sixth) before the next higher level increments.
    2. +
    +

    Examples:
    For a monthly serial with enumeration of volume and issue, type 12 in the Bib units per next higher level box for the second enumeration level. After 12 issue records are created for a volume, the first enumeration level is automatically incremented by one.

    For a daily publication that is published every day except on Sundays and Christmas Day, it is not necessary to enter the exact number of issues. Enter 365 in the Bib units per next higher level box. Then, select Day of Month in the Calendar Change box and a value of 0101 to force the volume to increment on January 1 of each year.

    +
      +
    1. Indicate in the Continuity box if the numbering for each level restarts (returns to 1) or continues incrementing.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The enumeration and chronology levels and values you specified appear in the Start designation box. If the designation is not what you want, you can remove chronology and/or enumeration levels, and reenter the information.

    +
      +
    1. Click Next to set up the serial regularity. See Set up the serial publication pattern regularity.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_a_publication_pattern.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_a_publication_pattern.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e61ba369 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_a_publication_pattern.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify a publication pattern + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify a Publication Pattern

    +

    To modify a publication pattern for a serial holdings record:

    +

    Note:
    Use this method if you want to modify the frequency, enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole., chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing., or regularity of the publication pattern. You can modify a publication pattern if no issues have been received. If issues have already been received using this pattern, you must close the existing pattern and create a new pattern for the serial holdings record. See Close a publication pattern.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the publication pattern in the Publication Patterns list.
    4. +
    +

    The context menu appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select Open from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The Modify Publication Pattern - Enumeration and Chronology dialog box appears.

    +

    + modpubpatt.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you want to change the existing information or enter new enumeration or chronology information, follow the steps in Establish chronology and enumeration.
    2. +
    3. If you want to modify the regularity, click Next on the Modify Publication Pattern - Enumeration and Chronology dialog box, and follow the steps in Set up the serial publication pattern regularity.
    4. +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Edit a publication pattern template +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_publication_pattern_options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_publication_pattern_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e389121 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Modify_publication_pattern_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify publication pattern options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify Publication Pattern Options

    +

    To modify publication pattern options for a serial holdings record:

    +

    Note:
    Use this method if you want to modify the start or end date of the publication pattern, but leave the frequency, enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole., chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing., and regularity the same.

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Right-click the publication pattern in the Publication Patterns list.

      The context menu appears.

    4. +

      Tip:
      You can also select a publication pattern, and click editpatoptbtn.gif.

      +
    5. Select Edit pattern options from the context menu.

      The Modify Publication Pattern Options dialog box appears.

    6. +
    7. Change the existing information or enter new information to modify the publication pattern options. See Specify the Publication Pattern for a Serial Title.
    8. +
    9. Click OK to save the changes to the publication pattern.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_from_serial_holdings.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_from_serial_holdings.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10630306 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_from_serial_holdings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Predict issues/parts from serial holdings + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Predict Issues/Parts from Serial Holdings

    +

    After you have set up a publication pattern and predicted issues or parts using this pattern, you can predict additional issues or parts.

    +

    To predict issues or parts from the Serial Holdings Record workform:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    2. +
    3. Select the publication pattern, and right-click.
    4. +
    5. Select Predict issues/parts from the context menu.
    6. +
    +

    The Predict Issues/Parts dialog box shows the predicted issues.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The predicted issues are created.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_with_different_titles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_with_different_titles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4f795b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Predict_issues_parts_with_different_titles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Predict issues/parts with different titles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Predict Issues/Parts with Different Titles

    +

    In some situations, a serial issue may be published outside of the usual publication pattern. It can be an issue that has the same title as the title in the serial holdings record, and the same enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing., or it can be a special issue with a different title from the serial holdings record and no enumeration or chronology, such as Spring is coming. Special issue.

    +

    Note:
    To add a special issue that is published outside of the usual publication pattern, but with the same title as the serial holdings record, see Add a special issue/part at check in.

    +

    Tip:
    You can also create a publication pattern template with a frequency of Completely irregular or Continuously updated and an enumeration of Free text to use for these types of special issues or supplements. See Creating Publication Pattern Templates.

    +

    To add a special issue or part that has a different title than the title in the serial holdings record:

    +
      +
    1. Open the Serial Holdings Record workform for the serial title.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the pattern to open it.
    4. +
    5. Set up the chronology, if applicable, following the instructions in Establish chronology and enumeration.
    6. +
    7. In the Caption box under Enumeration Setup, type [ ] or [Title] as the holding place for the title of the special issue. The square brackets prevent the text from displaying. You can enter the exact title when the issue is checked in.
    8. +
    9. Select Free text in the Format box and click Add.
    10. +
    11. Select Links, Check In from the Serial Holdings Record workform.
    12. +
    13. When the special issue arrives, right-click the issue in the Check In workform, and select Open from the context menu.
    14. +
    +

    The issue appears in the Issue workform.

    +
      +
    1. Type the title of the special issue in the box labeled Title under Enumeration.
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Check In from the Issue menu to check in the issue.
    4. +
    +

    The issue’s title displays in the PowerPAC’s Availability view.

    +

    + specialinPAC.gif +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Publication_Pattern_Examples.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Publication_Pattern_Examples.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81779699 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Publication_Pattern_Examples.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + + Publication Pattern Examples + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Publication Pattern Examples

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Publication ExampleFrequencyChronologyEnumerationRegularity/Exception*Pattern Results
    +

    Published annually

    +
    +

    Annual

    +
    +

    Year

    +
    +

    Vol.

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Vol. 1 2011

    +

    Vol. 2 2012

    +
    +

    Published monthly with two combined issues - July/Aug. & Sept./Oct.

    +
    +

    Monthly

    +
    +

    Year
    Month

    +
    +

    Volume 1
    Issue 1

    +
    +

    cm07/08

    +

    cm09/10

    +
    +

    Vol. 1 Issue 1 January 2012
     (10 issues per year - July & Aug. in issue 7, Sept. & Oct. in issue 8)

    +
    +

    Published semiweekly - Monday and Thursday (except on Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving, Christmas, New Year’s Day)

    +
    +

    Semiweekly

    +
    +

    Year
    Day of month
    Month
    Day of week

    +
    +

    Vol. 1

    +

    no. 1
    Monday
    Jan. 2

    +
    +

    od0101
    od0704
    od1225
    ow0901mo
    ow1199th

    +
    +

    Vol. 1 no. 1
    Monday, January 6, 2012
    (omits Jan.1,
    July 4, Dec. 25,  1st Mon. in Sept. & last Thurs. in Nov.)

    +
    +

    *For exceptions, use publication codes p (published); o (omitted); c (combined).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Rename_a_publication_pattern_template.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Rename_a_publication_pattern_template.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5d7bd05 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Rename_a_publication_pattern_template.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Rename a publication pattern template + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Rename a Publication Pattern Template

    +

    If you want to keep all the settings for a publication pattern template, but you want to give it another name, you can rename the publication pattern template. To rename a publication pattern template:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Templates, Publication Patterns from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Publication Pattern Template Manager workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Right-click the publication pattern you want to rename, and select Rename from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The name area is highlighted in the list.

    +
      +
    1. Type the new name over the existing name.
    2. +
    +

    The publication pattern template’s name is changed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Reopen_a_publication_pattern.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Reopen_a_publication_pattern.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c87c4f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Reopen_a_publication_pattern.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Reopen a publication pattern + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reopen a Publication Pattern

    +

    To reopen a closed publication pattern:

    +
      +
    1. Right-click a closed pattern on the Serial Holdings Record.
    2. +
    3. Select Reopen publication pattern from the context menu.
    4. +
    +

    The publication pattern is reopened.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Review_publication_patterns_prediction.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Review_publication_patterns_prediction.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea489fc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Review_publication_patterns_prediction.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Review a publication pattern’s prediction + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Review a Publication Pattern’s Prediction

    +

    To review the publication pattern’s prediction results:

    +

    Tip:
    The Prediction Results dialog box also displays when you select Tools, Predict Issues/Parts from the Check In workform and when you right-click from the Serial Holdings Record.

    +
      +
    1. Set up the serial title’s publication pattern. See Specify the publication pattern for a serial title.
    2. +
    3. After setting up the serial’s publication regularity, click Next.
    4. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Prediction Results window displays the predicted issues using the pattern you set up. The pattern’s start and end date display as well as the designation for the first predicted issue.

    +
      +
    1. To see more prediction results, click View More.
    2. +
    +

    Additional prediction results appear in the list.

    +

    Tip:
    If you previously specified an end date, you can extend the publication pattern’s end date to predict more issues. See Specify the publication pattern for a serial title.

    +
      +
    1. To save the publication pattern as a template, select the Save as Template check box, and type a name for the template in the Template name box.
    2. +
    3. Click Finish to save the publication pattern.
    4. +
    +

    If you saved the publication pattern as a template, it is available in the list in the Publication Pattern Template Manager. See Creating Publication Pattern Templates.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Set_up_the_serial_publication_pattern_regularity.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Set_up_the_serial_publication_pattern_regularity.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1769c203 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Set_up_the_serial_publication_pattern_regularity.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up the serial publication pattern regularity + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up the Serial Publication Pattern Regularity

    +

    If the publication pattern frequency is a common one, and there are no combined or omitted issues, you do not need to specify the regularity to generate the predicted issues. For example, to predict issues for a serial with a Daily frequency that is published every day without exception, you do not need to enter the regularity information. If there are days when the serial is not published, you need to specify these exceptions. To predict issues for publications with a frequency of Totally Irregular or Continuously Updated, you must enter a regularity pattern.

    +

    Note:
    Some frequencies show the publication details automatically in the Publication Details box, whereas other frequencies (such as Daily) produce too many entries to show in the box. To check the prediction, click Next (see Review a publication pattern’s prediction).

    +

    To specify the publication pattern regularity:

    +
      +
    1. Specify the publication’s enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing. following the instructions in Establish chronology and enumeration , and click Next.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Regularity Pattern dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select a publication code in the Publication code box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    There are default regularity patterns when you enter a frequency, but you can enter exceptions to the publication pattern by using p for additional issues, o for omitted issues, and c for combined issues.

    +
      +
    1. Select a calendar unit in the Calendar unit box.
    2. +
    3. Type a valid publication value in the From box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    Day of week (d): mo, tu, we, th, fr, sa, su.
    Day of month (d): 01-31
    Month (m): 01-12
    Season (s): 21 (spring), 22 (summer), 23 (autumn), 24 (winter)
    Week of year (w): 01-53
    Week of month (w): 99 (last), 98 (next to last), 97 (third to last), 00 (every), 01 (first), 02 (second), 03 (third), 04 (fourth), 05 (fifth).
    Year (y): yyyy (four digits)

    +

    If you are specifying that one or more issues are combined, you must enter both From and To values.

    +
      +
    1. If applicable, type a valid publication value in the To box.
    2. +
    3. Click Add to add the publication details to the list under Publication Details.
    4. +
    +

    Example:
    A weekly serial is published on Monday of each week with combined issues for the last two weeks of August and December. The Publication Details are as follows for this publication:
    pd mo
    cw 0898mo/0899mo
    cw 1298mo/1299mo

    +

    Tip:
    The Calendar Change box is active only if you defined enumeration in the publication pattern.

    +
      +
    1. If you need to specify a calendar change, select Month, Day of Month or Season in the Calendar Change box, and enter the corresponding two-digit numeric code. If the serial is published less frequently than monthly, you must select Day of Month to indicate a calendar change.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    A calendar change indicates the chronological point at which the highest level of enumeration increments or changes. For example, if you select Day of Month for the calendar change, and enter 0101, the calendar change will be on January 1. However, if the serial is not published on January 1, the calendar change automatically takes effect on the next day the serial is published. You can specify more than one calendar change by separating the values with commas.

    +
      +
    1. Click Next, and review the expected issues to see if the publication pattern results are what you wanted. See Review a publication pattern’s prediction.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you go back to the previous view and change the frequency, the publication pattern details are automatically removed. However, changing other information does not affect the publication details.

    +

    Tips for Predicting Quarterly Issues

    +

    If the frequency is Quarterly, you can select a chronology caption of Season or Quarter (among other selections). The start date of the quarterly publication determines the chronology of the first issue.

    +

    If the chronology caption is set as Season, the Start date determines the season as follows:

    +
      +
    • 3/21/YY - 6/20/YY = Spring
    • +
    • 6/21/YY - 9/20/YY = Summer
    • +
    • 9/21/YY - 12/20/YY = Autumn
    • +
    • 12/21/YY - 3/20/YY = Winter
    • +
    +

    If the chronology caption is set as Quarter, the Start date determines the quarter as follows:

    +
      +
    • 1/1/YY - 3/31/YY = 1st Quarter
    • +
    • 4/1/YY - 6/30/YY = 2nd Quarter
    • +
    • 7/1/YY - 9/30/YY = 3rd Quarter
    • +
    • 10/1/YY - 12/31/YY = 4th Quarter
    • +
    +

    Depending on the initial start date, you can manipulate the chronology to correctly reflect the first issue to be predicted. The following are some examples of quarterly prediction:

    +
      +
    • If the first issue is Vol. 14 No. 3 (Autumn 2012), the Start date should be 9/21/12 or later (but not later than 12/20), so that the system will predict a fourth issue as Winter 2012.
    • +
    • If the first issue is Vol. 17 No. 1 (Winter 2012), the Start date should be
      1/1/2012 or later, (but not later than 3/20/2012), so that the system will correctly predict all four issues within the calendar year, starting with Winter. If the start date is 12/21/11, a Winter issue will be produced, but with a chronology year of 2011, not 2012.
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    Publication Pattern Examples 

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Setting_Up_Serials_Records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Setting_Up_Serials_Records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6663d957 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Setting_Up_Serials_Records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Serials Records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Serials Records

    +

    Serial holdings records with publication patterns are required for serials processing in Polaris. Once serial holdings records are set up, issue and part records are predicted and created automatically. Other optional serial records, such as subscription records, serial item templates, and route lists can be set up to facilitate serials processing.

    +

    Important:
    Staff members who handle serials must have the required permissions set in Polaris Administration. In addition, Polaris Administration parameters and profiles control how information is displayed and processed in Polaris Serials. See Serials Administration Overview.

    +

    After the appropriate serials processing options and permissions have been set in Polaris Administration, the next step is to create serial holdings records for the serials titles in your library. A serial holdings record contains the title, copy, order, and supplier information for a serial title. It also specifies the publication pattern so that issues or parts can be predicted automatically. The information in serial holdings records, combined with Polaris Administration settings, control the display of serials in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +

    Next, you can create optional serials records, such as item templates for automatically creating serial item records at check in (if your library circulates or tracks serials), and subscription records to manage all your library’s subscriptions from one list. Finally, you can set up serials claiming, serials labels, and route lists.

    +

    You have various options when paying for subscriptions in Polaris Acquisitions. If you are using Subscription records, you can automatically create renewal purchase orders when you renew a subscription. If you are not using Subscription records, you can use a prepaid purchase order that automatically creates an invoice and expends the funds, or you can create an invoice without a purchase order. The invoice for the subscription may have line items linked to serial holdings records (see Add an invoice line linked to a subscription ). Or, if you simply want to pay a supplier for all your subscription renewals in one step, you can create an invoice with a single line item unlinked to any bibliographic or serial holdings record. For more information, see Creating Invoices.

    +

    See also:

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Specify_the_publication_pattern_for_a_serial_title.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Specify_the_publication_pattern_for_a_serial_title.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46610525 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Specify_the_publication_pattern_for_a_serial_title.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify the publication pattern for a serial title + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the Publication Pattern for a Serial Title

    +

    To specify the publication pattern for a serial title:

    +
      +
    1. Click  in the Publication Patterns toolbar of the Serial Holdings Record workform or press Ctrl+Shift+N.
    2. +
    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options wizard appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select a category in the Category box to indicate that the publication pattern is for the basic bibliographic unit, a supplement, or an index.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can have multiple runs for the Basic Bib, Index and/or Supplement with the same or different publication patterns.

    +

    Tip:
    You can have different publication patterns for different categories of the same serial title. For example, you can indicate a frequency of Monthly for the basic bibliographic unit and Annual for the supplement.

    +
      +
    1. Type or select a date when you want the publication pattern to begin in the Start date box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The Start date is the current date if you are not using a publication pattern template. If you are using a publication pattern template, the Start date is the template’s start date and should not be changed. See Use a template to create a publication pattern.

    +
      +
    1. To specify a date for the publication pattern to end, type or select a date in the End date box. An end date is not required.
    2. +
    3. In the Arrival pattern boxes, type the number of days and select before or after to indicate the amount of time between the publication date and the date the issue is expected in the library. The arrival pattern is used to calculate the expected arrival date.
    4. +
    5. To prepare the issues of this serial holdings record for circulation as they are received, select the Generate item records at check-in box.
    6. +
    +

    Important:
    You must create a serial item template before you can create serial items automatically. See Create a serial item template.

    +
      +
    1. If barcodes are applied and should be scanned at check-in, select the Prompt for barcode on check-in box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The prompt for the barcode also includes a box for the issue unit price if the Serials parameter Enter unit price at serials check-in is set to Yes. If the parameter is set to No, when you check in a serial issue, the cursor goes to the barcode field, and you can scan in the barcode. If the parameter is set to Yes, when you check in a serial issue, the cursor goes to the price field. See Setting Up the Check In Prompt.

    +
      +
    1. If you want the issues and the item records created from the issues to have a price, type the price per issue in the Unit price box.
    2. +
    3. If the category type is supplement or index, indicate the type in the Type of supplement or index box.
    4. +
    5. Type the number of issues or parts you want to predict in the Number of issues/parts to predict box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    The number of issues or parts that will be predicted also depends on the publication pattern, including the start and end dates. The default (50) is the maximum number of issues or parts that can be predicted.

    +

    Tip:
    The retention information and public note in the serial holdings record display in the PAC at the branch level. If you have multiple serial holdings records for the same title and branch, but they are retained for different periods based on the collection, use the textual holdings notes to indicate the collection-specific retention.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to record and display other holdings information, type the textual holdings in the Textual Holdings box. You can use this box for retrospective holdings information (the physical serial issues/parts your library holds for which there are no records in Polaris). Example: v. 36-49 (1961-1994). Incomplete vols. unbound. Some issues missing.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The textual holdings and the textual holdings public note display in the public access catalog after the serial holdings record public note, if there is one. The serial holdings record public note is at the branch level. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.

    +
      +
    1. To enter a public note, type it in the Public note box.
    2. +
    3. To enter a note that is displayed for staff only, use the Non-public note box.
    4. +
    5. Click Next, and follow the steps in Establish chronology and enumeration  and in Set up the serial publication pattern regularity.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Use_a_template_to_create_a_publication_pattern.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Use_a_template_to_create_a_publication_pattern.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c8738d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsetup/Use_a_template_to_create_a_publication_pattern.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + + + Use a template to create a publication pattern + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Use a Template to Create a Publication Pattern

    +

    To create a publication pattern for a Serial Holdings record using a publication pattern template:

    +
      +
    1. Search for and select the bibliographic record for the serial title, right-click, and select Create, Serial Holdings Record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This is only one method for creating a serial holdings record. You can also select File | New, Serial Holdings Record from the Polaris Shortcut Bar and then link to the bibliographic record. For other methods of creating a serial holdings record, see Create a serial holdings record.

    +

    A blank Serial Holdings Record workform appears.

    +

    Tip:
    The bold type indicates information that is required before you can save the record.

    +
      +
    1. Enter the required information and save the serial holdings record.
    2. +
    3. Click the Add/Create Pattern icon or press CTRL+SHIFT+N.
    4. +
    +

    + shrpubpaticon.gif 

    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options wizard appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Use the Next and Back buttons to navigate the wizard.

    +
      +
    1. Click the Template Name column to sort the titles alphabetically.
    2. +
    3. Click anywhere in the list of templates, and type the first letter of the template’s name. The cursor will jump to the template name or close to it so you can find it quickly.
    4. +
    5. Select the template.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    If you chose the wrong template, click the Back button and make another selection.

    +
      +
    1. Click Next.
    2. +
    +

    The Enumeration and Chronology page appears, and the Start designation is displayed on the bottom of the page. The date in the Start date box defaults to the template’s start date.

    +

    Important:
    This is the start date of the template, not your subscription’s start date.
    If your subscription begins after this start date, or the first issue you want to predict is after this date, do not change the start date. If you change the start date for a publication pattern template, you must re-enter the enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. captions and values. Instead of changing the start date, remove the predicted issues that come before the first issue you want to predict. See step 13.

    +

    + startdesig.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Check the enumeration and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.. It is not necessary to change the enumeration and chronology if you want to start your expected issues after the template’s start date. Simply remove the issues on the Prediction Results page of the Publication Pattern wizard. See step 13.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you change the frequency of the pattern, the regularity is removed and another default regularity (to match the selected frequency) will take its place. Only change the frequency if the pattern template is not at all suitable. If you change the frequency by mistake, click Cancel on the last page of the pattern wizard and exit without saving the modified template.

    +
      +
    1. Click Next to go to the next page of the wizard.
    2. +
    +

    The Regularity Pattern page appears with the publication details.

    +

    + crepubpatreg.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Next to go to the next page of the wizard.
    2. +
    +

    The Prediction Results page appears.

    +

    Tip:
    If the predicted issues do not appear as you expected, click the Back button and make changes. If you click the Cancel button, the Publication Pattern wizard closes and your changes will not be saved.

    +
      +
    1. Check the predicted issues and verify that they appear as expected.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If you used a template with a start date before the actual start of your subscription to this title, there may be issues prior to the issues you want to generate. You need to remove the predicted issues before clicking the Finish button.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to see more issues than those displayed in the Prediction Results list, click View More.
    2. +
    +

    The number of issues that appear in the Prediction Results list is the number of issues that will be generated.

    +

    Important:
    Keep clicking View More until you see the first issue you want to predict.

    +
      +
    1. Remove all the predicted issues with dates before your subscription start date by doing the following steps:
      1. Select the issue directly above the first issue you want to generate.
      2. Press CTRL+SHIFT+Home.
      3. Right-click, and select Remove.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    This procedure only removes issues or parts from the predicted list; the issues or parts listed are not yet records in the Polaris system. When you have generated issues or parts records and you want to remove them, you delete them (see Delete single or multiple serial issues/parts).

    +

    + predpatremoveiss.gif 

    +

    After you remove issues, the Number of issues/parts to save box displays the number of issues remaining.

    +
      +
    1. Click Finish to create the expected issues.
    2. +
    +

    The expected issues appear in the Check In workform. See Checking In Serials.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Find_serial_records.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Find_serial_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02ef5d63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Find_serial_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Find serial records + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Find Serials Records

    +

    To find and access serial records:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Serials menu appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select one of the following menu options: Check In, Serial Holdings Records, Issue Records, Part Records, Subscription Records, Route Lists, Claims, or Suppliers.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Claim Alert List, a list shows the issues or parts that were not received as expected and are eligible to be claimed. If you select Subscription List, a list of subscriptions appears. If you select Templates, Publication Patterns, a list of publication patterns appears if you have created them. Batch print lets you print cancellation notices and routing slips in batches. Options opens the Label Setup dialog box.

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool appears with the type of record you selected in the Object box.

    +

    Tips:
    If you routinely search for serials records using the same search by criteria, select Options, Save as User Default. See Finding Polaris Records for more information on the Find Tool. If the periodical has a SICI The colloquial name for Serial Item and Contribution Identifier. +The SICI is the SISAC bar code. The SICI incorporates the ISSN and is used on scholarly, technical, medical and other subscription based serials. barcode, you can scan it to find the issue, serial holdings record, or check in record.

    +
      +
    1. Select the access point, in the Search by box, to search for the serial record.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    When you search by date, the Find Tool expands to allow you to enter a date range. For example, you can search for issue or part records by the expected arrival date.

    +

    + FTdates.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select the type of search in the Type box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The available search types depend on the object selected.

    +
      +
    1. If you want to sort the results before they display, select a sort option in the Sort by box.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    If you are searching for serial issues, select Designation to sort by the enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing..

    +
      +
    1. If you want to narrow your search, select an option in the Limit by box and select or type a limit by value in the Value box. For example, you might limit the search by a specific owning branch.
    2. +
    3. Type a search string in the For box.
    4. +
    5. Click Search.
    6. +
    +

    Tip:
    Press CTRL+A to load all the records in the Find Tool results list.

    +

    A list of serial records matching your search criteria appears in the Find Tool results list.

    +
      +
    1. Double-click an item in the results list to open the record, or right-click and select Open from the context menu.
    2. +
    +

    The record appears in the corresponding workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Record_Types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Record_Types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3eaedeb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Record_Types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serials Record Types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Record Types

    +

    Polaris Serials records facilitate your library’s serials processing activities. Some Serials records are also linked to Cataloging or Acquisitions records. You can access Polaris Supplier records from the Serials or Acquisitions menu. For more information on Supplier records, see Setting Up Supplier Records.

    +

    Serial Holdings Records

    +

    Serial holdings records are linked to the bibliographic record for the serial title in the Polaris database. The publication pattern (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is defined in the serial holdings record, and subscription issues or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts are created automatically from the publication pattern that predicts their arrival. A single serial holdings record can have multiple publication patterns to predict supplements or indexes published on a different schedule than the basic bibliographic unit, or if there is more than one basic bibliographic unit. Each copy of the serial title has a separate serial holdings record with a distinct copy number.

    +

    The retention designator and the Display in PAC settings apply only to checked in serial issues, not standing order parts. If you have the Display in PAC setting turned off (unchecked), no issues that are linked to this serial holdings record will display in the PAC. If the Display in PAC setting is turned on (checked) in the serial holdings record, the issues will display in the PAC according to the settings in the Retention Designator. Standing order parts are monographic, so they are displayed (or suppressed from display) according to the Display in PAC setting in the bibliographic or item record.

    +

    + newshr.gif 

    +

    Subscription Records

    +

    Subscription records are optional in Polaris, but they are necessary to track renewals or create purchase orders automatically when subscriptions are renewed. Serial holdings records can be linked to a subscription record.

    +

    + subscrec.gif 

    +

    Issue Records

    +

    Issue records represent the published serial issues (pieces) that are received and managed in your library. Each issue is linked to a serial holdings record, and the issue record inherits the title information from the serial holdings record. The issue record contains issue-specified information such as its status (Expected, Pending claim, Claimed, Never published, Not available, Received), exact publication information (enumeration, chronology, chronology date, publication date), public and non-public notes, and the arrival date. If an issue is to be circulated, or the library wishes to retain in-house use statistics, an item record is linked to each issue record during the receiving (check-in) process. If the issue has been claimed, the claiming history appears in the Claims view of the Issue workform. When an issue is routed, the route status appears on the Notes view of the Issue workform. The issue record can also be linked to an invoice, allowing its payment to be tracked in the Acquisitions subsystem.

    +

    + IssueRec.gif 

    +

    Subscription Record Relationships

    +

    Polaris manages subscriptions using two levels of records: serial holdings records, and issue records. You may also use subscription records if you want to maintain renewal history or subscription data, or if you want to create purchase orders automatically upon renewal of a subscription. If you circulate issues, you must create item records.

    +

    + Subsflow.gif 

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

     

    +

    +

    +

    Standing Order Part Records

    +

    Standing order part records represent the published volumes of a monographic series A group of monographs with a collective title in addition to their individual titles. The individual titles may or may not be numbered. The collective title is generally found on the title page or the cover of each monograph.. They track the receipt of the volumes, and each standing order part record contains the specific enumeration and or chronology of the piece. During standing order part check-in, a bibliographic record for the part is created or linked to the standing order part. Each standing order part representing the volume is linked to the serial holdings record representing the series. The standing order part can also be linked to an invoice, allowing its payment to be tracked in the Acquisitions subsystem. In addition, item records can be linked to each standing order part record during the receiving (check-in) process.

    +

    + SOpart.gif 

    +

    Standing Order Record Relationships

    +

    Like subscriptions, standing orders have two levels of records: serial holdings records and part records. However, standing order processing requires a link to the purchase order line item segment at the serial holdings record level.

    +

    + StandOrdflow.gif +

    +

    Tips for Viewing the Issue Designation in the Find Tool

    +
      +
    • Searching for Serial Items - When serial items are displayed in the Find Tool, you may need to expand the title column (by dragging the column border to the right) to see all the designation information because the designation is appended to the title.
    • +
    +

    + FTserial_items.gif 

    +
      +
    • Searching for Serial Issues - When you search for serial issues, you can sort by Designation to see all the copies of a specific issue.

      FTsortbydesignation.gif

    • +
    +

    Issue Designation Display

    +

    The serial issue’s designation (enumeration and/or chronology) appears in the following areas:

    +
      +
    • +

      Item Find Tool results list - See Tips for Viewing the Issue Designation in the Find Tool.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Issue Find Tool results list - See Tips for Viewing the Issue Designation in the Find Tool.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Subscription/Standing Order Check In workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      Check Out & Check In workforms

      +
    • +
    • +

      Request Manager

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron Status Workform - Items Out, Account Claims Holds, Reading History

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item Record Set workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      Outreach Services workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      Course Reserves workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      Items Pending list

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron checkout list

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron holds list

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron account portion of Polaris PowerPAC

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item-level request page of Polaris PowerPAC

      +
    • +
    • +

      The Issue field in the Item Record workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hold Request workform

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hold Request Find Tool results

      +
    • +
    • +

      Notices - Items Out Reminder Notice, Overdue Notices, Bill

      +
    • +
    • +

      Notice, Holds Notice, Claim Notice

      +
    • +
    • +

      Receipts & Slips - Check-out Receipt, Holds Slip, In-transit Slip

      +
    • +
    • +

      Blocks & Hold message dialogs

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The enumeration and chronology is not a separate column of data, as it is appended to the Title.

    +

    + designation-title.gif +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Workflow_Overview.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Workflow_Overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8764f19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Serials_Workflow_Overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serials Workflow Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Workflow

    +

    Below are the steps involved in managing serials in Polaris:

    +

    Tip:
    To customize workflow and streamline operations with Polaris Administration settings, see Serials Administration Overview.

    +
      +
    1. Create or import bibliographic records (if they do not already exist) for each serial title held by the library. See Creating MARC Records or Importing Records.
    2. +
    3. Set up templates for common publication patterns, for example, weekly publications. Once you have set up publication pattern templates, you can select them from a list in the serial holdings record. You can also set up a publication pattern in the serial holdings record for a specific title. See Creating Publication Pattern Templates.
    4. +
    5. Set up supplier records for each of your serial vendors. If you claim serials, set up the claiming information on the Supplier workform. See Create a new supplier record.
    6. +
    7. Create a serial holdings record for each serial title, and copy the record for each copy of the title. For example Time Magazine at the Main Street branch would have a different serial holdings record from Time Magazine at West Street branch. Specify a publication pattern for the expected serial issues. If you claim serials issues/parts, and you want to add more claiming intervals than are available on the Supplier record, add more claiming intervals on the Serial Holdings record. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC and Enter Claiming Criteria in the Serial Holdings Record.
    8. +
    9. (Optional) If you claim serials issues/parts, set up claiming to be automatic or manual, and specify the notification method. See Set up claiming notification.
    10. +
    11. (Optional) If you circulate any serial titles, set up serial item templates. See Creating Serial Item Templates.
    12. +
    13. (Optional) If you want to track subscription renewals or create purchase orders automatically when subscriptions are renewed, create a subscription record. See Managing Subscriptions.
    14. +
    15. (Optional) If you want to route serial issues, set up route lists that contain the text, routing information, and names of the individuals to whom you want to route issues. See Creating Route Lists.
    16. +
    17. As issues/parts are delivered to the library, check in the issues/parts using the Check In workform. See Checking In Serials.
    18. +
    19. (Optional) Print serials labels and route slips. See Print a Label for a Serial Issue or Part and Printing Route Slips.
    20. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Starting_a_Serials_Task.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Starting_a_Serials_Task.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d70676d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSstart/Starting_a_Serials_Task.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Starting a Serials Task + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Starting a Serials Task

    +

    You can start a serials task by finding an existing record or creating a new one.

    +

    Tip:
    Click the green orb to see the Serials toolbar.
    sertoolbar.gif
    Hover the cursor over the icons to see their functions.

    +

    To start a task in Serials:

    +

    Note:
    For more information on basic Polaris functions, see Getting Started in Polaris.

    +
      +
    1. Log on to Polaris.
    2. +
    +

    The Polaris Shortcut Bar appears.

    +

    Tip:
    Press ALT+S to display the Serials menu.

    +
      +
    1. Start one of the following serials tasks:
      • Create a serial holdings record for a serial title - Select File | New | Serial Holdings Record. Issue and part records are created from serial holdings records. See Setting Up Serials Records.
      • Create a subscription record for a specific title - Select File | New Subscription Record. See Create a subscription record.
      • Create a new supplier record - Select File | New | Supplier. See Create a new supplier record.
      • Create a new route list for routing serial issues - Select File | New | Route List. See Creating Route Lists.
      • Receive a serial issue or part - Select Serials |Check In. See Checking In Serials.
      • Find an existing serials record - Select Serials, select the record type, and use the Find Tool to search for the record. See Find serials records.
      • Renew or cancel one or more subscription titles - Select Serials | Subscription List. See View the Subscription List.
      • View, edit, and create publication pattern templates - Select Serials | Templates | Publication Patterns. See Create a publication pattern template.
      • Claim a serial issue or part - Select Claim Alert List. See Claiming in Serials.
      • Batch print cancellation notices or route slips - Select Serials | Batch Print | Cancellation Notices or Route Slips.
      • Generate a serials report - Select Utilities | Reports | Serials. Select the report from the list. See Serials Reports.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_to_a_subscription_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_to_a_subscription_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a0323da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Add_a_serial_holdings_record_to_a_subscription_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a serial holdings record to a subscription record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a Serial Holdings Record to a Subscription Record

    +

    After you have created a subscription record, you can add serial holdings records to the subscription record. To add a serial holdings record to a subscription record:

    +

    Tip:
    You can also add a serial holdings record to the subscription record by selecting Tools, Add to Subscription Record from the Serial Holdings Record workform. Then, select the subscription record from the Find Tool.

    +
      +
    1. Select View, Serial Holdings on the Subscription Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    The Serial Holdings view appears.

    +

    + SubsHoldvw.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click AddCopybut.gif to add a serial holdings record.
    2. +
    +

    If only one serial holdings record is linked to the bibliographic record, the information from that serial holdings record appears in the Subscription Record workform. If multiple serial holdings records are linked to the bibliographic record, the serial holdings records are listed in a dialog box.

    +

    + SHRlist.gif 

    +
      +
    1.  If the Serial Holdings dialog box appears, select the serial holdings record that you want to add to the subscription record, and click Select.
    2. +
    +

    The serial holdings record appears in the Holdings list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Cancel_a_subscription.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Cancel_a_subscription.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e6894b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Cancel_a_subscription.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cancel a subscription + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cancel a Subscription

    +

    To cancel a subscription:

    +
      +
    1. Display the subscription that you want to cancel in the Subscription Record workform or the Subscription List workform.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    For information on using filters to view subscriptions on the Subscription List workform, see View the Subscription List.

    +
      +
    1. Do one of the following actions:
      • If you are canceling the subscription from the Subscription List workform, right-click the subscription you want to cancel, and select Cancel from the context menu.
      • If you are canceling the subscription from the Subscription Record workform, select Tools, Cancel.
    2. +
    +

    The Cancel Subscription dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To update the linked serial holdings records to one of these statuses, select Update linked serial holding records, and select Completed or Not Currently Received.
    2. +
    3. If there are purchase order line items linked to this subscription that you want to update to a status of Closed, select Update linked purchase order line items.
    4. +
    5. Click OK.
    6. +
    +

    The Print dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click OK to print the cancellation notice to send to the supplier.
    2. +
    +

    When you cancel a subscription, the subscription status changes to cancelled, and you can change any linked serial holdings records’ statuses to completed or not currently received, and any linked purchase order line items to cancelled. If there are funds encumbered on the linked purchase order line item, the funds are disencumbered.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Printing cancellation notices in batch - Select Batch Print, Cancellation Notices from the Serials menu.
    • +
    • Cancellation notice information - The subscription cancellation notice text is set in the Polaris Administration Serials parameter Notification: Subscription Cancellation Notice Text. It includes the date of the cancellation notice; the subscription title, ISSN, and subscription identifier; the supplier’s name, address, phone number, and account number; the name, address, and phone number of the subscription’s owner.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Copy_a_subscription_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Copy_a_subscription_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65e60664 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Copy_a_subscription_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy a subscription record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy a Subscription Record

    +

    You can create a new subscription record by copying an existing subscription record. To copy a subscription record:

    +
      +
    1. Display the subscription record in the Subscription workform.
    2. +
    3. Select File | New from the menu on the Subscription workform.
    4. +
    5. The New Subscription Record dialog box appears.
    6. +
    7. Choose one of the following options:
      • Select Copy Existing Workform if you want to copy the subscription information to the new subscription record.
      • Select Clear Workform if you want to create a new record with different subscription information.
    8. +
    +

    Note:
    Any serial holdings records that are linked to the original subscription record are not linked to the new record.

    +
      +
    1. Continue entering the subscription information. See Create a subscription record.
    2. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Create_a_subscription_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Create_a_subscription_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0b13cb85 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Create_a_subscription_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create a subscription record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create a Subscription Record

    +

    To create a subscription record:

    +
      +
    1. Select File | New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    3. Select Subscription Record from the list.
    4. +
    +

    A blank Subscription Record workform appears.

    +
      +
    1. Click Find next to the Bib control box, and use the Find Tool to select the bibliographic record for the subscription title.
    2. +
    +

    + newsubsrec.gif-

    +

    The bibliographic information for the subscription title appears in the Bib control, Title and ISSN boxes.

    +
      +
    1. Select the library that controls this subscription in the Owner box.
    2. +
    3. Clear the Automatic Renewal check box if you do not want the subscription to be renewed automatically.
    4. +
    5. Click Find next to the Supplier SAN box, and use the Find Tool to search for and select the supplier for this subscription.
    6. +
    +

    + newsubsrecsupp.gif 

    +

    The supplier name, account number, and SAN appear in the appropriate boxes.

    +
      +
    1. Type a name by which your library identifies this supplier, if applicable.
    2. +
    3. Select the date when the subscription originally began in the Original date box.
    4. +
    5. Select the date when the present subscription period began in the Start date box.
    6. +
    7. Select the term for the subscription in the Term box.
    8. +
    +

    The expiration date automatically appears in the Expiration date box.

    +

    Important:
    The payment method, fund, and subscription price are required if you choose to create purchase orders automatically upon renewal.

    +
      +
    1. Select the payment method for the subscription in the Method box.
    2. +
    3. Select the fund that is being used for the subscription in the Fund box.
    4. +
    5. Type the price of the subscription in the Price box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    The Copy Quantity information appears when there are serial holdings records associated with this subscription record.

    +
      +
    1. If applicable, type renewal instructions and notes in the Instructions and Notes boxes.
    2. +
    3. Add serial holdings records to the record (see Add a serial holdings record to a subscription record).
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Managing_Subscriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Managing_Subscriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..846cc169 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Managing_Subscriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Managing Subscriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Managing Subscriptions

    +

    Subscription Records are optional in Polaris. You can use subscription records if your library wants to track renewals or create purchase orders automatically when subscriptions are renewed. You can renew and cancel subscriptions without creating subscription records, but there will be no automatic tracking or reporting capabilities.

    +

    A subscription record is a central location for information related to one or more copies (serial holdings records) of a subscription, including the renewal term, status, start date, and expiration date. A subscription record is linked to a bibliographic record and one or more serial holdings records. Once you have set up subscription records for all the subscriptions your library has, you can manage (view, renew, cancel) your subscriptions from the Subscriptions List.

    +

    If you use subscription records, you can print reports that show the types of serials titles your library subscribes to and the cost of these subscriptions. These reports can assist you in making decisions about renewing or cancelling your library’s subscriptions. For more information, see Serials Reports.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_a_subscription_from_the_subscription_record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_a_subscription_from_the_subscription_record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cd919392 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_a_subscription_from_the_subscription_record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Renew a subscription from the subscription record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Renew a Subscription from the Subscription Record

    +

    The subscription renewal process can automatically create purchase orders if your organization has set this option in Polaris Administration (see Setting Up Subscriptions).

    +

    To renew a subscription from the Subscription Record workform:

    +

    Note:
    If you are not using subscription records, you can simply extend the subscription end date by typing a new date in the End date box in the publication pattern in the Serial Holdings Record, generate more issues, and receive them. See Specify the publication pattern for a serial title. You can use an invoice with one line item to indicate the expenditure for the renewal.

    +
      +
    1. Display the subscription in the Subscription Record workform:
    2. +
    3. Select Tools, Renew from the Subscription Record menu.
      • If the Polaris Administration Serials parameter Create Purchase Order at subscription renewal is set to Yes, the Renew Subscriptions dialog box appears with the Create POs at Subscription Renewal box checked. The Order at library is set to the default library. Click Continue to renew the subscription. For information on setting this parameter, see Set up subscriptions.
      • If the Create Purchase Order at subscription renewal parameter is set to No, the dialog box does not appear.
    4. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can clear the check box to renew the subscription without creating a purchase order.

    +

    The subscription is renewed. If your library chooses to create purchase orders upon renewal, a new purchase order is created with one line item per subscription record. The line item contains a segment for each unique combination of destination and collection from the subscription record’s linked serial holdings records. If a purchase order was previously linked to this subscription record, the previous purchase order is closed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_subscriptions_from_Subscription_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_subscriptions_from_Subscription_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e57f7fc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Renew_subscriptions_from_Subscription_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Renew subscriptions from Subscription List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Renew Subscriptions from Subscription List

    +

    To renew subscriptions from the Subscription List:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials | Subscription List from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
    2. +
    +

    The Subscriptions List appears.

    +
      +
    1. Set the view of the Subscription List to display the subscriptions you want to renew. See View the Subscription List.
    2. +
    3. Choose one of the following options:
      • To renew one or multiple subscriptions, select the subscriptions in the list, right-click, and select Renew from the context menu.
      • To renew all the subscriptions in the list, display the subscriptions that you want to renew using the filters, and select Tools, Renew All from the Subscription List menu.
    4. +
    +

    The Renew Subscriptions dialog box appears.

    +

    The Create POs at Subscription Renewal box is checked if the parameter Create Purchase Order at subscription renewal is set to Yes in Polaris Administration (see Set up subscriptions). The Order at library is set to the default library.

    +

    Note:
    You can clear the check box to renew the subscriptions without creating a purchase order.

    +
      +
    1. Click Continue to renew the subscriptions.
    2. +
    +

    The subscriptions are renewed, and the purchase orders are created, if you selected this option.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Reopen_a_subscription.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Reopen_a_subscription.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20d32633 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/PSsubscriptions/Reopen_a_subscription.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Reopen a subscription + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reopen a Subscription

    +

    To reopen a canceled subscription:

    +
      +
    1. Open the canceled subscription in the Subscription Record workform.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also reopen a canceled subscription from the Find Tool results list or from the Subscription List. Right-click the subscription, and select Reopen from the context menu.

    +
      +
    1. Select Tools, Reopen.
    2. +
    +

    The Reopen Subscription dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. To update the subscription holdings records, click Update serial holdings records, and select the status in the Status box.
    2. +
    3. Click Continue to reopen the subscription.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Shortcut_Keys.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Shortcut_Keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2370d847 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Shortcut_Keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,363 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serials Shortcut Keys + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Shortcut Keys

    +

    These charts list keyboard shortcuts you can use with Polaris serials workflows.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    General

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Workform helpF1
    Open recordCTRL+O
    New dialog boxCTRL+N
    Close workformALT+F4
    DeleteCTRL+D
    Save recordCTRL+S
    PropertiesF8
    RefreshF5
    Previous tagCTRL+up arrow
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Print

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Print current viewCTRL+P
    Print current list viewCTRL+SHIFT+P
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Serial Holdings Record

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Create new patternCTRL+SHIFT+N
    Delete a patternCTRL+SHIFT+D
    Open a patternCTRL+SHIFT+O
    Pattern optionsCTRL+SHIFT+M
    Print pattern listCTRL+SHIFT+P
    Close a patternCTRL+SHIFT+C
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Route List Workform

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Open a pieceCTRL+E
    Print a route slipCTRL+R
    Print a list of piecesCTRL+SHIFT+P
    Add a new memberCTRL+A
    Move member upCTRL+U
    Move member downCTRL+D
    Open a member CTRL+M
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Subscription Record

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Print a listCTRL+SHIFT+P
    Add a serial holdingCTRL+A
    Remove a serial holdingCTRL+I
    Delete a serial holdingCTRL+D
    Serial holdings propertiesALT+F8
    Renew a subscriptionCTRL+R
    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Check In

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Print a single labelCTRL+ALT+L
    Print multiple labelsCTRL+ALT+M
    +

     

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Issue Record

    +
    FUNCTIONKEYS
    Print a single labelCTRL+ALT+L
    Print multiple labelsCTRL+ALT+M
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3a7b61f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/Serials_Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serials Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Serials Overview

    +

    To help you manage serials processing more efficiently, Polaris automates and streamlines the following processes:

    +
      +
    • Setting up serials processing - Create serial holdings records and publication patterns for automatic prediction. Serial issues are created automatically from the publication pattern. Specify how your serial holdings will display in the PAC.
    • +
    • Managing subscriptions - Subscription records, which are optional in Polaris, provide an easy way to renew or cancel subscriptions. In addition, you can create purchase orders automatically upon renewal of the subscription. Once you create subscription records for your serial titles, you can manage all of your subscriptions using the Subscription List.
    • +
    • Checking in serial issues and standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts - Check in issues or parts, create item records automatically, and generate labels.
    • +
    • Routing serials - Set up route lists with standard text, routing information, and the individuals to whom the items should be routed. The route slip can be printed when the issue is checked in.
    • +
    • Claiming serials - When issues are not received as expected, you can claim them. In Polaris Administration, you can set up claiming to be automatic or manual. When Polaris is set up to do automatic claiming, a claim is automatically e-mailed to the supplier when the issue is not received by a specified number of days after the expected date. With manual claiming, the issue appears on the Claim Alert List where you can select the issue and claim it. The claiming data is set up in the Supplier record, and it is copied to the Serial Holdings record where you can add more claiming intervals.
    • +
    • Deleting issues no longer retained - When serial issues are no longer retained by your library, you can delete the serial issue records.
    • +
    +

    For information on the features and functions in Polaris Serials, see the following topics:

    +

    Serials Workflow +

    +

    An overview of the steps involved in managing serials.

    +

    Serials Record Types +

    +

    An overview of the types of records in Polaris Serials.

    +

    Setting Up Serials Records 

    +

    How to set up Polaris to manage and process serials, including procedures for creating serial holdings records, publication patterns and pattern templates, and serial item templates.

    +

    Managing Subscriptions 

    +

    Creating subscription records; viewing, renewing, and canceling subscriptions from the Subscriptions List.

    +

    Checking In Serials 

    +

    Checking in issues and parts; printing labels for issues and parts.

    +

    Claiming in Serials 

    +

    Claiming serial issues that were not received as expected.

    +

    Routing Serial Issues 

    +

    Setting up route lists; printing route slips to attach to magazines, journals, or other material that is routed to staff members and patrons.

    +

    Serials Shortcut Keys 

    +

    List of shortcut keys for Serials workflows.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/View_the_Subscription_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/View_the_Subscription_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fd4eb0d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials/View_the_Subscription_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + View the Subscription List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    View the Subscription List

    +

    The Subscription List displays the library’s subscription records. You can filter the list to see the subscriptions for a specific supplier, owner, status, expiration date range, and automatic renewal flag. To filter the subscription list to show specific subscriptions:

    +
      +
    1. Select Serials, Subscription List.
    2. +
    +

    The Subscription List appears.

    +

    Tips:
    Sort a column by clicking on the column header.
    Expand a column by dragging the border of a column header.
    Expand the workform by dragging the lower right corner.

    +
      +
    1. Filter the list using the following options:
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    When one type of filter is selected, all the filters’ settings are used to limit the list. If you do not want the Supplier, Status, or Auto renew filters to be used, select the All option for any of these filters. If you do not want the Expiration Date to be used, expand the date range to encompass all possible expiration dates. If you do not want the Owner to be used, select the name of the library system (sys appears after the system name).

    +
    +
      +
    • Select one or multiple libraries in the Owner box. To include all the branches, select the system level.
    • +
    • Select one or multiple suppliers in the Supplier box, or select All to view the subscriptions for all suppliers.
    • +
    • Select a status in the Status box, or select All to view the subscriptions without regard to status.
    • +
    • Select an option in the Auto renew box, or select All to view the subscriptions whether they are automatically renewed or not.
    • +
    • Select an expiration date range in the From and To boxes. To include all expiration dates, expand the date range.
    • +
    +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Admin_Ref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Admin_Ref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..989a94c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Admin_Ref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Serials Administration Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Administration Reference

    +

    The following tables include the permissions required to do specific Serials tasks, and reference lists for Serials permissions, parameters and profiles.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Permissions_Referencet.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Permissions_Referencet.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6743aac8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Permissions_Referencet.htm @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + Serials Permissions Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Permissions Reference

    +

    These permissions are available under Security > Serials at the listed organizational levels on the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note:

    To do a serials task, both the staff member and the workstation must have the permissions.

    +

    For more information on setting permissions for specific Serials workflows, see Set serials security.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    Control RecordOrg LevelsPermissionDescription
    Access serialsSystemAllow Access the Serials menu and workforms
    +
  • Route lists
  • +
    System, Library, Branch +

    Access; Create; Modify; Delete; Modify route status

    +
    Route serial issues and other materials
    Serial holdings recordsBranchAccess; Create; Modify; DeleteWork with serial holdings records including publication patterns and pattern templates
    Serial issues/standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. partsBranchAccess; Create; Modify; Claim; Delete; Check-in; Uncheck-inWork with serial issues and standing order parts
    Subscription recordsSystem, Library, BranchAccess; Create; Modify; Delete; Cancel and RenewMaintain subscriptions
    SuppliersBranchAccess; Create; Modify; Delete; Modify postal address fieldsWork with supplier records that belong to the branch
    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Workflow_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Workflow_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed04c23b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/Serials_Workflow_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,874 @@ + + + + + + + + Serials Workflow Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Workflow Permissions

    +

    The following table lists serials tasks, the Polaris permissions required to do the tasks, the administrative levels at which they can be set, and the subsystems where the permissions are located. Some permissions required for Serials processing are also used in other subsystems. For example, the Acquisitions permission Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow is used in both subsystems.

    +

    Tip:
    Not all permissions are specific to Serials. There are other permissions which apply to Serials, but are not configured within Serials, such as the Cataloging permission Override invalid item barcode message: Allow and the Acquisitions permission Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow.

    +

    Note:
    To modify Polaris Administration profiles and parameters, you must have the following permissions:
    Access administration: Allow
    Modify parameters: Allow
    Modify profiles: Allow
    For more information, see Setting Administration Permissions.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Workflow

    +
    +

    Required Permissions

    +
    +

    Administration Explorer Security Location

    +
    +

    Manage Serial Holdings

    +
    +

    Maintain serial holdings records (including publication patterns)

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Create

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Delete

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Control whether Polaris automatically creates issues or part records

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Modify

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Manage Subscriptions

    +
    +

    Add a subscription icon

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Create

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Funds: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Maintain subscription records

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Access

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Modify +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Funds: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Renew or cancel a subscription

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Cancel and Renew +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Delete subscription records

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Subscription records: Delete +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Set subscription cancellation text and print parameters

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Access reports and notices: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - System  Administration

    +
    +

      +

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Manage Serial Issues/Parts

    +
    +

    Create, access, modify, and delete issues or parts

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Create +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Access +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Modify +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Delete +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Access +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Checking in serial issues/parts

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Access +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Delete +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Check-in Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    UnCheck-in +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Access +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Modify +

    +
    +

    System, Branch

    +
    +

    Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow (optional) +

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Create and delete item records from acquisitions and serials: Allow (if creating item records) +

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Default shelving scheme for new item and holdings records: Allow

    +
    +

    System - Cataloging

    +
    +

    Delete serial items linked to issues or parts

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Create +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Modify +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial Issues/Standing Order Parts: Delete +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Item records: Delete/Undelete +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Create and delete item records from acquisitions and serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Acquisitions

    +
    +

    Maintain Route Lists

    +
    +

    Create a route list

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Create +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Serial holdings records: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Modify a route list

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Modify +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Modify route status +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Delete a route list

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Access +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Route lists: Delete +

    +
    +

    System, Library, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Set up route list defaults

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

    Modify profiles: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

    Claim Serials Issues/Parts

    +
    +

    Enter and change serials claiming information in supplier records

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Create +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Access +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Modify +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Modify postal address fields +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Generate serials claims

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Claim alert list: Access +

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Serial issues/standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts: Claim +

    +
    +

    System, Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Set up claim notices in Polaris Administration

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

    Access administration: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

    Modify parameters: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

    Access reports and notices: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Access +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Suppliers: Modify +

    +
    +

    Branch - Serials

    +
    +

    Generate claim notices

    +
    +

    Access serials: Allow +

    +
    +

    System - Serials

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Access reports and notices: Allow

    +
    +

    System - System Administration

    +
    +

     

    +
    +

    Claim alert list: Access +

    +
    +

    System - Acquisitions

    +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serialsprofref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serialsprofref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..852de4ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serialsprofref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + Serials Profiles Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Profiles Reference

    +

    These are the parameters and profiles that you set to administer and maintain the Serials subsystem in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    Not all permissions, parameters, and profiles are specific to Serials. There are other permissions which apply to Serials, but are not configured within Serials, such as Override invalid item barcode message: Allow and the Acquisitions permission Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow.

    +

    The following profiles are available when you select Profiles, Acquisitions/Serials at the listed organizational levels. For more information, see Serials Administration.

    +

    Route List defaults
    (System, Library, Branch, Workstation, Staff)

    +

    Sets the default values used when creating new route lists. See Setting Up Routing.

    +

    Override Serials blocks
    (Staff)

    +

    Specifies whether the selected staff member can override blocks in Serials functions. Staff members with this profile set to Yes must also have permissions to the restricted functions. The default is No; to enable, set to Yes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serparamref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serparamref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..49423448 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKseref/serparamref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + Serials Permissions, Parameters, and Profiles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Parameters Reference

    +

    These are the parameters and profiles that you set to administer and maintain the Serials subsystem in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    Not all permissions, parameters, and profiles are specific to Serials. There are other permissions which apply to Serials, but are not configured within Serials, such as Override invalid item barcode message: Allow and the Acquisitions permission Create a bib record from acquisitions and serials: Allow.

    +

    +

    +

    +

    +

    The following parameters are available when you select Parameters, Acquisitions/Serials in the System Administration Explorer at the listed organizational levels. For more information, see Serials Administration .

    +
      +
    • Create purchase order at subscription renewal
      (System, Library, Branch)
    • +
    +

    Specifies whether a purchase order should be created when a subscription is approved for renewal. The default is No; to enable, set to Yes.

    +
      +
    • Display of Issues on Check In
      (System, Library, Branch)
    • +
    +

    Specifies the status of issues that appear when the Check In workform is first opened. It can be set to All which displays all issues regardless of their status, or to Not received. You can define which statuses are included in the category Not received using the check boxes.

    +
      +
    • Delete linked issue/part when serial item is deleted
      (System, Library, Branch)
    • +
    +

    Specifies if issues/parts are automatically deleted when you delete the linked serial item record. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.

    +
      +
    • Enter unit price at serials check-in
    • +
    +

    Specifies whether the Unit price box appears in the prompt for barcode dialog box when serial issues or parts are checked in. When it is set to Yes (default), and the serial holdings record has the settings Generate item records at check-in and Prompt for barcode turned on, the dialog box also includes the unit price. The default is Yes; to disable, set to No.

    +
      +
    • Notification: Print subscription cancellation notice
      (System, Library, Branch)
    • +
    +

    Specifies when a subscription cancellation notice is printed. The default is Automatic, cancellation notices are printed as individual subscriptions are canceled. If set to Batch, the Cancellation Notices report must be generated to print notices for canceled subscriptions.

    +
      +
    • Notification: Subscription cancellation notice text
      (System, Library, Branch)
    • +
    +

    Specifies the wording of the subscription cancellation notice for the organization. The default text is The Subscription identified in this notice is being canceled.

    + +

    Specifies the budget account to use for the subscription renewal line item on a purchase order if a fund is not specified for the subscription. This fund is used if the payment method for the subscription is a depository agreement.

    +
      +
    • Subscription renewal fund - non-deposit account
      (System, Library, Branch)
    • +
    +

    Specifies the budget account to use for the subscription renewal line item on a purchase order if a fund is not specified for the subscription. This fund is used if the payment method is something other than a depository agreement.

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Administration.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Administration.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a62df52 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Administration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serials Administration Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Administration Overview

    +

    Polaris Administration settings control how Polaris data is categorized, used, and stored, and what functions are available to staff and patrons. You can make most administration settings by two methods: through the Administration Explorer, and through the appropriate workform for a specific record.

    +

    Configure your Polaris system to process serials in the way that is most efficient for your organization. Serials processing in Polaris includes:

    +
      +
    • subscription maintenance
    • +
    • predicting issues
    • +
    • receiving
    • +
    • routing pieces
    • +
    +

    To enable your staff to perform certain serials tasks, you need to set up the required permissions (security) to access, create, modify, or delete records. Then, you set up the appropriate defaults and settings to streamline and standardize your serials processing.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Permissions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Permissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c1dad81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Serials_Permissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serials Permissions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials Permissions

    +

    Serials permissions define who can create, access, and work with serials records and functions. Each organization can grant the appropriate permissions that enable staff members to work with serials records and control serial processing.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_automatic_deletion_of_linked_issues_parts_when_items_are.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_automatic_deletion_of_linked_issues_parts_when_items_are.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c9386b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_automatic_deletion_of_linked_issues_parts_when_items_are.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set automatic deletion of linked issues/parts when items are deleted + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set automatic deletion of linked issues/parts when items are deleted

    +

    To specify whether you want linked serial issues/parts to be deleted when item records are deleted.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Delete linked issue/part when serial item is deleted.
    6. +
    7. Select Yes to delete all linked issues/parts when linked item records are deleted in Cataloging, or select No to retain the issues/parts when the linked item records have been deleted.
    8. +
    9. Select File > Save.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_serials_security.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_serials_security.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..958447d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_serials_security.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set serials security + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set serials security

    +

    To review and set Serials permissions:

    +

    Note:
    Certain System Administration permissions are required to assign permissions.

    +

    In the Administration Explorer tree view, select the Security folder for the organization for which you want to set permissions.

    +

    The Security view is displayed in the details pane.

    +

    Double-click the Serials folder in the Control Record list.

    +

    The permissions appear under the object folders.

    +

    Select the permission.

    +

    The permission groups, staff members, and workstations with that permission appear in the right pane of the Explorer.

    +

    Click Assign, and select Permission Group > Workstation or Staff Member.

    +

    The Find Tool appears.

    +

    Use the Find Tool to search for and select the staff member, permission group, or workstation to which you want to grant the selected permission.

    +

    The staff member, workstation, or permission group appears in the list of those that have the selected permission.

    +

    Select File > Save.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_the_prompt_for_price_at_check-in.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_the_prompt_for_price_at_check-in.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a6f0687 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_the_prompt_for_price_at_check-in.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set the prompt for price at check-in + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set the Prompt for Price at Check-In

    +

    To specify whether you want a price prompt to appear along with the barcode prompt when you check in serial issues:

    +

    Tip:
    The Enter unit price at serials check in parameter applies only when the serial holdings record has the settings Generate item records at check-in and Prompt for barcode enabled.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Enter unit price at serials check-in.
    6. +
    7. Set the parameter to Yes or No.
      • If the parameter is set to Yes, when the issues are checked in, the cursor is in the Price field and both fields are enabled.
      • If the parameter is set to No, when the issues are checked in, the cursor is in the barcode field and the price field is read-only.
    8. +
    9. Select File | Save.
    10. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_claiming_notification.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_claiming_notification.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6556743d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_claiming_notification.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up claiming notification + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Serials Claiming Notification

    +

    To specify how claim notices will be sent for serials issues or parts that are not received as expected:

    +

    Important:
    If your serials claiming is centralized, set up notification at the system level. If your serials claiming is decentralized, set up notification at the library or branch level.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and click the Notification tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Notification options.
    6. +
    +

    The Notification options - General tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Serial tab.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To generate claim notices for a supplier, the Claim Notice box must be checked in the Supplier record.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Serial claim check box.
    2. +
    3. Select the method by which you want to generate and send claim notices in the Notification method box.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    If you want the claim notice method set in supplier records to control how notifications are sent, make sure you select all the possible notification methods on the General tab, and then set the Notification method to Supplier Preference on the Serial tab.

    +
      +
    1. Select Automatic claiming to have a claim notice sent out automatically when an issue or part is eligible to be claimed.
    2. +
    3. In the following fields, type the contact information for the library staff member who handles serials claims:
      • Contact name
      • Department name
      • Phone number
      • Email address
    4. +
    5. In the Return address box, select the library whose return address should be used on the serial claim notices.
    6. +
    7. To include the claim reason on serial claim notices, select Include Claim Reason. The claim reason comes from the Reason box in the Claims view of the Issue record.
    8. +
    9. To include a claim note, select Include Claim Note. The claim note comes from the text in the Note box in the Issue record.
    10. +
    +

    Note:
    If the Subscription ID has been entered in the Serial Holdings Record - Orders view, it appears on the claim notice.

    +
      +
    1. Click Save to save the notice settings you entered.
    2. +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_routing_notices.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_routing_notices.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d80c3486 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_routing_notices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set up routing notices + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Routing Notices

    +

    When you route an issue, you can notify the members of the route list that the issue has been routed to them. You can specify whether the notice will be sent in an e-mail or printed.

    +

    Tip:
    A routing notice is not a route slip, which is a printed list of the people to whom the issue is routed. A route slip is attached to the issues being routed. For more information about route slips, see Routing Serial Issues. Routing notices can be e-mailed or printed.

    +

    To set up routing notices:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and click the Notification tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Notification options.
    6. +
    +

    The Notification Options dialog box - General tabbed page appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the Serial tab.
    2. +
    3. Select Routing.
    4. +
    5. Select a method in the Notification method box.
    6. +
    +

    Note:
    Phone and TXT message notification methods are not available for routing.

    +
      +
    1. If you selected E-mail or Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, set up the notice in the E-mail notice area:
      • Type the subject of the e-mail in the Subject box.
      • Type the text of the e-mail notice in the Text box. There is no default or item-specific information for routing notices.
    2. +
    3. If you selected Print or Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, set up the notice in the Printed notice area:
    4. +
    +
      +
    • Type the heading of the notice in the Header box. This is the information that appears in the top portion of the notice.
    • +
    • Type the text of the notice in the Text box. There is no default or item-specific information for routing notices.
    • +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save.
    2. +
    +

    See also

    +

    Routing Serial Issues. +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_serials_route_list_defaults.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_serials_route_list_defaults.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34a99764 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_serials_route_list_defaults.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set up serials route list defaults + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Serials Route List Defaults

    +

    Use the Route list defaults profile to define the default information that displays in the Route List workform for the organization, workstation, or staff member, and to specify how route slips are printed.

    +

    To set up serial route list defaults:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the folder for the organization, workstation, or staff member.
    2. +
    3. Select Profiles and click the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Route list defaults.
    6. +
    +

    The Route List Defaults Dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the default routing duration by typing a number and selecting weeks or days in the Route Period boxes.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    The routing duration is used to calculate the Return by date that appears on route slips.

    +
      +
    1. In the Home Location box, select the organization where the piece should be returned.
    2. +
    3. Select one of the following print options:
      • Select Batch if the route slip should be printed with all other route slips needed during a serial check-in session.
      • Select Automatic to print the route slip as each piece is checked in.
    4. +
    5. Type the instructions for returning the routed piece in the Return Instructions box.
    6. +
    7. Type the text for the header in the Header box. This is the information that appears at the top of route slip.
    8. +
    9. Type the text for the footer in the Footer box.
    10. +
    11. Specify the columns that display in the Route List workform by selecting the data elements in the Piece Display Options box on the left and clicking Add to move them to the box on the right.
    12. +
    13. Click OK to set the route list defaults and close the Route List dialog box.
    14. +
    15. Select File > Save.
    16. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_subscriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_subscriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15e48c70 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Set_up_subscriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set up subscriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Up Subscriptions

    +

    To set up subscriptions in Polaris:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Double-click Create purchase order at subscription renewal, and select Yes or No. If the parameter is set to Yes, when users renew subscriptions a dialog box opens with the Create POs at Subscription renewal option selected. If the parameter is set to No, the dialog box does not appear when users renew subscriptions.
    6. +
    7. If you selected Yes in the Create purchase order at subscription renewal parameter, specify default funds for the automatic purchase orders:
    8. +
    9. Double-click Notification: Print subscription cancellation notice, and select Automatic or Batch to specify if cancellation notices are to be printed automatically or in a batch.
    10. +
    11. Double-click Notification: Subscription cancellation notice text, and type the text to appear on subscription cancellation notices. This text will appear on all subscription cancellation notices.
    12. +
    13. Select File | Save.
    14. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Delete_of_Issue_Part_with_Item.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Delete_of_Issue_Part_with_Item.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5959bc6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Delete_of_Issue_Part_with_Item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Delete of Issue/Part with Item + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Delete of Issue/Part with Item

    +

    You can specify whether issues/parts should be deleted automatically when the linked item record is deleted. The Acquisitions/Serials parameter, Delete linked issue/part when serial item is deleted must be set to Yes for the linked serial record to be deleted automatically.

    +

    See also:Set automatic deletion of linked issues/parts when items are deleted

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Routing.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Routing.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9cdb670d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Routing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Routing + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Routing

    +

    You can use Polaris Administration settings to define the defaults that display on route slips; specify whether route slips are printed in batch or individually; specify a receipt or a regular printer for route slips; and (optionally) set up routing notices to notify members of a route list when issues are routed to them.

    +

    To print route slips on a receipt printer, the receipt printer must be the default printer for the workstation where staff members do serials check in. If another type of printer is the workstation’s default printer, route slips will be printed on regular 8.5 x 11 inch paper.

    +

    Note:
    The information printed on route slips is defined in the Route List workform, but only the Return by date, the title and designation of the issue, and the list of names appear on the route slip if you use a receipt printer. If you print route slips on 8.5 x 11 sheets of paper, the route list name, owner, return by date, home location, return instructions, and header and footer are printed. SeeCreating Route Lists.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Serials_Claiming.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Serials_Claiming.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68a9b850 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Serials_Claiming.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Serials Claiming + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Serials Claiming

    +

    An issue or part may be claimed if it does not arrive when expected, it arrives damaged, or it is the wrong issue. To work with serials claiming, staff members require permissions for serials records, including supplier records. They also require permissions to claim serial issues and parts, and manage notices. See Serials Workflow Permissions.

    +

    See also:Set up claiming notification

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Subscriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Subscriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa7ce035 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_Subscriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Subscriptions + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Subscriptions

    +

    You do not need to set up subscription records to use Polaris Serials. However, if you create a Subscription Record for each serial title your library has, you can manage your subscriptions (view, renew, cancel) from the Subscriptions List. You also have the option to create purchase orders automatically when a subscription is renewed.

    +

    See also: Set up subscriptions

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Prompt.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Prompt.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ff6d900 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_Up_the_Check_In_Prompt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up the Check In Prompt + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up the Check In Prompt

    +

    The serials parameter Enter unit price at serials check-in controls whether a prompt for the price appears when you check in a serial issue. The default setting is Yes.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_the_Check_In_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_the_Check_In_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59138258 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Setting_the_Check_In_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting the Check In Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting the Check In Display

    +

    You can set the display of issues or parts in the Check In workform so that only issues or parts with a specific status or statuses are displayed when the workform is opened. To see all the issues that have not been received, you can define which statuses are included in the Not Received category.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Specify_the_display_of_issues_on_the_Check_In_workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Specify_the_display_of_issues_on_the_Check_In_workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80564b0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Serials_Admin/PDKserial/Specify_the_display_of_issues_on_the_Check_In_workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Specify the display of issues on the Check In workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify the Display of Issues on the Check In Workform

    +

    To specify how issues are displayed in the Check In workform:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the organization’s folder.
    2. +
    3. Select Parameters and select the Acquisitions/Serials tab.
    4. +
    5. Select Display of issues on Check In.
    6. +
    +

    The Display of Issues on Check In dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the status of issues that you want to display in the Check In workform in the Issue status box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    If you select <Not Received>, you can define which statuses are included in the Not Received category. See step 5.

    +
      +
    1. If you selected Not Received, define which statuses you want to include by selecting one or more check boxes: Claimed, Expected, Never published, Not available, Pending Claim.
    2. +
    3. Click Save to save your changes.
      • If you selected All, the Check In workform displays issues/parts with all statuses.
      • If you selected Not received, the Check In workform displays the issues/parts with the statuses you defined as Not Received.
      • If you selected any other status, the Check In workform displays only the issues/parts with that specific status.
    4. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_disconnect_hang-up_criteria.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_disconnect_hang-up_criteria.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e5e4d9c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_disconnect_hang-up_criteria.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configure disconnect (hang-up) criteria + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configure Disconnect (hang-up) Criteria

    +

    To set the method by which the Phone Attendant determines that a caller has disconnected:

    +

    Important:
    Innovative Interfaces sets the hang-up criteria on-site. Unless your hardware configuration changes, you will not need to change these values. This procedure is for your information.

    +
      +
    1. If necessary, open the Phone Attendant configuration utility. See Configure Hardware Communications.
    2. +
    3. Click Hang-up to display the Hang-up tabbed page.
    4. +
    5. Select a detection method in the Detection type box:
      • Disconnect tone - This is the most precise method. The system determines that the caller has disconnected by a specific tone. If you are unsure which setting is appropriate, select Disconnect tone and use the default settings for Dual tone, Leading edge, Frequency #1, and Frequency #2 in the Disconnect tone settings area of the page.
    6. +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If the default Disconnect tone settings do not work satisfactorily, you can run the Dialogic program PBExpert from the Windows Start menu. The PBExpert wizard tests the system to determine the necessary values. Note the values and enter them in the Disconnect tone settings area of the configuration utility. You must have two lines to run PBExpert because the program “calls itself” to run the test.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Max No Silence - Use this setting if Disconnect tone does not work. The system hangs up after a specified period of detecting no silence (continuous noise). If you choose this option, also specify how long the system should “listen” to continuous noise in the Maximum no silence time box.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    This option may cause repeated hang-ups on patrons calling from locations with a great deal of background noise.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    • Loop Current Drop - (Default). This method detects an actual current drop when the caller hangs up.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to apply your changes and continue working with the configuration utility, or click OK to save your changes and quit working with the utility.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You must stop and restart the Phone Attendant service for your changes to take effect.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_hardware_communications.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_hardware_communications.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44ad5f5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configure_hardware_communications.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configure hardware communications + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configure Hardware Communications

    +

    To designate the phone board, and specify how the Phone Attendant responds to a caller’s key presses:

    +

    Note:
    Innovative Interfaces sets these communication options at installation, and you will probably not need to change them.

    +
      +
    1. On the telephony server, open PhoneAttendantConfig.exe (in C:\Programs\Polaris\[version]\Bin).
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Determine the number of phone boards in your system, and select the number in the Dialogic phone board index box.
    2. +
    +

    Typically, one board controls the phone lines. Some systems use two boards, one for outgoing lines and one for incoming lines. Others use two boards chained together, with lines designated as outgoing or incoming. In this case the configuration functions like one board, and you would select 1 in the phone board index box.

    +
      +
    1. In the Single digit input wait time box, select the number of seconds the system should wait for a single key-press response from the patron before repeating a menu or prompt.
    2. +
    +

    The default value is 10 seconds. This means that when the Phone Attendant presents a menu or prompt to the user that requires a single key-press response, and the user does not press a key within 10 seconds, the Phone Attendant repeats the menu or prompt.

    +
      +
    1. In the Multiple digit input wait time box, select the number of seconds the system should wait for a multiple key-press response (such as a barcode) from the patron before repeating a prompt.
    2. +
    +

    The default value is 30 seconds. This means that when the Phone Attendant presents a prompt to the user that requires a multiple key-press response, and the user does not press a key within 30 seconds, the Phone Attendant repeats the prompt.

    +
      +
    1. In the Number of prompts on no-input before hang-up box, select the number of times the Phone Attendant should repeat a prompt when there is no responding key-press from the user.
    2. +
    +

    The default value is 2. This means that the Phone Attendant prompts the user once and waits the designated time for a response. If there is no response, the Phone Attendant repeats the prompt and waits the designated time for a response. If there is still no response, the Phone Attendant disconnects.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to apply your changes and continue with the utility, or click OK to save your changes and quit working with the utility.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You must stop and restart the Phone Attendant service for your changes to take effect.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configuring_the_Phone_Attendant.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configuring_the_Phone_Attendant.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..358c0571 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Configuring_the_Phone_Attendant.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configuring the Phone Attendant + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configuring the Phone Attendant

    +

    Innovative Interfaces configures the Polaris Phone Attendant for you at installation. You will not need to change most of the settings described in this section unless your telephony hardware changes, or unless you wish to change the options you offer patrons by telephone. Each telephony server can have its own unique settings.

    +

    You use the configuration utility PhoneAttendantConfig.exe (located in C:\Programs\Polaris\[version]\Bin on the telephony server) to set up or change the Phone Attendant configuration. For your changes to be effective, you need sufficient network privileges to stop and start system services.

    +

    Important:
    When you change the Phone Attendant configuration settings, you must stop and restart the service for your changes to take effect.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Phone_Attendant_Overview.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Phone_Attendant_Overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0ef106f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Phone_Attendant_Overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Phone Attendant Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Phone Attendant Overview

    +

    Your library may offer patrons automated telephone services to access their account information and renew items. When a patron calls the designated telephone number and supplies the patron account number and an optional password, she can listen to library hours and any special announcements, and choose from the following activities:

    +
      +
    • Hear an activity summary - Lists the total number of items out, the total number of items overdue, the total number of “open” hold and ILL requests, the total number of currently held items, the total current account charges, and the total current account credit.
    • +
    • Hear a list of all items out - Lists all items out with due dates, and provides options to renew all the items or a specific item, either by selecting a title or entering an item barcode.
    • +
    • Hear a list of overdue items - Lists only overdue items checked out to the patron.
    • +
    • Hear a list of all requests - Lists all the patron’s “open” hold and ILL requests, that is, all requests that are currently filled or may yet be filled, but not requests that are cancelled or unclaimed.
    • +
    • Hear a list of items held - Lists all items currently held for the patron.
    • +
    • Hear an account statement - Summarizes the patron account: total amount owed, total credits, total deposits.
    • +
    +

    Patrons choose options and provide information, such as a barcode, by pressing telephone keys. Patrons can quit the session at any time.

    +

    Note:
    If your library system allows the use of the significant digits (the last unique portion) of a patron barcode, the patron can supply just this part of the barcode. If the unique part of the barcode begins with one or more zeroes, these do not need to be entered. The system supplies the complete barcode, including any leading zeros.

    +

    You can determine which specific telephone features to offer your patrons, and optionally require a password for patron access. Optional messages include an expiration warning for patron accounts due to expire in a specified period, and an additional announcement message that you can add or change at any time.

    +

    Note:
    If the patron registration has already expired, the caller is advised and the call returns to the main menu.

    +

    The audio portion of the Polaris Phone Attendant consists of both computer-generated SAPI (Speech Application Programming Interface) voices that derive their message text from the Polaris database, and message variables that change, such as specific title information. You can edit the text of the SAPI messages, including the greeting message and all menu and response messages. You cannot edit the message variables.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris currently supports English, Spanish, and French inbound telephony. If you have purchased the appropriate license, you can provide a menu choice for English, Spanish, or French and customize the Spanish or French natural-voice messages as well as the English versions. See Editing Messages and Prompts.

    +

    You configure the Polaris Phone Attendant with the configuration utility PhoneAttendantConfig.exe, which is placed in C:\ProgramFiles\Polaris\version\Bin
    when you install Phone Attendant on the telephony server.

    +

    Blocks to Telephone Renewals

    +

    If you offer telephone renewals, the same blocking conditions apply to both telephone-initiated and PAC-initiated renewals. If any of the blocking conditions are in effect when a patron attempts to renew an item by telephone, the system plays a message and the renewal is not allowed. Item blocks as specified by the item’s assigned branch also apply to telephone renewals.

    +

    Note:
    On-the-fly item blocks and “verify patron data” blocks (for example, the block the system creates when a patron self-registers) do not apply to telephone renewals.

    +

    Phone Attendant Log File

    +

    A log file is generated when the Phone Attendant  runs. It is available on the telephony server at the following location:

    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[datalink]\logs\PhoneAttendant +

    +

    Statistical Transaction for Reporting

    +

    When the Phone Attendant receives a call, a Phone Attendant: Call Received statistical transaction is posted to the Polaris Transactions database if you have chosen to log this transaction. For more information about logging transactions and querying the Transactions database, see Logging Transactions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Set_Phone_Attendant_options_for_specific_lines.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Set_Phone_Attendant_options_for_specific_lines.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..727ae2ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Set_Phone_Attendant_options_for_specific_lines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Phone Attendant options for specific lines + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Phone Attendant Options for Specific Lines

    +

    You can add a new line or edit the options for an existing line.To set the options available to patrons who call specific lines in your system:

    +

    Note:
    The Phone Attendant offers patrons various options as menu choices. If you disable an option, the message file still offers the menu choice. When a caller selects the menu choice, the Phone Attendant states (by default) that the library has disabled the feature. If you want to change this message, you can edit the message file and remove the menu text.

    +
      +
    1. If necessary, open the Phone Attendant configuration utility. See Configure Hardware Communications.
    2. +
    3. Click Phone Lines to display the Phone Lines tabbed page.
    4. +
    5. Add a new line, or edit the settings for an existing line:
      • To add a new line, click Add New Phone Line.
      • To edit an existing line, select the line in the Line Number box, and click View.
    6. +
    +

    The Phone Lines Configuration dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    1. Select the phone line you are adding or editing in the Line Number box.
    2. +
    +

    Important:
    If your system uses outbound (notification) telephony, be sure you are not specifying a line used for outgoing calls. Outgoing lines are set in Polaris Administration. See Set General Telephone Notification Parameters.

    +
      +
    1. Select an organization ID in the Organization ID box.
    2. +
    +

    This setting allows you to set up organization-specific options and messages for a specific phone line. The default is 1, which identifies the library system organization.

    +

    Note:
    You can view organization ID values in Polaris Administration. In the Administration Explorer, right-click an organization and select Properties from the context menu. Select the About tab on the Properties dialog box. Polaris system ID number identifies the organization ID.

    +
      +
    1. Specify the log-in settings for this phone line:
    2. +
    +

    After the patron has entered the account barcode, the system transforms the password from the patron record into a number string and then matches the string to the patron’s password input. If the patron presses 2, for example, the system accepts the keypress as representing 2, a, b, or c. Any special characters in the password, including # or *, are mapped to 0, so the patron must press 0 for these characters.

    +
    +
      +
    • Max Login Attempts - Select the number of times a patron can attempt to log in before the Phone Attendant disconnects.
    • +
    • Password Required - Select (check) this box if you want to require a patron account password to log in, in addition to the patron barcode (which is always required).
    • +
    • If you have checked Password Required, and want to allow alpha-numeric passwords, select (check) Support alpha-numeric passwords.
    • +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    Setting inbound telephony to recognize alpha-numeric passwords weakens password strength, because several letters or characters can map to the same number.

    +
    +
    +

    When this option is set, the Phone Attendant plays a prompt after the patron enters the barcode. The default message is Please enter your password using the number key appropriate to the letter. Press 0 for all special characters. You can edit the message in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). The Inbound Telephony string ID is PA_MENU_LOGIN_ALPHA_NUMERIC_PASSWORD.

    +
    +
    +

    Important:
    If you will require patron passwords for Phone Attendant log-in but do not allow alpha-numeric passwords, you must restrict patron passwords to numeric format only.

    +
    +
      +
    1. If you want the service to detect a registration that is due to expire, and warn the patron at log-in, do these steps:
      1. Select (check) the Expiration Warning Enabled box.
      2. In the Expiration Warning Days box, select the number of days before expiration that triggers the warning.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    The Expiration Warning Days value is set to 14. The Phone Attendant delivers the expiration warning message to any patron who successfully logs in, and whose patron account is due to expire within the 14-day time period.

    +
      +
    1. Specify how you want circulation transactions (renewals) to be logged for this line:
      1. Select or type the Polaris user ID in the Trn User ID box.
      2. Select or type the Polaris workstation ID in the Trn Workstation ID box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You can view user and workstation ID values in Polaris Administration. Search for the user or workstation with the Find Tool, and right-click the user or workstation in the results list. Select Properties from the context menu. The About tab on the Properties dialog box displays the ID.

    +
      +
    1. If you want this line to allow patrons to hear a list of items they have currently checked out, with options to renew, select (check) List Items Out Enabled.
    2. +
    +

    When List Items Out Enabled is checked, patrons are offered the option of renewing all the items, or renewing single items by pressing a key as the title of the item is read. You can have the Phone Attendant include the author, material type, and the item’s assigned branch for each item in the list by checking these options. If you do not check these options, the Phone Attendant simply lists the titles and renewal options.

    +

    Note:
    The activity summary menu option is always available. When a patron selects this option, she hears the total number of items out, the total number of items overdue, the total number of “open” hold and ILL requests, the total number of currently held items, the total current account charges, and the total current account credit.

    +
      +
    1. If you want this line to allow patrons to renew an item by entering the item’s barcode, select (check) Renew Single Item Enabled.
    2. +
    3. If you want this line to allow patrons to hear a list of current holds and ILL requests, select (check) List Requests Enabled.
    4. +
    +

    Hold requests with a status of Inactive, Active/Pending, Shipped, or Not-supplied are included. ILL requests with a status of Inactive, Active, or Received are also included. The list includes the title, request date, and request status for each request.

    +
      +
    1. If you want this line to allow patrons to hear a list of currently overdue items, select (check) List Overdue Items Enabled.
    2. +
    +

    If you select this option, you can have the Phone Attendant include the author, material type, and the item’s assigned branch for each item in the list by checking these options. If you do not check these options, the Phone Attendant simply lists the titles of the overdue items with their due dates.

    +
      +
    1. If you want this line to allow patrons to hear a list of requests currently available for pick-up, select (check) List Held Items Enabled.
    2. +
    +

    The list includes the title, the pick-up branch, and the unclaimed date (“held until”) for each item.

    +
      +
    1. If you want this line to allow patrons to hear a detailed account statement, select (check) Account Statement Enabled.
    2. +
    +

    The statement includes any outstanding amounts in the Charges, Deposits, and Credits fields of the patron account.

    +
      +
    1.  If you want this line to allow patrons to estimate fines on overdue items, select (check) Estimate Fines Enabled.
    2. +
    +

    When the patron selects this option, the message includes the author, title, due date, and estimated amount for each item, and the total due. (If the patron does not have any overdue or claimed items, the option is not available.) If the patron has lost or claimed items and overdue items, an additional message states Additional charges are due for lost or claimed items, please contact the library for more information. If the patron has only lost or claimed items but no overdue items, only the Additional charges message is played. If the patron has only lost or claimed items but no overdue items, only the Additional charges message is played.

    +
      +
    1. Type the path for this line’s message .wav files in the Wave Path box, if different from the default location.
    2. +
    +

    The default location for the .wav files is C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[VersionNumber]\[DataLinkName]\WaveFiles\Inbound

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Setting_Up_Inbound_Telephony.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Setting_Up_Inbound_Telephony.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..540fdcaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Setting_Up_Inbound_Telephony.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Up Inbound Telephony + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Inbound Telephony

    +

    Your Polaris system may include the Polaris Phone Attendant for inbound telephony, which allows patrons to call specified telephone lines to hear library and account information, and renew items by telephone. This unit includes information about installing, configuring, and customizing the Polaris Phone Attendant.

    Note:
    The Polaris Phone Attendant is available by specific contract to your library. If your Polaris installation does not include the Phone Attendant, the features described in this unit are not available.

    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Specify_language_voice_speech_rate_and_volume.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Specify_language_voice_speech_rate_and_volume.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..498e98c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTInboundTel/Specify_language_voice_speech_rate_and_volume.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Specify language, voice, speech rate, and volume + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Specify Language, Voice, Speech Rate, and Volume

    +

    To select a natural voice for Phone Attendant messages, and to set the speech rate and volume of the natural voice messages:

    +
      +
    1. If necessary, open the Phone Attendant configuration utility. See Configure Hardware Communications.
    2. +
    3. Click Phone Voice to display the Phone Voice tabbed page.
    4. +
    5. If you have purchased a multilingual license, select the language in the Language box.
    6. +
    7. To work with the selected language, select one of these options.
      • To add a new voice, click Add New Phone Voice.
      • To edit existing settings, click View.
    8. +
    +

    The Phone Voice Configuration dialog box opens.

    +
      +
    1. Select the language for which you are setting up the voice.
    2. +
    +

    If this language will be the organization’s default message language, select Default.

    +
      +
    1. Select the organization in the Organization ID box that should use these settings.
    2. +
    +

    The default setting is 1, which identifies the system organization.

    +

    Note:
    You can view organization ID values in Polaris Administration. In the Administration Explorer, right-click an organization and select Properties from the context menu. Select the About tab on the Properties dialog box. Polaris system ID number identifies the organization ID.

    +
      +
    1. Select a menu option for this language.
    2. +
    +

    The default setting is 1. The setting of 1 controls which language is used when the user presses 1 in accordance with the default instructions contained in the message PA_LANGUAGE_MENU_OPTION: “press 1 for English, press 2 for Spanish.”

    +

    Note:
    If you have selected Español in the Language box and leave the default Menu Option setting at 1, the user will hear Spanish messages when 1 is pressed. You can edit PA_LANGUAGE_MENU to say “Press 1 for Spanish, press 2 for English.” See Editing Messages and Prompts.

    +
      +
    1. Select a voice in the Voice box.
    2. +
    +

    You are selecting a specific voice for your messages, represented by an index number. Innovative Interfaces supplies several AT&T SAPI (Speech Application Programming Interface) voices, and you may add your own. The index number is server workstation-specific. The Voice box shows the index number and the name of the voice.

    +
      +
    1. Set the rate of speech in the Rate box.
    2. +
    +

    The settings represent a relative rate. The default value (-1) is somewhat slower than normal speech. Settings of 0 and higher set more rapid rates.

    +

    Note:
    Each increment in the Rate box causes a noticeable change in the speech rate. You may want to change this setting only one increment at a time, and test before you make further changes.

    +
      +
    1. Set the speech volume in the Volume box.
    2. +
    +

    The default (100) represents an average volume.

    +
      +
    1. Click Apply to apply your changes and continue working with the configuration utility, or click OK to save your changes and quit working with the utility.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    You must stop and restart the Phone Attendant service for your changes to take effect.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Add_a_no-call_date.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Add_a_no-call_date.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef5e5c6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Add_a_no-call_date.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add a no-call date + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add a No-Call Date

    +

    Entries in the Dates Not to Call notification table define the specific dates the phone notification server does not call patrons, such as Christmas and New Year’s Day.

    +

    To add a no-call date to the table:

    +

    Note:
    These System Administration permissions are required to work with this table: Access administration: Allow, Access tables: Allow, Modify notification dates not to call table: Allow.

    +

    Tip:
    Notification tables are displayed from the Administration Explorer only, at the system level. You cannot access this table from an organization workform.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, open the Notification Tables folder for the system, and select Notification Dates Not to Call
    2. +
    +

    The Dates Not to Call table is displayed in the details view.

    +
      +
    1. Click nAddNCDbtn.gif to display the Insert Notification Dates Not to Call dialog box.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Organization box, select the library for which the date applies.
    2. +
    3. Set Date Not to Call using one of the following methods:
      • Click the calendar icon to open the calendar control, and select the new date from the calendar.
      • Type the date using the same date format shown in the box.
    4. +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK on the dialog box.
    2. +
    +

    The Notification Dates Not to Call table appears with the new date. The status bar indicates that the modification is pending.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    The status bar indicates that the record is saved.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Modify a table entry - Select the entry and click btnUpdate.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a table entry - Select the entry and click btnDelete.gif.
    • +
    • Set times not to call - See Set Dialing Hours.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Delivering_Notices_by_Phone_Outbound_Telephony.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Delivering_Notices_by_Phone_Outbound_Telephony.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..04d7d615 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Delivering_Notices_by_Phone_Outbound_Telephony.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Up Outbound Telephony for Phone Notification

    +

    If you have Polaris outbound telephony software and equipment, you can deliver overdue, request, canceled request, and serials claim notices by phone. (Bills, fine notices, and serials routing notices cannot be delivered by telephone.) You can specify which notices should be delivered by phone at the system, library, or branch level.

    +

    Polaris telephony software identifies notices due to be delivered by telephone in the notification queue, retrieves the appropriate patron telephone number, and dials the number. The system recognizes error tones, a live answer, and an answering machine. If the answer is live, the software plays the message and menu options. If an answering machine responds, the software does not play the menu options but leaves a message.

    +

    You set up general characteristics of phone notification at the telephony server level. Among other characteristics, you can specify dialing hours that are convenient for patrons, and set dates when patrons should not be called at all. Your system may use one telephony server or multiple servers (typical of a large consortium). If you use multiple telephony servers, the settings can be different for each server.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris works in a VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) environment when you use a compatible POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service, that is, standard voice-grade telephone service) analog adapter. The analog adaptor is connected to to the VoIP system (typically via TCP/IP) and provides standard POTS lines for the Polaris telephony server as required. You will typically need an analog adapter for each phone extension that the telephony server uses.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Outbound_Telephony_Reports_and_Trouble-Shooting.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Outbound_Telephony_Reports_and_Trouble-Shooting.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c865a8ab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Outbound_Telephony_Reports_and_Trouble-Shooting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,299 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outbound Telephony Reports and Trouble-Shooting + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outbound Telephony Reports and Trouble-Shooting

    +

    Polaris provides the following reports to help you trouble-shoot problems. Select Utilities, Reports and Notices, Notices to access these reports:

    +
      +
    • Telephony Delivery Failure Report - Lists failed telephone notices with their failure reasons. You can filter this report by date and patron’s branch. It includes the patron’s barcode, patron’s branch, patron’s name and telephone number, the failure reason, and the failure date.
    • +
    • Telephony Summary Report - Summarizes the number of calls made for each notice with their statuses, including failure reasons, in a specified date range. The report is organized by patron branch.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Inspect this report regularly. In this report, Unknown connection type indicates that a busy signal was received. A sudden spike in the number of busy signals received may indicate telephony board problems.

    +

    Log File

    +

    A complete log file is generated when telephone notices are run. It is available on the telephony server at the following default location:

    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[datalink]\logs\PhoneNotification +

    +

    The log file is generated in  .csv format to facilitate importing the file into Excel or other tools where entries can be sorted.

    +

    The following fields are recorded:

    +

    Note:
    Each time the service is started, a comment line describes the fields.

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    FieldDescription
    +

    Date

    +
    +

    YYYY-MM-DD

    +
    +

    Time

    +
    +

    HH:mm:ss.fff. 24 hour format

    +
    +

    Type

    +
    +

    EVENTLOG_INFORMATION_TYPE - 4

    +

    EVENTLOG_ERROR_TYPE - 1

    +
    +

    EventID

    +
    +

    EVMSG_DEBUG - 101

    +

    EVMSG_GENERAL - 100

    +
    +

    State

    +
    +

    SERVICE_INITIALIZING = 1

    +

    SERVICE_TERMINATING = 2

    +

    SERVICE_CMDPROCESSING = 3

    +

    LINE_INITIALIZING = 4

    +

    LINE_TERMINATING = 5

    +

    QUEUEING = 6

    +

    PREPARING = 7

    +

    CONNECTING = 8

    +

    DISCONNECTING = 9

    +

    NOTIFYING = 10

    +

    POSTING = 11

    +

    WAITING = 12

    +
    +

    Line #

    +
    +

    Dialogic phone line number

    +
    +

    Patron ID

    +
    +

    Patron ID

    +
    +

    Phone Number

    +
    +

    Calling phone number

    +
    +

    Comment

    +
    +

    Details/Message. This field is wrapped with quotes.

    +
    +

    Termination Types 

    +

    The Polaris Phone Notification Service uses the Dialogic Call Progress Analysis (CPA) feature for identifying signals such as fax detection, dial tone, busy signals, voice, answering machine, and so forth. The Polaris Phone Notification service dials a patron’s phone number and the Dialogic CPA feature analyzes the call. Termination types identified by CPA are reflected in the Phone Notification log as the CPAResult. They include the following codes:

    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    CR_BUSY

    +
    +

    7

    +
    +

    /* Line busy */

    +
    +

    CR_NOANS

    +
    +

    8

    +
    +

    /* No answer */

    +
    +

    CR_NORB

    +
    +

    9

    +
    +

    /* No ringback */

    +
    +

    CR_CNCT

    +
    +

    10

    +
    +

    /* Call connected */

    +
    +

    CR_CEPT

    +
    +

    11

    +
    +

    /* Operator intercept */

    +
    +

    CR_STOPD

    +
    +

    12

    +
    +

    /* Call analysis stopped */

    +
    +

    CR_NODIALTONE

    +
    +

    17

    +
    +

    /* No dialtone detected */

    +
    +

    CR_FAXTONE

    +
    +

    18

    +
    +

    /* Fax tone detected */

    +
    +

    CR_ERROR

    +
    +

    0x100

    +
    +

    /* Call analysis error */

    +
    +

     

    +

    CPAReason provides additional details for CPAResult, and is typically one of the following:

    +
      +
    • 0 - No additional details
    • +
    • 1 - CON_CAD - Cadence Break
    • +
    • 2 - CON_LPC - Loop Drop
    • +
    • 3 - CON_PVD - Positive Voice
    • +
    • 4 - CON_PAMD - Positive Answering Machine
    • +
    +

    Consecutive Failed Calls

    +

    A number of consecutive failed calls may indicate a phone line problem. After five (default) consecutive failed phone calls, the service resets the Dialogic channel.  If a phone call is successful after resetting the channel, the count restarts. However, if after resetting the channel another five consecutive calls fail, the specific phone line is shut down to prevent any further incorrect call statuses. An e-mail message is then sent to the address specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender, using the e-mail server specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service.

    +

    Note:
    You can change the default setting of five calls using the registry key on the telephony server:
    Key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE System\CurrentControlSet\Services\Polaris Phone Notification\Parameters
    String Value: FailedCalls

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_SAPI_voice_parameters_for_outbound_telephony.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_SAPI_voice_parameters_for_outbound_telephony.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..25c5cbe9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_SAPI_voice_parameters_for_outbound_telephony.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set SAPI voice parameters for outbound telephony + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set SAPI Voice Parameters for Outbound Telephony

    +

    If you choose to use computer-generated SAPI voices for outbound telephony messages, you can set the voice parameters.

    +

    To specify a voice and adjust speaking rate and volume:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the telephony server and select Telephony under the server name.
    2. +
    +

    + TelServerSel00570.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the Outbound tab in the details view. The Outbound parameters appear in a list.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Scroll down in the list to SAPI settings.
    2. +
    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Double-click SAPI settings.
    2. +
    +

    The SAPI Settings dialog box opens.

    +

    + SAPISettingsDX.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Select a language from the list of languages licensed for your server.
    2. +
    +

    The settings boxes at the bottom of the dialog box become available for use.

    +
      +
    1.  In the Index settings box, select a voice index number.
    2. +
    +

    Tip:
    If you have a license for Polaris Phone Attendant (inbound telephony), and inbound and outbound telephony are on the same server, you can use the inbound telephony utility PhoneAttendantConfig.exe to identify the voice by index number. To be sure you are viewing the indexes in the correct order, use the Runas command line option to run PhoneAttendantConfig.exe as PolarisServices (the account that telephony services run under). See Specify Language, Voice, Speech Rate, and Volume.

    +

    You are selecting a specific voice for your messages, represented by an index number. Innovative Interfaces supplies several AT&T SAPI voices, and you may add your own. The index number is server workstation-specific and depends on the order in which the voices were installed, as well as any voices included with your operating system. You can select voices and test them on the system to determine if they are appropriate.

    +
      +
    1. In the Rate settings box, set the rate of speech.
    2. +
    +

    The settings represent a relative rate. Negative values (-1) are somewhat slower than normal speech. Settings of 0 and higher set more rapid rates. The default value is 0.

    +

    Note:
    Each increment in the Rate box causes a noticeable change in the speech rate. You may want to change this setting only one increment at a time, and test before you make further changes.

    +
      +
    1.  In the Volume settings box, set speech volume.
    2. +
    +

    The default (100) represents an average volume.

    +
      +
    1. Repeat steps 4-7 for each licensed language.
    2. +
    3. Click OK.
    4. +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_dialing_hours.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_dialing_hours.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9fc01fad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_dialing_hours.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set dialing hours + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Dialing Hours

    +

    You can set your calling times to avoid times when calls might annoy your patrons. You can also set dialing hours to times when someone at the library is available to answer questions from patrons after they receive their phone notification. Dialing hour settings also control whether calls are made on a particular day of the week. For example, if your library is closed on Sundays, you can prevent the notification server from making calls on Sundays. To limit the hours during which the notification server dials phone numbers.

    +

    Note:
    To prevent calls on specific dates, see Add a No-Call Date. If a Date Not to Call entry (from the Notification Dates Not to Call table) falls on a Monday, the start and end times for Monday are ignored for that specific do-not-call date.

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the telephony server and select Telephony under the server name.
    2. +
    +

    + TelServerSel00568.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the Outbound tab in the details view.
    2. +
    +

    + TelOutboundTab00569.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Double-click the start dialing time parameter for the day of the week you want to set.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    To open the start dialing time parameter for Monday, double-click Phone notification - Monday start time. You can also open the parameter by selecting the parameter and pressing ENTER.

    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following methods to set the time you want the notification server to begin calling patrons:
      • To type a new time, highlight the current time and type the new time using the format h:mm AM (morning) or h:mm PM (afternoon).
      • To adjust the time in one-minute increments, click the up or down arrow on the right side of the box. You can also press the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.
    2. +
    3. Double-click the stop dialing time parameter for the day of week you want to set.
    4. +
    +

    Example: 
    To open the stop dialing time parameter for Monday, double-click Phone notification - Monday end time. You can also open the parameter by selecting the parameter and pressing ENTER.

    +
      +
    1. Use one of the following options to set the time you want the notification server to stop calling patrons:
      • To type a new time, highlight the current time and type the new time using the format h:mm AM (morning) or h:mm PM (afternoon).
      • To adjust the time in one-minute increments, click the up or down arrow on the right side of the box. You can also press the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    To set a dialing parameter so that the notification server does not call anyone on a particular day of the week, set the end and start times for that day to exactly the same time. For example, to disable calls on Sundays, set Phone notification - Sunday start time to 12:00PM and set Phone notification - Sunday end time to 12:00PM.

    +
      +
    1. Close the parameter by doing one of the following actions:
      • Press ENTER.
      • Highlight or open another parameter.
    2. +
    3. Repeat steps 2–6 for each day of the week.
    4. +
    5. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    6. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_general_telephone_notification_parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_general_telephone_notification_parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..73e041d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Set_general_telephone_notification_parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set general telephone notification parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set General Telephone Notification Parameters

    +

    After you have set up the telephony server or servers in Polaris Administration, set the general telephony server parameters for each telephony server as follows:

    +
      +
    1. In the Administration Explorer tree view, expand the telephony server and select Telephony under the server name. The telephony parameters appear in the details view with the General and Outbound tabs.
    2. +
    +

    + TelServerSel.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click the Outbound tab in the details view. The Outbound parameters appear.
    2. +
    +

    + TelOutboundTab.gif 

    +
      +
    1. If you have multiple telephony servers, assign branches to this particular server by following these steps:
      1. Double-click Branch assignment.
    2. +
    +

    The Branch Assignment dialog box opens. The dialog box shows the current telephony server and the list of organizations that can be assigned to the server, with their current assignments (if any).

    +

    + BranchAssignDX.gif 

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the branches that should be assigned to this server.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    The list refers to the registered branches of the patrons in the notification queue. In systems with multiple telephony servers, you can assign specific branches to a particular server to minimize long distance calls.

    +
    +
    +

    Example:
    A large library system has two telephony servers, one located in the western portion of the district and the other in the eastern portion. The library assigns the branches that serve the western patrons to the western server, so calls going out from that server will tend to be local rather than long distance calls.

    +
    +
    +

    The branches you have changed are marked with an asterisk * until you save the assignments.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click OK to save your assignments.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Note:
    If phone notification is chosen for overdue notices, hold request notices, hold cancellation notices, or serials claim notices, but the reporting branch is not assigned to a telephony server, the notices are printed.

    +
    +
      +
    1. For Phone notification - Allow long distance, indicate whether the telephony server can dial toll-charged (long distance) calls:
      • Select Yes to allow long-distance calls.
      • Select No to prevent phone calls from being made to patrons whose phone numbers start with 1. Instead, a paper notice is printed automatically.
    2. +
    3. If you want phone notification to strip a local area code from the telephone number, set these parameters:
      • Phone notification - local area code - Identifies the area code local to the telephony server. Specify the three-digit area code with this parameter.
      • Phone notification - Remove local area code before dialing - Set to Yes to strip the specified area code from the phone number.
    4. +
    +

    When these two parameters are set, the following elements are removed from the start of the patron’s telephone number before dialing: [area code], 1[area code], and 1,[areacode].

    +

    Note:
    If you have more than one local area code, you must remove the local area codes from the patron registration records in the database.

    +
      +
    1. In the Phone notification – Number of attempts box, type how many times the telephony server should try to call a phone number that has been unsuccessful (busy signal or no answer).
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. In the Phone notification – Minimum wait after attempt box, type the number of minutes to wait after an unsuccessful call (busy signal or no answer) before dialing the same number again.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    In setting Phone notification – Minimum wait after attempt and Phone notification – Number of attempts, consider your total volume of calls. If you have a low volume of calls, you set a short wait time, and set a large number of attempts, the same phone number might be called repeatedly in one day. If you have a large volume of calls, the attempts might be made over the course of two or three days even though the parameter settings are the same.

    +
      +
    1. In the box for Phone notification - Time required for voice call to be considered complete, type the minimum number of seconds a call should run for the notice be considered delivered.
    2. +
    3. In the Phone notification – Outside line call prefix box, type the number (if any) needed to access a phone line before the phone number is dialed.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    For the Outside line call prefix and Outside line long distance call prefix, an L tells the Dialogic® card to wait for a local dial tone before proceeding. A comma indicates a 2-second pause for the Dialogic card.

    +
      +
    1. In the Phone notification – Outside line long distance prefix box, type the number (if any) needed to access a phone line for a long-distance call before the phone number is dialed. If your phone system does not use a separate outside line for long-distance  calls, you do not need to set this parameter.
    2. +
    +

    Note:
    This prefix is specific to your library telephone system. It is not the same as the prefix to a telephone number that indicates a long-distance call (see step 3).

    +
      +
    1. In the Phone notification lines (array) box, type which lines on the Dialogic board to use to make the calls.
    2. +
    +

    Example:
    Type 1,3,4 to use lines 1, 3, and 4.

    +

    Important:
    If your system also includes inbound telephony, be sure you are not specifying a line used for incoming calls. Incoming lines are set in the Phone Attendant configuration utility. See Set Phone Attendant Options for Specific Lines.

    +
      +
    1. Set the Phone notification: Max number of overdue notices to the number of times a patron should be called regarding the same overdue items.
    2. +
    3. To include the patron’s name in the notice greeting, set Phone notification - Use patron name in greeting to Yes.
    4. +
    5. To provide optional details in overdue notices, set the following parameters:
      • Overdues: Allow patron to list overdue titles - Set this parameter to Yes to provide a menu option for the patron to hear a list of the overdue titles.
      • Overdues: Include material type when listing overdue titles - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, you can set this parameter to Yes to list each item’s material type.
      • Overdues: Include branch when listing overdue titles - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, you can set this parameter to Yes to list each item’s assigned branch.
      • Overdues: Maximum number of overdue titles to list - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, use this parameter to limit the number of titles the system will list.
    6. +
    +
      +
    1. To provide optional details in hold notices, set the following parameters:
      • Holds: Allow patron to list held titles - Set this parameter to Yes to provide a menu option for the patron to hear a list of the held titles ready to be picked up.
      • Holds: Include material type when listing held titles - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, you can set this parameter to Yes to list each item’s material type.
      • Holds: Maximum number of held titles to list - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, use this parameter to limit the number of titles the system will list.
    2. +
    3. To provide optional details in cancelled hold notices, set the following parameters:
      • Cancels: Allow patron to list canceled titles - Set this parameter to Yes to provide a menu option for the patron to hear a list of the cancelled requests.
      • Cancels: Include material type when listing canceled titles - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, you can set this parameter to Yes to list each item’s material type.
      • Cancels: Maximum number of canceled titles to list - If you provide patrons the menu option to hear specific titles, use this parameter to limit the number of titles the system will list.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    For details about the circumstances that may cause a request status to change to Cancelled,

    +
      +
    1. Click the General tab in the details view of the Explorer.
    2. +
    +
      +
    1. Double-click Organization designation for message content, and select the branch whose messages should be used for this server.
    2. +
    +

    Messages are branch-specific. Of the branches assigned to this server, only one branch’s messages can be used for telephone notification. For more information about customizing telephony messages, see Customizing Telephony Messages.

    +
      +
    1. Select File | Save to save your changes.
    2. +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Setting_Outbound_Telephony_Parameters.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Setting_Outbound_Telephony_Parameters.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a43d7654 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Setting_Outbound_Telephony_Parameters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Setting Outbound Telephony Parameters + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Setting Outbound Telephony Parameters

    +

    Do the following tasks to set up telephone notification:

    +
      +
    • Install Polaris Phone Notification software on the telephony server or servers. This option is part of the Polaris server installation. See the Polaris Installation Guide for details, or contact your Polaris Site Manager. During this installation, you decide whether to use human voice messages or computer-generated voice messages. See Voices for Outbound Telephony.
    • +
    • Set up the telephony server or servers in Polaris Administration. 
    • +
    • Activate telephone notification as a delivery option, and specify the types of notices to deliver by telephone.
    • +
    • Set the telephony server parameters. These specify whether long distance calls are allowed, ports for outgoing lines, and other characteristics of the system. See Set General Telephone Notification Parameters.
    • +
    • Set the dates when patrons should not be called. See Add a No-Call Date.
    • +
    • Set the dialing hours for the notification server to place calls. See Set Dialing Hours.
    • +
    • If you will use computer-generated voices, select and adjust the voices. See Set SAPI Voice Parameters for Outbound Telephony.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Voices_for_Outbound_Telephony.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Voices_for_Outbound_Telephony.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9a61bb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTOutboundTel/Voices_for_Outbound_Telephony.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Voices for Outbound Telephony + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Voices for Outbound Telephony

    +

    You can choose to use human-voice .wav files for outbound telephony messages, or computer-generated SAPI (Speech Application Programming Interface) voice .wav files that derive their message text directly from the Polaris database.

    +

    Human Voice Messages

    +

    If you want to use human-voice messages, you can use the default set of .wav files that Polaris provides or you can record your own. When you install telephony software on the telephony server, you indicate your preference for using human voice files. The .wav files are stored in the following location on the telephony server:

    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[datalink]WaveFiles\Outbound\
    [language folder]
    +

    +

    where [language folder] is a number that corresponds to a specific language:

    +
      +
    • English - 1033
    • +
    • Spanish - 3082
    • +
    • French - 3084
    • +
    +

    If you use multi-lingual notification, there is a set of .wav files for each licensed language in the appropriate language folder.

    +

    Note:
    When you use human voice recordings for the static portions of your messages, the system still uses text-to-speech technology for message content that changes, such as specific title information or hold pickup locations.

    +

    If you record your own .wav files, name them exactly as they are named in the existing language folders and place them in the appropriate language folders, overwriting the default set. Polaris Telephony Voice Recorder, a utility for recording telephony .wav files, is available for conveniently recording .wav files.

    +

    Important:
    Back up your custom .wav files in a safe location. Although they are not overwritten if the telephony service is stopped and restarted, they are not protected if the server software must be reinstalled.

    +

    SAPI Voice Messages

    +

    When you use computer-generated SAPI voice messages, the system converts message text stored in the Polaris database to speech. You may prefer to use SAPI voice messages because you can customize the stored message text with the Polaris Language Editor. You do not need to record new .wav files to customize messages. For details, see Edit a SAPI Voice Message with Polaris Language Editor.

    +

    When you install telephony software on the telephony server, you do not select the human voice file option. Instead, the system creates the file structure described in Human Voice Messages, but no .wav files are included. When the service is run for the first time, or when the service is restarted, the message text in the Polaris database is converted to audible speech and stored in new .wav files, one .wav file per message. The .wav files are cached in the appropriate folders to reduce processing time for all calls after the first one. If you edit a message, you must delete the associated .wav file for the message before you restart the outbound telephony service. The .wav file is located in C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[datalink]WaveFiles\Outbound\[language folder]. The edited message is converted to a new .wav file when the service restarts.

    +

    You select SAPI voices and adjust volume and rate with telephony parameters. See Set SAPI Voice Parameters for Outbound Telephony.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Adjusting_Pronunciation.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Adjusting_Pronunciation.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d86a966 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Adjusting_Pronunciation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adjusting Pronunciation + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Adjusting Pronunciation

    +

    Polaris telephony includes the TTS (Text-to-Speech) Lexicon Editor that you can use to modify the pronunciation of certain words (for example, branch or place names) when the message text is converted to SAPI voice messages. You select sounds for a word from a standard list of English phonemes (speech sounds), and the pronunciation is stored in the SAPI Lexicon, a database for the words and their pronunciations. You can test the pronunciation as you work in the Lexicon Editor.

    +

    Tip:
    For words that are part of standard messages, you may find that editing the word with the Polaris Language Editor is a simpler way to adjust pronunciation. Find the word and spell it in a way that most closely resembles how you want it to be pronounced. See Edit a SAPI Voice Message with Polaris Language Editor.

    +

    The TTS Lexicon Editor is included in the Polaris telephony server installation. However, because each user log-on has its own Lexicon database, and because the workstation needs a sound card to test pronunciation adjustments, you cannot use Remote Desktop to connect to the telephony server and work with the Lexicon Editor there. You must log on locally to a workstation with a sound card and speakers to test the pronunciation, then use Remote Desktop to connect to the telephony server and copy your changes. For the most accurate test, the workstation should have available the SAPI voice actually used in the message. To make this process more convenient, you can now select the TTS Lexicon Editor as part of the staff client installation, then install the appropriate AT&T SAPI voice on the workstation.

    +

    See: Install and Use the TTS Lexicon Editor

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Customizing_Telephony_Messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Customizing_Telephony_Messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa6d1d20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Customizing_Telephony_Messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Customizing Telephony Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customizing Telephony Messages

    +

    If you use computer-generated SAPI voice messages for outbound or inbound telephony, the system converts message text stored in the Polaris database to speech. You can customize the stored message text with the Polaris Language Editor, and the system automatically generates new .wav files for the customized messages. You can also adjust the pronunciation of individual words for each SAPI voice you use.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Edit_a_SAPI_voice_message_with_Polaris_Language_Editor.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Edit_a_SAPI_voice_message_with_Polaris_Language_Editor.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae604652 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Edit_a_SAPI_voice_message_with_Polaris_Language_Editor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit a SAPI voice message with Polaris Language Editor + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit a SAPI Voice Message with Polaris Language Editor

    +

    The following steps summarize how to edit a SAPI voice message for inbound or outbound telephony. For more information about using the Language Editor, click the Help tab in the Language Editor.

    +

    Note:
    You need the Polaris permission WebAdmin access: Allow to use the Language Editor.

    +
      +
    1. Open your Web browser and navigate to the Language Editor site on your server.
    2. +
    +

    The Log On page opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type your name, password, and domain name, and click OK.
    2. +
    +

    The Language Editor opens and the Edit page is displayed.

    +
      +
    1. In the Product box, select Inbound Telephony or Outbound Telephony as appropriate.
    2. +
    3. Select the organization for which you are making the modification.
    4. +
    +

    Note:
    For outbound telephony where there are multiple telephony servers, one organization’s set of messages must be specified for use by each server. See Set General Telephone Notification Parameters.

    +

    For inbound telephony, if each phone line is associated with a different organization, and each organization offers different options and custom messages such as announcements, each organization has its own messages and associated .wav files. The path and URL for each organization’s files are specified in the configuration utility. See Set Phone Attendant Options for Specific Lines.

    +
      +
    1. Select languages to compare and edit in the Language 1 and Language 2 boxes.
    2. +
    +

    Only languages that are licensed are available for selection. Select two languages (for example, English and Spanish) to compare the equivalent message strings side-by-side. If you want to edit only one language, for example English, set both languages to English - United States.

    +
      +
    1. (Optional) To limit the language strings that will be displayed, select one of the following options:
      • Specific string ID - Each language string is identified by a unique identification code. If you want to display a specific language string and you know the code, enter it here.
      • String contains - You can display language strings that contain specific text. Enter the text here.
      • Only show customized language strings - Check this box to limit the list to strings that have already been customized.
    2. +
    3. Click Load Strings.
    4. +
    +

    The strings are displayed in a table with the first language on the left and the equivalent string in the second language on the right.  The string ID is displayed above each string for both languages. If you have set both languages to the same choice, the table shows only one language. Click Previous Page and Next Page to navigate through the results.

    +
      +
    1. Click WAEditIcon.gif to edit a string.
    2. +
    +

    The custom box for the string opens.

    +
      +
    1. Type your custom text in the Custom box, and click WASaveIcon.gif to save your changes. (You can click WARestoreIcon.gif to restore the default value.)
    2. +
    +

    After you save your custom text, the string is labeled Custom: and the custom text is displayed in a different color. You can click WAEditIcon00572.gif to open the custom box again, or click WARestoreIcon00573.gif to restore the default value.

    +

    Tip:
    You can edit the Phone Attendant’s library hours and announcements as you would any other messages. The library hours message name is PA_TEXT_LIBRARYHOURS. The message name for announcements is PA_TEXT_ANNOUNCEMENTS.

    +

    Important:
    Do not edit the name of the message or (for Phone Attendant) the menu option numbers. Also, do not edit circulation variables. You can identify these by the $% signs that precede them. For example, in the message PA_TEXT_PATREC_ACCOUNTSTATEMENT_CHARGES
    You have outstanding charges of $%3.2f
    the actual amount of charges is drawn directly from the patron record, and is represented by the variable $%3.2f. You can edit any other text in the message.

    +

    + WAVariable.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Click Log Off to end the current session.
    2. +
    3. Stop telephony services.
    4. +
    5. Open the appropriate .wav file folder, which contains the converted text messages.
    6. +
    +

    The default location for outbound telephony is:

    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[datalink]\WaveFiles\Outbound\
    [language folder]\Cache
    +

    +

    The default location for inbound telephony is:

    +

    C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\[datalink]\WaveFiles\Inbound\
    [language folder]\Cache
    +

    +

    where [version] is your Polaris version number, [datalink] is your network database location if any, and [language folder] is a number that corresponds a specific language. See Text-to-Speech Conversion.

    +
      +
    1. In the Cache folder, delete the .wav files for the messages you edited. Do not delete the folder itself; delete only the appropriate .wav files.
    2. +
    +

    Note (Inbound telephony):
    If you edited many messages, you can delete all the files in the appropriate .wav folder. However, performance may slow somewhat when the first calls come in, as the text messages are converted to new .wav files the first time they are used. That is, a new .wav file is created when the first caller attempts to access the message. If you would like to avoid long pauses for the first callers, call the inbound telephony service and invoke the new messages before patrons use the service.

    +
      +
    1. Restart the phone service.
    2. +
    +

    Note (Outbound telephony):
    The .wav files are regenerated when the service is restarted.

    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • Record your own .wav files - Instead of using the .wav files created when text is converted to speech, you can record and manage your own .wav files using the Polaris Telephony Voice Recorder. See the Voice Recorder help file for more information.
    • +
    • Adjusting pronunciation - You can change the way SAPI voices pronounce specific words. See Adjusting Pronunciation.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Editing_Messages_and_Prompts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Editing_Messages_and_Prompts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae07b5d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Editing_Messages_and_Prompts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + + + Editing Messages and Prompts + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Editing Messages and Prompts

    +

    You can alter the text of the SAPI messages and prompts with Polaris Language Editor. (WebAdmin). This Web-based tool allows you to customize English and other licensed language strings in all the parts of Polaris that support multiple languages, including outbound and inbound telephony. See Edit a SAPI Voice Message with Polaris Language Editor.

    +

    The system then converts the edited telephony message text to speech, using the voice you specified when you configured outbound telephony or the Phone Attendant. (The portions of the messages and prompts that use specific circulation and request data in the database cannot be altered.)

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Text-to-Speech Conversion

    +

    The default messages contain the text of the natural speech messages and prompts. When the service is run for the first time, or when the service is restarted, the message text is converted to audible speech and stored in .wav files, one .wav file per message. Each message is identified by name in the Polaris Language Editor. For example, the greeting message for the Polaris Phone Attendant is called PA_TEXT_GREETING. The illustration shows a portion of the Language Editor with inbound telephony messages displayed.

    +

    + TextGreetingMsg.gif 

    +

    The converted .wav file for this message is named 1033_PA_TEXT_GREETING.wav. The 1033 portion of the file name identifies the language of the file. Each supported language is identified by an identification code as follows:

    +
      +
    • +

      English - 1033

      +
    • +
    • +

      Korean - 1042

      +
    • +
    • Polish - 1045
    • +
    • +

      Russian - 1049

      +
    • +
    • Farsi - 1065
    • +
    • +

      Vietnamese - 1066

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hindi - 1081

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hawaiian - 1141

      +
    • +
    • +

      Chinese - 2052

      +
    • +
    • +

      Spanish - 3082

      +
    • +
    • +

      French - 3084 (outbound telephony only)

      +
    • +
    • Arabic - 12289
    • +
    • +

      Haitian Creole - 15372

      +
    • +
    +

    When you edit a message, you must delete the associated .wav file for the message before you restart the outbound telephony or Phone Attendant service (see Edit a SAPI Voice Message with Polaris Language Editor).

    +

    The edited message is converted to a new .wav file when the service restarts.

    +

    Note:
    For outbound telephony where there are multiple telephony servers, one organization’s set of messages must be specified for use by each server. See Set General Telephone Notification Parameters.
    For inbound telephony, if each phone line is associated with a different organization, and each organization offers different options and custom messages such as announcements, each organization has its own messages and associated .wav files. The path and URL for each organization’s files are specified in the configuration utility. See Set Phone Attendant Options for Specific Lines.

    +

    Phone Attendant (Inbound Telephony) Menu Options

    +

    The Phone Attendant offers patrons various options as menu choices. If you disable an option, the message file still offers the menu choice. When a caller selects the menu choice, the Phone Attendant states (by default) that the library has disabled the feature. If you want to change this message, you can edit the message file and remove the menu text. However, the menu option number always remains the same.

    +

    For example, if you choose to not offer patrons the ability to renew an item by typing a barcode number, and you do not edit the message associated with this menu option, the Phone Attendant responds, “I'm sorry, this option has been disabled” (PA_TEXT_OPTIONDISABLED). If you prefer that patrons do not hear the menu choice for the disabled option, you can remove the text string To renew a specific item, press 3 from the list of options (PA_MENU_PATRONMAIN).

    +

    The numbers for the other menu options do not change, so the menu offerings will skip the press 3 option, going from the press 2 option (list items out) to the press 4 option (list of overdue items).

    +

    Important:
    Do not edit the menu numbers.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Install_and_Use_the_TTS_Lexicon_Editor.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Install_and_Use_the_TTS_Lexicon_Editor.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cf8a0431 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/PTTelMesCustom/Install_and_Use_the_TTS_Lexicon_Editor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + + + + + + + + Install and Use the TTS Lexicon Editor + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Install and Use the TTS Lexicon Editor

    +

    To modify how a word is pronounced when outbound or inbound telephone messages are converted to SAPI speech:

    +

    Note:
    You will need Remote Desktop to connect to the telephony server from the local workstation.

    +
      +
    1. During the installation of the Polaris staff client (Polaris ILS) on the local workstation, select Text-to-Speech Lexicon Editor under Polaris ILS.
    2. +
    +

    + TTSInstall.gif 

    +
      +
    1. Install the AT&T voice client your service uses (for example, AT&T NV4.2 Mike16) on the local workstation by following these steps:
      1. Using Remote Desktop, connect to the telephony server.
      2. Copy the AT&T Voices zip file from the PolarisSupport server folder to the local workstation.
      3. Open the zip file on the local workstation and double-click the set-up icon for the client version of the AT&T voice your service uses.
    2. +
    +

    The first installation window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Next.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The License Agreement window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Yes on the License Agreement window.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Destination Directory window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the destination on the local workstation for the voice client, and click Next.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Ready to Install window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Install.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Voice Setup window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Select the voice you will edit from the list of those installed on your telephony server, and type the name of your telephony server in the Server box.
    2. +
    +

    Note:

    The Port box displays 7000 by default. This is the correct setting.

    +
    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Save, then Exit.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Voice Setup Window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Confirm the voice and telephony settings, then click Exit.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The Information window opens.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Next.
    2. +
    +
    +

    The installation begins.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Click Finish.
    2. +
    +
    +
    +

    Important:
    If there is a firewall, be sure that port 7000 on the telephony server is open.

    +
    +
      +
    1. Open the TTS Lexicon Editor, TTSLexiconEditor.exe, on the local workstation.
    2. +
    +

    The default location is
     C:\Program Files\Polaris\[verion]\Bin\TTSLexiconEditor.exe

    +

    The Lexicon Editor is displayed. The Voice box displays the voice you installed for testing, your telephony server name, and port 7000.

    +

    + +

    +
      +
    1. Click Phoneme Table.
    2. +
    +

    The Phoneme Table opens next to the Lexicon Editor.

    +

    + +

    +

    Each phoneme represents an English sound.

    +
      +
    1. In the Word column, type the word for which you want to modify the pronunciation.
    2. +
    +

    The Lexicon is case-sensitive. Type the word exactly as it appears in the message text.

    +

    Example: +
    If the message text contains the branch name Syracuse, but you enter syracuse in the lexicon, your custom  pronunciation for Syracuse is not applied when the message text is converted to speech.

    +
      +
    1. In the Phonemes column of the Lexicon Editor, type the series of phonemes you need to build the pronunciation of the word.
    2. +
    +

    Refer to the Phoneme table for the letter combinations that indicate specific phonemes. Separate syllables with a hyphen (-) or space. You can place a primary or secondary stress on a syllable by beginning the syllable with 1 or 2.

    +

    Example:
    To specify pronunciation for the word Syracuse, you might type these characters in the Phonemes column of the lexicon editor:
    1 s ae r - ax - k y uw s

    +

    Note:
    The Lexicon can store multiple pronunciations for the same word. To clear all the pronunciations for words in the table, click Remove All From Lexicon.

    +
      +
    1. To test the pronunciation, select the word in the Words column, and click Speak.
    2. +
    3. Modify the phonemes for the word, if necessary, and test it again.
    4. +
    5. Repeat steps 4-8 for each word you want to modify.
    6. +
    7. Select File, Save, and save the Lexicon .xml file to the local workstation.
    8. +
    9. Use Remote Desktop to connect to the telephony server and log on as Polarisexec.
    10. +
    11. Copy the saved Lexicon .xml file from your local workstation to your telephony server.
    12. +
    13. Be sure the service Polaris Phone Notification is running under the user polarisexec.
    14. +
    15. Open TTSLexiconEditor.exe on the server.
    16. +
    17. Select File, Open, and browse to and open the file you copied from the local workstation.
    18. +
    19. Click Add All To Lexicon to add the modified pronunciations to the Lexicon database for the polarisexec user on the server.
    20. +
    21. Close the TTS Lexicon Editor.
    22. +
    23. Stop the Polaris Phone Notification service.
    24. +
    25. Restart the service AT&T Labs Natural Voices Text to Speech 4.2.
    26. +
    27. Clear the Polaris .wav file cache.
    28. +
    29.  Start the Polaris Phone Notification service.
    30. +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Parameters_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Parameters_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97b07969 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Parameters_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ + + + + + + + + + Telephony Parameters Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Telephony Parameters Reference

    +

    These parameters are available on the Telephony parameters page for each telephony server on the Administration Explorer. For more information about setting up telephony, see Setting Up Outbound Telephony for Phone Notification.

    +

    Multiple Telephony Server Settings

    +

    Organization designation for message content (General tab)

    +

    For systems with multiple telephony servers. Specifies the branch whose outbound telephony messages should be used for this server.

    +

    Branch assignment (Outbound tab)

    +

    For systems with multiple telephony servers. Assigns a set of branches to this server. The list refers to the registered branches of the patrons in the notification queue. You can assign specific branches to a particular server to minimize long distance calls.

    +

    See also: Set General Telephone Notification Parameters

    +

    Phone Notification Start and End Times (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These parameters control the times patrons can be called on each day of the week by specifying a start time and end time for each day. However, the calling times may be overridden by Date Not to Call entries in the Notification Dates Not to Call table. For example, if a Date Not to Call entry falls on a Monday, the Monday start time is ignored for that specific date. To block calls to patrons on a specific day of the week every week, set the start and end times for that day to the same time. Valid values are: 12:00AM-11:59PM

    + +

    Cancelled Request Notices (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These parameters control the contents of telephone cancelled request notices.

    +

    Cancels: Allow patron to list canceled titles

    +

    Provides a menu option for patrons to hear the specific titles of the cancelled requests. The default is No.

    +

    Cancels: Conclusion voice file available

    +

    Provides a generic conclusion message. The default English message is: If you would still like these items, please place a new hold request. The default is No.

    +

    Cancels: Intro count voice file available

    +

    Includes the number of cancelled requests in the introductory message. For example, the default English voice file message for multiple cancelled requests is: Our records indicate that you have [number] hold requests that are now canceled. If you set this parameter to Yes, set Cancels: Intro voice file available to No. The default is No.

    +

    Cancels: Include material type when listing canceled titles

    +

    When Cancels: Allow patron to list canceled titles is set to Yes, includes the material type of each item. The default is No.

    +

    Cancels: Intro voice file available

    +

    Provides a generic introduction message. The default English message is: Our records indicate that you have hold requests that have been cancelled. If you set this parameter to Yes, set Cancels: Intro count voice file available to No. The default is Yes.

    +

    Cancels: Maximum number of canceled titles to list

    +

    When Cancels: Allow patron to list canceled titles is set to Yes, limits the number of specific items in the list. The default is 5.

    +

    Holds Pickup Notices (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These parameters control the contents of telephone holds pickup notices.

    +

    Holds: Allow patron to list held titles

    +

    Provides a menu option for patrons to hear the titles of the specific items that are being held for pickup. The default is No.

    +

    Holds: Conclusion voice file available

    +

    Provides a generic conclusion message. The default English message is: Please pick up these items as soon as possible. the default is No.

    +

    Holds: Intro count voice file available

    +

    Includes the number of holds ready for pickup in the introductory message. For example, the default English voice file message for multiple pickup items is Our records indicate that you have [number] items being held for you. If you set this parameter to Yes, set Holds: Intro voice file available to No. The default is No.

    +

    Holds: Include material type when listing held titles

    +

    When Holds: Allow patron to list held titles is set to Yes, includes the material type of each held item. The default is No.

    +

    Holds: Intro voice file available

    +

    Provides a generic introduction message. The default English message is: Our records indicate that you have items being held for you.

    +

    If you set this parameter to Yes, set Holds: Intro count voice file available to No. The default is Yes.

    +

    Holds: Maximum number of held titles to list

    +

    When Holds: Allow patron to list held titles is set to Yes, limits the number of specific held items in the list. The default is 5.

    +

    Holds: Pickup library voice file available

    +

    Includes the pickup libraries for held items in the holds pickup notice. The default English message is: These items can be picked up at the following locations [pickup branch or branches]. The default is No.

    +

    Overdue Notices (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These parameters control the contents of telephone overdue notices.

    +

    Overdues: Allow patron to list overdue titles

    +

    Provides a menu option for patrons to hear the specific titles that are overdue. The default is No.

    +

    Overdues: Conclusion voice file available

    +

    Provides a generic conclusion message. The default English message is: Please return these items as soon as possible. The default is No.

    +

    Overdues: Intro count voice file available

    +

    Includes the number of overdue items in the introductory message. For example, the default English voice file message for multiple overdue items is: Our records indicate that you have [number] overdue items. If you set this parameter to Yes, set Overdues: Intro voice file available to No. The default is No.

    +

    Overdues: Fees voice file available

    +

    Includes the amount owed in the overdue notice. The default English message is: You have accrued fines in the amount of [amount]. The default is No.

    +

    Overdues: Include branch when listing overdue titles

    +

    When Overdues: Allow patron to list overdue titles is set to Yes, includes the assigned branch of each overdue item. The default is No.

    +

    Overdues: Include material type when listing overdue titles

    +

    When Overdues: Allow patron to list overdue titles is set to Yes, includes the material type of each overdue item. The default is No.

    +

    Overdues: Intro voice file available

    +

    Provides a generic introduction message. The default English message is Our records indicate that you have overdue items. If you set this parameter to Yes, set Overdues: Intro count voice file available to No. The default is Yes.

    +

    Overdues: Maximum number of overdue titles to list
    (System)

    +

    When Overdues: Allow patron to list overdue titles is set to Yes, limits the number of specific overdue items in the list. The default is 5.

    +

    Phone Notification - General Settings (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These settings control general aspects of phone notification, such as local and long distance calling.

    +

    Phone notification - allow long distance +

    +

    Indicates that the notification system can dial toll-charged (long distance) numbers. The system recognizes long-distance calls as those numbers that are prefixed with 1. If you set this parameter to No, the notification system does not dial long distance phone numbers, and a paper notice is produced for the patron automatically. The default is Yes.

    +

    Important:
    The telephone number in the patron record must begin with 1 to be recognized as a long distance call.

    +

    Phone notification - local area code

    +

    Identifies the area code local to the telephony server. If you specify a three-digit area code with this parameter and set Phone notification - Remove local area code before dialing to Yes, the following are removed from the start of the patron’s telephone number before dialing: [area code], 1[area code], and 1,[areacode]. The default is Null (empty).

    +

    Phone notification – minimum wait after attempt +

    +

    Identifies how long to wait (in minutes) after a busy or no-answer call before attempting to dial the same number again. The actual time period before attempting the next call may be longer, depending on how long it takes to cycle through the other entries in the notification queue. The default is 30 minutes with valid values 1 or greater.

    +

    Phone notification – number of attempts

    +

    Identifies the number of times to redial a phone number that is busy or does not answer. The notification server continues to dial a voice phone for the number of times you specify and waits for the period of time specified in the Phone notification - Minimum wait after attempt parameter between each redial. When the notification server has attempted the number of times specified by this setting without success, it does not call the same number for the same notice again. The default is 10 (attempts) with valid values of 1 or greater.

    +

    Phone notification - outside line call prefix

    +

    Identifies the number required to access an outside line before the phone number can be dialed. Leave this parameter empty if accessing an outside line is not required. An L tells the Dialogic card to wait for a local dial tone before proceeding. A comma indicates a 2-second pause for the Dialogic card. The default is Null (empty) with valid values: Null (empty), comma (,), L, 0 - 9

    +

    Phone notification - outside line long distance prefix

    +

    Identifies the number required to access an outside line for a long distance call before the phone number can be dialed. Leave this parameter empty if accessing an outside line is not required. An L tells the Dialogic card to wait for a local dial tone before proceeding. A comma indicates a 2-second pause for the Dialogic card. The default is Null (empty) with valid values: Null (empty), comma (,), L, 0 - 9

    +

    Phone notification - Remove local area code before dialing

    +

    When set to Yes, if a three-digit local area code has been specified with the parameter Phone notification - local area code, the following are removed from the start of the patron’s telephone number before dialing: [area code], 1[area code], and 1,[areacode]. When set to No, the entire telephone number is dialed. The default value is No.

    +

    Phone notification - Time required for voice call to be considered complete

    +

    Specifies how many seconds a telephone notice call must last to consider the notice as delivered. The default is 7.

    +

    Phone notification - Use patron name in greeting

    +

    Specifies whether telephone notices include the patron’s name in the greeting. The default is No.

    +

    Phone notification lines (array)

    +

    Identifies the voice ports that have phone lines connected. List the voice ports, separated by commas. Valid values: comma (,) and integers greater than 1

    +

    Example:
    1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8.

    +

    Phone notification: Max number of overdue notices

    +

    Specifies how many times a patron should be called as long as the item remains overdue. Setting this parameter to zero (0) means that the patron is not called for overdue items. Setting this parameter to one (1) or greater sets the number of phone calls to make. The default is 1 with valid values: 0 (no calls); 1 or greater

    +

    Phone Notification - Answering Machine Settings (Outbound Tab)

    +

    When a notification phone call is placed, your Dialogic hardware determines if the call is picked up by a person or an answering machine.  If it detects an answering machine, the Polaris Phone Notification service must determine when to leave the message. Since there is no standard for a “beep” sound, and cell phone voice mail systems complicate the process by switching systems during the call, the Phone Notification service must “listen to” the phone call for a short period of time. During the listening process, the Phone Notification service uses termination rules determined by these parameters. They dictate when to stop listening to silence—that is, to stop when a specific amount of silence has been detected or when the maximum listening time has been reached. The logic is that when 2 seconds of silence (the default period) have been elapsed, the answering machine or voice mail system must be waiting for the Phone Notification message.

    +

    Answering machine: Message wait – Initial silence (10 ms units)

    +

    This parameter sets the minimum initial length of silent time the system waits for a sound to determine that an answering machine is waiting for a message. The default is 200 (2 seconds), and the valid range is 100-3000.

    +

    Answering machine: Message wait – Max silence (10 ms units)

    +

    After a sound has occurred, this parameter sets the maximum length of silent time the system uses to determine that an answering machine is waiting for a message. The default is 290 (2.9 seconds) and the valid range is 100-3000.

    +

    Note:
    The default setting of 2.9 seconds was chosen because it proved be the most effective on a wide test set of mobile phones. If you receive complaints about message failure on mobile phones, try a slightly lower value (2.0 - 2.5 seconds). Unfortunately, you may find that the new setting helps some mobile phone users but does not work for others who had no problems in the past.

    +

    Answering machine: Message wait – Max record time (10 ms units)

    +

    This parameter sets the maximum length of time the system spends on processing (listening to silence) to determine when to leave the message.The default is 2000 (20 seconds) and the valid range is 500-4500.

    +

    Phone Notification - Call Analysis, Error, Hang-Up (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These settings control technical aspects of phone notification, such as answer and hang-up recognition.

    +

    Call Analysis: Answer deglitcher (10 ms units)

    +

    The maximum silence period allowed between words in a salutation. The salutation is the patron’s response upon answering the call, such as “Hello.” The default is 1 and valid values are 1 - 100. To enter -1, use the spin control.

    +

    Call Analysis: Hello edge

    +

    The point at which a successful connect signal will be returned to the application. A rising edge will return a connect immediately. A falling edge will return a connect after the end of the salutation. The default is Falling.

    +

    Call Analysis: High glitch
    (10 ms units)

    +

    The maximum non-silence period to ignore.  Used to help eliminate spurious non-silence intervals. The default is 19.

    +

    Call Analysis: Intercept mode flag

    +

    This parameter enables or disables Special Information Tone (SIT) Frequency Detection, Positive Voice Detection (PVD), and/or  Positive Answering Machine Detection (PAMD). The default is 8.

    +

    Values:

    +
      +
    • +

      2 - Disable SIT frequency detection, PAMD, and PVD

      +
    • +
    • +

      3 - Enable SIT frequency detection

      +
    • +
    • +

      4 - Enable PVD

      +
    • +
    • +

      6 - Enable PVD and SIT frequency detection

      +
    • +
    • +

      7 - Enable PAMD and PVD

      +
    • +
    • +

      8 - Enable PAMD, PVD, and SIT frequency detection

      +
    • +
    +

    Call Analysis: Low glitch
    (10 ms units)

    +

    The maximum silence period to ignore. Used to help eliminate spurious silence intervals. The default is 15.

    +

    Call Analysis: No answer
    (10 ms units)

    +

    The length of time to wait after the first ringback before deciding that the call is not answered. The default is 4500 and the maximum is 9000 (1 minute 30 seconds).

    +

    Call Analysis: PAMD speed value

    +

    When Call Analysis: Intercept mode flag is set to enable Positive Answering Machine Detection (PAMD), this parameter balances PAMD speed versus accuracy.

    +

    Values:

    +
      +
    • 1 - Full (quickest)
    • +
    • 2 - Quick
    • +
    • 3 - Accurate (most accurate)
    • +
    • Default: 3
    • +
    +

    Call Analysis: Start delay (10 ms units)

    +

    The delay after dialing has been completed before starting cadence detection, frequency detection and positive voice detection. The default is 25.

    +

    Call Analysis: Use enhanced call progress qualification templates

    +

    Specifies the use of Dialogic’s qualification template parameters that improve voice (particularly cell phone) and answering machine detection. If modifications are made in the registry, the modifications override the template values; however, settings are reset to the defaults each time the Dialogic service is restarted. The default is No.

    +

    Error monitor: Number consecutive failed calls that triggers line reset/shutdown

    +

    Number of consecutive failed calls that triggers a line reset or shutdown. After the specified number of consecutive failed phone calls, the service resets the Dialogic telephone board channel.  If a phone call is successful after resetting the channel, the count restarts. However, if after resetting the channel the specified number of consecutive calls fail again, and Error monitor: Shut down line  if failed calls limit reached after line is reset is set to Yes (default), the specific phone line is shut down. An e-mail message is then sent to the address specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Email address of sender, using the e-mail server specified in the PAC profile Email notification: Server running SMTP service. The default is 8.

    +

    Error monitor: Shut down line if failed calls limit reached after line is reset

    +

    Shut down the phone line if the consecutive failed calls limit is reached after the line has been reset. The default is Yes.

    +

    Hang-up: Detection type

    +

    Determines what mechanism the software will use to detect when the patron has hung up the phone.  Loop Current Drop generally detects a voltage change when the line is disconnected. Disconnect Tone (default) listens for a specific tone produced by the phone system to indicate that the patron has hung up; this is the most precise method. Max no silence detects a potential hang-up by listening for a period of time where there is continuous sound. If you set this parameter to Max no silence, you can also set a custom period of time with the parameter Hang-up: Maximum no-silence time.

    +

    Hang-up: Disconnect tone - dual

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Disconnect Tone, this  value is used to build the tone. When this parameter is set to Yes, both frequency #1 and #2 need to be configured. The default is Yes.

    +

    Hang-up: Disconnect tone - Frequency #1

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Disconnect Tone, this setting specifies the 1st frequency (Hz) in the tone. The default is 525 (Hz).

    +

    Hang-up: Disconnect tone - Frequency #1 deviation

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Disconnect Tone, this setting specifies the allowable deviation for the 1st frequency. The default is 40 (Hz).

    +

    Hang-up: Disconnect tone - Frequency #2

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Disconnect Tone, this setting specifies the 2nd frequency (Hz) in the tone. The default is 656 (Hz).

    +

    Hang-up: Disconnect tone - Frequency #2 deviation

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Disconnect Tone, this setting specifies the allowable deviation for the 2nd frequency. The default is 40 (Hx).

    +

    Hang-up: Disconnect tone - Leading edge

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Disconnect Tone, this setting specifies whether tone detection notification will occur on the leading or trailing edge of the tone. The default is Yes (leading edge).

    +

    Hang-up: Maximum no-silence time (100 ms units)

    +

    When hang-up detection is set to Max no silence, this setting specifies the length of continuous noise time that will trigger the hang-up event. The default is 15.

    +

    Phone Menu Settings (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These parameters control what happens to the phone call in response to patron input (or lack of patron input).

    +

    Phone menu: Multiple digit input wait time (seconds)

    +

    Specifies the number of seconds the system should wait for a patron to press multiple phone digits (such as barcode) before repeating a prompt. The default is 30.

    +

    Phone menu: Number of prompts before hang-up

    +

    Specifies the number of timed-out or invalid prompts that will trigger a hang-up. For example, if the setting is 2, the service prompts the user once and waits the designated time for a response. If there is no response, the service repeats the prompt and waits the designated time for a response. If there is still no response, the call is disconnected. The default is 2.

    +

    Phone menu: Single digit input wait time (seconds)

    +

    Specifies the number of seconds the system should wait for a patron to press a single phone digit before repeating a message or prompt. The default is 10.

    +

    SAPI (Computer-Generated Voice) Settings (Outbound Tab)

    +

    These settings control aspects of SAPI (Speech Application Programming Interface) voice messages. These are the computer-generated voices that phone notification uses if you do not specify human voice files. For details, see Voices for Outbound Telephony.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Topics.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Topics.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edbe507a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Telephony_Admin/Telephony_Topics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Telephony Administration Topics + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Telephony Administration Topics

    +

    Setting Up Inbound Telephony +

    +

    Setting Up Inbound Telephony; setting no-call dates and dialing hours; voices; outbound telephony reports.

    +

    Phone Attendant Overview +

    +

    Phone Attendant overview; configuring the Phone Attendant.

    +

    Customizing Telephony Messages 

    +

    Customizing SAPI voice messages for outbound and inbound telephony with the Polaris Language Editor; adjusting pronunciation.

    +

    Telephony Parameters Reference +

    +

    Telephony Parameters Reference - List of Telephony parameters as they appear in Polaris Administration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e188c64e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Community Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community Record Workform

    +

    The Community Record workform includes the following tabs: Profile, More info, Events, Social, Services, Subjects, Organization Rep, Preview, and Statistics. After a community record is created, a staff member can designate a patron as a community representative who can update and modify the record from the Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Use the Community Record workform to:

    +

    Enter or modify the following community profile information:

    + +

    Preview how the community record displays in Polaris PowerPAC - Select the Preview tab. See Preview the community record from the staff client.

    +

    +

    View the community record’s statistics - Select the Statistics tab. See View community record statistics in the staff client.

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae18b98b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Community_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Community Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Community UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Community UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5fb3335 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches Dialog Box

    +

    To open the dialog box, in Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Community, Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set up the Narrow and Related Web parts that are displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard on the community information search results page. You can offer the Narrow Web part, the Related Web part, or both; specify the elements available for each Web part and set the display order; set the initial display to expanded or collapsed; set the minimum and maximum number of links for each element; specify your own labels for the Web parts and elements and translate the labels if you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version. For details about the features these Web parts offer to users, see Community Search Results Facets in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    Narrow Tab

    +

    Settings on this tab control whether the Narrow Web part is displayed in the dashboard for search results, and what search filter elements are listed for the Web part. For details about this Web part, see Community Search Results Facets in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Modify the settings for an element - Select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element. The Modify Dashboard Element (Narrow) dialog box appears. See Set Up the Narrow Your Search Web Part.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order - Select an element and click the up or down arrow icons. Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. (The label for the entire Web part is always displayed first and cannot be re-ordered.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate a label - Select the element and click Translate Label. Your choice of languages depends on the languages you purchased with Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version. See Translate Labels for Narrow/Related Web Parts and Multilingual Support for Dashboard Titles.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save settings - Click the Save icon SaveIconTitleDisp.gif. Your changes on this tab are immediately saved to the Polaris database. Reload PowerPAC to see your changes in PAC.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    A message alerts you if you have set DASHBOARD (the first element in the list) to be displayed but no elements. At least one element within the Web part must be set for display in order to display the Web part itself.

    +

    Related Searches Tab

    +

    Settings on this tab control whether the Related Web part is displayed in the dashboard for search results, and what related search elements are listed for the Web part. For details about this Web part, see Community Search Results Facets in Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Modify the settings for an element - Select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element. The Modify Dashboard Element (Related) dialog box appears. See Set Up the Related Searches Web Part.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order - Select an element and click the up or down arrows. Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. (The label for the entire Web part is always displayed first and cannot be re-ordered.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate a label - Select the element and click Translate Label. Your choice of languages depends on the languages you purchased with Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version. See Translate Labels for Narrow/Related Web Parts and Multilingual Support for Dashboard Titles.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save settings - Click the Save icon SaveIconTitleDisp00610.gif. Your changes on this tab are immediately saved to the Polaris database. Reload PowerPAC to see your changes in PAC.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    A message alerts you if you have set DASHBOARD (the first element in the list) to be displayed but no elements. At least one element within the Web part must be set for display in order to display the Web part itself.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Import_Profile_Window.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Import_Profile_Window.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12d700a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Import_Profile_Window.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Event Import Profile Window + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Event Import Profile Window

    +

    Use the Event Import Profile window to create or modify an event import profile. To access the Event Import Profile window, select Utilities, Importing, Event Import Profile Manager. Then right-click and select New to create a new import profile or select Open to view or edit an existing import profile.

    +

    Use the Event Import Profile window to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89dc8704 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Event_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + + Event Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Event Record Workform

    +

    The Event Record workform appears when you search for an Event record in the Polaris Staff Client or when you enter an event on the Event tab of the Community Record workform.

    +

    Note:
    For more information, see Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +

    Use the Event Record workform to do the following:

    +

    Tip:
    To enter diacritics and non-Roman characters, select Tools, Diacritics or press Alt+D. Then, select the characters from the dialog box.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enter basic information about the event: +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type a name in the Event name box at the top of the workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the event type in the Event type box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the Display in PAC check box (if it is not already selected) to display the event in the PAC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the event has a different address and/or contact person than the information displayed, type the information in the appropriate boxes.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Map It feature uses this address to create the event map.

    +
      +
    • +

      Select the start and end dates/times in the Event start date and Event end date boxes.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The End date is used to automatically set the Date to remove event from the library catalog date. The default setting is 7 days, but this can be changed in the Polaris Administration Community profile Days to continue showing event in PAC after event end date. See Setting Community Search Options for PAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Type a description of the times/dates for the event in the Event date as it appears in library catalog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the event description in the Event description box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the automatic map for the event is not correct, enter the coordinates in the Latitude and Longitude boxes to override the automatic coordinates. Click the What’s this? link to get the coordinates.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the area location for the event in the Event location (room or meeting area) box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the event has an associated web site, type the URL for the website in the Event website address box and a description of the website in the Website title/description box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter additional information - Select the More info tab. This information is copied from the Community record to the event, but you can modify it for the event. See Enter more community information in the staff client.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter event services - Select the Services tab. The services are copied from the Community, but you enter different information for the event. See Enter community services in the staff client.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Share this event - Select the Related Organizations tab. Click the New related organization button, and use the Find Tool to search for and select the related organization. The event will display in the related organization’s calendar of events and in the list of events on the product page.

      +
    • +
    • +

      See how the event displays in the PAC - Select the Preview tab. If the Preview does not appear, save and close the event record, reopen it, and select the Preview tab.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View statistics about the event - Select the Statistics tab.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Events_Import_Profile_Manager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Events_Import_Profile_Manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8819c470 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Events_Import_Profile_Manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Events Import Profile Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Events Import Profile Manager

    +

    If your library uses Polaris Community Profiles, you can import library events information from Evanced Solutions or Plymouth Rocket - EventKeeper to create event records in the Polaris database. The events import runs once every night as an executable from the Polaris API consumer service. Imported events are saved in the Polaris database as Community Event records.

    +

    To access the Event import profile manager:

    +
      +
    • Select Utilities > Importing > Event Import Profile Manager.
    • +
    +

    The Events Import Profile Manager opens displaying the import profiles, if any, in the following columns: Community record name, Enabled, Vender, Feed URL and Days of events.

    +

    Use the Events Import Profile Manager to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Sort the list of import profiles - The default sort for the import profiles is by the Community record name, bu you can click any column heading to sort the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open an existing import profile - Right-click and select Open. Edit an events import profile.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete an existing import profile - Right-click and select Delete. See Delete an events import profile.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a new import profile - Right-click anywhere in the window and click New. See Create a new events import profile.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the import profile’s properties - Right-click the profile and select Properties.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Search_Setting_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Search_Setting_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23f96697 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRComm/Search_Setting_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Search Setting Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search Setting Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Community, Search Settings Defaults.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set default values for PAC Community Keyword and Community Browse searches.

    +

    Keyword Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Search by - Sets the default Search by (access point) option. Users can keyword-search community information by Any Field, Organization Name, Event Name, Services, Address and contact person, Postal code, Subject, or Notes. These options look for information in the corresponding fields of community records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Limit by  - Sets the default Limit by (search filter) option. Users can limit their keyword community searches by All types (no filter), Organizations or Clubs, Events, Programs or services, People, Sponsor or donor, Other.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Sort by - Sets the default Sort by option. Users can sort their keyword community search results by Relevance, Organization Name, Event Name, Event Expiration Date, or Event Start Date.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To make Community Keyword searching available in Polaris PowerPAC, you must also set the Community profile Navigation (PowerPAC): Community Profiles - Keyword Search to Yes.

    +

    Browse Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Search by - Sets the default Search by option. Users can browse-search community information indexes by Organization Name, Event Name, Services, or Subject.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Sort Primary Name Results by - Sets a sort option for Primary Name (heading) results. The options are Relevance, Organization Name, Event Name, and Event Date. These are not displayed to PAC users, so your choice applies to all community browse searches.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To make Community Browse searching available in Polaris PowerPAC, you must also set the Community profile Navigation (PowerPAC): Community Profiles - Browse Search to Yes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Orders_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Orders_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8c00a3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Orders_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Credit Card Payment Manager - Orders View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payment Manager - Orders View

    +

    Use the Credit Card Payment Manager - Orders view to list and work with credit card orders. An order consists of a transaction or group of transactions related to one payment session. For example, a patron might pay two separate fines in one order. See View orders and refund credit card payments. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Find orders in a date range - Set the Start Date and End Date of the period. You can type the dates or click the down arrows and select the dates from the calendar. Then click Search.
    • +
    • Find a specific order - If you know the reference identification number of the order, click CreditRefFind.gif. The Find Using Reference ID dialog box appears. Enter the payment reference number and click Search.
    • +
    • See more information about an order - Right-click the order line item and select Properties from the context menu.
    • +
    • Open an order - Right-click the order line item and select Open from the context menu. The Store Order workform opens, where you can see details about a single order and issue refunds on the credit card account.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Transactions_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Transactions_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f07b8dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_-_Transactions_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Credit Card Payment Manager - Transactions View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payment Manager - Transactions View

    +

    Use the Credit Card Payment Manager - Transactions to view credit card sales and credits. See View credit card transactions. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Find transactions in a date range - Set the Start Date and End Date of the period. You can type the dates or click the down arrows and select the dates from the calendar. Then click Search.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Find a specific transaction - If you know the reference identification number of the transaction, click CreditRefFind00609.gif. The Find Using Reference ID dialog box appears. Enter the reference number and click Search.

      +
    • +
    • +

      See more information about a transaction - Right-click the transaction line item and select Properties from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open the store order related to the transaction - Right-click the transaction and select Links, Store Order from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26d05ec9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRCreditCard/Credit_Card_Payment_Manager_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Credit Card Payment Manager Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Card Payment Manager Workform

    +

    Use the Credit Card Payment Manager workform to work with credit card orders and individual transactions. See Managing Credit Card Orders. Use the toolbar of the workform to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Books_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Books_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f285265c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Books_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Books Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Books Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Books dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of the book, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Books dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘a’ or ‘t’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for a book:

    +
      +
    • Form of material - Indicates the type of material.
    • +
    • Illustrations - Indicates the presence of types of illustrations in the item represented by the record. Information for this character position is usually derived from terms in field 300. Up to four codes may be recorded, in alphabetical order. If fewer than four codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than four codes are appropriate, only the first four are recorded.
    • +
    • Audience - A one-character alphabetic code describes the intellectual level of the target audience for which the material is intended. When items with factual content are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code is recorded for the primary target audience. If the record has both reading grade level and interest age or interest grade level information present in the 521 (Target Audience Note) field, 008/22 is coded based on the interest age or interest grade information.
    • +
    • Form of item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material for the item in hand.
    • +
    • Nature of contents - One-character alphabetic codes indicate that an item contains certain types of materials. Generally, a specific code is used if a significant part of the item is the type of material represented by the code. Information for these character positions is usually derived from other areas of the bibliographic record (for example, field 245, 5XX fields, or 6XX fields). Up to four codes may be recorded, in alphabetical order. If fewer than four codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than four codes are appropriate to an item, the four most significant are selected. If no codes are applicable, all positions contain blanks.
    • +
    • Government publication - Indicates whether or not the item is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body. The code also describes the jurisdictional level of the government agency associated with the item.
    • +
    • Conference publication - Indicates whether a work consists of the proceedings, reports, or summaries of a conference. The following types of publications are considered to be conference publications: proceedings, partial collections or collections of preprints.
    • +
    • Festschrift - Indicates whether or not the work is a festschrift. A festschrift is defined as a complimentary or memorial publication usually in the form of a collection of essays, addresses, biographical, bibliographic scientific, or other contributions. A true festschrift generally mentions the person, institution, or society it commemorates as the chief source of information. Other indications that an item is a festschrift include phrases such as: papers in honor of, in memory of, commemorating, and their equivalents in foreign languages.
    • +
    • Index - A one-character numeric code indicates whether or not an item includes an index to its own contents. Information for this data element is derived from an entry in another part of the bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Literary form - A one-character numeric code indicates whether or not the item is a work of fiction. The information for this data element may sometimes be derived from the presence of the subject subdivision fiction in a subject added entry A secondary entry to the main entry in a MARC record. field (6XX).
    • +
    • Biography - Indicates whether or not an item contains biographical material, and if so, what the biographical characteristics are.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Computer_Files_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Computer_Files_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c35832ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Computer_Files_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Computer Files/Electronic Resource Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Computer Files/Electronic Resource Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Computer File dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of the computer file, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Computer File dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘m’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to complete the 006 fixed field for a computer file:

    +
      +
    • Form of material - Indicates the type of material being described.
    • +
    • Audience - Describes the target audience for which the material is intended. It is used primarily for educational computer file materials. When items with factual content are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code is recorded for the primary target audience. If the record has both reading grade and interest age or interest grade level information present in the 521 field, 008/22 is coded based on the interest age or interest grade information.
    • +
    • Type of computer file - Indicates the type of computer file/electronic resource being described. The specific type of file is also described in textual form in field 516.
    • +
    • Government pub - Indicates whether or not the computer file is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body. The code also describes the jurisdictional level of the government agency associated with the item.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Continuing_Resources_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Continuing_Resources_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35198b1f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Continuing_Resources_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Continuing Resources Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Continuing Resources Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Continuing Resources dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of a serial, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Continuing Resources dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘s’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for a serial:

    +

    Form of material - Indicates the type of material being described.

    +

    Frequency - Indicates the frequency of a serial. This element is used in conjunction with 008/19 and is based on the information found in field 310.

    +

    Regularity - Indicates the intended regularity of a serial. This element is used in conjunction with 008/18 and is based on the information found in field 310. Consider the stated intent of the publisher when coding the regularity.

    +

    Type of continuing resource - Indicates the type of continuing resource.

    +

    Form of original item - Specifies the form of material in which a serial was originally published. In cases where the serial is published simultaneously in more than one form, or when it is difficult to determine the originally published form, the first item received or entered in the database is considered the original physical form.

    +

    Form of item - Specifies the form of material for the serial item being described.

    +

    Nature of entire work - Indicates the nature of a serial if it consists entirely of a certain type of material. It is used to specify what type of publication the item is, as opposed to what the item contains. If the item can be considered to be more than one type of material, the types are recorded in positions 25-27, and the 24 position is coded blank.

    +

    Nature of contents - One-character alphabetic codes indicate that a work contains certain types of materials. Generally, a specific code is used only if a significant part of the item is the type of material represented by the code. Information for these character positions is usually derived from other areas of the bibliographic record. Up to three codes may be recorded, in alphabetical order. If fewer than three codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether or not the serial is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body, and, if so, describes the jurisdictional level of the agency.

    +

    Conference publication - Indicates whether or not a serial consists of the proceedings, reports, or summaries of a conference. The following types of publications are not considered conference publications: works composed of or based on a single paper, symposiums in print, hearings of legislative bodies, or courses given in a school.

    +

    Original alphabet or script of title - Indicates the original or script of the title on the source item, upon which the key title is based. If there is no key title present, the code value may relate to the title proper. This data element is mandatory for bibliographic records created or updated by one of the centers participating in the International Serials Data System (ISDS). For other non-ISDS records, position 33 is optional.

    +

    Entry convention - Indicates whether the serial was cataloged according to successive entry or latest entry cataloging conventions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d145ff74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Maps Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Maps Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Maps dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of the map, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Maps dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘f’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for a map:

    +

    Form of material - Indicates the type of material being described.

    +

    Relief - One-character alphabetic codes indicate the relief type specified on the item. The codes used in this box indicate only the relief forms most commonly found on maps and are usually derived from information given in field 500. Up to four codes may be recorded. Codes are recorded in order of their importance to the map being described; the code for the most important relief aspect is given first. If fewer than four codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than four codes are appropriate to an item, only the four most important are recorded.

    +

    Projection - A two-character alphabetic code indicates the projection used in producing the item.

    +

    Type of cartographic material - Indicates the type of cartographic item being described.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether or not the item is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body, and, if so, describes the jurisdictional level of the agency.

    +

    Form of item - Specifies the form of material for the item in hand.

    +

    Index - Indicates whether or not the item or accompanying material includes a location index or gazetteer. Information for this data element is derived from mention of an index or gazetteer in other parts of the bibliographic record. A map index to adjoining sheets is not considered an index when coding this position. This data element refers only to gazetteers, place name indexes, and other referenced lists.

    +

    Special format characteristics - One-character alphabetic codes identify some of the special format characteristics of a map. Up to two codes may be recorded. Codes are recorded in order of their importance to the map being described. The code for the most important special format characteristic is given first. If only one code is assigned, it is left-justified and the unused position contains a blank. If more than two characteristics are appropriate to an item, only the two most important are recorded.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..933465c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Mixed Materials Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Mixed Materials Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Mixed Materials dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of the mixed material, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Mixed Materials dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘p’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for mixed materials:

    +

    Form of material - Indicates the type of material being described.

    +

    Form of item - Specifies the form of material for the item in hand. For mixed materials that are archival controlled, this character position is coded to reflect the predominant part of the materials being described. If the materials have been microfilmed but the repository still has the originals, a blank code is used.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Music_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Music_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8c2f2d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Music_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Music Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Music Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Music dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of the music, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Music dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘d’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for music:

    +

    Form of material - Indicates the type of material being described.

    +

    Form of composition - A two-character alphabetic code indicates the form of composition of printed and manuscript music, and musical sound recordings. The form of composition code is based on the terminology in the work itself and is intended to provide a coded approach to the content of the work. In addition to codes for forms, the list also includes codes for musical genres. The codes are based on Library of Congress subject headings. Codes should be assigned when they apply to the item as a whole. If more than one code is appropriate, the code mu (Multiple forms) is used in this element, with appropriate specific codes given optionally in field 047.

    +

    Format of music - Indicates the format (printed or manuscript) of a musical composition. Information for this data element is generally derived from terms appearing in field 300. If the item being cataloged consists of one or more scores along with other materials, consider only the score or scores in coding this character position.

    +

    Music parts - A one character code indicates whether the item being cataloged contains parts. This position is not used to indicate that parts may exist elsewhere.

    +

    Audience -Describes the intellectual level of the target audience for which the material is intended. It is used primarily to identify music to be used or performed by a specific target audience. When items are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code is recorded for the primary target audience. For juvenile material, either code j or the more specific codes a, b, or c are used. An item considered juvenile material often includes the word juvenile in the subject headings.

    +

    Form of item - Specifies the form of material for the item being described. This character position is used only with printed or manuscript music.

    +

    Accompanying matter - One-character alphabetic codes indicate the contents of program notes and other accompanying material for sound recordings, music manuscripts, or printed music. Generally, a specific code is used only if a significant part of the accompanying material is the type of material represented by the code. Up to six codes may be recorded. If fewer than six codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than six codes are appropriate to an item, only the six most important are recorded.

    +

    Literary text - One-character alphabetic codes indicate the type of literary text contained in a nonmusical sound recording. Up to two codes may be recorded. If only one code is assigned, it is left-justified and the unused position contains a blank. If more than two codes for types of literary text are appropriate to an item, only the two most important are recorded.

    +

    Transposition - A one character code indicates whether all or part of the item being cataloged is a transposition and/or arrangement of another work.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eadc2b91 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/006_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 006–Visual Materials Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    006–Visual Materials Dialog Box

    +

    The 006–Visual Materials dialog box is used to insert information about special aspects of the visual material, which cannot be inserted in field 008. The 006 Visual Materials dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 006 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘k’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for visual materials:

    +

    Form of material - Indicates the type of material being described.

    +

    Running time -Specifies the total running time of a motion picture or a video recording. The length is given as a three-digit number, right-justified, and unused positions contain zeros.

    +

    Audience - Describes the target audience for which the material is intended. It is used primarily for educational audiovisual materials. When items with factual content are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code is recorded for the highest level appropriate.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether or not the item is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body, and, if so, describes the jurisdictional level of the agency.

    +

    Form of item - Specifies the form of material for the item in hand.

    +

    Type of visual material - Indicates the type of visual material being described.

    +

    Technique -Indicates the technique used in creating motion in motion pictures or video recordings.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..160e3315 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Electronic_Resource_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Electronic Resource Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Electronic Resource Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Electronic Resource dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of a computer or electronic file. The 007 Electronic Resource dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘c’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for an electronic file:

    +

    Category of material -Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Dimensions - Indicates the dimensions of the medium.

    +
      +
    • (007 Computer File) Indicates how the computer file is encoded. In many cases the dimensions apply to the container in which a magnetic or optical medium is encased.
    • +
    • (007 Microform) Indicates the dimensions of the microform. It does not indicate the dimensions of the image. For example, 16 mm images on 35 mm microfilm are coded f (35 mm). Only the most common dimensions are indicated.
    • +
    • (007 Motion Picture and 007 Video Recording) Indicates the width of the motion picture or video recording.
    • +
    • (007 Projected Graphic) Indicates the width or dimensions of the projected graphic item. Width is given for filmstrips. Height and width are given for slides and transparencies. Only the most common dimensions are indicated.
    • +
    • (007 Sound Recording) Indicates the diameter of an open reel or disc, or the dimensions of a cassette, cartridge, or cylinder.
    • +
    +

    Sound - Indicates whether the production of sound is an integral part of the item.

    +

    Image bit depth - A three-character number specifying the exact bit depth of the scanned images that comprises the electronic resource, or a three-character alphabetic code which indicates that the exact bit depth cannot be recorded. Bit depth is determined by the number of bits used to define each pixel representing the image. Since only exact bit depth is useful, coding should not include missing digits represented by hyphens.

    +

    File formats - Indicates whether the files which comprise the electronic resource are of the same format or type for digitally reformatted materials. The values do not indicate specific types of file formats, which may be contained in variable fields in the record. The information indicates the number of file formats used.

    +

    Quality assurance targets - Indicates whether quality assurance targets have been included appropriately at the time of reformatting or creation of the electronic resource. Targets are standard reference points which can be interpreted by a human or machine and used to measure resolution, color, and faithfulness of representation to the original.

    +

    Antecedent/source - Gives information about the source of a digital file important to the creation, use and management of digitally reformatted materials.

    +

    Level of compression - Indicates what kind of compression the electronic resource has been subjected to. It is used to judge the fidelity of the file to the original.

    +

    Reformatting quality - Indicates the reformatting quality of the electronic resource. This is an overall assessment of the physical quality of the electronic resource in relation to its intended use and can be used to judge the level of quality of a file, and an institution’s commitment to maintain its availability over time.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Globe_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Globe_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee56860e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Globe_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Globe Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Globe Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Globe dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the globe. The 007–Globe dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘d’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for a globe:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Physical medium - Indicates the material of which the globe is made.

    +

    Type of reproduction - Indicates whether the globe is a facsimile or other type of reproduction.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Kit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Kit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ca88dd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Kit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Kit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Kit Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Kit dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the item with various components. The 007–Kit dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘o’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for a kit:

    +

    Category of material -Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Map_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Map_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86721608 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Map_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Map Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Map Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Map dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the map. The 007 Map dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘a’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for a map:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Physical medium - Indicates the material of which the map is made.

    +

    Type of reproduction - Indicates whether the map is a facsimile or other type of reproduction.

    +

    Production reproduction details - Indicates the photographic technique used to produce the map.

    +

    Positive/negative aspect - Indicates the positive/negative aspect of the item. This characteristic is also referred to as the polarity.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Microform_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Microform_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9dc76e15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Microform_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Microform Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Microform Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Microform dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the microform. The 007 Microform dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘h’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for a microform:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Positive/negative aspect - Indicates the positive/negative aspect (polarity) of the item.

    +

    Dimensions - Indicates the dimensions of the microform. It does not indicate the dimensions of the image. For example, 16 mm images on 35 mm microfilm are coded f (35 mm). Only the most common dimensions are indicated.

    +

    Reduction ratio range - Indicates the reduction ratio range for a microform. The specific reduction ratio is recorded in 007/06-08.

    +

    Reduction ratio - These character positions contain the reduction ratio for a microform. A one-character alphabetic code indicating the reduction ratio range is recorded in 007/05.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Emulsion on film - Indicates the type of emulsion on the film. The word emulsion describes the light-sensitive materials within the item. Proper storage and use of items require identification of the emulsion they contain.

    +

    Generation - Indicates the generation stage of the item. The concept of generation represents the photographic process required to create, duplicate, and preserve image materials.

    +

    Base of film - Indicates the base of the film. Safety base is a comparatively nonflammable film base that meets the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) requirements for a safety base.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Motion_Picture_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Motion_Picture_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edbc7043 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Motion_Picture_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Motion Picture Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Motion Picture Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Motion Picture dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the motion picture. The 007 Motion Picture dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘m’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for a motion picture:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Motion picture presentation format - Indicates the presentation format for motion pictures. For example, wide-screen presentation format is usually indicated with terms such as Techniscope, Todd-AO, Super-Panavision, and others.

    +

    Sound on medium or separate - Indicates whether the sound is on the item or separate from the item.

    +

    Medium for sound - Indicates the specific medium used to carry the sound of an item, whether that sound is carried on the item itself or is in the form of accompanying material. It also indicates the type of sound playback required for the item. This character position is used in conjunction with the information coded in 007/05 and 007/07.

    +

    Dimensions - Indicates the width of a motion picture.

    +

    Configuration of playback channels - Indicates the configuration of playback channels. This data element should be coded based on a clear indication of intended playback. These codes do not refer to the configuration of channels originally recorded unless those channels are all intended to be available on playback.

    +

    Production elements - Indicates whether the film material is part of a complete production, a preliminary production element, or a post-production element. Materials described in this character position do not represent a complete work.

    +

    Positive/negative aspect - Indicates the positive/negative aspect (polarity) of the item.

    +

    Generation - Indicates the generation stage of the item. The concept of generation represents the photographic process required to create, duplicate, and preserve image materials.

    +

    Base of film - Indicates the base of the film. Safety base is a comparatively nonflammable film base that meets the ANSI requirements for a safety base.

    +

    Refined categories of color - Indicates more specifically the color characteristics of a moving image.

    +

    Kind of color stock or print - Indicates the type of color film stock or color print of the item.

    +

    Deterioration stage - Indicates the level of deterioration of the motion picture film.

    +

    Completeness - Indicates whether or not the item being cataloged is judged to be complete.

    +

    Film inspection date - The most recent film inspection date. It may be the date the item was cataloged or the date it was viewed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Nonprojected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Nonprojected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..38f4766c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Nonprojected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Nonprojected Graphic Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Nonprojected Graphic Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Nonprojected Graphic dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the non-projected graphic. The 007–Nonprojected Graphic dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘k’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for non-projected graphic:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meanings of the remaining character positions in field 007 depend on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Primary support material - Indicates the type of material used for the primary support (the support or base on which an image is printed or executed) for a non-projected graphic. This information is intended for use in handling and storage of material.

    +

    Secondary support material - Indicates the type of material used for the secondary support for non-projected graphic material. Secondary support refers to the material (other than normal museum matting) to which the primary support is attached. This character position is coded only when the mount or matte is of historical, informational, aesthetic, or archival importance.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Notated_Music_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Notated_Music_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0695f9a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Notated_Music_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Notated Music Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Notated Music Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Notated Music dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the graphical representation of the musical work. The 007–Notated Music dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘q’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for notated music:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meaning of the remaining character positions in field 007 depends on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Projected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Projected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8059e1db --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Projected_Graphic_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Projected Graphic Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Projected Graphic Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Projected Graphic dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the projected graphic. The 007 Projected Graphic dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘g’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for a projected graphic:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meanings of the remaining character positions in field 007 depend on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Base of emulsion - Indicates the type of material for the base of the emulsion of a photo negative, filmstrip, slide, or transparency.

    +

    Sound on medium or separate - Indicates whether the sound of the projected graphic is on the item or separate from the item.

    +

    Medium for sound - Indicates the specific medium used to carry the sound of an item, whether that sound is carried on the item itself or is in the form of accompanying material. It also indicates the type of sound playback required for the item. This character position is used in conjunction with the information coded in 007/05 and 007/07.

    +

    Dimensions - Indicates the width or dimensions of the projected graphic item. Width is given for filmstrips. Height and width are given for slides and transparencies. Only the most common dimensions are indicated.

    +

    Secondary support material - Indicates the mount material of a slide or transparency for a projected graphic.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Remote_Image_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Remote_Image_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..13da5982 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Remote_Image_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Remote Image Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Remote Image Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Remote-Sensing Image dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the remote sensing image. A remote sensing image is any image produced by a recording device that is not in physical or intimate contact with the object under study. The 007 Remote-Sensing Image dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘r’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for a remote sensing image:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meanings of the remaining character positions in field 007 depend on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Altitude of sensor - Indicates the general position of the sensor relative to the Earth.

    +

    Attitude of sensor - Indicates the general angle of the device from which the remote-sensing image is made.

    +

    Cloud cover - Indicates the amount of cloud cover that was present when a remote-sensing image was made.

    +

    Platform construction type - Indicates the type of construction of the platform serving as the base for the remote-sensing device. For the purpose of this data element, platform refers to any structure that serves as a base, not only flat surfaces.

    +

    Platform use category - Indicates the primary use intended for the platform specified in 007/06.

    +

    Sensor type - Indicates the recording mode of the remote-sensing device; specifically, whether the sensor is involved in the creation of the image it eventually measures, or if it transmits the information directly.

    +

    Data type - A two-character alphabetic code indicates the spectral, acoustic, or magnetic characteristics of the data received by the device producing the remote-sensing image. It can be used to indicate both the wavelength of radiation measured and the type of sensor used to measure it.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Sound_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Sound_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f275d123 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Sound_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Sound Recording Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Sound Recording Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Sound Recording dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the sound recording. The 007 Sound Recording dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘s’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 006 tag for a sound recording:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meanings of the remaining character positions in field 007 depend on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Speed - Indicates the playback speed of the sound recording. This code is only intended to relate to the playing speed of a sound recording rendered on a mechanical device.

    +

    Configuration playback channels - Indicates the configuration of playback channels. Monaural, stereophonic, quadraphonic, and other configuration of playback channels are coded based on a clear indication of intended playback. These codes do not refer to the configuration of channels originally recorded, unless those channels are all intended to be available on playback.

    +

    Groove width/groove pitch - Indicates the width of the groove of the recording for discs or the pitch of the groove for cylinders.

    +

    Dimensions - Indicates the diameter of an open reel or disc, or the dimensions of a cassette, cartridge, or cylinder.

    +

    Tape width - Indicates the width of the tape.

    +

    Tape configuration - Indicates the number of tracks on a tape.

    +

    Kind of disc, cylinder, or tape - Indicates the type of disc, cylinder, or tape.

    +

    Kind of material - Indicates the kind of material used in the manufacture of sound recordings (both instantaneous and mass-produced). This code is only intended to relate to a sound recording rendered on a mechanical device.

    +

    Kind of cutting - Indicates how the disc grooves are cut. Used primarily to identify discs which contain only hill-and-dale information.

    +

    Special playback characteristics - Indicates the playback characteristics for sound recordings. Special playback characteristics include special equipment or equalization necessary for proper playback. Codes should be used only if the item in hand includes a clear indication that special playback characteristics are required.

    +

    Capture and storage technique - Indicates how the sound was originally captured and stored. For re-releases of recordings, use the code for the original capture and storage technique, even though such re-releases may have been enhanced using another technique.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Tactile_Material_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Tactile_Material_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94b13691 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Tactile_Material_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Tactile Material Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Tactile Material Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Tactile Material dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of material intended to be read or interpreted by touch. The 007 Tactile Material dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘f’.

    +

    The following elements are located on the 007–Tactile Material dialog box:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs. The meanings of the remaining character positions in field 007 depend on the value in this character position.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Braille writing class - Indicates the family of braille to which the item belongs. This is not the particular braille coded, but the type of braille codes used, representing different types of written symbols.

    +

    Level of contraction - Indicates whether contractions are used. Contractions are abbreviations consisting of one or more braille or Moon characters to represent common letter combinations.

    +

    Braille music format - A three-character code indicates the braille music format of the item. The music formats are the way measures, section, parts, and related information, such as words, are presented in relation to each other. Up to three formats may be indicated, left justified in order of predominance.

    +

    Physical characteristics - A one-character code indicates other special physical characteristics about the braille.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Text_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Text_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..96b3cb1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Text_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Text Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Text Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Text dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the text. The 007 Text dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘t’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for text:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Unspecified_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Unspecified_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..82923e16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Unspecified_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Unspecified Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Unspecified Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Unspecified dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the unspecified material. The 007 Unspecified dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘z’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for unspecified material:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates that the category of material to which the item belongs is unspecified.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Video_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Video_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b52d5b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/007_Video_Recording_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 007–Video Recording Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    007–Video Recording Dialog Box

    +

    The 007–Video Recording dialog box is used to insert special information about the physical characteristics of the video recording. The 007 Video Recording dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 007 tag in the MARC Editor and the first position of the fixed field contains ‘v’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 007 tag for a video recording:

    +

    Category of material - Indicates the category of material to which the item belongs.

    +

    Specific material designation - Indicates the specific material designation of the item. The specific material designation describes the special class of material (usually the class of physical object) to which an item belongs.

    +

    Color - Indicates the color characteristics of the item.

    +

    Video recording format - Indicates the recording format for videotapes or videodiscs. If a bibliographic record for a video recording describes various available formats, a separate 007 field Physical Description, Fixed Field - +This field contains special information about the physical characteristics in a coded form. The information may represent the whole item or parts of an item such as accompanying material. +  +The data elements in field 007 are positionally defined and the number of character positions in field 007 depends upon the code contained in 007/00. Character position 00 contains a code that identifies the category of material. The fill character (|) is not allowed in this position. The fill character may be used in any other character position when the cataloging agency makes no attempt to code the position. +  +The categories of material for which field 007 is applicable in bibliographic records are presented in the following order in the field description: map, electronic resource, globe, tactile material, projected graphic, microform, nonprojected graphic, motion picture, kit, notated music, remote-sensing image, sound recording, text, videorecording, and unspecified. is needed for each.

    +

    Sound on medium or separate - Indicates whether the sound is on the item or separate from the item.

    +

    Medium for sound - Indicates the specific medium used to carry the sound of an item, whether that sound is carried on the item itself or is in the form of accompanying material. It also indicates the type of sound playback required for the item. This character position is used in conjunction with the information coded in 007/05 and 007/07.

    +

    Dimensions - Indicates the width of the video recording.

    +

    Configuration of playback channels - Indicates the configuration of playback channels. These codes do not refer to the configuration of channels originally recorded unless those channels are all intended to be available on playback.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Books_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Books_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b97a728d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Books_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Books Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Books Dialog Box

    +

    The 008–Books dialog box is used to insert information about the book as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Books dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor and LDR/06 contains ‘a’ or ‘t’.

    +

    Select options in the following boxes to enter information in the 008 tag for a book:

    +

    Entry date - Six digits specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Type of date - A one-character alphabetic code categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued item, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Illustrations - Indicates the presence of types of illustrations in the item represented by the record. Information for this character position is usually derived from terms in field 300. Up to four codes may be recorded, in alphabetical order. If fewer than four codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than four codes are appropriate, only the first four are recorded.

    +

    Audience - A one-character alphabetic code describes the intellectual level of the target audience for which the material is intended. When items with factual content are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code indicates the primary target audience. If the record has both reading grade level and interest age or interest grade level information present in the 521 (Target Audience Note) field, 008/22 is coded based on the interest age or interest grade information.

    +

    Form of item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material for the item in hand.

    +

    Nature of contents - One-character alphabetic codes indicate that an item contains certain types of materials. Generally, a specific code is used if a significant part of the item is the type of material represented by the code. Information for these character positions is usually derived from other areas of the bibliographic record (for example, field 245, 5XX fields, or 6XX fields). Up to four codes may be recorded, in alphabetical order. If fewer than four codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than four codes are appropriate to an item, the four most significant are selected. If no codes are applicable, all positions contain blanks.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether the item is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body. The code also describes the jurisdictional level of the government agency associated with the item.

    +

    Conference publication - A one-character numeric code indicates whether a work consists of the proceedings, reports, or summaries of a conference. The following types of publications are considered to be conference publications: proceedings, partial collections, or collections of preprints.

    +

    Festschift - A one-character numeric code indicates whether or not the work is a festschrift. A festschrift is a complimentary or memorial publication usually in the form of a collection of essays, addresses, biographical, bibliographic scientific, or other contributions.

    +

    Index - A one-character numeric code indicates whether or not an item includes an index to its own contents. Information for this data element is derived from an entry in another part of the bibliographic record.

    +

    Literary form - A one-character numeric code indicates whether the item is a work of fiction. The information for this data element may sometimes be derived from the presence of the subject subdivision fiction in a subject added entry A secondary entry to the main entry in a MARC record. field (6XX).

    +

    Biography - Indicates whether or not an item contains biographical material, and if so, what the biographical characteristics are.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text or other worded information in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed maximum allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source - Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Computer_Files_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Computer_Files_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4752a873 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Computer_Files_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Computer Files Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Computer Files Dialog Box

    +

    The 008–Computer Files dialog box is used to insert information about the computer file as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Computer Files dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor and LDR/06 contains ‘m’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 008 tag for a computer file:

    +

    Entry date - Six digit characters specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Type of date - A one-character alphabetic code that categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued items, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Audience - A one-character alphabetic code describes the target audience for which the material is intended. It is used primarily for educational computer file materials. When items with factual content are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code indicates the primary target audience. If the record has both reading grade and interest age or interest grade level information present in the 521 field, 008/22 is coded based on the interest age or interest grade information.

    +

    Type of computer file - Indicates the type of computer file being described. The specific type of file is also described in textual form in field 516.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether or not the computer file is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body. The code also describes the jurisdictional level of the government agency associated with the item.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text, etc., in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form, or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed, maximum-allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source - Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Continuing_Resources_Dialog.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Continuing_Resources_Dialog.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b22a4c3b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Continuing_Resources_Dialog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Continuing Resources Dialog + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Continuing Resources Dialog

    +

    The 008–Continuing Resources dialog box is used to insert information about the serial as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Continuing Resources dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor where LDR/06 contains ‘a’ and LDR/07 contains ‘b’ or ‘s’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 008 tag for a serial:

    +

    Entry date - Six digits specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Publication status - A one-character alphabetic code that categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued items, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Frequency - Indicates the frequency of a serial. This element is used in conjunction with 008/19 and is based on the information found in field 310.

    +

    Regularity - Indicates the intended regularity of a serial. This element is used in conjunction with 008/18 and is based on the information found in field 310. Consider the stated intent of the publisher when coding the regularity.

    +

    ISSN center - A one-character code indicates the ISSN (International Standard Serial Number) Network center responsible for assigning and maintaining certain data related to a serial item. ISSN Network data typically includes the ISSN recorded in field 022, the key title recorded in field 222, the abbreviated key title recorded in field 210, and the original alphabet or script of title recorded in 008/33. In cases where the country of publication has changed, the code in 008/20 represents the country currently responsible for maintaining the data assigned.

    +

    Type of serial - Indicates the type of serial item.

    +

    Form of original item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material in which a serial was originally published. In cases where the serial is published simultaneously in more than one form, or when it is difficult to determine the originally published form, the first item received or entered in the database is considered the original physical form.

    +

    Form of item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material for the serial item being described.

    +

    Nature of entire work - Indicates the nature of a serial if it consists entirely of a certain type of material. It is used to specify what type of publication the item is, as opposed to what the item contains. If the item can be considered more than one type of material, the types are recorded in 008/25-27 and the 008/24 position is coded blank.

    +

    Nature of contents - One-character alphabetic codes indicate that a work contains certain types of materials. Generally, a specific code is used only if a significant part of the item is the type of material represented by the code. Information for these character positions is usually derived from other areas of the bibliographic record. Up to three codes may be recorded, in alphabetical order. If fewer than three codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks.

    +

    Nature of contents list - Select a type of material description to place in the Nature of contents position.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether or not the serial is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body, and, if so, describes the jurisdictional level of the agency.

    +

    Conference publication - A one-character numeric code indicates whether or not a serial consists of the proceedings, reports, or summaries of a conference. The following types of publications are not considered conference publications: works composed of or based on a single paper, symposiums in print, hearings of legislative bodies, or courses given in a school.

    +

    Original alphabet or script of title - Indicates the original or script of the title on the source item, upon which the key title is based. If there is no key title present, the code value may relate to the title proper. This data element is mandatory for bibliographic records created or updated by one of the centers participating in the International Serials Data System (ISDS). For other non-ISDS records, 008/33 is optional.

    +

    Successive/latest entry - A one-character numeric code indicates whether the serial was cataloged according to successive entry or latest entry cataloging conventions.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text, etc., in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form, or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed maximum allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source -Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Fixed_Field_for_Authority_Record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Fixed_Field_for_Authority_Record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..897c357f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Fixed_Field_for_Authority_Record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Fixed Field for Authority Record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Fixed Field for Authority Record

    +

    The 008–Fixed Field for Authority Record dialog box provides coded information about the record as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. These coded data elements are useful for retrieval and data management purposes.

    +

    Select from the following options to enter information in the 008-Fixed Field for the authority record:

    +

    Entry date - Six digits specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Direct or indirect geographic subdivision A subdivision which limits a topical subject heading to a specific geographic location. +For example, in the headings: +Women - Peru +Libraries - New York (State) - A one-character code indicates whether the subject heading system/thesaurus used to formulate the 1XX heading provides for subdividing the heading by the name of a country or other jurisdiction, region, or geographic feature. In an extended heading, 008/06 coding is based on the entire heading, including the subject subdivisions.

    +

    Romanization scheme - Indicates that the 1XX heading field contains the romanized form of a name or uniform title and identifies the romanization scheme used. If the 1XX heading is not a romanized form, code n is used.

    +

    Language of catalog - Indicates whether the heading in the 1XX field and its associated reference structure (that is, the headings in the 1XX, 260, 360, 4XX, 5XX, 663, and 664 fields) are valid according to the rules used in establishing headings for English-language catalogs, French-language catalogs, or both.

    +

    Kind of record - Indicates whether the authority record represents an established or un-established 1XX heading.

    +

    Descriptive cataloging rules - A one-character alphabetic code identifies the descriptive cataloging rules used to formulate a name, name/title, or uniform title 1XX heading. A heading formulated according to descriptive cataloging rules that is used as a subject access point in bibliographic records may also be coded for a particular set of subject heading system/thesaurus conventions in 008/11. If the 1XX heading is not formulated using descriptive cataloging rules, code n is used and the heading is not used as a main or added entry A secondary entry to the main entry in a MARC record. in bibliographic records.

    +

    Subject heading system/thesaurus - A one-character alphabetic code identifies the subject heading system/thesaurus conventions used to formulate the 1XX heading. A heading formulated according to descriptive cataloging rules that is used as a subject-added entry in bibliographic records may also be coded for a particular set of conventions in 008/11. If the 1XX heading does not conform to subject heading/thesaurus conventions, code n is used.

    +

    Type of series - Indicates the type of series contained in the 1XX heading field in an established heading record. The record may also contain series treatment information in fields 640-646. The codes distinguish between headings for monographic series A group of monographs with a collective title in addition to their individual titles. The individual titles may or may not be numbered. The collective title is generally found on the title page or the cover of each monograph. and multipart items that are cataloged as a set. They also identify other headings that may be considered appropriate for use as a series-added entry in bibliographic records, regardless of whether the series is actually traced.

    +

    Numbered or unnumbered series - Indicates whether the 1XX field contains an established heading for a numbered or unnumbered series or whether the series varies between being numbered and unnumbered.

    +

    Heading use - main or added entry - Indicates whether the 1XX field contains an established heading that conforms to descriptive cataloging rules and, therefore, is appropriate for use as a 1XX main entry or 7XX added entry field in bibliographic records.

    +

    Heading use - subject added entry - Indicates whether the 1XX field contains an established heading that conforms to subject heading system/thesaurus conventions and, therefore, is appropriate for use as a 6XX subject access entry in bibliographic records.

    +

    Heading use - series added entry - Indicates whether the 1XX field contains an established heading that conforms to descriptive cataloging rules, and therefore is appropriate for use as a series-added entry in bibliographic records (4XX Series Statements (Traced); 8XX Series Added Entry).

    +

    Type of subject subdivision - A one-character alphabetic code identifies the type of authorized subject subdivision contained in the 1XX heading field in a subdivision record, an established heading and subdivision record, or a reference and subdivision record. Code n is used in all other kinds or records.

    +

    Type of government agency - A one-character code indicates the jurisdictional level of a 1XX heading that is the name of a government agency. The heading may be a jurisdiction or a body created or controlled by a national, state, or local government (including intergovernmental bodies of all types).

    +

    Reference evaluation - Indicates whether the 4XX/5XX tracing fields have been evaluated for their consistency with the rules used to formulate the 1XX heading in the record. This information is used to identify heading/tracing inconsistencies when a major change in the rules used to formulate headings and references has not been fully implemented.

    +

    Record update in process - Indicates whether a change in any field in a record is being considered. The organization investigating the modification may be identified by the MARC 21 code contained in the last subfield d of field 040 (Cataloging Source). Code b alerts users to a potential change in a record after its initial creation. The completeness of the authority information contained in the record is indicated in Leader/17 (Encoding level).

    +

    Undifferentiated personal name - Indicates whether the personal name in a name or name/title heading contained in field 100 in an established heading record or a reference record is used by one person or by two or more persons. Code n is used if the 1XX heading is not a personal name or if the personal name is a family name (field 100, first indicator value 3).

    +

    Level of establishment - Indicates the extent to which the 100 to 151 headings conform to the descriptive cataloging or subject heading system and thesaurus conventions used to formulate the heading. Codes a, b, c, and d are used only in established heading records. Code n is used in all other kinds of records.

    +

    Modified record -A one-character code indicates whether the record is modified from its intended content because it required characters that could not be converted into machine-readable form, or because it exceeded a system-imposed maximum allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source -A one-character code indicates the creator of an authority record. If the cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. is known, it is identified in subfield a of field 040 (Cataloging Source).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57a7c781 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Maps Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Maps Dialog Box

    +

    The 008–Maps dialog box is used to insert information about the map as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Maps dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor and LDR/06 contains ‘e’ or ‘f’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 008 tag for a map:

    +

    Entry date - Six digits specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Type of date - A one-character alphabetic code that categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued items, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Relief - One-character alphabetic codes indicate the relief type specified on the item. The codes used in this box indicate only the relief forms most commonly found on maps and are usually derived from information given in field 500. Up to four codes may be recorded. Codes are recorded in order of their importance to the map being described. The code for the most important relief aspect is given first. If fewer than four codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than four codes are appropriate to an item, only the four most important are recorded.

    +

    Projection - A two-character alphabetic code indicates the projection used in producing the item.

    +

    Type of cartographic material - Indicates the type of cartographic item being described.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether the item is published or produced by or for an international, nation, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body, and, if so, describes the jurisdictional level of the agency.

    +

    Index - A one-character numeric code indicates whether the item or accompanying material includes a location index or gazetteer. Information for this data element is derived from mention of an index or gazetteer in other parts of the bibliographic record. A map index to adjoining sheets is not considered an index when coding this position. This data element refers only to gazetteers, place name indexes, etc.

    +

    Special format characteristics - One-character alphabetic codes identify some of the special format characteristics of a map. Up to two codes may be recorded. Codes are recorded in order of their importance to the map being described. The code for the most important special format characteristic is given first. If only one code is assigned, it is left-justified and the unused position contains a blank. If more than two characteristics are appropriate to an item, only the two most important are recorded.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text or other worded information in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form, or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed, maximum-allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source - Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c2ef0c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Mixed_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Mixed Materials Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Mixed Materials Dialog Box

    +

    The 008–Mixed Materials dialog box is used to insert information about the mixed material as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Mixed Materials dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor and LDR/06.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 008 tag for mixed materials:

    +

    Entry date -Six digit characters specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. Use the date pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Type of date - A one-character alphabetic code that categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued items, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Form of item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material for the item in hand. For mixed materials that are archival controlled, this character position is coded to reflect the predominant part of the materials being described. If the materials have been microfilmed but the repository still has the originals, a blank code is used.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text, etc., in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form, or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed maximum allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source - Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Music_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Music_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26370c5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Music_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Music Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Music Dialog Box

    +

    The 008–Music dialog box is used to insert information about the music as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Music dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor and LDR/06 contains ‘c’, ‘d’, ‘i’, or ‘j’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 008 tag for music:

    +

    Entry date - Six digits specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Type of date - A one-character alphabetic code that categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued items, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Form of composition - A two-character alphabetic code indicates the form of composition of printed and manuscript music, and musical sound recordings. The code is based on the terminology in the work itself and is intended to provide a coded approach to the content of the work. In addition to codes for forms, the list also includes codes for musical genres. The codes are based on Library of Congress subject headings. Codes should be assigned when they apply to the item as a whole. If more than one code is appropriate, the code mu (Multiple forms) is used in this element, with appropriate specific codes given optionally in field 047.

    +

    Format of music - Indicates the format of a musical composition. This character position applies to printed or manuscript music. Information for this data element is generally derived from terms appearing in field 300. If the item being cataloged consists of one or more scores along with other materials, consider only the score or scores in coding this character position.

    +

    Music parts - A one character code indicates whether the item being cataloged contains parts. This position is not used to indicate that parts may exist elsewhere.

    +

    Audience - A one-character alphabetic code describes the intellectual level of the target audience for which the material is intended. It is used primarily to identify music to be used or performed by a specific target audience. When items are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code is recorded for the primary target audience. For juvenile material, either code j or the more specific codes a, b, or c are used. An item considered juvenile material often includes the word juvenile in its subject headings.

    +

    Form of item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material for the item being described. For music, this character position is used only with printed or manuscript music.

    +

    Accompanying matter - One-character alphabetic codes indicate the contents of program notes and other accompanying material for sound recordings, music manuscripts, or printed music. Generally, a specific code is used only if a significant part of the accompanying material is the type of material represented by the code. Up to six codes may be recorded. Codes are recorded in alphabetical order. If fewer than six codes are assigned, the codes are left-justified and unused positions contain blanks. If more than six codes are appropriate to an item, only the six most important are recorded.

    +

    Accompanying matter list - Select up to six material types to set in Accompany matter positions.

    +

    Literary text - One-character alphabetic codes indicate the type of literary text contained in a nonmusical sound recording. Up to two codes may be recorded. If only one code is assigned, it is left-justified and the unused position contains a blank. If more than two codes for types of literary text are appropriate to an item, only the two most important are recorded.

    +

    Literary text list - Select one or two literary text descriptions to place in the Literary text positions.

    +

    Transposition - A one-character code indicates whether all or part of the item being cataloged is a transposition and/or arrangement of another work.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text, etc., in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form, or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed maximum allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source - Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c0663408 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/008_Visual_Materials_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + 008–Visual Materials Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    008–Visual Materials Dialog Box

    +

    The 008–Visual Materials dialog box is used to insert information about the visual material as a whole or about special aspects of the 1XX heading or 4XX/5XX tracing fields. The 008–Visual Materials dialog box is displayed when you double-click the 008 tag in the MARC Editor and LDR/06 contains ‘g’, ‘k’, ‘o’ or ‘r’.

    +

    Select from the options in the following boxes to enter data in the 008 tag for visual materials:

    +

    Entry date - Six digits specify the date the record was first entered into machine-readable form. The date is given in the pattern yymmdd 
    (yy for the year, mm for the month, and dd for the day).

    +

    Type of date - A one-character alphabetic code that categorizes the type of date given in character positions 008/07-10 and 008/11-14. For serially-issued items, the code in 008/06 also indicates the publication status.

    +

    Date 1 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the beginning date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the beginning date is entered in this position.

    +

    Date 2 - Four digits that indicate a date appropriate for the type of item being recorded. Missing digits are represented by the character u. For most records, the date is derived from information in field 260, field 362, or from note fields. For serially issued items, this box contains the ending date of publication (chronological designation). For reprints of serials and for reproductions of serials being described in the body of the entry, the ending date is entered in this position.

    +

    Place of publication - A two- or three-character alphabetic code indicates the place of publication, production, or execution. The place code is an authoritative-agency data element. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List for Countries that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is generally related to information in field 260.

    +

    Running time - These positions contain a number specifying the total running time of a motion picture or a video recording. The length is given as a three-digit number, right justified. Unused positions contain zeros.

    +

    Audience - A one-character alphabetic code describes the target audience for which the material is intended. It is used primarily for educational audiovisual materials. When items with factual content are considered appropriate for more than one target audience, the code is recorded for the highest level appropriate.

    +

    Government publication - Indicates whether the item is published or produced by or for an international, national, state, or local government agency, or by any subdivision of such a body, and, if so, describes the jurisdictional level of the agency.

    +

    Form of item - A one-character alphabetic code specifies the form of material for the item in hand.

    +

    Type of visual material - Indicates the type of visual material being described.

    +

    Technique - Indicates the technique used in creating motion in motion pictures or video recordings.

    +

    Language - A three-character alphabetic code indicates the language of the item. The source of the code is the MARC 21 Code List of Languages that is maintained by the Library of Congress. Choice of a MARC 21 code is based on the predominant language of the item. When an item contains text or other worded information in more than one language, or is a translation, textual information regarding the language is usually given in field 500 or field 546. If more than one language code is appropriate, all appropriate codes are given in field 04 and the first one is recorded in 008/35-37.

    +

    Modified record - Indicates whether any data on a bibliographic record is a modification of information that appeared on the item being cataloged or that was intended to be included in the machine-readable record. Such modifications include: the romanization of data that originally appeared in a non-roman script, substitution of characters available for those characters that could not be converted to machine-readable form, or shortening of records because the amount of data exceeded a system-imposed, maximum-allowable length.

    +

    Cataloging source -Indicates the original cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. of the record. If the cataloging source is known, it is identified in subfield ‡a of field 040.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/Fixed_Fields_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/Fixed_Fields_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ca64b5f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRFixedFielddx/Fixed_Fields_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fixed Fields Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fixed Fields Reference

    +

    See the following topics for help with cataloging fixed field dialog boxes:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRMailingLabel/Mailing_Label_Manager_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRMailingLabel/Mailing_Label_Manager_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dbae7727 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRMailingLabel/Mailing_Label_Manager_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Mailing Label Manager Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mailing Label Manager Workform

    +

    The Mailing Label Manager workform stores and displays a set of patron addresses. See Creating Patron Mailing Labels. Use this workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a patron address to the address set - Click pMailFind.gif, and search for the patron record. Right-click the record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can also add addresses from other workforms. On the Patron Registration workform - Addresses View, select the address and click Mailing Label. On the Patron Status workform, select Tools, Add to Mailing Labels.

    +
      +
    • +

      Produce multiple labels for a patron - Right-click the patron address and select Change number of labels. In the Change Mailing Label Count dialog box, set the number of labels and click OK.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you change the number of labels to produce for a patron, click pMailSave.gif before you print the labels.

    +
      +
    • +

      Remove an address from the address set - Select the address, and click pMailDel.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print the address set on labels - Select File, Print, or click PrintButn.gif. You can select the label type, and the number of labels to skip (for partial sheets).

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Avery 5163 labels are 4 inches x 2 inches. Avery 5252 labels are 4 inches x 1.33 inches.

    +
      +
    • +

      Export the address set for use in another application - Click pMailExport.gif. You can browse to a location for saving the file. Leave the Save as type box set to CSV files.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save the address set - Click pMailSave00608.gif. The address set is available the next time you open the Mailing Label Manager.

      +
    • +
    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Patrons_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Patrons_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b8e1a81 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Patrons_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Manager - Patrons View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Manager - Patrons View

    +

    Use the Outreach Services Manager - Patrons view to identify outreach services patrons due for services. See Process items for multiple patrons. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Set criteria for patrons due for services - Select the patrons’ registered branch in the Branch box, and the status of the patrons you want to process in the Status box.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Select Inactive status to set up a selection list for inactive patrons. (You can select them when the Patrons list is generated, and change their status to Active.) Select Active to process patrons currently due for service.

    +
      +
    • Set optional patron filters - You can also filter the patron list by the next scheduled delivery date (Date of Next Delivery), delivery method (Delivery Modes), and Delivery Routes.
    • +
    • Fill the patron list - Click Find Patrons.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    To find any outreach services patron, regardless of the filters you set, and add the patron to the list, click PickListFind.gif. Search for the patron record, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu. However, this operation clears any combined pick list that already exists in the Outreach Services Manager.

    +
      +
    • Check for individual patron pick lists, and create them if necessary - Select each patron in the list. The patron’s pick list appears in the Patron Pick List portion of the workform. If a patron does not have a pick list, right-click the patron’s name and choose Selection List from the context menu. The ORS Selection List workform for the patron appears. Create a pick list for the patron, then save the list. See Process items for an individual patron .
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Pick_List_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Pick_List_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3c88c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_-_Pick_List_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Manager - Pick List View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Manager - Pick List View

    +

    The Outreach Services Manager - Pick List view displays the combined pick list, which shows the items from each identified patron’s pick list. See Process items for multiple patrons. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Remove an item from the pick list - Select the item, and click PickListMinus.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Find an item and add it to the pick list - Click PickListFind00607.gif. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the item, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu. You specify the patron for whom you are adding the item. Click SaveBtn.gif to save any changes back to the individual patron’s pick list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Place hold requests for items - Select the items, and click but_hold.gif. Use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items. For more information about hold requests, see Placing Hold Requests.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Check out items - Select the items, and click but_chko.gif. Use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items. You can set a special loan period for the items.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you have set Polaris to print check-out receipts from the Outreach Services Manager workform, the bulk check-out receipt prints. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms. The bulk check-out receipt is a useful packing list as you prepare the items for delivery.

    +
      +
    • +

      Print a packing list for reader ratings - Select the items, and click PackingListIcon.gif above the Items Out list. See Placing Items on Reserve. If automatic packing list printing is specified, the packing list prints instead of the check-out receipt. See Setting Up Reader Ratings.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save patrons or items to a new or existing record set - Select the items in the Combined Pick List, right-click in the list, and select Add to Patron Record Set or Add to Item Record Set from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If an item in the list is a serial, the serial designation (enumeration The designation reflecting the alphabetic or numeric scheme used by the publisher on an item or assigned when the holdings statement is created to identify the individual bibliographic or physical parts and to show the relationship of each unit to the unit as a whole. and chronology The date(s) used by the publisher on a serially-issued bibliographic unit to help identify or indicate when it was published. The chronology may reflect the dates of coverage, publication, or printing.) is added to the title. You may need to expand the title column to see the designation.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..250f3830 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach/Outreach_Services_Manager_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Manager Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Manager Workform

    +

    To access the Outreach Services Manager workform, select Patron Services, Outreach Services. Use the Outreach Services Manager workform to process items for multiple outreach services patrons. You identify the patrons due for outreach services, create pick lists of items for patrons who need them, then process the items from the combined pick list for all the identified patrons. See Outreach Services Processing. Use the toolbar of the workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Print information from this workform - Select File, Print, Current View; File, Print, Pick List; File, Print, Pick List Report; or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    The pick list is the list of specific potential items for the outreach services patrons on the Patrons list. If you select Pick List Report for printing, you can sort the list by fields such as Call Number and Collection, so that it is easier to pick the items from the shelf. The report also includes information about whether patrons have read or placed hold requests on their items.

    + +

    Tip:
    The check-out receipt can be a useful packing list as you prepare the items for delivery.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90fa809c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Selection List Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Selection List Workform

    +

    Use the Outreach Services Selection List workform to build a list of titles for a patron based on the patron’s preferences, and to generate a pick list from the generated titles. See Outreach Services Processing. Use the toolbar of the workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Print information from this workform - Select File, Print, Current View; File, Print, Pick List; File, Print, Pick List Report; or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    The pick list is the list of specific potential items for the outreach services patrons on the Patrons list. If you select Pick List Report for printing, you can sort the list by fields such as Call Number and Collection, so that it is easier to pick the items from the shelf. The report also includes information about whether patrons have read or placed hold requests on their items.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Pick_List_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Pick_List_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4164e220 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Pick_List_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Selection List Workform - Pick List View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Selection List Workform - Pick List View

    +

    Use the Outreach Services Manager - Pick List view to display and process the items you selected from the patron’s selection list. See Process items for an individual patron .

    +
      +
    • Remove an item from the pick list - Select the item, and click PickListMinus.gif. +
    • +
    • Find an item and add it to the pick list - Click PickListFind00606.gif. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the item, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu. +
    • +
    • Add a patron’s held items to the pick list - Click ORSAddHeldIcon.gif. If no items are being held for the patron, you see a message. If there are held items, they are added to the pick list. A Held for Patron icon HeldForPatron.gif marks the held items in the pick list. +
    • +
    • Save the pick list - Click SaveBtn.gif to save any changes to the patron’s pick list. +
    • +
    • Place hold requests for items - Select the items, and click but_hold.gif. Use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items. +
    • +
    • Check out items - Select the items, and click but_chko.gif. Use the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select multiple items. You can set a special loan period for the items. +
    • +
    • Print a packing list for reader ratings - If automatic packing list printing is specified, the packing list prints instead of the check-out receipt. +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Selection_List_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Selection_List_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d3fc0b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PROutreach2/Outreach_Services_Selection_List_Workform_-_Selection_List_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Services Selection List Workform - Selection List View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Services Selection List Workform - Selection List View

    +

    Use the Outreach Services Selection List workform - Selection List view to build a selection list for the outreach services patron. The selection list consists of titles with attached items that are candidates for checkout to the patron according to the patron’s preferences. See Process items for an individual patron .

    +
      +
    • +

      Set the branches whose items can be candidates - Select Default Branches to restrict the items to a group of branches determined by your library. The default branches are set in Polaris Administration. Or select a specific branch to restrict the items to those belonging to the selected branch. Your library may allow only items from your logged-in branch, typically the branch where you are working, as selection list candidates. If this is the policy, only the logged-in branch is available in the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Build the selection list - Click Build List. The Titles list displays titles (bibliographic records) with attached items that fill the requirements set by the patron’s preferences and your branch selection. Titles are ranked by relevancy, but you can click a column head to sort by the list by title, author, or publication date. The physical items associated with these bibliographic titles are potential selections for the patron’s pick list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add any title to the selection list - Click PickListFind.gif, search for the title, right-click it in the Find Tool results list, and choose Select from the context menu. However, this method ignores any branch settings you have made.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View a bibliographic record in the selection list - Double-click the title to open the bibliographic record, or right-click the title in the selection list and select Preview to see more information about the title without opening the record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Place a bibliographic hold request for the patron -  Right-click the title in the selection list and select Place hold from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add items to the pick list - Select a title in the Titles list. The Items list displays the items associated with the selected title. Then select the title in the Titles list and click PickListPlus.gif above the Items list. A check icon ORSCheckIcon.gif appears beside the title and its associated item to indicate that the item has been placed on the pick list. Repeat to add additional items to the pick list.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b889e74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Store Order Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Store Order Workform

    +

    Use the Store Order workform to view details about individual orders and to issue refunds to the credit card account that paid the order. See Managing Credit Card Orders. Use the toolbar of the workform to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Details_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Details_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f01e1876 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Details_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Store Order Workform - Details View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Store Order Workform - Details View

    +

    Use the Store Order workform - Details view to list the details about a single credit card order, and to issue refunds. See View orders and refund credit card payments. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Refund a selected payment - Select the payment in the Details list and click CreditRefund1.gif, or right-click the selected payment, and select Credit Refund from the context menu. You can specify a partial refund.
    • +
    • Refund a entire order - Click CreditRefundAll.gif. The refund equals the net payments (net sale) on the order, and you cannot change the refund amount.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Transactions_View.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Transactions_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76e2ff99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRStoreOrder/Store_Order_Workform_-_Transactions_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Store Order Workform - Transactions View + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Store Order Workform - Transactions View

    +

    Use the Store Order workform - Transactions view to see details about each transaction related to the order. See View orders and refund credit card payments.

    +

    To refund an entire order, click CreditRefundAll00574.gif. The refund equals the net payments (net sale) on the order, and you cannot change the refund amount.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Acquisitions_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Acquisitions_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b22ed138 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Acquisitions_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Acquisitions Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Acquisitions UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31db91d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add to New or Existing Purchase Order Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add to New or Existing Purchase Order Dialog Box

    +

    The Add to New or Existing Purchase Order dialog box appears when you right-click a record set in the Find Tool, and select Add to Purchase Order, New from the context menu. It also appears when you select Tools, Add all records to purchase order, New or when you select specific titles in a record set, and select Tools, Add selected records to purchase order, New on the Record Set workform. See Creating Purchase Orders.

    +

    Use the Add to Purchase Order dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Enter the purchase information for a new purchase order -
      • Type the purchase order number and suffix.
      • Click Find if you want to search for and select a purchase order template.
      • Select the library that is placing the order in the Ordered at box.
      • Select the order type.
      • Select the payment method.
      • Click Find to search for and select the supplier.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This default information is used only when bibliographic records do not contain 970 tags that supply the price, material type, destination, collection and fund information necessary to create the purchase order line item segments.

    +
      +
    • Enter the default information to create the line item segments - If the information is not present in the bibliographic records, specify the following defaults:
      • Select the material type
      • Select the destination
      • Select the collection
      • Select the fund or click Find to locate the fund.
      • Type the quantity of copies for each segment.
      • Type the list price for the title.
    • +
    +

    Specify a location for the bulk add report - Enter the directory in the File name box, or click Browse to locate the directory. The report displays instances where default data was used in place of missing or invalid data during the bulk add process.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Amount_Credited_Discounted_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Amount_Credited_Discounted_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7417d19 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Amount_Credited_Discounted_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adjust Amount Credited/Discounted Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Adjust Amount Credited/Discounted Dialog Box

    +

    You can adjust the credits and discounts that apply to a prepaid invoice line item segment. See Adjust invoice line item segment credits and discounts.

    +

    Use the Adjust Amount Credited/Discounted dialog box to:

    +

    Adjust credits or discounts on an invoice line item segment -

    +
      +
    • Select Overwrite existing value or Adjust existing value. If you select Adjust existing value, the amount you entered is added to the existing amount.   
    • +
    • Type a note, if applicable. This note appears on the Payment History view of the Invoice workform.
    • +
    • Type the dollar amount of the adjustment in the Amount box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..970ce9fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adjust Charges Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Adjust Charges Dialog Box

    +

    You can adjust charges at the line item segment level. See Adjust line item segment charges on a prepaid invoice.

    +

    Use the Adjust Charges dialog box to:

    +

    Adjust charges on invoices and invoice line item segments -

    +
      +
    • Select the type of charge you want to adjust.
    • +
    • Specify whether the charges will overwrite the existing charges of this type or add to them.
    • +
    • Type the amount in the Amount box.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To adjust header charges on an invoice that is not prepaid, you can remove them and add them again on the General view of the Invoice or select a charge type of Credit. To header charges on a prepaid invoice, you must link another miscellaneous invoice to the invoice.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Fund_Balances_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Fund_Balances_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb6b9cdb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Fund_Balances_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adjust Fund Balances Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Adjust Fund Balances Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Adjust Fund Balances dialog box to adjust the balance in a fund up or down. Select an option to assign a supplementary allocation, a reduction in allocation, an adjustment to the total currently encumbered, or total expended. Then type the amount in the Amount box. You can enter a note to indicate the reason for the change. See Adjust fund balances manually.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Line_Item_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Line_Item_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5bc91c57 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Adjust_Line_Item_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Adjust Line Item Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Adjust Line Item Dialog Box

    +

    You can adjust the discount rate and unit price on a prepaid line item. See Adjust line item discount/unit price on a prepaid invoice.

    +

    Use the Adjust Line Item dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Adjust the discount percentage on a prepaid invoice line item - Select Discount (%), and enter an percentage amount in the Amount box.
    • +
    • Adjust the line item’s unit price on a prepaid invoice line item - Select Unit Price, and enter a dollar amount in the Amount box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Approve_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Approve_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be567331 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Approve_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Approve Selection Lists Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Approve Selection Lists Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Approve Selection List dialog box to approve the titles in a selection list. Select Tools, Approve, and select the decision status of the line or lines you want to approve. For example, if you want to approve all selection list lines being considered, select Consider. See Approve multiple selection list line items

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Assign_Template_Name_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Assign_Template_Name_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63ceb272 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Assign_Template_Name_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Assign Template Name Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Assign Template Name Dialog Box

    +

    The Assign Template Name dialog box appears when you select File > Save As Template from the Purchase Order workform. Type a name for the template. Make sure the name indicates the type of purchase order to create from the template. For example, you might use an abbreviation indicating the order type and the supplier. The name must be unique for your library or branch. Click OK after entering the template name.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Change_PO_Line_Item_Line_Item_Segment_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Change_PO_Line_Item_Line_Item_Segment_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3592a8b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Change_PO_Line_Item_Line_Item_Segment_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change PO Line Item/Line Item Segment Fund Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change PO Line Item/Line Item Segment Fund Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Change PO Line Item dialog box or the Change PO Line Item Segment dialog box as follows:

    +

    Change PO Line Item Dialog Box

    +

    You can replace the existing header fund with another fund for all line item segments, and/or change the item material type for the line item on a released purchase order:

    +
      +
    • Change the fund - In the From section, select the current fund from the drop-down list. In the To section, select the new Fund from the drop-down list, and the new Fund Owner from the drop-down list if necessary. Click OK. A confirmation message appears if the change can be made. Click OK to confirm the change, or click Cancel to cancel it.
    • +
    • Change the item material type - In the To section, select the new Material Type from the drop-down list. A confirmation message appears if the change can be made. Click OK to confirm the change, or click Cancel to cancel it.
    • +
    +

    See Changing the Header Fund or Material Type for a PO Line Item for detailed information.

    +

    Change PO Line Item Segment Dialog Box

    +

    You can change the destination branch, fund, and/or the collection for a purchase order line item segment on a released purchase order:

    +
      +
    • Change the destination - In the To section, select the new destination.
    • +
    • Change the fund - In the To section, select the new fund.
    • +
    • Change the collection - In the To section, select the new collection.
    • +
    +

    Click OK. The system displays a confirmation message. Click OK to confirm the change, or click Cancel to cancel it.

    +

    See Changing the Fund, Destination Branch, or Collection for a PO Line Item Segment for detailed information.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_In_Shelf-Ready_Materials_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_In_Shelf-Ready_Materials_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19bc10db --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_In_Shelf-Ready_Materials_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check In Shelf-Ready Materials Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In Shelf-Ready Materials Workform

    +

    You can access the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform by selecting EDI Services, Check-In Shelf-ready Materials from the Acquisitions menu, by clicking receiveshipicon.gif on the Polaris Shortcut Bar, or by pressing Alt A+S. This workform is intended for receiving shelf-ready materials—items that the supplier ships with barcodes and other processing that makes them ready to be put on the shelves as soon as they are checked in so they can circulate. For more information, see Check in new shelf-ready items.

    +

    Note:
    To receive a book (or other type of material) using this workform, the barcode on the physical item must match a barcode for an item record in the database, and that record must be linked purchase order line item segment.

    +

    Use the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform to do the following:

    +
      +
    • Check in a shipment of shelf-ready items so they can circulate - Use one of the following methods to enter each item’s barcode:
    • +
    • Scan the item’s barcode
    • +
    • Type the barcode in the Barcode box, and press Enter.
    • +
    • Click Find to search for the barcode and select the item in the Find Tool results list. When the barcode appears in the Barcode box, press Enter.
    • +
    +

    The items are checked in as they are scanned (or their barcodes are entered), and the item information displays in the top list in the workform. As each item is checked in, its title appears so that you can keep track of which items have been checked in.

    +
      +
    • Remove a scanned item from the list of checked in items - If you scan an item that you did not want to check in, select the item in the list and click Remove Selected Item(s) From Shipment.
    • +
    +

    The check in is undone, and the item’s status reverts to on-order.

    +

    Important:
    Scan or enter the barcodes for the entire shipment before clicking the Accept Shipment button. When you accept the shipment, the linked purchase order line item segments are updated to Received. If you receive fewer than the number of copies ordered, the purchase order line item segment is split into two segments - one for the number of copies received and one for the number of copies not received. For more information, see Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment.

    +
      +
    • Do other tasks with an item listed in the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform - When you have checked in an item, and it appears in the top portion of the workform, you can right-click and select one of the following options from the context menu:
      • Print
      • Add to Course Reserve
      • Add to Record Set
      • Add to Route List
      • Remove from Route List
      • Create - Item Record or Child Item Records
      • Link - Go to other Polaris records listed in this submenu.
      • Properties - Check the item record’s properties.
    • +
    • Change an item record - If you have the required permissions, you can change an item’s collection, shelf location, material type, blocks or non-public notes from the Check-In Shelf-Ready Materials workform. Select the item, select Tools, Manage Item, click ManageItemIcn_-_Copy.gif or press Ctrl+M. Then, change the information in the dialog box, and select File | Save. See Change item information at Shelf-Ready Materials check-in.
    • +
    • Receive the linked purchase order line item segments - After all items in the shipment are checked in and appear in the top section of the workform, click the Accept Shipment button.
    • +
    +

    The linked purchase order line item segments are updated to Received, and the segment information appears in the bottom list on the workform. Each segment reflects the number of copies that were ordered and received for that destination branch and collection. For example, if five copies were ordered for a segment, and you have scanned all five items in the top section, one segment appears for all five copies with the notation 5/5 received.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c03b153 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check/Voucher Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check/Voucher Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Check/Voucher dialog box to:

    +

    Note:
    See Crediting Invoices.

    +
      +
    • Indicate the payment method - Select Check or Voucher.
    • +
    • Record the check or voucher number - Type the amount in the Number box.
    • +
    • Record the check or voucher date - Type the date in the Date box if you want to change it from the present date. Click the Calendar icon to select a date.
    • +
    • View the exchange rate and update date - If the amount is in a foreign currency (other than the library system’s base currency), a currency code appears in parentheses next to Amount. The exchange rate appears in the Rate box, and the date and time the exchange rate was updated appears in the Updated box. If the amount is in the base currency established for your library system, the rate and update date do not appear in the Check/Voucher dialog box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Selection_List_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Selection_List_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4589da59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Check_Voucher_Selection_List_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Check/Voucher Selection List Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check/Voucher Selection List Box

    +

    The Check/Voucher Selection list box opens when you select File > Print > Invoice Voucher (Summary), or Invoice Voucher (Full) from the Invoice workform. Use the Check/Voucher Selection list box to:

    +

    Select the voucher to print when multiple vouchers are associated with the invoice. Be sure to select the voucher that appears at the top of the list because the voucher(s) below it could be for payments that were later reversed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Alert_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Alert_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e96bcad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Alert_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claim Alert List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claim Alert List

    +

    If you open the Claim Alert List from the Acquisitions menu, it lists all the line items that are eligible to be claimed based on the claim alert date set in the supplier record or the purchase order. If you open the Claim Alert List from the Serials menu, it lists the serial issues/parts that are eligible to be claimed based on the claim alert date in the supplier record and the serial holdings record.

    +

    To claim the line item or issue, and select Claim from the context menu. For information on claiming purchase order line items, see Claiming . For information on claiming serials issues or parts, see Claim issues/parts from the Claim Alert List.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..542949ba --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Claim_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claim Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claim Workform

    +

    The Claim workform is generated when a claim is made for an item. See Claiming .

    +

    Use the Claim workform to:

    +
      +
    • Indicate a vendor’s response to a claim  - Type the vendor’s response in the Response box.
    • +
    • Indicate the reason for the claim - Select a reason for the claim in the Reason box.
    • +
    • Enter details about the claimed item - Select View, General menu or click GenVwIcon00314.gif.
    • +
    • View the claim history for the item - Select View, History or click historyviewbutton.gif.
    • +
    +

    Claim Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view on the Claim workform to:

    +
      +
    • Enter the quantity of items - Use the Quantity box.
    • +
    • Enter subscription information if the item is a subscription - Use the Start number, Start date, and Expiration date boxes.
    • +
    • Enter instructions to the supplier if the item is back-ordered -Use the Backorder box.
    • +
    • Enter notes regarding the supplier instructions - Use the Note box.
    • +
    • Enter the date the order for the item was confirmed - Use the Confirm Date box.
    • +
    • Enter the pre-publication title used to order the item - Use the Title Ordered As box.
    • +
    +

    Claim Workform - History View

    +

    Use the History view to review the item’s claim history and enter notes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_Lines_to_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_Lines_to_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4cb85e4d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_Lines_to_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy Lines to Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy Lines to Dialog Box

    +

    The Copy Lines to dialog box appears when you select Tools, Copy To or click CopyToPObutton00313.gif on the Purchase Order Line Items workform.

    +

    Use the Copy Lines To dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Copy purchase order line items to another purchase order - Select Purchase order and type the name or number of the existing purchase order, or click Find to search for the purchase order. Click New to copy the lines to a new purchase order.
    • +
    • Copy purchase order line items to an invoice - Select Invoice and type the name or number of the existing invoice, or click Find to search for the invoice. Click New to copy the lines to a new invoice.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80e646ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy To: Purchase Order Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy To: Purchase Order Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Copy To: Purchase Order dialog box to copy selection list lines from a selection list to a purchase order. Select the decision status of the lines you want to copy to a purchase order, and click OK. To copy all the lines (except those that have a status of Rejected), leave all the statuses selected and click OK. You cannot copy selection list lines with a status of Rejected to a purchase order. See Copy selection list lines to a purchase order .

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3104cd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Copy_To_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy To: Selection List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy To: Selection List Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Copy To: Selection List dialog box to copy selection list lines from a selection list to another selection list. Select the decision status of the lines you want to copy to the other selection list, and click OK. If you want to copy all the line items in the selection list to another selection list, leave all decisions selected, and click OK. See Copy selection list lines to another selection list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c97ff350 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Charges_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Distribute Charges Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Distribute Charges Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Distribute Charges dialog box to distribute charges on an open or prepaid invoice. Select the option that applies to the type of charges, and select Overwrite existing charge or Add to existing charge. If you want to distribute these charges evenly across all lines for the invoice, select Evenly across lines. If you want to distribute the charges based on the total quantity, select the Based on total quantity received. Then, type the dollar amount. See Distributing Charges.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Credits_Discounts_Dialog.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Credits_Discounts_Dialog.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8b2cb0f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Distribute_Credits_Discounts_Dialog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Distribute Credits/Discounts Dialog + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Distribute Credits/Discounts Dialog

    +

    You can distribute credits or discounts to individual line items on invoices with a status of open or prepaid before paying or crediting. See Distributing Credits & Discounts.

    +

    Use the Distribute Credits/Discounts dialog box to:

    +

    Distribute credits and/or discounts on an Open or Prepaid invoice -

    +
      +
    • Enter a credit/discount percentage in the Credit/Discount(%) box or a credit/discount dollar amount in the Credit/Discount($) box. If you enter a dollar amount, it is divided and distributed among all the lines in the invoice. If you enter a discount percentage, the percentage appears in the invoice in the Discount Applied box in view two of every invoice line item of the invoice.
    • +
    • Select Overwrite existing charge or Adjust existing value, which adds the credit/discount to the existing amount.
    • +
    • Select Evenly across line item segments or Based on total quantity received.
    • +
    +

    Enter notes regarding the credits/discounts - Type the text in the Note box. The text appears in the Invoice Pay History.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicate_Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicate_Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea93b190 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicate_Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Duplicate Purchase Order Line Item Segments Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Duplicate Purchase Order Line Item Segments Dialog Box

    +

    The Duplicate Purchase Order Line Item Segments dialog box appears when you select Tools, Check Duplicates from the Purchase Order workform. It lists the duplicate titles ordered for the same destination (location) and collection.

    +

    Use the Duplicate Purchase Order Line Item Segments dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Sort the list of duplicate purchase order line item segments - Click the column headers to sort the list. For example, click Destination and Collection headers to sort the segments by the destination and collection for which the titles are being ordered.
    • +
    • Print the list of duplicate purchase order line item segments - Click Print. The report lists the purchase order line item segments that are duplicates and the purchase orders on which they can be found. It lists the destination, collection, and fund for each duplicate purchase order line item segment.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you select purchase order line item segments to delete from the list box, it deletes the duplicate purchase order line item segments on the open purchase order that you are checking; it does not affect the purchase order line item segments from the other purchase orders.

    +
      +
    • Delete all the duplicate purchase order line item segments - Click the Delete button. All the duplicate segments are deleted from the open purchase order you are checking.
    • +
    • Delete only selected duplicate purchase order line item segments - Select the duplicate purchase order line item segments, right-click and select Delete from the context menu. The selected purchase order line item segments are deleted from the open purchase order that you are checking.
    • +
    • Close the dialog box and continue with the purchase order - Click Close.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicates_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicates_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5a3861d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Duplicates_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Duplicates List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Duplicates List Dialog Box

    +

    The Duplicates List dialog box appears when you add a title in a purchase order line item or invoice line item segment that is a duplicate of a line item segment on at least one other purchase order or purchase order line item. Click Yes to add the duplicate line item segment to the purchase order or invoice.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/EDI_File_Sent_Warning_Message_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/EDI_File_Sent_Warning_Message_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..83662e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/EDI_File_Sent_Warning_Message_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + EDI File Sent Warning Message Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EDI File Sent Warning Message Box

    +

    The EDI File Sent Warning message appears when you select File, Send, and the purchase order was already transmitted via EDI.

    +

    Use the EDI File Sent Warning message box to:

    +
      +
    • Retransmit the purchase order via EDI - Click Continue.
    • +
    • Cancel the EDI transmission - Click Cancel.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be553b07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Fiscal Year Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fiscal Year Explorer

    +

    You can access the Fiscal Year Explorer when you right-click the Fiscal Year record in the Find Tool results list, and select Explore. Or, you can select Links, Fund Explorer from the Explorer workform. Use the Fiscal Year workform to see a graphical view of the Fiscal Year and the fund hierarchy of its associated funds. The Fiscal Year Explorer also displays the following information:

    +

    On the General tab -

    +
      +
    • Name - The name of the fiscal year
    • +
    • Start date - The beginning date for the fiscal year
    • +
    • End date - The ending date for the fiscal year
    • +
    • Status 
    • +
    +

    On the About tab -

    +
      +
    • Record ID number - The number that identifies the fiscal year record.
    • +
    • Creator - The staff member who created the fiscal year record.
    • +
    • Creation date - The date the fiscal year record was created.
    • +
    • Modifier - The staff member who modified the fiscal year record, if applicable.
    • +
    • Modifier date - The date the fiscal year was modified, if applicable.
    • +
    • Fund information - Select each fund in the Fiscal Year Explorer, and the following information appears for the fund and its subfunds:
    • +
    • Total Allocated - The total amount allocated for the fund.
    • +
    • Currently Encumbered - The total amount encumbered in purchase orders that have not yet been paid.
    • +
    • Expended - The total amount paid from this fund.
    • +
    • Free Balance - The total amount left in this fund that is available for purchasing materials.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d3d0f87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fiscal_Year_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fiscal Year Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fiscal Year Workform

    +

    A fiscal year is the period of time for which an organization plans the use of its money. You create fiscal year records and then link the funds to the fiscal year. Your library can have multiple fiscal years of varying lengths that may overlap and be active at the same time.

    +

    Use the Fiscal Year workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create a Fiscal Year record - See Setting Up Fiscal Years.
    • +
    • Create a fund record linked to the fiscal year - Select Tools > Create Fund. See Create a fund.
    • +
    • Define the fiscal year - Type dates in the Start Date box and End Date box.
    • +
    • Name the fiscal year - Type the name for the fiscal year in the Fiscal Year Name box.
    • +
    • Assign the fiscal year to a library - Select the owner’s name in the Owner box. The default is the login library.
    • +
    • Delete the displayed fiscal year record - Select File > Delete, or click DeleteButton.gif.
    • +
    • View the funds that are linked to the fiscal year - Select Links > Fund Explorer.
    • +
    • Print the fiscal year record - Select File > Print, or click PrintButton.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da250dec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Fund Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fund Explorer

    +

    You can access the Fund Explorer from the Fund Workform by selecting Links, Fund Explorer. Or, select the fund in the Find Tool results list, right-click and select Explore. Use the Fund Explorer to see a graphical view of the hierarchical structure of the fund and all its subfunds.

    +

    The General tab displays the following information:

    +
      +
    • Full fund name +
    • +
    • External name +
    • +
    • Donor Name (Organization) if the money in the fund was donated by a organization. The donor information comes from the Donor view of the Fund workform.
    • +
    • Donor Name (Last, First, Middle) if the money in the fund was donated by an individual. The donor information comes from the Donor view of the Fund workform.
    • +
    • Library - the library that owns the fund
    • +
    • Status 
    • +
    • Transfers allowed - Yes indicates transfers are allowed, No indicates no transfers are allowed.
    • +
    • Amount currently encumbered - Displays the total amount encumbered in purchase orders that are have been ordered but not paid for yet.
    • +
    • Amount currently Expended/Debited - Display the total amount expended from the fund (or debited if its a debit fund).
    • +
    • Free balance amount - Displays the total amount left in the free balance.
    • +
    +

    The About tab displays the following information:

    +
      +
    • Record ID number - The identification number for this fund record.
    • +
    • Creator - The staff person who created this record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e230b763 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Fund_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fund Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fund Workform

    +

    Fund records are linked to fiscal year records and track the purchase of library materials and services for the fiscal year. See Managing Funds.

    +

    Use the Fund workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create a subfund - Select Tools > Create Subfund. See Add a subfund.
    • +
    • Enter the fund information and link to a fiscal year - Type the fund name and alternative name. See Create a fund.
    • +
    • Assign the Fund to a library - Select the organization in Owner box (default is login library).
    • +
    • Assign the beginning allocation and change fund balances - Select Tools > Adjust Fund Balances or click AdjFundBalIcon.gif. See Adjust fund balances manually.
    • +
    • Delete the displayed fund - Select File > Delete, or click DeleteButton00293.gif.
    • +
    • Transfer money - Select Tools > Transfer money or click TransferMonIcon.gif. The Transfer Money dialog box appears. See Transfer money between funds.
    • +
    • Enter donor information if the fund is donated - Select View > Donor or click PRacquir00294.gif.
    • +
    • View the fund structure - Select Links > Fund Explorer.
    • +
    • Print the fund record - Select File > Print, or click PrintButton00295.gif.
    • +
    • View fund balance - Select View > Fund Balance, or click FundBalvwIcon.gif.
    • +
    • View fund transactions - If the General view is not displayed, click GenVwIcon.gif, or select the View > General.
    • +
    +

    Fund Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view on the Fund workform to:

    +

    Tip:
    To load all transactions for the fund in one step, press Ctrl+Shift+A.

    +
      +
    • Indicate the public or proper name of the fund - Type the external name in the External name box.
    • +
    • Identify where the money comes from - Type the funding source in the Source box.
    • +
    • Prevent the fund from being selected to pay for materials - Clear the Display check box to prevent the fund from displaying in fund lists. Users will be unable to select the fund to pay for materials, but you can still open the fund in the Fund workform, and transfer money in and out of the fund.
    • +
    • Allow transfers to or from other funds in the same fiscal period - Click Yes Transfers Allowed.
    • +
    • Block transfers of money to or from other funds - Uncheck the Transfers box.
    • +
    • Sort fund transactions - Click the column headers to sort the fund transactions.
    • +
    +

    Fund Workform - Fund Balances View

    +

    Use the Fund Balances view on the Fund workform to:

    +
      +
    • Set the maximum encumbrance for each line item - Type an amount in the Line Item Encumbrance Limit box.
    • +
    • Set the maximum expenditure for each item - Type an amount in the Line Item Expenditure Limit box.
    • +
    • Set the maximum encumbrance for an order - Type an amount in the Order Encumbrance Limit box.
    • +
    • Set the maximum expenditure for an order - Type an amount in the Order Expenditure Limit box.
    • +
    • Set the maximum encumbrance for the fund - Type an amount in the Fund Encumbrance Limit box.
    • +
    • Set the maximum total expenditure for the fund - Type an amount in the Fund Expenditure Limit box.
    • +
    • Set the maximum the fund can be overdrawn - Type an amount in the Overexpenditure box.
    • +
    +

    Fund Workform - Donor View

    +

    If the money in the fund was donated, you can enter the donor’s information in the Fund Record on the Donor view. The fund type must be Donation to enter information in the Donor view.

    +

    Use the Donor view on the Fund workform to:

    +
      +
    • Enter the donor type - Select a fund category.
    • +
    • Enter the donor’s name - Type the donor’s first name, middle name, and last name, or type the organization’s name.
    • +
    • Enter the donor’s address - Type the donor’s street address.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you enter the postal code, the city, county, and state automatically appear.

    +
      +
    • Enter memorial information - If the donation is in someone’s memory, type their name in the In memory of box.
    • +
    • Enter a description of the donation - Type notes in the Description box.
    • +
    • Enter any restrictions on using the fund - If the donor has specified restrictions or specific uses for the money he or she donated, type an explanation in the Restriction box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Funds_Linked_List_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Funds_Linked_List_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c7e8113 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Funds_Linked_List_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Funds Linked List Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Funds Linked List Box

    +

    The Funds list box opens when you click on Links, Funds from a purchase order or invoice and more than one fund is used in that purchase order or invoice. The funds list includes all funds, whether the fund is used to pay for header charges, such as shipping, or for materials ordered (line item segment level).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Line_Item_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Line_Item_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..47faaf3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Line_Item_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Invoice Line Item Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Invoice Line Item Workform

    +

    The Invoice Line Item workform displays the invoice information, the bibliographic title, and the distribution specifics for the line item. You can add an invoice line item with or without a linked purchase order line item. See Adding Invoice Line Items.

    +

    Use the Invoice Line Item workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create item records - Select Tools, Create Item Records.
    • +
    • Receive the line item - Select Tools, Receive or click rec00323.gif.
    • +
    • Adjust the line item on a prepaid line item - Select Tools, Adjust or click adjchgs00324.gif. The Adjust Line Item dialog box appears. If you want to adjust the discount percentage, select Discount (%) and type a percentage in the Amount box. If you want to adjust the unit price, select Unit Price, and type the price in the Amount box.
    • +
    • Pay the line item - Select Tools, Pay or click Pay_Inv_Icon00325.gif.
    • +
    • Credit the line item - Select Tools, Credit or click Credit_invoice_icon.gif .
    • +
    • View the bibliographic and order information for the title - Select View, General or click GenVwIcon00326.gif.
    • +
    • View the purchase order, payment, subscription, and supplier information - Select View, Additional Information or click addinfo.gif.
    • +
    +

    Invoice Line Item Workform - General View

    +

    The Invoice Line Item workform - General View contains the bibliographic information for the invoice line item and the distribution information for each set of copies of the title. Three tabs contain order, charges, and totals information for each set or segment. Use the General view of the Invoice Line Item workform to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the bibliographic information for the line item - Click Find in the Description frame and use the Find Tool to search for and select the title. The Find Tool is disabled for miscellaneous invoices.
    • +
    • Enter information for a brief bibliographic record - If there is no bibliographic record in the database for the invoiced title, type information in the Title, Author, Publisher, Publication Date, ISBN/ISSN, Edition, and Catalog Number boxes. A brief bibliographic record is created except when the invoice type is miscellaneous. For miscellaneous invoices, there is no link to bibliographic data and no record is created.
    • +
    • Specify the unit price for the title - Type the price in the Unit Price box on the Orders tab.
    • +
    • Specify the discount rate - Type the discount rate for the line item in the Discount rate box on the Orders tab.
    • +
    • Enter information for the invoice line item segments - The Orders tab includes the quantity, destination, collection and fund for each set of copies of the title. The Charges tab includes charges for cataloging and other services. See Add segment information for an invoice line.
    • +
    +

    Invoice Line Item Workform - Additional Information View

    +

    Use the Invoice Line Item workform - Additional Information view to:

    +
      +
    • Search for a purchase order line item to link to the invoice line item - Click Find in the Purchase Order frame, and use the Find Tool to search for and select the purchase order line item.
    • +
    • Search for a subscription - Click Find in the Subscription frame and use the Find Tool to search for and select the subscription serial holdings record to link to the invoice line item.
    • +
    • Enter the instructions for the supplier - Type a shipped date, select the Alert Note box, and type a note if applicable.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc837c83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Invoice_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + + Invoice Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Invoice Workform

    +

    The Invoice workform contains information regarding an invoice for materials or services. An invoice can contain information copied from a purchase order, or it can be created without a purchase order. The top section of the invoice workform displays the invoice number and suffix, the type of invoice, its status, date created, the number of titles or lines, the total dollar amount, and the payment method. See Invoicing.

    +

    Use the Invoice workform to:

    +
      +
    • Receive purchase order line items - Select Tools, Rapid Receipt or click rapidrecbtn.gif. See Use Rapid Receipt to receive line items from an invoice.
    • +
    • Distribute charges - Select Tools, Distribute Charges, or click dischrgicon.gif. See Distributing/Adjusting Invoice Charges/Credits.
    • +
    • Distribute credits or discounts - Select Tools | Distribute Credits/Discounts, or click discreddisicon.gif. See Distributing/Adjusting Invoice Charges/Credits.
    • +
    • Adjust charges - Select Tools | Adjust Charges, or click adjchgs.gif. See Crediting Invoices.
    • +
    • Distribute sales tax - Select Tools | Distribute | Sales Tax or click PRacquir00315.jpg. See Add a tax dollar amount on an invoice.
    • +
    • Link the invoice to another invoice - Select Tools | Link Invoice or click linkinv.gif. See Link an invoice to another invoice.
    • +
    • Unlink the invoice - If the invoice is linked to another invoice, Linked invoices appears in the status bar. Select Tools Unlink Invoice or click unlinkinv.gif. See Unlink a linked invoice.
    • +
    • Pay the invoice - Select Tools | Pay, or click Pay_Inv_Icon.gif. See Crediting Invoices. You can pay a miscellaneous invoice that has no line items or the line items have not been received.
    • +
    • Undo the payment - If the invoice was paid in error, you can select Tools | Undo payment, or click Unpaybtn.gif. See Undo the invoice payment.
    • +
    • Delete the invoice - Select File | Delete, or click DeleteButton00316.gif.
    • +
    • Print the invoice - Select File | Print, or click PrintButton00317.gif.
    • +
    • Print the invoice if it is paid - Select File | Print | Invoice Voucher (Summary), or Invoice Voucher (Full). The invoice voucher appears in the Report Preview window. If you selected Invoice Voucher (Summary), the voucher displays only the fund totals and the grand totals. If you selected Invoice Voucher (Full), each line item is displayed.
    • +
    • Enter or view the library, supplier, and fund - Select View | General or click invgenvw.gif.
    • +
    • Add or view line items - Select View | Line Items, or click invlivw.gif. See Adding Invoice Line Items.
    • +
    • View the payment history - Select View | Payment History, or click pymthistvw.gif.
    • +
    • Enter the invoice number - Type the number for the invoice in the Number box. The invoice number can be up to 30 characters in length. You can edit the invoice number until the invoice is paid.   
    • +
    • Enter the invoice number suffix - You can enter a suffix to make it easier to search for the invoice. For example, you can enter a user name or a supplier name. The invoice number suffix can be up to 8 characters in length. You can edit the invoice number suffix until the invoice is paid.
    • +
    • Enter the invoice date - If the date is different from today’s date, type the date or click calbut.gif and select it from the calendar that pops up.
    • +
    • Specify the invoice type - Select an invoice type in the Type box. You can create an invoice without a purchase order when you have an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. or blanket order where the supplier sends specific types of material, but the individual titles are not known until they are received. If you want to create an invoice for charges other than for materials, you can create a miscellaneous invoice. Line items on miscellaneous invoices are not linked to bibliographic records. See Create a miscellaneous invoice.
    • +
    • Select the payment method - When a purchase order with a payment method of Prepaid or Depository Agreement is released, an invoice is automatically created with a matching number and payment method. You can select Depository Agreement on a new invoice without a matching purchase order. When you add invoice line item segments, and choose the funds to pay for the items, only funds with a fund type of Deposit Account will be available.
    • +
    +

    Invoice Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view of the Invoice workform to:

    +
      +
    • Select the library receiving the invoice or shipment - Select the library in the Paid By Name box. Enter the library’s SAN, if applicable, and the plan type.
    • +
    • Specify the payment terms and the fund - Use the Terms Due Date box and the Fund box.
    • +
    • Select the supplier who sent the invoice - Click Find to search for and select the supplier. You do not need to select a supplier for a miscellaneous invoice.
    • +
    • Specify how and when the invoice was sent and received -
      • Select how the invoice was sent in the Transmission Method box.
      • Enter dates in the Shipped Date and Receipt Date boxes.
      • If you want to enter a note regarding this invoice, type it in the General note box.
      • If the file was sent via EDI, the file name appears in the EDI filename box.
      • To alert users that the invoice should be closed by a certain date (meaning no payments or credits should be made after this date), enter the date in the Closing alert date box.   
    • +
    • Specify the payment setup terms - Select Due date and enter a date, or select days and type the number of days.
    • +
    • +

      Enter or change charges for the invoice as a whole (header charges) - In the Header Charges frame, select a charge type, enter an amount, and select a fund. See Add or change invoice header charges and credits.

      +
    • +
    +

    Invoice Workform - Line Items View

    +

    Use the Line Items view of the Invoice workform to:

    +
      +
    • Sort the invoice line items by the contents of a specific column - Click a column header. Click the same column header a second time to reverse the sort order.
    • +
    • Display detailed information about an invoice item - Double-click an invoice line item, or right-click and select Open. The Invoice Line Item workform appears.
    • +
    • Go to other records linked to the invoice line items - Select the line item in the list, right-click and select Link from the context menu. Then, select the type of record that you want to open. If there are multiple linked records of the type you selected, they appear in a list box. Select the specific record from the list box.
    • +
    • Add line items to the invoice - Click AddLineItem.gif above the list of line items. The Invoice Line Item workform appears.
    • +
    • Delete line items from the invoice - Select the item, and click deletetoolbaricon00318.gif. Or, right-click, and select Delete on the context menu.
    • +
    • Receive an invoice line item - Select the item or items, right-click and select Receive.
    • +
    • Create item records - Select the invoice line item, right-click and select Create | Item Records.
    • +
    • Pay invoice line items - Select an item or items and click PayLineItem.gif, or right-click and select Pay.
    • +
    • Credit line items - Select the line items and click CreditLineItem.gif, or right-click and select Credit.
    • +
    • Lock the list view so you retain your place - As you work on line items in the list, you can retain your place. Click locklisticon00319.gif to lock the list view. Click refresh00320.gif to refresh the list view.
    • +
    +

    Invoice Workform - Charges View

    +

    Use the Charges View of the Invoice workform to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the discount percentage - Type the percentage in Discount Applied Rate box.
    • +
    • Specify the sales tax rate - Type the percentage in the Sales Tax Rate box.
    • +
    • Specify the vendor’s charges - Use the Cataloging Services Charge, Special Handling Charge, Service Charge, Shipping Charge, and Other Charges boxes.
    • +
    +

    Invoice Workform - Payment History View

    +

    Use the Payment History view of the Invoice workform to review payments and credits involving the invoice. Click a column header to sort the list. If you want to modify the date or number for a check or voucher, right-click the line that you want to modify and select Modify Payment History. The Modify Check/Voucher Number dialog box appears. You can type a different date and/or number and click OK. The number or date is changed on the Payment History view.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Line_Item_Segment_Receiving_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Line_Item_Segment_Receiving_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e513b941 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Line_Item_Segment_Receiving_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Line Item/Segment Receiving Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Line Item/Segment Receiving Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Line Item/Segment Receiving dialog box to receive a purchase order or invoice line item segment as follows:

    +
      +
    • If the line item segment is on a purchase order that is linked to an invoice, or an invoice that is linked to a purchase order, the amounts in the Quantity ordered and the Quantity received boxes are the same, and cannot be changed. Press OK to receive the segment.
    • +
    • If the invoice line item segment is on an invoice that is not linked to a purchase order, the Quantity ordered is 0, and you can enter the number of copies received in the Quantity received box. See Receive a purchase order/invoice line item segment.
    • +
    • If the purchase order is not yet linked to an invoice, the amounts in the Quantity ordered and the Quantity received boxes are the same, but you can edit the Quantity received to receive fewer copies than were ordered for the segment. See Split receipt of a purchase order line item segment .
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Link_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Link_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..072fb6d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Link_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Link Invoices Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link Invoices Dialog Box

    +

    The Link Invoices dialog box appears when you select Tools, Link Invoices or click linkinv00322.gif. Use the Link Invoices dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Link an existing invoice to the invoice you have open - Click FIND to open the Find Tool and search for the invoice you want to link to the open invoice. Select the invoice in the Find Tool search results and click Ok.
    • +
    • Link a new invoice to the invoice you have open - Select New and click Ok. The New Invoice dialog box appears. Enter the information for the new invoice, and click Ok. See New Invoice Dialog Box.
    • +
    +

    The message Link completed successfully appears at the bottom of the Invoice workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Linked_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Linked_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..520f03c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Linked_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Linked Invoices Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Invoices Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Invoices dialog box appears when you select Tools, Unlink Invoices or click unlinkinv00321.gif. It lists the linked invoices. Select the invoice or invoices you want to unlink and click OK.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Merge_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Merge_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a45016d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Merge_Selection_Lists_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Merge Selection Lists Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Merge Selection Lists Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Merge Selection Lists dialog box to merge two selection lists together. Type the name or number for the destination record into which you want to merge this list, or click Find to search for the record. The selection lists must both have the same parent library to be able to merge them. The current selection list is deleted, and all titles are copied into the destination list. See Merge selection lists.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Check_Voucher_Number.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Check_Voucher_Number.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed8c984b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Check_Voucher_Number.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Modify Check/Voucher Number + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify Check/Voucher Number

    +

    Use the Modify Check/Voucher Number dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Change the payment method - Select Check or Voucher.
    • +
    • Change the check or voucher number - Type the new number in the Number box.
    • +
    • Change the check or voucher date - Type the date in the Date box or click the arrow button and select another date from the calendar.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Decision_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Decision_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5354246 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Modify_Decision_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Modify Decision Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Modify Decision Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Modify Decision dialog box to change the decision on one or multiple selection list lines. Select a decision that you want to apply to all the selection list line items. See Approve multiple selection list line items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Invoice_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Invoice_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..71efd339 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Invoice_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + New Invoice Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Invoice Dialog Box

    +

    Use the New Invoice dialog box to create a new invoice by copying line items or by linking from another invoice. The New Invoice dialog box appears when you do either of the following:

    +
      +
    • From the Purchase Order workform, select Tools, Copy Lines To...and select Invoice, New from the Copy Line To dialog box.
    • +
    • From the Invoice workform, select Tools, Link Invoice and select New from the Link Invoices dialog box.
    • +
    +

    Enter the information for the new invoice:

    +
      +
    • Type the invoice number and suffix in the Invoice no and Suffix boxes.
    • +
    • If you want to enter a different date than the current date, type over the date or click the calendar icon and select a different date.
    • +
    • If you want to change the owning branch, select a different branch in the Owner box.
    • +
    • If you want to change the invoice type, select a different type in the Invoice type box. The invoice type defaults to Miscellaneous when you are linking invoices.
    • +
    • If you want to change the payment type, select it from the Payment box.
    • +
    • Click Find to search for and select a supplier.
    • +
    • Click OK to create the new invoice.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a153083 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + New Purchase Order Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Purchase Order Dialog Box

    +

    The New Purchase Order dialog box appears when you choose to copy a purchase order to a new purchase order. Use the New Purchase Order dialog box to specify the information for the new purchase order. See Copy lines/segments to another purchase order.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48f5530b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + New Record Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Record Dialog Box

    +

    You can create a new record that is a copy of the existing record, or you can clear the workform and create a new record without any of the characteristics of the existing record. If there are templates associated with this type of record, the option Use existing template is available.

    +
      +
    • Select Clear work form to create a new record without any of the values displayed in the existing workform.
    • +
    • Select Copy existing work form to create a new record that is a copy of the existing workform.
    • +
    • Select Use existing template and select the template from the list to create a new record using a template. This option is available only for records that use templates.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overencumbrance_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overencumbrance_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..05eaf2d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overencumbrance_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Overencumbrance List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overencumbrance List Dialog Box

    +

    The Overencumbrance List dialog box appears when you attempt to release a purchase order (other than a prepaid purchase order) with a dollar amount that exceeds the amount in the associated funds.

    +

    Use the Overencumbrance List dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Continue releasing the purchase order even though the funds will be overencumbered - Click Continue. This results in a negative fund limit, unless the fund is adjusted. You must have permission to override these limits. See your Polaris administrator.
    • +
    • Adjust the fund limits to allow the release of the purchase order - Click Adjust Fund. Right-click the fund to adjust and select Open. Adjust the fund limits on the Fund workform. Adjust fund balances manually.
    • +
    • Cancel the release of the purchase order - Click Cancel.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overexpenditure_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overexpenditure_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb1e3c6b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Overexpenditure_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Overexpenditure List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overexpenditure List Dialog Box

    +

    The Overexpenditure List dialog box appears when you attempt to pay an invoice, invoice line item, or invoice line item segment that would exceed the fund balance or other expenditure limits in the fund. It also appears when you attempt to release a prepaid purchase order that will exceed the fund limits.

    +

    Use the Overexpenditure List dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Pay the invoice even though it will exceed the free balance or the limits set in the fund - Click Continue and if you have the permission Pay invoice exceeding fund expenditure limits, you can pay the invoice. If you do not have the permission, the Override dialog box appears and a staff member with this permission can enter the required user name and password.
    • +
    • Adjust the fund limits to allow the payment of the invoice - Click Adjust Fund. Right-click the fund to adjust and select Open. Adjust the fund limits on the Fund workform if you have the permission Modify fund. See Adjust fund balances manually.
    • +
    • Cancel the payment - Click Cancel.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Payment_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Payment_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3364a85f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Payment_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Payment Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Payment Options Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Payment Options dialog box to specify how a purchase order is to be paid. See Releasing and Transmitting Purchase Orders. If the payment is to a supplier who uses a foreign currency, the amount has the currency code in parentheses. The exchange rate appears along with the last date and time when the currency exchange rate was updated.

    +

    Select one of the following options to indicate the payment method:

    +
      +
    • Pay on receipt and click OK if your library will pay for the materials when they are received.
    • +
    • Prepay - The dialog box expands so that you can enter payment information. Voucher is selected by default, but you can select Check if your library is paying by check. Then type the check or voucher number and enter a date if the payment date is different from today’s date. Click OK when you are finished entering information.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Process_EDI_Invoices_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Process_EDI_Invoices_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56c7d7e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Process_EDI_Invoices_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Process EDI Invoices Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Process EDI Invoices Workform

    +

    You can access the Process EDI Invoices workform by selecting EDI Services, Process EDI invoices from the Acquisitions menu, pressing Alt A +E or by clicking the EDI icon in the Acquisitions toolbar.

    +

    Use the Process EDI Invoices workform to display and process EDI invoices where the number of items sent is not equal to the number of items ordered.

    +

    Note:
    Invoices appear on this workform only when the Hold partial receipt invoices check box is checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile. This setting prevents EDI invoices from being created automatically if any of the line items in the invoice has an number of copies that is not equal to the number of copies ordered. EDI invoices are generated automatically if the number of copies ordered and the number of copies received match for all titles on the invoice.

    +
      +
    • Enter the search criteria for the invoices:
      • Enter the invoice number (maximum of 30 characters)
      • Enter the supplier’s SAN
      • Enter an invoice date range by selecting dates in the From and To boxes.
    • +
    • Filter by organization - If you want to process only a specific organization’s invoices, select the organization. Set the organization filter to All to see all unprocessed partial EDI invoices.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Find the partial EDI invoices - Click Go.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Generate the invoices -Select an invoice, right click and select Generate invoice or click the toolbar icon.
    • +
    +

    The invoice is generated. If the Update linked PO line items check box is checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile in Polaris Administration, the linked purchase order line items are updated to Received, and any segments that could not be received are set to On-order. If the Update linked PO line items check box is not checked in the EDI Invoice Defaults profile, the purchase order line items remain unreceived. You can link to the purchase order and receive the line items, or you can receive from the invoice.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e6d576fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purchase Order Line Item Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purchase Order Line Item Workform

    +

    Use the Purchase Order Line Item workform to:

    + +

    PO Line Item Workform - General View

    +

    The three tabs on the lower half of the General view contain information relating to the individual segments that are part of the line item.

    +

    Use the Purchase Order Line Item workform - General view to:

    +
      +
    • Select and display the bibliographic information for a new line item -Enter the ISBN in the ISBN field and press Enter. If there is an exact match, the information for the bibliographic record fills in automatically. If there is no exact match, the Find Tool opens where you can search for and select a record. You can create a new brief bibliographic record by entering the information in the Description frame. If you want to use a bibliographic template to enter this information, click the Template button and select a template from the list. See Adding Titles to a Purchase Order.
    • +
    • Display or specify charges associated with a line item segment. Select the Charges tab. See Add charges for a purchase order line item segment .
    • +
    • Display the totals associated with the line item - Select the Totals tab. See View totals for a purchase order line item segment
    • +
    • Add purchase order line item segment information - Enter the segment information. See Add purchase order line item segments.
    • +
    • Enter the list price for the line item - Use the Unit Price box.
    • +
    • Enter the discount rate - Use the Discount rate box.
    • +
    • Enter the discount price - Use the Discount price box.
    • +
    • Enter the number of copies to order - Select the Orders tab and use the Qty box.
    • +
    • Enter an alert for the line item - If the Alert box is checked, it indicates that the item should be given priority processing when it is received. An alert icon appears in the line items display of the Purchase Order and in the Find Tool.
    • +
    • Enter the distribution information for the copies of the title - Select the Orders tab and specify the quantity for each set of copies of the title for a destination and collection.
    • +
    • Enter charges for cataloging and other services - The Charges tab includes charges for cataloging and other services. See Add charges for a purchase order line item segment .
    • +
    • View or specify the funds being used to pay for an individual segment - On the Orders tab, use the Fund box to select a fund for the segment. If the fund is not listed, right-click the segment, select Find Fund from the context menu, and select the fund from the Find Tool search results. If you want to use more than one fund, right-click the segment, select Split Fund from the context menu, and select funds for splitting the charges. See Split funds for a purchase order line item segment.
    • +
    • View totals for the line item segments - Select the Totals tab.
    • +
    • Cancel the line item segment order - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, and select Cancel from the context menu.
    • +
    • Close the line item segment order - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, and select Close from the context menu.
    • +
    • Copy the line item segment to an invoice - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, and select Copy to from the context menu.
    • +
    • Receive a line item segment - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, and select Receive from the context menu.
    • +
    • Modify the status of a line item segment - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, select Modify Status from the context menu, and select a new status.
    • +
    • Replicate the line item segment in the line item - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, and select Replicate from the context menu.
    • +
    • Delete the line item segment - On the Orders tab, right-click the segment, and select Delete from the context menu.
    • +
    • Indicate whether this ordered line item should be displayed in the PAC - If the Display in PAC box is checked, the item is displayed in the PAC.
    • +
    +

    Purchase Order Line Item Workform - Instructions to Supplier View

    +

    This view displays instructions to the supplier related to a specific line item on the purchase order. This information is for the library’s use and does not get transferred to the supplier automatically. However, the instructions appear on the printed purchase order. See Add supplier instructions for a purchase order line item.

    +

    Enter supplier instructions relating to a specific line item as follows:  

    +
      +
    • Cataloging Services - Select the cataloging service the supplier is to provide for this line item. For example, select Full processing if the item is to be fully cataloged.
    • +
    • Confirm date - This is the date the supplier confirmed the order. To enter the date, type it or click the box to open the calendar icon and select the date.
    • +
    • Backorder - If you want to backorder the copies in the line item, select an option.
    • +
    • Quantity - If you want to backorder any copies, enter the quantity.
    • +
    • +

      Public note - If you want a note to display in the PAC, type it here. The note is carried over when an item record is created, and it appears in the Details view of the item in the PAC.    

      +
    • +
    • +

      Non-public note - Type a note for library staff if you want to enter a note regarding this line item. If the line item was copied from a selection list line item that contained a note, the note appears here.  

      +
    • +
    • +

       Title Ordered As - Type the pre-publication title, if applicable.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can search for the purchase order line item by Title Ordered As.

    +
      +
    • Rental Return Date - If the item is a rental, enter the date it should be returned.
    • +
    • Binding Format - Select the preferred binding format for the items being ordered.
    • +
    • Binding Substitution - Select the substitution for the preferred binding or you can indicate that you do not want to substitute the binding.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The information in the Claims fields comes from the Supplier record, but you can change the information.

    +
      +
    • Claim alert date - Date that the item generates an entry on the Claim Alert List, which means it is eligible to be claimed.
    • +
    • Claim Waiting Period - Number of days after the purchase order is released before the first claim is sent to the supplier.
    • +
    • Maximum claims - Maximum number of claims to be sent out for the item.
    • +
    • Claim cycle - Number of days after each claim when the sent out.
    • +
    • Cancel wait period - Number of days after the last claim is made before an item is canceled.
    • +
    • Claim notice - Indicates that a notice will be generated when a claim is made.
    • +
    • Cancel notice - Indicates that a cancel notice will be generated when an item is canceled.
    • +
    • Auto cancel - Indicates that the item will be canceled automatically after the last claim and the cancel wait period.
    • +
    • Membership - Check this box if the items were ordered through a membership in an organization.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0b144dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purchase_Order_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purchase Order Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purchase Order Workform

    +

    Use the Purchase Order workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create a new purchase order - Select File | New or click newicon.gif. See Creating Purchase Orders.
    • +
    • Release the purchase order - Select Tools, Release or click ReleasePObutton.gif. When you release a purchase order, you can choose whether the purchase order is prepaid (an invoice is created automatically), or paid on receipt of the items. See Releasing and Transmitting Purchase Orders.
    • +
    • Receive the entire order - If you have received the whole order, including all copies of every title ordered, select Tools, Receive or click rec.gif. See Receiving Orders.
    • +
    • Cancel the purchase order - Select Tools, Cancel or click cancelicon.gif. See Cancel a whole order.
    • +
    • Close a purchase order - Select Tools, Close or click ClosePObtn.gif. To close a purchase order or purchase order line item from the purchase order, all the purchase order line item segments must have a status of currently received, closed, or canceled. See Closing Orders.
    • +
    • Save the purchase order as a template - Select File | Save as Template to save the workform as a purchase order template. See Create a purchase order template.
    • +
    • Assign a number and suffix to the purchase order or change the purchase order number or suffix - Type a number in the Purchase Number box. You can also specify a purchase order suffix in the box to the right of the Number box. The purchase order number can be up to 30 characters in length, and the suffix can be up to 8 characters in length.

      You can edit the purchase order number and number suffix before and after the purchase order is released. If you change the purchase order number and/or suffix for a released purchase order, the Properties page displays the original purchase order number. For any linked on-order item records, the Source and Acquisition view of the Item Record workform displays the new purchase order number.
    • +
    • Specify the purchase order type - Select an option in the Type box.
    • +
    • Specify the method of payment - Select an option in the Payment Method box.
    • +
    • Create an invoice based on this purchase order- Select Links > Create > Invoice/Credit Memo. See Creating Invoices.
    • +
    • View a list of all funds used in the purchase order - Select Links, Funds to see a list of all the funds used for all line items in the purchase order as well as any funds used at the purchase order header level.
    • +
    • Copy purchase order lines to an invoice or purchase order - Select Tools > Copy To, or click CopyToPObutton.gif. See Copy lines/segments to another purchase order.
    • +
    • Delete the purchase order - Select File > Delete, or click DeleteButton00304.gif.
    • +
    • Print the purchase order - Select File > Print, or click PrintButton00305.gif.
    • +
    • Specify the ordering library and supplier - Select View > General.
    • +
    • Add line items to the purchase order - Select View > Line Items or click poliicon.gif.
    • +
    • Check for duplicate purchase order line item segments - Select Tools > Check Duplicates, or click chkdupbtn.gif to check for duplicate line item segments.
    • +
    • Specify shipping, handling, and other supplier instructions- Select View > Supplier Instructions or click ponotesicon.gif.
    • +
    +

    Purchase Order Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view of the Purchase Order workform to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the library creating the purchase order - Use the Name, SAN, and Authorization boxes.
    • +
    • Specify the claiming information for this purchase order - When you select a supplier, the claiming information in the supplier record is copied to the purchase order. However, you can change the claiming information for this specific purchase order. Specify the claiming information using the Maximum Claims and the five Claim Waiting Period boxes.
    • +
    • Specify the supplier - Click the Supplier Find button and select the supplier.
    • +
    • Add charges for the purchase order as a whole (header charges)- In the Header Charges frame, select a charge type, type an amount, select a fund, and click Add. See Add or change invoice header charges and credits.
    • +
    • Remove header charges- In the Header Charges frame, select a charge entry and click Remove.
    • +
    • Enter an external ID for the purchase order- This field supports integration between Polaris Acquisitions and the Advantage 3 financial system software. It can be updated automatically by a daily process that is loaded into Polaris from Advantage 3, or it can be updated manually by typing an identifier. You can search for purchase orders in the Polaris Find Tool by the External PO number.
    • +
    • Change the purchase order number and/or purchase order number suffix.
    • +
    +

    Purchase Order Workform - Line Items View

    +

    Use the Line Items view on the Purchase Order workform to:

    +
      +
    • Sort line items - Click the column heading to sort the list by the contents in that column. Click the same column heading again to reverse the sort order.
    • +
    • Add a line item to the purchase order - Click addliicon.gif or press CTRL+I. See Adding Titles to a Purchase Order.
    • +
    • Place a hold on a line item - Select the line item, right-click and select Place Hold from the context menu, or click HoldsIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Remove a pending line item from the purchase order- Select the pending line item, and click deletetoolbaricon.gif. Or, right-click, and select Delete on the context menu.
    • +
    • Display details about a line item - Right-click the item, and click Open on the context menu. The Purchase Order Line Item workform appears.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a red exclamation mark appears next to the purchase order line item, it means the Alert box is checked in the Purchase Order Line Item workform. For bulk-added purchase order line items with multiple ISBNs, the box is checked automatically if the Polaris Administration parameter Bulk add to PO: Add Alert to PO line item for multiple ISBNs in Polaris Administration is set to Yes. See Set alert indicator for bulk adding titles with multiple ISBNs.

    +
      +
    • Receive one or more whole line items - Select the on-order items and click rec00306.gif. Or, right-click, and select Receive.
    • +
    • Undo receipt of a line item - If you received the line item in error, select it and click undorec.gif.
    • +
    • Copy items to the invoice - Press CTRL while selecting the items to copy to the invoice, right-click, and select Copy To.
    • +
    • Cancel items - Press CTRL while selecting the items to cancel, right-click, and select Cancel.
    • +
    • Claim items - Press CTRL while selecting the items to claim, right-click, and select Claim.
    • +
    • Print items - Press CTRL while selecting the items to print, right-click, and select Print.
    • +
    • Print workslips - Right-click a line item and select Print, PO line item workslip.
    • +
    • Lock the list view so you retain your place - As you work on line items in the list, you can retain your place. Click locklisticon00307.gif to lock the list view. Click refresh00308.gif to refresh the list view.
    • +
    • Bulk update purchase order notes - right-click one or line items and select the Update Note option. See Bulk Update Purchase Order Notes.
    • +
    +

    Purchase Order Workform - Charges View

    +

    Use the Charges view on the Purchase Order workform to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the supplier’s discount and sales tax rates - Enter the percentages in the Discount applied and the Sales tax boxes. When you save the purchase order, the sales tax amount is calculated, and it displays in the Sales tax box under Totals.
    • +
    • View header charges- Header charges are for services, such as shipping, associated with the order as a whole. They are entered on the General view of the Purchase Order workform and display on the Charges view. See Add or change invoice header charges and credits.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    All charges associated with the processing of a particular copy of a title are specified at the purchase order line item segment level.

    +
      +
    • View the charges subtotals and totals -
      • Line Item- The Materials subtotal displays the total price of all the materials ordered on the purchase order. The Charges subtotal is the sum of all the line item charges.
      • Totals - The total sales tax and the grand total for the order.
    • +
    • View the EDI information - If the order was transmitted electronically via EDI, the unique file name, the date the file was created, and the time the file was created are listed under EDI.
    • +
    +

    Purchase Order Workform - Instructions to Supplier View

    +

    Use the Instructions to Supplier view on the Purchase Order workform to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the shipping information - Use the Shipping Method and Do Not Ship Before boxes.
    • +
    • Enter instructions to the supplier - If items are backordered or delayed for binding, you can use the Binding Substitution, Delayed Billing, and Backorder boxes. Select any applicable services for cataloging in the Cataloging Services box. You can also enter other instructions in the Special Instructions box.
    • +
    • Enter the date the order was confirmed- Use the Order Confirmed Date box.
    • +
    • View the order’s cancellation date - If the order was canceled, the date appears in the Order Canceled Date.
    • +
    • Specify the invoicing requirements - Use No of Copies, Delivery Method, and Sequencing boxes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purge_Purchase_Orders_and_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purge_Purchase_Orders_and_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56bd2c87 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Purge_Purchase_Orders_and_Invoices_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box, select Utilities, Acquisitions Processing, Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices.

    +

    Use the Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Select the organization(s) for which the purchase orders and invoices will be purged.
    • +
    • Specify the age of the purchase orders and invoices to purge by selecting a date. Purchase orders and invoices with an status date earlier than the selected date will be deleted.
    • +
    • Schedule the job by selecting a date in the Scheduled field.
    • +
    +

    See: Purge invoices and purchase orders.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rapid_Receipt_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rapid_Receipt_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b0bcf74e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rapid_Receipt_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Rapid Receipt Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Rapid Receipt Dialog Box

    +

    You can receive purchase order line items and create the corresponding invoice line items in one step with the Rapid Receipt dialog box.

    +

    Use the Rapid Receipt dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Identify the purchase order line item you want to receive - Type the purchase order line item number in the PO line ID box, or type the ISBN or ISSN in the ISBN/ISSN box, or type the title in the Title box, and press Enter or click Find.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Using the purchase order line item ID will give you the exact match to the purchase order line item.

    +
      +
    • If there is an exact match to the purchase order line item ID or the ISBN/ISSN you entered, the dialog box is filled in automatically with the information from the purchase order line item, if one exact match is found.
    • +
    • If no matching purchase order line item exists with the same purchase order line item ID or ISBN/ISSN, the Find Tool opens and you can search by a different number.
    • +
    • If you entered an ISBN or ISSN, and there are multiple matching purchase order line items, the Find Tool opens with the matching purchase order line items displayed. You can select one, and the dialog box will be filled in.
    • +
    • If you entered a title in the Title box, the Find Tool opens with the matching purchase order line items displayed. You can select one purchase order line item and the dialog box will be filled in.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the purchase order line item has a status that prevents it from being received, or if it has already been copied to another invoice, a message appears, and the line item is not added to the invoice. You can go to the purchase order line item and check the status or enter the number for the next purchase order line item.

    +
      +
    • Enter a different discount price - If there is a different discount price on the printed invoice than the discount price that appears from the matching purchase order line item, type it in the Discount price box.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This is the discounted unit price, not the total price of the line item. The total price of the line item will appear when the invoice line item is created. You can make adjustments, if necessary, in the invoice line item.

    +
      +
    • Enter an alert to appear on the invoice line item - If there is some special condition that requires attention on the invoice, select the Set invoice line alert check box, and type a note in the Alert note box.
    • +
    • Save the invoice line item - Click Save/Next to save the invoice line item on the invoice and clear the Rapid Receipt dialog box, so you can enter the next purchase order line item.
    • +
    +

    The invoice line item is added, and the purchase order line item is updated to Received in one step. If there are hold requests for the title, and the SA profile Receiving line items: Warn if linked hold requests is set to Yes, a message appears.

    +

    See also: Use Rapid Receipt to receive line items from an invoice

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Receive_ASN_Shipments_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Receive_ASN_Shipments_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f71b687 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Receive_ASN_Shipments_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Receive ASN Shipments Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Receive ASN Shipments Workform

    +

    The Receive ASN Shipments workform opens when you select EDI Services, Receive ASN Shipments from the Acquisitions menu. To use this workform, the ASN Shipments box must be checked on the Supplier workform. For more information, see Receive using the Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN).

    +

    Use the Receive ASN Shipments workform to receive materials by doing the following:

    +
      +
    • Select the branch or select All in the Filter By Organization box.
    • +
    • Search for the purchase order line items using one of the following methods:
    • +
    • Select ASN tracking barcode, and scan the barcode located on the label attached to the outside of the carton. Or, type the number that displays under the barcode.
    • +
    • Select Supplier SAN, and type the supplier’s SAN.
    • +
    • Select ASN date range and select a from and to date.
    • +
    • Click Go.
    • +
    +

    The top section of the workform displays the shipment information.

    +
      +
    • Select a tracking barcode in the top section of the workform.
    • +
    +

    The line item information for the selected shipment appears in the bottom section of the workform.

    +
      +
    • To link to the purchase order or purchase order line item, select a line item in the bottom portion of the workform, right-click and select Links.
    • +
    • Click Receive Carton.
    • +
    +

    The line items are received. The corresponding number of copies are received in the linked purchase order line item.

    +

    To print purchase order line item workslips from the Receive ASN Shipments workform, select File > Print > PO Line Item Workslips.

    +

    Note:
    The Polaris Administration Acquisitions parameter PO line item workslips: Batch print during ASN receiving must be set to Yes to allow the printing of workslips from the Receive ASN Shipments workform. See Set batch print workslips option for ASN receiving.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Record_Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Record_Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e39ef554 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Record_Check_Voucher_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Record Check/Voucher Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Check/Voucher Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Record Check/Voucher Data dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Indicate the payment method - Select Check or Voucher.
    • +
    • Record the check or voucher number - Type the amount in the Number box.
    • +
    • Record the check or voucher date - Type the date in the Date box if you want to change it from the present date. Click the Calendar icon to select a date.
    • +
    • View the exchange rate and update date - If the amount is in a foreign currency, a currency code appears in parentheses next to Amount. The exchange rate appears in the Rate box, and the date and time the exchange rate was updated appears in the Updated box. If the amount is in the base currency established for your library system, the rate and update date do not appear in the Check/Voucher dialog box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rename_a_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rename_a_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8fe3ed16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Rename_a_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Rename a Selection List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Rename a Selection List Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Rename a Selection List dialog box to give a different name to an existing selection list. Type the new name in the Name box and click OK. See Rename a selection list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Segment_Payment_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Segment_Payment_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..abcf86a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Segment_Payment_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Segment Payment/Credit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Segment Payment/Credit Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Segment Payment/Credit dialog box to.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Line_Item_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Line_Item_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b4cedcf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Line_Item_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Selection List Line Item Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Selection List Line Item Workform

    +

    Use the Selection List Line Item workform to:

    +
      +
    • Add a new title to a selection list - Select File > New or click the down arrow next to the file icon newSLLIicon.gifand select one of the following options:
    • +
    • Copy Segment Data - Copies the distribution information (destination, collection, and fund), but not the bibliographic information. If the Retain material type when copying line item segment data profile is set to Yes, the material type is also copied to the new selection list line item. See Retain material type in copied line items.
    • +
    • Clear Workform - Creates a new blank selection list line item with only one segment containing default data specified in the Selection list line item defaults profile in Polaris Administration. See Specify defaults for selection list line items.
    • +
    • Copy Existing Workform - Copies all the title and distribution information, including all segments, to the new selection list line item.
    • +
    • Add a description of the title - Select View > Additional Description or click  AddiDescbn.gif.
    • +
    • Delete the selection list line item record - Select File > Delete, or click DeleteButton00300.gif.
    • +
    • Print the selection list line item record - Select File > Print, or click PrintButton00301.gif.
    • +
    +

    Selection List Line Item Workform - General View

    +

    Use the Selection List Line Item workform General view to:

    +
      +
    • View the decision and decision date.
    • +
    • Add segments to the selection list line item - Click the next segment line to add another segment, and specify the number of copies of the title for a specific destination (library branch), collection, and fund.
    • +
    • View the unit price for the selected title. +
    • +
    • Delete a segment - Right-click a selection list line item segment and select Delete, or click DeleteButton00302.gif.
    • +
    • Print a segment - Select File > Print, or click PrintButton00303.gif.
    • +
    +

    Selection List Line Item Workform - Additional Description View

    +

    The Additional Description view of the Selection List Line Item workform displays additional bibliographic information about the title. If you used the Find Tool to search for and select a title that already exists in the database, you can enter information only in the Notes box. If you are entering a new title that does not exist in the database, you can enter information in all the boxes on the Additional Description view. A brief bibliographic record is created using this information if you copy the selection list line item to a purchase order.

    +

    Use the Additional Description view of the Selection List Line Item workform to:

    +
      +
    • Type bibliographic information - If you are added a title manually on the General view of the Selection List Line Item workform, type in the Author, Publisher, Publication Date, Review, Summary and other boxes on the Additional Description view.
    • +
    • Type notes - You can enter notes for titles that exist in the Polaris database and for titles that you enter manually. The information in the Note box is copied to the Non-public note box on the Purchase Order Line Item workform. If on-order item records are created when the purchase order is released, the note is copied to the Non-public note box on the Item record workform. This note also appears on printed purchase order line item workslips.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df42a94d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Selection_List_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Selection List Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Selection List Workform

    +

    Use the Selection List workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create a new selection list of titles for consideration - Select File > New.
    • +
    • Check for duplicate titles in selection lists - Select Tools > Check Duplicates, or click dupbut.gif.
    • +
    • Merge selection lists - Select Tools > Merge, or click mergebut.gif.
    • +
    • Copy all the selection lists to a purchase order - Select Tools > Copy to Purchase Order, or click copytoPO.gif.
    • +
    • Copy specific selection list line items to a purchase order - Select the line items that you want to copy, right-click and select Copy to Purchase Order, or click copytoPO00296.gif. The Find Tool appears. Search for and select the purchase order to which you want to copy the selection list line items.
    • +
    • Copy all the selection list lines to another selection list - Select Tools > Copy to Selection List or click copytoSL.gif at the top of the Selection List workform. The Find Tool appears. Search for and select the existing selection list to which you want to copy all the line items.
    • +
    • Copy specific selection list lines to another selection list - Select the line items in the list, right-click and select Copy to Selection List, or click copytoSL00297.gif on the list tools bar above the line items list. The Find Tool appears. Search for and select the existing selection list to which you want to copy the highlighted selection list line items.
    • +
    • Approve the selection list - Select Tools > Approve or click SelectionListApprove.gif. .
    • +
    • Delete the selection list record - Select File > Delete, or click DeleteButton00298.gif.
    • +
    • Print the selection list record - Select File > Print, or click PrintButton00299.gif.
    • +
    • Lock the list view so you retain your place - As you work on line items in the list, you can retain your place. Click locklisticon.gif to lock the list view. Click refresh.gif to refresh the list view.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Split_Funds_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Split_Funds_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f311ee48 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Split_Funds_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Split Funds Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Split Funds Dialog Box

    +

    The Split Funds dialog box appears when you right-click a segment and select Split Funds, or click SplitFundsButton.gif. Specify two or more funds to pay for a single line item segment:

    +
      +
    • Select the fund in the Funds box, or click Find to search for and select the fund.
    • +
    • In the Percent allocation box, type the percentage of the segment total to be covered by the fund. The Unpaid box indicates the amount that remains unpaid.
    • +
    • Click Add to add a fund to the list, or Remove to remove a fund from the list.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Supplier_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Supplier_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..85feec9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Supplier_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + Supplier Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Supplier Workform

    +

    The Supplier Record workform contains information regarding the materials supplier. It has account information, supplier addresses for ordering and paying, claiming information, and EDI transmission information (if applicable). All purchase orders are linked to a supplier record. Serial Holdings records and Subscription records may also be linked to a supplier record. See Creating, Copying, and Deleting Supplier Records.

    +

    Use the Supplier workform to:

    +
      +
    • Link to other records - Select Links from the menu and select the type of record you want to open. If multiple records of this type are linked to the supplier record, a linked list box appears. You can right-click on any record in the list, and open it or perform other actions from the linked list box.
    • +
    • Enter the supplier’s identifying information - Type the supplier name, alternative name, SAN number, account number, and select the library. See Create a new supplier record.
    • +
    • Enter the supplier’s EDI information - If the supplier accepts electronic orders, enter the information to allow the orders to be transmitted to the supplier and the acknowledgment and invoice from the supplier. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data .
    • +
    • Enter a foreign currency - If the supplier is outside of the country and uses a currency other than your base currency, select the currency in the Currency box. The currency must be enabled in Polaris Administration for it to appear in this list. See Add or enable a foreign currency.
    • +
    • Enter, change, or review the address where orders are sent - Select Orders from the View menu, or click supordicon.gif. See Add the supplier’s address
    • +
    • Enter, change, or review the address where payments are sent - Select Payments from the View menu, or click suppymicon.gif. See Add the supplier’s address.
    • +
    • Enter, change, or review the address where claims are sent - Select Claims from the View menu, or click supclmsicon.gif. See Add the supplier’s address.
    • +
    +

    Supplier Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view of the Supplier workform to:

    +

    Note:
    The limits set in the Supplier Record are informational only; they do not prevent overencumbrances or overexpenditures.

    +

    See also: Creating, Copying, and Deleting Supplier Records.

    +
      +
    • Set limits for encumbrances - Enter encumbrance amounts in the following boxes under Encumbrance Limits:
    • +
    • Line Item - The total amount the library allows to be encumbered for a single line item on an order.
    • +
    • Order - The total amount the library allows to be encumbered for a single purchase order.
    • +
    • Supplier - Total amount the library allows to be encumbered for this supplier.
    • +
    • Set limits for expenditures - Enter expenditure amounts in the following boxes under Expenditure Limits:
    • +
    • Line Item - The total amount the library allows to be expended for a single line item on an order.
    • +
    • Order - The total amount the library allows to be expended for a single purchase order.
    • +
    • Supplier - The total amount the library allows to be expended for this supplier.
    • +
    • Enter EDI information - If the supplier accepts EDI orders, next to Accepts, select EDI orders. The other options become available. If applicable, select Enriched EDI orders or ASN Shipments. See Enter the supplier’s EDI ordering data . The following fields are required for EDI ordering:
      • Address/profile ID - Indicates whether the vendor requires a SAN suffix or a library account number for the Address/Profile ID transaction field in the EDI X12 v.4010 PO transmission.
      • FTP address - An address protocol that allows access to the vendor’s root directory.
      • Username - A vendor-assigned username that is required to access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site and transmit EDI X12 transaction files.
      • Password - A vendor-assigned password that is required to access the FTP site and transmit EDI X12 transaction files.
      • POA/INV directory - The directory in which the outgoing X12 Purchase Order Acknowledgments and Invoices are placed by the vendor for pickup by the Polaris software.
      • PO directory - The name of the directory in which the incoming X12 Purchase Orders are to be placed for processing by the vendor.
      • PO file extension - The vendor-specified file extension for X12 purchase orders. The Polaris X12 Purchase Order is created in part based on this extension. You must enter a PO file extension to transmit files via EDI.
    • +
    • Enter notes in the General and Plan notes fields - Type any notes regarding the supplier’s plan, such as an approval plan An arrangement with a publisher or vendor to send materials automatically. With an approval plan, it is not necessary for the library to order each title individually, and titles that are not considered appropriate may be returned by the library. An approval plan with a vendor is usually an agreement that the library will receive current imprints selected for the library on the basis of a detailed profile. name, in the Plan notes box. Type general notes in the General box. You can search for supplier records using plan notes in the Limit By option in the Find Tool. The notes fields can hold up to 400 characters each.
    • +
    +

    Supplier Workform - Orders View

    +

    Use the Orders view of the Supplier workform to:

    + +

    Supplier Workform - Payments View

    +

    Use the Payments view of the Supplier workform to:

    + +

    Supplier Workform - Claims View

    +

    Use the Claims view of the Supplier workform to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Transfer_Money_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Transfer_Money_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bfc1dc69 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Transfer_Money_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Transfer Money Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Transfer Money Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Transfer Money dialog box to transfer money from one fund to another. Select the fund to which the money is being transferred, type the dollar amount, and type a note indicating the reason for the transfer. See Transfer money between funds.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Update_Currency_Exchange_Rates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Update_Currency_Exchange_Rates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16d175c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRacquir/Update_Currency_Exchange_Rates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Update Currency Exchange Rates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Update Currency Exchange Rates

    +

    The Update Currency Exchange Rates dialog box appears when you select Utilities, Update Currency Exchange Rates from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. For more information setting up foreign currencies, see Administering Foreign Currencies.

    +

    Note:
    The Acquisitions permission Adjust currency exchange rates: Allow is required to change exchange rates.

    +

    Use the Update Currency Exchange Rates dialog box to change the currency exchange rates for any foreign currency used by your suppliers as follows:

    +
      +
    • Specify the library for which you are changing the exchange rate - Select an entry in the Organization list.
    • +
    • Specify the currency code - Select one of the currency codes in the Currency box.
    • +
    • Change the rate - Type the new rate in the Rate box.
    • +
    • Save the new currency exchange rate - Click Save.
    • +
    +

    The new currency exchange rate is saved and the date and time of the change appears in the Last modified box and your user name appears in the By box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Addresses_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Addresses_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3af7cbfe --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Addresses_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Addresses Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Addresses Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to maintain the addresses for a library organization.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Removal_Conflicts_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Removal_Conflicts_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0187126e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Removal_Conflicts_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Branch Removal Conflicts Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Branch Removal Conflicts Dialog Box

    +

    The Branch Removal Conflicts dialog box appears when you try to remove a collection from a branch, but the removal would cause problems in other functions of Polaris. See Review and edit collection information. Use this dialog box to resolve the problems as follows:

    +
      +
    • Branch conflicts - Select a branch name to see the conflict details and resolve the conflict for the branch-assigned records. To remove a collection assignment from records with the conflict, without assigning an alternative collection, select (None) in the Alternative Collections list, and click Resolve. To assign an alternative collection, select the collection and click Resolve.
    • +
    • Invoice Line Item Segments - The number of pieces in shipments being received that have the branch and collection combination as a destination. You can break the links and delete the collection, or cancel the operation.
    • +
    • Item Templates - The number of item record templates which use the branch and collection combination. You cannot remove the collection from the branch unless you select a different collection at the same branch. This changes the collection setting in the template. You can also delete the template or change the template to a different branch with the same collection.
    • +
    • Items - The number of item records with this specific branch and collection combination. You cannot remove the collection from the branch unless you select a different collection at the same branch. This changes the assigned collection for all items assigned to the collection and branch combination.
    • +
    • Purchase Order Line Item Segments - The number of pieces on order that have the branch and collection combination as a destination. You can break the links and delete the collection, or cancel the operation.
    • +
    • Selection List Line Item Segments - The number of requested titles that have the branch and collection combination as a destination. You can break the links and delete the collection, or cancel the operation.
    • +
    • Standing Order Copies - The number of standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. copies that have the branch and collection combination as the destination for the standing order parts. You cannot remove the collection from the branch until the copy records are assigned to a different collection at the same branch.
    • +
    • Subscription Copies - The number of subscriptions that have the branch and collection combination as the destination for the issues. You cannot remove the collection from the branch until the serial holdings records are assigned to a different collection at the same branch.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..afe88cce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Branch_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Branch Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Branch Workform

    +

    The Branch workform displays organization information for the branches in your system. There may be multiple branches in a Polaris installation; each has a parent library organization. See Working with Branches.

    +

    Note:
    You can set tables, parameters, profiles, and permissions for an organization directly from the Administration Explorer. Some settings are available only from the Explorer and are not available from the organization workform. See Use the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Use the workform views as follows:

    +

    Edit branch location and contact information - Select View, General, or click OrgGenView00465.gif.

    +
      +
    • Address and contact information - Must be defined in the appropriate tables before you can select them in the branch record. See Setting Organization Addresses and Identifying Organization Contacts. You can set separate addresses for billing, shipping, and the return address on notices.
    • +
    • Standard address number (SAN) - Three fields provide places for the SAN elements, from left to right: the SAN prefix (international code); the standard address number of the branch; and the SAN suffix (the department or organization code). The SAN is used in ordering and interlibrary loans.
    • +
    • Tax exempt number - This organization-specific number is placed on orders where branches are exempt from paying sales tax.
    • +
    • Error Reporting Email - (Optional) Type the e-mail address of the administrator who should receive the report of a system error.
    • +
    +

    Set parameters - Select View, Parameters, or click OrgParamView00466.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about specific parameters, see the following topics:

    + +

    Set profiles - Select View, Profiles, or click OrgProfView00467.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about specific profiles, see the following topics:

    + +

    Edit tables - Select View, Database Tables, or click OrgTablesView00468.gif. See Working with Tables.

    +

    Note:
    Some tables are view-only. Some tables are available only from the Administration Explorer.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Client_Visual_Alert_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Client_Visual_Alert_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10842717 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Client_Visual_Alert_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Client Visual Alert Configuration Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Client Visual Alert Configuration Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Staff Client, Client visual alert configuration.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set a message to alert the user that he or she is attempting to log on to the staff client on the server where you make these settings, and once the user has logged on, to indicate the log-on server through custom colors on the title bars of staff client workforms. You can set an alert message, custom colors, or both features. See Visual Cues for Staff Client Log-On Server.

    +
      +
    • +

      Alert Message - To specify an alert message, check Logon alert message and type the message (255 character maximum) in the field just below the alert message option. To clear a previous set message, clear the Logon alert message check box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Custom Title Bar Colors - Check Enable custom title bar colors. You can use the default violet and plum for the active and inactive windows, or specify custom colors. To specify your own custom colors:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the drop-down arrow for the Active window or Inactive window to access the color picker.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click a color, or click Other to open the color tool.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To select a color on the Standard tab of the color tool, click Select and click a color or gray-scale value. Or click the Custom tab to select a color from a continuous palette. Alternatively, you can type standard RGB values.

      +
    • +
    +

    You must log off the Polaris staff client and log on again for the changes to take effect.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Collection_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Collection_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f149f116 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Collection_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Collection Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Collection Workform

    +

    The Collection workform names a collection and specifies the branches where collections with this name are used. See Setting Statistical Codes for Reports.

    +

    Use the workform views as follows:

    +

    Edit collection name and assigned branches - Select View, Branches or click CollBrIcon.gif.

    +
      +
    • Name and abbreviation - Type a name and abbreviation for the collection. The name appears as an option on Polaris workforms where a collection is selected. For example, you can select the collection on the Item Record workform - Holdings view. You can use the Find Tool to search for collections by name or by abbreviation.
    • +
    • Branches - Select the check boxes for the branches where the collection name is used. Clear a branch check box if the collection name is not used at that branch. When a branch is checked, the collection appears as an option in branch-specific collection lists such as the one on the Item Record workform - Holdings view. Click Select All to indicate that all branches use this collection. Click Unselect All to remove this collection from all branch lists.
    • +
    +

    Specify collection eligibility for floating - Select View, Floating branches or click CollFloatIcon.gif.

    +
      +
    • Select the check boxes for the branches from which items in this collection can potentially float.
    • +
    • Clear a branch check box if the collection should not float from that branch.
    • +
    • Click Select All to indicate that the collection is eligible to float from all branches.
    • +
    • Click Unselect All to designate this collection as ineligible to float from any branch. See Designating Floating Collections.
    • +
    +

    Delete the collection - Use one of these methods:

    • Select File, Delete.
    • Click the Delete icon on the toolbar.
    • Press CTRL+D.
    • Press ALT+F+D.

    +

    The system checks for linked objects that use the Collection. These links prevent the collection from being deleted, and you must resolve the conflicts before deleting the collection. The message lists the number of linked objects:

    +
      +
    • Item Records
    • +
    • Reserve Item Records
    • +
    • Item Templates
    • +
    • Reserve Item Templates
    • +
    • Serial Holdings Records
    • +
    • Quick-circ Item records
    • +
    • Standing Order Part Records
    • +
    +

    The system also displays a warning message and the count of linked objects if any of these features use the collection:

    +
      +
    • Children’s PAC Search Limit
    • +
    • Selection List Line Item Segments
    • +
    • PO Line Item Segments
    • +
    • Invoice Line Item Segments
    • +
    +

    For these links, you can click No (the collection is not deleted) or Yes (the collection is deleted). If you click Yes, the deleted collection is replaced by [None] in the linked objects.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/ContactPersPolTab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/ContactPersPolTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6268534f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/ContactPersPolTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Contact Persons Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Contact Persons Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to maintain a list of contact people for use in organization records that require contact information.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Currencies_Policy_Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Currencies_Policy_Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d00867ed --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Currencies_Policy_Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Currencies Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Currencies Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to specify foreign currencies used in Acquisitions processing. All organizations use the settings in this table.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Default_Directory_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Default_Directory_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60bfe654 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Default_Directory_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Default Directory Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Default Directory Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Default Directory dialog box to specify the location for various Polaris logs and files. The types of files vary, depending on where you opened the dialog box:

    +
      +
    • Acquisitions/Serials profiles: Default directory - Specifies the location where various Acquisitions and Serials logs and files are saved.
    • +
    • Cataloging profiles: Default directory - Specifies the location where various Cataloging logs and files are saved.
    • +
    • Patron Services profiles: Default directory - Specifies the folder for patron services reports.
    • +
    • Staff Client profiles: Library documentation - staff client - Specifies the path and file or URL of the information to display when Library Documentation is selected from the Help menu on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. This option is a convenient way to make custom documentation available in the staff client. Type the path/filename, or click Browse to browse to the location; if you specify a URL, begin with http://.
    • +
    • Staff Client profiles: Report Output Directory - For the workstation, specifies the location of Polaris reports and notices when they are generated. Type the directory path, or click Browse to browse to the location.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/General_Administration_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/General_Administration_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..25bc029d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/General_Administration_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + General Administration Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    General Administration UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by General Administration UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Library_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Library_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1a846462 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Library_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + Library Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Library Workform

    +

    The Library workform displays organization information for the libraries in your system. There may be multiple library records in a Polaris installation; each is the parent organization of at least one branch. See Working with Libraries.

    +

    Note:
    You can set tables, parameters, profiles, and permissions for an organization directly from the Administration Explorer. Some settings are available only from the Explorer and are not available from the organization workform. See Use the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Use the workform views as follows:

    +

    To Edit library location and contact information - Select View, General, or click OrgGenView00460.gif

    +
      .
    • Address and contact information must be defined in the appropriate tables before you can select them in the library record. See Setting Organization Addresses and Identifying Organization Contacts.
    • Error Reporting Email - (Optional) Type the e-mail address of the administrator who should receive the report of a system error.
    +
  • To set parameters - Select View, Parameters, or click OrgParamView00461.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about specific parameters, see the following topics:
  • + +

    To set profiles - Select View, Profiles, or click OrgProfView00462.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For in formation about specific profiles, see the following topics:

    + +
  • To edit tables - Select View, Database Tables, or click OrgTablesView00463.gif. See Working with Tables.
  • + +

    Note:
    Some tables are view-only. Some tables are available only from the Administration Explorer.

    +

    To assign permissions - Select View, Permissions, or click OrgPermView00464.gif. See Granting Permissions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Network_Domains.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Network_Domains.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2b20d9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Network_Domains.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Network Domains + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Network Domains Database Table

    +

    For multi-domain networks, this table specifies the NetBios Name and DNSName for each domain in your network.

    +
      +
    • To add an entry, click PRadminCat00449.gif
    • +
    • To modify an entry, click modbutton00450.gif
    • +
    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Object_Locks_Database.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Object_Locks_Database.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4962fbf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Object_Locks_Database.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Object Locks Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Object Locks Database Table

    +

    When a Polaris record is open, an entry is automatically made in the Object Locks table so that no one else can change the record. When the record is closed, the entry is automatically removed from the Object Locks table.

    +

    See also: Managing Record Locks

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Permission_Group_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Permission_Group_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8825107 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Permission_Group_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Permission Group Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Permission Group Workform

    +

    The Permission Group workform displays information about a Polaris permission group. The member organizations, staff members, and workstations have the permissions of the group. For general information about Polaris permissions, see Granting Permissions. For specific information about groups, see Managing Permissions with Permission Groups. Use the Group workform to set group membership and permissions.

    +

    Note:
    Polaris provides a set of default groups based on common staff workflows. See Polaris Permission Groups - Default Permissions Reference.

    +
      +
    • Add a new group to Polaris - Select File | New, or click newicon.gif. See Create a new permission group. The Permission Group name displays in group lists on other Polaris workforms, and you search by this name with the Find Tool. The Description field is optional.
    • +
    • Add and remove members of the group - Select View, General, or click OrgGenView00470.gif. The icons above the Members list represent the system, organizations, staff members, and workstations. Select an icon to find the appropriate record and add it to the group. See Manage members in a permission group.
    • +
    • Assign or remove permissions for the group - Select View, Permissions, or click OrgPermView00471.gif. You can add and remove permissions using the list tool bar. The members of the group have the permissions in this list. See Managing Permissions for Staff, Workstations, Groups. You can copy group memberships from one workstation or staff member to another. See Copy (acquire) permission group memberships.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can sort the list by clicking a column head. Sorting can take some time because there may be thousands of permissions. Wait until the sorting operation is complete before you proceed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Polaris_Administration_Explorer.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Polaris_Administration_Explorer.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59d1f718 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Polaris_Administration_Explorer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Administration Explorer + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Administration Explorer

    +

    From the Polaris Administration Explorer, you can work with system records and set up Polaris to work in your system. The tree view on the left displays the list of organizations and resources in the Polaris installation. If you opened the Explorer at a level other than the system level, only the organizations or resources for that level and lower display. The details view on the right displays information, a table, or a tab for the item selected in the tree view. See Accessing Administration Records. Use the Administration Explorer to:

    +
      +
    • View organization and resource information - Select the organization, workstation, or staff member in the tree view. Read-only information is displayed in the details view. To open an organization or resource record, right-click it in the tree view and select Edit from the context menu. See Use the Administration Explorer.
    • +
    • Add organizations and resources to Polaris - See Setting Up Organizations.
    • +
    • Manage permissions and permission group membership for an organization, workstation, or staff member - Expand the organization or resource in the tree view, and select Permissions in the expanded list. See Granting Permissions.
    • +
    • Assign permissions by organization - Expand the organization in the tree view, and select Security in the expanded list. See Managing Organization Security.
    • +
    • View and modify Polaris settings for an organization - See Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal Codes Database Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal Codes Database Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e57d6a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal Codes Database Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Postal Codes Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Postal Codes Database Table

    +

    When Polaris is installed, the Postal Codes database table contains the current Zip codes defined by the United States Postal Service. Canadian postal codes are installed at implementation for Canadian customers.

    +

    When you select the Postal Codes database table for an organization in the Administration Explorer tree view, the Postal Codes Tables Filter dialog box opens. Use the dialog box to filter the rows in the Postal Codes table before the table is opened.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal_Codes_Tables_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal_Codes_Tables_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..884d90ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Postal_Codes_Tables_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Postal Codes Tables Filter Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Postal Codes Tables Filter Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you select the Postal Codes database table for an organization in the Administration Explorer tree view. Use the dialog box to filter the rows in the Postal Codes table before the table is opened.

    +

    Important:
    Unfiltered, the Postal Codes table takes some time to load because at implementation it may contain all the U.S. Postal Service Zip codes and/or Canadian postal codes—over 850,000 entries.

    +

    To set the filters you want to apply to the Postal Codes table:

    +
      +
    • Country - Select the country’s check box to include the country’s postal codes, or clear the check box to exclude them. At least one country must be selected. The default selection is based on the Default Country setting in the system record.
    • +
    • States/Provinces - States or provinces or listed depending on the selected country. Select All to include the entire list, or select individual states or provinces.
    • +
    • County, city, postal code - These free-text fields are case-insensitive. You can use the asterisk wild-card character * at the beginning or end of the text string. You can also use the pound sign #, which stands for one character only, at any point in the text string.
    • +
    +

    Counts at the top of the filter dialog box show how many postal codes will be loaded with the filters you have set. When you change the filter criteria, you can click the refresh button PostalDXRefresh.gif to see the new counts. When you are ready to load the Postal Codes table, click Apply Filter. See Setting System Postal Codes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Proxy_Server_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Proxy_Server_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2370f120 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Proxy_Server_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + Proxy Server Setup Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Proxy Server Setup Dialog Box

    +

    + +Use the Proxy Server Setup dialog box to specify the proxy server: + +

    +
      +
    • + + Select (check) the Use proxy server check box. + +The log-in information boxes become available for use.
    • +
    • + + Type the log-in name, password, and domain name for the proxy server in the appropriate boxes. +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_Server_Set_Up_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_Server_Set_Up_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e72742d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_Server_Set_Up_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Report Server Set Up Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Report Server Set Up Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box: +
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, StaffClient, ReportServer.

    +

    Polaris uses SQL Server Reporting Services for reports, notices, and most printing tasks in the staff client. Microsoft Report Manager, and Report Designer, if you customize reports, are installed on your report “server,” which may be located on your Polaris Web server or another server you specify. Use this dialog box to set up reporting services in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Note:
    If your Web server is outside the firewall, you can also specify a proxy server to provide access to the Web server for SQL Server Reporting Services. See Specify a proxy server for Reporting Services.

    +
      +
    • Report Server URL - Type the URL for the report server.
    • +
    • Report service URL - Type the URL for Report Services (Report Manager and Report Designer, if you use it).
    • +
    • Report Root - Specify the appropriate report root folder. The default is /Polaris.
    • +
    • Maximum pages - Specify the number of pages that trigger a message when the report is run. This setting causes a dialog box to be displayed when the report .pdf file would exceed the specified number of pages. You can choose to print all the pages, or a limited number of pages.
    • +
    • Maximum # of entries to display in report wizard - (System level only) Set the maximum number of entries that should appear in list boxes and other controls in the report wizard, where users select report parameters from a list. The default setting is 2500. The maximum value is 9999.
    • +
    • Windows authentication (optional) - You can use Windows Authentication to restrict access to reports from the browser, but allow staff with the Polaris Access reports and notices permission to see reports in the Polaris Report Manager. Select (check) the Override default Report Server authentication check box, and type the appropriate log-on information. See Security for Reports.
    • +
    • Available organizations when running reports - Sets the organizations that appear as parameter options when the staff member sets up a report to run. Select one of the following options:
      • Unrestricted - Any or all organizations in the system are available for selection in the Organizations report parameter list.
      • Restrict Organization to Branch Only - Only the staff member’s logged-on branch appears in the Organizations list.
      • Restrict Organization to Library Only - The Organizations list includes the staff member’s logged-on branch and the other branches associated with the parent library of the logged-on branch.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_of_Unavailable_Targets_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_of_Unavailable_Targets_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a9b27c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Report_of_Unavailable_Targets_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Report of Unavailable Targets Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Report of Unavailable Targets Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you remove an organization from a resource group and the resource group is associated with one or more databases; users connected to that organization will not be able to access the database(s). The dialog box lists the database display name defined for PAC (the organization-level name or system-level name, if none is defined for the organization), the server display name, and the organizations affected. If you continue to save the resource group record, the database is removed from PAC display (if it has been selected for display) for every organization indicated in the report where there is no inheritance. The database may still be available for a parent organization. The dialog box also appears when you change a resource group on a server record for a remote resource.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Resource_Group_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Resource_Group_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..983b6304 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Resource_Group_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resource Group Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resource Group Workform

    +

    This workform associates selected organizations as a Resource Group. Remote resources or eContent can then be made available to PAC users based on the organization resource group. Use the Resource Group workform to create Resource Groups and assign organizations to them. One organization can belong to multiple Resource Groups. See Setting Up Organization Resource Groups.

    +
      +
    • Name and description - The name must be unique.
    • +
    • Organization list - Specify the organizations that should belong to this Resource Group as follows:
    • +
    • System Level Access - Gives PAC users access to the resources associated with this Resource Group when the PAC connection organization is the system.
    • +
    • All Branches - Select to automatically check all branches. Resources with which this Resource Group is associated are available when the PAC connection organization is any library-level organization or any branch-level organization. Typically, it is not necessary to select all branches; if access is not restricted, a resource group is not necessary. However, you can use this option to select all branches and then de-select specific branches in the list. The All Branches check box is gray when some but not all organizations are selected.
    • +
    • Library organizations - Select a library organization check box to select the branches associated with the library. PAC users connected to any of the selected library’s branches have access to the resources (databases) associated with the resource group.
    • +
    • Branch organizations - Expand the library organization, and select individual branches. PAC users connected at any of the selected branches have access to the resources (databases) associated with the resource group.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Search_Server_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Search_Server_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7d2adaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Search_Server_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search Server Properties Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search Server Properties Dialog Box

    +

    For a registered Polaris server with the Polaris search server application (local server), this dialog box appears when you click Configure in the Define Connection dialog box for the Search Server connection (Server workform). See Define a Polaris search server connection.

    +
      +
    • Provider tab - Select Z39.50 and click Next.
    • +
    • Connection tab - Enter the following information for your Polaris search server:
    • +
    • Host name
    • +
    • Port
    • +
    • User name
    • +
    • Password
    • +
    +

    For a remote resource server, see Registering Remote Resource Servers. The dialog box appears when you click Configure in the Define Connection dialog box for the Search Server connection (Server workform).

    +
      +
    • Provider tab - Select Z39.50 or the search server provider, and click Next.
    • +
    • Connection tab - Enter the following information for the search server:
    • +
    • Host name
    • +
    • Port
    • +
    • User name
    • +
    • Password
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For Z39.50 targets that do not require log-in, select Anonymous Login instead of supplying your library’s user name and password for the resource.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Server_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Server_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9e4dd39f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Server_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Server Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Server Workform

    +

    The Server workform contains connection and database information about the Polaris SQL, search, and Web servers, as well as any remote servers available for Polaris searches. Use the Server workform to add a network server or remote server to Polaris, and to edit connection and database information. See Setting Up Server Records.

    +
      +
    • Network Name  - For a Polaris server, type the network name, or click Browse to find and select the server on the network. For a remote target server, type the system name of the remote server.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    The network name for a remote server cannot contain the single quote character (apostrophe). The character causes connection problems in PAC searches. For example, use Bowkers Books in Print instead of Bowker’s Books in Print.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Staff_Member_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Staff_Member_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..85ec50c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Staff_Member_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Staff Member Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Staff Member Workform

    +

    The Staff Member workform displays the staff member’s user name, permissions, and profiles. Each staff member record is associated with a parent organization. See Setting Up Staff Records.

    +

    Note:
    You can set profiles and permissions for a staff member directly from the Administration Explorer. See Use the Administration Explorer.

    + +

    Note:
    You can sort the permissions list by clicking a column head. Sorting can take some time because there may be thousands of permissions. Wait until the sorting operation is complete before you proceed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/System_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/System_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b54ae7ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/System_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + System Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    System Workform

    +

    The System workform displays system-level information about your organization. There is one system record for a Polaris installation. See Changing System Information.

    +

    Note:
    You can set tables, parameters, profiles, and permissions for an organization directly from the Administration Explorer. Some settings are available only from the Explorer and are not available from the organization workform. See Use the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Use the workform views as follows:

    +

    Edit system location and contact information - Select View, General, or click OrgGenView.gif.

    +
      +
    • Address and contact information - Must be defined in the appropriate tables before you can select them in the system record. See Setting Organization Addresses and Identifying Organization Contacts.
    • +
    • Default Country - Select the country in which the system is located. This setting defines the default postal code, if the state displays in addresses, and telephone number formats on other Polaris workforms.
    • +
    • Default Currency - Specify the currency used for the library system.
    • +
    • Default Language - Select a language to set the language used for the Leap interface and messages if other than the default, English. The values in the list are the languages for which the library system is licensed.
    • +
    • Error Reporting Email - (Optional) Type the e-mail address of the administrator who should receive the report of a system error.
    • +
    +

    Set parameters - Select View, Parameters, or click OrgParamView.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about specific parameters, see the following topics:

    + +

    Set profiles - Select View, Profiles, or click OrgProfView.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about specific profiles, see the following topics:

    + +

    Edit tables - Select View, Database Tables, or click OrgTablesView.gif. See Working with Tables.

    +

    Note:
    Some tables are view-only. Some tables are available only from the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Assign permissions - Select View, Permissions, or click OrgPermView.gif. See Granting Permissions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Transaction_Logging.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Transaction_Logging.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9306befa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Transaction_Logging.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Transaction Logging + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Transaction Logging Database Table

    +

    Use the transaction logging database table to:

    +

    Modify an entry - Click modbutton00458.gif and select Yes to log the transaction or No to prevent the transaction from being logged.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Vendor_Account_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Vendor_Account_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d2e9290 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Vendor_Account_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Vendor Account Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Vendor Account Workform

    +

    To access the Vendor Account workform, select Administration, Explorer, Vendor on the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Expand the Vendor node in the explorer to see the accounts associated with the selected vendor.

    +

    To create a new vendor account, right-click and select New.

    +

    To edit an existing vendor account, select it under the Vendor record, right-click and select Edit.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Workstation_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Workstation_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..631445cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadmin/Workstation_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Workstation Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Workstation Workform

    +

    The Workstation workform displays information about a staff client, Leap, or Polaris® ExpressCheck™ workstation. Each workstation record is associated with a parent organization. See Setting Up Workstations.

    +

    Note:
    You can set parameters, profiles, and permissions for a workstation directly from the Administration Explorer. See Use the Administration Explorer.

    +

    Note:
    Library workstations that run Polaris PowerPAC are not ordinarily registered in Polaris, so there are no workstation records for them. However, you can designate them as “in-house” for certain purposes, such as access to e-sources. See Identifying In-House Computers.

    +
      +
    • Network and display names - The network name is the computer as it is identified on the network. Click Browse to select the computer from the network. The display name identifies the computer in Polaris workforms such as the Administration Explorer.
    • +
    • Parent Branch - The branch to which the workstation is assigned. If Leap is enabled for the branch, the Leap check box appears when you select the parent branch.
    • +
    • Staff client use - Select (check) Enabled to allow this workstation to log on to the staff client.
    • +
    • Leap use - Select (check) the Leap check box if Leap will be used on this workstation. When you create a new workstation record, the Leap check box does not appear until you select a parent branch for which Leap is enabled.
      • To view or set parameters that affect the operation of Leap on the workform, select View, Parameters, Leap.
      • To enable automatic polling of RFID tags, set RFID: Auto-poll RFID tags to Yes.
      • For a workstation that accesses Leap via the Web but does not have the Polaris staff client installed, the local security manager must be used to operate Leap with RFID and/or a media dispenser unit.
        • To use the local security manager for RFID, set RFID: Use local security manager to Yes.
        • To use the local security manager for the media dispenser, set Media dispenser: Use local security manager to Yes.
    • +
    • Leap running in Terminal Services session - Select the Terminal Server check box to identify the terminal server. When this box is checked, the Leap user can select their workstation when they log in so that transactions are logged appropriately.
    • +
    • Set parameters - Select View, Parameters, or click OrgParamView00472.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about the Polaris ExpressCheck parameter, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.
    • +
    • Set profiles - Select View, Profiles, or click OrgProfView00473.gif. For general procedures, see Editing Parameters, Profiles, and Tables. For information about specific profiles, see the following topics:
    • +
    • Assign permissions - Select View, Permissions, or click OrgPermView00474.gif. See Granting Permissions.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can sort the permissions list by clicking a column head. Sorting can take some time because there may be thousands of permissions. Wait until the sorting operation is complete before you proceed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Acquisitions_Serials_Administration_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Acquisitions_Serials_Administration_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e75f6f13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Acquisitions_Serials_Administration_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Acquisitions/Serials Administration Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Acquisitions/Serials UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Acquisitions/Serials Administration Workforms, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Branch_Fund_Filter.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Branch_Fund_Filter.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..312882b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Branch_Fund_Filter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Branch/Fund Filter + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Branch/Fund Filter

    +

    The Branch/Fund dialog box appears when you select Display only these branch’s funds (branch/fund filter) on the Fund Drop-down List Box Display dialog box, and then click fundslisticon00459.gif .

    +

    Use the Branch/Fund Filter dialog box do the following:

    +
      +
    • Expand a branch to see the funds for that branch - Select the plus sign button. The funds are listed under the branch.
    • +
    • Select all funds for a branch - Select the check box next to the branch, and all funds for the branch are selected automatically. If you do not want to display all the funds you can click the check box next to any fund you do not want to display.
    • +
    • Select specific funds for a branch - Leave the check box next to the branch unchecked, and check the check box next to the funds to select them. The branch check box is checked automatically when you select any of its funds.
    • +
    • Select funds across multiple branches - Expand the branches that have the funds you want to select, and select the funds under these branches.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When you select the branches and funds for a specific selector, be sure that the selector also has the permission Selection List Line Item Segment: Create, Modify, Delete for the branches you selected. In addition, if the profile Filter branches in line item segments is set to Yes, make sure that you select funds for branches that are linked to the same parent library.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claim_Reasons_Policy_Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claim_Reasons_Policy_Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9f5d786 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claim_Reasons_Policy_Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Claim Reasons Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claim Reasons Policy Table

    +

    The Claim Reasons policy table appears when you select an organization in the Administration Explorer, select the Policy Table folder, and select Claim Reasons. The claim reasons defined in this policy table can be selected in the Reason box on the Claim workform.

    +

    Use the Claim Reasons policy table to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a new claim reason - Click the Insert claim reasonbutton to open a dialog box where you enter the claim reason.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify a claim reason - Select the claim reason you want to modify, and click the Modify claim reason button to open a dialog box where you modify the selected claim reason.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a claim reason - Select the claim reason you want to delete, and click the Delete claim reason button to open a dialog box where you delete the selected claim reason.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also: Define claiming reasons

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claiming_Cancellation_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claiming_Cancellation_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5b25f68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Claiming_Cancellation_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Claiming/Cancellation Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Claiming/Cancellation Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Claiming/Cancellation Defaults dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enter the contact information for the individual at the library who should be contacted concerning claiming or cancellations. The contact’s name, department name, email address, and telephone number are printed on all claiming and cancellation notices.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the message that prints on all initial claim and reclaim notices - Type the message in the Initial/Reclaim Claim Notice Message-Req box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify an additional or continued message that prints on all claim (initial and reminder) notices - Initial/Reclaim Claim Notice Message-Opt

      +
    • +
    • Specify the additional or continued message to print on all initial claim notices generated by the organization - Type the message in the Initial Claim Notice Message-Opt box. Leave this text box empty if you do not want a message to print on the initial claim notice.
    • +
    • Specify the default message to print on all claim reminder (reclaim) notices generated by the organization. Type the message in the Reclaim Claim Notice Message-Opt box. Leave this text box empty if you do not want a message to print on the reclaim notice.
    • +
    • Specify the default message to print on all cancel order notices generated by the organization - Type the message in the Cancellation Notice Message1-Opt box. Leave this text box empty if you do not want a message to print on the cancellation notice.
    • +
    • Specify the additional or continued message to print on all cancel order notices generated by the organization - Type the message in the Cancellation Notice Message2-Opt box. Leave this text box empty if you do not want a message to print on the cancellation notice.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Display_of_Issues_on_Check_In.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Display_of_Issues_on_Check_In.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07c22805 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Display_of_Issues_on_Check_In.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Display of Issues on Check In + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Display of Issues on Check In

    +

    The Display of Issues on Check In dialog box appears when you double-click the Display of Issues on Check In parameter on the Acquisitions/Serials tab in Polaris Administration Explorer. You can define this parameter for the system, library, or branch. Use the Display of Issues on Check In dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify which status or statuses of issues or parts appear in the Check In workform - Select a status or select a status category. For example, Expected is a status, whereas Not Received is a category that may include several different statuses. If you select Not Received, you can define which statuses are included in this category.   
    • +
    • Define the Not Received category - If you want the Check In workform to display issues or parts that are not received, you can define which statuses are included by selecting one or more check boxes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/EDI_Invoice_Default_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/EDI_Invoice_Default_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c32b96d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/EDI_Invoice_Default_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + EDI Invoice Default Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EDI Invoice Default Dialog Box

    +

    The EDI Invoice Default dialog box appears when you double-click the EDI Invoice Defaults profile on the Acquisitions/Serials tab in System Administration. If a supplier creates an electronic invoice, the information in the EDI Invoice Default dialog box is used to create the invoice automatically. See also: Set up EDI invoice defaults.

    +

    Use the EDI Invoice Default dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the title used to create EDI invoice line items when no matching purchase order line item is found - Type a title in the Title box.
    • +
    • Select the default destination used to create EDI invoice line items when no matching purchase order line item is found - Select the library in the Destination box.
    • +
    • Specify whether header charges are loaded automatically - Select Load supplier header charges to automatically load the supplier header charges to the EDI invoice. You can select only one fund to use for these charges if they are loaded automatically. If this check box is unchecked, none of the supplier header charges will be loaded automatically. When the shipment arrives, the supplier header charges can be entered in the Invoice workform.
    • +
    • Specify the fund to use for header charges - If you selected Load supplier header charges, select the fund to use for these charges in the Header fund box.
    • +
    • Select the fund used to create EDI invoice line items when no matching purchase order line item is found - Select the fund in the Segment fund box.
    • +
    • Enter a note to include with any EDI invoice line item that is created when there is no matching purchase order line item - Type the text in the Alert note box.
    • +
    • Specify whether matching purchase order line items are updated to Received - Select Update linked PO line item to received to update linked purchase order line items when the EDI invoice is created in Polaris. Clear the check box to wait to receive the line items when the actual shipment arrives. The the line items can be received from the invoice.
    • +
    • Specify whether linked on-order items are updated - If the Update linked PO line item to received box is checked, select Update on-order item circulation status to update any linked on-order items to in-process. Clear the check box to leave the linked items with a status of on-order until the shipment is received.Important:
      If the Update on-order item circulation status check box is not selected, staff members will never see on-order items with an in-process status; they are updated to a status of In when they are checked in through circulation.
    • +
    • Prevent EDI invoices from being generated when the number of copies ordered and received does not match - Select Hold partial receipt invoices if you do not want EDI invoices to be generated automatically from the supplier’s invoice files when the number of copies sent does not equal the number of copies ordered on any of the line items in the invoice. If this check box is checked, you can process these invoices using the Process EDI Invoices workform.
    • +
    • Specify who should receive e-mail notices when the EDI invoices are received - In the Email addresses box, enter the e-mail addresses of the individuals to notify when the EDI invoice is received. You can enter multiple e-mail addresses separated by semicolons, but do not end an e-mail address with a semicolon unless another address follows it.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If an e-mail address ends with a semicolon, the e-mail program expects another e-mail address to follow and it fails on the blank address. The invoices are created but no e-mails are sent.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund Categories Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund Categories Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31e0b1a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund Categories Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Fund Categories Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fund Categories Policy Table

    +

    Use the Fund Categories policy table to manage Donation fund categories:

    +
      +
    • Click PRadminCat00439.gif to add a new fund category.
    • +
    +
      +
    • Click modbutton00440.gif and edit the fields to modify an existing fund category.

      See Create a Fund.

    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund_Drop-down_List_Box_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund_Drop-down_List_Box_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d0d8182e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Fund_Drop-down_List_Box_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fund Drop-down List Box Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fund Drop-down List Box Display

    +

    The Fund Drop-down List Box Display dialog box appears when you double-click the Acq Fund Droplist Setup profile on the Acquisitions/Serials tab in System Administration. It controls how funds are displayed in drop-down list boxes for the organization or staff member for which the profile is set.

    +

    Use the Fund Drop-down List Box Display dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Display only the funds’ full names in Funds lists- Select Fund names only.
    • +
    • Display only the funds’ alternative names in Funds lists - Select Fund alternative names only.
    • +
    • Display both full names and alternative names in Funds lists - Select Fund names and alternative names.
    • +
    • Specify which funds display in Funds lists in purchase orders and invoices - Select one of the following options under Filter (Purchase Orders and Invoices):
    • +
    • Display all funds linked to the destination’s parent library (no filter) - Header Funds lists display the funds for all branches linked to the same parent library as the Ordered at branch in the Purchase Order, or the Paid by branch in the Invoice workform. Funds lists in purchase order and invoice line item segments display the funds for all branches linked to the same parent library as the selected Destination branch. The Funds list in the Add to New Purchase Order (Bulk Add) dialog box displays all funds linked to the branches that have the same parent library as the Destination branch.
    • +
    • Display only the destination branch’s funds (branch filter) - Header Funds lists display only the funds for the Ordered at branch in the Purchase Order, or the Paid by branch in the Invoice workform. Funds lists in purchase order and invoice line item segments display the funds for the Destination branch. The Funds list in the Add to New Purchase Order (Bulk Add) dialog box displays only the funds for the Destination branch
    • +
    • Specify which funds display in Funds lists in selection lists - Select one of the following options under Selection List Filter:
    • +
    • Display all funds linked to the destination’s parent library (no filter) - The Funds list in selection list line item segments display the funds for all branches with the same parent library as the Destination branch.
    • +
    • Display only the destination branch’s funds (branch filter) -
    • +
    +

    The Funds list in selection list line item segments display only the funds for the Destination branch.

    +
      +
    • Display only these branch’s funds (branch/fund filter) - If this option is selected, you can specify exactly which funds appear in the Funds list in a selection list line item segment. Click fundslisticon.gif to open a list where you can choose the funds to display in selection list line item segments.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When you select the branches and funds for a specific selector, be sure that the selector also has the permission Selection List Line Item Segment: Create, Modify, Delete for the branches you selected. In addition, if the profile Filter branches in line item segments is set to Yes, make sure that you select funds for branches that are linked to the same parent library.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Link to Supplier Databases Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Link to Supplier Databases Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56caf157 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Link to Supplier Databases Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Link to Supplier Databases Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link to Supplier Databases Policy Table

    +

    Use the Link to Supplier Databases policy table to provide links to your suppliers databases:

    +

    Click PRadminCat00439.gif to add a new supplier link.

    +

    Click modbutton00440.gif to edit an existing supplier link.

    +

    See Add Links to Supplier Databases.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Route_List_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Route_List_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f62af4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Route_List_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Route List Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Route List Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    The Route List Defaults dialog box appears when you double-click Route List Defaults on the Acquisitions/Serials profiles tab in System Administration. Use the Route List Defaults dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the duration to apply to a new route list - Type a number and select days or weeks to indicate how long it should take for the piece to circulate among the route list members.
    • +
    • Specify the branch name to put on a new route list - Select the library in the Home Location box to indicate where the routed issue should be returned.
    • +
    • Indicate how the route slip should be printed - Select Batch or Automatic.
    • +
    • Specify the route list message to add to route lists - Type the message in the Notice Text box. This message could contain a reminder to read the piece and pass it to the next person on the list.
    • +
    • Specify instructions to print on route lists - In the Return Instructions box, type instructions that tell the last person on the list what to do when they are finished reading the piece.
    • +
    • Specify the information that is printed at the top and bottom of new route lists - Type the text in the Header and Footer boxes.
    • +
    • Specify the information about an issue (piece) that is printed on route slips - Select the options from the Piece Display Options list, and click Add. To remove data that you do not want to print, click Remove. Use the Up and Down arrows to reorder the information on the printed slip.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Selection_List_Line_Item_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Selection_List_Line_Item_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ecbd158 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Selection_List_Line_Item_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Selection List Line Item Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Selection List Line Item Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Selection List Line Item Defaults dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Specify the default destination for selection list line item segments - Select the library name in the Destination box. When you add a new selection list line item to a selection list, the segments will contain this destination as the default.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the default collection for selection list line item segments - Select the default in the Collection box. When you add a new selection list line item to a selection list, the segments will contain this collection as the default.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the default fund for selection list line item segments - Select the fund in the Fund box. When you add a new selection list line item to a selection list, the segments will contain this fund as the default.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the default supplier for selection list line items - Select the supplier in the Supplier box. When you add a new selection list line item to a selection list, the line item will contain this supplier as the default.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Titles_to_Go_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Titles_to_Go_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df7e4e15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminAcq/Titles_to_Go_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Titles to Go Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Titles to Go Dialog Box

    +

    Note:
    The suppliers that appear on this dialog box are set up for Titles to Go by Innovative Interfaces.

    +

    Use the Titles to Go dialog box to configure suppliers to use Titles to Go.

    +
      +
    • Enable the configuration for a supplier - Select the supplier in the list, click Enable, and the user sign-on information fields are active. You cannot enter information in the Supplier, SAN or Web URL fields; these are read-only.
    • +
    • Specify the user authentication information - Type the user identification information the supplier gave to you. Use the Username, Password, and Account boxes to enter the information. Each supplier requires different information to authorize users.
    • +
    • Enter a note (optional) - If you want to enter a note, type it in the Note box.
    • +
    • Save the information for the supplier - Click OK.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Control.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Control.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2f576e56 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Control.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Control + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Control Database Table

    +

    Use this table to view your library's authority control settings. This table cannot be modified.

    +

    See: View the Authority Control Database Table.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Deduplication.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Deduplication.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aad33afd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Deduplication.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Deduplication + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Deduplication Database Table

    +

    Rules in this table determine if imported or saved authority records are duplicates of existing records. See Change Bibliographic or Authority Deduplication Tables.

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00435.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00436.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Overlay_Retention.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Overlay_Retention.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b25b2105 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Overlay_Retention.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Overlay Retention + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Overlay Retention Policy Table

    +

    To access the Authority Overlay Retention policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, and select Policy Tables, Authority Overlay Retention. Use the Authority Overlay Retention policy table to specify tags to retain from duplicate authority records that are overlaid.

    +
      +
    • +

      To add a tag, click PRadminCat00415.gif to open the Insert: Authority Overlay Retention Tags dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify a tag, click modbutton.gif to open the Modify: Authority Overlay Retention Tags dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Record_Import_Preferred_Cataloging_Source.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Record_Import_Preferred_Cataloging_Source.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98082e4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Authority_Record_Import_Preferred_Cataloging_Source.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source Policy Table

    +

    To access the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, and select Policy Tables, Authority Overlay Retention.

    +

    Use the Authority Record Import: Preferred Cataloging Source policy table to specify the preferred sources for authority records. During importing, the existing authority record is overlaid with the new record if the source has a higher level of preference than the source in the existing record.

    +
      +
    • +

      To add an entry, click PRadminCat00416.gif to open the Insert: Preferred Cataloging Source dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify an entry, click modbutton00417.gif to open the Modify: Preferred Cataloging Source dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Deduplication.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Deduplication.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..115b0891 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Deduplication.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Deduplication + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Deduplication Database Table

    +

    Rules in this table determine if imported or saved bibliographic records are duplicates of existing records. See Change Bibliographic or Authority Deduplication Tables.

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00437.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00438.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Tags_to_Retain_Delete.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Tags_to_Retain_Delete.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d892697a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Bibliographic_Tags_to_Retain_Delete.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete Policy Table

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, and select Policy Tables, Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete. Use the Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete policy table to specify tags to retain from duplicate records that are overlaid, or to specify tags to delete from incoming records that are saved to the database.

    +
      +
    • +

      To add a tag, click PRadminCat00418.gif to open the Insert: Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify a tag, click modbutton00419.gif to open the Modify: Bibliographic Tags to Retain/Delete dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Campaigns_Truncation_Option_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Campaigns_Truncation_Option_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..090c5ea6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Campaigns_Truncation_Option_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Campaigns Truncation Option Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Campaigns Truncation Option Dialog Box

    +

    To open the dialog box, in the Polaris Administration Explorer, select the organization (system, library, or branch), select Profiles, Cataloging, and double-click Campaign Truncation Options.

    +

    Use the Campaign Truncation Option dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Limit the headline, midline, and footline fields in Campaign-generated promotions to fewer than 255 characters, which is the default and the maximum number of characters.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type a number less than 255 in the appropriate fields. For more information, see Campaigns for Community Promotions.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cataloging_Administration_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cataloging_Administration_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8658b50b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cataloging_Administration_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cataloging Administration Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging Administration UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Cataloging Administration UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Computype_Label_Printer_Commands.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Computype_Label_Printer_Commands.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9a072d63 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Computype_Label_Printer_Commands.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Computype Label Printer Commands + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Computype Label Printer Commands Database Table

    +

    Lists Computype printer commands.

    +

    Enter the printer name in the Printer Name box.

    +

    Paste or enter the printer command in the Printer Commands box.

    +

    Note:
    To locate and copy the printer command, see Find Computype printer commands .
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Countries.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Countries.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36801e8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Countries.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Countries Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Countries Policy Table

    +

    This table defines the postal code length and styles for the countries in which the library sends mail.

    +

    Important:
    When you change a Countries table entry, all occurrences of the country name or postal format are changed in all Polaris records. You cannot delete an entry from this table. Postal code formats must be maintained as long as addresses in patron, supplier, and organization records use the postal code format.

    +

    Use the Countries Policy Table to:

    +

    Add a country - Click PRadminCat00439.gif, type the country, postal code format, postal code length, and minimum Zip code length.

    +

    If the country does not require a state, leave the state field empty. If allowed by your library, state is saved as an empty field. If a state is required, a message will instruct you to enter a state.

    +

    Modify a country - Click modbutton00440.gif, and edit the fields.

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cross_Reference_Display_Constants.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cross_Reference_Display_Constants.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da214edb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Cross_Reference_Display_Constants.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cross Reference Display Constants + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cross Reference Display Constants Policy Table

    +

    To access this table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, and select Policy Tables, Cross Reference Display Constants.Use the Cross Reference Display Constants policy table to edit cross-reference labels that display in Polaris PowerPAC browse search results.

    +

    Note:
    The cross-reference structure is set up when Polaris is implemented. You cannot add entries to this table or delete entries from it, only modify the text for the cross-reference labels.

    +
      +
    • +

      To modify an entry, click modbutton00420.gif and edit the text.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Did_You_Mean_Overrides.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Did_You_Mean_Overrides.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f55da34f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Did_You_Mean_Overrides.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Did You Mean Overrides + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Did You Mean Overrides

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00441.gif.

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00442.gif.

    +

    For information about Did You Mean search term suggestions in PAC, see Setting Up Did You Mean Term Checking.

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/EContent_Vendor_Record.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/EContent_Vendor_Record.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc327048 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/EContent_Vendor_Record.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + EContent Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EContent Vendor Record

    +

    Select Administration, Explorer, Vendor on the Polaris Shortcut Bar to access the Vendor node. To create a new eContent vendor account, select the Vendor node and select File | New. The New vendor account dialog box opens. The setup for the vendor account depends on the eContent vendor. See EContent Vendors and Polaris.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Geographic_Coordinates.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Geographic_Coordinates.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7f465869 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Geographic_Coordinates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Geographic Coordinates + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Geographic Coordinates Database Table

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00443.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00444.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Import_Blackout_Times_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Import_Blackout_Times_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c79ad30 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Import_Blackout_Times_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Import Blackout Times Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Import Blackout Times Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Import Blackout Times dialog box, select the System level folder in the Polaris Administration Explorer, select Profiles, select the Cataloging tab, and double-click Import Blackout Times. This profile specifies the times when import processing cannot be run.

    +

    Use the Import Blackout Times dialog box to:

    +
      +

      Specify up to three daily blackout times - Select Enable under Daily blackout time 1, 2, or 3, and select a Start time and an End time.

      +

      Specify a single one-time blackout period - Select Enable under One-time blackout, and select a Start date/time and an End date/time.

      +
    +

    The import blackout times are set for all organizations in the system.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Initial_Articles.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Initial_Articles.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a4d2bc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Initial_Articles.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Initial Articles + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Initial Articles Policy Table

    +

    To access the Initial Articles policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, and select Policy Tables, Initial Articles.Use the Initial Articles policy table to specify words that can be stripped from the beginning of Find Tool exact match search strings.

    +
      +
    • +

      To add an entry, click PRadminCat00421.gif to open the Insert: Initial Articles dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify an entry, click modbutton00422.gif to open the Modify: Initial Articles dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Availability_Display_Order.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Availability_Display_Order.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5abd298e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Availability_Display_Order.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Availability Display Order + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Availability Display Order Policy Table

    +

    To access the Item Availability Display Order policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, select Policy Tables, and select Item Availability Display Order. Use the Item Availability Display Order policy table to specify the order of items displayed in the Availability displays in PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      To add an entry, click PRadminCat00423.gif to open the Insert: Item Availability Display Order dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify an entry, click modbutton00424.gif to open the Modify: Item Availability Display Order dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0bb83ff --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Call_Number_Hierarchy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Create Call Number Hierarchy + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Create Call Number Hierarchy

    +

    Use this table to:

    +

    Specify the tags in the bibliographic record to use for the call number in the linked item record and the precedence in which the tags are checked for the call number.

    +
      +
    • To add an entry, click PRadminCat00445.gif
    • +
    • To modify an entry, click modbutton00446.gif
    • +
    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..615b0a20 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Item_Create_Price_Hierarchy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Create Price Hierarchy + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Create Price Hierarchy

    +
      +
    • To add an entry, click PRadminCat00447.gif
    • +
    • To modify an entry, click modbutton00448.gif
    • +
    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Language_Scoping_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Language_Scoping_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8bca8ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Language_Scoping_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + MARC Language Scoping Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    MARC Language Scoping Display Policy Table

    +

    To access the MARC Language Scoping Display policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, select Policy Tables, and select MARC Language Scoping Display. Use the MARC Language Scoping Display policy table to specify the languages displayed as scoping options in Find Tool and PowerPAC searches.

    +
      +
    • +

      To add an entry, click PRadminCat00425.gif to open the Insert: MARC Language Scoping Display dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To modify an entry, click modbutton00426.gif to open the Modify: MARC Language Scoping Display dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Validation_Editor.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Validation_Editor.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8faca833 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/MARC_Validation_Editor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + MARC Validation Editor + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    MARC Validation Editor

    +

    The MARC Validation Editor is displayed when you select the Profiles folder at the System level, the Cataloging tab, and the MARC Validation Authority or MARC Validation Bibliographic profiles.

    +

    Use the MARC Validation Editor dialog box to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Material_Types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Material_Types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57cd14a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Material_Types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Material Types + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Material Types Policy Table

    +

    To access the Material Types policy table, select Administration, Explorer, select the organization, select Policy Tables, and select Material types.

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00427.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00428.gif

    +

    See Defining Material Types.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/New_Vendor_Account_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/New_Vendor_Account_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b027b3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/New_Vendor_Account_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + New Vendor Account Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Vendor Account Dialog Box

    +

    To access the New Vendor Account dialog box, select Administration, Explorer, Vendor, and select File | New.

    +

    Use the New Vendor Account dialog box to create a new vendor account. Select the eContent vendor from the drop-down list box.

    +

    The Vendor Account workform opens where you enter information for the vendor account. See Implementing EContent Integration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/PAC_Community_Limit_By_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/PAC_Community_Limit_By_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94d39cee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/PAC_Community_Limit_By_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + PAC Community Limit By Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Community Limit By Display

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00451.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00452.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Author.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Author.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09ea973a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Author.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Primary Display Author + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Primary Display Author

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00453.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00454.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Title.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Title.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d246f52b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Primary_Display_Title.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Primary Display Title + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Primary Display Title

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00455.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00456.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Remote_Automatic_Authority_Control_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Remote_Automatic_Authority_Control_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a4ef218b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Remote_Automatic_Authority_Control_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Remote Automatic Authority Control Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remote Automatic Authority Control Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Remote Authority Control dialog box, select the organization in the Polaris Administration Explorer, select Profiles, select the Cataloging tab, and double-click Remote automatic authority control.

    +

    Note:
    Your library must have a subscription to the Polaris ZMARC or OCLC authority records database to use remote authority control in Polaris. If remote automatic authority control is enabled, when bibliographic records are saved and no matching authority records are found in the Polaris database, the remote database is checked automatically, and the matching authority record is saved to your local database.

    +

    Use the Remote Automatic Authority Control Defaults dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable automatic authority control for your library using a remote database - Select Enable remote automatic authority control.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the server to use for automatic authority control - Select the server in the Server box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the remote authority database to use for automatic authority control - Select the database in the Database box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the amount of time in seconds before the search times out - Type a number in the Search Timeout (seconds) box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save the authority control settings - Click OK to save the automatic authority control settings.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Search_Databases.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Search_Databases.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..95c3540b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/Search_Databases.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search Databases + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search Databases Policy Table

    +

    This table lists the databases available for Find Tool searches in the staff client for each organization. At the branch level, you can open the table for a specific branch and delete any database you do not want to display in the Find Tool for that branch. See Controlling Database Access in the Staff Client.

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00431.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00432.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/_9_Cleanup_Utility_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/_9_Cleanup_Utility_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97349cd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminCat/_9_Cleanup_Utility_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + $9 Cleanup Utility Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    $9 Cleanup Utility Dialog Box

    +

    To access the $9 Cleanup Utility dialog box, select the System level in the Polaris Administration Explorer, select Profiles, select the Cataloging tab, and double-click Subfield 9 cleanup utility. This profile controls the utility that deletes 852, 947, 948, 949 or 970 tags that have been used in automatic processing to create item records from embedded holdings, or to create the segments in purchase order or selection list line items. The utility runs nightly and deletes tags that have been processed a specified number of days, months, or years before the utility is run.

    +

    Note:
    When a $9 is inserted automatically into a record, it has a Processed date (for selection list line item or purchase order segments), or an Item created date (for items created from embedded holdings). The $9 is inserted into embedded holdings tags if the Cataloging parameter Mark embedded holdings tags as processed is set to Yes. See Mark embedded holdings data as processed.

    +

    Use the $9 Cleanup Utility dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Specify how long to wait after the tags are processed before deleting them - Select the check box next to Subfield 9 created more than ___ _____ before the job run date, type a number, and select days, months or years.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the tags to delete if the $9 is found - Select one or more check boxes to select the tags the utility should delete if a $9 is found with a processed date more than the specified number of days, months, or years before the job run date.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save the profile settings - Click OK.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Accrued_Fine_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Accrued_Fine_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ea5ebdc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Accrued_Fine_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Accrued Fine Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Accrued Fine Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration (system level), select Parameters, Patron Services, Accrued fine options.

    +

    These settings control whether to include lost items and/or claimed items in estimated fine calculations, and whether to include estimated fines in blocking calculations. For setup details, see Calculating and Blocking for Estimated Accrued Fines.

    +
      +
    • Include claimed items in accrued fines - Select (check) to include overdue fines on claimed items in estimated fines. When this option is selected, the Estimated Fines icon EstFinesIcon.gif is available on the Patron Status workform - Claims view.
    • +
    • Include lost items in accrued fines - Select (check) to include uncharged overdue fines on lost items in estimated fines. When this option is selected, the Estimated Fines icon EstFinesIcon00695.gif is available on the Patron Status workform - Claims view.
    • +
    • Block for estimated fines - Select (check) to include estimated fines along with already charged fines in blocking calculations.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Estimated Fines icon is always available on the Patron Status workform - Items Out view.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Address_Verification_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Address_Verification_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12fae728 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Address_Verification_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Address Verification Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Address Verification Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration (system level), select Parameters > Patron Services > Address verification. This feature is available by license only, and the parameter is not available if the library does not have a license. Availability of the Address verification feature varies by geographic location.

    +

    These settings support automatic address verification with a third-party verification service. After address verification has been set up in Polaris Administration, the process takes place automatically when a new patron is registered (or an existing patron address is edited) with a location-specific address. Staff can also manually submit an address for verification.

    +
      +
    • Enable address verification - Select to enable the feature. If the option is enabled and later disabled, the verify options and related data will be suppressed from display in the Patron Registration workform. The related data in the database tables indicating that an address has or has not been verified will remain intact.
    • +
    • URL for verification service - Type the full URL for the verification service (250 characters maximum).
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If the URL changes, you must change it in this parameter and contact your Polaris Site Manager. Changes to the network connection require an update to the associated SQL config file.

    +
      +
    • Expiration term - Set the verification expiration term. The default is one month. When this period has passed, the patron record indicates that the verification has expired; that is, the address was verified at a date that exceeds the expiration period.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Associated_Patron_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Associated_Patron_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42e16201 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Associated_Patron_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Associated Patron Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Associated Patron Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Associated patron options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set the maximum number of linked records, specify whether patrons are blocked when their associated patrons are blocked, and whether patrons are allowed to pick up and check out items that are held for their associated patrons:

    +
      +
    • Linked record limit - Sets the number of records that can be associated with one patron record. Valid values are 0-999. Very high values may impact system performance at checkout. When a staff member adds associations to a patron record, the limit is checked for the patron's Registered at branch. If the limit has already been reached for the branch at which the primary patron is registered, no associated patrons can be added.
    • +
    • Always check “Block me” by default - Sets the default value for the option Block me if these patron records are blocked option that will block the primary patron from checking out items if the associated patron is blocked. Staff members with the appropriate permissions can change this setting when adding or editing a patron association.
    • +
    • Always check "Allow me to pick up holds for these patrons" by default- Sets the default for the option to allow primary patrons to pick up holds for associated patrons. Staff members with the appropriate permissions can change this setting when adding or editing a patron association.
    • +
    +

    See: Setting Up Defaults for Associated Patrons.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Borrow_by_Mail_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Borrow_by_Mail_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b7d16bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Borrow_by_Mail_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + + Borrow by Mail Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Borrow by Mail Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Requests, Borrow by mail.

    +

    The Borrow By Mail dialog box provides options to set up Borrow by Mail processing in the staff client and PAC. With Borrow by Mail, staff members and patrons can request library materials and have the requested materials delivered by mail. Polaris Borrow by Mail is available by license. There is no additional cost, but Borrow by Mail features are available only if the license is activated. See Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC for details.

    +

    Borrow By Mail Dialog Box - Processing Centers Tab

    +

    Available at the system level only. Use this tab to set all the organizations that might serve as processing centers for the branches that will enable Borrow by Mail. To enable Borrow by Mail features, at least one organization must be designated as a processing center on this tab. Processing centers may be actual branches or virtual organizations set up for this specific purpose.

    +

    Borrow By Mail Dialog Box - Options Tab

    +

    These settings are available at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable Borrow by Mail - Select (check) this option to enable Borrow by Mail for this organization. When this option is checked, the other controls become available.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Processing center - Select the processing center for this organization. The available options are determined by your settings on the Processing Centers tab. An item that fills a Borrow by Mail request created in the staff client is shipped to the processing center designated for the log-in branch of the workstation that created the hold request. An item that fills a Borrow by Mail request from the PAC is shipped to the processing center designated for the patron’s registered branch.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display confirmation message in PAC - Select (check) to display a confirmation message to the patron when the patron places a Borrow by Mail request. If the processing center charges a delivery fee, the message states the charge and offers the option to continue or cancel the request.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Staff display note - Select (check) to enable this option and edit the text of the note if you wish (maximum 250 characters). This message appears when an item that fills a Borrow by mail request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation, and alerts the staff member that the item requires Borrow by Mail processing.

      +
    • +
    • +

      PAC display note - Select (check) to enable this option and edit the text of the note if you wish (maximum 250 characters). This note is available in the information view for individual items listed on the PAC patron account Requests page. The system uses the processing center’s setting. Staff members with the branch-level Circulation permission Hold requests: Modify PAC display note can edit the note for individual hold requests.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Suppress charge for Outreach Services patrons - Select (check) this option if the processing center ordinarily charges a delivery fee for Borrow by Mail requests but do not want to charge a fee to homebound (Outreach Services) patrons.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add days to loan period - If you want to change the loan period to accommodate shipping time, select the number of days to extend the normal loan period for an item.

      +
    • +
    +

    Borrow By Mail Dialog Box - Limits Tab

    +

    These settings are available at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Patron codes permitted - Select (check) the patron codes for the patrons permitted to place Borrow by Mail requests.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Charges - Set at the system or library level only, or for an organization designated as a processing center. If you want to charge a Borrow by Mail delivery fee, select the appropriate patron codes, set the charge amount, and click Apply. You can set separate charges for different patron codes. To specify the same charge for multiple patron codes, select the codes, then set the charge amount and click Apply. The system uses the processing center’s settings for charges. A processing center should set charges for all the patron codes it intends to charge, regardless of whether those codes are used for the processing center’s own patrons.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item material types permitted - Deselect (uncheck) the item material types that should not be eligible to fill Books by Mail requests. The system uses the setting for the governing library for patron blocks, specified in the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium circulation. If the governing branch setting for patron blocks is Use patron branch, the permitted item material types for the patron’s registered branch are used. If the governing branch setting for patron blocks is Use transacting branch, the permitted item material types for the processing center are used.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can prevent a specific item from filling a Borrow by Mail request by checking the new setting Do not mail on the Item Record workform - Cataloging view.

    +

    Borrow By Mail Dialog Box - Print & Notices Tab

    +

    These settings are available at the system, library, or branch level.

    +
      +
    • Return address - Specify a return address for the item mailer. You can select Processing Branch (default) or Item’s Branch (item’s assigned branch).
    • +
    • Enable failure notice - Select (check) this option to generate a notice to the patron if an item cannot be checked out during Borrow by Mail bulk checkout due to blocks on the patron account. If you check this option, select a notification method. The available method options are determined by your settings in the Notification options parameter - General tab.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Branch_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Branch_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36d7c723 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Branch_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Branch Assignment Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Branch Assignment Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select the telephony server, Outbound, Branch assignment.

    +

    For systems with multiple telephony servers. This dialog box shows the current telephony server and the list of organizations that can be assigned to the server, with their current assignments (if any). The list refers to the registered branches of the patrons in the notification queue. In systems with multiple telephony servers, you can assign specific branches to a particular server to minimize long distance calls.

    +

    Select the branches that should be assigned to this server and click OK to save your assignments.

    +

    Note:
    The branches you have changed are marked with an asterisk * until you save the assignments.

    +

    See Setting Outbound Telephony Parameters.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CLASS_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CLASS_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee3eabf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CLASS_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + CLASS Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    CLASS Dialog Box

    +

    Make these settings if you use Active Network (Class Point of Sale) for credit card payments from PAC. The information is specific to your contract with Class Point of Sale. For more information about credit card processing in Polaris, see Setting Up E-Commerce.

    +

    Enter the following settings, and click OK:

    +
      +
    • +

      POS Web URL - The URL to the Class online payment page for your site.

      +
    • +
    • +

      POS Item ID (Library Fines) - The Class POS database identifier for online library fine payments.

      +
    • +
    +

    Next, set up credit card processing for the PAC. See Set up Class Point of Sale credit card payments.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7122a72 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to charge patrons for missing parts:

    +
      +
    • Type the amount of the charge in the Amount box.
    • +
    • Select the reason for the charge in the Reason box.
    • +
    • Type any applicable notes in the Notes box.
    • +
    • Click OK to enter the charge and close the dialog box.
    • +
    +

    See also: Manage Items with a Claim Missing Parts Status.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d371b6c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-In Listview Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-In Listview Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Check-in: Listview options.

    +

    Use the Check-in listview options dialog box to set which item information fields appear as columns in the list view of the Check In workform. You can make separate settings for normal and bulk check-in. Simply check the fields you want to display. See Setting Up the Check In Workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b07250f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-In_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-In Receipt Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-In Receipt Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Check-in: Receipt options.

    +

    Check-in receipts include by default the item barcode, title, author, material type, call number, and patron’s limited barcode. Use the Check-in Receipt Options dialog box to change the information on check-in receipts. To add information, select each field in the Options list and click Add. To remove information fields from the receipt, select them in the Selections list and click Remove. To print receipts, at least one field must be listed in Selections. See Set check-in receipt options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out Item Options Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out Item Options Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2457aa9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out Item Options Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Check-OUt Item Options dialog box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out Item Options Dialog Box

    +

    Select the following check boxes to select the options for allowing or denying circulations from the self-check unit based on the types of items:

    +
      +
    • Deny checkout if item is from another branch
    • +
    • Allow checkout of items with free text blocks
    • +
    • Allow checkout of items with library assigned blocks
    • +
    • In the Allow checkout of items with the selected circ statuses box, select the check boxes for the circulation statuses for which checkouts are permitted from the self-check stations.
    • +
    +

    See Set SIP self-check parameters.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_Patron_Services.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_Patron_Services.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4000a458 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_Patron_Services.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-Out Charge Options Dialog Box (Patron Services) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out Charge Options Dialog Box (Patron Services)

    +

    To open this dialog box: +
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Check-out: Charge options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set the organization’s policies for charging patrons to check out or renew specified material types:

    +

    Note: +
    The system uses the settings of the item’s assigned branch.

    +
      +
    • Enable - Select to enable charge options for check-out or renewal transactions.
    • +
    • Material types and charges - Select a material type to which a check-out or renewal charge should be applied, specify the amount to be charged, and click Apply. You can also click several material types or Select All, specify a single amount, and click Apply.
    • +
    • Patron codes to be charged - Select (check) the patron codes that should be charged the specified check-out charges. You can also click Select All.
    • +
    • Charge options - Select one option for applying charges:
      • Check-out only - Apply the charge only at check-out
      • Check-out and Renewal - Apply the charge at check-out and again if the item is renewed
      • Renewal only - Apply the charge only when the item is renewed
    • +
    • Prompt in Staff Client - Select this option if you want a message to appear when a staff member attempts to check out or renew a chargeable item.
    • +
    +

    See: Charging for Checkout and Renewal.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..586a3c7f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-Out Charge Options Dialog Box (SelfCheck Unit) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out Charge Options Dialog Box (SelfCheck Unit)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, SelfCheck Unit, Check-out: Charge options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to determine how the SIP self-check unit handles check-out and renewal transactions for chargeable items.

    +

    Note:
    The system uses the SIP settings for the workstation’s branch, but uses the chargeable settings for the item’s assigned branch. For more information about setting up charges for checkout and renewal, see Charging for Checkout and Renewal.

    +
      +
    • +

      Allow check-out if item is chargeable - Select to allow check-outs of chargeable materials from SIP self-check units.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Allow renewal if item is chargeable - This option is available if you selected Allow check-out if item is chargeable. Select this option to allow renewals of chargeable materials.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Auto-charge for renew all - This option is available if you selected Allow renewal if item is chargeable. Select this option to automatically place any charges on the patron account when the patron renews all items.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If the material type is blocked from check-out at SIP self-check units, that setting takes precedence over any chargeable policies and the transaction is stopped.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae276a60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Listview_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-Out Listview Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out Listview Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Check-out: Listview options.

    +

    Use the Check-out Listview Options dialog box to set which item information fields appear as columns in the list view of the Check Out workform. Select each field in the Options list, and click Add.

    +

    You can also set which patron data to display in the Check Out workform, using the Patron Services parameter Check-out: Optional patron data. See Setting Up the Check Out Workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..26b0e906 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Check-Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check-Out Receipt Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check-Out Receipt Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Check-out: Receipt options.

    +

    Check-out receipts always display the library name, date/time, type of receipt, item barcodes, item titles, and due dates.

    +

    Use the Check-out Receipt Options dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify additional information for check-out receipts:
      • Select additional content to appear on email and printed receipts
      • Select additional content to appear on email receipts
      • Select content to appear on text message receipts
    • +
    • Print a receipt only when the patron requests one - Select Print receipts only with prompt. When the Check out receipt option is checked on the workform Tools, Options menu and the option to prompt for the optional check-out receipt has been enabled for the workstation branch, the prompt to print a receipt is displayed when the Enter key is pressed to signal the end of the check-out transaction.
    • +
    • Prompt Leap users when checking out patrons who do not have eReceipts selected. Select the Prompt for eReceipt configuration in Leap if you want staff members checking out patrons in Leap to be prompted if the patron does not receive eReceipts. If this option is selected and the Leap login branch and the patron's branch have enabled eReceipts, a prompt notifies the Leap user that the patron does not receive eReceipts. The Leap user can set up eReceipts for the patron from the check out page.
    • +
    +

    See Set check-out receipt options.

    +

    In the staff client, you specify the workforms from which the receipts can be printed. You can also specify custom text messages for check-out receipts. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Circulation Statuses Database Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Circulation Statuses Database Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36f7aad7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Circulation Statuses Database Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Circulation Statuses Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulation Statuses Database Table

    +

    Use this table to identify the standard names for item circulation statuses. The descriptions can be changed, but the actual statuses are read-only.

    +

    When you change an item status entry, you can optionally enter text in the Banner Text box if you are using Polaris Leap and want the item status to appear on the bottom of the Item Record workform's book jacket image in Leap.

    +

    You can select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Collection_Agency_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Collection_Agency_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55131ac8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Collection_Agency_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + + + + Collection Agency Setup Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Collection Agency Setup Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Collection agency options.

    +

    If your library uses a collection agency, you set the thresholds that determine which patrons are listed on a collection agency report. You also set the report schedule, transmission methods, collection fees, and patron information to include on the reports.

    +

    Note:
    You can make independent collection agency settings at the system, library, and branch levels. This means that libraries and branches can choose not to participate in collection services, or they can use different thresholds. However, if possible, it is recommended that your entire library system use a single system-wide setup.

    +

    Collection Agency Setup Dialog Box - Control Tab

    +

    The Control tab sets the parameters for collection agency reporting. For details, see Set up collection agency processing. For more information about collection agency reports, see Collection Processing Reports.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable collection agency - Select (check) this option to begin using collection agency functions.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you clear (uncheck) the Enable collection agency check box after reporting has begun, you receive a warning message. If you continue, any collection agency blocks in patron records are cleared. Then, if you check Enable collection agency again, the patrons are put back in collection and duplicate collection fees are placed on their accounts. Anyone who has paid amounts so the balance is under the threshold, but not down to 0.00, is not included. If you simply want to stop reporting for a period of time, click Stop.

    +
      +
    • +

      Start and stop reporting - Click Start to begin the scheduled reporting process for Submission and Update reports. Click Stop to halt the scheduled reporting process. If you click Stop while reports are being run, you are asked whether you want to stop the reports. If you click Yes, no reports are generated unless the process is restarted by clicking Start.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Reporting and scheduling settings - See Set up collection agency processing.

      +
    • +
    +

    Collection Agency Setup Dialog Box - Criteria Tab

    +

    This tab sets the criteria that determine which patron accounts are reported. For details, see Set up collection agency processing.

    +
      +
    • +

      Cut-off date - The earliest date a fine can be incurred and still be considered in the delinquent balance. Fines incurred before this date are not considered. If you want to be sure to include all fines in the total amount required for reporting, specify a cut-off date in the remote past.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Fine age - The most recent fine that can be considered in the delinquent balance. If you send fine notices to patrons to warn them that their accounts will be placed in collection, be sure this setting is greater than the fine age setting for the fine notice. This will ensure that the patron receives the notice before the account is sent to collection. See Fine Notices.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Minimum balance - Indicate the minimum amount for a patron’s account to be delinquent and submitted for collection. If you send fine notices to patrons to warn them that their accounts will be placed in collection, set this to the same value as the minimum balance that triggers the fine notice. See Fine Notices.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Minimum balance based on item fees only - System level only. Select this option to report patron accounts based only on lost item charges ((combined replacement and processing fees). If selected, this setting affects all calculations to determine if a patron account qualifies for reporting, regardless of the Reporting Level (System, Library, Branch) or Reporting By (Patron Branch, Item Branch, Loaning Branch) settings on the Control tab. See Reporting for Lost Item Charges Only.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron codes to exclude - Select any patron codes that should never be included in collection agency processing.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patrons to include - Use this feature to manually include specific patrons in the Submission report, even if they do not qualify according to cut-off date, fine age, and minimum balance criteria, or their patron code is excluded. Click Add to display the Find Tool, and select a patron. (The list is cleared after the patrons are reported.) Click Delete to remove a patron from the list.

      +
    • +
    +

    Collection Agency Setup Dialog Box - Details Tab

    +

    This tab sets any collection agency fees that will be billed to patrons, and the user-defined field information that should appear on reports. For details, see Set up collection agency processing.

    +
      +
    • +

      Collection agency fees - You can set three levels of fees. If you specify a beginning amount for a second-level fee range in number 2, the To field for number 1 is automatically assigned, and so forth. The fees are automatically added to the amount the patron owes at the time he is reported.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a patron account has any charge, payment or waive activity after the account is submitted to the collection agency, the patron account is included on the update report, but the collection agency fee is not charged again. The fee is charged only when the account is submitted to the collection agency.

    +
      +
    • +

      User-defined fields - Select which fields to include on the Submission and Update reports. If you report minors in care of their guardians, select the appropriate user-defined field for the guardian. See Reporting Minors.

      +
    • +
    +

    Collection Agency Setup Dialog Box - Output Tab

    +

    The Output tab controls the transmission methods for collection agency reporting. For details, see Set up collection agency processing. For more information about collection agency reports, see Collection Processing Reports.

    +
      +
    • +

      Send email - Check to enable e-mail transmission of collection agency reports or summary e-mail report.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To (e-mail) - Separate multiple e-mail addresses (for example, the collection agency and a library staff member) with a semicolon (;). E-mail fields are limited to 255 characters, including the semicolons. If you have multiple e-mail addresses that require more characters, set up a distribution group on the e-mail server, and type the distribution group name in the e-mail address field.

      +
    • +
    • +

      From - Specify the reply e-mail address.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Send summary email only - Used with the FTP transmittal (see below). If the library sends files to the agency via e-mail but does not use FTP, do not select this option. If you use FTP transmittal and want to generate an e-mail summary report, check Send email, check Send summary email only, and set up the receiving addresses as described above.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable FTP - Check to enable FTP transmission of collection agency reports to the collection agency.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set mode to Active FTP - Check if the collection agency uses Active FTP transmission. Otherwise, Passive mode is used. See Active FTP.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Agency server information - Type the agency’s server information in the following fields:

      +
    • +
    • +

      FTP server - The complete URI for the agency’s FTP server.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Default Folder - This organization’s folder name as it exists on the agency’s FTP server.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Default port - Port number for the agency’s FTP server.

      +
    • +
    • +

      User Name, Password - Supply your user name and password for the agency’s FTP server.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Third-party FTP service - See Secure FTP and Third-Party FTP software.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the executable name (for example, ftp.exe) or click Browse to browse for and select the executable.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter the FTP parameters as directed by your third-party service. At a minimum, your entry must include [FTPFILE]. Other possible parameters include:

      +
    • +
        +

        [FTPUSER] - FTP user

        +

        [FTPPASSWORD] - FTP password

        +

        [FTPPORT] - FTP port

        +

        [FTPREMOTEPATH] - The remote FTP path to put the file in

        +

        Example:
        -s -file  [FTPFILE] +

        +
      +

      Note:
      Some of the parameters may duplicate the values you entered in the User Name, Password, or other fields.

      +
    • +

      Number of days to keep the reports - Specify how long report copies should be kept on the server. (The report file may be sent to the collection agency via FTP or delivered on disc or paper.)

      +
    • +

      Note:
      Collection agency report processing takes place on the server. Report copies are automatically saved in the following default server location:
      C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\SSIS\CollectionAgency\Reports\
      [Branch Abbreviation]

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Comprise_MSP_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Comprise_MSP_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ecb72f8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Comprise_MSP_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Comprise MSP Properties Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Comprise MSP Properties Dialog Box

    +

    Specify these settings if you use the Comprise SmartPAY payment gateway for credit card processing. The information is specific to your contract with Comprise SmartPAY. For more information about credit card processing in Polaris, see E-Commerce with Comprise™ SmartPAY™.

    +
      +
    • Payment page URL (SmartPay API Address) - This can be set at the System level if you have a single Comprise account or at the Branch level if you have multiple Comprise accounts. Provided by Comprise. This is the SmartPAY payment page.
    • +
    • Customer Name - This can be set at the System level if you have a single Comprise account or at the Branch level if you have multiple Comprise accounts. Provided by Comprise, passed to SmartPay during the payment transaction. A branch can opt to use a different payment gateway, but all organizations that use Comprise MSP will use the same Customer Name and Customer ID.
    • +
    • Customer ID - This can be set at the System level if you have a single Comprise account or at the Branch level if you have multiple Comprise accounts.. Provided by Comprise, passed to SmartPay during the payment transaction. A branch can opt to use a different payment gateway, but all organizations that use Comprise MSP will use the same Customer Name and Customer ID.
    • +
    • User name - Provided by Comprise. Each branch has its own user name.
    • +
    • Password - Provided by Comprise. Each branch has its own password.
    • +
    • Location ID - Provided by Comprise. Apply to PAC only. Pass to SmartPay WEB API. One per branch.
    • +
    • PAC Return URL - PowerPAC page to which the user is returned after fines payment, typically the patron account page. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
    • +
    • MPAC Return URL - Mobile PAC page to which the user is returned after fines payment, typically the patron account page. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When a patron cancels a payment from PowerPAC or Mobile PAC, the appropriate Return URL page is displayed.

    +
      +
    • Donations PAC Return URL - PowerPAC page to which the user is returned after a donation payment. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
    • +
    • Donations MPAC Return URL - Mobile PAC page to which the user is returned after a donation payment. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters.
    • +
    • Postback URL - The location on the library Web site used to update the Polaris database. This location applies to both PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, and is not branch-specific. Maximum 250 alphanumeric characters. Format:
    • +
    +

    https://servername:port/payments/PostbackSmartpay.aspx +

    +

    For example:

    +

    https://mylibrary.com/polaris/payments/PostbackSmartpay.aspx +

    +
      +
    • Inactivity timeout - Specifies how long Polaris waits for the credit transaction to be processed before canceling it. This control applies to ExpressCheck and the staff client only (not to PowerPAC or Mobile PAC).
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can also set an Inactivity timeout value set for ExpressCheck transactions (SelfCheck Unit parameters, Polaris ExpressCheck: Options). The default value for both settings is 60 seconds. Polaris ExpressCheck times out after the total of both settings to ensure that the ExpressCheck application never times out before the credit card transaction processing time.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Consortium_Circulation_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Consortium_Circulation_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c32a6c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Consortium_Circulation_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Consortium Circulation Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Consortium Circulation Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Consortium Circulation.

    +

    Use the Consortium Circulation dialog box to establish which library’s settings govern certain aspects of check-out and renewal transactions: the patron’s branch, the transacting branch, or the item’s assigned branch. You can select different governing libraries for due date calculation, loan and request limits, fine calculation, and lost item recovery. This dialog box is available at the system level only, and these settings apply to the whole system. For important details and exceptions, see Managing Integrated EContent in the PAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course Reserves Course Names Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course Reserves Course Names Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63c57d84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course Reserves Course Names Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Course Reserves Course Names Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Course Names Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to associate the organizations (branches) with the course names for which the branches handle course reserves.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResDeptPolTab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResDeptPolTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fad09126 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResDeptPolTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Course Reserves: Departments Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Departments Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to associate the organizations (branches) with the academic departments for which the organizations handle course reserves.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResSchoolDivPolTab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResSchoolDivPolTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..df436432 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResSchoolDivPolTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Course Reserves: Schools/Divisions Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Schools/Divisions Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to associate the organizations (branches) with the academic schools or divisions for which the branches handle course reserves.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResTermsPolTab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResTermsPolTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64dea5ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/CourseResTermsPolTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Course Reserves: Course Terms Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserves: Course Terms Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to associate the organizations (branches) with the course terms for which the branches handle course reserves.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course_Reserve_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course_Reserve_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d2d3ed2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Course_Reserve_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + + + Course Reserve Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserve Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Course reserve options.

    +

    Course reserve options control the default settings for the reserve item “record,” which stores circulation, status, and disposition information about an item that has been placed on course reserve. The default values for the reserve item record can be different from those used in the equivalent (non-reserved) item record. See Setting Course Reserve Options. Set the defaults for reserve items as follows:

    +

    Note:
    Course reserve tables control course information settings.

    +
      +
    • +

      Assigned branch +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Assigned collection (optional) - The list includes all collections defined for the assigned branch.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Shelf location (optional) - The list includes all shelf locations defined for the assigned branch.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Loan period code +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Fine code +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Renewal limit - Select 0 if you do not allow renewals on most reserve items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Holdable - Select (check) if hold requests are allowed on most reserve items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy owner - Select Library if most reserve items are drawn from the library’s collection. Select Instructor if instructors supply most reserve items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Action when done - Indicates the default action to take when a reserve item is taken off reserve.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Discard - The item should be discarded when it is taken off reserve. You may wish to use this option if most of your reserve items are photocopies or temporary materials provided by the instructor.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Return item to collection - The item should return to the library’s circulating (non-reserve) collection when it is taken off reserve (available only if Library is the selected copy owner).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Return to owner - The item should be returned to the instructor when it is taken off reserve (available only if Instructor is the selected copy owner).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Auto-delete - Automatically delete the item record (and the associated bibliographic record, if appropriate) when an item is taken off reserve. If most of your reserve items are instructor-owned, and you are therefore creating temporary item records for them when they are placed on reserve, you may wish to select this option (available only if Discard or Return to Owner is selected).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copyright compliance - Select a default compliance option:

      +
    • +
    • +

      None - Select if most reserve items are not photocopies.

      +
    • +
    • +

      CCG (compliance with copyright guidelines) - For photocopied journal articles if the article is dated within the last five years, and your library does not own the journal title, and this is the fifth or fewer request made for this item within the current calendar year.

      +
    • +
    • +

      CCL (compliance with copyright law) - All other photocopies; for example, the article is older than five years, or your library owns the journal title, or this is the sixth or greater request within the calendar year and if your library is paying royalties to the Copyright Clearance Center or a document delivery vendor.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Library use only - Select if most reserve items should not be removed from the library.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Requires full cataloging - Select if most reserve items need further cataloging (available only if Library is the selected copy owner).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Purchase - Indicates that the library may wish to purchase copies of most reserve items, if they are instructor-owned, or additional copies of library-owned items. This option simply sets an indicator in the reserve item record. It does not initiate automatic purchase order functions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copyright fee required - Indicates that a copyright fee is required for most reserve items. This option does not initiate any automatic functions.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Dates_Closed_Policy_Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Dates_Closed_Policy_Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93a336bf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Dates_Closed_Policy_Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Dates Closed Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Dates Closed Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to specify the dates that the branch is closed due to holidays or other events. To specify the days of the week when a branch is ordinarily closed, such as Sunday, use the Patron Services parameter Hours of operation.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Duplicate_Detection_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Duplicate_Detection_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f558b035 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Duplicate_Detection_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Duplicate Detection Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Duplicate Detection Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters > Patron Services > Duplication detection options.

    +

    When you save a patron record, Polaris automatically checks for duplicate records. Polaris always checks the patron name fields (first, middle, and last names), barcode, and birth date (if any) for matches. Use this dialog box to set additional duplicate detection criteria. You can select a maximum of two from the list of user-defined fields. There is no selection limit in the other sections. The system uses the registration library’s settings. See Setting Patron Duplicate Detection.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/EReceipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/EReceipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..155b63c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/EReceipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + EReceipt Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EReceipt Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Ereceipt options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to enable eReceipts (e-mail receipts and/or TXT receipts) for patrons who prefer either of these options over printed receipts. E-mail and/or text message receipts are available for check-out, renewal, and fine receipts from the staff client, and renewals from PAC and Polaris ExpressCheck.

    +

    Select (check) Enable e-mail receipts, Enable TXT receipts, or both. When at least one eReceipt option is selected, you can also opt to send receipts for renewal from PAC.

    +

    When at least one options is selected for the patron’s branch, the option is available for selection on the patron registration workform. At check out, eReceipts must be enabled for both the patron’s branch and the check-out (log-on) branch in order for the patron to receive the check-out eReceipt.

    +

    For more information, see Setting Up eReceipts.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/End_of_Term_Due_Date_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/End_of_Term_Due_Date_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2aa24b9b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/End_of_Term_Due_Date_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + End of Term Due Date Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    End of Term Due Date Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, End-of-term due date options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to prevent items from circulating after a specific or recurring date, regardless of the item’s loan period. See Setting End-of-Term Due Dates.

    +

    Polaris applies end-of-term (EOT) due dates based on the settings for the branch (item, patron, or transacting) that governs due dates. For information about setting the governing branch for due dates, see Governing Library for Circulation Transactions.

    +

    Important:
    Although you can set EOT dates at any organizational level, settings made at higher levels do not display at the branch level but may nevertheless override branch-level settings. To avoid this issue, set all EOT dates at the branch level, especially if different organizations need different dates.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set a new end-of-term date - Click New. The End-of-Term Due Date dialog box appears. Choose one of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set one numeric date - Click Specific date, and select the date from the calendar in the Specific date box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    Friday, December 20, 2002

    +
      +
    • +

      Set the date by day of the month - click The and select a value in each of the three boxes (order, day, and month).

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    The third Friday of December

    +
      +
    • +

      Set a recurring date - Select the Recurring date check box. Then, to stop the EOT date from functioning after a specific number of occurrences, click End after and type the number in the occurrences box. Or, to stop the EOT date from functioning after a specific year, click End after year and type the year in the box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the date to function indefinitely - Click Never end.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Exempt certain patron codes from all EOT dates - Select the check box next to each specific patron code that should be exempt.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Exempt certain patron codes from a selected EOT date only - Select the EOT date, select the Separate exclusions check box, then select the check box next to each specific patron code that should be exempt.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit an end-of-term due date - Select an EOT date, and select one of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the date and recurrence information - Click Edit. The End-of-Term Due Date dialog box appears. Make any changes, and click OK.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the patron codes excluded from the selected EOT date - Select the Separate exclusions check box, and select or clear the check boxes next to the patron codes.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Express_Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Express_Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bc186384 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Express_Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Express Patron Registration Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Express Patron Registration Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Express patron registration options.

    +

    Staff can express-register a new patron at check-out, so that the patron can check out items immediately. Use the Express Patron Registration Options dialog box to enable express registration Entering patron information during the check-out process as a service to new, unregistered patrons., set required fields, and set the default values for certain fields on the Express Registration workform. The defaults can be edited on the workform if necessary. See Setting Express Registration Defaults and Requirements. For more information about express registration, see Express-register a new patron at check-out.

    +
      +
    • +

      General Defaults tab - Use this page to activate the express-registration function for circulation staff, and select default values for basic patron information. See Set express registration default values and required fields.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Activate express registration - Select (check) Enable Express Registration. If the check box is not selected, express registration is not available on the Check Out workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add block to verify patron - Select to add an automatic block to any patron record created through express registration. See Resolve a Verify Patron block.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron information - Set the default information for patron records created through express registration.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Notification setting also controls the default notification method when a patron registers for a new account in Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      UDF Defaults tab - Use this page to designate user-defined fields (UDFs) as required for express registration, and type default text for free-text UDFs or select default options for drop-menu UDFs. The available UDFs are defined with the Patron Services profiles Patron registration user defined fields. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Required Fields tab - Use this page to designate additional required fields for express patron registration. See Set express registration default values and required fields.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fee_Descriptions.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fee_Descriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..82220f60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fee_Descriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Fee Descriptions Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fee Descriptions Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define fee descriptions. Entries in this table display as available selections when staff apply charges to patrons' accounts. At the branch level, you can specify the fee descriptions that you want to display for that branch and set the order of the fee descriptions.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6d23cef --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fine Receipt Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fine Receipt Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Fine receipt options.

    +

    Fine receipts record the fines paid or waived for overdue items, replacement items, and other fees for a patron. They always include the library name, date/time, type of receipt, title, item barcode, reason (from the charge transaction), the amount paid or waived, and total charges. Use the Fine Receipt Options dialog box to specify more information for fine receipts, in addition to the standard information. Select each field in the Options list, and click Add. If you add Suppress for waived charges, the fine receipt is not printed for any waived transaction. However, if a transaction contains both payments and waivers, the receipt is printed regardless of this setting. See Set fine receipt options.

    +

    In the staff client, you specify the workforms from which the receipts can be printed. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_and_Loan_Period_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_and_Loan_Period_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5362ae8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fine_and_Loan_Period_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fine and Loan Period Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fine and Loan Period Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Fine and loan period defaults.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set default values for fine amount, maximum fine, grace period, and loan period duration. The default values are used when you add a new fine code or loan period code to the system. You can change them for specific patron codes using the Fines policy table and Loan Periods policy table. See Defining Fines and Fees and Defining Loan Periods.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Codes_Policy_Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Codes_Policy_Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dd1c4fd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Codes_Policy_Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Fine Codes Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fine Codes Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define fines codes, which in combination with patron codes, determine fine amounts.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Policy_Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Policy_Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ac8eb0e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Fines_Policy_Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Fines Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fines Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to specify fine amounts, based on the patron code of the person being charged and the fine code assigned to the item.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Finished_Transaction_Deletion_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Finished_Transaction_Deletion_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5ac2db56 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Finished_Transaction_Deletion_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Finished Transaction Deletion Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Finished Transaction Deletion Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Account transaction deletion.

    +

    Use the Finished Transaction deletion dialog box (Account transaction deletion parameter) to set whether finished transactions older than a specified period are deleted from the patron’s transaction summary. See Setting Patron Accounting Options.

    +

    If you want to delete old transactions, select (check) Enable finished transaction deletion. Then select years or months, and type the number of years or months that transactions should be retained.

    +

    Certain transactions remain in the transaction summary, regardless of your setting. See Set patron accounting options for details.

    +

    Important:
    After the cut-off date, most completed transactions are removed from the system, including lost-and-paid transactions. Set this parameter to a minimum of one year, for example, if you reimburse patrons for lost-and-paid material when the material is found within a year.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Collection Limit Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Collection Limit Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8eb8fe8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Collection Limit Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + For each receiving branch, set the limits for the number of In items with a Final status that can be in each collection. See Limit the number of floating items a branch can receive for a collection . + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating: Collection Limits Policy Table

    +

    At the System level, your library can use the Floating Options parameter to define floating limits by the maximum number of In items attached to the same bibliographic record for each material type, or by the number of In items in a collection. If Title/Material type is selected, the limits are set for the received branches using the Floating: Material Type Limits policy table. If Collection is selected, the limits are set for the receiving branches using the Floating: Collection Limits policy table.

    +

    Note: +
    The permission Modify Floating Collection Limits Table: Allow is required to modify this table.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Material Type.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Material Type.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bd12a06a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Material Type.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Floating: Material Types Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating: Material Types Policy Table

    +

    Use this policy table to specify the material types that may not float from the home branch, even if some items are part of the floating collection.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Options Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Options Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..99d3f63e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating Options Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + Floating Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In the Polaris Administration Explorer, select the organization, Parameters, Patron Services, and double-click Floating Options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to:

    +

    +

    Enable floating collections - Select the Floating enabled check box.

    +

    +

    Limit the items that can float into receiving branches by selecting Collection or Title/Material Type. The Limit By Option can be selected at the System level only and cannot be modified at the Branch level.

    +

    Implement load balancing - If Collection is selected, you can also select Load balancing. If Load balancing is selected, the options Float items with no matching collection, Float items with no collection, and Prompt for additional floating items are not visible in the dialog box.

    +

    Note: +
    +
    If Collection is selected, branches can specify the default collection limit. Branches can further refine collection limits using the Floating: Collection Limits policy table.If Title/Material Type is selected, branches can use the Floating: Material Type Limits policy table.

    +

    See also:

    +

    Setting Up Floating Collections +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/FloatingToBranchPolTab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/FloatingToBranchPolTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c0a93fae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/FloatingToBranchPolTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Floating: To Branch Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating: To Branch Policy Table

    +

    Use this policy table to specify the branches that may receive items from the home branch.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating_Material_Limits.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating_Material_Limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..74fd9fea --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Floating_Material_Limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Floating: Material Type Limits Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating: Material Type Limits Policy Table

    +

    At the System level, your library can use the Floating Options parameter to define floating limits by the maximum number of In items attached to the same bibliographic record for each material type, or by the number of In and In-transit items in a collection.

    +

    If Title/Material type is selected in the Floating Options parameter, the limits are set for the received branches using the Floating: Material Type Limits policy table.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold Request Statuses Database Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold Request Statuses Database Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a785251 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold Request Statuses Database Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Request Statuses Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Request Statuses Database Table

    +

    Use this table to specify the hold request statuses that display in the Polaris staff client and the PAC patron account.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Note: +
    Certain staff client menus, such as the item record Links menu, display the default hold request description instead of your custom description.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b704dec9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters > Requests > Holds options.

    +

    Use the Holds options tabbed dialog box to control holds processing in the staff client, Polaris PowerPAC, Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and Mobile PAC. Most holds settings can made at the System, Library, or Branch level. However, the options that control charges for holds; the time when expired, canceled, and not-supplied hold requests are deleted from Polaris; and trapping preference groups can be set only at the System level.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Pickup_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Pickup_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28256a1e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Pickup_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hold Pickup Slip Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Pickup Slip Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Hold pickup slip options.

    +

    When enabled, the hold pickup slip prints automatically when an item’s status becomes Held at a circulation transaction. This slip is intended for use in libraries that allow patrons to pick up their own held items. The hold pick-up slip is inserted in the book so that the patron’s name or barcode in a specified format and the pick-up date are visible on the shelf. By default, this slip is printed horizontally on the receipt paper, and requires a line mode (not dot matrix) receipt printer. Vertical printing settings are also available. You can also choose to append the pickup slip to the default hold slip, to the hold call slip, or both.

    +

    In the staff client, you specify the workforms from which the hold pickup slip can be printed. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    For descriptions and setup information about Polaris receipts and slips, see Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +

    Hold Pickup Slip Dialog Box - Options Tab

    +

    Use the Hold Pickup Slip dialog box to:

    +

    Note:
    For more information, see Set up hold pickup slips.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable pickup slip - Select (check) to enable hold pickup slips.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Append hold call slip - The check box is available for selection only if the Append hold call slip to pickup slip is selected under Hold slip combined. (The option is available only when the Hold Pickup Slip Options dialog box is opened at the System level.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print full patron name - When this option is selected, the patron’s full name is printed on the pickup slip.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Printer limitations restrict the name to approximately 38 characters, depending on the width of the characters and the printer model. Very long names may be cut off even if you specified the full patron name. If you set the number of characters to 1, only the first character of the last name is printed.

    +
      +
    • +

      Print__characters of patron last name - If you want only a portion of the patron’s name to print, select this option and select the number of characters.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print ___digits of the patron barcode - If you want the barcode to print select this option and select the number of barcode digits to print.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Large print - Select this option to print the barcode in large type.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Hold slips combined options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      None - This is the default. When this option is selected, the hold call slip, pickup slip, and in-transit slip are printed separately.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Combine hold pickup and in-transit slip - Select this option to combine the hold pickup slip and the in-transit slip.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Append hold call slip to pickup slip - Select this option to append the hold call slip to the pickup slip. See Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Orientation options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Horizontal (default) - The hold pickup slip is inserted in the material, exposing the patron name and pickup date. The material is shelved so that the slip extends horizontally from the material.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Vertical - The hold pickup slip is a wrapper that is typically taped to the spine of the material. The pickup date is printed horizontally at the top and the patron’s name is printed vertically down the slip. Any additional content is printed in small type under the pickup date.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Tag - The hold pickup slip is inserted into the material. When the slip is inserted, the patron name and pickup date are exposed at the top of the slip, printed horizontally, and the “tail” of the slip is inside the material. The material is shelved so that the slip extends above the material. Any additional content is printed in small type under the item barcode.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Trailing blank lines - Specify the number of blank lines to insert on the right side of horizontal slips or the bottom of vertical slips. This setting determines the length of the blank “tail” that is inserted into the book.

      +
    • +
    +

    Hold Pickup Slip Dialog Box - Contents Selection Tab

    +

    Select the fields that you want to be printed on the hold pickup slip in the Options list, and click Add. See Set hold slip options.

    +
      +
    • +

      last four digits of the patron’s phone number - The numbers are printed after the patron’s name, if you chose to print the name, in the same large font. The system uses the last four consecutive digits of the Voice phone 1 field in the patron record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Title - The item’s title is printed in normal weight, smaller characters.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item barcode - The item barcode is printed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Pickup branch abbreviation - The pickup branch abbreviation, if selected is printed on all holds pickup slips, regardless of format, at the top of the slip. On horizontal slips, the branch abbreviation is printed above the patron name in bold capital letters the same font size as the date.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Unclaimed date - The unclaimed date.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Libraries that process items for holds centrally, sorting held items by pickup branch, may want to select the pickup branch abbreviation option to print at the top of the holds pickup slip for ease in sorting.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e15a67b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hold_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hold Slip Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Slip Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Hold slip options.

    +

    A hold slip prints automatically when an item’s status becomes Held at a circulation transaction. The slip always includes the pickup location, date the item was trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for the hold, held till (unclaimed) date, item title, item call number, item barcode, and item’s assigned branch. Use the Hold Slip Options dialog box to set what additional information appears on hold slips. Select each field in the Options list, and click Add. See Set hold slip options.

    +

    In the staff client, you specify the workforms from which the hold slip can be printed. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +

    For descriptions and setup information about Polaris receipts and slips, see Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds Routing Sequences Primary.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds Routing Sequences Primary.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a6dbd03e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds Routing Sequences Primary.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Holds Routing Sequences Primary Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds Routing Sequences Primary Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to add or edit a primary holds routing entry.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Item_Pickup_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Item_Pickup_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14664253 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Item_Pickup_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Holds: Item Pickup Branches Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds: Item Pickup Branches Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In the Polaris Administration Explorer, select the branch organization and select Parameters, Patron Services, Holds: Item pickup branches.:

    +

    Use the Holds: Item pickup branches dialog box to:

    +

    Select one or more pickup branches for holds processing. The selected branches display in the Item Record workform Pickup at list. See Set up the hold pickup branch list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Routing_Sequences_Secondary_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Routing_Sequences_Secondary_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..160ad483 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Holds_Routing_Sequences_Secondary_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Holds Routing Sequences Secondary Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds Routing Sequences Secondary Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to add or edit a secondary holds routing entry.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hours_of_Operation_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hours_of_Operation_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb2edee9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Hours_of_Operation_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hours of Operation Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hours of Operation Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Hours of operation.

    +

    Use the Hours of Operation dialog box to designate days closed for an organization. If a day of the week (for example, Sunday) is designated as a closed day, the due date moves to the next open day. See Calculating Due Dates. Simply select the closed days in the dialog box. In addition, set the operating times for each open day. This schedule is used in calculating overnight loans for hourly items. See Hourly Loans.

    +

    The lending library’s closed dates are also used in due date calculation. If the due date (such as January 1) is defined as closed, the due date moves to the next open date. These dates are set in the Dates Closed policy table for an organization. See Identifying Dates Closed.

    +

    Note:
    Regardless of governing library settings, the system always uses the Hours of operation (closed days) settings and Dates Closed policy table of the transacting branch when calculating the due date.

    +

    The schedule set up in the Hours of Operation dialog box is also used on the Polaris PowerPAC Hours page (see Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar) and the Library & Contact page in Mobile PAC (see Set up the Library Hours & Contact page).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Institutional_Patron_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Institutional_Patron_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37c05c75 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Institutional_Patron_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + ILL Institutional Patron Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    ILL Institutional Patron Dialog Box

    +

    When lending items through interlibrary loan, NCIP uses a default “institutional patron” as the borrower. Only one institutional patron is used for all ILL lending. When the request is filled in the other system, the Polaris item will be checked out automatically to this NCIP patron. See Setting NCIP Parameters.

    +

    A single patron record with the barcode NCIPpatron001 must be set up and the selected as the institutional patron for successful processing. If a patron record with the barcode NCIPpatron001 has been defined, the patron record will be selected in the dialog box.

    +

    If your library is licensed to use INN-Reach, the institutional patron is used in the creation of virtual patron records for INN-Reach. See Enable Creation of Virtual Patron Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5bd41e92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ILL_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + ILL Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    ILL Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Requests, ILL options.

    +

    An interlibrary loan (ILL) request is filled by routing the request to potential lenders outside the local library system. You can set Polaris to allow interlibrary loan requests from the staff client, PAC, or both. The ILL Option dialog box (Requests parameters) provides options that control interlibrary loan processing. See Setting Up ILL Requests.

    +

    ILL Options Dialog Box - Requests Tab

    +

    Use the ILL Options dialog box - Requests tab to enable ILL requests from Polaris PowerPAC and from the staff client. If you select Mediate All, library staff review interlibrary loan requests from the PAC before the requests are sent to the ILL service provider.

    +

    ILL Options Dialog Box - Restrictions Tab

    +

    Use the ILL Options dialog box - Restrictions tab to set limits on ILL requests.

    +
      +
    • Hold-to-ILL is mediated - Select this option to have ILL requests that are converted from hold requests reviewed by staff before being sent to the ILL service provider.
    • +
    • Patron codes to exclude - Select any patron codes that should not be allowed to place ILL requests.
    • +
    • Need-by - Type the default number of days in which an ILL request should be filled.
    • +
    • Held period - Type the number of days a library holds an ILL item for a patron to pick up before returning the item to the lending library.
    • +
    • Block for patron fines - These options apply to ILL requests from PAC.
    • +
    • Over 2nd level fine amount - The patron is blocked if the money owed is over the 2nd level fine amount set by the patron’s registered branch, and a block message is displayed in PAC.
    • +
    • Over [amount] - Select this option and set an amount. The patron is blocked if the money owed is greater than or equal to the amount you specify, and a block message is displayed in PAC. This is the default setting. The default amount is $0.01, which blocks the request if the patron owes any money at all.
    • +
    +

    ILL Options Dialog Box - OCLC Tab +

    +

    Use the ILL Options dialog box - OCLC tab to set up ILL service parameters with OCLC.

    +
      +
    • Enable OCLC connection - Select to indicate that interlibrary loan requests are managed through OCLC ILL Direct Request Services.
    • +
    • OCLC Symbol - The mnemonic for the library with the OCLC account (10-character maximum). Obtain this information from OCLC.
    • +
    • Polling interval (system level only) - Type how often (in minutes) Polaris should send interlibrary loan requests to OCLC.
    • +
    • Direct to Review - This option is always selected. It indicates that ILL requests are sent to a review file at OCLC, where they can be reviewed by OCLC staff and directed to OCLC lenders.
    • +
    • Address and port - Type the IP address and the port number (IP address:port number, 60-character maximum) of the server where Polaris sends the ILL requests. Obtain this information from OCLC.
    • +
    • Login name and password - Type your library’s OCLC log-in information, which you obtain from OCLC. Polaris supplies this information when requests are sent to OCLC.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-House IP Addresses Database Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-House IP Addresses Database Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5520683e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-House IP Addresses Database Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + In-House IP Addresses Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    In-House IP Addresses Database Table

    +

    Use this table to identify specific IP addresses for in-house workstations.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-Transit_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-Transit_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be20773b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/In-Transit_Slip_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + In-Transit Slip Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    In-Transit Slip Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, In-transit slip options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify the information included on in-transit and in-transit for hold slips. In-transit slips are printed when an item’s status changes to In Transit (because it belongs to another branch) or Transferred (because it will fill a hold and needs to be sent to the pick-up library) during a circulation transaction.

    +
      +
    • +

      Print patron name on In-transit-hold slip - Select (check) to include a requesting patron’s name on the in-transit for hold slip.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print patron barcode on In-transit-hold slip - Select (check) to include a requesting patron’s barcode on the in-transit for hold slip.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print library full name and Print library abbreviation - Optional. Select either or both to print the parent library of the destination branch. These options apply to all in-transit slips.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print branch full name or Print branch abbreviation - Required destination branch information. You must select one option.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Number of trailing blank lines - Select or type the number of blank lines to add to the end of the slip. Use this setting to control the length of the in-transit slip.

      +
    • +
    +

    For more information about setting up receipt and slip printing, see Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Availability Display Order Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Availability Display Order Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b280ef92 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Availability Display Order Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Item Availability Display Order Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Availability Display Order Policy Table

    +

    Use this policy table to specify the branches listed as Local and System and the order in which they are listed in the PAC item availability display.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Block Descriptions Database Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Block Descriptions Database Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..50f28d2f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Block Descriptions Database Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Item Block Descriptions Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Block Descriptions Database Table

    +

    Use this table to define the item blocks listed as options in the Library assigned box on the Item Record workform.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Statistical Class Codes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Statistical Class Codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23637078 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item Statistical Class Codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Item Statistical Class Codes Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Statistical Class Codes Policy Table

    +

    Use this policy table to define item statistical codes, useful for creating specific circulation reports an organization may require. Find Tool searches for item records can be limited by statistical code, and they are displayed for selection in the Statistical code box on the Item Record workform.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2824d4d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Item_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Item Barcode Formats Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Barcode Formats Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Staff Client, Barcodes: Item format definition.

    +

    Use this dialog box to define valid item barcode formats at the system, library, or branch level. You can define multiple valid formats for both items and patrons, and add and remove definitions as necessary. If you decide to define valid item formats, consider defining valid patron formats as well, to produce more consistent messaging.

    +

    Note:
    Double-click the Staff Client profile Barcodes: Patron format definition to set up patron barcode formats.

    +

    If the same barcode types are used by all organizations in the Polaris installation, then you need only define barcode types at the system level. If different barcode types are used in each organization, define all of the types for each library and branch to accommodate cross-borrowing.

    +
      +
    • +

      Length - Type the total number of characters (1-20) required in the barcode, including the prefix. Type * if the barcode can be any length.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Prefix - Type the standard characters that can begin a valid barcode. Type * to accept any character as the prefix.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add - Click to add the defined length and prefix to the valid barcode list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove - Select a length/prefix combination and click to remove the barcode definition from the list valid barcodes.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Items_Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Items_Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb6375b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Items_Out_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Items Out Receipt Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Items Out Receipt Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Items out receipt options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify the information included when a staff member prints a patron’s Items Out list (receipt) from the Patron Status workform - Items Out view. The header of the Items Out list always includes the library name and date/time. Select additional content by checking the options. Your library’s user-defined fields appear at the end of the list of options. For more information, see Set Items Out receipt options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Patron_Messages.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Patron_Messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dfc7ea5a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Patron_Messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Language Strings Dialog Box (Patron Messages) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Language Strings Dialog Box (Patron Messages)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Patron message text: Configure.

    +

    This dialog box opens when you select a message in the Patron Message Text dialog box and click Translate. Patron messages are predefined messages that staff can post to specific patron accounts. The messages are posted and managed from the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and patrons can read and delete them from the PAC patron account. See Setting Up Patron Messages for details.

    +
      +
    • +

      Choose language - Select the language from the list. The languages are those licensed for Polaris PowerPAC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate the message - Type your translation in the language column. To insert a diacritic character, click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens. Select a graphic character set, select the character, and click Insert. For information about inserting diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Licensed_Languages_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Licensed_Languages_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b41d64f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Licensed_Languages_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Licensed Languages Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Licensed Languages Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Notification, Notification options. Then click the Languages link on the General tab.

    +

    Use this dialog box to select (check) the languages in which you will deliver notices, then click OK.

    +

    Note:
    Multi-lingual notices are a separately licensed feature. See Notification Language. When you enable multi-lingual notices here, patrons can also select a preferred language for notification when they register from the PAC; once registered, they can change their language preference from the patron account page (Change Preferences option).

    +

    The read-only Licensed column shows which languages are licensed for your system. If notice translations are not available for a licensed language and you need notification in that language, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

    +

    For additional information about notification options, see Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Period Codes Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Period Codes Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc6b469c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Period Codes Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Loan Period Codes Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Loan Period Codes Policy Table

    +

    Use this policy table to define loan period codes, which are the names assigned to the various loan periods established by each organization. They are used in combination with patron codes to calculate due dates and fine amounts.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Periods Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Periods Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ce09c633 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Loan Periods Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Loan Periods Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Loan Periods Policy Table

    +

    This policy table defines loan periods, which specify how long an item can be checked out based on the loan period code assigned to the item and the patron code of the person checking out the item.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost Item Transition Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost Item Transition Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de2f70ee --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost Item Transition Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Lost Item Transition Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Lost Item Transition Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Lost item transition dialog box, select Administration, Explorer, library organization (System, Library, or Branch), Parameters, Patron Services, Lost item transition.

    +

    Use the Lost item transition dialog box to update the circulation status of Lost items to either Missing or Withdrawn based on the amount of time they have been lost.

    +

    Under Move lost item to, select one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • Missing +
    • +
    • Withdrawn +
    • +
    • Do not change status +
    • +
    +

    Under After, select a number and select Months or Years to specify the time period for which the items will remain with a Lost status before they transition to Missing or Withdrawn.

    +

    For more information, see Set up lost item transition to missing or withdrawn.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..592bf2f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Charge_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Lost Item Charge Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Lost Item Charge Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Lost item charge options.

    +

    The settings on this dialog box control whether billed items are automatically set to Lost, and how overdue charges are applied billed and lost items. For details and suggestions regarding optimal settings, see Overdue Fines on Lost Items.

    +
      +
    • +

      (System level only) Overdues: billed items set to lost - Select this option to make the status of billed items automatically set to Lost.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Charge overdue fines when an item’s status changes to Lost - Select one or both of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Charge overdue with bill - If Overdues: billed items set to lost is selected for the system, and you select Charge overdue with bill, when the billed item’s status automatically changes to Lost the overdue charge is placed on the patron account, along with other appropriate charges related to lost items (see Setting Replacement Fee Defaults).

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If Overdues: billed items set to lost is not selected for the system, the billed item’s status remains Out. The overdue charge and any other charges related to billed items are placed on the patron account.

    +
      +
    • +

      Charge overdue when declared lost - Select this option to charge overdue fines to the patron account when an item is declared lost by a staff member.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Charge overdue fines when a lost item is recovered - Select Lost item: Charge overdue when returned.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Lost item: Charge overdue with bill, Charge overdue when declared lost, or both, this option is unavailable.

    +

    Libraries that use this option typically charge any replacement and processing fees to the patron when the item’s status changes to Lost, but not overdue charges. If the item is recovered, replacement and processing fees are then waived or credited (if already paid), the overdue fine is calculated up to the point when the item was returned, up to the maximum fine amount, and the overdue charge is placed on the patron account.

    +

    Important:
    If you select Charge overdue when returned, set the Lost item recovery parameter for lost-and-paid items to Charge for overdues. See Set the lost item recovery default actions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Recovery_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Recovery_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c58b16b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Lost_Item_Recovery_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Lost Item Recovery Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Lost Item Recovery Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Lost item recovery.

    +

    When a lost item is recovered at check-out or check-in, the charges associated with the item must be resolved (charged, waived, credited, or left as is, as appropriate). Use this dialog box to set defaults so that the charges are resolved automatically when lost items are recovered at circulation, and staff members do not have to resolve each item manually. See Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults. Charges for lost items may include a replacement charge, a processing fee, and an overdue charge, if any. For information about setting replacement costs and processing fees, see Setting Replacement Fee Defaults.

    +
      +
    • +

      Lost Item Recovery tab - These settings control the processing defaults that should apply when lost items are recovered at circulation, but the charges related to the items have not been paid or waived:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Default action if recovered in - Specify the maximum time period for which automatic changes to the patron account should apply. The maximum numerical value is 9999. For any specific item, the period you specify is measured from the point when the item was declared lost.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Normal check-in, bulk check-in, check-out - Select the check box for each circulation situation where you want to process lost item fees automatically. If a lost item is recovered in a checked situation before the time specified in the Default action if recovered in fields, fees are processed automatically according to your settings. If the item is recovered after the specified time, the circulation transaction continues but no changes are made to the patron account. If you leave a circulation situation unchecked, automatic processing is not applied, and staff members must resolve the charges when a lost item is recovered in that situation.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Overdue fine, Processing fee, Replacement cost - For each circulation situation that you checked, select the automatic action to take for each fee. Charge leaves the charge related to the lost item unchanged in the patron account. Waive waives the charge in the patron account.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Lost-and-paid recovery tab - These settings control the processing defaults that should apply when lost items are recovered at circulation, and the charges related to the items have already been paid:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Default action if recovered in - Specify the maximum time period for which automatic changes to the patron account should apply. The maximum numerical value is 9999. For any specific item, the period you specify is measured from the point when the item was declared lost.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Normal check-in, bulk check-in, check-out - Select the check box for each circulation situation where you want to process lost item fees automatically. If a lost item is recovered in a situation you checked before the time specified in the Default action if recovered in fields, fees are processed automatically according to your settings. If the item is recovered after the specified time, the circulation transaction continues but no changes are made to the patron account. If you leave a circulation situation unchecked, automatic processing is not applied, and staff members must resolve the charges when a lost item is recovered in that situation.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Overdue fine, Processing fee, Replacement cost - For each circulation situation that you checked, select the automatic action to take for each fee.  Credit credits the patron’s account for the payment amount related to the lost item. Leave as is leaves the transactions related to the lost item unchanged in the patron account.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Type_Groups_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Type_Groups_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7dd03273 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Type_Groups_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Material Type Groups Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Material Type Groups Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Material Type Groups.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set check-out limits by patron code for groups of material types. The group limit may be different from the individual limit on each material type. If the individual material type limits and group limit conflict, the patron is blocked according to the group limit. The system uses the setting for the governing library for patron blocks, which may be the transacting branch or the patron’s registered branch (set in the system-level Patron Services parameter Consortium circulation). For details, see Defining Material Type Group Limits.

    +
      +
    • +

      Define a material type group - Type a name for the group in the Group definition box and click Add Group. The new group appears in the Group name list at the top left portion of the dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Assign material types to the group - Select the group name in the Group Name list, then in the Material Type Assignment list, check the material types that should be included in the group.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Assign patron codes and patron code limits to the group - In the Patron Code list, check the patron codes that should have a limit for this group. If several patron codes should have the same limit, select the appropriate codes. If all patron codes should have the same limit, click Select All. In the number control, specify the number of items allowed for the selected patron codes, and click Apply. Repeat this process to set different limits for different patron codes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify a material type group - Select the group in the Group Names list. You can then change the item material type and patron code selections, and set new limits. To modify the group name, select the group in the Group Names list. The name appears in the Name box. Edit the name and click Modify Name.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a material type group - Select the group in the Group Names list. The name appears in the Name box. Click Delete. When you delete a material type group, the limits set for individual material types are applied at check-out.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Types_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Types_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12098403 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Material_Types_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Material Types Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Material Types Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to name the various material types for the library's holdings. Item material types are used in determining loan periods and lending limits, and in generating statistics.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Media_Dispenser_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Media_Dispenser_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f394aedd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Media_Dispenser_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Media Dispenser Settings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Media Dispenser Settings Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, SelfCheck Unit, Media dispenser settings.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set up staff client, Leap, and Polaris ExpressCheck circulation for media dispensers.

    +
      +
    • Enable - Check this option to enable media dispenser circulation.
    • +
    • Media dispenser vendor - ITG DiscXpress is the only media dispenser vendor currently available.
    • +
    • Properties - Click to open the ITG DiscXpress dialog box, where you type the full network address or URL of the dispenser unit (100-character limit). This information is provided by your network administrator and is determined when the device is installed on your network.
    • +
    +

    Media Dispenser Settings Dialog Box - General Tab

    +

    These settings apply to the staff client, Leap, and Polaris ExpressCheck:

    +
      +
    • Material types - Check the material types that can be dispensed by the unit. The list includes all the item material types defined at the system level. You must select at least one material type.
    • +
    • Dispenser location - To include the dispenser location and slot number on printed check-out receipts, check Include dispenser unit location on printed receipt.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Normal check-out receipts from the appropriate staff client workforms and from Polaris ExpressCheck must be enabled to include this information on a printed receipt. Separate dispenser receipts are not printed.

    +

    Media Dispenser Settings Dialog Box - Staff Client Tab

    +

    These settings apply to the staff client and Leap only:

    +
      +
    • Receipt text - The default staff client check-out receipt text is Please retrieve items from the dispensing unit. To specify custom text, type the text in the Receipt text box (250-character limit).
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Normal check-out receipts from the appropriate staff client workforms must be enabled to include this information on a printed receipt. Separate dispenser receipts are not printed.

    +
      +
    • Enable check-out warning - Check this option to display a warning message to staff members when a dispenser item is checked out. The warning message is displayed for each dispenser item during. The staff member must click OK to acknowledge the message and continue. The default warning message text is Please retrieve items from the dispensing unit. You can customize the message in the text box (250-character limit).
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Missing Item Transition Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Missing Item Transition Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c59d5d37 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Missing Item Transition Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Missing Item Transition Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Missing Item Transition Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Missing Item Transition.

    +

    Use the Missing item transition dialog box to update items with a circulation status of Missing to a status of Withdrawn after a specified period of time.

    +
      +
    • Select Move missing items to withdrawn.
    • +
    • In the After fields, select a number and select Months or Years to specify the time period in which items will remain with a Missing status before they are automatically updated to Withdrawn.
    • +
    +

    For more information, see Set up missing item transition to withdrawn.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Mobile_Carriers_Database.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Mobile_Carriers_Database.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..09d72916 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Mobile_Carriers_Database.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Mobile Phone Carriers Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Mobile Phone Carriers Database Table

    +

    Use this table to identify the mobile phone carriers that appear as selections in the Patron Registration workform and in the form patrons use to register or update their accounts from the PAC.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Note: +
    Certain staff client menus, such as the item record Links menu, display the default hold request description instead of your custom description.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Fiscal_Action_Types_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Fiscal_Action_Types_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f769524c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Fiscal_Action_Types_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + NCIP Fiscal Action Types Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP Fiscal Action Types Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to map NCIP fiscal action types to Polaris payment methods. You can select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_ILL_Holds_Add_Staff_Display_Note_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_ILL_Holds_Add_Staff_Display_Note_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72c38cc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_ILL_Holds_Add_Staff_Display_Note_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + NCIP ILL Holds Add Staff Display Note Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP ILL Holds Add Staff Display Note Dialog Box

    +

    Note:
    See Setting NCIP Parameters.

    +

    Use this dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable notes - Click the Enable check box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter the note - The default Item was requested through ILL text is displayed in the Staff display note field. You can customize this text by entering up to 255 characters.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When enabled, the note text appears in the hold request Staff Display note that displays when trapping and also prints on the hold slip. If the other notes are added during hold request processing, the ILL note is appended to the existing text.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_In_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_In_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef8620a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_In_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + NCIP Medium Types: Incoming Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP Medium Types: Incoming Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to map NCIP medium types to Polaris item material types for incoming requests. This mapping is used for requests where the Polaris library is the borrowing library.

    +

    You can select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_Out_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_Out_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54e106b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Medium_Types_Out_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + NCIP Medium Types: Outgoing Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP Medium Types: Outgoing Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to map Polaris item material types to NCIP medium types. This mapping is used for requests where the Polaris library is the lending library.

    +

    You can select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Payment_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Payment_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ac0265b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Payment_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + NCIP Payment Types Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP Payment Types Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to map NCIP payment types to Polaris payment methods.

    +

    You can select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4ea7ebd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + NCIP Processing Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP Processing Dialog Box

    +

    The default setting for the NCIP Processing option is Decentralized processing, but you can change it to Central processing. Use the Central processing setting if ILL items are received at the central location and then sent to the requesting library or branch, and returned items are sent to the central location to be returned to the lender. The “central location” may be a branch or it may be a workstation within a library.

    +

    Note:
    See Setting NCIP Parameters.

    +

    Note:
    If your library or consortium uses a mixture of centralized and decentalized ILL processing, where items are received at a central location but each branch returns items directly to the lender, the Central Processing option is recommended.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_User_Priv_Types.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_User_Priv_Types.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc59c264 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/NCIP_User_Priv_Types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + NCIP User Privilege Types Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    NCIP User Privilege Types Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to map Polaris patron codes to NCIP standard public and/or academic user privilege types. You can select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/No_Fine_Days_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/No_Fine_Days_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..514afbb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/No_Fine_Days_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + No Fine Days Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    No Fine Days Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Days not fineable.

    +

    You can designate specific days of the week as not fineable with this dialog box. Select the days you want to eliminate from fine calculations, or select None to include all days in calculations.

    +

    Example:
    A library designates Sunday as a “no fine day” (day not fineable) because the library is closed. If an item is due on Saturday and returned at the branch on Monday, fines are not charged for Sunday, based on the setting for the branch (item, patron, or transacting) whose settings govern fine calculations. If the governing branch for fine calculations has designated Sunday as a “no fine day,” no Sunday is calculated in a fine.

    +

    For more information about setting up overdue fines, see Defining Fines and Fees. For information about setting the governing branch for fine calculation, see Governing Library for Circulation Transactions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Notification_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Notification_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d50f7c1d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Notification_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ + + + + + + + + + Notification Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Notification Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Notification, Notification options.

    +

    Use the Notification Options dialog box to set up parameters and delivery methods for overdue notices, bills, combined notices, fine notices, hold request pick-up and cancellation notices, serials claim and routing notices, and e-mail reminders. See Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +

    The Notification options dialog box includes the following tabs:

    + +

    Notification Options Dialog Box - General Tab

    +

    Settings on this tab specify the methods the library uses to send notices, the languages in which notices are sent, e-mail addresses and report destination, and the FTP settings for exported notices. See Managing Notification.

    +
      +
    • Notice methods - Select every method that your library uses to send at least one type of notice. Select (check) Export for Print, Phone, or Txt Message if your library exports these notices to an outside vendor (system level only). See Exporting Notices to a Notification Service. Phone indicates that your library uses Polaris telephone notification. If you select E-mail, also fill in the e-mail settings. TXT Message indicates delivery by text message to a patron’s mobile phone. See Notice Delivery Methods.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can specify a delivery method of Patron Preference for certain patron notice types, and Supplier Preference for serial claim notices. If you allow patrons to specify a notification preference in the patron record, be sure the options that patrons can choose are also selected here. If you plan to use Supplier Preference, be sure that Print and E-mail are checked.

    +
      +
    • Language - Click the Languages link and select (check) the languages in which to send print, e-mail, or telephone notices. See Notification Language.
    • +
    • E-mail notice settings - Type the From and Reply to addresses. For patrons whose records contain both primary and alternate e-mail addresses, the E-mail address to use option specifies whether to send the e-mail notice to the primary address only, or to both.
    • +
    • Processing report - Check to send a report after e-mail notice processing. Type an e-mail destination for the report; separate multiple addresses with a semicolon (max. characters 255).
    • +
    • Export options - System level only. If your library has a contract with an outside service to send print or telephone notices, specify the vendor’s FTP information in the Print Export , Phone Export, or Txt Message fields. See Exporting Notices to a Notification Service.
    • +
    • FTP Server URI - Type the full Internet address of the vendor’s FTP server. Your exported notice file will be sent to this address.
    • +
    • Logon Name - Type the logon name for the vendor’s FTP server.
    • +
    • Password - Type the password for the vendor’s FTP server.
    • +
    • Save a local copy - Select this option to save a copy of exported notices. When this option is selected, the copy is automatically saved on the Polaris server to C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Logs\EXPORTNOTICES\Reports
    • +
    +

    If you leave this option unchecked, the notice file is saved in C:\ProgramData\Polaris\[version]\Temp on the Polaris server for FTP transmission.

    +

    Note:
    If you export print notices to one vendor and phone notices to a different vendor, you can specify different Export settings for each method.

    +

    Notification Options Dialog Box - Overdue & Bill Tab

    +

    Use this tab to set up to three overdue notices and an optional bill. You can also set up combined notices, which are sent to patrons due to receive for more than one type of notice. See Overdue Notices, Bills, and Combined Notices.

    +
      +
    • Overdue - Select (check) if you send overdue notices.
    • +
    • Export - Select (check) if you export overdue notices to an outside vendor. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tab at the system level.
    • +
    • First overdue section - These settings apply to the first overdue notice.
    • +
    • Notice interval - Type or select the number of days (999 maximum) after an item is declared overdue that the item is added to the queue for the first overdue notice.
    • +
    • Include claimed items - Select (check) to include claimed items in overdue notice processing. If the Include claimed items and Combined patron notices options are selected, the Missing Parts notice is included in the combined notice.
    • +
    • Notification method - Select a delivery method. You can deliver overdue notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tab. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you export overdue notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail or phone, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail, phone, or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record. If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.
    • +
    • Notification library - Select the library that should generate the overdue notice. For information on how this selection determines which patrons and items are identified for overdue notice processing, see The Notification Library.
    • +
    • Return address - Select Use notification library to use the address specified in the organization record for the notification library. Select Use optional address to use an address other than the notification library’s. If you select this option, select the organization whose address should appear on the notice.
    • +
    • Second overdue section - If you send second overdue notices, set the interval and notification method. (If you do not send second overdue notices, set the interval to 0). The interval is measured from the point the item status changed to overdue, not from the previous overdue notice. The notification library, return address, and claimed items settings are the same as the first overdue notice settings.
    • +
    • Third overdue section - If you send third overdue notices, set the interval and notification method. (If you do not send third overdue notices, set the interval to 0). The interval is measured from the point the item status changed to overdue, not from the previous overdue notice. The notification library, return address, and claimed items settings are the same as the first overdue notice settings.
    • +
    • Bill - Select (check) if you send bills.
    • +
    • Export - Select (check) if you export bills to an outside vendor. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tab at the system level.
    • +
    • Notice interval - Type or select the number of days (999 maximum) after an item is declared overdue that the item is added to the queue for the bill. Coordinate this setting with your interval settings for overdue notices.
    • +
    • Notification method - Select a delivery method. You can deliver bills by print, e-mail, or text message if you selected the method on the General tab. Bills cannot be delivered by phone. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you export bills to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the bills from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print or Phone, the notice is exported for print, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record. If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.
    • +
    • Notification library - Select the library that should generate the bill. For information on how this selection determines which patrons and items are identified for notice processing, see The Notification Library.
    • +
    • Return address - Select Use notification library to use the address specified in the organization record for the notification library. Select Use optional address to use an address other than the notification library’s. If you select this option, select the organization whose address should appear on the notice.
    • +
    • Combine patron notices - Select (check) to send combined notices, and set the delivery method. You can deliver combined notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tab. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record. If the Include claimed items and Combine patron notices options are both selected, the Missing Parts notice is included in the combined notice. For more information about combined notices contents, see Combined Notices.
    • +
    +

    Notification Options Dialog Box - Hold Request & Cancellation Tab

    +

    Use the Hold Request & Cancellation tab to set up the first and second notices sent to patrons when a requested item is being held for pick-up. You can also choose to send cancelled request notices when a request status changes from Active, Pending, or Inactive to Cancelled. See Request Pick-Up, Second Pick-Up, & Cancelled Request Notices.

    +
      +
    • Request - Select (check) if you send request pick-up notices.
    • +
    • Export - Select (check) if you export request pick-up notices to an outside vendor. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tab at the system level.
    • +
    • Notification method - Select a delivery method. You can deliver request pickup notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tab. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you export request pick-up notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail or phone, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail, phone, or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record. If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.
    • +
    • 2nd hold notice - Select (check) if you send second request pick-up notices. See Second Pick-Up Notices for more details about second request processing.
    • +
    • Notification method - Select a delivery method. You can deliver 2nd request notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tab. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you export the regular hold request notice to a third-party service, the second hold notice is also exported.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record. If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.
    • +
    • Notice interval - Specify the number of days to wait from the date the request became Held before sending the second notice.
    • +
    • Cancelled request - Select (check) if you send cancelled request notices.
    • +
    • Notification method - Select a delivery method. You can deliver request cancellation notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tab. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you export request pick-up notices, cancelled request notices are also exported.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record. If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.
    • +
    • eContent request - Select (check) eContent request, and select a notification method (e-mail, TXT, or both). See Notices for Integrated Ebook Requests.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you select Both for the method, the notice is sent either by e-mail or TXT message, depending on the patron’s notification preference. If the patron has not selected either option as a preference, the patron will not receive notification.

    + +

    Note:
    If you select Both for the method, the notice is sent either by e-mail or TXT message, depending on the patron’s notification preference. If the patron has not selected either option as a preference, the patron will not receive notification.

    +

    Notification Options Dialog Box - Fine Tab

    +

    Use the Fine tab to set up fine notices, which are typically sent to a patron before the delinquent account is turned over to a collection agency. See Fine Notices.

    +
      +
    • Fine - Select (check) if you send fine notices.
    • +
    • Export - Select (check) if you export fine notices to an outside vendor. This option is available only if Export has been selected for a delivery method on the General tab at the system level.
    • +
    • Notification method - Select a delivery method. You can deliver fine notices by any of the methods you selected on the General tab. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you export fine notices to an outside vendor for print delivery, the notification method must be set to Print at the system, library, and branch levels if you want to export the notices from all organizations. If a branch-level method is set to e-mail or phone, the system produces notices according to that method. If the method is set to Patron Preference, and the patron’s preference is set to Print, the notice is exported, but if the patron’s preference is e-mail, phone, or text message, that method is used.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the notification method you selected. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record. If you selected Patron Preference in the Notification Method box, patrons who have text messaging set as their preferred notification method in the patron record will receive text message notices only.
    • +
    • Notification library - Select the library that should generate the fine notice. For information on how this selection determines which patrons and items are identified for notice processing, see The Notification Library.
    • +
    • Return address - Select Use notification library to use the address specified in the organization record for the notification library. Select Use optional address to use an address other than the notification library’s. If you select this option, select the organization whose address should appear on the notice.
    • +
    • User-defined field for Guardian - Optional. Specify which user-defined field (UDF), if any, has been defined for the guardians of patrons under 18. If you specify a guardian UDF, the fine notice regarding the minor’s delinquent account is sent to the minor in care of the guardian, at the guardian’s address. See Reporting Minors.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If your library does not use a UDF for guardian barcode, or if no guardian can be determined, the notice is sent to the minor patron.

    +
      +
    • Minimum balance - The amount owed that a patron’s account must exceed to trigger a fine notice. (Any amount greater than this entry triggers the notice.)
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Set this value to one equal or greater than the Second Level Fine amount set in the Patron and Material Loan Limit table. See Defining Loan and Request Limit Blocks.

    +
      +
    • Fine age - Specify the number of days old a fine must be to be included in the balance that triggers the fine notice. If you use collection agency services, be sure the Fine age (days) setting is less than the fine age setting for sending an account to collection. This will ensure that the patron receives the notice before the account is sent to collection. See Using a Collection Agency.
    • +
    +

    Notification Options Dialog Box - Reminder Tab

    +

    Use the Reminder tab to set up automatic e-mail reminder notices. See also: Reminder Notices.

    +
      +
    • Send additional TXT message - Select (check) to send a text message notice to patrons’ mobile phones in addition to the e-mail reminder. A patron will receive the additional text message only if the Additional TXT messaging option is checked in the patron record.
    • +
    • Almost overdue/Auto-renew - Select (check) to send notices to borrowers for items that are almost overdue and (if your library has enabled Auto-renew) items that have been renewed automatically. The notice also lists other items the patron currently has checked out. If you select this option, set these:
      • Days before an item is overdue - The number of days (1-9) before an item becomes overdue that your library sends the notice.
      • Days between notices - The number of days (1-9) to wait before your library sends another notice to the same patron. This prevents the patron from receiving several notices in a row if items are due on successive days.
      • Include integrated eContent titles - The default setting for this check box is unchecked so that no integrated eContent titles appear in the list of almost overdue items. If your library wants integrated eContent titles to be included on the notice with other items that are almost overdue, check this box.
    • +
    • Patron record expiration - Select (check) to send notices to patrons whose registrations are about to expire. Only one reminder is sent. If you select this option, set this:
    • +
    • Days until expiration - The number of days (1-999) before a patron registration expires that your library sends the notice.
    • +
    • Inactive patron - Select (check) to send notices to patrons whose library accounts have not been used for a specified number of days. Only one notice is sent. If you select this option, set this:
    • +
    • Days until a patron has been inactive - The number of days (1-999) that a patron account has been inactive before your library sends the notice.
    • +
    +

    Notification Options Dialog Box - Serial Tab

    +

    Use this tab to set up serial routing notices, which alert patrons on a routing list that an item is going to be routed, and serial claim notices, which are sent to suppliers when serials issues or parts are not received as expected. See Setting Up Routing. For information about serials claiming, see Setting Up Serials Claiming.

    +
      +
    • Serial claim - Select (check) to enable serial claim notices. Then set these options:
    • +
    • Automatic claiming - Select (check) if you want a claim notice to be sent automatically when an issue or part is eligible to be claimed.
    • +
    • Notification method - The delivery method for serial claim notices. Supplier Preference means that the method is taken from the supplier record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the supplier record.
    • +
    • Contact name, Department name, Phone number, email address - Type the name, department, phone number, and e-mail address of the appropriate individual at the library. This information appears on the serial claim notice.
    • +
    • Return address - The default is the notification library. If notices are generated for all libraries or branches from a central location, you can specify a central processing branch return address instead.
    • +
    • Include Claim Reason - Select (check) if you want to include the claim reason on serial claim notices. The claim reason comes from the Reason box in the Claims view of the Issue record.
    • +
    • Include Claim Note - Select (check) if you want to include a claim note. The claim note comes from the Note field in the Issue record.
    • +
    • Routing - Select (check) this option to enable routing notices. Then set this option:
    • +
    • Notification method - The delivery method for routing notices. Patron Preference means that the method is taken from the patron record. If you select another method, your selection overrides the method specified in the patron record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Packing_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Packing_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f617ae90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Packing_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + ORS Packing List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    ORS Packing List Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, ORS packing list.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify the header and rating line text for packing lists, which are sent to outreach services patrons with their items so that patrons can rate the titles. Outreach services patrons return their ratings with their items, and staff members enter the ratings in the patron account. See Setting Up Reader Ratings for details.

    +

    Specify the header text and introductory rating text. Each part can be 500 characters maximum; press ENTER to start a new line within the header or rating text.

    +

    Other content is always included in the packing list; see Packing Lists.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Reading_History_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Reading_History_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d8c44a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/ORS_Reading_History_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + ORS Reading History Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    ORS Reading History Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, ORS reading history.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify limits on reading histories for outreach services patrons. See Setting Outreach Patrons Options for details.

    +
      +
    • +

      Length of time to retain an entry in the Reading History list - Type the number of months or years in the first History length box, and select the unit of time (months or years) in the second History length box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Maximum entries - In the Maximum history box, type the maximum number of entries that can be retained at one time in the Reading History list.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Online_Payment_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Online_Payment_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..020c4627 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Online_Payment_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Online Payment Settings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Online Payment Settings Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters > Credit Card Payment > Online Payments: Configure.

    +

    Online Payment settings control credit card payment processing from the staff client, the PACs (PowerPAC and Mobile PAC), and Polaris ExpressCheck. Polaris supports several credit card processing services. An organization can use one method only.

    +

    Use the Online Payment Settings dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Select the payment processing gateway from the drop-down list box. The selected gateway determines the other available setup options.
    • +
    • Click Properties and make site-specific settings for your payments gateway provider.
    • +
    • Select the PowerPAC tab to specify the payment gateway settings for credit card payments from PowerPAC
    • +
    • Select the Staff Client tab to specify the payment gateway settings for credit card payments from the Polaris staff client
    • +
    • Select the ExpressCheck tab to specify the payment gateway settings for credit card payments from Polaris ExpressCheck
    • +
    • Select the Mobile PAC tab to specify the payment gateway settings for credit card payments from Mobile PAC.
    • +
    +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that can process credit card payments from the Polaris staff client, ExpressCheck, PowerPAC, and MobilePAC, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    + +

    For instructions on setting up one of the e-Commerce gateways that processes web payments from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC only, see the topic for the gateway your library will use:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Optional_Patron_Data_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Optional_Patron_Data_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a4f32135 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Optional_Patron_Data_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Optional Patron Data Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Optional Patron Data Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Check-out: Optional patron data.

    +

    Use the Optional Patron Data Display dialog box to set which patron information fields appear in the header of the Check Out workform, and in the header of the Patron Status workform. Select each field in the Options list, and click Add.

    +

    You can also set which item data fields to display in the Check Out workform, using the Patron Services parameter Check-out: Listview options. See Setting Up the Check Out Workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Mode_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Mode_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..acbef478 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Mode_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Delivery Mode Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Delivery Mode Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to specify the possible associate delivery methods your organization uses to deliver items to outreach services patrons. Each method specified in this table appears as an option when setting up the patron's reader services.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f150224 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Delivery_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Delivery Route/Stops Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Delivery Route/Stops Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define default delivery routes and stops for Outreach Services patrons.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Disability_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Disability_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f10bf741 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Disability_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Disability Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Disability Policy Table

    +

    Defines the list of disabilities from which staff members can select when noting a disability for an Outreach Services patron.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Equipment_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Equipment_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e837efa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Equipment_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Equipment Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Equipment Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define the list of special equipment needs from which staff can select for Outreach Services patrons.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Excluded_Circ_Stat_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Excluded_Circ_Stat_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..165621e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Excluded_Circ_Stat_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Excluded Circ Statuses Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Excluded Circ Statuses Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define the circulation statues for items that are excluded from Outreach Services selection lists.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Included_Branches_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Included_Branches_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc7e4ddb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Included_Branches_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Included Branches Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Included Branches Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to specify the branches for which items are included in Outreach Services selection lists processing.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Pick_List_Head.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Pick_List_Head.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2ab953c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Pick_List_Head.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Outreach: Pick List Headers + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach: Pick List Headers

    +

    Use this table to define the column headings and the order in which the headings appear for Outreach Services picklists.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Title_Rating_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Title_Rating_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a8cc284 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Outreach_Title_Rating_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Outreach Title Rating Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Outreach Title Rating Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Outreach title rating.

    +

    Use the Outreach Title Rating dialog box to set up the rating scale for outreach services patrons if you choose to enable reader ratings. Outreach services patrons return their ratings with their items, and staff members enter the ratings in the patron account. See Setting Up Reader Ratings for details.

    +
      +
    • +

      Highest - Click the Highest value to indicate which end of the scale (1 or 5) is the most positive rating a title can receive.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Rating descriptions - Type a description (maximum of 50 characters) for each rating increment on the scale.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Overnight_Loan_Period_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Overnight_Loan_Period_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a06e47c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Overnight_Loan_Period_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Overnight Loan Period Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overnight Loan Period Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Overnight loan period.

    +

    If you set up hourly loans, Polaris checks these Patron Services parameters for the lending library: Hours of operation (for hours and closed days), and Overnight loan period. Use the Overnight Loan Period dialog box to specify what happens if an item is due after the lending library closes:

    +
      +
    • +

      Allow automatic overnight loan - Select (check) to set the due date to the next day the library is open. Then set a due time after the library’s opening time, plus any additional time specified by the library. If Allow automatic overnight loan is not selected, and the loan period is less than 24 hours, the transaction is blocked at the circulation desk. See Calculating Due Dates for details.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The system checks the governing library’s Loan Periods policy table to determine if an item is an hourly loan. If so, the system then uses the Hours of operation and Overnight loan period parameter settings of the transacting branch. For more information about setting the governing branch for due dates, see Governing Library for Circulation Transactions.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatAddressTypesdatatab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatAddressTypesdatatab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..34a62f0c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatAddressTypesdatatab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Address Types Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Address Types Database Table

    +

    Use this table to specify the patron address types that are available for selection in the Polaris staff client and Leap when registering a new patron or modifying an existing patron's record.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatNameTitlesDataTable.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatNameTitlesDataTable.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35c6a572 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PatNameTitlesDataTable.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Name Titles Database Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Name Titles Database Table

    +

    This table is used to maintain a list of the titles (such as Mr., Ms. etc) that appear in the Patron Registration workform in the Polaris staff client and Leap.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..410513c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Barcode_Formats_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Barcode Formats Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Barcode Formats Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Staff Client, Barcodes: Patron format definition.

    +

    Use this dialog box to define valid patron barcode formats at the system, library, or branch level. Each branch may specify different barcode types for both patrons and items. You can define multiple valid formats for both patrons and items, and add and remove definitions as necessary. If you decide to define valid patron formats, consider defining valid item formats as well, to produce more consistent messaging.

    +

    Note:
    Double-click the Staff Client profile Barcodes: Item format definition to set up item barcode formats.

    +
      +
    • +

      Length - Type the total number of characters (1-20) required in the barcode, including the prefix. Type * if the barcode can be any length. If you plan to use this format as the default patron barcode format, you cannot leave this field undefined (*). You must type a number.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Prefix - Type the standard characters that can begin a valid barcode. Type * to accept any character as the prefix. If you plan to use this format as the default patron barcode format, you cannot leave this field undefined (*). You must type the characters.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add - Click to add the defined length and prefix to the valid barcode list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove - Select a length/prefix combination and click to remove the barcode definition from the list of valid barcodes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Default On/Off (system level only) - If all your patron barcodes begin with the same prefix, and only the final portion of the barcode is unique to each patron, you can set the format as the default so that staff can enter just the significant digits in a patron barcode field, and patrons can enter just the significant digits to log on at the PAC. Select the length/prefix combination to use as the default patron barcode format, and click Default On/Off. The Default column displays asterisks (***) to indicate that this barcode is used as the default, for significant digit purposes. For details, see Significant Digits in Patron Barcodes. (To remove the default designation, select the default barcode and click Default On/Off.)

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Default On/Off is available only at the system level because the setting applies to all organizations. Even if the default format is removed from the Patron Barcode Formats dialog box at the branch level, the default format is still in effect because it is defined at the system level.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4feca7eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box_SelfCheck_Unit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Patron Blocks Dialog Box (SelfCheck Unit) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Blocks Dialog Box (SelfCheck Unit)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, SelfCheck Unit, Patron blocks.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set the following options for how the SIP self-check unit handles blocking conditions on patron records:

    +
      +
    • +

      Block the patron for free text blocks - This parameter affects the SIP messages Patron Status and Patron Information. Many SIP check-out devices check the Patron Status or Patron Information message before attempting to perform a checkout. On these devices, if this parameter is checked, a patron with free text blocks will be blocked from checkout. Checked by default (patron will be blocked).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Block the patron for library-assigned blocks - Checked by default (patron will be blocked).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Block the patron for blocking notes - Checked by default (patron will be blocked).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Block the patron for associated patron blocks - Blocks SIP self-check transactions by patrons with blocked associated patron records. See Associated Patron Blocking. Unchecked by default (patron will not be blocked if associated patrons are blocked).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Block the patron for collection agency blocks - Blocks SIP self-check workstation transactions by patrons with collection agency blocks. Checked by default (patron will be blocked).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Maximum number of claims - Maximum number of current claims a patron can have and still check out an item using self-check. Default value is 10; valid range is 0-9999.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Codes_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Codes_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f86cb89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Codes_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Codes Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Codes Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define patron codes typically assigned to patrons when they are registered. These patron codes define available services, loan periods, fines, and limits for specific classes of patrons.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76f47b7e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Custom Data: Definition Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Custom Data: Definition Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In the Polaris Administration Explorer, select System, Profiles, Patron Services, and double-click Patron custom data: Definition.

    +

    Use this dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Define patron custom data fields at the System organization level. See Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify a patron custom data field- Select a field and click Modify Field.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a patron custom data field - Select a field, and click Delete Field.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Only patron custom data fields that are not in use can be deleted.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..64f5d49c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Custom_Data_Filter_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Custom Data: Filter Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Custom Data: Filter Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In the Polaris Administration Explorer, select the organization (system, library, or branch, select Profiles, Patron Services, and double-click Patron custom data: Filter.

    +

    Use this dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Filter the listed patron custom data fields - Select the check box next to the patron custom data fields that you want available to your library organization, and clear the check box for any fields you do not want to be available. See Filter patron codes for specific organizations. To enable all fields, click Select All. To disable all fields, click Unselect All.
    • +
    • Change the order in which patron custom data fields are displayed - Select the up or down arrow.
    • +
    • Revert to settings at the next higher organization level - If you are filtering the custom data fields at the library or branch level, you can click Revert to allow the current settings to be replaced by the settings from the organization above (System, if at the Library level; System or Library if at the Branch level.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Delete_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Delete_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5f06904e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Delete_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Delete Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Delete Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Patron delete options.

    +

    Use the Patron Delete Options dialog box to set up nightly automatic deletion of certain patron records, specify the criteria for automatic deletion, and select conditions that block both automatic and manual deletion. See Setting Options for Deleting Patron Records.

    +

    Note:
    For information about deleting patron records manually, see Deleting Patron Records.

    +
      +
    • +

      Method tab - These settings activate automatic processing and specify how it works. They do not apply to manual deletions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Activate automatic deletion - Select Delete automatically. During automatic processing, Polaris deletes all patron records that are not blocked from deletion. If any patron records are blocked, they are not deleted.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Put blocked records in a record set - Select Use exceptions record set. With this option, if Polaris cannot delete a patron record during automatic processing because it is blocked, the blocked record is placed in an existing record set. Click Select to find and select the record set. If the block to deletion is removed later, the record is deleted automatically from the record set.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Put all candidates for deletion in a record set - Select Write to record set. During automatic processing, Polaris places all patron records that meet your criteria for deletion in an existing record set. Click Select to find and select the record set. A staff member must review the records in the record set and manually delete, modify, or keep each record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Criteria tab - Type a number in the Delete if inactive for box to set the number of days for which a patron record must be inactive for the record to be automatically deleted. The option is available only if Delete automatically or Write to record set is selected on the Method tab.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Last Activity Date field in the patron record tracks patron activity. It is updated in the following circumstances. Staff client: item check-out; renewal; quick-circ item check-out; when a claim is made on an item. PAC: log-in to patron account; placing and modifying hold and ILL requests; online renewal; patron information updates; payments; access to remote databases that require log-in. Polaris ExpressCheck, SIP self-check units: check-out and renewal; patron account access; payments. Time and print management applications: log-in. Inbound telephony: Access account information and renew items.

    +
      +
    • +

      Blocks tab - These settings specify the conditions that block patron records from deletion. They apply to both manual and automatic patron record deletion. See Set blocks for patron record deletion.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Initiated_Circulation_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Initiated_Circulation_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6bdb2836 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Initiated_Circulation_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Initiated Circulation Blocking Conditions Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Initiated Circulation Blocking Conditions Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Patron Services, Patron initiated circulation: Blocking conditions.

    +

    Use the Patron Initiated Circulation Blocking Conditions dialog box to set the conditions that block renewals from PAC, and by telephone and eContent circulation from PAC. You can set blocks related to patron records and blocks related to item records. Patrons are blocked according to the Governing library for patron blocks setting in the Consortium Circulation parameter. See Defining Patron-Initiated Circulation Blocks.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Material_Type_Loan_Limit_Policy_Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Material_Type_Loan_Limit_Policy_Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1472f835 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Material_Type_Loan_Limit_Policy_Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks Policy Table

    +

    Use this policy table to define loan and request limit blocks based on combinations of patron codes and material types.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Message_Text_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Message_Text_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..30ebad83 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Message_Text_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Message Text Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Message Text Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Patron message text: Configure.

    +

    Use the Patron Message Text dialog box to set up predefined messages that staff can post to specific patron accounts. The messages are posted and managed from the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and patrons can read and delete them from the PAC patron account. See Setting Up Patron Messages for details.

    +
      +
    • Add a message - Type up to 250 characters in the Message text box, including alpha-numeric and special characters and URLs, and click Add. The message is added to the list with an icon that indicates the organizational level at which it was added. Click Apply to save your changes and continue to work with the Patron Message Text dialog box, or click OK to save your changes and close the dialog box.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Message list includes all the messages added at the system and parent library levels as well as the branch level. The appropriate organizational icon indicates the level at which the message was added. To add a message from a parent organization for use by your organization, click the message. The text appears in the Message text box. Then click Add. Only messages defined at your organizational level can be modified or translated.

    +
      +
    • Modify a message - Select the message in the Patron Message Text dialog box. The message is placed in the Message Text box, where you can edit. Then click Modify.
    • +
    • Translate a message - You can translate an existing message into any licensed Polaris PowerPAC language. Select the message in the Patron Message Text dialog box and click Translate. The Language Strings dialog box opens. Select a language from the list and type your translation in the language column. To insert a diacritic character, click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens. Select a graphic character set, select the character, and click Insert.
    • +
    • Delete a message - Select the message in the Patron Message Text dialog box and click Delete. If the message is linked to any patron record, a warning message is displayed. You can cancel the deletion or continue to delete the message. If you delete it, it is removed from any patron accounts where it is currently posted.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Filter_Patron_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Filter_Patron_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a441595c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Filter_Patron_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration: Filter Patron Codes Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration: Filter Patron Codes Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Patron registration: Filter patron codes.

    +

    The Patron Registration: Filter Patron Codes dialog box lists all the patron codes that have been defined in the Patron Codes policy table for the system. Use this dialog box to specify which of the defined codes are displayed for selection for a specific organization by checking or unchecking patron codes. For details, see Defining Patron Codes.

    +

    Note:
    The organization icons at the top of the dialog box indicate whether the settings have been inherited. Initially they are inherited from the system-level settings. Once you change the settings at the branch level, they are no longer inherited from the system, even if the system-level settings are changed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d6e8d12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Registration_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In the Polaris Administration Explorer, select Parameters, Patron Services, Patron registration options.

    +

    Use the Patron Registration Options dialog box to set up certain fields in the Patron Registration workform with default values or require a value in the field to save the record. See Setting Patron Registration Required Fields and Defaults.

    +

    The dialog box contains the following tabs:

    +
      +
    • +

      General defaults - Set default values for patron registration fields.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Data Field Defaults - This tab contains the following subtabs:

      +
    • +
    • +

       UDFs - To indicate a UDF field is required, select the check box. To set a default value for a UDF, type the value for text fields or select a value for a drop-down list field.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Custom Fields - To indicate a patron custom data field (PCDF) is required, select the check box. To set a default value for a PCDF, select the field, enter a default in the box, and click Set Default.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Boolean fields cannot be required, and date fields cannot have defaults.

    +
      +
    • +

      Required Fields tab - Select the general information fields to require for patron registration.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Services_Administration_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Services_Administration_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..193f577e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Services_Administration_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Services Administration Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services Administration UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Patron Services Administration UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Stat_Codes_Policy1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Stat_Codes_Policy1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0094ceda --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Patron_Stat_Codes_Policy1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Patron Statistical Class Codes Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Statistical Class Codes Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define patron statistical class codes for use in reports.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PayPal_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PayPal_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42c3148a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/PayPal_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + PayPal Properties Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PayPal Properties Dialog Box

    +

    Specify these settings if you use PayPal’s Payflow Pro credit card processing. The information is specific to your contract with PayPal or your e-commerce provider. For more information about credit card processing in Polaris, see E-Commerce with PayPal® Payflow Pro®.

    +

    Enter the following settings on the Payflow Pro Settings tab:

    +
      +
    • Cancel SALE Method - Determines the appropriate automatic action (VOID or CREDIT) to cancel a SALE transaction. A sale may be canceled when it has been approved but fails AVS and/or CVV2 verification, or when a Polaris database error occurs. You must contact your processor or PayPal e-commerce account provider to determine if the processor uses the batch method or if they are host-based. If the processor uses the batch method, you must also verify that SALE transactions can be voided. If so, you can select VOID as the cancel sale method and avoid paying two transaction fees. Most processors use the batch method. However, if the processor uses the host method, you must select CREDIT as the cancel sale method, and you will be charged two transaction fees when a sale is canceled. (Examples of host-based processors include PayPal and Global Payments Central.)
    • +
    • Email credit card processing errors to - Specify a staff e-mail address to receive automatic e-mail messages when a credit card transaction fails and staff intervention is required. The staff member can then take action on the failed transaction.
    • +
    • Username and Password - Obtain these settings from PayPal or your e-commerce partner.
    • +
    • Partner - Enter your partner’s code here (PayPal or your e-commerce provider)
    • +
    • Timeout - Set the number of seconds that should elapse with no action before the payment connection times out. The default is 30 seconds.
    • +
    • Server - Type payflowpro.paypal.com for live transactions.
    • +
    • AVS and CVV2 - Security measures that may be provided as part of your VeriSign contract. Select (check) these options if they are included in your contract.
    • +
    +

    AVS (Address Verification) options - AVS compares the submitted street address and ZIP code with the values on file at the cardholder’s bank. The AVS result is for advice only. Banks do not decline transactions based on the AVS result, but you may. If you check AVS, you can set a level of checking. Y = value matches, N = value does not match, X = cardholder’s bank does not support.

    +
      +
    • Full indicates that the street address must be Y and the Zip code must be Y or the transaction is declined. There can be no N values and no X values.
    • +
    • Medium indicates that there can be no N values (YY, XY, YX, XX allowed).
    • +
    • Light declines transactions only when both values equal N. All other combinations are accepted.
    • +
    • Pre-authorize SALE - Available if you selected AVS and/or CVV2. You can avoid VOID/CREDIT processing for canceled sales in some cases by choosing to pre-authorize SALE transactions. The pre-authorize option allows you to AUTHORIZE a transaction before submitting the SALE transaction. An AUTHORIZE transaction returns an approval/decline along with the AVS and CVV2 information without actually charging the cardholder’s account. Use the AUTHORIZE transaction for a small dollar amount such as $1 (the default) to process the AVS and CVV2 information. If AVS or CVV2 fails, the cardholder is warned and the actual charge is not placed on the credit card account. This eliminates the need for VOID/CREDIT processing of a SALE based on failed AVS or CVV2. If the AUTHORIZE transaction is approved and AVS/CVV2 passes all tests, then a SALE transaction is issued for the full amount. If a SALE is declined for the full amount, the Cancel SALE method (VOID or CREDIT) would be used to cancel the SALE transaction. To use this option, select (check) Pre-authorize SALE and type an amount from $1 to $2.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    An AUTHORIZE transaction will still place a small hold (for example, $1) on the credit cardholder’s funds. Depending on the cardholder's bank, the hold may remain for 24 hours to a week. While this style of processing credit card payments can help reduce SALE issues based on AVS and CVV2 processing, it requires an additional transaction fee for every credit card payment.

    +

    Supported credit cards tab - Select (check) the types of credit cards your provider accepts. These settings control the options that are displayed for selection when the patron is making a payment online. Then click OK.

    +

    Note:
    You can set the credit card types at the system, library, or branch level. The Supported Credit Cards tab indicates the organization from which the settings have been inherited. If you make a change at the branch level, the branch name is displayed on the tab. If you want to revert to the settings of a higher level organization, clear all the check boxes and click OK. Then open the tab again. The settings of the higher level organization are displayed, and the name of the organization is displayed on the tab.

    +

    reCAPTCHA tab - Libraries that use PayPal Payflow Pro for credit card donations through Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC can enable Google's free reCAPTCHA feature, which adds human verification to the process of submitting a donation to the library. This minimizes the possibility of a robotic "user" making many small fake donations to the library to verify stolen credit card information. Genuine donors identify a picture or select I'm not a robot to continue with the donation process. Select (check) Enable reCAPTCHA for donations and supply your Google Site Key and Google Secret Key. See Set up Google's reCAPTCHA on the PAC Donations page.

    +

    Next, set up credit card processing for the PAC, the staff client, and Polaris ExpressCheck as necessary. See Set up PayPal Payflow Pro credit card payments.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payflow_Link_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payflow_Link_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..170765b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payflow_Link_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Payflow Link Properties Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Payflow Link Properties Dialog Box

    +

    Specify these settings if you use the Payflow Link payment gateway for credit card processing. The information is specific to your contract with Payflow Link or your e-commerce partner. For more information about credit card processing in Polaris, see E-Commerce with PayPal Payflow Link.

    +
      +
    • +

      PAC Hosted checkout page URL - From PowerPAC, the redirect page link to the Payflow Link hosted checkout page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). Obtain this setting from Payflow Link. Example: https://payflowlink.paypal.com

      +
    • +
    • +

      MPAC Hosted checkout page URL - From Mobile PAC, the redirect page link to the Payflow Link hosted checkout page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). Obtain this setting from Payflow Link.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Request secure token URL - The PayFlow API URL:
      https://payflowpro.paypal.com for live operation, or
      https://pilot-payflowpro.paypal.com for test.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Vendor - Optional. Your library’s main account name. Obtain this setting from Payflow Link.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Login ID - Your Payflow Link login ID.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Password - Your Payflow Link password.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Partner - Typically PayPal. However, if you set up an account. through a partner such as bank, type the partner’s code. Obtain this setting from your partner; for example, WFB for Wells Fargo bank.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payment Methods Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payment Methods Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a7d012a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payment Methods Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Payment Methods Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Payment Methods Policy Table

    +

    This table specifies payment methods that are available in the staff client for accepting payments from patrons.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payments_Gateway_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payments_Gateway_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88ba7ce1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Payments_Gateway_Properties_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Payments Gateway Properties Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Payments Gateway Properties Dialog Box

    +

    Make these settings if you use Payments Gateway Secure Web Pay (SWP) credit card processing. The information is specific to your contract with Payments Gateway. For more information about credit card processing in Polaris, see E-Commerce with Payments Gateway Secure Web Pay.

    +
      +
    • Hosted checkout page URL - The redirect page link to the Payments Gateway Hosted Checkout page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). Obtain this setting from Payments Gateway.
      Example: https://sandbox.paymentsgateway.net/swp/co/default.aspx
    • +
    • Login ID - The API Log In ID generated on your Payments Gateway VT page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). See Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account.
    • +
    • Secure Transaction Key - The Secure Transaction Key generated on your Payments Gateway VT page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). See Set up the Payments Gateway SWP account.
    • +
    • Current Version - Payments Gateway SWP current version (maximum 10 characters, alphanumeric). The current version is 1.0.
    • +
    • Post-back URL - The Payments Gateway term for this is Return Page 1. Enter the post-back URL for your site (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): https://www.mylibrary.org/polaris/Payments/PostbackPaymentsGateway.aspx, where
       www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Payments Gateway does not accept hyphens in the post-back URL (Return Page 1).

    +
      +
    • PAC Return URL - Typically the Polaris PowerPAC patron account Fine & Fees page, displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): 
      https://
      www.mylibrary.org/polaris/patronaccount/finesfees.aspx, where
      www.mylibrary.org/polaris is your PAC web site.
    • +
    • MPAC Return URL - Typically the Polaris Mobile PAC patron account Fine & Fees page, displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric): 
      https://
      www.mylibrary.org/mobile/FinesAndFees/UpdateAccount, where
      www.mylibrary.org/mobile is your Mobile PAC web site. This field is required. If you do not use Mobile PAC, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    • +
    • Donation PAC Return URL - If you plan to accept donations, enter the URL of the Polaris PowerPAC page that should be displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). This URL is typically your Polaris PowerPAC home page. This field is required. If you do not plan to accept donations, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    • +
    • Donation MPAC Return URL - If you plan to accept donations, enter the URL of the Polaris Mobile PAC page that should be displayed when the user clicks the return link on the Payments Gateway final payment transaction page (maximum 250 characters, alphanumeric). This URL is typically your Polaris Mobile PAC home page. If you do not plan to accept donations, or do not use Mobile PAC, simply enter your PAC Return URL.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..252ad7dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Blocking_Conditions_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris ExpressCheck Blocking Conditions Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck Blocking Conditions Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, SelfCheck Unit, Polaris ExpressCheck: Blocking conditions.

    +

    Use the Polaris® ExpressCheck™ Blocking Conditions dialog box to set circulation blocks on transactions at Polaris ExpressCheck self-check workstations. These blocks can differ from those set for SIP self-check units, staff client transactions, and renewals from PAC. For more information, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

    +
      +
    • Set patron blocks - The Patron Blocks tab lists conditions related to the patron record. Select those that should block transactions at the Polaris ExpressCheck workstation:
    • +
    • Free text blocks - Blocks transactions by patrons whose records contain free-text blocks.
    • +
    • Money owed - Blocks transactions by patrons whose total charges are greater than a specified amount. If you select this option, also select either Over 2nd level fine amount, or Over. The 2nd level fine amount is the value designated for the patron’s registered branch in the Patron/Material Type Loan Limit Blocks policy table. If you select Over, type a threshold amount.
    • +
    • Collection agency blocks - Blocks transactions by patrons whose accounts are in collection.
    • +
    • Verify borrower blocks - Blocks transactions by patrons whose records require staff to verify the patron’s identity.
    • +
    • Address check date in the past - Blocks transactions by patrons whose records require staff to verify the patron’s address.
    • +
    • At least... lost items - Blocks transactions by patrons who have one or more lost items. If you select this option, set the number of lost items that activates the block.
    • +
    • Library assigned blocks list - Select any library-assigned blocks on a patron record that should prevent a patron from doing Polaris ExpressCheck transactions. The options available in this list are those defined in the Patron Blocks policy table for the organization.
    • +
    • Patron codes - Select any patron codes that should be prevented from doing Polaris ExpressCheck transactions.
    • +
    • Set item blocks - The Item Blocks tab lists conditions related to the item record. Select those that should block transactions at the Polaris ExpressCheck workstation:
    • +
    • Free text block - Prevents an item with a free-text block from being checked out or renewed at the Polaris ExpressCheck station.
    • +
    • Is held for a different patron - Prevents an item from being checked out if the item has a status of Held for a patron other than the circulating patron. (If you permit the check-out, the previous request is re-activated.)
    • +
    • Fills a request for a different patron - Prevents an item from being checked out if the item fills a hold request for a patron other than the circulating patron. (If you permit the check-out, the request is maintained as is.)
    • +
    • Is checked out to a different patron - Prevents an item from being checked out if the item is already checked out to a patron other than the circulating patron.
    • +
    • Is from another library - Prevents an item from being checked out if the item’s assigned branch is different from the Polaris ExpressCheck station’s parent branch.
    • +
    • Block on item status - Select the status descriptions, such as Binding or Lost, that should prevent an item from being checked out or renewed at the Polaris ExpressCheck station.
    • +
    • Library-assigned blocks - Select any library-assigned blocks on an item record that should prevent the item from being checked out or renewed at the Polaris ExpressCheck station. You can select these item blocks at the branch level only. The options available in this list are those defined in the Item Block Descriptions database table for the branch.
    • +
    • Charge for check-out - When an item’s assigned branch has set charges for check-out and/or renewal on this type of item, these settings determine whether the transaction can take place at the ExpressCheck workstation. Select Check out and charge the patron account to allow the transaction. Select Stop item check-out, display message to block the transaction and direct the patron to the circulation desk. For more information about checkout and renewal charges, see Charging for Checkout and Renewal.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ad9f953 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Polaris_ExpressCheck_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris ExpressCheck Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris ExpressCheck Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, SelfCheck Unit, Polaris ExpressCheck: Options.

    +

    Settings in this dialog box enable and control options for Polaris ExpressCheck self-check workstations. For more information about setting up and running Polaris ExpressCheck, see the Polaris ExpressCheck Administration Guide.

    +

    Enable Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable Polaris ExpressCheck - Select (check) this option to allow Polaris ExpressCheck software to run on a workstation.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option is also available at the individual workstation level. If it is checked at the system, library, or branch level, it is checked by default for an associated workstation.

    +
      +
    • +

      Require patron password for ExpressCheck - Select (check) to require a patron password for check-out. (A patron password is always required to access the patron account, regardless of this setting.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable on-screen keypad - Select (check) to display an on-screen keypad where the patron can enter the barcode number instead of scanning the library card. If you choose to require the patron password, a field is also displayed for password entry. The account entry form and keypad are available from a link on the welcome page.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Provide a warning if patron record will expire - Select (check) to provide an expiration warning message, and select the number of days before expiration that should trigger the warning message.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Permit registration renewal if patron record expires - Select (check) to allow patrons to renew their registrations at the Polaris ExpressCheck workstation.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option is also available at the individual workstation level.

    +

    Display Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Display hold queue position - Select (check) to display in the patron’s account the position of hold requests in the requests queue.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Permit access to patron account - Select (check) to allow patrons to view their accounts. Patrons need to be able to view their accounts to check account balances and fines, renew items, and suspend or cancel requests.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option is also available at the individual workstation level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Display multi-line titles - Select (check) to display long titles on multiple lines instead of truncating them in the display. A scroll bar appears in the right column if the list of items fills the screen.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display TOMS - Select (check) to display a format (type of material, or TOM) icon for each item. Polaris ExpressCheck uses the PAC format icons.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Suppress held items pop-up message - Select (check) to suppress a message in the dashboard area of the screen when the patron has one or more held items. If you leave the option unchecked, the alert is displayed as a pop-up message at the beginning of the patron’s transactions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Suppress account balance pop-up message - Select (check) to suppress a message in the dashboard area of the screen when the patron owes money. If you leave the option unchecked, the alert is displayed as a pop-up message at the beginning of the patron’s transactions.

      +
    • +
    +

    Finishing Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Print individual receipt for each item - Select (check) to print a separate receipt for each item checked out. By default, all of a patron’s transactions in a session are printed on one receipt. You may want to set this option if you have a security system such as Checkpoint®. The receipt is printed on special paper that masks the item’s security tag when placed in the book pocket.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option is also available at the individual workstation level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Prompt for check-out receipt - This setting can help minimize paper receipts. When this option is enabled, the option is displayed when the patron checks items out and exits ExpressCheck from the Patron Account, or when the patron checks out items for which a receipt has not yet been printed.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option is also available at the individual workstation level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Dispenser acknowledgment message - For Polaris ExpressCheck workstations connected to ITG DiscXpress II media dispensers. Check this option to display an on-screen message when a dispenser item is checked out. The default message is Checkout Completed Successfully! Please retrieve item from the dispensing unit. 

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable eReceipts - Allows patrons to receive e-mail receipts and/or TXT receipts instead of printed receipts. When this option is checked, the patron will receive eReceipts if both the patron’s branch and the ExpressCheck workstation’s branch have enabled eReceipts with the Patron Services parameter EReceipt options, and an eReceipt option is set in the patron’s record. For more information, see Setting Up eReceipts.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Inactivity timeout (seconds) - Type or select a value in the box to change the time at which Polaris ExpressCheck should return to the opening screen after no activity.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    This option is also available at the individual workstation level.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Reading_History_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Reading_History_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6ce76d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Reading_History_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reading History Setup Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reading History Setup Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Reading history.

    +

    The reading history is displayed on the Patron Status workform - Reader Services view. It lists basic information about each item the patron has checked out since the reading history was started. Patrons can also view their reading histories by accessing their patron accounts through the PAC. Use this dialog box to enable reading histories and set limits on them. See Setting Reading History Options.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable reading histories - Select the Enable reading history check box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you clear the Enable reading history check box, new reading histories cannot be created, and existing histories are not incremented. However, existing histories are not cleared. If a reading history is stopped from the patron record, the patron’s existing history is cleared.

    +
      +
    • +

      Specify the length of time (from check-out date to current date) to retain an entry in the Reading History list - Type the number of months or years in the first History length box, then select the unit of time (months or years) in the second History length box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Limit entries in the reading history - In the Maximum history box, type the maximum number of entries that can be retained at one time in the Reading History list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Start and stop histories for specific patrons - See Working with Reading Histories.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Allow patrons to start and stop reading histories from the PAC - Set the Patron Services profile Enable patron preferences to Yes.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Receipt_Printer_Control_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Receipt_Printer_Control_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4747ffc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Receipt_Printer_Control_Codes_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Receipt Printer Control Codes Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Receipt Printer Control Codes Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Staff Client, Receipt printer control codes.

    +

    Use this dialog box to enable bold print, red print, or auto-cutting for standard receipt printers, or to add other kinds of receipt printers to your system. For more information about setting up Polaris receipts, see Setting Up Circulation Receipts.

    +

    Note:
    Install the appropriate printer drivers on the staff client workstations that use receipt printers.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set features for listed printers - Select the printer in the Drivers list, select the check box for each feature (expanded, bold, red, auto-cut) you want to enable, and click Save. A specific printer may not support all features. If a feature is not supported, the Start and End code fields are blank.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Expanded affects in-transit and hold slips. On the in-transit slip, the destination branch’s name is printed in a font that is twice as large as the font on the rest of the slip. On the hold slip, the patron’s name and the unclaimed date are printed in the large font. Although you set this option for specific receipt printers, if you choose to print these slips on a page printer the font is also enlarged.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a printer - Scroll the Drivers list to the last blank field (marked by an asterisk). Select the blank field and type the printer name in the field, then click Save. Then select the new printer in the Drivers list, and select the check-box for each feature you want to enable. For each enabled feature that your printer supports, select the Start and End code fields, and type the appropriate codes in the format shown. See your printer documentation for the correct codes. Click Save.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display or suppress printers from selection lists - To display a printer for selection in Polaris workforms, select (check) Selected. To suppress an unused printer from selection lists, clear the Selected check box. You must click Save after each change.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Registration_Fee_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Registration_Fee_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..964c3880 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Registration_Fee_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Registration Fee Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Registration Fee Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Registration fee options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set registration fees for specific patron codes. The system uses the settings for the patron’s registered branch. The fee is applied automatically at the time of registration or renewal, and the patron account is blocked until the charge is paid. The dialog box lists the patron codes that have been selected for display at this organization. See Charging for Patron Registration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Remove_Patron_ID_from_Circ_Transactions_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Remove_Patron_ID_from_Circ_Transactions_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5e39b8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Remove_Patron_ID_from_Circ_Transactions_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remove Patron ID from Circ Transactions Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remove Patron ID from Circ Transactions Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Remove patron ID from circ transactions.

    +

    Use this dialog box to enable automatic purging of patron identification information from transaction logs after a specified time period. Patron IDs are removed from transactions according to the transacting branch’s settings. The transacting branch is identified in the transaction header OrganizationID field.

    +

    To set up automatic purging, select (check) Enable patron ID removal, then select an interval or select a date:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select months, years, or days in the Term box, and set the appropriate number. For example, if you set the term to 2 years, patron IDs are kept for two years following the date of the transaction, then purged from the transaction database. The program identifies transactions from which to remove patron IDs by counting back the number of days starting from beginning of the day it runs (12:00 midnight) through the final day (12:00 midnight).

      +
    • +
    +

    Example: 
    The term is set to 30 days. When the program runs on the night of August 30 it will count back from midnight August 30 through the full day to midnight July 31. The patron ID will be removed from all transactions prior to 12:00 July 31.

    +
      +
    • +

      Select exact date, and type a date or select a date from the calendar. Information for that date will be purged. This option is most useful for testing or implementing the purge feature for a short period of time.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Automatic lost item recovery actions, which take action on the patron account if a lost item is recovered within a set period of time, depend on the availability of patron ID information. If your organization uses automatic lost item recovery actions, be sure to coordinate the settings so that the patron ID is available if the lost item is recovered within the time period you specify. See Setting Lost Item Recovery Defaults.

    +

    For more information, see Removing Patron ID Information from Transaction Files.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Replacement_Fee_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Replacement_Fee_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16a7df66 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Replacement_Fee_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Replacement Fee Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Replacement Fee Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, Replacement fee options.

    +

    You can charge patrons the original price to replace a lost, damaged, or long overdue item, or charge a default cost. Use this dialog box to set the default cost and determine how the cost is applied. You can also set a processing fee. See Setting Replacement Fee Defaults.

    +
      +
    • +

      Use the original purchase price - To use the original purchase price (if specified in the item record), click Use item record price field or default. If the original purchase price is not available for the calculation, the value specified in the Replacement cost field for the material type is used.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Use defaults only - Select this option to always use the replacement cost for the material type, and ignore actual purchase prices.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Replacement costs - Select each material type, and type the standard replacement value that is specified by library policy.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Processing fees - Optional. Select each material type, and type the amount to charge a patron for processing a replacement item.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SAPI_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SAPI_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3804a382 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SAPI_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + SAPI Settings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    SAPI Settings Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select the telephony server, Outbound, SAPI settings.

    +

    If you use computer-generated SAPI voices for outbound telephony messages, these settings control the voice, speaking rate, and volume for each language licensed for outbound telephony (telephone notification). For more information, see Voices for Outbound Telephony.

    +
      +
    • +

      Select a language from the list of languages licensed for your server.

      +
    • +
    +

    The settings boxes at the bottom of the dialog box become available for use.

    +
      +
    • +

      In the Index settings box, select a voice index number.

      +
    • +
    +

    You are selecting a specific voice for your messages, represented by an index number. Innovative Interfaces supplies several AT&T SAPI voices, and you may add your own. The index number is server workstation-specific. You can select voices and test them on the system to determine if they are appropriate.

    +
      +
    • +

      In the Rate settings box, set the rate of speech.

      +
    • +
    +

    The settings represent a relative rate. Negative values (-1) are somewhat slower than normal speech. Settings of 0 and higher set more rapid rates. The default value is 0.

    +
      +
    • +

      In the Volume settings box, set speech volume.

      +
    • +
    +

    The default (100) represents an average volume.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SelfCheck Material Types Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SelfCheck Material Types Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5d6a1fa8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/SelfCheck Material Types Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + Self Check Material Types Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Self Check Material Types Policy Table

    +

    This table associates Polaris material types with self-check media types for SIP self-check units.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelf Locations Database Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelf Locations Database Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6696f496 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelf Locations Database Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Loan Periods Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Shelf Locations Database Table

    +

    The Shelf Locations database table determines the branch's shelf location options in an item record.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +

     

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelving_Status_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelving_Status_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76e444ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/Shelving_Status_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Shelving Status Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Shelving Status Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters > Patron Services > Shelving status options.

    +

    Use the Shelving Status Options dialog box to set a period of time after check-in during which an item’s status is displayed as "Shelving" (or another appropriate description). See Setting Shelving Status.

    +

    Note: +
    The shelving status settings for the transacting branch are used when an item is checked in.

    +
      +
    • Enable shelving status - When the option is selected, other controls on the dialog box become available.
    • +
    • Display text - (System level only) The status text to display when an item is checked in and the status changes to "In". Use the default text or specify any description that will make sense to your patrons, such as "Sorting" or "Recent Return".
    • +
    • Time to Display -The time in hours or minutes for which the "Shelving" (or other description) status is displayed for the selected material type.
    • +
    • If an item is re-scanned .... 
      • Clock is reset - When this option is selected and the item is scanned again, the specified time period to display the shelving status description starts again, as if the item were being checked in the first time.
      • Shelving status will expire at the time already set - When this option is selected, and the item is scanned again, the “clock” is not reset. The shelving status description expires at the end of the original period.
      • Circulation status will display as In - When this option is selected, and the item is scanned again, the shelving status description is no longer displayed. In the PAC and staff client Find Tool, the circulation status will be displayed as "In".
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ef7ff37 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons Policy Table

    +

    Use this table to define the list of reasons that staff members can select when denying a hold request. The same entries are displayed for every organization level at which the table is opened. You can add entries to the table at the system, library, and branch levels, but the addition is applied to all organizations. Therefore, all organizations should agree on the not-supplied reasons they use for their hold requests.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, but you cannot delete or modify an existing reason.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Def_Due_Date_Mod-Reas_Policy.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Def_Due_Date_Mod-Reas_Policy.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87f6a7d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Def_Due_Date_Mod-Reas_Policy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + User Defined Due Date Modification Reasons Policy Table + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    User Defined Due Date Modification Reasons Policy Table

    +

    This table defines the reasons a staff member can select when modifying a due date in the Polaris Web application, Leap.

    +

    Note: +
    The System Administration permission, Modify due date modification reasons: Allow is required to edit this policy table.

    +

    You can add an entry to the table, or select an entry and modify it.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Defined_Fields_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Defined_Fields_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3e68db93 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/User_Defined_Fields_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + User Defined Fields Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    User Defined Fields Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Patron Services, Patron registration user defined fields.

    +

    Use this dialog box to view the available user-defined fields (UDFs) for your system, to set up the possible options for drop-list UDFs, and to convert UDFs from one type to the other. See Setting Up User-Defined Fields.

    +
      +
    • +

      View user-defined fields: The User Defined Field drop-down list contains the UDFs that were set up at implementation. Select a UDF to determine if it is defined as free text or drop-menu. Drop-menu UDFs display available options. (Individual branches can select options for use and set the display order. See Set drop-menu user-defined fields for organizations.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a drop-menu option to a drop-menu UDF: System level only: Select the drop-menu UDF in the User Defined Field list, and scroll the list of options to the bottom (blank) entry in the list. Double-click the blank field, and type the new option in the blank space. You can type up to 64 alphanumeric characters (letters and numbers).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Convert a free-text UDF to a drop-menu UDF: System level only: Select the free-text UDF in the User Defined Field list, and select Drop-menu. All the free-text values currently entered in patron records for this UDF are listed as drop-menu options; by default, all are selected as eligible for use by individual organizations.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit a drop-menu UDF option: System level only: Select the drop-menu UDF in the User Defined Field list, double-click the option, and type the new text over the old. All patron records and defaults using the old option will be updated with the option’s new text.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a drop-menu option: System level only: You can delete a drop-menu option as long as it is not currently being used in a patron record or as an organizational default setting for the UDF. UnCheck the option’s Selected check box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select drop-menu options for use by an organization: Branch level: Select the drop-menu UDF in the User Defined Field list, then select or clear the check boxes to choose the options you want to appear in the organization’s version of the UDF drop menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the order of drop-menu options for an organization: Branch level: Highlight an option and select the up arrow or down arrow to move the option up or down in the list.

      +
    • +
    • Configure free text UDF fields on the patron record to be used as an alternate ID to check out items. This option can only be enabled for free text UDFs. See Setting Up Free Text User Defined Fields For Use As Alternate IDs.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you make UDF changes, you must log out and log back in to the Polaris staff client to see the effects of your changes in Polaris workforms.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/You_Saved_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/You_Saved_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6b7391c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/You_Saved_Receipt_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Message Text Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    You Saved Receipt Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, Patron Services, You Saved Receipt Options.

    +

    Use the You Saved Receipt Options dialog box to set up a “you saved” message to printed and email check-out/renewal receipts and the printed Items Out list. The message helps to remind patrons of the value of library service by displaying how much it would cost to purchase the items. It includes the total value of the current receipt transactions, the value of the patron's year-to-date transactions, and the “lifetime” value of all the patron’s transactions. See You Saved Receipt Messages for details.

    +
      +
    • +

      Include message on printed and e-mail receipts - Select this option to add the You Saved message to these checkout receipts.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Include message on Items Out slip - Select this option to add the You Saved message to the Items Out list.

      +
    • +
    • Use default replacement fee when item price is unavailable - (System level only) Select this option to use this value for items with no price in the item record. If you leave this option unchecked and the item record does not include a price, the item is not included in the You Saved calculation.
    • +
    • +

      Include renewals in total value - (System level only.) Select this option to include the value of renewed items in the You Saved calculation.

      +
    • +
    • Minimum total value to print - To set a minimum You Saved value to trigger the You Saved message, enter the value here. If the value is below the minimum setting or the sum is 0, no message appears. The default value is $0.01; in this case, the receipt includes the You Saved message regardless of the calculated You Saved amount
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/envisionconnect.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/envisionconnect.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46bd6e7b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/envisionconnect.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + EnvisionWare Connection dialog box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    EnvisionWare Connection Dialog Box

    +

    To access the EnvisionWare Connection dialog box, select EnvisionWare as your payment processing gateway in the Online Payment Settings dialog box and click Properties. See also: E-Commerce with EnvisionWare®

    +

    Use the EnvisionWare Connection dialog box to specify the connection URLs between the EnvisionWare applications and Polaris:

    +
      +
    • Payment page URL - EnvisionWare's payment page
    • +
    • PAC Return URL - The Polaris PowerPAC connection
    • +
    • MPAC Return URL - The Mobile PAC connection
    • +
    • Server URL - The server used for the connections
    • +
    • Port number - The port number used for the connections
    • +
    • Timeout - The amount of time in minutes that the connection is maintained without user input
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_charges.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_charges.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a7c175d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_charges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - Charges Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - Charges Tab

    +

    This tab sets a charge for hold requests (system-level only). The amount is automatically added to the patron’s account when the hold request is filled. You can also specify message text that appears in PAC when patrons attempt to create a hold request, to notify patrons of the amount they will be charged (maximum 500 characters). See Set Holds options: Charge for hold requests.

    +

    Important:
    If you choose to charge fees for hold requests, and you want the charge to apply to hold requests from Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, set the Children’s PAC profile Allow hold requests if charging for holds to Yes. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the default setting is No. If you choose to charge a fee for hold requests and you leave the Children’s PAC profile set to No, hold requests cannot be placed in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pickup.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pickup.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..51e48ec0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pickup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - Pickup Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - Pickup Tab

    +

    Use the Hold Options > Pickup tab to:

    +
      +
    • Exclude branches from being selected as the pickup library when hold requests are created in the PAC - Select the branches under Pickup branches to exclude in PAC when creating requests. See Set Holds options: Pickup library options.
    • +
    • Exclude the selected branches from being selected as the pickup branch in the staff client - Select Exclude selected branches in staff client.
    • +
    • At the System level only, specify the hold statuses for which patrons can change the pickup location in the PAC - Open the dialog box at the System level, and select one or more hold statuses in the list under Patrons can change pickup branch in PAC when holds have these statuses. If no statuses are selected, patrons cannot change the hold pickup location from the PAC. See Set hold options: Enable patrons to change the holds pickup branch from the PAC.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    To specify a particular library as a pickup branch for a hold request in the staff client, the staff member needs permission to create hold requests at that branch. However, the available pickup branch options depend on the Exclude branches in staff client settings for the logged-in branch. If there is no permission to create holds for the branch, and the branch is excluded, the list of available pickup libraries in the staff client is blank.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pref.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pref.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7839333 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_pref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - Preferred Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - Preferred Tab

    +

    Settings in this list work with the hold limit option Preferred borrowers in the item record. When Preferred borrowers is checked in an item record, the item is eligible to fill holds only when the pickup branch is selected (checked) in this list for the item’s assigned branch.

    +

    Note:
    You can set several other item-specific hold limits in the item record. See Restrict holds on specific items.

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_req.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_req.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc8f1707 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_req.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - Requests Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - Requests Tab

    +

    Settings on this tab control hold requests from PAC applications, including title-level, item-level, and first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD)., and block holds on items with specified circulation statuses. See Set Holds options: Enabling, Item Status Restrictions, First Available Copy.

    +
      +
    • Enable title-level hold requests from PowerPAC and Mobile PAC - Select the check box, and select the default pickup library.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    A patron can select a different pickup location when placing a request. If you select None as the default, the patron must choose a pickup library when placing the request. See Set Holds options: Pickup library options.

    +
    +
      +
    • Enable one-click requests in PowerPAC - If title-level hold requests are enabled, you can also check this box to enable one-click hold requests from PowerPAC. When this box is checked, the One Click Request button appears for patrons who are logged into PowerPAC.
    • +
    +
    +
      +
    • Manage item requests - Under this heading are options.to set your policies for item-level requests on monographic materials, specific issues of serial titles, and specific parts of multi-part titles:
      • Do not allow item requests from PAC - When this option is selected, the item-level request icon never appears in PAC search results. Patrons cannot place any monographic item-level, serial copy, or part-level requests.
      • Allow item requests from PAC (default) - When this option is selected, the item-level request icon appears in PAC search results for all item records that have not been restricted from filling holds.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you have enabled title-level requests in the PAC, the title-level Request option is displayed. If your settings prevent any item-specific hold requests, patrons can only place hold request at the title level. If item-level requests are permitted, the system will direct the patron to place a request at the item level if appropriate.

    +
      +
    • Prevent items from filling hold requests by circ status - Under this heading, select the item circulation statuses that should prevent an item from filling a hold request. These settings apply to both staff client and PAC hold requests.
    • +
    +

    When you are finished selecting the holds options, click Apply.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_RTF.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_RTF.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40b92034 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_RTF.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - RTF Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - RTF Tab

    +

    Use this dialog box to control requests-to-fill (RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it.) processing by setting the following options:

    +

    Note:

    For more information on holds routing and setting up primary and secondary RTF routes, see Setting Up Holds Routing.

    +
      +
    • Allow only one cycle in Primary RTF - Select (check) to send requests through the RTF cycle only once when all libraries in the requester branch’s primary routing table deny or ignore the request. When this option is checked and you use only one routing sequence, at the end, the request status becomes Active and the item can be trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation, but the request no longer appears on the responder libraries’ RTF lists. If you use a primary and secondary routing sequence, the request goes to the secondary routing sequence at the end of the cycle. The setting overrides your setting for Total Days in Primary RTF cycle on this tab when all responder libraries deny or ignore the request.
    • +
    • Allow only one cycle in Secondary RTF sequence (for libraries that use secondary routing sequences.) - Select (check) to send requests through the secondary RTF cycle only once when all libraries in the requester branch’s secondary routing table deny or ignore the request. When this option is checked, at the end of the secondary routing cycle, the request status becomes Active, and the item can be trapped at circulation, but the request no longer appears on the libraries’ RTF lists. The setting overrides your setting for Total Days in Secondary RTF cycle on this tab when all secondary responder libraries deny or ignore the request.
    • +
    • Randomize Primary RTF Responder - Select (check) to have the system randomly select which library in the primary RTF sequence is the next library to get the request when the first branch in the sequence denies or ignores the request. After Polaris selects the next library, the sequence is followed in order. You might select this option to prevent the same library from repeatedly filling the requester branch’s requests.
    • +
    • Randomize Secondary RTF Responder (for libraries that use secondary routing sequences) - Select (check) to have the system randomly select which library in the secondary RTF sequence is the next library to get the request when the first branch in the specified start sequence denies or ignores the request. This option works like Randomize Primary RTF Responder (above), but it applies to the secondary routing sequence.
    • +
    • When no items in Primary RTF transfer immediately (for libraries that use secondary routing sequences) - Select (check) to send a request immediately to the secondary routing sequence when no items are In at any of the responder branches in the primary routing sequence. If this option is not selected, the request remains in the primary group for the period you set in Total Days in Primary RTF cycle, regardless of whether there are no In items left to process or all primary libraries have denied or ignored the request.
    • +
    • Time out Located status - Select (check) the box and specify the number of hours a request can remain in a Located status before it reverts to a Pending status.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The Located status is assigned only through the Leap Picklist. It indicates that an item was found to fill a request, but it has not been checked in to trap. If the Time out Located status box is checked and a time period is set for the pickup library, requests that remain in a Located status for the specified time period revert to a status of Pending.

    +
      +
    • Total Days in Primary RTF cycle - Type the number of days a hold request continues to follow the sequence of responder branches designated in the Holds Routing Sequences Primary policy table (see Setting Up Holds Routing). When this time period is over, the request can still be filled when an item is trapped at circulation, but it is no longer routed to the branches.
    • +
    • Total Days in Secondary RTF cycle (for libraries that use secondary routing sequences) - Type the number of days a hold request continues to follow the sequence of responder branches, as designated in the Holds Routing Sequences Secondary policy table (see Setting Up Holds Routing). When this time period is over, the request can still be filled when an item is trapped at circulation, but it is no longer routed to the branches.
    • +
    • Default not-supplied reason (system level only) - Select the default reason that is displayed when a library denies a hold request. Your choices for this setting are defined in the User Defined Hold Not Supplied Reasons policy table. See Defining Not-Supplied Reasons.
    • +
    •  If all material limits are exceeded set to Not Supplied - Select this option to display a block message in the staff client when all the items attached to the bibliographic record have the same material type and a patron has reached the hold limit by material type. The system uses the setting of the governing library for patron blocks.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When this option is checked and the block is overridden, the request is placed with a status of Not Supplied. The Not Supplied reason is All items denied by system. If some items have the limited material type and some do not, a message is displayed and those of the limited material type are automatically denied by the system.
    If this option is not checked, and all the items attached to the bibliographic record have the same material type, the block message is displayed in the staff client as above. However, if the block is overridden, the request is placed with a status of Active. If some items have the limited material type and some do not, a message is displayed and those of the limited material type are automatically denied by the system.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_pac.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_pac.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b868b89c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_pac.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - Staff Client and PAC Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - Staff Client and PAC Tab

    +

    These settings controls staff client and PAC alerts and blocks, as well as the automatic due date adjustment of an item based on the number of hold requests for the item. See Set Holds options: Alerts and blocks.

    + +

    Note:

    This setting also affects ILL items. At bulk check-in, the ILL item status goes from Held to In, and if you check this option, the alert message appears for the ILL item.

    +
      +
    • Permit patron notes from PAC - Check to provide a note field on the PAC patron request form.
    • +
    • Permit suspended requests from PAC (system level only) - Check to allow patrons to suspend and reactivate hold requests from Polaris PowerPAC, Mobile PAC, and Polaris ExpressCheck.
    • +
    • Permit cancellation on Shipped status (system only) - Check to allow patrons and staff to cancel hold requests that have the status of Shipped.
    • +
    • +

      Permitting bib-level hold requests with no items - Separate settings control the staff client and PAC.

      +
        +
      • Alert in Staff Client - When this option is checked, staff members receive an alert message if they place bib-level hold requests when no items are attached. From the alert message, the staff member can choose to place or cancel the hold request. If this option is not checked, no message appears and the hold request is automatically placed. You may want to leave this option unchecked to prevent repeated messages to staff if your staff regularly place bib-level hold requests when no items are attached.
      • +
      • Block in PAC - When this option is checked, patrons are blocked from placing bib-level hold requests when no items are attached. A message advises patrons to contact the library for assistance. If this option is not checked, a message informs the patron that no items are linked to the request. The patron can choose to continue or cancel the request.
      • +
      +
    • +
    • Blocking requests if patron is blocked - Separate settings control the staff client and PAC.
      • Block in Staff Client - Select to block a hold request initiated in the staff client if the patron’s record is blocked for any reason. Staff members can override the block. If you leave this box unchecked, staff can place a hold for the patron regardless of any blocks on the patron’s record or hold limits, and no block messages appear. The system uses the setting of the pick-up branch.
      • Block in PAC - Select to block a hold request initiated in PAC if the request would exceed the setting for the total number of requests allowed or the number of requests allowed for a particular material type.
    • +
    • Enable request status “Out” - Enables a request status of Out and displays requests with this status of in the staff client and the PAC patron account. A request status changes to Out when a held item is checked out, allowing the request to remain available for tracking purposes until the item status changes from Out to In, Held, Transferred, In-Transit, or Lost. The setting for the workstation’s logon branch controls the display in the staff client; the setting for the patron’s registered branch controls the display in the PAC patron account.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Out request status is automatically enabled for libraries that use Borrow by Mail.

    +
      +
    • PAC display patron contact info (PowerPAC only) - Displays the patron’s contact information on the PowerPAC request confirmation page so that patrons can verify the information, and provides a link to update the information if necessary.
    • +
    • PAC block for patron verification - This setting blocks hold requests from PAC if there is a verification block on the patron record. This type of block is added when the patron has registered online or has requested updates to certain patron account information.
    • +
    • Change due date based on ratio - Select this option to automatically shorten loan periods on items with multiple requests. Then specify the number of requests and the number of items for the ratio, and the loan period (in days) when the requests-per-item ratio is met. This setting only affects loan periods of more than 7 days, and applies only to bibliographic-level holds. (Non-holdable items are not included in the calculation.)
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dafe65d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPat/hold_opt_staff_queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Hold Options Dialog Box - Queue Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Options Dialog Box - Queue Tab

    +

    Use this tab to set the following options for the holds queue:

    +

    Note: +
    See Set Holds options: Trapping preferences, queue settings.

    +
      +
    • Trapping Preference - These settings can override the queue and affect which request an item will fill when it is scanned at check-in. Select a trapping preference: + +
      • None - The existing queue order is followed when an item that can fill a request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. during circulation.
      • Prefer my location - If an item’s assigned branch matches the pickup branch of any request in the queue, fill that request ahead of the others. In effect, Prefer my location favors requests that keep or return an item to its assigned branch.
        • in Preference Group - If both Prefer my location and in Preference group are selected, preference is given to hold requests where the pickup branch is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch. When a hold request has a pickup branch that is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch, the hold is filled ahead of those with other pickup branches in the preference group.
      • Prefer my patron - If an item’s assigned branch matches a patron’s registration branch of any request in the queue, fill that request ahead of others. In effect, this option favors requests that place your branch’s items in the hands of your branch’s patrons.
        • in Preference Group - If both Prefer my patron and in Preference Group are selected, preference is given to hold requests where the patron’s registered branch is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch. When a hold request is placed by a patron whose registered branch is in the preference group, and that branch matches the item’s assigned branch, the hold is filled ahead of those placed by patrons registered at other branches in the preference group.
      • Prefer check-in location - If an item could fill a request where the pickup branch matches the check-in branch, fill that request ahead of others. In effect, this option favors requests where the item does not need to be shipped.

        Note:
        If the check-in branch is in a preference group, priority is given to hold requests with both the check-in branch and the pickup branch in the preference group.

    • +
    • Maintain Queue Position - Select one of the following options:
      • If suspended/inactive - When this option is selected, and you have also selected Permit suspended requests from PAC (Staff client & PAC tab - System level), suspended requests regain their original position in the holds queue for the item when they are reactivated. This setting also controls the queue position when a request placed with an activation date in the future becomes active. Otherwise, the request is placed at the end of the queue.
      • If re-activated - When this option is selected, not-supplied, expired, or canceled requests regain their original position in the holds queue for the item when they are reactivated. When this option is not selected, such requests are placed at the end of the queue.
    • +
    • Trapping preference groups (System level only) - If you choose to use a trapping preference, you can extend the preference to consider a group of organizations, such as a group of branches from various libraries, all branches that belong to a library, or all the branches in a group of libraries. Open the Hold options dialog box, Queue tab at the System level, and select to add a new preference group.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Change_Labels_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Change_Labels_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f881800a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Change_Labels_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Change Labels Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Change Labels Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    Then right-click the entity in the Available entities or the Display these entities list, and select Labels from the context menu, select Edit Labels from the Entity Properties dialog box, or click the Change Labels icon at the top of the Available entities or Display these entities list.

    +

    Use this dialog box to edit the default English label for an entity, and to enter or change the labels for other languages. See the following topics for more information:

    + +

    Note:
    To enter diacritics or non-Latin characters, press and hold ALT while typing the code on the numeric keypad.

    +
      +
    • +

      Save or cancel your work:

      +
    • +
    • +

      To permanently save your changes and keep the dialog box open, click Apply.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To permanently save your changes and close the dialog box, click OK.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To remove any changes that have not been applied and close the dialog box, click Cancel.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Category_Config_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Category_Config_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..aecb18d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Category_Config_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ + + + + + + + + + Children’s PAC Category Configuration Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Children’s PAC Category Configuration Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Children’s PAC, Category construction.

    +

    Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition offers search targets (predefined searches or Web links), organized in categories and subcategories. Use the Children’s PAC Category Configuration dialog box to define and organize the search targets. In this dialog box, folder icons ChildCatFolder.gif represent categories. Database icons ChildCatDB.gif represent bibliography (title) search targets, and Web Site icons  represent Web link targets. See Managing Search Categories for details.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a category - Select the folder to which you want to add a category, then click Add Category.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a target - Select the category folder to which you want to add a target, then click Add Target.

      +
    • +
    +

    Add Category Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to add a search target category to Children’s PAC. For detailed procedures, see Add a new category.

    +
      +
    • +

      Display Name - Identifies the new category in the Category Configuration dialog box. If no category icon is defined, the Display Name is directly displayed as a link on the Children’s PAC home page. If an icon is defined for the category, the category is displayed as a link when the icon is selected.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To insert a diacritic character in the display name, click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens. For details on choosing diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

    +
      +
    • +

      Display Message (optional) - Type any text that should be displayed below the category display name and above the matrix of icons or list of targets.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can insert diacritic characters in the message. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens. For details on choosing diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

    +
      +
    • +

      Icon File Name - Type only the file name for the category icon graphic. Polaris constructs the appropriate URL to the categories folder of the selected theme, or to the default theme if you do not allow theme selection. The category icon is displayed in the Children’s PAC interface as a link, which you can click to see subcategories or targets.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Be sure to place the category icon graphic file in the categories folder for each theme you offer. For more information about themes, see Managing Themes.

    +
      +
    • +

      Tooltip Preview - Check this box to display targets for this category when the cursor hovers over the category link in the Children’s PAC interface. To display tooltip previews, you must also specify an icon file name for the category.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Use the Children’s PAC profile Number of tooltip entries displayed to set the maximum number of tooltip entries to display. In the Add Children’s PAC Search Target dialog box, you must also check the Preview Search Target box for each target you want to display in the tooltip.

    +

    Add Children’s PAC Search Target Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to add a search target to Children’s PAC. For detailed procedures, see Add a new search target to a category.

    +

    Tip:
    You can view the structure of default targets to get ideas about how to set up targets. Select a default target and click Modify to view the target settings.

    +
      +
    • +

      Display Name - Identifies the new target in the Category Configuration dialog box and on the home page.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can insert diacritic characters in the display name. Click Diacritics. The Character Picker dialog box opens. For details on choosing diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

    +
      +
    • +

      Icon File Name - To make this target part of a matrix of search targets for the category, type the name of the target icon file here. Children can click the icon to launch the search for the target. If you do not specify an icon, the target is displayed as a simple text link in a list with any other text-link targets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Icon Display Name - If you want to display text along with the target icon in the matrix, type the text in the Icon Display Name box. (If you specify an Icon Display Name, be sure you specified an Icon File Name.)

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    Be sure to place the target icon graphic file in the categories folder for each theme you offer. For more information about themes, see Managing Themes.

    +
      +
    • +

      Target type - Select one of the following target types:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Search - Launches a defined search in the Polaris database. Input the search command as a Common Query Language (CQL) command in the Search box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Bibliography - Displays a search link that launches a search for specific titles. Click Add next to the Bibliography box, and use the Find Tool to locate and select the bibliographic record for the title you want to add.

      +
    • +
    • +

      URL - Displays a text link that connects to a Web site. Input the complete URL for the Web target in the URL box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To allow Web target links, set the Children’s PAC profile Web access: Enable to Yes. Libraries where children’s Internet access is a concern should use lockdown software or set this profile to No. If this profile is set to No, the URL target appears as text only, and does not allow Web access.

    +
      +
    • +

      Preview Search Target - Check this box to include the target Display Name as a link under the category to which the target belongs. Preview search targets are indicated by a small flag ChildCatDBPrev.gif in the Category Configuration dialog box. If you want the same target link to be displayed once the category is selected, set it up again under the appropriate category, leaving Preview Search Target unchecked. To display preview search targets, you must also specify an icon file name for the category. See Add a new category.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate category and target names - See Translate a category or target and Translate all categories and targets.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Default_Search_Limits_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Default_Search_Limits_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cdecab35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Childrens_PAC_Default_Search_Limits_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Children’s PAC Default Search Limits Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Children’s PAC Default Search Limits Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Children’s PAC, Default search limits.

    +

    Use this dialog box to filter and scope search results in Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. For details, see Setting Children’s Search Limits.

    +
      +
    • Set a free-text filter - Type the Common Query Language (CQL) command in the Default free text search limit box, beginning with the Boolean operator and. The default filter is AND TA=j, which limits the results to titles with a juvenile target audience. For more information about CQL, see PAC CQL Commands & Access Points.
    • +
    • Limit search results to certain collections - Select the collections in the Collections list.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    If you have collections set up for children’s periodicals, this is a good way to include the periodicals in Children’s PAC search results, since serials records do not include target audience information.

    +
      +
    • Combine free-text and collection filters - Enter a free-text filter and select the collections intended for children.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Code_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Code_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e066a53 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Code_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Code Picker Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Code Picker Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    Then select a display element (entity), right-click, and select Properties. On the Properties dialog box, click Define Entity, and click the ellipsis button in the in the Ind1 or Ind2 column or Subfields column (system level only).

    +

    Use this dialog box to edit indicators or subfields for a selected entity. See the following topics for more information:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Configure_DataBase_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Configure_DataBase_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f60e24ec --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Configure_DataBase_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + + + Configure [DataBase] Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Configure [DataBase] Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Remote databases: Usage settings. On the Remote databases Usage Settings dialog box, select a database and click Configure database.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set PowerPAC usage conditions for a specific remote database. See Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC for detailed information.

    +

    Parameters Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Display name - Specify a PowerPAC display name for this database, if you want a name other than that shown.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable for follow-on searching - Select (check) to designate this database for follow-on searching. This option is available only if follow-on searching has been enabled for remote databases on the Remote Databases Usage Settings dialog box. The database must also be added as a search target for this organization’s PAC. See Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display.

      +
    • +
    • Include by default - Select (check) to include this database in PowerPAC searches by default. See Default Remote Databases in PowerPAC Searches.
    • +
    • +

      Include in quick-select drop down - Select (check) to include the database in the Using drop-down list box in the PowerPAC search form. The database must be selected to appear in at least one place in the Remote Databases: Categorization of Target Databases dialog box for the organization. See Organizing Target Databases for PowerPAC Display.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Maximum number of records to return - Specify the retrieved records limit by selecting a number in the box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Maximum search time (seconds) - Specify the search time limit in seconds by selecting a number in the box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Authentication Tab

    +
      +
    • +

      Restrictions subtab - These settings specify whether and how patrons access the database from in-house computers and from remote computers.

      +
    • +
    • +

      In-house access - Disabled prevents patrons from accessing the database from a library computer. Login required requires patrons to log in with their library account credentials to access the database from a library computer. No login required - Patrons can access the database from a library computer without logging in.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remote access - Disabled prevents patrons from accessing the database from a computer outside of the library. Login required requires patrons to log in with their library account credentials to access the database from a computer outside of the library. No login required - Patrons can access the database from a computer outside of the library without logging in.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron codes subtab - select the patron codes to restrict. Patrons whose records have the selected patron code will be prevented from accessing the database.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If you choose to restrict access by patron code, you must also require the patron to log in (Restrictions subtab). If you do not require log-in, your settings for restricted patron codes are ignored.

    +
      +
    • +

      IP Addresses subtab - Sets access to the remote database by the IP address of the PAC search computer.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the IP address in the top boxes and click Add.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To include an IP address range, select Enter IP range, type the beginning IP address in the top boxes and the last two digits of the ending IP address in the bottom boxes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To remove an IP address, select it and click the Remove button.

      +
    • +
    +

    UI Options Tab

    +

    These settings define the search access points for each search type in this database. These settings also control the types of searches available in the PowerPAC Other Searches dashboard that is displayed with results when this database is searched.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Copy_Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Copy_Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..799adbe8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Copy_Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy Title Display Configure Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy Title Display Configure Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    On the Title Display Configure or Community Information Display Configure dialog box, click Copy.

    +

    Use this dialog box to copy configurations to other organizations. See the following topics for more information:

    + +

    Select the configuration views you want to copy, and select the organizations that should receive your settings.

    +

    (Optional) To overwrite the destination organization’s labels with the source organization’s labels, select (check) Overwrite labels..

    +

    Click Copy.

    +

    Important:
    The copy action takes place immediately. The action cannot be undone.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_search_Related_searches_-_Modify_Search.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_search_Related_searches_-_Modify_Search.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..789809c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_search_Related_searches_-_Modify_Search.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + Dashboards: Narrow search & Related searches - Modify Search Dashboard Element Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Dashboards: Narrow search & Related searches - Modify Search Dashboard Element Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to modify the display settings for an element selected on the Narrow or Related Searches tabs of the Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches dialog box (PowerPAC profile or Community profile). The dialog box appears when you click Modify Dashboard Element.

    +

    For PowerPAC information, see Set up the Narrow your search Web part and Set up the Related searches Web part (PowerPAC profiles). These settings apply to bibliographic search results.

    +

    For Community information, see Set Up the Narrow Your Search Web Part and Set Up the Related Searches Web Part (Community profiles). These settings apply to community information search results.

    +
      +
    • +

      Display the element - To display the element in the Web part, select (check) this option.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Show initially expanded - To display the element’s links when the search results page appears, select (check) this option.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To minimize the need to scroll the PAC search results page, you may want to consider displaying some or all elements as initially unexpanded. The patron can choose to expand any element that is unexpanded.

    +
      +
    • +

      Minimum to show and Maximum to show - To change the minimum and maximum number of links that can be displayed for the element, select or type the numbers in the boxes.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    The maximum number of links that can be displayed for one element is 99. However, higher numbers of links can slow processing time and may not be particularly useful to patrons, since the list of links for an element may be quite long for certain searches.

    +
      +
    • +

      Label - If you want to change the default English label, type the text in the box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e644f0a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Dashboards_Narrow_your_search_Related_searches_Dialog_Box1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set up the Narrow and Related Web parts that are displayed in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard on the bibliographic search results page. You can offer the Narrow Web part, the Related Web part, or both; specify the elements available for each Web part and set the display order; set the initial display to expanded or collapsed; set the minimum and maximum number of links for each element; specify your own labels for the Web parts and elements and translate the labels if you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version. For details about the features these Web parts offer to users, see Setting PowerPAC Narrow/Related Search Options.

    +

    Narrow Tab

    +

    Settings on this tab control whether the Narrow Web part is displayed in the dashboard for search results, and what search filter elements are listed for the Web part. For details about this Web part, see Narrow Search Web Part.

    +
      +
    • +

      Modify the settings for an element - Select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element. The Modify Dashboard Element (Narrow) dialog box appears. See Set up the Narrow your search Web part.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order - Select an element and click the up or down arrows. Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. (The label for the entire Web part is always displayed first and cannot be re-ordered.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate a label - Select the element and click Translate Label. Your choice of languages depends on the languages you purchased with Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version. See Translate labels for Narrow/Related Web parts (Polaris PowerPAC).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save settings - Click the Save icon SaveIconTitleDisp.gif. Your changes on this tab are immediately saved to the Polaris database.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    A message alerts you if you have set Dashboard to be displayed but no elements. At least one element within the Web part must be set for display in order to display the Web part itself.

    +

    Related Searches Tab

    +

    Settings on this tab control whether the Related Web part is displayed in the dashboard for search results, and what related search elements are listed for the Web part. For details about this Web part, see Related Searches Web Part.

    +
      +
    • +

      Modify the settings for an element - Select the element and click Modify Dashboard Element. The Modify Dashboard Element (Related) dialog box appears. See Set up the Related searches Web part.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order - Select an element and click the up or down arrows. Elements toward the top of the list are displayed before elements lower in the list. (The label for the entire Web part is always displayed first and cannot be re-ordered.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate a label - Select the element and click Translate Label. Your choice of languages depends on the languages you purchased with Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version. See Translate labels for Narrow/Related Web parts (Polaris PowerPAC) and Multilingual Support for Dashboard Titles.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save settings - Click the Save icon SaveIconTitleDisp00692.gif. Your changes on this tab are immediately saved to the Polaris database.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    A message alerts you if you have set Dashboard to be displayed but no elements. At least one element within the Web part must be set for display in order to display the Web part itself.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Source_Target_Categorization_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Source_Target_Categorization_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ec375b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Source_Target_Categorization_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + E-Source Target Categorization Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Source Target Categorization Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Categorization of Esource targets.

    +

    E-sources are subscription databases, presented as search links on an e-sources page in Polaris PowerPAC. Use this dialog box to set up e-source targets and organize them into categories. In this dialog box, folder icons EsourceFolder.gif represent categories. Book icons EsourceBook.gif represent individual targets. See Managing E-Sources.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set up an e-source target - You need to obtain certain information from the provider prior to set-up. See Setting Up E-Source Targets. Then select a category for the target, and click Add Target.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a category - Select the Root folder or an existing category folder. Then click Add Category. A new folder appears in the tree view. Type a category heading for the new folder, and press ENTER. See Organizing E-Source Targets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy an existing target into a category - Select the target, and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy of the target, and click Paste. This procedure creates targets that are linked. Any change to one target is applied to all the linked targets. See Organizing E-Source Targets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order in the PAC - Select a category or target and click Up or Down. Repeat until the categories or targets are in the display order you want. In the PAC display, targets defined at the Root level are always displayed below any categories. See Organizing E-Source Targets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Revert to system settings - Click Revert.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Sources_Add_Modify_Target_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Sources_Add_Modify_Target_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98628006 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/E-Sources_Add_Modify_Target_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + E-Sources Add/Modify Target Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    E-Sources Add/Modify Target Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to set up a new e-source target for use in the PAC, or to modify the settings for an existing target. See Setting Up E-Source Targets. The Add dialog box appears when you select a category and click Add Target on the E-Sources Categorization dialog box. The Modify dialog box appears when you select a target and click Modify on the E-Sources Categorization dialog box. You can change any existing settings for the target.

    +
      +
    • Name - Type a name for the target to be displayed on the PAC E-Sources page.
    • +
    • Description (optional) - Type a brief description (890 characters maximum), if you want to display a description on the PAC E-Sources page.
    • +
    • Message (optional) - Use this field to inform patrons of any use restrictions for the target, or to highlight a new offering.
    • +
    • URL (obtain from provider) - Input the complete URL for the target’s log-in page.
    • +
    • Transfer Type (obtain from provider) - The protocol for passing authentication data from your library to the e-source target. Select Get or Post.
    • +
    +

    Add/Modify Targets - General Restrictions Tab

    +

    These settings control access to a target based on workstation location.

    +
      +
    • Inhouse access - Sets usage restrictions for in-house PAC workstations. Typically if a workstation is registered in Polaris Administration, it is considered in-house. If a workstation is not registered in Polaris Administration, but the IP address is listed in the system-level In-House IP Addresses database table, it is considered to be in-house.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    By default, the system checks both the In-House IP Addresses table and registered workstations to determine if a computer is in-house. However, if you experience performance issues related to e-source restrictions, you can set the system to check only the In-House IP Addresses table. See Set criteria for determining in-house location.

    +
      +
    • Disabled - The e-source is unavailable to in-house users.
    • +
    • Login required - The e-source is available from in-house workstations only to registered patrons.
    • +
    • No login required - The e-source is available from in-house workstations to anyone.
    • +
    • Remote access - Sets usage restrictions for remote workstations (those not in-house).
    • +
    • Disabled - The e-source is unavailable to remote users.
    • +
    • Login required - The e-source is available from remote workstations only to registered patrons.
    • +
    • No login required - The e-source is available from remote workstations to anyone.
    • +
    +

    Add/Modify Targets - Patron Codes Tab

    +

    These settings prevent certain patron codes from accessing the target. Select (check) the codes you want to prevent from accessing the target.

    +

    Note:
    Your patron code settings are used only if you have required log-in for in-house or remote access.

    +

    Add/Modify Targets - IP Addresses Tab

    +

    These settings limit access to specific workstations.

    +

    Important:
    Set this restriction if you want to allow access only from the specific IP addresses listed here. If at least one address is listed, the system blocks access from any workstations or IP addresses that are not listed here, regardless of any other access restrictions you may have set. You might use this setting to limit access to a very specialized (and costly) research site.

    +
      +
    • Define IP addresses one at a time - Type each  address in the IP Address boxes and click Add. The addresses are displayed in the Allowed IP Addresses list.
    • +
    • Define a range of IP addresses - Select the Enter IP Range check box. Then enter the first address of the range in the IP Address boxes, and enter the last address of the range in the End of IP Range boxes. Click the radio button below the appropriate End of IP Range box to specify if the last number in the range is in that address segment. Click Add to add the range to the Allowed IP Addresses list.
    • +
    • Remove addresses from the Allowed list - Select the IP address and click Remove. Use CTRL+select or SHIFT+select to select multiple entries.
    • +
    +

    Add/Modify Targets - Connection Data Tab

    +

    These settings are provided by the vendor. Name is the descriptive field name that the database provider uses to prompt for input. Value is the actual text string that the database provider assigns to your library when the subscription is established.

    +

    Example:
    A vendor requires a user ID and a password to access a database, so you define two parameters (two sets of Name and Value data elements). For the first set, Name is UserID.  Value is WESTSIDELIBRARY. For the second set, Name is Password and Value is read.

    +

    Type a name in the Name box, type a value in the Value box for the first parameter, and click Add. Repeat to add as many parameters as the e-source provider requires for connection authentication.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Enriched_Data_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Enriched_Data_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..722e63ad --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Enriched_Data_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + + Enriched Data Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Enriched Data Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Enriched data.

    +

    Enriched data is information about a title in PAC search results that is delivered by a third-party vendor. Depending on your contract with the vendor, the enriched data can consist of a simple book jacket image, or contents, excerpts, tags, ratings, reviews, and other information related to the title. If you subscribe to book jacket images, these are displayed automatically in the PAC search results. See Enabling Enriched Data for details. Use the Enriched Data dialog box to set up and enable enriched content from specific vendors. Each vendor’s settings are on a separate tab.

    +

    Note:
    You can enable and receive enriched data from more than one vendor, except cover images. These must be enabled for one vendor only.

    +

    Baker & Taylor Tab

    +

    The Baker & Taylor tabbed page contains the following subtabs:

    +
      +
    • Cover Images - If you subscribe to cover images from Baker & Taylor, select (check) Enable and enter the URL prefix and suffix for your site. The prefix is the part of the URL that comes before the title’s ISBN when a search is launched at the Baker & Taylor site for the book jacket image. The suffix defines your specific account access information. Contact your vendor to obtain these settings.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you use Baker & Taylor cover images for rotating book jackets on the portal page, you must also supply Content Cafe settings. For more information about setting up rotating book jackets, see Set up rotating book jackets.

    +
      +
    • Content Cafe - Select (check) Enable and enter the user ID and password for your site. Contact your vendor to obtain these settings.
    • +
    +

    Syndetics Tab

    +

    The Syndetics tabbed page contains the following subtabs:

    +
      +
    • Cover Images - If you subscribe to cover images from Syndetics, select (check) Enable and enter the URL prefix and suffix for your site. The prefix must begin with
      http://www.syndetics.com/
      The suffix must include your client code. Contact your vendor to obtain this setting.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you use Syndetics cover images for rotating book jackets on the PowerPAC portal page, you must also supply Other Features settings. For more information about setting up rotating book jackets, see Set up rotating book jackets.

    +
      +
    • Other Features - These settings apply to Syndetics content other than cover images. Select (check) Enable and enter the URL prefix and suffix for your site. The prefix must begin with
      http://www.syndetics.com/
      The suffix must include your client code. Contact your vendor to obtain these settings.

      Unbound - If you subscribe to the Syndetics Unbound service, select (check) Enable and enter the service URL and account ID.

    • +
    +

    NoveList Tab

    +

    NoveList Select - EBSCO's NoveList Select automatically provides the appropriate links for your NoveList contract. Select (check) Enable, and type your Profile ID and password in the appropriate boxes. Contact your vendor to obtain the unique first part of the Profile ID and your password.

    +

    Note:
    The Service URL is the same for all Polaris customers. You do not need to change it unless the NoveList Web service URL changes.

    +

    ChiliFresh Tab

    +

    On the ChiliFresh tab, select (check) Enable and type your account ID in the Account ID box. (Do not specify a different service URL). Contact your vendor to obtain your specific account ID.

    +
      +
    • Cover Images - If you subscribe to cover images from ChiliFresh, select (check) Enable and enter the URL prefix and suffix for your site.
    • +
    • Other Features - These settings apply to ChiliFresh content other than cover images, such as patron ratings and reviews. Select (check) Enable. In the Service URL box, type your ChiliFresh service URL. In the Account ID box, type your account identification code. In the API Key box, type your API key. The key is unique for your account ID. Obtain your specific account ID and API key from ChiliFresh.
    • +
    +

    See also: Polaris Social with ChiliFresh Connections.

    +

    LibraryThing Tab

    +

    On the LibraryThing tab, select (check) Enable tags and related titles to display tags and related title links in PAC search results. Select (check) Enable user reviews to display reader ratings and the link to reader reviews. You can select either or both of these features.

    +

    Type your site code at the end of the default URL in the Service URL box. Type your account number in the Account ID box. Contact your vendor to obtain these settings.

    +

    OverDrive Tab

    +

    On the OverDrive tab, select (check) Enable to enable OverDrive enriched content.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..01c84781 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Definition_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Entity Definition Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Entity Definition Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    Then select a display element (entity), right-click, and select Properties. On the Properties dialog box, click Define Entity (system level only).

    +

    Use this dialog box to edit system-defined or custom entities. See the following topics for more information:

    + +

    Certain system-defined entities cannot be edited. For details, see Edit a bibliographic entity definition and Edit a community information entity definition.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a new tag to the entity - Click the ellipsis button in the Tags column.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select indicator values - Click the ellipsis button in the Ind1 or Ind2 column.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select subfields - Click the ellipsis button in the Subfields column.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_Advanced_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_Advanced_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c454b5d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_Advanced_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + + + Entity Properties Dialog Box - Advanced Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Entity Properties Dialog Box - Advanced Tab

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    Then select a display element (entity), right-click, and select Properties.

    +

    This dialog box tab displays advanced characteristics of the currently selected bibliographic or community information entity. See the following topics for more information:

    + +

    Certain fields are editable at the system level only. Certain system-supplied entities cannot be edited at all. See Edit a bibliographic entity definition and Edit a community information entity definition.

    +
      +
    • +

      System description - Description used by the system; not a PAC display label.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Entity path - System-assigned identifier for this entity.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Index name - Not editable. Identifies the browse index for this entity if applicable.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Repeatable - Editable for certain entities.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_General_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_General_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c91a7446 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Entity_Properties_Dialog_Box_-_General_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Entity Properties Dialog Box - General Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Entity Properties Dialog Box - General Tab

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    Then select a display element (entity, right-click, and select Properties.

    +

     This dialog box tab displays general characteristics of the currently selected bibliographic or community information entity. See the following topics for more information:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Feature_It_Screen_Display_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Feature_It_Screen_Display_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14aeee8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Feature_It_Screen_Display_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Feature It Screen Display Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Feature It Screen Display Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Feature It: Screen display options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify display settings for Feature It promotions of library materials and web resources, and/or community and event records, in Polaris PowerPAC. See Feature It Promotions.

    +

    Note:
    Feature It and Community Profiles are available by separate licenses. For more information about Community Profiles, see Polaris Community Profiles Overview.

    +

    For information about selecting resources to feature and specifying the conditions under which they are featured, see Set Up the Feature It Display for PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set up Feature It for library materials and web resources:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select (check) Enable Feature It for library materials and web pages.

      +
    • +
    +

    This setting enables promotion links for library materials and featured URLs when the user searches for either bibliographic records or community information.

    +
      +
    • +

      Select the promotion placement on the search results screen. You can select Dashboard area, Beginning of search results, or End of search results.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set up Feature It for community information:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select (check) Enable Feature It for community profiles.

      +
    • +
    +

    This setting enables promotion links for community information when the user searches for either bibliographic records or community information.

    +
      +
    • +

      Select the promotion placement on the search results screen. You can select Dashboard area, Beginning of search results, or End of search results.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display library materials and community profile information in one list:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable both options and choose the same display position for both.

      +
    • +
    • +

       Select (check) Display library and community resources in a single merged list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Maximum to show in unexpanded dashboard - If you have selected Dashboard area as the placement for an enabled Feature It option, set the maximum number of promotion links to show in an unexpanded dashboard list. The maximum (and default) value is 8 promotion links. Since this list can occupy considerable dashboard space at the top of the dashboard, forcing the user to scroll to see search filters and related searches, you can set the value to a lower number. In this case, the dashboard list displays a more link when appropriate. The user can click more to expand the list (up to 8 links) and less to collapse it. If you set this value to 0, the list is completely collapsed and the user must click a plus sign to expand it.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Google_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Google_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94398d46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Google_Maps_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Google Maps Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Google Maps Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Google Maps.

    +

    Use this dialog box to enable the Map It! feature in Polaris PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC. This feature provides a visual guide to the location of items linked to titles in the patron’s search results list. The Map It! feature includes the zoom, pan, satellite and map imagery available on Google’s hosted mapping site.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable in PowerPAC - Select (check) Enable to display the Map It! button in Polaris PowerPAC when this organization is the connection organization.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable in Mobile PAC - Select (check) Enable to display the Map It! link in Mobile PAC when this organization is the connection organization.

      +
    • +
    • API key - If you are implementing Map It for the first time after June 2016, enter your Google Maps API key in the box. For more information about obtaining the API key, go to https://developers.google.com/maps/faq#keysystem. If you implemented Map It before June 2016 and are simply changing your settings, the API key is not necessary.
    • +
    • +

      Geographic center of map position - Enter the latitude and longitude that should be used to position the initial display of the map. You can enter up to 20 characters in each box. Valid characters include one minus sign (to indicate a negative number, must be the first character), one period (to indicate a decimal point) and numerals 0-9. The allowed range is -90 to 90 latitude, and -180 to 180 longitude. If you have entered geographic coordinates for the system organization in the system-level Geographic Coordinates database table, these are already entered as the default values. If no system coordinates have been entered, the default coordinates are those of the current organization. If these have not been entered in the Geographic Coordinates database table, the Latitude and Longitude fields are blank.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Zoom level of initial display - This setting determines the zoom level of the initial map display. The default level is 10; valid values are 1-21. Higher numbers produce a view that is zoomed in closer.

      +
    • +
    +

    For more information, see Map It (Google Maps) in PAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/In-House_Access_Definitions_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/In-House_Access_Definitions_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be5c1181 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/In-House_Access_Definitions_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + In-House Access Definitions Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    In-House Access Definitions Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, In-house access definitions: Setup.

    +

    Use this dialog box to control how a workstation’s in-house status is determined for PowerPAC patron actions (patron inactivity timeout and Recently Viewed Titles) and e-source access. The system uses the setting of the Polaris PowerPAC connection organization. You can set separate criteria for the patron actions and access to e-source targets.

    +

    If you select In-House IP Addresses Table only, a workstation’s IP address must be included in that table to be considered in-house. If you select In-House IP Addresses Table AND registered workstations, a workstation’s IP address can either be included in the In-House IP Addresses table or the workstation can be registered in Polaris to be considered in-house. This is the default setting for both patron actions and e-source target access.

    +

    Note:
    Look-ups to determine whether a workstation is registered in Polaris can impact performance on slow or complicated networks. If you experience these problems, you can change the setting for patron actions, e-source access, or both, to In-House IP Addresses Table only. If you do not experience performance problems, the default settings are probably satisfactory.

    +

    For more information, see Set criteria for determining in-house location.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5b9d501 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + + Language Strings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Language Strings Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Multiple language strings or Profiles, PAC, Hours of operation message. The dialog box also appears when you translate labels in the PAC profile Title Display: Configure, the PowerPAC profile Dashboards: Narrow your search & related searches, and the Community profile Dashboards: Narrow your search & related searches.

    +

    Use this dialog box to edit certain messages and labels that may appear in Polaris PowerPAC and/or Mobile PAC, to translate data labels for title information or facets (Narrow your search and Related searches) in PAC search results, and to specify a message for the Hours page in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +

    Messages

    +

    Note:
    You can also customize message text for Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC using Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin). See the Polaris Language Editor Guide for more information.

    +

    You can edit certain messages that appear in Polaris PowerPAC, and if you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, you can edit the messages for each supported language. For details, see Editing Messages and Labels. For a list of the messages and where they appear in PAC, see PAC Messages and Labels Reference.

    +
      +
    • +

      Choose a language - If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, select the language you want to edit in the Choose Language box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit a message - In the Display Text column, highlight the message you want to change, then press ENTER or double-click the text. Type the text for the message or news heading in the text box. To insert a diacritic character, click Diacritics. For information about inserting diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart. When you have finished with the message, press ENTER or select another message.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris PowerPAC can display approximately 150 characters and spaces in a single line for messages.

      +
    • +
    • +

      You can format messages to have up to four lines of text, with up to 250 characters. Use the tag <br/> to designate the start of a new line in the message. The formatting tags count against the 255-character maximum.

      +
    • +
    +

    Data Element Labels in PAC Search Results

    +

    If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, you can translate the labels that identify the data elements you have selected to display for title information or community information in PAC search results. For more information about selecting the data elements for the search results display, see also:

    + +

    Hours of Operation Message in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC

    +

    The message you specify here is displayed on the Polaris PowerPAC Hours page and the Mobile PAC Hours & Contact Info page. For more information about the PowerPAC Hours page, see Set Polaris PowerPAC features on the menu bar. For more information about the Mobile PAC Hours & Contact Info page, see Setting Up Mobile PAC Library Information.

    +
      +
    • +

      Choose a language - If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, select the language you want to edit in the Choose Language box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the message - Double-click the message field in the Display text column and type the message (up to 500 characters). You can insert diacritic characters in your message. Click Diacritics. In the Character Picker dialog box, select a graphic character set. Then select the character, and click Insert. For more information about inserting diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

      +
    • +
    +

    Dashboard Labels for Narrow Your Search & Related Searches Elements

    +

    The dialog box appears when you select an element and click Translate Label on the Narrow or Related Searches tabs of the Dashboards: Narrow your search & Related searches dialog box (PowerPAC profile or Community profile).

    +

    For PowerPAC information, see Translate labels for Narrow/Related Web parts (Polaris PowerPAC).

    +

    For Community information, see Translate Labels for Narrow/Related Web Parts (Community).

    +
      +
    • +

      Choose a language - If you have Polaris PowerPAC Multilingual Version, select the language you want to edit in the Choose Language box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the message - Double-click the message field in the Display text column and type the message (up to 50 characters). You can insert diacritic characters in your message. Click Diacritics. In the Character Picker dialog box, select a graphic character set. Then select the character, and click Insert. For more information about inserting diacritic characters, see Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Children_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Children_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..18d355c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Language_Strings_Dialog_Box_Children_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Language Strings Dialog Box (Children’s PAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Language Strings Dialog Box (Children’s PAC)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Children’s PAC, Multiple language strings.

    +

    Use this dialog box to edit or translate the names of search categories set up for Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. See Managing Search Categories.

    +
      +
    • +

      Translate a single category or target at the branch level - The dialog box opens when you click Translate on the Edit Category or Edit Children’s PAC Search Target dialog box. Select a language from the Choose Language box, then click the box in the language column next to the target or category name, and type the translation in the box. To insert a diacritic character, click Diacritics. See Translate a category or target. You can translate the category name and the category display message, and the target display name and the icon display name. For more information about the category display message, see Add a new category. For more information about the icon display name, see Add a new search target to a category.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Translate all categories and targets (system level) - The dialog box opens when you double-click the Children’s PAC profile Multiple Language Strings. Select a language from the Choose Language box, then click the box in the language column next to the name, and type the translation in the box. To insert a diacritic character, click Diacritics. See Translate all categories and targets. You can also edit the English names. Click the English word you want to edit, and type a new word over the old one.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Most_Popular_Sort_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Most_Popular_Sort_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e48c418b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Most_Popular_Sort_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + + Most Popular Sort Settings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Most Popular Sort Settings Dialog Box

    +

    To open the Most Popular Sort Settings dialog box, double-click the Most popular sort settings PAC profile at the System level.

    +

    Use the Most Popular Sort Settings dialog box to adjust the relevance factor applied when Most popular sorting is selected for the PowerPAC or Mobile PAC.

    +

    To adjust the default settings of 50/50 for % Popularity and % Relevance, click the up or down arrows, or click the slider and move it left or right. See Specify level of relevance applied to popularity sort.

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/New_and_Popular_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/New_and_Popular_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db70d6ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/New_and_Popular_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + New and Popular Titles Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New and Popular Titles Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Mobile PAC, New and Popular Titles.

    +

    These settings control the options available when the user clicks the New and Popular Titles link on the Mobile PAC home page.

    +
      +
    • +

      New at the Library - Select (check) the categories to include on the New and Popular page in Mobile PAC. When the patron clicks a New at the Library category, the search is launched for titles that have recently been added to your catalog. This feature uses the same processing as the New Titles Web part in Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When the Mobile PAC connection is to a branch, the patron sees only new titles for that branch. When the Mobile PAC connection is to the system, the patron sees new titles for the whole system.

    +
      +
    • +

      Best Seller Lists - Select (check) the categories to include on the New and Popular page in Mobile PAC. When a patron selects a title from one of these lists, a search for the title is launched in the Polaris database. The lists are updated automatically with content from IndieBound (formerly Book Sense), using the same process as Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Most Popular - Select (check) the categories to include on the New and Popular page in Mobile PAC. These categories use the same processing as the Most Circulated Web part in Polaris PowerPAC; that is, the Most Popular links launch searches for popular titles, authors, or subjects in the Polaris database, based on circulation statistics for the past 31 days.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Show on-order items - Select (check) this option to provide links that launch searches for titles in the Polaris database that have linked items with a status of On Order. This feature uses the same processing as the On-Order Items Web part in Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

      +
    • +
    +

    For more information about setting up Mobile PAC, see Setting Up Mobile PAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Limit_By_Display.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Limit_By_Display.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..71ee7d35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Limit_By_Display.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + PAC Limit By Display + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Limit By Display

    +

    To add an entry, click PRadminCat00429.gif

    +

    To modify an entry, click modbutton00430.gif

    +

    For information about using tables, see Working with Tables.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Login_Retries_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Login_Retries_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46c6a8f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PAC_Login_Retries_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + PAC Login Retries Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PAC Login Retries Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Login retries (system level only).

    +

    Use this dialog box to set a limit on the number of times a patron can attempt to log in to the PAC without success. At the first attempt, the system starts timing the attempts to log-in. When the limit has been reached or 5 minutes have passed from the first attempt with no successful log-in, a message appears and the patron must wait 5 minutes before trying to log in again. See Controlling Patron Account Login & Access.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable limits on login retries - Select (check) this option to limit log-in retries.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Number of retries allowed - Set the number of attempts allowed (5-99).

      +
    • +
    +

    These settings applies to the following PAC applications:

    +
      +
    • +

      Polaris PowerPAC - Main log-in page, hold request page

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition - Hold request page

      +
    • +
    • +

      Mobile PAC - Main log-in page

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Page_Header_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Page_Header_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98c7791e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Page_Header_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Page Header Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Page Header Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, PowerPAC Analytics, or Profiles, Mobile PAC, Mobile PAC Analytics.

    +

    Use this dialog box to customize the header for all PowerPAC pages. The profile is available at the system, library, and branch levels; the system uses the connection organization's settings.

    +
      +
    • Alternate logo (URL) -  Medium (tablet) and wide (computer) screens only. Specifies the location of your custom banner logo, if any, for Polaris PowerPAC pages. The maximum image width is 1500 pixels. The system scales the image for the medium display. If none is specified, the default banner logo is used.
    • +
    • Header logo and branch name alignment -  Medium (tablet) and wide (computer) screens only. Select Left, Center, or Right to position the logo and branch name in the header. The default position is center.
    • +
    • Exclude the branch name (logo only display - all widths) - If your logo image already includes your branch name, check this option  to suppress the branch name text string from the header. Narrow width display: When this option is checked, the logo is displayed in the narrow width header, appropriately scaled. If you leave this option unchecked, only the branch name is displayed in the narrow width header.
    • +
    • Return link URL for header logo - Narrow (phone), medium, and wide screens. Specifies the URL for the page that is displayed when the user clicks the header logo or branch name. If none is specified, the destination is the portal page if the organization uses this page, or the keyword search page if the portal page is not used.
    • +
    • Colors - Narrow, medium, and wide screens. Select (check) Customize background color, Customize branch name text color, or both. Then select the drop-down arrow for the selected option to access the color picker.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can suppress the branch name text from the header, which you may want to do if your logo image includes the organization name. See below.

    +
      +
    • Click a color, or click Other to open the color tool.
    • +
    • To select a color on the Standard tab of the color tool, click Select and click the color or gray-scale value.
    • +
    • Or click the Custom tab to select a color from a palette. Alternatively, you can type standard RGB values.
    • +
    +

    See Customize the page header.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72d6ec2e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Access Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Access Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    Open the Polaris Administration Explorer, select Profiles > PAC > Patron Access options.

    +

    Settings in the Patron Access Options dialog box control access to patron accounts and whether patrons can register and/or update their account information using Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. See Setting Patron Account Options.

    +

    Important:
    Set these options at the branch level. Although it is possible to open the Patron Access Options dialog box at the system and library levels, some functions include automatic e-mail to branch library staff, and these work properly only when you set them at the branch level.

    +

    Self-registration Tab +

    +

    Use the Self-registration tab to set up patron self-registration from the PAC:

    +
      +
    • +

      Allow patrons to register for a library account from the PAC - Select the Patron can self-register check box. The new record is blocked until it is verified by staff. See Resolve a Verify Patron block.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add the staff members who will receive emails when patron submit a self-registration form in PAC - Click Add and search for the staff member.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable a self-registration warning message - Select the Self-registration warning message enabled check box. Specify the message text with the PAC profile Multiple language strings. See Editing Messages and Labels.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display and require user-defined fields (UDFs) - Select the UDF Display subtab, and select the check box next to each UDF that your library wants to display on the Self-registration page in the PAC. If the field is required, select the Required check box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display and require patron custom data fields (PCDFs) - Select the Custom Field Display subtab, and select the check box next to each PCDF your library wants to display on the Self-registration page in the PAC. If an entry in the field is required, select the Required check box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Defaults Tab +

    +

    Use the Defaults tab to select the defaults that are assigned to patrons who self-register in the PAC:

    +

    Note:
    These are the default values initially assigned to the patron record for self-registered patrons. You can change the settings when the registration is reviewed.

    +
      +
    • +

      Patron code +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Language +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Statistical Class +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Expiration term - To set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Expiration term box, and type a number in the first box. To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Expiration term box, and choose a date from the calendar in the first box (or type the date using the mm/dd/yyyy format).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Address check term - To set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today), select months or years in the second Addr check term box, and type a number in the first box. To set a precise date, select exact date in the second Addr check term box, and choose a date from the calendar in the first box (or type the date using the mm/dd/yyyy format).

      +
    • +
    • +

      UDFs - To specify defaults for user-defined fields, select the UDFs tab and type or select a value.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Custom Fields - To specify defaults for patron custom data fields, select the Custom Fields tab and enter the default values.

      +
    • +
    +

    Log In Tab +

    +

    Use the Log In tab to set patron account log in options for the PAC:

    +
      +
    • +

      Patron can change password - Check this box to allow patrons to change their passwords online.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable staff override - Check this box to allow staff members to override a patron password so they can assist patrons who have forgotten their passwords.

      +
    • +
    • +

      PAC override password - If the Enable staff override box is checked, enter the staff override password.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable patron user name - Allows patrons to set up a user name online, and change it online if necessary. A patron can enter her user name instead of a barcode when logging in to use PAC functions such as viewing the patron account or placing a hold request (system level only).

      +
    • +
    • +

      E-mail forgotten password - Displays a Forgot password? link on the patron log-in page. When the patron clicks the link, an e-mail message containing the patron password is sent to both the primary and alternate e-mail addresses in the patron record. If no e-mail address is present in the patron record, the system displays an error message (system level only).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Passwords must be numeric only - This option is useful if you use Polaris Phone Attendant and allow patrons to log in by telephone to hear information about their accounts. If the option is checked, existing alphanumeric passwords will continue to work but the only numeric passwords are accepted when a new account is created or when a patron password is changed from the staff client or from PAC.

      +
    • +
    +

    Contact Info Tab +

    +

    Use the Contact Info tab to specify the contact information patrons can update via the PAC:

    +

    Note:
    Patrons use the Contact Information and Preferences form in PowerPAC and the Update Account and Preferences form in Mobile PAC to update their account information.

    +
      +
    • +

      Patron can request address change - Select this option to allow patrons to request mailing address changes online. This update request places a verification block on the patron account and an e-mail message is sent to the address specified on this tab.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron can change notification method - Select this option to allow patrons to change their notification method online. This option does not place a verification block on the patron account.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Confirmation e-mail to patron - Select to have the system send an acknowledgment message by e-mail to the patron when the he or she submits a request to change account information. When this option is enabled, a single e-mail message is sent soon after the patron clicks Submit Change Request. The message is sent to both the primary and alternate e-mail addresses. If the patron record does not have an e-mail address, no message is sent.

      +
    • +
    • +

      E-mail address - Change allowed - Select this option to allow patrons to change an e-mail address online, then select one of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron can submit change request - This option places a verification block on the patron account when the patron requests a change, and an e-mail message is sent to the address specified on this tab.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Patron can change without verification - This option allows a patron to change the e-mail address online without incurring a verification block.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Phone number - Change allowed - Select this option to allow patrons to change a contact telephone number online, then select one of the following options:

      +
        +
      • +

        Patron can submit change request - This option places a verification block on the patron account when the patron requests a change, and an e-mail message is sent to the address specified on this tab.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Patron can change without verification - This option allows a patron to change the phone number online without incurring a verification block.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable phone validation (system level only) - Specifies whether Polaris validates phone numbers when they are entered in the Update Preferences page in Polaris PowerPAC or Mobile PAC. Libraries that require their patrons to enter an initial 1 with the phone number should leave this option unchecked.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    In Mobile PAC, when validation is not enabled, each phone number option is one entry field, similar to Polaris PowerPAC. When validation is enabled, each phone number option has three entry fields (area code/prefix/four-digit number).

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable for patron codes - The patron codes for which the updates are allowed are selected. Select a patron code check box to allow updates or clear a check box to prevent updates.

      +
    • +
    • +

      E-mail to: Add - Select staff members to receive an e-mail message that a patron has updated a library account.

      +
    • +
    • If your library wants to allow patrons to opt out of reminder notices, select from the following options: Almost overdue/Auto-renew, Patron record expiration, Inactive patron
    • +
    +

    Preferences Tab +

    +

    Use the Preferences tab to: select the options to display for associated patrons; specify the user-defined fields (UDFs) and patron custom data fields (PCDFs) that patrons can update via the PAC; and specify whether the UDFs and PCDFs are required.

    +

    Note:
    Patrons use the Contact Information and Preferences form in PowerPAC and the Update Account and Preferences form in Mobile PAC to update their account information.

    +
      +
    • +

      To display information about associated patrons, select the Associated patrons box and the Show 'Block me' setting and/or Show 'Allow me' setting to display whether patrons are blocked when their associated patrons are blocked and/or whether the patron is permitted to pick up and check out items on hold for their associated patrons.

      +
    • +
    • To allow patrons to update UDFs, select the UDF Display tab, and select the UDFs. If the UDF is required, select the Required box.
    • +
    • +

      To allow patrons to update PCDFs, select the Custom Fields Display tab, and select the PCDFs. To change the required setting, select the PCDF, and click Change Required Status.

      +
    • +
    +

    Ask Us Tab +

    +

    Use the Ask Us tab to specify the email addresses for library staff members who receive questions from patrons:

    +

    Note:
    To provide this function to patrons, the PowerPAC profile Navigation: Ask Us must be set to Yes, and the Mobile PAC profile Navigation: Ask Us must be set to Yes.

    +
      +
    • +

      Click Add to search for and select the staff members who receive these emails.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To remove a staff member from the list so they no longer receive these emails, select the staff member and click Delete.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Renewal_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Renewal_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..960b9411 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Access_Renewal_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Patron Access Renewal Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Access Renewal Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Patron access: Renewal.

    +

    Settings in this dialog box control whether patrons can renew items from Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris Mobile PAC:

    +
      +
    • +

      Renewal permitted - When this option is set to checked, patrons can renew all or selected items from the Items Out page in the patron account. (When the profile is set to No, the renewal links are not displayed on the Items Out page.)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Allow renewal if patron registration will expire - This option is available if Renewal permitted is checked. Check this option if you want to allow renewals where the patron registration will expire before the renewal due date. If this option is selected, the renewal is allowed. If this option is not checked, the renewal is blocked and a message is displayed. The system uses the setting of the governing library for patron blocks.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Inactivity_Timeout_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Inactivity_Timeout_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ce01fe1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_Inactivity_Timeout_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Inactivity Timeout Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Inactivity Timeout Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Patron inactivity timeout.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set a period of inactivity after which a logged-in patron at an in-house workstation is automatically logged out. For more information, see Set an inactivity timeout for in-house workstations.

    +

    A logged-in patron’s activity consists of any of the following actions:

    +
      +
    • +

      Clicking Polaris product buttons

      +
    • +
    • +

      Clicking links

      +
    • +
    • +

      Clicking cover images

      +
    • +
    • +

      Clicking in the whites area of the PowerPAC portion of the browser window

      +
    • +
    • +

      (Credit card payment form only) Text entry

      +
    • +
    +

    When any of these actions occur, activity is registered and the inactivity timer is restarted.

    +

    Note:
    When a credit card payment is submitted, the Patron Inactivity Timeout value is calculated by adding it to the credit card gateway timeout set in the Credit Card parameter Online payments: Configure plus 90 seconds.

    +

    The settings in the Patron Inactivity Timeout dialog box apply only to in-house workstations. A workstation is typically considered to be in-house if it is registered in Polaris Administration (staff client workstations) or if the workstation’s IP address is listed in the In-House IP Addresses database table. If you use Polaris PowerPAC on workstations within the library and you are enabling the patron inactivity timeout, be sure to list them in the In-House IP Addresses database table.

    +
      +
    • +

      For information about registering client workstations in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up Workstations.

      +
    • +
    • +

      For information about listing PowerPAC workstations in the In-House IP Addresses database table, see Identifying In-House Computers.

      +
    • +
    • +

      You can determine whether the system checks both the In-House IP Addresses table and the registered workstations (the default setting), or only the In-House IP Addresses table, to determine whether a workstation is in-house. See Set criteria for determining in-house location.

      +
    • +
    +

    These settings do not apply to patrons who are not logged in or those working outside the library.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable patron inactivity timeout for in-house workstations - Click to enable the inactivity timeout.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Automatically log out after [20] minutes - Set the time after which the patron is logged out and the PowerPAC home page (or a page you specify) is displayed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      After logging out, return to - Specify the page to display after the inactivity period and automatic logout. You can select Default PowerPAC home page, or select URL and type the complete URL of the page that should be displayed (255 characters maximum).

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_eReceipts_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_eReceipts_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1be0a0b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Patron_eReceipts_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron eReceipts Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron eReceipts Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Patron eReceipts.

    +

    These settings allow patrons to choose to receive e-mail receipts, TXT receipts, or both for renewals from PAC. When enabled, the options are available from both patron self-registration and account updates from PAC.

    +

    Important:
    The patron’s registered branch must also enable eReceipts with the Patron Services parameter EReceipt options. See Setting Up eReceipts.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Portal_Page_Content_Carousels_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Portal_Page_Content_Carousels_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6233ad11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Portal_Page_Content_Carousels_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + + Portal Page Content Carousels Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Portal Page Content Carousels Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Portal page content carousels.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set up content carousels for the Polaris PowerPAC portal page. A content carousel is a rotating graphical representation of a list of materials in the local library catalog. The PowerPAC user can click any title in the carousel to launch a search for the title in the library catalog. See Content Carousels on the PowerPAC Portal Page.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable - Select (check) to enable content carousels for this organization.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a dashboard carousel - Select a dashboard (Web part) from the dashboard list and click Add New Dashboard Carousel. The selected dashboard appears in the Carousels list in the upper part of the dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a record set - Click Find. The Find Tool for bibliographic record sets opens. Search for the record set and select one or more record sets in the results lists. Right-click and choose Select from the context menu. The records set or sets you selected are displayed in the record set list. To create the carousel, select the record set in the list and click Add New Record Set Carousel. The selected record set appears in the Carousels list in the upper part of the dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Rename a carousel - By default, the carousel name is the name of the dashboard or record set. To assign a different display name for the PAC, select the carousel in the Carousels list. The name appears in the text box just below the list. Type the new name and click Rename.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order - If you have set up multiple carousels, you can set their display order in PowerPAC.  Select a carousel and click the up arrow to move it closer to the top of the list, or click the down arrow to move it closer to the bottom. The order of the list represents the display order in PAC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a carousel - Select the carousel in the carousels list and click the delete icon CarouselDelete.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Inherit settings from a parent organization - The top of the dialog box indicates the organization where the current carousel options have been set. To inherit the settings of the parent organization, click the up arrow at the top of the dialog box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PowerPAC_Mobile_PAC_Analytics_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PowerPAC_Mobile_PAC_Analytics_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..65669c02 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/PowerPAC_Mobile_PAC_Analytics_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + PowerPAC/Mobile PAC Analytics Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    PowerPAC/Mobile PAC Analytics Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, PowerPAC Analytics, or Profiles, Mobile PAC, Mobile PAC Analytics.

    +

    Google™ Analytics is a free tool from Google that allows Web site administrators to record and analyze traffic on their sites. Use this dialog box (Google tab) to enable Google Analytics for Polaris PowerPAC or Polaris Mobile PAC and supply your Google Analytics tracking code. Type only your specific Google tracking code; Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC pages already include the appropriate JavaScript.

    +

    Note:
    For Mobile PAC analytics, be aware that cell phones that do not support JavaScript ignore the JavaScript code, so these connections are not calculated in your site analysis.

    +

    You can use the same Google tracking code for PowerPAC and Mobile PAC, but you use the appropriate Polaris Administration profile for each application.

    +

    You can also supply your own custom JavaScript code (Custom tab) for analytics. See Managing Federated Search Targets  or Analyzing Polaris Mobile PAC Use.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_Mobile_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_Mobile_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..782f5ee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_Mobile_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Product Page Categories: Configure Dialog Box (Mobile PAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Product Page Categories: Configure Dialog Box (Mobile PAC)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Mobile PAC, Product page categories: Configure.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set the display order of links on the title (product page for a title in search results.

    +
      +
    • +

      Setting link order - The top portion lists the features that have been enabled for the organization. To change the display order, select the category and click the appropriate arrow at the side of the dialog box to move the category up or down in the display order.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Editing link labels - The dialog box lists the language string ID for each link for use in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), where you can search for and edit the link labels. For more information, see the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) Guide or Language Editor online Help.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enabling categories - The bottom portion of the Product Page Categories: Configure dialog box lists the features that are possible to display on the product page, but have not been enabled for the organization. For information about setting up the features that can be displayed on the product page, see the following topics:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enriched content from third parties - Enabling Enriched Data

      +
    • +
    • +

      Librarian’s View - Set the PowerPAC profile Librarian’s (MARC) View: Enable to Yes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Purchase/Buy It Now - Title Link: Purchase or Buy It Now

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_PowerPAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_PowerPAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..56273217 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Product_Page_Categories_Configure_Dialog_Box_PowerPAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + + Product Page Categories: Configure Dialog Box (PowerPAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Product Page Categories: Configure Dialog Box (PowerPAC)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Product page categories: Configure.

    +

    Use this dialog box to set the default state of categories (expanded or collapsed) on the Polaris PowerPAC product page for a title in search results, and determine the category display order.

    +
      +
    • +

      Setting display features - The top portion lists the categories (features) that have been enabled for the organization.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To set a category to be expanded in the initial product page display, check the category.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To change the display order, select the category and click the appropriate arrow at the side of the dialog box to move the category up or down in the display order.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Editing category labels - The dialog box lists the language string ID for each category label for use in Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin), where you can search for and edit the labels. For more information, see the Polaris Language Editor (WebAdmin) Guide or Language Editor online Help.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enabling categories - The bottom portion of the dialog box lists the categories that are possible to display on the product page, but have not been enabled for the organization. For information about setting up the features that can be displayed on the product page, see the following topics:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enriched content from third parties - Enabling Enriched Data

      +
    • +
    • +

      Map It - Map It (Google Maps) in PAC

      +
    • +
    • +

      Librarian’s View - Set the PowerPAC profile Librarian’s (MARC) View: Enable to Yes.

      +
    • +
    +

    For more information, see Configuring the PowerPAC Product Page.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Public_Access_Administration_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Public_Access_Administration_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..467bb6f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Public_Access_Administration_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Public Access Administration Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Public Access Administration UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Public Access Administration UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Purchase_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Purchase_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a26377dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Purchase_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purchase Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purchase Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Purchase options.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify the settings that give patrons the ability to purchase materials through the PAC. You can set up either or both of two features:

    +
      +
    • +

      You can set up Purchase links for titles in Polaris PowerPAC search results. When a patron clicks the link, a search for the title is launched at a specified online bookstore site. See Setting Up Purchase Links.

      +
    • +
    • +

      You can set up Polaris Bookstore by specific contract, and receive back a portion of the sales as a donation to the library. The patron can click a Buy It Now link for titles available at the Bookstore, or browse the Bookstore through a Shop Now link. See Setting Up Polaris Bookstore.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Generic Link tab - These settings control the Purchase link in the PAC. Select (check) Enable. You will need to search for a title on the vendor’s Web site to fill in the URL prefix (before ISBN) and URL suffix (after ISBN) boxes. For details, see Set up Purchase links.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Depending on the vendor’s search methods, you may not be able to extract the information from the URL at the vendor’s Web site. In this case, check the vendor’s online Help file or contact the vendor for instructions.

    +
      +
    • +

      Polaris Bookstore tab - Your Polaris Site Manager enters these settings after you have completed your Polaris Bookstore setup profiles. Contact your Polaris Site Manager for assistance. See Set up Polaris Bookstore.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Quick_Search_Button_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Quick_Search_Button_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc8e28de --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Quick_Search_Button_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + + Quick Search Button Configuration Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Quick Search Button Configuration Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles > PowerPAC > Quick search button configuration.

    +

    Use this dialog box to provide optional buttons with the quick search feature, instead of a search filter, on the Polaris PowerPAC portal page. The patron types the search text and selects a button to launch a particular type of search. You can offer the following search buttons:

    +
      +
    • +

      Anywhere +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Fiction +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Nonfiction +
      +

      +
    • +
    • +

      My Library +
      +

      +
    • +
    • +

      My Library plus Articles +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Subject +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Title +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Author +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Series 

      +
    • +
    +

    For the Subject, Title, Author, and Series buttons, you can specify whether a keyword or browse search is launched. See Customizing Portal Page Features.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable quick search buttons - Select this option to use quick search with search buttons. The remaining options become available for selection. If you select Enable quick search buttons but do not select any specific buttons, Polaris PowerPAC uses the default quick search feature instead of the quick search with options.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Search button options - Select each button option that you want to display for quick search. For each button you activate, select the search type (Browse or Keyword) that the button launches.

      +
      Notes:
      Selecting Anywhere, Fiction, Nonfiction, My Library, or My Library plus Articles always launches a keyword search. +
      • Anywhere looks for the search term in any indexed field.
      • Fiction and Nonfiction limit the keyword search by these options.
      • My Library searches your library system's entire database, but excludes articles from outside sources, such as EBSCO Discovery Service (EDS).
      • If your library subscribes to EDS and has integrated EDS with Polaris PowerPAC, selecting My Library plus Articles searches your library's database plus articles from EDS.
      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Recently_Viewed_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Recently_Viewed_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c234d1cd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Recently_Viewed_Titles_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Recently Viewed Titles Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Recently Viewed Titles Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Recently viewed titles.

    +

    The Recently Viewed Titles feature is displayed in the PowerPAC dashboard area on the product page for a title, and on any bibliographic record search and results page. When the user has viewed at least one product page for a title in the current session, the Recently Viewed Titles list displays the titles already viewed, including the cover image, title, author, format icon, and publication date. Use this dialog box to enable this feature by location and to set the maximum number of titles displayed.

    +
      +
    • +

      Check Enable for in-house workstations to make this feature available at workstations in the library. In-house workstations are defined by the settings in the organization’s PowerPAC profile In-house access definitions. If you have privacy concerns regarding in-house PAC workstations, leave this option unchecked.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Check Enable for remote access to make this feature available to users outside the library.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the maximum number of titles that should appear in the list. The maximum is 99; the default value is 5.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Related_Words_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Related_Words_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2b18624d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Related_Words_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Recently Viewed Titles Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Related Words Options Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Related words options.

    +

    When the Include related words feature is enabled, PowerPAC users can choose to add records containing related words as well as the literal typed search term to keyword and phrase search results. "Related words" include words formed from stemming (for example, regular plurals and verb endings such as walk, walks, walker, walked, walking, but not irregular forms such as mouse/mice or run/ran) and synonyms. Synonyms include common nicknames, proper name variations, and spelling variations. See Managing Federated Search Targets for details. Use this dialog box to enable this feature by connection organization and to set the maximum number of titles that can appear in a search results set and still display the Include related words link.

    +
      +
    • +

      Check Enable 'Include related words' link on keyword and phrase search results to make this feature available for PowerPAC keyword and phrase search results.

      +
    • +
    +
      +
    • +

      Specify the maximum number of titles that can appear in the results list and still display the Include related words link. The default value is 1,000.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    Be sure the value specified here does not exceed the number specified in the PowerPAC profile Result set: Maximum number of records to return for the same organization. If it does exceed Result set maximum, the link will never be suppressed.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Categorization_of_Target_Databases_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Categorization_of_Target_Databases_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a31830a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Categorization_of_Target_Databases_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remote Databases: Categorization of Target Databases Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remote Databases: Categorization of Target Databases Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Remote databases: Categorization of target databases.

    +

    Remote search targets can be searched simultaneously with the Polaris database. Use the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box to add search targets and organize the targets into display categories for the Polaris PowerPAC Select Databases lightbox. See Managing Federated Search Targets for details.

    +

    Note:
    You establish connections to remote resources, and make them available to organizations for selection, through Polaris Administration server settings. See Registering Remote Resource Servers.

    +

    In this dialog box, folder icons EsourceFolder00693.gif represent categories. Book icons EsourceBook00694.gif represent individual targets.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a category - Select (highlight) the folder to which you want to add a category. If you are adding a new category to the root level, select Root. If you are adding a subcategory to an existing category, select the existing category folder. Click Add Category. A new folder icon appears in the Category tree view, with the cursor positioned to name the folder. Type a category heading, and press ENTER.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy a category - Select the category in the Remote databases: Categorization of target databases dialog box, and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy, and click Paste. This procedure creates categories that are linked. When you copy categories, all subcategories and targets are copied, and all the copied subcategories and targets also become linked. Any change to one category is applied to all the linked categories. A linked category is indicated by a hand on the folder icon. To remove the link between categories, select the category you want to make independent, and click Unlink.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You cannot paste a copied category at the same level as the original category.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a target  -  Select the category to which you want to add the target, and click Add Target. The Add/Modify Target dialog box appears. In the target list, select the search target you want to add to the PAC display.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy a target - Select the target and click Copy. Then select the category where you want to place the copy of the target, and click Paste. You can use the Copy/Paste function to add a target to multiple categories. However, a single target cannot appear more than once at the same category level, unless the different instances of the target are in different subcategories.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a target - Select the target click Delete. (Deleting a target from a particular category, including Root, does not delete it from other categories.) The local Polaris database cannot be completely removed from the categorization dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order in the PAC - Select a category or target and click Up or Down. Repeat until the categories or targets are in the display order you want.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    In the PAC databases list, targets defined at the Root level are always displayed above any categories, and your local database is always displayed at the top of the list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Usage_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Usage_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3ceca01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Remote_Databases_Usage_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Remote Databases Usage Settings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Remote Databases Usage Settings Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Remote databases: Usage settings.

    +

    Use this dialog box to select individual remote databases for configuration, and to enable follow-on searching in Polaris PowerPAC. For details, see Remote Database Usage Settings for PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Database list - Select a database for which you want to set usage conditions, and click Configure Database.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enable follow-on search after zero hits in local database - Select (check) this option to enable follow-on searching in PowerPAC. When enabled, a prompt is displayed to the PowerPAC user for a follow-on search of databases pre-selected by the library, when a search of the local database returns no hits.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Show total hits in follow-on search databases - Select (check) this option to display a message if there are results in follow-on databases. The message displays the search link and the total number of hits found.  If no hits are found, no message is displayed. If there are results in the follow-on databases. When Show total hits in follow-on search databases is not checked, a message is always displayed and the user must click the link to determine if there are results in the follow-on databases.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Resource_Groups_Search_Results_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Resource_Groups_Search_Results_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3095e1a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Resource_Groups_Search_Results_Settings_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Resource Groups: Search Results Settings Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resource Groups: Search Results Settings Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Resource Groups: Search results settings.

    +

    These settings control when the eContent title is displayed in PAC search results for bibliographic records with Resource Entities that have associated Resource Groups. (PAC searches return all bibliographic records with no Resource Entities or where all Resource Entities have no Resource Groups associated with them.) For more information about eContent in PAC, see EContent Vendors and Polaris.

    +
      +
    • +

       Honor Resource Groups in PAC search results lists - Select (check) to have the system consider Resource Groups when displaying search results.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If you leave this option unchecked, the system ignores Resource Groups and Resource Entities. That is, all eContent titles show everywhere, regardless of connection branch, patron’s logged-in status, or presence of Resource Entities. The remaining options are not available for selection.

    +

    When you check Honor Resource Groups, the remaining options become available for selection. You must select at least one option.

    +
      +
    • +

      Before login option - To restrict the results to those associated with the Resource Groups of which the connection organization is a member, select (check) Before login show eContent available to connection branch.  If this option is checked and the patron searches at a branch that is not his or her registration branch, the patron may be restricted from checking out the title. If you leave this option unchecked and the patron is not logged in, no eContent titles appear in search results.

      +
    • +
    • +

      After login options - Select an option to control the display of eContent titles after the patron is logged in:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Connection branch - Select (check) to display eContent titles that are associated with the Resource Groups of which the connection organization is a member. If this option is checked, but the Registration branch option is unchecked, and the patron is logged in but is searching at a branch that is not her registration branch, titles that are available at the connection branch appear in the search results list but are not available to check out.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Registration branch - Select (check) to display eContent titles that are associated with the Resource Groups of which the patron’s registered branch is a member. If you select this option and the Before login option is checked, but Connection branch is not checked, titles may drop off the search results list when the patron logs in.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Although the Before login option is independent of the After login options, if you check Before login but do not select either After login option, you receive the following warning message, because in this case no eContent will be displayed after the patron logs in: Once a patron logs in, eContent will no longer appear in the PAC display. Please correct this problem by checking the connection branch check box and/or the registration branch check box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Agent_Parameters_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Agent_Parameters_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d639b7e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Agent_Parameters_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search Agent Parameters Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search Agent Parameters Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Parameters, PAC, Search agent parameters.

    +

    Using the search agent, registered patrons can save searches for scheduled automatic runs. Each time a saved search is run, the search looks for results that are new since the last run. The results are automatically sent to an e-mail address the patron specifies. See Setting Up Saved Searches in the PAC. Use this dialog box to set up and limit search agent searches:

    +

    Note:
    These settings apply to both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Number of Saved Searches - Specify the maximum number of searches a patron can have saved at a time.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Maximum Number of Search Results Returned - Specify the maximum number of titles after filtering for newness that any run of a saved search can return.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Number of Times to Run a Saved Search - Specify the maximum number of times a saved search can be run. Patrons can set the number of times to run a saved search, up to the maximum you specify with this setting.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Search frequencies - Select either or both of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Allow Weekly Searches - Offer the option of running a saved search weekly.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Allow Monthly Searches - Offer the option of running a saved search monthly.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Notification “from” Address - Type the address that should appear on the patron’s notification e-mail. The address can be a real or fictitious account, but it must contain the @ symbol.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    To turn on the search agent option in PAC, set the PAC profile Search Agent: Enable to Yes. This setting applies to both Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC. If you want logged-in patrons to see a list of their saved searches in the Polaris PowerPAC dashboard, set the PowerPAC profile Single Login: Enable to Yes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Settings_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Settings_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a0eeb583 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Search_Settings_Defaults_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + + + Search Settings Defaults Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Search Settings Defaults Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Search settings defaults.

    +

    Patrons can set various options for each type of search in Polaris PowerPAC. For example, for keyword searches, patrons can set a search field (Search by) and search filter (Limit by) for the search, and then sort the returned results by any of several options. Use this dialog box to specify default settings for search field, search filter, and sort order. Certain settings also apply to Mobile PAC, as noted below. For details, see Specifying Default Search Settings.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set quick search defaults - Click the Quick tab, then make the following settings:

      +
        +
      • +

        Search by - Select the default search field.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Limit by - Select the default search filter. The available search filters depend on the organization’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).

        +
      • +
      • +

        Sort by - Select the default sort order for search results.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Quick search settings also apply to Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Keyword, phrase, or exact search defaults - Click the appropriate tab, then make the following settings:

      +
        +
      • +

        Search by - Select the default search field.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Limit by - Select the default search filter. The available search filters depend on the organization’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).

        +
      • +
      • +

        Sort by - When searching local database only - Select the default sort order for local catalog search results.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Sort by - When at least 1 remote database is selected - Select the default sort order for searches that include at least one remote database. Most Popular and call number sorting options are not available for searches that include at least one remote database.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Advanced search defaults - Click the Advanced tab, then make the following settings:

      +
        +
      • +

        Search by - Select the default search field.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Limit by - Select the default search filter. The available search filters depend on the organization’s settings in the PAC Limit By Display policy table. See Setting Up Search Filters (Limit By).

        +
      • +
      • +

        Sort by - When searching local database only - Select the default sort order for local catalog search results.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Advanced search default settings for Search by, Limit by, and Sort by (local database only) also apply to Mobile PAC.

    +
      +
    • +

      Sort by - When at least 1 remote database is selected - Select the default sort order for searches that include at least one remote database. Most Popular and call number sorting options are not available for searches that include at least one remote database.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Show relational operators dropdowns - (PowerPAC Advanced only). Check this option to provide patrons a drop-down list of options for handling advanced search text entries with multiple words in a text field. For details, see Specifying Default Search Settings.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set Boolean search defaults - Click the Boolean tab, then make the following settings:

      +
        +
      • +

        Sort by - When searching local database only - Select the default sort order for local catalog search results.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Sort by - When at least 1 remote database is selected - Select the default sort order for searches that include at least one remote database. Most Popular and call number sorting options are not available for searches that include at least one remote database.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the browse search default - Click the Browse tab. Select the default search index in the Search by list, and the default sort order for titles associated with a heading in the Sort Title Results by list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the course reserve search default - Click the Course Reserves tab, and select the default search field in the Search by list. This option is available only if your system includes course reserve functions.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Availability_and_Requests_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Availability_and_Requests_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1938b666 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Availability_and_Requests_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + Suppress Availability and Requests Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppress Availability and Requests Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Suppress availability and requests.

    +

    Use this dialog box to suppress request and availability options in PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results for all records with a specific primary type of material (TOM), or only those with specific primary TOMs that have at least one 856$u in the bib record. By default, Electronic resources (elr) and Digital collection (dmc) are selected for suppressing request and availability options. The option Records with an 856 is selected by default except dmc, where All records is selected.

    +

    The ability to place requests and view availability information in PAC is suppressed under these conditions:

    +
      +
    • +

      The primary TOM is selected in this PAC profile. That is, either Records with an 856 or All records is selected for the TOM. Note that the option Records with an 856 affects only records with an 856$u tag.

      +
    • +
    • +

      At least one 856$u is present in the bib record (if you have selected Records with an 856 for that TOM)

      +
    • +
    • +

      The system availability count = 0 ; that is, there are no linked item records, or the linked item records all have Display in PAC set to No, or the linked item records all have circulation statuses that are set for suppression from the display in the PAC profile Suppress item display.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a bibliographic record has linked issue records (via the serial holdings record) but no linked item records, the issue records are factored into the availability count, so availability information is not suppressed in this case.

    +

    You can make these settings at the the system, library, or branch level. The setting of the PAC connection organization determines the effect on Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC.

    +

    For details regarding setup and how these settings may work with your cataloging practices, see Suppressing Request and Availability Options.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f0c6e064 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Branches_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Suppress Branches Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppress Branches Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Suppress branches.

    +

    Use this dialog box to select branches to suppress from list displays in PAC. For example, this feature is useful if you have a branch set up strictly for administrative purposes.

    +

    For Polaris PowerPAC, the selected branches are suppressed from the connection branch list (Switch to another branch), the list of branches on the Search Options scoping page, the list of branches on the Advanced Search scoping page, and the list of branches on the donations page.

    +

    For Polaris Mobile PAC, the selected branches are suppressed from the Library list (connection branch) on the Preferences page.

    +

    Note:
    As in previous versions of Polaris, use the Request parameter Holds options (Pickup tab) to include or suppress the branches available as pick-up library choices for hold requests placed through PAC.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Item_Display_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Item_Display_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..376e5d5e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Suppress_Item_Display_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Suppress Item Display Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Suppress Item Display Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PAC, Suppress item display.

    +

    Use this dialog box to specify item circulation statuses that should prevent an item from being displayed in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC search results. When a circulation status is selected, items with this status are not displayed in PAC even when Display in PAC is checked in the item record. The system uses the settings for the item’s assigned branch to determine whether a particular item should be displayed. See Suppressing Items from Search Results.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Tag_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Tag_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f8f90b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Tag_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + Tag Picker Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Tag Picker Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure
    Then select a display element (entity), right-click, and select Properties. On the Properties dialog box, click Define Entity, and click the ellipsis button in the Tag column for the tag (system level only).

    +

    Use this dialog box to edit tags for a selected entity. See the following topics for more information:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Assignment_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Assignment_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a9d08762 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Assignment_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Theme Assignment Dialog Box (Children’s PAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Theme Assignment Dialog Box (Children’s PAC)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Children’s PAC, Theme assignment.

    +

    Use the Theme Assignment dialog box to make themes available as choices from Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. You can assign the themes that are shipped with Polaris, or your own custom themes. For detailed procedures, see Assign themes. For more information about themes, see Managing Themes.

    +
      +
    • +

      Make a theme available for selection - Select the theme in the Unassigned Themes list, and click Assign.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove a theme from the list - Select the theme in the Assigned Themes list, and click Unassign.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Designate a theme as the default theme - Select the theme in the Assigned Themes list, and click Assign Default Theme.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To display the assigned themes as selections in the Children’s PAC, set the Children’s PAC profiles Select theme: Enable and Dashboards: Enable to Yes for the organization.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Construction_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Construction_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4c6985d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Theme_Construction_Dialog_Box_Childrens_PAC.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Theme Construction Dialog Box (Children’s PAC) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Theme Construction Dialog Box (Children’s PAC)

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, Children’s PAC, Theme construction.

    +

    Themes determine the page appearance (background, icons, and other page elements) of Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. Children can choose a theme from the options you specify. You can offer some or all the themes that are shipped with Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition, and you can develop your own themes. Use this dialog box to set up custom themes. For details, see Managing Themes. After the themes are defined, you make them available for use. See Assign themes.

    +

    Note:
    Themes are stored in folders that contain sets of image files and a style sheet (CSS) file. Each theme has a unique folder on the Web server (Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/language folder). If you are constructing your own theme, set up a unique folder for your files on the Web server, in Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/language folder.

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a new theme - Click Add. The Add/Edit Theme dialog box appears.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display Name - Identifies the theme in Polaris Administration profiles and on the Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition interface.

      +
    • +
    • +

      File Name boxes - For each page listed in the Description column, type the filenames for the page graphic elements and for the style sheet (also listed in the Description column). Type only the filenames. The system constructs the appropriate URL.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Default Image Path - Type the name of your custom theme folder. Type only the folder name. The system constructs the appropriate URL for the theme files to Polaris/PowerPAC/children/themes/language folder/your folder on the server, based on the theme folder you specify. All the files for the theme must be located in the same folder.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit a theme - Select the theme from the list in the Theme Construction dialog box, and click Edit. The Add/Edit Theme dialog box appears. You cannot edit the Polaris default themes. However, you can select a default theme (or any other theme), click Copy, and edit the copy.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a72902af --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Title_Display_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + + Title Display Configure Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Title Display Configure Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select one of the following:
    Profiles, PowerPAC, Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Mobile PAC
    , Title Display: Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (Mobile PAC): Configure
    Profiles, Community
    , Community Information Display (PowerPAC): Configure

    +

    You can select the data elements that appear in the brief, full, and summary displays views for monographic and serial titles in Polaris PowerPAC and Mobile PAC bibliographic search results, and for PowerPAC and Mobile PAC community information search results.

    +

    See also:

    + +

    Use the Title Display Configure dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Select a view to configure - From the Configuration view menu, select the view you want to configure. The specific brief, full, and summary view options depend on whether you are configuring bibliographic or community information search results.
    • +
    • Add an entity (data element) to the view - Select the entity in the Available entities list and click Add. The entity is moved to the Display these elements list.
    • +
    • Remove an entity from the view - Select the entity in the Display these elements list and click Remove. The entity is moved to the Available entities list.
    • +
    • View entity properties - To see what tags, indicators and subfields are included in an entity, hover the cursor over the entity for a quick view, select the entity and click the Properties icon TitleDisplayPropsIcon.gif , or right-click and select Properties from the context menu.
    • +
    • Browse for additional entities - If the Available Entities or Display these entities lists do not include the data element you want to display, click the Browse icon TitleDisplayBrwsIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities list. The Browse Entities dialog box opens. Select the entity you want to add to the Available entities list and click Reveal. The entity is added to the Available entities list.
    • +
    • Suppress entities - You can shorten the Available entities list to reduce scrolling. Select the entity that you want to remove, right-click and select Suppress from the  context menu, or click the Suppress icon TitleDisplaySuppressIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities list.
    • +
    • Suppress entities from small screen display - You can suppress bibliographic entities from the PowerPAC results display at mobile (650 px or narrower) width. This saves user data use and excessive scrolling through title information. Select the entity you want to suppress in the Display these entities list and click the phone icon at the top of the list.
    • +
    • Edit labels - Right-click the entity in the Available entities or the Display these entities list, and select Labels from the context menu, select Edit Labels from the Entity Properties dialog box, or click the Change Labels icon TitleDisplayChangeLabelsIcon.gif at the top of the Available entities or Display these entities list.
    • +
    • Set the display order - Select the entity or zone separator (represents white space in the display) and click the up or down arrow buttons at the top of the Display these entities list.
    • +
    • Insert a zone separator (white space) - In the Display these entities list, select the entity that should appear just below the new zone separator. Then right-click and select Create Zone from the context menu, or click the Create Zone icon TitleDisplayCreateZoneIcon.gif at the top of the Display these entities list.
    • +
    • Remove an existing zone separator - Select the zone separator, right- click and select Drop Zone from the context menu, or click the Drop Zone icon TitleDisplayDrZnIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Suppress a  label from display - Select the entity in the Display these entities list, right-click, and select Show/Hide Label from the context menu. In the Display these entities list, the label icon TitleDisplayLblIcon.gif indicates that the label is currently set to be shown.
    • +
    • Define a custom entity - Available at the system level for bibliographic entities only. Click the new entity icon TitleDisplayNewEnt.gif at the top of the Available Entities list. The New Custom Entity dialog box opens.
    • +
    • Description - Type a description for the entity. The description identifies the entity in the system, but does not display in PAC. Your description must contain at least one character and no more than 255 characters, and it must be unique within the set of bibliographic entities.
    • +
    • Initial Label - Type an initial label for the entity. The label will be displayed in PAC if this entity and its label are both set to display. Labels associated with custom entities do not have default values. The initial label that you specify is created for each language at the system level. You can later edit the label for specific languages; see Select bibliographic entities for display and edit labels.
    • +
    • Repeatable - Check if this entity is repeatable.
    • +
    • Define the tags, indicators, and subfields for the new entity - See Edit bibliographic information display order.
    • +
    • Delete a custom entity - You cannot delete a custom entity if it is currently used in any display configuration. Select the entity in the Available Entities list and click the delete icon TitleDispDelete.gif above the list. If the entity is currently in use, a message lists the configurations where it is used.
    • +
    • Copy a configuration - Click Copy. The Copy dialog box box opens. Select the configuration views you want to copy. Select the organizations that should receive your settings. Then click Copy.
    • +
    • Revert to parent organization settings - Click Revert on the Title Display Configure dialog box. Only the currently-selected configuration view is inherited from the parent organization. If you make changes after clicking Revert, then inheritance is broken and you will no longer inherit settings from the higher organization.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    When you click Revert, all branch-level configuration settings are lost.  The action cannot be undone.

    +
      +
    • Save or cancel your work:
      • To remove any changes that have not been applied and close the Title Display Configure dialog box, click Cancel.
      • To remove any changes that have not been applied and keep the Title Display Configure dialog box open, click Reset.
      • To permanently save changes and keep the Title Display Configure dialog box open, click Apply.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Virtual_Reference_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Virtual_Reference_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9edc51a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Virtual_Reference_Configure_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + + Virtual Reference Configure Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Virtual Reference Configure Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Virtual reference: Configure.

    +

    Use the Virtual Reference Configure dialog box to set up virtual reference services with specific providers. Specify settings only for the provider with which your library has a contract. Most of the settings are specific to your library; obtain them from your provider. See Setting Up Live Virtual Reference Services.

    +

    Note:
    To make virtual reference services available to patrons, you must also set the PowerPAC profile Virtual reference: Enable to Yes.

    +
      +
    • +

      Tutor.com tab - Use this tab to set up virtual reference services from Tutor.com (Virtual Reference Toolkit™). Type your Polaris PowerPAC home page URL in the View Port field. Obtain the other settings from Tutor.com.

      +
    • +
    • +

      QuestionPoint tab - Use this tab to set up virtual reference services from QuestionPointSM (OCLC Online Computer Library Center, Inc.).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Library ID, Category - Obtain these site-specific values from OCLC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Partner ID - Not used

      +
    • +
    • +

      Main URL that connects to the QuestionPoint virtual reference librarian.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Transcript URL - Not used

      +
    • +
    • +

      View Port - Your Polaris PowerPAC home page URL.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Log in required - If you want to restrict access to registered patrons, select (check) this option. If this option is not checked, a Guest button is displayed on the virtual reference log-in page. The user can click Guest to go straight to the QuestionPoint Web site and submit a question.

      +
    • +
    • +

      No Login URL - If you do not require log-in, type the QuestionPoint URL to which the Guest link should connect.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Page_-_Web_Part_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Page_-_Web_Part_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9afc225d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Page_-_Web_Part_Assignment_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Web Page - Web Part Assignment Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Web Page - Web Part Assignment Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Dashboards: Web Page/Web Part Assignment.

    +

    Web parts are displayed in the dashboard of the pages in Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. Different Web parts can be displayed on different pages. Use the Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box to assign specific Web parts to specific pages in Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. For more information about assigning Web parts, see Assign Web parts to public pages. For more information about Web parts and how to create them, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a Web part to a page - In the Web Pages list, select the public page to which you want to assign Web parts, and click Add. The Web Page - Add Web Parts dialog box appears. It lists all the Web parts created for the system but not currently assigned to the page you selected in the Web Page - Web Part Assignment dialog box. Simply select the Web parts you want to assign to the Web page, and click OK.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris PowerPAC pages - See Polaris PowerPAC Pages Reference for information about each page.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition pages - See Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition Pages for information about each page.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the display order of Web parts on the page - The order of the Web parts in the Assigned Web Parts list for a selected page determines the display order in the dashboard for the page.  To change the position of a Web part in the dashboard, select the Web part in the Assigned Web Parts list, and click Up or Down.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Part_Editor_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Part_Editor_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d47de83a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRadminPub/Web_Part_Editor_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + + Web Part Editor Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Web Part Editor Dialog Box

    +

    To open this dialog box:
    In Polaris Administration, select Profiles, PowerPAC, Dashboards: Web part construction.

    +

    Web parts are displayed in the dashboard of the pages on Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. They can provide links to pre-defined searches or Web sites, or deliver messages or instructions. Use the Web Part Editor dialog box to create your own Web parts and to limit lists in automatic Web parts. For details, see Defining Web Parts for Dashboards. After you create Web parts, you assign them to specific pages in Polaris PowerPAC and Polaris PowerPAC Children’s Edition. See Assign Web parts to public pages.

    +

    Polaris and 3rd Party Tab

    +

    Use this tab to limit the length of lists that appear for Polaris and third-party Web parts. For more information about these, see Automatic Web Parts and Best-Seller Lists from IndieBound (Book Sense, Inc.). Simply type the number of items (elements) in the Total Listing Rows box to display for the selected list. Type zero (0) in the Total Listing Rows box to display all items available for the automated list. For the Web part New Titles, a setting of 0 in the Total Listing Rows box will display all titles added in the past 31 days.

    +

    User Defined Tab

    +

    Use this tab to set up your own Web parts. Several types are available. For information about these types, see Custom Web Parts. For detailed procedures, see Create a custom Web part.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set up a new Web part - Click Add by the Web Parts list. The Add/Edit Web Part Title dialog box appears. Type the heading text in the Title box, and click OK. The heading for the new Web part is displayed in the Web Parts list. To edit the heading, select it and click Edit.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add elements to a Web part - Select the Web part in the Web Parts list, and click Add by the Data Elements list. The Add Data Element: Pick Type dialog box appears. Select the type of element to add.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can add any combination of elements to a Web part.

    +
      +
    • +

      Title Search – Puts a title link in the list. When a patron selects the title in the list, the title information is displayed in the search results. In the Add Title Search Element dialog box, type the bibliographic control number of the title, or select the title from the Polaris Find Tool results list (click Find to display the Find Tool).

      +
    • +
    • +

      URL – Puts a link to a Web site or page in the list. When a patron selects the link, the browser displays the destination page. In the Add URL Element dialog box, type the link text in the Title box, and type the uniform resource locator (address) in the URL box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Free Text – Puts text in the list. Use free text for announcements, page instructions, or for introducing the list.  In the Add Free Text Element dialog box, type the text of the announcement or message you want to display. You can use basic HTML tags to format the text.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_Course_Reserve_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_Course_Reserve_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9accf5e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_Course_Reserve_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add to Course Reserve Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add to Course Reserve Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Add to Course Reserve dialog box, select an item in the Find Tool results list, right-click and select Add to Course Reserve Record, or from the Item Record workform, select Tools, Add to Course Reserve Record. Use the Add to Course Reserve dialog box to place an item on reserve. The dialog box has two tabbed views: the Course and Item view and the Disposition view. See Borrow By Mail Circulation for detailed information.

    +

    Add to Course Reserve - Course & Item Tab

    +

    Use the Add to Course Reserve - Course and Item tab to:

    +
      +
    • Search for and select the course for which the is item reserved - Click Find Course to open the Find Tool and search for the record.
    • +
    +

    Add to Course Reserve - Disposition Tab

    +

    Use the Add to Course Reserve Disposition tab to:

    +
      +
    • Specify holds information - Select Holdable if the item can be placed on hold, and select from the options for holds.
    • +
    • Indicate if the item should be purchased - Select Purchase to indicate that the library may wish to purchase copies of an item, if it is instructor-owned, or additional copies of a library-owned item. This option is a reminder. It does not initiate automatic purchase order functions.
    • +
    • Specify that the item can be checked out, but cannot be removed from the library - Select Limit the item to in-library circulation only.
    • +
    • Indicate the copyright information for the course material - If the material is copyrighted, and there is a fee, you can indicate that the fee was paid. Select CCG (Copyright Compliance) for photocopied journal articles if the article is dated within the last five years, and your library does not own the journal title, and this is the fifth or fewer request made for this item within the current calendar year. Select CCL (Copyright Compliance) for all photocopies that do not fall under CCG; for example, if the article is older than five years, or your library owns the journal title, or this is the sixth or greater request within the calendar year and your library is paying royalties to the Copyright Clearance Center or a document delivery vendor.
    • +
    • Specify the item’s owner - Select Library (Copy owner) to indicate that the library (not the instructor) owns the item. Select Instructor (Copy owner) to indicate that an instructor (not the library) owns the item.
    • +
    +

    Linked Course Reserve Item Information Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Course Reserve Item Information dialog box appears when you right-click an existing item record listed on the Course Reserve workform, Items view, and select Edit Linked Information. Use this dialog box to edit the information that appears on the Reserves view of the Item Record workform for the item you select. See Borrow By Mail Circulation for detailed information.

    +

    Use the Linked Course Reserve to:

    +
      +
    • Change the start and end dates for the reserved item - The course reserve information on the bottom of the Reserve view of the Item Record workform is updated.
    • +
    • Enter a note - The note appears at the bottom of the Reserve view of the Item Record workform
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b8d46f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Purchase_Order_Dialog_Box1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add to New or Existing Purchase Order Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add to New or Existing Purchase Order Dialog Box

    +

    When you select records in a bibliographic record set to bulk add to a purchase order, you can choose to add them to a new or existing purchase order. See Creating Purchase Orders.

    +
      +
    • If you choose New, the Add to New Purchase Order dialog box appears.
    • +
    • To use a template, click Find next to the Order template box, and use the Find Tool to locate and select a template from the list. The PO number, suffix, ordered at location, supplier, order type, and payment method are defined in the template.
    • +
    • If you are not using a template, specify the PO number, suffix, ordered at location, order type, and payment method. Click Find next to the Supplier box to search for and select a supplier.
    • +
    • If you choose Existing, the Add to Existing Purchase Order dialog box appears. On the Add to Existing Purchase Order dialog box, the information in the header is already filled in and cannot be changed.
    • +
    • Defaults are used to substitute for missing data in the bibliographic records, if your system administration parameter is set to use these defaults. See Set bulk add to use default data in purchase orders . The error report lists the records where substitutions were made.
    • +
    • Enter defaults in the Material type, List price, Discount, Quantity, Collection, and Destination boxes.
    • +
    • Click Find next to the Fund box to locate the default fund.
    • +
    • Type the name for the error report, or click Browse to locate the report file.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b27148b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Add_to_New_or_Existing_Selection_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add to New or Existing Selection List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add to New or Existing Selection List Dialog Box

    +

    When you select records in a record set to bulk add to a selection list, you can choose to add them to a new or existing selection list. See Create a selection list by bulk adding titles.

    +
      +
    • If you choose Existing, the Add to Existing Selection List dialog box appears. The information in the header is already filled in and cannot be changed.
    • +
    • If you choose New, the Add to New Selection List dialog box appears. Type the list name and select the library name.
    • +
    • Defaults are used to substitute for missing data in the bibliographic records if your system administration parameter is set to use these defaults. See Set bulk add to use default data in selection lists.
      • Enter defaults in the Quantity, Material Type, Destination, and Collection boxes.
      • Click Find next to the Fund box to locate the default fund.
      • Type the name for the error report, or click Browse to locate the report file.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Create_Links_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Create_Links_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d437325 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Create_Links_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Create Links Queue Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Create Links Queue Dialog Box

    +

    The Authority Create Links Queue box lists jobs that create new links to authority records from other unlinked bibliographic records or other authority records. For more information on creating and updating links, see Create links from authority records to other records.

    +

    The columns in the list box list the following information:

    +
      +
    • The control number of the authority record to which the new links are made.
    • +
    • The heading count of the bibliographic records that have been linked to the authority record.
    • +
    • The reference count of the authority records that have been linked to the authority record.
    • +
    • The status of the job, and the date and time that the job was run.
    • +
    +

    Use the Authority Create Links Queue list box to:

    +
      +
    • Print a log or report - Select a job in the list, right-click and select Print Report, select File > Print, or click logicon.gif. The report appears in the Report Preview window. Click PrinterIcon.gif to print the report.
    • +
    • Delete one or more jobs - Select the completed jobs in the list, right-click and select Delete, select File > Delete, or click deleteicon.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Deletion_Options.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Deletion_Options.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a6ffc4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Deletion_Options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Record Deletion Options + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Record Deletion Options

    +

    The Authority Record Deletion Options dialog box appears when you select File, Delete on the Authority Record workform. See Delete bibliographic or item records for detailed instructions.

    +

    Use the Authority Record Deletion Options dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Delete the heading and tag in linked bibliographic records - Select Delete linked headings (bibliographic).
    • +
    • Delete the linked authority headings - Select Delete linked headings (authority).
    • +
    • Break links to any bibliographic headings linked to the authority record - Select Unlink headings (bibliographic). The heading remains in the bibliographic record as an unauthorized heading.
    • +
    • Break links to any authority records linked to this authority record - Select Unlink headings (authority).
    • +
    • Convert the 5XX tag in linked authority records to a 4XX tag - Select Flip the linked authority headings. Selecting this option converts the 5XX tag (See Also From reference) in the linked records to a 4XX (See reference). The Flip linked headings option is available only when an authority record is linked to the authority record you are deleting.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8d65cd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Record Workform

    +

    To access the Authority Record workform, select Cataloging, Authority Records. Use the Authority Record workform to create new authority records or edit existing records. You can also automatically check MARC format and headings, and check for duplicate records.

    +

    The Authority Record workform header contains the control number, record status (final or provisional), and heading. Below the header is the MARC data for the authority record. See Creating MARC Records.

    +

    Use the toolbar on the Authority Record workform to:

    +
      +
    • Print the authority record - Select File > Print and select the type of information to print. You can also click btnPrint00632.gif to print the currently displayed record, or click the arrow next to the printer icon to select the other views to print.
    • +
    • Create an authority record - On a blank authority record workform, type information in the bottom section of the workform, and save the record. On an existing authority record, select File > New or click btnNew.gifto create a new bibliographic record. See Creating MARC Records.
    • +
    • Validate the MARC format of the record - Select Tools > Check MARC format, or click validate_button00633.gif. See Checking MARC Format.
    • +
    • Check for duplicate records - Select Tools > Check duplicates, or click dupdetcbutton00634.gif. See Checking for Duplicate Records
    • +
    • Check See Also From references - Select Tools > Check See Also From References, or click chckseeicon.gif.  See Checking Authority Headings.
    • +
    • Check for linked records - Select Tools > Check for Linked Records.
    • +
    • View linked bibliographic records - Select Tools > Show Linked Bibliographic Records or click authbiblink.gif.
    • +
    • View linked See Also From records - Select Tools > Show Linked See Also From References.
    • +
    • Create links to bibliographic records - Select Tools > Create Links to Bibliographic records. If there are possible bibliographic records that are unlinked to authority records, and this authority record could be linked, a list of the unlinked records appears.
    • +
    • Create links to other authority records - Select Tools > Create Links to Authority Records.
    • +
    • Sort the fields in the MARC data - Select Tools > Sort.
    • +
    • Use a macro - Select Tools > Macro to display the Macros tool bar.
    • +
    • To apply a macro, select a macro name in the Macros list and click kRunMacroBtn00635.gif (Run Macro). See Apply a macro.
    • +
    • To record a macro, click kRecordMacroBtn00636.gif (Record Macro). See Record a macro.
    • +
    • Delete an authority record.
    • +
    • Add a new field or subfield to the record. See Insert a subfield in a MARC record.
    • +
    +

    Use the MARC Editor section of the Authority Record workform to enter MARC data:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Template_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Template_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9deb3f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Template_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Template Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Template Workform

    +

    Authority templates help you create new authority records quickly. The information in the authority template is carried into all authority records created with the template. For example, if in the authority template you create a MARC 21 100 tag for Mark Twain (100 10 ‡aTwain, Mark ‡d1835-1910.‡tWorks.‡f1972.), a new authority record based on the template would have the same information in the 100 tag. The information can then be edited if it is not applicable to the new record. You create authority templates the same way you create authority records. See Creating MARC Records for detailed information about the Authority Record workform.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Update_Links_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Update_Links_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f50eb7a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Authority_Update_Links_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Authority Update Links Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Authority Update Links Queue

    +

    The Authority Update Links Queue list box lists jobs that update links to authority records from other unlinked bibliographic records or other authority records. For more information on creating and updating links, see Create links from authority records to other records.

    +

    The columns in the list box list the following information:

    +
      +
    • The control number of the authority record to which the updated links are made.
    • +
    • The heading count of the bibliographic records that have been linked to the authority record.
    • +
    • The reference count of the authority records that have been linked to the authority record.
    • +
    • The status of the job, and the date and time that the job was run.
    • +
    +

    Use the Authority Update Links Queue list box to:

    +
      +
    • Print a log or report - Select a job in the list, right-click and select Print Report, select File > Print, or click logicon00656.gif. The report appears in the Report Preview window. Click PrinterIcon00657.gif to print the report.
    • +
    • +

      Delete one or more jobs - Select the completed jobs in the list, right-click and select Delete, select File > Delete, or click deleteicon00658.gif.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Bulk_Change_Job_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Bulk_Change_Job_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67c38fd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Bulk_Change_Job_Queue_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Bulk Change Job Queue Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Bulk Change Job Queue Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Bulk Change Job Queue dialog box, select Utilities > Cataloging Processing > Bibliographic Bulk Change Queue. It displays the bulk change jobs, the total number of records, the status of the job, and the date it was posted. For more information on bulk changing bibliographic records, see Changing Multiple Bibliographic Records.

    +

    Use the Bibliographic Bulk Change Job Queue list box to:

    +
      +
    • View the bibliographic bulk change jobs - Click on column headers to sort the list.
    • +
    • Delete a pending or completed bulk change job - Select a job in the list and click Delete. If you delete a pending job, the bulk changes are not processed. You cannot cancel or delete a bulk change job that is running. After a job is deleted, you cannot run reports on that bulk change job.
    • +
    • Print the Bibliographic Bulk Change Report - Select File > Print > Current View or List View.
    • +
    • Preview the Bibliographic Bulk Change Report - Select File > View Report to open the report in the Preview window.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_006_Tag_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_006_Tag_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b891a1f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_006_Tag_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - 006 Tag Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - 006 Tag Tab

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box, select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple bibliographic records. Click the tabs on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all bibliographic records in the record set. For more information on using the 006 Tag tab of the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, see Bulk change the 006 tag in bibliographic records.

    +

    Use the 006 Tag tab to make the following changes to the 006 tags in all the bibliographic records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Insert or replace an entire 006 tag - Select Insert or Replace, select the form of material code in the (00) box, and click Define. In the dialog box that appears, select the appropriate codes from the lists. Click OK when you are finished defining the character positions. If you are inserting a tag, select As first if you want the tag to be the first 006 tag, or As last if you want the tag to be the last 006 tag. If you are replacing a specific 006 tag, select First or Last.
    • +
    • Delete a specific tag - Select Delete, select the value that matches the 006 tag you want to delete, and select First instance or All instances.
    • +
    • Change a specific value in the Form of material code - Select the check box that corresponds to the form of material to change, for example Books. Select the value to change in the From box, and the new value in the To box. Click OK.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_007_1_or_007_2_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_007_1_or_007_2_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..948b3c50 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_007_1_or_007_2_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - 007 (1) or 007 (2) Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - 007 (1) or 007 (2) Tab

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box, select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple bibliographic records. Click the tabs on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all bibliographic records in the record set. For more information on using the 007(1) or 007(2) tab, see Bulk change the 007 tag in bibliographic records.

    +

    Use the 007 (1) or 007 (2) tabs to make the following changes to the 007 tag in all the bibliographic records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Insert or replace an entire 007 tag - Select Insert or Replace, select the category of material code in the (00) box, and click Define. In the dialog box,  select the appropriate codes from the lists, and click OK. If you are inserting a new 007 tag, select As first if you want the tag to be the first 007 tag, or select As last if you want the tag to be the last 007 tag. If you are replacing a specific 007 tag, select First or Last.
    • +
    • Delete a specific 007 tag - Select Delete and select the value that matches the 007 tag you want to delete. Select First instance to delete only the first 007 tag that contains that value, Last instance to delete the last occurrence of the tag, or All instances to delete all 007 tags with this value.
    • +
    • Change a value - Select the check box that corresponds to the category of material you want to change, for example Video recording (007 Tag 2 tab). Click the From button and select the value to change from the dialog box. In the To box, select the value to put in this position.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_008_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_008_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e994a707 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_008_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - 008 Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - 008 Tab

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box, select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple bibliographic records. Click the tabs on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all bibliographic records in the record set. See Bulk change the 008 tag in bibliographic records.

    +

    Use the 008 tab to make the following changes to the 008 tag in all the bibliographic records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Select the check box that corresponds to the 008 tag you want to change.
    • +
    • Click From and select the values you want to change in the Bulk Change 008 -- (From) dialog box.
    • +
    • Click To and select the values you want to replace the existing 008 values. Select Replace to replace the whole tag.
    • +
    • Click Help on the fixed fields dialog box for specific information about the field.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Data_Fields_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Data_Fields_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ef98f06a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Data_Fields_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Data Fields Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Data Fields Tab

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog box, select Tools > Bulk Change, or click on a record set containing multiple bibliographic records. Click the tabs on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. For more information on using the Data Fields tab on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, see Bulk change data fields in bibliographic records.

    +

    Use the Data Fields tab to make the following changes to specific tags, indicators or subfields in all the bibliographic records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Insert a new tag - In the Operation box, select an option to insert a new tag, then specify the tag, indicator, and subfield. Click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    • Insert a subfield in a tag - In the Operation box, select an option to insert a subfield in any location within an existing tag, or before or after a specific subfield. Specify the tag where to insert the subfield and the subfield to insert. Click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    • Delete a tag - In the Operation box, select an option to delete the first instance of a tag, delete the last instance of a tag, or delete all instances of a tag. Specify the tag to delete, and click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    • Delete a subfield - In the Operation box, select an option to delete a subfield with any data, with specific data, or the last instance of the tag and subfield. Specify the subfield to delete, and click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    • Change a specific tag - In the Operation box, select an option to change a specific tag’s number, change a subfield code, or replace data in the subfield. Specify the tag and subfield code. If you chose to replace data, specify the old data and the new data to put in its place. Click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    • Correct non-filing indictors - In the Operation box, select the option to correct the non-filing indicators, (a, an, or the).
    • +
    • Change a tag’s indicator only - In the Operation box, select the option to change a specific tag’s indicator. This will change the tag’s indicator without changing the data in the tag. Specify the tag and the indicator to change. Click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    • Add changes to queue - When you are finished with all the data field changes, click Add Change to Queue.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Leader_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Leader_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..03786f68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Leader_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Leader Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Leader Tab

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog box, select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple bibliographic records. Click the tabs on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. For more information on using the Leader tab on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, see Bulk change the Leader in bibliographic records.

    +

    Use the Leader tab make the following changes in all bibliographic records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change specific positions of the Leader -
      • Select the box next to the position of the Leader.
      • Select the value to change in the From box and the new value in the To box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Non-MARC_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Non-MARC_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4adcd3b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Non-MARC_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Non-MARC Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

     Bibliographic Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Non-MARC Tab

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record Bulk Change dialog box, select Tools > Bulk Change, or click bulkchicon.gif on a record set containing multiple bibliographic records. Click the tabs on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all bibliographic records in the record set. For more information on using the Non-MARC tab on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box, see Bulk change non-MARC data in bibliographic records.

    +

    Use the Non-MARC tab of the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box to make the following changes to the bibliographic records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change the setting for displaying records in the PAC - Select the Display in PAC box to change the setting in all the records, and select On or Off.
    • +
    • Change the records’ owner - Select Record Owner, and select the owner to change in the From and the new owner in the To box.
    • +
    • Change provisional bibliographic records as final - Select the Save provisional records as final box.
    • +
    • Create resource entities - This option is used to create resource entities for eContent bibs to link them to eConent vendor accounts. See Resources Entities for Non-Integrated EContent Vendors.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9435746 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Workform

    +

    To access the Bibliographic Record workform, select Cataloging, Bibliographic Records or press F12, and search for the record. Use the Bibliographic Record workform to create new bibliographic records, edit existing records, check MARC format, check headings, detect duplicates, and create item records. The Bibliographic workform header is located above the bibliographic information, and does not change when you change the workform’s view.

    +

    The Bibliographic Record workform header includes the following read only information:

    +
      +
    • Control number +
    • +
    • Owner +
    • +
    • Items - The number of linked items.
    • +
    • Record status +
    • +
    • Title +
    • +
    +

    If you have the appropriate permissions, you can select or clear the Display in PAC check box or the Do not overlay check box. If the Display in PAC box is checked, the title displays in the PAC. If the Do not overlay box is checked, the bibliographic record cannot be overlaid during automatic processing, such as importing or duplicate detection.

    +

    The ILL check box is checked if the bibliographic record is an interlibrary loan bib, and the Host box is checked if the bib is the host record in a bound-with group.

    +

    If the Bibliographic record Do not overlay feature enabled parameter is set to Yes, the Do not overlay check box appears in the header.

    +

    From the Bibliographic workform, you can do the following:

    +
      +
    • Create a new bibliographic record - On a blank bibliographic workform, type information in the bottom section of the workform, and save the record. On an existing bibliographic record, select File > New to create a new bibliographic record. See Creating MARC Records.
    • +
    • Search for another existing bibliographic record - Select File > Open to open the Polaris Find Tool and search for another bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Print the bibliographic information - Select File > Print and select the type of information to print. You can also click btnPrint.gif to print the currently displayed record, or use the arrow next to the printer icon to select the other views to print (Current view, List view, Bibliographic Full, Bibliographic Brief).
    • +
    • Delete the bibliographic record - Select File > Delete or click DeleteButton.gif.
    • +
    • Check authority headings - Select Tools > Check Authority Headings. See Checking Authority Headings.
    • +
    • Validate the MARC format of the record - Select Tools > Check MARC format. See Checking MARC Format.
    • +
    • Check for duplicate records - Select Tools > Check duplicates. See Checking for Duplicate Records.
    • +
    • Create linked item records - Select Tools > Create > Item Record. See Creating Item Records.
    • +
    • See all linked item records - Select Links > Item Records, press Ctrl+T. If there are multiple item records, they appear in the Linked Item Records dialog box. Double-click an item to open it in the Item Record workform.
    • +
    • Place a hold on the title - Select Tools > Place Hold. See Placing Hold Requests.
    • +
    • Go to existing linked records - Select Links > Existing, and select the type of record to open. If there are several linked records, they appear in the Linked Records dialog box. You can right-click the listed records and perform various functions. The options available on the context menu depend on the type of record.
    • +
    • Sort the fields in the MARC data - Select Tools > Sort.
    • +
    • Use a macro - Select Tools > Macro to display the Macros tool bar.
      • To apply a macro, select a macro name in the Macros list and click kRunMacroBtn.gif (Run Macro). See Apply a macro.
      • To record a macro, click kRecordMacroBtn.gif (Record Macro). See Record a macro.
    • +
    • View or enter MARC data. See Bibliographic Record Workform - MARC 21 View.
    • +
    • View how the title appears in the PAC - Select View > PAC . See Bibliographic Workform - PAC View.
    • +
    • View the statistics about the title -Select View > Statistics to view historical information. See Bibliographic Workform - Statistics View.
    • +
    • View the resource entity for the bibliographic record - Select View > Resources. Resource entities are created if the bibliographic record is for an eContent or another electronic resource linked to a Vendor Account record. See Bibliographic Workform - Resources View.
    • +
    • View the links for a Bound-with group - Select View > Bound-with.
    • +
    • View usage statistics - Select Tools > Show Usage Statistics to open a window that shows the brief display of the record, the circulation statistics for all items linked to the bibliographic record, and a list of all item records that are linked to the bibliographic record.
    • +
    • View the bibliographic record’s properties - Select File > Properties. The Bibliographic Record Properties window appears with two tabs—General and About. The General tab displays MARC information such as the title, author, publisher, publication date, format, and language. It also lists the number of linked items and the number of holds. The About tab displays information about the record such as the creator, the creation date, the last modified date, the import date and import file (if the record was imported), the first available date, and circulation statistics.
    • +
    +

    Bibliographic Record Workform - MARC 21 View

    +

    Use the MARC 21 view to enter MARC data. Type title information in the bottom section of the workform. See Editing MARC Records.

    +

    Tips:
    For shortcut keys, see MARC Editor (Keyboard).
    See Fixed Fields Reference for a list of dialog boxes to help you enter the Leader and fixed fields.
    Enter diacritics by selecting them from a dialog box. See Choose characters/diacritics from a chart.
    Enter data in the 006 or 007 tag by double-clicking the tag, or pressing Ctrl + E. See Add 006 and 007 fixed fields.
    To enter a subfield delimiter A separate character used in conjunction with a subfield code and introduces each subfield in a variable field., press Ctrl+Q.

    +

    Bibliographic Workform - PAC View

    +

    Use the PAC view to preview the title information as it would appear in the PAC. The PAC view shows the title as it appears in the PAC except that some tasks that are available in the PAC, such as searching for other records, are unavailable in this view.

    +

    Bibliographic Workform - Statistics View

    +

    Use the Statistics view to see the number of item records that are linked to the bibliographic record, the first available date, the number of holds, and the circulation statistics.

    +

    Bibliographic Workform - Resources View

    +

    Use the Resources view to view the resource entities for this bibliographic record. Resource entities are created if the bibliographic record is for an eContent or other electronic resource linked to a Vendor Account record. See Resource Entities.

    +

    Bibliographic Record Workform - Bound-With view

    +

    Use the Bound-With view to see Host or Constituent links if the title is part of a bound-with group. See Cataloging Bound-With Materials.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Records_Automatic_Display_in_PAC_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Records_Automatic_Display_in_PAC_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fefffcb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Records_Automatic_Display_in_PAC_Processing_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Bibliographic Records: Automatic Display in PAC Processing Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Records: Automatic Display in PAC Processing Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Bibliographic records: Automatic display in PAC processing dialog box, open the Administration Explorer at the System level, select Profiles, select the Cataloging tab and double-click on the Bibliographic records: Automatic Display in PAC processing profile.

    +

    Use the Bibliographic records: Automatic display in PAC processing dialog box to:

    +

    Suppress the display of bibliographic records based on the state of their linked item records by selecting Turn OFF The bibliographic 'Display in PAC' check box and the following options:

    +
      +
    • if there are no final liked item records.
    • +
    • if there ARE final linked item records and:
      • Display in PAC is off on all final linked item records
      • the circulation status is suppressed on all final linked item records.
    • +
    +

    Ensure the Display in PAC option is turned on if the linked item records are in a state where they can be circulated by selecting the following option:

    +
      +
    • Turn ON the bibliographic 'Display in PAC' if the conditions above are NOT met. +
    • +
    +

    See Set up Automatic Display in PAC Processing for Bibliographic Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Template_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Template_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..db60dcab --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Bibliographic_Template_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bibliographic Template Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bibliographic Template Workform

    +

    Bibliographic templates help you create bibliographic records quickly. The information in the template is carried into all bibliographic records created with the template. For example, you could create a bibliographic template specifically for creating bibliographic records for DVDs. Then, cataloging staff could use this template when they create bibliographic records for DVDs. You create a bibliographic template the same way as you create a bibliographic record. See Creating MARC Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Campaigns_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Campaigns_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f683d7d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Campaigns_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + Campaign Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Campaign Workform

    +

    Use the Campaign workform to automatically generate promotions. For more information, see Campaigns for Community Promotions.

    +

    The General view of the Campaign workform displays identifying information about the campaign and the period for which it is active.

    +

    Promotions created by campaigns use a combination of data from the Campaigns workform and community records to generate the required information for the promotion:

    +
      +
    • The Name field of the promotion includes the campaign type and a unique ID for the promotion.
    • +
    • The owner is inherited from the Owner field on the Campaigns workform.
    • +
    • The Headline comes from the Organization Name field in the Community Record workform or the Event Name in the Event Record workform.
    • +
    • The Midline comes from the Description field in the Community Record workform or the Event Record workform.
    • +
    • The Footline displays the default text for the promotion. If the promotion is for an event, the event type (Event or Program), is displayed. If the promotion type is for a community record, Community Profile is displayed.
    • +
    • The Campaign generated box is checked.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e46a4f36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Carousel Toolkit Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Carousel Toolkit dialog box, select Utilities, Carousel Toolkit.

    +

    Use the Carousel Toolkit dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Create a content carousel from a record set - Click Find and search for and select a bibliographic record set.
    • +
    • Create a content carousel from a dashboard element - Select Create from Dashboard element, and select a single dashboard element from the list.
    • +
    +

    To change the PAC connection branch where users go when they click on a title in the carousel, select a different branch in the PAC context box.

    +
      +
    • Generate the code and copy it.
      • Select Get iframe code or Get source code.
      • Select Copy to clipboard in the Code box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Cataloging_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Cataloging_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a136d294 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Cataloging_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Cataloging Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Cataloging UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Cataloging UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Character_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Character_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..73d38739 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Character_Picker_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Character Picker Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Character Picker Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Character Picker dialog box to insert international characters into MARC records or to translate search results, labels, or categories in the Polaris PowerPAC.

    +
      +
    • List installed international characters - Select the MARC character set in the Graphic set box.
    • +
    • View the character code and Unicode value - Select the character to see the unicode value and shortcut key boxes. You can use either the unicode value or the shortcut key combinations to insert an international character in the MARC record.
    • +
    • Increase or decrease the size of the characters - Select the large letter A in the upper right corner of the dialog box.
    • +
    +

    To insert a character from the dialog box, put the cursor in the area where you want to insert the character, select the character in the Character Picker dialog box, and click Insert. The character or diacritical mark Any of various marks, such as a macron or cedilla, added to a letter or symbol to indicate its pronunciation or to distinguish it in some way. is inserted in the MARC record if you are working in an authority or bibliographic record. The character or diacritical mark is inserted in the customized PAC label, search results, message, or category if you are translating text in the PAC.

    +

    If you are in a MARC record, the character is inserted into the authority or bibliographic record. See Choose characters/diacritics from a chart .

    +

    If you are editing PAC messages or labels in Polaris PowerPAC, you can insert a diacritic character. Choose the character in the chart, and click Insert. See Edit PowerPAC messages and labels   

    +

    If you are translating a target or category in the Polaris Children’s PAC, the character is inserted in the target or category. See Translate a category or target.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..751a82d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check Headings Assistant Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Headings Assistant Dialog Box

    +

    If a bibliographic or authority record has unauthorized headings, the Check Headings Assistant dialog box appears when you save the record or when you select Check Heading(s) from the Tools menu on the bibliographic workform or Check See Also From References from the Tools menu on the Authority Record workform. The headings without an exact match appear in the headings list. See Checking Authority Headings.

    +

    Use the Check Headings Assistant dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Correct the unauthorized heading in the record - Click Edit Record to manually change unauthorized headings in the record.
    • +
    • Use an automatic assistant to resolve the unauthorized heading - Click Details to open the Check Heading(s) Details dialog box.
    • +
    • Preview the record with the heading - Select the heading, and click Preview.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Details_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Details_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..98fe1451 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_Headings_Details_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check Headings Details Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Headings Details Dialog Box

    +

    The Check Headings Details dialog box appears when you click Details on the Check Headings Assistant dialog box or the Check See Also From References Assistant dialog box. This dialog box displays the heading that did not have an exact match, the possible matches (if any), and the conditions for the possible matches. See Checking Authority Headings for detailed instructions.

    +

    Use the Check Headings Details dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Locate an authority record to match the heading - Click Find to search for and select an authority record.
    • +
    • Create a new authority record to authorize the heading - Select Create new authority record.
    • +
    • Resolve the heading - If a heading is listed under Possible Authority Records, or you have located an authority record to use, select the heading, and select Adjust. Then select one of the following options:
      • bibliographic heading to match authority record or authority see also reference to match heading - Changes the heading in the record to match the authority record you selected.
      • usage in authority record - Changes the usage of the authority record to authorize the heading.
      • both - Changes the usage and the heading.
    • +
    • Manually change the heading - Select Edit bibliographic heading or Edit authority heading, and make changes to the heading in the box.
    • +
    • Leave the heading or reference unlinked to an authority record - Select Leave unlinked.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_MARC_21_Format_Results_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_MARC_21_Format_Results_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b55e9162 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_MARC_21_Format_Results_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check MARC 21 Format Results Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check MARC 21 Format Results Dialog Box

    +

    The Check MARC 21 Format Results dialog box appears when you save a bibliographic or authority record, or select Tools, Check MARC 21 Format. The MARC validation problem list shows the tag number and data for each tag that is not MARC 21 compliant. See Checking MARC Format.

    +

    Use the Check MARC 21 Format Results dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • View any problems with the MARC record 
    • +
    • Continue saving the record - This option saves the record even if errors were found.
    • +
    • Correct the invalid tags in the record - Click Edit Record to change the invalid tags in the record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_for_Linked_Records_Results.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_for_Linked_Records_Results.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..761e8d9d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Check_for_Linked_Records_Results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Check for Linked Records Results + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check for Linked Records Results

    +

    The Check for Linked Records Results dialog box displays when you edit and save an authority record. The options on the dialog box are dependent on the types of records linked to the edited authority record. Use the Check for Linked Record Results dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Modify the headings in the linked bibliographic records - Click Modify the headings to match the new authority heading.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete the heading and tag in the linked bibliographic record - Select Delete the headings.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Break links to any linked bibliographic headings - Select Unlink the headings. The heading remains in the bibliographic record as an unauthorized heading.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify the reference (4XX) in linked authority records - Select Modify the references to match the new authority records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete the references in linked authority records - Select Delete the references to delete the 4XX tag in the authority records to which the edited authority record is linked.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Break links to any linked references - Select Unlink the references to remove links to any references (4XX) linked to the edited authority record.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Copy_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Copy_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e53853d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Copy_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Copy Macro Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Copy Macro Dialog Box

    +

    The Copy Macro dialog box is displayed when you click Save As on the Macro Selection dialog box. The Copy Macro dialog box displays the name, description, and assigned shortcut key for the macro selected from the Macro Selection dialog box. The Copy Macro dialog box is used to customize and copy an existing macro to your macro list. See Apply a macro.

    +

    Use the Save Macro dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Rename the displayed macro - Type the new name in the Name box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the description for the displayed macro - Type the new text in the Description box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the keyboard shortcut for the displayed macro - Put the cursor in the Press new shortcut key box, and press the new key sequence on the keyboard.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Import_Profile_Window.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Import_Profile_Window.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..61a93b31 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Import_Profile_Window.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create Import Profile Window + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Import Profile Window

    +

    To access the Create Import Profile window, select File | New from the Import Profile Manager, or right-click an existing profile in the Import Profile Manager, and select Open or Copy from the context menu. The Create Import Profile window has five tabs.

    +

    Profile Setup Tab

    +

    The Profile Setup tab is the first tab that appears when you open the Create Import Profile window.

    +

    Use the Profile Setup tab to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a new import profile - Type the name and description of the import profile. See Setting Up Import Profiles and Importing Records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy an existing import profile - Type a different name and description for the import file over the existing ones. Copy a Polaris read-only import profile.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select a source file location - If you want the import profile to include the directory/file folder for the records to be imported, you can specify the location.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select an eContent vendor account - If you setting up an import profile to import eContent and create resource entities, select the vendor account in the Vendor account box. See EContent Item Records.

      +
    • +
    +

    Other Tabs

    +

    Use the other tabs to specify how records are to be imported using this profile -

    + +

    Save the Import Profile 

    +

    After setting up the import profile and specifying how you want the records to be imported, click Save. The profile appears in the list of available profiles.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Resource_Entity.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Resource_Entity.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8596d6da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Create_Resource_Entity.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + Create Resource Entity Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Resource Entity Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Create Resource Entity dialog box to create a resource entity for a non-integrated vendor.

    +

    Select the vendor account from the drop-down list. See Creating a Resource Entity from the Bibliographic Record Workform.

    +

     

    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Customize_Label_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Customize_Label_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e9d23214 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Customize_Label_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Customize Label Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Customize Label Dialog Box

    +

    The Customize Label dialog box appears when you select Tools, Design Custom Label from the Label Manager.

    +

    Use the Customize Label dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Name the customized label - Type a name for the label type in the Label Type box. This label type will appear in the Label Configuration dialog box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the owning library for the label type - Select the branch library in the Owner list.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    The page and label dimensions are measured in .net units (1 .net unit = 1/100 inch).

    +
      +
    • +

      Specify the page dimensions and text alignment - Click the Open button in the Page Size row, or tab to the button and press Enter. The Page Details dialog box appears. Type values for the width, height, top margin, and left margin. Select the text alignment.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the label dimensions and content - Click the Open button in the Label Size & Content row, or tab to the button and press Enter. The Label Details dialog box appears. Type values for the width, height, vertical spacing, horizontal spacing and indent. Select the label content.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the font for the text in the label - Click the Open button in the Label Font box, or tab to the button and press Enter. The Font dialog box appears where you specify the font, the font size, and any other characteristics of the font.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Edit_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Edit_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63502fe2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Edit_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Edit Macro Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Edit Macro Dialog Box

    +

    The Edit Macro dialog box is displayed when you click Edit on the Macros tool bar. The Edit Macro dialog box displays the name, description, and assigned shortcut key for the macro shown in the Macros list. See Change a macro.

    +

    Use the Edit Macro dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Rename the displayed macro - Type the new name in the Name box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the description for the displayed macro - Type the new text in the Description box. You can type up to 255 characters, including numbers, spaces, and punctuation.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the keyboard shortcut for the displayed macro - Put the cursor in the Press new shortcut key box, and press the new key sequence on the keyboard.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete the displayed macro - Click Delete.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save the changes - Click Save.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Jobs_Queue.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Jobs_Queue.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ad8baf88 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Jobs_Queue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Import Jobs Queue + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Import Jobs Queue

    +

    To access the Import Jobs Queue, select Utilities > Importing > Import Jobs Queue. By default, the jobs are sorted by the date and time posted. If multiple files were selected for import, each file appears on a separate line. Completed jobs remain in the queue until an authorized user manually deletes them. You can click any column heading to sort the list.

    +

    Note:
    Pending import jobs have been successfully initialized, but the import processing has not yet begun. Blacked out import jobs have been successfully initialized, or may have started running, but import processing is not currently allowed because a system- or user-defined blackout time is in effect. When the blackout time has ended, processing automatically begins or resumes.

    +

    Use the Import Jobs Queue to:

    +
      +
    • +

      View import jobs - Import jobs are listed in the queue following statuses:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Pending - Initializing is completed, but processing has not begun. +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Running - Import processing is occurring

      +
    • +
    • +

      Completed - Import processing has finished successfully

      +
    • +
    • +

      Stopped - Stopped by an authorized user

      +
    • +
    • +

      Blacked out - Automatically paused by the system because the job was running when a blackout period arrived. The job resumes automatically when the blackout period is over.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Refresh the queue - Click refreshbtn.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Stop an import job you have initiated - If you have permission to do importing, either the full importing permission (Import bibliographic, item and authority records) or the limited importing permission (Express importing), you can stop or delete your own import jobs.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Stop an import job initiated by another staff member - To stop or delete import jobs initiated by other staff members, you must have the permission Manage import jobs for this organization: Allow for the organization where the job was launched (displayed in the Organization column in the Import Job Queue).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a completed or stopped job - Select the job and click deletebtn.gif or right-click and select Stop from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View and print an import report - Select an import job in the list, and select File > View Report to view the report. Select File > Print from the report preview window to print the report.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For more information, see Using the Import Jobs Queue.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Profile_Manager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Profile_Manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b3a0dc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Import_Profile_Manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Import Profile Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Import Profile Manager

    +

    To access the Import Profile Manager, select Utilities, Importing, Profile Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar.

    +

    Use the Import Profile Manager to:

    +
      +
    • +

      View the list of existing import profiles - You can click on the column headers to sort the list by profile name, description, or creator. To see default profiles, select PolarisExec in the Creator box. The import profiles that have read-only in the name are those created by Innovative Interfaces.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a new import profile by copying and renaming an existing profile. Select a Polaris read-only import profile (or another profile you set up), right-click and select Copy. See Copy a Polaris read-only import profile.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a new import profile - Select File | New or click newicon00638.gif. See Create a new import profile .

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify an existing import profile - Double-click the profile, or right-click and select Open. Change the settings in the appropriate tabs and save the profile. See Modify an import profile.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print an existing import profile - Right-click the profile, and select Print.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Barcode_Range_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Barcode_Range_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9f46c68 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Barcode_Range_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Item Barcode Range Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Barcode Range Dialog Box

    +

    The Item Barcode Range dialog box appears when you select Options from the Cataloging menu on the Shortcut Bar, when you create a new item and select System-assigned barcode on the New Item Record Options dialog box, or when you select Use system assigned barcodes on the Misc tab of the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box.

    +

    Use the Item Barcode Range dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Indicate the type of barcodes you use to catalog items - Select the appropriate type from the Type of barcode box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Indicate the starting number of the barcode range - Type the number in the Start of range box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the next barcode (in the range) to be assigned - Select the number from the Next to be assigned box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Indicate the last barcode in the range - Type the number in the End of range box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Call_Number_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Call_Number_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4afb16bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Call_Number_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Call Number Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Call Number Tab

    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change Dialog box appears when you select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple item records. Click the tabs on the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.

    +

    Use the Call Number tab to make the following changes to all the items in the record set:

    +
      +
    • +

      Change the shelving scheme - Select the Shelving scheme check box, and select the scheme.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the call number prefix - Select the Call number prefix check box, and type the prefix.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the classification number - Select the Classification number check box, and type the number

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the cutter number - Select the Cutter number check box, and type the number.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the call number suffix - Select the Call number suffix check box, and type the suffix.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the volume number - Select the Volume number check box, and type the volume number.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the copy number - Select the Copy number check box, and type the number in the box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy the call number from the linked bibliographic record - Select Use call number fields from bib record to pull the call number from each item’s linked bibliographic record into the item record. This option is available only if the Polaris Administration profile Bring call number fields from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes. Items that do not have a call number will be updated with the call number from the bibliographic record; item with a call number will be changed. The call number fields are copied from the bibliographic record individually.  

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Circulation_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Circulation_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0ab68f2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Circulation_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Circulation Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Circulation Tab

    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change Dialog box appears when you select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple item records. Click the tabs on the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.

    +

    Use the Circulation tab to make the following changes to all items in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change the circulation status - Select the Circulation status check box and select the new status.
    • +
    • Change the material type -Select the Material type check box and select the new type in the Material type box.
    • +
    • Change the loan period code - Select the Loan period code check box and the new code. To change the loan period code, an assigned branch must be selected on the Location tab.
    • +
    • Change the fine code - Select the Fine code check box and the new code. To change the fine code, an assigned branch must be selected on the Location tab.
    • +
    • Change the statistical code - Select the Statistical code check box, and specify the new code in the Statistical code box. To change the statistical code, an assigned branch must be selected on the Location tab.
    • +
    • Change the maximum number of times items can be renewed - Select the Renewal limit check box and specify the new limit in the Renewal limit box.
    • +
    • +

      Change the holds setting to allow or prevent holds - Select the Holdable check box to change the setting for all item records in the record set. Select the check box to the right to allow holds, or leave the right check box empty to prevent holds.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change hold limits- If you selected the Holdable check box, you can change the limit settings for all records in the record set. Select the Limit to setting you want to change. Then, select the check box to the right of the setting to limit the holds, or leave the right check box empty to deselect the limit. For more information about these settings, see Restricting Holds on Specific Items.

      +
    • +
    +

    Example:
    If you want to allow all items in the record set to be held and then picked up at any library, select the Holdable checkbox, select Pickup at this branch, but leave the check box to the right empty. This will clear the Pickup at this branch setting for all items in the record set that have this limit setting selected.

    +
      +
    • +

      Change the circulation setting to allow or prevent circulation - Select the Non-circulating check box to change this setting. Then, select the check box to the right to prevent circulation, or leave the right check box blank to allow circulation.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the setting to allow or prevent loans outside the system - Select the Loanable within system check box to change this setting. Then, select the check box to the right to allow loans outside the system, or leave the check box blank to prevent loans outside the system.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the setting to allow or prevent the item from floating to other collections - Select the Do not float check box to change this setting. Then, select the check box to the right to prevent items from floating, or leave the check box blank to allow the items to float.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Location_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Location_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fa7b95e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Location_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Location Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Location Tab

    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change Dialog box appears when you select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple item records. Click the tabs on the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.

    +

     Use the Location tab to make the following changes to all items in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change the owning branch - Select the Owner check box and the branch name.
    • +
    • Change the branch to which the items are assigned - Select the Assigned branch check box and the branch name.
    • +
    • Change the collection to which the items are assigned - Select the Assigned collection check box and the collection.
    • +
    • Change the shelf location - Select the Shelf location check box and the new location.
    • +
    • Change the home branch - Select the Home branch check box and the new home branch.
    • +
    • Assign a temporary shelf location - Select the Temporary location check box, and type the new location.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Misc_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Misc_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16c64479 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Misc_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Misc Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Misc Tab

    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change Dialog box appears when you select Tools, Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple item records. Click the tabs on the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.

    +

    Use the Miscellaneous tab page to make the following changes to all the item records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change the bibliographic control number to a new number - Select the Bib control no. check box. Then, type the new control number, or click Find to locate the record.
    • +
    • Change the setting to display or not display items in the PAC - Select the Display in PAC check box to change the setting. Then, if you want all the items in the record set to display in the public access catalog, select the right check box. If do not want the items to display in the PAC, leave the right check box empty.
    • +
    • Assign the items to a new parent item - Select the Parent item check box, and enter the item control number of the new parent item.
    • +
    • Change the piece name - Select the Name of piece check box, and type the new name.
    • +
    • Change the funding source - Select the Funding source check box, and enter the name of the new source.
    • +
    • Change the price - Select the Price check box, and enter the new price.
    • +
    • Assign barcodes to items without barcodes - Scan or type each barcode in the Item barcode(s) box. Or, select Use system assigned barcodes and enter the information in the Item barcode range dialog box. For more information, see Item Barcode Range Dialog Box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Notes_Blocks_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Notes_Blocks_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bc36c2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Notes_Blocks_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Notes/Blocks Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Notes/Blocks Tab

    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change dialog box appears when you select Tools, Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple item records. Click the tabs on the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.

    +

    Use the Notes/Blocks tab to make the following changes to all the item records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change notes - You can add a note at the beginning or end of an existing note or replace an existing note. Select the Public note, Non-public note or Physical condition check box and type the text for the note in the appropriate box. Select Replace to replace the existing note, Prepend to put the text in front of the note, or Append to put the text after the note.
    • +
    • Change the free text block - Select the Free text block check box, type the text. Select Replace to replace the existing free text block, Prepend to add the text to the beginning of the free text block, or Append to put the text after the free text block.
    • +
    • Apply a library assigned block - Select the assigned branch on the Location tab before selecting a library assigned block. Select the Library assigned block check box, and select the block name. For information on setting blocks, see Designating Floating Collections.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Report_Record_Set_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Report_Record_Set_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da220efa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Bulk_Change_Dialog_Box_-_Report_Record_Set_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Report/Record Set Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Bulk Change Dialog Box - Report/Record Set Tab

    +

    The Item Record Bulk Change Dialog box appears when you select Tools > Bulk Change, or click  on a record set containing multiple item records. Click the tabs on the Item Record Bulk Change dialog box to change certain data on all item records in the record set. See Bulk-Changing Item Records.

    +

    Use the Report/Record set tab to make the following changes to all the item records in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Change the location of the bulk change report - If you want to change the name of the bulk change report, type over the default name (ItemBulkChange__ with a 16-character date /time), or click Browse to locate the file or folder.
    • +
    • Name a record set to contain the unchanged records - If you want to create a record set of the items that did not get changed, select the check box under Error Record Set, type the record set’s name in the Name box, and select the record set owner in the Owner box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..358cd086 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,301 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Workform

    +

    To access the Item Record workform, select Cataloging > Item Records, or press Ctrl+Alt+F9 and search for an item. Double-click an item in the search results to open the Item Record workform. The Item Record workform includes cataloging, circulation, notes, notice history, and source information for an item record. If your library uses course reserves functionality, the Item Record workform includes reserve circulation information and linked course reserve records. You can specify the view that appears when you first open the Item Record workform using the Polaris Administration Staff Client profile Default view selected when item record opened. See Setting Preferred Workform Views. If the item record is for an integrated eContent item, the eContent check box is checked and a barcode is generated automatically. See EContent Item Records.

    +

    Use the toolbar or menu on the Item Record workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a new item record manually - If you want to create a single item record, select File > New or click newicon00628.gif. The New Item Record dialog box appears. Select Clear Work Form > Copy Existing Work Form, or Use Existing Template. The New Item Record Options window appears. See Create a single new item record manually.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create multiple item records simultaneously - If you want to create multiple item records that are linked to the same bibliographic record as the open item record, select Tools > Create Item Records. See Create multiple item records for a single title.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open another item record - Select File > Open or click OpenIcon.gif. The Find Tool appears with Item Records selected in the Object box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print information about the item record - Select File > Print or click the arrow next to the printer icon PrintButtonArrow.gif and select one of the following options:

      +
        +
      • Current View to print the displayed view.
      • +
      • All Views to print every view of the item record. +
      • +
      • Item Full to print the item record. +
      • +
      • Item Brief to print the brief view of the item record. +
      • +
      • Item & Parent to print the item record and its primary (parent item). + +
      • +
      • Item & Children to print the item record and its subordinate (children) items +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Print a routing slip for a serial item - Select File > Print > Route Slip. See Print a route slip.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print a single spine label for the item record - Select File > Label Request > Single Label or click SingleLabicon.gif. See Print spine and pocket labels from an item record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print multiple spine labels - Select File > Label Request > Multi-label or click MultiLabicon.gif. See Print spine and pocket labels from an item record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Refresh the workform - Click RefreshIcon.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Check in the displayed item - Select Tools > Check In or click CheckInIcon.gif. See Doing Normal Item Check-Ins.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a hold request to reserve the item - Click Tools > Place Hold or click HoldsIcon00629.gif. See Placing Hold Requests.

      +
    • +
    • +

      See all items linked to the same bibliographic record - Select Links > All Item Records or click LinkedItemsIcon00630.gif. If there is only one other item record linked to the same bibliographic record, the Item Record workform appears. If there are multiple item records all linked to the same bibliographic record, a list box appears showing all the linked item records. Select an item to open it.

      +
    • +
    • +

      See the linked bibliographic record - Select Links, Bibliographic Record, press Ctrl+G, or click linkedbibicon.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print receipts or slips - Select Tools, Options, click optionsicon.gif, or press Ctrl +T. The Tools, Options dialog box appears. Select the option for the type of receipt or slip you want to print, and click OK. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

      +
    • +
    • Set Radio Frequency IDentification (RFID) options before you initialize the RFID tag for the item. Select Tools, RFID Options and enter the information required depending on the RFID vendor you are using. For vendor-specific entries, see Options Dialog Box, RFID Options Dialog Box.
    • +
    • Initialize the RFID tag for an item. Place the item with the RFID tag on the antenna tray, and select Tools, Initialize RFID Tag or press F9.
    • +
    • +

      Add an item to a route list - Select Tools, Add to Route List. See Add a serial holdings record or an issue to a route list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove the item from a route list - Select Tools, Remove from Route List.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Place the displayed item on course reserve - Select Tools, Add to Course Reserve. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add the item record to a record set - Select Tools, Add to Record Set, New or Existing. The Find Tool appears already set to search for existing Item Record Sets by name. Just enter the name of the existing record set and click Search. If you select New, a new Item Record Set workform appears with the one item listed. Type a name for the new record set and save it. For more information on record sets, see Creating and Using Record Sets.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to other records - Select Links, and select a record type.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the item’s cataloging information - Select View, Cataloging, or click ItemCatvw.gif. See Item Record Workform - Cataloging View.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the item’s circulation information - Select View, Circulation or click ItemCircvw.gif. See Item Workform - Circulation View.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the item’s import source and/or acquisitions information - Select View, Source Acquisition, or click ItemSourcvw.gif. See Item Record Workform - Source and Acquisition view.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the item’s notes and notices - Select View, Notes and Notices, or click ItemNotesvw.gif. This icon’s color changes to yellow if notes are entered in the Notes and Notices view. It changes to red if blocks are entered. See Item Record Workform - Notes and Notices View.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the item’s circulation history - Select View, History, or click itemrechisticon.gif. See Item Record Workform - History View.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the item’s course reserve information - Select View, Reserve or click ItemResvw.gif. See Item Record Workform - Reserve View.

      +

      Note:
      To make changes to the item record header information, you must have the following permissions for the Item records: Access and Modify header.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter or view the title information for the item record - If a link has been established with a bibliographic record, the Title, Author, and Bib Control fields are filled in automatically. In addition, the Call No information is filled in if the staff profile Bring classification and cutter #s from bib to item record when link is made is set to Yes. If the title information is not filled in, click Find to search for and select the bibliographic record to link to the item record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Indicate if you want the item to display in the PAC - Select the Display in PAC box to display the item in the public access catalog. If you do not want to display the item record in the public access catalog, clear the check box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter or view the price for the item - Type a dollar amount in the Price box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the parent item’s number - If the item has a parent item, it appears in the Parent box.

      +

      Tip: +
      The Temp box is used as a flag for staff members and is not visible in the PAC. The Temp location is not a specific access point for searching for item records. However, you can search for all your item records that have a temporary shelf location using the following SQL search:
      SELECT ItemRecordID AS RecordID FROM ItemRecordDetails WITH (NOLOCK) WHERE TemporaryShelfLocation IS not NULL

      +
    • +
    • +

      View or enter the item’s identification and location information - Select the Owner, Assigned (branch), Collection, Shelf location and Circ status. If you want to specify a temporary location, type it in the Temporary location box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Item Record Workform - Cataloging View

    +

    The Cataloging view contains information regarding the physical location of the item, its material type, call number, and the parameters that control its circulation.

    +

    Note:
    To make changes on this view, you must have the following permissions for the Item records: Access and Modify cataloging view

    +

    Use the Cataloging view to:

    + +

    Item Workform - Circulation View

    +

    The Circulation view displays the current check out information if the item is checked out, whether it is being held, and whether it was transferred. Use the Circulation view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Review current circulation information - If the item is currently being circulated, the branch where the item was checked out, the date it was checked out, the due date, the checkout or renewal method, and the borrower’s name are displayed. If the current check out was a renewal, the original due date, number of renewals, and renewal limit are displayed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review the most recent check-in information - The Check-in at box displays the location where the item was last checked in, the Date box displays the date of the last check in, and the Wks/User displays the workstation and user that checked the item in. The information in these fields is updated when the item record changes from any status to In.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review the previous check out information - The name of the patron who last checked out the item might be displayed in the Last borrower box. The branch where the item was last checked out is displayed in the Loaning branch box. The date and time of the last check out is displayed in the Last circulated box.

      +

      Note:
      Last borrower information may not be visible if your library has limited the number of days that last borrower information is kept.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review transfer information - If the item was transferred, the From box displays the library that transferred the item, and the Sent box displays the date it was sent. The To box displays the library that received the item and the Rec’d box displays the date it was received.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review the holds information - If there is a hold on the item, the patron’s name appears in the Held for patron box and the library at which the item is being held appears in the Held at box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Item Record Workform - Source and Acquisition view

    +

    Note:
    To make changes on this view, you must have the following permissions for the Item records: Access and Modify source and acquisition view

    +

    Use the Source and Acquisition view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Review the information regarding the import - If the item record was created automatically when a bibliographic record was imported, the number for the bibliographic record from which the item record was created is displayed in the Bib record box. The Source box displays the number of the import, and the Imported box displays the date of the import. For more information on creating item records automatically during importing, see Set import options for item records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review the Acquisition information - If there is a purchase order line and/or invoice line item segment linked to the item record, the following information is copied from the Purchase Order Line Item or Invoice Line Item workform:

      +
        +
      • Funding - Fund that was used to purchase the item +
      • +
      • Ordered - Library that ordered the item +
      • +
      • PO - Purchase order number +
      • +
      • Price - The Unit Price for the item on the purchase order line item +
      • +
      • Invoice - The invoice number. +
      • +
      +

      For more information on creating on-order items when releasing a purchase order, see Release a purchase order. For more information on creating item records after receiving them from an invoice, see Receiving Orders.

      +

      If there is no linked purchase order or invoice line item segment, you can enter a funding source and a price.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review the donor information - If the item was paid for using a donated fund, the donor’s name or the corporate name appears under Donor. This information comes from the Fund record if there is a linked purchase order line item or invoice line item. If the item has no linked purchase order or invoice line item, you can enter donor information, if applicable. For more information on donor funds, see Add donor information to a fund.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review the item’s circulation statistics - Circulation statistics appear for the current year, the previous year, and the total lifetime circulations. In addition, the First available date displays the date when the item was first available for circulation. You can search for item records in the Find Tool by First available date.

      +
    • +
    +

    Item Record Workform - Notes and Notices View

    +

    Use the Notes and Notices view to:

    +

    Note: +
    To make changes on this view, you must have the following permissions for the Item records: Access and Modify notes and notices view.

    +
      +
    • +

      Review the dates that notices were sent out regarding this item - These include bills, hold, reminder, and overdue notices.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review or enter the blocks associated with this item - You can select a library block in the Library assigned box or type a reason for the block in the Free text box. You cannot enter or change a System block. Library assigned blocks are set in System Administration, see Designating Floating Collections.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Review or enter notes - If you want the note to appear in the PAC, type it in the Public note box. If you want only staff to see the note, type it in the Non-public note box. If you want to enter a note regarding the condition of the item, type it in the Physical condition box.

      +
    • +
    +

    Item Record Workform - History View

    +

    The History view of the Item Record workform appears when you select View, History or click itemrechisticon00631.gif. Use the History view of the Item Record workform to view the item’s circulation history and changes in status. In addition to the circulation history, the view includes a Do not float option and a Home Branch selection. Select Do not float if you do not want the item to be part of floating collections. When item records have the Do not float option checked, it means that the Assigned Branch cannot be changed. If you have the permission, Modify history view, you can modify these fields.

    +

    The History view also shows the method by which an item check out or renewal occurred, such as phone, PAC, Mobile PAC, self-check, and other actions.

    +

    For a list of the transactions that are displayed in the Item Record’s Circulation History, see Item Circulation History.

    +

     Item Record Workform - Reserve View

    +

    A Reserve Item Record is a special view of the item record linked to a course reserve record. You can search for Reserve Item Records using the Polaris Find Tool. Information regarding the reserve item is stored in a reserve item “record.” See Borrow By Mail Circulation for detailed information.

    +

    Use the Reserve view to:

    +

    Note:
    To make changes on this view, you must have the following permissions for the Item records: Access and Modify reserves view.

    +
      +
    • +

      View and edit reserve-specific circulation information - Select the assigned branch, assigned collection, shelf location, loan period code, fine code, renewal limit, and holds information. These settings can be different from those in the primary item record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View and edit copyright information - If the material is copyrighted, and there is a fee, you can indicate that the fee was paid. Select CCG (Copyright Compliance) for photocopied journal articles if the article is dated within the last five years, and your library does not own the journal title, and this is the fifth or fewer request made for this item within the current calendar year. Select CCL (Copyright Compliance) for all photocopies that do not fall under CCG; for example, if the article is older than five years, or your library owns the journal title, or this is the sixth or greater request within the calendar year and your library is paying royalties to the Copyright Clearance Center or a document delivery vendor.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View and edit ownership information about the item - Select Library (Copy owner) to indicate that the library (not the instructor) owns the item. Select Instructor (Copy owner) to indicate that an instructor (not the library) owns the item.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View and edit the instructions for the item after the reserve - Select the option in the Action when done column. These options change depending on your selection in the Copy owner column.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the linked course reserve item information - At the bottom of the Reserve view, you can see the course, the reserve status, the dates of the reserve, and the number of circulations (check outs and renewals) of the item while on reserve for that course. You can double-click the course to open the Course Reserve workform.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Template_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Template_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8844eafc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Item_Template_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Item Template Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Template Workform

    +

    Item templates help you create item records quickly. The information in the item template is carried into all item records created with the template. For example, if in the item template you identify the owning branch as West Essex and the assigned collection as Children’s, a new item record based on the template would have the same owning branch and assigned collection information. You can also use item record templates when you are creating multiple item records for the same bibliographic record. You create item templates the same way as you create item records. See Creating Item Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Label_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Label_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d1b6f107 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Label_Configuration_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + + + + Label Configuration Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Label Configuration Dialog Box

    +

    The Label Configuration dialog box appears when you select Tools, Label Settings and Content from the Label Manager. You can also access the dialog box from the system, library, or branch Staff Client profile, Labels, Options.

    +

    The Label Configuration dialog box has two tabs: the Settings tab and the Content tab. The Settings tab is where you enable existing label types and specify their characteristics. The Content tab is where you select the content that appears on specific label types.

    +

    Note:
    To see more of the Label Configuration dialog box, select the right, bottom corner of the dialog box, hold down the left mouse button, and drag the corner. To see more of the contents of a certain column in the dialog box, select the column border in the heading and drag the column border to expand it. If you are defining a label set, you can set up Label #1 and Label #2

    +

    Use the Settings tab on the Label Configuration dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enable the label types - Select the Enabled box next to each label type.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set or change the label page size - Right-click in the Page Size cell in the row for the enabled label type, and select Open. Or, tab to the Page Size cell, and press Enter. The Page Details dialog box appears. Enter the width, height, top margin, left margin, and text alignment.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set or change the label size, the amount of white space within the label, and the label content - Right-click in the Label # Size & Content cell in the row for the label. Or, tab to the Label # Size & Content cell and press Enter. The Label Details dialog box appears. Enter the width, height, vertical spacing, and indent for the label, and specify the label’s content.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set or change the label’s font - Right-click in the Font cell in the row for the label. Or, tab to the Font cell and press Enter. The Font dialog box appears. Select the font, font size, and any other font characteristics.

      +
    • +
    +

    Use the Content tab on the Label Configuration dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select an existing content type to change - Select the content type in the Content Type box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a new content type - Click addcontenttypebtn.gif. The Add a New Content Type dialog box appears. Type a name for the new content type. The new content type appears in the Content Type list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the fields to appear on the selected label type - In the Options list, select the field to include on the label, and click on the right arrow button rtarrowbutton.gif that corresponds to the Top Section, Middle Section, or Bottom Section of the label.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove fields from the selected label type - In the Top Section, Middle Section or Bottom Section box, select the field to remove from that portion of the label, and click the left arrow button leftarrowbtn.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Move fields to a different position on the label - Select the field in the Top Section, Middle Section, or Bottom Section box, and use the up upbutton.gif or down downbtn.gif button to change the position of these fields within that section of the label.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save the label settings - Click Save.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Last_Copy_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Last_Copy_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f1bc84c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Last_Copy_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Last Copy Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Last Copy Options Dialog Box

    +

    The Last Copy Options dialog box appears when you delete a record that is the last record linked to another record or records. The dialog box lists records that may no longer be needed after the record is deleted.

    +

    Use the Last Copy Options dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Permanently delete the listed records from Polaris - Click Delete.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Retain the records but prevent them from appearing in the PAC - Click Suppress From Pac.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Keep the records with their current status - Click Retain.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open the record set containing the listed records - The linked records are in a record set that is named with the preface “weeded” and a number. Click Open Record Set to work with the records in the weeded record set. See Working With Multiple Records for information about what you can do with records listed in record sets.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Link_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Link_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5777587 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Link_Headings_Assistant_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Link Headings Assistant Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link Headings Assistant Dialog Box

    +

    The Link Headings Assistant dialog box appears when you select Tools, Create Links to Bibliographic Records or Create Links to Authority Records. If there are bibliographic or authority records with headings that exactly match the authority record, the records are listed in the top portion of the dialog box. If there are records that are close, but do not match exactly, they appear in the bottom portion of the dialog box. See Create links from authority records to other records.

    +

    Use the Link Headings Assistant Dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Link records that can be linked - Select the records that appear in the top portion of the dialog box, and click Link Selected.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify the records with headings that are close - Double-click a record that appears in the bottom portion of the dialog box (or right-click and select Open). The record opens, and you can modify the heading and save it again.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe436870 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + Linked Authority Records Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Authority Records Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Authority Records dialog box lists authority records that are linked to another record. Use the Linked Authority Records dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Sort the list view - Select a column header to sort the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open the authority record - Select the record in the list, select File, Open, click OpenIcon00667.gif or right-click the record and select Open from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print the list of records - Select File > Print, or click PrintButtonArrow00668.gif. Then select List view or Current view. If you select List view, all the linked records in the list are printed. If you select Current view, only the records visible in the dialog box are printed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print a specific record - Select the record in the list, select File > Print, click PrintButtonArrow00669.gif, or right-click and select Print. Then, select Authority Record. A window opens where you can preview the record before you print it.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the record’s properties - Select the record in the list, select File > Properties, or click .

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a record - Select the record in the list, select File > Delete or click DeleteButton00671.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add a record to a record set - Select the record or multiple records, right-click and select Add to Record Set > New or Existing. You can select Edit > Select All to select all the records and then add them to a record set.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to bibliographic records - Select the record, right-click, and select Links > Bibliographic Records. If there are multiple bibliographic records linked to this authority record, they are listed in a window.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to record sets that include this authority record - Select the record, right-click, and select Record Sets. If there are multiple record sets that contain this bibliographic record, they are listed in a window.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Bibliographic_Records_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Bibliographic_Records_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72d51b17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Bibliographic_Records_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Linked Bibliographic Records Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Bibliographic Records Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Bibliographic Records dialog box lists the bibliographic records that are linked to the open record. Use the Linked Bibliographic Records dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Sort the list view - Select a column header to sort the list.
    • +
    • Open the bibliographic record - Select the record in the list, select File > Open, click OpenIcon00663.gif or right-click the record and select Open from the context menu.
    • +
    • Place a hold - Select the record in the list, right-click, and select Place Hold.
    • +
    • Preview how the record appears in the Polaris PowerPAC - Select the record in the list, right-click and select Preview. A window displays the record. You can keep this window open and select other records to preview.
    • +
    • Print the list of records - Select File > Print, or click PrintButtonArrow00664.gif. Then select List view or Current view. If you select List view, all the linked records in the list are printed. If you select Current view, only the records visible in the dialog box are printed.
    • +
    • Print a specific record - Select the record in the list, select File > Print, click PrintButtonArrow00665.gif, or right-click and select Print. Then, select Bibliographic Full to print the full bibliographic record, or Bibliographic Brief to print the brief bibliographic record. A window opens where you can preview the record before you print it.
    • +
    • View the record’s properties - Select the record in the list, select File > Properties, or click PropertiesButton.gif.
    • +
    • Delete a record - Select the record in the list, select File > Delete or click DeleteButton00666.gif.
    • +
    • Add a record to a record set - Select the record or multiple records, right-click and select Add to Record Set > New or Existing. You can select Edit > Select All to select all the records and then add them to a record set.
    • +
    • Create an item record - Select a record, right-click, and select Create > Item Record.
    • +
    • Create a serial holdings record - Select a record, right-click, and select Create > Serial Holdings record.
    • +
    • Link to the holds queue - Select a record, right-click, and select Links > Holds Queue.
    • +
    • Link to item records - Select a record, right-click, and select Links > Item Records.
    • +
    • Link to authority records - Select the record, right-click, and select Authority Records.
    • +
    • Link to selection list line items for this title - Select the record, right-click, and select Selection List Line Items. If there are multiple selection list line items linked to this bibliographic record, they are listed in a window.
    • +
    • Link to purchase order line items for this title - Select the record, right-click, and select Purchase Order Line Items. If there are multiple purchase order line items linked to this bibliographic record, they are listed in a window.
    • +
    • Link to invoice line items for this title - Select the record, right-click, and select Invoice Line Items. If there are multiple invoice line items linked to this bibliographic record, they are listed in a window.
    • +
    • Link to record sets that include this bibliographic record - Select the record, right-click, and select Record Sets. If there are multiple record sets that contain this bibliographic record, they are listed in a window.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Cataloging_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Cataloging_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8f60095d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Cataloging_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + Linked Cataloging Record Sets Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Cataloging Record Sets Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Cataloging Record Sets dialog box displays the record sets to which the current cataloging record belongs. Use the Linked Cataloging Record Sets dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Sort the list view - Select a column header to sort the list.
    • +
    • Open a record set - Select the record set in the list, select File > Open, click  or right-click the record set and select Open from the context menu.
    • +
    • Print the list of record sets - Select File > Print, or click . Then select List view or Current view. If you select List view, all the linked records in the list are printed. If you select Current view, only the records visible in the dialog box are printed.
    • +
    • Print a specific record set- Select the record in the list, select File > Print, click or right-click, and select Print. Then, select Print bibliographic (item or authority) record set to print the record set. A report window opens with a list of all the records in the record set. You can print from the report window.
    • +
    • View the record set’s properties - Select the record in the list, select File > Properties, or click .
    • +
    • Delete a record set - Select the record in the list, select File > Delete or click .
    • +
    • Add bibliographic records to a purchase order - If the record sets listed contain bibliographic records, you can add them to a purchase order. Right-click a bibliographic record set, and select Add to Purchase Order, New or Existing. See Creating Purchase Orders.
    • +
    • Add bibliographic records to a selection list - If the record sets listed contain bibliographic records, you can add them to a purchase order. Select a record set, right-click and select Add to Selection List, New or Existing. See Create a selection list by bulk adding titles.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b9c152ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Linked Item Records Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Item Records Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Item Records dialog box lists the item records that are linked to the same bibliographic record. Use the Linked Item Records dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Sort the list view - Select a column header to sort the list.
    • +
    • Open the item record - Select the record in the list, select File, Open, click OpenIcon00672.gif or right-click the record and select Open from the context menu.
    • +
    • Check in the item - Select the record in the list, right-click, and select Check In.
    • +
    • Place a hold - Select the record in the list, right-click, and select Place Hold.
    • +
    • Print the list of records - Select File, Print, or click PrintButtonArrow00673.gif. Then select List view or Current view. If you select List view, all the linked records in the list are printed. If you select Current view, only the records visible in the dialog box are printed.
    • +
    • Print a specific record - Select the record in the list, select File, Print, click PrintButtonArrow00674.gif or right-click, and select Print. Then, select Item Full to print the full item record, or Item Brief to print the brief item record. A window opens where you can preview the record before you print it.       
    • +
    • Delete a record - Select the record in the list, select File, Delete or click DeleteButton00675.gif.
    • +
    • Add a record to a record set - Select the record or multiple records, right-click and select Add to Record Set, New or Existing. You can select Edit, Select All to select all the records and then add them to a record set.
    • +
    • Add the item to a route list - Select the record, right-click, and select Add to Route List.
    • +
    • Remove the record from a route list - Select the record, right-click, and select Remove from Route List.
    • +
    • Create an item record or child item record - Select a record, right-click, and select Create, Item Record or Child Item Record.
    • +
    • Link to the borrower’s record - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Borrower, Current or Previous. If the item is currently out, and you select Current, the Patron Status - Items Out workform appears for the patron who currently has the item checked out. If you select, Previous, the Patron Status workform for the previous borrower appears.
    • +
    • Link to the holds queue - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Holds Queue.
    • +
    • Link to child item records - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Child Item Records.
    • +
    • Link to parent item records - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Parent Item Records. 
    • +
    • Link to bibliographic records - Select the record, right-click, and select Links, Bibliographic Records.
    • +
    • Link to subscription issues or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts - Select the record, right-click, and select Links, Issue/Part record.
    • +
    • Link to the record for the patron for whom the issue is being held - Select the record, right-click, and select Links, Held For.
    • +
    • View the record’s properties - Select the record in the list, select File, Properties, or click .
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Reserve_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Reserve_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15fa7746 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Linked_Reserve_Item_Records_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + Linked Reserve Item Records Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Reserve Item Records Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Reserve Item Records dialog box displays the reserve item records that are linked to a course reserve record. Use the Linked Reserve Item Records dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Sort the list view - Select a column header to sort the list.
    • +
    • Open the reserve item record - Select the record in the list, select File, Open, click OpenIcon00677.gif or right-click the record and select Open from the context menu.
    • +
    • Place a hold - Select the record in the list, right-click, and select Place Hold.
    • +
    • Check in the reserve item - Select the record in the list, right-click, and select Check In.
    • +
    • Print the list of records - Select File, Print, or click PrintButtonArrow00678.gif. Then select List view or Current view. If you select List view, all the linked records in the list are printed. If you select Current view, only the records visible in the dialog box are printed.
    • +
    • Print a specific record - Select the record in the list, select File, Print, click PrintButtonArrow00679.gif or right-click, and select Print. Then, select Item Full to print the full item record, or Item Brief to print the brief item record. A window opens where you can preview the record before you print it.       
    • +
    • View the record’s properties - Select the record in the list, select File, Properties, or click .
    • +
    • Delete a record - Select the record in the list, select File, Delete or click DeleteButton00681.gif.
    • +
    • Add a record to a record set - Select the record or multiple records, right-click and select Add to Record Set, New or Existing. You can select Edit, Select All to select all the records and then add them to a record set.
    • +
    • Add the item to a route list - Select the record, right-click, and select Add to Route List.
    • +
    • Remove the record from a route list - Select the record, right-click, and select Remove from Route List.
    • +
    • Create an item record or child item record - Select a record, right-click, and select Create, Item Record or Child Item Record.
    • +
    • Link to the borrower’s record - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Borrower, Current or Previous. If the item is currently out, and you select Current, the Patron Status - Items Out workform appears for the patron who currently has the item checked out. If you select, Previous, the Patron Status workform for the previous borrower appears.
    • +
    • Link to the holds queue - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Holds Queue.
    • +
    • Link to child item records - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Child Item Records.
    • +
    • Link to parent item records - Select a record, right-click, and select Links, Parent Item Records. 
    • +
    • Link to bibliographic records - Select the record, right-click, and select Links, Bibliographic Records.
    • +
    • Link to subscription issues or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. parts - Select the record, right-click, and select Links, Issue/Part record.
    • +
    • Link to the record for the patron for whom the issue is being held - Select the record, right-click, and select Links, Held For.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Macro_Selection_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Macro_Selection_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1fd1b56a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Macro_Selection_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Macro Selection Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

     Macro Selection Dialog Box

    +

    The Macro Selection dialog box is displayed when you click Show All on the Macros tool bar. The Macro Selection dialog box list all macros owned by the other users in Polaris. You can copy a macro to your own list. Select a macro from the list and click Save As.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Bibs.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Bibs.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ee8e9c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Bibs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Multiple Object Deletion - Bibs + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Multiple Object Deletion - Bibs

    +

    The Multiple Object Deletion dialog box appears when you select multiple bibliographic records in a list box, record set, or Find Tool results list and select Delete.

    +

    Use the Multiple Object Deletion dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Suppress warning messages - If you have the required permissions, you can keep the warning messages for unbreakable or breakable links from appearing as the system goes through deleting multiple bibliographic records.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To keep the warning messages for breakable links from appearing, you must have the permission: Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow.

    +

    To keep the warning messages for unbreakable links from appearing, you must have the permission: Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple bibliographic records: Allow

    +
      +
    • +

      Uncheck the breakable links box to suppress warning messages from appearing when the system encounters bibliographic records that have breakable links. The system will continue deleting these records without a warning message.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Uncheck the unbreakable links and other stopping conditions box to suppress warning messages from appearing when the system encounters bibliographic records that have unbreakable links or other conditions that prevent them from being deleted. When the warning messages for unbreakable links are suppressed, these records are skipped because they cannot be deleted, but no warning message appears.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Confirm that you want to delete the records - Click Yes to delete the selected records. If you do not want to delete the records, click No.

      +
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Bibliographic Record Unbreakable links - The following links prevent the record from being deleted:

      +
    • +
    • +

      The bib is final and it is linked to final/provisional items

      +
    • +
    • +

      The bib is deleted and the linked items are deleted

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to active hold requests

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to serial holdings records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to PO Lines with a status of Pending

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to Invoice Lines with a status of Open

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to Issue records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to subscription records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to resource records (digital media)

      +
    • +
    • +

      Bibliographic Record Breakable links - The bibliographic record can be deleted if it is linked to the following types of records:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to item templates

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to record sets

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to selection list line items

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to PO Lines with a status other than Pending

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to Invoice Lines with a status other than Open

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Items.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Items.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b3c8b09 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Multiple Object Deletion - Items + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Multiple Object Deletion - Items

    +

    The Multiple Object Deletion dialog box appears when you select multiple item records in a list box, record set, or Find Tool results list and select Delete.

    +

    Use the Multiple Object Deletion dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Suppress warning messages - If you have the required permissions, you can keep the warning messages for unbreakable or breakable links from appearing as the system goes through deleting multiple item records.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    To keep the warning messages for breakable links from appearing, you must have the permission: Suppress warnings for breakable links when deleting multiple item records: Allow.

    +

    To keep the warning messages for unbreakable links from appearing, you must have the permission: Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple item records: Allow

    +
      +
    • +

      Uncheck the breakable links box to suppress warning messages from appearing when the system encounters item records that have breakable links. The system will continue deleting these records without a warning message.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Uncheck the unbreakable links and other stopping conditions box to suppress warning messages from appearing when the system encounters item records that have unbreakable links or other conditions that prevent them from being deleted. When the warning messages for unbreakable links are suppressed, these records are skipped because they cannot be deleted, but no warning message appears.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Confirm that you want to delete the records - Click Yes to delete the selected records. If you do not want to delete the records, click No.

      +
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +
      +
    • +

      Item Record Unbreakable Links - The item record cannot be deleted if it is linked to the following types of records:

      +
    • +
    • +

      The item record is a parent item, the item is final, and the linked child item records are final

      +
    • +
    • +

      Is a parent item, the item is deleted, and has any child item records

      +
    • +
    • +

      Is checked out

      +
    • +
    • +

      Has been shipped for hold

      +
    • +
    • +

      Has trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. for hold

      +
    • +
    • +

      Has item level hold

      +
    • +
    • +

      Is on a route list that is routed

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item Record Breakable Links - The item record can be deleted if it is linked to the following types of records:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to item template

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to record set

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to serial issue - This is only checked if the SA parameter: Delete linked issue/part when serial item is deleted is set to 'No'

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to POLI segment

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to InvLI segment

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to patron charge

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item lost

      +
    • +
    • +

      Item claimed

      +
    • +
    • +

      Linked to Course Reserve

      +
    • +
    • +

      Last holdable item linked to a bib record

      +
    • +
    • +

      Is on a route list that is not currently routed

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Item_Record_Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Item_Record_Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67bade97 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Item_Record_Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + New Item Record Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Item Record Options Dialog Box

    +

    Access the New Item Record Options dialog box by selecting File | New| Item Record or Tools | Create Item Record. If you selected File | New from the Shortcut bar, the bibliographic information is not filled in. If you selected Tools, Create Item Record from the Item Record or Bibliographic Record workform, the bibliographic information is filled in. See Create multiple item records for a single title.

    +

    Use the New Item Record Options dialog box to create multiple item records as follows:

    +
      +
    • Locate the bibliographic record to link to the item records - Click Find and search for a bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Enter the barcodes for the items - Scan the item barcodes, or type each one in the Item barcode(s) box and press Enter. If you select System Assigned barcodes, the Item Barcode Range dialog box appears where you enter the type of barcodes and the range.
    • +
    • Enter the call number information - If it is not already filled in from the bibliographic record, or you want to change the call number information, do the following steps:
    • +
    • Select a number in the Number of items box to indicate the number of physical item records you are creating.
    • +
    • Select the shelving scheme for the new item in the Scheme box.
    • +
    • Type the prefix for the call number in the Prefix box.
    • +
    • Type the classification number in the Class box.
    • +
    • Type the cutter number in the Cutter box.
    • +
    • Type the suffix for the call number in the Suffix box.
    • +
    • Type the volume number, if applicable, in the Vol box.
    • +
    • Type the copy number, if applicable, in the Copy box.
    • +
    • Enter the item price - If the price is not filled in from the linked bibliographic record, type the dollar amount in the Price field.
    • +
    • Enter the item distribution information -
    • +
    • If you want to use a template, select it in the Template box in the far right column of the distribution grid.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When you select a template in any line of the Distribution grid, the Use template values instead of these (if available) box is checked. You can clear this check box if you want to use the values in the dialog box instead of those in the template.

    +
      +
    • If you want to enter the distribution information for each item, type the number of items in the Items box, select the Branch, Collection, Shelf Location, Material Type, Loan Period, Fine Code, Statistical Code, and Owner.
    • +
    • Double-click in the next distribution row to add a row exactly like the one above it, or click AddRowbtn.gif to add a blank row.
    • +
    • Specify the circulation information - If you are not using a template, or the template does not have the circulation information, enter it as follows:
    • +
    • Select the circulation status in the Circ status box.
    • +
    • Select the renewal limit in the Renewal Limit box.
    • +
    • Check the Display in PAC box if you want the item records to display in the Polaris PowerPAC.
    • +
    • If you want to indicate that the items do not circulate, select Non-circulating.
    • +
    • If you want to specify that the items are to be loaned outside of your library system, select Loanable outside system.
    • +
    • If you want to enable holds to be placed on this item, select Holdable.
    • +
    • Create the item records - Click OK after you have entered all the information. The item records that were created are listed in a dialog box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Record_Set_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Record_Set_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..839c5091 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/New_Record_Set_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + New Record Set Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Record Set Dialog Box

    +

    The New Record Set dialog box appears when you create a new record set other than when importing records. Use the New Record Set dialog box to select the type of records to be included in the new record set from the Record Type box. See Using Cataloging Record Sets.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Page_Label_Details_Dialog_Boxes.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Page_Label_Details_Dialog_Boxes.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e730ebbd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Page_Label_Details_Dialog_Boxes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Page & Label Details Dialog Boxes + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Page & Label Details Dialog Boxes

    +

    Use the Page Details or Label Details dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Change the page or label’s width - Type a different number in the Width box.
    • +
    • Change the page or label’s height - Type a different number in the Height box.
    • +
    • Change the page top margin - Type a different number in the Top Margin box.
    • +
    • Change the page left margin - Type a different number in the Left Margin box.
    • +
    • Change the label’s vertical spacing - Type a different number in the Vertical Spacing box.
    • +
    • Change the label’s horizontal spacing - Type a different number in the Horizontal Spacing box.
    • +
    • Change the label’s indent from the left border of the label - Type a different number in the Indent box.
    • +
    • Change the text alignment within the page or label - Select a different alignment in the Text Alignment box.
    • +
    • Change the content type for the label - Select a different content type in the Content box. To set up a different content for the label type, see Define the label content.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Authority_Records_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Authority_Records_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88229735 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Authority_Records_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Import Setup Window- Authority Records Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Import Setup Window- Authority Records Tab

    +

    The options on the Authority Records tab control how to handle imported authority records. See Set import options for authority records.

    +

    Use the Authority Records tab to:

    +
      +
    • Indicate how to save the incoming authority record - Select Save all records as final or Save all records as provisional. You can select Do not save any records if the import file contains a mixture of records, and you do not want to import the authority records.
    • +
    • Check MARC format - Select Perform MARC 21 Validation.
    • +
    • Specify how records with MARC format errors are saved - Select Save record as provisional if you want records with errors to be saved provisionally. Select Ignore errors; save as final if you want the records to be saved as final even if they have MARC format errors.
    • +
    • Check for duplicate records already in the database - Select Perform duplicate detection.
    • +
    • Set duplicate detection rules - You can use the default duplicate detection rules or specify custom duplicate detection rules. If Use custom duplicate detection rules is selected, you can select the rules to apply. Select duplication detection rules from the Rules to select list and click rtarrowbut.gif to add the rules to the Rules to apply (as unique groups) list.
    • +
    • Specify how you want duplicates to be handled - You can save incoming duplicate authority records as final or provisional. Or, you can choose to merge duplicate records and select a preferred cataloging source A code stored in tag 040 $a that tells who created the record. These codes are governed by the MARC code list for libraries. owner from the list. When a duplicate authority record is found, and the imported record is from a preferred cataloging source, the duplicates are merged. See Specify preferred cataloging sources for authority records.
    • +
    • Check cross references - Select Perform See Also From reference linking, and specify what should be done if no matching heading is found. You can specify that you want See Also references created automatically when the records are imported, or that you want to import the records without creating the See Also reference automatically, and then save the records as final or provisional.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Bibliographic_Records_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Bibliographic_Records_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4345eb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window-_Bibliographic_Records_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Import Setup Window- Bibliographic Records Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Import Setup Window- Bibliographic Records Tab

    +

    The Polaris Import Setup - Bibliographic Records tab contain the options for importing bibliographic records and automatic processing of the records upon import. See Set import options for bibliographic records for detailed steps.

    +

     Use the Bibliographic Records tab to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Save records as final or provisional - Select one of the options. If the file being imported contains a mixture of authority records and bibliographic records and you want to save only the authority records, you can select Do not save any records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the record owner - Select a record owner

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set the PAC display - Select the Display in PAC check box to display the records; clear the check box to suppress the records from displaying.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Protect the incoming records from being overlaid - To prevent incoming records from being overlaid in the future, select the Do not overlay box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete MARC tags from incoming records - Select the Delete MARC Tags on incoming record, and select one of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      System defined deletion tags - These tags are defined in Polaris Administration. +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Profile defined deletion tags - If you select this option, define the tags to delete from the incoming records. Click addcusttagicon.gif (to add a tag), or select a tag in the tag list and click modifyicon.gif (modify tag).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Check the MARC 21 format - If you selected Save all records as final, you can select Perform MARC 21 Validation to check the MARC 21 format of the incoming records. To save the records as final even if the validation process detects errors, select Ignore errors; save as final.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Perform authority control - If the option to Save all records as final is selected, you can perform authority control and specify how to incoming records for which no matching heading is found.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Perform duplicate detection - If the option Save all records as finial is selected, you can select Perform Duplicate Detection, and specify how duplicates should be handled.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify how duplicate records will be handled - If you selected Perform Duplicate Detection, indicate how you want Polaris to handle duplicate records by selecting one of the following options:

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save incoming record as provisional - The incoming duplicate record is saved as provisional. Only the resident record with a status of final is indexed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save incoming record as final; do not replace database record - The incoming duplicate record is saved as final but does not replace the database record. Two similar or identical bibliographic records are saved to the database and both are indexed and searchable.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save incoming record as final; replace database record - The incoming duplicate record overlays and replaces the database record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    For information on how records get overlaid based on encoding levels, see Bibliographic Overlay Based on Encoding Level.

    +
      +
    • +

      Save record with highest encoding level. If encoding levels match: +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save incoming record as final; replace database record +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Reject incoming record +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Save incoming record as provisional (ignore Keep MARC tags) +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Reject incoming record; add MARC retention tags to database record - If a duplicate is encountered, the imported duplicate is rejected, but any retention tags, defined by the system or the profile, are retained in the database record, and the database record is added to the record set.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify tags to retain from overlaid records or rejected records - If the Keep MARC tags option is selected, select System defined overlay retention tags or Profile defined overlay retention tags. If you select Profile defined overlay retention tags, click addcusttagicon00639.gif (to add a tag), or select a tag in the tag list and click modifyicon00640.gif (modify tag). The Retain Tags dialog box appears. To add a tag, type the tag number. The indicator values in the Indicator 1 and Indicator 2 boxes are all highlighted. Click the indicator values to deselect them. Click OK to add the tag and indicators. To modify the tag, select or deselect indicators.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    When an existing bibliographic record is overlaid with a new bibliographic record, the links to the item records are maintained and the circulation counts remain. In addition, any holds attached to the old record are transferred to the new record. These requests maintain their position in the holds queue. See Working with Interlibrary Loans.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Item_Records_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Item_Records_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb11e4d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Item_Records_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Import Setup Window - Item Records Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Import Setup Window - Item Records Tab

    +

    The options on the Polaris Import Setup - Item Records tab control how item records are created from imported bibliographic records. See Set import options for item records.

    +

    Tip:
    You can select the default profile Polaris default (with item creation) to create item records. This profile contains standard settings for mapping embedded holdings information to fields in the item record. You can start with this profile and make changes as necessary.

    +

    Use the Item Records tab to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select an option for creating item records - If you selected Build item records, select one of the following options for creating item records:

      +
        +
      • +

        Using embedded holdings fields only - Items are created from the embedded holdings data in the 852 or other tag in the bibliographic record.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Using template/system default values only - Items are created from the information in the template and any system defaults for item records.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Using all available holdings/item fields - Items are created from holdings information, if it is available. If the holdings tag does not contain the information but the template does, the field on the item record is filled in from the template.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Select an option for handling possible duplicate item records:

      +
        +
      • +

        Save duplicate item record as provisional if you want duplicates to be saved as provisional records.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Do not save duplicate item record if you do not want duplicate item records to be saved.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Select an option for handling items without barcodes:

      +
        +
      • +

        Save item record as final - Saves the new item records as final records, even if they do not have barcodes.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Save item record as provisional - Saves the new items as provisional records if they do not have a barcode.

        +
      • +
      • +

        Do not save item record - If there is no barcode, the item record is not saved.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    • +

      Indicate if you want items to display in the PAC - If you do not want the item records to display in the PAC, clear the Display in PAC (when not explicitly found). This check box is checked as the default.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select a template to provide any missing item data - If you are creating item records from embedded holdings fields, you can select a template to supply missing required fields if the holdings data does not include enough information to create the item records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify if you want to update item records when you import records from enriched EDI orders - If you are importing bibliographic records that are sent back as a result of an enriched EDI order, the records contain embedded holdings data in the 949 tags, including data in the 949$e (purchase order line item and segment ID). When a match is made between the tags in the bibliographic record and the purchase order data, the item records are built using this data, and they are already shelf-ready because they have the location and collection information from the purchase order line item segment. Minimal cataloging is required for these items to go right out to the shelves. Updated item records maintain their links to the purchase order line item segments.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Map holdings data to fields in the item record: +

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    For more information, see Item Records Created from Embedded Holdings Tags.

    +
    +

    +

      +
    • Under Embedded holdings field/MARC subfield mapping, type the tag number where the holdings data is located in the Holdings tag number box. In each item record field box, type the subfield letter or number for the bibliographic subfield that contains this information. The system copies any information in the subfield to the matching field in the item record.
    • +
    +

    +
    +
    +

    Example:
    Type 852 in the Embedded holdings field/MARC subfield mapping box, and type p in the Barcode box. When the item records are created, the system takes the data in the 852 tag subfield p for every bibliographic record and puts it in the Barcode box on each item record created.

    +
    +

    +

      +
    • Click Save to save the import profile.
    • +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Record_Sets_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Record_Sets_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c79e8f47 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_Window_-_Record_Sets_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Import Setup Window - Record Sets Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Import Setup Window - Record Sets Tab

    +

    The options on the Record Sets tab control how imported records are saved in record sets. See Set import options for record sets.

    +

    Use the Record Sets tab to:

    +
      +
    • Create new record sets in which to save the records - For each type of record set you are creating (bibliographic, item, and authority), you can create a separate record set for provisional, final, and deleted records. Type the name and select the owner for each new record set you are creating.
    • +
    • Specify existing record sets in which to save the imported records - Click Find to search for and select the existing record set, and select Append to add the bibliographic records to the records in the record set, or select Replace to replace the existing records with the imported records.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_window_-Profile_Setup_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_window_-Profile_Setup_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72968671 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Polaris_Import_Setup_window_-Profile_Setup_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + + + Polaris Import Setup window -Profile Setup Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Import Setup window -Profile Setup Tab

    +

    When you select Express Import or Full Import from the Utilities, Import menu, the import utility opens to the Profile setup tab.

    +

    Use the Profile Setup tab to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Select an existing profile from a list of import profiles - +

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you choose Full Import, you can specify all options for all tabs. See Use Full Import to import records. You can choose an existing profile with default settings and make changes to the settings as needed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If you choose Express Import, you can select the files to be imported and change the options on the Record Sets tab; all other importing options are read-only. For more information on using the Express Importing option, see Use Express Import to import records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the location of the files that contains the records to import - Click Add next to the Import files box to locate the files containing the records to import. Up to 50 records can be selected and added at a time. The file limit is set in a Polaris Administration Cataloging profile. You can select MARC or MARCXML records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Go to other tabs and set options for automatic processing - +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set import options for bibliographic records +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set import options for item records +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set import options for authority records +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Set import options for record sets +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Import the records - After specifying how you want the records to be imported, click Import.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Preview_MARC_Data_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Preview_MARC_Data_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3d791fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Preview_MARC_Data_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Preview MARC Data Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Preview MARC Data Dialog Box

    +

    When you edit a bibliographic record during authority control checking, you can click Preview on the Check Headings Assistant dialog box to preview the record with the changes you made. Click OK to accept these changes, then click Continue on the Check Headings Assistant dialog box.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Promotion_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Promotion_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f706f2b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Promotion_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ + + + + + + + + Promotion Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Promotion Workform

    +

    Use the Promotion workform to enter data for Feature It, a separately-licensed product that enables libraries to feature resources in a dashboard in the Polaris PowerPAC. Feature It can be used with or without community records, but in order to feature community resources, Community Profiles must also be licensed.

    +

    Use the toolbar or menu on the Promotion workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create a new promotion record - Select File | New, press Ctrl+N, or click newicon00689.gif. The New Promotion Record dialog box appears. Select Clear Work Form or Copy Existing Work Form.
    • +
    • Open another promotion record - Select File, Open, press Ctrl+O, or click OpenIcon00690.gif. The Find Tool appears with Promotions selected in the Object box.
    • +
    • Close the workform - Select File, Close, or press Alt+F4.
    • +
    • Print information about the promotion record - Select File, Print or click the arrow next to the printer icon  and select one of the following options.
      • Current View to print the displayed view

      • All Views to print every view of the promotion record

    • +
    • +

      Save the record - Select File | Save or click SaveIcon.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View the record’s properties- Select File, Properties. The Properties page has two tabs: the General tab displays the Name, Headline, Midline, and Footline of the profile; the About tab displays the record’s control number, creation date, and modification date.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Undo an entry in the workform - Select Edit, Undo or press Ctrl+Z.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Cut text from the workform - Select Edit, Cut or press Ctrl+X.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Copy text from the workform - Select Edit, Copy or press Ctrl+C.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Paste text into the workform- Select Edit, Paste or press Ctrl+V.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Clear text that was entered in the workform - Select the text and select Edit, Clear or press the Delete key.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Go to another view of the workform - Select View and click on one of the options. You can also click on the icons in the side banner of the workform.  

      +
    • +
    +

    Promotion Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view of the Promotion workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Enter the promotion record’s name

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the promotion record’s owner

      +
    • +
    • +

      See whether the promotion is Campaign-generated. See Campaigns for Community Promotions.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the promotion’s activation date and expiration date

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the promotion record’s headline, midline, and footline

      +
    • +
    +

    Promotion Workform - Featured Resources View

    +

    Use the Featured Resources view of the Promotions workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Feature bibliographic or community records - Select Feature these local object(s) and select Bibliographic or Community in the Objects box. Then, click the Add button, and search for the bibliographic or community organization/event in the Find Tool. You can select more than one community or bibliographic record, but you cannot add both community and bibliographic records to the same promotion workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Feature a web site - Select Open this page, and type the URL for the web site.

      +
    • +
    +

    Promotion Workform - Triggers View

    +

    Use the Triggers view of the Promotions workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Define PAC search terms that trigger the display of the featured resources - In the Freetext column, type the text that triggers the display of the featured resource.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the type of search to which the terms apply - In the Type column, select the box to open the list of types, and select the type(s) of searches to which the search terms apply.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Exclude terms from triggering the display of the featured resources - Enter the search terms and select the type of search. Then, select the check box in the Negative column.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter more triggers - Type in the next available line.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Insert triggers - Click insertbut.gif where you want to insert a term.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a trigger - Select the trigger, and click deletebtnTrig.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Move a trigger up or down in the list - Select the trigger, and click uparrowbtn.gif or downarrowbtn.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Normalize the trigger terms - Select the trigger, and click normzbtn.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    Promotion Workform - Demographic Targeting View

    +

    Use the Demographic Targeting view of the Promotions workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Target a specific language or languages - Select Target only these languages, and select the check boxes next to the languages you want to target.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Target a specific branch or branches - Select Target only these branches, and select the check boxes next to the branches you want to target. When a branch location is selected as a target, the featured resources appear only when a PAC user is connected to that branch.

      +
    • +
    +

     

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Properties_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Properties_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4b013df --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Properties_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Properties Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Properties Dialog Box

    +

    The Properties dialog box record displays when you right-click a record in a search results list and select Properties from the context menu. You can view record attributes without loading and displaying the record in a workform. Click the General tab to see descriptive information about the record. Click the About This Record tab to see status and date information.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Criteria_List.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Criteria_List.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e4ee00f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Criteria_List.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purge Criteria List + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purge Criteria List

    +

     The Purge Criteria List box appears when you select Utilities, Cataloging Processing, Purge Cataloging Records. See Purge cataloging records.

    +

    Use the Purge Criteria List to:

    +
      +
    • View the cataloging jobs that purge records from the database - To sort the list, click on the column headers.
    • +
    • Print a log or report - Select a job in the list, right-click and select Print Report, select File, Print, or click logicon00659.gif. The report appears in the Report Preview window. Click PrinterIcon00660.gif to print the report.
    • +
    • Delete one or more jobs - Select the completed jobs in the list, right-click and select Delete, select File, Delete, or click deleteicon00661.gif.
    • +
    • Open a purge criteria record to see details - Select a job in the list, right-click and select Open. The Purge Record workform appears.
    • +
    • Create a new purge record - Select File | New or click newicon00662.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9495279c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Purge_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purge Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purge Record Workform

    +

    A new Purge Record workform appears when you select Utilities, Cataloging Jobs, Purge Cataloging Records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar and then select File | New or click newicon00641.gif on the Purge Criteria List box. An existing Purge Record workform appears when you double-click a purge job on the Purge Criteria List box. See Purge cataloging records.

    +

    Use the Purge Record workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Identify the purge criteria record - Select the name and owner of the purge criteria record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Schedule the purge - Set the date in the Scheduled box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the type of records to purge - Select Authority, Bibliographic, or Item. This specifies that the authority, bibliographic, or item records with a status of Deleted will be removed from the Polaris database.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select record sets to purge -You can also select Record Sets and click Find to search for and select a specific record set that contains the deleted bibliographic or item records.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Indicate the date range for the purge - Select the Begin and End dates to purge records that were deleted on or after the begin date, and before or on the end date.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf1da1ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Quick-circ Item Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Quick-circ Item Record Workform

    +

    Quick-circ item records let you circulate items, such as pamphlets, that are not intended for full cataloging so that you can generate circulation statistics for these items. You can create a new quick-circ item by selecting File | New, Quick-circ Item from the Polaris Shortcut Bar or by selecting Tools, Quick-circ Item Record from the Check Out workform. You can access an existing quick-circ item record from the Quick-circ Item Records list dialog box (see Quick-circ Item Records List Dialog Box). You cannot search for a quick-circ item. For information on quick-circ items, see Circulating Ephemeral Items.   

    +

    Use the Quick-circ Item Record workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a new quick-circ item record or edit an existing one - Scan the barcode, select the assigned branch, assigned collection, and material type.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Records_List_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Records_List_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e23e9406 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Quick-circ_Item_Records_List_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + Quick-circ Item Records List Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Quick-circ Item Records List Dialog Box

    +

    The Quick-circ Item Records List dialog box appears when you select Utilities, Quick-circ Item Records from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. It lists the quick-circ items. For more information on quick-circ items, see Circulating Ephemeral Items.

    +

    Use the Quick-circ Item Records List dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Edit a quick-circ item - Select an item in the list, right-click and select Open, select File, Open, or click openfileicon.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print the quick-circ item - Select an item in the list, right-click and select Print, select File, Print, or click .

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete the quick-circ item - Select an item in the list, right-click and select Delete, select File, Delete, or click deleteicon00683.gif.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Links_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Links_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5acd0ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Links_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Record Links Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Links Dialog Box

    +

    The Record Links dialog box appears when you attempt to delete a record that has other records linked to it. It lists the links that prevent a record from being deleted. You can go to the linked records and delete them first, or click Continue Deleting to delete the record without affecting the linked records. This option is available only when record links can be broken.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8749ef47 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Macro_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Record Macro Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Macro Dialog Box

    +

    The Record Macro dialog box is displayed when you click kRecordMacroBtn00642.gif on the Macros tool bar. See Record a macro.

    +

    Use the Record Macro dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Name the new macro - Type the name in the Name box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Describe the purpose of the new macro - Type the text in the Description box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Assign a shortcut key to the new macro - Put the cursor in the Press new shortcut key box, and press the new key sequence on the keyboard.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Record the keyboard actions for the new macro - Click Start Recording.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Found_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Found_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d271f6bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Found_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Record Set Found Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Set Found Dialog Box

    +

    The Record Set Found dialog box appears when you attempt to create a record set with the name of an existing record set. You can click Replace to replace the existing record set with the one you are creating, or click Append to add the records to the existing record set.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2234d8cc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Set_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Record Set Setup Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Set Setup Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Record Set Setup dialog box to specify the name and owner for the record set.

    +
      +
    • +

      Type a name to give the record set in the Name box.

      +
    • +
    • Select the owner of the record set in the Owner box. Then click OK. The record set of unlinked bibliographic or authority records is created, and the Record Set workform opens.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Sets_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Sets_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0167212f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Record_Sets_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + + Record Sets Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Record Set Workform

    +

    Record Sets group patron, item, bibliographic, or authority records so they can be processed together. The header of the Record Sets workform shows the record set name, the type of records, the owner of the record set, and the number of records.

    +

    To make changes to the record set or initiate a bulk change process: click Tools and select an option; select one or more records, right-click and choose an option from the context menu; or click on an icon.

    +

    For more information on using record sets, see Creating and Using Record Sets.

    +

    Tip:
    A yellow icon unlinked.gif next to an authority record listed in an authority record set indicates the record is not linked to any other record in Polaris.

    +

    Note:
    You can create record sets automatically by importing records and saving them in a record set. See Set import options for record sets . If you want to see all the bibliographic records or authority records that are not linked to any other records in the database, select Utilities, Cataloging Processing, Create Unlinked Bibliographic Record Set or Create Unlinked Authority Record Set. See Create a record set of unlinked records.

    +

    Use the Record Set workform to:

    +
      +
    • Add records to a Record Set - Select Tools, Add or Tools, Add Scan or click the plus button. The Scan Barcode dialog box appears, in which you scan the barcode (or type the barcode and press ENTER). The selected record appears in the Record Set workform’s Records list, and the Number of records is updated.
    • +
    • Remove records from a Record Set - Select one or more records, and select Tools, or click theminusbutton. This removes the record from the record set but does not affect the record itself.
    • +
    • Make changes to the list - Select one or more records and do one of the following: right-click to use the options on the context menu; click an icon in the list view; or select an option from the Tools menu.
    • +
    • Delete a record from the database - Select the record in the Record Set, and select Tools, Delete or click the delete (X) button in the list view bar. If your library uses the purge process for deleted cataloging records, the records are marked for deletion but are actually deleted from the database during the purge process.
    • +
    • View record set status - Record sets can have a status of Final or Deleted.
    • +
    • Delete the record set - This deletes the record set, but leaves the member records in the Polaris database. Select File, Delete.
    • +
    • Undelete the record set - If enabled by your system administrator, this restores the record set.
    • +
    • Create a record set of linked item records from a bibliographic record set - From the Bibliographic Record Set workform, select Tools, Create Item Record Set, press Ctrl+T, or click itemrecsetbtn.gif. Then type a name for the new record set in the dialog box.
    • +
    • Create a record set of linked bibliographic records from an item record set - From the Item Record Set workform, select Tools, Create Bibliographic Record Set, press Ctrl+T, or click bibrecsetbtn.gif. Then type a name for the new record set in the dialog box.
    • +
    • Bulk change fields in item records, bibliographic records, or patron records. Select Tools, Bulk Change.
    • +
    • Print the record set information and the list of member records - Select File, Print, or click btnPrint00637.gif.
    • +
    • Bulk add records from a bibliographic record set to a selection list -
      • To create a new selection list with all the records in the record set, select Tools, Add all records to, New Selection List. To create a selection list with specific records from the record set, select them in the list, and select Tools, Add selected records to, New Selection List. See Create a selection list by bulk adding titles.
      • To add all the records to an existing selection list, click Tools, Add all records to, Existing Selection List. To add only specific records, select them in the list, and select Tools, Add selected records to, Existing Selection List. See Bulk add titles to an existing selection list.
    • +
    • Bulk add records from a bibliographic record set to a purchase order -
      • To create a new purchase order with all the records in the record set, select Tools, Add all records to, New Purchase Order. To add only specific records, select them in the list, and select Tools, Add selected records to, New Purchase Order. See Create a purchase order by bulk adding titles.
      • To add all the records to an existing purchase order, select Tools, Add all records to, Existing Purchase Order. To add only specific records, select them in the list, and select Tools, Add selected records to, Existing Purchase Order. See
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Replace_Check_for_Duplicates_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Replace_Check_for_Duplicates_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d158f01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Replace_Check_for_Duplicates_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Replace/Check for Duplicates Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Replace/Check for Duplicates Dialog Box

    +

    The Replace/Check for Duplicates dialog box appears when you save a bibliographic record from the Bibliographic Record workform and duplicates are detected. It also appears when you select Tools, Check for Duplicates, click checkdupesicon.gif or press Ctrl+I whether or not duplicates are detected. If duplicates are detected, the dialog box opens with the duplicate records listed. If no duplicates are detected, the dialog box opens with the message No duplicates were found. You can select records to replace with the add button above. You can continue by selecting records to replace or close the dialog box. When a record is replaced, all links to other records are transferred to the newly saved record. See Checking for Duplicate Records.

    +

    Use the Replace/Check for Duplicates dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      View duplicate records - If duplicates are detected according to the rules groups in the Bibliographic Deduplication database table, the bibliographic records determined to be duplicates are displayed in a list. You can select a single bibliographic record and click Open.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add bibliographic records to be replaced - Click addbtn.gif  to search for bibliographic records or bibliographic record sets. When you select a record or records, they appear in the list. If you select a record set or record sets, all the records in the selected record sets appear in the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove bibliographic records from the list of records to be replaced - Select the records to remove from the Records to replace list, and click removebut.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Replace the records in the list with the record displayed in the Bibliographic Record workform - After all the records that you want to replace are displayed in the list, you can click Replace All to replace all the listed records. If you are replacing only some of the records, select the records in the list and click Replace Selected.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Reserve_Item_Template_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Reserve_Item_Template_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20eb8573 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Reserve_Item_Template_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reserve Item Template Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reserve Item Template Workform

    +

    Reserve item templates help you create reserve items quickly. You create a reserve item template the same way as you create a reserve item. The information in the template is carried into all reserve item records created with the template. For example, if in the reserve item template you identify the owning branch as West Essex and the assigned collection as Reserve Room, a new reserve item record based on the template would have the same owning branch and assigned collection information. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Scan_Barcode_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Scan_Barcode_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..06122276 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Scan_Barcode_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Scan Barcode Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Scan Barcode Dialog Box

    +

    The Scan Barcode dialog box appears when you are scanning items to enter them in a record set. Select Add Scan or click AddBrcdBtn00643.gif. Scan or type the barcode and press ENTER.

    +

    The selected record appears in the Record Set workform’s Records list and the Number of records increments.

    +

    See also:

    +

    Creating and Using Record Sets +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Select_Headings_Results_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Select_Headings_Results_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..daf06399 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Select_Headings_Results_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Select Headings Results Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Select Headings Results Dialog Box

    +

    When you browse search for a bibliographic record in the Polaris Find Tool, you may see different instances of a browse heading when you want only one to display. You can change the display heading from the Select Headings Results dialog box. Right-click on the heading that you want to display and select Select Display Heading. The Select Display Heading option is available only when the heading count is greater than 1 and it is not a See or See Also heading.

    +

    Use the Select Headings Results dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Update the browse display to use a specific heading - Select the heading that you want to display and click Update Browse Display. The heading you selected will display in the browse search in the Polaris PowerPAC and in the Find Tool.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Show a list of the bibliographic records linked to the heading - Select the heading and click Show Bib Records. A dialog box lists the bibliographic records that use this heading. You can open the bibliographic records that use the heading you do not want, and update the headings. For example, you could add diacritics to a heading that was missing them.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Set_Default_Printers_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Set_Default_Printers_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..17f19706 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Set_Default_Printers_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Set Default Printers Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Default Printers Dialog Box

    +

    The Set Default Printers dialog box appears when you select Utilities, Label Manager, Tools, Set Default Printers.

    +

    Use the Set Default Printers dialog box to specify the printer to use for each enabled label type.

    +
      +
    • +

      For each label type that is enabled and appears in the Label Type column, click the down arrow to open the list, and select the default printer in the Printer Name column.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The choices depend on what printers have been installed on the workstation.

    +
      +
    • +

      Click Save to save the printer selections.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fc19f1d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + Summary of Changes Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Summary of Changes Dialog Box

    +

    The Summary of Changes dialog box appears after you have set up a bulk change to bibliographic records on the Bibliographic Bulk Change dialog box. See Changing Multiple Bibliographic Records.

    +

    Use the Summary of Changes dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • + View a list of all the changes to the bibliographic records - The dialog box lists the number of bibliographic records that will be changed and the record set name and owner. It also shows the name of the record set that will contain any records that did not get processed and the name of the bulk change report. The bottom part of the dialog box shows all the changes that will be made to the bibliographic records in the record set. +
    • +
    • + Start the bulk change process - Click Continue. +
    • +
    • + Cancel the bulk change process - Click Cancel. +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    See the progress of the bulk change process by selecting Utilities, Cataloging Processing, Bibliographic Bulk Change Queue.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1e2712b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Summary_of_Changes_Dialog_Box1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Summary of Changes Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Summary of Changes Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Summary of Changes dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      View a list of all the changes to item records - The dialog box lists the number of item records that will be changed and the record set name and owner. It also shows the name of the record set that will contain any records that did not get processed and the name of the bulk change report. The bottom part of the dialog box shows all the changes that will be made to the item records in the record set.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Start the bulk change process - Click Continue.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Cancel the bulk change process - Click Cancel.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/System_Generated_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/System_Generated_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ab85f6d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/System_Generated_Authority_Records_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + System Generated Authority Records Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    System Generated Authority Records Dialog Box

    +

    The System Generated Authority Record dialog box appears when you select Create new authority record on the Check See Also From Reference dialog box (when working with authority records) or the Check Headings Details dialog box (when working with bibliographic records). Use the System Generated Authority Record dialog box to display the new authority record. Double-click the record listed in the dialog box to display the Authority Record workform. See Checking Authority Headings.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Template_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Template_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d6442ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcatUI/Template_Setup_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Template Setup Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Template Setup Dialog Box

    +

    The Template Setup dialog box appears when you select File | Save As Template from the Item Record, Bibliographic Record, or Authority Record workform.

    +

    Use the Template Setup dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Name the template - Type a name for the template in the Name box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the template owner - Select the branch that will own the template in the Owner box and click OK.

      +
    • +
    +

    The template workform appears for the type of cataloging record you have selected. See Using Cataloging Templates.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Associated_Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Associated_Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ddcb27c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Associated_Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Associated Patron Blocks Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Associated Patron Blocks Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box, a special case of the Patron Blocks dialog box, appears when you select Tools, Check Associated Patron Blocks in the Patron Status workform. The dialog box lists any blocks on associated patron records with which the patron has a blocking relationship. Double-click any block in the list to open the appropriate view of the Patron Status workform for the associated patron, where you can resolve the blocks (see Patron Blocks Dialog Box). For more information about setting up blocking between associated patrons, see Patron Associations.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Bookmobile_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Bookmobile_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..770ec9e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Bookmobile_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Bookmobile Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Bookmobile Workform

    +

    To access the Bookmobile workform, select Circulation, Bookmobile. See Managing Offline Circulation. Use this workform to:

    +
      +
    • View a Bookmobile transaction file - Select the .TRN file in the Transaction files to be uploaded list, and click View File.
    • +
    • Set days to omit from fine calculation - Type or select a number in the Free days box or select a date from the calendar. If you set a date in the calendar, the system automatically calculates the number of free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation.. The Fines calculated from box shows the date from which fines will be calculated. See Free Days at Check-In. When the files are uploaded, these days are omitted from fine calculation.
    • +
    • Upload a transaction file - Select the .TRN file in the Transaction files to be uploaded list, and click Upload File. SeeView and upload offline transaction files.
    • +
    • View a transaction report - After transaction files are uploaded, you can view a report. Select the .LOG file in the Transaction files already uploaded list, and click View Report.
    • +
    • Delete a transaction report - Select the .LOG file in the Transaction files already uploaded list, and click Delete Report.
    • +
    • Print the workform or the lists - Select File, Print, Current View or File, Print, List View, or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow00614.gif.
    • +
    • Specify which transaction files appear on the workform (terminal server environments) - Select Tools, Options. The Bookmobile: Tools Options dialog box appears, where you can select the current user’s files, the user’s branch files, or all files. See View and upload offline transaction files.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntry.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntry.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eceef0bc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + Brief Item Entry Dialog Box (ILL) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Brief Item Entry Dialog Box (ILL)

    +

    This dialog box appears when you receive an item that was requested through interlibrary loan. It is used to create the virtual item and bib that allow the ILL item to circulate in Polaris. To create the item for a regular ILL item, a matching ILL item template must already be created. To create an item for an INN-Reach request, a matching INN-Reach item template must already be created.

    +

    If the ILL Hold Request indicates the patron no longer wants the item requested (the Return Uncirculated box is checked), the following message appears: The INN-Reach request indicates the patron no longer wants this item.

    +

    Use the Brief Item Entry dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Scan or type the barcode on the physical item being received.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    If the barcode attached to the borrowed material matches an item barcode already in your Polaris system, an error message appears. To resolve this issue and allow the item to circulate, you can affix a temporary barcode to the item and scan that barcode. Your library policy determines how to respond if this occurs.

    +
      +
    • Enter an optional call number. If the item was requested through INN-Reach, the call number appears from the Item Shipped INN-Reach API message.
    • +
    • Add a blocking note, if applicable, in the Free text block box.
    • +
    • Change the default settings in the Circulation Setup area by selecting a different Material type, Loan period, or Fine code.
    • +
    • Click OK to create the virtual bib and item in Polaris.
    • +
    +

    See also:

    + +

    +
    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryCourse.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryCourse.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..075c6c6f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryCourse.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + Brief Item Entry Dialog Box (Course) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Brief Item Entry Dialog Box (Course)

    +

    Before you can create items on reserve for uncataloged material, an item record template named Reserve on the fly must already be created.

    +

    This dialog box appears when you select the Create Item icon on the Course Reserves workform.

    +

    Use this dialog box to enter the information to create the reserve item:

    +
      +
    • Enter the barcode in the Item barcode box.
    • +
    • Type the title in the Title box.
    • +
    • Type an optional author in the Author box.
    • +
    • Type the call number in the Call number box.
    • +
    • Type a block note in the Free text block box, if appropriate
    • +
    • Leave the OTF block check box unchecked.
    • +
    • Modify the Circulation settings (Material Code, Fine Period, Loan Period, Collection)
    • +
    • Click OK.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryOTF.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryOTF.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5285e93f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/BriefItemEntryOTF.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Brief Item Entry Dialog Box (OTF) + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Brief Item Entry Dialog Box (OTF)

    +

    This dialog box appears if you enter a barcode for which no item is found and you opt to create an item record on-the-fly (OTF).

    +

    Use the Brief Item Entry dialog box to create the OTF item:

    +
      +
    • Type the title in the Title box.
    • +
    • Type the call number in the Call number box.
    • +
    • Type an optional author in the Author box
    • +
    • Type an optional note in the Free text block box.
    • +
    • Change the default settings if necessary.
    • +
    • Click OK.
    • +
    +

    The Check Out workform appears with the item in the Items Checked Out list.

    +

    See also: Checking Out Uncataloged Items

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ChargeMisParts.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ChargeMisParts.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..87096f8e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ChargeMisParts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Charge for Missing Parts Dialog Box

    +

    The Charge for missing parts dialog box opens when you select a claim type of Claim Missing Parts from the Patron Status workform , Claims view, and select the Check-in/charge for missing parts button .

    +

    Use the Charge for Missing Parts dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Enter the dollar amount for the charge in the Amount box.
    • +
    • Select the reason for the charge in the Reason drop-down list box
    • +
    • Enter notes regarding the charge in the Notes box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_In_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_In_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..76cfae98 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_In_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check In Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In Workform

    +

    To access the Check-In workform, select Circulation > Check In. From the Check In workform, you can check in items, do bulk check-ins, resolve fines, place holds, track in-house use of items, and take an item inventory. See Taking an Item Inventory. Use the toolbar to:

    +
      +
    • Print information from this workform - Select File > Print > Current View; File > Print > All Views; or File > Print > List View, or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow00612.gif and make a selection.
    • +
    • Place a hold request - Select Tools, Place Hold, or click PlaceHoldButton00613.gif. See Placing Hold Requests.
    • +

      Tip:
      To place a hold on an item already checked in, right-click the item in the list, and select Place Hold from the context menu. The Hold Request form appears with the item information already filled in.

      +
    • Change an item’s circulation status or shelf location - Select Tools > Manage Item, or click ManageItemIcn.gif. See Change item information or barcode at check-in.
    • +
    • Change an item’s barcode - Select Tools > Replace Barcode, or click ReplaceBarcodeIcn.gif. See Change item information or barcode at check-in.
    • +
    • Check in items returned to the circ desk - Select View > Normal Mode, or click CheckInNorm.gif.
    • +
    • Check in many items - Select View > Bulk Mode, or click CheckInBulk.gif.
    • +
    • Track in-library use - Select View > InHouse Mode, or click CheckInHouse.gif.
    • +
    • Take an item inventory - Select View > Update InventoryDate, or click CheckInInvent.gif.
    • +
    • Set a default view - Select View > Save Current View as User Default. This setting is saved as part of your staff member record, and remains in effect regardless of the log-on workstation or branch.
    • +
    +

    Check In Workform - Normal View

    +

    See Doing Normal Item Check-Ins. Use this view to:

    + +

    Check In Workform - Bulk View

    +

    See Doing Bulk Item Check-Ins. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Check in items in bulk - Type or scan the item barcodes. See Check in items in bulk.
    • +

      Tip:
      To find an item without a working barcode, click the Find button next to the Item barcode box to display the Polaris Find Tool, and search for the item record.

      +
    • Omit days from overdue fine calculation - Enter the number in the Free days box or select a date from the calendar. If you set a date in the calendar, the system automatically calculates the number of free days. See Free Days at Check-In.
    • +
    +

    Check In Workform - InHouse View

    +

    Use the Check In workform - InHouse view to check in items that did not circulate, but were used by patrons in the library. This workflow is useful for libraries that keep statistics on in-house item use. See Tracking In-House Item Use.

    +

    Check In Workform - Update InventoryDate View

    +

    Use the Check In workform - Update InventoryDate view to take an item inventory. Items are not checked in through this view, but items whose status is not In and items that are misshelved are flagged. See Taking an Item Inventory.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_Out_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_Out_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ffb38a11 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Check_Out_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check Out Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check Out Workform

    +

    The Check Out workform is the basic tool for checking out items at the circulation desk. See Check-Out and Renewal.

    +

    Use this workform to:

    +

    +

    +

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Circulation_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Circulation_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b3169067 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Circulation_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Circulation Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Circulation UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Circulation UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Declare_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Declare_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f2e803ae --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Declare_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Declare Lost Item Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Declare Lost Item Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Declare Lost Item dialog box, select Circulation > Patron Status, to display the patron’s record in the Patron Status workform, select View > Items Out to display the Items Out view. Then select the appropriate line item in the Items Out list, and click declarelostbtn.gif or press Ctrl+L.

    +

    Use this dialog box to manually declare an item lost and handle any related charges. See Managing Lost Items.

    +

    Note:
    If the patron has already received a bill for the item, the Billed check box is selected. For billed items, the possible actions are Leave as is, Pay or Waive. The charge has already been posted to the patron’s account, and if you select Leave as is, no action is taken on the account.

    +
      +
    • Indicate the amount to be charged - Any replacement, processing, or overdue charges appear in the appropriate columns. You can accept the amount, or type the new amount in the Amount box.
    • +
    • Select the action to take on the charge - Select Charge, Pay, or Waive in the Replacement Actions box. (Leave as Is appears if the charge was already billed to the patron’s account.) Charge places the charge on the patron’s account. Waive means the patron is not obligated to pay the charge. Select Pay if you will process the payment immediately.
    • +

      Important:
      If your library uses Active Payment Manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments, you cannot pay charges from this dialog box. Instead, you must charge the patron’s account, then pay the charge from the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Pay charges from the Account view.

      +
        +
      • Select the payment method - If you chose Pay, select the method in the Payment method box and take the payment.
      • +
      • Send a bill - If you selected Charge as an action, you can select the Send a bill check box to bill the patron for the charge. See Declare an Item Lost.
      • +
      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Fill_Hold_Renew_Item_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Fill_Hold_Renew_Item_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a2d4cec5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Fill_Hold_Renew_Item_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Fill Hold/Renew Item Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Fill Hold / Fill INN-Reach Hold Request Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you check out, check in, or renew an item that satisfies a request for another patron. It displays the title and barcode of the item and the patron name, barcode, and phone number of the patron who requested the item. If the request was placed through INN-Reach, the message indicates that the item satisfies an INN-Reach hold request.

    +

    If the title of the dialog box is Fill Hold, you can:

    +
      +
    • Continue with the check-in or check-out - Click No. If you click No, another message asks if you want to reactivate the hold request for this patron. Click Yes to reactivate the hold or No if you do not want to reactivate the hold.
    • +
    • Hold the item for the patron who requested it - Click Yes.
    • +
    • Cancel the check-in or check-out process - Click Cancel.
    • +
    • Continue or stop a renewal - If you choose to continue the renewal, the hold request remains active. If you stop the renewal, you can then check in the item and trap it for the hold request.
    • +
    +

    Note: +
    The Patron Services parameter Renewal: Block if there are holds determines whether this message is always displayed when renewing items for which there are hold requests, or only when the item being renewed is the only item available to fill the request. See Blocking Holds at Renewal.

    +

    If the title of the dialog box is Fill INN-Reach Hold Request, you can:

    +
      +
    • Ship the item requested through INN-Reach to the branch location where it will be shipped to the library whose patron requested it - Click Yes.
    • +
    • Continue with the check-in or check-out - Select No.
    • +
    • Cancel the check-in or check-out process - Select Cancel.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Floating_Limit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Floating_Limit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c645a787 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Floating_Limit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Floating Limit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Floating Limit Dialog Box

    +

    If your system uses floating collections, this message may appear when you check in a floating item from another branch that exceeds your branch’s limits. You can continue to check in the item and override the limit, if that is your branch’s policy. Alternatively, you choose to put the item in-transit to its home branch, or you can cancel the check-in. For detailed information about floating collections, see Setting Up Floating Collections.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Hold_Request_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Hold_Request_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..54e101c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Hold_Request_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + + Hold Request Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Hold Request Workform

    +

    To access the Hold Request workform, select Circulation > Hold Requests, and search for the hold request. From the Hold Request workform, you work with single or multiple hold requests. If your library is licensed to use the INN-Reach integration, INN-Reach API messages create item-level hold requests in Polaris. See Other library's patron places a hold request using INN-Reach

    +

    Use the toolbar and top part of the workform to:

    +
      +
    • Place a new hold request or edit this request - See Placing Hold Requests and Editing Hold Requests.
      • Request date - Displays the date and time when the hold request was created.
      • Activation date - The date the request goes into effect. For new requests, select a date equal to or later than the current date. For active and inactive requests, you can change the date to one equal to or later than the current date.
      • Expiration date - The date the hold request expires, allowing a patron to specify a “not wanted after” date. For new requests, select a date equal to or later than the current date. For active, inactive, and pending requests, you can change the date to one equal to or later than the current date. If the activation date changes, the expiration date automatically changes.
      • Unclaimed date - The date by which the patron must pick up the held item. Otherwise, the request status automatically changes from held to unclaimed at 11:59 p.m., and the item is available for circulation. This field appears only if the request status is held or unclaimed.
      • Pickup - The library where the patron picks up the requested item. You can change the pick-up library for active, inactive, pending, and held requests.
      • Origin - Set automatically. Patron indicates that the request was placed in the PAC. Library indicates that the request was placed in the staff client.
      • Borrow by mail - Licensed feature. Indicates that this request is a Borrow by Mail request, where an item that fills the request is mailed to the patron. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
      • Tracking - Used with Borrow by Mail. Stores the optional tracking number for a Borrow by mail item that has been shipped to the patron. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.
      • This item only - If the request is an item-level request, this read-only check box is automatically checked when you save the hold request.
    • +
    • Place a single hold request or multiple hold requests consecutively - See Place single or consecutive hold requests.
    • +
    • Delete this hold request - You can delete a cancelled, expired, inactive, or not-supplied request. Select File > Delete, or click pbutDelete00617.gif. See Delete hold requests.
    • +
    • Convert a hold request to an interlibrary loan (ILL) request - You can convert an active, expired, inactive, or not-supplied request. Select Tools > Convert to ILL, or click pbutConvILL00618.gif. See Convert hold requests to ILL requests.
    • +
    • Deny an item for hold - From a pending request, select Tools > Deny Hold, or click DenyItem.gif. See Deny items for Requests-To-Fill.
    • +
    • Cancel a hold request - You can cancel an active, inactive, pending, or not-supplied request. Select Tools > Cancel, or click pbutCancel00619.gif. See Cancel hold requests.
    • +
    • Reactivate a hold request - You can reactivate a cancelled, expired, or not-supplied request. Select Tools > Reactivate, or click pReactivateIcon00620.gif. SeeReactivate hold requests.
    • +
    • Fill a hold request immediately - From a cancelled, expired, or not-supplied request, select Tools > Fill Now, or click pFillNow.gif. SeeFill a hold request with Fill Now.
    • +
    • Transfer a request from one bibliographic or item record to another - You can transfer an active or inactive hold request. Select Tools > Transfer. See Transfer a hold request.
    • +
    • Refresh (update) the data on the workform - Select View > Refresh, or click oRefrshicn00621.gif.
    • +
    • Print information from this workform - Select File > Print > Current View; File > Print > All Views; or File > Print > List View (when available), or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow00622.gif and make a selection.
    • +
    • Input patron and bibliographic data - Select View > General, or click HoldReqGen.gif.
    • +
    • Type notes, see request history, work with items - Select View > Notes, or click HoldReqNotes.gif.
    • +
    • Request one title for multiple patrons, or multiple titles for one patron - Select View > Multi-Request, or click HoldReqGroup.gif.
    • +
    +

    Hold Request Workform - General View

    +

    Use the Hold Request workform - General view to input patron and bibliographic data for a hold request. See Placing Hold Requests.

    +
      +
    • Find a patron record - Click the Find button by the patron Name box to search for the record of the patron requesting the hold. When you select the patron, the Name, Barcode, Code, and Registered at boxes are filled in.
    • +

      Note:
      The Notification box, which shows the patron’s notification method, is informational only and cannot be edited on the Hold Request workform.

      +
    • Scan a patron barcode - If you scan the barcode, the Name, Code, and Registered at boxes are filled in.
    • +
    • Find a bibliographic or item record - Click the Find button by the bibliographic Title box to search for the bibliographic or item record for the hold request. When you select the title or item, the appropriate Details boxes are filled in. The Item barcode field is filled in for item requests only, not title (bibliographic level) requests.
    • +
    • Scan an item barcode - With the cursor in the Item barcode field, scan the item barcode directly into the field. The item information is automatically filled in.
    • +
    +

    Hold Request Workform - Notes View

    +

    Use the Hold Request workform - Notes view to enter and view notes about the request, see a list of items that can fill the request, and see the request history. If the hold request includes a note, the Notes view icon is yellow NotesBtnYellow.gif.

    +
      +
    • Notes - Staff display notes are printed on the hold slip, and appear when an item that can fill a hold request is trapped An item is said to be trapped for a hold when an item that fills a request is scanned at circulation and the system links the item to a specific request, either automatically or by displaying a message that prompts you for a decision. at circulation. Non-public notes appear on this workform only. You can type and edit text in these fields. Patron notes are entered by the patron when the request is placed from the PAC. PAC display notes are available to the patron in the PAC patron account - Request page, and can be edited if you have the system-level Circulation permission Modify PAC display note: Allow.
    • +

      Note:
      Libraries that use Polaris Borrow by Mail may have default text in the Staff display and PAC display notes fields. See Borrow By Mail Circulation.

      +
    • Request history - Lists each change in the request’s status. For requests placed from the PAC, the user name is PAC. The Branch column lists the item’s assigned branch, where a branch has an item eligible to fill the request. For example, if the status is Pending and Library A is the branch, the request appears on Library A’s requests-to-fill report.
      The Action column lists the following types of statuses:
      • An item has trapped and been held for this request
      • An item linked to this request has been checked out
      • An item was held but not claimed by the patron
      • An item was located for this request
      • Primary RTF Requests-To-Fill or RTF processing +sends hold requests to designated libraries in a specified order. A library chooses to fill or deny the request. The request is routed until it is filled, it expires, or every library denies it. processing placed request on pick list
      • Primary RTF processing placed request on pick list - primary RTF routing cycle completed
      • Request activated during request creation
      • Request canceled by patron via self check
      • Request canceled due to item record deletion
      • Request canceled due to patron merge
      • Request canceled manually
      • Request has reached the expiration date
      • Request is not supplied
      • Request is not supplied because item was declared lost manually
      • Request is not supplied because no bib record exists
      • Request is not supplied because overdue item was billed and declared lost
      • Request is not supplied because the item is not holdable
      • Request is not supplied because the item was denied
      • Request is not supplied because the system determined no items were available for this patron
      • Request is not supplied due to bib record deletion
      • Request is not supplied due to item record deletion
      • Request pickup branch was modified
      • Request placed on a pick list as a result of a located item returned to RTF processing
      • Request reactivated as a result of ask me later processing
      • Request reactivated because activation date modified
      • Request reactivated because all items were denied for a branch in RTF
      • Request reactivated because one item was denied for a branch in RTF
      • Request reactivated by system processing
      • Request reactivated due to item record deletion
      • Request reactivated during circulation processing
      • Request reactivated during RTF processing
      • Request reactivated during RTF processing - primary RTF routing cycle completed
      • Request reactivated during RTF processing - primary RTF routing cycle completed and moved to secondary RTF
      • Request reactivated during RTF processing - secondary RTF routing cycle completed
      • Request reactivated manually by user
      • Request was made inactive because activation date modified
      • Request was made inactive during request creation
      • Request was shipped to the pickup branch
      • Secondary RTF processing placed request on pick list
      • Secondary RTF processing placed request on pick list - primary RTF routing cycle completed
      • Secondary RTF processing placed request on pick list - secondary RTF routing cycle completed
    • +
    • Request satisfied by list - Lists all the items that can fill the hold request and are bound to it. You can right-click an item to open the item record.
    • +
    +

    Hold Request Workform - Multi-Request View

    +

    Use the Hold Request workform - Multi-Request view to:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Holds_Queue_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Holds_Queue_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e85be5d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Holds_Queue_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + + Holds Queue Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Holds Queue Workform

    +

    To access the Holds Queue workform, select Circulation > Holds Queue. The Holds Queue workform displays the request queue for a title. Use this workform to:

    +
      +
    • Rearrange the queue - The queue position determines the order in which requests are filled. See Managing the Holds Queue.
    • +
    • Move a request up in the queue - Select the request, and click pbutMoveUp.gif.
    • +
    • Move a request down in the queue - Select the request, and click pbutMoveDown.gif.
    • +
    • Move a request to the first position in the queue - Select the request, and click pbutMoveTop.gif.
    • +
    • Filter the queue display for specific volume or issue requests - Select the specific volume or issue from the Volume or Issue filter list near the top of top of the workform.
    • +
    • Create a new hold request for a listed title - Select the title and click PlaceHoldButton00625.gif. The Hold Request workform appears with the title information filled in. See Placing Hold Requests.
    • +
    • Create a new hold request for a different title - Click newicon.gif above the queue. The Hold Request workform appears.
    • +
    • Edit a hold request - Right-click the request, and select Open from the context menu. See Edit hold request data.
    • +
    • Convert a hold request to an interlibrary loan (ILL) request - Right-click an active request, and select Convert to ILL Request from the context menu. See Convert hold requests to ILL requests.
    • +
    • Deny an item for hold - Right-click a pending request, and select Deny Hold from the context menu. See Deny items for Requests-To-Fill.
    • +
    • Cancel a hold request - Right-click an active or pending request, and select Cancel Hold from the context menu. See Cancel hold requests.
    • +
    • Print information from this workform - Select File > Print > Current View or File > Print > List View, or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow00626.gif and make a selection.
    • +
    • Refresh (update) the data on the workform - Select View > Refresh, or click oRefrshicn00627.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ILL_Request_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ILL_Request_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..091241f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/ILL_Request_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + ILL Request Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    ILL Request Dialog Box

    +

    To access the ILL Request dialog box, display the ILL request, right-click and select Edit. Use this dialog box to edit interlibrary loan request details and information about the requested item, and add notes to the request. The status of the request determines which fields can be edited.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Item_Record_Set_Setup.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Item_Record_Set_Setup.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4ee03f41 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Item_Record_Set_Setup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + Item Record Set Setup Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Item Record Set Setup Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you select Tools > Create Item Record Set or press Ctrl+T from the Patron Record Set workform.

    +

    Use this dialog box to create an item record set of the items where the current or last borrower is a patron in the record set:

    +
      +
    • Identify the item record set - Type the name for the record set in the Name box.
    • +
    • Identify the record set owner - Select the organization that owns the record set in the Owner box.
    • +
    • Filter the items by circulation status - Select one or more check boxes under Circ status.
    • +
    • Filter the items by patron code - Select one or more check boxes under Patron code.
    • +
    • Include items with a deleted status that remain in the database - Select the Include items with a record status of "deleted" check box.
    • +
    • Generate the item record set - Select OK.
    • +

      The item record set is created containing the item records that meet the selected criteria, and have a current or last borrower (if no current borrower) whose record is in the patron record set.

      +

      The Item Record Set workform displays an automatically-supplied date/time stamp appended to the record set name and a "Created from patron record set <record set name>" note.

      +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Linked_Hold_Requests_List_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Linked_Hold_Requests_List_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7321e07d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Linked_Hold_Requests_List_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + Linked Hold Requests List Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Hold Requests List Box

    +

    The Linked Hold Requests List Box appears when you select Links > All Hold Requests from a workform or context menu and there are multiple hold requests linked to the bibliographic record.

    +

    Use the Linked Hold Requests List box to:

    +
      +
    • + Open a hold request - Select the hold request, right-click, and select Open. The Hold Request workform appears. +
    • +
    • + Print the hold request - Select the hold request, right-click, and select Print. +
    • +
    • + Print the list - Select the printer icon in the menu bar. +
    • +
    • + Convert the hold request to an interlibrary loan (ILL) request - Select the hold request, right-click, and select Convert to ILL Request. See Convert hold requests to ILL requests. +
    • +
    • + Cancel the hold - Select the hold request, right-click, and select Cancel Hold. See Cancel hold requests. +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Patrons.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Patrons.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02665d5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Multiple_Object_Deletion_-_Patrons.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + + Multiple Object Deletion - Patrons + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Multiple Object Deletion - Patrons

    +

    The Multiple Object Deletion dialog box appears when you select multiple patron records in a list box, record set, or Find Tool results list and select Delete.

    +
      +
    • Suppress warning messages - If you have the required permissions, you can keep the warning messages for unbreakable or breakable links from appearing as the system goes through deleting multiple bibliographic records.
    • +

      To keep the warning messages for unbreakable links from appearing, you must have the following permission: Suppress warnings for unbreakable links and other stopping conditions, when deleting multiple patron records: Allow.

      +
    • Uncheck the breakable links box to suppress warning messages from appearing when the system encounters patron records that have breakable links. The system will continue deleting these records without a warning message, provided you have the appropriate permissions.
    • +
    • Uncheck the unbreakable links and other stopping conditions box to suppress warning messages from appearing when the system encounters patron records that have unbreakable links or other conditions that prevent them from being deleted. When the warning messages for unbreakable links are suppressed, these records are skipped because they cannot be deleted, but no warning message appears.
    • +
    • Confirm that you want to delete the records - Click Yes to delete the selected records. If you do not want to delete the records, click No.
    • +
    +

    You can override the following types of blocks if you have the permission Patron registration: Override blocks to delete for the patron’s registered branch:

    +
      +
    • Patron record - Library assigned block, free text block, patron note, associated patron records, link to a routing list, verify patron data block
    • +
    • Patron account - Recent charge, amount due, credit, deposit
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    +

    If not suppressed, warning messages regarding breakable or unbreakable links display when you delete multiple patron records.

    +

    Patron records with the following blocks, links, or conditions can be deleted if you have the appropriate permissions:

    +

    Note:
    You can override breakable blocks if you have the permission: Patron registration: Override blocks to delete for the patron’s registration branch.

    +
      +
    • Library-assigned block
    • +
    • Free text block
    • +
    • Recent charge
    • +
    • Patron account has an amount due
    • +
    • Patron account has a credit
    • +
    • Patron account has a deposit
    • +
    • Patron note
    • +
    • Associated patron records
    • +
    • Linked to a routing list
    • +
    • Verify borrower block
    • +
    • Unbreakable links or blocks - Patron records with the following links or conditions cannot be deleted:
    • +
    • Linked to items with a status of Out, Lost or Claimed
    • +
    • Linked to hold requests with a status of Held or Shipped
    • +
    • Linked to ILL requests with a status of Received
    • +
    • System assigned block
    • +
    • Collection agency block
    • +
    • Do not delete option is checked
    • +
    • An item is currently routed to the patron through Serials routing
    • +
    • Additional unbreakable blocks - These are the possible blocking conditions that your library may have defined in the Polaris Administration Patron Services parameter Patron delete options:

      Note:
      See Set blocks for patron record deletion.

      • Outstanding charge older than a library-defined number of days
      • Account balance over a library-defined amount
      • Credit balance over a library-defined
      • Deposit balance over a library-defined amount
      • Patron last activity date is less than a library-defined number of days ago
      • Patron record has notes
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Options_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Options_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88da945b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Options_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + + Options Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Options Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box serves several purposes, depending on where you open it. Review the sections below for additional information.

    +

    Tools/Options Dialog Box - Receipt Printing

    +

    Use the Tools/Options dialog box to set circulation receipt and slip printing from the workform from which you opened the dialog box. The options are available when you select Tools > Options from the following workforms:

    +
      +
    • Check Out workform
    • +
    • Check In workform
    • +
    • Request Manager workform
    • +
    • Patron Status workform
    • +
    • Item Record workform
    • +
    • Outreach Services Manager workform
    • +
    +

    At each workstation, you need to set the options only once from each workform, unless you want to change your settings. See Setting Up Receipt Printing from Workforms.

    +
      +
    • Set the receipts to print from this workform - Select one or more of the following receipt/slip check boxes:
      • Check out receipt
      • Fine receipt
    • +

      Note:
      If you check only if no eReceipt, fine receipts are printed only when the patron does not receive eReceipts. If only if no eReceipt is not checked, printed receipts are produced in addition to eReceipts for patrons who receive eReceipts. For more information about setting up eReceipts in Polaris Administration, see Setting Up eReceipts.

      +
    • In-transit slip
    • +

      Note:
      Select In-transit slip if you want to print the slip when an item’s status changes to Transferred (because it will fill a hold) or In Transit (because it belongs to another library). If you want to print the slip only when an item’s status changes to Transferred, select (check) Holds only.

      +
    • Hold slip
    • +
    • Hold call slip (available if this option is enabled for your library)
    • +
    • Hold pickup slip (available if this option is enabled for your library)
    • +
    • Print ILL slip (Request Manager workform - ILL view only)
    • +
    • Print ILL pickup slip (Request Manager workform - ILL view only; available if the hold pickup slip is enabled for your library)
    • +
    • Set the printer type - Select Receipt or Page.
    • +

      Note:
      If you are using a receipt printer, you may be able to set automatic cutting and printing options. See Set receipt printer control codes. From the staff client, you can customize the message text that appears on all receipts. See Set receipt printer message text.

      +
    • Select a printer driver - Receipt printers only. Select the appropriate printer driver in the Drivers box. These options are set in Polaris Administration. See Set receipt printer control codes.
    • +
    +

    Circulation Options Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Circulation Options dialog box to set options related to workstations sounds, smart card readers, and receipts message text.

    +
      +
    • Sounds tab - If you want to specify different sound types, select Use Windows Sounds. Your computer must have a sound card and external speakers for this option. If you do not want to specify sound types, select Use Default Beep. If you selected Windows sounds, you need to set up sounds in the Windows control panel. For details, see Setting Circulation Audio Signals.
    • +
    • Smart Card Reader tab - If your workstation uses a 3M™ smart card reader to read patron smart cards, select Smart card reader installed. See Setting the Workstation for Smart Card Use.
    • +
    • Receipt Printer Options tab - Type the standard message that you want to appear on check-out and fine receipts. See Set receipt printer message text.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Auto-cut the end option on this tab applies only to printers that have problems with auto-cutting hold pickup slips. You must also make some printer settings. See Correct an auto-cut problem for hold pickup slips.

    +

    Tools/Options Dialog Box - Bookmobile

    +

    Use the Bookmobile Tools/ Options dialog box to set the transaction files that display in the list to be uploaded. These options apply to terminal server environments only. See View and upload offline transaction files.

    +

    RFID Options Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you select Tools > RFID Options from the Item Record workform. Use this Tools/Options dialog box to set RFID options before initializing an RFID tag for the item.

    +
      +
    • 3M tags - The Library Code and Country Code options do not apply to 3M tags. If this item is part of a set, enter the part number and total parts in the appropriate fields.
    • +
    • EnvisionWare tags - EnvisionWare RFID tags require a library code and a country code. The default library code is your Polaris site code, taken from your Polaris license. The default country code is the two-letter abbreviation based on the standard ISO 3166-1. If this item is part of a set, place the entire tag set on the reader and enter only the total number of parts. EnvisionWare set tags are automatically numbered.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Overdue_Fine_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Overdue_Fine_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..15d2dd13 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Overdue_Fine_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Overdue Fine Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Overdue Fine Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you attempt to renew an item for which there is an overdue fine, and your library does not automatically waive fines at renewal.

    +
      +
    • Pay - Click to pay the fine and allow the renewal.
    • +
    • Waive - Click to waive the fine and allow the renewal.
    • +
    • Charge Account - Click to charge the fine to the patron’s account and allow the renewal.
    • +
    • Cancel - Click to stop the renewal.
    • +
    +

    For detailed information about handling overdue fines at renewal, see Renewing Items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c5af9f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Blocks_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Blocks Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Blocks Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears during checkout or renewal when the transacting patron record has a block, or when an associated patron record is blocked and there is a blocking relationship between the two records. See Working with Blocks (Stops).

    +
      +
    • Override the blocks and continue the transaction - Click Yes (or press Y). You must have the appropriate permissions to override blocks. See Setting Circulation Permissions. If the only block is for a held item, you can override the block without special permission.
    • +
    • Stop the transaction - Click No (or press N).
    • +
    • Manage the blocks - Select a block to manage and press Enter. The appropriate workform opens. For example, if the block is Patron owes money, the Patron Status workform - Account view opens. For Verify Patron blocks, the Patron Registration workform opens. For associated patron blocks, the Patron Status workform for the associated patron opens.
    • +
    • For overdue or long overdue blocks, check in the items, make claims, or declare the items lost. See Doing Normal Item Check-Ins, Working with Claims, or Managing Lost Items.
    • +
    • For amounts owed, resolve the charges. See Processing Charges and Payments.
    • +
    • For Verify Patron blocks, verify the patron’s account information and save the patron record. See Resolve a Verify Patron block.
    • +
    • For unread patron messages, an alert message appears in the Patron Blocks dialog box. You can continue the check-out operation or cancel it, and you can also click the block text to open the Patron Status workform - Notes view. The alert message does not place any blocks on patron activity in the PAC. For more information about patron messages, see Posting Patron Messages.
    • +
    • Delete staff-generated blocks or blocking notes if appropriate. See Delete a patron block.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Checkout_Charge_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Checkout_Charge_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4a21b04 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Checkout_Charge_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Checkout Charge Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Checkout Charge Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears when you scan an item at checkout or renewal, the item’s assigned branch has placed a charge on the item for checkout or renewal, and your library has set this dialog box to appear.

    +
      +
    • Pay - Click to pay the charge and allow the transaction.
    • +
    • Waive - Click to waive the charge and allow the transaction.
    • +
    • Charge Account - Click to charge the patron’s account and allow the transaction.
    • +
    • Cancel - Click to stop the transaction.
    • +
    +

    For detailed information about messages that may appear during checkout and renewal, see Patron Registration Workform. For more information about Polaris Administration settings for checkout and renewal charges, see Charging for Checkout and Renewal.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Registration_Fee_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Registration_Fee_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..180589fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Patron_Registration_Fee_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration Fee Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration Fee Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box appears if the library charges a registration fee and you attempt to save a new patron record.

    +
      +
    • Pay - Click to take payment for the fee. You must have the permission Fines: Pay fines at circ to use this option. If a fee is partially paid, a block is placed on the patron account. If the option to print a receipt was selected, a receipt prints.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Receipts are printed using the printer and driver set up for the Check Out workform printer.

    +
      +
    • Waive - Click to waive the fee for this patron. You must have the permission Fines: Waive fines at circ to use this option. A waive transaction is recorded for the patron, and a receipt prints if the receipt option was selected and you library does not suppress printing for waive receipts.
    • +
    • Charge - The charge is written to the patron account. The charge reason is listed as Registration fee and a block is placed on the patron account.
    • +
    +

    For more information, see Create a patron record.

    +

    For information about setting registration fees in Polaris Administration, see Charging for Patron Registration.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reactivate_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reactivate_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c889cb2b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reactivate_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reactivate Hold Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reactivate Hold Dialog Box

    +

    This message appears during check out or check in when the item satisfied a hold request for another patron, but you chose to override the request and continue with check out or check in. Click Yes to reactivate the original patron’s request, or click No to leave the request inactive.

    +

    For more information about processing hold requests, see Working with Interlibrary Loans.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Request_Manager_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Request_Manager_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e2bc2fd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Request_Manager_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + + Request Manager Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Request Manager Workform

    +

    To access the Request Manager workform, select Circulation, Request Manger. In the Request Manager workform, you can view and process hold requests-to-fill; place and edit hold requests; and work with interlibrary loan requests. See Working with Interlibrary Loans.

    +

    Use the toolbar to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Print the Reports - If you are working with regular hold requests, you can select File, Print, Holds to Fill or Holds to Transfer. See Manage pending hold requests (Requests-to-Fill). If you are working with INN-Reach holds, you can select Holds to Fill (INN-Reach) or Holds to Fill (Regular and INN-Reach). See Polaris as the INN-Reach Borrowing Library.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print information from this workform - Select File, Print, Current View; File, Print, All Views; or File, Print, List View, or click the down arrow by the print button and make a selection.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Refresh (update) the data on the workform - Select View, Refresh, or click oRefrshicn.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Go to another view:

      +
        +
      • Manage branch requests-to-fill, work with hold requests - Select View, Hold Requests, or click RequestsHoldsView.gif.
      • +
      • Work with interlibrary loan requests - Select View, ILL Requests, or click RequestsILLView.gif.
      • +
      • Work with INN-Reach requests - Select View, INN-Reach lending requests, or click . This view appears only if your library is licensed to use INN-Reach. See Implementing and Using INN-Reach Integration.
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    Request Manager Workform - Hold Requests View

    +

    This view displays hold requests.

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Filter the displayed requests - Select the branch, By value, and request status. For example, if you are processing requests-to-fill for your branch, select your branch, a By value of Item, and a status of Pending. See Display hold requests by selected criteria.
    • +
    • Determine which hold requests to fill - See Fill hold requests for Requests-To-Fill.
    • +
    • Deny an item for requests-to-fill - Select a pending request, and click pbutDeny.gif. See Deny items for Requests-To-Fill.
    • +
    • Create a new hold request - Click pbutNewReq.gif above the Requests list. See Placing Hold Requests.
    • +
    • Find any hold request - Select File, Open to open the Polaris Find Tool and search for hold requests.
    • +
    • Edit a hold request - Right-click a request in the Requests list, and select Open from the context menu. See Edit hold request data.
    • +
    • Open a linked record - Right-click a request in the Requests list, and select Links from the context menu. To see information about a request without opening a record, select the request and click pbutProps.gif above the Requests list.
    • +
    • Cancel a hold request - Select an active, inactive, or pending request, and click pbutCancel.gif above the Requests list. See Cancel hold requests.
    • +
    • Reactivate a hold request - Select a cancelled, expired, or not-supplied request, and click pReactivateIcon.gif above the Requests list. See Reactivate hold requests.
    • +
    • Delete a hold request - Select a cancelled, expired, inactive, or not-supplied request, and click pbutDelete.gif above the Requests list. See Delete hold requests.
    • +
    • Print a Borrow by Mail checklist - Select the Borrow by Mail requests and click BBMPrintChecklist.gif above the Requests list. See Process Borrow by Mail items in bulk.
    • +
    • Print Borrow by Mail item mailers - Select the Borrow by Mail requests and click BBMPrintMailer.gif above the Requests list. See Process Borrow by Mail items in bulk.
    • +
    • Convert a hold request to an interlibrary loan (ILL) request - Select an active, expired, inactive, or not-supplied request, and click pbutConvILL.gif. See Convert hold requests to ILL requests.
    • +
    • View the Held items to transfer list - If either the patron or a staff member has changed the pickup location for a Held item, staff members can use this list to pull the item from the holds shelf, scan the item in to assign the new pickup location, and transfer the item to the new location. See Check-in a held item with a changed pickup location.
    • +
    +

    Request Manager Workform - ILL Requests View

    +

    This view displays Interlibrary Loan (ILL) requests including requests placed through INN-Reach (if your library has a license for INN-Reach integration with Polaris). See Working with Interlibrary Loans for information on regular ILL requests or Polaris as the INN-Reach Borrowing Library for information on requests placed through INN-Reach.

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Filter the displayed requests - Select the branch, By value, and request status. See Display ILL requests in the Requests Manager.
    • +
    • Edit an interlibrary loan request - Right-click a request in the Requests list, and select Edit from the context menu. The ILL Request dialog box appears, where you can edit ILL request details and information about the requested item, and add notes to the request. The status of the request determines which fields can be edited. See Edit an ILL request.
    • +
    • Export an ILL request to OCLC - Right-click an inactive request, and select Export from the context menu. See Export ILL requests to OCLC.
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    You can open the records linked to the ILL request. Right-click the request and select Links from the context menu.

    +
      +
    • Receive an ILL item - Right-click an active request, and select Receive from the context menu. See Receive an ILL item.
    • +
    • Return an ILL item - Right-click a received request, and select Return from the context menu. See Return ILL items.
    • +
    • Cancel an ILL request - Right-click an active or inactive request, and select Cancel from the context menu. See Cancel interlibrary loan requests.
    • +
    • Delete an ILL request - Right-click a cancelled, inactive, or returned request, and select Delete from the context menu. See Delete interlibrary loan requests.
    • +
    • Print an ILL request - Right-click a request, and select Print, Request from the context menu.
    • +
    • Find any ILL request - Select File, Open to open the Polaris Find Tool and search for ILL requests.
    • +
    +

    Request Manager Workform - INN-Reach Lending Requests View

    +

    This view displays INN-Reach lending requests. See Polaris as the INN-Reach Lending Library.

    +

    Use this view to check for any INN-Reach holds to fill. If any INN-Reach hold requests are waiting to be filled, select Print, Holds to Fill (INN-Reach) or Holds to Fill (Regular and INN-Reach) to print a list of the items to pull from the shelves.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reset_Due_Date_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reset_Due_Date_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a101a99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Reset_Due_Date_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Reset Due Date Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reset Due Date Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Reset Due Date dialog box, select a checked out item and click ResetDateIcon.gif. Use this dialog box to change the due dates of selected items after they have been checked out. (The items must have a status of Out.) You can reset the due dates from the list of checked-out items in the Check Out workform or the Items Out view of the Patron Status workform. Select the new date on the calendar. For details, see Reset due dates of checked-out items.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Resolve_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Resolve_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7937741 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Resolve_Lost_Item_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Resolve Lost Item Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Resolve Lost Item Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to resolve a lost item’s status and the charges associated with it when the item is found at circulation. After you select an action and click OK, the circulation process continues. See Managing Lost Items.

    +

    Note:
    If the patron has already received a bill for the lost item, the Billed check box is selected. If the patron has already paid the bill, you can use this dialog box to refund the payment or credit the patron account.

    +
      +
    • Replacement charges - For unpaid items, you can waive or partially waive the replacement amount, or you can choose to leave the replacement charge as is and do nothing with the patron’s account. For paid items, you can credit the patron’s account, refund the amount, or leave the patron’s account as is.
    • +
    • Processing fees - For unpaid items, you can waive or partially waive the processing fee, or you can choose to leave the fee as is and do nothing with the patron’s account. For paid items, you can credit the patron’s account, refund the amount, or leave the patron’s account as is.
    • +
    • Overdue charges - For unpaid items only, you have the following options:
    • +
    • Pay - Select this to pay or partially pay the overdue amount. You must select a payment method in the Payment Method box, then process the payment.
    • +
    +

    Important:
    If your library uses Active Payment manager (Class Point of Sale) to manage payments you cannot pay a fine from the Resolve Lost Item dialog box. Select Waive or Leave as is instead. If you choose to leave the charge on the patron’s account, you can pay it from the Patron Status workform - Account view. See Pay charges from the Account view.

    +
      +
    • Waive - Select this option to waive or partially waive the overdue amount.
    • +
    • Leave as is - Select this option to do nothing with the patron’s account.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Serial_Holds_Serial_Multi_Volume_Holds.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Serial_Holds_Serial_Multi_Volume_Holds.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7b6eaeb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Serial_Holds_Serial_Multi_Volume_Holds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serial Holds/Serial Multi Volume Holds + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serial Holds/Serial Multi Volume Holds

    +

    The Serial/Multi Volume Holds dialog box appears when you select a bibliographic-level serial title or a title with multiple parts for a request and your library allows first available copy requests Hold requests for specific issues of a serial title (such as the May 2015 issue of Horticulture Magazine ) or specific parts of a multi-part title (such as the first season of a television series on DVD).. If the bibliographic record includes issue designations, you can select a specific issue. If there are no issue designations, you can select a specific item. If the bibliographic record is not a serial, but it has volume data, you can select a specific volume.

    +

    For more information about enabling first available copy requests in Polaris Administration, see Set Holds options: Enabling, Item Status Restrictions, First Available Copy.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Set_Free_Days_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Set_Free_Days_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..257e8956 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Set_Free_Days_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + Set Free Days Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Set Free Days Dialog Box

    +

    The Set Free Days dialog box appears when you click Pick a date on the Check In or Bookmobile workforms to set free days A value applied at normal and bulk check-in, renewal, and offline that allows you to omit a specified number of days from the overdue fine calculation. for fine calculation at checkin.

    +

    Pick a date from the calendar to automatically set the corresponding number of free days, and charge the patron account accordingly if necessary. The date field shows the date selected from the calendar (or calculated from a manual number entry in the Free Days box). The check-in date recorded by the system is the actual date of the transaction.

    +

    For more information:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Special_Loan_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Special_Loan_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90ce8731 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Special_Loan_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + + Special Loan Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Special Loan Dialog Box

    +

    The Special Loan dialog box appears when you click Special in the Loan Period area of the Check Out workform. Use this dialog box to set a special loan period before items are checked out. The system takes closed days and dates into account when calculating the due date. For details, see Assign a special loan period.

    +

    Important:
    The special loan period must be set before you scan the affected items.

    +
      +
    • +

      Set the due date: +

      +
    • +
    • +

      To specify the exact date, select a date on the calendar. The loan period appears in the Loan period boxes to the right of the calendar.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To specify the loan period, type the number of minutes, hours, or days in the Loan period value box, and select the loan interval (minutes, hours, or days) in the Loan period interval box. These boxes are located to the right of the calendar.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify how to apply the special loan period: +

      +
    • +
    • +

      To apply the loan period to the patron’s next item only, select Apply to next item only.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To apply the loan period to all the items for this patron, select Apply to all items for this patron.

      +
    • +
    • +

      To apply the loan period to all items being checked out during the current session, select Apply to all checkouts. If you select this option, the setting remains in effect until you click Reset on the Checkout workform or close the workform.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Transfer_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Transfer_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59ee585f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRcirc/Transfer_Hold_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Transfer Hold Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Transfer Hold Dialog Box

    +

    The Transfer Hold Request dialog box appears when the item you are checking in fills a hold request for a patron at another library. You can override the hold, or transfer the item. See Filling Holds at Circulation.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/General_User_Interface_Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/General_User_Interface_Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..35e5c570 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/General_User_Interface_Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + General User Interface Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    General UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by General UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip: +
    The same information is available when you click , click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Label_Manager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Label_Manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36280faf --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Label_Manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + Label Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Label Manager

    +

    The Label Manager window appears when you select Utilities, Label Manager from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. It also appears automatically after a label request is generated if On demand printing is selected in Polaris Administration.

    +

    Use the Label Manager to:

    +
      +
    • Print the labels - Select File, Print or click.
    • +
    • Clear the labels - Select File, Clear.
    • +
    • Save the current label setup - Select File | Save to save the labels that you see in the Label Manager. When you reopen the Label Manager, the same view appears. If you want to save the label setup in a file, select Save As.
    • +
    • Save a label file - Select File | Save As, select a location for the file, and name the file. It is saved as a .dat file. You can use Save As if you want to create a set of labels, save them, and then create a different label setup in Label Manager.
    • +
    • Preview the labels before printing them - Select File, Print Preview. The Print Preview window appears.
    • +
    • Refresh the labels - Select File, Refresh or click
    • +
    • Select the label type - Select Labels and select the label type to use.
    • +
    • Change the settings for the label type - Select Tools, Label Settings and Content. The Label Configuration dialog box appears. Use the Label Configuration dialog box to make settings to the label type.
    • +
    • Create a new label type - Select Tools, Design Custom Label. The Customize Label dialog box appears.
    • +
    • Set the default printers for labels - Select Tools, Set Default Printers. The Set Default Printers dialog box appears. For each label type, select the down arrow in the Printer Name column, and select the printer for the label type.
    • +
    • Enter or change the text of the labels - Type the text within the label borders.
    • +
    • Copy text from one label to another label - Select the text to copy, right-click and select Copy.
    • +
    • Paste text into a label - After copying the text, position the cursor inside the label, right-click and select Paste to paste the copied text into the label.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can also copy and paste from another Windows application. For example, you could copy text from a Microsoft Word document into a label.

    +
      +
    • Delete text from a label - Select the text to delete, right-click and select Delete.
    • +
    • Insert a label before a selected label - Position the cursor inside the label borders, right-click, and select Insert Before. A label is inserted before the selected label.
    • +
    • Insert a label after a selected label - Position the cursor inside the label borders, right-click, and select Insert After. A label is inserted before the selected label.
    • +
    • Change the label font - Right-click, and select Font. The Font dialog box appears. Select the font, the font point size, and any other characteristics for the font, such as bold or italics. This changes the font for the labels in this session. If you want to change the font for the label type, select Tools, Label Settings and Content, and set the font on the Label Configuration dialog box.
    • +
    • Insert diacritics or special characters - Position the cursor in label where you want to insert the characters, right-click, and select Character Map. The Character Map dialog box appears. Select the character to insert.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Link_to_Supplier_Databas.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Link_to_Supplier_Databas.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..714db8c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Link_to_Supplier_Databas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Link to Supplier Databases Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Link to Supplier Databases Dialog Box

    +

    The Link to Supplier Databases dialog box appears when you select Utilities, Link to Supplier Databases from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Use the Link to Supplier Databases dialog box to open the supplier’s materials selection Web page. Select the supplier in the list, and click OK. See Add Links to Supplier Databases.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Linked_Records_Dialog_Bo.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Linked_Records_Dialog_Bo.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d57a0b29 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Linked_Records_Dialog_Bo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + Link to Supplier Databases Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Records Dialog Box

    +

    The Linked Records dialog box lists the records that are linked to a record in the Find Tool results list or to the record displayed in a workform. To open the dialog box, select Links, Existing and then select the type of record from a workform, or right-click a record listed in the Find Tool results list and select Links and the type of record.

    +

    To see the options that are available from the Linked Records dialog box, select a record or records in the list, and right-click. The tasks you can do from the Linked Records dialog box depend on the type of records that are listed. You can also click the headings to sort the list. See Linking to Other Records.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1361134d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + New Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Dialog Box

    +

    The New dialog box appears when you select File > New from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. Use the New dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Create a new record - Select a record type in the Objects list, and click OK. If you selected a record type that has templates, the new dialog box is expanded to show the available templates. To use a template, select Existing template, and select the template from the list. See Creating New Records in Polaris.
    • +
    • Create a new template - Select a template type in the Objects list, and click OK.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a44932f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/New_Record_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + New Record Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Record Dialog Box

    +

    The New Record dialog box appears when you select File | New or click from a workform. Use the New Record dialog box to do the following:

    +
      +
    • Create a new record without copying an information in the existing workform - Select Clear Work Form.
    • +
    • Create a new record that is a copy of the existing record - Select Copy Existing Work Form.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    You can start out by copying the existing record to save time, and then change certain aspects of the record. If the copied record is an exact duplicate of the existing record, you may not be able to save it until you make some changes.

    +
      +
    • Create a new record using a template - Select Use Existing Template, and select a template from the list.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Use Existing Template option appears only if the record type has templates associated with it.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris User Interface Reference.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris User Interface Reference.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7238499e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris User Interface Reference.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris User Interface Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris User Interface (UI) Reference

    +

    The Polaris workforms, dialog boxes, and views are described in this section. The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +

    See also:

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Find_Tool.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Find_Tool.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea145ab3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Find_Tool.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris Find Tool + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Find Tool

    +

    Use the Polaris Find Tool to:

    +
      +
    • Find a record and select it - On the General tab, select the type of record you want to search for in the Object box, and enter the search criteria. You can also specify sorting and filtering options. See Finding Polaris Records.
    • +
    • Specify a sort option - Select Sort by and select a sort option. The results display according to the selected sort option.
    • +
    • Do a power search - Click Power. See Doing Power Searches.
    • +
    • Do an SQL search - Click SQL and enter the search criteria in the SQL Search Criteria box. See Setting Up SQL Searches.
    • +
    • Use the scoping feature - Click the Scoping tab. See Scoping Searches for Bibs and Items.
    • +
    • Select the branches to search - Click the Branches tab. See Searching Branches.
    • +
    • Select the collections to search - Click the Collections tab - See Searching Collections.
    • +
    • Select remote databases to search - Click the Databasestab - See Searching Remote Databases.
    • +
    • Specify record retrieval limit - Click the Settings tab and type a different number in the Retrieval Limit box. See Doing a Browse Search .
    • +
    • Save your preferred search criteria - Select the record type you want to find in the Object box, select options in the Search by, Type, Sort by, and Limit by boxes. Then, select Options, Save as User Default from the Find Tool menu bar. Each time you search for the same type of record, the search criteria is filled in. See Customize the Find Tool.
    • +
    • Save your preferred search databases for bibliographic record searches - Open the Find Tool for bibliographic records, and navigate to the Databases tab. Select the remote databases you would like to search, then select Options > Save as User Default. For more information, see Customize the Find Tool by User.
    • +
    • Load all search results - If all the search results are not loaded immediately, press CTRL+SHIFT+A to get all results.
    • +
    • Print Find Tool search criteria and results - Select File, Print, and select a print option.
    • +
    • Sort the search results - Click the column headers in the results list to sort the results after they appear.
    • +
    • Display a record in a workform - Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select Open on the context menu.
    • +
    • Print a record -Right-click a line item in the Results list, select Print on the context menu, and select a print option.
    • +
    • Do a task appropriate to the selected record - Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select the action on the context menu. The context menu lists only the actions you can do with the particular type of record. You can multi-select some types of records and then right-click to perform an action on all of them.
    • +
    • Create a record - Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select Create, Record Type on the context menu.
    • +
    • Delete a record - Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select Delete on the context menu.
    • +
    • Delete a record set - Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select Delete on the context menu.
    • +
    • Undelete a record set - Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select Undelete on the context menu.
    • +
    • Add all records in the results list to a record set automatically - Click the Settings tab and select Send Results to a New Record Set. If you want to add records to a record set without displaying search results, select Count only on the General tab before selecting Add to record set. See: Send search results to a record set.
    • +
    • Add records in the results list to a record set - Select records in the results list, right-click, and select Add to record set.
    • +
    • Display a related record - Right-click a line item in the Results list, select Links, and select the record type from the context menu.
    • +
    • Display a record’s properties -Right-click a line item in the Results list, and select Properties... on the context menu.
    • +
    • Display a quick count of your search results - If you want a count of the records that match your search criteria, you can select Count only. A total count of the records that match your search criteria appears on the bottom of the Find Tool. Select Display results if you want to see the results list. Select the Settings tab and click Add to new record set if you want to add the records to a record set without displaying the results list. Or, if you want to display the results and add them to a record set, select both options.
    • +
    • Select all records in the results list - Select Edit> Select All or press Ctrl+A.
    • +
    • Select the unselected records - Select the records you do not want included, and select Edit> InvertSelection. All the records except those you excluded are selected.
    • +
    +

    Polaris Find Tool General Page

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool General tab appears when you click the General tab and when you first access the Find Tool.

    +

    Note:
    If you receive an error message, try increasing the search timeout limit on the Settings tab.

    +

    Use the Polaris Find Tool General tab to:

    +
      +
    • Find a record - Select the type of record you want to search for in the Object box and specify the search criteria in the SearchBy, Type, and For boxes. Limit the search by selecting an option in the Limit by box, and then select or enter a value in the Value box. Select an option in the Sort by box to display the results in a sort order.
    • +
    • Sort the search results before they appear - Select a Sort by option.
    • +
    • Count records without displaying them - Click Count only. The number of records appears below the Find Tool.
    • +
    • Do an SQL search - Click SQL. The SQL Search Criteria box appears. Type the SQL query and click Search.
    • +
    • Save an SQL search - With an SQL search displayed in the SQL Search Criteria box, select File | Save. If you want to save an existing SQL search with another name, select the SQL search from the Open box, and select Save as... The Save SQL Search box appears. Type a different name for the SQL search. See: Setting Up SQL Searches.
    • +
    • Do a power search - Click Power Search and enter criteria in the Search Criteria box. See: Doing Power Searches.
    • +
    • Start a new search - Click New Search. All the search criteria, filtering, and sort by options are cleared so you can enter a new search.
    • +
    +

    Polaris Find Tool Settings Page

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool Settings tab appears when you click the Settings tab on the Find Tool dialog box. Use the Find Tool Settings page to specify how you want search results displayed and retrieved:

    +

    Note: +
    For information on Administration settings, see: Setting Find Tool Characteristics.

    +

    Put the search results directly into a record set - Select Send Results to a New Record Set. You can select this option if you display the results or just the count of records. See Send search results to a record set.

    +

    Specify the maximum number of records that can be sent to a record set before a warning appears - When you select Send Results to a New Record Set, you can change the warning message threshold by typing another number in the Warning Size Threshold box. For example, if the Warning Size Threshold is set to a default of 1000 records, no warning message appears unless the search yields more than 999 records that will be sent to the record set. You can set the number at a lower number or higher number.

    +

    Specify the maximum number of records in a results list - Type the number in the Retrieval Limit box. See

    +

    Specify a different timeout limit - Type another number in the Search Timeout (sec) to increase or decrease the amount of time (in seconds) that the system will search before timing out.

    +

    Set the retrieval limit back to the default value - Click Reset To Default.

    +

    Ignore initial articles in the search - Select Use Initial Articles Table check box. The Initial Articles Table defines the articles to ignore in searches.

    +

    Include initial articles in the search - Clear the Use Initial Articles Table check box. If the box is not checked, the Initial Articles Table is not checked for words to ignore, and initial articles are part of the search.

    +

    Polaris Find Tool Scoping Page

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool Scoping tab appears when you click the Scoping tab on the Find Tool. Use the Scoping page for exact match, keyword, and phrase searches for bibliographic and item records. See: Scoping Searches for Bibs and Items.

    +

    Note:
    Before you go to the Scoping tab, enter the primary search criteria on the Find Tool’s General tab.

    +

    Use the scoping feature - Select operators, qualifiers, and values, and click Add.

    +

    Modify a search expression in the scoping query - Change operators, qualifiers, and values, and click Update.

    +

    Remove a search expression in the scoping query - Select the search expression, and click Remove.

    +

    Delete all scoping search expressions - Click Clear. The basic query remains.

    +

    Polaris Find Tool Branches Page

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool Branches tab appears when you click the Branches tab on the Find Tool. Use the Branches page to limit bibliographic or item record searches by branch. See: Searching Branches.

    +

    Search all branches - Click Select All. You can select Unselect All if you undo the selections.

    +

    Search specific branches - Select the check box next to each branch.

    +

    Polaris Find Tool Collections Page

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool Collections tab appears when you click the Collections tab on the Find Tool. Use the Collections page to limit bibliographic or item record searches by collection. See: Searching Collections.

    +

    Search all collections - Click Select All.

    +

    Deselect all collections - Select the database or server, and click Unselect All.

    +

    Search specific collections -Select the check box next to each collection.

    +

    Polaris Find Tool Databases Page

    +

    The Polaris Find Tool Databases tab appears when you click the Databases tab on the Find Tool dialog box. Use the Databases page to search for authority or bibliographic records in other databases besides your local database. See: Searching Remote Databases.

    +

    Select one or multiple databases or servers - Select the check box next to each database or server.

    +

    Select all the servers (including all databases) - Click Select All. If you want to change the selections, click Unselect All and select specific databases.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1758e43b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Polaris_Shortcut_Bar.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + Polaris Shortcut Bar + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Polaris Shortcut Bar

    +

    The Polaris Shortcut Bar appears when you start Polaris. When you log on to Polaris, the menu options on the Shortcut Bar become available.

    +

    See also: Using the Polaris Shortcut Bar

    +

    Use the Polaris Shortcut Bar to:

    +
      +
    • Start a subsystem task - Select Acquisitions, Serials, Cataloging, Patron Services, or Circulation. Then select a menu option.
    • +
    • Start a system administration task - Select Administration.
    • +
    • Create a record - Select File, New to display the New dialog box.
    • +
    • Create a record set - Select File, New and select a type of record set.
    • +
    • Work with labels - Select Utilities, Label Manager.
    • +
    • Search for a record - Select a subsystem and record type to search using the Find Tool.
    • +
    • Generate hold notices and overdue notices - Select Utilities, Reports and Notices.
    • +
    • Check automatic processing of Cataloging records - Select Utilities, Cataloging Processing and select one of the following options from the menu:
      • Purge Cataloging Records - Check the process that purges deleted cataloging records so they are permanently removed from the database.
      • Bibliographic Bulk Change Queue - Check bulk change processing.
      • Authority Create Links Queue or Authority Update Links Queue - Check the progress of new or updated linking process for authority records.
      • Create an automatic record set of unlinked items - Select Utilities, Cataloging Processing and select one of the following options from the menu:
      • Create unlinked bibliographic record set - A record set is created that contains all bibliographic records in the database that do not have links to other records. The Bibliographic Record Set workform opens.
      • Create unlinked authority record set - A record set is created that contains all the authority records in the database that do not have links to other records. The Authority Record Set workform opens.
    • +
    • Access Acquisitions processing - Select Utilities, Acquisitions Processing, and select one of the following options from the menu:
      • Link to Supplier Databases - If your library has set up a list of supplier databases, you can access them from this dialog box.
      • Purge Purchase Orders and Invoices - Purge purchase orders and invoices from the database according to specified criteria.
      • Run Fiscal Year Utility - Run the utility that handles fiscal year rollovers.
      • Update Currency Exchange Rates - If your library uses foreign suppliers, update the currency exchange rate.
    • +
    • List and create uncataloged (ephemeral) items - Select Utilities, Quick-circ Item Records.
    • +
    • Generate mailing labels - Select Utilities, Mailing Label Manager.
    • +
    • Run reports - Select Utilities, Reports and Notices.
    • +
    • View credit card orders and refund payments - VeriSign processing only. Select Utilities, Credit Card Payments Manager.
    • +
    • Open a Web browser - Select Utilities, Web Browser.
    • +
    • Import cataloging records - Select Utilities, Importing.
    • +
    • Export cataloging records - Select Utilities, Export.
    • +
    • Create and manage importing profiles - Select Utilities, Importing, Profile Manager.
    • +
    • Go to the Credit Card Payment Manager - Select Utilities, Credit Card Payment Manager. The Credit Card Payment Manager workform appears.
    • +
    • Get help with Polaris - Select Help and select one of the following menu items:
      • Polaris Topics - Displays the table of contents for Polaris Staff Help. Click on + next to any book icon to expand the table of contents.
      • Search For Help On - Opens Polaris Staff Help on the Search tab. Type a search term to search for every instance of that term. For more precise searching, enter a term on the Index tab.
      • Shortcut Bar Help - Opens Polaris Staff Help to information about the Polaris Shortcut Bar.
      • Library Documents - If your library has set up its own documentation for Polaris, it can be accessed from this menu option. You specify the location of the documents using the System Administration profile Library documents - staff client.
      • Obtaining Technical Support - Opens the Innovative Customer Supportal Log in page. Log in to enter issues and to access other customer resources.
      • About Polaris - Displays the About Polaris dialog box with the Polaris version and build number, server, logged in user and log-in branch information.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Save_SQL_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Save_SQL_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..890371cb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRintro/Save_SQL_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + Save SQL Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Save SQL Dialog Box

    +

    Use the Save SQL Search dialog box to save an SQL search that you have set up. Type a name to give the SQL search displayed in the SQL Search Criteria box. When you search again for the same object, the saved SQL search will appear in the list in the Open box. See Setting Up SQL Searches.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Add_Edit_Associated_Patrons_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Add_Edit_Associated_Patrons_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a426c44 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Add_Edit_Associated_Patrons_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Add/Edit Associated Patrons Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add/Edit Associated Patrons Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to add an associated patron to the patron record currently open in the Patron Status workform - Associations view, or to edit an exiting association. See Patron Associations

    +
      +
    • Enter the barcode of the patron with whom you want to create an association - Scan the barcode from the patron’s library card, or type the barcode in the Associated Patron(s) box, and press ENTER. If you do not have the patron’s library card, click Find to display the Polaris Find Tool and search for the patron’s record. Right-click the record in the results list and choose Select from the context menu.
    • +
    • Enter a note - Type the text in the Note box. The same text will appear in both records.
    • +
    • Set a blocking relationship - Select (check) Block me if these patron records are blocked if you want to block this record at checkout or renewal when any of the associated records are blocked.
    • +
    • Permit the patron to pick up held items for her associated patrons - Select Allow me to pick up holds for these patrons.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Associated_Patron_Records_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Associated_Patron_Records_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c6431eb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Associated_Patron_Records_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + + Associated Patron Records Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Associated Patron Records List Box

    +

    This dialog box lists the patron records associated with the current record. See Patron Associations. You can double-click a listed record to open it in the Patron Status workform, or right-click a listed record to work with it. When you right-click, the context menu offers the following options:

    +
      +
    • Open - Opens the record in the Patron Registration workform.
    • +
    • Check Out - Opens the Check Out workform, where you can check items out to the selected patron. See Patron Registration Workform.
    • +
    • Place Hold - Opens the Hold Request workform, where you can place a hold request for the selected patron. See Placing Hold Requests.
    • +
    • Status - Opens the record in the Patron Status workform.
    • +
    • Print - Prints the associated patrons list. If you have a long list and want to print only what is shown on the screen, select File, Print, Current View.
    • +
    • Add to Record Set - Add the selection to a record set. You can select multiple records in the list and use this option. See Creating and Using Record Sets.
    • +
    • Add to Mailing Labels - Add the address for the selection to a set of mailing labels. You can select multiple records in the list and use this option. If a patron record contains multiple addresses, the Patron Addresses dialog box appears. Select the address in the list and click OK. See Creating Patron Mailing Labels.
    • +
    • Add to or Remove from Route List - Add the selection to a serials route list, or remove the selection from a route list. You can select multiple records in the list and use this option. See Routing Serial Issues.
    • +
    • Links - View the records linked to the selection, including associated patrons, course reserve records, patron record sets, and route lists.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete the selected record, not simply the association. See Deleting Patron Records. For information about deleting an association between two patron records, see Patron Associations.
    • +
    • Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selection, where you can view summary information about the selection.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Charge_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Charge_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c45e666d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Charge_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Charge Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Charge Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you click pChargeIcon00596.gif above the transactions list. See Create a charge from the Account view .

    +

    Use the Charge dialog box to add a charge, specify the reason for the charge, indicate the item associated with the charge (if applicable, enter notes, and send a bill for the charge.

    +
      +
    • Amount - Type the amount you want to charge.
    • +
    • Reason - Select a reason for the charge.
    • +
    • Associated item - If the charge is associated with an item, scan the item barcode in the Associated item box. Or click Find to search for an item record.
    • +
    • Notes - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Notes box.
    • +
    • Send a bill - Optional. If you added a new charge and want to send a bill to the patron, select the Send a bill check box and the dialog box expands to display the Added message box. You can edit the default message that will appear on the bill. If you selected a charge that has not yet been billed, and bill the charge, the dialog box opens with all fields displayed. You can edit the Added message, but other fields are read-only.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Template_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Template_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e560812 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Template_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Course Reserve Template Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserve Template Workform

    +

    Enter information in the Course Reserve Template workform the same way as in the Course Reserve record. See Borrow By Mail Circulation. All information in the template is copied into records created from the template. The information can then be edited if it is not applicable to the new course reserve record. For general information about using record templates, see Creating New Records in Polaris.

    +

    Tip:
    Select the template owner from the Template owner list. You can type the first few letters of the owner name to display the owner in the list.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8a1ae6dd --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Course_Reserve_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + + + + Course Reserve Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Course Reserve Workform

    +

    The Course Reserve workform displays information from the course reserve record.

    +

    For general information about course reserves, see Borrow By Mail Circulation. Use the top part of the workform and the workform toolbar to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a course reserve record or edit this record - See Setting Up Course Reserve Records. Polaris requires information in the fields with bold labels.
      Tips:

      +
    • +
    • +

      For new records, you can select an existing course name, course number, section number, and course abbreviation. Or select Tools, Add New Course Information to display the Add New Course Information dialog box. Type the information instead of selecting from existing options. The information is added to the new course reserve record and to the appropriate tables in Polaris Administration.

      +
    • +
    • +

      The optional Alternate Name is searchable with the Find Tool.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Status - Courses with an Active status can be displayed in PAC search results. If you are setting up the record for future use only, select Inactive.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Public notes are displayed in PAC search results for the course. Non-public notes are displayed only in the staff client.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print information from this workform - Select File, Print, Current View; File, Print, All Views; File, Print, List View; or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow00585.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete this record - Select File, Delete, or click deletebtn00586.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a new course reserve record from this workform - Select File | New, or click newicon00587.gif. See Create a new record from the Promotion workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Search for another course reserve record - Select File, Open, or click OpenIcon.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Views +

      +
    • +
    • +

      Work with instructors - Select View, Instructors, or click CourseInstrView.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Work with reserve items - Select View, Items, or click CourseItemView.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    Course Reserve Workform - Instructors View

    +

    This view lists the instructors linked to this course. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Add an instructor to the course - Click NAddInstrIcon00588.gif. The Add Instructor dialog box appears, where you can search for the instructor’s patron record and add information about the instructor. See Add instructors to a course reserve record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    The Address column displays the office address listed in the instructor’s patron record, or the home address if no office address is available.

    +
      +
    • +

      Edit the notes or primary/alternate designation for an instructor - Select the instructor in the Instructors list, and click NEditInstrIcon00589.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove an instructor from a course - Select the instructor in the Instructors list, and click NDeleteInstrIcon00590.gif.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open an instructor’s patron record - Right-click the instructor’s name in the Instructors list, and select Open from the context menu.

      +
    • +
    +

    Course Reserve Workform - Items View

    +

    This view lists the items on reserve for the course. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Place an existing item on reserve for this course - Click NAddInstrIcon00591.gif above the Items list. The Add Items dialog box appears, where you search for or supply item and reserve template information. See Place items on reserve from a course reserve record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove an item from this course - Select the item, and click NDeleteInstrIcon00592.gif above the Items list (or right-click the item and select Remove from course reserve from the context menu). See Remove an item from reserve.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit an item’s reserve period or notes for this course - Select the item, and click NEditInstrIcon00593.gif above the Items list (or right-click the item and select Edit Linked Information from the context menu). The Linked Course/Reserve Item Information dialog box appears.

      +
    • +
    +

    Tip:
    Type any note regarding this item as it relates to this course. You can use this field to note any required chapters or pages.

    +
      +
    • +

      Change an item’s reserve status - Select the item in the Items list, and click pReactivateIcon.gif (or right-click the item and select Deactivate or Reactivate from the context menu). You can change the status from On Reserve to Not Reserved (deactivate), or from Not Reserved to On Reserve (reactivate). See Deactivate a reserve item.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Place a temporary or instructor-owned item on reserve - Click the Create Item icon CreateItem.gif. The Brief Item Entry dialog box appears, where you can create minimal item and bibliographic records. See Place uncataloged material on reserve.

      +
    • +
    +

    Important:
    You need an on-the-fly item record template named Reserve on the fly to create reserve items on the fly. See Place uncataloged material on reserve.

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Create_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Create_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3988d36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Create_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create Credit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Credit Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you click CreateCreditBtn00603.gif above the transactions list to create a credit on the patron’s account. See Create a credit manually.

    +
      +
    • +

      Amount - Type the amount to credit.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Method - Select a payment method for the credit.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Credit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Credit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..915bc4ac --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Credit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Credit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Credit Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you select one or more deposits and click pCreditIcon00602.gif above the transactions list to credit the deposit(s). See Return, forfeit, or credit deposits.

    +
      +
    • +

      Amount - If you want to partially credit a single selected deposit, type the new amount. If you chose to credit multiple deposits, you cannot change the number in the Amount box. You must credit the entire amount.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Deposit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Deposit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48d4f01b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Deposit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Deposit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Deposit Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you click pDepositIcon00599.gif above the transactions list. See Make a deposit in a patron’s account.

    +
      +
    • Amount - Type the amount to deposit. If you selected a credit or credits in the Account Transaction list, you can change the Amount box to any amount less than the credit amount.
    • +
    • Method - Select a payment method for the deposit. If you are making a deposit from a credit, the method Deposit from Credit is already selected.
    • +
    • Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Estimated_Fines_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Estimated_Fines_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b12dc16 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Estimated_Fines_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Estimated Fines Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Estimated Fines Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Items Out view, this dialog box appears when you click the Estimated Fines icon EstFinesIcon00605.gif above the Items Out list. Use this dialog box to estimate fines on currently checked out items. See Estimate fines on currently checked out items.

    +

    The dialog box shows the fine on each item and the total estimated fines if the items are returned today.

    +
      +
    • To view the estimated fines if the items are returned at a future date, click the calendar icon and use the calendar control to set the date; then click Recalculate.
    • +
    • To print the estimated fines list, click Print. The information is formatted for a receipt printer and includes the title, author, due date, and estimated fine. If your library includes claimed and/or lost items in the calculation, these are included in the printed information.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    if your library has opted to include claimed and/or lost items in the estimated fines calculation, this dialog box is also available from the Patron Status workform - Claims view.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Forfeit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Forfeit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33175a3f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Forfeit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Forfeit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Forfeit Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you select one or more deposits and click pForfeitIcon00601.gif above the transactions list to forfeit the deposit(s). See Return, forfeit, or credit deposits.

    +
      +
    • Amount - If you want to partially forfeit a single selected deposit, type the new amount. If you chose to forfeit multiple deposits, you cannot change the number in the Amount box. You must forfeit the entire amount.
    • +
    • Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Course_Reserves_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Course_Reserves_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6fb4ba2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Course_Reserves_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Linked Course Reserves Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Course Reserves Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box lists the course reserve records with which the current record (patron or item) is associated. See Borrow By Mail Circulation. You can double-click a listed record to open it in the Course Reserve workform, or right-click a listed record to work with it. When you right-click, the context menu offers the following options:

    +
      +
    • Open - Opens the record in the Course Reserve workform.
    • +
    • Print - Prints the record list. If you have a long list and want to print only what is shown on the screen, select File, Print, Current View.
    • +
    • Links - View the patron and item records linked to the selected course reserve record.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete the selected record, not simply the current record’s association with it.
    • +
    • Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selection, where you can view summary information about the selection.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Patron_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Patron_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bf7ca14e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Linked_Patron_Record_Sets_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + Linked Patron Record Sets Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Linked Patron Record Sets Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box lists the patron record sets to which the current record belongs. See Creating and Using Record Sets. You can double-click a listed record set to open it in the Patron Record Set workform, or right-click a listed record set to work with it. When you right-click, the context menu offers the following options:

    +
      +
    • Open - Opens the record in the Patron Record Set workform.
    • +
    • Print - Prints the record set list. If you have a long list and want to print only what is shown on the screen, select File, Print, Current View.
    • +
    • Delete - Deletes the selected record set, not simply the current record’s membership. You can select multiple records in the list and use this option.
    • +
    • Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selection, where you can view summary information about the selection.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Notification_History_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Notification_History_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..edb590d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Notification_History_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Notification History Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Notification History Dialog Box

    +

    This dialog box lists the notices that have been sent to a patron regarding a particular item. The list includes the notification method, the date, notification branch, and the amount. If the notice was delivered by e-mail or telephone, the notice history also indicates whether the delivery was successful. See Reviewing Notice Histories. Click Print to print the history.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Address_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Address_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7230fb3e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Address_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Bulk Change - Address Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Bulk Change - Address Tab

    +

    Use the Patron Record Bulk Change dialog box to make the same changes to all the records in a patron record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets and Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    The settings on the Address tab control address and notification options for the records in the record set. Select (check) the fields you want to change, and set the new option for the records.

    +
      +
    • Address check date - Specify a date when the patrons’ addresses should be verified.
      • To set an exact date, type the date (mm/dd/yyyy format), or click the down arrow and select the date from the calendar.
      • To set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today), select the term in the Address check term box. The exact date is automatically calculated.
    • +
    • Address for notices/bills - Select the appropriate addresses (for example, Home or Work) for each communication you want to change.
    • +
    • Notification options - Select the patrons’ preferred notification method.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    When your library sets up notification, the library can specify patron preference as the notification method for a specific notice type. In this case, the notice is sent by the method specified in the patron record. However, the library may choose to deliver certain notices by methods other than the patron preference. See Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).

    +
      +
    • Additional TXT Notice - Select this option to send patrons a text message notice in addition to another method. Patrons  will receive the additional text message only if one Phone field in the patron record is a mobile phone with a selected carrier, and the TXT option is selected for that phone number. 
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Blocks_Notes_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Blocks_Notes_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..663fd3bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Blocks_Notes_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Bulk Change - Blocks/Notes Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Bulk Change - Blocks/Notes Tab

    +

    Use the Patron Record Bulk Change dialog box to make the same changes to all the records in a patron record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets and Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    The settings on the Blocks/Notes tab control changes in patron record blocks and free-text notes. Select (check) the fields you want to change, select the appropriate action, and specify new text if appropriate.

    +

    Blocks - The text of each library-assigned block is set in Polaris Administration; the text of each free-text block is manually entered when you create the block. See Working with Blocks (Stops). You can change one library-assigned block and one free-text block per bulk-change process. You can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Add - Add a block to each record. For library-assigned blocks, select the block from the list. For free-text blocks, type the text in the text box.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete a block from each record. For free-text blocks, you must type the entire existing text string in the text box.
    • +
    • Replace - For free-text blocks only, replace the existing text of the block with new text. You must type the entire existing text string in the Find box.
    • +
    +

    Non-blocking notes - These notes do not block the patron at circulation. The Non-blocking notes field in a patron record is a single field. You cannot bulk-change specific text within the field. When you bulk-change the field, you can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Append - Add text to the end of an existing note in each record.
    • +
    • Prepend - Add text to the beginning of an existing note in each record.
    • +
    • Clear - Delete the entire note.
    • +
    +

    Blocking notes - These notes block the patron at normal check-out and renewal. The Blocking notes field in a patron record is a single field. You cannot bulk-change specific text within the field. When you bulk-change the field, you can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Append - Add text to the end of an existing note in each record.
    • +
    • Prepend - Add text to the beginning of an existing note in each record.
    • +
    • Clear - Delete the entire note.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_General_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_General_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d16cfa35 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_General_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Bulk Change - General Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Bulk Change - General Tab

    +

    Use the Patron Record Bulk Change dialog box to make the same changes to all the records in a patron record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets and Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    The settings on the General tab control miscellaneous options on the Patron Registration and Patron Status workforms. Select (check) the fields you want to change, and set the new option for the records in the record set.

    +
      +
    • Gender - Select from drop down menu. (None) is selected by default.
    • +
    • Language - Select the patrons’ primary language.
    • +
    • Date of original registration - Type the date (mm/dd/yyyy format), or click the down arrow and select the date from the calendar.
    • +
    • eReceipt option - Select None (default), E-mail, TXT, or All. The system changes a record in the record set if that change would be allowed for a single record. For example, if a branch has not enabled eReceipts, the bulk change does not affect records from that branch and an error is written to the bulk change report. If a branch has enabled one type of eReceipt but not both, no change is made for the receipt type that is not enabled. But in this case, if All is selected for bulk change, the system does set a record to the supported eReceipt type. For more information about eReceipts, see Setting Up eReceipts.
    • Exclude from Notices and Reminders - Select the check boxes for the overdue and/or reminder notices to exclude for the patrons in the record set.
    • Exclude from collection agency - For libraries that use collection agency reporting. Select this option to prevent any patron account in the record set from being reported to the collection agency. See Patrons in Collection.
    • +
    • Maintain permanent reading list - Select this option to start reading histories for all patrons in the record set. See Working with Reading Histories.
    • +
    • Do not delete patron record - Select this option to prevent the deletion (either manual or automatic) of any record in the record set. See Deleting Patron Records.
    • +
    • E-mail notices in plain text - Select the check box to send e-mail notices in plain text to the patrons in the record set.
    • +
    • Secure the patron record - Select the check box to secure the patron records in the record set. See Secure a patron record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Registration_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Registration_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5fe6b64 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Registration_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Bulk Change - Registration Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Bulk Change - Registration Tab

    +

    Use the Patron Record Bulk Change dialog box to make the same changes to all the records in a patron record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets and Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    The settings on the Registration tab change basic registration information for the records in the record set. Select (check) the fields you want to change, and set the new option for the records.

    +
      +
    • Registered branch - This selection becomes the patron’s “home” library for patron account purposes.
    • +
    • Patron code - Select a patron code from the list. Patron codes help to define patron privileges and policies.
    • +
    • Expiration date - Specify a date when the registration should expire.
      • To set an exact date, type the date (mm/dd/yyyy format), or click the down arrow and select the date from the calendar.
      • To set a date according to the current date (such as two years from today), select the term in the Expiration term box. The exact date is automatically calculated.
    • +
    • Statistical class - Select a class code from the list. These codes are defined by your library for statistical or reporting purposes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Reports_Record_Set_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Reports_Record_Set_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..10051b28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_Reports_Record_Set_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Bulk Change - Reports/Record Set Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Bulk Change - Reports/Record Set Tab

    +

    Use the Patron Record Bulk Change dialog box to make the same changes to all the records in a patron record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets and Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    The settings on the Reports/Record Set tab specify the location of the Bulk Change Report and create an optional error record set.

    +
      +
    • Bulk Change Report - When you bulk change records, the Bulk Change Report is automatically generated. It contains information about the number of records processed and the errors, if any, that occurred during the process. To specify a report location other than the default, type the path or click Browse and select the location.
    • +
    • Error Record Set - (Optional). You can choose to have the bulk change process create an error record set containing the records that were not changed for some reason during processing. Specify a name and owner for the error record set.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_UDFs_Tab.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_UDFs_Tab.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f81a6f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Bulk_Change_-_UDFs_Tab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Bulk Change - UDFs Tab + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Bulk Change - UDFs Tab

    +

    Use the Patron Record Bulk Change dialog box to make the same changes to all the records in a patron record set. See Creating and Using Record Sets and Bulk-Changing Patron Records.

    +

    The settings on the UDFs tab control changes in user-defined fields (UDFs). (Your library specifies the user-defined fields (UDFs) for patron records in Polaris Administration.) When you apply bulk changes to UDFs, the text of a UDF is treated as a single unit. The whole text string can be deleted, replaced, or added, but you cannot replace parts of a text string. Bulk change affects only a UDF’s text string, not a UDF’s definition. You can choose from the following actions:

    +
      +
    • Add - Input text in blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Overwrite - Replaces the existing text in UDFs with new text, and adds the new text to any blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Replace - Replace the existing text in UDFs with new text. The new text is not added to any blank UDFs.
    • +
    • Delete - Delete the text in UDFs. You can only delete an entire text string, and you must specify this entire text string.
    • +
    • Clear - Delete the text in all UDFs, no matter what the text is.
    • +
    +

    Select (check) the fields you want to change, select the appropriate action, and specify new text if appropriate.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Merge_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Merge_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d24238f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Merge_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Merge Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Merge Dialog Box

    +

    Use this dialog box to merge two patron records that represent one person. You need the system-level Circulation permission Merge patrons: Allow to merge patron records.

    +

    The patron record from which you opened the dialog box is the primary record. Information from a secondary record you select is added to the primary record. The records can belong to different registration branches. For details, see Merging Patron Records. When the records are merged, the secondary record is deleted.

    +

    Use the dialog box to do these tasks:

    +
      +
    • Find the secondary record - Click Select patron to delete. The Polaris Find Tool opens. Search for the secondary patron record, right-click the secondary patron record in the results list, and choose Select from the context menu. Information from the record you selected is listed in the secondary patron record section of the Patron Merge dialog box.
    • +
    • Open the secondary record (Optional) - When the secondary record information is displayed in the Patron Merge dialog box, click Open to view the record.
    • +
    • Merge the records - Click Merge. The secondary patron record is deleted, and information is transferred to the primary record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Record_Set_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Record_Set_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b5040da --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Record_Set_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Record Set Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Record Set Workform

    +

    The Patron Record Set workform lists the member records in the record set. Use the Patron Record Set workform to:

    +
      +
    • Set up a new record set - Type a name for the record set in the Name box. Specify the owner of the record set in the Owner box. Only the owner can modify the record set. If an organization is the owner, all the staff members of the organization can modify the record set. Use the Note box to describe the purpose or enter other relevant information. See Creating and Using Record Sets.
    • +
    • Add patron records to the record set - You can add records to a record set in the following ways:
      • Select Tools, Add, Search, or click iRSAddIcon.gif, to search for the record and select it from the results list.
      • Scan or type a barcode: select Tools, Add, Scan, or click kScanRecBtn.gif. The Scan Barcode dialog box appears, in which you scan the barcode (or type the barcode and press ENTER).
      • Select Tools, Add, From file or clickto populate the record set with existing patron records by reading patron IDs from column in an Excel file. When you add patron records to a record set using a file, no new patron records are added.
    • +
    • Remove records from the set - Select the records, and select Tools, Remove, or click kDelRecBtn.gif.
    • +
    • Work with individual records - Double-click a record to open it. Click DeleteRec.gif above the record list to delete a record from the database. If a record cannot be deleted for any reason, the delete error dialog box appears. For information about the conditions that may prevent a record from being deleted, see Deleting Patron Records.
    • +
    • Bulk-change records - Select Tools, Bulk Change, or click iBulkChIcon.gif. See Bulk-Changing Patron Records.
    • +
    • Create an item record set of the items linked to the patrons in this record set - Select Tools, Create Item Record Set or click .
    • +
    • Print information from this workform - Select File, Print, Current View (workform) or File, Print, List View (records list), or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow00583.gif.
    • +
    • Delete this record set - Select File, Delete, or click deletebtn00584.gif.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Registration_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Registration_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6f3d1692 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Registration_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Registration Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Registration Workform

    +

    To access the Patron Registration workform, select Patron Services > Patron Records, and search for the patron. The Patron Registration workform displays patron registration data such as patron code, contact information, and notification preference. Use the toolbar and top part of the workform to:

    +
      +
    • Register a patron or edit this record - See Creating and Editing Patron Records.
    • +

      Tips: +
      Polaris requires information for the fields with bold labels.
      You can type or scan the patron barcode.
      The Patron Code selection affects circulation policies for this patron. The library determines the possible options.

      +
    • Set the registration expiration with the Expiration Term boxes. To set a date such as two years from today, type a number in the first Term box, and select months or years in the second Term box. The exact date is automatically calculated and appears in the Date box. For information about updating the expiration date, see Updating Patron Registration Check Dates.
    • +

      Tip:
      You can also type an expiration date in the Date box in the format shown, or click the down arrow by the Date box to select a date from a calendar.

      +
    • California libraries with the appropriate Polaris license can enter basic information in the workform by scanning the patron’s California driver’s license. See Scan Driver’s License to Enter Patron Information. For setup information, see Scanning a Driver’s License for Patron Registration.
    • +
    • Print information from this workform - Select File > Print > Current View; File > Print > All Views; or File > Print > List View (Addresses, Phone Numbers list), or click the down arrow by the print button PrintButtonArrow.gif.
    • +
    • Delete this record - Select File > Delete, or click deletebtn.gif. Certain conditions may prevent deleting this record. See Deleting Patron Records.
    • +
    • Place a hold request for this patron - Select Tools > Place Hold, or click PlaceHoldButton.gif. See Placing Hold Requests.
    • +
    • Check out items to this patron - Select Tools > Check Out, or click but_chko.gif. See Patron Registration Workform.
    • +
    • Merge information from another patron record - Select Tools > Merge with Patron. See Merging Patron Records.
    • +
    • Add this patron record to a record set for bulk processing - Select Tools > Add to Record Set > New or Existing. See Creating and Using Record Sets. To work with the patron record sets that include this record, select Links > Record Sets.
    • +
    • Work with associated patron records - Select Links > Associations. See Patron Associations.
    • +
    • Add this patron to a route list, or remove this patron from a list - Select Tools > Add to Route List or Tools > Remove from Route List. See Routing Serial Issues. To work with the route lists that include this record, select Links > Route Lists.
    • +
    • Designate this patron as an instructor for a course - Select Tools > Add to Course Reserve. See Add Instructors to a Course Reserve Record. To work with associated course reserve records, select Links > Course Reserve.
    • +

      Note:
      The Instructor (Primary) check box is a read-only control that indicates whether the patron is the primary instructor for a course. To remove the instructor designation for this patron, edit the course record. See Setting Up Course Reserve Records.

      +
    • Create a new patron record from this workform - Select File > New, or click newicon.gif. See Create a New Record from the Promotion Workform.
    • +
    • Switch to the Patron Status workform for this patron - The Patron Status workform contains circulation, request, and financial information. Select Links > Patron Status or press F9. (For a quick, read-only version, select View > Status, or click pStatusView.gif.)
    • +
    • Set contact information and notification preferences - Select View > Addresses, or click pAddViewIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Set a statistical code, password, and other conditions - Select View > General, or click pGenViewIcon.gif.
    • +
    • See a read-only version of blocks, circulation information, and charges - Select View > Status, or click pStatusView00575.gif.
    • +
    • Work with patron photos - Separately licensed feature. Select View > Photo, or click PhotoIcon.gif.
    • +
    • Enter patron custom data fields - Select View > Custom Data or click viewcustd.gif.
    • +
    +

    Patron Registration Workform - Addresses View

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Add an address to the patron record - Click Add. The Add/Edit address dialog box appears, where you specify the type of address, such as home or work, and supply the address details. See Add an Address to a Patron Record.
    • +

      Tip:
      For US addresses, type a valid postal code before you type the rest of the address. The City, State/province, County, and Country boxes are automatically filled in. If more than one combination exists in your system for that postal code, a list is displayed. Double-click the correct combination from the list. To edit a postal code, position the cursor at the end of the field and press BACKSPACE to remove the existing code.

      +
    • Edit an existing address - Select an address, and click Edit.
    • +
    • When you are adding or editing an address, if the state is not required as part of the address, leave the state empty.
    • +
    • Remove an existing address - Select an address, and click Remove.
    • +
    • Add a patron’s address to a set for printing mailing labels - Select an address, and click Mailing Label. The address is placed in the Mailing Label Manager, where you can export the information or print labels. See Creating Patron Mailing Labels.
    • +
    • Specify an address check date - This date is a reminder to check the patron’s address data. To set a date such as two years from today, type a number in the first Address Check Term box, and select months or years in the second Term box. The exact date is automatically calculated and appears in the Date box. For information about updating the address check date, see Updating Patron Registration Check Dates.
    • +

      Tip:
      You can also type an address check date in the Date box in the format shown, or click the down arrow by the Date box to select a date from a calendar.

      +
    • Specify notification information and preference - See Add Notification Data to a Patron Record. You can exclude this patron from receiving certain kinds of notices with options on the Patron Registration workform - General view.
    • +
    • Specify an eReceipts option - If your library has enabled eReceipts (email receipts, TXT receipts, or both) and this patron prefers to receive check-out, renewal, and fine receipts by email or TXT, select the appropriate option from the eReceipt option list. To receive email receipts, the patron record must include an email address. To receive TXT receipts, one Phone field must be a mobile phone with a selected carrier, and the TXT option must be selected for that phone number. See Add Notification Data to a Patron Record.
    • +
    +

    Patron Registration Workform - General View

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Add general information to the patron record - See Add General Data to a Patron Record.
    • +
    • Gender - Select patron gender from drop down menu unless gender tracking is suppressed. All drop down menus start with a (None) option followed by a list of genders specified for the specific organization. The (None) option is selected by default unless a patron has already selected a gender. Selecting (None) sets the patron's gender to "null" in the database as if they have opted out of a gender selection.
    • +
    • Specify a statistical class - Your library defines these codes for reporting purposes.
    • +
    • Set the patron's password - Enter a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters, and be sure that the patron records the password. For additional password format requirements, see Add General Data to a Patron Record.
    • +

      This password allows the patron to access the account from the PAC. Polaris displays the password as a series of asterisks (*) for security purposes. You can set a staff override password in Polaris Administration so that patrons can access their accounts to change a forgotten password. See Set Patron Password and User Name Options.

      +

      Note:
      A step in the nightly Patron Processing SQL job can assign the last four digits of the patron’s primary telephone number (Voice Phone 1) to the password field of the patron record if a password does not exist. The default password step is disabled at installation; if your library is interested in activating this feature, contact your Polaris Site Manager.

      +
    • Specify a language - Select the patron’s primary language. If your library has purchased the Polaris multilingual option, and the language you select is supported for notices, the patron can receive notices in this language. For more information about setting these up in Polaris Administration, see Delivering Notices by Phone (Outbound Telephony).
    • +
    • Enter the patron's birth date - Use one of the following methods:
      • Type a specific date - Select the box in the Birth date field, then type the birth date in the format shown. Use the right arrow key to move from one segment of the date to the next.
      • Select a date from a calendar - Click the down arrow in the Birth date field and select the birth date from the calendar.
    • +

      Note:
      You can enter a birth year in the patron record that is earlier than 1900. For example, if you do not ask patrons their birth year at registration, you can enter 1776. You can save dates as early as 1753.

      +
    • Configure user defined fields - Your library defines these fields for inclusion in the patron record. You can search for patron records by these fields.
    • +
    • Start or stop the patron’s reading history - Select the Maintain permanent reading list check box. See Working with Reading Histories.
    • +

      Note:
      If this patron receives outreach services, this box is automatically selected.

      +
    • Prevent the patron record from being deleted - Select Do not delete patron record.
    • +
    • Prevent the account from being submitted to collection - Select Exclude from collection agency. See Patrons in Collection.
    • +
    • Prevent overdue notices to this patron - Select Exclude from overdue notice.
    • +
    • Prevent hold notices to this patron - Select Exclude from hold notice. If this patron receives outreach services, and you place hold requests on the patron’s behalf as part of the services, you may want to select this option. See Outreach Services Processing.
    • +
    • Prevent bills to this patron - Select Exclude from billing.
    • +
    • Prevent almost overdue and auto-renew email reminder notices to this patron - Select Exclude from Almost overdue/auto-renew. See Reminder Notices.
    • +
    • Prevent inactive patron email reminder notices to this patron - Select Exclude from Patron record expiration. See Reminder Notices.
    • +
    • Prevent patron record expiration email reminder notices to this patron - Select Exclude from Inactive patron. See Reminder Notices.
    • +
    • View the patron’s last activity date - The Last Activity Date field is updated in the following circumstances:
      • Staff client: when an item is checked out or renewed, when a quick-circ item is checked out, or when a claim is made on an item.
      • PAC: when a patron signs in, when a hold or ILL request is placed or modified, online renewal, patron information updates, payments, access to remote databases that require log-in.
      • Polaris ExpressCheck, SIP self-check units: when an item is checked out or renewed, patron account access, payments.
      • Time and print management applications: log-in.
      • Inbound telephony: access account information and renew items.
    • +
    +

    Patron Registration Workform - Status View

    +

    This view shows a quick read-only version of blocks, circulation information, and charges on the patron’s record. If you need to change this information, press F9 to open the Patron Status workform.

    +

    Patron Registration Workform - Photo View

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Take a new photo - Select Launch Picture Edit > Start Camera > Take Picture. The picture appears on the right side of the Patron Photo dialog box. See Add a New Photo to a Patron Record.
    • +
    • Replace an existing photo - Select Launch Picture Edit > Start Camera > Take Picture. The picture appears on the right side of the Patron Photo dialog box, replacing the old photo. See Add a New Photo to a Patron Record.
    • +
    • Add an existing image - Select Launch Picture Edit > Load Picture. A Windows Explorer dialog box appears. Navigate to and select the image. See Upload an Existing Photo to a Patron Record.
    • +
    • Delete a photo - Select Launch Picture Edit > Delete Photo. The image is removed from the patron record.
    • +
    +

    Patron Registration Workform - Patron Custom Data View

    +

    Use this view to enter or modify patron custom data fields. For information on setting up these fields, see Setting Up Patron Custom Data Fields.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Services_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Services_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..31ed0c43 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Services_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Services Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Services UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Patron Services UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click formHelp_Icon.gif, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Status_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Status_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..22511f90 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Patron_Status_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ + + + + + + + + + Patron Status Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Patron Status Workform

    +

    The Patron Status workform displays patron account information such as circulation data, blocks, items out, requests, claims and lost items, reading history, financial transactions, and associated patron records. If your library system includes Polaris Outreach Services, you also use this workform to set up profiles and generate pick lists for an outreach services patron. Use the toolbar and top part of the workform to:

    + +

    Patron Status Workform - General View

    +

    The Patron Status workform - General view summarizes any amount owed, items checked out, items overdue and long overdue, items on hold, current and lifetime claims, lost items, whether the patron’s account contains notes, and the account expiration date. This view also lists any blocks (stops) on the patron’s account. See Working with Blocks (Stops). The view includes a list of the most recent notices that have been sent to the patron for a particular transaction (double-click an item to see the complete notice history). Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Add a block - Click Add Block. The New Block dialog box appears. Select a library-defined block, or type a free-text block. See Add a patron block.

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    Polaris automatically blocks patrons for conditions such as overdue and long overdue items, money owed over a library-specified amount, and an excessive number of items claimed, according to Polaris Administration settings. You cannot add or delete these types of blocks manually.

    +
      +
    • +

      Delete a block - Select a block, and click Delete Block. See Delete a patron block.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print an item’s notice history - Double-click an item in the Notices list to open the Notice History dialog box. This dialog box shows detailed notification history for the item. From the dialog box, you can print the notice history for an item.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open an item record - Right-click an item in the Notices list to open the item record.

      +
    • +
    +

    Patron Status Workform - Items Out View

    +

    This view lists the items the patron has currently checked out.

    +

    Tip:
    You can right-click any item to check it in, place a hold on it, or work with other options related to the item record.

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Print a packing list for reader ratings - Select the item or items, and click PackingListIcon.gif above the Items Out list. See Working with Reader Ratings.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print the list of items out - Click PrinterIcon.gif above the Items Out list, or press CTRL+ALT+P. See Display and print the Items Out list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Renew one or multiple items - Select the item or items, and click pRenewIcon.gif above the Items Out list. See Renew items from the Patron Status workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Renew all items - Click pRenewAllIcon.gif above the Items Out list. See Renew items from the Patron Status workform.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Assign a special loan renewal period - Select the item, and click pSpecRenewIcon.gif above the Items Out list. The Special Loan dialog box appears, where you can select any due date from a calendar. See Assign a special loan period.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Change the due date of items without renewal - Select the items and click ResetDateIcon.gif above the Items Out list. See Reset due dates of checked-out items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Estimate fines - Click EstFinesIcon.gif above the Items Out list to estimate fines on overdue items currently checked out. See Estimate fines on currently checked out items.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Make a claim - Select the item, and click pClaimsIcon.gif above the Items Out list. The Make Claim dialog box appears, where you can select the patron’s reason for the claim (Claim Returned or Claim Never Had). See Make a claim.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Declare an item lost - Select the item, and click pLostIcon.gif above the Items Out list. The Declare lost item dialog box appears, where you can declare an item lost and manage the replacement amount and overdue amount, if any. See Declare an item lost.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print an item’s notice history - Select the item, and click NoticeHistIcon.gif.  The Notice History dialog box opens, which shows detailed notification history for the item. From the dialog box, you can print the notice history for an item.

      +
    • +
    +

    Patron Status Workform - Account View

    +

    This view displays a patron’s open financial transactions with the library. See Viewing Patron Financial Accounts.

    +

    Use the account view to:

    + +

    Patron Status Workform - Claims View

    +

    The Patron Status workform - Claims view shows the patron’s open claims and lost items. See Working with Claims and Managing Lost Items. Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • Print the Claims list - Right-click in the Claims list, and select Print from the context menu.
    • +
    • Link to an item record - Right-click an item in the Claims list, and select Links, Item Record from the context menu. The Item Record workform opens.
    • +
    • Estimate fines - Click above the Claims list to estimate fines on overdue items currently checked out. This option is available if your library has opted to include claimed and/or lost items in estimated accrued fine calculations. See Estimate fines on currently checked out items.
    • +
    • Print an item’s notice history - Select the item, and click .  The Notice History dialog box opens, which shows detailed notification history for the item. From the dialog box, you can print the notice history for an item.
    • +
    +

    Patron Status Workform - Requests View

    +

    On this view, the Polaris requests list displays the patron’s system holds requests. The ILL requests list displays the patron’s interlibrary loan requests. See Working with Interlibrary Loans. If your library is licensed to use INN-Reach, ILL requests placed through INN-Reach appear in this view. See INN-Reach ILL hold request created in Polaris. Use this view to:

    + +

    Patron Status Workform - Reader Services View

    +

    The Patron Status workform - Reader Services view displays the patron’s reading history, if any. See Working with Reading Histories. Also, if your library provides outreach services, use this view to set up outreach services profiles for this patron. For details, see Creating Outreach Patron Profiles.

    +

    Patron Status Workform - Associations View

    +

    The Patron Status workform - Associations view lists the associated patrons with columns showing the barcode, patron name, branch, note, whether the patron is blocked when the associated patron is blocked, and whether the patron is allowed to pick up held items for the associated patron. See Patron Associations.

    +

    Use this view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create an association between patron records - Click NAddInstrIcon.gif above the Associations list. The Add Associations dialog box appears, where you can search for the patron record to link. See Create and edit patron associations.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit notes about an association or change a blocking relationship - Select the associated patron in the Associations list, and click NEditInstrIcon.gif above the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete an association - Select the associated patron in the Associations list, and click NDeleteInstrIcon.gif above the list. You are deleting the relationship between the two records, not the records themselves.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Work with an associated patron record - Right-click an associated patron record. From the context menu, you can open the record or do circulation functions and other activities for the associated patron.

      +
    • +
    +

    Patron Status Workform - Notes View

    +

    The Patron Status workform - Notes view provides free-text boxes for notes about a patron’s status. You can create two types of notes, non-blocking and blocking. Non-blocking notes do not block circulation or hold requests. Blocking notes block a patron at normal check-out or renewal. However, blocking notes do not affect offline circulation, Polaris ExpressCheck circulation, SIP/NCIP circulation, or renewal from the PAC. Neither type of note appears in the PAC. Use the Notes view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a note - Type a note in the Non-blocking or Blocking box, and click Save.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete notes - Select the text, and press BACKSPACE or DELETE.

      +
    • +
    +

    This view also has a section for patron messages. These are predefined or free-text messages that you can post for specific patrons. The patrons can read and delete them from the PAC patron account.

    +
      +
    • +

      Post a message - Click Add Message by the Message area. The Patron Message dialog box opens, where you can select a Library-assigned message from the drop-down list. The message options are those set in Polaris Administration for the staff member’s log-on branch. Or click Free text , and type a message. When you click OK, the dialog box closes, and the message is added to the Message Text column. The Patron Has Read column indicates whether the patron has marked the message as read in the PAC patron account.

      +
    • +
    • +

      View message properties - Right-click the message in the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialog box lists the creator’s user name, workstation, branch, and the creation date and time. If the message has been modified, the modifier, modification date, and time are listed.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Modify a message - Select the message in the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and click Modify Message. You need the permission Post patron message: Allow to modify messages.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Delete a message or multiple messages - Select them in the Patron Status workform - Notes view, and click Delete Message. You need the permission Delete patron message: Allow to delete messages.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Pay_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Pay_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a50821f --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Pay_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Pay Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Pay Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you select the charge to pay and click pPayIcon00594.gif above the transactions list, or when you click pPayAllIcon00595.gif to pay all charges. See Pay charges from the Account view

    +
      +
    • Amount - If you want to partially pay the selected charge or charges, type the new amount (less than the balance) in the Amount box. If you want to accept an overpayment, type the new amount (more than the balance) in the Amount box.
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If your library allows overpayments to be recorded as account credits, a dialog box appears that alerts you to the overpayment and provides the choice of crediting the account or not. Click Yes to credit the patron’s account. Click No to pay the charge without recording a credit. (Click Cancel if you entered the wrong amount.) If your library does not allow overpayments to be recorded as credits, a message indicates how much change you should give the patron. Click OK on the message box.

    +
      +
    • Method - Select a payment method.
      • Use the method Collection Agency to record a payment that a patron has made directly to a collection agency, as reported by the collection agency.
      • The method Pay from Credit is available only if there is a credited amount on the patron’s account.
      • If your library accepts credit card payments, and the patron wants to pay with a credit card, select Credit card in the method box.
      • Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Refund_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Refund_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..da29eff2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Refund_Credit_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + Refund Credit Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Refund Credit Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you select a credit or credits on the patron’s account and click RefundCreditBtn00604.gif above the transactions list to refund a credit amount. See Refund a credit amount.

    +
      +
    • Amount - Type the amount to refund. If you selected multiple credit transactions, and you specify an amount less than the amount shown in the Balance box, the refund is applied to the oldest transactions first. Each fully-refunded credit transaction will be removed from the Account Transaction list, and recorded in the Transaction History. Any remaining amount is applied to the next oldest credit in the Account Transaction list as a partial refund.
    • +
    • Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/RenewChrgItem.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/RenewChrgItem.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27120196 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/RenewChrgItem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + Renew Chargeable Overdue Item Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Renew Chargeable Overdue Item Dialog Box

    +

    If your library has set the Check Out: Charge Options Patron Services parameter to charge for renewals and prompt the user regarding the charge, the renewal charge appears on the same dialog box as the overdue charge when renewing overdue items. The Renew chargeable overdue item dialog box opens when you renew items (Renew, Renew All, or Special Renew) from the Patron Status workform, Items Out view and when you renew a single item from the Check Out workform. See: Set up charges for checkout and renewal.

    +

    You can select separate actions for the checkout and overdue charges, or you can select the same action for both. For example, you can select Pay for both the checkout and overdue amounts, and the payment amount is totaled at the bottom of the dialog box.

    +

    See also: Renew overdue items - resolve fines and renewal charges

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Return_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Return_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bec1762c --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Return_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Return Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Return Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you select one or more deposits and click pReturnIcon00600.gif above the transactions list to return the deposit(s). See Return, forfeit, or credit deposits.

    +
      +
    • +

      Amount - If you want to partially return a single selected deposit, type the new amount. If you chose to return multiple deposits, you cannot change the number in the Amount box. You must return the entire amount.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Special Item Check-in Dialog Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Special Item Check-in Dialog Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6c47e0ce --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Special Item Check-in Dialog Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + Special Item Check-in Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Special Item Check-in Dialog Box

    +

    The Special Item Check-in dialog box opens when you select Tools, Special Item Check-in on the Check In workform.

    +

    Use the Special Item Check-in dialog box to manage items that have missing parts.

    +

    First, scan the item's barcode in the Barcode box or click Find to search for and select the item.

    +

    Then select one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • Missing part: block and notify - The item's status is updated to Claim Missing Parts and generates a notice to the patron.
    • +
    • Mark item Unavailable - The item's status is updated to Unavailable, which prevents the item from being circulated.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Waive_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Waive_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2bce179d --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/Waive_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Waive Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Waive Dialog Box

    +

    From the Patron Status workform - Account view, this dialog box appears when you select the charge to waive and click pWaiveIcon00597.gif above the transactions list, or when you click pWaiveAllIcon00598.gif to waive all charges. See Waive charges from the Account view.

    +
      +
    • +

      Amount - To partially waive the selected charge or charges, type the new amount in the Amount box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Distributed Waive - Check this box to apply the same waived amount to each of multiple charges. (If the library does not allow distributed waives, this check box is not available for selection.)

      +
    • +
    +

    Note:
    If a specific individual charge is equal to the waive amount, that charge is completely waived. Charges less than the distributed waive amount are not affected.

    +
      +
    • +

      Note - Optional. If you want to add a note about the transaction, type the information in the Note box.

      +
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/addfromfile.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/addfromfile.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97249ef0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRpatron/addfromfile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + Add from File Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Add from File Dialog Box

    +

    To access the Add from File dialog box, select Tools > Add from file from a patron record set.

    +

    Note: +
    When you add patron records to a record set using a file, the patron records already exist in the Polaris database. This process matches the PatronID in the file to the patron record in the Polaris database and adds the record to the record set.

    +

    Use the Add from File dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the file containing the patron IDs - Click Browse to locate the file.
    • +
    • Identify the worksheet and column containing the Polaris Patron ID - Select an option from the drop-down list in the Worksheet/Column containing PatronID box.
    • +
    • Specify where to save the error report - Browse to select the location in the Save to file box.
    • +
    • Add the patron records to the record set - Click Add.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Check_In_Workform1.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Check_In_Workform1.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..55c81497 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Check_In_Workform1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Check In Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Check In Workform

    +

    The Serial Check In workform displays issues or parts in reverse chronological order, but you can sort them by the column headings.

    +

    Note:
    You can use the Acquisitions/Serials parameter Display of Issues on Check In to exclude certain statuses from display in the Check In workform, but they still exist for statistical purposes. See Setting the Check In Display.

    +

    Use the Check In workform to complete the following tasks:

    +
      +
    • Check in an issue or part - Select the issue, and select Tools, Check In. See Check in issues/parts from the Check In workform.
    • +
    • Add an issue or part to the list - Select Tools, Add Issue. See Add irregular serial issues/parts at check-in.
    • +
    • Open an issue in the Serial Issue workform - Right-click the issue, and select Open from the context menu.
    • +
    • Open a part in the Serial Part workform - Right-click the part, and select Open from the context menu.
    • +
    • Sort issues or parts by their status date - Click the Status Date column header.
    • +
    • Sort issues or parts by their designation - Click the Designation column header.
    • +
    • Sort issues by type of issue (Basic Bib, Supplement and Index) - Click the Category column header.
    • +
    • Sort issues by their expected arrival date - Click the Expected column header.
    • +
    • Open the serial holdings record for the serial title of the listed issues or parts - Right-click the issue or part, and select Links, Existing, Serial Holdings Record.
    • +
    • Enter notes regarding the serials title - Type notes in the Non-public and Non-public/warning fields regarding publication pattern changes, problems with an issue or part or other notes for staff.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Bibliographic_Record_from_Standing_Order_Part_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Bibliographic_Record_from_Standing_Order_Part_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..48e7c1fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Bibliographic_Record_from_Standing_Order_Part_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Create Bibliographic Record from Standing Order Part Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Bibliographic Record from Standing Order Part Dialog Box

    +

    The Create Bibliographic Record from Standing Order Part dialog box appears when you check in a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. part. Use the Create Bibliographic Record from Standing Order Part dialog box to create a new bibliographic record for the standing order part. Enter the following information:

    +
      +
    • Display in PAC - If selected, the bibliographic record displays in the public access catalog.
    • +
    • Author - The author of the title in the bibliographic record.
    • +
    • ISBN - The ISBN of the title in the bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Publication date - The publication date of the title in the bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Publisher - The publisher of the title in the bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Series Title - The title of the series to which this bibliographic record belongs.
    • +
    • Series No. - The bibliographic number of the series to which this bibliographic record belongs.
    • +
    • Title - The title of the specific bibliographic record for the standing order part.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Publication_Pattern_-_Pattern_Options_Window.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Publication_Pattern_-_Pattern_Options_Window.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c9a5c60 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Create_Publication_Pattern_-_Pattern_Options_Window.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + + + Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options Window + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options Window

    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options window appears when you click new_doc_icon.gif on the Serial Holdings Record toolbar under Publication Patterns. See Specify the publication pattern for a serial title.

    +

    Use the Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options window to:

    +
      +
    • Select a template to specify the prediction pattern - Using a publication pattern template greatly reduces the amount of data entry to predict serial issues accurately. See Use a template to create a publication pattern.
    • +
    • Specify the category of the serial - Select the serial category from the Category list.
    • +
    • Specify the pattern’s duration - Type or select a date in the Start date and End date boxes. +
    • +
    • Specify the arrival pattern - Type the number of days, and then select before or after publication.
    • +
    • Generate item records when issues/parts are checked in - If you want to generate item records, select the Generate item records on check-in box, and if you want to be prompted to scan the barcode of the item when it is checked in, select Prompt for barcode on check-in.
    • +
    • Indicate the price of the items created from the issues - Type the price in the Unit price box. When items are created from checked in issues, they will contain the price indicated.
    • +
    • Indicate the type of supplement or index - If the item is a supplement or index, enter the type in the Type of supplement/index box.
    • +
    • Indicate how many issues you want to predict - Type the number of issues in the Number of issues to predict box.
    • +
    • Enter the textual holdings information - Type the information in the Textual holdings box if more information is needed to adequately describe the holdings.
    • +
    • Enter a public note - Type a public note in the Public Note box.
    • +
    • Enter a non-public note - Type a note for library staff only in the Non-public note box.
    • +
    +

    Create Publication Pattern - Enumeration Chronology Window

    +

    The Create Publication Pattern - Pattern Options window appears when you click the new icon new_doc_icon00696.gif on the Serial Holdings Record toolbar under Publication Patterns. Click Next to move from the Pattern Options view to the Enumeration and Chronology view. See Establish chronology and enumeration.

    +

    Use the Create Publication Pattern window - Enumeration and Chronology view to:

    + +

    Create Publication Pattern - Regularity Pattern Window

    +

    The Create Publication Pattern window appears when you click the new icon new_doc_icon00697.gif on the Serial Holdings Record toolbar under Publication Patterns. Click Next to move from the Publication Enumeration and Chronology view to the Publication Regularity view.

    +

    In MARC format for holdings, subfield $y contains codes that describe the regularity of the publishing pattern code in subfield $w (Frequency). The subfield may be structured in two ways using either chronology of enumeration values. Both types begin with a publication code.

    +

    Note:
    See Set up the serial publication pattern regularity.

    +

    Use the Create Publication Pattern window - Regularity Pattern view to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the regularity pattern -
    • +
    • Select the publication code in the Publication code box. This is the first one-character code in both the chronology and enumeration types and indicates whether the chronology or enumeration type is combined, omitted or published.
    • +
    • Select the calendar unit in the Calendar unit box. This indicates that serial’s publication pattern is by Year (yyyy), Month (MM), Season (SS), Week of year (ww), Week of month (WW), Day of month (DD), or Day of week (dd).
    • +
    • Enter data in the From and To boxes as follows:
    • +
    +

    Day of week (d): mo, tu, we, th, fr, sa, su.
    Day of month (d): 01-31
    Month (m): 01-12
    Season (s): 21 (spring), 22 (summer), 23 (autumn), 24 (winter)
    Week of year (w): 01-53
    Week of month (w): 99 (last), 98 (next to last), 97 (third to last), 00 (every), 01 (first), 02 (second), 03 (third), 04 (fourth), 05 (fifth).
    Year (y): yyyy (four digits)

    +
      +
    • +

      Click Add to add the regularity pattern you specified to the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Indicate a calendar change - Select the change from the Calendar change box. This field is enabled only if an enumeration is specified. It indicates that the calendar change is for Month (MM), Season (SS), or Month and day (MMDD).

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add the regularity pattern - Click Add to add the regularity pattern to the list.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove the regularity pattern - Select a regularity pattern from the list and click Remove.

      +
    • +
    +

    Create Publication Pattern - Prediction Results Window

    +

    The Create Publication Pattern window appears when you click the new icon new_doc_icon00698.gif on the Serial Holdings Record toolbar under Publication Patterns. Click Next to move from the Pattern Regularity view to the Prediction Results view. See Review a publication pattern’s prediction.

    +

    Use the Create Publication Pattern window - Prediction Results view to:

    +
      +
    • View the predicted issues based on the pattern you set up - The issues are listed on the left. The start date and end date of the issues, along with the first issue’s designation, appear to the right of the predicted issues.
    • +
    • Remove unwanted issues - Select the issues that come before the issues you want to generate, right-click and select Remove. If you used a publication pattern template with a start date before your first issue, there may be many issues to remove. Multi-select the issues by selecting the first issue to remove, holding down the Shift key and clicking on the last issue you want to remove. Then, right-click and select Remove.
    • +
    • Indicate if you want to save the pattern as a template - Select the Save as template box if you want to save the pattern as a template that you can use to predict issues for other serials titles, and type the name of the template in the Template name box.
    • +
    • Predict more issues - Click View More. The issues that appear in the Prediction Results list are the ones that will be generated when you click Finish.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Expenditure_Prediction_Percentage_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Expenditure_Prediction_Percentage_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1173a787 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Expenditure_Prediction_Percentage_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Expenditure Prediction Percentage Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Expenditure Prediction Percentage Dialog Box

    +

    The Expenditure Prediction Percentage dialog box appears when you select File, Print, Subscription Expenditure Prediction from the Subscription workform. Use the Expenditure Prediction dialog box to enter the percentage amount by which the subscription is expected to increase when it is renewed. The Subscription Expenditure Prediction report calculates the amount to pay for the next subscription of this serial title.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/New_Route_List_Member_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/New_Route_List_Member_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..036a26fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/New_Route_List_Member_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + New Route List Member Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    New Route List Member Dialog Box

    +

    The New Route List Member dialog box appears when you click PRserials00705.gif in the Members frame on the Route List workform - General view. Use the New Route List Member dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the member you want to add to the route list - Search for and select a patron to add to the route list using the Find Tool. Type the name of a staff member or any person, other than a patron, who you want to add to the route list.
    • +
    • Include notes regarding routing to this member - Type the notes in the Notes box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Print_Route_Slip_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Print_Route_Slip_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e1ea76d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Print_Route_Slip_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + Print Route Slip Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Print Route Slip Dialog Box

    +

    The Print Route Slip dialog box appears when you click PrinterIcon00706.gif on the Route List tool bar or when you right click the piece, and select Print from the context menu. Use the Print Route List dialog box to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the return date for the routed piece - Select the return date in the Return Date box.
    • +
    • Indicate if you want the status of the piece to be updated to routed - Select the Update status to routed box.
    • +
    • Include return instructions on the route slip - Type return instructions in the Return instructions box.
    • +
    • Include a header on the route slip - Type the text you want to appear in the route slip header in the Header box.
    • +
    • Include a footer on the route slip - Type the text you want to appear in the route slip footer in the Footer box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Publication_Pattern_Template_Manager.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Publication_Pattern_Template_Manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e9bd3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Publication_Pattern_Template_Manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + Publication Pattern Template Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Publication Pattern Template Manager

    +

    Use the Publication Pattern Template Manager to view existing publication pattern templates. This list can be filtered to only show the publication patterns for a specific creator or publication frequency. You can also create new publication pattern templates or open and edit existing publication patterns from the Publication Pattern Template Manager.

    +

    Use the Publication Pattern Template Manager to:

    +
      +
    • Show publication patterns created by a specific individual - Select a name in the Creator box.
    • +
    • Show publication patterns created for a specific publication frequency - Select an entry in the Frequency box.
    • +
    • Sort the list - Click a column heading to sort the list.
    • +
    • Edit an existing publication pattern - Select a publication pattern in the list, and click openfileicon00699.gif, or right click and select Open. The Modify Publication Pattern Template - Enumeration and Chronology window appears. Click Next to go to the Modify Publication Pattern Template - Regularity Pattern window. Click Next to go to the Modify Publication Pattern Template - Prediction Results window. See Edit a publication pattern template.
    • +
    • Create a new publication pattern template - Select File | New, or click newtempl.gif. See Creating Publication Pattern Templates.
    • +
    +

    Related Information

    + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24a571d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Purchase_Order_Line_Item_Segments_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + + Purchase Order Line Item Segments Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Purchase Order Line Item Segments Dialog Box

    +

    The Purchase Order Line Item Segments dialog box appears when you click the Find button on the Order view of a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. Serial Holdings Record, and there are more than one purchase order line item segments that can be linked to the standing order copy. It lists the standing order purchase order line item segments to which the copy can be linked. Double-click a purchase order line item segment to link it to the standing order. See Enter order data for a serial holdings record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Reopen_Subscription_Dialog_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Reopen_Subscription_Dialog_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59beb2e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Reopen_Subscription_Dialog_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Reopen Subscription Dialog Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Reopen Subscription Dialog Box

    +

    The Reopen Subscription dialog box appears when you select Tools, Reopen from the Subscription workform for a cancelled subscription. When you reopen a subscription, you have the option to update linked holdings records to a status you select.

    +

    Use the Reopen Subscription Dialog Box to:

    +
      +
    • Update linked holdings records - Select this check box to update the linked holdings records, and then choose a status.
    • +
    • Select a status to assign to the linked serial holdings records. 
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Route_List_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Route_List_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6264f7d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Route_List_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + + Route List Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Route List Workform

    +

    Use the Route List workform to:

    +
      +
    • Name the route list - Type a name in the Name box.
    • +
    • Indicate the library that owns the route list - Select the library in the Owner box.
    • +
    • Add the members and the issues to be routed - Click genvwgreen00703.gif or select View, General if you are on the Route Slip view.   
    • +
    • Set up the route slip - Click routeslipvw.gifor select View, Route Slip.
    • +
    • Edit a member’s note - If there is a note next to the member’s name, you can edit it by double-clicking on it.
    • +
    +

    Route List Workform - General View

    +

    Use the General view on the Route List workform to:

    +
      +
    • Select the people on the route list - Click addmemissue.gif. The New Route List Member dialog box appears. Click Find to locate a person registered as a patron in Polaris, or type their name in the Route to box. If you want to enter a note regarding this member, type it in the Notes box.
    • +
    • Select the publications to be routed - Click addmemissue00704.gif. The Find Tool appears. Search for and select the serials title to be routed. See f.
    • +
    +

    Route List Workform - Route Slip View

    +

    Use the Route Slip view to:

    +
      +
    • Specify the time period for which the piece is to be routed - Type the number and select days or weeks in the Route Period boxes.
    • +
    • Specify where the piece is to be returned after routing - Select the library in the Home Location box.
    • +
    • Include return instructions on the route slip - Type the instructions in the Return Instructions box.
    • +
    • Include a header and/or footer on the route slip - Type the information  in the Header and Footer boxes.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Holdings_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Holdings_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f075d3b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Holdings_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serial Holdings Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serial Holdings Record Workform

    +

    Use the Serial Holdings Record workform to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Add the serial holdings record to a route list - Select Tools, Add to Route List.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Add the serial holdings record to a subscription record - Select Tools, Add to Subscription Record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Remove the serial holdings record from a subscription record - Select Tools, Remove from Subscription Record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display the General view - Click GenvwSHR.gif or select View, General.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display the Staff Notes view - Click notesvwSHR.gif or select View, Staff Notes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display the Public Notes view - Click pubnotesicon.gif or select View, Public Notes

      +
    • +
    • +

      Display the Orders view - Click OrdersvwSHR.gif or select View, Orders.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to other records - Select Links and select the type of record you want to open.

      +
    • +
    +

    Serial Holdings Record Workform - General View

    +

    Use the Serial Holdings Record workform - General view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Create a new serial holdings record - On a blank Serial Holdings Record workform, click Find, and search for a serials title. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Select the order type - Select either Subscription or Standing Order.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify where this copy of the serial title is kept - Select the library in the Destination box and the collection in the Collection box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the format of the serial holding - Select an option in the Material type box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the status of the serial holding - Select an option in the Status box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter a copy number - Type a number in the Copy no. box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter the holdings information in the following fields:

      +
        +
      • +

        The Call number and Shelving scheme indicate where the title can be found.

        +
      • +
      • +

        The Completeness Code indicates how much of the item is held by the library or branch.

        +
      • +
      • +

        The Retention designator indicates the period for which the parts of a serial or multi-part item are retained in the library.

        +
      • +
      +
    • +
    +

    If you select Retained for a limited period, select Latest retained or Previous retained and the number of editions, issues, months, supplements, weeks or years of this serial title to retain. If you select Latest retained, the latest publications are retained, including the current one. If you select Previous retained, the previous publications, not including the current ones, are retained.

    +
      +
    • +

      Check the Display in PAC box if you want the serials title to display in the public access catalog. The display also depends on the retention information you entered. If you leave the box unchecked, no serial issues will display for the title (unless there are linked item records that are set to display). If it is checked, the checked in issues display according to the retention information. See Displaying Serial Titles in the PAC.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Use a publication pattern template - See Use a template to create a publication pattern.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Create a publication pattern - Click newicon.gif. See Specify the publication pattern for a serial title.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Edit a publication pattern - Select a pattern and click editpaticon.gif. See Modify a publication pattern.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Open a publication pattern - Select a pattern and click openfileicon.gif or double-click a publication pattern.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Print the list of publication patterns - Click PrinterIcon.gif.

      +
    • +
    +

    Serial Holdings Record Workform - Staff Notes View

    +

    Use the Serial Holdings Record workform, Staff Notes view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      Indicate that the subscription is included in a membership to a professional organization - Select Membership, type the organization’s name, and the member’s name.

      +
    • +
    • +

      If the subscription is for an online subscription, enter the electronic information - In the Electronic Access box, type a Listserv, URL, or e-mail address used to manage online electronic journal subscriptions or standing orders.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Enter non-public notes - In the Non-public notes field, enter a free-text note regarding special processing that may be required for a title. If you want special attention given to this title, enter a note in the Non-public/Warning box. The non-public notes appear on the Check In workform.

      +
    • +
    +

     See Enter staff notes for a serial holdings record.

    +

    Serial Holdings Record Workform - Public Notes View

    +

    Use the Serial Holdings Record workform, Public Notes view to:

    +

    Enter notes that display in the Polaris PowerPAC - Type up to 4,000 characters in the Shared public note box. Enter line breaks where you want the text to break in the Polaris PowerPAC.

    +

    See Enter public notes for a serial holdings record.

    +

    Serial Holdings Record Workform - Orders View

    +

    Use the Serial Holdings Record workform - Orders view to:

    +
      +
    • +

      View the subscription status - The Subscription status indicates the status of the subscription, for example Canceled. Assigning “Not currently received” as a status disables automatic prediction for this serial holdings record.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Identify the supplier of this copy - Click Find under Supplier.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the subscription start and duration information - Use the Start Number, Start Date and Expiration date, and Intent to cancel date boxes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Identify the ordering library of the copy - Select the library in the Ordered at box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Specify the plan associated with the subscription or standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher. - Use the Plan and Description boxes.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Link to the purchase order for the standing order - Click PO. no. Find, and select the purchase order line item.

      +
    • +
    +

    The supplier’s name and SAN are filled in, and the claiming information for the basic bibliographic unit (BBU) appears in the bottom right-hand corner of the workform. Up to five claiming intervals can be defined in the Supplier record for the basic bibliographic unit. You can define more claiming intervals for the basic bibliographic unit or enter claiming data for the serial title’s index or supplement in the Serial Holdings record.

    +
      +
    • +

      Enter the supplier’s subscription number for claiming - Under Claim Setup, type the supplier’s identification number for the subscription in the Subscription ID box. This number is printed on the claim notices.

      +
    • +
    +

    When you link to the supplier record, the claiming intervals are added to the serial holdings records, but you can add more claims.

    +
      +
    • +

      Add claiming data -Click Add if you want to add more claims to the claiming data from the supplier record.

      +
    • +
    +

    The Add Claim Interval dialog box appears.

    +
      +
    • +

      Select the type of publication in the Category box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Type the number of days between the last claim and the next claim in the Interval box.

      +
    • +
    • +

      Click OK.

      +
    • +
    +

    See Enter order data for a serial holdings record.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issue_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issue_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..162d29a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issue_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Serial Issue Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serial Issue Workform

    +

    Use the Serial Issue workform to:

    +
      +
    • Create an item record - Select Tools, Create Item Record.
    • +
    • Check in the issue - Select Tools, Check in or click checkinbutserials.gif. See Check in from the Issue/Standing Order Part.
    • +
    • Uncheck in the issue that was checked in - Select Tools, Uncheck In.
    • +
    • Add the issue to a route list - Select Tools, Add to route list. Create a route list.
    • +
    • Claim the issue - Select Tools, Claim. See Claiming in Serials.
    • +
    • Print a single label - Click singlelab.gif or select File, Request Label, Single Label.
    • +
    • Print multiple labels - Click multlab.gif or select File, Request Label, Multi- label.
    • +
    • Enter or change the issue’s designation and other information - Click genvwgreen00700.gif or View, General.
    • +
    • Enter or change notes regarding the issue - Click notesvwSHR00701.gif or View, Notes.
    • +
    • View or enter claiming information - Click claimvw.gif or select View, Claim.
    • +
    +

    Serial Issue Workform - General View

    +

    Use the Serial Issue workform - General view to:

    + +

    Note:
    The read-only Chronology date in the Issue or Part workform is the internal chronology date Polaris uses to display the issue or part in the correct order in the PAC. The chronology date always displays as MM/DD/YYYY format, whether or not all three levels of chronology are defined in the publication pattern. The chronology date uses the year selected in the first level of chronology if it is selected, or the current year if the year is not selected. If the month and day are not defined, the chronology date uses the month and day from the publication pattern's start date.

    +
      +
    • Enter the expected arrival date of the issue - Type the date in Expected Arrival Date box, or select the date from the calendar icon.
    • +
    • Enter or change the issue’s price - Type the price in the Issue unit price box.
    • +
    • Specify the type of issue - Use the Type box and Title of box. The Type box indicates the type of issue: basic bibliographic unit, index, or supplement. If you select Index or Supplement, type the title of the index or supplemental issue in the Title of box.
    • +
    +

    Serial Issue Workform - Notes View

    +

    Use the Notes view on the Serial Issue workform to:

    +
      +
    • Enter or change the staff notes for the issue - Use the Non-Public box or the Non-Public/Warning box.
    • +
    • Specify or change the public notes for the issue - Use the Notes Public box to enter a free-text note intended for public display. This note is copied to the item record if the item record is generated at check in.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issues_List_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issues_List_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a467d49a --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serial_Issues_List_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Serial Issues List Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serial Issues List Box

    +

    The Serial Issues list box appears when you select Links, Issues/Parts from the Serial Holdings Record for a subscription. Use the Serial Issues list box to do the following:

    +
      +
    • Sort the issues - Click a column heading.
    • +
    • Perform actions on an issue or issues in the list box - Select one or more issues, right-click and select an option from the context menu. For example, you can check in an expected issue from the list box.
    • +
    • Link to other records - Select an issue, select Links from the context menu, and select the type of record. The record’s workform opens.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serials_Workforms.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serials_Workforms.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f63dd655 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Serials_Workforms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + Serials Workforms + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Serials UI Reference

    +

    In the Contents list for online Help, click the plus sign by Serials UI Reference, then click a subtopic link to see more information about how to use a specific workform or dialog box.

    +

    Tip:
    The same information is available when you click Help icon, click Help, or press F1 on most workforms and dialog boxes.

    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_List_Box.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_List_Box.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d3c9510 --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_List_Box.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + Standing Order Part List Box + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Standing Order Part List Box

    +

    The Standing Order Part list box appears when you select Links, Issues/Parts from the Serial Holdings Record for a standing order An order placed with a vendor or the publisher directly for all publications in a series, all volumes in a set, or all publications of a single publisher.. Use the Serial Issues list box to do the following:

    +
      +
    • Sort the parts - Click a column heading.
    • +
    • Perform actions on a part or parts in the list box - Select one or more parts, right-click and select an option from the context menu. For example, you can check in an expected part from the list box.
    • +
    • Link to other records - Select a standing order part, select Links from the context menu, and select the type of record. The record’s workform opens.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4dd2678e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Standing_Order_Part_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + + Standing Order Part Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Standing Order Part Workform

    +

    Use the Standing Order Part workform to:

    +
      +
    • Add a bibliographic record - Select Tools, Add Bibliographic record.
    • +
    • Check in the part - Select Tools, Check In. See Uncheck in issues or standing order parts.
    • +
    • View or enter claiming information - Click claimvw00702.gif or select View, Claim.
    • +
    +

    Standing Order Part Workform - General View

    +

    Use the Standing Order Part workform - General view to:

    + +

    Standing Order Part Workform - Notes View

    +

    The Standing Order Part workform - Notes view appears when you select View, Notes from the menu bar. Use the Notes view on the Standing Order Part workform to:

    +
      +
    • Enter staff notes for the part - Use the Non-Public box or Non-Public/Warning box.
    • +
    • Enter notes intended for public display - Use the Notes Public box.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_List_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_List_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3478b0e --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_List_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + Subscription List Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Subscription List Workform

    +

    The Subscription List workform appears when you select Serials, Subscription List from the Polaris Shortcut Bar. See Managing Subscriptions.

    +

    Use the Subscription List workform to:

    +
      +
    • View a specific library’s subscriptions to periodicals - Select the library or libraries for which you want to view subscriptions in the Owner box.
    • +
    • View subscriptions by supplier - Select the supplier or suppliers for which you want to view the subscriptions. See View the Subscription List.
    • +
    • Renew subscriptions - Select Tools, Renew. See Renew subscriptions from Subscription List.
    • +
    • Cancel a subscription - Right-click a subscription, and select Cancel.
    • +
    • Show subscriptions owned by selected libraries - Select one or more owners from the list to filter the subscriptions.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_Record_Workform.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_Record_Workform.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..566a2f8b --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/UI_Ref/PRserials/Subscription_Record_Workform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + + Subscription Record Workform + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Subscription Record Workform

    +

    You can create a new subscription record, search for an existing subscription record, or link to a subscription record from the Subscription Check In workform, the Serial Holdings workform, and the Purchase Order Line Item workform if the links have already been established. See Create a subscription record.

    +

    Use the Subscription Record workform to:

    +
      +
    • Add the subscription title information - Click Find to open the Find Tool. Search for and select the serials title for the subscription. The title, ISSN, status and bibliographic control number are filled in automatically.
    • +
    • Renew the subscription automatically - Select Automatic Renewal.
    • +
    • Indicate the organization that owns the subscription - Select the branch or library in the Owner box.
    • +
    • Print reports - Select File, Print and select Subscription Cost Analysis, or Subscription Expenditure Prediction.
    • +
    • Enter supplier and subscription information - Click genvwgreen.gif or select View, General.
    • +
    • Enter serial holdings information - Click shrvw.gif or select View, Serial Holdings.
    • +
    +

    Subscription Record Workform - General View

    +

    Use the Subscription Record workform - General view to:

    +
      +
    • Select the subscription supplier - Click Find in the Supplier frame. The supplier information is filled in.
    • +
    • Indicate if the subscription is part of a membership - Select the Membership box if the subscription is part of a professional membership.
    • +
    • Specify the subscription period - Select or type the dates for the subscription start date, termination date, and expiration date.
    • +
    • Specify the payment information -
    • +
    • Select the payment method in the Method box.
    • +
    • Select the fund in the Fund box.
    • +
    • Type the subscription price in the Price box.
    • +
    • Specify renewal instructions for the subscription - Type renewal instructions.
    • +
    • Include notes related to the subscription - Type any notes related to the subscription.
    • +
    +

    Subscription Record Workform - Serial Holdings View

    +

    Use the Subscription Record workform - Serial Holdings view to:

    +
      +
    • Renew a subscription - Select Tools, Renew.
    • +
    • Cancel a subscription - Select Tools, Cancel.
    • +
    • View the list of holdings records linked to this subscription.
    • +
    • Add a serial holdings record to this subscription - Click AddMembt.gif to open the Find Tool. Search for and select the serial holdings record you want to add to the subscription record.
    • +
    +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Welcome_page.htm b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Welcome_page.htm new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f0e88ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Staff Client Online Help/v7.0 - Staff Client Help/PolarisStaffHelp/Welcome_page.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + Welcome to the Polaris Staff Client Online Help + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +
    +

    Welcome to the Polaris Staff Client Online Help

    +

    The Polaris staff client online help is your guide to using the Polaris ILS and is divided into sections available on the left navigation. Select the topic to display detailed topics related to that subject.

    +

    If you are new to the Polaris staff client, you may want to start with Polaris Basics, then move to specific areas of the application to complete your work.

    + + + + +
    +
    + + + + + + + + + +
    Polaris Version 7.0 © 2021 Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + + + + + + +
     Send documentation feedback to Innovative Interfaces, Inc.
    + + \ No newline at end of file